The Pali Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Edited by: T.W. Rhys Davids and William Stede For Free Distribution Only. Not to be Sold. Text from: www.buddhistboards.com Set in: Gentium Book Basic; a free unicode font. Download at: http://scripts.sil.org. A Ā I Ī U Ū E O K Kh G Gh C Ch J Jh Ñ Ṭ Ṭh Ḍ T Th D Dh N P Ph B Bh M Y R L Ḷ V S H Pāli Text Society 1 Pāli-English Dictionary Electronic Edition Notes This Dictionary is a close copy of the PTS Pali-English Dictionary first Published 1921-1925 and reprinted 1999.. This version contains all the errata as stipulated in the 1999 reprint from pages XIII to XV under the title of “C. Additions and Corrections.”. Formatting Errors This dictionary contains multiple formatting errors as a result of the conversion from the online text to a PDF. The main errors deal with notations and references: Eg. “Onamati {Onamati} [o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D II. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); III.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.). - pp. oṇata.” The “Vv 393” above should read Vv 393. In other words, many references may read incorrectly due to the superscript being replaced by normal script. To remedy this throughout this document would take a long time, so just experiment by assuming the last few numbers may be superscript (especially when dealing with an unlikely page number like “3423”, which should read “3423” (page 34, verse 23). The same possible error in formatting should also be assumed for other notations. Another area prone to formatting problems is the display of Greek words. The Greek characters are mixed up and usually incomprehensible. They usually manifest as long romanized text strings with randonmly placed brackets. To hunt through and correct all of these would indeed take a long time, especially when one looks at the original PTS Dictionary and notices how small the Greek words are in print and hence very difficult to decipher. For those interested in the Greek origins, I suggest buying the original text from the PTS. Search Tips This Dictionary has been designed to facilitate a search without the need for diacritical marks. A search nonetheless can be done with diacritical marks for greater accuracy. Dictionary Entry Search Place curly brackets around the word you wish to find: Eg. To find Aḍḍhatā , type in the search field {Addhata}, including the curly brackets to define the search word. 2 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary One can also search by Cutting and Pasting from another document (including diacritical marks) When using Cut & Paste, there is no need for brackets IF the diacritical marks are successfully pasted along with the word. General Word Search If you are not after a dictionary entry, but just want to find any instance of a word, then you can simply type the word in the search field with, or without, diacritical marks: Eg. To find “Addhata” or “Aḍḍhatā” within the dictionary, just type in either normal Romanised text:“Addhata” or with diacritical marks: “Aḍḍhatā”. NOTE: The curly brackets {...} are not used for a general word search. Searching works with the assistance of an extra copy of the dictionary entry placed alongside the original Palī word (minus the diacritical marks). These search words are in italics and smaller font. All dictionary entries begin with a capital letter. This means you can sift out entries within the dictionary that are not the main entry by using lowercase: Eg. “samadhi” instead of “Samadhi”. Some entries have a hyphen inbetween two words: Eg. Sikāyasa-maya {Sikayasamaya} (adj.) [made of tempered steel... In order to search for this, the search word has had the hyphen removed to make it one full word ie. “{Sikayasamaya}”. So when searching for words, please try the word as a whole, or you can try to place a hyphen inbetween two words to help your search. A partial word search can also be helpful: Eg. “Sikayasa” instead of “Sikayasamaya”. New PTS Dictionary The original text for this dictionary came from buddhistboards.com and the text has been reformated to support search capabilities. This document is NOT a PTS production, nor is this document to be used for commercial purposes or sold. As such, this dictionary contains many more pages than the original book due to the style of formatting, and would generally be a waste of time (and expensive) in terms of printing out. The PTS, through Margaret Cone, have produced (and are producing) another Dictionary which is more comprehensive than this early work. The PTS/Cone edition is called “A Pāli Text Society 3 Pāli-English Dictionary DICTIONARY OF PĀLI” and the first volume including words from (a-kh) was published in 2001. The rest of the dictionary will be published in due course by the Pali Text Society. Table of Contents Electronic Edition Notes ....................................................................................................................... 1 Formatting Errors.............................................................................................................................. 1 Search Tips ......................................................................................................................................... 1 Dictionary Entry Search ............................................................................................................... 1 General Word Search .................................................................................................................... 2 New PTS Dictionary ........................................................................................................................... 2 Foreword ................................................................................................................................................. 5 A ........................................................................................................................................................... 9 Ā ....................................................................................................................................................... 228 I ........................................................................................................................................................ 286 Ī ........................................................................................................................................................ 299 U....................................................................................................................................................... 301 Ū....................................................................................................................................................... 385 E ....................................................................................................................................................... 388 O ....................................................................................................................................................... 395 K ....................................................................................................................................................... 420 Kh..................................................................................................................................................... 538 G ....................................................................................................................................................... 557 Gh..................................................................................................................................................... 592 C ....................................................................................................................................................... 598 Ch ..................................................................................................................................................... 630 Pāli Text Society 4 Pāli-English Dictionary J ........................................................................................................................................................ 638 Jh ...................................................................................................................................................... 659 Ñ....................................................................................................................................................... 662 Ṭ ....................................................................................................................................................... 665 Ṭh ..................................................................................................................................................... 666 Ḍ ....................................................................................................................................................... 670 T ....................................................................................................................................................... 671 Th ..................................................................................................................................................... 705 D ....................................................................................................................................................... 713 Dh..................................................................................................................................................... 762 N....................................................................................................................................................... 782 P ....................................................................................................................................................... 862 Ph ................................................................................................................................................... 1084 B ..................................................................................................................................................... 1095 Bh ................................................................................................................................................... 1125 M .................................................................................................................................................... 1159 Y ..................................................................................................................................................... 1227 R ..................................................................................................................................................... 1260 L ..................................................................................................................................................... 1296 Ḷ ..................................................................................................................................................... 1322 V..................................................................................................................................................... 1323 S ..................................................................................................................................................... 1472 H..................................................................................................................................................... 1643 Afterword.......................................................................................................................................... 1658 Dictionary Work .......................................................................................................................... 1658 Pāli Text Society 5 Pāli-English Dictionary History Of The Dictionary Scheme ............................................................................................ 1659 My Material .................................................................................................................................. 1659 How To Judge The Dictionary .................................................................................................... 1660 Issues Involved In The Pāli Dictionary...................................................................................... 1661 Conclusion .................................................................................................................................... 1663 The Pāli Alphabet............................................................................................................................. 1664 Chief Books Consulted For Vocabulary ......................................................................................... 1665 1. Pali Books. ................................................................................................................................ 1665 1a Canonical. ............................................................................................................................ 1665 1b Post-Canonical. ................................................................................................................... 1665 Buddhist Sanskrit ........................................................................................................................ 1666 Translations ................................................................................................................................. 1666 Grammatical & Other Literature; Periodicals, Etc. .................................................................. 1667 List Of Abbreviations. ...................................................................................................................... 1668 1. Titles Of Books (the no. refers to section of A). ................................................................... 1668 2. General & Grammatical Terms............................................................................................... 1669 Typographical. ............................................................................................................................. 1670 Foreword It is somewhat hard to realize, seeing how important and valuable the work has been, that when ROBERT CAESAR CHILDERS published, in 1872, the first volume of his Pali Dictionary, he only had at his command a few pages of the canonical Pali books. Since then, owing mainly to the persistent labours of the Pali Text Society, practically the whole of these books, amounting to between ten and twelve thousand pages, have been made available to scholars. These books had no authors. They are anthologies which gradually grew up in the community. Their composition, as to the Vinaya and the four Nikāyas (with the possible exception of the supplements) was complete within about a century of the Buddha's death; and the rest belong to the following century. When scholars have leisure to collect and study the data to be found in this pre-Sanskrit literature, it will necessarily throw as much Pāli Text Society 6 Pāli-English Dictionary light on the history of ideas and language as the study of such names and places as are mentioned in it (quite incidentally) has already thrown upon the political divisions, social customs, and economic conditions of ancient India. Some of these latter facts I have endeavoured to collect in my „Buddhist India‟; and perhaps the most salient discovery is the quite unexpected conclusion that, for about two centuries (both before the Buddha's birth and after his death), the paramount power in India was Kosala - a kingdom stretching from Nepal on the North to the Ganges on the South, and from the Ganges on the West to the territories of the Vajjian confederacy on the East. In this, the most powerful kingdom in India; there had naturally arisen a standard vernacular differing from the local forms of speech just as standard English differs from the local (usually county) dialects. The Pali of the canonical books is based on that standard Kosala vernacular as spoken in the 6th and 7th centuries B. C. It cannot be called the „literary‟ form of that vernacular, for it was not written at all till long afterwards. That vernacular was the mother tongue of the Buddha. He was born in what is now Nepal, but was then a district under the suzerainty of Kosala and in one of the earliest Pali documents he is represented as calling himself a Kosalan. When, about a thousand years afterwards, some pandits in Ceylon began to write in Pali, they wrote in a style strikingly different from that of the old texts. Part of that difference is no doubt due simply to a greater power of fluent expression unhampered by the necessity of constantly considering that the words composed had to be learnt by heart. When the Sinhalese used Pali, they were so familiar with the method of writing on palmleaves that the question of memorizing simply did not arise. It came up again later. But none of the works belonging to this period were intended to be learnt. They were intended to be read. On the other hand they were for the most part reproductions of older material that had, till then, been preserved in Sinhalese. Though the Sinhalese pandits were writing in Pali, to them, of course, a dead language, they probably did their thinking in their own mother tongue. Now they had had then, for many generations, so close and intimate an intercourse with their Dravidian neighbours that Dravidian habits of speech had crept into Sinhalese. It was inevitable that some of the peculiarities of their own tongue, and especially these Dravidanisms, should have influenced their style when they wrote in Pali. It will be for future scholars to ascertain exactly how far this influence can be traced in the idioms and in the order of the arrangement of the matter of these Ceylon Pali books of the fifth and sixth centuries A. D. There is no evidence that the Sinhalese at that time knew Sanskrit. Some centuries afterwards a few of them learnt the elements of classical Sanskrit and very proud they were of it. They introduced the Sanskrit forms of Sinhalese words when writing „high‟ Sinhalese. And the authors of such works as the Dāṭhāvaṃsa, the Saddhammopāyana, and the Mahābodhivaṃsa, make use of Pali words derived from Sanskrit - that is, they turned into Pali form certain Sanskrit words they found either in the Amarakoṣa, or in the course of their very limited reading, and used them as Pali. It would be very desirable to have a list of such Pali words thus derived from Sanskrit. It would not be a long one. Here we come once more to the question of memory. From the 11th cent. onwards it became a sort of fashion to write manuals in verse, or in prose and verse, on such subjects as it was deemed expedient for novices to know. Just as the first book written in Pali in Ceylon was a chain of memoriter verses strung together by very indifferent Pali verses, so at the end we have these scarcely intelligible memoriter verses meant to be learned by heart by the pupils. According to the traditions handed down among the Sinhalese, Pali, that is, the language used in the texts, could also be called Māgadhī. What exactly did they mean by that? They could not be referring to the Māgadhī of the Prakrit grammarians, for the latter wrote some centuries afterwards. Could they have meant the dialect spoken in Magadha at the date when they used the phrase, say, the sixth Pāli Text Society 7 Pāli-English Dictionary century A. D.? That could only be if they had any exact knowledge of the different vernaculars of North India at the time. For that there is no evidence, and it is in itself very improbable. What they did mean is probably simply the language used by Asoka, the king of Magadha. For their traditions also stated that the texts had been brought to them officially by Asoka's son Mahinda; and not in writing, but in the memory of Mahinda and his companions. Now we know something of the language of Asoka. We have his edicts engraved in different parts of India, differing slightly in compliance with local varieties of speech. Disregarding these local differences, what is left may be considered the language of head-quarters where these edicts were certainly drafted. This „Māgadhī‟ contains none of the peculiar characteristics we associate with the Māgadhī dialect. It is in fact a younger form of that standard Kosalan lingua franca mentioned above. Now it is very suggestive that we hear nothing of how the king of Magadha became also king of Kosala. Had this happened quietly, by succession, the event would have scarcely altered the relation of the languages of the two kingdoms. That of the older and larger would still have retained its supremacy. So when the Scottish dynasty succeeded to the English throne, the two languages remained distinct, but English became more and more the standard. However this may be, it has become of essential importance to have a Dictionary of a language the history of whose literature is bound up with so many delicate and interesting problems. The Pali Text Society, after long continued exertion and many cruel rebuffs and disappointments is now at last in a position to offer to scholars the first instalment of such a dictionary. The merits and demerits of the work will be sufficiently plain even from the first fasciculus. But one or two remarks are necessary to make the position of my colleague and myself clear. We have given throughout the Sanskrit roots corresponding to the Pali roots, and have omitted the latter. It may be objected that this is a strange method to use in a Pali dictionary, especially as the vernacular on which Pali is based had never passed through the stage of Sanskrit. That may be so; and it may not be possible, historically, that any Pali word in the canon could have been actually derived from the corresponding Sanskrit word. Nevertheless the Sanskrit form, though arisen quite independently, may throw light upon the Pali form; and as Pali roots have not yet been adequately studied in Europe, the plan adopted will probably, at least for the present, be more useful. This work is essentially preliminary. There is a large number of words of which we do not know the derivation. There is a still larger number of which the derivation does not give the meaning, but rather the reverse. It is so in every living language. Who could guess, from the derivation, the complicated meaning of such words as „conscience‟, „emotion‟, „disposition‟? The derivation would be as likely to mislead as to guide. We have made much progress. No one needs now to use the one English word „desire‟ as a translation of sixteen distinct Pali words, no one of which means precisely desire. Yet this was done in Vol. X of the Sacred Books of the East by MAX MüLLER and FAUSBöLL See Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS in J R A S., 1898, p. 58.. The same argument applies to as many concrete words as abstract ones. Here again we claim to have made much advance. But in either case, to wait for perfection would postpone the much needed dictionary to the Greek kalends. It has therefore been decided to proceed as rapidly as possible with the completion of this first edition, and to reserve the proceeds of the sale for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be. We have to thank Mrs. STEDE for valuable help in copying out material noted in my interleaved copy of Childers, and in collating indexes published by the Society; Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS for revising certain articles on the technical terms of psychology and philosophy; and the following scholars for kindly placing at our disposal the material they had collected for the now abandoned scheme of an international Pali Dictionary: Pāli Text Society 8 Pāli-English Dictionary Prof. STEN KONOW. Words beginning with S or H. (Published in J P T S. 1909 and 1907, revised by Prof. Dr. D. ANDERSEN). Dr. MABEL H. BODE. B, Bh and M. Prof. DUROISELLE. K. Dr. W. H. D. ROUSE. C-Ñ. In this connection I should wish to refer to the work of Dr. EDMOND HARDY. When he died he left a great deal of material; some of which has reached us in time to be made available. He was giving his whole time, and all his enthusiasm to the work, and had he lived the dictionary would probably have been finished before the war. His loss was really the beginning of the end of the international undertaking. Anybody familiar with this sort of work will know what care and patience, what scholarly knowledge and judgment are involved in the collection of such material, in the sorting, the sifting and final arrangement of it, in the adding of cross references, in the consideration of etymological puzzles, in the comparison and correction of various or faulty readings, and in the verification of references given by others, or found in the indexes. For all this work the users of the Dictionary will have to thank my colleague, Dr. WILLIAM STEDE. It may be interesting to notice here that the total number of references to appear in this first edition of the new dictionary is estimated to be between one hundred and fifty and one hundred and sixty thousand. The Bavarian Academy has awarded to Dr. STEDE a personal grant of 3100 marks for his work on this Dictionary. Chipstead, Surrey. July, 1921. T. W. RHYS DAVIDS. Pāli Text Society 9 Pāli-English Dictionary A A—1 {A-} the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akkosati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). - Best to be classed here is the a- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā-nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā-majjapa = majjapa) J VI.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya) J VI.518; apassato (= passantassa) J VI.552. A—2 {A-} (an- before vowels) [Vedic a-, an- , gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n-; Lat. *en-, in-; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un-; Oir. an-, in-] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na-, nir- and vi-. Often we find it opp. to sa-. Verbal negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. - Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) -a- (ā) in redupl. formations like bhavā-bhava see ā4. A—3 {A-} [Vedic a-; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaṃ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e)-; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a- is the a- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.). A—4 {A-} the sound a (a-kāra) J VI.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311. Aṃsa1 {Amsa} [Vedic aṃsa; cp. Gr. , Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. aṃse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J I.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. °āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aṃsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA I.312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaṃsa at It 22). atīt'aṃse in former times, formerly D II.224; Th 2, 314. mettaṃsa sharing friendship (with) A IV.151 = It 22 = J IV.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahiṃsā). - Disjunctive ekena aṃsena . . . ekena aṃsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A I.61. From this: ekaṃsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaṃsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaṃsa. paccaṃsena according to each one's share A III.38. puṭaṃsena with a knapsack for provisions D I.117; A II 183; cp. DA I.288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages. -kūṭa "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin III.127; DhA III.214; IV.136; VvA 121. - vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. °vaddhaka, °bandhaka) in I.204 (T. °bandhaka); II.114 (ddh); IV.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. °bandhana, C. v. l. °vaṭṭaka); DhA III.452. Aṃsa2 {Amsa} [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur° fourcornered, chaḷ°, aṭṭh°, soḷas° etc. (q. v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat° with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriagepole Vv 642 (= kubbara-phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima-aṃsā VvA 265). Pāli Text Society 10 Pāli-English Dictionary Aṃsi {Amsi} (f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu/s sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge (= aṃsa2) Vv 782 (= aṃsa-bhāga VvA 303). Aṃsu {Amsu} [cp. Sk. aṃśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin III.224. -mālin, sun Sāsv 1. Akaṭa {Akata} (adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; °yūsa natural juice Vin I.206. Akampiyatta {Akampiyatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354. Akalu {Akalu} (cp. agalu) an ointment J IV.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluṃ; C. expls as kālākaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); VI.144 (°candanavilitta; v. l. BB aggalu°); Miln 338 ( °tagara-tālīsaka-lohita-candana). Akāca {Akaca} (adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D II.244; Sn 476; J V.203. Akācin {Akacin} (adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka-arcin shining as the sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading. Akāsiya {Akasiya} (adj. -n.) [a + kāsika?] "not from the Kāsī-country" (?); official name of certain tax-gatherers in the king's service J VI.212 (akāsiya-sankhātā rāja-purisā C.). Akiccakāra {Akiccakara} (adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A II.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA I.296. - 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151. Akiriya {Akiriya} (adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J III.530 (°rūpa = akattabba-rūpa C.); Miln 250. Akilāsu {Akilasu} (adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S I.47; V.162; J I.109; Miln 382. Akissava {Akissava} at S I.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana. Akutobhaya {Akutobhaya} (adj.) see ku°. Akuppa {Akuppa} (adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu III.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast, safe Vin I.11 (akuppā me ceto-vimutti) = S II.239; Vin II.69; IV.214; D III.273; M I.205, 298; S II.171; A III.119, 198; Miln 361. Akuppatā {Akuppata} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th 1, 364. Akka {Akka} [cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow-wort M I.429 (°assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant). -nāla a kind of dress material Vin I.306 (vv. ll. agga° & Pāli Text Society 11 Pāli-English Dictionary akkha°). -vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin II.154 (cp. akkha-vāṭa). Akkanta {Akkanta} [pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A I.8; J I.71; Miln 152; DhA I.200. Akkandati {Akkandati} [ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S IV.206. Akkamana {Akkamana} (nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J I.62. Akkamati {Akkamati} [ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J I.7, 279; ThA 9; - to rise Vin III. 38. - ger. akkamma Cp. III.72. - pp. akkanta (q. v.). Akkuṭṭha {Akkuttha} (adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J VI.187. - 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha-vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa-vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above). Akkula {Akkula} (adj.) [= ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula. Akkosa {Akkosa} [ā + kruś = kruðc, see kuðca & koðca2; to sound, root kr, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA II.61. -vatthu always as dasa a°-vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J I.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA I.212; IV.2. Akkosaka {Akkosaka} (adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A II.58; III.252; IV.156; V.317; PvA 251. Akkosati {Akkosati} [to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J I.191; II.416; III.27; DhA I.211; II.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin II.296; DhA IV.2; PvA 10. - aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J III.212 (= akkosi DhA I.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. VI.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāligramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). -pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.). Akkha1 {Akkha} [Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D II.96; S V.6; A I.112; J I.109, 192; V.155 (akkhassa phalakaṃ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaṃ viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati: the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. -akkhaṃ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S IV.177; Miln 367. -chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S I.57; Miln 67. -bhagga with a broken axle J V.433. -bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA I.375; PvA 277. Akkha2 {Akkha} [Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D I.6 (but expld at DA I.86 as ball-game: guḷakīḷa); S I.149 = A V.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto ayaṃ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J I.379 (kūṭ° a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J V.116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha3. -dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a Pāli Text Society 12 Pāli-English Dictionary judge Vin III.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma-nagare). -dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D II.348; III.183; M III.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). -vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J IV.81. (? read akka-). Akkha3 {Akkha} (adj.) (-°) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha. Akkhaka {Akkhaka} [akkha1 + ka] the collar-bone Vin IV.213 (adhakkhakaṃ); Y.216. Akkhaṇa {Akkhana} [a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ I.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D III.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D III.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa. -vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as durepātin a. A I.284 (+mahato kāyassa padāletā); II.170 sq. (id.), 202; IV.423, 425; J II.91 (expld as either "avirādhita<11>-vedhī" or "akkhaṇaṃ vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), III.322; IV.494 (C. explns aviraddha-vedhin vijju-ālokena vijjhana<11>-samattha p. 497). In other combn at J I.58 (akkhaṇavedhin + vālavedhin); V.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin). In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with dūrevedha), where MSS. however read ak- ṣuṇa°; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). - Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an-; akkhaṇa in the meaning of "lightning" (J II.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence. Akkhata {Akkhata} (adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). - acc. akkhataṃ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ) & Pv IV.111 (nessāmi taṃ Pāṭaliputtaṃ akkhataṃ); see VvA 351 & PvA 272. Akkhaya {Akkhaya} (adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21. Akkhara {Akkhara} (adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D III.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D I.88) it is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DA I.247 = SnA 477) - pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A I.72 = III.107 = S II.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyaðjana) of poetry S I.38. To know the context of the a° the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA IV.70). Later: akkharaṃ a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J II.90; IV.7 (likhitāni written), 489; VI.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1. -cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D I.88 (akkharappabhedo ti Pāli Text Society 13 Pāli-English Dictionary sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A III.223 = Sn p. 105. -piṇḍa "word-ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA IV.70 (= akkharānaṃ sannipāto Dh 352). Akkharikā {Akkharika} (f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D I.7; Vin II.10; III.180. So expld at DA I.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables. Akkhāta {Akkhata} (adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A I.34 (dur°); II.195; IV.285, 322; V.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718. Akkhātar {Akkhatar} one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story-teller S I.11, 191; III.66; Sn 167. Akkhāti {Akkhati} [ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi & cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv IV.163; cond. akkhissaṃ Sn 997; J VI.523. - Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaṃ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu III.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S I.11; It 53. - pp. akkhāta (q. v.). - Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati. Akkhāna {Akkhana} (nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D I.6 (= DA I.84: Bhārata-Rāmāyanādi); III.183; M I.503; III.167; Sdhp. 237. - preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm°). The 5th Veda J V.450. (vedam akkhānapaðcamaṃ; C: itihāsapaðcamaṃ vedacatukkaṃ). - The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.). Akkhāyika {Akkhayika} (adj.) relating, narrating J III.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about naturelore D I.8; Miln 316. Akkhāyin {Akkhayin} (adj.) telling, relating, announcing S II.35; III.7; J III.105. Akkhi {Akkhi} (nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy), o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye & wind-ow); . See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaṇika] the eye M I.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn 197, 608; J I.223, 279; V.77; VI.336; Pv II.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (°īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA I.475; DhA II.26; III.196 (°īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. - In combn with sa- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. (-°) akkha3 (q.v.). -añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA III.354. -kūpa the socket of the eye J IV.407. -gaṇḍa eye-protuberance, i. e. eye-brow (?) J VI.504 (for pamukha T.). -gūtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. -gūthaka id. Sn 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta-ttacamaṃsasadiso a°-gūthako SnA 248). -chidda the eye-hole SnA 248. -dala the eye-lid DA I.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. -pāta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand° of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. pūra an eye-full, in akkhipūraṃ assuṃ (assu?) an eye full of tears J VI.191. -mala dirt from the eye Pv III.53 (= °gūtha C.). -roga eye disease DhA I.9. Akkhika1 {Akkhika} (-°) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (añjan° with eyes anointed); DhA IV.98 (aḍḍh° with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 (tamb° red-eyed). -an° having no eyes DhA I.11. Pāli Text Society 14 Pāli-English Dictionary Akkhika2 {Akkhika} (nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J I.208. -hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M I.383 (corresp. with aṇḍahāraka). Akkhitta1 {Akkhitta} see khitta. Akkhitta2 {Akkhitta} (adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J III.255 (= ākaḍḍhita C.). Akkhin {Akkhin} (adj.) = akkhika J III.190 (mand° softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb° red-eyed); DhA I.11. Akkhobbha {Akkhobbha} (adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21. Akkhobhana {Akkhobhana} (adj) = akkhobbha J V.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.). Akkhohiṇī {Akkhohini} (f.) [= akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J V.319; VI.395. Akhaṇḍaphulla {Akhandaphulla} see khaṇḍa. Akhāta {Akhata} (adj.) not dug: see khāta. Akhetta {Akhetta} barren-soil: see khetta. - In cpd. °ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J IV.371. Agati {Agati} see gati. -°gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D III.228 (4: chanda°, dosa° moha° bhaya°); A II.18 sq., J IV.402; V.98, 510; PvA 161. Agada {Agada} [Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counterpoison J I.80 (°harīṭaka); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA I.67; DhA I.215; PvA 198 (= osadhaṃ). Agaru {Agaru} (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S I.94, 229; II.90) Vin. I.25; IV.17, D I.51; DhA I.39. - (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D I.89; Sn p. 51. Agalu {Agalu} [cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś I.24, and akalu. Agāra {Agara} (nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. - 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. - Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of the home into the Pāli Text Society 15 Pāli-English Dictionary homeless state" D I.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172II. See also S I.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ nikkhanta); M II.55 (agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā); Sn 274, 805 (°ṃ āvasati), and with pabbajita D I.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv II.1317. - (b.) of a "rājā cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agāraṃ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena . . . sace ca so pabbajati agārā vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he stays home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D II.16; Sn 1002, 1003. - Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin I.15; D I.102 (BB. has v. l. agyāgāra, but DA I.270 expl. as dānāgāra); A I.156, 281; II.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J I.51, 56; III.392; Dpvs. I.36. 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv II.25 (= anāvāsa PvA 80). - (nt.) the homeless state (=anagāriyā) Sn 376. See also agga2. - 3. °āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: - āgantuk° reception hall for strangers or guests S IV.219; V.21. - itth° lady's bower S I.58, 89. - kūṭ° a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S II.103. 263; III.156; IV.186; V.43; A I.230; III.10, 364; IV.231; V.21. koṭṭh° storehouse, granary D I.134 (cp. DA I.295); S I.89.-tiṇ° a house covered with grass S IV.185; A I.101. -bhus° threshing shed, barn A I.241. -santh° a council hall D I.91; II.147; S IV.182; V.453; A II.207; IV.179 sq. -suññ° an uninhabited shed; solitude S V.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A I.241 (v. l. for bhusāgāra); III.353; IV.139, 392, 437; V.88, 109, 323 sq. Agāraka {Agaraka} (nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M I.450; J VI.81. Agārika {Agarika} (adj.) 1. having a house, in eka°, dva° etc. D I.166 = A I.295 = II.206. - 2. a householder, layman Vin I.17. f. agārikā a housewife Vin I.272. See also āgārika. Agārin {Agarin} (adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th I,1009; J III.234. - f. agārinī a housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī VvA 225); Pv III.43 (id. PvA 194). Agāriya = agārika, a layman M I.504 (°bhūta). - Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraṃ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin I.15; M I.16; II.55, 75; A I.49; D III.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv II.1316; DA I.112. Agga1 {Agga} {Agariya} first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs IV.13 (sangahaṃ first collection). See cpds. - (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J I.52 (°sākhā). - (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin IV.232 (aggam-agga) most excellent, D II.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A II.17 = Pv IV.347 (lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaṃ] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D II.15; S III.83, 264. - 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always -°); as ār° point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus° tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ° id PvA 241; dum° top of a tree J II.155; dhaj° of a banner S I.219; pabbat° of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh° of a branch PvA 157; etc. - (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S II.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as -°; e. g. dum° the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan° plenty D III.164; madhur° S I.41, 161, 237; bhav° the best existence S III.83; rūp° extraordinary beauty J I.291; lābh° highest gain J III.127; Pāli Text Society 16 Pāli-English Dictionary sambodhi-y-agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbaññuta-ðāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first-fruits (panca aggāni, after which the N. Paðcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās° koṭṭh° kumbhi° bhojan° SnA 270. sukh° perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaṃ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest praise, to be the most excellent D I.124; S III.156, 264; A II.17 (Tathāgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamādo); Miln 183. - 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin II.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh° from alms); Vbh 423 (vass° by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A II.201 (opp. mūle at the root); J IV.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit° with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J II.153 (ukkh°); III.126 (kūp°). - 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad° (foll. by tad°) from what time, since what date D I.152; II.206; & ajja-tagge from this day, after today D I.85; M I.528; A V.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś II.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin II.212.-angulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J VI.404. -āsana main seat DA I.267. -upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D II.6. -kārikā first taste, sample Vin III.80. -kulika of an esteemed clan Pv III.55 (= seṭṭh° PvA 199). -ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D III.225 (porāṇa +), A II.27 sq.; IV.246, Kvu 341. -danta one who is most excellently self-restrained (of the Buddha) Th I.354. -dāna a splendid gift Vin III.39. -dvāra main door J I.114. -nakha tip of the nail Vin IV.221.-nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin I.229. -nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. -nikkhittaka an original depository of the Faith Dpvs IV.5. -pakatimant of the highest character J V.351 (= aggasabhāva). -patta having attained perfection D III.48 sq. -pasāda the highest grace A II.34; It 87. -piṇḍa the best oblation or alms I.141; M I. 28; II.204. -piṇḍika receiving the best oblations J VI.140. -puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA II.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. purohita chief or prime minister J VI.391. -phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J I.148; Pv IV.188; PvA 230. -bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla°), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D I.5; DA I.81. -magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. -mahesi the king's chief wife, queen-consort J I.262; III.187, 393; V.88; DhA I.199; PvA 76. -rājā the chief king J VI.391; Miln 27. -vara most meritorious, best Dpvs VI.68. -vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs IV.13. -vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142. Agga2 {Agga} (nt.) (only -°) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān° a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J III.470; IV.379, 403; VI.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salāk° a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J I.123, VvA 75. Aggatā {Aggata} (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre-eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (°ṃ gata); Dpvs IV.1 (guṇaggataṃ gatā). - (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D I.80; III.224. Aggatta {Aggatta} (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, preeminence PvA 9, 89. Aggavant {Aggavant} (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A I.70, 243. Aggalu {Aggalu} see agalu. Pāli Text Society 17 Pāli-English Dictionary Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā {Aggala} (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a)rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross-bar Vin I.290; D I.89 (°ṃ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross-bar; a. = kavāṭa DA I.252); A IV.359 (id.); S. IV.290; A I.101 = 137 = IV.231. (phusit° with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin IV.47; J. V.293 (°ṃ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross-bar. - 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin I.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV VIII.21, 1); J I.8 (+ tunna) VI.71 (°ṃ datvā); Vin IV.121.-dāna putting in a gusset J I.8. -phalaka the post or board, in which the cross-bar is fixed (cp. °vaṭṭi) M III.95. -vaṭṭi = °phalaka Vin II.120, 148. -sūci bolting pin M I.126. Aggi {Aggi} [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see below)] fire. - 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin II.120 (fire in bathroom); M I.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S IV.185, 399 (sa-upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA III.71); J I.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); II.102; III.55; IV.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ + udake temanaṃ). - The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A IV.45: aggiṃ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiṃ jāleti (kindle) J II.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J I.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J I.294; nibbāpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S II.85; M I.487; J I.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. °nibbāna) J I.61; Miln 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A I.136, 199; PvA 20. udar° the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial. II.208, note 2; kapp°uṭṭhān° the universal conflagration J III.185; dāv° a wood or jungle fire J I.212; naḷ° the burning of a reed J VI.100; padīp° fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire-god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J I.285, 494; II.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J I.285; II.43. Aggiṃ paricarati (cp. °paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin I.31 (jaṭilā aggī paricaritukāmā); A V.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihuttaṃ paric° ThA 136); Dh 107; J I.494; DhA II.232. aggiṃ juhati (cp. °homa, °hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A II.207; often combd. with aggihuttaṃ paricarati, e. g. S I.166; Sn p. 79. aggiṃ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A V.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko J YI.207 (cp. below °paricārika); aggissa ādhānaṃ A IV.41.- 3. (ethical, always -°) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg°, dos°, moh°, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S IV.19; A IV.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy°, gahapat°, dakkhiṇeyy°, kaṭṭh°. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D III.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind° the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh° the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh° of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār° burning remorse PvA 60; sok° burning grief ib. 41. Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini-samaṃ jalitaṃ 668 (= samantato jali taṃ aggiṃ Sn A 480); agginisamāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Sn A 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa; otherwise as adj. agginiṃ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert.-agāra (agyāgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin I.24; IV.109; D I.101, 102 (as v. l. Pāli Text Society 18 Pāli-English Dictionary BB for agāra); M I.501; A V.234, 250. -khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire-brand S II.85; A IV. 128; Th 2, 351 (°samākāmā); J IV.139; VI.330; Ps I.125; Dpvs VI.37; Miln 304. -gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. -ja fire-born J V.404 (C; text aggijāta). -ṭṭha fire-place J V.155. -ṭṭhāna fire-place Vin II.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). -daḍḍha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv I.74.-dāha (mahā°) a holocaust A I.178. -nikāsin like fire J III.320 (suriya). -nibbāna the extinction of fire J I.212. -pajjota fire-light A II.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda°, suriya°, a°, paððā°). -paricaraṇa (-ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA I.199. paricariyā fire-worship DhA II.232; Sn A 291 (pāri°) 456. -paricārika one who worship the fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). -sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin I.25, 49 = II.210; I.139; II.154. -sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile °ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayoguḷa). -hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin I.33, 36 = J I.83; Vin I.246 = Sn 568 (°mukha-yañña); S I.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J IV.211; VI.525; ThA 136 (=aggi); DhA IV.151 (°ṃ brāhmaṇo namati). -huttaka (nt.) fire-offering J VI.522 (= aggi-jūhana C.). -hotta = °hutta SnA 456 (v. l. BB °hutta). -homa fire-oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D I.9 (= aggijūhana DA I.93). Aggika {Aggika} (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin I.71 (jaṭilaka); D II.339 sq. (jaṭila); S I.166 (brāhmaṇa). Aggha {Aggha} [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. - mahaggha (adj.) of great value J IV.138; V.414; VI.209; Pv II.118. See also mahāraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. IV.139; V.414. - anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J V.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA III.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J V.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA IV.216. - agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin II.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. - 2. an oblation made to a guest D II.240; J IV.396 = 476.-kāraka a valuator J I.124. -pada valuableness J V.473 (°lakkhaṇaṃ nāma mantaṃ). Agghaka {Agghaka} (adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (-°) Mhvs 30, 77. an° priceless Mhvs 30, 72. Agghati {Agghati} (intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the value of (acc.), to deserve J I.112 (satasahassaṃ; aḍḍhamāsakaṃ); VI.174, 367 (padarajaṃ); DhA III.35 (maṇin nāgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaṃ nāgghati (nāgghanti) soḷasiṃ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin II.156; S I.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nānubhoti VvA 104), 437; J V.284. - Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J I.124; IV.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya. Agghanaka {Agghanaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin IV.226; J I.61 (satasahass°), 112; DA I.80 (kahāpaṇ°); DhA III.120 (cuddasakoṭi°); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. - f. °ikā J I.178 (satasahass°). Agghaniya {Agghaniya} (adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192. Agghāpanaka {Agghapanaka} [fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J I.124, 125; V.276 (°ika). Pāli Text Society 19 Pāli-English Dictionary Agghāpaniya {Agghapaniya} (adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in °kamma the business of a valuator J IV.137. Agghika (nt.) (-°) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese ägä "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph°) 34, 73 (ratan°) 34, 76 (dhaj°); Dāvs I.39 (pupphamay°); V.51 (kusum°). {Agghika} Agghiya {Agghiya} (adj. -n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth J VI.265 (maṇi); DhA II.41 (ratan° of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. - 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J V.324 = VI.516; Dpvs VI.65; VII.4. Agha1 {Agha} (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S I 22; M I.500 (roga gaṇḍa salla agha); A II.128 (id.); J V.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. - adj. painful, bringing pain J VI.507 (agha-m-miga = aghakara m. C.). -bhūta a source of pain S III.189 (+ agha & salla). Agha2 {Agha} (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M I.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a-kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J IV.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaṃvutā andhakārā D II.12; S V.454, and BSk. aghasaṃvṛta M Vastu I.240, adj. dark M Vastu I.41; II.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D II.12; S V.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehāsaṃ gama VvA 78); J IV.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.).-gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. -gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S I.67 = Miln 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaṃ). Aghata {Aghata} at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha-gata or (preferably) with v. l. as aggha-gataṃ, or (with Neumann) as agghaṃ agghatānaṃ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191. Aghammiga {Aghammiga} [to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J VI.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475. Aghavin {Aghavin} (adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 (= dukkhita SnA 489). Anka1 {Anka} = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; °karana branding J IV.366, 375. See also anketi. Anka2 {Anka} [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J V.322 = VI.218 (v. l. BB anga). - (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (ankena vahati) Vin II.114; D II.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one's lap); M II.97 (ankena vahitvā); Th 1, 299; J I.262 (anke nisinna); II.127, 236; VI.513; DhA I.170 (ankena vahitvā) PvA 17 (nisīdāpeti). Pāli Text Society 20 Pāli-English Dictionary Ankita {Ankita} [pp. of anketi] marked, branded J I.231 (cakkankitā Satthu padā); II.185 (°kaṇṇaka with perforated ears). Ankura {Ankura} [cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J II.105; VI.331 (Buddh °a nascent Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (°vaṇṇa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43. Ankusa {Ankusa} [Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J I.9 (°pacchi hook & basket); V.89 = VI.520 (pacchikhanitti°), 529 (= phalānaṃ gaṇhanatthaṃ ankusaṃ). - (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin II.196 (+ kasā); J VI.489; ThA 173 (ovādaṃ ankusaṃ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇḍ°). - (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; - acc° beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.-gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.- driver's hook M II.94 (sippa). gaha an eleph.-driver Dh 326. Ankusaka {Ankusaka} [see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J III.22. - 2. an eleph.driver's hook J III.431.-yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J II.68 (+ pacchi). Anketi {Anketi} [Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J I.451 lakkhaṇena); II.399. - pp. ankita, q. v. Ankola {Ankola} [dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J VI.535. Cp. next. Ankolaka {Ankolaka} = ankola J IV.440; V.420. Anga {Anga} (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger-ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka, anguṭṭha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. °sambhāra); uttam°anga the reproductive organ J V.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. °paccanga), as sabbanga-kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv III.35 (= sobhaṇa-sabbanga-paccangī PvA 189) and in redupln. anga-m-angāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin III.119; Vv 382 (°ehi naccamāna); Pv II.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati). - (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath° the vows of the fast J I.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.). Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents A II.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paððā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saððā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭhɔ angāni assā ti) navanga Buddha-sāsana see nava. - (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D I.113 sq., 117 (iminā p° angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA I.281 expls tena kāra- ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D I.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha-pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA I.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J I.3 (sabbanga-sampanna nagaraṃ a city possessing all marks of perfection); II.207. - In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi angehi s. A I.115; cattāri sotapannassa a- D III.227 = A IV.405 sq.; pañcanga-vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and Pāli Text Society 21 Pāli-English Dictionary pañcanga-samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla-kkhandha, see kkhandha II.A d) S I.99 = A I.161; V.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇḍita clever) D I.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D I.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S III.83; Kh IV.10 = KhA 88; cp. M I.446 (dasahɔ angehi samannāgato raððo assājāniyo). - (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaṃ angaṃ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraṃ the interest in the outside world). A I.16 sq. = S V.101 sq.; It 9. rañño angaṃ an asset or profit for the king M I.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta° I.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M I.492; A IV.411; Sdhp 455, 456; iminā p° angena for that reason M II.168. - In compn. with verbs angi° (angī°): angigata having limbs or ports, divided DA I.313; cp. samangi (-bhūta).-jāta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin I.191 (of cows); III.20, 37, 205; J II.359; Miln 124. -paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M I.81; J VI-20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv II.1212 (=paripuṇṇa-sabbangapaccangavatī PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA I.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M I.395; sabbanga-paccangāni all limbs Miln 148. - (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddāvachidda, seṭṭhānu-seṭṭhi, khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal M I.133 (°e daseyya), 366; J I.20; IV.324 (chinditvā). -paccangatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh°). -paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D I.34 (sabbangapeccangī); PvA 189. -rāga painting or rouging the body Vin II.107 (+ mukha°). -laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. -vāta gout Vin I.205. -vijjā the art of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D I.9 (see expl. at DA I.93); J I.290 (°āya cheka clever in fortune-telling); °ānubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J II.200; V.284; °pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J II.21, 250; V.458. -vekalla bodily deformity DhA II.26. -sattha the science of prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA I.92. -sambhāra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S I.135; Miln 41.-hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J VI.538. Angaṇa1 {Angana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaṇa & °na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin II.218; J I.109 (= manussānan saðcaraṇa-ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); II.243, 290, 357; Dāvs I.27. cetiy° an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA I.191, 197; VvA 254. rāj° the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J I.124, 152; II.2; DhA II.45.-ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J I.249, 421. -pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J II.200. Angaṇa2 {Angana} [prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A V.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sāngana Sn 279); D I.76; M I.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A II.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata- raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānað ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA III.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60; Nett 87. Angada {Angada} [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J V.9, 410 (citt°, adj. with manifold bracelets). Angadin {Angadin} (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J V.9. Pāli Text Society 22 Pāli-English Dictionary Angāra {Angara} (m. nt.) [Vedic angāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A III.97, 380, 407; J I.73; III.54, 55; V.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul° the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S IV.324 (see under kula).-kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA I.261. -kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA I.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. -kammakara a charcoal burner J VI.209. -kāsu a charcoal pit M I.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J I.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA I.442; Sdhp 208. -pacchi a basket for ashes DhA IV.191. -pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A I.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (°āropaṇa); Sdhp 208. -maṃsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. -masi ashes DhA III.309. -rāsi a heap of burning coal J III.55. Angāraka {Angaraka} (adj.) [cp. Sk. angāraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA I.95; cp. J I.73. Angārika {Angarika} a charcoal-burner J VI.206 (= angāra-kammakara p. 209). Angārin {Angarin} (adj.) [to angāra] (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J I.87 (dumā trees in full bloom). Angika {Angika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, - fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh°, duv° (see dve), catur°, pañc° etc., q. v. Angin {Angin} (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, - fold, see catur° & pacc° (under angapaccangin). - f. anginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226). Anguṭṭha {Anguttha} [cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin III.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. - 2. the great toe J II.92; Mhvs 35, 43.-pada thumb-mark A IV.127 = S III.154. -sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv III.52, cp. PvA 198. Anguṭṭhaka {Angutthaka} = anguṭṭha J IV.378; V.281; pād° the great toe S V.270. Angula {Angula} [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M I.395 (vankɔ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers, v. l. anguliṇ); A III.6 (id.); J V 70 (goṇ° adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. °anguṭṭha and °angulī). -2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger-breadth, an inch Vin II.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh°); DhA III.127 (ek°).-aṭṭhi (? cp. anga-laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA I.93. -anguli fingers and toes DhA III.214. -antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin III.39; Miln 180; DhA III.214. Angulika {Angulika} (nt.) [= angulī] a finger J III.13 (paðc°); V.204 (vaṭṭ° = pavāḷ° ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also paðcangulika. Angulī & Anguli {Anguli} (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angulī & °i; see anga] a finger A IV.127; Sn 610; J III.416; IV.474; V.215 (vaṭṭ° with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA II.59; IV.210; SnA 229.-patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin III.84 = IV.110; D I.91 = A IV.343. -pada fingermark A IV.127 = S III.154.-poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J V.67. -muddikā a signet ring Vin II.106; J IV.498; V.439, 467. -sanghaṭṭana° = poṭha DA I.256. Pāli Text Society Anguleyyaka 23 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a fingerring J II.444 (= nikkha). {Anguleyyaka} Acankama {Acankama} (avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga). Acittaka {Acittaka} (adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA II.42. - 2. without heart or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J IV.58 (C. for acetasā). Acittikata {Acittikata} (adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra] not well thought of Miln 229. Acira {Acira} see cira & cp. nacira. Acela {Acela} (adj. -n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti-Buddhist naked ascetic D I.161, 165; III.6, 12, 17 sq.; S I.78; J V.75. Acelaka {Acelaka} = acela D I.166; III.40; A I.295; II.206; III.384 (°sāvaka); J III.246; VI.229; Pug 55; DhA III.489. Acc{Acc} - 1. a + c°, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. - 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci. Accagā {Accaga} [ati + agā] 3rd sg. pret. of ati-gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at DhA IV.494); Dh 414. Accankusa {Accankusa} (adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nāga). Accatari {Accatari} see atitarati. Accati {Accati} [Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs V.66 (accayittha, pret.) - pp accita, q. v. Accanta {Accanta} (adj. - & adv. °-) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J I.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. - 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S I.130 (°ṃ hataputtāɔ mhi); III.13 = A I.291 sq.; V.326 sq. (°niṭṭha, °yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (°niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). - 3. (°-) exceedingly, extremely, very much A I.145 (°sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (°suddhi = param ttha-accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (°ruci); Dh 162 (°dussīlya = ekanta° DhA III.153). Accaya {Accaya} [from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death. Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin I.25; D II.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam° when I shall be dead); M I.438 (temās° after 3 months); S I.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaṃ māsānaṃ), p. 110 (rattiyā); J I.253 (ekāha-dvīh°), Pāli Text Society 24 Pāli-English Dictionary 291 (katipāh° after a few days); PvA 47 (katipāh°), 82 (dasamās°), 145 (vassasatānaṃ). - (2) (modal) passing or getting over, overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur-accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Sn 945 (= dur-atikkamanīya SnA 568), of sanga Sn 948: taṇhā Dh 336; sota It 95. - (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin I.133 (thull° a grave offence), 167 (id.); II.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maṃ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been committed by me (in confession formula) D I.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DA I.236); A I.54; M I.438 (id.); accayaṃ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin I.315; A I.103; II.146 sq.; °ṃ deseti to confess the transgression S I.239; °ṃ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the transgression, in confessionformula at D I.85 = (Vin II.192; M I.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya-paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution J V.380; accayena desanaṃ paṭigaṇhāti J I.379; accayaṃ khamati to forgive Miln 420. Accasara {Accasara} (adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too selfsure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S I.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J IV.6 (+ atisara); DhA IV.230 (= expecting too much). - 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) M I.304; S V.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin. Accasarā {Accasara} (f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, selfsurity Vbh 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā. Accasari {Accasari} [fr. ati + sṛ] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J V.70. Accasārin {Accasarin} (adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo nāccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at SnA 21 by yo nātidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi). Accahasi {Accahasi} [fr. ati + hṛ] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J III.484 (= ativiya āhari C.). Accābhikkhaṇa {Accabhikkhana} (°-) [ati + abhikkhaṇa] too often J V.233 (°saṃsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha). Accāraddha {Accaraddha} (adj. adv.) [ati + āraddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin I.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21. Accāyata {Accayata} (adj.) [ati + āyata] too long A III.375. Accāyika {Accayika} (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J VI.549, 553. - 2. urgent, pressing M I.149 (karaṇiyan business) II.112; J I.338; V.17 °ṃ (nt.) hurry DhA I.18. See also acceka. Accāvadati {Accavadati} [ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech; to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin IV.224, Pāli Text Society 25 Pāli-English Dictionary 263; S II.204 sq.; J V.433 (v. l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v. l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?). Accāsanna {Accasanna} (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'ātidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance). Accāhita {Accahita} (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J IV.46 = V.146 (= ati ahita C.) = VI.306 (id.). Acci & Accī (in verse){Acci} (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to ṛc, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S IV.290 (spelt acchi), 399; A IV.103; V.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11); J V.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dīpɔ); Sdhp 250. Accikā {Accika} (f.) [fr. acci] a flame M I.74; S II.99. Accita {Accita} [pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J VI.180. Accimant {Accimant} (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J V.266; VI.248; Vv 388. Acci—bandha{Accibandha} (adj.) [= accibaddha?] at Vin I.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassakedāra-baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts II.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca° and acchi°, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi-baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields. Accuggacchati {Accuggacchati} [ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D II.38; A V.152 (in simile of lotus). Accuggata {Accuggata} (adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA II.65. - 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J VI.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.). Accuṇha {Accunha} (adj.) [ati + uṇha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA II.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati-uṇha. Accuta {Accuta} (adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. °ṃ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) A IV.295, 327; Sn 204, 1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA III.321); Sdhp 47. Accupaṭṭhapeti {Accupatthapeti} at J V.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupaṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for). Accupati {Accupati} at J IV.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.). Accussanna {Accussanna} (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin II.151. Pāli Text Society 26 Pāli-English Dictionary Acceka {Acceka} = accāyika, special; °cīvara a spccial robe Vin III.261; cp. Vin Texts I.293. Acceti {Acceti} [ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahorattā). - 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkhaṃ). - Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J VI.17 (sūlasmiṃ; C. āvuṇeti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.). Accogāḷha {Accogalha} (adj.) [ati + ogāḷha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A IV.282, 287, 323 sq. Accodaka {Accodaka} (nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. anodaka no water) DhA I.52. Accodara {Accodara} (nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J IV.279 (C. ati-udara). Accha1 {Accha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier-Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin I.206 (°kañjika); D I.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DA I.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka-rahada); M I.100; S II.281 (°patta); III.105 (id.); A I.9; J II.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DA I.113 (yāgu).-odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. °odikā Vv 412 = 602. Accha2 {Accha} [Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin I.200; A III.101; J V.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J VI.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.). Accha3 {Accha} = akkha (a die) see acci-bandha. Accha4 {Accha} (adj.) [Ved. ṛkṣa] hurtful, painful, bad DhA IV.163 (°ruja). Acchaka {Acchaka} = accha2, a bear J V.71. Acchati {Acchati} [Vedic āsyati & āste, ās; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin I.289; A II.15; It 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a. sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisīdati VvA 298); PvA 4. - 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone Th 1, 936; J IV.306. - 3. to be, behave, live Vin II.195; D I.102; S I.212; Vv 112; Pv III.31 (= nisīdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88; DhA I.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiṃ karitvā a. (= aggiṃ karoti) D I.102; aggiṃ paricaranto a. (= aggiṃ paricarati) DA I.270; tantaṃ pasārento a. (= tantaṃ pasāreti) DhA I.424. - Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin IV.308; DhA I.424. Acchanna {Acchanna} (adj.) [pp. of acchādeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J JII.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D I.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa). Acchambhin (adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undismayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); J VI.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin. {Acchambhin} Pāli Text Society 27 Pāli-English Dictionary Accharā1 {Acchara} (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa-vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger-tips: 1. (lit.) accharaṃ paharati to snap the fingers J II.447; III.191; IV.124, 126; V.314; VI.366; DhA I.38, 424. - As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger-tips, a pinch J V.385; DhA II.273 (°gahaṇamattaṃ); cp. ekacchara-matta DhA II.274. - 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ek°accharakkhaṇe in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA I.43; VvA 329.-sanghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, °matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) A I.10, 34, 38; IV.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaṃ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaṃ). -sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J III.127. Accharā2 {Acchara} (f.) [Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M I.253 (pl. accharāyo) II.64; Th 2, 374 (= devaccharā ThA 252); J V.152 sq. (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaððā VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA III.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev°); Miln 169; Sdhp 298. Accharika {Accharika} (nt. or f.?) [fr. accharā2] in °ṃ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) A IV.265. Acchariya {Acchariya} (adj.-nt.) [cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. - The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇhappavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa-yoggaṃ that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda-leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā-yoggan ti acchariyaṃ accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttan ti attho DA I.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D II.155; M I.79; III.118, 125, 144 (an°); S IV.371; A I.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA III.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an°). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J I.223, 279; IV.138; VI.94 (a. vata bho); DhA IV.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaṃ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D I.2, 60, 206, 210; II.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents marvels, M III.118, 125; A IV.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta-(citta-)jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA IV.52; PvA 6, 50. - See also acchera & accheraka. Acchādana {Acchadana} (nt.) [fr. acchādeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. - fig. protection, sheltering J I.307. Acchādanā {Acchadana} (f.) [= prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. - Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasarā for acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss? Acchādeti {Acchadeti} [ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchādayati jīvitena to keep alive Av. Ś, I.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover, to clothe, to put on D I.63 = It 75; J I.254; III.189; IV.318; Pug 57; Pv I.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DA I.181 (= paridahitvā); PvA 49, 50. - fig. to envelop, to fill J VI.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air). - pp. acchanna (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 28 Pāli-English Dictionary Acchi {Acchi} at S IV.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.). Acchijja {Acchijja} (v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S I.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi. Acchidda {Acchidda} see chidda. Acchindati {Acchindati} [ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin IV.247 (sayaṃ a. to appropriate); J II.422; III.179; IV.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. ger. acchinditvā J II.422; DhA I.349; PvA 241 (sayaṃ); & acchetvā M I.434. Caus. II. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin IV.224, 247. Acchinna {Acchinna} (adj.) [ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin IV.278, 303; J II.78; IV.45; V.212. Acchiva {Acchiva} [*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J VI.535. Acchupeti {Acchupeti} [ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin I.290 (aggaḷaṃ) II.112. Acchecchi {Acchecchi} [Sk. acchaitsīt] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taṇhaṃ M I.122; S I.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); IV.105, 207. It 47; A III.246, 445; DhA IV.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati-ejin (ejā), acchecchi = ati-icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor. Acchejja {Acchejja} equal to a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati. Acchedana {Acchedana} (nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J VI.544. Acchera (adj.) equal to acchariya wonderful, marvellous S I.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv III.51 (°rūpa = acchariyasabhāva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398. {Acchera} Accheraka {Accheraka} (adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J I.279; Bu I.9 (pāṭihīraṃ). Aja {Aja} [Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a hegoat, a ram D I.6, 127; A II.207; J I.241; III.278 sq.; V.241; Pug 56; PvA 80.-eḷaka [Sk. ajaiḍaka] goats & sheep D I.5, 141; A II.42 sq., 209; J I.166; VI.110; Pug 58. As pl. °ā S I.76; It 36; J IV.363.-pada goat-footed M I.134. -pāla goatherd, in °nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds'Nigrodha-tree" Vin I.2 sq. Dpvs I.29 (cp. M Vastu III.302). -pālikā a woman goatherd Vin III.38. -lakkhaṇa "goat-sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D I.9 (expld. DA I.94 as "evarūpānaṃ ajānaṃ mansaṃ khāditabbaṃ evarūpānaṃ na khāditabban ti"). -laṇḍikā (pl.) goats'dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats'dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J I.419; DhA II.70; PvA 282. -vata "goats'habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J IV.318. -pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161. Pāli Text Society 29 Pāli-English Dictionary Ajaka {Ajaka} a goat, pl. goats Vin II.154. - f. ajikā J III.278 & ajiyā J V.241. Ajagara {Ajagara} [aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goateater"] a large snake (rocksnake?), Boa Constrictor J VI.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA III.60. Also as ajakara at J III.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64). Ajacca {Ajacca} (adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J III.19; VI.100. Ajajjara {Ajajjara} see jajjara. Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra {Ajaddhuka} {Ajaddhumara} see jaddhu. Ajamoja {Ajamoja} [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin-seed VvA 186. Ajā {Aja} (f.) a she-goat J III.125; IV.251. Ajānana {Ajanana} (°-) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J V.199 (°bhāva); VI.177 (°kāla). Ajina {Ajina} (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats'skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D I.167; Sn 1027; J I.12, 53; IV.387; V.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M I.343; S IV.118; A II.207; Sn 249 (= kharāni a°-cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.).-khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D I.167; S I.117; A I.240, 295; II.206; Vin I.306; III.34; J VI.569. -paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin I.192; D I.7 (=ajina-cammehi sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA I.87); A I.181. -sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina-camma-sāṭī DhA IV.156) Dh 394 = J I.481 = III.85. Ajini {Ajini} aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v. Ajiya {Ajiya} = Ajikā (see ajaka). Ajira {Ajira} (nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3. Ajīraka {Ajiraka} (nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J I.404; II.181, 291; III.213, 225. Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya {Ajeyya} {Ajjeyya} (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] - (a) not to be taken by force Kh VIII.8 (cp. KhA 223). - (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J V.509. Ajeyya2 {Ajeyya} (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J VI.323. Ajja & Ajjā{Ajja} (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a° being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to-day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J I.279; III.425 (read bahutaṃ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv I.117 (= idāni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. - Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja- Pāli Text Society 30 Pāli-English Dictionary tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin I.18; D I.85; DA I.235.-kālaṃ (adv.) this morning J VI.180; -divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23. Ajjatana {Ajjatana} (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, today's, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J II.409. - dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin I.17; PvA 171 & passim. Ajjatā {Ajjata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S I.83 (v. l. ajjeva). Ajjati {Ajjati} [Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J III.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.). Ajjava {Ajjava} (adj.-n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D III.213; A I.94; II.113; III.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J III.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an°); SnA 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.). Ajjavatā {Ajjavata} (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā). Ajjita {Ajjita} [pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98. Ajjuka {Ajjuka} [*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin IV.35; DA I.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka). Ajjukaṇṇa {Ajjukanna} [*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J VI.535 (nn). Ajjuṇho {Ajjunho} (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja-juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin I.25; IV.80. Ajjuna {Ajjuna} [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J VI.535; DhA I.105 (°rukkha). Ajjh {Ajjh} - Assimilation group of adhi + vowel. Ajjhagā {Ajjhaga} [adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained, experienced S I.12 (vimānaṃ); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiṃ; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jātimaraṇaṃ); Dh 154 (taṇhānaṃ khayaṃ); Vv 327 (visesaṃ attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataṃ santiṃ; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati). Ajjhatta {Ajjhatta} (adj. -n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & °interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. - D I.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna), 70 = A II.210; V.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaṃ = niyakajjhattaṃ attano santāne ti attho DA I.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S I.70, 169; II..27 (kathaṃ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaṃ dukkhaṃ); III.180 (id.); IV.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; V.74 (ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ ajjhattaṃ susaṇṭhitaṃ suvimuttaṃ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A I.40 (rūpasaððī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); II.158. (sukhadukkhaṃ), 211; III.86 (cetosamatha), 92 31 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary (vūpasantacitta); IV.32 (sankhittaṃ), 57 (itthindriyaṃ), 299 (cittaṃ), 305 (rūpasaððī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); V 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J I.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); V.338 (id.); Ps I.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaṃ DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paððā), 342 (arūˊpasaððī). - adv. °ṃ inwardly, personally (in contrast-pair ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. °bahiddhā) A I.284; II.171; IV.305; V.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350).-ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. -cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388.-bahiddhā inside & outside, personal-external, mutual, interacting S II.252 sq.; III.47; IV.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). -rata with inward joy D II.107 = S V.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Th 1, 981; A IV.312; DhA IV.90 (= gocarɔ ajjhatta-sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna-bhāvanāya rata). -rūpa one's own or inner form Vin III.113 (opp. bahiddhā-rūpa & ajjh°-bah° r.). -saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A I.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. -santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). -samuṭṭhāna originating from within J I.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā°). Ajjhattika (adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaṃ vuccati cittaṃ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. - M I.62; S I.73 (°ā rakkhā na bāhirā); IV.7 sq. (āyatanāni); V.101 (anga); A I.16 (anga); II.164 (dhātuyo); III.400 (āyatanāni); V.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh IV. (= KhA 82); J IV.402 (bāhira-vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq. {Ajjhattika} Ajjhapara {Ajjhapara} S V.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.). Ajjhappatta & Ajjhapatta [adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J II.450; VI.566 (p; C. attano santikaṃ patta). - 2. having fallen upon, attacked J II.59; V.198 (p; C. sampatta) - 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); J III.296 (p. C. sampatta); V.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta). Ajjhabhavi {Ajjhapatta} {Ajjhappatta } 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome S I.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J II.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati. {Ajjhabhavi} Ajjhabhāsi {Ajjhabhasi} 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S IV.117 (gāthāhi); Kh V. = Sn p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA 56, 90. Ajjhabhu {Ajjhabhu} (3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjayaṃ a. he conquered him who is hard to conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi. Ajjhayana {Ajjhayana} (nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena. Ajjhavodahi {Ajjhavodahi} 3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J V.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt). Ajjhāgāre {Ajjhagare} (adv.) [adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra] at home, in one's own house A I.132 = It 109; A II.70. Pāli Text Society 32 Pāli-English Dictionary Ajjhācarati {Ajjhacarati} [adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct oneself according to Vin II.301; M I.523; Miln 266. - 2. to flirt with (perhaps to embrace) J IV.231 (aññam-aññaṃ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati. Ajjhācāra {Ajjhacara} [to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika's or Saṃghādisesa's) Vin I.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, I.184. - 2. flirtation Vin III.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati). - 3. sexual intercourse J I.396; V.327 (°cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln 127 (an°). Ajjhāciṇṇa {Ajjhacinna} [pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin II.80 sq., 301. Ajjhājīva [adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M II.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha). {Ajjhajiva} Ajjhāpajjati {Ajjhapajjati} [adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin IV.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.). Ajjhāpatti {Ajjhapatti} (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an°). Ajjhāpana1 {Ajjhapana} (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225. Ajjhāpana2 {Ajjhapana} (nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflagration J VI.311. Ajjhāpanna {Ajjhapanna} [pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D I.245; III.43; S II.270; A IV.277, 280; V.178, 181. an° guiltless, innocent Vin I.103; D III.46; S II.194, 269; A V.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A IV.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna. Ajjhāpīḷita {Ajjhapilita} [adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tormented PvA 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst). Ajjhābhava {Ajjhabhava} [cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predominance J II.357. Ajjhābhavati {Ajjhabhavati} [adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J II.357. Ajjhāyaka {Ajjhayaka} [cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J VI.209; SnA 192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D I.88, 120; III.94; A I.163; III.223; Sn 140 (°kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J I.3; VI.201, 498; DA I.247. Ajjhāruha {Ajjharuha} (& °rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A III.63 sq. = S V.96; J III.399. Ajjhārūḷha {Ajjharulha} (adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J III.399. Pāli Text Society 33 Pāli-English Dictionary Ajjhārūhati {Ajjharuhati} [adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S I.221 = Nett 173 (=ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings I.285). Ajjhāvadati {Ajjhavadati} see accāvadati. Ajjhāvara {Ajjhavara} [fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J V.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra. Ajjhāvasatar {Ajjhavasatar} [n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D I.63 (agāraṃ). Ajjhāvasati {Ajjhavasati} [adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraṃ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D II.16; M I.353; Vin IV.224; J I.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. - pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.). Ajjhāvuttha {Ajjhavuttha} [cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin II.210; J I.145; II.333; PvA 24 (°ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita). Ajjhāsaya {Ajjhasaya} [fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D II.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J I.88, 90; II.352; V.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dān° intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayānurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128. Ajjhāsayatā {Ajjhasayata} (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (uḷār° great desire for c. loc.). Ajjhāsita {Ajjhasita} [pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhān°). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita. Ajjhiṭṭha {Ajjhittha} [pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin I.113 (an° unbidden); D II.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd2 16); J VI.292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA IV.100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an°. Ajjhupagacchati {Ajjhupagacchati} [adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 (=sampaṭicchati ThA 285); J II.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.). Ajjhupagata {Ajjhupagata} [pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A V.87, cp. 210; V.187 sq. Ajjhupagamana {Ajjhupagamana} (nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agreement, justification Vin II.97, 104. Ajjhupaharati {Ajjhupaharati} [adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J II.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.). Ajjhupekkhati {Ajjhupekkhati} [adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupekṣati] 1. to look on A I.257; Miln 275. - 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A IV.45 (kaṭṭhɔaggi, has to Pāli Text Society 34 Pāli-English Dictionary be looked after); PvA 149 (sisaṃ colaṃ vā). - 3. to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin II.78 = III.162, cp. J I.147; M I.155; II.223; A III.194, 435; J V.229; DhA IV.125. Ajjhupekkhana {Ajjhupekkhana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps I.16; II.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA IV.3. Ajjhupekkhitar {Ajjhupekkhitar} [n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S V.69 (sādhukaṃ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227. Ajjhupeti {Ajjhupeti} [cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J IV.440. Ajjheti {Ajjheti} [Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati). Ajjhena {Ajjhena} (nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M III.1; J II.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); III.114 (= japa); V.10 (pl. = vede); VI.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mantɔ).-kujja (°kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286. Ajjhesati {Ajjhesati} (adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA IV.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin II.200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & °esita. Ajjhesanā {Ajjhesana} (f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin I.6 = D II.38 = S I.138; J II.327 (better v. l. ajjhena). Ajjhesita {Ajjhesita} [pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha). Ajjhokāsa {Ajjhokasa} [adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in loc. ajjhokāse in the open Vin I.15; S I.212; DhA IV.100. Ajjhogāḷha {Ajjhogalha} [pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M I.457; S I.201; Miln 348. [Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D I.101 (vanaṃ), 222 (samuddaṃ); M I.359, 536; A III.75, 368; IV.356; V.133; Vin III.18; J I.7; Nd1 152 (ogāhati +); Miln 87 (samuddaṃ); 300 (vanaṃ). - pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati. Ajjhoṭhapeti {Ajjhothapeti} [adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA 148 (gāmaṃ), where we should read °ṭṭhapeti. Ajjhotthata {Ajjhotthata} [pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J I.363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410; V.91 (= adhipanna); DhA I.278; PvA 55; Dāvs V.5. Ajjhottharati {Ajjhottharati} [adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin I.111; J I.61, 72, 73; Miln 296, 336; Dh I.264; Pass. °tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A III.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.). Pāli Text Society Ajjhopanna 35 Pāli-English Dictionary (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed, bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old-standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M I.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (=adhi-opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS sub- stitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. XIX.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. - 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M I.162, 173, 369; A I.74; II.28; III.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA I.59; as v. l.: D I.245. - 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A I.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA I.59 (id.). - 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D I.245; III.43, 46; S. II.194, 270: IV.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A V.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M I.162; A III.242; Ud 75, 76. {Ajjhopanna} Ajjhobhavati {Ajjhobhavati} [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi°] to overcome, overpower, destroy J II.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.). Ajjhomaddati {Ajjhomaddati} [adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A IV.191, 193. Ajjhomucchita {Ajjhomucchita} [pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A III.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuðcïta or °muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.). Ajjholambati {Ajjholambati} [adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S III 137; M III.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296. Ajjhosa {Ajjhosa} = ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S IV.73; Th 1, 98, 794. Ajjhosati {Ajjhosati} [adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M I.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviṃ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M I.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. °etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.). Ajjhosāna {Ajjhosana} (nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D II.58 sq.; III.289; M I.498 (+ abhinandana); S III.187; A I.66; II.11 (diṭṭhi°, kāma° + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā). Pāli Text Society 36 Pāli-English Dictionary Ajjhosāya {Ajjhosaya} [ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M I.266; S. IV.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa. Ajjhosita {Ajjhosita} [cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S II.94 (+ mamāyita); A II.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA 284); Pv IV.84 (mayhaṃ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). -an° S IV.213; V.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita). Ajjhohata {Ajjhohata} [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaṃ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook). Ajjhoharaṇa {Ajjhoharana} (nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A V.324; J VI.213. Ajjhoharaṇiya {Ajjhoharaniya} (adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J VI.258; DhA I.284. Ajjhoharati {Ajjhoharati} [Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M I.245; J I.460; II.293; VI.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) -pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.). Ajjhohāra {Ajjhohara} [Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin IV.233; Miln 176, 366. - 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J V.462. Añcati {Ancati} J I.417, read añchati (see next). Añchati {Anchati} [in meaning = ākaḍḍhati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aṃchāvei = aðQhati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D II.291 (bhamakāro dīghaṃ a., where K has note: aðjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M I.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch° & aðj°); Th 1, 750 (aðcāmi T., v.l. aððāmi). Aðchati should also be read at J I 417 for udakaṃ aðcanti (in expln. of udaðcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaṃ ākkaḍḍhati in the same sentence. Añja {Anja} (adv.) [orig. imper. of aðjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J I.192. Añjati1 {Anjati} [= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego, rectus = erect. See also P. uju, aðchati, ajjita, ānaðja-ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa. Añjati2 & Añjeti{Anjati} {Anjeti} [= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint, unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S II.281; J IV.219 (akkhīni aðjetvā, v. l. BB aðcitvā). Caus. II. aðjāpeti DhA I.21. - pp. añjita (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 37 Pāli-English Dictionary Añjana {Anjana} (nt.) [from añjati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black (cp. kaṇha II. and kāla1 note). - 1. Vin I.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ°, ras°, sot°, geruka, kapalla); D I.7, 12; DA I.98 (khār°); 284; DhA III.354 (akkhi° eye-salve). 2. glossy, jet-black J I.194; II.369; V.416. The reading añjana at A IV.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaṃ. See also pacc°. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 (= añjana-nāḷi ThA 267); DhA II.25.-akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. -upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin I.203; II.112. -cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA 13. -nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. -rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J I.331. -vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D II.18 (lomāni); J I.138 (kesā), 194; II.369; PvA 258 (vana). Añjanī {Anjani} (f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin I.203, 204; II.135; IV.168; M II.65 = Th 1, 773. Añjanisalākā {Anjanisalaka} (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin I.203; II.135; J III.419. Añjaya {Anjaya} (adj.) [from aðjati1] straight J III.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa? Añjali {Anjali} [cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha-samodhāna-samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliṃ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin II.188; D I.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) °ṃ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J I.54; DhA IV.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmiṃ on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) °ṃ karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J I.17; PvA 50, and añjalikata id. Pv II.1220. Cp. pañjali-kamma respectful salutation, as above A I.123; II.180; IV.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA I.32. -karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D III.5; A II.34; III.36; IV.13 sq.; It 88. Añjalikā {Anjalika} (f.) [= añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha-samodhāna samujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇavisiṭṭhānaṃ apacayānaṃ akāsiṃ). Añjasa [Sk. āðjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see aðjati1 & aðjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D I.235; J I.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pañjasa. {Anjasa} Añjita {Anjita} [Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J I.77 (su-aðjitāni akkhīni); IV.421 (añjitɔakkha). Añña {Anna} (pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. - A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin III.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attānaṃ), 165; J I.151 (opp. attano); II.333 (aññaṃ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). - 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttariṃ nt. Nd2 17); else J I.294. aññaṃ kiñci (indef.) anything else J I.151. Pāli Text Society 38 Pāli-English Dictionary yo añño every other, whoever else J I.256. - 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J I.254. - B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin I.15; Miln 40; etc. - 2. reciprocative añño aññaṃ, aññamaññaṃ, aññoññaṃ one another, each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaṃ Dh 165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu II.436), as pron.: n'ālaṃ aððamaððassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D I.56 = S III 211. n'aððamaððassa dukkhaṃ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti (approach each other) M I.86 = Nd2 199. °ṃ agāravo viharati A III.247. dve janā °ṃ ghātayiṃsu (slew each other) J I.254. aññamaññaṃ hasanti J V.111; °ṃ musale hantvā J V.267. °ṃ daṇḍābhigāṭena PvA 58; or adj.: aññamaññaṃ veraṃ bandhiṃsu (established mutual enmity) J II.353; °ṃ piyasaṃvāsaṃ vasiṃsu J II.153; aññamaññaṃ accayaṃ desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA I.57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaṃ paṭibaddha citta ahesuṃ (in love with each other) J III.188; or °-: aññamañña-paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps II.49, 58. - (c.) aññoñña (°-) J V.251 (°nissita); Dāvs V.45 (°bhinna). - 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaṃ jīvaṃ .. aññaṃ sarīraṃ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D I.157; M I.430; A V.193; aððā va saððā bhavissati aððo attā D I.187. Thus also in phrase aððena aððaṃ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin II.85 (paṭicarati make counter-charges); D I.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aññaṃ kayiramānaṃ aññena sambharati). - anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self-same, identical M I.256 (= ayaṃ). - (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (°posin; opp. paraṃ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. - (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaððā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.-ādisa different J VI.212, tā PvA 243. -khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D I.187; M I.487. -titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non-Buddhist.; D III.115; M I.494, 512; P II.21, 32 sq., 119; III.116 sq.; IV.51, 228; V.6, 27 sq.; A I.65, 240; II.176; IV.35 sq.; Vin I.60; J I.93; II.415. -diṭṭhika having diff. views (combd. with añña-khantika) D I.187; M I.487. neyya (an°) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para°) Sn 55, 213, 364. -mano (an°) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). -vāda holding other views, an° (adj.) Dpvs IV.24. -vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin IV.36. -vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent-minded Vin IV.269; DhA III.352, 381; °tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA I.181. -saraṇa (an°) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S III.42 = V.154. sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825. Aññatama {Annatama} (pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14. Aññatara {Annatara} (pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J I.221, 253; II.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S IV.180 = A IV.461. Aññattha {Annattha} (adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J I.291; II.154; DhsA 163; DhA I.212; III.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14. Pāli Text Society 39 Pāli-English Dictionary Aññatra {Annatra} (adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J V.252; Pv IV.162. In compn. also = añña°, e. g. aññatra-yoga (adj.) following another discipline D I.187; M I.487. - As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo- pakkamena D I.168; kiṃ karaṇīyaṃ a. dhammacariyāya S I.101; ko nu aððatram-ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= ṭhapetvā saððā-mattena SnA 555). -kiṃ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D I.90 (vusitavā-mānī k. a. avusitattā); S I.29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.). Aññathatta {Annathatta} (nt.) [aððathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S III.37; IV.40; A I.153; III.66; Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. - 2. difference J I.147; It 11. - 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin II.2; S III.91; IV.329. - 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M I.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J I.33 (cittaṃ); PvA 195 (cittassa). Aññathā {Annatha} (adv.) [aðða + thā] in a different manner, otherwise, differently S I.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaððathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaððatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps II.104 (= tatha).-bhāva (1) a different existence A II.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D I.36; S II.274; III.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. bhāvin based on difference S III.225 sq.; IV.23 sq., 66 sq.; an° free from difference Vin I.36. Aññadatthu {Annadatthu} (adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all-round, absolutely (ekaṃsa-vacane nipāto DA I.111) only, at any rate D I.91; II.284; Sn 828 (na hɔ aññadatthɔ atthi pasaṃsa-lābhā, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaṃsa-lābhato aððo attho atthi, cp. also Nd1 168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114.-dasa sure-seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D I.18; III.135, 185; A II.24; III.202; IV.89, 105; It 15. Aññadā {Annada} (adv.) [aðða + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S IV.285; J V.12; DhA IV.125. Aññā {Anna} (f.) [Sk. ājðā, = ā + jðā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. XXXIII.) M I.445; S I.4 (sammad°), 24 (aððāya nibbuta); II.221; V.69, 129 (diṭṭhɔeva dhamme), 133, 237; A III.82, 143, 192; V.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh VII.11; Miln 334. - aññaṃ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin I.183; S II.51 sq., 120; IV.139; V.222; J I.140; II.333. See also arahatta.-atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv IV.114. -ārādhana the attainment of full insight M I.479. -indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. -citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S II.267; A III.437. -paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin II.238. -vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta-vimokkho). Aññāṇa {Annana} (nt.) [a + ðāṇa] ignorance; see ðāṇa 3 e. Aññāṇaka {Annanaka} (nt.) [Demin. of aððāṇa] ignorance Vin IV.144. Aññāṇin {Annanin} (adj.) [a + ðāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA III.106. 40 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Aññāta1 {Annata} [pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an° what is not known, in phrase anaððāta-ððassāmīɔ tɔ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A III.175 sq.; Th 1, 953. Aññāta2 {Annata} [a + ðāta] unknown, see ðāta. Aññātaka1 {Annataka} [a + ðātaka, cp. Sk. ajðāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA I.222. Aññātaka2 {Annataka} (adj.) [Demin. of aððāta2] unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase °vesena in unknown form, in disguise J I.14; III.116; V.102. Aññātar {Annatar} [n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D II.286; M I.169; S I.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561. Aññātāvin {Annatavin} (adj. -n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291.-indriya (°tāvɔ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under aððindriya (see aððā). Aññātukāma {Annatukama} (adj.) [ā + jðātuṃ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A III.192. See ājānāti. Aññāya {Annaya} [ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S I.24; A III.41; Dh 275, 411. Aññoñña {Annonna} see añña B 2 c. Añhamāna {Anhamana} [Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expls. by āhārayamāna. Aṭaṭa {Atata} [BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A V.173 = Sn p. 126. Aṭaṇaka {Atanaka} (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J V.105 (°gāvī). Aṭanī {Atani} (f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin IV.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min. Pāt. 86 and Vin IV.357); DhA I.234; J II.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi aḍaṇī a three-legged stand. See also Vin Texts II.53. Aṭala {Atala} (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M II.155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S I.226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaṇangaṇ-ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings I.291) trsls. "buskined shoes". Pāli Text Society 41 Pāli-English Dictionary Aṭavī {Atavi} (f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non-Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J I.306; II.117; III.220; DhA I.13; PvA 277. - 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J VI.55 (= aṭavicorā C.).-rakkhika guardian of the forest J II.335. -sankhepa at A I.178 = III.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. °sankopa "inroad of savage tribes". Aṭṭa1 {Atta} [cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin I.140; DA I.209. Aṭṭa2 {Atta} [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin IV.224; J II.2, 75; IV.129 (°ṃ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (°ṃ tīreti to see a suit through); VI.336. Aṭṭa3 {Atta} [Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th 2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA 270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA 271); J IV.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often -°: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M I.463; Miln 32; chāt° tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan° afflicted by pain Vin II.61; III.100; J I.293; sūcik° (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv III.23.-ssara cry of distress Vin III.105; S II.255; J I.265; II.117; Miln 357; PvA 285. Aṭṭaka {Attaka} [Demin. of aṭṭa1] a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin I.173; II.416; III.322, 372; DA I.209. Aṭṭāna {Attana} at Vin II.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315). Aṭṭāla {Attala} [from aṭṭa] a watch-tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th 1, 863; J III.160; V.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA III.488. Aṭṭālaka {Attalaka} [Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J II.94, 220, 224; VI.390, 433; Miln 66, 81. Aṭṭita {Attita} (& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv II.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J II.436; IV.85 (v. l. addhita); V.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs I.66; II.23; XIII.9; Sdhp 205. - See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47. Aṭṭiyati & Aṭiyati{Attiyati} {Atiyati} [Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e. g. D I.213 (+ jigucchati); S I.131; M I.423; Pv I.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin II.292; J I.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps I.159. - Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th 2, 140. - pp. aṭṭita & addita. Aṭṭiyana {Attiyana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA II.179. Aṭṭha1 {Attha} [Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in-a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. °angula, °nakha, °pada, °pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. - (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in Pāli Text Society 42 Pāli-English Dictionary meaning "a couple" aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva-k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA I.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaṃ dāpesi VvA 75 = DhA III.104. a. piṇḍapātāni adadaṃ Vv 348. a. vattha-yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a therā PvA 32. - The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb-aṭṭhakaṃ dānaṃ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA II.45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭhɔ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA II.41; aṭṭh-aṭṭhakā dibbākaððā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi VvA 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs VI.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt-aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J I.86; J II.101; VvA 264 (saṃvaccharā years). - (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J I.483; IV.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. - In distances: a. karīsā DhA II.80; IV.217; PvA 258; a. usabhā J IV.142. - (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataṃ 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a-°sata-sahassa-vibhava DhA IV.7. But aṭṭhasata at S IV.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J V.377. - aṭṭha sahassaṃ 8000 J V.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyaðjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiṃsa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv II.75; asīti-koṭivibhava DhA III.129; PvA 196; asīti hatthɔ ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asīti. - (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M III.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika-buddhadhammā: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J VI.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or °koṭi, 18 koṭis J I.92 (of gold), 227; IV.378 (°dhana, riches); DhA II.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini-sankhāsenā J VI.395. a. vatthū Vin II.204. - 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln 140. - 38 aṭṭhatiṃsā Miln 359 (rājaparisā). - 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaṃ vassāni Sn 289. - 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th 1, 1217 °sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S I.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi-tasitā vitakkā); J I.64 (turiya-satasahassāni) - 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. IV.15) Sn 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). - (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. °aṃsa and °angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) - J V.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaṃ manussabhāvaṃ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J IV.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA IV.3.-aṃsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D I.76 = M III.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln 282 (maṇiratanaṃ subhaṃ jātimantaṃ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J VI.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataṃsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha-soḷasadvattiṃsādi-aṃsavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv IV.328 (gulaparimaṇḍala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. -anga (of) eight parts, eightfold, consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with °upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast-day A I.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasaṃ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaṃ uposathaṃ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. Pāli Text Society 43 Pāli-English Dictionary In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś I.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś I.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402, where Vv 156 has °susamāgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī-ādīhi aṭṭhahɔ angehi samannāgata). °samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king D I.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D II.211; J I.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś I.149. -angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhangɔ uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as aṣṭāngika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D I.156, 157, 165; M I.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh IV.; Vin I.10; Nd2 485; DA I.313; DhA III.402. angula eight finger-breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J II.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). -aḍḍha (v. l. aḍḍhaṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (°pāda) J VI.354, see also aḍḍha1. -nakha having eight nails or claws J VI.354 (: ekekasmiṃ pāde dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ khurānaṃ vasena C.). -nava eight or nine DhA III.179. pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA I.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D I.6. - 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross-plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada-katā kesā); J II.5 (°ṭṭhapana = cross-plaiting). -padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin I.297; II.150.pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J V.377; VI.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight-legged animal. -mangala having eight anspicious signs J V.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). -vanka with eight facets, lit. eight-crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J VI.388. -vidha eightfold Dhs 219. Aṭṭha2 {Attha} see attha. Aṭṭhaka {Atthaka} (adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] - 1. eightfold Vin I.196 = Ud 59 (°vaggikāni); VvA 75 = DhA III.104 (°bhatta). - 2. °ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antarɔaṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin I.31, 288 (see Vin Texst I.130n); M I.79; A I.136; Miln 396; J I.390. - 3. °ṃ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh° eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara. Aṭṭhama {Atthama} (num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. f. °ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A I.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī paðcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A I.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.). Aṭṭhamaka {Atthamaka} = aṭṭhama the eighth. - 1. lit. Miln 291 (att° self-eighth). - 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243-251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps II.193 (+ sotāpanna). Aṭṭhāna {Atthana} (nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rubbing-post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing-place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin II.105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin II.315). Pāli Text Society 44 Pāli-English Dictionary Aṭṭhi° {Atthi°} {} [= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti-kata (for citta°), angi-bhūta (for anga°); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi-kata (besides manasā-k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (°kata & °katvā). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katvā: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D II.204; M I.325, 445; S I.112 sq. = 189, 220; V.76; A II.116; III.163; J I.189; V.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaṃ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaṃ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, ayaṃ no attho adhigantabbo evaṃ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (°katvāna). Aṭṭhi2 {Atthi} (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)stra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] -1. a bone A I.50; IV.129; Sn 194 (°nahāru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J I.70; III.26, 184; VI.448 (°vedhin); DhA III.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta III.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (°camma-nahāru), 215 (gosīs°); Sdhp 46, 103. - 2. the stone of a fruit J II.104.-kankala [Sk. °kankāla] a skeleton M I.364; cp. °sankhalika. -kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J V.406. -kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA I.387. -camma bones and skin J II.339; DhA III.43; PvA 68 -taca id. J II.295.-maya made of bone Vin II.115. miðjā marrow A IV.129; DhA I.181; III.361; KhA 52. -yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S I.206. sankhalikā [B. Sk. °śakalā Sp. Av. Ś I.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika°] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA III.479; PvA 152. -sanghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA II.28; PvA 206. -sañcaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. -saððā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika°) Th 1, 18. saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101. Aṭṭhika1 {Atthika} (nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M III.92; J I.265, 428; VI.404; PvA 41. - 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA II.53 (tāl°); Mhvs 15, 42.-sankhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A III.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. -saððā the idea of a skeleton S V.129 sq.; A II.17; Dhs 264. Aṭṭhika2 {Atthika} at PvA 180 (sūcik°) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika. Aṭṭhita1 {Atthita} see ṭhita. Aṭṭhita2 {Atthita} [ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J II.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.). Aṭṭhita3 {Atthita} see atthika. Aṭṭhilla {Atthilla} at Vin II.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone. Aḍḍha1 {Addha} (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 (°sata 150) PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. aḍḍha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upaḍḍha (q. v.) is always used.-akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA IV.98. -aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhaḍḍha) S II.222 (°ratana); J VI.354 (°pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhaḍḍha). -aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA III.367. -uḍḍha [cp. Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J I.82; IV.180; V.417, 420; DhA I.87; Mhvs 12, 53. -ocitaka half plucked off J I.120. -karīsa (- Pāli Text Society 45 Pāli-English Dictionary matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aṭṭha-karīsa). -kahāpaṇa 1/2 A V.83.-kāsika (or °ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin I.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of that value; cp. Vin Texts II.195); II.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for aḍḍhakāyikāni in T.); J V.447 (a°-kāsigaṇikā for a-°kāsiya° a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a°-k°-gaṇikā viya na bahunnaṃ piyā manāpā). -kumbha a half (-filled) pitcher Sn 721. -kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross-seam Vin I.287. -kosa half a room, a small room J VI.81 (= a° kosantara C.). -gāvuta half a league J VI 55. -cūḷa (°vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps misread for aḍḍhāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A III.52), a half āḷha of rice. -tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA 66 (māsā); J I.49, 206, 255 (°sata 250). Cp. next. -teyya = °tiya 2 1/2 Vin IV.117; J II.129 (°sata); DA I.173 (v. l. BB for °tiya); DhA I.95 (°sata), 279; PvA 20 (°sahassa). -telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin I 243, 247; D II.6 (°bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA III.369. -daṇḍaka a short stick M I.87 = A I.47; II.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. -duka see °ruka. -nāḷika (-matta) half a nāḷi-measure full J VI.366. -pallanka half a divan Vin II.280. -bhāga half a share, one half Vv 136 (= upaḍḍhabhāga VvA 61); Pv I.115. -maṇḍala semi-circle, semi circular sewing Vin I.287. -māna half a māna measure J I.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaṃ nāḷinaṃ nāmaṃ C.). -māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin III.254 (ūnak°); A V.85; J III.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin IV.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. -māsaka half a bean (as weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J I.111. -māsika halfmonthly Pug 55. -muṇḍaka shaven over half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin I.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; II.146. Acc. to Vin T. I.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha "like a Garuḷa bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. -yojana half a yojana (in distance) J V.410; DA I.35 (in expln. of addhāna-magga); DhA I.147; II.74. -rattā midnight A III.40Q (°aṃ adv. at m.); Vv 8116 (°rattāyaṃ adv. = aḍḍharattiyaṃ VvA 315); J I.264 (samaye); IV.159 (id.). ratti = °rattā VvA 255, 315 (=majjhimayāma-samaya); PvA 155. -ruka (v. l. °duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin II.134; Bdhgh expln. on p. 319: aḍhadukan ti udare lomarājiṭhapanaṃ "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". -vivata (dvāra) half open J V.293. Aḍḍha2 {Addha} (adj.) [Sk. āḍhya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well-to-do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta-jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D I.115, 134, 137; III.163; Pug 52; DhA I.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (°kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = aḍḍho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA I.281 (= issara); DhA II.37 (°kula); Sdhp 270 (satasākh°), 312 (guṇ°), 540 sq. (id.), 561. Aḍḍhaka {Addhaka} (adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J IV.495; Pv II.82 (= mahāvibhava PvA 107). Aḍḍhatā {Addhata} (f.) [abstr. to aḍḍha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316. Aṇa {Ana} [Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin I.6 = S I.137, 234 = D II.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A II.69; J V.481; ThA 245. Aṇu {Anu} (adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D I.223; S I.136; V.96 (°bīja); Sn 299 (anuto aṇuṃ gradually); J III.12 (= appamattaka); IV.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt Pāli Text Society 46 Pāli-English Dictionary anu, thus usually in cpd. °matta.-thūla (aṇuṃthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA I.282), 409 = Sn 633; J IV.192; DhA IV.184. -matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M III.134; A II.22); Dpvs IV.20. The spelling is anumatta at D I.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA I.181; Sdhp 347. -sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e. residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3. Aṇuka {Anuka} (adj.) = aṇu Sn 146, KhA 246. Aṇḍa {Anda} (nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇḍa] 1. an egg Vin III.3; S II.258; M I.104; A IV.125 sq. - 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin III.106. - 3. (in camm°) a water-bag J I.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).-kosa shell of eggs Vin III.3 = M I.104; A IV.126, 176. -cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J IV.364, 366. -ja 1. born from eggs S III.241 (of snakes); M I.73; J II.53 = V.85; Miln 267. - 2. a bird J. V.189. -bhārin bearing his testicles S II.258 = Vin III.100. -sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. -hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M I.383. Aṇḍaka1 {Andaka} (nt.) = aṇḍa, egg DhA I.60; III.137 (sakuṇ°). Aṇḍaka2 {Andaka} (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇḍaka into c° aṇḍaka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭaQ] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M I.286; A V.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J III.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396. Aṇṇa {Anna} (food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa. Aṇṇava {Annava} (nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah°, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M I.134; S I.214; IV.157 (mahā udak°); Sn 173 (fig. for saṃsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J I.119 (°kucchi), 227 (id.); V.159 (mah°); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah°). - 2. a stream, river J III. 521; V.255. Aṇha {Anha} [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as -° in apar°, pubb°, majjh°, sāy°, q. v. Atakkaka {Atakkaka} (adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J YI.21. Ataccha {Ataccha} (nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D I.3; J VI.207. Ati {Ati} (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (=over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. II.3) J VI.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahitaṃ C. = accāhitaṃ T.). II. as prefix, meaning. - 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimāpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. - 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans-; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond. - Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also Pāli Text Society 47 Pāli-English Dictionary sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow, abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin. - 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). - (a) with nouns & adj.: °āsanna too near; °uttama the very highest; °udaka too much water; °khippa too soon; °dāna excessive alms giving; °dāruṇa very cruel; °dīgha extremely long; °dūra too near; deva a super-god °pago too early; °bālha too much; °bhāra a too heavy load; °manāpa very lovely; °manohara very charming; °mahant too great; °vikāla very inconvenient; °vela a very long time; °sambādha too tight, etc. etc. - (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively. III. A peculiar use of ati is its'function in reduplication-compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e. g. khaṇḍākhaṇḍa, seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi, chiddāvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkāticakkaṃ mañcātimañcaṃ bandhati to heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin IV.360 (Bdhgh); J II.331; IV.81; DhA IV.61.-devātideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānātimāna all kinds of conceit; vankātivanka crooked all over J I.160. - IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati-jāta, °pīḷita °brūheti, °vassati, °vāyati, °veṭheti. Note The contracted (assimilation-) form of ati before vowels is acc- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atīva. Ati-ambila{Atiambila} (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA II.85. Ati-arahant{Atiarahant} [ati + arahant] a super-Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Miln 277. Ati-issara {Atiissara} (adj.) very powerful(?) J V.441 (°bhesajja, medicin). Ati-uṇha {Atiunha} (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (°ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form). Ati-uttama {Atiuttama} (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80. Ati-udaka {Atiudaka} too much water, excess of water DhA I.52. Ati-ussura (adj.) only in loc. °Q (adv.) too soon after sunrise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early). {Atiussura} Ati-eti {Atieti} [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta. Atikata {Atikata} (pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A I.62. Atikaddhati {Atikaddhati} [ati + kaḍḍhati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin III.17. Atikaṇha {Atikanha} (adj.) [ati + kaṇha] too black Vin IV.7. Atikaruṇa {Atikaruna} (adj.) [ati + karuṇa] very pitiful, extremely miserable J I.202; IV.142; VI.53. Pāli Text Society 48 Pāli-English Dictionary Atikassa {Atikassa} (ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya] pulling (right) through J V.173 (rajjuṃ, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti°). Atikāla {Atikala} [ati + kāla] in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin I.70 (+ atidivā). Atikkanta {Atikkanta} [pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J II.128 (tīṇi saṃvaccharāni); DhA III.133 (tayo vaye pas- sed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (māse °e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā °ā how many days have passed).-mānusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrānta-mānuṣyaka M Vastu III.321. Atikkantikā {Atikkantika} (f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122. Atikkama {Atikkama} [Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan°), 159 (°caraṇa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur° hard to overcome); Sdhp 64. Atikkamaṇaka {Atikkamanaka} (adj.) [atikkamaṇa + ka] exceeding J I.153. Atikkamati {Atikkamati} [ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to be superior to. - J IV.141; Dh 221 (Pot. °eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome D II.13 (an°); SnA 568 (dur°). ger. atikkamma D II.12 (surpassing); It 51 (māradheyyaṃ, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J IV.139 (samuddaṃ); Pug 17; J I.162 (raṭṭhaṃ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagāmaṃ beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -pp. atikkanta (q. v.). Atikkameti {Atikkameti} [Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J I.151. Atikkhippaṃ {Atikkhippam} (adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin II.284. Atikhaṇa {Atikhana} (nt.) [ati + khaṇa(na)] too much digging J II.296. Atikhāta {Atikhata} (nt.) = prec. J II.296. Atikhiṇa {Atikhina} (adj.) [ati + khīṇa] in cāpātikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA III.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā). Atiga {Atiga} (-°) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga°); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sīma°, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha°); Nd1 100 (= atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.). Atigacchati {Atigacchati} [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accagā (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and Pāli Text Society 49 Pāli-English Dictionary accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin II.192; D I.85; S II.205; DA I.236 (=abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accaguṃ It 93, 95. Atigāḷeti {Atigaleti} [ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi-gālayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J VI.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita. Atigāḷha {Atigalha} (adj.) [ati + gāḷha 1] very tight or close, intensive J I.62. Cp. atigāḷhita. Atigāḷhita {Atigalhita} [pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated, destroyed J V.401 (= atipīḷita C.). Atighora {Atighora} (adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285. Aticaraṇa {Aticarana} (nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159. Aticarati {Aticarati} [ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv II.1215; PvA 57. - 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J I.496. Cp. next. Aticaritar {Aticaritar} [n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A II.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); IV.66 (T. aticarittā). Aticariyā {Aticariya} (f.) [ati + cariyā] transgression, sin, adultery D III.190. Aticāra {Aticara} [from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra VvA 72). Aticārin {Aticarin} (adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress S II.259; IV.242; D III.190; A III.261; Pv II.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110. Aticitra {Aticitra} (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28. Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasataṃ atikkamitvā Nd1 120). - 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J V,424; VvA 72, {Aticca} Aticchati {Aticchati} [*Sk. ati-ṛcchati, ati + ṛ, cp. aṇṇava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] J III.462; DhA IV.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. °atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. - Caus. aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J III.462. - Cp. icchatā. Aticchatta {Aticchatta} colours DhsA 2. [ati + chatta] a "super"-sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & Pāli Text Society Atitāta 50 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta] well-born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp. avajāta). {Atitata} Atitarati {Atitarati} [ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S IV.157 = It 57 (°āri). Atituccha {Atituccha} (adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430. Atituṭṭhi {Atitutthi} (f.) [ati + tuṭṭhi] extreme joy J I.207. Atitula {Atitula} (adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tulaṃ atīto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455). Atitta {Atitta} (adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J I.440; Dh 48. Atittha {Atittha} (nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fordingplace". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as °wrongly in the wrong way J I.343; IV.379; VI.241; DhA III.347; DA I.38. Atithi {Atithi} [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D I.117 (= āgantuka-navaka pāhuṇaka DA I.288); A II.68; III.45, 260; J IV.31, 274; V.388; Kh VIII.7 (= nɔ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= āgantuka). Atidāna {Atidana} (nt.) [ati + dāna] too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130. Atidāruṇa {Atidaruna} (adj.) [Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv III.73. Atiditthi {Atiditthi} (f.) [ati + diṭṭhi] higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin I.63 = II.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi-diṭṭhi?) Atidivā {Atidiva} (adv.) [ati + divā] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin I.70 (+ atikālena); S I.200; A III.117. Atidisati {Atidisati} [ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304. Atidīgha {Atidigha} (adj.) [ati + dīgha] too long, extremely long J IV. 165; Pv II.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa). Atidukkha {Atidukkha} [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca PvA 15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech. Atidūra {Atidura} (adj.) [ati + dūra] very or too far Vin I.46; J II.154; Pv II.965 = DhA III.220 (vv. ll. suvidūre); PvA 42 (opp. accāsanna). Pāli Text Society 51 Pāli-English Dictionary Atideva {Atideva} [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S I.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi°); Miln 277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devātideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a. Atidhamati {Atidhamati} [ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J I.283; pp. atidhanta ibid. Atidhātatā {Atidhatata} [ati + dhāta + ta] oversatiation J II.193. Atidhāvati {Atidhavati} [ati + dhāvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S III.103; IV.230; M III.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21. Atidhonacārin {Atidhonacarin} [ati + dhonacārin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA III.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129. Atināmeti {Atinameti} [BSk. atināmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nāmeti] to pass time A I.206; Miln 345. Atiniggaṇhāti {Atinigganhati} [ati + niggaṇhāti] to rebuke too much J VI.417. Atinicaka {Atinicaka} (adj.) [ati + nīcaka] too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68. Atineti {Atineti} [ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin II.180 (udakaṃ). Atipaṇḍita {Atipandita} (adj. [ati + paṇḍita] too clever DhA IV.38. Atipaṇḍitatā {Atipanditata} (f.) [abstr. of atipaṇḍita] too much cleverness DhA II.29. Atipadāna {Atipadana} (nt.) [ati + pa + dāna] too much alms-giving Pv II.943 (= atidāna PvA 130). Atipapañca {Atipapanca} [ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J I.64; II.93. Atipariccāga {Atipariccaga} [ati + pariccāga] excess in liberality DhA III.11. Atipassati {Atipassati} [ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M III.132 (nāgaṃ). Atipāta {Atipata} [ati + pat] attack, only in phrase pāṇātipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D I.4 (pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DA I.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Sn 242; Kh II. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc. Atipātin {Atipatin} (adj. -n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J VI.449 (in war nāgakkhandh° = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); PvA 27 (pāṇ°). Pāli Text Society 52 Pāli-English Dictionary Atipāteti {Atipateti} [Denom. fr. atipāta] to destroy S V.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimāpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripāteti. Atipīṇita {Atipinita} (adj.) [ati + pīṇita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA V.70. Atipīḷita {Atipilita} [ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīḍita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J V.401 (= atigāḷhita). Atippago {Atippago} (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with inf. carituṃ etc.) D I.178; M I.84; A IV.35. Atibaddha {Atibaddha} [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J I.192 = Vin IV.5. Atibandhati {Atibandhati} [ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J I.191 sq. - pp. atibaddha q. v. Atibahala {Atibahala} (adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J VI.365. Atibāḷha {Atibalha} (adj.) [ati + bāḷha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. °ṃ too much D I.93, 95; M I.253. Atibāheti {Atibaheti} [ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati] to drive away, to pull out J IV.366 (= abbāheti). Atibrahmā [ati + brahmā] a greater Brahma, a super-god Miln 277; DhA II.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.). Atibrūheti {Atibrahma} [ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhibṛṇhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J V.361 (= mahāsaddaṃ nicchāreti). {Atibruheti} Atibhagini {Atibhagini} -putta [ati + bh.-p.] a very dear nephew J I.223. Atibhāra {Atibhara} [ati + bhāra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (°ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati). Atibhārita {Atibharita} (adj.) [ati + bhārita] too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn IV.47. Atibhāriya {Atibhariya} (adj.) too serious DhA I.70. Atibhuñjati {Atibhunjati} [ati + bhuñjati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153. Atibhutta {Atibhutta} (nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135. Atibhoti {Atibhoti} [ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J I.163 (=ajjhottharati vañceti C.). Pāli Text Society 53 Pāli-English Dictionary Atimaññati {Atimannati} [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitvā maððati); Dh 365, 366; J II.347; Pv I.76 (°issaṃ, v. l. °asiṃ = atikkamitvā avamaññiṃ PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609. Atimaññanā {Atimannana} (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122. Atimanāpa {Atimanapa} (adj.) [ati + manāpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirūpa). Atimanorama {Atimanorama} (adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J I.60. Atimanohara {Atimanohara} (adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46. (adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488. Atimamāyati {Atimamayati} [ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J II.316. Atimahant {Atimahant} (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J I.221; PvA 75. Atimāna {Atimana} [Sk. atimāna, ati + māna] high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, M I.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1 233), 942, 968; J VI.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaððanā. Atimānin {Atimanin} (adj.) [fr. atimāna] D II.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an°) 244; KhA 236. Atimāpeti {Atimapeti} [ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaṃ atimāpeti (with v. l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill D I.52 (v. l. °pāteti) = DA I.159 (: pāṇaṃ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M I.404, 516; S IV.343; A III.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v. l. pāteti); Dh 246 (v. l. °pāteti) = DhA III.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati). Atimukhara {Atimukhara} (adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chatterbox J I.418; DhA II.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid. Atimuttaka {Atimuttaka} [Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin II.256 = M I.32; Miln 338. Atimuduka {Atimuduka} (adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J I.262. Atiyakkha {Atiyakkha} (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J VI.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka). Atiyācaka {Atiyacaka} (adj.) [ati + yācaka] one who asks too much Vin III.147. Atiyācanā {Atiyacana} (f.) [ati + yācanā] asking or begging too much Vin III.147. Atirattiṃ {Atirattim} (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidivā] late in the night, at midnight J I.436 (opp. atipabhāte). Pāli Text Society 54 Pāli-English Dictionary Atirassa {Atirassa} (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidīgha) Vin IV.7; J VI.457; VvA 103. Atirājā {Atiraja} [ati + rājā] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA II.60; Miln 277. Atiriccati {Atiriccati} [ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126. Atiritta {Atiritta} (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an° applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin I.213 sq, 238; II.301; IV.82 sq., 85. Atiriva {Atiriva} (ati-r-iva) see ativiya. Atireka {Atireka} (adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin I.255; J I.72 (°padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA II.98.-cīvara an extra robe Vin I.289. -pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin III.47. Atirekatā {Atirekata} (f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607. Atirocati {Atirocati} [ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to surpass in splendour D II.208; Dh 59; Pv II.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA I.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati); III.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati). Ativankin {Ativankin} (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J I.160 (vankātivankin crooked all over; cp. ati III.). Ativaṇṇati {Ativannati} [ati + vaṇṇati] to surpass, excel D II.267. Ativatta {Ativatta} [pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava°); Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); J V.84 (bhaya°); Miln 146, 154. Ativattati {Ativattati} [ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin II.237 (samuddo velaṃ nɔ); S II.92 (saṃsāraṃ); IV.158 (id.) It 9 (saṃsāraṃ) = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J I.58, 280; IV.134; VI.113, 114; PvA 276. - pp. ativatta (q. v.). Ativattar1 {Ativattar} [Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati-vacati; cp. ativākya] one who insults or offends J V.266 (isīnaṃ ativattāro = dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.). Ativattar2 {Ativattar} [Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati-vattati] one who overcomes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76). Ativasa {Ativasa} (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA II.79). Ativassati {Ativassati} [ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin II.240. Pāli Text Society 55 Pāli-English Dictionary Ativākya {Ativakya} (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (=aṭṭha-anariyavohāra-vasena pavattaṃ vītikkama-vacanaṃ DhA IV.3); J VI.508. Ativāta {Ativata} [ati + vāta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277. Ativāyati {Ativayati} [ati + vāyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385). Ativāha {Ativaha} [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha] carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character); J V.433. - Cp. ativāhika. Ativāhika {Ativahika} [fr. ativāha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J V.471, 472 (°purisa). Ativikāla {Ativikala} (adj.) [ati + vikāla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D I 108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DA I.277). Ativijjhati {Ativijjhati} [Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paððāya ativijjha (ger.) passati to recognise in all details M I.480; S V.226; A II.178. Ativiya {Ativiya} (adv.) [Sk. atīva] = ati + iva, orig. "much-like" like an excess = excessive-ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q. v.); - (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D II.264 (v. l. SS. atīva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; - (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J I.61, 263; DhA II.71 (a. upakāra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139. Ativisā {Ativisa} (f.) [Sk. ativiṣā] N. of a plant Vin I.201; IV.35. Ativissaṭṭha {Ativissattha} (adj.) [ati + vissaṭṭha] too abundant, in °vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J V.204. Ativissāsika {Ativissasika} (adj.) [ati + vissāsika] very, or too confidential J I.86. Ativissuta {Ativissuta} (adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473. Ativeṭheti {Ativetheti} [ati + veṣṭ, cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin II.101; J V.452 (-ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.). Ativela {Ativela} (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. °ṃ a very long time; excessively D I.19 (= atikālaṃ aticiran ti attho DA I.113); M I.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J III.103 = Nd1 504. Atilīna {Atilina} (adj.) [ati + līna] too much attached to worldly matters S V.263. Atilūkha {Atilukha} (adj.) [ati + lūkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409. Pāli Text Society 56 Pāli-English Dictionary Atiloma {Atiloma} (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J VI.457 (opp. aloma). Atisañcara {Atisancara} (°cāra?) [ati + saðcāra] wandering about too much Miln 277. Atisaṇha {Atisanha} (adj.) [ati + saṇha] too subtle DhA III.326. Atisanta {Atisanta} (adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496. Atisambādha {Atisambadha} (adj.) [ati + sambādha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68; cp. atinīcaka. - f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow J I.7. Atisaya {Atisaya} [cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī] superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dāvs II.62. Atisayati {Atisayati} [ati + śī] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Miln 336 (+ atikkamitvā). Atisara {Atisara} (adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J IV.6; cp. atisāra. Atisarati {Atisarati} [ati + sṛ] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp. paccasari; C. atidhāvi); J V.70 and atisari J IV.6. - ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) D I.222; S IV.94; A I.145; V.226, 256; Sn 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.). Atisāyaṃ {Atisayam} (adv.) [ati + sāyaṃ] very late, late in the evening J V.94. Atisāra {Atisara} [fr. ati + sṛ, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sātisāra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin I.55 (sātisāra), 326 (id.); S I.74; M III.237; Sn 889 (atisāraṃ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J V.221 (dhamm°), 379; DhA I.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara. Atisithila {Atisithila} (adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A III.375. Atisīta {Atisita} (adj.) [ati + sīta] too cold DhA II.85. Atisītala {Atisitala} (adj.) [ati + sītala] very cold J III.55. Atihaṭṭha {Atihattha} (adj.) [ati + haṭṭha] very pleased Sdhp 323. Atiharati {Atiharati} [ati + hṛ] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin II.209; IV.264; S I.89; J I.292; V.347. - Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin II.181; III.18; Miln 66; DhA IV.77. - See also atihita. Atihita {Atihita} [ati + hṛ, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vīhi). Pāli Text Society 57 Pāli-English Dictionary Atihīna {Atihina} (adj.) [ati + hīna] very poor or destitute A IV.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogāḷha). Atihīḷeti {Atihileti} [ati + hīḍ] to despise J IV.331 (= atimaññati C.). Atīta {Atita} (adj.-n.) [Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atītaṃ addhānaṃ in the time which is past S III.86; A IV.219; V.32. - Pv II.1212 (atītānaṃ, scil. attabhāvāuaṃ, pariyanto na dissati); khaṇātīta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. - (b) nt. the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time J I.98 etc. atītaṃ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jātaka J I.213, 218, 221 etc.- S I.5 (atītaṃ nānusocati); A III.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. atītānāgate in past & future S II.58; Sn 373; J VI.364. Or all three in ster. combn. atītɔ-anāgata-paccuppanna (this the usual order) D III.100, 135; S II.26, 110, 252; III.19, 47, 187; IV.4 sq.; 151 sq.; A I.264 sq., 284; II.171, 202; III.151; V.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata, e. g. PvA 100. - 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S I.97 (maraṇaṃ an° not free from death), 121 (sabbavera-bhaya°); A II.21; III.346 (sabbasaṃyojana°); Sn 373 (kappa°), 598 (khaya°, of the moon = ūnabhāvaṃ atīta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) - 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhammaṃ).-aṃsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho ThA 233) D II.222; III.275; Th 2, 314. -ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041. Atīradassin {Atiradassin} (adj.-n.) [a + tīra + dassin] not seeing the shore J I.46; VI.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) J V.75 (nāvā). Cp. D I 222. Atīva {Ativa} (indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J II.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc. Ato {Ato} (adv.) [Sk. ataḥ] hence, now, therefore S I.15; M I.498; Miln 87; J V.398 (= tato C.). Atoṇa {Atona} [etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191. Atta1 {Atta} [ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d-to; cp. Sk. ātta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta-daṇḍa, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S I.236; IV.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Attaṃ pahāya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd I.82, 90, 107, 352; II.271; SnA 523; DhA IV.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaṃ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin II.247 (quoted V.91). Atta2 {Atta} see attan. Atta3 {Atta} [Sk. akta, pp. of añjati] see upatta. Attan {Attan} (m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic ātman, not to Gr. a)\nemos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm]. - I. Pāli Text Society 58 Pāli-English Dictionary Inflection. (1) of attan- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaṃ D I.13, 185; S I.24; Sn 132, 451. - gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A III.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). - instr. abl. attanā S I.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA II.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attanā see below III.1 C. - loc. attani S V.177; A I.149 (attanī metri causa); II.52 (anattani); III.181; M I.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an°).- (2) of atta- (a-stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaṃ Dh 379. - instr. attena S IV.54. - abl. attato S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336. Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251-255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D I.31. Seven other theories D I.34. Three others D I.186/7. A „soul‟ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S IV.54 = Kvu 67; Vin I.14; M I.138. See also M I.233; III.265, 271; S II.17, 109; III.135; A I.284; II.164, 171; V.188; S IV.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma, puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma-rūpa. 2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. S I.71, 169; III.120; A I.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu VIII.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaṃ S I.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A I.89; Sn 709. Acc. attaṃ Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A I.149; III.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attanā S I.57 = Dh 66; S I.75; II.68; A I.53; III.211; IV.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S IV.307; V.354; A I.297; II.99, 218; III.81; J I.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D II.147; °catuttha with himself as fourth M I.393; A III.36; °pañcama Dpvs VIII.2; °sattama J I.233; °aṭṭhama VvA 149 (as atta-naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & °aṭṭhamaka Miln 291. anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca - (1) as noun: S III.141 (°anupassin); IV.49; V.345 (°saððin); A II.52 = Ps II.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā, the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dh 279; Ps II.37, 45 sq. (°anupassanā), 106 (yaṃ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taṃ anattā); DhA III. 406 (°lakkhaṇa). - (2) as adj. (pred.): S IV.152 sq.; S IV.166; S IV.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin I.13 = S III.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S III.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin V.86; S III.133; IV.28, 401. -attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J IV.56, 96; otherwise as atta-d-attha, e. g. Sn 284. -atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. -ādhipaka master of oneself, self-mastered A I.150. -adhipateyya selfdependence, self-reliance, independence A I.147. -ādhīna independent D I.72. -ānudiṭṭhi speculation about souls S III.185; IV.148; A III.447; Sn 1119; Ps I.143; Vbh 368; MilnQ 146. ānuyogin one who concentrates his attention on imself Dh 209; DhA III.275. -ānuvāda blaming oneself A II.121; Vbh 376. -uððā self-humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att-avaððā). -uddesa relation to oneself Vin III.149 (= attano atthāya), also °ika ibid. 144. -kata self-made S I.134 (opp. para°). kāma love of self A II.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S I.75. -kāra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahaṃkāra) D I.53 (opp. para°); A III 337 (id.) DA I.160; as nt. at J V.401 in the sense of service (self-doing", slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). -kilamatha self-mortification D III.113; S IV.330; V.421; M III.230. -garahin selfcensuring Sn 778. -gutta selfguarded Dh 379. -gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, selfcare A II.72. -ghañña self-destruction Dh 164. -ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (pāpa). -ðū knowing oneself A IV.113, cp. D III.252. -(n)tapa self-mortifying, self-vexing D III.232 = A II.205 (opp. paran°); M I.341, 411; II.159; Pug 55, 56. -daṇḍa see atta1. -danta selfrestrained, selfcontrolled Dh 104, 322. -diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA Pāli Text Society 59 Pāli-English Dictionary 523, 527. -dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña°) D II.100 = III.42; S V.154; Sn 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaṃ katvā SnA 416). -paccakkha only in instr. °ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J V.119. -paccakkhika eye-witness J V.119. -paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin II.94, 96. -paṭilābha acquisition of a personality D I.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). -paritāpana self-chastisement, mortification D III.232 = A II.205; M I.341; PvA 18, 30. -parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin II.110. -paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353. -bhāva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, 73 (°pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. Ś I.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin II.238 (living beings, forms); S V.442 (bodily appearance); A I.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature); II.17 (creature); DhA II.64, 69 (appearance); SnA 132 (personality). - (2) life, rebirth A I.134 sq.; III.412; DhA II.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (atītā °ā former lives). °ṃ pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin II.185; III.105; D III.231; M III.46; S II.255, 272, 283; III.144; A II.159, 188; III.122 sq. - (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J I.61. -rūpa "of the form of self", self-like only in instr. °ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S IV.97; A II.120. -vadha self-destruction S II.241; A II.73. -vāda theory of (a persistent) soul D III.230; M I.66; D II.58; S II.3, 245 sq.; III.103, 165, 203; IV.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps I.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavādic" doctrine see Index to Saṃyutta Nikāya. -vyābādha personal harm or distress self-suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para°) M I 369; S IV.339 = A I.157; A II.179. -vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. -saðcetanā self-perception, self-consciousness (opp. para°) D III.231; A II.159. -sambhava originating from one's self S I.70; A IV.312; Dh 161 (pāpa); Th 1, 260. -sambhūta arisen from oneself Sn 272. -sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A II.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132. -saraṇa see °dipa. -sukha happiness of oneself, self-success Dpvs I.66, cp. II.11. -hita personal welfare one's own good (opp. para°) D III.233; A II.95 sq. -hetu for one's own sake, out of selfconsideration Sn 122; Dh 328. Attaniya {Attaniya} (adj.) [from attā] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul-like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M I.138 = Kvu 67; M I.297; II.263; S III.78 (yaṃ kho anattaniyaṃ whatever has no soul), 127; IV.54 = Nd2 680 F; S IV.82 = III.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S IV.168; V.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff. Attamana {Attamana} [atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka-mano DA I.255 = attā + mano. He applies the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manatā mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D I.3, 90 (an°); II.14; A III.337, 343; IV.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upaṭṭhita-satt DhA IV.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (=tuṭṭha-mano haṭṭha-mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an°); Miln 18; DA I.52; DhA I.89 (an°-dhātuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano). Attamanatā {Attamanata} (f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M I.114; A I.276; IV.62; Pug 18 (an°); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an°); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an°). Attāṇa {Attana} (adj.) [a + tāṇa] without shelter or protection J I.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285. Attha1 {Attha} (also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from ṛ, arti & ṛṇoti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, Pāli Text Society 60 Pāli-English Dictionary blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well-being M I.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S IV.94 (id.); S I.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A II.46 (atthassa patti); S I.162 (attano ca parassa ca); II.222 (id.); IV.347 (°ṃ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying, cp. attha-bhañjanaka); A I.61 (°ṃ anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); III.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); A V.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. attā better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att° par° ubhay°, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik° samparāyik° param° gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hiQ sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituṃ SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv II.61); PvA 30 (atthaṃ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena). - dat. atthāya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e. g. D III.211 sq.; It 79. - Kh VIII.1 (to my benefit); Pv I.43 (= upakārāya PvA 18), II.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6. Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J I.256 (= vaḍḍhiṃ C.); III.394 (id.); Pv IV.14 (= dhanaṃ PvA 219). - Often as -°: att°, one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par° and ubhay° (see above) S II.29; V.121; A I.158, 216; III.63 sq.; IV.134; Sn 75 (att-aṭṭha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta-d-attha); uttam° the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA IV.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param° id. Nd2 26; sad° one's own weal D II.141; M I.4; S II.29; V.145; A I.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the meaning, in spirit"? see sāttha) D I.62; S V.352; A II.147; III.152; Nd2 316. - 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S I.37 (°jāta when need has arisen, in need); J I.254; III.126, 281; IV.1; DhA I.398 (nɔ atthi etehɔ attho I have no use for them); VvA 250; PvA 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). - 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word), denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh-uppatti and aṭṭha-kathā (see below). On term see also Cpd. 4. - S III.93 (atthaṃ vibhajati explain the sense); A I.23 (id.), 60 (nīt° primary meaning, literal meaning; neyy° secondary or inferred meaning); II.189 (°ṃ ācikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 (°ṃ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (°ṃ akkhāti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd. 6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); DhA II.82; III.175; KhA 81 (pad° meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 (°ṃ vadati to explain, interpret), 16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA I.65; DhA IV.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. -4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary, natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A I.69; V.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhāsitatthað ca pāḷidhammañ ca SnA 333); It 84 (duṭṭho atthaṃ na jānāti dhammaṃ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhāsitatthað cɔ eva desanādhammað ca); J II.353; VI.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv III.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. °dhamma, °paṭisambhidā, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yenɔ atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attanā), J I.411 (atthaṃ vā kāraṇaṃ vā reason and cause); DhA II.95 (+ kāraṇa(; PvA 11 (ayaṃ hɔ ettha attho this is the reason why). - 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S II.36 (ekena-padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J I.151 (taṃ atthaṃ Pāli Text Society 61 Pāli-English Dictionary the matter); II.160 (imaṃ a. this); VI.289 (taṃ atthaṃ pakāsento); PvA 6 (taṃ atthaṃ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaṃ atthaṃ what had been said), 82 (id.). - (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa atthaṃ dhāresi whose cause do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. - 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat. atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for J I.254 dhanɔ atthāya for wealth, kim° what for, why?), 279; II.133; III.54; DhA II.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. - (b) acc. atthaṃ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J I.279 (kim°); III.53 (id.); I.253; II.128; Dpvs VI.79; DhA I.397; PvA 32 (dassan° in order to see), 78, 167, etc. - (c) abl. atthā J III.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.). - (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc. anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S I.103; II.196 (anatthāya saṃvattati); A IV.96 (°ṃ adhipajjati) It 84 (°janano doso ill-will brings discomfort); J I.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA I.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA II.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. - 2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A V.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyyānad°īpaka DhA II.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahitaṃ). akkhāyin showing what is profitable D III.187. -attha riches J VI.290 (= atthabhūtaṃ atthaṃ C.). -antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma-dhara (q. v.). -abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S I.87 (see abhisamaya). -uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs V.37. -upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma-savanna) M III.175; A III.381 sq.; IV.221; V.126. -uppatti (aṭṭh°) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J I.89; DA I.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pāḷito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. -kāma (adj.) (a) well-wishing, a well-wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma, e. g. Bhagavadgīta II.5: gurūn arthakāman) S I.140, 197, 201 sq.; A III.143; D III.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakāmo); J I.241; Pv IV.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an°). - (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S I.44; PvA 112. - -kathā (aṭṭha°) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J V.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in N. of Com. -kara beneficial, useful Vin III.149; Miln 321. -karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aṭṭa°) D II.20; S I.74 (judgment hall?). -kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A II.230. -kāmin = °kāma, well-wishing Sn 986 (devatā atthakāminī). -kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain D III.186. -kusala clever in finding out what is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). -cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S I.23 (narānaṃ = "working out man's salvation"). -caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D I.107 (= hitakāraka DA I.276); J II.87; III.326; IV.230; VI.369. -cariyā useful conduct or behaviour D III.152, 190, 232; A II.32, 248; IV.219, 364. -ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaððū) D III.252; A III.148; IV.113 sq. -dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitānupassin SnA 373). -dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk. arthadarśika) J VI.286 (but expld. by C. as "saṇha-sukhumapañña" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). -desanā interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm°). -dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. °anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J II.105; DhA II.71. -pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A II.189; III.356; Dh 100. -paṭisambhidā knowledge of the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma° of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps I.132; II.150; Vbh 293 sq. -paṭisaṃvedin experiencing good D III.241 (+ dhamma°); A I.151; III.21. -baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. -bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA III.356 (paresaṃ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). -majjha of beautiful waist J V.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading Pāli Text Society 62 Pāli-English Dictionary must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). -rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma°, vimutti°) Nd2 466; Ps II.88, 89. -vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D II.285; M I.464; II.120; III.150; S II.202; III.93; IV.303; V.224; A I.61, 77, 98; II.240; III.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kāraṇa DhA III.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. -vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. -vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. -vādin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla° bhūta° dhamma° D I.4; III.175; A I.204; II.22, 209; Pug 58; DA I.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). -saṃvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis PvA 1. -saṃhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D I.189; S II.223; IV.330; V.417; A III.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena saṃhitaṃ SnA 500); Pug 58. -sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps I.105. -siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J I.402; PvA 63. Attha2 {Attha} (nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as °- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 (= vināsaṃ natthibhāvaṃ gacchati DhA III.324), 384 (= parikkhayaṃ gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J I.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi-sesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. -atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D I.34, 37, 183; S IV.327; A III.326; Ps II.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. -atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J I.101 (suriyass'atthagamanā at sunset) DA I.95 (= ogamana). - attha-gāmin, in phrase udayɔ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paððā): see udaya. -atthaṃ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). - Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA I.86; III.127. - Cp. also abbhattha. Attha3 {Attha} pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.). Atthata {Atthata} [pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with (-°) Vin I.265; IV.287; V.172 (also °an); A III.50; PvA 141. Atthatta {Atthatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 (-°). Atthara {Atthara} [fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D I.7. Attharaka {Attharaka} [= atthara] a covering J I.9; DA I.87. - f. °ikā a layer J I.9; V.280. Attharaṇa {Attharana} (nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin II.291; A II.56; III.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22. Pāli Text Society 63 Pāli-English Dictionary Attharati {Attharati} [ā + stṛ] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin I.254; V.172; J I.199; V.113; VI.428; Dh I.272. -pp. atthata (q. v.). - Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread J V.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69. Atthavant {Atthavant} (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S I.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172. Atthāra {Atthara} [cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin V.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin II.87 (covering). Atthi {Atthi} [Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/-e)sti/; Lat. sum-est; Goth. im-ist; Ags. eom-is E. amis] to be, to exist. - Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J I.151; III.55, and amhi M I.429; Sn 694; J II.153; Pv I.102; II.82. - 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J II.160 (ɔsi); III.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. - 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J I.278. Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e. g. J I.280; II.2; III.55. - 1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J II.128. 2nd pl. attha J II.128; PvA 39, 74 (āgatɔ attha you have come). - 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= saṃvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J II.353; PvA 7, 22 -Imper. atthu Sn 340; J I.59; III.26. - Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv II.88, and assaṃ [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv I.125 (=bhaveyyaṃ PvA 64). - 2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv II.87. - 3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] D II.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); J I.262; PvA 13, and assa D I.135, 196; II.154; A V.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv II.324; 924. - 1st pl. assu PvA 27. - 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv IV.136 (= bhaveyyuṃ PvA 231). - Aor. 1st sg. āsiṃ [Sk. āsaṃ] Sn 284; Pv I.21 (= ahosiṃ PvA 10); II.34 (= ahosiṃ PvA 83). - 3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Sn 994. - 3rd āsuṃ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv II.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). - Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J I.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J I.150 (loc. evaṃ sante in this case); III.26, and samāna (q. v.) J I.266; IV.138.-bhāva state of being, existence, being J I.222, 290; II.415; DhA II.5; IV.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not). Atthika {Atthika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D I.55 (°vāda); M II.212 (aṭṭhita); A III.219 sq. (idaṃ atthikaṃ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaṃ, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (aṭṭhita; Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a-ṭhita); J V.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pug A V.4 by kalyāṇāya). - 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of (-°), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A II.199 (uday° desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (puññ°), 987 (dhan° greedy for wealth); J I.263 (rajj° coveting a kingdom); V.19; Pv II.228 (bhojan° in need of food); IV.11 (kāraṇ°), 121 (khiḍḍ° for play), 163 (puññ°); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA I.70 (atthikā those who like to). -anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J V.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.).-bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A V.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120. Atthikavant {Atthikavant} (adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D I.90 (atthikaṃ assa atthī ti DA I.255). Atthitā {Atthita} (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva] state of being, existence, being, reality M I.486; S II.17 (°añ c° eva natthitañ ca to be and not to be); III.135; J V.110 (kassaci atthitaṃ vā natthitaṃ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. - Often in abl. atthitāya by Pāli Text Society 64 Pāli-English Dictionary reason of, on account of, this being so DhA III.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143. Atthin {Atthin} (adj.) (-°) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant°, vād°. Atthiya {Atthiya} (adj.) (-°) [= atthika] having a purpose or end S III.189 (kim° for what purpose?); A V.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att° having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiyaṃ on account of what). Atra {Atra} (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J I.414 = IV.5 (in expln. of atriccha). Atraja {Atraja} (adj.) [Sk. *ātma-ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika p. Nd2 448. - J I.135; III.103 = Nd1 504; J III.181; V.465; VI.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57. Atriccha {Atriccha} (adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA IV.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J I.414 = IV.4; III.206. Atricchā {Atriccha} (f.) [Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to a form *a.-tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J IV.5, 327. Atricchatā {Atricchata} (f.) [see atricchā] excessive lust J. III.222. Atha {Atha} (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D II.2; III.152, 199 (athāparaṃ etad avoca); M I.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athāparaṃ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J II.158; Pv II.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. - 2. after negative clauses: but M I.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin I.1; D I.141, 167, 174; A V.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na-atha kho na neither-nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D I.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J I.279. atha vā or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv I.41; II.14. athā vā pi Sn 917, 921. Athabbaṇa {Athabbana} [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA I.247 = SnA 447 (°veda). - (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J VI.490 (sāthabbaṇa=sahatthivejja, with the elephant-healer or doctor). See also āthabbaṇa. Atho {Atho} (indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adversative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S I.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J I.83; II.185; IV.495; It 106; Kh VIII.7; Pv Pāli Text Society 65 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.315; PvA 251 (atho ti nipātamattaṃ avadhāraṇ-atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv II.320; KhA 166. Ada {Ada} (adj.) (-°) [to ad, see adeti, cp. °ga, °ṭha, °da etc.] eating S IV.195 (kiṭṭhāda eating corn); J II.439 (vantāda = vantakhādaka C.). Adaka {Adaka} (adj.) = ada J V.91 (purisādaka man-eater). Adana {Adana} (nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J V.374 (v.l. modana). Adasaka {Adasaka} (adj.) see dasā. Adāsa {Adasa} [prob. = adaṃsa, from ḍasati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J IV.466. Adiṭṭhā {Adittha} [a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J IV.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); V.219. Adinna {Adinna} (pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn'ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa-sīla see sīla II.). Vin I.83 (°ā veramaṇī); D I.4 (= parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikā ti vuttaṃ hoti DA I.71); III.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M I.361; It 63; Kh II., cp. KhA 26. - adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin I.85; D I.138; Sdhp 78. Adu {Adu} (or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduṃ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv IV.317 (ādu) = DhA I.31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. ādu); J V.330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaṃ karohī ti). See also ādu. Aduṃ {Adum} nt. of pron. asu. Adūsaka {Adusaka} (adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J V.143 (= nirapa- rādha C.); VI.84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn 312. Adūsiya {Adusiya} = adūsaka J V.220 (= anaparādha C.). Adeti {Adeti} [Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J V.31, 92, 197, 496; VI.106. pot. adeyya J V.107, 392, 493. Adda1 {Adda} [cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J I.244 (°singivera). Adda2 & Addā {Adda} 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a. Pāli Text Society 66 Pāli-English Dictionary Adda3 {Adda} (adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J IV.353; VI.309; Miln 346.-āvalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S IV.187 (kūṭāgāra); M I.86=Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo). See also addha2. The reading allāvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered." Addakkhi {Addakkhi} 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b. Addasā {Addasa} 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a. Addā & Addāyanā {Adda} {Addayana} at Vbh 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya. Addāyate {Addayate} [v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J IV.351. See also allīyati. Addi {Addi} [Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs II.13. Addita {Addita} (pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J I.21; II.407; III.261; IV.295; V.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281. Addha1 {Addha} (num.) [= aḍḍha, q. v.] one half, half (°-) D I.166 (°māsika); A II.160 (°māsa); J I.59 (°yojana); III. 189 (°māsa). Addha2 {Addha} (adj.) [= adda3, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M II.223 (na anaddhabhūtaṃ attānaṃ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S III.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J VI.548 (°nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha). Addhan {Addhan} (in cpds. addha°) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. - Cases: nom. addhā, gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaṃ, loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J IV.384 = V.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. °addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at IV.384 by ākāsa-patha-sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at V.137 by pathaddhagato addha-pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv III.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala-magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half-way", i. e. on full-moon-day. He rejects the expln. of C. - 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D III.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ (acc.) a very long time A II.1, 10 (dighaṃ addhānaṃ saṃsāraṃ); Sn 740 (dīghaṃ addhāna saṃsāra); Dh 207 (dīghaṃ addhāna socati); J I.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā S I.78; A II.118; PvA 28. -āyu duration of life A II.66 (dīghaṃ °ṃ a long lifetime. -gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu II.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin II.188; D Pāli Text Society 67 Pāli-English Dictionary I.48 (cp. DA I.143); M I.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. -gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S I.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J III.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302. Addhā {Addha} (adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D I.143; J I.19 (a. ahaṃ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaṃ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; III.340; V.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps II.21 (ekaṃsa-vacanaṃ nissaṃsaya-vacanaṃ etc.) addhā hi J IV. 399; Pv IV.15 2. Addhaneyya {Addhaneyya} (adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting J V.507 (an°). Addhaniya {Addhaniya} (adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. - 2. belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D III.211; J I.393 (an°) VI.71. See also addhaneyya. Addhariya {Addhariya} [Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacrificing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D I.237 (brāhmaṇa). Addhāna {Addhana} (nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaṃ addhānaṃ. It occurs only in acc. which may always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhānaṃ = ciraṃ). Usually in phrase atītaṃ (anāgataṃ etc.) addhānaṃ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D I.200; S I.140; A V.32; Miln 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for °aṃ); PvA 75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaṃ addhānaṃ Pv I.105. Also in phrase addhānaṃ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S IV.110; J II.293 (= jīvitaddhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C). -daratha exhaustion from travelling DA I.287. -magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D I.1, 73, 79; M I.276 (kantār°); DA I.35 (interpreted as "addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmī ti bhuðjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha-yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. -parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. -vemattatā difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ āyuvemattatā). Addhika {Addhika} [fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA I.298 (= pathāvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (°jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as °iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J I.6 (v. l. °iddhika 262; DhA II.26. Addhita {Addhita} at Pv II.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB). Addhin {Addhin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh 90. Addhuva {Addhuva} see dhuva. Adrūbhaka {Adrubhaka} see dubbha. Pāli Text Society 68 Pāli-English Dictionary Advejjhatā {Advejjhata} see dvejjhatā. Adha° {Adha°} in cpds. like adhagga see under adho. Adhamma {Adhamma} see dhamma. Adhama {Adhama} (adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (narādhama), 135 (vasalādhama); Dh 78 (purisa°); J III.151 (miga°); V.394 (uttamādhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387. Adhara {Adhara} (adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J III.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip). Adhi {Adhi} [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a° + suffix-dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n-qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to]. A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). - (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman "this self here" (see C 1 b). B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā° (adhi + ā), adhippa° (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.cpd., like ā in paccā° (prati + ā), paryā° (pari + ā) or ava in paryava° (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud° (abhi + ud), samud° (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super"-(adhideva a super-god, cp. atideva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref.-cpds. (ajjhāvasati "to dwell here-in" = āvasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). - In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far-fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, °kodhita, °jeguccha, °brahmā; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, °pātcti, °ppāya, °ppeta, °bādheti, °bhū, °vāha. Cp. also ati IV. C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. - (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; °kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; °kāra commission; °gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; °gama attainment; °gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, °peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; °pāya sense meaning, intention; °bhāsati to speak to = address; °mutta intent upon; °vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur-nom; °vāsāna assent, °vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. - (b) where: °tiṭṭhati (°ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; °ṭṭhāna place where; °vasati to inhabit; °sayana "lying in", inhabiting. - 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi-jeguccha very detestable; °matta "in an extreme measure", °pa supreme lord; °pacca lordship; °paððā higher, additional wisdom; °vara the very best; °sīla thorough character or morality. - (b) with verbs (in double pref.-cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination); °otthata covered completely; °oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite overwhelmed; °āvuttha inhabited; °ārūhati grown up over; °āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; °upeti to receive; °upekkhati "to look all along over" = to Pāli Text Society 69 Pāli-English Dictionary superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire. Note. The contracted (assimilation-)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh- (q. v.). Adhika {Adhika} (adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA I.141, 222; Dpvs V.32 (an°); DhA III.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. - compar. adhikatara DhA II.7; III.176; nt. °ṃ as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimattaṃ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun-determination), e. g. catunahutādhikāni dve yojana-sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J I.25; sattamāsādhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J V.319; paððāsādhikāni paðca vassa-satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sādhika. Adhikata {Adhikata} (adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv II.927 (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA 124). - 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma°). - 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+vimātijāta). Adhikaraṇa {Adhikarana} (nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. - 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D II.59 (-°: in consequence of); S II.41; V.19. Esp. acc. °ṃ as adv. (-°) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M I.410 (rūpādhikaraṇaṃ); S IV.339 (rāga°); Miln 281 (mudda° for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimādhikaraṇaṃ why, on account of what J IV.4 (= kiṃkāraṇaṃ) yatvādhikaraṇaṃ (yato + adhi°) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D I.70 = A I.113 = II.16 = D III.225. - 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda° anuvāda° āpatta° kicca° "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin II.88; III.164; IV.126, 238; M II.247. - Often ref.: Vin II.74; S IV.63 = V.346 (dhamma° a question of the Dh.); A I.53 (case), 79; II.239 (vūpasanta); V.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA IV.2 (°ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaṃ karoti to raise a dispute M I.122 °ṃ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin II.261.kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin IV.230 (f. °ikā); A III.252. -samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D III.254; M II.247; A I.99; IV.144. Adhikaraṇika {Adhikaranika} [fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A V.164, 167. Adhikaraṇī {Adhikarani} (f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J III.285; Dāvs III.16 sq.; DhsA 263. Adhikāra {Adhikara} [cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin I.55; J I.56; VI.251; Miln 60, 115, 165; PvA 124 (dāna°; cp. Pv II.927); DhA II.41. Adhikārika {Adhikarika} (adj.) (-°) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin III.274 (Bdhgh). Adhikuṭṭanā {Adhikuttana} (f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executioner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kuḍḍanā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA 287. Pāli Text Society 70 Pāli-English Dictionary Adhikusala {Adhikusala} (adj.) [adhi + kusala] in °ā dhammā "items of higher righteousness" D III.145. Adhikodhita {Adhikodhita} (adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J V.117. Adhigacchati {Adhigacchati} [adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D I.229 (vivesaṃ) M I.140 (anvesaṃ nɔ ādhigacchanti do not find); S I.22 (Nibbānaṃ); II.278 (id.); A I.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santiṃ); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv I.74 (nibbutiṃ = labhati PvA 37); III.710 (amataṃ padaṃ). opt. adhigaccheyya D I.224 (kusalaṃ dhammaṃ); M I.114 (madhu-piṇḍikaṃ); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. °gantvā D I.224; J I.45 (ānisaṃse); and °gamma Pv I.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA 60). grd. °gantabba It 104 (nibbāna). cond. °gacchissaṃ Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū J I.256 (vyasanaṃ) & ajjhāgamuṃ S I.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. - pp. adhigata (q. v.). Adhigaṇhāti {Adhiganhati} [adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S I.87 = DA I.32; D III.146; S IV.275; A III.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv II.962 = DhA III.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It 20. - pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.). Adhigata {Adhigata} [pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, conquered, attained, found J I.374; VvA 135. Adhigatavant {Adhigatavant} (adj.-n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbānaṃ). Adhigama {Adhigama} [fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D III.255; S II.139; A II.148; IV.22, 332; V.194; J I.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207. Adhigameti {Adhigameti} [adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30. Adhiggahīta {Adhiggahita} [pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (instr.), possessed J III.427 (= anuggahīta C.); V.102; VI.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98. Adhiciṇṇa {Adhicinna} only at S III.12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa. Adhicitta {Adhicitta} (nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaððā Vin I.70; D III.219; M I.451; A I.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (°sikkhā); Dh 185 (= aṭṭha-samāpattisankhāta adhika-citta DhA III.238). Adhiceto {Adhiceto} (adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty-minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin IV.54 = DhA III.384. Adhicca1 {Adhicca} [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J III.218, 327 = IV.301; IV.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); VI.213; Miln 164. Pāli Text Society 71 Pāli-English Dictionary Adhicca2 {Adhicca} (°-) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: °āpattika guilty without intention M I.443; °uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; °laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J V.171 = VI.315 (expld. at J V.171 by ahetunā, at VI.316 by akā- raṇena) °samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D I.28 = Ud 69; D III.33, 138; S II.22-23 (sukhadukkhaṃ); A III.440 (id.); Ps I.155; DA I.118 (= akāraṇa°). Adhicca3 {Adhicca} (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S V.457. Adhijeguccha {Adhijeguccha} (nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D I.174, 176. Adhiṭṭhaka {Adhitthaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J V.427 (surā°). Adhiṭṭhāti & Adhiṭṭhahati {Adhitthati} {Adhitthahati} [Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J III.278 (ger. °āya); DhA IV.183 (ger. °hitvā); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. °āhi). - 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin I.115 (inf. °ṭhātuṃ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. °ṭhātabba) J I.80 (aor. °ahi); III.278; IV.134 (v. l. ati° C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA I.34; IV.201 (ger. °hitvā); PvA 23 (aor. °ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. °hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. - 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S II.17; A I.115 sq.; J I.50; PvA 209 (ger. °ṭhāya). - pp. adhiṭṭhita (q. v.). Adhiṭṭhāna {Adhitthana} (nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self-determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D III.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paððā°, sacca° cāga° upasama°); J I.23; V.174; Ps I.108; II.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). - 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M I.136; III.31, 240; S II.17; III.10, 135, 194. - As adj. (-°) applying oneself to, bent on A III.363. - 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devānaṃ); PvA 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode]. Adhiṭṭhāyaka {Adhitthayaka} (adj.) (-°) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma° Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta° DhA I.393. Adhiṭṭhita {Adhitthita} (adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaṃ ṭhānaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA 269). - (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin I.57; S V.278 (svɔādhiṭṭhita); PvA 141 (kammanta). - (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariyaṃ). Adhideva {Adhideva} [adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M II.132; A IV.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva. Adhipa {Adhipa} [Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J II.369; III.324; V.393; Pv II.86 (jan° king); Dāvs III.52; VvA 314. 72 Pāli Text Society Adhipaka Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) (-°) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A I.150 (atta° loka° dhamma°). {Adhipaka} Adhipajjati {Adhipajjati} [adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A IV.96 (anatthaṃ); pp. adhipanna. Adhipaññā {Adhipanna} (f.) [adhi + paððā] higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paððā); usually in combn. with adhicitta & adhisīla Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219 (°sikkhā); A I.240; II.92 sq., 239; III.106 sq., 327; IV.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps I.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; II.11, 244; Pug 61. Adhipatati {Adhipatati} [adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J IV.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaṃ atikkamati C.). - Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta. Adhipatana {Adhipatana} (nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271. Adhipati {Adhipati} (n.-adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J IV.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA I.36 (= seṭṭha). - 2. ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chandaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta° autonomous, loka° heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60. Adhipateyya {Adhipateyya} (nt.) A I.147; III 33 = S IV.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya. Adhipatthita {Adhipatthita} [pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D I.120. Adhipanna {Adhipanna} [cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by (-°), a victim of (c. loc.) S I.72, Th 2, 345 (kāmesu); Sn 1123 (taṇhā° = taṇhānugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J III.38, 369; IV.396; V.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); VI.27. Adhipāṭimokkha (nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin V.1 (pāṭim° +); M II.245 (+ ajjhājīva). {Adhipatimokkha} Adhipāta1 {Adhipata} [adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā° head-splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 °vipāta). Adhipāta2 {Adhipata} [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taṃkāraṇā a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā). Adhipatikā {Adhipatika} (f.) [fr. adhipāta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipāta2). Adhipāteti {Adhipateti} [Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J IV.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob. to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti). Adhippagharati {Adhippagharati} [adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284. Pāli Text Society 73 Pāli-English Dictionary Adhippāgā {Adhippaga} 3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J V.59. Adhippāya {Adhippaya} [adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish desire S I.124; V.108; A II.81; III.363 (bhoga°); V.65; J I.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. (-°) desiring PvA 226 (hass° in play = khiḍḍatthika). - 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). -adhippāyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (kīḷ for fun). Adhippāyosa {Adhippayosa} [adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning M I 46; S III.66; IV.208; A I.267; IV.158; V.48 sq. Adhippeta {Adhippeta} [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D I.120; II.236; VvA 312, 315. - 2. meant, understood, intended as J III.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164. Adhippetatta {Adhippetatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. °ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52. Adhibādheti {Adhibadheti} [adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti). Adhibrahmā {Adhibrahma} [adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M II.132. Adhibhavati [adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S IV.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A V.248, 282 (°bhoti); J II.336; V.30. - aor. adhibhavi J II.80. 3. pl. adhibhaṃsu S IV.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.). {Adhibhavati} Adhibhāsati {Adhibhasati} [adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin II.195; S I.103; IV.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90. Adhibhū {Adhibhu} (adj.) (-°) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S IV.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi° is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn 684 (miga°; v. l. abhi°). Adhibhūta {Adhibhuta} [cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S IV.186. Adhimatta {Adhimatta} (adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. °ṃ extremely M I.152, 243; S IV. 160; A II.150; IV.241; J I.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv II.36 (= adhikataraṃ PvA 86); DhA II.85; cp. PvA 281. Adhimattata {Adhimattata} (nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A II.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200). Adhimana {Adhimana} (n.-adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). - (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J IV.433 (= pasannacitta); V.29 (an°; v. l. °māna). Pāli Text Society 74 Pāli-English Dictionary Adhimāna {Adhimana} [adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M II.252; A V.162 sq. Adhimānika {Adhimanika} (adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A V.162, 169, 317; DhA III.111. Adhimuccati {Adhimuccati} [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S III.225; IV.185; A IV.24, 145 sq., 460; V.17; Pug 63. - 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin I.209 (aor. °mucci); D I.106; S I.116 (pot. °mucceyya); It 43; DA I.275. - 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA I.214, 316; J IV.272; V.103; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. - 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J IV.172; V.103, 429; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. -pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. - Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S V.409 (cittaṃ devesu a.). Adhimuccana {Adhimuccana} (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190. Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita {Adhimuccita} {Adhimucchita} (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. °mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy-form °mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M II.223 (an°); S I.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. °muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J II.437 (cch); III.242; V.255 (kāmesu °mucchita, v. l. °muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita. Adhimuccitar {Adhimuccitar} [n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A III.165 (v. l. °mucchitā). Adhimutta {Adhimutta} (adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś I.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon (-° or with loc. or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin I.183; A V.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (°citta); Nd2 33; J I.370 (dān°) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dān°). Adhimutti {Adhimutti} (f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D I.174; A V.36; Ps I.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA I.44, 103; Sdhp 378. Adhimuttika {Adhimuttika} (adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S II.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D I.2. Adhimokkha {Adhimokkha} [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M III.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95. Adhiyita {Adhiyita} see adhīyati. Adhiroha {Adhiroha} [fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur° hard to ascend Miln 322. Adhivacana {Adhivacana} (nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D II.62; M I.113, 144, 460; A II.70, 124; III.310; IV.89, 285, 340; It 15, Pāli Text Society 75 Pāli-English Dictionary 114; Sn p. 218; J I.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paððatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.-patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D II.68; S III.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51. Adhivattati {Adhivattati} [adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S I.101; A II.32. Adhivattha {Adhivattha} (adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin I.28; S I.197; J I.223; II.385; III.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J VI.370. Adhivara {Adhivara} (adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an° unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiṭṭha). Adhivāsa {Adhivasa} [fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur° difficult to hold out Th 1, 111. (adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin IV.130; M I.10, 526; A II.118; III.163; V.132; J III.369 (an°); IV.11, 77. Adhivāsana (nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A III.31; DhA I.33. - 2. forbearance, endurance M I.10; J II.237; III.263; IV.307; V.174. {Adhivasana} Adhivāsanatā {Adhivasanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an°). Adhivāseti {Adhivaseti} [Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J I.254; II.352; III.277. - 2. to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D II.128, 157; J I.46; III.281 (pahāre); IV.279, 407; V.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. - 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin I.17; D I.109 (cp. DA I.277); S IV.76; DhA I.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. - Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J I.254. Adhivāha {Adhivaha} [fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S IV.70 (dukkha°); A I.6; Th 1, 494. Adhivāhana {Adhivahana} (nt.-adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. °ī Th 1, 519. Adhivimuttatta {Adhivimuttatta} (nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J V.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. °muttata). Adhivimokkhatta {Adhivimokkhatta} (nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261. Adhivutti {Adhivutti} (f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti-p. at all passages) D I.13 (expld. by adhivacana-pada DA I.103); M II.228; A V.36. Adhivuttha {Adhivuttha} see adhivattha. Adhisayana {Adhisayana} (nt.-adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (mañcaṃ). Pāli Text Society 76 Pāli-English Dictionary Adhisayita {Adhisayita} [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin III.3; S III.153. Adhisīla {Adhisila} (nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta-sikkha, adhipaððā° adhisïla° Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219; A III.133; IV.25; DhA I.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla. Adhiseti {Adhiseti} [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) - pp. adhisayita. Adhīna {Adhina} (adj.) (-°) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D I.72 (atta° & para°); J IV.112; DA I.217; also written ādhīna J V.350. See also under para. Adhīyati {Adhiyati} & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin I.270; S I.202 (dhammapadāni); J IV.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); VI.458; DhA III.446 (adhīyassu). - ger. adhīyitvā J IV.75; adhiyānaṃ J V.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2; pp. adhiyita D I.96. Adhunā {Adhuna} (adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D II.208; Vin II.185 (kālakata); Miln 155; Dāvs II.94.-āgata a new comer M I.457; J II.105. -ābhisitta newly or just anointed D II.227. -uppanna just arisen D II.208, 221. Adhura {Adhura} (nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J IV.241. Adho {Adho} (adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ dher-; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaṃ "above" and tiriyaṃ "across", describing the 3 dimensions. -uddhaṃ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaṃ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S I.122; III.124; A IV.167; with uddhaṃ & tiriyaṃ at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaṃ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh°. -akkhaka beneath the collar-bone Vin IV.213. -agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh° expld. by uparima-danta C.). -kata turned down, or upside down J I.20; VI.298. -gata gone by, past. Adv. °ṃ since (cp. uddhaṃ adv. later or after) J VI.187 (ito māsaṃ adhogataṃ since one month ago). -gala (so read for T. udho°) down the throat PvA 104. -mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin II.78; M I.132, 234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha VvA 78). -bhāga the lower part (of the body) M I.473; DhA I.148. -virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha° of an emetic) D I.12; DA I.98 (= adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ); DhsA 404. sākhaṃ (+ uddhamūlaṃ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA I.75. -sira (adj.) head downward J IV.194. -siraṃ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaṃsiraṃ) J VI.298 (= siraṃ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). -sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J I.233; v.472 (°ka). An {An} - form of the neg. prefix a-before vowels. For negatives beginning with an° see the positive. 77 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Ana {Ana} - negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts II.113. Anajjhiṭṭha {Anajjhittha} (adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin I.113; Pv I.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J III.165 has anavhāta; Th 2, 129 ayācita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta). Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA I.124 (in def. of bāla); DA I.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa. Anabhāva {Anabhava} [ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaṃ kata or gata. This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin III.3 of bad qualities, at S II.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M I.487; S IV.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M I.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A IV.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A I.135, of evil passions A I.137, 184, 218; II.214 of pride A II.41, of craving A II.249, of the bonds A IV.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D III.326) and in the Iti-vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaṃ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin III.267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp. Nd I.90; and Nd2 under pahīna. Anabbhita {Anabbhita} (adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin IV.242; Pv I.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has ayācita & at J III.165 anavhāta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita). Anabhuṇṇatatā {Anabhunnatata} (f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156. Anabhijjhā {Anabhijjha} (f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D III.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277. Anabhijjhālū {Anabhijjhalu} (adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D III.82; Pug 40. Anabhijjhita {Anabhijjhita} (adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201). Anabhinandati {Anabhinandati} etc. see abhi° etc. Anabhirata {Anabhirata} (adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J I.61 (naccādisu). Anabhirati {Anabhirati} (f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent D I.17 (+ paritassanā); III.289; J III. 395; DA I.111. Anabhiraddha {Anabhiraddha} (adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin IV.236. Anabhiraddhi {Anabhiraddhi} (f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D I.3 (= kopassɔetaṃ adhivacanaṃ DA I.52). Anabhisambhuṇamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D I.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA I.268). {Anabhisambhunamana} Pāli Text Society 78 Pāli-English Dictionary Anamatagga {Anamatagga} (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit-agga ThA 289); Nāṇakitti in Ṭīkā on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts II.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. III.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṃsāra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S II.178, 187 sq. = III.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga-pariyāya at DhA II.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA I.11; II.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom "world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga-system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra]. Anamha {Anamha} (adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana-mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J III. 223 (°kāle = ārodana-kāle C.). Anaya {Anaya} [a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin II.199; S IV.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362. Anariya {Anariya} (adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin I.10; D III.232 (°vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (°dhamma); Pug 13. - See ariya. Anala {Anala} (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M I.455; J II.326 = IV. 471. - 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). - 3. °ṃ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S I.15 (kāmesu). Anavaya {Anavaya} (adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D I.88 (=anūna paripūra-kārin DA I.248); A III.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10). Anavosita {Anavosita} (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101. Anasana {Anasana} (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an-aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D III.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324). Anasitvāna {Anasitvana} [ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J IV.371. Anasuyyaṃ {Anasuyyaṃ } [Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grumbling J III.27 (v. l. for anusuyyaṃ T.). Anasuropa {Anasuropa} [an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341. Anasūyaka {Anasuyaka} (adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J II.192. Pāli Text Society 79 Pāli-English Dictionary Anassaka {Anassaka} (adj.) either an-assaka or a-nassaka (q. v.). Anassana {Anassana} (nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] imperishableness, freedom from waste J IV.168. Anassāvin {Anassavin} (adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549). Anassāsika {Anassasika} (adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M I.514; S II.191. Anassuṃ 1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaṃ) I have heard M I.393. Anāgata {Anagata} (adj.) [an + āgata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. D III.100 sq., 134 sq., 220, 275; M III.188 sq.; S I.5; II.283; A III.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J IV.159; VI.364; Dhs 1039, 1416. Anāgamana {Anagamana} (nt.) [an + āgamana] not coming, not returning J I 203, 264. Anāgāmitā {Anagamita} (f.) [anāgāmin + tā] the state or condition of an Anāgāmin S v.129, 181, 285; A III.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A III.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40. Anāgāmin {Anagamin} (adj.-n.) [an + āgāmin] one who does not return, a Never-Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saṃyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (D I.156; II.92; III.107; M II.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S III.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200-2, the five Indriyas; A I.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, II 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D II.92 nine others, of whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called anāgāmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saṃyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saṃyojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps II.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.-phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti° sakadāgāmi° anāgāmi° arahatta° Vin I.293; II.240; IV.29; D I.229; II.227, 255; S III.168; v.411; A I.23, 44; III.272 sq.; IV.204, 276, 372 sq. -magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b. Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā {Anagara} {Anagariya} see agāra & agāriyā. Anāghāta {Anaghata} [an + āghāta] freedom from anger or ill-will Vin II.249. Pāli Text Society 80 Pāli-English Dictionary Anācāra {Anacara} [an + ācāra] misconduct, immorality J II.133; III. 276; adj. anācārin Pug 57. Anājāniya {Anajaniya} (adj.) [an + ājāniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M I.367. Anādara {Anadara} [an + ādara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. - (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 (= ādaravirahita SnA 290). Anādaratā {Anadarata} (f.) [abstr. fr. anādara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā). Anādariya {Anadariya} (nt.) [fr. anādara] disregard, disrespect Vin I.176; IV.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359. Anādā {Anada} [ger. of an + ādiyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin IV.120 (= anādiyitvā C.). Anādāna {Anadana} (adj.) [an + ādāna] free from attachment (opp. sādāna) A II.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094; Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dh 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa DhA IV.70), 396, 406, 421. Anāditvā {Anaditva} [ger. of an + ādiyati] not taking up, not heeding J IV.352 (v. l. for T. anādiyitvā). Anādiyitvā {Anadiyitva} [ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin IV.120; J IV.352; DhA I.41. See also ādiyati. Anānu {Ananu} - represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu- (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: °tappaṃ (ppr.) not regretting J v.492; °puṭṭha questioned Sn 782 (= apucchita SnA 521); °yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); °loma not fit or suitable D II.273 (v. l. anu°). Anāpāthagata {Anapathagata} (adj.) [an + āpātha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M I.174. Anāpāda {Anapada} (adj.) [an + āpāda] unmarried (of a woman) J IV.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata-pariggahā). Anāpucchā {Anapuccha} see āpucchati. Anābādha {Anabadha} (adj.) [an + ābādha] safe and sound VvA 351. Anāmata {Anamata} (adj.) [an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J II.56 (=asusāna-ṭṭhāna C.); DhA II.99. 81 Pāli Text Society Anāmanta Pāli-English Dictionary (°-) [an + āmanta] without asking or being asked; in °kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J VI.226; °cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; A III.259. {Anamanta} Anāmaya {Anamaya} (adj.) [an + āmaya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74), 177. Anāmasita {Anamasita} (adj.) [an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati] not touched, virgin- VvA 113 (°khetta). Anāmassa {Anamassa} (adj.) [grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya] not to be touched J II 360 (C. anāmāsitabba). Anāyatana (nt.) [an + āyatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (°sīla = dussīla C.). {Anayatana} Anāyasa {Anayasa} (adj.) [an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha āyo sukhan ti anāyasaṃ VvA 335). Anāyāsa {Anayasa} (adj.) [an + āyāsa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008. Anārambha {Anarambha} [an + ārambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Anārādhaka {Anaradhaka} (adj.) [an + ārādhaka] one who fails, unsuccessful Vin I.70. Anāriya {Anariya} (adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya). Anālamba {Analamba} (adj.) [an + ālamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiṭṭha; expld. at SnA 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhābhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra). Anālaya {Analaya} [an + ālaya] aversion, doing away with Vin I.10 (taṇhāya). Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika {Analhiya} {Analhika} (adj.) [an + ālhiya, Sk. āḍhya, see also addhaQ] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually combd. with daḷidda M I.450; II.178 (v. l. BB. anāḷiya); A III.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; J v.96. Anāvaṭa {Anavata} (°-) [an + āvaṭa] not shut; in °dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness D III.191. Anāvattin {Anavattin} (adj.-n.) [an + āvattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti-dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D I.156 (cp. DA I.313); III.132; Pug 16 sq., 62. Pāli Text Society 82 Pāli-English Dictionary Anāvasūraṃ {Anavasuram} (adv.) [an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun-down J v.56 (= anatthangata-suriyaṃ C.) cp. Sk. utsūra. Anāvāsa {Anavasa} (adj.-n.) [an + āvāsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin II.22, 33; J II.77. Anāvikata {Anavikata} etc. see āvikata. Anāvila {Anavila} (adj.) [an + āvila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D I.84 (= nikkaddama DA I.226); III.269, 270; Sn 637 (=nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA IV.192); Th 2, 369 (āvilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479. Anāvuttha {Anavuttha} (adj.) [an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati] not dwelt in D .II50. Anāsaka {Anasaka} (adj.) [an + āsaka] fasting, not taking food S IV.118. f. °ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh 141 (= bhatta-paṭikkhepa DhA III.77). Anāsakatta {Anasakatta} (nt.) [abstr. of anāsaka] fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292). Anāsava {Anasava} (adj.) [an + āsava] free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin II.148 = 164; D III.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv II.615; VvA 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava. Anāsasāna {Anasasana} (adj.) [an + āsasāna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to āsasāna. Expld by kaðci rūpādidhammaṃ nāsiṃsati SnA 365. Anāhāra {Anahara} (adj.) [an + āhāra] being without food M I.487; Sn 985. Anikkaḍḍhanā {Anikkaddhana} (f.) [a + nikkaḍḍhanā] not throwing out or expelling J III.22. Anikkasāva (adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J II.198 = v.50; DhA I.82 (= rāgādīhi kasāvehi sakasāva). {Anikkasava} Anikhāta {Anikhata} (adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J VI.109 (°kūla; C. agambhīrā). Anigha {Anigha} see nigha1 see nigha1 and īgha. Anicchā {Aniccha} (f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. °a without desires, not desiring Sn 707. Aniñjana {Aninjana} (nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps I.15. Aniñjita {Aninjita} (adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Th 1, 386. Aniṭṭhangata {Anitthangata} see niṭṭhā2. Pāli Text Society 83 Pāli-English Dictionary Aniṭṭhita {Anitthita} see niṭṭhita. Anitthi {Anitthi} (f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J II.126 (compd with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh-itthi). Anindi {Anindi} - [the compn. form of nindā] in °ḷocana (with) faultless eyes J VI.265. Anindita {Anindita} (adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J IV.106 (°angin of blameless body or limbs). Anibbisaṃ {Anibbisam} [ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= taṃ ðāṇaṃ avindanto DhA III.128). Animisa {Animisa} (adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana). Aniyata {Aniyata} (adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin I.112; II.287; D III.217. Aniyamita {Aniyamita} (adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231. Anila {Anila} [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J IV.119 (°patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594. Anirākata {Anirakata} (adj.) [a + nirākata] see nirankaroti. Anissara {Anissara} (adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713. Anissukin {Anissukin} (adj.) [an + issukin, see also an-ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D III.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin). Anīka {Anika} (nt.) [Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *ogÛ (see), cp. Gr. o)/mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battlearray) Vin IV.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala° strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467).-agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakāya senāmukha SnA 384). -ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard D III.64, 148; J v.100; VI.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. -dassana troop-inspection D I.6 (aṇīka° at DA I.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin IV.107 (senābyūha +). Anīgha {Anigha} see nigha1 see nigha1 and cp. īgha. Anīti {Aniti} (f.) [an + īti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A IV.238; Miln 323 (abl. °ito). Anītika {Anitika} (adj.) [fr. anīti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin II.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); III.162; S IV.371; Sn 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304. Pāli Text Society 84 Pāli-English Dictionary Anītiha {Anitiha} (adj.) [an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaṃ] not such and such, not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A II.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M I.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J I.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28). Anu1 {Anu} (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. - A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. - Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu paðcāhaṃ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaṃ for one year or yearly; a. saṃvaccharaṃ id. (b) More freq. w. loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S IV.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaṃ in every cell Vin I.80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J II.382. B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well-defined meaning ("along"), as such also as 1st component of pref.-cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā°), anu + pra (anuppa°), + pari, + vi, + saṃ. - As base, i. e. 2nd part of a pref.-cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam-anu°. The prefix saṃ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. °loma, °vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along towards". - (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g. °aya going after, connexion; °āgacch° follow, °kkamati follow, °dhāvati run after, °patta received, °parivattati move about after, °bandhati run after, °bala rear-guard, °bhāsati speak after, repeat, °vāda speaking after, blame, °vicarati roam about °viloketi look round after (survey), °saṃcarati proceed around etc. - (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref.-cpds. (esp. with °ppa°), e. g. anu-ādisati design for, dedicate °kankhin longing for, °cintana care for, °tiṭṭhati look after, °padinna given over to, °pavecchati hand over, °paviṭṭha entered into, °pasaṃkamati go up to, °rodati cry for, °socati mourn for. - II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be- or Ger. be-, also Lat. ad- and con-. Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E. g. °kampā com-passion, °kiṇṇa be-set, °gaṇhāti take pity on, °gāyati besingen, °jagghati laugh at, belaugh, °ddaya pity with, °masati touch at, °yuñjati order along, °yoga devotion to, °rakkhati be-guard, °litta be-smeared or an-ointed, °vitakheti reflect over, °sara con-sequential; etc. - (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. °kūla being to will, °chavika befitting, °ðāta permitted, al-lowed, °mati con- sent, a-greement, °madati appreciate, °rūpa = con-form, °vattin acting according to, °ssavana by hearsay, °sāsati ad-vise, com-mand etc. - III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary, inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. °dhamma lesser morality, °pabbajā discipleship, °pavattaka ruling after, °bhāga after-share, °majjha mediocre, °yāgin assisting in sacrifice, °vyaðjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. - (b) distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): °disā in each direction, °paðcāhaṃ every 5 days, °pubba one after the other. - IV. As one of the contrasting (-comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddānukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padānupadaṃ, pubbānupubbaka, ponkhānuponkhaṃ, buddhānubuddha, vādānuvāda, seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi. - V. As regards dialectical differences in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk. (Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu-gijjhati, °brūheti, °sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu-kantati, °kassati2, °kiṇṇa, °gāhati, °bujjhati °bodha, °lokin, °vajja. Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to °ānu°, never elided like adhi = °dhi or abhi = °bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahānubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba°), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in Pāli Text Society 85 Pāli-English Dictionary combn. with an- under the influence of metre. - (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv°. Anu2 {Anu} (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D I.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anuṃ thūlaṃ). See aṇu. Anukankhin {Anukankhin} (adj.) [fr. anu + kānkṣ] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya°). Anukantati {Anukantati} [anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hatthaṃ = phāleti DhA III.484). Anukampaka {Anukampaka} & °ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (-° or c. loc.) D III.187; S I.105 (loka°), 197; v.157; A IV.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba-bhūta°); Pv I.33 (= kārunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakāma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; II.14 (= anuggaṇhataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satthā sattesu a.). Anukampati {Anukampati} [anu + kampati] to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S I.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv II.16 (= anuddayaṃ karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv III.28 (= anuggaṇha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (taṃ), 62 (pitaraṃ), 104. - pp. anukampita (q. v.). Anukampana {Anukampana} (nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88. Anukampā {Anukampa} (f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D I.204; M I.161; II.113; S I.206; II.274 (loka°); IV.323; v.259 sq.; A I.64, 92; II.159; III.49; IV.139; Pug 35. - Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of D III.211 (loka° out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); J III.280; PvA 47, 147. Anukampita {Anukampita} (adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv III.230. Anukampin {Anukampin} (adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita° full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv III.76. sabbapāṇa-bhūta-hita° id. S IV.314; A II.210; III.92; IV.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba-bhūta° S I.25, 110; A II.9; It 102. Anukaroti {Anukaroti} [anu + kṛ] to imitate, "to do after" A I.212; J I.491; II.162; DhA IV.197. - ppr. anukabbaṃ Vin II.201 (mamā°). - Med. anukubbati S I.19 = J IV.65. - See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2. Anukassati {Anukassati} [anu + kassati, kṛṣ] 1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D II.255 (silokaṃ). - 2. [Sk. ava-kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chaḍḍesi C.). Anukāma {Anukama} (adj.) [anu + kāma] responding to love, loving in return J II.157. Anukāra {Anukara} [cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39. Pāli Text Society 86 Pāli-English Dictionary Anukārin {Anukarin} (adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32. Anukiṇṇa {Anukinna} [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv IV.121 (bhamara-gaṇa°). Anukubba {Anukubba} (adj.) (-°) [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J II.205 (kicca°). Anukubbati {Anukubbati} see anukaroti. Anukula {Anukula} freq. spelling for anukūla. Anukulaka {Anukulaka} (adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha° according to wish). Anukūla {Anukula} (adj.) [anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312.-bhava complaisance, willingness VvA 71. -yañña a propitiative sacrifice D I.144 (expld. at DA I.302 as anukula° = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan). Anukkaṇṭhati {Anukkanthati} [an + ukkaṇṭhati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. °anto J v.10; and pp. °ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13. Anukkaṇṭhana {Anukkanthana} (nt.) [an + ukkaṇṭhana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J VI.4. Anukkama {Anukkama} [to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course or succession J I.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. - 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M I.446; Sn 622 (sandānaṃ saha°). Anukkamati [anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (maggaṃ). - 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S I.24, Th 1, 194. {Anukkamati} Anukkhipati {Anukkhipati} [anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. XI.6 (vaṭṭaṃ). Anukkhepa {Anukkhepa} [anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin I.285. Anukhaṇati {Anukhanati} [anu + khaṇati] to dig after or further J v.233. Anukhuddaka {Anukhuddaka} (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda° whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin II.287 = D II.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144. Anuga {Anuga} (-°) (adj.-suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 (vasa° in the power of), 791 (ejā° = abhibhūta Sn 527), 1095 (Māra- vasa° = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ejā°); J III.224 (vasa° = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3. Pāli Text Society 87 Pāli-English Dictionary Anugacchati {Anugacchati} [anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (°gacchanto); aor. °gamāsi Vin I.16, & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvagū Sn 586 (vasaṃ = vasaṃ gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J I.53; v.370. - pp. anugata (q. v.). Anugata {Anugata} (adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with (-°), being a victim of, suffering M I.16; D III.85, 173 (parisā); A II.185 (sota°, v. l. anudhata); J II.292 (samudda°); v.369; Nd2 32 (taṇhā°); PvA 102 (nāmaṃ mayhaṃ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala°). Anugati {Anugati} (f.) (-°) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S I.104 (vas° being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhānugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin II.108; S II.203; Pug 33; DhA IV.39. Anugama {Anugama} [fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur° difficult to be followed J IV.65. Anugāmika {Anugamika} (adj.) going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kh VIII.8 (nidhi, a treasure acc. a man to the next world); J IV.280 (°nidhi); Miln 159 (parisā); PvA 132, 253 (dānaṃ nāma °aṃ nidānan ti). Anugāmin {Anugamin} (adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 (= anuyutta). Anugāyati {Anugayati} [anu + gāyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D I.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugāyissaṃ); Miln 120. Anugāhati {Anugahati} [anu + gāhati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611. Anugijjhati {Anugijjhati} [anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J III.207; IV.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā allīyanti C.). pp. °giddhā (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati. Anugiddha {Anugiddha} [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (anānu°), 144, 952; Th 1, 580. Anuggaṇha {Anugganha} (adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 °sīla. Anuggaṇhataka {Anugganhataka} (adj.) [= anugganha] compassionate, commiserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka). Anuggaṇhana {Anugganhana} (nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403. Anuggaṇhāti & Anugaṇhāti {Anugganhati} {Anuganhati} [anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D I.53 (vācaṃ; cp. DA I.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J II.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. °gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.). 88 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Anuggaha1 {Anuggaha} [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S II.11; III.109; IV.104; v.162; A I.92, 114; II.145; IV.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J I.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104. Anuggaha2 {Anuggaha} (adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Anuggahīta {Anuggahita} (& °ita) [pp. of anuggaṇhāti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M I.457; S II.274; III.91; IV.263; A III.172; J III.428. Anuggāhaka {Anuggahaka} (adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S III.5; V.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help). Anugghāṭeti {Anugghateti} [an + ugghāṭeti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kavāṭaṃ). Anugghāta {Anugghata} [an + ugghāta] not shaking, a steady walk J VI.253. Anugghātin {Anugghatin} (adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J VI.252; Vv 53 (read °ī for i); VvA 36. Anughāyati {Anughayati} [anu + ghāyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandhaṃ). Anucankamati {Anucankamati} [anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D I.235; M I.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. °āpeti M I.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu I.350. Anucankamana {Anucankamana} (nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J I.7. Anucarati {Anucarati} [anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita (q. v.) Anucarita {Anucarita} (-°) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with D I.16, 21 (vīmaṃsa° = anuvicarita DA I.106); M I.68 (id.); Miln 226. Anuciṇṇa {Anucinna} (pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin II.203 = It 86 (pamādaṃ); J I 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs IV.9. 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J IV.286. Anucintana {Anucintana} (nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164. Anucinteti {Anucinteti} [anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S I.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti). Anuccangin {Anuccangin} see anujjangin. Anucchvikaa {Anucchvikaa} (adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J I.58, 62, 126, 218; II.5; IV.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA I.203, 390; II.55, 56; 89 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin II.7 (an°); III.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13. Anucchiṭṭha {Anucchittha} (adj.) [see ucchiṭṭha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J III.257; DhA II.3 (vv. ll. anucciṭṭha). Anujagghati {Anujagghati} [anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D I.91; DA I.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256). Anujavati {Anujavati} [anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J VI.452 (= anubandhati). Anujāta {Anujata} (adj.) [anu + jāta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijāta +, opp. avajāta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J VI.380; DhA I.129; Dāvs II.66. Anujānāti {Anujanati} [anu + jānāti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin IV.225; A II.197; Pv IV.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. - 2. to advise, prescribe Vin I.83; II.301: Sn 982. - grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed A II.197; pp. anuððāta (q. v.) Caus. anujānāpeti J I.156. Anujīvati {Anujivati} [anu + jīvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J IV.271 (= upajīvati, tassānubhāvena jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ (C.). - pp. anujīvata (q. v.). Anujīvita {Anujivita} (nt.) [pp. of anujīvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 (= jīvitaṃ SnA 545). Anujīvin (adj.-n.) [fr. anujīvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A I.152; III.44; J III.485; Dāvs v.43. {Anujivin} Anujju {Anujju} (adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. °angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. °ī Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīrā C.); VI.500 (T. anuccangī, C. aninditā agarahitangī); °gāmin going crooked i. e. snake J IV.330; °bhūta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293. Anujjuka {Anujjuka} = anujju J III.318. Anujjhāna {Anujjhana} (nt.) [anu + jhāna] meditation, reflection, introspection Miln 352 (°bahula). Anuññāta (adj.) [pp. of anujānāti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D I.88; J I.92; II.353, 416; Pv I.123 (na a. = ananuððāta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA I.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81. {Anunnata} Anuññātatta {Anunnatatta} (nt.) [abstr. to anuððāta] being permitted, permission J II.353. Anuṭṭhaka {Anutthaka} (adj.) [fr. an + uṭṭhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033. Pāli Text Society 90 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuṭṭhahati {Anutthahati} [anu + ṭhahati = °thāti, see °tiṭṭhati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. - pp. anuṭṭhita (q. v.). Anuṭṭhahāna {Anutthahana} (adj.) [ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 (=anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto DhA III.409). Anuṭṭhātar {Anutthatar} [n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) SnA 169 (=viriya-tejavirahita). Anuṭṭhāna {Anutthana} (nt.) [an + uṭṭhāna] "the not getting up", inactivity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarīra-paṭijagganaṃ akaronto DhA III.347). Anuṭṭhita {Anutthita} [pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D II.103; S IV. 200; A III.290 sq.; IV.300; J II.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata). Anuṭṭhubhati {Anutthubhati} [formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA I.138. Anuṭṭhurin {Anutthurin} v. l. at SnA 569, see niṭṭhurin. Anuḍasati {Anudasati} [anu + ḍasati] to bite J VI.192. Anuḍahati {Anudahati} [anu + ḍahati] to burn over again, burn thoroughly, fig. to destroy, consume J II.330; VI.423. Pass. °ḍayhati J v.426. - Also spelt °dahati, e. g. at S IV. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488. Anuḍahana {Anudahana} (nt.) [fr. anuḍahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d). Anuṇṇata {Anunnata} (adj.) [uṇṇata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhaccaṃ nāpajjeyya SnA 492). Anutappati {Anutappati} [anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J I.113; IV.358; v.492 (ppr. an-anutappaṃ); Dh 67, 314; Pv II.942; DhA II.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A I.22, 77; III.294, and anutāpiya A III.46 (an°). Anutāpa {Anutapa} [fr. anu + tāpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra VvA 180); DhsA 384. Anutāpin {Anutapin} (adj.) [fr. anutāpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115. Anutāpiya {Anutapiya} grd. of anutappati, q. v. Anutāḷeti {Anutaleti} [anu + taḷeti] to beat J II.280. Pāli Text Society 91 Pāli-English Dictionary Anutiṭṭhati {Anutitthati} [anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 (= anugacchati); PvA 78. Anutīre {Anutire} (adv.) [anu + tīre, loc. of tīra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 (= tīra-samīpe SnA 28). Cp. anu A b. Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga DhA I.423); Pv IV.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA I.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc. {Anuttara} Anuttariya {Anuttariya} (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana°, paṭipadā°, vimutti°) at D III.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana°, savana°, lābha°, sikkhā°, pāricariyā°, anussata°) at D III.250, 281; A I.22; III.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps I.5. Cp. M I.235; A v.37. See also ānuttariya. Anuttāna {Anuttana} (adj.) [an + uttāna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J VI.247. Anutthunā {Anutthuna} (f.) [fr. anutthunāti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.). Anutthunāti {Anutthunati} [anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D III.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J III.115; v.346, 479; DhA III.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience). Anutrāsin {Anutrasin} (adj.) [an + utrāsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864. Anuthera {Anuthera} [anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin II.212 (therānutherā Th. & next in age). Anudadāti {Anudadati} [anu + dadāti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375. Anudayati {Anudayati} (to sympathise with) see under anuddā. Anudassita {Anudassita} [pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119. Anudahati {Anudahati} see anuḍahati. Anudiṭṭha [pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiṭṭha = asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv I.107 (= uddiṭṭha PvA 50). {Anudittha} Anudiṭṭhi {Anuditthi} (f.) [anu + diṭṭhi] an "after-view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D I.12; M II.228; S III.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA I.103. attānudiṭṭhi (q. v.) a soul-speculation. Pāli Text Society 92 Pāli-English Dictionary Anudisati {Anudisati} [anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). - pp. anudiṭṭha (q. v.). Anudisā {Anudisa} (f.) [anu + disā] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D I.222; S I.122; III.124. Anudīpeti {Anudipeti} [anu + dīpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammādhammaṃ). Anudūta {Anuduta} [anu + dūta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin II.19, 295; DhA II.76, 78. Anudeva {Anudeva} see anvadeva. Anuddayatā (f.) [abstr. to anuddayā] sympathy with (-°) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par° kindness to or sympathy with other people S II.218; v.169 (T. anudayatā); A III.184; It 72; Vbh 356. {Anuddayata} Anuddayā {Anuddaya} (& anudayā) (f.) [anu + dayā] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin II.196; S I.204; II.199; IV.323; A II.176; III.189; Pug 35 (anukampā); J I.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya° e. g. °sampanna full of mercy J I.151, 262; PvA 66. Anuddā {Anudda} (f.) [contracted form of anuddayā] = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaṃ "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayatī ti anuḍdā). Anuddhaṃseti {Anuddhaṃseti} [anu + dhaṃseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin IV.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaṃ a. lust degrades the heart Vin III.111; M I.26; S I.186; A I.266; II.126; III. 393 sq. - pp. anuddhasta (q. v.). Anuddhata {Anuddhata} (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca-virahita SnA 549, cp. anuṇṇata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA IV.93); Vv 648; Pug 59. Anuddharin {Anuddharin} (adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 (= anussukin SnA 569) see niṭṭhurin. Anuddhasta {Anuddhasta} (adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaṃseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M I.462 (citta); A II.126 (id.). Anudhamma {Anudhamma} [anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammānudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu IV. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. IV. Freq. in phrase dh°-ānudh°-paṭipanna "one who masters the completeness of the Dh.", e. g. S II.18; III.163; It 81; Ps II.189. - 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c°) anudhammaṃ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin I.234; D I.161; M I.368, 482; S II.33; Pāli Text Society 93 Pāli-English Dictionary III.6; IV.51; V.7. See further M III.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. °cārin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S II.81, 108; A II.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA I.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51). Anudhammatā {Anudhammata} (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma A II.46; Ps I.35, 36. Anudhāreti {Anudhareti} [anu + dhāreti] to hold up DA I.61 (chattaṃ), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamāna. Anudhāvati {Anudhavati} [anu + dhāvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M I.474; S I.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372. Anudhāvin {Anudhavin} (adj.-n.) [fr. anudhāvati] one who runs after S I.9, 117. Anunadī {Anunadi} (-tire) along the bank of the river S IV.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A). Anunamati {Anunamati} [anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow). Anunaya {Anunaya} [fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D III.254 (°saṃyojana); A IV.7 sq. (id.) M I.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322. Anunayana {Anunayana} (nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362. Anunāsika {Anunasika} (adj.) [anu + nāsā + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ṃ; in °lopa apocope of the nasal ṃ VvA 114, 253, 275, 333. Anunīta {Anunita} (adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S IV.71; Sn 781. Anunetar {Anunetar} [n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or conciliates Ps II.194 (netā vinetā anunetā). Anuneti {Anuneti} [anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S I.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q. v.). Anupa {Anupa} see anūpa. Anupakampati {Anupakampati} [anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41. Anupakkama {Anupakkama} [an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. °ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin II.195. Anupakkuṭṭha {Anupakkuttha} (adj.) [an + upak°] blameless, irreproachahle D I.113; Vin IV.160; Sn p. 115; DA I.281. Pāli Text Society 94 Pāli-English Dictionary Anupakkhandati {Anupakkhandati} [anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D I.122 (= anupavisati DA I.290); ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin II.88 (= antopavisati), 213; IV.43 (= anupavisati); M I.151, 469; S III.113; Vism 18. Anupakhajjati {Anupakhajjati} [den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhandati] to encroach, intrude Vin V.163. Anupagacchati {Anupagacchati} [anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D I.55 (anupeti +). Anupaghāta {Anupaghata} [an + upaghāta] not hurting Dh 185 (anūpa° metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanað ca DhA III.238). Anupacita {Anupacita} (adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56. Anupacināti {Anupacinati} [an + upacināti] not to observe or notice J V.339 (= anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviṇāti). Anupajagghati {Anupajagghati} [anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A I.198 (v. l. anusaṃ°). Anupajjati {Anupajjati} [anu + pad] to follow, accompany J IV.304. - pp. anupanna (q. v.). Anupañcāhaṃ {Anupancaham} (adv.) [anu + paðcā + ahaṃ] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasāhaṃ). Anupaññatti {Anupannatti} (f.) [anu + paññatti] a supplementary regulation or order Vin II.286; V.2 sq. Anupaṭipāti {Anupatipati} (f.) [anu + paṭipāti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA I.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā); DhA III.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244. Anupaṭṭhita {Anupatthita} (adj.) [anu + pa + ṭhita] setting out after, following, attacking J V.452. Anupatati {Anupatati} [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J VI.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.). - 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin III.106 = M I.364; S I.23 (read °patanti for °patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkhā); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). - pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin. Anupatita [pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, oppressed by (-°) S II.173 (dukkha°); III.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamāda°). {Anupatita} Anupatitatta {Anupatitatta} (nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (-°) SnA 339. Anupatta (anuppatta) [pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anuprāpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D I.87-111; II 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv IV.166; PvA 59 (dukkhaṃ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo-anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin II.188; D I.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. {Anupatta} Pāli Text Society Anupatti 95 Pāli-English Dictionary (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S I.46, 52. {Anupatti} Anupathe {Anupathe} at J V.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A). C. explns. as janghamagga-mahāmaggānaṃ antare. Anupada {Anupada} [cp. Sk. anupadaṃ adv., anu + pada] 1. the "afterfoot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where the second foot is recited without the first one Vin IV.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupadaṃ katheti). - 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in °dhamma-vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation M III.25; °vaṇṇanā word-by-word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. °ṃ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J II.230 (tassānupadaṃ agamāsi); VI.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padānupadaṃ (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J III. 504; VI.555; DhA I.69; II.38. Anupadātar {Anupadatar} (anuppadātar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D I.4 (cp. DA I.74); A II.209. Anupadāna {Anupadana} (anuppadāna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dāna, cp. anupadeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (-°) D I.12 (cp. DA I.98; both read anuppādāna); J III.205; Miln 315. Anupadinna {Anupadinna} (anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv I.512. Anupadeti {Anupadeti} (anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadāti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S III.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuṃ); M I.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadāti I.3); Miln 210 (°deti). fut. °dassati (see dadāti I.1); D III.92; S IV.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A III.43; Sn 983. ger. °datvā SnA 35. inf. °dātuṃ A I.117. pp. °dinna (q. v.). Anupaddava {Anupaddava} (adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin II.79 = 124 (+ anītika); III.162; Dh 338; DhA IV.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva). Anupadhāreti {Anupadhareti} [an + upadhār°] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA IV.197; VvA 260. Anupadhika {Anupadhika} (adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attachment (see upadhi) Vin I 36 (anupadhīka); D. III 112 (anupadhika opp. to sa-upadhika); Sn 1057 (anūpadhīka T., but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa). [pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (māradheyya°). Anupabandhati {Anupabandhati} (anuppa°) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. - Caus. °āpeti ibid. Anupabandhanatā {Anupabandhanata} (anuppa°) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] nonstopping, not ceasing Miln 132. Anupabandhanā {Anupabandhana} (anuppa°) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of upanāha). Pāli Text Society 96 Pāli-English Dictionary Anupabbajjā {Anupabbajja} (f.) [anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S V.67 = It 107. Anupaya {Anupaya} (adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S I.181 (akankha apiha +). Anuparigacchati {Anuparigacchati} [anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin III.119; S I.75 (ger. °gamma); Sn 447 (aor. °pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Sn A 393); J IV.267. Anuparidhāvati {Anuparidhavati} [anu + pari + dhāvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. III.150 (khīlan). Anupariyāti {Anupariyati} [auu + pari + yāti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin II.111; S I.102, 124; Th 1, 1235 (°pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv III.34 (= anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (°yāyitvā, ger.) 217. Anupariyāya {Anupariyaya} (adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti] going round, encircling, in °patha the path leading or going round the city D II.83 = S IV 194 = A V.195; A IV.107. Anuparivattati {Anuparivattati} [anu + pari + vṛt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin III.307 (ādiccaṃ); D I.240; PvA 97. - 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). - 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. III.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Miln 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan). Anuparivatti {Anuparivatti} (f.) (-°) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, occupation, connection with S III.16. Anuparivāreti {Anuparivareti} [anu + pari + vāreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin I.338; M I.153; DhA 1.55. Anupariveṇiyaṃ {Anupariveniyam} [anu + pariveṇiyaṃ = loc. of pariveṇi] should be written anu pariveṇiyaṃ ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin I.80, 106. Anuparisakkati {Anuparisakkati} [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S IV.312 (v.l. °vattati). Anuparisakkana {Anuparisakkana} (nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S IV.312 (v.l. °vattana). Anupariharati {Anupariharati} [anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M I.306. Anupalitta {Anupalitta} (adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M I.319, 386 (in verse); as °ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 (= lepānaṃ abhāvā SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353. 97 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Anupavajja {Anupavajja} (adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391. Anupavattaka {Anupavattaka} (anuppa°) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire (cakkaṃ) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka. Anupavatteti {Anupavatteti} (anuppa°) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaṃ to wield supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S I.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti. Anupavāda {Anupavada} [an + upavāda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anūpa° in metre; expld at DhA III.238 as anupavādanað c'eva anupavādāpanað ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. °vādaka Pug 60, & °vādin M I.360. Anupaviṭṭha {Anupavittha} (anuppa°) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangānadiṃ a. nadī: flowing into the G.). Anupaviṭṭhatā {Anupavitthata} (f.) [abstr. to anupaviṭṭha] the fact of having entered Miln 257. Anupavisati {Anupavisati} [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh I.290; VvA 42 (= ogāhati). - pp. °paviṭṭha (q.v.) - Caus. °paveseti (q.v.). Anupavecchati {Anupavecchati} (anuppa°) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin I.221 (°pavacchati); D I.74 (= pavesati DA I.218); II.78; M I.446; III.133; A II.64; III.26 (v.l. °vacch°); J V.394; Sn 208 (v.l. °vacch°); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28. Anupaveseti {Anupaveseti} [anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 (=°pavecchati). Anupasankamati1 {Anupasankamati} [anu + pa + saṃkamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179. Anupasankamati2 {Anupasankamati} [an + upasank°] not to go to. not to approach DhA II.30 (+ apayirupāsati). Anupasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [an + upasaṇṭhapanā] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā. {Anupasanthapana} Anupassaka {Anupassaka} (adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420. Anupassati {Anupassati} [anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps I.57, 187; Sn A 505. Anupassanā (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S V.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps I.10, 20, 96; II.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca°, anatta°, dukkha°. {Anupassana} Pāli Text Society 98 Pāli-English Dictionary Anupassin {Anupassin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S II.84 sq., V.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps I.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411. Anupahata1 {Anupahata} [anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274. Anupahata2 {Anupahata} (adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA II.33 (°jivhapasāda). Anupāta {Anupata} [of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A I.161 (vāda°). Anupātin {Anupatin} (adj.) [fr. anupāta] 1. following, indulging in J III.523 (khaṇa°). - 2. attacking, hurting J V.399. Anupādaṃ {Anupadam} (adv.) [anu + pāda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaṃ at the head). Anupādā {Anupada} [ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya] anupādāniya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati. Anupādāna & Anupādi {Anupadana} {Anupadi} see upādāna & upādi. Anupāpita {Anupapita} [pp. of anupāpeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252. Anupāpuṇāti {Anupapunati} (anuppā°) [anu + pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain, get to, find S I.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv II.924 (=°pāpuṇitvā PvA 123). - pp. anupatta (q. v.). - Caus. anupāpeti (q. v.). Anupāpeti {Anupapeti} [Caus. of anupāpuṇāti] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J VI.88; Cp. XI. 4 (aor. anupāpayi); Miln 276. - pp. anupāpita (q. v.). Anupāya {Anupaya} [an + upāya] wrong means J I.256; Sdhp 405. Anupāyāsa {Anupayasa} see upāyāsa. Anupālaka {Anupalaka} (adj.) [anu + pālaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474. Anupālana {Anupalana} (nt.) [fr. anupāleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs III.2. Anupāleti {Anupaleti} [anu + pāleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santatiṃ). Anupāhana {Anupahana} (adj.) [an + upāhana] without shoes J VI.552. Anupiya {Anupiya} (anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in °bhāṇin one who flatters I) III.185; J II.390; V.360; and °bhāṇitar id. Vbh 352. Anupīḷaṃ {Anupilam} at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 99 Pāli-English Dictionary Anupucchati {Anupucchati} [anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. - pp. anupuṭṭha (q. v.). Anupuṭṭha {Anuputtha} [pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 (= pucchita SnA 521). Anupubba {Anupubba} (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin II.237 (mahāsamuddo a°-ninno etc.); D I.184; Sn 511; J V.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin I.83; Dh 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā DhA III.340); Pug 41, 64; J II.2, 105; III.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Sn 1000. - In compn. both anupubba° & anupubbi° (q. v.).-kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice M I.446. -nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under °vihāra, & are enumd. as such at D III.266, 290; A IV.409, 456; Ps I.35. -vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase "saððā-vedayitanirodha" (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D II.156; III.265, 290; A IV.410; Nd2 under jhāna; Ps I.5; Miln 176. -sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M I.479; III.1 (+ °kiriyā °paṭipadā). Anupubbaka {Anupubbaka} (adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbānupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B IV.) Vin I.20 (°ānaṃ kulānaṃ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one). Anupubbata {Anupubbata} (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. ānupubbatā. Anupubbi—kathā {Anupubbikatha} (f.) [anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi-kathā] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon, regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna-kathā, sīla°, sagga°, magga°) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ sīlānantaro saggo saggānantaro maggo ti etesaṃ dīpana-kathā" (DA I.277). Vin I.15, 18; II.156, 192; D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA I.308; DhA I.6; Miln 228. - The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; Miln 228. Anupekkhati {Anupekkhati} [anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A III.23. - 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. °amāna = anukampamāna). - Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin II.73. Anupekkhanatā {Anupekkhanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupekkhatī] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372. Anupeti {Anupeti} [anu + pa + i] to go into D I.55 (+ anupagacchati) S III.207; DA I.165. Anupeseti {Anupeseti} [anu + pa + iṣ] to send forth after Miln 36. Pāli Text Society 100 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuposathikaṃ {Anuposathikam} see anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ. Anuposiya {Anuposiya} (adj.) [grd. of anu + puṣ] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318. Anuppa° {Anuppa°} in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa°. Anuppadajjuṃ {Anuppadajjum} (S III.131) see anupadeti. Anuppanna {Anuppanna} (°uppāda, °uppādeti) see uppanna etc. Anuppīḷa {Anuppila} (adj.) [an + uppīḷa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J III.443; V.378; VvA 351; PvA 161. Anupharaṇa {Anupharana} (nt.) [anu + pharaṇa] flashing through, pervading Miln 148. Anuphusīyati {Anuphusiyati} [anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J V.242 (himaṃ; C. pateyya). Anubajjhati {Anubajjhati} at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q. v.). Anubaddha {Anubaddha} [pp. of anubandhati] following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) D I.1, 226. Anubandha {Anubandha} [anu + bandh] bondage M III.170; It 91. Anubandhati {Anubandhati} [anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J I.195; II.230; VI.452 (= anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. °bandhi J II.154, 353; III.504; PvA 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. °bandhitvā J I.254. grd. °bandhitabba M I.106. - pp. anubaddha (q. v.). Anubandhana {Anubandhana} (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J VI.526 (°dukkha). Anubala {Anubala} (nt.) [anu + bala] rear-guard, retinue, suite, in °ṃ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125. Anubujjhati {Anubujjhati} [anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. avabudhyate] to remember, recollect J III.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse). Anubujjhana {Anubujjhana} (nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps I.18 (bujjhana +). Anubuddha {Anubuddha} [pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D II.123 (°ā ime dhammā); S I.137 (dhammo vimalenɔ ānubuddho) II.203; IV.188; A II.1; III.14; IV.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhānubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B IV.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. - 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA I.40. Cp. buddhānubuddha. 101 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Anubodha {Anubodha} [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recognition, understanding S I.126 (?) = A V.46 (anubodhiṃ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S II.92; III.261; V.431; A II.1; IV.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D I.12, 22; S I.136. Anubodhati {Anubodhati} [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiṃ A V.46 (?) = S I.126 (anubodhaṃ). - Caus. °bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J VI.139 (°ayamāna) - pp. anubuddha (q. v.). Anubodhana {Anubodhana} (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps I.18 (bodhana +). Anubbajati {Anubbajati} [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J IV.399 (maggaṃ = pabbajati C.). Anubbata {Anubbata} (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J III.521; VI.557. Anubbillāvitatta {Anubbillavitatta} see ubbill°. Anubyañjana {Anubyanjana} see anuvyañjana. Anubrūhita {Anubruhita} [pp. of anubrūheti] strengthened with (-°), full of Ps I.167. Anubrūheti {Anubruheti} [brūheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S I.178 (anubrūhaye); M III.187 (id., so read for manu°), Th 2, 163 (°ehi); Cp. III.12 (saṃvegaṃ anubrūhayiṃ aor.); J III.191 (suððāgāraṃ). Often in phrase vivekaṃ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J I.9 (inf. °brūhetuṃ); III.31 (°brūhessāmi), Dh 75 (°brūhaye = °brūheyya vaḍḍheyya DhA II.103). - pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana. Anubhaṇanā {Anubhanana} (f.) [anu + bhaṇana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin II.88 (anuvadanā +). Anubhavati & Anubhoti {Anubhavati} {Anubhoti} [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in, experience D I.129; II.12 (°bhonti); M II.204; A I.61 (atthaṃ °bhoti to have a good result); J VI.97 (°bhoma); Pv I.1011 (°bhomi vipākaṃ); PvA 52 (°issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaṃ to suffer pain, e.g. PvA I.1110 (°bhonti); PvA 43, 68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). - ppr. med. °bhavamāna J I.50; aor. °bhavi PvA 75 (sampattiṃ); ger. °bhavitvā J IV.1; PvA 4 (sam- pattiṃ), 67 (dukkhaṃ), 73 (sampattiṃ); grd. °bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv II.85 (= anubhavitvā PvA 109).- Pass. anubhūyati & °bhavīyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. °bhūyamāna PvA 8, 159 (mayā a. = anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & °bhavīyamāna PvA 33 (dukkhaṃ). - pp. anubhūta (q.v.). Anubhavana {Anubhavana} (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhāniṭṭh-ānubhavana-lakkhanā vedanā "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita- Pāli Text Society 102 Pāli-English Dictionary lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana-lakkhaṇā ca); PvA 152 (kamma-vipāka°). Esp. in combn. with dukkha° suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J IV.3; Miln 181; DhA IV.75; PvA 52. Anubhāga {Anubhaga} [anu + bhāga] a secondary or inferior part, (after-)share, what is left over Vin II.167. Anubhāyati {Anubhayati} [anu + bhāyati] to be afraid of J VI.302 (kissa nvɔ ānubhāyissaṃ, so read for kissānu°). Anubhāva {Anubhava} [fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, concomitance" and found only in cpds. as -°, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha° sensation of greatness, rājā° s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language. - (1) anubhāva (-°): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S I.146 sq.; II.274; IV.323; Sn p. 93; Pv II.112; PvA 76. deva° of divine power or majesty D II.12; devatā° id. J I.168; dibba° id. PvA 71, 110. rājā° kingly splendour, pomp D I.49; J IV 247; PvA 279 etc. -anubhāvena (instr. -°) in accordance with, by means of J II.200 (angavijjā°); PvA 53 (iddh°), 77 (kamma°), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja°), 184 (dāna°), 186 (puðða°). yathānubhāvaṃ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S I.31; Vv 15 (=yathābalaṃ VvA 25). - (2) ānubhāva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J V.10, 456; Pv II.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also ānu°. Anubhāvatā {Anubhavata} (f.) [= anubhāva + tā] majesty, power S I.156 (mahā°). Anubhāsati {Anubhasati} [anu + bhāsati] to speak after, to repeat D I.104; Miln 345; DA I.273. Anubhūta {Anubhuta} [pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA II.1218. nt. suffering, experience J I.254; Miln 78, 80. Anubhūyamānatta {Anubhuyamanatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103. Anuma {Anuma} (-dassika) see anoma°. Anumagge {Anumagge} at J V.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b). Anumajjati {Anumajjati} [anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA I.276 (= anumasati). - 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J VI.548; Miln 90. - Pass. anumajjīyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428). Anumajjana {Anumajjana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA I.63, 122. Pāli Text Society 103 Pāli-English Dictionary Anumajjha {Anumajjha} (adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J IV.192; V.387. Anumaññati {Anumannati} [anu + maññati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. - pp. anumata (q.v.). Anumata {Anumata} [pp. of anumaññati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D I.99 (= anuððāta DA I.267); J V.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuððāta). Anumati {Anumati} (f.) [from anumaññati] consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin II.294, 301, 306; D. I.137, 143; Dpvs IV.47, Cf. V.18; DA I.297; VvA 17, PvA 114. Anumatta {Anumatta} see aṇu°. Anumasati {Anumasati} [anu + masati] to touch D I.106 (= anumajjati DA I.276). Anumāna {Anumana} [fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74. Anumitta {Anumitta} [anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J V.77. Anumināti {Anuminati} [cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi] to observe, draw an inference M I.97; PvA 227 (°anto + nayaṃ nento). See also anumīyati. Anumīyati {Anumiyati} [Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S III.36. Cp. anumināti. Anumodaka {Anumodaka} (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin V.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512. Anumodati {Anumodati} [anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from, to be pleased, to enjoy Vin II.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S II.54; A III.50 (°modanīya); IV.411; Dh 177 (ppr. °modamāna); It 78; Pv II.919 (dānaṃ °modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti PvA 27); J II.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modāhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. pp. anumodita (q.v.). Anumodana {Anumodana} (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts = to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): °ṃ datvā PvA 89; °ṃ katvā J I.91; DhA III.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; °ṃ vatvā VvA 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. °ṃ karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA I.198 (°gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); II.97 (Satthāraṃ °ṃ yāciṃsu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (°atthaṃ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta°), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516. Anumodita {Anumodita} [pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77. Pāli Text Society 104 Pāli-English Dictionary Anummatta {Anummatta} (adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205. Anuyanta {Anuyanta} at A V.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaṃ attendance [anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin] or Sk. yantṛ ruler [yam], in which latter case anu-yantṛ would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as astem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2). Anuyāgin {Anuyagin} (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D I.142. Anuyāta {Anuyata} [pp. of anuyāti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S II.105 (magga); A V.236; It 29; Miln 217. Anuyāti & Anuyāyati {Anuyati} {Anuyayati} [anu + yā] 1. to go after, to follow J VI.49 (fut. °yissati), 499 (yāyantaṃ anuyāyati = anugacchati C). - 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (°yāyati). - pp. anuyāta (q. v.). See also anusaṃyāyati. Anuyāyin {Anuyayin} (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (anānuyāyin); J VI.309; Miln 284. Anuyuñjanā {Anuyunjana} (f.) (& °yuñjana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyuñjati] application or devotion to (-°) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjanaṃ wrong spelling?) Anuyuñjati {Anuyunjati} [anu + yuñjati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S I.25, 122 (°yuñjan "in loving self-devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); III.154; IV.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamādaṃ = pavatteti DhA I.257), 247 (surāmeraya-pānaṃ = sevati bahulīkaroti DhA III.356); PvA 61 (kammaṭṭhāQaṃ). - 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin II.79; Vv 335; ppr. Pass. °yuðjiyamāna PvA 192. - pp. anuyutta (q. v.). - Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA IV.20. Anuyutta {Anuyutta} [pp. of anuyuñjati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D I.166, 167; III. 232 = A II.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ānuyogaṃ a.); S III.153; IV.104; Sn 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaṃ = samāyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhān°); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jāgariya°), 206. - 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A V.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka SnA 453). Anuyoga {Anuyoga} [Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devotion to (-°), execution, practice of (-°); often combd. with anuyutta in phrase °anuyogaṃ anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin I.190 (maṇḍanɔ ānuyogaṃ anuyutta); D III.113 (attakilamath ɔ ānuyogaṃ a.); A II.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ānuyogaṃ a.). - As adj. (-°) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D I.5; III.107; M I.385; S I.182; III.239; IV.330; V.320; A I.14; III.249; IV.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J I.90 (padhānɔ ānuyogakiccaṃ); Vv 8438 (dhamma°); Miln 348; DA I. 78, 104. - 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuðjati 2) Miln 10 (ācariyassa °ṃ datvā). Pāli Text Society 105 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuyogavant {Anuyogavant} (adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207. Anuyogin {Anuyogin} (adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to (-°) Dh 209 (atta° given to oneself, self-concentrated). Anurakkhaka {Anurakkhaka} (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. °rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J IV.192 (vaṃsa°); VI.1 (id.). Anurakkhaṇa (nt.) & °ā (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D III.225 sq.; A II.16 sq.; J I.133; Pug 12; Dpvs IV.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta°); Sdhp 449. {Anurakkhana} Anurakkhati {Anurakkhati} [anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J I.46; Pug 12. -ppr. med.° rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621. Anurakkhā {Anurakkha} (f.) [= anurakkhaṇā] guarding, protection, preservation S IV.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā). Anurakkhin {Anurakkhin} (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J V.24. Anurakkhiya {Anurakkhiya} (adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur° difficult to guard Vin III.149. Anurañjita {Anuranjita} [pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu I.45 (byāmapabhā° by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (saðjhātapa° for saðjhāpabhā°). Anuratta {Anuratta} (adj.) pp. of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattāraṃ); J I.297; Miln 146. Anuravati {Anuravati} [anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63. Anuravanā {Anuravana} (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63. Anuraho {Anuraho} (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M I.27. Anurujjhati {Anurujjhati} [Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A IV.158; Dhs A 362. - pp. anuruddha (q. v.). Anuruddha {Anuruddha} [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S IV.71, (anānuruddha). Anurūpa {Anurupa} (adj.) [anu + rūpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (-°) J I.91; VI.366 (tad°); PvA 61 (ajjhāsaya° according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning. Anurodati {Anurodati} [anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J III.166 = Pv I.127 (dārako candaṃ a.). Pāli Text Society 106 Pāli-English Dictionary Anurodha {Anurodha} [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha) S I.111; IV.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; DhsA 362. Anulapanā (f.) [anu + lapanā, lap] scolding, blame, accusation Vin II.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana & anubhaṇanā). {Anulapana} Anulitta {Anulitta} (adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J I.266; PvA 211. Anulimpati {Anulimpati} [anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (°limpitabba). Caus. °limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and °lepeti Milm 169 (grd. °lepanīya to be treated with ointment). - pp. anulitta (q. v.). Anulimpana {Anulimpana} (nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394. Anulepa {Anulepa} [fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152. Anulokin {Anulokin} (adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing (-°) M I.147 (sīsa°). Anuloma {Anuloma} (adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D II.273 (anānuloma, q. v.) S IV.401; Ps II.67, 70; DhA II.208. - nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148.-ðāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA II.208. -paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin I.1; A IV.448. Anulomika {Anulomika} (& °ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (-°) Vin II.7 (an°); III.120 (an° = ananucchaviya); IV.239; A I.106; III.116 sq.; It 103 (sāmaððassa°); Sn 385 (pabbajita°); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65. Anulometi {Anulometi} [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372. Anuḷāratta {Anularatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + uḷāra] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24. Anuvajja (adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an° = anuvādavimutta SnA 396). {Anuvajja} Anuvattaka {Anuvattaka} (adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka°). - 2. following, siding with (-°) Vin IV.218 (ukkhittānuvattikā f.). Anuvattati {Anuvattati} [Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D II.244; Vin II.309 (Bdhgh.); IV.218; J I.125, 300; DA I.288; PvA 19. - 2. to practice, execute Pv IV. 712. - Caus. °vatteti (q. v.). Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with (-°), compliance, observance, obedience J I.367 (dhamma°); V.78. {Anuvattana} Pāli Text Society 107 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuvattin {Anuvattin} (adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with (°), obedient J II.348 (f. °inī); III.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma°); Vv 155 (vasa° = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla VvA 71); DhA II.161. Anuvatteti {Anuvatteti} [anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakkaṃ: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.). Anuvadati {Anuvadati} [Sk. ava°; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin II.80, 88. - grd. anuvajja (q. v.). Anuvadanā {Anuvadana} (f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin II.88 (anuvāda +). Anuvasati {Anuvasati} [anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J II.421. Caus. °vāseti to pass, spend (time) J VI.296. -pp. °vuttha (q. v.). Anuvassaṃ {Anuvassam} (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24. Anuvassika {Anuvassika} (adj.) [fr. anuvassaṃ] one who has (just) passed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by" Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2). Anuvāceti {Anuvaceti} [anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D I.104 (= tehi aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācenti DA I.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhāseti. Anuvāta1 {Anuvata} [anu + vā to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; °ṃ adv. with the wind, in the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaṃ). A I.226 (°paṭivātaṃ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta°). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at J II.382 "with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.). Anuvāta2 {Anuvata} [anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus'garments (cīvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin I.254, 297; II.177; IV.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient). Anuvāda {Anuvada} [fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin II.5, 32; A II.121 (atta°, para°); Vbh 376. - 2. in combn. vādānuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B IV.) D I.161; M I.368.-adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin II.88 sq.; III.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q. v.). Anuvāsana {Anuvasana} (nt.) [fr. anuvāseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353. Anuvāseti {Anuvaseti} [anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. °vāsanīya ibid.; pp. °vāsita Miln 214. Pāli Text Society 108 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuvikkhitta {Anuvikkhitta} (adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S V.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa). Anuvigaṇeti {Anuviganeti} [anu + vi + gaṇeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109. Anuvicarati {Anuvicarati} [anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D I.235; J II.128; III.188; PvA 189 (=anupariyāti). - Caus. °vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A I.264 (cetasā), III.178 (dhammaṃ cetasā a.). - pp. anuvicarita (q. v.). Anuvicarita {Anuvicarita} [pp. of anuvicāreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S III.203 (manasā); DA I.106 (= anucarita). Anuvicāra {Anuvicara} [anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra). Anuvicinaka {Anuvicinaka} [fr. anu + vicināti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365. Anuvicinteti {Anuvicinteti} [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D II.203; S I 203 (yoniso °cintaya, imper. "marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhammaṃ °ayaṃ); J III.396; IV.227; V.223 (dhammaṃ °cintayanto). Anuvicca {Anuvicca} [ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu-v-icca for anvicca), cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M I.301, 361 (v. l. °vijja); A II.3, 84; V.88; Dh 229 (= jānitvā DhA III.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditvā SnA 431); J I.459 (= jānitvā C.); III.426; Pug. 49.-kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin I.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M I.379 (= °viditvā C.) = A IV.185. Anuvijjaka {Anuvijjaka} [fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin V.161. Anuvijjati {Anuvijjati} [anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. °vijjitiṃ J III.506; ger. °viditvā Sn A 431, also °vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M I.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo). - Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out J V.162. - pp. anuvidita (q. v.). Anuvijjhati {Anuvijjhati} [anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J VI.439 - 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA III.380 (aparādhaṃ). - pp. anuviddha (q. v.). Anuvitakketi {Anuvitakketi} [anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti D I.119; III.242; S V.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A III.383. Anuvidita {Anuvidita} [pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 (= anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu III.398. Pāli Text Society 109 Pāli-English Dictionary Anuviddha {Anuviddha} (adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with (-°) VvA 278. Anuvidhīyati {Anuvidhiyati} [cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with, to follow (instruction) M II.105 = Th 1, 875; S IV.199; J II.98; III.357. Anuvidhīyanā {Anuvidhiyana} (f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati] acting according to, conformity with M I.43. Anuviloketi {Anuviloketi} [anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M I.339; Sn p. 140; J I.53; Miln 7 (lakaṃ), 21 (parisaṃ), 230. Anuvivaṭṭa {Anuvivatta} [anu + vivaṭṭa] an "after-evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhuɔs dress: a sub-vivaṭṭa (q. v.) Vin I.287 (vivaṭṭa +). Anuvisaṭa {Anuvisata} (anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over S V.277 sq.; J IV.102. Anuvuttha {Anuvuttha} [pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita] living with, staying, dwelling J II.42 (cira°); V.445 (id.). Anuvejja {Anuvejja} (adj.) in an° see anuvijjati. Anuvyañjana & Anubyañjana {Anuvyanjana} {Anubyanjana} (e. g. Vin IV.15; J I.12) (nt.) [anu + vyañjana] accompanying (i. e. secondary) attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇa) Vin I.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso "in detail"); M III.126; S IV.168; A IV.279 (abl.); V.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400.-gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D I.70 (cf. MVastu III.52); III.225; S IV.104; A I.113; II.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351). Anusaṃyāyati {Anusamyayati} [anu + saṃ + yāyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M I.209 (Bhagavantaṃ °itvā), J IV.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaððāti. Anusaṃvacchara {Anusamvacchara} (adj.) [anu + saṃv°] yearly DhA I.388 (nakkhattaṃ). Usually nt. °ṃ as adv. yearly, every year J I.68; V.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a. Anusañcarati {Anusancarati} [anu + saṃ + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M I.279; S V.53, 301; J I.202; III.502; PvA 279 (nagaraṃ). - pp. anusañcarita (q. v.). Anusañcarita {Anusancarita} [pp. of anusañcarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387. Anusañceteti {Anusanceteti} [anu + saṃ + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12. Anusaññāti {Anusannati} [either anu + saṃ + jðā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaṃyāti as short form of anusaṃyāyati, like anuyāti > anuyāyati of anu + saṃ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaṃyāti in same Pāli Text Society 110 Pāli-English Dictionary meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. °saððāyamāna Vin III.43 (kammante); inf. °saððātuṃ A I.68. (janapade). Anusaṭa {Anusata} [Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ] sprinkled with (-°), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma° magga = vippakiṇṇa VvA 36). Anusatthar {Anusatthar} [n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J IV.178 (ācariya +). Cp. anusāsaka. Anusatthi {Anusatthi} (f.) [Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana] admonition, rule, instruction J I.241; Miln 98, 172, 186 (dhamma°), 225, 227, 347. Anusandati {Anusandati} [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A IV.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati. Anusandahati {Anusandahati} [anu + saṃ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saṃ + dhā] to direct upon, to apply to A IV.47 sq. (cittaṃ samāpattiyā; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.). Anusandhanatā {Anusandhanata} (f.) [= anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa). Anusandhi {Anusandhi} (f.) [fr. anu + saṃ + dhā] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA I.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā°, ajjhāsayā°, yathā°); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiṃ ghaṭeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J I.106; 308; DhA II.40, 47; etc. Anusampavankatā {Anusampavankata} (f.) [anu + saṃ + pavankatā; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin II.88 (under anuvādādhikaraṇa). Anusaya {Anusaya} [anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity, the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. III.31; S. III.130, IV.33, V.28 236; A. I.44; II.157; III.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānābhinivesānusayā) S. II.17; III.10, 135, 161; A. V.III. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. I.188; II.252 ff., 275; III.80, 103, 169, 253; IV.41, 197; A I.132, IV.70 doubt at M. I.486 - ignorance lust and hatred at S IV.205, M III.285. At D III.254, 282; S V.60; and A IV.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence-forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps I.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; II.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs I.42. Anusayita {Anusayita} [pp. of anuseti, anu + śī] dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta° latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin. Pāli Text Society 111 Pāli-English Dictionary Anusayin {Anusayin} (adj.) [fr. anusaya] D II.283 (me dīgharatta°), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain. Anusarati {Anusarati} [anu + sṛ] to follow, conform oneself to S IV. 303 (phalaṃ anusarissati BB, but balaṃ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). - Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aññamaññaṃ a. anupeseti). Anusavati {Anusavati} at S II.54 (āsavā na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & IV. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2. Anusahagata {Anusahagata} (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S III.130; Kvu 81, see aṇu°. Anusāyika {Anusayika} (adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M II.70 (ābādha, v. l. BB anussāyika); DhA I.431 (roga). Anusāra {Anusara} [fr. anu + sṛ] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (-°) anusārena (instr.) in consequence of, in accordance with, according to J I.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91. Anusārin {Anusarin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in formula dhammānusārin saddhānusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D III.254; M I.142, 479; S III.225; V.200 sq.; A I.74; IV.10; Pug 15. - Cp. also S I.15 (bhavasota°); IV.128 (id.); J VI.444 (paṇḍitassa° = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha°). Anusāreti {Anusareti} see anusarati. Anusāsaka {Anusasaka} [fr. anusāsati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J II.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar. Anusāsati {Anusasati} [Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās] 1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin I.83; D I.135; II.154; Dh 77, 159 (aññaṃ); J VI.368; cp. I.103; Pv II.68; PvA 148. - grd. anusāsiya Vin I.59; and °sāsitabba DhA III.99. - Pass °sāsiyati Vin II.200; Miln 186. - 2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) S I.236 = Sn 1002 (paṭhaviṃ dhammenam-anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); J II.2; VI.517 (rajjassa = rajjaṃ C., i. e. take care of) DA I.246 (read °sāsantena); PvA 161 (rajjaṃ). - pp. anusiṭṭha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati. Anusāsana {Anusasana} (nt.) [Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās] advice, instruction, admonition D III.107; A I.292 (°pāṭihāriya, cp. anusāsanī); Miln 359. Anusāsanī {Anusasani} (f.) [fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S V.108; A II.147; III.87; V.24 sq., 49, 338; J V.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv III.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81.-pāṭihāriya (anusāsani°) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin II.200; D I.212, 214; III.220; A I.170; V.327; J III.323; Ps II.227 sq. Pāli Text Society 112 Pāli-English Dictionary Anusikkhati {Anusikkhati} [Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate Vin II.201 (ppr. med. °amāna); S I.235; A IV. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vattaṃ, cp. RV III.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; J I.89; II.98; III.315; V.334; VI.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. - Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [= Sk. anuśikṣayati] Miln 352. Anusikkhin {Anusikkhin} (adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M I. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta° = divā ca rattið ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA III.324). Anusiṭṭha {Anusittha} (Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded M II.96; J I.226; Pv II.811; Miln 284, 349. Anusibbati {Anusibbati} [anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin III.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.). Anusuṇāti {Anusunati} [anu + śru] to hear; pret. anassuṃ [Sk. anvaśruvaṃ] I heard M I.333. Anusumbhati [anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J VI.76. {Anusumbhati} Anusuyyaṃ {Anusuyyam} [cp. Sk. anasūyaṃ] reading at J III.27, see anasuyyaṃ. Anusuyyaka {Anusuyyaka} (adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. SnA 332); J II.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); V.112. Anuseṭṭhi {Anusetthi} [anu + seṭṭhi] 1. an under-seṭṭhi (banker, merchant) J V.384 (see anu B III. a.). - 2. in redupl. cpd. seṭṭhānuseṭṭhi (see anu B IV) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well-to-do families J VI.331. Anuseti {Anuseti} [anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or° śete, from śī] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S II.65; III.36; IV.208. - 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M I.40, 108, 433; S II.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) IV.188; A I.283; III.246; Pug 32, 48. - pp. anusayita (q. v.). Anusocati {Anusocati} [anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atītaṃ na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv I.127; II.68; PvA 95. Anusocana {Anusocana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65. Anusota° {Anusota°} [anu + sota, in °ṃ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusotaṃ (adv.) along the stream or current, down-stream A II.12; J I.70 (opp. paṭisotaṃ against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).-gāmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A II.5, 6 (opp. paṭi°); Sn. 319 (= sotaṃ anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62. Anussati {Anussati} (f.) [Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati-ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha°, Dhamma°, Sangha°, sīla°, cāga°, devatā°, i. e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D III.250, 280 (cp. A I.211); A 113 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary III.284, 312 sq., 452; V.329 sq.; Ps I.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna-sati, maraṇa-sati, kāyagatā-sati, upasamānussati) at A I.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D I.81; S V.67 = It 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); A III.284, 325, 452. Ps I.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat-ānuttariya). Anussada (adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadābhāva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA IV.165 expls. with taṇhā-ussāvābhāva, vv. ll. °ussada°); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara). {Anussada} Anussaraṇa {Anussarana} (nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, memory, recollection It 107 (= anussati at id. p. S V.67); PvA 25, 29. Anussarati {Anussarati} [Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D II.8, 53, 54 (jātito etc.); S III.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaṃ); V.67 (dhammaṃ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaṃ); A I.25, 164 (pubbenivāsaṃ), 207 (Tathāgataṃ, Dhammaṃ etc.); III.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaṃ), 418; V.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); It 82 (dhammaṃ), 98 (pubbenivāsaṃ); J I.167; II.111; Dh 364; Pv I.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA I.257; KhA 213; DhA II.84; IV.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. - pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). - Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J II.147. Anussaritar {Anussaritar} [n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S V.197, 225 (saritar +); A V.25, 28. Anussava {Anussava} [anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.] hearsay, report, tradition M I.520; II.211; S II.115; IV.138; A I.26; J I.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); II.396, 430 (id.); IV.441; instr. °ena from hearsay, by report A II.191 (cf. itihītihaṃ). Anussavana {Anussavana} (nt.) [anu + savana fr. śru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira-saddo anussavane, from hearsay). Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from hearsay M I.520; II.211. Cp. anussutika. Anussāvaka {Anussavika} {Anussavaka} [fr. anussāveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin I.74. Anussāvana {Anussavana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. anussāveti] a proclamation Vin I.317, 340; V.170, 186, 202 sq. Anussāvita {Anussavita} [pp. of anussāveti] proclaimed, announced Vin I.103. Anussāveti {Anussaveti} [anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrāvayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" AvŚ. I.102; II.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin I.103 (°ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.); II.48 (saddaṃ a.). - pp. anussāvita. Pāli Text Society 114 Pāli-English Dictionary Anussuka {Anussuka} (adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D III.47, also anissukin and apalāsin. Anussukita {Anussukita} [an + ussuk°] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka. Anussuta1 {Anussuta} (adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + sṛ] free from lust Dh 400 (= ussāvāvena anussuta C.). See also anussada. Anussuta2 {Anussuta} [anu + suta, pp. of śru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S II.9; Pug 14. Anussutika {Anussutika} (adj.) [fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from hearsay DA I.106, 107. Anussuyyaka {Anussuyyaka} see anusuyyaka. Anuhasati {Anuhasati} [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA I.256. Anuhīrati {Anuhirati} [for °hariyati, anu + hṛ] to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna D II.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram°; glosses B. K. anudhāriyam°, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79). Anūna {Anuna} (adj.) [Vedic anūna, an + ūna] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J VI 273; Dpvs V.52; Miln 226; DA I.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya). Dpvs IV.34. Anūnatā {Anunata} (f.) [abstr. fr. anūna] completeness Cp. III.611. Anūpa {Anupa} (adj.) [Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. alongside of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. IV.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (°khetta); Miln 129 (°khetta). Anūpaghāta [metrically for anupa°] not killing, not murdering. Dh 185 (= anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanað ca DhA III.238). {Anupaghata} Anūpadhika {Anupadhika} for anu° in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi. Anūpanāhin {Anupanahin} (adj.) [an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa] not bearing ill-will, not angry with J IV.463. Anūpama {Anupama} at It 122 is metric reading for anupama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama). Anūpalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta, with ū in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA IV.72. {Anupalitta} Anūpavāda {Anupavada} [an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 (= anupavādanað cɔ eva anupavadāpanað ca DhA III.238). Pāli Text Society Anūhata 115 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [pp. of an + ūhaððati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA IV.48). {Anuhata} Aneka {Aneka} (adj.) (usually °-) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (saṃvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn 688 (°sākhā); Dh 153 (°jātisāra); J IV.2; VI.366.pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin I.16; Sn p. 15. -rūpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 (=anekavidha). -vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA I.103. -vihita various, manifold D I.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA I.103 (=anekavidha). Anekaṃsā {Anekamsa} (f.) [an + ekaṃsā] doubt Nd2 1. Anekaṃsikatā {Anekamsikata} (f.) [abstr. fr. anekaṃsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93. Aneja {Aneja} (adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D II.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejānuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA IV. 194), 422; Pv IV.135 (nittaṇha PvA 230). Anedha {Anedha} (adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J IV.26 (=anindhana). Aneḷa {Anela} (adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. eḍa (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: °gala free from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA I.282, viz. elagalana-virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vācā speech: "clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings I.241) Vin I.197 = D I.114 = S I.189; A II.51, 97; III.114, 195. Cp. also M Vastu III. 322. - °mūga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D III.265; Sn 70 (=alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259. Aneḷaka {Anelaka} (adj.) [cp. BSk. aneḍaka, e. g. Av. Ś. I.187, 243; M Vastu I.339; III.322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M II.5; J VI.529. Anesanā {Anesana} (f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S II.194; J II.86; IV.381; Miln 343, 401; DA I.169; DhA IV.34; Sdhp 392, 427. Ano {Ano} - is a frequent form of compn. an-ava, see ava. Anoka {Anoka} (nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S V.24 = A V.232 = Dh 87 (okā anokaṃ āgamma). - adj. homeless, free from attachment S I.176; Dh 87 (= anālaya DhA II.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra-sahagatassa viððāṇassa okāsaṃ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhāraviððānɔ ādīnaṃ anokāsabhūta). sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S III.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anālaya-cārin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka°); DhA IV.174 (= anālaya-cārin); Miln 386. Anogha {Anogha} in anogha-tiṇṇa see ogha. Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā). Anojagghati {Anojagghati} at D I.91 is v. l. for anujagghati. Pāli Text Society 116 Pāli-English Dictionary Anojā {Anoja} (f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J VI.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J I.9 (°dāma, a garland of a flowers); VI.227 (id.); DhA II.116 (°cangoṭaka). Anottappa {Anottappa} (nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D III.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin. Anottāpin {Anottapin} & Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D III.252, 282 (pp; ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug 20, 24. Anodaka {Anodaka} (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J I.307; DhA I.52; Sdhp 443. Anodissaka {Anodissaka} (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. °vasena universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J I.81; II 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka-vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1. Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA II.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D II.17 = III. 143; anonami-daṇḍa (for anonamiya°) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoṇami° T, but anonami° vv. ll., see Miln 427). {Anonamati} Anopa {Anopa} see anūpa. Anoma {Anoma} (adj.) (only °-) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.- guṇa supreme virtue DA I.288. -dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma°); Vv 437. -dassin one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J I.228. -nāma of perfect name S I.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). -nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (=paripuṇṇa-viriyatāya a. VvA 284). -paðða of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahāpaðða SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa-pañña ThA 296), DhA I.31. -vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn 686 J VI.202. -viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353. Anomajjati {Anomajjati} [anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M I.80, 509; S V.216. Anorapāra {Anorapara} (adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319. Anoramati {Anoramati} [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J III.487; DhA III.9 (ger. °itvā continually). Anovassa {Anovassa} (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J V.317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.). Anovassaka {Anovassaka} (adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin II.211; IV.272; J I.172; II.50; III.73; DhA II. 263; ThA 188. Pāli Text Society 117 Pāli-English Dictionary Anosita {Anosita} (adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 (= anajjhositaṃ Nd1 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaṃ ṭhānaṃ SnA 566). Anta1 {Anta} [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant-; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the startingpoint)]. 1. end, finish, goal S IV.368 (of Nibbāna); Sn 467; J II.159. antaṃ karoti to make an end (of) Sn 283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, °kiriyā. - loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J I.203 (vijay°). - 2. limit, border, edge Vin I.47; Dh 305 (van°); J III.188. - 3. side: see ekamantaṃ (on one side, aside). - 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaṃ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin I.10; S II.17; III.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin I.10; S II.17; J I.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles(?), viz. sakkāya, s.-samudaya, s.-nirodha D III.216, cp. A III. 401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s.-nirodhagāmini-paṭipadā at S III.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). - Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea-side, country-side); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv II.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vanānta e. g. at Jtm VI.21; cp. also grāmānta Av. Ś. I.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J VI.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. -ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2.-ānanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D I.22; DA I.115. -ānantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness and infinitude D I.22 (see expln. at DA I.115); S III.214, 258 sq.; Ps I.155. -kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassɔa. (of the Buddha) M I.48, 531; A II.2; III.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A II.163 (vijjāyɔ); Sn 1148 (paðhānɔ). - -kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S IV.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA IV.45. -gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata). -gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin I.172; D III.45, 48 (an°); S I.154; A I.154; II.240; III.130; Ps I.151 sq. -gū one who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A IV.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. ruddhi at J VI.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). -vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J III.159. -saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D I.22, cp. DA I 115. Anta2 {Anta} (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anaðca, see ākāsɔ ānaðca and viððāṇɔānañca); D I.23, 34 = D III.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (°pañña); Dh 179, 180 (°gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA III.197); J I.178. - 2. extreme, last, worst J II.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4. - acc. as adv. in ekantaṃ extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka. Anta3 {Anta} (nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J I.66, 260 (°vaddhi-maṃsa etc.); Vism 258; DhA I.80.gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin I.275 (°ābādha). -guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S II.270; A IV.132; Kh III. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. -mukha the anus J IV.402. -vaṭṭi = °guṇa Vism 258. Pāli Text Society 118 Pāli-English Dictionary Antaka {Antaka} [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin I.21; S I.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraṇasankhāto antako DhA II.366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA III.434). Antamaso {Antamaso} (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. Ś. I.314; Divy 161] even Vin III. 260; IV.123; D I.168; M III.127; A V.195; J II.129; DA I.170; SnA 35; VvA 155. Antara {Antara} (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraṃ difference. I. (Adj.-n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as -° in cpds. āmis° with greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin I.303; dos° with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin II.249; D III.237; M I.123; PvA 78 (so read for des°). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan° antaraṃ ṭhānaṃ PvA 139 139. - 2. In noun-function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA 116); Dāvs I.10 (dīpɔ antara-vāsin living on the island); DhA I.358 (kaṇṇa-chidd° the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch° inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J V.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara-dhāyati (for antaraṃ dhāyati). (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraṃ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmiṃ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv I.1011 (dīghaṃ antaraṃ = dīghaṃ kālaṃ PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmiṃ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J V.287; Pug 55 (eḷaka-m-antaraṃ occasion of getting rain). S I.20, quoted DA I.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiṃ antaraṃ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiṃ kāraṇā. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) - now why is this"; J VI.8 (assa antaraṃ na passiṃsu they did not see a diff. in him). - 3. Phrases: antaraṃ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M III.14; J. IV.2 (°katvā leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummāraṃ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. - (b.) to remove, destroy J VI.56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaṃ karoti). II. In prep. use (°-) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaṃ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln 11. - (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin II.213; °dīpake in the centre of the island J I.240; °dvāre in the door J V.231; °magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA 109; °bhatte in phrase ekasmiṃ yeva a. during one meal J I 19 = DhA I.249; °bhattasmiṃ id. DhA IV.12; °vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. °satthīsu between the thighs Vin II.161 (has antarā satthīnaṃ) = J I.218. III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D I.56; S IV.59, 73; J I.393; PvA 13 (kāl° in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA I.63, 358. - loc. antare in, inside of, in between (-° or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt° in the Sutta); DhA III.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh°). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA I.59 (vanasaṇḍassa a.). - abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA II.86; IV.191; PvA 272. IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J IV.139; Miln 382 (solQ; DhA I.397; PvA 63 (tadantaraṃ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), Pāli Text Society 119 Pāli-English Dictionary 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara. -atīta gone past in the meantime J II.243. -kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D I 54. -kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 -cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. -cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S IV.173. -bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J I.125. -bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara-raṭṭha) Vin III.47 -raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J V.135. -vāsa an interregnum Dpvs V.80. -vāsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin I.94, 289; II.272. Cf. next. -sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.). Antaraṃsa {Antaramsa} [B.Sk. antarāṃsa; antara + aṃsa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J V.173 = VI.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihatɔ antaraṃso). Antaraṭṭhaka {Antaratthaka} (adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake hima-pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka2). First phrase at Vin I.31, 288; III 31; second at M I.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta-raṭṭhaka); A I.136 (in nom.); J I.390; Miln 396. Antaradhāna {Antaradhana} (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A I.58 (saddhammassa); II.147; III.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. °dhāyana. Antaradhāyati {Antaradhayati} [antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn 449 (°dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J I.119 = DhA I.248; DhA IV.191 (ppr. °dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA 152, 217, (°dhāyi), 245; VvA 48. - ppr. antarahita (q. v.). - Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J I.147; II.415; PvA 123. Antaradhāyana {Antaradhayana} (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA IV.191. (v. l. °adhāna). Antarayati {Antarayati} [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in between, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) J I.218. Antarahita {Antarahita} (adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D I.222. M I.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. - 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin I.47; II.209; M II.57. Antarā {Antara} (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (°-) and adv. "in between" (of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA I.34 sq. - (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D I.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaṃ antarā ca Nāḷandaṃ between R. and N.). - c. gen. & loc. Vin II.161 (satthīnaṃ between the thighs, where id. p. at J I.218 has antara-satthīsu); A II.245 (satthīnaṃ. but v. l. satthimhi). - (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. - occasionally Miln 251. - (3). (pref.) see cpds.-kathā "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D II.1, 8, 9; S I.79; IV.281; A III.167; Sn p. Pāli Text Society 120 Pāli-English Dictionary 115; DA I.49 and freq. passim. -gacchati to come in between, to prevent J VI.295. -parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D III.237; A I.233; Pug 16. -magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J I.253; Miln 16; DhA II.21; III.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara°). -maraṇa premature death DhA I.409; PvA 136.-muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin II.167. Antarāpaṇa {Antarapana} (nt.) [antarā + paṇa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J I.55; VI.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA I.181. Antarāya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (-°); prevention, bar; danger, accident to (-). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin I.112, 169 etc., viz. rāja°, cora°, aggi°, udaka°, manussa°, amanussa°, vāḷa°, siriṃsapa°, jīvita°, brahmacariya°. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā-caura-manuṣy-amanuṣyavyāḍ-agny-udakaṃ. - D I.3, 25, 26; A III.243, 306; IV.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (= jīvit° DhA III.431); J I.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA II 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat° removing the obstacles) -antarāyaṃ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin I.15; J VI.171; Vism 120; PvA 20.-kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D I.227; S I.34; A I.161; Pv IV.322. {Antaraya} Antarāya2 {Antaraya} (adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antarā Sn A 603. Antarāyika {Antarayika} (adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin I.94 = II.272; M I.130; S II.226; ThA 288. Antarāyikin (adj.-n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin IV.280 (an° = asati antarāye). {Antarayikin} Antarāḷa {Antarala} (nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs I.52; III.53 (nabh°). Antarika {Antarika} (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. - 1. intermediate, next, following: see an°. - 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka-yojan° ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. - 3. inside: see antarikā. -anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin II.165, 212 (ān°); IV.234. Antarikā {Antarika} (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. - 1. the inside of Vin IV.272 (bhājan°). - 2. the neighbourhood, region of (-°), sphere, compass Vin III.39 (ur°, angul°); J I.265 (yakkhassa sīm° inside the yṡ sphere of influence). - 3. interval, interstice Vin II.116 (sutt° in lace); A I.124 (vijj° the interval of lightning). Antalikkha {Antalikkha} (nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari-kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D II.15; A III.239; IV.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv I.31 (= vehāyasa-saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.-ga going through the air A I.215. -cara walking through the air Vin I.21; D I.17; S I.111; J V.267; DA I.110. Antavant {Antavant} (ādj.) [anta1 + °vant] having an end, finite D I.22, 31, 187; Ps I.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145.-anantavant endless, infinite A V.193 (loka). See also loka. Pāli Text Society 121 Pāli-English Dictionary Anti {Anti} (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and-, Ger. ant-, ent-] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J V.399 (tavɔ antiṃ āgatā, read as tavɔ anti-m-āgatā; C. santikaṃ), 400, 404; VI.565 (sāmikassɔ anti = antike C.). - Cp. antika. Antika {Antika} (adj.-n.) -1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh VIII.1. (odak°); J VI.565 (antike loc. = anti near).- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S I.130 (purisā etad-antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons. Antima {Antima} (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D II.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antimaṃ dehaṃ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarīraṃ antimaṃ dhāreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarīrɔ antima-dhārin); Sdhp 278.-dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhāra T, °dhara v. l.); VvA 163. -dhārin = prec. S I.14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); II.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. -vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin I. 121, 135, 167, 320. -sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S I.210 (Buddho a°-sarīro); A II.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA IV.166 (= koṭiyaṃ ṭhito attabhāvo). Ante° {Ante°} (pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of -aḥ to -e, instead of the usual -o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: °pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin I.75, 269; A V.81; J II.125; IV.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; °purikā harem woman DhsA 403; °vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin I.60; III.25; S I.180; IV.136; J I. 166; II.278; III.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; °vāsin = °vāsika Vin III.66; D I.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M III.116; DA I.36. Anto {Anto} (indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner, inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (°-) in, within, inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesanaṃ gata gone into the house J I.158; anto jālaṃ pavisati go into the net DhA III.175; anto gāmaṃ pavisati to go into the village DhA II.273; anto nagaraṃ pavisati DhA.89; PvA 47. - (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J II.182; gāme DhA II.52; gehe DhA II.84; nadiyaṃ J VI.278; nivesane J II.323; vasse in the rainy season J IV.242; vimānasmiṃ Pv I.101; sattāhe inside of a week PvA 55. -koṭisanthāra "house of the Golden Pavement" J IV.113. -gadha (°gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase °hetu, by inner reason or by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. -jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D III.61 (opp. to servants); A I.152; J VI.301; DA I.300. -jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA IV.41. -jālikata "innetted", gone into the net D I.45; DA I.127. -nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA 18. -nimugga altogether immersed D I.75; A III.26. -parisoka inner grief Ps I.38. -pura = antepura J I.262. mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin III.19. -bhavika being inside Miln 95. -rukkhatā being among trees J I.7. -vasati to inhabit, live within S IV.136. vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J V.118. -vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66.-vihāra the inside of the V. DhA I.50 (°ābhimukhī turning towards etc.), -samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta°, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). -soka inner grief Ps I.38. Andu {Andu} [cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin I.108 = III.249 (tiṇ°); D I.245; J I.21 (°ghara prisonhouse); DhA IV.54 (°bandhana). Pāli Text Society Andha 122 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J I.216 (dhūm°); Pv IV.148; PvA 3. - dark, dull, blinding M III.151 (°andhaṃ adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaṃ tamaḥ); DhA II.49 (°vana dark forest). - 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D I.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (°veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A I.128; Th 2, 394 (= bāla ThA 258). See cpds. °karaṇa, °kāra, °bāla, °bhūta.-ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paððācakkhuno abhāvena VvA 337). -karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln 113 (paðha, + gambhīra). -kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin I.16; D II.12; A I.56; II.54; III.233; J III.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (=avijj° VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA I.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. -tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S V.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andhaṃ tamaṃ); J VI.247. -bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J I.246, 262; VI.337; DhA II.43, 89; III.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. -bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S IV.21; A II.72; J VI.139 (spelled °būta); Dh 59, 174 (= paððā-cakkhuno abhāvena DhA III.175). -vesa "blind form", disguise J III.418. {Andha} Andhaka {Andhaka} [fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad-fly Sn 20 (= kāṇamakkhikānaṃ adhivacanaṃ SnA 33). Anna {Anna} (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns aparɔ aṇṇa and pubbɔ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubbɔ aṇṇaṃ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (aparɔ aṇṇaṃ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattādi. - D I.7; A I.107, 132; II.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J III.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214.-āpa food & water Sdhp 100. -da giving food Sn 297. -pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv I.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43. Annaya {Annaya} in dur° see anvaya. Anvakāsi {Anvakasi} 3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 (= khipi, chaḍḍesi C.). Anvakkhara {Anvakkhara} (adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syltable", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin IV.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaṃ. Anvagā {Anvaga} 3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā J V.258. Anvagū {Anvagu} 3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S I.39; Sn 586. Anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ {Anvaddhamasam} (adv.) [anu + aḍḍha + māsa] every fortnight, twice a month M II.8; Vin IV.315 (= anuposathikaṃ); DhA I.162; II.25. Anvattha {Anvattha} (adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (°saððābhāva). Pāli Text Society 123 Pāli-English Dictionary Anvadeva {Anvadeva} (adv.) [anva-d-eva with euphonic d.; like sammad-eva corresponding to Sk. anvag-eva] behind, after, later D I.172; M III.172; S V.1 (spelt anudeva); A I.11; V. 214; It 34. Anvaya {Anvaya} (n.-adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D II. 83 = III.100; M I.69 (dhamm° logical conclusion of); S II.58; D III.226 (anvaye ðāṇaṃ); Pv II.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly, according to = paccayā PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). - 2. (adj.) following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (-°) D I.46 (tad°); M I.238 (kāyo citt° acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an° inconsistent); It 79 (tass°). - dur° spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakkā paððāpetuṃ DhA II.173); Sn 243, 251 (=duviððāpaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293). Anvayatā {Anvayata} (f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M I.500 (kāy° giving in to the body). Anvahaṃ {Anvaham} (adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dāvs IV.8. Anvāgacchati {Anvagacchati} [anu + ā + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. IV.56 (=anubandhi PvA 260). - 2. to come back again J I.454 (ger. °gantvāna). - pp. anvāgata (q. v.). Anvāgata {Anvagata} [pp. of anvāgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J IV.385; V.4. Anvādisati {Anvadisati} [anu + ā + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. °disāhi Pv II.26 (= uddissa dehi PvA 80); III.28 (= ādisa PvA 181). Anvādhika {Anvadhika} (adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin I.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts II.232) by „half and half‟; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up. Anvāmaddati {Anvamaddati} [anu + ā + maddati] to squeeze, wring J III. 481 (galakaṃ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaṃ maddi). Anvāya {Anvaya} [ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D I.13 (ātappaṃ by means of self-sacrifice), 97 (saṃvāsaṃ as a result of their cohabitation); J I.56 (buddhiṃ), 127 (piyasaṃvāsaṃ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaṃ). Often in phrase vuddhiṃ anvāya growing up, e. g. J I.278; III. 126; DhA II.87. Anvāyika {Anvayika} (adj.-n.) [fr. anvāya] following; one who follows, a companion D III.169; Nd2 59; J III.348. Anvārohati {Anvarohati} [anu + ā + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J IV.465 (aor. anvāruhi). Anvāvassa {Anvavassa} at J V.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain. Pāli Text Society 124 Pāli-English Dictionary Anvāviṭṭha {Anvavittha} [pp. of anvāvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S I.114. Anvāvisati {Anvavisati} [anu + ā + visati] to go into, to take possession of, to visit M I.326; S I.67; Miln 156. - pp. anvāviṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati. Anvāsatta {Anvasatta} [pp. of anu + ā + saðj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A IV.356 (v. l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q. v.). See also foll. Anvāsattatā {Anvasattata} (f.) [abstr. fr. anvāsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA I.287 (in same context as anvāsatta A IV.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35). Anvāsanna {Anvasanna} [pp. of anu + ā + sad] endowed with, possessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v. l. ajjhāpanna), = A IV.356 which has anvāsatta. Anvāssavati {Anvassavati} [anu + ā + savati, sru] to stream into, to attack, befall D I.70; A III.99; Pug 20, 58. Anvāhata {Anvahata} [pp. of anu + ā + han] struck, beaten; perplexed Dh 39 (°cetasa). Anvāhiṇḍati {Anvahindati} [anu + ā + hiṇḍati] to wander to (acc.) A IV.374, 376 [BSk. same, e. g. Divy 68 etc.]. Anveti [cp. anu + eti, from i] to follow, approach, go with Sn 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59); Dh 1 (=kāyikaṃ . . . dukkhaṃ anugacchati DhA I.24), 2, 71, 124; perhaps at Pv II.620 (with v. l. BB at PvA 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed). {Anveti} Anvesa {Anvesa} [from next] seeking, searching, investigation, M I.140 (°ṃ nɔ ādhigacchanti do not find). Anvesati {Anvesati} [anu + esati] to look, for search, seek S I.112 (ppr. anvesaṃ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp III.117 (ppr. anvesanto). -aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv II.620 (? perhaps better with v. l. PvA 99 as anventi of anveti). Anvesin {Anvesin} [anu-esin] (adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Sn 965 (kusala°). Anha {Anha} [Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha. Apa° {Apa°} [Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. a)po/, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. Qb, Ags. E. of. - A compar. form fr. apa is apara "fQther away"] Welldefined directional prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base-prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). - 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; °kaḍḍhati to draw away, remove; °kamati walk away; °gacchati go away; °nidhāti put away (= a)potiqhmi, abdo); °nudati push away; °neti lead away; °vattati turn away (= āverto); °sakkati step aside; °harati take away. - 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = Pāli Text Society 125 Pāli-English Dictionary down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya° > vya° etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, °kassati, °kirati, °gata, °cāra, °jhāyati, °thaṭa, °dāna, °dhāreti, °nata, °nāmeti, °nīta, °lekhana, °loketi, °vadati. Apakaḍḍhati {Apakaddhati} [apa + kaḍḍhati, cp. Sk. apa-karṣati] to draw away, take off, remove D I.180; III.127; DhA II.86. -Caus. apakaḍḍhāpeti J I.342; IV.415; Miln 34. - Cp. apakassati; & see pakattheti. Apakata {Apakata} [pp. of apakaroti] put off, done away, in ājīvik āpakata being without a living M I.463 (the usual phrase being °apagata); Miln 279 (id.). At It 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v. l. ā° vakatā). Apakataññu {Apakatannu} (adj.) [a + pa + kataññu] ungrateful Vin II.199. Apakantati {Apakantati} [apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati] to cut off Th 2, 217 (gale = gīvaṃ chindati ThA 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.). Apakaroti {Apakaroti} [apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning] to throw away, put off; hurt, offend, slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 (q. v.). - pp. apakata (q. v.). Cp. apakāra. Apakassati {Apakassati} [Sk. apa- & ava-kaṛṣati, cp. apakaḍḍhati] to throw away, remove Sn 281 (v.l. BB & SnA ava°; expld. by niddhamati & nikkaḍḍhati SnA 311). -ger. apakassa Sn II.198 = Miln 389. See also apakāsati. Apakāra {Apakara} {Apakaraka} [cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti] injury, mischief; one who injures or offends DhA III.63; Sdhp 283. Apakāsati {Apakasati} at Vin II.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as "draw away, distract, bring about a split ordissension (of the Sangha)". The v. l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh's expln. "parisaṃ ākaḍḍhanti". - Cp. A III.145 & see avapakāsati. The reading at the id. p. at A V.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin II.204 has avapakāsati), which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati). Apakiritūna {Apakirituna} at Th 2, 447 T (reading of C. is abhi°) is explained ThA 271 to mean apakiritvā chaḍḍetvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense "to cast off, reject", to which also belongs kirāta in meaning "cast off" i. e. man of a so-called low tribe. See also avakirati 2. Apakkamati {Apakkamati} [cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J III.27; Sdhp 294. - aor. apakkami Pv IV.75; ger. apakkamitvā PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv II.928. Apagacchati {Apagacchati} [apa + gam] to go away, turn aside DhA I.401 (°gantvā). - pp. apagata (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 126 Pāli-English Dictionary Apagata {Apagata} [pp. of apagacchati] 1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed It 112; PvA 39, 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata). - 2. (°-) freq. as prefix, meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin II.129 (°gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); J I.61 (°vattha without clothes); PvA 38 (°soka free from grief), 47 (°lajja not shy), 219 (°viððāṇa without feeling). - Cp. apakata. Apagabbha {Apagabbha} (adj.) [a + pa + gabbha] not entering another womb, i. e. not destined to another rebirth Vin III.3. Apagama {Apagama} [Sk. apagama] going away, disappearance Sdhp 508. Apanga {Apanga} (apānga) [Sk. apānga] the outer corner of the eye J III.419 (asitāpangin blackeyed); IV.219 (bahi°). Spelt avanga at Vin II.267, where the phrase avangaṃ karoti, i. e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as "avangadese adhomukhaṃ lekhaṃ karonti". According to Kern, Toev. 20, Bdhgh's expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of "a coloured mark upon the body" (cp. PW. apānga). Apacaya {Apacaya} [fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness), decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin II.2 = III.21 = IV.213; cp. J III.342; S II.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A IV.280 = Vin II.259 (opp. ācaya); J III.342 (sekho °ena na tappati); Vbh 106, 319, 326, 330. -gāmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A V.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505, 1014; Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156). Apacāyati [fr. apa-ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D I.91 (pūjeti +); J III.82. - Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2) A IV.245; ThA 72 (here to apacināti 1). - pp. apacita (q. v.). {Apacayati} Apacāyana {Apacayana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J I.220; V.326; DA I.256 (°kamma); VvA 24 (°ṃ karoti = añjalikaṃ karoti); PvA 104 (°kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya). Apacāyika {Apacayika} (adj.) [fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka MVastu I.198; Divy 293] honouring, respecting J IV.94 (vaddha°, cp. vaddhāpacāyin); Pv II.7 8 (jeṭṭha°); IV.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhāpacayaka. Apacāyin {Apacayin} (adj.) [fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha° = vaddhānaṃ apaciti karaṇena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J I.47, 132, 201; II.299; V.325; Miln 206; Sdhp 549. Apacāra {Apacara} [fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi-carati] falling off, fault, wrong doing J VI.375. Apacita {Apacita} [pp. of apacayati or apacināti] honoured, worshipped, esteemed Th 1, 186; J II.169; IV.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita VvA 39); 3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21. Pāli Text Society 127 Pāli-English Dictionary Apaciti {Apaciti} (f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J I.220; II.435; III.82; IV.308; VI.88; Miln 180, 234 (°ṃ karoti), 377 (pūjana +); SnA 332 (°karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana. Apacināti {Apacinati} [apa + cināti] 1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with, (cp. apacaya), diminish, make less S III.89 (opp. ācināti); Th 1, 807; J IV.172 (apacinethɔ eva kāmāni = viddhaṃseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor. 3rd pl. apaciyiṃsu (to be read for upacciṃsu) at J VI. 187 (akkhīni a. "the eyes gave out") and Pot. pres. apace ThA 72 (on v.40). - 2. [= apacayati] to honour, esteem; observe, guard Vin I.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraṃ (?) v. l apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); M I.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Th 1, 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); J V.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v. l. anapavinati). - pp. apacita (q.v.). Apacca [Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D I.90 (bandhupāda° cp. muṇḍaka), 103 (id.); S I.69 (an°) Sn 991; DA I.254. {Apacca} Apaccakkha {Apaccakkha} (adj.) [a + paṭi + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Miln 46 sq. Apacchapurima {Apacchapurima} (adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J III.295. Apajaha {Apajaha} (adj.) [a + pajaha] not giving up, greedy, miserly A III.76 (v. l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vaḍḍhinissita mānatthaddha). Apajita {Apajita} (nt.) [pp. of apa + ji] defeat Dh. 105. Apajjhāyati [apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi-dhyāyati] to muse, meditate, ponder, consider M I.334 (nijjhāyati +); III.14 (id.). {Apajjhayati} Apaññaka {Apannaka} (adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs VI.29. Apaṭṭhapeti {Apatthapeti} [Caus. fr. apa-tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof] to put aside, leave out, neglect J IV.308; V.236. Apaṇṇaka {Apannaka} (adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. III.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a-praśna-ka] certain, true, absolute M I.401, 411; A V.85, 294, 296; J I.104 (where expld as ekaṃsika aviruddha niyyānika). Apanṇṇakatā {Apannnakata} (f.) [abstr. of apaṇṇaka] certainty, absoluteness S IV.351 sq. Apatacchika {Apatacchika} only in khārāpatācch° only in khārāpatācch° (q. v.) a kind of torture. Apattha1 {Apattha} (adj.) [Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2] thrown away Dh 149 (= chaḍḍita DhA III.112). Pāli Text Society 128 Pāli-English Dictionary Apattha2 {Apattha} 2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q. v.). Apatthaṭa {Apatthata} = avatthaṭa covered Th 1, 759. Apatthita & Apatthiya {Apatthita} {Apatthiya} see pattheti. Apadāna {Apadana} (nt.) 1. [= Sk. apadāna] removing, breaking off, D III.88. - 2. [= Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition, instruction, morals Vin II.4 (an° not taking advice), 7 (id.) M I.96; A V.337 sq. (saddhā°) Th 1, 47. - 3. legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaṃ, that is „the stories‟, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues II.3. - Cp. also pariyāpadāna. Apadisa {Apadisa} [fr apa + diś] reference, testimony, witness DhA II.39. Apadisati {Apadisati} [apa + disati] to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin III.159; J I.215; III.234; IV.203; Miln 270; DhA II.39; Nett 93. Apadesa {Apadesa} [cp. Sk. apadeśa] 1. reason, cause, argument M I.287 (an°). - 2. statement, designation PvA 8. - 3. pretext J III.60; IV.13; PvA 154. Thus also apadesaka J VI.179. Apadhāreti {Apadhareti} [Caus. of apa + dhṛ, cp. Sk. ava-dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231] to observe, request, ask ThA 16. Apanata [pp. of apanamati] "bent away", drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata ("strained forth & strained aside" Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) M I.386; S I.28. {Apanata} Apanamati {Apanamati} [semantically doubtful] to go away Sn 1102 (apanamissati, v. l. apalām° & apagam°; expld at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. - pp. apanata (q. v.) - Caus. apanāmeti. Apanāmeti {Apanameti} [Caus. fr. apanamati] 1. to take away, remove M I.96 = A I.198 (kathaṃ bahiddhā a. carry outside); Kh VIII.4 (= aððaṃ ṭhānaṃ gameti KhA 220). - 2. [= Sk. ava-namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin II.208 (chattaṃ); S I.226 (id.); J II.287 (id., v. l. apanetvā); D I.126 (hatthaṃ, for salute). Apanidhā {Apanidha} [apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding-place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. a)poti(qhmi = Lat. abdo "do away"] to hide, conceal Vin IV.123 (°dheti, °dheyya, °dhessati); PvA 215 (°dhāya ger.). - pp. apanihita. - Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin IV.123. Apanihita {Apanihita} [pp. of apanidahati] concealed, in abstr. °ttaṃ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft PvA 216. Apanīta {Apanita} [Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta] taken away or off. removed, dispelled PvA 39. 129 Pāli Text Society Apanudati & Apanudeti Pāli-English Dictionary [apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati] to push or drive away, remove, dispel; pres. apanudeti Miln 38. aor. apānudi Pv I.86 (= apanesi PvA 41); II.314 (= avahari aggahesi PvA 86); Dāvs I.8. ger. apanujja D II.223. See also der. apanudana. {Apanudati} {Apanudeti} Apanudana & Apanūdana {Apanudana} (nt.) [Sk. apanodana, fr. apanudati] taking or driving away, removal Vin II.148 = J I.94 (dukkha°); Sn 252 (id.); PvA 114 (id.). Apanuditar {Apanuditar} [n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ] remover, dispeller D III.148. Apaneti {Apaneti} [apa + nī] to lead away, take or put away, remove J I.62, 138; II.4, 155 (aor. apānayi) III.26; Miln 188, 259, 413; PvA 41, 74, 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63. Pass. apanīyati S I.176. pp. apanīta (q. v.). Apapibati {Apapibati} [apa + pibati] to drink from something J II.126 (aor. apāpāsi). Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati {Apabbuhati} {Apabyuhati} [apa + vi + ūh] to push off, remove, scrape away A III.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv. ll. °bbūhitvā); J I.265 (paṃsuṃ). - Caus. °byūhāpeti to make remove or brush J IV.349 (paṃsuṃ). Apabyāma {Apabyama} see apavyāma. Apamāra {Apamara} [Sk. apasmāra] epilepsy Vin I.93. Cp. apasmāra. Apamārika {Apamarika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmārin] epileptic Vin IV.8, 10, 11. Apayāti {Apayati} [Sk. apayāti, apa + yā] to go away J VI.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati). - Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss M III.176; S II.119. Apayāna {Apayana} (nt.) [Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti] going away, retreat D I.9 (opp. upa°); DA I.95. Apara {Apara} (adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix -ra = Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. a)pwte/rw farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April). Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next, second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D III.190 (°pajā another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (nɔ); J I.59 (aparaṃ divasaṃ on some day following); III.51 (apare tayo sahāyā "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Franc‫נּ‬ais); IV.3 (dīpa); PvA 81 (°divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D III 128. - nt. aparaṃ what follows i. e. future state, consequence; future Vin I.35 (nāparaṃ nothing more); Sn 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases adverbially; aparaṃ (acc.) further, besides, also J I.256; III.278; often with other part. like athāparaṃ & further, moreover Sn 974; and puna cɔ aparaṃ It 100; Miln 418 (so read for puna ca paraṃ) and passim; aparam pi Vism 9.- aparena in future D III.201. - Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparāparaṃ (local) to & fro J I.265, 278; PvA 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on J II.377; Miln 132 VvA 271; PvA 176 (= punappunaṃ).anta (aparanta) = aparaṃ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward J v.471; Miln 292 (janapada). (b.) future D I.30 (°kappika, cp. DA I.118); Pāli Text Society 130 Pāli-English Dictionary M II.228 (°ānudiṭṭhi - thought of the future); S III.46 (id.).-āpariya (fr. aparāpara) everfollowing, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma J V.106; Miln 108.bhāga the future, lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on J I.34, 262; IV.1; VvA 66. Aparajju {Aparajju} (adv.) [Sk. apare-dyus] on the foll. day Vin II.167; S I.186; Miln 48. Aparajjhati {Aparajjhati} [Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh] to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin II.78 = III.161; J V.68; VI.367; Miln 189; PvA 263. - pp. aparaddha & aparādhita (q. v.). Aparaṇṇa {Aparanna} (nt.) [apara + aṇṇa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhaðða Vin IV.265; Vin III.151 (pubb° +); IV.265, 267; A IV. 108, 112 (tila-mugga-māsā°; opp. sāli-yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaṃ nāma sūpeyyaṃ); J V.406 (°jā = hareṇukā, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaṇṇa°). See also dhañña & harita. Aparaddha {Aparaddha} [pp. of aparajjhati] missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) D I.91, 103, 180; S I.103 (suddhimaggaṃ); Th 1, 78; Sn 891 (suddhiṃ = viraddha khalita Nd1 300); PvA 195. Aparapaccaya {Aparapaccaya} (adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin I.12 (vesārajja-ppatta +); D I.110 (id.); M II 41; M I.491; S III.83; DA I.278 (= nāssa paro paccayo). Aparājita {Aparajita} (adj.) [Vedic aparājita; a + parājita] unconquered Sn 269; J I.71, 165. Aparādha {Aparadha} [fr. apa + rādh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J I.264 (nir°); III.394; IV.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116. Aparādhika {Aparadhika} (adj.) [fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin] guilty, offending, criminal J II.117 (vāja°); Miln 149 (issara°), 189 (aparādhikatā). Aparādhita {Aparadhita} [pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J V.26 (so read for aparadhɔ ito). Aparāyin {Aparayin} (adj.) [a + parāyin, cp. parāyana] having no support J III.386 (f. °ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā). Apalāpin {Apalapin} see apalāsin see apalāsin [Sk. apalāpin "denying, concealing" different]. Apalāḷeti {Apalaleti} [apa + lāḷeti] to draw over to Vin I.85. Apalāyin {Apalayin} (adj.) [a + palāyin] not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); J IV.296; V.4 (where C. gives variant "apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho", which latter has v. l. apalāsinī & is expld. by C. as palāpa-rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin. Pāli Text Society 131 Pāli-English Dictionary Apalāsin {Apalasin} (adj.) [apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms apalāyin, apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd2 introd. p. XIX.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pug 22 as "yassa puggalassa ayaṃ paḷāso pahīno ayaṃ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī" does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv. ll.] either "not neglectful, pure, clean" (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff, cp. apalāyin at J V.4), or "not selfish, not hard, generous" (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin), or "brave, fearless, energetic" (= apalāyin) D III.47, cp. Pug 22. See palāsin. Apalibuddha & Apalibodha {Apalibuddha} [a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati] unobstructed, unhindered, free J III. 381 (°bodha); Miln 388; DhA III.198. Apalekhana {Apalekhana} (nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava-lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthāpalekhana "hand-licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthāvalekhana M I.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastāvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug 55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piṇḍamhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati). Apalekhati {Apalekhati} [apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati] to lick off Pug A 231 (hatthaṃ). Apalepa {Apalepa} in "so ɔpalepa patito jarāgharo" at Th 2, 270 is to be read as "so palepa°". Morris's interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous. Apalokana {Apalokana} (nt.) [fr. apaloketi] permission, leave, in °kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma I.3) Vin II.89; IV.152. Apalokita {Apalokita} [pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita] 1. asked permission, consulted S III.5. - 2. (nt.) permission, consent, M I.337 (Nāgāpalokitaṃ apalokesi). - 3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna S IV.370. Apalokin {Apalokin} (adj.) [Sk. avalokin] "looking before oneself", looking at, cautious Miln 398. Apaloketi {Apaloketi} [BSk. ava-lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M I.557 (v. l. for apaciṇāti, where J V.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. - 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin III.10, 11; IV.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); M I.337; S III.95 (bhikkhusanghaṃ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); J VI.298 (vājānaṃ); DhA I.67. - pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & °lokin. Apavagga [Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggāpavagga Dāvs II.62; III.75. {Apavagga} Apavattati {Apavattati} [apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto] to turn away or aside, to go away J IV.347 (v. l. apasakkati). Apavadati {Apavadati} [apa + vadati] to reproach, reprove, reject, despise D I.122 (= paṭikkhipati DA I.290); S V.118 (+paṭikkosati). Pāli Text Society 132 Pāli-English Dictionary Apavahati {Apavahati} [apa + vahati] to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Miln 324 (kaddamaṃ). Apaviṭṭha {Apavittha} at Pv III 82 is to be read apaviddha at Pv III 82 is to be read apaviddha (q. v.). Apaviṇāti {Apavinati} is probably misreading for apaciṇāti is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac° 2). As v. l. at J V.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv. ll. are anuvi° & apavī°; meaning "not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati "to take care of, to pay attention to" (c. acc.) at M I.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv. ll. to this passage (see M. I.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi. Apaviddha {Apaviddha} [pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh] thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed S I.202; III.143; Sn 200 (susānasmiṃ = chaḍḍita SnA 250); Th 1, 635 = Dh 292 (= chaḍḍita DhA III.452); Pv III.82 (susānasmiṃ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); J I.255; III.426; YI.90 (= chaḍḍita C.). Sdhp 366. Apaviyūhati {Apaviyuhati} see appabbūhati. Apavīṇati {Apavinati} see apaviṇāti see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti). Apavyāma {Apavyama} [apa + vyāma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby°) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult, defile S I.226 (v. l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabyākato, abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at DhA II.36); DhA II.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma). For further detail see apasavya. Apasakkati {Apasakkati} [apa + sakkati] to go away, to go aside J IV.347 (v. l. for apavattati); VvA 101; PvA 265 (aor. °sakki = apakkami). Apasavya {Apasavya} (adj.) [apa + savya] right (i. e. not left), contrary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv. ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato), where C. expls. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaṃ katvā, "which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaṃ karoti to go on the right side" (Morris J P T S. 1886, 127). - See apavyāma. Apasāda {Apasada} [fr. apa + sad] putting down, blame, disparagement M III.230. Apasādita {Apasadita} [pp. of apasādeti] blamed, reproached, disparaged S II.219; SnA 541. Apasādeti {Apasadeti} [Caus. of apa + sad] 1. to refuse, decline Vin IV.213, 263; J V.417 (= uyyojeti). - 2. to depreciate, blame, disparage Vin III.101; M III.230 (opp. ussādeti); DA I.160. - pp. apasādita (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 133 Pāli-English Dictionary Apasmāra {Apasmara} [Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ] epilepsy, convulsion, fit J IV.84. Cp. apamāra. Apassanto {Apassanto} etc. see passati. Apassaya {Apassaya} [cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti] 1. support, rest ThA 258. - 2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak° a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) M I.78; J I 493; III.235. -sāppassaya with a head rest J IV.299.-pīṭhaka a chair with a head-rest J III.235. Apassayika {Apassayika} (adj.) [fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin -°] reclining on, in kaṇṭaka° one who lies on a bed of thorns (see kaṇṭaka) M I.78; J IV.299 (v. l, kaṇḍikesayika); Pug 55. Apassita {Apassita} [pp. of apasseti] 1. leaning against J II.69 (tālamūlaṃ = nissāya ṭhita C.). - 2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or loc.) Vv 101 (parāgāraṃ = nissita VvA 101); J IV.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita. Apasseti {Apasseti} [Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. - 1. (lit.) lean against Vin II.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a headrest). - 2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or -°) Vin III.38; J I.214; PvA 189. - pp. apassita (q. v.). - See also avasseti. Apassena (nt.) [fr. apasseti] a rest, support, dependence M III.127 (°ka); D III.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj. caturāpassena one who has the fourfold support viz. sankhāyɔ ekaṃ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti A V.30.-phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab, head-rest Vin I.48; II.175, 209. {Apassena} Apahattar {Apahattar} [n. ag. to apaharati] one who takes away or removes, destroyer M I 447 = Kvu 528. Apahara {Apahara} [Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati] taking away, stealing, robbing J II.34. Apaharaṇa {Apaharaṇa} (nt.) = apahara Miln 195. Apaharati {Apaharati} [apa + hṛ] to take away, remove, captivate, rob J III.315 (aor. apahārayiṃ); Miln 413; DA I.38. Apākaṭatā {Apakatata} (f.) [a + pākaṭa + tā] unfitness Miln 232 (v. l. apākatatta perhaps better). Apākatika {Apakatika} (adj.) [a + pākata + ika] not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed DhA II.7. Cp. appakāra. Apācīna {Apacina} (adj.) [Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i. e. opposite, dark] westerly, backward, below S III.84; It 120 (apācīnaṃ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaṃ tiriyaṃ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch's, the vv. ll. are apācinaṃ; apācini, apāci & apāminaṃ, C. expls. by heṭṭhā). Pāli Text Society 134 Pāli-English Dictionary Apāṭuka {Apatuka} (adj.) [a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur] not open, sly, insidious Th 1, 940 (as v. l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "unscrupulous", by Neumann as "ohne Redlichkeit"). Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i. e. fraudulent. See also next. Apāṭubha {Apatubha} (adj.) [a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but without reason] = apāṭuka, i. e. sly, fraudulent J IV.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda-virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt). Apāda (?) [apa + ā + dā] giving away in marriage J IV. 179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob. be āpāda = pariggaha). {Apada} Apādaka {Apadaka} (adj.) [a + pāda + ka] not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin II.110 = J II.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at It 87 (v. l. apāda). Apāna {Apana} (nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104-112. See ānāpāna. Apānakatta {Apanakatta} (nt.) [a + pānaka + ttaṃ] "waterless state", living without drinking water J V.243. Apāpaka {Apapaka} (adj.) [a + pāpaka] guiltless, innocent f. °ikā Vv 314; 326. Apāpata {Apapata} (adj.) [apa + ā + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J IV.234 (aggiṃ). Apāpurana {Apapurana} (nt.) [fr. apāpurati] a key (to a door) Vin I.80; III.119; M III.127. See also avāpuraṇa. Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati {Apapurati} {Apapunati} [Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ, but Vedic only apa-vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa-Ûerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin I.5 (apāpurɔ etaṃ Amatassa dvāraṃ: imper.; where id. p. S I.137 has avāpur°, T., but v. l. apāpur°); Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraṃ, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti). - pp. apāruta (q. v.). - Pass. apāpurīyati [cp. BSk. apāvurīyati M Vastu II.158] to be opened M III.184 (v. l. avā°); J I.63 (avā°); Th 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati. Apābhata {Apabhata} [pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ cp. Vedic apa-bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava°] taken away, stolen J III.54. Apāya {Apaya} [Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz. - 1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya° = viyoga DhA III.276). - 2. loss (of property) D III.181, 182; A II. 166; IV.283; J III.387 (atth°). - 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D I.74; A II.166; IV.287. -4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D I.100. - 5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati. All combined at D I.82; III.111; A I.55; It 12, 73; Nd2 under kāya; & freq. elsewhere. - apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saṃsāra S II.92, 232; Pāli Text Society 135 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.158, 313; V.342; opp. to khīṇāpāya-duggati-vinipāta of an Arahant A IV.405; V.182 sq. - See also foll. pass.: M III.25 (anapāya); Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J IV.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati); PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta.-gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering DhA III.175; cp. °gamanīya id. Ps. I.94, °gamanīyatā J IV.499.-mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction (= vināsa-mukha DA I.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin" D I.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); III.181, 182 (cha bhogānaṃ a° -mukhāni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions); A II.166; IV.283, 287.-samudda the ocean of distress DhA III 432. -sahāya a spendthrift companion D III.185. Apāyika {Apayika} (adj.) [also as āpāyika (q. v.); fr. apāya] belonging to the apāyas or states of misery D I.103; III.6, 9, 12; It 42; PvA 60 (dukkha). Apāyin {Apayin} (adj.) [fr. apāya] going away J I.163 (aḍḍharattāvɔapāyin = aḍḍharatte apāyin C.). -an° not going away, i. e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dh 2; Th 1, 1041; Miln 72. Apāra {Apara} (nt.) [a + pāra] 1. the near bank of a river J III.230 (+ atiṇṇaṃ, C. paratīraṃ atiṇṇaṃ). - 2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraṃ = Nibbāna) Sn 1129, 1130; Nd2 62; Dh 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni DhA IV.141). See pāra & cp. avara. Apāraṇeyya {Aparaneyya} (adj.) [grd. of paraneti + a°] that which cannot be achieved, unattainable J VI.36 (= apāpetabba). Apāruta {Aparuta} [Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati] open (of a door) Vin I.7 = M I.169 (apārutā tesaṃ Amatassa dvārā); D I.136 (=vivaṭa-dvāra DA I.297); J I.264 (°dvāra). Apālamba {Apalamba} ["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling out" (C.) S I.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J VI.252 (v. l. upā°; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake). Apāhata {Apahata} [pp. of apa + hṛ] driven off or back, refuted, refused Sn 826 (°smiṃ = apasādite vade SnA 541). Api {Api} (indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. e)/pi on to, o)/pi (o)/piqen behind, o)pi/ssa back = close at one's heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. - The assimil. form before vowels is app° (= Sk. apy°). See further details under pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep. "towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover".1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the night (q. v.) - (b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind on to, apihita (= Gr. e)piqeto/s, epithet) put on to, (q. v.). - 2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": - (a) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhābhijātiko even an unfortunate-born Sn 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv IV.107 (=anekāni yojanāni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while Dh 106, 107; aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Sn 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) J V.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma; see further Pāli Text Society 136 Pāli-English Dictionary under b appɔeva nāma). -api-api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et-et Sk ca-ca, meaning both . . . and, and . . . as well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app'ekacce . . . app'ekacce (and) some . . . and others, i. e. some . . . others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D I.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208, etc. -app'ekadā "morever once" = sometimes Vin IV.178; S I.162; IV.111; J I.67; DhA III.303, etc. - (b) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also, moreover D I.96; Miln 25, 47. -api ca kho moreover, and yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. -api ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J I.253. -api ssu so much so Vin II.76. -app'eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin I.16 (surely); II.85 (id.); cp. pi D I.205 (sve pi upasaṃkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); M I.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J I.168 (surely) Vin II.262 (perhaps) J V.421 (id., piyavācaṃ labheyyāma). - (b) in interrog.-dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passeyya do you not see . . . Vin I.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen . . . S I.115; api kiðci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? J III.26; api me pitaraṃ passatha do you then not see my father? PvA 38. - Also combd. with other interr. part. e. g. api nu J. II.415. Apitika {Apitika} (adj.) [a + pitika] fatherless J V.251. Apithīyati {Apithiyati} [for apidhīyati; api + dhā] Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured J II.158. See also pithīyati. Apidahati {Apidahati} [api + dhā, cp. Gr. e)piti(qhmi] to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, J V.60 (inf. apidhetuṃ). pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q. v.). Apidhāna {Apidhana} (nt.) [Vedic apidhāna in same meaning] cover, lid Vin I.203, 204; II.122. See apidahati. Apiratte {Apiratte} [read api ratte, see api 1 a] later in the night J VI.560. Apilāpana {Apilapana} (nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37. Apilāpanatā {Apilapanata} (f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr. pilavati, plu), but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16) "opposite of superficiality" (lit "not floating"); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16. Apilāpeti {Apilapeti} [api + lap] "to talk close by", i. e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Miln 37 (sāpatheyyaṃ). Apiḷandha {Apilandha} (adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) "adorned with", or (with v. l. SS) as apiḷandhana; VvA 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation. Pāli Text Society 137 Pāli-English Dictionary Apiḷandhana {Apilandhana} (nt.) [fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form piḷandhana, q. v.] that which is tied on, i.e. band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at VvA 279 by; a-kāro nipātamattaṃ, pilandhanaṃ = ābhāraṇaṃ); J VI.472 (c. pilandhituṃ pi ayuttaṃ?). Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati {Apilahati} {Apilandhati} [Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh see avanandhati] to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) J V.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.) - Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha. Apiha {Apiha} (adj.) [apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha] "unhankering" (Mrs Rh. D.) S I 181 (+ akankha; v. l. BB asita). Apihālu {Apihalu} (adj.) [a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a-spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)] not hankering, free from craving, not greedy S I.187 = Th 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Sn 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at SnA 549 as apihana-sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaṃ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita); cp. also Nd2 227). Apihita {Apihita} [pp. of apidahati] covered J IV.4. Apuccaṇḍatā {Apuccandata} (f.) [a + pūti + aṇḍa + tā] "not being a rotten egg," i. e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness M I.357. Apuccha {Apuccha} (adj.) [a + pucchā] "not a question", i. e. not to be asked Miln 316. Apekkha {Apekkha} (adj.) [= apekkhā] waiting for, looking for S I.122 (otāra°). Apekkhati {Apekkhati} 1. [Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ] to desire, long for, look for, expect Sn 435 (kāme nɔāpekkhate cittaṃ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); J IV.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Sn 59; J V.359. - 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider, refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to VvA 13. - pp. apekkhita (q. v.). Apekkhavant {Apekkhavant} (adj.) [fr. apekkhā] full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin IV.214; S III.16; Th 1, 558; J V.453 (=sataṇha); Sn A 76. Apekkhā & Apekhā {Apekkha} {Apekha} (f.) [Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used promiscuously, a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha] attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire, longing for (c. loc.) S I.77; III.132; V.409 (mātāpitusu); Vin IV.214; Sn 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha SnA 76); J I.9, 141; Th 1, 558; Dh 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā DhA IV.56); Dhs 1059, 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa-vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. (-°or in combn. with sa° and an°), viz. Vin III.90 (visuddha°); S I.122 (otara°); sa° A III.258, 433; IV.60 sq.; an° without consideration, regardless, indifferent S V.164; A III.252, 347, 434; Sn 200 (anapekkhā honti ðātayo); J I.9. Cp. anapekkhin & apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā. Pāli Text Society 138 Pāli-English Dictionary Apekkhita {Apekkhita} [pp. of apekkhati] taken care of, looked after, considered J VI.142, 149 (= olokita C.). Apekkhin {Apekkhin} (adj.) [Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ] considering, regarding, expecting, looking for; usually neg. an° indifferent (against) = loc.) S I.16, 77; II.281; III.19, 87; Sn 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dh 346. Cp. apekkhavant. Apeta {Apeta} (adj.) [pp. of apeti] gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or °-) Dh 9 (damasaccena); PvA 35 (dukkhato); usually °- in sense of "without, -less", e. g. apetakaddama free from mud, stainless Dh 95; °vattha without dress J V.16; °viððāṇa without feeling, senseless Dh 41; Th 2, 468; °viððāṇattaṃ senselessness, lack of feeling PvA 63. Apetatta {Apetatta} (nt.) [abstr. to apeta] absence (of) PvA 92. Apeti {Apeti} [apa + i, cp. Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. af-iddja] to go away, to disappear D I.180 (upeti pi apeti pi); J I.292; Sn 1143 (= nɔ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). - pp. apeta (q. v.). Apetteyyatā (f.) [a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly] in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and mother D III.70 (cp. Dh 332 & DhA IV.34). {Apetteyyata} Apeyya {Apeyya} (adj.) [a + peyya, grd. of pā] not to be drunk, not drinkable J VI.205 (sāgara). Apesiya {Apesiya} (nt.) [? of uncertain origin] a means of barring a door Vin II.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇḍaka-sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataṃ dvāra-tthakanakaṃ). Apesiyamāna {Apesiyamana} (adj.) [ppr. fr. a + peseti (q. v.)] not being in service Vin II.177. in appɔ ekacce etc. see api. Appa {Appa} (adj.) [Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. a)lapa/zw (lapa/zw) to empty (to make little), a)lapadno/s weak; Lith. alpnas weak, alpstù to faint] small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of "very little = (next to) nothing" (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at VvA 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) D I.61 (opp. mahant, DA I.170 = parittaka); Sn 713, 775, 805, 896 (=appaka, omaka, thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306); Dh 174; J I.262; Pug 39. - nt. appaṃ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles A II.26 = It 102; A II.138; Dh 20 (= thokaṃ eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi DhA I.158), 224 (°smiṃ yācito asked for little), 259.aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) J I.9; Pug 33; DhA IV.184. -assāda [BSk. alpāsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dh 186; alpa + ā + svād] of little taste or enjoyment, affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā) Vin II.25 = M I.130 = A III.97 = Nd2 71; Sn 61; Dh 186 (= supinasadisatāya paritta-sukha DhA III 240); Th 2, 358 (= ThA 244); J II.313; Vism 124. -ātanka little (or no) illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā] D I.204 (+appābādha); III.166; A III.65, 103; Miln 14. -ābādha same as appātanka (q. v.) D I.204; III.166, 237; M II.125; A I.25; II.88; III.30, 65 sq., 103, 153; Pv IV.144; °ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health] A I.38. -āyuka short lived D I.18; PvA 103, also as °āyukin Vv 416. -āhāra taking little or no food, fasting M II.5; Sn 165 (= ekāsanabhojitāya ca parimita-bhojitāya ca SnA 207), also as °āhāratā M I.245; II.5. -odaka having little or no water, dry Sn 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50); Vv 843 (+ Pāli Text Society 139 Pāli-English Dictionary appabhakkha; expld. at VvA 334 as "appa-saddo hɔ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya"); J I.70; DhA IV.12. -kasira in instr. °kasirena with little or no difficulty D I.251; S V.51; Th 1, 16. -kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Sn 144 (= appaṃ kiccaṃ assā ti KhA 241). -gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Miln 252 (opp. sugandha). -ṭṭha "standing in little"; i. e. connected with little trouble D I.143; A I.169. -thāmaka having little or no strength, weak S IV.206. -dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Sn 1134 (see Nd2 69; expld. by paritta-pañña SnA 605). -nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. VvA 334, as quoted above under °odaka) A V.15 (+ appasadda); Sn 338; Nd1 377; Miln 371. pañña, of little wisdom J II.166; III.223, 263. -puñña of little merit M II.5. -puððatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv IV.107. -phalatā bringing little fruit PvA 139. -bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. -bhoga having little wealth, i. e. poor, indigent Sn 114 (= sannicitānaṃ ca bhogānaṃ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato SnA 173). -maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. -matta little, slight, mean, (usually as °ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2) A III.275; J I.242; also meaning "contented with little" (of the bhikkhu) It 103 = A II.27; f. °ā trifle, smallness, însignificance D I.91; DA I.55. -mattaka small, insignificant, trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. °matta) Vin 1, 213; II.177 (°vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. A III.275 & Vin IV.38, 155); D I.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaṃ DA I.55); J I.167; III.12 (= aṇu); PvA 262. -middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412.-rajakkha having little or no obtuseness D II.37; M I.169; Sdhp 519. -ssaka having little of one's own, possessing little A I.261; II.203. -sattha having few or no companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. -sadda free from noise, quiet M II.2, 23, 30; A V.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377); Pug 35; Miln 371. -siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous J IV.4 (=mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); VI.34 (samuddo a. bahu-antarāyiko). -ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D I.93 (opp. bahussuta); III.252, 282; S IV.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs 1327. -harita having little or no grass S I.169; Sn p. 15 (= paritta-harita-tiṇa SnA 154). Appaka {Appaka} (adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. °ṃ adv. a little D II.4; A V.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu); Dh 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū DhA II. 160); Pv I.102 (= paritta PvA 48); II.939; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appikā J I.228. - instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA I.256. -anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many S IV.46; Dh 144; Pv I.117 (= bahū PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read anappake pi for T. °appakeci; so also KhA 208). Appakāra {Appakara} (adj.) [a + pakāra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J V.69 (= sarīrappakāra-rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika. Appakiṇṇa {Appakinna} [appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa] little or not crowded, not overheaped A V.15 (C. anākiṇṇa). Appagabbha {Appagabbha} (adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S II.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228 & KhA 232); Dh 245. Appaccaya {Appaccaya} [a + paccaya] 1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness D I.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanassɔ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ DA I.52); III.159; M I.442; A I.79, 124, 187; II.203; III.181 sq.; IV.168, 193; J II.277; Sn p. 92 (kapa + dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaṃ VvA 343); SnA 423 (= appatītaṃ domanassaṃ). -2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, 1437. Appaṭi° {Appati°} [a + paṭi°] see in general under paṭi°. Pāli Text Society 140 Pāli-English Dictionary Appaṭikārika {Appatikarika} (adj.) [a + paṭikārika] "not providing against", i. e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive J V.418 (spelling here & in C. appati°). Appaṭikopeti {Appatikopeti} [a + paṭikopeti] not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) J V.173 (uposathaṃ). Appaṭikkhippa {Appatikkhippa} (adj.) [a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhipati] not to be refused J II.370. Appaṭigandhika {Appatigandhika} & °iya (adj.) [a + paṭi + gandha + ika] not smelling disagreeable, i. e. with beautiful smell, scented, odorous J V.405 (°ika, but C. °iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); VI.518; Pv II.120; III.226. Appaṭigha {Appatigha} (adj.) [a + paṭigha] (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Sn 42 (see expld. at Nd2 239; SnA 88 expls. "katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaððatī ti a."). - (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa: not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) D III.217; Dhs 660, 756, 1090, 1443. Appaṭicchavi {Appaticchavi} (adj.) at Pv II.113 is faulty reading for sampatitacchavi (v. l.). Appaṭibhāga (adj) [a + paṭibhāga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA I.423 (= anuttara). {Appatibhaga} Appaṭibhāṇa {Appatibhana} (adj.) [a + paṭibhāṇa] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin III.162; A III.57; °ṃ karoti to intimidate, bewilder J V.238, 369. Appaṭima {Appatima} (adj.) [a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā] matchless, incomparable, invaluable Th 1, 614; Miln 239. Appaṭivattiya {Appativattiya} (adj.) [a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt] (a) not to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be taken in meaning of b.). - (b) irresistable J II.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v. l. at J II.245; otherwise as t. Appaṭivāṇa {Appativana} (nt.) [a + paṭivāṇa, for °vrāṇa, the guṇa-form of vṛ, cp. Sk. prativāraṇa] non-obstruction, not hindering, not opposing or contradicting A I.50; III.41; V.93 sq.; adj. J I.326. Appaṭivāṇitā {Appativanita} (f.) [abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa] not being hindered, non-obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiṃ" (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl. 358) A I.50, 95 = D III.214 = Dhs 1367. Appaṭivāṇī (f.) [almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase] nonhindrance, non-restriction, free action, impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī S II.132; V.440; A II.93, 195; III.307 sq.; IV.320; Nd2 under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654]. {Appativani} Pāli Text Society 141 Pāli-English Dictionary Appaṭivāṇīya {Appativaniya} (adj.) [grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; M Vastu III.343] not to be obstructed, irresistible S I.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. "that source from whence there is no turning back"), Th 2, 55. Appaṭividdha {Appatividdha} (adj.) [a + paṭi + viddha] "not shot through" i. e. unhurt J VI.446. Appaṭivibhatta {Appativibhatta} (°bhogin) (adj.) [a + paṭi + vibhatta] (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of another negative: see Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Bdhgh's expln.) A III289; Miln 373; cp. Miln trsl. II.292. Appaṭivekkhiya {Appativekkhiya} [ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati] not observing or noticing J IV.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.). Appaṭisankhā {Appatisankha} (f.) [a + paṭisankhā] want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346. Appaṭisandhika {Appatisandhika} (and °iya) (adj.) [a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)] 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable, irreparable (°iya) Pv I.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti PvA 66) = J III.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuṃ na sakkā C.). - 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i. e. to rebirth J V.100 (°bhāva). Appaṭisama {Appatisama} (adj.) [a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama M Vastu I.104] not having it's equal, incomparable J I.94 (Baddha-sirī). Appaṭissavatā {Appatissavata} (f.) [a + paṭissavatā] want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325. Appaṇihita {Appanihita} (adj.) [a + paṇihita] aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animittaṃ Vin III.92, 93 = IV.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paṇihita. Appatiṭṭha {Appatittha} (adj.) [a + patiṭṭha] 1. not standing still S I.1. - 2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Sn 173. Appatissa & Appaṭissa {Appatissa} (adj.) [a + paṭi + śru] not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava A II.20; III.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 439. Appatissa-vāsa an unruly state, anarchy J II.352. See also paṭissā. Appatīta {Appatita} (adj.) [a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta] dissatisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) J V.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v. l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp. C. on p. 156); DA I.52; SnA 423. Appaduṭṭha {Appaduttha} (adj.) [a + paduṭṭha] not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Sn 662 (= padosābhāvena a. SnA 478); Dh 137 (= niraparādha DhA III.70). Appadhaṃsa {Appadhamsa} (adj.) [= appadhaṃsiya, Sk. apradhvaṃsya] not to be destroyed J IV.344 (v. l. duppadhaṃsa). Pāli Text Society 142 Pāli-English Dictionary Appadhaṃsika {Appadhamsika} (adj.) [grd. of a + padhaṃseti] not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible D III.175 (°ika, v. l. °iya); J III.159 (°iya); VvA 208 (°iya); PvA 117 (°iya). Cp. appadhaṃsa. Appadhaṃsita {Appadhamsita} (adj.) [pp. of a + padhaṃseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin IV.229. Appanā {Appana} (f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ, to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as psychol. t. t.) J II.61 (°patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, 21, 298; Vism 144 (°samādhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg. as "ekaggaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇe appeti"), 214 (°jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. XXVIII, 10, 53, 82, 347. Appabhoti & Appahoti {Appabhoti} {Appahoti} see pahoti. Appamaññati {Appamannati} [appa + maññati] to think little of, to underrate, despise Dh 121 (= avajānāti DhA III.16; v. l. avapamaððati). Appamaññā {Appamanna} (f.) [a + pamaððā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya] boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz. mettā karuṃā muditā upekkhā i. e. love, pity, sympathy, desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at D III.223 (q. v. for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Ps I.84; Vbh 272 sq.; DhsA 195. By itself at Sn 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. SnA 417). See for further expln. Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā. Appamatta1 {Appamatta} (adj.) [appa + matta] see appa. Appamatta2 {Appamatta} (adj.) [a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati] not negligent, i. e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert, zealous M I.391-92; S I.4; Sn 223 (cp. KhA 169), 507, 779 (cp. Nd1 59); Dh 22 (cp. DhA I.229); Th 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239). Appamāda [a + pamāda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D I.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DA I.104); III.30, 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; M I.477 (°phala); S I.25, 86, 158, 214; II.29, 132; IV.78 (°vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; V.30 sq. (°sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A I.16, 50. (°adhigata); III.330, 364, 449; IV.28 (°gāravatā) 120 (°ṃ garu-karoti); V.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334 (=sati-avippavāsa-sankhāta a. SnA 339); It 16 (°ṃ pasaṃsanti puððakiriyāsu paṇḍitā), 74 (°vihārin); Dh 57 (°vihārin, cp. DhA I.434); 327 (°rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata DhA IV.26); Dāvs II. 35; KhA 142. Appamāṇa {Appamada} (freq. spelled appamāna) (adj.) [a + pamāṇa] 1. "without measure", immeasurable, endless, boundless, unlimited, unrestricted all-permeating S IV.186 (°cetaso); A II.73; V.63; Sn 507 (mettaṃ cittaṃ bhāvayaṃ appāmāṇaṃ = anavasesa-pharaṇena SnA 417; cp. appamaððā); It 21 (mettā), 78; J II.61; Ps II.126 sq.; Vbh 16, 24, 49, 62, 326 sq.; Dhs 182, 1021, 1024, 1405; DhsA 45, 196 (°gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60. - 2. "without difference", irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) J I.165; II.323. {Appamana} Pāli Text Society 143 Pāli-English Dictionary Appameyya {Appameyya} (adj.) [a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā] immeasurable, infinite, boundless M I.386; S V.400; A I.266; Th 1, 1089 (an°); Pug 35; Miln 331; Sdhp 338. Appavattā {Appavatta} (f.) [a + pavattā] the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the noncontinuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln 326. Appasāda {Appasada} see pasāda. Appassāda {Appassada} see appa. Appahīna {Appahina} (adj.) [a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati] not given up, not renounced M I.386; It 56, 57; Nd2 70 D1; Pug 12, 18. Appāṇaka {Appanaka} (adj.) [a + pāṇa + ka] breathless, i. e. (1) holding one's breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) M I.243; J I.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. V.314, 324; M Vastu II.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?]. (2) not holding anything breathing, i. e. inanimate, lifeless, not containing life Sn p. 15 (of water). Appikā {Appika} (f.) of appaka. Appiccha {Appiccha} (adj.) [appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā] desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented, unpretentious S I.63, 65; A III.432; IV.2, 218 sq., 229; V.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Sn 628, 707; Dh 404; Pv IV.73; Pug 70. Appicchatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin III.21; D III.115; M I.13; S II 202, 208 sq.; A I.12, 16 sq.; III.219 sq., 448; IV.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Miln 242; SnA 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya-dhutangapariyatti-adhigama-vasena); PvA 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga-dhammā at Vism 81. {Appicchata} Appita {Appita} (adj.) [pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e. g. prītyarpitaṃ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169] 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Miln 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta). - 2. brought to, put to, fixed on J VI.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at J V.36 & Vism 303. Appiya & Appiyatā {Appiya} {Appiyata} see piya see piya etc. Appekadā {Appekada} (adv.) see api 2 ax. Appeti {Appeti} [Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ, ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. a)rari/skw to put together, a(/rma chariot, a)/rqron limb, a)reth/ virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava] 1. (*er) to move forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin II.238; Miln 70. - 2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin II.136, 137; J III.34 (nimba-sūlasmiṃ to impale, C. āvuṇāti); VI.17 (T. sūlasmiṃ acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C. āvuṇati); Miln 62 (dāruṃ sandhismiṃ); VvA 110 (saððāṇaṃ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages. Pāli Text Society 144 Pāli-English Dictionary Appesakkha {Appesakkha} (adj.) [acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā "being called lord of little"; Trenckner on Miln 65 (see p. 422) says: "appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expld. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it". Thus the etym. would be "having little association or friendship" and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk. forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e. g. at Av. Ś II. 153; Divy 243] of little power, weak, impotent S II.229; Miln 65; Sdhp 89. Appoti {Appoti} [the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp] to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo). Appodaka {Appodaka} see appa. Appossukka {Appossukka} (adj.) [appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e. g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr. ussuka] unconcerned, living at ease, careless, "not bothering", keeping still, inactive Vin II.188; M III.175, 176; S I 202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta sankasāya "living at ease, given to silence, resigned" Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); II. 177 (id.); IV.178 (id.); Th 2, 457 (= nirussukka ThA 282); Sn 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72); Dh 330 (= nirālaya DhA IV.31); J I.197; IV.71; Miln 371 (a. tiṭṭhati to keep still); DA I.264. Appossukkatā {Appossukkata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin I.5; D II.36; Miln 232; DhA II.15. Apphuta & Apphuṭa {Apphuta} [Sk. *ā-sphṛta for a-sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D I.74 = M I.276 (pītisukhena). Apphoṭā {Apphota} (f.) [fr. appoṭeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J VI.336. Apphoṭita {Apphotita} [pp. of apphoṭeti] having snapped one's fingers or clapped one's hands J II.311 (°kāle). Apphoṭeti [ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ] to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Miln 13, 20. pp. apphoṭita. {Apphoteti} Aphusa {Aphusa} [Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch] not to be touched Miln 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks "aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me"). Aphegguka {Aphegguka} (adj.) [a + pheggu + ka] not weak, i. e strong J III.318. Abaddha {Abaddha} [a + baddha] not tied, unbound, unfettered Sn 39 (v. l. and Nd2 abandha; expld- by rajju-bandhanɔ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha SnA 83). Abandha {Abandha} (n.-adj.) [a + bandha] not tied to, not a follower or victim of It 56 (mārassa; v. l. abaddha). Pāli Text Society 145 Pāli-English Dictionary Abandhana {Abandhana} (adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433. Ababa {Ababa} [of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A V.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av. Ś I.4, 10 & see for further expln. of term SnA 476 sq. Abala {Abala} (adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (°assa a weak horse = dubbalassa DhA I.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse). Abbaje {Abbaje} T. reading at A II.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp. pabbajati), but is preferably with v. l. SS to be read aṇḍaje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line). Abbaṇa {Abbana} (adj.) [a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa] without wounds Dh 124. Abbata {Abbata} (n.-adj.) [a + vata, Sk. avrata] (a) (nt.) that which is not "vata" i. e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Sn 839 (asīlata +); Nd1 188 (v. l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a-vatta). SnA 545 (= dhutangavataṃ vinā. - (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dh 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita DhA III.391; vv. ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B. abbhuta, C. abbuta). Abbaya {Abbaya} in uday° at Miln 393 stands for avyaya. Abbahati & Abbuhati {Abbahati} {Abbuhati} [the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp. bṛḍha (see abbūḷha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Th 1, 404; J II.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by). - aor. abbahi J V.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) J III.390 (v. l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv I.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but PvA 41 expls. nīhari) = DhA I.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaṃ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v. l. BB abbuḷhaṃ, SS avyahi; VvA 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A III.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. - ger. abbuyha Sn 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitvā; SnA 567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitvā); S I.121 (taṇhaṃ); III.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). - pp. abbuḷha (q. v.). - Caus. abbāheti [Sk. ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out J IV.364 (satthaṃ abbāhayanti; v. l. abbhā°); DhA II.249 (asiṃ). ger. abbāhitvā (= °hetvā) Vin II 201 (bhisa-muḷālaṃ) with v. l. BB aggahetvā, SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin I.214 (vv. ll. aggahitvā & abbāhitvā). pp. abbūḷhita (q. v.). Abbāhana {Abbahana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA III.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbūhana; Fausböll aḍahana; glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also abbuḷhana and abbhāhana. Abbuda {Abbuda} (nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning "swelling", the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda] 1. the foetus in the 1st & 2nd months after conception, the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz. kalala, abbuda, pesi, ghana, pasākha Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. - 2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin III.294, 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a). - 3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the "vast-period" Pāli Text Society 146 Pāli-English Dictionary hell, cp. nirabbuda). S I.149 = A II.3 (chattiṃsati paðca ca abbudāni); S I.152 = A V.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. SnA 476: abbudo nāma koci pacceka-nirayo nɔ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda-gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); J III.360 (sataṃ ninnahuta-sahassānaṃ ekaṃ abbudaṃ). - 4. a term used for "hell" in the riddle S I.43 (kiṃsu lokasmiṃ abhudaṃ "who are they who make a hell on earth" Mrs. Rh. D. The answer is "thieves"; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa-karaṇaṃ. Abbujhati & Abbuhati {Abbujhati} {Abbuhati} see abbahati. Abbuḷhana {Abbulhana} (nt.) [fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)] the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā-sallassa abbuḷhanaṃ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, v. l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, v. l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana. Abbūḷha {Abbulha} (adj.) [Sk. ābṛḍha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati] drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed, destroyed. Most freq. in combn. °salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out D II.283 (v. l. SS asammūḷha); Sn 593, 779 (= abbūḷhita-salla Nd1 59; rāgādi-sallānaṃ abbūḷhattā a. SnA 518); J III.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv I.87 = DhA I.30. - In other connection: M I.139 = A III.84 (°esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Th 1, 321; KhA 153 (°soka). Abbūḷhatta {Abbulhatta} (nt.) [abstr. of abbūḷha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518. at J III.541) [pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 abbūḷhitasallo + uddhaṭa° etc. for abbūḷha); J III.541 (uncertain reading; v. l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaṃ ṭhapitaṃ appaggharakaṃ kataṃ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?). Abbeti {Abbeti} [Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19] at J III.34 & VI.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti. Abbokiṇṇa [= abbhokiṇṇa, abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa] 1.filled M I.387 (paripuṇṇa +); DhA IV.182 (paðca jātisatāni a.). - 2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted, constant, as °ṃ adv. in combn. with satataṃ samitaṃ A IV.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (v. l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vbh 320. - 3. doubtful spelling at Vin III.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. III.1, 3). {Abbokinna} Abbocchinna {Abbocchinna} see abbokiṇṇa see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna. Abbohārika {Abboharika} (adj.) [a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati] not of legal or conventional status, i. e. - (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin III.91, 112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4). - (b) uncommon, extraordinary J III.309 (v. l. BB abbho°); V.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective). Abbha {Abbha} bhro, cp. Gr. a)fro\s scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. o)/mbros rain, Oir ambu water]. A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A II.53 = Vin II.295 = Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon- & sunshine, viz. abbhaṃ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134. S I.101 (°sama pabbata a mountain like a Pāli Text Society 147 Pāli-English Dictionary thunder-cloud); J VI.581 (abbhaṃ rajo acchādesi); Pv IV.39 (nīl° = nīla-megha PvA 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & DhsA 317 (used in sense of adj. "dull"; DhsA expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.-kūṭa the point or summit of a storm-cloud Th 1, 1064; J VI.249, 250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka-sikhara VvA 12). -ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud It 64; Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). -paṭala a mass of clouds DhsA 239. -mutta free from clouds Sn 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dh 382). -saṃvilāpa thundering S IV.289. Abbhakkhāti {Abbhakkhati} [abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti] to speak against to accuse, slander D I.161 = A I.161 (an-abbhakkhātu-kāma); IV.182 (id.); J IV.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati. Abbhakkhāna {Abbhakkhana} (nt.) [fr. abbhakkhāti] accusation, slander, calumny D III.248, 250; M I.130; III.207; A III.290 sq.; Dh 139 (cp. DhA III.70). Abbhacchādita {Abbhacchadita} [pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti] covered (with) Th 1, 1068. Abbhañjati {Abbhanjati} [abhi + añj] to anoint; to oil, to lubricate M I.343 (sappi-telena); S IV.177; Pug 56; DhA III.311 = VvA 68 (sata-pāka-telena). Caus. abbhaðjeti same J I.438 (telena °etvā); V.376 (sata-pāka-telena °ayiṃsu); Caus. II. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint J III.372. Abbhañjana {Abbhanjana} (nt.) [fr. abbhañjati] anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin I.205; III.79; Miln 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; VvA 295. Abbhatika {Abbhatika} (adj.) [ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ] brought (to), procured, got, J VI.291. Abbhatikkanta {Abbhatikkanta} [pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta] one who has thoroughly, left behind J V.376. Abbhatīta {Abbhatita} [pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta] emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by S II.183 (+ atikkanta); nt. °ṃ what is gone or over, the past J III.169. - 2. passed away, dead M I.465; S IV.398; Th 1, 242, 1035. - 3. transgressed, overstepped, neglected J III.541 (saṃyama). Abbhattha {Abbhattha} (nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaṃ, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi I.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaṃ to the seat R. V. IX. 21. 3] = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaṃ gacchati "to go towards home", i. e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M I.115, 119; III.25; A IV.32; Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhsw 1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576. Abbhatthatā {Abbhatthata} (f.) [abstr. fr. abbhatta] "going towards setting", disappearance, death J V.469. Abbhanumodati {Abbhanumodati} [abhi + anu + modati] to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin I.196; D I.143, 190; S IV.224; Miln 29, 210; DhA IV.102 (v. l. °ānu°). Abbhanumodana {Abbhanumodana} (nt.) (& °ā f.) [fr. abbhanumodati] being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DA I.227; VvA 52 (°ānu°); Sdhp 218. 148 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abbhantara {Abbhantara} (adj.) [abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with-in, cp. abhi I.1 a] = antara, i. e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. °ṃ the inner part, interior, interval (also as °-) Vin I.111 (satt° with interval of seven); A IV.16 (opp. bāhira); Dh 394 (id.); Th 1, 757 (°āpassaya lying inside); J III.395 (°amba the inside of the Mango); Miln 30 (°e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir-abbhantara dhana); DhA II.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v. l. abbhantare).- Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime, in between DhA II.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or -°) J I.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaṃ); DhA II.64 (v. l. antare), 92 (sattavass°); PvA 48 (= anto). Abbhantarika (adj.-n.) [fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning] intimate friend, confidant, "chum" J I.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 ("insider", opp. bāhiraka). Abbhantarima {Abbhantarika} (adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bāhirima) Vin III.149; J V.38. {Abbhantarima} Abbhākuṭika {Abbhakutika} (adj.) [a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown] not frowning, genial Vin III.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); D I.116, cp. DA I.287; DhA IV.8 (as v. l.; T. has abbhokuṭika). Abbhāgata {Abbhagata} [abhi + ā + gata] having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi-āgata, āgantuka VvA 24). Abbhāgamana {Abbhagamana} (nt.) [abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyāgama] coming arrival, approach Vin IV.221. Abbhāghāta {Abbhaghata} [abhi + āghāta] slaughtering-place Vin III.151 (+ āghāta). Abbhācikkhati [Intens. of abbhākkhāti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D I.161; III.248, 250; M I.130, 368, 482; III.207; A I.161. {Abbhacikkhati} Abbhāna {Abbhana} (nt.) [abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin I.49 (°āraha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; II.33, 40, 162; A I.99. - Cp. abbheti. Abbhāmatta {Abbhamatta} (adj.) [abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous, monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta & abbhuṃ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius] monstrous, dreadful, enormous, "of the size of a large cloud" (thus C. on S I.205 & J III.309) S I.205 = Th 1, 652 (v. l. abbha° & abbhāmutta) = J III.309 (v. l. °mutta). Abbhāhata {Abbhahata} [abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han] struck, attacked, afflicted S I.40 (maccunā); Th 1, 448; Sn 581; J VI.26, 440; Vism 31, 232; DA I.140, 147; DhA IV.25. Abbhāhana {Abbhahana} (nt.) [either = abbāhana or āvāhana] in udaka° the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin II.318 (Bdhgh. on Cullavagga V.16, 2, corresponding to udaka-vāhana on p. 122). 149 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abbhita {Abbhita} [pp. of abbheti] 1. come back, rehabilitated, reinstated Vin III.186 = IV.242 (an°). - 2. uncertain reading at Pv I.123 in sense of "called" (an° uncalled), where id. p. at J III.165 reads anavhāta & at Th 2, 129 ayācita. Abbhu {Abbhu} [a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuṃ, see also abbhāmatta] unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense J V.295 (= abhūti avaḍḍhi C.). Abbhuṃ {Abbhum} (interj.) [Vedic abhvaṃ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris J P T S. 1889, 201: abbhuṃ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta] alas! terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin II. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as "utrāsa-vacanam-etaṃ"); M I.448. See also abbhu & abbhuta. Abbhukkiraṇa {Abbhukkirana} (nt.) [abhi + ud + kṛ] drawing out, pulling, in daṇḍa-sattha° drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp. abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet). Abbhukkirati {Abbhukkirati} [abhi + ud + kirati] to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) D II.172 (cakkaratanaṃ; neither with Morris J P T S. 1886, 131 "give up", nor with trsl. of J II.311 "roll along"); J V.390; PvA 75. Cp. abbhokkirati. Abbhuggacchati {Abbhuggacchati} [abhi + ud + gacchati] to go forth, go out, rise into D I.112, 127; A III.252 (kitti-saddo a.); Pug 36. ger. °gantvā J I 88 (ākāsaṃ), 202; DhA IV.198. aor. °gañchi M I.126 (kittisaddo); J I.93. - pp. abbhuggata. Abbhuggata {Abbhuggata} [pp. of abbhuggacchati] gone forth, gone out, risen D I.88 (kitti-saddo a., cp. DhA I.146: sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Sn p. 103 (kittisaddo). Abbhuggamana {Abbhuggamana} (nt.-adj.) [fr. abbhuggacchati] going out over, rising over (c. acc.) PvA 65 (candaṃ nabhaṃ abbhuggamanaṃ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaṃ). Abbhujjalana {Abbhujjalana} (nt.) [abhi + ud + jalana, from jval] breathing out fire, i. e. carrying fire in one's month (by means of a charm) D I.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi-jala-nīharaṇaṃ DA I.97). Abbhuṭṭhāti {Abbhutthati} Abbhuṇṇata {Abbhunnata} (°ṭṭhahati) [abhi + ud + sthā] to get up to, proceed to, D I.105 (cankamaṃ). [pp. of abbhunnamati] standing up, held up, erect J V.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect. stiffness), 197 (°unnata; v. l. abbhantara, is reading correct?). Abbhuṇha {Abbhunha} (adj.) [ahhi + uṇha] (a) very hot DhA II.87 (v. l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA II.67. Abbhuta1 {Abbhuta} (adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj.-formation from abbhuṃ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. Pāli Text Society 150 Pāli-English Dictionary abbhu, abbhuṃ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i. e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bhū ("unreal?") is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhayɔ āvahassɔ adhivacanaṃ DA I.43 & VvA 329) & expld. as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhūtaṃ ThA 233; abhūta-pubbatāya abbhutaṃ VvA 191, 329; abhūta-pubbaṃ DA I.43. - 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (kiṃ °ṃ, combd. with lomahaṃsana); J IV.355 (id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaṃ vata vācaṃ bhāsasi = acchariyaṃ ThA 233); Vv 449 (°dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. 2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S IV.371, also in °dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaṃ and a part. of exclamation, viz, acchariyaṃ bho abbhutaṃ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying D I.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D I.60; acch. bhante abbh. A II.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J I.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316. - Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary signs or things M III.118, 125; A II.130; IV.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya-abbhutacitta-jāta dumbfounded & surprised J I.88; DhA IV.52; PvA 6, 50.-dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin III.8; M I.133; A II.103; III.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc. Abbhuta2 {Abbhuta} (nt.) [= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the "unknown"] a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaṃ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand, i. e. kahāpaṇa's or pieces of money) Vin III.138; IV.5; J I.191; V.427; VI.192; PvA 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaṃ hotu J VI.193. Abbhudāharati {Abbhudaharati} [abhi + ud + ā + harati] to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) M II.132. Abbhudīreti {Abbhudireti} [abhi + ud + īreti] to raise the voice, to utter Th 2, 402; DA I.61; Sdhp 514. Abbhudeti {Abbhudeti} [abhi + ud + eti] to go out over, to rise A II.50, 51 (opp. atthaṃ eti, of the sun). - ppr. abbhuddayaṃ Vv 6417 (= abhi-uggacchanto VvA 280; abbhusayaṃ ti pi pāṭho). Abbhuddhunāti {Abbhuddhunati} [abhi + ud + dhunāti] to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaṃ uddhunāti VvA 278). Abbhunnadita {Abbhunnadita} [pp. of abhi + ud + nadati] resounding, resonant Th 1, 1065). Abbhunnamati {Abbhunnamati} [abhi, + ud + namati] to, spring up, burst forth D II.164. - pp. abbhuṇṇata (& °unnata), q. v. -Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up, erect D I.120 (kāyaṃ one's body); A II.245 (id.); D I.126 (patodalaṭṭhiṃ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down). Abbhuyyāta {Abbhuyyata} [pp. of abbhuyyāti] marched against, attacked Vin I.342; M II.124. 151 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abbhuyyāti {Abbhuyyati} [abhi + up + yāti of yā] to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack S I.82 (aor °uyyāsi). - pp. abbhuyyāta (q. v.). Abbhusūyaka {Abbhusuyaka} (adj.) [abhi + usūyā + ka] zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in (-°) Pgdp 101. Abbhussakati {Abbhussakati} & °usukkati [abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sakkati] to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in phrase ādicco nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno M I.317 = S III.156 = It 20. - See also S I.65; V.44; A I.242 (same simile); V.22 (id.). Abbhussahanatā {Abbhussahanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha] instigation, incitement Vin II.88. Abbhusseti {Abbhusseti} [abhi + ud + seti of śī] to rise; v. l. at Vv 6417 according to VvA 280: abbhuddayaṃ (see abbhudeti) abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho. Abbheti {Abbheti} [abhi + ā + i] to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin II.7 (abbhento), 33 (abbheyya); III.112 (abbheti), 186 = IV.242 (abbhetabba) - pp. abbhita (q. v.). See also abbhāna. Abbhokāsa {Abbhokasa} [abhi + avakāsa] the open air, an open & unsheltered space D I.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DA I.180), 71 (=acchanna DA I.210), 89; M III.132; A II.210; III.92; IV.437, V.65; Sn p. 139 (°e nissinna sitting in the open) J I.29, 215; Pug 57. Abbhokāsika {Abbhokasika} (adj.) [fr. abbhokāsa] belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics. D I.167; M I.282; A III.220; Vin V.131, 193; J IV.8 (+ nesajjika); Pug 69; Miln 20, 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaṃgas). See also Nd1 188; Nd2 587.-anga the practice or system of the "campers-out" Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi-kankhā, cp. Nd1 188). Abbhokiṇṇa {Abbhokinna} [pp. of abbhokirati] see abbokiṇṇa. Abbhokirati {Abbhokirati} [abhi + ava + kirati] to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhiokirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v. l. abbhuk°). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa - pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa. Abbhokuṭika {Abbhokutika} spelling at DhA IV.8 for abbhākuṭika. Abbhokkiraṇa {Abbhokkirana} (nt.) [fr. abbhokirati] in naṭānaṃ a. "turnings of dancers" DA I.84 in explQ of sobha-nagarakaṃ of D I.6. Abbhocchinna {Abbhocchinna} (besides abbocch°, q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2) [a + vi + ava + chinna] not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous J I.470 (v. l. abbo°); VI.254, 373; Cp. I.63; Miln 72; Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb). Abbhohārika {Abbhoharika} see abbo°. Pāli Text Society 152 Pāli-English Dictionary Aby° {Aby°} see avy°. Abhabba {Abhabba} (adj.) [a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning] impossible, not likely, unable D III.13 sq., 19, 26 sq., 133; It 106, 117; Sn 231 (see KhA 189); Dh 32; J I 116; Pug 13. -ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant's character: see D III.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set). Abhabbatā {Abhabbata} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unlikelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191. Abhaya {Abhaya} (adj.) [a + bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dh 258. - nt. abhayaṃ confidence, safety Dh 317, cp. DhA III.491. For further refs. see bhaya. Abhi {Abhi} - bhi, as in Gr. a)mfi/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir. imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat. ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg. Ags. bī = E. be-. I. Meaning. - 1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over-coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against, on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i. e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1). Next to saṃ- it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of "very much, greatly" as the first part of a double-prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i. e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi-vi-ji (side by side with vi-ji), abhi-ā-kkhā (side by side with ā-kkhā), abhi-anu-mud (side by side with anu-mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her-bei-kommen (for bei-kommen), E. fill up (for fill); e. g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ° C.), abbhatīta ("vorbei gegangen"), abbhantara ("with-in", b-innen or "in here"), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti ("fill up"), etc. (see also II. 1, c). II. Lit. Meaning. - 1. As single pref.: (a) against, to, on to, at-, viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home, abhighāta striking at, °jjhā think at, °mana thinking on, °mukha facing, turned towards, °yāti at-tack, °rūhati ascend, °lāsa long for, °vadati ad-dress, °sapati ac-curse, °hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over, °kamati exceed, °jāti off-spring, °jānāti know all over, °bhavati overcome, °vaḍḍhati increase, °vuṭṭha poured out or over, °sandeti make over-flow, °siñcati sprinkle over. (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be(con-) and Ger. er-, thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, °jānāti "er-kennen" °jāyati be-get, °tthaneti = °gajjati, °nadati "er tönen", °nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), °passati con-template, °ramati indulge in, °ropeti honour, °vuḍḍha increased, °saddahati believe in. - 2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam-abhi (which is, however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam-).III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying). - 1. A single pref.: abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, °jalati shine forth, °jighacchati be very hungry, °tatta much exhausted, °tāpa very hot, °toseti pleuse greatly, °nava quite fresh, °nipuṇa very clever, °nīla of a deep black, °manāpa very pleasant, °mangaly very lucky, °yobbana full youth, °rati great liking, °ratta deep red, °ruci intense satisfaction, °rūpa very handsome (= adhika-rūpa C.), °sambuddha wide and fully-awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (=adhikaṃuddh° C.). - As 1st part of a prep.-cpd. (as modification-pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi-ud (abbhud-) °ati, °anu, °ava, °ā, °ni, °ppa, °vi, °saṃ. See all these s. v. and Pāli Text Society 153 Pāli-English Dictionary note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh°. -On its relation to pari, see pari°, to ava see ava°. IV. Dialectical Variation. - There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati°, adhi° and anu°, since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings: abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi = up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in °jāti, °pīḷita, °brūheti, °vassati, °vāyati, °veṭheti; also as vv. ll. with abhikīrati, °pavassati, °roceti, cp. atikkanta-abhi° (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in °patthita, °pāteti, °ppāya, °ppeta, °bādheti, °bhū, °vāha (vice versa P. abhi-ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in °gijjhati, °brūheti, °sandahati. Abhikankhati [abhi + kankhati] to desire after, long for, wish for S I.140, 198 (Nibbānaṃ); J II.428; IV.10, 241; VvA 38, 283; ThA 244. - pp. abhikankhita. Cp. BSk. abhikānkṣati, e. g. Jtm. p. 221. {Abhikankhati} Abhikankhanatā {Abhikankhanata} (f.) [abhi + kankhana + tā] wishing, longing, desire DA I.242. Abhikankhita {Abhikankhita} [pp. of abhikankhati] desired, wished, longed for VvA 201 (= abhijjhita). Abhikankhin {Abhikankhin} (adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of -°) Th 2, 360 (sītibhāva°). Abhikiṇṇa {Abhikinna} [pp. of abhikirati] 1. strewn over with (-°), adorned, covered filled Pv II.112 (puppha°). - 2. overwhelmed, overcome, crushed by (-°) It 89 (dukkh°; vv. ll. dukkhātiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = A I.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa. Abhikirati {Abhikirati} - 1. [Sk. abhikirati] to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1. - 2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna] to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush S I.54; Th 1, 598; 2, 447 (ger. °kiritūna, reading of C. for T. apa°, expld. by chaḍḍetvā); Dh 25 (°kīrati metri causa; dīpaṃ abhikīrati = viddhaṃseti vikirati DhA I.255; v. l. atikirati); J IV.121 (°kīrati; dīpaṃ = viddhaṃseti C.); VI.541 (nandiyo m° abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); DhA I.255 (inf. °kirituṃ). - pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2. Abhikīḷati {Abhikilati} [abhi + kìḷati] to play (a game), to sport Miln 359 (kīḷaṃ). Abhikūjita {Abhikujita} [abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj] resounding (with the song of birds) Pv II.123 (cakkavāka°; so read for kujita). Cp. abhinikūjita. Abhikkanta {Abhikkanta} (adj.-n.) [pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta] (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out, gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e. g. DA I.227 = KhA 114 = VvA 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya KhA) sundarɔ-ābhirūpa-abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed, gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya "wane"), in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin I.26; D II.220; M I.142. 2. excellent, supreme (= sundara) Sn 1118 (°dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar °tara (+ paṇītatara) D I.62, 74, 216; A II.101; III.350 sq.; V.140, 207 sq.; DA I.171 (= atimanāpatara). 3. pleasing, superb, extremely Pāli Text Society 154 Pāli-English Dictionary wonderful, as exclamation °ṃ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (= abbhānumodana) D I.85, 110, 234; Sn p. 15, 24, etc. freq. 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with °vaṇṇa = abhirūpa) Vin I.26; D II.220; M I.142; Pv II.110 = Vv 91 (= atimanāpa abhirūpa PvA 71); KhA 115 (=abhirūpachavin). - (b) (nt.) abhikkantaṃ (combd. with and opp. to paṭikkantaṃ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) D I.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DA I.183); Vin III.181; A II.104, 106 sq.; VvA 6. Abhikkama going forward, approach, going out Pv IV.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); DhA III.124 (°paṭikkama). {Abhikkama} Abhikkamati [Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati] to go forward, to proceed, approach D I.50 (=abhimukho kamati, gacchati, pavisati DA I.151); II.147, 256 (abhikkā- muṃ.); DhA III.124 (evaṃ °itabbaṃ evaṃ paṭikkamitabbaṃ thus to approach & thus to withdraw). pp. abhikkanta (q. v.). {Abhikkamati} Abhikkhaṇa1 {Abhikkhana} (nt.) [fr. abhikkhanati] digging up of the ground M I.143. Abhikkhaṇa2 (nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha] only as acc. adv. °ṃ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaṃ VvA 116); Pv II.84 (= abhiṇhaṃ bahuso PvA 107); Pug 31; DhA II.91. {Abhikkhana} Abhikkhaṇati {Abhikkhanati} [abhi + khaṇati] to dig up M I.142. Abhikkhipati {Abhikkhipati} [abhi + khipati] to throw Dāvs III.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12. Abhigajjati {Abhigajjati} [abhi + gajjati from garj, sound-root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. III.108. - (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin. Abhigajjin {Abhigajjin} (adj.) [fr. abhigajjati] warbling, singing, chattering Th 1, 1108, 1136. Abhigamanīya {Abhigamaniya} (adj.) [grd. of abhigacchati] to be approached, accessible PvA 9. Abhigijjhati {Abhigijjhati} [abhi + gijjhati] 1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Sn 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77). -2. to envy (acc.) S I.15 (aññam-aññaṃ). Abhigīta {Abhigita} [pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta] 1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaṃ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. "ersungen") S I.173 = Sn 81 = Miln 228. See SnA 151. - 2. resounding with, filled with song (of birds) J VI.272 (= abhiruda). Abhighāta {Abhighata} [Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta] (a) striking, slaying, killing PvA 58 (daṇḍa°), 283 (sakkhara°). - (b) impact, contact DhsA 312 (rūpa° etc.). Abhicetasika {Abhicetasika} (adj.) [abhi + ceto + ika] dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic° (of jhāna) M I.33, 356; III.11; S II.278; A II.23; V.132. (Spelt. ābhi° at M I.33; A III.114; Vin V.136). See Dial. III.108. 155 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhiceteti {Abhiceteti} [abhi + ceteti] to intend, devise, have in mind J IV.310 (manasā pāpaṃ). Abhicchanna {Abhicchanna} (adj.) [abhi + channa] covered with, bedecked or adorned with (-°) J II.48 (hema-jāla°, v. l. abhisaðchanna), 370 (id.); Sn 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24, cp. Nd2 365). Abhicchita {Abhicchita} (adj.) [abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita] desired J VI.445 (so read for abhijjhita). Abhijacca {Abhijacca} (adj.) [Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca] of noble birth J V.120. Abhijaneti {Abhijaneti} occasional spelling for abhijāneti. Abhijappati [abhi + jappati] to wish for, strive after, pray for S I.143 (read asmābhijappanti & cp. Kindred Sayings p. 180) = J III.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiṃsati thometi; Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning abhigijjhati. {Abhijappati} Abhijappana {Abhijappana} (nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇṃa° DA I.97] in hattha° casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands D I.11; DA I.97. Abhijappā {Abhijappa} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā] praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā II.; Dhs 1136. Abhijappin {Abhijappin} (adj.) [fr. abhijappati] praying for, desiring A III.353 (kāma-lābha°). Abhijalati {Abhijalati} [abhi + jalati] to shine forth, ppr. °anto resplendent PvA 189. Abhijavati {Abhijavati} [abhi + javati] to be eager, active Sn 668. Abhijāta {Abhijata} (adj.) [abi + jāta] of noble birth, well-born, S I.69; Vv 293; Miln 359 (°kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth). Abhijāti {Abhijati} (f.) [abhi + jāti] 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non-Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour D I.53, 54; A III.383 ff. (quoted DA I.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at D III.250, M II.222, and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers. - 2. Rebirth, descent, Miln 226. Abhijātika {Abhijatika} (adj.) [fr. abhijāti] belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhābhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale D III.251 = A III.348; Sn 563 = Th 1, 833; cp. J P T S. 1893, 11; in sense of "evil disposed or of bad character" at J V.87 (= kāḷaka-sabhāva C.). Abhijātitā {Abhijatita} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijāti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216. Pāli Text Society 156 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhijāna {Abhijana} (nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijðāna] recognition, remembrance, recollection Miln 78. See also abhiððā. Abhijānāti {Abhijanati} [abhi + jðā, cp. jānāti & abhiððā] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of (c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D I.143; S II.58, 105, 219, 278; III.59, 91; IV.50, 324, 399; V.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn 11 17 (diṭṭhiṃ Gotamassa na a.); J IV.142; Pv II.710 = II.103 (nɔābhijānāmi bhuttaṃ vā pītaṃ); Sdhp 550; etc. - Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaððā Sn 917, 1059 (= jāneyyāsi SnA 592); aor. abhaððāsi Sn p. 16. - ppr. abhijānaṃ S IV.19, 89; Sn 788 (= °jānanto C.), 1114 (= °jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva DhA IV.233; abhiððāya S IV.16; V.392; Sn 534 (sabbadhammaṃ), 743 (jātikkhayaṃ), 1115, 1148; It 91 (dhammaṃ); Dh 166 (atta-d-atthaṃ); freq. in phrase sayaṃ abhiððāya from personal knowledge or self-experience It 97 (v.l. abhiððā); Dh 353; and abhiððā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaṃ abhiððā D I.31 (+ sacchikatvā); S II.217; It 97 (v.l. for °abhiððāya), in abhiððā-vosita perfected by highest knowledge S I.167 = 175 = Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA IV.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaṃ abhiññapariññeyya S IV.29. - grd. abhiññeyya S IV.29; Sn 558 (°ṃ abhiððātaṃ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA IV.233. - pp. abhiððāta (q. v.). Abhijāyati {Abhijayati} [abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti] to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ Nibbānaṃ a. D III.251; A III.384 sq. At Sn 214 abhijāyati means "to behave, to be", cp. SnA 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati). Abhijigiṃsati {Abhijigimsati} [abhi + jigiṃsati] to wish to overcome, to covet J VI.193 (= jinituṃ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell °jigīsati; Th 1, 743 ("cheat"? Mrs Rh. D.; "vernichten" Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiṃsanatā. Abhijighacchati {Abhijighacchati} [abhi + jighacchati] to be very hungry PvA 271. Abhijīvanika {Abhijivanika} (adj.) [abhi + jīvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin I.187 (sippa). Abhijīhanā {Abhijihana} (f.) [abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J VI.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.). Abhijeti {Abhijeti} [abhi + jayati] to win, acquire, conquer J VI.273 (ābhi° metri causā). Abhijoteti {Abhijoteti} [abhi + joteti] to make clear, explain, illuminate J V.339. Abhijjanaka {Abhijjanaka} (adj.) [a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid] not to be broken, not to be moved or changed, uninfluenced J II.170; DhA III.189. Abhijjamāna {Abhijjamana} (adj.) [ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati] that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are D I.78, 212; III.112, 281; M I.34, 494; II.18; A I.170, 255; III.17; V.199; S II 121; V.264. In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno. The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads °māne, and explains it, relying on Ps II.208, as that sort of Pāli Text Society 157 Pāli-English Dictionary water in which a man does not sink. Pv III.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla's note on that (PvA 169) is corrupt. At D I.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. „not (the water)‟; at D I.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. „not sinking (in the water)‟. Abhijjhā {Abhijjha} (f.) [fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna], covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp. Dhs. trsl. 22) D I.70, 71 (°āya cittaṃ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp. DA I.211 = abhijjhāto); M I.347 (id.); D III.49, 71 sq., 172, 230, 269; S IV.73, 104, 188, 322 (adj. vigatɔābhijjha), 343 (°āyavipāka); A I.280; III.92; V.251 sq.; It 118; Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya-ganthā, q. v.); Nd2 taṇhā II.1; Pug 20, 59; Dhs 1136 (°kāyagantha); Vbh 195, 244 (vigatɔābhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13; DhA I.23; PvA 103, 282; Sdhp 56, 69. - Often combd with °domanassa covetousness & discontent, e. g. at D III.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M I.340; III.2; A I.39, 296; II.16, 152; IV.300 sq., 457 sq.; V.348, 351; Vbh 105, 193 sq. -anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, 62. - See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla. Abhijjhātar {Abhijjhatar} see abhijjhitar. Abhijjhāti {Abhijjhati} [cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāyati] to wish for (acc.), long for, covet S V.74 (so read for abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya J VI.174 (= patthetvā C.). - pp. abhijjhita. Abhijjhāyati {Abhijjhayati} [Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti] to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Sn 301 (aor. abhijjhāyiṃsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiṃsu Sn A 320). Abhijjhālū {Abhijjhalu} (adj.) [cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijjhālu with °ālu for °āgu which in its turn is for āyin. The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e. g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction] covetous D I.139; III.82; Ṣ II.168; III.93; A I.298; II.30, 59, 220 (an° + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); V.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40. Abhijjhiṭṭa {Abhijjhitta} v. l. at DhA IV.101 for ajjhiṭṭha. Abhijjhita {Abhijjhita} [pp. of abhijjhāti] coveted, J. VI.445; usually neg. an° not coveted, Vin I.287; Sn 40 (= anabhipatthita Sn A 85; cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201). Abhijjhitar [n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M I.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v. l. °itar) = A V.265 (T. °itar, v. l. °ātar). {Abhijjhitar} Abhiñña {Abhinna} (adj.) (usually -°) [Sk. abhijña] knowing, possessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge (abhiððā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiðða one who possesses the 6 abhiððās Vin III.88; dandh° of sluggish intellect D III.106; A II.149; V.63 (opp. khipp°); mah° of great insight S II.139. - Compar. abhiññatara S V.159 (read bhiyyo °bhiññataro). Abhiññatā {Abhinnata} (f.) [fr. abhiððā] in cpd. mahā° state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge S IV.263; V.175, 298 sq. Abhiññā1 {Abhinna} (f.) [fr. abhi + jðā, see jānāti]. Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special Pāli Text Society 158 Pāli-English Dictionary knowledge (abhiððā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna. These conditions precedent are the Path (S V.421 = Vin I.10 = S IV.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (A V.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (S V.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. V.255). The contrary is three times stated; wrong-doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiððā and the rest (D III.131; A III.325 sq. and V.216). Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2, the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others' thoughts (cp. thought-reading); 4, recollecting one's previous births; 5, knowing other people's rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance). This list occurs only at D III.281 as a list of abhiððās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiððā's, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at D I.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. I.89 sq.); M I.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); A I.255, 258 = III.17, 280 = IV.421. At S I.191; Vin II.16; Pug 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiððā ("endowed with the 6 Apperceptions"). At S II.216 we have five, and at S V.282, 290 six abhiððā's mentioned in glosses to the text. And at S II.217, 222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also M II.11; III.96. It is from these passages that the list at D III. has been made up, and called abhiððā's. Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. A.D.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiððā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd1 108, 328 (expln. of ðāṇa); Nd2 s. v. and N0. 466; Ps I.35; II.156, 189; Vbh 228, 334; Pug 14; Nett 19, 20; Miln 342; Vism 373; Mhvs XIX.20; DA I.175; DhA II.49; IV.30; Sdhp 228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiððā sacchikatvā and abhiððāvosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yathɔ abhiññaṃ means „as you please, according to liking, as you like‟, J V.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiððā in the use of an adj. (°abhiñña) see abhiñña. Abhiññā2 {Abhinna} ger. of abhijānāti. Abhiññāta {Abhinnata} [pp. of abhijānāti] 1. known, recognised Sn 588 (abhiððeyyaṃ °ṃ). - 2. (well)-known, distinguished D I.89 (°kolaðða = pākaṭa-kulaja DA I.252), 235; Sn p. 115. Abhiññeyya {Abhinneyya} grd. of abhijānāti. Abhiṭhāna {Abhithana} (nt.) [abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others] a great or deadly crime. Only at Sn 231 = Kh VI.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as "matricide, parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl. 267. - See also ānantarika. Abhiṇhaṃ {Abhinham} (adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaṇaṃ] repeatedly, continuous, often M I.442 (°āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (°kāraṇa continuous practice); Sn 335 (°saṃvāsa continuous living together); J I.190; Pug 32; DhA II.239; VvA 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaṇaṃ). Cp. abhiṇhaso. 159 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhiṇhaso {Abhinhaso} (adv.) [adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ] always, ever S I.194; Th 1, 25; Sn 559, 560, 998. Abhitakketi {Abhitakketi} [abhi + takketi] to search for Dāvs V.4. Abhitatta {Abhitatta} [pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha° Vin II.220; Miln 97, and ghamma° S II.110, 118; Sn 1014; J II.223; VvA 40; PvA 114. Abhitāpa {Abhitapa} [abhi + tāpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin III.83 (sīsa° sunstroke); M I.507 (mahā° very hot); Miln 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv IV.18 (mahā°, of niraya). Abhitāḷita {Abhitalita} [abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti] hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara°). Abhitiṭṭhati {Abhititthati} [abhi + tiṭṭhati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D II.261; J VI.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.). Abhitunna {Abhitunna} (tuṇṇa)[not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is °tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v. l. under the disguise of (sok)āhituṇḍa for °abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu III.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S II.20; Ps I.129 (dukkha°), 164; J I.407; 509 (°tuṇṇa); II.399, 401; III.23 (soka°); IV.330; V.268; Sdhp 281. Abhito {Abhito} (indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.]. - 1. round about, on both sides J VI.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.), 539. - 2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe VvA 275). Abhitoseti {Abhitoseti} [abhi + toseti] to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Sn 709 (= atīva toseti Sn A 496). Abhitthaneti {Abhitthaneti} [abhi + thaneti] to roar, to thunder J I.330, 332 = Cp. III.107. Abhittharati {Abhittharati} [abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati] to make haste Dh 116 (= turitaturitaṃ sīghasīghaṃ karoti DhA III.4). Abhitthavati {Abhitthavati} [abhi + thavati] to praise J I.89; III.531; Dāvs III.23; DhA I.77; PvA 22; cp. abhitthunati. Abhitthavana {Abhitthavana} (nt.) [fr. prec.] praise Th A 74. Abhitthunati {Abhitthunati} [abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati] to praise J I.17 (aor abhitthuniṃsu); cp. thunati 2. - pp. °tthuta DhA I.88. Abhida1 {Abhida} (adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at M II.34, 35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv. ll. abhidosa & abhidesa, Neumann trsl. "unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like "full, powerful" or unbroken, unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta "fearless"?") or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly? Pāli Text Society 160 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhida2 {Abhida} Only in the difficult old verse D II.107 (= S V.263 = A IV.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203). Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke. Abhidassana {Abhidassana} (nt.) [abhi + dassana] sight, appearance, show J VI.193. Abhideyya {Abhideyya} in sabba° at PvA 78 is with v. l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaṃ. Abhidosa {Abhidosa} (°-) the evening before, last night; °kālakata M I.170 = J I.81; °gata gone last night J VI.386 (= hiyyo paṭhama-yāme C.). Abhidosika {Abhidosika} belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin III.15; Miln 291. See ābhi°. Abhiddavati {Abhiddavati} [abhi + dru, cp. dava2] to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs III.47. Abhidhamati {Abhidhamati} [abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi° & api-dhamati] blow on or at A I.257. Abhidhamma [abhi + dhamma] the "special Dhamma," i. e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin I.64, 68; IV.144; IV.344. Coupled with abhivinaya, D III.267; M I.272. - 2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs V.37; PvA 140. See the detailed discussion at DA I.15, 18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.] -kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, M I.214, 218; A III.106, 392. See dhammakathā. {Abhidhamma} Abhidhammika {Abhidhammika} see ābhidhammika. Abhidhara {Abhidhara} (adj.) [abhi + dhara] firm, bold, in °māna firmminded Dh p. 81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135; not verified). Abhidhāyin {Abhidhayin} (adj.) [abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98. Abhidhāreti {Abhidhareti} [abhi + dhāreti] to hold aloft J I.34 = Bu IV.1. Abhidhāvati {Abhidhavati} [abhi + dhāvati] to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin II.195; S I.209; J II.217; III.83; DhA IV.23. Abhidhāvin {Abhidhavin} (adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] "pouring in", rushing on, running J VI.559. Abhinata [pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M I.386 (+ apanata); S I.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D. "strained forth", cp. Kindred S I.39). See also apanata. {Abhinata} Abhinadati {Abhinadati} [abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J VI.531. Cp. abhinādita. 161 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhinandati {Abhinandati} [abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D I.46 (bhāsitaṃ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M I.109, 458; S I.32 (annaṃ), 57, 14, (cakkhuṃ, rūpe etc.); A IV.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn 1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA I.160; DhA III.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp. paṭikkosi) VvA 65 (vacanaṃ). - pp. abhinandita (q. v.). - Often in combn. with abhivadati (q. v.). Abhinandana {Abhinandana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā], pleasure, delight, enjoyment D I.244; M I.498; J IV.397. Abhinandita {Abhinandita} [pp. of abhinandati] only in an° not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure S IV.213 = It 38; S V. 319. Abhinandin {Abhinandin} (adj.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin] rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or -°), enjoying A II.54 (piyarūpa); esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatrɔābhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra-tatrɔābhinandinī M Vastu III.332] Vin I.10; S V.421; Ps II.147; Nett 72, etc. Abhinamati {Abhinamati} [abhi + namati] to bend. - pp. abhinata (q.v.). Abhinaya {Abhinaya} [abhi + naya] a dramatic representation VvA 209 (sākhā°). Abhinava {Abhinava} (adj.) [abhi + nava] quite young, new or fresh Vin III.337; J II.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha); ThA 201 (°yobbana = abhiyobbana); PvA 40 (°saṇṭhāna), 87 (= paccaggha) 155. Abhinādita {Abhinadita} [pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati] resounding with (-°), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) J VI.530 (= abhinadanto C.); PvA 157 (= abhiruda). Abhinikūjita {Abhinikujita} (adj.) [abhi + nikūjita] resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) J V.232 (of the barking of a dog), 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for °kuðjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita. Abhinikkhamati {Abhinikkhamati} [abhi + nikkhamati] to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Sn 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya-vattho hutvā Sn A 117). Abhinikkhamana {Abhinikkhamana} (nt.) [abhi + nikkhamana] departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement, renunciation. Usually as mahā° the great renunciation J I.61; PvA 19. Abhinikkhipati {Abhinikkhipati} [abhi + nikkhipati] to lay down, put down Davs III.12, 60. Abhiniggaṇhanā {Abhinigganhana} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti] holding back Vin III.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā). Abhiniggaṇhāti {Abhinigganhati} [abhi + niggaṇhāti] to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti M I.120; A V.230. - Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā. Pāli Text Society 162 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhinindriya {Abhinindriya} [vv. ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA I.120 as paripuṇṇ°; and at 222 as avikal-indriya not defective, perfect sense-organ. He must have read ahīn°. Abhi-n-indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya; We should read ahīn° throughout D I.34, 77, 186, 195. II.13; M II.18; III.121; Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn°). Abhininnāmeti {Abhininnameti} [abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439] to bend towards, to turn or direct to D I.76 (cittaṃ ðāṇa-dassanāya); M I.234; S I.123; IV.178; Pug 60. Abhinipajjati {Abhinipajjati} [abhi + nipajjati] to lie down on Vin IV.273 (+ abhinisīdati); A IV.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati); Pug 67 (id.). Abhinipatati {Abhinipatati} [abhi + nipatati] to rush on (to) J II.8. Abhinipāta {Abhinipata} (-matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vbh 321 is expld. by āpātha-matta [cp. Divy 125 śastrābhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife]. Abhinipātana {Abhinipatana} (nt.) [fr. abhi-ni-pāteti in daṇḍa-sattha° attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5. Q4. Abhinipātin {Abhinipatin} (adj.) [abhi + nipātin] falling on io (-°) J II.7. Abhinipuṇa {Abhinipuna} (adj.) [abhi + nipuṇa] very thorough, very clever D III.167. Abhinippajjati {Abhinippajjati} [abhi + nippajjati] to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) M I.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) = Nd2 99 (has n'ābhinippajjanti). - Cp. abhinipphādeti. Abhinippata {Abhinippata} at J VI.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v. l. BB.). Abhinippatta {Abhinippatta} at Dhs 1035, 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta. Abhinippanna (& °nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of °nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D II.223 (siloka); J VI.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.). {Abhinippanna} Abhinippīḷanā {Abhinippilana} (f.) [abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin III.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā). Abhinippīḷeti {Abhinippileti} [abhi + nippīḷeti] to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti M I. 120; A V.230. Abhinipphatti {Abhinipphatti} (f.) [abhi + nipphatti] production, effecting D II.283 (v. l. °nibbatti). Abhinipphādeti [abhi + nipphādeti] to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform D I.78 (bhājana-vikatiṃ); Vin II.183 (iddhiṃ); S V.156, 255; Miln 39. Pāli Text Society 163 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhinibbatta {Abhinibbatta} [abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati] reproduced, reborn A IV.40, 401; Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi° pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, 1036 (so read for° nippatta); VvA 9 (puññɔānubhāva° by the power of merit). Abhinibbattati {Abhinibbattati} [abhi + nibbattati] to become, to be reproduced, to result Pug 51. pp. abhinibbatta. - Cp. B.Sk. wrongly abhinivartate]. Abhinibbatti {Abhinibbatti} (f.) [abhi + nibbatti] becoming, birth, rebirth, D I.229; II.283 (v. l. for abhinipphatti) S II.65 (punabbhava°), 101 (id.); IV.14, 215; A V.121; PvA 35. Abhinibbatteti {Abhinibbatteti} [abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of °nibbattati] to produce, cause, cause to become S III.152; A V.47; Nd2 under jāneti. Abhinibbijjati {Abhinibbijjati} [either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nirvidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr. ger. nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt] to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Sn 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v. l. BB° nibbijjiyātha & °nibbajjiyātha, SnA expls. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v. l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = A IV.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha, vv. ll. °nibbajjeyyātha & °nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Th 2, 84. Abhinibbijjhati {Abhinibbijjhati} [abhi + nibbijjhati] to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin III.3; M I.104 = S III.153 (read° nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun - Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234. Abhinibbidā {Abhinibbida} (f.) [abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibbhidā] disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as "padālanā-paññatti avijj°aṇḍakosānaṃ"), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā). Abhinibbuta {Abhinibbuta} (adj.) [abhi + nibbuta] perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm'ābhinibbuta A I.142 = M III.187; Sn 1087; Nd2 83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Sn 343 (= apariḍayhamāna-citta SnA 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35. Abhinibbhidā (f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin III.4, C. on Nett 98). To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda M Vastu I.272, which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh.] the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin III.4; M I.104; 357; Nett 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā. {Abhinibbhida} Abhinimantanatā {Abhinimantanata} (f.) [abstr. to abhinimanteti] speaking to, adressing, invitation M I.331. Abhinimanteti {Abhinimanteti} [abhi + nimanteti] to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to D I.61 (āsanena). Abhinimmadana {Abhinimmadana} (nt.) [abhi + nimmadana] crushing, subduing, levelling out M III.132; A IV.189 sq. Pāli Text Society 164 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhinimmita {Abhinimmita} [abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti] created (by magic) Vv 161 (paðca rathā satā; cp. VvA 79). Abhinimmināti {Abhinimminati} [abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166] to create (by magic), produce, shape, make S III.152 (rūpaṃ); A I.279 (oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaṃ manomayaṃ); VvA 16 (mahantaṃ hatthi-rāja-vaṇṇaṃ). - pp. abhinimmita (q. v.). Abhiniropana {Abhiniropana} (nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. abhiniropeti] fixing one's mind upon, application of the mind Ps I.16, 21, 30, 69, 75, 90; Vbh 87; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. II.19). See also abhiropana. Abhiniropeti {Abhiniropeti} [abhi + niropeti] to implant, fix into (one's mind), inculcate Nett 33. Abhinivajjeti {Abhinivajjeti} [abhi + nivajjeti] to avoid, get rid of D III. 113; M I.119, 364, 402; S V.119, 295, 318; A III.169 sq.; It 81. Abhinivassati [abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ] lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp I.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds). {Abhinivassati} Abhiniviṭṭha {Abhinivittha} (adj.) [abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi-nivisati] "settled in", attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); PvA 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv IV.84). Abhinivisati {Abhinivisati} [abhi + nivisati] to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308, 309 (parāmasati +). - pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa. Abhinivesa {Abhinivesa} [abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana] "settling in", i. e. wishing for, tendency towards (-°), inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to D III.230; M I.136, 251; S II.17; III.10, 13, 135, 161, 186 (saṃyojana° IV.50; A III.363 (paṭhavī°, adj.); Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +); Pug 22; Vbh 145; Dhs 381, 1003, 1099; Nett 28; PvA 252 (micchā°), 267 (taṇhā°); Sdhp 71. - Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e. g. S II.17; Nd2 176, and in phrase idaṃ-saccɔ ābhinivesa adherence to one's dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties: see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5. Abhinisīdati {Abhinisidati} [abhi + nisīdati] to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin III.29; IV.273; A V.188; Pug 67. Abhinissaṭa {Abhinissata} (pp.) [abhi + nissaṭa] escaped Th 1, 1089. Abhinihata {Abhinihata} (pp.) [abhi + nihata] oppressed. crushed, slain J IV.4. Abhinīta {Abhinita} (pp.) [pp. of abhi-neti] led to, brought to, obliged by (-°) M I.463 = Miln 32 (rājā & cora°); M I.282; S III.93; Th 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga° "foredone with cramping pains" Mrs. Rk. D.); Pug 29; Miln 362. Pāli Text Society 165 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhinīla {Abhinila} (adj.) [abhi + nīla] very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase °netta with deep-black eyes D II.18; III.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. Ś I.367 & 370 abhinīla-padmanetra]; Th 2, 257 (nettā ahesuṃ abbinīla-m-āyatā). Abhinīhanati {Abhinihanati} [abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid M I.119 (in phrase āṇiṃ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti). Abhinīharati {Abhiniharati} [abhi + nīharati] 1. to take out, throw out M I.119 (see abhinīhanati). - 2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ðāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti D I.76 (= tanninnaṃ tappoṇaṃ karoti DA I.220, 224; v. l. abhini°) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñābhinirhāra Av. Ś II.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, 49 to obtain? Ind.), 264 (take to burial), 542. Abhinīhāra {Abhinihara} [abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīrɔ ābhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see note on abhinīharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl. 242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S III.267 sq. (°kusala); A II.189; III.311; IV.34 (°kusala); J I.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps I.61 sq.; II.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA I.392; II.82 (kata°). Abhipattika (adj.) [fr. abhipatti] one who has attained, attaining (-°), getting possession of S I.200 (devakañña°). {Abhipattika} Abhipatthita {Abhipatthita} (pp.) [fr. abhipattheti] hoped, wished, longed for Miln 383; SnA 85. Abhipattheti {Abhipattheti} [abhi + pattheti] to hope for, long for, wish for Kh VIII.10; SnA 320; DhA I.30. - pp. abhipatthita (q. v.). Abhipassati [abhi + passati] to have regard for, look for, strive after A I.147 (Nibbānaṃ); III.75; Sn 896 (khema°), 1070 (rattamahā°) Nd1 308; Nd2 428; J VI.370. {Abhipassati} Abhipāteti {Abhipateti} [abhi + pāteti] to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw J II.91 (kaṇḍaṃ). Abhipāruta {Abhiparuta} (adj.) [abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati] dressed Miln 222. Abhipāleti {Abhipaleti} [abhi + pāleti] to protect Vv 8421, cp. VvA 341. Abhipīḷita {Abhipilita} (pp.) [fr. abhipiḷeti] crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, 279. Abhipīḷeti {Abhipileti} [abhi + pīḷeti] to crush, squeeze Miln 166. - pp. abhipīḷita (q. v.). Abhipucchati {Abhipucchati} [abhi + pucchati] Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask J IV.18. Abhipūreti {Abhipureti} [abhi + pūreti] to fill (up) Miln 238; Dāvs III. 60 (paṃsūhi). 166 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhippakiṇṇa {Abhippakinna} [pp. of abhippakirati] completely strewn (with) J I.62. Abhippakirati {Abhippakirati} [abhi + pakirati] to strew over, to cover (completely) D II.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraṃ okiranti ajjhokiranti a.); VvA 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). - pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q. v.). Abhippamodati {Abhippamodati} [abhi + pamodati] to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) M I.425; S V.312, 330; A V.112; J III 530; Ps I.95, 176, 190. Abhippalambati {Abhippalambati} [abhi + palambati] to hang down M III. 164 (olambati ajjholambati a.). Abhippavassati {Abhippavassati} [abhi + pavassati] to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Miln 8, 13, 36, 304; PvA 132 (v. l. ati°); intrs. Miln 18 (pupphāni °iṃsu poured down). - pp. abhippavuṭṭha. Abhippavuṭṭha {Abhippavuttha} (pp.) [fr. abhippavassati] having rained, poured, fallen; trs. S V.51 (bandhanāni meghena °āni) = A V.127; intrs. M II.117 (mahāmegho °o there has been a cloudburst). Abhippasanna {Abhippasanna} (adj.) [pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasanna] finding one's peace in (c. loc.), trusting in, having faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin III.43; D I.211 (Bhagavati) S I.134; IV.319; V.225, 378; A III. 237, 270, 326 sq.; Sn p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu); PvA 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning. Abhippasāda {Abhippasada} [abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Av. Ś 12 (cittasyu°) & vippasāda] faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 ("sense of assurance" trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96, 288; PvA 223. Abhippasādeti {Abhippasadeti} [Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasādayati Divy 68, 85, pp. abhiprasādita-manāḥ Jtm 213, 220] to establish one's faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Th 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaṃ arahantamhi = cittaṃ pasādeti VvA 105). Abhippāsāreti {Abhippasareti} [abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389] to stretch out Vin I.179 (pāde). Abhippasīdati {Abhippasidati} [abhi + pasīdati] to have faith in D I.211 (fut. °issati). - pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti. Abhippaharaṇa {Abhippaharana} (nt.) [abhi + paharaṇa] attacking, fighting, as adj. f. °aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Sn 439 (kaṇhassa° the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ nippothanī antarāyakārī SnA 390). Abhibyāpeti {Abhibyapeti} [abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp] to pervade Miln 251. Abhibhakkhayati pankaṃ a.). {Abhibhakkhayati} [abhi + bhakkhayati] to eat (of animals) Vin II.201 (bhinko 167 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhibhava {Abhibhava} [fr. abhibhavati] defeat, humiliation SnA 436. Abhibhavati {Abhibhavati} [abhi + bhavati] to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer S I.18, 32, 121 (maraṇaṃ); IV. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaṃ), 246, 249 (sāmikaṃ); J I.56, 280; PvA 94 (= balīyati, vaḍḍhati). - fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4. - ger. abhibhuyya Vin I.294; Dh 328; It 41 (māraṃ sasenaṃ); Sn 45, 72 (°cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā PvA 113 (= pasayha), 136. - grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome PvA 57. - Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) PvA 80, 103. - pp. abhibhūta (q. v.). Abhibhavana {Abhibhavana} (nt.) [fr. abhibhavati] overcoming, vanquishing, mastering S II.210 (v. l. BB abhipatthana). Abhibhavanīyatā {Abhibhavaniyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhibhavati] as an° invincibility PvA 117. Abhibhāyatana {Abhibhayatana} (nt.) [abhibhū + āyatana] position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. II.118; Exp. I.252), detailed identically at all the foll. passages, viz. D II.110; III.260 (& 287); M II.13; A I.40; IV.305, 348; V.61. Mentioned only at S IV.77 (6 stations); Ps I.5; Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247. Abhibhāsana {Abhibhasana} (nt.) [abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās] enlightenment or delight ("light & delight" trsl.) Th 1, 613 (= tosana C.). Abhibhū {Abhibhu} (n.-adj.) [Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhibhavati] overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of (-°) D III.29; S II. 284; Sn 211 (sabba°), 545 (Māra°, cp. Mārasena-pamaddana 561), 642. - Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aððadatthudasa vasavattin, i. e. unvanquished Lord of all D I 18; III.135 = Nd2 276; A II.24; IV.94; It 122; cp. DA I.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakoɔ ham asmīti). Abhibhūta {Abhibhuta} [pp. of abhibhavati] overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished D I.121; S I.137 (jāti-jarā°); II.228 (lābhasakkāra-silokena); A I.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); J I.189; PvA 14, 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (= pareta). Often neg. an° unconquered, e. g. Sn 934; Nd1 400; & see phrase under abhibhū. Abhimangala (adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in °sammatā (of Visākhā) "benedicted", blessed Vin III.187 = DhA I.409. Opp. avamangala. {Abhimangala} Abhimaṇḍita {Abhimandita} (pp. -°) [abhi + maṇḍita] adorned, embellished, beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17. Abhimata {Abhimata} (adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1, 91. Abhimatthati (°eti) & °mantheti [abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti] 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy M I.243 (sikharena muddhānaṃ °mantheti); S I.127; Dh 161 (v. l. {Abhimatthati} 168 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary °nth°); J IV.457 (matthako sikharena °matthiyamāno); DhA III.152 (= kantati viddhaṃseti). - 2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiṃ; cp. Vedic agniṃ nirmanthati) M I.240. Abhimaddati {Abhimaddati} [Sk. abhimardati & °mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd] to crush S I.102; A I.198; Sdhp 288. Abhimana {Abhimana} (adj.) [abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e. g. M Vastu III.259] having one's mind turned on, thinking of or on (c. acc.) Th 1, 1122; J VI.451. Abhimanāpa {Abhimanapa} (adj.) [abhi + manāpa] very pleasing VvA 53 (where id. p. at PvA 71 has atimanāpa). Abhimantheti {Abhimantheti} see abhimatthati. Abhimāra {Abhimara} [cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter] a bandit, bravo, robber J II.199; DA I.152. Abhimukha {Abhimukha} (adj.) [abhi + mukha] facing, turned towards, approaching J II.3 (°ā ahesuṃ met each other). Usually -° turned to, going to, inclined towards D I.50 (purattha°); J I.203 (devaloka°), 223 (varaṇa-rukkha°); II.3 (nagara°), 416 (Jetavana°); DhA I.170 (tad°); II.89 (nagara°); PvA 3 (kāma°, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna°). - nt. °ṃ adv. to, towards J I.263 (mattavāraṇe); PvA 4 (āghātana°, may here be taken as pred. adj.); DhA III.310 (uttara°). Abhiyācati {Abhiyacati} [abhi + yācati] to ask, beg, entreat Sn 1101, cp. Nd2 86. Abhiyāti {Abhiyati} [Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā] to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) S I.216 (aor. abhiyaṃsu, v. l. SS abhijiyiṃsu); DhA III.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v. l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p. VvA 68 reads pāyāsi with v. l. upāyāsi). Abhiyujjhati {Abhiyujjhati} [abhi + yujjhati from yudh] to contend, quarrel with J I.342. Abhiyuñjati {Abhiyunjati} [abhi + yuj] to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one's share Vin III.50; IV.304. Abhiyoga {Abhiyoga} [cp. abhiyuðjati] practice, observance Dāvs IV.7. Abhiyogin {Abhiyogin} (adj.) [fr. abhiyoga] applying oneself to, practised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) D III.168. Abhiyobbana {Abhiyobbana} (nt.) [abhi + yobbana] much youthfulness, early or tender youth Th 2, 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla ThA 211). Abhirakkhati {Abhirakkhati} [abhi + rakkhati] to guard, protect J VI.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati. Abhirakkhā {Abhirakkha} (f.) [fr. abhirakkhati] protection, guard J I.204 (= ārakkhā 203). Pāli Text Society 169 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhirata {Abhirata} (adj.) (-°) [pp. of abhiramati] found of, indulging in, finding delight in A IV.224 (nekkhamma°); V.175 (id.), Sn 86 (nibbāna°), 275 (vihesa°), 276 (kalaha°); J V.382 (dāna°); PvA 54 (puððakamma°), 61 (satibhavana°), 105 (dānādipuñña°). Abhiratatta {Abhiratatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of, delighting in (-°) J V.254 (kāma°). Abhirati {Abhirati} (f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or -°) S I.185; IV.260; A V.122; Dh 88. -an° displeasure, discontent, distaste Vin II.110; D I.17 (+ paritassanā); S I.185; V.132; A III.259; IV.50; V.72 sq., 122; J III.395; DA I.111; PvA 187. Abhiratta {Abhiratta} (adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J V.156; fig. very much excited or affected with (-°) Sn 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.). Abhiraddha {Abhiraddha} (adj.) [pp. of abhi + rādh] propitiated, satisfied A IV.185 (+ attamana). Abhiraddhi {Abhiraddhi} (f.) [fr. abhiraddha] only in neg. an° displeasure, dislike, discontent A I.79; DA I.52 (= kopassɔ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ). Abhiramati {Abhiramati} [abhi + ram] to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Sn 718, 1085; J I.192; III.189, 393; DhA I.119; PvA 3, 61, 145. - ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. °ṃ in adv. phrase yathābhirantaṃ after one's liking, as much as he pleases, after one's heart's content Vin I.34; M I.170; Sn 53. - ppr. med. abhiramamāna J III.188, PvA 162. pp. abhirata (q. v.). - 2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q. v.). Abhiramana {Abhiramana} (nt.) [fr. abhiramati] sporting, dallying, amusing oneself PvA 16. Abhiramāpana {Abhiramapana} (nt.) [fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati] causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure, making happy M III.132 (gāmante). Abhiramāpeti {Abhiramapeti} [Caus. II. fr. abhiramati] 1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure J III.393. - 2. to delight, amuse, divert J I.61. - Cp. abhiramāpana. Abhiravati {Abhiravati} [abhi + ravati] to shout ont Bu II.90 = J I.18 (V.99) Abhirādhita {Abhiradhita} [pp. of abhirādheti] having succeeded in, fallen to one's share, attained Th 1, 259. Abhirādhin {Abhiradhin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. abhirādheti] pleasing, giving pleasure, satisfaction J IV.274 (mitta° = ārādhento tosento C.). Abhirādheti {Abhiradheti} [abhi + rādheti] to please, satisfy, make happy J I.421; DA I.52. - aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi VvA 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi VvA 282); J I.421; III.386 (= paritosesi C.). - pp. abhirādhita. 170 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhiruci {Abhiruci} (f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 (= ajjhāsaya). Abhirucita {Abhirucita} (adj.) [pp. fr. abhi + ruc] pleasing, agreeable, liked J I.402; DhA I.45. Abhiruda {Abhiruda} (adj. -°) [Sk. abhiruta] resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Th 1, 1062 (kuðjara°), 1113 (mayūra-koñca°); J IV.466 (adāsakunta°); V.304 (mayūra-koðca°); VI.172 (id., = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta°; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra-koñca°), 539; Pv II.123 (haṃsa-koðca°; = abhinādita PvA 157). - The form abhiruta occurs at Th 1, 49. Abhirūpa {Abhirupa} (adj.) [abhi + rūpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 (= dassaniyaɔ angapaccanga SnA 383); J I.207; Pug 52; DA I.281 (= aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa-pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g. Vin I.268; D I.47, 114, 120; S II.279; A II.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA I.281 (compar.); PvA 46. Abhirūḷha {Abhirulha} [pp. of abhirūhati] mounted, gone up to, ascended J V.217; DhA I.103. Abhirūhati {Abhiruhati} (abhiruhati) [abhi + ruh] to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dh 321; Th 1, 271; J I.259; II.388; III.220; IV.138 (navaṃ); VI.272 (peculiar aor. °rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DA I.253. - ger. abhiruyha J III.189; PvA 75, 152 (as v. l.; T. has °ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaṃ), & abhirūhitvā J I.50 (pabbataṃ) II.128. Abhirūhana {Abhiruhana} (nt.) [BSk. °rūhana, e. g. M Vastu II.289] climbing, ascending, climb Miln 356. Abhiroceti {Abhiroceti} [abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc] 1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for J III.192; V.222 (= roceti); Vv 6423 (vataṃ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho VvA 282). - 2. to please, satisfy, entertain, gladden Vv 6424 (but VvA 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati, thus to no. 3). - 3. v. l. for atiroceti (to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2. Abhiropana {Abhiropana} (nt.) [fr. abhiropeti] concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Ps II. only) Ps II.82 (v. l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi°), 142 (°virāga), 145 (°vimutti), 216 (°abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana. Abhiropeti {Abhiropeti} [abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh] to fix one's mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence, to honour Vv 377 (aor. °ropayi = ropesi VvA 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaṃ kāresi VvA 172), 604 (= pūjesi VvA 253); Dāvs V.19. Abhilakkhita (adj.) [Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ] fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices J IV.1; DA I.18. {Abhilakkhita} Abhilakkhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhilakkhita] having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics DhsA 62. {Abhilakkhitatta} Pāli Text Society 171 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhilanghati {Abhilanghati} [abhi + langhati] to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) J III.364; VI.221. Abhilambati {Abhilambati} [abhi + lambati] to hang down over (c. acc.) M III.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati); J V.70 (papātaṃ), 269 (Vetaraṇiṃ). - pp. abhilambita (q. v.). Abhilambita {Abhilambita} (adj.) [pp. of abhilambati] hanging down J V.407 (nīladuma°). Abhilāpa {Abhilapa} [fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vācābhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaṃ uncertain, vv. ll. abhipāyaṃ abhipāpāyaṃ, abhisāpāyaṃ, abhisapāyaṃ, atisappāyaṃ. The corresp. passage S III.93 reads abhisapayaṃ: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA I.20, 23, 281; DhsA 51. Abhilāsa {Abhilasa} [Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ] desire, wish, longing PvA 154. Abhilekheti {Abhilekheti} [Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dāvs V.67 (cāritta-lekhaṃ °lekhayi). Abhilepana {Abhilepana} (nt.) [abhi + lepana] "smearing over", stain, pollution Sn 1032, 1033 = Nett 10, 11 (see Nd2 88 = laggana "sticking to", bandhana, upakkilesa). Abhivagga {Abhivagga} [abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase °ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M I.87 = Nd2 1996. Abhivañcana {Abhivancana} (nt.) [abhi + vaðc] deceit, fraud Dāvs III.64. Abhivaṭṭa {Abhivatta} [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha] rained upon Dh 335 (gloss °vuṭṭha; cp. DhA IV.45); Miln 176, 197, 286. - Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivaḍḍha at Dh 335 "the abounding Bīraṇa grass"). Abhivaḍḍhati {Abhivaddhati} [Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh] 1. to increase (intrs.) D I.113, 195 (opp. hāyati); M II.225; A III.46 (bhogā a.); Dh 24; Miln 374; PvA 8, 133; Sdhp 288, 523. - 2. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow J III.399 (vanaspatiṃ). - pp. abhivuḍḍha & °vuddha (q.v.). Abhivaḍḍhana {Abhivaddhana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. abhivaḍḍhati] increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. °ī Sdhp 68. Abhivaḍḍhi {Abhivaddhi} (f.) [cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh] increase, growth Miln 94. - See also abhivuddhi. Abhivaṇṇita {Abhivannita} [pp. of abhivanneti] praised Dpvs I.4. Abhivaṇṇeti {Abhivanneti} [abhi + vanneti] to praise Sdhp 588 (°ayi). - pp. abhivaṇṇita. Pāli Text Society 172 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhivadati {Abhivadati} [abhi + vadati] 1. to speak out, declare, promise J I.83 = Vin I.36; J VI.220. 2. to speak (kindly) to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e. g. at M I.109, 266, 458; S III.14; IV.36 sq.; Miln 69. - Caus. abhivādeti. Abhivandati {Abhivandati} [abhi + vandati] to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. °vandanīya Miln 227. Abhivassaka {Abhivassaka} (adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha°). Abhivassati {Abhivassati} [abhi + vassati from vṛṣ] to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed D III.160 (ābhivassaṃ metri causa); A III.34; Th 1, 985; J I.18 (V.100; pupphā a. stream down); cp. III.106; Miln 132, 411. - pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha (q. v.). - Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Miln 132. Abhivassin {Abhivassin} (adj.) = abhivassaka It 64, 65 (sabbattha°). Abhivādana {Abhivadana} (nt.) [fr. abhivādeti] respectful greeting, salutation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion A II.180; IV.130, 276; J I.81, 82, 218; Dh 109 (°sīlin of devout character, cp. DhA II.239); VvA 24; Sdhp 549 (°sīla). Abhivādeti {Abhivadeti} [Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin II.208 sq.; D I.61; A III.223; IV.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiṃ aor. = abhivādanaṃ kāresiṃ vandiṃ VvA 24); Miln 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaṃ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D I.89, 125, 225; Sn 1010. - Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to make welcome Vin II.208 (°etabba). Abhivāyati {Abhivayati} [abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti] to blow through, to pervade Miln 385. Abhivāreti {Abhivareti} [abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ] to hold back, refuse, deny J V.325 (= nivāreti C.). Abhivāheti {Abhivaheti} [abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah] to remove, to put away Bu X.5. Abhivijayati {Abhivijayati} (& vijināti) [abhi + vijayati] to overpower, to conquer. Of °jayati the ger. °jiya at D I.89, 134; II.16. Of °jināti the pres. 3rd pl. °jinanti at Miln 39; the ger. °jinitvā at M I.253; Pug 66. Abhiviññāpeti {Abhivinnapeti} [abhi + viððāpeti] to turn somebody's mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin III.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaṃ dhammaṃ abhiviððāpesi). Abhivitarati {Abhivitarati} [abhi + vitarati] "to go down to", i. e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin I.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin II.91; III.73, 112; IV.290. Abhivinaya {Abhivinaya} [abhi + vinaya] higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e. g. D III.267; M I.472; also with vinaya Vin V.1 sg. Pāli Text Society 173 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhivindati {Abhivindati} [abhi + vindati] to find, get, obtain Sn 460 (= labhati adhigacchati SnA 405). Abhivisiṭṭha {Abhivisittha} (adj.) [abhi + visiṭṭha] most excellent, very distinguished DA I.99, 313. Abhivissajjati {Abhivissajjati} [abhi + vissajjati] to send out, send forth, deal out, give D III.160. Abhivissattha {Abhivissattha} [abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta] confided in, taken into confidence M II.52 (v. l. °visaṭṭha). Abhivuṭṭha {Abhivuttha} [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa] poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Th 1, 1065; Dh 335 (gloss); PvA 29. Abhivuḍḍha {Abhivuddha} [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also °vuddha] increased, enriched PvA 150. Abhivuddha {Abhivuddha} [pp. of abhivaḍḍhati, see also °vuḍḍha] grown up Miln 361. Abhivuddhi {Abhivuddhi} (f.) [Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivaḍḍhi] increase, growth, prosperity Miln 34. Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at J V.452 for ati°, which however does not agree with C. expln. on p. 454. Abhivedeti {Abhivedeti} [abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs V.2, 11. - 2. to know J VI.175 (= jānāti C.). Abhivihacca {Abhivihacca} [ger. of abhi + vihanati] having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at M I.317 = S III.156; V.44 = It 20. Abhivyāpeti {Abhivyapeti} see abhibyāpeti. Abhisaṃvisati {Abhisamvisati} [abhi + saṃvisati]. Only in abhisaṃvisseyyagattaṃ (or-bhastaṃ orsantuṃ) Th 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) „a bag of skin with carrion filled‟. Abhisaṃsati {Abhisamsati} [Vedic abhiśaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs] to execrate, revile, lay a curse on J V.174 (°saṃsittha 3rd sg. pret. med. = paribhāsi C.) - aor. abhisasi J VI.187, 505, 522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.). - pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiṃsati. Abhisaṃsanā {Abhisamsana} (f.) [? abhisaṃsati] is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning "neighing" (of horses) VvA 272, 279. Abhisankhata {Abhisankhata} (adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisankharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M I.350; A II.43; V.343; J I.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8. Abhisankharoti {Abhisankharoti} (& °khāreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin I.16 (iddhɔ ābhisankhāraṃ °khāreyya); D I.184 (id.); S II.40; III.87, 92; IV.132, 174 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary 290; V.449; A I.201; Sn 984 (ger. °itvā: having got up this curse, cp. SnA 582); PvA 56 (iddhɔ ābhisaṃkhāraṃ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.). - pp. abhisankhata (q. v.). Abhisankhāra {Abhisankhara} [abhi + sankhāra] 1. putting forth, performance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz. (a) gamiya° (or gamika°) a heathenish practice Vin I.233; A IV.180, & (b) iddha° (= iddḥi°) working of supernormal powers Vin I.16; D I.106; S III.92; IV.289; V.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 56, 172, 212. - 2. preparation, store, accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum, state (see for detail sankhāra) S III.58 (an°); Nd1 334, 442; Nd2 s. v.; Vbh 135 (puðða° etc.), 340; DhsA 357 (°viððāna "storing intellect" Dhs trsl. 262). Abhisankhārika (adj.) [fr. abhisankhāra] what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin II.77 = III.160; Sdhp 309 (sa °paccaya). {Abhisankharika} Abhisankhipati {Abhisankhipati} [abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Abhisanga {Abhisanga} [fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga] Q sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to J V.6; Nett 110, 112; DhsA 129 (°hetukaṃ dukkhaṃ) 249 (°rasa). Abhisangin {Abhisangin} (adj.) [fr. abhisanga] cleaving to (-°) Sdhp 566. Abhisajjati {Abhisajjati} [abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga] to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2) D I.91 (= kodha-vasena laggati DA I.257); III.159; J III.120 (+ kuppati); IV.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Av. Ś I.286); V.175 (= kopeti C.); Dh 408 (abhisaje Pot. = kujjhāpana-vasena laggapeyya DhA IV.182); Pug 30, 36. - See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā. Abhisajjana {Abhisajjana} (nt.-adj.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2] only as adv. f. °nī Ep. of vācā scolding, abusing, cursing A V.265 (para°). Cp. next. Abhisajjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana] at Sn 49 evidently means "scolding, cursing, being in bad temper" (cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vācɔ ābhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd2 & Bdhgh. as "sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire" (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd2 89 & 107; SnA 98 (sineha-vasena), cp. also the compromise-expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha-vasena laggati (DA I.257). {Abhisajjana} Abhisañcināti {Abhisancinati} [abhi + saðcināti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. °sañceyyaṃ = °sañcineyyaṃ VvA 202). Abhisañcetayita {Abhisancetayita} [pp. of abhisañceteti] raised into consciousness, thought out, intended, planned M I.350; S II. 65; IV.132; A V.343. Abhisañceteti {Abhisanceteti} [abhi + sañceteti or °cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S II.82. - pp. abhisañcetayita (q. v.). 175 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhisaññā {Abhisanna} (f.). Only in the compound abhi-saððā-nirodha D I.179, 184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saððā, but the whole compound, which means „trance‟. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers. See saððā-vedayita-nirodha. Abhisaññūhati {Abhisannuhati} [abhi + saððūhati, i. e. saṃ-ni-ūhati] to heap up, concentrate Vbh 1, 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Cp. abhisankhipati. Abhisaṭa {Abhisata} [pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ to flow] 1. (med.) streamed forth, come together J VI.56 (= sannipatita C.). - 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin I.268. Abhisatta {Abhisatta} [pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap] cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled J III.460; V.71; SnA 364 (= akkuṭṭha); VvA 335. Abhisattha {Abhisattha} [pp. of abhisaṃsati] cursed, accursed Th 1, 118 "old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her" (that is, laid upon her by a curse). Morris J P T S. 1886, 145 gives the commentator's equivalents, "commanded, worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age, was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern's translation (Toev. s. v.) „hurried up‟ seems to us impossible. Abhisaddahati {Abhisaddahati} [abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e. g. Divy 17, 337] to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.), believe S V.226; Th 1, 785; Pv IV.113, 125 (°saddaheyya = paṭiñeyya PvA 226); Nett 11; Miln 258; PvA 26; Dāvs III.58. Abhisantāpeti {Abhisantapeti} [ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati] to burn out, scorch, destroy M I.121. Abhisanda {Abhisanda} [abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e. g. M Vastu II.276] outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result; only in foll. phrases: cattāro puððɔ ābhisandā kusalɔ ābhisandā (yields in merit) S V.391 sq.; A II.54 sq.; III.51, 337; VI.245, & kammɔ ābhisanda result of kamma Miln 276. - Cp. abhisandana. Abhisandana {Abhisandana} (nt.) [= abhisanda] result, outcome, consequence Ps I.17 (sukhassa). Abhisandahati {Abhisandahati} [abhi + sandahati of saṃ + dhā] to put together, to make ready Th 1, 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense of a prep. = on account of, because of J II.386 (= paṭicca C.). Abhisandeti {Abhisandeti} [abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad] to make overflow, to make full, fill, pervade D I.73, 74. Abhisanna {Abhisanna} (adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with (-°), full Vin I. 279 (°kāya a body full of humours, cp. II.119 & Miln 134); J I.17 (V.88; pītiyā); Miln 112 (duggandha°). Abhisapati {Abhisapati} [abhi + sapati, of śap] to execrate, curse, accurse Vin IV.276; J IV.389; V.87; DhA I.42. - pp. abhisatta. Abhisapana {Abhisapana} (nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read for abhisampanna). Pāli Text Society 176 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhisamaya {Abhisamaya} [abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq. - Esp. in full phrases: attha° grasp of what is proficient S I.87 = A III.49 = It 17, cp. A II.46; ariyasaccānaṃ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths S V.415, 440, 441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāṃ caturnāṃ āryasatyānāṃ a.]; Sn 758 (sacca° = saccɔ āvabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc°); Sdhp 467 (catusacc°), 525 (saccānaṃ); dhammɔ ābhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharmɔ ābhisamaya Divy 200] S II.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA 9 etc. frequent; sammā-mānɔ ābhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaṃ, vivattayi saññojanaṃ sammāmānābhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa" at S IV.205, 207, 399; A III.246, 444; It 47; cp. māna° S I.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mānābhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings, then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S II.5 (paððāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saṃyutta); Sn 737 (phassa°, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa-nirodha SnA 509); Ps II.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha VvA 85); DA I.32; DhA I.109; VvA 73 (bhāvana°), 84 (sacchikiriya°); Dpvs I.31. -anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up wrongly S III.260; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination"). Abhisamāgacchati {Abhisamagacchati} [abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143). Abhisamācārika {Abhisamacarika} (adj.) [abhi + samācārika, to samācāra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin V.181; A II.243 sq.; of dhamma M I.469; A III.14 sq.; 422. Abhisamikkhati {Abhisamikkhati} (& °ekkhati), [abhi + sam + īks, cp. samikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. IV.19 (2nd sg. med. °samekkhase = olokesi C.). - ger. °samikkha & °samekkha [B.Sk. °samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J V.340 (°samikkha, v. l. saðcikkha = passitvā C.); 393, 394 (= disvā C.). Abhisameta {Abhisameta} [pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita & B.Sk. abhisamita] completely grasped or realised, understood, mastered S V.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.); A IV.384 (appattaṃ asacchikataṃ +). Abhisametāvin {Abhisametavin} (adj.) [possess. adj. -formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta] commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin III.189; S II.133; V.458 sq. Abhisameti {Abhisameti} [abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e. g. aor. °samiṃsu & °samesuṃ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk. abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617: caturāryasatyāni a.] to come by, to attain, to realise, grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Miln 214 (catusaccābhisamayaṃ abhisameti). Freg. in combn. abhisambujjhati, abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e. g. S II.25; III.139; Kvu 321. - fut. °samessati S V.441. - aor. °samiṃsu Miln 350; °samesuṃ S V.415. - ger. °samecca (for °icca under influence of °sametvā as caus. form.; Trenckner's expln. Notes 177 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S V.438 (an° by not thoroughly understanding); A V.50 (sammɔattha° through complete realisation of what is proficient); Sn 143 (= abhisamāgantvā KhA 236); and °sametvā S II.25; III.139. - pp. abhisameta (q.v.). Abhisampanna {Abhisampanna} at PvA 144 is wrong reading for v. l. abhisapana (curse). Abhisamparāya {Abhisamparaya} [abhi + samparāya] future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll. phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) „what fate in the world-to-come‟, D II.91; Vin I.293; S IV.59, 63; V.346, 356, 369; DhA I.221. - evaṃgatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) "leading to such & such a revirn, such & such a future state" D I.16, 24, 32, 33 etc. (= evaṃ-vidhā paralokā ti DA I.108). -abhisamparāyaṃ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death A I.48; II.197; III.347; IV.104; Pv III.510 (= punabbhave PvA 200). - diṭṭhe cɔeva dhamme abhisamparāyað ca "in this world and in the world to come" A II.61; Pug 38; Miln 162; PvA 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha). - Used absolutely at PvA 122 (= fate). Abhisambujjhati [abhi + sambujjhati] to become wideawake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiṃ) D III.135; It 121. aor. °sambujjhi S V.433; PvA 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e. g. S. II.25; III.139. - ppr. med. °sambudhāna; pp. °sambuddha - Caus. °sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. °bodhita. {Abhisambujjhati} Abhisambujjhana {Abhisambujjhana} (nt.) = abhisambodhi J I.59. Abhisambuddha {Abhisambuddha} [pp. of abhisambujjhati] (a) (pass.) realised, perfectly understood D III.273; S IV.331; It 121. an° not understood M I.71, 92, 114, 163, 240. - (b) (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully-awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising, enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin I.1; D II.4; M I.6 (sammāsambodhiṃ); S I.68, 138, 139 & passim PvA 94, 99. Abhisambuddhatta {Abhisambuddhatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhisambuddha] thorough realisation, perfect understanding S V.433. Abhisambudhāna {Abhisambudhana} (adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh°] awaking, realising, knowing, understanding Dh 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho DhA I.337). Abhisambodhi {Abhisambodhi} (f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlightenment J I.14 (parama°). Cp. abhisambujjhana and (sammā-) sambodhi. Abhisambodhita (adj.) [pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati] awakened to the highest wisdom PvA 137 (Bhagavā). {Abhisambodhita} Abhisambhava {Abhisambhava} [fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur° hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S V.454; A V.202; Sn 429, 701; J V.269, VI.139, 439. Abhisambhavati {Abhisambhavati} [abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to", i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach, to bear A IV.241; Th 1, 436; Nd1 471, 485; J III.140; V.150, 178 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary 417; VI.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. °sambhossaṃ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Ps II.193. - ger. °bhutvā Th 1, 1057 & °bhavitvā Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). - aor. °bhosi D II.232. - grd. °bhavanīya D II.210; Ps II.193. - See also abhisambhuṇāti. Abhisambhuṇāti [considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh. Sk. freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable D I.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA I.268); Nd1 77, 312. {Abhisambhunati} Abhisambhū {Abhisambhu} (adj.) [fr. abhi + sam + bhū] getting, attaining (?) D II.255 (lomahaṃsa°). Abhisambhūta {Abhisambhuta} [pp. of abhisambhavati] attained, got Sdhp 556. Abhisammati [abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati] to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still J VI.420 (pp. abhisammanto for °śammento? Reading uncertain). {Abhisammati} Abhisara {Abhisara} [fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ to go] retinue J V.373. Abhisallekhika {Abhisallekhika} (adj) [abhi + sallekha + ika] austere, stern, only in f. °ā (scil. kathā) A III.117 sq.; IV.352, 357; V.67. Abhisavati {Abhisavati} (better °ssavati?) [abhi + savati, of sru] to flow towards or into J VI.359 (najjo Gangaṃ a.). Abhisasi {Abhisasi} aor. of abhisaṃsati (q. v.). Abhisādheti {Abhisadheti} [abhi + sādheti] to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain J VI.180; Miln 264. Abhisāpa {Abhisapa} [abhisapati] a curse, anathema S III.93 = It 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa: see vv. ll. under abhilāpa & cp. Brethren 376 n. 1.); Th 1,1118. Abhisāriyā {Abhisariya} (f.) [Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ] a woman who goes to meet her lover J III.139. Abhisāreti {Abhisareti} [abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati] to approach, to persecute J VI.377. Abhisiṃsati {Abhisimsati} [= abhisaṃsati, abhi + śaṃs. As to Sk. śaṃs > P. siṃs cp. āsiṃsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the "infernals", cp. im-precare], to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. °sīsi. v. l. °sisi. VvA 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi). Abhisiñcati {Abhisincati} [abhi + siñQ-ati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiðcati & ava°, Vedic only ā°] to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate A I.107 (Khattiyɔ ābhisekena) J I.399 (fig. °itvā ger. II.409 (id.); VI.161 (id.); Nd1 298; Miln 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiðci Bhagavā); PvA 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca . . .) - Pass. abhisiñcati Miln 359. - pp. abhisitta. - Caus. abhiseceti. 179 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Abhisitta {Abhisitta} [pp. of abhisiðcati, Sk. °sikta] 1. sprinkled over, anointed Sn 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Miln 336 (amatena lokaṃ Q.).- 2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin III.44; A I.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiyɔ ābhisekena a.); II.87 (v.l. for avasitta, also an°). Abhiseka {Abhiseka} [fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A I.107 (cp. abhisitta); II.87 read abhisekɔ -anabhisitto; J II.104, 352; DhA I.350; PvA 74. Cp. ābhisekika. Abhisecana {Abhisecana} (nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Th 2, 239 & 245 (udaka°). (b) consecration J II.353. Abhiseceti {Abhiseceti} [caus. of abhisiñcati] to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated J V.26. (imper. abhisecayassu). Abhisevanā {Abhisevana} (f.) [abhi + sevana fr. sev] pursuit, indulgence in (-°) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma°). Abhissara {Abhissara} (adj.) [abhi + issara] only neg. an° in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro "without a Lord or protector" M II.68 (v.l. °abhisaro); Ps I.126 (v.l. id.). Abhihaṃsati {Abhihamsati} [abhi + haṃsati fr. hṛṣ] 1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy S IV.190 (abhihaṭṭhuṃ); A V.350 (id.). - 2. (intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy S V.74 (rūpaṃ manāpaṃ); A IV.419 sq. (T. reads °hiṃsamāna jhānaṃ v.l. °hisamāna). Abhihaṭa {Abhihata} [pp. of abhiharati] brought, offered, presented, fetched D I.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ Pug A 231); DhA II.79. Abhihaṭṭhuṃ {Abhihatthum} [ger. of abhiharati]. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. I.224; A V.350, 352; S IV.190, V.53, 300. See note in Vinaya Texts II.440. Abhihata {Abhihata} [pp. of abhihanati] hit, struck PvA 55. Abhihanati {Abhihanati} (& °hanti) [abhi + han] 1. to strike, hit PvA 258. - 2. to overpower, kill, destroy J V.174 (inf. °hantu for T. hantuṃ). - pp. abhihata (q. v.). Abhiharati {Abhiharati} [abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati] - 1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch D III.170; J I.54, 157; III.537; IV.421; DA I.272. - 2. to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā°] A I.198. - Pass. abhihariyati VvA 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata VvA 172). - pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.). - Caus. abhihāreti 1. to cause to be brought, to gain, to acquire D II.188 = 192 = 195 Th 1, 637; J IV.421 (abhihārayaṃ with gloss abhibhārayiṃ). - 2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Sn 414 (Paṇḍavaṃ °hāresi = āruhi Sn A 383), 708 (vanantaṃ abhihāraye = vanaṃ gaccheyya SnA 495); Th 2, 146 (aor. °hārayiṃ; uyyānaṃ = upanesi ThA 138). - 3. to put on (mail), only in fut. abhihessati J IV.92 (kavacaṃ; C. expls. wrongly by °hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati). - 4. At J VI.27 kiṃ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaṃ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for °bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati. Pāli Text Society 180 Pāli-English Dictionary Abhihāra {Abhihara} [fr. abhiharati] bringing, offering, gift S I.82; Sn 710; J I.81 (āsanā). Abhihiṃsati {Abhihimsati} spurious reading at A IV.419 for °haṃsati (q.v.). Abhihiṃsanā {Abhihimsana} (& °ṃ) [for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaṃ] neighing Vv 6410 = VvA 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaṃsanā. Abhihīta {Abhihita} S I.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. „So enchanted was I by the Buddha's rune‟. The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet. Abhihesana {Abhihesana} see abhihiṃsanā. Abhihessati {Abhihessati} see abhihāreti see abhihāreti 3 & 4. Abhīta {Abhita} (adj.) [a + bhīta] fearless J VI.193. See also abhida 1. Abhīruka {Abhiruka} (adj.) [a + bhīru + ka] fearless DA I.250. Abhumma {Abhumma} (adj.) [a + bhumma] groundless, unfounded, unsubstantial, J V.178; VI.495. Abhūta {Abhuta} (adj.) [a + bhūta] not real, false, not true, usually as nt. °ṃ falsehood, lie, deceit Sn 387; It 37; instr. abhūtena falsely D I.161. -vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Sn 661 = Dh 306 = It 42; expld. as "ariyɔ ûpavāda-vasena alika -vādin" SnA 478; as "tucchena paraṃ abhācikkhanto" DhA III.477. Abhejja {Abhejja} (adj.) [grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya] not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be dissented, inalienable Sn 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi); J I.263 (varasūra . . .) III.318 (°rūpa of strong character = abhijja-hadaya); Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug A 212); Miln 160 (°parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (°parivāra). Amacca [Vedic amātya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc.-gen. of pron. 1st person, Sk. ahaṃ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m-ama), meaning "(those) of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellowworker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom-friend It 73; J VI. 512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv II.620 (a °- paricārikā welladvising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mittɔ āmaccā, friends & colleagues D III.189-90; S 190 = A II.67; PvA 29; or with ðātī (ðāti-sālohitā intimate friends & near-relations), mittāmaccā ðātisālohitā Vin II.126; Sn p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ðātī vā sālohitā vā A I.222; PvA 28; amaccā ðāti-sanghā ca A I.152. - 2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J I.262; PvA 73 (°kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba-kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D I.136 (= piya-sahāyaka DA I.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as "sesā āṇatti-karā"); Vin I.348; D III.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A I.142 (catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106-120. {Amacca} Pāli Text Society 181 Pāli-English Dictionary Amajja {Amajja} [etym.?] a bud J V.416 (= makula C.). Amajjapāyaka {Amajjapayaka} [a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J II.192. Amata1 {Amata} (nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a)-m(b)rot-o & a)mbrosi/a = Lat. im-mort-a(lis] 1. The drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛtavarṣa "rain of Ambrosia" Jtm 221). - 2. A general conception of a state of durability & nonchange, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re-death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn 225) "na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati", or at DhA I.228 "ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati". - Vin I.7 = M I.169 (apārutā tesaṃ amatassa dvārā); Vin I.39; D II.39, 217, 241; S I.32 (= rāgadosamoha-khayo), 193; III.2 (°ena abhisitta "sprinkled with A."); IV.94 (°assa dātā), 370; V.402 (°assa patti); A I.45 sq.; III.451; IV.455; V.226 sq., 256 sq. (°assa dātā); J I.4 (V.25); IV.378, 386; V.456 (°mahā-nibbāna); Sn 204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th 1, 310 (= agada antidote); It 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (°assa dvāra); Dh 114, 374 (= amata-mahā-nibbāna DhA IV.110); Miln 258 (°dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataṃ & nibbānaṃ amataṃ), 336 (amatena lokaṃ abhisiðci Bhagavā), 346 (dhammɔ āmataṃ); DA I.217 (°nibbāna); DhA I.87 (°ṃ pāyeti); Dāvs II.34; V.31; Sdhp 1, 209, 530, 571. ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S V. 41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A III.79, 304; IV.46 sq., 317, 387; V.105 sq.; Sn 635; Th 1, 179, 748; Dh 411 (= amataṃ nibbānaṃ ogahetvā DhA IV.186); Vv 5020. -osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln 247. -gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S I.123; IV.370; V.8; A III.329; Th 2, 222. -dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th 1, 336. -dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M I.171 = Vin I.8 (has °dudrabhi). -dvāra the door to Nibbāna M I.353; S I. 137 = Vin I.5; S II.43, 45, 58, 80; A V.346. -dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A III.356. -patta having attained to Ambrosia A IV.455. -pada the region or place of Ambrosia S I.212 ("Bourne Ambrosial" trsln. p. 274); II.280; Dh 21 (= amatassa adhigama-vupāyo vuttaṃ hoti DhA I.228). -phala ambrosial fruit S I.173 = Sn 80. -magga the path to Ambrosia DhA I.94. Amata2 {Amata} (adj.) [see amata1] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn 452 = S I.189 (amatā vācā = amata-sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: "ambrosial"), 960 (gacchato amataṃ disaṃ = nibbānaṃ, taṃ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It 46 = 62 (amataṃ dhātuṃ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu). Amatabbāka {Amatabbaka} (?) at VvA 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) "a precious stone of dark blue colour". Amattaññu {Amattannu} (adj.) [a + matta + °ðu = Sk. amātrajða] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate, immoderate It 23 (bhojanamhi); Dh 7 (id.); Pug 21. Amattaññutā {Amattannuta} (f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D III.213; It 23 (bhojane); Pug 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane); DhsA 402. Amatteyyatā {Amatteyyata} (f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one's mother D III.70, 71. Pāli Text Society 182 Pāli-English Dictionary Amanussa {Amanussa} [a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin I.277; D I. 116; S I.91, J I.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA I.13 (°pariggahīta haunted); PvA 216. - Cp. amānusa. Amanussika {Amanussika} (adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin I.202, 203 (°ābādha being possessed by a demon). Amama {Amama} (adj.) [a + mama, gen. of ahaṃ, pron. 1st person, lit. "not (saying: this is) of me"] not egotistical, unselfish Sn 220 (+ subbata), 777; J IV.372 (+ nirāsaya); VI.259 (= mamāyanataṇhā-rahita C.); Pv IV.134 (= mamaṃkāravirahita PvA 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn 469 = 494; Ud 32; J IV.303; VI.259. Amara {Amara} (adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th 1, 276; Sn 249 (= amara-bhāva-patthanatāya pavatta-kāya-kilesa SnA 291); J V.80 (= amaraṇa-sabhāva), 218; Dāvs V.62. Amaratta {Amaratta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J V.223 (= devatta C.). Amarā {Amara} (?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā-vikkhepika eel- wobbler, one who practices eel-wriggling, fr. °vikkhepa "oscillation like the a. fish". In English idiom "a man who sits on the fence" D I.24; M I.521; Ps I.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DA I.115 is "amarā nāma maccha-jāti, sā ummujjana-nimmujjan-ādi vasena . . gahetuṃ na sakkoti" etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern's expln. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up. Amala {Amala} (adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J V.4; Sdhp 246, 591, 596. Amassuka {Amassuka} (adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J II.185. Amājāta {Amajata} (adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. "at home", Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J I.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as "āma ahaṃ vo dāsī ti"!). See also āmāya. Amātika {Amatika} (adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J V.251. Amānusa {Amanusa} (adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non-human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv II.1220 (kāma); IV.157 (as n.); IV.36 (gandha, of Petas). - f. °ī Dh 373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA IV.110); Pv III.79 (ratti, love). Amāmaka {Amamaka} (adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] "not of me" i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA I.66. Amāya {Amaya} (adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn 941 (see Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vaðcanikā cariyā). Cp. next. Pāli Text Society 183 Pāli-English Dictionary Amāyāvin {Amayavin} (adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D III.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA I.69 (asaṭhena a.). Amitābha (adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255. {Amitabha} Amitta {Amitta} [Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D III.185; It 83; Sn 561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); Dh 66, 207; J VI.274 (°tāpana harassing the enemies). Amilātatā {Amilatata} (f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J V.156. Amu° {Amu°} base of demonstr. pron. "that", see asu. Amucchita {Amucchita} (adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D III.46; M I.369; S II.194. See ajjhopanna. Amutta {Amutta} (adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It 93 (mārabandhanā). Amutra {Amutra} (adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D I.4, 14, 184; It 99. Amūḷha {Amulha} -vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity" (Childers) Vin I.325 (IX.6, 2); II.81 (IV.5), 99 (IV.14, 27); IV.207, 351; M II.248. Amoha {Amoha} (adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D III.214; Pug 25. - The form amogha occurs at J VI.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of ratyā nights). Amba {Amba} [Derivation unknown. Not found in pre-Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non-Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D I.46, 53, 235; J II.105, 160; Vv 7910; Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187. -aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA III.207, 208. -ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795; VvA 305. -kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika VvA 147). -pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J II.104, 394; DhA III.207. -panta a border of mango trees VvA 198. -pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA III.207. -piṇḍi a bunch of mangoes J III.53; DhA III.207. -pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin II.109. -potaka a mango sprout DhA III.206 sq. -phala a m. fruit PvA 273, 274. -rukkha a m. tree DhA III.207; VvA 198. vana a m. grove or wood D II.126; J I.139; VvA 305. -siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797. Ambaka1 {Ambaka} (adj.) [= ambakā?] "womanish" (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā A III.349 (v. l. amma°) = V.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka° and gloss andhaka); V.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning). -maddarī see next. Ambaka2 {Ambaka} [demin. of amba] a little mango, only in °maddarī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A I.188. Pāli Text Society 184 Pāli-English Dictionary Ambakā {Ambaka} (f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used as a general endearing term for a woman Vin I.232 = D II.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin I.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā). Ambara1 {Ambara} (nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs I.38; IV.51; V.32. Note. At J V.390 we have to read muraja-ālambara, and not mura-jāla-ambara. Ambara2 {Ambara} (m.-nt.) [etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta-kambala. - The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak-ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta-kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt° = uttariya VvA 236). Ambala {Ambala} at J II.246 (°koṭṭhaka-āsana-sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala°?. Ambāṭaka {Ambataka} the hog-plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin II.17 (°vana); DA I.271 (°rukkha). Ambila {Ambila} (adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. - J I.242 (°anambila), 505 (loṇ°); II.394 (loṇ°); DA I.270 (°yāgu sour gruel); DhA II.85 (ati-ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta). Ambu {Ambu} nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra raincloud & Gr. a)fro/s scum: see P. abbha] water J V.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaṃ); Dāvs II.16. Cp. ambha. -cārin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 (= maccha Nd2 91). -sevāla a water-plant Th 1, 113. Ambuja {Ambuja} (m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water-born", i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S I.52. - 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 (= paduma Nd1 202); Dāvs V.46; Sdhp 360. Ambuda {Ambuda} [ambu + da fr. dā] "water-giver", a cloud Dāvs V.32; Sdhp 270, 275. Ambha & Ambho {Ambha} {Ambho} (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs IV.54. Ambhaka {Ambhaka} see ambaka. Ambho {Ambho} (indecl.) [fr. haṃ + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention = look here, hey! hallo! Vin III.73 (= ālapanɔ ādhivacana); J II.3; PvA 62. - 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D I.194; It 114; J I.174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln 48. Amma {Amma} (indecl.) [voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D I.93; J II.133; IV.1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA II.87; PvA 73, 74. - (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J I.292; PvA 63; DhA II.44; to a girl PvA 6; to a daughter DhA II.48; III.172. - Cp. ambakā. Pāli Text Society 185 Pāli-English Dictionary Ammaṇa {Ammana} (nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev. p. 72] 1. a trough J V.297; VI.381 (bhatt°). - 2. a certain measure of capacity J I.62; II.436 (taṇḍul°). - As °ka at J II.117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA I.84. Ammā {Amma} (f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mma/s mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy", nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amāre to love] mother J III.392 (gen. ammāya). - Voc. amma (see sep.). Amha & Amhan {Amha} {Amhan} (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama2] a stone Sn 443 (instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena). -maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 (= pāsāṇa° DhA III.151). Amha & Amhi {Amha} {Amhi} see atthi. Amhā {Amha} (f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A I.229. The C. says nothing. Amhākaṃ & Amhe {Amhakam} {Amhe} see ahaṃ. J I.174 (v. l.). Amho {Amho} = ambho J I.174 (v.I.). Aya1 {Aya} see ayo. Aya2 {Aya} (fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya-potthaka receipt book J I.2. - 2. inlet (for water, ayamukha) D I.74; A II. 166, IV.287. Ayaṃ {Ayam} (pron.) [Sk. ayaṃ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i)n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. "this, he"; f. ayaṃ; nt. idaṃ & imaṃ "this, it" etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as° (ayaṃ in nom. m. & f.) & im° (id° in nom. nt.). I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaṃ Sn 235; J I.168, 279; f. ayaṃ [Sk. iyaṃ] Kh VII.12; J II.128, 133; nt. idaṃ Sn 224; J III.53; & imaṃ Miln 46. acc. m. imaṃ J II.160; f. imaṃ [Sk. īmāṃ] Sn 545, 1002; J I.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J I.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh VII.12 (dat.); J II.158; f. imissā J I.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J I.290; DhA III.172. instr. m. nt. iminā J I.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn 137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J I.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Sn 185; Dh 220; & imasmā (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmiṃ Kh III.; J II. 159 & asmiṃ Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imissā PvA 79 (or imissaṃ?) & imāyaṃ (no ref.). - B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J I.221; Pv I.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 897 & imāyo Sn 1122; nt. imāni [= Sk.] Vin I.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J I.266; II.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 429; J II.160. gen. imesaṃ J II.160 & esaṃ [Sk. eṣāṃ] M II.86, & esānaṃ M II.154; III.259; f. also āsaṃ J I.302 (= etāsaṃ C.) & imāsaṃ. instr. m. nt imehi J VI.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J I.307. II. Meanings (1) ayaṃ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsld. by "before our eyes", "the present", "this here", "just this" (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiṃ kāye "in this our visible body" Kh III.; yathɔ āyaṃ padīpo "like this lamp here" Sn 235; ayaṃ dakkhiṇā dinnā "the gift which is just given before our eyes" Kh VII.12; ime pādā imaṃ sīsaṃ ayaṃ kāyo Pv I.83; asmiṃ loke paramhi ca "in this world & the other" Sn 634, asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ kathaṃ pecca na socati Sn 185; cp. Pāli Text Society 186 Pāli-English Dictionary also Dh 220, 410; J I.168; III.53. - (2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaṃ kiñci vittaṃ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaṃ "whatever . . . that" Sn 224; ime divase these days (just gone) J II.416; cp. also Vin I.84; Sn 429; J II.128, 160. - (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā "these are the two extremes, viz." Vin I.10; ayaṃ eva ariyo maggo "this then is the way" ibid.; cp. J I.280. - (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsld. by "like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon", e. g. imassa vānarindassa "of that fellow, the monkey" J I.279; cp. J I. 222, 307; II 160 (imesaṃ sattānaṃ "creatures like us"). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca "this and this", "so and so" J II.3; idañ cɔ idañ ca "such & such a thing" J II.5. - (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yāyaṃ taṇhā Vin I.10; yo ca ayaṃ . . . yo ca ayaṃ "I mean this . . . and I mean" ibid.; ye kecɔ ime Sn 381; yadidaṃ "i. e." Miln 25; yatha-y-idaṃ "in order that" (w. pot.) Sn 1092. See also seyyathīdaṃ. - (6) The gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsavaɔ ssa na vijjanti "his are no intoxications" Sn 1100; sīlaṃ assā bhindāpessāmi "I shall cause her character to be defamed" J I.290; assa bhariyā "his wife" J II.158 etc. freq. Ayana {Ayana} (nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. - (b) going to, goal S V.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA I.313; Dāvs IV.40. - See also eka°. Ayasa {Ayasa} (nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln 139, 272; Dāvs I.8. (n.-adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, wellborn, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J V.257; Vv 396. - f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J II.349 (v. l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady J V.138 (= ayye C.). Ayiraka {Ayiraka} = ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D III.190 (v. l. BB yy); J II.313. Ayo & Aya {Ayo} {Aya}(nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes-, cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār (= E. ore).] iron. The nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A III.16 = S V.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dh 240 (= ayato DhA III.344); Pv I.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). - Iron is the material used kat)e)coxh/n in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.). - In compn. both ayo° & aya° occur as bases. I. ayo°: -kapāla an iron pot A IV.70 (v. l. °guhala); Nd2 304 III. D 2 (of Niraya). -kūṭa an iron hammer PvA 284. -khīla an iron stake S V.444; M III.183 = Nd2 304 III. C; SnA 479. -guḷa an iron ball S V.283; Dh 308; It 43 = 90; Th 2, 489; DA I.84. -ghana an iron club Ud 93; VvA 20. -ghara an iron house J IV.492. -paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA 52. -pākāra an iron fence Pv I.1013 = Nd2 304 III. D 1. -maya made of iron Sn 669 (kūṭa); J IV.492 (nāvā); Pv I.1014 (bhūmi of N.); PvA 43, 52. -muggara an iron club PvA 55. -sanku an iron spike S IV.168; Sn 667. II. aya°: -kapāla = ayo° DhA I.148 (v. l. ayo°). -kāra a worker in iron Miln 331. kūṭa = ayo° J I.108; DhA II.69 (v. l.). -nangala an iron plough DhA I.223; III.67. -paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha°) J V.359. -paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA I.148. -sanghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA IV.104. -sūla an iron stake Sn 667; DhA I.148. Pāli Text Society 187 Pāli-English Dictionary Ayojjha {Ayojjha} (adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or subdued M II.24. Ayya {Ayya} (n.-adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master J III.167 = PvA 65; DhA I.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaṃ ayyo our worthy Sir); II.95. - (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin II.191; DhA II.94 sq. - The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. "Sie" and E. address "Esq.") like E. Sir, milord or simply "you" with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya J I.221, 279, 308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several J II.128, 415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin II.215; J III.126, 127. - f. ayyā lady, mistress M II.96 (= mother of a prince); DhA I.398; voc. ayye my lady J V.138. putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J III.167; (b) lord, master, "governor" J I.62 (by a servant); DA I.257 (= sāmi, opp. dāsi-putta); PvA 145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA II.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. XII., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica III.137 sq.) J VI.146. Ayyaka {Ayyaka} [demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu II.426; III.264) J III.155; IV.146; VI.196; Pv I.84; Miln 284. ayyaka-payyakā grandfather & great grandfather, forefathers, ancestors J I.2; PvA 107 (= pitāmahā). - f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin II.169; S I.97; J II.349 (here used for "lady", as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th 2, 159; Vism 379. Ara {Ara} [Vedic ara fr. ṛ, ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr. a(/rma chariot, also P. aṇṇava] the spoke of a wheel D II.17 (sahassɔ āra adj. with thousand spokes), cp. Miln 285; J IV.209; VI.261; Miln 238; DhA II.142; VvA 106 (in allegorical etym. of arahant = saṃsāra-cakkassa arānaṃ hatattā "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration") = PvA 7 (has saṃsāra-vaṭṭassa); VvA 277. Arakkhiya {Arakkhiya} (adj.) [a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati] not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) J II.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); III.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.). - (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin II.194 (Tathāgatā). Arakkheyya {Arakkheyya} (adj.) [in form = arakkhiya] only in nt. "that which does not need to be guarded against", what one does not need to heed, superfluous to beware of A IV.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a° āni). - 3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at D III.217 (but as ārakkh°, which is also given by Childers). Araghaṭṭa {Araghatta} [Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.] a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at CV V.16, 2 (Vin II.318). So read for T. arahatta-ghaṭi-yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts III.112. - The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ "a well-wheel". Araja {Araja} (adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S IV.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagataraja VvA 236). Arañña {Aranna} (nt.) [Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā, at home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Pāli Text Society 188 Pāli-English Dictionary Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from]. forest D I.71; M I.16; III.104; S I.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mahā); A I.60 (°vanapatthāni); II.252; III.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv 567; Ps I.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word. Thus the O. C. (Vin III.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83) says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin III.51; DA I.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J I.149, 215; II.138; V.70]. -āyatana a forest haunt Vin II.201; S II.269; J I.173; VvA 301; PvA 54, 78, 141. -kuṭikā a hut in the forest, a forest lodge S I.61; III.116; IV.116, 380; DhA IV.31 (as v. l.; T. has °kuṭi). -gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M I.323; A III.353; V.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. -ṭhāna a place in the forest J I.253. -vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J I.90. -vihāra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A III.343 sq. Araññaka & Āraññaka {Arannaka} (adj.) [arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) M I.214 (ā°), 469; III.89; S II.187, 202 (v. l. ā°), 208 sq.; 281; A III.343, 391; IV.291, 344, 435; V.10. See also āraððaka. Araññakatta {Arannakatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. araññaka] the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's practice, seclusion S II.202, 208 sq. See also āraððakatta. Araṇa1 {Arana} (adj.-n.) [Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ṛ, which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning "removed from, remote, far". See also araðða]. (adj.) living in solitude, far from the madding crowd M III.237 (°vibhanga-sutta); S I.44, 45; J I.340 (tittha°?). Araṇa2 {Arana} (nt.) [a + raṇa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraṇa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa). See saraṇa2. -vihārin (or araṇā-vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā°, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i. e. adv. far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2. As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i. e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syn. of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at PvA 230 expls. it as "mettā-vihārin", & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e. g. Divy 401; Av. Ś II.131 (q. v. for further ref. under note 3); M Vastu I.165; II.292. Cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person A I.24; Th 2, 358, 360; Pv IV.133 (= PvA 230); ThA 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336. Araṇi & Araṇī{Arani} (f.) [Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr. ṛ] wood for kindling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: °potaka small firewood, all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53; °sahita (nt.) same Vin II.217; J I. 212 (ī); V.46 (ī); DhA II.246; °mathana rubbing of firewood J VI.209. - Note. The reading at PvA 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa-vaṇṇa is surely a misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi). Arati {Arati} (f.) [a + rati] dislike, discontent, aversion Sn 270, 436, 642, 938; Dh 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaṃ DhA IV.225); Th 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi ThA 239); Sdhp 476. Aravinda {Aravinda} [ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.] a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs V.62. Araha {Araha} (adj.) (-°) [Vedic arha of arh] 1. worthy of, deserving, entitled to, worth Dh 195 (pūjā°); Pv II.86 (dakkhiṇā°); VvA 23 (daṇḍa° deserving punishment). Freq. in cpd. mahāraha Pāli Text Society 189 Pāli-English Dictionary [Sk. mahārgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear J I.50, 58; III.83, etc. (see mahant). - 2. fit for, apt for, suitable PvA 26 (paribhoga° fit for eating). Arahati {Arahati} [Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati] to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Sn 431, 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituṃ); J I.262; Dh 9, 10, 230; Pv III.66. - ppr. arahant (q. v.). Cp. also adj. araha. Arahatta1 (nt.) [abstr. formation fr. arahat°, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant IV.2] the state or condition of an Arahant, i. e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S IV.151) final & absolute emancipation, Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy ThA 64 (Selā); PvA 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but A III.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp. D II.93 = S V.360, and the references in Dial. III.5 n4). - Arahattaṃ is defined at S IV.252 as rāga-kkhaya, dosa°, moha°. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant II.). Vin II.254; D III.10, 11, 255; A III.34, 421, 430; V.209; Pug 73; Nett 15, 82; DA I.180, 188, 191; DhA II 95; IV.193; PvA 14. - Phrases: arahattaṃ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin II.74; D I.229; arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in aor. pāpuṇi) J II.229 ThA 64; DhA II.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); PvA 53, 54, 61, 233 & freq. elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna D III.255; A I.120; IV.292 sq., 372 sq. -gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship DhA I.8. -patta (& patti) one who has attained Ar. S I.196; V.273; A II.157; III.376; IV.235. -phala the fruit of Ar. Vin I.39, 41, 293; III.93; D III.227, 277; S III.168; V.44; A I.23, 45; III.272; IV.276; Dhs 1017; Vbh 326. magga the Path of Ar. S I.78; A III.391; DA I.224. -vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19. {Arahatta} Arahatta2 {Arahatta} in °ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa. Arahant {Arahant} (adj.-n.) [Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy]. Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English „His Worship‟; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. III.3-6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t. for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna). I. Cases nom. sg. arahaṃ Vin I.9; D I.49; M I.245, 280; S I.169; see also formula C. under II., & arahā Vin I.8, 25, 26; II.110, 161; D III.255; It 95; Kh IV.; gen. arahato S IV.175; Sn 590; instr. arahatā S III.168; DA I.43; acc. arahantaṃ D III.10; Dh 420; Sn 644; Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212. - nom. pl. arahanto Vin I.19; IV.112; S I.78, 235; II.220; IV.123; gen. arahataṃ Vin III.1; S I.214; Sn 186; It 112; Pv I.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence. II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq. occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāya "destroyed is (re-) birth, lived is a chaste life, (of a student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin I.14, 35, 183; D I.84, 177, 203; M I.139; II.39; S I. 140; II.51, 82, 95, 120, 245; III.21, 45, 55, 68, 71, 90, 94, 195, 223; IV.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; V.72, 90, 144, 222; A I.165; II.211; III.93; IV.88, 179, 302; V.155, 162; Sn p. 16; Pug 61, etc. - B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto „alone, secluded, earnest, zealous, master of himself‟ D I.177; II.153 & continued with A: S I.140, 161; II.21; III.36, 74; IV.64; V.144, 166; A I.282; II.249; III.70, 217, 301, 376; IV. 235. - C. arahaṃ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta-sadattho parikkhīṇa-bhava-saññojano sammad-añðā vimutto: D III.83, 97; M I.4, 235; S I.71; III.161, 193; Pāli Text Society 190 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.125; V.145, 205, 273, 302; A I.144; III.359, 376; IV.362, 369, 371 sq., It 38. - D. ðāṇañ ca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi akuppā me ceto-vimutti ayaṃ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo "there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: S II.171; III.28; IV.8; V.204; A I.259; IV.56, 305, 448. III. Other passages (selected) Vin I.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaṃ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; II. 110, 161; III.1; IV.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); D I.49 (Bhagavā arahaṃ), 144; III.10, 255: M I.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaṃ karoti: arahaṃ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; S I.9, 26, 50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175, 178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); III. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; IV.123, 175, 260, 393; V.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; A I.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109, 266; Iī.134; III.376, 391, 439; IV.364, 394; V.120; Sn 186, 590, 644, 1003; It 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh IV. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see KhA 88); Vv 212; I.217; Dh 164, 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps II.3, 19, 194, 203 sq.; Pug 37, 73; Vbh 324, 336, 422; Pv I.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; IV.132. IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta° in °ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; °ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin I.89, 136, 168, 320; °magga (arahatta°?) the path of an A.: D II 144. - (2) arahat° in (arahad-)dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: J I.65. V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin, khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. II.1-3; III.6. For riddles or word-play on the form arahant see M I.280; A IV.145; DA I.146 = VvA 105, 6 = PvA 7; DhA IV.228; DhsA 349. Arāti {Arati} [a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti] an enemy Dāvs IV.1. Ari {Ari} [Ved. ari; fr. ṛ] an enemy. - The word is used in exegesis & word expln, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant v.); of bhūri Ps II.197. - Otherwise in late language only, e. g. Sdhp 493 (°bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti. Ariñcamāna {Arincamana} [ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati] not leaving behind, not giving up, i. e. pursuing earnestly Sn 69 (jhānaṃ hamana SnA 123, cp. Nd2 94). Ariṭṭha1 {Arittha} (adj.) [a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt] unhurt Sdhp 279. Ariṭṭha2 {Arittha} [Sk. ariṣṭa, N. of a tree] a kind of spirituous liquor Vin IV.110. Ariṭṭhaka {Aritthaka} (adj.) [fr. ariṭṭha] (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (°ṃ ðāṇaṃ). - (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of "soap-berry plant"?] in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi S I.104 "a great mass of soap stone" (cp. Rh. D. in J. R. A. S. 1895, 893 sq.), "a shaped block of steatite" (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130). Aritta (nt.) [Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ to move); cf. Gr. e)re/ssw to row, wan = E. row] a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyārittaṃ (phiy°) oar & rudder, thus at S I.103 (T. piya°, v. l. phiya°); A II.201 (piya°); J IV.164 (T. piya°, v.l. phiya°); Sn 321 (piya +; SnA 330 phiya = dabbipadara, aritta = veḷudaṇḍa). DhsA 149. {Aritta} Arindama {Arindama} Sk. arindama, ariṃ + dama of dam] a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv IV.315 (= arīnaṃ damanasīla PvA 251); Sdhp 276. Pāli Text Society 191 Pāli-English Dictionary Aribhāseti {Aribhaseti} [= ariṃ bhāseti] to denounce, lit. to call an enemy J IV.285. Correct to Pari° according to Fausböll (J V. corr.) Ariya {Ariya} (adj.-n.) [Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya] 1. (racial) Aryan D II.87. - 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth. - 3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved. Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian. Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each]. - (adj.): D I.70 = (°ena sīlakkhan&dcb;hena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); III.64 (cakkavatti-vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); M I.139 (pannaddhaja); II.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage); S II.273 (tuṇhībhāva); IV.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma); V.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ðāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paððā-cakkhu); A I.71 (parisā); II.36 (ðāya); III.451 (ðāṇa); IV.153 (tuṇhībhāva); V.206 (sīlakkhandha); It 35 (paððā), 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Sn 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo SnA 216); Dh 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps II.212 (iddhi). -alamariya fully or thoroughly good D I.163 = III.82 = A IV.363; nālamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid. - (m.) Vin I.197 (na ramati pāpe); D I.37 = (yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna), 245; III.111 (°ānaṃ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); M I.17, 280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaṃ); S I.225 (°ānaṃ upavādaka); II.123 (id.); IV.53 (°assa vinayo), 95 (id.); A I.256 (°ānaṃ upavādaka); III.19, 252 (id.); IV.145 (dele! see arīhatatta); V.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; It 21, 108; Dh 22, 164, 207; J III.354 = Miln 230; M I.7, Q35 (ariyānaṃ adassāvin: "not recognising the Noble Ones") PvA 26, 146; DhA II.99; Sdhp 444 (°ānaṃ vaṃsa). - anariya (adj. & n.) not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low, common, uncultured A I.81; Sn 664 (= asappurisa SnA 479; DhsA 353); J II.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.); V.48 (°rūpa shameless), 87; DhA IV.3. - See also ðāṇa, magga, sacca, sāvaka. -āvakāsa appearing noble J V.87. - uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) A I.205 sq., 212. - kanta loved by the Best D III.227. - gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies J VI.50 (= brāhmaṇa-gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyācārā ahesuṃ, tena te evam āha C.). - garahin casting blame on the righteous Sn 660. - citta a noble heart. - traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs V.92. - dasa having the ideal (or best) belief It 93 = 94. - dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha° sevenfold, viz. saddhā°, sīla°, hiri°, ottappa°, suta°, cāga°, paððā° "faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self-denial, wisdom" ThA 240; VvA 113; DA II.34. - dhamma the national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaṃ eso dhammo Nd1 71, 72) M I.1, 7, 135; A II.69; V.145 sq., 241, 274; Sn 783; Dhs 1003. - puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps I.167; Vin V.117; ThA 206. - magga the Aryan Path. - vaṃsa the (fourfold) noble family, i. e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites D III.224 = A II.27 = Ps I.84 = Nd2 141; cp. A III.146. - vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct J III.443. - vatā at Th 1, 334 should be read °vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac) "speaking noble words": - vāsa the most excellent state of mind, habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at D III.269, 291 = A V.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict). - vihāra the best practice S V.326. - vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī-kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4-7. See D III.232; A II.246; Vin V.125. - sangha the communion of the Nobles ones PvA 1. - sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, D I.189, II.90, 304 sq.; III 277; M I.62, 184; III.248; S V.415 sq. = Vin I.10, 230. It 17; Sn 229, 230, 267; Dh 190; DhA III.246; KhA 81, 151, 185, 187; ThA 178, 282, 291; VvA 73. sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaṃ santike sutattā a. SnA 166). M I.8, 46, 91, 181, 323; II.262; III.134, 228, 272; It 75; Sn 90; Miln 339; DhA I.5, (opp. putthujjana). - sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue D I.115 (= sīlaṃ ariyaṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ DA I.286); M II.167. When the commentators, many centuries afterwards, began to write Pali in S. Pāli Text Society 192 Pāli-English Dictionary India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapāla especially was probably a nonAryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA I.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at J V.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya-rūpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non-Aryan. (cp „frank‟ in English). Arīhatatta {Arihatatta} in phrase "arīhatta ariyo hoti" at A IV.145 is wrong reading for arīnaṃ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence "ārakattā kilesānaṃ arīnaṃ hatattā . . . arahā hoti", and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS). Aru {Aru} (nt.) [Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: °kāya a heap of sores M II.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (= navannaṃ vaṇamukhānaṃ vasena arubhūta kāya DhA III.109 = VvA 77); °gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M I.506 (+ pakka-gatta); Miln 357 (id); °pakka decaying with sores S IV.198 (°āni gattāni); °bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds VvA 77 = DhA III.109. Aruka {Aruka} = aru; only in cpd. °ûpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) A I.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A 212 as purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto "an old wound" i. e. continually breaking open). Aruṇa {Aruna} [Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av. auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr. e)rudro/s, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin II.68; IV.245; J II.154; V.403; VI.330; Dpvs I.56; DA I.30. - a. uggacchati the sun rises J I.108; VvA 75, & see cpds. -ugga sunrise Vin IV.272; S V.29, 78, 101, 442 (at all Saṃyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49. -uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin III.196, 204, 264; IV.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA I.165; II.6; PvA 109. -utu the occasion of the sun (-rise) DhA I.165. -vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA I 1.3 = PvA 216. -sadisa (vaṇṇa) like the sun (in colour) PvA 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa). Arubheda {Arubheda} the Rigveda ThA 206. Arūpa {Arupa} (adj.) [a + rūpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D I.195 sq.; III.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rūpa. -āvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281-1285; Ps I.83 sq., 101. -kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Miln 317 (devā). ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless It 62. -taṇhā "thirst" for the Formless D III.216. -dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa°, arūpa°, nirodha°; see dhātu) D III.215, 275; It 45. -bhava formless existence D III.216. -loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. -saññin not having the idea of form D II.110; III.260; Exp. I.252. Arūpin {Arupin} (adj.) [a + rūpin] = arūpa; D I.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA I.119), 195; III.111, 139; It 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā). Pāli Text Society 193 Pāli-English Dictionary Are {Are} indecl.) [onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. lale/w, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā, Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā] exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo! I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) J I.225 (dāsiputta-ceṭaka); IV.391 (duṭṭha-caṇḍāla); DA I.265 (= re); VvA 68 (dubbinī), 217 ("how in the world"). Ala1 {Ala} freq. spelling for aḷa. Ala2 {Ala} (adj.) [alaṃ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M I.455; J II.326 = IV.471. Alaṃ {Alam} (indecl.) [Vedic araṃ. In meaning 1. alaṃ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araṃ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.) suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaṃ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaṃ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat. or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as "fit for, proper" (= yuttaṃ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaṃ, e.g. alam eva kātuṃ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat.) it may also be compd. with Vedic araṃ c. dat. - (a) (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). - (b.) (°-) see cpds. - (c.) with dat. or infin.: alaṃ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M I.130 (opp. nālaṃ not at all); alaṃ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin II.250; alaṃ vacanāya one says rightly S II.18; alaṃ hitāya untold happiness DhA II.41. - ito ce pi so bhavaṃ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . . . upasankamituṃ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D I.117 (expld. at DA I.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuṃ kalyāṇaṃ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv II.923 (= yuttaṃ PvA 122); alaṃ puððāni kātave "come, let us do meritorious works" Vv 4415 (= yuttaṃ VvA 191). - 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). - (a) (abs.) enough: nālaṃ thutuṃ it is not enough to praise Sn 217; te pi na honti me alaṃ they are not enough for me Pv I.63. - (b) with voc.: alaṃ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo "look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community" Vin II.198; alaṃ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S III.120. - (c) enough of (with instr.): alaṃ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA II.34. -attha (adj.) "quite the thing", truly good, very profitable, useful D II.231; M II.69 (so read for alamatta); A II.180; Th 1, 252; J I.401 (so read for °atta). -ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in °ðāṇa-dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya-jðāna-darśana Lal V.309, 509] Vin I.9; A III.64, 430; V.88; J I.389 (cp. ariya). -kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin III.187. -pateyya: see the latter. -vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with "alaṃ" (i. e. "fie"), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin III.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh's. expln.). -samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It 107. -sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A III.81. -sāṭaka "curse-coat", one who curses his waist-coat (alaṃ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over-eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at DhA IV.16 = DhsA 404. Pāli Text Society 194 Pāli-English Dictionary Alakkhika {Alakkhika} (& īka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin III.23; J III.259. Alakkhī {Alakkhi} (f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th 1, 1123. Alagadda {Alagadda} [Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a watersnake] a kind of snake M I.133 = DA I.21; DhA IV. 132 (°camma, so read for T. alla-camma, vv. ll. alanda° & alandu°). Alagga {Alagga} (adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA III.298. Alaggana {Alaggana} (nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA I.180. Alaṃkata {Alamkata} [pp. of alankaroti] 1. "made too much", made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh 142 (= vatthābharaṇa-paṭimaṇḍita DhA III.83); Pv II.36; Vv 11; J III.392; IV.60. - 2. "done enough" (see alaṃ, use with instr.), only neg. analankata in meaning "insatiate" S I.15 (kāmesu). Alaṃkaraṇa {Alamkarana} (nt.) [alaṃ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J I.60. Alaṃkaraṇaka {Alamkaranaka} (adj.) [fr. alankaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA I.410. Alaṃkaroti {Alamkaroti} [alaṃ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J I.60; III.189; VI. 368. ger. °karitvā DhA I.410; PvA 74. - pp. alankata. Caus. alankārāpeti to cause to be adorned J I.52. Alaṃkāra {Alamkara} [fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] "getting up" i. e. fitting ont, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, oQnaments D III.190; A III.239; 263 sq.; J VI.368; PvA 23, 46, 70 (-° adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249. Alattaka {Alattaka} [Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J IV.114 (°pāṭala); DhA II.174; IV.197. Alanda & Alandu {Alanda} {Alandu} see alagadda. Alamba {Alamba} (adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J V.302; VI.3 (°tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman's breasts cp. alambɔ ordhva-stanī Suśruta I.371). Alasa {Alasa} (adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S I.44, 217; Sn 96 (= jāti-alaso SnA 170); J IV.30; Dh 280 (= mahā-alaso DhA III.410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S I.44; D III.190 (dakkha +); Vin IV.211; Nd2 141 (id.). Alasatā {Alasata} (f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA 229. Alassa {Alassa} (nt.) at S I.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya. Pāli Text Society 195 Pāli-English Dictionary Alāta {Alata} (nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A II.95 (chava° a burning corpse, see chava); J I.68; Pug 36; DhA III.442. Alāpu {Alapu} (nt.) [= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216] a gourd, pumpkin Dh 149 (= DhA III.112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu). Alābu {Alabu} [Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris M I.80 (tittaka°), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.); DhsA 405. - See also alāpu. Alābhaka {Alabhaka} [a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin III.77. Alālā {Alala} (indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] "not saying lā lā" i. e. not babbling, not dumb, in °mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 (= aneḷamūga of Sn 70). Alika {Alika} (adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S I.189; J III.198; VI.361; Miln 26, 99. - nt. °ṃ a lie, falsehood Dh 264. -vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh 223 = VvA 69 (has alīka°); J II.4; SnA 478 (for abhūta-vādin Sn 661). Alīnatā {Alinata} (f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J I.366. Aluḷita {Alulita} (adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln 383. Aloṇika {Alonika} (adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J III.409; VvA 184. Aloma {Aloma} (adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J VI.457. Alola (adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn 65 (= nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118). {Alola} Alla {Alla} (adj.) (only °-) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a)/rdw moisten, a)/rda dirt] - 1. moist, wet M III.94 (°mattikā-puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). - 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.°āvalepana see adda3; °kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A V.234 = 249; °gomaya fresh dung A V.234; DhA I.377; °camma living skin Vism 195; °tiṇa fresh grass DA I.77; PvA 40; °dārūni green sticks J I.318; °madhu fresh honey DhA II.197; °maṃsa-sarīra a body of living flesh DhA II.51 = IV.166; °rasa fresh-tasting DhA II.155; °rohitamaccha fresh fish J III.333. - 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, °kesa with clean hair PvA 82 (sīsaṃ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, 91; DhA IV.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J III.425. °pāṇi with clean hand Pv II.99 (= dhotapāṇi PvA 116). [For analla-gatta at S I.183 better read, with ibid 169, an-allīna-gatta. For allacamma at DhA IV.132 alagadda-camma, with the v.l., is preferable]. Allāpa {Allapa} [Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. °sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J I.189; Miln 15; VvA 96; PvA 86. Allika {Allika} (?) [either from alla = allikaṃ nt. in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (-°), or from allīyati = alliyakaṃ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is Pāli Text Society 196 Pāli-English Dictionary doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma-) sukhɔ allikɔānuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin I.10; D III.113, 130; S IV.330; V.421; Nett 110. Allīna {Allina} [pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M I.80; A V.187; Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). - (b.) soiled by (-°), dirtied A II.201. anallīna "to which nothing sticks", i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S I.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya. Allīyati {Alliyati} [ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. - (a) lit. kesā sīsaṃ allīyiṃsu the hair stuck to the head J I.64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J I.273. - (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S III.190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S III.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M I.260 T. dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati "to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of" (c. acc.) at M I.260 & S III.190. - J IV.5; V.154 (allīyituṃ, v.l. illīyituṃ); DhsA 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna - Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu III.144; pp. allīpita ibid. I.311; III.408; pass. allīpīyate III.127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) J II.325 (hatthiṃ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); IV.392 (sīsena sīsaṃ alliyāpetvā). Aḷa {Ala} [etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M I.234; S I.123; J I.223, 505 (°chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala°); II.342; III.295; - 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in °chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin I.91. Aḷāra {Alara} (adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expld. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched". °akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J I.306 (= visāla-netta C.); °pamha with thick eye-lashes Vv 357 (= bahala-saṃyatapakhuma C.; v.l. °pamukha); °bhamuka having thick eyebrows or °lashes J VI.503 (so read for °pamukha; C. expls by visāl-akkhigaṇḍa). Cp. āḷāra. Aḷhaka {Alhaka} in udakɔ aḷhaka in udakɔ aḷhaka VvA 155 read āḷhaka. Ava° {Ava°} (prefix) I. Relation between ava & o. Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed - that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards. Okaḍḍhati, okappati, okappanā, okassati, okāra, okantati, okkamati, ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples. The difference in many cases has given rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash; Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2). - A. The old Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa (-°) > okāsa (°-); avacara > ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna. - B. 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later) is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas) are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati, okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati. - (1) The Pāli form (o°) shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava°). See the foll.: avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence; avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance; avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued; avacara sphere of Pāli Text Society 197 Pāli-English Dictionary motion: ocaraka spy; avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love; avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal. (2) In certain secondary verb-formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o° is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali. Among these formations are Deminutives in °ka usually; the Gerund & the Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout. II. Ava as prefix. [P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o; Av. ava; Lat. au- (aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.); Obg. u, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under au]. - Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp. ut°, see e. g. uccāvaca high & low, and below III. c), expld. as heṭṭhā (DhA IV.54 under avaṃ) or adho (ibid. 153; SnA 290). (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e. g. avasūra sun-down; adv. avaṃ (q. v., opp. uddhaṃ). - (a) lit. away from, off: ava-kantati to cut off; °gaṇa away from the crowd; °chindati cut off; °yīyati fall off; °bhāsati shine out, effulge; °muðcati take off; °siṭṭha left over. - down, out, over: °kirati pour down or out over; °khitta thrown down; °gacchati go down; °gāheti dip down; °tarati descend; °patita fallen down; °sajjati emit; °siðcati pour out over; °sīdati sink down. - (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de- in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava-jānāti, °bhūta, °mānita, °vajja, °hasati. away from, i. e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a° (an°), e. g. in avajaya (= ajaya), °jāta, °mangala (= a°), °pakkhin, °patta. Affinities of ava. - (a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa° and ava°, the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, °karoti, °khalita, °anga, ottappa, avattha, °nīta, °dāna, °pivati, °rundhati, °lekhati, °vadati, °varaka, °sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, °hita, avāpurīyati, avekkhati. - (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi II. b and ava II. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: °kankhati, °kamati, °kiṇṇa, °khipati, °maddati, °rata, °lambati, °lekheti, °lepana, °siñcati. - (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above II.2). Among the freq. contrast-pairs showing the two, like E. up & down, are the foll. ukkaṃsāvakaṃsa, uggaman-oggamana, uccāvaca, ullangheti-olangheti, ullittāvalitta; ogilituṃuggilituṃ, onaman-unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddāvacchidda and ava° in contrast with vi° in olambavilamba, olugga-vilugga. Avaṃ {Avam} (adv.) [Vedic avāk & avāṃ] the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (avaṃ sari he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp. uddhaṃ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avaṃsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaṃpāda feet up), a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S I.48; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā = adhogata-sīsā SnA 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaṃpāda); Pv IV.146; J I.233 (+ uddhapāda); IV.103 (nirayaṃ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaṃsiro); Nd1 404 (uddhaṃpāda +); DhA IV.153 (gloss adhosira). - On avaṃ° cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati. Avakaṃsa {Avakamsa} [fr. ava-karṣati; on ṃs: *rṣ cp. haṃsati: harṣati] dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaṃsāvak° lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering, rise & fall D I.54. Avakankhati {Avakankhati} (-°) [ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu-kānkṣati] to wish for, strive after S IV.57 (n'); J IV.371 (n'); V 340 (n'), 348 (n'= na pattheti C). 198 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Avakaḍḍhati {Avakaddhati} [ava + kaḍḍhati, cp. avakassati & apakassati] Nett 4 (avakaḍḍhayitvā). Pass. avakaḍḍhati J IV.415 (hadayaṃ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakaḍḍhīyati C; v.l. avakassati). - pp. avakaḍḍhita. Avakaḍḍhita {Avakaddhita} [pp. of avakaḍḍhati] pulled down, dragged away DhA III.195. Avakata {Avakata} = apakata, v.l. at It 89. Avakanta [for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2] cut, cut open, cut off J IV.251 (galakɔ āvakantaṃ). Avakantati & Okantati (okk°) [cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve - (ava:) J IV.155. - pp. avakanta & avakantita. {Avakantati} {Okantati} Avakantita {Avakantita} [pp. of avakantati] cut out PvA 213. Avakappanā & Okappanā {Avakappana} {Okappana} (f.) [ava + kappanā] preparation, fixing up, esp. harnessing J VI.408. Avakaroti {Avakaroti} [Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa°] "to put down", to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin. - pp. avakata (q. v.). - See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2. Avakassati & Okassati {Avakassati} {Okassati} [cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove. - A V.74 = Vin II.204 (+ vavakassati). Avakārakaṃ {Avakarakam} (adv.) [fr. avakāra] throwing away, scattering about Vin II.214. Avakārin {Avakarin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. avakāra] despising, degrading, neglecting Vbh 393 sq. (an°). Avakāsa & Okāsa [ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa] 1. "appearance": akkhuddāvakāso dassanāya not little (or inferior) to behold (of appearance) D I.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan J V.87; katāvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229. - 2. "opportunity": kata° given leave D I.276 Sn 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Miln 383. - anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaṃ etaṃ anavakāso Vin II.199; A I.26; V.169; Pug 11, 12; PvA 28. {Avakasa} {Okasa} Avakirati & Okirati {Avakirati} {Okirati} [ava + kirati] 1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri PvA 86; ger. °kiritvā J V.144. - 2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. °kari; VvA 126 expls by chaḍḍesi vināsesi). - Pass. avakirīyati Pv III.110 (= chaḍḍīyati PvA 174); grd. °kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp. okiṇṇa. Avakiriya {Avakiriya} [grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J V.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā). Avakujja {Avakujja} (adj.) [ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja M Vastu I.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; II.412] face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) J I.13 = Bu II.52; J V.295; Pāli Text Society 199 Pāli-English Dictionary VI.40; Pv IV.108; PvA 178. -pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) A I.130; Pug 31 (= adhomukha-pañña Pug A 214). Avakkanta {Avakkanta} (-°) [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by (instr.) S III.69 (dukkha°, sukha° and an°). Avakkanti {Avakkanti} (f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth S II.66 (nāmarūpassa); III.46 (paðcannaṃ indriyānaṃ); Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa). Avakkama {Avakkama} [fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J V.330 (gabbhassa). Avakkamati & Okkamati {Avakkamati} {Okkamati} [ava + kamati fr. kram] to approach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in, only in ger. (poetically) avakamma J III.480 (v.l. apa°). Avakkāra {Avakkara} [Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaṃ + karoti] throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. °pātī a bowl for refuse, slop basin, ash-bin Vin I.157, 352; II.216; M I.207; DhA I.305. Avakkhalita [pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal] washed off, taken away from, detracted DA I.66 (v.l. apa°). {Avakkhalita} Avakkhitta & Okkhitta {Avakkhitta} {Okkhitta} [pp. of avakkhipati] 1. [= Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected. (ava:) M I.296 (ujjhita +); DA I.281 (an°), 289 (pinḍa); PvA 174 (piṇḍa). 2. [= Sk. utkṣipta?] thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sedɔ āvakkhitta gained by sweat A II.67; III.45. Avakkhipati & Okkhipati {Avakkhipati} {Okkhipati} [ava + khipati; cp. Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of "to keep under, to restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. °khipi DA I.268 (bhusaṃ, v. l. avakkhasi). Avakkhipana {Avakkhipana} (nt.) [fr. avakkhipati] throwing down, putting down J I.163. Avagacchati {Avagacchati} [ava + gacchati] to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) PvA 87. Avagaṇḍa {Avaganda} (-kāraka) (adj.) [ava + gaṇḍa°] "making a swelling", i. e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks, full (when eating); only nt. °ṃ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin II.214; IV.196. Avagata {Avagata} [pp. of avagacchati] at PvA 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is "known, understood" (aððāta Pv IV.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB). Avagāhati & Ogāhati {Avagahati} {Ogahati} [ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiṃ); Sdhp 370, 383. Pāli Text Society 200 Pāli-English Dictionary Avaguṇṭhana {Avagunthana} (adj.) (-°) [fr. oguṇṭheti] covering Sdhp 314. Avaggaha {Avaggaha} [Sk. avagraha] hindrance, impediment, used at DA I.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā). Avanga {Avanga} see apanga. Avaca {Avaca} (adj.) [der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca > ut] low, only in combn. uccāvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38. Avacana {Avacana} (nt.) [a + vacana] "non-word", i. e. the wrong word or expression J I.410. Avacara {Avacara} (-°) (n.-adj.) [ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurāvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm 210] (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in D I.206 (santika° one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in A II.189 (atakka°); IV.314 (parisā°); J I.60 (tāḷa° one conversant with music, a musician, see tāḷa1); II.95 (sangāma°); Miln 44 (id. and yoga°). - (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm, plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmāvacara rupāvacara arūpāvacara or the 3 realms of sense-desires, form and non-form: kāma° D I.34 (°deva); Dhs 431 (as adj.); rūpa° Pug 37; arūpa° Pug 38; Ps I.83, 84, 101; Dhs A 387; PvA 138, 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, 1278. Avacaraka & Ocaraka {Avacaraka} {Ocaraka} (adj.-n.) [fr. avacara] 1. only in cpd. kāmāvacarika as adj. to kāmāvacara, belonging to the sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254. - 2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Th 1, 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127). Avacaraṇa {Avacarana} (nt.) [fr. avacarati 1] being familiar with, dealing with, occupation J II.95. Avacuttha {Avacuttha} 2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaṃ avacuttha do not speak thus J VI.72; DhA IV.228. Avacchidda {Avacchidda} (-°) (adj.) [ava + chidda] perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddāvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes J III.491; DhA I.122. 284, 319. Cp. chidda-vicchidda. Avacchedaka (-°) (adj) [ava + cheda + ka] cutting off, as nt. °ṃ adv. in phrase kabaḷāvacchedakaṃ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin II.214; IV.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin I. 259. {Avacchedaka} Avajaya {Avajaya} [ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA II.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya). Avajāta {Avajata} (adj.) [ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage] low-born, of low or base birth, fig. of low character (opp. abhijāta) Sn 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta SnA 479); It 63; Miln 359. Avajānāti {Avajanati} [ava + jðā] 1. to deny Vin II.85; A III.164 = Pug 65. - 2. (later) to despise DhA III.16; PvA 175 (grd. °jānitabba) - Of short stem-form ðā are found the foll: grd. avaððeyya PvA 175, and with o°: grd. oðātabba PvA 195; pp. avaðāta, besides avaððāta. Pāli Text Society 201 Pāli-English Dictionary Avajīyati {Avajiyati} [ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate] to be diminished, to be lost, be undone J I.313 (jitaṃ a; v.l. avajījy°); Dh 179 (jitaṃ a = dujjitaṃ hoti DhA III.197). Avajja {Avajja} (adj.) [Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj, thus meaning "not to be shunned, not forbidden". This interpretn is justified by context of Dh 318, 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava-vadya) in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati] low, inferior, blamable, bad, deprecable Dh 318, 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless D I.70 (= anindita DA I.183); A II.26 = It 102; Sn 47 (°bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita KhA 140): Ps II.116, 170; Pug 30, 41, 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja. Avajjatā {Avajjata} (f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an° blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349. Avajjha {Avajjha} (adj.) [grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh] not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Sn 288; J V.69; VI.132. Avañcana {Avancana} (adj.) [a + vañcana from vañc] not (even) tottering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet J I.214 = Cp III.910. Avañña {Avanna} (adj.) [to avaððā] despised, despicable Pv III.113 (= avaððeyya avajānitabba PvA 175). Avaññatti {Avannatti} (f.) [ava + ðatti = Sk. *avajðapti, fr. ava + jðā] only as neg. an° the fact of not being despised, inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance It 72; Vbh 350, 356; °kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed, unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised A II.240; IV.1 sq. Avaññā {Avanna} (f.) [Sk. avajðā, fr. ava + jðā] contempt, disregard, disrespect J I.257 (°ya). Avaññāta {Avannata} (adj.) [pp. of avajānāti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an°); Sdhp 88, 90. Avaṭaṃsaka {Avatamsaka} (= vaṭ°) see Vin Texts II.347. Avaṭṭhāna {Avatthana} (nt.) [Sk. avasthāna] position, standing place J I.508; PvA 286. Avaṭṭhita {Avatthita} (ad.) [Sk. avasthita, ava + thita] "standing down" = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Th 1, 1140. Usually neg. an° unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dh 38 (°citta; cp. DhA I.308 cittaṃ thāvaraṃ natthi); PvA 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever). Avaṭṭhitatā {Avatthitata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] steadiness, only as neg. an° unsteadiness, fickleness ThA 259. Avaṭṭhiti {Avatthiti} (f.) [Sk. avasthiti] (firm) position, posture, steadfastness S V.228; Dhs 11, 570. Pāli Text Society 202 Pāli-English Dictionary Avaḍḍhi {Avaddhi} (f.) [a + vaḍḍhi] "non-growth", decay DhA III.335; C on A III.76 (cp. apajaha). Avaṇṭa {Avanta} (adj.) [a + vaṇṭa] without a stalk J V.155. Avaṇṇa {Avanna} [a + vaṇṇa] blame, reproach, fault D I.1 (= dosā nindā DA I.37); It 67; Pug 48, 59. Avaṇṇanīya {Avannaniya} (adj.) [grd. of a + vaṇṇeti] indescribable J V.282. Avataṃsa {Avatamsa} see vataṃsaka. Avatata {Avatata} & otata [ava + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 (-°); VvA 276 (= chādita). Avatiṭṭhati {Avatitthati} [ava + tiṭṭhati] to abide, linger, stand still. D I.251 = S IV.322 = A V.299 (tatra°); S I.25 (v.l. otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; J II.62; IV.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). - pp. avaṭṭhita (q. v.). Avatiṇṇa & Otiṇṇa {Avatinna} {Otinna} [pp. of otarati] fallen into, affected with (-°), as ava° rare late or poetical form of o°, e. g. J V.98 (issā°). See otiṇṇa. Avattha1 {Avattha} [der. uncertain] aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A III.171 (C. avavatthika). Avattha2 {Avattha} [Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2] thrown away J V.302 (= chaḍḍita C.). Avattharaṇa {Avattharaṇa} (nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of an army) J II.104 (of a robber-band), 336. Avattharati {Avattharati} [ava + tharati, stṛ] to strew, cover over or up J I.74 (°amāna ppr.), 255 (°itvā ger.); IV.84; Dāvs I.38. - pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy°. Avatthāraṇa {Avattharana} (nt.) = avattharaṇa DA I.274. Avatthu (adj.) [a + vatthu] groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin II.241; J I.440 (°kaṃ vacanaṃ). For lit meaning see vatthu. {Avatthu} Avadāta {Avadata} (= odāta) Dāvs III.14 (metri causa). Avadāna {Avadana} see apadāna. Avadāniya {Avadaniya} (adj.) [fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut] stingy, niggardly Sn 774 (= Nd1 36 which expls. as follows: avaṃ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaṃ vacanaṃ nɔādiyantī ti avadāniyā. Sn A 516 condenses this expln. into the foll.: avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhādīnaṃ vacanaṃ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā). Avadāpana {Avadapana} (cleansing): see vodāpana. Pāli Text Society 203 Pāli-English Dictionary Avadāpeti {Avadapeti} (to deal out) only BSk pary° Divy 202. Avadāyati {Avadayati} [denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2] to have pity on, to feel sorry for J IV.178 (bhūtānaṃ nāvadāyissaṃ, gloss nɔānukampiyaṃ). Avadīyati {Avadiyati} [Sk. avadīryati, ava + ḍr1, ḍrṇāti, see etym. under darī] to burst, split open J VI.183 (= bhijjati C.) see also uddīyati, Avadehaka {Avadehaka} (-°) (adj.) [ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih] in the idiom udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjati, to eat one's fill M I.102; Th 1, 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehakabhojana, a heavy meal. Avadhāraṇa {Avadharana} (nt.) [Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ] calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C's in explanation of evaṃ at DA I.27; and of kho at PvA 11, 18. Avadhi {Avadhi} 3 sg. aor. of vadhati. - At DhA II.73 avadhi = odhi. Avanata {Avanata} see oṇata. Avanati {Avanati} (-°) (f.) [fr. avanamati] stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Miln 387 (unnatɔāvanati). Avani {Avani} (f.) [Vedic avani] bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs IV.5. Avapakāsati {Avapakasati} [ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ] is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati - Vin II.204 (apakāsati +; v.l. avapakassati; Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems, to imply (a)vavakassati); A III.145 sq. (avapakāsituṃ). Avapatta {Avapatta} see opatta. Avapāyin {Avapayin} (-°) (adj.) [cp. avapivati] coming for a drink, drinking J I.163. Avapivati {Avapivati} [ava + pā, cp. apapibati] to drink from J I.163. Avabujjhati {Avabujjhati} (-°) [Cp. BSk. avabudhyate] to understand A IV.96 = It 83 (nɔavabujjhati); A IV.98 (id.) J I.378 = III.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.). Avabodha {Avabodha} [ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca°). Neg. an° not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha VvA 319). Avabodhati {Avabodhati} (-°) [cp. Sk. avabodhati] to realise, perceive, pay attention to J III.151 nāva°). 204 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Avabhāsa {Avabhasa} [later form of obhāsa] Only in cpd. gambhīrāvabhāso D II.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at A II.105 = Pug 46 has obhāsa. Avabhāsaka {Avabhasaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. avabhāsa] shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14. Avabhāsita {Avabhasita} (-°) [late form of obhāsita] shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590. Avabhuñjati {Avabhunjati} [ava + bhuñjati] to eat, to eat up J III.272 (inf. °bhottuṃ), 273. Avabhūta {Avabhuta} (adj.) [ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū] "come down", despised, low, unworthy M II.210. Avamangala {Avamangala} (adj.) [ava + mangala, ava here in privative function] of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen J I.372, 402; II.197; VI.10, 424; DhA III.123; PvA 261. Cf. next. Avamaññati {Avamannati} [Sk. avamanyate] to slight, to disregard, despise DhA I.170; PvA 37, 175; Sdhp 271. - pp. Caus. avamānita. Avamangalla {Avamangalla} (adj.) [fr. avamangala] of bad omen, nt. anything importune, unlucky J I.446. Avamāna & Omāna {Avamana} {Omana} [fr. ava + man, think] disregard, disrespect, contempt J II.386; III.423; V.384. Cp. next. Avamānana Avamāneti {Avamanana} {Avamaneti} (nt.) [fr. avamāna] = avamāna J I.22. [Caus. of avamaññati] to despise J V.246. - pp. avamānita PvA 36. Avaya {Avaya} only in neg. anavaya. Avayava {Avayava} [Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava] limb, member, constituent, part VvA 53 (sarīra° = gattā). 168, 201, 276; PvA 211 (sarīra° = gattā), 251 (mūl° the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at SnA 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aṃga would have been used in the older texts. Avarajjhati {Avarajjhati} (-°) [ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarādhyate] to neglect, fail, spurn Th 1, 167; J IV.428 (v.l. °rujjh°). Avaruddha {Avaruddha} [fr. avarundhati] 1. Doubtful reading at Vin IV.181, apparently meaning „in revolt, out of hand‟ (of slaves) - 2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592. Avaruddhaka {Avaruddhaka} [avruddha + ka] subdued, expelled, banished J VI.575; Dpvs I.21 (Np). Avaruddhati {Avaruddhati} [Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh] to expel, remove, banish J VI.505 (= nīharati C.), 515. See also avarundhati. Pāli Text Society Avarundhati 205 Pāli-English Dictionary [ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (ThA 271) on oruddha] to put under restraint, to put into one's harem as subsidiary wife. {Avarundhati} Avalambati {Avalambati} olambati] Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv II.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for °bya) Pv III.35; cp. olubbha. Avalitta {Avalitta} (-°) [Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava-limpati] besmeared; in cpd. ullittāvalitta "smeared up & down" i. e. plastered inside & outside A I.101. Avalekhati {Avalekhati} [ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati] to scrape off Vin II.221 (v. l. apa°). Avalekhana1 {Avalekhana} (nt.) [fr. avalekhati] (a) scraping, scraping off Vin II.141 (°pidhara), 221 (°kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in, writing down J IV.402, (°sattha a chisel for engraving letters). Avalekhana2 {Avalekhana} (nt.) v. l. for apalekhana. Avalepana {Avalepana} (-°) (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M I.385 (pīta°); Sn 194 (kāyo taca-maṃsɔ āvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh). Avasa {Avasa} (adj.) [a + vasa] powerless Sdhp 290. Avasaṭa & Osaṭa {Avasata} {Osata} [Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin IV.216, 217 (= titthāyatanaṃ saṃkata). Avasarati {Avasarati} [ava + sṛ] to go down, to go away (to) Sn 685 (v. l. BB. T. avaṃsari). Avasāna {Avasana} (-°) [for osāna] (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion J I.87 (bhattakiccāvasāne at the end of the meal); PvA 76 (id.). Avasāya {Avasaya} [fr. avaseti] stopping, end, finish Th 2, 12 (= avasānaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ ThA 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte. Avasiñcanaka {Avasincanaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. osiñcati] pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing J I.400 (an°). Avasiṭṭha {Avasittha} (sic & not osiṭṭha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa] left, remaining, over S II.133; J I.138; V.339; VvA 66, pl. avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others PvA 165 (janā). Avasiṭṭhaka {Avasiṭṭhaka} {Avasitthaka} (adj.) [fr. avasiṭṭha] remaining, left J III.311. Avasitta {Avasitta} (-°) [pp. of osiðcati] besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto of a properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D I. 69; II.227; III.64; Pug 56; DA I.182 (T. muddhāvassita, v. l. °abhisitta); etc. - See also abhisitta. Avasin {Avasin} (adj.-n.) [a + vasin fr. vaś] not having control over oneself, D II.275. Pāli Text Society 206 Pāli-English Dictionary Avasissati {Avasissati} [Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati] to be left over, to remain, in phrase yaṃ pamāṇa-kataṃ kammaṃ na taṃ tatrāvasissati D I.251; A V.299 = S IV.322; J II.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maṃsa-lohitaṃ M I.481; A I.50; S II.28, and sarīrāni avasissanti S II. 83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati. Avasī {Avasi} metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest J V.66 (mā avasī). Avasussati {Avasussati} [Sk. *ava-suṣyati of śuṣ] to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaṃ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ) J I.71, 110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (M I.569). - fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *°śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) J VI.550 (v. l. BB °sussati; C. avasucchissati). Avasūra {Avasura} [ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaṃs see ava II] sundown, sunset, acc. °ṃ as adv. at or with sundown J V 56 (anāvasūraṃ metrically). Avasesa1 {Avasesa} [Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an° (adj.) without any remainder, i. e. fully, completely M I.220 = A V.347 (°dohin); A I.20 sq., 88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (°pharaṇa); PvA 71 (°ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & sāvasesa leaving something over, having something left A I.20 sq., 88; Pv III.55 (jīvita° having still a little life left). Avasesa2 {Avasesa} (adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (āyu avaseso); J III.19; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā); PvA 19 (avasesā ca ðātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi-tacamattɔ āvasesa-sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi-sanghātamattɔ āvasesa-sarīra). - nt. (as pred.) °ṃ what is left PvA 52 (appɔ avasesaṃ); KhA 245 (nɔ atthi tesaṃ avasesaṃ). Avasesaka {Avasesaka} (adj.) [fr. avasesa2] being left, overflowing, additional, more J I.400 (an°); Dpvs IV.45. Avassa {Avassa} (adj.) [a + vaś] against one's will, inevitable J I. 19 (°bhāvin); V.319 (°gāmitā). Usually as nt. °ṃ adv. inevitably (cp. BSk. avaśyaṃ Divy 347; Av. Ś I.209 etc.) J III.271; DA I.263; Sdhp 293. Avassakaṃ {Avassakam} (adv.) [see avassa] inevitably Dpvs IX.13. Avassajati & Ossajati {Avassajati} {Ossajati} [ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati. The form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava): J IV.425; V.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji). Avassana {Avassana} (nt.) [a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat] not bleating J IV.251. Avassaya {Avassaya} [Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1] support, help, protection, refuge J I.211; II. 197; IV.167; Miln 160; DhA II.267; IV.198; PvA 5, 113. Pāli Text Society 207 Pāli-English Dictionary Avassava {Avassava} [ava + sava, Sk. °srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin II.89; M I.93; II.246; A III.334 sp. Avasseti {Avasseti} [ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti] to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) J II.80 (aor. avassayiṃ = vāsaṃ kappesiṃ C.). - pp. avassita. Avassāvana {Avassavana} (nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J II.288. Avassita {Avassita} [for apassita, Sk. apaśrita] depending on, dealing with J V.375. See apassita. Avassuta {Avassuta} (adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avassava] 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J IV. 20. - 2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire, lustful (opp. anavassuta, q. v.) Vin II.236; S IV.70, 184 (an°); A I.261, 262 (an°); II.240; IV.128, 201; Sn 63 (an°); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs II.5 (T. reads avassita). - Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak J IV.20 (nāvā = udaka-pavesanɔ ābhāvena a. C.). - 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (°citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA 116 (= kilesa-anvāssavavirahita). Avahaṭa {Avahata} [pp. of avaharati] taken away, stolen Miln 46. Avaharaṇa {Avaharana} (-°) [fr. avaharati in both meanings] taking away, removal; theft PvA 47 (sāṭaka°), 92 (soka°). Avaharati & Oharati {Avaharati} [ava + hṛ] to steal J I.384; PvA 47 (avahari vatthaṃ), 86 (id., = apānudi). - pp. avahaṭa (q. v.). Avahasati {Avahasati} [ava + has] to laugh at, deride, mock J V.111 (aññamaññaṃ); PvA 178. - aor. avahasi J IV.413. Avahāra [fr. avaharati] taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin V.129 (paðca avahārā, viz. theyya°, pasayha°, parikappa°, paṭicchanna°, kusa°). {Avahara} Avahīyati {Avahiyati} [for ohīyati] to be left behind, to stay behind J V.340. Avāgata {Avagata} [ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat-amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J V.82. (C. explains apāgata). Avākaroti {Avakaroti} [either ava + ā + karoti or avaṃ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J III.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); V.495, 500; VI. 280. - 2. to give back, restore J VI.577 (= deti C.). Avākirati {Avakirati} wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati (q. v.). Avāṭuka {Avatuka} see apāṭuka. Pāli Text Society 208 Pāli-English Dictionary Avāpuraṇa {Avapurana} (nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S III.132; A IV.374. Avāpurati {Avapurati} [same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J I.63; VI.373. Avāvaṭa {Avavata} (adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J V.213 (= apetāvaraṇā, which read for °bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.). Avikampamāna {Avikampamana} (adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J IV.310 (= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); VI.176 (= nirāsanka C.); J VI.273. Avikampin {Avikampin} (adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala VvA 215). Avikopin {Avikopin} (adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J VI.226 (acchejja +). Avikkhepa {Avikkhepa} [a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D III.213; A I.83; Ps I.94; II.228; Dhs 11, 15, 570. Avicāreti {Avicareti} [a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA 336. Aviccaṃ {Aviccam} at J V.434 read aviviccaṃ [a + viviccaṃ] i. e. not secretly, openly. Avijānaṃ {Avijanam} [a + vijānaṃ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; It 103. Avijjā {Avijja} (f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca-samuppāda, cp. S II.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D III.254, 282; S IV.205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin III.4; D I.84; III.216; It 49; Dhs 1100, 1109), of the oghā (D III.230, 276; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S II.23; A I.223; It 8; Dhs 1162, 1486), of the saṃyojanāni (D III.254; Dhs 1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin I.1; III.3; D III.212, 230, 234, 274; M I.54, 67, 144; S II.4, 26, 263; III.47, 162; IV.256; V.52; A I.8, 285; II.132, 158, 247; III.84 sq., 414; IV.228; It 34 (yā kācɔ imā duggatiyo asmiṃ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā-lobha-sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn 199, 277, 729 (jātimaraṇa-saṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ . . . avijjāyɔeva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh 243; Nd2 99; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; DhA III.350; IV.161 (°paligha). Aviññāṇaka {Avinnanaka} (adj.) [a + viððāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA I.6 (saviððāṇaka +). Aviññū {Avinnu} (adj.) = aviddasu. Avitakka (adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D III.219, 274; Th 2, 75 ("where reasonings cease" trsl.); Dhs 161 ("free from the working of conception" trsl.), 504 etc. {Avitakka} 209 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Avidūra {Avidura} (adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in loc. °e as adv. near Sn. 147. Aviddasu {Aviddasu} (adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn 762 (= bāla Sn A 509); Dh 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviððū DhA III.395); PvA 18 (so read for avindasu). Avināsaka {Avināsaka} (adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A III.38 (°ika); J V.116 (= anāsaka C.). Avināsana {Avinasana} (adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs IV.16. Avinicchayaññū {Avinicchayannu} (adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ðū] not knowing how to decide J V.367. Avinibbhujaṃ {Avinibbhujam} (adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atīrento C.). Avinibbhoga {Avinibbhoga} (ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J III.428 (°sadda). Avipariṇāma {Aviparinama} [a + viparināma] absence of change, steadfastness, endurance D I.18; III.31, 33 (°dhamma); DA I.113 (= jarā-vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato). Avippaṭisāra {Avippatisara} [a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A III.46. Avippavāsa {Avippavasa} (adj.-n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive, eager Vin V.216; Sn 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA I.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA IV.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa). Aviruddha {Aviruddha} (adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854. Avirūḷhi {Avirulhi} (f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn 235; DhA I.245 (°dhamma). Avirodha {Avirodha} [a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M II.105 = Th 1, 875. Avirodhana {Avirodhana} (nt.) = avirodha J III.320, 412; V.378. Avivāda {Avivada} [a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D III.245; Sn 896 (°bhūma SnA 557 or °bhumma Nd1 308, expld. as Nibbāna). Avisaṃvādaka {Avisamvadaka} (adj.) [a + visaṃvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D I.4; III.170; Pug 57; DA I.73. Avisaṃvādanatā {Avisamvadanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaṃvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D III.190. Pāli Text Society 210 Pāli-English Dictionary Avisaṃvādeti {Avisamvadeti} [a + visaṃ + Caus. of vad] to keep one's word, to be honest, to be true J V.124. Avisaggatā {Avisaggata} (f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy°, thus as a + viyagga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony, balance J VI.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga. Avisare {Avisare} at J V.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a + visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare. Avisāhaṭa {Avisahata} (adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs 15, 24, 287, 570. (°mānasata). Avissaji {Avissaji} at J VI.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati). Avissajjiya {Avissajjiya} (adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin I.305 (°ika for °iya); II.170 (five such objects in detail); V.216 (+ avebh°); J VI.568. Avissāsaniya {Avissasaniya} (adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J III.474. Aviha {Aviha} [of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha's, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā-words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3; Cpd. 139. - S I.35, 60; A I.279; Pug 17. Avihiṃ {Avihim} (Avihesa) sa(f.) [a + vihiṃsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D III.213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn 292 (= sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It 82 (°vitakka). Aviheṭhaka {Avihethaka} (adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D III.166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context); Miln 219. Avī° {Avi°} in general see vī°. Avīci {Avici} [B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin II.203 = It 86; Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 IIID; Ps I.83; Dhs 1281; J I.71, 96; III.182; IV.159; DhA I.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. - 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma). Avekalla {Avekalla} (°-) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in °buddhi complete knowledge J VI.297. Avekkhati {Avekkhati} [B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av° corresponds] to look at, to consider, to see It 33 (v.l. ap°); Dh 28, 50, J IV.6; DhA I.259 (= passati). Avekkhipati {Avekkhipati} [avaṃ + khipati, avaṃ here in form ave corresp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw (a foot) down J IV.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.). Pāli Text Society 211 Pāli-English Dictionary Avecca {Avecca} (adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca. The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form] certainly, definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on D II.217), or as paððāya ajjhogahetvā (on Sn 229); by Dhp. as aparapaccaya-bhāvena (on Pv IV.125). - Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Sanghe avecca-pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at M I.47; S II.69; IV.271 sq., 304; V.344, 405; A I.222; II.56; III.212, 332, 451; IV.406; V.183; further at Ps I.161 (°pasanna); Sn 229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv IV.125. Avedha {Avedha} (adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn 322 (°dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331). Avebhangika {Avebhangika} (adj.) [fr. a + vi + bhanga] not to be divided or distributed Vin I.305. Cp. next. Avebhangiya {Avebhangiya} (nt.) [= avebhangika] that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin II.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q. v.); V.129. Avera {Avera} (adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. - °ṃ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D I.247 (°citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA I 51). Averin {Averin} (adj.-n.) = avera Dh 197, 258. Avosita {Avosita} [reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an° unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101. Avyagga {Avyagga} (ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S V.66. Cp. avisaggatā. Avyattatā {Avyattata} (f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA II.38. Avyatha {Avyatha} (adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J III.466 (= akilamāna C.). Avyaya {Avyaya} [a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. I.72 (instr. °ena safely); Miln 393 (as abbaya T.). Avyāpajjha1 {Avyapajjha} (abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin I.183 (avyāpajjh°ādhimutQa); It 31 (abyābajjhɔārāma). Avyāpajjha2 {Avyapajjha} (abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not hurting, kind D II.242 (avera +), 276; M I.90; It 16 = 52 (sukhaṃ); Miln 410 (avera +). Pāli Text Society 212 Pāli-English Dictionary Avyāpanna {Avyapanna} (adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D III.82,83 (°citta); A II.220 (id.); Pug 68 (id.). - Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302. Avyāpāda {Avyapada} [a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice D III.215, 229, 240; It 82 (all MSS. have aby°); Dhs 33, 36, 277, 313, 1056. Avyāyata {Avyayata} (adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J I.496 (= avyatta C.). Avyāyika (adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J V.508 (= avigacchanaka C.). {Avyayika} Avyāvaṭa {Avyavata} (adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin III.136; Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn 43); J III.65; VI.188. Miln 177 (abyā°). Avyāseka (adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D I.182 (°sukha = kilesa vyāseka-virahitattā avyāseka DA I.183); Pug 59. {Avyaseka} Avyāharati {Avyaharati} [a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J V.80. Avyosita {Avyosita} (adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby°). Avhaya {Avhaya} [fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya "betting"] calling, name; adj. (-°) called, having the name of Sn 684 (isi°), 686 (Asit°), 689 (kanhasiri°), 1133 (Sace°, cp. Nd2 624). Avhayati & Avheti {Avhayati} {Avheti} [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] - 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D I.244 (avhayāma imper.); PvA 164. - 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J II.10, 252 (= pakkosati); V.220 (avhayesi); VI.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti). - 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). - pp. avhāta (q. v.). Avhāta {Avhata} [pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J III.165 = (an° = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv I.123, cp. PvA 64. The id. p. at Th 2, 129 reads ayācita. Avhāna {Avhana} (nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] - 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (°ānabhinandanā). - 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nāma). Avhāyana {Avhayana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, invocation, imploration D I.11 (Sir-avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expld. at DA I.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as "ehi Siri mayhaṃ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaṃ sire Siriyā avhayanaṃ"), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna). Avhāyika {Avhayika} (adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J I.401 = III.234. Pāli Text Society 213 Pāli-English Dictionary Asa {Asa} (adj.) [for asaṃ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning "good"] bad J IV.435 = VI.235 (sataṃ vā asaṃ, acc. sg. with v. l. santaṃ . . ., expld- by sappurisaṃ vā asappurisaṃ vā C.); V.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 V.319). Asaṃvata {Asamvata} (adj.) [pp. of + saṃvuṇati, cp. saṃvuta] unrestricted, open J VI.306. Asaṃvara {Asamvara} [a + saṃvāra] absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345. Asaṃvāsa {Asamvasa} (adj.) [a + saṃvāsa] deprived of co-residence, expelled from the community Vin IV.213, 214. Asaṃvindaṃ {Asamvindam} [ppr. a + saṃvindati] not finding, not knowing Th 1, 717. Asaṃvuta {Asamvuta} (adj.) [pp. of a + saṃvuṇāti, cp. saṃvata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347. Asaṃsaṭṭha {Asamsattha} (adj.) [a + saṃsaṭṭha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M I.21Q; S I.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404 (= dassana-savana-samullāpa paribhogakāyasaṃsaggānaṃ abhāvena SnA 468 = DhA IV.173). Asaṃhārima {Asamharima} (adj.) = asaṃhāriya (?) Vin IV.272. Asaṃhāriya {Asamhariya} (adj.) [grd. of a + saṃharati] not to be destroyed or shattered It 77; Th 1, 372; Nd2 110. Asaṃhīra {Asamhira} (adj.) [= asaṃhāriya of saṃ + hṛ] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin II.96; S I.193; A IV.141; V.71; Sn 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110); J I. 62; IV.283 (°citta unfaltering); Dpvs IV.12. Asakka {Asakka} (adj.) [a + sakka; Sk. aśakya] impossible J V. 362 (°rūpa). Asakkuṇeyya {Asakkuneyya} (adj.) [grd. of a + sakkoti] impossible, unable to J I.55; KhA 185 and passim. Asakkhara {Asakkhara} (adj.) [a + sakkhara] not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth J V.168; DhA III.401 (opp. sasakkhara). Asakyadhītā {Asakyadhita} (f.) [a + sakyadhītā] not a true Buddhist nun Vin IV.214. Asagguṇa {Asagguṇa} [a + sagguṇa] bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (°bhāvin, the a° belongs to the whole cpd.). Asankita {Asankita} & °iya (adj.) [a + sankita, pp. of śank] not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold J I.334 (°iya); V.241; Sdhp 435, 541. Asankuppa {Asankuppa} (adj.) [a + sankuppa, grd. of kup] not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Sn 1149 (cp. Nd2 106); Th 1, 649. Pāli Text Society 214 Pāli-English Dictionary Asankusaka {Asankusaka} (adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18] not contrary J VI.297 (°vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. J trsln. VI.143). Asankheyya {Asankheyya} (adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of saṃ-khyā] incalculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A II.142; Miln 232 (cattāri a.), 289 DhA I.5, 83, 104. Asanga {Asanga} (adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (°mānasa, = anāsattacitta ThA 259); Miln 343. Cp. next. Asangita {Asangita} (adj.) [fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?] not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick J V.409. Asacca {Asacca} (adj.) [a + sacca] not true, false J V.399. Asajjamāna {Asajjamana} (adj.) [ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj] not clinging, not stuck, unattached Sn 38, 71 (cp. Nd2 107); Dh 221 (nāmarūpasmiṃ a. = alaggamana DhA III.298). Asajjittho {Asajjittho} 2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate J I.376. See sajjati. Asajjhaya {Asajjhaya} [a + sajjhāya] non-repetition Dh 241 (cp. DhA III.347). Asañña {Asanna} (adj.) [a + saððā] unconscious, °sattā unconscious beings N. of a class of Devas D I.28 (cp. DA I.118 and BSk. asaṃjñika-sattvāḥ Divy 505). Asaññata {Asannata} (adj.) [a + saññata, pp. of saṃ + yam] unrestrained, intemperate, lacking selfcontrol It 43 = 90 = Sn 662 = Dh 307. Asaññin {Asannin} (adj.) [a + saññin] unconscious D I.54 (°gabbhā, cp. DA I.163); III.111, 140, 263; It 87; Sn 874. Asaṭha {Asatha} (adj.) [a + saṭha] without guile, not fraudulent, honest D III.47, 55, 237; DhA I.69. Asaṃṭhita {Asamthita} (adj.) [a + saṇṭhita] not composed, unsettled, fickle It 62, 94. Asat & Asanto {Asat} {Asanto} [a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good, i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881, 950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto nirayaṃ nenti). See also asaddhamma. Asati & Asanāti {Asanati} (q. v.) [Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aṃśa share, part] to eat; imper. asnātu J V 376; fut. asissāmi Th 1, 223; Sn 970. - ppr. med. asamāna J V.59; Sn 239. ger. asitvā Miln 167; & asitvāna J IV.371 (an°). pp. asita (q. v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & aðhati (aðhamāna Sn 240), also āsita1. Asatiyā {Asatiya} (adv.) [instr. of a + sati] heedlessly, unintentionally J III.486. Pāli Text Society 215 Pāli-English Dictionary Asatta {Asatta} (adj.) [pp. of a + sajjati] not clinging or attached, free from attachment Sn 1059; Dh 419; Nd2 107, 108; DhA IV.228. Asattha {Asattha} (n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇḍa in var. phrases: see under daṇḍa. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaṇa). Asadisa {Asadisa} (adj.) [a + sadisa] incomparable, not having its like DhA II.89; III.120 (°dāna). Asaddha {Asaddha} (adj.) [a + saddha] not believing, without faith D III.252, 282. Asaddhamma {Asaddhamma} [a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma] evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at It 85; as 4 at A II.47; as 7 at D III.252, 282; as 8 at Vin II.202. Asana1 {Asana} (nt.) [Vedic aśan(m)] stone, rock J II.91; V.131. Asana2 {Asana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati] eating, food; adj. eating J I.472 (ghatāsana Ep. of the fire; V.64 (id.). Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324); DA I.139. See also nirasana. Asana3 {Asana} (nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J I.40 (as Bodhi-tree of Gotama); II.91; V.420; VI.530. Asana4 {Asana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw] an arrow M I.82 = S I.62. Cp. asani. Asanāti {Asanati} [see asati] to eat, to consume (food) J I.472; V. 64; VI.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati). Asani {Asani} f.) [Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed, sharp, Gr. a)/kros pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1). Cp. also aṃsa & asama2] orig. a sharp stone as hurling-weapon thence in mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder-clap, lightning J I.71, 167; II.154; III.323; Miln 277; VvA 83. -aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused by lightning DhA III.71. -pāta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA I.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); PvA 45. -vicakka same as °pāta (?) S II. 229 (= lābha-sakkārasilokassa adhivacana); D III.44, 47. Asantasaṃ & Asantasanto {Asantasam} {Asantasanto} (adj.) [ppr. of a + santasati] fearless, not afraid Sn 71, 74; J IV.101; VI.306; Nd2 109. Asantāsin {Asantasin} (adj.) [a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaṃ] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA IV.70. Asantuṭṭha {Asantuttha} [pp. of a + santussati] not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Sn 108. Cp. next. Pāli Text Society Asantuṭṭhitā 216 (f.) [abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita discontentment D III.214 (so read for tutth°) = A I.95. {Asantutthita} Pāli-English Dictionary = asantuṭṭha] dissatisfaction, Asanthava {Asanthava} [a + santhava] dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Sn 207. Asandhitā {Asandhita} (f.) [a + sandhi + tā] absence of joints, disconnected state J VI.16. Asannata {Asannata} (adj.) [a + sannata] not bent or bending Sdhp 417. Asapatta {Asapatta} (adj.-n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure, peaceful D II.276; Sn 150 (= vigata-paccatthika, mettavihārin KhA 249); Th 2, 512. Asapattī {Asapatti} (f.) [a + sapattī] without co-wife or rival in marriage S IV.249. Asappurisa {Asappurisa} [a + sappurisa, cp. asat] a low, bad or unworthy man M III.37; SnA 479 (= anariya Sn 664). Asabala {Asabala} (adj.) [a + sabala] unspotted D II.80 = III.245. Asabbha {Asabbha} (adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the assembly-room, not consistent with good manners, impolite, vile, low, of base character J III.527 (mātugāma); Dh 77 = J III.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA I.256; ThA 246 (akkhi). Cp. next. - Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form. Asabbhin {Asabbhin} asabbha J I.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi°, e.g. -kāraṇa a low or sinful act Miln 280. -rūpa low, common J VI.386 (= asādhu-jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414 (= apaṇḍita-jātika). Cp. prec. *Asabha {Asabha} [Sk. ṛṣabha] see usabha. Asama1 {Asama} (adj.) [a + sama] unequal, incomparable J I.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd. °dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Sn 694 (= asama-viriya SnA 489); J I.193; VI.259, 330. Asama2 {Asama} (nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q. v.); connected with Lat. ocris "mons confragosus"; Gr. a)/kmwn anvil; Lith. stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani] stone, rock DA I.270, 271 (°muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v. l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika); SnA 392 (instr. asmanā). Asamaggiya {Asamaggiya} (nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J VI.516 (so read for asāmaggiya). Asamaṇa {Asamana} at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 217 Pāli-English Dictionary Asamapekkhana {Asamapekkhana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. a + sam + apekkhati] lack of consideration S III.261; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162. Asamāhita {Asamahita} (adj.) [a + samāhita] not composed, uncontrolled, not firm It 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dh 110, 111; Pug 35. Asamijjhanaka {Asamijjhanaka} (adj.) [a + samijjhana + ka] unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. °ikā J III.252. Asamiddhi {Asamiddhi} (f.) [a + samiddhi] misfortune, lack of success J VI.584. Asamosaraṇa {Asamosaraṇa} (nt.) [a + samosaraṇa] not coming together, not meeting, separation J V.233. Asampakampiya {Asampakampiya} (adj.) [grd. of a + sampakampeti] not to be shaken, not to be moved Sn 229 (= kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo KhA 185). Asampajañña {Asampajanna} (nt.) [a + sampajañña] lack of intelligence D III.213; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162, 1351. Asampāyanto {Asampayanto} [ppr. of a + sampāyati] unable to solve or explain Sn p. 92. Asambādha {Asambadha} (adj.) [a + sambādha] unobstructed Sn 150 (= sambādha-virahita KhA 248); J I.80; ThA 293. Asammodiya {Asammodiya} (nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J VI.517 (= asamaggiya C.). Asammosa {Asammosa} [a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc] absence of confusion D III.221 = Dhs 1366. Asayaṃvasin {Asayamvasin} (adj.) [a + sayaṃ + vasiṃ] not under one's own control, i. e. dependent D II.262; J I.337. Asayha {Asayha} (adj.) [a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya] impossible, insuperable J VI.337. Usually in cpd. °sāhin conquering the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Th 1, 536, Pv II.922 (Angīrasa); It 32. Asahana {Asahana} (nt.-adj.) [a + sahana] not enduring, non-endurance, inability J III.20; PvA 17. Asahāya {Asahaya} (adj.) [a + sahāya] one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Miln 225. Asā {Asa} see āsa. Pāli Text Society 218 Pāli-English Dictionary Asāta {Asata} (adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern's interpretation & etymology of asāta at Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable] disagreeable Vin I.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Sn 867; J I.288, 410; II.105; Dhs 152, 1343. Asādhāraṇa {Asadharana} (adj.) [a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561] not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin III.35; Kh VIII.9; J I.58, 78; Miln 285; DA I.71; Sdhp 589, 592. Asāmapāka {Asamapaka} (adj.) [a + sāma + pāka] one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DA I.270. Asāra {Asara} (n. adj.) [a + sāra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 (= asāra nissāra sārāpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA I.114 for interpretation). Asāraka {Asaraka} (adj.) [a + sāraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Th 1, 260; J II.163 = DhA I.144. Asāraddha {Asaraddha} (adj.) [a + sāraddha] not excited, cool A I.148 = It 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha). Asāhasa {Asahasa} (nt.) [a + sāhasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D III.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc. as adv. asāhasaṃ without violence, not arbitrarily J III.319; instr. asāhasena id. J VI.280; Dh 257 (= amusāvādena DhA III.382). Asi {Asi} [Vedic asi, Av. aṃhū Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D I.77 (= DA I.222); M II.99; A I.48 = (asinā sīsaṃ chindante); IV.97 (asinā hanti attānaṃ); J IV.118 (asi sunisito), 184; V.45 (here meaning "sickle"), 475 (asið ca me maððasi, probably faulty for either "āsið ca me" or "āsiðcam me"); Vism 201 (ðāṇāsi the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asinā pahaṭa). -camma sword & shield Vin II.192; A III.93; J VI.449. -tharu the hilt of a sword DhA IV.66. -nakha having nails like swords Pgdp 29. -patta having sword-like leaves, with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword-leaf-wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e. g. Mārk-aṇḍeyapurāṇa XII.24 sq.; Mhbhārata XII.321; Manu IV.90; XII. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) J VI.250 (°niraya); PvA 221 (°vana); Sdhp 194. -pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Miln 191. -māla (-kamma) swordgarland (-torture) J III.178 (+sīsaṃ chindāpeti); Dāvs III.35. Preferable to interpretation "sword-dirt", see māla (mālā). -lakkhana "swordsign", i.e. (fortune-telling from) marks or a sword D I.9; J I.455. -loma having swords for hair S II.257, cp. Vin III.106. -sūna slaughterhouse (so also B.Sk. asisūnā Divy 10, 15; see further detail under "kāma" similes) Vin II.26; M I.130, 143; A III.97. -sūla a swordblade Th 2, 488 (expld. at ThA 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena, i.e. with reference to the executioner's block, cp. also sattisūla). Asika {Asika} (adj.) (-°) [asi + ka] having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhittɔasika with drawn sword, M I.377; J I.393. Asita1 {Asita} [Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti] having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food M I.57; A III.30, 32 (°pīta-khāyita etc.); PvA 25 (id.); J VI.555 °(āsana having enjoyed one's food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1. Pāli Text Society 219 Pāli-English Dictionary Asita2 {Asita} (adj.) [a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita] not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires) D II.261 (°ātiga); M I.386; Th 1, 38, 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); J II.247; It 97; Sn 251, 519, 593, 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. SnA 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya). Asita3 {Asita} (adj.) [Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i. e. burnt up; Gr. a)/zw to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i. e. black colour (of ashes)] black-blue, black M II.180 (°vyābhangī); A III.5 (id.); Th 2, 480 (= indanīla ThA 286); J III.419 (°āpangin black-eyed); v. 302; Dāvs I.45. Asita4 {Asita} (m. nt.) [fr. asi] a sickle J III.129; V 46. Asīti {Asiti} (num.) [Sk. aśīti] 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref's. In addition we mention the foll.:) J I.233 (°hattha 80 hands, i. e. 80 cubits deep); III.174 (°sahassa-vāraṇa-parivuta); VI.20 (vassasahassāni); Miln 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiṃ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) DhA I.14, 19 (mahātherā); II.25 (°koṭi. Asu {Asu} (pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu° in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dẹmonstr. "that", that one, usually combd. with yo (yaṃ), e. g. asu yo so puriso M I.366; yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ S IV.315. - nom. sg. m. asu S IV.195; Miln 242; f. asu J V.396 (asū metri causā); nt. aduṃ M I.364, 483; A I.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amunā (instr.) A I.250. Cp. also next. Asuka {Asuka} (pron.-adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain Vin III.87; J I.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 (°ṃ gatiṃ gata). Asuci {Asuci} (adj.) [a + suci] not clean, impure, unclean Sn 75 (°manussā, see Nd2 112); Pug 27, 36; Sdhp 378, 603. Asucīka {Asucika} (nt.) [abstr. fr. asuci] impurity, unclean living, defilement Sn 243 (°missita = asucibhāva-missita SnA 286. Asubha {Asubha} (adj.) [a + subha] impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. °ṃ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the asubha-meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6. - S IV.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); V.320; Sn 341; Sdhp 368. -subhāsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Sn 633; J III. 243; Miln 136. -ānupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) It 80, 81; DhA I.76. -kathā talk about impurity Vin III.68. -kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity DhA III.425. -nimitta sign of the unclean i. e. idea of impurity Vism 77. -bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin III.68. -saððā idea of impurity D III.253, 283, 289, 291. -saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) It 93. Asura {Asura} mazdā°; perhaps to Av. anhuš & Lat. erus master] a fallen angel, a Titan; pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at PvA 272 & the C. on J V.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka-bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e. g. with garuḷā, Pāli Text Society 220 Pāli-English Dictionary nāgā, yakkhā at Miln 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DA I.51. - The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under the title of devāsura-sangāma: D II.285; S I.222 (cp. 216 sq.), IV.201 sq., V.447; M I.253; A IV.432. - Rebirth as an Asura is considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna-yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e. g. at It 93; J V.186; Pv IV.111, see also apāya. - Other passages in general: S I.216 sq. (fight of Devas & Asuras); IV.203; A II.91; IV.198 sq., 206; Sn 681; Nd1 89, 92, 448; DhA I.264 (°kaððā); Sdhp 366, 436. -inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (S I.222; IV.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A II.17, 53; III.243). Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at A IV.197. -kāya the body or assembly of the asuras A I.143; J V.186; ThA 285. -parivāra a retinue of Asuras A II.91. rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Sn 310 (defined by Bdhgh at SnA 323 as pabbatapāda-nivāsino dānava-yakkha-saððitā). Asuropa {Asuropa} [probably a haplological contraction of asura-ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris's discussion at J P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions] anger, malice, hatred; abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vbh 357; Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1341 (an°); DhsA 396. Asussūsaṃ {Asussusam} [ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati] not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient J V.121. Asūyaka {Asuyaka} see anasūyaka. Asūra {Asura} (adj.) [a + sura1] - 1. not brave, not valiant, cowardly Sn 439. - 2. uncouth, stupid J VI.292 (cp. Kern. Toev. p. 48). Asekha & Asekkha {Asekha} {Asekkha}(adj. n.) [a + sekha] not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp. B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣāśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, 337; Av. Ś I.269, 335; II.144) Vin I.62 sq.; III.24; S I.99; D III.218, 219; It 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v. l. asekkha); Pug 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq. -muni the perfectly Wise DhA III.321. -bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps II.173, cp. 176. Asecanaka {Asecanaka} (adj.) [a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka-darśana in same meaning e. g. Divy 23, 226, 334] unmixed, unadulterated, i. e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely M I.114; S I.213 (a. ojava "that elixir that no infusion needs" Mrs Rh. D.) = Th 2, 55 (expld. as anāsittakaṃ pakatiyā ɔva mahārasaṃ at ThA 61) = Th 2, 196 (= anāsittakaṃ ojavantaṃ sabhāva-madhuraṃ ThA 168); S V.321; A III. 237 sq. Miln 405. Asevanā (f.) [a + sevanā] not practising, abstinence from Sn 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā KhA 124). {Asevana} Asesa {Asesa} (adj.) [a + sesa] not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Sn 2 sq., 351, 355, 500, 1037 (= sabba Nd2 113). As °- (adv.) entirely, fully, completely Sn p. 141 (°virāga-nirodha); Miln 212 (°vacana inclusive statement). Pāli Text Society 221 Pāli-English Dictionary Asesita {Asesita} adj.) [pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati] leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole, all J III.153. Asoka1 {Asoka} (adj.) [a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka] free from sorrow Sn 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha-sokasalla KhA 153); Dh 412; Th 2, 512. Asoka2 {Asoka} [Sk. aśoka] the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka J V.188; Vv 354, 359 (°rukkha); Vism 625 (°ankura); VvA 173 (°rukkha). Asoṇḍa {Asonda} (adj.) [a + soṇḍa] not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink J V.116. - f. asoṇḍī A III.38. Asotatā {Asotata} (nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless J VI.16. Asnāti {Asnati} [Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti] to eat; imper. asnātu J V.376. Asman {Asman} (nt.) [Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2] stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā SnA 362. Asmasati {Asmasati} [spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśvasati] to trust, to rely on J V.56 (Pot. asmase). Asmi {Asmi} (I am) see atthi. Asmimāna {Asmimana} [asmi + māna] the pride that says "I am", pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, 314) Vin I.3; D III.273; M I.139, 425; A III.85; Ps I.26; Kvu 212; DhA I.237. Cp. ahaṃ asmi. Asmiye {Asmiye} 1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. "I shall eat" J V.397, 405 (C. bhuðjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr. -āśa food, = aṃsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aṃśyati or aśnāti (see asati). Assa1 {Assa} [for aṃsa1, q. v. for etym.] shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder-bag, knapsack i. e. a bag containing provisions, instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv. ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris J P T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena, sīse chārikaṃ okiritvā ti attho DA I.267. After all it is the same as puṭaṃsa (see under aṃsa1). - D I.98, cp. A II.242 (v. l. bhasma°); DA I.267 (v.l. bhassa°). Assa2 {Assa} [for aṃsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. a)/kros & o)cu/s sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four-cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin II.316; J IV.46, 492; Pv II.119. Perhaps also at Th 2, 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaṃsa under catur). Pāli Text Society 222 Pāli-English Dictionary Assa3 {Assa} ; Gr. i(/ppos, dial. i(/kkos; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo-; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os. ehu; Ags. eoh] a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin III.6 (pañcamattehi assa-satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds, with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); A II.207; V.271; Sn 769 (gavāssa). At Th II.229 the commentary explains caturassa as „four in hand‟; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2) was probably what the poet meant; Dh 94, 143, 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī); VvA 78; DhA I.392 (hatthi-assādayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh°). -ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse A I.77, 244; II.113 sq., 250 sq.; III.248, 282 sq.; IV.188, 397; V.166, 323; PvA 216. See also ājāniya. -āroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, N. of an occupation "cavalry" D I.51 (+ hatthāroha; expld. at DA I.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja-assabhaṇḍādayo). -kaṇṇa N. of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. "horse-ear" (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva-tundi the thornbush, lit. horse-tooth) J II.161; IV.209; VI.528. -khalunka an inferior horse ("shaker"), opp. sadassa. A I.287 = IV.397. -tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin I.192; D I.7 -damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion A II.112; °sārathi a horse trainer A II. 112, 114; V.323 sq.; DhA IV.4. -potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt J II.288. -bandha a groom J II. 98; V.449; DhA I.392. -bhaṇḍa (for °bandha? or should we read °paṇḍaka?) a groom or horse-trainer, a trader in horses Vin I.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35). -bhaṇḍaka horse-trappings J II.113. -maṇḍala circus Vism 308, cp. M I.446. -maṇḍalika exercising-ground Vin III.6. -medha N. of a sacrifice: the horse-sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] S I.76 (v. l. sassa°); It 21 (+ purisamedha); Sn 303. -yuddha a horse-fight D I.7. -rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse DhA II.69 (+ hatthi-rūpaka). -lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging) the marks on a horse D I.9. -laṇḍa horse-manure, horsedung DhA IV.156 (hatthi-laṇḍa +). -vāṇija a horsedealer Vin III.6. -sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind A I.289 = IV.397 (in comparison with purisa°). Assa4 {Assa} is gen. dat. sg. of ayaṃ, this. Assa5 {Assa} 3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi). Assaka1 {Assaka} (-°) [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; anɔ without a horse J VI.515 (+ arathaka). Assaka2 {Assaka} (adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor, destitute M I.450; II.68; A III.352; Ps I.126 (v. l. asaka). Assatara {Assatara} [Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in function of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA I.213; DhA IV.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); J IV.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); VI.342. - f. assatarī a she-mule Vin II.188; S I.154; II.241; A II.73; Miln 166. assatarī-ratha a chariot drawn by she-mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā) = 438; Pv I.111 (= assatariyutta ratha PvA 56); J VI.355. Assattha1 {Assattha} [Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z I.467 as aśva-ttha dial. for aśva-stha "standing place for horses, which etym. is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.] the holy fig-tree, Ficus, Religiosa; the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment, i. e. the Bo tree Vin IV.35; D II.4 (sammā-sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); S V.96; J I.16 (V.75, in word-play with assattha2 of V.79). Pāli Text Society 223 Pāli-English Dictionary Assattha2 {Assattha} [pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Av. Ś I.210] encouraged, comforted A IV.184 (v. l. as gloss assāsaka); Ps I.131 (loka an°; v. l. assaka); J I.16 (V.79 cp. assattha1); VI.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566. Assaddha {Assaddha} (adj.) [a + saddhā] without faith, unbelieving, Sn 663; Pug 13, 20; Dhs 1327; DhA II.187. Assaddhiya {Assaddhiya} (nt.) [a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya; cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible] disbelief S I.25; A III.421; V.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vbh 371; DA I.235; Sdhp 80. Assama {Assama} [ā + śram] a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin I.24 = IV.108; I.26, 246; III.147; Sn 979; Sn p. 104, 111; J I.315 (°pada) V.75 (id.) 321. VI.76 (°pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books, where "the 4 āśramas" is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. I.211-217. Assamaṇa {Assamana} [a + samaṇa] not a true Samaṇa Vin I.96; Sn 282; Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug A 207. - f. assamaṇī V ìn IV.214. Assaya {Assaya} [ā + sayati, śri] resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DA I.67 (puðð°). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning "body": see Av. Ś. I.175 & Index II.223. Assava {Assava} (adj.) [ā + sunāti, śru] loyal D I.137; Sn 22, 23, 32; J IV.98; VI.49; Miln 254; an° inattentive, not docile DhA I.7. Assavati {Assavati} [ā + sru] to flow J II.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati. Assavanatā {Assavanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. assavana] not listening to, inattention M I.168. Assavanīya {Assavaniya} (adj.) [a + savanīya] not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82. Assasati {Assasati} [ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā1 3] 1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale, J I 163; VI.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaṃ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i. e. to breathe in & out, D II.291 = M I.56, cp. M I.425; J II.53, cp. V.36. - 2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage S IV.43; J IV.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); VI.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase J IV.57 (C. for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (°itvā). - 3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession J IV.495 (= assāsa-vātena upahanati āvisati C.). - Caus. assāseti. - pp. assattha2. See also assāsa-passāsa. Assāda {Assada} [ā + sādiyati, svad] taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction D I.22 (vedanānaṃ samudaya atthangama assāda etc.); M I.85; S II.84 sq. (°ānupassin), 170 sq.; III.27 sq. (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; IV.8 sq., 220; V.193, 203 sq.; A I.50 (°ānupassin), 258, 260; II.10; III.447 (°diṭṭhi) J I.508; IV.113, Sn 448; Ps I.139 sq., (°diṭṭhi), 157; cp. I.1017; Pv IV.62 (kām°); Vbh 368 (°diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq.; Miln 388; Vism 76 (paviveka-rasɔ); Sdhp 37, 51. See also appassāda under appa. Pāli Text Society 224 Pāli-English Dictionary Assādanā {Assadana} (f.) [cp. assāda] sweetness, taste, enjoyment S I.124; Sn 447 (= sādubhāva SnA 393). Assādeti [Denom. fr. assāda] to taste S II.227 (lābha-sakkārasilokaṃ); Vism 73 (paviveka-sukha-rasaṃ); DhA I.318. {Assadeti} Assāraddha {Assaraddha} v. l. at It 111 for asāraddha. Assāvin {Assavin} (adj.) [ā + sru] only in an° not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sāta-vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā-santhava-virahita SnA 549). See also āsava. Assāsa {Assasa} [Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation, with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa-passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath D II.157 = S I.159 = Th 1, 905; D III.266; M I.243; S I.106; IV.293; V.330, 336; A IV.409; V.135; J II.146; VI.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. - assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps I.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. 2. (fig.) breathing easily, freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence M I.64; S II.50 (dhamma-vinaye); IV.254 (param-assāsa-ppatta); A I.192; III.297 sq. (dhamma-vinaye); IV.185; J VI.309 (see assattha2); Miln 354; PvA 104 (°matta only a little breathing space); Sdhp 299 (param°), 313. Assāsaka {Assasaka} (adj. n.) [fr. assāsa] 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an° not able to draw breath Vin III.84; IV.111. - 2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy J I.84; VI. 150. Cp. next. Assāsika {Assasika} (adj.) [fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2] only in neg. an° not able to afford comfort, giving no comfort or security M I.514; III.30; J II.298 (= aññaṃ assāsetuṃ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk. anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Av. Ś. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma-dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata. Assāsin {Assasin} (adj.) [Sk. āśvāsin] reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy S IV.43 (an°). Assāseti {Assaseti} [Caus. of assasati] to console, soothe, calm, comfort, satisfy J VI.190, 512; DhA I.13. Assita {Assita} (adj.) [Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri] dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on D II.255 (tad°); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaṃ a.); Th 1, 149 (janaṃ evɔ assito jano); Sdhp 401. Assirī {Assiri} (adj.) [a + sirī] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassarɔ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.). Assu1 {Assu} (nt.) [Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin I.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); S II.282 (id.); Dh 74; Th 2, 496 (cp. ThA 289); KhA 65; DhA I.12 (°puṇṇa-netta with eyes full of tears); II.98; PvA 125. - Pāli Text Society 225 Pāli-English Dictionary dhārā a shower of tears DhA IV.15 (pavatteti to shed). -mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e. g. Jtm 3116] D I.115, 141; Dh 67; Pug 56; DA I.284; PvA 39. -mocana shedding of tears PvA 18. Assu2 {Assu} is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi. Assu3 {Assu} (indecl.) [Sk. sma] expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of "surely, yes, indeed" Sn 231 (according to Fausböll, but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tayɔ assu, cp. KhA 188); Vv 324 (assa v. l. SS) = VvA 135 (assū ti nipāta-mattaṃ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2). Cp. āsu. Assu4 {Assu} part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. According to this view Fausbölls reading kenɔ assu at Sn 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu. Assuka {Assuka} (nt.) [assu1 + ka] a tear Vin II.289; Sn 691; Pv IV.53. Assutavant {Assutavant} (adj.) [a + sutavant] one who has not heard, ignorant M I.1, 8, 135; Dhs 1003, 1217, cp. Dhs trsl. 258. Aha1 {Aha} (indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. "ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in cpd. °kāmā miserable pleasures lit. "woe to these pleasures!") gloss at ThA 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th 2, 506 (expld. by C. as "ahā ti lāmaka-pariyāyo"). See also ahaha. Aha2 {Aha} (-°) & Aho (°-) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) °aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekāhena in one day J VI. 366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipāhaṃ (for) some or several days J I.152 etc. (kattpāha); sattāhaṃ seven days, a week Vin I.1; D II. 14; J IV.2, and freq.; anvahaṃ daily Dāvs IV.8. - The initial a of ahaṃ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ɔhaṃ how many days? S I.7; ekāha-dvī ɔhaṃ one or two days J I.292; dvīha-tī ɔhan two or three days J II.103; VvA 45; ekāha-dvī ɔhɔ accayena after the lapse of one or two days J I.253. - A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is °ahika: see pañcāhika (consisting of 5 days). - (2) aho° in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraṃ Av. Ś. I.209] & ahoratti (f.) day & night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahorattaṃ: M I.417 (°ānusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattið ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA III. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J IV.108 (°ānaṃ accaye); Pv II.131 (°ṃ); Miln 82 (ena). ahorattiṃ Dh 387; J VI.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiṃ). Ahaṃ {Aham} (prom.) [Vedic ahaṃ = Av. azəm; Gr. e)gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I". - nom. sg. ahaṃ S III.235; A IV.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J I.61; II.159. - In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaṃ vadanti mama . . na te ahaṃ S I.116, 123; ahaṃ asmi "I am" (cp. ahaṃkāra below) S I.129; III.46, 128 sq.; IV.203; A II.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaṃ pure ti "I am the first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahaṃkārā ti VvA 351). - gen. dat. mayhaṃ Sn 431, 479; J I.279; II.160, mama S I.115; Sn 22, 23, 341, 997; J II.159, & mamaṃ S I.116; Sn 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. - instr. mayā Sn 135, 336, 557, 982; J I.222, 279. - acc. maṃ Sn 356, 366, 425, 936; J II. 159; III.26, & mamaṃ J III.55, 394. - loc. mayi Sn 559; J III 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, & func- tions in diff. cases, as gen. (Sn 983; J II.159), acc. (Sn 982), instr. (J I.138, 222), & abl. - Pl. Pāli Text Society 226 Pāli-English Dictionary nom. mayaṃ (we) Sn 31, 91, 167, 999; J II.159; VI.365, amhe J II. 129, & vayaṃ (q. v.). - gen. amhākaṃ J I.221; II.159 & asmākaṃ Sn p. 106. - acc. amhe J I.222; II.415 & asme J III.359. - instr. amhehi J I.150; II.417 & asmābhi ThA 153 (Ap. 132). - loc. amhesu J I.222. - The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.): see under vayaṃ. -kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaṃkāra) M III.18, 32; S II.253; III.80, 136, 169 sq.; IV.41, 197, 202; A I.132 sq.; III.444; Ud 70; Nett 127, and freq. passim. Ahaha {Ahaha} [onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1] 1. exclamation of woe J III.450 (ahahā in metre). - 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A V.173 = Sn p. 126. Ahāsa {Ahasa} [a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exultancy, modesty J III.466 (= anubbillāvitattaṃ C.). Ahāsi {Ahasi} 3rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.). Ahi {Ahi} [Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin II.109; D I.77; S IV.198; A III.306 sq.; IV.320; V.289; Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA 100; PvA 144. -kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin III.68 = M I.73 = A IV.377. -gāha a snake catcher or trainer J VI.192. -guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. °guṇḍika, °guṇṭika & °kuṇḍika; the BSk. paraphrase is °tuṇḍika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be NonAryan, word. See also under kuṇḍika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J I.370 (°guṇḍ°); II.267; III.348 (°guṇḍ°); IV.456 (T. °guṇṭ; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ°) 308 (T. °kuṇḍ°, v. l. SS °guṇṭh°), 456 (T. °guṇṭ°; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ); VI.171 (T. °guṇḍ°; v. l. BB °kuṇḍ°); Miln 23, 305. -chattaka (nt.) "a snake's parasol", a mushroom D III.87; J II.95; Ud 81 (C. on VIII.5, 1). tuṇḍika = °guṇṭhika Vism 304, 500. -peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA II.63. -mekhalā "snakegirdle", i. e. outfit or appearance of a snake DhA I.139. -vātaka (-roga) N. of a certain disease ("snakewind-sickness") Vin I.78; J II.79; IV.200; DhA I.169, 187, 231; III.437. -vijjā "snake-craft", i. e. fortune-telling or sorcery by means of snakes D I.9 (= sappa-daṭṭhatikicchana-vijjā cɔ eva sappɔ avhāyana-vijjā ea "the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)" DA I.93). Ahiṃsaka {Ahimsaka} (adj.) [fr. ahiṃsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S I.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J IV.447. Ahiṃsā {Ahimsa} (f.) [a + hiṃsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D III.147; A I.151; Dh 261, 270; J IV.71; Miln 402. Ahita {Ahita} (adj.-n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D III.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (°kāma). Ahirīka & Ahirika {Ahirika} (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscrupulous D III.212, 252, 282; A II.219; Dh 244; Sn 133 (°īka); It 27 (°īka); Pug 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs 365; Nett 39, 126; DhA III.352. Ahīnindriya {Ahinindriya} see discussed under abhinindriya. Pāli Text Society 227 Pāli-English Dictionary Ahuvāsiṃ {Ahuvasim} 1st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiṃ VvA 321). Ahuhāliya {Ahuhaliya} (nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J III.223 (= danta-vidaṃsaka-mahāhasita C.). Ahe {Ahe} (indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha1] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J V.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as "ahevanaṃ vuccati vanasaṇḍo"). Aho {Aho} (indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyɔ atthena nipāto); J I.88 (aho acchariyaṃ aho abbhutaṃ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA II.85; PvA 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re D I. 107; Pv II.94 5. Cp. ahe. Ahosi—kamma {Ahosikamma} (nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. XIX. Pāli Text Society 228 Pāli-English Dictionary Ā Ā1 {A} (indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning "to, towards", & also "from". Orig. an emphatic-deictic part. (Idg. *ē) = Gr. h)_ surely, really; Ohg. -ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a-sau; Gr. e\kei_ (cp. a3), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well-defined simple base-prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam-ā-dhi) except in one case ā-ni-saṃsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from combn. āsaṃsa-nisaṃsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇɔ atthe nipāto PvA 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. - (1.) As prep. c. abl. only in J in meaning "up to, until, about, near" J VI.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning "forth, out, to, towards, at, on" in foll. applications: - (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākaḍḍhati pull to, along or up; °kāsa shining forth; °koṭeti knock at; °gacchati go towards; °camati rinse over; °neti bring towards, ad-duce; °bhā shining forth; °bhujati bend in; °masati touch at; °yata stretched out; °rabhati at-tempt; °rohana a-scending; °laya hanging on; °loketi look at; °vattati ad-vert; °vahati bring to; °vāsa dwelling at; °sādeti touch; °sīdati sit by; °hanati strike at. - (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); °dāsa looking at, mirror; °dhāra support; °nandati rejoice; °nisaṃsa subjective gain; °bādha being affected; °modita pleased; °rakkha guarding; °rādhita satisfied; °rāma (personal) delight in; °lingati embrace (to oneself); °hāra taking to (oneself). - (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; °carati indulge in; °cikkhati point ont, explain; °jīva living on; °ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; °disati point out to some one; °bhindati cut; °manteti ad-dress; °yācati pray to; °roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; °sevati indulge in. - (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive-frequentative prefix in sense of "all-round, completely, very much", e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, °kula mixed up; °dhuta moved about; °rāva shouting out or very much; °luḷati move about; °hiṇḍati roam about. - 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (°bhati), abhi (°saṃsati), pa (°tapati), paṭi (°kankhati) in meaning 1 a-c; and vi (°kirati, °ghāta, °cameti, °lepa, °lopa), sam (°tapati, °dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b. - 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā-gacchati, °disati, °maddati, °rohati, °visati, °sanna, °hata), paṭi + ā (paccā-janati, °ttharati, °dāti, °savati), pari + ā (pariyā-ðāta, °dāti, °pajjati, °harati), sam + ā (samā-disati, °dāna, °dhi, °pajjati, °rabhati). - (b) Contrast-combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of "up & down, in & out, to & fro"; ā + ni: āvedhika-nibbedhika, āsaṃsanisaṃsa (contracted to ānisaṃsa), āsevita-nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as "breathing out", passasati as "breathing in": see Vism 271), assāsa-passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna-pāhuna, āhuneyya-pāhuneyya; ā + paccā: ākoṭita-paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākaḍḍhana-parikaḍḍhana, āsankita-parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita-vilokita, āvāha-vivāha, āveṭhana-viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa-sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa-samāciṇṇa. - 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a°, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aððāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda. Pāli Text Society 229 Pāli-English Dictionary Ā°2 {A°} guṇa or increment of a° in connection with such suffixes as -ya, -iya, -itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa; ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc. Ā°3 {A°} of various other origins (guṇa e. g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a°), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha). Ā°4 {A°} infix in repetition-cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa- or increment-form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalāphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit & not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e. g. I.416; II.160; III.127; IV.220, 307, 449; V.313; VI.520; kāraṇākāraṇāni all sorts of duties J VI.333; DhA I.385; khaṇḍākhaṇḍa pêle-mêle J I.114; III.256; gaṇḍāgaṇḍa a mass of boils DhA III.297; cirāciraṃ continually Vin IV.261; bhavābhava all kinds of existences Sn 801, cp. Nd1 109; Nd2 664; Th 1, 784 (°esu = mahant-āmahantesu bh. C., see Brethren 305); rūpārūpa the whole aggregate ThA 285; etc. Ākankhati {Akankhati} [ā + kānkṣ, cp. kankhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin II.244 (°amāna); D I.78, 176; S I.46; Sn 569 (°amāna); Sn p. 102 (= icchati SnA 436); DhA I.29; SnA 229; VvA 149; PvA 229. Ākankhā {Akankha} f. [fr. ā + kānkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th 1, 1030. Ākaḍḍhati {Akaddhati} [ā + kaḍḍhati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin II.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); IV.219; J I.172, 192, 417; Miln 102, 135; ThA 117 (°eti); VvA 226; PvA 68. - Pass. ākaḍḍhiyati J II.122 (°amāna-locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln 102; Vism 163; VvA 207 (°amāna-hadaya with torn heart). - pp. ākaḍḍhita. Ākaḍḍhana {Akaddhana} (nt.) [fr. ākaḍḍhati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA 212 (°parikaḍḍhana pulling about); DhsA 363; Miln 154 (°parikaḍḍhana), 352. - As f. Vin III.121. Ākaḍḍhita {Akaddhita} [pp. of akaḍḍheti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J III.256 (= akkhitta2). Ākantana {Akantana} (?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th 1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana. Ākappa {Akappa} [cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin I.44 (an°) = II.213; J I.505. - 2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā° gamanādi-ākāro DhsA 321). -sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A III.78; J IV.542; an° sampanna, ill dressed, J I.420. Ākampita {Akampita} [pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln 154 (°hadaya). Ākara {Akara} [cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan-ākara a mine of jewels Th 1, 1049; J II.414; VI. 459; Dpvs I.18. - Cp. also Miln 356; VvA 13. Ākassati {Akassati} [ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428. Pāli Text Society 230 Pāli-English Dictionary Ākāra {Akara} [a + karoti, kṛ] "the (way of) making", i. e. (1) state, condition J I.237 (avasan° condition of inhabitability); II.154 (patan° state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ°. - (2) property, quality, attribute D I.76 (anāvila sabb°-sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); II.157 (°varûpeta); J II.352 (sabb° paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). - (3) sign, appearance, form, D I.175; J I.266 (chātak° sign of hunger); Miln 24 (°ena by the sign of . .); VvA 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA 90, 283 (raððo ā. the king's person); Sdhp 363. - (4) way, mode, manner, sa-ākāra in all their modes D I.13 = 82 = III.111; J I.266 (āgaman° the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chahɔākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasahɔākārehi); Vism 613 (navahɔākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA 64 (yenɔākārena āgato tenɔākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). - (5) reason, ground, account D I.138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA I.14; KhA 100 (in expln. of evaṃ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style "what is meant by", the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA 26 (dātabb°dassana), 27 (thoman°-dassana), 75 (kāruðð °ṃ dassesi), 121 (pucchan°-nidassanaṃ what has been asked); SnA 135 (°nidassana). -parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S II.115; IV.138; A II.191 = Nd2 151. Ākāraka {Akaraka} (nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) J I.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.). Ākāravant {Akaravant} (adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M I.401 (saddhā). Ākāsa1 {Akasa} [Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. - D I.55 (°ṃ indriyāni sankamanti the sensefaculties pass into space); III.224, 253, 262, 265; S III.207; IV.218; V.49, 264; J I.253; II.353; III.52, 188; IV.154; VI.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv II.118; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (āgacch°), 103, 105, 162; °ena carati id. J II.103; °e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando). - Formula "ananto ākāso" freq.; e. g. at D I.183; A II.184; IV. 40, 410 sq.; V.345. -anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on °anta see anta1 4) J VI.89. ānaðca (or ānañca) the infinity ef space, in cpd. °āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the "space-infinity-plane", the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās°, (2) viððāṇɔānaðc-āyatana (3) ākiðcaðð°, (4) nɔeva saððānāsaññ°, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. - D I.34, 183; II.70, 112, 156; III.224, 262 sq.; M I.41, 159.; III. 27, 44; S V.119; Ps I.36; Dhs 205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39 ; Vism 326, 340, 453; DA I.120 (see Nd2 under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd2 672 (sādhu-vihārin). -kasiṇa one of the kasiṇɔāyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D III.268; A I.41. -gangā N. of the celestial river J I.95; III.344. -gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. -cārika walking through the air J II.103. -cārin = °cārika VvA 6. -ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu I.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. -tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. -dhātu the element of space D III.247; M I.423; III.31; A I.176; III.34; Dhs 638. Ākāsa2 {Akasa} (nt.?) a game, playing chess „in the air‟ (sans voir) Vin II.10 = D I.6 (= aṭṭhapadadasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaṃ DA I.85). Ākāsaka {Akasaka} (adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J VI.124. Pāli Text Society 231 Pāli-English Dictionary Ākāsati {Akasati} [fr. ākāsa1] to shine J VI.89. Ākiñcañña {Akincanna} (nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below °āyatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). - Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (°sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 (= akiðcanabhāva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer"); Nd2 115, see ākāsa; Miln 342. -āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa°) D I.35, 184; II.156; III.224, 253, 262 sq.; M I.41, 165; II.254, 263; III.28, 44, S IV.217; A I.268; IV.40, 401; Ps I.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha. Ākiṇṇa {Akinna} [pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (°-) Vin III.130 (°loma with dense hair); S I.204 (°kammanta "in motley tasks engaged"); IV.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A III.104 (°vihāro); IV.4; V.15 (an° C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn 408 (°varalakkhaṇa = vipula-varalakkh° SnA 383); Pv II.124 (nānā-dijagaṇ° = āyutta PvA 157); Pug 31; PvA 32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp 595. - Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city "iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa-manussa", e. g. D I.211; II.147 (°yakkha for °manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A III.215; cp. Miln 2 (°jana-manussa). - 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S I.205 = J III.309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "ruthless" & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula°, as above under Sn 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1. Ākirati {Akirati} [ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn 665; Dh 313; Pv II.49 (dānaṃ vipulaṃ ākiri = vippakirati PvA 92); Miln 175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn 383. pp. ākiṇṇa. Ākiritatta {Akiritatta} (nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln 173 (sakataṃ dhaððassa ā). Ākilāyati {Akilayati} v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati. Ākucca {Akucca} (or °ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non-Aryan] an iguana J VI.538 (C. godhā; gloss amattɔākuccā). Ākurati {Akurati} [onomat. to sound-root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila, khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura "intumescence", thus meaning "to swell") are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati). Ākula {Akula} (adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk.-P. kula, to Idg *qÛel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning "revolving quickly", & so "confused"] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J I.123 (salākaggaṃ °ṃ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha°); PvA 287 (an° clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln 117, 220; PvA 56; ākula- Pāli Text Society 232 Pāli-English Dictionary pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula-pakkula); ākula-samākula J VI.270. - On phrase tantākula-jātā gulā-guṇṭhika-jātā see guḷā. Ākulaka {Akulaka} (adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D II.55 (tant° for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā). Ākulanīya {Akulaniya} (adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula] in an° not to be confounded or upset PvA 118. Ākulī {Akuli} (-puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta°) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta-bakulapuppha. Vism 260 (id. p.) however reads ākulī-puppha "tangle-flower" (?), cp. Ud 5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula. Ākoṭana1 {Akotana} (nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M I.385; Miln 63, 306; DhsA 144. Ākoṭana2 {Akotana} (adj.) [= ākoṭana1] beating, driving, inciting, urging J VI.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paððā, expld. by "nivāraṇapatoda-laṭṭhi viya paððā koṭinī hoti" p. 254). Ākoṭita {Akotita} [pp. of ākoṭeti] - 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J I.303; Miln 62 (of a gong). - 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita-paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S II. 281; DhA I.37. Ākoṭeti {Akoteti} [a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraṃ trir ā°, Cowell "break" (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.] - 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J I.264. - 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin II.217; J II.274; PvA 55 (aññamaññaṃ); Sdhp 159. - 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaṃ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D I.89; A IV.359; V.65; DA I.252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraṃ ā. J V 217; DhA II.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA 316). - 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J I.239. - pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. II. ākoṭapeti J III.361. Ākhu {Akhu} [Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10. Āgacchati {Agacchati} [ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc. I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D I.161; J II.153; Pv IV.151; fut. āgacchissati J III.53; aor. āgacchi Pv II.133; PvA 64. - (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA 81, āgamā D I.108; J III.128, and pl. āgamiṃsu J I.118; fut. āgamissati VvA 3; PvA 122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J I.151; Miln 14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). - (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn 841; Pv I.123 (= āgacchi PvA 64). - pp. āgata (q. v.). II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D I.108; Pv I.113; II.133; Miln 14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA 81, 122. - (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) D I.161 (gārayhaṃ ṭhānaṃ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv IV.151 (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA 241). - (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J I.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiṃsu); SnA 321; VvA 3. See also āgamma. Āgata {Agata} [pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln 18 (°kāraṇa the reason of his coming); VvA 78 (°ṭṭhāna); PvA 81 (kiṃ āgatɔ attha why have you come here) come by, got attained (°-) Pāli Text Society 233 Pāli-English Dictionary A II.110 = Pug 48 (°visa); Mhvs XIV. 28 (°phala = anāgānuphala) -āgatɔāgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA 39, 78, 129; VvA 190 (Ep. of sangha). -svɔāgata "wel-come", greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th 2, 337; Pv IV.315, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A II.117, 143, 153; III. 163; Th 2, 337. - (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D I.88; DhA II.35; KhA 229; VvA 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin I.127, 337; II 8; IV.158; A II.147; Miln 19, 21. - (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata. Āgati {Agati} (f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S III.53; J II.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in spe- cial sense of rebirth and re-death in the course of saṃsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D I.162; A III.54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S II.67; Pv II.922 (gatiṃ āgatiṃ vā). Āgada {Agada} (m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA I.66 (= vacana). Āgantar {Agantar} [N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A I.63; II.159; It 4, 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all others āgantvā). an° A I.64; II.160. Āgantu {Agantu} (adj.) [Sk. āgantu] - 1. occasional, incidental J VI.358. - 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J VI.529 (= āgantuka-jana C.); ThA 16. Āgantuka {Agantuka} (adj.-n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś I.87, 286; Divy 50] - 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin I.132, 167; II.170; III. 65, 181; IV.24, A I.10; III.41, 366; J VI.333; Ud 25; DhA II.54, 74; VvA 24; PvA 54. - 2. adventitions, incidental (= āgantu1) Miln 304 (of megha & roga). - 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195. -bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin I.292 (opp. gamika°); II.16. Āgama {Agama} [fr. ā + gam] - 1. coming, approach, result, D I.53 (āgamanaṃ pavattatī ti DA I.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh°). - 2. that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin II.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA I.1, 2 (dīgh°). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma-vagga-mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaṃ". See also āgata 2, for phrase āgatɔāgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv IV.133 (sv° = suṭṭhu āgatɔāgamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. - 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (āgamā parivitakkaṃ), cp. Davs V.22 (takk°, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). - 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ°). - 5. repayment (of a debt) J. VI.245. - 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa-kārɔāgama). Āgamana {Agamana} (nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, arrival, approach A III.172; DA I.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an° not coming or returning J I.203, 264. Āgameti {Agameti} [caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or something to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin II. 166, 182, 212; D I.112, 113; S IV.291; PvA 4, 55. - (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin II.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M I.161 (id.) J I.69 (id. + kālaṃ). Pāli Text Society Āgamma 234 Pāli-English Dictionary (adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under I.2 for form & under II.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. Ś I.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu I.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D I.229; It 71; J I.50; VI.424; Kh VIII.14 (= nissāya KhA 229); PvA 5, 21 etc. {Agamma} Āgāmitā {Agamita} found only in neg. form anāgāmitā. Āgāmin {Agamin} (adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saṃsāra (cp. āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A I.63; II.159; It 95. See anāgāmin. Āgāra {Agara} (-°) see agāra. Āgāraka {Agaraka} & °ika (adj.-n.) (-°) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh° possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin I.209; bandhan° prison-keeper A II.207; bhaṇḍ° keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also bhaṇḍ°). - (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S III.190 (paṃsv° playmate). Āgāḷha {Agalha} (adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgāḍhaṃ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a I.283, 295; Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug A 215 has a°, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā). Āgilāyati {Agilayati} [ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin II.200; D III.209; M I.354; S IV.184; KhA 66 (hadavaṃ ā.). Cp. āyamati. Āgu {Agu} (nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S I.123; A III.346; Sn 522 = Nd2 337 (in expln. of nāga as āguṃ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd1 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin. -cārin one who does evil, D II.339; M II.88; III.163; S II.100, 128; A II.240; Miln 110. Āghāta {Aghata} [Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning "hurtfulness" at M Vastu I.79; Av. Ś II.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill-will, hatred, malice D I.3, 31; III.72 sq.; S I.179; J I.113; Dhs 1060, 1231; Vbh 167, 362, 389; Miln 136; Vism 306; DA I.52; VvA 67; PvA 178. -anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin II.249; A V.80. -paṭivinaya repression of ill-will; the usual enumn. of ā-° paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D III.262, 289; Vin V.137; A IV.408; besides this there are sets of five at A III.185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin V.138. -vatthu occasion of ill-will; closely connected with °paṭivinaya & like that enumd. in sets of nine (Vin V.137; A IV.408; Ps I.130; J III.291, 404; V.149; Vbh 389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin V.138; A V. 150; Ps I.130; Vbh 391). Āghātana {Aghatana} (nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] - 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th 1, 418, 711; death D I.31 (= maraṇa DA I.119). - 2. shambles, Pāli Text Society 235 Pāli-English Dictionary slaughter-house Vin I.182 (gav°); A IV.138; J VI.113. - 3. place of execution Vin III.151; J I.326, 439; III.59; Miln 110; DhA IV.52; PvA 4, 5. Āghāteti {Aghateti} [Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaṃ a. (with loc.) to incite one's heart to hatred against, to obdurate one's heart. Sdhp. 126 = S I.151 = A V.172. Ācamati [ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J III.297; Miln 152, 262 (+ dhamati). - Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to purge, rinse one's mouth Vin II.142; M II. 112; A III.337; Pv IV.1Q3 (ācamayitvā = mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā PvA 241); Miln 152 (°ayamāna). - (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin II.221. - Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J VI.8. {Acamati} Ācamana {Acamana} (nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D I.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi-karaṇa DA I.98); (b) after evacuation J III 486. -kumbhī waterpitcher used for rinsing Vin I.49, 52; II.142, 210, 222. -pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin I.190; II.142, 222. -sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin II.142, 221. Ācamā {Acama} (f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Sn 945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj III) has ācāma. Ācaya {Acaya} [ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252. - S II.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A IV.280 = Vin II.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, 685; Vbh 319, 326, 330; Vism 449; DhA II.25. -gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A V.243, 276; Dhs 584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357. Ācarati {Acarati} [ā + aarati] - 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin I.56; II.118; Sn 327 (ācare dhamma-sandosa-vādaṃ), 401; Miln 171, 257 (pāpaṃ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S I.124, 153, 213 in same meaning. - pp. āciṇṇa. - 2. to step upon, pass through J V.153. Ācarin {Acarin} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + car] teaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin IV.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin IV.130), 317 (id.). Ācariya {Acariya} [fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin I.60, 61, 119 (°upajjhāya); II.231; IV.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D I.103, 116 (gaṇ°) 238 (sattamācariyamahāyuga seventh age of great teachers); III.189 sq.; M III.115; S I.68 (gaṇ°), 177; IV.176 (yogg°); A I.132 (pubb°); Sn 595; Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc°); J II.100, 411; IV.91; V.501; Pv IV.323, 351 (= ācāra-samācāra-sikkhāpaka PvA 252); Miln 201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism 99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA 138. - For contracted form of ācariya see ācera. -kula the clan of the teacher A II.112. -dhana a teacher's fee S I.177; A V.347. -pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. "teacher & teacher's teacher" (see ā1 3b) D I.94, 114, 115, 238; S IV.306, 308; DA I.286; SnA 452 (= ācariyo cɔeva ācariya-ācariyo ca). -bhariyā the teacher's fee J V.457; VI.178; DhA I.253. -muṭṭhi "the teacher's fist" i. e. close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D II.100; S V.153; J II.221, 250; Miln 144; SnA 180, 368. -vaṃsa the line of the teachers Miln 148. -vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA I.92. -vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln 148; Dpvs V.30; Mhbv 96. Pāli Text Society 236 Pāli-English Dictionary Ācariyaka {Acariyaka} [ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin I.249; III.25, 41; D I.88, 119, 187; II.112; M I.514; II.32; S V.261; A II.170; IV. 310. See also sācariyaka. Ācāma {Acama} [Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D I.166; M I.78; A I.295; J II.289; Pug 55; VvA 99 sq.; DhA III.325 (°kuṇḍaka). Ācāmeti {Acameti} [for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M II.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect. Ācāra {Acara} [ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. (-°) practising, indulging in, or of such & such a conduct. - Sn 280 (pāpa°); J I.106 (vipassana°); II.280 (°ariya); VI.52 (ariya°); SnA 157; PvA 12 (sīla°), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. -an° bad behaviour Vin II.118 (°ṃ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA II.201 (°kiriyā). Cp. sam°. -kusala versed in good manners Dh 376 (cp. DhA IV.111). -gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D I.63 = It 118; M I.33; S V.187; A I.63 sq.; II.14, 39; III.113, 155, 262; IV.140, 172, 352; V.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh 244, 246 (cp. Miln 368, 370, quot. Vin III.185); Vism I.8. -vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin I.171. Ācārin {Acarin} (adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who behaves well A I.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.). Ācikkhaka {Acikkhaka} (adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA I.71. Ācikkhati {Acikkhati} [Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D I.110; A II 189 (atthaṃ ā to interpret); Pug 59; DhA I.14; SnA 155; PvA 121, 164 (describe). - imper. pres. ācikkha Sn 1097 (= brūhi Nd2 119 & 455); Pv I.109; II.81; and ācikkhāhi DhA II.27. - aor. ācikkhi PvA 6, 58, 61, 83. - ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paððāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd1 271; Nd2 465; Vism 163. - attānaṃ ā. to disclose one's identity PvA 89, 100. - pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). - Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA II.27. Ācikkhana {Acikkhana} (adj.-nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J III.444; PvA 121. Ācikkhita {Acikkhita} [pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154 (°magga), 203 (an° = anakkhāta). Ācikkhitar {Acikkhitar} [n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA II.107 (for pavattar). Āciṇa {Acina} [pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] accumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (pāpaṃ = pāpaṃ āciṇanto karonto DhA III.16). It may also be spelt ācina. Āciṇṇa {Acinna} [ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M I.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S IV.419; A V.74 sq.; J I.81; DA I.91 (for aviciṇṇa at D I.8), 275; Vism 269; DhA I.37 (°samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108; PvA 54; Sdhp 90. -kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin I.79; II.301; Dpvs IV.47; cp. V.18. Pāli Text Society 237 Pāli-English Dictionary Ācita {Acita} [pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with J VI.250 (= nicita); Vv 411; DhsA 310. See also āciṇa. Ācināti {Acinati} [ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S III.89 (v. l. ācinati); IV.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaṃ); DhsA 44. - pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). - Pass. ācīyati (q. v.). Āciyati & Āceyyati {Aciyati} {Aceyyati} [Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J V.6 (= ācīyanto vaḍḍhanto C.). Ācera {Acera} is the contracted form of ācariya; is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J IV.248; VI.563. Ācela {Acela} in kaðcanācela-bhūsita "adorned with golden clothes" Pv II.127 stands for cela°. Ājañña {Ajanna} is the contracted form of ājāniya. Ājava {Ajava} see ācamā. Ājāna {Ajana} (adj.) [ā + jāna from jðā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S IV.127; Sn 762; J I.295, 300. Ājānana {Ajanana} (nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajðāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J I.181 (°sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA 225. Ājānāti [ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D I.189; Sn 1064 (°amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aððāti at Vism 200. - pp. aððāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti. {Ajanati} Ājāniya {Ajaniya} (ājāniya) (adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e. well-born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jðā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J I.181: sārathissa cittarucitaṃ kāraṇaṃ ājānana-sabhāvo ājaððo, and DhA IV.4: yaṃ assadamma-sārathi kāraṇaṃ kāreti tassa khippaṃ jānana- samatthā ājāniyā. - The contracted form of the word is ājaðða] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J I.178, 194; Dpvs IV.26; DhA I.402; III.49; IV.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. - (b) ājānīya: M I.445; A V.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. - (c) ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J I.181; Pv IV.154; purisājaðða "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S III.91 = Th 1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A V.325. anājāniya of inferior birth M I.367. -susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M I. 445 (°ûpamo dhamma-pariyāyo). Ājānīyatā {Ajaniyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA 214. Ājira {Ajira} [= ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3. Ājīva {Ajiva} [ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D I.54; A III.124 (parisuddha°); Sn 407 (°ṃ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaṃ hitvā sammājīvaṃ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug 51; Vbh 107, 235; Miln 229 (bhinna°); Vism 306 (id.); DhsA 390; Sdhp 342, 375, Pāli Text Society 238 Pāli-English Dictionary 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā-ājīva & micchā-ā° right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S II.168 sq.; III.239; V.9; A I.271; II 53, 240, 270; IV.82; Vbh 105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika). -pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln 336; Vism 22 sq., 44; DhA IV.111. -vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A I.270. -sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A I.271; DA I.235. Ājīvaka & Ājīvika {Ajivaka} {Ajivika} [ājīva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non-buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA II.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. - (a) ājīvaka: Vin I.291; II.284; IV.74, 91; M I.31, 483: S I.217; A III.276, 384; J I.81, 257, 390. - (b) ājīvika: Vin I.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. °aka). sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin II 130, 165; A I.217. Ājīvika {Ajivika} (nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (°bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and in phrase ājīvikɔāpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M I.463 = S III.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln 279. Ājīvin {Ajivin} (adj.-n.) [fr. ājīva] having one's livelihood, finding one's subsistence, living, leading a life of (-°) D III.64; A V.190 (lūkha°) Āṭa {Ata} [etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148] a kind of bird J VI.539 (= dabbimukha C.). Āṭaviya {Ataviya} is to be read for aṭaviyo is to be read for aṭaviyo (q. v.) at J VI.55 [= Sk. āṭavika]. Āṭhapanā {Athapana} (f.) at Pug 18 & v. l. at Vbh 357 is to be read aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vbh 357). Āṇañja {Ananja} see ānejja. Āṇaṇya {Ananya} see ānaṇya. Āṇatti {Anatti} (f.) [ā + ðatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jðā] order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin I.62; KhA 29; PvA 260; Sdhp 59, 354. Āṇattika {Anattika} (adj.) [āṇatti + ka] belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction KhA 29. Āṇā {Ana} (f.) [Sk. ājðā, ā + jðā] order, command, authority Miln 253; DA I.289; KhA 179, 180, 194; PvA 217; Sdhp 347, 576. rājɔāṇā the king's command or authority J I.433; III.351; PvA 242. āṇaṃ deti to give an order J I.398; °ṃ pavatteti to issue an order Miln 189, cp. āṇāpavatti J III.504; IV.145. Āṇāpaka {Anapaka} (adj. n.) [fr. āṇāpeti] 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303. - 2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders, a town-crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority) Miln 147. Āṇāpana {Anapana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. āṇāpeti] ordering or being, ordered, command, order PvA 135. Pāli Text Society 239 Pāli-English Dictionary Āṇāpeti {Anapeti} [ā + ðāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jðā, cp. Sk. ājðāpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of person) J III.351; Miln 147; DhA II.82; VvA 68 (dāsiyo), 69; PvA 4, 39, 81. Āṇi {Ani} (Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n-enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse, Ags. lynes = E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. w)le/nh, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el-bow. See Walde, Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus]. - 1. the pin of a wheelaxle, a linch-pin M I.119; S II.266, 267; A II.32; Sn 654; J VI.253, 432; SnA 243; KhA 45, 50. - 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M I.119; S. II 266 (drum stick); J IV.30; VI.432, 460; Th 1, 744; Dh I.39. - 3. (fig.) (°-) peg-like (or secured by a peg, of a door), small, little in °colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin II.271, cp. I.205 (vaṇabandhana-colaka); °dvāra Th 1, 355; C. khuddaka-dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "the towngate's sallyport" by Neumann as "Gestöck" (fastening, enclosure) āṇi-gaṇṭhikɔāhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DA I.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood. Ātanka {Atanka} [etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka] illness, sickness, disease M I.437; S III.1; Sn 966 (°phassa, cp. Nd1 486). Freq. in cpd. appātanka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D I.204; III.166; A III.65, 103; Miln 14. - f. abstr. appātankatā M I.124. Ātankin {Atankin} (adj.) [fr. ātanka] sick, ill J V.84 (= gilāna C.). Ātata {Atata} [fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs XIV.14; VvA 37 (q. v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96. Ātatta {Atatta} [ā + tatta1, pp. of ā-tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J V.69 (°rūpa = sukkhasarīra C.). Ātapa {Atapa} [ā + tapa] - 1. sun-heat Sn 52; J I.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs I.57; VvA 54; PvA 58. - 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv I.74; Sdhp 396. - 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA 98 (viriyātapa; perhaps better to be read °ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa. -vāraṇa "warding off the sun-heat", i. e. a parasol, sun-shade Dāvs I.28; V.35. Ātapatā {Atapata} (f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122. Ātapati {Atapati} [ā + tap] to burn J III.447. Ātappa {Atappa} (nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D I.13; III.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M III.210; S II.132, 196 sq.; A I.153; III.249; IV.460 sq.; V.17 sq.; Sn 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122); J III.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vāyāma); DA I.104. Ātāpa {Atapa} [ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing, mortifica- tion" Miln 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA 98 (viriya°). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana. Ātāpana {Atapana} (nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M I.78; A I.296 (°paritāpana); II.207 (id.); Pug 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.). Pāli Text Society 240 Pāli-English Dictionary Ātāpin {Atapin} (adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś I.233; II. 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardént, zealous, strenuous, active D III.58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M I.22, 56, 116, 207, 349; II.11; III.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; II.21, 136 sq.; III.73 sq.; IV.37, 48, 54, 218; V.165, 187, 213; A II.13 sq.; III 38, 100 sq.; IV. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; V.343 sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); DhA I.120; SnA 157, 503. - Freq. in the formula of Arahantship "eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. - Opp. anātāpin S II.195 sq.; A II.13; It 27 (+ anottappin). Ātāpeti {Atapeti} [ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, inflict pain, torture M I.341 (+ paritāpeti); S IV.337; Miln 314, 315. Ātitheyya {Atitheyya} (nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A I.93; IV. 63 sq. (v. l. ati° which is perhaps to be prcferred). Ātu {Atu} [dialectical] father M I.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois). Ātuman {Atuman} [Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv IV.52 (= sabhāvo PvA 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd1 351; acc. ātumānaṃ Sn 782 (= attānaṃ SnA 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv II.1311 (= attani C.). Ātura {Atura} (adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 3170] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S III.1 (°kāya); A I. 250; Sn 331; Vv 8314 (°rūpa = abhitunna-kāya VvA 328); J I.197 (°anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (°citta); II.420 (°anna, as above); III.201; V.90, 433; VI.248; Miln 139, 168; DhA I.31 (°rūpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J IV.293; SnA 489. anātura healthy, well, in good condition S III.1; Dh 198. Āthabbaṇa {Athabbana} (nt.) [= athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn 927 (v. l. ath°, see interpreted at Nd1 381; expld. as āthabbaṇika-manta-ppayoga at SnA 564). Āthabbaṇika {Athabbanika} (adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder-worker, medicine-man Nd1 381; SnA 564. Ādapeti {Adapeti} [Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M II.104; S I.132. Ādara {Adara} [Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect, reverence, honour J V.493; SnA 290; DA I.30; DhsA 61; VvA 36, 61, 101, 321; PvA 121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp 2, 21, 207, 560. -anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S I.96; Vin IV.218; Sn 247 (= ādara-virahita SnA 290; DA I.284; VvA 219; PvA 3, 5, 54, 67, 257. Ādaratā {Adarata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an° want of consideration J IV.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā). Pāli Text Society 241 Pāli-English Dictionary Ādariya {Adariya} (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an° disregard, disrespect Vin II.220; A V.146, 148; Pug 20; Vbh 371; miln 266. Ādava {Adava} [ā + dava2?] is gloss at VvA 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear. Ādahati1 {Adahati} [ā + dahati1] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaṃ ā.=samādahati). Cp. sam° and ādhiyati. Ādahati2 {Adahati} [ā + dahati2] to set fire to, to burn J VI.201, 203. Ādā {Ada} [ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin IV.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya). Ādati & Ādadāti {Adati} {Adadati} [ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin I.50; inf. ādātuṃ D III.133 (adinnaṃ theyyasankhātaṃ ā.). - ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). - See also ādiyati & ādeti. Ādāna {Adana} (nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M III.133; J V.371 (& °esana). - (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S II.94; A IV.400 (daṇḍ°); PvA 27 (phal°); esp. freq. in adinn° seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. - (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A V.233, 253 (°paṭinissagga); Dh 89 (id.; cp. DhA II.163); Sn 1103 (°taṇhā), 1104 (°satta); Nd1 98 (°gantha); Nd2 123, 124. -an° free from attachment S I.236 (sādānesu anādāno "not laying hold mong them that grip" trsl.); A II.10; It 109; J IV.354; Miln 342; DhA IV.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa°, pari°. Ādāya {Adaya} [ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. "with" (c. acc.) Sn 120, 247, 452; J V.13; Vbh 245; DhA II.74; SnA 139; PvA 10, 13, 38, 61 etc. - At Vin I.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of "a casually taken up belief" (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa°, pari°. Ādāyīn {Adayin} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D I.4 (dinn°); A III.80; V.137 (sār°); DA I.72. Ādāsa {Adasa} [Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2] a mirror Vin II.107; D I.7, 11 (°paðha mirror-questioning, cp. DA I.97: "ādāse devataṃ otaretvā paðha-pucchanaṃ"), 80; II.93 (dhamnaɔ-ādāsaṃ nāma dhamma-pariyāyaṃ desessāmi); S V.357 (id.); A V.92, 97 sq., 103; J I.504; Dhs 617 (°maṇḍala); Vism 591 (in simile); KhA 50 (°daṇḍa) 237; DhA I.226. -tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450, 456, 489. Ādāsaka {Adasaka} = ādāsa Th 2, 411. Ādi {Adi} [Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] - 1. (m.) starting-point, beginning Sn 358 (acc. ādiṃ = kāraṇaṃ SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom. ādi); Miln 10 (ādimhi); J VI.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. - 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (°-) beginning, initially, first, Pāli Text Society 242 Pāli-English Dictionary principal, chief: see cpds. - (b) (°-) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth (cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha-gumb-ādayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J I.150; amba-panasɔ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar kinds of fruit) J I.278; amba-labujɔādīnaṃ phalānaṃ anto J II.159; asi-satti-dhami-ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword, knife, bow & the like) J I.150; kasi-gorakkhɔ ādīni karonte manusse J II.128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J I.81; PvA 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaṃ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J II.128, 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). - In phrase ādiṃ katvā meaning "putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . . down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA I.393 (rājānaṃ ādiṃ K. from the king down); PvA 20 (vihāraṃ ādikatvā), 21 (paðcavaggiye ādiṃ K.). -kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin III.146; IV.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. -kalyāṇa in phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe-kalyāṇa pariyosāna-kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA I.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. °kalyāṇatā Vism 4. -pubbangama original Dpvs IV.26. -brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D I.189; III.284; M I.431; II.125, 211; III. 192; S II.75, 223; IV.91; V.417, 438; f. °ikā Vin I.64, 68; A I.231 sq. -majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa. Ādika {Adika} (adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M I.395, 479; II.213; S II.224; J VI.567. Cp. ādiya3. Ādicca {Adicca} [Vedic āditya] the sun S I.15, 47; II.284; III.156; V.44, 101; A I.242; V.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("ādicco vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA IV. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40. upaṭṭhānā sun-worship D I.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA I.97); J II.72 (°jātaka; ādiccaṃ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaṃ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). -patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ākāsa DhA III.177). -bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin II.296; S I.186, 192; A II.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b; Vv 425, 7810; VvA 116. Ādiṇṇa {Adinna} [Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati2] broken, split open S IV.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M I.306. Ādiṇṇata {Adinnata} (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps I.49. Āditta {Aditta} [ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin I.34; Kv 209 (sabbaṃ ādittaṃ); S III.71; IV.19, 108; A IV.320 (°cela); Sn 591; J IV.391; Pv I.85 (= paditta jalita PvA 41); Kvu 209; DA I.264; PvA 149; Sdhp 599. -pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S IV.168 sq.; Vin I.34; DhA I.88. Ādina {Adina} only at D I.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādinakhattiya-kula primordial. See note in Dial. I.148. Ādiya1 {Adiya} (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A III.45 (bhojanāni). Ādiya2 {Adiya} in °mukha is uncertain reading at A III.164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya° & ādheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e. gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. ādheyya°, C. has v. l. ādheyya°) where Pāli Text Society 243 Pāli-English Dictionary Pug A 248 explns. "ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama-vacanasmiṃ yeva ṭhapita-mukho ti attho" (sticking to one's word?). See ādheyya. Ādiya3 {Adiya} = ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning J VI.567 (= ādikena C.). Ādiya4 {Adiya} ger. of ādiyati. Ādiyati1 {Adiyati} [ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di° & dī°; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. pres. ādiyati A IIJ.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124; J III.296: V.367. - pot. ādiye Sn 400; imper. ādiya M III.133 (so read for ādissa?). - aor. ādiyi D III.65; A III.209, ādiyāsi Pv IV.148 (sayaṃ daṇḍaṃ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA 241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S I.132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. "put this into thy mind"). - ger. ādiyitvā Vin IV.120 (= ādā); J II.224 (C. for ādiya T.); III.104; IV.352 (an° not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J III.196); DhA III.32 (id.); PvA 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaṃ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S III.26 (v. l. an° for anādīya); J II.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya S III.26 (an°). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati. Ādiyati2 {Adiyati} [ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps I.49. - pp. ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa. Ādiyanatā {Adiyanata} (f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an° the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA 516. Ādisati {Adisati} [ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. - (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaṃ or dānaṃ). - pres. ind. ādisati D I.213 = A I.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atītaṃ); Nd1 382 (nakkhattaṃ set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dānaṃ); pot. ādiseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhiṇaṃ); Pv IV.130 (id. = uddiseyya PvA 228), & ādise Vin I.229 = D II.88 (dakkhiṇaṃ); imper. ādisa PvA 49. - fut. ādissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaṃ) PvA 88 (id.). - aor. ādisi Pv II.28; PvA 46 (dakkhiṇaṃ); pl. ādisiṃsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuṃ Pv I.106 (id.). - ger. ādissa Vin III.127; Sn 1018; Pv II.16 (dānaṃ), & ādisitvāna Th 2, 311. - grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M I.12. Ādiso {Adiso} (adv.) [orig. abl. of ādi, Qormed with °saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D I.180; M III.208. Ādissa {Adissa} at M III.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest. Ādissa2 {Adissa} (adj.) blameworthy M I.12; MA =garāyha. Ādīna {Adina} at D I.115 & S V.74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa. Ādīnava {Adinava} [ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning "full of wretchedness", cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu III.297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) D I.38 (vedanānaṃ assādað ca ādīnavað ca etc.), 213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriye M I.318; S I.9 (ettha bhīyo); II.170 sq. (dhātūnaṃ); III.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); IV.7, 168; A I.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); III.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala-ppasāde); Pāli Text Society 244 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.439 sq.; V.81; J I.146; IV.2; It 9 = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; Sn 36, 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732; Th 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA 287); Pv III.107 (= dosa PvA 214); IV.67 (= dosa PvA 263); Ps I.192 sq.; II.9, 10; PvA 12, 208. - There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla-vipattiyā ā. at D II.85 = III.235 = A III.252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh 378; six of six each at D III.182 sq. - In phrase kāmānaṃ ā. okāro sankileso D I.110, 148; M I.115; Nett 42; DhA 16. -ānupassin realising the danger or evil of S II.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. °ānupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695. -dassāvin same as °ānupassin D I.245 (an°); A V.178 (id.); D III.46; S II.194, 269; A III.146; V.181 sq.; Nd2 141. -pariyesanā search for danger in (-°) S II.171; III.29; IV.8 sq. -saððā consciousness of danger D I.7); III.253, 283; A III.79. Ādīpanīya {Adipaniya} (adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln 270. Ādīpita {Adipita} [pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S I.31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J V.366; DhA III.32 (v. l. āditta). Ādu {Adu} (indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J III. 499 = VI.443; V.180; VI.552. - (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiṃ . . . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv IV.317 = DhA I.31; J V.384; VI.382; without udāhu at J V.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu. Ādeti {Adeti} [a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day° & de°), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn 121 (= gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd1 444); cp. I.43; J III. 103, 296; V.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln 336. Ādeyya {Adeyya} (adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase °vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin II.158; J VI.243; Miln 110; ThA 42. Ādeva & Ādevana {Adeva} {Adevana} [ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari° ādevitattaṃ pari° Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps I.38. Ādesa {Adesa} [fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiṃ-nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc. case: paccatta-vacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo. Ādesanā {Adesana} (f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase °pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind-reading or guessing other peoples character Vin II. 200; D I.212, 213; III.220; A I.170, 292; V.327; Ps II. 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted °vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D III.103. Ādhāna {Adhana} (nt.) [ā + dhāna] - 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A IV.41 (aggissa ādhānaṃ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaṃ). - 2. receptacle M I.414 (udak°), cp. ādheyya. - 3. enclosure, hedge Miln 220 (kaṇṭak° thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka). -gāhin holding one's own place, i. Pāli Text Society 245 Pāli-English Dictionary e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase, viz. sandiṭṭhi-parāmāsin ādhāna-gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin II.89; M I.43, 96; A III.335 (v. l. ādāna°, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); D III.247 (adhāna°). Ādhāra {Adhara} [ā + dhāra] - 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A III.27; J VI.257. - 2. "holding up", i. e. support, basis, prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms-bowl (patta) Vin II.113 (an° patto); M III.95; S V.21; J V.202. - fig. S V.20 (an° without a support, cittaṃ); Vism 8, 444. - 3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case ("resting on") Sn 211. Ādhāraka {Adharaka} (m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] - 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra2) (always m., except at J I.33 where °āni pl. nt.) J I.33; DhA III.290 = VvA 220; DhA III.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaṃ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaṃ). - 2. a reading desk, pulpit J III.235; IV.299. Ādhāraṇatā {Adharanata} (f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.). Ādhārita {Adharita} [pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1] supported, held up Miln 68. Ādhāvati {Adhavati} [ā + dhavati1] to run towards a goal, to run after M I.265 (where id. p. S II.26 has upadh°); DA I. 39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvaQi to run about, e. g. J I.127, 134, 158; II.68. Ādhāvana {Adhavana} (nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln 135. Ādhpacca & Ādhipateyya {Adhpacca} {Adhipateyya} (nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya "being over-lord"; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S V.342 (issariy°); A I.62 (id.), 147, 212; II.205 (id.); III.33, 76; IV.252 sg.; Pv II.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna II.2b; see also D III. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at PvA 137); J I.57; Dāvs V.17; VvA 126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att°, lok°, dhamm°) at Vism 14. Ādhuta {Adhuta} [ā + dhuta1] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 394 (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaṃ Dāvs V.49; VvA 178 expls. by saṇikaṃ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned). Ādheyya {Adheyya} (adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2] to be deposited (in one's head & heart Pug A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya2]; nt. depository (= ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug A 217) Pug 34 (°ṃ gacchati is deposited); Miln 359 (sabbe tassɔ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property). -mukha see ādiya2. Ānaka {Anaka} [Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S II.266; J II. 344; Dpvs XVI.14. Ānañca {Ananca} see ākāsa° see ākāsa° and viððāṇa°. Ānañja {Ananja} see ānejja. Pāli Text Society 246 Pāli-English Dictionary Ānaṇya {Ananya} (nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an-aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D I.73; A III.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA I.3. Ānadati {Anadati} [ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J IV.233. Ānana {Anana} (nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. (-°) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63 (vikaṭ°). Ānantarika {Anantarika} (& °ya) [fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin I.321; II. 212; Pug 13; Dhs 1291. -kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay" (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin II.193; J I.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25 (cp. Dhs trsl. 267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna). Ānanda {Ananda} [Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D I.3; Sn 679, 687; J I.207 (°maccha Leviathan); VI.589 (°bheri festive drum); DA I 53 (= pītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ). Ānandati {Anandati} [ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J VI. 589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi-cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya. Ānandin {Anandin} (adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th 1, 555; J IV.226. Ānandiya {Anandiya} (adj.-.) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J VI.589 (°ṃ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.). Ānandī {Anandi} (f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi-citta J VI.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati). Ānaya {Anaya} (adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S I.124 = J I.80. Ānayati {Anayati} see āneti. Ānāpāna {Anapana} (nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S V.132, 311 sq.; J I.58; Ps I.162 (°kathā); usually in cpd. °sati concentration by in-breathing & out-breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M I.425 (cp. D II.291); III.82; Vin III.70; A I.30; It 80; Ps I.166, 172, 185 (°samādhi); Nd2 466 B (id.); Miln 332; Vism 111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati. Ānāpeti {Anapeti} see āneti. Ānāmeti {Anameti} [ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J V.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to). Pāli Text Society Ānisaṃsa 247 Pāli-English Dictionary [ā + ni + saṃsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaṃsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage, good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). - There are five ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīla-sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at D II.86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self-confidence, asammūlho kālaṃ karoti an untroubled death, saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajjati a happy state after death. - D I.110, 143; III.132 (four), 236 (five); M I.204; S I.46, 52; III.8, 93 (mahā°); V.69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A I.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); II.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā°); III.41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita-satissa), 253 sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; IV.150 (mettāya ceto-vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākāsɔānaðcāyatane); V.I, 106 (mahā°), 311; It 28, 29, 40 (sikkhā°); Sn 256 (phala°), 784, 952; J I.9, 94; V.491 (v. l. anu°); Nd1 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln 198; VvA 6, 113; PvA 9 (dāna°) 12, 64 (= phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263. - Eleven ānisaṃsas of mettā (cp. Ps II.130) are given in detail at Vism 311314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq. {Anisamsa} Ānisada {Anisada} (nt.) [a + sad] "sit down", bottom, behind M I. 80 = 245; J III.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = KhA 45 (°ttaca), 252 (°maṃsa). Ānuttariya {Anuttariya} (nt.) [see also anuttariya which as -° probably represents ānutt°] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D III.102 sq.; A V.37. Ānīta {Anita} [pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J I.291; III.127; IV.1. Ānupuṭṭha {Anuputtha} metri causa for anupuṭṭha metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.). Ānupubba {Anupubba} (nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th 1, 727 (cp. M Vastu II.224 ānupubbā). Ānupubbatā {Anupubbata} (f.) (or °ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padānu-pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd1 140; Nd2 137 (v. l. °ka). Ānupubbikathā {Anupubbikatha} [for anupubbi° representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi°] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D I.110; II.41 sq.; M I.379; J I.8; Miln 228; DA I.277, 308; DhA IV.199. Ānubhāva {Anubhava} [the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J I.69 (mahanto); II.102 (of a jewel) V.491; DhA II.58. Ānejja & Ānañja {Anejja} {Ananja} [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or *iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*aðgya). The third P. form ān-eñja is a direct (later, and probably re-instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in an interesting way became in BSk. re-sanskritised to āðijya (which on the other hand may represent āðejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on Pāli Text Society 248 Pāli-English Dictionary MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin III. 109 (ānaðja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś I.199. - The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja-ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin III.267 (on Pār. I.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. - The various spellings of the word are as follows: - 1. ānejja D I.76 (v. l. ānaðja-p.) A II.184 (p.); III.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, ānaðja) = Vbh 137 (āneðja); Nd2 569a (v. l. ānaðja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneðja); Pug 60 (p.); DA I.219 (v. l. BB āneðja). - 2. ānaðja Vin III.4 (p.) (v. l. ānaðca°, anaðja°, ānaðja°; Bdhgh. ānejja° p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānaðca); DhA IV.46. See also below cpd. °kāraṇa. - A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M II.229 (v. l. aṇaðja, aneðja, āneðja), 253, 254. - 3. āneðja S II.82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D III.217 (°ābhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps II.206; Vbh 135, 340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen° fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. - See also iñjati. -kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J I.415; II.325 (v. l. āṇaðja, āneðca, ānaðca); IV.308; V.273, 310. Āneñjatā {Anenjata} (f.) [fr. āneðja] steadfastness Vism 330, 386. Āneti {Aneti} [ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Sn 110; PvA 54, 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha M I.371. fut. ānayissati S I.124; Pv II.65; J III.173; V.154 (v. l.), & ānessati J V.154. inf. ānayituṃ Pv II 610, ger. ānetvā PvA 42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA 3, & ānayi Pv I.77 (sapatiṃ). - pp. ānīta (q. v.). - Med. pass. ānīyati & āniyyati D II.245 (āniyyataṃ imper. shall be brought); M I. 371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). - Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J III.391; V.225. Āpa & Āpo {Apa} {Apo} (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. - Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *)lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below °dhātu. - D II.259; M I.327; S II.103; III.54, 207; A IV.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (°ṃ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J IV.8 (paṭhavi-āpa-teja°); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100. -kasiṇa the water-device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D III.268; J I.313; Dhs 203; Vism 170; DhA I 312; III.214. -dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D III.228, 247; M I.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. -rasa the taste of water A I.32; SnA 6. -sama resembling water M I.423. Āpakā {Apaka} (f.) [= āpagā] river J V.452; VI.518. Āpagā {Apaga} (f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th 1, 309; Sn 319; J V.454; Dāvs I.32; VvA 41. Āpajjati {Apajjati} [Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin II.126 (saṃvaraṃ); D I.222 (pariyeṭṭhiṃ); It 113 (vuddhiṃ); J I.73; Pug 20, 33 (diṭṭhɔānugatiṃ); PvA 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA II.71 - pot. āpajjeyya D I.119 (musāvādaṃ). aor. āpajji J V.349; PvA 124 (sankocaṃ) & āpādi S I.37; A II.34; It 85; J II.293; 3rd pl. āpādu D II.273. - ger. āpajjitva PvA 22 (saṃvegaṃ), 151. - pp. āpanna (q. v.). - Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). - Pāli Text Society 249 Pāli-English Dictionary Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naṃ It 86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin II.203 (CV. VII.4, 8) has āsajjanaṃ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaṃ. Cp. pariyāpajjati. Āpaṇa {Apana} [Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin I.140; J I.55; V.445; Pv II.322; Miln 2, 341; SnA 440; DhA I. 317; II.89; VvA 157; PvA 88, 333 (phal° fruit shop), 215. Āpaṇika {Apanika} [fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J I.124; Miln 344; VvA 157; DhA II.89. Āpatacchika {Apatacchika} at J VI.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārāpat° (q. v.). Āpatati {Apatati} [ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J V.349 (= upadhāvati C.); VI.451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln 371. Āpatti {Apatti} (f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n. 1), Vin I.103 (°khandha), 164 (°ṃ paṭikaroti), 322 (°ṃ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); II.2 sq. (°ṃ ropeti), 59, 60 (°pariyanta), 88 (°adhikaraṇa), 259 (°ṃ paṭikaroti); IV.344; D III.212 (°kusalatā); A I.84 (id.), 87; II.240 (°bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). - anāpatti Vin III.35. °vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin II.250 (put before anāpatti). Āpattika {Apattika} (adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M I.443; Vin IV.224. an° Vin I.127. Āpatha {Apatha} in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā°, dvedhā°. Āpathaka {Apathaka} in °jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka° in °jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka° at Nd1 226, and āpātaka° at Vism 26. Āpadā {Apada} (f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 3133] accident, misfortune, distress, D III.190; A II.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; III. 45; IV.31; Th 1, 371; J IV.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); V.340 (loc. āpade), 368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl. āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā. Āpanna {Apanna} [pp. of āpajjati] - 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin I.164 (āpattiṃ ā.); III.90; D I.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd2 32 (taṇhāya). - 2. unfortunate, miserable J I.19 (V.124). Cp. pari°. *Āpā & *Āvā {Apa} {Ava} (f.) [for āpadā, q. v.] misery, misfortune J II.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); III.12 (BB āvāsu); V.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v. l. apagata, C. apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu), 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v. l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu. Pāli Text Society 250 Pāli-English Dictionary Āpāṇa {Apana} [ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. °koṭi the end of life Miln 397; Dāvs III.93; adj. -koṭika M II.120; Vism 10. Āpātha {Apatha} [etym.? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: "I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so"] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance A II.67; J I.336; Vbh 321; Miln 298; Vism 21, 548; DA I.228; DhsA 308, 333; VvA 232 (°kāla); DhA IV.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaṃ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M I.190; S IV.160, or °ṃ āgacchati Vin I.184; A III.377 sq.; IV.404; Vism 125. Cp. °gata below. -gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M I.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an° unapproached); PvA 23 (āpāthaṃ gata). -gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617. Āpāthaka {Apathaka} (adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in °nisādin lying down visible D III.44, 47. Cp. āpathaka. Āpādaka {Apadaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + pad] - 1. (adj.) producing, leading to (-°) VvA 4 (abhiññ° catuttha-jjhāna). - 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A I.62 = 132 = It 110 (+ posaka). - f. āpādikā a nurse, foster-mother Vin II.289 (+ posikā). Āpādā {Apada} (f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an° not nursing, unmarried J IV.178. Āpādi {Apadi} aor. of āpajjati (q. v.). Āpādeti {Apadeti} [Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M I.78; III.248; S IV.110 (addhānaṃ to live one's life, cp. addhānaṃ āpādi J II.293 = jīvitɔaddhānaṃ āpādi āyuṃ vindi C.); SnA 466. - Cp. pari° Āpāna {Apana} (nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting-hall, drinking-hall J I.52 (°maṇḍala); V.292 (°bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); DhA I.213 (id., raððo). Āpānaka {Apanaka} (adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D I.167. Āpānīya {Apaniya} (adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in °kaṃsa drinking-bowl, goblet M I. 316; S II.110. Āpāyika {Apayika} (adj.-n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin II.202 = It 85 (v. l. ap°); Vin II.205; D I.103; A I.265; It 42; Vism 16; PvA 60. Āpiyati {Apiyati} [fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364. Āpucchati {Apucchati} [ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J I.140; PvA 110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA I.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin IV.267 (apaloketvā +); Miln 29; PvA 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th 2, 426; āpuccha Th 2, 416, & āpucchā [= āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an° without asking Vin II.211, 219; IV.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA I.81. - pp. āpucchita Vin IV.272. Pāli Text Society 251 Pāli-English Dictionary Āpūrati {Apurati} [a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J III.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); IV.26, 99, 100. Āpeti {Apeti} [Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J VI.46. Cp. vy°. Āphusati {Aphusati} [ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi VvA 84). Ābaddha {Abaddha} [pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA I. 127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA I.88; PvA 82 (Tissāya °sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, °hadaya). Ābandhaka {Abandhaka} (adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (loc.) PvA 169 (sīse). Ābandhati {Abandhati} (ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J IV.132, 289; V.319, 338, 359. - pp. ābaddha. Ābandhana {Abandhana} (nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] - 1. tie, bond DA I. 181 = Pug A 236 (°atthena ðāti yeva ðāti-parivaṭṭo). - 2. tying, binding Vism 351 (°lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). - 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J V.319 (but cp. C. expln. "hatthi-assa-rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇḍakāni", thus taking it as ā + bhaṇḍa + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough. Ābādha {Abadha} [ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin IV.261; D I.72; II.13; A I.121; III.94, 143; IV.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism 41 (udaravāta°) 95; VvA 351 (an° safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp 85. - A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha°, vāta°, sannipātikā, utu-pariṇāmajā, visama-parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304I.C., recurring with slight variations at S IV.230; A II.87; III.131; V.110; Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). - Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin II., p. 351. - Five ābādhas at Vin I. 71, viz. kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍo kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. - Three ābādhas at D III.75, viz. icchā anasanaṃ jarā, cp. Sn 311. - See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa. Ābādhika {Abadhika} (adj.-n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A III.189, 238; Nd1 160; Miln 302; DA 212; DhA I.31; PvA 271. - f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A II.144. Ābādhita {Abadhita} [pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th 1, 185. Ābādheti {Abadheti} [ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S IV.329. Ābila {Abila} (adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J V.90. Ābhata {Abhata} [pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D I.142; S. I.65; A II.71, 83; It 12, 14 with phrase yathābhataṃ as he has been reared (cp. J V.330 evaṃ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv III.5 (ratt° = rattiyaṃ ā. PvA 199); DhA II.57, 81; IV.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathābhata. Pāli Text Society 252 Pāli-English Dictionary Ābhataka {Abhataka} (adj.) = ābhata; DA I.205 (v. l. ābhata). Ābharaṇa {Abharana} (nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D I. 104; Vv 802; J III.11, 31; DhA III.83; VvA 187. Ābharati {Abharati} [ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J IV.351. Ābhassara {Abhassara} (adj.-n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens "the radiant gods", usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D I.17; Dh 200; It 15; DhA III.258 (°loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq. Ābhā {Abha} (f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D II.12; M III.147 (adj. -°); S II.150 (°dhātu); A II.130, 139; III.34; Mhvs XI.11; VvA 234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA IV.191; Sdhp 286. Ābhāti {Abhati} [ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh 387 (= virocati DhA IV.144); J V.204. See also ābheti. Ābhāveti {Abhaveti} [ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv II.1319 (mettacittaṃ; gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vaḍḍhetvā brūhetvā PvA 168). Ābhāsa {Abhasa} [Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appearance M III.215. Ābhicetasika {Abhicetasika} (adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent. Ābhidosika {Abhidosika} (adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin III.15 (of food; stale); M I.170 (°kālakata died last night); Miln 291. Ābhidhammika {Abhidhammika} (adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the Abhidhamma {Abhidhamma} Miln 17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi° atKhA 151; J IV.219. Ābhindati {Abhindati} [ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S IV.160 (v. l. a°). Ābhisekika {Abhisekika} (adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin V.129. Ābhujati {Abhujati} [ā + bhujati, bhuj1] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallankaṃ ā° "to bend in the round lap" or "bend in hookwise", to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin I.24; D I.71; M I.56 (v. l. ābhuðjitvā), 219; A III. 320; Pug 68; Ps I.176; J I.71, 213; Miln 289; DA I. 58, 210. In other connection J I.18 (V.101; of the ocean "to recede"); Miln 253 (kāyaṃ). Pāli Text Society Ābhujana 253 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallankɔābhujana sitting cross-legged J I 17 (V.91); PvA 219. {Abhujana} Ābhujī {Abhuji} (f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J V.195 (= bhūjapatta-vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.). Ābhūñjati {Abhunjati} [ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J IV.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. "hold in its hood"?); DhsA 333. Ābhuñjana {Abhunjana} (nt.) [fr. ābhuðjati] partaking of, enjoying, experiencing DhsA 333. Ābheti {Abheti} [*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv II.126 (ppr. °entī); Vv 82 (°antī, v. l. °entī; = obhāsentī VvA 50). Ābhoga {Abhoga} [fr. ābhuðjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4) which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara "pasturing", fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D I.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DA I.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh 320; Miln 97; Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (°paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68. Āma1 {Ama} (indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu° "that" (see asu), thus deictic-emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś I.36] affirmative part. "yes, indeed, certainly" D I.192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J I.115, 226 (in C. expln. of T. amā-jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); II.92; V.448; Miln 11, 19, 253; DhA I.10, 34; II.39, 44; VvA 69; PvA 12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc. Āma2 {Ama} (adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w)mo/s, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz. (a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: °gandha "smell of raw flesh", verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu III.214) D II.242 sq.; A I.280; Sn 241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and °giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J VI.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.). Āmaka {Amaka} (adj.) [= āma2] raw, uncooked D I.5 = Pug 58 (°maṃsa raw flesh); M I.80 (tittakalābu āmaka-cchinno). -dhañña "raw" grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D I.5 = Pug 58 (see DA I.78 for definition); Vin IV.264; V.135. -sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. -susāna "cemetery of raw flesh" charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i. e. fetid smelling cremation ground J I.264, 489; IV.45 sq.; VI.10; DhA I.176; VvA 76; PvA 196. Āmaṭṭha {Amattha} [Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J I.98 (an°); DA I.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333. Āmaṇḍaliya {Amandaliya} [ā + maṇḍala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase °ṃ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M I 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇḍalikaroti). Āmata {Amata} in anāmata at J II.56 is métric for amata. Pāli Text Society Āmattikā 254 Pāli-English Dictionary (f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in °āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler's shop Vin IV.243. {Amattika} Āmaddana {Amaddana} (nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA 311. Āmanta {Amanta} (adj.-adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an° without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin I.254 (°cāra); A III.259 (id.). Āmantana {Amantana} (nt.) & °nā (f., also °ṇā) [from āmanteti] addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn 40 (ep. Nd2 128); °vacana the address-form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaṃ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167. Āmantanaka {Amantanaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. °ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa-sallāpa-yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA 96). Āmantaṇīya {Amantaniya} (adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J IV.371. Āmantita {Amantita} [pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv II.313 (= nimantita PvA 86). Āmanteti {Amanteti} [denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J VI.265; DA I.297; SnA 487 (= ālapati & avhayati); PvA 75, 80, 127. - aor. āmantesi D II.16; Sn p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn 997; Pv II.27; 37 (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J III.209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; IV.111; V.233; VI.511. - pp. āmantita (q. v.). - Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D I.134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln 149. Āmaya {Amaya} [etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an° (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa II.9) Vin I.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74); 177; 368; J III.260, 528; IV. 427; VI.23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp 397. Āmalaka {Amalaka} [cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin I.201, 278; II.149 (°vaṇṭika pīthu); S I.150; A V.170; Sn p. 125 (°matti); J IV.363; V.380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln 11; DhA I.319; VvA 7. Āmalakī {Amalaki} (f.) āmalaka Vin I.30; M I.456 (°vana). Āmasati {Amasati} [ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin II.221; III.48 (kumbhiṃ); J III.319 (id.); A V.263, 266; J IV.67; Ps II.209; Miln 306; SnA 400; DhsA 302; VvA 17. aor. āmasi J II.360; ger. āmasitvā Vin III.140 (udakapattaṃ) J II.330; grd. āmassa J II.360 (an°) and āmasitabba id. (C.). - pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.). Āmasana {Amasana} (nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin IV.214. Cp. III.118; Miln 127, 306; DA I.78. Pāli Text Society 255 Pāli-English Dictionary Āmasita {Amasita} [pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA 113 (an° khetta virgin land). Āmāya {Amaya} (adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri causa may be written ā°] "born in the house" (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenh/s > indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. °dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J VI.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiṃ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā). Āmāsaya {Amasaya} [āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya. Āmilāka {Amilaka} (nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA I.87. Āmisa {Amisa} (nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. - Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] - 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared, uncultivated"; thus °khāra raw lye Vin I. 206. - 2. "fleshy, of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M I.12 (°dāyāda); It 101 (id.); A I.91 = It 98 (°dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (°paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350). 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin II.269 sq.; J II.6; Miln 413 (lok°); DA I.83 (°sannidhi), - 4. bait S I.67; IV.158; J IV.57, 219; VI.416; DA I.270. - 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase °kiñcikkha-hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S II.234; A I.128; V.265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv II.83 (= kiñci āmisaṃ patthento PvA 107); Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). - 6. enjoyment Pv II.82 (= kāmāmise-laggacitto PvA 107). - 7. greed, desire, lust Vin I.303 (°antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A III.144 (id.), 184 (id.); I.73 (°garū parisā); J V.91 (°cakkhu); Ps II.238 (mār°). See also cpds. with nir° and sa°. Āmuñcati {Amuncati} [ā + mtic] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA 305. - pp. āmutta (q. v.). Āmutta {Amutta} [Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always °-) D I.104 (°mālābharaṇa); Vin II.156 = Vv 208 (°maṇi-kuṇḍala); S I.211; J IV.460; V. 155; VI.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (°hatthābharaṇa); Pv II.951 (°maṇikuṇḍala);J IV.183; VvA 182. Āmeṇḍita {Amendita} (or Āmeḍita) [Sk. āmreḍita fram ā + mreḍ, dialectical] - (nt.) sympathy in °ṃ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA I.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA āmeḍita). Āmo {Amo} = āma D I.192, 3. Āmoda {Amoda} [Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs V.51. Āmodanā {Amodana} (f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs 86, 285. Pāli Text Society 256 Pāli-English Dictionary Āmodamāna {Amodamana} (adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S I.100 (v. l. anu°) = It 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna VvA 278); J V.45. Āmodita {Amodita} [pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J I.17 (V.80); V.45 (°pamodita highly pleased); Miln 346. Āmodeti {Amodeti} [Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th 1, 649 (cittaṃ); J V.34. - pp. āmodita (q. v.). Āya {Aya} [Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M III.93. - 2. tax J V.113. - 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A IV.282 = 323; Sn 978; J I.228; KhA 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA 130. - 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice ("the incomer") J VI.281. -kammika a treasurer DhA I.184. -kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. -kosalla proficiency in money making D III.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh 325. -pariccāga expediture of one's income PvA 8. mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D I.74 (= āgamana-magga DA 1.78); M II.15; A II.166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173. Āyata {Ayata} [Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] - 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D III.73 (ðātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M I.178 (dīghato ā°; tiriyað ca vitthata); J I.77, 273 (tettiṃsɔ-angulɔāyato khaggo); III.438; Vv 8415 (°aṃsa; cp. expln. at VvA 339); SnA 447; DhsA 48; PvA 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (°vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257. - 2. (n.) a bow J III.438. -agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It 15, 52. -paṇhin having long eye-lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D II.17 = III.143. -pamha a long eye-lash Th 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA 250). Āyataka (adj.) [= āyata] - 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin II.108 (gītassara); A III.251 (id.); J I.362. - 2. sudden, abrupt, instr. °ena abruptly Vin II.237. {Ayataka} Āyatana {Ayatana} (nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S IV.70. - For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA I. 124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saṃsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni" and at Vism 527 "āye tanoti āyatað ca nayatī ti ā."] - 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA I.124 as "samosaraṇa") D III.241, 279 (vimutti°); S II.41, 269; IV.217; V.119 sq., 318. sq.; A III.141 (ariya°); V.61 (abhibh°, q. v.) Sn 406 (rajass° "haunt of passion" = rāgādi-rajassa uppatti-deso SnA 381); J I.80 (raj°). Freq. in phrase araññ° a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J I.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54. - 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA I.124 as paññatti), usually -°, viz. kamm° Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasiṇ° A V.46 sq., 60; Ps I.28; titth° A I.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp° (art, craft) D I.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an° non-exertion, indolence, sluggishness J V.121. - 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense-organ & object; relation, order. - Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense-organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects". - These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt°: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh°: 1. rūpa visible object, 2. sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. - For details as regards Pāli Text Society 257 Pāli-English Dictionary connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. - Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of āyatana at DA I.124 as saðjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2 under rūpa for further classifications. - For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D II.302 sq.; III.102, 243; A III.400; V.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps I.7, 22, 101, 137; II. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S I.113, II.3; IV.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D II.112, 156; of 2 at D II.69. - Here also belongs ākāsɔ ānaðcɔ āyatana, ākiðcaðð° etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D I.34 sq., 183; A IV.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq. - Unclassified passages: M I.61; II.233; III.32, 216, 273; S I.196; II.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.; III.228; IV.98; V.426; A I.113, 163, 225; III.17, 27, 82, 426; IV.146, 426; V.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1 109, 133, 171, 340; J I.38 1 (paripuṇṇa°); Vbh 412 sq. (id.). -uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin I.185. -kusala skilled in the ā. M III.63. -kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D III.212; Dhs 1335. -ṭṭha founded in the sense-organs Ps I.132; II.121. Āyatanika {Ayatanika} (adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S IV.126 (phass° niraya & sagga). Āyati {Ayati} (f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiṃ (adv.) in future Vin II.89, 185; III.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiṃ, v. l. āyati); J I.89; V.431; DA I 236. Āyatika {Ayatika} (adj.) [fr. last] future S I.142. Āyatikā {Ayatika} (f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin II.123. Āyatta {Ayatta} [Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. - 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J V.395 (°mana = ussukkamana C.). - 2. striven after, pursued J I.341. - 3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsapassāsa°); Nett 194; Sdhp 477, 605. Āyanā {Ayana} (f.) [?] at DhsA 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian's construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in °āyanā, e. g. kankhā > kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus.-formation kankhāyati > kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna. Āyamati {Ayamati} [ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam ahaṃ āyamissāmi "my back feels weak, I will stretch it" Vin II.200; D III.209; M I.354; S IV.184; J I.491. - Besides this in commentaries e. g. J III.489 (mukhaṃ āyamituṃ). Āyasa {Ayasa} (adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S II. 182; A III.58; Dh 345; J IV.416; V.81; Vv 845 (an°? cp. the rather strange expln. at VvA 335). Āyasakya {Ayasakya} (nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A IV.96; J V.17; VvA 110; usually in phrase °ṃ pāpuṇāti to fall into disgrace Th 1, 292; J II.33 = 271; III.514. [Bdhgh. on A IV.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya]. Pāli Text Society 258 Pāli-English Dictionary Āyasmant {Ayasmant} (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula "piya-vacanaṃ garu°, sagārava-sappaṭissādhivacanaṃ", e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). - Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. - See also āvuso. Āyāga [ā + yāga of yaj] sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Sn 486 (= deyyadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhāna-bhūta SnA 412); Th 1, 566; J VI. 205 (°vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees). {Ayaga} Āyācaka {Ayacaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + yāc] one who begs or prays, petitioner Miln 129. Āyācati {Ayacati} [ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.] - 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin III.127; D I.240; PvA 160. - 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A I. 88; J I.169 = V.472; I.260; II.117. - pp. āyācita (q. v.). Āyācana {Ayacana} (nt.) [fr. āyācati] - 1. asking, adhortation, addressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. - 2. a vow, prayer A I.88; III.47; J I.169 = V.472. Āyācita {Ayacita} [pp. of āyācati] vowed, promised J I.169 (°bhattajātaka N.). Āyāta {Ayata} [pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210] gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407. Āyāti {Ayati} [ā + yāti of yā] to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into S I.240; Sn 669; Sn p. 116 (= gacchati SnA 463); J IV.410; pv II.1212 (= āgacchati PvA 158); DhA I.93 (imper. āyāma let us go). - pp. āyāta. Āyāna {Ayana} (nt.) [fr. ā + yā to go] coming, arrival: see āyanā. Āyāma {Ayama} [fr. ā + yam, see āyamati] - 1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin I.349 = J III.488 (mukh°). - 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato & instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. (-°): J I.7, 49 (°ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni); III.389; Miln 17 (ratanaṃ soḷasahatthaṃ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaṃ vitthārena), 282 (ratanaṃ catuhatthɔ āyāmaṃ); Vism 205 (+ vitth°); Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); VvA 188 (soḷasayojan°), 199 (°vitthārehi), 221 (°ato + vitth°); PvA 77 (+ vitth°), 113 (id. + ubbedha); DhA I.17 (saṭṭhi-yojan°). Āyāsa {Ayasa} [cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?] trouble, sorrow, only neg. an° (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble A IV.98; Th 1, 1008. Āyu {Ayu} (nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai)w/n "aeon", ai)e/n always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws. Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D III.68, 69, 73, 77; S III.143 (usmā ca); IV.294; A I.155; II.63, 66 (addh°); III.47; IV.76, 139; Sn 694, 1019; It 89; J I.197 (dīgh°); Pāli Text Society 259 Pāli-English Dictionary Vv 555 (cp. VvA 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man's āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234, 239, 258. - Long or divine life, dibbaṃ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin I.294; D III.146; S IV.275 sq.; A I.115; III. 33; IV.242, 396; Pv II.959 (= jīvitaṃ PvA 136). -ūhā see āyūhā. -kappa duration of life Miln 141; DhA I.250. -khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita-kkhaya) D I.17 (cp. DA I.110); III.29. -pamāṇa span or measure of life time D II.3; A I.213, 267; II.126 sq.; IV.138, 252 sq., 261; V.172; Pug 16; Vbh 422 sq.; SnA 476. -pariyanta end of life It 99; Vism 422. -sankhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs V.102. -sankhāra (usually pl. °ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D II.106; M I.295 sq.; S II.266; A IV.311 sq.; Ud 64; J IV.215; Miln 285; Vism 292; DhA I.129; PvA 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ-saṃskāra Divy 203. Āyuka {Ayuka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. āyu] - being of life; having a life or age A IV.396 (niyat°); VvA 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A IV.240; PvA 27; appāyuka A IV.247; PvA 103; both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati-vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D II.5-12 (see Table at Dial. II.6); DhA II.9; PvA 135; dasa-vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA 73; cattāḷīsa° DhA I.103; catusaṭṭhi-kappɔāyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422. Āyukin {Ayukin} (adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416. Āyuta {Ayuta} (adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] - 1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Th 1, 753 (dve pannarasɔāyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn 301 (nārī-varagaṇ° = °saṃyutta SnA 320); Pv II.124 (nānā-saragaṇ° = °yutta PvA 157). - 2. seized, conquered, in dur° hard to conquer, invincible J VI.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.). Āyutta [Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] - 1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv I.1014 (tejasɔāyuta T., but PvA 52 reads °āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); PvA 157 (= ākiṇṇa of Pv II.124). - 2. intent upon, devoted to S I.67. {Ayutta} Āyuttaka {Ayuttaka} (adj.-n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J I.230 (°vesa); IV.492; DhA I.101, 103, 180. Āyudha {Ayudha} is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D I.9 (v. l. āvudha). Āyuvant {Ayuvant} (adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234. Āyusmant {Ayusmant} (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (āyusmāviððāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?). Āyussa {Ayussa} (adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A III.145 dhamma). Āyūhaka {Ayuhaka} (adj.) [fr. āyūhati] keen, eager, active Miln 207 (+ viriyavā). Āyūhati {Ayuhati} [ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern's etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Pāli Text Society 260 Pāli-English Dictionary Morris'expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq., although contradictory in part.] lit. to push on or forward, aim at, go for, i. e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself S I.1 (ppr. anāyūhaṃ unstriving), 48; J VI.35 (= viriyaṃ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.). - (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Sn 210 (= karoti SnA 258); Miln 108 (kammaṃ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaṃ āyūhi), 326 (maggaṃ). - pp. āyūhita (q. v.). Āyūhana {Ayuhana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. āyūhati] - 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps I.10 sq., 32, 52; II.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā). - 2. furtherance, pursuit DA I.64 (bhavassa). Āyūhā {Ayuha} f. [āyu + ūhā] life, lifetime, only in °pariyosāna at the end of (his) life PvA 136, 162; VvA 319. Āyūhāpeti {Ayuhapeti} [Caus. II. fr. āyūhati] to cause somebody to toil or strive after DhsA 364. Āyūhita {Ayuhita} [*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh] busy, eager, active Miln 181. Āyoga {Ayoga} [Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] - 1. binding, bandage Vin II.135; Vv 3341; VvA 142 (°paṭṭa). - 2. yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj°), 1162. - 3. ornament, decoration Nd1 226; J III.447 (°vatta, for v. l. °vanta?). - 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D I.187; Dh 185 (= payogakaraṇa DhA III.238). - 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. - Cp. sam°. Ārakatta {Arakatta} (nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaṃ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A IV.145; DhA IV.228; DA I.146 = VvA 105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349. Ārakā {Araka} (adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā2] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin II.239 = A IV.202 (sanghamhā); D I.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M I.280 (adj.) S II.99; IV.43 sq.; A I.281; It 91; J I.272; III.525; V.451; Miln 243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + viratā). Ārakkha {Arakkha} [ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D II.59; III.289; S IV.97, 175, 195; A II.120; III.38; IV. 266, 270, 281 (°sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; V.29 sq.; J I.203; II.326; IV.29 (°purisa); V.212 (°ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (°parivāra); Pug 21 (an°), 24; Miln 154; Vism 19 (°gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (°devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA II.146; PvA 195; Sdhp 357, 365. Ārakkhlka {Arakkhlka} [fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J IV.29. Ārakkheyya {Arakkheyya} see arakkheyya. Āragga {Aragga} (nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A I.65; Sn 625, 631; Dh 401, 407; Vism 306; DhA II 51; IV.181. Āracayāracayā {Aracayaracaya} [ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning "to produce", but here as a sound-root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of Pāli Text Society 261 Pāli-English Dictionary intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *raðj or *raj). - SnA 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaṃ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaṃ koṭiṃ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviðjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviðjitvā ti attho. - Cp. āraðjita. Āraññaka {Arannaka} (adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araððaka (q. v.). - Vin I.92 (bhikkhū); II.32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M I.214; A III.100 sq., 219; IV.21; V.66; J III.174 (v. l. BB. a°); Miln 342; DhA II.94 (vihāra). Āraññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āraððaka, see also araððakatta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M I.214; III.40; A I.38. {Arannakatta} Āraññika {Arannika} (adj.) = āraððaka Vin III.15; A I.24; Pug 69; Vism 61, 71 (where defined); Miln 341. Ārañjita {Aranjita} [in form = Sk. *āraðjita, ā + pp. of raðjayati, Caus. of raðj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as *racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā°) mixed with raðj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also "beaten") M I.178 (hatthipadaṃ dantehi āraðjitaṃ an elephant-track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows). Ārata {Arata} [Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J IV.372 (= virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata). Ārati {Arati} (f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati VvA 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd2 462; Dhs 299. Āratta {Aratta} (nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J IV.444; Dāvs II.74. Āraddha {Araddha} (adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A I.148 (āraddhaṃ me viriyaṃ It 30; PvA 73 (ṭhapetuṃ began to place), 212 (gantuṃ). Cp. ārādhaka 1. -citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D I.176; M I.414; S II.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. -viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin I.182; D III.252, 268, 282, 285; A I.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hīna-viriya); Nd2 131; Ps I.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. °viriyatā M I.19. Ārabbha {Arabbha} (indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] - 1. beginning, under- taking etc., in cpd. °vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D III.256 = A IV.334 (eight such occasions enumd). - 2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference Pāli Text Society 262 Pāli-English Dictionary to, about D I.180; A II.27 = It 103 (senāsanaṃ ā.); Sn 972 (upekhaṃ; v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv I.41 (pubbe pete ā.); DhA I.3; II.37; PvA 3 (seṭṭhiputta-petaṃ ā.), 16, and passim. Ārabhati1 {Arabhati} [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M I.371 (pāṇaṃ). Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati {Arabhati} {Arabbhati} [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S I.156 (ārabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaṃ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A IV.334. - aor. ārabhi DhA II.38 & ārabbhi PvA 35. - ger. ārabbha, see sep. - pp. āraddha (q. v.). Ārambha {Arambha} [Sk. ārambha in meaning "beginning", fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] - 1. attempt, effort, inception of energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S I.76 (mah°); V.66, 104 sq. (°dhātu); III.338 (id.), 166 (°ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net 41; DhsA 145. -viriyārambha (cp. āraddha-viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin II.197; S IV.175; A I.12, 16. - 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an° unsupported, independent Sn 743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha. Ārammaṇa {Arammana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv I.41 (yaṃ kiñcɔ ārammaṇaṃ katvā); ārammaṇaṃ labhati (+ otāraṃ labhati) to get the chance S II.268; IV.185. - (2) condition, ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. °ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Sn 474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA I.288 (sappāy°); PvA 279. - (3) a basis for the working of the mind & intellect; i. e. sense-object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation" it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda- & sukhuma-rūpa, paððatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. XLI. & 209. - A 1. sq.; IV.385; Sn 506; Ps I.57 sq., 84 (four ā.); II.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm° object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (°sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127; VvA 11, 38. - rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D III.228; S III.53; A I.82; J I.304; II.439, 442; PvA 265. - ārammaṇaṃ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv I.41, above 1). - ārammaṇa-kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S III.266; ā°-paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. - (4) (-°) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay°), 98 (ek°); VvA 119 (buddh° pīti rapture centred in the Buddha). Āraha {Araha} (adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J VI.164. Ārā1 {Ara} (f.) [Sk. ārā; *ēl "pointed", as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 263 Pāli-English Dictionary Ārā2 {Ara} (indecl.) [Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa1 and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Sn 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh 253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA III.377 expls. by dūragata); J II.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); V.78 (saṃyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā. -cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A IV.389. -cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D I.4; M I.179; III.33; A III. 216, 348; IV.249; V.138, 205; DA I.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūracārin). Ārādhaka {Aradhaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin I.70 (an° one who fails); M I.491; II.197 = A I.69 = Miln 243; S V.19; A V.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). - 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (°ikā f.). Ārādhana {Aradhana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D II.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M I.479; II.199; A V.211 sq.; J IV.427. Ārādhanīya {Aradhaniya} (adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin I.70 (an°); J II.233 (dur°). Ārādhita {Aradhita} [pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510. Ārādheti {Aradheti} [Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy as well as Av. Ś] - 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J I.337 (dārake), 421, 452; II.72 (manusse); IV.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana-vāsena mānasaṃ); DhA II.71; Dāvs III.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaṃ); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaṃ ārādheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D I.118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha-citta to ārabhati); M I85, 341; S II.107; V.109; J II.372; Miln 25. - 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S V.23 (maggaṃ), 82, 180, 294; It III. (v. l. ārām°); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. - pp. ārādhita (q. v.). - See also parābhetvā. Ārāma {Arama} [Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] - 1. pleasure, fondness of (-°), delight, always as adj. (-°) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S I.235; IV.389 sq. (bhav°, upādān°); A I.35, 37, 130; II.28 (bhāvan°); It 82 (dhamm°); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme ārāmo assā ti"); Pug 53 (samagg°); Vbh 351. - 2. a pleasure-ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin III.49 as pupph° and phal° a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA III.246 as Veḷuvana-Jīvakɔ ambavanɔ ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango-groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin II.109; D I. 106; Dh 188; Vv 795 (amb° garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv II.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārāmɔ ûpavanāni PvA 102). - (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇḍika (Jetavana; see J I.92-94) D I.178; Vin IV.69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin I.233); of Mallikā (D I.178), etc. - Vin I.39, 140, Pāli Text Society 264 Pāli-English Dictionary 283, 291; II.170; III.6, 45, 162; IV.85; A II.176; Dpvs V.18. -pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin II. 109; VvA 288. -ropa, -ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S I.33; PvA 151. -vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin I.140; II. 170; III.50, 90. Ārāmakinī {Aramakini} (f.) see ārāmika. Ārāmatā {Aramata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A II.28; III.116; Vbh 381; Miln 233. Ārāmika {Aramika} (adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln 6 (sanghassa trsl. at the service of the order). - 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin I.207 sq.; II.177 (& °pesaka), 211; III.24; IV.40; V.204; A II.78 (°samaṇuddesa); III.109 (id.), 275 (°pesaka); J I.38 (°kicca) Vism 74 (°samaṇuddesa). - f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin I.208. Ārāva {Arava} [cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs IV.46. Āraha {Araha} (nt.) only in pl. gihīnaṃ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D III.163. Āriya {Ariya} in anāriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.). Āruṇṇa {Arunna} (nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lamenting Miln 357. Āruppa {Aruppa} (adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā (= a2) - *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D III.275; M I.410, cp. 472; III.163; S I.131 (°ṭṭhāyin); II.123; A IV.316; It 61; Sn 754; J I.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA I.224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism III, 326 sq. Āruhati {Aruhati} [ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor. āruhaṃ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Sn 321 & āruyha J VI.452; Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. - Caus. āropeti (q. v.). Ārūgya {Arugya} see ārogya. Ārūḷha {Arulha} [pp. of āruhati] - 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to IV.137; J VI.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma-paṭipadaṃ an°); VvA 64 (magga°); PvA 47 (°nāva), 56 (hatthi°). - 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA 2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijðām ārūḍha having taken a vow Divy 26). - 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J VI.153, 488. Ārūha {Aruha} see āroha. Ārogatā {Arogata} (f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln 341. Ārogya {Arogya} (nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D I.11; III.220 (°mada), 235 (°sampadā); M I.451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S II.109; A I.146 (°mada); II.143; III.72; V.135 sq.; Sn 749, 257 = Dh 204 = J III.196; Nd1 160; Vism 77 (°mada pride of health); PvA 129, 198; Sdhp 234. Pāli Text Society 265 Pāli-English Dictionary Ārocāpana {Arocapana} (nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announcement DhA II.167. Ārocāpeti {Arocapeti} (Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaṃ ā. Sn p. 111; J I.115, 125; DhA II.89; PvA 141. Ārocita {Arocita} [pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin II.213 (kāla). Āroceti {Aroceti} [ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś I.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D I.109, 224; Pv II.89 (aor, ārocayi); PvA 4, 13 (aððamaððaṃ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. - pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.). Ārodana {Arodana} (nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A III.268 sq.; J I.34; DhA I.184; II.100. Āropana {Aropana} (nt.) [fr. āropeti] "putting on to", impaling Miln 197 (sūl°), 290 (id.). Āropita {Aropita} [pp. of āropeti] - 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA 2. - 2. effected, made S III.12; PvA 92, 257. - 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA 220 (= āvuta). Āropeti {Aropeti} [Caus. of āruhati]. - 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) PvA 76 (pāsādaṃ), 160 (id.) - 2. to put on, take up to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv II.92 (yakkhaṃ yānaṃ āropayitvāna); PvA 62 (sarīraṃ citakaṃ ā.), 100 (bhaṇḍaṃ sakaṭesu ā.). - 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. loc.) J I.227; PvA 154 (rajjaṃ amaccesu ā.). - 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA 73, 257 (sangahaṃ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. - 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S I.160 (ovādaṃ); Miln 176 (dosaṃ); DhA II.75 (id.) - 6. vādaṃ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin I.60; M II.122; S I.160. - pp. āropita (q. v.). Āroha {Aroha} (-°) [fr. ā + ruh] - 1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in cpd. °pariṇāha length & circumference S II.206; A I.288; II.250; IV.397; V.19; J III.192; V. 299; VI.20; Vbh 345 (°māna + pariṇāha-māna); SnA 382. - 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass° & hatth° horse-rider & elephantrider S IV.310; A II.166 = III.162 (T. ārūha); IV.107; DhsA 305. - 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn 420 (vaṇṇ°). Ārohaṇa {Arohana} (nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J I.70; VI.488; Miln 352; Vism 244; PvA 74. Ālaka-manda {Alakamanda} [ālaya°?] at Vin II.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning ("open to view"? or "not having pegs" = āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussābhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as "the city of Kuvera" (cp. Sk. alakā). Ālaggeti {Alaggeti} [ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin II.110 (pattaṃ veḷagge ālaggetvā). Ālapati {Alapati} [ā + lapati] to address S I.177, 212; J V.201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Sn 997), 487 (- avhayati); PvA 11, 13, 33, 69. Pāli Text Society 266 Pāli-English Dictionary Ālapana {Alapana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin III.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J V.253 (°ā); Vism 23 (°ā); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti ā.). Ālapanatā {Alapanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M I.331) (an°). Ālamba [Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S I.53 (an° without support); Sn 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J III.396; Miln 343; Sdhp 245, 463. {Alamba} Ālambati {Alambati} [ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin I.28, J I.57; VI.192; Vv 8448; ThA 34. - ālambeti id. VvA 32. Ālambana {Alambana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J III.396; IV.457; SnA 214. - (nt.) support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin II.117, 152 (°bāha) Miln 126. Ālambara & Āḷambara {Alambara} (nt.) [Sk. āḍambara] a drum Vin I.15 (l); J II.344 (ḷ); V.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ). Ālaya {Alaya} (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] - 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J I.10 (geh°); Miln 213; DhA II.162 (an° = anoka), 170 (= oka). - 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire, clinging, lust S I.136 = Vin I.4 (°rāma "devoted to the things to which it clings" K. S.); Vin III.20, 111; S IV.372 (an°); V.421 sq. (id.); A II. 34, 131 (°rāma); III.35; It 88; Sn 177 (kām° = kāmesu taṇhā-diṭṭhi-vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (°samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh °ṃ akāsi?); DhA I.121; IV.186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). - 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu III.314] J I.157 (gilān°), 438; III.533 (mat°); IV.37 (gabbhinī); VI 20, 262 (gilān°). Ālayati {Alayati} see allīyati. Ālassa {Alassa} (nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S I.43; D III.182; A IV.59; V.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya S I.43 (v. l. BB); Vbh 352; Miln 289, and ālasiya J I.427; DA I.310; DhA I.299; VvA 43. Ālāna & Āḷāna {Alana} (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh° and contraction of °āhana to °āna originally meaning "tying to" then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J I.415; IV.308; DhA I.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly. Āli1 {Ali} (m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J V.405. Āli2 & Āḷi {Ali} {Ali} (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin II.256; M III.96; A II.166 (°pabbheda); III.28; J I.336; III.533, 334. Ālika {Alika} in saccālika at S IV.306 is sacc°alika distortion of truth, falsehood S IV.306. Pāli Text Society 267 Pāli-English Dictionary Ālikhati {Alikhati} [ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J I.71; Miln 51. Ālinga {Alinga} [ā + ling] a small drum J V.156 (suvaṇṇ°-tala). Ālingati {Alingati} [ā + ling] to embrace, enfold D I.230; III.73; J I.281; IV.21, 316, 438; V.8; Miln 7; DhA I.101: VvA 260. Ālitta {Alitta} [pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th 1, 737. Ālinda & Āḷinda {Alinda} ) [Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah before the house-door Vin I.248; II.153; D I.89; M II.119; S IV.290 (ḷ); A V.65 (ḷ); J VI.429; DA I.252; DhA I. 26; IV.196; SnA 55 (°kavāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J III.283. Ālippati {Alippati} Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.). Ālimpana {Alimpana} (nt.) [for āḷimp° = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2] conflagration, burning, flame Miln 43. Ālimpita {Alimpita} [pp. of ālimpeti2] ignited, lit. A IV.102 (v. l. ālepita). Ālimpeti1 {Alimpeti} [Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin II.107; S IV.177 (vaṇaṃ). - Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin IV.316. - Pass. ālimpīyati Miln 74 & ālippati DhA IV.166 (v. l. for lippati). - pp. ālitta (q. v.). Ālimpeti2 {Alimpeti} [for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in °mp, like lup > lump, lip > limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin II.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); III.85; D II.163 (citakaṃ); A I.257; DhA I.177 (āvāsaṃ read āvāpaṃ), 225; PvA 62 (kaṭṭhāni). - pp. ālimpita (q. v.). Ālu {Alu} (nt.) [Sk. ālu & °ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J IV.371 = VI.578; IV.373. Āluka1 {Aluka} = ālu J IV.46 (C. for ālupa). Āluka2 {Aluka} (adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (-°) Vin I.288 (sīt°); DA I.198 (id.); J II.278 (taṇh° greedy). Ālupa {Alupa} (nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu-a > āluva > ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J IV.46 (= āluka-kaṇḍa C.). the form āluva occurs at Ap 237. Ālumpakāra {Alumpakara} [reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA II.55 (°gūtha). Ālumpati {Alumpati} [ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M I.324. Pāli Text Society 268 Pāli-English Dictionary Āluḷa {Alula} (adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J VI.431. Āluḷati {Alulati} [ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA IV.47 (T. ālūl°; v. l. āḷul°) confuse DhsA 375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J II.9, 33. - pp. āluḷita (q. v.). Āluḷita {Alulita} [pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J II.101; Miln 397 (+ khalita). Ālepa {Alepa} [cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin I.274; Miln 74; DhsA 249. Ālepana {Alepana} (nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D I.7 (mukkh°). Āloka {Aloka} [ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. - 1. sight, view, look S IV.128 = Sn 763; A III. 236 (āloke nikkhitta laid before one's eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln 296 (andha +). - 2. light A I. 164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It 100 (vihato); A II. 139 (four lights, i.e. canda°, suriya°, agg°, paññ°, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J II 34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA 51 (dīp°). - 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge D II.33 = S II.7 = 105, cp. Ps II.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on II.7). - 4. splendour VvA 53; DvA 71. -kara making light, bringing light, n. light-bringer It 108. -karaṇa making light, illumining It 108. -da giving light or insight Th 1, 3. -dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th 1, 422. -pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh 334; Nett 89. -bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A III.432. -bhūta light J VI 459. -saððā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D III.223; A II.45; III.93 -saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D III.49; M III.3; A II 211; III.92, 323; IV.437; V.207; Pug 69. -sandhi "break for the light", a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin I.48 = II.209 = 218; II.172; III.65; IV.47; J IV.310; PvA 24. Ālokana {Alokana} (nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA I.194. Ālokita {Alokita} (nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaṃ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita-vilokita in ster. phrase at D I.70 = e. g. A II.104, 106, 210; Pug 44, 45, 50; Vism 19; VvA 6; DA I.193 (ālokitaṃ purato pekkhanaṃ vil° anudisā p.). Āloketar {Aloketar} [n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or before, a beholder DA I.194 (opp. viloketar). Āloketi {Aloketi} [Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA I.193, 194. - pp. ālokita (q. v.). Ālopa {Alopa} [ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś I. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel, esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D I.5 = A V.206; III.176; A II 209; III.304; IV.318; Th 1, 1055; It 18; Pv II.17; Pug 58; Miln 231, 406; Vism 106; DA I.80 (= vilopakaraṇaṃ). Ālopati {Alopati} [ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th 1, 743. Pāli Text Society 269 Pāli-English Dictionary Ālopika {Alopika} (adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) A I.295; II.206; Pug 55. Āloḷa {Alola} [fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA I.38. Āloḷī {Aloli} (f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin I.206. Āloḷeti {Aloleti} [Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S I.175; J II.272, 363; IV.333; VI.331; Vism 105. Āḷaka {Alaka} (or °ā f.) [Dimin of aḷa (?) or of āQ 1 (?). See Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158] - 1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike, used either as arrow-straightener Miln 418; DhA I.288; or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb VvA 349 (°sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of "alum" in Ind. to VvA is incomprehensible). - 2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna). Cp. II.13. Āḷamba {Alamba} = ālambara Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara. Āḷavaka {Alavaka} (& °ika) (adj.-n.) [= āṭavika] dwelling in forests, a forest-dweller S II.235. As Np. at Vism 208. Āḷādvāraka {Aladvaraka} (adj.) at J V.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advāraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). J V.81 has āḷāraka only. Āḷāra {Alara} (adj.) [= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?] thick, massed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. °pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma VvA 279); Pv III.35 (= vellitadīgha-nīla-pamukha). Cp. alāra. Āḷārika {Alarika} & °iya (adj.-n.) [Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.] a cook D I.51 (= bhattakāraka DA I.157); J V.296 (= bhattakāraka C.); 307; VI.276 (°iya, C. °ika = sūpika); Miln 331. Āḷāhana {Alahana} (nt.) [fr. ā + ḍah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D I.55; J I.287 (here meaning the funereal fire) 402; III.505; Pv II.122; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA I.166; DhA I.26; III.276; PvA 92, 161, 163 (= sarīrassa daḍḍha-ṭṭhāna). - Note. For āḷāhana in meaning "peg, stake" see ālāna. Āḷika {Alika} at A III.352, 384 (an°) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka. Āḷha {Alha} (nt.) = āḷhaka; only at A III.52 (udak°), where perhaps better with v. l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id. p. at A II.55 has ālhaka only. Āḷhaka {Alhaka} (m. & nt.) [Sk. āḍhaka, fr. *āḍha probably meaning "grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka°). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattāro patthā āḷhakāni doṇaṃ etc." udakāḷhaka S V.400; A II.55 = III.337; VvA 155. - In other connections at J I.419 (aḍḍh°); III.541 (mitaṃ āḷhakena = dhañña-māpaka-kammaṃ kataṃ C.); Miln 229 (patt°); DhA III.367 (aḍḍh°). Pāli Text Society 270 Pāli-English Dictionary -thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin I. 240; A III.369; DhA III.370 (v. l. bhattathālikā). Āḷhiya & Āḷhika {Alhiya} {Alhika} (adj.) [fr. *āḷha, Sk. āḍhya, orig. possessing grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhaðða2] rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable M I.450; II.178 (+ daḷidda); A III.352 sq. (so read with v. l. BB. °āḷhika for T. °āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v. l. SS. anaddhika); J V. 96, 97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika). Āvajati {Avajati} [ā + vajati, vraj] - 1. to go into, to or towards J III.434; IV.49, 107. - 2. to return, come back J V.24, 479. Āvajjati {Avajjati} [not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] - 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J I.81; II.423; V.3; Miln 106. - 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin I.286 (kumbhiṃ); J II.102 (gloss āsiðcati). - Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.). Āvajjana {Avajjana} (nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. - See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). - Ps II.5, 120; J II.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.; Vism 432; DA I.271. Āvajjita [pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433. {Avajjita} Āvajjitatta {Avajjitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps II.27 sq. Āvajjeti {Avajjeti} [Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M III.96; J IV.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA I.10 (kāyaṃ). - 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. - J I.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA II.96; PvA 181 (= manasikaroti). - 3. to cause to yield A III.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ°). - pp. āvajjita (q. v.). Āvaṭa {Avata} [Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D I.97, 246; M I.381 (°dvāra); J VI.267. -anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D I.137 (°dvāra); III.191 (°dvāratā); S I.55; J V.213; Pv III.64; Miln 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy°. Āvaṭṭa {Avatta} (adj.-n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] - 1. turning round, winding, twisting M I.382; S I.32 (dvi-r-ā° turning twice); J II.217; SnA 439 (°gangā). - 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M I.381; DhA II.153. - 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M I.461 = A II.123 (°bhaya); Miln 122, 196, 377. - 4. circumference J V.337; Dāvs V.24; DhA III 184. Āvaṭṭati {Avattati} [= āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504. Āvaṭṭana {Avattana} (nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J III.494; DhA II.153. Pāli Text Society 271 Pāli-English Dictionary Āvaṭṭanā {Avattana} (f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491. Āvaṭṭanin {Avattanin} (adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M I.375, 381; A II.190; J II.330 = IV.471; DA I.250. - Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin. Āvaṭṭin {Avattin} (adj.-n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M I.91 in neg. an° not enticed by (loc.), i. e. kāmesu. - Cp. āvattin. Āvaṭṭeti {Avatteti} [ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M I.375, 381, 383, 505; A III.27; DA I.272. Āvatta1 {Avatta} (adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāyɔāvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M I.460; S II.50; J I.206. Āvatta2 {Avatta} (nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J I.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (°hārasampāta). Āvattaka {Avattaka} (adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ° turning to the right, dextrorsal D II.18; cp. dakkhiṇāvatta at DA I.259. Āvattati {Avattati} [ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to "the low", i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin I.17; M I.460; S II.231; IV.191; Sn p. 92 (= osakkati SnA 423); Ud 21; Pug 66; Miln 246. - pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati. Āvattana {Avattana} (adj.-nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln 251. Āvattanin {Avattanin} (adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin). Āvattin {Avattin} (adj.-n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an°), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non-returner, with °dhamma not liable to return at D I. 156; III.132; S V.346, 357, 376, 406; M I.91; DA I.313. Āvatthika {Avatthika} (adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = KhA 107. Āvapati {Avapati} [a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln 279. Āvapana {Avapana} (nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering J I.321. Āvara {Avara} (adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J V.325 (so to be read in ariya-maggāvara). Pāli Text Society 272 Pāli-English Dictionary Āvaraṇa {Avarana} (adj.-n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañcɔ āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out, withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin I.84 (°ṃ karoti to prohibit, hinder); II.262 (id.); D I.246 (syn. of paðca nīvaraṇāni); S V.93 sq.; A III.63; J I.78 (an°); V.412 (nadiṃ °ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn 66 (pahāya paðcɔ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an°-dassāviṇ); Ps I.131 sq.; II.158 (an°); Pug 13; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 341, 342; Miln 21 (dur° hard to withstand or oppose). - dant° "screen of the teeth", lip J IV.188; VI.590. Āvaraṇatā {Avaranata} (f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A III 436. Āvaraṇīya {Avaraniya} (adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M I.273; an° not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M III.3; Miln 157. Āvarati {Avarati} [ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M I.380 (dvāraṃ); Sn 922 (pot. °aye, cp. Nd1 368); DA I.235 (dvāraṃ); Dpvs I.38. - pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q. v.). Āvalī {Avali} (f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J V.69; DA I.140. Āvasati {Avasati} [ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M II.72; S I.42; Sn 43, 805, 1134; Nd1 123, 127; Nd2 133; J VI.317. - pp. āvuttha (q. v.). Āvasatha {Avasatha} [SkQ āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling-place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin I 226 (°āgāra restinghouse); IV.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); S I.94, 229; IV.329; Sn 287, 672; J IV.396; VI.425; Pug 51; Miln 279. Āvaha {Avaha} (adj.) (-°) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv II.924 (sukh°); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs II.37; PvA 86 (upakār°), 116 (anatth°); Sdhp 15, 98, 206. Āvahati {Avahati} [ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S I.42 = Sn 181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaṃ metri causā); J III.169; V. 80; Sn 823; Nd1 302; PvA 6. - Pass. āvuyhati VvA 237 (ppr. °amāna). Āvahana {Avahana} (adj) (-°) [= āvaha] bringing, causing Th 1, 519; Sn 256. Āvahanaka {Avahanaka} (adj.-nt) [= āvahana] one who brings VvA 114 (sukhassa). Āva {Ava} (misery, misfortune) see avā. Āvāṭa {Avata} [etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D I.142 (yaññ°); J I.99, 264; II 406; III.286; IV 46 (caturassa); VI.10; DhA I.223; VvA 63; PvA 225. Āvāpa {Avapa} [if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p. - Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter's furnace DhA I.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178. Āvāra {Avara} [Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J VI 432 (yanta-yutta°, does it mean "cover, shield"?). - For cpd. khandhɔāvāra see khandha. Pāli Text Society 273 Pāli-English Dictionary Āvāreti {Avareti} [Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S IV 298; Nett 99. Āvāsa {Avasa} [Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling-place, residence Vin I.92; D III.234; S IV.91; A II 68, 168; III.46, 262; Sn 406; Dh 73 (cp. DhA II.77); Nd1 128; J VI.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA I.177 (āvāsaṃ ālimpeti: read āvāpaṃ); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113; Sdhp 247. -anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A IV.345; J II.77; Pv II.333; PvA 80 (= anāgāra); VvA 46. -kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin II.294, 300, 306; Dpvs IV.47, cp. V.18. palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127. Āvāsika {Avasika} (adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin I.128 sq.; II.15, 170; III. 65; V.203 sq.; M I.473; A I.236; III.261 sq., 366; J IV.310; Pv IV.84 (= nibaddha-vasanaka PvA 267). Āvāha {Avaha} [ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D I.99; J VI.363; SnA 273, 448; DhA IV.7. Often in cpd. ā° vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one's home) & leading away (from the bride's home), wedding feast D III.183 (°ka); J I.452; VvA 109, 157. (v. l. °ka). Āvāhana {Avahana} (nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] - 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D I.11 (= āvāha-karaṇa DA I. 96). - 2. "getting up, bringing together", i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā° a contingent of an army J IV.91. Āvi {Avi} (adv.) [Sk. āviḥ ) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one's eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A V.350, 353; Pv II.716 = DhA IV.21 (āvī v. l.), expld. at PvA 103 by pakāsanaṃ paresaṃ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): °kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin II.88; III.24; Pug 19, 23; °karoti to make clear, show, explain D III.121; Sn 84, 85, 349; J V.457; Pug 57; VvA 79, 150; °bhavati (°bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J I.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA II.51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D I.78; A III.17; J II.50, 111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur. Āvijjhati {Avijjhati} (āviñjati avinjati, āviñchati avinchati) [ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] - 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep. round about, near J I.153 (khettaṃ), 170 (pokkharaṇiṃ); DA I.245 (nagaraṃ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at J IV.59 (chārikapuñjaṃ). - 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin III.127 (daṇḍaṃ āviðji); M III.141 (matthena āviðjati to churn); J I.313; V.291 (cakkaṃ, of a potter's wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviðj°, v. l. āvijjh°; see āracaya°); DhA II.277 (āviðchamāna T.; v. l. āsiðciy°, āvajiy°, āgaðch°). - 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S IV.199 (T. āviðch°; v. l. avicch° & āviðj°); Nett 13. - 4. to arrange, set in order J II.406. - 5. to pull (?) A IV.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj°, āviðj°, āvicc°, āviðch°; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviðjati "to pull"). - pp. āviddha (q. v.). Āvijjhana {Avijjhana} (so for āviðchana & āviðjana) (adj.-n.) [fr. āvijjhati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] - 1. (= āvijjhati 2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana-rajju a Pāli Text Society 274 Pāli-English Dictionary loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope by which Sakka holds the world's wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA II.143 (T. āviðch° (v. l. āvijj°) = III.97, 98 (where āviðjanaṭṭhāna for °rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin II.120, 148; J V.298, 299 (T. āviðj°, v. l. āvicch° & āvij°). - 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA 312 (°rasa, T. āviðj°, v. l. āviðch°; or is it "encompassing"? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviðjanarasa). - 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin III.121 (= ākaḍḍhanā nāma). Āvijjhanaka {Avijjhanaka} (ntQ) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirlirQ round, that which spins round, the whirling-round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter's wheel), the worldaxis DhA II.146 (T. āviðch°). Āviddha {Aviddha} [pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S I.87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J IV.6 (cakkaṃ = kumbhakāra-cakkam iva bhamati C.); V.291. What does an-āviddha at PvA 135 mean? Āvila {Avila} (adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A I.9; III.233; J V.16, 90 (ābila); Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA 251; DA I.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D I.76; S III. 83; IV,118; A I.9; III.236; Sn 160; Dh 82, 413; J III. 157; Miln 35; VvA 29, 30; ThA 251. Āvilati {Avilati} [fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln 259 (+ luḷati). Āvilatta {Avilatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agitation Sn 967; Nd1 488. Āvisati {Avisati} [ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin IV.334; Sn 936 (aor. āvisi); J IV.410, 496; Vism 42. Āvuṇāti {Avunati} [in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale J I.430; III.35; V.145; VI.105. - Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J III.218 (sūle). - pp. āvuta1 (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ. Āvuta {Avuta} [pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the corresponding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] - 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D I.76 (suttaṃ); II.13 (id.); A I.286 (tantāvutaṃ web); J III.52 (valliyā); VI.346 (suttakena); DA I.94 (°sutta). - 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J I.430; III.35; V.497; VI.105; PvA 217, 220. Āvuta2 {Avuta} = Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta1) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DA I.59. Āvuttha {Avuttha} [pp. of āvasati] inhabited D II.50 (an°); S I.33. Pāli Text Society 275 Pāli-English Dictionary Āvudha {Avudha} (nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D III 219; M II.100; A IV.107, 110; Sn 1008; J I.150; II.110; III. 467; IV.160, 283, 437; Nd2 on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA II.2; IV.207; SnA 225, 466 (°jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha. Āvuyhamāna {Avuyhamana} ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain). Āvuso {Avuso} (voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaṃ and bhavanto. - Vin II.302; D I.151, 157; II.8; SnA 227; DhA I.9; II.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208. Āveṭhana {Avethana} (nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (°viniveṭhana). Āveṭhita {Avethita} [pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J IV.383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expls. by parivattita). Āveṇi {Aveni} (adj) (-°) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā "Sine quā non", but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin II.204 (°uposatha etc.); J I.490 (°sangha-kammāni). Āveṇika {Avenika} (adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś I.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S IV.239; A V.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (°bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35. Āveṇiya {Aveniya} (adj.) = āveṇika Vin I.71; J IV.358; VI.128. Āvedha {Avedha} [cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J II.276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha-ṭṭhāne vaṇa). Āvedhika {Avedhika} (adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh° of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J II.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh). Āveḷa {Avela} (adj. & °ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīḍa, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either ḍh (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] - 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J I.12, 95, 501. - 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 362 (kaðcan°; = āveḷa-pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin. Āvelita {Avelita} (ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś I.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J VI.354 (°singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita). Pāli Text Society 276 Pāli-English Dictionary Āveḷin {Avelin} (adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. °inī J V.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline), 323; VvA 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana-maya-pupphɔ- āveḷavatī). Āvesana {Avesana} (nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living-place, house Vin II 117 (°vitthaka, meaning?); M II 53; Pv II.915. Āsa1 {Asa} contr.-form of aṃsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aṃsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next). Āsa2 {Asa} [Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍapātassɔ etaṃ nāmaṃ SnA 374); DhA IV.211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā-āsa aftermath S I.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa-pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaṃ "cating", food, in nānā° various food or na + anāsak°) Sn 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā. Āsa3 {Asa} the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā. Āsa4 {Asa} archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa "thus it has been". Āsaṃsa {Asamsa} (adj.) [of *āśaṃsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A I.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as "so hi arahattaṃ āsaṃsati patthetī ti āsaṃso"); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir°. Āsaṃsati {Asamsati} [for the usual āsiṃsati, ā + śaṃs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna. Āsaṃsā {Asamsa} (f.) [from ā + śaṃs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J IV.92. - Cp. nirāsaṃsa. (adj.) [fr. āsaṃsā] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 (= āsiṃsanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging"). {Asamsuka} Āsaka {Asaka} (adj.) [of āsa2] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an° fasting S IV.118; Dh 141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta-paṭikkhepa DhA III.77); J V.17; VI.63. Āsakatta {Asakatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an° fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292). Āsankati [ā + śank] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J I.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); II. 203; SnA 298. - pp. āsankita (q v.), {Asankati} Āsankā {Asanka} (fQ) [Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śank] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J I.338; II.383; III.533; VI.350, 370; DhA III.485; VvA 110. - Cp. sāsanka & nirāsanka. Pāli Text Society 277 Pāli-English Dictionary Āsankita {Asankita} (adj.) [pp. of āsankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (°parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA I.223; VvA 110. Cp. ussankita & parisankita. Āsankin {Asankin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. āsankā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn 255 (bhedā°); J III.192 (id.). Āsanga {Asanga} [ā + sanga fr. saðj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsanga & āsakti] - 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J IV.11. - 2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in (-°); usually in cpd. uttarāsanga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin I.289; S IV.290; PvA 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh°), 51 (id.). Āsangin {Asangin} (adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J IV.11. Āsajja {Asajja} (indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] - 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc. "near" (cp. āsanna) Sn 418 (āsajja naṃ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaṃ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaṃ); J II.95; VI.194; Miln 271. - 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S I.127 (khaṇuṃ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā "ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama" trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) - 3. knocking against or "giving one a setting-to", insulting, offending, assailing D I.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA I.276); A III.373 (tādisaṃ bhikkhuṃ ā.); J V.267 (isiṃ ā. Gotamaṃ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv IV.710 (isiṃ 266). - 4. "sitting on", i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M I.250; D III.258 = A IV.236 (dānaṃ deti); Vv 106 (dānaṃ adāsiṃ; cp. VvA 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana. Āsajjana {Asajjana} (nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] "knocking against", setting on, insult, offence Vin II.203 (°ṃ Tathāgataṃ an insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA 55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It 86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naṃ); S I.114 (apuññaṃ pasavi Māro āsajjanaṃ Tathāgataṃ; trsl. "in seeking the T. to assail"); J V.208. Āsati {Asati} [from as] to sit DA I.208; h. sg. āsi S I.130. - pp. āsīna (q. v.). Āsatta1 {Asatta} [pp. of ā + saðj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M I.120; J I.5. - (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J I. 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA 259 (an°). Āsatta2 {Asatta} [pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J V.446 (an°). Āsatti {Asatti} (f.) [ā + saðj] attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin II.156 = A I.138; S I.212; Sn 777 (bhavesu); Nd1 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. - Cp. nirāsattin. Āsada {Asada} [ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] - 1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin II.195 = J V.336 (mā kuðjara nāgam āsado); M I.326 (metaṃ āsado = mā etaṃ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J I Pāli Text Society 278 Pāli-English Dictionary 414 (cakkaṃ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); VI.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). - 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J VI.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA 213); Miln 21; Dpvs V.21; VI.38; Sdhp 384. Āsana (nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M I.469; Vin I.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); S I.46 (ek° sitting alone, a solitary seat); A III.389 (an° without a seat); Sn 338, 718, 810, 981; Nd1 131; J IV.435 (āsān' ûdaka-dāyin giving seat & drink); V.403 (id.); VI.413; DhA II.31 (dhamm° the preacher's seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA 16, 23, 141. -ābhihara gift or distinction of the seat J I.81. -ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn 708 (= nisinna SnA 495). -paððāpaka one who appoints seats Vin II.305. -paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D I.167; A I.296; II.206; Pug 55. -sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; DhA II. 65; IV.46. {Asana} Āsana2 {Asana} (?) eating Vism 116 (visam°, cp. visam-āsita Miln 302). See, however, māsana. Āsanaka {Asanaka} (nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 15. Āsanika {Asanika} (adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek° sitting by oneself Vism 69. Āsandi {Asandi} (f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck-chair Vin I.192; II.142, 163, 169, 170; D I.7 (= pamāṇātikkant'āsanaṃ DA I.86), 55 = M I.515 = S III.307 (used as a bier) A I.181; J I.108. See note at Dial. I.11. Āsandikā {Asandika} (f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin II. 149; KhA 44. Āsanna {Asanna} (adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra J II.154; DhA II 91; PvA 42, 243. Āsappanā {Asappana} (fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA I.69. Āsabha {Asabha} [the guṇa- and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha > ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in compn.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull-like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār° Sn 687; nar° Sn 684, 696; āsabha-camma bull's hide J VI. 453 (v. l. usabha°). -ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) "bull's place", first place, distinguished position, leadership M I.69; S II.27; A II.8 (C. seṭṭha-ṭṭhāna uttama-ṭṭhāna); III.9; V.33 sq.; DA I. 31; KhA 104. Āsabhin {Asabhin} (adjQ) [fr. āsabha] bull-like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase °ṃ vācaṃ bhāsati "speak the lordly word" D II.15, 82; M III.123j J I.53; DA I.91; cp. Dāvs I.28 (nicchārayi vācaṃ āsabhiṃ). Āsamāna {Asamana} (adj.) [ppr. of āsaṃsati or āsiṃsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiṃ ā = kiṃ paccāsiṃ santo VvA 336); Pv IV.124 (= āsiṃsamāna patthayamana PvA 226). Pāli Text Society 279 Pāli-English Dictionary Āsaya {Asaya} [ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś II.161] - 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S I.38; Vin III.151; J II.99; Miln 257; VvA 60; PvA 210; jal° river VvA 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in (-°) Miln 317; Nd1 362 (bil°, dak° etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often combd. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps I. 133; II.158; Vbh 340; Vism 140 (°posana); PvA 197. - SnA 182 (°vipatti), 314 (°suddhi), KhA 103 (°sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. - 3. outflow, excretion Pv III.53 (gabbh° = gabbha-mala PvA 198); Vism 344. Āsayati {Asayati} [ā + śī; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J IV.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya. Āsava {Asava} [fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin IV.110 (four kinds); B. on D III.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J IV.222; VI.9. - 2. discharge from a sore, A I.124, 127 = Pug 30. - 3. in psychologQ, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the "Āsavas" constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. - The 4 āsavas are kām°, bhav°, diṭṭh°, avijj°, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. - They are mentioned as such at D II.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A I.165 sq., 196; II.211; III.93, 414; IV.79; Ps I.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. - The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma°, bhava°, avijjā°) occurs at M I. 55; A I.165; III.414; S IV.256; V.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see Vin I.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciṃsu), 17, 20, 182; II.202; III.5 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.); D I.83, 167; III.78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M I.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (°ṭhāniya); II.22; III.72, 277; S II.187 sq. (°ehi cittaṃ vimucci); III.45 (id.); IV.107 (id.), 20; V.8, 28, 410; A I.85 sq. (vaḍḍhanti), 98, 165 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 187; II.154 (°ehi cittaṃ vimuttaṃ), 196; III.21, 93 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; IV.13, 146 (°pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (°vighāta-pariḷāha); V.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb°); Vbh 42, 64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA 48; ThA 94, 173; KhA 26; DA I 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava-surā, meaning?). Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1) āsavānaṃ khaya D I.156; S II.29, 214; III 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; IV.105, 175; V.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A I.107 sq., 123 sq., 232 sq., 273, 291; II.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; III 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; IV.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; V.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 334, 344; Vism 9; DA I.224; cp. °parikkhaya A V 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. - (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S I.13, 48, 53, 146; II 83, 239; III.199, 128, 178; IV.217; A I 77, 109, 241, 266; IV.120, 224, 370 sq.; V 40, 253 sq.; Ps II 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A IV.418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn 370. - (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin II.148 = 164; D III.112; S I 130; II.214, 222; III.83; IV.128; A I.81, 107 sqQ, 123 sq., 273, 291; II.6, 36, 87, 146; III.19, 29, 114, 166; IV.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A V.10 sqQ, 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Th I.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv II.615; Pug 27; Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9Q Cp. nirāsava ThA 148. - Opp. sāsava S III 47; V.232; A I.81 V.242; Dhs 990; Nett 10; Vism 13, 438. Pāli Text Society 280 Pāli-English Dictionary Āsavati {Asavati} [ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116. Āsasāna {Asasana} [either grd. for *āsaṃsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaṃsati (= āsiṃsati) for *asaṃsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn 369 (an°; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th 1, 528; J IV.18 (= āsiṃsanto C.), 381; V.391 (= āsiṃsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaṃsati, āsamāna & āsayāna. Āsā {Asa} (f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa (-°) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin I.255 (°avacchedika hope-destroying), 259; D II. 206; III.88; M III.138 (āsaṃ karoti); A I.86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat-āso one whose longings have gone); Sn 474, 634, 794, 864; J I.267, 285; V.401; VI.452 (°chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd1 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaṃ, cp. VvA 172); Pug 27 (vigat° = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug A 208); Dhs 1059 (+ āsiṃsanā etc.), 1136; PvA 22 (chinn° disappointed), 29 (°ābhibhūta), 105; Dāvs V.13; Sdhp 78, 111, 498, 609. Āsāṭikā {Asatika} (f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsāḍī] a fly's egg, a nit M I.220 sq.; A V.347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J III.176. Āsādeti {Asadeti} [Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] - 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M I.371; J I.481; V.197; aor. āsādesi Th 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J V.272; Miln 100, 205 (°ayitvā); PvA 266 (isiṃ), āsādiya J V.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiṃ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduṃ J V.154 & āsādituṃ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln 205; VvA 213 (an°). - 2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach, get J III.206 (khuracakkaṃ). Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī {Asalha} {Asalhi} (f.) [Sk. āṣāḍha] N. of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha° & Āsaḷhi°, viz. °nakkhatta J I.50; SnA 208; °puṇṇamā J I.63; DhA I.87; SnA 199; VvA 66; PvA 137; °māsa SnA 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA 307 (= gimhānaṃ pacchimo māso). Āsāvati {Asavati} (f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J III.250, 251. Āsāsati {Asasati} [cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaṃs in āsaṃsati & āsiṃsati (q. v.) & their derivations. - pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.). Āsi & Āsiṃ {Asi} {Asim} 3rd & 1st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.). Āsiṃsaka {Asimsaka} (adj.) [fr. ā + siṃsati, cp. āsaṃsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln 342. Āsiṃsati {Asimsati} [Sk. āśaṃsati, ā + śaṃs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaṃsati, abhisiṃsati & āsaṃsati] to hope for, wish, pray for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. acc.) S I.34, 62; Sn 779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd2 135); J I.267; III.251; IV.18; V.435; VI.43; Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA 337; PvA 226 (ppr. āsiṃsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.). Āsiṃsanaka {Asimsanaka} (adj.) [fr. āsiṃsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA 217 (for āsaṃsuka Th 2, 273). Pāli Text Society 281 Pāli-English Dictionary Āsiṃsanā {Asimsana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsati] desire, wish, craving J V.28; Dhs 1059, 1136 (+ āsiṃsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53. Āsiṃsaniya {Asimsaniya} (adj.) [grd. of āsiṃsati] to be wished for, desirable Miln 2 (°ratana). Āsikkhita {Asikkhita} [pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, instructed PvA 67, 68. Āsiñcati {Asincati} [ā + sic, cp. abhisiðcati & avasiðcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin I.44; II.208; J IV.376; Vv 796 (= siðcati VvA 307); PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. °itvā). - pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy°. Āsiṭṭha {Asittha} [pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA 104. Āsita1 {Asita} [= asita1?] "having eaten", but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita), since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. J II.446 (dumapakkani-m-asita, where C. reading is māsita & expln. khāditvā asita (v. l. āsita) dhāta); Miln 302 (visam-āsita affected with poison = visamāsita). Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at J VI.354 (tiṇa°, expld. by C. as khādaka). - āsita at J V.70 is very doubtful, v. l. āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73. *Āsita2 {Asita} [registered as such with meaning "performed" by Hardy in Index] at VvA 276 is better read with v. l. SS bhāsita (-vādana etc.). Āsitta {Asitta} [pp. of āsiðcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J V.87; Pug 31; Miln 286; DhsA 307; DhA I.10; VvA 69. Āsittaka (adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin II.123 (°ûpadhāna "decorated divan"?); ThA 61, 168 (an° for asecanaka, q. v.). {Asittaka} Āsītika {Asitika} (adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M II.124; J III.395; SnA 172. Āsītika {Asitika} (m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M I 80 = 245 (°pabba). Āsīdati {Asidati} [cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] - 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D I.248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?). - 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) A III.69 (āsīvisaṃ), 373 (na sādhurūpaṃ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J IV.56. - 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J V. 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa-vacanehe kāyakammena vā gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). - pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti. Āsīna {Asina} (adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S I.195 = Nd2 136; Sn 1105, 1136; Dh 227, 386; J I.390; III.95; V. 340; VI.297; Dāvs II.17. Āsīyati {Asiyati} [etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning "cool oneself"; Morris'J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as 282 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one's home, one's abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water). Āsīvisa {Asivisa} Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come from ahi + visa (snake's poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin IV.108; S IV.172; A II.110; III. 69; J I.245; II.274; IV.30, 496; V.82, 267; Pug 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); DhA I.139; II.8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA 308. Āsīsanā {Asisana} see āsiṃsanā. Āsu {Asu} expletive particle = assu3 J V.241 (v. l. assu; nipātamattaṃ C. p.243). Āsuṃ {Asum} 3rd pl. aor. of atthi. Āsuṃbhati & Āsuṃhati [ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin IV.263, 265; Vv 5011 (°itvāna); J III.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi). {Asumbhati} {Asumhati} Āsevati {Asevati} [ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A I.10; Sn 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps II.93 (maggaṃ). - pp. āsevita. Āsevana {Asevana} (nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] - 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin II.117; PvA 45. - 2. succession, repetition Dhs 1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538. Āsevita {Asevita} [pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed J I.21 (V.141; āsevitanisevita); II.60; Sdhp 93, 237. Āha {Aha} [Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J I.197 (cullalohitaṃ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn 839, 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). - 3rd sg. āha Vin II.191; Sn 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888; J I.280; III.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl. āhu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J I.59; SnA 377, and āhaṃsu J I.222; III.278 and freq. Āhacca1 {Ahacca} ger. of āhanati. Āhacca2 {Ahacca} (adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in °pādaka-pīṭha & °mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by drawing out a pin) Vin II.149 (cp. Vin Texts III.164 n. 5); IV.40, 46 (def. as "ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti" it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. - 2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M III.139; DhsA 9, & in cpds. °pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln 148 (°ena by reference to the text of the Scriptures); °vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaṃ). Pāli Text Society 283 Pāli-English Dictionary Āhaṭa {Ahata} [pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin I.121; III.53; D II.180 (spelt āhata); J III.512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs I.58. Āhata {Ahata} [pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (-°) Vin IV.236 = D III.238 (kupito anattamano āhata-citto); Vin I.75, 76; S I.170 (tilak°, so read for tilakā-hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa-setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J III 456; Sdhp 187, 401. Āhataka {Ahataka} [fr. āhata] "one who is beaten", a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin IV.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā). Āhanati {Ahanati} [ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln 21 (dhammabheriṃ); Dāvs IV.50. - ger. āhacca touching M I.493; J I.330; VI 2, 200; Sn 716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism 420. - pp. āhata (q. v.). 1st sg. fut. āhaðhi Vin I.8; D II.72, where probably to be read as āhaðh' (=āhaðhaṃ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2. Āhanana {Ahanana} (nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, "impinging" Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of vitakka) = DhsA 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.). Āharaṇa {Aharana} (adj.-n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln 320; Kh VIII.9; KhA 224; Sdhp 589. Āharaṇaka {Aharanaka} [āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J II.199; III.328. Āharati {Aharati} [ā + hṛ] - 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M I.429 (sallaṃ); S I 121; III.123; J I.40 (ger. āharitvā "with"), 293 (te hattaṃ); Nd2 540c (puttamaṃsaṃ, read āhāreyya?); Pv II.310; DA I.186, 188 - 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D II.245; J IV 159 (nāvaṃ; v. l. āhāhitvā); V.466; VvA 63 (bhattaṃ); PvA 75. - 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J V.433 (padosaṃ); DhA II.89. - 4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M I.395 (kaṭhalaṃ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuṃ); Th 1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). - 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th 1, 1173. - 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on (w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaṃ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J III.383 (desanaṃ), 401; V.462 (vatthuṃ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA 38, 39 (atītaṃ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma-desanaṃ). See also payirudāharati. - pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). - Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to call or ask for J III.88, 342; V.466; PvA 215. Āharima {Aharima} (adj.) [fr. āharati] "fetching", fascinating, captivating, charming Vin IV.299; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; VvA 14, 15, 77. Āhariya {Ahariya} [grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J III.328. Āhavana & Āhavanīya {Ahavana} {Ahavaniya} see under āhuneyya. Āhāra {Ahara} [fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enumn. comprises four kinds of Pāli Text Society 284 Pāli-English Dictionary nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosaðcetanā° n. of volition (= cetanā S. A. on II.11 f.), (4) viððāṇ° of consciousness. Thus at M I.261; D III.228, 276; Dhs 71-73; Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla's refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, I.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910-12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30. - Vin I.84; D I.166; S I.172; II.11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); III.54 (sa°); V.64, 391; A III.51 (sukhass°), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; IV.49, 108; V.52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaṃ etc.); Sn 78, 165, 707, 747; Nd1 25; Ps I.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug 21, 55; Vbh 2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs 58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31, 114, 124; DhsA 153, 401; DhA I.183 (°ṃ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); II.87; VvA 118; PvA 14, 35, 112, 148 (utu° physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, 395, 406; A V.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. -an° without food, unfed M I.487 (aggi); S III.126; V.105; Sn 985. -ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin III. 136. -ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D III.211, 273; A V.50, 55; Ps I.5, 122. -pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln 244 or is it "restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combn. at Miln 313. -maya "food-like", feeding stuff, food J III.523. -lolatā greed after food SnA 35. -samudaya origin of nutriment S III.59. Āhāratthaṃ {Aharattham} [āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin I.199, of medicine, „to penetrate into food-ness‟, to come under the category of food; Miln 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin I.381) his MSS read about equally °attaṃ and °atthaṃ. Trenckner prints °atthaṃ, and records no variant (see p. 425)]. Āhāreti {Ahareti} [Denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S II.13; III.240; IV.104; A I.114, 295; II.40, 145, 206; IV. 167; Nd2 540c (āhāraṃ & puttamaṃsaṃ cp. S II.98). Āhika {Ahika} (-°) (adj.) [der. fr. aha2] only in paðcāhika every five days (cp. paðcāhaṃ & sattāhaṃ) M III.157. Āhiṇḍati {Ahindati} [ā + hiṇḍ, cp. BSk. āhiṇḍate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin I.203 (senāsana-cārikaṃ), 217; II. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ); IV.62; J I.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540B; Pv III.229 (= vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviṃ); VvA 238 (tattha tattha); PvA 143. Āhita {Ahita} [pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam°. Āhu {Ahu} 3rd pl. of āha (q. v.). Āhuti {Ahuti} (f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration M III 167; S I.141; Th 1, 566 (°īnaṃ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J I.15; V.70 (id.); Vv 6433 (paramāhutiṃ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285. Āhuna {Ahuna} = āhuti, in āhuna-pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219. Pāli Text Society 285 Pāli-English Dictionary Āhuneyya {Ahuneyya} (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D III.5, 217 (aggi); A II.56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); IV.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "āhavanīya" and "āhavanaṃ arahati" deserving of offerings. Āhundarika (adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇḍ°?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin I.79; IV.297; Vism 413 (°ṃ andha-tamaṃ). {Ahundarika} Pāli Text Society 286 Pāli-English Dictionary I I {I} in i-kāra in i-kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (°lopa), 508 (id.). Ikka {Ikka} [Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2] a bear J VI.538 [= accha C.). Ikkāsa {Ikkasa} (?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin II.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by "slime of trees", according to Bdhgh's expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. VI.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa. Ikkhaṇa {Ikkhana} (nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism 16. Ikkhaṇika {Ikkhanika} [fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortuneteller Vin III.107; S II.260; J I.456, 457; VI.504. Ikkhati {Ikkhati} [fr. īkṣ] to look J V.153; ThA 147; DhsA 172. Ingita {Ingita} (nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J II.195, 408; VI.368, 459. Ingha {Ingha} (indecl.) [Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. "get a move on", come on, go on, look here, Sn 83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J V.148; Pv IV.57; Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto VvA 237); VvA 47; DhA IV.62. Inghāḷa {Inghala} [according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Th 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra-kāsu ThA 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful. see iti. Iccha {Iccha} (-°) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp° having evil desires S I.50; II.156; an° without desires S I.61, 204; Sn 707; app° id. Sn 628, 707. Icchaka {Icchaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad-icchikaṃ (and yen°) after one's wish or liking M III.97; A III.28. Icchati1 {Icchati} [Sk. icchati, iṣ n, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"] to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S I.210 (dhammaṃ sotuṃ i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3, 138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv II.63; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835 Pv II.66 & iccheyya D II.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. icchaṃ Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phalaṃ) aor. icchi PvA 31. - grd. icchitabba PvA 8. - pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). - Note. In prep.-cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both °iṭṭha and °iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita. Icchati2 {Icchati} [Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā. Pāli Text Society 287 Pāli-English Dictionary Icchatā {Icchata} (-°) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah° & pāp° Vbh 351, 370. Icchana {Icchana} (nt.) [fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J IV. 5; VI.244. Icchā {Iccha} (f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ2] wish, longing, desire D II.243; III.75; S I.40 (°dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraṃ parikassati); A II.143; IV.293 sq.; 325 sq.; V.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (°lobhasamāpanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp 242, 320. āvacara moving in desires M I.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. -āvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn 306. -pakata same Vin I.97; A III.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchāya apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). -vinaya discipline of one's wishes D III.252, A IV.15; V.165 sq. Icchita {Icchita} [pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J I.208; DhsA 364; PvA 3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice). Ijjhati {Ijjhati} [Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)/lqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S I.175 ("work effectively" trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaṃ hoti C.); IV.303; Sn 461, 485; J V.393; Pv II.111; II.913 (= samijjhati PvA 120); Pot. ijjhe Sn 458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA 103). - pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha2 & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam°. Ijjhana {Ijjhana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out successfully Ps I.17 sq., 74, 181; II.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217 sq.; Vism 266, 383 (°aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237. Iñjati {Injati} [Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as ang in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha & Vedic pali-angati to turn about. See also ānejja & aðjati1] to shake, move, turn about, stir D I.56; S I.107, 132, 181 (aniðjamāna ppr. med. "impassive"); III.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DA I.167. - pp. iñjita (q. v.). Iñjanā {Injana} (f.) & °aṃ (nt.) [fr. iðj, see iðjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn 193 (= calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an° immobility, steadfastness Ps I.15; II.118. Iñjita {Injita} [pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an°). Usually as nt. iñjitaṃ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M I.454; S I.109; IV.202; A II.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. iðjitā), 1048 (see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. - On the 7 iñjitas see J.P . T.S. 1884, 58. Iñjitatta {Injitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S V.315 (kāyassa). Iṭṭha {Ittha} (adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D I.245; II.192; M I.85; S IV.60, 158, 235 sq.; V.22, 60, 147; A II.66 sq.; V.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337. - Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, Pāli Text Society 288 Pāli-English Dictionary happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); PvA 116 (= bhadraṃ), 140. aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. - See also pariy°, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. Iṭṭhakā {Itthaka} (Itthakā) (f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a)i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire-brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick] - 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin II 121 (°pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru°); J III.435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read °aṭṭhakā); V.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (°dārugomaya); PvA 4 (°cuṇṇa-makkhitasīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X.5 piṣṭa-cūṛnɔāvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ɔhaṃ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka > piṣṭa). - 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa°) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA III.29, 61; VvA 157. Iṭṭhi {Itthi} ° in °khagga-dhāra at J VI.223 should be read iddha. Iṇa {Ina} (nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an-aṇa] debt D I.71, 73; A III.352; V.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn 120; J I.307; II.388, 423; III.66; IV.184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; V.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya°, iṇa°, dāya°, sāmi°); VI.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, iṇaṃ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289; PvA 3. - iṇaṃ muñcati to discharge a debt J IV.280; V.238; °ṃ sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3. apagama absence of debt ThA 245. -gāhaka a borrower Miln 364. -ghāta stricken by debt Sn 246 (= iṇaṃ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). -ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M I.463 = S III.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. -paṇṇa promissory note J I.230; IV.256. -mokkha release from debt J IV.280; V.239. -sādhaka negotiator of a loan Miln 365. Iṇāyika {Inayika} [fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S I.170; J IV.159, 256; VI.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA 3. - (2) a debtor Vin I.76; Nd1 160. Ita {Ita} [pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur-ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs I.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc. Itara1 {Itara} (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaṃ, etaṃ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh 85, 104, 222; J II.3; III.26; IV.4; PvA 13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J V.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147; acc. itarîtaraṃ & instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu III. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J VI 448 (°ṃ); Dh 331 (°ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraṃ VvA 333). Itara2 {Itara} (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.). Iti {Iti} (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaṃ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic- deictic particle "thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying to define its Pāli Text Society 289 Pāli-English Dictionary meaning viz. -itī ti padasandhi padasaṃsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc." Nd1 123 = Nd2 137. The same expln. also for iti'haṃ (see below IV.) - I. As deictic adv. "thus, in this way" (Vism 423 iti = evaṃ) pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naṃ vijaððā), 805; It 123 (ito devā. . . taṃ namassanti); Dh 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the -foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 7910 (= evaṃ VvA 307); VvA 5. - (b) referring to what follows D I.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A I.205 (id.) - II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one's own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one's own or other's) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g. bālo ti vuccati Dh 63 = bālo vuccati). - 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataṃ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaṃ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaṃ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D I.151. - 2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact "so it is that" (cp. E. "viz.", Ger. "und zwar"), mostly untranslated Kh IV. (arahā ti pavuccati); J I.253 (tasmā pesanaka-corā t'eva vuccanti); III.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuṃ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA 112 (ankuro pañca-sakaṭasatehi . . . aððataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca-sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata-sahassehi . . . patipannā). - (b) as statement of a thought "like this", "I think", so, thus Sn 61 ("sango eso" iti ðatvā knowing "this is defilement"), 253 ("neso maman" ti iti naṃ vijaððā), 783 ("iti'han" ti), 1094 (etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti naṃ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraṃ gaccheyya tasmā "Parāyanaṃ" iti). - III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows: icc'eva, t'eva, etc. - (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaṃ akatthā ti DhA I.7; kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. - IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc'eva Pv I.119 (= evam eva PvA 59); t'eva J I.253; Miin 114; tv'eva J I.203; II.2. -iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say D I.228, 229, 240. -iti kho thus, therefore D I.98, 103; III.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases) Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1. -iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn 934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaṃ; cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); It 76; DA I.247, as iti haṃ at Sn 783 (same expln. at Nd1 71 as for iti). -kin ti how J II.159. -kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. "so I guess" or "I have heard" A I.189 = II.191 sq. = Nd2 151. Cp. itiha. -bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin II.184 (°abhava); D I.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA I.91); A II.248; It 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). -vāda "speaking so & so", talk, gossip M I.133; S V.73; A II.26; It III.35. -vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaṃ] "so it has been said", (book of) quotations, "Logia", N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka-nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaṃ h'etaṃ Bhagavatā "thus has the Buddha said" (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin III.8; M I.133; A II.7, 103; III.86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug 43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaṃ. -hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] "thus indeed it has been", legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa-pañca-mānaṃ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D I.88 = (see DA I.247); A I.163; III.223; Sn 447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu I.556. -hītiha [itiha + itiha] "so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd2 spells ītihītiha) M I.520; S I.154; Sn 1084; Nd2 151. Ito {Ito} (indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, abl.-adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaṃ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (°ja. °nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaṃ sandhāy'āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (°nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv I.57 (ito dinnaṃ what is given in this world); I.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); I.123 (= idhalokato PvA Pāli Text Society 290 Pāli-English Dictionary 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti). - (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c'ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA II.80. - (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D II.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA 319 (ito kira tiṃsa-kappa-sahasse); PvA 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (paðcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re-birth). - (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA 138; ito paraṃ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J I.63 (ito dāni p.); PvA 41. Ittara {Ittara} (sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr. i] - 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M I.318 (opp. dīgharattaṃ); A II.187; J I.393; III.83 (°dassana = khaṇika° C.), IV.112 (°vāsa temporary abode); Pv I.1111 (= na cira-kāla-ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma-dhamma PvA 60); DA I.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaṇika). - 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M II.47 (°jacca of inferior birth); A II.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln 93, 114 (°paðða of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna). Ittaratā {Ittarata} (f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman). Ittha {Ittha} (indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd. °bhāv'aððathā-bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9 (v. l. itthi° for iti°) = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; It 94 (v. l. ittha°). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaṃ = Sk. itthaṃ (see next). Itthaṃ {Ittham} (indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base °i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D I.53, 213; Dāvs IV.35; V.18. -nāma (itthan°) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin I.56; IV.136; J I.297; Miln 115; DhA II.98. -bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. °lakkhaṇa or °ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA 162, 174; PvA 150. Itthatta1 {Itthatta} (nt.) [ittha + *tvaṃ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not "thusness" or "life as we conceive it", as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. I.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaṃ seems to exist, see ittha); "life in these conditions" K. S. II.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on S I.140 (see K. S. 318). - See also freq. formula A of arahatta. D I.18, 84; A I.63; II.82, 159, 203; Sn 158; Dhs 633; Pug 70, 71; DA I.112. Itthatta2 {Itthatta} (nt.) [itthi + *tvaṃ abstr. fr. itthi] state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (= itthi-sabhāva DhsA 321). Itthi & Itthī {Itthi} (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. °sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. XXV.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & compn.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as -°) Pāli Text Society 291 Pāli-English Dictionary wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J V.72, 398; Nett 93; DhA I.390; PvA 153). - S I.33 (nibbānass'eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim°, mah°), 185; A I.28, 138; II.115, 209; III.68, 90, 156; IV.196 (purisaṃ bandhati); Sn 112, 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi-saððikā thiyo SnA 513); J I.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaṃ); II.415 (nom. pl. thiyo); V.397 (thi-ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), V.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh 336, 337; DA I.147; PvA 5, 44, 46, 67, 154 (amanuss° of petīs); Sdhp 64, 79. - anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J II.126 (= ucchiṭṭh° C.); kul'-itthi a wife of good descent Vin II.10; A III.76; IV.16, 19; dahar° a young wife J I.291; dur° a poor woman J IV.38. - Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin III.139 = A V.264 = VvA 72, viz. mātu-rakkhitā, pitu°, mātāpitu° bhātu°, bhaginī°, ðāti°, gotta°, dhamma°, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin III.139 for expln. - S I.38 (malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J I.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); IV. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaṃ pamathenti); V. 425 (sīho yathā . . . tath'itthiyo); women as goods for sale S I.43 (bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ); DhA I.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaṃ). -agāra (gāra women's apartment, seraglio Vin I.72; IV.158; S I.58, 89; J I.90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D II.249; J V.188. -indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris' indriya) S V.204; A IV.57 sq.; Vism 447, 492; Dhs 585, 633, 653 et passim. -kathā talk about women D I.7 (cp. DA I.90). -kāma the craving for a woman S IV.343. -kutta a woman's behaviour, woman's wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A IV.57 = Dhs 633; J I.296, 433; II.127, 329; IV.219, 472; DhA IV.197. -ghātaka a woman-killer J V. 398. -dhana wife's treasure, dowry Vin III.16. -dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn 106; J III.260; PvA 5. -nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, 713, 836. -pariggaha a woman's company, a woman Nd1 11. -bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S I.129; Th 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA 178; Dhs 633; PvA 168. -rūpa womanly beauty A I.1; III.68; Th 2, 294. -lakkhaṇa fortune-telling regarding a woman D I.9 (cp. DhA I.94, + purisa°); J VI. 135. linga "sign of a woman", feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, 713, 836; DhsA 321 sq. -sadda the sound (or word) "woman" DhA I.15. -soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112. Itthikā {Itthika} (f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin III.16; D II.14; J I. 336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin II.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S II.264 (id. and appitthikāni). Ida & Idaṃ {Ida} {Idam} (indecl.) [nt. of ayaṃ (idaṃ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin I.5 = S I.136; D I.185; Dhs 1004, 1061; Vbh 340, 362, 365; Vism 518; etc. - (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D II.267, 270, almost syn. (for with kira. - (3) just (this), even so, only: idam-atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th 1, 984 (cīvara); Pug 69 (read so for °maṭṭhika, see Pug A 250); as idam-atthitā "being satisfied with what is sufficient" at Vism 81: expld. as atthika-bhāva at Pug A 250. idaṃsaccābhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya-ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃ° (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl. 304); D III.230; S V.59; Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq. Idāni {Idani} (indecl.) [Vedic idānīṃ] now Dh 235, 237; KhA 247. Iddha1 {Iddha} [pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J VI.223 (°khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi-khagga°); Dpvs VI.42. Pāli Text Society 292 Pāli-English Dictionary Iddha2 {Iddha} [pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D I.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A III.215 (id.); J VI.227, 361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs I.11. - (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin I.212 (bhattaṃ); IV.313 (ovādo). Iddhi {Iddhi} [Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be „potency‟. - 1. PreBuddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D II.177; M III.176, cp. J III.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A I.145. At M I.152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D II.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). - 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiððā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind-made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D I.77, 212; II.87, 213; III.112, 281; S II.121; V.264, 303; A I.170, 255; III.17, 28, 82, 425; V.199; Ps I.111; II.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DA I.122). For other such powers see S I.144; IV.290; V.263; A III.340. - 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D I.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: „It is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof‟. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M I.34; A III.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D II.213; M I.103; A I.39, 297; II.256; III. 82; Ps I.111; II 154, 164, 205; Vbh 216). It was an offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin II.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin III.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D III.112; A I.93; Vin II.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. I.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps II.150; Vism XII; DhA I.91; J I.47, 360. -ānubhāva (iddhånu°) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; III.67; S I 147; IV.290; PvA 53. -ābhisankhāra (iddhåbhi°) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin I.16, 17, 25; D I.106; S III.92; IV.289; V.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 57, 172 212. -pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin I.25, 28, 180, 209; II.76, 112, 200; D I.211, 212; III.3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S IV.290; A I.170, 292; Ps II.227. -pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin II.240; D II.103, 115 sq., 120; III.77, 102, 127, 221; M II.11; III.296; S I.116, 132; III.96, 153; IV.360; V.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A IV.128 sq., 203, 463; V.175; Nd1 14, 45 (°dhīra), 340 (°pucchā); Nd1 s. v.; Ps I.17, 21, 84; II.56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA 237; DhA III.177; IV.32. -bala the power of working wonders VvA 4; PvA 171. -yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln 276. -vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. -vidhā kinds of iddhi D I.77, 212; II.213; III.112, 281; S II.121; v.264 sq., 303; A I.170 sq., 255; III.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; V.199; Ps I.111; II.207; Vism 384; DA I.222. -visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin III.67; Nett 23. Pāli Text Society Iddhika1 293 Pāli-English Dictionary (-°) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ-iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J I.6; IV.15; PvA 78. {Iddhika} Iddhika2 {Iddhika} (-°) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah-iddhika of great power, always combd. with mah-ānubhāva, e. g. at Vin I.31; II.193; III.101; S II. 155; M I.34; Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J V.149. See mahiddhika. Iddhimant {Iddhimant} (adj.) [fr. iddhi] - 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an° unfortunate, miserable, poor J VI.361. - 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin III.67; IV.108; A I.23, 25; II.185; III.340; IV.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472. Idha {Idha} (indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaṃ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i)qa-genh/s, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. -idhaloka this world, the world of men Sn 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c); PvA 64; in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA 348. Idhuma {Idhuma} [Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire-wood - Tela-kaṭāha-gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884. Inda {Inda} [Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. XXXI.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). - 1. The Vedic god Indra D I.244; II.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd1 177. - 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaṃ indo D I.216, 217; II.221, 275; S I.219. Vepɔcitti asurindo S I.221 ff. manussinda, S I.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all of the Buddha, „chief of men‟; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. II.294- 298. The idiom sa-Indā devā, D II.261, 274; A V.325, means „the gods about Indra, Indra's retinue‟, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiṃsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D II.208-212; S III.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story]. -aggi (ind'aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. -gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. -jāla deception DA I.85. -jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. -dhanu the rainbow DA I.40. -bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiṃsa-bhavana). -linga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. -sāla N. of tree J IV.92. Indaka {Indaka} [dimin. fr. inda] - 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv II.9Q; PvA 136 sq. - 2. (-°) see inda 2. Indakhīla {Indakhila} [inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś I.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D II.254 (°ṃ ūhacca, cp. DhA II.181); Vin IV.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani-gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S V.444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh 95 (°ûpama, cp. DhA II.181); Th 1, 663; J I.89; Miln 364; Vism 72, 466; SnA 201; DA I.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi °ā); DhA II.180 (°sadisaṃ Sāriputtassa cittaṃ), 181 (nagara-dvāre nikhataṃ °ṃ). Pāli Text Society 294 Pāli-English Dictionary Indagū {Indagu} see hindagū. Indagopaka {Indagopaka} [inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle", Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th 1, 13; Vin III.42; J IV.258; V.168; DhA I.20; Brethren p. 18, n. Indanīla {Indanila} [inda + nīla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J I.80; Miln 118; VvA 111 (+ mahānīla). Indavāruṇī {Indavaruni} (f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J IV.8 (°ka-rukkha). Indīvara {Indivara} (nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula J V.92 (°ī-samā ratti); VI.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka-puppha VvA 197). Indriya {Indriya} (nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning "belonging to Indra"; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense "belonging to the ruler", i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning "controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis", in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense-perceptibility "faculty, function", often wrongly interpreted as "organ"; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter "kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark" (cp. woman-hood, hood = Goth. haidus "kind, form"); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, "principle, controlling" force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight "category". - Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA 119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. LVII; Cpd. 228, 229. B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a-e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh-undriya ("the eye which is a power", Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot-indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān° nose or smell, (4) jivh° tongue or taste, (5) kāy° body-sensibility, (6) man°) mind; (b. material) (7) itth° female sex or femininity, (8) puris° male sex or masculinity, (9) jīvit° life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh° pleasure, (11) dukkh° pain, (12) somanasa° joy, (13) domanass° grief, (14) upekh° hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh° faith, (16) viriy° energy, (17) sat° mindfulness, (18) samādh° concentration, (19) paðð° reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaððāta-ðassāmīt° the thought "I shall come to know the unknown", (21) aðð° (= aððā) gnosis, (22) aððātā-v° one who knows. - Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth° (no. 7), e. g. at Ps I.7, 137. - From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man-indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as paðc'indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1-19) at Ps I.137; 10 (paðca rūpīni & paðca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1-5, 10-14, 15-19) at D III.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paððā, i. e. nos. 15-18) at A II.141; three (saddh°, samādh°, paðð°, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A I. 118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriya-rūpaṃ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaṃ as indriyaṃ "form which is faculty" Dhs 661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1-5), the 2 séx-states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enumn.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709-717, 971-973. - It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. Pāli Text Society 295 Pāli-English Dictionary These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. - Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas. C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a-e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1-5): M I.295: S III.46 (pañcannaṃ °ānaṃ avak kanti), 225; IV.168; A II.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1-6): M I.9; S IV.176; V.74, 205, 230; A I.113; II.16, 39, 152; III.99, 163, 387 sq.; V.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saṃvutāni S II.231, 271; IV.112; pañcasu °esu saṃvuto Sn 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaṃ pi vuttaṃ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6th as manas included, SnA 343); °esu susaṃvuta Th 2, 196 (= mana-chaṭṭhesu i° suṭṭhu saṃvutā ThA 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D III.107; S II.218; IV.103, 112, 175; A I.25, 94, 113; II.39; III.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; IV.25, 166; V.134; It 23, 24; Nd1 14; Vbh 248, 360; DA I.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita-dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S II. 275; III.2, 235; IV.294; V.301; A I.181; III.380. °ānaṃ samatā (v. l. samatha) A III.375 sq. (see also f. below) °āni bhāvitāni Sn 516 (= cakkh'ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd2 475 B8. - Various: S I.26 (rakkhati), 48 (°ûpasame rato); IV.40, 140 (°sampanna); V.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. I.190 (man°); Vbh 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud° & tikkh°) 384 (ahīn°). - (b) physical: (above B 7-9) all three: S V.204; Vism 447; itthi° & purisa° A IV.57; Vbh 122, 415 sq.; puris° A III.404; jīvit° Vbh 123, 137; Vism 230 (°upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. - (c) sensational (above B 10-14): S V.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh 15, 71; Nett 88. (d) moral (above B 15- 19): S III.96, 153; IV.36, 365 sq.; V.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to paðcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paððā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A IV.125 sq., 203, 225; V.56, 175; Ps II.49, 51 sq., 86; Nd1 14; Nd2 628 (sat° + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh 341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga, magga (see Nd2 s. v. p. 263) D II.120; Vin III. 93, Ps II.166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16- 19) at Nett 83. - (e) cognitional (above B 20-22) D III.219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It 53; Ps I.115; II.30. - (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a-e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S I.61 (pākat°), 204 (id.); III.207 (ākāsaṃ °āni sankamanti); IV.294 (vipari-bhinnāni); A III.441 (°ānaṃ avekallatā). magic power A IV.264 sq. (okkhipati °āni). indriyānaṃ paripāko (moral or physical) over-ripeness of faculties S II.2, 42; A V.203; Nd2 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh 137. moral forces Vin I.183 (°ānaṃ samatā, + viriyānaṃ s. as sign of Arahant); II.240 (pañc°). principle of life ekindriyaṃ jīvaṃ Vin III.156; Miln 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase °āni paricāreti to satisfy one's heart PvA 16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase °āni bhinditvā breaking one's vow J II.274; IV.190. D. Unclassified material D I 77 (ahīn°); III 239 (domanass° & somanass°) M I.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); II. 11, 106; III.296; S III.225; V.209 (dukkh°, domanass°); A I.39, 42 sq., 297; II.38 (sant°), 149 sq.; III.277, 282; Ps I.16, 21, 88, 180; II.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd1 45 (°dhīra), 171 (°kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh°), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (°vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (°vekallatā); Sdhp 280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473. E. As adj. (-°) having one's senses, mind or heart as such & such S I.138 (tikkh° & mud°); III.93 (pākat°); V.269 (id.); A I.70 (id) & passim (id.); A I.70 (saṃvut°) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt°); II.6 (samāhit°); 8n 214 (susamāhit° his senses well-composed); PvA 70 (pīṇit° joyful or gladdened of heart). F. Some compounds: -gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S I.154; Dh 375. -gutti keeping watch over the senses, self-restraint DhA IV.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (°ðāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the senses and intentions of others a J I.78; b A V.34, 38; b Ps I.121 sq., 133 sq.; II.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c S V.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. -bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin I.294 (+ balabhāvanā); M III.298. -saṃvara restraint or subjugation of Pāli Text Society 296 Pāli-English Dictionary the senses D II.281; M I.269, 346; S I.54; A III.360; IV.99; V.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq. Indhana {Indhana} (nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1] firewood, fuel J IV.27 (adj. an° without fuel, aggi); V.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma. Ibbha {Ibbha} (adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādāpaccā D I.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M I.334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J VI.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA I.254, (also at J VI.215). Iriṇa {Irina} (nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J VI.560 (= niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa. Iriyati {Iriyati} [fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M I.74, 75; S I.53 (dukkhaṃ aticca iriyati); IV.71; A III.451; V.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th 1,276; J III.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DA I.70. Iriyanā {Iriyana} (f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. Iriyā {Iriya} (f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M I.81; Sn 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana). -patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps II.225 & DA I.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. Vin I.39; II.146 (°sampanna); Vin I.91 (chinn° a cripple); S V.78 (cattāro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225, 226; Nd2 s. v.; J I.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104, 128, 290, 396; DhA I.9; IV.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604. Irubbeda {Irubbeda} the Rig-veda Dpvs V.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA I.247; SnA 447. Illiyā {Illiya} (f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J V.259; VI.50. Illī {Illi} (f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one-edged sword J V.259. Illīyituṃ {Illiyitum} v. l. for allīyituṃ at J V.154. Iva {Iva} (indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh 1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J I.295; SnA 12 (= opamma-vacanaṃ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic-metathetic form viya (q. v.). Isi {Isi} [Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. - Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaṃ S II.280 & isīnaṃ S I.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065] - 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D I.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S I.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaṃ); II.280 (dhammo isinaṃ dhajo); A II.24, 51; Vin IV.15 = 22 (°bhāsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev° divine Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi-nāmakā ye keci isi-pabbajjaṃ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā Pāli Text Society 297 Pāli-English Dictionary tāpasā); Dh 281; J I.17 (v.90: isayo n'atthi me samā of Buddha); J V.140 (°gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv II.614 (= yama-niyam'ādīnaṃ esanatthena isayo PvA 98); II.133 (= jhān'ādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ esanatthena isi PvA 163); IV.73 (= asekkhānaṃ sīlakkhandh'ādīnaṃ esanatthena isiṃ PvA 265); Miln 19 (°vāta) 248 (°bhattika); DA I.266 (gen. isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. - 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin I. 245; D I.104, 238; A III.224, IV.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu. nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA I.105; IV.55; PvA 162. -vāta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. -sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M I.386; S I.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 211 (= buddha-isinaṃ Vipassi-ādīnaṃ sattamo VvA 105). Isikā {Isika} (f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D I.77, cp. DA I.222; J VI.67 (isikā). Isitta {Isitta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi-ship D I.104 (= isi-bhāva DA I.274). Issati {Issati} [denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)/ratai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear illwill, to be angry, to envy J III.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. °ikā A II.203. - pp. issita (q. v.). Issattha {Issattha} (nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. - Bdhgh. in a strange way dissects it as "usuð ca satthað cā ti vuttaṃ hoti" (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] - 1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) M I.85; III.1; S I.100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. explns. by usu-sippaṃ K. S. p. 318); Sn 617 (°ṃ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaṃ SnA 466); J VI.81; Sdhp 390. - 2. (m.) an archer Miln 250, 305, 352, 418. Issatthaka {Issatthaka} [issattha + ka] an archer Miln 419. Issara {Issara} [Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A IV.90; Sn 552; J I.89 (°jana), 100, 283 (°bheri); IV.132 (°jana); Pv IV.67 (°mada); Miln 253 (an° without a ruler); DhsA 141; DA I.111; PvA 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, 431. - 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D III.28; M II.222 = A I.173; Vism 598. Issariya {Issariya} [fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) D III.190; S I.43, 100 (°mada); V.342 (issariy-ādhipacca); A I.62 (°ādhipacca); II.205, 249; III.38; IV.263; Sn 112; Dh 73; Ud 18; Ps II.171, 176; J I.156; V.443; DhA II.73; VvA 126 (for ādhipacca) PvA 42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, 583. Issariyatā {Issariyata} (f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp 422. Issā1 {Issa} (f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will D II.277 Pāli Text Society 298 Pāli-English Dictionary (°macchariya); III.44 (id.); M I.15; S II.260; A I.95, 105 (°mala), 299; II.203; IV.8 (°saññojana), 148, 349, 465; V.42 sq., 156, 310; Sn 110; J V.90 (°āvatiṇṇa); Pv II.37; Vv 155; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 380, 391; Dhs 1121, 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (def.); PvA 24, 46, 87; DhA II.76; Miln 155; Sdhp 313, 510. pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S II.260; Miln 155; PvA 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata. Issā2 {Issa} (f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya-mṛga] in issammiga (= issāmiga) J V.410, & issāmiga J V.431, a species of antelope, cp. J V.425 issāsinga the antlers of this antelope. [abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470. Issāsa [Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin IV.124; M III.1; A IV.423 (issāso vā issās'antevāsī vā); J II.87; IV.494; Miln 232; DA I.156. {Issasa} Issāsin {Issasin} [Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning "bow" + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J IV.494 (= issāsa C.). Issita {Issita} [pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J V.44. Issukin {Issukin} (adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin II.89 (+ maccharin); D III.45, 246; M I.43, 96; S IV.241; A III.140, 335; IV.2; Dh 262; J III.259; Pv. II.34; Pug 19, 23; DhA III.389; PvA 174. See also an°. Iha {Iha} (indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place "here" Sn 460. Pāli Text Society 299 Pāli-English Dictionary Ī Īgha {Igha} (?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble, rage etc. See discussed under nigha1] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an° (or anigha), e. g. J III.343 (= niddukkha C.); V.343. Īti & Ītī {Iti} (f.) [Sk. īti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk. ītay'opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. - Sn 51; J I.27 (V.189); V.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. anīti sound condition, health, safety A IV.238; Miln 323. Ītika {Itika} (adj.) [fr. īti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an°. Ītiha {Itiha} a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an°. Īdisa {Idisa} (adj.) [Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so-looking] such like, such DhsA 400 (f. °ī); PvA 50, (id.) 51. Īriṇa {Irina} (nt.) [= iriṇa, q. v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa] barren soil, desert D I.248; A V.156 sq.; J V.70 (= sukkha-kantāra C.); VI.560; VvA 334. Īrita {Irita} [pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati] - 1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by the wind); J I.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv II.123 (malut'erita); PvA 156 (has erita for ī°); VvA 177 (= calita). - 2. uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs V.12. Īsa {Isa} [fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e. g. Jtm 3181] lord, owner, ruler J IV.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa-sīha C.); VvA 168. f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha. Īsaka {Isaka} [dimin. of īsā] a pole J II.152; VI.456 (°agga the top of a pole). Īsakaṃ {Isakam} (adv.) [nt. of īsaka] a little, slightly, easily M I. 450; J I.77; VI.456; DA I.252, 310; VvA 36; Vism 136, 137, 231, īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586. Īsā {Isa} (f.) [Vedic īṣā] the pole of a plough or of a carriage S I.104 (nangal'īsā read with v. l. for nangala-sīsā T.), 172, 224 (°mukha): A IV.191 (rath°); Sn 77; J I.203 (°mukha); IV.209; Ud 42; Miln 27; SnA 146; VvA 269 (°mūlaṃ = rathassa uro). -danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough-pole (of an elephant) Vin I.352; M I.414; Vv 209 = 439 (= ratha-īsā-sadisa-danto); J VI.490 = 515. Īsāka {Isaka} (adj.) [fr. īsā] having a pole (said of a carriage) J VI.252. Īhati {Ihati} [Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin III.268 (Bdhgh.) J VI.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA I.139; VvA 35. Pāli Text Society 300 Pāli-English Dictionary Īhā {Iha} (f.) [fr. īh] exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir-īha void of activity Miln 413. Pāli Text Society 301 Pāli-English Dictionary U U{U} the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud). Ukkaṃsa [fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaṃsa) D I.54 (ukkaṃs-āvakkaṃsa = h āyana-vaḍḍhana DA I.165); M I.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA 146 (°gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaṃsena par excellence, exceedingly); PvA 228 (°vasena, with ref. to devatās; v. l. SS okk°). {Ukkamsa} Ukkaṃsaka {Ukkamsaka} (adj.) [fr. ukkaṃsa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M I.19 (att°; opp. para-vambhin); J II.152. Cp. sāmukkaṃsika. Ukkaṃsati {Ukkamsati} [ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise M I.498; J IV.108. pp. ukkaṭṭha. - ukkaṃseti in same meaning M I.402 sq. (attānaṃ u. paraṃ vambheti); A II.27; Nd2 141. Ukkaṃsanā {Ukkamsana} (f.) [abstr. of ukkaṃsati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att° selfexaltation, self-praise M I.402 (opp. para-vambhanā); Nd2 505 (id.). Ukkaṭṭha {Ukkattha} (adj.) [pp. of ukkaṃsati] - 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna, in phrase hīna-m-ukkaṭṭha-majjhime Vin IV.7; J I.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); III.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); SnA 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaṃ ukkaṭṭhā); VvA 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka). - 2. large, comprehensive, great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin III.243 (= uk. nāma patto aḍḍhālhak'odanaṃ gaṇhāti catubhāgaṃ khādanaṃ vā tadūpiyaṃ vā byaðjanaṃ). - 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism 37 (ati-ukkaṭṭha-desanā); also in phrase °vasena in detail SnA 181. - 4. arrogant, insolent J V. 16. 5. used as nom at J I.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". - an° Vism 64 (°cīvara). -niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376. Ukkaṭṭhatā {Ukkatthata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha] superiority, eminence, exalted state J IV.303 (opp. hīnatā). Ukkaṭṭhita {Ukkatthita} [for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati] boiled up, boiling, seething A III.231 & 234 (udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v. l. ukkuṭṭhito); J IV.118 (v. l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss). Ukkaṇṭhati {Ukkanthati} [fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one's neck for anything; i. e. long for, be hungry after, etc.] to long for, to be dissatisfied, to fret J I.386 (°māna); III.143 (°itvā); IV.3, 160; V.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); DhsA 407; PvA 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi, v. l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇḍali). - pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q. v.). Cp. pari°. Ukkaṇṭhanā {Ukkanthana} (f.) [fr. ukkaṇṭhati] emotion, commotion D II.239. Pāli Text Society 302 Pāli-English Dictionary Ukkaṇṭhā {Ukkantha} (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ°] longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88; PvA 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152. Ukkaṇṭhi {Ukkanthi} (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ°] longing, dissatisfaction ThA 239 (= arati). Ukkaṇṭhikā {Ukkanthika} (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita] = ukkaṇṭhi, i. e. longing, state of distress, pain J III.643. Ukkaṇṭhita {Ukkanthita} [pp. of ukkaṇṭhati] dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting J I.196; II.92, 115; III.185; Miln 281; DhA IV.66, 225; PvA 13 (an°), 55, 187. Ukkaṇṇa {Ukkanna} (adj.) [ud + kaṇṇa] having the ears erect (?) J VI.559. Ukkaṇṇaka {Ukkannaka} (ad.) [ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. "with ears out" or is it ukkandaka?] a certain disease (? mange) of jackals, S II.230, 271; S. A. „the fur falls off from the whole body‟. Ukkantati {Ukkantati} [ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin I.217 (°itva); J I.164; IV.210 (v. l. for okk°); V.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv III.94 (ukkantvā, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni°), 211 (= chinditvā). Ukkapiṇḍaka {Ukkapindaka} [etymology unknown] only in pl.; vermin, Vin I.211 = 239. See comment at Vin. Texts II.70. Ukkantikaṃ {Ukkantikam} (nt. adv.), in jhān° & kasiṇ°, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374. Ukkamati {Ukkamati} (or okk° which is v. l. at all passages quoted) [ud + kamati from kram] to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from A III.301 (maggā); J III.531; IV. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DA I.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti J II.3. Ukkamana {Ukkamana} (nt.) [fr. ukkamati] stepping away from Vism 374. Ukkala {Ukkala} in phrase ukkala-vassa-bhañña S III.73 = A II.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as "the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of old" (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa°, i. e. ukkalā + avassa° [*avaśya°], one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman M III.78 reads Okkalā (v. l. Ukkalā)Vassa-Bhaððā, all as N. pr. Ukkalāpa {Ukkalapa} see uklāpa. Ukkalissati {Ukkalissati} [= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati] to become depraved, to revoke(?) Miln 143. Ukkā {Ukka} (f.) [Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr. a)/flac (= lamprw_s torch Hesychius), velxa/nos (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus, Oir. Olcān, Idg. *Û q to be fiery] 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch D I.49, 108; S II.264; Th 2, 488 (°ûpama); J I.34 (dhamm-okkā); II.401; IV.291; V.322; Vism 428; ThA 287; DA I.148; DhA I.42, 205; PvA 154. Esp. as tiṇ° firebrand of dry grass M I.128, 365; Nd2 40Ie; Pāli Text Society 303 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA I.126; Sdhp 573. - 2. a furnace or forge of a smith A I.210, 257; J VI.437; see also below °mukha. - 3. a meteor: see below °pāta. -dhāra a torch-bearer Sn 335; It 108; Miln 1. -pāta "falling of a firebrand", a meteor D I.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaṃ patanaṃ DA I.95); J I.374; VI.476; Miln 178. -mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A I.257; J VI.217 (= kammārɔuddhana C.), 574; Sn 686; DhA II.250. Ukkācanā (f.) [fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita] enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapanā, v. l. °kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā). {Ukkacana} Ukkācita {Ukkacita} [pp. either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1] enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up A I.72, 286 (°vinīta parisā enlightened & trained). Ukkāceti {Ukkaceti} [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole] to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets J II.70 (v. l. ussiñcati). Ukkāmeti {Ukkameti} [Caus. of ukkamati] to cause to step aside J VI.11. Ukkāra {Ukkara} [fr. ud + kṛ "do out"] dung, excrement J IV.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkārabhūmi dung-hill J I.5, 146 (so read for ukkar°), II.40; III.16, 75, 377; IV.72, 305; Vism 196 (°ûpama kuṇapa); DhA III.208. Cp. uccāra. Ukkāsati {Ukkasati} [ud + kāsati of kas to cough] to "ahem"! to cough, to clear one's throat Vin II.222; IV.16; M II.4; A V.65; aor. ukkāsi J I.161, 217. - pp. ukkāsita. Ukkāsikā {Ukkasika} (f.?) [doubtful] at Vin II.106 is not clear. Vin Texts III.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh's expln. is vattavaṭṭi (patta°? a leaf? Cp. S III.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk. varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. "rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction". Ukkāsita {Ukkasita} [pp. of ukkāsati] coughed, clearing one's throat, coughed out, hawking D I.89; Bu I.52 (+ khipita) - °sadda the noise of clearing the throat D I.50; J I.119; DhA I.250 (+ khipita°). Ukkiṇṇa {Ukkinna} [pp. of ud + kṛ dig2] dug up or out D I.105; J IV.106; Miln 330; DA I.274 (= khāta). Ukkiledeti {Ukkiledeti} [Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati] to take the dirt out, to clean out DA I.255 (dosaṃ); SnA 274 (rāgaṃ; v. l. BB. uggileti). Ukkujja {Ukkujja} (adj.) [ud + kujja] set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja A I.131; S V.89 (ukkujjQāvakujja); Pug 32 (= uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214). Ukkujjati {Ukkujjati} (°eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin I.181; II.126 (pattaṃ), 269 (bhikkhuṃ); mostly in phrase nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up one who has fallen" D I.85, 110; II.132, 152; Sn p. 15 (= uparimukhaṃ karoti DA I.228 = SnA 155). 304 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Ukkujjana {Ukkujjana} (nt.) [fr. ukkujjati] raising up, setting up again Vin II.126 (patt°). Ukkuṭika {Ukkutika} [fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. "bending up". The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e. g. Av. S I.315] a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See Dial. I.231 n. 4. - Vin I.45 (°ṃ nisīdati); III.228; A I.296; II.206; Pug 55; Vism 62, 104, 105 (quot. fr. Papaðca Sūdanī) 426; DhA I.201, 217; II.61 (as posture of humility); III.195; IV.223. -padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka-prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dh 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit) D I.167; M I.78, 515; A I.296; II.206; J I.493; III.235; IV.299; Dh 141 (= ukkuṭika-bhāvena āraddha-viriyo DhA III.78). Ukkuṭṭhi {Ukkutthi} (f.) [fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruðc as in P. kuðca & Sk. krośati] shouting out, acclamation J II.367; VI.41; Bu I.35; Miln 21; Vism 245; DhA II.43; VvA 132 (°sadda). Ukkusa {Ukkusa} [see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453] an osprey J IV.291 (°rāja), 392. Ukkūla {Ukkula} (adj.) [ud + kūla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) A I.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp. utkūlanikūla-sama Lal. V. 340. Ukkoṭana {Ukkotana} (nt.) [fr. ud + *kuṭ to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked] crookedness, perverting justice, taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) D I.5; III.176; S V.473; A II.209, V.206; DA I.79 = Pug A 240 ("assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañcagahaṇaṃ"). Ukkoṭanaka {Ukkotanaka} (adj.) [fr. ukkoṭana] belonging to the perversion of justice Vin II.94. Ukkoṭeti {Ukkoteti} [denom. fr. *ukkoṭ-ana] to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged, Vin II.94, 303; IV.126; J II.387; DA I.5. Ukkhali {Ukkhali} (°lī) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) J I.68, 235; V. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism 346 (°mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (°kapāla, in comp.); DhA I.136; II.5; III.371; IV.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next. Ukkhalikā {Ukkhalika} (f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta-pacanabhājanaṃ ThA 29); DhA IV.98 (Qkāla); DhsA 376. Ukkhā {Ukkha} (?) [can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?] in ukkhasataṃ dānaṃ, given at various times of the day (meaning = e(kato/mbh?) S II.264 (v. l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataṃ d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaṃ?). S A: paṇītabhojanabharitānaṃ mahā-ukkhalinaṃ sataṃ dānaṃ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. V.38). Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift. Pāli Text Society Ukkhita 305 Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of ukṣ sprinkle] besmeared, besprinkled J IV.331 (ruhir°, so read for °rakkhita). Cp. okkhita. {Ukkhita} Ukkhitta {Ukkhitta} [pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law "suspended" Vin IV.218; J III.487. -°āsika with drawn sword M I.377; S IV.173; J I.393; DhsA 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. -paligha having the obstacles removed M I.139; A III.84; Dh 398 = Sn 622 (= avijjā-palighassa ukkhittatāya u. SnA 467 = DhA IV.161). -sira with uplifted head Vism 162. Ukkhittaka {Ukkhittaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ukkhitta] a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin I.97, 121; II.61, 173, 213. Ukkhipati {Ukkhipati} [ut + khipati, kṣip]. To hold up, to take up J I.213; IV.391: VI.350; Vism 4 (satthaṃ); PvA 265. A t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin IV.309; Pug 33. -ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin II.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported J I.52; II.15, 38; III.285, 436. - pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. "upright" Vism 126. Ukkhipana {Ukkhipana} (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] 1. pushing upwards J I.163. - 2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya). Ukkheṭita {Ukkhetita} [pp. of ud + kheṭ or *khel, see kheḷa] spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin III.97 = IV.27. Ukkhepa {Ukkhepa} (adj.-n.) [fr. ud + kṣip] (adj.) throwing away DhA IV.59 (°dāya a throw-away donation, tip). - (m.) lifting up raising J I.394 (cel°); VI.508; DA I.273; dur° hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347. Ukkhepaka {Ukkhepaka} (adj.) [fr. ukkhepa] throwing (up); °ṃ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin II.214 = IV.195 (piṇḍ°). Ukkhepana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] suspension J III.487. Ukkhepanā {Ukkhepana} (f.) [= last] throwing up, provocation, sneering Vbh 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29. Ukkhepaniya {Ukkhepaniya} (adj.) [ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepanīyaṃ karma Divy 329] referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), °kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin I.49, 53, 98, 143, 168; II.27, 226, 230, 298: A I.99. Uklāpa {Uklapa} (ukkalāpa) (adj.) [cp. Sk. ut-kalāpayati to let go] - 1. deserted J II.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv. ll. uklāpa & ullāpa). - 2. dirtied, soiled Vin II.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA III.168 (ukkalāpa). Ugga1 {Ugga} (adj.) [Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. a)ve/cw, Goth. wahsjan "to wax", also Lat. augeo & P. oja] mighty, huge, strong, fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord D I.103; S I.51 = VvA 116 (uggateja "the fiery heat"); J IV.496; V.452 (°teja); VI.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paððātā by C.); Miln 331; DhA II.57 (°tapa); Sdhp 286 (°daṇḍa), 304 (id.). - Cp. sam°. As Np. at Vism 233 & J I.94. -putta a nobleman, mighty lord S I.185 ("high born warrior" trsl.); J VI.353 (= amaccaputta C.); Th 1, 1210. Pāli Text Society 306 Pāli-English Dictionary Ugga2 {Ugga} = uggamana, in aruṇ-ugga sunrise Vin IV.272. Uggacchati {Uggacchati} [ud + gam] to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Th 1, 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise VvA 75; Pv IV.8; Vism 43, ger. uggaðchitvāna Miln 376. - pp. uggata (q. v.). Uggajjati {Uggajjati} [ud + gajjati] to shout out Nd1 172. Uggaṇhāti {Ugganhati} [ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn 912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti SnA 561); imper. uggaṇha J II.30 (sippaṃ) & uggaṇhāhi Miln 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Sn 832, 845; Nd1 173. - Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv III.54 (nakkhatta-yogaṃ = akari PvA 198); ger. uggahetvā J V.282, VvA 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ); infin. uggahetuṃ VvA 138 (sippaṃ to study a craft). - Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct J V. 217; VI.353. - pp. uggahita (q. v.). See also uggahāyati. - A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DA I 32 (cp. uggāhaka). Uggata {Uggata} [pp. of uggacchati] come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted J IV.213 (suriya), 296 (°atta), 490; V.244; Pv IV.14 (°atta one who has risen = uggata-sabhāva samiddha PvA 220); VvA 217 (°mānasa); DA I.248; PvA 68 (°phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i. e. emaciated, for upphāsulika). Cp. acc°. Uggatta {Uggatta} in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta°, thus at Pv III.32; PvA 10, 188. Uggatthana {Uggatthana} at J VI.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti] lit. "tinkling", i. e. a bangle. Uggama {Uggama} [fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama] rising up Sdhp 594. Uggamana {Uggamana} (°na) (nt.) [fr. ud + gam] going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) D I.10, 240; S II.268 (suriy°); J IV.321 (an°), 388; Pv II.941 (suriy°); DA I.95 (= udayana); DhA I.165 (aruṇ°); II.6 (id.); VvA 326 (oggaman°); PvA 109 (aruṇ°). Cp. ugga2 & uggama. Uggaha {Uggaha} (adj) (-°) [fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] - 1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy°), 99 (°paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa). - 2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq. neg. an° Sn 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Cp. dhanuggaha. Uggahaṇa (nt.) [fr. uggaṇhāti] learning, taking up, studying PvA 3 (sipp°). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277. {Uggahana} Uggahāyati {Uggahayati} [poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati] to take hold of, to take up Sn 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 91). - ger. uggahāya Sn 837. Uggahita {Uggahita} [pp. of uggaṇhāti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin I.212; J III.168 (°sippa, adj.), 325; IV.220; VI 76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha). Pāli Text Society 307 Pāli-English Dictionary Uggahetar {Uggahetar} [n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti] one who takes up, acquires or learns A IV.196. Uggāra {Uggara} [ud + gṛ to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up] spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DA I.41; KhA 61. Uggāhaka {Uggahaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti] one who is eager to learn J V.148 [cp. M Vastu III.373 ogrāhaka in same context]. Uggāhamāna {Uggahamana} see uggaṇhāti. Uggirati1 {Uggirati} [Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraṃ udgirati Jtm 3126. - The by-form uggirati is uggilati with interchange and ṛ, roots *gr , see gala & gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DA I.41 (uggāraṃ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589. Uggirati2 [cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin IV.147 = DhA III.50 (talasattikaṃ expld. by uccāreti); J I.150 (āvudhāni); VI.460, 472. Cp. sam°. {Uggirati} Uggilati {Uggilati} = uggirati1, i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M I.393; S IV.323; J III.529; Miln 5; PvA 283. Uggīva {Uggiva} (nt.) [ud + gīva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging down J VI.562 (uggīvað cɔāpi aṃsato = aṃsakūṭe pacchi-lagganakaṃ C.). Ugghaṃseti {Ugghamseti} [ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaṃsati1] to rub Vin II.106. - pp. ugghaṭṭha (q. v.). Ugghaṭita {Ugghatita} (adj.) [pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, 26 and phrase at M Vastu III.260 udghaṭitajða] striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd. °ððū of quick understanding A II.135; Pug 41; Nett 7-9, 125; DA I.291. Ugghaṭeti {Ugghateti} [ud + ghaṭati] to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid. Ugghaṭṭa & Ugghaṭṭha {Ugghatta} {Ugghattha} ? [should be pp. of ugghaṃsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaṃsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti] knocked, crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa-pāda foot-sore Sn 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa-pādatala etc. SnA 582); J IV.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha-vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda); V.69 (= raj okiṇṇa-pāda C. not to the point). Uggharati {Uggharati} [ud + kṣar] to ooze Th 1, 394 = DhA III.117. Ugghāṭana {Ugghatana} (nt.?) [fr. ugghāṭeti] that which can be removed, in °kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin II.153 (cp. Vin Texts III.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives "rope & bucket of a well" as meaning (kavāṭaṃ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā. Pāli Text Society 308 Pāli-English Dictionary Ugghāṭita {Ugghatita} [pp. of ugghāṭeti] opened Miln 55; DhA I.134. Ugghāṭeti {Ugghateti} [for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130] to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin II.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaṃ); IV.37; J II.31; VI.68; Miln 140 (bhava-paṭisandhiṃ), 371; Vism 374. - Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened J V.381. Ugghāta {Ugghata} [ud + ghāta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin II. 276 (yān°); J VI.253 (an°); DhA III.283 (yān°). Ugghāti {Ugghati} (f.) [fr. ud + ghāta] - 1. shaking, shock VvA 36. - 2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Sn 828; Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghāta°). Ugghātita {Ugghatita} [pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta] struck, killed A III.68. Ugghosanā {Ugghosana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā] proclamation DA I.310. Ugghoseti {Ugghoseti} [ud + ghoseti] to shout out, announce, proclaim J I.75; DhA II.94; PvA 127. Ucca {Ucca} (adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up] high (opp. avaca low) D I.194; M II.213; A V.82 (°ṭhāniyaṃ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv IV.74 (uccaṃ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraṃ katvā PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA I.135; PvA 176. -āvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin I.70, 203; J IV.115, 363 (= mahaggha-samaggha C. p. 366); Sn 703, 714, 792, 959; Dh 83; Nd1 93, 467; Vv 121 (= vividha VvA 60); 311. -kulīnatā high birth A III.48 (cp. uccā°). Uccaka {Uccaka} (adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin II.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair). Uccatta {Uccatta} (nt.) [fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaṃ] height J III.318. Uccaya {Uccaya} [fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya] heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dh 115, 191, 192; Vv 4711; 827 (= cetiya VvA 321); DhA III.5, 9; DhsA 41 (pāpassa). -siluccaya a mountain Th 1, 692; J I.29 (V.209); VI.272, 278; Dāvs V.63. Uccā {Ucca} (°-) (adv.) [cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaṃ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl. - In BSk. we find ucca° (uccakulīna Av. Ś III.117) as well as uccaṃ (uccaṃgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds. -kaṇerukā a tall female elephant M I.178. -kāḷārikā id. M I.178 (v. l. °kaḷārikā to be preferred). -kula a high, noble family Pv III.116 (= uccā khattiya-kul-ādino PvA 176). -kulīnatā birth in a high-class family, high rank M III.37; VvA 32. -sadda a loud noise D I.143, 178; A III.30. -sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin I. 192; D I.5, 7; cp. DA I.78. Uccāra {Uccara} [Ud + car] discharge, excrement, faeces Vin III.36 (°ṃ gacchati to go to stool); IV.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); DhA II.56 (°karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine D I.70; M I.83; J I.5; II.19. Uccāranā {Uccarana} (f.) [fr. uccāreti] lifting up, raising Vin III.121. Pāli Text Society 309 Pāli-English Dictionary Uccārita {Uccarita} [pp. of uccāreti] - 1. uttered, let out PvA 280 (akkharāni). - 2. lifted, raised ThA 255. Uccāreti {Uccareti} [ud + cāreti, Caus. of car] to lift up, raise aloft Vin III.81; IV.147 = DhA III.50; M I.135. - pp. uccārita (q. v.). Uccālinga {Uccalinga} [etym.?] a maw-worm Vin III.38, 112; J II.146. Uccināti {Uccinati} [ud + cināti] to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin I.73; II.285 (aor. uccini); J IV.9; Pv III.2 4 (nantake = gavesana-vasena gahetvāna PvA 185); Dpvs IV.2. Ucchanga {Ucchanga} [Sk. utsanga, ts > cch like Sk. utsahate > BSk. ucchahate see ussahati] the hip, the lap Vin I.225; M I. 366; A I.130 (°pañña); J I.5, 308; II.412; III.22; IV.38, 151; Pug 31; Vism 279; DhA II.72. Ucchādana {Ucchadana} (nt.) [ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes shampooing D I.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc°-dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. I.87); thus in same formula at M I. 500; S IV.83; J I.146 & passim; A I.62; II.70 (+ nahāpana); IV.54, 386; It 111; Th 2, 89 (nahāpan°); Miln 241 (°parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DA I.88. Ucchādeti {Ucchadeti} [fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana] to rub the body with perfumes J VI.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DA I.88. Ucchiṭṭha {Ucchittha} [pp. of ud + śiṣ] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin II.115 (°odakaṃ); IV.266 (id.); J II.83 (bhattaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ akatvā), 126 (°nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; IV.386 (°ṃ piṇḍaṃ), 388; VI.508; Miln 315; DhA I.52; II.85; III.208; PvA 80 (= chaḍḍita), 173 (°bhattaṃ). At J IV.433 read ucch° for ucciṭṭha. -an° not touched or thrown away (of food) J III.257; DhA II.3. - See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka. Ucchiṭṭhaka {Ucchitthaka} (fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha J IV.386; VI.63, 509. Ucchindati [ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S V.432 (bhavataṇhaṃ), A IV.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi to be read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); J V.383; Dh 285. - Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S IV.309; J V.242, 467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi). - pp. ucchinna (q. v.). {Ucchindati} Ucchinna {Ucchinna} [pp. of ucchindati] broken up, destroyed S III. 10; A V.32; Sn 746. Cp. sam°. Ucchu {Ucchu} [Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu] sugar-cane Vin IV.35; A III.76; IV.279; Miln 46; DhA IV.199 (°ūnaṃ yanta sugar-cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124. -agga (ucch°) top of s. c. Vism 172. -khaṇḍikā a bit of sugar-cane Vv 3326. -khādana eating s. c. Vism 70. -khetta sugarcane field J I.339; VvA 256. -gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar-cane, Batatas Paniculata J I.339; VI.114 (so read for °ghaṭika). -pāla watchman of s.-c. VvA 256. -pīḷana, cane-pressing, Asl. 274. -puṭa Pāli Text Society 310 Pāli-English Dictionary sugar-cane basket J IV.363. -bīja seed of s.-c. A I.32; V.213. -yantra a sugar-mill J I.339. -rasa s.c. juice Vin I.246; Vism 489; VvA 180 -vāta, Asl. 274. -sālā, Asl. 274. Uccheda {Uccheda} [fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin III.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) D I.34, 55; S IV.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160; DA I.120. -diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as opp. to sassata- or atta-diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) S II.20; III.99, 110 sq; Ps I.150, 158; NdQ 248 (opp. sassati°); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta°). -vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin I.235; III.2; D I.34, 55; S II.18; IV.401; A IV.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. vādin = °vāda Nett 111; J V.244. Ucchedana {Ucchedana} (adj.) [fr. ud + chid] cutting off, destroying; f. °anī J V.16 (surā). Ucchedin {Ucchedin} (adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda J V.241. Ucchepaka {Ucchepaka} (nt.) [= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭhabhatta] leavings of food M II.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uðchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 II.682). Uju & Ujju {Uju} {Ujju} (adj.) [Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. o)re/gw to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct; straightforward, honest, upright D III.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba-jimha-vanka-kuṭilabhāvQāpagama-hetutāya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju avanka akuṭila); DA I.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA I.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ nibbisevanaṃ karoti); VvA 281 (°koṭi-vanka); PvA 123 (an°). -angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an° not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J V.40 (= kañcana-sannibha-sarīra C.); VI.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita-agarahitangin C.). -gata walking straight, of upright life M I.46; A III.285 sq. (°citta); V.290 sq.; Sn 350 (ujju°), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju°, see DhA II.234 for interpretation). -gāmin, neg. an° going crooked, a snake J IV.330. -cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350. -diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Miln 257. -paṭipanna living uprightly D I.192; S IV.304; V.343; Vism 219. -magga the straight road D I.235; Vin V.149; It 104; J I.344; VI.252; DhA II.192. -bhāva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. bhūta straight, upright S I.100, 170; II.279Q V.384, 404; A II.57; IV.292; J I.94; V.293 (an°); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv I.1010 (= citta-jimha-vankaKutīla-bhāva-karānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta PvA 51). -vaṃsa straight lineage, direct descendency J V.251. -vāta a soft wind Miln 283. -vipaccanīka in direct opposition D I.1; M I.402; DA I.38. Ujuka & Ujjuka {Ujuka} {Ujjuka} (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M I.124; S I.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna), 260 (citta); IV.298; V.143, 165; J I.163; V.297 (opp. khujja); DhA I.18 (°magga); Sdhp 321. -anujjuka crooked, not straight S IV.299; J III.318. Ujukatā {Ujukata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ujuka] straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq. Ujutā {Ujuta} (f.) [abstr. of uju] straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51. Pāli Text Society 311 Pāli-English Dictionary Ujjagghati {Ujjagghati} [ud + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin III.128; Th 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati ThA 78); A III.91 (ujjh°, v. l. ujj°) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati Pug A 249). Ujjangala {Ujjangala} [ud + jangala] hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place D II.146 (°nagaraka, trsl. "town in the midst of a jungle", cp. Dial. II.161); J I.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaṃsena jangala i. e. exceedingly dusty or sandy, dry); Pv II.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiyathaddhabhūmibhāga at PvA 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala, e. g. M Vastu II.207. Ujjala {Ujjala} (adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J I.220; Dāvs II.63. Ujjalati {Ujjalati} [ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin I.31; VvA 161 (+ jotati). - Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle Vin I.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. V.14, read dīpāṃ ujjālayiṃ); VvA 51 (padīpaṃ). Ujjava {Ujjava} (adj.) [ud + java] "running up", in cpd. ujjav-ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin IV. 300, expld. by "yattakaṃ patthena (patthana?) añcitaṃ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite". Ujjavati {Ujjavati} [ud + javati] to go up-stream Vin II.301. Ujjavanikāya {Ujjavanikaya} instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. [ud + javanaka, q. v.] up-stream, lit "running up" Vin II.290; IV.65 (in expln. of uddhaṃgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya). Ujjahati {Ujjahati} [ud + jahati] to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha S I.188; Th 2, 19; Sn 342. Ujju & Ujjuka {Ujju} {Ujjuka} see uju & ujuka. Ujjota {Ujjota} [ud + *jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate] light, lustre J I.183 (°kara); Miln 321. Ujjotita {Ujjotita} [pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti] illumined Dāvs V.53. Ujjhaggati {Ujjhaggati} see ujjagghati. Ujjhaggikā {Ujjhaggika} (f.) [fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies] loud laughter Vin II.213, cp. IV.187. Ujjhati {Ujjhati} [Sk. ujjhati, ujjh] - 1. to forsake, leave, give up J VI.138; Dāvs II.86. - 2. to sweep or brush away J VI.296. - pp. ujjhita (q. vQ). Ujjhatti {Ujjhatti} (f.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud-dhyāti] irritation, discontent A IV.223, 467 (v. l. ujj°); cp. ujjhāna. Ujjhāna (nt.) [ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?] - 1. taking offence, captiousness Dh 253 (= paresaṃ randha-gavesitāya DhA III.377); Miln 352 (an°-bahula). - 2. complaining, wailing J IV.287. -saññin, -saññika irritable S I.23; Th 1, 958; Vin II.214, cp. IV.194; Dpvs II.6; DhA III.376 (°saððitā irritability). {Ujjhana} Pāli Text Society 312 Pāli-English Dictionary Ujjhāpana {Ujjhapana} (nt.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna] stirring up, provoking J V.91 (devat°), 94 (°kamma). Ujjhāpanaka {Ujjhapanaka} (adj.) [fr. ujjhāpana] one who stirs up another to discontent Vin IV.38. Ujjhāpeti {Ujjhapeti} [Caus. of ujjhāyati] to harass, vex, irritate M I. 126; S I.209 ("give occasion for offence"); Vin IV.38 (cp. p. 356); J V.286; PvA 266. Ujjhāyati {Ujjhayati} [ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G. pp. 12 & 42 = Sk. ava-dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically] to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin I.53, 62, 73; II.207; IV.226; S I.232 & passim. - S I.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); J II.15; DhA II.20; aor. ujjhāyi J I.475; DhA II.88; inf. ujjhātuṃ J II.355. - Caus. ujjhāpeti (q. v.). Ujjhita {Ujjhita} [pp. of ujjhati] destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away M I.296 (+ avakkhitta); Th 1, 315 (itthi); 2, 386 (cp. ThA 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano); Dh 58 (= chaḍḍita of sweepings DhA I.445); J III.499; V.302; VI.51. Uñcha & Uñchā {Uncha} (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uðchana, to uðch. Neumann's etym. uðchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.2 II.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S II. 281; A I.36; III.66 sq., 104; Vin III.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J III.389; IV.23, 28, 434, 471 (°ya, dat. = phalāphalɔatthāya C.); ThA 235, 242. Cp. samuñchaka. -cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J II.272; III.37, 515; V.3; DA I.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. -cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA I.270, 271). -patta the gleaning-bowl, in phrase uðchāpattāgate rato "fond of that which has come into the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv IV.73 (= uðchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren "contented with whatever fills the bowl"). aððāt°, marked off as discarded (goods) S II.281, so S A. Uñchati {Unchati} [fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati). Uññā {Unna} (f.) [= avaððā (?) from ava + jðā, or after uððātabba? ] contempt Vin IV.241; Vbh 353 sq. (att°). Uññātabba {Unnatabba} (adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jðā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stockphrase "daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo" S I.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṃ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J V.63 mā naṃ daharo [ti] uððāsi (v. l. maððāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā°). Uṭṭitvā {Uttitva} at Vin II.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (= oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning "putting into a sling, tying or binding up". Uṭṭepaka {Uttepaka} one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk°) Vin I.79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe°, uḍḍe°, uḍe°). See remarks on uṭṭepeti. Pāli Text Society 313 Pāli-English Dictionary Uṭṭepeti {Uttepeti} in phrase kāke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin I.79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti = oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also uṭṭepaka. Uṭṭhapana {Utthapana} see vo°. Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti {Utthahati} {Utthati} [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug 51. - pot. uṭṭhaheyya S I.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA III.165, cp. Vin Texts I.152). - imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv II.61; J IV.433. - ppr. uṭṭhahanto M I.86; S I.217; J I.476. - aor. uṭṭhahi J I.117; PvA 75. - ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA 4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn 401. - inf. uṭṭhātuṃ J I.187. - Note. When uṭṭh° follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin II.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. - pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. - Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti. Uṭṭhahāna {Utthahana} [ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an° sluggish, lazy Dh 280 (= ayāyāmanto DhA III. 409); cp. anuṭṭhahaṃ S I.217. Uṭṭhātar {Utthatar} [n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S I.214; A IV.285, 288, 322; Sn 187; J VI.297. -an° one who is without energy S I.217; Sn 96. Uṭṭhāna {Utthana} (nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] - 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D II.134 (sīha-seyyaṃ kappesi uṭṭhāna-saññaṃ manasikaritvā); Dh 280 (°kāla); J I.392 (an°-seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ-uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA I.17. - 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. (-°) producing J I.47 (kapp°); VI.459; Miln 326 (dhaññ° khettaṃ atthi). - 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M I.86; A I.94; II.135 (°phala); III.45 (°viriya), 311; IV.281 (°sampadā); It 66 (°adhigataṃ dhanaṃ earned by industry); Pv IV.324; Pug 51 (°phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (°viriya); PvA 129 (+ viriya). -an° want of energy, sluggishness A IV.195; Dh 241. - Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh° after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha-vuṭṭhānaṃ J I.114. See also vuṭṭh°, and cp. pariy°. Uṭṭhānaka {Utthanaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] - 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J I.377, 420 (satasahass°); III. 229 (id.); V.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. - 2. energetic J VI.246. Uṭṭhānavant {Utthanavant} (adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh 24. Uṭṭhāpeti {Utthapeti} [Caus. II. of utthahati] - 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaṃ (suriyaṃ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise J I.318; VI.330; Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaṃ). - 2. to raise J VI.32 (paṭhaviṃ). - 3. to fit up J VI.445 (nāvaṃ). - 4. to exalt, praise DA I.256. - 5. to turn a person out DhA IV.69. - See also vuṭṭhāpeti. Pāli Text Society 314 Pāli-English Dictionary Uṭṭhāyaka {Utthayaka} (adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭhahati] "getting-up-ish", i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. °ikā Th 2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna-viriyasampannā ThA 267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā) Uṭṭhāyika {Utthayika} (adj.) [= uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J II.403 (satasahass°). Uṭṭhāyin {Utthayin} (adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D I.60 (pubb° + pacchānipātin rising early & lying down late). Uṭṭhāhaka {Utthahaka} (adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J V.448; f. °ikā A III.38 (v. l. °āyikā); IV.266 sq. Uṭṭhita {Utthita} [pp. of uṭṭhahati] - 1. risen, got up Pv II.941 (kāl°); Vism 73. - 2. arisen, produced J I.36; Miln 155. - 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J II.61; Dh 168; Miln 213. -an° S II.264; Ps I.172. - Cp. pariy°. - Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D II.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA 128. Uḍḍayhana {Uddayhana} (nt.) [fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (°velā = jhāyana-kālo Pug A 187); KhA 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v. l. preferable uḍḍayh°). Uḍḍahati {Uddahati} [ud + ḍahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v. l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S III.149, 150 (v. l. for ḍayhati); J III.22 (udayhate); V.194. fut. uḍḍayhissati J I.48. Uḍḍita {Uddita} [pp. of uḍḍeti2] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S I.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. "the world is all strung up"). Uḍḍeti1 {Uddeti} [ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti1 & uḍḍeti2 both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti2 two forms exist, uḍḍ° & oḍḍ°, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning ("lay snares"), it may be a cpd. with ava° instead of ud°. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l > ḍ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M I.364 (kāko maṃsapesiṃ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv. ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J V.256, 368, 417. Uḍḍeti2 {Uddeti} [see discussion under uḍḍeti1] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin II.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. uḍḍhetvā). - (b) to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chaḍḍayāmi gloss). - pp. uḍḍita. Uḍḍha {Uddha} (-°) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha] the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha "half of the fourth unit", i. e. three & a half (cp. diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha-teyya 2 1/2) J V.417 sq. (°āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs XII.53. Pāli Text Society 315 Pāli-English Dictionary Uṇṇa (nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) {Unna} [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_)los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wilmod] - 1. wool A III.37 = IV.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J II.147; SnA 263 (patt°). - 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamukɔantare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D II.18 = III.144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism 552 in jātiuṇṇāya. -ja in uṇṇaja mukha J VI.218, meaning "rounded, swelling" (C. expls. by kañcanɔādāso viya paripuṇṇaṃ mukhaṃ). -nābhi (either uṇṇa° or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *Ûebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. "wool- i. e. thread-weaver", only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin II.110 = A II.73 = J II.147 (= makkaṭaka C). Uṇṇata {Unnata} (adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A II.86; Sn 702 (an° care = uddhaccaṃ n ɔāpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug A 229). Cp. unnata. Uṇṇati {Unnati} (f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn 830; Nd1 158, 170; Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnati. Uṇṇama {Unnama} [fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnama. Uṇṇamati {Unnamati} [ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn 366, 829, 928; Nd1 169; J VI.346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn 206. Cp. unnamati. Uṇṇī {Unni} (f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin II.108. Uṇha {Unha} (adj.-n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu)/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill oneself DhA I.95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. "heat" & always in contrast to sītaṃ "cold" Vin II.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D II.15 (opp. sīta); M I.85; A I.145 = 170 = J V.417 (sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā tiṇaṃ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn 52, 966 (acc °); Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita); J I.17 (V.93); Miln 410 (megho uṇhaṃ nibbāpeti); PvA 37 (ati°). -ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇḍukambala-silɔāsanaṃ uṇhākāraṃ dassesi, of Sakka's throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J I.330; V.92; DhA I.17, and passim. -odaka hot water VvA 68. -kalla glowing-hot embers or ashes J II.94 (so read for °kalala); IV.389 (°vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. °kukkuḷavassa). -kāla hot weather Vin II.209. Uṇhatta {Unhatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism 171. Uṇhīsa {Unhisa} [Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D I.7; II.19 = III.145 (°sīsa cp. Dial. II.16); J II.88; Miln 330; DA I.89; DhsA 198. Uttaṇḍa & Utaṇḍa {Uttanda} {Utanda} see uddaṇḍa. Utu {Utu} (m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] - 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa-utu occasion or time of the sun(-rise) DhA I.165; utuṃ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in Pāli Text Society 316 Pāli-English Dictionary horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J III.527; DA I.252. - (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons men- tioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A IV.138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J V.330 & VI.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S V.51. - (c) the menses SnA 317; J V.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc., as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). - 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. XVII; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614; J VI.105 (kamma-paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā). -āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148. -ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 (= gimhe ātapa-ṭṭhāna-sevanā vasse rukkhamūla-sevanā hemante jalappavesa-sevanā SnA 291). -kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin I.299; II.173. -ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268 (kamma°, hetu°, utu°); Vism 451. -nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin I.95. -pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S IV.230; A II.87; III.131; V.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A III.388. -pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J VI.524. -vāra time of the season, °vārena °vārena according to the turn of the season J I.58. -vikāra change of season Vism 262. -veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317). -saṃvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. °ā the seasons D III.85 = A II.75; S V.442. The phrase utusaṃvaccharāni at Pv II.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta-gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta-saṃvaccharɔadi bahūni saṃvaccharāni ca PvA 135. Similarly at J V.330 (with Cy). sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable DhA 327. -samaya time of the menses SnA 317. Utuka {Utuka} (-°) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D II.179; Pv IV. 122 (= pupphupaga-rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA 275); Sdhp 248. Utunī {Utuni} (f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin III.18; IV.303; S IV.239; A III. 221, 229; Miln 127. an° A III.221, 226. Utta {Utta} [pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur° speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A II.117, 143; III.163; Kh VIII.2; KhA 218. Uttaṇḍāla {Uttandala} (adj.) [ud + taṇḍula] "grainy", i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J I.340; III.383 (id.); IV.44 (id.). Uttatta {Uttatta} [ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J VI. 574 (hemaṃ uttattaṃ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv III.32 (°rūpa, so read for uggata°, reading correct at PvA 188 °singī); PvA 10 (°kanaka, T. uggatta°); Mhbv 25 (id.). Uttanta {Uttanta} [= utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin III.84. See uttasta & utrasta. Pāli Text Society 317 Pāli-English Dictionary Uttama {Uttama} (adj.) [superl. of ud°, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud°] "ut- most", highest, greatest, best Sn 1054 (dhammaṃ uttamaṃ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn 1064; cp. Nd2 317); Dh 56; Nd1 211; Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara); KhA 124; DhA I.430: PvA 1, 50. - dum-uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar° the best of men Sn 1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur° the most magnificent town Sn 1012; puris° the noblest man Th 1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaṃ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J I.96. -anga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin II.256 = M I.32 = A IV.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiṃ); J II.163; also in cpd. °bhūta the hair of the head Th 2, 253 (= kesa-kalāpa ThA 209, 210) & °ruha id. J I.138 = VI.96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J IV.403; (c) the penis J V.197. -attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn 324; Dh 386, 403; DhA IV.142; ThA 160. -adhama most contemptible J V.394, 437. -guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J I.96. -purisa It 97 & -porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (see DhA II.188). -bhāva the highest condition, state or place DhA II.188 (°ṃ patto = puris'- uttamo). Uttamatā {Uttamata} (f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA I.169 (for paramatā). Uttara1 {Uttara} (adj.) compar. of ud°, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] - 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J II.420 (musal° with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below. - 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D I.153; M I.123; S I.224; PvA 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraṃmukha) turning north, facing north Sn 1010. - 3. subsequent, following, second (°-) J I.63 (°āsāḷha-nakkhatta). - 4. over, beyond (-°): aṭṭhɔutara-sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA I.388. - sa-uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D I.80 (citta), II.299; M I.59; S V.265; Vbh 324 (paððā); Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50. - anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D I.40; S I.124; II.278; III.84; Sn 179. See also under anuttara. -attharaṇa upper cover J VI.253. -ābhimukha facing North D II.15. -āsanga an upper robe Vin I.289; II. 126; S I.81; IV.290; A I.67, 145; II.146; DhA I.218; PvA 73; VvA 33 = 51. -itara something higher, superior D I.45, 156, 174; S I.81; J I.364; DhA II.60; IV.4. -oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar°) J II.420; III.26; IV. 184. -chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa° a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D I.7; A I.181; III.50. -chadana = °chada D II.187; DhA I.87. -dvāra the northern gate J VI.364. -dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok°), higher righteousness D II.188 (paṭividdha-lokɔ uttara-dhammatāya uttamabhāvaṃ patta). -pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin II.120 = 148. -pubba north-eastern J VI.518. -sse (v. l. °suve) on the day after tomorrow A I.240. Uttara2 {Uttara} (adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur° difficult to cross or to get out of S I.197 (not duruttamo); Miln 158; and in cpd. °setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln 194 (cp. uttara-setu). Uttaraṇa {Uttarana} (nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J I.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 Q (°setu). - Cp. uttara. Uttarati {Uttarati} [ud + tarati1] - 1. to come out of (water) Vin II.221 (opp. otarati); J I.108 (id.). - 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln 117, 118, 132, 260, 277. - 3. to cross over, to go beyond M I.135; aor. udatāri Sn 471 (oghaṃ). - 4. to go over, to overspread J V.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). - pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). - Caus. uttareti (q. v.). Uttari (-) & Uttariṃ {Uttari} {Uttarim}(adv.) [compn. form of uttara, cp. angi-bhūta uttānikaroti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. - (1) uttariṃ: D I.71; M Pāli Text Society 318 Pāli-English Dictionary I.83; III.148; S IV.15; Sn 796 (uttariṃ kurute = uttariṃ karoti Nd2 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J II.23; III.324; Miln 10 (ito uttariṃ anything beyond this, any more) DhA IV.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA 152. uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314, referring to Ps II.131, which is quoted at Miln 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. - (2) uttari° in foll. cpds. -karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S II. 99; III.168; A V.157 = 164; It 118. -bhanga an extra portion, tit-bit, dainties, additional or after-meal bits Vin II.214; III.160; IV.259; J II.419; DhA I.214 sa-uttaribhanga together with dainty bits J I.186, cp. 196 (yāgu). -bhangika serving as dainties J I.196. -manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. °dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin I.209; II.112; III.105; IV.24; D I.211; III.3, 12, 18; M I.68; II.200; S IV.290, 300, 337; A III.430; V.88; DhA III.480. -sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J II.246; DhA IV.200; PvA 48, 49 (= uttarīyaṃ). Uttarika {Uttarika} (adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, superhuman Nett 50. Uttariya {Uttariya} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya] - 1. state of being higher. Cp. III.35; neg. an° state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. - 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA I.44 (karaṇ°-karaṇa). Uttarīya {Uttariya} (nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak PvI.103 (= uparivasanaṃ uparihāraṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ PvA 49); Dāvs III.30; ThA 253. Uttasati1 {Uttasati} [identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttāseti to impale, q. v. Uttasati2 {Uttasati} [ut + tasati2] - 1. to frighten J I.47 (v.267). - to be alarmed or terrified Vin I.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); III.145 (id.); J II.384; VI.79; ppr. uttasaṃ Th 1, 863; & uttasanto Pv II.23. See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). - pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta. Uttasana {Uttasana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J I.414 (v. l. for uttasta). Uttasta {Uttasta} [pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint-hearted J I.414 (°bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana°). Uttāna {Uttana} (adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] - 1. streched out (flat), lying on one's back, supine Vin I.271 (maðcake uttānaṃ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); II.215; J I.205; Pv IV.108 (opp. avakujja); PvA 178 (id.), 265. - 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S II.106] D I.116; S II.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J II.168 (= pākaṭa); V.460; PvA 66, 89, 140, 168. - anuttāna unclear, not explained J VI.247. - The cpd. form (°-) of uttāna in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī° (q. v.). - 3. superficial, "flat", shallow A I.70 (parisa); Pug 46. -mukha "clear mouthed", speaking plainly, easily understood D I.116 (see DA I.287); DhA IV.8. -seyyaka "lying on one's back", i. e. an infant M I.432; A III.6; Th 1, 935; Miln 40; Vism 97 (°dāraka). Uttānaka {Uttanaka} (adj.) [fr. uttāna] - 1. (= uttāna1) lying on one's back J VI.38 (°ṃ pātetvā); DhA I.184. - 2. (= uttāna2) clear, open D II.55; M I.340 = DhA I.173. Pāli Text Society 319 Pāli-English Dictionary Uttānī {Uttani} (°-) [the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī-karoti M Vastu III.408; uttānī-kṛta Av. Ś I.287; II.151] open, manifest etc., in °kamma (uttāni°) declaration, exposition, manifestation S V.443; Pug 19; Vbh 259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. - °karaṇa id. SnA 445. - °karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin I.103; S II.25, 154; III.132, 139; IV.166; V.261; A I.286; III.361 sq. Uttāpeti {Uttapeti} [Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J VI.161. Uttāra {Uttara} [fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, °setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S IV.174 = M I.134; cp. uttara2. Uttārita {Uttarita} [pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J I.194. Uttāritatta {Uttaritatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J I.195. Uttāreti {Uttareti} [Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J I.194; SnA 349. - pp. uttārita (q. v.). Uttāsa {Uttasa} [Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D III.148; S V.386; Miln 170; PvA 180. Uttāsana {Uttasana} (nt.) [fr. uttāseti2] impalement J II.444; SnA 61 (sūle). Uttāsavant {Uttasavant} (adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S III.16 sq. Uttāsita {Uttasita} [pp. of uttāseti2] impaled Pv IV.16 (= āvuta āropita VvA 220); J I.499; IV.29. Uttāseti1 {Uttaseti} [Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taṃs is uttāseti2 is a variant] to frighten, terrify J I.230, 385; II.117. Uttāseti2 {Uttaseti} [cp. Sk. uttaṃsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taṃs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A I.48; J I.230, 326; II.443; III.34; IV.29. - pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana. Uttiṭṭha {Uttittha} [= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati "alms which one stands up for, or expects"] left over, thrown out Vin I.44 (°patta); Th 1, 1057 (°piṇḍa); 2, 349 (°piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka-piṇḍa ThA 242); J IV.380 (°piṇḍa; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (°piṇḍa = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Miln 213, 214. Uttiṭṭhe {Uttitthe} see uṭṭhahati. Uttiṇa {Uttina} (adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaṃ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off-straw; to deprive of the roof M II.53. Cp. next. Uttiṇṇa {Uttinna} [pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J II.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa? Pāli Text Society 320 Pāli-English Dictionary Utrasta {Utrasta} [pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin II.184; S I.53, 54 (an°); Sn 986; Miln 23; DhA II.6 (°mānasa); PvA 243 (°citta), 250 (°sabhāva). Utrāsa {Utrasa} [= uttāsa] terror J II.8 (citt°). Utrāsin {Utrasin} (adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious S I.99, 219. - Usually neg. an° in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S I.99; Th 1, 864; Nd2 13; J IV.296; V.4; Miln 339. See also apalāyin. Ud{Ud} -[Vedic ud-; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud-; cp. Lat. ūsque "from-unto" & Gr. u(/steros = Sk. uttara] prefix in verbal & nominal combn. One half of all the words beginning with u° are combns. with ud°, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli. - I. Original meaning "out in an upward direction", out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one's neck out high (cp. Ger. "empor"); uggilati to "swallow up", i. e. spit out. - The opposites of ud- are represented by either ava or o° (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc-āvaca; uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi-aya or vaya). - II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from -: °aṇha ("day-out"); °agga ("top-out"); °āgacchati; °ikkhati look out for, expect; °kantati tear out; °khitta thrown off; °khipati pick out; °gacchati come out; °gamaṇa rising (opp. o°); °gajjati shout out; °gilati (opp. o°); °ghoseti shout out; °cināti pick out; °chiṭṭha thrown out; °jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus-lachen °tatta smelted out; °tāna stretched out; °dāleti tear out; °dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; °disati point out to; °drīyati pull out; °pajjati to be produced; °patti & °pāda coming out, origin, birth; °paṭipatiyā out of reach; °paḷāseti sound out; °phāsulika "ribs out"; etc. etc. - (2) up (high) or high up, upwards, on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher) -: °kujja erect (opp. ava°); °kūla sloping up (opp. vi°); °khipati throw-up, °gaṇhāti take up; °chindati cut up; °javati go up-stream, °javana id. (opp. o°); uðða pride; °thāna "standing up" °ṭhita got up; °tarati come out, go up (opp. o°); °nata raised up, high (opp. o°); °nama e-levation; °nāmin raised (opp. ni°); °patati fly up; etc. etc. - III. More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud° = without, "ex-", e. g. unnangala "outplough" = without a plough; uppabbajita an exbhikkhu. - (2) ud° = off, i. e. out of the way, wrong, e. g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id. (3) ud° = out of the ordinary, i. e. exceedingly, e. g. ujjangala extremely dusty; uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard. - IV. Dialectical variations & combinations. - (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between ud° and ava° (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between ū & u or o & u. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk°; uððā: avaðða; uddiyati: odd°; uḍḍeyya oḍḍ°; uppīḷeti: opīḷ°; etc., & cp. abbhokirati > abbhukkirati. - (2) the most freq. combns. that ud° enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi° and sam°; see e. g. abhi + ud (= abbhud°) + gacchati, °jalati; °ṭhāti; °namati etc.; sam + ud + eti; °kamati; °chindati; °tejeti; °pajjati etc. Uda1 {Uda} (indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. au(_ti (again), au)ta/r (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava° yonder, cp. ava II.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J V.478 (v. l. udāhu); Nd1 445 (expld. as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv II.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Pāli Text Society 321 Pāli-English Dictionary Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (caraṃ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno uda vā sayaṃ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); KhA 191. - See also udāhu. Uda2 {Uda} (°-) [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only °-), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan° is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda° (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapāna, udabindu). Udaka {Udaka} (nt.) [Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *Ûed, *ud, fuller form *eÛed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood, odana gruel, q. v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter ("water-animal"); Gr. u(/dwr water ("hydro"), u(/dra hydra ("water= Ohg. wazzar = E. water; Obulg. voda water, vydra otter] water Vin II.120, 213; D II.15 (°assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dh 80, 145; J I.212; Pv I.57; Pug 31, 32; Miln 318; VvA 20 (udake temanaṃ aggimhe tāpanaṃ); DhA I.289; DhA III. 176, 256; PvA 39, 70. - Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. - The compn. form (-°) is either ûdaka (āsanûdaka-dāyin J IV.435) or °odaka (pādodaka water for the feet PvA 78). odaka occurs also in abs. form (q. v.), cp. also oka. Bdgh.'s kaṃ = udakaṃ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DA I.209. aṇṇava water-flood M I.134. -āyatika a water-pipe Vin II.123. -āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. S V.400; A II.55 = III.337; VvA 155. -ûpama resembling water, like water A IV.11 (puggala). -ogāhana plunging into water J III.235. -ogha a water flood VvA 48. orohaka descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit. "bather" M I.281; S IV.312; A V. 263. -orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing D I.167; S I.182; A I.296; II.206; J IV.299; Pug 55. -kalaha the "water dispute" DhA III.256. -kāka a water crow J II.441. kicca libation of water, lit. water-performance; cleansing, washing D II.15. -kīḷā sporting in the w. J VI.420. -gahaṇasāṭaka bathing-gown J V.477. -ghaṭa a water pitcher PvA 66. -cāṭi a water jar DhA I.52. -ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin II.120. -tumba a water vessel J II.441; DA I.202; DhA II.193. -telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin II.107. -dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth-cleaner Vin III.51; IV.90, 92, 233; J IV.69. -daha a lake (of water) D I.45. -doṇikā a water-tub or trough Vin II.220. -dhārā a shower of water Ps I.125; J IV.351. niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin II.120, 123; DhA II.37. -nibbāhana an aquaduct Miln 295. -paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin II.213. -patta a waterbowl Vin II. 107; D I.80; S III.105. -puðchanī a towel Vin II.122. -posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173. -phusita a drop of water S II.135. -bindu a drop of w. It 84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. -bubbula a w. bubble A IV.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). -bhasta devoid of water ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). -maṇika a water-pot Vin I.227; M I.354; A III.27; Miln 28; DhA I.79. -mallaka a cup for w. A I.250. -rakkhasa a water-sprite DhA III.74. -rahada a lake (of w.) D I.74, 84; A I.9; II.105; III.25; Sn 467; Pug 47. -rūha a water plant Vv 35Q. -lekhā writing on w. A I.283 = Pug 32 (in simile °ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug A 215). -vāra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA I.49. vāraka bucket S II.118. -vāha a flow of water, flowing w. J VI.162. -vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water), overflowing, flood A I.178. -vāhana pulling up water Vin II.122 (°rajju). -sadda sound of water Dhs 621. -sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin II.120. -sāṭaka = sāṭikā J II.13. -sāṭikā "water-cloak", a bathing-mantle Vin I. 292; II.272; IV.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); DhA II.61 (T. °sāṭaka). -suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin IV.262 (= mutta-karaṇassa dhovanā C.). Udakaccha {Udakaccha} [uda + kaccha] watery soil, swamp J V.137. Udakumbha {Udakumbha} [uda + kumbha] a water jug J I.20; Dh 121, 122; Pv I.129. Pāli Text Society 322 Pāli-English Dictionary Udagga {Udagga} (adj.) [ud + agga, lit. "out-top", cp. Sk. udagra] topmost, high, lofty Th 1, 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant, joyful, happy D I.110 (°citta); Sn 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv IV.155 (attamana +); IV.58 (haṭṭha +); Miln 248; DhA II.42 (haṭṭha-pahaṭṭha udagg-udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya. Udaggatā {Udaggata} (f.) [abstr. fr. udagga] exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298. Udaggi {Udaggi} ° in udaggihuttaṃ [= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra] the fire prepared (for sacrifice) J V.396 (= uda-aggihuttaṃ C. wrongly), lit. "the sacrifice (being) out" Udangaṇa {Udangana} (nt.) [ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana "a place for digging for water" see Toev. p. 96] an open place J I.109. Udacchidā {Udacchida} 3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Sn 2, 3 (°ā metri causa). Udañcana {Udancana} (nt.) [fr. ud + añc, see añchati] a bucket for drawing water out of a well DhA I.94. Udañcanin {Udancanin} (adj.-n.) [ud + aðcanin to aðc see aðchati] draining, pulling up water f. °ī a bucket or pail J I. 417 (f. °ī). Udañjala {Udanjala} [udan + jala see uda2] in °ṃ kīḷati a water-game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin III.118 (Bdhgh.: udañjalan ti udaka-cikkhallo vuccati p. 274) Udaññavant {Udannavant} (adj.) [udan = uda(ka) + vant] rich in water, well-watered J V.405 (= udaka-sampanna C.). Udaṇha {Udanha} [ud + aṇha] day-break, dawn, sunrise J V.155. Udatāri {Udatari} 3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Sn 471 (oghaṃ). Udatta {Udatta} (adj.) [Sk. udātta] elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 (= uḷārapaðða C.). Udadhi {Udadhi} [uda + dhi, lit. water-container] the sea, ocean S I.67; It 86; Sn 720; J V.326; VI.526; ThA 289; VvA 155 ("udakaṃ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi"); Sdhp 322, 577. Udapatta1 {Udapatta} [ụda for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak-prāpta, risen, flying up, sprung up J III.484 (= uppatita C.); V.71 (= uṭṭhita C.). Udapatta2 {Udapatta} [uda + patta; Sk. udapātra] a bowl of water, a water-jug, ewer M I.100; S V.121; A III.230 sq., 236; V.92, 94, 97 sq. Udapādi {Udapadi} 3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, become D I.110, 180, 185; S II.273; It 52, 99; SnA 346, 462. Pāli Text Society 323 Pāli-English Dictionary Udapāna {Udapana} [uda + pāna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna] a well, a cistern Vin I.139; II.122; M I.80; A IV.171; J III.216; Ud 78; Pv II.78; II.925; Miln 411; Vism 244 (in simile); DA I.298; VvA 40; PvA 78. Udappatta {Udappatta} see udapatta. Udabindu {Udabindu} [uda + bindu] a drop of water M I.78; Sn 812; Dh 121, 122, 336; It 84 (v. l. udaka°); Nd1 135; SnA 114; DhA II.51. Udabbhadhi {Udabbhadhi} aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati [ud + vadh] to destroy, kill Sn 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati SnA 18). Udabbahe {Udabbahe} 3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati [ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati] to draw out, tear out, remove Th 1, 158; Sn 583 (= ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) SnA 460); J II.223 (= udabbaheyya C.); VI.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin IV.5. Udaya {Udaya} [fr. ud + i, cp. udeti] rise, growth; increment, increase; income, revenue, interest A II.199; Ps I.34; Vv 847 (dhanɔ atthika uddayaṃ patthayāna = ānisaṃsaṃ atirekalābhaṃ VvA 336); 8452; DhA II.270; PvA 146 (ulār° vipāka), 273 (°bhūtāni paðca kahāpaṇa-satāni labhitvā, with interest); Sdhp 40, 230, 258. - See also uddaya. -attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha2) M I.356; S V.197 sq., 395; A III.152 sq.; IV.111, 289, 352; V.15, 25. -atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp. above Vv 847 dhanɔatthika) A II.199. -bbaya (ud-aya + vy-aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death, up & down D III.223; S I.46 = 52 (lokassa); III.130; A II.90; III. 32; IV.153; It 120; Vism 287; Ps I.54; ThA 90. -vyaya = °bbaya S IV.140; A II.15 (khandhānaṃ); Dh 113, 374 (khandhānaṃ, see DhA IV.110). Udayaṃ & Udayanto {Udayam} {Udayanto} ppr. of udeti (q. v.). Udayana {Udayana} (nt.) [fr. ud + i] going up, rise DA I.95. Udara {Udara} (nt.) [Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. u(/steros = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica] - 1 the belly, stomach D II.266; Sn 78, 604, 609, 716; J I.146, 164, 265; Miln 213; PvA 283; KhA 57, 58; DhA I.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102. - 2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs I.56 (mandir-odare). -ūnûdara with empty belly Th 1, 982; Miln 406, 407; cp. ūna. -aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i. e. of digestion) KhA 59; SnA 462; PvA 33; -āvadehakaṃ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous M I.102; A V.18; Th 1, 935; Vism 33. -paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr°abbhantara 261); SnA 248; KhA 55, 61. -pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. -vaṭṭi "belly-sack", belly Vin III.39, 117; Vism 262 where KhA reads ud. paṭala). -vāta the wind of the belly, stomach-ache 9J I.33, 433; Vism 41 (°ābādha); DhA IV.129. Udariya {Udariya} (nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh III. (cp. KhA 57); Vism 258, 358. Cp sodariya. Udassaye {Udassaye} 2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati [ā + śri, cp. assaya] J V.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?) Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?). Pāli Text Society 324 Pāli-English Dictionary Udahāraka {Udaharaka} [uda + hāraka] a water-carrier J II.80. Udahāriya {Udahariya} (adj.) [fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ] going for water Vv 509. Udāgacchati {Udagacchati} [ud + ā + gacchati] to come to completion Da I.288. Cp sam. Udāna {Udana} (nt.) [fr. ud + an to breathe] - 1. "breathing out", exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) D I.50, 92; S I.20, 27, 82, 160; A I.67; J I.76; Pug 43, 62; Nett 174; PvA 67; Sdhp 514. - The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi" i. e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaṃ udānayati Divy 99 etc.], e. g. at Vin I.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; D I.47; II.107 (udāna of triumph); S III.55; Mhvs XIX.29; DA I.140; Ud. 1 passim; SnA 354 ("the familiar quotation about the sakyas"). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g. udānaṃ pavatti J I.61; abhāsi Vin IV.54; kathesi J VI. 38. - 2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & anga. - Cp. vodāna. Udānita {Udanita} [pp. of udāneti] uttered, breathed forth, said DhA IV.55. Udāneti {Udaneti} [denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati] to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaṃ udānesi: see under udāna1. Absolutely only at J III.218. Udāpatvā {Udapatva} at J V.255 is uncertain reading (v. l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up), perhaps we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud + pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.). Udāyati {Udayati} at DA I.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; D I.96 has here udrīyissati (q. v.), which belongs to darati to break, tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DA I.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v. l. undriyati cp. °undriya for °uddaya (dukkh° for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti). Udāra {Udara} (adj.) [Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q. v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.] raised, sublime, noble, excellent Dāvs III.4 (samussit-odāra-sitātapattaṃ); DA I.50 (°issariya); Sdhp 429, 591. Udāvatta {Udavatta} [pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati] retired, desisting J V.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C). Udāsīna {Udasina} (adj.) [ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129. Udāhaṭa {Udahata} [pp of udāharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41. Udāharaṇa {Udaharana} (nt.) [fr. udāharati] example, instance J III.401 (°ṃ āharitvā dassento), 510; Miln 345; SnA 445; VvA 297. Pāli Text Society 325 Pāli-English Dictionary Udāharati {Udaharati} [ud + ā + hṛ] to utter, recite. speak. Sn 389; J III.289; DA I.140 (see udāhāra). pp udāhaṭa (q. v.). Cp. pariy°. Udāhāra {Udahara} [fr. udāharati] utterance, speech DA I.140 (°ṃ udāhari = udānaṃ udānesi); Pug A 223, Udāhu {Udahu} (indecl.) [uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro] disjunctive-adversative particle "or", in direct questions D I 157; II.8; Sn 599, 875, 885; J I.20, 83; VvA 258 (= ādu); PvA 33, 51; Miln 10. - The first part of the question is often introduced with kiṃ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e. g. kin nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi VvA 63; kiṃ amhehi saddhiṃ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? DhA II.96: See under kiṃ. - Often combd with other expletive particles, e. g. udāhu ve Sn 1075, 1077; udāhu no Sn 347; eva . . . no udāhu (so . . . or not) D I.152; (ayaṃ) nu kho - udāhu (ayaṃ) is it (this) - (this) Vism 313. Udi {Udi} (or udī) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho). Udikkhati {Udikkhati} [ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate] - 1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin I.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.); J V.71, 296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaṃ = ullokesiṃ VvA 316); Dāvs II 109; Sdhp 308. - 2. to look out for, to expect J I.344; VvA 118. - 3. to envy Miln 338. Udikkhitar {Udikkhitar} [n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D III 167. Udicca {Udicca} (adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udaðc, f. udīcī northern, the north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north-westerly, of north-western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Miln trsln. II.45 n. 1) J I.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln 236. - See also uddiya. Udiccare {Udiccare} 3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q. v.). Udita1 {Udita} [pp. of ud-i, see udeti] risen, high, elevated Miln 222; (°odita); Dāvs IV.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun) 442 (°odita). Udita2 {Udita} [pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka-pātha ed. 1869, p. 22). Udīraṇa {Udirana} (nt.) [fr. udīreti] utterance, saying J V.237; Dhs 637, 720; Miln 145. Udīrita {Udirita} [pp. of udīreti] uttered J III.339; V.394 = 407. Udīreti {Udireti} [ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita] - 1. to set in motion, stir up, cause J III.441 (dukkhaṃ udīraye Pot. = udīreyya C.); V.395 (kalahaṃ to begin a quarrel). - 2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say S I.190; Sn 632 (pot. °raye = bhāseyya SnA 468); Dh 408 (giraṃ udīraye = bhāseyya DhA IV.182); J V.78 (vākyaṃ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Th 1, 1232 (nigghoso). Pāli Text Society 326 Pāli-English Dictionary Udu {Udu} (adj.) [= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in °mano straight-minded D III.167, 168 (= uju° in v. l. and expln. by C.). Udukkhala {Udukkhala} (m. & nt.) [Sk. ulukhala] a mortar Vin I.202 (+ musala pestle); J I.502; II.428; V.49; II.161, 335; Ud 69 (m; + musaḷa); DhA II.131 (°sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DA I.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud., the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. Udukkhalikā {Udukkhalika} (f.) [fr. udukkhala] part of a door (threshold?) Vin II.148 (+ uttarapasaka lintel of a door). Udumbara {Udumbara} [Sk. udumbara] the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata D II.4; Vin IV.35; A IV.283 (°khādika), 283 (id.), 324 (id.); Sn 5; DhA I.284; SnA 19; KhA 46, 56; VvA 213. Cp. odumbara. Udeti {Udeti} (ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); J II.33; III.324; ppr. udayaṃ It 85 (ādicco), & udayanto PvA 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). - pp. udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi. Udda1 {Udda} [Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. u(/dros "hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver - Vin I.186 (°camma otter-skin, used for sandals); Cp. I.102 (°pota); J III.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at J III.333 are Gambhīra-cārin and Anutīra-cārin. Udda2 {Udda} [for uda2?] water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i. e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid D II.14; M III.122. Uddaṇḍa {Uddanda} [ud + daṇḍa] a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda) = Vism 25 (v. l. BB uṭṭanda). Uddaya1 {Uddaya} [a (metric?) variant of udaya] gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); J v.39 (satt°-mahāpaduma of profit to beings?). Uddaya2 {Uddaya} in compounds dukkh° and sukh°. see udraya. Uddalomī {Uddalomi} [= udda + lomin beaver-hair-y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end D I.7 (= ubhato dasaṃ uṇṇā-mayɔ attharaṇaṃ; keci ubhato uggata-pupphaṃ ti vadanti DA I.87); A I.181. See however uddha-lomin under uddhaṃ. Uddasseti {Uddasseti} [ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1] to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct D II.321 sq.; M I.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?); II.60 (v. l. uddiset°) A IV.66. Pāli Text Society 327 Pāli-English Dictionary Uddāna {Uddana} (nt.) [fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma] a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka, with ref. to each Khandhaka, in the Saṃyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Miln 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. DhsA 27). The Uddāna gives, in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group, the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered "summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the whole work. - Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes "macchuddāna" (so J II.425; DhA II.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case. Uddāpa {Uddapa} [*udvāpa] foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh° etc. D III.101; S V.194 = also at J VI.276 (= pākāra-vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud-vapati to dig out, and translates "moat, ditch". The meaning "wall" or "mound" however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. "digging", cp. E. dike > Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2. Uddāpavant {Uddapavant} (adj.) [fr. uddāpa] having a wall or embankment S II.106 (v. l. uddhā°); C. expls. as apato uggatattā J IV.536 (so read with v. l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C. expls. as tīramariyādā-bandhana). Uddāma {Uddama} [fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma] 1. (adj.) "out of bounds", unrestrained, restless Dāvs V.56 (°sāgara). - 2. (n.) wall, enclosure (either as "binding in", protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam "to throw up" in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla-uddāma-parikhādīni watchtowers, enceintes, moats etc. DhA III.488. Uddāraka {Uddaraka} [?] some wild animal J V.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto). Uddāla {Uddala} = uddālaka, only as Np. J IV.298 sq. Uddālaka [fr. ud + dal, see dalati] the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa, lit. "uprooter" Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati VvA 43); J IV.301 (°rukkha), 440; V.199 (= vātaghātaka C.), 405; VI.530 (so read for uddh°); VvA 197 (°puppha = indīvara); PvA 169. {Uddalaka} Uddālanaka {Uddalanaka} (adj.) [fr. uddālana > ud + dāleti] referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin IV.169. Uddāleti {Uddaleti} [ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off Vin IV.170; S IV.178. Uddiṭṭha {Uddittha} [pp. of uddisati] - 1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified M I.480 (pañha); Sn p. 91 (id. = uddesa-mattenɔ eva vutta, na vibhangena SnA 422); SnA 372. - 2. appointed, dedicated J V.393 (an °ṃ pupphaṃ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); PvA 50; KhA 138. Uddiya {Uddiya} (adj.) [Sk. udīcya?] northern, northwestern (i. e. Nepalese) J IV.352 (°kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk. udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet. Pāli Text Society 328 Pāli-English Dictionary Uddisati {Uddisati} [ud + disati] - to propose, point out, appoint, allot Dh 353, cp. DhA IV.72; Miln 94 (satihāraṃ); fut. uddisissati M I.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q. v.). - 2. to specify PvA 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27. - Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv III.212, and uddissiyati PvA 46. - pp. uddiṭṭha (q. v.). - Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q. v.). - ger. uddissa (q. v.) Uddisāpeti {Uddisapeti} [Caus. II. of uddisati] - 1. to make recite Vin I.47 = II.224; IV.290. - 2. to dedicate PvA 35 (v. l. ādisati). Uddissa {Uddissa} (indecl.) [orig. ger. of uddisati] - 1. indicating, with signs or indications J III.354 = Miln 230. - 2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards, to PvA 250 Suraṭṭha-visayaṃ). - (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning PvA 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaṃ), 70 (maṃ), 146. -kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin I.237 (maṃsa); II.163; D I.166 = A I. 295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā); M I.77; KhA 222; J II. 262, 263 (bhatta). Uddissana {Uddissana} (nt.) [fr. uddissa] dedication PvA 27, 80. Uddīpanā (f.) [fr. ud + dīpeti] explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). ete. see udrī°. {Uddipana} Uddeka {Uddeka} [Sk. udreka, ud + ric] vomit, spouting out, eruption Vism 261 (where id. p. at KhA 61 reads uggāra); °ṃ dadāti to vomit Vin I.277. Uddekanika {Uddekanika} (adj.) [uddeka + ana + ika] spouting, ejecting M II.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v. l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water). Uddesa {Uddesa} [fr. uddisati] - 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M III.223 (u. uddiṭṭha), 239; S IV.299; SnA 422. - 2. explanation S V.110 sq.; sauddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln., point by point, in detail, D I.13, 81; III.111; A III.418; It 99; Nd2 6171. - 3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) D I.151; M III.128; A IV.343; uddesa-bhatta special or specified food Vin I.58 = 96, cp. II.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin I.50 = II.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation, questioning & advice); II.219 (°ṃ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaṃ d); A IV.114 (+ paripucchā); V.50 sq. (paðho, u. veyyākaraṇaṃ); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā); J I.116; Miln 257 (+paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin III.47; A III.67, 180; Miln 10, 18. Uddesaka {Uddesaka} (adj.) [fr. uddesa] assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt° one who sorts out the food VvA 92. Uddesika {Uddesika} (adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] - 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D II. 100 (mam °bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. - Esp. as -° in phrase aṭṭha-vass' uddesika-kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67; soḷasa-vass° M I.88; J I.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). 2. memorial J IV.228 (cetiya). Pāli Text Society 329 Pāli-English Dictionary Uddehaka {Uddehaka} (adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv. °ṃ in cpd. pheṇ° (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) M III.167; A I.141; J III.46; Miln 357. Uddosita {Uddosita} [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin I.140; II.278; III.200; IV.223. Uddha (adj.) [possibly a combn. of aḍḍha2 & uddhaṃ; or should we read aḍḍh° or vuḍḍh°?] in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in rich, lofty clothes J IV.154 (of a devatā; passage may be corrupt). {Uddha} Uddhaṃ & Uddha°{Uddham} {Uddha°} (indecl.) [nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared(h) as in Lat. arduus steep, or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. o)rqo/s straight] high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.). - On uddhaṃ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd2 155. - I. (adv.). - A. (of space) up, aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin III.121; KhA 248 (= upari). - In contrast with adho (above > below) D I.23, 153, 251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaṃ expld.); DA I.98 (see also adho). - Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as "in zenith" (opp. adho "in nadir"), e. g. at D I.222 ("straight up"); It 120; J I.20. - B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Sn 894; Nd1 303 (u. vuccati anāgataṃ). - II. (prep. with abl. & instr.). - A. (of space) in phrase uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) D II. 293, 294; III.104; A III.323; V.109. - B. (of time) after, hence Pv I.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months = catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari PvA 52); PvA 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v. l. BB.). - In cpds. uddha° & uddhaṃ° (see below). The reading udhogalaṃ at PvA 104 is to corrected to adho°. - III. Note (cp. Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggato J V.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti "standing erect" D I.167; M I.78; ubbhamukhu "mouth (face) upwards", turned upwards S III.238; Miln 122. (1) uddha° in: -gāmin going upwards S V.370 sq. cchiddaka (-vātapānā) (windows) having openings above DhA I.211. -pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) A IV.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v. l.); J I. 233. -mukha turned upwards, adv. °ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Miln 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha° Miln 122). -lomin "having hair on the upper side", a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch) Vin I.192 = II.163, 169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q. v.). -virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho-virecana of a purgative) D I.12 (= uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ DA I.98); DhA III.126; SnA 86. -suddha clean on top Vin II.152. - (2) uddhaṃ° in: -āghātanika an after-deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death D I.31, cp. DA I.119. pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 5225 (v. l. uddha°). -bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram°): see saṃyojana. -virecana v. l. BB. at SnA 86 for uddha°. -sara(ṃ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. "sounding high" Sn 901, see Nd1 315. -sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46] D III.237; S V.69, 201, 205, 237, 285, 314, 378; A I.233; II.134; IV.14 sq., 73 sq., 146, 380; V.120; Dh 218; Th II.12; Pug 17; Nett 190; DhA III.289; lit. up-stream at J III.371. Uddhaṃsati {Uddhamsati} [ud + dhaṃsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaṃs, see dhaṃsati] to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatthɔ uddhaṃsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati VvA 304. - pp. uddhasta (q. v.). Uddhagga {Uddhagga} (adj.) [uddha + agga] - 1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa D II.18 = III.144, 154. - 2. prominent, conspicuous J IV.345 (°rājin Pāli Text Society 330 Pāli-English Dictionary having prominent stripes, of a lion). - 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point-downwards) J V.156 (= heṭṭhima-danta C.). - 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) A II.68 (dakkhiṇā); III.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika. Uddhaggika {Uddhaggika} (adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) D I.51 = III.66; S I.90; A III.259; DA I.158. Uddhacca {Uddhacca} (nt.) [substantivised ger. of ud-dharati, ud + dhṛ, cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca] over-balancing, agitation, excitement, distraction, flurry (see on meaning Dialogues I.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). A I.256, 282; III.375, 421, 449; IV.87; V.142, 145, 148; D III.234; S V.277 sq.; DhSA 260; SnA 492 (in sense of "haughtiness"? for Sn 702 uṇṇata); Nd1 220, 501; Ps I.81, 83; II.9, 97 sq.; 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pug 18, 59; Dhs 427, 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vbh 168, 369, 372, 377; Vism 137, 469 (= uddhata-bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca "flurry or worry" u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa's and as the 9th of the 10 saṃyojana's (q. v.), e. g. at D I.71, 246; III.49, 234, 269, 278; S I.99; A I.3; III.16; V.30; Nd2 379; Dhs 1486. Uddhaja {Uddhaja} (adj.) [uddhaṃ + ja] upright, honest M I.386 (v. l. for pannadhaja). Uddhaṭa {Uddhata} [pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca] - 1. pulled out J II.26. - 2. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, in phrase° dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) J I.505; II.259; VI.6. - 3. cut off or out Miln 231 (uddhaṭ-uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off). - 4. drawn out, lifted out, raised J I.143; sass°kāle at the time of lifting the corn; V.49 (°paṃsu). Cp. uddhaṭa-bīja castrated J II.237. Uddhata {Uddhata} [pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca]. - 1. lifted up, raised, risen, high (of the sun, only in this special phrase u. aruṇo) Vin II.236; Ud 27 (vv. ll. uggata & uddhasta). - 2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken S I.61 (+ unnaḷa "muddled in mind & puffed up" trsl.), 204 (id.) V.112 (līnaṃ cittaṃ uddhataṃ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269; A II.23; III.391; V.93 sq., 142, 163; It 72; Th 2, 77 (so read with v. l., T. has uddhaṭa; ThA 80 explns. as nānɔ ārammaṇe vikkhitta-citta asamāhita); Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta-citto); Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug A 217). -an° well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued M I.470; A II.211; V.93 sq., 104; Sn 850 (= uddhaccavirahita SnA 549); Dh 363 (= nibbutacitto DhA IV.93); J V.203; Vv 648. - See also ubbhata. Uddhana (nt.) [*ud-dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati] an oven J I.33, 68, 71, 346; II.133, 277; III.178, 425; V.385, 471; II.218 (kammār°), 574; Sn p. 105; Miln 118, 259; Vism 171, 254; DhA I.52, 224; II.3; III.219 (°panti); IV.176. {Uddhana} Uddhamma {Uddhamma} [ud + dhamma] false doctrine Dpvs V.19. Uddharaṇa {Uddharana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddharati] - 1. taking up, lifting, raising Miln 307 (sass°- samaya the time of gathering the corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DA I.192. - 2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin III.29. See also ubbahati2. Pāli Text Society 331 Pāli-English Dictionary Uddharati {Uddharati} [ud + dharate of dhṛ] - 1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with bṛh: see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up; hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp. uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa. - (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away D I.135 (baliṃ uddhareyya raise a tax); M I.306 (hiyaṃ); J I.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kaḍḍhitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); VvA 157. - Caus. uddharāpeti Vin II.180, 181; J VI.95. - 2. to pull out, draw out (syn. with abbahati, q. v. for comparison) D I. 77 (ahiṃ karaṇḍā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato) PvA 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha J II.95 (for abbaha); Dh 327 (attānaṃ duggā); aor. uddhari J III.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Th 1, 756; ger. uddharitvā D I.234; Nd1 419; SnA 567; DhA IV.26; PvA 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā J IV.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvað cakkhūni = akkhīni uddharitvā C.). - pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata. Uddharin {Uddharin} īn an° īn an° Sn 952 see under niṭṭhurin. Uddhasetā {Uddhaseta} see uddhasta. Uddhasta {Uddhasta} [pp. of uddhaṃseti, see dhaṃsati & cp. anuddhaṃ seti] attacked, perhaps "spoilt" (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at A I.202 (T. uddhaseta, expld. by upari dhaṃsita C.); II.211 (vv. ll. uddhasotā for °etā & uddhaṃso). - Registered with an° as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q. v.). Cp. also viddhasta. Uddhāra & Uubbhāra {Uddhara} {Uubbhara} in Vin.; e. g. II.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) [fr. uddharati1] - 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin° (q. v.) Vin I.255 sq.; III.262; IV.287; V.177 sq. - 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase °ṃ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J II.341; III.106; IV.45, 247. uddhāra-sodhana (v. l. sādh°) the clearance of a debt J II.341. - 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs V.37 (atth° of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth° + pad°). Uddhālaka {Uddhalaka} at J VI.530 is to be read uddālaka. Uddhita {Uddhita} [a by-form of uddhaṭa] pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed J VI.237 (°pphala = uddhaṭa-bīja C.). Uddhunāti {Uddhunati} [ud + dhunāti] to shake VvA 279. Uddhumāta {Uddhumata} (adj.) [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) A I.140; Sn 200 (of a corpse); SnA 100 sq., 171; DA I.114. Cp. next. Uddhumātaka {Uddhumataka} (adj.) [prec. + ka] swollen, bloated, puffed up M I.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (id.); J I.164 (udaraṃ °ṃ katvā), 420 (°nimitta appearance of being blown up); Miln 332; DhA I.307. See also subha & asubha. -saððā the idea of a bloated corpse A II.17; Dhs 263; Miln 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69. Uddhumātatta {Uddhumatatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddhumāta] swollen condition Vism 178. Pāli Text Society 332 Pāli-English Dictionary Uddhumāyati {Uddhumayati} [ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca] to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. °āyi J III.26; VvA 76; ger. °ājitvā J II.18; DhA I.126. - pp. uddhumāta & °āyita (q. v.). Uddhumāyana {Uddhumayana} (nt.) [fr. uddhumāyati] puffing, blowing or swelling up J IV.37. Uddhumāyika {Uddhumayika} (adj.) [cp. uddhumāyita] like blowing or swelling up, of blown-up appearance M I.142 sq. Uddhumāyita {Uddhumayita} [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, puffed up VvA 218. Udrabhati {Udrabhati} [? doubtful in form & etym.] to eat M I.306 (upacikā bījaṃ na udrabheyyuṃ; vv. ll. on p. 555: udrah°, udah°, udāh°, uddhah°, uṭṭhah°; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuṃ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)). - Note. The Dhātupāṭha, 212, and the Dhātu-maðjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating. Udraya & Uddaya {Udraya} {Uddaya}(-°) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya1] coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh° (yielding pain) & sukh° (giving pleasure); e. g. as dukkh° at M I 415; J IV.398; V.119 (v. l. °indriya); Pv I.1110 (so read for T. °andriya, cp. undriyati as v. l. for udāyati); Ps II.79 (kammaṃ); as sukh° at J V.389 (v. l. °indriya); DhA II.47 (°uddaya). Both dukkh° & sukh° at Ps I.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk° causing bitterness J V.241; sa° with (good or evil) consequences S II.29; M I.271. Udrīyati & Uddīyati {Udriyati} {Uddiyati} [cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ, dṛṇ ti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati] to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin I.148 (vihāro udriyati); II 174 (id); IV.254 (i); D I.96 (°īyissati = bhijjhissati DA I 96, so read for udāyati); S I 113, 119. Udrīyana & Uddīyana {Udriyana} {Uddiyana} (nt.) [fr. udrīyati] breaking or splitting open, bursting J I.72; DhA II.7 (°sadda), 100 (paṭhavī-uddīyana-sadda; vv. ll. uddri°, udri°). Undura {Undura} [etym ?] a rat Vin I.209; II.148, 152; III.151; J I.120; Miln 23, 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62. Unna {Unna} [pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka] in phrase pīti-vegenɔunna "bubbling up with the excitement of joy", overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i. e. lofty, exalted C.). - It may however be better & more in keeping with Pāli word-formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud + na, taking °na as abs. (base)-form of nam, thus lit. "bent up", i. e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna = ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata. Unnaka {Unnaka} [etym.?] a species of perfume J VI 537 (gloss kuṭantaja). Unnangala {Unnangala} (adj.) [ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud] in phrase °ṃ karoti, according to Morris, J P T S 1887, 120 "to make an up-ploughing, to turn up etc.", but Pāli Text Society 333 Pāli-English Dictionary more aptly with C. on J VI.328 to make "out-plough" (not "up-plough") in sense of out-ofwork, i. e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday. A typical "Jātaka"-phrase; J I.228; II.296, 367; III. 129, 414; IV.355; VI.328; DhA III.10. Unnata {Unnata} [pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q. v.] raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv IV.66 (= sāmin PvA 262); J I.71; II369; VI 487; Miln 146, 387; DA I.45 See also unnaḷa. Unnati {Unnati} (f) [fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati] rising, lifting up, elevation Miln 387 (°avanati). Unnadati {Unnadati} [ud + nadati] to resound, shout out, roar J I.110; II 90; III.271, 325; Miln 18; aor. unnadi J I 74; Miln 13. - Caus. unnādeti (q. v.). Unnama {Unnama} [fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning] rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh VII.7 = Pv I.57 (= thala unnata-padesa PvA 29); Miln 349; DA I.154. Unnamati {Unnamati} [ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning] to rise up, ascend Miln 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306. - Caus. unnāmeti (q. v.). - pp. unnara & uṇṇata (q. v.). Unnala & Unnaḷa {Unnala} {Unnala} (adj.) [Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n > l change freq., cp. P. nangala > lāngala; nalāṭa > lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning "sporting, sporty, wild" etc.; or (still more likely) with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala M Vastu I.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244. To these may be added P. celakedu > cetakedu J VI.538] showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty, in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala M I.32; S I.61 = 204 (trsld. as "muddled in mind, puffed up, vain", expld. as uggata-nala uddhaṭa-tucchamāna K. S. 318); A I.70, 266; II.26; III 199, 355, 391; It 113 (+ asamāhita); Dh 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as "māna-naḷaṃ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala" DhA III.452); Th 1, 634; Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha-mānaṃ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217). Unnahanā (f.) [ud + nah, see nayhati] flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27. {Unnahana} Unnāda {Unnada} [fr. ud + nad] shout, shouting J II 405. Unnādin {Unnadin} (adj.) [fr. ud + nad] shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin III.336; D I.95, 143, 178; J II.216. Unnādeti {Unnadeti} [Caus. of unnadati] to make resound J I.408 (paṭhaviṃ), II.34. Unnāmin {Unnamin} (adj) [ud + nam in Caus. form] raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low A IV.237 (of cultivated land). Unnāmeti {Unnameti} (unn°) [Caus. of unnamati] to raise DhsA 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids) at Sn 206 (inf. uṃṇametave). Pāli Text Society 334 Pāli-English Dictionary Upa {Upa} - [Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. u(po/ under, u(pe/r over; Lat. sub fr. *(e)ks-upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg. ūf = Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari] prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā), usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by. - In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e. g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita. - Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up -: °kiṇṇa covered over; °jīvati live on (cp. anu°); °tthambhita propped up, sup-ported; °cita heaped up, ac-cumulated; °dhāreti hold or take up; °nata bent on; °nissaya foundation; °nissita depending on etc. - (2) (Aim): (out) up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as "higher, above" in upara, upari, upama = Lat. superus, supremus E. g. °kaḍḍhati drag on to; °kappati come to, accrue; °kappana ad-ministering; °kāra service to; °kkhata administered; °gacchati go to, ap-proach (cp. upātigacchati); °disati ad-vise; °dhāvati run up to: °nadati to sound out; °nikkhamati come out up to; °nisevita gone on to or after; °neti bring on to; etc. - (3) (Nearness): close by, close to, near, "ad-"; e. g. °kaṇṇaka close to the ear; °cāra ap-plication; °ṭṭhāna at-tending; ṭṭhita ap-proached; °tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; °dduta urged; °nāmeti place close to; °nibandhati tie close to; °nisīdati sit close to or down by. - (4) (Intensive use): quite, altogether, "up"; e. g. °antika quite near; °chindati cut up. - (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus; Gr. u(po/leukos whitish; Oir. fo-dord; Cymr. go-durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary, by -, miniature, made after the style of, e. g. °aḍḍha about half; °kacchaka like a little hollow; °kaṇḍakin (= °paṇḍukin? whitish); °deva a minor god; °nibha somewhat similar to; °nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest; uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; °vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā°. Upaka {Upaka} (-°) [for °upaga] found only in combn. kulûpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k. Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin I.192, 208; III.84; S II.200 sq.; A III.258 sq.; Nd2 3851; Pv III.85; PvA 266. - f. kulûpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin II.268; IV.66. Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for °ûpaga) at J IV.219. Upakaccha {Upakaccha} (°-) [upa + kacchā2] only in combn. with °antare lit. "in between the hips or loins or arm-pits", in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. II.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs J I.63, 425, khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits J V.211 & ṭhapetvā id. J V.46. Upakacchaka {Upakacchaka} [upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning] (1) [= upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure, adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter J I.158. (2) [= upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow, usually the armpit, but occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin III.39; IV.260 (pudendum muliebre); Miln 293; J V.437 (= kaccha2). Upakaṭṭha {Upakattha} (adj.) [pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J IV.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha-majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin IV.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassûpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin I.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha. - loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. "near, in the neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 (= santike); Dāvs V.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe). Pāli Text Society 335 Pāli-English Dictionary Upakaḍḍhati {Upakaddhati} [upa + kaḍḍhati, cp. upakaṭṭha] to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to D I.180 (+ apakaḍḍhati); III.127 (id.); M I.365; S I.49; II.99; Dh 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti DhA III.484). Upakaṇṭha {Upakantha} at Dāvs V.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha. Upakaṇḍakin {Upakandakin} (Pv II.113) see under uppaṇḍukin. Upakaṇṇa {Upakanna} (°-) [upa + kaṇṇa] lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. °ka (q. v.) Th 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear). Upakannaka {Upakannaka} (adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin I.237; II.99; IV.20, 271; S I.86; A III.57; SnA 186; and in cpd. °jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports A III. 136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana. Upakappati {Upakappati} [upa + kappati] intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue S I.85; Pv I.44 (= nippajjati PvA 19); I.57 (petānaṃ); I.104 (= viniyujjati PvA 49); J V.350; PvA 8, 29 (petānaṃ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, 504. Upakappana {Upakappana} (nt.) [fr. upakappati] profit PvA 29 (dān°), 49 (an°). Upakappanaka {Upakappanaka} (adj.) [fr. upakappana] profitable J I.398; DhA II.133. Upakaraṇa {Upakarana} (nt.) [fr. upa + kṛ] help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood D II.340; A II.86; J I.7; PvA 60 (commodities), 133 (°manussa, adj. suitable, fit); Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship J IV.165; tunnavaya° a weaver's outfit J II.364; dabb° fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān° materials for a gift PvA 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān° bathing requisites VvA 248; vitt° luxuries A V.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; PvA 71. Upakaroti {Upakaroti} [upa + karoti] to do a service, serve, help, support Th 2, 89 (aor. upakāsiṃ = anugaṇhiṃ santappesiṃ ThA 88). - pp. upakkhaṭa (q. v.). Upakāra {Upakara} [fr. upa + kṛ, cp. upakaraṇa] service, help, benefit, obligation, favour D III.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (°āya hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. - bahûpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful S IV.295; PvA 114. upakāraṃ karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116. -āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86. Upakāraka {Upakaraka} (adj.) [fr. upakāra] serviceable, helping, effective J V.99; Vism 534. - f. upakārikā 1. benefactress, helper J III.437. - 2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall D I.105, see DA I.274 & cp. parikkhāra; M I.86 (= Nd2 1996). - 3. (philosophy) = cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna I.11 Upakārin {Upakarin} (adj.-n.) [fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142] a benefactor J III.11; DA I.187; Sdhp 540, 546. Pāli Text Society 336 Pāli-English Dictionary Upakiṇṇa {Upakinna} [pp. of upakirati] strewn over with (-°), covered Vv 351 (rucak°, so read for rājak°; expld by okiṇṇa VvA 160). Upakiriyā {Upakiriya} (f.) [fr. upa + kr] implement, ornament J V.408. Upakūjati {Upakujati} [upa + kūjati] to sing to (of birds) J IV.296 (kūjantaṃ u. = replies w. song to the singing). - pp. upakūjita (q. v.). Upakūjita {Upakujita} (-°) [pp. of upakūjati] resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) J IV.359; PvA 154. Upakūla {Upakula} [upa + kūla] embankment, a river's bank, riverside J VI.26 (rukkhɔûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank). Upakūlita {Upakulita} [derivation uncertain] used of the nose in old age Th 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs. Rh. D. in "Sisters" takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller J R A S. 1919. 538. This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita. Upakūḷita {Upakulita} [pp. of kūḍ, a variant of kuth, kvathati] singed, boiled, roasted J I.405 ("halfroasted" = aḍḍhajjhāmaka C.). See also upakūsita. Upakūsita {Upakusita} at J II.134 is perhaps faulty for °kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. "kukkule jhāmo" and also by v. l. °kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) °kūjita may have the same origin, viz. °kūḷita, was however interpreted (v. l. BB.) by °kupita (meaning "shaken, disturbed by fire"). Upakka {Upakka} see uppakka. Upakkanta {Upakkanta} [pp. of upakkamati] 1. attacked by (-°) Miln 112. - 2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc.) DA I.140. Upakkama {Upakkama} [fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach (-°) VvA 72. - (b) attack Vin II.195; Miln 157; DA I.69, 71. - (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S I.152 = Sn p. 126. - (b) in special: ways, means, i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575; Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th 1, 143; J IV.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176. Upakkamati {Upakkamati} [upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack M I.86 = Ud 71. - (2) to undertake Vin III.110, 111. - (3) to begin Vin IV.316; DA I.318. Upakkamana {Upakkamana} (nt.) [fr. upa + kram] going near to, attacking J IV.12. Upakkitaka {Upakkitaka} [fr. upa + krī to buy] a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka DhA I.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by "yo kahāpaṇādīhi kiðci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati"); Ps II.196 (? T. upakkhittaka). Pāli Text Society 337 Pāli-English Dictionary Upakkiliṭṭha {Upakkilittha} [pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next] soiled, stained, depraved, impure S I.179; A I.207 (citta); Vism 13. Upakkilesa {Upakkilesa} [fr. upa + kliś] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin II.295 (cp. SnA 487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M I.36, 91; D III.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; S V.92 sq. (paðca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115; A I.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); II.53 (candima-suriyānaṃ samaṇa-brāhmaṇānaṃ), 67; III.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; IV.177 (vigatā); V.195; Ps I.164 (eighteen); Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633. Upakkuṭṭha {Upakkuttha} [pp. of upakkosati] blamed, reproached, censured, faulty D I.113 (an°); Sn p. 115 (id.); J III.523; DA I.211. Upakkosa {Upakkosa} [fr. upa + kruś] censure, reproach J VI.489. Upakkosati {Upakkosati} [upa + kosati] to scold, reprove, blame D I. 161; J III.436, 523; IV.81, 317, 409. Upakkhaṭa {Upakkhata} & °ta [pp. of upakaroti] done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered D I.127 (= sajjita DA I.294); Pv II.84 (= sajjita PvA 107); J VI.139; Miln 156. Upakkhalati {Upakkhalati} [upa + khalati] to stumble, trip D II.250; M II.209; A III.101; J III.433. Upakkhalana {Upakkhalana} (nt.) [fr. prec.] stumbling, tripping Vism 500. Upakkhittaka {Upakkhittaka} at Ps II.196 see upakk°. Upakhandha {Upakhandha} [upa + khandha] lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder J IV.210 (= khandha C.). Upaga {Upaga} (always as °ûpaga) (adj.) [upa + ga] - 1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy°, S II.24; ākāsɔānaðcɔ āyatan° etc. Ps I.84; kāy° S II.24; brahmalok° Pv II.1319; yathākamm° D I.82. - 2. coming into, experiencing, having, as vikappan° according to option Vin IV.283; phal° bearing fruit, & pupph° having flowers, in flower PvA 275. - 3. attached to, belonging to, being at J I.51 (hatth°); VvA 12 (id. + pādûpaga). - 4. in phrase gayh° lit. "accessible to the grip", acquisition of property, theft J IV.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Miln 325; DhA II.29; PvA 4. Upagacchati {Upagacchati} [upa + gacchati] - 1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) D II.12; PvA 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaṃ), 29, 32 (vāsaṃ) 132; ger. °gantvā PvA 70 (attano santikaṃ), & °gamma S II.17, 20. - 2. to undergo, go (in) to, to begin, undertake Sn 152 (diṭṭhiṃ anupagamma); J I.106 (vassaṃ); PvA 42 (id.); J I.200; niddaṃ upagacchati to drop off into sleep PvA 43 (aor. upagacchi, MSS. °gañchi), 105, 128. - pp. upagata (q. v.). Upagaṇhanā {Upaganhana} (f.) [abstr. of upa + gṛh] taking up, keeping up. meditating Miln 37. Upagaṇhāti {Upaganhati} [upa + gaṇhāti] to take up (for meditation) Miln 38. Pāli Text Society 338 Pāli-English Dictionary Upagata {Upagata} [pp. of upagacchati] - 1. gone to, come, approached (intrs.) Sn 708 (āsan° = nisinna SnA 495); PvA 77 (santikaṃ), 78, 79 (petalokaṃ), 123. - 2. undergoing, coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at A V.187); Pv I.1110 (khuppipās°); PvA 60 (= abhibhūta). Upagamana (nt.) [fr. upa + gam] approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin II.97 (+ ajjhupag°); Nett 27; Vism 600; PvA 42 (vass°). {Upagamana} Upagamanaka {Upagamanaka} (adj.) [fr. upagamana] going to, one who goes to (with acc.) PvA 168 (= °upaga). Upagaḷita {Upagalita} [pp. of upagaḷati] flowing out, spat or slobbered out J V.471 (°khelo; v. l. paggharita). Upagāmin {Upagamin} (adj.) [fr. upa + gam, cp. °upaga] going to, undergoing, experiencing A II.6 (jāti jar°). Upagūhati {Upaguhati} [upa + gūhati] to embrace J I.346, 349; II.424; III.437; V.157, 328, 384. - ger. upaguyha J VI.300. Upagghāta {Upagghata} [pp. of next] scented, smelled, kissed J VI.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita). Upagghāyati {Upagghayati} [upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1] to smell at, in sense of "to kiss" J V.328 (also inf. upagghātuṃ). Upaghaṭṭita {Upaghattita} [pp. of upaghaṭṭeti] knocked or knocking against J I.26 (V.179). Upaghāta {Upaghata} [fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta] hurting, injuring, injury M III.237; S II.218; IV.323 sq.; A III.173; Th 1, 583; Miln 274, 307, 347; DA I.273. an° not hurting others, kindness Dh 185. Upaghātana {Upaghatana} (nt.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting DhA III.237 (an°). Upaghātika {Upaghatika} (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] injuring, offending Vin II.13. Upaghātin {Upaghatin} (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting, injuring J III.523. Upacaya {Upacaya} [fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya] heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion & defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). - D I.76 (= odana = kummāsɔûpacayo, see under kāya); Dhs 582, 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaṃ ācayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449; DA I.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa preferable). Upacarati {Upacarati} [upa + carati] to deal with, handle, use J VI. 180. - pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 339 Pāli-English Dictionary Upacarita {Upacarita} [pp. of upacarati] practised, served, enacted, performed Miln 359, 360. Upacāra {Upacara} [fr. upa + car] - 1. approach, access Vin II.120, 152; IV.304; J I.83, 172; DhsA 328 (phal°). - 2. habit, practice, conduct Vin II.20 (dassan°); SnA 140 (id.); J III.280. - 3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) J III.280 (mantassa); VI.180; Miln 153, 154 (dur° an evil spell); VvA 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ°). - 4. entrance, access, i. e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of (-°) J IV.182 (nagar°); usually as gām° Vin I.109; III.46; IV.230; KhA 77; SnA 83, 179. - 5. attention, attendance Vin IV.272; J VI.180; Miln 154. - 6. civility, polite behaviour J II.56; VI.102. - 7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53, 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. XI. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood-, or access-concentration, distinguishing it from appanā-samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim. Upacikā (f.) [connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes 62 (*utpādikā > upatikā > upacikā) & Kern, Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for °dihikā, vv. ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ci, thus meaning "making heaps, a builder"] the termite or white ant Vin II.113, 148, 152; III.151; M I.306; J III.320; IV.331; Miln 363, 392; Vism 62, DhA II.25; III.15. {Upacika} Upaciṇṇa {Upacinna} [pp. of upacarati] used, frequented, known (as value) J VI.180. Upacita {Upacita} [pp. of upacināti] - 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma) Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150. - 2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA I.220. Upacitatta {Upacitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. upacita] storing up, accumulation Dhs 431. Upacināti {Upacinati} [upa + ci] - 1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaṃ or pāpaṃ) VvA 254; PvA 8, 241. - 2. to concentrate, pay attention Th 1, 199 (C. upacetuṃ for ocetuṃ T.); J V.339 (= oloketi). - Pass. upaciyyati Th 1, 807. - pp. upacita (q. v.). Upacca {Upacca} =Uppacca (q. v.) "flying up" (= uppatitvā PvA 103) at Th 2, 248 (= ThA 205, where v. l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expld. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv II.717 (= PvA 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca). Upaccagā {Upaccaga} [upa + ati + agā of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of upātigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami SnA 339) = Th 2, 5 (= mā atikkami ThA 12); Sn 636, 641, 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167); Dh 315, 412, 417 (= atikkanta DhA IV.225); Bu II.43. - pl. upaccaguṃ S I.35; A III.311. Upaccati {Upaccati} (?) in phrase "akkhīni upacciṃsu" at J VI.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiṃsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati > upacināti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiṃsu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted. Pāli Text Society 340 Pāli-English Dictionary Upacchindati {Upacchindati} [upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. °chinde); J IV. 127; Nd1 502; ThA 267; PvA 31 (kulavaṃso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaṃ). Upacchinna {Upacchinna} [pp. of upacchindati] cut off, interrupted J I. 477; Miln 306. Upacchubhati [upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti] to throw at M I.364 (vv. ll. °chumbh°, °cubh°). {Upacchubhati} Upaccheda {Upaccheda} [fr. upa + chid] breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption M I.245, 327 (pāṇ° murder); J I.67; Miln 134 (paveṇ° break of tradition) PvA 82 (kulavaṃs°); DhA I.152 (āhār °ṃ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DA I.136, 159. Upacchedaka {Upacchedaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. upaccheda] destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting J I.418 (vacan°); IV.357; DA I.69 (jīvitɔ indriy°); VvA 72 (id.). Upajānāti {Upajanati} [upa + jānāti] to learn, acquire or have knowledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin I.272 (saṃyamassa); II.181 (gharāvāsɔatthena); A I.50 (dvinnaṃ dhammānaṃ upaððāsin). - fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati Sn 716) Sn 701, 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati SnA 498); J V.215. - pp. upaððāta (q. v.). Upajīvati {Upajivati} [upa + jīvati] to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) D I.228; S I.217; Sn 612 sq.; Th 1, 943; J III.309, 338; IV.271 (= anujīvati); Pv II.950 (Ankuraṃ u. ti taṃ nissāya jīvanti PvA 134); Miln 231. Upajīvika {Upajivika} (adj.) [= upajīvin] Sdhp 501 (see next). Upajīvin {Upajivin} (-°) (adj.-n.) [fr. upa + jīv] living on, subsisting by A II.135 (phal°); Sn 217 (paradatt°), J I.227 (vohār°); IV.380; Pug 51; Miln 160 (Satth°); VvA 141 (sipp°). f. upajīvinī in rūp° (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i. e. a courtesan) Miln 122; PvA 46; cp. kiliṭṭha-kamm° gaṇikā PvA 195. Upajūta {Upajuta} (nt.) [upa + jūta] stake at game J VI.192. Upajjha {Upajjha} see next. Upajjhāya {Upajjhaya} [Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. "one who is gone close up to"] a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e. g. Vin I. 119; Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin I.45, 53, 62, 120; IV. 130; S I.185; A II.66, 78; III.69; SnA 346; DhA II.93; PvA 55, 60, 230. - A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e. g. at Vin I.94; III.35; with f. upajjhā Vin IV.326. Upaññāta {Upannata} [pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin I.40; J V.325, 368; A I.61. Upaṭṭita {Upattita} [upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed J VI.82 (visavegena). Pāli Text Society 341 Pāli-English Dictionary Upaṭṭhapeti {Upatthapeti} & °ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin II.210; D II.19; M I.429; J I.266; IV.2; V.218; Pug 59, 68; Miln 15, 257, 366 (pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ), 397; DA I.270; Sdhp 356. - 2. to cause to be present Vin I.45; S I.170; Pv IV.170. - 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A V.72 (gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā). - 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin II.267. - 5. to ordain Vin I.62, 83. Upaṭṭhahati {Upatthahati} & °ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on, attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin I.50, 302; IV.326; M III.25; S I.167; A III.94; V.72; Sn 82 = 481 (imper. °ṭṭhahassu); J I.67 (ppr. °ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. °ṭṭhahanto); IV.131; V.396; Dpvs II.16; PvA 19, 20. - aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA 14, 42, 82. - inf. upaṭṭhātuṃ A V.72; PvA 20. - ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA 76. - grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin I.302; PvA 20. - pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). - 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M I.104 sq.; A IV.32; J IV.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); V.207; Miln 64; ThA 258. - aor. upaṭṭhāsi J I.61; IV.3; PvA 42. - Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & °ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). - Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J IV.131 (ppr. °ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A III.94 (ppr. °ṭṭhahiyamāna). Upaṭṭhāka {Upatthaka} [fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu I.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. I.214; II.85, 112.] a servitor, personal attendant, servant, "famulus". Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D I.206; Th 1, 1041 f.; ThA in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin I.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; II.186; III.66; IV.47; D I.150 (Nāgita); S III.113; A I.121; III.31, 189; J I 15, 100 (a merchant's); II.416; Pug 28; DhA II.93; VvA 149; PvA 211. - agg° main follower, chief attendant D II.6; gilān° an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin I.303; A I.26; sangh° one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin I.216; A I.26; III.39. - dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin I.302. -kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen.) Vin I.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; III.62, 66, 67; IV.283, 286; VvA 120. Upaṭṭhāna {Upatthana} (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] - 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A I.151, 225; Sn 138; J I.226, 237, 291; II.101; IV.138; VI.351. Ps I.107; II.7 sq., 28, 230; PvA 104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA 75 (ther°); Sdhp 560. - 2. worship, (divine) service D III.188 sq. (°ṃ gacchati); PvA 122. Buddh° attendance on a Buddha PvA 93; ThA 18. - 3. a state room J III.257. -sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA 20. -sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk. upasthāna-śālā Divy 207] Vin I.49, 139; II.153, 208; III. 70 (at Vesālī); IV.15, 42; D II.119 (at Vesālī); S II.280; V.321; A II.51, 197; III.298; DhA I.37, 38; III.413. Upaṭṭhāpana {Upatthapana} (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin IV. 291. Upaṭṭhita {Upatthita} [pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upasthita Divy 281, 342] - 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn 295 (°asmiṃ yaññasmiṃ); J V.173 (annena pānena); Pv I.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta PvA 25); II.98 (= payirupāsita PvA 116); PvA 132. 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh 235; Miln 274; PvA 124 (dānakāle °e). - 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M I.77; A II.206; Sn 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv II.953 (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA 135. -sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin I.63; D III.252, 282; S IV.186; A III. 251; Pug 25. Pāli Text Society 342 Pāli-English Dictionary Upaṭṭheti {Upattheti} [Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaṃ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin IV.275. fut. °essati Vin IV.291. to place, fix (parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244. Upaḍayhati {Upadayhati} [upa + ḍayhati] to be burnt up Miln 277. Upaḍḍha {Upaddha} (adj.-nt.) [upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS I.211, 240] half Vin I.281 (°kāsina); II.200 (°āsana); J III.11 (°rajja); Vism 320 (°gāma); DhA I.15, 205 (°uposathakamma); II.85; KhA 239 (°gāthā); SnA 298; VvA 38, 61, 120; PvA 209, 276. Upatappati {Upatappati} [upa + tappati1)] to be vexed or tormented J V.90; DhsA 42. Upatāpa {Upatapa} [fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism 166. Upatāpana {Upatapana} (nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J IV.13; ThA 243. Upatāpika {Upatapika} (adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J II.224. Upatāpeti {Upatapeti} [upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J II.178, 224; IV.11; DhsA 42 (vibādhati +). Upatiṭṭhati {Upatitthati} [upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, °ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. "to stand by", to look after, to worship Pv III.118; J II.73 (ādiccaṃ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln 231 (ger. °tiṭṭhitvā); J V.173 (°tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). Upatta {Upatta} [upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M I.343; J I.399. Upatthaddha {Upatthaddha} [upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] - 1. stiff Vin III.37 (angāni). - 2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th 1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J I.47 (V. 267: mettābalena); V. 121, 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm° "when it is the medium of an idea"); Nett 117; Miln 110 (kāruðða-bal°). Upatthambha {Upatthambha} [fr. upa + stambh] - 1. a support, prop, stay Miln 355, 415, 417; Sdhp 565. - 2. relief, ease Vin III.112. - 3. encouragement J V.270; DhA I.279. Upatthambhaka {Upatthambhaka} (adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153. Upatthambhana {Upatthambhana} (nt.) = upatthambha Miln 36; J I.447; DA I.124; ThA 258; Vism 279. Upatthambhita {Upatthambhita} [pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, supported, sustained J I.107; Miln 36; DA I 234; PvA 117 (puñña-phal°), 148 (utu-āhārehi u.). 343 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Upatthambheti {Upatthambheti} [upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J I.127 [ppr. °ayamāna), 447; DA I.113; DhA III.73 (°ayamāna ppr.). - pp. upatthambhita. Upatthara {Upatthara} [fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D I.103 (rath°); J II.126 (pabbat°); II.534. Upatheyya {Upatheyya} [for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216] a cushion J VI.490, 513. Upadaṃsitar {Upadamsitar} [n. ag. fr. upadaṃseti] one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaṃsita is to be corrected to upad°, as already pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists, and translators, like upadaṃseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah°, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsls. "one who confirms". The Pug A leaves the word unexplained). Upadaṃseti {Upadamseti} [= upadasseti with °aṃs° for °ass° like dhanseti = Sk. dharṣayati, haṃsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical passages] to cause to appear, to manifest M II.120; S I. 64, 65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour-tones); A II.84 = III.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Th I.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin IV.309. Upadasseti {Upadasseti} (upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upadaṃseti] to make manifest, to show Miln 276, 316, 347. Upadahati {Upadahati} [upa + dahati1] to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin IV.149; D II.135 (vippaṭisāraṃ); A I.203 (dukkhaṃ); Miln 109, 139, 164, 286, 383. grd. pass. °dahātabba to be given or caused Vin II.250 = A III.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi. Upadāyaka {Upadayaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. upa + dā] giving, bestowing Sdhp 319. Upadiṭṭha {Upadittha} [pp. of upadisati] pointed out, put forth, specified Miln 144 (pañha). Upadisati {Upadisati} [upa + disati] to point out, show, advise, specify J V. 457 (sippaṃ); Miln 21 (dhamma-maggaṃ). - pp. upadiṭṭha (q. v.). Upadissati {Upadissati} [upa + dissati] to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Sn 140 (pres. upadissare = °nti SnA 192). Upadeva {Upadeva} [upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5] a secondary, lesser, minor god PvA 136. Upadesa [fr. upadisati] pointing out, indication, instruction, advice PvA 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād°; KhA 208 differs at id. p.); KhA 100; Sdhp 227. {Upadesa} Upaddava [upa + dava2 of dru] lit. rushing on; accident, misfortune, distress, oppression S II.210; A I.101; Sn 51; Dh 338 (an°); DhA I.16; Sdhp 267, 398. {Upaddava} Pāli Text Society 344 Pāli-English Dictionary Upaddavati {Upaddavati} [fr. upa + dru] to annoy, trouble DA I.213. - pp. upadduta (q. v.). Upadduta {Upadduta} [pp. of upaddavati] overrun, oppressed, annoyed, overcome, distressed Vin II.170; III.144, 283; S II.210; IV.29; J I.26, 61, 339; II.102; IV.324, 494; Pv II.108; Vism 24 (= apakata); Miln 279; VvA 311 (aṭṭita +); PvA 61. an° unmolested PvA 195; anupaddutatta state of not being molested VvA 95. Upadhaṃsitar & Upadhaṃseti {Upadhamsitar} {Upadhamseti} at Pug 49 is to be read upad° (q. v.). Upadhāna {Upadhana} (adj. nt.) [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati] "putting under", i. e. (1) a pillow, cushion D I.7; S II.267 = Miln 366 (kaḷingar°); S III.145; A I.137, 181; III.50, J IV.201; V.506 (tamb° = ratt° C.); (2) imposing, giving, causing Dh 291 dukkh°). Upadhāneti {Upadhaneti} [f. upa + dhā] to suppose, think, reflect DhA I.239 (should be corrected to upadhāreti). Upadhāraṇā {Upadharana} (nt.) [fr. upa + dhṛ) "receptacle", milk-pail D II.192; A IV.393; J VI.503. See kaṃs°. Kern, Toev. I. 142 proposes corruption fr. kaṃsɔûpadohana, which latter however does not occur in Pali. Upadhāraṇā {Upadharana} (f) [cp. upadhāraṇa] calculation VvA 7. Upadhārita {Upadharita} [pp. of upadhāreti] considered, reflected upon Dh I.28; sûpadh° Miln 10; dûpadh° Vin IV.275. Upadhāreti {Upadhareti} (Caus. of upa + dhṛ, cp. dhāreti 3] 1. "to hold or take up" (cp. semantically Lat. teneo = E. tenet), to reason out, conclude, reflect, surmise, know as such & such, realise J I.338; DhA I.28, 41; II.15, 20, 37, 96; IV.197 (an°); VvA 48, 200 (an°), 234, 260 (an°), 324; PvA 119 (for jānāti). - 2. to look out for (acc.) J III. 65; VI.2. Upadhāvati {Upadhavati} [upa + dhāvati 1] to run up to or after, fall upon, surround Vin II.207; IV.260 (pp. °dhāvita); S I.185; S II.26 (aparantaṃ); Th 1, 1209; Miln 209; VvA 256; PvA 154, 168, 173 (for padhāvitā). Upadhi {Upadhi} [fr. upa + dhā, cp. upadahati & BSk. upadhi Divy 50, 224, 534] 1. putting down or under, foundation, basis, ground, substratum (of rebirth) S I.117, 124, 134, 186; A II.24 (°sankhaya); III.382 (id.); IV.150 (°kkhaya); It 21, 69; Sn 364, 728 (upadhī-nidānā dukkha = vaṭṭa-dukkhaṃ SnA 505), 789, 992; Nd1 27, 141; Nd2 157; Vbh 338; Nett 29; DhA IV.33. - (2) clinging to rebirth (as impeding spiritual progress), attachment (almost syn. with kilesa or taṇhā, cp. nirupadhi & anupadhi); S A. = paðcakkhandhā, S II.108. At M I 162 (cp. Sn 33 = S I.6 = I.107) wife and children, flocks and herds, silver and gold are called upadhayo. upadhi is the root of sorrow ib. 454; S II.108; Sn 728 = 1051 = Th I.152 and the rejection of all upadhis is Nibbāna D II.36. (cp. S I.136; III.133; V.226; A I.80; M I.107 = II.93; Vin I.5, 36 = J I.83 = Mvst II.444; It 46, 62); D III.112 calls that which has upadhi ignoble (= non-Aryan). At S I.117 = Divy 224 upadhi is called a bond (saṃgo). Cp. opadhika. - The upadhis were later systematized into a set of 10, which are given at Nd2 157 as follows: 5 taṇhɔ upadhis (taṇhā, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma, duccarita), āhār-upadhi, paṭigh°, catasso upādinnā dhātuyo u. (viz. kāma, diṭṭhi, Pāli Text Society 345 Pāli-English Dictionary sīlabbata, attavāda; see D III.230), cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni u., cha viððāṇa-kāyā u. Another modified classification see at Brethren p. 398. Upadhika & Upadhīka {Upadhika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. upadhi] having a substratum, showing attachment to rebirth, only in cpds. an° free from clinging Vin I.36; Sn 1057, & nir° id. S I.141. Upadheyya {Upadheyya} (nt.) [cp. upadhāna] a cushion J VI.490 (for upatheyya, q. v.). Upanaccati {Upanaccati} [upa + naccati] to perform a dance D II.268. Upanata {Upanata} [pp. of upanamati] inclined, bent, prone PvA 190. Upanadati {Upanadati} [upa + nadati] to resound (with song) Pv III.34 (= vikūjati PvA 189). Upanandha {Upanandha} [pp. of upanayhati, see naddha & nandhati] scorned, grumbled at Vin II.118. Upanandhati {Upanandhati} [a secondary der. fr. upanandha, pp. of upanayhati] to bear enmity towards, to grumble at (with loc.); aor. upanandhi Vin II.118 (tasmiṃ); IV.83; Mhvs 36, 117. Upanamati {Upanamati} [upa + namati] to be bent on, strive after J III 324 (= upagacchati C.). - pp. upanata; Caus. upanāmeti (q. v.). Upanayana {Upanayana} (nt.) [fr. upa + ni; cp. naya & nayana] tt. for the minor premiss, subsumption (see Kvu trsl. 11) Miln 154; Nett 63; DhsA 329 (so read with v. l. for °najana). Upanayhati {Upanayhati} [upa + nayhati] - 1. to come into touch with It 68 = J IV.435 (pūtimacchaṃ kusaggena, cp. DhA I.45). - 2. to bear enmity towards (loc.), to grudge, scorn Dh 3, 4. - pp. upanandha (for °naddha). - See also upanandhati. Upanayhanā {Upanayhana} (f.) & °nayhitatta (nt.) are syn. for upanāha (grudge, ill-will) in exegesis at Pug 18 = 22, whereas id. p. at Vbh 357 reads upanahanā upanahitattaṃ (with v. l. upanayihanā & upanayihitattaṃ). Upanāmita {Upanamita} [pp. of upanāmeti] brought up to, placed against D II.134. Upanāmeti {Upanameti} [Caus. of upanamati] 1. to bend over to, to place against or close to, to approach, bring near D II. 134; S I.207; Th 1, 1055; Sn p. 48 (= attano kāyaṃ Bhagavato upanāmeti); J I.62; V.215; SnA 151. - 2. to offer, to present J IV.386; II.5; Miln 210, 373; PvA 274. - pp. upanāmita (q. v.). [cp. BSk. upanāmayati to hand over Divy 13, 14, 22]. Upanāyika {Upanayika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. upa + nī] - 1. referring to, belonging to in cpd. att° ref. to oneself Vin III.91; Vism 27. - 2. beginning, in phrase vass'ûpanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, period for entering on Lent (cp. BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489 & see also upakaṭṭha and vassa) Vin I.253; A I.51 (divided into 2 parts, first & second, or purimikā & pacchimikā); J III.332; DA I.8; DhA I.203; III.438; VvA 44; PvA 42. Pāli Text Society 346 Pāli-English Dictionary Upanāha {Upanaha} [fr. upa + nah, see upanayhati, same in BSk.; e. g. at M Vastu II.56.] ill-will, grudge, enmity M I.15; A I.91, 95, 299; IV.148, 349, 456; V.39, 41 sq., 209, 310; Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (pubbakālaṃ kodho aparakālaṃ upanāho Miln 289. Upanāhin {Upanahin} (adj.-n.) [fr. upanāha] one who bears ill-will, grudging, grumbling, finding fault Vin II.89; M I.95; D III.45; S II.206; IV.241; A III.260, 334; V.123, 156; Sn 116; Th 1, 502; J III.260 (kodhana +); Pug 18; Vbh 357. - Opp. an° not being angry (loc.) D III.47; S II. 207; IV.244; A V.124 sq.; J IV.463. Upanikkhamati {Upanikkhamati} [upa + nikkhamati] to go out, to come out (up to somebody) Th 2, 37; 169; J III 244; Pv I. 101 (aor. °nikkhami; imper. °nikkhamassu). Upanikkhitta {Upanikkhitta} [upa + n°] laid down (secretly), placed by or on top S V.457; J VI.390; Miln 80. - m. a spy J VI.394 (°purisa). Upanikkhittaka {Upanikkhittaka} [= prec.] a spy J VI 409 (°manussa), 431 (id.), 450 (id.). Upanikkhipati {Upanikkhipati} (upa + n°] to deposit near, to lay up Vin I.312; S II.136 sq.; Miln 78, 80; Nett 21, 22; DA I. 125. - pp. upanikkhitta (q. v.). Upanikkhipana {Upanikkhipana} (nt.) [fr. °nikkhipati] putting down (near somebody), putting in the way, trap Vin III.77. Upanikkhepa {Upanikkhepa} [fr. upa + nis + kṣip] "putting near", depositing; - 1. appld. to the course of memory, association of ideas Miln 78, 80; cp. °nikkhepana S II.276. - 2. deposit, pledge J VI.192, 193 (= upajūta). Upanighaṃsati {Upanighamsati} [upa + ni + ghaṃsati1] to rub up against, to crush (close) up to DhA I.58. Upanijjhāna {Upanijjhana} (nt.) [upa + nijjhāna1] meditation, reflection, consideration only in two phrases: ārammaṇa° & lakkhaṇa°, with ref. to jhāna J V.251; DhA I.230; III.276; VvA 38, 213. Cp. nijjhāyana. Upanijjhāyati {Upanijjhayati} [upa + nijjhāyati] to meditate upon, consider, look at, reflect on Vin I.193 ("covet"); II 269; III. 118; D I.20; A IV.55; Miln 124; Vism 418. - pp. upanijjhāyita (q. v.). Upanijjhāyana {Upanijjhayana} [for °nijjhāna] meditation, reflection Miln 127; Vism 418. Upanijjhāyita {Upanijjhayita} [pp. of °nijjhāyati] considered, looked at, thought over or about Sn p. 147 (= diṭṭha, ālokita SnA 508). Upanidhā {Upanidha} (f.) [abstracted from upanidhāya or direct formation fr. upa + ni + dhā?] comparison Nd2 158 (= upamā; should we read upanidhāya?). Pāli Text Society 347 Pāli-English Dictionary Upanidhāya {Upanidhaya} (indecl.) [ger. of upa + nidahati of dhā] comparing in comparison, as prep. w. acc. "compared with" M I.374; III.177 (Himavantaṃ pabbatarājānaṃ); S II.133 (mahāpaṭhaviṃ), 262; V.457 (Sineru-pabbata-rājānaṃ); A III.181 sq.; IV.253 sq. (dibbasukhaṃ); Th 1, 496 (kammaṃ); J II.93; DA I.29, 59, 283. Upanidhi {Upanidhi} (f.) [upa + ni + dhā, cp. nidhi] - 1. deposit, pledge Vin III.51. - 2. comparison, in phrase upanidhiṃ na upeti "does not come into comparison, cannot be compared with" M III.177; S II.263; V.457 (so read for upanidhañ); Ud 23. Upanipajjati {Upanipajjati} [upa + ni + pad] to lie down close to or on top of (acc.) Vism 269; J V.231. Upanibajjhati {Upanibajjhati} see upanibandhati. Upanibaddha {Upanibaddha} [pp. of °nibandhāti] - 1. tied on to Miln 253, 254. - 2. closely connected with, close to Vin III. 308 (Samanta Pāsādikā). - 3. attached to DA I.128. Upanibandha {Upanibandha} [upa + ni + bandh] 1. close connection, dependence Vism 19 (°gocara). - 2. (adj. -°) connected with, dependent on Vism 235 (jīvitaṃ assāsa-passāsa° etc). Upanibandhati {Upanibandhati} [upa + n°) to tie close to, to bind on to, attach M III.132; Miln 254, 412. - Pass. upanibajjhati to be attached to Sn 218. - pp. °nibaddha (q. v.). Upanibandhana {Upanibandhana} (adj. nt.) [upa + n°] (adj.) closely connected with D I.46; DA I.128; (nt.) tie, fetter, leash Miln 253. Upanibbatta {Upanibbatta} [upa + nibbatta] come out, produced DA I.247. Upanibha {Upanibha} (adj. [upa + nibha] somewhat like (-°) M I. 58 = A III.324 (sankha-vaṇṇa°); J I.207 (= sadisa C.); V.302 (tāla°). Upanivattati {Upanivattati} [upa + n°] to return Sn 712; J IV.417; V.126. Upanisā {Upanisa} (f.) [if = Vedic upaniṣad, it would be fr. upa + ni + sad, but if, as is more likely, a contracted form of upanissaya, it would be fr. upa + ni + śri. The history of this word has yet to be written, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & Divy 530 svopaniṣad] - 1. cause, means D II. 217, 259; M III.71 (samādhiṃ sa-upanisaṃ); S II.30-32 (S A. = kāraṇa, paccaya); V.25; A I.198; III.20, 200 sq., 360; IV.99, 336, 351; V.4 sq., 313 sq.; Sn 322 (= upanissaya SnA 331); p. 140 (= kāraṇa, payojana SnA 503); Dh 75 (cp. DhA II.102 aððā nibbānagāminī paṭipadā). - 2. likeness, counterfeit [= Sk. upaniṣad = aupamye Pāṇini I.4, 79] J VI.470 (= paṭirūpaka C.). Upanisīdati {Upanisidati} [upa + nisīdati of sad] to sit close to or down by D I.95; A IV.10; J II.347; Pv IV.163 (ger. °sajja = °sīditvā PvA 242); Vism 269. Upanisevati {Upanisevati} [upa + n°] to pursue, follow, go up after, cling to (acc) M I.306. - pp. upanisevita (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 348 Pāli-English Dictionary Upanisevana {Upanisevana} (adj.) [fr. upanisevati] going close after, following J V.399 [f. °ī.). Upanisevita {Upanisevita} [pp. of upanisevati] gone on to, furnished with, sticking or clinging to, full of J V.302 (kakka°). Upanissaya {Upanissaya} [upa + ni°] basis, reliance, support, foundation, assurance, certainty; esp. sufficing condition or qualification for Arahantship (see long article in Childers s. v.); no 9 in the 24 paccayas, Tikapatthāṇa, Tikapaṭṭhāna I.1, a term only found in the Paṭṭhāna, the Jātaka & later exegetical literature J I.78, 508; IV.96; VI.70; Nett 80; Vism 19 (°gocara), 535 (°paccaya); DhsA 315 (id.); DhA II.33; VvA 98; PvA 38 (sotāpatti-phalassa), 55 (°sampatti); Sdhp 265, 320. Upanissayati [upa + ni°] to depend or rely on (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaṃ). - ger. °nissāya (q. v.); - pp. °nissita (q. v.). {Upanissayati} Upanissāya {Upanissaya} (adv.) [ger. of upanissayati, cp. nissayati in same use & meaning) near, close by (with acc.); depending on, by means of (acc) M II.3; S II.269; Sn 867 (taṃ), 901 (tāpa°), 978, PvA 9 (Rājagahaṃ), 67 (id.); VvA 63 (Rājagaha-seṭṭhiṃ "with"). Cp. BSk. upaniśritya also a ger. formation, in same meaning, e. g. at Divy 54, 207, 505. Upanissita {Upanissita} [upa + ni°] dependent or relying on Sn 877; Nd1 283, Miln 245. Upanīta {Upanita} [pp. of upaneti] 1. brought up to or into (mostly -°) Th 2, 498; Sn 677 (niraye), 774 (dukkha°), 898 (bhava°); J III.45 (thūṇa°); IV.271 (dukkh°); Nd1 38; Dh 237 (°yaya = atikkantavayo DhA III.337, advanced in age); Pv IV.110 (dukkha° made to suffer). an° Sn 846. 2. offered, presented J I.88; PvA 274, 286. - 3. brought to conclusion, brought to an end (of life) J V.375 (= maraṇa-santikaṃ u. C.). - 4. bringing up (for trial), charging M I.251 (vacanapatha, cp. upanīya). Upanīya {Upaniya} (°īyya, °eyya)[ger. of upaneti] "bringing up" (for trial), charging, accusing D I.107 (vadati, cp. DA I. 276); A I.172 (°vācā); cp. upanīta 3. Upanīla {Upanila} (adj.) [upa + nīla] somewhat dark-blue J V.168. Upaneti {Upaneti} [upa + neti] to bring up to, conduce, adduce; to present, give J I.200; Miln 396; DA I.276; PvA 39, 43, 49, 53, 74. - Pass. upanīyati (°niyyati) - 1. to be brought (up to) J IV.398; ppr. °nīyamāna J I.200; PvA 5. - 2. to be brought to conclusion, or to an end (of life) M II.68; S I.2. - 3. to be carried along or away A I.155. - pp. upanīta (q. v.). - ger. upanīya (q. v.). Upanti {Upanti} (adv.) [upa + anti] near, before, in presence of J IV.337. Upantika {Upantika} (adj.) [upa + antika] nt. acc. °ṃ near J IV.337; V.58 (with gen.); VI.418 (so read for °ā); loc. °e near or quite near Pv II.915 (= samīpe gehassa PvA 120). Upapacciyati {Upapacciyati} see uppaccati. Upapajjati {Upapajjati} [doubtful whether a legitimate form as upa + pad or a diaeretic form of uppajjati = ud + pad. In this case all passages ought to go under the latter. Trenckner however Pāli Text Society 349 Pāli-English Dictionary (Notes 77) defends upa° & considers in many cases upp° a substitution for upa. The diaeresis may be due to metre, as nearly all forms are found in poetry. The v. l. upp° is apparently frequent; but it is almost impossible to distinguish between upap° and upp° in the Sinhalese writing, and either the scribe or the reader may mistake one for the other] to get to, be reborn in (acc.); to originate, rise Vin III.20 (nirayaṃ); A III.415; V.292 sq.; Sn 584; It 13 (nirayaṃ), 14 (sugatiṃ; v. l. upp°), 67 (saggaṃ lokaṃ; v. l. upp°); 43 = Dh 307 (nirayaṃ); Dh 126, 140; Pv I.107 (v.l. BB. udapajjatha = uppajja PvA 50); Pug 16, 51, 60; Nett 37, 99, cp. Kvu 611 sq. - pp. upapannā (q. v.). - Caus. upapādeti & pp. upapādita (q. v.). Upapatti {Upapatti} [fr. upa + pad, cp. uppatti] - 1. birth, rebirth, (lit. attainment) M I.82; S III.53; IV.398; A V. 289 sq.; Sn 139, 643, 836; Dh 419 (sattānaṃ); in var. specifications as: deva° rebirth among gods PvA 6, 81; devaloka° A I.115; kāma° existence in the sensuous universe D III.218; It 94; arūpa° in the formless spheres Vbh 172, 267, 296; rūpa°, in the world of form Vbh 171 sq., 263 sq.; 299; niraya° in Purgatory PvA 53. - 2. occasion, opportunity (lit. "coming to"); object for, in dāna° objects suitable for gifts A IV.239 (where 8 enumd., see dāna). -deva a god by birth (or rebirth) VvA 18; also given as uppatti-deva, e. g. at KhA 123. See detail under deva. Upapattika {Upapattika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. upapatti] belonging to a birth or rebirth; in peta° born as a Peta PvA 119. - Cp. upapātika. Upapanna {Upapanna} [pp. of upapajjati] - 1. (-°) possessed of, having attained, being furnished with Sn 68 (thāma-bala), 212, 322, 1077 (ðāṇa°, cp. Nd2 266b and uppanna-ðāṇa). - 2. reborn, come to existence in (with acc.) S I.35 (Avihaṃ, expld. by C. not quite to the point as "nipphattivasena upagata", i. e. gone to A, on account of their perfection. Should we read uppanna?) A V.68. Upaparikkhaṇa {Upaparikkhana} (nt.) = upaparikkhā VvA 232. Upaparikkhati {Upaparikkhati} [upa + pari + īkṣ; cp. BSk. upaparīkṣate Divy 5, 230] to investigate, ascertain, test, examine M I.133, 292, 443; S II.216; III.42, 140; IV.174; J I.489; II.400; V.235; Miln 91, 293; Dāvs V.27; Sdhp 539; PvA 60 (paððāya u. = ðatvā), 140 (= viceyya). Upaparikkhā {Upaparikkha} (f.) [fr. upaparikkhati, cp. BSk. upaparīkṣā Divy 3 etc.] investigation, examination Vin III.314; M II.175 (attha°); A III.381 sq.; IV.221; V.126; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; Nett 8, 42; DA I.171. Upaparikkhin {Upaparikkhin} (adj.) [fr. upaparikkhati] investigating, reflecting, testing S III.61; A IV.221 sq., 296, 328. Cp. BSk. upaparīkṣaka Divy 212. Upapāta {Upapata} = upapatti [but der. fr. pat (cp. uppāda1 = ud + pat but uppāda2 = ud + pad) with the meaning of the casual & unusual] rebirth Vin III.4; S IV.59 (cut°); Pug 50. Upapātika {Upapatika} (adj.) [fr. upapāta but evidently mixed with uppāda1 and uppāda2, cp. upapajjati, upapatti & BSk. upapāduka Av. S II.94, 95; Divy 523] = opapātika i. e. rebirth without parents, as a deva DA on D III.107; ThA 207. Upapādita {Upapadita} [pp. of upapādeti, Caus. of upapajjati] accomplished J II.236. Pāli Text Society 350 Pāli-English Dictionary Upapādeti {Upapadeti} [Caus. of upapajjati] to execute, perform J V.346. Upapāramī {Upaparami} (f.) [upa + pāramī, cp. upa 5] minor perfection Bu I.77 (opp. paramatthapāramī); DhA I.84. Upapisana {Upapisana} [upa + piṣ] grinding, powder, in añjan° powdered ointment (for the eyes) Vin I.203; II.112. Upapurohita {Upapurohita} [upa + purohita, see upa 5] a minor or assistant priest J IV.304. Upapīla {Upapila} at D I.135 read uppīḷa (q. v.). Upapphusati {Upapphusati} [upa + phusati, of spṛś] to touch; aor. upapphusi J V.417, 420. Upaplavati [upa + plavati, cp. uppilavati] to swim or float to (acc.), in uncertain reading as aor. upaplaviṃ at Sn 1145 (dīpā dīpaṃ upaplaviṃ floatcd from land to land; vv. ll. at SnA 606 uppalaviṃ & upallaviṃ; all MSS. of Nd2 p. 54 & no. 160 write upallaviṃ). Perhaps we should better read uppalaviṃ (or upallaviṃ) as diaeretic form for *upplaviṃ, aor. of uppilavati (or uplavati), q. v. Expld. at Nd2 160 by samupallaviṃ. {Upaplavati} Upabbajati {Upabbajati} [upa + vraj] to go to, resort to, visit Th 1, 1052; J IV.270, 295; V.495 (= upagacchati C.); VI.43. Upabbūḷha {Upabbulha} see sam°. Upabrūhaṇa {Upabruhana} (nt.) [fr. upa + bṛh2, cp. BSk. upabṛṃhita Jtm 3195] expansion, increase, augmentation Vism 145; DhsA 117. Upabhunjaka {Upabhunjaka} (adj.) [fr. next] one who eats or enjoys Vism 555. Upabhunjati {Upabhunjati} [upa + bhuj] to enjoy J III.495; V.350 (inf. °bhottuṃ) - grd. upabhogga. pp. upabhattu (q. v.). Upabhutta {Upabhutta} [pp. of upabhunjati] enjoyed Dāvs III.65. Upabhoga {Upabhoga} [fr. upa + bhuj cp. upabhuñjati] enjoyment, profit Vin IV.267; J II.431; IV.219 (v. l. paribhoga); VI. 361; Miln 201, 403; PvA 49, 220 (°paribhoga); DhA IV.7 (id.); Sdhp 268, 341, 547. Upabhogin {Upabhogin} (adj.) [fr. upabhuñjati] enjoying Miln 267. Upabhogga {Upabhogga} (adj.) [Sk. upabhogya, grd. of upabhuñjati] to be enjoyed, enjoyable Miln 201. Upama {Upama} (adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. upa, cp. Lat. summus fr. *(s)ub-mo] "coming quite or nearly up to", i. e. like, similar, equal D I.239 (andha-veṇ°); M I.432 (taruṇ° a young Pāli Text Society 351 Pāli-English Dictionary looking fellow); A IV.11 udak° puggala a man like water); Pv I.11 (khett° like a well cultivated field; = sadisa PvA 7); PvA 2, 8 etc. - Note. ūpama metri causa see ū° and cp. opamma & upamā. Upamā {Upama} (f.) [f. of upama in abstract meaning] likeness, simile, parable, example (cp. formula introducing u. S II. 114; M I.148); Sn 705 (cp. Dh 129, 130), 1137 (= upanidhā sadisaṃ paṭibhāgo Nd2 158); It 114; Vism 341, 478, 512, 582 sq., 591 sq.; PvA 29, 112 (dhen°); SnA 329, 384; Sdhp 29, 44, 259. -vacana expression of comparison (usually applied to part. evaṃ) SnA 13, 472; KhA 185, 195, 208, 212; PvA 25. Upamāna {Upamana} (nt.) [fr. upa + mā] comparison, the 2nd part of the comparison J V.341; VvA 13. Upamānita {Upamanita} [pp. of caus. upa + mā] measured out, likened, like, comparable Th 2, 382 (= sadisa ThA 255). Upameti {Upameti} [upa + mā] to measure one thing by another, to compare J VI.252; Vism 314 (°metvā, read °netvā?). Upameyya {Upameyya} (adj.) [grd. of upa + mā] to be compared, that which is to be likened or compared, the 1st part of a comparison VvA 13. Upaya {Upaya} [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. (-°) in an° (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached S I.141, 181; II.284; Sn 786, 787, 897 (cp. SnA 558); and in rūpûpaya (vv. ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya) "clinging to form" (etc.) S III.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (+ rupɔārammaṇa). Upayācati {Upayacati} [upa + yācati] to beg, entreat, pray to J VI. 150 (divyaṃ). Upayācitaka {Upayacitaka} (nt.) [of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati] begging, asking, praying, propitiation J VI.150 (= devatānaṃ āyācana). Upayāti {Upayati} [upa + yāti of yā] to go to, to approach S I.76; II.118 (also Caus. °yāpeti); Dpvs VI.69; Sdhp 579. Upayāna {Upayana} (nt.) [fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 3163] nearing, approach, arrival D I.10; DA I.94. Upayānaka {Upayanaka} [fr. upayāna] a crab J VI.530. Upayuñjati [upa + yuj] to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna VvA 245 (preferably be read as °bhuðjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food). {Upayunjati} Upayoga {Upayoga} [fr. upa + yuj] connection, combination; employment, application J VI.432 (nagare upayogaṃ netvā for use in the town? v. l. upabhogaṃ). Usually in cpd. °vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis SnA 386; KhA 236; PvA 73, 135; or the acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi-vacana SnA 127; PvA Pāli Text Society 352 Pāli-English Dictionary 102; bhumma° SnA 140; KhA 116; karaṇa° SnA 148; sampadāna° J V.214; SnA 317; itthambhūta° SnA 441; nissakka° J V.498. Uparacita {Uparacita} [pp. of upa + rac] formed ThA 211; Sdhp 616. Uparajja {Uparajja} (nt.) [upa + rajja, cp. uparaja] viceroyalty A III. 154 (v. l. opa°); J I.511; IV.176; DA I.134. Uparata {Uparata} [pp. of uparamati] having ceased, desisting from (-°), restraining oneself (cp. orata) Vin I.245 (ratt-ûparata abstaining from food at night = ratti-bhojanato uparata DA I.77); D I.5 (id.); M I.319 (bhaya°); Sn 914 (= virata etc. Nd1 337); Miln 96, 307; DhsA 403 (vihiṃs°). Uparati {Uparati} (f.) [fr. upa + ram] ceasing, resting; cessation M I.10; S IV.104; Miln 274. Uparamati {Uparamati} [upa + ram] to cease, desist, to be quiet J III. 489; V.391 (v. l. for upāramati, also in C.); Miln 152. Uparamā {Uparama} (f.) [cp. lit. Sk. uparama, to uparamati] cessation Miln 41, 44 (an°). Uparava {Uparava} [fr. upa + ru] noise J II.2. Uparājā {Uparaja} [upa + rājā; see upa 5] a secondary or deputy king, a viceroy J I.504; II.316; DhA I.392. Upari {Upari} (indecl.) [Vedic upari, der. fr. upa, Idg. *uper(i); Gr. uper, Lat. s-uper; Goth. ufar, Ohg. ubir = Ger. über E. over; Oir. for] over, above (prep. & prefix) 1. (adv.) on top, above (opp. adho below) Vin IV.46 (opp. heṭṭhā); J VI.432; KhA 248 (= uddhaṃ; opp. adho); SnA 392 (abtimukho u. gacchati explaining paccuggacchati of Sn 442); PvA 11 (heṭṭhā manussasaṇṭhānaṃ upari sūkara-s°), 47 (upari chattaṃ dhāriyamāna), 145 (sabbattha upari upon everything). - 2. (prep. w. gen) with ref. either to space = on top of, on, upon, as in kassa upari sāpo patissati on whom shall the curse fall? DhA I 41; attano u. patati falls upon himself PvA 45; etissā upari kodho anger on her, i. e. against her VvA 68; or to time = on top of, after, later, as in catunnaṃ māsānaṃ upari after 4 months PvA 52 (= uddhaṃ catūhi māsehi of Pv I.1012); sattannaṃ vassa-satānaṃ upari after 700 years PvA 144. - 3. (adv. in compn., meaning "upper, higher, on the upper or top side", or "on top of", if the phrase is in loc. case. See below. -cara walking in the air, suspended, flying J III.454. -pāsāda the upper story of a palace, loc. on the terrace D I.112 (loc.); PvA 105, 279. -piṭṭhi top side, platform Vin II 207 (loc). -bhaddaka N. of a tree [either Sk. bhadraka Pinus Deodara, or bhadra Nauclea Cadamba, after Kern, Toev. s. v.] J VI.269. -bhāga the upper part; used in instr., loc or aor. in sense of "above, over, beyond" J IV.232 (instr.). -bhāva higher state or condition M I.45 (opp. adh°). -mukha face upwards DA I. 228; Pug A 214. -vasana upper garment PvA 49. -vāta higher than the wind, loc. on the wind J II.11; or in °passe (loc.) on the upper (wind-) side DhA II.17. -visāla extended on top, i. e. of great width, very wide J III.207. -vehāsa high in the air (°-), in °kuṭī a lofty or open air chamber, or a room in the upper story of the Vihāra Vin IV.46 (what the C. means by expln. majjhimassa purisassa asīsa-ghaṭṭā "not knocking against the head of a middle-(sized) man" is not quite clear). -sacca higher truth PvA 66 (so read for upari sacca). Pāli Text Society 353 Pāli-English Dictionary Upariṭṭha {Uparittha} (adj.) [superl. formation fr. upari in analogy to seṭṭha] highest, topmost, most excellent Th 1, 910. Cp. next. Upariṭṭhima {Uparitthima} (adj) [double-superl. formation after analogy of seṭṭha, pacchima & heṭṭhima: heṭṭhā] = upariṭṭha & uparima Dhs 1016, 1300, 1401; Pug 16, 17 (saðyojanāni = uddhaṃbhāgiya-saðyojanāni Pug A 198). Uparima {Uparima} (adj.) [upari + ma, superl. formation] uppermost, above, overhead D III.189 (disā); Nett 88. Cp. upariṭṭhima. Upariya {Upariya} (adv.) [fr. upari] above, on top, in compd. heṭṭh° below and above Vism 1. Uparujjhati [Sk. uparudhyate, Pass. of uparundhati] to be stopped, broken, annihilated, destroyed D I.223; Th 1, 145; It 106; Sn 724, 1036, 1110; Nd2 159 (= nirujjhati vūpasammati atthangacchati); Miln 151; Sdhp 280. - pp. uparuddha. {Uparujjhati} Uparuddha {Uparuddha} [pp. of uparujjhati] stopped, ceased Miln 151 (°jīvita). Uparundhati {Uparundhati} [upa + rudh] to break up, hinder, stop, keep in check M I.243; J I.358; Th 1, 143, 1117; Sn 118, 916 (pot. uparundhe, but uparuddhe Nd1 346 = uparuddheyya etc.); Miln 151, 245, 313. - ger. uparundhiya Th 1, 525; Sn 751; aor. uparundhi J IV.133; PvA 271. Pass. uparujjhati (q. v.). Uparūḷha {Uparulha} [upa + rūḷha, pp. of ruh] grown again, recovered J IV.408 (cakkhu). Uparocati {Uparocati} [upa + ruc] to please (intrs.) J vI.64. Uparodati {Uparodati} [upa + rud] 1. to lament J VI.551 (fut °rucchati) - 2. to sing in a whining tone J V.304. Uparodha {Uparodha} [fr. upa + rudh] obstacle; breaking up, destruction, end J III.210, 252; Pv IV.15; Miln 245, 313. Uparodhana {Uparodhana} (nt.) [fr. upa + rudh] breaking up, destruction Sn 732, 761. Uparodheti {Uparodheti} [Caus of uparundhati] to cause to break up; to hinder, stop; destroy Vin III.73. Uparopa {Uparopa} [upa + ropa, cp. upa 5] "little plant", sapling Vin II.154. See also next. Uparopaka {Uparopaka} = uparopa, sapling J II.345; IV.359. Upala {Upala} [Lit. Sk. upala, etym. uncertain] a stone Dāvs III.87. Upalakkhaṇā {Upalakkhana} (f.) & °aṃ (nt.) [upa + lakkhaṇa] discrimination S III.261 (an°); Dhs 16, 20, 292, 1057; Pug 25; VvA 240. Pāli Text Society 354 Pāli-English Dictionary Upalakkheti {Upalakkheti} [upa + lakṣay] to distinguish, discriminate Vism 172. Upaladdha {Upaladdha} [pp. of upalabhati] acquired, got, found J VI. 211 (°bāla; v. l. paluddha°); Sdhp 4, 386. Upaladdhi {Upaladdhi} (f.) [fr. upa + labh] acquisition; knowledge Miln 268; VvA 279. Upalabhati {Upalabhati} [upa + labh] to receive, get, obtain to find, make out Miln 124 (kāraṇaṃ); usually in Pass. upalabbhati to be found or got, to be known; to exist M I.138 (an°); S I.135; IV.384; Sn 858; Pv II.111 (= paccanubhavīyati PvA 146); Kvu 1, 2; Miln 25; PvA 87. Upalāpana {Upalapana} (nt.) [fr. upa + lap] talking over or down, persuasion; diplomacy, humbug D II.76; Miln 115, 117. Upalāpeti {Upalapeti} [Caus. of upa + lap] to persuade, coax, prevail upon, talk over, cajole Vin I.119; III.21; J II.266; III.265; IV.215; PvA 36, 46, 276. Upalāḷita {Upalalita} [pp. of upalāḷeti] caressed, coaxed Sdhp 301. Upalāḷeti {Upalaleti} [Caus. of upa + lal; cp. BSk. upalāḍayati Divy 114, 503]. - 1. to caress, coax, fondle, win over J II. 267; Vism 300; Sdhp 375. - 2. to boast of, exult in J II.151. - pp. upalāḷita (q. v.). Upaḷāseti {Upalaseti} [upa + Caus. of las] to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) D II.337 (for uppaḷāseti? q. v.). Upalikkhati {Upalikkhati} [upa + likh] to scratch, scrape, wound A III. 94 sq. (= vijjhati C.). Upalitta {Upalitta} [pp. of upalimpati] smeared with (-°), stained, tainted Th 2, 467 (cp. ThA 284; T. reads apalitta); Pug 56. Usually neg. an° free from taint, undefiled M I.319, 386; Miln 318; metri causa anûpalitta S I.141; II.284; Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353 (cp. DhA IV.7). Upalippati {Upalippati} [Pass. of upalimpati] to be defiled; to stick to, hang on to Sn 547, 812; J III.66 (= allīyati C.); Miln 250, 337. Upalimpati {Upalimpati} [upa + lip] to smear, defile D II.18; Vin III. 312; J I.178; IV.435; Miln 154. Pass. upalippati, pp. upalitta (q. v.). Upalepa {Upalepa} [fr. upa + lip] defilement J IV.435. Upalohitaka {Upalohitaka} (adj. [upa + lohita + ka, see upa 5] reddish J III.21 (= rattavaṇṇa C.). Upallaviṃ {Upallavim} Sn 1145 see upaplavati. Upavajja {Upavajja} (adj.) [grd. of upavadati] blameworthy S IV.59, 60; A II.242. an° blameless, without fault S IV.57 sq; A IV.82; Miln 391. Pāli Text Society 355 Pāli-English Dictionary Upavajjatā {Upavajjata} (f.) [abstr. fr. upavajja] blameworthiness S IV. 59 (an°). Upavqaṇṇeti {Upavqanneti} [upa + vaṇṇeti] to describe fully Sdhp 487. Upavattati {Upavattati} [upa + vṛt] to come to pass, to take place J VI.58. Upavadati {Upavadati} [upa + vad] to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame D I.90; S III.125 (attā sīlato na upav.); A II.121 (id.); V.88; J II.196; PvA 13. Upavana {Upavana} (nt.) [upa + vana, see upa 5] a kind of wood, miniature wood, park J IV.431; V.249; Miln 1; VvA 170 (= vana), 344; ThA 201; PvA 102 (ārām°), 177 (mahā°). Upavasati {Upavasati} [upa + vasiti]. - 1. to dwell in or at J III.113; DA I.139. - 2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaṃ upavasati to observe the fast day S I.208; A I.142, 144, 205; Sn 402 (ger. upavassa); J III.444; SnA 199; PvA 209. - pp. upavuttha (q. v.). See also uposatha. Upavāda {Upavada} [fr. upa + vad] insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd1 386; PvA 269; an° (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dh 185 (anûpa° metri causa). Upavādaka {Upavadaka} (adj.) [fr. upavāda] blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaṃ u. insulting the gentle Vin III.5; A I.256; III.19; IV.178; V.68; It 58, 99. - an° Ps I.115; Pug 60. Upavādin {Upavadin} (adj. [fr. upavāda] = upavādaka; in ariy° S I. 225; II.124; V.266; Pv IV.339. an° M I.360. Upavāyati {Upavayati} [upa + vāyati] to blow on or towards somebody M I.424; A IV.46; Th 1, 544; Pv III.66; Miln 97. Upavāsa {Upavasa} [fr. upa + vas, see upavasati] keeping a prescribed day, fasting, self-denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e. g. at Av. Ś I.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭānga-samanvāgataṃ upavāsaṃ upavasati] A V.40 (? uncertain; vv. ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); J VI.508; SnA 199 (in expln. of uposatha). Upavāsita {Upavasita} (adj.) (upa + vāsita] perfumed PvA 164 (for gandha-samerita). Upavāhana {Upavahana} (nt.) [upa + vāhana] carrying away, washing away Sn 391 (sanghāṭi-rajûpa° = paṃsu-malādino sanghāṭirajassa dhovanaṃ SnA 375). Upavicāra [upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsld on p. 704 in Notes by "perplexed by doubts" (?)] applying (one's mind) to, discrimination D III.245 (domanass°); M III.239; S IV.232 (somanass° etc.); A III.363 sq.; V.134; Ps I.17; Dh 8, 85, 284; Vbh 381. {Upavicara} 356 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Upavijaññā {Upavijanna} (f.) (adj.) [grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya] about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth M I.384; Th 2, 218; Ud 13; Dāvs III.38; ThA 197. Upavisati {Upavisati} [upa + visati] to come near, to approach a person J IV.408; V.377; aor. upāvisi Sn 415, 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaṃ gantvā nisīdi SnA 384). Upavīna {Upavina} [upa + vīṇā] the neck of a lute S IV. 197; Miln 53. Upavīta {Upavita} [?] covered (?) at VvA 8 in phrase "vettalatādīhi upavītaṃ āsanaṃ" should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll. uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)? Upavīyati {Upaviyati} [Pass. of upa + vā2 to weave] te be woven J VI.26. Upavuttha {Upavuttha} [pp. of upavasati] celebrated, kept (of a fastday) A I.211 (uposatha); Sn 403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha. Upavhyati {Upavhyati} [upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati] to invoke, call upon D II.259; S I.168. Upasaṃvasati {Upasamvasati} [upa + saṃ + vas] to live with somebody, to associate with (acc.) J I.152. Upasaṃharaṇa (nt.) [fr. upasaṃharati] drawing together, bringing up to, comparison Vism 232 sq.; J V.186. {Upasamharana} Upasaṃharati {Upasamharati} [upa + saṃ + hṛ] - 1. to collect, bring together, heap up, gather Miln 132. - 2. to dispose, arrange, concentrate, collect, focus Vin IV.220 (kāyaṃ); M I.436 (cittaṃ), 468 (cittaṃ tathattāya); S V.213 sq. (id.); DhsA 309 (cakkhuṃ). - 3. to take hold of, take care of, provide, serve, look after Miln 232. Upasaṃhāra {Upasamhara} [fr. upa + saṃ + hṛ] taking hold of, taking up, possession, in devat° being seized or possessed by a god Miln 298. Upasaṃhita {Upasamhita} (adj.) [pp. of upa + saṃ + dhā] accompanied by, furnished or connected with (-°) D I.152; M I.37, 119 (chand°); S II.220 (kusal°); IV.60 (kām°), 79 (id.); Sn 341 (rāg°), 1132 (giraṃ vaṇṇ° = vaṇṇena upetaṃ Nd2); Th 1, 970; J I.6; II.134, 172; V.361. Upasankamati {Upasankamati} [upa + saṃ + kram, cp. BSk. upasankramati Av. S. I.209] - 1. to go up to (with acc.), to approach, come near; freq. in stock phrase "yena (Pokkharasādissa parivesanā) tenɔ upasankami, upasankamitvā paððatte āsane nisīdiɔ', e. g. Vin I.270; D I.109; II.1, and passim. - aor. °sankami Pv. II.210; SnA 130, 140; KhA 116; PvA 88; ger. °sankamitvā SnA 140; PvA 6, 12, 19, 20, 88; °sankamma Sn 166, 418, 460, 980, 986; inf. °sankamituṃ PvA 79. . 2. to attend on (as a physician), to treat Miln 169, 233, 353; DA I.7. Upasankamana {Upasankamana} (nt.) [fr. upasankamati] going near, approach M II.176; S V.67 = It 107; PvA 232. Pāli Text Society Upasankheyya 357 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [grd of upa + sankharoti] to be prepared, produced or contracted Sn 849 (= °sankhātabba SnA 549; cp. Nd1 213). {Upasankheyya} Upasagga {Upasagga} [Sk upasarga, of upa + sṛj] - 1. attack, trouble, danger Vin I.33; A I.101; Th 2, 353; Dh 139 (where spelt upassaga, cp. DhA III.70); Miln 418. - 2. (tt. g.) prefix, preposition J II.67 (saṃ), 126 (apa); III.121 (ni, pa); DA I.245 (adhi); KhA 101 (sa° and an°); PvA 88 (atthe nipāto a particle put in metri causa, expln. of handa); DhsA 163, 405. Upasaṇṭhapanā {Upasanthapana} (f.) [fr. upa + sanṭḥapeti] stopping, causing to cease, settling Pug 18 (see also an°). Upasanta {Upasanta} [pp. of upa + śam, cp. upasammati] calmed, composed, tranquil, at peace M I.125; S I.83, 162; A III. 394; Sn 848, 919, 1087, 1099; Nd1 210, 352, 434; Nd2 161; Dh 201, 378; Miln 394; DhA III.260; IV.114; PvA 132 (= santa). Upasama {Upasama} [Sk. upaśama, upa + śam] calm, quiet, appeasement, allaying, assuagement, tranquillizing Vin I 10 = S IV.331 = V.421 (in freq. phrase upasamāya abhiððāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati; see nibbāna III.7); D I.50; III.130 sq., 136 sq., 229 (as one of the 4 objects of adhiṭṭhāna, viz. paððā° sacca° cāga° upasama°); M I. 67; III.246; S I.30, 34 (sīlena), 46 citta-vûpasama), 48, 55; II.223, 277; III.86 (sankhārānaṃ . . . v-ūpasamo) D II. 157; S I.158 (see vūpasama and sankhāra); (ariyaṃ maggaṃ dukkh°-gāminaṃ); IV.62, 331; V.65 (avūpasama), 179, 234 (°gāmin), 378 sq.; A I.3 (avūpasama), 30, 42; II.14 (vitakk°); III.325 sq.; V.216, 238 sq.; Sn 257, 724, 735, 737; It 18 (dukkh°) 83; Dh 205; Nd1 351; J I.97; Ps I.95; Miln 170, 248; Vism 197 (°ānussati); Sdhp 587. Cp. vi° (vū°). Upasamati [upa + śam in trs. meaning for usual sammati in intrs. meaning] to appease, calm, allay, assuage Sn 919; Th 1, 50 (pot. upasame = upasameyya nibbāpeyya Nd1 352). - pp. upasanta q. v.). {Upasamati} Upasamāna {Upasamana} (nt.) = upasama Th 1, 421; Sdhp 335 (dukkh°). Upasampajjati {Upasampajjati} [upa + sampajjati] to attain, enter on, acquire, take upon oneself usually in ger. upasampajja M I.89; S III.8; A IV.13; V.69; Dhs 160 (see DhsA 167); DA I.313; SnA 158. - pp. upasampanna (q. v.). Upasampadā {Upasampada} (f.) [fr. upa + saṃ + pad] - 1. taking, acquiring; obtaining, taking upon oneself, undertaking D II.49; M I.93; A III.65; Dh 183 (cp. DhA III.236); Nett 44 (kusalassa). - 2. (in special sense) taking up the bhikkhuship, higher ordination, admission to the privileges of recognized bhikkhus [cp. BSk. upasampad & °padā Divy 21, 281 etc.] Vin I.12, 20, 95, 146 and passim; III.15; IV.52; D I.176, 177, 202; S I.161; A IV.276 sq. & passim; DhA II.61 (pabbajjā +); PvA 54 (laddh° one who has received ordination), 179 (id.). Upasampanna {Upasampanna} [pp. of upasampajjati] obtained, got, received; in special sense of having attained the recognition of bhikkhuship, ordained [cp. BSk. upasampanna Divy 281] S I.161; A V.70; Vin III.24; IV.52, 130; Miln 13. Pāli Text Society 358 Pāli-English Dictionary Upasampādeti {Upasampadeti} [Denom. fr. upasampadā] 1. to attain to, obtain, produce DhsA 167 (= nipphādeti). - 2. to admit to bhikkhuship, to ordain Vin IV.130, 226, 317 (= vutṭhāpeti); grd. °etabba Vin I.64 sq.; IV.48; A V.72. Upasamphassati {Upasamphassati} [upa + sam + spṛś] to embrace J V.297. Upasammati {Upasammati} [Sk. upasamyati, upa + śam in intrs. function] to grow calm, to cease, to be settled or composed, to be appeased S I.62, 221; Dh 100 sq. Upasavyāna {Upasavyana} (nt.?) [?] "a robe worn over the left shoulder" (Hardy, Index to ed.) VvA 166 (v. l. upavasavya). Upasiṃsaka {Upasimsaka} (adj.). [fr. upa + siṃsati = śaṃs, cp. āsiṃsaka] striving after, longing or wishing for Miln 393 (āhār°; Morris J P T S. 1884, 75 proposes reading upasinghaka). Upasinghaka {Upasinghaka} (adj.) [fr. upa + singh] sniffing after J II. 339; III.144; Miln 393 (? see upasiṃsaka). Upasinghati {Upasinghati} [upa + singh] - 1. to sniff at S I.204 (padumaṃ); I.455; J II.339, 408; VI.336. - 2. to sniff up Vin I.279. - Caus. āyati to touch gently KhA 136. Caus. II. apeti to touch lightly, to stroke J IV.407. Upasinghita {Upasinghita} [pp. of upasinghati] scented, smelled at (loc.) J VI.543 (sisaṃhi, C. for upagghata). Upasussati {Upasussati} [upa + sussati] to dry up M I.481; Sn 433; J I.71. Upasecana {Upasecana} (nt.) [fr. upa + sic] sprinkling over, i. e. sauce Th 1, 842; J II.422; III.144; IV.371 (maṃs°); VI.24. See also nandi° & maṃsa°. Upaseniyā {Upaseniya} (f.) [Sk. upa + either śayanika of śayana, or sayaniya of śī] (a girl) who likes to be always near (her mother), a pet, darling, fondling J VI.64 (=mātaraṃ upagantvā sayanika C.). Upasevati {Upasevati} [upa + sev] - 1. to practice, frequent, pursue Miln 355. - 2. to serve, honour, Sn 318 (°amāna). - pp. upasevita (q. v.). Upasevanā {Upasevana} (f.) [abstr. fr. upasevati] serving, pursuing, following, service, honouring, pursuit S III.53 = Nd1 25 = Nd2 570 (nand° pleasure-seeking); It 68 (bāl° & dhīr°); Sn 249 (utu° observance of the seasons); Miln 351. Upasevita {Upasevita} [pp. of upasevati] visited, frequented PvA 147 (for sevita). Upasevin {Upasevin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. upasevati] pursuing, following, going after A III.136 (vyatta°); Miln 264 (rāj°); DhA III.482 (para-dār°). Pāli Text Society 359 Pāli-English Dictionary Upasobhati {Upasobhati} [upa + śubh] to appear beautiful, to shine forth Th 1, 1080. - Caus.°sobheti to make beautiful, embellish, adorn Vv 526; J V.132; PvA 153. - pp. upasobhita (q. v.). Upasobhita {Upasobhita} [pp. of upasobheti] embellished, beautified, adorned PvA 153, 187; Sdhp 593. Upassagga {Upassagga} see upasagga. Upassaṭṭha {Upassattha} [Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj] "thrown upon", overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed S IV.29; A III.226 (udak°); J I.61; II.239. Upassaya {Upassaya} [fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S I.32, 33; Vv 684; Miln 160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni° or bhikkhun° a nunnery Vin II.259; IV.265, 292; S II.215; J I.147, 428; Miln 124. Upassāsa {Upassasa} [upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas] breathing J I.160. Upassuti {Upassuti} (f.) [fr. upa + śru] listening to, attention S II. 75; IV.91; J V.100; Miln 92. Upassutika {Upassutika} (adj.) [fr. upassuti] one who listens, an eavesdropper J V.81. Upahacca {Upahacca} (°-) [ger. of upahanti] - 1. spoiling, impairing, defiling J V.267 (manaṃ) - 2. reducing, cutting short; only in phrase upahacca-parinibbāyin "coming to extinction after reducing the time of rebirths (or after having almost reached the destruction of life") S V.70, 201 sq.; A I.233 sq.; IV.380; Pug 17 (upagantvā kālakiriyaṃ āyukkhayassa āsane ṭhatvā ti attho Pug A 199); Nett 190. - The term is not quite clear; there seems to have existed very early confusion with upapacca > upapajja > uppajja, as indicated by BSk. upapadya-parinirvāyin, and by remarks of C. on Kvu 268, as quoted at Kvu trsln. 158, 159. Upahaññati {Upahannati} [Pass. of upahanti] to be spoilt or injured Sn 584; J IV.14; Miln 26. Upahata {Upahata} [pp. of upahanti] injured, spoilt; destroyed D I.86 (phrase khata + upahata); S I.238 (na sûpahata "not easily put out" trsl.); II 227; A I.161; Dh 134; J VI. 515; Miln 223, 302; DhA II.33 (an°). The formula at D I.86 (khata+upahata) is doubtful as to its exact meaning. According to Bdhgh it means "one who has destroyed his foundation of salvation," i.e. one who cannot be saved. Thus at DA I.237: "bhinna-patiṭṭho jāto," i.e. without a basis. Cp. remarks under khata. The trsln at Dial. I.95 gives it as "deeply affected and touched in heart": doubtful. The phrase upahaccaparinibbāyin may receive light from upahata. Upahattar {Upahattar} [Sk. *upahartṛ, n. ag. of upa + hṛ] a bringer (of) M I.447 sq. Upahanti {Upahanti} (& °hanati J I.454) [upa + han] to impair, injure; to reduce, cut short; to destroy, only in ger. upahacca; pp. upahata & Pass. upahaññati (q. v.). Upaharaṇa {Upaharana} (nt.) [fr. upa + hṛ] - 1. presentation; luxury J I.231. - 2. taking, seizing J VI.198. Pāli Text Society 360 Pāli-English Dictionary Upaharati {Upaharati} [upa + hṛ] to bring, offer, present A II.87; III. 33; Dh I.301, 302; J V.477. Upahāra {Upahara} [fr. upa + hṛ] bringing forward, present, offering, gift Vin III.136 (āhār°) A II.87; III.33; V.66 (mett°); J I.47; IV.455; VI.117; DA I.97. Upahiṃsati {Upahimsati} [upa + hiṃs] to injure, hurt Vin II.203; J IV.156. Upāgacchati [upa + ā + gam] to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgaðchi Cp I 1010, pl. upāgaðchuṃ Sn 1126; or upāgami Sn 426, 685, pl. upāgamuṃ Sn 302, 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha PvA 64 (so read for upagaccha). - pp. upāgata. {Upagacchati} Upāgata {Upagata} [pp. of upāgacchati] come to, having reached or attained Sn 1016; PvA 117 (yakkhattaṃ); Sdhp 280. Upāta {Upata} [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā "taken up"; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884, 75 = uppāta "flying up"] thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Th 1, 675. Upātigacchati {Upatigacchati} [upa + ati + gacchati] to "go out over", to surpass, overcome, only in 3rd sg. pret. upaccagā Sn 333, 636, 641, 827; Th 1, 181; 2, 4; J I.258; VI.182; & 3rd pl. upaccaguṃ S I.35; A III.311; J III.201. Upātidhāvati {Upatidhavati} [upa + ā + dhāvati] to run on or in to Ud 72. Upātipanna {Upatipanna} [pp. of upātipajjati, upa + ā + pad] fallen into, a prey to (with loc.) Sn 495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta SnA 415). Upātivatta {Upativatta} [pp. of upātivattati] gone beyond, escaped from, free from (with acc.) S I.143; A II.15; Sn 55, 474, 520, 907; J III.7, 360; Fd1 322 = Nd2 163. Cp. BSk. upātivṛtta in same sense at M Vastu III.281. Upātivattati {Upativattati} [upa + ati + vattati] to go beyond, overstep M I.327; Sn 712 (v. l. for upanivattati); Nett 49. - pp. upātivatta (q. v.). Upādā {Upada} (adv.) [shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning] lit. "taking up", i. e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary, derived (of rūpa form) Dhs 877, 960, 1210; Vism 275, 444 (24 fold); DhsA 215, 299, 333, cp. Dhs trsln. 127, 197. Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā) as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning "not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)", not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q. v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaṃ "unsupported emancipation" M I.148; S IV.48; V.29; DhA I.286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release A V.64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattassɔetaṃ nāmaṃ); Vin V.164; Ps II.45 sq.; a. vimutto D I.17 (= kinci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvā vimutto DA I.109); cp. M III.227 (paritassanā). Upādāna {Upadana} (nt.) [fr. upa + ā + dā] - (lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. (-°) supported by, drawing one's existence from S I.69; II 85 (aggikkhandho °assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); Pāli Text Society 361 Pāli-English Dictionary V.284 (vāt°); J III.342 sa-upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel S IV.399; anupādāna without fuel DhA II.163. - 2. (appld.) "drawing upon", grasping, holding on, grip, attachment; adj. (-°) finding one's support by or in, clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs trsln. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām°, diṭṭh°, sīlabbat°, attavād° or the graspings arising from sense-desires, speculation, belief in rites, belief in the soul-theory D II.58; III.230; M I.51, 66; S II.3; V 59; Dhs 1213; Ps I.129; II.46, 47; Vbh 375; Nett 48; Vism 569. - For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: D I.25; II.31, 33, 56; III.278; M I.66, 136 (attavād°) 266; S II.14, 17, 30, 85; III.10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; IV.32, 87 sq., 102 (tannissitaṃ viððāṇaṃ tadupādānaṃ), 390, 400 (= taṇhā); A IV.69; V.111 (upāy°); Sn 170, 358, 546; Ps I.51 sq., 193; II.45 sq, 113; Vbh 18, 30, 67, 79, 119, 132; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; DhA IV.194. - sa° full of attachment (to life) M I.65; Vin III.111; S IV.102; an° unattached, not showing attachment to existence S IV.399; Vin III.111; Th 1, 840; Miln 32; DA I.98. -kkhandha, usually as pañcɔ upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the "fivefold clinging to existence" [cp. BSk. pañcɔ u°-skandhāḥ Av. Ś II.1681 & note] D II.35, 301 sq.; III.223, 286; M I.61, 144, 185; III.15, 30, 114, 295; Ps II.109 sq.; Vbh 101; Vism 505 (khandha-pañcaka). See for detail khandha II.B 2. -kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment S II.54; A III.376 sq.; Sn 475, 743; It 75. -nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj. founded on or caused by attachment Ps II.111; Vbh 135 sq. -nirodha destruction of "grasping" Vin I.1 (in formula of paṭicca-samuppāda); S II.7; III.14; A I.177. -paccaya = °nidāna S II.5; III 94; Sn 507, 742. Upādāniya {Upadaniya} (adj.) [fr. upādāna, for *upādānika > °aka] belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs trsln. 203, 322. - S II.84; III.47; IV.89, 108; Dhs 584, 1219, 1538; Vbh 12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326. Upādāya {Upadaya} (adv.) [ger. of upādiyati] - 1. (as prep. with acc.) lit. "taking it up" (as such & such), i. e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaṃ upādāya out of pity or mercy D I.204; PvA 61, 141, 164. - (b) compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to D I.205 (kālað ca samayañ ca acc. to time & convenience); DhA I.391; VvA 65 (paṃsucuṇṇaṃ); PvA 268 (manussalokaṃ). The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e. g. at Divy 25, 359, 413; Av. Ś I.255. - 2. (ic same meaning & application as upādā, i. e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term "hanging on to", i. e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vbh 12, 67 etc.; Nd1 266. Usually as anupādāya "not clinging to", without any (further) clinging (to rebirth), emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt-anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a. nibbuta completely emancipated S II.279; A I.162; IV. 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin I.14 (a. cittaṃ vimuccati) 182 (id.); S II.187 sq.; IV.20, 107; V.317; Dh 89 = S V.24 (ādānapaṭi-nisagge a. ye ratā); Dh 414; Sn 363; It 94 (+ aparitassato). Upādi {Upadi} ° [the compn.-from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in °a & °ā which change their a to i in compn. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr. dā analogous to °dhi fr. dhā in upadhi] = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of "stuff of life", substratum of being, khandha; only in combn. with °sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S V.129, 181; A III.143; It 40; Vism 509. More frequently neg. an-upādi-sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi-vimukti M Vastu I.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin II.239 (nibbāna-dhātu); D III.135; M I.148 (parinibbāna); A II.120; IV.75 sq., 202, 313; J I.28, 55; Sn 876; It 39, 121 (nibbāna-dhātu); Ps. I.101; Vism 509; DhA IV.108 (nibbāna); VvA 164, 165. Opp. saupādisesa A Pāli Text Society 362 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn 354 (opp. nibbāyi); Vism 509; Nett 92. See further ref. under nibbāna & parinibbāna. Upādiṇṇa {Upadinna} [for °ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati2 instead of ādiyati1] grasped at, laid hold of; or "the issue of grasping", i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs trsln. 201, 324. - Dhs 585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh 2 sq., 326, 433; Vism 349, 451; an° Vin III.113; Dhs 585, 991, 1212, 1535. Upādiṇṇaka {Upadinnaka} (adj,) = upādiṇṇa DhsA 311, 315, 378; Vism 398. Upādiyati [upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati1] to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna D II.292; M I.56, 67; S II.14; III.73, 94, 135; IV. 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Sn 752, 1103, 1104; Nd1 444 (= ādeti); Nd2 164. ppr. upādiyaṃ S IV. 24 = 65 (an°); - ppr. med. upādiyamāna S III.73; SnA 409, & upādiyāna (°ādiyāno) Sn 470; Dh 20. - ger. upādāya in lit. meaning "taking up" J I.30; Miln 184, 338, 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep. see separately as also upādā and upādiyitvā VvA 209; DA I.109 (an°); DhA IV.194 (an°). - pp. upādiṇṇa (q. v.). {Upadiyati} Upādhi {Upadhi} [fr. upa + ā + dhā] 1. cushion J VI.253. - 2. supplement, ornament (?), in °ratha "the chariot with the outfit", expld. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper J VI.22. Upādhiya {Upadhiya} [fr. upāhi] being furnished with a cushion J VI. 252 (adj.). Upāya {Upaya} [fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S III.53 sq., 58; D III.220 (°kosalla); Sn 321 (°ððū); J I.256; Nd2 570 (for upaya); PvA 20, 31, 39, 45, 104, 161; Sdhp 10, 12. 350, 385. - Cases adverbially; instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA 93; yena kenaci u. PvA 113. - abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow J III.443; V.401 (= upāyena C.). - anupāya wrong means J I.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for S I.181; M III.25. -kusala clever in resource J I.98; Nett 20; SnA 274. Upāyatta {Upayatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāya] a means of (-°) VvA 84 (paṭipajjan°). Upāyana {Upayana} (nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; VI. 327; Miln 155, 171, 241; Sdhp 616, 619. Upāyāsa {Upayasa} [upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M I.8, 144, 363; III.237; A I.144, 177, 203 (sa°); II.123, 203; III.3, 97, 429; Sn 542; It 89 = A I.147 = M I.460; J II.277 (°bahula); IV 22 (id.); Pug 30, 36; Vbh 247; Nett 29; Miln 69; Vism 504 (def.); DA I.121. - anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D III.159; A III.429; Ps I 11 sq. Upāramati {Uparamati} [upa + ā + ram] to cease, to desist J V.391, 498. Upāraddha {Uparaddha} [pp. of upārambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved A V 230. Pāli Text Society 363 Pāli-English Dictionary Upārambha {Uparambha} [Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc] - 1. reproof, reproach, censure M I.134, 432; S III.73; V.73; A I.199; II.181; III.175; IV.25; Vbh 372. - 2. (adj.) indisposed, hostile Th 1, 360 sq.; DA I.21, 263. Upārambhati {Uparambhati} [Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M I.432, 433. - pp. upāraddha (q. v.). Upālāpeti {Upalapeti} at PvA 276 read upalāpeti at PvA 276 read upalāpeti (q. v.). Upāvisi {Upavisi} 3rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q. v.). Upāsaka {Upasaka} [fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati] a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin I.4, 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139, 195 sq.; II.125; III.6, 92; IV.14, 109; D I.85; II.105, 113; III.134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264; M I.29, 467, 490; S V.395, 410; A I.56 sq.; II.132 (°parisā); III 206 (°caṇḍāla, °ratana); IV.220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Sn 376, 384; J I.83; Pv I 104; Vbh 248 (°sikkhā); DA I.234; PvA 36, 38, 54, 61, 207. - f. upāsikā Vin I.18, 141, 216; III.39; IV.21, 79; D III.124, 148, 172, 264; M I.29, 467, 491; S II.235 sq.; A I.88; II.132; V.287 sq.; Miln 383; PvA 151, 160. Upāsakatta {Upasakatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. upāsaka] state of being a believing layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin I.37; S IV,301; Vv 8421. Upāsati {Upasati} [upa + ās] lit. "to sit close by", to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship D II.287; A I.162; J V. 339, 371 (= upagacchati C.); Miln 418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target). - 3rd pl. pres. med. upāsare A I.162; J IV.417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati. - pp. upāsita & upāsīna (q. v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana1. Upāsana1 {Upasana} (nt.) [fr. upāsati] attendance, service, honour S I.46 (samaṇ°); Th 1, 239; Miln 115. Cp. payir°. Upāsana2 {Upasana} (nt.) [fr. upāsati] - 1. archery J VI.448; usually in phrase katûpāsana skilled in archery M I.82; S II. 266; A II.48; J IV.211; Mhvs 24, 1. - Miln 232 (°ṃ sikkhitvā). - 2. practice Miln 419. - 3. in °sālā gymnasium, training ground Miln 352. Upāsikā {Upasika} see upāsaka; see upāsaka; cp. payir°. Upāsita {Upasita} [pp. of upāsati] honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd2 165; Th 1, 179. Upāsīna {Upasina} [pp. of upāsati] sitting near or close to J V.336. Upāhata {Upahata} [upa + āhata] struck, afflicted, hurt J I.414. Upāhanā {Upahana} (f.) [with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6] a shoe, sandal Vin I.185; II.118, 207 (adj. sa-upāhana), 208; S I.226; J IV.173, 223; Pv II.49; Nd2 226; KhA 45; DhA I.381 (chatt °ṃ as nt? v. l. °nā); PvA 127, 186. - upāhanaṃ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals J IV. 16; VI. 524; opp. omuðcati take off Vin II.207, 208; J III.415; IV.16. - Note. An older form upānad° (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in Pāli Text Society 364 Pāli-English Dictionary pānadûpama J II.223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v. l. upāhan-upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad. Upiya {Upiya} [ger. of upeti] undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya (-°) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiṃ opiya S I 199 = Th 1, 119; senûpiya J V.96 (v. l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadûpiya the 2nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Miln 9. Upekkhaka {Upekkhaka} (adj.) [fr. upekkhā] disinterested, resigned, stoical Vin III.4; D I.37, 183; III.113, 222, 245, 269, 281; S V.295 sq., 318; A III.169 sq., 279; V.30; Sn 515, 855, 912; It 81; Nd1 241, 330; Pug 50, 59; Dhs 163; DhsA 172. Upekkhati {Upekkhati} [upa + īkṣ] to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Sn 911; Nd1 328; J VI.294. Upekkhanā {Upekkhana} (f.) [abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ] is commentator's paraphrase for upekkhā (q. v.) Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Vbh 230. Upekkhavant {Upekkhavant} (adj.) = upekkhaka J V.403. Upekkhā & Upekhā {Upekkha} {Upekha} (f.) [fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16] "looking on", hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66); disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham-asukha-vedanā "feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure". See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229-232, & cp. Dhs trsln. 39. - Ten kinds of upekkhā are enumd. at DhsA 172 (cp. Dhs trsln. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505). - D 138 (°sati-parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin III.4; Dhs 165 & Dhs trslnn. 50), 251; II.279 (twofold); III.50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six °upavicāras), 252, 282; M I.79, 364; III 219; S IV.71, 114 sq., V.209 sq. (°indriya); A I 42; 81 (°sukha), 256 (°nimitta); III.185, 291 (°cetovimutti); IV.47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; V.301, 360; Sn 67, 73, 972, 1107, (°satisaṃsuddha); Nd1 501 = Nd2 166; Ps I.8, 36, 60, 167, 177; Pug 59 (°sati); Nett 25, 97 (°dhātu), 121 sq.; Vbh 12, 15 (°indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (°dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (°sambojjhanga), 381 (°upavicāra); Dhs 150, 153, 165, 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism 134 (°sambojjhanga, 5 conditions of), 148 (°ānubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (°bhāvanā), 319 (°brahmavihāra), 325 (°vihārin), 461; SnA 128; Sdhp 461. Upeta {Upeta} [pp. of upeti] furnished with, endowed with, possessed of Sn 402, 463, 700, 722; Dh 10, 280; Nd2 s. v., Th 1, 789; Pv I.76 (bal°); II 712 (phal°, v. l. preferable °upaga), IV.112 (ariyaṃ aṭṭhangavaraṃ upetan = aṭṭhahi angehi upetaṃ yuttaṃ PvA 243); Vism 18 (+ sam°, upagata, samupagata etc); PvA 7. - Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhanga). Upeti {Upeti} [upa + i] to go to (with acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain D I.55 (paṭhavi- kāyaṃ an-upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; M I.486 (na upeti, as answer: "does not meet the question"); S III.93; It 89; Sn 209, (na sankhaṃ "cannot be reckoned as") 749, 911, 1074; 728 (dukkhaṃ), 897; Sn 404 (deve); Nd1 63; Nd2 167; Dh 151, 306, 342; Sn 318; J IV.309 (maraṇaṃ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); V.212 (v. l. opeti, q. v.); Th 1, 17 (gabbhaṃ); Pv II.334 (saggaṃ upehi ṭhānaṃ); IV. 352 (saraṇaṃ buddhaṃ dhammaṃ); Nett 66; fut. upessaṃ Sn 29; 2nd sg. upehisi Dh 238, 348. - ger. upecca Vv 337; S I.209 = Nett 131; VvA 146 (realising = Pāli Text Society 365 Pāli-English Dictionary upagantvā cetetvā vā); PvA 103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca. - pp. upeta. Upocita {Upocita} [pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J IV.471. Uposatha {Uposatha} [Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon's waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th, 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre-Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin I.101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15th day of the half-month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla. The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer. The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half-month (pakkha), so the twenty-third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggiuposatho, "reconciliation-Up.", which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin V.123; Mah. 42). - Vin I.111, 112, 175, 177; II.5, 32, 204, 276; III.164, 169; D III. 60, 61, 145, 147; A I.205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka°, nigaṇṭha°, ariya°), 208 (dhamm°), 211 (devatā°); IV.248 (aṭṭhangasamannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah angehi upavuttha); V.83; Sn 153 (pannaraso u); Vbh 422; Vism 227 (°sutta = A I.206 sq.); Sdhp 439; DA I.139; SnA 199; VvA 71, 109; PvA 66, 201. - The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaṃ (Vin III.66), or °āgāraṃ (Vin I.107; DhA II.49). The Up. service is called °kamma (Vin I.102; V.142; J I.232; III.342, 444; DhA I.205). uposathaṃ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin I.107, 175, 177; J I.425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposathaṃ upavasati (A I.142, 144, 205, 208; IV.248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaṃ vasati (J V.177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaṃ samādiyati (see sīlaṃ & samādiyati); uposatha-sīla observance of the Up. (VvA 71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha-divasa (J III.52). Uposathika {Uposathika} (adj.) [fr. uposatha] - 1. belonging to the Uposatha in phrase anuposathikaṃ (adv.) on every U., i. e. every fortnight Vin IV.315. - 2. observing the Sabbath, fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika M Vastu II.9); Vin I.58; IV. 75, 78; J III.52; Vism 66 (bhatta); DhA I.205. Uposathin {Uposathin} (adj.) [fr. upusatha] = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6. Uppakitaka {Uppakitaka} indexed at Ud III.2 wrongly for upakkitaka (q. v.). Uppakka {Uppakka} (adj.) [fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati] - 1. "boiled out", scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiṃ uppakkaṃ okiliniṃ okiriniṃ Vin III.107 = S II.260; expld. by Bdhgh. Vin III.273 as "kharena agginā pakkasarīra". - 2. "boiled up", swollen (of eyes through crying) J VI.10. 366 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Uppacca {Uppacca} [ger. of uppatati] flying up Th 2, 248 (see under upacca)); S I.209 (v. l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv II.717 (= uppatitvā PvA 103) = DhA IV.21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca). Uppaccati {Uppaccati} [ud + paccati, Pass. of pac] in ppr. uppacciyamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v. l. BB. uppajj°) "being boiled out", i. e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) J IV.327. Not with Morris J P T S. 1887, 129 "being tormented", nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc° as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) "dicht opgesloten", a meaning foreign to this root. Uppajjati {Uppajjati} [ud + pajjati of pad] to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence D I.180; Sn 584; Pv II.111 (= nibbattati PvA 71); PvA 8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DA I.165. - Pass. uppajjiyati Vin I.50. - ppr. uppajjanto PvA 5, 21; fut. °pajjissati PvA 5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji PvA 21, 50, 66; & udapādi (q. v.) Vin III.4; J I.81; ger. °pajjitvā D II.157 = S I.6, 158 = II.193 = J I.392 = Th 1, 1159; & uppajja J IV.24. - Caus. uppādeti (q. v.). - pp. uppanna (q. v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna. Uppajjana {Uppajjana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. uppajjati] coming into existence; birth, rebirth PvA 9 (°vasena), 33 (id.). Uppajjanaka {Uppajjanaka} (adj.) [fr. uppajjana] (belonging to) coming into existence, i. e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in °bhaṇḍa a treasure trove J III.150. Uppajjitar {Uppajjitar} [n. ag. fr. uppajjati] one who produces or is reborn in (with acc.) D I.143 (saggaṃ etc.). Uppaṭipāṭiyā {Uppatipatiya} [abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi] lit. "out of reach", i. e. in a distance J I.89; or impossible Vism 96 (ekapaðho pi u. āgato nāhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. "with reference to the preceding", supra Vism 272; SnA 124, 128; DhsA 135 (T. °paṭipāṭika). Uppaṇḍanā {Uppandana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln 357; Vism 29; PugA 250 (°kathā). Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta {Uppanduppandukajata} (adj.) [redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka, upa in meaning of "somewhat like", cp. upanīla, upanibha etc. and reading at Pv II.113 upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expld. at PvA 72 by upakaṇḍaka-jāta "shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)". The trsln. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, 463, and trsld. "very pale"] "having become very pale" (?), or "somewhat pale" (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp° dhamani-santhatagatto Vin I.276; III.19, 110; M II.121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp°. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334. - (2) kiso upp°. J VI. 71; DhA IV.66. - (3) upp° dhamanisanth° J I.346; II.92; V.95; DhA I.367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv II.112 (upakaṇḍakin, v. l. uppaṇḍ° BB.), expld. at PvA 72 "upakaṇḍakajāta", vv. ll. uppaṇḍaka° and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka°. Pāli Text Society 367 Pāli-English Dictionary Uppaṇḍeti {Uppandeti} [ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin] to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin I.216, 272, 293; IV. 278; A III.91 = Pug 67 (ūhasati ullapati +); J V.288, 300; DhA II.29; III.41; PvA 175 (avamaññati +). - Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P. uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv. ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati). Uppatati {Uppatati} [ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J III.484 (so read for °patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā J III.484; IV.213; PvA 103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). - pp. uppatita (q. v.). Uppatita [pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn 1 (= uddhamukhaṃ patitaṃ gataṃ SnA 4), 591; Dh 222 (= uppanna DhA III.301); Th 1, 371. {Uppatita} Uppatti {Uppatti} (f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A II.133 (°paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vbh 137 (°bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Miln 127 (°divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (°bhava, 9 fold: kāma° etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA 144, 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. - See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti. Uppatha {Uppatha} [Sk. utpatha, ud + patha] a wrong road or course D I.10 (°gamana, of planets); S I.38, 43; J V.453; VI. 235; DhA III.356 (°cāra). Uppanna {Uppanna} [pp. of uppajjati] born, reborn, arisen, produced, D I.192 (lokaṃ u. born into the world); Vin III.4; Sn 55 °ðāṇa; see Nd2 168), 998; J I.99; Pv II.22 (pettivisayaṃ); Dhs 1035, 1416; Vbh 12, 17, 50, 319; 327; DhA III. 301; PvA 21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155. - anuppanna not arisen M II.11; not of good class D I.97 (see DA I.267). Uppabbajati {Uppabbajati} [ud + pabbajati] to leave the Order DhA I. 68; PvA 55. - pp. °pabbajita. Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order J IV.219; DhA IV.195. - Caus. II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order J IV.304. Uppabbajjta {Uppabbajjta} [ud + pabbajita] one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an exbhikkhu VvA 319; DhA I.311. Uppala {Uppala} [Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.] the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at J V.37 are: nīla-ratta-set-uppala, ratta-seta-paduma, seta-kumuda, kalla-hāra. D I.75; II.19; Vin III.33 (°gandha); J II. 443; Dh 55; Vv 322; 354; Pv II.120; III.105; DhA I.384 (nīl°); III.394 (id.); ThA 254, 255; VvA 132, 161. - What is meant by uppala-patta (lotus-leaf?) at Vin IV.261? Uppalaka {Uppalaka} [uppala + ka] "lotus-like", N. of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) A V.173. See also puṇḍarika. Uppalin {Uppalin} (adj.-n.) [fr. uppala] having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus-pond D I.75; II.38; S I.138; A III. 26; Vv 322; DA I.219. Pāli Text Society 368 Pāli-English Dictionary Uppaḷāseti {Uppalaseti} [ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning] to sound out or forth, to make sound Miln 21 (dhamma-sankhaṃ). Reading at D II.337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning. Uppāṭaka {Uppataka} [fr. ud + paṭ in meaning of "biting, stinging"] an insect, vermin S I.170 (santhāro °ehi saðchanno "a siesta-couch covered by vermin swarm" trsld. p. 215 & note). Uppāṭana {Uppatana} (nt.) [fr. ud + paṭ] pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning J I.454; II.283; VI.238; Miln 166; PvA 46 (kes°); Sdhp 140 (camm°). Cp. sam°. Uppāṭanaka {Uppatanaka} (adj.) [fr. uppāṭana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J I.303 (°vāta); IV.333 (id.). Uppāṭeti {Uppateti} [Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av. Ś I.294] to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin II.151 (chaviṃ to skin); M II.110 (attānaṃ); Th 2, 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = °pāṭetvā ThA 259); J I.281 (bījāni); IV.162, 382; VI.109 (= luðcati); Miln 86; DhA III.206. - Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off DhA III.208. See also upphāleti. Uppāda1 {Uppada} [Sk. utpāta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D I.9 (v. l. uppāta) = Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda) Sn 360; J I.374; VI. 475; Miln 178. Uppāda2 {Uppada} [Sk. utpāda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin I.185; D I.185; S III.39 (+ vaya); IV.14; V.30; A I.152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; II.248 (taṇh°); III.123 (citt° state of consciousness); IV.65 (id.); Dh 182, 194; J I.59, 107 (sat°); Vbh 303 (citt°), 375 (taṇh°); PvA 10; ThA 282. - anuppāda either "not coming into existence" D III.270, M I.60; A I.286, 296; II.214, 249: III.84 sq.; Ps I.59, 66; Dhs 1367; or "not ripe" D I.12. Uppādaka {Uppadaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. uppāda2] producing, generating PvA 13 (dukkh°). f. °ikā DhA IV.109 (jhānɔ). Uppādana {Uppadana} (nt.) [fr. uppada2] making, generating, causing PvA 71 (anubal° read for anubalappadāna?) 114. Uppādin {Uppadin} (adj.) [fr. uppāda2] having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs 1037, 1416; Vbh 17, 50, 74, 92 and passim; DhsA 45. Uppādetar {Uppadetar} [n. ag. fr. uppādeti] one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer M I.79; S I. 191; III.66; V.351; Miln 217. Uppādeti {Uppadeti} [Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad] - 1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make D I.135; M. I.162, 185; Pug 25; PvA 4, 16, 19, 59; Sdhp 539. cittaṃ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with loc.) J I.81; Miln 85; DhA II.89; PvA 3. - 2. to get, obtain, find J IV.2; Miln 140; DhA I.90; PvA 121. - 3. in lohitaṃ u. to draw (blood) Miln 214. Uppilavati & Uplavati {Uppilavati} {Uplavati}[Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Av. Ś I.209] - 1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float S IV.313 (uplava imper.); Pāli Text Society 369 Pāli-English Dictionary Miln 80, 379; VvA 47 (uplavitvā, v. l. uppalavitvā); DA I.256 (v. l. upari lavati). - 2. to jump up, frisk about, to be elated or buoyant J II.97 (cp. Morris J P T S. 1887, 139); Miln 370. - See also upaplavati, uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc. Uppīḷa {Uppila} (adj.) [ud + pīḍ] oppressing or oppressed: an° free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed D I.135 (opp. sa-uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v. l. upp°); J III.443; V.378; PvA 161. Uppīḷita {Uppilita} [pp. of uppīḷeti] pressed J VI.3. Uppīḷeti {Uppileti} [ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti] - 1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight) to (with acc.), to cover up or close M I.539 (piṭṭhi-pāṇiṃ hanukena); J I 483 (hatthena akkhīni); II.245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaṃ); V.293 (aggalaṃ); ThA 188. - 2. to stampede VvA 83 (paṭhaviṃ). Uppoṭheti {Uppotheti} [ud + poṭheti] to beat PvA 4. Upplavana {Upplavana} at DhA I.309 remains to be explained, T. faulty. Upphāleti {Upphaleti} [Caus. of ud + phal] to cut, rip or split open Vin I.276 (udara-cchaviṃ upphāletvā; v. l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable). Upphāsulika {Upphasulika} (adj.) [ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phāsuka a rib] "with ribs out", i. e. with ribs showing, emaciated, thin, "skinny" Pv II.11 (= uggata-phāsuka PvA 68); IV.101 (MSS. uppā°); ThA 133 (spelt uppā°). Uplāpeti {Uplapeti} [Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with substitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati] to immerse M I.135 (vv. ll. upal° & opil°); J IV.162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v. l. upal°). See also opilāpeti & ubbillāvita. Ubbaṭuma {Ubbatuma} (adj.) [ud + *vṛti (of vṛt) + ma (for mā > mant); cp. Sk. udvṛtta & vṛtimant] going out of its direction, going wrong (or upset?), in phrase ubbaṭumaṃ rathaṃ karoti to put a cart out of its direction A IV. 191, 193. Ubbaṭṭeti {Ubbatteti} [Caus. of ud + vṛt, as doublet of ubbatteti, cp. BSk. udvartayati Divy 12, 36] to anoint, give perfumes (to a guest), to shampoo J I.87 (gandhacuṇṇena), 238 (id.); V.89, 438. Ubbaṭṭhaka {Ubbatthaka} misprint in Pug Index as well as at Pug A 233 for ubbhaṭṭhaka (q. v.). Ubbattati {Ubbattati} [ud + vṛt] to go upwards, to rise, swell J VI. 486 (sāgaro ubbatti). See also next. Ubbatteti {Ubbatteti} [Caus. of ud + vṛt, of which doublet is ubbaṭṭeti; cp. also ubbaṭuma] - 1. to tear out J I.199; Miln 101 (sadevake loke ubbattiyante); DhA I.5 (hadayamaṃsaṃ), 75 (rukkhaṃ). - 2. to cause to swell or rise J III.361 (Gangāsotaṃ); IV.161 (samuddaṃ). - 3. (intrs.) to go out of direction, or in the wrong direction Vism 327 (neva ubbaṭṭati na vivaṭṭati; v. l. uppaṭṭati); DhA III.155. Pāli Text Society 370 Pāli-English Dictionary Ubbadhati {Ubbadhati} [ud + vadhati] to kill, destroy Sn 4 (praet. udabbadhi = ucchindanto vadheti SnA 18). Ubbandhati {Ubbandhati} [ud + bandhati] to hang up, strangle Vin III. 73 (rajjuyā); J I.504 (id.); III.345; Th 2, 80; Vism 501; VvA 139, 207 (ubbandhitu-kāmā in the intention of hanging herself). Ubbarī {Ubbari} (f.) [Sk. urvarā, Av. urvara plant] fertile soil, sown field; fig. woman, wife J VI 473 (= orodha C.). Ubbasati {Ubbasati} see ubbisati. Ubbaha {Ubbaha} (adj.) (-°) [fr. ud + vṛh, i. e. to ubbahati1] only in cpd. dur° hard to pull out, difficult to remove Th 1, 124, 495 = 1053. Ubbahati1 {Ubbahati} [ud + bṛh or vṛh, see also uddharati] to pull out, take away, destroy Sn 583 (udabbahe pot. = ubbaheyya dhāreyya SnA 460); Th 1, 158; J II.223 (udabbahe = udabbaheyya C.); IV.462 (ubbahe); VI.587 (= hareyya C.). Ubbahati2 {Ubbahati} [ud + vahati, although possibly same as ubbahati1, in meaning of uddharati, which has taken up meanings of *udbharati, as well as of *udbṛhati and *udvahati] to carry away, take away, lift (the corn after cutting); only in Caus. II. ubbahāpeti to have the corn harvested Vin II 180 = A I.241. - Here belong uddhaṭa and uddharaṇa. Cp. also pavāḷha. Ubbāḷha {Ubbalha} [adj. pp. of ud + bāhati = vāh or more likely of ud + bādh] oppressed, troubled, harassed, annoyed, vexed Vin I.148, 353; II.119; IV.308; J I.300; Vism 182 (kuṇapa-gandhena); DhA I.343. Ubbāsīyati {Ubbasiyati} [Pass. of ubbāseti, ud + vas] "to be dis-inhabited", i. e. to be abandoned by the inhabitants Mhvs 6, 22 (= chaḍḍīyati C.). - Cp. ubbisati. Ubbāhana {Ubbahana} (nt.) [fr. ubbahati2] carrying, lifting, in °samattha fit for carrying, i. e. a beast of burden, of an elephant J VI.448. Ubbāhikā {Ubbahika} (f.) [orig. f. of ubbāhika, adj. fr. ubbāheti in abstr. use] a method of deciding on the expulsion of a bhikkhu, always in instr. ubbāhikāya "by means of a referendum", the settlement of a dispute being laid in the hands of certain chosen brethren (see Vin Texts III.49 sq.) Vin II.95, 97, 305; V.139, 197; A V.71; Mhvs 4, 46. Ubbāheti {Ubbaheti} [hardly to be decided whether fr. ud + vāh (to press, urge), or bṛh or bādh; cp. uddharati 2] to oppress, vex, hinder, incommodate J V.417 sq. Ubbigga {Ubbigga} [Sk. udvigna, pp. of ud + vij] agitated, flurried, anxious Vin II.184; S I.53; Th 1, 408; J I.486; III.313; Miln 23, 236, 340 (an°); Vism 54 (satat°); DhA II.27; ThA 267; Sdhp 8, 77. Pāli Text Society 371 Pāli-English Dictionary Ubbijjati {Ubbijjati} [Pass. of ud + vij] to be agitated, frightened or afraid Vin I.74 (u. uttasati palāyati); III.145 (id.); S I. 228 (aor. ubbijji); Miln 149 (tasati +), 286 (+ saṃviji); Vism 58. - Caus. ubbejeti (q. v.). - pp. ubbigga (q. v.). Ubbijjanā {Ubbijjana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ubbijjati] agitation, uneasiness DA I.111. Cp. ubbega. Ubbinaya (adj.) [ud + vinaya] being outside the Vinaya, ex- or un-Vinaya, wrong Vinaya Vin II.307; Dpvs V.19. {Ubbinaya} Ubbilāpa {Ubbilapa} (v. l. uppilāva, which is prob. the correct reading] joyous state of mind, elation Ud 37. See next. Ubbilāvita {Ubbilavita} (according to the very plausible expln. given by Morris J P T S. 1887, 137 sq. for uppilāpita, pp. of uppilāpeti = uplāpeti < uplāveti, as expld. under uppilavati, ud + plu; with ll for l after cases like Sk. ālīyate > P. allīyati, ālāpa > allāpa etc., and bb for pp as in vanibbaka = Sk. vanīpaka (*vanipp°)] happy, elated, buoyant, ltt. frisky; only in cpds. °atta rejoicing, exultancy, elation of mind D I.3, 37; J III 466; Miln 183; DA I.53, 122; and °ākāra id. DhA I.237. At Vism 158 "cetaso ubbilāvitaṃ" stands for ubbilāvitattaṃ, with v. l. BB uppilāvitaṃ. Cp. J V.114 (ubbilāvita-cittatā). Ubbilla {Ubbilla} [either a secondary formation fr. ubbilāvita, or representing uppilava (uppilāva) for upplava, ud + plu, as discussed under ubbilāvita. The BSk. word udvilya Lal. V. 351, 357, or audvilya Divy 82 is an artificial reconstruction from the Pāli, after the equation of Sk. dvādaśa > dial. P. bārasa, whereas the original Sk. dv. is in regular P. represented by dd, as in dvīpa > dīpa, *udvāpa > uddāpa. Müller's construction ubbilla > *udvela rests on the same grounds, see P. Gr. 12.] elation, elated state of mind M III.159; °bhāva id. DA I.122; Sdhp 167. See next. Ubbisati {Ubbisati} [better reading v. l. ubbasati, ud + vas] "to be out home", to live away from home J II.76. - See also ubbāsīyati. - pp. ubbisita (°kāle) ibid. Ubbūḷhavant {Ubbulhavant} see uruḷhavant. Ubbega [Sk. udvega, fr. ud + vij] excitement, fright, anguish D III.148; later, also transport, rapture, in cpd. (°pīti); Vism 143; DhsA 124; PugA 226. {Ubbega} Ubbegin {Ubbegin} (adj.) [fr. ubbega] full of anguish or fear J III. 313 (= ubbegavant C.). Ubbejanīya {Ubbejaniya} (adj.) [fr. ubbejeti] agitating, causing anxiety J I.323, 504. Ubbejitar & Ubbejetar {Ubbejitar} {Ubbejetar} [n. ag. fr. ubbejeti] a terrifier, a terror to A II.109 (°etar); IV.189 (id.); Pug 47, 48 (= ghaṭṭetvā vijjhītvā ubbegappattaṃ karotī ti PugA 226). Ubbejeti {Ubbejeti} [Caus. of ud + vij] to set into agitation, terrify, frighten Miln 388 (°jayitabba grd.); PugA 226. Ubbeṭhana {Ubbethana} (nt.) [fr. ud + veṣṭ] an envelope, wrap J VI.508. Pāli Text Society 372 Pāli-English Dictionary Ubbedha {Ubbedha} [ud + vedha of vyadh] height, only as measure, contrasted with āyāma length, & vitthāra width J I.29 (V.219; asīti-hatth°), 203 (yojana-sahass°); VvA 33 (yojana°), 66 (asītihatth°), 158 (hattha-sat°), 188 (soḷasa-yojan°), 221, 339; PvA 113. See also pabbedha. Ubbedhati {Ubbedhati} [ud + vedhati = Sk. vyathate] to be moved, to shake (intrs.), quiver, quake J VI.437 (= kampati C.). Ubbhaṃ & Ubbha°{Ubbham} {Ubbha°} (indecl.) [a doublet of uddhaṃ, see uddhaṃ III.] up, over, above, on top J V.269 (ubbhaṃ yojanaṃ uggata); in cpds. like ubbhakkhakaṃ above the collar bone Vin IV.213; ubbhajānumaṇḍalaṃ above the knee Vin IV.213; ubbhamukha upwards S III.238; Miln 122. Ubbhaṭṭhaka {Ubbhatthaka} (adj.) [ubbha + ṭha + ka of sthā, prob. contracted fr. ubbhaṭṭhitaka] standing erect or upright D I.167; M I.78, 92, 282, 308, 343; A I.296; II.206; Pug 55 (ubb°; = uddhaṃ ṭhitaka PugA 233). Ubbhaṇḍita {Ubbhandita} [pp. of ubbhaṇḍeti, ud + *bhaṇḍ, cp. bhāṇḍa] bundled up, fixed up, wrapped up, full Vin I.287. Ubbhata {Ubbhata} [pp. of uddharati with bbh for ddh as in ubbhaṃ for uddhaṃ; cp. ubbahati and see also the doublet uddhaṭa] drawn out, pulled out, brought out, thrown out or up, withdrawn Vin I.256 (kaṭhina, cp. uddhāra & ubbhāra); III.196 (id.); D I.77 (cp uddharati); M I.383 (ubbhatehi akkhihi); Dh 34 (okamokata u. = *okamokataḥ u.); J I.268; PvA 163. Ubbhava {Ubbhava} [ud + bhava] birth, origination, production Pgdp 91 (dānassa phal°). Cp. BSk. udbhāvanā Divy 184 (guṇ°) 492 (id.). Ubbhāra {Ubbhara} = uddhāra (suspension, withdrawal, removal) Vin I.255, 300; V.136, 175; cp. Vin Texts I.19; II.157. Ubbhijjati {Ubbhijjati} [ud + bhid] to burst upwards, to spring up out of the ground, to well up; to sprout D I.74 = M III. 93 = III.26; J I.18 (V.104); Dh 339 (ger. ubbhijja = uppajitvā DhA IV.49); DA I.218. - pp. ubbhinna. Ubbhida1 {Ubbhida} (nt.) [Sk. udbhida] kitchen salt Vin I.202, cp. Vin Texts II.48. Ubbhida2 {Ubbhida} (adj.) [fr. ud + bhid] breaking or bursting forth, in cpd. °odaka "whose waters well up", or "spring water" D I.74; M I.276; DA I.218. Ubbhinna {Ubbhinna} [pp. of ubbhijjati] springing up, welling up Dh I.218. Ubbhujati {Ubbhujati} [ud + bhuj] to bend up, to lift up (forcibly), ger. °itvā in meaning of "forcibly" Vin II.222; III.40. see ubho; cp. ubhato & ubhaya. Ubhato {Ubhato} (adv.) [abl. of *ubha, to which ubhaya & ubho] both, twofold, in both (or two) ways, on both sides; usually °-, as °bhāgavimutta one who is emancipated in two ways D II.71; Dialogues II.70, n. 1; M I.477 (cp. 385 °vimaṭṭha); S I.191; A I.73; IV.10, 77; Png 14, 73; Nett 190; Pāli Text Society 373 Pāli-English Dictionary °byañjanaka (vyañj°) having the characteristics of both sexes, hermaphrodite Vin I.89, 136, 168; III.28; V. 222; °sangha twofold Sangha, viz. bhikkhu° & bhikkhunī Vin II.255; IV.52, 242, 287; Mhvs 3234. - See further Vin II.287 (°vinaye); D I.7 (°lohitaka, cp. DA I.87); M I.57 (°mukha tied up at both ends), 129 (°daṇḍakakakaca a saw with teeth on both sides), 393 (koṭiko pañho; S IV.323 (id.). Ubhaya {Ubhaya} (adj.) [*ubha + ya, see ubho] both, twofold Sn 547, 628, 712, 1106, 1107, 801 (°ante); Nd1 109 (°ante); J I.52; PvA 11, 24, 35, 51. - nt. °ṃ as adv. in combn. with ca c'ûbhayaṃ following after 2nd. part of comprehension) "and both" for both-and; and also, alike, as well Dh 404 (gahaṭṭhehi anāgārehi c'ûbhayaṃ with householders and houseless alike); Pv I.69. Note. The form ubhayo at Pv II.310 is to be regarded as fem. pl. of ubho (= duve PvA 86). -aṃsa lit. both shoulders or both parts, i. e. completely, thoroughly, all round (°-) in °bhāvita thoroughly trained D I.154 (cp. DA I.312 ubhaya-koṭṭhāsāya bhāvito). Ubhayattha {Ubhayattha} [adv.) [Sk. ubhayatra, fr. ubhaya] in both places, in both cases Vin I.107; A III.64; Dh 15-17; DhA I.29 (°ettha), 30; PvA 130. Ubho {Ubho} (udj.) [Sk. ubhau, an old remnant of a dual form in Pāli; cp. Gr. a)/mfw both, Lat. ambo, Lith. abū, Goth. bai, Ohg. beide = E. both. To prep.-adv. *amb, *ambi; see abhi & cp. also vīsati] both; nom. acc. ubho S I.87 = A III.48 = It 16; It 43 = Sn 661 = Dh 306; Sn 220, 543, 597; Dh 74, 256, 269; 412; Nd1 109; Pv I.76; J I.223; II.3; PvA 13, 82 (tā ubho). - ubhantaṃ both ends, both sides Sn 1042 (see Nd2 169; Sn A 588 expls. by ubho ante). - gen. ubhinnaṃ S I.162; II. 222; J II.3; instr. ubhohi (hatthehi) Vin II.256; J IV.142; loc. ubhosu Sn 778 (antesu); J I.264 (passesu; PvA 94 (hatthesu). - Note. The form ubhayo at Pv II.310 is to be regarded as a nom. fem. (= duve PvA 86). Ummagga {Ummagga} [ud + magga, lit. "off-track"] - 1. an underground watercourse, a conduit, main M I.171; A II.189; J VI.426, 432; SnA 50 ("ummaggo paððā pavuccati"); DhA I.252 (°cora); II.37 (v l. umanga); IV.104; PvA 44 (read with v. l. SS kummagga). - 2. a side track, a wrong way, devious way S I.193 (v. l. °manga) = Th 1, 1242; S IV.195; A IV.191. Ummanga {Ummanga} [ud + manga (?) or for ummagga, q. v. for vv. ll.] "out luck", i. e. unlucky; or "one who has gone off the right path" Vin V.144. Ummatta {Ummatta} (adj.) [ud + matta of mad] out of one's mind, mad S V.447 (+ viceta); J V.386; Miln 122; Sdhp 88; PvA 40 (°puggala read with v. l. SS for dummati puggala). Cp. next & ummāda. -rūpa like mad, madly, insane Pv I.81; II.62 (where J III.156 has santaramāna). Ummattaka {Ummattaka} (adj.) = ummatta; Vin I.123, 321; II.60, 80; III.27, 33; A IV.248; Vism 260 (reason for); Miln 277; PvA 38, 39, 93 (°vesa appearance of a madman), 95. - f. ummattikā Vin IV.259, 265; ThA 111. Ummaddeti {Ummaddeti} [ud + maddeti, Caus. of mṛd] to rub something on (acc.) Vin II.107 = 266 (mukhaṃ). Ummasati {Ummasati} [ud + masati of mṛś.] to touch, take hold of, lift up Vin III.121. Cp. next. Pāli Text Society 374 Pāli-English Dictionary Ummasanā {Ummasana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ummasati] lifting up Vin III.121 (= uddhaṃ uccāraṇā). Ummā {Umma} (f.) [cp. Sk. umā] flax, only in cpd. °puppha the (azure) flower of flax M II.13 = A V.61 (v. l. dammā°, ummāta°); D II.260; Th 1, 1068; DhsA 13. Also (m.) N. of a gem Miln 118. Ummāda {Ummada} [ud + māda] madness, distraction, mental aberration S I.126 (°ṃ pāpuṇeyya citta-vikkhepaṃ vā); A II.80; III.119; V.169; Pug 69; PvA 6 (°patta frantic, out of mind), 94 (°vāta), 162 (°patta). Ummādanā {Ummadana} (f.) (or °aṃ nt.) [abstr. fr. ummāda] maddening Sn 399 (+ mohanaṃ = paraloke ummādanaṃ ihaloke mohanaṃ SnA 377); ThA 2, 357 (cp. ThA 243). Ummāra {Ummara} [according to Müller P. Gr. = Sk. udumbara (?)] - 1. a threshold Vin IV.160 (= indakhīla); Th 2, 410; J I. 62; III.101; Vism 425; DhA I.350. - 2. a curb-stone J VI.11. - 3. as uttar° (the upper threshold) the lintel J I.111; DhA II.5 (v. l. upari°). - 4. window-sash or sill J I.347; IV.356. Ummi & Ummī {Ummi} (f.) [for the usual ūmi, cp. similar double forms of bhummi > bhūmi] a wave Th 1, 681; Miln 346. Ummisati {Ummisati} [ud + misati] to open one's eyes J III.96 (opp. nimisati; v. l. ummisati for °mīḷ°?). Ummihati {Ummihati} [ud + mih] to urinate Vin I.78 (ūhanati +). Ummīleti {Ummileti} [Caus. of ud + mīl; opp. ni(m)mīleti] to open one's eyes J I.439; II.195; IV.457; VI.185; Miln 179, 357, 394; Vism 185, 186; DhA II.28 (opp. ni°); VvA 205, 314. Ummuka {Ummuka} (nt.) [Sk. ulmuka perhaps to Lat. adoleo, cp. also alāta firebrand; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. adoleo] a fire brand Vin IV.265; S IV.92 (T. ummukka meaning "loosened"?); J II.69 v. l. °kk), 404 (kk); III.356. Ummujjati {Ummujjati} [ud + majj] to emerge, rise up (out of water) Vin I.180; S IV.312; A IV.11 sq; J II.149, 284; III.507; IV.139; Pug 71; Miln 118; DA I.37, 127; PvA 113. Ummujjana {Ummujjana} (nt.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging Vism 175 (+ nimmujjana); DA I.115. Ummujjamānaka {Ummujjamanaka} (adj.) [ummujjamāna, ppr. med, of ummujjati, + ka] emerging A II.182. Ummujjā (f.) [fr. ummujjati] emerging, jumping out of (water), only in phrase ummujja-nimujjaṃ karoti to emerge & dive D I.78; M I.69; A I.170; J IV.139; Nett 110; Vism 395 (= Ps II.208). {Ummujja} Ummūla {Ummula} (adj.) [ud + mūla] "roots-out", with roots showing, laying bare the roots J I.249 (°ṃ karoti); Sdhp 452. Pāli Text Society 375 Pāli-English Dictionary Ummūlaka {Ummulaka} (adj.) [= ummūla] uprooting, laying bare the roots J I.303 (vāta). Ummūleti {Ummuleti} [Caus. fr. ummūla] to uproot, to root out J I.329. Umhayati {Umhayati} [Sk. *ut-smayate, ud + smi] to laugh out loud J II.131 (= hasitaṃ karoti); III.44; IV.197; V.299 (°amāna = hasamāna C.). Caus. umhāpeti J V.297. Uyyassu {Uyyassu} (imper. 3rd. sg.) is v. l. BB. and C. reading at J VI.145, 146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go. Uyyāti {Uyyati} [ud + yā] to go out, to go away J II.3, 4 (imper. uyyāhi); IV.101. - Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away, to bring or take out S IV.312. Uyyāna {Uyyana} (nt.) [Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā] a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden J I.120, 149; II.104; IV.213; V.95; VI.333; PvA 6, 74, 76; VvA 7; Sdhp 7. -kīḷā amusement in the park, sports DhA I.220; IV.3. -pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper J II. 105, 191; IV.264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground J I.58; Vv 6419; Pv II.129; DA I.235. Uyyānavant {Uyyanavant} (adj.) [fr. uyyāna] full of pleasure gardens Pv III.36. Uyyāma {Uyyama} [Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma > niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210] exertion, effort, endeavour Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571; DhsA 146. Uyyuñjati {Uyyunjati} [ud + yuj] to go away, depart, leave one's house Dh 91 (cp. DhA II.170). - pp. uyyutta. - Caus. uyyojeti (q. v.). Uyyuta {Uyyuta} (adj.) [ud + yuta] striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Sn 247, 248; J V.95. Uyyutta {Uyyutta} [pp. of uyyuñjati] striving, active, zealous, energetic J I.232. Uyyoga {Uyyoga} [fr. ud + yuj] departure, approach of death Dh 236 (cp. DhA III.335). Uyyojana {Uyyojana} (nt.) [fr. uyyojeti] inciting, instigation A IV.233. Uyyojita {Uyyojita} [pp. of uyyojeti] instigated Miln 228; PvA 105. Uyyojeti {Uyyojeti} [Caus. of uyyuñjati] - 1. to instigate Vin IV.235; J III.265. - 2. to dismiss, take leave of (acc.), send off, let go Vin I.179; A III.75; J I.119 (bhikkhu-sanghaṃ), 293; III.188; V.217; VI.72; Vism 91; DhA I.14, 15, 398; II.44; VvA 179; PvA 93. - pp. uyyojita (q. v.). Uyyodhika {Uyyodhika} (nt.) [fr. ud + yudh] a plan of combat, sham fight Vin IV.107; D I.6; A V.65; DA I.85. Ura {Ura} (m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] - 1. the breast, chest. - Cases after the nt. s.-declension are instr. urasā Th 1, 27; Sn 609; & loc. urasi Sn 255; J III.148; IV. 118, also urasiṃ J III.386 (= urasmiṃ C.). Other cases of nt. a-stem, e. g. instr. urena J III.90; PvA 75; loc. ure D I.135; J I.156, Pāli Text Society 376 Pāli-English Dictionary 433, 447; PvA 62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa). - Vin II.105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); IV.129; J IV.3; V.159, 202; Nd2 659; Pv IV.108; DhA III.175; DA I.254; DhsA 321; PvA 62, 66. - uraṃ deti (with loc.) to Qput oneself on to something with one's chest, fig. to apply oneself to J I.367, 401, 408; III.139, 455; IV.219; V.118, 278. - 2. (appld.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 6328 (= īsāmūla VvA 269). -ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S I.69; Sn 1, 604; J I.7; IV.330; VI.208; Vv 808; Pv I.121 (= urena gacchati ti urago sappassɔ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ PvA 63); PvA 61, 67. -cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya J I.363, 414. -cchada "breast cover", breast plate (for ornament) Vin II.10; J IV.3; V.215, 409; VI.480; ThA 253. -ttāḷi beating one's breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) M I.86, 136; A II.188; III.54, 416; IV.293; PvA 39. -tthala the breast A II.174. Urabbha {Urabbha} [Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr. a)rh/n wether, cp. Hom. Qros wool; Lat. vervex; Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware. Here also belongs P. urāṇī] a ram D I.127; A I.251 sq.; II.207; IV.41 sq.; J V.241; Pug 56; DA I.294; DhA II.6. See also orabbhika. Urāṇī {Urani} (f.) [or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha] an ewe J V.241 (= urāṇikā C.); v. l. uraṇī & uraṇikā. Uru {Uru} (adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. eu)rus wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J V.89; Miln 354; Sdhp 345, 592. - pl. urū sands, soil J V.303. Urundā {Urunda} (f.) [ura + undā?] freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief D II.269 (v. l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura + uddharana lifting or raising the chest). Urūḷhava {Urulhava} (adj.) [doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud°. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud-ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expld. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh2, cp. upabrūhana. Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus "overgrown"] large, bulky, immense; great, big, strong. Only in one stock phrase "nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo" Vv 209, 439; J VI.488; of which variant n. ī. ubbuḷhavā M I.414 = 450. The word is expld. at J VI.488 by "ubbāhana-samattha"; at VvA 104 (pl. urūḷhavā) by "thāmajavaparakkamehi byūhanto (v. l. brahmanto) mahantaṃ yuddha-kiccaṃ vahituṃ samatthā ti attho". The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha. Ulati {Ulati} is a commentator's invention; said to be = gacchati to go Vism 60 (in definition of paṃsu-kūla; paṃsu viya kucchita-bhāvaṃ ulatī ti paṃsu-kūlaṃ). Ulūka {Uluka} [Sk. ulūka; cp. Lat. ulucus & ulula owl, ululāre to howl, Ger. uhu; onomat. *ul, as in Gr. o)lolu/zw, Sk. ululi, Lith. ulůti] an owl Vin I.186 (°camma, sandals of owl's skin); III.34; A V.289 sq.; J II.208, 352 (as king of the birds); Miln 403; DhA I.50 (kāka° crows & owls). -pakkha owls'wings (used as dress) Vin I.305; D I.167. -pakkhika dress of owls'wings, or owl feathers A I.241, 296; II.206; Pug 55 (= ulūka-pattāni ganthetvā kata-nivāsanaṃ Pug A 233). Pāli Text Society 377 Pāli-English Dictionary Ullanghati {Ullanghati} [ud + langh, cp. BSk. prollanghya transgressing (= pra + ullangh°) Divy 596] to leap up J III.222 (udakato °itvā). - Caus. ullangheti to make jump up (always with olangheti, i. e. to make dance up & down) Vin III.121; J V.434; DhA IV.197. - pp. ullanghita (q v.). Ullanghanā {Ullanghana} (f.) [abstr. fr. ud + langh] jumping up, lifting up, raising Vin III.121; J IV.5 (°samattha?). Ullanghita {Ullanghita} [pp. of ullangheti] being jumped on, set on C. on S I.40 (see K. S. I.318) (for uḍḍita = taṇhāya ullanghita). Ullapati [ud + lapati] to call out, to talk to, lay claim to Vin I.97; III.105; Pug 67 (= katheti Pug A 249). Ullapana {Ullapana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. ullapati] calling out, enticing, laying claim to Vin III.101; Th 2, 357; Miln 127; ThA 243. - ullapanā = uddhaṃ katvā lapanā Vism 27. Ullahaka {Ullahaka} (adj.) [?] only in acc. nt. ullahakaṃ used adverbially, in cpd. dant° after the manner of rubbing the teeth, by means of grinding the teeth M III.167. Seems to be a a(/pac legome/non. Ullāpa {Ullapa} is v. l. for uklāpa (q. v.). Ullikhana {Ullikhana} (nt.) [fr. ud + likh] combing, scratching VvA 349; ThA 267. Ullikhita {Ullikhita} [pp. of ud + likh] scratched, combed Vin I.254; J II.92 (aḍḍhullikhitehi kesehi); Ud 22 (id. with upaḍḍh° for aḍḍh°); VvA 197. Ullingeti {Ullingeti} [Denom. of ud + linga] to exhibit, show as a characteristic Vism 492. Ullitta {Ullitta} [pp. of ud + lip] smeared; only in combn. ullittāvalitta smeared up & down, i. e. smeared all round Vin II 117; M II.8; A I.101, 137; IV.231; Th 1, 737. Ullumpati {Ullumpati} [ud + lup, cp. BSk. ullumpati Mahāvy § 268] to take up, to help (with acc.), to save Vin II.277; D I.249. Ullumpana (nt.) [fr. ullumpati] saving, helping; in phrase °sabhāva-saṇṭhita of a helping disposition, full of mercy DA I.177; PvA 35. Same as ullopana (q. v.). {Ullumpana} Ullulita {Ullulita} [pp. of ulloleti] waved, shaken (by the wind); waving J VI.536. Ulloka {Ulloka} [ud + lok°] doubtful in its meaning; occurs at Vin I.48 = II.209 as ullokā paṭhamaṃ ohāreti, trsl. Vin Texts by "a cloth to remove cobwebs", but better by Andersen, Pāli Reader as "as soon as it is seen"; at Vin II.151 the translators give "a cloth placed under the bedstead to keep the stuffing from coming out". See on term Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 31. - In cpd ullokapaduma at J VI.432 it may mean "bright lotus" (lit. to be looked at). See ulloketi. Pāli Text Society 378 Pāli-English Dictionary Ullokaka {Ullokaka} (adj.) [fr. ulloketi] looking on (to), looking out; in phrase mukh° looking into a person's face; i. e. cheerful, winning; or "of bright face", with a winning smile D I.60; DA I.59, 168; PvA 219 (°ika for °aka). Ullokita {Ullokita} [pp. of ulloketi] looked at, looked on J I.253; DA I 193. Ulloketi [ud + lok°, cp. loka, āloka & viloka] to look on to, look for, await J I.232 (ākāsaṃ), 253; II.221, 434; DA I.153, 168; VvA 316. - pp. ullokita (q. v.). {Ulloketi} Ullopana {Ullopana} (nt.) = ullumpana DhA I.309 (T. faulty; see remarks ad locum). Ullola {Ullola} [fr. ud + lul] - 1. a wave J III.228; VI.394. - 2. commotion, unrest J IV.306, 476. Ullolanā {Ullolana} (f.) [fr. ulloleti] wavering, loitering (in expectation of something), greed ThA 243. Ulloleti {Ulloleti} [denom. fr. ullola] to stroll or hang about, to wait for, expect ThA 243. - pp. ullulita. Uḷāra {Ulara} (adj.) [Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra] great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich. - Dhammapāla at VvA 10-11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraṃ; paṇītaṃ (excellent), seṭṭhaṃ (best), mahantaṃ (great) Vin III.41 (°bhoga); D I.96; M III.38 (°bhogatā); S V.159; Sn 53, 58, 301; Nd2 170; J I.399; V.95; Vv 11; 8426; Pv I.512 (= hita samiddha PvA 30); VvA 18 (°pabhāva = mahānubhāva); ThA 173, 280; PvA 5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 30, 43, 58 and passim; Sdhp 26, 260, 416. - Der. oḷārika (q. v.). Uḷāratā {Ularata} (f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp 254. Uḷāratta {Ularatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. uḷāra] greatness etc.; only neg. an° smallness, insignificance, inferiority VvA 24. Uḷu {Ulu} [Sk. uḍu, dialectical?] a lunar mansion Miln 178. Uḷunka {Ulunka} [dial.?] a ladle, a spoon Vin I.286; J I.120, 157; III.461; Miln 8; DhA I.425; II.3, 20; IV.75, 123. Uḷumpa {Ulumpa} [dial.?] a raft, a float Vin I.230; III 63 (°ṃ bandhati); J IV.2; DhA II.120. Uviṭṭa {Uvitta} [= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u] having entered, come in D II.274 (v. l. BK. upa°). Usabha1 {Usabha} [Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. a)/rshn, a)/rrhn masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as a s dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr. e)/rsh dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull] a bull; often fig. as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) D I.6 (°yuddha bull-fight), 9 (°lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin III.39 (puris° "bull of a man", a very strong man); A I.188; II.207; IV.41 Pāli Text Society 379 Pāli-English Dictionary sq., 376; V.347, 350; Sn 26 sq., 416, 646, 684; Dh 422; J I.28 (V.203; °kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; V.99 (bharatûsabha); VI.136; Pug 56; Vism 153 (°camma, in simile); DhA I.396; SnA 226, 333; KhA 144; PvA 163; VvA 85. - The compn. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q. v.). The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at SnA 40. Usabha2 {Usabha} (nt.) [= usabha1, in special application (?)] a certain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi) or 140 cubits J I.64 (eight), 70 (id.); II.91; IV.17 (one), 142 (eight); DhA I.108 (°mattaṃ). Usā {Usa} (f.) [doubtful] (a certain) food J VI.80. Usīra {Usira} (m. & nt.) [Sk. uśīra] the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin I.201; II.130 (°mayā vijanī); S II.88 (°nāḷi); A II.199 (id.); Dh 337; J V.39; Th 1, 402 (°attho). Usu {Usu} (m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin III.106 (°loma); D I.9; M I.86; III.133; S I.127; A II.117; III.162; J IV.416; VI.79, 248, 454; Miln 331, 339; SnA 466; PvA 155. -kāra an arrow-maker, fletcher M II.105; Dh 80, 145; Th 1, 29; J II.275; VI.66; DhA I.288. Usumā {Usuma} (f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q. v.)] heat J I.31 (= uṇha III.55), 243; II.433; Vism 172 (usuma-vaṭṭi-sadisa); DA I.186; DhA I.225; II.20. Usuyyaka {Usuyyaka} (adj.) [fr. usuyyā] envious, jealous Vin II.190; Sn 318, 325; J II.192 (v. l. asuyy°); V.114. - Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q. v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 3321 (see VvA 147). Usuyyati & Usūyati {Usuyyati} {Usuyati} [Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy] to be jealous or envious, to envy (with acc.) Vin I.242; J III. 27 (ppr. an-usuyyaṃ); Pv II.320 (maṃ usūyasi = mayhaṃ issaṃ karosi PvA 87). Usuyyanā (f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) {Usuyyana} {Usuyyitatta} are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q. v.). Dhs 1121; Pug 19. Usuyyā & Usūyā {Usuyya} {Usuya} (fQ) [Sk. asūyā] envy, jealousy, detraction S I.127 (ū); Sn 245 (u); J II.193 (ū); III.99 (ū; v. l. ussuyyā); Miln 402 (ū); Dhs 1121 (u); VvA 71 (u); SnA 332 (u). Usmā {Usma} (f.) [see usumā] heat D II.335, 338; M I.295; S II. III.143; IV.215, 294; V.212; Dhs 964; DA I.310. - In combn. with °kata it appears as usmī°, e. g. at M I 132, 258. -gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs 964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J V.209 (= samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469, & see Kern's mistakes at Toev. s. v.). Ussa {Ussa} (adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud-s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A III.359; Sn 860 (= Nd1 251 with spelling ossa), 954. 380 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Ussakkati1 {Ussakkati} [ud + sakkati, see sakkati] to creep out or up to, to rise A III.241 sqQ; Miln 260. Ussakkati2 {Ussakkati} [by-form of ussukkati] to endeavour Vism 437; VvA 95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214. Ussankita {Ussankita} (adj.) [pp. of ud + śank] = ussankin A III.128; DhA III.485 (+ pari°; cp. ā°). Ussankin {Ussankin} (adj.) [fr. ud + śank] distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin II.192. Ussankha (adj.) [ud + sankha] with ankles midway (?) in °pāda the 7th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa D II.17; III.143, 154; DA explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot. {Ussankha} Ussajjati {Ussajjati} [ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587] to dismiss, set free, take off, hurl A IV.191. Ussaṭa {Ussata} [pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ, cp. saṭa for *sūta] run away M II.65. Ussada {Ussada} [most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt-ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt° is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as "projecting, prominent hells", ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) J I.174; IV.3, 422 (pallankaṃ ṃ, with four corners); V.266. - adj. prominent ThA 13 (tej-ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). - 2. protuberance, bump, swelling J IV.188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa D III.151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back). - 3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with (-°), in candan° J III.139; IV.60; Th 1, 267; Vv 537; DhA I.28; VvA 237. - 4. a crowd adj. full of (-°) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D I.87 (cp. DA I.245: anekasatta-samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk. sapt-otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv IV.18 (of Niraya = full of beings, expld. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita PvA 221. - 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada "having the four qualifications (of a good village)" J IV.309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after D I.87 (under 4). As "preponderant quality, characteristic" we find ussada used at Vism 103 (cf. Asl. 267) in combns. lobh°, dos°, moh°, alobh° etc. (quoted from the "Ussadakittana"), and similarly at VvA 19 in Dhammapāla's definition of manussa (lobhɔādīhi alobhɔādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa-jātikā tesu lobhɔ- ādayo alobhɔādayo ca ussadā. - 6. (metaph.) self-elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin I.3; Sn 515, 624 (an° = taṇhāussada-abhāvena SnA 467), 783 (expld. by Nd1 72 under formula sattussada; i. e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855. - See also ussādana, ussādeti etc. Ussadaka {Ussadaka} (adj.) [fr. ussada 4] over-full, overflowing A III.231, 234 (°jāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka° & ussuka°). Pāli Text Society 381 Pāli-English Dictionary Ussanna {Ussanna} (adj.) [pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna] - 1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant, preponderant, excessive, full of (°-) Vin I.285 (cīvaraṃ u. overstocked; II.270 (āmisaṃ too abundant); III.286; Th 2, 444 (= upacita ThA 271); J I.48, 145 °kusalamūla); DhA I.26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Miln 223 (id.); J I.336 (kāla, fulfilled); III.418; IV.140; Pv III.51 (°puðða, cp. PvA 197); PvA 71 (°pabhā thick glow). Cp. accussanna. - 2. anointed VvA 237. - 3. spread out, wide DhA II.67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.). Ussannatā {Ussannata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ussanna] accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsln. p. 275 gives ussadattā); VvA 18, 19. Ussaya {Ussaya} in °vādika in °vādika Vin IV.224 is a variant of usuyya° "using envious language, quarrelsome". - Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning "accumulation" is found in cpd. samussaya only. Ussayāpeti {Ussayapeti} see udassaye. Ussarati {Ussarati} [ud + sarati of sṛ] to run out, run away J I.434 (imper. ussaratha); V.437. - pp. ussaṭa (q. v.). - Caus. ussāreti (q. v.). Ussava {Ussava} [Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin III. 249; J I.475; II.13, 248; VvA 7, 109 (°divasa). Ussahati {Ussahati} [ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. Ś II.21] to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin I.47, 83; II.208; III.17; D I.135; S IV.308, 310; Miln 242; VvA 100. - Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita). Ussāda {Ussada} [fr. ussādeti] throwing up on DA I.122. Ussādana {Ussadana} (nt.) [to ussādeti, cp. ussādita] - 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M III.230 (opp. apasādana). - 2. (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion A III.91, 92 (v. l. ussāraṇa) = Pug 66 (= hatthiassarathādīnaṃ cɔ eva balakāyassa ca uccāsaddamahāsaddo Pug A 249). Ussādita {Ussadita} [fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz. sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)]. Ussādiyati {Ussadiyati} [Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin II.167. Ussādeti {Ussadeti} [denom. fr. ussada 1] - 1. to dismiss D III.128 [for ussāreti1] - 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up M I.135; III.230; A IV.198, 201; Miln 187, 250. - Pass. ussādiyati (q. v.). - pp. ussādita (q. v.). Ussāpana {Ussapana} (nt.) [fr. ussāpeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A IV.41; Nd2 503 (dhamma-dhajassa). Pāli Text Society Ussāpita {Ussapita} 382 Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita] lifted, raised, unfurled Miln 328 (dhamma- dhaja); J II.219. Ussāpeti {Ussapeti} [Caus. of ud + &stodacute;ri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. S I.384, 386, 387; II.2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin II.195; A IV.43; J II.219; IV.16; V.95 (chattaṃ); PvA 75 (id.); Miln 21; DhA I.3; III 118 (kaṭṭhāni). - pp. ussāpita & ussita (q. v.). See also usseti. Ussāraṇa {Ussarana} (nt.) [fr. ussāreti] procession, going or running about, tumult DhA II.7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana. Ussārita {Ussarita} [pp. of ussāreti2] lifted out or up Vism 63 (samuddavīcīhi thale ussārita; v. l. ussādita). Ussāreti1 {Ussareti} [Caus. of ussarati] to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin I.32, 46 (here a student, when folding up his master's robe, has to make the corners move back a hand's breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; II.237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); J I.419; IV.349; V.347. Caus. II. ussārāpeti J II.290. Ussāreti2 {Ussareti} [= ussādeti] to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift J V.319 (= ussāpeti). - pp. ussārita. Ussāva1 {Ussava} [either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru] hoarfrost, dew D II.19; J IV.120; V.417; °bindu a dew drop A IV.137; Pv IV.15; SnA 458; in comparisons: Vism 231, 633. Ussāva2 {Ussava} [fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) DhA IV.165 (taṇhā°; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6). Ussāvana {Ussavana} (nt.) [= ussāpana] proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in °antika within the proclaimed limit Vin I.239. Ussāsa {Ussasa} see nirussāsa. Ussāha {Ussaha} [Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, goodwill M II.174; S V.440; A I. 147; II.93, 195; III.75, 307; IV.320; V.93 sq.; Miln 323, 329 (dhiti +) Vism 330; Sdhp 49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA III.394; PvA 31, 106, 166; VvA 32, 48. - In exegetical literature often combd. with the quāsi synonym ussoḷhi e. g. at Nd2 s. v.; Dhs 13, 22, 289, 571. Ussāhana {Ussahana} (f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussāha Nett 8. Ussāhita {Ussahita} [pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati] determined, incited, encouraged, urged J I.329; VvA 109; PvA 201. Cp. sam°. Ussiñcati {Ussincati} [ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J I.450, II.70; IV.16; Miln 261. Pāli Text Society 383 Pāli-English Dictionary Ussiñcana {Ussincana} (nt.) [fr. ussiñcati] drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting J I.417. Ussita {Ussita} [Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti] erected, high S V.228; Th 1, 424 (pannaddhaja); J V.386; Vv 841Q; VvA 339. Cp. sam°. Ussīsaka {Ussisaka} (nt.) [ud + sīsa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for the head J I.266; II.410, 443; IV.154; V.99; VI.32, 37, 56; DhA I.184 (°passe, opp. pāda-passe). Ussuka {Ussuka} (adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3168] - 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S I.15 (an° inactive); A IV.266; Sn 298. - 2. greedy, longing for Dh 199 (an°). Ussukita {Ussukita} (adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an° free from greed VvA 74. Ussukin {Ussukin} (adj.) [fr. ussuka] greedy, longing; only neg. an° Pug 23. Ussukka {Ussukka} (nt.) [*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Av. Ś I.85] zeal, energy, endeavour, hard work, eagerness Vin I.50; S IV.288, 291, 302; Nd2 s. v. Nett 29; VvA 147; PvA 5, 135; Vism 90 (āpajjati); 644 (°ppahānaṃ). - Cp. appossukka. Ussukkatā {Ussukkata} (f.) = ussukka A Y.195. Ussukkati {Ussukkati} [denom. fr. ussukka] to endeavour D I.230. - Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in, to perform VvA 95, 98, 243. See also ussakkati. Ussuta {Ussuta} (adj.) [pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta] defiled, lustful (cp. āsava), only neg. an° free from defilement Dh 400. uss. Ussussati {Ussussati} [ud + sussati of śuṣ] to dry up (intrs.) S I.126; III.149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Sn 985; J VI.195. Ussūra {Ussura} (adj) [ut + sūra] "sun-out", the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in °bhatta eating after mid-day, unpunctual meals A III.260, and °seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D III.184; DhA II.227. Besides as loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at evening Vin I 293; IV.77; J II.286, also in ati-ussūre too long after sunrise VvA 65; DhA III.305. Usseti {Usseti} [ud + śri] to erect, raise, stand up J IV 302; aor. ussesi J VI.203. - Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita (q. v.). Usseneti {Usseneti} [denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)] to draw on to oneself, to be friendly S III.89 (v. l. ussi°); A II.214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Ps II.167 (ussi°); Kvu I. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti. Usseḷheti {Usselheti} (?) Vin II.10 (for ussoḷh°?); cp. ussoḷhikāya. Ussota {Ussota} (adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussotaṃ as adv. "up-stream" Miln 117. Pāli Text Society 384 Pāli-English Dictionary Ussoḷhi {Ussolhi} (f.) [a by-form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical] exertion M I.103; S II.132; V.440; A. II. 93, 195; III.307; IV.320; V.93 sq. Often comḅd. with ussāha (q. v.). Ussoḷhikā {Ussolhika} (f.) [adj. of ussoḷhi] belonging to exertion, only in instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya "in the way of exertion", i. e. ardently, keenly, eagerly S I.170 (naccati). Uhunkara {Uhunkara} [onomat. uhu + kara, see under ulūka] an owl (lit. "uhu"-maker) J VI.538 (= ulūka C.). Pāli Text Society 385 Pāli-English Dictionary Ū Ūkā {Uka} (f.) [Sk. yūkā, prob. dialectical] a louse J I.453; II. 324; III.393; V.298; Miln 11; Vism 445; DhsA 307, 319; DhA III.342; VvA 86. is also used as linear measure (cp. Sk. yūkālikṣaṃ) VbhA 343 (where 7 likkhā are said to equal 1 ūkā). Ūtagītaṃ {Utagitam} at J I.290 in phrase "jimaṃ ūtagītaṃ gāyanto" read "imaṃ jūtagītaṃ g." Ūna {Una} (adj.) [Vedic ūna; cp. Av. ūna, Gr. eu)_nis, Lat. vāpus, Goth. wans, Ags. won = E. want] wanting, deficient, less M II.73; J V.330; DhA I.77; DhA IV.210. Mostly adverbially with numerals = one less, but one, minus (one or two); usually with eka (as ekūna one less, e. g. ekūna-aṭṭhasataṃ (799) J I.57; ekūna-paðcasate KhA 91, ekūna-vīsati (19) Vism 287; ekenɔ ūnesu paðcasu attabhāvasatesu (499) J I.167; also with eka in instr. as eken'ūnapaðcasatāni (deficient by one) Vin II.285; KhA 91; sometimes without eka, e. g. ūnapaðcasatāni (499) Vin III.284; ūnavīsati (19) Vin IV.130, 148. With "two" less: dvīhi ūnaṃ sahassaṃ (998) J I.255. anūna not deficient, complete PvA 285 (= paripuṇṇa). -udara (ūnudara, ūnūdara, ūnodara) an empty stomach, adj. Qof empty stomach; °udara J II.293; VI.295; °ūdara J VI.258; Miln 406; odara Sn 707; DhA I.170. -bhāva depletion, deficiency SnA 463 (v. l. hānabhāva). Ūnaka {Unaka} (adj.) [ūna + ka] deficient, wanting, lacking Vin III.81, 254; IV.263; Sn 721; Miln 310, 311, (°satta-vassika one who is not yet 7 years old), 414; DhA I.79. Ūnatta {Unatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. ūna] depletion, deficiency Vin II. 239; J V.450. Ūpāya {Upaya} at DhA II.93 stands for upāya. Ūpiya {Upiya} see upiya & opiya. Ūmika {Umika} [f. ūmi] wave Miln 197 (°vanka waterfall, cataract). Ūmī & Ūmi {Umi} (f.) [Sk. ūrmi, fr. Idg. *Ûel (see nibbāna I.2); cp. Gr. e)lu/w io wind, e(/lic wound; Lat. volvo to roll; Ags. wylm wave; Ohg. wallan; also Sk. ulva, varutra, valaya, valli, vṛṇoti. See details in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under volvo] a wave M I.460 (°bhaya); S IV.157; V.123 (°jāta); A III.232 sq. (id.); Sn 920; J II.216; III.262; IV.141; Miln 260 (°jāta). - Note. A parallel form of ūmī is ummī. Ūru {Uru} [Vedic ūru; cp. Lat. vārus bow-legged, of Idg. *Ûā, to which also Ohg. wado = Ger. wade calf of leg] the thigh Sn 610; Vin II.105 (in contrast with bāha); III. 106; J I.277; II.275, 443; III.82; V.89, 155; Nd2 659 (so read for uru); Vv 6413; DA I.135 = Vin II.190. -aṭṭhi(ka) the thigh bone M I.58; III.92; J I.428 (ūraṭṭhika); KhA 49, 50 (ūraṭṭhi). -(k)khambha stiffening or rigidity of the thigh, paralysis of the leg (as symptom of fright) M I.237; J V.23. Ūsa {Usa} [Sk. ūṣa] salt-ground; saline substance, always combd. with khāra S III 131 (°gandha); A I.209. Pāli Text Society 386 Pāli-English Dictionary Ūsara {Usara} (adj.) [Sk. ūṣara, fr. ūṣa] saline S IV.315; A IV.237; DhsA 243. - nt. °ṃ a spot with saline soil PvA 139 (gloss for ujjhangala). Ūha {Uha} see vy°, sam°. Ūhacca1 {Uhacca} (indecl.) [ger. of ūharati, ud + hṛ (or ava + hṛ, cp. ohacca & oharati) for uddharati 1 & 2] - 1. lifting up, raising or rising J III.206. - 2. pulling out, taking away, removing D II.254 (cp. DhA II.181); S I.27 (v. l. for ohacca); Sn 1119 (= uddharitvā uppāṭayitvā Nd2 171). Ūhacca2 {Uhacca} (indecl.) [ger. of ūhanati2 = ūhadati] soiling by defecation, defecating J II.71 (= vaccaṃ katvā C.). Ūhaññati {Uhannati} [Pass. of ūhanati1] to be soiled; to be disturbed aor. ūhaðði Vin I.48; M I.116; aor. also ūhani M I.243. Ūhata1 {Uhata} [pp. of ud + hṛ or dhṛ thus for uddhaṭa as well as uddhata] - 1. lifted, risen, raised Vin III.70; J V.403. - 2. taken out, pulled out, destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Th 1, 514; Dh 338 (= ucchinna DhA IV.48). - 3. soiled with excrements Vin II.222. Ūhata2 {Uhata} [pp. of ūhanati1] disturbed M I.116. Ūhadati {Uhadati} [for ūhanati2 (?) or formed secondarily fr. ūhacca or ohacca?] to defecate J II.355; DhA II.181 (so read with v. l. for T. ūhadayati). Ūhana {Uhana} (nt.) [fr. ūhanati?] reasoning, consideration, examination Miln 32 ("comprehension" trsl.; as characteristic of manasikāra); Vism 142 = DhsA 114 ("prescinding" trsl.; as characteristic of vitakka). Ūhanati1 {Uhanati} [ud + han] to disturb, shake up, defile, soil M I.243; J II.73. - Pass. aor. ūhani: see ūhaððati. - pp. ūhata2 (q. v.). Cp. sam°. Ūhanati2 {Uhanati} [either ud + han or ava + han, cp. ohanati] 1. to cut off, discharge, emit, defecate Vin I.78; III.227. - 2. [prob. for ūharati, cp. ūhacca1] to lift up, to take away M I.117 (opp. odahati). Cp. ohana in bimb ohana. - ger. ūhacca2 (q. v.). Ūharati {Uharati} [for uddharati] only in forms of ger. ūhacca1 and pp. ūhata1 (q. v.). Ūhasati {Uhasati} [either ud or ava + has, cp. avahasati] to laugh at, deride, mock A III.91; J V.452 (+ pahasati); Pug 67 (= avahasati Pug A 249). Ūhasana {Uhasana} (nt.) [fr. ūhasati] laughing, mocking Miln 127. Ūhā {Uha} (f.) [etym.?] life, only in cpd. āyūha lifetime PvA 136, 162 (°pariyosāna). - As N. of a river at Miln 70. - Cp. BSk. ūhā in ūhāpoha Av. S I.209, 235. Pāli Text Society 387 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāli Text Society 388 Pāli-English Dictionary E Eka {Eka} (adj.-num.) [Vedic eka, i. e. e-ka to Idg. *oi as in Av. aēva, Gr. oi)_os one, alone; and also with diff. suffix in Lat. ū-nus, cp. Gr. oi)no/s (one on the dice), Goth. etc. ains = E. one] one. Eka follows the pron. declension, i. e. nom. pl. is eke (e. g. Sn 43, 294, 780 etc.) - 1. "one" as number, either with or without contrast to two or more; often also "single" opp. to nānā various, many (q. v.). Very frequent by itself as well as with other numerals, ekangula one thumb Mhvs 29, 11; DhA III. 127; ekapasse in one quarter DhA II.52; ekamaccha a single fish J I.222. In enumeration: eka dve pañca dasa DhA I.24. With other numerals: eka-tiṃsa (31) D II.2; °saṭṭhi (61) Vin I.20; °navuti (91) DhA I.97; °sata (101) DhA II.14. Cp. use of "one less" in ekūna (see under cpds. & ūna). - 2. (as predicative and adj.) one, by oneself, one only, alone, solitary A III.67 (ek-uddesa); J I.59 (ekadivasena on the one day only, i. e. on the same day); Dh 395; Sn 35, 1136 (see Nd2 172a), ekaṃ ekaṃ one by one S I 104 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ phusāyati rains drop by drop), cp. ekameka. - 3. a certain one, some one, some; adj. in function of an indefinite article = a, one (definite or indefinite): ekasmiṃ samaye once upon a time J I.306; ekena upāyena by some means J III.393; ekaṃ kulaṃ gantuṃ to a certain clan (corresp. with asuka) DhA I.45; ekadivasaṃ one day J I.58; III.26; PvA 67. Cp. Sn 1069 (see Nd2 172b). - All these three categories are found represented in freq. cpds., of which the foll. are but a small selection. -akkhi see °pokkhara. -agga calm, tranquil (of persons just converted), collected [cp. Buddh. Sk. ekāgra Jtm 3170] S IV.125; A I.70, 266; II.14, 29; III.175 (°citta), 391; Sn 341; J I.88; Nett 28, cp. Miln 139. -aggatā concentration; capacity to individualise; contemplation, tranquillity of mind (see on term Cpd. 16, 1785, 237, 240) S V.21, 197, 269 (cittassa); A I.36; IV.40; Dhs 11 (cittassa); Vism 84. -anga a part, divisioh, some- thing belonging to J III.308; Ud 69. -angaṇa one (clear) space J II.357. -āgārika a thief, robber D I.52, 166; A I.154, 295; II.206; III.129; Nd1 416; Nd2 304 III.A. DA I.159 (= ekam eva gharaṃ parivāretvā vilumpanaṃ DA I.159). -āyana leading to one goal, direct way or "leading to the goal as the one & only way (magga) M I.63; S V.167, 185. -ārakkha having one protector or guardian D III.269; A V.29 sq. ālopika = ekāgārika D I.166; A I.295; II.206. -āsana sitting or living alone M I.437; Sn 718; Dh 305; J V.397; Miln 342; Vism 60 (expld. with reference to eating, viz. ekāsane bhojanaṃ ekāsanaṃ, perhaps comparing āsana with asana2. The foll. °āsanika is ibid. expld. as "taṃ sīlam assā ti ekāsaniko"). -āsanika one who keeps to himself Miln 20, 216; Vism 69. -āha one day M I.88; usually in cpd. ekāhadvîhaṃ one or two days J I.255; DhA I.391. -āhika of or for one day D I.166. -uttarika(-nikāya) is another title for Anguttarika-nikāya Miln 392. -ūna one less, minus one, usually as 1st part of a numeral cpd., like °vīsati (20-1 = 19) DhA I.4; °paððāsa (49) J III.220; °saṭṭhi (59) DhA III.412; °paðcasatā (499) DhA II.204. See ūna. -eka one by one, each, severally, one to each D II.18 (°loma); III.144 (id.), 157; J I.222; DhA I.101 (ekekassa no ekekaṃ māsaṃ one month for each of us); II.114; VvA 256; PvA 42, 43. -ghana compact, solid, hard Dh 81. -cara wandering or living alone, solitary S I.16; Sn 166, 451; Dh 37. -cariyā walking alone, solitude Dh 61; Sn 820. -cārin = °cara Miln 105. -cittakkhaṇika of the duration of one thought Vism 138. -cintin "thinking one thing (only)", simple Miln 92. -thūpa (all) in one heap, mixed up, together J V.17 (= sūkarapotakā viya C.). -doṇikā(-nāvā) a trough-shaped canoe with an outrigger J VI.305. -paṭalika having a single sole (of sandals, upāhanā) Vism 125. -paṭṭa single cloth (cp. dupaṭṭa) Vism 109. -padika(-magga) a small (lit. for one foot) foot-path J I.315; V.491. -pala one carat worth (see pala) Vism 339. -passayika is to be read ekɔapassayika (see under apa°). -pahārena all at once Vism 418; DhsA 333. -piṭaka knowing one Piṭaka Vism 62. puttika having only one son KhA 237. -purisika (itthi) (a woman) true to one man J I.290. pokkhara a sort of drum J VI.21, 580 (C. explns. by ek-akkhi-bherī). -bījin having only one Pāli Text Society 389 Pāli-English Dictionary (more) seed, i. e. destined to be reborn only once S V.205; A I.233; IV.380; Nett 189. -bhattika having one meal a day A I.212; III.216; J I.91. -bhattakinī a woman true to one husband J III.63. -rajja sole sovereignty Dh 178; PvA 74. -rājā universal king J I.47 (of the Sun). -vāciya a single remark or objection J II.353. -vāraṃ once J I.292; °vārena id. DhA I.10. -sadisa fully alike or resembling, identical J I.291. -sama equal J VI.261. -sāṭa & sāṭaka having a single vestment, a "one-rober" S I.78 (°ka); Ud 65. Ekaṃsa1 {Ekamsa} (adj.) [eka + aṃsa1] belonging to one shoulder, on or with one shoulder; only in phṛase ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsangaṃ karoti to arrange the upper robe over one shoulder (the left) Vin I.46; II.188 & passim. Ekaṃsa2 {Ekamsa} [eka + aṃsa1 or better aṃsa2] "one part or point", i. e. one-pointedness, definiteness; affirmation, certainty, absoluteness D I.153; A II.46; Sn 427, 1027; J III.224 (ekaṃsatthe nipāto for "nūna"); SnA 414 (°vacana for "taggha"). - Opp. an° Miln 225. - instr. ekaṃsena as adv. for certain, absolutely, definitely, inevitably D I.122, 161, 162; M I.393; S IV.326; A V.190; J I.150; III. 224; PvA 11. Ekaṃsika {Ekamsika} (adj.) [fr. ekaṃsa2] certain D I.189, 191; an° uncertain, indefinite D I.191. Ekaṃsikatā {Ekamsikata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ekaṃsika] as neg. an° indefiniteness Miln 93. Ekaka {Ekaka} (adj.) [eka + ka] single, alone, solitary Vin II.212; J I.255; II.234; IV.2. - f. ekikā Vin IV.229; J I.307; III.139. Ekacca {Ekacca} (adj.) [der. fr. eka with suffix *tya, implying likeness or comparison, lit. "onelike", cp. E. one-like = one-ly = only] one, certain, definite D I.162, A I.8; often in pl. ekacce some, a few D I.118; A V.194; Th 2, 216; J II. 129; III.126. See also app° under api. Ekaccika (adj.) [fr. ekacca] single, not doubled (of cloth, opp. to diguṇa) J V.216 (°vasana = eka-paṭṭa-nivattha). {Ekaccika} Ekacciya {Ekacciya} (adj.) = ekacca S I.199; J IV.259; acc. as adv. °ṃ once, single Vin I.289 (cp. Vin Texts II.212). Ekajjhaṃ {Ekajjham} (adv.) [fr. eka, cp. literary Sk. aikadhyaṃ, but BSk. ekadhyaṃ M Vastu I.304] in the same place, in conjunction, together Miln 144 (karoti), KhA 167; SnA 38. Ekato {Ekato} (adv.) [abl. formation fr. eka, cp. Sk. ekataḥ] - 1. on the one side (opp. on the other) J III.51; IV.141. - 2. together J II.415; III.57 (vasanto), 52 (sannipatanti), 391; IV.390; DhA I.18. ekato karoti to put together, to collect VvA 3. ekato hutvā "coming to one", agreeing DhA I.102, cp. ekato ahesuṃ J I.201. Ekatta {Ekatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. eka] - 1. unity D I.31. - 2. loneliness, solitude, separation Sn 718; Th 1, 49; Miln 162; J VI.64; VvA 202 (= ekībhāva). Ekattatā {Ekattata} (f.) [fr. ekatta] unity, combination, unification, concentration Nett 4, 72 sq, 107 sq. Pāli Text Society 390 Pāli-English Dictionary Ekadatthu {Ekadatthu} (adv.) [eka-d-atthu, cp. aññadatthu] once, definitely, specially J III.105 (= ekaṃsena C.). Ekadā {Ekada} (adv.) [fr. eka] once, at the same time, at one time, once upon a time S I.162; Sn 198; DhA II.41; Miln 213. Ekanta {Ekanta} (adj.) [Sk. ekānta] one-sided, on one end, with one top, topmost (°-) usually in function of an adv. as °-, meaning "absolutely, extremely, extraordinary, quite" etc. - 1. (lit.) at one end, only in °lomin a woollen coverlet with a fringe at one end D I.7 (= ekato dasaṃ uṇṇāmayɔ attharaṇaṃ keci ekato uggata-pupphan ti vadanti DA I.87); Vin I.192; II.163, 169; A I.181. - 2. (fig.) extremely, very much, in freq. combns; e. g. °kāḷaka A III.406; IV. 11; °gata S V.225; A III.326; °dukkha M I.74; S II.173; III.70 (+ sukha); A V.289; °dussīlya DhA III.153; °nibbida A III.83; IV.143; °paripuṇṇa S II.219; V.204; °manāpa S IV.238; °sukha A II.231; III.409; °sukhin DA I.119 etc. Ekantarika {Ekantarika} (adj.) [eka + antarika] with one in between, alternate J IV.195, °bhāvena (instr. adv.) in alternation, alternately Vism 374; ekantarikāya (adv.) with intervals Vism 244. Ekamantaṃ {Ekamantam} (adv.) [eka + anta, acc. in adv. function, cp. BSk. ekamante M Vastu I.35] on one side, apart, aside Vin I.47, 94 = II.272; D I.106; Sn p. 13 (expld. at SnA 140 as follows: bhāvana-puṃsaka-niddeso, ekɔokāsaṃ ekapassan ti vuttaṃ hoti, bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ); Sn 580, 1009, 1017; J I.291; II.102, 111; SnA 314, 456. - Also in loc. ekamante on one side DhA I.40. Ekameka {Ekameka} (adj.) [eka-m-eka, cp. BSk. ekameka M Vastu III.358] one by one, each A V.173; Vv 782. Ekavidha {Ekavidha} (adj.) [eka + vidha] of one kind, single, simple Vism 514; adv. ekavidhā singly, simply Vism 528. Ekaso {Ekaso} (adv.) [Sk. ekaśaḥ] singly, one by one J III.224 (an°). Ekākiya {Ekakiya} (adj.) alone, solitary Th 1, 541; Miln 398. Ekādasa {Ekadasa} (num.) [Sk. ekādaśa] eleven Vin I.19. - num. ord. ekādasama the eleventh Sn 111, 113. Ekānika {Ekanika} (adj) = ekākiya; instr. ekānikena as adv. "by oneself" Miln 402. Ekikā {Ekika} see ekaka. Ekībhāva {Ekibhava} [eka + bhāva, with ī for a in compn. with bhū] being alone, loneliness, solitude D III 245; M II.250; A III.289; V.89, 164; Vism 34; SnA 92, 93; DhA II.103; VvA 202; DA I.253, 309. Ekodi {Ekodi} (adj.) [most likely eka + odi for odhi, see avadhi2 & cp. avadahati, avadahana, lit. of one attention, limited to one point. Thus also suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1885, 32 sq. The Pāli Text Society 391 Pāli-English Dictionary word was Sanskritised into ekoti, e. g. at M Vastu III.212, 213; Lal. Vist. 147, 439] concentrated, attentive, fixed A III.354; Nd1 478. Usually in compn. with kṛ & bhū (which points however to a form ekoda° with the regular change of a to i in connection with these roots!), as ekodikaroti to concentrate M I.116; S IV. 263; °bhavati to become settled S IV.196; V.144; °bhūta concentrated Sn 975; °bhāva concentration, fixing one's mind on one point D I.37; III.78, 131; A I.254; III.24; Vism 156 (expld. as eko udeti); Dhs 161 (cp. Dhs trsln. 46); DhsA 169; Nett 89. Ejā {Eja} (f.) [to iðj, q. v. and see ānejja. There is also a Sk. root ej to stir, move] motion, turbulence, distraction, seduction, craving S IV.64; Sn 791; It 91; Nd1 91, 353; Dhs 1059 (cp. Dhs trslu. 277); VvA 232. - aneja (adj.) unmoved, undisturbed, calm, passionless S I.27, 141, 159; III.83; IV.64; A II.15; Nd1 353; VvA 107. Eṭṭha {Ettha} [pp. of ā + iṣ] see pariy°; do. °eṭṭhi. Eṭṭhi {Etthi} (f.) [fr. eṭṭha, ā + iṣ, cp. Sk. eṣṭi] desire, wish, in combn. with gaveṭṭhi pariyeṭṭhi etc. Vbh 353 = Vism 23, 29 etc. Eṇi {Eni} (f.) [etym.? dial.] a kind of antelope, only two foll. cpds.: °jangha "limbed like the antelope" (one of the physical characteristics of the Superman) D II.17; III.143, 156; M II.136; S I.16; Sn 165; °miga the eṇi deer J V.416; SnA 207, 217. Eṇeyya {Eneyya} D III.157; J VI.537 sq., & Eṇeyyaka A I.48; II. 122; J V.155 Nd2 604 = eṇi. Etad {Etad} (pron. adj.) [Vedic etad, of pron. base *e; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under equidem] demonstr. pron. "this", with on the whole the same meaning and function as tad, only more definite and emphatic. Declined like tad. Cases: nt. sg. etad (poetical-archaic form) A II.17; Sn 274, 430, 822, 1087; J I.61, 279; & etaṃ (the usual form) Sn 51, 207, 1036, 1115; J II.159; pl. etāni Sn 52; J II.159. - m. sg. esa Sn 81, 416, 1052; J I.279; II. 159; Miln 18; DhA I.18; & eso Sn 61, 312, 393; J VI. 336; pl. ete Sn 188, 760; J I.223. - f. sg. esā Sn 80, 451; J I.307; pl. etā Sn 297, 897; J II.129. - Oblique cases: gen. dat. etassa J II.159; f. etissā J III.280; instr. etena Sn 655; J I.222; pl. loc. etesu Sn 248, 339, 1055; f. etāsu Sn 607. Other cases regular & frequent. Etarahi {Etarahi} (adv.) [Sk. etarhi, cp. tarahi & carahi] now, at present D I.29, 151, 179, 200; II.3; J I.215 (opp. tadā); III.82; VI.364 (instead of paccuppanna). Etādisa {Etadisa} (adj.) [etad + disa, of dṛś, cp. Sk. etādṛśa] such, such like, of this kind D II.157; Sn 588, 681, 836; Pv I. 94; IV.186 (= edisa yathā-vutta-rūpa PvA 243); PvA II.71. Eti {Eti} [P. eti represents Sk. eti as well as ā-eti, i. e. to go and to come (here); with Sk. eti cp. Av. aeiti, Gr. ei)_si, Lat. eo, it; Goth. iddja went, Obulg. iti, Oir. etha] to go, go to, reach; often (= ā + eti) to come back, return Sn 364, 376, 666 (come); J VI.365 (return); ppr. ento J III.433 (acc. suriyaṃ atthaṃ entaṃ the setting sun); imper. 2nd sg. ehi only in meaning "come" (see separately), 3rd etu D I.60; 2nd pl. etha D I.211; Sn 997; J II.129; DhA I.95 (in admission formula "etha bhikkhavo" come ye [and be] bhikkhus! See ehi bhikkhu). - fut. essati J VI.190, 365, & ehiti J II.153; 2nd sg. ehisi Dh 236, 369. - pp. ita (q. v.). Etta {Etta} (adv.) [= Sk. atra, see also ettha] there, here Pv I.56 (sic; cp. KhA 254 note). Pāli Text Society 392 Pāli-English Dictionary Ettaka {Ettaka} (adj.) [etta + ka, contrasting-comparative function, cp. tattaka] so much, this much, according to context referring either to deficiency or abundance, thus developing 2 meanings, viz. (1) just as much (& no more), only so little, all this, just this, such a small number, a little; pl. so few, just so many D I.117 (opp. aparimāṇa), 124; A IV.114; Nd2 304III. (ettakena na tussati is not satisfied with this much); Vv 7912 (cp. VvA 307); Miln 10, 18 (alaṃ ettakena enough of this much); DhA I.90 (enough, this much), 93, 399 (pl. ettakā); II.54 (only one), 174 sq.; VvA 233 (a little), 323. - ettakaṃ kālaṃ a short time (but see also under 2) J I.34; DhA II.20. - (2) ever so much (and not less), so much, pl. so many, ever so many, so & so many, such a lot A III.337; J I.207 (pl. ettakā), 375 (nt. ettakaṃ); III.80 (id.), 94 (°ṃ dhanaṃ such great wealth); Miln 37 (pl.); DhA I.392, 396 (pl. f. ettikā), 397, 398; II.14, 89 (pl.), 241 (pl. so many); VvA 65 (dhanaṃ). - ettakaṃ kālaṃ for some time, such a long time (see also above, under 1) DhA II.62, 81; III.318; VvA 330. Ettato {Ettato} (adv.) [with double suffix for *atra-taḥ] from here, therefore S I.185. Ettāvatā {Ettavata} (adv.) [fr. etta = ettaka, cp. kittāvatā: kittaka] so far, to that extent, even by this much D I.205, 207; S II.17; Sn 478; Vv 556 (cp. VvA 248); Pv IV.167; Miln 14; DA I.80; SnA 4; PvA 243. Etto {Etto} (adv.) [in analogy to ito fr. *et°, as ito fr. *it°] orig. abl. of etad; from this, from it, thence, hence, out of here Sn 448, 875; J I.223 (opp. ito), V.498; Pv I.11; II.104; DhA II.80 (ito vā etto vā here & there); PvA 103. Ettha {Ettha} (adv.) [= Sk. atra, cp. etta] here, in this place; also temporal "now", & modal "in this case, in this matter" D II.12; S V.375; Dh 174; Sn 61, 171, 424, 441, 502, 1037, & freq. passim. Edisa {Edisa} (adj.) [Sk. īdṛśa] such like, such Vv 373; PvA 69, 243. Edisaka {Edisaka} = edisa Sn 313. Edha {Edha} [Sk. edhaḥ, cp. idhma, inddhe; Gr. ai)_qos, a)i/qw, Lat. aedes, Ohg. eit, Ags. ād funeral pile, etc. See idhuma & iṭṭhaka] fuel, fire etc. Only in adj. neg. an° without fuel J IV.26. Edhati {Edhati} [edh, cp. iddhati] to prosper, succeed in, increase S I.217 (sukhaṃ); Sn 298; Dh 193; J I.223; III.151. - sukh°edhita at Vin III.13 is better read as sukhe ṭhita, as at J VI.219. Ena {Ena} , cp. ein] only used in acc. enaṃ (taṃ enaṃ) "him, this one, the same" Sn 583, 981, 1114; Dh 118, 313; J III.395; Nd2 304III.B. See also naṃ. Eraka1 {Eraka} (adj.) [fr. ereti] driving away, moving J IV.20 (°vāta); °vattika a certain kind of torture M I.87 = A I.47 = II.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. Eraka2 {Eraka} (nt.) [fr. ereti] Typha-grass J IV.88. As eragu(?) a kind of grass used for making coverlets Vin I.196 (eraka Bdhgh. on D I.166). Eraṇḍa {Eranda} [dial.?] the castor oil plant Nd2 680II.; J II.440. Cp. elaṇḍa. Pāli Text Society 393 Pāli-English Dictionary Erāvaṇa {Eravana} N. of Indra's elephant Sn 379; Vv 4413; VvA 15. Erita {Erita} [pp. of ereti] moved, shaken, driven J IV.424; Vv 394, 424; Th 1, 104, Pv II.123; Vism 172 (+ samerita), 342 (vāt° moved by the wind). Cp. īrita. Ereti {Ereti} [=īreQ (q. v.) Caus. of īr, Sk. īrayati] to move, set into motion, raise (one's voice) M I.21; Sn 350 (eraya imper.); Th 1, 209 (eraye); J IV.478. - pp. erita (q.v.). Ela {Ela} (nt.) [?] salt(?) or water(?) in elambiya (= el°ambu-ja) born in (salt) water Sn 845 (= elasaððaka ambumhi jāta); Nd1 202 (elaṃ vuccati udakaṃ). Elaṇḍa {Elanda} = eraṇḍa (?) M I.124. Elambaraka {Elambaraka} [?] N. of a creeping vine J VI.536. Elāluka & Eḷāluka {Elaluka} (nt.) [etym.?] a kind of cucumber(?) Vv 3329; J I.205; V.37; DhA I.278. Eḷa {Ela} (nt.) [Sk. enas] in eḷamūga deaf & dumb A II.252; III.436; IV.226; Miln 20, 251 (cp. Miln trsl. II.71). A rather strange use and expln. of eḷamūga (with ref. to a snake "spitting") we find at J III.347, where it is expld. as "eḷa-paggharantena mukhena eḷamūgaṃ" i. e. called eḷamūga because of the saliva (foam?) dripping from its mouth, v. l. elamukha. - Cp. neḷa & aneḷa. Eḷaka1 {Elaka} [?] a threshold (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 146) Vin II.149 (°pādaka-pītha, why not "having feet resembling those of a ram"? Cp. Vin Texts III.165 "a chair raised on a pedestal"); D I.166; A I.295; II.206. The word & its meaning seems uncertain. Eḷaka2 {Elaka} [Sk. eḍaka] a ram, a wild goat Sn 309; Vism 500 (in simile); J I.166; Pug A 233 (= urabbha). - f. eḷakā S II.228, eḷakī Th 2, 438, eḷikī J III.481. Eḷagala {Elagala} see aneḷa. Eḷagalā {Elagala} (f.) [dial.?] the plant Cassia Tora (cp. Sk. eḍagaja the ringworm-shrub, Cassia Alata, after Halāyudha), J III. 222 (= kambojī C.). Eḷagga {Elagga} in kāmāmis° at PvA 107 is to be read kāmāmise lagga°. Eva {Eva} (adv.) [Vedic eva] emphatic part "so, even, just"; very freq. in all contexts & combns. - 1. eva J I.61 (ajjɔeva this veryday), 278 (tathɔeva likewise); II.113 (ahaṃ e. just I), 154 (ekam e. just one), 160 (attano e. his very own). - 2. eva often appears with prothetic (sandhi-)y as yeva, most frequently after i and e, but also after the other vowels and ṃ, cp. J I.293, 307; II.110, 128, 129, 159; IV.3; VI.363. - 3. After ṃ eva also takes the form of ñeva, mostly with assimilation of ṃ to ñ, viz. tañ ñeva J I.223; tasmiñ ñeva J I.139; ahañ ñeva Miln 40. - 4. After long vowels eva is often shortened to va (q. v.). -rūpa (1) such, like that Sn 279, 280; It 108; J II. 352, etc. - (2) of such form, beauty or virtue J I.294; III.128, etc. Pāli Text Society 394 Pāli-English Dictionary Evaṃ {Evam} (adv.) [Vedic evaṃ] so, thus, in this way, either referring to what precedes or what follows, e. g. (1) thus (as mentioned, expld. at Vism 528 as "niddiṭṭha-nayanidassana") D I.193 (evaṃ sante this being being so), 195 (id.); Vin II.194 (evaṃ bhante, yes); J I.222; Pv II.1312 evaṃ etaṃ, just so). - (2) thus (as follows) M I. 483 (evaṃ me sutaṃ "thus have I heard"). Often combd. with similar emphatic part., as evam eva kho "in just the same way" (in final conclusions) D I.104, 199, 228, 237, 239; in older form evaṃ byā kho (= evam iva kho) Vin II.26; IV.134 = DA I.27; evam evaṃ "just so" D I.51; Sn 1115; evaṃ kho D I.113; evam pi Sn 1134; evaṃ su D I.104; etc. etc. -diṭṭhin holding such a view M I.484. -nāma having that name M I.429. Esa1 {Esa} see etad. Esa2 {Esa} (adj.) = esin Sn 286. Esati {Esati} [ā + iṣ1 with confusion of iṣ1 and iṣ2, icchati, see also ajjhesati, anvesati, pariyesati] to seek, search, strive for Sn 592 (esāno ppr. med.), 919; Dh 131. Esanā {Esana} (f.) [fr. esati] desire, longing, wish D III.216, 270; M I.79; S V.54, 139; A I.93; II.41; V.31; VvA 83; PvA 98, 163, 265. See also anesanā, isi & pariy°. Esanī {Esani} (f.) [fr. iṣ] a surgeon's probe M II.256. Esabha {Esabha} (-°) a by-form of usabha (q. v.), in cpd. rathesabha. Esika {Esika} (nt.) & Esikā1 (f.) [a by-form of isīkā] a pillar, post A IV.106, 109. Freq. in cpd. °ṭṭhāyin as stable as a pillar D I.14; S III.202, 211, 217; DA I.105. Esikā2 {Esika} desire, see abbūḷha. Esin {Esin} (adj.) [Sk. eṣin, of iṣ] seeking, wishing, desiring S II.11 (sambhav°); J I.87 (phal°); IV.26 (dukkham°); Pv II.928 (gharam); PvA 132. Ehi {Ehi} [imper. of eti] come, come here Sn 165; J II 159; VI. 367; DhA I.49. In the later language part. of exhortation = Gr. a)/ge, Lat. age, "come on" DhA II.91; PvA 201 (+ tāva = a)/ge dh/). ehipassika (adj.) [ehi + passa + ika] of the Dhamma, that which invites every man to come to see for himself, open to all, expld. at Vism 216 as "ehi, passa imaṃ dhamman ti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehi-passavidhaṃ arahatī ti", D II.217; III.5, 227; S I.9; IV.41, 272; V.343; A I.158; II.198. ehibhadantika one who accepts an invitation D I.166; M I.342; II.161; A I.295; II.206. ehi bhikkhu "come bhikkhu!" the oldest formula of admission to the order Vin I.12; III.24; DhA I.87; J I.82; f. ehi bhikkhunī Vin IV.214 pl. etha bhikkhavo DhA I.95. ehibhikkhu-pabbajjā initiation into Bhikkhuship SnA 456. ehibhikkhubhāva -state of being invited to join the Sangha, admission to the Order J I.82, 86; DhA II.32; SnA 456. ehisāgata-(& svāgata-)vādin a man of courtesy (lit. one who habitually says: "come you are welcome") D I.116; Vin II.11; III.181. Pāli Text Society 395 Pāli-English Dictionary O O {O} Initial o in Pali may represent a Vedic o or a Vedic au (see ojas, ogha, etc.). Or it may be guṇa of u (see oḷārika, opakammika, etc.). But it is usually a prefix representing Vedic ava. The form in o is the regular use in old Pali; there are only two or three cases where ava, for metrical or other reasons, introduced. In post-canonical Pali the form in ava is the regular one. For new formations we believe there is no exception to this rule. But the old form in o has in a few cases, survived. Though o; standing alone, is derived from ava, yet compounds with o are almost invariably older than the corresponding compounds with ava (see note on ogamana). Oka {Oka} (nt.) [Vedic okas (nt.), fr. uc to like, thus orig. "comfort", hence place of comfort, sheltered place, habitation. The indigenous interpretation connects oka partly with okāsa = fig. room (for rising), chance, occasion (thus Nd1 487 on Sn 966: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see anoka; SnA 573 ibid.; SnA 547: see below), partly with udaka (as contraction): see below on Dh 34. Geiger (P. Gr. § 20) considers oka to be a direct contraction of udaka (via *udaka, *utka, *ukka, *okka). The customary synomym for oka (both lit. & fig.) is ālaya] resting place, shelter, resort; house, dwelling; fig. (this meaning according to later commentators prevailing in anoka, liking, fondness, attachment to (worldly things) S III.9 = Sn 844 (okam pahāya; oka here is expld. at SnA 547 by rūpa-vatthɔ ādi-viññaṇassɔ okāso); S V.24 = A V. 232 = Dh 87 (okā anokam āgamma); Dh 34 (oka-m-okata ubbhato, i. e. oka-m-okato from this & that abode, from all places, thus taken as okato, whereas Bdhgh. takes it as okasya okato and interprets the first oka as contracted form of udaka, water, which happens to fit in with the sense required at this passage, but is not warranted other- wise except by Bdhgh's quotation "okapuṇṇehi cīvarehī ti ettha udakaṃ". This quot. is taken from Vin I.253, which must be regarded as a corrupt passage cp. remarks of Bdhgh. on p. 387: oghapuṇṇehī ti pi pāṭho. The rest of his interpretation at DhA I.289 runs: "okaṃ okaṃ pahāya aniketa-sārī ti ettha ālayo, idha (i. e. at Dh 34) ubhayam pi labbhati okamokato udaka-sankhātā ālayā ti attho", i. e. from the water's abode. Bdhgh's expln. is of course problematic); Dh 91 (okam okaṃ jahanti "they leave whatever shelter they have", expld. by ālaya DhA II.170). -cara (f. °carikā J VI.416; °cārikā M I.117) living in the house (said of animals), i. e. tame (cp. same etym. of "tame" = Lat. domus, domesticus). The passage M I. 117, 118 has caused confusion by oka being taken as "water". But from the context as well as from C. on J VI.416 it is clear that here a tame animal is meant by means of which other wild ones are caught. The passage at M I.117 runs "odaheyya okacaraṃ ṭhapeyya okacārikaṃ" i. e. he puts down a male decoy and places a female (to entice the others), opp. "ūhaneyya o. nāseyya o." i. e. takes away the male & kills the female. -(ñ)jaha giving up the house (and its comfort), renouncing (the world), giving up attachment Sn 1101 (= ālayaṃjahaṃ SnA 598; cp. Nd2 176 with v. l. oghaṃjaha). anoka houseless, homeless, comfortless, renouncing, free from attachment: see separately. Okaḍḍhati {Okaddhati} [o + kaḍḍhati] to drag away, remove Th 2, 444. See also ava°. Okantati {Okantati} (okkant°) [o + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve; pres. okantati M I. 129; Pv III.102 (= ava° PvA 213); ger. okantitvā J I. 154 (migaṃ o. after carving the deer); PvA 192 (piṭṭhi- maṃsāni), & okacca J IV.210 (T. okkacca, v. l. BB ukk°; C. expls. by okkantitvā). - pp. avakanta & avakantita. Pāli Text Society 396 Pāli-English Dictionary Okappati {Okappati} [o + kappati] to preface, arrange, make ready, settle on, feel confident, put (trust) in Vin IV.4; Ps II.19 (= saddahati ibid. 21); Miln 150, 234; DA I.243. Okappanā {Okappana} (f.) [o + kappanā] fixing one's mind (on), settling in, putting (trust) in, confidence Dhs 12, 25, 96, 288; Nett 15, 19, 28; Vbh 170. Okappeti {Okappeti} [o + kappeti] to fix one's mind on, to put one's trust in M I.11; Miln 234 (okappessati). Okampeti {Okampeti} [o + Caus. of kamp] to shake, to wag, only in phrase sīsaṃ okampeti to shake one's head M I.108, 171; S I.118. Okassati {Okassati} [o + kassati, see also apakassati & avakaḍḍhati] to drag down, draw or pull away, distract, remove. Only in ger. okassa, always combd. with pasayha "removing by force" D II.74 (T. okk°); A IV.16 (T. okk°, v.l. ok°), 65 (id.); Miln 210. Also in Caus. okasseti to pull out, draw out Th 2, 116 (vaṭṭiṃ = dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍheti ThA 117). [MSS. often spell okk°]. Okāra [o + kāra fr. karoti, BSk. okāra, e. g. M Vastu III. 357] only in stock phrase kāmānaṃ ādīnavo okāro sankileso D I.110, 148 (= lāmaka-bhāva DA I 277); M I.115, 379, 405 sq.; II.145; A IV.186; Nett 42 (v. l. vokāra); DhA I.6, 67. The exact meaning is uncertain. Etymologically it would be degradation. But Bdhgh. prefers folly, vanity, and this suits the context better. {Okara} Okāsa {Okasa} [ava + kāś to shine] - 1. lit. "visibility", (visible) space as geometrical term, open space, atmosphere, air as space D I.34 (ananto okāso); Vism 184 (with disā & pariccheda), 243 (id.); PvA 14 (okāsaṃ pharitvā permeating the atmosphere). This meaning is more pronounced in ākāsa. - 2. "visibility", i. e. appearance, as adj. looking like, appearing. This meaning closely resembles & often passes over into meaning 3, e. g. katokāsa kamma when the k. makes its appearance = when its chance or opportunity arises PvA 63; okāsaṃ deti to give one's appearance, i. e. to let any one see, to be seen by (dat.) PvA 19. - 3. occasion, chance, opportunity, permission, consent, leave A I.253; IV.449; J IV.413 (vātassa o. natthi the wind has no access); SnA 547. - In this meaning freq. in combn. with foll. verbs: (a) okāsaṃ karoti to give permission, to admit, allow; to give a chance or opportunity, freq. with paðhassa veyyākaraṇāya (to ask a question), e. g. D I.51, 205; M II.142; S IV 57. - Vin I.114, 170; Nd1 487; PvA 222. - Caus. °ṃ karoti Vin II.5, 6, 276; Caus. II. °ṃ kārāpeti Vin I.114, 170. - katokāsa given permission (to speak), admitted in audience, granted leave Sn 1031; VvA 65 (raððā); anokāsakata without having got permission Vin I.114. - (b) okāsaṃ yācati to ask permission M II.123. - (c) okāsaṃ deti to give permission, to consent, give room J II.3; VvA 138. - (d) with bhū: anokāsa-bhāva want of opportunity Sdhp 15; anokāsa-bhūta not giving (lit. becoming) an opportunity SnA 573. Elliptically for o. detha Yogāvacara's Man. 4 etc. -ādhigama finding an opportunity D II.214 sq.; A IV. 449. -kamma giving opportunity or permission Sn p. 94 (°kata allowed); Pv IV.111 (°ṃ karoti to give permission). -matta permission Sn p. 94. -loka the visible world (= manussa-loka) Vism 205; VvA 29. Okāsati {Okasati} [ava + kāś] to be visible; Caus. okāseti to make visible, let appear, show S IV.290. Pāli Text Society 397 Pāli-English Dictionary Okiṇṇa {Okinna} [pp. of okirati; BSk. avakīrṇa Divy 282; Jtm 3192] strewn over, beset by, covered with, full of J V.74, 370; PvA 86, 189 (= otata of Pv III.33). Okiraṇa {Okirana} [o + kiraṇa] casting out (see the later avakirati2), only as adj.-f. okirinī (okilinī through dialect. variation) a cast-out woman (cast-out on acct of some cutaneous disease), in double combn. okilinī okirinī (perhaps only the latter should be written) Vin III.107 = S II.260 (in play of words with avakirati1). Bdhgh's allegorical expln. at Vin III.273 puts okilinī = kilinnasarīrā, okiriṇī = angāraparikiṇṇa. Cp. kirāta. Okirati {Okirati} [o + kirati] - 1. to pour down on, pour out over M I.79; aor. okiri Vin III.107 = S II.260; Pv II.38; PvA 82. - 2. to cast-out, reject, throw out: see okiraṇa. - pp. okiṇṇa (q. v.). Caus. II. okirāpeti to cause to pour out or to sprinkle over Vism 74 (vālikaṃ). Okilinī {Okilini} see okiraṇa. Okoṭimaka {Okotimaka} (adj.) [o + koṭi + mant + ka. Ava in BSk., in formula durvarṇa durdarśana avakoṭimaka Sp. Av. Ś I. 280. Kern (note on above passage) problematically refers it to Sk. avakūṭara = vairūpya (Pāṇini V.2, 30). The Commentary on S I.237 explns. by mahodara (fatbellied) as well as lakuṇṭaka (dwarf); Pug A 227 expls. by lakuṇṭaka only] lit. "having the top lowered", with the head squashed in or down, i. e. of compressed & bulging out stature; misshapen, deformed, of ugly shape (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls hunchback at S I.94, pot-bellied at S I.237; Warren, Buddhism p. 426 trsls. decrepit). It occurs only in one stock phrase, viz. dubbaṇṇa dud-das(s)ika okoṭimaka "of bad complexion, of ugly appearance and dwarfed" at Vin II.90 = S I.94 = A I.107 = II.85 = III.285 sq. = Pug 51. The same also at M III.169; S I.237; II.279; Ud 76. Okkanta {Okkanta} [pp. of okkamati] coming on, approaching, taking place D II.12; Miln 299 (middhe okkante). See also avakkanta S II.174; III.46. Okkanti {Okkanti} (f.) [fr. okkamati] entry (lit. descent), appearance, coming to be. Usually in stock phrase jāṭi saðjāti o. nibbatti M III.249; S II.3; III.225; Nd2 257; Pug A 184. Also in gabbh° entry into the womb DA I.130. Okkantika {Okkantika} (adj.) [fr. okkanti] coming into existence again and again, recurring. Only as epithet of pīti, joy. The opposite is khaṇika, momentary Vism 143 = DhsA 115 (Expositor 153 trsls. "flooding"). Okkandika [kand or kram?] at J II.448 is doubtful, v. l. okkantika. It is used adverbially: okkandikaṃ kīḷati to sport (loudly or joyfully). C. explns. as "migo viya okkandikatvā kīḷati"; in the way of roaring(?) or frisking about(?), like a deer. {Okkandika} Okkamati {Okkamati} [o + kamati fr. kram] lit. to enter, go down into, fall into. fig. to come on, to develop, to appear in (of a subjective state). It is strange that this important word has been so much misunderstood, for the English idiom is the same. We say „he went to sleep‟, without meaning that he went anywhere. So we may twist it round and say that „sleep overcame him‟, without meaning any struggle. The two phrases mean exactly the same - an internal change, or developement, culminating in sleep. So in Pali niddā okkami sleep fell upon him, Vin I.15; Pāli Text Society 398 Pāli-English Dictionary niddaṃ okkami he fell on sleep, asleep, DhA I.9; PvA 47. At It 76 we hear that a dullness developed (dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkami) on the body of a god, he lost his radiance. At D II.12; M III.119 a god, on his rebirth, entered his new mother's womb (kucchiṃ okkami). At D II 63 occurs the question „if consciousness were not to develop in the womb?‟ (viððāṇaṃ na okkamissatha) S V.283 „abiding in the sense of bliss‟ (sukha-saññaṃ okkamitvā). See also Pug 13 = 28 (niyāma okk°, „he enters on the Path‟). - Caus. okkāmeti to make enter, to bring to S IV.312 (saggaṃ). - pp. okkanta. See also avakkamati. Okkamana {Okkamana} (nt.) [fr. okkamati] entering into, approaching, reaching M III.6; A III.108 (entering the path); also in phrase nibbānassa okkamanāya A IV.111 sq., cp. 230 sq. Okkala {Okkala} see ukkala. Okkassa {Okkassa} see okassati. Okkhāyati {Okkhayati} [ava + khāyati, corresp. to Sk. kṣeti fr. kṣi to lie] to lie low, to be restrained (in this sense evidently confounded with avakkhipati) S IV.144 sq. (cakkhuṃ etc. okkhāyati). Okkhāyika {Okkhayika} (adj.) [fr. ava + khāyin fr. kṣi, cp. avakkhāyati; Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests relation to BSk. avakhāta of khan, and compares Lal. V. 319] low-lying, deep, remote, only in one phrase, viz. udaka-tarakā gambhīragatā okkhāyikā M I.80, 245. Okkhita {Okkhita} [pp. of ava + ukkhati, Sk. avokṣita, fr. ukṣ to sprinkle] besprinkled, bestrewn with (-°) Th 2, 145 (candan° = candanānulitta ThA 137); J V.72 (so in v. l. T. reads okkita; C. explns. by okiṇṇa parikkita parivārita). Okkhitta {Okkhitta} [pp. of okkhipati] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped; thrown out, rejected; only in phrase okkhitta-cakkhu, with down-cast eyes, i. e. turning the eyes away from any objectionable sight which might impair the morale of the bhikkhu; thus meaning "with eyes under control"Sn 63, 411, 972; Nd1 498; Nd2 177; Pv IV.344 (v. l. ukkh°); VvA 6. For further use & meaning, see avakkhitta. Okkhipati {Okkhipati} [ava + khipati; Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually appld. to the eyes = cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning "keep under, restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati); aor. °khipi A IV.264 (indriyāni); ger. °khipitvā Vin IV.18 (id.). - pp. avakkhitta & okkhitta (q. v.). Ogacchati {Ogacchati} [ava + gacchati] to go down, sink down, recede; of sun & moon: to set D I.240 (opp. uggacchati); A IV. 101 (udakāni og.). See also ava°. Ogaṇa {Ogana} (adj.) [Vedic ogaṇa with dial. o for ava] separated from the troop or crowd, standing alone, Vin I.80; J IV. 432 = (gaṇaṃ ohīna C.). Ogadha {Ogadha} (-°) (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; P. form with shortened a, fr. ava + gāh, see gādha1 & gāhati] immersed, merging into, diving or plunging into. Only in two main phrases, viz. Amatogadha & Nibbānogadha diving into N. - Besides these only in jagatɔogadha steeped in the world S I.186. Pāli Text Society Ogamana 399 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [o + gam + ana; Sk. avagamana. That word is rather more than a thousand years later than the Pāli one. It would be ridiculous were one to suppose that the P. could be derived from the Sk. On the other hand the Sk. cannot be derived from the P. for it was formed at a time & place when & where P. was unknown, just as the Pali was formed at a time & place when & where Sk. was unknown. The two words are quite independent. They have no connection with one another except that they are examples of a rule of wordformation common to the two languages] going down, setting (of sun & moon), always in contrast to uggamana (rising), therefore freq. v.l. ogg° D I.10, 68; DA I.95 (= atthangamana); VvA 326. {Ogamana} Ogahana {Ogahana} (nt.) [o + gahana fr. gāhati; Sk. avagāhana; concerning shortening of ā cp. avagadha] submersion, ducking, bathing; fig. for bathing-place Sn 214 (= manussānaṃ nahāna-tittha SnA 265). See also avagāhana. Ogādha1 {Ogadha} (adj.) [Sk. avagāḍha; ava + gādha2] immersed, entered; firm, firmly footed or grounded in (-°), spelt ogāḷha Miln 1 (abhidhamma-vinay°). Cp. BSk. avagādhaśrāddha of deep faith Divy 268. Cp. pariyogāḷha. Ogādha2 {Ogadha} (nt.) [ava + gādha2] a firm place, firm ground, only in cpd. ogādhappatta having gained a sure footing A III.297 sq. Ogāha {Ogaha} [fr. o + gah] diving into; only in cpd. pariy°. Ogāhati {Ogahati} (ogāheti) [Sk. avagāhate; ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (w. acc. or loc.). Pv II. 1211; Vv 61 (= anupavisati VvA 42), 392 (sālavanaṃ o. = pavisati VvA 177). ogāheti PvA 155 (pokkharaṇiṃ); ger. ogāhetvā M III.175 (T. ogah°; v. l. ogāhitvā); PvA 287 (lokanāthassa sāsanaṃ, v. l. °itvā). See also ava°. Ogāhana {Ogahana} (nt.) [fr. ogāhati] plunging into (-°) PvA 158. Ogilati {Ogilati} [o + gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati) M. I. 393 (inf. ogilituṃ) Miln 5 (id.). Oguṇṭhita {Ogunthita} [pp. of oguṇṭheti, cp. BSk. avaguṇṭhita, e. g. Jtm 30] covered or dressed (with) Vin II.207; PvA 86 (v. l. okuṇṭhita). Oguṇṭheti {Oguntheti} [o + guṇṭheti] to cover, veil over, hide S IV.122 (ger. oguṇṭhitvā sīsaṃ, perhaps better read as oguṇṭhitā; v. l. SS. okuṇṭhitū). - pp. oguṇṭhita (q. v.). Ogumpheti {Ogumpheti} [ava + Denom. of gumpha garland] to string together, wind round, adorn with wreaths, cover, dress Vin I.194 (Pass. ogumphiyanti; vv. ll. ogumbhiyanti, ogubbiy°, ogummīy°, okumpiy°); II.142 (ogumphetvā). Oggata {Oggata} [pp. of avagacchati: spelling gg on acct. of contrast with uggata, cp. avagamana. Müller P. Gr. 43 unwarrantedly puts oggata = apagata] gone down, set (of the sun) Vin IV.55 (oggate suriye = atthangate s.), 268 (id. = rattɔ andhakāre); Th 1, 477 (anoggatasmiṃ suriyasmiṃ). Pāli Text Society Ogha 400 Pāli-English Dictionary [Vedic ogha and augha; BSk. ogha, e. g. Divy 95 caturoghɔ ottīrṇa, Jtm 215 mahaugha. Etym. uncertain]. 1. (rare in the old texts) a flood of water VvA 48 (udakɔ ogha); usually as mahogha a great flood Dh 47; Vism 512; VvA 110; DhA II.274 = ThA 175. - 2. (always in sg.) the flood of ignorance and vain desires which sweep a man down, away from the security of emancipation. To him who has "crossed the flood", oghatiṇṇo, are ascribed all, or nearly all, the mental and moral qualifications of the Arahant. For details see Sn 173, 219, 471, 495, 1059, 1064, 1070, 1082; A II.200 sq. Less often we have details of what the flood consists of. Thus kāmogha the fl. of lusts A III.69 (cp. Dhs 1095, where o. is one of the many names of taṇhā, craving, thirst). In the popular old riddle at S I.3 and Th 1, 15, 633 (included also in the Dhp. Anthology, 370) the "flood" is 15 states of mind (the 5 bonds which impede a man on his entrance upon the Aryan Path, the 5 which impede him in his progress towards the end of the Path, and 5 other bonds: lust, ill-temper, stupidity, conceit, and vain speculation). Five Oghas referred to at S I.126 are possibly these last. Sn 945 says that the flood is gedha greed, and the avijjogha of Pug 21 may perhaps belong here. As means of crossing the flood we have the Path S I.193 (°assa nittharaṇatthaṃ); IV.257; V.59; It III (°assa nittharanatthāya); faith S I.214 = Sn 184 = Miln 36; mindfulness S V.168, 186; the island Dh 25; and the dyke Th 1,7 = Sn 4 (cp. D II.89). 3. Towards the close of the Nikāya period we find, for the first time, the use of the word in the pl., and the mention of 4 Oghas identical with the 4 Āsavas (mental Intoxicants). See D III.230, 276; S IV.175, 257; V.59, 292, 309; Nd1 57, 159; Nd2 178. When the oghas had been thus grouped and classified in the livery, as it were, of a more popular simile, the older use of the word fell off, a tendency arose to think only of 4 oghas, and of these only as a name or phase of the 4 āsavas. So the Abhidhamma books (Dhs 1151; Vbh 25 sq., 43, 65, 77, 129; Comp. Phil. 171). The Netti follows this (31, 114-24). Grouped in combn. āsavagantha-ogha-yoga-agatitaṇhɔupādāna at Vism 211. The later history of the word has yet to be investigated. But it may be already stated that the 5th cent. commentators persist in the error of explaining the old word ogha, used in the singular, as referring to the 4 Āsavas; and they extend the old simile in other ways. Dhammapāla of Kāðcipura twice uses the word in the sense of flood of water (VvA 48, 110, see above 1). -ātiga one who has overcome the flood Sn 1096 (cp. Nd2 180). -tiṇṇa id. S I.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; Dh 370 (= cattāro oghe tiṇṇa DhA IV.109); Vv 6428 (= catunnaṃ oghānaṃ saṃsāra-mahɔoghassa taritattā o. VvA 284); 827; Nd1 159; Nd2 179. {Ogha} Oghana {Oghana} (nt.) watering, flooding (?) M I.306 (v. l. ogha). Oghaniya {Oghaniya} (adj.) [fr. ogha(na)] that which can be engulfed by floods (metaph.) Dhs 584 (cp. Dhs trsl. 308); Vbh 12, 25 & passim; DhsA 49. Ocaraka {Ocaraka} [fr. ocarati] in special meaning of one who makes himself at home or familiar with, an investigator, informant, scout, spy (ocarakā ti carapurisā C. on Ud 66). - Thus also in BSk. as avacaraka one who furnishes information Divy 127; an adaptation from the Pāli. - Vin III.47, 52; M I.129 = 189 (corā ocarakā, for carā?); S I.79 (purisā carā (v. l. corā) ocarakā (okacarā v. l. SS) janapadaṃ ocaritvā etc.; cp. K. S. p. 106 n. 1) = Ud 66 (reads corā o.). Ocarati {Ocarati} [o + carati] to be after something, to go into, to search, reconnoitre, investigate, pry Vin III.52 (ger. °itvā); M 1502 (ocarati); S I.79 (°itvā: so read for T. ocaritā; C. explns. by vīmaṃsitvā taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ðatvā). - pp. ociṇṇa. Ociṇṇa {Ocinna} [pp. of ocarati] gone into, investigated, scouted, explored S I.79 = Ud 66 (reads otiṇṇa). Pāli Text Society 401 Pāli-English Dictionary Ocita {Ocita} [o + cita, pp. of ocināti1] gathered, picked off J III. 22; IV.135, 156; Sdhp 387. Ocināti {Ocinati} (ocinati) - 1. [= Sk. avacinoti, ava + ci1] to gather, pluck, pick off DhA I.366; also in pp. ocita. - 2. [= Sk. avacinoti or °ciketi ava + ci2, cp. apacināti2] to disregard, disrespect, treat with contempt; pres. ocināyati (for ocināti metri causa) J VI.4 (= avajānāti C.). Ocīraka {Ociraka} see odīraka. Occhindati {Occhindati} [o + chindati] to cut off, sever J II.388 (maggaṃ occhindati & occhindamāna to bar the way; v. l. BB. ochijjati), 404. Ojavant {Ojavant} (adj.) [fr. ojā; Vedic ojasvant in diff. meaning: powerful] possessing strengthening qualities, giving strength M I.480; S I.212 (so read for ovajaṃ; phrase ojavaṃ asecanakaṃ of Nibbāna, trsld. "elixir"); Th 2, 196 (id. = ojavantaṃ ThA 168); A III.260 (an° of food, i. e. not nourishing DhA I.106. Ojavantatā {Ojavantata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ajavant] richness in sap, strength giving (nourishing) quality J I.68 (of milk). Ojahāti {Ojahati} [o + jahati] to give up, leave, leave behind, renounce, ger. ohāya D I.115 (ðāti- sanghaṃ & hirañña-suvaṇṇaṃ); M II.166 (id.); J V.340 (= chaḍḍetvā C.); PvA 93 (maṃ). - Pass. avahīyati & ohīyati, pp. ohīna (q. v.). - See also ohanati. Ojā {Oja} (f.) [Vedic ojas nt., also BSk. oja nt. Divy 105; fr. *aug to increase, as in Lat. auges, augustus & auxilium, Goth. aukan (augment), Ags. ēacian; cp. also Gr. a)e/cw, Sk. ukṣati & vakṣana increase] strength, but only in meaning of strength-giving, nutritive essence (appld. to food) M I.245; S II.87; V.162 (dhammɔ); A III.396; J I.68; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Miln 156; DhA II.154 (paṭhav°). See also def. at Vism 450 (referring to kabalinkārɔāhāra. The compn. form is oja, e. g. ojadāna J V.243; ojaṭṭhamaka (rūpa) Vism 341. Ojināti {Ojinati} [Sk. avajayati, ava + ji] to conquer, vanquish, subdue J VI.222 (ojināmase). Oñāta {Onata} [pp. o + jānāti, see also avaðāta] despised Miln 191, 229, 288. Oṭṭha1 {Ottha} [Vedic oṣṭ s mouth = Sk. āḥ r margin] the lip A IV.131; Sn 608; J II.264; III.26 (adhar° & uttar° lower & upper lip), 278; V.156; DhA I.212; III.163; IV.1; VvA 11; PvA 260. Cp. bimboṭṭha. Oṭṭha2 {Ottha} [Vedic uṣṭra, f. uṣṭrī, buffalo = Ohg. Ags. ur, Lat. urus bison, aurochs. In cl. Sk. it means a camel]. It is mentioned in two lists of domestic animals, Vin III.52; Miln 32. At J III.385 a story is told of an oṭṭhī-vyādhi who fought gallantly in the wars, and was afterwards used to drag a dung-cart. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 150 suggests elephant. Oṭṭhubhati {Otthubhati} [cp. Sk. avaṣṭhīvati] to spit out M I.79, 127. Oḍḍita {Oddita} [pp. of oḍḍeti] thrown out, laid (of a snare) J I. 183; II.443; V.341; ThA 243. Pāli Text Society 402 Pāli-English Dictionary Oḍḍeti {Oddeti} [for uḍḍeti (?). See further under uḍḍeti] to throw out (a net), to lay snares A I.33 = J II.37, 153; III.184 and passim; ThA 243. - pp. oḍḍita (q. v.). Oḍḍha {Oddha} [better spelling oḍha, pp. of ā + vah] carried away, appropriated, only in cpd. sahoḍhā corā thieves with their plunder Vism 180 (cp. Sk. sahoḍha Manu IX.270). Oṇata {Onata} [pp. of oṇamati] bent down, low, inclined. Usually of social rank or grade, combd. with & opp. to uṇṇata, i. e. raised & degraded, lofty and low A II.86 = Pug 52 (= nīca lāmaka Pug A 229); Pv IV.6Q; Miln 387; DA I.45; PvA 29. Oṇamati {Onamati} [o + namati] (instr.) to incline, bend down to, bow to (dat.) Miln 220, 234 (oṇamati & oṇamissati), 400; DA I.112. Caus. oṇāmeti M II.137 (kāyaṃ). - pp. oṇata & Caus. oṇamita. Oṇamana {Onamana} (nt.) [fr. oṇamati] bending down, inclining, bowing down to Miln 234. Oṇamita {Onamita} [pp. of oṇameti, Caus. of nam] having bowed down, bowing down Miln 234. Oṇi {Oni} (m. or f.) [cp. Vedic oṇi charge, or a kind of Soma vessel] charge, only in cpd. oṇirakkha a keeper of entrusted wares, bailee Vin III.47, 53 (= āhaṭaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gopento). Oṇīta {Onita} see onīta. Oṇojana {Onojana} (nt.) [fr. oṇojeti, Sk. avanejana] washing off, cleaning, washing one's hands Vin II.31 (Bdhgh. refers it to fig. meaning onojeti2 by explaining as "vissajjana" gift, presentation). Oṇojeti {Onojeti} (with vowel assimilation o < e for oṇejeti = ava + nejeti, Sk. °nejayati fr. nij. Kern, Toev. II.138, complementary to remarks s. v. on p. 5 explns. as assimil. onuj° < onij°, like anu° BSk. ani° (ānisaṃsa < ānuśaṃsā), the further process being onoj° for onuj°. The etym. remains however doubtful] - 1. to cause to wash off, to wash, cleanse: see oṇojana. - 2. (fig.) to give as a present, dedicate (with the rite of washing one's hands, i. e. a clean gift) Vin I.39; IV.156; A IV.210 = 214 (oṇojesi aor.); Miln 236. Otata {Otata} [o + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with; Dh 162 (v. l. otthata); Miln 307 (+ vitata); DhA III.153 (= pariyonandhitvā ṭhita). See also avatata & samotata. Otaraṇa {Otarana} (adj.) [fr. otarati] going down, descending Nett 1, 2, 4, 107. Otarati {Otarati} [o + tarati] to descend, to go down to (c. acc.), to be-take oneself to. ppr. otaranto Vin II.221. - aor. otari SnA 486 (for avaṃsari); DhA I.19 (cankamanaṃ); PvA 47 (nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ), 75. - inf. otarituṃ Pug 65, 75 (sangamaṃ). - ger. otaritvā PvA 94 (pāsādā from the palace), 140 (devalokato). - Caus. II. otarāpeti to cause to descend, to bring down to J VI.345. - pp. otiṇṇa. - Caus. I. otāreti. Opp. uttarati. Otallaka {Otallaka} (adj.) [of uncertain etym. perhaps *avatāryaka from ava + tṛ, or from uttāḷa?] clothed in rags, poor, indigent J IV.380 (= lāmaka olamba-vilamba-nantakadharo C.). Pāli Text Society Otāpaka 403 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [fr. otāpeti] drying or dried (in the sun), with ref. to food SnA 35 (parivāsika-bhattaṃ bhuñjati hatthɔ otāpakaṃ khādati). {Otapaka} Otāpeti {Otapeti} [o + tāpeti] to dry in the sun Vin II.113; IV.281; Miln 371 (kummo udakato nikkhamitvā kāyaṃ o. fig. applied to mānasa). Otāra {Otara} [fr. otarati, BSk. avatāra. The Sk. avatāra is centuries later and means „incarnation‟] - 1. descent to, i. e. approach to, access, fig. chance, opportunity otāraṃ labhati. Only in the Māra myth.He, the tempter, „gets his chance‟ to tempt the Buddha or the disciples, M I. 334; S I.122; IV.178, 185; DhA III.121. (avatāraṃ labhati, Divy 144, 145) ot° adhigacchati, to find a chance, Sn 446. [Fausböll here translates „defect‟. This is fair as exegesis. Every moral or intellectual defect gives the enemy a chance. But otāra does not mean defect]. Ot° gavesati to seek an opportunity, DhA III.21. Otārāpekkha, watching for a chance, S I.122. At one passage, A III. 67 = 259, it is said that constant association leads to agreement, agreement to trust, and trust to otāra. The Com. has nothing. „Carelessness‟ would suit the context. o. gavesati to look for an opportunity DhA III.21, and otāraṃ labhati to get a chance S I.122; IV.178, 185; M I.334; DhA III.21 (gloss okāra & okāsa); cp. avatāraṃ labhati Divy 144, 145 etc. - 2. access, fig. inclination to, being at home with, approach, familiarity (cp. otiṇṇa and avacara adj.) A III.67, 259. - 3. (influenced by ocarati2 and ociṇṇa) being after something, spying, finding out; hence: fault, blame, defect, flaw Sn 446 (= randha vivara SnA 393); also in phrase otārāpekkha spying faults S I.122 (which may be taken to meaning 1, but meaning 3 is accredited by BSk. avatāraprekṣin Divy 322), Mrs. Rh. D. translates the latter passage by "watching for access". Otāreti {Otareti} [Caus. of otarati] to cause to come down, to bring down, take down J I.426; IV.402; Nett 21, 22; DhA II.81. Otiṇṇa {Otinna} [pp. of otarati; the form ava° only found in poetry as -° e. g. issāvatiṇṇa J V.98; dukkha°, soka° etc. see below 2] - 1. (med.) gone down, descended PvA 104 (uddho-galaṃ na otiṇṇaṃ not gone down further than the throat). - 2. (pass.) beset by (cp. avatāra 2), affected with, a victim of, approached by M I.460 = A II.123 (dukkhɔ otiṇṇa) = It 89 (as v. l.; T. has dukkhābhikiṇṇa, which is either gloss or wrong reading for dukkhāvatiṇṇa); M II.10; S I.123 (sokāva°), 137 (id.); Sn 306 (icchāvatiṇṇa affected with desire), 939 (sallena otiṇṇo = pierced by an arrow, expld. by Nd1 414 as "sallena viddho phuṭṭho"); J V.98 (issāva° = issāya otiṇṇa C.). 3. (in special sense) affected with love, enamoured, clinging to, fallen in love with Vin III.128 (= sāratto apekkhavā paṭibaddha-citto); A III.67, 259 (°citta); SnA 322 (id.). - Note. otiṇṇa at S V.162 should with v.l. SS be deleted. See also avatiṇṇa. Ottappa {Ottappa} (nt.) [fr. tappati1 + ud, would corresp. to a Sk. form *auttapya fr. ut-tapya to be regretted, tormented by remorse. The BSk. form is a wrong adaptation of the Pāli form, taking o° for apa°, viz. apatrapya M Vastu III. 53 and apatrapā ibid. I.463. Müller, P. Gr. & Fausböll, Sutta Nipāta Index were both misled by the BSk. form, as also recently Kern, Toev. s. v.] fear of exile, shrinking back from doing wrong, remorse. See on term and its distinction from hiri (shame) Dhs trsl. 20, also DhsA 124, 126; Vism 8, 9 and the definition at SnA 181. Ottappa generally goes with hiri as one of the 7 noble treasures (see ariya-dhanā). Hiriottappa It 36; J I.129; hir-ottappa at M I.271; S II.220; V.1; A II.78; IV.99, 151; V.214; It 34; J I.127, 206; VvA 23. See also hiri. - Further passages: D III.212; M I.356; S II.196, 206, 208; V.89; A I.50, 83, 95; III.4 sq., 352; IV.11; V.123 sq.; Pug 71; Dhs 147, 277; Nett 39. - anottappa (nt.) lack of conscience, unscrupulousness, disregard of morality A I.50, 83, 95; III.421; V.146, 214; Vbh 341, Pāli Text Society 404 Pāli-English Dictionary 359, 370, 391; as adj. It 34 (ahirika +). -gāravatā respect for conscience, A III.331; IV.29. -dhana the treasure of (moral) self-control D III.163, 251, 282; VvA 113. -bala the power of a (good) conscience D III.253; Ps II.169, 176; Dhs 31, 102 (trln. power of the fear of blame). Ottappati {Ottappati} [ut + tappati1] to feel a sense of guilt, to be conscious or afraid of evil S I.154; Ps II.169, 176; Pug 20, 21; Dhs 31; Miln 171. Ottappin & Ottāpin {Ottappin} {Ottapin} (adj.) [fr. ottappa] afraid of wrong, conscientious, scrupulous (a) ottappin D III.252, 282; It 28, 119. - (b) ottāpin M I.43 sq.; S II.159 sq., 196, 207; IV.243 sq.; A II.13 sq.; III.3 sq., 112; IV.1 sq.; V.123, 146. Anottappin bold, reckless, unscrupulous Pug 20 (+ ahirika). anottāpin at S II.159 sq., 195, 206; IV. 240 sq.; Sn 133 (ahirika +). Otthaṭa {Otthata} [pp. of ottharati] - 1. spread over, veiled, hidden by (-°) Miln 299 (mahik° suriya the sun hidden by a fog). - 2. strewn over (with) Sdhp 246 (-°). v. l. at Dh 162 for otata. Ottharaka {Ottharaka} (nt.) [fr. of tharati] a kind of strainer, a filter Vin II.119. Ottharaṇa {Ottharana} (nt.) [fr. ottharati] spreading over, veiling Miln 299 (mahik°). Ottharati {Ottharati} [o + tharati, Sk. root str] to spread over, spread out, cover Miln 121 (opp. paṭikkamati, of water). See also avattharati. Odaka {Odaka} (nt.) [compn. form of udaka] water; abs. only at J III.282. - an° without water, dried up Th 2, 265 (= udaka-bhasta ThA 212). Cp. combn. sītodaka, e. g. M I. 376. See udaka. antika - 1. neighbourhood of the water, a place near the water (see antika1) Kh VIII.1, 3 (gambhīre odakantike, which Childers, Kh. trsln. p. 30, interprets "a deep pit"; see also KhA 217 sq.). - 2. "water at the end", i. e. final ablution (see antika2), in spec. sense the ablution following upon the sexual act Vin III.21; cp. odak-antikatā (f. abstr.) final ablution, cleansing J II.126. Odagya {Odagya} (nt.) [der. fr. udagga] exultation, elation Nd1 3 = Nd2 446 = Dhs 9, 86, 285, 373; DhsA 143 (= udaggasabhāva a "topmost" condition). Odana {Odana} (m. & nt.) [Sk. odana, to Idg. *ud, from which also udaka, q. v. for full etym.] boiled (milk-)rice, gruel Vin II.214 (m.); D I.76, 105; S I.82 (nāḷik°); DhA IV. 17 (id.); A III.49; IV.231; Sn 18; J III.425 (til° m.); Dhs 646, 740, 875; PvA 73; VvA 98; Sdhp 113. Combd. with kummāsa (sour milk) in phrase o-k-upa-caya a heap of boiled rice and sour milk, of the body (see kāya I.); also at M I.247. Odanika {Odanika} [fr. odana] a cook J III.49. Odaniya {Odaniya} (adj.) [fr. odana, cp. Sk. odanika] belonging to rice-gruel, made of rice-gruel Vin III.59 (°ghara a ricekitchen); VvA 73 (°surā rice-liquor). Odapattakinī {Odapattakini} (f.) (adj.) [f. of uda + pattaka + in, i. e. having a bowl of water, Ep. of bhariyā a wife, viz. the wife in the quality of providing the house with water. Thus in enumn. Pāli Text Society 405 Pāli-English Dictionary of the 10 kinds of wives (& women in general) at Vin III.140 (expld. by udakapattaṃ āmasitvā vāseti) = VvA 73. Odapattiyā {Odapattiya} at Cp. II.48 = last. Odarika {Odarika} & °ya (adj.) [fr. udara] living for one's belly, voracious, gluttonous Miln 357; J VI.208 (°ya); Th 1, 101. Odarikatta {Odarikatta} (nt.) [fr. odarika] stomach-filling M I.461; Vism 71. Odahati {Odahati} [o + dahati, fr. dhā] - 1. to put down, to put in, supply M I.117 (okacaraṃ, see under oka); II.216 (agadɔangāraṃ vaṇa-mukhe odaheyya); Th 1, 774 (migavo pāsaṃ odahi the hunter set a snare; Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 suggests change of reading to oḍḍayi, hardly justified); J III.201 (visaṃ odahi araññe), 272 (passaṃ o. to turn one's flanks towards, dat.); Miln 156 (kāye ojaṃ odahissāma supply the body with strength). - 2. (fig.) to apply, in phrase sotaṃ odahati to listen D I.230; Dāvs V.68. - pp. ohita. Odahana {Odahana} (nt.) [fr. odahati] - 1. putting down, applying, application M II.216; heaping up, storing DhA III.118. - 2. putting in, fig, attention, devotion Nett 29. Odāta {Odata} (adj.) [Derivation unknown. The Sk. is avadāta, ava + dāta, pp. of hypothetical dā4 to clean, purify] clean, white, prominently applied to the dress as a sign of distinction (white), or special purity at festivities, ablutions & sacrificial functions D II.18 (uṇṇā, of the Buddha); III.268; A III.239; IV.94, 263, 306, 349; V.62; Dhs 617 = (in enumn. of colours); DA I.219; VvA 111. See also ava°. -kasiṇa meditation on the white (colour) Vism 174. -vaṇṇa of white colour, white M II.14; Dhs 247. -vattha a white dress; adj. wearing a white dress, dressed in white D I.7, 76, 104; J III.425 (+ alla-kesa). -vasana dressed in white (of householders or laymen as opposed to the yellow dress of the bhikkhus) D I.211; III.118, 124 sq., 210; M I.491, II.23; A I.73; III.384; IV.217 [cp. BSk. avadāta-vasana Divy 160]. Odātaka {Odataka} (adj.) [fr. odāta] white, clean, dressed in white S II.284 (v. l. SS odāta); Th 1, 965 (dhaja). Odissa {Odissa} (adv.) [ger. of o + disati = Sk. diśati, cp. uddissa] only in neg. anodissa without a purpose, indefinitely (?) Miln 156 (should we read anudissa?). Odissaka (adj.) [fr. odissa] only in adv. expression odissaka-vasena definitely, in special, specifically (opp. to anodissaka-vasena in general, universally) J I.82; II.146; VvA 97. See also anodissaka & odhiso. {Odissaka} Odīraka {Odiraka} in odīrakajāta S IV.193 should with v. l. be read ocīraka [= ava + cira + ka] "with its bark off", stripped of its bark. Odumbara {Odumbara} (adj.) [fr. udumbara] belonging to the Udumbara tree Vv 5016; cp. VvA 213. Odhasta {Odhasta} [Sk. avadhvasta, pp. of ava + dhvaṃsati: see dhaṃsati] fallen down, scattered M I.124 = S IV.176 (°patoda; S reads odhasata but has v. l. odhasta). Pāli Text Society 406 Pāli-English Dictionary Odhānīya {Odhaniya} (nt.) [fr. avadhāna, ava + dhā, cp. Gr. a)poqh/kh, see odahati] a place for putting something down or into, a receptacle Vin I.204 (salāk°, vy. ll. and gloss on p. 38 as follows: sālākāṭṭhāniya A, salākātaniya C, salākadhāraya B, salākɔ odhāniyan ti yattha salākaṃ odahanti taṃ D E). - Cp. samodhāneti. Odhi {Odhi} [from odahati, Sk. avadhi, fr. ava + dhā] putting down, fixing, i. e. boundary, limit, extent DhA II.80 (jaṇṇu-mattena odhinā to the extent of the knee, i. e. kneedeep); IV.204 (id.). - odhiso (adv.) limited, specifically Vbh 246; Nett 12; Vism 309. Opp. anodhi M III. 219 (°jina), also in anodhiso (adv.) unlimited, universal, general Ps II. 130, cp. anodissaka (odissaka); also as anodhikatvā without limit or distinction, absolutely Kvu 208, and odhisodhiso "piecemeal" Kvu 103 (cp. Kvu trsln. 762, 1271). -sunka "extent of toll", stake J VI.279 (= sunkakoṭṭhāsaṃ C.). Odhika (adj.) [fr. odhi] "according to limit", i. e. all kinds of, various, in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60, cp. Nd2 526; J V.392 (id.). {Odhika} Odhunāti {Odhunati} [o + dhunāti] to shake off M I.229; S III.155; A III.365 (+ niddhunāti); Pv IV.354 (v. l. BB ophun°, SS otu°) = PvA 256; Vin II.317 (Bdhgh. in expln. of ogumphetvā of CV. V.11, 6; p. 117); Miln 399 (+ vidhunāti). Onaddha {Onaddha} [pp. of onandhati] bound, tied; put over, covered Vin II.150, 270 sq. (°mañca, °pīṭha); M II.64; Dh 146 (andhakārena); Sdhp 182. See also onayhati. Onandhati [o + nandhati, a secondary pres. form constructed from naddha after bandhati > baddha; see also apiḷandhati] to bind, fasten; to cover up Vin II.150 (inf. onandhituṃ); Miln 261. {Onandhati} Onamaka {Onamaka} (adj.) [fr. onamati] bending down, stooping DhA II.136 (an°). Onamati [o + namati] to bend down (instr.), stoop D II. 17 (anonamanto ppr. not bending); III.143 (id.); Vv 393 (onamitvā ger.). - pp. oṇata. {Onamati} Onamana {Onamana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. onamati] in compn. with °unnamana lowering & raising, bending down & up DhA I.17. Onayhati {Onayhati} [ava + nayhati] to tie down, to cover over, envelop, shroud DhsA 378 (megho ākāsaṃ o.) - pp. onaddha. Onāha {Onaha} [fr. ava + nah, cp. onaddha & onayhati] drawing over, covering, shrouding D I.246 (spelt onaha); Miln 300; Dhs 1157 (= megho viya ākāsaṃ kāyaṃ onayhati). Onīta {Onita} [in form = Sk. avanīta, but semantically = apanīta. Thus also BSk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti] only found in one ster. phrase, viz. onīta-patta-pāṇi "having removed (or removing) his hand from the bowl", a phrase causing constructional difficulties & sometimes taken in glosses as "onitta°" (fr. nij), i. e. having washed (bowl and hands after the meal). The Cs. expln. as onīto pattato pāṇi yeva, i. e. "the hand is taken away from the bowl". The spelling is frequently oṇīta, probably through BB sources. See on term also Trenckner, Notes Pāli Text Society 407 Pāli-English Dictionary 6624 & cp. apa-nīta-pātra at M Vastu III.142. The expression is always combd. with bhuttāvin "having eaten" and occurs very frequently, e. g. at Vin II.147: D I.109 (= DA I. 277, q. v. for the 2 explns. mentioned above M II.50, 93; S V.384; A II.63; Sn p. 111 (= pattato onītapāṇi, apanītahattha SnA 456); VvA 118; PvA 278. Oneti,{Oneti} prob. for apaneti, see apaneti & pp. onīta. Onojeti {Onojeti} see oṇojeti. Opakkamika {Opakkamika} (adj.) [fr. upakkama] characterising a sensation of pain: attacking suddenly, spasmodic, acute; always in connection with ābādha or vedanā M I.92, 241; S IV. 230 = A II.87 = III.131 = V.110 = Nd2 304IC = Miln 112. Opakkhin {Opakkhin} (adj.) [o + pakkhin, adj. fr. pakkha wing, cp. similarly avapatta] "with wings off" i. e. having one's wings clipped, powerless A I.188 (°ṃ karoti to deprive of one's wings or strength; so read for T. opapakkhiṃ karoti). Opaguyha {Opaguyha} see opavayha. Opatati {Opatati} [o + pat] to fall or fly down (on), to fall over (w. acc.) J II.228 (lokāmisaṃ °anto); VI.561 (°itvā ger.); Miln 368, 396. - pp. opatita. Opatita {Opatita} [pp. of opatati] falling (down) PvA 29 (udaka; v. l. ovuḷhita, opalahita; context rcads at PvA 29 mahāsobbhehi opatitena udakena, but id. p. at KhA 213 reads mahāsobbhasannipātehi). Opatta {Opatta} (adj.) [o + patta, Sk. avapattra] with leaves fallen off, leafless (of trees) J III.495 (opatta = avapatta nippatta patita-patta C.). Opadhika {Opadhika} (adj.) [fr. upadhi. BSk. after the P., aupadhika Divy 542] forming a substratum for rebirth (always with ref. to puñña, merit). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38 as "exceedingly great"; the correct interpretation is given by Dhpāla at VvA 154 as "atta-bhāvajanaka paṭisandhi-pavatti-vipāka-dāyaka". - S I.233 = A IV.292 = Vv 3421; It 20 (v. l. osadhika), 78. Opanayika {Opanayika} (adj.) [fr. upaneti, upa + nī] leading to (Nibbāna) S IV.41 sq., 272, 339; V.343; A I.158; II.198; D III.5; Vism 217. Opapakkhi {Opapakkhi} in phrase °ṃ karoti in phrase °ṃ karoti at A I.188 read opakkhiṃ karoti to deprive of one's wings, to render powerless. Opapaccayika {Opapaccayika} (adj.) [= opapātika] having the characteristic of being born without parents, as deva Nett 28 (upādāna). Opapātika {Opapatika} (adj.) [fr. upapatti; the BSk. form is a curious distortion of the P. form, viz. aupapāduka Av. Ś II.89; Divy 300, 627, 649] arisen or reborn without visible cause (i. e. without parents), spontaneous rebirth (Kvu trsl. 2832), apparitional rebirth (Cpd. 1654, q. v.) D I.27, 55, Pāli Text Society 408 Pāli-English Dictionary 156; III.132, 230 (°yoni), 265; M I.34, 73, 287, 401 sq., 436 sq, 465 sq.; II.52; III.22, 80, 247; S III.206, 240 sq., 246 sq.; IV.348; V.346, 357 sq., 406; A I.232, 245, 269; II.5, 89, 186; IV.12, 226, 399, 423 sq.; V. 265 sq., 286 sq., 343 sq.; Pug 16, 62, 63; Vbh 412 sq.; Miln 267; Vism 552 sq., 559; DA I.165, 313. The C. on M I.34 explns. by "sesa-yoni-paṭikkhepa-vacanaṃ etaṃ". See also Pug. A 1, § 40. Opapātin {Opapatin} (adj.) = opapātika, in phrase opapātiyā (for opapātiniyā?) iddhiyā at S V.282 (so read for T. opapāti ha?) is doubtful reading & perhaps best to be omitted altogether. Opama {Opama} at J I.89 & Sdhp 93 (anopama) stands for ūpama, which metri causā for upama. Opamma {Opamma} (nt.) [fr. upama; cp. Sk. aupamya] likeness, simile, comparison, metaphor M I.378; Vin V.164; Miln 1, 70, 330; Vism 117, 622; ThA 290. Oparajja {Oparajja} viceroyalty is v. l. for uparajja. Thus at M II. 76; A III.154. Opavayha (adj. n.) [fr. upavayha, grd. of upavahati] fit for riding, suitable as conveyance, state-elephant (of the elephant of the king) S V.351 = Nett 136 (v. l. opaguyha; C. explns. by ārohana-yogga); J II.20 (SS opavuyha); IV. 91 (v. l. °guyha); VI.488 (T. opavuyha, v. l. opaguyha; gajuttama opavayha = rāja-vāhana C.); DA I.147 (ārohanayogga opavuyha, v. l. °guyha); VvA 316 (T. opaguyha to be corrected to °vayha). {Opavayha} Opasamika {Opasamika} (adj.) [fr. upa + sama + ika; cp. BSk. aupaśamika Av. Ś II.107; M Vastu II.41] leading to quiet, allaying, quieting; Ep. of Dhamma D III.264 sq.; A II.132. Opasāyika {Opasayika} (adj.) [fr. upasaya, upa + śī] being near at hand or at one's bidding (?) M I.328. Opāṭeti {Opateti} [ava + Caus. of paṭ, Sk. avapāṭayati] to tear asunder, unravel, open Vin II.150 (chaviṃ opāṭetvā). Opāta {Opata} [o + pāta fr. patati to fall, Vedic avapāta] - 1. falling or flying down, downfall, descent J VI.561. - 2. a pitfall J I.143; DhA IV.211. Opāteti {Opateti} [o + Caus. of pat] to make fall, to destroy (cp. atipāteti), i. e. 1. to break, to interrupt, in kathaṃ opāteti to interrupt a conversation M II.10, 122, 168; A III.137, 392 sq.; Sn p. 107. - 2. to drop, to omit (a syllable) Vin IV.15. Opāna {Opana} (nt.) [o + pāna fr. pivati. Vedic avapāna. The P. Commentators however take o as a contracted form of udaka, e. g. Bdhgh. at DA I.298 = udapāna]. Only in phrase opāna-bhūta (adj.) a man who has become a welling spring as it were, for the satisfaction of all men's wants; expld. as "khata-pokkharaṇī viya hutvā" DA I. 298 = J V.174. - Vin I.236; D I.137; M I.379; A IV. 185; Vv 654; Pv IV.160; J III.142; IV.34; V.172; Vbh 247; Miln 411; Vism 18; VvA 286; DA 1177, 298. Opārambha {Oparambha} (adj.) [fr. upārambha] acting as a support, supporting, helpful M II.113. Pāli Text Society 409 Pāli-English Dictionary Opiya {Opiya} is metric for upiya is metric for upiya [upa + ger. of i] undergoing, going into S I.199 = Th 1, 119 (nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya; Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "suffering N. in thy heart to sink", S A. hadayasmiṃ pakkhipitvā. Opilavati {Opilavati} [Sk. avaplavati, ava + plu] to be immersed, to sink down S II.224. - Caus. opilāpeti (see sep.). Opilāpita {Opilapita} [pp. of opilāpeti] immersed into (loc.), gutted with water, drenched J I.212, 214. Opilāpeti {Opilapeti} [Caus. of opilavati, cp. Sk. avaplāvayati] to immerse, to dip in or down, to drop (into = loc.) Vin I. 157 = 225 = S I.169 (C.: nimujjapeti, see K. S. 318); M I.207 = III.157; DhA III.3 (°āpetvā; so read with vv. ll. for opīḷetvā); J III.282. - pp. opilāpita. Opīḷeti {Opileti} in "bhattaṃ pacchiyaṃ opīḷetvā" at DhA II.3 is with v. l. to be read opilāpetvā (gloss odahitvā), i. e. dropping the food into the basket. Opuñchati {Opunchati} is uncertain reading for opuñjeti. Opuñchana or Opuñjana {Opunchana} {Opunjana} (nt.) [fr. opuñjeti] heaping up, covering over; a heap, layer DhA III.296. Opuñjeti {Opunjeti} or °ati or °ati [o + puñjeti Denom. of puñja, heap] to heap up, make a heap, cover over with (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 153 trsls. "cleanse") Vin II.176 (opuñjati bhattaṃ); J IV.377 (opuðchetvā T., but v. l. opuðjetvā; gloss upalimpitvā); DhA III.296 (opuðchitvā, gloss sammajjitvā). - Caus. opuðjāpeti in same meaning "to smear" Vin III.16 (opuðjāpetvā; v. l. opuðchāpetvā). Opunāti {Opunati} also as opuṇāti also as opuṇāti (Dh) [o + punāti fr. pū] to winnow, sift; fig. lay bare, expose Dh 252 (= bhusaṃ opuṇanto viya DhA III.375); SnA 312. - Caus. opunāpeti [cp. BSk. opunāpeti M Vastu III.178] to cause to sift A I.242; J I.447. Opuppha {Opuppha} [o + puppha] bud, young flower J VI.497 (vv. ll. p. 498 opaṇṇa & opatta). Opeti {Opeti} [unless we here deal with a very old misspelling for oseti we have to consider it a secondary derivation from opiya in Caus. sense, i e. Caus. fr. upa + i. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78 offers an etym. of ā + vapati, thus opiya would be *āvupiya, a risky conclusion, which besides being discrepant in meaning (āvapati = to distribute) necessitates der. of opiya fr. opati (*āvapati) instead of vice versā. There is no other instance of *āva being contracted to o. Trenckner then puts opiya = ūpiya in tadūpiya ("conform with this", see ta° Ia), which is however a direct derivation from upa = upaka, upiya, of which a superl. formation is upamā ("likeness"). Trenckner's expln. of ūpiya as der. fr. ā + vap does not fit in with its meaning] to make go into (c. loc.), to deposit, receive (syn. with osāpeti) S I.236 (SA na . . pakkhipanti) = Th 2, 283 = J V.252 (T. upeti); in which Th 2, 283 has oseti (ThA 216, with expln. of oseti = ṭhapeti on p. 219). - aor. opi J IV.457 (ukkhipi gloss); VI.185 (= pakkhipi gloss). - ger. opitvā (opetvā?) J IV.457 (gloss khipetvā). Pāli Text Society 410 Pāli-English Dictionary Ophuṭa {Ophuta} [a difficult, but legitimate form arisen out of analogy, fusing ava-vuta (= Sk. vṛta from vṛ; opp. *apāvuta = P. apāruta) and ava-phuṭa (Sk. sphuṭa from sphuṭ). We should probably read ovuta in all instances] covered, obstructed; always in combn. āvuta nivuta ophuṭa (oputa, ovuta) D I.246 (T. ophuta, vv. ll. ophuṭa & opuṭa); M III.131 (T. ovuṭa); Nd1 24 ovuṭa, v. l. SS ophuṭa); Nd2 365 (ophuṭa, v. l. BB oputa; SS ovuta); DA I.59 (oputa); SnA 596 (oputa = pariyo-naddha); Miln 161 (ovuta). Obandhati {Obandhati} [o + bandhati] to bind, to tie on to Vin II.116 (obandhitvā ger.). Obhagga {Obhagga} [o + bhagga, pp. of bhañj, Sk. avabhagna] broken down, broken up, broken S V.96 (°vibhagga); A IV.435 (obhaggɔobhagga); DhA I.58 (id.); J I.55 (°sarīra). Obhañjati {Obhanjati} [o + bhañj] to fold up, bend over, crease (a garment); only Caus. II. obhaðjāpeti J I.499 (dhovāpeti +). See also pp. obhagga. Obhata {Obhata} [pp. of obharati] having taken away or off, only in cpd. °cumbaṭā with the "cumbaṭa" taken off, descriptive of a woman in her habit of carrying vessels on her head (on the cumbaṭa stand) Vin III.140 = VvA 73 (Hardy: "a woman with a circlet of cloth on her head"?). Obharati {Obharati} [ava + bharati, cp. Sk. avabharati = Lat. aufero] to carry away or off, to take off. - pp. obhata. Obhāsa {Obhasa} [from obhāsati] shine, splendour, light, lustre, effulgence; appearance. In clairvoyant language also "aura" (see Cpd. 2141 with C. expln. "rays emitted from the body on account of insight") - D I.220 (effulgence of light); M III.120, 157; A II.130, 139; IV.302; It 108 (obhāsakara); Ps I.114, 119 (paððā°); II.100, 150 sq., 159, 162; Vism 28, 41; PvA 276 (°ṃ pharati to emit a radiance); Sdhp 325. With nimitta and parikathā at Vism 23; SnA 497. See also avabhāsa. Obhāsati1 {Obhasati} [o + bhāsati from bhās, cp. Sk. avabhāsati] to shine, to be splendid Pv I.21 (= pabhāseti vijjoteti PvA 10). - Caus. obhāseti to make radiant or resplendent, to illumine, to fill with light or splendour. - pres. obhāseti Pv III.115 (= joteti PvA 176); Miln 336; ppr. obhāsayanto Pv I.111 (= vijjotamāna PvA 56) & obhāsento Pv II.110 (= jotanto ekālokaṃ karonto PvA 71); ger. obhāsetvā S I.66; Kh v. = Sn p. 46; KhA 116 (= ābhāya pharitvā ekobhāsaṃ karitvā). - pp. avabhāsita. Obhāsati2 {Obhasati} [ava + bhāsati fr. bhāṣ; Sk. apabhāṣati] to speak to (inopportunely), to rail at, offend, abuse Vin II.262; III.128. Obhāsana (nt.-adj.) [fr. obhāsa, cp. Sk. avabhāsana] shining VvA 276 (Hardy: "speaking to someone"). Obhoga {Obhoga} [o + bhoga from bhuj to bend] bending, winding, curve, the fold of a robe Vin I.46 (obhoge kāyabandhanaṃ kātabbaṃ). Oma {Oma} (adj.) [Vedic avama, superl. formation fr. ava] lower (in position & rank), inferior, low; pl. omā A III.359 (in contrast with ussā superiors); Sn 860 (ussā samā omā superiors, Pāli Text Society 411 Pāli-English Dictionary equals, inferiors), 954; SnA 347 (= paritta lāmaka). - More freq. in neg. form anoma not inferior, i. e. excellent. Omaka {Omaka} (adj.) [oma + ka] lower in rank, inferior; low, insignificant Nd1 306 (appaka +); J II.142; DhA I.203. Omaṭṭha {Omattha} [pp. of omasati] touched S I.13 = 53 = Th 1, 39. Omaddati [o + maddati from mṛd, BSk. avamardati Jtm 3133] - 1. to rub J VI.262 (sarīraṃ omaddanto); Miln 220. - 2. to crush, oppress M I 87 = Nd2 1996 (abhivaggena); J II.95. {Omaddati} Omasati {Omasati} [o + mas = Sk. mṛṣ] - 1. (lit.) to touch J V. 446. - 2. (fig.) to touch a person, to reproach, insult Vin IV.4 sq. - pp. omaṭṭha. Omasanā {Omasana} (f.) [fr. omasati] touching, touch Vin III.121 (= heṭṭhā oropanā). Omāna1 {Omana} [fr. o + man, think. The Sk. avamāna is later] disregard, disrespect, contempt DhA II.52 (+ atimāna). Cp. foll. & see also avamāna. Omāna2 {Omana} [at J II.443 we read ucce sakuṇa omāna meaning „Oh bird, flying high‟. With the present material we see no satisfactory solution of this puzzle. There is a Burmese correction which is at variance with the commentary] "flying", the v. l. BB is ḍemāna (fr. ḍī). C. explns. by caramāna gacchamāna. Müller, P. Gr. 99 proposes to read ḍemāna for omāna. Omissaka {Omissaka} (adj.) [o + missaka] mixed, miscellaneous, various J V.37; VI.224 (°parisā). Cp. vo°. Omukka {Omukka} (adj.) [fr. + muc] cast off, second hand Vin I.187. Omuñcati {Omuncati} [o + muc] to take off, loosen, release; unfasten, undo, doff D I.126 (veṭhanaṃ as form of salute); J II.326; VI.73 (sāṭakaṃ); Vism 338; PvA 63 (tacaṃ); VvA 75 (ābhāraṇāni). Caus. omuðcāpeti to cause to take off Vin I.273. - pp. omutta. Omutta {Omutta} [pp. of omuñcati] released, freed, discharged, taken off It 56 (read omuttɔassa Mārapāso for T. omukkassa m.). Omutteti {Omutteti} [Sk. avamūtrayati, Denom. fr. mūtra, urine] to discharge urine, pass water M I.79, 127. Oyācati {Oyacati} [o + yāc, opp. āyācati] to wish ill, to curse, imprecate Vin III.137. Ora {Ora} (adj.) [compar. formation fr. ava; Vedic avara] below, inferior, posterior. Usually as nt. oraṃ the below, the near side, this world Sn 15; VvA 42 (orato abl. from this side). - Cases adverbially: acc. oraṃ (with abl.) on this side of, below, under, within M II.142; Sn 804 (oraṃ vassasatā); Pv IV.33Q (oraṃ chahi māsehi in less than 6 months or after 6 months; id. p. at Pv I.1012 has uddhaṃ); PvA 154 (dahato); instr. orena J. V.72; abl. orato on this side Miln 210. pāra the below and the above, the lower & higher worlds Sn 1 (see SnA 13 = Nd2 422b and cp. 412 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary paroparaṃ); Miln 319 (samuddo anorapāro, boundless ocean). -pure (avarapure) below the fortress M I.68 (bahinagare +). -mattaka belonging only to this world, mundane; hence: trifling, insignificant, little, evanescent Vin II.85, 203 = It 85; D I.3; M I.449; A IV.22; V.157, 164; Vbh 247; Nett 62; DhA I.203; DA I.55. Oraka {Oraka} (adj.) [ora + ka] inferior, posterior Vin I.19; II. 159; M II.47; Sn 692 (= paritta SnA 489; cp. omaka); J I.381. Orata {Orata} [o + rata, pp. of ramati] - 1. delighted, satisfied, pleased Miln 210 (cp. abhirata). - 2. desisting, abstaining from, restraining oneself VvA 72 (= virato; cp. uparata). Orabbhika {Orabbhika} [fr. urabbha. The Sk. aurabhrika is later & differs in meaning] one who kills sheep, a butcher (of sheep) M I.343, 412; S II.256; A I.251; II.207 = Pug 56; III.303; Th 2, 242 (= urabbhaghātaka ThA 204); J V.270; VI.111 (and their punishment in Niraya); Pug A 244 (urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā; urabbhe hanatī ti orabbhiko). Oramati {Oramati} [Denom. fr. ora instead of orameti] to stay or be on this side, i. e. to stand still, to get no further J I.492 (oramituṃ na icchi), 498 (oramāma na pārema). Note. This form may also be expld. & taken as imper. of ava + ramati (cp. avarata 2), i. e. let us desist, let us give up, (i. e. we shall not get through to the other side). -anoramati (neg.) see sep. - On the whole question see also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 154 sq. Oramāpeti {Oramapeti} (Caus. II. of oramati] to make someone desist from J V.474 (manussa- maṃsā). Orambhāgiya {Orambhagiya} (adj.) [ora + bhāga + iya; BSk. avarabhāgīya, e. g. Divy 533] being a share of the lower, i e. this world, belonging to the kāma world, Ep. of the 5 saṃyojanāni (see also saṃyojana) D I.156; III.107, 108, 132; M I.432; It 114; Pug 22; Nett 14; SnA 13; DA I.313. Note. A curious form of this word is found at Th 2, 166 orambhāga-manīya, with gloss (ThA 158) oraṃ āgamanīya. Probably the bh should be deleted. Oravitar {Oravitar} [ora + n. ag. of vitarati?] doubtful reading at A V.149, meaning concerned with worldly things (?). The vv. ll. are oramitā, oravikā, oramato, oravi. Orasa (adj.) [Fr. ura, uras breast Vedic aurasa] belonging to one's own breast, selfbegotten, legitimate; innate, natural, own M II.84; III.29; S II.221 (Bhagavato putto o. mukhato jāto); III.83; J III.272; Vv 5022; ThA 236; KhA 248; PvA 62 (urejāta +). {Orasa} Orima {Orima} [superl. formation fr. ora, equivalent to avama] the lower or lowest, the one on this side, this (opp. yonder); only in combn. orima-tīra the shore on this side, the near shore (opp. pāra° and pārima° the far side) D I.244; S IV.175 (sakkāyassɔ adhivacanaṃ) = SnA 24; Dhs 597; Vism 512 (°tīra-mahɔogha); DhA II.99. Oruddha {Oruddha} [fr. orundhati. In meaning equalling Sk. aparuddha as well as ava°] - 1. kept back, restrained, subdued A III.393. - 2. imprisoned J IV.4. See also ava°. Pāli Text Society 413 Pāli-English Dictionary Orundhati {Orundhati} [cp. Sk. avarundhate] to get, attain, take for a wife. - ger. orundhiya J IV.480. - aor. oruddha Th 2, 445. - pp. oruddha. See also avarundhati. Orodha {Orodha} [fr. orundhati; Sk. avarodha] obstruction; confinement, harem, seraglio Vin II.290; IV.261 (rājɔ orodhā harem-lady, concubine); J IV.393, 404. Oropaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. oropeti] taking down, removal, cutting off (hair), in kes'oropaṇa hair-cutting DhA II. 53 (T. has at one place orohaṇa, v. l. oropaṇa). {Oropana} Oropeti {Oropeti} [Caus. fr. orohati; BSk. avaropayati] to take down, bring down, deprive of, lay aside, take away, cut off (hair) VvA 64 (bhattabhājanaṃ oropeti) - ger. oropayitvā Sn 44 (= nikkhipitvā paṭippassambhayitvā Nd2 181; apanetvā SnA 91); J VI.211 (kesamassuṃ). Orohaṇa {Orohana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. orahati] descent, in udakɔorohaṇānuyoga practice of descending in to the water (i. e. bathing) Pug 55; J I.193; Miln 350. Orohati {Orohati} [o + rohati] to descend, climb down D II.21; M III.131; J I.50; Miln 395; PvA 14. Caus. oropeti (q. v.). Olaggeti {Olaggeti} [Caus. of o + lag] to make stick to, to put on, hold fast, restrain M II.178; A III.384 (vv. ll. oloketi, olabheti, oketi); Th 1, 355. Olagga {Olagga} [Sk. avalagna, pp. of avalagati] restrained, checked Th 1, 356 Olanghanā {Olanghana} (f.) [fr. olangheti] bending down Vin III.121 (= heṭṭhā onamanā). Olangheti {Olangheti} [Caus. of ava + langh] to make jump down, in phrase ullangheti olangheti to make dance up & down J V.434 = DhA IV.197 (the latter has T. ullaggheti ol°; but v. l. ullangheti ol°). Olamba {Olamba} (adj.) [fr. ava + lamb] hanging down Vin III.49; J IV.380 (°vilamba). Olambaka {Olambaka} (adj.-n.) [see olambati] - 1. (adj.) hanging down VvA 32 (°dāma). - 2. (n.) (a) support, walking stick J IV.40 (hatth°). - (b) plumb-line J VI.392. Olambati {Olambati} & avalambati [ava + lamb] to hang down, hang on, to be supported by, rest on. The form in o is the older. Pres. avalambare Pv II.118 (= olambamānā tiṭṭhanti PvA 77); II.102 (= olambanti PvA 142); olambati M III.164 (+ ajjholambati); J I.194; PvA 46. - ger. avalamba (for °bya) Pv III.35 (= olambitva PvA 189) & olambetvā J III.218. See also olubbha. Olambanaka {Olambanaka} [fr. olambati] an armchair, lit. a chair with supports Vin II.142. Olikhati {Olikhati} [o + likh, cp. Sk. apalikhati] to scrape off, cut off, shave off (hair) A III.295 (veṇiṃ olikhituṃ); Th 1, 169 (kese olikhissaṃ); 2, 88. Pāli Text Society 414 Pāli-English Dictionary Oligalla {Oligalla} [of unknown etym.: prob. Non-Aryan, cp. BSk. oḍigalla Saddh. P. chap. VI.] a dirty pool near a village M III.168; S V.361; A I.161; III.389; Miln 220; Vism 343. Oliyati {Oliyati} [o + līyate from lī] to stick, stick fast, adhere, cling to It 43; Nett 174. - pp. olīna (see avalīna). Olīna {Olina} [pp. of oliyate] adhering, sticking or clinging to (worldliness), infatuated M I.200 (°vuttika); J VI.569 (anolīna-mānasa); Vbh 350 (°vuttikā); Miln 393 (an°). Olīyanā {Oliyana} [fr. oliyati] adhering, infatuation Ps I.157; Dhs 1156, 1236. Olugga {Olugga} [pp. of olujjati] breaking off, falling to pieces, rotting away M I.80, 245 (oluggavilugga), 450 (id.); Vism 107 (id.). Olujjati {Olujjati} [Sk. avarujyate, Pass. of ava + ruj] to break off, go to wreck, fall away S II.218 (v. l. ull°). - pp. olugga. Olubbha {Olubbha} [assimil. form of olumbha which in all likelihood for olambya, ger. of olambati. The form presents difficulties. See also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156] holding on to, leaning on, supporting oneself by (with acc.); most frequently in phrase daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on a stick, e. g. M I.108 (= daṇḍaṃ olambitvā C.; see M I 539); A III.298; Th 2, 27 (= ālambitvā); VvA 105. In other connections: S I.118; III.129; J I.265 (āvāṭa-mukha-vaṭṭiyaṃ); VI.40 (hatthe); DhA II.57 (passaṃ; gloss olambi); VvA 217, 219. Olumpeti {Olumpeti} [o + Caus. of lup] to strip off, seize, pick, pluck Vin I.278 (bhesajjan olumpetvā, vv. ll. ulumpetvā, oḷump°, odametvā). Olokana {Olokana} (nt.) [see oloketi] looking, looking at, sight Sdhp 479 (mukhassɔ). Olokanaka {Olokanaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. oloketi] window Vin II.267 (olokanakena olokenti, adv.). Oloketi {Oloketi} [BSk. avalokayati or apaloketi] to look at, to look down or over to, to examine, contemplate, inspect, consider J I.85, 108 (nakkhattaṃ); Pv II.964; DhA I.10, 12, 25, 26; II.96 (v. l. for T. voloketi); III.296; PvA 4, 5, 74, 124. Oḷāra {Olara} at PvA 110 is with v. l. BB to be read uḷāra. Oḷārika {Olarika} (adj.) [fr. uḷāra] gross, coarse, material, ample (see on term Dhs trsl. 208 & Cpd. 159 n. 4) D I.37, 186 sq. (attā) 195, 197, 199; M I.48, 139, 247; II.230; III.16, 299; S II.275 (vihāra); III.47 (opp. sukhuma); IV.382 (id.); V.259 sq.; A IV.309 sq. (nimittaṃ obhāso); J I.67; Dhs 585, 675, 889; Vbh 1, 13, 379; Vism 155 (°anga), 274 sq. (with ref. to breathing), 450. Oḷumpika {Olumpika} (adj.) [Deriv. unknown, BSk. olumpika and oḍumpika M Vastu III.113, 443. In the Śvet-Upan. we find the form uḍupa a skiff.] Sen. Kacc 390 belonging to a skiff (no ref. in Pāli Canon?); cp. BSk. olumpika M Vastu III. 113 & oḍumpika ibid. 443. Pāli Text Society 415 Pāli-English Dictionary Ovaja {Ovaja} at S I.212 read ojava. Ovaṭa {Ovata} [o + vaṭa, pp. of vṛ, another form of ovuta = ophuta, q. v.] obstructed, prevented Vin II.255 = IV.52 = A IV.277 (v. l. ovāda); also an° ibid. Ovaṭṭika {Ovattika} (nt.) [fr. ava + vṛt] - 1. girdle, waistband M II.47; J III.285 (v. l. ovaddhi°); Vism 312; DhA II.37; IV.206; DA I.218 (Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 156: a kind of bag). - 2. a bracelet Vin II.106 (= vaḷayaṃ C.). - 3. a patch, patching (°karaṇa), darning (?) Vin I.254 (vv. ll. ovaṭṭiya°, ovadhita° ovadhīya°); J II.197 (v. l. ovaddhi°). See also ovaddheyya (ava°). Ovadati {Ovadati} [o + vadati. The Sk. avavadati is some centuries later and is diff. in meaning] to give advice, to admonish, exhort, instruct, usually combd. with anusāsati. - pres. ovadati Vin IV.52 sq.; DhA I.11, 13; imper. ovadatu M III.267. - pot. ovadeyya Vin IV.52 (= aṭṭhahi garudhammehi ovadati); Sn 1051 (= anusāseyya). - aor. ovadi DhA I.397. - inf. ovadituṃ Vin I.59 (+ anusāsituṃ). - grd. ovaditabba Vin II.5; and ovadiya (see sep.). - Pass. avadiyati; ppr. °iyamāna Pug 64 (+ anusāsiyamāna). Ovadiya {Ovadiya} (adj.) [grd. of ovadati] who or what can be advised, advisable Vin I.59 (+ anusāsiya); Vv 8436 (= ovāda-vasena vattabbaṃ VvA 345). Ovaddheyya {Ovaddheyya} a process to be carried out with the kaṭhina robes. The meaning is obscure Vin I.254. See the note at Vin. Texts II.154; Vin I.254 is not clear (see expln. by C. on p. 388). The vv. ll. are ovadeyya° ovadheyya° ovaṭṭheyya°. Ovamati {Ovamati} [o + vam] to throw up, vomit Ud 78. Ovaraka {Ovaraka} (nt.) [Deriv. uncertain. The Sk. apavaraka is some centuries later. The Sk. apavaraka forbidden or secret room, Halāyudha "lying-in chamber"] an inner room Vin I.217; M I.253; J I.391 (jāto varake T. to be read as jātɔovarake i. e. the inner chamber where he was born, thus also at VvA 158); Vism 90, 431; VvA 304 (= gabbha). Ovariyāna {Ovariyana} [ger. of o + vṛ] forbidding, obstructing, holding back, preventing Th 2, 367 (v. l. ovadiyāna, thus also ThA 250 explained "maṃ gacchantiṃ avaditvā gamanaṃ nisedhetvā"). Ovassa {Ovassa} & °ka see anovassa(ka). Ovassati {Ovassati} [o + vassati] to rain down on, to make wet. - Pass. ovassati to become wet through rain Vin II.121. Ovahati {Ovahati} [o + vahati] to carry down. - Pass. ovuyhati It 114 (ind. & pot. ovuyheyya). Ovāda {Ovada} [BSk. avavāda in same sense as P.] advice, instruction, admonition, exhortation Vin I.50 = II.228; II.255 = IV.52; D I.137 (°paṭikara, function of a king); J III.256 (anovādakara one who cannot be helped by advice, cp. ovadaka); Nett 91, 92; DhA I.13, 398 (dasavidha o.); VvA 345. - ovādaṃ deti to give advice PvA 11, 12, 15, 89, 100 etc.; ovādaṃ gaṇhāti to take or accept advice J 1.159. Pāli Text Society 416 Pāli-English Dictionary Ovādaka {Ovadaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ovāda; cp. BSk. avavādaka in same meaning, e. g. Divy 48, 254, 385] admonishing (act.) or being admonished (pass.); giving or taking advice; a spiritual instructor or adviser M I.145; A I.25; S V.67 = It 107. - anovādaka one who cannot or does not want to be advised, incorrigible J I.159; III.256, 304; V.314. Ovādin {Ovadin} (adj.-n.) [fr. ovāda] = ovādaka M I.360 (anovādin). Ovijjhati {Ovijjhati} [ava + vyadh] to pierce through Vism 304. Ovuta {Ovuta} see ophuta. Ovuyhati {Ovuyhati} [Pass. of ovahati] to be carried down (a river) It 114. Osakkati {Osakkati} [o + sakkati fr. P. sakk = *Sk. ṣvaṣk, cp. Māgadhī osakkai; but sometimes confused with sṛp, cp. P. osappati & Sk. apasarpati] to draw back, move back D I.230; J IV.348 (for apavattati C.); V.295 (an-osakkitvā). See also Trenckner, Notes p. 60. Osajjati {Osajjati} [o + sṛj] to emit, evacuate PvA 268 (vaccaṃ excrement, + ohanati). - pp. osaṭṭha. Osaṭa {Osata} [pp. of o + sṛ] having withdrawn to (acc.), gone to or into, undergone, visited M I.176, 469 (padasamācāro sangha-majjhe o.); II.2 (Rājagahaṃ vass°āvāsaṃ o.); Miln 24 (sākacchā osaṭā bahū). See also avasaṭa. Osaṇheti {Osanheti} [o + saṇheti, denom. fr. saṇha] to make smooth, to smooth out, comb or brush down (hair) Vin II.107 (kese); J IV.219 (id.). Osadha {Osadha} (nt.) [Vedic auṣadha] see osadhī. Osadhika {Osadhika} v. l. It 20 for opadhika. Osadhikā {Osadhika} (f.) [fr. osadha] remedy, esp. poultice, fomentation J IV.361. Osadhī {Osadhi} (f.) [Vedic avaṣa + dhī: bearer of balm, comfort, refreshment]. There is no difference in meaning between osadha and osadhī; both mean equally any medicine, whether of herbs or other ingredients. Cp. e. g. A IV.100 (bījagāma-bhūtagāmā . . osadhitiṇavanappatayo) Pv II.610, with Sn 296 (gāvo . . . yāsu jāyanti osadhā); D I.12, cp. DA I.98; Pv III.53; PvA 86; J IV.31; VI.331 (? trsln. medicinal herb). Figuratively, „balm of salvation‟ (amatosadha) Miln 247. Osadhi-tārakā, star of healing. The only thing we know about this star is its white brilliance, S I.65; It 20 = A V.62; Vv 92; Pv II.110; cp. PvA 71; Vism 412. Childers calls it Venus, but gives no evidence; other translators render it „morning star‟. According to Hindu mythology the lord of medicine is the moon (oṣadhīśa), not any particular star. Osanna {Osanna} (adj.) [o + pp. of syad to move on] given out, exhausted, weak Miln 250 (°viriya). Osappati {Osappati} [o + sṛp to creep] to draw back, give way J VI.190 (osappissati; gloss apīyati). Pāli Text Society 417 Pāli-English Dictionary Osaraka {Osaraka} (adj.) [fr. osarati, osarana & osaṭa] of the nature of a resort, fit for resorting to, over-hanging eaves, affording shelter Vin II.153. See also osāraka. Osaraṇa {Osarana} (nt.) [fr. avasarati] - 1. return to, going into (acc.) visiting J I.154 (gāmantaṃ °kāle). - 2. withdrawal, distraction, drawing or moving away, heresy Sn 538 (= ogahanāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyo ti attho SnA 434). Osarati {Osarati} [o + sṛ] to flow, to go away, to recede to, to visit M I.176 (gāmaṃ etc.); II.122. pp. osaṭa. See also avasarati. Osāna {Osana} (nt.) [fr. osāpeti] stopping, ceasing; end, finish, conclusion S V.79 (read paṭikkamosāna), 177, 344; Sn 938 Osāpeti {Osapeti} [With Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 158 Caus. of ava + sā, Sk. avasāyayati (cp. P. avaseti, oseti), but by MSS. & Pāli grammarians taken as Caus. of sṛ: sarāpeti contracted to sāpeti, thus ultimately the same as Sk. sārayati = P. sāreti (thus vv. ll.). Not with Trenckner, Notes 78 and Müller P. Gr. 42. Caus. of ā + viś to sling] to put forth, bring to an end, settle, put down, fix, decide S I.81 (fut. osāpayissāmi; vv. ll. oyayiss° and obhāyiss° = Ud 66 (T. otarissāmi? vv. ll. obhāyiss°, otāy° & osāy°; C. paṭipajjissāmi karissāmi); J I.25 (osāpeti, v. l. obhāseti); Nd1 412 (in expln. of osāna); VvA 77 (agghaṃ o. to fix a price; vv. ll. ohāpeti & onarāpeti) = DhA III.108 (v. l. osāreti). Cp. osāreti. Osāraka {Osaraka} [fr. osarati] shelter, outhouse J III.446. See also osaraka. Osāraṇā {Osarana} (f.) [fr. osāreti 3] - 1. restoration, rehabilitation reinstatement (of a bhikkhu after exclusion from the Sangha) Vin I.322; Miln 344. - 2. procession (?) (perhaps reading should be ussāraṇā) DhA II.1 (T. oss°). Osārita {Osarita} [pp. of osāreti 3] restored, rehabilitated Vin IV.138. Osāreti {Osareti} [Caus. of o +sṛ to flow] - 1. (with v. l. osāpeti, reading osāreti is uncertain) to stow away, deposit, put in, put away (see also opeti) J VI.52, 67 (pattaṃ thavikāya o.). - 2. to bring out, expound, propound, explain Miln 13 (abhidhammapiṭikaṃ), 203 (kāraṇaṃ), 349 (lekhaṃ to compose a letter). - 3. (t.t.) to restore a bhikkhu who has undergone penance Vin I.96, 322, 340; IV.53 (osārehi ayyā ti vuccamāno osāreti). - Pass. osāriyati Vin II.61; pp. osārita (cp. osāraṇā). Osiñcati {Osincati} [o + siñcati] - 1. to pour out or down over, to besprinkle Vin II.262; M I.87 (telena); Pv I.85 (ppr. osiñcaṃ = āsiðcanto PvA 41). - 2. to scoop out, empty, drain (water) J V.450 (osiðciyā, pot. = osiðceyya C.). - pp. avasitta & ositta. Osita {Osita} [pp. of ava + sā] inhabited (by), accessible (to) Sn 937 (an°). Cp. vy°. Ositta {Ositta} [pp. of osiñcati] sprinkled, besprinkled J V.400. See also avasitta. Pāli Text Society 418 Pāli-English Dictionary Osīdati {Osidati} [fr. o + sad] to settle down, to sink, run aground (of ships) S IV.314 (osīda bho sappi-tela); Miln 277 (nāvā osīdati). - ger. osīditvā J II.293. - Caus. II. osīdāpeti J IV.139 (nāvaṃ). Osīdana {Osidana} (nt.) [fr. osīdati] sinking DhsA 363. Ossa {Ossa} see ussa. Ossakk° {Ossakk°} see osakk°. Ossagga {Ossagga} [fr. ossajati] relaxation, in cpd. sati-ossagga (for which more common sativossagga) relaxation of memory, inattention, thoughtlessness DhA III.163 (for pamāda Dh 167). See vossagga. Ossajjati {Ossajjati} [o + sṛj send off] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release D II.106 (aor. ossaji); Sn 270 = S I.207; Th 1, 321; J IV.260. - pp. ossaṭṭha. See also avassajati. Ossajjana {Ossajjana} (nt.) [fr. ossajati] release, dismissal, sending off DA I.130. Ossaṭṭha {Ossattha} [pp. of ossajati] let loose, released, given up, thrown down D II.106; S III.241; J I.64; IV.460 (= nissaṭṭha). Ossanna {Ossanna} [pp. of osīdati for osanna, ss after ussanna] sunk, low down, deficient, lacking J I.336 (opp. ussanna). Hardly to be derived from ava + syad. Ossavana {Ossavana} (nt.) [fr. ava + sru] outflow, running water M I.189 (v. l. ossāvana & osavana). Cp. avassava. Ohana {Ohana} only in cpd. bimbɔohana, see under bimba. Ohanati {Ohanati} [ava + han, but prob. a new formation from Pass. avahīyati of hā, taking it to han instead of the latter] to defecate, to empty the bowels PvA 268 (+ osajjati). Oharaṇa {Oharana} (nt.) [fr. oharati] lit. "taking away", leading astray, side-track, deviating path J VI.525 (C.: gamana-magga). Cp. avaharaṇa. Oharati {Oharati} [o + hṛ take] - 1. to take away, take down, take off S I.27 (ger. ohacca, v. l. ūhacca); Pv II.66 (imper. ohara = ohārehi PvA 95); DhA IV.56 (see ohārin). See also ava°. - Caus. I. ohāreti (see avahārati); Caus. II. oharāpeti in meaning of oharati to take down, to cut or shave off (hair) J VI.52 (kesamassuṃ); DhA II.53 (cp. oropeti). - pp. avahaṭa. Ohāya {Ohaya} ger. of ojahāti. Ohāra {Ohara} see avahāra see avahāra & cp. vohāra. Pāli Text Society 419 Pāli-English Dictionary Ohāraṇa {Oharana} (nt.) [fr. ohāreti, cp. avaharaṇa] taking down, cutting off (hair) J I.64 (kesamassu°). Ohārin (adj.-n.) [fr. avaharati] dragging down, weighty, heavy Dh 346 (= avaharati heṭṭhā haratī ti DhA IV.56). {Oharin} Ohāreti {Ohareti} [Caus. of oharati] - 1. to give up, leave behind, renounce (cp. ojahāti) Sn 64 (= oropeti Nd2 183). - 2 to take down (see oharati 1) Vin I.48; PvA 95. - 3 to cut down, shave off (hair; see oharāpeti under oharati) It 75 (kesamassuṃ hair & beard, v. l. ohāyāpetvā); Pug 56 (id.). Ohita {Ohita} [pp. of odahati; BSk. avahita (Jtm 210 e. g.) as well as apahita (Lal. V. 552 e. g.)] - 1. put down into, deposited Dh 150. - 2. put down, laid down, taken off, relieved of, in phrase ohitabhāro (arahaṃ) (a Saint) who has laid down the burden: see arahatta III. C.; cp. °khandhabhāra DhA IV.168. - 3. put down in, hidden, put away in (-°) Sn 1022 = (kosɔohita). 4. (fig.) put down to, applied to, in ohita-sota listening, attentive, intent upon (cp. sotaṃ odahati to listen) usually in phrase ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti; M I.480; III.201; S V.96; A IV.391; Vism 300 (+ aṭṭhiṃ katvā). Ohiyyaka {Ohiyyaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. ohīyati, avahiyyati] one who is left behind (in the house as a guard) Vin III.208; IV.94; S I.185 (vihārapāla). Ohīna {Ohina} [pp. of ojahāti] having left behind J IV.432 (gaṇaṃ). Ohīyati {Ohiyati} (ohiyyati) [ava + hīyati, Pass. of ha, see avajahāti] - 1. to be left behind, to stay behind J V.340 (avahīyati = ohiyyati C.). - 2. to stay behind, to fall out (in order to urinate or defecate); ger. ohīyitvā Vin IV.229; DhA II.21 (cp. ohanati). See also ohiyyaka. Ohīḷanā {Ohilana} (f.) [ava + hīḷanā, of hīḍ] scorning, scornfulness Vbh 353 (+ ohīḷattaṃ). Pāli Text Society 420 Pāli-English Dictionary K Ka° {Ka°} (pron. interr.) [Sk. kaḥ, Idg. *qÛo besides *qui (see ki° & kiṃ) & *qÛu (see ku°). Cp. Av. ka-; Gr. pQ, pw_s, poi_os, etc.; Lat. quī; Oir. co-te; Cymr. pa; Goth. hvas, Ags. hwā (=E. who), Ohg. hwër] who? - m. ko, f. kā (nt. kiṃ, q. v.); follows regular decl. of an atheme with some formations fr. ki°, which base is otherwise restricted to the nt. - From ka° also nt. pl. kāni (Sn 324, 961) & some adv. forms like kathaṃ, kadā, kahaṃ, etc. - 1. (a) ka°: nom. m. ko Sn 173, 765, 1024; J I.279; Dh 146; f. kā J VI.364; PvA 41; gen. sg. kassa Miln 25; instr. kena; abl. kasmā (nt.) as adv. "why" Sn 883, 885; PvA 4, 13, 63, etc. - (b) ki° (m. & f.; nt. see kiṃ): gen. sg. kissa Dh 237; J II.104. ko-nāmo (of) what name Miln 14; DhA II.92, occurs besides kin-nāmo Miln 15. kvattho what (is the) use Vv 5010 stands for ko attho. - All cases are freq. emphasized by addition of the affirm. part. nu & su. e. g. ko su'dha tarati oghaṃ (who then or who possibly) Sn 173; kena ssu nivuto loko "by what then is the world obstructed?" Sn 1032; kasmā nu saccāni vadanti . . . Sn 885. - 2. In indef. meaning combd with -ci (Sk. cid: see under ca 1 and ci°): koci, kāci, etc., whoever, some (usually with neg. na koci, etc., equalling "not anybody"), nt. kiðci (q. v.); e. g. mā jātu koci lokasmiṃ pāpiccho It 85; no yāti koci loke Dh 179; n'āhaṃ bhatako 'smi kassaci Sn 25; na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ "nobody's trace of action is lost" Sn 666; kassaci kiñci na (deti) (he gives) nothing to anybody VvA 322; PvA 45. - In Sandhi the orig. d of cid is restored, e. g. app'eva nāma kocid eva puriso idh'agaccheyya, "would that some man or other would come here!" PvA 153. - Also in correl. with rel. pron. ya (see details under ya°): yo hi koci gorakkhaṃ upajīvati kassako so na brāhmano (whoever-he) Sn 612. See also kad°. Kaṃsa {Kamsa} [cp. Sk. kaṃsa; of uncertain etym., perhaps of Babylonian origin, cp. hirañña] 1. bronze Miln 2; magnified by late commentators occasionally into silver or gold. Thus J VI.504 (silver) and J I.338; IV.107; VI.509 (gold), considered more suitable to a fairy king. - 2. a bronze gong Dh 134 (DhA III.58). - 3. a bronze dish J I.336; āpānīya° a bronze drinking cup, goblet M. I.316. - 4. a "bronze," i. e. a bronze coin worth 4 kahāpaṇas Vin IV.255, 256. See Rhys Davids, Coins and Measures §§ 12, 22. - "Golden bronze" in a fairy tale at Vv 54 is explained by Dhammapāla VvA 36 as "bells." - It is doubtful whether brass was known in the Ganges valley when the earlier books were composed; but kaṃsa may have meant metal as opposed to earthenware. See the compounds. -upadahārana (n. a.) metal milk-pail (?) in phrase: dhenusahassāni dukūla-sandanāni (?) kaṃsūpadhāraṇām D II.192; A IV.393; J VI.503 (expld at 504). Kern (Toev. p. 142) proposes correction to kaṃs'ûpadohana (=Sk. kāṃsy'opodohana), i.e. giving milk to the extent of a metal pailful. -kaṇṭaka metal thorns, bits of sharp metal, nails J V.102 (cp. sakaṇṭaka) -kūta cheating with false or spurious metal D I.5 (=DA I.79: selling brass plates for gold ones). -tāla bronze gong DhA I.389; DhsA 319 (°tāḷa); VvA 161 or cymbals J VI.277. 411. -thāla metal dish, as distinguished from earthenware D I.74 (in simile of dakkho nahāpako=A III.25) cp. DA I. 217; Vism 283 (in simile); DhA III.57 (: a gong); DA I.217; DhA IV.67=J III.224; reading at Miln 62 to be °tāla (see J.P.T.S. 1886, 122). -pattharika a dealer in bronze ware Vin II.135. -pāti & pātī a bronze bowl, usually for food: M I.25; A IV.393; Sn 14; PvA 274. -pūra full of metal J IV.107. -bhaṇḍa brass ware Vin II.135. -bhājana a bronze vessel Vism 142 (in simile). -maya made of bronze Vin I.190; II.112; -mallaka metal dish, e. g. of gold J III.21. -loha bronze Miln 267. Kaṃsati {Kamsati} =kassati, see ava°. Pāli Text Society 421 Pāli-English Dictionary Kakaca {Kakaca} [onomat. to sound root kr, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca] a saw Th 1, 445; J IV.30; V.52; VI.261; DA I.212; in simile °-ūpama ovāda M I.129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps I.171, quoted & referred to at Vism 280, 281. -khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw J I.321. -danta tooth of a saw, DA I.37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṃ kīḷamāna). Kakaṇṭaka {Kakantaka} the chameleon J I.442, 487; II.63; VI.346; VvA 258. Kaku {Kaku} [Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus] a peak, summit, projecting corner S I.100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaṃ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. expln sikhara, kūṭa) A III.34 (=AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1891-93, 5. Kakuṭa {Kakuta} a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.: -pāda dove-footed (i. e. having beautiful feet) DhA I.119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, J II.93; DhA I.119; Miln 169. Kakutthaka {Kakutthaka} see ku°. Kakudha {Kakudha} [cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above] 1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull J II.225; J VI.340. - 2. a cock's comb: see sīsa kakudha. - 3. a king's symbol or emblem (nt.) J V.264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha-bhaṇḍa. - 4. a tree, the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin I.28; J VI.519; kakudharukkha DhA IV.153. Note. On pakudha as twin-form of ka° see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108. -phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs XI.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. -bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty J I.53; IV.151; V.289 (=sakāyura). The 5 regalia (as mentioned at J V.264) are vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword, canopy, slippers. - pañcavidha-k° PvA 74. Kakka1 {Kakka} [cp. Sk. kalka, also kalanka & kalusa] a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin I.205 (tila°), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. VI.232: sāsapa° (mustard-paste), mattika° (fragrant earth-paste, cp. Fuller's earth), tila° (sesamum paste). At DA I.88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi°, used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha-cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku. Kakka2 {Kakka} [cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA 111. Kakkaṭa {Kakkata} a large deer (?) J VI.538 (expld as mahāmiga). Kakkaṭaka {Kakkataka} [cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara "hard," kankata "mail"; cp. Gr. karki/nos & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaṭaka hook] a crab S I.123; M I.234; J I.222; Vv 546 (VvA 243, 245); DhA III.299 (mama . . . kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa. -nala a kind of sea-reed of reddish colour, J IV.141; also a name for coral, ibid. magga fissures in canals; frequented by crabs, DhsA 270. -yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs IX.17. -rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab-curry, VvA 243. Kakkara [onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. ke/rkac, kerki/s, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound-root kr, see note on gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J II.162, purāṇa°, II.161; cp. dīpaka1 & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K°-Jātaka, N° 209. {Kakkara} Pāli Text Society 422 Pāli-English Dictionary Kakkaratā {Kakkarata} (f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug 19, 23. Kakkariya {Kakkariya} (nt.) harshness, Pug 19, 23. Kakkaru {Kakkaru} a kind of creeper (°jātāni=valliphalāni) J VI.536. Kakkasa {Kakkasa} (adj.) [Sk. karkaśa to root kr as in kakkaṭaka] rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para-kaṭukā Dhs 1343), M I.286=Dhs 1343; A V.265=283, 293; DhsA 396. akakkasa: smooth Sn 632; J III.282; V.203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891-93, 13); akakkasanga, with smooth limbs, handsome, J V.204. Kakkassa {Kakkassa} roughness Sn 328, Miln 252. Kakkārika {Kakkarika} (and °uka) [fr. karkaru] a kind of cucumber Vv 3328=eḷāluka VvA 147. Kakkāru {Kakkaru} (Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin-gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera J VI.536: kakkārujāt āni=valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.). - 2. a heavenly flower J III.87, 88=dibbapuppha Kakkāreti [*kaṭ-kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound-root kr & cp. khaṭakhaṭa] to make the sound kak, to half choke J II.105. {Kakkareti} Kakku {Kakku} [cp. kakka=kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J V.302 where 5 kinds are enumd: sāsapa°, loṇa°, mattika°, tila°, haliddi°. Kakkoṭaka {Kakkotaka} (?) KhA 38, spelt takk° at Vism 258. Kakkola {Kakkola} see takkola. Kakkhaḷa {Kakkhala} [kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara=P. kakkaṭaka] 1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs 648 (opp. muduka Dhs 962 (rūpaṃ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaṃ kharagataṃ kakkhaḷattaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism 349 (=thaddha), 591, 592 (°lakkhaṇa); DhA II.95; IV.104; Miln 67, 112; PvA 243 (=asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka); VvA 138 (=pharusa). - 2. cruel, fierce, pitiless J I.187, 266; II.204; IV162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh, smooth, pleasant DhsA 397. °vacata, kind speech, ibid. (=apharusa °vācatā mudu°). -kathā hard speech, cruel words J VI.561. -kamma cruelty, atrocity J III.481. -bhāva rigidity Dhs 962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty J III.480. a° absence of hardness or rigidity DhsA 151. Kakkhaḷatā {Kakkhalata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] hardness, rigidity, Dhs 859; Vbh 82; J V.167; DhsA 166.-akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs 44, 45, 324, 640, 728, 859; DhsA 151; VvA 214 (=saṇha). Kakkhalatta {Kakkhalatta} (nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin II.86; Vbh 82; Vism 365; cp. M.Vastu I.166: kakkhaṭatva. Kakkhaḷiya {Kakkhaliya} hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vbh 350. Pāli Text Society Kanka {Kanka} [Sk. kanka, to sound- 423 Pāli-English Dictionary , cp. kinkiṇī & see note on gala] a heron M I.364, 429; J V.475. -patta a heron's plume J V.475. Kankata {Kankata} [=kaṃ or kiṃ+kṛta, to kiṇi, "the tinklings"] elephant's trappings VvA 104 (=kappa). Kankaṇa {Kankana} (nt.) [to same root as kanka] a bracelet, ornament for the wrist Th 2, 259 (=ThA 211). Kankala {Kankala} [Sk. kankāla & cp. śṛnkhala (as kaṇṇa>śṛnga), orig. meaning "chain"] skeleton; only in cpd. atthi°. Aṭṭhikankal'ūpamā kāmā Vin II.25; M I.130, 364; J V.210; Th 1, 1150 (°kuṭika): aṭṭhikankalasannibha Th 2, 488 (=ThA 287; cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 75): aṭṭhikankala aṭṭhi-puñja aṭṭhi-rāsi S II.185=It 17 (but in the verses on same page: puggalass'aṭṭhisañcayo). Cp. aṭṭhisankhalikā PvA 152; aṭṭhika sankhalikā J I.433; aṭṭhisanghāṭa Th 1, 60. Kankuṭṭhaka {Kankutthaka} [cp. Sk. kankuṣṭha] a kind of soil or mould, of a golden or silver colour Mhvs 32. 6 (see note on p. 355). Kankhati {Kankhati} [Sk. kānkṣ cp. śank, Lat. cunctor] 1. with loc.: to be uncertain, unsettled, to doubt (syn. vicikicchati, with which always combined). Kankhati vicikicchati dvīsu mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇesu D I.106 is in doubt and perplexity about (Bgh's gloss, patthanaṃ uppādati DA I.275, is more edifying than exact.)=Sn 107; na kankhati na vicikicchati S II.17=III.135; kankheyya vicikiccheyya S II.50, 54; III.122; V.225 (corr. khankheyya!) 226; same with Satthari kankheyya dhamme° sanghe° sikkhāya° A IV.460=V.17=M I.101=Dhs 1004; cp. Dhs. 1118. - 2. with acc.: to expect, to wait for, to look forward to. Kālaṃ k. to abide one's time, to wait for death S I.65 (appiccho sorato danto k. k. bhāvito (so read for bhatiko) sudanto); Sn 516 (id. with bhāvito sadanto); It 69 (id. bhāvitatto).-J V.411 (=icchati); VI.229 (=oloketi). pp. kankhita S III.99; Sn 540; (+vicikicchita); inf. kankhituṃ S IV.350=399 (+vicikicchituṃ). Kankhana {Kankhana} (nt.) doubting, doubt, hesitation MA 97; DhsA 259. Kankhanīya {Kankhaniya} [grd. of kankhati] to be doubted S IV.399. Kankhā {Kankha} (f.) [cp. Sk. kānkṣā] 1. doubt, uncertainty S I.181; III.203 (dukkhe k. etc.; cp. Nd2 1); Sn 541, 1149; °ṃ vinayati Sn 58, 559, 1025; k. pahīyati Ps II.62; combd with vimati: D I.105; III.116; S IV.327; V.161; A II.79, 160, 185; DA I.274; with vicikicchā: S IV.350; Dhs. 425. Defined as = kankhāyanā & kankhāyitatta Nd21; Dhs 425 (under vicikicchā). 3 doubts enumd at D III.217; 4 in passages with vimati (see above); 7 at Dhs 1004; 8 at Nd2 1 & Dhs 1118; 16 at M I.8 & Vism 518. - 2. as adj. doubting, doubtful, in akankha one who has overcome all doubt, one who possesses right knowledge (vijjā), in combns akankha apiha anupaya S I.181; akhila a. Sn 477, 1059; Nd2I; cp. vitiṇṇa° Sn 514; avitiṇṇa° Sn 249, 318, 320 (=ajānaṃ); nikkankha S II.84 (+nibbicikiccha). - 3. expectation SA 183. - On connotation of k. in general see Dhs trsl. p. 115 n1. -cchida removing or destroying doubt Sn 87. -cchedana the removal of d. J I.98; IV.69. ṭṭhāniya founded on d., doubtful (dhammā) D III.285; A IV.152, 154; V.16; AA 689. -dhamma a doubting state of mind, doubt D II.149; S IV.350. -vitaraṇa overcoming of doubt Miln 233; Pāli Text Society 424 Pāli-English Dictionary DhsA 352, °visuddhi complete purification in consequence of the removal of all doubt D III.288; M I.147; Ud 60; Vism 523; Bdhd 116 sq. -samangin affected with doubts, having doubts DhsA 259. Kankhāyati {Kankhayati} [Denom. fr. kankhā] to doubt, pp. Kankhāyita Sn 1021. Kankhāyanā {Kankhayana} (f.) +kankhāyitatta (nt.) doubting and hesitation, doubtfulness, Nd2 1; Dhs 425, 1004, 1118; DhsA 259. Kankhin {Kankhin} (adj.) [Sk. kānkṣin] 1. doubting, wavering, undecided, irresolute D II.241; Sn 1148; Nd2 185; combd with vecikicchin S III.99; M I.18; A II.174; Sn 510. - 2. longing for Pgdp 106 (mokkha°). - akankhin not doubting, confident, sure (cp. akankha) D II.241; A II.175. Kangu (f.) [derivation unknown, prob. non-Aryan, cp. Sk. kangu] the panic seed, Panicum Italicum; millet, used as food by the poor (cp. piyangu); mentioned as one of the seven kinds of grains (see dhañña) at Vin IV.264; DA I.78. - Miln 267; Mhvs 32, 30. -piṭṭha millet flour, in °maya made of m. meal J VI.581. -bhatta a dish of (boiled) millet meal Vism 418 (in simile). {Kangu} Kaca {Kaca} [Sk. kaca, cp. kāðcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of the head), in °kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs IV.51. Kacavara {Kacavara} [to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combn with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati) J I.292; III.163; IV.300; Vism 70; DA I.7; DhA I.52; SnA 311. - 2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (=pilotikā). -chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in °pacchi a dust basket, a bin J I.290. chaḍḍanaka a dust pan J I.161 (+ muṭṭhi-sammjjanī). -chaḍḍani a dust pan DhA III.7 (sammajjanī+). -chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella DhA IV.210. Kacci & Kaccid {Kacci} {Kaccid} (indecl.) [Sk. kaccid=kad+cid, see kad°] indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense, equivalent to Gr. a)/n, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc., Vin I.158, 350; D I.50 (k. maṃ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; S III.120, 125; Sn. 335, 354, p. 87; J I.103, 279; V.373; DhA II.39 (k. tumhe gatā "have you not gone," answer: āma "yes"); PvA 27 (k. tan dānaṃ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piṃḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin. - Often combd with other indef. particles, e. g. kacci nu Vin I.41; J III.236; VI.542; k. nu kho "perhaps" (Ger. etwa, doch nicht) J I.279; k. pana J I.103. - When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi: kaccinnu J II.133; V.174, 348; VI. 23; kaccissu Sn 1045, 1079 (see Nd2 186). Kaccikāra {Kaccikara} a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna J VI.535 (should we write with BB kacchi°?). Kaccha1 {Kaccha} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.] 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed S I.52 (te hi sotthiṃ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k-nakha-lomā with nails and hair like long-grown grass, cp. same at J III.315 & Sdhp 104); J V.23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); VI.100 (parūḷha-kacchā tagarā); Sn 20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); SnA 33 (pabbata° opp. to nadī°, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (Toev. II.139) doubts the 425 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary genuineness of the phrase parūḷha°. - 2. an arrow (made of reed) M I.429 (kaṇḍo . . . yen'amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaṃ yadi vā ropiman ti). Kaccha2 {Kaccha} (adj.) [ger. of kath] fit to be spoken of A I.197 (Com.=kathetuṃ yutta). akaccha ibid. Kacchaka {Kacchaka} a kind of fig-tree DA I.81. - 2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin IV.35; S V.96; Vism 183. Kacchati {Kacchati} Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna A III.181). - 2. Pass. of karoti. Kacchantara {Kacchantara} (nt.) [see kacchā2] 1. interior, dwelling, apartment VvA 50 (=nivesa). 2. the armpit: see upa°. Kacchapa {Kacchapa} [Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā] a tortoise, turtle S IV.177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) M III.169=S V.455; Th 2, 500 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174).-f. kacchapinī a female t. Miln 67. -lakkhaṇa "tortoise-sign," i. e. fortune-telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna-vijjā D I.9≈; DA I.94. -loma "tortoise-hair," i. e. an impossibility, absurdity J III.477, cp. sasavisāṇa; °maya made of t. hair J III.478. Kacchapaka {Kacchapaka} see hattha°. Kacchapuṭa {Kacchaputa} [see kaccha1] reed-basket, sling-basket, pingo, in -vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar J I.111. Kacchā1 {Kaccha} (f.) [derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha1] 1. enclosure, denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed, i. e. wall or room: see kacchantara.-2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 219=699 (=gīveyyaka VvA); J IV.395 (kacchaṃ nāgānaṃ bandhatha gīveyyaṃ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt, loin- or waist-cloth (cp. next) Vin II.319; J V.306 (=saṃvelli); Miln 36; DhA I.389. Kacchā2 {Kaccha} (f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin I.15 (addasa . . . kacche vīṇaṃ . . . aððissā kacche ālambaraṃ); S I.122=Sn 449 (sokaparetassa vīṃā kacchā abhassatha); It 76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J V.434=DhA IV.197 (thanaṃ dasseti k°ṃ dass° nābhiṃ dass°); J V.435 (thanāni k° āni ca dassayantī; expld on p. 437 by upakacchaka); VI.578. The phrase parūḷha-kaccha-nakhaloma means "with long-grown finger-nails and long hair in the armpit," e. g. S I.78. -loma (kaccha°) hair growing in the armpit Miln 163 (should probably be read parūḷha-k.-nakha-l., as above). Kacchikāra {Kacchikara} see kacci°. Kacchu {Kacchu} [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting] 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin DhA III.297 (mahā° -phalāni). - 2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in Pāli Text Society 426 Pāli-English Dictionary phrase kacchuyā khajjati "to be eaten by itch" (cp. E. itch>eat) Vin I.202, 296; J V.207; Pv II.311 (cp. kapi°); Vism 345; DhA I.299. -cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens, causing itch DhA III.297. -piḷakā scab & boils J V.207. Kajjala {Kajjala} [Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin II.50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167). Kajjopakkamaka {Kajjopakkamaka} a kind of gem Miln 118 (vajira k. phussarāga lohitanka). Kañcaka {Kancaka} a kind of tree (dāsima°) J VI.536 (expld as "dve rukkhajātiyo"). BB have koñcaka. Kañcana {Kancana} (nt.) [Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kāðeana, either from khacati (shine=the shining metal, cp. kāca (glass) & Sk. kāś), or from kanaka gold, cp. Gr. knhko/s (yellow). P. kañcana is poetical] gold A III.346= Th 1, 691 (muttaṃ selā va k.); Th 2, 266 (k° ssa phalakaṃ va); VvA 4, 9 (=jātarūpa). Esp. freq. in cpds.=of or like gold. -agghika a golden garland Bu X. 26. -agghiya id. Bu V.29. -āveḷā id. J VI.49; Vv 362; Pv II.127 (thus for °ācela); III.93; PvA 157. kadalikkhaṇḍa a g. bunch of bananas J VI.13. -thūpa a gilt stupa DhA III.483; IV.120. -patimā a gilt or golden image or statue J VI.553; VvA 168. -paṭṭa a g. turban or coronet J VI.217. -patta a g. dish J V.377. -pallanka a gilt palanquin J I.204. -bimba the golden bimba fruit Vv 366 (but expld at VvA 168 by majjita-kpaṭimā-sadisa "like a polished golden statue"). -bubbula a gilt ornament in form of a ball Mhvs 34, 74. -rūpa a g. figure J III.93. -latā g. strings surrounding the royal drum J VI.589. -vaṇṇa of g. colour, gilt, shining, bright J V.342 (=paṇḍara). -velli a g. robe, girdle or waist cloth J V.398 (but expld as "k-rūpakasadisa-sarīra "having a body like a g. statue"), cp. J V.306, where velli is expld by kacchā, girdle. -sannibha like g., golden-coloured (cp. k-vaṇṇa and Sk. kanaka-varṇa Sp. Av. Ś. I.121, 135, etc.), in phrase °taca "with goldencoloured skin," Ep. of the Buddha and one of the 32 signs of a great man (mahāpurisalakkhaṇa) D II.17; III.143, 159; M II.136; Miln 75; attr. of a devatā Vv 302, 322; VvA 284; of a bhikkhu Sn 551=Th 1, 821. -sūci a gold pin, a hair-pin of gold J VI.242. Kañcanaka {Kancanaka} (adj.) golden J IV.379 (°daṇḍa). Kañcuka {Kancuka} [from kañc (kac) to bind, cp. Gr. ka/kala fetter, Sk. kañcuka] 1. a closely fitting jacket, a bodice Vin I.306=II.267; A I.145; DhA III.295 (paṭa°ṃ paṭimuncitvā dressed in a close bodice); PvA 63 (urago tacaṃ kañcukaṃ omuñcanto viya). - 2. the slough of a snake (cp. 1) DA I.222. - 3. armour, coat of mail J V.128 (sannāha°); DA I.157 (of leather); Dāvs V.14. - 4. a case, covering, encasement; of one pagoda incasing another: Mhvs I.42. Kañjaka {Kanjaka} N. of a class of Titans PvA 272 (kāḷa-k°-bhedā Asurā; should we read khaðjaka? Cp. Hardy, Manual of Buddhism 59). Kañjika {Kanjika} (nt.) [Sk. kāðjika] sour rice-gruel J I.238 (udaka°); Vv 3337 (amba°), 435 (=yāgu VvA 186); DhA I.78, 288; VvA 99 (ācāma-k°-loṇudaka as expln of loṇa-sovīraka "salty fluid, i. e. the scum of sour gruel"). Cp. next. Pāli Text Society 427 Pāli-English Dictionary Kañjiya {Kanjiya} (nt.)=kaðjika; J III.145 (ambila°); VI.365 (°āpaṇa); DhA II.3; IV.164. -teḷa a thick substance rising as a scum on rice-gruel, used in straightening arrows DhA I.288. Kaññā {Kanna} (f.) [from kanīna young, compar. kanīyah, superl. kaniṣṭha; orig. "newly sprung" from *qen, cp. Gr. kaino/s, Vedic kanyā, Lat. re-cen(t)s, Ags. hindema "novissimus." See also kaniṭṭha] a young (unmarried) woman, maiden, girl Pv I.111. - As emblem of beauty in simile khattiya-kaððā vā . . . pannarasa-vassuddesikā vā solasa-vassuddesikā vā . . . M I.88; in combn khattiya-kaððā, brāhmaṇa-k°, etc. A II.205; IV.128; Kisāgotamī nāma khattiya-k° J I.60; deva° a celestial nymph J I.61. -dāna giving away of a girl in marriage Pgdp 85. Kaṭa1 {Kata} [Sk. kaṭa from kṛṇatti: to do wicker-work, roll up, plait; *gert, cp. Gr. ka/rtalos, Lat. cratis=E. crate, Goth. haurds, E. hurdle] a mat: see cpds. & kaṭallaka. -sara a reed: Saccharum Sara, used as medicine DhsA 78. -sāra (DhA I.268) & sāraka a mat for sitting or lying on, made of the stalks of the screw-pine, Pandanus Furcatus J VI.474; V.97; DA I.137; DhA II.183 Kaṭa2 {Kata} another form of kaṭi (hip), only used in cpds.: -aṭṭhika the hip-bone D II.296=M I.58, 89=M III.92 (as v.l.). Note. kaṭiṭṭhika at M III.92 and as v.l. at D II.296. -sāṭaka a loin-cloth J IV.248. Kaṭa3 {Kata} =kata [pp. of karoti] in meaning of "original," good (cp. sat); as nt. "the lucky die" in phrase kaṭag- gaha (see below). Also in combn with su° & duk° for sukata & dukkata (e. g. Vin II.289; DhA III.486; IV.150), and in meaning of "bad, evil" in kaṭana. Cp. also kali. -ggaha "he who throws the lucky die," one who is lucky, fortunate, in phrase "ubhayattha k." lucky in both worlds, i. e. here & beyond Th 1, 462; J IV.322 (=jayaggaha victorious C.); cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 159. Also in "ubhayam ettha k." S IV.351 sq. - Opposed to kali the unlucky die, in phrase kaliṃ gaṇhāti to have bad luck J VI.206 (kaliggaha=parājayasaṃkhāta, i. e. one who is defeated, as opp. to kaṭaggaha=jayasankhāta), 228, 282. Kaṭaka {Kataka} (m. nt.) anything circular, a ring, a wheel (thus in kara° Vin II.122); a bracelet PvA 134. Kaṭakañcukatā {Katakancukata} see kaṭu°. Kaṭakaṭāyati {Katakatayati} =taṭataṭāyati to crush, grind, creak, snap PugA. I.34; VvA 121 (as v.l.); Vism 264. Cp. also karakarā. Kaṭacchu {Katacchu} [cp. on etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1887, 163] a ladle, a spoon; expld by uḷunka DhA IV.75, 123; by dabbi PvA 135. Used for butter VvA 68, otherwise for cooked food in general, esp. rice gruel. - Vin II.216; J I.454; III.277. -gāha "holding on to one's spoon," i. e. disinclination to give food, niggardliness, stinginess DhsA 376, cp. Dhs trsl. 300 n2. -gāhika "spoon in hand," serving with ladles (in the distribution of food at the Mahādāna) PvA 135. parissāvana a perforated ladle Vin II.118. -bhikkhā "ladle-begging," i. e. the food given with a ladle to a bhikkhu when he calls at a house on his begging tour Th 1, 934; Miln 9; DhA IV.123; as representing a small gift to one individual, opposed to the Mahādanā Pv II.957; as an individual meal contrasted with public feeding (salāka-bhatta) DhA I.379. -matta (bhatta) "only a spoonful of rice" Miln 8; DhA IV.75. Pāli Text Society 428 Pāli-English Dictionary Kaṭacchuka {Katacchuka} (adj.) relating to spoons Vin II.233. Kaṭana {Katana} (nt.) [from kaṭa, pp. of karoti] an evil deed A IV.172 (v.l.=AA 744 kaṭanaṃ vuccati pāpakammaṃ). Kaṭallaka {Katallaka} [to kaṭa1] a puppet (pagliaccio), a marionette with some contrivance to make it dance J V.16 (dāru° expld by dārumaya-yanta-rūpaka). Kaṭasī {Katasi} (f.) [prob. a contamination of kaṭa + sīva(thikā), charnel-house, under influence of foll. va(ḍḍh°), cp. Sk. kaṭa (?) a corpse] a cemetery; only in phrase kaṭasiṃ vaḍḍheti "to increase the cemetery" referring to dying and being buried repeatedly in the course of numerous rebirths, expld by susāna & āḷāhana ThA 291. -vaḍḍhenti kaṭasiṃ ghoraṃ ādiyanti punabbhavaṃ Vin II.296=A II.54=Th 1, 456 (where ācinanti (?) for ādiy°), 575; Th 2, 502. Also in cpds. °vaḍḍhana J I.146; Ud 72=Nett 174; °vaḍḍhita S II.178 sq.= Nd2 664. Kaṭākaṭa {Katakata} see kata I.3. Kaṭāha {Kataha} (m. nt.) [Sk. kaṭāha] a pot [in older texts only as -°]. - 1. pot, vessel, vase, receptacle. udaka° Vin II.122; ghaṭi° Vin II.115; loha° Vin II.170. ayo° (in simile "diva-santatte ayokaṭāhe") M I.453=A IV.138; gūtha° Vin IV.265; tumba° (a gourd used as receptacle for food) vin II.114; alābu° DhsA 405. - Uncompounded only at Dpvs 92 (°ka); Mhvs 17, 47; 18, 24. - 2. anything shaped like a pot, as the skull: sīsa° D II.297= M I.58; Miln 197. Kaṭi {Kati} [Sk. kaṭi, *(s)qÛel; orig. bending, curvature, cp. Gr. ske/los hip, Lat. scelus crooked deed, Ger. scheel squint] hip, waist Vin III.22, 112; Nd2 659; J IV.32; Miln 418. In cpds. also kaṭa (q. v.). -thālaka a cert. bone on the small of the back J VI.509. -padesa the buttocks J III.37. pamāṇa (adj.) as far as the waist J VI.593. -pariyosāna the end of the hips, the bottom J II.275. puthulaka (adj.) with broad hips, having beautiful hips J V.303 (in expln of soṇī puthulā). bhāga the waist J III.373. -bhāra a burden carried on the hip (also a way of carrying children) Vin II.137; III.49. -sandhi the joint of the hip Miln 418, Vism 185. -samohita (adj.) fastened or clinging to the waist J V.206. -sutta a belt, girdle (as ornament) PvA 134. -suttaka a string or cord around the waist to fasten the loin-cloth Vin II.271; also an ornamental waist-band, girdle Vin II.107 (see Vin. Texts III.69, 142, 348). Kaṭuka (adj.) [Sk. kaṭu(ka), from *(s)qÛer to cut; cp. Sk. kṛṇoti (kṛṇtati), Lat. caro "cutlet." - k. is almost exclusively poetical; usually expld in prose by aniṭṭha, tikhiṇa, ghora (of niraya); often combd with khara, opp. madhura, e. g. PvA 119] sharp, bitter, acid, severe. 1. severe, sharp (fig.), of dukkha, vedanā, kāmā, etc. M I.10=A II.143; J VI.115; Th 2, 451 (=ThA 281); SA 56. - painful, terrible, frightful (-appld to the fruits of evil actions and to the sufferings in Niraya: see kammapphala & niraya) J III.519; Pv I.102, 111; IV.18, 76. - bitter, or perhaps pungent of taste DhS 291; Miln 65, 112; J III.201. - 2. (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness D II.349=J I.380; Th 2, 503 (pañca°); J VI.509. - Note. Is k. to be written instead of kadukkha at VvA 316, where it explains maraṇa? Cp. J III.201: tesaṃ taṃ kaṭukaṃ āsi, maraṇaṃ ten'upāgamuṃ. -udraya causing bitterness or pain J V.241, cp. dukkhudraya J V.119. -odaka a bitter draught Sdhp 159. -pabhedana (adj.) having a pungent juice exuding from the temples, said of an elephant in rut Dh 324 (=tikhiṇamada DhA IV.13). -pphala a kind of perfume made of the berry of an aromatic plant J II.416=DhA III.475 (kappūra-k°-ādīni), cp. Sk. kakkolaka. (adj.) of bitter fruit J II.106 (of the mango); S I.57=J III.291=Dh 66 (of kamma); Pv I.1110 (id.). {Katuka} Pāli Text Society 429 Pāli-English Dictionary bhaṇḍa (sg. & pl.) spices. There are 4 enumd at J III.86: hingujīraka, singiveraka, marica, pipphali; 3 at VvA 186 (as tikaṭuka, cp. kaṭula): ajamoja, hingujīraka, lasuṇa; PvA 135; DhA II.131. -bhāva stinginess DhsA 376. -rohiṇī the black hellebore Vin I.201 (as medicine). -vipāka (adj.) having a bitter result (of pāpa) Miln 206; compar. °tara S II.128. -sāsana a harsh command J VI.498. Kaṭukañcukatā {Katukancukata} (f.) [der. by Bdhgh. as kaṭuka + añcuka (añc), a popular etymology (DhsA 376). At Dhs 1122 and as v.l. K in Vbh we have the spelling kaṭakancukatā (for kaṭakuðcakatā?), on which and °kuðcaka see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 159 sq. and Dhs. trsl. 300 n2. - Morris'derivation is kaṭa (kar) + kaðcuka + tā (kaðcuka=kuðcaka to kuðc, to contract), thus a dern fr. kañcuka "bodice" and meaning "being tightened in by a bodice," i. e. tightness. Although the reading kaṭukañc° is the established reading, the var. lect. kaṭakuñc° is probably etym. correct, semantically undoubtedly better. It has undergone dissimilatory vowelmetathesis under influence of popular analogy with kaṭuka. With kuðcikatā cp. the similar expression derived from the same root: kuṇalī-mukha, of a stingy person Pv II.928, which is expld by "sankucitaṃ mukhaṃ akāsi" (see kuðcita)] closeness, tightness, close-fistedness, niggardliness. Expld as "the shrinking up of the heart," which prevents the flow or manifestation of generosity. It occurs only in the stock phrase "vevicchaṃ kadariyaṃ k. aggahitattaṃ cittassa" in macchariya-passage at Nd2 614=Dhs 1122 =Pug 19, 23=Vbh 357, 371; and in the macchariya expln at Vism 470. Kaṭukatta {Katukatta} (nt.) pungency, acidity, bitterness Miln 56, 63. Kaṭumikā {Katumika} (f.) [from karoti; see Sk. kṛtrima & kuṭṭima; also kutta & kutti] artificiality, outward help, sugges- tion, appld to sati Miln 78, 79 (cp. Miln trsl. I.121 n and MVastu I.477). Kaṭula {Katula} (adj.) [Sk. kaṭura] containing pungent substances (generally three: tekaṭula) Vin I.210 (yāgu), cp. tikaṭuka. Kaṭuviya {Katuviya} (adj.) [kaṭu viya?] impure, defiled, in °kata A I.280. Kaṭerukkha {Katerukkha} a kind of creeper J VI.536 (perhaps read as next). Kaṭeruha {Kateruha} a flowering plant J VI.537 (=pupphagaccha). Cp. kaseruka. Kaṭṭha1 {Kattha} [Sk. kṛṣṭa, pp. of kasati, cp. kiṭṭha] ploughed, tilled Sn 80; Miln 255; PvA 45, 62. a° untilled, unprepared Anvs 27. su° well-ploughed A I.229; Miln 255. Kaṭṭha2 {Kattha} (adj.) [Sk. kaṣṭa] bad, useless: see kaṭṭhaka2. Only in cpds.; perhaps also in pakaṭṭhaka. -anga pithless, sapless, of no value (of trees) J II.163= DhA I.144. -mukha "with the injurious mouth," a kind of snake DhsA 300. Kaṭṭha3 {Kattha} (nt.) [Brh. kāṣṭha, cp. Ohg. holz] 1. a piece of wood, esp. a stick used as fuel, chips, firewood S I.168=Sn 462; M I.234 (+ kaṭhala); PvA 256 (+ tiṇa). In phrase "sattussada satiṇa-kaṭṭh'odaka sa-dhañña" (densely populated with good supply of grass, firewood, water, and corn) in ster. description of a prosperous place (cp. Xenophon's po/lis oi)koume/nh eu)dai/mwn kai\ mega/lh) D I.87, 111, etc. Both sg. (coll.) & pl. as "sticks" D II.341, esp. in Pāli Text Society 430 Pāli-English Dictionary phrase kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks Vin I.31; Sn p. 104; J II.144; Pv II.951 (=PvA 135), or k°ṃ pāteti (phāṭeti=phāleti? See pāteti) M I.21. Frequent also in similes: M I.241= II.93=III.95 (alla k.); M III.242=S II.97=IV.215= V.212 (dve k.); A III.6 (+ kaṭhala); IV.72 (+ tiṇa); I.124=Pug 30, 36 (+ kaṭhala). - 2. a piece of stick used for building huts (wattle and daub) M I.190. - 3. a stick, in avalekhana° (for scraping) Vin II.141, 221, and in danta° a tooth-pick VvA 63, etc. (see danta). - 4. (adj.) in cpds.=of wood, wooden. -aggi wood-fire, natural fire A IV.41, 45, enumerated last among the 7 fires. -atthaṃ for the purpose of fuel, in phrase k. pharati to serve as fuel A II.95=S III.93= It 90=J I.482. -atthara a mat made of twigs (cp. kaṭasāra) J V.197, also as attharika (& °kā) J VI.21; DhA I.135; f. at J I.9; IV.329; VI.57. -kalingara chips and chaff DhA III.122 (cp. k-khaṇḍa). -khaṇḍa a piece of wood, splinter, chip, suggesting something useless, trifling DhA I.321 (as expln of niratthaṃ va kalingaraṃ); ThA 284 (as expln of chuṭṭho kalingaraṃ viya). -tāla a wooden key Vin II.148 (cp. Vin. Texts III.162). -tāḷa a w. gong DhsA 319. -tumba a w. vessel Vin I.205. -pādukā a wooden shoe, clog Vin I.188. -puñja a heap of w. A IV.72; J II.327. -phālaka wood-cutter Vism 413. -bhatin a wood-cutter Dpvs 20, 28, where given as a nickname of King Tissa. -mañcaka a wooden bed Miln 366. -maya wooden Vin I.203; J I.289= V.435. -rūpa (& °ka) a w. figure, doll J I.287. -vāha a cartload of fire-wood S II.84. vāhana riding on a faggot J I.136. -vipalāvita drifting wood J I.326. -hatthin a w. elephant, built by order of King Caṇḍapajjota to decoy King Udena (cp. the horse of Troy) DhA I.193. -hāraka (f. °ikā) gathering fire-wood, an occupation of poor people M I.79; S I.180; J I.134; II.412; IV. 148; V.417; Miln 331; Vism 120; VvA 173. -hārin=°hāraka Vin III.41; J I.133 (title of J no. 7. referred to at DhA I.349). Kaṭṭhaka1 {Katthaka} (m. nt.) [to kaṭṭha3] a kind of reed Dh 164; DhA III.156 (=velu-sankhātakaṭṭha). Kaṭṭhaka2 {Katthaka} (m. pl.) [to kaṭṭha2] a kind of fairy D II.261 Kaṭṭhissa {Katthissa} (nt.) [Sk.?] a silken coverlet embroidered with gems D I.7=Vin I.192=II.163; DA I.87=AA 445. Kaṭhati {Kathati} [Sk. kvathati; cp. Goth. hvapo scum, hvapjan to seethe. The Dhātumaðjūsā (no. 132, ed. Andersen & Smith) comments on kaṭh with "sosāna-pākesu." See also kuthati] 1. to boil, to stew Bdhgh on Vin I.205, see Vin. Texts II.57 n1, where pp. is given as kuthita. Similarly Th 2, 504 (cp. Sisters 174 n4, but cp. Mil. trs. II.271 "distressed"; E. Müller, J.R.A.S. 1910, 539). - 2. to be scorched, pp. kaṭhita (=hot) Miln 323, 325, 357, 397. - The pp. occurs as °kaṭṭhita & °kuṭṭhita in cpds uk° pa° (q. v.). See also kuṭṭhita. Kaṭhala {Kathala} [Sk. kaṭhara (°la, °lla, °lya: all found in Av. S and Divy), to kṛṇāti; cp. khāṭi] gravel, pebble, potsherd J III.225; V.417; VvA 157; combd with sakkhara at D I.84=A I.9, and in simile at A I.253. As f. combd with kaṭṭha at A I.124=Pug 30, 36; A III.6; as m. in same combn at Vism 261. Kaṭhalaka {Kathalaka} gravel, potsherd J III.227; Miln 34. Kaṭhina {Kathina} (adj.-n.) [Sk. kaṭhina & kaṭhora with dial. ṭh for rth; cp. Gr. kratu/s, kratero/s strong, kra/tos strength; Goth. hardus=Ags. heard=E. hard. Cp. also Sk. kṛtsna=P. kasiṇa]. 1. (adj.) hard, firm, stiff. Cp. II.2; Dhs 44, 45 (where also der. f. abstr. akaṭhinatā absence of rigidity, combd with akakkhalatā, cp. DhsA 151 akaṭhina-bhāva); PvA 152 (°dāṭha). - (fig.) Pāli Text Society 431 Pāli-English Dictionary hard, harsh, cruel J I.295=V.448 (=thaddha-hadaya); adv. °ṃ fiercely, violently Miln 273, 274.2. (nt.) the cotton cloth which was annually supplied by the laity to the bhikkhus for the purpose of making robes Vin I.253 sq.; also a wooden frame used by the bh. in sewing their robes Vin. II.115-117. - On the k. robe see Vin. I.298 sq.; III.196 sq., 203 sq., 261 sq.; IV.74, 100, 245 sq., 286 sq.; V.15, 88, 119, 172 sq.; 218. Cp. Vin. Texts I.18; II.148; III.92. -attharaṇa the dedication of the k. cloth Vin I.266; see next. -atthāra the spreading out, i. e. dedication of the k. cloth by the people to the community of bhikkhus. On rules concerning this distribution and description of the ceremony see Vin I.254 sq.; Bu IX.7; cp. Vin V.128 sq., 205 -uddhāra the withdrawal or suspension of the five privileges accorded to a bhikkhu at the k. ceremony Vin I.255, 259; III.262; IV.287, 288; V.177-179, cp. next & Vin. Texts II.157, 234, 235. ubbhāra=°uddhāra, in kaṭhinassa ubbhārāya "for the suspension of the k. privileges" Vin I.255. -khandhaka the chapter or section treating of k., the 7th of the Mahāvagga of the Vinaya Vin II.253-267. -cīvara a k. robe made of k. cloth Bu IX.7. -dussa the k. cloth Vin I.254. maṇḍapa a shed in which the bhikkhus stitched their k. cloth into robes Vin II.117. -rajju string used to fix the k. cloth on to the frame Vin II.116. -sālā=°maṇḍapa Vin II.116. Kaṭhinaka {Kathinaka} (adj.) referring to the kaṭhina cloth Vin V.61, 114. Kaḍḍhati {Kaddhati} [dialect. form supposed to equal Sk. karṣati, cp. Prk. kaḍḍhai to pull, tear, khaḍḍā pit, dug-out. See also Bloomfield, J.A.O.S. XIV. 1921 p. 465.] 1. to draw out, drag, pull, tug J I.193, 225, 265, 273 (khaggaṃ k. to draw the sword). - 2. to draw in, suck up (udakaṃ) J IV.141. - 3. to draw a line, to scratch J. I.78, 111, 123; VI.56 (lekhaṃ). Kaḍḍhana {Kaddhana} (nt.). 1. pulling, drawing Miln 231. - 2. refusing, rejecting, renunciation, appl. to the selfdenial of missionary theras following Gotama Buddha's example Mhvs 12, 55. Kaḍḍhanaka {Kaddhanaka} (adj.) pulling, dragging J V.260. Kaṇa {Kana} [Derivation uncertain, possibly connected with kana; positive of kanīyān=small; Vedic kaṇa] the fine red powder between the husk and the grain of rice, huskpowder D I.9 (°homa), expld at DA I.93 by kuṇḍaka. - (adj.) made of husk-powder or of finely broken rice, of cakes J I.423 (k-pūva=kuṇḍakena pakka-pūva). -akaṇa (adj.) free from the coating of red powder. characteristic of the best rice Mhvs 5, 30; Anvs 27 (akaṇaṃ karoti to whiten the rice). Cp. kākaṇa. -bhakkha eating husk-powder, a practice of cert. ascetics D I.166=M I.78=A I.241≈. Kaṇaya {Kanaya} [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kaṇaya=kaṇapa] a sort of spear, lance J I.273; II.364 (like a spear, of a bird's beak); Miln 339. -agga the point of a spear J I.329 (like . . ., of a beak). Kaṇavīra {Kanavira} [Sk. karavīra] Nerium odorum, oleander, the flower of which is frequently used in the garland worn by criminals when led to the place of execution (cp. Rouse, J. trsl. IV.119 and Mṛcchakaṭika X. beginning: diṇṇa-kalavīla-dāme. See also under kaṇṭha) Vism 183 (n); DhsA 317; SnA 283; VvA 177; cp. next. Kaṇavera {Kanavera} =kaṇavīra J III.61; IV.191; V.420; VI.406. Kaṇājaka {Kanajaka} (nt.) a porridge of broken rice, eaten together with sour gruel (bilangadutiya; always in this combn except at J V.230) Vin II.77 (cp. Vin. Texts III.9); S I.90, 91; A I.145; Pāli Text Society 432 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.392; J I.228; III.299; DhA III.10; IV.77; VvA 222, 298 (corr. bilanka; Hardy at VvA Index p. 364 expl. as "a certain weight"(?)). -bhatta a meal of k. porridge J V.230. Kaṇikā {Kanika} (f.) [cp. kaṇa] 1. a small particle of broken rice (opp. taṇḍula a full grain) J VI.341, 366 (°āhi pūvaṃ pacitvā). 2. a small spot, a freckle, mole, in a° (adj.) having no moles D I.80, and sa° with moles D. I.80 (cp. DA I.223). Kanikāra (m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra J IV.440; V.420; the difference stated at J V.422 is kaṇi°=mahāpupphā kaṇṇi°=khuddakapupphā) [Sk. karṇikāra]-1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium J I.40; V.295; VI.269, 537. - 2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k-puppha), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at D II.111 (=pīta)= M II.14 (ṇṇ)=A V.61 (ṇṇ); DhA I.388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) J II.25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism 256;=golden VvA 65; DhA II.250 (v. l. ṇṇ). -makula a k. bud J II.83. {Kanikara} Kaṇerika {Kanerika} (nt.) a helmet (?) J VI.397. Kaṇeru {Kaneru} (m. f.) [Derivation uncertain, just possibly connected with kara, trunk. Sanskrit has kareṇu, but the medieval vocabularies give also kaṇeru] a young elephant J II.342; IV.49; V.39, 50, 416; VI.497; DhA I.196 (v. l.) kareṇukā) - f. °kā M I.178. - See also kareṇu. Kaṇṭa {Kanta} (cp. next) a thorn Miln 351. Kaṇṭaka {Kantaka} [From kantati2 to cut. Brh. kaṇṭaka. Spelt also kaṇṭhaka] 1. a thorn Sn 845; Vin I.188; J V.102; VI.105 (in description of the Vetaraṇī); cp. kusa°. - 2. any instrument with a sharp point Sdhp 201. - 3. a bone, fish-bone J I.222; in piṭṭhi° a bone of the spine D II.297≈ (see kaṭaṭṭhi); M I.80=245; Vism 271; Sdhp 102. - 4. (fig.) an obstacle, hindrance, nuisance ("thorn in my side"); Kvu 572; enemy, infestor; a dacoit, thief, robber D I.135 (sa° and a°, of the country as infested with dacoits or free from them, cp. DA I.296); J I.186 (paṭikaṇṭaka, enemy); V.450; Th 1, 946; DhA I.177 (akkhimhi); VvA 301. - 5. (fig.) anything sharp, thorny, causing pain: of kāmā (passions) S IV.189, 195, 198; Ud 24; Kvu 202; cp. sa°. - Thus grouped, like saṃyojanāni, into 10 obstacles to perfection (dasa k.) A V.134; as "bringing much trouble" J IV.117. Often in standing phrase khāṇu-kaṇṭaka stumbling and obstruction A I.35; SnA 334. As abstr. kaṇṭakattaṃ hindrance at Vism 269 (sadda°). -akaṇṭaka 1. free from thorns J II.118; V.260. - 2. (fig.) free from thieves, quiet, peaceful D I.135; also not difficult, easy, happy, bringing blessings (of the right path) A V.135; Vv 187; VvA 96. -sakaṇṭaka 1. having bones (of food) J IV.192, 193. - 2. (fig.) beset with thieves, dangerous D I.135; thorny, i. e. painful, miserable (of duggati and kāmā) S IV.195; Th 2, 352; J V.260. - Cp. also kaṇḍaka and nikkaṇṭaka. -āpacita covered with thorns J VI.249 (cp. °ācita); -āpassaya (=kaṇṭak'apāśraya) a bed made of an outstretched skin, under which are placed thorns or iron spikes; to lie or stand on such is a practice of certain naked ascetics D I.167=M I.78≈. -āpassayika (adj. to prec.) "bed-of-thorns-man" D I.167≈. At J I.493 the reading is k-āpassaya, at III.74 k-apassaya; at III.235 the reading is kaṇṭhaka-seyyaṃ kappetha (should it be k-āpassaye seyyaṃ k°?); D I.167 reads kaṇṭhakā-passayika. -ācita covered with thorns J V.167. -ādhāna a thorny brake, a thorny hedge M I.10 (k-dhāna; for dhāna=ṭhāna see dhāna & cp. rāja-dhānī); A I.35; Miln 220. kasā a thorny whip used for punishment and torture J III.41. -gahana a thorny thicket or jungle S II.228. -gumba a th. bush J I.208. -latā a th. creeper, the Capparis Zeilanica J V.175. vaṭṭa a thorny brake or hedge M I.448. Pāli Text Society 433 Pāli-English Dictionary Kaṇṭaki {Kantaki} (f.) in cpd. °vāṭa a thorny fence (cactus hedge?) Vin II.154. Kaṇṭha {Kantha} [*qÛent from *qÛelt, primarily neck, cp. Lat. collus "the turner." Syn. with k. is gīvā, primarily throat, Brh. kaṇṭha] 1. throat A IV.131; J V.448; Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati, is hoarse); PvA 280 (akkharāni mahatā kaṇṭhena uccaritāni). The throat of Petas is narrow and parched with thirst: PvA 99 (k-oṭṭha-tālūnaṃ tassita), 180 (sūci° like a needle's eye, cp. sūcicchidda. v. l. sūcikaṭṭha "whose bones are like needles"), 260 (visukkha-k-ṭṭha-jivhā). - 2. neck Vin I.15; Dh 307 (kāsāva°); Vv 6417 (expid at VvA 280 by gīvūpagasīsūpagādiābharaṇāni). Esp. in loc. kaṇṭhe round the neck, with ref. to var. things tied round, e. g. kuṇapaṃ k. āsattaṃ A IV.377; kuṇapaṃ k. baddhaṃ J I.5; k. mālā J I.166, 192; k. bandhanti vaḍḍhanaṃ J III.226; with the wreath of karavīra flowers (q. v.) on a criminal ready for execution: rattavaṇṇa-virala-mālāya bandhakaṇṭha PvA 4 (cp. AvŚ I.102; II.182; karavīramālābaddha [sakta II.182]-kaṇṭheguṇa). -kūpa the cavity of the throat Mhbv 137. -ja produced in the throat, i. e. guttural Sāsv 150. -suttaka an ornamental string or string of beads worn round the neck Vin II.106. Kaṇṭhaka1 {Kanthaka} thorn, see kaṇṭaka. Kaṇṭhaka2 {Kanthaka} N. of Gotama's horse, on which he left his father's palace Mhbv 25; spelt kanthaka at J I.54, 62 sq. Kaṇḍa {Kanda} (m. nt.) [perhaps as *kaldno fr. *kalad to break, cp. Gr. kladaro/s, Lat. clades, etc., Sk. kāṇḍa. See also khagga and khaṇḍa] 1. the portion of a stalk or cane between one knot and another; the whole stalk or shaft; the shaft of an arrow, an arrow in general M I.429 (two kinds of arrows: kaccha & ropima, cp. kaṇḍa-cittaka); J I.150; II.91; III.273; V.39; Miln 44, 73; Mhvs 25, 89. As arrow also in the "Tell" story of Culladhanuggaha at J III.220 & DhA IV.66. - 2. a section, portion or paragraph of a book DA I.12; Pgdp 161. - 3. a small portion, a bit or lump DhA I.134 (pūva°); Mhvs 17, 35. - 4. kaṇḍaṃ (adv.) a portion of time, for a while, a little Pgdp 36. - See also khaṇḍa, with which it is often confounded. Der. upa-kaṇḍakin (adj.) (thin) like a stalk or arrow Pv. II.113 (of a Petī). -gamana the going of an arrow, i. e. the distance covered by an arrow in flight, a bow-shot J II.334; cp. kaṇḍu. -cittaka (Sk. kāṇḍa-citraka) an excellent arrow A II.202. -nāḷī a quiver J III.220. -pahāra an arrow-shot, arrow-wound Miln 16 (ekena kpaharena dve mahākāyā padālitā "two birds killed with one stone"), 73. -vāraṇa (adj.) warding off arrows, appl. to a shield J VI.592 (nt.); a shield J IV.366. Kaṇḍaka {Kandaka} =kaṇṭaka Vin II.318 (Bdhgh.); A III.383; Bu XIII.29. -akaṇḍaka free from thieves, safe, secure PvA 161. Kaṇḍarā {Kandara} (f.) sinew, tendon Vin I.91, 322 (in cpd. kaṇḍara-cchinna one whose tendons (of the feet) have been cut); Kvu 23, 31; Vism 253, 254 (where KhA 49 reads miñja). Kaṇḍita {Kandita} at J I.155 is misprint; read: kaṇḍam assa atthī ti kaṇḍī taṃ kaṇḍinaṃ. Kaṇḍin {Kandin} (adj.) having a shaft inserted, appl. to the head of an arrow (salla) J I.155; (m.) an archer ibid. Pāli Text Society 434 Pāli-English Dictionary Kaṇḍu1 {Kandu} (f.) [perhaps from *kanad to bite, scratch; cp. Sk. kandara, Gr. knada/llw to bite, knw/dwn, knw/dalon, etc., Sk. kaṇḍu m. & f.] the itch, itching, itchy feeling, desire to scratch Vin I.202, 296; J. V.198; Vism 345. kaṇḍuṃ karoti to make or cause to itch J V.198; vineti to allay the itch, to scratch J V.199.-(fig.) worldly attachment, irritation caused by the lusts, in "kaṇḍuṃ saṃhanti" (as result of jhāna) A IV. 437. -uppala a kind of lotus-blossom Dāvs IV.48; -paṭicchādi an "itch-cloth," i. e. a covering allowed to the bhikkhus when suffering from itch or other cutaneous disease Vin I.296, 297; IV.171, 172. -rogin (adj.) suffering from the itch Khus 105. Kaṇḍu°2{Kandu°} [=kaṇḍa in compn] an arrow-shot (as measure), in sahassa-kaṇḍu sata-bheṇḍu Th 1, 164=J II.334 (but the latter: sata-bhedo), expld at Th 1, 164n by sahassakaṇḍo sahassa [sata?]-bhūmako, and at J II.334 by sahassa-kaṇḍubbedho ti pāsādo satabhūmiko ahosi; in preceding lines the expression used is "sahassa-kaṇḍagamanaṃ uccaṃ." Kaṇḍuka {Kanduka} the itch, itchy feeling, irritation J V.198. Kaṇḍuvati {Kanduvati} (kandūvati) [Denom. fr. kaṇḍu. Sk. kandūyati] 1. to itch, to be itchy, to be irritated, to suffer from itch Vin I.205; II.121; J V.198 (kaṇḍuvāyati); DhA III.297 (kaṇḍūvantī). - 2. to scratch, rub, scrape A II.207; J VI.413; Pug 56. Kaṇḍuvana {Kanduvana} (nt.) [fr. kaṇḍūvati] 1. itching, itchy feeling DhA I.440; cp. Dhātumaðjūsā no. 416 kaṇḍūvana.- 2. scratching, scraping M I.508; J II.249 (appl. to bad music). Kaṇḍusa {Kandusa} (nt.) a strip of cloth used to mark the kaṭhina robe, in °karaṇa Vin I.254, and °ka ibid. 290. Kaṇḍūyana {Kanduyana} (nt.) [See kaṇḍuvana] the itch J V.69. Kaṇḍolikā {Kandolika} (f.) a wicker-basket or stand Vin II.114, 143 (see Vin. Texts III.86). Kaṇṇa {Kanna} [Vedic karṇa, orig. not associated with hearing, therefore not used to signify the sense (sota is used instead; cp. akkhi>cakkhu), but as "projection" to *ker, from which also Sk. śṛṇga horn. Cp. Gr. ko/rus helmet; Lat. cornu & cervus=E. corner, horn & hart. Further related Sk. aśri (caturaśraḥ four-cornered), śaṣkuli auditory passage; Lat. ācer=Gr. a)/kris, a)/kanos, o)cu/s; Ger. ecke; also Sk. śūla & P. koṇa] 1. a corner, an angle Vin I.48, 286; J I.73; III.42; V.38; VI.519; PvA 74; DhA II.178; Dāvs II.111. -cīvara° the edge of the garment Vism 389. Freq. in cpd. catu° (catukkaṇṇa) four-cornered, square, as Ep. of Niraya Nd2 304III=Pv I.1013 (expld by catu-koṇa). Also of cloth Vin II.228; J I.426; IV.250. - 2. the ear Sn 608; J I.146, 194; DhA I.390 (dasā°). Freq. in phrase kaṇṇaṃ chindati (to cut off the ear) as punishment, e. g. A I.47. - loc. kaṇṇe in the ear, i. e. in a low tone, in a whisper DhA I.166. - 3. the tip of a spoon J. I.347. assakaṇṇa N. of a tree (see under assa3). -alankāra an ornament for the ear J V.409. -āyata (mutta) (a pearl) inserted in the lobe of the ear J II. 275, 276. -kita (should it be kaṇha°? cp. paṃsukita, malaggakita; kita=kata) spoiled, rusty, blunt Vin II.115 (of needles); dirty, mouldy Vin I.48 (of a floor); II.209 (of walls); stained, soiled Vin IV.281 (of robes). -gūthaka the cerumen, wax, of the ear, Vin II.134; Sn 197= J I.146. -cālana shaking the ears J III.99. -cūḷa the root of the ear J VI.488; as °cūlikā at J II.276; Vism 255; DhA IV.13. -chidda (nt.) the orifice of the ear, the outer auditory passage (cp. sūci-chidda eye of the needle) Vin III.39; J II.244, 261. - Pāli Text Society 435 Pāli-English Dictionary chinna one whose ears are cut off Vin I.322; Kvu 31. -cheda cutting or tearing off of the ear Miln 197, 290. -jappaka one who whispers into the ear, one who tells secretly, also a gossip Vin II.98; sa° whispered into the ear, appl. to a method of taking votes ibid. Cp. upakaṇṇakajappin. -jappana whispering into the ear D I.11; DA I.97. -tela anointing the ear with medicinal oil D I.12 (expld at DA I.98, where reading is °telanaṃ). -nāsa ear & nose J II.117; Miln 5 (°chinna). -patta the lobe of the ear J V.463. As °panta at ThA 211. -pāli=°patta Th 2, 259 (expld by °panta). -piṭṭhī the upper part or top of the ear DhA I.394. -puccha the "tail" or flap of the ear Sdhp 168. -bila orifice of the ear Vism 195. -bheri a sort of drum. Cp. IX.24. mala "ear-dirt," ear-wax, in °haraṇī, an instrument for removing the wax from the ear Vin II.135. -mālā a garland from corner to corner (of a temple) Dāvs II.111. -muṇḍa 1. (adj.) one whose ears have been shorn or clipped Pv II.1218 (of the dog of Hell, cp. PvA 152 chinnakaṇṇa). - 2. (°ka) "with blunt corners," N. of the first one of the fabulous 7 Great Lakes (satta-mahāsarā) in the Himavant, enumd at J V.415; Vism 416; DA I.164. -mūla the root of the ear, the ear in gen. J I.335; III.124; loc. fig in a low tone DhA I.173; near, near by DhA II.8 (mama k.). -roga a disease of the ear DhsA 340. -vallī the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -vijjhana perforating the ear, °mangala the ceremony of ear-piercing DhA II.87; cp. mangala. -vedha (cp. prec.) ear-piercing, a quasi religious ceremony on children J V.167. -sakkhali & °ikā the orifice or auditory passage of the ear DhA I.148; DhsA 334, in which latter passage °ikaṃ paharati means to impinge on the ear (said of the wind); °ikaṃ bhindati (=bhindanto viya paharati) to break the ear (with unpleasant words) DhA II.178 (T. sankhaliṃ, v. l. sakkhaliṃ). sankhali a small chain attached to the ear with a small ornament suspended from it J V.438. sandhovika washing the ears A V.202. -sukha 1. (adj.) pleasant to the ear, agreable D I.4=M I.179, 268 =A II.209≈; Miln 1; DA I.75=DhsA 397; - 2. (nt.) pleasant speech J II.187; V.167; opp. kaṇṇa-sūla. -sutta an ornamental string hanging from the ear Vin II.143. -suttaka a string from corner to corner, a clothes-line Vin I.286. -sūla 1. a piercing pain (lit. stake) in the ear, ear-ache VvA 243. - 2. what is disagreeable to hear, harsh speech DhsA 397 (opp. °sukha). -sota the auditory passage, the ear (+ nāsika-sotāni, as ubho sotāni, i. e. heṭṭhā & uparimā) D I.106=Sn p. 108; A IV.86; J II.359; Miln 286, 357; DhA II.72. Kannaka {Kannaka} (& °ika) (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having corners or ears (-°); f. °ikā Vin II.137; J II.185. -kāḷa-kaṇṇika see under kāḷa. Kaṇṇavant {Kannavant} (adj.) [fr. kaṇṇa] having an (open) ear, i. e. clever, sharp J II.261 (=kaṇṇachiddaṃ pana na kassaci n'atthi C.). Kaṇṇikā {Kannika} (f.) [cp. kaṇṇaka & Sk. karṇikā] 1. an ornament for the ear, in °lakkhaṇa: see below. - 2. the pericarp of a lotus J I.152, 183; V.416; Miln 361; Vism 124 (paduma°); VvA 43. - 3. the corner of the upper story of a palace or pagoda, house-top J I.201; III.146, 318, 431, 472; DhA I.77 (kūṭāgāra°); DA I.43; VvA 304; Bdhd 92. - 4. a sheaf in the form of a pinnacle DhA I.98. - In cpds. kaṇṇika°. -baddha bound into a sheaf; fig. of objects of thoughts DhA I.304. -maṇḍala part of the roof of a house J. III.317; DhA III.66; VI.178. -rukkha a tree or log, used to form the top of a house J I.201=DhA I.269. -lakkhaṇa the art of telling fortune by marks on ornaments of the ear, or of the house-top D I.9 (=pilandhana-k° pi geha-k° pi vasena DA I.94). Kaṇṇikāra {Kannikara} see kaṇikāra. Kanha {Kanha} (adj.) [cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas] dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q. v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and Pāli Text Society 436 Pāli-English Dictionary fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright (about black & white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red-green and yellowblue systems). As such enumd in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, maðjeṭṭha at D II.328=M I.509 sq. =II.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha). - II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) J II.215 (=kāḷa-sappa C); °sappa J I.336; III.269, 347; V.446; Vism 664 (in simile); Miln 149; PvA 62; °sīsā with black heads A III.241 (kimī). - 2. of (an abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv II.61, syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. *)apo/llwn *ou)lai_os Samson, etc., see also siniddha-, nīla-, kāla-kesa). sukaṇha-sīsa with very dark hair J V.205, also as sukaṇha-kaṇha-sīsa J V.202 (cp. susukāḷa). °jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair J VI.507, cp. V.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. °añjana glossy polish J V.155 (expld as sukhumakaṇha-lom'ācitattā). - 3. of the black trail of fire in °vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa-vartaniṃ agniṃ R. V. VIII.23, 19) S I.69=J III.140 (cp. III.9); J V.63. - 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti "kaṇh-uttara" black on the surface Vin I.195. - III. (Applied). 1. °pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA 135, cp. Pv III.64, see also pakkha1 3. - 2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Māra Sn 355, 439 (=Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) D I.93 with ref. to the "blackborn" ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dh I.263 kāḷa-vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in °sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory PvA 152. - 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D III.81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). °abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DA I.162; A III.383 sq. °abhijātika "of black birth," of low social grade D III.251=A. III.384; Sn 563; cp. Th 1, 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of "evil disposition" at J V.87 (expld as kāḷaka-sabhāva). - 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: °dhamma A V.232=Dh 87; D III.82; Sn 967; Pug 30; Miln 200, 337; °paṭipadā J I.105, and °magga the evil way A V.244, 278; °bhāvakara causing a low (re-)birth J IV.9 (+ pāpa-kammāni), and in same context as dhamma combd with °sukka at A IV. 33; Sn 526 (where kaṇhā° for kaṇha°): Miln 37; °kamma "black action" M I.39; °vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaṇha°, sukka°, kaṇha-sukka°, akaṇha-asukka° D III.230=M I.389 sq.=A II.230 sq.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in °netta with bright eyes, Ep. of King Pingala-netta J II.242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala-cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. J V.42; Pv II.41). - 2. not evil, i. e. good A II.230, 231. -atikaṇha very dark Vin IV.7; sukaṇha id. see above II.2. Kata {Kata} (& sometimes kaṭa) [pp. of karoti] done, worked, made. Extremely rare as v. trs. in the common meaning of E. make, Ger. machen, or Fr. faire (see the cognate kapp and jan, also uppajjati & vissajjati); its proper sphere of application is either ethical (as pāpaṃ, kusalaṃ, kammaṃ: cp. II.1 b) or in such combinations, where its original meaning of "built, prepared, worked out" is still preserved (cp. I.1 a nagara, and 2 a). I. As verb-determinant (predicative). 1. in verbal function (Pass.) with nominal determination "done, made" (a) in predicative (epithetic) position: Dh 17 (pāpaṃ me kataṃ evil has been done by me), 68 (tañ ca kammaṃ kataṃ), 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ nagaraṃ kataṃ a city built of bones, of the body), 173 (yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ). - (b) in absolute (prothetic) position, often with expression of the agent in instr. D I.84=177=M I.40=Sn p. 16 (in formula kataṃ karanīyaṃ, etc., done is what had to be done, cp. arahant II.A.); Vin III.72 (kataṃ mayā kalyāṇaṃ akataṃ mayā pāpaṃ); Pv I.55 (amhākaṃ katā pūjā done to us is homage). - So also in composition (°-), e. g. (nahāpakehi) °parikammatā the preparations (being) finished (by the barbers) J VI.145; (tena) °paricaya the acquaintance made (with him) VvA 24; PvA 4; (tattha) °paricayatā the acquaintance (with that Pāli Text Society 437 Pāli-English Dictionary spot) VvA 331; (tesaṃ) °pubba done before D II.75=A IV.17; (kena) J VI.575; °matta (made) drunk Th 1, 199; (cira) °saṃsagga having (long) been in contact with, familiar J III.63 (and a°). 2. in adj. (med-passive) function (kaṭa & kata); either passive: made, or made of; done by=being like, consisting of; or medio-reflexive: one who has done, having done; also "with" (i. e. this or that action done). - (a) in pregnant meaning: prepared, cultivated, trained, skilled; kaṭ-ākaṭa prepared & natural Vin I.206 (of yūsa); akaṭa natural ibid., not cultivated (of soil) Vin I.48= II.209; DA I.78, 98; untrained J III.57, 58.-°atta selfpossessed, disciplined J VI.296; °indiya trained in his senses Th 1, 725; °ûpāsana skilled, esp. in archery M I.82; S I.62; A II.48=IV.429; S I.99; J IV.211; Miln 352, °kamma practised, skilled J V.243; of a servant S I.205 (read āse for ase), of a thief A III.102 (cp. below II.1 a); °phaṇa having (i. e. with) its hood erected, of a snake J VI.166; °buddhi of trained mind, clever J III.58; a° ibid.; °mallaka of madeup teeth, an artificial back-scratcher Vin II.316; a° not artificially made, the genuine article Vin II.106; °yogga trained serviceable S I.99; a° useless S I.98. °rūpa done naturally, spontaneously J V.317 (expld by °jāniya; °sabhāva); °veṇī having (i. e. with) the hair done up into a chignon J V.431; °hattha (one) who has exercised his hands, dexterous, skilful, esp. in archery M I.82; S I.62, 98; II.266; A II.48; J IV.211,; V.41; VI.448; Miln 353; DhA I.358; a° unskilled, awkward S I.98; su° well-trained J V 41 (cp. °upāsana), °hatthika an artificial or toyelephant J VI.551. - (b) in ordinary meaning: made or done; °kamma the deed done (in a former existence) J I.167; VvA 252; PvA 10; °piṭṭha made of flour (dough) PvA 16 (of a doll); °bhāva the performance or happening of J III.400; Mhbv 33; °sanketa (one who has made an agreement) J V.436 - (c) with adverbial determination (su°, du°; cp. dūrato, puro, atta, sayaṃ, & II.2 c): sukata well laid out, of a road J VI.293, well built, of a cart Sn 300=304; J IV.395, well done, i. e. good A I.102 (°kamma-kārin doing good works). -dukkata badly made, of a robe Vin IV.279 (ṭ), badly done, i. e. evil A I.102 (°kamma kārin); sukata-dukkata good & evil (°kammāni deeds) D I.27= 55=S IV.351; Miln 5, 25. 3. as noun (nt.) kataṃ that which has been done, the deed. - (a) absolute: J III.26 (katassa appaṭikāraka not reciprocating the deed); V.434 (kataṃ anukaroti he imitates what has been done) kat-ākataṃ what has been done & left undone Vin IV.211; katāni akatāni ca deeds done & not done Dh 50. - (b) with adv. determination (su°, du°): sukataṃ goodness (in moral sense) Sn 240; Dh 314; dukkataṃ badness Vin I.76; II.106; Dh 314; dukkatakārin doing wrong Sn 664. II. As noun-determinant (attributive) in composition (var. applications & meanings). - 1. As 1st pt. of compd: Impersonal, denoting the result or finishing of that which is implied in the object with ref. to the act or state resulting, i. e. "so and so made or done"; or personal, denoting the person affected by or concerned with the act. The lit. translation would be "having become one who has done" (act.: see a), or "to whom has been done" (pass.: see b). - (a) medio-active. Temporal: the action being done, i. e. "after." The noun-determinates usually bear a relation to time, especially to meal-times, as kat-annakicca having finished his meal Dāvs I.59; °bhatta-kicca after the meal J IV.123; PvA 93; °purebhatta-kicca having finished the duties of the morning DA I.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq.; °pātarāsa breakfast J I.227; DhA I.117, a° before br. A IV.64; °pātarāsa-bhatta id. J VI.349; °ānumodana after thanking (for the meal) J I.304; °bhatt'ānumodana after expressing satisfaction with the meal PvA 141. In the same application: kat-okāsa having made its appearance, of kamma Vv 329 (cp. VvA 113); PvA 63; °kamma (-cora) (a thief) who has just "done the deed," i. e. committed a theft J III.34; Vism 180 (katakammā corā & akata° thieves who have finished their "job" & those who have not); DhA II.38 (corehi katakammaṃ the job done by the th.), cp. above I.2 a; °kāla "done their time," deceased, of Petas J III.164 (pete kālakate); PvA 29, cp. kāla; °cīvara after finishing his robe Vin I.255, 265; °paccuggamana having gone forth to meet J III. 93. °paṇidhāna from the moment of his making an earnest resolve (to become a Buddha) VvA 3; °pariyosita finished, ready, i. e. after the end was made VvA 250; °buddha-kicca after he had done the obligations of a Buddha VvA 165, 319; DA I.2; °maraṇa after dying, i. e. dead Pāli Text Society 438 Pāli-English Dictionary PvA 29; °massu-kamma after having his beard done J V.309 (see note to II.1 b). - Qualitative: with ethical import, the state resulting out of action, i. e. of such habit, or "like, of such character." The qualification is either made by kamma, deed, work, or kicca, what can be or ought to be done, or any other specified action, as °pāpa-kamma one who has done wrong DhA I.360 (& a°); °karaṇīya one who has done all that could be done, one who is in the state of perfection (an Arahant), in formula arahaṃ khīṇ'āsavo vusitavā ohitabhāro (cp. above I.1 b & arahant II.A) M I.4, 235; It 38; Miln 138; °kicca having performed his obligations, perfected, Ep. of an Arahant, usually in combn with anāsava S I.47, 178; Dh 386; Pv II.615; Th 2, 337, as adj.: kata-kiccāni hi arahato indriyāni Nett 20; °kiccatā the perfection of Arahantship Miln 339. With other determinations: -āgasa one who has done evil Sdhp 294. -ādhikāra having exerted oneself, one who strives after the right path J I.56; Miln 115. -āparādha guilty, a transgressor J III.42. -ābhinihāra (one) who has formed the resolution (to become a Buddha) J I.2; DhA I.135. -ābhinivesa (one) who studies intently, or one who has made a strong determination J I.110 (& a°). -ussāha energetic Sdhp 127. -kalyāṇa in passage kata-kalyāno kata-kusalo katabhīruttāṇo akata-pāpo akata-luddho (luddo) [: °thaddho It] akata-kibbiso having done good, of good character, etc. A II.174=Vin III.72=It 25=DhsA 383; PvA 174; also Pass. to whom something good has been done J I.137; III.12; Pv II.99; akata-kalyāṇa a man of bad actions It 25; Pv II.79. kibbisa a guilty person M I.39; Vin III.72 (a°), of beings tormented in Purgatory Pv IV.77; PvA 59. -kusala a good man: see °kalyāṇa. -thaddha hard-hearted, unfeeling, cruel: see °kalyāṇa. nissama untiring, valiant, bold J V.243. -parappavāda practised in disputing with others DA I.117. -pāpa an evil-doer It 25; Pv II.79 (+ akata-kalyāṇa); PvA 5; a°: see °kalyāṇa. -puñña one who has done good deeds, a good man D II.144; Dh 16, 18, 220; Pv III.52; Miln 129; PvA 5, 176; a° one who has not done good (in previous lives) Miln 250; VvA 94. -puððatā the fact of having done good deeds D III.276 (pubbe in former births); A II.31; Sn 260, cp. KhA 132, 230; J II.114. bahukāra having done much favour, obliging Dāvs IV.39. -bhīruttāṇa one who has offered protection to the fearful: see °kalyāṇa. -bhūmikamma one who has laid the ground-work (of sanctification) Miln 352. -ludda cruel M III.165; a° gentle Nett 180; cp °kalyāṇa. -vināsaka (one) who has caused ruin J I.467. -vissāsa trusting, confiding J I.389. -ssama painstaking, taking trouble Sdhp 277 (and a°). - (b) medio-passive: The state as result of an action, which affected the person concerned with the action (reflexive or passive), or "possessed of, afflicted or affected with." In this application it is simply periphrastic for the ordinary Passive. - Note. In the case of the noun being incapable of functioning as verb (when primary), the object in question is specified by °kamma or °kicca, both of which are then only supplementary to the initial kata°, e. g. kata-massu-kamma "having had the beard (-doing) done," as diff. fr. secondary nouns (i. e. verb-derivations). e. g. kat-ābhiseka "having had the anointing done." In this application: °citta-kamma decorated, variegated DhA I.192; °daṇḍa-kamma afflicted with punishment (=daṇḍāyita punished) Vin I.76; °massu-kamma with trimmed beard, after the beard-trimming J V.309 (cp. J III.11 & karana). - Various combinations: katañjalin with raised hands, as a token of veneration or supplication Sn 1023; Th 2, 482; J I.17=Bu 24, 27; PvA 50, 141; VvA 78. -attha one who has received benefits J I.378. -ānuggaha assisted, aided J II.449; VvA 102. -ābhiseka anointed, consecrated Mhvs 26, 6. -ûpakāra assisted, befriended J I.378; PvA 116. -okāsa one who has been given permission, received into audience, or permitted to speak Vin I.7; D II.39, 277; Sn 1030, 1031 (°āva°); J V.140; VI.341; Miln 95. -jātihingulika done up, adorned with pure vermilion J III.303. -nāmadheyya having received a name, called J V.492. -paṭisanthāra having been received kindly J VI.160; DhA I.80. -pariggaha being taken to wife, married to (instr.) PvA 161 (& a°). -paritta one on whom a protective spell has been worked, charm-protected Miln 152. -bhaddaka one to whom good has been done PvA 116. sakkāra honoured, revered J V.353; Mhvs 9, 8 (su°). -sangaha one who has taken part in the redaction of the Scriptures Mhvs 5, 106. -sannāha clad in armour DhA I.358. -sikkha (having Pāli Text Society 439 Pāli-English Dictionary been) trained Miln 353. - 2. As 2nd pt. of compd: Denoting the performance of the verbal notion with ref. to the object affected by it, i. e. simply a Passive of the verb implied in the determinant, with emphasis of the verb-notion: "made so & so, used as, reduced to" (garukata=garavita). - (a) with nouns (see s. v.) e. g., anabhāva-kata, kavi°, kāla-vaṇṇa° (reduced to a black colour) Vin I.48= II.209, tāl'āvatthu°, pamāṇa°, bahuli°, yāni°, sankhār'ûpekkhā°, etc. - (b) with adjectives, e. g. garu°, bahu°. - (c) with adverbial substitutes, e. g. atta°, para° (paraṃ°), sacchi°, sayaṃ, etc. Kataka {Kataka} (nt.) [fr. kantati2] a scrubber, used after a bath Vin II.129, 143; cp. Vin. Texts II.318. Kataññu {Katannu} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtajña] lit. knowing, i. e. acknowledging what has been done (to one), i. e. grateful often in combn with katavedin grateful and mindful of benefits S II. 272; A I.87=Pug 26; Vv 8127; Sdhp 509, 524. akataññu 1. ungrateful S I.225; J III.26 (=kata-guṇaṃ ajānanto C.), 474; IV.124; PvA 116; Bdhd 81. - 2. (separate akata-ññu) knowing the Uncreated, i. e. knowing Nibbāna Dh 97, 383; DhA II.188; IV.139. - akataññu-rūpa (& °sambhava) of ungrateful nature J IV.98, 99. Kataññutā {Katannuta} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness (defined at KhA 144 as katassa jānanatā) Sn 265; J I.122 (T. °nā, v. l. °tā); III.25; Pv II.97; VvA 63; Sdhp 497, 540. In combn with kataveditā S II.272; A I.61; II.226, 229. kataððū-kataveditā J III.492. -akataððutā ungratefulness, in combn with akataveditā A I.61; III.273; J V.419; as one of the 4 offences deserving of Niraya A II.226. Katatta {Katatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. kata, cp. Sk. kṛtatvaṃ] the doing of, performance of, only in abl. katattā D II.213; A I.56; J III.128; Dhs 431, 654; SnA 356; DhA III.154; IV.142. Used adverbially in meaning of "owing to, on account of" Miln 275; DhsA 262; Mhvs 3, 40. -akatattā through nonperformance of, in absence or in default of A. I.56; PvA 69, 154. Katana {Katana} (nt.) [fr. kata] a bad deed, injuring, doing evil (cp. kaṭana) J IV.42 (yam me akkhāsi . . . katanaṃ kataṃ), cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1893, 15. Katama {Katama} (adj.) [cp. Vedic katama, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., in function=katara, cp. antama > antara, Lat. dextimus>dexter] which, which one (of two or more) Vin II.89; M I.7; J I.172; Miln 309; PvA 27. In some cases merely emphatic for ko, e. g. Vin I.30 (katamena maggena āgato?); D I.197 (katamo so atta-paṭilābho?); J I.97; Sn 995; Miln 51. instr. katamena (scil. maggena) adv. by which way, how? Miln 57, 58. Katara {Katara} (adj.) [Vedic katara, interr. pron. with formation of num. ord., cp. Gr. po/teros, Lat. uter] which one (of a certain number, usually of two) J I.4; PvA 119. Often only emphatic for ko, e. g. J I.298 (kataraṃ upaddavaṃ na kareyya), and used uninflected in cpds., as katarageha J III.9; °gandhaṃ J VI.336; °divasaṃ J II.251; °nagarato (from what city) DhA I.390; °nāma (kataraṃnāma, adj.) (of what name) ibid. -katarasmiṃ magge in which way, how? J IV.110. Katavedin {Katavedin} (adj.) [kata + vedin, see kataññu] mindful, grateful S I.225; Pug 26; J I.424; II.26. Kataveditā {Katavedita} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] gratefulness: see kataððutā. Pāli Text Society 440 Pāli-English Dictionary Katāvin {Katavin} (adj.-n.) [secondary formation fr. kata] one who has done (what could be done), used like katakicca to denote one who has attained Arahantship S I.14; Miln 264. Kati {Kati} (indecl.) [interr. pron.; used like Lat. quot. Already Vedic.] how many? Vin I.83 (k. sikkhāpadāni), 155; S I.3 (°sangātiga having overcome how many attachments? ), 70; Sn 83, 960, 1018; Ps II.72; Miln 78; DhA I.7, 188; PvA 74. Katikā {Katika} (f.) [to katheti or karoti?] 1. agreement, contract, pact Vin I.153 (T. kātikā), 309; J VI.71; Miln 171, 360. - 2. talking, conversation, talk (adhammikā k., cp. kathikā & kathā) J II.449. -katikaṃ karoti to make an arrangement or agreement Vin III.104, 220, 230; J. I.81; IV.267; DhA I.91; VvA 46. In cpds. katika°, e. g. °vatta observance of an agreement, °ṃ karoti to be faithful to a pact Dh I.8; °ṃ bhindati to break an agreement J VI.541; °saṇṭhāna the entering of an agreement Vin II.76, 208: III.160. Katipaya {Katipaya} (adj.) [cp. Sk. katipaya] some, several; a few (in cpds. or in pl.) J I.230, 487; III.280, 419; IV.125; V.162; Pv II.920 (=appake only a few); DhA I.94 (very few); PvA 46. In sg. little, insignificant Vv 5320 (=appikā f.). °vāre a few times, a few turns J V.132; VI.52; PvA 135; Mhbv 3. Katipāhan {Katipahan} (adv.) [katipaya + ahan, contracted, see aha2] (for) a few days Vin III.14; J I.152, 298, 466; II.38; III.48; IV.147; Mhvs 7, 38; PvA 145, 161; VvA 222. katipāhena (instr.) within a few days Mhvs 17, 41; DhA I.344; PvA 13, 161. katipāh'accayena after (the lapse of) a few days J I.245; DhA I.175; PvA 47. Katima {Katima} [num. ord. fr. kati], f. katimī in k. pakkhassa which (of many other) day of the half-month Vin I.117. Kativassa {Kativassa} (adj.) [kati + vassa] 1. (having) how many years, how old? J V.331. - 2. (having had) how many rainy seasons (in the bhikkhu's career) of how many years'seniority? Vin I.86; Ud 59; Miln 28; DhA I.37. Katividha {Katividha} (adj.) [kati + vidha, for Vedic katidhā] of how many kinds Vism 84. Kate {Kate} (adv.) [loc. of kata] for the sake of, on behalf of; with acc. maṃ k. J IV.14; with gen. maṃsassa k. J V.500. Katta {Katta} [pp. of kantati2; cp. Sk. kṛtta] is represented in Pali by kanta2; katta being found only in cpd. pari°. Kattabba {Kattabba} (adj.) [grd. of karoti] 1. to be done, to be made or performed; that which might or could be done Dh 53; J I.77, 267; V.362. - 2. (nt.) that which is to be done, obligation, duty Th 1, 330; J II.154; V.402; DhA I.211. -akattabba (adj.) not to be done J III.131; V.147; (nt.) that which ought not to be done J V.402. kattabb'ākattabba to be done and not to be done J I.387. kattabba-yuttaka 1. (adj.) fit or proper to be done DhA I.13. - 2. (nt.) duty, obligation J III.9; VI.164; DhA I.180; (the last) duties towards the deceased J I.431. - Cp. kātabba. Kattabbaka {Kattabbaka} (nt.) [fr. last] task, duty Th 1, 330. Pāli Text Society 441 Pāli-English Dictionary Kattabbatā {Kattabbata} (f.) [fr. kattabba] fitness, duty, that which is to be done J II. 179 (iti-°āya because I had to do it thus). Kattar {Kattar} [n. ag. fr. karoti, cp. Sk. kartṛ] one who makes or creates, a maker, doer; in foll. construction. I. Dependent. Either in verb-function with acc., as n. agent to all phrases with karoti e. g. pañhaṃ karoti to put a question, pañhaṃ kattā one who puts a question; or in n. function with gen., e. g. mantānaṃ kattāro the authors of the Mantas, or in cpd. rāja-kattāro makers of kings. - II. Dependent. as n. kattā the doer: kattā hoti no bhāsitā he is a man of action, and not of words. - 1. (indef.) one who does anything (with acc.) A I.103; II.67; V.347, 350 sq.; (with gen.) J I.378; III.136 (one who does evil, in same meaning at III.26, C. akataððū, cp. J.P.T.S. 1893, 15: not to kṛt!); IV.98 (expld as kata by C); V.258; Miln 25, 296; Bdhd 85 sq. - 2. an author, maker, creator D I.18 (of Brahmā: issaro, k., nimmātā), 104 (mantānaṃ); A II.102; Dh I.111. - 3. an officer of a king, the king's messenger J V.220 (=225); VI.259, 268, 302, 313, 492. Note. At J V.225 & VI.302 the voc. is katte (of a-decl.), cp. also nom. °katta for °kattā in salla-katta. - 4. as t.t.g. N. of the instr. case VvA 97; Kacc 136, 143, 277. Kattara {Kattara} (adj.) (only°-) [cp. Sk. kṛtvan (?), in diff. meaning] °daṇḍa a walking-stick or staff (of an ascetic) Vin I.188; II.76=208 sq.; III.160; J I.9; V.132; VI.52, 56, 520; Vism 91, 125, 181. °yaṭṭhi=prec. J II.441; DA I.207; III.140. °ratha an old (?) chariot J III.299. °suppa a winnowing basket Vin I.269=DhA I.174 (°e pakkhipitvā sankāra-kūṭe chaḍḍehi). Kattari {Kattari} & °ī (f.) [to kantati2] scissors, shears J III.298, with ref. to the "shears" of a crab, "as with scissors": cp. Vin. Texts III.138 (see next). Kattarikā {Kattarika} (f.) [fr. last] scissors, or a knife Vin II.134; J. I.223. Kattikā {Kattika} (f.) (& °kattika) [cp. Sk. kṛttikā f. pl. the Pleiades & BSk. karthika] N. of a month (Oct.-Nov.), during which the full moon is near the constellation of Pleiades. It is the last month of the rainy season, terminating on the full moon day of Kattikā (kattika-puṇṇamā). This season is divided into 5 months: Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Bhaddara (Poṭṭhapāda), Assayuja, Kattikā; the month Assayuja is also called pubba-kattikā, whereas the fifth, K., is also known as pacchima-kattikā; both are comprised in the term k.-dvemāsika. Bhikkhus retiring for the first 3 months of the Vassa (rainy season) are kattika-temāsikā, if they include the 4th, they are k.-cātumāsikā. The full moon of Assayuja is termed k.-temāsinī; that of Kattika is k.cātumāsinī. See Vinaya passages & cp. nakkhatta. - Nett 143 (kattiko, v. l. kattikā). -cātumāsinī see above Vin III.263. -coraka a thief who in the month of K., after the distribution of robes, attacks bhikkhus Vin III.262. -chaṇa a festival held at the end of Lent on the full moon of pubba-kattikā, and coinciding with the Pavāraṇā J I.433; II.372; V.212 sq.; Mhvs 17, 17. -temāsi (-puṇṇamā) (the full moon) of pubbakattikā Vin III.261; Mhvs 17, 1 (°puṇṇamāsī). -māsa the month K. J II.372; Mhvs 12, 2 (kattike māse). -sukkapakkha the bright fortnight of K. Mhvs 17, 64. Kattu {Kattu} ° 1. base of inf. kattuṃ (of karoti), in compds °kamyatā willingness to do something Vbh 208; Vism 320, 385; DhA III.289; °kāma desirous to do Vin II.226. °kāmatā desire to do or to perform Vism 466; VvA 43. - 2. base of kattar in compn. Kattha {Kattha} (adv.) [der. fr. interr. base ka° (kad2), whereas Sk. kutra is der. fr. base ku°, cp. kuttha] where? where to, whither? Vin I.83, 107; II.76; D I.223; Sn 487, 1036; J III.76; Pv II.916; Pāli Text Society 442 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA I.3. -k. nu kho where then, where I wonder? D I.215 sq., PvA 22 (with Pot.) -katthaci(d) (indef.) anywhere, at some place or other J I.137; V.468; wherever, in whatever place Miln 366; PvA 284; KhA 247; J III.229; IV.9, 45; as katthacid eva J. IV. 92; PvA 173. Sometimes doubled katthaci katthaci in whatsoever place J IV.341. -na k. nowhere M. I.424; Miln 77; VvA 14. -ṭhita fig. in what condition or state? D II.241 (corresp. with ettha); J IV.110. -vāsa in what residence? Sn 412. -vāsika residing where? J II.128, 273. Katthati {Katthati} [cp. Sk. katthate, etym. unexpld] to boast Sn 783 (ppr. med. akatthamāna). Cp. pavikatthita. Katthitar {Katthitar} (n. ag. fr. katthati] a boaster Sn 930. Katthin {Katthin} (adj.) [fr. katth] boasting A V.157 (+ vikatthin). Katthu {Katthu} (?) a jackal, in °soṇā j. & dogs J VI.538 (for koṭṭhu°). Kathaṃ {Katham} (adv.) [cp. Vedic kathaṃ & kathā] dubit. interr. part. 1. how; with ind. pres. PvA 6 (k. puriso paṭilabhati), or with fut. & cond. J I.222; II.159 (k. tattha gamissāmi); VI.500; PvA 54 (na dassāmi) - 2. why, for what reason? J III.81; V.506. Combined with -ca Vin I.114; II.83. carahi D II.192. -nu & -nu kho Vin II.26, J III.99; IV. 339; Nd2 189, see also evaṃ nu kho. -pana D II.163. -su Nd2 189. -hi J IV.339; DhA I.432. -hi nāma Vin I.45; II.105; III.137; IV.300; all in the same meaning; -ci (kathañci) scarcely, with difficulty Th 1, 456. -kathā "saying how? how?" i. e. doubt, uncertainty, unsettled mind (cp. kaṅkhā); expl. as vicikicchā dukkhe kankhā Nd2 190; D II.282; Sn 500, 866, 1063, 1088; DhA IV.194; as adj. and at end of cpd. °-katha, e. g. vigata° (in phrase tiṇṇa-vicikiccha . . . vesārajjappatta) D I.110=Vin I.12; tiṇṇa° (+ visalla) Sn 17, 86, 367. k-k-salla "the arrow of doubt" D II.283 (vicikicchā +). -kathin having doubts, unsettled, uncertain D II.287; M I.8; Nd2 191; DhsA 352; a° free from doubt, Ep. of Arahant (expld DA I.211: "not saying how and how is this?"); M I.108; It 49; Sn 534, 635, 868, 1064; in phrases tiṇṇa-vicikiccho viharati akathankathī kusalesu dhammesu D I.71=Pug 59, jhāyī anejo a° Dh 414 (: DhA IV.194)=Sn 638. -kara (adj.) how acting, what doing? k. ahaṃ no nirayam pateyyaṃ ("ti/ poiw_n maka/rios e)/somai") J IV.339; Sn 376; J IV.75; V.148. -jīvin leading what kind of life? Sn 181. -dassin holding what views? Sn 848 (see °sīla). -pakāra of what kind Vin I.358; Sn 241 (:kathappakāra). -paṭipanna going what way, i. e. how acting? D II.277, 279, 281. -bhāvita how cultivated or practised? S V.119. -bhūta "how being," of what sort, what like D II.139, 158; -rūpa of what kind? M I.218; A I.249; III.35; J III.525. -vaṇṇa of what appearance, what like? D II.244. -vidha what sort of? J V.95, 146; DhsA 305. -sameta how constituted? Sn 873. -sīla of what character or conduct? how in his morality? Sn 848 (kathaṃdassī kathaṃsīlo upasanto ti vuccati). Kathana {Kathana} (nt.) [fr. kath, see katheti] 1. conversing, talking J I.299; III.459; VI.340. - 2. telling i. e. answering, solving (a question) J V.66 (pañha°).-3. preaching DhA I.7. - 4. reciting, narrating Kacc. 130. Cp. kathita. -akathana not talking or telling J I.420; VI.424; not speaking fr. anger J IV.108; DhA I.440. -ākāra, in °ṃ karoti to enter into conversation with J VI.413. samattha able to speak (of the tongue) J III.459; able to talk or converse with (saddhiṃ) J VI.340. -sīla (one) in the habit of talking, garrulous J I.299; a° J I.420. Kathala {Kathala} (potsherd) spelling at Vism 261 for kaṭhala. Pāli Text Society 443 Pāli-English Dictionary Kathali {Kathali} (metri causā)=next, in the Uddāna at Vin II.234 Kathalika {Kathalika} (nt.) [der. uncertain], always in combn pād'odaka pāda-pīṭha pāda-k°: either a cloth to wipe the feet with after washing them, or a footstool Vin I.9, 47; II.22 sq., 210, 216. At VvA 8 however with pāda-pīṭha expld as a footstool (pāda-ṭhāpana-yoggaṃ dārukhaṇḍaṃ āsanaṃ). Bdhgh (on CV II.1.1) expld pādapīṭha as a stool to put the washed foot on, pādakathalika as a stool to put the unwashed foot on, or a cloth to rub the feet with (ghaṃsana). the meaning "bowl" seems to be preferable to Bdhgh's forced interpretation as "towel." Kathā {Katha} (f.) [fr. kath to tell or talk, see katheti; nearest synonym is lap, cp. vāc'ābhilāpa & sallāpa] 1. talk, talking, conversation A I.130; PvA 39. So in antarā° D I.179; Sn p. 107, 115; cp. sallāpa. Also in tiracchāna° low, common speech, comprising 28 kinds of conversational talk a bhikkhu should not indulge in, enumd in full at D I.7=178=III.36 & passim (e. g. S V.419: corr. suddha° to yuddha°!; A V.128=Nd2 192); ref. to at A III.256; V.185; J I.58; Pug 35. Similarly in gāma° Sn 922; viggāhikā k. A IV.87; Sn 930. Ten good themes of conversation (kathā-vatthūni) are enumd at M III.113=A III.117=IV.357=V.67; Miln 344; similarly dhammī kathā A II.51; IV.307; V.192; Sn 325; pavattanī k. A I.151; yutta kathāyaṃ Sn 826; sammodanīyā k. in salutation formula s°ṃ k°ṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā D I.52, 108, etc.; A V.185; Sn 419, pp. 86, 93, 107, 116. - 2. speech, sermon, discourse, lecture Vin I.203, 290 (°ṃ karoti to discuss); A III.174; IV. 358. Freq. in anupubbi° a sermon in regular succession, graduated sermon, discussing the 4 points of the ladder of "holiness," viz. dānakathā, sīla°, sagga°, magga° (see anupubba) Vin I.15; A III.184; IV.186, 209, 213; DhA I.6; VvA 66. - 3. a (longer) story, often with vitthāra° an account in detail, e. g. PvA 19. bāhira° profane story KhA 48. - 4. word, words, advice: °ṃ gaṇhāti to accept an advice J II.173; III.424. - 5. explanation, exposition, in aṭṭha° (q. v.), cp. gati° Ps II.72. - 6. discussion, in °vatthu (see below) Mhvs 5, 138. -dukkathā harmful conversation or idle talk A III. 181; opp. su° A III.182. -kathaṃ vaḍḍheti "to increase the talk," to dispute sharply J I.404; V.412. °ṃ samuṭṭhāpeti to start a conversation J I.119; IV. 73. - At the end of cpds. (as adj.) °kathā e. g. chinna° Sn 711; ṭhita° DA I.73; madhura° J III.342; VI.255. ābhiððāṇa recollection due to speech Miln 78, 79. -ojja (k°-udya, to vad) a dispute, quarrel Sn 825, 828. -dhamma a topic of conversation DA I.43. -nigghosa the sound of praise, flattery J II.350. -pavatti the course of a conversation J I.119; DhA I.249; Mhbv 61. -pābhata subject of a conversation, story J I.252, 364. -bāhulla abundance of talk, loquacity A IV.87. -magga narrative, account, history J I.2. -rasa the sweetness of (this) speech Miln 345. -vatthu 1. subject of a discourse or discussion, argument M I.372; II.127, 132. There are 10 enumd at A IV.352, 357 (see kathā) and at Vism 19 as qualities of a kalyāṇa-mitta, referred to at A V.67, 129; Vism 127; DhA IV.30. Three are given at D III.220=A I.197. °kusala well up in the subjects of discussion VvA 354. - 2. N. of the fifth book of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka, the seven constituents of which are enumd at var. places (e. g. DA I.17; Mhbv 94, where Kvu takes the 3rd place), see also J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896. -samuṭṭhāna the arising of a discussion Mhvs 5, 138. -samuṭṭhāpana starting a conversation J I.119; III.278; DhA I.250. -sampayoga conversational intercourse A I.197. -sallāpa talk, conversation Vin I.77; D I.89 sq., 107 sq.; II.150; M I.178; A II.197; V.188; Ud 40; J II.283; Miln 31; DA I.276 (expld as kathanapaṭikathana); DhA II.91 (°ṃ karoti) VvA 153. Kathāpeti {Kathapeti} Caus. II. of katheti (q. v.). Kathālikā {Kathalika} (f.) [fr. kuth, to boil] kettle, cooking pot; in daṇḍa° (a pot with a handle) Vin I.286 (v. l. kathālaka), and meda° A iv. 377; DhA II. 179. Pāli Text Society 444 Pāli-English Dictionary Kathika {Kathika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathaka] relating, speaking, conversing about, expounding, in cpds. citta° Th 2, 449 (cp. citra-kathin); (a) tiracchāna° A IV.153; dhamma° J I.148; III.342; IV.2 (°thera); VI.255 (mahā°); as noun a preacher, speaker, expounder A III.174; Mhvs 14, 64 (mahā°). Kathikā {Kathika} (f.) [fr. last?] agreement Dpvs 19, 22; see katikā. Kathita {Kathita} [pp. of katheti, cp. Sk. kathita] said, spoken, related J II.310; IV.73; V.493. su° well said or told J. IV.73. As nt. with instr. J IV.72 (tena kathitaṃ the discourse (given) by him). Kathin {Kathin} (adj.) (-°) [cp. kathika] speaking; one who speaks, a speaker, preacher J I.148 (dhamma-kathikesu citrakathī); Miln 90, 348 (°seṭṭha best of speakers). See also kathaṃkathin. Katheti {Katheti} (v. den. fr. kathā, cp. Sk. kathayate] aor. kathesi, inf. kathetuṃ & kathetave (Vin I.359); Pass. kathīyati & katheti (Miln 22, cp. Trenckner, Notes 122); ppr. Pass. kathīyamāna & kacchamāna (A. III.181); grd. kathetabba, kathanīya & kaccha, - 1. to speak, say, tell, relate (in detail: vitthārato PvA 77). mā kathesi (=mā bhaṇi) do not speak PvA 16. - to tell (a story): J. I.2; IV.137; PvA 12, 13. - 2. to converse with J. VI.413; PvA 86 (=āmantayi). - 3. to report, to inform J V.460. - 4. to recite DhA I.166. - 5. to expound, explain, preach J I.30; Miln 131; DhA I.88; Nd2 s. v. - 6. to speak about (with acc.) Vin II.168. - 7. to refer to J I.307. - 8. to answer or solve (a question) J I.165; V.66. - Caus II. kathāpeti to make say Mhvs 24, 4 (aor. kathāpayi); DhA II.35; KhA 118. Kad° {Kad°} [old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiṃ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaṃ=kiṃarthaṃ to what purpose] orig. "what?" used adverbially; then indef. "any kind of," as (na) kac(-cana) "not at all"; kac-cid "any kind of; is it anything? what then?" Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā° (in denoting badness or smallness, e. g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra & kappaṭa), kiṃ°, ku.° For relation of ku>ka cp. kutra> kattha & kadā. -anna bad food Kacc 178. -asana id. Kacc 178. -dukkha (?) great evil (=death) VvA 316 (expld as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka). Kadamba (cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orangecoloured, fragrant blossoms) J. VI.535, 539; Vism 206; DhA I.309 (°puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.). {Kadamba} Kadara {Kadara} (adj.) miserable J II.136 (expld as lūkha, kasira). Kadariya {Kadariya} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expld by thaddhamaccharī (PvA 102; DhA III.189, 313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka S I.34, 96; A II.59; IV.79 sq.; Dh 177, 223; J V.273; Sn 663; Vv 295. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e. g. I.93; II.77; IV.148; PvA 25, 99, 236. - (nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs 1122; Sn 362 (with kodha). Kadariyatā {Kadariyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] stinginess, niggardliness D II.243; Miln 180; PvA 45. Kadala {Kadala} (nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335. Pāli Text Society 445 Pāli-English Dictionary Kadalī1 {Kadali} (f.) [Sk. kadalī] - 1. the plantain, Musa sapientium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality, transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: S I.154=Vin II.188=S II.241=A II.73 =DhA III.156; cp. Miln 166; - as an image of unsubstantiality, Cp. III.24. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: J I.11; VI.590 (in simile), 592; VvA 31. - 2. a flag, banner, i. e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners (-dhaja) J V.195; VI.412. In cpds. kadali°. -khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e. g. M I.233= S III.141=IV.167; Vism 479; Nd2 680 AII.; J VI.442; as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs VvA 280; -taru the plantain tree Dāvs V.49; -toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; -patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from J V.4; DhA I.59; -phala the fruit of the plantain J V.37. Kadalī2 {Kadali} (f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in °miga J V.406, 416; VI.539; DA I.87; and °pavara-pacc.- attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover D I.7=A I.181=Vin I.192=II.163, 169; sim. D. II.187; (adj.) (of pallanka) A I.137=III.50=IV.394. Kadā {Kada} (indecl.) [Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th 1, 1091-1106; J II.212; VI. 46; DhA I.33; PvA 2. - Combd with ssu J V.103, 215; VI.49 sq. -ci [cid] indef. - 1. at some time A IV.101. - 2. sometimes J I.98; PvA 271. - 3. once upon a time Dāvs I.30. - 4. perhaps, may be J I.297; VI.364. + eva: kadācideva VvA 213; -kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then J I.216; IV. 120; DhsA 238; PvA 253. kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times A I.179; Miln 73; DhA III.362. -na kadāci at no time, never S I.66; J V.434; VI.363; same with mā k° J VI.310; Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana. kadāc- -uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Miln 114. Kaddama {Kaddama} [Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth Nd2 374 (=panka); J I.100; III.220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); VI.240, 390; PvA 189 (=panka), 215; compared with moral im- purities J III.290 & Miln 35. a° free from mud or dirt, clean Vin II.201, of a lake J III.289; fig. pure of character J III.290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J VI.59 (kilesehi). -odaka muddy water Vin II.262; Vism 127. -parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence J VI. 390; -bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud DhA I.333; Kanaka {Kanaka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. knh_kos yellow; Ags. hunig=E. honey. See also kañcana] gold, usually as uttatta° molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu I.59; Pv III.32; J V.416; PvA 10 suvaṇṇa). -agga gold-crested J V.156; -chavin of golden complexion J VI.13; -taca (adj.) id. J V.393; -pabhā golden splendour Bu XXIII.23; -vimāna a fairy palace of gold VvA 6; PvA 47, 53; -sikharī a golden peak, in °rājā king of the golden peaks (i. e. Himālayas): Dāvs IV.30. Kaniṭṭha {Kanittha} (adj.) [Sk. kaniṣṭha; compar. & superl.; see kaððā] younger, youngest, younger born Vin III.146 (isi the younger); J II.6; PvA 42, 54; esp. the younger brother (opp. jeṭṭha, °ka) J I.132; DhA I.6, 13; Mhvs. 9, 7; PvA 19, 55. Combd with jeṭṭhaka the elder & younger brothers J I.253; sabba- k. the very youngest J I.395. f. kaniṭṭhā the youngest daughter DhA I.396. - fig. later, lesser, inferior, in °phala the lesser fruit (of sanctification) Pv IV.188. - akaniṭṭha "not the smaller" i. e. the greatest, highest; in akaniṭṭhagāmin going to the highest gods (cp. parinibbāyin) S V.237= 285, etc. °bhavana the abode of the highest gods J. III.487. Pāli Text Society Kaniṭṭhaka 446 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) younger (opp. jeṭṭha) A IV.93=J II.348; DhA I.152; the younger brother Mhvs 5, 33, 8, 10; 35, 49; 36, 116; -°ikā and °akā a younger sister, Mhvs 1, 49; Pv I.115 (better read for kaniṭṭhā). {Kanitthaka} Kaniṭṭhatta {Kanitthatta} (nt.) the more recent and therefore lower, less developed state (of sanctification) DhA I.152. Kaniṭṭhī {Kanitthi} (f.) a younger sister Mhvs 7, 67. Kaniya {Kaniya} (adj.) [compar. of kan°, Sk. kanīyaṃs] younger, less, inferior Kacc 122 (only as a grammarian's construction, not in the living language where it had coalesced with *kanyā=kaððā). Kanta1 {Kanta} [Sk. kānta, pp. of kāmeti] - 1. (adj.) in special sense an attribute of worldly pleasure (cp. kāma, kāmaguṇā): pleasant, lovely, enjoyable; freq. in form. iṭṭhā kantā manāpā, referring to the pleasures of the senses S I.245; II.192; IV.60, 158, 235 sq.; V.22, 60, 147; A II.66 sq.; M I.85; Sn 759; It 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337; bāla° (lovely in the opinion of the ignorant) Sn 399.D II.265; III.227 (ariya°); J III.264; V.447; with ref. to the fruit of action as giving pleasure: °phala Kvu 35, 211, PvA 277 (hatthi-) k° pleasing to elephants; of manta DhA I.163; of vīṇā J VI.255, 262; DhA I.163. - 2. beloved by, favourite of, charming J VI.255, 262; DhA I.163. - 3. (n.) the beloved one, the husband J VI.370 (wrongly written kan tena); of a precious stone Miln 118; Sdhp 608, cp. suriya°, canda°-kantā (f.) the beloved one, the wife J V.295; kantena (instr.) agreeably, with kind words A II.213; J V.486 (where porisādassa kante should be read as porisādassak'ante). -a° undesired, disagreeable, unpleasant, in same form as kanta, e. g. D II.192; in other combn J V.295; Vbh 100; Nett 180; PvA 193. -akantena with unpleasant words A II.213. -kantatara compar. J III.260. -bhāva the state of being pleasant DA I.76; VvA 323. Kanta2 {Kanta} [pp. of kantati2, Sk. kṛtta. kanta is analogyform. after pres. kantati, regularly we should expect katta. See also avakanta. It may be simply misreading for katta, cp. Kern, Toev. under parikanta.] cut, cut out or off Th 2, 223 (°salla=samucchinna-rāg'-ādisalla ThA 179) cp. katta & pari°. Kantati1 {Kantati} [Sk. kṛṇatti, *qert, cp. kata, & Lat. cratis, crassus, E. crate] to plait, twist, spin, esp. suttaṃ (thread) Vin IV.300; PvA 75; DhA III.273; kappāsaṃ A III.295. Cp. pari°. Kantati2 {Kantati} [Sk. kṛṇtati; *(s)qert, to cut; cp. Gr. kei/rw, to shear; Lat. caro, cena; Ohg. sceran, E. shear; see also kaṭu] to cut, cut off J II.53 (: as nik° in gloss, where it should be mūlāni kant°); III.185; VI.154; DhA III.152 (+ viddhaṃseti). Kantāra {Kantara} (adj. n.) [perhaps from kad-tarati, difficult to cross, Sk. (?) kāntāra] difficult to pass, scil. magga, a difficult road, waste land, wilderness, expld as nirudaka īriṇa VvA 334 (on Vv 843), combd with maru° PvA 99 and marukantāramagga PvA 112; opp. khemantabhūmi. Usually 5 kinds of wilds are enumerated: cora°, vāla°, nirudaka°, amanussa°, appabbhakkha° J I.99; SA 324; 4 kinds at Nd2 630: cora°, vāla°, dubhikkha°, nirudaka°. The term is used both lit. & fig. (of the wilds of ignorance, false doctrine, or of difficulties, hardship). As the seat of demons (Petas and Yakkhas) freq. in Pv (see above), also J I.395. As diṭṭhi° in pass. diṭṭhi-gata, etc. M I.8, 486, Pug 22 (on diṭṭhi vipatti). -addhāna a road in the wilderness, a dangerous path Pāli Text Society 447 Pāli-English Dictionary (fig.)Th 1, 95~D I.73=M I.276; -paṭipanna a wanderer through the wilderness, i. e. a forester J III.537. -magga a difficult road (cp. kummagga) J II.294 (lit.); in simile: S II.118. -mukha the entrance to a desert J I.99. Kantāriya {Kantariya} (adj.) [from kantāra] (one) living in or belonging to the desert, the guardian of a wilderness, applied to a Yakkha Vv 8421 (=VvA. 341). Kantika1 {Kantika} (adj.) [to kantati1] spinning PvA 75 (sutta° itthiyo). Kantika2 {Kantika} =kanta1 in a° unpleasant, disgusting Pv III.41 (=PvA 193). Kantita1 {Kantita} [Sk. kṛtta, pp. of kantati1] spun, (sutta) Vin IV.300. Kantita2 {Kantita} (adj.) Sk. kṛtta pp. of kantati2] cut off, severed, at Miln 240 better as kantita1, i. e. spun. Kanda {Kanda} [Sk. kanda] a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. J I.273; IV.373; VI.516; VvA 335; °mūla bulbs and roots (°phala) D I.101; a bulbous root J V.202. Kandati {Kandati} [Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. kale/w, ke/lados, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout] to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dh 371; Vv 8312; J VI.166; Miln 11, 148; freq. of Petas: PvA 43, 160, 262 (cp. rodati). - In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiṃ k. M. I.86=Nd2 s. v.; A III.54 (urattāḷī for °iṃ v. l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k° Vin I.237; II.284; J V.267. Kandana {Kandana} (nt.) [Sk. krandana] crying, lamenting PvA 262 Kandara {Kandara} [Sk. kandara] - 1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin II.76, 146; used as a dwelling-place Th 1, 602; J I.205; III.172. - 2. a glen, defile, gully D I.71=A II.210=Pug 59; A IV.437; Miln 36; expld at DA I.209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. "kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ; tena dāritaṃ"). k-padarasākhā A I.243=II.240; PvA 29. Kandala {Kandala} N. of a plant with white flowers J IV.442. -makuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism 253 (as in description of sinews). Kandaḷa {Kandala} N. of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb D I.264. Kandita {Kandita} (adj.) [pp. of kandati] weeping, lamenting Dāvs IV.46; a° not weeping J III.58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation J III.57; Miln 148. Kanna {Kanna} (adj.) [Sk. skanna] trickling down J V.445. Kannāma {Kannama} =kinnāma J VI.126. Pāli Text Society 448 Pāli-English Dictionary Kapaṇa {Kapana} (adj. n.) [Sk. kṛpaṇa from kṛp wail, cp. Lat. crepo; Ags. hraefn=E. raven. Cp. also Sk. kṛcchra] - 1. poor, miserable, wretched; a beggar; freq. expld by varāka, duggata, dīna and daḷidda; very often classed with low-caste people, as caṇḍālā Pv. III.113 & pesakārā (Ud 4). Sn 818; J I.312, 321; III.199; Pv II.914; III.113, IV.52; DA I.298; DhA I.233; ThA 178. - 2. small, short, insignificant A I.213; Bdhd 84. (f.) °ā a miserable woman J IV.285; -°an (adv.) pitifully, piteously, with verbs of weeping, etc. J III.295; V.499; VI.143; a° not poor J III.199; -ati° very miserable Pgdp 74. Der. °tā wretchedness Sdhp 315. -addhikā pl. often with °ādi, which means samaṇabrāhmaṇa-k°-vaṇibbaka-yācakā (e. g. D I.137; PvA 78) beggars and wayfarers, tramps J I.6, 262, DhA I.105, 188 (written k°-andhika); see also DA I.298 and kapaṇikā; -iddhikā pl. (probably miswriting for °addh°, cp. Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 130) D I.137; It 65; DA I.298; -itthī a poor woman J III.448; -jīvikā in °aṃ kappeti to make a poor livelihood J I.312; -bhāva the state of being miserable PvA 274; -manussa a wretched fellow, a beggar Vism 343; -laddhaka obtained in pain, said of children J VI.150, cp. kiccha laddhaka; -visikhā the street or quarter of the poor, the slums Ud 4; -vuttin leading a poor life PvA 175. Kapaṇikā {Kapanika} (f.) a (mentally) miserable woman Th 2, 219; ThA 178; cp. kapaṇā; also as kapaṇiyā J VI.93. Kapalla {Kapalla} at Vin I.203, is an error for kajjala, lamp-black, used in preparation of a collyrium (cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167). Kapalla {Kapalla} (nt.) [Sk kapāla; orig. skull, bowl, cp. kapola & Lat. caput, capula, capillus, Goth. haubi, E. head]- 1. a bowl in form of a skull, or the shell of reptiles; see kapāla.- 2. an earthenware pan used to carry ashes J I.8; VI.66, 75; DhA I.288. - 3. a frying pan (see cpds. & cp. angāra-kapalla) Sn 672. -kapalla is only a variant of kapāla. -pāti an earthen pot, a pan J I.347=DhA I.371; -pūva a pancake J I.345; DhA I.367; VvA 123; Mhvs 35, 67. Kapallaka {Kapallaka} - 1. a small earthen bowl J VI.59; DhA I.224. - 2. a frying pan J I.346. Kapāla {Kapala} (nt.) [Sk. kapāla, see kapalla] - 1. a tortoiseor turtle-shell S I.7=Miln 371; S IV.179; as ornament at DA I.89. - 2. the skull, cp. kaṭāha in sīsakaṭāha. - 3. a frying pan (usually as ayo°, of iron, e. g. A IV.70; Nd2 304III; VvA 335) J II.352; Vv 845; DhA I.148 (v. l. °kapalla); Bdhd 100 (in simile). - 4. a begging bowl, used by certain ascetics S IV.190; V.53, 301; A I.36; III.225; J I.89; PvA 3. - 5. a potsherd J II.301. -ābhata the food collected in a bowl A I.36; -khaṇḍa a bit of potsherd J II.301; -hattha "with a bowl in his hand," begging, or a beggar, Th 1, 1118; J I.89; III.32; V.468; PvA 3. Kapālaka {Kapalaka} - 1. a small vessel, bowl J I.425. - 2. a beggar's bowl J I.235; DhA II.26. Kapāsa {Kapasa} =kappāsa, q. v. Dāvs II.39. Kapi {Kapi} [Sk. kapi, original designation of a brownish colour, cp. kapila & kapota] a monkey (freq. in similes) Sn 791; Th 1, 1080; J I.170; III.148, cp. kavi. -kacchu the plant Mucuna pruritus Pv II.310; °phala its fruit PvA 86; -citta "having a monkey's mind," capricious, fickle J III.148=525; -naccanā Npl., Pv IV.137; -niddā "monkey-sleep," dozing Miln 300. Pāli Text Society Kapiñjala 449 Pāli-English Dictionary [Derivation unknown. Sk. kapiñjala] a wild bird, possibly the francolin partridge Kvu 268; J VI.538 (B.B. kapiñjara). {Kapinjala} Kapiṭhana {Kapithana} the tree Thespesia populneoides Vin IV. 35. Kapiṭṭha {Kapittha} and °ttha and °ttha - 1. the tree Feronia elephantum, the wood-apple tree J VI.534; Vism 183 (°ka); Mhvs 29, 11; - 2. °ṃ (nt.) the wood apple Miln 189; - 3. the position of the hand when the fingers are slightly and loosely bent in J I.237; kapitthaka S V.96. Kapitthana {Kapitthana} =kapiṭhana J II.445; VI.529, 550, 553; v. l. at Vism 183 for °itthaka. Kapila {Kapila} (adj.) [Sk. kapila, cp. kapi] brown, tawny, reddish, of hair & beard VvA 222; °ā f. a brown cow DhA IV.153. Kapisīsa {Kapisisa} [Sk. kapiśīrṣa] the lintel of a door D II.143 (cp. Rh.D. Buddh. Suttas p. 95 n1) °ka the cavity in a doorpost for receiving the bolt Vin II.120, 148 (cp. Vin. Texts II.106 n3). Kapota {Kapota} [Sk. kapota, greyish blue, cp. kapi) - 1. (m.) a pigeon, a dove J I.243; Miln 403; - 2. (f.) °i a female pigeon PvA 47; °ka (f. °ikā Miln 365) a small pigeon J I.244. -pāda (of the colour) of a pigeon's foot J I.9. Kapola {Kapola} [Sk. kapola, cp. kapalla, orig. meaning "hollow"] the cheek Vism 263, 362; DhA I.194. Kappa {Kappa} (adj. n.) [Sk. kalpa, see kappeti for etym. & formation] anything made with a definite object in view, prepared, arranged; or that which is fit, suitable, proper. See also DA I.103 & KhA 115 for var. meanings. -I Literal Meaning. - 1. (adj.) fitting, suitable, proper (cp. °tā) (=kappiya) in kappākappesu kusalo Th 1, 251, °kovido Mhvs 15, 16; Sn 911; as juice Miln 161. - (-°) made as, like, resembling Vin I.290 (ahata°); Sn 35 (khaggavisāṇa°); hetu° acting as cause to Sn 16; Miln 105; -a° incomparable Mhvs 14, 65; - 2. (nt.) a fitting, i. e. harness or trapping (cp. kappana) Vv 209 (VvA 104); - a small black dot or smudge (kappabindu) imprinted on a new robe to make it lawful Vin I.255; IV.227, 286: also fig. a making-up (of a trick): lesa° DA I.103; VvA 348. - II. Applied Meaning. - 1. (qualitative) ordinance, precept, rule; practice, manner Vin II.294, 301 (:kappati singiloṇa-kappo "fit is the rule concerning . . ."); cp. Mhvs 4, 9; one of the chalanga, the 6 disciplines of Vedic interpretation, VvA 265; - 2. (temporal) a "fixed" time, time with ref. to individual and cosmic life. As āyu at DA I.103 (cp.kappaṃ); as a cycle of time=saṃsāra at Sn 521, 535, 860 (na eti kappaṃ); as a measure of time: an age of the world Vin III.109; Miln 108; Sdhp 256, 257; PvA 21; It 17=Bdhd 87=S II.185. There are 3 principal cycles or aeons: mahā°, asankheyya°, antara°; each mahā° consists of 4 asankheyya-kappas, viz. saṃvaṭṭa° saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyi° vivaṭṭa° vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyi° A II.142; often abbreviated to saṃvaṭṭa-vivaṭṭa° D I.14; It 15; freq. in formula ekampijātiṃ, etc. Vin III.4=D III.51, 111= It 99. On pubbanta° & aparanta°, past & future kappas see D I.12 sq. paṭhamakappe at the beginning of the world, once upon a time (cp. atīte) J I.207. When kappa stands by itself, a Mahā-kappa is understood: DA I.162. A whole, complete kappa is designated by kevala° Sn pp. 18=46~125; Sn 517; also dīgha° S II.181; Sdhp 257. For similes as to the enormous length of a kappa see S II.181 & DA I.164=PvA 254. - acc. kappaṃ adv.: for a long time D II.103=115= Ud 62, quot. at DA I.103; Vin II.198; It 17; Miln 108; mayi āyukappaṃ J I.119, Pāli Text Society 450 Pāli-English Dictionary cp. Miln 141. Cp. sankappa. -ātīta one who has gone beyond time, an Arahant Sn 373. āvasesaṃ (acc.) for the rest of the kappa, in kappaṃ vā k-āvasesaṃ vā D II.117=A IV.309=Ud 62; Miln 140: -āyuka (one) whose life extends over a kappa Mhvs V.87; -uṭṭhāna arising at or belonging to the (end of a) kappa: -aggi the fire which destroys the Universe J II.397; III.185; IV.498; V.336; VI.554; Vism 304; -kāla the time of the end of the world J V.244; -uṭṭhāna (by itself) the end of the world J I.4=Vism 415; -kata on which a kappa, i. e. smudge, has been made, ref. to the cīvara of a bhikkhu (see above) Vin I.255; IV.227, 286; DA I.103; -(ñ)jaha (one) who has left time behind, free from saṃsāra, an Arahant Sn 1101 (but expld at Nd2 s. v., see also DA I.103, as free from dve kappā: diṭṭhi° taṇha°). -jāla the consumption of the kappa by fire, the end of a kappa Dpvs I.61. -ṭṭha staying there for a kappa, i. e. in purgatory in āpāyiko nerayiko + atekiccho, said of Devadatta Vin II.202, 206; A III.402 ~IV.160; It 11~85. -ṭṭhāyin lasting a whole cycle, of a vimāna Th 1, 1190. -ṭṭhika enduring for an aeon: kibbisa (of Devadatta) Vin II.198=204; (cp. Vin. Texts III.254) sālarukkha J V.416; see also ṭhitakappiṃ Pug 13. -ṭṭhitika id. DhA I.50 (vera); Miln 108 (kammaṃ). ("sabbe pi magga-samangino puggalā ṭhita-kappino.") -ṭṭhiya-=prec. A V.75; J I.172, 213; V.33; Miln 109, 214. °rukkha the tree that lasts for a kappa, ref. to the cittapāṭalī, the pied trumpet-tree in the abode of the Asuras J I.202; -nibbatta originated at the beginning of the k. (appl. to the flames of purgatory) J V.272; -parivaṭṭa the evolution of a k; the end of the world Dpvs I.59; -pādapa=°rukkha Mhbv 2; rukkha a wishing tree, magical tree, fulfilling all wishes; sometimes fig. J VI.117, 594; Vism 206; PvA 75, 176, 121; VvA 32 (where combd with cintāmaṇi); DhA IV.208; -latā a creeper like the kapparukkha VvA 12; -vināsaka (scil. aggi): the fire consuming the world at the end of a k. Vism 414 sq.; (mahāmegho) DhA III.362; -samaṇa an ascetic acc. to precepts, an earnest ascetic J VI.60 (cp. samaṇa-kappa); -halāhala "the k-uproar," the uproar near the end of a kalpa J I.47. Kappaka {Kappaka} [fr. kḷp, kappeti] a barber, hairdresser, also attendant to the king; his other function (of preparing baths) is expressed in the term nahāpaka (Pv II.937) or nahāpita (°ā?) (DA I.157) Vin. I.344; II.182; D I.51 (=DA I.157, in list of various occupations); J I.60, 137; III.315; Pv II.937; III.14 (where expl. by nahāpita in the meaning of "bathed," cp. expl. ad I.106) DhA I.85 (°vesa disguise of a barber), 342 (pasādhana° one who arranges the dress, etc., hairdresser). -jātika belonging to or reborn in the barber class, in this sense representing a low, "black" birth PvA 176. Kappaṭa {Kappata} [kad-paṭa=ku-paṭa] a dirty, old rag, torn garment (of a bhikkhu) Th 1,199. Kappatā {Kappata} (f.) [abstr. fr. kappa] fitness, suitability DA I.207. Kappati {Kappati} [Pass. of kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpyate] to be fit, seeming, proper, with dat. of person D II.162; Vin II.263, 294; III.36; Th 1,488; Mhvs 4, 11; 15, 16. Kappana {Kappana} (nt.) [fr. kappeti, cp. Sk. kalpana] the act of preparing, fixing; that which is fixed, arranged, performed. 1. kappanā (f.) the fixing of a horse's harness, harnessing, saddling J I.62; - 2. (nt.) (-°) procuring, making: jīvika°; a livelihood J III.32; putting into order; danta° J I.321; - 3. (adj.) (-°) trimmed, arranged with: nānāratana° VvA 35. Kappara {Kappara} [cp. Sk. kūrpara] the elbow Vin III.121=IV.221; J I.293, 297; DhA I.48, 394; VvA 206. Pāli Text Society 451 Pāli-English Dictionary Kappāsa {Kappasa} [cp. Sk. karpāsa] 1. the silk-cotton tree J III.286; VI.336. - 2. cotton D II.141; A III.295; S V.284; J I.350; VI.41; comb. w. uṇṇa A III.37=IV.265=268. -aṭṭhi a cotton seed DhA III.71; -paṭala the film of the cotton seed Vism 446; Bdhd 66; -picu cotton S V.284; J V.110, 343; VI.184: -maya made of cotton PvA 77. Kappāsika {Kappasika} (adj.) made of cotton D II.188, cp. A IV.394; D II.351; Vin I.58=97=281; J VI.590; Pv II.117. (nt) cotton stuff Miln 267. -paṇṇa the leaf of the cotton tree, used medicinally Vin I.201; -sukhuma fine, delicate cotton stuff D II.188; A IV.394; Miln 105. Kappāsī {Kappasi} (f.) [=kappāsa] cotton J VI.537; PvA 146. Kappika {Kappika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. belonging to a kappa, in paṭhama° -kāla the time of thé first Age DA I.247; Vbh 412 (of manussā); VvA 19 (of Manu); without the kāla (id.) at J I.222; as noun the men of the first Age J II.352. - 2. In cpds. . . . pubbanta° and aparanta° the ika° belongs to the whole cpd. D I.39 sq.; DA I.103. See also kappiya 2. Kappita {Kappita} [pp. of kappeti] 1. prepared, arranged, i. e. harnessed D I.49; J VI.268; i. e. plaited DA I.274; i. e. trimmed: °kesamassu "with hair & beard trimmed" D II.325; S IV.343; J V.173, 350; VI.268; Vv 731. - 2. getting procuring; as °jīvika a living J V.270; made ready, drawn up (in battle array) D II.189; - 3. decorated with, adorned with Sdhp 247. -su° well prepared, beautifully harnessed or trimmed Vv 601. Kappin {Kappin} (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa II.1a) getting, procuring, acquiring (pañña°) Sn 1090; - 2. (cp. kappa II.1b) having a kappa (as duration), lasting a Cycle Pug 13; in Mahā° enduring a Mahākappa DA I.164=PvA 254. Kappiya {Kappiya} (adj.) [fr. kappa] 1. (cp. kappa II.1a) according to rule, right, suitable, fitting, proper, appropriate (PvA 26=anucchavika paṭirūpa) J I.392; DA I.9; PvA 25, 141. -a° not right, not proper, unlawful Vin I.45, 211; II.118; III.20; (nt) that which is proper A I.84; Dhs 1160; -a° ibid; -kappiyākappiya (nt) that which is proper and that which is not J I.316; DA I.78. - 2. (cp. kappa II.1b) connected with time, subject to kappa, i. e. temporal, of time, subject to saṃsāra; of devamanussā Sn 521; na+of the Muni Sn 914. In another sense ("belonging to an Age") in cpd. paṭhama °-kāla the time of the first Age J II.352. -a° delivered from time, free from saṃsāra, Ep. of an Arahant Sn 860; cp. Miln 49, 50. See also kappika. -ānuloma (nt.) accordance with the rule Nett 192. -kāraka "one who makes it befitting," i. e. who by offering anything to a Bhikkhu, makes it legally acceptable Vin I.206; -kuṭī (f.) a building outside the Vihāra, wherein allowable articles were stored, a kind of warehouse Vin I.139; II.159; -dāraka a boy given to the Bhikkhus to work for them in the Vihāra DA I.78 (v. l. BB °kāraka); -bhaṇḍa utensils allowable to the Bhikkhus J I.41; DhA I.412. a° thing unauthorised Vin. II.169; a list of such forbidden articles is found at Vin I.192; -bhūmi (f.) a plot of ground set apart for storing (allowable) provisions Vin I.239 (cp. °kuṭi); -lesa [cp. Sk. kalpya] guile appropriate to one's own purpose VvA 348; -saññin (a) imagining as lawful (that which is not) A I.84; a° opp. ibid. °tā the imagining as lawful (that which is not) appl. to kukkucca Dhs 1160; a° opp. ibid. Kappu {Kappu} (nt.)=kappa in the dialect used by Makkhali Gosāla, presumably the dialect of Vesāli, D I.54; DA I.164 (a Burmeṣe MS. reads kappi, and so do Pv IV.332; PvA 254). Pāli Text Society 452 Pāli-English Dictionary Kappūra {Kappura} (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. karpūra] camphor: (a) the plant J VI.537. - (b) the resinous exudation, the prepared odoriferant substance (cp. kaṭukapphala) J II.416=DhA III.475; Miln 382; Dāvs V.50. Kappeti {Kappeti} [Der. from kappa, cp. Sk. kṛpa shape, form; *qÛrep caus. from. fr. *qÛer=Sk. kr, karoti to shape, to make, cp. karoti] to cause to fit, to create, build, construct, arrange, prepare, order. I. lit. 1. in special sense: to prepare, get done, i. e. harness: J I.62; plait DA I.274, an offering (yaññaṃ) Sn 1043; i. e. to trim etc. M II.155; J I.223; Mhvs 25, 64. 2, generally (to be translated according to the meaning of accompanying noun), to make, get up, carry on etc. (=Fr. passer), viz. iriyāpathaṃ to keep one's composure Th I.570; J V.262; Bdhd 33; jīvitaṃ: to lead one's life PvA 3, 4, 13; divāvihāraṃ to take the noonday rest Mhvs 19, 79; nisajjaṃ to sit down Vin III.191; vāsaṃ, saṃvāsaṃ to make one's abode D II.88; Sn 283; PvA 36, 47; saṃvāsaṃ to have (sexual) intercourse with J III.448; Mhvs 5, 212; PvA 6; seyyaṃ: to lie down, to make one's bed Pug 55 etc. (acelaka-passage=D I.166). II. fig. 1. in special sense: to construct or form an opinion, to conjecture, to think Sn 799; DA I.103; - 2. generally: to ordain, prescribe, determine J V.238 (=say vidahati) - Caus. II. kappāpeti to cause to be made in all senses of kappeti; e. g. Vin II.134 (massuṃ k. to get one's beard done); J V.262 (hatthiyānāni k. to harness the elephant-cars); DA I.147 (paðca hatthinikā-satāni k. harness the 500 elephants). Pass. kappiyati in ppr. kappiyamāna getting harnessed J I.62. Kabara {Kabara} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kabara] variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism 190. Of a cow (°gāvī) DhA I.71 (°go-rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (°vaccha) J V.106; of a dog (°vaṇṇa=sabala q. v.) J VI.107; of leprosy J V.69; of the shade of trees (°cchāya, opp. sanda°) M I.75; J IV.152; DhA I.375. -kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster J I.273; -kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy J V.69; -maṇi the cat's eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla, but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat's eye VvA 167, 304. Kabala {Kabala} (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ālopa), 298, 470] a small piece (=ālopa PvA 70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin II.214; It 18=J III.409; IV.93; Dh 324; Miln 180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA II.65; PvA 39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J I.68; Miln 231; sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin II.214; IV. 195; - Sometimes written kabala. -āvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling at a morsel Vin II.214; IV.196. Kabalinkāra (adj.) [kabala in compn form kabalī° before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī°] always in combn with āhāra, food "made into a ball," i. e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k° āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā . . . at M I.48= S II.11, 98=D III.228, 276; Bdhd 135) Dhs 585, 646 (where fully described), 816; Miln 245; Vism 236, 341, 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DA I.120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh. MSS.; s. also Nett 114-118. -āhāra-bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food D I.34, 186, 195; -bhakkha, same A III.192=V.336 (appl. to the kāmāvacara devas); DA I.120. {Kabalinkara} Kabaḷikā {Kabalika} (f.) [cp. Sk. kavalikā] a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin I.205 (cp. Vin. Texts II.58 n4). Pāli Text Society 453 Pāli-English Dictionary Kabba {Kabba} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kāvya] a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in °ṃ karoti to compose a song J VI.410; -karaṇa making poems DA I.95; and -kāra a poet Kh 21; J VI.410. Kabya {Kabya} =kabba in cpds. °ālankāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in °ṃ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and -kāraka a poet, ibid. Kama {Kama} [fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama (-°) step, in uru°, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505] - 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth'āvihatakkama "having a course on all sides unobstructed" Sdhp 425; vaḍḍhana° process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma° (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism 476 with uppattik°, pahāna°, patipattik°, bhūmik°, desanāk°, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism 570 (viz. uppattik°, pahānak°, desanāk°) - 2. oblique cases (late and technical) "by way of going," i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism 476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs I.30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaṃ Bdhd 96. - 3. (adj.) (-°) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (=catuppāda) Pv I.113. Kamaṇa {Kamana} a step, stepping, gait J V.155, in expln J V.156 taken to be ppr. med. - See san°. Kamaṇḍalu {Kamandalu} (m., nt.) [etym. uncertain] the waterpot with long spout used by nonBuddhist ascetics S I.167; J II.73 (=kuṇḍikā); IV.362, 370; VI.86, 525, 570; Sn p. 80; DhA III.448adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā°?] "with the waterpot" A V.263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.). Kamati {Kamati} [kram, Dhtp. expld by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna S I.33; Sn 176; Intens. cankamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1. c. loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn 176; ariye pathe S I.33; ākāse D I.212=M I.69=A III.17; - 2. c. acc. to go or get to, to enter M II.18; J VI.107; Pv I.12 (saggaṃ) - (II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M I.186; J V.198; Miln 198; - 2. to plunge into, to enter into A II.144; - 3. impers. to come to (c. dat) S IV.283. Kamatthaṃ {Kamattham} (adv.) [kaṃ atthaṃ] for what purpose, why? J III.398 (=kimatthaṃ). Kamanīya {Kamaniya} (adj.) [grd of kāmayati] (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely J V.155, 156; Miln 11; (b) pleasant, sweet (-sounding) D II.171; J I.96. - As nt. a desirable object S I.22. Kamala {Kamala} (nt.) a lotus, freq. combd with kuvalaya; or with uppala J I.146; DA I.40, expld as vārikiðjakkha PvA 77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium J I.146; DA I.40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp 325; VvA 43, 181, 191; PvA 23, 77; - At J I.119, 149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at J I.178 however kamb° should be retained.- 2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. I.190 (s. Vin. Texts II.23 n.) - 3. f. kamalā a graceful woman J V.160; komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus-like (soft) hands Mhbv 29; -dala a lotus leaf Vism 465; Mhbv 3; Bdhd 19; DhsA 127; VvA 35, 38. - -pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin I.190. Kamalin {Kamalin} (adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinīkāmuka "the lover of lotuses," Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. °sāmika perhaps to be preferred). Pāli Text Society 454 Pāli-English Dictionary Kampa {Kampa} (-°) [fr. kamp] trembling, shaking; tremor DA I.130 (paṭhavi°); Sdhp 401; a° (adj.) not trembling, unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp 594; Mhvs 15, 175. Kampaka {Kampaka} (adj.) [fr. kampa] shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Miln 343 (paṭhavi°). Kampati {Kampati} [kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kampanto, kampaṃ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus. kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs XVII.51; ger. kampayitvāna D II.108; J V.178] - to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; J I.23; Sn 268 (expl. KhA 153: calati, vedhati); Bdhd 84;Cp. anu°, pa°, vi°, sam°.-kampamāna (adj.) trembling J III.161; agitated, troubled (°citta) J II.337; a° not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast J VI. 293. Kampana {Kampana} [fr. kamp] 1. adj. causing to shake DhA I.84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake J I.26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) J III.163. -rasa (adj.) "whose essence is to tremble," said of doubt (vicikicchā) DhsA 259. Kampin {Kampin} (adj.) [fr. kampa] see vi°. Kampiya {Kampiya} (adj.) [grd. of kampati] in a° not to be shaken, immovable, strong Th 2, 195; Miln 386; (nt.) firmness, said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DA I.64. Kampurī {Kampuri} (va.) at Th 2, 262 is to be corr. into kambu-r-iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76). Kambala {Kambala} (m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kambala] 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From J IV.353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enumd as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras, together w. koseyya & kappāsika at Vin I.58=96, also at A IV.394 (s. °sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e. g. DA I.40. Cp. also ambara2 and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Sn 689; Bdhd 1. - Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin I.281; II.174; see further J I.43, 178, 322; IV.138; Miln 17, 88, 105; DhA I.226; II.89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair- (blankets, i. e.) garments viz. kesa° and vāla° mentioned Vin I.305=D I.167=A I.240, 295. - 3. woollen thread Vin I.190 (expld by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts II.23); J VI.340; - 4. a tribe of Nāgas J VI.165. kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74; kūṭāgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth, used as funeral pile DhA I.69; pādukā woollen slippers Vin I.190; -puñja a heap of blankets J I.149; -maddana dyeing the rug Vin I.254 (cp. Vin. Texts II.154); -ratana a precious rug of wool J IV.138; Miln 17 (16 ft. long & 18 ft. wide); -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i. e. red J V.359 (°maṃsa); -silāsana (paṇḍu°) a stone-seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka DhA I.17; sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff D II.188=A IV.394; Miln 105; -sutta a woollen thread J VI.340. Kambalin {Kambalin} (adj.) [fr. kambala] having a woollen garment D I.55; II.150. Kambalīya {Kambaliya} (nt.) [fr. kambala] (a sort of) woollen garment Pv II.117 (cp. PvA 77). Kambu {Kambu} [cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha=śankha; Dhtp. saṃvaraṇe] 1. a conch, a shell: saṇhakambu-r-iva . . . sobhate su gīvā Th 2, 262 (for kampurī'va); s. cpds. - 2. a ring or bracelet Pāli Text Society 455 Pāli-English Dictionary (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) J IV.18, 466 (+kāyūra); Pv II.127, III.93 (=PvA 157, sankhavalaya) Vv 362 (=VvA 167 hatth'ālankāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujālankāra ibid.); - 3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at VvA 167, so also expl. at J IV.18, 130; J V.400. -gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i. e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky J IV.130 (=suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1; -tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck J V.155 (°ābhāsā gīvā, expld on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatalasannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness J V.204, 207; pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet VvA 167. Kambussa {Kambussa} [fr. preceding] gold or golden ornament (bracelet) J V.260, 261 (: kambussaṃ vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ). Kambojaka {Kambojaka} (adj.) coming fr. Kamboja J IV.464 (assatara). Kambojā {Kamboja} (f.) N of a country J V.446 (°ka raṭṭha); Pv II.91 (etc.); Vism 332, 334, 336. Kamboji {Kamboji} (m., nt.) [meaning & etym. unexpld] the plant Cassia tora or alata J III.223 (°gumba=elagalāgumba; vv. ll. kammoja° & tampo° [for kambo°]). Kamma {Kamma} (nt.) [Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending °man=Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman=Gr. dh=ma, Sk. nāman=Lat nomen] the doing, deed, work; orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit. kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā° "the intertwining of garlands and creepers"; also in kamma-kara possibly orig. employed in weaving, i. e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave=Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken, orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the -a decl., the cons. forms for instr. & abl. kammā and kammanā gen. dat. kammuno, are rare. The nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni. I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense, i. e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin IV.6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā.Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism 94 expld by navakamma (see below 2a).-kassa° ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism 284; kumbhakāra° profession of a potter J VI.372; tunna° weaving Vism 122; PvA 161. purohita° office of a high-priest (=abstr. n. porohiccaṃ) SnA 466; vāṇija° trade Sāsv. 40.-kammanā by profession Sn 650, 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Sn 263=Kh V.6 (anavajjāni k.=anākulā kammantā Sn 262). paresaṃ k°ṃ katvā doing other people's work=being a servant VvA 299; sa° pasutā bent upon their own occupations D I.135, cp. attano k°- kubbānaṃ Dh 217. kammakaraṇa-sālā work-room (here: weaving shed) PvA 120. 2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always -°) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action, like cīvara° mending the cloak VvA 250; uposatha° observing the Sabbath Vbh 422; nava° making new, renovating, repairing, patching Vin II.119, 159 (°karoti to make repairs); J I.92: Vism 94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin II.15; S I.179; patthita° the desired action (i. e. sexual intercourse) DhA II.49; kammaṃ karoti to be active or in working, to act: nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet M I.414; kata° the job done by the thieves DhA II.38 (corehi), as adj. kata° cora (& akata °cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism 180, also in special sense: occasion for action or Pāli Text Society 456 Pāli-English Dictionary work, i. e. necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaṃ n'atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism 428. (b) (passive) the act of being done (-°), anything done (in its result), work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsld. by E. ending -ing): apaccakkha° not being aware, deception Vbh 85; daḷhī° strengthening, increase Vbh 357, Vism 122; citta° variegated work, mālā° garlands, latā° creeper (-work) Vism 108; nāma° naming Bdhd 83; paðhā° questioning, "questionnaire" Vism 6. - So in definitions niṭṭhuriya°=niṭṭhuriya Vbh 357; nimitta°= nimitta, obhāsa°=obhāsa (apparition > appearing) Vbh 353. - (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process (-°). Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending -ion or -ment, e. g. okāsa° opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Sn p. 94; pātu° making clear, manifestation DhA IV.198 anāvi°, anuttāni° concealment Vbh 358; kata° (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience SnA 355; aðjali°, sāmīci° veneration, honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) D III.83 (≈Vin II.162, 255); A I.123; II.180; J. I.218, 219. 3. (Specialised) an "act" in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin I.49, 53, 144, 318; II.70, 93; V.220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin I.56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin II.89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha° Vin I.56 (cp. Vin. Texts I.169 n2). There are 6 kinds of official acts the Sangha can perform: see Vin I.317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin I.312-333 (cp. Vin T. II.256-285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya° uposatha° tajjaniya° tassapāpiyyasikā° nissaya°, patiððākaraṇīya°, paṭipucchākaraṇīya° paṭisāraṇiya° pabbājaniya°, sammukhākaraṇīya°. - In this sense: kammaṃ karoti (w. gen.) to take proceedings against Vin I.49, 143, 317; II.83, 260; kammaṃ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin II.5; kammaṃ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin III.145. 4. In cpds.:- ādhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work, inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98; -ādhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Miln 288; -ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; āraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an "act" Vin IV.153; V.221; -ārāma (a) delighting in activity D II.77; A IV.22; It 71, 79; -ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D II.78=A IV.22, cp. Vbh 381; A III.116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; IV.22 sq., 331; V.163; It 71; āvadāna a tale of heroic deeds J VI.295; -kara or °kāra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dāso+pubbuṭṭhāyī "willing to work" D I.60 et sim. (=DA I.168: analaso). A I.145; II.67; Vv 754; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin I.243; D I.141=Pug 56 (also °kārā); A II.208; III.77, 172; Th 2, 340; J I.57. Also as dāsā pessā k°kārā A III.37=IV.265, 393, and dāsā k° kārā Vin I.240, 272; II.154; D III.191; S I.92;-a handyman J I.239; Miln 378; (f) -ī a female servant Vin II.267; °kāra Vin IV.224, kārī Dhs A98=VvA 73 (appl. to a wife); -karaṇa 1. working, labour, service J III.219; PvA 120; DA I.168; 2. the effects of karma J I.146; -karanā and kāraṇā see below; -kāma liking work, industrious; a° lazy A IV.93=J II.348; -kāraka a workman, a servant DA I.8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd2 427; a sailor J IV.139; -garu bent on work Miln 288; -ccheda the interruption of work J I.149; 246; III.270; -jāta sort of action J V.24 (=kammam eva); -dhura (m. nt.) draught-work J I.196; dheyya work to be performed, duty A IV.285=325; cp. J VI.297; -dhoreyya "fit to bear the burden of action" Miln 288 (cp. Mil. trsl. II.140); -niketavā having action as one's house or temple ibid.; -nipphādana accomplishing the business J VI.162; -ppatta entitled to take part in an eccles. act Vin I.318; V.221; -bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Miln 7; -mūla the price of the transaction Miln 334; -rata delighting in business D II.78; It 71; -vatthu objects, items of an act Vin V.116; -vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin I.317 sq.; III.174, 176; IV.153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k° is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, Pāli Text Society 457 Pāli-English Dictionary 1907; k°ṃ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207; DhsA 399; -°ṃ anussāveti to proclaim a k°, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin I.317; -vossagga difference of occupation J VI.216; -sajja (a) "ready for action," i. e. for battle J V.232; -sādutā "agreeableness to work" DhsA 151 (cp. kammaððatā & kamyatā); -sāmin "a master in action," an active man Miln 288; sippī an artisan VvA 278; -sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Miln 288; a° indolent, lazy J VI.245; a°-ttaṃ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21; -hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Miln 288. II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i. e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i. e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i. e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a "deed," viz. 1. the deed as expressing the doer's will, i. e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer's habit=his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer's merit and demerit (his "karma"). Thus pāpakamma=a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed=bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer. Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time: as past=done, meaning deed (with kata); or future=to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual "karma," appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i. e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal "karma," appearing in Saṃsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause-consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time. 1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiṃ kammaṃ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv I.92; tassā katakammaṃ pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA 37, 83, etc. - with ref. to the Future: k. kātabbaṃ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni D III.255=A IV.332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti "he performs the 4 obligations" (of gahapati) A II.67. 2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva D I.12 (santikamma, paṇidhi°, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed D III.156; dukkaraṃ kammakubbataṃ he who of those who act, acts badly S I.19; abhabbo taṃ kammaṃ kātum incapable of doing that deed S III.225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally M III.207; A V.292 sq.; pamāṇakataṃ k. D I.251=S IV.322. kataraṃ k°ṃ karonto ahaṃ nirayaṃ na gaccheyyaṃ? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J IV.340; yaṃ kiñci sithilaṃ k°ṃ . . . na taṃ hoti mahapphalaṃ . . . S I.49=Dh 312=Th 1, 277; kadariya° a stingy action PvA 25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā-caraṇa D III.156; kāni k°āni sammā-niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Sn Pāli Text Society 458 Pāli-English Dictionary 324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person's habit of acting or character (cp. kata II.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata "endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character": tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto "endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N." A I.292 sq.; asucinā kāyak°ena sam° asucimanussā "bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)" Nd2 112; anavajja kāya-k° sam° A II.69 (cp. A IV.364); kāya-kammavacī-kammena sam° kusalena (pabbajita) "a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech" D I.63; kāya . . . (etc.) -k°sam° bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) A II.252 (cp. A I.102, 104); visamena kāya (etc.) -k° sam° A I.154=III.129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.) -k° sam° A II.135 - kammaṃ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaṃ jīvitam uttamaṃ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā S I.34=55; M III.262, quoted at Vism 3, where k. is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp. to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Sn 136; 164; 599; nihīna° manussā (of bad, wretched character) Sn 661; manāpena bahulaṃ kāya (etc.) -kammena A II.87=III.33, 131; and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā D II.80; A III.288; mettena kāya- (etc.)-kammena D II.144; III.191; A V.350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k°-dvārā), expressions of personality, as by deed, word and thought (kāyena, vācāya, manasā). Kamma kat) e)coxh/n means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Sn 330, 365; later specified by kāyakamma, for which kāya-kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vacī-k° mano-k°; so in foll. combns: citte arakkhite kāya-k° pi arakkhitaṃ hoti (vacī° mano°) A I.261 sq.; yaṃ nu kho ahaṃ idaṃ kāyena k° kattukāmo idaṃ me kāya-k° attabyādhāya pi saṃvatteyya . . . "whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?" M I.415; kāya-(vacī- etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaṃ and a°) A I.110=III.150; as anulomika° A I.106; sabbaṃ kāya-k° (vacī° mano°) Buddhassa ðāṇānuparivattati "all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha" Nd2 235; yaṃ lobhapakataṃ kammaṃ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaṃ anubhoti . . . Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v° m° dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv II.13 and freq.; ekūna-tiṃsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa-kammāni, pāpāni k°, pāpakāni k°; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa-kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n'atthi loke raho nāma p° pakubbato "there is no hiding (-place) in this world for him who does evil" A I.149; so p°-o dummedho jānaṃ dukkaṭaṃ attano . . . "he, afflicted with (the result of) evil-doing . . ." A III.354; p°-ṃ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaṃ p°-ṃ kataṃ sabban taṃ idha vedanīyaṃ "whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for" A V.301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p°-ṃ vivajjayī "avoid evil acting" Sn 407; nissaṃsayaṃ p°-ṃ . . . "undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv IV.161.-pāpaṃ kammaṃ: appamattikam pi p° k° kataṃ taṃ enaṃ nirayaṃ upaneti "even a small sin brings man to N." A I.249, tayā v'etaṃ p° k° kataṃ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedissasi "you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences" M III.180= A I.139, na hi p° kataṃ k° sajju khīraṃ va muccati Dh 71=Nett 161; yassa p° kataṃ k° kusalena pithīyati so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti "he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one" M II.104= Dh 173=Th 1, 872; p°-ssa k°-ssa samatikkamo "the overcoming of evil karma" S IV.320; p°ssa k°ssa kiriyāya "in the performance of evil" M I.372; p°āni k°āni karaṃ bālo na bujjhati "he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds" Dh 136=Th 1, 146; pāpā p°ehi k°ehi nirayaṃ upapajjare "sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N." Dh 307; te ca p°esu k°esu abhiṇham upadissare Sn 140. -pāpakāni kammāni: p°ānaṃ k°ānaṃ hetu coraṃ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti "for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished" A I.48; ye loke p°āni k° karonti te vividhā kamma-kāraṇā karīyanti "those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with Pāli Text Society 459 Pāli-English Dictionary various punishments" M III.186=A I.142; k°ṃ karoti p°ṃ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Sn 232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn 127; karontā p°ṃ k°ṃ yaṃ hoti kaṭukapphalaṃ, "doing evil which is of bitter fruit" Dh 66= S I.57=Nett 131; k°ehi p°ehi Sn 215. - In the same sense: na taṃ k°ṃ kataṃ sādhu yaṃ katvā anutappati "not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse" S I.57=Dh 67=Nett 132; āveni-kammāni karonti (with ref. to sangha-bheda) A V.74; adhammikakammāni A I.74; asuci-k°āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) A III.269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja > sagga) A II.237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enumd at Vbh 378. - (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) taṃ k°ṃ katvā kusalaṃ sukhudrayaṃ D III.157; puñña-kammo of meritorious (character) S I.143; kusalehi k°ehi vippayuttā carati viððāṇacariyā Ps I.80; kusalassa k°ssa katattā Vbh 173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala-k°-paccayāni Bdhd 12; puððakamma, merit, compd with kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA 32 (cp. puññānubhāva-nissandena "in consequence of their being affected with merit" PvA 58) - Cp. also cpds.: kamma-kilesa, k°-ṭṭhāna, k°-patha; k°lakkhaṇa k°-samādāna. 3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either°-or independt; phala: tassa mayhaṃ atīte katassa kammassa phalaṃ "the fruit of a deed done by me in former times" ThA 270; Vv 479 (=VvA 202); desanā . . . k-phalaṃ paccakkhakāriṇī "an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action" PvA 1; similarly PvA 2; cp. also ibid. 26, 49, 52, 82 (v. l. for kammabala). vipāka: yassa k°ssa vipākena . . . niraye pacceyyāsi . . . "through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i. e. tortured) in N." M II.104; tassa k°ssa vipākena saggaṃ lokaṃ uppajji "by the result of that deed he went to Heaven" S I.92; II.255; k-vipāka-kovida "well aware of the fruit of action," i. e. of retribution Sn 653; kissa kvipākena "through the result of what (action)" Pv I.65; inunā asubhena k-vipākena Nett 160; k-vipāka with ref. to avyākata-dhammā: Vbh 182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106; k-vipāka-ja produced by the maturing of (some evil) action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: A V.110=Nd2 3041; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps II.174; -vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaṃ kammānaṃ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds A IV.393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkhavepakka resulting in pain Sn 537. - -phala+vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko: D I.55=III.264=M I.401=S IV.348=A I.268=IV.226= V.265, 286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda-phalabhūto vipāko ThA 270; tiṇṇaṃ k°ānaṃ phalaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ k-ānaṃ vipāko D II.186 - (b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathāyaṃ puriso kammaṃ karoti tathā tathā taṃ paṭisaṃvedissati "in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)" A I.249; na vijjati so jagati-ppadeso yathā ṭhito muðceyya pāpa-kammā "there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil-doing" Dh 127=Miln 150=PvA 104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little A IV.382; the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k-dāyādā k-yonī k-bandhū . . . yaṃ k°ṃ karonti kalyānaṃ vā pāpakaṃ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti M III.203=A III.72 sq.=186=V.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or °kāraṇa), "being done back with the deed," or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kammakaraṇaṃ kāreti or kārāpeti "he causes the reaction of the deed to take place" and pass, kamma-karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i. e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaṃ, the usual punishments (beating with whips, etc.) are enumerated passim, e. g. M III.164, 181; and Nd2 604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. "pain, punishment, " fr. kṝ to Pāli Text Society 460 Pāli-English Dictionary tear or injure, "the pains of karma, or torture"; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative-abstr. fr. karoti presents no difficulty.] - ye kira bho pāpakāni k°-āni karonti te diṭṭh'eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k-kāraṇā karīyanti, kim anga pana parattha! "Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!" M III.181; M III.186=A I.142; sim. k°-kāraṇāni kārenti (v. l. better than text-reading) S IV.344; Sdhp 7; Nd2 on dukkha. As kkaraṇaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu J II.398; kamma-kāraṇa-ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism 500. See also examples under 2d and M I.87; A I.47; J V.429; Miln 197. B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence. - (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa° and pubbe kataṃ k°): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu A I.223 (kāmadhātu-vepakkañ ce kammaṃ nābhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paððāyethā ti? No h'etaṃ . . . iti kho kammaṃ khettaṃ . . .); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence A III.410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā "by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on" Sn 654; kamma-paccayā through karma PvA 25 (=Kh 207); k°ṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa "k. and passions are the cause of saṃsāra (renewed existence)" Nett 113; see on k. as principle: Ps II.78; 79 (ch. VII., kamma-kathā) M I.372 sq.; Nett. 161; 180-182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold M III.215; and as cause in general Vism 600 (where enumd as one of the 4 paccaya's or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu, āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vbh 366; Miln 40 sq. as a factor in the five-fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k°-niyama DA. on D 11, 12; DhsA. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma) Bdhd 68, 72, 75; °-vātā, birth-pains i. e. the winds resulting from karma (caliṃsu) DhA I.165; DhA II.262; k°-nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k°-sambhava Bdhd 66; k°-samuṭṭhāna Vism 600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below. - (b) karma as result or consequence. There are 3 kamma-nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaṃ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described A I.134=263=III.338=Nd2 517; so also A V.86; 262; Vbh 208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha-kkhayā kamma-nidāna-saṃkhayo A V.262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda A I.264Q and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma-bhava, consequential existence) are puðða, apuðða, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vbh 137=Nd2 471. - (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like "as the cause, so the result." Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dh 127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv II.717: sace taṃ pāpakaṃ kammaṃ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt' atthi) - na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ "nobody's (trace, result of) action is ever lost" Sn 666; puññāpuññakammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti "through the consequence of both merit and demerit" PvA 47; cp. VvA 14; yatth'assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taṃ k°ṃ vipaccati "wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action" A I.134; correspondence between "light" and "dark" deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha-kamma>kaṇha vipāka, sukka°, kaṇhasukka, akaṇha-asukka: D III.230=M I.389=A II.230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaṃ upapajjati Nd2 304III; k°-ānubhāva -ukkhitta "thrown, set into motion, by the power of k." PvA 78; sucarita-k-ānubhavāvanibbattāni vimānāni "created by the power of their result of good conduct" VvA 127; k-ānubhāvena by the working of k. PvA 77; k°-vega-ukkhittā (same) PvA 284; yathā kamm-ûpaga "undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaṃ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma J I.153 & freq.; see cpds.; ksarikkhatā "the karma-likeness," the correspondence of cause and consequence: taṃ k-s°ṃ vibhāventaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ ahosi "this, manifesting the karma-correspondence, was golden" VvA 6; so also k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of Pāli Text Society 461 Pāli-English Dictionary kamma-phalaṃ, the result of action: tassa kamma-sarikkhakaṃ kammaphalaṃ hoti "for her the fruit of action became like action," i. e. the consequence was according to her deed. PvA 206; 284; 258; as nt.: k-s°ṃ pan'assa udapādi "the retribution for him has come" DhA I.128; J III.203; cp. also Miln 40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. - (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava°) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (°kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava>purāṇa-kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe D I.54=S III.212; as pañca-kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo . . . purāṇaṃ k°ṃ abhisankhataṃ ("our body is an accumulation of former karma") S II.65=Nd2 680 D; see also A II.197; Pv IV.71; PvA 1, 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k°ssa parikkhīṇattā . . . santo yathā kammaṃ gacchati) PvA 63. - k°-nirodha or °kkhaya: so . . . na tāva kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ vyanti hoti "He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted" A I.141≈; nava-purāṇāni k°āni desissāmi k°-nirodhaṃ k°-nirodha-gāminið ca paṭipadaṃ "the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you, the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k." S IV.132~A III.410; . . . navānaṃ k°ānaṃ akaraṇā setughātaṃ; iti k-kkhayā dukkhakkhayo . . . (end of misery through the end of karma) A I.220=M II.214; same Ps I.55-57; cp. also A I.263; Nd2 411 (expl. as kamma-parāyaṇa vipāka-p°: "gone beyond karma and its results," i. e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k°-ābhisankhīsa, °āvaraṇa, °kkhaya, °nibandhana. -ādhikata ruled by karma, Miln 67, 68; °ena by the influence of k. ibid. ādhiggahita gripped by karma Miln 188, 189; -ānurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one's karma J III.160; DA I.37; -ābhisankhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd2 116, 283, 506. -ābhisanda in °ena in consequence of k. Miln 276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; -āraha see I.; -āyatana 1. work Vbh 324, cp. Miln 78; 2. action=kamma J III.542; cp. J IV.451, 452. -āyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism 530; DhsA 267, 268; cp. k°ṃ āyūhi Miln 214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58. -āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. A III.436= Pug 13=Vbh 341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles°, vipāk° . .), Kvu 341; Miln 154, 155; Vism 177 (=ānantariya-kamma); -ūpaga in yatha kamm-ûpage satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate . . . pajānāti (or passati) Vin III.5=D I.82=S II.122 (214)= V.266=A IV.178=V.13 (35, 200, 340)=Vbh 344; abbreviated in M III.178; Nett. 178; see also similar Sn 587; Bdhd 111; -upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156; -kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps II.98; -kāma (adj.) desirous of good karma Th 2, 275; PvA 174; a° opp.= inactive, indolent A IV.92, PvA 174; -kiriyā-dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. J I.45; kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dh 15 (=DhA I.129, expl. kiliṭṭha-k°); -kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enumd at D III.181=J III.321, as the non-performance of sīla 1-4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa-kāya-k°; -kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k.; its destruction: sabba-k°-kkhayaṃ patto vimutto upadhi-sankhaye S I.134; as brought about by neutral, indifferent kamma: D III.230=A II.230 sq.; M I.93, DhsA 89; -ja (3 B) produced by k. J I.52; as one mode of the origin of disease Miln 135; Nd2 3041; appld. to all existence Miln 271; Vism 624 (kammajaṃ āyatanadvāra-vasena pākaṭaṃ hoti); appld to rūpa Vism 451, 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (°vātā) J I.52, DhA I.165; a° not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Miln 268, 271; -ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession, said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader, householder and mendicant M II.197; A V.83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna II.2. c.), kamma-subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises ("stations of exercise" Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship DhA I.8 (yāva arahattaṃ kamma-ṭṭhānaṃ kathesi), 96; PvA 98 (catu-saccakamma-ṭṭhāna-bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass'eva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi: J III.36; Sāsv 49; see also J I.7, Pāli Text Society 462 Pāli-English Dictionary 97, 182, 303, 414; Sdhp 493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at DhsA 168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiṃs'ākāra-k°) at Vism 240 sq., as 40 at Vism 110 sq. (in detail); as pañcasandhika at Vism 277; some of them are mentioned at J I.116; DhA I.221, 336; IV.90; -°ṃ anuyuðjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; PvA 61; -°ṃ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism 277 sq. (also °assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); KhA 40; DhA I.9, 262; IV.106; PvA 42; -°ṃ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k° DhA I.8, 248, 336; PvA 61; -°ṃ adāsi DhA IV.106; °gaṇhāti J III.246; Vism 89; °ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise DhsA 246; °dāyaka the giver of a k-ṭṭh° object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q. v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism 89; Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism 241; -ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism 97, 187, 189; DhA I.335; -tappana the being depressed on acct. of one's (bad) karma DhA I.150. - dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. °ssaka) the inheritor of k., i. e. inheriting the consequences of one's own deeds M I.390; Miln 65=DhsA 66; -dvāra "the door of action," i. e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) J IV.14; KvuA 135; DhsA 82; Bdhd 8; -dhāraya name of a class of noun-compounds Kacc 166; -nānatta manifoldness of k. DhsA 64 (also nānākaraṇa ib.); -nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass'āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Sn 654; -nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Miln 268; DhsA 361; -nimitta the sign, token of k. DhsA 411; -nirodha the destruction of k. [see 3 B (d)]; -paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism 538; KvuA 101; °paccayena by means of k. J VI.105, Vism 538; (adj.) J V.271, DhsA 304; -paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector J VI.102; Miln 65; cp. DhsA 66; -paṭibāḷha strong by k. Miln 301; -pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (=sīla q. v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya°, 4 vācī°, 3 mano°, altogether 10; so at Vin V.138, S II.168, A V.57, 268; as kus° and akus° at D III.71, 269, 290; as 7 only at S II.167; as akus° only at A V.54, 266; Vbh 391; Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; °ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp 56, 57. -phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions J I.350; VvA 39, PvA 1, 26, 52; °-upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one's labour (ad I) J IV.160; - 2. living according to the result of former deeds A II.135; -bandhu having k. as one's relative, i. e. closely tied to one's karma (see °ssaka) Th 1, 496; cp. J VI.100, etc. -bala the power of k. J VI.108; PvA 82. -bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vbh 137; DhsA 37; -bhūmi 1. the place of work J III.411; 2. the ground of actions, i. e. the field of meritorious deeds Miln 229; -mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Miln 333, 334, 341; -mūlaka produced by k. Miln 134; -yoni having k. for matrix, i. e. as the cause of rebirth Miln 65; DhsA 66. -lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic A I.102; AA 370; -vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Anguttara (Nos. 232-238) A II.230 sq.; -vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. DhsA 85; vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. S II.33 sq.; A I.287 (+kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); -vādin believing in k. D I.115; Vin I.71; J VI.60; -vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one's actions (see above) Vbh 106, 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Miln 189. -°ja produced as a result of k.: D II.20; Mhbv 78; Ps II.174, 213; Miln 135; Vism 382 (appld to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A V.110; Miln 134, 135; AA 433, 556. -visuddhi meritorious karma Dh 16 (=Dh I.132); -visesa variety or difference of k. DhsA 313; -vega the impetus of k. PvA 284; -sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world A II.232. -samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one's character, or the incurring of karma, either as micchādiṭṭhi° (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm-ûpaga passage (q. v.): D III.96; M I.70; III.178, 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Nett 98; of Buddha's knowledge as regards the quality of a man's character: S V.304; A III.417 sq.; Ps II.174; Vbh 338; -samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with °ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists A II.232; -samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising Pāli Text Society 463 Pāli-English Dictionary from k. Miln 127; DhsA 82; Kvn 100; -sambhava produced by k. Miln 127; -sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done DhA III.334 (°vipāka). sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; -sahāya "companion to the deed," said of thought DhsA 323; -socana sorrowing for one's (bad) deeds DhA I.128. -(s)saka [3 A (b), q. v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. M III.203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma-dāyāda, kamma-bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism 301); J IV.128; Miln 65; DA I.37=who goes according to his own karma (attano k°ānurūpaṃ gatiṃ gacchanti, n'eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena . . .); der. °tā the fact that every being has his very own karma A III.186; Dhs 1366; Vbh 324; °ta as adj.; qualifying ðāṇa, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs 1366, Vbh 328. Kammaka {Kammaka} (adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, dependt on karma Miln 137 (a°). (adj.) "workable," fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta "with active mind" in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k° ṭhita ānejjappatta D I.76, etc.=M I.22= Pug 68; S III.232; V.92, 233; A I.9; DhA I.289; Bdhd 101, expld at Vism 377 (°iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaððað ca pabhassarað ca) A I.257 (reads °iyað)=Vism 247; of upekhā and sati Nd2 661, cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready for playing A III.375=Vin I.182. Of the body A IV.335. - a° not ready, sluggish A IV.333; Vism 146. kammañña-bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs 46, of vedanā, etc., Dhs 326, of citta DhsA 130, see next; a° unworkable condition DhsA 130. Kammaññatā {Kammannata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adaptability, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A I.9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaṃ k°bhāvo k°mudutā: Dhs 46, 47=326=641=730; cp. Dhs 585; similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA 136, 151 (=kammasādutā) a° unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln 300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs 1156, 1236; DhsA 255; expld as cittagelaññaṃ DhsA 377; as cetaso līnattaṃ Vbh 373. Kammanta {Kammanta} [Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta, cp. anta 14.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession. paṭicchanna° of secret acting Sn 127= Vbh 357; as being punished in Niraya A I.60; S IV.180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: S V.45=135; DhA I.42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); anākula° Sn 262=Kh V.5; abbhantarā k° uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife A III.37=IV.365; khetta° occupation in the field A III.77; see also D I.71; M III.7; S I.204; Miln 9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn p. 13, PvA 62. Phrases: °ṃ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business A I.115; PvA 141; jahati give up the occupation S IV.324; PvA 133; °ṃ payojeti to do or carry on business D I.71; II.175; III.66, 95; A III.57; °ṃ pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA 42 (and vicāreti: PvA 93); °ṃ saṃvidahati to provide with work A IV.269=272. Mhvs VI.16. - 2. deed, action in ethical sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k°=kamma); pāpa° doing wrong Pv IV.81; IV.161; J VI.104 (opp. puðða°); as specified by kāya° vacī °mano° A V.292 sq.; VvA 130 (in parisuddha-kāya-kammantatā); dhammikā k°ā M II.191; ākiṇṇa-k° (evam-) of such character S I.204; kurūra-k° (adj.) of cruel character A III.383=Pug 56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā° of right doing, opp. micchā°, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to "Magga" (: q. v.) D II.216; S II.168; V.1; A III.411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya-kamma (=sīla 1-3) at S V.9=Vbh 105; Vbh 235; as kāya-duccaritehi ārati virati . . . Vbh 106. -ādhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work DhA I.393; -ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place J I.57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J IV.306; -dāsa a farm-servant J I.468; -bheri the drum announcing the (taking Pāli Text Society 464 Pāli-English Dictionary up of) business DhA III.100; -vipatti "failure of action," evil-doing A I.270 opp. -sampadā "perfection of action, right-doing" A I.271; -saṃvidhāna the providing of work D III.191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati). Kammantika {Kammantika} (adj.) [fr. kammanta] 1. a business manager J I.227. - 2. a labourer, artisan, assistant J I.377. Kammāra {Kammara} [Vedic karmāra] a smith, a worker in metals generally D II.126, A V.263; a silversmith Sn 962= Dh 239; J I.223; a goldsmith J III.281; V.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold- and silver-smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e. g. from J III.282 and VvA 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well-to-do as appears from what is said of Cunda at D II.126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike J III.281. -uddhana a smith's furnace, a forge J VI.218; -kula a smithy M I.25; kūṭa a smith's hammer Vism 254; -gaggarī a smith's bellows S I.106; J VI.165; Vism 287 (in comparison); -putta "son of a smith," i. e. a smith by birth and trade D II.126; A V.263; as goldsmith J VI.237, Sn 48 (Nd2 ad loc.: k° vuccati suvaṇṇakāro); -bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin I.76; sālā a smithy Vism 413; Mhvs 5, 31. Kammāsa {Kammasa} [Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalanka and Gr. kelaino/s to *qel, fr. which also Sk. kāla black-blue, Gr. khla/s, khli/s; Lat. cālīgo & callidus] 1. variegated, spotted, blemished J V.69 (°vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy. - fig. inconsistent, varying A II.187. - 2. (nt.) inconsistency, blemish, blot A IV.55; Vism 51. - a° not spotted, i. e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct D II.80; A II.52; III.36, 572; VI.54, 192; Bdhd 89. -kārin in a° not acting inconsistently A II.187; cp. ibid. 243. -pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet J V.475; (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i. e. an ogre; also N. of a Yakkha J V.503, 511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.). Kammika {Kammika} (adj.-n.) [fr. kamma] 1. (-°) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character: āya° revenue-overseer, treasurer DhA I.184; sabba° (always with ref. to amacca, the king's minister) one who does everything, the king's confidant Vism 130; PvA 81. - On term ādi° beginner (e. g. Vism 241) see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2. - 2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha° and thalapatha° by sea & by land J I.121. - 3. a superintendent, overseer, manager J II.305 (executioner of an order); VI.294; Mhvs 30, 31. - 4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin II.5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106. Kammin {Kammin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. kamma, cp. kammaka] doing, performing, practising J VI.105; Sdhp 196, 292. Kamya {Kamya} (adj.) (-°) [fr. kām] wishing for, desiring DhsA 365 (sādhu°; v. l. °kāma); kamyā, abl. in the desire for, see next. Kamyā {Kamya} (-°) in abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: S I.143=J III.361 (expld by kāmatāya); Sn 854, 929. (Nd) [fr. kām] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu° VvA 18; muñcitu° (+paṭisankhā) Ps I.60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu°, adaṭṭhu° and adassana° Vbh 372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu° Vbh 208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puðcikatā sādhu° Vbh 351; 361=Dhs 1059; Nd2 s. v. taṇhāII (: has Pāli Text Society 465 Pāli-English Dictionary the better reading mucchaðci katā asādhu°; v. l. pucchaðci°; both Vbh and Dhs have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu°; see detail under puðcikatā); of māna; ketu° Nd2 505; Dhs 1116=1233; Vbh 350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu° (v. l. cāṭu°) Vbh 246= 352. - As abl. (=kamyā) in dassana° S I.193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 121 (expl. as icchāya SnA 179). Cp. kammaððatā & kamma-sādutā. Kaya {Kaya} [fr. kri] purchase, buying A III.226 (+vi°). -(a)kkaya, buying & selling Pv I.56 (see also Kh VII.6 and note). -vikkaya (kraya vikraya) buying & selling, trade in °paṭivirata D I.5=A II.209=V.205= Pug 58; D I.64; S V.473; Sn 929; J V.243; Khus 114; DhA I.78; PvA 29 (=KhA 212). Kayati {Kayati} [kri, perhaps connected with kṛ] to buy; Inf. ketuṃ J III.282; cp. kiṇāti. Kayika {Kayika} [fr. krī, cp. BSk. krayika Divy 505] a buyer, trader, dealer Miln 334. Kayin {Kayin} a buyer J VI.110. Kara {Kara} [fr. kṛ] 1. (adj.) (-°) producing, causing, forming, making, doing, e. g. anta° putting an end to; pabhaṃ causing splendour; pāpa° doing evil; divā° & divasa the day-maker, i. e. the sun; kaṇhabhāva° causing a "black" existence (of pāpakamma) J IV.9; padasandhi° forming a hiatus PvA 52; vacana°, etc. - 2. (m) "the maker," i. e. the hand Mhvs 5, 255-256; 30, 67. atikaraṃ (adv.) doing too much, going too far J I.431; -dukkara (a) difficult to do, not easy, hard, arduous S I.7; IV.260; A I.286; IV.31, 135; V.202; +durabhisambhavo Sn 429 701; Ud. 61; (n. nt.) something difficult, a difficult task A I.286 (cp. IV.31); J I.395; Miln 121, dukkara-kārikā "doing of a hard task," exertion, austerity M I.93; Nd2 262b. -sukara easy to do S I.9; II.181; Dh 163; Ud 61; na sukaraṃ w. inf. it is not easy to . . . D I.250; A III.52, 184; IV.334. -kaṭaka (m. nt.) a hand-wheel, i. e. a pulley by which to draw up a bucket of water Vin II.122; cp. Vin. Texts III.112; -ja "born of kamma" in karaja-kāya the body sprung from action, an expression always used in a contemptible manner, therefore=the impure, vile, low body A V.300; J I.5; Vism 287, 404; DA I.113, 217, 221; DhA I.10; III.420; DhsA 403. karaja-rūpa Vism 326. -tala the palm of the hand Mhbv 6, 34; -mara "one who ought to die from the hand (of the enemy)," but who, when captured, was spared and employed as slave; a slave J III.147, 361; IV.220; DhA III.487; -°ānītā a woman taken in a raid, but subsequently taken to wife; one of the 10 kinds of wives (see itthi) Vin III.140 (=dhajāhaṭā); -gāhaṃ gaṇhāti to make prisoner J I.355; III.361; -mita "to be measured with (two) hands," in °majjhā, a woman of slender waist J V.219; VI.457. Karaka1 {Karaka} [Etymology unknown. The Sanskrit is also karaka, and the medieval koṣas give as meaning, besides drinking vessel, also a coco-nut shell used as such (with which may be compared Lat. carīna, nutshell, keel of a boat; and Gr. ka/rua, nut.) It is scarcely possible that this could have been the original meaning. The coconut was not cultivated, perhaps not even known, in Kosala at the date of the rise of Pali and Buddhism] 1. Water-pot, drinking-vessel (=: pānīya-bhājana PvA 251). It is one of the seven requisites of a samaṇa Vin II.302. It is called dhammakaraka there, and at II. 118, 177. This means "regulation waterpot" as it was provided with a strainer (parissavana) to prevent injury to living things. See also Miln 68; Pv III.224; PvA 185. - 2. hail (also karakā) J IV. 167; Miln 308; Mhvs XII. 9. -vassa a shower of hail, hailstorm J IV.167; Miln 308; DhA I.360. Pāli Text Society 466 Pāli-English Dictionary Karakarā {Karakara} (for kaṭakaṭā, q. v.) (adv.) by way of gnashing or grinding the teeth (cp. Sk. dantān kaṭakaṭāpya), i. e. severely (of biting) J III.203 (passage ought to be read as karakarā nikhāditvā). Karañja {Karanja} [cp. Sk. karaðja, accord. to Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 176 the Dalbergia arborea] the tree Pongamia glabra, used medicinally Vin I.201; J VI.518, 519. Karaṇa {Karana} [fr. kṛ, cp. Vedic karaṇa] 1. adj. (f. ī) (-°) doing, making, causing, producing; as cakkhu° ðāṇa° (leading to clear knowledge) S IV.331; V.97; It 83; and acakkhu° etc. S V.97; nāthā °ā dhammā A V.23 (cp. V.89) and thera° A II.22; dubbaṇṇa° S V.217; see also D I.245; M. I.15; S V.96, 115; A IV.94; V.268; Miln 289. - 2. (nt.) (-°) the making, producing of; the doing, performance of (=kamma), as bali° offering of food =bali kamma) PvA 81; gabbha° Sn 927; pānujja° Sn 256. 3. (abs.) (a) the doing up, preparing J V.400, VI.270 (of a building: the construction) (b) the doing, performance of, as pāṇātipātassa k° and ak° ("commission and omission"); DhA I.214; means of action J III.92. (c) ttg. the instrumental case (with or without °vacana) PvA 33; VvA 25, 53, 162, 174. -°atthe in the sense of, with the meaning of the instrumental case J III.98; V.444; PvA 35; VvA 304; DhsA 48; Kacc 157. - 4. (-°) state, condition; in noun-abstract function= °ttaṃ (cp. kamma I.2) as nānā° (=nānattaṃ) difference M II.128; S IV.294; Bdhd 94; kasi° ploughing PvA 66; kattabba° (=kattabbattaṃ) "what is to be done," i. e. duty PvA 30; pūjā° veneration PvA 30. sakkāra° reverence, devotion SnA 284. Note: in massu° and kamma° some grammarians have tried to derive k° from a root kṛ, to hurt, cut, torture (see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15), which is however quite unnecessary [see kamma 3 A (b), kataII 1 (b)]. Karaṇa here stands for kamma, as clearly indicated by semantic grounds as well as by J VI.270 where it explains kappita-kesa-massu, and J V.309 & DhA I.253 where massukamma takes the place of °karaṇa, and J III.314, where it is represented by massu-kutti (C.: massukiriya). Cp. also DA I.137. a° Negative in all meanings of the positive, i. e. the nonperforming J I.131; V.222; Nett 81; PvA 59; DhsA 127; non-undertaking (of business) J I.229; noncommission M I.93; abstaining from Dhs 299. Cpd. -uttariya (nt.) angry rejoinder, vehement defence DhA I.44. Karaṇīya {Karaniya} [grd. of karoti] 1. adj. (a) that ought to be, must or should be done, to be done, to be made (=kātabbaṃ karaṇārahaṃ KhA 236) Vin I.58; D I.3, cp. Miln 183; A V.210; DA I.7. Often -° in the sense of "doing, making," as yathā kāma° S II.226; cp. IV.91, 159; "having business" bahu° D II.76; A III.116; S II.215; anukampa° PvA 61: - (b) done, in the sense of undoing, i. e. overcome, undone D II.76 cp. Dial. II.81 n. - 2. (m.) one who has still something left to perform (for the attainment of Arahantship, a sekha J III.23. - 3. (nt.) (a) what ought to be done, duty, obligation; affairs, business D I.85; II.68, 74 cp. A IV.16; M I.271; S III.168; IV.281 cp. Vin III.12; Vin I.139; A I.58; Sn 143; Sn p. 32 (yan te karanīyaṃ taṃ karohi "do what you have to do"); - °ṃ tīreti to conclude a business Vin. II.158; J V.298. Kataṃ °ṃ done is what was to be done, I have done my task, in freq. formula "khīṇā jāti vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ . . ." to mark the attainment of Arahantship D I.84; II.68=153; Th 2, 223; Vin I.14; Sn p. 16; DA I.226, etc. See Arahant II.C. - There are 3 duties each of a samaṇa, farmer and householder enumerated at A I.229; 3 of a bhikkhu A I.230; - (b) use, need (with instr.): appamādena k° S IV.125; cetanāya k° A V.2, 312; cp. Miln 5, 78. akaraṇīya 1. (adj.) (a) what ought not to be done, prohibited A I.58; III.208=DA I.235. - (b) incapable of being done (c. gen.) It 18. - (c) improper, not befitting (c. gen.) Vin I.45=216=III.20; PvA 64. - (d) not to be "done," i. e. not to be overcome or defeated D II.76; A IV.113; - (e) having nothing to do Vin I.154. - 2. (nt.) a Pāli Text Society 467 Pāli-English Dictionary forbidden matter, prohibition Vin II.278 - sa° 1. having business, busy Vin I.155; - 2. one who has still something to do (in sense of above 2) D II.143; Th 1, 1045; DA I.9. Karaṇīyatā {Karaniyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact that something has to be performed, an obligation Vin II.89, 93; sa° being left with something to do Miln 140. Karaṇḍa {Karanda} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa, °ka, °ikā. The Dhātumaðjūsā expls k. by "bhājanatthe"] 1. a basket or box of wicker-work Mhvs 31, 98; Dāvs V.60; DhA III.18; - 2. the cast skin, slough of a serpent D I.77 (=DA I.222 ahi-kañcuka) cp. Dial. I.88. Karaṇḍaka {Karandaka} [fr. last] a box, basket, casket, as dussa° M I.215=S V.71=A IV.230 (in simile); S III.131; V.351 cp. Pug 34; J I 96; III.527; V.473 (here to be changed into koraṇḍaka); DA I.222 (vilīva°); SnA 11. Karamanda {Karamanda} [etym.?] a shrub Vism 183 (+kanavīra). Karati1 {Karati} [cp. Sk. kṛntati] to cut, injure, hurt; in "karato kārayato chindato chedāpayato . . ." D I.52=M I.516; S III.208. Karati2 {Karati} (°tī) (f.) a superior kind of bean, the Dolichos catjang J VI.536 (=rājamāsa). Karabha {Karabha} the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru the trunk of an elephant; in karabhoru (k°+ūru) (a woman) with beautiful thighs Mhbv 29. Karamara {Karamara} see Kara. Karaḷa {Karala} (karala) a wisp of grass (tiṇa°) DhA III.38; DhsA 272. Karavī {Karavi} [cp. Sk. kala-kaṇṭha cuckoo, & kalavinka sparrow] the Indian cuckoo J VI.539. Karavīka {Karavika} same J V.204, 416; Vv 364; Vism 112, 206; VvA 166, 219. -bhāṇin speaking like the cuckoo, i. e. with a clear and melodious voice, one of the mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇas D II.20=III.144=173=M II.137, etc.; cp. Dial. II.17 n. and BSk. kalaviṅka-manojña-bhāṣin Sp. Av.Ś I.371 (Index p. 225, where references to Lalitavist. are given). Karavīya {Karaviya} (°iya)=prec. J VI.538. Karavīra [cp. Sk. karavīra] 1. the oleander, Nerium odorum. Its flower was used especially in garlands worn by delinquents (see kaṇṭha) - 2. a kind of grass J IV.92. -patta a kind of arrow M I.429. {Karavira} Karahi {Karahi} (Sk. karhi, when? kar=loc. of pron. st. *quo= Lat. cur why, Goth. hvar, E. where), only in karaha-ci (karhi cid) at some time, generally preceded by kadāci D I.17; II.139; M I.177, 454; A I.179; IV.101; Miln 73, 76. Pāli Text Society 468 Pāli-English Dictionary Karin {Karin} (adj.) [fr. kara] "one who has a hand," an elephant (cp. hatthin) Mhvs 24, 34; 25, 68; Dāvs IV.2. In cpds. kari. -gajjita the cry of the elephant, an elephant's trumpeting Dāvs V.56; vara an excellent elephant Mhbv 4, 143; Dāvs IV.2. Kari {Kari} -paribandha (adj.) [=karīsa-paribaddha] bound up in filth, full of filth, disgusting; Ep. of the body Th 1, 1152. Kari {Kari} here is abbrev. of karīsa2 (see note ad loc.). Karīsa1 {Karisa} (nt.) a square measure of land, being that space on which a karīsa of seed can be sown (Tamil karīsa), see Rhys Davids, Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon, p. 18; J I.94, 212; IV.233, 276; VvA 64. Karīsa2 {Karisa} (nt.) [cp. Sk. karīṣa, to chṛṇatti to vomit, cp. Lat. -cerda in mūscerda, sūcerda] refuse, filth, excrement, dung D II.293; J I.5; Vism 259, 358 (in detail); PvA 87, 258; KhA 59; mutta° urine and fæces A I.139; Sn 835. -magga the anus J IV.327; -vāca (nt.) a cesspool J III.263 (=gūthakūpa); -vāyin, f. °inī diffusing an odour of excrement PvA 87. Karuṇā {Karuna} (f.) [cp. Vedic karuṇa nt. (holy) action; Sk. karuṇā, fr. kṛ. As adj. karuṇa see under 3.] pity, compassion. Karuṇā is one of the 4 qualities of character significant of a human being who has attained enfranchisement of heart (ceto-vimutti) in the 4 sentiments, viz. mettā k.° upekhā muditā Freq. found in this formula with °sahagatena cetasā. The first two qualities are complementary, and SnA 128 (on Sn 73) explains k° as "ahita-dukkh-āpanayakāmatā," the desire of removing bane and sorrow (from one's fellowmen), whilst mettā is expl. as "hita-sukh-ûpanayakāmatā," the desire of bringing (to one's fellow-men) that which is welfare and good. Other definitions are "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karotī ti" Bdhd 21; "sattesu k° karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇā cetovimutti" as expl. of avihiṃsa dhātu Vbh 87; paradukkhāsahana-rasā Vism 318. K°-sahagatena cetasā denotes the exalted state of compassion for all beings (all that is encompassed in the sphere of one's good influence: see cātuddisa "extending over the 4, i. e. all, directions): D I.251; III.78, 50, 224; S IV.296, 322, 351; V.115; A I.183, 196; II.129, 184; III.225; V.300, 345; J II.129; Nd2 on Sn 73; Vbh 273, 280; Dhs 1258. The def. of karuṇā at Vism 318 runs "paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ hadayakampanaṃ karoti." Frequently referred to as an ideal of contemplation (in conn. w. bhāvanā & jhāna), so in "karuṇaṃ cetovimuttiṃ bhāveti" S V.119; A I.38; V.360; in k° cetovimutti bhāvitā bahulī-katā, etc. D III.248; A III.291; IV.300; in k°-sahagataṃ saddhindriyaṃ A I.42; unspecified S V.131; A III.185; Nett 121, 124; Ps I.8; k°+mettā Nett 25; k°+muditā Bdhd 16 sq., 26 sq., 29; ananta k° pañña as Ep. of Buddha Bdhd 1; karuṇaṃ dūrato katvā, without mercy, of the Yamadūtā, messengers of Death Sdhp 287; mahā° great compassion Ps I.126, 133; °samāpatti a „gest,‟ feat of great compassion: in which Buddha is represented when rising and surveying the world to look for beings to be worthy of his mercy and help D II.237; Ps. 1, 126 f. DhA I.26, 367; PvA 61, 195; - 3. As adj. only in cpds. (e. g. °vācā merciful speech; neg. akaruṇa merciless Mhbv 85, & ati° very merciful J IV.142) and as adv. karuṇaṃ pitifully, piteously, mournfully, in k° paridevati J VI.498, 513, 551; Cp. IX.54; also in abl. karuṇā J VI.466. -See also kāruðða. -ādhimutta intent upon compassion D II.241, 242; -ānuvattin following the dictates of mercy Dāvs III.46; -guṇaja originating in the quality of compassion Sdhp 570; -jala water of c., shower of mercy Miln 22; Mhbv 16; -jhāna meditation on pity, ecstasy of c. D II.237-39; ṭṭhāniya worthy of c. PvA 72; -para one who is highest in compassion, compassionate Sdhp 112, 345; -bala the power of c. Mhvs 15, 61, 130; Sdhp 577; -brahmavihāra divine state of pity Pāli Text Society 469 Pāli-English Dictionary Vism 319. -bhāvanā consideration or cultivation of pity Vism 314 sq. -rasa the sweetness of c. Mhbv 16; -vihāra (a heart) in the state of c. Vism 324 (& adj. °vihārin); DA I.33; -sāgara an ocean of mercy Mhbv 7; -sītala "cool with c." +hadaya, whose heart is tempered with mercy Sdhp 33; DA I.1. Karuṇāyati {Karunayati} [v. den. fr. karuṇā; cp. BSk. karuṇāyati Divy 105] to feel pity for, to have compassion on Sn 1065 (°āyamāna; expl. by Nd2 as anuddayamāno anurakkh° anuggaṇh° anukamp°); Vbh 273; Vism 314. Der. °āyanā compassionateness Vbh 87=273 (and °āyitattaṃ ibid.). Karumbhaka {Karumbhaka} a species of rice-plant of a ruddy colour Miln 252 (see Mil. trsl. II.73). Karumhā {Karumha} (pl.) a class of Devas D II.260. Kareṇu {Karenu} [metathesis for kaṇeru, q. v., cp. Sk. kareṇu] elephant, in cpd. -lolita resounding with the noise made by elephants, of a forest Th 2, 373. Kareṇukā {Karenuka} (f.) [fr. kareṇu) a female elephant J II.343; DhA I.196 (v. l. for kaṇeru). Kareri {Kareri} in Childers the tree Capparis trifoliata, but see Brethren, p. 363, n. 2: musk-rose tree or "karer"; Th 1, 1062; Ud 31; J V.405; VI.534. Karoṭi1 {Karoti} (f.) 1. a basin, cup, bowl, dish J I.243; II.363; III.225; IV.67; V.289, 290. - 2. the skull (cp. kaḷopi. On the form cp. Dial. I.227 n.) J VI.592. Karoṭi2 {Karoti} (m.) a class of genii that formed one of the 5 guards of the devas against the asuras J I.204, associated with the nāgas (cp. Divy 218; and Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 22). As N. of Supaṇṇas (a kind of Garuḍas) expld as "tesaṃ karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ" by C. on J I.204. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares BSk. karoṭapāṇayah a class of Yakṣas MVastu I.30. Karoṭika {Karotika} [fr. karoṭi1)] 1. a bowl, basin J IV.68; DhA II.131 (sappi°). - 2. the skull J VI.592; where it may be a helmet in the form of a skull. Karoṭiya {Karotiya} =karoṭika 2, J VI.593. Karoti {Karoti} v. irreg. [Sk. karoti, *qÛer to form, to build (or plait, weave? see kamma), cp. karman, Lith. kùrti to build, O.Tr. cruth form; Lat. corpus, with p- addition, as Sk. kṛpa, kḷp=kṛp. Derived are kalpa > kappa, kalpate > kappeti]. Of the endless variety of forms given by grammarians only the foll. are bona fide and borne out by passages from our texts (when bracketed, found in gram. works only): I. Act. 1. Ind. Pres. karomi, etc. Sn 78, 216, 512, 666=Dh 306=It 42; Opt. kare Dh 42, 43, pl. (kareyyāma) kareyyātha Sn p. 101; or (sing.) kareyya (freq.), kareyyāsi PvA 11; kareyya Sn 920, 923; kuriyā (=Sk. kuryāt) J VI.206; Ppr. karan Dh 136, or karonto (f. karontī) Dh 16, 116. - 2. Impf. (akara, etc.).- 3. Aor. (akaṃ) akariṃ, etc., 3rd sing. akāsi Sn 343, 537, 2nd pl. akattha Pv I.112; PvA 45, 75; 3rd pl. akariṃsu; akaṃsu Sn 882; PvA 74; without augment kari DhA II.59. Prohibitive mā(a)kāsi Sn 339, 1068, etc. - 4. Imper. karohi Sn p. 32; 1062; karotha Sn 223; KhA 168. - 5. Fut. karissāmi, etc.; kassāmi Pv IV.139; kāsaṃ J IV.286; VI.36; kāhāmi (in sense of I will do, I am determined to do, usually w. puððaṃ & Pāli Text Society 470 Pāli-English Dictionary kusalaṃ poetical only) Pv II.113; Vv 33192; 2nd sing. kāhasi Sn 427, 428; Dh 154; 1st pl. kāhāma Pv IV.1011. - 6. Inf. kātuṃ PvA 4, 61, 69, 115, Kh VI.10, etc.; kattuṃ VvA 13; kātave Mhvs 35, 29; Vv 4415 (=kātuṃ); kātuye Th 2, 418. - 7. Pp. kata, see sep. - 8. Ger. katvā Sn 127, 661, 705, etc.; katvāna (poet.) Sn 89, 269, Pv I.13; karitvā see IV. II. Med. 1. Ind. pres. (kubbe, etc.) 3rd sing. kubbati Sn 168, 811; 3rd pl. kubbanti Sn 794; or 3rd sing. kurute Sn 94, 796, 819; It. 67; Opt. (kubbe, etc.) 2nd pl. kubbetha Sn 702, 719, 917; It 87; or 3rd sing. kayirā Sn 728=1051; S I.24; Dh 53, 117; kayirātha (always expl. by kareyya) Dh 25, 117; It 13; Pv I.1111; KhA 224; kubbaye Sn 943. - Ppr. (kurumāna, kubbāno, karāno) (a)kubbaṃ Sn 844, 913; (a)kubbanto It 86; f. (vi)kubbantī Vv 112; (a)kubbamāna Sn 777, 778, 897; (vi)kubbamāna Vv 331. - 2. Impf. (akariṃ, 2nd sing. akarase, etc.) 3rd sing. akubbatha Pv II.1318; 1st pl. akaramhase J III.26, °a DhA I.145. - 3. Aor. (none) - 4. Imper. (2nd sing. kurussu, 3rd sing. kurutaṃ, 2nd pl. kuruvho) 3rd sing. kurutaṃ (=Sk. kurutāṃ) J VI.288. - 5. Fut. (none). III. Pass. 1. Ind. pres. (karīyati, etc.) kayirati Dh 292=Th 1, 635; KhA 168; and kīrati Th 1, 143. Ppr. (karīyamāna, kayīra°). - 2. Fut. kariyissati Vin I.107. - 3. Grd. karaṇīya (q. v.), (kayya) kātabba DhA I.338. IV. Caus. I. (Denom. to kāra) kārayati=kāreti, in origin. meaning of build, construct, and fig. perform, exercise, rule, wield (rajjaṃ): kārehi PvA 81 (of huts), kārayissāmi Pv II.64 (of doll); kāressaṃ J V.297 (do.), akārayi Pv II.1310; akārayuṃ Mhvs IV.3; akāresi Mhvs 23, 85; kāretuṃ PvA 74; kārayamāna VvA 9 (of chair); kāretvā (nāmaṃ) PvA 162; karitvā Sn 444 (vasiṃ) 674; 680 (vittiṃ); p. 97 (uttarāsangaṃ). V. Caus. II. Kārāpeti S I.179; PvA 20; Aor. kārāpesi he had (=caused to be) erected, constructed Vin II.159; fut. kārāpessāmi Mhvs 20, 9; ger. kārāpetvā PvA 123; grd. kārapetabba Vin II.134. Meanings of karoti: 1. to build, erect Mhvs 19, 36; 20, 9 (Caus.). - 2. to act, perform, make, do Vin I.155; J I.24; II.153 (tathā karomi yathā na . . . I prevent, cp. Lat. facio ne . . .); III.297; Pv I.88=II.619; Mhvs 3, 1; 7, 22; - 3. to produce DhA I.172; - 4. to write, compose J VI.410; PvA 287; - 5. to put on, dress Vin II.277; J I.9; - 6. to impose (a punishment) Mhvs 4, 14; - 7. to turn into (with loc. or two acc.) J II.32; Mhvs 9, 27; - 8. to use as (with two acc.) J I.113; II.24; - 9. to bring into (with loc.) J V.454 - 10. to place (with loc.) J V.274; (with acc. of the person) Dh 162. It is very often used periphrastically, where the trsln would simply employ the noun as verb, e. g. kathaṃ k° D II.98; kodhaṃ k° and kopaṃ k° to be angry J IV.22; VI.257; cayaṃ k° to hoard up; corikaṃ k° to steal Vin I.75; taṇhaṃ k° (c. loc.) to desire J I.5; sītaṃ k° to cool D II.129. - It is often compd with nouns or adjectives with a change of final vowel to ī (i) uttāni° to make clear D II.105; pākaṭī°, bahulī°, muṭṭhī°, etc. (q. v.). Cp. the same process in conn. with bhavati. - The meanings of karoti are varied according to the word with which it is connected; it would be impossible and unnecessary to give an exhaustive list of all its various shades. Only a few illustrations may suffice: aṃse k° to place on one's shoulder J I.9; antarāyaṃ k° to prevent J I.232; ādiṃ k° (c. acc.) to begin with; nimittaṃ k° to give a hint D II.103; pātarāsaṃ k° to breakfast; mānasaṃ k° to make up one's mind; mahaṃ k° to hold a festival D II.165; massuṃ k° to trim the beard DhA I.253; musāvādaṃ k° to tell a lie J VI.401; rajjaṃ k° to reign S I.218; vase k° to bring into one's power J I.79; sandhiṃ k° to make an agreement Mhvs 16; sinehaṃ k° to become fond of J I.190. - Similarly, cpd with adverbs: alaṃ k° to make much of, i. e. to adorn, embellish; dūrato k° to keep at a distance, i. e. keep free from PvA 17; Sdhp 287; purak k° (purakkharoti) to place before, i. e. to honour Pv III.71. - Note phrase kiṃ karissati what difference does it make? (Cp. Ger. was macht's) D I.120; or what about . . . J I.152. Kalakala (adj.) [cp. Sk. kala] any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in -mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp. karakarā. {Kalakala} Kalati {Kalati} [Kal, kālayati] to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Th 1, 22. Pāli Text Society Kalanda 471 Pāli-English Dictionary [cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?] heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Miln 292 (sīsa°). {Kalanda} Kalandaka {Kalandaka} 1. a squirrel Miln 368; - 2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J VI.224; -nivāpa N. of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels D II.116; Vin I.137; II.105, 290, etc. Kalabha {Kalabha} [cp. Sk. kalabha] the young of an elephant: see hatthi° and cp. kalāra. Kalamba {Kalamba} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens] N. of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish J IV.46 (=tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expls by tāla-kanda; gloss BB however gives latā-tanta); VI.578. See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba. -rukkha the Cadamba tree J VI.290. Kalambaka {Kalambaka} =kalamba, the C. tree J VI.535. Kalambukā {Kalambuka} (f.)=kalambaka D III.87 (vv. ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trsln (Dial. III.84) has "bamboo." Kalala {Kalala} (m. nt.) 1. mud J I.12, 73; Miln 125, 324, 346; Mhbv 150; PvA 215 (=kaddama); DhA III.61; IV.25. - su° "well-muddied" i. e. having soft soil (of a field) Miln 255. - 2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela°), used for embalming J II.155. - 3. in Embryology: the "soil," the placenta S I.206=Kvu II.494; Miln 125. Also the first stage in the formation of the fœtus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda, pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1-5 & 10; see Vism 236; Nd1 120; & cp. Miln 40). - 4. the fœtus, appl. to an egg, i. e. the yolk Miln 49. - In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī°. -gata (a) fallen into the mud Miln 325; -gahaṇa "mud thicket," dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes J I.329; -kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 8431 (VvA 343); -bhūta=prec., A I.9, cp. J II.100; A III.233; Miln 35; makkhita soiled with mud DhA III.61. Kalasa {Kalasa} (nt.) [cp. Vedic kalaśa] 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar M III.141; J IV.384; Dāvs IV.49; PvA 162. - 2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22. Kalaha {Kalaha} [cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal] quarrel, dispute, fight A I.170; IV.196, 401; Sn 862, 863 (+vivāda); J I.483; Nd2 427; DhA III.256 (udaka° about the water); IV.219; Sdhp 135. °ṃ udīreti to quarrel J V.395; karoti id. J I.191, 404; PvA 13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise J V.412; DhA III.255. - a° harmony, accord, agreement S I.224; mahā° a serious quarrel, a row J IV.88. ābhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Sn 276; Th 1, 958. -ṃkara picking up a quarrel J VI.45; -karaṇa quarrelling, fighting J V.413; -kāraka (f.-ī) quarrelsome, pugnacious A IV.196; Vin I.328; II.1; -kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute J III.151; VI.336; -jāta "to whom a quarrel has arisen," quarrelling, disputing A I.70; Vin I.341; II.86, 261; Ud 67; J III.149; pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels, prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) D III.182=DhsA 380; -vaḍḍhana (nt.) inciting & incitement to quarrel J V.393, 394; -sadda brawl, dispute J VI.336. Kalā {Kala} [Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. ska/llw, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expls kala by "sankhyāne."] 1. a small fraction of a whole, generally the 16th part; the Pāli Text Society 472 Pāli-English Dictionary 16th part of the moon's disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see VvA 103; DhA II.63), in this sense in the expression kalaṃ nāgghati soḷasiṃ "not worth an infinitesimal portion of"=very much inferior to S I.19; III.156=V.44=It 20; A I.166, 213; IV.252; Ud 11; Dh 70; Vv 437; DhA II.63 (=koṭṭhāsa) DhA IV.74. - 2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn) J I.163.-kalaṃ upeti to be divided or separated Miln 106; DhA I.119; see sakala. - In cpd. with bhū as kalī -bhavati to be divided, broken up J I.467 (=bhijjati). Cp. vikala. Kalāpa {Kalapa} [cp. Sk. kalāpa] 1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch; sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo- or sugar-canes, sometimes of hair and feathers S IV.290 (tiṇa°); J I.158 (do.); 25 (naḷa°), 51 (mālā°), 100 (uppalakumuda°); V.39 (usīra°); Miln 33; PvA 257, 260 (ucchu°), 272 (veḷu°); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora-piñja°) - 2. a quiver Vin II.192; It 68; J VI.236; Miln 418; PvA 154, 169. - 3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa°) Vism 364 (dasadhamma°) 626 (phassa-paðcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa°) 78, 120. -agga (nt.) "the first (of the) bunch," the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms DhA I.98. -sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism 287, 606, 626 sq. Kalāpaka {Kalapaka} 1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin II.315; Mhvs 30, 67. - 2. a bundle, group J I.239. Kalāpin {Kalapin} (adj.) [fr. kalāpa] having a quiver J VI.49 (acc. pl. °ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava°) S IV.201; II.114 (naḷa°). Kalābuka {Kalabuka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kalāpaka] a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin II.136, 144, 319; Kalāya {Kalaya} a kind of pea, the chick-pea M I.245 (kaḷāya); S I.150; A V.170; Sn p. 124; J II.75 (=varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja-māsa); J III.370; DhA I,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at A V.170=S I.150= Sn p. 124 (where the size of an ever-increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi). -matta of the size of a chick-pea S I.150; A V.170; Sn p. 124 (ḷ); J III.370; DhA I.319. Kalāyati {Kalayati} [Denom. fr. kalā] to have a measure, to outstrip J I.163 (taken here as "trick, deceive"). Kalāra {Kalara} in hatthi° at Ud 41, expld in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at DhA I.58 which reads kalabha, undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā. Kali {Kali} (m.) [cp. Sk. kali] 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); "the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka . . . An extra seed was called the kali" (Dial. II.368 n.) D II.349; J I.380; Dh 252 (= DhA III.375) at J VI.228, 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q. v. - 2. (=kaliggaha) an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality, demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliṃ vicināti "gathers up demerit" Sn 658; appamatto kali . . . akkhesu dhanaparājayo . . . mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye S I.149=A II.3=V.171, 174=Sn 659=Nett 132; cp. M III.170; A V.324; Dh 202 (=DhA III.261 aparādha). - 3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see °yuga). - 4. sinful, a sinner Sn 664 (=pāpaka). - 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Th 2, 458, 501; J V.134. -(g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing Pāli Text Society 473 Pāli-English Dictionary throw; symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly & moral sense (ubhayattha k° faring badly in both worlds) M I.403=406; III.170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha; -devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Miln 191 (see Miln trsl. I.266 n.); -(p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; -yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; -sāsana (nt.) in °ṃ āropeti to find fault with others Vin IV.93, 360. Kalingara {Kalingara} (m. nt.) (BB ḷ) [cp. Sk. kaḍankara & kaḍangara, on which in sense of "log" see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara] 1. a log, a piece of wood M I.449, 451; S II.268; DhA III.315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (combd with kaṭṭha q. v.) Dh 41; DhA I.321 (=kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Th 2, 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni DhA II.142. - 2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna° Vin II.128, cp. sopāna-kaḷevara. -ûpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one's head on when sleeping S II.267; Miln 366; -kaṇḍa a wooden arrow J III.273 (acittaṃ k°: without feeling) Kalingu {Kalingu} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka] the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel J VI.537. Kalita {Kalita} [pp. of kalati] sounding indistinctly Th 1, 22. Kalusa {Kalusa} [cp. Sk. kaluṣa] muddy, dirty, impure; in °bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA I.275. Kalevara {Kalevara} see kaḷebara. Kalya {Kalya} see kalla; -rūpa see kalla; -rūpa pleased, glad Sn 680, 683; a° not pleased Sn 691. Kalyatā {Kalyata} (f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J II.12. - 2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a° opp. (appld to citta) Dhs 1156; DhsA 377 (=gilānabhāva). Kalyāṇa & Kallāṇa {Kalyana} {Kallana} [Vedic kalyāṇa] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA 9, 116) and kusala (S II.118; PvA 9, 122); opp. pāpa (S I.83; M I.43; PvA 101, 116 and under °mitta). kata°=katûpakāra PvA 116 Appld to dhamma in phrase ādi° majjhe° pariyosāne° D I.62 and ≈; S V.152; Sn p. 103; VvA 87; Vism 213 sq. (in var. applications); etc. - As m. one who observes the sīlapadaṃ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) A II.222, cp. k°-mittā=sīlādīhi adhikā SnA 341. - S IV.303; V.2, 29, 78; A III.77; IV.361; Vin II.8, 95; J I.4; Miln 297; -kata° (opp. kata-pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k° katakusala, etc. It 25, etc. (see kata II.1 a). k° of kitti (-sadda) D I.49 (=DA I.146 seṭṭha); S IV.374; V.352; of jhāna (tividha°) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh 78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte . . . bhajetha m° kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (=suddhājīvin); Sn 338. - 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin I.117; A III.109; cp. bhadraṃ. - (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action J V.49 (kalyāṇā here nt. nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; - °ṃ karoti to perform good deeds S I.72; A I.138 sq.; Vin I.73; PvA 122. - (c) kindness, good service J I.378; III.12 (=upakāra), 68 (°ṃ karoti). - (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enumd as 5 kalyāṇāni, viz. kesa°, maṃsa°, aṭṭhi°, chavi°, vaya° i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth J I.394; DhA I.387. -ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA I.9; - -ādhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S II.154, 158; It 70, 78; VblQ 341; -kāma desiring what is good A III.109; -kārin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. pāpa°) S I.227, cp. J II.202=III.158; DhsA 390; (m.) Pāli Text Society 474 Pāli-English Dictionary who has rendered a service J VI.182; -carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vbh 341; jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable J III.82; -dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Sn 551=Th 1, 821 (+kañcanasannibhattaca); -dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin I.73; III.133; S V.352; Pug 26; It 96; Pv IV.135; Miln 129; DhA I.380; J II.65 (=sundara°), PvA 230 (=sundara-sīla); sīlavā+k° (of bhikkhu, etc.) M I.334; S IV.303; PvA 13. - k°ena k°atara perfectly good or virtuous A II.224. - (2) the Good Doctrine DhA I.7. -°tā the state of having a virtuous character A II.36; -pañña "wise in goodness" possessed of true wisdom Th 1, 506; It 97; -paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā J III.342; -paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply A III.58, cp. Miln 3; -pāpaka good and bad J V.238; VI.225; Kvu 45; (nt.) goodness and evil J V.493; -pīti one who delights in what is good Sn 969; -bhattika having good, nice food Vin II.77; III.160 (of a householder); -mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug 24 he is said to "have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise"; M I.43 (opp. pāpa°); S I.83, 87 (do.); A IV.30, 357; Pug 37, 41; J III.197; Bdhd 90; a° not a virtuous friend DhsA 247. - 2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence, but any other Arahant can act as such S V.3; Vism 89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhānadāyaka. -mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous S I.87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection S V.3, 32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhangas S V.78=101; A I.16, 83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu D III.212; A IV.29, 282; Th 2, 213; It 10; Dhs 1328=Pug 24; Vism 107. - a° not having a virtuous friend and good adviser DhsA 247. -rūpa beautiful, handsome J III.82; V.204; -vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with °vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly D I.93, 115; A II.97; III.114, 263; IV.279; Vin II.139; Miln 21; DA I.263 (=madhura-vacana); a° not pronouncing or reciting clearly D I.94. 122; -°tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address A I.38; -vāca, usually in form. k° k°-vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato D I.114; A II.97; III.114, 195, 263; IV.279; Vin II.139; DA I.282; -sadda a lucky word or speech J II.64; -sampavanka a good companion A IV.357 (in phrase k°-mitta k°-sahāya k°-s°); Pug 37; -°tā companionship with a virtuous friend S I.87. sahāya a good, virtuous companion A IV.284; 357; Pug 37; cp. prec., -°tā=prec. S I.87; -sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Th 1, 1008; It 96. Kalyāṇaka {Kalyanaka} (adj.) [fr. last] good, virtuous DA I.226; DhsA 32. Kalyāṇatā {Kalyanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. kalyāṇa] beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism 4 (ādi); k°kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20. Kalyāṇin {Kalyanin} (adj.) [fr. kalyāṇa] (a) beautiful, handsome Vv IV.5; - (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper J V.124; Ud 59; - (c) f. [cp.-ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman, a belle, usually in janapada° D I.193=M II.40; S II.234; J I.394; V.154. Kalla1 & Kalya {Kalla} {Kalya} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kalya] 1. well, healthy, sound Vin I.291. - 2. clever, able, dexterous Miln 48, 87. - 3. ready, prepared J II.12, cp. -citta. - 4. fit, proper, right S II.13 (pañha). - nt. kallaṃ it is proper, befitting (with inf. or inf.-substitute): vacanāya proper to say D I.168, 169; A I.144; abhinandituṃ D II.69; -kallaṃ nu [kho] is it proper? M III.19; S IV.346; Miln 25. - a° 1. not well, unfit Th 2, 439, cp. ThA 270. - 2. unbecoming, unbefitting D II.68; J V.394. -kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin I.291; -kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) S III.265; citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k°, mudu-citta, vinīvaraṇa°, udagga°, etc. D I.110=148=II.41=A IV.209=Vin I.16=II.156; VvA 53, 286; Vv 5019 (=kammaniya-citta "her mind Pāli Text Society 475 Pāli-English Dictionary was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma"); PvA 38. -cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J II.12 (cp citta-kalyatā); -rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Th 1, 212, - 2. pleased, joyful (kalya°) Sn 680, 683, 691; -sarīra having a sound body, healthy J II.51; a°-tā not being sound in body, ill-health VvA 243. Kalla2 {Kalla} (m. nt.) ashes J III.94 (for kalala), also in °-vassa a shower of ashes J IV.389. Kallaka {Kallaka} (adj.) [fr. last] in a° unwell, indisposed Vin III.62; J III.464; DhsA 377. Kallatā {Kallata} (f.) see kalyatā; -a° unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in expln of thīna Nd2 290= Dhs 1156=1236=Nett 86; DhsA 378; Nett 26. The reading in Nd2 is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs akalyatā; follows akammaððatā. Kallahāra {Kallahara} [cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expld as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra > kallahāra] the white esculent water lily J V.37; Dpvs XVI.19. Kallita {Kallita} (nt.) [fr. kalla] pleasantness, agreeableness S III.270, 273 (samādhismiṃ -°kusala); A III.311; IV.34 (id.). Kallola {Kallola} [cp. Sk. kallola] a billow, in -°mālā a series of billows Dāvs IV.44. Kaḷāya {Kalaya} =kalāya. Kaḷāra {Kalara} (adj.) [cp. Sk. karāla projecting (of teeth), whereas kaḍāra means tawny] always referring to teeth: with long, protruding teeth, of Petas (cp. attr. of the dog of the "Underworld" PvA 152: tikhiṇāyatakaṭhina-dāṭho and the figure of the witch in fairy-tales) J V.91 (=nikkhantadanto); VI.548 (=sūkara-dāṭhehi samannāgato p. 549); Pv II.41 (=k°-danto PvA 90). Kaḷārikā {Kalarika} (f.) [fr. last, lit. with protruding teeth] a kind of large (female) elephant M 1. 178 (so read with v. l. for kāḷ°). Cp. kalāra. Kaḷingara {Kalingara} =kalingara. (cp. kaḍamba, kalamba) a mark used to keep the interstices between the threads of the kaṭhina even, when being woven Vin II.116, 317 (v. l. kaḷimpaka). Kaḷīra {Kalira} the top sprout of a plant or tree, esp. of the bamboo and cert. palm trees (e. g. coco-nut tree) which is edible Sn 38 (vaṃsa°=veḷugumba Nd2 556 and p. 58); Th 1, 72; J I.74, cp. III.179; VI.26; Miln 201 (vaṃsa°); Vism 255 (vaṃsa°-cakkalaka, so read for kalira°; KhA 50 at id. passage reads kaḷīra-daṇḍa). -(c)chejja (nt.) "the cutting off of the sprout," a kind of torture Miln 193, cp. Miln. trsl. I.270 and kadalīccheda. Kaḷebara {Kalebara} (: kale° and kalevara) (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. kaḍebara Av. Ś. II.26] 1. the body S I.62=A II.48;=IV.429 =M I.82; J II.437, III.96, 244; Vism 49, 230. - 2. a dead body, corpse, carcass; often in description of death: khandhānaṃ bhedo k°assa nikkhepo, D II.355= M. I.49=Vbh 137; Th 2, 467; J III.180, 511; V.459; Mhvs 2010; 3781; PvA 80. Cp. kuṇapa. - 3. the step in a flight of stairs M II.92, cp. kalingara. Pāli Text Society 476 Pāli-English Dictionary Kaḷopī {Kalopi} (=khaḷopi) f. 1. a vessel, basin, pot: see cpds. - 2. a basket, crate (=pacchi ThA 219; J V.252) M I.77, 342; S I.236=Th 2, 283 (where osenti is to be corr. to openti); J V.252. - On the form of the word (=karoṭi?) see Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 109 and Davids, Dial. I.227. kaḷopī (as khaḷopī) is expld at Pug A p. 231 as "ukkhalī, pacchi vā." -mukha the brim of a pan or cooking vessel D I.166 =M I.77=342=A I.295=II.206 (kumbhi-m°+kaḷopim°); -hattha with a vessel or basket in his hand A IV.376. Kavaca {Kavaca} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kavaca] a mail, a coat of mail, armour D II.107=Ud 64 (appld to existence); Th 1, 614 (of sīla); J IV.92, 296; Miln 199, 257; Vism 73. -jālikā a mail-coat Miln 199. Kavandha {Kavandha} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kavandha & kabandha] 1. the (headless) trunk of the body, endowed with the power of motion Vin III.107; cp. S II.260 (asīsaka°); Miln 292; DhA I.314. - 2. a headless dwarf, whose head has been crushed down into his body J V.424, 427 (cp. the story of Dhanu, the Rākṣasa who was punished by having his head and thighs forced into his body, Raghuvaṃsa XII.57). Kavāṭa {Kavata} (m. nt.) 1. the panels of the door, the door proper, not the aperture Vin II.114, 120, 207, 208 (see Vin II.148 for the description of a door) IV.269, 304 (°baddha =āvasatha); J I.19; Nd2 2351d; Vism 28 (°koṇa doorcorner). - 2. dvāra° a door-post J I.63; II.334; PvA 280. - 3. a window Mhvs IX.17; - °ṃ paṇāmeti to open the door Vin II.114, 120, 207; °ṃ ākoṭeti to knock at the door D I.88 (=DA I.252); Vin II.208. - akavāṭaka (adj.) having no doors, doorless Vin II.148, 154 (v. l. for akkavāta Text). -piṭṭha the panels and posts of a door; the door and the door-posts Vin I.47, 48=II.208, 218; -baddha "door-bound," closed, secure Vin IV.292 (see also above). Kavāṭaka {Kavataka} =kavāṭa Vin II.148; DA I.62 (nīvaraṇa°). Kavi {Kavi} [Vedic kavi] a poet S I.38; II.267; Dāvs I.10; four classes enumd at A II.230 & DA I.95, viz. 1. cintā° an original p. 2. suta° one who puts into verse what he Las heard. 3. attha° a didactic p. 4. paṭibhāṇa° an improvisor. -kata composed by poets S II.267; A I.72. Kavya {Kavya} [cp. Vedic kavya wise; sacrificer] poetry; ballad, ode (cp. kabba) J VI.213, 216. -kāra a poet J VI.216. Kaviṭṭha {Kavittha} [cp. kapittha] the elephant-apple tree, Feronia elephantum J V.38 (°vana). Kasaka {Kasaka} see kassaka. Kasaṭa {Kasata} (metathesis of sakaṭa, cp. Trenckner, Miln p. 423) 1. (adj.) bad, nasty; bitter, acrid; insipid, disgusting A I.72; J II.96; 159. - 2. (m.) (a) fault, vice, defect M I.281; Ps II.87. - (b) leavings, dregs VvA 288 (v. l. sakaṭa). - (c) something bitter or nasty J II.96; V.18. - (d) bitter juice J II.105 (nimba°). - sa° faulty, wrong, bitter to eat, unpalatable Miln 119. -ôdaka insipid, tasteless water J II.97. Kasati {Kasati} [kṛs or karṣ] to till, to plough S I.172, 173=Sn 80; Th I.531; J I.57; II.165; VI.365. kassate (3rd sing. med.) Th 1, 530. - pp. kattha (q. v.) Caus. II. kasāpeti Miln 66, 82; DhA I.224. Pāli Text Society 477 Pāli-English Dictionary Kasana {Kasana} (nt.) ploughing, tilling J IV.167; VI.328, 364; Vism 384 (+vapana sowing). Kasambu {Kasambu} [Derivation uncertain] anything worthless, rubbish, filth, impurity; fig. low passions S I.166; Sn 281=Miln 414=A IV.172; Vism 258 (maṃsa°), 259 (parama°). -jāta one whose nature is impurity, in comb. brahmacāripaṭiððo antopūti avassuto k° S IV.181; A II.240; IV.128, 201; Vin II.236; Pug 27, 34, 36; Vism 57 (+avassuta pāpa). °ka-jāta ibid. in vv. ll. Kasā {Kasa} (f.) [Vedic kaśā] a whip Vin I.99 (in Uddāna); M I.87, etc.; Dh 143; Miln 197. - -kasāhi tāḷeti to whip, lash, flog as punishment for malefactors here, as well as in Niraya (see kammakaraṇā) M I.87=A I.47= II.122, etc.; PvA 4 (of a thief scourged on his way to the place of execution); DhA II.39 (id.). -niviṭṭha touched by the whip, whipped Dh 144 (=DhA III.86); pahāra a stroke with the whip, a lash J III.178; -hata struck with the whip, scourged Vin I.75; 91=322; Sdhp 147. Kasāya & Kasāva {Kasaya} {Kasava} [Derivation uncertain. The word first appears in the late Vedic form kaṣāya, a decoction, distillation, essence; used figy of evil. The old Pali form is kasāva] 1. a kind of paste or gum used in colouring walls Vin II.151. - 2. an astringent decoction extracted from plants Vin I.201, 277; J V.198. - 3. (of taste), astringent DhQ 629; Miln 65; DhA II.31. - 4. (of colour) reddish-yellow, orange coloured Vin I.277. - 5. (ethical) the fundamental faults (rāga, dosa, moha) A I.112; Dh 10; Vbh 368. -a° faultless, flawless, in akasāvattaṃ being without defect A I.112 (of a wheel, with -sa° ibid.); -sa° faulty DhA I.82; -mahā° wicked J IV.387. In cpds. both forms, viz. (kasāya)-yoga an astringent remedy J V.198 (kasāva° ibid.); -rasa reddishyellow dye J II.198; (kasāva)-ôdaka an astringent decoction Vin I.205; -gandha having a pungent smell Vin I.277; -rasa having an astringent taste ibid.; -vaṇṇa of reddish-yellow colour ibid. Kasāyatta {Kasayatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. kasāya] astringency Miln 56. Kasi & Kasī {Kasi} (f.) [fr. kasāti] tilling, ploughing; agriculture, cultivation M II.198; S I.172, 173=Sn 76 sq.; Vin IV.6; Pv I.56 (k°, gorakkha, vaṇijjā); PvA 7; Sdhp 390 (k°, vaṇijjā); VvA 63. °ṃ kasati to plough, to till the land J I.277; Vism 284. -kamma the act or occupation of ploughing, agriculture J II.165, 300; III.270. -karaṇa ploughing, tilling of the field PvA 66; khetta a place for cultivation, a field PvA 8 (kasī°); -gorakkha agriculture and cattle breeding D I.135; -bhaṇḍa ploughing implements DhA I.307. Kasiṇa1 {Kasina} [Vedic kṛtsna] (adj.) entire, whole J IV.111, 112. Kasiṇa2 {Kasina} [Deriv. uncertain] (nt.) one of the aids to kammaṭṭhāna the practice by means of which mystic meditation (bhāvanā, jhāna) may be attained. They are fully described at A V.46 sq., 60; usually enumerated as ten [sāvakā dasa k° -āyatanāni bhāventi]; paṭhavī°, āpo°, tejo°, vāyo°, nīla°, pīta°, lohita°, odāta°, ākāsa°, viððāṇa°-that is, earth, water, fire, air; blue, yellow, red, white; space, intellection (or perhaps consciousness) M II.14; D III.268, 290; Nett 89, 112; Dhs 202; Ps I.6, 95; cp. Manual 49-52; Bdhd 4, 90 sq., 95 sq. - For the last two (ākāsa° and viððāṇa°) we find in later sources āloka° and (paricchinn') ākāsa° Vism 110; cp. Dhs trsl. 43 n. 4, 57 n. 2; Cpd. 54, 202. - Eight (the above omitting the last two) are given at Ps I.49, 143, 149. See further J I.313; III.519; DhsA 186 sq. There are 14 manners of practising the kasiṇas (of which the first nine are: k°-ānulomaṃ; k°-paṭilomaṃ; k°-ānupaṭilomaṃ; jhānānulomaṃ; jh°paṭi°; jh°-ānupaṭi°; jh°-ukkantikaṃ; k° ukk°; jh°k°-ukk°) Vism 374; cp. Bdhd 5, 101 sq., 104, Pāli Text Society 478 Pāli-English Dictionary 152. - Nine qualities or properties of (paṭhavi-) kasiṇa are enumd at Vism 117. - Each k. is fivefold, according to uddhaṃ, adho, tiriyaṃ, advayaṃ, appamāṇaṃ; M II.15, etc. - kasiṇaṃ oloketi to fix one's gaze on the particular kasiṇa chosen J V.314; °ṃ samannāharati to concentrate one's mind on the k. J III.519. -āyatana the base or object of a kasiṇa exercise (see above as 10 such objects) D III.268; M II.14; Ps I.28, etc.; -ārammaṇa=°āyatana Vism 427 (three, viz. tejo°, odāta°, āloka°). -kamma the k. practice J I.141; IV.306; V.162, 193. -jhāna the k. meditation DhsA 413. -dosa fault of the k. object Vism 117, 123 (the 4 faults of paṭhavī-kasiṇa being confusion of the 4 colours). -parikamma the preliminary, preparatory rites to the exercise of a kasiṇa meditation, such as preparing the frame, repeating the necessary formulas, etc. J I.8, 245; III.13, 526; DhsA 187; -°ṃ katheti to give instructions in these preparations J III.369; °ṃ karoti to perform the k-preparations J IV.117; V.132, 427; VI.68; maṇḍala a board or stone or piece of ground divided by depressions to be used as a mechanical aid to jhāna exercise. In each division of the maṇḍala a sample of a kasiṇa was put. Several of these stone maṇḍalas have been found in the ruins at Anurādhapura. Cp. Cpd. 54 f. 202 f. J III.501; DhA IV.208. -samāpatti attainment in respect of the k. exercise Nd2 4668 (ten such). Kasita {Kasita} (pp. of kasati) ploughed, tilled Anvs 44; -a° untilled ibid. 27, 44. - Cp. vi°. Kasira {Kasira} (adj.) [Probably fr. Vedic kṛcchra, the deriv. of which is uncertain] miserable, painful, troubled, wretched A IV.283; Sn 574; J II.136; IV.113=VI.17; Pv IV.121 (=PvA 229 dukkha). - adv. kasirā (abl.) with difficulty J V.435; -kasirena (instr.) D I.251; M I.104; S I.94; Vin I.195; J I.338; III.513. a° without pain, easy, comfortable J VI.224 (=niddukkha); -lābhin obtaining without difficulty (f° inī A IV.342) in formula akicchalābhī akasiralābhī etc. M I.33; S II.278; A I.184; II.23, 3Q; IV.106; Ud 36; Pug 11, 12. -ābhata amassed with toil and difficulty (of wealth) J V.435; -vuttika finding it hard to get a livelihood A I.107=Pug 51. Kaseruka {Kaseruka} [etym. connected with Sk. kaseru backbone?] a plant, shrub SnA 284 (v. l. kaṃsīruka for kiṃsuka?). See also kaṭeruha. Kassaka {Kassaka} [fr. kasati] a husbandman, cultivator, peasant, farmer, ploughman D I.61 (k° gahapatiko kārakārako rāsi-vaḍḍhako); A I.241; A. I.229, 239 (the three duties of a farmer); S I.172=Sn 76; III.155 (v. l. for T. kasaka); IV. 314; Vin IV.108; Bdhd 96; DA I.170; often in similes, e. g. Pv I.11; II.968 (likeness to the doer of good works); Vism 152, 284, 320. -vaṇṇa (under) the disguise of a peasant S I.115 (of Māra). Kassati {Kassati} [kṛs] see ava°, anu° (aor. anvakāsi), pari°; otherwise kasati; cp. also kissati. Kassāma {Kassama} fut. of karoti. Kahaṃ {Kaham} [cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad°.] interr. adv. where? whither? Vin I.217; D I.151; Sn p. 106; J II.7; III.76; V.440. - k-nu kho where then? D I.92; II.143, 263. Kahāpaṇa {Kahapana} [doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper coin M II.163; A I.250; V.83 sq.; Vin II.294; III. 238; DhsA 280 (at this passage included under rajataṃ, silver, together with loha-māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu-māsaka); S I.82; A I.250; Vin II.294; IV.249; J I.478, 483; II.388; Mhvs 3014. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny, and the purchasing power Pāli Text Society 479 Pāli-English Dictionary of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin. - Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J II.96); 18 koṭis (J I.92); 1,000 (J II.277, 431; V.128, 217; PvA 153, 161); 700 (J III.343); 100 (DhA III.239); 80 (PvA 102); 10 or 20 (DhA IV.226); 8 (which is considered, socially, almost the lowest sum J IV.138; I.483). A nominal fine of 1 k. (=a farthing) Miln 193. - ekaṃ k° pi not a single farthing J I.2; similarly eka-kahāpaṇen' eva Vism 312. - Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism 437 and 515. Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at DhA III.254. - See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100-102, fig. 24; Miln trsl. I.239. -gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe DhA IV.104; -vassa a shower of money Dh 186 (=DhA III.240). Kahāpaṇaka {Kahapanaka} (nt.) N. of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors M I.87=A I.47, II.122; cp. Miln 97, 290, 358. Kā {Ka} (indecl.) interj. imitating the crow's cry: kā kā J IV.72. Kā°{Ka°} in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad° as kāpuppha, kāpurisa. Kāka {Kaka} [onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S I.124= Sn 448; J I.164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA III.352; said to have ten bad qualities A V.149; J I.342; III.126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin IV.40. - As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass-eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Sn 201; PvA 198 (=dhanka); cp. kākoḷa. - In cpds. often used derisively. - f. kākī J II.39, 150; III.431. -āmasaka "touching as much as a crow," attr. of a person not enjoying his meals DhA IV.16; DhsA 404; -uṭṭepaka a crow-scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin I.79 cp. 371. -opamā the simile of the crow DhA II.75. -orava "crow-cawing," appld to angry and confused words Vin I.239, cp. IV.82; -ôlūka crows and owls J II.351; DhA I.50; Mhbv 15; -guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J II.174; cp. J. trsl. II.122; -nīḷa a crow's nest J II.365; -paððā "crow-wisdom," i. e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J V.255, 258; cp. VI.358; -paṭṭanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by crows J VI. 456; -pāda crow's foot or footmark Vism 179 (as pattern); -peyya "(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it," full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k° "with even banks and drinkable for crows" (i. e. with the water on a level with the land) D I.244; S II.134 (do.); D II.89; M I.435; A III.27; J II.174; Ud 90; cp. note to J. trsl. II.122; PvA 202. See also peyya. -bhatta "a crow's meal," i. e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows J II.149; -vaṇṇa "crow-coloured" N. of a king Mhvs 2211; -vassa the cry of a crow Vin II.17; -sīsa the head of a crow J II.351; as adj.: having a crow's head, appld to a fabulous flying horse D II.174; cp. J II.129; -sūra a "crow-hero," appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh 244; DhA III.352; -ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin I.115. Kākacchati {Kakacchati} [derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr. kath; should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?] to snore Vin IV.355; A III.299; J I.61, 160 (=ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DA I.42 ghurû-ghurûpassāsī); I.318; VI.57; Miln 85; Vism 311. Kākaṇa {Kakana} (nt.) [kā (for kad°) + kaṇa=less than a particle] a coin of very small value Sdhp 514. Pāli Text Society 480 Pāli-English Dictionary Kākaṇikā {Kakanika} (f.)=prec. J I.120, 419; VI.346; DA I.212; DhA I.391; VvA 77=DhA III.108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa; it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz., kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā "for nothing." -agghanaka "not even a farthing's worth," worth next to nothing J VI.346. Kākola & Kākoḷa {Kakola} [Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form] a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) J III.246 (=vanakāka); V.268, 270 (gijjha k° ā ca ayomukhā . . . khādanti naraṃ kibbisakārinaṃ); VI.566. -gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Sn 675; VV5215 (=VvA 227). Kāca1 {Kaca} [Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non-Aryan] a glass-like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin I.190; II.112 (cp. Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock-crystal). - a° not of glass or quartz, i. e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D II.244=J II.418 (=akakkasa) Sn 476. In the same sense also MVastu I.164. -ambha (nt.) red crystal J VI.268 (=rattamaṇi); -maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin I.190; II.112. Kāca2 {Kaca} [cp. Sk. kāca & kāja] a pingo, a yoke, a carryingpole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato-kājo) with only one basket and "middle" p. (antarā°) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin II.137; J I.154; V.13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA 168. -daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DA I.41. Kācanā {Kacana} (f.) [fr. kāca2] balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vbh 352=Vism 27. Kācin {Kacin} (adj.) [fr. kāca1], only neg. a° free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 601 (=niddosa VvA 253). Kāja {Kaja} =kāca2, i. e. carrying-pole M III.148; J I.9; III.325; V.200; Dpvs XII.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA IV.232. -koṭi the end of a carrying-pole J I.9; V.200. -hāraka a pingo-bearer DhA IV.128. Kāṭa—koṭacikā {Katakotacika} [kāṭa + koṭacikā] a low term of abuse, "pudendum virile & muliebre" Vin IV.7 (buddhagh IV.354: kātan ti purisa-nimittaṃ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89. Kāṇa {Kana} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāṇa] blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both (see PugA 227) S I.94; Vin II.90= A I.107=II.85=Pug 51 (in expln of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Th 2, 438; J I.222 (oneeyed); VI.74 (of both eyes); DhA III.71. -kaccha Np. Sdhp 44; -kacchapa "the blind turtle" in the well-known parable of a man's chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th 2, 500 (=ThA 290); Miln 204; DhsA 60; cp. M III.169=S V.455. Kātabba {Katabba} (adj. -n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) J I.264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA 30. Pāli Text Society 481 Pāli-English Dictionary Kātuṃ & Kātu° {Katum} {Katu°} (in compn with kāma) inf. of karoti. -kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 3734 (a°). PvA 115; -kāmatā the desire to do, etc. J IV.253; V.364. See also kattu° in same combns. Kātuye {Katuye} is Vedic inf. of karoti Th 2, 418 (in ThA 268 taken as kātuṃ ayye!). Kādamba {Kadamba} [cp. Sk. kādamba] a kind of goose with grey wings J V.420; VvA 163. Kādambaka {Kadambaka} made of Kadamba wood; also °ya for °ka; both at J V.320. Kānana {Kanana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kānana] a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Sn 1134 (=Nd2 s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Th 2, 254 (=ThA 210 upavana); J VI.557; Sdhp 574. Kānāmā {Kanama} f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin II.272, 273; J VI.338. Kāpilanī {Kapilani} patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Th 2, 65. Kāpilavatthava {Kapilavatthava} (adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. D II.165, 256; S IV.182. Kāpurisa {Kapurisa} [kad + purisa] a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin II.188; D III.279; S I.91, 154; II.241; V.204; Th 1, 124, 495; J II.42; VI.437; Pv II.930 (PvA 125=lāmaka°); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path A III.24; Th 2, 189. Kāpotaka {Kapotaka} (adj.) [fr. kapota] pigeon-coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton D I.55; Dh 149 (=DhA III.112). Kāpotikā {Kapotika} (f.) [of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i. e. fr. kapi] a kind of intoxicating drink, of a reddish colour (like pigeons'fect) Vin IV.109, cp. J I.360 (surā). Kāma {Kama} (m. nt.) [Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by "icchāyaṃ," cp. Vedic kāma, rs, E whore. - 1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure-giving, an object of sensual enjoyment; - 2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense-desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense-desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma-bhava or -loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati's) of existence and part of the fifth or deva-loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd1 1 distinguishes (1) vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i. e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd2 202, quoted DhA II.162; III.240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 11 (VvA 11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi-visayā. - 2. chandarāga. - 3. sabbasmiṃ lobha. - 4. gāmadhamma. - 5. hitacchanda. - 6. serībhāva, i. e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, Pāli Text Society 482 Pāli-English Dictionary (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust, (5) effort to do good, (6) self-determination. In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions, kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k. stands first on the list of the six factors of existence: kāmā, vedanā, saððā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at A III.410 sq. as regards their origin, difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. - Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion), with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. - The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma-cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga, excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst; (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon, or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd1. At Nd2 200; Dhs 1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. DhsA 370; similarly at Vism 569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs 1214; Vbh 375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām-ogha, kāma-yoga, kām-upādāna at Nd2 200, cp. Vism 141 (kām-ogha, °āsava, °upādāna). Similarly at D III.238: kāme avigata-rāga, °chanda, °pema, °pipāsa, °pariḷāha, °taṇha. See also kāma-chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma-context are verbs the primary meaning of which is "adhering to" or "grasping," hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira), upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat. torreo=thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix=melting), etc. - On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati "to be eaten up" pariḍayhati "to be burnt," etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuðjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma-pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma-pariyesanāyā ussukko, A I.68; cp. M I.463; III.129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next-world happiness. Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv, where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha "fully equipped with all objects of pleasure," e. g. Pv I.105; PvA 46. The other-world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: S V.409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiṃ so nādhigacchati Dh 187; rāgaṃ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Sn 361, see also It 94. - Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual: kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla) Pug 38, 39; It 63, etc. itthi-kāmehi paricāreti "he enjoys himself with the charms of woman" S IV.343. Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Sn 1041. Kāmatthā for sexual amusement A III.229. Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saṃyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge, right effort and renunciation. "To give up passion" as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ, kāmasaððānaṃ pariððā, kāma-pipāsānaṃ-paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaṃ samugghāto kāma-pariḷāhānaṃ vūpasamo Vin III.111; -kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto "uddhaṃsoto" ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called "one who is above the stream" Dh 218; cp. Th 2, 12; - tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Sn 771; - yo kāme parivajjeti Sn 768=Nett 69. - nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Sn 359; - ye ca kāme pariððāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaṃ A III.69. - Kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paððāpeti Gotamo M I.84; cp. A V.64; kāme pajahati: S I.12=31; Sn 704; kāmānaṃ vippahāna S I.47; - ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Sn 464; - kāmā nirujjhanti Pāli Text Society 483 Pāli-English Dictionary (through jhāna) A IV.410; kāme panudati Dh 383=S I.15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaṃ analaṃkaritvā Sn 59; - kāmesu anapekkhin Sn 166=Ś I.16 (abbrev.); S II.281; Sn 857; - cp. rāgaṃ vinayetha . . . Sn 361. vivicc'eva kāmehi, aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna-exercise. Applications of these expressions:-kāmesu palāḷita A III.5; kāmesu mucchita S I.74; kāmālaye asatta S I.33; kāmesu kathaṃ nameyya S I.117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin S I.9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Sn 823 (gadhitā Nd1); - kāmesu asaððata Sn 243; - yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dh 401; - Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Sn 845; kāmesu giddha D III.107; Sn 774; kāmesu gedhaṃ āpajjati S I.73; - na so rajjati kāmesu Sn 161; kāmānaṃ vasam upāgamum Sn 315 (=kāmānaṃ āsattataṃ pāpuniṃsu SnA 325); kāme parivajjeti Sn 768, kāme anugijjhati Sn 769. Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. A II.177), and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says "Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo" (see k-sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) S I.9, 117; aniccā (transitory) S I.22; kāmā citrā madhurā "pleasures are manifold and sweet" (i. e. tasty) Sn 50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. M I.91; see Nd2 71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app'assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at J IV.118. -atittaṃ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaṃ Dh 48; - na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viððāya paṇḍito "not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures-of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand" Dh 186; cp. M I.130; Vin II.25 (cp. Divy 224). - Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaṃ kāmato vippamuttassa n'atthi soko kuto bhayan ti "of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear" Dh 215. - Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are: bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, sanga, panka, gabbha A IV.289; Nd2 p. 62 on Sn 51; same, except salla & gabbha: A III.310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha's discourse on pains of pleasures M I.85 and parallel passages (see e. g. Nd2 199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice, quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness. Kāmānaṃ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) M I.85 sq. =Nd2 199, quot. SnA 114 (on Sn 61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K° ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ A IV.186, 209, 439; - they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Sn 436; - yo evamvādī . . . n'atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataṃ āpajjati A I.266=M I.305 sq. Similes.-In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi-kankhala, a chain of bones; - (2) maṃsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; - (3) tiṇ'ukkā, a torch of grass; (4) angāra-kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; - (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings; - (7) rukkha-phala, the fruit of a tree; - (8) asisūna, a slaughter-house; - (9) satti-sūla, a sharp stake; - (10) sappa-sira, a snake's head, i. e. the bite of a snake at Vin II.25; M I.130; A III.97 (where aṭṭhisankhala); Nd2 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at D III.283; A IV.224=V.175; No. 5 at DhA III.240; No. 8 at M I.144; No. 9 at S I.128=Th 2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaṃ for khandhāsaṃ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Th 2, 451, and several at many other places of the Canon. Cases used adverbially:-kāmaṃ acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaṃ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses S I.227; J I.203; PvA 63, 113, 176; yena kāmaṃ wherever he likes, just as he pleases A IV.194; Vv I.11 (=icchānurūpaṃ VvA 11) - (b) willingly, gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. S I.222; J I.233; III.147; IV.273; VvA 95; kāmaṃ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohitaṃ "willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body" M I.481; A I.50; S II.28; J I.71, 110; -kāmasā (instr.) in same sense J IV.320; VI.181; - Pāli Text Society 484 Pāli-English Dictionary kāmena (instr.) do. J V.222, 226; -kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) J III.466; IV.285, 365; V.294; VI.563, 589; cp. Mhv III.18, 467. -akāmā unwillingly D I.94; J VI.506; involuntarily J V.237. °kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing, in kāma-kāma pleasure-loving Sn 239 (kāme kāmayanto SnA 284); Dh 83 (cp. on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 39-41); same expln as prec. at DhA II.156; Th 2, 506. - atthakāma well-wishing, desirous of good, benevolent J I.241; V.504 (anukampakā +); sic lege for attakāmarūpā, M I.205, III,155, cf. S i.44 with ib. 75; A II.21; Pv IV.351; VvA 11 (in quotation); PvA 25, 112; mānakāma proud S I.4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish A II.240; dūsetu° desiring to molest Vin IV.212; dhamma° Sn 92; pasaṃsa° Sn 825. So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to, wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu°, amaritu°, dātu°, daṭṭhu°, dassana°, kātu°, pattu°, netu°, gantu°, bhojetu°, etc. -sakāma (-adj.) willing J V.295. -akāma 1. not desiring, i. e. unwilling: M II.181; mayhaṃ akāmāya against my wish (=mama anicchantiyā) Pv II.107, J V.121, 183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless, passionless Sn 445. -nikkāma same Sn 1131. -agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment M II.43; Vv 163 (=VvA 79, attributed to the Paranimmitavasavattino-devā); -aggi the fire of passion J V.487; -ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire, No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); -ādhikaraṇa having its cause in desire M I.85; S I.74; -ādhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A III.168; J VI.159; ānusārin pursuing worldly pleasures J II.117; -andha blinded by passion Ud 76=Th 1, 297;ābhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D II.274; -ābhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA 3; -āvacara "having its province in kāma," belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D I.34 (of the soul, expld DA 120: cha k°-devapariyāpanna); J I.47; Dhs 1, 431; Ps 1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh 324; Vism 88, 372, 452 (rūpa°, arūpa°, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA 138. -kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma-worlds Dhs 414, 418, 431; devatā PvA 138 (+brahmādevatā) and -devā the gods of the pleasure-heavens J I.47; V.5; VI.99; Vism 392; or of the kāmāvacara-devaloka J VI.586, -bhūmi and -loka the plane or world of kāma Ps I.83; J VI.99; see also avacara; -āvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma J VI.99; Sdhp 254 (°ika); -assāda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA 262; DA I.89, 311; -ātura affected by passion, love-sick J III.170; -ārāma pleasure-loving A IV.438 (gihī k-bhogī, °ratā, °sammuditā); -ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i. e. kāma-loka) S I.33=Sn 177; Sn 306; āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality J II.330; -āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma-chando, etc. (see above k-chando) Vbh 364, 374; Dhs 1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā° at Vin III.5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh 373; Dhs 1096, 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi°) at It 49; Vbh 364; cp. D I.84; II.81; III.216; M I.7; -itthi a pleasure-woman, a concubine Vin I.36; J I.83; V.490; VI.220; -upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA 79; -upādāna clinging to sensuality, arising from taṇhā, as k° diṭṭhi° sīlabbata°, attavāda° D III.230; M I.51; Vbh 136, 375; Vism 569; -ûpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhitakāmā (including mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals), (2) Nimmānaratino devā, (3) Paranimmita-vasavattino devā D III.218; It 94. -ûpasaṃhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k° rajaniyā "forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires" D I.245=M I.85; 504; D II.265; M III.267; VvA 127. -esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma°, bhava°, brahmacariya° D III.216 270; A II.42; Vbh 366; It 48; S V.54; -ogha the flood of sensual desires A III.69; D III.230, 276; Vbh 375; Vism 141; DhsA 166; Nd2 178 (viz. kām°, bhav°, diṭṭh°, avijj°). -kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud 27; -kara the fulfilment of one's desires J V.370 (=kāmakiriyā) -karaṇīya in yathā° pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M I.173; It 56; -kalala the Pāli Text Society 485 Pāli-English Dictionary mud of passions J III.293; -kāra the fulfilment of desires Sn 351=Th 1, 1271; -kārin acting according to one's own inclination Th 1. 971; or acting willingly DA I.71; -koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (=kāmaguṇa) J III.382; V.149; DA I.121; PvA 205; -kopa the fury of passion Th 1, 671; -gavesin, pleasure-seeking Dh 99=Th 1, 992. -gijjha J I.210 and -giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love J III.432; V.256; VI.245; -giddhimā, same J VI.525. giddhin f. °inī same Mhvs VI.3. -guṇā (pl.) always as paðca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviððeyyā rūpā, etc. A III.411; D I.245; II.271; III.131, 234; Nd2 s. v.; Ps I.129; as manāpiyehi rūpādīhi paðcahi kāma-koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DA I.121, where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81. - In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in "heaven": saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi paðcahi k-guṇehi samappito samangibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin III.72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana S I.5; M I.505; A III.40, IV.118; in various other connections S IV.202; Vv 307; Pv III.71 (°ehi sobhasi; expl. PvA 205 by kāmakoṭṭhāsehi); PvA 58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma-kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k° guṇā) S V.409; A V.272, but the same passage with "dibbehi pañcahi k°-guṇehi samappita . . ." also refers to earthly pleasures, e. g. S I.79, 80 (of kings); S V.342 (of a Cakkavatti); A II.125; IV.55, 239; V.203; of the soul D I.36; Vbh 379; other passages simply quoting k-g° as worldly pleasures are e. g. S I.16=Sn 171; S I.92; IV.196. 326; A III.69 (itthirūpasmiṃ); D I.60, 104; Sdhp 261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists, however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection: their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with "paðc'ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā . . ." and is found at various places, e. g. in full at M I.85=Nd2 s. v.; M I.454; II.42; III.114; quoted at M I.92; A III.411; IV.415, 430, 449, 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are: gedho pañcannaṃ k°-guṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ A III.312 sq.; asisūnā . . . adhivac° M I.144; nivāpo . . . adhivac° M. I.155; sāvaṭṭo . . . adhivac° It 114. In connection w. rata & giddha PvA 3; pahīna M III.295; gathita & mucchita M I.173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ "Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures" Dh 371; cittassa vossaggo Vbh 370; asantuṭṭha Vbh 350. See also Sn 50, 51, 171, 284, 337. -guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga S II.99; J IV.220; Dhs A.371; -gedha a craving for pleasure S I.100; ThA 225; -cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Sn 719. -citta impure thought J II.214; -chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (paðca nīvaraṇāni) D I.156, 246; III.234, 278; A I.231; IV.457; A I.134=Sn 1106; S I.99; V.64; Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd2 200, 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saṃyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1-10 at Nd2 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vbh 364; Dhs 1114, 1153; Nd2 ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order: 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at A II.10; - as nine (like above, omitting gedha) at Vbh 374; Dhs 1097; - as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage A II.10) at M I.241; - as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at S IV.188; - as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs 1170, 1486. See also D I.246; III.234, 269; Ps I.103, 108; II.22, 26, 44, 169; Vism 141; Sdhp 459; -jāla the net of desires Th 1, 355; -taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma°, bhava°, vibhava° D III.216, 275; It 50; Vbh 365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo); Dhs 1059, 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga-sahagatā, tatratatr'ābhinandinī at Vin I.10= Vbh 101; as k-taṇhāhi khajjamāno k-pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno M I.504. See also D II.308; S I.131; A II.11; Th 2, 140; J II.311; V.451; Miln 318. da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) J VI.498, 525; Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba° Pv II.138; -dada=prec. Pv II.918; PvA 112; J VI.508; of a stone Miln 243, 252; of Nibbāna Miln 321; Kh VIII.10: esa devamanussānaṃ sabbakāmadado nidhi "this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods Pāli Text Society 486 Pāli-English Dictionary and men"; -dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures J IV.118; -duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk J V.33; VI.214; f. °duhā the cow of plenty J IV.20; -dhātu "element of desire." i. e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality, extending from the Avīci-niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas S II.151; Th 1, 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma°, vyāpāda, vihiṃsā°, nekkhamma°, avyāpāda°, avihiṃsā°, Vbh 86; Nett 97; D III.215= Vbh 363 (as the first three=akusaladhātus); Vbh 404. See also D III.275; Th 1, 378; J V.454; Vism 486 (cp. Vbh 86). -nandī sensual delight (cp. °chanda) A II.11; Dhs 1114, etc. -nidānaṃ acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, M I.85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); -nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion It 61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. A III.245; -nissita depending on craving Miln 11; -nīta led by desire J II.214, 215; -panka the mire of lusts Sn 945; Th 2, 354; J V.186, 256; VI.230, 505; Mhbv 3; -paṭisandhi-sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire M III.230; -pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion M I.242, 508; S IV.188; A I.68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); A II.11; Vin III.20; Nd2 374 (comd with °palibodha); DhA II.2; see also kāmacchanda passage. -pāla the guardian of wishes, i. e. benefactor J V.221; -pipāsā thirst for sensuality M I.242; A II.11, and under k°-chanda; -bandha Ud 93, and -bandhana the bonds of desire J VI.28, also in the sense of k°-guṇā, q. v.; -bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vbh 137. It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāmadhātu A I.223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa° Vin I.36; D III.216; A IV.402; Vism 572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiðcana Sn 176, 1059, 1091 (expl. SnA 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61. °parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire-existence Dh 415=Sn 639. bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures, gratification of desires S I.74 (sāratta -°esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Th 2, 464; It 94 (-°esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures); J II.65; -bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin I.203, 287; II.136, 149; D III.124, 125; Miln 243, 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti-beings It 94; as ten kinds A V.177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy S I.78; cp. A IV.281, 438; S IV.333 sq.; A III.351; Th 2, 486; J III.154. ye keci kāmesu asaððatā janā avītarāgā idha k-bhogino (etc.) A II.6, cp. II.17. kāmabhogī kām'ārāmo kāmarato kāma-sammudita A IV.439; -°seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) A II.244; -bhojin=°bhogin Ud 65; -magga the path of sensuous pleasures J V.67; -matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures J VI.231; -mucchā sensual stupor or languor S IV.189; A II.11; Dhs 1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); -yoga application to sensuous enjoyment, one of the four yogas, viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā° (cp. āsavā) A II.10; only the first two at It 95; cp. D III.230, 276; S V.59; DhsA 166; -rata delighting in pleasures J V.255; -rati amorous enjoyment (as arati) Th 2, 58 and 141; J I.211; III.396; IV.107. -n'atthi nissaraṇaṃ loke kiṃ vivekena kāhasi bhuðjassu kratiyo māhu pacchānutāpinī S I.128. mā pamādam anuyuðjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaṃ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaṃ sukhan S I.25=Dh 27=Th 1, 884; -rasa the taste of love J II.329; III.170; V.451; -rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs 1131, 1460; Nett 28; M I.433 sq.; D III.254, 282; S I.22= A III.411; S I.13, 53; III.155; Th 2, 68, 77; PvA 6; see also k-chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Sn 139 (°ṃ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k-rāgavyāpāda Dhs 362; SnA 205; -rūpa a form assumed at will VvA 80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vbh 426; -lāpin talking as one likes D I.91 (=DA I.257 yadicchaka-bhāṇin); -lābha the grasping of pleasures, in °abhijappin A III.353; -loka the world of pleasures=kāmāvacara, q. v. Sdhp 233, 261; -vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean J II.255= III.409=Vv 33191; J V.157; Vv 163; VvA 80, 143, 146; -vasika under the influence of passions J II.215; -vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma° vyāpāda° vihiṃsā°) D III.215, 226; M I.114; A I.68; J I.63; Pāli Text Society 487 Pāli-English Dictionary III.18, 375; IV.490; VI.29; It 82, 115; Vbh 362; Miln 310; -vega the impulse of lust J VI.268; -sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q. v. under sagga J I.105; II.130; III.258; IV.490; VI.29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enumd; cp. k-āvacara; -sankappa- bahula full of aspirations after pleasure A III.145, 259; D III.215; -sanga attachment to passion Ud 75; saððā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaððās (as vitakka) D I.182; III.215; M II.262; S I.126; Vbh 363; Th 1, 1039; virata k° āya S I.53=Sn 175; -saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; °ātiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust A III.373 (+ kāmarāgaṃ virājetvā); -sineha love of pleasures Dhs 1097 (also as °sneha M I.241; S IV.188; A II.10); see k-chanda; -sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness, valued as mīlha°, puthujjana°, anariya°, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaṃ ime pañca k-guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati k-sukhaṃ A IV.415; S IV.225; varying with . . . somanassaṃ ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo M I.85, 92, etc. - As kāma° and nekkhamma° A I.80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k° ṃ pahāya Dh 346= S I.77; M III.230; Sn 59 (see Nd2 s. v.). See also S IV.208; M II.43; Th 2, 483; Vv 617; J II.140; III.396; V.428; kāmasukhallik'ānuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment S IV.330; V.421; Vin I.10; D III.113; Nett 110; Vism 5, 32; -sutta N. of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; -seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas D II.258; -sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure J II.180; III.464; -sevin adj. to prec. J IV.118; -hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava-section, foll. on kāmaguṇā M I.86, etc., of wealth S I.74; -hetuka caused by passion Th 2, 355=ThA 243; J V.220, 225. Kāmaka {Kamaka} (adj.) [fr. kāma] only -° in neg. akāmaka unwilling, undesirous D I.115; M I.163; Vin III.13; J IV.31; cp. kāmuka. Kāmaṇḍaluka {Kamandaluka} (adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q. v.) S IV.312 cp. A V.263. Kāmatā {Kamata} (f.) [abstr. fr. kāma] desire, longing, with noun: viveka° . . . to be alone PvA 43; anattha° J IV.14; with inf. PvA 65 (gahetu°); J III.362 (vināsetu°); Mhvs 5, 260; DhA I.91. Kāmin {Kamin} (adj.) [fr. kāma] 1. having kāma, i. e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one's own desires in kāma-kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis, the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv I.33=PvA 16), as a reward for former merit; usually in combn with bhuðjāmi paribhogavant (Pv IV.346) or as "nandino devalokasmiṃ modanti kkāmino" A II.62=It 112; Th 1, 242; J III.154; Pv II.115; Pv III.116 (expl. "as enjoying after their hearts' content all pleasures they can wish for"). - 2. giving kāma, i. e. benevolent, fulfilling people's wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Sn 986. akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Sn 1096, syn. of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd2 4). Kāmuka {Kamuka} (adj. -n.) [cp. Sk. kāmuka] desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover J V.306; Mhbv 3. Kāmeti {Kameti} [den. fr. kāma] to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Th 1, 93; J III.154; IV.167; V.480; - 2. to desire a woman, to be in love with D I.241; M II.40; J II.226; V.425; VI.307, 326, etc. - pp. kāmita in kāmita-vatthu the desired object PvA 119; VvA 122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable PvA 16 (v. l. for kaðða, better), 73; VvA 127; and kāmetabba J. V.156 (=kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaṃ) kāmayamānassa Sn 766 (=icchamānassa, etc., Nd1); J VI.172=Nett 69. Pāli Text Society 488 Pāli-English Dictionary Kāya {Kaya} [der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya] group, heap, collection, aggregate, body. - Definitions and synonyms. SnA 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn 772), deha, sandeha (Dh 148=Th 1, 20), nāvā (Dh 369), ratha (S IV.292), dhaja, vammīka (M I.144), kuṭikā (Th 1, 1); and at KhA 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraṃ hi asucisaðcayato kucchitānaṃ vā kesādīnaṃ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. . . . It is equivalent to deha: S I.27; PvA 10; to sarīra KhA 38; PvA 63, to nikāya (deva°) D III.264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti . . . Nd2 257. Literal meaning.-1. mahājana-kāya a collection of people, a crowd S IV.191; V.170; VvA 78; -bala° a great crowd Sn p. 105; DhA I.193, 398. - 2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) D I.56=M I.517=S III.211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana's theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense-organs, as vedanā-kāya, saððā°, viððāṇa°, phassa°, etc. S III.60, 61; D III.243, 244; taṇhā° D III.244; appl. to hatthi°, ratha°, patti°, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers S I.72. - A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at J II.91, viz. camma°, dāru°, loha°, ayo°, vāluka°, udaka°, phalaka°, or "bodies" (great masses, substances) of skin, wood, copper, iron, sand, water, and planks. - Var. other combns: Asura° A I.143; D III.7; Ābhassara° ("world of radiance") D I.17=III.29, 84; Deva° S I.27, 30; D III.264 (°nikāya); dibbā kāyā A I.143; Tāvatiṃsa° D III.15. Applied meaning.-I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four "great" elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (D I.55). This "heap," in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements, and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs §§ 613- 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought DhsA. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f. I. (Physical).-(a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati-paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection, the recognition of the true character of "body" comes first (see Vbh 193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyānupassī . . . contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: "he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth," etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh III.). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e. g. D II.293, 294; III.104, 141; A III.323=V.109; S IV.111=V.278; Vbh 193, 194; Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhānupassī . . . A III.142 sq.; V.109 (under asubhasaððā); It 81; cp. kāye aniccānupassī S IV.211; and kāyagatā sati. - This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaṃ . . . kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā-pettika-sambhavo odana-kummās'upacayo, etc. "this body has form (i. e. is material, visible), is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending, to breaking up and decay," etc., with inferences D I.55=S III.207; S II.94; IV.194; V.282, 370; D I.76, 209; M I.144, 500; II.17; A IV.386=S IV.83. (b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) S II.231; also at Pv I.83; as depending on nourishment (āhāra-ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; A II.145 (with taṇhā, māna, methuna); as needing attention: see °parihārika. As saviððāṇaka, having consciousness A IV.53= S II.252=S III.80, 103, 136, 169; cp. āyu usmā ca viððānaṃ yadā kāyaṃ jahant'imaṃ S III.143. As in need of breathing assāsa-passāsa S V.330, 336; as tired, fatigued (kilanta-kāya) kilanta-kāyā kilanta-cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti "tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of Pāli Text Society 489 Pāli-English Dictionary this assembly" (D I.20; III.32≈); in other connection PvA 43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto D III.255 sq.;=A IV.332; S V.317; M I.116; jiṇṇassa me . . . kāyo na paleti Sn 1144; ātura-kāyo S III.1 (cittaṃ anāturaṃ); paripuṇṇa-k° suruci sujāto, etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Sn 548= Th 1, 818; cp. mahā-k° (of Brahmins) Sn 298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiṃsa mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni . . . Sn p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma-kāyo "author and speaker of Doctrine," in the same sense Brahma-kāyo "the best body" (i. e. of Doctrine) D III.84 (Dial. iii, 81). (c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyānupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object. - kāye anicc'ānupassī S IV.211 (and vay'ānupassī, nirodh'ānupassī), so also asubhānupassī It 81; kāyað ca bhindantaṃ ñatvā It 69; evaṃdhammo (i. e. a heap of changing elements) A III.324; aciraṃ vat' ayaṃ kāyo paṭhaviṃ adhisessati chuddho apetaviððāṇo niratthaṃ va kalingaraṃ Dh 41. pittaṃ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Sn 198. As bahu-dukkho bahuādīnavo A V.109; as anicca dukkha, etc. M I.500; II.17; kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā S IV.62; V.320; dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi S II.94. - This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: S V.370. Represented as pūti° foul S I.131; III.120. - Bdhgh. at Vism 240 defines kāya as "catu-mahābhūtika pūti-kāya" (cp. similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo, pūtiko bhavati kāyo). (d) Similes.-Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) S IV.83=A IV.386; a city (nagara) S IV.194; a cart (ratha) S IV.292; an anthill (vammīka) M I.144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ' ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā "knowing that the body is like froth" Dh 46; kumbh'ûpamaṃ kāyaṃ imaṃ viditvā nagar'ûpamaṃ cittaṃ idaṃ ṭhapetvā Dh 40: the body is as fragile as a water-pot. (e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā . . ., i. e. after death . . . upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e. g. D I.82, 107, 143, 162, 245, 247, 252; III.96, 97, 146, 181, 235; M I.22; S I.94; III.241; Dh 140; It 12, 14; J I.152; PvA 27, etc., etc. Cp. also IV. II. (Psychological).-As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni). It is ajjhattika as sense (i. e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā) or in sensing (viððeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e. g. kāya-viððeyyā phoṭṭhabbā D I.245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā D III.226, 250, 269; M I.33; II.42; S IV.104, 112; kāyena phusitvā A V.11; kāyo c'eva phoṭṭhabbā ca D III.102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy; the whole being, the "inner sense," or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti-sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaṃ eva kāyaṃ vivekajena pīti-sukhena abhisandeti . . . "His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness" D I.73 sq.=M I.277; A II.41, etc. - A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i. e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This "peace" of the body (may be translated as "my senses, my spirits" in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati D III.241, 288; S IV.351; M I.37; A III.21, 285; IV.176; V.3, 333; Vbh 227. - Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p°, passadhakāyā sukhaṃ . Vin. Texts II.224: "all my frame will be at peace," or "individuality"; see note) passaddhakāya-sankhāra mentioned at A V.29 sq. is one of the ten ariya-vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi-analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of Pāli Text Society 490 Pāli-English Dictionary other passages: kāya-chando -°sneho -°anvayatā pahīyati M I.500; ajjhattað ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaṃ virājaye Sn 203; kāye avigata-rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) D III.238=A III.249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo S III.106; A III.69. III. (Ethical).-Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man's personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct. Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action kat) e)coxh/n, character in its pregnant sense. Kāya as one of a triad.-Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yað ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taṃ hi tassa sakaṃ hoti tað ca ādāya gacchati S I.93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaṃsanti pacca sagge pamodati S I.102. - So also at A I.63; Sn 232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a° vācāya a° cittena S II.231=271; IV.112. - With su- and duccarita the combn is extremely frequent, e. g. S I.71, 72; M I.22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kāya(v°., m.°) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. - k°. v°. m°. hiṃsati S I.165; saṃsappati A V.289 sq.; kāye (v°. m°.) sati kāya-saðcetanā-hetu uppajjati S II.39 sq.; The variations of k- in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k°. v°. m°. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d'être of kamma: yaṃ . . . etarahi kammaṃ karoti kāyena v. m. idaṃ vuccati navakammaṃ S IV.132. - Passages with reference to good works are e. g. D III.245; A I.151; V.302 sq.; (see also Kamma II.2 b. c.). - With reference to evil: S III.241, 247; A I.201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaṃ kataṃ Pv II.13 and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m. S II.151; pāpaṃ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiðcana sabbaloke S I.12=31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n'atthi dukkaṭaṃ saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dh 391=Nett 183. Kāyena saṃvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saṃvaro manasā saṃvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saṃvaro Dh 361=S I.73= Miln 399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaṃvutā na te Māravasānugā, na te Mārassa paccagū S I.104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaṃvuto kāyena ca akusalaṃ na kayirā Dh 281=Nett 183. Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: S I.172 (°gutta) M I.461 (rakkhita and a°); Pv I.22 (°saððatā and opp.); Vism 28 (k°-vacī-kamma); PvA 98. Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: A I.54; Dh 259, 391; Sn 206, 407; kāye avītarāgo M I.101; A III.249; IV.461 sq.; °-samācāra S V.354; kāyaṃ paṇidhāya Ps I.175; Vbh 244=252; bhāvita° and a° M I.239; A I.250; III.106 sq., cp.: kāya-ppakopaṃ rakkheyya, kāyena saṃvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaṃ hitvā, kāyena sucaritaṃ care Dh 231. Ahiṃsakā ye munayo niccaṃ kāyena saṃvutā Dh 225. Kāya in combn with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ . . . S V.74; anikaṭṭha-kāyo nikaṭṭha-citto A II.137; sāraddha-kāyo sankiliṭṭha-citto A V.93=95= 97; bhāvita-kāyo, °sīlo, °citto, °paððo S IV.111; A IV.111; V.42 sq. Apakassa kāyaṃ apakassa cittaṃ S II.198. Kāya-cittapassaddhi, etc. Dhs §§ 29-51. In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as=the cetasikas (mental properties, or the vedanā, saððā and sankhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combn kilantakāya, kilanta-citta under kilamati. IV. (Various).-Kāyena (i. e. "visibly") aððamaððaṃ passituṃ A II.61; as nānatta° and ekatta° at A IV.39 =Nd2 570. The relation between rūpa-kāya (=cātumahābhūtika), and nāmakāya, the mental compound (=vedanā saððā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps I.183 sq., see also S II.24. K. is anattā, i. e. k. has no soul A V.109; S IV.166. n'āyaṃ kāyo tumhākaṃ n'āpi paresaṃ, purāṇaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ . . . "neither is this body yours, nor anyone else's: it is (the appearance of) former karma" S II.64, 65=Nd2 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍhadissamānena S I.156. - Manomaya-kāya a body made by the mind (cp. VvA 10 and DA I.110, 120, 222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna S V.282 sq.; manomaya pīti-bhakkha sayaṃpabha D I.17=VvA 10; manomayaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināya . . . D I.77; m° sabbangapaccangī D I.34, 77, 186, 195. - Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va Pāli Text Society 491 Pāli-English Dictionary saṃvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i. e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc. (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) S V.265= D I.78=A I.170: see also S V.283, 284. - In the various stages of Saṃsāra; kāyaṃ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body S IV.60, 400; cp. S III.241 (ossaṭṭha-kāya); referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv II.1211. -anga a limb of the body, kāy'angaṃ vāc'angaṃ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) J III.354; DhsA 93, 240; -ānupassin in combn kāye kāyānupassī "realizing in the body an aggregate" D II.94, 100, 291 sq.; D III.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M I.56; A I.39, 296; II.256; III.449; IV.300, 457 sq.; S IV.211; V.9, 75, 298, 329 sq.; Vbh 193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: °anupassanā Ps. I.178, 184; II.152, 163, 232; °passita Nett. 123; -āyatana the sense of touch D III.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 613, 653, 783;-indriya same D III.239; Dhs 585, 613, 972; -ujjukatā straightness of body (+citta°, of thought) Dhs 53, 277, 330; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20. -ûpaga going to a (new) body S II.24; -kamma "bodily action," deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above) D I.250; III.191, 245, 279; M I.415; III.206; A I.104; III.6, 9, 141 sq.; V.289; Th 2, 277; Ps II.195; Dhs 981, 1006; Vbh 208, 321, 366; Pug 41; Bdhd 69; DhsA 68, 77, 344. -kammaððatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs 46, 277, 326. -kammanta=°kamma, in comb. °sampatti and °sandosa A V.292, 294, 297; M I.17. -kali "the misfortune of having a body"=this miserable body Th 2, 458, 501; ThA 282, 291; -kasāva bodily impurity or depravity A I.112; gata "relating to the body," always combined with sati in the same sense as °anupassin (see above) S I.188; M. III.92; A I.44; Sn 340 (cp. SnA 343); Th 1, 468, 1225; J I.394; Dh 293= Nett 39; Dh 299; Miln 248, 336, 393; Vism 111, 197, 240 sq. -gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saṃsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṃsaccābhinivesa D III.230= S V.59=Dhs 1135=Vbh 374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; -gandha spelling for °gantha at Nett 115- 119; -gutta one who guards his body, i. e. controls his action (+vacīgutta) S I.172=Sn 74; -gutti the care or protection of the body Vin I.295; J II.162; -citta body and mind: °ābādha physical and mental disease J IV.166; see other combns above; -ḍāha fever Vin I.214; -tapana chastisement of body, curbing one's material desires, asceticism PvA 98. -thāma physical strength J III.114; -daratha bodily distress J V.397; VI.295; -daḷha bodily vigour Vin II.76, 313; -dukkha bodily pain (+ceto°) M III.288; -duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. °kamma) D III.52, 96, 111, 214; A I.48; Dh 231; It 54, 58; Dhs 300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20; -duṭṭhulla unchastity Th 1, 114; -dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J I.276; IV.14; VvA 73; DhA IV.85; Bdhd 69; -dhātu the "element" of body, i. e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs 613; Kvu 12; -pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+vacī°, mano°) Dh 231=DhA 330; -pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, "swaggering" Vin II.213; -paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S IV.293; attached or bound to the body J III.377; V.254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin III.123, IV.214; -payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DA I.72=DhsA 98; -pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation S V.320=A II.198; -parihārika tending or protecting the body D I.71=A II.209=Pug 58; Vism 65 (cīvara); DA I.207; -pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general DhsA 306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173n, 198n; -passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses S IV.125 (cp. IV.351 and above); V.66, 104; Dhs 40, 277, 320; DhsA 130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; -pāgabbhiya "bodyforwardness" immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women J II.32; V.449; -pāgabbhiniya same J I.288; -pāguððatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelaðða, apathy Dhs 46, 277, 326; Vism 466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -phandita (nt.) bodily activity J III.25; -baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA I.207; -bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin I.46, 51; II.118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M I.237; -bala physical strength PvA 30; bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action D III.219; M I.237; cp. Miln 85; macchera "body-selfishness," pampering the body Th 1, 1033; -mudutā pliability of Pāli Text Society 492 Pāli-English Dictionary sense=°kammaððatā Dhs 44, 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; -muni a sage with regard to action It 56; -moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action It 56; 67; D III.220; A I.273; Nd2 514; -ratha the "carriagelike" body J VI.253; -lahutā buoyancy of sense= °muduta, same loci; -vanka crookedness of action A I.112; -vikāra change of position of the body J III.354; -vijambhana alertness DhA IV.113; -viññatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one's appearance, appl. chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs 585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA 82, 301; Miln 229, 230; Vism 448; Bdhd 69, 70; -viððāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D III.243; Dhs 556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln 59; Vbh 180; °dhātu element of touchconsciousness Dhs 560; Vbh 88; Kvu 12; -viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phoṭṭhabba, see above) D I.245; II.281; III.234; M I.85, 144; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; Vbh 14; Kvu 210; Miln 270; -vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appld to °vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA 323; -viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J I.289; DhsA 165; -vūpakāsa= °viveka D III.285 (+citta° "singleness" of heart); -veyyāvacca menial duties J I.12; °kara a servant J II.334; -veyyāvaṭika same J VI.418; Sn p. 104; DhA I.27; °kamma id. J V.317 (=veyyāvacca) DhsA 160; -saṃsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin III.121, 190; J VI.566; -sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp. °anupassin) D III.105, 254; M I.478=Pug 14, 29; M II.113; III.45; A I.74; 118; IV.10, 451; V.23; Ps II.52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism 93, 387. -sankhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin III.71; S II.40; III.125; IV.293; A I.122; II.158, 231; Ps I.184, 186; Vism 530. -sangaha control of body (+citta°) Nett 91; -saðcetanā (-hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A II.157; Vism 530 (+vacī°, mano°). -samācāra (good) conduct as regards one's actions D II.279 (+vacī°) M I.272 sq.; II.113; III.45; S V.354; A III.186 sq. -sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29; -samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) D III.243; S V.351; Dhs 585, 616, 651, 684; °ja arisen through touch or sensibility D III.244; Dhs 445, 558; -sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three °kammāni (vacī°, mano°) D III.52, 96, 111, 169, 215; It 55, 59, 99, Dhs 1306; -suci purity of body, i. e. of action (+vacī°, ceto°) A I.273; It 55; -soceyya purification of body (+vacī°, mano°) D III.219; A I.271; V 264, 266; It 55. Kāyika {Kayika} (adj.) [fr. kāya] 1. belonging to the body, i. e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i. e. done by the body (=acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaṃ physical happiness (opp. cetasika°) S V.209; A I.81; dukkhaṃ D II.306; M I.302 (opp. cetasikaṃ); kāyikaṃ (sc. dhammaṃ) sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaṃ) Vin II.248. In comb. with vācasika also at S I.190; Pug 21; Vism 18 (of anācara); PvA 119 (of saṃyama, control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd2 219=SnA 86. 2. -° (of devas) belonging to the company of-: ° D I.220; gandhabba° PvA 119. Kāyūra & Kāyura {Kayura} [see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.] 1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh'ālankāra Pv; bhuj° Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana J III.437); a bracelet or necklace Vin II.106; J III.437; IV.92; Pv III.93; Vv 362. - 2. adj. as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia "regis" J V.289=486. Kāyūrin {Kayurin} (adj.) [fr. last] wearing bracelets Pv III.91. Kār {Kar} -secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations. Kāra {Kara} [fr. kār-, cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ=kir to praise; also Vedic °kāra in brāhma°, fr. kṛ] 1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, Pāli Text Society 493 Pāli-English Dictionary homage: kāra-paṇṇaka J VI.24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiṃ āvahati "even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods" PvA 6. -kāraka one who performs a religious duty D I.61 (=DA I.170). (b) doing, manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k° pavattamānaṃ phalaṃ "as you have done so will be the fruit" PvA 45. - 2. (-°) (a) the production or application of, i. e. the state or quality of . . .: atta° one's own state =ahaṃ kāra, individuality; para° the personality of others A III.337; citti° reflection, thought PvA 26; see e. g. andha° darkness, sak° homage, etc. - balakkārena forcibly PvA 68. - (b) as ttg. the item, i. e. particle, letter, sound or word, e. g. ma-kāra the letter m PvA 52; ca-kāra the particle ca PvA 15; sa-kāra the sound sa SnA 23. - (c) (adj. -n.) [cp. kara] one who does, handles or deals with: ayakāra iron-smith Miln 331. Kāraka {Karaka} (usually -°) the doer (of): Vin II.221 (capu-capu°); sāsana° he who does according to (my) advice Sn 445; Bdhd 85 sq.; - f. kārikā: veyyāvacca° a servant PvA 65 (text reads °tā); as n. the performance of (-°), service: dukkara-kārikā the performance of evil deeds S I.103; Th 2, 413 (=ThA 267). -agga-kārikā first test, sample Vin III.80. Kāraṇa {Karana} (nt.) [in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2=Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause]. 1. -(a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma: M III.181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaṃ kārāpeti "he makes somebody perform the task." Pass, kāraṇaṃ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha-bandhana "the group of five" (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 "inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion"), a means of punishment in Niraya (q. v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln trsl. I.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At DhA III.70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa-dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning "punishment" also at J IV.87 (tantarajjukaṃ k°ṃ katvā), whereas at J VI.416 k. is directly paraphrased by "maraṇa," as much as "killing." Often spelt karaṇa, q. v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Miln 185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaṃ. See karaṇa for further reference. - Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ajja kāressati "what task will he impose on me to-day?" A V.324; as pañcavidhabandhana K° A I.141, PvA 251, Nd2 304III. - As adj. °kāraṇa in dāruṇa° "being obliged to go through the dreadful trial" PvA 221. - (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ'ākāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small DhA I.385. Cp. also kāraṇaṃ karoti to try M I.444. - (c) a trick (i. e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) J II.325 (ānaðja°); Miln 201 (ākāsa-gamana°). 2. - (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k°-bhūta being the cause of . . . PvA 15;-(b) (intellectual) cause, reason Miln 150; DhA I.389; esp. as -°: arodana° the reason for not crying PvA 63; asocana° same, ibid. 62; āgamana° the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81, 106. =pariyatti, DhA. 36.=attha, SA on I.215, SnA. I.238-instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs PvA 195; tena k° therefore ibid. 40 - abl. kāranā by means of, through, by (=hetu or nissāya) PvA 27; imasmā k° therefore PvA 40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha-kāraṇā Nd2) for the purpose of some object or advantage Sn 75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid.sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) PvA 109. Kāraṇika [der. fr. prec.] the meaning ought to be "one who is under a certain obligation" or "one who dispenses certain obligations." In usu° S II.257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow-maker, fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be °kāraka. {Karanika} Pāli Text Society Kāraṇḍava1 494 Pāli-English Dictionary [of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa] chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava° A IV.169 (chaff); samaṇa° ibid. - In passage kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha, kasambuṃ apakassatha A IV.172=Sn 281=Miln 414 trsld by Rh. Davids Miln trsl. II.363 "get rid of filth, put aside rubbish from you," expl. SnA 311 by kacavara (q. v.). Rh. D's note3 loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given. {Karandava} Kāraṇḍava2 {Karandava} [cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava] a sort of duck Vv 358 (expld as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose). Kārā {Kara} (f.) [cp. Sk. kārā] confinement, captivity, jail, in °bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin I.75. Kārāpaka {Karapaka} [fr. kārāpeti] a schemer, inventor J VI.333. Kārāpaṇa {Karapana} see kāreti. Kārāpita {Karapita} [pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti] made to do J VI.374. Kārikā {Karika} see kāraka see kāraka Kāritā {Karita} = kārikā (performance); see pāripūri°. Kārin {Karin} (-°) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī "as he says so he does" D III.135, Sn 357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma°, kibbisa°, khaṇḍa°, chidda°, dukkaṭa°, dvaya°, paccakkha°, pubba°, sakkacca°, sampajāna°, etc. Kāriya {Kariya} (adj.) [grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti] to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good It 18. Kāruñña {Karunna} (nt.) [fr. karuṇa] compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) S II.199; A III.189; Vism 300; PvA 75; Sdhp 509. Kāruññatā {Karunnata} (f.) compassionateness S I.138. Kāruṇika {Karunika} (adj.) [fr. karuṇa] compassionate, merciful Pv II.113; PvA 16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā°: of great mercy Sdhp 330, 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha "the Saviour of great mercy" in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv. Kāreti {Kareti} (Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. -kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra°) DhA I.416. For details see karoti IV.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita. Kāla (and Kāḷa) - Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack, misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death, ghosts, etc. - There are two etymologies suggestible, both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) {Kala} Pāli Text Society 495 Pāli-English Dictionary kāla=Sk. kāla, blue-black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalanka, spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. kelaino/s, Mhg. hilwe mist)=Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. khli/s spot, and khla/s dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness. - (b) see below, under note. Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. maúrgins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). - Note. The definition of colour-expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour-sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam > gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of "shining" is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā=Gr. skia/ shadow as against Ags. h&amacremacr;ven "blue" (E. heaven) and Ohg. skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its lightreflecting (or lightabsorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (aðjana) black (=sukāḷa) may readily be called "brilliant." In the same way kāla, combined with other colour-words of black connotation does not need to mean "black," but may mean simply a kind of black, i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. śyāma (dark-grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya. That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla=Sk. śāra, mottled, speckled=Lat. cærulus, black-blue and perhaps cælum "the blue" (cp. heaven)=Gr. khru/los the blue icebird. (On k > s cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilamati > śramati, kilissati > ślis°, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra. - The definition of kāḷa as jhām'angārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: DhsA 317 and PvA 90. 1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumn of colours Vv 221 (see VvA 111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: mangura-cchavi samano G. "The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin" M I.246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā manguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at D I.193= M. II.40; kāḷa-sāma at Vin IV.120 is to be taken as darkgrey. - Of the dark half of the month: see °pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe "on the next new moon day" Vin I.176. - of Petas: Pv II.41 (kāḷī f.); PvA 561 (°rūpa); of the dog of Yama (°sunakha) PvA 151. - In other connn: kāḷavaṇṇa-bhūmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin I.48=II.209. -añjana black collyrium VinI .203; -ānusārī black, (polished?) Anusāri ("a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood" Vin. Texts II.51) Vin I.203; S III.156=V.44= A V.22; -ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln trsl. II.364; cp. blacksmith > silversmith) Miln 414, 415; -kañjaka a kind of Asuras, Titans D III.7; J V.187; PvA 272; -kaṇṇī "black-cared," as an unlucky quality. Cp. III.611; J I.239; IV.189; V.134, 211; VI.347; DhA I.307; II.26; the vision of the "black-eared" is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e. g. at DhA III.31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as "witch" PvA 272; DhA III.38, 181; as kk. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen J II.153; -kaṇṇika= prec.; -kabara spotted, freckled J VI.540; -kesa (adj.) with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa-kesa) rare, e. g. at J VI.578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa-kesa "having an over-abundance of brilliant hair" said of Gotama. This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash-Saga, which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (=polished, dark) hair (=rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q. v.) in similar Pāli Text Society 496 Pāli-English Dictionary combinations (e. g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā). On this feature of the Sun-god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33-46. - The double application of su° does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as eu)plokamo/s or duh° in combns like sudubbala PvA 149, sudullabha VvA 20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DA I.284=suṭṭhu-k°, añjana-vaṇṇa k° va hutvā; cp. kaṇh-añjana J V.155). Cp. also siniddha-nīla-mudu-kuñcita-keso J I.89, and sukaṇhakaṇha J V.202.susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: M II.66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu° the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at M I.82=A II.22 =J II.57; M I.163=A I.68=S I.9, 117; also in Childers' (relying on Burnouf), or even susū k° at S IV.111; the only passages showing the right reading susu-k° are D I.115, M I.463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909, 212 has both. -kokila the black (brown) cuckoo VvA 57; -jallika (kāḷi° for kāḷa°) having black drops or specks (of dirt) A I.253; -daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp 287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); -pakkha the dark side, i. e. moonless fortnight of the month A II.18; -° cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight PvA 55; -° ratti a moonless night VvA 167; (opp. dosina r.) -meyya a sort of bird J VI.539; -loṇa black (dark) salt Vin I.202 (Bdhgh. pakati-loṇa, natural salt); -loha "black metal," iron ore Miln 267; -valli a kind of creeper Vism 36, 183. -sīha a special kind of lion J IV.208. sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter's measuring line J II.405; Miln 413; also N. of a Purgatory (nivaya) J V.266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76-78; -hatthin "black elephant," an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp 195. 2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv II.941 (=pāto PvA 128), kālassa in the morning (gen. of time), early VvA 256. Cp. paccūsa-kāle at dawn DhA III.242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv I.63 (opp. sāyaṃ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd2 631. - (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time DhA I.319; evaṃ gacchante kāle as time went on PvA 54, 75, 127, etc. -kālaṃ for a time Vin I.176 (spelt kāḷaṃ); kaðci kālaṃ some time yet VvA 288; ettakaṃ kālaṃ for a long time PvA 102.-kālena kālaṃ (1) from time to time PvA 151; VvA 255, 276; - (2) continuously, constantly A IV. 45; Pug 11 (+samayena samayaṃ); D I.74 (: but expld at DA I.218 by kāle kāle in the sense of "every fortnight or every ten days"). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. ai)ei/) Sn 73 (expl. in Nd2 by niccakāle under sadā; but at SnA 128 by phāsu-kālena "in good time"); -kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly VvA 352. See also cira°, sabba°. - (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time, or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity. Cp. Gr. kairi/s and w(=ra; or (3) time of death, death. - (1) Mealtime: PvA 25; VvA 6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaṃ bhattaṃ "it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready" D I.119=226; Sn p. 111; and in kālaṃ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner) D I.109, 226; Sn p. 111; PvA 22, 141; VvA 173. -date: kālato from the date or day of . . ., e. g. diṭṭha° paṭṭhāya "from the day that she first saw her" VvA 206; gihī° paṭṭhāya "from the day of being a layman" PvA 13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu° favourable time (of the year) Vin I.299; II.173; kālaṃ jānāti "he knows the proper time" A IV.114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities A II.140; yassa kālaṃ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i. e. goodbye D I.106, 189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism 578 as past, present, and future. -kāla° (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism 229 (°maraṇa timely death). - Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune D I.205; akāla-cārin going (begging) at the improper time Sn 386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Miln 144. -kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin I.199, 200; J II.133; Sn 386. akāle in the wrong season VvA 288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment A II.140; Sn 326, 387 (=yutta kālena SnA 374); Pv I.53 (=ṭhitakālena PvA 26); Pug 50; It 42; KhA 144 (=khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day, as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism 236), 497 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary the "last hour," cp. h)mar, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appld not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta°, deva°, etc.) as well, in phrase kālaṃ karoti "he does his time=he has fulfilled his time" Vin III.80; Sn 343, DhA I.70; and frequently elsewhere; cp. -kata, -kiriyā. - As death in kālaṃ kankhati to await the appointed time S I.187; Sn 516 (cp. kankhati) and in dern kālika. - Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta°, yaðða°, vappa°. antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while PvA 13; na kālantare at once PvA 19; -kata (adj.) dead Sn 586, 590; in combn petā kālakatā "the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Sn 807; Pv I.57; I.121. Also as kālankata Pv II.79; Vv 809; Vism 296. -kiriyā death (often combd with maraṇa) M II.108; A I.22, 77, 261 (as bhaddikā, cp. A III.293); IV.320; Sn 694; Pv I.1012 (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); DhA II.36; IV.77. -gata=°kata PvA 29, 40. -ððū knowing the proper time for . . . (c. dat. or loc.) Sn 325; described at A IV.113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaððū, dhamma°, matta°, k°, parisa°) A III.148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (=prec.+atta°, puggala°) D III.252, 283; as quality of the Tathāgata D III.134=Nd2 276; Pug 50. -ððutā n. abstr. to prec. A II.101; (p)pavedana announcement of death (-time) Th 1, 563=J I.118=Vism 389=DhA I.248. -bhojana in a° eating at the improper time S V.470; -vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla° bhūta° attha° dhamma° vinaya° under sīla No. 7: D I.4; III.175; DA I.76; A II.22, 209; Pug 58; vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It 41. -sataṃ (°sahassaṃ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism 243. Kālika {Kalika} (adj.) [fr. kāla 2] belonging to time, in time, as sabba-kālika always in time, cp. Gr. w(rai_os Vv 392; with time, i. e. gradual, slowly, delayed S I.117=Nd2 645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika S II.58; S I.117= IV.41=339=V.343;-2. subject to time, i. e. temporal, vanishing PvA 87;-3. unusual, out of season Miln 114 (cp. akāla). - See also tāva-kālika. Kālīya {Kaliya} a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin I.203 (see note on p. 381). Kālusiya {Kalusiya} (and Kālussiya ) (nt.) [der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla] darkness, obscurity DA I.95; PvA 124 (cakkhu°); fig. (dosa°) VvA 30. {Kalussiya} Kāḷa {Kala} see kāla 1. Kāḷaka {Kalaka} (adj.) [fr. kāḷa] black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs 617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, odāta, k°, maðjeṭṭha; of a robe A II.241; f. kāḷikā VvA 103; - (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata° without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D I.110=A IV.186=210=213; vicita° (of rice) "with the black grains removed" D I.105; A IV.231; Miln 16; vigata° (same) A III.49. - A black spot (of hair) J V.197 (=kaṇha-r-iva). - Fig. of character DhA IV.172. Kāḷārika {Kalarika} see kaḷārika. Kāveyya {Kaveyya} (nt.) [grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya] 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations D I.11 (=DA I.95 kabba-karaṇa) 2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) A I.72=III.107. -matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming S I.110, 196. Pāli Text Society 498 Pāli-English Dictionary Kāsa1 {Kasa} [cp. Sk. kāśa] a kind of reed, Saccharum spontaneum S III.137. Kāsa2 {Kasa} [cp. Sk. kāsa] cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā A V.110=Nd2 3041. Kāsāya & Kāsāva {Kasaya} {Kasava} (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown=Pāli sāma, with kā=kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown, i. e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla] 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v° acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the "homeless state" D I.60, 61, 63, 115; M II.67; A I.107; II.208; IV.118, 274, 280; Pug 57; Nd2 172. °vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Sn 64; cp. ɔnivattha J III.179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner: see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāyanivāsana J III.41; kāsāviya J IV.447); PvA 20; °vāsin dressed in yellow Sn 487. - 2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin I.287; S IV.190=V.53=301; Dh 9, 10=Th 1, 969, 970=J II.198 =V.50; Miln 11. °kaṇṭhā (pl.) the "yellow necks" those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dh 307 (= DhA III.480)=It 43; °pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vbh 247; Miln 19. Kāsāvaka {Kasavaka} [fr. kāsāva] a yellow robe DhA II.86. Kāsāviya {Kasaviya} [fr. kāsāva] one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya-vattha) J IV.447 (=cora-ghātaka C.). Kāsika {Kasika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha-kāsika] belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in °uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv I.108; J VI.49 (where to be read kāsik'uttama for kāsi-kuttama). °vattha Benares muslin A I.248; III.50; Pug 34; Miln 2; DhA I.417; Vism 115. Kāsu {Kasu} [cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ] a hole; only in cpd. angārakāsu a cinderhole, a fire-pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders J I.232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S IV.56, 188; Sn 396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā angārakās'ûpamā metaphor A IV.224=V.175; see also kāma. Ki° {Ki°} 2nd. stem of interr. pron. (cp. ka° ku°); 1. in oblique cases of ko (kaḥ), as gen. kissa. loc. kismiṃ & kiṃhi. - 2. in nt. kiṃ what? (cp. Gr. ti/, Lat. quid; ending -m besides -d in kad, as Lat. quom, tum besides quod, id). - 3. in primary derivations, as kittaka, kīva (=Sk. kiyant) which stands in same relation to *qÛi as Lat. quantus to *qÛo; and in secondary derivations from kiṃ, as kiðci, kiðcakkha, kīdisa, etc. Kiṃ {Kim} [nt. of rel. pron. ka] 1. as nt. subst. what? sotānaṃ kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ what is the obstruction? Sn 1032; kiṃ tava patthanāya what is it about your wish, i. e. what good is your wish? VvA 226; kim idaṃ this is what, that is why, therefore, PvA 11; often with su in dubitative question: kiṃ sū'dha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭhaṃ what, then, is the best treasure of man in this world? Sn 181; or with nu: kiṃ nu kho what is it then (in series evañ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho) Nd2 186. - Gen. kissa of what? Pv I.91; II.940 (=kīdisassa) and in kissa hetu on the ground of what i. e. why? Sn 1131; Pv II.81 (=kiṃ nimittaṃ). - Instr. kena by what or how is it that: kena ssu nivuto loko Sn 1032. - Acc. kiṃ: kiṃ kāhasi what will you do? Sn 428; kiṃ āgamma kiṃ ārabbha on what grounds & for what reason? D I.13, 14, etc.; kiṃ nissita to what purpose Sn 1043. - Loc., kismiṃ in what or what about: kismiṃ vivādo "what is the Pāli Text Society 499 Pāli-English Dictionary quarrel about?" D I.237; or kimhi, e. g. kimhi sikkhamāno in what instructed? D II.241 (corresponds to ettha=in this). The ṃ of kiṃ in Sandhi is either elided or contracted or undergoes the usual Sandhi changes; ki ha=kiṃ ha KhA 78, kissa=kiṃ assa Sn 1032; kīdisa (q. v.)=kiṃ disa; kiñci (see below)=kiṃ cid; kiṃ va a little: see kittaka. - 2. as interr. particle, introducing a question=Lat. nonne, Gr. a)/n: kiṃ idāni pi dinne te labheyyuṃ? "Will they receive that which is given now?" PvA 22. So as disjunctive particle in comb. with udāhu (whether-or): kiṃ-udāhu what (about this) . . . or is it (otherwise), is it so . . . or is it not so? (cp. po/teron-h)/, Lat. utrum-an): kim imasmiṃ attabhāve pitaraṃ pucchasi udāhu atīte? "do you enquire about your father in this existence, or in a past one?" PvA 38; kiṃ nakkhattaṃ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiṃ karissasi? "Will you take a holiday or will you work?" VvA 63. - Very often modified and intensified by other exhortative particles: kiṃ aññatra (with abl.) unless (by), except for Sn 206 (see aññatra) kin nu kho why, but why, why in the world? D II.131; J II.159; DhA II.91. As kimo in kimo nu why then? J III.373; V.479 (=kim eva); kimu Sdhp 137; kim pana=nonne: kim pana bhante addasa? "Have you not seen?" D II.132; kim pana tvaṃ maññasi what then do you think=do you not think then, that? . . . J I.171; kim anga how much more or less, i. e. far more, or far less Miln 274 as kim anga pana why then? M III.181; Miln 23; Vism 233; kin ti how then? D II.74; kin ti te sutaṃ have you not heard? D I.104; kintikaro= kathankaro q. v.; kiñca (cp. kiñcāpi under kiñci)= num-que, nonne; is it not that, rather J I.135 (expld in c. by garahatte ca anuggahatthe nipāto). - kiñci in comb. with yaṃ or yad: whatever; in other combn positive: some, neg.: na kiñci nothing; yad atthi kiñci whatever there is of . . . Sn 231; n'atthi kiñci there is nothing: see under atthi and kiñcana; kiñci n'atthi loke there is nothing in this world . . . Sn 1122. - kiñcāpi whatever, however much: kiñcāpi te tattha yatā caranti "however much they endeavour in this" Sn 1080; J I.147; It 114; KhA 187, 190. Same as disjunctive conjunction with foll. pana: (=Lat. quamvis) kiñcāpi hi . . . pana although . . . yet DhA I.391; kiñcāpi with pot. . . . atha kho although-yet; it may be that -but S I.72. - 3. In composition (°-) often implying doubt, uncertainty ("what is it, that is so & so?"), or expressing strangeness (: doubtful likeness), e. g. kinnara a kind of man (but not sure about it), a half-man; kimpakka odd-looking or doubtful (poisonous) fruit; kimpurisa a strange man (doubtful whether man or beast); cp. kiṃsuka. -akkhāyin preaching what? in conn. with kiṃ vādin saying what? i. e. holding what views? A I.62; -atthaṃ for what purpose J I.279. -atthiya to what purpose J IV.239; Miln 19; VvA 230; to any purpose, of any use S V.171; -abhiñña having what name? J VI.126. -kara doing whatever (his duty), a servant, in k°-patissāvin an obedient servant D I.60 (cp. expln at DA I.168) A III.37; IV.265 sq.; ThA 252; -karaṇīya business, occupation A III.113, 116, 258; V.24, 90, 338; -kāraṇā (abl. of kāraṇa) by reason of what, i. e. why? PvA 25; -kusalagavesin striving after that which is good M I.163=240; -jacca of what caste? Sn p. 80; -nāma of what name? Miln 15, 17; DhA III.397 (both konāma and kiṃnāma). pakka strange or unknown (doubtful) fruit, in °rukkha a tree with odd fruit (i. e. poisonous fruit, cp. Rām. II.66, 6; Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it to be Strychnos nux vomica) J I.368. -purisa 1. a wild man of the woods J IV.254; VI.272, 497. - 2. =kinnara (q. v.) A I.77; J V.42, 416. f. kimpurisī J V.215, 216. -phala=°pakka, in °rukkha a tree with unknown (poisonous) fruit J I.271. -rukkha what kind of tree J V.203. -vādin holding what view? A I.62; -samācāra (a) of what conduct, in comb. with; -sīla of what character Sn 324 (=SnA 331). Kiṃsuka {Kimsuka} [kiṃ+su+ka] N. of a tree (creeper), lit. "whatever-like," or "what do you call it," i. e. strange tree (see kiṃ su & kiṃ 3), pop. name for the Butea frondosa S IV.193 (parable of the k.); J II.265 (°opama-jātaka); V.405; VI.536. Perhaps v. l. at SnA 284. -puppha the (red) flower of the k. tree Vism 252. -vaṇṇa of the colour of the k. (flower) J I.73 (angārā ashes). Kikita {Kikita} (?) dense, thick (?) SS at S IV.289 (for kuṭṭhita), said of the heat. Pāli Text Society 500 Pāli-English Dictionary Kikī {Kiki} [onomat. to sound-root kṛ (see note on gala), cp. Sk. kṛka-vāku cock, after the cry of the bird] 1. (m.) the blue jay (J II.350 k. sakuṇo). - 2. (f.) a hen (or the female of the jay?), in simile fr. the Apadāna of a hen watching her egg Vism 36 (aṇḍaṃ anurakkhamānā); J III.375 (rakkhati); cp. SnA 317 (kikī sakuṇikā aṇḍassa upari seti). Kinkaṇika {Kinkanika} (m. nt.) [=kinkiṇika] a small bell J IV.362; VvA 12. Kinkiṇika {Kinkinika} (m. nt.) [onomat. formation fr. sound part. kiṇi, see note on gala] a small bell J IV.259, 413; (suvaṇṇa°); Vv 781 (=kinkiṇi VvA 303); Vin III.42 (kinkiṇikā saddo). -jāla a net or fringe of tinkling bells D II.183; J I.32; DhA I.274. Kicca {Kicca} (nt.) [grd. of karoti=Sk. kṛtya] 1. (adj.) that which ought to be done, that which is to be performed; nt. something to do DhA I.15. Defd as kātabban ti kiccaṃ, kiñcid eva karaṇīyan ti KhA 218; kattabaṃ karaṇīyaṃ DhA III.452. - 2. (nt.) (a) duty, obligation, service, attention; ceremony, performance. The sg. is used collectively as pl. - adj. (-°) one who is under an obligation, etc., or to whom an obligation, etc., is due A II.67; Dh 276, 293; J III.26; DhA I.5. kattabbak°-karaṇa "the performance of incumbent duties" PvA 30; idaṃ me kiccaṃ akāsi "he has done me this service" PvA 29. - In special sense of the duties to the dead: ahaṃ tava pitu °ṃ karomi "I will do the last duty to your father" PvA 274. - a° that which is not (his) duty A II.67; Dh 292, 293. - (b) (as philos. term) function; rasa (essence) is either kicca r°- or sampatti r, function or property. Cpd. 13, 213, n. l.; Vism 162 (parivyatta° quite conspicuous f.), 264 (abbhañjana° f. of lucubrating), 338, 493 (indriyānaṃ kiccaṃ), 547 (tad-ārammaṇa°, bhavanga°, cuti°, etc.); kiccavasena by way of f. Abhdh.-sangaha V.8, cp. Dhs. trsl. 132 (with ref. to DhsA 264); kiccato Vism 581. -appa° having few or no duties Sn 144 (cp. KhA 241. ārāmika° duties of the Ārāma J I.38. -udaka° water-performance, ablution D II.15. -kata° one who has performed his duties or mission, i. e. an Arahant Sn 1105; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231. -bahu° having many obligations, being very busy A III.116 sq. -bhatta° meal DA I.45 sq.; PvA 76; freq. in formula kata° (see kata), cp. kat-annakicca Dāvs I.59. -mata° funeral rites PvA 274. -sarīra° the duties of the body, i. e. funeral rites PvA 74). - Note. In compn with kud° kicca appears as kuk-kucca (q. v.). -ākiccā pl. (kicca+kicca, see Trenckner, Notes J.P.T.S. 1908, 127; cp. ṭhānāṭhāna, bhavābhava maggāmagga, phalāphala, etc.) duties of all kinds, various duties: ativasā assu kiccākiccesu "they shall serve me in all duties" Dh 74 (DhA II.78=khuddakamahantesu karaṇīyesu "in small and great duties"); °esu yuttapayutto māṇavo (cp. a maid "of all work") VvA 298; °esu ussukā endeavouring to do all duties Sn 298 (but expld at SnA 319 as "zeal in what is to be done and what is not to be done," taken as kicca+ akicca cp. akicca); -ādhikaraṇa settlement of the agenda at formal meetings of a chapter Vin II.89=III.164; III.168; V.101 sq.; 150 sq.; See Vin Texts III.45; -kara doing one's duty S I.91; Sn 676; -karaṇīyāni pl.=kiccākicca, various duties A IV.87; -kārin=kiccakara A III.443. Kiccayatā {Kiccayata} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] duty Vin II.89 (k° karaṇīyatā); Miln 42. Kiccha {Kiccha} [see kasira] 1. (adj.) (a) distressed, in difficulty, poor, miserable, painful: kicchā vatāyaṃ idha vutti yaṃ jano passati kibbisakārī (miserable is the life of one who does wrong) Sn 676=parihīnattha, in poverty PvA 220 (kicco=kiccho). - (b) difficult to obtain, hard, troublesome Dh 182 (kiccho manussapaṭilābho, DhA 235=dullabho). - 2. (nt.) distress, misery, pain, suffering: kicchaṃ āpanno loko D II.30; S II.5; °ṃ vā so nigacchati "he gets into difficulties (i. e. becomes poor)" J V.330 (=dukkhaṃ nigacchati); Vism 314; DhA I.80. - Oblique cases used adverbially: instr. kicchena with difficulty J I.147, 191 (paṭijaggita); V.331 (id.) abl. Pāli Text Society 501 Pāli-English Dictionary kicchā id. J V.330. - akiccha (°-) without difficulty, easily, in phrase akiccha-lābhin taking or sharing willingly (+kasira-lābhin) M I.33, 354=S II.278 =A II.23, 36; A III.31, 114. -patta fallen into misery Pv III.54 (=PvA 199 dukkhappatta) -vuttin living in misery, poor Pv II.914 (=dukkhajīvita). Kicchati {Kicchati} [v. denom. fr. kiccha, cp. Sk. kṛcchrāyate] to be troubled, to be wearied, to suffer Th 1, 962 (w. acc. of obj.); usually with kilamati: k° kāyo kilamati Th 1, 1073. Used in a play of words with vicikicchati by Bdhgh at DhsA 354 as "ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ asakkonto kicchati kilamati" and at Bdhd. 25 (on vicikicchā) as sabhāvaṃ vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamati. Kiñcana (adj.-nt.) [kiṃ+cana, equal to kiṃ+ci, indef. pron.] only in neg. sentences: something, anything. From the freq. context in the older texts it has assumed the moral implication of something that sticks or adheres to the character of a man, and which he must get rid of, if he wants to attain to a higher moral condition. - Def. as the 3 impurities of character (rāga, dosa, moha) at D III.217; M I.298; S IV.297; Vbh 368; Nd2 206b (adding māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, duccarita); as obstruction (palibujjhana), consisting in rāga, etc. at DhA III.258 (on Dh 200). Khīṇa-saṃsāro na c'atthi kiðcanaṃ "he has destroyed saṃsāra and there is no obstruction (for him)" Th 1, 306. n'āhaṃ kassaci kiñcanaṃ tasmiṃ na ca mama katthaci kiñcanaṃ n'atthi "I am not part of anything (i. e. associated with anything), and herein for me there is no attachment to anything" A II.177.- akiñcana (adj.) having nothing Miln 220. - In special sense "being without a moral stain," def. at Nd2 5 as not having the above (3 or 7) impurities. Thus freq. an attribute of an Arahant: "yassa pure ca pacchā ca majjhe ca n'atthi kiñcanaṃ akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇan" Dh 421=Sn 645, cf. Th I. 537; kāme akiðcano "not attached to kāma" as Ep. of a khīṇāsava A V.232 sq.=253 sq. Often combd with anādāna: Dh 421; Sn 620, 645, 1094.-Akiðcano kāmabhave asatto "having nothing and not attached to the world of rebirths" Vin I.36; Sn 176, 1059; -akiñcanaṃ nānupatanti dukkhā "ill does not befall him who has nothing" S I.23. - sakiñcana (adj.) full of worldly attachment Sn 620=DA 246. {Kincana} Kiñcikkha {Kincikkha} (nt.) [E. Mūller P. Gr. p. 35 expls kiðcid+ka] a trifle, a small thing: yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ Sn 121; 131; PugA 210 (III.4). āmisa-kiñcikkha-hetu "for the sake of a little gain" A I.128=Pug 29; at Pv II.83 as āmisa-kiñci-hetu (but all vv. ll. B. have °kiñcakkha°) "for some food" (expld at PvA 107: kiðci āmisaṃ patthento); -katā kiðcikkhabāvanā at S IV.118 is evidently corrupt (v. l. °bhādhanā for bādhanā? ). -kamyatā in the desire for some little thing Sn 121 (cp. SnA 179: appamattake kismiðcid eva icchāya). Kiñjakkha (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kiðjalka & remarks at Aufrecht Halāyudha p. 186] a filament, esp. of the lotus S III.130; J I.60, 183; V.39; Vv 221; -vāri° Pv II.120 (=kesara PvA 77) in combn with kesara VvA 12, 111, 175. {Kinjakkha} Kiṭaka {Kitaka} [doubtful] only at Pv I.92,4, of clothes which are changed into missā kiṭakā, which is expl. at PvA 44 by kiṭakasadisāni lohapaṭṭasadisāni bhavanti "they become like (hot) copper plates." Kiṭika at Vin II.153 of ālinda, a verandah, said to be saṃsaraṇa° ugghāṭana° (a movable screen or a curtain that can be drawn aside) Vin Texts III.174, 176. Kiṭṭha {Kittha} [cp. Sk. kṛṣṭa kṛṣ] growing corn, the crop on the ground, a cornfield A III.393 (in simile), cp. S IV.195. -āda eating corn A III.393. -ārakkha the guardian of the cornfield S Pāli Text Society 502 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.196. -sambādha "when the corn is thick," in °samaye near harvest-time M I.115 (in simile); J I.143 (sassa-samaye+), 338. Kiṇakiṇāyati {Kinakinayati} [=kinkiṇāyati, denom. fr. kinkiṇi, small bell] to tinkle; also spelt kiṇikiṇāyati J III.315. See also kilikilāyati and cp. Sk. kiṭikiṭāyati to grind (one's teeth) & Prk. kiḍikiḍiya (chattering) Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; also BSk. kaṭakaṭāyati Tal. Vist. 251. See taṭataṭayati & note on gala. Kiṇāti {Kinati} [krī Vedic kriṇāti] to buy Vism 318; pot. kiṇe J V.375; ger. kiṇitvā M I.384; J I.92, 94; inf. kiṇituṃ J III.282. Kiṇi {Kini} (indecl.) a part., expressing the sound of a small bell: "tink" DhA I.339 (v. l. kiri; see also kili and note on gala). Kiṇṇa1 {Kinna} [cp. Sk. kiṇva] ferment, yeast; Vin II.116; VvA 73. Kiṇṇa2 {Kinna} [pp. of kirati] strewn, scattered, covered; only in compn with profixes: ā°, o°, ud°, upa°, pari°, saṃ°; see also appa°. Kiṇha {Kinha} (adj.) [see kaṇha; DA I.254 kiṇhā ti kaṇhā, kāḷakā ti attho] black; in the stock phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā k° bandhupādāpaccā D I.90=116; S IV.117; M I.334; II.177; in a moral sense=bad, wicked, with nālam-ariyā dhammā D I.163. Kita {Kita} [pp. of kṛ, with i for a, cp. kiraṇa for karaṇa. The Dhtp. expld by nivāsane] 1. adorned: mālā° adorned with garlands Vin III.249. - 2. soiled, only in cpds. kaṇṇa° said of a wall, also of the ground at Vin I.48= II.209; and paṃsu°, soiled with dust Vin II.121, 174. Kitava & Kitavā {Kitava} [=kaṭavā? cp. kaṭa] one who plays false; a cheat; adj. deceitful S I.24; J V.116; 117 (a°); -kitavā at Dh 252 (=DhA III.375) in combn with saṭha also at J VI.228, where the connection with kaṭa is evident: kaṭaṃ Aḷāto gaṇhāti kiṭavā sikkhito yathā= like one who is skilled in having the kaṭa, the lucky die. Expld at DhA III.375 as taken from fowling: kitavāya attabhāvaṃ paṭicchādeti "he hides himself by means of a pretence" (behind sham branches). Kittaka {Kittaka} (pron. interr.) [fr. kīva, cp. ettaka & BSk. kettaka (MVastu I.50); see Trenckner, Notes p. 134] how much? how great? nt. as adv.: to what extent? pl.: how many? Vin I.297; k°ṃ antovassaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ "how much of the rainy season is left?" VvA 66; kittakā pana vo bhante parivāra-bhikkhū? "How many bhikkhus are in your retinue?" J I.32. - As indef.: a little; kittakaṃ jīvissāmi, J V.505; kittakaṃ addhānaṃ a short time VvA 117 (=kiṃva ciraṃ). Kittana {Kittana} (nt.) [f. kitteti] praise PvA 31, 107. Kittāvatā {Kittavata} (adv.) to what extent? how far? in what respect? K° nu kho mahāpurisa hoti "in what respect is a man a great man?" Nd2 502 B; k° nu kho paððavā ti vuccati? M I.292. Kitti & Kittī {Kitti} {Kitti} f. [Vedic kīrti, *qer: cp. Gr. karkai/rw, Ohg. hruod, hruom=Ger. ruhm; *qār: cp. Sk. kāru poet; Gr. kh_ruc herald, Lat. carmen hymn of praise. - The explns of Dhtp (579) & Dhtm (812) are saṃsadde & saṃsaddane] fame, renown, glory, honour, yaso ca kittī ca Pāli Text Society 503 Pāli-English Dictionary S I.25; kittið ca sukhað ca S I.187; yaso kitti sukhað ca A II.32 yaso kittī ca "fame and renown" Sn 817 (=Nd1 147, where appl. to the religious perfection attained by a samaṇa); Sn 185 (in the same sense); VvA 68 (bāhira°-bhāva becoming known outside); yaso kitti Sdhp 234. -sadda the sound of fame, praise, renown (thutighosa DA I.146) esp. appld to the Buddha, whose fame is heralded before him: Bhagavantaṃ Gotamaṃ evaṃ kalyāṇo k°-saddo abbhuggato "the high reputation went forth over the world, concerning the Venerable Gotama": (such is this Exalted One, Arahant, etc.) D I.49, 87, 115, 116, 236; S IV.323, 374; V.352; A I.57, 180; III.30, 39, 58, 253, 267; IV.80; etc. The same with reference to others: Miln 284. Appld to the good reputation of a man (of a kalyāṇamitta) at Pug 37; the opposite is pāpako kittisaddo, bad reputation: A I.126; III.269; Pug 36; -vaṇṇa praise, in °hara receiving or deserving praise D III.191; cp. °bhatā Nd1 147. Kittika {Kittika} (adj.) [fr. kitti] famous VvA 200. Kittita {Kittita} (pp. of kitteti] told Bdhd 124; su° well told Sn 1057. Kittima {Kittima} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kṛtimā, der. fr. kṛti, karoti, in sense of kata I.2 (a) made up, artificial; clever, skilful ThA 227; DhA 391 (of nāma); VvA 275 (of ratha: cleverly constructed)]. Cp. also kutta, - f. kittimā at J III.70; VI.508 is according to Kern, Toev. s. v. a misspelling for tittima. Kitteti {Kitteti} [v. den. fr. kitti] 1. to praise, extol PvA 124, 162; - 2. to proclaim, announce, relate, tell; ppr. kittento praising PvA 159. - fut. kittayissati in sense of aor. Vv 345 (=katheti VvA 151). -kittayissāmi I shall relate Sn 1053, 1132. grd: kittanīya to be praised PvA 9. - aor. akittayi Sn 875, 921. - pp. kittita. Kinnara {Kinnara} [kiṃ+nara, lit. what-man, see kiṃ 3] a little bird with a head like a man's] J IV.106, 254, 438, V.47, 456; Mil 267. Canda kinnara Np. J I.91, VI.283, VI.74. - f. kinnarā Np. of a queen J V. 437 sq., and kinnarī Th 2, 381 (cp. ThA 255), J II.121 (matta-kinnarī viya), 230; IV.432 sq. Cp. kimpurisa. Kinnāma {Kinnama} see under kiṃ. Kipillikā (f.) & Kipillaka (nt.) {Kipillika} {Kipillaka} [Cp. Sk. pipīlikā, see Trenckner, Notes, p. 108] an ant Sn 602 (kuntha°); DhA I.360; J IV.142 (kuntha°); V.39 (tamba°-°āni); Miln 272. - kipillaka J I.487 (v. l. BB. for pillaka); IV.375 (tamba°-puṭa); DhA IV.134 (v. l. SS. for T. pillaka). - Cp. kuntha & pipīlikā. Kibbisa {Kibbisa} (nt.) [Ved. kilbiṣa, according to Grassmann to *kil as in kilāsa, thus originally "stain, dirt." Buddh. Sk. kilviṣa classed with aparādha at Mvyntp. 245 No. 903] wrongdoing, demerit, fault, usually with °ṃ karoti to do wrong Sn 246; Sdhp, 204; J III.135 or °ṃ pasavati A V.75; Vin II.198. -kata° (adj.) having done wrong in akata-kalyāṇo, etc. A II.174 and ≈(see kalyāṇa and kata II.1 a); M I.39; Pv IV.77; PvA 59. -kāraka1=next J III.14; -kārin, doing wrong Sn 665 sq.; PvA 58. Kibbisaka {Kibbisaka} =kibbisa Sdhp 290. Pāli Text Society 504 Pāli-English Dictionary Kimi {Kimi} m. [Vedic kṛmi] a worm, vermin: setā kimī kaṇhasīsā A III.241; Miln 272; DA I.199; - As animal of death and putrefaction M I.507; J I.146; Sn 201; esp. with ref. to the punishment of Petas: Pv I.31; Th 2, 439; PvA 192; Sdhp 603. As glow-worm M II.34; 41 (with khajjopanaka); sālaka° a very minute insect Miln 312. In similes: Th 1, 1175 (kimī va mīlhasallitto); Vism 500, 598. In cpd. kimi-kula the worm kind (genus worm) Miln 100; Vism 235; °gaṇa crowd of worms Vism 314. Kimina {Kimina} (adj.) [from kimi] covered with worms J V.270. Kira & Kila {Kira} {Kila} [Vedic kila] adv. 1. emphatic: really, truly, surely. (Gr. dh/) - 2. presumptive (with pres. or fut.): I should think one would expect. - 3. narrative (with aor.): now, then, you know (Gr. de\, Lat. at, G. aber). - kira in continuous story is what "iti" is in direct or indirect speech. It connects new points in a narrative with something preceding, either as expected or guessed. It is aoristic in character (cp. Sk. sma). In questions it is dubitative, while in ordinary statements it gives the appearance of probability, rather than certainty, to the sentence. Therefore the definitions of commentators: "people say" or "I have heard": kirasaddo anussavane: "kira refers to a report by hearsay" PvA 103; kira-saddo anussav'atthe J I.158; VvA 322 are conventional and one-sided, and in both cases do not give the meaning required at the specified passages. The same holds good for J I.158 & II.430 (kirā ti anussavatthe nipāto). - 1. mahantaṃ kira Bārāṇasirajjaṃ "the kingdom of B. is truly great" J I.126; attā hi kira duddamo "self is difficult to subdue, we know" Dh 159; amoghaṃ kira me puṭṭhaṃ Sn 356. - na kira surely not Sn 840; J I.158. - 2. esā kira Visākhā nāma "that I presume is the Visākhā" (of whom we have heard) DhA I.399; petā hi kira jānanti "the petas, I should say, will know" Pv II.710; evaṃ kira Uttare? "I suppose this is so, Uttarā" VvA 69. evaṃ kira saggaṃ gamissatha "thus you will surely go to Heaven" Vv 828; "I hear" DhA I.392. - 3. atīte kira with aor. once upon a time . . . PvA 46, etc.; so kira pubbe . . . akāsi, at one time, you know, he had made . . . J I.125; sā kira dāsī adāsi now the maid gave her . . . PvA 46; cp. J I.195, etc. Kiraṇa {Kirana} (nt.) 1. [fr. kṛ, karoti to do] an occupation, place of work, workshop J IV.223. Cp. kita & kittima. - 2. [fr. kṛ, kirati to scatter, cp. pp. kiṇṇa] scattering, effusion (of sun rays), effulgence VvA 169, 199. Kirati {Kirati} [kir] to scatter, strew; not found in simples, only in cpds. apa°, abbhuk°, abhi°, ava° (o°), pari°, vi°. See also pp., kiṇṇa2. Kirāta & Kirāṭa {Kirata} [prob. dial.] a man of a tribe of junglemen, classed with dwarfs among the attendants of a chief DA I.148. See on the Kirāta as a mountain tribe Zimmer, Altindisches Leben p. 34. Cp. also apakiritūna & okirati2, okiraṇa. - A secondary meaning of kirāṭa is that of a fraudulent merchant, a cheat (see kirāsa & kerāṭika). Kirāsa {Kirasa} (adj.) [a by-form of kirāṭa] false, fraudulent J IV.223 (=kerāṭika). Kiriyati {Kiriyati} [Pass. of kirati or karoti] to be affected or moved Vism. 318. Kiriya, Kiriyā & Kriya {Kiriya} {Kriya} [abstr. fr. karoti] 1. (n.) - (a) (-°) action, performance, deed; the doing=fulfilment; cp. °karaṇa, anta°, making an end of, putting a stop to (dukkhassa) S Pāli Text Society 505 Pāli-English Dictionary III.149; IV.93; Sn 454, 725; -kāla° "fulfilment of one's time" i. e. death S III.122; Pv I.1012; Sn 694; Pug 17; kusala° performance of good actions S I.101; V.456; dāna° the bestowing of gifts PvA 123; pāpa° commission of sin Pug 19=23; puðða° the performance of good works S I.87=89=A III.48; a° PvA 54 mangala° celebration of a festival PvA 86; massu-kiriyā the dressing of the beard J III.314 (cp. m-karaṇa and kappanā); sacchi° realization, see s. v. -akiriyā the non-performance of, omission, abstaining from (a° akaraṇa=veramaṇī) J III.530; Vbh 285. - (b) an act in a special sense=promise, vow, dedication, intention, pledge: PvA 18; justice: Miln 171; kiriyaṃ bhindati to break one's vow Miln 206. - (c) philosophically: action ineffective as to result, non-causative, an action which ends in itself (Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs. trsl. xciii.), inoperative (see Cpd. 19). In this sense it is grouped with kamma (cp. for relation kamma: kiriyā= Ger. sache: ursache). Thus is the theory of Makkhali: n'atthi kammaṃ, n'atthi kiriyaṃ n'atthi viriyan ti= there is no karma, no after-effect and no vigour in this world A I.286 (different at D I.53); n'atthi kiriyā it does not matter M I.405. - 2. (adj.) (a) making no difference, indefinite; of no result, as def. of avyākatā dhammā Vbh 106, 182=302=Dhs 566 and 989 (manodhātu kiriyā neva kusalā nākusalā na ca kammavipākā: indifferent, neither good nor bad and having no fruit of kamma), same of jhāna Vbh 268=281; DhsA 388. - (b) indecisive, in akiriyaṃ vyākaroti to give an indecisive answer, to reply evasively D I.53 and≈ -pada (ttg.) the verb (i. e. that which supplies the action) VvA 315; -vāda (adj.) promulgating the (view of a) consequence of action, believing in merit and demerit, usually combd with kammavāda (q. v.) also °vādin: D I.115 (of Gotama) A I.62; Vin I.71; a°- denying the difference between merit & demerit A IV.174=Vin I.234; 242, Vin III.2; A IV.180 sq.; S III.73. (+natthikavāda); -vādin adj. to prec. A I.62; -hetu being a cause of discrimination Dhs 1424 sq. Kiriyatā {Kiriyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. last] the performance of (-°), state of, etc. See sakkacca°, sacchi°, sātacca°. Kirīṭin {Kiritin} (adj.) enveloped, adorned Pv III.91 (=veṭhitasīsa). Kila {Kila} see kili (the sound click). Kilañjā {Kilanja} (f.) a mat of fibre or rushes, matting Vism 327; also a screen, a fascine, hurdle, faggots; a crate, crating: tassa gandhabbaṃ kilaðjā-kaṇḍūvanaṃ viya hutvā . . . J II.249; "his music was like the scraping of a mat"; suvaṇṇa-kilaðjā a gilt mat J IV.212. As a fascine, used in making a road: DhA I.442. as a screen (combd with chatta, fan) PvA 127; as faggots: J I.158; Miln 287; as a crate or basket, used by distillers: M I.228= 374 (soṇḍikā-kilaðjā) (cp. the trsln under soṇḍa in J.P.T.S. 1909); to which is likened the hood of a snake: S I.106 (snake=māra). Kilanta {Kilanta} [pp. of kilamati] tired, exhausted, weary, either with °kāya tired in body PvA 43; VvA 65 (indicating the falling asleep); or °citta tired in mind D I.20= III.32 (paduṭṭhacitta+, of the waning of the gods); or both °kāya-citta Pv III.23; opp. akilanta-kāya-citta alert, vigorous; with sound body and mind. Kilama {Kilama} [spelt klama, fr. klam] fatigue J V.397 (=kilantabhāva). Kilamati {Kilamati} [Sk. klamati, a variation of śramati sri from sri to lean, cp. kilanta, as "sleepy," and Lat. clīnāre, clemens. To k > ś cp. kaṇṇa > śṛṇga, kilissati > śliṣyati, etc. The Dhtp (222) & Dhtm (316) paraphrase kilam by gilāne.] 1. to go short of, to be in want of (instr.) DhA II.79; na piṇḍakena kilamati does not go short of food Vin II.15, 87; IV.23 sq. - 2. to weary, to be Pāli Text Society 506 Pāli-English Dictionary wearied, tired, fatigued; to be in trouble or in misery PvA 215 (to be incommodated) 277 (be in distress); fut. kilamissāmi PvA 76. Cp. pari°. - pp. kilanta. Kilamatha {Kilamatha} [fr. klam, in formation cp. samatha] tiredness, fatigue, exhaustion M I.168; A II.199; S I.136; as kāya°, citta° S V.128; as daratha° A III.238; PvA 23; as niddā° A II.48, 50. Kilamita {Kilamita} [pp. of kilameti] worn out, tired, fatigued PVII.83. Kilameti {Kilameti} [denom. fr. kilama] to be tired or fatigued J I.115; ppr. kilamayanto D I.52. - pp. kilamita. Kilāsa [cp. Sk. kilāsa] a cutaneous disease, perhaps leprosy, enumd under the var. diseases (ābādhā) together with kuṭṭha gaṇḍa k° sosa Vin II.271; A V.110; Nd2 3041. {Kilasa} Kilāsika {Kilasika} & °iya (adj.) [fr. last] afflicted with a cutaneous disease, a leper, in same combn as kilāsa, Vin I.93; Kvu 31 (°iya). Kilāsu {Kilasu} [fr. sram, cp. kilamatha. E MQller P. Gr. 38= glāsnu, glā, cp. gilāna] exhausted, tired of (c. dat. or inf.) Vin III.8; a° untiring in (c. dat. or acc.) S I.47; V.162; J I.109; Miln 382. Kili {Kili} (sometimes kila) [onomat. fr. sound- ] 1. indecl. the sound "click," of the noise of a trap when shutting J I.243; II.363, 397 (as "kilī"). - Also repeated "kilikilī ti" click, click J I.70. - 2. as n. f. tinkling, clicking, ticking (cp. kiṇi), in kiliṃ karoti to tinkle J V.203. Kilikilāyati {Kilikilayati} [denom. fr. kili with reduplication] to tinkle J V.206; (freq. fr. kili or den. fr. kilikilā; cp. kilakilā "shouting for joy" AvŚ I.48 and in cpd. hāhākārakilakilā "shouting hāhā and hail-hail" ibid. I.67 MVastu III.312 and Divy 459). See also kiṇakiṇāyati. Note.-Kil is one of the variations of the sound-imitating qel, which otherwise appears as qal, qul in Gr. kelados, L. cal-are, Ohg. hell-an (cp. Sk. krandati?) also Gr. kla/zw, L. clango, Goth. hlahjan ("laugh") and in Sk kolāhala, kokila, cp. cuculus (cuckoo) and perhaps Sk. ululī, ulūka (owl), Gr. o)lolu/zw, L. ululare. See also the cognate qer under kitti. Kilijjati {Kilijjati} [med-pass. of kilid=Sk. klid, to be wet. prob.= śliṣ to stick to, and confounded with svid, cp. also kelana & khela. The meaning "to get wet, to be soiled" only in pp. kilinna. The Dhtm (199), however, expls k. by parideva lament, to be in trouble, which is not quite in harmony with the meaning; it is more likely that in P. we have a confusion between klid & kliś in a meaning which differs from Sk.] to become heated, to get into a state of inflammation, to fester (of wounds) Vin I.205 (vaṇo kilijjittha festered); Sn 671 (gloss for kilissati, expld at SnA 481 by pūti hoti). - pp. kilinna. See also ukkiledeti (to clean out a stain, to "disinfect"). Kiliṭṭha {Kilittha} [pp of kilissati] 1. soiled, stained, impure; of gatta, limbs J I.129; of cīvara, cloak Bdhd 92; of vattha, clothes DhA II.261; of pāvāra-puppha, mango blossom KhA 58=Vism 258. 2. unclean, lustful (morally) bad, in °kamma dirty pursuit, i. e. cohabitation J IV.190; PvA 195 (of a gaṇikā); together with kuthita Miln 250. Kilinna {Kilinna} [pp. of kilijjati] 1. wet, usually with saliva and perspiration Vin III.37; J I.61 (lālā°), 164 (kheḷa°); DA I.284 (assu°); VvA 67 (seda°). - 2. The other meaning of kilid (to get Pāli Text Society 507 Pāli-English Dictionary inflamed) is to be found in kilinna-sarīra (adj.) with an inflamed body (i. e. suffering from a skin-disease), which is Bdhgh's expln of okilinī: see under okiraṇa. Kilissati {Kilissati} [Sk. kliśyati=kliś or śliṣ to adhere, cp. P. kheḷa and silesuma or semha, Sk. śleṣma, slime. Same root as Gr. lei/mac snail; Ags. slīm slime. Another, specifically Pali, meaning is that of going bad, being vexed, with ref. to a heated state. This lies at the bottom of the Dhtp. (445) & Dhtm. (686) expln by upatāpe.] 1. to get wet, soiled or stained, to dirty oneself, be impure It 76 (of clothes, in the passing away of a deva); Th 1, 954 (kilisissanti, for kilissanti); Ps I.130. Kilisseyya Dh 158 (expld as nindaṃ labhati) to do wrong. Cp. pari°. Kilissana {Kilissana} (nt.) getting dirty, staining J I.8. Kilesa {Kilesa} (and klesa) [from kilissati] 1. stain, soil, impurity, fig. affliction; in a moral sense, depravity, lust. Its occurrence in the Piṭakas is rare; in later works, very frequent, where it is approx. tantamount to our terms lower, or unregenerate nature, sinful desires, vices, passions. 1. Kilesa as obstacle (see °āvaraṇa, °-sampayutta, °-vippayutta, °pahāna) Ps I.33; Sdhp 455; bhikkhu bhinnakileso "one whose passions are broken up" Vḅh 246, PvA 51; upasanta kileso "one whose passions are calmed" PvA 230; no ce pi jātu puriso kilese vāto yathā abbhaghanaṃ vihāne Sn 348; pariyodapeyya attānaṃ cittaklesehi paṇḍito S V.24=A V.232, 253=Dh 88. 2. Occurs in such combinations as kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca Nd2 487; kilesa+khandha: Ps I.69- 72; II.36, 140; cp. Vbh 44, 68; kilesa+saṃsāra PvA 7; kammaṃ kilesā hetu saṃsārassa Nett 113, cp. 191. - 3. kilesa also occurs in a series explanatory of taṇhā, in the stereotype combn of t., diṭṭhi, kilesa "clinging to existence, false ideas and lust" (see Nd2 s. v. taṇhā v.). - 4. In the same function it stands with rāga, viz. rāga dosa moha kilesa, i. e. sensuality, bewilderment and lust (see Nd2 s. v. rāga II.), cp. Dhs 982, 1006. - The grouping as dasa kilesa-vatthūni is: lobha dosa moha māna diṭṭhi vicikicchā thīnaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ Dhs 1548=Vbh 341; Vism 683; mentioned at Ps I.130. - These with the exception of the last two, are also grouped as aṭṭha k°-vatthūni at Vbh 385.-As three kilesas (past, present and future) at Ps II.217. - 5. The giving up of kilesa is one of the four essentials of perfection: the recognition of evil, the removal of its source (which is kilesa), the meditation on the Path, and the realization of the extinction of evil (see Nd2 s. v. dukkha II.). Kilesa in this connection interchanges with samudaya, as denoting the origin of evil; cp. samudayo kilesā Nett 191. -āvaraṇa the obstacle of lust Vbh 342 Pug 13; Vism 177; °āvaraṇatā id. A III.436; -kkhaya the destruction of lust Bdhd 81; -paripantha danger of lust J VI.57; pahāna the giving up of worldly lust Vin III.92 sq., IV.25; Bdhd 129, 131; -puñja the heap of lusts; consisting of ten qualities, viz. the four āhārā (etc. four of each:), vipallāsā, upādānāni, yogā, gandhā, āsavā, oghā, sallā, viððāṇaṭṭhitiyo, agatigamanāni. Nett 113, 114; 116 sq. bhūmi the substratum or essence of lust Nett 2, 192; there are four mentioned at Nett 161: anusaya°, pariyuṭṭhāna°, saṃyojana°, upādāna°; -māra death which is the consequence of sinful desire DhA I.317 (in expl. of Māra); -vatthūni (pl.) the (10) divisions of kilesa (see above) Dhs 1229, 1548; Vism 20. -vinaya the discipline of lust Nett 22; -vippayutta free from lust (dhamma principles, to which belongs Nibbāna) Dhs 1555; -sampayutta connected or affected with lust Dhs 1554 (as 12 principles); Vbh 18=30=44=56, 68, 80, 96, 120, 323. Kileseti {Kileseti} [v. den. fr. kilesa] to become soiled or stained (fig.): indriyāni kilesenti Sdhp. 364. Pāli Text Society 508 Pāli-English Dictionary Kiloma {Kiloma} [=next?] at J III.49 taken as syn. of loma, hair and used in sense of pharusa, shaggy, rough (in kiloma maṃsakhaṇḍa as simile for kiloma-vācā). Kilomaka {Kilomaka} [=Sk. kloman, the right lung, cp. Greek pleu/mwn, Lat. pulmo] the pleura M I.185 = Kh III, Nett 77=Vbh 193; J IV.292; Miln 26. Discussed in detail at Vism 257, 357. Kisa {Kisa} (adj.) [Sk. kṛśa, perhaps to Lat. gracilis, slim] lean, haggard, emaciated, opp. thūla fat (VvA 103). As Ep. of ascetics Sn 165, Dh 395=Th 1, 243; esp. as Ep. of petas: Pv II.113; Sn 426, 585; Sdhp 101; Miln 303. For phrase kisa-dhamani-santhata see the latter. Kisaka {Kisaka} =kisa Vin I.36=J I.83; f. kisikā Th 2, 27. Kissati {Kissati} [den. fr. kisa] 1. to get thin, to become exhausted, to waste, weary, worry J VI.495 (pret. mā kisittha= C. mā kisā bhava). - 2. [Pass. of kassati, kṛṣ] see pari° Kissava {Kissava} in neg. akissava at S I.149 is doubtful in origin and meaning. The trsln gives "without wisdom." Should we read akittima or akiñcana, as we suggested under a°, although this latter does not quite agree with the sense required? Kīṭa {Kita} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kīṭa] a general term for insect DhA I.187; usually in combn with paṭanga, beetle (moth?) M III.168 (with puḷava); Sn 602; J VI.208; Miln 272 (°vaṇṇa); PvA 67; Vism 115. kīṭa at J V.373 means a kind of shield (=cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa. Kīṭaka {Kitaka} (nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin I.188. Kīta {Kita} [pp. of kiṇāti] bought J I.224 (°dāsa a bought slave) II.185. Kīdisa {Kidisa} (interr. adj.) [cp. Sk. kīdṛś=kiṃ dṛśa] what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Sn 836, 1089 (=kiṃ saṇṭhita Nd2; Pv II.63; PvA 50, 51; VvA 76). - As Np. S IV.193. - See also Kīrisa. Kīra {Kira} [cp. Sk. kīra] a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi). Kīrisa {Kirisa} =kīdisa Th 2, 385 (cp. ThA 256). Kīla {Kila} =a pin, a stake, see Khīla. Kīḷati {Kilati} [Sk. krīḍati] to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin IV.112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv II.121 (=indriyāni paricarāmi PvA 77) D II.196; J V.38; Th 2, 147; PvA 16, 67, 77, 189; c. acc. to celebrate: nakkhattaṃ J I.50; VvA 63; PvA 73; ThA 137; chaṇaṃ DhA III.100. - pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train J II.267 (sappaṃ to train or tame a snake). Kīḷanaka {Kilanaka} [fr. kīḷati] a plaything, a toy Th 2, 384 (with ref. to the moon). Kīḷanā {Kilana} (f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA 67; DhA III.461 (nakkhatta° celebration). Pāli Text Society 509 Pāli-English Dictionary Kīḷā {Kila} f. [fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā] play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaṃ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water PvA 189. - uyyāna° amusement in the park DhA I.220; IV. 3; nakkhatta-kīḷaṃ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA 109, ThA 137; sāla-kīḷā sport in the sāla woods J V.38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun PvA 215; - Cp. kīḷikā. -goḷa a ball to play with Vism 254. -goḷaka id. Vism 256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA 255; pasuta bent on play J I.58; -bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Miln 229 (=kīḷāpanaka M I.266); -maṇḍala playcircle, children's games, playground J VI.332; DhA III.146; -sālā playhouse J VI.332. Kīḷāpanaka {Kilapanaka} 1. (nt.) a plaything, toy M I.266, 384; a list given at A V.203. - 2. (adj.) one who makes play J IV.308 (sappa° a snake-trainer, cp. sappaṃ kīḷāpeti J II.267). Kīḷikā {Kilika} (f.) play, sport, amusement; always -°, like kumāra° D II.196; uyyāna° (sport in the garden) J III.275; IV.23, 390; udaka° ThA 186. Kīḷita {Kilita} [pp. of kīḷati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A IV.55 (hasitalapita°); PvA 76 (sādhu°). -(nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M I.229 (kīḷitajātaṃ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaṃsu°°; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā. Kīvant & Kīva {Kivant} {Kiva} (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp. rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā "however great the terrors" Sn 959. - Kīva kaṭuka how painful? PvA 226; k°-ciraṃ how long? Pj and Sn 1004; k°-dīghaṃ same Sn p. 126; k° dūre how far? Miln 16; DhA I.386; k°-mahantaṃ how big? DhA I.29; VvA 325; k° bahuṃ how much? DhA IV.193. Kīvatika {Kivatika} (interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus? Vin I.117. Ku {Ku} (kud- and kum-) 3rd stem of interrog. pron. ka (on form and meaning cp. kad;=Lat.* qÛu in (qÛ)ubi, like katara < (qÛ)uter; cp. also Vedic kū how? Sk. kutra, kutaḥ, kuha, kva) where? when? whither? whence? As adv. in cpds. in disparaging sense of "what of"? i. e. nothing of, bad, wrong, little, e. g. kum-magga wrong path; kuk-kucca=kud-kicca doing wrong, troubling about little=worry. -kuṃ at PvA 57 (in expl. of kuñjara) is interpreted as paṭhavi. 1. Kuto where from? whence? Dh 62; k°bhayaṃ whence i. e. why fear? Dh 212 sq.; Sn 270, 862; Pv II.69; how? J VI.330; with nu whence or why then? Sn 1049 (=kacci ssu Nd2 s. v.). kut-ettha=kuto ettha J. I.53. -na kuto from nowhere Sn 35, 919; a-kuto id. in akutobhaya "with nothing to fear from anywhere" i. e. with no reason for fear S I.192; Th 1, 510; Th 11, 333; Sn 561 (modāmi akutobhayo); Pv II.121 (id.); kuto-ja arisen from where? Sn 270; -°nidāna having its foundation or origin in what? Sn 270, 864 sq. 2. Kudā at what time, when? (cp. kadā) Pug 27; indef. kudācanaṃ: at any time, na k° never Sn 221 (expl. by soḷasim pi kalaṃ SnA 277); Dh 5, 210; Bdhd 125; gamanena na pattabbo lokass'anto k° "by walking, the end of the world can never be reached" S I.62. 3. Kuva, kva, where? Sn 970 (kuvaṃ & kuva) indef. kvaci anywhere; with na: nowhere; yassa n'atthi upamā kvaci "of whom (i. e. of Gotama) there is no likeness anywhere" Sn 1137; cp. 218, 395; expld by Nd2 like kuhiñci. kuvaṃ at D III.183. 4. Kutha (kudha) where? J V.485 (=kuhiṃ). 5. Kuhiṃ (=kuhaṃ, cp. Sk. kuha) where? whither? Often with fut.: k° bhikkhu gamissati Sn 411; ko gacchasi where are you going? Pv II.81; tvaṃ ettakaṃ divasaṃ k° gatā where have you been all these days? PvA 6; 13; 42; indef. kuhiðci, anywhere, with na k°: nowhere, or: not in anything, in: n'atthi taṇhā k° loke "he has no desire for anything in this world" Sn 496, 783, 1048 see Nd on 783 & 1048=kimhici; Dh 180. Pāli Text Society 510 Pāli-English Dictionary Kukutthaka {Kukutthaka} (v. l. BB. kukkuṭhaka) a kind of bird J VI.539. Kern (Toev. s. v.) takes it to be Sk. kukkuṭaka, phasianus gallus. Kukku {Kukku} [cp. Sk. kiṣku?] a measure of length S V.445= A IV.404, and in kukkukata Vin I.255=V.172 (cp. however Vin. Texts I.154, on Bdhgh's note=temporary). Kukkuka {Kukkuka} [fr. kukku] "of the kukku-measure," to be measured by a kukku. Of a stonepillar, 16 k's high S V.445 A IV.404. - akukkuka-jāta of enormous height (of a tree) M I.233=S III.141 (text: akukkajāta) =IV.167; A II.200 (text: akukkuccakajāta). Kern (Toev. s. v. kukka) takes it to mean "grown crooked," a° the opposite. Kukkucca {Kukkucca} [kud-kicca] 1. bad doing, misconduct, bad character. Def. kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ Vism 470 & Bdhd 24; - Various explanations in Nd2 on Sn 1106=Dhs 1160, in its literal sense it is bad behaviour with hands and feet (hattha-pada°) J I.119=DA I.42 (in combn with ukkāsita & khipitasadda); hattha° alone J II.142. - 2. remorse, scruple, worry. In this sense often with vippaṭissāra; and in conn. w. uddhacca it is the fourth of the five nīvaraṇas (q. v.) Vin I.49; IV.70; D I.246; S I.99; M I.437; A I.134=Sn 1106; A I.282; Sn 925; Nd2 379; DhA III.483; IV.88; Sdhp 459; Bdhd 96. - na kiñci k°ṃ na koci vippaṭissāreti "has nobody any remorse?" S III.120=IV.46. The dispelling of scrupulousness is one of the duties and virtues of a muni: k°ṃ vinodetuṃ A V.72; k. pahāya D I.71=A II.210=Pug 59; chinnakukkucca (adj.) free from remorse M I.108; khīṇāsava k°-vūpasanta S I.167=Sn 82. akukkucca (adj.) free from worry, having no remorse Sn 850. Kukkuccaṃ kurute (c. gen.) to be scrupulous about J I.377; kariṃsu DhA IV.88; cp. kukkuccaṃ āpajjati (expl. by sankati) J III.66. Kukkuccaka {Kukkuccaka} (adj.) conscientious (too) scrupulous, "faithful in little" J I.376; VvA 319. Kukkuccāyati {Kukkuccayati} [denom. fr. kukkucca] to feel remorse, to worry A I.85; Pug 26. Der. are kukkuccāyanā and °āyitatta=kukkucca in def. at Dhs 1160=Nd2 s. v. Kukkucciya {Kukkucciya} =kukkucca Sn 972. Kukkuṭa {Kukkuta} (Sk. kurkuṭa & kukkuṭa; onomatopoetic=Lat. cucurio, Ger. kikeriki) a cock Miln 363; J IV.58; VvA 163; f. kukkuṭī a hen DhA I.48; ThA 255; in simile M I.104=357=A IV.125 sq., 176 sq. (cp. °potako). -aṇḍa (kukkuṭ°) a hen's egg Vism 261. -patta the wing of a cock A IV.47. -potaka a chicken, in simile M I.104=357=A IV.126=176. -yuddha a cock fight D I.6; lakkhaṇa divining by means of a cock D I.9; -sampātika a shower of hot ashes (cock as symbol of fire) A I.159=D III.75, cp. Divy 316 and see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 38; -sūkarā (pl.) cocks and pigs D I.5= A II.209=Pug 58; D I.141; A II.42 sq.; It 36. Kukkura {Kukkura} [Sk. kurkura, or is it ku-krura? Cp. kurūra) a dog. usually of a fierce character, a hound A III.389; V.271; J I.175 sq.; 189; Pv III.7Q; Sdhp 90. In similes: S IV.198; M I.364; A IV.377. - f. kukkurinī Miln 67. -vatika (adj.) imitating a dog, cynic M I.387 (+dukkara kāraka; also as k°-vata, °sīla, °citta, °ākappa); D III.6, 7; Nett 99 (+govatika; -sangha a pack of hounds A III.75. Kukkuḷa {Kukkula} [taken as variant of kukkuṭa by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 39; occurs also in BSk. as Name of a Purgatory, e. g. MVastu I.6; III.369, 455. The classical Sk. form is kukūla] hot ashes, Pāli Text Society 511 Pāli-English Dictionary embers S III.177; J II.134; Kvu 208, cf. trans. 127; with ref. to Purgatory S I.209; J V.143 (°nāma Niraya); Sdhp 194; Pgdp 24. -vassa a shower of hot ashes J I.73; IV.389 (v. l.). Kukkusa {Kukkusa} 1. the red powder of rice husks Vin II.280 (see Bdgh II.328: kukkusaṃ mattikaṃ=kuṇḍakañ c'eva mattikañ ca). - 2. (adj.) variegated, spotted J VI.539 (=kaḷakabara 540; v. l. B. ukkusa). Kunkuma {Kunkuma} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kunkuma] saffron Miln 382; Vism 241. Kunkumin {Kunkumin} (adj.) fidgety J V.435. Kunkumiya {Kunkumiya} (nt.) noise, tumult J V.437 (=kolāhala). Kucchi {Kucchi} (f.) [Sk. kukṣiḥ, cp. kośa] a cavity, esp. the belly (Vism 101) or the womb; aṇṇava° the interior of the ocean I.119, 227; J V.416; jāla° the hollow of the net J I.210. As womb frequent, e. g. mātu° J I.149; DA I.224; PvA 19, 63, 111, 195; as pregnant womb containing gabbha J I.50; II.2; VI.482; DhA II.261. -ḍāha enteric fever DhA I.182; -parihārika sustaining, feeding the belly D I.71=Pug 58; -roga abdominal trouble J I.243; -vikāra disturbance of the bowels Vin I.301; -vitthambhana steadying the action of the bowels (digestion) Dhs 646=740=875. Kucchita {Kucchita} [Sk. kutsita, pp. of kutsāy] contemptible, vile, bad, only in Coms VvA 215; in def. of kāya KhA 38; in def. of kusala DhsA 39; VvA 169; in def. of kukkucca Vism 470; in def. of paṃsu-kūla Vism 60. Kucchimant {Kucchimant} (adj.) [fr. kucchi] pregnant J V.181. Kujati [or kujjati? see kujja] in kujantā dīnalocanā Sdhp 166: to be bent, crooked, humpbacked? {Kujati} Kujana {Kujana} (adj.) [fr. kujati] only neg. a° not going crooked, in ratho akujano nāma S I.33. Kujja {Kujja} (adj.) [Sk. kubja, humpbacked; √qub, Lat. cubare, Gr. kufo/s, Mhg. hogger, humpback] lit. "bent," as nt. kujjaṃ in ajjhena-kujjaṃ Sn 242 crookedness, deceit, fraud (cp. SnA 286 kūṭa?). Cp. kujati & khujja, see also ava°, uk°, nik°, paṭi°, pali°. Kujjhati {Kujjhati} [cp. Vedic krunhyate, fr. krudh] to be angry with (dat.) A I.283=Pug 32, 48; Vism 306; mā kujjhittha kujjhataṃ, "don't be angry" S I.240; mā kujjhi J III.22; na kujjheyya Dh. 224; ger. kujjhitvā PvA 117, grd. kujjhitabba Pv IV.1.11 Kujjhana {Kujjhana} (adj.) [fr. kujjhati] angry=kodhana VvA 71; Pug A 215 (°bhāva). Kujjhanā (f.) anger, irritation, together with kujjhitattaṃ in defn of kodha Dhs 1060= Pug 18, 22. Kujjhāpana {Kujjhapana} (nt.) [Caus. formation fr. kujjhati] being angry at DhA IV.182. Pāli Text Society 512 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuñca {Kunca} (nt.) [kruðc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. krw/cw, kraugh/; all of crowing noise; from sound-root kr, see note on gala] a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only). -kāra cackling (of a hen) ThA 255; -nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) J III.114. Kuñcikā {Kuncika} (f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. V.29, 2 (Vin II.319) cp. tāla Vin II.148; Vism 251 (°kosaka a case for a key); DA I.200, 207, 252; DhA II.143. Kuñcita {Kuncita} (adj.) [pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent] bent, crooked J I.89 (°kesa with wavy hair); V.202 (°agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuðcitaggā: expld on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp 102. Kuñja {Kunja} (m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in expln of kuðjara at VvA 35 (kuðjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati) and PvA 57 (kuṃ pathaviṃ jīrayati kuðjo suvāraṃ aticarati kuñjaro ti). -nadī° a river glen DA I.209. Kuñjara {Kunjara} (m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant's trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h° and k°] an elephant Vin II.195; M I.229, 375; S I.157; Dh 322, 324, 327; J V.336; Vv 51; Pv I.113; DhA IV.4; ThA 252; Miln 245. -deva° chief of the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 477; J V.158. -vara a state elephant VvA 181. -sālā an elephant's stable DhA IV.203. Kuṭa {Kuta} a pitcher Vv 509; J I.120; DhA II.19, 261; III.18. Kuṭa is to be read at J I.145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at DhsA 263 stands for kūṭa3 sledge-hammer. Kuṭaka {Kutaka} a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka S II.258. Kuṭaja {Kutaja} a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin I.201 (cp. Vin. Texts II.45). Kuṭati {Kutati} see paṭi° and cp. kūṭa1, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa1. Kuṭava {Kutava} (v. l. S. kū°; B. kulāvaka) a nest J III.74; v. l. at DhA II.23 (for kuṭikā). Kuṭikā {Kutika} (f.) from kuṭī [B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. II.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin III.35, 41, 42=VvA 10; PvA 42, 81; DhA II.23. Cp. also tiṇa°, dāru°; araðða° a hut in the woods S I.61; III.116; IV.380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Th 1, 1. - As adj. -°, e. g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dh I.313. Kuṭimbika {Kutimbika} (also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family, J I.68, 126, 169, 225; II.423; PvA 31, 38, 73, 82. Kutumbiya-putta Np. Vism 48. Kuṭila {Kutila} (adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) J III.112 (=jimha); Miln 297 (°sankuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Miln 351. -a° straight Vv 167 (magga). -bhāva crookedness of character Vism 466; PvA 51; VvA 84. -a° uprightness Bdhd 20. Pāli Text Society 513 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuṭilatā {Kutilata} (f.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness, falseness, in a°, uprightness of character Dhs 50, 51; DhA I.173. Kuṭī {Kuti} (kuṭi°) (f.) any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin III.144 (on vehāsa-kuṭī see vehāsa & Vin IV.46); Sn 18, 19; Pv II.28; VvA 188, 256 (cīvara°, a cloak as tent). See also kappiya°, gandha°, paṇṇa°, vacca°. -kāra the making of a hut, in °sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut J II.282; III.78. 351; -dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest DhA II. 23; -purisa a "hut man," a peasant Miln 147. Kuṭukuñcaka {Kutukuncaka} see kaṭukañcuka. Kuṭumba {Kutumba} (nt.) family property & estates J I.122, 225; rāja° (and °kuṭumbaka) the king's property J I.369, 439. -kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment J I.225; II.423; III.376. Kuṭumbika {Kutumbika} see kuṭimbika. Kuṭṭa1 {Kutta} [cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush, which is expld by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with koṭṭ by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ of kūṭa1, which is expld as koṭilla] powder. Sāsapa° mustard powder Vin I.205; II.151 (at the latter passage to be read for °kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts III.171), 205. Kuṭṭa2 {Kutta} [of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa° & koḍḍa°, e. g. MVastu I.231] only found in cpds. °dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism 354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa° a wattle and daub prince S III.156 (v. l. kuḍḍa°); =V.44 (v. l. kujja°); cp. kuḍḍa° J V.102 sq., where expl. pāpa-rājā, with vv. ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka-rājā. Kuṭṭha1 {Kuttha} (nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy J V.69, 72, 89; VI.196, 383; Vism 35 (+gaṇḍa); DA I.260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see J V.69, IV.196. Kuṭṭha2 {Kuttha} a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice J VI.537. Kuṭṭhita {Kutthita} hot, sweltering (of uṇha) S IV.289 (v. l. kikita); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita. Kuṭṭhin {Kutthin} a leper M I.506 (in simile); Th 1, 1054; J V.413; VI.196; Ud 49; DhA III.255. Kuṭṭhilikā {Kutthilika} the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala°) VvA 344 (=sipāṭikā). Kuṭhārī {Kuthari} (f.) [cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe=Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc]. An axe, a hatchet Vin III.144; S IV.160, 167; M I.233=S III.141; A. I.141; II.201; IV.171; J I.431; DhA III.59; PvA 277. Purisassa hi jātassa kuthārī jāyate mukhe "when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)" S I.149=Sn 657=A V.174. Kuḍumalaka {Kudumalaka} [for kusuma°] an opening bud A IV.117, 119. Pāli Text Society 514 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuḍḍa {Kudda} [to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa] a wall built of wattle and daub, in °nagaraka "a little wattle and daub townQ" D II.146, 169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh. Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply-built walls are mentioned at Vin IV.266, viz. iṭṭhakā° of tiles, silā° of stone, dāru° of wood. The expln of kuḍḍa at Vism 394 is "geha-bhittiyā etam adhivacanaṃ." Kuḍḍarājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaṃ outside the wall M I.34=II.18; A IV.55; Vism 394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh VIII1=Pv I.51. - parakuḍḍaṃ nissāya J II.431 (near another man's wall) is doubtful; vv. ll. S. kuḍḍhaṃ. B. kuṭaṃ and kuṭṭaṃ. (kuḍḍa-) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin II.152. Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin II.151 is to be read kuṭṭa. Kuḍḍa {Kudda} -mūla a sort of root Vin III.15. Kuḍḍaka {Kuddaka} in eka° and dvi° having single or double walls J I.92. Kuṇa {Kuna} (adj.) [cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend=Gr. kullo/s crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake] distorted, bent, crooked, lame Pv II.926 (v. l. kuṇḍa; cp. PvA 123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an-ujubhūta); DhA III.71 (kāṇa° blind and lame). Kuṇapa {Kunapa} [der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa] a corpse, carcase, Vin III.68=M I.73=A IV.377 (ahi°, kukkura°, manussa° pūti°); A IV.198 sq.; Sn 205; J I.61, 146; PvA 15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M I.120; J I.5; also Vin III.68≈. - The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi°, etc.) is amplified at Vism 343 as follows: hatthi°, assa°, go°, mahiṃsa°, manussa°, ahi°, kukkura°. Cp. kaḷebara. -gandha smell of a rotting corpse SnA 286; PvA 32. Kuṇalin {Kunalin} in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, contorted Pv II.9 26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy's S.S. Kuṇḍalī°), expld PvA 123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṃ (or vikucitaṃ SS.) sakuṇitaṃ (better: sankucitaṃ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink). Kuṇāla {Kunala} N. of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) J V.214 sq. (kuṇāla-jātaka). Kuṇāla-daha "cuckoolake," N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism 416. Kuṇālaka {Kunalaka} [fr. kuṇāla] the cuckoo J V.406 (=kokila). Kuṇi {Kuni} (adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, acc. to Pug A IV.19 either of one or both arms (hands) J I.353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha)= DhA I.376; Pug 51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja. Kuṇita {Kunita} (or kuṇika)=kuṇa PvA 123, 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi°. Kuṇṭha {Kuntha} [cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) DhA I.311 (°kuddāla); Pug A I.34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); °tiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353. - 2. a cripple J II.117. Kuṇṭhita {Kunthita} [a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita] Pv II.38 and kuṇḍita S I.197, both in phrase paṃsu°, according to Hardy, PvA p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti). The v. l. at both places is °kuṭṭhita. Also found as paṃsukuṇṭhita at J VI.559 (=°makkhita C; v. l. B B. kuṇḍita). Kuṇḍa {Kunda} (a) bent, crooked DA I.296 (°daṇḍaka); PvA 181. Pāli Text Society 515 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuṇḍaka {Kundaka} the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin II.151; 280; J II.289 (text has kuṇḍadaka)=DhA III.325 (ibid. as ācāma°). Also used as toilet powder: DhA II.261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraṃ makkhetvā). -sakuṇḍaka (-bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder-cake J V.383. angārapūva pancake of rice powder DhA III.324; -kucchi in °sindhavapotaka "the rice- (cake-) belly colt" J II.288; -khādaka (a) eating rice-powder J II.288; (cp. DhA III.325); -dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder, Ep. of the blood J III.542; -pūva cake of husk-powder J I.422 sq.; muṭṭhi a handful of rice-powder VvA 5; DhA I.425; -yāgu husk-powder gruel J II.288. Kuṇḍala {Kundala} [cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding] a ring esp. earring A I.254=III.16; J IV.358 (su° with beautiful earrings); DhA I.25. Frequent as maṇi°, a jewelled earring Vin II.156; S I.77; M I.366; Pv II.950; sīha° or sīhamukha° an earring with a jewel called "lion's mouth" J V.205 (=kuðcita), 438. In sāgara° it means the ocean belt Miln 220=J III.32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaṃ). Cp. also rajju° a rope as belt VvA 212. -kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round D II.18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa). Kuṇḍalin1 {Kundalin} (adj.) [fr. kuṇḍala] wearing earrings S IV.343; J V.136; VI.478. su° Vv 731. Cp. Maṭṭha° Np. DhA I.25; Pv II.5. Kuṇḍalin2 {Kundalin} in kuṇḍalī-kata contorted Pv II.927. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14. Kuṇḍi {Kundi} (f.) [=kuṇḍikā] a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍipaddhana giving a pailful of milk J VI.504 (Kern, Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāṃsy'ôpadohana & proposes reading kuṇḍ'opadohana. See also kaṃsupadhāraṇa). Kuṇḍika {Kundika} [cp. kuṇḍa] bending, in ahi-kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) J IV.308 (v. l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi; and catu-kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i. e. walking on all fours M I.79; Pv III.24 (expl. at PvA 181). Kuṇḍikā {Kundika} (f.) a water-pot J I.8, 9, II.73 (=kamaṇḍalu), 317; V.390; DhA I.92 (cp. kuṭa). Kutuka {Kutuka} (adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs IV.41. Kutumbaka {Kutumbaka} (-puppha) N. of a flower J I.60. Kutūhala (m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs V.22; DhA III.194 (v. l. kot°). a° (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming J I.387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa-vaco of straight speech). See also kotūhala. -mangala a festivity, ceremony, Nd2 in expl. of anekarūpena Sn 1079, 1082; -sālā a hall for recreation, a common room D I.179=S IV.398=M II.2, cp. Divy 143. {Kutuhala} Kuto {Kuto} see under ku°. Kutta {Kutta} (nt.) [Der. fr. kattā=Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra=P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial=P. kuttima, in caus. - pass. sense=kappita of kḷp)] "being made up." 1. Work. The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā. The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. D III.28. - 2. behaviour, i. e. charming behaviour, coquetry J II.329, combd with līḷā (graceful carriage) J I.296, 433; and Pāli Text Society 516 Pāli-English Dictionary with vilāsa (charming behaviour) J II.127; IV.219, 472; itthi° and purisa° A IV.57=Dhs 633 (expl. at DhsA 321 by kiriyā). - As adj. in kuttavāla, well arranged, plaited tails D I.105 (expld at DA I.274 as kappita-vāla; cp. kappita). Kuttaka {Kuttaka} [der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or "woven," with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?] 1. nt. a woollen carpet (DA I.87=as used for dancing-women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding D I.7=A I.181=Vin I.192=II.163. - 2. adj. "made up," pretending, in samaṇa-k° a sham ascetic Vin III.68-71. Kuttama {Kuttama} in kāsi-kuttama J VI.49 should be read as kāsik'uttama. Kutti {Kutti} (f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin II.108 (sara°: accuracy in sound, harmony); J III.314 (massu° beard-dressing, expld by massu-kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!); IV.352 (hattha°, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā); V.215 (=karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa). Kutthaka {Kutthaka} S I.66 should be replaced by v. l. koṭṭhuka. Kutha {Kutha} see under ku°. Kuthati {Kuthati} [Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita2] to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v.) J VI.105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita).-pp. kuthita. Kuthana {Kuthana} (nt.) [fr. kvath=kuth] digestion Vism 345. Kuthita {Kuthita} [pp. of kuthati] 1. boiled, cooked Th 2, 504; KhA 62; Vism 259=KhA 58. Cp. vikkuthita. - 2. digested Vism 345. - 3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati=pūti hoti) Miln 250 (+kiliṭṭha). - Cp. Vin. Texts II.57 on Bdhgh's note to MV VI.14, 5. Kudaṇḍaka {Kudandaka} a throng J III.204. Kudassu {Kudassu} (kud-assu) interj. to be sure, surely (c. fut.) A I.107; Nett 87; SnA 103. Kudā {Kuda} see under ku°. Kudāra {Kudara} (ku-dāra) a bad wife Pv IV.147. Kudārikā {Kudarika} at Pv IV.147 & PvA 240 is spelling for kuṭhārikā. Kudiṭṭhi {Kuditthi} (f.) [ku+diṭṭhi] wrong belief Sdhp 86. Kuddāla {Kuddala} a spade or a hoe (kanda-mūla-phalagahaṇ'- atthaṃ DA I.269) Vin III.144; J V.45; DhA IV.218. Often in combn kuddāla-piṭaka "hoe and basket" D I.101; S II.88; V.53; A I.204; II.199; J I.225, 336. Pāli Text Society 517 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuddālaka {Kuddalaka} =prec. DhA I.266. Kuddha {Kuddha} (adj.) [pp. of kujjhati] angry A IV.96 (and akkuddha IV.93); Pv I.77; J II.352, 353; VI.517; DhA II.44. Nom. pl. kuddhāse It 2=7. Kudrūsa {Kudrusa} a kind of grain Miln 267; also as kudrūsaka a kind of grain Miln 267; also as kudrūsaka Vin IV.264; D III.71; Nd2 314; DA I.78; DhsA 331. Kunta {Kunta} [cp. Sk. kunta lance?] a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa J IV. 466. Kuntanī {Kuntani} (f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird J III.134. only in combn kunthakipillaka (or °ikā) a sort of ant J I.439; IV.142; Sn 602 (°ika); Vism 408; KhA 189. Cp. kimi. Kunda {Kunda} (nt.) the jasmine Dāvs V.28. Kunnadī {Kunnadi} (f.) (kuṃ-nadī) a small river, a rivulet S I.109; II.32, 118; A IV.100; J III.221; Vism 231, 416; DA I.58. Kupatha {Kupatha} (kuṃ+patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Miln 390. Kupita {Kupita} (adj.) [pp. of kuppati]-1. shaken, disturbed Th 2, 504 (by fire=ThA 292); J III.344 (°indriya). - 2. offended, angry D III.238=M I.101=A IV.460= V.18; M. I.27; A III.196 sq.; Pv I.67. Often combd with anattamana "angry and displeased" Vin II.189; D I.3, 90 (=DA I.255 kuddha). - As nt. kupitaṃ disturbance, in paccanta° a disturbance on the borderland J III.497; Miln 314; PvA 20. Kuppa {Kuppa} (adj.) [ger. of kuppati] shaking, unsteady, movable; A III.128 (°dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu); Sn 784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin II.71 (also a°). nt. kuppaṃ anger Vin II.133 (karis- sāmi I shall pretend to be angry). - akuppa (adj.) and akuppaṃ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asankuppa); akuppa-dhammo Pug 11 (see akuppa). Akuppaṃ as freedom from anger at Vin II.251. Kuppati {Kuppati} [Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake= Lat. cupio, cupidus, "to crave with agitation," cp. semantically Lat. tremere>Fr. craindre] to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. - aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti A III.101; Sn. 826, 854; Pug 11, 12, 30. Of the wind Miln 135; of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) J II.393, 433; paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed J IV.446 (cp. kupita). Kuppila {Kuppila} [?] a kind of flower J VI.218 (C: mantālakamakula). Kubbati2 {Kubbati} etc. see karoti II. Kubbanaka {Kubbanaka} [fr. kuṃ-vana] brushwood or a small, and therefore unproductive, wood Sn 1134 (expl. Nd2 by rittavanaka appabhakkha appodaka). Pāli Text Society 518 Pāli-English Dictionary Kubbara {Kubbara} the pole of a carriage A IV.191, 193; VvA 269, 271, 275. ratha° S I.109, Vv 642 (=vedikā VvA). Der. (vividha-) kubbaratā VvA 276. Kumati {Kumati} wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137. Kumāra {Kumara} [Vedic kumāra] a young boy, son Sn 685 sq. (kuhiṃ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv III.52; PvA 39, 41 (=māṇava); daharo kumāro M II.24, 44. - a son of (-°) rāja° PvA 163; khattiya°, brāhmaṇa° Bdhd 84; deva° J III.392 yakkha° Bdhd 84. -kīḷā the amusement of a boy J I.137; -paðhā questions suitable for a boy Kh III.; lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+kumāri°) D I.9. Kumāraka {Kumaraka} 1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls S III.190. 2. nt. °ṃ a childish thing A III.114. - f. °ikā a young girl, a virgin J I.290, 411; II.180; IV.219 (thulla°); VI.64; DhA III.171. -vāda speech like a young boy's; S II.219. Kumārī {Kumari} (f.) a young girl Vin II.10; V.129 (thulla°); A III.76; J III.395 (daharī k°); Pug 66 (itthī vā k° vā). -pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit D I.11 (cp. DA I.97). Kumina {Kumina} (nt.) a fish net Vin III.63; Th 1, 297; J II.238; ThA 243. Kumuda {Kumuda} (nt.) 1. the white lotus Dh 285; Vv 354 (=VvA 161); J V.37 (seta°); Vism 174; DA I.139. - 2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā A V.173=Sn p. 126. -naḷa a lotus-stalk J I.223; -patta (-vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals J I.58 (Ep. of sindhavā, steeds steeds); -bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Miln 292; -vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) PvA 74, -vana a mass of white lotuses J V.37. Kumbha {Kumbha} [for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot (=kulālabhājana earthenware DhA I.317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: A I.130, 131=Pug 32; A V.337; S II.83; Miln 414. As uda° waterpot Dh 121; J I.20; Pv I.129. - 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin II.195 (hatthissa); VvA 182 (°ālankārā ornaments for these). -ûpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dh 40 (=DhA I.317); of var. kinds of puggalā A II.104=Pug 45. -kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D I.51=Miln 331. Vin IV.7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D I.78=M II.18; Vism 142, 376; Sn 577; DhA I.39 (°sālā). rāja° the king's potter J I.121. - 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA 163. - Cpds.: °antevāsin the potter's apprentice D I.78=M II.18; °nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin I.342, 344; S III.119; °pāka the potter's oven S II.83; A IV.102; °-putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. I.100), a potter Vin III.41 sq.; -kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin II.143, cp. Vin. Texts III.156; -ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well D I.8=D III.36=A V.128= S V.419, expld. at DA I.90 by udaka-ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha-kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha-dāsikathā vā; -thūṇa a sort of drum D I.6 (expl. at DA I.84: caturassara-ammaṇakatāḷaṃ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke); D III.183; J V.506 (pāṇissaraṃ+). °ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin IV.285=302; -tthenaka of cora, a thief, "who steals by means of a pot" (i. e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin II.256, cp. Vin. Texts III.325 "robber burglars") only in simile Vin II.256=S II.264=A IV.278; -dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well D I.168; Miln 331; DhA I.401 (udakatitthato k° viya ānītā). dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Sn 309. Cp. kuṇḍi. - Pāli Text Society 519 Pāli-English Dictionary bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold J V.46; -matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassangā mahodarā yakkhā, expln. of kumbhaṇḍā J III.147. Kumbhaṇḍa {Kumbhanda} 1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras S II.258 (k° puriso vehāsaṃ gacchanto); J I.204; III.147 (with def.); Miln 267; DhA I.280; Pgdp 60. - 2. nt. a kind of gourd J I.411 (lābu°); V.37; (elāḷuka-lābuka°); DA I.73= DhA I.309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism 183 (lābu+). Kumbhī {Kumbhi} (f.) a large round pot (often combd with kaḷopī,) Vin I.49, 52, 286; II.142, 210; Th 2, 283. loha° a copper (also as lohamaya k° Sn 670), in °pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya PvA 221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi°. -mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi-mukha) D I.166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism 328. Kumbhīla {Kumbhila} (kuṃ+bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Ganges) J I.216, 278; DhA I.201; III.362. bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at M I.459 sq.=A II.123 sq.; Miln 196=Nd2 on bhaya. - Th 2, 502; -rājā the king of the crocodiles J II.159. Kumbhīlaka {Kumbhilaka} [fr. kumbhīla] a kind of bird ("little crocodile") J IV.347. Kumma {Kumma} [Vedic kūrma] a tortoise S IV.177 (+kacchapa); M I.143; J V.489; Miln 363, 408 (here as land-tortoise: cittaka-dhara°). Kummagga (and kumagga) [kuṃ+magga] a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Miln 390 (+kupatha); fig. (=micchāpatha) Dhs 381, 1003; Pug 22. Kummaggaṃ paṭipajjati to lose one's way, to go astray. lit. Pv IV.35; PvA 44 (v. l. SS.); fig. Sn 736; It 117; Th 2, 245. {Kummagga} Kummāsa {Kummasa} [Vedic kulmāṣa] junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) D I.76=M II.17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷinkārāhāra) Dhs 646, 740, 875. - Vin III.15; J I.228; Vv 146 (=VvA 62 yava°); VvA 98 (odana°). In combn with pūva (cake) DhA I.367; PvA 244. Kummiga {Kummiga} (kuṃ+miga] a small or insignificant animal Miln 346. Kuyyaka {Kuyyaka} a kind of flower J I.60 (°puppha). Kuraṇḍaka {Kurandaka} [cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth] a shrub and its flower Vism 183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). °leṇa Npl. Vism 38. Kurara {Kurara} an osprey J IV.295, 397 (=ukkusa); V.416; VI.539 (=seta°). Kuravaka {Kuravaka} [=Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka] N. of a tree, in ratta° J I.39 (=bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree). Kurunga {Kurunga} [deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulanga] a kind of antelope, in -miga the antelope deer J I.173 (k°-jatāka); II.153 (do.). Pāli Text Society 520 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuruṭṭharū {Kuruttharu} (v. l. kururū) a badly festering sore D II.242. Kurundī {Kurundi} N. of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts I.258; II.14). Kuruvindaka {Kuruvindaka} vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath-powder made from k. J III.282; and °suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin II.106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin II.315; Vin. Texts III.67). Kurūra {Kurura} (adj.) [Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. kre/as (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; , E. raw] bloody, raw, cruel, in °kammanta following a cruel (bloody) occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc.) A III.383=Pug 56 (expld. Pug A 233 by dāruṇa°, also at PvA 181). Kurūrin {Kururin} =kurūra Pv III.23. Kula {Kula} (nt.; but poetic pl. kulā Pv II.943 [Idg. *qÛel (revolve); see under kaṇṭha, cakka and carati] 1. clan, a high social grade, "good family," cp. Gr. (doric) fua/, Goth. kuni. A collection of cognates and agnates, in sense of Ohg. sippa, clan; "house" in sense of line or descent (cp. House of Bourbon, Homeric gene/h). Bdhgh at Vism 91 distinguishes 2 kinds of kulāni, viz. ðātikulaṃ & upaṭṭhāka-kulaṃ. - 1. A II.249 (on welfare and ill-luck of clans); Sn 144; 711; It 109 sq. (sabrahmakāni, etc.); Dh 193. - brāhmaṇa° a Brahmanic family A V.249; J IV.411, etc.; vāṇija° the household of a trader J III.82; kassaka° id. of a farmer J II.109; purāṇaseṭṭhi° of a banker J VI.364; upaṭṭhāka° (Sāriputtassa) a family who devoted themselves to the service of S. Vin I.83; sindhava° VvA 280. - uccākula of high descent Pv III.116, opp. nīca° of mean birth Sn 411 (cp. °kulīno); viz. caṇḍālakula, nesāda°, veṇa°, etc. M II.152=A I.107=II.85=III.385=Pug 51; sadisa° a descent of equal standing PvA 82; kula-rūpa- sampanna endowed with "race" and beauty PvA 3, 280. - 2. household, in the sense of house; kulāni people DhA I.388; parakulesu among other people Dh 73; parakule do. VvA 66; kule kule appaṭibaddhacitto not in love with a particular family Sn 65; cp. kule gaṇe āvāse (asatto or similar terms) Nd2 on taṇhā IV. devakula temple J II.411; rāja° the king's household. palace J I.290; III.277; VI.368; kulāni bahutthikāni (=bahuitthikāni, bahukitthī° A IV.278) appapurisāni "communities in which there are many women but few men" Vin II.256=S II.264=A IV.278; ðāti-kula (my) home Vv 3710 (: pitugehaṃ sandhāya VvA 171). -angāra "the charcoal of the family" i. e. one who brings a family to ruin, said of a squanderer S IV.324 (text kulangāroti: but vv. ll. show ti as superfluous); printed kulanguro (for kul-ankuro? v. l. kulangāro) kulapacchimako (should it be kulapacchijjako? cp. vv. ll. at J IV.69) dhanavināsako J VI.380. Also in kulapacchimako kulagaro pāpadhammo J IV.69. Both these refer to an avajāta putta. Cp. also kulassa angārabhūta DhA III.350; Sn A 192 (of a dujjāto putto), and kulagandhana; -itthi a wife of good descent, together with kuladhītā, °kumārī, °suṇhā, °dāsī at Vin II.10; A III.76; Vism 18. -ûpaka (also read as °upaka, °ûpaga; °upaga; for ûpaga, see Trenckner, P.M. 62, n. 16; cp. kulopaka Divy 307) frequenting a family, dependent on a (or one & the same) family (for alms, etc.); a friend, an associate. Freq. in formula kulūpako hoti bahukāni kulāni upasankamati, e. g. Vin III.131, 135; IV.20. - Vin I.192, 208; III.84, 237; V.132; S II.200 sq.; A III.136, 258 sq.; Pv III.85; Vism 28; DA I.142 (rāja°); PvA 266. f. kulūpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin II.268; IV.66; -gandhana at It 64 and kule gandhina at J IV.34 occur in the same sense and context as kulangāra in J.-passages on avajāta-putta. The It-MSS. either explain k- gandhana by kulacchedaka or have vv. ll. kuladhaṃsana and kusajantuno. Should it be read as kulangāraka? Cp. gandhina; -geha clanhouse, i. e. father's house DhA I.49. -tanti in kulatantikulapaveṇi-rakkhako anujāto putto Pāli Text Society 521 Pāli-English Dictionary "one who keeps up the line & tradition of the family" J VI.380; -dattika (and °dattiya) given by the family or clan J III.221 (°sāmika); IV.146 (where DhA I.346 reads °santaka), 189 (°kambala); VI.348 (pati). -dāsī a female slave in a respectable family Vin II.10; VvA 196; -dūsaka one who brings a family into bad repute Sn 89; DhA II.109; -dvāra the door of a family Sn 288; -dhītā the daughter of a respectable family Vin II.10; DhA III.172; VvA 6; PvA 112; -pasāda the favour received by a family, °ka one who enjoys this favour A I.25, cp. SnA 165, opp. of kuladūsaka; putta a clansman, a (young) man of good family, fils de famille, cp. Low Ger. haussohn; a gentleman, man of good birth. As 2nd characteristic of a Brahmin (with sujāto as 1st) in formula at D I.93, 94≈; Vin I.15, 43, 185, 288, 350; M I.85≈(in kāmānaṃ ādīnavo passage), 192, 210, 463; A II.249; J I.82; VI.71; It 89; VvA 128; PvA 12, 29; -macchariya selfishness concerning one's family, touchiness about his clan D III.234 (in list of 5 kinds of selfishness); also to be read at Dhs 1122 for kusala°; -vaṃsa lineage, progeny M II.181; A III.43; IV.61; DA I.256; expressions for the keeping up of the lineage or its neglect are: °ṭhapana D III.189; PvA 5; nassati or nāseti J IV.69; VvA 149; upacchindati PvA 31, 82; -santaka belonging to one's family, property of the clan J I.52; DhA I.346 (where J IV.146 reads °dattika). Kulanka {Kulanka} -pādaka "buttresses of timber" (Vin. Texts III.174) Vin II.152 (cp. Bdhgh. p. 321 and also Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Kulattha {Kulattha} a kind of vetch M I.245 (°yūsa): Miln 267; Vism 256 (°yūsa). Kulala {Kulala} a vulture, hawk, falcon, either in combn with kāka or gijjha, or both. Kāka+k° Vin IV.40; Sn 675 (=SnA 250); gijjha+k° PvA 198; gijjhā kākā k° Vin III.106; kākā k° gijjhā M I.58; cp. gijjho kanko kulalo M I.364, 429. Kulāla {Kulala} a potter; only in -cakka a potter; only in -cakka a potter's wheel J I.63; -bhājana a potter's vessel DhA I.316; PvA 274. Kulāva {Kulava} 1. waste (?) Vin II.292: na kulāvaṃ gamenti "don't let anything go to waste." Reading doubtful. - 2. a cert. bird J VI.538. Kulāvaka {Kulavaka} (nt.) a nest D I.91 (=DA I.257 nivāsaṭṭhanaṃ); S I.8; S I.224=J I.203 (a brood of birds=supaṇṇapotakā); J III.74 (v. l. BB), 431; VI.344; DhA II.22. Kulika {Kulika} (adj.) [fr. kula] belonging to a family, in agga° coming from a very good family PvA 199. Kuḷika {Kulika} (?) in kata°-kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin II.315 (C.V. V.1, 3) in expln of kuruvindaka-sutti. Kulinka {Kulinka} a bird J III.541 (=sakuṇika 542). Cp. kulunka. Kulin {Kulin} =kulika, in akulino rājāno ignoble kings Anvs. introd. (see J.P.T.S. 1886 p. 355, where akuliro which is conjectured as akulino by Andersen, Pāli Reader, p. 1024). Pāli Text Society 522 Pāli-English Dictionary Kulīna {Kulina} =prec. in abhijāta-kula-kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Miln 359 (of a king); uccā° of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family S I.87; M III.37; VvA 32; nīca° of mean birth Sn 462. Kulīra {Kulira} a crab, in kulīra-pādaka "a crab-footer," i. e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin II.149; IV.40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin IV.357 (kuḷira° and kuḷiya°): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal's feet (Vin. Texts III.164). Kulīraka {Kuliraka} a crab J VI.539 (=kakkaṭaka 540). Kulunka {Kulunka} a cert. small bird J III.478. Cp. kulinka. Kulla1 {Kulla} a raft (of basket-work) (orig. meaning "hollow shaft," cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr. kaulo/s, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin I.230; D II.89 (kullaṃ bandhati); M I.134 (kullūpama dhamma). Kulla2 {Kulla} (adj.) [fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya] belonging to the family J IV.34 (°vatta family custom). Kullaka {Kullaka} crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket J VI.64. -vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin II.304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts III.404: an easy life). More correct is Kern's expln (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combn=kulla2 (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well-bred, of good family, gentlemanly. saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft J II.406-408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern, Toev. I.154. Kuva {Kuva} (ṃ) see ku-. Kuvalaya {Kuvalaya} the (blue) water-lily, lotus, usually combd with kamala, q. v. Vv 354; DA I.50; VvA 161, 181; PvA 23, 77. Kuvilāra {Kuvilara} =koviḷāra J V.69 (v. l. B. ko°). Kusa {Kusa} 1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) DhA III.484: tikhiṇadhāraṃ tiṇaṃ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dh 311; J I.190 (=tiṇa); IV.140. - 2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse "when the lot has been cast" Vin I.299; kusaṃ sankāmetvā "having passed the lot on" Vin III.58. -agga the point of a blade of grass PvA 254=DA I.164; Sdhp 349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dh 70; VvA 73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); -kaṇṭhaka=prec. Pv III.228; -cīra a garment of grass Vin I.305=D I.167 =A I.240, 295=II.206=Pug 55; -pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin I.285; -muṭṭhi a handful of grass A V.234= 249. Kusaka {Kusaka} =prec. Vv 355 (=VvA 162). Kusala {Kusala} (adj.) [cp. Sk. kuśala] 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious M I.226; Dh 44; J I.222. Esp. appl. in moral sense (=puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaṃ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti It 21; sappaððo Pāli Text Society 523 Pāli-English Dictionary paṇḍito kusalo naro Sn 591, cp. 523; Pv I.33 (=nipuṇa). With kamma=a meritorious action, in kammaṃ katvā kusalaṃ D III.157; Vv III.27; Pv I.1011 see cpds. - ācāra-k° good in conduct Dh 376; parappavāda° skilled in disputation Dpvs IV.19; magga° (and opp. amagga°) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) S III.108; samāpatti°, etc. A V.156 sq.; sālittaka-payoge k° skilled in the art of throwing pot- sherds PvA 282. - In derivation k. is expld by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita-salanādi atthena kusalaṃ VvA 169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaṃsenti ti kusalā DhsA 39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii). - 2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. DhsA 162, 200, etc.): yassa pāpaṃ kataṃ kammaṃ kusalena pithīyati, so imaṃ lokaṃ pabhāseti "he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one" M II.104=Dh 173=Th 1, 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Sn 981; Vv 301 (=ārogyaṃ); D I.24; J VI.367; Pv I.13 (=puñña); PvA 75; Miln 25. In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaṃ (cp. sīla) M I.47; A V.241, 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase -kusala-dhammā Sn 1039, 1078, expld. in extenso Nd2 s. v. See also cpd. °dhamma. -Kusalaṃ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i. e. kāyena, vācāya, manasā It 78; cp. Dh 53; sabba-pāpassa akaraṇaṃ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaṃ etaṃ Buddhānusāsanaṃ D II.49=Dh 183; cp. Nett 43, 81, 171, 186. Kusalaṃ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaṃ pajahati to give up wrong habits) A I.58; IV.109 sq.; It 9. - akusala adj.: improper, wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed D I.37, 163; bālo+akusalo Sn 879, 887;=pāpa PvA 60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaṃ & akusalaṃ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpāvacara° fivefold, to arūpāvacara° & lokuttara° fourfold, to kāmāvacara° eight & twelvefold) at Vism 452-454. - kusalākusala good and bad M I.489; S V.91; Miln 25; Nett 161, 192; Dhs 1124 sq. - sukusala (dhammānaṃ) highly skilled D I.180 (cp. M. II.31). -anuesin striving after righteousness Sn 965; cp. kinkusalānuesin D II.151 and kinkusalagavesin M I.163 sq.; -abhisanda overflow of merit (+puñña°) A II.54 sq.; III.51; 337; kamma meritorious action, right conduct A I.104; 292 sq.; Ps I.85; II.72 sq.; PvA 9, 26; -cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vbh 169-173, 184, 285 sq., 294 sq.; -cetanā right volition Vbh 135; dhammā (pl.) (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character S II.206; M I.98; A IV.11 sq.; V.90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pug 68, 71; Vbh 105; Ps I.101, 132; II.15, 230; VvA 74, 127; -pakkha "the side of virtue," all that belongs to good character M III.77 (and a°) with adj. °pakkhika S V.91; macchariya Dhs 1122 is to be corrected to kula° instead of kusala° (meanness as regards family) cp. Nd2 on veviccha; -mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha M I.47, 489=A I.203=Nett 183; D III.214; Dhs 32, 313, 981; Vbh 169 sq., 210; Nett 126. Cp. °paccaya Vbh 169; °ropanā Nett 50; -vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma°, avyāpāda°, avihiṃsā° D III.215; It 82; Nett 126; -vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs 454; Vism 454 (twofold, viz. ahetuka & sahetuka). -vedanā good, pure feeling Vbh 3 sq.; cp. °saððā and °sankhārā Vbh 6 sq.; Nett 126 (three °saððā, same as under °vitakkā); -sīla good, proper conduct of life M II.25 sq.; adj. °sīlin D I.115 (=DA I.286). Kusalatā [fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only -°) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. - lakkhaṇa° skill in interpreting special signs VvA 138; aparicita° neglect in acquiring good qualities PvA 67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345-348; āpatti° skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti° in the Attainments; dhātu° in the Elements; manasikāra° proficiency in attention; āyatana° skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda° skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna° and aṭṭhāna° skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D III.212 and Dhs 1329-1338; cp. A I.84, 94. {Kusalata} Pāli Text Society 524 Pāli-English Dictionary Kusi {Kusi} (nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin I.287; II.177; and aḍḍha° intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh's note in Vin. Texts II.208. Kusīta {Kusita} (adj.) [Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja] indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma-vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo DhA II.260; by nibbiriyo DhA III.410; by alaso PvA 175, Often combd with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; It 27, 116; Dh 7, 112, 280; Miln 300, 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dh 112; combd with dussīla Miln 300, 396; with duppaðða D III.252=282; A II.227, 230; III.7, 183, 433. - In other connections: M I.43, 471; A III.7 sq., 127; V.95, 146, 153, 329 sq.; S II.29, 159, 206; It 71, 102; J IV.131 (nibbiriya+); Vism 132; DhA I.69. The eight kusītavatthūni, occasions of indolence, are enumerated at A IV.332; D III.255; Vbh 385. - akusīta alert, mindful, careful Sn 68 (+alīnacitto); Nd2 s. v.; Sdhp 391. Kusītatā {Kusitata} (f.) [abstr. fr. kusīta] in a° alertness, brightness, keenness VvA 138. Kusuma {Kusuma} (nt.) any flower J III.394 (°dāma); V.37; PvA 157 (=puppha); VvA 42; Dpvs I.4; Sdhp 246, 595; Dāvs V.51 (°agghika), fig. vimutti° the flower of emancipation Th 1, 100; Miln 399. Kusumita {Kusumita} (adj.) in flower, blooming VvA 160, 162. Kusumbha {Kusumbha} (nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J V.211 (°rattavattha); VI.264 (do); Khus IV.2. Kussubbha & Kussobbha {Kussubbha} {Kussobbha} (nt.) [Sk. kuśvabhra] a small pond, usually combd with kunnadī and appld in similes: S II.32=A I.243=V.114; S II.118; V.47, 63, 395; A II.140; IV.100; Sn 720; PvA 29; DA I.58. Kuha {Kuha} dan, E. hide] deceitful, fraudulent, false, in phrase kuhā thaddhā lapā singī A II.26=Th 1, 959= It 113. - akuha honest, upright M I.386; Sn 957; Miln 352. Kuhaka {Kuhaka} [der. fr. prec.] deceitful, cheating; a cheat, a fraud, combd with lapaka D I.8; A III.111. - A V.159 sq.; Sn 984, 987; J I.375 (°tāpasa); DhA IV.152 (°brāhmaṇa); IV.153 (°cora); Miln 310, 357; PvA 13; DA I.91. Kuhanā {Kuhana} (f.) [abstr. fr. adj. kuhana=kuhaka] 1. deceit, fraud, hypocrisy, usually in combn kuhana-lapana "deceit and talking-over"=deceitful talk D I.8; A III.430; DA I.92; Miln 383; Nd2 on avajja. - M I.465=It 28, 29; S IV.118; A V.159 sq.; Vism 23; Vbh 352; Sdhp 375. - 2. menacing SnA 582. - Opp. akuhaka Sn 852. - Var. commentator's derivations are kuhāyanā (fr. kuhanā) and kuhitattaṃ (fr. kuheti), to be found at Vism 26. -vatthūni (pl.) cases or opportunities of deceit, three of which are discussed at Nd2 on nikkuha, mentioned also at Vism 24; DA I.91 & SnA 107. Kuhara {Kuhara} (nt.) (der. fr. kuha) a hole, a cavity; lit. a hidingplace Dāvs I.62. Kuhiṃ {Kuhim} see under ku°. Pāli Text Society 525 Pāli-English Dictionary Kuhilikā {Kuhilika} (pl.) kuhali flowers Attanugaluvaṃsa 216. Kuhīyati {Kuhiyati} only in pahaṃsīyati+k° "he exults and rejoices" at Miln 325 (cp. Miln trsl. II.220, where printed kuhūyati). Kuheti {Kuheti} [v. denom. fr. kuha] to deceive DA 91; ger. kuhitvā deceiving J VI.212. Kūjati {Kujati} [kuj, expld with guj at Dhtp 78 by "avyatte sadde"] to sing (of birds; cp. vikūjati) J II.439; IV.296; Dāvs V.51. - pp. kūjita see abhi°, upa°. Kūṭa1 {Kuta} (nt.) [Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl. kuṭ of kūṭa1 by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. paleu/w to trap birds] a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap J I.143 (kūṭapāsādi); IV.416 (expln paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā° kaṃsa° māna° "cheating with weight, coin and measure" (DA I.78=vañcana) D I.5=III.176=S V.473=M I.180 =A II.209; V.205=Pug 58. māna° PvA 278. - As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds. - Note. kūṭe J I.145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya, cp. ghaṭa). -aṭṭa a false suit, in °kāra a false suitor J II.2; DhA I.353; -jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic J I.375; DhA I.40; -māna false measure PvA 191; -vāṇija a false-trader Pv III.42; PvA 191; -vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) PvA 210. -vedin lier, calumniator J IV.177. Kūṭa2 {Kuta} (m. nt.) [Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. kolwno/s kolofw/n; Ags. holm, E. hill] - (a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha° ridge of the cloud Vv I.1 (=sikhara); aṃsa° shoulder, clavicle, VvA 121, 123 pabbata° mountain peak Vin II.193; J I.73. Cp. koṭa. - (b) the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A I.261; Vv 784 (=kaṇṇikā VvA 304); gaha° Dh 154; PvA 55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra. - (c) a heap, an accumulation, in sankāra° dust-heap M II.7; PvA 144. - (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaṃ gahetvā or desanā kūtaṃ gaṇhanto "leading up to the climax of the instruction" J I.275, 393, 401; V.151; VI.478; VvA 243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto J I.114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiṃ ThA 99. -anga the shoulder Vv 158 (=VvA 123). āgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin I.268; S II.103= V.218; III.156; IV.186; V.43, 75, 228; A I.101, 261; III.10, 364; IV.231; V.21; Pv III.17; 221; Vv 82 (=ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto VvA 50); VvA 6 (upari°, with upper storey) v. l. kuṭṭhāgāra; PvA 282 (°dhaja with a flag on the summit); DhA IV.186. In cpds.: -° matta as big as an upper chamber J I.273; Miln 67; -°sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DA I.43) Vin III.15, 68, 87; IV.75; D I.150; S II.103=V.218; IV.186. -(n)gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit S II.263= III.156=V.43; -ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable, in phrase vañjha k° esikaṭṭhāyin D I.14=56= S III.211=M I.517 (expl. DA I.105 by pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhita); -poṇa at Vism 268 is to be read °goṇa: see kūṭa4. Kūṭa3 {Kuta} (nt.) [*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. kla/w, ko/los, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. kladaro/s. The expln of kuṭ3 at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is "āko ṭane"] a hammer, usually as aya° an iron sledge hammer J I.108; or ayo° PvA 284; ayomaya° Sn 669; kammāra° Vism 254. Kūṭa4 {Kūṭa} (adj.) [Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed. The expln of kuṭ as "chede," or "chedane" (cutting) at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa] without horns, i. e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin IV.5=J I.192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the Pāli Text Society 526 Pāli-English Dictionary point & translates "rascal"). These maimed oxen (cows & calves) are represented Qs practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism 268, 269: kūṭa-goṇa- (so read for °poṇa)yutta-ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaṃ dhāvati runs the wrong way); kūṭa-dhenuyā khīraṃ pivitvā kūṭa-vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post. - Kūṭadanta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning "ox-tooth" (derisively) (D I.127; Vism 208), with which may be compared danta-kūṭa (see under danta). Kūṭeyya {Kuteyya} (nt.) [der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa1, cp. in formation sāṭheyya] fraud, deceit, in combn with sāṭheyya & vankeyya M I.340; A V.167. Kūpa (m.) [Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior= cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. ku/pellon cup; also Gr. ku/mbh, Sk. kumbha; - (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi° the socket of the eye M I.80, 245; DhsA 306; gūtha° a cesspool D II.324; Sn 279; Pv II.316; Pug 36; miḷha° a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma° the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA I.57; Vism 262, 360; also in na loma-kūpamattaṃ pi not even a hairroot J I.31; III.55; vacca°=gūtha° Vin II.141, 222. As a tank or a well: J VI.213; VvA 305. - 2. the mast of a boat J III.126; Miln 363, 378. See next. -khaṇa one who digs a pit J VI.213. -tala the floor of a pit Vism 362. {Kupa} Kūpaka {Kupaka} =kūpa 1. Vism 361 (akkhi°), 362 (nadītīra°), 449 (id.); =kūpa. 2. J II.112; IV.17. Kūla {Kula} (nt.) [Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe] a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: S I.143=J III.361; A I.162; Sn 977; J I.227; Miln 36: udapāna° the facing of a well Vin II.122; vaccakūpassa k° the sides of a cesspool Vin II.141. See also paṃsu°, & cp. uk°, upa°, paṭi°. Kūra {Kura} (nt.) in sukkha° boiled rice (?) Vin IV.86; DhA II.171. Keka {Keka} [?] N. of a tree J V.405. Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests misreading for koka Phœnix sylvestris. Keṭubha [deriv. unknown] expld by Buddhaghosa DA I. 247 as "the science which assists the officiating priests by laying down rules for the rites, or by leaving them to their discretion" (so Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 116). In short, the ritual; the kalpa as it is called as one of the vedangas. Only in a stock list of the subject a learned Brahmin is supposed to have mastered D I.88; A I.163, 166; Sn 1020; Miln 10, 178. So in BSk; AvŚ II.19; Divy 619. {Ketubha} Keṭubhin [deriv. unknown] MA 152 (on M I 32) has "trained deceivers (sikkhitā kerātikā); very deceitful, false all through"; III.6=A III.199. {Ketubhin} Ketaka {Ketaka} [etym. uncertain] N. of a flower J IV.482. Ketana {Ketana} sign etc., see saṃ°. Ketu {Ketu} [Vedic ketu, *(s)qait, clear; cp. Lat. caelum (=*caidlom), Ohg heitar, heit; Goth. haidus; E. -hood, orig. appearance, form, like] - 1. ray, beam of light, splendour, effulgence Th 1, 64; which is a riddle on the various meanings of ketu. - 2. flag, banner, sign, perhaps as token of splendour Th 1, 64. dhamma-k° having the Doctrine as his banner A I.109=III.149; Pāli Text Society 527 Pāli-English Dictionary dhūma-k° having smoke as its splendour, of fire, J IV.26; VvA 161 in expln of dhūmasikha. kamyatā desire for prominence, self-advertisement (perhaps vainglory, arrogance) Vism 469; Dhs 1116 (Dhs A. trs. 479), 1233=Nd2 505; Nd1 on Sn 829 (=uṇṇama); - mālā "garland of rays" VvA 323. Ketuṃ {Ketum} see kayati. Ketuvant {Ketuvant} (adj.) [fr. ketu] having flags, adorned with flags VvA 50. Kedāra {Kedara} (m. nt.) an irrigated field, prepared for ploughing, arable land in its first stage of cultivation: kedāre pāyetvā karissāma "we shall till the fields after watering them" J I.215; as square-shaped (i. e. marked out as an allotment) Vin I.391 (caturassa°; Bdhgh on MV VIII.12, 1); J III.255 (catukkaṇṇa°); surrounded by a trench, denoting the boundary (-mariyādā) DhA III.6. - J IV.167; V.35; PvA 7 (=khetta). The spelling is sometimes ketāra (J III.255 v. l.) see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 112. Note. The prefix ke- suggests an obsolete noun of the meaning "water," as also in kebuka, ke-vaṭṭa; perhaps Sk. kṣvid, kṣvedate, to be wet, ooze? ke would then be k(h)ed, and kedara= ked+dṛ, bursting forth of water=inundation; kebuka =kedvu(d)ka (udaka); kevaṭṭa=ked+vṛ, moving on the water, fisherman; (cp. AvŚ Index Kaivarta: name of an officer on board a trading vessel). -koṭi top or corner-point of a field Vism 180. Kebuka {Kebuka} [on ke- see note to prec.] water J VI.38 (=42: k. vuccati udakaṃ). As nadī a river at J III.91, where Seruma at similar passage p. 189. Keyūra {Keyura} (nt.) a bracelet, bangle DhA II.220 (v. l. kāyura). Keyūrin {Keyurin} (adj.) wearing a bracelet PvA 211 (=kāyūrin). Keyya {Keyya} (ger. of kayati) for sale J VI.180 (=vikkiṇitabba). Kerāṭika {Keratika} (adj.) [fr. kirāṭa] deceitful, false, hypocritic J I.461 (expld by biḷāra); IV.220; IV.223 (=kirāsa); MA 152; DhA III.389 (=saṭha). - a° honest, frank J V.117 (=akitava, ajūtakara). Kerāṭiya {Keratiya} =prec. J III.260 (°lakkhaṇa); MA 152. Kelisā {Kelisa} at Th 1, 1010 is to be corrected into keḷiyo (see keḷi2). Keḷanā {Kelana} (f.) [fr. kilissati? or is it kheḷana?] desire, greed, usually shown in fondness for articles of personal adornment: thus "selfishness" Vbh 351=DA I.286 (+paṭikeḷanā). In this passage it is given as a rather doubtful expln of cāpalla, which would connect it with kṣvel to jump, or khel to swing, oscillate, waver, cp. expln Dhtp 278 kela khela=calane. Another passage is Nd2 585, where it is combd with parikeḷanā and acts as syn. of vibhūsanā. Keḷāyati {Kelayati} [Denom. fr. kīḷ in meaning "to amuse oneself with," i. e. take a pride in. Always combd with mamāyati. BSk. same meaning (to be fond of): śālikṣetrāṇi k. gopāyati Divy 631. Morris. J.P.T.S. 1893, 16 puts it (wrongly?) to kel to quiver: see also keḷanā] to adorn oneself with (acc.), to fondle, treasure, take pride in (gen.) M I.260 (allīyati kelāyati dhanāyati Pāli Text Society 528 Pāli-English Dictionary mamāyati, where dhanāyati is to be read as vanāyati as shown by v. l. S. III.190 & M I.552); S III.190 (id.); Miln 73. - pp. keḷāyita. Keḷāyana {Kelayana} (nt.) [fr. keḷāyati, cp. kelanā & keḷi] playfulness, unsettledness Vism 134 (opp. majjhatta), 317. Keḷāyita {Kelayita} [pp. of keḷāyati] desired, fondled, made much of J IV.198 (expld with the ster. phrase kelāyati mamāyati pattheti piheti icchatī ti attho). Keḷāsa {Kelasa} (cp. Sk. kailāsa] N. of a mountain Bdhd 138. Keḷi1 {Keli} (f.) [fr. krīḍ to play, sport: see kīḷati] 1. play, amusement, sport PvA 265 (=khiḍḍā); parihāsa° merry play, fun J I.116. - 2. playing at dice, gambling, in °maṇḍala "circle of the game," draught-board; °ṃ bhindati to break the board, i. e. to throw the die over the edge so as to make the throw invalid (cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut, plate 45) J I.379. Keḷi2 {Keli} (f.) [either fr. kil as in kilijjati & kilissati, or fr. kel, as given under keḷanā] the meaning is not quite defined, it may be taken as "attachment, lust, desire," or "selfishness, deceit" (cp. kerāṭika & kilissati), or "unsettledness, wavering." -keḷi-sīla of unsettled character, unreliable, deceitful PvA 241. °sīlaka id. J II.447. - pañca citta-keḷiyo=pañca nīvaraṇāni (kāmacchanda etc.), the gratifications of the heart Th 1, 1010 (corr. kelisā to keḷiyo!). - citta-keḷiṃ kīḷantā bahuṃ pāpakammaṃ katvā enjoying themselves (wrongly) to their heart's content J III.43. Cp. kāmesu a-ni-kīḷitāvin unstained by desires S I.9, 117. Kevaṭṭa {Kevatta} [on ke- see kedāra] fisherman D I.45 (in simile of dakkho k°) A III.31=342, cp. IV.91; Ud 24 sq.; J I.210; DhA II.132; IV.41; PvA 178 (°gāma, in which to be reborn, is punishment, fishermen being considered outcast); cp. J VI.399 N. of a brahmin minister, also D I.411 N. of Kevaḍḍha (?). -dvāra N. of one of the gates of Benares, and a village near by Vv 197; VvA 97. Kevala {Kevala} (adj.-adv.) [cp. Lat. caelebs=*caivilo-b° to live by oneself, i. e. to live in celibacy, perhaps also, Goth. hails, Ohg. heil, E. whole] expression of the concept of unity and totality: only, alone; whole, complete; adv. altogether or only - 1. °ṃ (adv.) (a) only=just: k. tvaṃ amhākaṃ vacanaṃ karohi "do all we tell you" PvA 4; - only=but, with this difference: VvA 203, 249; - k. . . . vippalapati he only talks PvA 93; - and yet: "sakkā nu kiðci adatvā k. sagge nibbattituṃ? " is it possible not to give anything, and yet go to heaven? kevalaṃ manopasāda-mattena only by purity of mind DhA I.33; kevalaṃ vacchake balava-piyacittatāya simply by the strong love towards the babycalf Vism 313; (b) alone: k. araññaṃ gamissāmi VvA 260; - exclusive Miln 247. - na k. . . . atha kho not only . . . but also VvA 227. - 2. whole, entire Sn p. 108; Cp. I.1019; Pv II.63 (=sakala PvA 95); Vism 528 (=asammissa, sakala); Pv II.63 (=sakala PvA 95). - k.>akevala entire>deficient M I.326. °ṃ entirely, thoroughly, all round: k° obhāsenti VvA 282. -kappa a whole kappa Sn pp. 18, 45, 125; KhA 115; VvA 124, 255. paripuṇṇa fulfilled in its entirety (sakala DA I.177) of the Doctrine; expld also at Nett 10. Kevalin {Kevalin} (adj.) [fr. kevala] one who is fully accomplished, an Arahant; often with mahesi and uttamapurisa. Defn sabbaguṇa - paripuṇṇa sabba - yoga - visaṃyutta Sn A 153. - ye suvimuttā te kevalino ye kevalino vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññāpanāya S III.59 sq., i. e. "those who are thoroughly emancipated, these are the accomplished . . ."; kevalīnaṃ mahesiṃ Pāli Text Society 529 Pāli-English Dictionary khīṇ'āsavaṃ Sn 82=S I.167; - k. vusitavā uttamapuriso Nd2 on tiṇṇa=A V.16. - with gen.: brahmacariyassa k. "perfected in morality" A II.23. - As Ep. of "brāhmaṇa" Sn 519=Nd2 s. v.; of dhammacakka A II.9; see also Sn 490, 595. - akevalin not accomplished, not perfected Sn 878, 891. Kesa {Kesa} [Vedic keśa; cp. kesara hair, mane=Lat. caesaries, hair of the head, Ags. heord=E. hair] the hair of the head S I.115 (haṭa-haṭa-k°, with dishevelled hair); A I.138 (palita-kesa with grey hair; also at J I.59); Sn 456 (nivutta°), 608; Th 1, 169; J I.59, 138; III.393; Miln 26; KhA 42; Vism 353 (in detail). The wearing of long hair was forbidden to the Bhikkhus: Vin II.107 sq.; 133 (cp. kesa-massu); - dark (glossy) hair is a distinction of beauty: susukāḷa-keso (of Gotama) D I.115; cp. kaṇha and kalyāṇa; PvA 26. - The hair of Petas is long and dishevelled PvA 56; Sdhp 103; it is the only cover of their nakedness: kesehi paṭicchanna "covered only with my hair" Pv I.102. - kesesu gahetvā to take by the hair (in Niraya) D I.234; - kesaṃ oropeti to have one's hair cut Vin II.133. -oropaṇa (-satthaka) (a) hair-cutting (knife), i. e. a razor DhA I.431; -ohāraka one who cuts the hair, a barber Vism 413. -kambala a hair blanket (according to Bdhgh human hair) D I.167=A I.240, 295=II.206= Vin I.305=M I.78=Pug 55; A I.286. -kambalin wearing a hair blanket (of Ajita) D I.55. -kalāpā (pl.) (atimanohara°) beautiful tresses PvA 46; -kalyāṇa beauty of hair DhA I.387; -kārika hairdresser Vv 175; -dhātu the hairrelic (of the Buddha) J I.81; -nivāsin covered only with hair of Petas (: keseh'eva paṭicchādita-kopīnā) Pv III.16. °massu hair and beard; kappita-k°-m° (adj.) with h. and b. dressed D I.104; A IV.94; J VI.268. Esp. freq. in form kesa-massuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, dress in yellow robes and leave the home for the homeless state," i. e. renounce the world and take up the life of a Wanderer D I.60, 115; III.60, 64, 76; A I.107; III.386; It 75; Pug 57; similarly A II.207=Pug 56. -sobha the splendour or beauty of the hair PvA 46. -hattha a tuft of hair PvA 157; VvA 167. Kesayati {Kesayati} see kisa. Kesara1 {Kesara} a mane, in -sīha a maned lion J II.244; SnA 127. Kesara2 {Kesara} [fr. kesa] filament of flowers, hairy structures of plants esp. of the lotus; usually of kiñjakkha PvA 77; VvA 12; 111; - sa-kesarehi padumapattehi lotusleaves with their hairs VvA 32; nicula-k° fibres of the Nicula tree VvA 134. -bhāra a sort of fan (cp. vāladhi and cāmara) VvA 278. Kesarin {Kesarin} [fr. kesara1] having a mane, of a lion, also name of a battle-array (°saṃgāmo) Dpvs I.7; cp. AvŚ I.56. Kesava {Kesava} [fr. last] of rich hair, of beautiful hair. Ep. of King Vāsudeva (cp. kaṇha) Pv II.62. Kesika {Kesika} (adj.) [fr. kesa] hairy, of mangoes Miln 334. Ko {Ko} see ka. Koka1 {Koka} [not=Sk. koka, cuckoo] a wolf J VI.525; Nd1 13= Nd2 420; Miln 267=J V.416. °vighāsa remainder of a wolf's meal Vin III.58. Pāli Text Society 530 Pāli-English Dictionary Koka2 {Koka} [cp. Sk. koka] N. of a tree, Phœnix sylvestris: see keka. Kokanada {Kokanada} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kokanada] the (red) lotus A III.239=J I.116. Kokāsika {Kokasika} the red lotus in °jāta the red lotus in °jāta "like the red lotus," said of the flower of the Pāricchattaka tree A IV.118. Kokila {Kokila} [cp. Sk. koka a kind of goose, also cuckoo, with derivation kokila cuckoo; cp. Gr. ko/kkuc, Lat. cuculus, E. cuckoo] the Indian cuckoo. Two kinds mentioned at VvA 57: kāḷa° and phussa° black and speckled k. - As citra° at J V.416. - Vv 111, 588; VvA 132, 163. Koca {Koca} [fr. kuc] see saṃ°. Koci {Koci} see ka. Koccha1 {Koccha} (nt.) some kind of seat or settee, made of bark, grass or rushes Vin II.149; IV.40 (where the foll. def. is given: kocchaṃ nāma vāka-mayaṃ vā usīra-mayaṃ vā muðjamayaṃ vā babbaja-mayaṃ vā anto saṃveṭhetvā baddhaṃ hoti. Cp. Vin. Texts I.34; III.165); J V.407. Also in list of 16 obstructions (palibodhā) at Miln 11. Koccha2 {Koccha} (nt.) a comb (for hair-dressing) Vin II.107; Vv 8446 (=VvA 349); Th 2, 254, 411 (=ThA 267). -kāra a comb-maker Miln 331 (not in corresp. list of vocations at D I.51). Koja {Koja} mail armour J IV.296 (=kavaca). Kojava {Kojava} a rug or cover with long hair, a fleecy counterpane Vin I.281; DhA I.177; III.297 (pāvāra°); Dāvs V.36. Often in expln of goṇaka (q. v.) as dīgha-lomaka mahākojava DA I.86; PvA 157. Koñca1 {Konca} [cp. Sk. krauðca & kruðc] the heron, often in combn with mayūra (peacock): Th 1, 1113; Vv 111, 358; J V.304; VI.272; or with haṃsa Pv II.123. - Expld as sārasa VvA 57; jiṇṇa° an old heron Dh 155. Koñca2 {Konca} = abbr. of koñca-nāda, trumpeting, in koðcaṃ karoti to trumpet (of elephants) Vin III.109; J VI.497. -nāda the trumpeting of an elephant ("the heron's cry") [not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 163 sq. to kruñc. (meaning to bend, cp. Lat. crux, E. ridge), but prob. a contamination of krośa, fr. krus to crow, and kuðja=kuðjara, elephant (q. v.). Partly suggested at Divy 251; see also expln at VvA 35, where this connection is quite evident.] J I.50; Miln 76 (in etymol. play with koñca); VvA 35. -rāva=prec. DhA IV.70. -vādikā a kind of bird J VI.538. Koṭa {Kota} [fr. kūṭa2] belonging to a peak, in cpd. °pabbata "peak-mountain," Npl. Vism 127 (write as K°), 292. Koṭacikā {Kotacika} pudendum muliebre, in conn. with kāṭa as a vile term of abuse Vin IV.7 (Bdhgh. koṭacikā ti itthinimittaṃ . . . hīno nāma akkoso). Pāli Text Society 531 Pāli-English Dictionary Koṭi {Koti} (f.) [cp. Sk. koṭi & kūṭa2] the end-(a) of space: the extreme part, top, summit, point (cp. anta to which it is opposed at J VI.371): dhanu-koṭiṃ nissāya "through the (curved) end of my bow," i. e. by means of hunting J II.200; aṭṭhi-koṭi the tip of the bone J III.26; cāpa° a bow VvA 261; vema° the part of a loom that is moved DhA III.175; khetta° the top (end) of the field SnA 150; cankamana° the far end of the cloister J IV.30; PvA 79. - (b) of time: a division of time, with reference either to the past or the future, in pubba° the past (cp. pubbanta), also as purima°; and pacchima° the future (cp. aparanta). These expressions are used only of saṃsāra: saṃsārassa purimā koṭi na paððāyati "the first end, i. e. the beginning of S. is not known" Nd2 664; DhsA 11; of pacchimā koṭi ibid. - anamatagg' āyaṃ saṃsāro, pubba° na paððāyati S's end and beginning are unthinkable, its starting-point is not known (to beings obstructed by ignorance) S II.178=III.149= Nd2 664=Kvu 29=PvA 166; cp. Bdhd 118 (p.k. na ðāyati). - koṭiyaṃ ṭhito bhāvo "my existence in the past" J I.167. - (c) of number: the "end" of the scale, i. e. extremely high, as numeral representing approximately the figure a hundred thousand (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie. p. 336). It follows on satasahassāni Nd2 664, and is often increased by sata° or sahassa°, esp. in records of wealth (dhana) Sn 677; J I.227, 230, 345=DhA I.367 (asīti°-vibhavo); J I.478; PvA 3, 96; cp. also koṭisatā arahanto Miln 6, 18. - kahāpaṇa-koṭisanthārena "for the price (lit. by the spreading out) of 10 million kahāpaṇas" Vin II.159= J I.94 (ref. to the buying of Jetavana by Anāthapiṇḍika). -gata "gone to the end," having reached the end, i. e. perfection, nibbāna. Nd2 436; -ppatta=prec. Nd2 436; as "extreme" J I.67. -simbalī N. of a tree (in Avīci) Sdhp 194. Koṭika {Kotika} (adj.) [fr. koṭi] 1. having a point or a top, with ref. to the human teeth as eka°, dvi°, ti°, catu°, or teeth with one, two, etc., points Vism 251. - 2. having an end or climax SA on pariyanta (see KS. p. 320); āpāna° lasting till the end of life Miln 397: Vism 10. - 3. referring to (both) ends (of saṃsāra), in ubhato° paðhā questions regarding past & future M I.393 sq. Koṭin {Kotin} (adj.) [fr. koṭi] aiming for an end or goal J VI.254 (cp. ākoṭana2). Koṭilla {Kotilla} (nt.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness Dhtm 526; Abhp 859. As koṭilya at Dhtp 472. Koṭumbara {Kotumbara} (nt.) [cp. BSk. kauṭumba Divy 559] a kind of cloth J VI.47 (coming from the kingdom of k.), 500 (spelt kodumb°). -°ka k.-stuffs Miln 2. Koṭṭa {Kotta} (?) breaking, asi-k° note on Vin IV.363 (for asikoṭṭha Vin IV.171?); °aṭṭhi at Vism 254 read koṭṭh°. Koṭṭana {Kottana} [fr. koṭṭeti] 1. grinding, crushing, pounding (grains) J I.475; °pacan'ādi pounding and cooking, etc. DhA II.261. - 2. hammering or cutting (?) in dāru° J II.18; VI.86 (maṃsa°, here "beating," T. spells ṭṭh). Cp. adhikuṭṭanā. Koṭṭita {Kottita} (pp. of kotteti] beaten down, made even Vism 254, 255. Koṭṭima {Kottima} a floor of pounded stones, or is it cloth? Dāvs IV.47. Koṭṭeti {Kotteti} [cp. Sk. kuṭ & kuṭṭa1. Expld one-sidedly by Dhtp (91 & 556) as "chedane" which is found only in 3 and adhikuṭṭanā. The meaning "beat" is attributed by Dhtp (557) & Dhtm (783) to root kuṭ3 (see kūṭa3) by expla "akoṭane." Cp. also kūṭa4; ākoṭeti & paṭikoṭeti]-1. to beat, Pāli Text Society 532 Pāli-English Dictionary smash, crush, pound J I.478; VI.366 (spelt ṭṭh); DhA I.25 (suvaṇṇaṃ) 165. - 2. to make even (the ground or floor) Vin II.291 (in making floors); J VI.332. - 3. to cut, kill SnA 178 (=hanti of Sn 121); DhA I.70 (pharasunā). - pp. koṭṭita. - Caus. koṭṭāpeti to cause to beat, to massage Vin II.266; J IV.37 (ṭṭ the only v. l. B.; T. has ṭṭh). Koṭṭha1 {Kottha} (m. nt.) [Sk. koṣṭha abdomen, any cavity for holding food, cp. kuṣṭa groin, and also Gr. ku/tos cavity, ku/sdos pudendum muliebre, ku/stis bladder = E. cyst, chest; Lat. cunnus pudendum, Ger. hode testicle] anything hollow and closed in (Cp. gabbha for both meanings) as - 1. the stomach or abdomen Miln 265, Vism 357; Sdhp 257. - 2. a closet, a monk's cell, a storeroom, M I.332; Th 2, 283 (?)=ThA, 219; J II.168. - 3. a sheath, in asi° Vin IV.171. aṭṭhi a stomach bone or bone of the abdomen Vism 254, 255. -abbhantara the intestinal canal Miln 67; -āgāra (nt.) storehouse, granary, treasury: in conn. with kosa (q. v.) in formula paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra (adj.) D I.134, expld at DA I.295 as threefold, viz. dhana° dhaðða° vattha°, treasury, granary, warehouse; PvA 126, 133; -āgārika a storehouse-keeper, one who hoards up wealth Vin I.209; DhA I.101; -āsa [=koṭṭha +aṃsa] share, division, part; °koṭṭhāsa (adj.) divided into, consisting of. K. is a prose word only and in all Com. passages is used to explain bhāga: J I.254; 266; VI.368; Miln 324; DhA IV.; 108 (=pada), 154; PvA 58, 111, 205 (kāma°=kāmaguṇā); VvA 62; anekena k°-ena infinitely PvA 221. Koṭṭha2 {Kottha} a bird J VI.539 (woodpecker?). Koṭṭha3 {Kottha} [cp. Sk. kuṭṭha] N. of a plant, Costus speciosus (?) J V.420. Koṭṭhaka1 {Kotthaka} (nt.) "a kind of koṭṭha," the stronghold over a gateway, used as a store-room for various things, a chamber, treasury, granary Vin II.153, 210; for the purpose of keeping water in it Vin II.121=142; 220; treasury J I.230; II.168; - store-room J II.246; koṭthake pāturahosi appeared at the gateway, i. e. arrived at the mansion Vin I.291.; - udaka-k a bathroom, bath cabinet Vin I.205 (cp. Bdhgh's expln at Vin. Texts II.57); so also nahāna-k° and piṭṭhi-k°, bath-room behind a hermitage J III.71; DhA II.19; a gateway, Vin II.77; usually in cpd. dvāra-k° "door cavity," i. e. room over the gate: gharaṃ satta-dvāra-koṭṭhakapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ "a mansion adorned with seven gateways" J I.227=230, 290; VvA 322. dvāra-koṭṭhakesu āsanāni paṭṭhapenti "they spread mats in the gateways" VvA 6; esp. with bahi: bahidvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā "leading him out in front of the gateway" A IV.206; °e thiṭa or nisinna standing or sitting in front of the gateway S I.77; M I.161, 382; A III.30. - bala-k. a line of infantry J I.179. - koṭṭhaka-kamma or the occupation connected with a storehouse (or bathroom?) is mentioned as an example of a low occupation at Vin IV.6; Kern, Toev. s. v. "someone who sweeps away dirt." Koṭṭhaka2 {Kotthaka} [cp. Sk. koyaṣṭika] the paddy-bird, as rukkha° J III.25; II.163 (v. l. ṭṭ). Koṭṭhu {Kotthu} see kotthu. Koṭṭheti {Kottheti} at J II.424 the v. l. khobheti (nāvaṃ) should be substituted. See also koṭṭeti. Koṇa {Kona} [cp. Sk. koṇa & also P. kaṇṇa] 1. a corner Vin II.137; catu°=catu-kaṇṇa PvA 52; °racchā crossroads PvA 24. - 2. a plectrum for a musical instrument Miln 53. Pāli Text Society 533 Pāli-English Dictionary Koṇṭa {Konta} (v. l. B. koṇḍa) (?) a man of dirty habits J II.209. 210, 212. Koṇṭha {Kontha} a cripple J II.118. Koṇḍa {Konda} - damaka (?) [cp. kuṇḍa] J IV.389; also as v. l. B at J II.209. Koṇḍañña {Kondanna} a well-known gotta J II.360. Kotūhala (nt.) [on formation cp. kolāhala; see also kutūhala] excitement, tumult, festival, fair Dāvs II.80; esp. in °mangalaṃ paccāgacchati he visits the fair or show of . . . M I.265; A. III.439; °mangalika celebrating feasts, festive A III.206; J I.373; Miln 94 (cp. Miln trsl. I.143n: the native commentator refers it to erroneous views and discipline called kotūhala and mangalika) - (b) adj.: kotūhala excited, eager for, desirous of Miln 4; DhA I.330. -sadda shout of excitement Miln 301. {Kotuhala} Kotthalī {Kotthali} (koṭṭhalī?) a sack (?) Vin III.189=IV.269. Kotthu {Kotthu} [koṭṭhu J only: cp. Sk. kroṣṭu, of kruś] a jackal D III.25, 26; M I.334; Nd1 149 (spelt koṭṭhu); J VI.537 (°sunā: expld by sigāla-sunakhā, katthu-soṇā ti pi pāṭho). kotthuka (and koṭṭhuka)=prec. S I.66 (where text has kutthaka) J II.108; Miln 23. Kodaṇḍa {Kodanda} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kodaṇḍa] a cross-bow M I.429 (opp. to cāpa); Miln 351 (dhanu and k°). °ka same J IV.433 (expld by dhanu). Kodumbara {Kodumbara} see koṭumbara. Kodha {Kodha} [Vedic krodha fr. krudh, cp. kujjhati] anger. Nearest synonyms are āghāta (Dhs. 1060=Nd2 576, both expositions also of dosa), upanāha (always in chain rāga, dosa, moha, kodha, upanāha) and dhūma (cp. qumo/s, Mhg. toûm=anger). As pair k. and upanāha A I.91, 95; in sequence kodha upanāha makkha paḷāsa, etc. Nd2 rāga 1.; Vbh 357 sq.; Vism 53, 107, 306; in formula abhijjhā byāpāda k. upanāha M I.36; A I.299=IV.148; cp. A IV.456=V.209; V.39, 49 sq., 310, 361. As equivalent of āghāta Dhs 1060=Nd2 576, cp. Pug 18. In other combn: with mada and thambha Sn 245; kadariya Sn 362; pesuniya Sn 928; mosavajja Sn 866, 868 (cp. S I.169). Other passages, e. g. A I.283; S I.240; Sn 537, (lobha°); Pv II.37; Dh I.52 (anattha-janano kodho); PvA 55, 222. - kodha is one of the obstacles to Arahantship, and freedom from kodha is one of the fundamental virtues of a wellbalanced mind. - mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi "let not anger get the better of you" S I.240; māno hi te brāhmaṇa khāribhāro kodho dhūmo bhasmani mosavajjaṃ, etc. "anger is the smoke (smouldering) in the ashes" S I.169=Nd2 576. - kodhaṃ chetvā cutting off anger S I.41=47=161=237; kodhaṃ jahe vippajaheyya mānaṃ "give up anger, renounce conceit" J I.23 25=Dh 221; kodhaṃ pajahanti vipassino: "the wise give up anger" It 2=7; panuṇṇa-kodha (adj.) one who has driven out anger Sn 469; akkodhena jine kodhaṃ conquer anger by meekness Dh 223=J II.4= VvA 69. Yo ye uppatitaṃ kodhaṃ rathaṃ bhantaṃ va dhāraye tam ahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi - "He who restrains rising anger as he would a drifting cart, him I call a waggoner" Dh 222, cp. Sn 1. - akkodha freedom from anger, meekness, conciliation M I.44; S I.240 (with avihiṃsā tenderness, kindness); A I.95; Dh 223=J II.4=VvA 69. ātimāna anger and conceit Sn 968. -upāyāsa companionship or association with anger, the state of being pervaded with anger (opp. akkodh°) M I.360, 363; often compared with Pāli Text Society 534 Pāli-English Dictionary phenomena of nature suggesting swelling up, viz. "uddhumāyika" kodhupāyāsassa adhivacanaṃ M I.144; "sa-ummī" It 114; "sobbho papāto" S III.109; -garu "having respect for" i. e. pursuing anger (opp. saddhammagaru) A II.46 sq., 84; -paððāṇa (adj.) knowing the true nature of anger Sn 96 (cp. SnA 170); -bhakkha feeding on, i. e. fostering anger, Ep. of a Yakkha S I.238; -vinaya the discipline or control of anger A I.91; V.165, 167 (combd. with upanāha vinaya). Kodhana {Kodhana} (adj.) [fr. kodha) having anger, angry, uncontrolled]; usually in combn with upanāhin, e. g. Vin II.89; D III.45, 246; A V.156, cp. Sn 116; S II.206; Pug 18. - k° kodhābhibhūta A IV.94 sq.; k° kodhavinayassa na vaṇṇavādī A V.165. - Used of caṇḍa PvA 83. - Cp. S IV.240; M I.42 sq., 95 sq.; PvA 82. - akkodhana friendly, well-disposed, loving D III.159; S II.207; iV.243; M I.42 sq., 95 sq.; Sn 19, 624, 8Q0, 941; Vv 155; VvA 69. Konta {Konta} a pennant, standard (cp. kunta) J VI.454; DA I.244; SnA 317. Kontīmant {Kontimant} at J VI.454 is expld by camma-kāra, thus "worker in leather (-shields or armour)," with der. fr. konta ("satthitāya kontāya likhattā . . ."), but reading and meaning are uncertain. Kopa [fr. kup] ill-temper, anger, grudge Vin II.184=Sn 6; Dhs 1060; with appaccaya (mistrust) M I.27; almost exclusively in phrase kopað ca dosað ca appaccayað ca pātukaroti (pātvakāsi) "he shows forth ill-temper, malice and mistrust" (of a "codita" bhikkhu) D III.159; S IV.305; M I.96 sq., 250, 442; A I.124, 187; II.203; III.181 sq.; IV.168, 193; J I.301; Sn p. 92. - akopa (adj.) friendly, without hatred, composed Sn 499. -antara (adj.) one who is under the power of illtemper S I.24. {Kopa} Kopaneyya {Kopaneyya} (adj.) [fr. kopa] apt to arouse anger J VI.257. Kopīna {Kopina} (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaupīna] a loin-cloth J V.404; Pv II.323; PvA 172; Sdhp 106. niddaṃsanin "one who removes the loin-cloth," i. e. shameless, impure D III.183. Kopeti {Kopeti} [caus. of kuppati] to set into agitation, to shake, to disturb: rājadhamme akopetvā not disturbing the royal rules PvA 161; J II.366=DhA IV.88; kammaṃ kopetuṃ Vin IV.153 to find fault with a lawful decision; kāyangaṃ na kopeti not to move a limb of the body: see kāya. Cp. paṭi°, pari°, vi°, saṃ°. Komala {Komala} see kamala; Mhbv 29. Komāra {Komara} [fr. kumāra] (adj.) juvenile, belonging to a youth or maiden: f. komārī a virgin A IV.210. -pati husband of a girl-wife J II.120. -brahmacariyā (°ṃ carati) to practise the vow of chastity or virginity A III.224; ThA 99. -bhacca Np. "master of the k°-science," i. e. of the medical treatment of infants (see note on Vin I.269 at Vin. Texts II.174). As such it is the cognomen of Jīvaka D I.47 (as Komārabhacca DA I.132); Vin I.71; J I.116; cp. Sdhp 351. Komāraka {Komaraka} (and °ika)=prec. A I.261; J II.180 (dhamma virginity); of a young tree S IV.160. -f. °ikā J III.266. Pāli Text Society 535 Pāli-English Dictionary Komudī {Komudi} (f.) [fr. kumuda the white waterlily, cp. Sk. kaumudī] moonlight; the full-moon day in the month Kattika, usually in phrase komudī catumāsinī Vin I.155, 176, sq.; D I.47 (expld at DA I.139 as: tadā kira kumudāni supupphitāni honti) or in phrase komudiyā puṇṇamāya DhA III.461. Koraka {Koraka} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. koraka] 1. a bud J II.265. - 2. a sheath J III.282. Korakita {Korakita} (adj.) [fr. koraka] full of buds VvA 288. Korajika {Korajika} (adj.) [fr. ku+raj or raðj, cp. rāga] affected, excitable, infatuated Nd1 226=Nd2 342 (v. l. kocaraka)=Vism 26 (v. l. korañjika). Koraṇḍaka [=kuraṇḍaka] a shrub and its flower J V.473 (°dāma, so read for karaṇḍaka), VI.536; as Npl. in {Korandaka} Koraṇḍaka {Korandaka} -vihāra Vism 91. Korabya {Korabya} [Sk. kauravya] Np. as cognomen: the descendant of Kuru J II.371 (of Dhanañjaya). Koriyā {Koriya} (f.) a hen v. l. (ti vā pāḷi) at Th 2, 381 for turiyā. See also ThA 255 (=kuðcakārakukkuṭī). Kola {Kola} (m. nt.) [Halāyudha II.71 gives kola in meaning of "hog," corrupted fr. kroḍa] the jujube fruit M I.80; A III.49 (sampanna-kolakaṃ sūkaramaṃsa "pork with jujube"); J III.22 (=badara); VI.578. -mattiyo (pl.) of the size of a j. truit, always comb. w. kolaṭṭhi-mattiyo, of boils A V.170=Sn p. 125, cp. S I.150; -rukkha the j. tree SnA 356; DA I.262; -sampāka cooked with (the juice of) jujube Vv 435 (=VvA 186). Kolankola {Kolankola} [der. fr. kula] going from kula to kula (clan to clan) in saṃsāra: A I.233=Pug 16; S V.205; Nett 189, cp. A IV.381; A V.120. Kolañña {Kolanna} (adj.) [fr. kula] born of (good) family (cp. kulaja); as -°, belonging to the family of . . . D I.89; DA I.252; Miln 256. -khīṇa-kolañña (adj.) one who has come down in the world Vin I.86. Kolaṭṭhi {Kolatthi} the kernel of the jujube, only in cpd. °mattiyo (pl.) S I.150=A V.170=Sn p. 125 (with kolamattiyo), and °mattā Th 2, 498=ThA 289; DhA I.319. Kolaputti {Kolaputti} at A I.38 is composition form of kulaputta, and is to be combined with the foll. -vaṇṇa-pokkharatā, i. e. light colour as becoming a man of good family. Kern, Toev. s. v. quite unnecessarily interprets it as "heroncolour," comparing Sk. kolapuccha heron. A similar passage at Nd1 80=Nd2 505 reads kolaputtikena vā vaṇṇapokkharatāya vā, thus taking kolaputtikaṃ as nt, meaning a man of good virtue. The A passage may be corrupt and should then be read °puttikaṃ. Pāli Text Society 536 Pāli-English Dictionary Kola & Koḷamba {Kola} {Kolamba} VvA) a pot or vessel in general. In Vin always together with ghaṭa, pitcher: Vin I.208, 213, 225, 286; J I.33; DA I.58; VvA 36. Kolāhala (nt.) (cp. also halāhala) shouting, uproar, excitement about (-°), tumult, foreboding, warning about something, hailing. There are 5 kolāhalāni enumd at KhA 120 sq. viz. kappa° (the announcement of the end of the world, cp. Vism 415 sq.), cakkavatti° (of a worldking), buddha° (of a Buddha), mangala° (that a Buddha will pronounce the "eu)agge/lion"), moneyya° (that a monk will enquire of the Lord after the highest wisdom, cp. SnA 490). One may compare the 3 (mahā-)halāhalāni given at J I.48 as kappa-halāhala, buddha° and cakkavatti°, eka-kolāhalaṃ one uproar J IV.404; VI.586; DhA II.96. See also Vin II.165, 275, 280; J V.437; DhA I.190; PvA 4; VvA 132. {Kolahala} Koliya {Koliya} (adj.) [fr. kola] of the fruit of the jujube tree J III.22, but wrongly expld as kuladattika ph.=given by a man of (good) family. Kolīniyā {Koliniya} (f.) well-bred, of good family J II.348 (BB koleyyaka). Koleyyaka {Koleyyaka} (adj.) of good breed, noble, appld to dogs J I.175; IV.437. Cp. kolīniyā, and Divy 165: kolikagadrabha a donkey of good breed. Koḷāpa & Kolāpa {Kolapa} (adj.) 1. dry, sapless; always appld to wood, freq. in similes S IV.161, 185; M I.242; III.95; J III.495; Miln 151; DhA II.51; IV.166. - 2. hollow tree Nd2 40; SnA 355 (where Weber, Ind. Streifen V.1862, p. 429 suggests reading koṭara=Sk. koṭara hollow tree; unwarranted). Koḷikā {Kolika} (or kolika?) (f.) adj.=kolaka, appl. to boils, in pīḷikoḷikā (itthi) having boils of jujube size Th 2, 395 (expl. at ThA 259; akkhidalesu nibbattanakā pīḷikā vuccati). Kovida {Kovida} (adj.) [ku+vid.] one who is in the possession of right wisdom, with ref. either to dhamma, magga, or ariyasaccāni, closely related to medhāvin and paṇḍita. S I.146, 194, 196 (ceto-pariyāya°); A II.46; M I.1, 7, 135, 300, 310, 433; Dh 403=Sn 627; Sn 484 (jātimaraṇa°), 653 (kammavipāka°); Pv I.1112; Vv 159 (=VvA 73), 6330 (=VvA 269); Miln 344; Sdhp 350. -akovida ignorant of true wisdom (dhammassa) S I.162; Sn 763; S IV.287=Nd2 on attānudiṭṭhi. Koviḷāra {Kovilara} [cp. Sk. kovidāra] Bauhinia variegata; a tree in the devaloka (pāricchattaka koviḷāra: k-blossom, called p. VvA 174) A IV.117 sq.; Sn 44; J IV.29; Vv 381; DhA I.270. -puppha the flower of the K. tree SnA 354 (where the limbs of one afflicted with leprosy are compared with this flower). Kosa1 {Kosa} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kośa and koṣa, cavity, box vessel, cp. Goth. hūs, E. house; related also kukṣi=P. kucchi] any cavity or enclosure containing anything, viz. 1. a store-room or storehouse, treasury or granary A IV.95 (rāja°); Sn 525; J IV.409 (=wealth, stores); J VI.81 (aḍḍhakosa only half a house) in cpd. -° koṭṭhāgāra, expld at DA I.295 as koso vuccati bhaṇḍāgāraṃ. Four kinds are mentioned: hatthī°, assā°, rathā°, raṭṭhaṃ°. - 2. a sheath, in khura° Vism 251, paṇṇa° KhA 46. - 3. a vessel or bowl for food: see kosaka. - 4. a cocoon, see °kāraka; - 5. the membranous cover of the male sexual organ, the praeputium J V.197. The Com. expls by sarīra-saṃkhāta k°. See cpd. kosohita. - Cp. also kosī. -ārakkha the keeper of Pāli Text Society 537 Pāli-English Dictionary the king's treasury (or granary) A III.57; -ohita ensheathed, in phrase kosohita vatthaguyha "having the pudendum in a bag." Only in the brahmin cosmogonic myth of the superman (mahā-purisa) D III.143, 161. Applied as to this item, to the Buddha D I.106 (in the Cy DA I.275, correct the misprint kesa into kosa) D II.17; Sn 1022 pp. 106, 107; Miln 167. For the myth see Dial III.132-136. -kāraka the "cocoon-maker," i. e. the silk-worm, Vin III.224; Vism 251. koṭṭhāgāra "treasury and granary" usually in phrase paripuṇṇa -k -k (adj.) "with stores of treasures and other wealth" Vin I.342; D I.134; S I.89; Miln 2; & passim. Kosa2 {Kosa} at VvA 349 is marked by Hardy, Index and trsld by scar or pock. It should be corrected to kesa, on evidence of corresp. passage in ThA 267 (cp. koccha). Kosaka {Kosaka} [fr. kosa] 1. a sheath for a needle J III.282; - 2. a bowl, container, or vessel for food J I.349 (v. l. kesaka); M II.6, 7, (-°āhāra adj. living on a bowl-full of food; also aḍḍha°) Vism 263. - 3. case for a key (kuðcikā°) Vism 251. Kosajja {Kosajja} (nt.) [From kusīta] idleness, sloth, indolence; expld at Vbh 369. - Vin II.2; S V.277-280; A I.11, 16; II.218; III.375, 421; V.146 sq.; 159 sq.; A IV.195= Dh 241; Miln 351; Vism 132; Nett 127; DhA III.347; IV.85; DhsA 146; SnA 21. Kosamattha {Kosamattha} =ka+samattha "who is able," i. e. able, fit DA I.27. Kosalla {Kosalla} (nt.) [der. fr. kusala] proficiency. There are 3 kinds mentioned at D III.220, Vbh 325 & Vism 439 sq., viz. āya°, apāya° and upāya°; at Dhs 16=20=292= 555=Nd2 ad paððā it is classed between paṇḍicca and nepuðða. See also Pug 25; Vism 128 sq. (appanā°), 241 sq. (uggaha° & manasikāra°), 248 (bojjhanga°); PvA 63, 99 (upāya°). Kosātakī {Kosataki} (f.) [cp. Sk. kośQtakī] a kind of creeper Vv 474; Vism 256, 260, 359; VvA 200; bīja the seed of the k. A I.32=V.212. Kosika {Kosika} =kosiya, an owl J V.120. Kosiya {Kosiya} an owl J II.353, cp. Np. Kosiyāyana J I.496. Biḷārakosika (and °kosiya) J IV.69. Kosī {Kosi} (f.) a sheath D I.77=M II.17. Koseyya [der. fr. kosa, cp. Sk. kauśeya silk-cloth and P. kosa-kāraka] silk; silken material Vin I.58=Miln 267; Vin I.192, 281; II.163, 169; D I.7, cp. A I.181 (see DA I.87); A IV.394; Pv II.117; J I.43; VI.47. -pāvāra a silk garment Vin I.281; -vattha a silk garment DhA I.395. {Koseyya} Kohañña {Kohanna} (nt.) [fr. kuhana] hypocrisy, deceit J II.72; III.268; IV.304; DhA I.141. Kvaṇ {Kvan} (indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound ("sadde") at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173. Pāli Text Society 538 Pāli-English Dictionary Kh Kha {Kha} syllable & ending, functioning also as root, meaning "void, empty" or as n. meaning "space"; expld. by Bdhgh with ref. to dukkha as "khaṃ saddo pana tucche; tucchaṃ hi ākāsaṃ khan ti vuccati" Vism 494. - In meaning "space, sky" in cpd. khaga "sky-goer" (cp. viha-ga of same meaning), i. e. bird Abhp 624; Bdhd 56. Khagga {Khagga} [Sk. khaḍga; perhaps to Lat. clades and gladius; cp. also kūṭa3] 1. a sword (often with dhanu, bow) at D I.7 (Dh I.89=asi) as one of the forbidden articles of ornament (cp. BSk. khaḍga-maṇi Divy 147, one of the royal insignia); - khaggaṃ bhandati to gird on one's sword PvA 154, khaggaṃ sannayhati id. DhA III.75; °gāhaka a sword-bearer Miln 114; °tala swordblade Mhvs 25, 90. - 2. a rhinoceros J V.406 (=gavaja), 416; VI.277 (°miga), 538. In cpd. °visāṇā (cp. BSk. khaḍgaviṣāṇa Divy 294=Sn 36) the horn of a rh. (: khagga-visāṇaṃ nāma khaggamiga-singaṃ SnA 65) Sn 35 sq. (N. of Sutta); Nd2 217 (khagga-visāṇa-kappa "like the horn of the rh." Ep. of a Paccekabuddha, (cp. Divy 294, 582), also at Vism 234. Khacita {Khacita} [pp. of khac as root expld at Dhtm. 518 by "bandhana"] inlaid, adorned with, usually with jewels e. g. VvA 14, 277; maṇi-muttādi khacitā ghaṇṭā "bells inlaid with jewels, pearls, etc." VvA 36; of a fan inlaid with ivory (danta-khacita) Vin III.287 (Sam. Pās.). Suvaṇṇakhacita-gajak'attharaṇā "elephants'trappings interwoven with gold" VvA 104; of a chair, inlaid with pearls J I.41; of a canopy embroidered with golden stars J I.57. Khajja {Khajja} (adj.-nt.) [grd. of khajjati] to be eaten or chewed, eatable, solid food, usually in cpd. -bhojja solid and other food, divided into 4 kinds, viz. asita, pīta, khāyita, sāyita Pv I.52 (=PvA 25) J I.58; Miln 2. -bhājaka a distributor of food (an office falling to the lot of a senior bhikkhu) Vin II.176 (=V.204); IV. 38, 155. Khajjaka {Khajjaka} (adj.) [fr. last] eatable, i. e. solid food (as °bhojjanāni opposed to yāgu PvA 23); (nt.) J I.186 (of 18 kinds, opp. yāgu); I.235 (id.); Miln 294. -°bhājaka= prec. Khajjati {Khajjati} (=khādiyati, Pass. of khādati; Dhtm 93 bhakkhaṇa) 1. to be eaten, chewed, eaten up, as by animals: upacikāhi Vin II.113; suṇakhehi Pv III.78; puḷavehi J III.177; cp. Pv IV.52 (cut in two) - 2. to be itchy, to be irritated by itch (cp. E. "itch"=Intens. of "eat") J V.198 (kh° kanduvāyati); Pv II.39 (kacchuyā kh°) - 3. to be devoured (fig.), to be consumed, to be a victim of: kāmataṇhāhi M. I.504; rūpena S III.87, 88 (khajjanīya-pariyāya, quoted Vism 479). - ppr. khajjamāna Pv II.15 (consumed by hunger & thirst). Khajjara {Khajjara} caterpillar Pgdp 48. Khajjopanaka {Khajjopanaka} [cp. Sk. khadyota] the fire-fly M II.34=41; J II.415; VI.330, 441; DhA III.178; also khajjūpanaka Vism 412 (in simile). See Trenckner J.P.T.S. 1908, 59 & 79. Khañja {Khanja} (adj.) [cp. Sk. khañja, Dhtp 81: khañja gativekalye] lame (either on one foot or both: PugA 227) Vin II.90=A I.107=II.85=Pug 51 (comb. with kāṇa and kuṇi); Th 2, 438 (+kāṇa); DhA I.376 (+kuṇi). Pāli Text Society 539 Pāli-English Dictionary Khañjati {Khanjati} [fr. khañja] to be lame Pv III.228. Khañjana {Khanjana} (nt.) hobbling, walking lame PvA 185. Khaṭakhaṭa {Khatakhata} (khāṭ-kata, making khāṭ; cp. kakkāreti) the noise of hawking or clearing one's throat: -sadda Vin I.188; DhA III.330; cp. khakkhaṭa (v. l. khaṭkhaṭa) Divy 518=utkāśanaśabda. Khaṭopikā {Khatopika} (f.) [perhaps connected with Sk khaṭvā? uncertain] couch, bedstead M I.450, 451 (vv. ll. ka°, khajj°). Khaṇa1 {Khana} (m.) [Derivation unknown. It has been suggested that khaṇa and the Sk. kshaṇa are derived from īkshaṇa (seeing) by process of contraction. This seems very forced; and both words are, in all probability, other than the word from which this hypothesis would derive them.] 1. (1) a (short), moment, wink of time; in phrase khaṇen'eva "in no time" PvA 38.117; Sdhp 584 (etc.). Sdhp 584; khaṇo ve mā upaccagā "let not the slightest time be wasted" Sn 333=Dh 315; cf. Th. II.5 (cp. khaṇātīta); n'atthi so kh° vā layo vā muhutto vā yaṃ (nadī) āramati "there is no moment, no inkling, no particle of time that the river stops flowing" A IV.137 (as simile of eternal flow of happening, of unbroken continuity of change); Vism 238 (jīvita°), 473; (khaṇa-vasena uppād'- ādi-khaṇa-ttaya, viz. uppāda, ṭhiti, bhanga, cp. p. 431); J IV.128; aṭṭha-kkhaṇa-vinimmutto kh° paramadullabho: one opportunity out of eight, very difficult to be obtained Sdhp 4, 16; cp. 45, 46. - 2. moment as coincidence of two events: "at the same moment," esp. in phrase taṃ khaṇaṃ yeva "all at once," simultaneously, with which syn. ṭhānaso J I.167, 253; III.276, PvA 19; PvA 27, 35; tasmiṃ khaṇe J II.154; PvA 67; Sdhp 17. - 3. the moment as something expected or appointed (cp. kairo/s), therefore the right moment, or the proper time. So with ref. to birth, rebirth, fruit of action, attainment of Arahantship, presence on earth of a Buddha, etc., in cpds.: cuti-kkhaṇo Bdhd 106; paṭisandhi° Ps II.72 sq.; Bdhd 59, 77, 78; uppatti° Vbh 411 sq.; sotāpattimagga° Ps II.3; phala° Ps I.26, Bdhd 80; nikanti° Ps II.72 sq.; upacāra° Bdhd 94; citta° id. 38, 95. -khaṇe khaṇe from time to time Dh 239 (=okāse okāse DhA III.340, but cp. Comp. 161, n. 5), Buddhuppāda°, Th II.A, 12. akkhaṇa see sep. Also akkhaṇavedhin. -akkhaṇe at the wrong time, in- opportune Pv IV.140 (=akāle). On kh. laya, muhutta cp. Points of Contr. 296, n. 5. -ātīta having missed the opportunity Sn 333=Dh 315 (=DhA III.489); -ððū knowing, realizing the opportunity Sn 325 (cp. SnA 333). -paccuppanna arisen at the moment or momentarily Vism 431 (one of the 3 kinds of paccuppanna: kh°., santati°, addhā°). -paritta small as a moment Vism 238. Khaṇa2 {Khana} [fr. khaṇ] digging J II.296. Cp. atikhaṇa. Khaṇati {Khanati} [fr. khan or khaṇ; Dhtp 179: anadāraṇe] 1. to dig (? better "destroy"; cp. Kern Toev. s. v.), dig out. uproot Dh 247, 337; Sn p. 101; J II.295; IV.371, 373: Sdhp 394. Also khanati & cp. abhikkhaṇati, palikkhaṇati. - 2. [=Sk. kṣanati] to destroy Vin II.26 (attānaṃ); M I.132 (id.). - pp. khata & khāta (cp. palikkhata). Khaṇana {Khanana} (nt.) [fr. khaṇ] digging Miln 351 (pokkharaṇi°). Khaṇika {Khanika} (adj.) [fr. khaṇa] unstable, momentary, temporary, evanescent, changeable; usually syn. with ittara, e. g. J I.393; III.83; PvA 60. - Vism 626 (khaṇikato from the standpoint Pāli Text Society 540 Pāli-English Dictionary of the momentary). Khaṇikā pīti "momentary joy" is one of the 5 kinds of joy, viz. khuddikā, khaṇikā, okkantikā, ubbegā, pharaṇā (see pīti) Vism 143, DhsA 115. -citta temporary or momentary thought Vism 289. -maraṇa sudden death Vism 229. -vassa momentary, i. e. sudden rain (-shower) J VI.486. Khaṇikatta {Khanikatta} (nt.) [fr. khaṇika] evanescence, momentariness Vism 301. Khaṇḍa {Khanda} [freq. spelt kaṇḍa (q. v.). Cp. Sk. khaṇḍa; expld at Dhtp 105 as "chedana"] 1. (adj.) broken, usually of teeth; Th 2, 260 (=ThA 211); Miln 342; Vism 51. - 2. (m. nt.) a broken piece, a bit, camma° a strip of hide Vin II.122; coḷa° a bit of cloth PvA 70; pilotika° bits of rags PvA 171; pūva° a bit of cake J III.276; - akhaṇḍa unbroken, entire, whole, in -kārin (sikkhāya) fulfilling or practising the whole of (the commandments) Pv IV.343 and °sīla observing fully the sīla-precepts Vv 113; cp. Vism 51 & Bdhd 89. -ākhaṇḍa (redupl.-iter. formation with distributive function) piece by piece, nothing but pieces, broken up into bits Vism 115. ākhaṇḍika piece by piece, consisting of nothing but bits, in kh °ṃ chindati to break up into fragments A I.204 (of māluvālatā); II.199 (of thūṇā); S II.88 (of rukkha); cp. Vin III.43 (dārūni °ṃ chedāpetvā); J V.231 (°ṃ katvā). -danta having broken teeth, as sign of old age in phrase kh° palitakesa, etc. "with broken teeth and grey hair" A I.138 and ≈; J I.59, 79 (id.). -phulla [Bdhgh on Vin II.160; khaṇḍa =bhinn'okāso, phulla=phalit'okāso.] broken and shattered portions; °ṃ paṭisankharoti to repair dilapidations Vin II.160 (=navakammaṃ karoti) 286; III.287; A III.263; cp. same expression at Divy 22. a° unbroken and unimpaired fig. of sīla, the rule of conduct in its entirety, with nothing detracted Vv 8316=Pv IV.176 (cp. akhaṇḍasīla)=DhA I.32. Khaṇḍati {Khandati} to break, DhA IV.14; pp. khaṇḍita broken, PvA 158 (-kaṇṇo=chinnakaṇṇo). Khaṇḍikā {Khandika} (f.) [fr. khaṇḍa] a broken bit, a stick, in ucchu° Vv 3326 (=ucchu-yaṭṭhi DhA III.315). Khaṇḍicca {Khandicca} (nt.) the state of being broken (of teeth), having broken teeth, in phrase kh° pālicca, etc., as signs of old age (see above) M I.49=D II.305; A III.196; Dhs 644=736=869; DhA III.123; in similar connection Vism 449. Khaṇḍeti {Khandeti} [v. denom. fr. khaṇḍa] to renounce, to remit, in vetanaṃ °etvā J III.188. Khata1 {Khata} [pp. of khanati] 1. dug up, uprooted, fig. one whose foundation (of salvation) has been cut off; in combn with upahata D I.86 (=DA I.237); khataṃ upahataṃ attānaṃ pariharati "he keeps himself uprooted and half-dead" i. e. he continues to lead a life of false ideas A I.105=II.4; opp. akkhataṃ anupahataṃ, etc. A I.89. Khata2 {Khata} [pp. of kṣan, to wound] hurt, wounded; pādo kh° hoti sakalikāya "he grazed his foot" S I.27=Miln 134, 179. - akkhata unmolested, unhurt Vv 8452 (=anupadduta VvA 351). See also parikkhata. Khataka {Khataka} [fr. khata2] damage, injury VvA 206, khatakaṃ dāsiyā deti "she did harm to the servant, she struck the s." Or is it khalikaṃ? (cp. khaleti); the passage is corrupt. Pāli Text Society Khatta 541 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [Sk. kṣatra, to kṣi, cp. Gr. kta/omai, kth_ma, possession] rule, power, possession; only in cpds.: -dhamma the law of ruling, political science J V.490 (is it khattu°=khattā°?) -vijjā polity D I.9, condemned as a practice of heretics. Bdhgh at DA I.93 explains it as nīti-sattha, political science (=°dhamma), See Rh. D. Dialogues I.18. -vijjavādin a person who inculcates Macchiavellian tricks J V.228 (paraphrased: mātāpitaro pi māretvā attano va attho kāmetabbo ti "even at the expense of killing father and mother is wealth to be desired for oneself"), so also J V.240; -vijjācariya one who practises kh- °vijjā ibid.; -vida (so read for °vidha)=°vijja (adj.) a tricky person, ibid. (v. l. °vijja, better). Cp. Sk. kṣātra-vidya. {Khatta} Khattar {Khattar} [Sk. kṣattṛ fr. kṣatra] attendant, companion, charioteer, the king's minister and adviser (Lat. satelles "satellite" has been compared for etym.) D I.112 (=DA I.280, kh° vuccati pucchita-pucchita-pañhaṃ vyākaraṇa-samattho mahāmatto: "kh° is called the King's minister who is able to answer all his questions"); Buddhaghosa evidently connects it with katheti, to speak, respond=katthā; gādhaṃ k° A II.107=Pug 43 v. l. for kattā (cp. Pug A 225). Khattiya [der. fr. khatta=kṣatra "having possessions"; Sk. kṣatriya] pl. nom. also khattiyāse J III.441. A shortened form is khatya J VI.397. - f. khattiyā A III.226-229, khattī D. I.193, and khattiyī. A member of one of the clans or tribes recognised as of Aryan descent. To be such was to belong to the highest social rank. The question of such social divisions in the Buddha's time is discussed in Dialogues I.97-107; and it is there shown that whenever they are referred to in lists the khattiyas always come first. Khattiyo seṭṭho jane tasmiṃ D I.199=II.97=M I.358=S I.153, II.284. This favourite verse is put into the mouth of a god; and he adds that whoever is perfect in wisdom and righteousness is the best of all. On the social prestige of the khattiyas see further M II.150-157; III.169; A II.86; S I.71, 93; Vin IV.6-10. On the religious side of the question D III.82; 93; M I.149, 177; II.84; S I.98. Wealth does not come into consideration at all. Only a very small percentage of the khattiyas were wealthy in the opinion of that time and place. Such are referred to at S I.15. All kings and chieftains were khattiyas D I.69, 136; III.44, 46, 61; A I.106; III.299; IV.259. Khattiyas are called rājāno Dhp 294, quoted Netti 165. -ābhiseka the inauguration of a king A I.107, 108 (of the crown-prince)=A II.87; -kaððā a maid of khattiya birth J I.60; III.394; -kula a khattiya clan, a princely house, Vin II.161 (w. ref. to Gotama's descent); III.80; -parisā the assembly of the khattiyas; as one of the four parisās (kh°, brāhmaṇa°, gahapati°, samaṇa) at Vin I.227; A II.133; as the first one of the eight (1-4 as above, Cātummahārājika°, Tāvatiṃsa°, Māra°, Brahma°) at M I.72=D III.260; mahāsāla "the wealthy khattiya" (see above II.1) D III.258, etc.; -māyā "the magic of the noble" DhA I.166; -vaṃsa aristocratic descent DA I.267; -sukhumāla a tender, youthful prince (of the Tathāgata: buddha°, kh°) DhA I.5. {Khattiya} Khattiyī {Khattiyi} (f.) a female khattiya, in series brāhmaṇī kh° vessī suddī caṇḍālī nesādī veṇī rathakārī pukkusī A III.229; similarly M II.33, 40. °Khattuṃ [Sk. °kṛtvah, cp. °kad] in compn with numerals "times": dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ, etc.; twice, three times, etc. {°Khattum} Khadira {Khadira} [Sk. khadira; Gr. ki/ssaros, ivy; Lat. hedera, ivy] the tree Acacia catechu, in cpds. -angārā (pl.) embers of (burnt) acacia-wood J I.232; PvA 152; -ghaṭikā a piece of a.-wood J IV.88; -tthambha a post of a.-wood DhA III.206; -patta a bowl made of a.-wood J V.389; -vana a forest of acacias J II.162; -sūla an impaling stake of a.-wood J IV.29. Pāli Text Society 542 Pāli-English Dictionary Khanati {Khanati} see khaṇati. Khanittī {Khanitti} (f.) [to khan, cp. Sk. khanitra] a spade or hoe Vin I.270; J VI.520=V.89 (+ankusa). Khantar {Khantar} [n. agent of khanti] possessed of meekness or gentleness; docile, manageable. Said of an elephant A II.116=III.161 sq. Khanti & Khantī {Khanti} f. [Sk. kṣānti] patience, forbearance, forgiveness. Def. at Dhs 1341: khantī khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaṃ anasuropo attamanatā cittassa. Most frequent combinations: with mettā (love) (see below); -titikkhā (forbearance): khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti Buddhā Dh 184=D II.49=Vism 295; khantiyā bhiyyo na vijjati, S I.226; cp. DhA III.237: titikkhā-sankhātā khantī; -avihiṃsā (tolerance): kh°, avihiṃsā, mettatā, anudayatā, S V.169; -akodhana (forbearing, gentle) VvA 71; -soraccaṃ (docility, tractableness) D III.213= A I.94; also with maddava (gentleness) and s. as quality of a well-bred horse A III.248, cp. A II.113 and khantā; -sovaccassatā (kind speech) Sn 266 (cp. KhA 148). See also cpds. - Khantī is one of the ten paramitās J I.22, 23: cp. A III.254, 255. - In other connections: khantiyā upasamena upeta S I.30; ativissuto Sdhp 473; anulomikāya kh°iyā samannāgata (being of gentle and forbearing disposition) A III.437, 441; Ps II.236 sq.; Vbh 340. See also A III.372; Sn 189, 292, 897, 944. - In scholastic language frequent in combination diṭṭhi khanti ruci, in def. of idha (Vbh 245), tattha (Nd2), diṭṭhi (Nd2), cp. Nd2 151 and Vbh 325 sq. akkhanti intolerance Vin IV.241 (=kopa); Vbh 360 (in def as opp. of khanti Dhs 1341. q. v. above), 378. -bala (nt.) the force of forbearance; (adj.) one whose strength is patience: . . . aduṭṭho yo titikkhati khantībalaṃ balānīkaṃ tam ahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ Dh 399=Sn 623; DhA IV.164; Ps II.171, 176; -mettā forbearing love, in phrase kh° -mettānuddayasampanna (adj.) one whose character is compassion and loving forbearance J I.151, 262; PvA 66 (+yuttakāra); VvA 71 (in expln of akodhana); -suñña (nt.) the void of khanti Ps II.183; -soracca (nt.) gentleness and forbearance S I.100, 222; A II.68; J III.487; DhA I.56; °e niviṭṭha "established in forbearance and meekness" A III.46=D III.61. Khantika {Khantika} (adj.) [fr. prec.] acquiescing in-, of such and such a belief, in añña° belonging to another faith, combd with aññadiṭṭhika and aññarucika D I.187; M I.487. Khandati {Khandati} [skand] to jump, only in cpd. pakkhandati; given as root khand at Dhtm 196 with meaning "pakkhandana." Khandha {Khandha} [Sk. skandha] - I. Crude meaning: bulk, massiveness (gross) substance. A. esp. used (a) of an elephant: the bulk of the body, i. e. its back S I.95; vāraṇassa J III.392; hatthikhandha-vara-gata on the back of the state elephant J I.325; PvA 75. Also with ref. to an elephant (hatthināga) saðjāta° "to whom has grown bulk=a large back" Sn 53, expl. SnA 103 by susaṇṭhitakkhandho "well endowed with bulk." - (b) of a person: the shoulder or back: nangalaṃ khan- dhe karitvā S I.115 appl. to Māra; Vism 100; DhA IV.168 (ohita°-bhāra the load lifted off his shoulder). - - (c) of a tree: the trunk. rukkhassa PvA 114, also as rukkha° J I.324; tāla° the stem of a palm PvA 56; nigrodhassa khandhaja (see cpds.) S I.207=Sn 272; mūlaṃ atikkamma kh° ṃ sāraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ "one must go beyond the root and search the trunk for sweetness" S IV.94. - (d) as t.t. in exegetical literature: section, chapter, lit. material as collected into uniform bulk; freq. in postscripts to Texts and Commentaries. See also khandhaka. - B. More general as denoting bulk (-°); e. g. aggi° a great mass of fire M II.34, 41; J IV.139; udaka° a mass of water (i. e. ocean) A III.336; S IV.179; J I.324; PvA 62; puñña° a great Pāli Text Society 543 Pāli-English Dictionary accumulation of merit A III.336=S V.400; bhoga° a store of wealth A V.84; J I.6; maṇi° an extraordinarily large jewel (possessing magic power) J II.102 sq. - II. Applied meaning.-A. (-°) the body of, a collection of, mass, or parts of; in collective sense "all that is comprised under"; forming the substance of. - (a) dukkha° all that is comprised under "dukkha," all that goes to make up or forms the substance, the idea of "ill." Most prominent in phrase kevalassa dukkhakhandhassa samudaya and nirodha (the origin & destruction of all that is suffering) with ref. to the paṭiccasamuppāda, the chain of causal existence (q. v.) Vin I.1; S II.95; III.14; A I.177; V. 184 & passim. Similarly: samudaya Vbh 135 sq. nirodha Nett 64; antakiriyā A I.147; vyādhimaraṇatunnānaṃ dukkhakkhandhaṃ vyapānudi Th 2, 162. - (b) lobha° dosa° moha° the three ingredients or integrations of greed, suffering and bewilderment, lit. "the big bulk or mass of greed" (see also under padāleti), S V.88 (nibbijjhati through the satta bojjhangā). (c) vayo° a division of age, part of age, as threefold: purima°, majjhima°, pacchima° Nd2 in def. of sadā. - (d) sīla (etc.) kh° the 3 (or 5) groups or parts which constitute the factors of right living (dhamma), viz. (1) sīla° the group dealing with the practice of morality; (2) samādhi° that dealing with the development of concentration; (3) paððā° that dealing with the development of true wisdom. They are also known under the terms of sīla-sampadā, citta°, paððā° D I.172 sq.; see sīla. - D I.206; Nett 64 sq.; 126. tīhi dhammehi samannāgato "possessed of the three qualities," viz. sīla-kkhandhesu, etc. It 51; cp. A I.291; V.326. tīhi khandhehi . . . aṭṭhangiko maggo sangahito M I.301; sīlakkhandhaṃ, etc. paripūreti "to fulfil the sīla-group" A I.125; II.20, III.15 sq. These 3 are completed to a set of 5 by (4) vimutti° the group dealing with the attainment of emancipation and (5) vimutti-ðāṇa-dassana °the group dealing with the realization of the achievement of emancipation. As 1-4 only at D III.229 (misprint puñña for paððā); cp. A I.125. As 5 at S I.99=A I.162; S V.162; A III.134, 271; V.16 (all loc.=S I.99); It 107, 108; Nd2 under sīla. B. (absolute) in individual sense: constituent element, factor, substantiality. More especially as khandhā (pl.) the elements or substrata of sensory existence, sensorial aggregates which condition the appearance of life in any form. Their character according to quality and value of life and body is evanescent, fraught with ills & leading to rebirth. Paraphrased by Bdhgh. as r āsi, heap, e. g. Asl. 141; Vibh A 1 f.; cf. B. Psy. 42. 1. Unspecified. They are usually enumerated in the foll. stereotyped set of 5: rūpa° (material qualities), vedanā (feeling), saððā (perception), sankhārā (coefficients of consciousness), viððāṇa (consciousness). For further ref. see rūpa; cp. also Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. pp. 40-56. They are enumerated in a different order at S I.112, viz. rūpaṃ vedayitaṃ saññaṃ viððāṇaṃ yañ ca sankhataṃ n'eso 'ham asmi. Detailed discussions as to their nature see e. g. S III.101 (=Vbh 1-61); S III.47; III.86. As being comprised in each of the dhātus, viz. kăma° rūpa° arūpa-dhātu Vbh 404 sq. (a) As factors of existence (cp. bhava). Their rôle as such is illustrated by the famous simile: "yathā hi angasambhārā hoti saddo ratho iti evaṃ khandhesu santesu hoti satto ti sammuti" "just as it is by the condition precedent of the coexistence of its various parts, that the word „chariot‟ is used, just so it is that when the skandhas are there, we talk of a „being‟" (Rh. D.) (cp. Hardy, Man. Buddh. p. 425) S I.135=Miln 28. Their connotation "khandha" is discussed at S III.101 =M III.16: "kittāvatā nu kho khandhānaṃ khandhādhivacanaṃ? rūpaṃ (etc.) atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ," etc.: i.e. material qualities are equivalent terms for the kh. What causes the manifestation of each kh.? cattāro mahābhūtā . . . paccayo rūpa-khandhassa paððāpanāya; phasso . . . vedana°, saððā°, sankhārā°, etc.; nāmarūpaṃ . . . viððāṇa°: the material elements are the cause of rūpa, touch is that of vedanā, saððā, sankhārā, name and shape that of viððāṇa (S III.101); cp. M I.138 sq., 234 sq. On the same principle rests their division in: rūpa-kāyo rūpakkhandho nāmakāyo cattāro arūpino khandhā "the material body forms the material factor (of existence), the individualized body the 4 immaterial factors" Nett 41; the rūpakkhandha only is kāmadhātu-pariyāpanno: Vbh 409; the 4 arūpino kh° Pāli Text Society 544 Pāli-English Dictionary discussed at Ps II.74, also at Vbh 230, 407 sq. (grouped with what is apariyāpanna) - Being the "substantial" factors of existence, birth & death depend on the khandhas. They appear in every new conjuncture of individuality concerning their function in this paṭisandhi-kkhaṇe; see Ps II.72-76. Thus the var. phases of life in transmigration are defined as - (jāti:) ya tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti saðjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṃ paṭilābho Nd2 on Sn 1052; cp. jāti dvīhi khandhehi sangahitā ti VvA 29; khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo jāti S II.3; Nett 29; khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti Vism 199. (maraṇaṃ:) yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ . . . cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā khandhānaṃ bhedo kalevarassa nikkhepo M I.49=Vbh 137=S II.3, 42. - vivaṭṭakkhandha (adj.) one whose khandhas have revolved (passed away), i. e. dead S I.121=III.123. kh°anaṃ udaya-vyaya (or udayabbaya) the rising and passing of the kh., transmigration Dh 374=Th 1, 23, 379=It 120=KhA 82; Ps I.54 sq. - (b) Their relation to attachment and craving (kāma): sattisūlûpamā kāmā khandhānaṃ adhikuṭṭanā S I.128=Th 2, 58, 141 (ThA 65: natthi tesaṃ adhik°?); craving is their cause & soil: hetupaṭicca sambhūtā kh. S I.134; the 4 arūpino kh. are based on lobha, dosa, moha Vbh 208. - (c) their annihilation: the kh. remain as long as the knowledge of their true character is not attained, i. e. of their cause & removal: yaṃ rūpaṃ, etc. . . . n'etaṃ mama n'eso 'haṃ asmi na m'eso attā ti; evaṃ etaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaððāya passati; evaṃ kho jānato passato . . . ahankāramamankāra-mānānusayā na hontī ti S III.103; -pañca-kkhandhe pariððāya S III.83; paðca-kkhandhā pariððātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā Th 2, 106. See also S I.134. - (d) their relation to dhātu (the physical elements) and āyatana (the elements of sense-perception) is close, since they are all dependent on sensory experience. The 5 khandhas are frequently mentioned with the 18 dhātuyo & the 12 āyatanāni: khandhā ca dh° cha ca āyatanā ime hetuṃ paṭicca sambhūtā hetubhangā nirujjhare S I.134; kh°-dh°-āyatanaṃ sankhataṃ jātimūlaṃ Th 2, 472; dhammaṃ adesesi khandh'- āyatana-dhātuyo Th 2, 43 (cp. ThA 49). Enumerated under sabba-dhammā Ps I.101=II.230; under dhammā (states) Dhs 121, as lokuttara-kkhandhā, etc. Dhs 358, 528, 552. khandhānaṃ khandhaṭṭho abhiððeyyo, dhātūnaṃ dhātuṭṭho, etc. Ps I.17; cp. I.132; II.121, 157. In def. of kāmāvacarā bhūmi Ps I.83. In def. of dukkha and its recognition Nett 57. In def. of arahanto khīṇāsavā Nd2 on sankhāta-dhammā ("kh. sankhātā," etc.), on tiṇṇa ("khandha(etc.) pariyante thitā"), & passim. - (e) their valuation & their bearing on the "soul"conception is described in the terms of na mama (na tumhākaṃ), anattā, aniccaṃ and dukkhaṃ (cp. upādānakkh° infra and rūpa) rūpaṃ (etc.) . . . aniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ, n'eso 'ham asmi, n 'eso me attā "material qualities (etc. kh. 2-5) are evanescent, bad, I am not this body, this body is not my soul" Vin I.14=S IV.382. n'eso 'ham asmi na m'eso attā S I.112; III.103, 130 & passim; cp. kāyo na tumhākaṃ (anattā rūpaṃ) S II.65; Nd2 680; and rūpaṃ na tumhākaṃ S III.33 M I.140=Nd2 680. - rūpaṃ, etc. as anattā: Vin I.13; S III.78, 132-134; A I.284= II.171; 202; cp. S III.101; Vin I.14. - as aniccaṃ: S III.41, 52, 102, 122, 132 sq., 181 sq., 195 sq., 202-224, 227; A IV.147 (aniccānupassī dukkhānupassī); anicca dukkha roga, etc., Ps II.238 sq.; Vbh 324. - 2. Specified as panc'upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the fivefold clinging to existence. Defined & discussed in detail (rūpûpadāna-kkhandha, etc.) S III.47; 86-88; also Vin I.10; S III.127 sq. Specified S III.58 III.100=M III.16; S III.114, 158 sq.; V.52, 60; A IV.458; Vism 443 sq. (in ch. xiv: Khandha-niddesa), 611 sq. (judged aniccato, etc.). - Mentioned as a set exemplifying the number 5: Kh III.; Ps I.22, 122. Enumerated in var. connections S I.112; D III.233; M I.190; A V.52; Kh IV. (expld KhA 82=A V.52); Miln 12 (var. references concerning the discussion of the kh. in the Abhidhamma). - What is said of the khandhas alone-see above 1 (a)-(e)-is equally applied to them in connection with upādāna. - (a) As regards their origin they are characterized as chandamūlakā "rooted in desire, or in wilful desire" S III.100; cp. yo kho . . . paðcas'upādānakkhandhesu chandarāgo taṃ tattha upādānaṃ ti M I.300, 511. Therefore the foll. attributes are characteristic: kummo pañcann'etaṃ upād° ānaṃ adhivacanaṃ M I.144; Pāli Text Society 545 Pāli-English Dictionary bhārā have paðcakkh°ā S III.26; paðcavadhakā paccatthikā paðcann'. . . adhivacanaṃ S IV.174; paðc'upād° . . . sakkāyo vutto M I.299= S IV.259. - (b) their contemplation leads to the recognition of their character as dukkha, anicca, anattā: na kiðci attānaṃ vā attaniyaṃ vā paðcasu upādānakkhandhesu S III.128; rogato, etc. . . . manasikātabbā paðc° S III.167; paðcasu upād°esu aniccānupassī "realizing the evanescence in the 5 aggregates of attachment" A V.109; same with udayavyayānupassī S III.130; A II.45, 90; III.32; IV.153; and dhammānupassī M I.61. Out of which realization follows their gradual destruction: paðc'. . . khandhānaṃ samudayo atthangamo assādo, etc. S III.31, 160 sq.; A II.45, 90; IV.153; Nd2 under sankhārā. That they occupy a prominent position as determinants of dukkha is evident from their rôle in the exposition of dukkha as the first one of the noble truths: sankhittena paðc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā "in short, the 5 kh. are associated with pain" Vin I.10=M I.48=A I.177=S V.421; Ps I.37, 39; Vbh 101 & passim; cp. katamaṃ dukkham ariyasaccaṃ? paðc'upād° ā tissa vacanīyaṃ, seyyathīdaṃ . . . S III.158=V.425; khandhādisā dukkhā Dh 202 (& expl. DhA III.261). - 3. Separately mentioned: khandhā as tayo arūpino kh° (ved°, saðða°, sankh°) DhA I.22; viððāṇa-kh° (the skandha of discriminative consciousness) in Def. of manas: manindriyaṃ viððāṇaṃ viññ°-khandho tajjā manoviððāṇadhātu Nd2 on Sn 1142=Dhs 68. ādhivacana having kh. as attribute (see above) S III.101=M III.16; -āvāra a camp, either (1) fortified (with niveseti) or (2) not (with bandhāpeti), esp. in the latter meaning w. ref. to a halting place of a caravan (=khandhāvāra?) (1) J IV. 151; V.162; DhA I.193, 199.- (2) J I.101, 332; PvA 113; DhA II.79. Said of a hermitage J V.35. - fig. in sīla-khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā "to settle in the camp of good conduct" DA I.244; -ja (adj.-n.) sprung from the trunk (of the tree), i. e. a growth or parasite S I.207=Sn 272, expl. at SnA 304; khandhesu jātā khandha-jā, pārohānam etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. -niddesa disquisition about the khandhas Vism (ch. xiv esp.) 482, 485, 492, 509, 558, 389. -paṭipāṭi succession of khandhas Vism 411 sq. -paritta protective spell as regards the khandhas (as N. of a Suttanta) Vism 414. -bīja "trunk seed" as one kind of var. seeds, with mūla° phaḷu° agga° bīja° at Vin V.132, & D I.5, expld. DA I.81: nāma assattho nigrodho pilakkho udumbaro kacchako kapitthano ti evam-ādi. -rasa taste of the stem, one of various tastes, as mūla° khandha° taca° patta° puppha°, etc. Dhs 629=Nd2 540. -loka the world of sensory aggregates, with dhātu- and āyatanaloka Ps I.122. -vibhanga division dealing with the khandhas (i. e. Vibh. 1 sq.) Miln 12. -santāna duration of the khandhas Vism 414. Khandhaka {Khandhaka} [fr. khandha] division, chapter, esp. in the Vinaya (at end of each division we find usually the postscript: so & so khandhakaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ "here ends the chapter of . . ."); in cpd. °vatta, i. e. duties or observances specified in the v. khandha or chapter of the Vinaya which deals with these duties Vism 12, 101 (cp. Vin II.231), 188. Khandhiman {Khandhiman} (adj.) having a (big) trunk, of a tree A III.43. Khama {Khama} (adj.) [fr. kṣam] (a) patient, forgiving. (b) enduring, bearing, hardened to (frost & heat, e. g.), fit for. - (a) kh. belongs to the lovable attributes of a bhikkhu (kh. rūpānaṃ, saddānaṃ, etc.; indulgent as regards sights, sounds, etc.) A III.113=138; the same applied to the king's horse A III.282. Khamā paṭipadā the way of gentleness (and opp. akkhamā), viz. akkosantaṃ na paccakosati "not to shout back at him who shouts at you" A II.152 sq.; cp. Nett 77; classified under the four paṭipadā at D III.229. In combn. w. vacana of meek, gentle speech, in vattā vacana° a speaker of good & meek words S I.63; II.282; Miln 380; cp. suvaco khamo A V.24 sq., forgiving: Miln 207.- (b) khamo sītassa uṇhassa, etc., enduring frost & heat A III.389=V.132; addhāna° padhāna° (fit for) A III.30; ranga°, anuyoga°, vimajjana° M I.385. akkhama (adj.) impatient, intolerant, in combn dubbaca dovacassa karaṇehi dhammehi Pāli Text Society 546 Pāli-English Dictionary samannāgata S II.204 sq.= A II.147 sq. With ref. to rūpa, saddā, etc. (see also above), of an elephant A III.156 sq. - D III.229; Sdhp 95. Khamati {Khamati} [Dhtp 218: sahane, cp. Sk. kṣamate, perhaps to Lat. humus, cp. Sk. kṣāh, kṣāman soil; Gr. xqw/n, xamai] 1. to be patient, to endure, to forgive (acc. of object and gen. of person): n'āhaṃ bhayā khamāmi Vepacittino (not do I forgive V. out of fear) S I.221, 222; aparādhaṃ kh. to forgive a fault J III.394. khamatha forgive DhA II.254; khamatha me pardon me Miln 13; DhA I.40. - 2. (impers.) to be fit, to seem good; esp. in phrase yathā te khameyya "as may seem good to you; if you please" D I.60, 108; M I.487. sabbaṃ me na khamati "I do not approve of" M I.497 sq.; na khamati "it is not right" D II.67. - 3. to be fit for, to indulge in, to approve of, in nijjhānaṃ khamanti M I.133, 480; cp. diṭṭhi-nijjhāna-kkhanti M I.480 & A I.189. - ppr. med. khamamāna Vin I.281 (uppaḍḍhakāsinaṃ kh°) fit for, allowing of, worth, cp. Bdhgh. note Vin Texts I.195. - grd. khamanīya to be allayed, becoming better (of a disease) Vin I.204; D II.99. - caus. khamāpeti to pacify, to ask one's pardon, to apologize (to=acc.) J I.267; PvA 123, 195; DhA I.38, 39; II.75, 254. - to ask permission or leave (i. e. to say good-bye) DhA I.14. Khamana {Khamana} (nt.) long-suffering Miln 351; bearing, suffering Sdhp 202; and a° intolerance Bdhd 24. Khamanatā {Khamanata} (f.) forbearance and a° intolerance, harshness both as syn. of khanti & akkhanti Dhs 1342, Vbh 360. Khamā {Khama} (f.) [fr. ksam] (a) patience, endurance. (b) the earth (cp. chamā & see khamati) J IV.8 (v. l. B. chamāya). Khamāpanā {Khamapana} (f.) [abstr. fr. khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] asking for pardon J IV.389. Khambha {Khambha} [Sk. khambha & sthambha] 1. prop, support, in °kata "making a prop," i. e. with his arms akimbo Vin II.213=IV.188. - 2. obstruction, stiffening, paraly- sis, in ūru° "stiffening of the thigh" M I.237 (through pain); J V.23 (through fear). See also chambheti & thambha. Khambheti {Khambheti} [Caus. fr. prec. - Sk. skambh, skabhnāti] 1. to prop, to support Th 2, 28 (but expl. at ThA 35 by vi°, obstruct) - 2. to obstruct, to put out, in pp. khambhita (=vi°) Nd2 220, where it explains khitta. - ger. khambhiya: see vi°. Khaya {Khaya} [Sk. kṣaya to kṣi, kṣiṇoti & kṣiṇāti; cp. Lat. situs withering, Gr. fqi/sis, fqi/nw, fqi/w wasting. See also khepeti under khipati] waste, destruction, consumption; decay, ruin, loss; of the passing away of night VvA 52; mostly in applied meaning with ref. to the extinction of passions & such elements as condition, life, & rebirth, e. g. āsavānaṃ kh. It 103 sq., esp. in formula āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ upasampajja A I.107= 221=D III.78, 108, 132=It 100 and passim. - rāgassa, dosassa, mohassa kh. M I.5; A I.299, cp. rāga°, dosa°, moha°, A I.159; dosa° S III.160, 191; IV.250. - taṇhānaṃ kh. Dh 154; sankhārānaṃ kh. Dh. 383; sabbamaððitānaṃ, etc. M I.486; āyu°, puðða° Vism 502. - yo dukkhassa pajānāti idh'eva khayaṃ attano Sn 626=Dh 402; khayaṃ virāgaṃ amataṃ paṇītaṃ Sn 225. - In exegesis of rūpassa aniccatā: rūpassa khayo vayo bhedo Dhs 645=738=872. - See also khīṇa and the foll. cpds. s. v.: āyu°, upadhi°, upādāna°, jāti°, jīvita°, taṇha°, dukkha°, puñña°, bhava°, loka°, Pāli Text Society 547 Pāli-English Dictionary saṃyojana, sabbadhamma°, samudda°. -ātīta (a) gone beyond, recovered from the waning period (of chanda, the moon=the new moon) Sn 598; -ānupassin (a) realizing the fact of decay A IV.146 sq.= V.359 (+vayānupassin); -ðāṇa knowledge of the fact of decay M II.38=Pug 60; in the same sense khaye ðāṇa Nett 15, 54, 59, 127, 191, cp. kvu 230 sq.; -dhamma the law of decay A III.54; Ps I.53, 76, 78. Khara1 {Khara} [cp. Sk. khara] 1. (adj.) rough, hard, sharp; painful D II.127 (ābādha); J III.26 (vedanā) Miln 26 (+sakkhara-kaṭhala-vālikā), PvA 152 (loma, shaggy hair; cp. Np. Khara-lomayakkha Vism 208). - °ka= khara rough, stony PvA 265 (=thaṇḍila). - 2. (m.) a donkey, a mule, in -putta, nickname of a horse J III.278. - 3. a saw J II.230 (=kakaca C.); VI.261. -ājina a rough skin, as garment of an ascetic Sn 249 (=kharāni ajina-cammāni Sn A 291); Pug 56; -gata of rough constitution Dhs 962; also as khari-gata M I.185; Vism 349 (=pharusa). -mukha a conch J VI.580. -ssara of rough sound S II.128. Khara2 {Khara} [Sk. kṣara] water J III.282. Kharatta {Kharatta} (nt.) [fr. khara] roughness A I.54; PvA 90 (in expln of pharusa). Khala {Khala} [cp. Sk. khala] 1. corn ready for threshing, the threshing floor Nd2 587; Vism 120; DA I.203 (khalaṃ sodheti). - 2. threshing, mash, in ekamaṃsa-khalaṃ karoti "to reduce to one mash of flesh" D I.52=M I.377 (+maṃsa-puñja; DA I.160=maṃsa-rāsi). -agga the best corn for threshing DhA I.98; IV.98; -kāla the time for threshing DhA IV.98; -bhaṇḍ'agga the best agricultural implement for threshing DhA I.98; IV.98; -bhaṇḍa-kāla the time for the application of the latter DhA IV.98; -maṇḍala a threshing-floor Vism 123; DhA I.266 (°matta, as large as . . .). Khalanka {Khalanka} in -pāda in -pāda at J VI.3 should probably be read kalanka° (q. v.). Khalati {Khalati} [Dhtp 260: kampane; Dhtm 375: sañcalane; cp. Sk. skhalati, cp. Gr. sfa/llw to bring to fall, to fail] to stumble; ger. khalitvā Th 1, 45; Miln 187; pp. khalita q. v. Cp. upa°, pa°. Khali {Khali} a paste Vin II.321 (:Bdhgh. on C.V. VI.3, 1 for madda). Khalika {Khalika} (or khalikā f.) a dice-board, in khalikāya kīḷanti to play at dice (see illustr. in Rh. D. Buddh. India p. 77) Vin II.10; cp. D I.6 (in enumn of various amusements; expl. at DA I.85 by jūta-khalika pāsaka-kīḷanaṃ). See also kali. Khalita1 {Khalita} [Sk. khalati=Lat. calvus, bald; cp. khallāṭa] bald-headed A I.138 (+vilūna); Th 2, 255 (=vilūnakesa ThA 210). Khalita2 {Khalita} [pp. med. of khalati, cp. Dhtp 611; Dhtm 406 khala=soceyye] (adj. & n.) 1. faltering, stumbling, wrong-doing, failure A I.198; Nd1 300; Th 2, 261; DhA III.196 (of the voice; ThA 211=pakkhalita); J I.78; Miln 94, 408. - 2. disturbed, treated badly J VI. 375. - akhalita undisturbed Th 1, 512. Khalu {Khalu} [indecl., usually contracted to kho, q. v.] either positive: indeed, surely, truly D I.87; Sn p. 103; J IV.391 (as khaḷu); Mhvs VII.17; or negative: indeed not Vism 60 Pāli Text Society 548 Pāli-English Dictionary (=paṭisedhan'atthe nipāto). -pacchābhattika (adj.)=na p°: a person who refuses food offered to him after the normal time Vin V.131=193; Pug 69; Vism 61. See Com. quot. by Childers, p. 310. Khalunka {Khalunka} [adj. fr. khala in caus. sense of khaleti, to shake. In formation=khalanga>khalanka>khalunka, cp. kulūpaka for kulūpaga] only appld to a horse= shaking, a shaker, racer (esp. as java A I.287), fig. of purisa at Anguttara passages. Described as bold and hard to manage A IV.190 sq.; as a horse which cannot be trusted and is inferior to an ājānīya (a thoroughbred) A V.166. Three kinds at A I.287 sq.=IV.397 sq. In expl. of vaḷavā (mare) at J I.180=sindhavakule ajāto khalunk'asso; as vaḷavā khaḷunkā J I.184. - Der. khalunkatā in a°, not shaking, steadiness VvA 278. Khaleti {Khaleti} [Sk. kṣālayati of kṣal?] lit. to wash (cp. pakkhāleti), slang for "to treat badly," "to give a rubbing" or thrashing (exact meaning problematic); only at J IV.205=382: gale gahetvā khalayātha jammaṃ "take the rascal by the throat and thrash him" (Com. khalayātha khalīkāraṃ (i. e. a "rub," kind of punishment) pāpetvā niddhamatha=give him a thrashing & throw him out. v. l. at both passages is galayātha). Khallaka {Khallaka} in baddhā in baddhā upāhanāyo shoes with heel-coverings (?) Vin I.186 (see Bdhgh. note on it Vin Texts II.15). - Also as khalla-baddhādibhedaṃ upāhanaṃ at PvA 127 in expln of upāhana. Kern (Toev. s. v.) sees in it a kind of stuff or material. Khallāta {Khallata} [Sk. khalvāta, cp. khalita] bald, in -sīsa a bald head DhA I.309. Der. khallātiya baldness, in khallātiyapetī the bald-headed Petī PvA 46 (where spelled khalātiya) and 67. Khallika {Khallika} only at S V.421; cp. S IV.330 (Dhammacakka-p-Sutta). It is a misreading. Read with Oldenberg, Vin I.10, kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoga (devotion to the passions, to the pleasures of sense). See kāmasukha and allika. Khaḷopī & Khalopi & Kalopī {Khalopi} {Kalopi} [and, also , q. v. Cp. Trenckner Notes, p. 60, possibly=karoṭi] a pot, usually with kumbhī: D I.167 (-mukha+kumbhi-mukha); Pug 55; Miln 107. {kalopi} Khāṇu {Khanu} [also often spelled khānu; prob.=Sk. sthāṇu, corrupted in etym. with khaṇati, cp. Trenckner, Notes 58, n. 6] a stump (of a tree), a stake. Often used in description of uneven roads; together with kaṇṭaka, thorns A I.35; III.389; Vism 261 (°paharaṇ'aggi), 342 (°magga); SnA 334. - jhāma° a burnt stump (as characteristic of kālaka) S IV.193. - nikhāta° an uprooted trunk DA I.73. Khāṇu-kondañña N. of a Thera Vism 380; DhA II.254. Khāṇuka {Khanuka} =khāṇu S V.379 (avihata°): J II.18, 154; V.45 (loha-daṇḍa-kh° pins & stakes of brass); Miln 187 (mūle vā khāṇuke vā . . . khalitvā stumbling over roots & stumps); Vism 381=DhA II.254 (with ref. to the name of Khāṇu-kondañña who by robbers was mistaken for a tree stump); VvA 338 (in a road=sankuka). Khāta (adj.) [Sk. khāta; pp. of khan] dug DA I.274 (=ukkiṇṇa), a° not dug Miln 351 (°taḷāka). Cp. atikhāta J II.296. {Khata} Khāda {Khada} (nt.) eating, in -kāraṇa the reason of eating . . . PvA 37. 549 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Khādaka {Khadaka} (adj.) eating (nt.) Vism 479; eating, living on (adj. -°), an eater J IV.307; PvA 44; lohita -maṃsa° (of Yakkhas) J I.133, 266; camma° J I.176; gūtha° (of a Peta) PvA 266. Khādati {Khadati} [Dhtp 155 "khāda bhakkhane"; cp. Sk. khādati, cp. Gr. knw/dwn the barbed hook of a javelin, i. e. "the biter"; Lith. kándu to bite] to chew, bite, eat, devour (=Ger. fressen); to destroy. - Pres. Dh 240; J I.152 (sassāni); III.26; Pv I.63 (puttāni, of a Petī); I.94. - kaṭṭhaṃ kh° to use a toothpick J I.80, 282, - dante kh° to gnash the teeth J I.161. - santakaṃ kh° to consume one's property DhsA 135. - of beasts, e. g. Sn 201, 675. - Pot. khādeyya J III.26. - Imper. khāda J I.150 (maṃsaṃ); II.128 (khādaniyaṃ); VI.367. (pūvaṃ); PvA 39, 78. - Part. pres. khādanto J I.61; III.276. - Fut. khādissati J I.221; II.129. - Aor. khādiṃsu PvA 20. - Pass. ppr. khādiyamāna (cp. khajjati) PvA 69 (taṇhāya) (expl. of khajjamāna). - Inf. khādituṃ J I.222; II.153; DhA IV.226. Ger. khāditvā J I.266, 278 (phalāni); PvA 5, 32 (devour); poetical khādiyā J V.464 (=khāditvā). Grd. khāditabba J III.52, and khādaniya (q .v.). - Pp. khādita (q. v.). Cp. pali°. Khādana {Khadana} (nt.) the act of eating (or being eaten) PvA 158. - adj. f. khādanī the eater Dpvs 238; khādana at J II.405 is to be read as ni° (q. v.). Cp. vi°. Khādaniya {Khadaniya} [grd. of khādati; also as khādanīya] hard or solid food, opp. to and freq, combd with bhojaniya (q. v.). So at D II.127; J I.90, 235; III.127; Sn. p 110; Miln 9, 11. - Also in combn anna, pāna, kh° Sn 924; II.49. By itself J III.276. - piṭṭha° pastry Vin I.248. Khādā (f.) food, in rāja° royal food Sn 831 (rājakhādāya puṭṭho=rājakhādanīyena rājabhojanīyena posito Nd1 171; where printed °khadāya throughout). {Khada} Khādāpana {Khadapana} [fr. khādāpeti] causing to be eaten (kind of punishment) Miln 197 (sunakhehi). Khādāpeti {Khadapeti} (Caus. II. of khādati] to make eat J III.370; VI.335. Khādika {Khadika} =khādaka, in aððamaðða° S V.456. Khādita {Khadita} (adj.) [pp. med. & pass. of khādati] eaten, or having eaten, eaten up, consumed J I.223; II.154; PvA 5. - A twin form of khādita is khāyita, formed prob. on analogy of sāyita, with which freq. combined (cp., however, Trenckner P.M. 57), e. g. Pug 59; Vism 258; PvA 25. Used as the poetical form Pv I.1211 (expl. PvA 158=khādita). - Der. khāditatta (nt.) the fact of being eaten J I.176. - ṭṭhāna the eating place, place of feeding J V.447. Khādin {Khadin} f. khādinī=khādaka PvA 31. Khāyati {Khayati} [pass.=Sk. khyāyate, khyā] to seem to be, to appear like (viya) J I.279; aor. khāyiṃsu J I.61; ppr. med. khāyamāna J IV. 140; PvA 251. Cp. pakkhāyati. Khāyita {Khayita} see khādita; cp. avakkhāyika. Khāra {Khara} [Sk. kṣāra, pungent, saline, sharp to ksā, kṣāyati to burn, cp. Gr. chro/s, dry; Lat. serenus, dry, clear, seresco to dry] any alkaline substance, potash, lye. In combn with ūsa (salt earth) at S III.131 (-gandha); A I.209. - Used as a caustic Pv III.102; Sdhp 281. See also chārikā. - Pāli Text Society 550 Pāli-English Dictionary āpatacchika a means of torturing, in enumn of var. tortures (under vividha-kamma-kāranā kārenti) M I.87= A I.48=II.122=Nd2 604; J VI.17 (v. l. °ṭicch°; C. has āpatacchika, v. l. paṭicchaka); Vism 500; Miln 197. Both A & Nd have v. l. kharāpaṭicchaka; -ôdaka an alkaline solution Vism 264, 420; DhA I.189; PvA 213; cp. khārodikā nadī (in Niraya) Sdhp 194. Khāraka {Kharaka} (adj.) [fr. khāra] sharp or dry, said of the buds of the Pāricchattaka A IV.117 sq. Khārī {Khari} (f.) [and khāri-] a certain measure of capacity (esp. of grain, see below khārika). It is used of the eight requisites of an ascetic, and often in conn. with his yoke (kāja): "a khārīload." -kāja Vin I.33 (cp. Vin Texts I.132); J V.204. -bhaṇḍa DhA III.243 (:kahaṃ te kh-bh° ko pabbajita parikkhāro); -bhāra a shoulder-yoke S I.169; J III.83; -vidha=°kāja S I.78=Ud 65; D I.101. At Ud and D passages it is read vividha, but DA I.269 makes it clear: khārī ti araṇikamaṇḍalu-sūcādayo tāpasa-parikkhārā; vidho ti kāco, tasmā khāribharitaṃ kācam ādāyā ti attho. As Kern (Toev. s. v.) points out, °vidha is a distortion of vivadha, which is synonymous with kāja. Khārika1 {Kharika} [adj. to khāra] alkaline, in enumn of tastes (cp. rasa) at S III 87; Dhs 629 and ≈. Khārika2 {Kharika} [adj. of khārī] of the khārī measure, in vīsati° kosalako tilavāho A V.173=Sn p. 126. Khāleti {Khaleti} Caus. of khalati: see khaleti & vikkhāleti. Khāhinti {Khahinti} at Th 2, 509 is to be read kāhinti (=karissanti ThA 293). Khiḍḍā {Khidda} [Vedic krīḍā, cp. kīḷati] play, amusement, pleasure usually combd with rati, enjoyment. Var. degrees of pleasures (bāla°, etc.) mentioned at A V.203; var. kinds of amusement enumerated at Nd2 219; as expounded at D I.6 under jūta-pamādaṭṭhāna. Generally divided into kāyikā & vācasikā khiḍḍā (Nd2; SnA 86). Expl. as kīḷanā SnA 86, as hassādhippāya (means of mirth) PvA 226; sahāyakādīhi keḷi PvA 265. Cp. Sn 926; Pv IV.121. dasaka "the decad of play," i. e. the second 10 years of man's life, fr. 11-20 years of age Vism 619. -padosika corrupted by pleasures D I.19, 20=DA I.113 (v. l. padūsika); -rati play & enjoyment Sn 41, 59; Vv 1612, 327; Pv IV.72; Vism 619. Khitta {Khitta} [pp. of khip, to throw Dhtp 479; peraṇe] thrown; cast, overthrown Dh 34; rajo paṭivātaṃ kh°, dirt thrown against the wind S I.13, 164=Sn 662=Dh 125= J III.203; ratti-khittā sarā arrows shot in the night Dh 304=Nett 11; acchi vātavegena khittā a flame overthrown by the power of the wind, blown out Sn 1074 (expld Nd2 220 by ukkhittā nuṇṇā, khambhitā); in interpret. of khetta PvA 7 said of sowing: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ. - akkhitta not upset, not deranged, undisturbed, in qualities required of a brahmin w. ref. to his genealogy: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto D I.113=Sn p. 115, etc. Cp. vi°. -citta (a) one whose mind is thrown over, upset, unhinged, usually combd with ummattaka, out of one's mind Vin I.131, 321; II.64, etc.; Sdhp 88. Cp. citta-kkhepa. Pāli Text Society 551 Pāli-English Dictionary Khipa {Khipa} (nt.) [fr. ksip] a throw, anything thrown over, as ajina° a cloak of antelope hide D I.167 and ≈; or thrown out, as a fishing net (=kumina) eel-basket A I.33=287; Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243). Cp. khippa & vikkhepika. Khipati {Khipati} [Vedic kṣipati] to throw, to cast, to throw out or forth, to upset Sn p. 32 (cittaṃ); J I.223 (sīsaṃ). 290 (pāsake); II.3 (daḷhaṃ dalhassa: to pit force against force) - aor. khipi S IV.2, 3 (khuracakkaṃ); PvA 87 (=atthāresi). - ger. khipitvā J I.202. - 1st caus. khepeti (perhaps to kṣi, see khaya) to throw in, to put in, to spend (of time): dīgham addhānaṃ khepetvā J I.137; Th 2, 168 (khepeti jātisaṃsāraṃ=pariyosāpeti ThA 159); DhA I.102 (dvenavuti-kappe khepesuṃ); āyuṃ khepehi spend (the rest of) your life PvA 148; ger. khepayitvāna (saṃsāraṃ) Pv IV.332 (=khepetvā PvA 254). In this sense Trenckner (P. M. 76) takes it as corresponding to Sk. kṣāpayati of kṣi=to cause to waste. See also khepana. - 2nd caus. khipāpeti to cause to be thrown J I.202; IV.139 (jalaṃ). Cp also khepa. Khipana (nt.) the act of throwing or the state of being thrown J I.290 (pasaka- k°). Khipanā {Khipana} (f.) [fr. khipati] throwing up, provocation, mockery, slander Miln 357; Vbh 352; cp. Vism 29. Khipita {Khipita} (nt.) [pp. of khipati=that which is thrown out; acc. to Trenckner Notes p. 75 for khupita fr. kṣu to sneeze; possibly a contamination of the two] sneezing, expectoration Pv II.23 (expl. PvA 80: mukhato nikkhantamala); DhA I.314 (°roga+kāsa, coughing). -sadda the sound of expectorations D I.50; DhA I.250. Khippa {Khippa} (adj.): [Vedic kṣipra to kṣip] 1. quick, lit. in the way of throwing (cp. "like a shot") Sn 350 (of vacana =lahu SnA). - 2. a sort of fishing net or eel-basket (cp. khipa & Sk. kṣepaṇī) S I.74. - nt. adv. khippaṃ quickly A II.118=III.164; Sn 413, 682, 998; Dh 65, 137, 236, 289; J IV.142; Pv II.84, 92, 1221, Pug 32. - Compar. khippatara Sn p. 126. -ābhiððā quick intuition (opp. dandh°) D III.106; Dhs 177; Nett 7, 24, 50, 77, 112 sq.; 123 sq.; Vism 138. Khippati {Khippati} [fr. kṣip] to ill-treat, in ppr. khippamāna Vv 8444, expld at VvA 348 by vambhento, pīḷanto. Khila {Khila} (m. nt.) [cp. Sk. khila] waste or fallow land A III.248; fig. barrenness of mind, mental obstruction. There are five ceto-khilā enumd in detail at M I.101=A IV.460= D III.238 (see under ceto); mentioned A V.17; SnA 262. As three khilā, viz. rāga, dosa, moha at S V.57; also with other qualities at Nd2 9. In combn with paligha S I.27 (chetvā kh° ṃ); khilaṃ pabhindati to break up the fallowness (of one's heart) S I.193; III.134; Sn 973.- akhila (adj.) not fallow, unobstructed, open-hearted: cittaṃ susamāhitaṃ . . . akhilaṃ sabbabhūtesu DII.261; S IV.118; in combn with anāsava Sn 212; with akankha Sn 477, 1059; with vivattacchada Sn 1147; cp. vigatakhila Sn 19. Khiḷa {Khila} [cp. Sk. kiṇa] hard skin, callosity J V.204 (v. l. kiṇa). Khīṇa {Khina} [pp. of khīyati, Pass. to khayati] destroyed, exhausted, removed, wasted, gone; in cpds. °- often to be translated "without." It is mostly applied to the destruction of the passions (āsavā) & demerit (kamma). Khīṇā jāti "destroyed is the possibility of rebirth," in freq. occurring formula "kh. j. vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāparaṃ Pāli Text Society 552 Pāli-English Dictionary itthattāya," denoting the attainment of Arahantship. (See arahant II, formula A) Vin I. 35; D I.84, 177, 203; M II.39; Sn p. 16; Pug 61 etc. See expln at DA I.225= SnA 138. - khīṇaṃ mayhaṃ kammaṃ J IV.3, similarly khīṇaṃ purāṇaṃ navaṃ natthi sambhavaṃ Sn 235 (khīṇa=samucchinna KhA 194); pāpakamme khīṇe PvA 105. āsavakhīṇa one whose cravings are destroyed Sn 370, cp. 162. -āsava (adj.) whose mind is free from the four mental obsessions, Ep. of an Arahant Vin I.183; M I. 145; II.43; III.30; D III.97, 133, 235; It 95; Sn 82, 471, 539, 644; Dh 89, 420; PvA 7 (=arahanto); cp. BSk kṣīṇāśrava Divy 542. - The seven powers of a kh.° (khīṇāsava-balāni) discussed at D III.283; Ps I.35; ten powers at Ps II.173, 176; cp. Vism 144 (where a kh. walks through the air). -punabbhava one in whom the con- ditions of another existence have been destroyed (=khīṇāsava) Sn 514, 656; -bīja one who is without the seed (of renewed existence) (=prec.) Sn 235 (=ucchinna-bīja KhA 194); -maccha without fish (of a lake) Dh 155; -vyappatha without the way of (evil) speech (vyapp°=vācāya patho; expl. SnA 204 as na pharusavāco) Sn 158; -sota with the stream gone, i. e. without water, in macche appodake kh° Sn 777. Khīṇatta {Khinatta} (nt.) DA I.225 & khīṇatā (f.) DhA IV.228, the fact of being destroyed. Khīya {Khiya} [cp. khīyati2] in -dhammaṃ āpajjati to fall into a state of mental depression Vin IV.151, 154; A III.269; IV.374. See also remarks by Kern, Toev. s. v. Khīyati {Khiyati} [Sk. kṣīyate, pa ); Pv II.942; 112; Ps I.94, 96; II.31 (āsavā); Bdhd 80. - ppr. khīyamāna Sn 434; Bdhd 19. aor. khīyi D III.93; grd. khīyitabba ibid. see also khāya and khīyanaka. In phrase "ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti it seems to correspond to jhāyati2 [Sk. kṣ āyati] and the meaning is "to become chafed or heated, to become vexed, angry; to take offence"; as evidenced by the combn with quāsi-synonyms ujjhāyati & vipāceti, both referring to a heated state, fig. for anger (cp. kilissati). Thus at Vin II.259 & passim. See ujjhāyati for further refs. Khīyanaka {Khiyanaka} (a) [der. fr. khīya] in combn with pācittiya a "falling away" offence (legal term denoting the falling away from a consent once given) (see khīya) Vin II.94, 100; IV.38. Khīra {Khira} (nt.) [Sk. kṣīra] milk, milky fluid, milky juice Vin I.243; II.301; M I.343 sq.=A II.207=Pug 56; A II.95 (in simile with dadhi, navanīta, sappi, sappi-maṇḍa)= D I.201; DhA I.98; enumd with dadhi, etc., as one constituent of material food (kabalinkāro ähāro) at Dhs 6Q6=740=875; - J IV.138 (mātu kh°); 140; Dh 71=Nett 161; Miln 41; PvA 198 (=sneha, milky juice); VvA 75; DhA I.98 (nirudaka kh°, milk without water). -duddha-khīra one who has milked Sn 18. -ôdaka (nt.) milk-water or milk & water lit. J II.104, 106; fig. in simile khīrodakībhūtā for a samaggā parisā "a congregation at harmony as milk and water blend" A I.70; S IV.225=M I.207, 398=A III.67, 104; -odana (nt.) milk-rice (boiled) Vv3324 (=VvA 147). gandha the smell of milk J VI.357. -ghaṭa a pot of milk Miln 48; -paka drinking milk; sucking (of a calf: vaccho mātari kh°) Dh 284 (v. l. khīra-pāna); DhA III.424; -paṇṇin (m.) N. of a tree the leaves of which contain a milky sap, Calotropis gigantea M I.429; -matta having had his fill of milk, happy (of a babe) S I.108; -mūla the price of milk; money with which to buy milk DhA IV.217; -sāmin master of the milk (+dhīrasāmin) Bdhd 62. Khīranikā {Khiranika} (f.) a milk-giving cow S I.174. Pāli Text Society 553 Pāli-English Dictionary Khīla {Khila} [Sk. kīla & khīla] a stake, post, bolt, peg Vin II.116 (khīlaṃ nikhanitvā digging in or erecting a post); S III.150 (kh° vā thambha vā); IV.200 (daḷha° a strong post, Ep. of satī); Mhvs 29, 49. - ayo° an iron stake A I.141; S V.444; Nd2 304III; Sn 28 (nikhāta, erected); SnA 479. Cp. inda°. -ṭṭhāyi-ṭhita standing like a post (of a stubborn horse) A IV.192, 194. Khīlaka {Khilaka} (adj.) having sticks or stumps (as obstacles), in a° unobstructed J V.203 (=akāca nikkaṇṭaka 206). Khīḷana {Khilana} [der. fr. khīḷeti] scorn Miln 357. Khīḷeti {Khileti} [to kīḷ or to khila?] to scorn, deride, only in combn hīḷita khīḷita garahita (pp.) Miln 229, 288; cp. khīḷana. Khu {Khu} (-°) is doubtful second part of inghāḷa° (q. v.). Khuṃseti {Khumseti} [kruś ? Dhtp 625: akkosane; cp. Müller P.G. 52 to scold, to curse, to be angry at, to have spite against D I.90, DA I.256 (=ghaṭṭeti); Vin IV.7; SnA 357; DhA IV.38. - pp. khuṃsita DhA II.75. Khujja {Khujja} (adj.) [either Sk kubja, of which khujja would be the older form (cp. Walde, Lat. Etym. Wtb. s. v. cubitum), or Sk. kṣudra (?) (so Müller, P.G. p. 52). See also the variant kujja & cp. kuṭṭa2] 1. humpbacked J V.426 (+piṭhasappī); DA I.148 (in combn with vāmana & kirāta); f. DhA I.194, 226. - 2. small, inferior, in kh°-rājā a smaller, subordinate king Sdhp 453. Khuṇḍali {Khundali} at PvA 162 (mā kh.) is to be read ukkaṇṭhi. Khudā {Khuda} [Sk. kṣudh & kṣudhā, also BSk. kṣud in kṣuttarṣa hunger & thirst Jtm p. 30] hunger Sn 52 (+pipāsā: Nd2 s. v. kh° vuccati chātako), 966; Pv I.64 (=jighacchā) II.15 (+taṇhā), 24; PvA 72. See khuppipāsā. Khudda {Khudda} (adj.) [Vedic kṣudra] small, inferior, low; trifling, insignificant; na khuddaṃ samācare kiðci "he shall not pursue anything trifling" Sn 145 (=lāmakaṃ KhA 243); kh° ca bālaṃ Sn 318. Opp. to strong Vv 3210 (of migā= balavasena nihīnā VvA 136). -ānukhuddaka, in °āni sikkhāpadāni the minor observances of discipline, the lesser & minor precepts Vin II.287=D II. 154; Vin IV.143; A I.233; cp. Divy 465; -āvakāsa in akhuddāvakāso dassanāya not appearing inferior, one of the attributes of a well-bred brahmin (with brahmavaṇṇī) D I.114, 120, etc. -desa, in °issara ruler of a small district Sdhp 348. Khuddaka {Khuddaka} =khudda; usually in cpds. In sequence khuddaka-majjhima-mahā Vism 100. Of smaller sections or subdivisions of canonical books Vin V.145 sq. (with ref. to the paññattis), see also below. -catuppade kh° ca mahallake Sn 603. Khuddaka {Khuddaka} (m.) the little one, Miln 40 (mātā °assa). -nadī=kunnadī, a small river PvA 154; -nikāya name of a collection of canonical books, mostly short (the fifth of the five Nikāyas) comprising the foll. 15 books: Khuddaka-Pāṭha, Dhammapada, Udāna, Itivuttaka, Sutta-Nipāta, Vimāna-Vatthu, Peta-Vatthu, Thera and Therī Gāthā, Jātaka (verses only), Niddesa, Paṭisambhidāmagga, Apadāna, Buddha-Vaṃsa, CariyāPiṭaka. The name Kh-N. is Pāli Text Society 554 Pāli-English Dictionary taken from the fact that it is a collection of short books-short, that is, as compared with the Four Nikāyas. Anvs (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 35; Gvns (J.P.T.S. 1886) p. 57; PvA 2, etc. -pāṭha N. of the first book in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -mañcaka a small or low bed J I.167; -rājā an inferior king J V.37 (+mahārājā); SnA 121; cp. khujja & kuṭṭa; -vaggulī (f.) a small singing bird DhA III.223; vatthuka belonging to or having smaller sections Vin V.114. Khuppipāsā [cp. khudā] hunger & thirst: °āya mīyamāno M I.85. Personified as belonging to the army of Māra Sn 436=Nd2 on visenikatvā. To be tormented by hunger & thirst is the special lot of the Petas: Pv I.1110; II.22, PvA 10, 32, 37, 58, etc.; Vism 501; Sdhp 9, 101, 507. Khubhati {Khuppipasa} see saṃ° & khobha. The root is given at Dhtp 206 & 435 as "khubha=sañcalane." {Khubhati} Khura1 {Khura} [Vedic khura] the hoof of an animal Vv 6410 (of a horse=turagānaṃ khuranipāta, the clattering of a horse's hoof VvA 279), cp. Sk. kṣura, a monkey's claw Sp. AvŚ I.236. khurakāse M I.446, read (with Neumann) for khura-kāye, "in the manner of dragging (kṛṣ) the hoofs." Khura2 {Khura} [Vedic kṣura, to kṣṇu, kṣṇoti to whet, kṣṇotra whetstone; cp. Gr. xnau/w scrape, cu/w shave, Lat. novacula razor. The Pali Dhtp (486) gives as meanings "chedana & vilekhana"] a razor Vin II.134; S IV.169 (tiṇha a sharp r.) DhA II.257. -agga the hall of tonsure PvA 53; -appa a kind of arrow D I.96; M I.429 (+vekaṇḍa); Vism 381. -kosa razor-sheath Vism 251, 255. -cakka a wheel, sharp as a razor J IV.3; -dhāra 1. carrying razors, said of the Vetaraṇī whose waters are like razors Sn 674 (+tiṇha- dhāra); J V.269; Vism 163. - 2. the haft of a razor, or its case Sn 716 (°ûpama); Vism 500; DhA II.257; -nāsa having a nose like a razor J IV.139; pariyanta a disk as sharp as a razor, a butcher-knife D I.52 (=DA I.160; khura-nemi khurasadisa-pariyanta), cp. °cakka; -māla N. of an ocean, in °samudda J IV.137; -mālī (f.)= prec. ibid.; -muṇḍa close-shaven Vin I.344; VvA 207. Khuramuṇḍaṃ karoti to shave closely D I.98; S IV.344= A II.241; -bhaṇḍa the outfit of a barber, viz. khura, khura-silā, khura-sipāṭikā, namataka Vin I.249; II.134, cp. Vin. Texts III.138; -silā a whetstone Vin II.134; -sipāṭikā a powder prepared with s. gum to prevent razors from rusting Vin II.134. Khulukhulu -kaṛakaṃ (nt. adv.) "so as to make the sound khulu, khulu," i.e. clattering or bumping about M II.138. Cp. ghuru-ghuru. {Khulukhulu} Kheṭa {Kheta} [cp. Sk. kheṭaka] a shield: see kīṭa. Khetta {Khetta} (nt.) [Vedic kṣetra, to kṣi, kṣeti, kṣiti, dwelling-place, Gr. kti/zw, Lat. situs founded, situated, E. site; cp. also Sk. kṣema "being settled," composure. See also khattiya. Dhammapāla connects khetta with kṣip & trā in his expln at PvA 7: khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ tāyati . . . ti khettaṃ] 1. (lit.) a field, a plot of land, arable land, a site, D I.231; S I.134 (bījaṃ khette virūhati; in simile); three kinds of fields at S IV.315, viz. agga°, majjhima°, hīna° (in simile); A I.229=239; IV.237 (do.); Sn 524; J I.153 (sāli-yava°); Pv II.968=DhA III.220 (khette bījaṃ ropitaṃ); Miln 47; PvA 62; DhA I.98. Often as a mark of wealth=possession, e. g. D III.93 in defn of khattiya: khettānaṃ patī ti khattiya., In the same sense connected with vatthu (field & farm cp. Haus und Hof), to denote objects of trade, etc. D I.5 (expld at DA I.78: khetta nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ rūhati, vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ rūhati, "kh. is where the first Pāli Text Society 555 Pāli-English Dictionary crop grows and v. where the second." A similar expln at Nd1 248, where khetta is divided into sāli°, vīhi. mugga°, māsa°, yava°, godhūma°, tila°, i. e. the pubbaṇṇāni, and vatthu expld ghara°, koṭṭhaka°, pure°, pacchā°, ārāma°, vihāra° without ref. to aṇṇa.) S II.41; Sn 769. Together with other earthly possessions as wealth (hirañña, suvaṇṇa) Sn 858; Nd2 on lepa, gahaṭṭha, etc. As example in definition of visible objects Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. - Kasī° a tilled field, a field ready to bear Pv I.12, cp. PvA 8; jāti° "a region in which a Buddha may be born" (Hardy, after Childers s. khetta) PvA 138. Cp. the threefold division of a Buddha-kkhetta at Vism 414, viz. jāti°, āṇā°, visaya°. - 2. fig. (of kamma) the soil of merit, the deposit of good deeds, which, like a fertile field, bears fruit to the advantage of the "giver" of gifts or the "doer" of good works. See dakkhiṇeyya°, puñña° (see detailed expln at Vism 220; khetta here= virūhana-ṭṭhāna), brahma°. - A I.162, 223 (kammaṃ, khettaṃ, viððāṇaṃ bījaṃ); IV.237; It 98; VvA 113.- akhetta barren soil A III.384 (akhettaññu not finding a good soil); IV.418 (do.); PvA 137. Sukhetta a good soil, fertile land S I.21; PvA 137; opp. dukkhetta S V.379. -ûpama to be likened to a (fruitful) field, Ep. of an Arahant Pv I.11; -kammanta work in the field A III.77; gata turned into a field, of puññakamma "good work becoming a field of merit" PvA 136, 191; -gopaka a field watcher J III.52; -ja "born on one's land," one of the 4 kinds of sons Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J I.135. -jina one unsurpassed in the possession of a "field" Sn 523, 524; -pāla one who guards a field J III.54; -mahantatā the supremeness of the field (of merit) VvA 108; -rakkhaka the guardian of a field J II.110; -vatthu possession of land & goods (see above) D III.164; S V.473=A II.209; A V.137; Pug 58; PvA 3; -sampatti the successful attainment of a field of (merit) PvA 198; VvA 102; see VvA 30, 32 on the three sampattis, viz. khetta°, citta°, payoga°; -sāmika the owner of the field Miln 47; VvA 311. -sodhana the cleaning of the field (before it is ploughed) DhA III.284. Kheda {Kheda} (adj.) [Sk. kheda fatigue, khedati; perhaps to Lat. caedo] subject to fatigue, tired VvA 276. - As noun "fatigue" at Vism 71. Khepa {Khepa} [cp. khipati] (-°) throwing, casting, Sdhp 42. Usually in citta-kkhepa loss of mind, perplexity Dh 138. Cp. vi°, saṃ°. Khepana {Khepana} [cp. khepeti] -° the passing of, appld to time: āyu° VvA 311. Khepita {Khepita} [pp. of khepeti] destroyed, brought to waste, annihilated, khepitatta (nt.) the fact of being destroyed, destruction, annihilation, DhA II.163 (kilesavaṭṭassa kh.). Khepeti {Khepeti} see khipati. Khema {Khema} [Vedic kṣema to kṣi, cp. khetta] 1. (adj.) full of peace, safe; tranquil, calm D I.73 (of a country); S I.123 (of the path leading to the ambrosial, i. e. Nibbāna) I.189=Sn 454 (of vācā nibbānapattiyā); M I.227 (vivaṭaṃ amatadvāraṃ khemaṃ nibbānapattiyā "opened is the door to the Immortal, leading to peace, for the attainment of Nibbāna") A III.354 (of ðāna) It 32; Sn 268 (=abhaya, nirupaddava KhA 153); Dh 189 sq.; Pv IV.33 (of a road=nibbhaya PvA 250); VvA 85. - 2. (nt.) shelter, place of security, tranquillity, home of peace, the Serene (Ep. of Nibbāna). In general: D I.11 (peace, opp. bhaya); Sn 896 (+avivādabhūmi); 953. - In particular of Nibbāna: S IV.371; A IV.455; Vv 5320 (amataṃ khemaṃ); Ps I.59. See also yoga. Abl. khemato, from the standpoint of the Serene S II.109; Sn 414, 1098; Nd2 s. v. (+tāṇato, etc.). -atta one who is at peace (+viratta) S I.112 (=khemībhūtaṃ assabhāvaṃ SA). -anta security, in °bhūmi a peaceful country (opp, kantāra), a paradise (as Ep. of Nibbāna) D I.73; Nd2 on Satthā; Vism 303. -ṭṭhāna Pāli Text Society 556 Pāli-English Dictionary the place of shelter, the home of tranquillity Th 2, 350 (=Nibbāna ThA 242); -ṭṭhita peaceful, appeased, unmolested D I.135; -dassin looking upon the Serene Sn 809; -ppatta having attained tranquillity (=abhayappatta, vesārajjappatta) M I.72=A II.9. Khemin {Khemin} (adj.) one who enjoys security or peace S III.13; Sn 145 (=abhaya KhA 244); Dh 258. Kheḷa {Khela} [Sk. kheṭa, cp. kṣveḍa and śleṣma, P. silesuma. See also kilid & kilis, cp. ukkheṭita. On root khela see keḷanā; it is given by Dhtp 279 in meaning "calana." The latter (khela) has of course nothing to do with kheḷa] phlegm, saliva, foam; usually with singhānikā mucus, sometimes in the sense of perspiration, sweat A I.34; IV.137; Sn 196 (+singh°); Kh II.=Miln 26 (cp. Vism 263 in detail, & KhA 66); J I.61; IV.23; VI.367; Vism 259, 343 (+singhāṇikā), 362; DhA III.181; IV.20, 170; Pv II.23 as food for Petas, cp. Av.S. I.279 (kheṭamūtropajīvinī; II.113: kheṭavadutsṛjya); PvA 80 (=niṭṭhubhana). -kilinna wet with exudation J I.164; -mallaka a spitting box, a cuspidor Vin I.48; II.175, 209 sq.; -singhānikā phlegm & mucus DhA I.50. Kheḷāpaka (Vin) & Kheḷāsika (DhA) {Khelapaka} {Khelasika} an abusive term "eating phlegm" (?) [Müller, P.G. 30=kheṭātmaka] Vin II.188, cp. Vin. Texts III.239; °vāda the use of the term "phlegm-eater," calling one by this name Vin II.189; DhA 140. Cp. āpaka.? spittle-dribbler; "wind bag." Kho {Kho} [before vowels often khv'; contr. of khalu=Sk. khalu] an enclitic particle of affirmation & emphasis: indeed, really, surely; in narration: then, now (cp. kira); in question: then, perhaps, really. Def. as adhikār'antara-nidassan'atthe nipāto KhA 113; as avadhāraṇaṃ (affirmative particle) PvA 11, 18. - A few of its uses are as foll.: abhabbo kho Vin I.17; pasādā kho D II.155. After pron.: mayhaṃ kho J I.279; ete kho Vin I.10; idaṃ kho ibid.; so ca kho J I.51; yo kho M I.428; - After a negation: na kho indeed not J II.111; no ca khv'āssa A V.195; mā kho J I.253; - Often combd with pana: na sakkhā kho pana "is it then not possible" J I.151; api ca kho pana J I.253; siyā kho pana D II.154; - Following other particles. esp. in aoristic narration: atha kho (extremely frequent); tatra kho; tāpi kho; api ca kho; evaṃ bhante ti kho; evaṃ byā kho Vin IV.134; Dh I.27, etc. - In interr. sentences it often follows nu: kin nu kho J I.279; atthi nu kho J III.52; kahan nu kho J I.255. Khobha {Khobha} (m.) [cp. Vedic kṣubh kṣobhayati, to shake=Goth. skiuban Ger. schieben, to push, E. shove] shaking, shock Vism 31, 157; khobhaṃ karoti to shake VvA 35, 36, 278; khobha-karaṇa shaking up, disturbance Vism 474. See also akkhobbha. Khoma {Khoma} [cp. Vedic kṣauma] adj. flaxen; nt. a linen cloth, linen garment, usually combd with kappāsika Vin I.58, 96, 281; A IV.394; V.234=249 (°yuga); J VI.47, 500; Pv II.117; DhA I.417. -pilotikā a linen cloth Vin I.296. Pāli Text Society 557 Pāli-English Dictionary G °Ga {°Ga} [fr. gam] adj., only as ending: going. See e. g. atiga, anuga, antalikkha°, ura°, pāra°, majjha°, samīpa°, hattha°. It also appears as °gu, e. g. in addha°, anta°, paṭṭha°, pāra°, veda°. dugga (m. & nt.) a difficult road Dh 327=Miln 379; Pv II.78 (=duggamana-ṭṭhāna PvA 102); II.925; J II.385. Gagana {Gagana} (nt.) the sky (with reference to sidereal motions); usually of the moon: g° majjhe puṇṇacando viya J I.149, 212; g° tale canda-maṇḍalaṃ J III.365; cando g° majjhe ṭhito J V.137; cando gagane viya sobhati Vism 58; g° tale candaṃ viya DhA I.372; g° tale puṇṇacanda "the full-moon in the expanse of the heavens" VvA 3; g° talamagga the (moon's) course in the sky PvA 188; etc. Of the sun: suriyo ākāse antalikkhe gaganapathe gacchati Nd2 on Sn 1097. Unspecified: J I.57; Vism 176 (°tal-ābhimukhaṃ). Gaggara {Gaggara} [Vedic gargara throat, whirlpool. *gÛer to sling down, to whirl, cp. Gr. ba/raqron, Lat. gurges, gurgulio, Ohg. querechela "kehle"] 1. roaring, only in f. gaggarī a blacksmith's bellows: kammāra°, in simile M I.243; S I.106; Vism 287. - 2. (nt.) cackling, cawing, in haṃsa° the sound of geese J V.96 (expl. by haṃsamadhurassara). Gaggarā as N. of a lake at Vism 208. - See note on gala. Gaggaraka {Gaggaraka} [fr. gaggara] a whirlpool, eddy J V.405; according to Kern Toev. s. v. a sort of fish (Sk. gargaraka, Pimelodus Gagora); as gaggalaka at Miln 197. Gaggarāyati {Gaggarayati} [v. den. fr. prec.; cp. gurgulio: gurges, E. gargle & gurgle] to whirl, roar, bellow, of the waves of the Gangā Miln 3. - cp. gaḷagaḷāyati. Gaccha {Gaccha} [not=Sk. kaccha, grass-land, as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 16. The passage J III.287 stands with gaccha, v. l. kaccha for gaccha at A IV.74; g° for k° at Sn 20] a shrub, a bush, usually together with latā, creeper & rukkha, tree, e. g. Nd2 235, Id; J I.73; Miln 268; Vism 182 (described on p. 183). With dāya, wood A IV.74. puppha° a flowering shrub J I.120; khuddaka°vana a wood of small shrubs J V.37. - PvA 274; VvA 301 (-gumba, brushwood, underwood); DhA I.171 (-pothana-ṭṭhāna); IV.78 (-mūla). Gacchati {Gacchati} [Vedic gacchati, a desiderative (future) formation from *gÛem "I am intent upon going," i. e. I go, with the foll. bases. - (1) Future-present *gÛemskéti> *gaścati>Sk. gacchati=Gr. ba/skw (to bainw). In meaning cp. i, Sk. emi, Gr. eQmi "I shall go" & in form also Sk. pṛcchati=Lat. porsco "I want to know," Vedic icchati "to desire." - (2) Present *gÛemio=Sk. gamati=Gr. bai/nw, Lat. venio, Goth. qiman, Ohg. koman, E. come; and non-present formations as Osk. kúmbened, Sk. gata=Lat. ventus; gantu=(ad) ventus. - (3) *gÛā, which is correlated to *stā, in Pret. Sk. ágām, Gr. e)/bhn, cp. bh_ma]. These three formations are represented in Pāli as follows (1) gacch°, in pres. gacchati; imper. gaccha & gacchāhi; pot. gacche (Dh 46, 224) & gaccheyya; p.pres. gacchanto, med. gacchamāna; fut (2nd) gacchissati; aor. agacchi (VvA 307; v. l. agañchi). - (2) gam° in three variations; viz. (a) gam°, in pres. caus. gameti; fut. gamissati; aor. 3 sg. agamā (Sn 408, 976; Vv 797; Mhvs VII.9), agamāsi & gami (Pv II.86) 1. pl. agamiṃhase (Pv II.310), pl. agamuṃ (Sn 290), agamaṃsu & gamiṃsu; prohib. mā gami; ger. gamya (J V.31); grd. gamanīya (KhA 223). See also der. gama, gamana, gāmika, Pāli Text Society 558 Pāli-English Dictionary gāmin. - (b) gan°, in aor. agañchi (on this form see Trenckner, Notes, p. 71 sq. - In n'āgaðchi J III.190 it belongs to ā+gam); pres.-aor gañchisi (Sn 665); inf. gantuṃ; ger. gantvā; grd. gantabba. See also der. gantar. - (c) ga°, in pp. gata. See also ga, gati, gatta. - 3. gā°, in pret. agā (Pv II.322), 3rd pl. aor. agū (=Sk. °uḥ), in ajjhagū, anvagū (q. v.). Meanings and Use: 1. to go, to be in motion, to move, to go on (opp. to stand still, tiṭṭhati). Freq. in combn with tiṭṭhati nisīdati seyyaṃ kappeti "to go, to stand, sit down & lie down," to denote all positions and every kind of behaviour; Nd2 s. v. gacchati. - evaṃ kāle gacchante, as time went on J III.52, or evaṃ g° kāle (PvA 54, 75) or gacchante gacchante kāle DhA I.319; gacchati=paleti PvA 56; vemakoṭi gantvā pahari (whilst moving) DhA III.176. - 2. to go, to walk (opp. to run, dhāvati) DhA I.389. - 3. to go away, to go out, to go forth (opp. to stay, or to come, āgacchati): agamāsi he went Pv II.86; yo maṃ icchati anvetu yo vā n'icchati gacchatu "who wants me may come, who does not may go" Sn 564; āgacchantānað ca gacchantānað ca pamāṇaṃ n'atthi "there was no end of all who came & went" J II.133; gacchāma "let us go" J I.263; gaccha dāni go away now! J II.160; gaccha re muṇḍaka Vism 343; gacchāhi go then! J I.151, 222; mā gami do not go away! J IV.2; pl. mā gamittha J I.263; gacchanto on his way J I.255, 278; agamaṃsu they went away J IV.3; gantukāma anxious to go J I.222, 292; kattha gamissasi where are you going? (opp. agacchasi) DhA III.173; kahaṃ gacchissatha id. J II.128; kuhiṃ gamissati where is he going? Sn 411, 412. - 4. with acc. or substitute: to go to, to have access to, to arrive or get at (with the aim of the movement or the object of the intention); hence fig. to come to know, to experience, to realize. - (a) with acc. of direction: Rājagahaṃ gami he went to R. Pv II.86; Devadaha-nagaraṃ gantuṃ J I.52; gacchām' ahaṃ Kusināraṃ I shall go to K. D II.128; Suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ gacchanti they intended to go ("were going") to S. J III.188; migavaṃ g. to go hunting J I.149; janapadaṃ gamissāma J II.129; paradāraṃ g. to approach another man's wife Dh 246. - (b) with adverbs of direction or purpose (atthāya): santikaṃ (or santike) gacchati to go near a person (in gen.), pitu s. gacchāma DhA III.172; devāna santike gacche Dh 224 santikaṃ also J I.152: II.159, etc. Kathaṃ tattha gamissāmi how shall I get there? J I.159; II.159; tattha agamāsi he went there J II.160. dukkhānubhavanatthāya gacchamānā "going away for the purpose of undergoing suffering" J IV.3; vohāratthāya gacchāmi I am going out (=fut.) on business J II.133. - Similarly (fig.) in foll. expressions (op. "to go to Heaven," etc.=to live or experience a heavenly life, op. next); Nirayaṃ gamissati J VI.368; saggaṃ lokaṃ g. J I.152; gacche pāram apārato Sn 1129, in this sense interpreted at Nd2 223 as adhigacchati phusati sacchikaroti, to experience. - Sometimes with double acc.: Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi "I entrust myself to Bh." Vin I.16. - Cp. also phrases as atthangacchati to go home, to set, to disappear; antarā-gacchati to come between, to obstruct. - 5. to go as a stronger expression for to be, i. e. to behave, to have existence, to fare (cp. Ger. es geht gut, Fr. cela va bien=it is good). Here belongs gati "existence," as mode of existing, element, sphere of being, and out of this use is developed the periphrastic use of gam°, which places it on the same level with the verb "to be" (see b). - (a) sugatiṃ gamissasi you will go to the state of well-being, i. e. Heaven Vin II.195; It 77; opp. duggatiṃ gacchanti Dh 317-319; maggaṃ na jānanti yena gacchanti subbatā (which will fall to their share) Sn 441; gamissanti yattha gantvā na socare "they will go where one sorrows not" Sn 445; Vv 514; yan ca karoti . . . tað ca ādāya gacchati "whatever a man does that he will take with him" S I.93. - (b) periphrastic (w. ger. of governing verb): nagaraṃ pattharitvā gaccheyya "would spread through the town" J I.62; pariṇāmaṃ gaccheyya "could be digested" D II.127; sīhacammaṃ ādāya agamaṃsu "they took the lion's skin away with them" J II.110; itthiṃ pahāya gamissati shall leave the woman alone J VI.348; sve gahetvā gamissāmi "I shall come for it tomorrow" Miln 48. Gaja {Gaja} [Sk. gaja] an elephant J IV.494; Miln 2, 346; DhsA 295 (appld to a kind of thought). potaka the young of an elephant PvA 152; -rājā the king of the elephants Miln 346. Pāli Text Society 559 Pāli-English Dictionary Gajaka {Gajaka} =gaja, in gajakattharaṇa an elephant's cover VvA 104. Gajjati {Gajjati} [Sk. garjati, cp. gargara & jarā roaring, cp. uggajjati Dhtp 76: gajja sadde] to roar, to thunder, usually of clouds. Of the earth: Dāvs V.29; of a man (using harsh speech) J I.226; II.412 (mā gajji); Nd1 172 (=abhi°); J IV.25. - Caus. gajjayati, ger. gajjayitvā (megho g° thanayitvā (megho g° thanayitvā pavassati) It 66. Gajjitar {Gajjitar} [n. agent fr. prec.] one who thunders, of a man in comparison with a cloud A II.102=Pug 42. Gaṇa {Gana} [Vedic gaṇa; *ger to comprise, hold, or come together, cp. Gr. a)gQi/rw to collect, a)gora/ meeting, Lat. grex, flock, Sk. jarante "conveniunt" (see Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. I.193). Another form of this root is grem in Sk. grāma, Lat. gremium; see under gāma]-1. (a) in special sense: a meeting or a chapter of (two or three) bhikkhus, a company (opposed both to sangha, the order & puggala, the individual) Vin I.58, 74, 195, 197; II.170, 171; IV.130, 216, 226, 231, 283, 310, 316, 317; V.123, 167. - (b) in general: a crowd, a multitude, a great many. See cpds. - 2. as -°: a collection of, viz., of gods, men, animals or things; a multitude, mass; flock, herd; host, group, cluster. - (a) deva° J I.203; DhA III.441; PvA 140 (°parivuta); pisāca° S I.33; tidasa° Sn 679. - (b) amacca° suite of ministers J I.264; ariya° troup of worthies J VI.50; naranarī° crowds of men & women Miln 2; dāsi° a crowd of servants J II.127; tāpasa° a group of ascetics J I.140 (°parivuta); bhikkhu° J I.212 (°parivuta). - (c) dvija° J I.152; dija° Pv II.124; sakuṇa°, of birds J I.207; II.352; go°, of cows A I.229; V.347, 359; J II.128; kākola°, of ravens Sn 675; bhamarā°, of bees J I.52; miga° of beasts J I.150. - (d) taru° a cluster of trees PvA 154; tāra°, a host of stars A I.215; Pv II.967; with ref. to the books of the Canon: Suttantika° & Ābhidhammika° Vism 93. -ācariya "a teacher of a crowd," i. e. a t. who has (many) followers. Always in phrase sanghī ca gaṇī ca ganācariyo ca, and always with ref. either to Gotama: D I.116; M II.3; or to the 6 chief sectarian leaders, as Pūraṇa Kassapa, etc.: D I.47, 163; S I.68; IV.398; M I.198, 227, 233; II.2; Sn p. 91; cp. DA I.143. In general: Miln 4. -ārāma (adj.) & ārāmatā in phrase gaṇārāmo gaṇarato gaṇārāmataṃ anuyutto: a lover of the crowd A III.422 sq.; M III.110=Nd2 on Sn 54. -gaṇin the leader of many, Ep. of Bhagavā Nd2 307. (ṃ)gaṇupāhanā (pl.) shoes with many linings Vin I.185, 187; cp. Vin. Texts II.14. See also Bdhgh. on aṭaliyo (q. v. under aṭala). -pūraka (adj.) one who completes the quorum (of a bhikkhus chapter) Vin I.143 sq.; -bandhana in °ena dānaṃ datvā to give by co-operation, to give jointly DhA II.160; -bhojana food prepared as a joint meal Vin II.196; IV. 71; V.128, 135, 205; -magga in °ena gaṇetuṃ to count by way of batches Vin I.117; -vassika (adj.) through a great many years Sn 279; -sanganika (adj.) coming into contact with one another DhA I.162. Gaṇaka {Ganaka} [fr. gaṇ, to comprise in the sense of to count up] a counter, one skilled in counting familiar with arithmetic; an accountant, overseer or calculator. Enumd as an occupation together with muddika at D I.51 (expl. DA I.157 by acchidda-pāṭhaka); also with muddika and sankhāyika S IV.376; as an office at the king's court (together with amaccā as gaṇaka-mahāmatta=a ministerial treasurer) D III.64, and in same context D III.148, 153, 169, 171, 177; as overseer Vin III.43; as accountant Miln 79, 293; VvA 66. Gaṇakī {Ganaki} (f.)=gaṇikā Vin III.135-136, in purāṇa° a woman who was formerly a courtesan, & as adj. gaṇakī-dhītā the daughter of a courtesan. Pāli Text Society 560 Pāli-English Dictionary Gaṇanā {Ganana} (f.) counting, i. e. 1. counting up, arithmetic, number J I.29; Vism 278 sq.; Miln 79; VvA 194. - 2. counting, census, statistics; Tikap. 94; J I.35; Miln 4 (senā °ṃ kāretvā); DhA I.11, 34. - 3. the art of counting, arithmetics as a study & a profession, forbidden to the bhikkhus Vin I.77=IV.129 (°ṃ sikkhati to study ar.); D I.11 (expl. DA I.95 by acchiddakagaṇanā); M I.85; III.1 (°ājīva); DA I.157. -gaṇana-patha (time-) reckoning, period of time Miln 20, 116. Gaṇikā1 {Ganika} (f.) "one who belongs to the crowd," a harlot, a courtesan (cp. gaṇakī) Vin I.231 (Ambapālī) 268, (do.); II.277 (Aḍḍhakāsī); Ud 71; Miln 122; DhA III.104; VvA 75 (Sirimā); PvA 195, 199. - Customs of a gaṇikā J IV.249; V.134. - Cp. saṃ°. Gaṇikā2 {Ganika} (f.)=gaṇanā, arithmetic Miln 3. Gaṇin1 {Ganin} (adj.) one who has a host of followers, Ep. of a teacher who has a large attendance of disciples; usually in standing combn sanghī gaṇī gaṇācariyo (see above). Also in foll.: Sn 955, 957; Dpvs IV.8 (mahāgaṇī), 14 (therā gaṇī); gaṇī-bhūtā (pl.) in crowds, combd with sanghā sanghī D I.112, expld at DA I.280: pubbe nagarassa anto agaṇā bahi nikkhamitvā gaṇasainpannā ti. See also paccekagaṇin. Gaṇin2 {Ganin} a large species of deer J V.406 (=gokaṇṇa). Gaṇeti {Ganeti} [denom. to gaṇa Dhtp 574: sankhyāne] 1. to count, to reckon, to do sums Dh 19; J VI.334; Miln 79, 293; pp. gaṇita Sn 677; pass. gaṇīyati Sdhp 434; inf. (vedic) gaṇetuye Bw. IV.28; caus. gaṇāpeti M III.1. - 2. to regard, to take notice of, to consider, to care for J I.300; IV.267. Gaṇṭhi {Ganthi} (m.) [Vedic granthi, to grem to comprise, hold together, cp. Lat. gremium, Sk. gaṇa & grāma, see also gantha] 1. a knot, a tie, a knot or joint in a stalk (of a plant) J I.172; DA I.163; DhA I.321 (°jātaṃ what has be come knotty or hard); -diṭṭhi-gaṇṭhi the tangle of false doctrine VvA 297; anta-gaṇṭh-ābādha entanglement of intestines Vin I.275. - 2. a (wooden) block Vin II.110 (of sandal wood). -ṭṭhāna (for gaṇṭhikaṭṭhāna?) the place of the block (i. e. of execution) J III.538; (reads gaṇṭhi-gaṇṭi-ṭṭhāna); Vism 248. - bhedaka, in °cora "the thief who breaks the block" (or rope, knot?) DhA II.30. Gaṇṭhikā {Ganthika} (f.) (freq. spelled gaṇḍikā, q. v.)=gaṇṭhi, viz. 1. a knot, a tie DA I.199 (catupañca-gaṇṭhik'āhata patta a bowl with 4 or 5 knots, similarly āṇi-gaṇṭhik'- āhata ayopatta Vism 108; but see āṇi); DhA I.335 (°jāta=gaṇṭhijāta knotty part), 394. - 2. a block (or is it knot?) Vin II.136 (?+pāsaka; cp. Vin. Texts III.144); V.140. Esp. in phrase gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuðcitvā Vin I.46= II.213, 215, trsld at Vin. Texts III.286 "fasten the block on (to the robe)" but at I.155 "tie the knots." Also in dhamma-gaṇṭhikā a block for execution J I.150 (v. l. gaṇḍikā). - 3. N. of a plant PvA 127. - ucchugaṇṭhikā sugar cane: see ucchu. -kāsāva a yellow robe which was to be tied (or which had a block?) J IV.446. Gaṇḍa {Ganda} [a variation of gaṇṭha (-i), in both meanings of (1) swelling, knot, protuberance, and (2) the interstice between two knots or the whole of the knotty object, i. e. stem, stalk]-1. a swelling, esp. as a disease, an abscess, a boil. Freq. in similes with ref. to kāma and kāya. Mentioned with similar cutaneous diseases under kilāsa (q. v. for loci). As Ep. of kāya S IV.83=A IV.386, of kāmā A III.310, IV.289; Nd2 on Sn 51; also Th 2, 491 (=dukkhatā sūlaya ThA Pāli Text Society 561 Pāli-English Dictionary 288); S IV.64 (=ejā); Sn 51, 61 (v. l. for gaḷa); J I.293; Vism 360 (°pilakā); DhA III.297 (gaṇḍ-āgaṇḍajāta, covered with all kinds of boils); IV.175; PvA 55. Cp. Av. S II.1681. - 2. a stalk, a shaft, in N. of a plant -°tindu-rukkha J V.99, and in der. gaṇḍikā & gaṇḍī, cp. also Av. S II.13312. 3.=gaṇḍuppāda in cpd. gaṇḍamattikā clay mixed with earth-worms Vin II.151 (cp. Bdhgh. gaṇḍuppādagūtha-mattikā clay mixed with excrement of earthworms Vin. Texts III.172). uppāda (lit. producing upheavals, cp. a mole) an earth-worm, classed as a very low creature with kīṭā & puḷavā at M III.168; J V.210 (°pāṇa); DhA III.361 (°yoni); SnA 317. Gaṇḍaka {Gandaka} (adj.) having boils Sdhp 103. Gaṇḍamba {Gandamba} N. of the tree, under which Gotama Buddha performed the double miracle; with ref. to this freq. in phrase gaṇḍamba-rukkha-mūle yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā J I.77; IV.263 sq.; DA I.57; PvA 137; Miln 349; Dāvs V.54. Also at DhA III.207 in play of words with amba-rukkha. Gaṇḍikā {Gandika} (f.) [a-n. formation from gaṇḍa or gaṇṭha, see also gaṇṭhikā]-1. a stalk, a shaft (cp. gaṇḍī) J I.474; DhsA 319 (of the branches of trees: g°-ākoṭana-sadda). - 2. a lump, a block of wood (more freq. spelling gaṇṭhikā, q. v.). - 3. N. of a plant Vv 354 (=bandhujīvaka VvA 161). -ādhāna the putting on of a shaft or stem, as a bolt or bar Vin II.172; cp. Vin. Texts III.213 and gaṇḍī; also ghaṭikā2. Gaṇḍin {Gandin} [adj. fr. gaṇḍa]-1. having swellings, in ure gaṇḍī (f.) with swellings on the chest, i. e. breasts J V.159, 202 (thane sandhāyāha 205). - 2. having boils, being afflicted with a glandular disease (with kuṭṭhin & kilāsin) Kvu 31. Gaṇḍī {Gandi} (f.) [=gaṇḍikā in meaning 1; prob.=Sk. ghaṇṭā in meaning 2]-1. a shaft or stalk, used as a bar J I.237. -2. a gong DhA I.291 (gaṇḍiṃ paharati to beat the g.); II.54, 244; gaṇḍiṃ ākoṭetvā KhA 251. Cp. AvS I.258, 264, 272; II.87, 95 & Divy 335, 336. Also in gaṇḍisaððā "sign with the gong" J IV.306. - 3. the executioner's block (=gaṇḍikā or gaṇṭhikā) J III.41. Gaṇḍusa {Gandusa} [cp. Sk. gaṇḍūṣa] a mouthful J I.249 (khīra°). Gaṇhati & Gaṇhāti {Ganhati} [Vedic grah (grabh), gṛhṇāti pp. gṛhīta to grasp. *gher to hold, hold in, contain; cp. Gr. xo/rtos enclosure, Lat. hortus, co-hors (homestead); Goth. gards (house); Ohg. gart; E. yard & garden. To this belong Vedic gṛha (house) in P. gaha°, gihin, geha, ghara, & also Vedic harati to seize, hasta hand]. The forms of the verb are from three bases, viz. (1) gaṇha- (Sk. gṛhṇā-); Pres.: ind. gaṇhāti (gaṇhāsi PvA 87), pot. gaṇheyya, imper. gaṇha (J I.159; PvA 49= handa) & gaṇhāhi (J I.279). Fut. gaṇhissati; Aor. gaṇhi. Inf. gaṇhituṃ (J III.281). Ger. gaṇhitvā. Caus. ganhāpeti & gāhāpeti. - 2. gahe- (Sk. gṛhī-): Fut. gahessati. Aor. aggahesi (Sn 847; J I.52). Inf. gahetuṃ (J I.190, 222). Ger. gahetvā & gahetvāna (poet.) (Sn 309; Pv II.3). - 3. gah- (Sk. gṛh-): Aor. aggahi. Ger. gayha & gahāya (Sn 791). Pass. gayhati. Pp. gahita & gahīta. Cp. gaha, gahaṇa, gāha. Meanings: to take, take up; take hold of; grasp, seize; assume; e. g. ovādaṃ g. to take advice J I.159; khaggaṃ to seize the sword J I.254-255; gocaraṃ to take food J III.275; jane to seize people J I.253; dhanaṃ to grasp the treasure J I.255; nagaraṃ to occupy the city J I.202; pāde gāḷhaṃ gahetvā holding her feet tight J I.255; macche to catch fish J III.52; mantaṃ to use a charm J III.280; rajjaṃ to seize the kingdom J I.263; II.102; sākhaṃ to take hold of a branch Sn 791; J I.52. Very often as a phrase to be translated by a single word, as: nāmato g. to enumerate PvA 18; paṭisandhiṃ g. to be born J I.149; Pāli Text Society 562 Pāli-English Dictionary maraṇaṃ g. to die J I.151; mūlena g. to buy J III.126; vacanaṃ g. to obey J III.276 (in neg.). The ger. gahetvā is very often simply to be translated as "with," e. g. tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto J II.317; satta bhikkhū gahetvā agamāsi VvA 149. Caus. gaṇhāpeti to cause to be seized, to procure, to have taken: phalāni J II.105; rājānaṃ J I.264. Cp. gāhāpeti. Gata {Gata} [pp. of gacchati in medio-reflexive function] gone, in all meanings of gacchati (q. v.) viz. 1. literal: gone away, arrived at, directed to (c. acc.), opp. ṭhita: gate ṭhite nisinne (loc. abs.) when going, standing, sitting down (cp. gacchati 1) D I.70; opp. āgata: yassa maggaṃ na jānāsi āgatassa gatassa vā Sn 582 (cp. gati 2). Also periphrastic (=gacchati 5 b): aṭṭhi paritvā gataṃ "the bone fell down" J III.26. Very often gata stands in the sense of a finite verb (=aor. gacchi or agamāsi): yo ca Buddhaṃ . . . saraṇaṃ gato (cp. gacchati 4) Dh 190; attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gato he went to his domicile J I.280; II.160; nāvā Aggimālaṃ gatā the ship went to Aggimālā J IV.139. - 2. in applied meaning: gone in a certain way, i. e. affected, behaved, fared, fated, being in or having come into a state or condition. So in sugata & duggata (see below) and as 2nd part of cpds. in gen., viz. gone; atthaṃ° gone home, set; addha° done with the journey (cp. gat-addhin); gone into: taṇhā° fallen a victim to thirst, tama° obscured, raho°, secluded, vyasana° fallen into misery; having reached: anta° arrived at the goal (in this sense often combd with patta: antagata antapatta Nd2, 436, 612), koṭi° perfected, parinibbāna° having ceased to exist. vijjā° having attained (right) knowledge; connected with, referring to, concerning: kāya° relating to the body (kāyagatā sati, e. g. Vism 111, 197, 240 sq.); diṭṭhi° being of a (wrong) view; sankhāra°, etc. - Sometimes gata is replaced by kata and vice versa: anabhāvaṃkata>anabhāvaṃ gacchati; kālagata>kālakata (q. v.). agata not gone to, not frequented: °ṃ disaṃ (of Nibbāna) Dh 323; purisantaraṃ °ṃ mātugāmaṃ "a maid who has not been with a man" J I.290. sugata of happy, blessed existence, fortunate; one who has attained the realm of bliss (=sugatiṃ gata, see gati), blessed. As np. a common Ep. of the Buddha: Vin I.35; III.1; D I.49; S I.192; A II.147 et passim (see Sugata). - D I.83; Sn 227 (see expl. KhA 183). duggata of miserable existence, poor, unhappy, illfated, gone to the realm of miscry (duggatiṃ gata PvA 33, see gati) Pv I.62; II.317; duggata-bhāva (poverty) J VI.366; duggat-itthi (miserable, poor) J I.290; parama-duggatāni kulāni clans in utmost misery (poverty) PvA 176.-Compar. duggatatara DhA I.427; II.135. -atta (fr. attā) self-perfected, perfect D I.57 (expl. by koṭippatta-citto DA I.168); cp. paramāya satiyā ca gatiyā ca dhitiyā ca samannāgata M I.82; -addhin (adj. of addhan) one who has completed his journey (cp. addhagata) Dh 90; -kāle (in gata-gata-kāle) whenever he went J III.188; -ṭṭhāna place of existence PvA 38; =gamana in āgata-ṭṭhānaṃ vā: coming and going (lit. state of going) J III.188; -yobbana (adj.) past youth, of old age A I.138; Sn 98=124. Gataka {Gataka} a messenger J I.86. Gatatta {Gatatta} 1.=Sk. gat-ātman (see prec.). - 2.=Sk. gatatvaṃ the fact of having gone KhA 183. Gati {Gati} (f.) [fr. gacchati; cp. Gr. ba/sis, Lat. (in-) ventio, Goth. (ga-)qumps] 1. going, going away, (opp. āgati coming) (both gati & āgati usually in pregnant sense of No. 2. See āgati); direction, course, career. Freq. of the two careers of a Mahāpurisa (viz. either a Cakkavatti or a Buddha) D II.16=Sn p. 106; Sn 1001, or of a gihī arahattaṃ patto Miln 264, with ref. to the distinction of the child Gotama J I.56. - phassāyatanānaṃ gati (course or direction) A II.161; jagato gati (id.) A II.15, 17; sakuntānaṃ g. the course, flight of birds Dh 92=Th 1, 92. - Opp. āgati Pv II.922. -tassā gatiṃ jānāti "he knows her going away, i. e. where she has gone" PvA 6. - 2. going away, passing on (=cuti, opp. upapatti coming into another existence); course, esp Pāli Text Society 563 Pāli-English Dictionary after death, destiny, as regards another (future) existence A I.112; D II.91; M I.388 (tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo? what is his rebirth and what his destiny?); in combn āgati vā gati vā (=cutûpapatti), rebirth & death M I.328, 334. In defn of saṃsāra expld as gati bhavābhava cuti upapatti=one existence after the other Nd2 664; as gati upapatti paṭisandhi Nd2 on dhātu (also as puna-gati rebirth). - The Arahant as being beyond Saṃsāra is also beyond gati: yassa gatiṃ na jānanti devā gandhabba-mānusā Dh 420=Sn 644; yesaṃ gati n'atthi Sn 499; and Nibbāna coincides with release from the gatis: gativippamokkhaṃ parinibbānaṃ SnA 368. - attā hi attano gati "everybody is (the maker of) his own future life" Dh 380; esā maccharino gati "this is the fate of the selfish" Pv III.114; sabbagatī te ijjhantu "all fate be a success to you" J V.393; gato so tassa yā gati "he has gone where he had to go (after death)" Pv I.122. - 3. behaviour, state or condition of life, sphere of existence, element, especially characterized as sugati & duggati, a happy or an unhappy existence. gati migānaṃ pavanaṃ, ākāso pakkhīnaṃ gati, vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gati: the wood is the sphere of the beasts, the air of the birds, decay is the state of (all) things, Nibbāna the sphere of the Arahant Vin V.149=SnA 346; apuððalābho ca gatī ca pāpikā Dh 310; duggati J I.28; avijjāy'eva gati the quality of ignorance Sn 729; paramāya gatiyā samannāgato of perfect behaviour M I.82; see also defn at Vism 237. - 4. one of the five realms of existence of sentient beings (=loka), divided into the two categories of sugati (=Sagga, realm of bliss) & duggati (=Yamaloka, apāya, realm of misery). These gatis are given in the foll. order: (1) niraya purgatory, (2) tiracchānayoni the brute oreation, (3) pittivisaya the ghost world, (4) manussā (m-loka) human beings, (5) devā gods: M I.73; D III.234; A IV.459; Nd2 550; cp. S V.474-77; Vism 552. They are described in detail in the Paðcagatidīpana (ed. L. Feer, J.P.T.S. 1884, 152 sq.; trsl. by the same in Annales du Musée Guimet V. 514-528) under Naraka-kaṇḍa, Tiracchāna°, Peta°, Manussa°, Deva°. Of these Nos. 1-3 are considered duggatis, whilst Nos. 4 and 5 are sugati. In later sources we find 6 divisions, viz. 1-3 as above, (4) asurā, (5) manussā, (6) devā, of which 14 are comprised under apāyā (conditions of suffering, q. v.) or duggatiyo (see Pv IV.11, cp. PvA 103). These six also at D III.264. - lokassa gatiṃ pajānāti Bhagavā Sn 377 (gati=nirayādipaðcappabhedaṃ SnA 368). The first two gatis are said to be the fate of the micchādiṭṭhino D I.228, dve niṭṭhā DA I.249 (q. v. for var. appl. of gati) as well as the dussīlā (A I.60), whilst the last two are the share of the sīlavanto (A. I.60). -gata gone its course (of a legal enquiry, vinicchaya) Vin II.85 (cp. Vin Texts III.26); J II.1. agati 1. no course, no access, in agati tava tattha: there you have no access S I.115. - 2.=duggati, a wrong course. agatigamana a wrong course of life D III.133; A I.72; II.18 sq.; III.274 sq.; J V.510; PvA 161. Technically the four agati-gamanāni are: chanda° dosa° moha° bhaya° D III.228 (see also under chanda). sugati (sometimes suggati after duggati e. g. J VI.224) a happy existence; a realm of bliss; the devaloka. Cp. sugatin. Usually with gacchati (sugatiṃ) & gata "gone to Heaven" Vin II.195; D II.202; It 77; PvA 65. In combn w. sagga loka (sugatiṃ, etc. uppajjati) D I.143; A I.97; J I.152. parammaraṇā sugati pāṭikankhā It 24; suggatiṃ gata Dh 18; sugati pāpehi kammehi sulabhā na hoti "bliss is not gained by evil" PvA 87; =sugga & dibbaṭṭhāna PvA 89; sugati-parāyana sure of rebirth in a realm of bliss, ib. duggati a miserable existence; a realm of misery (see above gati 4). Usually with gacchati (duggatiṃ gata, reborn in a miserable state) or uppajjati D I.82; A I.97, 138 (+vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ); II.123; III.3; IV.364; Dh 17; Sn 141; SnA 192 (=dukkhappatti); PvA 87. Sakakammāni nayanti duggatiṃ, one's own deeds lead to rebirth in misery, Dh 240; with ref. to a Peta existence: Pv I.62; II.16; 113; 317. Cp. duggata. Gatika {Gatika} (adj.) 1. going to, staying with, in bhikkhu° a person living with the bhikkhus Vin I.148. - 2. leading to: yaṃ° what they lead to (of the 5 indriyas) S V.230. - 3. having a certain gati, leading to one of the four kinds of rebirth: evaṃ° D I.16 (w. ref. to one of the first 3 gatis: Pāli Text Society 564 Pāli-English Dictionary DA I.108); niyata° whose destiny is certain (w. ref. to sugati) and aniyata° whose destiny is uncertain (w. ref. to a duggati) DhA III.173. Gatin {Gatin} (adj.=gatika) 1. going, i. e. having a certain course: sabbā nadī vankagatī "every river flows crooked" J I.289. - 2. having a certain gati, fated, destined, esp. in su° & dug°: samparāye suggatī going to a happy existence after death Vin II.162=J I.219; saggaṃ sugatino yanti "those who have a happy fate (because of leading a good life) go to one of the Heavens" Dh 126. Gatimant {Gatimant} (adj.) of (perfect) behaviour, going right, clever (cp. gatatta under gata, & gati 3) M I.82. Gatta {Gatta} (nt.) [Vedic gātra] the body, pl. gattāni the limbs. - As body: Vin I.47; S I.169=183 (analla° with pure bodies; anallīna° at 169, but v. l. analla°); A I.138; Sn 673 (samacchida° with bodies cut up); Pv I.112 (bhinna-pabhinna°, id.); PvA 56 (=sarīra); 68. - As limbs: S IV.198 (arupakkāni festering with sores); M I.506 (id.); M I.80=246; J I.61 (lālākilinna°); Sn 1001 (honti gattesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇā), 1017, 1019; Pv III.91 (=sarīrāvayavā PvA 211); Miln 357 (arupakkāni). Gathita (adj.) [pp. of ganthati to tie, cp. gantha, knotQ Sk. grathita] tied, bound, fettered; enslaved, bound to, greedy for, intoxicated with (c. loc.). When abs. always in combn w. paribhuðjati and w. ref. to some object of desire (bhoga, lābha, kāmaguṇe). Usually in standing phrase gathita mucchita ajjhāpanna (ajjhopanna) "full of greed & blind desire." In this connection it is frequently (by B MSS.) spelt gadhita and the editors of S, A, & Miln have put that in the text throughout. With mucchita & ajjhāpanna: D I.245; III.43; M I.162, 173; S II.270; IV.332; A V.178, 181 Nd2 on nissita C. -c. loc.: J IV.371 (gharesu); DA I.59 (kāmaguṇesu). In other connections: ādānaganthaṃ gathitaṃ visajja Sn 794 (cp. Nd1 98); yāni loke gathitāni na tesu pasuto siyā Sn 940. - J IV.5 (=giddha); V.274 (gedhita for pagiddha); PvA 262 (gadhita as expln of giddha)-agathita (agadhita) not fettered (by desire) without desire, free from the ties of craving (+m°, a°) S II.194, 269; A V.181; Miln 401 (trsl. Rh.D. II.339: "without craving, without faintness, without sinking"). {Gathita} Gada {Gada} speech, sentence Dh I.66, DA I.66 f.; and on D III.135 (§ 28); gada at S II.230 (v. l.) in phrase diṭṭhagadena sallena is to be read diddhagadena s. Gaddula & Gaddūla {Gaddula} a leather strap S III.150; J II.246; III.204; fig, in taṇhā-gaddūla "the leash of thirst," Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā)=Dhs 1059=Vbh 361, cp. DhsA 367. Gaddūhana {Gadduhana} (nt.) [Derivation unknown; Sk. dadrūghna] a small measure of space & time M III.127; S II.264 (°mattam pi, SA "pulling just once the cow's teat"); A IV.395; Miln 110. See Trenckner P.M. 59, 60; Rh. D. J.R.A.S. 1903, 375. Gaddha [Vedic gṛdha; see gijjha] a vulture; in gaddhabādhipubbo, of the bhikkhu Ariṭṭha, who had been a vulture trainer in a former life Vin II.25=IV.218= M I.130; see also Vin. Texts II.377. {Gaddha} 565 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Gadrabha {Gadrabha} [Vedic gardabha., Lat. burdo, a mule; see Walde Lat. Wtb., s. v.] an ass, donkey Vin V.129; M I.334; A I.229; J II.109, 110; V.453; DA I.163. - f. gadrabhī J II.340. -bhāraka a donkey load J II.109; DhA I.123; -bhāva the fact of being an ass J II.110; -rava (& -rāva) the braying of an ass ibid. & Vism 415. Gadhita {Gadhita} see gathita. Gantar {Gantar} [n. agent of gacchati in the sense of a periphrastic future] "goer" in gantā hoti he will go, he is in the habit of going, combd w. sotā hantā khantā, of the king's elephant A II.116=III.161; v. l. for gatā at M II.155. Gantha {Gantha} (in BB often misspelt gandha) [fr. ganthati]-1. a bond, fetter, trammel; always fig. and usually referring to and enumd as the four bodily ties, or knots (kāya°, see under kāya): S V.59=Dhs 1135; D III.230; Nd1 98; DhA III.276; 4 kāyaganthā, viz., abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbataparāmasa, idaṃsaccābhinivesa; thus Nd1 98; Vism 683. In other conn. Sn 347, 798, 847, 857, 912; Nd2 on jappā (taṇhā); Dh 211; Ps I.129; Dhs 1059, 1472; Vbh 18, 24, 55, 65, 77, 117, 120; Nett 31, 54, 114, 124 (gandha); Sdhp 616. - chinna° (adj.) one who has cut the ties (of bad desires, binding him to the body). Combn w. anigha nirāsa S I.12 (°gandha), 23; w. asita anāsava Sn 219. Cp. pahīnamānassa na santi ganthā S I.14. See also ādāna°; cp. ganthaniya. - 2. [only in late Pali, and in Sk.] composition, text, book (not with ref. to books as tied together, but to books as composed, put together. See gantheti 2). -dhura the burden of the books, i. e. of studying the Scriptures, expld as one who knows by heart one, two, or all Nikāyas. Always combd w. vipassanādhuraṃ, the burden of contemplation DhA I.8; IV.37; -pamocana the state of being released from, freed from the fetters of the "body" always w. ref.to Nibbāna S I.210; A II.24; It 104, cp. 122; -pahīna (adj.) connected with or referring to the ganthas Dhs 1480; opp. vi° Dhs 1482. Ganthati & Gantheti [Vedic grath, granth, grathnāti, to *grem, cp. Lat. gremium; see also gaṇṭhi gathita, gantha] 1. to tie, knot, bind, fasten together: kathaṃ mittāni ganthati "how does he bind friends" S I.214= Sn 185; mālaṃ ganthamāna tying a garland Vv 381 (ganthento VvA 173). Of medicines: to mix, to prepare J IV.361. - pp. ganthita tied, bound, fettered: catūhi ganthehi g° Ps I.129; - grd. ganthaniya to be tied or tending to act as a tie (of "body"); expl. as ārammaṇa-karaṇa-vasena ganthehi ganthitabba DhsA 69; dhammā g° ā ("states that tend to be are liable to be ties" Buddh. Ps. p. 305; Expositor 64) Dhs 1141; 1478. In combn saððojaniya g° oghaniya (of rūpa) Dhs 584=Vbh 12; of rūpa-kkhandha Vbh 65, of dasāyatanā ib. 77, dasindriyā ib. I.29, saccā g° and ag° (=gantha-sampayutta & vippayuttā) ib. 117. - 2. to put together, to compose: mante ganthetvā (v. l. gandhitvā) Sn 302, 306. {Ganthati} {Gantheti} Ganthika {Ganthika} (adj.) [fr. gantha 2] hard-studying DhA I.156 (bhikkhu; cp. gantha-dhura). Gandha {Gandha} [Vedic gandha, from ghrā ghrāti to smell, ghrāna smell, & see P. ghāna. Possibly conn. w. Lat. fragro= E. fragrant] smell, viz.-1. odour, smell, scent in gen. J III.189; Dh 5456=Miln 333; Dhs 605 under ghānāyatanāni); āma° smell of raw flesh A I.280; D II.242; Sn 241 sq; maccha° the scent of fish J III.52; muttakarīsa° the smell of fæces and urine A III.158; catujāti° four kinds of scent J I.265; PvA 127; dibba-g°puppha a flower of heavenly odour J I.289. - 2. odour, smell in particular: enumerated as mūla°, sāra°, puppha°, etc., S III.156=V.44=A V.22; Dhs 625 (under ghandāyatanāni, sphere of odours). Specified as māla°, Pāli Text Society 566 Pāli-English Dictionary sāra°, puppha° under tīṇi gandhajātāni A I.225; - puppha° Dh 54=A I.226. - 3. smell as olfactory sensation, belonging to the sphere (āyatanāni) of sense-impressions and sensory objects & enum. in set of the 12 ajjhatta-bāhirāni āyatanāni (see under rūpa) with ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā "sensing smell by means of the olfactory organ" D III.102; 244=250= 269=Nd2 on rūpa; M III.55, 267; S IV.71; Vin I.35; Defined at Vism 447. Also as gandhā ghānaviððeyya under kāmaguṇā M II.42; D III.234, etc. In series of 10 attributes of physical quality (-rūpa, etc.) as characteristic of devas D III.146; Pv II.958; as sāra°, pheggu°, taca°, etc. (nine qualities in all) in definition of Gandhabba-kāyikā devā S III.250 sq. - In the same sense & similar connections: vaṇṇa-g°-ras'ûpeto Dh 49; J II.106; gandhānaṃ khamo & akkhamo (of king's elephant) A III.158 sq.; itthi°, purisa° A I.1, 2; III.68; in combn w. other four senses Sn 387, 759, 974. - 4. perfume, prepared odorific substance used as a toilet requisite, either in form of an unguent or a powder. Abstinence from the use of kallæsthetics is stated in the Sīlas (D I.8) as characteristic of certain Wanderers and Brahmins. Here gandha is mentioned together with mālā (flowers, garlands): D I.5=Kh II; D I.7 (°kathā); Vin II.123; Sn 401; J I.50, 291; PvA 62. The use of scented ointment (-vilepana & ālepa, see cpds.) is allowed to the Buddhist bhikkhus (Vin I.206); and the giving of this, together with other commodities, is included in the second part of the deyyadhamma (the list of meritorious gifts to the Sangha), under Nos. 5-14 (annapāna-vattha-yānamālā-gandhā-vilepana - seyy - āvasatha - padīpeyya): S III.252; Nd2 523=It 65. Out of this enumeration: g°-m°-v°-Pv II.316; chatta-g°-m°-upāhanā Pv II.49; II.936; m°-g°-v° kappūra-kaṭukapphalāni J II.416. - The application of scented ointment (gandhena or gandhehi vilimpati) is customary after a bath, e. g. PvA 50 (on Pv I.106); J I.254, 265; III.277. Var. kinds of perfumes or scented substances are given as g°dhūpa-cuṇṇa-kappūra (incense, powder, camphor) J I.290; vāsa-cuṇṇa-dhūpanādi g° KhA 37. See also cpds. - 5. occurs as v. l. for gantha (book). duggandha a disagreeable smell Dhs 625; °ṃ vāyati to emit a nasty odour PvA 14; as adj. having a bad smell, putrid Sn 205; PvA 15 (=pūtigandha), f. -ā: duggandhā pūti vāyasi "you emit a bad odour") Pv I.61 (=aniṭṭha°). -sugandha an agreeable smell Dhs 625; as adj. of pleasant smell J III.277; Sdhp. 246. -āpaṇa a perfumery shop J I.290; °ika perfume seller Miln 344; -āyatana an olfactory sense-relation, belonging to the six bāhirāni āyatanāni, the objective sensations D III.243, 290; Dhs 585, 625, 655; -ārammaṇa bearing on smell, having smell as its object Dhs 147, 157, 365, 410, 556, 608; -ālepa (nt.) anointing with perfumes Vin I.206; -āsā "hunger for odours," craving for olfactory sensations Dhs 1059; -odaka scented water J I.50; II.106; III.189; -karaṇḍaka a perfume-box S III.131; V.351; Pug 34; -kuṭī (f.) a perfumed cabin, name of a room or hut occupied by the Buddha, esp. that made for him by Anāthapiṇḍika in Jetavana (J I.92). Gotamassa g° J II.416, cp. Av. Ś II.401; DhA IV.203, 206; cuṇṇa scented (bath-) powder J III.277; -jāta (nt.) odour, perfume ("consisting of smell"). Three kinds at A I.225 (māla°, sāra°, puppha°); enum. as candanādi DhA I.423; in defin. of gandha DA I.77; - Dh 55; -taṇhā thirst or craving for odours (cp. g°-āsā) Dhs 1059=Nd2 on jappā; -tela scented oil (for a lamp) J I.61; II.104; DhA I.205; -tthena a perfume-thief S I.204; dhātu the (sensory) element of smell Dhs 585; 625. 707 (in conn. w. °āyatana); -pañcangulika see sep.; -saðcetanā the olfactory sensation; together with °saððā perception of odours D III.244; A IV.147; V.359; -sannidhi the storing up of scented unguents D I.6 (=DA I.82). Gandhana {Gandhana} see gandhina. Gandhabba {Gandhabba} [Vedic gandharva] 1. a musician, a singer J II.249 sq.; III.188; VvA 36, 137. 2. a Gandharva or heavenly musician, as a class (see °kāyika) belonging to the demigods who inhabit the Cātummahārājika realm D II.212; A II.39 (as birds); IV.200 (with asurā & nāgā), 204, 207; cp. S III.250 sq.; also said to preside over child-conception: M I.265 sq.; Miln 123 sq. kāyika belonging to the company of the G. S III.250 sq.; PvA 119; -mānusā (pl.) G. & men Dh Pāli Text Society 567 Pāli-English Dictionary 420= Sn 644; -hatthaka "a G.-hand," i. e. a wooden instrument in the shape of a bird's claw with which the body was rubbed in bathing Vin II.106, see Vin. Texts III.67. Gandhabbā {Gandhabba} (f.) music, song J II.254; VvA 139; Miln 3; °ṃ karoti to make music J II.249; III.188. Gandhāra {Gandhara} (adj.) belonging to the Gandhāra country (Kandahar) f. gandhārī in gandhārī vijjā N. of a magical charm D I.213; at J IV.498 it renders one invisible. Gandhika {Gandhika} (and °uja Pv II.120; II.121)-1. having perfume, fragrant, scentful, J I.266 (su°); Pv II.1Q0 (=surabhigandha); II.121 (sogandhiya); VvA 58 (read gandhikāgandhikehi).-2. dealing in perfume, a perfumer Miln 262 (cp. gandhin 2). Gandhin {Gandhin} (adj.) 1. having a scent of, smelling of (-°), i. e. candana° of sandal wood J III.190; gūtha of° fæces Pv II.315 (=karīsavāyinī PvA). - 2. dealing with scents, a perfumer PvA 127 (=māgadha; cp. gandhika 2). Gandhina {Gandhina} in kule antimagandhina J IV.34 (expl. by sabbapacchimaka) and gandhana in kula-gandhana It 64 see under kula°. Gabbita {Gabbita} (adj.) proud, arrogant J II.340 (°bhāva=issariya); III.264 (°sabhāva=dittasabhāva); Sum. V. on D III.153 (=avamata). Gabbha {Gabbha} [Vedic garbha, either to *gelbh, as in Lat. galba, Goth. kalbo, Ohg. kalba, E. calf, or *gÛe bh, as in Gr. delfu/s womb, adelfo/s sharing the womb, brother, de/lfac young pig; cp. *gelt in Goth. kilpei womb. Ags. cild, Ger. kind, E. child. Meaning: a cavity, a hollow, or, seen from its outside, a swelling] 1. interior, cavity (loc. gabbhe in the midst of: angāra° J III.55); an inner room, private chamber, bedroom, cQll. Of a Vihāra: Vin II.303; III.119; IV.45; VvA 188; 220; - J I.90 (siri° royal chamber); III.276; Vv 785 (=ovaraka VvA 304); DhA I.397; Miln 10, 295. See also anto°. - 2. the swelling of the (pregnant) womb, the womb (cp. kucchi). °ṃ upeti to be born Dh 325=Th 1, 17= Nett 34, 129; °ṃ upapajjati to be born again Dh 126; gabbhā gabbhaṃ . . . dukkaṃ nigacchanti from womb to womb (i. e. from birth to birth) Sn 278; gabbhato paṭṭh āya from the time of birth J I.290, 293. As a symbol of defilement g. is an ep. of kāma A IV.289, etc. - 3. the contents of the womb, i. e. the embryo, fœtus: dasa māse °ṃ kucchinā pariharitvā having nourished the fœtus in the womb for 10 months D II 14; dibbā gabbhā D I.229; on g. as contained in kucchi, fœtus in utero, see J I.50 (kucchimhi patiṭṭhito) 134; II.2; IV.482; M I.265; Miln 123 (gabbhassa avakkanti); DhA I.3, 47; II.261. - Pv I.67; PvA 31; gabbho vuṭṭhāsi the child was delivered Vin II.278; itthi-gabbho & purisa° female & male child J I.51; gabbhaṃ pāteti to destroy the fœtus Vin II.268; apagatagabbhā (adj.) having had a miscarriage Vin II.129; mūḷhagabbhā id. M II.102 (+visatā°); paripuṇṇa-gabbhā ready to be delivered J I.52; PvA 86; saðði° a conscious fœtus D I.54=M I.518=S III.212; sannisinna-gabbhā having conceived Vin II.278. avakkanti (gabbhe okkanti Nd2 3041) conception D III.103, 231; Vism 499, 500 (°okkanti); this is followed by gabbhe ṭhiti & gabbhe vuṭṭhāna, see Nd2; -āsaya the impurities of childbirth Pv III.53 (=°mala); -karaṇa effecting a conception Sn 927; -gata leaving the womb, in putte gabbhagate when the child was born PvA 112; -dvāra the door of the bed-chamber J I.62; pariharaṇa=next Vism 500; -parihāra "the protection of the embryo," a ceremony performed when a woman became pregnant J II.2; DhA I.4; -pātana the destruction of the embryo, abortion, an abortive preparation Vin III.83 sq.; Pv I.66 (akariṃ); PvA 31 (dāpesi); DhA I.47 Pāli Text Society 568 Pāli-English Dictionary (°bhesajja); -mala the uncleanness of delivery, i. e. all accompanying dirty matter PvA 80, 173 (as food for Petas), 198; DhA IV.215; -vīsa in ahaðc'amhi gabbhavīso "I am 20 years, counting from my conception" Vin I.93; -vuṭṭhāna (nt.) childbirth, delivery J I.52; DhA I.399; II.261; seyyā (f.) the womb; only in expressions relating to reincarnation, as: na punar eti (or upeti) gabbhaseyyaṃ "he does not go into another womb," of an Arahant Sn 29, 152, 535; Vv 5324; and gabbhaseyyaka (adj.) one who enters another womb Vbh 413 sq.; Vism 272, 559, 560; Bdhd 77, 78. Gabbhara {Gabbhara} (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. gahvara] a cavern Sn 416 (giri°); Vv 635 (giri°). Gabbhinī {Gabbhini} (adj. f.) pregnant, enceinte Vin II.268; S III.202; J I.151, 290; IV.37; Pv I.66; PvA 31, 82: VvA 110 (-bhāva); in combn g° pāyamānā purisantaragatā (pregnant, lactating & having had sex. intercourse) A I.295=II.206=M I.77, 238, 307, 342=Pug 55; with utunī anutunī (menstruating & having ceased to menstruate) A III.226 sq. °Gama {°Gama} 1. adj. going, able to go; going to, leading to; in vihangama going in the air Sn 221, 606; Th I.1108: J I.216 (cp. gamana); aghasi° id. Vv 161 (=vehāsaṃ° VvA 78); nabhasi° going on clouds Sn 687; nibbāna° leading to N. S V.11; dūraṃ° going far, hadayaṃ° going to one's heart, q. v. - 2. m. course, going to; in atthaṃ° going home, going to rest, etc., q. v. Gamana {Gamana} 1. (nt.) the fact or the state of going, movement, journey, walk; (-°) striving for, the leading of, pursuit A II.48 sq. (gamanena na pattabbo lokass'anto=one cannot walk to the end of the world); Dh 178 (saggassa going to heaven); Sn 40, 691, cp. vāraṃ°; J I.62; 216 (in expl. of vihaṃgama: (ākāse) gamanato pakkhī vihaṃ gamā ti vuccanti); 295; PvA 57. - pahiṇa° going on messages D I.5, etc.; agati° wrong pursuit, °ṃ gacchati to pursue a wrong walk of life A II.18; PvA 161; magga° tramping, being on the road PvA 43; saraṇa° finding shelter (in the Dhamma) PvA 49.-2. (adj.) (-°) going or leading to, conducive to: nibbāna° maggo the Path leading to Nibbāna S I.186; Dh 289; duggati° magga the road to misery Th 2, 355; duggamanaṭṭhānā (pl.) inaccessible places PvA 102 (in expl. of duggā). -antarāya an obstacle to one's departure J I.62; -āgamana going & coming, rise and set Vv 836 (=ogamanuggamana VvA 326); DhA I.80 (°kāle); °sampanna senāsana a dwelling or lodging fit for going and coming, i. e. easily accessible A V.15; J I.85; °ṃ karoti to go to and fro VvA 139. -kamma going away DhA II.81. -kāraṇa a reason for or a means to going, in °ṃ karoti to try to go J I.2; -bhāva the state of having gone away J II.133; -magga (pleonastic) the way J I.202; 279; -vaṇṇa the praise of his course or journey J I.87. Gamanīya {Gamaniya} (adj.; grd to gam) 1. as grd. to gacchati: (a place where one) ought to go; in a° not to be gone to (+ṭhāna) VvA 72. - 2. as grd. to gameti: in bhogā pahāya gamanīyā (riches that have) to be given up (by leaving) Kh VIII.8 (see expl. as KhA 223); PvA 87 (=kālikā, transient). Gamika {Gamika} (and gamiya J I.87) (adj.) going away, setting out for a journey (opp. āgantuka coming back) appl. to bhikkhus only: Vin I.292 (° bhatta food for outgoing bh.); II.170 (āgantuka°), 211, 265; V.196; J VI.333 (āgantuka°). See also under abhisankhāra. Cp. Av Ś I.87; Divy 50. Pāli Text Society Gamina 569 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) being on a "gati," only at Sn 587 in "aññe pi passe gamine yathākamm'ûpage nare." {Gamina} Gameti {Gameti} [caus. of gacchati] to make go, to send, to set into motion, to cause to go It 115 (anabhāvaṃ to destroy), see under gacchati. Gambhīra (adj.) [Vedic gambhīra & gabhīra] deep, profound, unfathomable, well founded, hard to perceive, difficult. - (a) lit. of lakes: Dh 83; Pv II.119 (=agādha); Pug 46; of a road (full of swamps) J I.196. - (b) fig. of knowledge & wisdom: dhammo g. duddaso . . . M I.487; S I.136; Tathāgato g. appameyyo duppariyogāho M I.487; parisā g. (opp. uttāna, shallow, superficial, thoughtless) A I.70; g. ṭhāna w. ref. jhāna, etc. Ps II.21; saddhamma g. Sdhp. 530; g. gūḷha nipuṇa Nd 342; lokanātho nipuṇo g. PvA 1; also w. nipuṇa J VI.355; Miln 234; Bdhd. 118, 137; - (nt.) the deep; deep ground, i. e. secure foundation Sn 173; Kh VIII.1, 3 (see KhA 217). avabhāsa (adj.) having the appearance of depth or profundity, D II.55; S II.36; Pug 46 (+uttāna), cp. Pug A 226; -paðða one whose wisdom is profound Sn 176, 230; 627=Dh 403 (+medhāvin) cp. DhA IV.169 & see Ps II.192 for detailed explanation; -sita resting on depth (of soil), wellfounded A IV.237. {Gambhira} Gambhīratā {Gambhirata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] depth DhA I.92. Gamma {Gamma} (adj.) [fr. gāma. Vedic gramya] of or belonging to the village, common, pagan (cp. Fr. villain), always combd with hīna, low & pagan Vin I.10 and ≈ (anta, standard of life); A III.325 (dassana, view); D III.130 (sukhallikānuyoga, hedonist) Sdhp 254. Cp. pothujjanika. Gayha {Gayha} (adj.) [grd. of gayhati; Vedic grāhya] to be taken, to be seized, as nt, the grip, in gayhūpaga (adj.) for being taken up, for common use SnA 283. - (nt.) that which comes into one's grasp, movable property, acquisition of property DhA II.29; III.119; PvA 4. As gayhūpakaṃ at J IV.219. Gayhaka {Gayhaka} (adj.=gayha) one who is to be taken (prisoner), in °niyyamāna id. S I.143=J III.361 (expl. as karamaragāhaṃ gahetvā niyyamāna; cp. karamara). Gayhati {Gayhati} [Pass. to gaṇhāti] to get seized, to be taken (see gaṇhāti); p.pres. gayhamāna being caught DhA III.175 (°ka). - grd. gayha. Garahaka {Garahaka} (adj.) finding fault with, rebuking; in paṭhavī° āpa°, etc., combd w. paṭhavījigucchaka, etc. (disgusted w. the great elements) M I.327. Garahaṇa {Garahana} (nt.) reproof VvA 16, as f. °ṇā at Vism 29. Garahati {Garahati} [Vedic garhati Dhtp 340 nindāyaṃ] to reproach, to blame, scold, censure, find fault with: agarahiyam mā garahittha "do not blame the blameless" S I.240; D I.161 (tapaṃ to reject, disapprove of); D III.92, 93 (aor. garahi, grd. garahitabba); Sn 313, 665; Miln 222 (+jigucchanti); PvA 125, 126; Sdhp. 382. - pp. garahita blameworthy Dh 30 (pamādo); Sn 313; J V.453; Miln 288 (dasa puggalā g.). agarahita blameless, faultless PvA 89 (=anindita, 131). - See also gārayha & cp. vi°. Pāli Text Society 570 Pāli-English Dictionary Garahā {Garaha} (f.) blame, reproach D I.135 "stating an example," see DA I.296; D III.92, 93; Sn 141; J I.10 (garahapaṭicchādanabhāva preventing all occasion for finding fault); 132 (garahabhaya-bhīta for fear of blame), 135 (garahatthe as a blame); Nett 184. Garahin {Garahin} (adj.) blaming, censuring Sn 660 (ariya°), 778 (atta°), 913 (anatta°); Miln 380 (pāpa°). Garu {Garu} [Vedic guru; Gr. baru/s, Lat. gravis & brutus, Goth. kaurus] 1. adj. (a) lit. heavy, opp. lahu light, appld to bhāra, a load S III.26; J I.196 (=bhārika); VI.420; DhA I.48; Sdhp 494 (rūpagarubhāra the heavy load of "form"). Compar. garutara (as against Sk. garīyaṃ) PvA 191. - (b) fig. important, to be esteemed, valued or valuable A III.110 sq. (piya manāpa g. bhavanīya); c. gen. or -° bent on (often in sequence °garu, °ninna, °poṇa, etc., e. g. Vism 135); pursuing, paying homage to, reverent; (or) esteemed by, honoured, venerated: Satthugaru esteeming the Lord; Dhamma°, Sanghe g. A III.331=IV.28 sq.; dosa° S I.24; kodha°, saddhamma° (pursuing, fostering) A II.46 sq.=84 sq.; Sdhp 1 (sabba-loka° worshipped by all the world); Dpvs IV.12. - agaru (c. gen.) irreverent towards Sn p. 51 (Gotamassa). Cp. garuka, gārava; also agaru & agalu. - 2. N. a venerable person, a teacher: garunaṃ dassanāya & sakāsaṃ Sn 325, 326 (v. l. garūnaṃ to be preferred, so also SnA 332, 333); garūnaṃ dārā It 36. - garukaroti (for garuṃ k°) to esteem, respect, honour; usually in series sakkaroti g° māneti pūjeti Vin II.162; M I.31; D I.91; A III.76; IV.276; Nd2 334 (on namati), 530 (on yasassin); PvA 54. Expl. at DA I.256 by gāravaṃ karoti. - garukātabba worthy of esteem PvA 9. - garukāra (sakkāra g. mānana vandana) esteem, honour, regard Pug 19=Dhs 1121. - See also guru. -upanissita (adj.) depending on a teacher, one being taught Ps II.202; -ṭṭhāniya one who takes the place of a teacher A III.21, 393; Nett 8; Vism 344. -dhamma a rule to be observed. There are 8 chief rules enum. at Vin II.255=A IV.276, 280; see also Vin IV.51, 315; V.136. Taken in the sense of a violation of these rules Vin I.49=II.226; I.52, 143, 144; II.279; -nissaya in °ṃ gaṇhāti to take up dependency on a teacher, i. e. to consider oneself a pupil Vin II.303; -saṃvasa association with a teacher Nd2 235 4°; Miln 408. Garuka {Garuka} [from garu] somewhat heavy.-1. lit. J I.134 (of the womb in pregnancy); Dh 310; Miln 102. Usually coupled & contrasted with lahuka, light: in def. of sense of touch Dhs 648; similarly w. sithila, dhanita, dīgha, rassa Miln 344; DA I.177 (in expl. of dasavidha vyaðjana). 2. fig. (a) heavy, grave, serious esp. appld to - āpatti, breach of regulations, offence (opp. lahuka) Vin V.115, 130, 145, 153; Dh 138 (ābādha, illness); appld to kamma at Vism 601 (one of the four kinds); nt. as adv. considerably Miln 92 (°ṃ parinamati). - (b) important, venerable, worthy of reverence Th 2, 368 (Satthu sāsana=garukātabba ThA 251); Miln 140. - (c) -° "heavy on," bent on, attaching importance to: nahāna° fond of bathing Vin I.196; tadattha° engaged in (jhāna) Nd2 264; kamma° attributing importance to k. Nd2 411; saddhamma° revering the Doctrine Sdhp. 520. Nibbāna-garuka Vism 117 (+Nādhimutta & N-pabbhāra). -āpatti a grievous offence, see above. As terasa g-°ino at Miln 310. Garutta (nt.) the fact of being honoured or considered worthy of esteem, honourableness A V.164 sq. Garuḷa {Garutta} [Derivation uncertain. Sk. garuḍa, Lat. volucer winged, volo to fly]. N. of a mythical bird, a harpy Ps II.196=Nd2 235, 3 q.; Vism 206; VvA 9 (=supaṇṇa); DhA I.144. {Garula} Pāli Text Society 571 Pāli-English Dictionary Gala {Gala} [*gel to devour, to swallow=Lat. gula, Ohg. kela, cp. Sk. gala jalukā, and *gÛel, as Gr. de/lear, cp. also Sk. girati, gilati Dhtp 262 gives as meaning of gal "adana." This root gal also occurs at Vism 410 in fanciful def. of "puggala"; the meaning here is not exactly sure (to cry, shout?)] the throat J I.216, 264, III.26; IV.494: I.194 (a dewlap); PvA 11, 104. -agga the top of the throat Sdhp 379; -ajjhoharaniya able to be swallowed (of solid food) Dhs 646, 740, 875; -ggaha taking by the throat, throttling D I.144 (+daṇḍapahāra); -nāḷī the larynx DhA I.253; II.257; ppamāṇa (adj.) going up to the neck J I.264 (āvāṭa); -pariyosāṇa forming the end of the throat J III.126; -ppavedhaka (nt.) pain in the throat M I.371; -mūla the bottom of the throat PvA 283. -vāṭaka the bottom (?) of the throat (œsophagus?) Vism 185, 258. Note.-gala with many other r &gcircle;r), usually reduplicated (iterative), the main applications of which are the following: 1. The (sounding) throat in designation of swallowing, mostly with a dark (guttural) vowel: gulp, belch, gargle, gurgle. 2. The sound produced by the throat (voice) or sound in general, particularly of noises or sounds either inarticulate, confused & indefinable or natural sounds striking enough per se to form a sufficient means of recognition (i. e. name) of the animal which utters this sound (cuckoo, e. g.). To be divided into: A. palatal group ("light" sounds): squeak, yell, giggle, etc., applied to - (a) Animate Nature: the cackling, crowing noise of Palmipeds & related birds, reminding of laughter (heron, hen, cock; cp. P. koñca, Lat. gallus) - (b) Inanimate Nature: the grinding, nibbling, trickling, dripping, fizzing noises or sounds (P. galati, etc.). B. guttural group ("dark" sounds): groan, growl, howl, etc., appld to - (a) Animate N.: the snorting, grunting noise of the Pachyderms & related quadrupeds (elephant, op. P. koñca, kuñjara; pig, boar) - (b) Inanimate N.: the roaring, crashing, thundering noises (P. gaḷagaḷāyati, ghurughurāyati). 3. The sound as indicating motion (produced by motion): A. palatal group ("sharp" sounds, characteristic of quick motion: whizz, spin, whirl): P. gaggaraka whirlpool, Gr. kerki/s spindle, bobbin. B. guttural group ("dull" sounds, characteristic of slow and heavy motion: roll, thud, thunder). Sometimes with elimination of the sound-element appld to swelling & fullness, as in "bulge" or Gr. sfarage/w (be full). These three categories are not always kept clearly separate, so that often a palatal group shifts into the sphere of a guttural one & vice versa. roots is by no means an extinct process, nor is it restricted to any special branch of a linguistic family, as examples show. The main roots of Idg. origin are the foll. which are all represented in Pāli - (the categories are marked acc. to the foregoing scheme 1, 2A, 2B, 3): kal (2A): kla/zw, clango, Goth. hlahjan laugh; kār (2 A): kh_ruc, Sk. kāru (cp. P. kitti), cārmen; kel (2 A): ke/lados, calo (cp. P. kandati), Ohg. hellan; ker (2 Aa): karkai/rw, ko/rkoros=querquedula=kakkara (partridge); kol (2 B): cuculus, kokila (a); kolāhala and halāhala (b); kor (2 Ba): cornix (cp. P. kāka), corvus=crow=raven; Sk. krośati; P. koðca. - gÛel (1) Lat. gula, glutio, de/lear; gÛer: (1) bo/ros, bibrw/skw, Lat. voro, Sk. girati, Ohg. querka; (3) ba/raqron (whirlpool) Sk. gargara: gel (1) Sk. gilati, Ohg. kela - gal (2 A): gallus (a) gloria (b); gar (2 Ab): gh_rus, garrulus, Ohg. kara: gel (2 A): xelidw/n (a) hirrio (to whine), Ohg. gellan (b): ger: (1) gargari/zw (gargle) Sk. gharghara (gurgling). (2 Aa) ge/ranos = crane, Ger. krähen, Lat. gracillo (cackle); (2 Ba) Ohg. kerran (grunt), Sk. gṛṇāti (sing); (2 Ab) Sk. jarate (rustle); gur (2 Ba): gru/zw=grundio= grunt; Lat. gurgulio; Sk. ghurghura. With special reference to Pāli formations the foll. list shows a few sound roots which are further discussed in the Dictionary s. v. Closely connecte is the Pāli cerebral ṭ, tḥ, ḷ, ṇ, so that roots with these sounds have to be classed in a mutual relation with the liquids. In most cases graphic representation varies between both (cp. gala & gaḷa) - kil (kiṇ) (2 Ab): kikī (cp. Sk. kṛka°), kilikilāyati & kinkiṇāyati (tinkle), kili (click), kinkaṇika (bell); kur (2 B): ākurati to hawk, to be hoarse; khaṭ (1) khaṭakhaṭa (hawking), kākacchati (snore); (2 Aa) kukkuṭa (cock); gal (1) gala (throat) uggilati (vomit); (2 Ab) galati (trickle): (2 Ba) Pk. galagajjiya (roar) & guluguliya 572 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary (bellow); (2 Bb) gaḷagaḷāyati (roar); gar (2 A); gaggara (roar & cackle, cp. Sk. gargara to 3); (2 B); gaggarāyati (roar); (3) gaggaraka (whirlpool); ghar (1) Sk. gharghara (gurgling); (2 Ab) gharati (trickle), Sk. ghargharikā (bell); (2 Bb) ghurughurāyati (grunt). - See also kakaca, kanka, kankaṇa, cakora (cankora), cakkavaka, jagghati, ciṭiciṭāyati, taṭataṭayati, timingala, papphāsa. Galaka {Galaka} (nt.) throat J III.481; IV.251. Gaḷa {Gala} [same as gala, see note on prec.] 1. a drop, i. e. a fall: see gaḷāgala.-2. a swelling, a boil (=gaṇḍa) J IV.494 (mattā gajā bhinnagaḷā elephants in rut, with the temple-swellings broken; expl. p. 497 by madaṃ gaḷantā); Sn 61 (? v. l. gaṇḍa). - 3. a hook, a fishhook Sn 61 (?), expl. at SnA 114 by ākaḍḍhanavasena baḷiso. gaḷāgaḷaṃ gacchati to go from drop to drop, i. e. from fall to fall, w. ref. to the gatis J V.453 (expl. by apāyaṃ gacchati). Gaḷagaḷāyati {Galagalayati} [=gaggarāyati, see note on gala] to roar, to crash, to thunder; deve gaḷagaḷāyate (loc. abs.) in a thunderstorm, usually as deve vassante deve g° amidst rain and heavy thunder D II.132; S I.106; A V.114 sq. (gala°); Th 1, 189; Miln 116 (gaganaṃ ravati galag°); KhA 163 (mahāmegha). - Gangā galagalantī the roaring Gangā Miln 122 (cp. halāhalasadda ibid.). Gaḷati {Galati} (and galati) [Sk. galati, cp. Ohg. quellan to well up, to flow out; see note on gala and cp. also jala water] 1. to drip, flow, trickle (trs. & intr.) Vin I.204 (natthu g.); M I.336 (sīsaṃ lohitena gaḷati); J IV.497 (madaṃ); IV.3 (lohitaṃ g.); V.472 (do. v. l. paggharati); Pv IV.53 (assukāni g.). - 2. to rain Th 1, 524 (deve gaḷantamhi in a shower of rain. Cp. galagaḷāyati). - 3. to drop down, to fall DhA II.146 (suriyo majjhaṭṭhānato galito). - Cp. pari°. Gaḷayati {Galayati} [denom. to gaḷa in sense of gaḷati 1] to drip, to drop, in assukāni g. to shed tears Sn 691. Gaḷita {Galita} rough, in a° smooth J V.203, 206 (+mudu & akakkasa); VI.64. Gaḷocī {Galoci} (f.). N. of a shrub (Cocculus cordifolius); in gaḷocilatā DhA III.110; a creeper. Cp. pūtilatā. Gava° {Gava°} base of the N. go, a bull, cow, used in cpds. See gāv°, go. -akkha a kind of window Mhvs 9. 15, 17; -āghātana slaughtering of cows Vin I.182; -āssa cows & horses Vin V.350; D I.5~; Sn 769; -caṇḍa fierce towards cows Pug 47; -pāna milky rice pudding J I.33; -(°m)pati "lord of cows," a bull Sn 26, 27 (usabha). Gavacchita {Gavacchita} furnished with netting (?) (Hardy in Index) VvA 276, of a carriage (=suvaṇṇajālavitata). Gavaja {Gavaja} see gavaya. Gavaya {Gavaya} (and gavaja) a species of ox, the gayal [Sk. gavaya, cp. gavala, buffalo] J V.406. (°ja=khagga); Miln 149; DhsA 331. Pāli Text Society 573 Pāli-English Dictionary Gavi {Gavi} a tree-like creeper, in -pphala the fruit of a g. Sn 239 (=rukkhavalliphala SnA). °Gavesaka {°Gavesaka} (adj. fr. next) looking for, seeking J I.176 (kāraṇa°); II.3 (aguṇa°). Gavesati {Gavesati} [gava+esati. Vedic gaveṣate. Origin. to search after cows. Dhtp 298=maggana tracking] to seek, to search for, to wish for, strive after Dh 146 (gavessatha), 153; Th 1, 183; Nd2 2, 70, 427; J I.4, 61; Miln 326; PvA 187, 202 (aor. gavesi=vicini); Bdhd 53. In Nd2 always in combn esati gavesati pariyesati. Gavesana {Gavesana} search for PvA 185. Gavesin {Gavesin} (adj.) seeking, looking for, striving after (usually -°) D I.95 (tāṇa°, etc.); Dh 99 (kāma°), 245 (suci°), 355 (pāra°); Nd2 503 (in expl. of mahesi, with esin & pariyesin); Bdhd 59. Gassetuṃ {Gassetum} at DhsA 324 is to be corrected into dassetuṃ. Gaha1 {Gaha} [see under gaṇhāti] a house, usually in cpds. (see below). J III.396 (=the layman's life; Com. geha). -kāraka a house-builder, metaph. of taṇhā (cp. kāya as geha) Dh 153, 154=Th 1, 183, 184; DhA III.128; -kūṭa the peak of a house, the ridge-pole, metaph. of ignorance Dh 154 (=kaṇṇika-maṇḍala DhA 128), replacing thūṇirā (pillar) at Th 1, 184 in corresp. passage (= kaṇṇikā Com.); -ṭṭha a householder, one who leads the life of a layman (opp. anagāra, pabbajita or paribbājaka) Vin I.115 (sagahaṭṭhā parisā an assembly in which laymen were present); S I.201; A III.114, 116, 258; It. 112 (gharaṃ esino gahaṭṭhā) Dh 404=Sn 628; Sn 43 (gharaṃ āvasanto, see Nd2 226 for explanation), 90, 134 (paribbājaṃ gahaṭṭhaṃ vā) 398, 487; Sdhp 375. -°vatta a layman's rule of conduct Sn 393 (=agāriyā paṭipadā SnA 376) -°ka belonging to a layman; acting as a layman or in the quality of a l. A II.35 (kinkaraṇiyāni), III.296 (brahmacariyā); -pati see sep. Gaha2 {Gaha} [Sk. graha, gaṇhāti, q. v. for etym.] "seizer," seizing, grasping, a demon, any being or object having a hold upon man. So at S I.208 where Sānu is "seized" by an epileptic fit (see note in K.S. I.267, 268). Used of dosa (anger) Dh 251 (exemplified at DhA III.362 by ajagara° the grip of a boa, kumbhīla° of a crocodile, yakkha° of a demon). sagaha having crocodiles, full of e. (of the ocean) (+sarakkhasa) It 57. Cp. gahaṇa & saṃ°. Gahaṇa [fr. gaṇhāti] (adj.) seizing, taking; acquiring; (n.) seizure, grasp, hold, acquisition Vism 114 (in detail). Usually -°: nāma°-divase on the day on which a child gets its name (lit. acquiring a name) J I.199, 262; arahatta° DhA I.8; dussa° DhA II.87; maccha° J IV.139; hattha° J I.294; byanjana°-lakkhaṇa Nett 27. gahaṇatthāya in order to get . . . J I.279; II.352. amhākaṃ g° sugahaṇaṃ we have a tight grip J I.222, 223. Gahaṇī {Gahana} {Gahani} (f.) the "seizer," a supposed organ of the body dealing with digestion and gestation. Sama-vepākiniyā g° iyā samannāgata "endowed with good digestion" D II.177=III.166. Same phrase at Av Ś I.168, 172. Cp. Vedic graha. B. Psy. 59, 67. Gahaṇika in phrase saṃsuddha-gahaṇika coming from a clean womb, of pure descent, in the enum. of the indispensable good qualities of a brahmin or a noble D I.113, 115, 137 (gahaṇī expl. as kucchi DA I.281); A I.163, III.154, 223; Sn p. 115. J I.2; duṭṭha-gahaṇika having a bad digestion Vin I.206. Pāli Text Society 574 Pāli-English Dictionary Gahana {Gahana} [Sk. gahana, cp. also ghana] 1. adj. deep, thick, impervious, only in a° clear, unobstructed, free from obstacles Vv 187 (akanataka+); Miln 160 (gahanaṃ a° kataṃ the thicket is cleared). - 2. nt. an impenetrable place, a thicket jungle, tangle. - (a) 18 gahanāni at J V.46; usually appl. to grass: tiṇa° A I.153=III.128 (+rukkha°); Miln 369; adj. tiṇagahanā obstructed with grass (of vihārā) Vin II.138; - S I.199 (rukkhamūla°); J I.7, 158; PvA 5 (pabbata°), 43; VvA 230 (vana°). - (b) fig. imperviousness, entanglement, obstruction, appl. to diṭṭhi, the jungle of wrong views or heresy (usually combd w. diṭṭhi-kantāra, the wilderness of d., see diṭṭhi) M I.8, 485; Pug 22; DA I.108. Of rāga°, moha°, etc., and kilesa° Nd2 630 (in expl. of Satthā; rāgagahanaṃ tāreti); DhA IV.156 (on Dh 394); VvA 96.-manussa° M I.340. -ṭṭhāna a lair in the jungle J I.150, 253. Gahapati {Gahapati} [gaha+pati. Vedic gṛhapati, where pati is still felt in its original meaning of "lord," "master," implying dignity, power & auspiciousness. Cp. Sk. dampati=dominus=despo/ths; and pati in P. senāpati commander-in-chief, Sk. jāspati householder, Lat. hospes, Obulg. gospoda=potestas, Goth. brūp-faps, bride-groom, hundafaps=senāpati. See details under pati.] the possessor of a house, the head of the household, pater familias (freq.+seṭṭhi). - 1. In formulas: (a) as regards social standing, wealth & clanship: a man of private (i. e. not official) life, classed w. khattiyā & brāhmaṇā in kh°-mahāsālā, wealthy Nobles, brahm°mahāsālā, do. Brahmins, gah° -m° well-to-do gentry S I.71; Nd2 135; DhA I.388. - kh°-kula, br°-kula, g°-kula the kh°, etc. clans: Vin II.161; J I.218. kh°, amaccā, br°, g.° D I.136. - (b) as regards education & mode of life ranking with kh°, br°, g.° and samaṇā Vin I.227; A I.66; Nd2 235, see also cpd. -paṇḍita.- 2. Other applications: freq. in combn brāhmaṇagahapatikā priests & yeomen: see gahapatika. In combn w. gahapatiputta (cp. kulaputta) it comprises the members of the g. rank, clansmen of the (middle) class, and implies a tinge of "respectable people" esp. in addresses. So used by the Buddha in enumerating the people as gahapati vā gah°-putto vā aððatarasmiṃ vā kule paccājāto D I.62; M I.344. gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo householders and their wives A II.57. In sg. the voc. gahapati may be rendered by "Sir" (Miln 17 e. g. and freq.), & in pl. gahapatayo by "Sirs" (e. g. Vin I.227; M I.401; A II.57). - As regards occupation all resp. businesses are within the sphere of the g., most frequently mentioned as such are seṭṭhino (see below) & cp. seṭṭhi° Vin I.16, but also kassaka, farmer A I.229, 239 sq.; and dārukammika, carpenter A III.391. Var. duties of a g. enum. at A I.229, 239. -The wealth & comfortably-living position of a g. is evident from an expression like kalyāṇa-bhattiko g. a man accustomed to good food Vin II.77=III.160. - f. gahapatānī Vin III.211, 213 sq., 259 (always w. gahapati); DhA I.376; pl. gahapatāniyo see above. - Note. The gen. sg. of gahapati is °ino (J I.92) as well as -issa (Vin I.16; D III.36). - 3. Single cases of gahapatis, where g. almost assumes the function of a title are Anāthapiṇḍika g. Vin II.158 sq.; S I.56; II.68; A II.65; J I.92; PvA 16; Meṇḍaka g. Vin I.240 sq.; Citta S IV.281 sq.; Nakulapitā S II.1 sq.; Potaliya M I.359; Sandhāna D III.36 sq.; Hāliddikāni S II.9. - See next. 'aggi the sacred fire to be maintained by a householder, interpreted by the Buddha as the care to be bestowed on one's children & servants A IV.45; see enum. under aggī at A IV.41; D III.217; -cīvara the robe of a householder (i. e. a layman's robe) Vin I.280 sq.; °dhara wearing the householder's (private man's) robe (of a bhikkhu) M I.31; A III.391 sq.; -necayika (always with brāhmaṇa-mahāsālā) a business man of substance D I.136; III.16 sq.; -paṇḍita a learned householder. Cp. above 1 (b), together w. khattiya°, etc. M I.176, 396; w. samaṇa-brāhmaṇa° Miln 5; -parisā a company of gahapatis (together w. khattiya°, etc., see above) Vin I.227; M I.72; D III.260; -putta a member of a g. clan D I.62, 211; M I.344; S III.48, 112; PvA 22; -mahāsāla a householder of private means (cp. above 1 a) usually in combn with khattiya°, etc. D III.258; S I.71; IV.292; A II.86; IV.239; -ratana the "householder-gem" one of the seven fairy jewels of Pāli Text Society 575 Pāli-English Dictionary the mythical overlord. He is a wizard treasure-finder (see ratana) D II.16, 176; Sn p. 106. Cp. Rh.D. Dialogues etc. II.206. Gahapatika {Gahapatika} (adj.-n.) belonging to the rank or grade of a householder, a member of the gentry, a man of private means (see gahapati) D I.61 (expl. as gehassa pati ekageha-matte jeṭṭhaka DA I.171); Nd2 342; PvA 39. Often in combn w. khattiya & brāhmaṇa: A I.66; D III.44, 46, 61; & often in contrast to brāhmaṇa only: brāhmaṇa-gahapatika Brahmins & Privates (priests & laymen, Rh.D. Buddh. S. p. 258) M I.400; A I.110; It III.; J I.83, 152, 267; PvA 22. paṇṇika g° "owner of a house of leaves" as nickname of a fruiterer J III.21; of an ascetic J IV.446. Gahita {Gahita} (and gahīta Dh 311) (adj.) [pp. of gaṇhāti] seized. taken, grasped D I.16; DA I.107 (=ādinna, pavattita); J I.61; IV.2; PvA 43 (v. l. for text gaṇhita). - nt. a grasp, grip DhA III.175; gahitakaṃ karoti to accept VvA 260. -duggahīta (always °gahīta) hard to grasp M I.132 sq.; A II.147, 168; III.178; Dh 311; J VI.307 sq.; sugahita (sic) easy to get J I.222. -bhāva (cittassa) the state of being held (back), holding back, preventing to act (generously) DhsA 370 (in expln of aggahitattaṃ cittassa Dhs 1122 see under ā°). Gāthaka {Gathaka} [demin. of gāthā]=gāthā, in ekaṃ me gāhi gāthakaṃ "sing to me only one little verse" J III.507. Gāthā {Gatha} (f.) [Vedic gāthā, on dern see gāyate] a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaṃ or a Tuṭṭhubbaṃ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half-lines A II.178; J IV.395. Def. as akkhara-padaniya-mita-ganthita-vacanaṃ at KhA 117. For a riddle on the word see S I.38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Angas or divisions of the Canon (see navanga Satthu sāsana). Pl. gāthā Sn 429; J II.160; gāthāyo Vin I.5, 349; D II.157. gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin I.36, 38; Kh v. intr. - gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin I.222, 230, 246, 294, etc. - gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin I.38. - anantaragāthā the foll. stanza J IV.142; Sn 251; J I.280; Dh 102 (°sataṃ). -abhigīta gained by verses S I.167=Sn 81, 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaṃ Com. cp. Ger. "ersungen"). -āvasāne after the stanza has been ended DhA III.171; -jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; -dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas J III.395 sq.; PvA 29, 40; -pada a half line of a gāthā Dh 101; KhA 123; -sukhattaṃ in order to have a well-sounding line, metri causā, PvA 33. Gādha1 {Gadha} [Sk. gāḷha pp. of gāh, see gāhati] depth; a hole, a dugout A II.107=Pug 43 (cp. PugA 225); Sdhp 394 (°ṃ khaṇati). Cp. gāḷha2. Gādha2 {Gadha} [Sk. gāḷha firm Dhtp 167 "paṭiṭṭhāyaṃ" cp. also Sk. gādha, fordable & see gāḷha1] adj. passable, fordable, in a° unfathomable, deep PvA 77 (=gambhīra). nt. a iord, a firm stand, firm ground, a safe place: gambhīre °ṃ vindati A V.202. °ṃ esati to seek the terra firma S I.127; similarly: °ṃ labhati to gain firm footing S I.47; °ṃ ajjhagā S IV.206; °ṃ labhate J VI.440 (=patiṭṭhā). Cp. o°, paṭi°. Gādhati {Gadhati} [v. der. fr. gādha2] to stand fast, to be on firm ground, to have a firm footing: āpo ca paṭhavī ca tejo vāyo na gādhati "the four elements have no footing" D I.223=S I.15; Dhamma-Vinaye gādhati "to stand fast in the Doctrine & Discipline" S III.59 sq. Pāli Text Society 576 Pāli-English Dictionary Gāma {Gama} [Vedic grāma, heap, collection, parish; *grem to comprise; Lat. gremium; Ags. crammian (E. cram), Obulg. gramada (village community) Ohg. chram; cp. *ger in Gr. a)geirw, a)gora/, Lat, grex.] a collection of houses, a hamlet (cp. Ger. gemeinde), a habitable place (opp. araðða: gāme vā yadi vāraññe Sn 119), a parish or village having boundaries & distinct from the surrounding country (gāmo ca gāmupacāro ca Vin I.109, 110; III.46). In size varying, but usually small & distinguished from nigama, a market-town. It is the smallest in the list of settlements making up a "state" (raṭṭhaṃ). See definition & description at Vin III.46, 200. It is the source of support for the bhikkhus, and the phrase gāmaṃ piṇḍāya carati "to visit the parish for alms" is extremely frequent. - 1. a village as such: Vin I.46; Ārāmika°, Pilinda° Vin I.28, 29 (as Ārāmikagāmaka & Pilinda-gāmaka at Vin III.249); Sakyānaṃ gāme janapade Lumbineyye Sn 683; Uruvela° Pv II.1318; gāmo nātikālena pavisitabbo M I.469; °ṃ raṭṭhañ ca bhuðjati Sn 619, 711; gāme tiṃsa kulāni honti J I.199; - Sn 386, 929, 978; J II.153; VI.366; Dh 47, 49; Dhs 697 (suððo g.); PvA 73 (gāme amaccakula); 67 (gāmassa dvārasamīpena). - gāmā gāmaṃ from hamlet to hamlet M II.20; Sn 180 (with nagā nagaṃ; expl. SnA 216 as devagāmā devagāmaṃ), 192 (with purā puraṃ); Pv II.1318. In the same sense gāmena gāmaṃ Nd2 177 (with nigamena n°, nagarena n°., raṭṭhena r°., janapadena j°.). - 2. grouped with nigama, a market-town: gāmanigamo sevitabbo or asevitabbo A IV.365 sq., cp. V.101 (w. janapadapadeso); - Vin III.25, 184 (°ṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya); IV.93 (piṇḍāya pavisati); gāmassa vā nigamassa vā avidūre D I.237; M I.488; gāme vā nigame vā Pug 66. - 3. as a geographical-political unit in the constitution of a kingdom, enumd in two sets: (a) gāmanigamarājadhāniyo Vin III.89; A III.108; Nd2 271III; Pv II.1318; DhA I.90. - (b) gāma-nigamanagara-raṭṭha-janapada Nd2 177, 304III (°bandhana), 305 (°kathā); with the foll. variations: g. nigama nagara M II.33-40; g. nigama janapada Sn 995; Vism 152; gāmāni nigamāni ca Sn 118 (expld by SnA 178: ettha ca saddena nagarāni ti pi vattabbaṃ). - See also dvāra°; paccanta°; bīja°; bhūta°; mātu°. -anta the neighbourhood of a village, its border, the village itself, in °nāyaka leading to the village A III.189; °vihārin (=āraððaka) living near a v. M I.31, 473; A III.391 (w. nemantanika and gahapati-cīvara-dhara); - Sn 710; -antara the (interior of the) village, only in t. t. gāmantaraṃ gacchati to go into the v. Vin II.300, & in °kappa the "villagetrip-licence" (Vin. Texts III.398) ib. 294, 300; cp. IV.64, 65; V.210; -ûpacāra the outskirts of a v. Vin I.109, 110; defined at Vin III.46, 200; -kathā village-talk, gossip about v.-affairs. Included in the list of foolish talks (+nigama°, nagara°, janapada°) D I.7 (see expln at DA I.90); Sn 922. See kathā; -kamma that which is to be done to, or in a village, in °ṃ karoti to make a place habitable J I.199; -kūṭa "the village-fraud," a sycophant S II.258; J IV.177 (=kūṭavedin); -goṇā (pl.) the village cattle J I.194; -ghāta those who sack villages, a marauder, dacoit (of corā thieves) D I.135; S II.188; -ghātaka (corā) =°ghāta S IV.173; Miln 20; Vism 484; nt. village plundering J I.200. -jana the people of the v. Miln 47; -ṭṭhāna in purāṇa° a ruined village J II.102; -dārakā (pl.) the youngsters of the v. J III.275; f. -dārikā the girls of the v. PvA 67; dvaya, in °vāsika living in (these) two vs. PvA 77; -dvāra the v. gates, the entrance to the v. Vin III.52; J II.110, 301; cp. PvA 67; -dhamma doings with women-folk (cp. mātugāma), vile conduct D I.4≈(+methuna) A I.211; J II.180 (=vasaladhamma); VvA 11; DA I.72 (=gāma-vāsīnaṃ dhamma?); -poddava (v. l. kāmapudava) a shampooer (? Vin. Texts III.66; Bdhgh explains: kāmapudavā ti chavi-rāga-maṇḍanānuyuttā nāgarikamanussā; gāmaṃ podavā ti pi pādho es'ev'attho, Vin II.315) Vin II.105; -bhojaka the village headman J I.199; DhA I.69; -majjhe in the midst of the v. J I.199; VI.332; -vara an excellent v. S I.97; J I.138; -vāsin the inhabitant of a v. J II.110; v.107; DA I.72; -saððā the thought of a v. M III.104; -samīpe near a v. J I.254; -sahassa a thousand parishes (80,000 under the rule of King Bimbisāra) Vin I.179; -sāmanta in the neighbourhood of a v., near a v. D I.101; (+mgama°) -sīmā the boundary of the parish Vin I.110 (+nigama°); -sūkara a village pig J III.393. Pāli Text Society 577 Pāli-English Dictionary Gāmaka {Gamaka} 1. =gāma Vin I.208; J I.199 (Macala°), 253; IV.431 (cora°); PvA 67 (Iṭṭhakāvatī and Dīgharājī); DhA II.25 (dvāra°). - 2. a villager J V.107 (=gāmavāsin). -āvāsa an abode in a village PvA 12; VvA 291. Gāmaṇika {Gamanika} =gāmaṇi S I.61; A III.76 (pūga°). Gāmaṇī {Gamani} (m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin II.296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G.- Saṃyutta (Book VIII. of the Saḷāyatana-Vagga) S IV.305 sq.; & of the G.-Jātaka J I.136, 137. -S IV.306 (Talapuṭa naṭa°), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya). Gāmaṇḍala {Gamandala} "the round of the ox," like the oxen driven round & round the threshingfloor Th 1, 1143. - Cp. gomaṇḍala (s.v. go). Gāmika {Gamika} 1. [to gāma] a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin I.179; A III.76, 78, 300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika). - 2. [to gam] adj. going wandering, travelling (-°) J II.112. °Gāmin {°Gamin} (adj.) [from gacchati, gam] f. °iṇī, in composition °gāmi°. - (a) going, walking, lit.: sīgha° walking quickly Sn 381; - (b) leading to, making for, usually with magga or paṭipadā (gāminī), either lit. Pāṭaliputtagāmi-magga the road to P. Miln 17; or fig. of ways & means connected w. one of the "gatis." as apāya° DhA III.175, udaya° paṭipadā S V.361; nibbāna° dhamma Sn 233; amata-gāmi-magga S V.8; udayatthagāmiṇī paððā A V.15; dukkhanirodha° paṭipadā Vin I.10; cp. ācaya° Dhs 584. 1013. Acc. °gāminaṃ: khemaṃ Amata° M I.508; brahmacariyaṃ: nibbān' ogadha° It 28, 29; dukkhûpasama° maggaṃ Sn 724= Dh 191; niraya° maggaṃ Sn 277, ThA 243. Or °gāmiṃ: Sn 233, 381. Gāmeyya {Gameyya} (adj.) belonging to a village in sa° of the same v., a clansman S I.36=60 (+sakhā). Gāyaka {Gayaka} [fr. next] a singer PvA 3 (naṭaka°). Gāyati {Gayati} [Vedic gai, gāyate] to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin I.38); imper. gāhi (J III.507); fut. gāyissati; grd. gāyitabba. Vin II.108 (dhammaṃ), 196 (gāthaṃ); Sn 682 (g° ca vādayanti ca); J I.290 (gītaṃ); III.507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism 121 (aor. gāyi); PvA 151. Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya. Gāyana {Gayana} (nt.) singing VvA 315 (naccana+). Gārayha {Garayha} (adj.) [grd. of garahati] contemptible, low Vin III.186; IV.176 sq.; 242; V.149; M I.403; A II.241 (kammaṃ pādaṃ gārayhaṃ mosallaṃ); Sn 141; Nett 52; SnA 192. a° not to be blamed J VI.200 (spelt aggarayha). Gārava {Garava} (m. and [later] nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with loc. respect for, reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects: Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Sanghe, sikkhāya, appamāde, paṭisanthāre Vin V.92=D III.244. As 7 gāravā (the 6+samānhi) in adj. a° and sa° at A IV.84 (see below). D III.284; Sn 265; Vism 464 (atta° & para°). Pāli Text Society 578 Pāli-English Dictionary Expld KhA 144 by garubhāvo; often in combn with bahumāna PvA 135 (=pūjā), saðjāta-g°bahumāna (adj.) PvA 50; VvA 205. Instr. gāravena out of respect, respectfully D II.155; J I.465. Appld to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante PvA 33, 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. °adhivacana). - agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin V.92 (six: as above); J I.217; PvA 54. - As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with loc.) & disrespectful; D III.244 (six g.); A IV.84 (seven); M I.469; combd with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient) A III.7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba-gārava full of keen respect (Satthu-garu Dhamma-garu Sanghe ca tibbagārava, etc.) A III.331=IV.28 sq. -ādhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd2 466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissādhivacana Nd2 130 (āyasmā). Gāravatā {Garavata} [Der. fr. gārava] reverence, respect, in Satthu°, Dhamma°, etc. A III.330 sq., 423 sq.; IV.29 (ottappa°). Gāḷha {Galha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. gāḍha] 1. [cp. gādha1] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaṃ g° bandbanaṃ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly D I.245; A II.241; J I.264; PvA 4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogātankena phuṭṭha) A II.174 sq.; appld to poison smeared on an arrow M I.429. - gālhaṃ & gālhakaṃ (adv.) tightly J I.265, 291. - agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha) (of vacana, speech, combd with pharusa) strong (?) Pug 32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. - 2. [cp. gādha1 deep J I.155 (°vedhin, piercing); Miln 370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita, pagāḷha. Gāvī {Gavi} (f.) [see go] gen. sg. gāviyā (Pug 56=A II.207); nom. pl. gāviyo (SnA 323; VvA 308); gen. pl. gāvīnaṃ DhA I.396; SnA 323; VvA 308). - A cow Vin I.193; A IV.418; J I.50; Ud 8, 49; Vism 525 (in simile); DhA II.35; VvA 200. Gāvuta {Gavuta} (nt.) [cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district] a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana=80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league J I.57, 59; II.209; Vism 118; DhA I.396. Gāvutika {Gavutika} (adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DA I.284. Gāvo {Gavo} see go. Gāha {Gaha} [fr. gaṇhāti] 1. (n.) seizing, seizure, grip (cp. gaha): canda° suriya° an eclipse (lit. the moon, etc., being seized by a demon) D I.10 (=DA I.95: Rāhu candaṃ gaṇhāti). Esp. appld to the sphere of the mind; obsession, being possessed (by a thought), an idea, opinion, view, usually as a preconceived idea, a wrong view, misconception. So in defn of diṭṭhi (wrong views) with paṭiggāha & abhinivesa Nd2 271III (on lepa); Pug 22Q Dhs 381 (=obsession like the grip of a crocodile DhsA 253), 1003; Vbh 145, 358. In the same formula as vipariyesa ggāha (wrong view), cp. viparīta° VvA 331 (see diṭṭhi). As doubt & error in anekaṃ sa+g° in defn of kankhā & vicikicchā Nd2 1; Vbh 168; ekaṃsa° & apaṇṇaka° certainty, right thought J I.97. - gāhaṃ vissajjeti to give up a preconceived idea J II.387. - 2. (adj.) act. holding: rasmi° holding the reins Dh 222; dabbi° holding the spoons Pv II.953 (=gāhaka PvA 135). - (b) med.-pass. taken: jīvagāha taken alive, in °ṃ gaheti to take (prisoner) alive S I.84, karamaragāhaṃ gaheti same J III.361 (see kara). Gāhaka {Gahaka} (adj.) f. gāhikā holding (-°) chatta° Sn 688; Dāvs II.119; katacchu° PvA 135; cāmarī° J VI.218. Cp. saṃ°. Pāli Text Society 579 Pāli-English Dictionary Gāhati {Gahati} [Sk. gāhate but Dhtp 349=viloḷana] to immerse, to penetrate, to plunge into: see gādha & gāḷha; cp. also avagadha ajjhogāhati, ogāhati, pagāhati. Gāhana {Gahana} (nt.) [fr. last] submersion, see avagahana, avagāhati & avagāhana. Gāhavant {Gahavant} in ekaṃsa-gāhavatī nibbici kicchā "doubtlessness consisting in certainty" VvA 85 in explQ of ekaṃsika. Gāhāpaka {Gahapaka} [fr. gāhāpeti] one who is made to take up, a receiver Vin II.177 (patta°). Gāhāpeti {Gahapeti} [caus. of gaṇhāti] to cause to take; to cause to be seized or fetched; to remove. Aor, gāhāpesi J I.53; II.37; gāhāpayi Pv IV.142. - Ger. gāhāpetvā J I.166; II.127; III.281; DhA I.62 (patta-cīvaraṃ). With double acc. mahājanaṃ kathaṃ g° made people believe your words J II.416; cetake kasā g. made the servants seize their whips J III.281. Cp. gaṇhāpeti. Gāhi {Gahi} Imper. pres. of gāyati J III.507. Gāhika {Gahika} (-°)=gahin, see anta°. Gāhin {Gahin} (adj.) (-°) grasping, taking up, striving after, ādhāna° D III.247; udaka° J I.5; piya° Dh 209; nimitta° anubyañjana°, etc. Gāheti {Gaheti} [v. denom. fr. gāha] to understand, to account for DA I.117. Gingamaka {Gingamaka} (v. l. BB kinkamaka) a sort of ornament J VI.590. Gijjha {Gijjha} [Vedic gṛdhra, cp. gijjhati] 1. (m.) a vulture. Classed with kāka, crow & kulala, hawk M I.88; (kākā+), 364 (in simile, with kankā & kulatā) 429 (do.); Sn 201 (kākā+); PvA 198 (+kulalā). It occurs also in the form gaddha. - 2. (adj.) greedy, desirous of (-°): kāma° J I.210 (cp. giddha); cp. paṭi°. -kūṭa "Vulture's Peak" Np. of a hill near Rājagaha Vin II.193; DhA I.140; PvA 10 and passim. -potaka the young of a vulture Vism 537 (in simile). Gijjhati {Gijjhati} [Sk. gṛdhyati, to Lat. gradior?] to desire, to long for, to wish: pp. gaddha & giddha. Cp. abhi°, pali°. - pp. (Pass.) gijjhita Th 2, 152 (=paccāsiṃsita ThA). Giñjakā {Ginjaka} (f.) a brick, in °āvasatha a house of bricks, as N pl. "the Brick Hall" D I.91; Vin I.232; M I.205. Giddha (adj.) [pp. of gijjhati] greedy; greedy for, hankering after (with loc.) S I.74 (+kāmesu mucchita); II.227; A II.2; III.68; Sn 243 (rasesu), 774 (kāmesu); 809; Pv IV.62 (sukhe); PvA 3 (+rata) (=gadhita), 271 (āhāre=hungry; cp. giddhin). In series with similar terms of desire; giddha gathita (or gadhita) mucchita ajjhopanna Nd2 369 (nissita); SnA 286. Cp. gathita. - agiddha without greed, desireless, controlled It 92 (+vītagedha); Sn 210 (do), 845. Cp. pa°. {Giddha} Pāli Text Society 580 Pāli-English Dictionary Giddhi {Giddhi} (f.) [cp. Sk. gṛdhyā or gṛdhnutā] greed, usually in cpds.: °māna greed & conceit Sn 328, °lobha g. & desire M I.360, 362 (also a° and giddhilobhin); J V.343. Der. giddhikatā (f. abstr.=Sk. gṛdhnutā) greed Vbh 351 (v. l. gedhi°). Giddhin {Giddhin} (adj. fr. prec.) greedy, usually -° greedy for, desirous after Pv IV.107 (āhāra°) f. giddhinī: gāvī vaccha° Vin I.193; S IV.181. Cp. also paligedhin. Giddhimā {Giddhima} (adj. fr. giddhi) greedy, full of greed J V.464 (rasa°). Gini {Gini} (poet.) [Vedic agni; this the aphetic form, arisen in a combn like mahāgni=mahā-gini, as against the usual assimilation aggi] fire A III.347 (mahāgini); Sn 18, 19 (āhito > nibbuto: made > extinguished); J IV.26. - Note. The occurrence of two phonetic representatives of one Vedic form (one by diæresis & one by contraction) is common in words containing a liquid or nasal element (l. r. n; cp. note on gala), e. g. supina & soppa (Sk. svapna), abhikkhaṇa and abhiṇha (abhīkṣṇa), silesuma & semha (śleṣman) gaḷagaḷa & gaggara (gargara), etc. Gimha {Gimha} [Vedic grīṣma] I. (sg.) heat, in special application to the atmosphere: hot part (of the day or year), hot season, summer; a summer month. Always used in loc. as a designation of time. 1. of the day: VvA 40 (°samaye; v. l. gimhānamāse). - 2. of summer: usually in combn w. and in contrast to hemanta winter: hemanta-gimhisu in w. & s. Dh 286 (cp. gimhika for °isu). Miln 274; Dpvs I.55; Vism 231 (°ābhitatta worn out by the heat); Sdhp 275 (°kāle). In enumn w. other seasons: vasse hemante gimhe Nd2 631 (sadā); vasanta gimhādika utū PvA 135. - 3. of a summer month; paṭhamasmiṃ gimhe Sn 233 (see KhA 192 for expln) - II. (pl.) gimhā the hot months, the season of summer, in °naṃ pacchime māse, in the last month of summer M I.79; S III.141; V.50, 321; Vv 795 (=āsāḷhimāse VvA 307). Gimhāna {Gimhana} (adj. -n.) [orig. gen. pl. of gimhā=gimhānaṃ, fr. combn gimhāna(ṃ) māse, in a month of summer] of summer, summerly, the summer season A IV.138 (+hemanta & vassa); Sn 233 (gimhānamāse); VvA 40 (v. l.). On terms for seasons in gen. cp. Miln trsl. II.113. Gimhika {Gimhika} (adj. fr. gimha) summerly, relating to the summer, for the summer Vin I.15; D II.21 (+vassika & hemantika). Girā {Gira} [Vedic gir & gēr, song; gṛṇāti to praise, announce gūrti praise=Lat. grates "grace"; to *ger or *gÛer, see note on gala] utterance (orig. song, important utterance, still felt as such in older Pāli, therefore mostly poetical), speech, words D III.174; Sn 350, 632, 690, 1132; Dh 408; Th 2, 316, 402; Vv 5018 (=vācā VvA); Dhs 637, 720; DhsA 93; DA I.61 (aṭṭhangupetaṃ giraṃ), J II.134. Giri [Vedic giri, Obulg. gora mountain] a mountain; as a rule only in cpds, by itself (poetical) only at Vism 206 (in enumn of the 7 large mountains). -agga mountain top, in giraggasamajja N. of a festival celebrated yearly at Rājagaha, orig. a festival on the mountain top (cp. Dial. I.8 & Vin. Texts III.71). Vin II.107, 150; IV.85, 267; J III.538; DhA I.89. The BSk. version is girivaggu-samāgama AvŚ II.24; -kannikā (f.) N. of a plant (Clitoria ternatea) Vism 173; DhA I.383 (v. l. kaṇṇikā cp. Sk. °karnī;) -gabbhara=°guhā Sn 416; -guhā a mountain cleft, a rift, a gorge; always in formula pabbata kandara g°, therefore almost equivalent to kandara, a grotto or cave Vin II.146; D I.71= M I.269, 274, 346, 440=A II.210=Pug 59 (as giriṃ guhaṃ); A {Giri} Pāli Text Society 581 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.437; expl. at DA I.210: dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ ekasmiṃ yeva vā ummagga-sadisaṃ mahā-vivaraṃ; -bbaja (nt.) [Etym. uncertain, according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 79 to vaja "a pen," cp. Marāthī vraja "a station of cowherds," Hindi vraja "a cow-pen"; the Vedic giribhraj° (RV. X.68. 1) "aus Bergen hervorbrechend" (Roth) suggests relation to bhraj, to break=bhaðj=Lat. frango]=°guhā, a mountain cave or gorge, serving as shelter & hiding place J III.479 (trsl. by Morris loc. cit. a hill-run, a cattle-run on the hills); V.260 (sīhassa, a lion's abode) expld as kaðcanaguhā ibid. (for kandara-guhā? cp. Kern, Toev. p. 130). S II.185. Also N. for Rājagaha Sn 408; Dpvs V.5; in its Sk. form Girivraja, which Beal, Buddh. Records II.149 expls as "the hill-surrounded," cp. ib. II.158 (=Chin. Shan-Shing), 161; see also Cunningham, Ancient Geogr. 462. It does not occur in the Avadānas; -rājā king of the mountains, of Mount Sineru Miln 21, 224; -sikhara mountain top, peak VvA 4; (kañcana°, shining). Giriyā {Giriya} (pl.) in dhamma° & brahma°, a name of certain theatrical entertainers Miln 191. Gilati {Gilati} [Vedic girati & gilati Dhtp 488: adane; cp. gala throat, Ohg. kela, E. gullet; see note on gala] to swallow, to devour: mā Rāhu gilī caraṃ antalikkhe S I.51=VvA 116; mā gilī lohagulaṃ Dh 371; - J III.338; Miln 106. -pp. gilita: gilitabaḷisa having swallowed the hook S IV.159. Cp. ud°, o°, pari°; - Caus. gilāpeti to make swallow J III.338. Gilana {Gilana} (nt.) [fr. gilati] devouring, swallowing Miln 101. Gilāna {Gilana} (adj.) [Sk. glāna, glā to fade, wither, be exhausted, expld suitably by "hāsakkhaya" at Dhtp 439] sick, ill Vin I.51, 53, 61, 92, 142 sq., 176, 302 sq.; II.165, 227 sq.; IV.88, etc.; S V.80, 81 (bāḷha° very ill); A I.120=Pug 27; A III.38, 143 sq.; IV.333; V.72 sq.; J I.150; II.395; III.392; PvA 14; VvA 76. -ālaya pretence of illness J VI.262. -upaṭṭhāka (f. -ī) one who attends to the sick Vin I.92, 121 sq.; 142 sq.; 161, 303, A I.26; III.143 sq.; -°bhatta food for the attendant or nurse Vin I.292 sq.; -upaṭṭhāna tending or nursing the sick D III.191; -paccaya support or help for the sick PvA 144; usually with °bhesajja medicine for the sick in freq. formula of cīvarapiṇḍapāta° (the requisites of the bhikkhu): see cīvara; -pucchaka one who asks (i. e. enquires after) the sick Vin IV.88=115, 118; -bhatta food for the sick Vin I.142 sq.; 292 sq.; 303; Vism 66. -bhesajja medicine Vin I.292 sq.; -sālā a hall for the sick, hospital S IV.210; A III.142; Vism 259. Gilānaka {Gilanaka} (adj.) 1. ill (=gilāna) A III.142; - 2. fit for an illness (bhesajja medicine) Miln 74. Gilāyati {Gilayati} :see āgilāyati. Giha {Giha} [=gaha] only in agiha (adj.) houseless, homeless (=pabbajita, a Wanderer); poet. for anagāra Sn 456, 464, 487, 497. Gihin {Gihin} (adj.-n.) [fr. gaha, cp. gaha & geha; Sk. gṛhin] a householder, one who leads a domestic life, a layman (opp. pabbajita & paribbājaka). Geu. sg. gihissa (D III.147, 167) & gihino (D III.174); n. pl. gihī; in cpds. gihī° & gihi° (usually the latter). gihī agāraṃ ajjhāvasantā A I.49; gihī odātavasanā (clad in white robes as distinguished fr. kasāva-vasanā the yellowrobed i. e. bhikkhus) D I.211; III.117, 124, 210; M I.340; III.261; A I.74. - Contrasted with pabbajitā: A I.69; D III.147, 167, 179. gihī dhaððena dhanena vaḍḍhati D III.165. - Other passages in general: S II.120, 269; III.11; IV.180, 300 sq.; A II.65; 69 (kāmabhogī); IV.438 (do.); D III.124 (do.); A III.211 (sambodhiparāyano); IV.345 sq.; D III.167 sq.; 171 sq.; 176, 192; Sn 220, 221, 404; Dh 74; Miln 19, Pāli Text Society 582 Pāli-English Dictionary 264; DhA I.16 (gihīniyāma); Sdhp 376, 426; PvA 13 (gihīkālato paṭṭhāya from the time of our laymanship); DhA II.49 (id.). -kicca a layman's or householder's duties Pv IV.142 (=kuṭumbakiccāni PvA 240); -dhamma a layman's duty A III.41; -parisā a congregation of laymen S I.111; M I.373; A III.184; -bandhanāni (pl.) a layman's fetters Sn 44 (=Nd2 228 puttā ca dāsī dāsā ca, etc.); -byaðjanāni (pl.) characteristics of a layman, or of a man of the world (w. ref. to articles of dress & ornament) Sn 44, 64 (=Nd2 229); Miln 11; -bhūta as a householder D II.196; -bhoga riches of a worldly man S III.93; It 90; -linga characteristic of a layman DhA II.61. -saṃsagga association with laymen A III.116, 258; -saṃyojana the impediments of a householder (cp. °bandhanāni) M I.483; -sukha the welfare of a g. A I.80. Gīta {Gita} [pp. of gāyati] 1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapadaṃ gītaṃ pavuttaṃ D I.104 (cp. gira). - 2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd2 219; SnA 86. Usually combd with nacca, dancing: A I.261; Vv8110 as naca gītādi J I.61; VvA 131; referring to nacca-gīta-vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment D III.183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 324. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at D I.5≈(cp. DA I.77; KhA 36). -rava sound of song Mhvs VII.30; -sadda id. J IV.3; Dhs 621; DhA I.15; -ssara id. Vin II.108; A III.251; J III.188. Gītaka (nt.) & Gītikā (f.) {Gitaka} {Gitika} a little song J III.507. Gīvā {Giva} (f.) [Sk. grīvā, to *gÛer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.] the neck Sn 609; J I.74 (°ṃ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita°), 207, 222, 265; III.52; VvA 27 (mayūra°), 157; DA I.296 (°āya kuṇḍa-daṇḍaka-bandhana, as exhibition & punishment): similarly in the sense of "life" (hinting at decapitation) J II.300 (°ṃ karissāmi "I shall go for his neck"); IV.431=V.23. - Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat. Gīveyyaka {Giveyyaka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. graiveyaka] necklace, an ornament for the neck (orig. "something belonging to the neck," cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin I.287; A I.254 sq. (=Vism 247, where gīveyya only); 257; III.16; J IV.395 (gīveyya only); V.297; VI.590; VvA 104. Guggula {Guggula} [?] a kind of perfume J VI.537. Gucch° {Gucch°} in jigucchati (Des. of gup=Sk. jugupsate) to detest, see s. v. Guñjā {Gunja} (f.) a plant (Abrus precatorius); the redness of its berries is referred to in similes; DhA IV.133 (°vaṇṇāni akkhīni). See also jiðjuka. Guṇa1 {Guna} [Non-Aryan?] 1. a string, a cord - (a) of a robe, etc., in (kāya-bandhanaṃ) saguṇaṃ katvā to make tight by tying with a knot Vin I.46 (Vin. Texts: "laying the garments on top of each other," wrongly construed); II.213 (trsln. "folding his garments"); cp. guṇaka. - (b) of musical instruments Vin I.182=A III.375 (vīṇā)., - (c) of a bow, in aguna stringless J V.433 (dhanu).- 2. (a strand of a rope as) constituent part, ingredient, component, element; with numerals it equals -fold, e. g. paðca kāmaguṇā the 5 strands of kāma, or 5-fold craving (see kāma); ekaguṇaṃ once, diguṇaṃ twice Sn 714; diguṇaṃ nivāpaṃ pacitvā cooking a double meal VvA 63; catugguṇa fourfold, of a sanghāti D II.128; S II.221, cp. Rhys Davids, Dialogues II.145. aṭṭhaguṇa (hirañña) Th. 2, 153; aneka-bhāgena guṇena seyyo many times or infinitely better Pv IV.19; sataguṇena sahassa° 100 and 1,000 times PvA 41; asankheyyena guṇena Pāli Text Society 583 Pāli-English Dictionary infinitely, inconceivably Miln 106; sataguṇaṃ sahassaguṇaṃ Vism 126. - 3. (a part as) quality, esp. good quality, advantage, merit J I.266; II.112; III.55, 82. - lobha° Sn 663; sādhu° Sn 678; sīla° J I.213; II.112; Buddha° J II.111; pabbajita° J I.59. -aggatā state of having the best qualities, superiority Dpos IV.1. -aḍḍha rich in virtue Sdhp 312, 561. -upeta in khuppipāsāhi guṇûpeto as PvA 10 is to be read khuppipās'ābhibhūto peto. -kathā "tale of virtue," praise J I.307; II.2. kittana telling one's praises PvA 107, 120. -guṇika in phrase tantākulajāta g-g-jāta at S IV.158, see under guḷā-guṇṭhika. Guṇa2 {Guna} [for which often guḷa with common substitution of ḷ for ṇ, partly due to dissimilation, as mālāguḷa > mālāguṇa; cp. Sk. guṇikā tumour: guḷa and gaḷa, veḷu: veṇu, and note on gala] a ball, a cluster, a chain (?), in anta° the intestines; M I.185-, Kh 11., cp. KhA 57 for expln. - mālāguṇa a garland or chain (cluster) of flowers Dh 53 (but °guḷa at J I.73, 74). See guḷa3. Guṇa3 {Guna} [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. ghuna] a woodworm J III.431 (°pāṇaka). Guṇaka {Gunaka} (adj.) [to guḷa1, cp. guḷika?] having a knot at the end, thickened at the top (with ref. to kāyabandha, see guṇa 1a) Vin II.136, cp. Vin. Texts II.143. Guṇavant (adj.) [to guṇa1] possessed of good qualities, virtuous Pv II.971 (=jhān'ādiguṇa-yutta); PvA 62 (mahā°). {Gunavant} Guṇi {Guni} (f.) [of adj. guṇin, having guṇas or guḷas, i. e. strings or knots] a kind of armour J VI.449 (g. vuccate kavacaṃ C.); see Kern, Toev. p. 132. Guṇṭhika {Gunthika} (in meaning=guṇṭhita) one who is covered with or wrapped up in, only in ahi° a snake-trainer (like a Laocoon). See details under ahi or J II.267; III.348 (text: °guṇḍika); J IV.308 (ahi-kuṇḍika, v. l. SS guṇṭhika); IV.456 (text °guṇṭika; v. l. BB °kuṇḍika). Also in guḷāguṇṭhika (q. v.). Guṇṭhima {Gunthima} covered over (?), see pāli°. Guṇṭheti {Guntheti} [cp. Sk. guṇṭhayati Dhtp (563) & Dhtm (793) give both roots guṇṭh & guṇḍ as syn. of veṭh] to cover, to veil, to hide; pp. guṇṭhita in paṃsu° covered with dust Pv II.35 (in Hardy's conjecture for kuṇṭhita, q. v.). Also in cpd. paliguṇṭhita obstructed, entangled Sn 131 (mohena) where v. l. BB kuṇṭhita. Cp. o°. Guṇḍika {Gundika} see guṇṭhika. Gutta {Gutta} [Sk. gupta, pp. of gup in med.-pass. sense, cp. gopeti).- I. as pp. guarded, protected. - (a) lit. nagaraṃ guttaṃ a well-guarded city Dh 315=Th 1, 653, 1005; Devinda° protected by the Lord of gods Vv 308. - (b) fig. (med.) guarded, watchful, constrained; guarded in, watchful as regards . . . (with loc.) S IV.70 (agutta & sugutta, with danta, rakkhita); A III.6 (atta° selfcontrolled); Sn 250 (sotesu gutto+ vijitindriyo), 971 (id.+yatacārin); Dh 36 (cittaṃ). - II. as n. agent (=Sk. goptṛ, cp. kata in kāla-kata= kāḷaṃ kartṛ) one who guards or observes, a guardian, in Dhammassa gutta Dh 257, observer of the Norm (expl. DhA III.282: dhammojapaððāya samannāgata), cp. dhammagutta S I.222. -indriya one whose senses are guarded; with Pāli Text Society 584 Pāli-English Dictionary wellguarded senses Sn 63 (+rakkhita-mānasāno; expl. SnA: chassu indriyesu gopitindriyo); Nd2 230; Vv 5015; Pv IV.132; -dvāra "with guarded doors" always in combn with indriyesu g-d. having the doors of the senses guarded, practising. self-control D I.63≈(expld DA I.182 by pihita-dvāro), 70; S II.218; IV.103, 112, 119 sq., 175; Sn 413 (+susaṃvuta); Pug 24. Cp. foll.; dvāratā (f. abstr. to prec.) in indriyesu g° self constraint, control over (the doors of) one's senses, always combd with bhojane mattaððutā (moderation in taking food) D III.213; It 24; Pug 20, 24; Dhs 1347; PvA 163. Opp. a° lack of sense-control D III.213; It 23; Dhs 1345. Gutti {Gutti} (f.) [Vedic gupti] protection, defence, guard; watchfulness. - (a) lit. of a city A IV.106 sq. - (b) fig. of the senses in indriyānaṃ gutti Dh 375; Pug 24 (+gopanā); Dhs 1348; Sdhp 341 (agutti); Vin IV.305; A II.72 (atta°); also in pl.: guttīsu ussuka keen in the practice of watchfulness D III.148. Guttika {Guttika} [fr. last] a guardian, one who keeps watch over, in nagara° the town-watchman, the chief-constable PvA 4; Miln 345. Gumpha {Gumpha} see ogumpheti. Gumba {Gumba} [Sk. gulma, *glem to *gel, to be thick, to conglomerate, cp. Lat. glomus (ball), globus, etc. See guḷa] 1. a troop, a heap, cluster, swarm. Of soldiers: Vin I.345; of fish (maccha°) D I.84=M I.279=II.22= A I.9. - 2. a thicket, a bush, jungle; the lair of an animal in a thicket (sayana° J IV.256) S III.6 (eḷagalā°); J III.52 (nivāsa°, vasana°); VvA 301 (gaccha° underwood); J I.149, 167; II.19; III.55; IV.438; VvA 63, 66. Cp. pagumba=gumba, in vana° Sn 233 (see KhA 192). veḷu° Th 1,919.- Acc. gumbaṃ (adv.) thickly, in masses balled together Miln 117 (of clouds). antara thicket VvA 233. Gumbiya {Gumbiya} (adj.) [fr. gumba] one of the troop (of soldiers) Vin I.345. Guyha {Guyha} [ger. of guh=Vedic guhya] 1. adj. to be hidden, hidden in °bhaṇḍaka the hidden part (of the body) DhA IV.197. - 2. (nt.) that which is hidden; lit. in vattha° hidden by the dress, i. e. the pudendum D I.106; Sn 1022, etc. (see vattha), fig. a secret Miln 92; guyhaṃ pariguyhati to keep a secret A IV.31; Nd2 510. Guru {Guru} (adj.-n.) [a younger form of garu (q. v.); Sk. guru] venerable, reverend, a teacher VvA 229, 230 (°dakkhiṇā a teacher's fee); PvA 3 (°janā venerable persons); Sdhp 227 (°ûpadesa), 417. Guḷa1 {Gula} [Sk. guḍa and gulī ball, guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour; to *gleu to make into a ball, to conglomerate. Cp. Sk. glauḥ ball; Gr. glouto/s; Ohg. chliuwa; Ger. kugel, kloss; E. clot, cleat; also *gel with same meaning: Sk. gulma tumour, gilāyu glandular swelling; cp. Lat. glomus, globus; Ger. klamm; E. clamp, clump. A root guḷ is given by Dhtp 576,77 in meaning of "mokkha"] a ball, in cpds. sutta° a ball of string (=Ohg. chliuwa) D I.54=; M III.95; PvA 145; ayo° an iron globe Dh 308; DA I.84; loha° of copper Dh 371; sela° a rockball, i. e. a heavy stone-ball J I.147. -kīḷā play at ball DhA I.178; III.455; IV.124. -parimaṇḍala the circumference of a ball, or (adj.) round, globular, like a ball PvA 253. Pāli Text Society 585 Pāli-English Dictionary Guḷa2 {Gula} (Non-Aryan?] sugar, molasses Vin I.210, 224 sq., 245. - saguḷa sugared, sweet, or "with molasses" J VI.324 (saguḷāni, i. e. saguḷa-pūve pancakes). -āsava sugar-juice VvA 73. odaka s. -water Vin I.226. -karaṇa a sugar factory ibid. 210. -pūvaka sweet cake Mhvs 10. 3. phāṇita molasses VvA 179. Guḷa3 {Gula} [for guṇa2, due to distance dissimilation in maṇiguṇa and mālāguṇa>maṇigula and mālāgula; cp. similarly in meaning and form Ohg. chliuwa>Ger. knäuel] a cluster, a chain (?), in maṇi° a cluster of jewels, always in simile with ref. to sparkling eyes "maniguḷa-sadisāni akkhīni" J I.149; III.126, 184 (v. l. BB °guḷika); IV.256 (v. l. id.); mālā° a cluster, a chain of flowers, a garland J I.73, 54; puppha° id. Dh. 172, 233. Guḷā {Gula} (f.) [to guḷa1] a swelling, pimple, pustule, blight, in cpd. guḷā-guṇṭhika-jāta D II.55, which is also to be read at A II.211 (in spite of Morris, prelim. remarks to A II.4, whose trsln. is otherwise correct)=guḷā -gunṭḥita covered with swellings (i. e. blight); cp. similar expression at DhA III.297 gaṇḍāgaṇḍa (-jāta) "having become covered all over with pustules (i. e. rash)." All readings at corresp. passages are to be corrected accordingly, viz., S II.92 (guḷigandhika°); IV.158 (guṇaguṇika°); the reading at Dpvs XII.32, also v. l. SS at A II.211, is as quoted above and the whole phrase runs: tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajātā "entangled like a ball of string and covered with blight." Guḷika {Gulika} (adj.) [to guḷa3=guṇa, cp. also guṇaka] like a chain, or having a chain, (nt. & f.) a cluster, a chain in maṇi° a string of jewels, a pearl necklace J III.184 (v. l. BB for °guḷa); IV.256; Vism 285 (+muttā-guḷikā). Guḷikā {Gulika} (f.) [to guḷa1; cp. Sk. guṭikā pill, guṇikā tumour] a little ball S V.462 (sattakolaṭṭhi-mattiyo guḷikā, pl.); Th 2, 498 (kolaṭṭhimatta g° balls of the size of a jujube), cp. ThA 289. Guhanā {Guhana} (f. abstr. to gūhati) hiding, concealing, keeping secret Vbh 358 (+pariguhanā). Also as gūhanā, q. v. Guhā {Guha} (f.) [Vedic guhā, guh, gūhati to hide (q. v.) Dhtp 337: saṃvaraṇa] a hiding place, a cave, cavern (cp. kandara & see giriguhā); fig. the heart (in °āsaya). According to Bdhgh. (on Vin I.58, see Vin. Texts I.174) "a hut of bricks, or in a rock, or of wood." Vin I.58, 96, 107, 239, 284; II.146; III.155; IV.48 (cp. sattapaṇṇi-guhā); Sn 772, 958; J II.418; VI.574; Vv 5016. -āsaya hiding in the heart; or the shelter of the heart A IV.98 (maccupāso+); J V.367 (id.); Dh 37 (cittaṃ; see DhA I.304). Gū {Gu} (-°) [fr. gam, cp. °ga] going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha°, anta°, chanda°, dhamma°, paṭṭha°, pāra, veda°. Gūtha {Gutha} [Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] excrements, fæces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin I.206 e. g.). Often combn with mutta (urine): Pv I.91; PvA 45, 78; DA I.198. -kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin IV.265. -kalala dung & mire J III.393; -kīḷana playing with excrements Vism 531. -kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) M I.74; Sn 279; Pv II.316; Pug 36; J VI.370; Vism 54. -khādaka living on fæces J II.211 (°pāṇaka) 586 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary PvA 266; -gata having turned to dung It 90; -gandhin smelling of excrements Pv II.315; -ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Th 1, 1153; -naraka=foll. Vism 501; -niraya the mirepurgatory VvA 226; Sdhp 194; -pāṇa an insect living on excrement (=°khādakapāṇa) J II.209, 212; -bhakkha feeding on stercus M III.168; PvA 192; DhA II.61; -bhānin of foul speech A I.128; Pug 29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa°?). Gūthaka {Guthaka} "a sort of gūtha," excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi° and kaṇṇa° (of eye & ear) Sn 197 (cp. SnA 248; Vism 345 sq.). Gūḷha & Gūḷhaka {Gulha} {Gulhaka} (adj.) [pp. of gūhati] hidden, secret Vin II.98 (gūḷha-ko salākagāho). Gūhati {Guhati} [Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.] to hide, to conceal. See paṭi°, pari°. Caus. gūhayati Sdhp 189 (gūhayaṃ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha. Gūhana {Guhana} (nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp 65 (laddhi°-citta). Gūhanā {Guhana} (f.) [abstr. fr. gūhati]=gūhanā (q. v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari°. Geṇḍuka {Genduka} a ball for playing. The SS spelling is in all places bheṇḍuka, which has been taken into the text by the editors of J. and DhsA. The misspelling is due to a misreading of Singhalese bh>g; cp. spelling parābhetvā for parāgetvā. - bheṇḍukena kīḷi J IV.30; bhūmiyaṃ pahata-bheṇḍuka (striking against the ground) J IV.30; Vism 143 (pahaṭa-citra°)=DhsA 116 (where wrongly pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka); J V.196 (citra-bh°); DhA III.364. Gedha1 {Gedha} [Vedic gṛdhyā, cp. gijjhati] greed. Its connection with craving and worldly attachment is often referred to. Kāmesu g° S I.73; Sn 152; A III.312 sq. (gedho: paðcann'etaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ). gedhataṇhā S I.15 (v. l. kodha°); Sn 65, 945, 1098; Th 2, 352; Nd2 231; Dhs 1059 (under lobha), 1136; Nett 18; DhA I.366; PvA 107. -agedhatā freedom from greed Miln 276. - See also gedhi & paligedha. Gedha2 {Gedha} [=geha? Kern] a cave A I.154=III.128 (the latter passage has rodha, cp. v. l. under gedhi). Gedhi {Gedhi} [Sk. gṛdhi, cp. gedha] greed, desire, jealousy, envy: gedhiṃ karoti (c. loc.) to be desirous after M I.330. -gedhikata in °citta (adj.) jealous, envious, ibid. As gedhikatā (f.) vanity, greed, conceit Nd2 585 (v. l. rodhigatā). Gedhita {Gedhita} [pp. of gijjhati] greedy, in gedhita-mano greedyminded Pv II.82; as nt. greed, in der. gedhifatta (syn. of gedhikatā) Nd2 585. Geyya {Geyya} (nt.) [grd. of gāyati, Sk. geya] a certain style of Buddhist literature consisting of mixed prose & verse. It is only found in the ster. enum of the Scriptures in their ninefold division, beginning suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ. See under navanga. Geruka {Geruka} (nt.) & gerukā (f.) [Sk. gairika] yellow ochre (Bdhgh suvaṇṇa° cp. Sk. kañcana° & svarṇa°), red chalk used as colouring Vin I.203; II.151; A I.210; Miln 133 (°cuṇṇa). Freq. in Pāli Text Society 587 Pāli-English Dictionary °parikamma a coating of red chalk, red colouring Vin II.117, 151, 172; °parikammakata "coated with red colouring" Vin I.48; II.218. Gelañña {Gelanna} (nt.) [n-abstr. fr. gilāna] sickness, illness D II.99; A I.219; III.298; IV.333 sq.; Vism 321, 466, 478. Geha {Geha} (nt.) [Sk. geha=gṛha, to gṛh, gaṇhāti; cp. gaha, gihin, ghara; see also gedha2] a dwelling, hut, house; the household J I.145, 266, 290; II.18, 103, 110, 155 VI.367; Vism 593; PvA 22, 62, 73, 82; fig. of kāya (body) Th 1, 184=Dh 154. - Appld to a cowshed at Miln 396. -angana the open space in front of the house VvA 6; -jana (sg. collective) the members of the household, the servants PvA 16, 62, 93; -jhāpana incendiarism Vism 326. -ṭṭhāna a place for a dwelling DhA III.307; -dvāra the house door PvA 61; -nissita (adj.) concerning the house, connected with (the house and) worldly life Sn 280 (pāpiccha); It 117 (vitakka); cp. °sita; patana the falling of the house J III.118. -pavesana (-mangala) (the ceremony of) entering a new hut DhA III.307; -piṭṭhi the back of the house PvA 78; -rakkhika keeping (in the) house, staying at home VvA 76 (dārakā); -vigata (nt.) the resources of the house, worldly means, riches Th 2, 327 (=upakaraṇa ThA 234); -sita (*śrita)=°nissita, connected with worldly life (opp. nekkhamma, renunciation). Of chandā & vitakkā (pl.) M I.123; domanassa & somanassa (grief & pleasure) S IV.232=Miln 45; Vbh 381; DhsA 194; dhammā, etc. S IV.71; Vbh 380; Nett 53. Go {Go} (m.-f.) [Vedic go, Lat. bos, Gr. bou_s, Ohg. chuo, Ags. cū=E. cow] a cow, an ox, bull, pl. cattle. For f. cp. gāvī; see also gava° for cpds. - Sg. nom. go (Sn 580, also in composition, cp. aja-go-mahisādi PvA 80=pasū); gen. gavassa (M I.429); instr. gavena, gāvena; acc. gavaṃ, gāvan; abl. gavamhā, gavā (D I.201=A II.95= Pug 69); loc. gavamhi, gāvimhi (SnA 323), gave (Sn 310). - Pl. nom. gāvo (D I.141; M I.225; A I.205; II.42 sq.; Sn 20, 296, 307; J I.295); gen. gonaṃ A II.75 (cp. Vedic gonām), gavaṃ (J IV.172, cp. gavaṃ pati), gunnaṃ (A I.229, II.75; V.271; J I.194; III.112; IV.223); instr. gohi (Sn 33); acc. gāvo (M I.225; A I.205; Sn 304; Dh 19, 135); abl. gohi; loc. gosu, gavesu. - See also gava, gavesati, goṇa. -kaṇṭaka the hoof of an ox, in °haṭā bhūmi, trampled by the feet of cattle Vin I.195; A I.136 (cp. Vin. Texts II.34); -kaṇṇa a large species of deer J V.406 (=gaṇin), 416 (khagga+); DhsA 331 (gavaya+); cp. next; -kāṇā (f.) =gokaṇṇa D III.38=53; -kula (nt.) a cow pen, a station of cattle S IV.289; -gaṇa a herd of cattle M I.220; A I.229; J II.127; DhA I.175; VvA 311; -ghaṃsikā a cow-hide (?). Vin II.117 (cp. Vin. Texts III.98); ghātaka one who kills cows, a butcher D II.294 (in simile); M I.58, 244, 364 (°sūnā, slaughterhouse); S II.255; IV.56; A III.302, 380; J V.270; Vism 348 (in simile). -cara I. Lit. A. (noun-m.) pasture, lit. "a cow's grazing," search after food; fodder, food, subsistence (a) of animals: J I.221; III.26; Dh 135 (daṇḍena gopālo gāvo pāceti gocaraṃ: with a stick the cowherd drives the cattle to pasture). Sīho gocarāya pakkamati "the lion goes forth for his huut" A II.33= III.121; gocarāya gacchati to go feeding, to graze Sn 39; J I.243; gocare carati to go feeding, to feed J I.242.- (b) metaph. of persons, esp. the bhikkhu: pucchitabba gocara (and agocara) "enquiries have to be made concerning the fitness or otherwise of his pasturage (i. e. the houses in which he begs for food)" Vin II.208; samaṇo gocarato nivatto an ascetic returned from his "grazing" Pv IV.142: Similarly at Vism 127, where a suitable g.-gama ranks as one of the 7 desiderata for one intent on meditation. - B. (adj.) (-°) feeding on or in, living in; metaph. dealing with, mixing with. vana° living in the woods Pv II.65; vāri° (in water) Sn 605; jala° (id.) J II.158 (opp. thala°). Vesiyā° (etc.) associating with v. Vin I.70. - II. Applied. A. (noun-m. or nt.) a "field" (of sense perception, etc.), sphere, object; -° food for, an object of (a) psychologically indriyānaṃ nānāgocarāni various spheres of sense-perception S V.218; sense-object (=ārammaṇaṃ) Ps I.180; II.97; 150 sq.; DhsA 314, 315 (sampatta° physical contact with an Pāli Text Society 588 Pāli-English Dictionary object, gandha° smell-contact, i. e. sensation); indriya° Sdhp 365. - (b) ethically: ariyānaṃ gocare ratā "finding delight in the pasture of the good," walking in the ways of the good Dh 22; vimokho yesaṃ gocaro "whose pasture is liberty" Dh 92=Th 1, 92. Esp. in phrase ācāragocara-sampanna "pasturing in the field of good conduct" D I.63=It 118; M I.33; S V.187; It. 96; analysed as Dvandva cpd. at Vbh 246, 247, but cp. pāpācāra-gocara Sn 280, 282. This phrase (ācāra-gocara) is also discussed in detail at Vism 19, where 3 kinds of gocarā are distinguished, viz. upanissaya°, ārakkha°, upanibandha°. So also in contrast w. agocara, an unfit pasture, or an unfit, i. e. bad, sphere of life, in gocare & agocare carati to move in a congenial or uncongenial sphere A III.389; IV.345 sq.; D III.58=77; S V.147; Vbh 246, 247 (expl. w. vesiyā° etc., cp. above=having bad associations). - B. (adj.) -°: belonging to, dependent on, falling to the share of: eta° dependent on this M I.319; sattasaddhamma°, moving in the sphere of the seven golden rules S III.83; rūpa° to be perceived by sight J I.396; Nibbāna° belonging to N. Sdhp 467. -°kusala (adj.) skilled in (finding proper) food; clever in right living -° behaving properly in, exercising properly M I.220=A V.347 (of a cowherd driving out his cattle); S III.266 sq. (samādhi°); A III.311 (do.) V.352 sq. (w. ref. to cattāro satipaṭṭhānā); °gahaṇa the taking of food, feeding J I.242; -°gāma a village for the supply of food (for the bhikkhus) PvA 12, 42; -°ṭṭhāna pasturage J III.52; -°pasuta intent on feeding J III.26; -°bhūmi pasturage, a common DhA III.60; -°visaya (the sphere of) an object of sense S V.218; Vbh 319; caraṇa pasturing J VI.335; -ṭṭha (nt.) [Sk. goṣṭha to sthā to stand; cp. Lat. stabulum, stable; super-stes; Goth. awistr] a cow-stable, cow-pen M I.79; J IV.223; -pa [Sk. gopa, cp. gopati] a cowherd, herdsman Sn 18; Dh 19; J IV.364 (a robber); Vism 166 (in simile); DhA 157, f. gopī Sn 22, 32; -pakhuma (adj.) having eyelashes like a heifer D II.18; III.144, 167 sq.; VvA 162, 279 (=āḷārapamha); -pada a cow's footprint, a puddle A III.188; IV.102; Miln 287; also °padaka A III.188 v. l.; DA I.283; -pariṇāyaka leader of the cows, Ep. of a bull (gopitā+) M I.220, 225; -pāla a cowherd (usually as °ka) Dh 135; -pālaka=prec. Vin I.152, 243 sq.; M I.79, 115 sq., 220=A V.347; M I.333; S IV.181; A I.205 (-°uposatha); Miln 18, 48; Vism 279 (in comparison); DhA III.59; -pitā "father (protector) of the cows"=gavaṃ pati, Ep. of a bull M I.220 (+°pariṇāyaka); -pī f. of gopa, q. v.; -pura (nt.) [Sk. gopura] the gate of a city J VI.433; Miln 1, 67, 330; Bdhd 138; -balivadda in °nayena; in the expression gobalivadda (black-cattle-bull) i. e. by an accumulation of words VvA 258; -bhatta cows'fodder J IV.67; -maṇḍala ox-beat, ox-round, Cp. III.151 (as gā°), quoted J I.47 (cp. assa-m°); SnA 39; also in phrase °paribbūḷha Sn 301 (expld by SnA 320 as goyūthehi parikiṇṇa); J VI.27; at M I.79 however it means the cowherds or peasants (see note M I.536: gopāladārakā or gāmadārakā to v. l. gāmaṇḍala) cp. gāmaṇḍala; -maya (m. nt.) cowdung M I.79; A I.209, 295; V.234, 250, 263 sq.; Nett 23; DhA I.377. -°pāṇaka a coprophagan, dor beetle J II.156; -°piṇda a lump of cowdung J I.242; -°bhakkha eating cowdung D I.166≈; -māyu a jackal Pgdp 49; -mutta (and °ka) a precious stone of light red colour VvA III; DhsA 151; medaka=gomuttaka VvA 111.; -medha a cow sacrifice, in °yañña SnA 323; -yūtha a herd of cows SnA 322; DhA I.323; -rakkhā (f.) cow-keeping, tending cattle, usually combd with kasī, agriculturing M I.85; Pv I.56; J I.338; II.128; given as a superior profession (ukkaṭṭha-kamma) Vin IV.6. -ravaka the bellowing of a cow M I.225; -rasa (usually pl.) produce of the cow, enumd in set of five, viz. khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi (milk, cream, buttermilk, butter, ghee) Vin I.244; DhA I.158, 323, 397; VvA 147; SnA 322; -rūpa (collect.) cattle J I.194; IV.173; Miln 396 (bull); -lakkhaṇa fortune telling from cows D I.9≈; -vaccha (khīra° & takka°) Vism 28. -vatika [Sk. govratin] one who lives after the mode of cows, of bovine practices M I.387; Nett 99 (cp. govata DhsA 355, and Dhs. trsl. p. 261); -vikattana (and °vikantana; Sk. vikṛntana) a butcher's knife M I.244, 449; A III.380 Sdhp 381 (vikatta only); -vittaka one whose wealth is cattle J I.191; -vinda the supt. of cowherds A III.373; -sappi ghee from cow's milk Vin III.251; DhsA 320; -sālā cow-stable A I.188; -singa a cow's horn Vism 254. -sita mixed with milk VvA 179; sīla=govatika DhsA 355; -sīsa (nt.) an excellent kind of sandal wood PvA 215 (cp. Sp. AvS I.67, Pāli Text Society 589 Pāli-English Dictionary 68, 109); -hanuka the jaw bone of a cow, in °ena koṭṭāpeti (koṭṭh° J) to massage with a cow's jaw bone Vin II.266, J IV.188; V.303. Goṭaviya {Gotaviya} (goṭavisa Text) v. l. J VI.225, part of a boat, the poop (expl. ib. p. 226 by nāvāya pacchimabandho). Goṭhaphala {Gothaphala} a medicinal seed [Sk. gotravṛkṣa? Kern] Vin I.201. Goṇa1 {Gona} [The Sanskrit goṇa, according to B. R., is derived from the Pali] an ox, a bullock S IV.195 sq.; J I.194; IV.67; Pv I.82; PvA 39, 40; VvA 63 (for ploughing); DA I.163; DhA III.60. -°sira wild ox J VI. 538(=araññagoṇaka). Goṇa2 {Gona} =goṇaka2, in °santhata (of a pallanka), covered with a woollen rug Vv 818; Pv III.117; (text saṇṭhita; v. l. BB goṇakatthata, cp. next). Goṇaka1 {Gonaka} [goṇa1] a kind of ox, a wild bull J VI.538 (arañña°). Goṇaka2 {Gonaka} [Sk. BSk. goṇika, cp. Pischel, Beitr. III.236; also spelled gonaka] a woollen cover with long fleece (DA I.86: dīghalomako mahākojavo; caturangulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni) D I.7≈; S III.144; J V.506; Pv II.128; Th 2, 378 (+tūlika); ThA 253 (=dīgha-lomakāḷakojava). -°atthata spread w. a goṇaka-cover A I.137= III.50=IV.394; cp. IV.94, 231 (always of a pallanka), See also goṇa2. Goṇisādika {Gonisadika} an ox-stall Vin I.240; cp. Vin. Texts II.121. As gonisādi Vin III.46. Gotta {Gotta} (nt.) [Vedic gotra, to go] ancestry, lineage. There is no word in English for gotta. It includes all those descended, or supposed to be descended, from a common ancestor. A gotta name is always distinguished from the personal name, the name drawn from place of origin or residence, or from occupation, and lastly from the nick-name. It probably means agnate rather than cognate. About a score of gotta names are known. They are all assigned to the Buddha's time. See also Rh. D. Dialogues I.27, 195 sq. -jāti gotta lakkhaṇa Sn 1004; gotta salakkhaṇa Sn 1018; Ādiccā nāma gottena, Sākiyā nāma jātiyā Sn 423; jāti gotta kula J II.3; jātiyā gottena bhogena sadisa "equal in rank, lineage & wealth" DhA II.218. - evaṃ-gotta (adj.) belonging to such & such an ancestry M I.429; II.20, 33; kathaṃ° of what lineage, or: what is your family name? D I.92; nānā° (pl.) of various families Pv II.916. - With nāma (name & lineage, or nomen et cognomen): nāmagottaṃ Vin I.93; II.239; D I.92 (expl. at DA I.257: paññatti-vasena nāmaṃ paveṇi-vasena gottaṃ: the name for recognition, the surname for lineage); Sn 648; Vv 8445 (with nāma & nāmadheyya; expl. at VvA 348- 349: nāmadheyya, as Tisso, Phusso, etc.; gotta, as Bhaggavo Bhāradvājo, etc.). - gottena by the ancestral name: Vin I.93; D II.154; Sn 1019; Dh 393; gottato same J I.56. Examples: Ambaṭṭha Kaṇhāyana-gottena D I.92; Vipassī Koṇḍaððo g°; Kakusandho Kassapo g°; Bhagavā Gotamo g° D II.3; Nāgito Kassapo g° DA I.310; Vasudevo Kaṇho g° PvA 94. -thaddha conceited as regards descent (+jāti° & dhana°) Sn 104; -pañha question after one's family name Sn 456; -paṭisārin (adj.) relying on lineage D I.99 (cp. Dialogues I.122); A V.327 sq.; -bandhava connected by family ties (ðāti°+) Nd2 455; -rakkhita protected by a (good) name Sn 315; VvA 72; -vāda talk over lineage, boasting as regards descent D I.99. Pāli Text Society 590 Pāli-English Dictionary Gottā {Gotta} [n. ag. to gopeti=Sk. goptṛ] f. gottī protectress J V.329. Gotrabhū {Gotrabhu} "become of the lineage"; a technical term used from the end of the Nikāya period to designate one, whether layman or bhikkhu, who, as converted, was no longer of the worldlings (puthujjanā), but of the Ariyas, having Nibbāna as his aim. It occurs in a supplementary Sutta in the Majjhima (Vol. III. 256), and in another, found in two versions, at the end of the Anguttara (A IV.373 and V.23). Defined at Pug 12, 13 & Vism 138; amplified at Ps I.66-68, frequent in P (Tikap. 154 sq., 165, 324 etc.), mentioned at VvA 155. On the use of gotrabhū in medieval psychology see Aung, in Compendium, 66-68. Comp. the use of upanissaya at J I.235. - °ðāṇa, PPA 184; Vism 673. Ā° Vism 683. Godhaka {Godhaka} a kind of bird J VI.358. Godharaṇī {Godharani} (f.-adj.) being able to be paired (of a young cow), or being with calf (?) Sn 26. Godhā1 (f.) [Sk. godhā] iguana, a large kind of lizard Vin I.215-16 (°mukha); D I.9≈(°lakkhaṇa, cp. DA I.94); J II.118; III.52; 538; DhA III.420. As godha (m.) at J V.489. Dimin. golikā at J II.147. {Godha} Godhā2 {Godha} (f.) string of a lute J VI.580 (cp. RV. 8, 58, 9). Godhūma {Godhuma} wheat (usually mentioned with yava, spelt) Miln 267; DA I.163; SnA 323. See dhañña. Gopaka {Gopaka} a guardian, watchman DA I.148; cp. khetta°. Gopanā {Gopana} (f.) protecting, protection, care, watchfulness (cp. gutti) Pug 24 (+gutti) Dhs 1347; Miln 8, 243. Gopānasī {Gopanasi} (f.) a beam supporting the framework of a roof, shaped *l; fig. of old people, bent by age (see °vanka). Vin III.65, 81; S II.263; III.156; V.43, 228; M I.80; A I.261; III.364; V.21; Vism 320; DhA II.190; VvA 188. -gaṇā (pl.) a collection of beams, the rafters Vv 784; -bhogga (sama) bent like a rafter (nārī) J III.395; -vanka (gopānasi°) as crooked as a rafter (of old people, cp. BSk. gopānasī-vakra AvŚ II.25n5) S I.117; M I.88; A I.138. Gopita {Gopita} (adj.) [pp. of gopeti] protected, guarded, watched (lit. & fig.) J VI.367; Miln 345; SnA 116 (°indriya= guttindriya); Sdhp 398. Gopeti {Gopeti} [Sk. gopayati, gup; cp. gutta, gottā] to watch, guard, pot. gopetha Dh 315; - pp. gopita (q. v.). Gopphaka {Gopphaka} [Dem. of goppha=Sk. gulpha] the ankle Vin IV.112; A IV.102; J V.472; DhA II.80, 214; SnA II.230. Gomika {Gomika} [Sk. gomin] an owner of cows S I.6=Sn 33, 34. Pāli Text Society 591 Pāli-English Dictionary Golikā {Golika} see godhā1. Golomika {Golomika} (adj.) [inverted diæretic form fr. Sk. gulma=P. gumba: viz. *golmika>*golmika>golomika] like a cluster; in phrase massuṃ golomikaṃ kārāpeti "to have the beard trimmed into a ball- or cluster-shape" Vin II.134. Bdhgh's expln "like a goat's beard" (cp. Vin. Texts III.138) is based on pop. etym. go+loma+ ika "cow-hair-like," the discrepancy being that go does not mean goat. Goḷaka {Golaka} a ball ThA 255 (kīḷā°). 592 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Gh °Gha {°Gha} (adj.-suffix to ghan) killing, destroying, see hanati. - iṇagha at Sn 246 is v. l. SS for iṇaghāta. Cp. paṭi° & see also ghana2 & ghāta. Ghaṃsati1 {Ghamsati} [Sk. gharṣati, *ghṛṣ to *gher to rub or grind, cp. Gr. xe/rados, xerma/s, xri/w, enlarged in Lat. frendo= Ags. grindan to grind] to rub, crush, grind, S II.238; J I.190 (=ghasituṃ? to next?) 216; VI.331. - Caus. ghaṃsāpeti to rub against, to allow to be rubbed or crushed Vin II.266. Cp. upani°, pari°, & pahaṃsati1. - Pass. ghaṃsīyati (ghaṃsiyati) to rub (intr.), to be rubbed Vin I.204; II.112. Ghaṃsati2 {Ghamsati} [=haṃsati for Sk. haṛsati, see haṃsati] to be pleased, to rejoice J IV.56 (v. l. ghasati). Cp. pahaṃsati2. Ghaṃsana {Ghamsana} rubbing, in pāda-gh °ī a towel for rubbing the feet Vin II.130. Ghaṃsikā {Ghamsika} in go°, cow-hide (?) see go. Ghaccā {Ghacca} (f.) [fr. hanati, han and ghan] destruction (usually -°) D III.67 (mūla°); J I.176 (sakuṇa°). Ghañña {Ghanna} (adj.-n.) [fr. Sk. ghana to han, cp. ghānya & hatya] killing, destroying (-°) see atta°. Ghaṭa1 {Ghata} [Non-Aryan?] a hollow vessel, a bowl, vase, pitcher. Used for holding water, as well as for other purposes, which are given under pānīya° paribhojana° vacca° at Vin I.157=352=M I.207. In the Vinaya freq. combd with kolamba, also a deep vessel: I.209, 213, 225, 286. - As water-pitcher: J I.52, 93 (puṇṇa°), 166; VvA 118, 207, 244 (°satena nhāto viya); PvA 66 (udaka°), 179 (pānīya°), 282. - In general: S IV.196. For holding a light (in formula antoghaṭe padīpo viya upanissayo pajjalati) J I.235 (cp. kuṭa), PvA 38. Used as a drum J VI.277 (=kumbhathūna); as bhadda° Sdhp 319, 329. -pamāṇa (adj.) of the size of a large pot J II.104; PvA 55. Ghaṭa2 {Ghata} (m. & f.) [Sk. ghaṭā; conn. with ganthati to bind together] multitude, heap, crowd, dense mass, i. e. thicket, cluster. itthi° a crowd of women J IV.316; maccha° a swarm of fish J II.227; vana° dense forest J II.385; IV.56; V.502; VI.11, 519, 564; brahma° company of brahmins J VI.99. Ghaṭaka [Dem. of prec.] 1. a small jar (?) Vin II.129, 130 (combd w. kataka & sammajjanī); cp. Vin. Texts III.130. - 2. the capital of a pillar J I.32 (cp. kumbha). {Ghataka} Ghaṭati {Ghatati} [Sk. ghaṭate, to granth, cp. ganthati. The Dhtp gives two roots ghaṭ, of which one is expld by "ghāṭane" (No. 554), the other by "īhāyaṃ," i. e. from exertion (No. 98)] to apply oneself to, to exert oneself, to strive; usually in formula uṭṭhahati gh° vāyamati M I.86; S I.267 (yamati for vāy°); Pug 51; or yuðjati gh° vāy° J IV.131. - Sdhp 426, 450. Pāli Text Society 593 Pāli-English Dictionary Ghaṭana {Ghatana} see Ghaṭṭana. Ghaṭikā1 {Ghatika} (f.) [to ghaṭa1] a small bowl, used for begging alms Th 2, 422 (=ThA 269: bhikkhā-kapāla). Ghaṭikā2 {Ghatika} (f.) [to ghaṭa2, orig. meaning "knot," cp. gantha & gaṇṭhi, also gaṇḍa] 1. a small stick, a piece of a branch, a twig J I.331; IV.87 (khadira°); VI.331; Th 2, 499 (=khaṇḍa ThA 290). upadhānaghaṭikā J III.179 (belonging to the outfit of an executioner); pāsa° J II.253 is a sort of magic stick or die (=pāsaka) - 2. a game of sticks ("tip-cat" sticks Miln trsl. II.32). D I.6≈(DA I.85: ghaṭikā ti vuccati dīgha-daṇḍakena rassa daṇḍaka-paharaṇa kīḷā, tip-cat); Vin II.10; III.181; M I.266; A V.203; Miln 229. - 3. a stack of twigs S II.178, 4; (a stick used as) a bolt Vin II.120, 208; III.119; usually as sūci° a needle-shaped stick Vin II.237 (cp. Vin. Texts III.106); S IV.290; Ud 52; J I.346. Cp. gaṇḍikādhāna. Ghaṭita {Ghatita} [pp. of ghaṭeti] connected, combined Vism 192. Ghaṭī {Ghati} (f.) [to ghaṭa1] a jar DhA I.426. In cpds. also ghaṭi°. -odana rice boiled in a jar DhA I.426; -kaṭāha a water pot, or rather a bowl for gathering alms (cp. ghaṭikā1) Vin II.115 (=ghaṭi-kapāla Bdhgh); -kāra a potter DhA I.380; Np. of a kumbhakāra S I.35, 60; M II.45 sq. (=°suttanta, mentioned as such at DhA III.251); J I.43. Ghaṭīyati {Ghatiyati} [Pass. of ghaṭeti] 1. to be connected or continued DhA I.46 (paveṇī na gh.), 174. - 2. to be obstructed Nd2 102 (=virujjhati, paṭihaññati). Ghaṭeti {Ghateti} [Denom. fr. ghaṭa2, cp. gantheti] to join, to connect, to unite J I.139; freq. in anusandhiṃ ghaṭetvā adding the connection (between one rebirth & another) J I.220, 308. Ghaṭṭa {Ghatta} see araghaṭṭa; meaning "rubbed, knocked against" in phrase ghaṭṭa-pāda-tala SnA 582 (for ugghaṭṭha); also at Vin IV.46 in def. of vehāsa-kuṭī (a cell or hut with air, i. e., spacious, airy) as majjhimassa purisassa a-sīsa-ghaṭṭā "so that a man of medium height does not knock his head (against the ceiling)"; of uncertain meaning ("beating"?) at J I.454 (v. l. for T. ghota). Ghaṭṭana {Ghattana} (nt.) [Sk. ghaṭana, to granth, cp. gantha] 1. combining, putting together, combination, composition, J I.220; PA. 312, etc. - 2. striking, fig. insulting (ghaṭṭana=āsajjana) VvA 55. To meaning "strike" cp. saṃghaṭṭana. Ghaṭṭeti {Ghatteti} [Sk. ghaṭṭayati] to strike, beat, knock against, touch; fig. to offend, mock, object to. (a) lit. M II.4 (jannukena; text reads ghatteti, v. l. ghaṭeti); Sn 48 (=saṃ° Nd2 233); J I.218; Pv IV.109 (=paṭihaṃsati PvA 271); DA I.256 (=khuṃseti); DhA I.251. - (b) fig. A III.343; Sn 847 (cp. Nd1 208); Vism 18. - pp. ghaṭṭita Pug 30, 36; psychologically ghaṭṭayati=ruppati. B or S III.86. - Pass. ghaṭīyati (q.v.).-Cp. āsajja and ugghāṭeti. Ghaṇṭā {Ghanta} (f.) a small bell (cp. kinkanikā) J IV.215; VvA 36, 37, 279 (khuddaka°). As ghaṇṭī at Vism 181. Pāli Text Society 594 Pāli-English Dictionary Ghata {Ghata} (nt.) [Vedic ghṛta, ghṛ to sprinkle, moisten] clarified butter VvA 326; Miln 41; Sdhp 201 (-bindu). With ref. to the sacrificial fire (fire as eating ghee, or being sprinkled w. ghee) ghatāsana; J I.472; V.64, 446; Pv I.85 (ghatasitta). Ghana1 {Ghana} [Vedic ghana, cp. Gr. eu)qhnh/s?] (a) (adj.) solid, compact, massive; dense, thick; in eka° of one solid mass (of sela, rock) Vin I.185=Dh 81=Th 1, 643= Miln 386; A III.378, cp. ghanasela-pabbata DhA I.74. - gh. paṃsu J I.264, paṭhavī (solid ground) J I.74; PvA 75; palāsa (foliage) PvA 113; buddharasmiyo J I.12; °maṃsa solid, pure flesh DhA I.80; °sāṭaka (thick cloth) J I.292; °sañchanna (thickly covered) PvA 258; °suvaṇṇakoṭṭima DhA IV.135; abbha° a thick cloud Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). - (b) (m.) the fœtus at a certain stage (the last before birth & the 4th in the enum. of the foll. stages: kalala, abbuda, pesī, gh.) S I.206; J IV.496; Miln 40; Vism 236. The latter meaning is semantically to be explained as "swelling" & to be compared with Gr. bru/w to swell and e(/mbruon=embryo (the gravid uterus). Ghana2 {Ghana} [Vedic ghana to hanti (ghanti, cp. ghātayati), *gÛhen "strike," cp. Gr. qei/nw, fo/nos, Lat. of-fendo, Ags. gud, Ohg. gundea] a club, a stick, a hammer; in ayo° an iron club VvA 20. Also coll. term for a musical instrument played by striking, as cymbal, tambourine, etc. VvA 37. Ghanika {Ghanika} [to ghana1 in meaning of "cloud" (Sk.)] a class of devas (cloud-gods?) Miln 191. Ghamma {Ghamma} [Vedic gharma=Gr. qermo/s, Lat. formus, Ohg. etc. warm; to *gÛher "warm," cp. Sk. ghṛṇoti, hara; Gr. qe/ros, etc.] heat; hot season, summer. Either in loc. ghamme J IV.172 (=gimha-kāle); Pv IV.53 & ghammani ("in summer" or "by the heat") S I.143= J III.360 (sampareta overcome by heat); Sn 353; J IV.239; V.3.-Or. in cpd. with °abhitatta (ghammābhitatta, overpowered by heat) M I.74; D II.266; A III.187 sq.; Sn 1014 (cp. 353 ghammatatta); Miln 318; VvA 40; PvA 114. Ghara1 {Ghara} (nt.; pl. °ā Dh 241, 302) [cp. gaha & geha] a house A II.68; Sn 43 (gahaṭṭhā gharaṃ āvasantā), 337 (abl. gharā), 889 (id. gharamhā); J I.290 (id. gharato); IV.2, 364, 492 (ayo°); Pug 57; Miln 47. Combd with vatthu PvA 3, 17. - sūcighara a needle-case VvA 251. -ājira house-yard Vism 144 (where Dhs A 116 in id. passage reads gharadvāra). -āvāsa the household life (as contrasted with the life of a mendicant) Vin II.180 (gharāvāsatthaṃ); A II.208; M I.179, 240, 267, 344; Sn 406 (cp. S V.350); J I.61; PvA 61; -kapoṭa [Sk. gṛhakapota] the house-pigeon Miln 364, 403; -golikā house or domestic lizard J II.147. -dāsī a female house-slave Pv II.321; -dvāra a house-door J IV.142; Dhs A 116; PvA 93; -bandhana the bonds of the house, i. e. the establishing of marriage DhA I.4; -mukha an opening in the house, the front of the house Nd2 177; -mesin one who looks after the house, a pater familias, householder Sn 188; It 112 (gahaṭṭha+); J VI.575; -sandhi a cleft or crevice in the house PvA 24; -sūkara a tame, domestic pig DhA IV.16. Ghara2 [a drink (cp. gala) & garala poison] (°-); in -°dinnakābādha sickness in consequence of a poisonous drink (expl. as suffering fr. the results of sorcery) Vin I.206 (cp. Vin. Texts II.60); -visa poison Pug 48; DhA II.38; -sappa a poisonous snake DhA II.256. {Ghara} Gharaṇī {Gharani} (f.) [fr. ghara1] a house-wife Vin I.271; S I.201; Pv III.19 (=ghara-sāminī PvA 174); DhA III.209. Pāli Text Society 595 Pāli-English Dictionary Ghasa {Ghasa} (adj.-n.) eating, an eater; in mahagghasa a big eater A V.149 (of the crow); Dh 325; Miln 288. Ghasati {Ghasati} [Vedic grasati & *ghasti, pp. grasta, cp. Gr. gra/w to gnaw, gra/stis fodder, Lat. gramen grass] to eat J III.210; ppr. ghasamāna Vin II.201; Th 1, 749. - Cp. ghasa, ghasta & ghāsa. See also jaddhu. Desid. jighacchati. Ghasta {Ghasta} [pp. of ghasati=Sk. grasta] only in vanka° having eaten or swallowed the hook (cp. grasta-vanka) D II.266 (v-g° va ambujo); J VI.113. Ghāṭa {Ghata} see saṃ°; ghāṭana see ghaṭati. Ghāta {Ghata} (usually -°) [Sk. ghāta & ghātana; to han (ghan), strike, kill; see etym. under ghana2 & hanti] killing, murdering; slaughter, destruction, robbery D I.135 (gāma°, etc. village robbery); setu° the pulling down of a bridge (fig.) Vin I.59, etc. (see setu); pantha° highway robbery, brigandage, "waylaying" J I.253. - Th 2, 474, 493 (=samugghāta Com.); Sn 246 (ina°); VvA 72 (pāṇa°+pāṇa-vadha & °atipāta). Cp. next & vi°; saṃ°. Ghātaka {Ghataka} (adj.-°) murdering, destroying, slaughtering Vin I.89 (arahanta°), 136 (id.), 168 (id.); II.194 (manussa°); IV.260 (tala°) J IV.366 (gāma° corā robbers infesting the village); V.397 (thī°=itthi°); Pug 56 (maccha°). - As noun: (m.) one who slays, an executioner: go° a bullslaughterer M I.244, etc. (see go); cora° an executioner or hangman J III.41; Pug 56; PvA 5. (nt.) brigandage, robbery, slaughtering: gāmaghātakaṃ karoti J I.200. Ghātikā {Ghatika} (f. abstr. to ghātaka) murder J I.176 sq. Ghātita {Ghatita} (adj.) [pp. of ghāteti] killed, destroyed ThA 289; also in Der. ghātitatta (nt.) the fact of having killed J I.167. Cp. ugghātita. Ghātin {Ghatin} (adj.-n.) killing; a murderer J I.168 (pāṇa°); VI.67 (ghātimhi=ghātake). Ghātimant {Ghatimant} (adj.) able to strike, able to pierce (of a needle), in ghana° going through hard material easily J III.282. Ghāteti {Ghateti} [Denom. fr. ghāta, cp. Sk. ghātayati to han] tc kill, slay, slaughter It 22 (yo na hanti na ghāteti); Dh 129, 405; J I.255; Mhvs VII.35, 36. - aor. aghātayi J I.254; ger. ghātetvā J I.166. - Caus. ghātāpeti to have somebody killed J IV.124. - Cp. ghacca, ghātita, āghāteti. Ghāna {Ghana} (nt.) [Sk. ghrāṇa to ghrā, see ghāyati. On n for ṇ cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 81] the nose; usually in its function as organ of smell=sense of smell (either in phrase ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyati: to smell an odour by means of the nose; or in ghana-viððeyyā gandhā: odours which are sensed by the nose). In the enum. of the senses gh. is always mentioned in the 3rd place (after cakkhu & sota, eye & ear); see under rūpa. In this connection: Vin I.34; D I.21, 245; III.102, 244 sq.; S I.115; M I.112, 191; II.42; Dh 360; Pug 20; Miln 270; Vism 444 sq. (with defn). - In other connections: Pv II.24 (ghāna-chinna, one whose nose is cut off). āyatana the organ of smell D III.243, 280; Dhs 585, 605, 608; -indriya the sense of smell D III.239; Dhs 585 etc. (as above); -dhātu the element of smell Dhs. as above; -viððāṇa perception 596 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary of smell Dhs 443, 608, 628; -samphassa contact with the sense of smell S I.115; D III. & Dhs as above. Ghāyati1 {Ghayati} [Sk. ghrāti & jighrati, to ghrā, cp. gandha] to smell, always with gandhaṃ; ger. ghātvā S IV.71, 74 or ghāyitvā J I.210 (jālagandhaṃ); III.52 (macchagandhaṃ); Miln 347. Cp. sāyati & upagghāyati. Ghāyati2 {Ghayati} [a variant of jhāyati] to be consumed, to be tormented by thirst Pv I.1110 (ghāyire=ghāyanti PvA 60; v. l. BB jhāyire & jhāynati) Miln 397. Ghāsa {Ghasa} [Vedic ghāsa, fr. ghasati, q. v. cp. Lat. gramen= grass] grass for fodder, pasturing: food J I.511 (°ṃ kurute); PvA 173 (°atthāya gacchati "go feeding"). Mostly in: -esana search for food (=gocara) S I.141; Sn 711. - Cp. vi°. -chada (chāda & chādana) food & clothing, i. e. tending, fostering, good care (=posana) (act.) or being well looked after, well provided (pass.); chada: Pug 51; chāda: J I.94; A I.107; II.85; III.385; chādana: D I.60; M I.360; VvA 23, 137; -hāraka one who fetches the fodder (food) Th 1, 910. Ghāsana {Ghasana} (nt.)=ghāsa; in -°ṭṭhāna pasture (=gocara) VvA 218. Ghuṭṭha {Ghuttha} [Sk. ghuṣṭa, pp. ghuṣ, see ghoseti & cp. saṃ°] proclaimed, announced; renowned J I.50 (of festival); 425 (nakkhattaṃ); II.248 (ussava); Pv II.82 (dūra° of wide renown, world-famed of Bārāṇasī); DhA III.100 (chaṇe ghuṭṭhe when the fair was opened). Ghuru {Ghuru} -ghuru onomat. expression of snoring & grunting noise [gṛ-gṛ to *gel or *ger, see note on gala] in -passāsa (& °in) snoring & breathing heavily, panting, snorting & puffing S I.117 (of Māra); J I.160 (of sleeping bhikkhus, gh° kākacchamānā breathing loud & snoring). Cp. next. Ghurughurāyati [Denom. fr. prec.] to snore J III.538; DhA I.307. Cp. Prk. ghurughuranti varāhā (grunting hogs) & ghurukkanti vagghā (roaring tigers). {Ghurughurayati} Ghoṭaka {Ghotaka} [cp. Sk. ghoṭaka, Halāyudha 2, 281] a (bad) horse J VI.452. Ghota {Ghota} is read at J I.454, probably for ghaṭṭa; meaning is "striking, stroke," combd with kasā, whip. Ghora {Ghora} (adj.) [Vedic ghora, orig. meaning, wailing, howling, lamenting, to *gher, *ger, see note on gala & cp. ghuru. A root ghur is given by Dhtp 487 in meaning of "bhīma," i. e. horrible. rag, miserable; & perhaps Lat. funus, funeral. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] terrible, frightful, awful Vin II.147. Freq. as attr. of niraya (syn. with dāruṇa; PvA 87, 159, 206) Pv I.1012; IV.18. Of an oath (sapatha) Pv I.68; II.1216. - ghorassara of a terrible cry (Ep. of an ass) Miln 363, 365. Ghosa {Ghosa} [Vedic ghoṣa to ghus] 1. shout, sound, utterance Vin II.155 ("Buddha" -ghosa); M I.294; A I.87, 228; Sn p. 106; Sn 696, 698; Dhs 637, 720 (+ghosa-kamma). - 2. shouting, howling, wailing (of Petas) Pv III.34; IV.36, 338. -pamāṇa to be measured (or judged) by one's reputation A II.71=Pug 53; also as pamāṇika DhA III.114 (in same context). Pāli Text Society 597 Pāli-English Dictionary Ghosaka {Ghosaka} (adj.) sounding, proclaiming, shouting out (-°), in dhamma° praising the Law J II.286; Satthu guṇa° sounding the praise of the Master DhA III.114. As n. Name of a deva (Gh. devaputta) DhA I.173. Ghosanā {Ghosana} (f.) fame, renown, praise, in Māra° J I.71. Ghosavant {Ghosavant} (adj.) full of sound, roaring J III.189. Ghosita {Ghosita} 1. [pp. of ghoseti] proclaimed, renowned, PvA 107 (=ghuṭṭha); VvA 31 (nakkhattaṃ). As Npl. Ghositārāma DhA I.53, 161, 208. - 2. [n. ag.=ghositṛ, cp. ghosaka] one who proclaims, advocates, or heralds; in Np. Ghositaseṭṭhi DhA I.187. Ghoseti {Ghoseti} [Denom. of ghosa, cp. Sk. ghoṣayati, caus. to ghuṣ] to proclaim, announce; cry aloud, wail, shout J II.112; III.52; Pv II.937 (=uggh°); IV.63; pp. ghosita & ghuṭṭha (q. v.). - Caus. ghosāpeti to have proclaimed J I.71. Pāli Text Society 598 Pāli-English Dictionary C Ca {Ca} (indef. enchtic particle) [Vedic ca adv. to rel. pron. *qÛo, idg. *que=Cr. te, Lat. que, Goth. -h. Cp. ka, ki, ku] 1. Indefinite (after demonstr. pron. in the sense of kiṃ=what about? or how is it? cp. kiṃ)=ever, whoever, what-ever, etc. [Sk. kaśca, Gr. Qs te, Lat: quisque, Goth. hvazuh] so ca whoever (see below 3), tað ca pan' amhākaṃ ruQati tena c'amhā attamanā M I.93; yað ca kho . . . ceteti yañ ca pakappeti . . . whatever he thinks, whatever he intends . . . S II.65. As a rule the Pali form corresp. to Sk. kaśca is *kascid=koci, & ci (cid) is the regular P. representative of the indefinite ca (cp. cana & api). - 2. Copulative or disjunctive according to the general context being positive or negative. (a) copulative: and, then, now: tadā ca now then, and then (in historical exposition) J III.188. Most frequent in connecting two or three words, usually placed after the second, but also after the third: atthaṃ anatthañ ca Dh 256; pubbāparāni ca Dh 352; alaṃ etehi ambehi jambūhi panasehi ca J II.160. - In the same sense added to each link of the chain as ca-ca (cp. Sk. ca-ca, Gr. te te, Lat. que que; also mixed with constituents of similar pairs as api-ca, cp. te-kai): tuyhað ca tassā ca to you and her (orig. this or whatever to you, whatever to her)=to you as well as to her J I.151. Often with the first member emphasized by eva: c'eva, as well as: hasi c'eva rodi ca he laughed as well as cried J I.167; maṃsena c'eva phalāphalena ca with flesh as well as with all kinds of fruit J III.127; subhaddako c'eva supesalo ca J III.82; c'eva apace padūse pi ca waste and even defile ThA 72 (Ap V.40). - (b) disjunctive: but (esp. after a negation): yo ca but who Th 1, 401; yadā ca but when (cp. tadā ca) J III.128. In conditional clauses (cp. 3) combd with sace=but if, on the other hand: sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasati . . . sace ca pabbajati agārā Sn 1003. With neg, na ca=but not: mahatī vata te bondi, na ca paððā tadūpikā (but your wisdom is not in the same proportion) J II.160. - 3. Conditional: if [=Vedic ced, Lat. absque] D I.186, 207; II.36, 57 (jāti ca not va); M I.91; S III.66 (rūpað ca attā abhavissa); A I.58; V.87; J II.110 (ciram pi kho khadeyya yavaṃ . . . ravamāno ca dūsayi: "he might have caten a long time, if he had not come to harm by his cry," or "but"); IV.487; V.185, 216 (Sakko ca me varaṃ dajjā so ca labbhetha me varo: "if S. will give me a wish, that wish will be granted," or: "whatever wish he will allow, that one will be fulfilled"); VI.206, 208. - na ca (at the beginning of an interrog. phrase)= if not S I.190 (ahaṃ ca kho . . . pavāremi, na ca me Bhagavā kiðci garahati: if the Bh. will not blame me). For BSk. ca=ced see AvŚ II.189, n. o. Cakita {Cakita} (adj.) [Sk. cakita, cak] disturbed; afraid, timid Dāvs IV.35, 46. Cakora {Cakora} [Sk. cakora to kol (kor), see note on gala] the francolin partridge (Perdix rufa) J V.416; Vv 358; VvA 163. See also cankora. Cakka {Cakka} (nt.) [Vedic cakra, redupl. formation fr. *quel to turn round (cp. P. kaṇṭha > Lat. collus & see also note on gala)=that which is (continuously) turning, i. e. wheel, or abstr, the shape or periphery of it, i. e. circle. Cakra=Gr. ku/klos, Ags. hveohl, hveol=wheel. The unredupl. form in Sk. carati (versatur), Gr. pe/lomai, poleu/w, po/los (pole); Lat. colo, incolo; Obulg. kolo wheel, Oisl. hvel] I. Crude meaning: 1. a wheel (of a carriage) Dh 1; PvA 65 (ratha°); Miln 27. - 2. a discus used as a missile weapon J I.74; Pgdp 36; cp. khura° a razor as an instr. of torture. - 3. a disc, a circle: heṭṭhāpādatalesu cakkāni jātāni, forming the 2nd characteristic mark of a Mahāpurisa D II.17= III.143; D III.149. - J II.331; Miln 51. - 4. an array of troops (under tayo vyūhā: paduma° cakka° sakaṭa°) J II.404=IV.343. - II. Applied meaning: 1. (a wheel as component part of a carriage, or one of a duad or tetrad=) collection, set, part; succession; Pāli Text Society 599 Pāli-English Dictionary sphere, region, cycle Vin I.330 (cp. Vin. Texts II.281); III.96; iriyāpatha° the 4 ways of behaviour, the various positions (standing, walking, sitting, lying down) DA I.249; Sdhp 604. sā°, miga° the sphere or region of dogs & wild animals Miln 178; cakkena (instr.) in succession PvA III. cakkaṃ kātabbaṃ, or bandhitabbaṃ freq. in Yam. and Paṭṭh, "The cycle of formulated words is to be here repeated." - 2. (like the four wheels constituting the moving power of a carriage=) a vehicle, instrument, means & ways; attribute, quality; state, condition, esp. good condition (fit instrumentality), catucakka an instr. of four, a lucky tetrad, a fourwheeler of the body as expressing itself in the four kinds of deportment, iriyāpathas A II.32; S I.16, 63 (catucakkaṃ). In this sense generalized as a happy state, consisting of "4 blessings": paṭirūpadesa-vāsa, sappurisûpassaya, atta-sammāpaṇidhi, pubbe-kata-puððatā A II.32; J V.114; mentioned at Ps I.84. Cp. also Sn 554 sq.; 684. Esp. pronounced in the two phrases dhamma-cakka (the wheel of the Doctrine, i. e. the symbol of conquering efficacy, or happiness implicated in the D.) and brahma-c° the best wheel, the supreme instrument, the noblest quality. Both with pavatteti to start & kcep up (like starting & guiding a carriage), to set rolling, to originate, to make universally known. dhamma° e. g. S I.191; A I.23, 101; II.34, 120; III.151; IV.313; Sn 556 sq.; 693; J III.412; Ps II.159 sq.; PvA 67 (see dhamma). brahma° M I.71; S II.27; A II.9, 24; III.9, 417; V.33; Vbh 317 sq.; 344 (see brahma). Cp. cakkavattin (below). Cp. vi°. -chinna (udaka) (water of a well) the wheel of which is broken Ud 83; -bhañjanin one who destroys a state of welfare & good J V.112 (patirāpadesavāsādino kusala-cakkassa bhaðjanī C.); -bheda breaking peace or concord, sowing discord Vin II.198; III.171; -yuga a pair of wheels Vv 832; -ratana the treasure of the wheel, that is of the sun (cp. Rh. D. Buddh. Suttas p. 252; Dialogues II.197, 102) D II.171; III.59 sq., 75; J I.63; II.311; DA I.249. See also cakkavattin; -vaṭṭaka (nt.) a scoop-wheel (a wheel revolving over a well with a string of earthen pots going down empty & coming up full, after dredger fashion) Vin II.122; -vattin (cp. dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti above) he who sets rolling the Wheel, a just & faithful king (rājā hoti c. dhammiko dhammarājā cāturanto Sn p. 106, in corresp. pass. v. 1002 as vijeyya pathaviṃ imaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena-m-anusāsati). A definition is given by Bdhgh. at DA I.249. - Three sorts of c. are later distinguished: a cakkavāla-c° a universal king, or cāturanta-c° (ruling over four great continents Sn p. 106; KhA 227), a dīpa-c° (ruling over one), a padesa-c° (ruling over part of one) Usually in phrase rājā cakka vattin: D I.88; III.156; IV.302; V.44, 99, 342; D II.16, 172; III.59 sq., 75, 142 sq.; M III.65; A I.76, 109 sq.; II.37, 133, 245; III.147 sq; 365; IV.89, 105; V.22; Kh VIII.12 (°sukha); J I.51; II.395; IV.119; Vbh 336; PvA 117; VvA 18; Sdhp 238, 453; DhA II.135 (°sirī). -°gabbha Vism 126: -°rajjaṃ kāresi J II.311; -viddha (nt.) a particular form of shooting J V.130; -samārūḷha (adj.) having mounted the wheels, i. e. their carts (of janapadā) A I.178; III.66, 104. Cakkalaka {Cakkalaka} [fr. cakka] a disc or tuft (?) Vism 255 (kaḷīra°, where KhA 50 reads in same context kaḷīra-daṇḍa). Cakkali {Cakkali} (f.) drapery Vin II.174. Cakkalikā {Cakkalika} a window blind, curtain Vin II.148. Cakkavāka {Cakkavaka} [Vedic cakravāka, cp. kṛkavāku, to sound root kṛ, see note on gala] the ruddy goose (Anas Casarca) J III.520; IV.70 sq. (N. of J No. 451); Pv II.123; Miln 364, 401; - f. cakkavākī J III.524; VI.189=501. Pāli Text Society 600 Pāli-English Dictionary Cakkavāḷa {Cakkavala} (m. & nt.) a circle, a sphere, esp. a mythical range of mountains supposed to encircle the world; pl. worlds or spheres J I.53, 203; VI.330; Vism 205 (its extent), 207, 367, 421; DhsA 297; DhA 11. 15; III.498; in the trope "cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ brahmaloko atinīco" (=the whole world cannot hold it) to express immensity DhA I.310; VvA 68. -gabbha the interior of the C. sphere J IV.119; DA I.284; -pabbata (nt.) the C. mountains, "world's end" J III.32; VI.272; -rajja (nt.) the whole world, strictly speaking the whole region of a sphere J II.392. Cakkhu {Cakkhu} (nt.) [Vedic cakṣuḥ, etym. not clear, as redupl. perhaps to īks, akṣa eye, kṣ ṇa moment, or as intens. to cit, cp. cinteti, & see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under inquam] the eye (nom. sg. cakkhuṃ Vin I.34; S I.115; M III.134, etc.). - I. The eye as organ of sense-(a) psychologically: cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā "seeing visible object (shape) with the eye" (Nd2 on rūpa q. v.) is the defin. of this first & most important of the senses (cp. Pv II.61 dakkhiṇa c.=the most valuable thing): the psychology of sight is discussed at DA I.194 sq., and more fully at Dhs 597 sq. (see DhsA 306 sq; Dhs trsl. 173 sq.); cp. cak khunā puriso ālokati rūpagatāni Nd2 234. In any enumeration of the senses cakkhu heads the list, e. g. Vin I.34; D I.21; II.308, 336 sq.; III.102, 225, 244 sq.; 269; Nett 28.-See rūpa. Also combd. with sota: M I.318; III.264; A I.281. cakkhusmiṃ haððati rūpehi S IV.201; hata° A I.129. passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunā va "I see him with my mind as with my eye" Sn 1142.-Vin I.184; S I.32, 199; IV.123; Dh 360; J IV.137; DA I.183; Nett 191. Vism 444 sq. As adj. (-°) seeing, having or catching sight of: eka° (dvi°) oneeyed (two°) A I.128 sq.; āmisa° seeing an object of sensual enjoyment S II.226; IV.159; J V.91 (=kilesalola). acakkhu blind A III.250, 256; Ps I.129. - (b) ethically: as a "sense" belonging to what is called "body" (kāya) it shares all the qualities of the latter (see kāya), & is to be regarded as an instr. only, i. e. the person must not value it by itself or identify himself with it. Subduing the senses means in the first place acquiring control over one's eyes (cp. okkhitta cakkhu, with down-cast eyes Sn 63, 411, 972; Pv IV.344; & indriyesu guttadvāra; °indriya). In this connection the foll. passages may be mentioned: Vin I.34; D I.70; S IV.123; II.244 (aniccaṃ, etc.); III.255 (do.) IV.81, 128 (na tumhākaṃ); Ps I.132 (aniccatṭhaṃ). Numerous others see under rūpa. - II. The eve as the most important channel of mental acquiring, as faculty of perception & apperception; insight, knowledge (cp. veda, olda to vid, to see). In connection with ðāṇa (ghw_sis) it refers to the apperception of the truth (see dhamma-cakkhu): intuition and recognition, which means perfect understanding (cp. the use of the phrase jānāti passati "to know and to see"=to understand clearly). See e. g. S II.7-11, 105; IV.233; V.179; 258; 422 sq. Most frequently as dhamma° "the eye of the truth," said of the attainment of that right knowledge which leads to Arahantship, in phrase virajaṃ vitamalaṃ dh-cakkhuṃ uppajjati Vin I.16; D I.86, 110; S II.134 sq.; IV.47; 107; V.467; A IV.186; Ps II.150 sq.; 162; Miln 16. Similarly paððā°, It 52; ariya° M I.510. - III. The eye as the instr. of supersensuous perception, "clear" sight, clairvoyance. This is the gift of favoured beings whose senses are more highly developed than those of others, and who through right cognition have acquired the two "eyes" or visionary faculties, termed dibba- cakkhu & buddha-cakkhu It 52; D II.38 resp. They are most completely described at Nd2 235 (under cakkhumā), & the foll. categories of the range of application of cakkhu are set forth: 1. maṃsa-cakkhu: the physical eye which is said to be exceptionally powerful & sensitive. See Kv III.7 (trans. p. 149 ff.). Vism 428 (maṃsa° 2 ðāṇa°).-2. dibba-°: the deva-eye, the eye of a seer, allpervading, & seeing all that proceeds in hidden worlds.- 3. paððā°: the eye of wisdom; he who knows all that can be known (jānaṃ passaṃ recognizing & seeing, i. e. of perfect understanding; cakkhubhūta ðāṇa° dhamma° brahma°). - 4. buddha°: the eye of a Buddha or of complete intuition, i. e. of a person who "sees the heart of man," of a being realizing the moral state of other beings and determined to help them on the Path to Right Knowledge. - 5. samanta°: (a summary account of Nos. 1-4, Pāli Text Society 601 Pāli-English Dictionary & in all Scripture-passages a standing Ep. of Gotama Buddha, see below), the eye of all round knowledge, the eye of a Tathāgata, of a being perfected in all wisdom. - Out of these are mentioned & discussed singly or in setQ: (Nos. 1-5): DhsA 306; SnA 351; (Nos. 1-3:) It 52=Kvu 251 sq. (It 52=Kvu 254); (dibba:) Vin I.8, 288; II.183; III.5; D I.82, 162; III. 52, III. 281; M I.213; S I.144, 196; II.122, 213, 276; IV.240; V.266, 305; A I.165, 256, 281 sq.; III.19, 29, 418; IV.85, 141, 178, 291; V.13, 35, 68, 200, 211, 340; J III.346; Ps I.114; II.175; Vbh 344; PvA 5. - (paððā°:) S IV.292; V.467, A I.35; DhA III.174, 175. - (buddha°:) Vin I.6; S I.138; Ps II.33; PvA 61. (samanta°:) S I.137=Nd2 2354; Sn 345, 378, 1063, 1069, 1090, 1133; Ps II.31=Nd2 2355. -āyatana (either cakkh'or cakkhv°) the organ or sense of sight D III.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 653; -indriya (cakkhundriya) the organ of eye, faculty of vision D I.70; III.225, 239; A I.113; Dhs 585, 597, 661, 830, 971; Vism 7; -karaṇa (always in combn w. ðāṇa-karaṇa) producing (right) insight (and knowledge) It 82 (of kusalavitakkā); f. °ī S IV.331 (of majjhimā paṭipadā); Ps II.147; -dada one who gives the eye (of understanding) Th 1, 3; -dhātu the element of vision Dhs 597, 703, 817. patha the range of vision; sight J I.65=DhA I.173; J I.146; IV.189, 378, 403 (=cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.); VvA 119; -bhāta (+ðāṇa°) (adj.) one who has become the possessor of right understanding S II.255; IV.94; A V.226 sq. -lola greed (or greedy) with the eye Nd2 177; viððāṇa consciousness by means of visual perception, visual cognition Vin I.34; D II.308, 310; III.243; Dhs 433, 556, 585, 589, 620; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. p. 177; Miln trsl. I.80, 89; -viððeyya (adj.) (i. e. rūpā) to be apperceived by the sense of sight Vin I.184; D II.281; III.234; Dhs 589, 967, 1095; -samphassa contact with the sense of vision (usually with °ja: sprung from visual contact) (of vedanā, feelings) Vin I.34; D II.308 sq.; III.243; Ps I.5, 40, 136. Cakkhuka {Cakkhuka} (adj.) having eyes, seeing (-°), in dibba° A I.23. 148 (see cakkhu III.2) and a° blind D I.191; S III.140; Nd 67. Cakkhumant {Cakkhumant} (adj.) [cakkhu+mant] having eyes, being gifted with sight; of clear sight, intuition or wisdom; possessing knowledge (cp. samantacakkhu) D I.76 (one who knows, i. e. a connoisseur); cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhinti "those who have eyes to see shall see" (of the Buddha) D I.85, 110, etc. - Vin I.16; S I.27; A I.116, 124; IV.106; Dh 273; It 108, 115; DA I.221; DhA III.403; IV.85. - Esp. as Ep. of the Buddha: the Allwise S I.121, 134, 159, 210; Sn 31, 160, 992, 1028, 1116, 1128; Vv 125 (=paðcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā Buddho Bhagavā VvA 60, cp. cakkhu III.); Vv 8127. Cakkhula {Cakkhula} (adj.) [=cakkhuka] in visama° squint-eyed. squinting J I.353; VI.548. Cakkhussa {Cakkhussa} (adj.) [Vedic cakṣuṣya] pleasing to or good for the eyes (opp. a°) Vin II.137, 148. Cankama {Cankama} [Sk. cankrama & cankramā, fr. cankamati] (a) walking up & down S IV.104. (b) the place where one is walking, esp. a terraced walk, cloister Vin I.15, 182; II.220; D I.105; S I.212; A I.114; 183; III.29; IV.87; J I.17; II.273; V.132 (cp. kattaradaṇḍa-passages). Cankamati {Cankamati} [Intens. of kamati, to kram=Sk. cankramīti; cp. kamati] to walk about, to walk up & down Vin I.15, 182; II.193, 220; IV.18; S I.107, 212; PvA 105. - Caus. cankamāpeti J III.9. Pāli Text Society 602 Pāli-English Dictionary Cankamana {Cankamana} (nt.) [fr. cankamati] 1. walking up & down S II.282; DhA I.10. - 2. a cloister walk (=cankama) VvA 188. Usually °-: Vin I.139 (°sālā); J III.85; IV.329; PvA 79 (°koṭi the far end of the cloister). Cankamika {Cankamika} (adj.) [fr. cankama] one who has the habit of walking about Miln 216 (ṭhāna° standing & walking). Cankora {Cankora} [cp. cakora] the Greek partridge Vv 358 (cp. VvA 163); J VI.538. Cangavāra {Cangavara} [cp. Tamil canguvaḍa a dhoney, Anglo-Ind. ḍoni, a canoe hollowed from a log, see also doṇi] a hollow vessel, a bowl, cask M I.142; J V.186 (in similes). As °ka Miln 365 (trsl. Miln II.278 by "straining cloth"). - Cp. cañcu "a box" Divy 131. Cangoṭaka {Cangotaka} [cp. cangavāra] a casket, a box J I.65; IV.257; V.110, 303; VI.369, 534; DhA II.116; III.101; VvA 33, 158; Mhvs IV.106; Anvs p. 35 Vism 173. Caccara {Caccara} (nt.) [Sk. catvara, cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 56] a quadrangular place, a square, courtyard; a place where four roads meet, a cross road Vin III.151; IV.271; Miln 1 (+catukkasinghāṭaka), 330 (do.); J I.425 (°raccha). Caja {Caja} (adj.) giving up, to be given up; in cpd. duc° hard to give up A III.50; J V.8. Cp. cāga. Cajati {Cajati} [Sk. tyajate, tyaj=Gr. so Qe/w to scare away] 1. to let loose, to emit, to discharge A II.33; J II.342 (mutta karīsaṃ) fig. to utter (a speech) J V.362. - 2. to abandon, to give up, sacrifice (with loc. of person to whom: Asuresu pāṇaṃ S I.224=J I.203) Dh 290; J II.205; III.211; V.464; VI.570. - pp. catta, q. v. - grd. caja [Sk. tyajya] q. v. Cañcala {Cancala} (adj.) [Intens. of cal=car, to move, with n instead of r in reduplication, cp. Sk. caðcūryate=carcarīti, caðcala (=*carcara), Gr. gargalizw & gaggalizw to tickle; see also note on gala & cp. cankamati] moving to & fro, trembling, unsteady J IV.498 (=calācala); Sdhp 317, 598. Caṭula {Catula} (adj.) [Sk. catura] clever, skilled Mhbv 148. See catura. Caṇḍa {Canda} (adj.) [Sk. caṇḍa] fierce, violent; quick-tempered, uncontrolled, passionate Vin II.194 (hatthī); D. I.90 (=māṇa-nissita-kopa-yutta DA I.256); S I.176; II.242; A II.109=Pug 47 (sakagava°); J I.450; II.210, 349; Vism 343, 279 (°sota, fierce current), (°hatthi); DhA IV.9 (goṇa) 104; Sdhp 41, 590, 598. - f. caṇḍī M I.126; J II.443; III.259; Pv II.34 (=kodhanā PvA 83). - Compar. caṇḍatara S II.242. - In cpds. caṇḍi°, see caṇḍikata & caṇḍitta. Caṇḍaka {Candaka} (adj.)=caṇḍa; f. caṇḍikā Pv II.35, & caṇḍiyā J III.259 (=kodhaṇā). Caṇḍāla1 {Candala} [Vedic caṇḍāla] a man of a certain low tribe, one of the low classes, an outcaste; grouped with others under nīcā kulā (low born clans) as caṇḍālā nesādā veṇā rathakārā pukkusā at A I.107=II.85=Pug 51. As caṇḍāla-pukkusā with the four recognized grades of society (see jāti & khattiya) at A I.162. - Vin IV.6; M II.152; S V.168 sq. (°vaṃsa); A III.214, 228 (brāhmaṇa°); IV.376; J IV.303; PvA 175; Miln 200. - f. caṇḍālī A III.226; Pv III.113; DhA II.25. See also pukkusa. Pāli Text Society 603 Pāli-English Dictionary Caṇḍāla2 {Candala} (nt.) a kind of amusement or trick D I.6≈(=ayogulakīḷā play with an iron ball DA I.84). Caṇḍikata {Candikata} (adj.) [cp. caṇḍa] angry Vin IV.310. Caṇḍikka {Candikka} (nt.) [*caṇḍikya, of caṇḍika > caṇḍaka] ferocity anger, churlishness Nd2 313, 576, Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1231; Vbh 357; DhA II.227. Cp. caṇḍitta. Caṇḍitta {Canditta} (nt.) anger Dhs 418; Pug 18=22. Cp. caṇḍikka. Catukka1 {Catukka} (nt.) [fr. catu=*catuka > *catukyaṃ] 1. a tetrad, a set of four, consisting of four parts: °paðcakajjhānā (pl.) the fourfold & the fivefold system of meditation DhsA 168; see cpds. - 2. a place where four roads meet J VI.389; Miln 330 (see also below); esp. in phrase catukke catukke kasāhi tāḷeti (or is it "in sets of four"? See Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 79) J I.326; II.123; DhA IV.52. - 3. a square (in a village) Miln 1, 365; J II.194; V.459; DhA 317. -bhatta a meal for four bhikkhus Vin II.77; III.160; -magga the 4 fold path Nett 113; -yañña (usually sabba catukka°) a sacrifice consisting of (all) the four parts J III.44, 45; PvA 280; cp. J I.335. (Or is it the "cross-road sacrifice"?) Catukka2 {Catukka} [origin. "consisting only of one quarter"?] empty, shallow, little Nd2 415 (°paðða, with omakapaðða, lāmaka-p°); J IV.441 (nadī=tuccha Com.). Catuttha {Catuttha} (num. ord.) [Vedic caturtha, Idg. *queturto=Gr. te/tratos, Lat. quartus, Ohg. fiordo] the fourth Sn 97, 99, 450; J III.55; VI.367; °ṃ (adv.) for the fourth time DhA III.174. - f. catutthī Sn 436; Vism 338.-See also (s.v. Aḍḍha) aḍḍhuḍḍha. -bhatta food eaten only every fourth day J V.424. -magga "the fourth Path," of Arahantship DhA I.309; -mana (?) (nt.) name of the tongue, in so far as it forms the fourth vatthu (beside eyes, ears, nose) according to the gloss: J V.155; extremely doubtful. Catur, {Catur} catu° in composition [Vedic catvārah (m.) catvāri (nt.) fr. *qÛetuor, *qÛetur=Gr. te/ttares ( r, Ohg. fior, Ags fēower, E. four; catasras (f.) fr. *qÛ(e)tru, cp. tisras. Also as adv. catur fr. *quetrus=Lat. quater & quadru°] base of numeral four; 1. As num. adj. nom. & acc. m. cattāro (Dh 109; J III.51) and caturo (Sn 84, 188), f. catasso (Sn 1122), nt. cattāri (Sn. 227); gen. m. catunnaṃ (Sn p. 102), [f. catassannaṃ]; instr. catubbhi (Sn 229), catūhi (Sn 231) & catuhi; loc. catūsu (J I.262) & catusu. - 2. As num. adv., catu° catur° in cpds. catuddasa (14), also through elision & reduction cuddasa PvA 55, 283, etc., cp. also cātuddasī. Catuvīsati (24) Sn 457; catusaṭṭhi (64) J I.50; II.193; PvA 74; caturāsīti (84) usually with vassa-sahassāni J I.137; II.311; Pv IV.77; DhA II.58; PvA 9, 31, 254, etc. See also cattārīsa (40). -(r)aṃsa (=caturassa, having four edges, four-edged Dhs 617; PvA 189 (read °sobhitāya); -(r)anga (consisting of) four limbs or divisions, fourfold M I.77; J I.390; II.190, 192; VI.169 (uposatha, cp. aṭṭhanga); Dpvs I.6; Sdhp 64; -(r)angika=prec. Dhs 147, 157, 397; KhA 85; Sdhp 58; -(r)angin (adj.) comprising four parts, f. °inī, of an army consisting of elephants, chariots, cavalry & infantry D II.190; J II.102, 104; Vism 146; SnA 225, 353; DhA IV.144; cp. J VI.275; -(r)angula (adj.) measuring 4 fingers, 4 fingers broad or wide, Vin I.46; S II.178; J VI.534; Th 1, 1137; Vism 124. -(r)angulika=prec. Th 2, 498 (-ThA, 290); -(r)anta see cāturQ; (r)assa [catur+assa2] four-cornered, quadrangular, regular Vin II.310 (Bdhgh); J IV.46 (āvāṭa) 492 (sālā); V.49; Pv II.119. Cp. caturaṃsa & next; -(r)assara (see last) with 4 sharp sides (of a hammer; °muggara) DhA I.126; -(r)ādhiṭṭhāna (adj.) one who has taken the four resolutions Pāli Text Society 604 Pāli-English Dictionary (see adhiṭṭhāna) M III.239; -(r)āpassena (adj.) endowed with the four apassena: lit.: reclining on four A V.29, 30; D III.269, 270; -ussada (catussada) full of four, endowed with 4 things, rich in four attributes J IV.309 (expld. p. 311 as having plenty of people, grain, wood & water); IV.422=461 "with four pillows" (p. 422 has caturassada for caturussada, which latter is also to be preferred to catussada, unless this is a haplology). In the same connection occurs sattussada (full of people) D I.111 e. g. & Pv IV.18 (see satta). The formation "cattussada" has probably been infQuenced by "sattussada"; -(k)kaṇṇa (& °ka) (a) with 4 corners Vin II.137; J III.255. - (b) "between four ears," i. e. secret, of manta (counsel) J VI.391; -(k)kama walking with four (feet), quadruped Vv 648; Pv I.113; -kuṇḍika on all fours M I.79; A III.188; D III.6; Pv III.27 (cp. PvA 181); -koṇa four cornered, crossed, in °raccha cross road PvA 24; -(k)khandha the four khandhas, viz. feeling, perception, synthesis & intellect (see khandha) DhsA 345; (g)guṇa fourfold, quadruple D II.135; S I.27; J I.213; VvA 186; Sdhp Q40; -cakka with four wheels S I.16=63 (said of the human body, see under cakka); -jāta of four sorts, viz. gandha (perfume) having four ingredients ThA 72 (see next) -jāti of four kinds J I.265, V.79; (gandha). These 4 ingredients of perfume are saffron, jasmine, Turkish (tarukkha) & Greek incense (yavana); -jātiya (& °jātika) in °gandha prec. J III.291; IV.377; PvA 127; Miln 354; J I.178 (°ka); (d)disā (pl.) the 4 quarters of the globe S I.167=Sn p. 79; D I.251; may also be taken for abl. sg. as adv.: in the 4 quarters Vin I.16, cp. acc. catuddisaṃ D II.12; -(d)dīpika covering the 4 continents, of megha (a cloud) DhA II.95; -dvāra with 4 gates, of a house D I.102 (=DA I.270); of Avīciniraya It 86; J IV.3; Pv I.1013; cp. Catudvāra Jātaka (No. 439; J IV.1 sq.); -nahuta ninetyfour J I.25; VI.486; -paccaya the four requisites (see paccaya) J III.273, °santosa contentment with °DhA IV.111; -paṇṇasa fiftyfour DhA I.4; -(p)patha a fourways J IV.460; -(p)pada [Sk. caturpād, Gr. tetra/pous, Lat. quadrupes] a quadruped Vin II.110; S I.6; A V.21; Sn 603, 964; It 87; J I.152; III.82; -parivaṭṭa (cp. aṭṭha °adhideva-ðāṇadassana A IV.304) fourfold circle S III.59 sq. (paðcupādānakkhandhe). -parisā (f.) the fourfold assembly, scil. of male & female bhikkhus & upāsakas (cp. parisā) PvA 11; -pala fourfold Vism 339. -(p)pādaka (adj.) consisting of 4 padas, i. e. a sloka; f. °ikā (gāthā) a complete stanza or sloka Anvs p. 35; -pārisuddhasīla (nt.) the four precepts of purity J III.291; DhA IV.111; -(b)bidha (catur+vidha) fourfold ThA, 74; -(b)bipallāsa (catur+vipallāsa) the fourfold change (cp. Nett 85) Th+1, 1143; SnA 46; -byūha (catur+vyūha) arranged in 4 arrays (of hāra) Nett 3, 105; -bhāga the 4th part, a quarter Dh 108; -bhūmika having 4 stories or stages (of citta or dhamma) DhA I.21; IV.72; DhsA 344, 345; cp. Vism 493 (of indriya); -madhura (nt.) sweetness (syrup) of 4 (ingredients) DA I.136; ThA 68; mahāpatha a crossing on a high-road Vism 235. -mahābhūtika consisting of the four great elements DhsA 403; -(m)mahārājika: see cātum°; -māsa 4 months, a season PvA 96; Dpvs I.24, 37 (cā°); see under māsa; -sacca the four truths or facts (see ariyasacca) DhA III.380; Miln 334; (s)sāla (nt.) [catur+sāla] a square formed by 4 houses, in phrasc catuhi gabbhehi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ catussQlaṃ kāretvā VvA 220; DhA III.291; -'ha (catuha & catūha) 4 days; catuhena within 4 days S II.191; catūhapaðcāha 4 or 5 days Vin IV.280. - See also cpds. with cātu°. Catura {Catura} [Deriv. uncertain. Perhaps from tvar to move, that is quickly. Sk. catura] clever, skilled, shrewd J III.266; VI.25. - Der. f. abstr. caturatā cleverness Vbh 351 (=cāturiya). Caturiya {Caturiya} at Vv 412 is to be read ca turiya, etc. Otherwise see cāturiya. Catta {Catta} [pp. of cajati] given up. sacrificed A II.41; III.50; Th 1, 209 (°vaṇṇa who has lost fame); J II.336; IV.195; V.41 (°jīvita). Pāli Text Society 605 Pāli-English Dictionary Cattatta {Cattatta} (nt.) [fr. catta] the fact of giving up, abandonment, resignation Vbh 254 sq.; DhsA 381. Cattārīsa {Cattarisa} (& cattālīsa) [Sk. catvāriṃśat] forty S II.85; Sn p. 87; It 99≈. Usually cattāḷīsa J I.58; V.433; DhA I.41; II.9. 93. -danta having 40 teeth (one of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa) D II 18; III.144, 172. Cattārīsaka {Cattarisaka} (adj.) having forty M III.77. Cadika {Cadika} at Miln 197 (ūmikavankacadika) prob. for °madika. Cana {Cana} (-°) [Vedic cana fr. rel. pron. *qÛo+demonstr. pron. *no, cp. anā, nānā; Gr. rh/; Lat. ne in quandone=P. kudācana. cana=Goth. hun, Ohg. gin, Ger. ir-gen-d. Cp. ci] indef. particle "like, as if," added to rel. or interrog. pronouns, as kiðcana anything, kudācana at any time, etc. Cp. ca & ci. Canaṃ {Canam} =cana; and then, if Vin III.121 (cp. ca 3); or should it be separated at this passage into ca naṃ? Canda {Canda} [Vedic candra from *(s)quend to be light or glowing, cp. candana sandal (incense) wood, Gr. ka/hdaros cinder; Lat. candeo, candidus, incendo; Cymr. cann white; E. candid, candle, incense, cinder] the moon (i. e. the shiner) S I.196; II.206; M II.104; A I.227, II.139 sq.; III.34; Dh 413; Sn 465, 569, 1016; J III.52; VI.232; Pv I.127; II.66; Vv 647 (maṇi° a shiny jewel. or a moonlike jewel, see VvA 278, v. l. °sanda). -puṇṇa° the full moon J I.149, 267; V.215; °mukha with a face like a full moon (of the Buddha) DhA III.171. Canda is extremely frequent in similes & comparisens: see list in J.P.T.S. 1907, 85 sq. In enumerations of heavenly bodies or divine beings Canda always precedes Suriya (the Sun), e. g. D II.259; A I.215; II.139; Nd2 308 (under Devatā). Cp. candimant. On quāsi mythol. etym. see Vism 418. -kanta a gem Miln 118; (g)gāha a moon-eclipse (lit. seizure, i. e. by Rāhu) D I.10 (cp. DA I.95); -maṇḍala the moon's disc, the shiny disc, i. e. the moon A I.283; J I.253; III.55; IV.378; V.123; Dhs 617; Vism 216 (in compar,); PvA 65; -suriyā (pl.) sun & moon J IV.61. Candaka {Candaka} =canda VvA 278 (maṇi°); Sdhp 92 (mayūra° the eye in a peacock's tail). Candatta {Candatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. canda] in cpd. paripuṇṇa° state or condition of the full moon SnA 502. Candana {Candana} (m. & nt.) [Deriv. unknown. Possibly nonAryan; but see under canda, Sk. candana] sandal (tree, wood or unguent, also perfume) Vin I.203; A I.9, 145, 226; III.237; Dh 54; J V.420 (tree, m.); Miln 382; DhA I.422; IV.189 (°pūjā); VvA 158 (agalu° with aloe & sandal); PvA 76. - Kāsika° sandal from Kāsī A III.391; IV.281; Miln 243, 348; ratta° red s. J IV.442; lohita° id. A V.22; J I.37; hari° yellow s. J I.146. -ussada covered with sandal perfumes Th 1, 267; Pv III.91 (=candanasārānulitto PvA 211); -gaṇṭhi (or better gaṇḍi; see the latter) a block of sandal wood Vin II.110; -gandhin having a scent of sandal J III.190; -vilepana sandal unguent J IV.3. -sāra choice sandal (wood or perfume) Vv 523, J I.53, 340. Pāli Text Society 606 Pāli-English Dictionary Candanikā {Candanika} (f.) a pool at the entrance of a village (usually, but not necessarily dirty: see Vin II.122 & cp. candanapanka Av.Ś I.221, see also PW sub candana2) S V.361; M I.11, 73, 448; A I.161; Th 1, 567; J V.15; Miln 220; Vism 264, 343, 359; Sdhp 132. Candimā {Candima} (m. or f.?) [Sk. candramas m. & candrimā f., cp. pūrṇimā; a cpd. of canda+mā, cp. māsa. The Pāli form, however, is based on a supposed derivation fr. canda+mant, like bhagavā, and is most likely m. On this formation cp. Lat. lumen=Sk. rukmān luminous, shiny] the moon. By itself only in similes at Dh 208, 387 (at end of pada) & in "abbhā mutto va candimā" M II.104=Dh 172=Th 1, 871; Dh 382=Th 1, 873; Ps I.175. - Otherwise only in combn with suriya, moon & sun, D I.240; II.12; III.85 sq., 90, 112; S II.266; V.264 sq.; A I.227; II.53, 130; V.59; Vv 30; J II.213; Miln 191; Vism 153. Also in cpd. candimāpabhā the light of the moon (thus BB, whereas SS read at all passages candiyā° or candiya-pabhā) S III.156=V.44= It 20. Capala {Capala} (adj.) [Sk. capala cp. cāpa bow; from *qep to shake or quiver, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under caperro] moving to & fro, wavering, trembling, unsteady, fickle S I.204; V.269; M I.470 (and a° steady); A III.199, 355, 391; Dh 33; Pug 35; J I.295; II.360. At J VI.548 it means one who lets the saliva flow out of his mouth (expld by paggharita-lāla "trickle-spit"). Capalatā {Capalata} (f.) [fr. last] fickleness, unsteadiness Miln 93. 251; Pgdp 47, 64. At Nd2 585 as capalanā+cāpalyaṃ with gedhikatā, meaning greed, desire (cp. capala at J VI.548). Capu {Capu} (or capucapu) a sound made when smacking one's lips Vin II.214 (capucapukāraka adj.), 221; IV.197. Cappeti {Cappeti} [Sk. carvayati Dhtp 295 gives root cabb in meaning "adana"] to chew Bdhgh on Vin II.115. Cp. jappati. Camati {Camati} (& cameti) [cam. to sip; but given at Dhtm 552 in meaning "adana," eating] to rinse, only in cpd. ācamati (ācameti). Camara {Camara} [Deriv. unknown, probably non-Aryan. Sk. camara] 1. the Yak ox (Bos grunniens) J I.149; III.18, 375; V.416; Miln 365. - f. -ī J I.20; Sdhp 621. - In cpds. camari° J IV.256. - 2. a kind of antelope (-ī) J VI.537. -vījanī (f.) a chowry (the bushy tail of the Yak made into a brush to drive away flies) Vin II.130. This is one of the royal ensigns (see kakudhabhaṇḍa & cp. vāla-vījanī). Camasa {Camasa} [Vedic camasa, a cup] a ladle or spoon for sacrificing into the sacred fire J VI.52824=5294 (unite ca with masa, cp. 5299 and n. 4: aggijuhana-kaṭacchu-sankhātimasaðca [for camasañ ca] v. l. Bd). Cp. Kern, Toevoegselen s. v. Camu {Camu} (f.) [Both derivation and exact meaning uncertain. The Vedic camū is a peculiar vessel into wh. the Soma flows from the press. In late Pali & Sk. it means a kind of small army, perhaps a division drawn up more or less in the shape of the Vedic vessel] an army J II.22; camūpati a general Mhvs 10, 65; 23, 4; Dāvs I.3. Campa {Campa} =campaka J VI.151. Pāli Text Society 607 Pāli-English Dictionary Campaka {Campaka} the Champaka tree (Michelia champaka) having fragrant white & yellow flowers J V.420; VI.269; Miln 338; DA I.280; Vism 514 (°rukkha, in simile); DhA I.384; VvA 194. Campā {Campa} (f.) N. of a town (Bhagulpore) & a river D I.111; DA I.279; J IV.454. Campeyya {Campeyya} N. of a Nāgarāja J IV.454 (=°jātaka, No. 506); Vism 304. Campeyyaka {Campeyyaka} (adj.) belonging to Campā Vin V.114; J VI.269 (here: a Champaka-like tree). Camma {Camma} (nt.) [Vedic carman, cp. Lat. corium hide or leather, cortex bark, scortum hide; Ohg. herdo; Ags. heorQa=E. hide; also Sk. kṛtti; Ohg. scirm (shield); E. skin; from *sqer to cut, skin (cp. kaṭu)=the cut-off hide, cp. Gr. de/rw: (de/rma] 1. skin, hide, leather Vin I.192 (sīha° vyaggha° dīpi°), 196 (elaka° aja° miga°); A IV.393 (sīha° dīpi°); PvA 157 (kadalimiga° as rug); J II.110 (sīha°); III.82, 184; Miln 53; Sdhp 140. It is supposed to be subcutaneous (under chavi as tegument), & next to the bone: chaviṃ chindetvā cammaṃ chindati S II.238=A IV.129; freq. in expr. like aṭṭhi-cammanahāru-matta (skin & bones) PvA 68, see under nahāru; cammamaṃsa-nahāru PvA 80. - 2. a shield Vin II.192 (asi° sword & shield); M I.86; A III.93; J V.373; VI.580. -aṇḍa a water-skin J I.250; -kāra a worker in leather, a tanner Vin IV.7; Miln 331; a harness-maker J V.45; a waggon-builder and general artisan J IV.174 (=rathakāra); also as kārin PvA 175 (=rathakārin); -khaṇḍa an animal's skin, used as a rug Miln 366; Vism 99; skin used as a water-vessel (see khaṇḍa) Vin II.122; Ps I.176; -ghaṭaka a water-skin J II.345; -naddha (nt.) a drum Bu I.31; -pasibbaka a sack, made of skin or leather ThA 283; J VI.431, 432 (as v. l.); -bandha a leather strap Vin I.194; -bhastā (f.) a sack J V.45; -māluka a leather bag J VI.431, 432; -yodhin a soldier in cuirass D I.51≈(in list of var. occupations; DA I.157: cammakañcukaṃ pavisitvā); A IV.107, 110; -varatta (f.) a leather thong J II.153; -vāsin one who wears the skin (of a black antelope), i. e. a hermit J VI.528; -sāṭaka an ascetic wearing clothes of skin J III.82 (nāma paribbājaka). Cammaka {Cammaka} a skin Bu II.52. Caya {Caya} [from cināti] piling, heaping; collection, mass Vin II.117; DhsA 44; in building: a layer Vin II.122, 152. As -° one who heaps up, a collector, hoarder M I.452 (nikkha°, khetta°, etc.). See also ā°, apa°, upa°. Cara {Cara} (n-adj.) [from car, carati] 1. the act of going about, walking; one who walks or lives (usually -°): oka° living in water M I.117; J VI.416; antara° S IV.173; eka° solitary Sn 166; saddhiṃ° a companion Sn 45; anattha° J V.433; jala° Dāvs IV.38. See also cāreti & gocara. Instr. carasā (adv.) walking M I.449. - cara-vāda "going about talk," gossip, idle talk S III.12; V.419. - sucara easy, duccara difficult Vin III.26. - 2. one who is sent on a message, a secret emissary, a spy S I.79. Also as carapurisa J II.404; IV.343; VI.469; DhA I.193. - Note.-cara-purāya at A V.133 should be changed into v. l. SS paramparāya. Caraka {Caraka} 1.=cara2 (a messenger) J VI.369 (attha°); adj. walking through: sabbalokaṃ° J V.395. - 2. any animal S I.106; PvA 153 (vana°). Pāli Text Society 608 Pāli-English Dictionary Caraṇa {Carana} (nt.) [of a deer, called pañca-hattha "having 5 hands," i. e. the mouth and the 4 feet] 1. walking about, grazing, feeding VvA 308 (°ṭṭhāna). - 2. the foot Vin IV.212; J V.431. - 3. acting, behaviour, good conduct, freq. in combn with vijjā, e. g. A II.163; V.327; Dh 144; Vism 202 (in detail); PvA 1, etc. - D III.97, 156; Sn 410, 462, 536; Miln 24. sampannacaraṇa (adj.) accomplished in right behaviour S I.153, 166; Sn 1126; Pv II.138. - Cp. sañ°. Caraṇavant {Caranavant} (adj.) one of good conduct (=sampannacaraṇa) Sn 533, 536. Carati [Vedic carati, *qÛel to move, turn, turn round (cp. kaṇṭha & kula)=Lat. colo (incolo), Gr. pe/lomai, po/los (also ai)po/los goat-herd & bouko/los cowherd=gocara); also P. cakka, q. v. A doublet of car is cal, see calati Dhtp 243 expld car by "gati-bhakkhanesu"] to move about, to "live and move," to behave, to be. - Imper. act. cara (J I.152), carā (metri causa, J III.393); - imper. med. carassu (Sn 696), pl. carāmase (=exhortative, Sn 32); - ppr. caranto (J I.152; PvA 14) & caraṃ (Sn 151; Dh 61, 305; It 117); med. caramāna (Vin I.83; Pv I.1010; PvA 160); - pot. careyya (Sn 45, 386, 1065; Dh 142, 328) & care (Sn 35; Dh 49, 168, 329; It 120); - fut. carissati (M I.428); - aor. sg. 1st acariṃ (S III.29), acārisaṃ (Pv III.95), 3rd acari (Sn 344), acāri (Sn 354; Dh 326); cari (J II.133). - pl. 3rd acariṃsu (Sn 809), acārisuṃ (Sn 284); cariṃsu (Sn 289), acaruṃ (Sn 289), acāruṃ (J VI.114); - inf. carituṃ (caritu-kāma J II.103); - ger. caritvā (J I.50) & caritvāna (Sn 816); - pp. ciṇṇa (q. v.) - Caus. cāreti (=Denom. of cara), pp. carita. 2nd caus. carāpeti (q. v.). - See also cara, caraṇa, cariyā, cāraka, cārikā, cārin. Meaning: 1. Lit. (a) to move about, to walk, travel, etc.; almost synon. with gacchati in contrast to tiṭṭhati to stand still; cp. phrase carað vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṃ nisinno udāhu sayaṃ It 117 (walking, standing, sitting, reclining; the four iriyāpathā); care tiṭṭhe acche saye It 120; tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā sayāno vā Sn 151. - Defined as "catūhi iriyāpathehi vicarati" (i. e. more generally applied as "behaviour," irrespective of position) DhA II.36. Expl. constantly by series viharati iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti Nd2 237. - carāmi loke I move about (=I live) in the world Sn 25, 455; agiho c. I lead a homeless life Sn 456, 464; eko c. he keeps to himself Sn 35, 956; Dh 305, 329; sato c. he is mindful Sn 1054, 1085; gocaraṃ gaṇhanto c. to walk about grazing (see below) J III.275; gavesanto c. to look for J I.61. - (b) With definition of a purpose: piṇḍāya c. to go for alms (gāmaṃ to the village) Sn 386; bhikkhāya c. id. J III.82. - With acc. (in etymol. constr.) to undertake, set out for, undergo, or simply to perform, to do. Either with c. cārikaṃ to wander about, to travel: Vin I.83; S I.305 (applied: "walk ye a walk"); Sn 92; Dh 326; PvA 14 (janapada-cārikaṃ), 160 (pabbata-c° wandering over the mountains); or with cāraṃ: piṇḍa-c.° carati to perform the begging-round Sn 414; or with caritaṃ: duccaritaṃ c. to lead a bad life Sn 665 (see carita). Also with acc. of similar meaning, as esanaṃ c. to beg Th 1, 123; vadhaṃ c. to kill Th 1, 138; dukkhaṃ c. to undergo pain S I.210. - (c) In pregnant sense: to go out for food, to graze (as gocaraṃ c. to pasture, see gocara). Appl. to cows: caranti gāvo Sn 20; J III.479; or to the bhikkhu: Pv I.1010 (bh. caramāno=bhikkhāya c. PvA 51); Sn 386 (vikāle na c. buddhā: the Buddhas do not graze at the wrong time). - 2. Appld meaning: (a) abs. to behave, conduct oneself Sn 1080; J VI.114; Miln 25 (kāmesu micchā c. to commit immorality). - (b) with obj. to practise, exercise, lead a life: brahmacariyaṃ c. to lead a life of purity Vin I.17; Sn 289, 566, 1128; dhammañ c. to walk in righteousness J I.152; sucaritaṃ c. to act rightly, duccaritaṃ c. to act perversely S I.94; Dh 231. {Carati} Carahi {Carahi} (adv.) [Sk. tarhi; with change tQ c due to analogy with °ci (°cid) in combn with interr.] then, therefore, now, esp. after interr. pron.: ko carahi jānāti who then knows? Sn 990; kathað carahi jānemu how then shall we know? Sn 999; kið c. A V.194. - Vin I.36; II.292; Sn 988; J III.312; Miln 25; DA I.289. Pāli Text Society 609 Pāli-English Dictionary Carāpeti {Carapeti} [Caus. 11. of carati] to cause to move, to make go J I.267 (bheriṃ c. to have the drum beaten); PvA 75 (do.); DhA I.398 (to circulate). As cārāpeti J V.510 (bheriṃ). Carita {Carita} [pp. of cāreti, see cara & carati] 1. (adj.) going, moving, being like, behaving (-°) J VI.313; Miln 92 (rāgac°=ratta); Vism 105, 114 (rāga°, dosa°, moha°, etc.). - 2. (nt.) action, behaviour, living Dh 330 (ekassa c. living alone); Ps I.124; Miln 178. See also carati 1b, 2b. Esp. freq. with su° and duc°: good, right, proper or (nt.) good action, right conduct & the opposite; e. g. sucarita Dh 168, 231; PvA 12, 71, 120; duccarita A I.146; II.85, 141; III.267, 352; D III.111. 214; Dh 169, Sn 665; Pv I.94 (°ṃ caritvā), etc. See also kāya° vacī° mano° under kāya. Caritaka {Caritaka} (nt.) conduct (=carita2) Th 1, 36. Caritar {Caritar} [n. agent to cāreti, cp. carita] walking, performing (c. acc.) M I.77. Carima {Carima} (adj.) [Vedic carama, Gr. te/los end, pa/lai a long time (ago)] subsequent, last (opp. pubba) Th 1, 202; It 18; J V.120. - acarima not later (apubba ac° simultaneously) D I.185; M III.65; Pug. 13. -bhava the last rebirth (in Saṃsāra, with ref. to Arahantship) ThA 260, cp. caramabhavika in Divy (freq.) & next. Carimaka {Carimaka} (adj.) last (=carima) M I.426; Nd2 569b (°viððāṇassa nirodha, the destruction of the last conscious state, of the death of an Arahant); Vism 291. Cariya {Cariya} (nt.) & cariyā (f.) [from car, carati] (mostly -°) conduct, behaviour, state of, life of. Three cariyās at Ps I.79; six at Vism 101; eight at Ps II.19 sq., 225 & four sets of eight in detail at Nd2 237b. Very freq. in dhamma° & brahma°, a good walk of life, proper conduct, chastity eka° living alone Sn 820; unchā° begging J II.272; III.37; bhikkhā° a life of begging Sn 700; nagga° nakedness Dh 141. - See also carati 2b. In cpds. cariyā°. -piṭaka the last book in the Khuddaka-nikāya; -manussa a spy, an outpost J III.361 (v. l. cārika°). Cala {Cala} (adj.) [see calati] moving, quivering; unsteady, fickle, transient S IV.68 (dhammā calā c'eva vyayā ca aniccā, etc.); J II.299; III.381; V.345; Miln 93, 418; Sdhp 430, 494. -acala steadfast, immovable S I.232; J I.71 (ṭṭhāna); Vv 514 (°ṭṭhāna=Ep. of Nibbāna); acalaṃ sukhaṃ (=Nibbāna) Th 2, 350; cp. niccala motionless DhA III.38. -ācala [intens. redupl.] moving to & fro, in constant motion, unsteady J IV.494, 498 (=cañcala); Miln 92; (cp. Divy 180, 281); -kkaku having a quivering hump J III.380 IV.330 (=calamānakakudha or calakakudha). Calaka1 {Calaka} (m.) a camp marshal, adjutant D I.51≈(in list of various occupations); A IV.107 sq. Calaka2 {Calaka} (nt.) [perhaps from carv to chew; but Sk. carvana, chewing, is not found in the specific sense of P. calaka. Cp. ucchiṭṭha and cuṇṇa] a piece of meat thrown away after having been chewed Vin II.115; IV.266 (=vighāsa); VvA 222 (°aṭṭhikāni meat-remnants & bones). Calati {Calati} [Dhtp 251 kampana, to shake. Perhaps connected with car, carati] to move, stir, be agitated, tremble, be confused, waver S I.107; Sn 752; J I.303 (kileso cali); III.188 (macchā c.) Miln 260. - ppr. med. calamāna J IV.331. - Esp. freq. in expression kammaja-vātā caliṃsu the labour-pains began to stir J I.52; VI.485. - pp. calita (q. v.). - caus. caleti to shake S I.109. Pāli Text Society 610 Pāli-English Dictionary Calana {Calana} (adj. & nt.) shaking, trembling, vibrating; excitement J III.188; DhsA 72. - f. calanī (quick,+langhī) a kind of antelope J VI.537. Calita {Calita} (adj.) [pp. of calati] wavering, unsteady Miln 93, 251; Vism 113; VvA 177. - (nt.) Sn p. 146. Cavati {Cavati} [Vedic cyavate from cyu=Gr. seu/w; cp. Lat. cieo, cio, sollicitus, Gr. ki/w, kine/w, Goth. haitan=Ohg, heizan] to move, get into motion, shift, to fall away, decease, esp. to pass from one state of existence into another D I.14 (sañsaranti c° upapajjanti, cp. DA I.105); Kh VIII.4 (=KhA 220: apeti vigacchati acetano pi samāno puððakkhaya-vasena aññaṃ thānaṃ gacchati); It 99= Nd2 2352 (satte cavamāne upapajjamāne); It 77 (devo deva-kāyā c. "the god falls from the assembly of gods"), Sn 1073 for bhavetha (=Nd2 238;) PvA 10. Caus. cāveti: inf. cāvetuṃ S I.128 sq., 134 (°kāma.) - pp. cuta (q. v.), see also cuti. Cavana {Cavana} (nt.) [from cavati] shifting, moving, passing away, only in °dhamma doomed to fall, destined to decease D I.18, 19; III.31, 33; M I.326; It 76; J IV.484; VI.482 (°dhammatā). Cavanatā {Cavanata} (f) state of shifting, removal S II.3≈(cuti+); M I.49 (id.). Cāga [from cajati, to give up, Vedic tyaj. Cp. Sk. tyāga] (a) abandoning, giving up, renunciation Vin I.10; S III.13, 26, 158; M I.486; A I.299. More freq. as: (b) liberality, generosity, munificence (n.) generous, munificent (adj.): sīlasampanno saddho purisapuggalo sabbe maccharino loke cāgena atirocati "he who is virtuous & religious excels all stingy people in generosity" A III.34. In freq. combns e. g. sacca dama dhiti c. Sn 188=S I.215; sacca dama c. khanti Sn 189= S I.215; mutta° (adj.) liberal, munificent, S V.351=392. °paribhāvita citta "a heart bent on giving" S V.309. In this sense cāga forms one of the (3, 4, 5 or 7) noble treasures of a man (cp. the Catholic treasure of grace & see °dhana below), viz. (as 5) saddhā, sīla, suta, cāga, paððā (faith, virtue, right knowledge, liberality, wisdom) S I.232; A I.210; III.80=S IV.250; M III.99; D III.164, 165; cp. A I.152=III.44; (as 4: the last minus suta) S V.395; A II.62 (sama°); (as 3) saddhā, sīla, cāga J II.112; (as 7) ajjhesanā, tapo, sīla, sacca, cāga, sati, mati J II.327; cp. śīlaśruta-tyāga Itm 311. - PvA 30, 120; Sdhp 214, 323. See also anussati & anussarati. -ādhiṭṭhāna the resolution of generosity, as one of the 4: paððā°, sacca°, c°., upasama° D III.229; -ānussati generosity A I.30; V.331; D III.250, 280; Vism 197; -kathā talk about munificence A III.181; dhana the treasure of the good gift, as one of the 7 riches or blessings, the ariyadhanāni, viz. saddhā, sīla, hiri, ottappa, suta, c., paððā D III.163, 251,; A IV.5; VvA 113; as one of 5 (see above) A III.53; -sampadā (& sampanna) the blessing of (or blessed with) the virtue of munificence A I.62; II.66; III.53; IV.221, etc. {Caga} Cāgavant {Cagavant} (adj.) generous A III.183; IV.217, 220; Pug 24. Cāgin {Cagin} (adj.) giving up, sacrificing, resigning Sn 719 (kāma°). Cāṭi {Cati} (f.) [cp. Hindī cāṭā] 1. a jar, vessel, pot J I.199; 302 (pānīya°); III.277 (madhu° honey jar); DhA I.394 (tela° oil tank); VvA 76 (sālibhatta° holding a meal of rice).- 2. a measure of capacity J II.404; IV.343. - 3. a large vessel of the tank type used for living in Vin I.153. pañjara a cage made of, or of the form of a large earthen jar, wherein a man could lie in ambush J V.372, 385; -pāla (nt.) an earthenware shield (?) J V.373 (=kīṭa). Pāli Text Society Cāṭu 611 Pāli-English Dictionary [cp. cāru] pleasant, polite in °kammatā politeness, flattery Miln 370 (cp. Sk. cāṭukāra); cāṭu-kamyatā Vbh 246; Vism 17, 23, 27; KhA 236. {Catu} Cātur {Catur} ° (and cātu°) [see catur] consisting of four. Only in cpds. viz. -(r)anta (adj.) "of four ends," i. e. covering or belonging to the 4 points of the compass, all-encircling, Ep. of the earth: J II.343 (paṭhavī); IV.309 (mahī) -(n-m.) one who rules over the 4 points; i. e. over the whole world (of a Cakkavattin) D I.88 (cp. DA I.249); II.16; Sn 552. See also Sp. AvS II.111, n. 2; kummāsa sour gruel with four ingredients VvA 308; -(d)dasī (f.) [to catuddasa fourteen] the 14th day of the lunar half month A I.144. PvA 55; VvA 71, 99, 129. With pancadasī, aṭṭhamī & pāṭihāriyapakkha at Sn 402; Vv 155. °dasika belonging to the 14th day at Vin IV.315; -(d)disa (adj.) belonging to, or comprising the four quarters, appld to a man of humanitarian mind Sn 42 ("showing universal love," see Nd2 239); cp. RV X.136. Esp. appld to the bhikkhu-sangha "the universal congregation of bhikkhus" Vin I 305; II.147; D I.145; J I.93; Pv II.28; III.214 (expld PvA 185 by catūhi disāhi āgata-bhikkhu-sangha). Cp. AvŚ I.266; II.109; -(d)dīpa of four continents: rājā Th 2, 486; cp. M Vastu I.108, 114; -(d)dīpaka sweeping over the whole earth (of a storm) Vin I.290, cp. J IV.314 & AvŚ I.258; -(b)bedā (pl.) the four Vedas Miln 3; -māsin of 4 months; f. °inī Vin I.155; D I.47; M III.79; DA I.139, cp. komudī; -(m)mahāpatha the place where 4 roads cross, a crossroad D I.102, 194=243; M I.124; III.91; cp. catu°. -(m)mahābhūtika consisting of the 4 great elements (of kāya) D I.34, 55, 186, 195; S II.94 sq.; Miln 379; cp. Av.Ś II.191 & Sk. cāṭurbhautika; -(m)mahārājikā (pl.) (sc. devā) the retinue of the Four Kings, inhabiting the lowest of the 6 devalokas Vin I.12; III.18; D I.215; Nd2 307 (under devā); J II.311 (deva-loka); -yāma (saṃvara) fourfold restraint (see yāma) D I.57, 58 (cp. DA I.167); III.48 sq.; S I.66; M I.377; Vism 410. Cp. Dial. I.75 n1. Cāturiya {Caturiya} (nt.) [cp. catura+iya] skill, cleverness, shrewdness J III.267; VI.410; ThA, 227; Vbh 551; Vism 104; Dāvs V.30. Cāpa {Capa} (m. nt.) [Sk. cāpa, from *qēp tremble, cp. capala wavering, quivering] a bow M I.429 (opposed to kodaṇḍa); Dh 156 (°ātikhīṇa shot from the bow, cp. DhA III.132), 320 (abl. cāpāto metri causa); J IV.272; V.400; Miln 105 (daḷha°), 352. -koṭi the end of a bow VvA 261; nāḷi (f.) a bow-case J II.88; -lasuṇa (nt.) a kind of garlic Vin IV.259. Cāpalla {Capalla} (nt.) [Der. fr. capala, Sk. cāpalya] fickleness D I.115 (=DA I.286). Also as cāpalya M I.470; Vbh 351; Vism 106. Cāmara {Camara} (nt.) [from camara] a chowrie, the tail of bos grunniens used as a whisk Sn 688; Vv 643; J VI.510; VvA 271, 276. Cpd. cāmarī-gāhaka J VI.218 (anka) a hook holding the whisk. Cāmikara {Camikara} (nt.). [Deriv. unknown. Sk. cāmīkara] gold VvA 12, 13, 166. Cāyati {Cavati} [fr. ci] to honour, only in cpd. -apacāyati (q. v.). The Dhtp (237) defines the root cāy by pūjā. Cāra {Cara} [fr. car carati to move about] motion, walking, going; doing, behaviour, action, process Miln 162 (+vihāra); Dhs 8=85 (=vicāra); DhsA 167. Usually -° (n. & adj.): kāma° going at will J IV.261; pamāda° a slothful life J I.9; piṇḍa° alms-begging Sn 414, 708; sabbaratti° Pāli Text Society 612 Pāli-English Dictionary wandering all night S I.201; samavattha° A III.257. See also carati Ib. -vihāra doing & behaving, i. e. good conduct J II.232; Dpvs. VI.38; cp. Miln 162 (above). Cāraka {Caraka} (cārika) (adj.) wandering about, living, going, behaving, always -°, like ākāsa°, niketa°, pure° (see pubbangama), vana°, - f. cārikā journey, wandering, esp. as cārikaṃ carati to go on alms-pilgrimage (see carati Ib) Vin I.83; J I.82; II.286; Dh 326; Miln 14, 22; °ñ pakkamati to set out wandering J I.87; Miln 16. - S I.199; M I.117; A III.257; DA I.239 sq. (in detail on two cārikā); VvA 165; EnA 295 (unchā°). Cāraṇa {Carana} (adj.)=cāraka Sn 162 (saṃsuddha°). Cāraṇika {Caranika} v.v. vāraṇika Th I.1129? a little play, masque, cp. Sk cāraṇa & Mrs. Rh. D. Pss of the Brethren, 419. Cāritta {Caritta} (nt.) [From car] practice, proceeding, manner of acting, conduct J I.90, 367; II.277 (loka°); V.285 (vanka°); Miln 133; VvA 31. - cārittaṃ āpajjati to mix with, to call on, to have intercourse with (c. loc.) M I.470; S II.270 (kulesu); M I.287=III.40 (kāmesu); J III.46 (rakkhitagopitesu). -vāritta manner of acting & avoiding J III.195, cp. Th 1. 591; Vism 10. See on their mutual relation Vism 11; -sīla code of morality VvA 37. Cārin {Carin} (only -°) (adj.) walking, living, experiencing; behaving, acting, practising. (a) lit. asanga° S I.199; akāla° Sn 386; ambu° Sn 62; vihangapatha° Sdhp 241; sapadāna° M I.30; Sn 65; pariyanta° Sn 904. - (b) fig. anudhamma° Sn 69; āgu° A II.240; A III.163; dhamma° Miln 19; brahma° Sn 695; manāpa° Vv 314; yata° Sn 971; sama° Miln 19. See all s. v. & cp. caṭu. Cāru {Caru} (adj.) [Vedic cāru & cāyu to *qe - *qā, as in kāma, Lat. carus, etc., see under kāma] charming, desirable, pleasant, beautiful J VI.481; Miln 201; Sdhp 428, 512; VvA 36 (=vaggu), sucāru S I.181; Pv II.1212 (=suṭṭhumanorama). -dassana lovely to behold Sn 548; J VI.449 (expl. on p. 450 as: cāru vuccati suvaṇṇaṃ=suvaṇṇadassana); VI.579; f. -ī Pv III.614. Cāreti {Careti} [Denom. fr. cara; cp. carati] to set going, to pasture, feed, preserve: indriyāni c. to feast one's senses (cp. Ger. "augenweide") PvA 58; khantiṃ c. to feed meekness DA I.277; olambakaṃ cārento drooping J I.174; Pass. ppr. cāriyamāna being handed round J IV.2 (not vā°)-pp. carita. - Cp. vi°. Cāla {Cala} [From calati] shaking, a shock, only in bhūmi° earthquake. Cālanī {Calani} (f.) [to cālana of calaka2] a pestle, a mortar Vin I.202 (in cuṇṇa° & dussa°, cp. saṇha). Cāleti {Caleti} [caus. of calati] to move, to shake J V.40; to scatter J I.71 (tiṇāni); to sift Vin I.202. Cāvanā {Cavana} (f.) moving, shifting, disappearance Vin III.112 (ṭhānato); Sdhp 61 (id.). Cāveti {Caveti} [caus. of cavati] to bring to fall, move, drive away; disturb, distract A IV.343 (samādhimhā); J I.60 (inf. cāvetu-kāma); II.329 (jhānā, abl.). Aor. acāvayi (prohib.) Sn 442 (ṭhānā). Pāli Text Society 613 Pāli-English Dictionary Ci {Ci} (cid in Sandhi) [Vedic cid nom. nt. to interr. base *qÛi (as in Gr. ti/s, Lat. quis, Goth. hvi- leiks, see ki°, cp. ka°, ku°), = Gr. ti/(d), Lat. quid & quid(d)em, Av. ciṭ (cp. tad, yad, kad beside taṃ, yaṃ, kiṃ)] indef. interr. particle (always -°), in koci (= Sk. kaścid) whoever, kiðci (kincideva) whatever, kadāci at some time or any time, etc. (q. v.), see also ca, cana, ce. Cikicchati [Sk. cikitsati, Desid. of cit, cinteti. Cp. vicikicchā], usually tikicchati to reflect, think over, intend, aim at. Pp. cikicchita KhA 188 (in expln of vicikicchita q. v.). {Cikicchati} Cikkhati {Cikkhati} (cikkhanā, etc.) [Freq. of khyā, Dhtp 19: cikkh= vacane] to tell, to announce: see ā° & paṭisaṃ°. Cikkhalla {Cikkhalla} (nt.) [Sk. cikkaṇa & cikkala, slippery+ya] mud, mire, swamp; often with udaka°. Vin I.253; II.120, 159, 291: III.41; A III.394; J I.196; Miln 286, 311, 397; PvA 102, 189, 215. - (adj.) Vin II.221; IV.312; Pv IV.116; Miln 286. Cikkhallavant {Cikkhallavant} (adj.) muddy PvA 225. Cikkhassati {Cikkhassati} [Desid. of kṣar=Sk. cikṣariṣati] to wish to drop, to ooze out Miln 152 (°ssanto), see Kern. Toev. II.139 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87. Cingulaka {Cingulaka} (& °ika) (m. nt.) 1. a kind of plant Sn 239 (=kaṇavīra-pupphasaṇṭhāna-sīsa SnA 283). - 2. a toy windmill, made of palm-leaves, etc. (DA I.86: tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamana-cakkaṃ) Vin II.10; D I.6 M I.266; A V.203; Miln 229. Cingulāyati {Cingulayati} [Denom. fr. cingula] to twirl round, to revolve like a windmill A I.112. Cicciṭāyati [onomat. cp. ciṭiciṭāyati] to hiss, fizz, sizzle (always combd with ciṭiciṭāyati) Vin I.225; S I.169; Sn p. 15; Pug 36; Miln 258 sq. {Ciccitayati} Cicciṭāyana {Ciccitayana} (nt.) fizzing Vism 408 (°sadda). Ciñcā {Cinca} (f.) [Sk. ciðcā & tintiḍikā] the tamarind tree J V.38 (°vana); SnA 78. Ciṭi—Ciṭi {Citi-Citi} [redupl. interj.] fizz DA I.137. Ciṭiciṭāyati {Citicitayati} see cicciṭāyati; Vin I.225; cp. Divy 606. Ciṇṇa {Cinna} [pp. of carati] travelled over, resorted to, made a habit of; done, performed, practised J III.541; Miln 360. - su° well performed, accomplished S I.42=214=Sn 181; Pv III.56. Cp. ā°, pari°, vi°. -ṭṭhāna the place where one is wont to go J II.159; -mānatta one who performs the Mānatta Vin IV.242; -vasin one who has reached mastership in (c. loc.) ThA 74; Vism 154, 158, 164, 169, 331 sq., 376; der. -vāsibhāva DhsA 167 (read vasī°). Ciṇṇatta {Cinnatta} (nt.) [Der. fr. ciṇṇa] custom, habit Miln 57, 105. Pāli Text Society 614 Pāli-English Dictionary Cita {Cita} [pp. of cināti] heaped; lined or faced with (cp. citaka2) pokkharaṇiyo iṭṭhakāhi citā D II.178, cp. Vin II.123. -antaraṃsa "one whose shoulder-hole is heaped up," one who has the shoulders well filled out (Ep. of a Mahāpurisa) D II.18; III.144, 164. Citaka & Citakā {Citaka} (f.) [from ci, cināti to heap up].- 1. a heap, a pile, esp. a funeral pile; a tumulus D II.163; cp, II.1014. J I.255; V.488; VI.559, 576; DA I.6; DhA I.69; II.240; VvA 234; PvA 39. - 2. (adj.) inlaid: suvaṇṇa°, with gold J VI.218 (=°khacita). Citi {Citi} (f.) [From ci, cināti, to heap up] a heap, made of bricks J VI.204 (city-avayata-piṭṭhikā). See also cetiya. Cittaka {Cittaka} (nt.) [to citta1] a sectarian mark on the forehead in °dhara-kumma a tortoise bearing this mark, a landtortoise Miln 364, 408, cp. Miln trsl. II.352. Citta1 & Citra {Citta} {Citra} (adj.) [to cetati; *(s)qait to shine, to be bright, cp. Sk. citra, Sk. P. ketu, , Lat. caelum, Ags. hador, Ohg. heitar, see also citta2] variegated, manifold, beautiful; tasty, sweet, spiced (of cakes), J IV.30 (geṇḍuka); Dh 171 (rājaratha); Vv 479; Pv II.112 (aneka°); IV.313 (pūvā=madhurā PvA 251). Citta (nt.) painting Th 1, 674. - Sn 50 (kāmā=Nd2 240 nānāvaṇṇā), 251 (gāthā); J V.196 (geṇḍuka), 241 VI.218. - sucitta gaily coloured or dressed S I.226 (b); Dh 151 (rājaratha); Pv I.109 (vimāna). -akkhara (adj.) with beautiful vowels S II.267 (Cp. °vyañjana); -attharaka a variegated carpet DA I.256; -āgāra a painted house, i. e. furnished with pictures; a picture gallery Vin IV.298; -upāhana a gaily coloured sandal D I.7≈; kata adorned, dressed up M II.64= Dh 147=Th 1, 769; DhA III.109 (=vicitta); -katha (adj.) =next S I.199 (+bahussuta); -kathin a brilliant speaker, a wise speaker, an orator, preacher. Freq. combd w. bahussuta (of wide knowledge, learned), e. g. paṇḍita . . . medhāvin kalyāṇapaṭibhāna S IV.375, samaṇa bahussuta c. uḷāra Vv 8426. - A III.58; J I.148; Miln 1, 21; kathika=°kathin A I.24; Th 2, 449 (+bahussuta), expld at ThA 281 by cittadhammakatha; kamma decoration, ornamentation, painting J IV.408; VI.333; Miln 278; Vism 306; PvA 147; DhsA 334; (m.) a painter J VI.481; -kāra a painter, a decorator (cp. rajaka) S II.101=III.152; Th 2, 256; J VI.333; -chatta at J VI.540 to be changed into °patta; -patta (adj.) having variegated wings J VI.540, 590; -pāṭalī (f.) N. of a plant (the "pied" trumpet-flower) in the world of Asuras J I.202; DhA I.280; -pekhuna having coloured wings J I.207; VI.539; -bimba (-mukhi) (a woman whose face is) like a painted image J V.452 (cp cittakata); -miga the spotted antelope J VI.538; rūpa (nt.) a wonder, something wonderful J VI.512; as adv. °ṃ (to citta2?) easily Vin II.78=III.161; IV.177, 232; -latā the plant Rubia Munjista J VI.278; °vana the R.M. grove, one of Indra's gardens [Sk. caitraratha] J I.52, 104; II.188; VI.590, etc.; -vitāna a bright canopy DhA IV.14; -vyañjana (adj.) with beautiful consonants (cp. °akkhara) S II.267=A I.73=III.107; -sāṇī variegated cloth J II.290; DhA IV.14; -sālā a painted room or picture gallery DA I.253; -sibbana with fine sewing; a cover of various embroidery Sn 304= J IV.395; J VI.218. Citta2 {Citta} (nt.) [Sk. citta, orig. pp. of cinteti, cit, cp. yutta> yuñjati, mutta>muñcati. On etym. from cit. see cinteti]. I. Meaning: the heart (psychologically), i. e. the centre & focus of man's emotional nature as well as that intellectual element which inheres in & accompanies its manifestations; i. e. thought. In this wise citta denotes both the agent & that which is enacted (see kamma II. introd.), for in Indian Psychology citta is the seat & organ of thought (cetasā cinteti; cp. Gr. frh/n, although on the whole it corresponds more to the Homeric qumo/s). As in the verb (cinteti) there are two stems closely allied and almost inseparable in meaning (see § III.), viz. cit & cet (citta & cetas); cp. ye should restrain, curb, subdue citta by ceto, M I.120, Pāli Text Society 615 Pāli-English Dictionary 242 (cp. attanā coday'attānaṃ Dhp 379 f.); cetasā cittaṃ samannesati S I.194 (cp. cetasā cittaṃ samannesati S I.194). In their general use there is no distinction to be made between the two (see § III.). - The meaning of citta is best understood when explaining it by expressions familiar to us, as: with all my heart; heart and soul; I have no heart to do it; blessed are the pure in heart; singleness of heart (cp. ekagga); all of which emphasize the emotional & conative side or "thought" more than its mental & rational side (for which see manas & viððāṇa). It may therefore be rendered by intention, impulse, design; mood, disposition, state of mind, reaction to impressions. It is only in later scholastic lgg. that we are justified in applying the term "thought" in its technical sense. It needs to be pointed out, as complementary to this view, that citta nearly always occurs in the singular (=heart), & out of 150 cases in the Nikāyas only 3 times in the plural (=thoughts). The substantiality of citta (cetas) is also evident from its connection with kamma (heart as source of action), kāma & the senses in general. - On the whole subject see Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. Eth. introd. & Bud. Psy. ch. II. II. Cases of citta (cetas), their relation & frequency (enumd for gram. purposes). - The paradigma is (numbers denoting %, not including cpds.): Nom. cittaṃ; Gen. (Dat.) cetaso (44) & cittassa (9); Instr. cetasā (42) & cittena (3); Loc. citte (2) & cittamhi (2). - Nom. cittaṃ (see below). Gen. cittassa only (of older passages) in c° upakkileso S III.232; V.92; A I.207; c° damatho Dh 35 & c° vasena M I.214; III.156. Instr. cittena only in S I. viz. cittena nīyati loko p. 39; upakkiliṭṭha° p. 179; asallīnena c° p. 159. Loc. citte only as loc. abs. in samāhite citte (see below) & in citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi v. hoti A I.162; cittamhi only S I.129 & cittasmiṃ only S I.132. - Plural only in Nom. cittāni in one phrase: āsavehi cittāni (vi) mucciṃsu "they purified their hearts from intoxications" Vin I.35; S III.132; IV.20; Sn p. 149; besides this in scholastic works=thoughts, e. g. Vbh 403 (satta cittāni). III. Citta & cetas in promiscuous application. There is no cogent evidence of a clear separation of their respective fields of meaning; a few cases indicate the rôle of cetas as seat of citta, whereas most of them show no distinction. There are cpds. having both citta° & ceto° in identical meanings (see e. g. cittasamādhi & ceto°), others show a preference for either one or the other, as ceto is preferred in ceto-khila & ceto-vimutti (but: vimutta-citta), whereas citta is restricted to combn w. upakkilesa, etc. The foll. sentences will illustrate this. Vivaṭena cetasā sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāveti "with open heart he contemplates a radiant thought" S V.263=D III.223=A IV.86; cetasā cittaṃ samannesati vippamuttaṃ "with his heart he scrutinizes their pure mind" S I.194; vigatābhijjhena cetasā is followed by abhijjāya cittaṃ parisodheti D III.49; anupārambhacitto bhabbo cetaso vikkhepaṃ pahātuṃ A V.149; cetaso vūpasamo foll. by vūpasanta-citto A I.4; samāhite citte foll. by ceto-samādhi D I.13≈; cittaṃ paduṭṭhaṃ foll. by ceto-padosa A I.8; cp. It. 12, 13; cetaso tato cittaṃ nivāraye "a desire of his heart he shall exclude from this" S IV.195. IV. Citta in itṡ relation to other terms referring to mental processes. 1. citta≈hadaya, the heart as incorporating man's personality: hadayaṃ phaleyya, cittavikkhepaṃ pāpuṇeyya (break his heart, upset his reason) S I.126; cittaṃ te khipissāmi hadayan te phālessāmi id. S I.207, 214; Sn p. 32; kāmarāgena cittaṃ me pariḍayhati S I.188>nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ Miln 318 ("my heart is on fire"); cp. abhinibbutatto Sn 343=apariḍayhamāna-citto SnA 347; cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahati to set one's heart on, to wish DhA I.327. 2. c. as mental status, contrasted to (a) physical status: citta>kāya, e. g. kilanta° weary in body & mind D I.20=III.32; ātura° S III.2-5; nikaṭṭha° A II.137; ṭhita° steadfast in body & soul (cp. ṭhitatta) S V.74; °passaddhi quiet of body & soul S V.66. The Commentators distinguish those six pairs of the sankhārākkhandha, or the cetasikas: citta-kāya-passaddhi, -lahutā, etc. as quiet, buoyancy, etc., of (a) the viððāṇakkhandha (consciousness), (b) the other 3 mental khandhas, making up the nāmakāya (DhsA 150 on Dhs. 62: Compendium of Phil. 96, n. 3); passaddha° D III.241, 288. - (b) intellectual status: citta>manas & viððāṇa (mind>thought & understanding). These three constitute the invisible energizer of the body, alias mind in its manifestations: yañ ca vuccati Pāli Text Society 616 Pāli-English Dictionary cittan ti vā mano ti vā viððāṇan ti vā: (a) ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo, etc., D I.21; (b) tatr'assutavā puthujjano n'ālaṃ nibbindituṃ, etc. S II.94; (g) taṃ rattiyā ca divasassa ca añña-d-eva uppajjati aññaṃ nirujjhati S II.95, cf. ThA. 1 on 125. - Under ādesanā-pāṭihāriya (thought reading): evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ (thus is your thought & thus your mind, i. e. habit of thinking) D I.213=III.103; A I.170. - niccaṃ idaṃ c. niccaṃ idaṃ mano S I.53; cittena niyyati loko "by thoughts the world is led" S I.39=A II.177 (cp. KS 55); apatiṭṭhita-citto ādīna-manaso avyāpaṇnacetaso S V.74; vyāpanna-citto paduṭṭha-manasankappo S III.93; paduṭṭha-citto=paduṭṭha-manaso PvA 34, 43. 3. c. as emotional habitus: (a) active=intention, contrasted or compared with: (a) will, c. as one of the four samādhis, viz. chanda, viriya, c., vīmaṃsā D III.77; S V.268; Vbh 288. - (b) action, c. as the source of kamma: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti "when the intention is evil, the deed is evil as well" A I.262; cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ . . . yaṃ kiðci pamāṇakataṃ kammaṃ, etc. A V.299. - Esp. in contrast to kāya & vācā, in triad kāyena vācāya cittena (in deed & speech & will otherwise as k. v. manasā, see under kāya III.) S II.231, 271=IV.112. Similarly taṃ vācaṃ appahāya (cittaṃ°, diṭṭhiṃ°) S IV.319=D III.13, 15; & under the constituents of the dakkhiṇeyyasampatti as khetta-sampatti, citta°, payoga° (the recipient of the gift, the good-will, the means) VvA 30, 32. - (b) passive=mood, feelings, emotion, ranging with kāya & paððā under the (3) bhāvanā D III.219; S IV.111; A III.106; cp. M I.237; Nett 91; classed with kāya vedanā dhammā under the (4) satipaṭṭhānas D II.95, 100, 299 sq.; S V.114, etc. (see kāya cpds.). As part of the sīlakkhandha (with sīla ethics, paððā understanding) in adhisīla, etc. Vin V.181; Ps II.243; Vbh 325; cp. tisso sampadā, scil. sīla, citta, diṭṭhi (see sīla & cp. cetanā, cetasika) A I.269. - citta & paððā are frequently grouped together, e. g. S I.13 = 165; D III.269; Th I.125 sq. As feeling citta is contrasted with intellection in the group saððā c. diṭṭhi A II.52; Ps II.80; Vbh 376. 4. Definitions of citta (direct or implied): cittan ti viððāṇaṃ bhūmikavatthu-ārammaṇakiriyādi-cittatāya pan'etaṃ cittan ti vuttaṃ DhA I.228; cittan ti mano mānasaṃ KhA 153; cittaṃ manoviððāṇaṃ ti cittassa etaṃ vevacanaṃ Nett 54. yaṃ cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ, etc. Dhs 6=111 (same for def. of manindriya, under § 17; see Buddh. Psych.). As rūpāvacara citta at Vism 376. V. Citta in its range of semantical applications: (1) heart, will, intention, etc. (see I.). (a) heart as general status of sensory-emotional being; its relation to the senses (indriyāni). A steadfast & constrained heart is the sign of healthy emotional equilibrium, this presupposes the control over the senses; samādahaṃsu cittaṃ attano ujukaṃ akaṃsu, sārathī va nettāni gahetvā indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā S I.26; ujugatocitto ariyasāvako A III.285; ṭhita c. S I.159≈; A III.377=IV.404 (+ānejjappatta); c. na kampati Sn 268; na vikampate S IV.71; opp. capalaṃ c. Dh 33; khitta° a heart unbalanced A II.52 (+visaññin); opp.: avikkhitta° A V.149; PvA 26; c. rakkhitaṃ mahato atthāya saṃvattati a guarded heart turns to great profit A I.7; similarly: c. dantaṃ, guttaṃ, saṃvutaṃ ibid. - cittaṃ rakkhetha medhāvī cittaṃ guttaṃ sukhāvahaṃ Dh 36; cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutassa viharato cittaṃ vyāsiðcati . . . rūpesu S IV.78; ye cittaṃ saððamessanti mokkhanti Mārabandhanā "from the fetters of Māra those are released who control their heart" Dh 37; pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye Dh 116; bhikkhuno c. kulesu na sajjati, gayhati, bajjhati S II.198 (cp. Schiller: "Nicht an die Güter hänge dein Herz"). (b) Contact with kāma & rāga: a lustful, worldly, craving heart. - (a) kāmā: kāmā mathenti cittaṃ Sn 50; S IV.210; kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi S I.188; kāme nāpekkhate cittaṃ Sn 435; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṃ Dh 371; manussakehi kāmehi cittaṃ vuṭṭhapetvā S V.409; na uḷāresu kāmaguṇesu bhogāya cittaṃ namati A IV.392; S I.92; kāmāsavā pi cittaṃ vimuccati A II.211, etc.; kāmesu c. na pakkhandati na ppasīdati na sanṭiṭṭhati (my h. does not leap, sit or stand in cravings) D III.239; kāmesu tibbasārāgo vyāpannacitto S III.93; kāmāmise laggacitto (divide thus!) PvA 107. - (b) rāgā: rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti (defilement harasses his heart) S I.185; II.231=271; A II.126; III.393; rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ c. hoti A III.285; sārattacitto S IV.73; viratta° S IV.74; Sn 235; PvA 168. - (g) Pāli Text Society 617 Pāli-English Dictionary various: patibaddha - c. (fettered in the bonds of °) A IV.60; Sn 37, 65; PvA 46, 151, etc. pariyādinna° (grasping, greedy), usually combd w. lābhena abhi- bhūta: S II.226, 228; IV.125; A IV.160; D III.249. - upakkiliṭṭha° (etc.) (defiled) S I.179; III.151, 232 sq.; V.92 (kāmacchando cittassa upakkileso); A I.207; V.93 sq. - otiṇṇa° fallen in love A III.67; SnA 322. (c) A heart, composed, concentrated, settled, selfcontrolled, mastered, constrained. - (a) c. pasīdati (pasanna-°c) (a heart full of grace, settled in faith) S I.98; A I.207; III.248; Sn 434; pasanna°: A IV.209, 213; Sn 316, 403, 690, cp. c. pakkhandati pasīdati S III.133; A III.245; also vippasanna°: S V.144; Sn 506; cp. vippasannena cetasā Pv I.1010. - (b) c. santiṭṭhati in set s. sannisīdati, ekodihoti, samādhiyati (cp. cetaso ekodibhāva) S II.273; IV.263; A II.94, 157. - (g) c. samādhiyati (samāhita-c°, cp. ceto-samadhi quiescence) D I.13=III.30, 108; S I.120, 129, 188; IV.78=351; A I.164; II.211; III.17, 280; IV.177; Vbh 227; Vism 376, etc.-(d) supatiṭṭhita-c° always in formula catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu-s-c°: S III.93; V.154; 301; D III.101; A V.195. - (e) susaṇṭhita c. S V.74. - vasībhūta c. S I.132; A I.165. - danta c. Dh 35. - (d) "with purpose of heart," a heart set on, striving after, endeavouring, etc. - (a) cittaṃ namati (inclines his h. on, with dat: appossukkatāya S I.137); nekkhamma-ninna S III.233; viveka° D III.283; A IV.233; V.175. - (b) cittaṃ padahati (pa+dhā: pro-ti/qhti) in phrase chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabbhati c° ṃ paggaṇhāti padahati D III.221; A II.15=IV.462; S V.269; Nd2 97; Nett 18. In the same ṣense pani-dahati (in paṇidhi, paṇihita bent down on) (cp. ceto-paṇidhi) S I.133 (tattha) IV.309 (dup°); V.157; Dh 42=Ud 39; Dh 43 (sammā°). (e) An evil heart ("out of heart proceed evil thoughts" Mk. 7, 21) - (a) paduṭṭha-c° (cp. ceto-padosa) D I.20= III.32; A I.8 (opp. pasanna-c°); IV.92; It 12, 13; Pv A 33, 43, etc. - (b) vyāpanna-c°: citte vyāpanne kāyakammam pi vyāpannaṃ hoti A I.262. Opp. a°: S IV.322; A II.220. - (g) samoha-c° (+sarāga, etc.) D I.79; II.299; III.281; Vism 410, & passim. (f) "blessed are the pure in heart," a pure, clean, purified (cp. Ger. geläutert), emancipated, free, detached heart. (a) mutta-c°, vimutta-c°, etc. (cp. cetaso vimokkho, cetovimutti, muttena cetasā), āsavehi cittāni mucciṃsu S III.132, etc.; vi° Sn p. 149. - vimutta: S I.28 (+subhāvita), 29, 46=52; III.45 (+viratta), 90; IV.236 (rāgā); Sn 23 (+sudanta); Nd2 587. suvimutta: S I.126, 141, 233; IV.164; A III.245; V.29; Sn 975 (+satimā). - (b) cittaṃ parisodheti M I.347; A II.211; S IV.104. - (g) alīna c. (unstained) S I.159; A V.149; Sn 68; 717; Nd2 97 (cp. cetaso līnatta). (g) good-will, a loving thought, kindliness, tenderheartedness, love ("love the Lord with all your heart"). - (a) metta-c° usually in phrase mettacittaṃ bhāveti "to nourish the heart with loving thought," to produce good-will D I.167; S II.264; A I.10; V.81; Sn 507 (cp. mettā-sahagatena cetasā). - (b) bhāvita-c° "keep thy heart with all diligence" (Prov. 4, 23) S I.188 (+susamāhita); IV.294; V.369 (saddhā-paribhāvita); A I.6 (+bahulīkata, etc.); Sn 134 (=S I.188); Dh 89=S V.29; PvA 139. (h) a heart calmed, allayed, passionless (santa° upasanta°) D.III.49; S I.141; Sn 746. (i) a wieldy heart, a heart ready & prepared for truth, an open & receptive mind: kalla°, mudu°, udagga°, pasanna° A IV.186; kalla° PvA 38 (sanctified); lahu° S I.201; udagga° Sn 689, 1028; S I.190 (+mudita); mudu° PvA 54. (k) Various phrases. Abbhutacittajātā "while wonder filled their hearts" S I.178; evaṃcitto "in this state of mind" S II.199; Sn 985; cittam me Gotamo jānāti (G. knows my heart) S I.178; theyya-citto intending to steal Vin III.58; āraddha-citto of determined mind M I.414; S II.21, cp. 107; Sn p. 102; aððācittaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti S II.267; nānā° of varying mind J I.295; nihīnacitto low-minded PvA 107; nikaṭṭha° A II.137; āhata° A IV.460=V.18; supahata° S I.238 (cp. Miln 26); visankhāragata° Dh 154; sampanna° Sn 164; vibbhanta° S I.61=A I.70=II.30=III.391. (2) thought: mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha (do not think any evil thought) S V.418; na cittamattam pi (not even one thought) PvA 3; mama cittaṃ bhaveyya (I should think) PvA 40. For further instances see Dhs & Vbh Indexes & cp. cpds. See also remarks above (under I.). Citta likened to a monkey Vism 425. -ādhipati the influence of thought (adj. °pateyya) Nett 16; Dhs 269, 359; DhsA 213. Commentators define c. here as javanacittuppāda, our "thought" in its specialized sense, Compendium of Phil. 177, n. 2. -ānuparivattin consecutive to thought Dhs 671, 772, 1522; - Pāli Text Society 618 Pāli-English Dictionary ānupassanā the critique of heart, adj. °ānupassin D II.299; III.221, 281; M I.59 & passim (cp. kāy°); -āvila disturbance of mind Nd2 576 (°karaṇa); -ujjukatā rectitude of mind Dhs 51, 277, etc.; -uppāda the rise of a thought, i. e. intention, desire as theyya °ṃ uppādesi he had the intention to steal (a thought of theft) Vin III.56; - M I.43; III.45; J II.374; -ekaggatā "onepointedness of mind," concentration Nett 15, 16; Vism 84, 137, 158; DhA III.425; ThA 75; cp. ekagga-citto A III.175; -kali a witch of a heart, a witch-like heart Th 1, 356; -kallatā readiness of heart, preparedness of mind VvA 330; -kilesa stain of h. Dh 88 (DhA II.162=paðca nīvaraṇā); -kelisā pastime of the mind Th 1, 1010; -kkhepa derangement of the mind, madness Vin V.189=193 (ummāda+); A III.219 (ummāda+); DhA III.70 (=ummāda); PvA 39; Dh 138; cp. °vikkhepa; -cetasika belonging to heart & thought, i. e. mental state, thought, mind D I.213; Dhs 1022 (-dhammā, Mrs. Rh. D.: emotional, perceptual & synthetic states as well as those of intellect applied to sense-impressions), 1282; Ps I.84; Miln 87; Vism 61, 84, 129, 337; -dubbhaka a rogue of a heart, a rogue-like heart Th 1, 214; -pakopana shaking or upsetting the mind It 84 (dosa); -pamaddin crushing the h. Th 2, 357 (=ThA 243; v. l. pamāthin & pamādin); -pariyāya the ways (i. e. behaviour) of the h. A V.160 (cp. ceto-paricca); -passaddhi calm of h., serenity of mind (cp. kāya°) S V.66; Dhs 62; -bhāvanā cultivation of the h. M III.149; -mala stain of h. PvA 17; -mudutā plasticity of mind (or thought) Dhs 62, 277, 325; -rucita after the heart's liking J I.207; -rūpaṃ according to intention, as much as expected Vin I.222; II.78; III.161; IV.177, 232; lahutā buoyancy of thought Dhs 62, 323, 1283; Vism 465; -vikkhepa (cp. °kkhepa) madness S I.126 (+ummāda); Nett 27; Vism 34; -vippayutta disconnected with thought Dhs 1192, 1515; visaṃsaṭṭha detached fr. thought Dhs 1194, 1517; -vūpasama allayment of one's h. S I.46; sankilesa (adj.) with impure heart (opp. c.-vodāna) S III.151; -saññatti conviction Miln 256; santāpa "heart-burn," sorrow PvA 18 (=soka); -samādhi (cp. ceto-samādhi) concentration of mind, collectedness of thought, self-possession S IV.350; V.269; Vbh 218; -samodhāna adjustment, calming of thoughts ThA 45; -sampīḷana (adj.) h.- crushing (cp. °pamaddin & °pakopana) Nett 29 (domanassa). -sahabhū arising together with thought Dhs 670, 769, 1520. hetuka (adj.) caused by thought Dhs 667, 767. Citta2 {Citta} [cp. Sk. caitra, the first month of the year: MarchApril, orig. N. of the star Spica (in Virgo); see E. Plunket, Ancient Calendars, etc., pp. 134 sq., 171 sq.] N. of the month Chaitra PvA 135. Cp. Citra-māsa KhA 192. Cittaka (a) & Citraka (b) {Cittaka} {Citraka} 1. (adj.)(a) coloured J IV.464. - 2. (m.)(b) the spotted antelope J VI.538. - 3. (nt.) a (coloured) mark (on the forehead) Miln 408 (°dharakumma). - f. cittakā a counterpane of many colours (DA I.86 cittikā: vāna [read nāna°] citra-uṇṇā-may' attharaṇaṃ) Vin I.192; II.163, 169; D I.7; A I.181≈. Cittaka2 {Cittaka} :see acittaka. Cittatara compar. of citta1, more various, more varied. S III.151 sq. - a punning passage, thus: by the pro- cedure (caraṇa) of mind (in the past) the present mind (citta) is still more varied. Cp. SA in loco: Asl. 66; Expositor 88. {Cittatara} Cittatā {Cittata} [f. abstr. to citta] SA on S III. 151 sq. (bhūmicittatāya dvāracittatāya ārammaṇacittatāya kammanānatta). Cittatā {Cittata} [f. abstr. to citta] "being of such a heart or mind," state of mind, character S III.152; IV.142 (vimutta°); V.158 (id.); A V.145 sq. (upārambha°); Vbh 372 (id.); Vbh 359 Pāli Text Society 619 Pāli-English Dictionary (amudu°); PvA 13 (visuddhi°, noble character); paṭibaddha° (in love with) PvA 145, 147, 270. In S III.152 l cittitā q. v. Cittatta {Cittatta} (n.) = cittatā S V.158. Citti (f.) [fr. cit, cp. citta, cintā, cinteti, formation like mutti>muc, sitti>sic] "giving thought or heart" only in combn w. kar: cittikaroti to honour, to esteem. Ger. cittikatvā M III.24; A III.172; Pv II.955 (cittiṃ k.=pūjetvā PvA 135); Dpvs I.2; - acittikatvā M III.22; A IV.392. pp. cittikata thought (much) of Vin IV.6 (& a°); Vbh 2. {Citti} Cittikāra {Cittikara} [see citti] respect, consideration VvA 178 (garu°), 242; PvA 26; Vbh 371 (a°); Vism 123 (cittī°), 188. Cittita [pp. of citteti, Denom. fr. citta1] painted, variegated, varied, coloured or resplendent with (-°) S III.152 (sic l. for cittatā) So SA, which, on p. 151, reads citten'eva cittitaṃ for cintitaṃ. Th 1, 736; 2, 390 (su°); Vv 367; 402. {Cittita} Citra {Citra} =citta3, the month Chaitra, KhA 192 (°māsa). Cināti {Cinati} [Sk. cinoti & cayati, ci, to which also kāya, q. v. See also caya, cita] to heap up, to collect, to accumulate. Inf. cinituṃ Vin II.152; pp. cita (q. v.). Pass. cīyati J V.7. Caus. cināpeti to construct, to build J VI.204; Miln 81. - Note cināti at J II.302 (to weave) is to be corr. to vināti (see Kern, Toev. s. v.). - Cp. ā°, pa°, vi°.-Note. cināti also occurs as cinati in pa°. Cintaka {Cintaka} (adj.) [cp. cintin] one who thinks out or invents, in akkhara° the grammarian PvA 120, nīti° the lawgiver ib. 130; cp. Divy 212, 451, "overseer." Cintana {Cintana} (nt.)=cintā Th 1, 695; Miln 233. Cintanaka {Cintanaka} (adj.) thoughtful, considerate J I.222. Cintā {Cinta} [to cit, cinteti] "the act of thinking" (cp. citti), thought S I.57; Pug 25; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Sdhp 165, 216. - loka° thinking over the world, philosophy S V.447; A II.80. -kavi "thought-poetry," i. e. original poetry (see kavi) A II.230; -maṇi the jewel of thought, the true philosopher's stone VvA 32; N. of a science J III.504; -maya consisting of pure thought, metaphysical D III.219; J IV.270; Vbh 324; Nett 8, 50, 60 (°mayin, of paððā); Vism 439 (id.). Cintita {Cintita} [pp. of cinteti, cp. also cintaka] (a) (adj.) thought out, invented, devised S I.137 (dhammo asuddho samalehi c.); III.151 (caraṇaṃ nāma cittaṃ citten'eva c.); Pv II.613 (mantaṃ brahma°, expl. PvA 97 by kathitaṃ). - (b) (nt.) a thought, intention, in duc° & su° (bad & good) A I.102; ThA 76; -matta as much a, a thought, loc. cintita-matte (yeva) at the mere thoughts just as he thought it DhA I.326 (=cintita kkhaṇe in the moment of thinking it, p. 329). Cintin {Cintin} [adj. to cintā] only -°: thinking of, having one's thoughts on A I.102 (duccintita° & su°); Sn 174 (ajjhatta°; v. l. B. °saññin) 388; J III.306=IV.453= V.176=V.478; Miln 92. Pāli Text Society 620 Pāli-English Dictionary Cinteti & Ceteti {Cinteti} {Ceteti} [Sk. cetati to appear, perceive, & cintayati to think, cit (see citta2) in two forms: (a) Act, base with nasal infix cint (cp. muñc, yuñj, siñc, etc.); (b) Med. base (denom.) with guṇa cet (cp. moc, yoj, sec, etc, & the analogous formations of chid, chind, ched under chindati) to *(s)qait: see citta1, with which further cp. caksu, cikita, ciketi, cikitsati, & in meaning passati (he sees=he knows), Gr. oi)da=vidi, E. view=thought, Ger. anschauung] Forms: (a) cint: pres. cinteti. pot. cinteyya; ppr. cintento & cintayanto (Sn 834); - aor. cintesi, 3rd pl. cintesuṃ (J I.149), acintayuṃ (Sn 258); - ger. cintetvā (J I.279) & cintiya (Mhvs VII.17, 32); - grd. cinteyya & cintetabba; pp. cintita (q. v.). Cp. also cintana, cintin. - (b) cet: pres. ceteti & cetayati (S I.121), pot. cetaye (Pv II.97= cinteyya PvA 116); ppr. cetayāna (J V.339); fut. cetessati (Vin III.19); - aor. acetayi (Pv I.66=cetesi PvA 34); - ger cecca (Vin III.112; IV.290); also cicca: see sañ°. - grd. cetabba (for *cetetabba only at J IV.157, v. l. ceteyya, expl. by cintetabba); - pp. cetayita (q. v.). Cp. also cetanā. Note. The relation in the use of the two forms is that cet is the older & less understood form, since it is usually expld by cint, whereas cint is never expld by cet & therefore appears to be the more frequent & familiar form. Meaning: (a) (intr.) to think, to reflect, to be of opinion, Grouped with (phuṭṭho) vedeti, ceteti, saðjānāti he has the feeling, the awareness (of the feeling), the consciousness S IV.68. Its seat is freq. mentioned with manasā (in the heart), viz. manasā diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; na pāpaṃ manasā pi cetaye Pv II.97; J I.279; PvA 13 (he thought it over), ib. (evaṃ c. you think so); Sdhp 289 (īdisaṃ c. id.) Mhvs VII.18, 32; Miln 233 (cintayati), 406 (cintayitabba). Prohibitive: mā cintayi don't think about it, don't worry, don't be afraid, never mind J I.50, 292, 424; III.289; VI.176; pl. mā cintayittha J I.457; IV.414; VI.344; Vism 426; DhA I.12; III.196; also mā cintesi J III.535. - (b) (with acc.) to ponder, think over, imagine, think out, design, scheme, intend, plan. In this sense grouped with (ceteti) pakappeti anuseti to intend, to start to perform, to carry out S II.65. maraṇaṃ ākankhati cetayati (ponders over) S I.121; acinteyyāni na cintetabbāni A II.80; cetabba-rūpa (a fit object of thought, a good thought) J IV.157 (=cintetabba); loka-cintaṃ c. S V.447; ajjhattarūpe, etc. ceteti Vin III.113; mangalāni acintayuṃ Sn 258; diṭṭhigatāni cintayanto Sn 834; kiṃ cintesi J I.221; sokavinayan'-upāyaṃ c. to devise a means of dispelling the grief PvA 39. - Esp. with pāpaṃ & pāpakaṃ to intend evil, to have ill-will against (c. dat.): mā pāpakaṃ akusalaṃ cittaṃ cinteyyātha S V.418; na p. cetaye manasā pi Pv II.97 (=cinteyya, piheyya PvA 116); p. na cintetabba PvA 114; tassā p. acetayi Pv I.66 (=cetesi PvA 34); kiṃ amhākaṃ cintesi what do you intend against us? J I.211. (c) (with dat.) (restricted to ceteti) to set one's heart on, to think upon, strive after, desire: āgatipunabbhavāya c. to desire a future rebirth S IV.201; vimokkhāya c. to strive after emancipation S III.121; attavyābadhāya c. M III.23=A I.157=S IV.339; pabbajjāya c. It 75; Qakkhāya me tvaṃ vihito . . . udāhu me cetayase vadhāya J III.146 - acinteyya that which must not or cannot be thought A II.80 (cattāri °āni four reflections to be avoided); VvA 323 (a. buddhānubhāva unimaginable majesty of a B.). Cipiṭa {Cipita} (adj.) [pp. to cip (?) see next: cp. Sk. cipiṭa grain flattened after boiling] pressed flat, flattened VvA 222. To be read also at J VI.185 for vippita. Cippiyamāna {Cippiyamana} [ppr. Pass. of cip, see cipiṭa] crushed flat (Rh. D.; cp. also Kern Toev.) Miln 261. Cimilikā {Cimilika} (f.) see cilimikā Vin II.150; IV.40; Cp. Vin. Texts III.167; J.P.T.S. 1885, 39. Cira {Cira} (adj.) [Vedic. cira, perhaps to *queie to rest, cp. Lat. quiēs n; E. while] long (of time), usually in cpds. & as adv. Either ciraṃ (acc.) for a long time Sn Pāli Text Society 621 Pāli-English Dictionary 678, 730, 1029; Dh 248; Kh VII.5; J II.110; IV.3; Pv II.333 or cirena (instr.) after a long time Vin IV.86; DhsA 239; or cirāya (dat.) for long Dh 342. cirassa (gen.) see cirassaṃ. - cirataraṃ (compar.) for a (comparatively) long time, rather long A III.58; Pv II.87. cir-ā-ciraṃ continually Vin IV.261; J V.233. - acira not long (ago) lately, newly: °arahattappatta S I.196; °pabbajita S I.185; °parinibbute Bhagavati shortly after the death of the Bhagavant D I.204, etc.; Sn p. 59. -kālaṃ (adv.) a long time freq. e. g. PvA 19, 45, 60, 109; -ṭṭhitika perpetual, lasting long A IV.339 (opp. pariyāpajjati); Vv 801; Pug 32, 33; Vism 37, 175; DA I.3. -dikkhita (not °dakkhita) having long since been initiated S I.226=J V.138 (=cirapabbajita); -nivāsin dwelling (there) for a long time S II.227; -paṭika [cp. Sk. ciraṃ prati] long since, adj. constr. in conformity w. the subject Vin I.33; D II.270= S III.120; -pabbajita having long since become a wanderer A III.114; Sn p. 92; DA I.143; -ppavāsin (adj.) long absent Dh 219 (=cirappavuttha DhA III.293). -rattaṃ (adv.) for a long time Sn 665, 670; J IV.371; and -rattāya id. J II.340; Pv I.94. Cirassaṃ {Cirassam} (adv.) [origin. gen. of cira=cirasya] at last Vin II.195; D I.179; S I.142; J II.439; III.315; IV.446 (read cirassa passāmi); V.328; Th 1, 868; ThA 217; PvA 60. - na cirass'eva shortly after D III.11; J IV.2; DhA III.176; PvA 32. - sucirass'eva after a very long while S I.193. Cirāyati {Cirayati} [Sk. cirayati, v. denom. fr. cira] to be long, to tarry, to delay, DhA I.16; VvA 64, 208; cp. ciraṃ karoti id. J II.443. Cirīṭa {Cirita} [Sk. ciri, cp. kīra] a parrot J V.202 (in compn cirīti°). Cilimikā {Cilimika} (f.) [Der. fr. cīra] as cimilikā at Vin II.150; IV.40 a kind of cloth or carpeting, made from palmleaves, bark, etc. Also at PvA 144 (doubtful reading). Cillaka {Cillaka} [kilaka or khīlaka, q. v.] a peg, post, pillar, in dāruka° Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257). Not with Kern (Toev.) "a wooden puppet," as der. fr. citta.1 Cīnaka {Cinaka} (m. nt.) a kind of bean Sn 239 (=aṭavi-pabbatapadesu āropita-jāta-cīna-mugga SnA 283); J V.405. Cīnapiṭṭha {Cinapittha} (nt.) red lead DA I.40; DhsA 14. Cīyati {Ciyati} [Pass. of cināti] to be gathered, to be heaped up Sn 428 (cīyate pahūtaṃ puññaṃ). See also ā°. Cīra {Cira} (nt.) [Sk. cīra, cp. cīvara] 1. bark, fibre D I.167 (kusa°, vāka°, phalaka°); Vin III.34; A I.295; Pug 55. - a bark dress Vin I.305; J VI.500 (cp. cīraka). - 2. a strip (orig. of bark), in suvaṇṇa°-khacita gold-brocaded VvA 280 (see also next). Cp. ocīraka (under odīraka). Cīraka {Ciraka} [cp. cīra] 1. bark (see cpds.) - 2. a strip, in suvaṇṇa° gold brocade (dress) J V.197. vāsika (nt.) bark-dress (a punishment) M I.87= A I.48=Miln 197. Cīriya {Ciriya} (adj.) [fr. cīra] like or of bark, in cpd. dāru° (as Np.) "wood-barker" DhA II.35. Cīriḷikā {Cirilika} (f.) [cp. Sk. cīrī & jhillikā a cricket, cīrilli a sort of large fish] a cricket A III.397 (v. l. cīrikā). Cp. on word-formation pipiḷikā & Mod. Gr. tsi/tsikos cricket. Pāli Text Society 622 Pāli-English Dictionary Cīvara {Civara} (nt.) [*Sk. cīvara, prob.=cīra, appld orig. to a dress of bark] the (upper) robe of a Buddhist mendicant. C. is the first one of the set of 4 standard requisites of a wandering bhikkhu, vir. c°, piṇḍapāta almsbowl, senāsana lodging, a place to sleep at, gilānapaccayabhesajja-parikkhāra medicinal appliances for use in sickness. Thus mentioned passim e. g. Vin III.89, 99, 211; IV.154 sq.; D I.61; M II.102; A I.49; Nd2 s. v.; It 111. In abbreviated form Sn 339; PvA 7; Sdhp 393. In starting on his begging round the bhikkhu goes patta-cīvaraṃ ādāya, The 3 robes are sanghāṭi, uttarāsaṅga, antaravāsaka, given thus, e.g. at Vin I.289. that is literally „taking his bowl & robe.‟ But this is an elliptical idiom meaning „putting on his outer robe and taking his bowl.‟ A bhikkhu never goes into a village without wearing all his robes, he never takes them, or any one of the three, with him. Each of the three is simply an oblong piece of cloth (usually cotton cloth). On the mode of wearing these three robes see the note at Dialogues II.145. - Vin III.11; D II.85; Sn p. 21; PvA 10, 13 & passim. The sewing of the robe was a festival for the laity (see under kaṭhina). There are 6 kinds of cloth mentioned for its manufacture, viz. khoma, kappāsika, koseyya, kambala, sāṇa, bhanga Vin. I.58=96=281 (cp. °dussa). Two kinds of robes are distinguished: one of the gahapatika (layman) a white one, and the other that of the bhikkhu, the c. proper, called paṃsukūlaṃ c. "the dust-heap robe" Vin V.117 (cp. gahapati). - On cīvara in general & also on special ordinances concerning its making, wearing & handling see Vin I.46, 49 sq., 196, 198, 253 sq., 285, 287 sq., 306=II.267 (of var. colours); II.115 sq. (sibbati to sew the c.); III.45, 58 (theft of a c.), 195-223, 254-266; IV.5962, 120-123, 173, 279 sq., 283 (six kinds). - A III.108 (cīvare kalyāṇakāma); V.100, 206; Vism 62; It 103; PvA 185. - Sīse cīvaraṃ karoti to drape the outer robe over the head Vin II.207, 217; °ṃ khandhe karoti to drape it over the back Vin II.208, 217; °ṃ nikkhipati to lay it down or put it away Vin I.47 sq.; II.152, 224; III.198, 203, 263; °ṃ saṃharati to fold it up Vin I.46. - Var. expressions referring to the use of the robe: atireka° an extra robe Vin III.195; acceka° id. Vin III.260 sq.; kāla° (& akāla°) a robe given at (and outside) the specified time Vin III.202 sq.; IV.284, 287; gahapati° a layman's r. Vin III.169, 171; ti° the three robes, viz. sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga, antaravāsaka Vin I.288, 289; III.11, 195, 198 sq.; V.142; adj. tecīvarika wearing 3 rs. Vin V.193; dubbala° (as adj.) with a worn-out c. Vin III.254; IV.59, 154, 286; paṃsukūla° the dust-heap robe PvA 141; sa°-bhatta food given with a robe Vin IV.77; lūkha° (adj.) having a coarse robe Vin I.109 (+duccola); III.263 (id.); A I.25; vihāra° a robe to be used in the monastery Vin III.212. -kaṇṇa the lappet of a monk's robe DhA III.420; VvA 76=DhA III.106, cp. cīvarakarṇaka Av.Ś II.184, & °ika Divy 239, 341, 350. -kamma (nt.) robe-making Vin II.218; III.60, 240; IV.118, 151; A V.328 sq.; DhA III.342; PvA 73, 145. -kāra (-samaya) (the time of) sewing the robes Vin III.256 sq. -kāla (-samaya) the right time for accepting robes Vin III.261; IV.286, 287; -dāna (-samaya) (the ime for) giving robes Vin IV.77, 99; -dussa clothing-material Vin IV.279, 280; -nidāhaka putting on the c. Vin I.284; -paṭiggāhaka the receiver of a robe Vin I.283; II.176; V.205; A III.274 sq.; -paṭivisa a portion of the c. Vin I.263, 285, 301; -palibodha an obstacle to the valid performance of the kathina ceremony arising from a set of robes being due to a particular person [a technical term of the canon law. See Vinaya Texts II.149, 157, 169]. It is one of the two kaṭhinassa palibodhā (c. & āvāsa°) Vin I.265; V.117, cp. 178; -paviveka (nt.) the seclusion of the robe, i. e. of a non-Buddhist with two other pavivekāni (piṇḍapāta° & senāsana°) at A I.240; -bhanga the distribution of robes Vin IV.284; -bhatta robes & a meal (given to the bh.) Vin III.265; -bhājaka one who deals out the robes Vin I.285; II.176; V.205; A III.274 sq. (cp. °paṭiggāhaka); -bhisī a robe rolled up like a pillow Vin I.287 sq.; -rajju (f.) a rope for (hanging up) the robes; in the Vinaya always combd with °vaṃsa (see below); -lūkha (adj.) one who is poorly dressed Pug 53; -vaṃsa a bamboo peg for hanging up a robe (cp. °rajju) Vin I.47, 286; II.117, 121, 152, 153, 209, 222; III.59; J I.9; DhA III.342; -sankamanīya (nt.) a robe that ought to be handed over (to its legal owner) Vin IV.282; 283. Pāli Text Society 623 Pāli-English Dictionary Cuṇṇa {Cunna} [Sk. cūrṇa, pp. of carvati, to chew, to *sqer to cut, break up, as in Lat. caro, Sk. kṛṇāti (cp. kaṭu); cp Lit. kirwis axe, Lat. scrūpus sharp stone, scrupulus, scortum. See also calaka2 & cp. Sk. kṣunna of kṣud to grind, to which prob. P. kuḍḍa] 1. pp. broken up, powdered; only in cpd. °vicuṇṇa crushed to bits, smashed up, piecemeal J I.73; II.120, 159, 216; III.74. - 2. (nt.) (a) any hard substance ground into a powder; dust, sand J I.216; VvA 65 (paṃsu°); Pv III.33 (suvaṇṇa° gold-dust; PvA 189=vālikā); DA I.245 (id.); DhsA 12. - (b) esp. "chunam" (Anglo-Ind.) i. e. a plaster, of which quicklime & sand are the chief ingredients & which is largely used in building, but also applied to the skin as a sort of soap-powder in bathing. Often combd with mattikā clay, in distinction of which c. is for delicate use (tender skin), whereas m. for rougher purposes (see Vin I.202); cuṇṇāni bhesajjāni an application of c. Vin I.202. - Vin I.47=52; II.220, 224 sq.; A I.208; III.25; J V.89. cuṇṇa-tela-vālaṇḍupaka Vism 142 (where Asl 115 reads cuṇṇaṃ vā telaṃ vā leḍḍūpaka). - nahāniya° D I.74=M III.92; PvA 46; nahāna° J II.403, 404. - gandha -cuṇṇa aromatic (bath) powder J I.87, 290; III.276; candana° id. Miln 13, 18. - iṭṭhaka° plaster (which is rubbed on the head of one to be executed) PvA 4, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X, beginning (stanza 5) "piṣṭa-cūrṇāvakīrṇaśca puruṣo 'haṃ paśūkṛtaḥ." -cālanī a mortar for the preparation of chunam Vin I.202; -piṇḍa a lump of ch. Vin III.260; IV.154 sq. Cuṇṇaka {Cunnaka} (adj.) [fr. cuṇṇa] (a) a preparation of chunam, paint (for the face, mukha°) D I.7; M II.64=Th 1, 771; J V.302. - (b) powder; cuṇṇakajātāni reduced to powder M III.92 (aṭṭhikāni). - f. °ikā in cuṇṇikamaṃsa mince meat J I.243. Cuṇṇeti {Cunneti} [Denom. of cuṇṇa] to grind to powder, to crush; to powder or paint w. chunam Vin II.107 (mukhaṃ); J IV.457. - ppr. pass cuṇṇiyamāna being ground J VI.185. Cuta {Cuta} [pp. of cavati; Sk. cyuta] 1. (adj.) shifted, disappeared, deceased, passed from one existence to another Vin IV.216; Sn 774, 899; It 19, 99; J I.139, 205; Pug 17. - -accuta permanent. not under the sway of Death, Ep. of Nibbāna Dh 225. - 2. (n.) in cpd. cutûpapāta disappearance & reappearance, transmigration, Saṃsāra (see cuti) S II.67 (āgatigatiyā sati c° hoti); A III.420; IV.178; DhA I.259; usually in phrase sattānaṃ cutûpapāta-ðāṇa the discerning of the saṃsāra of beings D I.82=M I.248; D III.111. As cutuppāta at A II.183. Cp. jātisaṃsāraðāṇa. Cuti {Cuti} (f.) [cp. Sk. cyuti, to cavati] vanishing, passing away, decease, shifting out of existence (opp. upapatti, cp. also gati & āgati) D I.162; S II.3=42; III.53; M I.49; Sn 643; Dh 419; J I.19, 434; Vism 292, 460, 554; DhA IV.228. Cudita {Cudita} (adj.) [pp. of codati] being urged, receiving blame, being reproved Vin I.173; II.250; II.250, 251; M I.95 sq.; A III.196 sq. -°ka id. Vin V.115, 158, 161, 164. Cuddasa {Cuddasa} [contracted fr. catuddasa, Sk. caturdaśa, cp. catur] fourteen J I.71; VI.8; Miln 12; DhA III.120, 186. Cunda {Cunda} an artist who works in ivory J VI.261 (Com: dantakāra); Miln 331. Cundakāra {Cundakara} a turner J VI.339. Pāli Text Society 624 Pāli-English Dictionary Cumbaṭa {Cumbata} (nt.) [cp. Prk. cumbhala] (a) a coil; a pad of cloth, a pillow J I.53 (dukūla°); II.21 (id.); VvA 73. - (b) a wreath J III.87. Cp. next. Cumbaṭaka {Cumbataka} (nt.) cumbaṭa, viz. (a) a pillow DhA I.139; VvA 33, 165.-(b) a wreath J IV.231 (puppha°); SnA 137; DhA I.72 (mālā°). Cumbati {Cumbati} [Sk. cumbati. Dhtp 197 defines as "vadanasaṃyoge"] to kiss J II.193; V.328; VI.291, 344; VvA 260. Cp. pari°. Culla & Cūḷa {Culla} {Cula} (adj.) [Sk. kṣulla=kṣudra (P. khudda, see khuddaka), with c: k=cuṇṇa: kṣud] small, minor (opp. mahā great, major), often in conn. with names & titles of books, e. g. c° Anāthapiṇḍika=A jr. J II.287, cp. Anglo-Indian chota sahīb the younger gentleman (Hind. chhota=culla); or Culla-vagga, the minor section (Vin II.) as subordinate to Mahā-vagga (Vin I.), Culla-niddesa the minor exposition (following upon Mahā-niddesa); culla-sīla the siṃple precepts of ethics (opp. mahā° the detailed sīla) D I.5, etc. Otherwise only in cpds.: -angulī little finger DhA II.86. -ûpaṭṭhāka a "lesser" follower, i. e. a personal attendant (of a thera) J I.108 (cūl°); II.325 (cull°; DhA I.135; II.260; cūḷ); -pitā an uncle ("lesser" father=sort of father, cp. Lat. matertera, patruus, Ger. Vetter=father jun.) J II.5; III.456 (v. l. petteyya); PvA 107; DhA I.221 (cūḷa°). Cullāsīti {Cullasiti} [=caturāsīti] eighty-four J VI.226 (mahākappe as duration of Saṃsāra); PvA 254 (id.). Also as cūḷāsīti q. v. Cūlikā {Culika} (f.) [Sk. cūlikā, cp. cūḍā]=cūḷa; kaṇṇa° the root of the ear J II.276; Vism 249, 255; DhA IV.13 (of an elephant). °baddha S II.182; KS II.122. See also cūḷā. Cūḷa {Cula} [Sk. cūḍa & cūlikā] 1. swelling, protuberance; root, knot, crest. As kaṇṇa-cūḷa the root of an elephant's ear J VI.488. aḍḍha-cūḷa a measure (see aḍḍha). See also cūlikā. - 2. (adj.) see culla. Cūḷaka {Culaka} (adj.) [fr. cūḷā] having a cūḷa or top-knot; pañca° with five top-knots J V.250 (of a boy). Cūḷanikā {Culanika} (f.) [Der. fr. culla, q. v.] only in phrase sahassi cūḷanikā lokadhātu "the system of the 1,000 lesser worlds" (distinguished from the dvi-sahassī majjhimakā & the ti-sahassī mahāsahassi lokadhātu) A I.227; Nd2 235, 2b. Cūḷā {Cula} (f.) [Vedic cūḍā. to cūḍa]=cūḷa, usually in sense of crest only, esp. denoting the lock of hair left on the crown of the head when the rest of the head is shaved (cp. Anglo-Indian chuḍā & Gujarāti choṭali) J I.64, 462; V.153, 249 (paðcacūḷā kumārā); DhA I.294; as mark of distinction of a king J III.211; V.187; of a servant J VI.135. - a cock's comb J II.410; III.265. -maṇi (m.) a jewel worn in a crest or diadem, a jewelled crest J I.65; II.122; V.441. Cūḷāsīti {Culasiti} for cullāsīti at Th 2, 51. Ce {Ce} [Vedic ced; ce=Lat. que in absque, ne-c, etc., Goth. h in ni-h. see also ca 3] conditional particle "if," constructed either with Indicative (ito ce pi yojanasate, viharati even if he lived Pāli Text Society 625 Pāli-English Dictionary 100 y. from here D I.117) or Conditional (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā D I.3), or Potential (passe ce vipulaṃ sukhaṃ Dh 290). - Always enclitic (like Lat. que) & as a rule placed after the emphasized word at the beginning of the sentence: puððað ce puriso kayirā Dh 118; brāhmaṇo ce tvaṃ brūsi Sn 457. Usually added to pronouns or pron. adverbs: ahañ ce va kho pana ceteyyaṃ D I.185; ettha ce te mano atthi S I.116, or combd with other particles, as noce, yañce, sace (q. v.). Freq. also in combn with other indef. interrog. or emphatic particles, as ce va kho pana if then, if now: ahañ ce va kho pana pañhaṃ puccheyyaṃ D I.117; ahañ ce va kho pana abhivādeyyaṃ D I.125; api (pi) ce even if: api ce vassasataṃ jīve mānavo Sn 589. Cecca {Cecca} =cicca (equal to sañcicca), ger. of cinteti, corresp. to either *cetya [cet] or *cintya [cint]; only in ster. def. jānanto saðjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā Vin II.91; III.73, 112; IV.290. Ceṭa {Ceta} a servant, a boy J III.478. See next. Ceṭaka {Cetaka} a servant, a slave, a (bad) fellow Vin IV.66; ] II.176=DhA IV.92 (duṭṭha° miserable fellow); III.281; IV.82 (bhātika-ceṭakā rascals of brothers); V.385; Miln 222. Cetaka {Cetaka} a decoy-bird (Com. dīpaka-tittira, exciting partridge) J III.357. Cetakedu {Cetakedu} a kind of bird J VI.538. See also cela°. Cetanaka {Cetanaka} (adj.) [see cetanā] connected with a thought or intention J VI.304; usually in a° without a thought, unintentional J II.375; VI.178; Vbh 419. Cetanā {Cetana} [f. abstr. fr. cet, see cinteti] state of ceto in action, thinking as active thought, intention, purpose, will. Defined as action (kamma: A iii.415; cp. KV. VIII.9, § 38 untraced quotation; cp. A V.292). Often combd w. patthanā & paṇidhi (wish & aspiration), e. g. S II.99, 154; A I.32, 224; V 212; Nd2 112 (in def. of asucimanussā, people of ignoble action: asuciyā cetanāya, patthanāya, paṇidhinā samannāgatā). Also classed with these in a larger group in KV., e. g. 343, 380. - Combd w. vedanā saððā c. citta phassa manasikāra in def. of nāmakāya (opp. rūpakāya) S II.3 (without citta), Ps I.183 (do.); Nett 77, 78. - Enumd under the four blessings of vatthu, paccaya, c., guṇātireka (-sampadā) & def. as "cetanāya somanassasahagataðāṇa-sampayutta-bhāvo" at DhA III.94. - C. is opposed to cetasika (i. e. ceto) in its determination of the 7 items of good conduct (see sīla) which refers to actions of the body (or are wilful, called cetanākamma Nett 43, 96; otherwise distinguished as kāya- & vacīkammantā A V.292 sq.), whereas the 3 last items (sīla 8-10) refer to the behaviour of the mind (cetasikakamma Nett., mano-kammanta A), viz. the shrinking back from covetousness, malice, & wrong views. - Vin III.112; S III.60; A II.232 (kaṇhassa kammassa pahānāya cetanā: intention to give up wrong-doing); VvA 72 (vadhaka-cetanā wilful murder); maraṇacetanā intention of death DhA I.20; āhār'āsā cetanā intention consisting in deśire for food Vism 537. PvA 8, 30 (pariccāga° intention to give); Pug 12; Miln 94; Sdhp 52, 72. - In scholastic lgg. often expld as cetanā saðcetanā saðcetayitatta (viz. state or behaviour of volition) Dhs 5; Vbh 285. Cp. Dhs 58 (+citta); Vbh 401 (id.); Vbh 40, 403; Vism 463 (cetayatī ti cetanā; abhisandahatī ti attho). Cetayita {Cetayita} [pp. of ceteti, see cinteti] intended A V.187; Miln 62. Pāli Text Society 626 Pāli-English Dictionary Cetasa1 {Cetasa} N. of a tree, perhaps the yellow Myrobalan J V.420. Cetasa2 {Cetasa} (adj.) [orig. the gen. of ceto used as nominative] only in -°: sucetasa of a good mind, good-hearted S I.4=29, 46=52; paraphrased by Buddhaghosa as sundaracetasa; pāpa° of a wicked mind, evil-minded S I.70=98; a° without mind S I.198; sabba° allhearted, with all one's mind or heart, in phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā sabbacetaso samannāharitva ohitasoto (of one paying careful & proper attention) S I.112 sq.=189, 220; A II.116; III.163, 402; IV.167. The editors have often misunderstood the phrase & we freq. find vv. ll. with sabbaṃ cetaso & sabbaṃ cetasā, - appamāṇa° S IV.186; avyāpanna° S V.74. Cetasika {Cetasika} (adj.) belonging to ceto, mental (opp. kāyika physical). Kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ > cetasikaṃ s. A I.81; S V. 209; kāyikā darathā > c. d. M III.287, 288; c. duk khaṃ D II 306; A I.157; c. roga J III.337. c. kamma is sīla 8-10 (see under cetanā) Nett 43. - As n. combd with citta it is to be taken as supplementing it, viz. mind & all that belongs to it, mind and mental properties, adjuncts, co-efficients (cp. vitakka-vicāra & sach cpds. as phalāphala, bhavābhava) D I.213; see also citta. Occurring in the Nikāyas in sg. only, it came to be used in pl. and, as an ultimate category, the 52 cetasikas, with citta as bare consciousness, practically superseded in mental analysis, the 5 khandha-category. See Cpd. p. 1 and pt. II. Mrs. Rh. D., Bud. Psy. 6, 148, 175. -°cetasikā dhammā Ps I.84; Vbh 421; Dhs 3, 18, etc. (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 6, 148). Cetaso {Cetaso} gen. sg. of ceto, functioning as gen. to citta (see citta & ceto). Cetāpana {Cetapana} (nt.) [see cetāpeti; cp. BSk. cetanika] barter Vin III.216, see also Vin. Texts I.22 & Kacc. 322. Cetāpeti {Cetapeti} [Caus. of *cetati to ci, collect; see also Kern, Toev. s. v.] to get in exchange, to barter, buy Vin III.216 (expld by parivatteti), 237; IV.250. Cetiya {Cetiya} (nt.) [cp. from ci, to heap up, cp. citi, cināti] 1. a tumulus, sepulchral monument, cairn, M I.20; Dh 188; J I.237; VI.173; SnA 194 (dhātu-gharaṃ katvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ); KhA 221; DhA III.29 (dhātu°); IV. 64; VvA 142; Sdhp 428, 430. Pre-Buddhistic cetiyas mentioned by name are Aggāḷava° Vin II.172; S I.185; Sn p. 59; DhA III.170; Ānanda° D II.123, 126; Udena° D II.102, 118; III.9; DhA III.246; Gotama (ka)° ibid.; Cāpāla° D II.102, 118; S V.250; Makuṭabandhana° D II.160; Bahuputta° D II.102, 118; III.10; S II.220; A IV.16; Sattambaka° D II.102, 118; Sārandada D II.118, 175; A III.167; Supatiṭṭha° Vin I.35. -angaṇa the open space round a Cetiya Miln 366; Vism 144, 188, 392; DA I.191, 197; VvA 254. -vandanā Cetiya worship Vism 299. Ceteti {Ceteti} see cinteti. Ceto {Ceto} (nt.) [Sk. cetas]=citta, q. v. for detail concerning derivation, inflexion & meaning. Cp. also cinteti. - Only the gen. cetaso & the instr. cetasā are in use; besides these there is an adj. cetaso, der. from nom. base cetas. Another adj.-form is the inflected nom. ceto, occurring only in viceto S V.447 (+ummatto, out of mind). I. Ceto in its relation to similar terms: (a) with kāya & vācā: kāyena vācāya cetasā (with hand, speech & heart) Sn 232; Kh IX. kāya (vācā°, ceto°) muni a saint in action, speech & thought A I.273= Nd2 514. In this phrase the Nd has mano° for ceto°, which is also a v. l. at A-passage. - (b) with paððā (see citta IV. b) in ceto-vimutti, Pāli Text Society 627 Pāli-English Dictionary paððā-vimutti (see below IV.). - (c) with samādhi, pīti, sukha, etc.: see °pharaṇatā below. II. Cetaso (gen.) (a) heart. c° upakkilesa (stain of h.) D III.49, 101; S V.93. līnatta (attachment) S V.64. appasāda (unfaith) S I.179; ekodibhāva (singleness) D III.78; S IV.236 (see 2nd jhāna); āvaraṇāni (hindrances) S 66. - vimokkha (redemption) S I.159. santi (tranquillity) Sn 584, 593. vūpasama (id.) A I.4; S V.65. vinibandha (freedom) D III.238= A III.249; IV.461 sq. - (b) mind. c° vikkhepa (disturbance) A III.448; V.149: uttrāsa (fear) Vbh 367. abhiniropanā (application) Dhs 7.-(c) thought. in c° parivitakko udapādi "there arose a reflection in me (gen.)" S I.139; II.273; III.96, 103. III. Cetasā (instr.) - (a) heart. mettā-sahagatena c. (with a h. full of love) freq. in phrase ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā, etc. e. g. D I.186, III.78, 223; S IV.296; A I.183; II.129; IV.390; V.299, 344; Vbh 272. ujubhūtena (upright) S II.279; A I.63; vivaṭena (open) D III.223= S V.263; A IV.86. macchera-maḷa-pariyuṭṭhitena (in which has arisen the dirt of selfishness) S IV.240; A II.58. santim pappuyya c. S I.212. taṇhādhipateyyena (standing under the sway of thirst) S III.103. - vippasannena (devout) S I.32=57, 100; Dh 79; Pv I.1010. muttena A IV.244. vimariyādikatena S III.31. vigatābhijjhena D III.49. pathavī-āpo etc.-samena A IV.375 sq. ākāsasamena A III.315 sq. sabba° S II.220. abhijjhā-sahagatena A I.206. satārakkhena D III.269; A V.30. migabhūtena cetasā, with the heart of a wild creature M I.450. - acetasā without feeling, heartlessly J IV.52, 57. - (b) mind: in two phrases, viz. (a) c. anuvitakketi anuvicāreti "to ponder & think over in one's mind" D III.242; A I.264; III.178; - (b) c. pajānāti (or manasikaroti) "to know in one's mind," in the foll. expressions: para-sattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā cetoparicca pajānāti "he knows in his mind the ways of thought (the state of heart) of other beings" (see ceto-paricca & °pariyāya) M II.19; S II.121, 213; V.265; A I.255=III.17=280. puggalaṃ paduṭṭha-cittaṃ evaṃ c° ceto-paricca p. It 12, cp. 13. Arahanto . . . Bhagavanto c° cetoparicca viditā D III.100. para-cittapariyāya kusalo evaṃ c° ceto- paricca manasikaroti A V.160. Bhagavā [brāhmaṇassa] c° ceto-parivitakkaṃ aððāya "perceiving in his mind the thought of [the b.]" S I.178; D III.6; A III.374; Miln 10. IV. Cpds. -khila fallowness, waste of heart or mind, usually as pañca c-khilā, viz. arising from doubt in the Master, the Norm, the Community, or the Teaching, or from anger against one's fellow-disciples, D III.237, 278; M I.101; A III.248=IV.460=V.17; J III.291; Vbh 377; Vism 211. -paṇidhi resolution, intention, aspiration Vv 4712 (=cittassa samma-d-eva ṭhapanaṃ VvA 203); Miln 129; -padosa corruption of the h., wickedness, A I.8; It 12, 13 (opp. pasāda): -paricca "as regards the heart," i. e. state of heart, ways of thought, character, mind (=pariyāya) in °ðāṇa Th 2, 71=227 (expld at ThA 76, 197 by cetopariyaðāṇa) see phrase cetasā c-p. above (III. b.); -pariyāya the ways of the heart (=paricca), in para-ceto-pariyāya-kusalo "an expert in the ways of others'hearts" A V.160; c.p-kovido encompassing the heart of others S I.146, 194=Th 1, 1248; I.196=Th 1, 1262. Also with syncope: °pariyaðāṇa D I.79; III.100; Vism 431; DA I.223. -parivitakka reflecting, reasoning S I.103, 178; -pharaṇatā the breaking forth or the effulgence of heart, as one of five ideals to be pursued, viz. samādhi, pīti-pharaṇatā, sukha°, ceto°, āloka° D III.278; -vasippatta mastery over one's h. A II.6, 36, 185; IV.312; M I.377; Vism 382; Miln 82, 85; -vimutti emancipation of h. (always w. paððā-vimutti), which follows out of the destruction of the intoxications of the heart (āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavā c.-v.) Vin I.11 (akuppā); D I.156, 167, 251; III.78, 108, 248 (muditā); S II.265 (mettā); M I.197 (akuppā), 205, 296; III.145 (appamāṇā, mahaggatā); A I.124; II.6, 36; III.84; Sn 725, 727=It 106; It 20 (mettā), 75, 97; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 86 (mettā) Nett 81 (virāgā); DA I.313 (=cittavimutti); -vivaraṇa setting the h. free A IV.352; V.67. See also arahant II D. -samatha calm of h. Th 2, 118; -samādhi concentration of mind (=cittasamādhi DA I.104) D I.15; III. 30; S IV.297; A II.54; III.51; -samphassa contact with thought Dhs 3. Cela {Cela} (nt.) [Derivation unknown. Cp. Sk. cela] cloth, esp. clothes worn, garment, dress A I.206; Pv II.127 (kaðcanā° for kaðcana°); III.93 (for veḷa); dhāti° baby's napkin J III.539. In simile of one whose clothes are on fire (āditta°+ādittasīsa) S V.440; A II.93; III.307; IV.320. - Pāli Text Society 628 Pāli-English Dictionary acela a naked ascetic D I.161, 165≈; J V.75; VI.222. -aṇḍaka (v. l. aṇḍuka) a loincloth M I.150; ukkhepa waving of garments (as sign of applause), usually with sādhukāra J I.54; II.253; III.285; V.67; DhA II.43; SnA II.225; VvA 132, 140; -paṭṭikā (not °pattika) a bandage of cloth, a turban Vin II.128 (Bdhgh. celasandhara); M II.93; DhA III.136; -vitāna an awning J I.178; II.289; IV.378; Mhbv 122; Vism 108. Celaka {Celaka} 1. one who is clothed; acelaka without clothes D I.166; M I.77. - 2. a standardbearer [cp. Sk. ceḍaka P. ceṭa & in meaning E. knight > Ger. knecht; knave > knabe, knappe] D I.51; DA I.156; A IV. 107, 110; Miln 331. Celakedu {Celakedu} =cetakedu J VI.538. Celāpaka {Celapaka} =celāvaka J V.418. Celāvaka {Celavaka} [cp. Sk. chilla?] a kind of bird J VI.538 (Com. celabaka; is it celā bakā?); J V.416. See also celāpaka. Cokkha {Cokkha} (adj.) [Cp. Sk. cokṣa] clean J III.21; °bhāva cleanliness M I.39 (=visuddhibhāva; to be read for T mokkha°? See Trenckner's note on p. 530). Coca {Coca} (nt.) [Both derivation & meaning uncertain. The word is certainly not Aryan. See the note at Vinaya Texts II.132] the cocoa-nut or banana, or cinnamon J V.420 (°vana); -°pāna a sweet drink of banana or cocoa-nut milk Vin I.246. Codaka {Codaka} (adj.) [to codeti] one who rebukes; exhorting, reproving Vin I.173; II 248 sq.; V.158, 159 etc.; S I.63; M I.95 sq.; D III.236; A I.53; III.196; IV.193 sq.; DA I.40. Codanā {Codana} (f.) [see codeti] reproof, exhortation D I.230; III.218; A III.352; Vin V.158, 159; Vism 276. - As ttg. in codan'atthe nipāto an exhortative particle J VI.211 (for ingha); VvA 237 (id.); PvA 88 v. l. (for handa). Codita {Codita} [pp. of codeti, q. v.] urged, exhorted, incited; questioned Sn 819; J VI.256; Pv II.966; Vv 161; PvA 152; Sdhp 309. Codetar {Codetar} [n. ag. to codeti] one who reproves, one who exacts blame, etc. Vin V.184. Codeti {Codeti} [Vedic codati & codayati, from cud] aor. acodayi (J V.112), inf. codetuṃ, grd. codetabba; Pass. cujjati & codiyati; pp. cudita & codita (q. v.): Caus. codāpeti (Vin. III.165) to urge, incite, exhort; to reprove, reprimand, to call forth, to question; in spec. sense to demand payment of a debt (J VI.69 iṇaṃ codetvā; 245; Sn 120 iṇaṃ cujjamāna being pressed to pay up; PvA 3 iṇayikehi codiyamāna) D I.230; Vin I.43 (āpattiyā c. to reprove for an offence), 114, 170 sq., 322 sq.; II.2 sq., 80 sq.; III.164, etc.; J V.112; Dh 379; PvA 39, 74. Copana (nt.) [cup, copati to stir, rel. to kup, see kuppati] moving, stirring DhA IV.85;DhsA 92, 240, 323. {Copana} Pāli Text Society 629 Pāli-English Dictionary Cora {Cora} [cur, corayati to steal; Dhtp 530=theyye] a thief, a robber Vin I.74, 75, 88, 149; S II.100, 128=A II.240; S II.188 (gāmaghāta, etc.); IV.173; M II.74=Th 1, 786; A I.48; II.121 sq.; IV.92, 278; Sn 135, 616, 652; J I.264 (°rājā, the robber king); II.104; III.84; Miln 20; Vism 180 (sah'oḍḍha c.), 314 (in simile), 489 (rāja-puris' ānubandha°, in comparison), 569 (andhakāre corassa hattha-pasāraṇaṃ viya); DhA II.30; PvA 3, 54, 274. - mahā° a great robber Vin III.89; D III.203; A I.153; III.128; IV.339; Miln 185. - Often used in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87. -āṭavi wood of robbers Vism 190; -upaddava an attack from robbers J I.267; -kathā talk about thieves (one of the forbidden pastimes, see kathā) D I.7=Vin I.188≈; -ghātaka an executioner A II.207; J III.178; IV.447; V.303; PvA 5. Coraka {Coraka} [cp. Sk. coraka] a plant used for the preparation of perfume J VI.537. Corikā {Corika} f. thieving, theft Vin I.208; J III.508; Miln 158; PvA 4, 86, 192; VvA 72 (=theyyā). Corī {Cori} (f.) a female thief Vin IV.276; J II.363; (adj.) thievish, deceitful J I.295. - dāraka° a female kidnapper J VI.337. Corovassikaṃ {Corovassikam} at Nd2 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṃ (as S IV.185). Cola & Coḷa {Cola} [Cp. Sk. coḍa] a piece of cloth, a rag S I.34; J IV.380; Miln 169; PvA 73; Sdhp 396. -bhisi a mat spread with a piece of cloth (as a seat) Vin IV.40. - duccola clad in rags, badly dressed Vin I.109; III.263. Colaka {Colaka} (& coḷaka)=cola Vin I.48, 296; II.113, 151, 174, 208, 225; Pv II.17; Miln 53 (bark for tinder?); DhA II.173. Pāli Text Society 630 Pāli-English Dictionary Ch Cha & Chaḷ {Cha} {Chal} (cha in composition effects gemination of consonant, e. g. chabbīsati=cha+vīsati, chabbaṇṇa= cha+vaṇṇa, chaḷ only before vowels in compn: chaḷanga, chaḷ-abhiððā) [Vedic ṣaṣ & ṣaṭ (ṣaḍ=chaḷ), Gr. e(/c, Lat. sex, Goth, saihs] the number six. Cases: nom. cha, gen. channaṃ, instr. chahi (& chambhī (?) J IV.310, which should be chambhi & prob. chabbhi=ṣaḍbhiḥ; see also chambhī), loc. chasu (& chassu), num. ord. chaṭṭha the sixth. Cp. also saṭṭhi (60) soḷasa (16). Six is applied whenever a "major set" is concerned (see 2), as in the foll.: 6 munis are distinguished at Nd2 514 (in pairs of 3: see muni); 6 bhikkhus as a "clique" (see chabaggiya, cp. the Vestal virgins in Rome, 6 in number); 6 are the sciences of the Veda (see chaḷanga); there are 6 buddha-dhammā (Nd2 466); 6 viððāṇakāyā (see upadhi); 6 senses & sense-organs (see āyatana) - cha dānasālā J I.282; oraṃ chahi māsehi kālakiriyā bhavissati (l shall die in 6 months, i. e. not just yet, but very soon, after the "next" moon) Pv IV.335. Six bodily faults J I.394 (viz. too long, too short, too thin, too fat, too black, too white). Six thousand Gandhabbas J II.334. -aṃsa six-cornered Dhs 617. -anga the set of six Vedāngas, disciplines of Vedic science, viz. 1. kappa, 2. vyākaraṇā, 3. nirutti, 4. sikkhā, 5. chando (viciti), 6. jotisattha (thus enumd at VvA 265; at PvA 97 in sequence 4, 1, 3, 2, 6, 5): D III.269; Vv 6316; Pv II.613; Miln 178, 236. With ref. to the upekkhās, one is called the "one of six parts" (chaḷang'upekkhā) Vism 160. -abhiððā the 6 branches of higher knowledge Vin II.161; Pug 14. See abhiððā. -āsīti eighty-six [i. e. twice that many in all directions: psychologically 6 X 80= 6 X (4 X 2)10], of people: an immense number, millions Pv II.137: of Petas PvA 212; of sufferings in Niraya Pv III.106. -āhaṃ for six days J III.471. -kaṇṇa heard by six ears, i. e. public (opp. catukaṇṇa) J VI.392. -tiṃsa(ti) thirty-six A II.3; It 15; Dh 339; DhA III.211, 224 (°yojanaparimaṇḍala); IV.48. -danta having six tusks, in °daha N. of one of the Great Lakes of the Himavant (satta-mahā-sarā), lit. lake of the elephant with 6 tusks. cp. cha-visāṇa Vism 416. dvārika entering through six doors (i. e. the senses) DhA IV.221 (taṇhā). -dhātura (=dhātuya) consisting of six elements M III.239. -pañca (chappañca) six or five Miln 292. -phass'āyatana having six seats of contact (i. e. the outer senses) M III.239; Th 1, 755; PvA 52; cp. Sn 169. baṇṇa (=vaṇṇa) consisting of six colours (of raṃsi, rays) J V.40; DhA I.249; II.41; IV.99. -baggiya (=vaggiya) forming a group of six, a set of (sinful) Bhikkhus taken as exemplification of trespassing the rules of the Vinaya (cp. Oldenberg, Buddha 7384). Their names are Assaji, Punabhasu, Paṇḍuka, Lohitaka, Mettiya, Bhummajaka Vin II.1, 77, and passim; J II.387; DhA III.330. -bassāni (=vassāni) six years J I.85; DhA III.195. -bidha (=vidha) sixfold Vism 184. bisāṇa (=visāṇa) having six (i. e. a "major set") of tusks (of pre-eminent elephants) J V.42 (Nāgarājā), 48 (kuðjara), cp. chaddanta. - bīsati (=vīsati) twentysix DhA IV.233 (devalokā). Chakana & Chakaṇa {Chakana} (nt.) [Vedic śakṛt & śakan; Gr. ko/pros; Sk. chagana is later, see Trenckner, Notes 62 n. 16] the dung of animals Vin I.202; J III.386 (ṇ); V.286; VI.392 (ṇ). Chakaṇatī {Chakanati} (f.)=chakana Nd2 199. Chakala {Chakala} [cp. Sk. chagala, from chāga heifer] a he-goat J VI.237; °ka ibid. & Vin III 166. f. chakalī J VI.559. Chakka {Chakka} (nt.) [fr. cha) set of six Vism 242 (meda° & mutta°). Chakkhattuṃ {Chakkhattum} (adv.) [Sk. ṣaṭkṛtvas] six times D II.198; DhA III.196. Pāli Text Society 631 Pāli-English Dictionary Chaṭṭha {Chattha} the sixth Sn 171, 437; DhA III.200: SnA 364. Also as chaṭṭhama Sn 101, 103; J III.280. Chaḍḍaka {Chaddaka} (adj.) throwing away, removing, in puppha° a flower-rubbish remover (see pukkusa) Th 1, 620; Vism 194; - f. chaḍḍikā see kacavara°. Chaḍḍana {Chaddana} (nt.) throwing away, rejecting J I.290; Dhtp 571. -ī (f.) a shovel, dust-pan DhA III.7. See kacavara°. Chaḍḍita {Chaddita} [pp. of chaddeti] thrown out. vomited; cast away, rejected, left behind S III.143; J I.91, 478; Pv II.23 (=ucchiṭṭhaṃ vantan ti attho PvA 80); VvA 100; PvA 78, 185. Chaḍḍeti {Chaddeti} [Vedic chardayati & chṛṇatti to vomit; cp. also avaskara excrements & karīsa dung. From *sqer to eliminate, separate, throw out (Gr. kri/nw, Lat. ex- (s)cerno), cp. Gr. skw_s, Lat. mus(s)cerda, Ags. scearn] to spit out, to vomit, throw away; abandon, leave, reject Vin 214 sq.; IV.265; M I.207; S I.169 (chaṭṭehi wrongly for chaḍḍehi)=Sn p. 15; J I.61, 254, 265, 292; V.427; Pug 33; DhA I.95 (uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ ch. to kill oneself); II.101; III.171; VvA 126; PvA 43, 63, 174, 211; 255; Miln 15. - ger. chaḍḍūna Th 2, 469 (=chaḍḍetvā ThA 284); grd. chaḍḍetabba Vin I.48; J II.2; chaḍḍanīya Miln 252; chaḍḍiya (to be set aside) M I.12 sq. - Pass. chaḍḍīyati PvA 174. - Caus. chaḍḍāpeti to cause to be vomited, to cast off, to evacuate, to cause to be deserted Vin IV.265; J I.137; IV.139; VI.185, 534; Vism 182. - pp. chaḍḍita (q. v.). See also kacavara° Chaṇa {Chana} a festival J I.423, 489 (surā°), 499; II.48 (mangala°), 143, III.287, 446, 538; IV.115 (surā°); V.212; VI.221; 399 (°bheri); DhA III. 100 (surā°), 443 (°vesa); IV.195; VvA 173. Chaṇaka {Chanaka} [=akkhaṇa? Kern; cp. Sk. *ākhaṇa] the Chaṇaka plant Miln 352; cp. akkhaṇa. Chatta1 {Chatta} (nt.) [late Vedic chattra=*chad-tra, covering to chad, see chādati] a sunshade ("parasol" would be misleading. The handle of a chatta is affixed at the circumference, not at the centre as it is in a parasol), a canopy Vin I.152; II.114; D I.7≈; II.15 (seta°, under which Gotama is seated); J I.267 (seta°); IV.16; V.383; VI.370; Sn 688, 689; Miln 355; DhA I.380 sq.; DA I.89; PvA 47. - Esp. as seta° the royal canopy, one of the 5 insignia regis (setachatta-pamukhaṃ pañcavidhaṃ rāja-kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ PvA 74), see kakudhabhaṇḍa. J VI.4, 223, 389; °ṃ ussāpeti to unfold the r. canopy PvA 75; DhA I.161, 167. See also paṇṇa°. -daṇḍa the handle of a sunshade DhA III.212; -nāḷi the tube or shaft (of reeds or bamboo) used for the making of sunshades M II.116; -mangala the coronation festival J III.407; DhA III.307; VvA 66. Chatta2 {Chatta} [cp. Sk. chātra, one who carries his master's sunshade] a pupil, a student J II.428. Chattaka {Chattaka} (m. nt.) 1. a sun-shade J VI.252; Th 2, 23 (=ThA 29 as nickname of sun-shade makers). See also paṇṇa°. - 2. ahi° "snake's sun-shade," N. for a mushroom: toadstool D III.87; J II.95; a mushroom, toadstool J II.95. Chattiṃsakkhattuṃ {Chattimsakkhattum} (adv.) thirty-six times It 15. Pāli Text Society 632 Pāli-English Dictionary Chada {Chada} [cp. chādeti chad=saṃvaraṇe Dhtp 586] anything that covers, protects or hides, viz. a cover, an awning D I.7≈ (sa-uttara° but °chadana at D II.194); - a veil, in phrase vivaṭacchada "with the veil lifted" thus spelt only at Nd2 242, 593, DhA I.106 (vivattha°, v. l. vaṭṭa°) & DA I.251 (vivatta°), otherwise °chadda; - shelter, clothing in phrase ghāsacchada Pug 51 (see ghāsa & cp. chāda); - a hedge J VI.60; - a wing Th 1, I 108 (citra°). Chadana {Chadana} (nt.) [Vedic chad]=chada, viz. lit. 1. a cover, covering J I.376; V.241. - 2. a thatch, a roof Vin II.154 (various kinds), 195; J II.281; DhA II.65 (°piṭṭha); IV.104 (°assa udakapatana-ṭṭhāna), 178; PvA 55. - 3. a leaf, foliage J I.87; Th 1, 527. - 4. hair J V.202. -fig. pretence, camouflage, counterfeiting Sn 89 (=paṭirūpaṃ katvā SnA 164); Dhs 1059=Vbh 361= Nd2 271II. Dhs reads chandanaṃ & Vbh chādanaṃ. -iṭṭhikā a tile DhA IV.203. Chadda {Chadda} (nt.) [Dhtp 590 & Dhtm 820 expln a root chadd by "vamane," thus evidently taking it as an equivalent of chaḍḍ]=chada, only in phrase vivattacchadda (or vivaṭa°) D I.89; Sn 372, 378, 1003, 1147; DA I.251. Nd2 however & DA read °chada expl. by vivaṭarāgadosamoha-chadana SnA 365. Chaddhā {Chaddha} [Sk. ṣaṭśaḥ] sixfold Miln 2. Chanda {Chanda} [cp. Vedic and Sk. chanda, and skandh to jump]. 1. impulse, excitement; intention, resolution, will; desire for, wish for, delight in (c. loc.). Expld at Vism 466 as "kattukāmatāy" adhivacanaṃ; by Dhtp 587 & Dhtm 821 as chand=icchāyaṃ. - A. As virtue: dhammapadesu ch. striving after righteousness S I.202; tibba° ardent desire, zeal A I.229; IV.15; kusaladhamma° A III.441. Often combd with other good qualities, e. g. ch. vāyāma ussāha ussoḷhi A IV.320; ch. viriya citta vīmaṃsā in set of samādhis (cp. iddhipāda) D III.77 (see below), & in cpd. °ādhipateyya. - kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati viriyaṃ ārabhati, etc., see citta V. 1 db. - M II.174; A I.174 (ch. vā vāyāmo vā); III.50 (chandasā instr.); Sn 1026 (+viriya); Vv 2412 (=kusala° VvA 116); J VI.72; DhA I.14. - B. As vice: (a) kinds & character of ch. - With similar expressions: (kāya-) ch. sneha anvayatā M I.500. ch. dosa moha bhaya D III.182; Nd2 3372 (See also below chandāgati). Its nearest analogue in this sense is rāga (lust), e. g. ch. rāga dosa paṭigha D I.25 (cp. DA I.116); rūpesu uppajjati ch. vā rāgo S IV.195. See below °rāga. In this bad sense it is nearly the same as kāma (see kāma & kāmachanda: sensual desire, cp. DhsA 370, Vism 466 & Mrs. Rh. D. in Dhs trsl. 292) & the combn kāmachanda is only an enlarged term of kāma. Kāye chanda "delight in the body" M I.500; Sn 203. bhave ch. (pleasure in existence) Th 2, 14 (cp. bhavachanda); lokasmiṃ ch. (hankering after the world) Sn 866; methunasmiṃ (sexual desire) Sn 835 (expl. by ch. vā rāgo vā peman Nd1 181). - Ch. in this quality is one of the roots of misery: cittass'upakkileso S III.232 sq.; V.92; mūlaṃ dukkhassa J IV.328 sq. - Other passages illustrating ch. are e. g. vyāpāda° & vihiṃsā° S II.151; rūpa-dhātuyā° S III.10; IV.72; yaṃ aniccaṃ, etc. . . . tattha° S III.122, 177; IV.145 sq.; asmī ti ch. S III.130; atilīno ch. S V.277 sq., cp. also D II.277. - (b) the emancipation from ch. as necessary for the attainment of Arahantship. - vigata° (free from excitement) and a° S I.111; III.7, 107, 190; IV.387; A II.173 sq.; D III.238; ettha chandaṃ virājetvā Sn 171=S I.16. Kāye chandaṃ virājaye Sn 203. (a)vīta° A IV.461 sq. °ṃ vineti S I.22, 197; °ṃ vinodeti S I.186; ch. suppaṭivinīta S II.283. na tamhi °ṃ kayirātha Dh 117. - 2. (in the monastic law) consent, declaration of consent (to an official act: kamma) by an absentee Vin I.121, 122. dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā having given (his) consent to valid proceedings Vin IV.151, 152; cp. °dāyaka II.94. - Note. The commentaries follow the canonical usage of the word without adding any precision to its connotation. See Nd2 s. v.; DhsA 370; Pāli Text Society 633 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA I.14, J VI.72, VvA 77. -āgati in °gamana the wrong way (of behaviour, consisting) in excitement, one of the four agatigamanāni, viz. ch°, dosa°, moha°, bhaya° D III.133, 228; Vbh 376 (see above); -ādhipateyya (adj.) standing under the dominant influence of impulse Dhs 269, 359, 529; Vbh 288 (+viriya°, citta°, vīmaṃsā°); -ānunīta led according to one's own desire S IV.71; Sn 781; -āraha (adj.) fit to give one's consent Vin II.93; V.221; -ja sprung from desire (dukkha) S I.22; -nānatta the diversity or various ways of impulse or desire S II.143 sq.; D III.289; Vbh 425; -pahāna the giving up of wrong desire S V.273; -mūlaka (adj.) having its root in excitement A IV.339; V.107; -rāga exciting desire (cp. kāmachanda) D II.58, 60; III.289; S I.198; II.283; III. 232 sq. (cakkhusmiṃ, etc.); IV.7 sq. 164 (Bhagavato ch-r. n'atthi), 233; A I.264 (atīte ch-r-ṭṭhānīyā dhammā); II.71; III.73; Nd2 413; DhA I.334; -samādhi the (right) concentration of good effort, classed under the 4 iddhipādā with viriya°; citta° vīmaṃsā° D III.77; S V.268; A I.39; Vbh 216 sq.; Nett 15; -sampadā the blessing of zeal S V.30. Chandaka {Chandaka} a voluntary collection (of alms for the Sangha), usually as °ṃ saṃharati to make a vol. coll. Vin IV.250; J I.422; II.45, 85 (saṃharitvā v. l. BB; text sankaḍḍhitvā), 196, 248; III.288 (nava°, a new kind of donation); Cp. BSk. chandaka-bhikṣana AvŚ vol. II.227. Chandatā {Chandata} (f.) [see chanda] (strong) impulse, will, desire Nd2 394; Vbh 350, 370. Chandavantatā {Chandavantata} (f.) [abstr. to adj. chandavant, chanda+ vant]=chandatā VvA 319. Chandasā {Chandasa} (f.) [see chando] metrics, prosody Miln 3. Chandika {Chandika} (adj.) [see chanda] having zeal, endeavouring usually as a° without (right) effort, & always combd w. anādara & assaddha Pug 13; Vbh 341; PvA 54 (v. l.), 175. Chandīkata {Chandikata} (adj.) & chandīkatā (f.) (with) right effort, zealous, zeal (adj.) Th 1, 1029 (chandi°) (n.) Vbh 208. Chando (nt.) [Vedic chandas, from skandh, cp. in meaning Sk. pada; Gr. i)/ambos] metre, metrics, prosody, esp. applied to the Vedas Vin II.139 (chandaso buddhavacanaṃ āropeti to recite in metrical form, or acc. to Bdhgh. in the dialect of the Vedas cp. Vin. Texts III.15Q); S I.38; Sn 568 (Sāvittī chandaso mukhaṃ: the best of Vedic metres). -viciti prosody VvA 265 (enumd as one of the 6 disciplines dealing with the Vedas: see chaḷanga). {Chando} Channa1 {Channa} [pp. of chad, see chādeti1] 1. covered J IV. 293 (vāri°); VI.432 (padara°, ceiling); ThA 257. - 2. thatched (of a hut) Sn 18. - 3. concealed, hidden, secret J II.58; IV.58. - nt. channaṃ a secret place Vin IV.220. Channa2 {Channa} [pp. to chad (chand), chandayati, see chādeti2] fit, suitable, proper Vin II.124 (+paṭirūpa); III.128; D I.91 (+paṭirūpa); S I.9; M I.360; J III.315; V.307; VI.572; Pv II.1215 (=yutta PvA 159). Chapaka {Chapaka} name of a low-class tribe Vin IV.203 (=caṇḍāla Bdhgh. on Sekh. 69 at Vin IV.364), f. °ī ib. Chappañca {Chappanca} [cha+pañca] six or five Miln 292. Pāli Text Society 634 Pāli-English Dictionary Chab {Chab} ° see under cha. Chamā {Chama} (f.) [from kṣam, cp. khamati. It remains doubtful how the Dhtm (553, 555) came to define the root cham (=kṣam) as 1. hīḷane and 2. adane] the earth; only in oblique cases, used as adv. Instr. chamā on the ground, to the ground (=ved. kṣamā) M I.387; D III.6; J III.232; IV.285; VI.89, 528; Vv 414 (VvA 183; bhūmiyaṃ); Th 2, 17; 112 (ThA 116: chamāyaṃ); Pv IV.53 (PvA 260: bhūmiyaṃ). - loc. chamāyaṃ Vin I.118; A I.215; Sn 401; Vism 18; ThA 116; chamāya Vin II.214. Chambhati {Chambhati} [see chambheti] to be frightened DhA IV.52 (+vedhati). Chambhita {Chambhita} [pp. of chambheti]. Only in der. chambhitatta (nt.) the state of being stiff, paralysis, stupefaction, consternation, always combd with other expressions of fear, viz. uttāsa S V.386; bhaya J I.345 (where spelled chambhittaṃ); II.336 (where wrongly expld by sarīracalanaṃ), freq. in phrase bhaya ch. lomahaṃsa (fear, stupefaction & horripilation ("gooseflesh") Vin II.156; S I.104; 118; 219; D I.49 (expld at DA I.50 wrongly by sakala-sarīra calanaṃ); Nd2 470; Miln 23; Vbh 367; Vism 187. - In other connections at Nd2 1 (=Dhs 425, 1118, where thambhitatta instead of ch°); Dhs 965 (on which see Dhs trsl. 242). Chambhin {Chambhin} (adj.) [see chambheti] immovable, rigid; terrified, paralysed with fear S I.219; M I.19; J IV.310 (v. l. jambhī, here with ref. to one who is bound (stiff) with ropes (pāsasatehi chambhī) which is however taken by com. as instr. of cha & expld by chasu ṭhānesu, viz. on 4 limbs, body & neck; cp. cha). - acchambhin firm, steady, undismayed S I.220; Sn 42; J I.71. - See chambheti & chambhita. Chambheti [cp. Sk. skabhnāti & stabhnāti, skambh, and P. khambha, thambha & khambheti] to be firm or rigid, fig. to be stiff with fear, paralysed: see chambhin & chambhitatta, Cp. ūrukhambha (under khambha2). {Chambheti} Challi {Challi} [Sk. challi] bark, bast DhA II.165; Bdhgh on MV. VIII.29. Chava {Chava} [Derivation doubtful. Vedic śava] 1. a corpse Vin II.115 (°sīsassa patta a bowl made out of a skull). See cpds. - 2. (adj.) vile, low, miserable, wretched Vin II.112, 188; S I.66; M I.374; A II.57; J IV.263. -aṭṭhika bones of a corpes, a skeleton C III.15, 1 (?); -ālāta a torch from a pyre S III.93=A II.95=It 90= J I.482; Vism 54, 299 (°ûpama). -kuṭikā a charnelhouse, morgue, Vin I.152; -dāhaka one who (officially) burns the dead, an "undertaker" Vin I.152; DhA I.68 (f. °ikā); Vism 230; Miln 331. -dussa a miserable garment D I.166≈A I.240; II.206. -sarīra a corpse Vism 178 sq. -sitta a water pot (see above 1) Th 1, 127. Chavaka {Chavaka} 1. a corpse J V.449. - 2. wretched Miln 156, 200; (°caṇḍāla, see expln at J V.450). Chavi {Chavi} (f.) [*(s)qeu to cover. Vedic chavi, skuṇāti; cp. Gr. sku_lon; Lat. ob-scurus; Ohg. hs>E. shoe] the (outer, thin) skin, tegument S II.256; A IV.129; Sn 194; J II.92. Distinguished from camma, the hide (under-skin, corium) S II.238 (see camma); also in combn ch-cammamaṃsa Vism 235; DhA IV.56. -kalyāṇa beauty of complexion, one of the 5 beauties (see kalyāṇa 2d) DhA I.387; -dos'-ābādha a skin disease, cutaneous irritation Vin I.206; -roga skin disease DhA III.295; -vaṇṇa the colour of the Pāli Text Society 635 Pāli-English Dictionary skin, the complexion, esp. beautiful compl., beauty Vin I.8; J III.126; DhA IV.72; PvA 14 (vaṇṇadhātu), 70, 71 (=vaṇṇa). Chāta {Chata} (adj.) [cp. Sk. psāta from bhas (*bhsā), Gr. yw/xw; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sabulum & cp. bhasman, probably Non-Aryan] hungry J I.338; II.301; V.69; Pv II.113 (=bubhukkhita, khudāya abhibhūta PvA 72) II.936 (jighacchita PvA 126); PvA 62; VvA 76; Miln 253; Mhvs VII.24. Cp. pari°. -ajjhatta with hungry insides J I.345; II.203; V.338, 359; DhA I.125; DhA I.367 (chātak'); III.33, 40. -kāla time of being hungry. Chātaka {Chataka} [fr. prec.] 1. adj. hungry J I.245, 266. - 2. (nt.) hunger, famine J I.266; II.124, 149, 367; VI.487; DhA I.170. Chātatā {Chatata} [f. abstr. fr. chāta] hunger (lit. hungriness) DhA I.170. Chādana {Chadana} (nt.) [to chādeti] covering. clothing, often combd with ghāsa° food & clothing (q. v.) J II.79 (vattha°); Pv I.107 (bhojana°); II.17 (vattha°); PvA 50 (=vattha); DhA IV.7. - As adj. J VI.354 (of the thatch of a house). Chādanā {Chadana} (f.) [fr. chādeti] covering, concealment Pug 19, 23. Cp. pari°. Chādi {Chadi} (f.) [chādeti1] shade J IV.351. Chādiya {Chadiya} (nt.) covering (of a house or hut), thatch, straw, hay (for eating) J VI.354 (=gehacchādana-tiṇa). Chādeti1 [Caus. of chad, Sk. chādayati] (a) to cover, to conceal Vin II.211 (Pass. chādīyati); Sn 1022 (mukhaṃ jivhāya ch.); Dh 252; Pv III.43. - (b) (of sound) to penetrate, to fill J II.253; VI.195. - pp. channa1 (q. v.). {Chadeti} Chādeti2 {Chadeti} [for chandeti, cp. Sk. chandati & chadayati; to khyā?] (a) to seem good, to please, to give pleasure S II.110; A III.54; DhA III.285 (bhattaṃ me na ch.). - (b) to be pleased with, to delight in, to approve of (c acc.) esp. in phrase bhattaṃ chādeti to appreciate the meal Vin II.138; D I.72 (=rucceyya); V.31 (chādayamāna), 33 (chādamana), 463; Th 2, 409; Pv I.118 (nacchādimhamhase), pp. channa2. Chāpa {Chapa} & °ka [Sk. śāva] the young of an animal M I.384 (°ka); S II.269 (bhinka°); J I.460; II.439 (sakuṇa°); Miln 402; -f. chāpī J VI.192 (maṇḍūka°). Chāyā {Chaya} (f.) [Vedic chāyā, light & shade, *skei (cp. (s)qait in ketu), cp. Sk. śyāva; Gr. skia/ & skoio/s; Goth. skeinan. See note on kāla, vol. II. p. 382] shade, shadow S I.72, 93; M II.235; III.164; A II.114; Sn 1014; Dh 2; J II.302; IV.304; V.445; Miln 90, 298; DhA I.35; PvA 12, 32, 45, 81, etc. - Yakkhas have none; J V.34; VI.337. chāyā is frequent in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 87. Chārikā {Charika} (f.) [Cp. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāra burning; Gr. chro/s dry, Lat. serenus dry, clear. See also khāra & bhasma.] Ashes Vin I.210; II.220; D II.164=Ud 93; A I.209; IV.103; J III.447; IV.88; V.144; DhA I.256; II.68; VvA 67; PvA 80 (chārikangāra). Pāli Text Society 636 Pāli-English Dictionary Chiggaḷa {Chiggala} [cp. chidda] a hole, in eka°-yuga M III.169≈; tāḷa° key hole S IV.290; Vism 394. Chida {Chida} (always -°) (adj.) breaking, cutting, destroying M I.386; S I.191=Th 1, 1234; Th 1, 521; 1143; Sn 87 (kankha°) 491, 1021, 1101 (taṇha°); VvA 82 (id.). Chidda {Chidda} [cp. Ohg. scetar. For suffix °ra, cp. rudhira, etc. Vedic chid+ra. Cp. Sk. chidra] 1. (adj.) having rents or fissures, perforated S IV.316; J I.419; (fig.) faulty, defective, Vin I.290. - 2. (nt.) a cutting, slit, hole, aperture, S I.43; J I.170 (eka°), 172, 419, 503; II.244, 261; (kaṇṇa°); Vism 171, 172 (bhitti°), 174 (tāḷa°); SnA 248 (akkhi°); DhA III.42; VvA 100 (bhitti°); PvA 180 (kaṇṇa°), 253 (read chidde for chinde); fig. a fault, defect, flaw Dh 229 (acchidda-vutti faultless conduct) Miln 94. -āvachidda full of breaches and holes J III.491; Vism 252; DhA I.122, 284 (cp. °vichidda); III.151. -kārin inconsistent A II.187; -vichidda=°āvachidda J I.419; V.163 (sarīraṃ chiddavichiddaṃ karoti to perforate a body). Chiddaka {Chiddaka} (adj.) having holes or meshes (of a net) D I.45. Chiddatā {Chiddata} (f.) perforation, being perforated J I.419. Chiddavant {Chiddavant} (adj.) having faults, full of defects M I.272. Chindati {Chindati} [Vedic chid in 3 forms viz. 1. (Perf.) base chid; 2. Act. (pres.) base w. nasal infix. chind; 3. Med. (denom). base w. guṇa ched. Cp. the analagous formations of cit under cinteti. - Idg.* sk(h)eid, Gr. sxi/zw (E. schism); Lat. scindo (E. scissors); Ohg. scīzan; Ags. scītan; cp. also Goth. skaidan, Ohg. sceidan. Root chid is defined at Dhtp 382, 406 as "dvedhākaraṇa"] to cut off, to destroy, to remove, both lit. (bandhanaṃ, pāsaṃ, pasibbakaṃ, jīvaṃ, gīvaṃ, sīsaṃ, hatthapāde, etc.) and fig. (taṇhaṃ, mohaṃ, āsavā, saṃyojanāni, vicikicchaṃ, vanathaṃ, etc.) Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 88. - Forms: (1) chid: aor. acchidā Sn 357, as acchidaṃ M II.35, acchidda Dh 351 (cp. agamā); Pass. pres. chijjati (Sk. chidyate) Dh 284; It 70; J I.167; Th 1, 1055=Miln 395; Miln 40; aor. chijji J III.181 (dvidhā ch. broke in two). - fut. chijjissati J I.336; - ger. chijjitvā J I.202; IV.120; - pp. chijjita J III.389; see also chida, chidda, chinna. - (2) chind: Act. pres. chindati S I.149=A V.174= Sn 657; PvA 4, 114; VvA 123; - imper. chinda Sn 346; J II.153; chindatha Dh 283; - pot. chinde Dh 370; - ppr. chindamāna J I.70, 233. fut. chindissati DhA II.258. - aor. acchindi Vin I.88 & chindi J I.140. - ger. chinditvā J I.222, 254, 326; II.155. - inf. chindituṃ Vin I.206; PvA 253. - grd. chindiya J II.139 (duc°). - Caus. chindāpeti J II.104, 106; Vism 190 (rājāno core ch.). - (3) ched: fut. checchati (Sk. chetsyati) M I.434; Dh 350; Miln 391. - aor. acchecchi (Sk. acchaitsīt) S I.12; A II.249; Sn 355=Th 1, 1275; J VI.261. acchejji (v. l. of acchecchi) is read at S IV.205, 207, 399; V.441; A III.246, 444; It 47. - inf. chetuṃ J IV.208; Pv IV.328, & chettuṃ Sn 28. - ger. chetvā Sn 66, 545, 622; Dh 283, 369; J I.255; Nd2 245, & chetvāna Sn 44; Dh 346; J III.396. - grd. chetabba Vin II.110, & chejja (often combd w. bhejja, torture & maiming, as punishments) Vin III.47 (+bh°); J V.444 (id.) VI.536; Miln 83, 359. Also chejja in neg. acchejja S VI.226. - Caus. chedeti Vin I.50, & chedāpeti ib.; J IV.154. See also cheda, chedana. Chindanaka {Chindanaka} (adj.) [fr. chindati] breaking, see pari°. Chinna {Chinna} [pp. of chindati] cut off, destroyed Vin I.71 (acchinna-kesa with unshaven hair); M I.430; D II.8 (°papañca); J I.255; II.155; IV.138; Dh 338; Pv I.112 (v. l. for bhinna), 116; DhA Pāli Text Society 637 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.48. Very often in punishments of decapitation (sīsa°) or mutilation (hatthapāda°, etc.) e. g. Vin I.91; III.28; Pv II.24 (ghāna-sīsa°); Miln 5. Cp. sañ°. As first part of cpd., chinna° very frequently is to be rendered by "without," e. g. -āsa without hope J II.230; PvA 22, 174; iriyāpatha unable to walk, i. e. a cripple Vin I.91; -kaṇṇa without ears PvA 151; -gantha untrammelled, unfettered Sn 219; -pilotika with torn rags, or without rags S II.28; PvA 171 (+bhinna°); -bhatta without food i. e. famished, starved J I.84; V.382; DhA III.106=VvA 76; saṃsaya without doubt Sn 1112; It 96, 97, 123; Nd2 244. -sāṭaka a torn garment Vism 51. Chinnaka {Chinnaka} (adj.) [fr. chinna] cut; a° uncut (of cloth) Vin I.297. Chinnikā {Chinnika} (f.) deceitful, fraudulent, sly, only in combn w. dhuttā (dhuttikā) & only appld to women Vin III.128; IV.61; J II.114; Miln 122. Chuddha {Chuddha} [Sk. kṣubdha (?) kṣubh, perhaps better ṣṭīv, pp. ṣṭyūta (see niṭṭhubhati), cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 66, 120, & Trenckner Notes p. 75. See also khipita] thrown away, removed, rejected, contemptible Dh 41=Th 2, 468 (spelled chuṭṭha); J V.302. Chupati {Chupati} [Dhtp 480=samphasse] to touch Vin I.191; III.37, 121; J IV.82; VI.166; Vism 249; DhA I.166 (mā chupi). - pp. chupita. Chupana {Chupana} (nt.) touching Vin III.121; J VI.387. Chupita {Chupita} [pp. of chupati] touched Vin III.37; J VI.218. Chubhati {Chubhati} given as root chubh given as root chubh (for kQubh) with def. "nicchubhe" at Dhtm 550. See khobha. Churikā {Churika} (f.) [Sk. kṣurikā to kṣura see khura, cp. chārikā> khara] a knife, a dagger, kreese Th 2, 302; J III.370; Miln 339; cp. Miln trsln. II.227; ThA 227; DhA III.19. Cheka {Cheka} (adj.) 1. clever, skilful, shrewd; skilled in (c. loc.) Vin II.96; M I.509; J I.290 (angavijjāya); II.161, 403; V.216, 366 (°pāpaka good & bad); VI.294 (id.); Miln 293.; DA I.90; VvA 36, 215; DhA I.178. - 2. genuine Vism 437 (opp. kūṭa). Chekatā {Chekata} (f.) [cheka+tā] skill VvA 131. Chejja {Chejja} 1. see chindati. - 2. one of the 7 notes in the gamut VvA 139. Cheta {Cheta} an animal living in mountain cliffs, a sort of leopard S I.198. Chettar {Chettar} [Sk. chettṛ, n-agent to chindati] cutter, destroyer Sn 343; J VI.226. Cheda {Cheda} [see chindati] cutting, destruction, loss Sn 367 (°bandhana); J I.419; 485; sīsa° decapitation DhA II.204; PvA 5; aṇḍa° castration J IV.364; - bhatta °ṃ karoti to put on short rations J I.156. pada° separation of words SnA 150. -°gāmin (adj.) liable to break, fragile A II.81; J V.453. - Cp. vi°. Pāli Text Society 638 Pāli-English Dictionary Chedaka {Chedaka} (adj.) [fr. cheda] cutting; in aṇḍa° one who castrates J IV.366. Chedana {Chedana} (nt.) [see chindati] cutting, severing, destroying D I.5; (=DA I.80 hattha°-ādi); III.176; Vin II.133; A II.209; V.206; S IV.169 (nakha°); V.473; Miln 86; Vism 102 (°vadhabandana, etc.). Chedanaka {Chedanaka} 1. (adj.) one who tears or cuts off PvA 7. - 2. (nt.) the process of getting cut (a cert. penance for offences: in combn with āpattiyo & pācittiyaṃ) Vin II.307; IV.168, 170, 171, 279; V.133, 146 (cha ch. āpattiyo). Cheppā {Cheppa} (f.) [Sk. sépa] tail Vin I.191; III.21. J Ja {Ja} (-°) [adj.-suffix from jan, see janati; cp. °ga; gacchati] born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta°, ito°, eka°, kuto°, khandha°, jala°, daratha°, dāru°, di°, puthuj°, pubba°, yoni°, vāri°, saha°, sineha°. Jagat {Jagat} (nt.) [Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati] the world, the earth A II.15, 17 (jagato gati); S I.186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world). Jagatī {Jagati} (f.) [see jagat] only in cpds. as jagati°: -ppadesa a spot in the world Dh 127=PvA 104; -ruha earth grown, i. e. a tree J I.216. Jaganātha {Jaganatha} (nt.) [from jagat+nātha] Protector of the world, the earth. Jagga {Jagga} (nt.) [jaggati+ya] wakefulness S I.111. Jaggati {Jaggati} (=jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning "niddā-khaya."] (a) to watch, to lie awake J V.269. - (b) to watch over, i. e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up J I.148 (dārakaṃ), 245 (āsīvisaṃ). Jaggana {Jaggana} (nt.) [from jaggati] watching, tending, bringing up J I.148 (dāraka°). Jagganatā {Jagganata} [to jāgarati] watchfulness J I.10. Jagghati {Jagghati} [Intens. to sound-root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens. of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh= hasane] to laugh, to deride J III.223; V.436; VI.522. - pp. jagghita J VI.522. See also anu°, pa°. Jagghitā {Jagghita} (f.) laughter J III.226. Pāli Text Society 639 Pāli-English Dictionary Jaghana {Jaghana} (nt.) [Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. koxw/nh; see janghā] the loins, the buttocks Vin II.266; J V.203. Jangala {Jangala} (nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A V.21; J IV.71; VvA 338. Cp. ujjangala. Janghā {Jangha} (f.) [Vedic janghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *ghengh to walk; see also jaghana] the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) D II.17≈(S I.16=Sn 165 (eṇi°); Sn 610; J II.240; V.42; VI.34; ThA 212). In cpds. jangha° (except in janghā-vihāra). -ummagga a tunnel fit for walking J VI.428; -pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin III.185; J II.82; Miln 370 (°iya); Vism 17. -bala(ṃ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de); -magga a footpath J II.251; V.203; VvA 194. -vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually in phrase °ṃ anucankamati anuvicarati D I.235; M I.108; Sn p. 105, p. 115; or °ṃ carati PvA 73. - A I.136; J II.272; IV.7, 74; DhA III.141. Jangheyyaka {Jangheyyaka} (nt.) [see janghā] lit. "belonging to the knees"; the kneepiece of a robe Vin I.287. Jacca {Jacca} (adj.) [jāti+tya] of birth, by birth (usually -°) M II.47 (ittara°. of inferior birth); Sn p. 80 (kiṃ° of what birth, i. e. of what social standing); J I.342 (hīna° of low birth): Sdhp 416 (id.) J V.257 (nihīna°); Miln 189 (sama° of equal rank). -andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud 62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga VI.4); J I.45, 76; IV.192; Vbh 412 sq.; in similes at Vism 544, 596. Jaccā {Jacca} instr. of jāti. Jajjara {Jajjara} [From intensive of jarati] withered, feeble with age Th 2, 270; J I.5, 59 (jarā°); ThA 212; PvA 63 (°bhāva, state of being old) - a° not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna S IV.369. Jajjarita {Jajjarita} [pp. of intens. of jar see jarati] weakened DhA I.7. Jañña {Janna} (adj.) [=janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka] of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful M I.30 (jaððajaðða, cp. p. 528); J II.417 (=manāpa sādhu). a° J II.436. Jaṭa {Jata} a handle, only in vāsi° (h. of an adze) Vin IV.168; S III.154=A IV.127. Jaṭā {Jata} (f.) [B.Sk. jatā] tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Sn 249; Dh 241, 393; J I.12 (ajina+); II.272. - (b) the tangled branches of trees J I.64. - (c) (fig.) (the tangle of) desire, lust S I.13=165. -aṇḍuva (=°andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot S I.117; -ājina braided hair & an antelope's hide (worn by ascetics) Sn 1010 (°dhara), cp. above J I.12; -dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair M I.282. Jaṭita {Jatita} [pp. of jaṭ, to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: sanghāte] entangled S I.13; Miln 102, 390; Vism 1 (etym.). Jaṭin {Jatin} one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Sn 689; f. -inī J VI.555. Pāli Text Society 640 Pāli-English Dictionary Jaṭila {Jatila} [BSk. jaṭila] one who wears a jaṭā, i. e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enumd amongst other „religious‟ as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j. paribbājakā Nd2 308; ājīvikā nig° j. tāpasā Nd2 149, 513; - Vin I.24=IV.108; I.38 (purāṇa° who had previously been j.)=VvA 13=PvA 22; S I.78; Sn p. 103, 104 (Keṇiya j.); J I.15; II.382; Ud 6; Dpvs I.38. Jaṭilaka {Jatilaka} =jaṭila M I.282; A III.276; Miln 202; Vism 382. Jaṭhara {Jathara} (m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt=*gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild=E. child] the belly Miln 175. [cp. jānu & jannu] the knee D II.160; J VI.332; SnA II.230; DhA I.80 (°ka); II.57 (id.), 80; IV.204; VvA 206 (jaṇṇu-kappara). Jatu {Jatu} [Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue] lac. As medicine Vin I.201. °maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin IV.261; consisting of either jatu, kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay). Jattu {Jattu} (nt.) [Vedic jatru] the collar-bone DhA II.55 (gloss: aṃsakūṭa); Dāvs IV.49. Jaddhu {Jaddhu} [for jaddhuṃ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati] only in composition as a° not eating, abstaining from food. °ka one who fasts M I.245; °māra death by starvation J VI.63 (=anāsaka-maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha°?); °mārika A IV.287 (v. l. ajeṭṭha°). Jana {Jana} [*genē: see janati. Cp. Gr. gQnos, go/nos; Lat. genus=Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning] a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature, person, man Sn 121, 676, 807, 1023 (sabba everybody). Usually collectively: people, they, one (=Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dh 249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd S I.115; J I.167, 294; PvA 6; lokamahājana=loka DhA III.175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many A I.68; Dh 320; DhA III.175. See also puthujjana. - (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings: nānā° various living beings Sn 1102 (expld at Nd2 248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā J I.151; II.105; tayo j. J I.63; III.52; keci janā some people PvA 20. See also Sn 243, 598, 1077, 1121. -ādhipa a king of men J II.369; -inda=prec. J III.280, 294; -esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dh 255; -kāya a body or group of people J I.28; DhA I.33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā-diṭṭhikā); Dpvs I.40; -pada country see sep.; -majjhe (loc.) before (all) the people J I.294; Th 2, 394; -vāda people's talk, gossip Sn 973. Janaka {Janaka} [to janati] 1. producing, production Vism 369; adj. (-°) producing: pasāda° Mhvs I.4 (=°kāraka); a species of karma Vism 601; Cpd. 144 (A.I). - 2. n. f. °ikā genetrix, mother J I.16; Dhs 1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41). Janatā {Janata} (f.) [from janati] a collection of people ("mankind"), congregation, gathering; people, folk D I.151 (=DA I.310, correct jananā), 206; Vin II.128=M II.93 (pacchimā); A I.61 (id.); samūha upāsakagaṇa PvA 200). Janati1 {Janati} [Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gnē to (be able to) produce; Gr. ps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind, etc.] only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti Pāli Text Society 641 Pāli-English Dictionary (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. saðjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṃ j. to put forth exertion J II.407 (see chanda); (saṃ)vegaṃ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) J III.184; PvA 32; Mhvs I.4; dukkhaṃ j. to cause discomfort PvA 63. - Aor. janayi Th 2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṃ: she bore). - Pp. janita produced PvA 1. - See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti, ðāti, etc. Janati2 {Janati} to make a sound J VI.64 (=sanati saddaṃ karoti). Janana {Janana} (adj.) [to janati] producing, causing (-°) It 84 (anattha° dosa); J IV.141; Dpvs I.2; DhsA 258; Dhtp 428. - f. jananī PvA 1 (saṃvega° dẹsanā);= mother (cp. janettī) J IV.175; PvA 79. Note. jananā DA I.310 is misprint for janatā. Janapada {Janapada} [jana+pada, the latter in function of collective noun-abstract: see pada 3] inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market-place), the continent; politically: a province, district, county D I.136 (opp. nigama); II.349; A I.160, 178; Sn 422, 683, 995, 1102; J I.258; II.3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; PvA 20, 32, 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā-janapadā (Miln 350) enumd at A I.213=IV.252 sq.=Nd2 247 (on Sn 1102) as follows: Angā, Magadhā (+Kālingā, Nd2] Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā A IV.), Vaṃsā (Vangā A I.), Kurū, Paðcālā, Majjā (Macchā A), Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā. Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23. -kathā talk or gossip about the province D I.7≈; -kalyāṇī a country-beauty, i. e. the most beautiful girl in the province D I.193 (see kalyāṇa); -cārikā tramping the country PvA 14; -tthāvariya stableness, security, of the realm, in °patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin D I.88; II.16; Sn p. 106; -padesa a rural district A IV.366; V.101. Janavati {Janavati} (?) A IV.172. Janitta {Janitta} (nt.) [jan+tra, cp. Gr. gene/teira] birthplace J II.80. Janettī {Janetti} (f.) [f. to janitṛ=gene/tws=genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti°: pitri°] mother D II.7 sq.; M III.248; A IV.276; J I.48; II.381; IV.48. Jantāghara {Jantaghara} [acc. to Abhp. 214=aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i. e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate=Lat. caminata, Ger. stube=E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room)= Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325=yantra-gṛha (oil-mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Qtg. 1902, p. 339)=jentāka (hot dry bath), cp. Vin. Texts I.157; III.103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt-āgāra, to jhā to burn=Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (=Sk. kṣāti)+āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (=āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels=jant-āghara]-1. a (hot) room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin I.47, 139; II.119, 220 sq., 280; III.55; M III.126; J II.25, 144; Vism 18; Dpvs VIII.45. - 2. living room J I.449. Janti {Janti} at DA I.296 in jantiyā (for D I.135 jāniyā)=hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine [prob.=jahanti, to jahāti]. But see jāni. Pāli Text Society 642 Pāli-English Dictionary Jantu1 {Jantu} [Vedic jantu, see janati] a creature, living being, man, person S I.48; A IV.227; Sn 586, 773 sq., 808, 1103; Nd2 249 (=satta, nara, puggala); Dh 105, 176, 341, 395; J I.202; II.415; V.495; Pv II.949 (=sattanikāya, people, a crowd PvA 134). Jantu2 {Jantu} a grass Vin I.196. Jannu {Jannu} [cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu] the knee DhA I.394. -°ka D II.17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v. l. ṇṇ); J IV.165; DhA I.48. Japa (& jappa vv. ll.) [fr. japati] 1. muttering, mumbling. recitation A III.56=J III.205 (+manta); Sn 328 (jappa) (=niratthaka-kathā SnA 334). - 2. studying J III.114 (=ajjhena). {Japa} Japaka & Jappaka {Japaka} {Jappaka} (adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa.° Japati {Japati} (& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190=vacane; sound-root jap) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite J IV.204; Pv II.61 (=vippalapati PvA 94); PvA 97; ppr. jappaṃ S I.166 (palāpaṃ); J IV.75. See japa, japana; also pari°. Japana {Japana} (sic. DA I.97, otherwise jappana) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa°. See also pari°. Jappati {Jappati} [not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati (=japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp, as in cappeti=Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q. v.) cp. also calaka] to hunger for, to desire, yearn, long for, (Q acc.) Sn 771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaṃ), 899, 902; Nd2 79 (=pajappati), - pp. jappita Sn 902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa°. Jappanā {Jappana} =jappā Sn 945; Dhs 1059≈. Cp. pa°. Jappā {Jappa} (f.) [to jappati] desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd2 on taṇhā) S I.123 (bhava-lobha°); Sn 1033; Nd2 250; Nett 12; Dhs 279, 1059. Jambāla {Jambala} [Sk. jambāla] mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) A II.166. Jambu {Jambu} (f.) [Sk. jambu] the rose-apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana J II.160; V.6; Vv 67; 4413, 164. - As adj. f. jambī sarcastically "rose-apple-maid," appld to a gardener's daughter J III.22. dīpa the country of the rose-apples i. e. India J I.263; VvA 18; Miln 27, etc. -nada see jambonada; -pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose-apple (of black or dark colour) Vism 409; -pesī the rind of the r.-a. fruit J V.465; -rukka the r.-a. tree DhA III.211; -saṇḍa roseapple grove (=°dīpa, N. for India) Sn 552= Th 1, 822. Jambuka {Jambuka} [Sk. jambuka, to jambh?] a jackal J II.107; III.223. Jambonada {Jambonada} [Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)] a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J IV.105; VvA 13, 340) A I.181; II.8, 29; Vv 8417. Cp. jātarūpa. Pāli Text Society 643 Pāli-English Dictionary Jambhati {Jambhati} [cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define jambh as "gatta-vināma," i. e. bending the body] to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion) J VI.40. Jambhanā {Jambhana} (f.) [to jambhati] arousing, activity, alertness Vbh 352. Jamma {Jamma} (adj.) [Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?] miserable, wretched, contemptible J II.110; III.99 (=lāmaka); f. -ī S V.217; Dh 335, 336 (of taṇhā); J II.428; V.421; DhA IV.44 (=lāmakā). (nt.) [to janati] birth, descent, rank Sn 1018. Jaya {Jaya} [see jayati] vanquishing, overcoming, victory D I.10; Sn 681; J II.406; opp. parājaya Vism 401. -ggaha the lucky die J IV.322 (=kaṭaggaha, q. v.); -parājaya victory & defeat Dh 201; pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; °ṃ pivati DhA I.193; -sumana "victory's joy," N. of a plant (cp. jātisumana) Vism 174; DhA I.17, 383. Jayati {Jayati} (jeti, jināti) [Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to conquer, cp. jaya=bi/a; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)] to conquer, surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat. - Pres. [jayati] jeti J II.3; jināti Sn 439; Dh 354; J I.289; IV.71. - Pot. jeyya Com. on Dh 103; jine Dh 103=J II.4=VvA 69; 3rd pl. jineyyuṃ S I.221 (opp. parājeyyuṃ). Ppr. jayaṃ Dh 201. - Fut. jessati Vv 332; jayissati ib.; jinissati J II.183. - Aor. jini J I.313; II.404; ajini Dh 3; pl. jiniṃsu S I.221 (opp. parājiṃsu), 224 (opp. parājiṃsu, with v. l. °jiniṃsu); A IV.432 (opp. °jiyiṃsu, with v. l. °jiniṃsu). Also aor. ajesi DhA I.44 (=ajini). - Proh. (mā) jīyi J IV.107. - Ger. jetvā Sn 439; jetvāna It 76. - Inf. jinituṃ J VI.193; VvA 69. - Grd. jeyya Sn 288 (a°); jinitabba VvA 69 (v. l. jetabba). - Pass. jīyati (see parā°), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati - Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to, to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) J II.213, 369, 375; IV.403. - 2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite, to plunder M I.231; It 22=J IV.71 (v. l. hāpayati)= Miln 402; J VI.108 (to annul); Miln 227. - Des. jigiṃsati (q. v.). - pp. jina & jita (q. v.). Jayā {Jaya} f. [Vedic jāyā] wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply "the pair of them," and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. - husband & wife, a married couple S II.98; J I.347; IV.70, of birds. See also jāyampatikā. Jara {Jara} (adj.) (°-) [See jarati] old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; ûdapānaṃ a spoilt well J IV.387; -gava=°goṇa Pv I.81; -goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull J II.135; -sakka "the old S." J IV.389; -sālā a tumble-down shed PvA 78. Jaratā {Jarata} (f.) [see jarati] old age Dhs 644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism 449. Jarati {Jarati} [Vedic jarati & jīryati, *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaQrn, E. etc. corn] to suffer destruction or decay, to become old, in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin J V.501=VI.375. - 2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti. Pp. jiṇṇa. - Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā. Jarā {Jara} (f.) & (older) jaras (nt.) [of the latter only the instr. jarasā in use: Sn 804, 1123 (=jarāya Nd2 249). - Sk. jarā & jaraḥ to *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. gh_ras, ge/ras, grau_s old age, etc. See Pāli Text Society 644 Pāli-English Dictionary also jīraṇa(tā)] decay, decrepitude, old age Vin I.10, 34; A I.51, 138 (as Death's messenger); V.144 sq. (bhabbo jaraṃ pahātuṃ); Sn 311 (cp. D III.75); J I.59; Th 2, 252 sq.; Vism 502 (def. as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha). Defined as "yā tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṃ pāliccaṃ valittacatā āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripāko" D II.305=M I.49= S II.2=Nd2 252=Dhs 644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195. - Frequently combd with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) "decay & death" (see under jāti as to formulas): °maraṇa, D II.31 sq.; M I.49; Sn 575; °maccu Sn 581, 1092, 1094. ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara) Th II, 512; Pv II.611; Vv 6311; J III.515. -ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Th 2, 270 (=jiṇṇagharasadisa ThA 213). -jajjara feeble with age J I.59; -jiṇṇa decrepit with age PvA 148; -dhamma subject to growing old A I.138, 145; II.172, 247; III.54 sq., 71 sq.; patta old J III.394; IV.403; -bhaya fear of old age A I.179; II.121; -vata the wind of age DhA IV.25. -sutta the Suttanta on old age, N. of Sutta Nipāta IV.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with "appaṃ vata jīvitaṃ idaṃ"), quoted at DhA III.320. Jala {Jala} (nt.) [Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialectical; cp. udaka] water Sn 845; J I.222; III.188; IV.137. -gocara living in the water J II.158. -ja born or sprung from w. J IV.333; V.445; VvA 42; -da "giving water," rain-cloud Dāvs V.32; -dhara [cp. jalandhara rain-cloud] the sea Miln 117; -dhi=prec. Dāvs V.38. Jalati {Jalati} [Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaṃ), cp. Ohg. kol=coal; Celt. gûal] to burn, to shine D 3, 188; M I.487; J I.62; II.380; IV.69; It 86; Vv 462; VvA 107; Miln 223, 343. - Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire, light, kindle S I.169; J II.104; Miln 47. - Pp. jalita. Intens. daddaḷhati (q. v.). Cp. ujjāleti. Jalana {Jalana} (n.-adj.) [Sk. jvalana] burning Pgdp 16. Jalābu {Jalabu} [Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to jar see jarati, originally that which decays (=decidua); cp. Gr. gh_ras slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha] 1. the womb S III.240. - 2. the embryo J IV.38. - 3. the placenta J II.38. -ja born from a womb, viviparous M I.73; D III.230; J II.53=V.85. Jalita {Jalita} (adj.) [pp. to jalati] set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Sn 396, 668, 686; Vv 216 (=jalanto jotanto VvA 107); Pv I.1014 (burning floor of Niraya); II.112 (°ānubhāva: shining majesty); PvA 41 (=āditta burning); ThA 292. Jalūpikā {Jalupika} (f.) [Sk. *jalūkikā=jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalankā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. Qalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. bde/lla leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)] a leech Miln 407 (v. l. jalopikā). jalūkā leech DA I.117. Jalogi {Jalogi} (nt.?) toddy (i. e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin II.294 (pātuṃ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mhvs 4, 10. Jalla1 {Jalla} (nt.) [*jalya to jala or gal] moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda° or in cpd. rajo°, q. v.) Sn 249 (=rajojalla SnA 291); J VI.578 (sweat under the armpits=jallikā Com.). Jalla2 {Jalla} [prob.=jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.] athlete, acrobat J VI.271. Pāli Text Society 645 Pāli-English Dictionary Jallikā {Jallika} (f.) [demin. of jalla] a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda°, etc. A I.253 (kāli°); Sn 198=J I.146; VI.578. Jaḷa {Jala} (adj.) [Sk. jaḍa] dull, slow, stupid D III.265 (a°); A II.252; Pug 13; Miln 251; DA I.290. Java {Java} [Sk. java, to javati] 1. (n.) speed S II.266; V.227; M I.446; A II.113; III.248; Sn 221; J II.290; IV.2. Often combd with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness J I.62; VvA 104; PvA 4; Miln 4. - javena (instr.) speedily J II.377. - 2. (adj.) swift, quick J III.25; VI.244 (mano°, as quick as thought); Vv 16 (=vegavanto VvA 78); VvA 6 (sīgha°). cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) DhA I.262; -sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness, or alacrity A I.244 sq.; II.250 sq. Javati {Javati} Vedic ju Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten S I.33; J IV.213; Dāvs V.24; DhsA 265, pp. jūta. Javana {Javana} (nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Ps I.80 sq.; Vism 22; DhsA 265 (cp. Dhs trsl. pp. 132, 156); DA I.194. Usually in cpd. javana-pañña (adj.) of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa-paðða (hāsu° at M III.25; J IV.136) & puthu° tikkha° S V.376, 377; Nd2 235, 3a. Also in cpds. °paððā Ps II.185 sq.; °paððatā A I.45; °paððattaṃ S V.413. - 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta): the stage of full perception, or apperception. Vism ch. xiv. (e. g. p. 459); Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaṃ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245. In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of "going" (not "swiftness"), and the "going" is understood as intellectual movement. Javanaka {Javanaka} =java 2 (adj.) VvA 78. Jaha {Jaha} (adj.) (-°) [to jahati] leaving behind, giving up, see attaṃ°, okaṃ°, kappaṃ°, raṇaṃ°, sabbaṃ°, etc (S I.52; It 58; Sn 790, 1101, etc.); duj° hard to give up Th 1, 495. Jahati & Jahāti {Jahati} [Vedic root hā. Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. xh_ros void of, xh_ra widow, xw/ra open space (cp. Sk. vihāya=ākāsa), xwri/zw separate; Lat. her-es; Sk. jihīte to go forth=Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags. gan=go; also Sk. hāni want=Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr. xati/zw] to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce, forsake. Ster. expln at Nd2 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaṃ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities. - Pres. jahāti Sn 1, 506 (dosaṃ), 589; Dh 91; imper. jahassu Sn 1121 (rūpaṃ); pot. jahe It 34; Dh 221; J IV.58, & jaheyya Sn 362; It 115; J I.153; IV.58. - Fut. jahissāmi J III.279; IV.420; V.465; in verse: hassāmi J IV.420; V.465. - Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Sn 284, 328; Dh 29, 88, etc.; hitvāna (Sn 60), jahitvā & jahetvā (Sn 500). - Inf. jahituṃ J I.138. - Pp. jahita Sn 231; Kh 9; Miln 261. - Pass. hāyati S II.224; Sn 817; Miln 297, hāyate J V.488 & hīyati J II.65; Sn 944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare J II.327; pp. hīna (q. v.). - Caus. hāpeti (q. v.). See also hāni, hāyin, jaha. Jahitikā {Jahitika} (f.) [See jahati] (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated J I.148. Pāli Text Society 646 Pāli-English Dictionary Jāgara {Jagara} (adj.) [fr. jāgarti] waking, watchful, careful, vigilant S I.3; A II.13=It 116; M II.31; It 41; Miln 300. - bahu° wide awake, well aware, cautious Sn 972 (cp. rakkhita-mānasāno in same context V. 63); Dh 29. Jāgaraṇa {Jagarana} (nt.) [der. fr. jāgara] a means for waking or keeping awake Miln 301. Jāgaratā {Jagarata} (f.) [cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa] watchfulness, vigilance S I.3. Jāgarati {Jagarati} [Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr. e)gei/rw, perf. e)grh/gora (for *e)gh/gora). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā-khaya] to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dh 60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; It 41; Miln 300. - pp. jāgarita (q. v.). Jāgarita {Jagarita} (nt.) [pp. of jāgarti] waking, vigil It 41; Pug 59. Jāgariyā {Jagariya} (f.) [BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā] keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combn "indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaððū jāgariyaṃ anuyutto" (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e. g. S II.218; M I.32, 273, 354 sq., 471; A I.113 sq.; II.40. - Also in °ṃ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) It 42; Sn 926 (niddaṃ na bahulīkareyya j°ṃ bhajeyya ātāpī). - S IV.104; M I.273, 355; Miln 388. -ānuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd1 484. Jāta {Jata} [pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (kasi/-) gnhto/s, Ohg. knabo] 1. As adj.-noun: (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (=nibbatta pātubhūta Nd2 256) Sn 576 (jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ); jātena maccena kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ Dh 53=Miln 333; yakkhinī jātāsi (born a G.) J VI.337; rukkho j. J I.222; latā jātā Dh 340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya-paṇṇāni Vism 250. - (n.) he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaṃ hoti Sn 742; jātassa jarā paððāyissati J I.59; jātaṃ+bhūtaṃ (opp. ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ) It 37. - (b) "genuine," i.e. natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds. - 2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata): born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred, happened Sn 683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto); bhayaṃ jātaṃ (arose) Sn 207; vivādā jātā Sn 828; ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) J III.391; aphāsukaṃ jātaṃ (has occurred J I.291. - So in loc. abs. jāte (jātamhi) "when . . . has arisen, when there is . . .," e. g. atthamhi Vin I.350=M III.154=Dh 331; vādamhi Sn 832; oghe Sn 1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu J I.121. - 3. °jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada° pedal character S I.86; anga° the sexual organ Vin I.191; as adj. having become . . . (=bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of . . ., sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (=cuṇṇayitāni) M III.92; jālakajāta in bud A IV.117; chandajāta=chandika Sn 767; sujāta Sn 548 (well-born, i. e. auspicious, blessed, happy); pītisomanassa° joyful & glad Sn p. 94; J I.60, etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha). Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto J III.126; vināsa-ppaccayo jāto J I.256. - 4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story DhA I.34. -āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant VvA 10; -ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born VvA 158; J I.391 (so read for jāto varake). -kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in °ṃ karoti to set the horoscope PvA 198 (=nakkhatta-yogaṃ uggaṇhāti); -divasa the day of birth, birthday J III.391; IV.38; -mangala birth festival, i. e. the feast held on the birth of a child DhA II.86; -rūpa "sterling," pure metal, i. e. gold (in its natural state, before worked, cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa Pāli Text Society 647 Pāli-English Dictionary (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i. e. the brightcoloured metal: VvA 9; DhA IV.32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DA I.78 it is expld by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin III.238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha: j. Satthu-vaṇṇa. At A I.253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the "white"-smith as opp. to "black"-smith). - Combd w. hirañña Pv II.75; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (D I.5)≈ as well as in other connections, e. g. Vin I.245; II.294 sq.; S I.71, 95; IV.326 (the moral dangers of "money": yassa jātarūpa-rajataṃ kappati paðca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); V.353, 407; Dhs 617. - Other passages illustr. the use & valuation of j. are S II.234 (°paripūra); V.92 (upakkilesā); A I.210 (id.); III.16 (id.); - S I.93, 117; M I.38; A I.215; III.38; IV.199, 281; V.290; J II.296; IV.102; -veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda=Agni] fire S I.168; Sn 462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud 93; J I.214; II.326= IV.471; V.326; VI.204, 578; Vism 171; DA I.226; DhA I.44 (nirindhana, without fuel); -ssara a natural pond or lake Vin I.111; J I.470; II.57. Jātaka1 {Jataka} (nt.) [jāta+ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened] 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (M I.133; A II.7, 103, 108; Vin III.8; Pug 43. See navanga).-2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal. In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas, but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. B.C.), and is frequent in the Jātaka book. - 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids'Buddhist India, 189-209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature. - jātakaṃ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale J VI.363; jātakaṃ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident J I.106; DhA I.82. - Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at DhA I.34. -atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; -bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Miln 341. Jātaka2 {Jataka} (m.) [jāta+ka, belonging to what has been born] a son J I.239; IV.138. Jātatta {Jatatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. jāta] the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism 250; DhA I.241. Jāti {Jati} (f.) [see janati & cp. Gr. genea/, ge/nesis; Lat. gens; Goth. kind-ins]. - Instr. jātiyā (Sn 423) & jaccā (D II.8; J III.395; Dh 393); abl. jātiyā (S I.88) & jātito (by descent: D II.8); loc. jātiyaṃ (PvA 10) & jātiyā (PvA 78). - 1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth, "future life" as disposition to be born again, "former life" as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp. expln of jarā) as: yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattanaṃ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti saðjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaṃ pa ṭilābho D II.305 =S II.3=Nd2 257. - Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births; & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca-samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enumd in various formulæ, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd2 258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi, (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass'upāyāsa in the dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin I.10; A I.176; III.416; °dhamma destined to be born, etc. M I.161 sq., 173; - A V.216; Nd2 258, 304, 630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha). - (b) as Nos. 1-4: Nd2 254, 494b; J I.168, etc. - (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation, implying the whole series 1-5): S V.224; A V.144; jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ Vin I.1; D II.31, 57, etc.; °ika A II.11, 173; °īya M I.280; Nd2 40. - (d) to this is sometimes added Pāli Text Society 648 Pāli-English Dictionary (as summing up) saṃsāra: Nd2 282f; cp. kicchaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca D II.30. - (e) as Nos. 1+4: pahīna-jātimaraṇa (adj.) (=free from life & death, i. e. saṃsāra) A I.162; °bhayassa pāraga A II.15; °kovida Sn 484; atāri °ṃ asesaṃ Sn 355 (cp. 500); °assa pāraga Sn 32. - (f)=e+saṃsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saṃsāraṃ jātimaraṇagāmino A II.12=52; jātimaraṇasaṃsāraṃ ye vajanti punappunaṃ . . . avijjāy'eva sā gati Sn 729. - (g) as Nos. 1+2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraṃ A I.133= Sn 1048; jātijar'upaga Sn 725=It 106; saṃyojanaṃ jātijarāya chetvā It 42; - Sn 1052, 1060; Dh 238, 348; cp. jāti ādinā nihīna PvA 198. - Other phrases & applications: Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D I.81; III.50; A I.164; M II.20). Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (M I.139; Sn p. 16, etc.) and arahant II.A: jātiyā parimuccati S I.88; jātiṃ bhabbo pahātuṃ A V.144 sq. - antimā jāti the last rebirth D II.15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence PvA 1; atītajātiyaṃ in a former life (=pure) PvA 10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism 498501. - 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. fuh/, genus), often combd w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enumd at Vin IV.6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas & Brāhmaṇas. The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism 498, 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, sankhata-lakkhaṇa, paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya-sīla. - Kiṃ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage? D I.121; jāti-rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings J I.338; na naṃ jāti nivāresi brahmalok'ûpapattiyā Sn 139; jātiṃ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father & mother Sn 421, 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Sn 136; 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Sn 650; with nāma & gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena, etc. Vin IV.6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name D II.8; cp. jāti-gotta-kula J II.3. See also j.-vāda. - 3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3): catujātigandha four kinds of scent J I.265; II.291. - 4. (jāti°) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated, inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like °maṇi, °vīṇā, etc. -kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn S V.168; A I.167; Sn 209, 517, 743; Dh 423. -khetta the realm of rebirth PvA 138 (=dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); -thaddha conceited, proud of birth Sn 104 (+dhanatthaddha, gotta°: proud of wealth & name); -thera a Th. by rank D III.218; nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin I.1≈; -pabhava the origin or root of existence Sn 728; -puppha nutmeg J VI.367; -bhaya the fear of rebirth A II.121; -bhūmi natural ground, in °bhūmaka, °bhūmika, °bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaṃ vasati) M I.145; A III.366; -maṇi a genuine precious stone J II.417; -maya constituting birth, being like birth ThA 285; vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a "well-bred" brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena "of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation" D I.120, etc. (=DA I.281); A I.166; III.152, 223; Sn 315, 596. Cp. gotta-vāda (e. g. D I.99); -vibhanga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Sn 600; -vīṇā a first-class lute J II.249; -sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhāvasitto j.°) A III.152; -sambhava the origin of birth A I.142; III.311; J I.168; -sambheda difference of rank DhA I.166; -saṃsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saṃsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) M I.139; A III.84, 86; °ṃ khepetvā id. Th 2, 168; vitiṇṇo j.° n'atthi tassa punabbhavo Sn 746; sindhava a well-bred horse J II.97; -ssara the remembrance of (former) births (°ðāṇa) J I.167; IV.29; DhA II.27; IV.51; cp. cutûpapāta-ðāṇa); -hingulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion J V.67; VvA 4, 168, 324. Jātika {Jatika} (-°) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppaðða° & sappaðða° M I.225; dabba° A I.254; mukhara° Sn 275; viððū° Sn 294; māna° J I.88. - 2. descended from, being Pāli Text Society 649 Pāli-English Dictionary of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana° M II.19; aviheṭhaka° Miln 219; samāna° (of equal rank) DhA I.390; veṇa° (belonging to the bamboo-workers) PvA 175. Jātimant {Jatimant} (adj.) [jāti+mant] of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Sn 420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); J I.342 (jātimanta-kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.° D I.76=M II.17; DA I.221; Miln 215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Sn 1136= Nd2 259 (expld by paṇḍita paððavā). - ajātima not of good birth J VI.356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.). Jātu {Jatu} (indeel.) [Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. oi)_mai, Lat. credo, P. maððe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu "it might happen." Neither of these derivations is satisfactory] surely, undoubtedly (ekaṃsavacanaṃ SnA 348) usually in negative (& interrog.) sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu); mā jātu Vin II.203; Sn 152, 348 (no ce hi jātu); J I.293, 374; IV.261; V.503. Na jātucca at J VI.60 is apparently for na jātu ca. Jāna {Jana} (adj.) [to jðā, see jānāti] knowing or knowable, understandable J III.24 (=jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand D I.170, 187; M I.487; II.43. su° recognizable, intelligible Pv IV.135 (=suviððeyya PvA 230). Cp. ājāna. Jānana {Janana} (nt.) [fr. jðā] knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill J I.145 (attānaṃ -°kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self-recognition), 200 (-°manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by: tumhākaṃ) II.221; SnA 330; DhA II.73 (°sabhāva= ðatta); DA I.86 (akkhara°); Vism 391 (°atthāya in order to know), 436 (=pajānana). Cp. ājānana. - ajānana not knowing (°-) J V.199; VI.177; not known J I.32 (°sippa). Jānanaka {Jananaka} (adj.) [Sk. *jðānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. gen.) expert Av Ś II.119, 120, as n. ib. I.216] knowing DhsA 394. Jānanatā {Jananata} (f.) [abstr. fr. jānana] the fact of knowing, knowledge KhA 144. Jānapada {Janapada} (adj.-n.) [fr. janapada] belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. countryfolk (opp. negamā townsfolk) D I.136, 142; M II.74; J II.287, 388; DA I.297 (=janapada-vāsin). Jānāti {Janati} [Vedic jða, jānāti *genē & *gnē, cp. Gr. gignw/skw, gnwto/s, gnw_sis; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp. E. i-gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags. cnāwan=E. know] to know. I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān° & jðā° are represented in P. by jān° & ðā° (ða°) 1. jān: pres. jānāti; pot. jāneyya (Sn 781) & jaððā (A IV.366; Sn 116, 775; Dh 157, 352; J II.346; IV.478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (M. I.487; J I.288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Sn 873) & (archaic) jānemu (Sn 76, 599; Vv 8311); - imper. jānāhi (Sn 596, 1026; Pv II.912), 3rd. sg. jānātu (It 28); - ppr. jānanto & jānaṃ (D I.192; A I.128; Sn 722), ppr. med. jānamāna (J I.168); - fut. jānissati (J II.342; VI.364); - aor. ajāni (Sn 536) & jāni (J I.125, 269), 3rd pl. jāniṃsu (J II.105; VvA 113); - ger. jānitvā (J I.293; III.276); inf. jānituṃ (J I.125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below IV.2). - 2. ðā: fut. ðassati (D I.165); - aor. aððāsi (J I.271) & nāsi (Sn 471), 3rd pl. aððaṃsu (Vv 224). - ger. ðatvā (freq.); - grd. ñeyya A II.135 (see below) & ðātabba (PvA 133); - inf. ðātuṃ (freq.) - pp. ðāta (q. v.). - Pass. ðāyati to be called or named (Miln 25). II. Cognate Forms: Nd2 s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ðatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā (very freq.) The 1st expln is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaṃ 650 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary katvā, abhiððāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaṃ tvaṃ na jānāsi na passasi taṃ tvaṃ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? D I.193; Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhubhūto ðāṇabhūto M I.111; similarly A IV.153 sq. See further D I.2, 40, 84, 157 sq, 165, 192 sq., 238 sq.; A I.128; III.338; V.226; Sn 908; Nd2 35, 413, 517; Vism 200. III. Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out: mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know D I.216; te kho evaṃ jāneyyaṃ they ought to know ib.; jānantā nāma n'āhesuṃ "nobody knew" J III.188; jānāhi find out J I.184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time PvA 13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting I.223; ajānamāna id. Pv II.314. - 2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. acc., but also with gen.: J I.337; II.243), to have knowledge of, experience, find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi D I.88; aham p'etaṃ na jānāmi Sn 989; jānanti taṃ yakkhabhūtā Pv IV.135; paccakkhato ðatvā finding out personally J I.262; III.168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti S I.178; jānāti maṃ Bhagavā S I.116; kathaṃ jānemu taṃ mayaṃ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 8311; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaṃ so that we may know what a b. is Sn 599; yath'āhaṃ jāneyyaṃ vasalaṃ Sn p. 21; ajānanto ignorant PvA 4; annapānaṃ ajāṇanto (being without bread & water) PvA 169; ittaraṃ ittarato ðatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv I.1111; ingha me uṇh'odakaṃ jānāhi find me some hot water S I.174; seyyaṃ jānāhi Vin IV.16; phalaṃ pāpassa jānamāna (having experi- enced) J I.168; mantaṃ j. (to be in possession of a charm) J I.253; maggaṃ na j. Sn 441; pamāṇaṃ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) PvA 130. - 3. With double acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc. (cp. Caus.): petaṃ maṃ jānāhi "see in me a Peta" Pv II.912 (=upadhārehi PvA 119); bhadd'itthiyā ti maṃ aññaṃsu (they knew me as=they called me) Vv 224. IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt.=knowledge (cp. ðāṇa): yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ðāṇaṃ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i. e. he knows all) Nd2 2352m; ðāṇaṃ atikkamitvā ðeyyapatho n'atthi "beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge" ib.; ðeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge PvA 1. - 2. Caus. jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaṃ) to identify, to reveal oneself J I.107 (att. ajānāpetvā); VI.363; Vism 92 (att.); PvA 149 (att.); DhA II.62. Jāni1 {Jani} (f.) [from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti] deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill-treatment D I.135=A I.201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); S I.66 (hatajānisu), J I.55 (v. l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): IV.72 (dhana,° v. l. hāni); Dh 138 (=DhA III.70 dhanassa jāni, v. l. hāni). Jāni2 {Jani} (f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) A II.59 sq. Jānu {Janu} (nt.) [Vedic jānu=Gr. go/nu, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee] (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee J II.311; IV 41Q VI.471Q DA I.254. -maṇḍala the knee-cap, the knee A I.67; II.21; III.241 sq.; PvA 179. Jānuka {Januka} (nt.)=jānu A IV.102. Jāpayati {Japayati} Caus. of jayati. Jāmātar & Jāmāta (J IV.219) [Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. uncertain. BR. take it as jā+mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife's family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. {Jamatar} {Jamata} Pāli Text Society 651 Pāli-English Dictionary Cp. Gr. game/w; gambro/s, Lat. gener] daughter's husband, son-inlaw Th 2, 422 (=ThA 269 duhitu pati); J II.63; V.442. Jāyati {Jayati} (jāyate) [from jan, see janati] to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare J III.459; IV.53; Miln 337; ppr, jāyanto Sn 208; aor. jāyi J III.391; inf. jātum J I.374. - jāyati (loko), jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies D II.30; Vism 235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire-wood is born the fire Sn 462. - Vin II.95=305; Sn 114, 296, 657; Dh 58, 193, 212, 282; Pv III.114 (are reborn as). Cp. vi°. Jāyampatikā {Jayampatika} (pl.) [see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī] wife & husband VvA 286. Jāyā {Jaya} (f.) [from jan] wife Vin II.259=264; J IV.285. -patī (pl.) husband & wife PvA 159; Dāvs V.2. Jāyikā {Jayika} f. (cp. jāyā) wife M I.451. Jāra {Jara} [Vedic jāra] a paramour, adulterer J I.293; II.309. f. °t adulteress Vin II.259, 268; III.83. Jāla1 {Jala} (nt.) [Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa; cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa] a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon (=māyā). - A I.it. Nd2 260 (=suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); SnA 115, 263 (=suttamaya) D I.45 (anto-jālikata caught in a net); Sn 62, 71, 213, 669; J I.52; VI.139. kinkiṇika° a row of bells D II.183; muttā° a net of pearls J I.9; VvA 40; loha° PvA 153; hema° Vv 35; a fowler's net Dh 174; a spider's web Dh 347; nets for hair J VI.188; pabbata° a chain of mountains J II.399; sirā° network of veins J V.69; PvA 68. - Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. - B. Fig. Very often appld to the snares of Māra: S I.48 (maccuno); Sn 357 (id.); DhA III.175 (Māra°); Sn 527 (deception); taṇhā° the snare of worldly thirst (cp. °tanhā) M I.271; Th 1, 306; SnA 351; kāma° Th 1, 355; moha° S III.83; mohasama Dh 251; diṭṭhi° the fallacies of heresy D I.46; J VI.220; ðāṇa° the net of knowledge VvA 63; DhA III.171. bhumma° (vijjā) "earthly net," i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth SnA 353. -akkhi a mesh of a net J I.208: -taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs 1059, 1136; DhsA 367; -pūpa a "netcake"? DhA I.319; -hatthapāda (adj.) having net-like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa) prob. with reference to long nails D II.17 (see Dial. II.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 8116 (expld at VvA 315: jālavantehi abhilohita-nakkehi. Tena jāli (v. l. jāla-) hatthataṃ mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇaṃ tambanakhataṃ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti). Jāla2 {Jala} [Sk. jvāla, from jalati] glow, blaze J V.326; PvA 52 (=tejas), 154 (raṃsi°); Miln 357; Vism 419 (kappavināsaka°). -roruva N. of one of the two Roruva hells ("blazes") J V.271; -sikhā a glowing crest i. e. a flame Nd2 11 (=accī). Jālaka {Jalaka} (nt.) [jāla1+ka] 1. a net J VI.536; Dāvs V.51. - 2. a bud A IV.117 sq. (°jāta in bud). - f. jālikā chain armour Miln 199. Jālā {Jala} (f.) [see jāla2] a flame J I.216, 322; Miln 148, 357. Pāli Text Society 652 Pāli-English Dictionary Jālin {Jalin} (adj.-n.) "having a net," ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman J II.178. - (b) fig. usually in f. °inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) S I.107=Dh 180; A II.211; Th 1, 162, 908; Dhs 1059; Vism 1; DhsA 363; cp. M Vastu I.166; III.92. Jāleti {Jaleti} [caus. of jalati. See also jaleti] to cause to burn, to light, kindle J II.104; IV.290; V.32. Ji {Ji} (adj.-suffix) [From jayati to conquer] winning, victorious: sangāma° victorious in fight, in sangāmaj' uttama "greatest of conquerors" Dh 103; sabba° S IV.83. Jigacchā {Jigaccha} (f.) see jighacchā. Jigiṃsaka {Jigimsaka} (adj.) [see next] one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Sn 690. Jigiṃsati {Jigimsati} [Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44] to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet; Sn 700; J II.285; III.172 (v. l. BB. jigissaṃ); IV.406 (v. l. SS. jihiṃ°, BB. jigī°); V.372; VI.268. As jigīsati Th 1, 1110. Jigiṃsanatā {Jigimsanata} (f.) [n. abstr. fr. jigiṃsati] desire for, covetousness Vbh 353 (v. l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29 Jigucchaka {Jigucchaka} (adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of M I.327 (paṭhavī°, āpa° etc.) Miln 343. Jigucchati {Jigucchati} [Desid. of gup] to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. instr.) D I.213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): A IV.174 (kāyaduccaritena); Sn 215 (kammehi pāpakehi; SnA 266=hiriyati); J II.287; Pug. 36. - ppr. jigucchamāna It 43; grd. jigucchitabba A I.126; pp. jigucchita Sn 901. - See also jeguccha, jegucchin. Jigucchana {Jigucchana} (nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism 159; PvA 120. Jigucchā {Jiguccha} (f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo° (detesting asceticism) D I.174; S I.67; A II.200; jigucchabībhaccha-dassana detestable & fearful-looking PvA 56. Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at DhsA 210. Jighacchati {Jighacchati} [Desid. to ghasati, eat] to have a desire to eat, to be hungry D II.266; pp. jighacchita DhA II.145. Jighacchā {Jighaccha} (f.) [from jighacchati] appetite, hunger, often combd with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e. g. S I.18; A II.143, 153; Miln 304. - M I.13, 114; 364; III.97, 136; A III.163; Dh 203 (j. paramā rogā); J II.445; III.19; (°abhibhūta=chāta); Miln 204, 304; Sdhp 118, 388. Cp. khudā & chāta. Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at A II.117. Jiñjuka {Jinjuka} the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) J IV.333 (akkhīni j. °phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guðjā); V.156 (j. °phalasannibha); DhA I.177 (°gumba). Pāli Text Society Jiṇṇa 653 Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of jarati] 1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo-anupatta Nd2 261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DA I.283. - Vin II.189; D I.114; M II.48 sq., 66; A II.249; IV.173; Sn 1 (urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti); Pv I.121 (same simile); Sn 1120, 1144; J I.58; III.22 (-pilotikā worn-out rags); Dh 155, 260; Pv II.114 (jarājiṇṇa PvA 147); Pug 33; Vism 119 (°vihārā), 356 (°sandamānikā), 357 (°koṭṭha); ThA 213 (-ghara a tumble-down house); PvA 40 (-goṇQ=jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. °tara J IV.108. - 2. digested J II.362 {Jinna} Jiṇṇaka {Jinnaka} (adj.)=jiṇṇa Sn 98, 124; J IV.178, 366; Sdhp 299 (sālā). Jiṇṇatā {Jinnata} (f.) [cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā] decrepitude DA I.283 (jarā°). Jita {Jita} [pp. of jayati, conquer] conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin I.8; - Dh 40, 104 (attā jitaṃ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see DhA II.228), 105, 179; Vv 6427 (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya). - Cp. vi°. Jitatta {Jitatta} (nt.) [n. abstr. of jita] mastery, conquest VvA 284. Jina {Jina} [pp. med. of jayati] conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, "Victor": jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmāhaṃ Upaka jino ti Vin I.8=M I.171; Vin V.217; Sn 379, 697, 989, 996. magga° conqueror of the Path Sn 84 sq.; saṃsuddha° (id.) Sn 372. Cp khetta°. In other connections: Pv IV.333; Th 2, 419 (jin'amhase rūpinaṃ Lacchiṃ expld at ThA 268 as jinā amhase jinā vat'amha rūpavatiṃ Siriṃ). -cakka the Buddha's reign, rule, authority J IV.100; putta disciple of the B. Miln 177; -bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror PvA 254; sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs IV.3, 10. Jināti {Jinati} =jayati (jeti). See also vi°. Jimha {Jimha} (adj.) [Vedic jihma] crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vanka, opp. uju | M I.31 (+vanka); A V.289, 290; J I.290 (spelled jima); III.111=V.222; VI.66; Vism 219 (ajimha=uju); PvA 51 (citta° vanka . . .; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila. Jimhatā {Jimhata} (f.) [n. abstr. to jimha] crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs 50, 51 (+vankatā); Vbh 359. Jimheyya {Jimheyya} (nt.) [from jimha] crookedness, deceit, fraud M I.340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vankeyyāni j.°); A IV.189 (id.) V.167. Jiyā {Jiya} (f.) [Vedic jyā=Gr. bio/s bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread] a bow string M I.429 (five kinds); J II.88; III.323; Vism 150; DA I.207. -kāra bowstring-maker Miln 331. Jivhā {Jivha} (f.) [Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue] the tongue. - (a) physically: Vin I.34; A IV.131; Sn 673, 716; Dh 65, 360; J II.306; PvA 99 (of Petas: visukkha-kanthaṭṭha j.), 152. - Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Sn 1022; p. 108; & pahūta-jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni) D I.106=Sn p. 107; D II.18. dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) A III.260. - (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumn of sense-organs Pāli Text Society 654 Pāli-English Dictionary (jivhāya rasaṃ sāyati Nd2 under rūpa; jivhā-viññeyya rasa D I.245; II.281; M II.42) Vin I.34; D III.102, 226; M I.191; Vism 444. -agga the tip of the tongue A III.109; IV.137; DhA II.33. -āyatana the organ of taste D III.243, 280, 290; Dhs 585, 609, 653; -indriya the sense of taste D III.239; Dhs 585, 609, 972; -nittaddana (corr. to -nitthaddhana) tying the tongue by means of a spell D I.11 (cp. DA I.96); -viððāṇa the cognition of taste M I.112; D III.243; Dhs 556, 612, 632; samphassa contact with the sense of taste S I.115; D III.243; Dhs 585, 632, 787. Jīna {Jina} [pp. of jīyati] diminished, wasted, deprived of (with acc. or abl.) having lost; with acc.: J III.153, 223, 335; V.99 (atthaṃ: robbed of their possessions; Com. parihīna vinaṭṭha). - with abl.: J V.401 (read jīnā dhanā). Jīyati {Jiyati} [Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate] to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni); to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi J V.100; jīyanti J III.336 (dhanā); jīyittha S I.54; J I.468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiṃ) J IV.107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) D II.30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless J VI.528 (=jīyissanti); grd. jeyya: see ajeyya2. Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy°: jiyyati J VI.150; jiyyāma J II.75 (we lose= parihāyāma). Pp. jīna, q. v. Jīraka1 {Jiraka} [Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr. diero/s, Lat. viridis] digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion J II.181. See ajīraka. Jīraka2 {Jiraka} cummin-seed Miln 63; J I.244; II.363; VvA 186. Jīraṇa {Jirana} (nt.) [fr. jīr] decaying, getting old Dhtp 252. Jīraṇatā {Jiranata} (f.) [n. abstr. of jīr=jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā] the state of being decayed or aged, old age, decay, decrepitude M I.49; S II.2; Nd2 252=Dhs 644; PvA 149. Jīrati & Jīrayati {Jirati} {Jirayati} [Caus. of jarati] 1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin I.237 (jīrati); J V.501 (v. l. BB. for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya)=VI.375; PvA 57. - 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old A III.54 (jarā-dhammaṃ mā jīri "old age may not get old," or "the law of decay may not work"); Vism 235 (where id. p. D II.30 reads jīyati); DhA I.11 (cakkhūni jīranti). - 3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism 101. Jīreti & Jīrāpeti {Jireti} {Jirapeti} [Verbal formation from jīra1] to work out, to digest J I.238, 274 (jīreti); DhA I.171. Appl. to bhati, wages: bhatiṃ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. J II.309, 381; jīrāpeti as "destroy" at ThA 269 in expln of nijjareti (+vināseti). Jīva1 {Jiva} (adj.-n.) [Sk. jīva, Idg. *gÛīÛos=Gr. bi/oQ, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas] 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enumd with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla D I.53 (=DA I.161 jīvasaððī). "taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ udāhu aññaṃ j. aññaṃ s." (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D I.157, 188; II.333, 336, 339; S IV.392 sq.; M I.157, 426 sq.; A II.41. - Also in this sense at Miln 30, 54, 86. - Vin IV.34; S III.215, 258 sq.; IV.286; V.418; A V.31, 186, 193. - 2. life, in yāvajīvaṃ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime D III.133; Vin I.201; Dh 64; J II.155; PvA 76. gāhaṃ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.° gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti S I.84; J I.180; II.404; cp. karamara; Pāli Text Society 655 Pāli-English Dictionary -loka the animate creation J III.394; -sūla "life-pale," a stake for execution J II.443; -sokin (=sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow J VI.509. Jīva2 {Jiva} (nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on D III.201. Jīvaka {Jivaka} (adj.)=jīva, in bandhu° N. of a plant VvA 43. - f. °ikā q. v. Jīvaṃ—jīvaka {Jivamjivaka} (m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaṃ jīva D III.201; J V.406, 416; VI.276, 538 [Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer AvŚ II.227 has jīvaðjīvaka]. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaṃjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaṃjīveṇaṃ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation ("living he goes with life"? or "he goes like the j. bird"?). Jīvati {Jivati} [Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇadhāraṇe *gQeiē =Gr. bi/omai & zw/w, zh_n; Lat. vīvo: Goth. ga-quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken] to live, be alive, live by, subsist on (c. instr. or nissāya). Imper. pres. jīva Sn 427, very freq. with ciraṃ live long . . ., as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraṃ jīva J VI.337; c. jīvāhi Sn 1029; Pv II.333; c. jīvantu Pv I.55; pot. jīve Sn 440, 589; Dh 110; - ppr. jīvaṃ Sn 427, 432; - ppr. med. jīvamāna J I.307; PvA 39; - inf. jīvituṃ J I.263; Dh 123. - Sn 84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dh 197; J III.26; IV.137; VI.183 (jīvare); PvA 111. Jīvana {Jivana} (nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood PvA 161. Spelt jīvāna (v. l. jīvino) (adj.) at J III.353 (yācana°). Jīvamānaka {Jivamanaka} (adj.) [ppr. med. of jīvati+ka] living, alive Vism 194. Jīvikā {Jivika} (f.) [abstr. fr. jīvaka] living, livelihood S III.93; A V.87, 210; J IV.459; Miln 122; SnA 466. Freq. in combn °ṃ kappeti to find or get one's living: J II.209; PvA 40, etc.; °kappaka finding one's livelihood (c. ger. by) J II.167. Cp. next. Jīvita {Jivita} (nt.) [Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati "that which is lived," cp. same formation in Lat. vīta=*vīvita; Gr. bio/th living, sustenace, & di/aita, "diet"] (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp. jīvikā) Vin II.191; S I.42; IV.169, 213; M II.73 (appaṃ); A I.155, 255; III.72; IV.136 (appakaṃ parittaṃ); Sn 181, 440, 574, 577, 931, 1077; Dh 110, 111, 130; J I.222; Pv I.1111 (ittaraṃ); II.67 (vijahati); Dhs 19, 295; Vism 235, 236; Ps II.245; PvA 40. - jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin III.73; D III.235; M II.99; A III.146, 436; IV.370 sq.; PvA 67. -āsQ the desire for life A I.86; -indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin III.73; S V.204; Kvu 8, 10; Miln 56; Dhs 19; Vism 32, 230 (°upaccheda destruction of life), 447 (def.); DhA II.356 (°ṃ upacchindati to destroy life); VvA 72; -kkhaya the dissolution of life, i. e. death J I.222; PvA 95, 111; -dāna "the gift of life," saving or sparing life J I.167; II.154; -nikanti desire for life A IV.48; parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life M I.104 sq.; A III.120; V.211; -pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life D I.46 (=DA I.128); S II.83; A IV.13; -pariyosāna the end of life, i. e. death J I.256; PvA 73; -mada the pride of life, enumd under the 3 madā; viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life D III.220; A I.146; III.72; -rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) J II.190; sankhaya=°khaya Sn 74; Dh 331; Nd2 262 (=°pariyosāna); -hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life A IV.201, 270 Pāli Text Society 656 Pāli-English Dictionary Jīvin {Jivin} (adj.) (usually -°) living, leading a life (of . . .) S I.42, 61; Sn 88, 181; Dh 164; PvA 27. Cp. dīgha°, dhamma°. Juṇhā {Junha} (f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp. kālapakkha) Vin I.138, 176; J I.165; IV.498 (°pakkha). Juti {Juti} (f.) [Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati] splendour, brightness, effulgence, light J II.353; PvA 122, 137, 198. The spelling juti at M I.328 (in combn gati+juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v. l. given on p. 557). -dhara (jutin°) carrying or showing light, shining, resplendent, brilliant S I.121; J II.353; DhA I.432. Jutika {Jutika} (adj.) (-°) having light, in mahā° of great splendour D II.272; A I.206; IV.248. Jutimatā {Jutimata} (f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour, brightness, prominence J 14; V.405 Jutimant {Jutimant} (adj.) [fr. juti] brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: "bright." distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v. l. to jātimant) D II.256 (ī); S V.24; Dh 89 (=DhA II.163 ðāṇajutiyā jotetvā); Sn 508; Pv IV.135 (=PvA 230 ðāṇajutiyā jutimā). Jutimantatā {Jutimantata} (f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour SnA 453. Juhati {Juhati} [Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. xe/w, xQtra, xu_los; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan] to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate A II.207 (aggiṃ); Sn 1046 (=Nd2 263 deti cīvaraṃ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaṃ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiṃ); Pug 56; fut. juhissati S I.166 (aggiṃ); caus. hāpeti2 pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa. Juhana {Juhana} (nt.) [fr. juhati] offering, sacrifice D I.12, J II.43. Jūta {Juta} (nt.) [Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice] gambling, playing at dice D I.7 (°ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DA I.85)≈; III.182, 186 (id.); J I.290; III.198; VI.281; DhA II.228. °ṃ kīḷati to play at d. J I.289; III.187. - See also dūta2. -gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) J I.289, 293; -maṇḍala dice board (=phalaka J I.290) J I.293. -sālā gambling hall J VI.281. Je {Je} (part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin I.232, 292 (gaccha je); M I.126; VvA 187, 207; DhA IV.105. Jeguccha {Jeguccha} (adj.) & jegucchiya (J II.437) [sec. der. fr. jigucchā] contemptible, loathsome, detestable J IV.305; Vism 250; Th 1, 1056; PvA 78, 192 (asuci+). Cp. pari°. - a° not despised Sn 852; Th 1, 961. Jegucchitā {Jegucchita} (f.) [see jigucchita] avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin I.234; M I.30; A IV.182 sq. Jegucchin {Jegucchin} (adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually -°) M I.77; (parama°), 78 A IV.174, 182 sq., 188 sq., Miln 352 (pāpa°). Pāli Text Society 657 Pāli-English Dictionary Jeṭṭha {Jettha} (adj.) [compar.-superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. bi/a, from ji in jināti & jayati "stronger than others," used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old-elder, eldest. The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian's construction, see remarks on kaniṭṭha] better (than others), best, first, supreme; first-born; elder brother or sister, elder, eldest D II.15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho=the first, foremost & best of all); A I.108; II.87; III.152; IV.175; J I.138 (°putta); II.101 (°bhātā), 128 (°yakkhinī); IV.137. -apacāyin, in phrase kule-j.-apacāyin paying due respect to the clanelders D III.72, 74; S V.468; Vism 415; DhA I.265. Same for °apacāyikā (f.) honour to . . . Nd2 294, & °apacāyitar D III.70, 71, 145, 169. -māsa N. of a month SnA 359. Jeṭṭhaka {Jetthaka} =jeṭṭha J I.253; II.101 (°tāpasa); III.281 (°kam māra: head of the silversmith's guild); IV.137, 161; V.282; Pv I.113 (putta=pubbaja PvA 57); DhA III.237 (°sīla); IV.111 (id.); PvA 36 (°bhariyā), 42 (°pesakāra head of the weaver's guild), 47 (°vāṇija), 75. Jeti {Jeti} see jayati. Jevanīya {Jevaniya} (nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon A IV.107=110 (combd with āvudha & salāka; vv. ll. vedhanika, jeganika, jevanika). Jotaka {Jotaka} (adj.) [from juti] illuminating, making light; explaining J II.420; Dpvs XIV.50; Miln 343 (=lamp- lighter). - f. °ikā explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (KhA 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th 2; Vv & Pv.). - Jotika Np. DhA I.385 (Jotiya); Vism 233, 382. Jotati {Jotati} [Sk. dyotate to shine, *deiā; cp. Gr. de/atai shine, dh_los clear; also Sk. dī in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning "ditti," i. e. light] to shine, be splendid Jˋ I.53; VI.100, 509; PvA 71 (jotantī=obhāsentī). Jotana {Jotana} (nt.) & jotanā (f.) [cp. Sk. dyotana] illumination, explanation J VI.542; Ps II.112; VvA 17 (°nā). Joti {Joti} (m. nt.) [Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati] 1. light, splendour, radiance S I.93; A II.85; Vv 162. - 2. a star: see cpds. - 3. fire S I.169; Th 1, 415; J IV.206; sajotibhūta set on fire S II.260; A III.407 sq.; J I.232. -parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory S I.93; A II.85; D III.233; Pug 51; -pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 162 (expl. VvA 79: candima-suriya-nakkhatta tārakarūpānaṃ sādhāraṇa-nāmaṃ); -pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal DhA IV.209; -mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland) M I.87=A I.47=II.122=Nd1 154=Nd2 604=Miln 197; -rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) VvA 111, 339; DhA I.198; Miln 118; -sattha the science of the stars, astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷanga, cp. jotisā. Jotimant {Jotimant} (adj.) [joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant] luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Sn 348 (=paððājoti-sampanna SnA 348). Jotisā {Jotisa} (f.) [=Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)] astronomy Miln 3. Pāli Text Society 658 Pāli-English Dictionary Joteti {Joteti} [Caus. of jotati] (a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain A II.51=J V.509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṃ; Gloss J V.510 katheyya for joteyya=jotaye) It 108; J II.208; PvA 18. - (b) intrs. to shine DhA II.163 (ðāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent PvA 53. Pāli Text Society 659 Pāli-English Dictionary Jh Jhatta {Jhatta} [pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ðatta>*jðāpayati] set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched) combd w. chāta J II.83; VI.347. Jhatvā {Jhatva} see jhāpeti. Jhasa {Jhasa} (?) a window or opening in general J II.334. Jhāna1 {Jhana} (nt.) [from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym-) expln of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism 150 as follows: "ārammaṇ'ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṃ," i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse] literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation. It is the technical term for a special religious experience, reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind. 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma-saṃgani makes a second list of five stages, by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs 167-175). And the Vibhaṃga calls the first jhāna the paðcaṃgika-jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh 267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at D I.76: "with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil, supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable." It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S IV.301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (D I.37 ff.) as a deadly heresy. In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra-Kāḷāma & Uddaka-Rāmaputta (M I.164 f.). - The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: D I.34 sq.; 73 sq.; S II. 210 sq.; IV.217 sq., 263 sq.; V.213 sq.; M I.276 sq., 350 sq., 454 sq.; A I.53, 163; II.126; III.394 sq.; IV.409 sq.; V.157 sq.; Vin III.4; Nd2 on Sn 1119 & s.v.; Ps I.97 sq.; II.169 sq.; Vbh 257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq.; Vism 88, 415.-They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1-4 e. g. at Vin I.104; II.161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); D II.156, 186; III.78, 131, 222; S II.278 (nikāmalābhin); A II.36 (id.); III.354; S IV.299; V.307 sq.; M I.21, 41, 159, 203, 247, 398, 521; II.15, 37; Sn 69, 156, 985; Dh 372; J I.139; VvA 38; PvA 163. - Separately: the 1st: A IV.422; V.135; M I.246, 294; Miln 289; 1st-3rd: A III.323; M I.181; 1st & 2nd: M II.28; 4th: A II.41; III.325; V.31; D III.270; VvA 4. - See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq.; Index to Saṃyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa. -anuyutta applying oneself to Pāli Text Society 660 Pāli-English Dictionary meditation Sn 972; -anga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism 190. -kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation J III.45. -pasuta id. (+dhīra) Sn 709; Dh 181 (cp. DhA III.226); -rata fond of meditation S I.53, 122; IV.117; It 40; Sn 212, 503, 1009; Vv 5015; VvA 38; vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna A III.417; V.34; -sahagata accompanied by jh. (of paððābala) A I.42. Jhāna2 {Jhana} (nt.) [from jhāyati2] conflagration, fire D III.94; J I.347. Jhānika {Jhanika} (adj.) [fr. jhāna1] belonging to the (4) meditations Vism 111. Jhāpaka {Jhapaka} (adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary J III.71. Jhāpana {Jhapana} (nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra°-kicca cremation VvA 76. Jhāpita {Jhapita} [pp. jhāpeti] set on fire Miln 47; Vism 76 (°kāla time of cremation). Jhāpeti {Jhapeti} [Caus. of jhāyati2] 1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin IV.265; J I.255, 294; DhA II.66; PvA 62. - 2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq.) J III.441 (=ḍahati pīḷeti); VvA 38 (=jhāyati1, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf. jhāpetuṃ J VI.300 (+ghātetuṃ hantuṃ); ger. jhatvā ref. S I.161 (reads chetvā)=Nett 145 (reads jhitvā, with v. l. chetvā). S I.19 (reads chetvā, vv. ll. ghatvā & jhatvā)=J IV.67 (T. jhatvā, v. l. chetvā; expld by kilametvā); S I.41 (v. l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says "jhatvā ti vadhitvā"); J II.262 (+hantvā vadhitvā; expld by kilametvā); VI.299 (+vadhitvā); also jhatvāna J IV.57 (=hantvā). - pp. jhatta & jhāpita. Jhāma {Jhama} (adj.-n.) [jhāyati2] burning, on fire, conflagration, in °khetta charcoal-burner's field J I.238; II.92; °angāra a burning cinder PvA 90. By itself: J I.405; DhA II.67. Jhāmaka {Jhamaka} N. of a plant J VI.537; also in °bhatta (?) J II.288. Jhāyaka {Jhayaka} (adj.) one who makes a fire D III.94. Jhāyati1 {Jhayati} [Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filudeisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti>citta1] to meditate, contemplate, think upon, brood over (c. acc.): search for, hunt after D II.237 (jhānaṃ); S I.25, 57; A V.323 sq. (+pa,° ni,° ava°); Sn 165, 221, 425, 709, 818 (=Nd1 149 pa°, ni°, ava°); Dh 27, 371, 395; J I.67, 410; Vv 5012; Pv IV.166; Miln 66; SnA 320 (aor. jhāyiṃsu thought of). - pp. jhāyita. Jhāyati2 {Jhayati} [Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā] to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up D I.50 (=jāleti DA I.151); III.94 (to make a fire); J I.61, 62; Pv I.1110 (jhāyare v. l. BB. for ghāyire); Miln 47; PvA 33 (=pariḍayhati); - aor. jhāyi DhA II.240 sq. - (fig.) Dh 155; J VI.189. - Caus. jhāpeti. - Cp. khīyati2. Jhāyana1 {Jhayana} (nt.) [der. fr. jhāyati1] meditating, in °sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) VvA 38. Jhāyana2 {Jhayana} (nt.) [fr. jhāyati2] cremation, burning Pug A 187. Pāli Text Society 661 Pāli-English Dictionary Jhāyin {Jhayin} (adj.) [see jhāyati1 & jhāna] pondering over (c. acc.) intent on: meditative, selfconcentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice Vin II.75; S I.46=52; II.284; M I.334; A I.24; III.355; IV.426; V.156, 325 sq.; Sn 85 (magga°), 638, 719, 1009, 1105; It 71, 74, 112; J IV.7; Dh 23, 110, 387 (reminding of jhāyati2, cp. DhA IV.144); Nd2 264; Vv 58; Pv IV.132; Vbh 342. Nd1 226= Nd2 3422=Vism 26 (āpādaka°). Jhitvā {Jhitva} is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti). Pāli Text Society 662 Pāli-English Dictionary Ñ Ñatta {Natta} (nt.) [nomen agentis from jānāti] the intellectual faculty, intelligence Dh 72 (=DhA II.73: jānanasabhāva). Ñatti {Natti} (f.) [Sk. jðapti, from jðāpayati, caus of jðā] announcement, declaration, esp. as t. t. a motion or resolution put at a kammavācā (proceedings at a meeting of the chapter. The usual formula is "esā ðatti; suṇātu me bhante sangho": Vin I.340; III.150, 173, 228; - °ṃ ṭhapeti to propose a resolution Vin IV.152. - Vin V.142, 217 (na c'āpi ðatti na ca pana kammavācā). This resolution is also called a ñattikamma: Vin II.89; IV.152; V.116; A I.99. Two kinds are distinguished, viz. that at which the voting follows directly upon the motion, i. e. a ñattidutiya-kamma, & that at which the motion is put 3 times, & is then followed (as 4th item) by the decision, i. e. a ñ-catuttha-kamma. Both kinds are discussed at Vin I.56, 317 sq.; II.89; III.156; IV.152; & passim. Cp. Divy 356: jðapticaturtha. Cp. āṇatti, viññatti. Ñatvā {Natva} etc.: see jānāti. Ñāṇa {Nana} (nt.) [from jānāti. See also jānana. *genē, as in Gr. gnw_-sis (cp. gnostic), gnw/mh; Lat. (co)gnitio; Goth. kunpi; Ogh. kunst; E. knowledge] knowledge, intelligence, insight, conviction, recognition, opp. aðāṇa & avijjā, lack of k. or ignorance. - 1. Ñāṇa in the theory of cognition: it occurs in intensive couple-compounds with terms of sight as cakkhu (eye) & dassana (sight, view), e. g. in cakkhu-karaṇa ðāṇa-karaṇa "opening our eyes & thus producing knowledge" i. e. giving us the eye of knowledge (a mental eye) (see cakkhu, jānāti passati, & cpd. °karaṇa): Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ðāṇa-bhūto (=he is one perfected in knowledge) M I.111=Nd2 2353h; natthi hetu natthi paccayo ðāṇāya dassanāya ahetu apaccayo ðāṇaṃ dassanaṃ hoti "through seeing & knowing," i. e. on grounds of definite knowledge arises the sure conviction that where there is no cause there is no consequence S V.126. Cp. also the relation of diṭṭhi to ðāṇa. This implies that all things visible are knowable as well as that all our knowledge is based on empirical grounds; yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ðāṇaṃ Nd2 2353m; yaṃ ðāṇaṃ taṃ dassanaṃ, yaṃ dassanaṃ taṃ ðāṇaṃ Vin III.91; ðāṇa+dassana (i. e. full vision) as one of the characteristics of Arahantship: see arahant II.D. Cp. BSk. jðānadarśana, e. g. AvŚ I.210. - 2. Scope and character of ñāṇa: ñ. as faculty of understanding is included in paððā (cp. wisdom=perfected knowledge). The latter signifies the spiritual wisdom which embraces the fundamental truths of morality & conviction (such as aniccaṃ anattā dukkhaṃ: Miln 42); whereas ñ. is relative to common experience (see Nd2 2353 under cakkhumā, & on rel. of p. & ð. Ps I.59 sq.; 118 sq.; II.189 sq.). Perception (saððā) is necessary to the forming of ðāṇa, it precedes it (D I.185); as sure knowledge ð. is preferable to saddhā (S IV.298); at Vin III.91 the definition of ñ. is given with tisso vijjā (3 kinds of knowledge); they are specified at Nd2 266 as aṭṭhasamāpatti-ðāṇa (consisting in the 8 attainments, viz. jhāna & its 4 succeeding developments), paðc'abhiððā° (the 5 higher knowledges, see paððā & abhi°), micchā° (false k. or heresy). Three degrees of k. are distinguished at DA I.100, viz. sāvaka-pāramī-ðāṇa, paccekabuddha°, sabbaññuta° (highest k. of a relig. student, k. of a wise man, & omniscience). Four objects of k. (as objects of truth or sammādiṭṭhi) are enumd as dhamme ðāṇaṃ, anvaye ñ., paricchede ñ., sammuti ñ. at D III.226, 277; other four as dukkhe ñ. (dukkha-) samudaye ñ., nirodhe ñ., magge ñ. (i. e. the knowledge of the paṭicca-samuppāda) at D III.227; Ps I.118; Vbh 235 (=sammādiṭṭhi). Right knowledge (or truth) is contrasted with false k. (micchā-ðāṇa=micchādiṭṭhi): S V.384; M II.29; A II.222; V.327; Pāli Text Society 663 Pāli-English Dictionary Vbh 392. - 3. Ñāṇa in application: (a) Vin I.35; D II.155 (opp. pasāda); S I.129 (cittamhi susamāhite ðāṇamhi vuttamānamhi); II.60 (jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇan ti ñ.Q see ñ-vatthu); A I.219 (on precedence of either samādhi or ð.); Sn 378, 789, 987 (muddhani ðāṇaṃ tassa na vijjati), 1078 (diṭṭhi, suti, ñ.: doctrine, revelation, personal knowledge, i. e. intelligence; differently expl. at Nd2 266), 1113; Pv III.51 (Sugatassa ð. is asādhāraṇaṃ) Ps I.194 sq.; II.244; Vbh 306 sq. (ñ-vibhanga), 328 sq. (kammassakataṃ ñ.); Nett 15 sq.; 161 (+ñeyya), 191 (id.). - (b) ðāṇaṃ hoti or uppajjati knowledge comes to (him) i. e. to reason, to arrive at a conclusion (with iti=that . . .) S II.124=III.28 (uppajjati); D III.278 (id.); A II.211≈; IV.75; V.195; S III.154. See also arahant II.D. - (c) Var. attributes of ð.: anuttariya A V.37; aparapaccayā (k. of the noneffect of causation through lack of cause) S II.17, 78; III.135; V.179, 422 sq. (=sammādiṭṭhi), same as ahetu-ðāṇa S V.126; asādhāraṇa (incomparable, uncommon k.) A III.441; PvA 197; akuppa D III.273; ariya A III.451; pariyodāta S I.198; bhiyyosomatta S III.112; yathā bhūtaṃ (proper, definite, right k.) (concerning kāya, etc.) S V.144; A III.420; V.37. - (d) knowledge of, about or concerning, consisting in or belonging to, is expressed either by loc. or -° (equal to subj. or obj. gen.). - (a) with loc.: anuppāde ð. D III.214, 274; anvaye D III.226, 277; kāye D III.274; khaye D III.214, 220 (āsavānaṃ; cp. M I.23, 183, 348; II.38), 275; S II.30; Nett 15; cutûpapāte D III.111, 220; dukkhe (etc.) D IIII.227; S II.4; V.8, 430; dhamme D III.226; S II.58; nibbāne S II.124 (cp. IV.86). - (b) as -°: anāvaraṇa° DA I.100; ariya S I.228; A III.451; khanti Ps I.106; jātissara J I.167; cutûpapāta M I.22, 183, 347; II.38, etc.; ceto-pariya D III.100, & °pariyāya S V.160; dibbacakkhu Ps I.114; dhammaṭṭhiti S II.60, 124; Ps I.50; nibbidā Ps I.195; pubbenivāsānusati M I.22, 248, 347; II.38, etc.; Buddha° Nd2 2353; Ps I.133; II.31, 195; DA I.100; sabbaññuta Ps I.131 sq.; DA I.99 sq.; PvA 197; sekha S II.43, 58, 80, & asekha S III.83. - (e) aððāṇa wrong k., false view, ignorance, untruth S I.181; II.92; III.258 sq.; V.126; A II.11; Sn 347, 839; Ps I.80; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061; see avijjā & micchādiṭṭhi. -indriya the faculty of cognition or understanding Dhs 157; -ûpapanna endowed with k. Sn 1077 (=Nd2 266b °upeta); -karaṇa (adj.) giving (right) understanding, enlightening, in combn w. cakkhukaraṇa (giving (in)sight, cp. "your eyes shall be opened and ye shall be knowing good and evil" Gen. 35): kusalavitakkā anandha-karaṇā cakkhu° ðāṇa° It 82; f. -ī (of majjhimā-paṭipadā) S IV.331; cakkhu the eye of k. PvA 166; -jāla the net of k., in phrase ðāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭha coming within the net, i. e. into the range of one's intelligence or mental eye (clear sight) DhA I.26; II.37, 58, 96; III.171, 193; IV.61; VvA 63; -dassana "knowing and seeing," "clear sight," i. e. perfect knowledge; having a vision of truth, i. e. recognition of truth, philosophy, (right) theory of life, all-comprising knowledge. Defined as tisso vijjā (see above 2) at Vin IV.26; fully discussed at DA I.220, cp. also def. at Ps II.244. - Vin II.178. (parisuddha°;+ājīva, dhammadesanā, veyyākaraṇa); III.90 sq.; V.164, 197; D I.76≈(following after the jhānas as the first step of paððā, see paððā-sampadā); III.134, 222 (°paṭilābha), 288 (°visuddhi); M I.195 sq.; 202 sq., 482; II.9, 31; Nett 17, 18, 28; see also vimutti°; -dassin one who possesses perfect k. Sn 478; -patha the path of k. Sn 868; -phusanā experience, gaining of k. DhA I.230; -bandhu an associate or friend of k. Sn 911; -bhūta in comb" w. cakkhubhūta, having become seeing & knowing, i. e. being wise S II.255; IV.94; A V.226 sq.; -vatthūni (pl.) the objects or items of (right) knowledge which means k. of the paṭiccasamuppāda or causal connection of phenomena. As 44 (i. e. 4 X 11, all constituents except avijjā, in analogy to the 4 parts of the ariyasaccāni) S II.56 sq., as 77 (7 X 11) S II.59 sq.; discussed in extenso at Vbh 306-344 (called ðāṇavatthu); -vāda talk about (the attainment of supreme) knowledge D III.13 sq.; A V.42 sq.; vippayutta disconnected with k. Dhs 147, 157, 270; -vimokkha emancipation through k. Ps II.36, 42; -visesa distinction of k., superior k. PvA 196; -sampayutta associated with k. Dhs 1, 147, 157, etc.; Vbh 169 sq., 184, 285 sq., 414 sq. Ñāṇika {Nanika} (adj.) in paðca° having five truths (of samādhi) D III.278. Pāli Text Society Ñāṇin 664 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) knowing, one who is possessed of (right) knowledge S II.169; A II.89 (sammā°); IV.340. - aððāṇin not knowing, unaware VvA 76. {Nanin} Ñāta {Nata} [pp. of jānāti=Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. (g)notus; ajðāta (P. aððāta) = a)/gnwtos=ignotus] known, well-known; experienced, brought to knowledge, realized. In Nd2 s. v. constantly expl. by tulita tirita vibhūta vibhāvita which series is also used as expln. of diṭṭha & vidita A V.195; J I.266; Sn 343 (+yasassin); Miln 21 (id.). - aððāta not known, unknown Vin I.209; M I.430; S II.281; DhA I.208. Ñātaka {Nataka} [for *ðātika from ðāti] a relation, relative, kinsman Vin II.194; M II.67; Dh 43; Sn 263 (=KhA 140: ðāyante amhākaṃ ime ti ðātakā), 296, 579; Pv II.14 (Minayeff, but Hardy °ika); PvA 19, 21, 31, 62, 69; DA I.90. Ñāti {Nati} [see janati; cp. Sk. jðāti, Gr. gnwto/s, Lat. cognatus, Goth. knops] a relation, relative (=mātito pitito ca sambandhā PvA 25;=bandhū PvA 86; specialized as °sālohitā, see below). Pl. ðātayo (Pv I.43; KhA 209, 214) and ðātī (M II.73; KhA 210, cp. 213; acc. also ðātī Pv I.67); Sn 141; Dh 139, 204, 288; J II.353; Pv I.53, 122; II.313, 67. - Discussed in detail with regard to its being one of the 10 paḷibodhā at Vism 94. -kathā (boastful) talk about relatives D I.7≈ (cp. DA I.90); gata coming into (the ties of) relationship J VI.307 (°gataka ib. 308); -ghara the paternal home J I.52; -dhamma the duties of relatives Pv I.512; (=ðātīhi ðātīnaṃ kattabba-karaṇaṃ PvA 30); parivatta the circle of relations D I.61; M I.267; Pug 57≈; -peta a deceased relation Pv I.54; majjhagata (adj.) in the midst of one's relations Pug 29; -mittā (pl.) friends & relatives Dh 219; J III.396; Pv I.126; -vyasana misfortune of relatives (opp. °sampada) D III.235; enum as one of the general misfortunes under dukkha (see Nd2 304F); -sangha the congregation of kinsmen, the clan A I.152; Sn 589; (contrasted with friendship: mittāmaccā Sn p. 104), often with ref. to the deceased: petā ð-sālohitā the spirits of deceased bloodrelations M I.33; A V.132, 269; PvA 27, 28; -sineha the affection of relationship PvA 29; hetusampatti a blessing received through the kinsmen PvA 27. Ñāpeti {Napeti} [Caus. of jānāti, cp. also ðatti] to make known, to explain, to announce J II.133. Cp. jānāpeti & āṇāpeti. Ñāya {Naya} [Sk. nyāya=ni+i] 1. method, truth, system, later =logic: °gantha book on logic Dāvs III.41. - 2. fitness, right manner, propriety, right conduct, often appld to the "right path" (ariyamagga=ariyaðāya Vin I.10) D III.120; S V.19, 141, 167 sq., 185; A II.95; IV.426; V.194; Dh I.249; ariya ð. S II.68; V.387;= the causal law S V.388;=kalyāṇa-kusala-dhammatā A II.36; used in apposition with dhamma and kusala D II.151; M II.181, 197; is replaced herein by sacca S I.240;=Nibbāna at Vism 219, 524; ð.-paṭipanna walking in the right path S V.343; A II.56; III.212, 286; V.183. Ñū {Nu} (-ððū) (adj.-suffix) [Sk. -jða, from jānāti, *gn: cp. P. gū>Sk. ga] knowing, recognizing, acknowledging, in ughaṭita°, kata°, kāla°, khaṇa°, matta°, ratta°, vara°, vipacita°, veda°, sabba°, etc. (q. v.)-fem. abstr. °Qutā in same combinations. Pāli Text Society 665 Ṭ Ṭan {Tan} (?) (adv.) part of sound J I.287 (ṭan ti saddo). Pāli-English Dictionary Pāli Text Society 666 Pāli-English Dictionary Ṭh °Ṭha {°Tha} (°ṭṭha) (adj.-suffix) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, as opposed to either lying down or moving; located, being based on, founded on (e. g. appa° based on little D I.143): see kappa° (lasting a k.), kūṭa° (immovable), gaha° (founding a house, householder), dhamma°, nava°, vehāsa° (=vihan-ga). - (n.) a stand i. e. a place for: goṭṭha a stable. Ṭhapana {Thapana} (nt.) 1. setting up, placing, founding; establishment, arrangement, position Vin V.114; J I.99 (aggha° fixing prices); Miln 352 (pāda°); DA I.294; (=vidhārite); PvA 5 (kulavaṃsa°). - 2. letting alone, omission, suspension, in pāṭimokkha° Vin II.241. Ṭhapanā {Thapana} (f.) 1. arrangement DA I.294. - 2. application of mind, attention Pug 18, Vism 278 (=appanā). Ṭhapita {Thapita} [pp. of ṭhapeti] 1. placed, put down; set up, arranged, often simply pleonastic for finite verb (=being): saṃharitvā ṭh. being folded up J I.265 (cp. similar use of gahetvā c. ger.): mukkhe ṭh. J VI.366; °sankāra (dustheap) PvA 82; pariccajane ṭh. appointed for the distribution of gifts PvA 124. - 2. suspended, left over, set aside Vin II.242 (pāṭimokkha). Ṭhapeti {Thapeti} [Caus. of tiṭṭhati] to place, set up, fix, arrange, establish; appoint to (c. loc.); to place aside, save, put by, leave out Vin II.32 (pavāraṇaṃ), 191 (ucce & nīce ṭhāne to place high or low), 276 (pavāraṇaṃ); V.193 (uposathaṃ), 196 (give advice); D I.120 (leaving out, discarding); Dh 40 (cittaṃ ṭh. make firm) J I.62, 138, 223, 293 (except); II.132 (puttaṭṭhāne ṭh. as daughter); J II.159; VI.365 (putting by); VvA 63 (kasiṃ ṭhapetvā except ploughing); PvA 4, 20 (varaṃ ṭhapetvā denying a wish), 39, 114 (setting up); Miln 13 (ṭhapetvā setting aside, leaving till later). - inf. ṭhapetuṃ Vin II.194; PvA 73 (saṃharitvā ṭh. to fold up: cp. ṭhapita); grd. ṭhapetabba J II.352 (rājaṭṭhāne); PvA 97; & ṭhapaniya (in pañha ṭh. a question to be left standing over, i. e. not to be asked) D III.229. - ger. ṭhapetvā (leaving out, setting aside, excepting) also used as prep. c. acc. (before or after the noun): with the omission of, besides, except D I.105 (ṭh. dve); J I.179 (maṃ but for me), 294 (tumhe ṭh.); II.154 (ekaṃ vaddhaṃ ṭh.); IV.142 (ṭh. maṃ); VvA 100 (ṭh. ekaṃ itthiṃ); PvA 93 (ṭh. maṃ). Cp. BSk. sthāpayitvā "except" AvŚ II.111. - Caus. ṭhapāpeti to cause to be set up; to have erected, to put up J I.266; DhA II.191. Ṭhāna {Thana} (ṭṭhāna) (nt.) [Vedic sthāna, sthā, see tiṭṭhati; cp. Sk. sthāman Gr. staqmi/s, Lat. stamen] - I. Connotation. As one of the 4 iriyāpathā (behaviours) 1. contrasted (a) as standing position with sitting or reclining; (b) as rest with motion; 2. by itself without particular characterization as location. II. Meanings-(1) Literal: place, region, locality, abode, part (-° of, or belonging to)-(a) cattāri ṭhānāni dassanīyāni four places (in the career of Buddha) to be visited D II.140=A II.120; vāse ṭhāne gamane Sn 40 (expl. by SnA 85 as mahā-upaṭṭhānasankhāte ṭhāne, but may be referred to I. 1 (b)); ṭhānā cāveti to remove from one's place Sn 442; J IV.138; PvA 55 (spot of the body). - (b) kumbha° (the "locality of the pitcher," i. e. the well) q. v.; araðða° (part of the forest) J I.253; PvA 32; nivāsana° (abode) PvA 76; phāsuka° J II.103; PvA 13; vasana° J I.150, 278; VvA 66; virūhana° (place for the growing of . . .) PvA 7; vihāra (place of his sojourn) PvA 22; saka° (his own abode) J II.129; PvA 66. - (c) In this meaning it approaches the metaphorical sense of "condition, state" (see 2 & cp. gati) in: dibbāni ṭhānāni heavenly regions S I.21; tidivaṃ S I.96; saggaṃ ṭh. a happy condition Pv I.13; pitu gata° the place where my father went (after death) PvA 38; Yamassa ṭh.=pettivasaya PvA Pāli Text Society 667 Pāli-English Dictionary 59. - (d) In its pregnant sense in combn with accuta & acala it represents the connotation I. 1 (b), i. e. perdurance, constancy, i. e. Nibbāna Vv 514; Dh 225. - 2. Applied meanings- (a) state, condition; also -° (in sg.) as collective-abstract suffix in the sense of being, behaviour (corresponding to E. ending hood, ion, or ing), where it resembles abṡtr. formations in °tā & °ttaṃ (Sk. tā & tvaṃ), as lahuṭṭhāna=lahutā & collect. formations in °ti (Sk. daśati ten-hood; devatāti godhead, sarvatāti=P. sabbattaṃ comprehensiveness; cp. also Lat. civitātem, juventūtem). - S I.129 (condition) II.27 (asabha°)=M I.69; S III.57 (atasitāyaṃ fearless state): A II.118 sq. (four conditions); Ḍh 137 (dasannaṃ aññataraṃ th.° nigacchati he undergoes one of the foll. ten conditions, i. e. items of affliction, expld at DhA III.70 with kāraṇa "labours"), 309 (states=dukkhakāraṇāni DhA III.482, conditions of suffering or ordeals); hattha-pasāraṇa- ṭṭhāna condition of outstretched hands DhA I.298; loc. ṭhāne (-°) when required, at the occasion of . . . DhA I.89 (hasitabba°, saṃvega°, dātuṃ yutta°); pubbe nibbatta -ṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya "since the state (or the time) of his former birth" PvA 100. - vibhūsanaṭṭhāna ornamentation, decoration, things for adornment D I.5; Sn 59 (DA I.77 superficially: ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ; SnA 112 simply vibhūsā eva v-ṭṭhānaṃ); jūta-pamāda° (gambling & intoxication) D I.6≈ (cp. expl. at KhA 26); gata° & āgata° (her) going & coming J III.188; pariccāga° distribution of gifts PvA 124. - (b) (part=) attribute, quality, degree: aggasāvaka° (degrees of discipleship) VvA 2; esp. in set of 10 attributes, viz. rūpa (etc. 1-5), āyuQ vaṇṇa, sukha, yasa, ādhipateyya D III.146; S IV.275; Pv II.958, also collectively [see (a)] as dasaṭṭhānaṃ S I.193; out of these are mentioned as 4 attributes āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala at Vv 327; other ten at A V.129 (pāsaṃsāni). - (c) (counter-part=) object (-° for), thing; item, point; pl. grounds, ways, respects. With a numeral often=a (five)fold collection of . . . S IV.249 sq. (5 objects or things, cp. Ger. fünferlei); A III.54 sq. (id.), 60 sq., 71 sq.; etehi tīhi ṭhānehi on these 3 grounds Dh 224; manussā tīhi ṭhānehi bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavanti: kāyena vācāya manasā (in 3 ways, qualities or properties) A 151 sq.; cp. II.119 sq. (=saṃvutaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi Dh 391); catuhi ṭhānehi in Com. equals catuhi ākārehi or kāraṇehi pāmujjakaraṇaṃ ṭh. (object) Sn 256; ekaccesu ṭhānesu sameti ekaccesu na sameti "I agree in certain points, but not in others" D I.162; kankhaniya° doubtful point S IV.350, 399; - n'atthi aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ no other means, nothing else DhA II.90; agamanīya° something not to be done, not allowed VvA 72; cp. also kamma°. - (d) (standpoint=) ground for (assumption) reason, supposition, principle, esp. a sound conclusion, logic, reasonableness (opp. a° see 4): garayhaṃ th. āgacchati "he advocates a faulty principle" D I.161; catuhi ṭh. paððāpeti (four arguments) S III.116; IV.38Q; ṭhānakusala accomplished in sound reasoning S III.61 sq. (satta°); A II.170 sq. Also with aṭṭhānakusala: see below 4. III. Adverbial use of some cases acc. ṭhānaṃ: ettakaṃ ṭh. even a little bit DhA I.389. - abl. ṭhānaso: in combn w. hetuso with reason & cause, causally conditioned [see 2 (d)] S V.304; A III.417; V.33; Nett 94 (ðāṇa); abs. without moving (see I. 1 (b) & cp. Lat. statim) i. e. without an interval or a cause (of change), at once, immediately, spontaneously, impromptu (cp. cpd.° uppatti) S I.193; V.50, 321, 381; Pv I.44 (=khaṇaṃ yeva PvA 19). - loc. ṭhāne instead=like, as dhītu ṭhāne ṭhapesi he treats her like a daughter VvA 209; puttaṭṭhāne as a son J II.132. IV. Contrasted with negation of term (ṭhāna & aṭṭhāna). The meanings in this category are restricted to those mentioned above under 1 [esp. 1 (c)] & 2 (d), viz. the relations of place>not place (or wrong place, also as proper time & wrong time), i. e. somewhere>nowhere, and of possibility>impossibility (truth>falsehood). (a) ṭhānaṃ upagacchati (pathaviyā) to find a (resting) place on the ground, to stay on the ground (by means of the law of attraction and gravitation) Miln 255; opp. na ṭhānaṃ upa° to find no place to rest, to go into nothingness Miln 180, 237, 270. - (b) ṭhānaṃ vijjati there is a reason, it is logically sound, it is possible D I.163, 175; M III.64; Ps II.236 sq.; cp. M Vastu II.448; opp. na etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati it is not possible, feasible, plausible, logically correct Vin II.284; D I.104, 239; M II.10; III.64; Miln 237; Nett 92 sq. - (c) aṭṭhānaṃ an impossibility Sn 54 (aṭṭhāna, with Pāli Text Society 668 Pāli-English Dictionary elision of ṃ); aṭṭhāne at the wrong time J I.256; ṭhāna is that one of the gatis which is accessible to human influence, as regards gifts of relief or sacrifice (this is the pettivisaya), whilst aṭṭhāna applied to the other 4 gatis (see gati) PvA 27 sq. In cpd. ṭhānāṭhāna-gata it means referring or leading to good & bad places (gatis): of sabbe khayadhammā (i. e. keci saggûpagā keci apāyûpagā) Nett 94. In combn apucchi nipuṇe pañhe ṭhānāṭhānagate (Miln 1) it may mean either questions concerning possibilities & impossibilities or truths & falsehoods, or questions referring to happy & unhappy states (of existence); ṭhānāṭhāna-ðāṇa is "knowledge of correct & faulty conclusions" Nett 94, cp. Kvu 231 sq.; the same combn occurs with °kusala °kusalatā "accomplished or skilled (& skill) in understanding correct or faulty conclusions" D III.212 (one of the ten powers of the Buddha); M III.64; Dhs 1337, 1338 (trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. on p. 348 Dhs. trsl. as "skill in affirming or negating causal conjuncture"). In the same sense: ṭhānaṃ ṭhānato pajānāti (& aṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhānato p.) to draw a logical inference from that which is a proper ground for inference (i. e. which is logical) S V.304; M I.69 sq.=A III.417; V.33. -uppatti arising instantaneously (see ṭhānaso, above III.) VvA 37; J VI.308 (°kāraṇavindana finding a means right on the spot); -ka (adj.) on the spot, momentary, spontaneous J VI.304. Ṭhānīya (adj.) [grd. of tiṭṭhati] standing, having a certain position, founded on or caused by (-°) Vin II.194 (-nīca°); A I.264 (chanda - rāga - dhamma°). See also under tiṭṭhati. {Thaniya} Ṭhāyika {Thayika} (adj.) at Miln 201 "one who gains his living or subsists on" (instr.) is doubtful reading. Ṭhāyin {Thayin} (adj.-n.) [from tiṭṭhati] standing, being in, being in a state of (-°), staying with, dependent on (with gen.): pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin "being in a state of one to whom it has arisen," i. e. one who has got the idea of . . . or one who imagines S III.3 sq.; arūpa-ṭṭhāyin It 62; Yamassa ṭhāyino being under the rule of Yama Pv I.119. Ṭhita {Thita} [pp. of tiṭṭhati=Gr. stato/s, Lat. status, Celt. fossad (firm)] standing, i. e. (see ṭhāna I) either upright (opp. nisinna, etc.), or immovable, or being, behaving in general. In the latter function often (with ger.) pleonastic for finite verb (cp. ṭhapita); - resting in, abiding in (-° or with loc.); of time: lasting, enduring; fig. steadfast, firm, controlled: amissīkatam ev'assa cittaṃ hoti, ṭhitaṃ ānejjappattaṃ A III.377=IV.404; tassa ṭhito va kāyo hoti thitaṃ cittaṃ (firm, unshaken) S V.74=Nd2 475 B2; - D I.135 (khema°); A I.152; Sn 250 (dhamme); It 116 sq. (ṭh. caranto nisinna sayāna); J I.167; 279; III.53. - with ger.: nahātvā ṭh. & nivāsetvā ṭh. (after bathing & dressing) J I.265; dārakaṃ gahetvā th. J VI.336. Cp. saṇ°. -atta self-controlled, composed, steadfast D I.57 (+gatatta yatatta; expl. at DA I.168 by suppatiṭṭhitacitto); S I.48; III.46; A II.5; IV.93, 428; Sn 370 (+parinibbuta), 359 (id. expl. at SnA 359 by lokadhammehi akampaneyya-citta); Pug 62; -kappin (adj.) (for kappa-*ṭhitin) standing or waiting a whole kappa Pug 13 (expl. at Pug A 187 by ṭhitakappo assa atthī ti; kappaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samattho ti attho); -citta (adj.) of controlled heart (=°atta) D II.157≈; -dhamma (adj.) everlasting, eternal (of mahāsamudda, the great ocean) Vin II.237= A IV.198. Ṭhitaka {Thitaka} (adj.)=ṭhita in meaning of standing, standing up, erect Vin II.165; D II.17=III.143; M II.65; J I.53, 62; VvA 64. Ṭhitatā (f.) the fact of standing or being founded on (-°) S II.25=A I.286 (dhamma°+dhamma-niyāmatā). {Thitata} Pāli Text Society 669 Pāli-English Dictionary Ṭhitatta {Thitatta} (nt.) standing, being placed; being appointed to, appointment J I.124. Ṭhiti {Thiti} (f.) [from tiṭṭhati Sk. sthiti, Gr. sta/sis, Lat. statio (cp. stationary), Ohg. stat, Ags. stede] state (as opposed to becoming), stability, steadfastness; duration, continuance, immobility; persistence, keeping up (of: c. gen.); condition of (-°) relation S II.11; III.31; IV.14, 104, 228 sq., A V.96; Vism 32 (kāyassa); in jhāna: S III.264, 269 sq., saddhammassa (prolongation of) S II. 225; A I.59; II.148; III.177 (always with asammosa & anantaradhāna), cp. M II.26 sq.; -dhammaṭṭhitiðāṇa (state or condition of) S II.124; Ps I.50 sq. - n' atthi dhuvaṃ ṭhiti: the duration is not for long M II.64 =Dh 147=Th 1, 769=VvA 77, cp. Th 2, 343 (=ThA 241); Sn 1114 (viððāṇa°) PvA 198 (position, constellation), 199 (jīvita° as remainder of life, cp. ṭhitakappin); Dhs 11≈(cittassa), 19≈(+āyu=subsistence). -bhāgiya connected with duration, enduring, lasting, permanent (only appl. to samādhi) D III.277; A III.427; Nett 77; cp. samādhissa ṭhitikusala "one who is accomplished in lasting concentration" A III.311, 427; IV.34. Ṭhiṭika {Thitika} (adj.) [Der. fr. ṭhiti] standing, lasting, enduring; existing, living on (-°), e. g. āhāra° dependent on food Kh III. (see āhāra); nt. adv. ṭhitikaṃ constantly VvA 75. Ṭhīyati {Thiyati} see patiṭṭhīyati. Pāli Text Society 670 Pāli-English Dictionary Ḍ Ḍaṃsa {Damsa} [see ḍasati] a yellow fly, gadfly (orig. "the bite") Nd2 268 (=pingala-makkhika, same at J III.263 & SnA 101); usually in combn with other biting or stinging sensations, as °siriṃsapa Sn 52, & freq. in cpd. ḍaṃsa-makasa-vāt'ātapa-siriṃsapa-samphassa M I.10= A II.117, 143=III.163; A III.388; V.15; Vin I.3; Nd2 s. v. (enumd under var. kinds of dukkhā); Vism 31 (here expld as ḍaṃsana-makkhikā or andha-makkhikā). Ḍaṭṭha {Dattha} [pp. of daṃśati or dasati to bite] bitten PvA 144. Ḍasati {Dasati} (& ḍaṃsati) [cp. Sk. da ati & daṃśati, Gr. da/knw, Ohg. zanga, Ags. tonge, E. tong] to bite (esp. of flies, snakes, scorpions, etc.), pres. ḍasati M I.519; pot. ḍaseyya M I.133; A III.101=IV.320 (where ḍaṃs°) & ḍaṃseyya A III.306; ppr. ḍasamāna J I.265 (gīvāya); fut. ḍaṃsayissāmi J VI.193 (v. l. ḍass°); aor. aḍaṃsi Vv 808 (=Sk. adānkṣīt), ḍaṃsi PvA 62 & ḍasi J I.502; DhA II.258; inf. ḍasituṃ J I.265; ger. ḍasitvā J I.222; II.102; III.52, 538; DhA I.358. - Pp. daṭṭha; cp. also dāṭhā & saṇḍāsa. Ḍahati {Dahati} (& dahati) [Sk. dahati, pp. dagdha, cp. dāha, nidāgha (summer heat); Gr. te/fra ashes, Lat. favilla (glowing) cinders, Goth. dags, Ger. tag. E. day=hot time] to burn (trs.) consume, torment M I.365; II.73; A V.110; J II.44 (aor. 3 sg. med. adaḍḍha=Sk. adagdha); Dh 31, 71, 140; Miln 45, 112 (cauterize). Pp. daḍḍha - Pass. ḍayhati S I.188 (kāmarāgena ḍayhāmi cittam me pariḍayhati); ib. (mahārāga: mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ) M II.73; S III.150 (mahāpaṭhavī ḍayhati vinassati na bhavati) esp. in ppr. ḍayhamāna consumed with or by, burning, glowing Dh 371; It 23 (°ena kāyena & cetasā Pv I.1110, 122; II.23) (of a corpse being cremated); PvA 63, 152 (vippaṭisārena: consumed by remorse). See also similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. Cp. uḍ°. Ḍāka {Daka} (m. nt.) [Sk. sāka (nt.) on ś>ḍ cp. Sk. sākinī> dākinī] green food, eatable herbs, vegetable Vin I.246 (°rasa), 248; Th 2, 1; Vv 206 (v. l. sāka); VvA 99 (=taṇḍuleyyakādisākavyaðjana). Ḍāha {Daha} [Sk. dāha, see ḍahati] burning, glow, heat D I.10 (disā° sky-glow=zodiacal light?); M I.244; PvA 62; Miln 325. Sometimes spelt dāha, e. g. A I.178 (aggi°); Sdhp 201 (id.); - dava° a jungle fire Vin II.138; J I.461. Ḍeti {Deti} [Sk. *ḍayate=dīyati; ḍayana flying. The Dhtp gives the root as ḍī or ḷī with def. of "ākāsa-gamana"] to fly; only in simile "seyyathā pakkhī sakuṇo yena yen'eva ḍeti . . ." D I.71=M I.180, 269=A II.209= Pug 58; J V.417. Cp. dayati & dīyati, also uḍḍeti. Pāli Text Society 671 Pāli-English Dictionary T —T— {T} as composition-consonant (see Müller pp. 62, 63, on euphonic cons.) especially with agge (after, from), in ajja-t-agge, tama-t-agge, dahara-t-agge A V.300; cp. deva ta-t-uttari for tad-uttari A III.287, 314, 316. Ta° {Ta°} [Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. to/n th/n to/; Lat. is-te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that] base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., & in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa). - 1. Cases: nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin I.83; Sn 1052; Dh 326; Miln 25 & taṃ (cp. yaṃ, kiṃ) Sn 1037, 1050; J III.26; acc. m. taṃ J II.158, f. taṃ J VI.368; gen. tassa, f. tassā (Sn 22, 110; J I.151); instr. tena, f. tāya (J III. 188); abl. tasmā (J I.167); tamhā Sn 291, 1138; (J III.26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Sn 390); loc. tasmiṃ (J I.278), tamhi (Dh 117); tahiṃ (adv.) (Pv I.57) & tahaṃ (adv.) (J I.384; VvA 36); pl. nom. m. te (J II.129), f. tā (J II.127), nt. tāni (Sn 669, 845); gen. tesaṃ, f. tāsaṃ (Sn 916); instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J II.128); loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Sn 670). - In composition (Sandhi) both tad- & taṃ- are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a) tad°: (a) in subst. function: tadagge henceforth D I.93 taduṭṭhāya DhA III.344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78=tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy 543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad-upa-ka, the adj.- positive of upa, of which the compar.-superlative is upama, meaning like this, i. e. of this or the same kind. Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at J II.160) agreeing with, agreeable, pleasant Miln 9; tadatthaṃ to such purpose SnA 565. - With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Sn 1114; tappoṇa (=tad-pra-ava-nata) see taccarita; tabbisaya (various) PvA 73; tabbiparīta (different) Vism 290; DhA III.275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism 450. - (b) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad-ahan this day, then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja-t-agge). Hence ta- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad-ah-uposathe on this day's fastday=to-day (or that day) being Sunday D I.47; Sn p. 139 (expld as tam-ah-uposathe, uposathadivase ti at SnA 502); tadahe on the same day PvA 46; tadahū (id.) J V.215 (=tasmiṃ chaṇadivase). tad-anga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimanga), in tadanga-nibbuta S III.43; tadanga-samatikkama Nd2 203; tadanga-vikkhambhana-samuccheda Vism 410; tadanga-pahāna DhsA 351; SnA 8; tadangena A IV.411. - (b) tan°: (a) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Sn 846 (=tapparāyana Nd2 206); A I.150. - (b) Derived from acc. use (like a b) as adj. is tankhaṇikā (fr. taṃ khaṇaṃ) Vin III.140 (=muhuttikā). - (g) a reduced form of taṃ is to be found as ta° in the same origin & application as ta-d- (under a b) in combn ta-y-idaṃ (for taṃidaṃ>taṃ-idaṃ>ta-idaṃ>ta-y-idaṃ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. tou_to & tau_ta, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Sn 1077; Pv I.33; PvA 2, 16 (=taṃ idaṃ), 76. The same ta° is to be seen in tāhaṃ Vv 8315 (=taṃ-ahaṃ), & not to be confused with tāhaṃ=te ahaṃ (see tvaṃ). - A similar combn is taṃyathā Miln 1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta-(y)-yathā, like ta-y-idaṃ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75. - A sporadic form for tad is tadaṃ Sn p. 147 (even that, just that; for tathaṃ?). - II. Application: 1. ta° refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. ou(=tos, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici, cet homme-ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense combd with api: te c'āpi (even these) Sn 1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. o(/de, E. Pāli Text Society 672 Pāli-English Dictionary thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taṃ kiṃ maññasi D I.60; yam etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi Ajita taṃ vadāmi te: Sn 1037; taṃ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Sn 1050; tesaṃ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Sn 1127; te tositā (and they, pleased . . .) ib. 1128. - 2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya° (preceding ta°): yaṃ ahaṃ jānāmi taṃ tvaṃ jānāsi "what I know (that) you know" D I.88; yo nerayikānaṃ sattānaṃ āhāro tena so yāpeti "he lives on that food which is (characteristic) of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives" PvA 27. - (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaṃ taṃ=that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i. e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā . . . te evam ahaṃsu . . . "all those people who were full of faith said" Vin II.195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha "catch him by whatever means (you like)," i. e. by all means J II.159; yaṃ taṃ kayirā "whatever he may do" Dh 42. - 3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.): . . . taṃ taṃ this & that, i. e. each one; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks PvA 38; yaṃ yaṃ manaso piyaṃ taṃ taṃ gahetvā whatever . . . (all) that PvA 77; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa taṃ taṃ adāsi "whatever anybody wished he gave to him" PvA 113. So with adv. of ta°: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaṃ tahaṃ id. J I.384; VvA 36, 187; tato tato Sn 390. - (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taṃ . . . taṃ is this so & is this so (too)=the same as, viz. taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaṃ j. a. s.) A V.193, etc. (see jīva). - 4. Adverbial use of some cases (locala, temporalb, & modalc): acc. taṃ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there D. II.126, 156; (b) taṃ enaṃ at once, presently (=tāvad-eva) Vin I.127 (cp. Ved. enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiṃ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: S II.17; M I.487; Sn 1110; Pv I.23 (=tasmā PvA 11 & 103); II.716; cp. taṃ kissa hetu Nd2 on jhāna. - gen. tassa (c) therefore A IV.333. - instr. tena (a) there (direction=there to), always in correl. with yena: where-there, or in whatever direction, here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e. g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaṃ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went=he went to the M. of J. D I.49; yena Gotamo ten'upasankama go where G. is D I.88; yena āvasathāgāraṃ ten'upasankami D II.85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here & there A II.33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) J I.151, 279; PvA 60; Miln 23; tena hi D II.2; J I.266; III.188; Miln 19. - abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Sn 1051, 1104; Nd2 279 (=taṃ kāraṇaṃ); PvA 11, 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv I.123; (b) then, hereafter PvA 39. - loc. tahiṃ (a) there (over there>beyond) Pv I.57; (c) =therefore PvA 25; tahaṃ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a). - See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc. Taka {Taka} a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin I.201. Takka1 {Takka} [Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. "turning & twisting") *treik, cp. Lat. tricæ, intricare (to "trick," puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat. torqueo (torture, turn)] doubt; a doubtful view (often= diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā°, micchā-diṭṭhi), hair-splitting reasoning, sophistry (=itihītihaṃ Nd2 151). Opp. to takka (=micchā-sankappo Vbh 86, 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-sankappo Nd2 318; cp. Dhs 7, 298), D I.16 (°pariyāhata); M I.68 (id.); Sn 209 (°ṃ pahāya na upeti sankhaṃ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (+vitakka, trsl. as "ratiocination" by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vbh 86, 237 (sammā°) 356; Vism 189. See also vitakka. -āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs V.22; -āvacara as neg. atakkāvacarā in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a° nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i. e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin I.4=D I.12=S I.136=M I.487. Gogerley trsl. "unattainable by reasoning," Andersen "being beyond the sphere of thought"; -āsaya room for doubt Sn 972; -gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or Pāli Text Society 673 Pāli-English Dictionary sophistry J I.97; -vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Sn 1084 (see Nd2 269); -hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) A II.193=Nd2 151. Takka2 {Takka} (nt.) [Should it not belong to the same root as takka1?] buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (paðca gorasā) at Vin I.244; made by churning dadhi Miln 173; J I.340; II.363; DhA II.68 (takkādi-ambila). Takkaṇa {Takkana} (nt.) thought, representation (of: -°) J I.68 (ussāvabindu°). Takkara1 {Takkara} (=tat-kara) a doer thereof D I.235, M I.68; Dh 19. Takkara2 {Takkara} a robber, a thief J IV.432. Takkaḷa {Takkala} (nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose J IV.46, 371 (biḷāli°, expl. at 373 by takkalakanda)=VI.578. Takkārī {Takkari} (f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Th 2, 297 (=dālika-laṭṭhi ThA 226). Takkika {Takkika} (adj.) [fr. takka1] doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud 73; J I.97; Miln 248. Takkin {Takkin} (adj.-n.) [fr. takka1] thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic D I.16≈(takkī vīmaṃsī); M I.520; DA I.106 (=takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi-gāhino etaṃ adhivacanaṃ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki-vāda). Takketi {Takketi} [Denom. of tarka] to think, reflect, reason, argue DA I.106; DhsA 142. - attānaṃ t. to have self-confidence, to trust oneself J I.273, 396, 468; III.233. Takkoṭaka {Takkotaka} [is reading correct?] a kind of insect or worm Vism 258. Reading at id. p. KhA 58 is kakkoṭaka. Takkola [Sk. kakkola & takkola] Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant J I.291; also as Npl. at Miln 359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps= Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59). {Takkola} Tagara {Tagara} (nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin I.203; It 68 (=Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dh 54, 55, 56 (candana+); J IV.286; VI.100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Miln 338; Dāvs V.50; DhA I.422 (tagara-mallikā two kinds of gandhā). Taggaruka {Taggaruka} =tad+garuka, see taccarita. Taggha {Taggha} [tad+gha, cp. in-gha & Lat. ec-ce ego-met, Gr. e)gw/-ge] affirmative particle ("ekaṃsena" DA I.236; ekaṃsa-vacana J V.66; ekaṃse nipāta J V.307): truly, surely, there now! Vin II.126, 297; D I.85; M I.207, 463; III.179; J V.65 (v. l. tagghā); Sn p. 87. Pāli Text Society 674 Pāli-English Dictionary Taca {Taca} (& taco nt.) [Vedic tvak (f.), gen. tvacaḥ] 1. bark. - 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick, outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. J I.146). - 1. bark: M I.198, 434, 488; A V.5. - 2. skin: often used together with nahāru & aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: A I.50=Sdhp. 46; tacamaṃsāvalepana (+aṭṭhī nahārusaṃyutta) Sn 194= J I.146 (where °vilepana); SnA 247; aṭṭhi-taca-mattāvasesasarīra "nothing but skin & bones" PvA 201. - Of the cast-off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaṃ tacaṃ jahāti Sn 1, same simile Pv I.121 (=nimmoka PvA 63). - kañcanasannibha-taca (adj.) of golden-coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Sn 551; Vv 302=323; Miln 75; VvA 9. - valita-tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd2 252≈; Kh III.; KhA 45; Sdhp 102. -gandha the scent of bark Dhs 625; pañcaka-kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold "body is skin," etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna-practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy'ānupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kh III.). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca-p-kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhitvā taṃ pabbājesi J I.116; DhA I.243; II.87, 140, 242. Cp. also Vism 353; DhA II.88; SnA 246, 247; -pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) PvA 172; rasa the taste of bark Dhs 629, -sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i. e.) tree S I.70=90= It 45; - (b) a (rope of) strong fibre J III.204 (=veṇudaṇḍaka). Taccarita {Taccarita} (adj.) in combn with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd2 under tad. The same combn with Nibbāna-ninna, N.-poṇa, N.-pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna). Taccha1 {Taccha} [Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. te/ktwn carpenter (cp. architect), te/xnh art] a carpenter, usually as °ka: otherwise only in cpd. °sūkara the carpenter-pig (=a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (IV.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin. Taccha2 {Taccha} (adj.) [Der. fr. tathā+ya=tath-ya "as it is," Sk. tathya] true, real, justified, usually in combn w. bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, D I.190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S V.229 (dhamma; text has tathā, v. l. tathaṃ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) D I.230. bhūta+taccha: A II.100=Pug 50; VvA 72. - yathā tacchaṃ according to truth Sn 1096. which is interpreted by Nd2 270: tacchaṃ vuccati amataṃ Nibbānaṃ, etc. - (nt.) taccha a truth Sn 327. - ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood D I.3 (abhūta+); VvA 72 (=musā). Tacchaka {Tacchaka} =taccha1. (a) a carpenter Dh 80 (cp. DhA II.147); Miln 413. magga° a roadbuilder J VI.348. - (b)=taccha-sūkara J IV.350. - (c) a class of Nāgas D II.258. - f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (=veṇī, bamboo-worker) J V.306. Tacchati {Tacchati} [fr. taccha1, cp. taccheti] to build, construct; maggaṃ t. to construct or repair a road J VI.348. Taccheti {Taccheti} [probably a denom. fr. taccha1=Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically), cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect =Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc., Gr. te/xnh craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma] to do wood-work, to square, frame, chip J I.201; Miln 372, 383. Pāli Text Society 675 Pāli-English Dictionary Tajja {Tajja} [tad+ya, cp. Sk. tadīya] "this like," belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combn with vāyāma (a suitable effort as "causa movens") A I.207; Miln 53. Also with reference to sense-impressions, etc. denoting the complemental sensation S IV.215; M I. 190, 191; Dhs 3-6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl. anucchavika). - PvA 203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā: by the doing of such evil, v. l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa). Note. The expln of Kern, Toev. II.87 (tajja=tad+ja "arising from this") is syntactically impossible. Tajjanā {Tajjana} (f.) [from tajjeti] threat, menace J II.169; Vv 509; VvA 212 (bhayasantajjana). Tajjaniya {Tajjaniya} [grd. of tajjeti] to be blamed or censured Vism 115 (a°); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta; Miln 365. As t. t. °kamma one of the sangha-kammas: Vin I.49, 53, 143 sq., 325; II.3 sq., 226, 230; A I.99. Tajjārī {Tajjari} a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu's and of which 36 form one rathareṇu VbhA 343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī). Tajjita {Tajjita} [pp. of tajjeti] threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by (-°) D I.141 (daṇḍa°, bhaya°); Dh 188 (bhaya°); Pug 56. Esp. in combn maraṇabhaya° moved by the fear of death J I.150, 223; PvA 216. Tajjeti {Tajjeti} [Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. ta/rbos fright, fear, tarbe/w; Lat. torvus wild, frightful] to frighten, threaten; curse, rail against J I.157, 158; PvA 55. - Pp. tajjita. - Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse PvA 23 (=paribhāsāpeti). see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus] declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank J I.232, 303; II.315 (udapāna°); IV.141; SnA 519, DhA I.73 (papāta°). See also talāka. Taṭataṭāyati {Tatatatayati} [Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭtaṭ (on ṭ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one's teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati] to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one's teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. °yanto or °yamāna): J I.347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); II.277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana "boiling with rage" like a "uddhane pakkhitta-loṇaṃ viya"); the latter trope also at DhA IV.176; DhA I.370 (aggimhi pakkhitta-loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); III.328 (vātāhata-tālapaṇṇaṃ viya); VvA 47, 121 (of a kodhābhibhūto; v. l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā. Taṭṭaka {Tattaka} [Etym. unknown] a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver J III.10 (suvaṇṇa°), 97, 121, 538; IV.281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaṃ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer). Taṭṭikā {Tattika} (f.) [cp. kaṭaka] a (straw) mat Vin IV.40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaṃ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); J I.141 (v. l. taddhika); Vism 97. Taṇḍula {Tandula} (*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice-grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. combd with tila (q. v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaṃ telaṃ taṇḍulaṃ khādaniyaṃ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin I.220, 238, 243, 249; talitaṇḍulādayo J III.53; PvA 105. - Vin I.244; A I.130; J I.255; III.55, 425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); VI.365 (mūla° coarse r., majjhima° Pāli Text Society 676 Pāli-English Dictionary medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Sn 295; Pug 32; DhA I.395 (sāli-taṇḍula husked rice); DA I.93. Cp. ut°. -ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice J II.436. -dona a rice-vat or rice-bowl DhA IV.15; -pāladvārā "doors (i. e. house) of the rice-guard" Npl. M II.185; -muṭṭhi a handful of rice PvA 131; -homa an oblation of rice D I.9. Taṇḍuleyyaka {Tanduleyyaka} [cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya] the plant Amaranthus polygonoides VvA 99 (enumd amongst various kinds of ḍāka). Taṇhā {Tanha} (f.) [Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.)=Av. tarśna thirst, Gr. tarsi/a dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg. durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. te/rsomai, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan, Ohg. derren.-Another form of t. is tasiṇā] lit. drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement, the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. loc.: kabaḷinkāre āhāre "thirst" for solid food S II.101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā=greed for Sn 339). Oppd to peace of mind (upekhā, santi). - A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv II.15 (=pipāsāya PvA 69). - B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth. Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phædo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D II. 34) we are told how Taṇhā arises-when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā. In the First Proclamation (S V.420 ff.; Vin I.10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged, got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental "thirst," arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna. The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs 1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saṃsāra, of being reborn & dying again & again (2Q) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained, taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2Q). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with "sabbupadhi-paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho" (see Nibbāna). - 1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma°, bhava°, vibhava°, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere, but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava. These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (S V.420; Vin I.10) and often afterwards D II.61, 308; III.216, 275; S III.26, 158; It 50; Ps I.26, 39; II.147; Vbh 101, 365; Nett 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma°, rūpa° & arūpa° at D III.216; Vbh 395; & yet another as rūpa°, arūpa° & nirodha° at D III.216. - The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations, viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: D II.58; Ps I.6 sq.; Nd2 271I; in threefold aspects (as kāma-taṇhā, bhava° & vibhava°) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism 567 sq.; also under the term cha-taṇha-kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) M I.51; III.280; Ps I.26; elsewhere called chadvārika-taṇhā "arising through the 6 doors" DhA III.286. - 18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & wellliving are enumd at Nd2 271III (under taṇhā-lepa). 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at A II.212; Nett 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd2 271II (under Jappā)=Dhs 1059=Vbh 361. - Taṇhā as "kusalā pi akusalā pi" (good & bad) occurs at Nett 87; cp. Tālapuṭa's good t. Th I.1091 f. - 2. Import of the term: (a) various Pāli Text Society 677 Pāli-English Dictionary characterizations of t.: mahā° Sn 114; kāma° SI.131; gedha° SI.15; bhava° D III.274 (+avijjā); grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd2 271III, 271VI. T. fetters the world & causes misery: "yāya ayaṃ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto" A II.211 sq.; taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaṃ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaṃ Dh 216; taṇhāya uḍḍito loko S I.40; yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ etth'esā taṇhā . . . Vbh 103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra's army (M-senā) Sn 436; M's daughter, S I.134. In comparisons: t.+jālinī visattikā S I.107; =bharādānaṃ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga-sahagatā) S III 26; V.402: gaṇḍa=kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy' etaṃ adhivacanaṃ S IV.83;=sota S IV.292 (and a khīṇāsavo=chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta-cārino t. vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dh 334. - (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saṃsāraQ kammaṃ khettaṃ viððāṇaṃ bījaṃ taṇhā sineho . . . evaṃ āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hoti A I.223; t. ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati dukkha-samudayo Vbh 107, similarly Nett 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) S III.26; Ps II.147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā-paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā-paccayā upādānaṃ Vin I.1, 5; D II.31, 33, 56, etc.; t. & upadhi: taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti S II.108; ye taṇhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiṃ vaḍḍhenti, etc. S II.109; taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati S I.39; taṇhā saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti It 8. See also t.-dutiya. - (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata-taṇha vigata-pipāsa vigata-pariḷāha D III.238; S III.8, 107 sq., 190; samūlaṃ taṇhaṃ abbuyha S I.16=63, 121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); III.26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta° Sn 83, 849, 1041 (+nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena S I.39 ("Nibbānan" iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaṃ chindati bandhanaṃ); taṇhaṃ mā kāsi mā lokaṃ punar āgami Sn 339; taṇhaṃ pariððāya . . . te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Sn 1082; ucchinna-bhava-taṇhā Sn 746; taṇhāya vūpasama S III.231; t.-nirodha S IV.390. - See also M I.51; Dh 154; It 9 (vita°+anādāna), 50 (°ṃ pahantvāna); Sn 495, 496, 916; & cp. °khaya. - 3. Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expld by one of the taṇhā-formulæ (cp. Nd2 271V & 271VII): (a) t. in groups of 5: (a) with kilesa saṃyoga vipāka duccarita; (b) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (g) diṭṭhi kil° kamma duccarita. - (b) quasi-synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha, jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa, vāna, visattikā, sibbanī. - In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc. -ādhipateyya mastery over t. S III.103; -ādhipanna seized by t. S. I.29; Sn 1123; -ādāsa the mirror of t. A II.54; ābhinivesa full of t. PvA 267; -āluka greedy J II.78; -uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, itibhavābhava) A II.10=It 109; D III.228; Vbh 375; kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B I) S II.3; D III.244. 280; Ps I.26; Vbh 380; -kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): °rata Dh 187 (expld at DhA III.241: arahatte c'eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); - Vv 735 (expld by Nibbāna VvA 296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin I.5; S III.133; It 88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin I.8= M I.171=Dh 353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna A II.34, expld at Vism 293; bhikkhu arahaṃ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammādhimutto, paviveka°, avyāpajjha°, upādānakkhaya°, taṇhakkhaya°, asammoha° Vin I.183; cp. also Sn 70, 211, 1070, 1137; -gata obsessed with excitement, i. e. a victim of t. Sn 776; -gaddula the leash of t. Nd2 271II≈; -cchida breaking the cravings Sn 1021, 1101; -jāla the snare of t. M I.271; Th 1, 306; Nd2 271II; -dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion A II.10= It 9=109=Sn 740, 741=Nd2 305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 278; -nadī the river of t. Nd2 271II; cp. nadiyā soto ti: taṇhāy'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ It 114; -nighātana the destruction of t. Sn 1085; -pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Nett 53, 69, 88, 160; -paccaya caused by t. Sn p. 144; Vism 568; -mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Ps I.26, 130; Vbh 390; -lepa cleaving to t. Nd2 271III; (+diṭṭhi-lepa); vasika being in the power of t. J IV.3; -vicarita a thought of t. A II.212; -sankhaya (complete) destruction of t.; °sutta M I.251 (cūḷa°), 256 (mahā°): °vimutti salvation through cessation of t. Pāli Text Society 678 Pāli-English Dictionary M I.256, 270, & °vimutta (adj.) S IV.391; -samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271II; -sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaṃ kāyo) A II.145 (cp. Sn p. 144; yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ taṇhāpaccayā); -saṃyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t., in phrase t.saṃyojanena saṃyuttā sattā dīgharattaṃ sandhāvanti saṃsaranti It 8, & t.-sa ṃyojanānaṃ sattānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarataṃ S II.178=III.149= PvA 166; A I.223; -salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. S I.192 (°assa hantāraṃ vande ādiccabandhunaṃ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd2 503 (°assa abbuḷhana; cp. above). Taṇhīyati {Tanhiyati} [=taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst] to have thirst for S II.13 (for v. l. SS. tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism 544 (+upādiyati ghaṭ - yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita. Tata {Tata} [pp. of tanoti] stretched, extended, spread out S I. 357 (jāla); J IV.484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v. l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at J I.183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over). Tatiya {Tatiya} [Sk. tṛtīya, Av. Qritya, Gr. tri/tos, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third] Num. ord. the third. - Sn 97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; J II.353; Dh 309; PvA 69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaṃ {Tatiyam} (nt. adv.) for the 3rd time D II.155; Sn 88, 95, 450; tatiyavāraṃ id. DhA I.183; VvA 47 (=at last); yāva tatiyaṃ id. Vin II.188; J I.279; DhA II.75; PvA 272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaṃ id. D I.95. Tato {Tato} [abl. of pron. base ta° (see ta° II.4)] 1. from this, in this S III.96 (tatoja); J III.281 (tato paraṃ beyond this, after this); Nd2 664 (id.); DA I.212 (tatonidāna). - 2. thence J I.278; Miln 47. - 3. thereupon, further, afterwards J I.58; Dh 42; Miln 48; PvA 21, etc. Tatta1 {Tatta} [pp. of tapati] heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) A II.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dh 308 (ayoguḷa); J II.352 (id.); IV.306 (tattatapo "of red-hot heat," i. e. in severe self-torture); Miln 26, 45 (adv. red-hot); PvA 221 (tatta-lohasecanaṃ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya). Tatta2 {Tatta} (nt.) [tad+tva] truth; abl. tattato according to truth; accurately J II.125 (ðatvā); III.276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly). Tattaka1 {Tattaka} [tatta pp. of tappati2+ka] pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Miln 238 (bhojana). Tattaka2 {Tattaka} (adj.) (=tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaṃ kālaṃ so long, just that time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so long) DhA I.103 (v. l. ettakaṃ); II.16 (=ettaka). Tattha {Tattha} [Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra] A. 1. of place: (a) place where= there, in that place Sn 1071, 1085; Dh 58; J I.278; Pv I.1015; often with eva: tatth'eva right there, on the (very same) spot S I.116; J II.154; PvA 27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage: in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs 584; DhA I.21; PvA 7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place J II.159 (gantvā); VI.368; PvA 16 Pāli Text Society 679 Pāli-English Dictionary (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i. e. wherever you like, of a Yakkha). - 2. as (loc.) case of pron. base ta°= in this, for or about that, etc. Sn 1115 (etam abhiððāya tato tattha vipassati: SnA tatra); tattha yo manku hoti Dh 249 (=tasmiṃ dāne m. DhA III.359); tattha kā paridevanā Pv I.123 ("why sorrow for this?"). - 3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (=ettha, cp. tattaka2) in phrase tattha-parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarāparinibbāyin (A II.238 e. g.≈I.134; see under parinibbāyin) D I.156; A I.232; II.5; IV.12; S V.357; M II.52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next). - B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever . . . there It 115; Nett 96 (°gāmini-paṭipadā); VvA 297; PvA 1, 2, 33, 77, etc. - See tatra. Tatra {Tatra} (Sk. tatra]=tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dh 375; PvA 54. tatrāpi D I.81= It 22≈(tatrāpāsiṃ). tatra pi D I.1 (=DA I.42). tatra kho Vin I.10, 34; A V.5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). - In explanations: PvA 19 (tatrāyaṃ vitthārakathā "here follows the story in detail"). - 2. in this: Sn 595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dh 88 (tatr'abhirati: enjoyment in this). - 3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3) is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (=tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all-round, complete (cp. yaṃ taṃ under ta° II.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism 466 (cp. tatra-majjhatt'upekkhā 160); DhsA 132, 133 (majjh°+tatra majjh°); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaððū (=tatra upāyaððū) having allround knowledge of the means and ways Sn 321 (correct reading at SnA 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaṃsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin IV.211 (or may it be taken as "suitable, corresponding, proportionate"? cp. tadūpiya). - B. tatra tatra, in t.-t.-abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin I.10; Ps II.147; Nett 72; Vism 506. Tatha {Tatha} (adj.) [an adjectivized tathā out of combn tathā ti "so it is," cp. taccha] (being) in truth, truthful; true, real D I.190 (+bhūta taccha); M III.70; Th 1, 347; Sn 1115 (=Nd2 275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt.) tathaṃ=saccaṃ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths S V.430, 435; Ps II.104 sq. (+avitathāni anaððathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. abl. tathato exactly v. l. B for tattato at J II.125 (see tatta2). - yathā tathaṃ (cp. yathā tacchaṃ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Sn 699, 732, 1127. - CpQ vitatha. -parakkama reaching out to the truth J V.395 (=saccanikkama); -vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Miln 401. Tathatā (f.) [abstr. fr. tathā>tatha] state of being such, such-likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism 518. {Tathata} Tathatta {Tathatta} (nt.) [*tathātvaṃ] "the state of being so," the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i. e. attain) Nibbāna D I.175, similarly S II.199; S II.209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Miln 255; Vism 214. - (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ) id. S IV.294=M I. 301; S V.90, 213 sq. - (c) tathattāya cittaṃ upasaṃharati id. M I.468. - abl. tathattā in truth, really Sn 520 sq. (cp. M Vastu III.397). Tathā {Tatha} (adv.) [Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaṃ] so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aððathā), in this way, likewise Sn 1052 (v. l. yathā); J I.137, etc. - Often with eva: tath'eva just so, still the same, not different D III.135 (taṃ tath'eva hoti no aððathā); J I.263, 278; Pv I.83; PvA 55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā-yathā so -that Dh 282; PvA 23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that . . ., cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā-tathā asso also Sn 504; J I.223; Pv I.123 (yath'āgato Pāli Text Society 680 Pāli-English Dictionary tathā gato as he has come so he has gone). - In cpds. tath' before vowels. -ûpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Sn 229 (=tathāvidha KhA 185), 233; It 33, 90; -kārin acting so (corresp. w. yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin) Sn 357; It 122; -gata see sep.; -bhāva "the being so," such a condition J I.279; -rūpa such a, like this or that, esp. so great, such Vin I.16; Sn p. 107; It 107; DA I.104; PvA 5, 56. nt. adv. thus PvA 14. Cp. evarūpa; -vādin speaking so (cp. °kārin) Sn 430; It 122 (of the Tathāgata); -vidha such like, so (=tathārūpa) Sn 772, 818, 1073, 1113; Nd2 277 (=tādisa taṃsaṇṭhita tappakāra). Tathāgata {Tathagata} [Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DA I.59-67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non-Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre-Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any preBuddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898) suggests "he who has won through to the truth." Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaṃgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī-karoti as well as upadhiṃ karoti. - D I.12, 27, 46, 63; II.68, 103, 108, 115, 140, 142; III.14, 24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq., 273 sq.; S I.110 sq.; II.222 sq.; III.215; IV.127, 380 sq.; A I.286; II.17, 25, 120; III.35, etc.; Sn 236, 347, 467, 557, 1114; It 121 sq.; KhA 196; Ps I.121 sq.; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1234; Vbh 325 sq., 340, etc., etc. -balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enumd as a set of ten: in detail at A V.33 sq. =Ps II.174; M I.69; S II.27; Nd2 466. Other sets of five at A III.9; of six A III.417 sq. (see bala); -sāvaka a disciple of the T. D II.142; A I.90; II.4; III.326 sq.; It 88; Sn p. 15. Tathiya {Tathiya} (adj.) [Sk. tathya =taccha] true, Sn 882, 883. Tadanurūpa {Tadanurupa} (adj.) [cp. ta° I a] befitting, suitable, going well with J VI.366; DhA IV.15. Tadā {Tada} (adv.) [Vedic; cp. kadā] then, as that time (either past or future) D II.157; J II.113, 158; Pv I.105; PvA 42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā-mātāpitaro etarahi m° ahesuṃ "the then mother & father" J I.215 (cp. Lat. quondam); tadā-sotāpanna-upāsaka J II.113. Tadūpika & Tadūpiya {Tadupika} {Tadupiya} see ta° I. a. Tanaya & Tanuya {Tanaya} {Tanuya} [at S I.7, v. l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja AvŚ II.200] offspring, son Mhvs VII.28. pl. tanuyā [=Sk. tanayau] son & daughter S I.7. Tanu {Tanu} [Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body *ten (see tanoti)=Gr. taQu-, Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E. thin] 1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 162 (vara° graceful=uttamarūpa-dhara VvA 79; perhaps to 2); PvA 46 (of hair: fine+mudhu). - 2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body=waist) Vv 537 (kañcana°); Pv I.121; Vism 79 (uju+). Cp. tanutara. -karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin II.316 (Bdhgh on CV. V.9, 2); bhāva decrease Pug 17; -bhūta decreased, diminished Pug 17; esp. in phrase °soka with diminished grief, having one's grief allayed DhA III.176; PvA 38. Tanuka {Tanuka} (adj.)=tanu; little, small Dh 174 (=DhA 175); Sn 994 (soka). Pāli Text Society 681 Pāli-English Dictionary Tanutara {Tanutara} the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin IV.345 (sundaro tanutaro "her waist is beautiful"). Tanutta (nt.) [n.-abstr. of tanu] diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance A I.160 (manussānaṃ khayo hoti tanuttaṃ paððāyati); II.144 (rāga°, dosa°, moha°); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin) "rāga-d.-mohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti" D I.156; S V.357 sq., 376, 406; A II.238; Pug 16. {Tanutta} Tanoti {Tanoti} [*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. tei/nw, to/nos, te/tanos; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. extend); Goth. panjan; Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra] to stretch, extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. - Pgdp 17. Tanta {Tanta} (nt.) [Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string] a thread, a string, a loom J I.356 (°vitata-ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); DhA I.424. At J IV.484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out). -ākula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta "entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight" S II.92; IV.158; A II.211; Dpvs XII.32. See guḷā; -āvuta weaving, weft, web S V.45; A I.286; -bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin II.135; -rajjuka "stringing & roping," hanging, execution J IV.87; -vāya a weaver J I.356; Miln 331; Vism 259; DhA I.424. Tantaka {Tantaka} (nt.) "weaving," a weaving-loom Vin II.135. Tanti {Tanti} (f.) [Vedic tantrī, see tanta] 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin I.182; Th 2, 390 (cp. ThA 257); J IV.389; DhA I.163; PvA 151. - 2. line, lineage (+paveṇi custom, tradition) J VI.380; DhA I.284. -dhara bearer of tradition Vism 99 (+vaṃsānurakkhake & paveṇipolake). - 3. a sacred text; a passage in the Scriptures Vism 351 (bahu-peyyāla°); avimutta-tanti-magga DA I.2; MA I.2. -ssara string music Vin I.182; J III.178. Tantu {Tantu} [Vedic tantu, cp. tanta] a string, cord, wire (of a lute) J V.196. Tandita {Tandita} (adj.) [pp. of tandeti=Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From *ten, see tanoti] weary, lazy, giving way Miln 238 (°kata). Usually a° active, keen, industrious, sedulous Dh 305, 366, 375; Vv 3322; Miln 390; VvA 142. Cp. next. Tandī {Tandi} (f.) [Sk. tanita] weariness, laziness, sloth S V.64; M I.464; A I.3; Sn 926, 942; J V.397 (+ālasya); Vbh 352 (id.). Tapa & Tapo {Tapa} {Tapo} [from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat] 1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement, ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaṃ tapaṃ garahati tapassiṃ lūkhajīviṃ upavadati D I.161=S IV.330; anatthasañhitaṃ ðatvā yaṃ kiñci aparaṃ tapaṃ S I.103; J IV.306 (tattatapa: see tatta). - 2. mental devotion, self-control, abstinence, practice of morality (often= brahmacariyā & saṃvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. D III.42 sq., 232 (attan & paran°), 239; S I.38, 43; IV.118, 180; M II.155, 199; D II.49= Dh 184 (paramaṃ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Sn 77= S I.172 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi); Sn 267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv I.32 (instr. tapasā= brahmacariyena PvA 15); J I.293; Nett 121 (+indriyasaṃvara); KhA 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): VvA 114 (instr. tapasā); PvA 98. -kamma ascetic practice S I.103; -jigucchā disgust for Pāli Text Society 682 Pāli-English Dictionary asceticism D I.174; III.40, 42 sq., 48 sq.; A II.200; -pakkama=°kamma D I.165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama=tapa+upakkama, or tapo-kamma?). -vana the ascetic's forest Vism 58, 79, 342. Tapati {Tapati} [Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus=tepid] 1. to shine, to be bright, Dh 387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc.=virocati DhA IV.143); Sn 348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuṃ), 687 (suriyaṃ tapantaṃ). - ger. tapanīya: see sep. - pp. tatta1. Tapana {Tapana} (adj.-n.) [to tapati & tapa] burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity. - 1. (as nt.) PvA 98 (kāya °sankhāto tapo). - 2. (as f.) tapanī J V.201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin; Com. visīvana-aggiṭṭha-sankhātā-tapanī). Tapanīya1 {Tapaniya} [grd. of tapati] burning: fig. inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying A I.49=It 24; A IV.97 (Com. tāpajanaka); V.276; J IV.177; Dhs I305. Tapanīya2 {Tapaniya} (nt.) also tapaneyya (J V.372) & tapañña (J VI.218) [orig. grd. of tapati] shining; (n.) the shining, bright metal, i. e. gold (=rattasuvaṇṇa J V.372; ThA 252) Th 2, 374; Vv 8416; VvA 12, 37, 340. Tapassin {Tapassin} (adj.-n.) [tapas+vin; see tapati & tapa] one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non-Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self-control & attains mastery over his senses Vin I.234=A IV.184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); D III.40, 42 sq., 49; S I.29; IV.330, 337 sq.; M I.77; Sn 284 (isayo pubbakā āsuṃ saððatattā tapassino); Vv 2210; Pv I.32 (°rūpa, under the appearance of a "holy" man: samaṇa-patirūpaka PvA 15); II.614 (=saṃvāraka PvA 98; tapo etesaṃ atthī ti ibid.). Tappaṇa {Tappana} (nt.) [Sk. tarpaṇa] satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta° some sort of eye-wash D I.12 (in combn w. kaṇṇa-tela & natthu-kamma). Tappati1 {Tappati} [Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati] to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dh 17, 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho=paccati DhA III.64). Tappati2 {Tappati} [Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp=Gr. te/rpw] (instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied J I.185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); II.443; V.485=Miln 381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 8413. - grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability J III.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut° hard to be satisfied A I.87; Pug 26. - pp. titta. - Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed It 67 (annapānena); Pv II.48 (id.) Miln 227; - pp. tappita. Tappara {Tappara} (adj.) [Sk. tatpara] quite given to or intent upon (-°), diligent, devoted ThA 148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana° & buddhopaṭṭhāna°). Tappetar {Tappetar} [n. ag. to tappeti] one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combn titto ca tappetā ca: self-satisfied & satisfying others A I.87; Pug 27 (of a Sammāsambuddha). Tab°{Tab°} in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc.=taṃ°, see under ta° I. a. Pāli Text Society 683 Pāli-English Dictionary Tama {Tama} (nt.) & tamo [Sk. tamas, tam & tim, cp. tamisra= Lat. tenebræ; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira; Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim] darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness=ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Sn 248 (pecca tamaṃ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 763 (nivutānaṃ t. hoti andhakāro apassataṃ), 956 (sabbaṃ tamaṃ vinodetvā); Vbh 367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future). adj.: puggalo tamo tama-parāyaṇo D III.233; A II.85= Pug 51; J II.17. - tamā tamaṃ out of one "duggati" into another Sn 278 (vinipātaṃ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaṃ t. t. . . . dukkaṃ nigacchati), cp. M Vastu II.225, also tamāto tamaṃ ibid. I.27; II.215. - tamat. -agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S V. 154, 163. -andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v. l. for samandha° at J III.60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); -nivuta enveloped in d. Sn 348; -nuda (tama° & tamo°), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Sn 1133, 1136; It 32, 108; Nd2 281; Vv 352 (=VvA 161); Miln 1, 21, etc.; -parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or "duggati" for his end or destiny S I.93; A II.85=Pug 51. Tamāla {Tamala} [Sk. tamāla] N. of a tree (Xanthochymus pictorius) Pv III.105 (+uppala). Tamba {Tamba} (nt.) [Sk. tāmra, orig. adj.=dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taṃsra id., to tama] copper ("the dark metal"); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e. g. lākhātamba (adj.) Th 2, 440 (colour of an ox); °akkhin Vv 323 (timira°) Sdhp 286; °nakhin J VI.290; °nettā (f.) ibid.; °bhājana DhA I.395; °mattika DhA IV.106; °vammika DhA III.208; °loha PvA 95 (=loha). Tambūla {Tambula} (nt.) [Sk. tambūla] betel or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal) J I.266, 291; II.320; Vism 314; DhA III.219. -°pasibbaka betel-bag J VI.367. Taya {Taya} (nt.) [Sk. trayaṃ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāvatiṃsa] a triad, in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana; e. g. PvA 1, 49, 141. - piṭakattaya the triad of the Piṭakas SnA 328. Tayo {Tayo} [f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. trei_s, tria; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī; E. three, etc.] num. card. three. nom.-acc. m. tayo (Sn 311), & tayas (tayas su dhammā Sn 231, see KhA 188) f. tisso (D I.143; A V.210; It 99) nt. tīṇi (A I.138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kh III. (cp. KhA 79 & tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Sn 1019); gen. m. nt. tiṇṇaṃ (J III.52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaṃ; instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dh 224, vijjāhi It 101); loc. tīsu (janesu J I.307; vidhāsu Sn 842). - In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q. v.; tisata (300) Sn 566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv II.951 (janā °ā); in numerical derivations: tiṃsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṃ (thrice); tidhā (threefold). - In nominal cpds.: see ti° te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (SnA 489; DhsA 333; VvA 72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (S I.192 Sn pp. 102, 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23) VvA 5; tettiṃsa (33) J I.273; DhA I.267; tesaṭṭhi (63) PvA 111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). - (b) in nominal cpds.: see te°. Tara {Tara} [see tarati] (n.) crossing, "transit," passing over Sn 1119 (maccu°). - (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross S IV.157; Sn 174, 273 (oghaṃ t. duttaraṃ); Th 2, 10; It 57. Also as su-duttara S I. 35; V.24. -esin wanting to pass over J III.230 Pāli Text Society 684 Pāli-English Dictionary Taranga {Taranga} [tara+ga] a wave Vism 157. Taraccha {Taraccha} [Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa] hyena Vin III.58; A III.101; Miln 149, 267; Dh A 331; Mhbv 154. - f. taracchi J V.71, 406; VI.562. Taraṇa {Tarana} (nt.) [see tarati] going across, passing over, traversing Vin IV.65 (tiriyaṃ°); Ps I.15; II.99, 119. Tarati1 {Tarati} [Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. te/rma, te/rqron; also Lat. trans=Goth. pairh=Ags. purh=E. through] (lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse; (fig.) to get beyond, i. e. to surmount, overcome, esp. oghaṃ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc.) S I.53, 208, 214; V.168, 186; Sn 173, 273, 771, 1069; sangaṃ Sn 791; visattikaṃ Sn 333, 857; ubhayaṃ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv IV.131 (=atikkameti PvA 278); Nd2 28Q - ppr. taranto Vin I.191 (Aciravati); grd. taritabba Vin IV.65 (nadī); aor. atari J III.189 (samuddaṃ) & atāri Sn 355, 1047 (jāti-maraṇaṃ), pl. atāruṃ Sn 1045. - See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate, tiro, tiriyaṃ, tīra, tīreti. Tarati2 {Tarati} [tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati1; cp. Ohg. dweran=E. twirl; Gr. toru/nh=Lat. trua=Ger. quirl twirling-stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören; E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua] to be in a hurry, to make haste Th 1, 291; ppr. taramāna in °rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Sn 417; Pv II.62; PvA 181 (=turita) & ataramāna Vin I.248; grd. taraṇīya Th 1, 293. - See also tura, turita, turiya. Tarahi {Tarahi} (adv.) [Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi] then, at that time Vin II.189. Tari {Tari} (f.) [from tarati] a boat Dāvs IV.53. Taritatta {Taritatta} (nt.) [abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati1] the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through VvA 284. Taru {Taru} [Perhaps dialect. for dāru] tree, PvA 154 (°gaṇā), 251. Taruṇa {Taruna} (adj.) [Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. te/rus, te/rhQ; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus] 1. tender, of tender age, young; new, newly (°-) fresh. Esp. appld to a young calf: M I.459 (in simile); °vaccha, °vacchaka, °vacchī: Vin I.193; J I.191; DhA II.35; VvA 200. - Vin I.243 (fresh milk); D I.114 (Gotamo t. c'eva t.-paribbājako ca "a young man and only lately become a wanderer"); PvA 3, 46 (°janā), 62 (°putta); Bdhd 93, 121. - 2. (m. & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin I.189 (tāla°); M I.432; Vism 361 (taruṇa-tāla). Tala {Tala} (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. thli/Q (dice-board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (=table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (=deal), Ohg. dili=Ger. diele] (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base J I.60, 62 (pāsāda° flat roof); III.60 (id.); paṭhavī° (level ground) J II.111, cp. bhūmi° PvA 176; ādāsa° surface of a mirror Vism 450, 456, 489; salila° (surface of pond) PvA 157; VvA 160; heṭṭhima° (the lowest level) J I.202; PvA 281; - J I.233 (base); 266 (khagga° the flat of the sword); II.102 (bheri°). - (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot J II.223; Vism 250; & cpds. - See also taṭa, tāla, tālu. Pāli Text Society 685 Pāli-English Dictionary -ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin IV.260, 261; -sattika in °ṃ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin IV.147; DhA III.50; cp. Vin. Texts I.51. Talika {Talika} (adj.) [from tala] having a sole, in eka-°upāhanā a sandal with one sole J II.277; III.80, 81 (v. l. BB. paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. Taluṇa {Taluna} =taruṇa DhsA 333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573). Taḷāka {Talaka} (nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga] a pond, pool, reservoir Vin II.256; J I.4, 239; PvA 202; DA I.273; Miln 1, 66=81, 246, 296, 359. Tasa {Tasa} (adj.) [from tasati2] 1. trembling, frightened J I.336=344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of: - 2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr. tre/w to flee & to tremble), always in combn tasa-thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu I.207 jangama-sthāvara; II.10 calaṃ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (=Arahant KhA 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati1 as well as by tasati2 (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at KhA 245: tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaṃ sabhayānað c'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; also at Nd2 479: tasa ti yesaṃ tasitā (tasiṇā?) taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaṃ āpajjanti. - S I.141; IV.117, 351; V.393; Sn 146, 629; Dh 405, Th 1, 876; J V.221; Nd2 479; DhA IV.175. Tasati1 {Tasati} [Sk. tṛṣyati=Gr. te/rsomoi to dry up, Lat. torreo (=E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan, Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati] to be thirsty, fig. to crave for S II.13; Miln 254. - pp. tasita1. Cp. pari°. Tasati2 {Tasati} [Vedic trasati=Gr. tre/w, Lat. terreo (=terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (=tremble) and trepidus] to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Sn 394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke); Nd2 479 (=santāsaṃ āpajjati); KhA 245 (may be taker as tasati1, see tasa). - pp. tasita2, cp. also tasa & uttasati. Tasara {Tasara} (nt.) [Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.] a shuttle Sn 215, 464, 497; DhA I.424; III.172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160. Tasiṇā {Tasina} (f.) [Diæretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā > juṇhā, kasiṇa > kṛtsṇa, etc.] thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā) S V.54, 58; Nd2 479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dh 342, 343. Tasita1 {Tasita} [pp. of tasati1] dried up, parched, thirsty S II.110, 118; Sn 980, 1014 (not with Fausböll=tasita2); J IV.20; Pv II.936 (chāta+), 103 (=pipāsita PvA 143); III.65 (=pipāsita PvA 127, 2Q2); Miln 318 (kilanta+). Tasita2 {Tasita} [pp. of tasati2] frightened, full of fear J I.26 (bhīta+). 342, IV.141 (id.): Nd2 479 (or=tasiṇā?). - atasita fearless S III.57. Tassa—pāpiyyasikā {Tassapapiyyasika} (f.) (viz. kiriyā) N. of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin I.325; in detail expl. M II.249; + tiṇavatthāraka D Pāli Text Society 686 Pāli-English Dictionary III.254; A I.99. °kammaṃ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin II.85, 86; °kata one against whom the latter is carried out A IV.347. Tāṇa {Tana} (nt.) [from Vedic root trā, variation of *ter in tarati. Orig. bringing or seeing through] shelter, protection, refuge, esp. as tt. of shelter & peace offered by the Dhamma. Mostly in combn with leṇa & saraṇa (also dīpa & abhaya), in var. contexts, esp. with ref. to Nibbāna (see Nd2 s. v.): D I.95 (°ṃ, etc. gavesin seeking refuge); A I.155; S IV.315 (maṃtāṇa, etc. adj. protected by me, in my shelter). - S I.2, 54, 55, 107 (°ṃ karoti); IV.372 (°gāmī maggo); A IV.184; Sn 668 (°ṃ upeti); Dh 288; J I.412 (=protector, expld by tāyitā parittāyitā patiṭṭhā); Sdhp 224, 289. Cp. tātar & tāyati. Tāṇatā {Tanata} (f.) [abstr. of tāṇa] protection, sheltering Dh 288. Tāta {Tata} [Vedic tāta, Gr. ta/ta & te/tta, Lat. tata, Ger. tate, E. dad(dy); onomat.] father; usually in voc. sg. tāta (and pl. tātā) used as term of affectionate, friendly or respectful address to one or more persons, both younger & older than the speaker, superior or inferior. As father (perhaps=tātā, see next) at Th 2, 423, 424 (+ammā). tāta (sg.) in addr. one: J III.54; IV.281 (amma tāta mammy & daddy) DhA II.48 (=father); III.196 (id.); PvA 41 (=father), 73 (a son), 74 (a minister); J I.179 (id.); Miln 15, 16, 17 (a bhikkhu or thera), in addr. several Vin I.249; J II.133; PvA 50. tātā (pl.) J I.166; 263; IV.138. Tātar {Tatar} [from Vedic trā, n. ag. to trāyati to protect] protector, saviour, helper DA I.229. For meaning "father" see tāta & cp. pitā=tāyitā at J I.412. Tādin (adj. n.) (nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi°) [Vedic tādṛś from tad-dṛś of such appearance] such, such like, of such (good) qualities, "ecce homo"; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as "such" in 5 ways: see Nd1 114 sq.; SnA 202 & cp. Miln 382. tādī: Sn 712, 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino, see SnA 201 sq.); tādi Sn 488, 509, 519 sq.; Dh 95; gen. tādino Dh 95, 96; with ref. to the Buddha D II. 157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ AvŚ II.199); Vv 186 (expln VvA 95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd1 114 sq.), of Arahant A II.34; Sn 154 (or tādī no); instr. tādinā Sn 697; Miln 382; acc. tādiṃ Sn 86, 219, 957; :loc. pl. tādisu Pv II.971 (=iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu PvA 140, cp. VvA 95). - See tādisa1. -bhāva "such-ness," high(est) qualification Vism 5, 214. lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being) J III.98 (°yoga, cp. nakkhatta-yoga); SnA 200 (°patta); VvA 95 (°sampatti). {Tadin} Tādina {Tadina} (adj.) [enlarged form of tādin)=tādin, only in loc. tādine Vv 212 (=tādimhi VvA 106). Tādisa1 {Tadisa} (adj.) [Vedic tādṛśa from tad-dṛsa=tad-rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin] such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition J I.151; III.280; Sn 112, 317, 459; Nd2 277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); It 68; Pv II.94; PvA 69, 72; Miln 382. Also correlative tādisa-tādisa the one-the other VvA 288. - f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv I.56 (vaṇijjā). Tādisa2 {Tadisa} (adj.) [tvaṃ+disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa] like you J I.167; V.107. Tādisaka {Tadisaka} (adj.)=tādisa1, of such character Sn 278; It 68. Pāli Text Society 687 Pāli-English Dictionary Tāpana {Tapana} (nt.) [from tāpeti] burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, selfmortification VvA 20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaṃ). Cp. ā°; upa°; pari°. Tāpasa {Tapasa} [from tapa & tapas] one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enumd at DA I.270 & SnA 295. - J II.101, 102; V.201; PvA 153; °pabbajjā the life of an a. J III.119; DhA IV.29; DA I.270. - f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mhvs VII.11, 12. Tāpeti {Tapeti} [Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati] to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Sn 451 (attānaṃ); J V. 267 (janapadaṃ); VvA 114 (kilesaṃ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari°. Tāma {Tama} [Sk. tāma] desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasangha-suppahīna Th 1, 310, an epithet of frogs, which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. II.88) is to be read as tāma-tamatasuppahita; "horribly greedy" (Kern, gruwelijk vraatzuchtig). Tāyati {Tayati} [Sk. trāyate & trāte, connected with *ter in tarati, orig. to see through, to save, cp. tāṇa, etc.] to shelter, protect, preserve, guard; bring up, nourish S IV.246 (rūpa-balaṃ, bhoga°, ðāti°, putta°); J IV.387; Sn 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ ðātī vā pana ðātake); PvA 7 (khettaṃ tāyati bījaṃ). Tāyitar {Tayitar} [n. ag. from tāyati] one who protects, shelters or guards J I.412 (in expl. of tāṇa, q. v.). Tārā {Tara} (f.) [Sk. tārā=Gr. a)sth/r, a)/ston (=Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. , Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources] a star, a planet Sn 687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. "the bull" of the stars, i. e. the Moon). -gaṇa (tāra°) the host of stars Pv II.967 (cando va t.-gaṇe atirocati). -maṇivitāna "star-jewel-awning"; canopy of jewelled stars Vism 76. Tārakā {Taraka} (f.) [Sk. tārakā] 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning-star (Venus) Vv 92=Pv II.110; - J I.108; tāraka-rūpa the light (or sparkling) of the stars D III.85, 90; S III.156=It 19; S V.44; VvA 79; Dhs 617. - 2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle; akkhi° the pupil of the eye M I.80; udaka° sparkling of the water ibid. Tāreti1 {Tareti} [Caus. of tarati1] to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Sn 319 (pare tārayetuṃ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aððe); It 123 (tiṇṇo tarayataṃ varo: "one who is through is the best of those who can help through"); J I.28 (V.203). aor. atārayi Sn 539, 540 & ṭāresi Sn 545. Tāreti2 {Tareti} [Caus. of tarati2] to make haste Th 1, 293. Tāla {Tala} [Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. ta_lis & thleqa/w (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout] 1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons & similes M I.187; J I.202 (°vana), 273 (°matta as tall as a palm): VvA 162; PvA 100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo). - 2. a strip, stripe, streak J V.372 (=raji). -aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit DhA II.53, cp. 60 (°aṭṭhikhaṇḍa); -kanda a bulbous plant J IV.46 (=kalamba); -kkhandha the trunk of a palm J IV.351; VvA 227 (°parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); PvA 56; -cchidda see tāḷa°; taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin I.189; -pakka palm fruit It 84; -paṇṇa a palm-leaf DhA I.391; Pāli Text Society 688 Pāli-English Dictionary II.249; III.328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata-maṇḍalavījanī VvA 147) Vv 3343 (Hardy for °vaṇṭha of Goon. ed. p. 30); VvA 147 (v. l. °vaṇṭa q. v.); Nd2 562 (+vidhūpana); -patta a palm-leaf Vin I.189; VvA 147; -miñja the pith of a p. J IV.402; -vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta] a fan Vin II.130 (+vidhūpana), 137; J I.265; VvA 44, cp. °paṇṇa; -vatthu (more correct tālāvatthu=tālaavatthu) in tālāvatthukata a palm rendered groundless, i. e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.). Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna-mūla t° anabhāvaṃ-kata "given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again" (Kern, Toev. II.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiḳt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: M Vastu III.360 has kālavastuṃ. - The readings vary: tālāvatthu e. g. at M I.370; S I.69; IV.84; A I.135; II.38; J V.267; tālav° S III.10; V.327; Th 2, 478 (ThA 286: tālassa chindita- -ṭṭhāna-sadisa); Nd2 freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin III.3. - In other combn tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away) J V.267 (=chinnamūla-tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. M I.250; -vāra "palm-time" (?) or is it tāḷa° (gong-turn?) DhA II.49 (note: from talapratiṣṭhāyāṃ?). Tālīsa {Talisa} (nt.) (also tālissa J IV.286, tālīsaka Miln 338) [cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā] the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin I.203 (+tagara); J IV.286 (id.); Miln 338. Tālīsa2 {Talisa} (No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim. Tālu {Talu} [Sk. tālu, see tala] the palate Sn 716; J I.419; Vism 264 (°matthaka top of p.); PvA 260. Tāḷa1 {Tala} [taḍ, cp. Sk. tāla a blow, or musical time; tālīyaka cymbal] beating, striking, the thing beaten or struck, i. e. a musical instrument which is beaten, an instr. of percussion, as a cymbal, gong, or tambourine (for tāḷa= gong cp. thāla): (a) gong, etc. J I.3; VI.60; Th 1, 893; DA I.85; DhsA 319 (kaṃsa°). - (b) music in general DhA IV.67. -āvacara musical time or measure, music, a musician D II.159 (v. l. tāla°); J I.60 (l); IV.41; VvA 257 (°parivuta, of an angel). Tāḷa2 {Tala} (nt.) [Sk. tālaka=tāḍa AvŚ II.56, tāḍaka Divy 577] a key (orig. a "knocker"?) Vin II.148 (3 kinds: loha°, kaṭṭha°, visāṇa°); Bdhd 1. -cchiggala a key-hole S IV.290; V.453; Vism 500. cchidda id. Vin II.120, 148, 153 (all tāla°); III.118; DhA III.8 (l). Tāḷī {Tali} (f.) a strike, a blow, in urattāḷiṃ karoti to strike one's chest (as a sign of grief) PvA 39, etc. (see ura). Tāḷeti {Taleti} [Sk. tāḍayati, taḍ perhaps=tud] to strike a blow, flog, beat, esp. freq. in phrase kasāhi tāḷeti to flog with whips, etc. (in list of punishments, see kasā) M I.87; A II.122; Nd2 604; PvA 4, etc. - ppr. pass. taḍḍamāna (for *tāḍyamāna) J VI.60 (so read for taddamāna; Com poṭhīyamāna). - pp. tāḷita J VI.60 (turiya°); Vv 621 (id.); Sdhp 80. Cp. abhi°. Tāva {Tava} (adv.) [Sk. tāvat] so much, so long; usually correl. with yāva how long, how much; in all meanings to be understood out of elliptical application of this correlation. Thus I. yāvatāva as long as: yāva dve janā avasiṭṭhā ahesuṃ tāva aððamaððaṃ ghātayiṃsu J I. 254; yāva dukkhā nirayā idha tattha pi tāva ciraṃ vasitabbaṃ Sn 678. Neg. na tāva-yāva na not until: M I.428; S V.261; A I.141≈(na t. kālaṃ karoti yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantihoti he does not die until his evil kamma is exhausted). II. Elliptical: 1. temporal: so long as, for the time Pāli Text Society 689 Pāli-English Dictionary (tāvakālikaṃ=yāvak°tāvak°; see below). - 2. comparative: (such-) as, like, so, such, just so, rather, in such a degree, even; tāvabahuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ so much gold Vin I.209; t.-mahanto so much J I.207; t. madhuraphala with such sweet fruit J II.105; asītiyā tāva kimi-kulānaṃ sādhāraṇa (of the body) or rather, i. e. Vism 235; vatthāni t. devapātubhūtāni PvA 44; paṭhamaṃ t. (even) at once, right away PvA 113, 132; gilānāya t. ayaṃ etissā rūpasobhā even in sickness she is so beautiful VvA 76; parittakassa kusalakammassa t.=quidem PvA 51; paṃsukūlikangaṃ t. in the first place Vism. 62. - 3. concessive: (a) (absol.) as far as it goes, considering, because: yadi evaṃ pitā tāva purisabhāve na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ "even if the father as man does not weep, surely," &c., PvA 63. - (b) with imper. in expr. like gaccha tāva go as long as you like (to go) (=gaccha tāva yāva gaccheyyāsi), i. e. if you like, cp. Ger. geh'immer; passa tāva just look=Lat. licet. Therefore sometimes=please or simply an emphatic imper. as "do go," etc. J II.5 (ete t. aguṇā hontu let them be faulty), 133 (ehi t.), 352 (tiṭṭha t. leave off please), III.53 (pāto va t. hotu only let it be to-morrow, i. e. wait tillt-m.); IV.2 taṃ t. me detha give me this though); VvA 289 (vīmaṃsatha t. just think); PvA 4 (t. ayyo āgametu yāvāyaṃ puriso pānīyaṃ pivissati may your honour wait till this man shall have drunk the water), 13 (therā t. gacchantu). With prohibitive: mā tāva ito agā please do not go from here Pv II.322. - 4. hortative, with 1st pers. fut. equal to imperative-subjunctive or injunctive, cp. 3 (b): let me, well, now, then (cp. Lat. age in dic age, etc.). J I.62 (puttaṃ t. passissāmi please let me see the son), 263 (vīmaṃsissāmi t. let me think), 265 (nahāyissāmi t. just let me bathe). - III. In other combinations: tāva-na although-yet= not even: ajjā pi t. me balaṃ na passasi not even to-day have you yet seen my full strength J I.207; t. mahādhanassāmī na me dātuṃ piyaṃ ahu although lord of wealth yet I did not like to give Pv II.76. na-tāva (or tāva in neg. sentence) not yet, not even, not so much as (=Lat. ne-quidem) Pv II.112 (na ca tāva khīyati does not even diminish a bit); PvA 117 (attano kenaci anabhibhavanīyataṃ eva tāva: that he is not to be overpowered, even by anyone). tāva-d-eva just now, instantly, on the spot, at once Sn 30; J I.61, 151; IV.2; Pv II.89 (=tadā eva PvA 109); PvA 23, 46, 74, 88, etc. tāvade (=tāva-d-eva) for all times Pv IV.338 (=PvA 255). -kālika (adj.) "as long as the time lasts," i. e. for the time being, temporary, pro tempore Vin II.174; III.66; IV.286; J I.121, 393; Vism 95; ThA 288; PvA 87 (=na sassata). Tāvataka (adj.) [der. fr. tāva] just so much or just so long (viz. as the situation requires), with (or ellipt. without) a corresp. yāvataka Vin I.83 (yāvatake-t. as many as): D II.18 (yāvatakv'assa kāyo tāvatakv'assa vyāmo as tall as is his body so far can he stretch his arms: the 19th sign of a Mahāpurisa); instr. as adv. tāvatakena after a little time Miln 107; DhA III.61. - See also tattaka (contracted of tāvataka). {Tavataka} Tāvatā {Tavata} (adv.) [from tāva] 1. so long (corr. to yāva) Dpvs IV.17. - 2. on that account, thus D I.104 (v. l. ettāvatā); Dh 266. Tāvatiṃsa {Tavatimsa} [tayo+tiṃsa. Cp. Vedic trayastriṃśat] No. 33, only in cpds. denoting the 33 gods, whose chief is Sakka, while the numeral 33 is always tettiṃsa. This number occurs already in the Vedas with ref. to the gods & is also found in Zend-Avesta (see Haug, Language & Writings, etc., pp. 275, 276). The early Buddhists, though they took over the number 33, rejected the superstitious beliefs in the magical influence and mystic meaning of that & other simple numbers. And they altered the tradition. The king of the gods had been Indra, of disreputable character from the Buddhist point of view. Him they deposed, and invented a new god named Sakka, the opposite in every way to Indra (see for details Dial. II.294-298). Good Buddhists, after death in this world, are reborn in heaven (sagga), by which is meant the Pāli Text Society 690 Pāli-English Dictionary realm of the Thirty-three (D II.209). There they are welcomed by the Thirtythree with a song of triumph (D II.209, 211, 221, 227). The Thirty-three are represented as being quite good Buddhists. Sakka their new chief and Brahmā address them in discourses suitable only for followers of the new movement (D II.213, 221). See further Vin I.12; M I.252; II.78; III.100; A III.287; IV.396=VvA 18 (cpd with the people of Jambudīpa); V.59, 331, Vism 225, etc. - See also tidasa. -devaloka the god-world of the 33; freq. e. g. J I.202; Vism 399; DhA III.8; -bhavana the realm of the 33 gods J I.202; Vism 207 sq., 390, 416, and passim. Tāvata {Tavata} (nt.) [abstr. fr. tāva] lit. "so-much-ness," i. e. relative extent or sphere, relatively Vism 481, 482. Tāsa {Tasa} [see tasati2] terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety S III.57; J I.342; III.177, 202; Miln 24. Cp. san°. Tāsaniya {Tasaniya} (adj.) to be dreaded, dreadful, fearful Miln 149. Tāhaṃ {Taham} contraction of 1. taṃ ahaṃ: see ta°; 2. te ahaṃ: see tvaṃ. Ti {Ti} (adv.) [cp. Sk. iti] the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti. Ti° {Ti°} [Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. tri/s, Lat. ter (fr. ters>*tris, cp. testis>*tristo, trecenti>*tricenti), Icl. prisvar, Ohg. driror] base of numeral three in compn; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also= three (3 times). -kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭukabhaṇḍa) VvA 186; -gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i. e. about 2 miles), DhA I.108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; II.43, 61, 64, 69; III.202, 269; VvA 227; B. on S I.52 (sarīra); -catu three or four DhA I.173; -cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu, consisting of: diguṇā sanghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsanga, ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin I.289, 296; II.302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin I.109 sq. - Vism 60, 66; DhA IV.23. -tālamattaṃ 3 palm-trees high DhA II.62. daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water-pot on (kuṇḍikā) J I.8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa-parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); II.317 (see tedaṇḍika). - 2. part of a chariot A IV.191 (v. l. daṇḍa only). -diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiṃsa heaven) D II.167, 272 (tidivûpapanna); S I.96 (°ṃ ṭhānaṃ upeti), 181 (ākankha-māno °ṃ anuttaraṃ). pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. tri/pous, Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody) of 3 padas Sn 457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); -(p)pala threefold Vism 339; -pallattha "turning in 3 ways," i. e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig) J I.163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); -piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism 62, 241; DhA I.382; peṭaka=tepiṭaka Miln 90; tipeṭakin at Vin V.3; -maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin II.213 (°ṃ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsento); cp. Vin. Texts I.155; -yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i. e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism 392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); DhA II.41 (°magga); VvA 75 (°mattake vihāraṃ agamāsi); PvA 216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā °mattake hoti); °satika 300 cubits long J II.3; -loka the 3 worlds (i. e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa-loka) Sdhp 29, 276, 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); -vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DA I.2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti); -(v)angika having 3 angas (of jhāna) Dhs 161; -vassika for the 3 seasons (-gandha-sālibhattaṃ bhuðjantā) DhA II.9; J I.66 (id.); -vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yaðða) D I.128, 134, 143; of aggi (fire) J I.4 & Miln 97; Vism 147 (°kalyāṇatā). -visākha a threeforked frown on the forehead S I.118; M I.109; -sandhi consisting of 3 spaces J VI.397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t.-parivāritā), expld as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry, and infantry, with a space between each two. Pāli Text Society Tiṃsaṃ 691 Pāli-English Dictionary (tiṃsa°) [Vedic triṃśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha] the number 30 D I.81≈(tiṃsaṃ pi jātiyo); S II.217 (t.-mattā bhikkhū); dat. instr. tiṃsāya A V.305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Sn p. 87 (pi dadāmi) PvA 281 (vassasahassehi): t.-yojana-maggaṃ (āgato) DhA II.76, 79; III.172; PvA 154; °yojanika kantāra DhA II. 193 (cp. 192); J V.46 (magga); DhA I.26 (vimāna); t.-vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṃ (of Konāgamana Buddha) D II.3; t.-mattāni vassāni Miln 15; t.-vassasahassāni PvA 281=DhA II.10. So of an immense crowd: tiṃsa bhikkhusahassāni D II.6; tiṃsa-mattā sūkarā J II.417; °sahassa-bhikkhū DhA I.24. {Timsam} Tika {Tika} (adj.-n.) [Vedic trika] consisting of 3, a triad S II. 218 (t.-bhojana); DhA IV.89 (-nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t.-catukka-jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Miln 12 (tika-duka-paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasanganī); Vism 13 sq.; DhsA 39 (-duka triad & pair). Tikicchaka {Tikicchaka} [fr. tikicchati] a physician, a doctor A V.219; J I.4 (adj. & vejja); IV.361; PvA 233. Tikicchati {Tikicchati} [also cikicchati=Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal] to treat medically, to cure Vin I.276; S I.222; Miln 172, 272, 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti J I.4. Tikicchā {Tikiccha} (f.) [from last] the art of healing, practice of medicine D I.10 (dāraka° infant healing); Sn 927 (°ṃ māmako na seveyya). - See also tekiccha. Tikkaṃ {Tikkam} at J V.291 in "yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva" is to be read as "yāva majjhantik'ātikkamm'- āgami yeva." Tikkha {Tikkha} (adj.) [=tikhiṇa] sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkhindriya (opp. mud-indriya) Nd2 2353P=Ps I.121=II.195; & tikkha-paððatā A I.45. Tikkhattuṃ {Tikkhattum} (adv.) [Sk. trikṛtvaḥ] three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaṃ katvā "having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times" VvA 173, 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times J II.352; DhA II.4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times PvA 74. See also J IV.267; V.382; VI.71; DhA II.5, 42, 65, 338; IV.122 & passim. Tikhiṇa {Tikhina} (adj.) [Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diæretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q. v.) & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. sti/zw "stitch" & stikto/s, Lat. instīgo, Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick] pointed, sharp, pungent, acrid; fig. "sharp," clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) J V.264; DhA II.9; IV.13; PvA 152, 221 (=tippa). (ati-) tikhinatā Miln 278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo. Tiṭṭha {Tittha} (adj.) [pp. of tasati1] dry, hard, rough J VI.212 (°sela hard rock). Tiṭṭhati {Titthati} [Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna)=Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. i(/sthmi, Lat. sisto] to stand, etc. - I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Sn 333, 434; Pv I.51); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu; ppr. tiṭṭhaṃ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Sn 918, 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (J I.172, 217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (J I.279, pl. aṭṭhaṃsu J II.129) & aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Sn 429; J I.188); inf. ṭhātuṃ (PvA 174); ger. ṭhatvā (Sn 887); grd. ṭhānīya Pāli Text Society 692 Pāli-English Dictionary (PvA 72). - pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med.-Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. patiṭṭhīyati is to be expld as Med. of paṭi+sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi-tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti. - II. Meanings. - 1. to stand, stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1a): ṭhānakappana-vacanaṃ nisajjādi-paṭikkhepato PvA 24; opp. to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaṃ caraṃ nisinno vā Sn 151, 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c'assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi "she was delivered standing" J I.52; ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi PvA 68, etc.; cankamana-koṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā PvA 79. - 2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure, be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so, all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naṃ dakkhinti deva-manussā (as long as the body shall last) D I.46. tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.d Sn 1053, 1072 =Nd2 283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaṃ D II.103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiṃ "remaining inside the castle" Pv I.101; tiṭṭha tāva "stop please" J II.352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (combd w. ehi-bh°) D I.166; M I.342; A I.295; II.206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) J I.153; VI.367; similarly J VI.336. Imper. tiṭṭhatu J IV.40; Miln 14; PvA 74. - 3. to live (on=instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata & ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaṃ jānāti (he knows their "gati") Sn 1114 (see Nd2 283); āhārena tiṭṭhati PvA 27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) PvA 66; karuṇa-ṭhānīya (=*kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity PvA 72; yā tvaṃ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 441, etc. - with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) J VI.367; aṭṭhiṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) J IV.415; gehaṃ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṃsu (encircled the house) PvA 22. Tiṇa (nt.) [Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. "point" (=blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn=E. thorn, Ger. dorn] grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch; hay, litter S III.137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa); satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) D I.87, 111, etc.; sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā rajo vā tiṇaṃ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) D II.19; A I.145; t.+paṇṇa (grass & leaves1) A I.183; VvA 5. - J I.108 (dabba°), 295; III.53; Pv I.81 (harita t.); IV.148; Vism 353 (kuṇṭha°); DA I.77 (alla° fresh grass); PvA 7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; DhA IV.121; Miln 47 (thatch), 224 (id.). -aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin I.208=III.249; -āgāra a thatched cottage A I.101 (+naḷāgāra); -ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay S II.152; III.185; J I.212, 296; Vism 428; DhA I.126; ThA 287; Bdhd 107; -karala a wisp of grass DhA III.38; -kājaka a load of g. DhA IV.121; -gahana a thicket of g., a jungle A I.153; -cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin I.203; VvA 100 (-rajānukiṇṇa); -jāti grass-creeper VvA 162; -dāya a grass-jungle S II.152; -dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dh 356; PvA 7; -pupphaka (-roga) sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay-fever Miln 216; -purisaka a straw-man, a scarecrow Miln 352; Vism 462; DhsA 111; -bhakkha eating grass; of animals M III.167; of ascetics D I.166; Pug 55; A I.241, 295; -bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass VvA 47; -rukkha a shrub; -vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin. Texts, III.30-34. This is the "covering over as if with grass" Vin II.87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā); D III.254; A I.99; M II.250; -santhāraka a mat of grass Vin I.286; II.113, 116; J I.360. {Tina} Tiṇava {Tinava} a sort of drum A II.117. Tiṇḍuka {Tinduka} see tinduka. Pāli Text Society 693 Pāli-English Dictionary Tiṇṇa {Tinna} [pp. of tarati] one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha° gone through the great flood S I.3, 142; Sn 178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; D III. 54; Sn 21 (+pāragata), 359 (+parinibbuta), 515, 545 (tiṇṇo tāres'imaṃ pajaṃ); It 123 (tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo); Dh 195 (-sokapariddava); Nd2 282. kathankatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Sn 17, 86, 367; -vicikiccha=prec. Vin I.16; D I.110; II.224, 229; Pug 68; DA I.211. Tiṇha {Tinha} [see tikhiṇa] sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) D I.56 (sattha); S IV.160, 167 (kuṭhārī); A IV.171; Sn 667 (°dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); J I.253; Sdhp 381. Titikkhati {Titikkhati} [Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa to bear, endure, stand S I.221; Sn 623; Dh 321=Nd2 475 B7; Dh 399 (titikkhissaṃ=sahissāmi DhA IV.3); J V.81, 368. Titikkhā {Titikkha} (f.) [see last] endurance, forgiveness, longsuffering S I.7; V.4; Dh 184; Nd2 203. Titta {Titta} [pp. of tappati2] satisfied (with=instr.) enjoying (c. gen.), happy, contented A I.87=Pug 26 (+tappetar); Miln 249; VvA 86 (=pīṇita); PvA 46 (dibbāhārassa), 59 (=suhita), 109 (=pīṇita). -atitta dissatisfied, insatiate J I.440; III.275; Dh 48 (kāmesu). Tittaka {Tittaka} (adj.) [cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij] sharp, bitter (of taste) M I.80 (°alābu), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs 629=Nd2 540 (tittika; enumd between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); DhsA 320. Tittakatta {Tittakatta} (nt.) [abstr. to tittaka] bitterness, enumd with lavaṇattaṃ & kaṭukattaṃ at Miln 56=63 (cp. Nd2 540). Titti {Titti} (f.) [from tappati2] satisfaction (in=loc.) Dh 186 =ThA 287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n' atthi t. kāmānaṃ Th 2, 487; J V.486 (dhammesu); VvA 11; PvA 32 (°ṃ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati), 127. Tittika {Tittika} in sama° in sama° at D I.244, Vin I.230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9. Tittimant {Tittimant} (adj.) [titti+mant] satisfied, contented, so read at J III.70 & VI.508 for kittimant. Tittira {Tittira} [Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr. tatu/ras pheasant, Lit. teterva heath-cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle] partridge J I.218; III.538. -pattikā a kind of boot Vin I.186. Tittiriya {Tittiriya} (adj.) [fr. tittira] belonging to a partridge, like a partridge J I.219 (brahmacariya). Tittha {Tittha} (nt.) [Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford] 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place D II.89=Vin I.230 (Gotama° the G. ford); J I.339, 340 (titthāraṇa); II.111; III.228 (°nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā° a ferry); IV.379; Pv II.120; III.64; IV.122 (su°); Dāvs. V.59 (harbour). Titthaṃ jānāti to know a "fording place," i. e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or Pāli Text Society 694 Pāli-English Dictionary doubt M I.223=A V.349 (neg.) 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error). -āyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya) Vin I.60, 69; II.279; M I.483; A I.173; Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101n); DA I.118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117-118; -kara a "ford-maker," founder of a sect D I.47, 116; M I.198; Sn pp. 90, 92; Miln 4, 6, etc.; -ððutā knowledge of a ford, in fig. sense of titthaṃ jānāti (see above) Nett 29, 80. Titthika {Titthika} (adj.) [Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth) are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant]. Titthiya {Titthiya} [from tittha 2, cp. Divy 817; AvŚ I.48; II.20. An adherent of another sect (often as aðða°), an heretic Vin I.54, 84, 136, 159 (°samādāna), 306 (°dhaja), 320; S I.65; IV.37, 394; D III.44, 46; Sn 381, 891; Nd2 38; Ps I.160; Pug 49; Vbh 247. añña° e. g. Vin I.101; D I.175 sq.; III.130 sq.; J II.415, 417. -sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin I.172; J I.95; Vism 17. Tithi {Tithi} [Sk. tithi] a lunar day DhA I.174; PvA 198. Tidasa {Tidasa} (num.) [Vedic tridaśa] thirty (cp. tiṃsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiṃsa. Nandanaṃ rammaṃ tidasānaṃ mahāvanaṃ Pv III.119=Vv 1813; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 301; Sdhp 420. ādhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 478; -inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp 411, 478; -gaṇa the company of the 30 Sn 679 (Com. tettiṃsa); Vv 416; -gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 3512 (=tidasabhavanaṃ gata Tāvatiṃsadevanikāyaṃ uppanna VvA 164); -pura the city of the 30, i. e. Heaven Miln 291; -bhavana the state of the 30, i. e. heavenly existence VvA 164 (=Tāvatiṃsabhavana). Tidhā {Tidha} (adv.) [ti+dhā] in three ways or parts, threefold Miln 282 (-pabhinna nāgarājā). Tinta {Tinta} (adj.) [=timita from temeti] wet, moist Miln 286; DhA II.40 (°mukha). Tintaka {Tintaka} at PvA 47 (°alābu) is to be read as tittaka°. Tintiṇa {Tintina} (nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpabhikkhu A V.149 (Com. tintiṇaṃ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsankābahulo vā); Vbh 351 (tintiṇaṃ tintiṇāyanā, etc.=loluppaṃ). Tintiṇāti & Tintiṇāyati {Tintinati} {Tintinayati} [either=Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati>*stistim° after tiṣṭhati>*stiṣṭhati;=P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q. v.=Sk. nitāmyati) at J IV.284, expld by atikilamati] to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint J I.243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); VI.347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v. l. tiṇāy°). Tinduka [Sk. tinduka] the tree Diospyros embryopteris D I.178 (v. l. tiṇḍ°; J V.99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage J IV.434; VI.532. -tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin II.76. See also timbaru & timbarūsaka. {Tinduka} Pāli Text Society 695 Pāli-English Dictionary Tipu {Tipu} [cp. Sk. trapu, non-Aryan?] lead, tin Vin I.190 (°maya); S V.92; J II.296; Miln 331 (°kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism 174 (°maṇḍala); DhA IV.104 (°parikhā). Tipusa {Tipusa} (nt.) [Sk. trapusa] a species of cucumber J V.37; VvA 147. Tippa {Tippa} (adj.) [a variant of tibba=Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w. tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana-vasena vā tippā Com. to Anguttara (see M I.526)] piercing, sharp, acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp. pains suffered in Niraya. In full combns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā M I.10; A II.116, 143, 153; ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. M I.74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv IV.19 (=tikhiṇadukkha° PvA 221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved° vediyamānā Miln 148. Tibba {Tibba} (adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim (of tamas) or=stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen, eager: tibbagārava very devout A II.21; Nett 112 (cp. tīvraprasāda AvŚ I.130); t.-cchanda D III.252, 283. - 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t.-rāga Dh 349 (=bahalarāga DhA IV.68); A II.149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaṃ S III.109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu) S III.93=It 90; A II.30; tibbo manussaloko (dark, dense) Miln 7; °andhakāra dense darkness Vism 500 sq.; °kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism 87. Timi {Timi} [Derivation unknown. Sk. timi] a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combn w. timingala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next). Timingala {Timingala} [timi+gila, gl, see note on gala] in combn w. timi, timitimingala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila: redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater, redupl. as intens.=greedy or monstrous fisheater, a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin II.238=A IV.200=Nd2 2353q; Ps II.196; Miln 377. At Ud 54 sq. & Miln 262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty. A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502. See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish. Timira (adj.) [Sk. timira fr. tim=tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from tim in temeti to (be or) make wet. See tama] dark; nt. darkness Vv 323 (t.-tamba); J III.189 (t.-rukkha); vanatimira a flower J IV.285; V.182. {Timira} Timiratipingala {Timiratipingala} (nt.) a great ocean fish, DhsA 13, v. timingala. Timirāyittata {Timirayittata} (nt.) [abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira] gloom, darkness S III.124 (=Māra). Timisa {Timisa} (nt.) [Vedic tamisrā=tamas] darkness J III.433 (andhakāra-timissāya); Pug 30 (andh°-timisāya); Miln 283 Timīsikā {Timisika} (f.) [timisa+ka] darkness, a very dark night Vv 96; J IV.98. Timbaru {Timbaru} a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Diospyros) J VI.336; °tthanī (f.) "with breasts like the t. fruit" Sn 110; J VI.457 (SnA 172: taruṇadārikā); VvA 137 (t.-nādasadisa). Pāli Text Society 696 Pāli-English Dictionary Timbarukkha {Timbarukkha} =timbarūsaka J VI.529. Timbarūsaka {Timbarusaka} =timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin III.59; Vv 3327 (=tindukaphala VvA 147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti); DhA III.315. Tiraccha {Tiraccha} (adv.) [Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp. tiriyaṃ] across, obliquely; in °bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DA I.89 (see under tiracchāna-kathā). Tiracchāna [for °gata=Sk. tiraścīna (°gata)=tiraśca; "going horizontally," i. e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha, tiriyaṃ, tiro] an animal It 92 (tiracchānaṃ ca yoniyo for tiracchānayoniyo); Vbh 339 (°gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); VvA 23 (manussatiracchāna an animal-man, wild man, "werwolf"). -kathā "animal talk"; wrong or childish talk in general Vin I.188; D I.7, 178; III.54; Vism 127; expld at DA I.89 by anīyānikattā sagga-mokkha-maggānaṃ tiraccha-bhūtā kathā; -gata an animal, a beast Vin IV.7; S III.152=DA I.23; (t. pāṇā) M III.167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd2 on Sn 72 (t.-pāṇā); J I.459 (=vanagocara); Vbh 412 sq.; -yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t. manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati, a state of misery D I.228; III.234; S I.34; III.225 sq.; IV. 168, 307; A I.60; II.127, 129; Pv IV.111; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166; yonika (& yoniya A I.37) belonging to the realm of the animals S V.356; -vijjā a low art, a pseudo-science Vin II.139; D I.9 sq. Tiriyaṃ {Tiracchana} (adv.) [Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer=E. thwart, all to *ter in tarati] transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp. to uddhaṃ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting, across. In combn uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ sabbadhi "in all directions whatever" D I.251=A II.129; similarly uddhaṃ adho t. vāpi majjhe Sn 1055; with uddhaṃ & adho D I.23, 153; Vism 176 (where expld). - A II.48; Sn 150, 537; J I.96; It 120; DhA I.40 (dvāra-majjhe t. across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DA I.312; KhA 248. -taraṇa ferrying across, adj. °ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin IV.65. {Tiriyam} Tiriyā {Tiriya} (f.) a kind of grass or creeper A III.240, 242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa). Tirivaccha {Tirivaccha} a certain tree J V.46. Tirīṭa {Tirita} (nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin I.306 (°ka); D I.166=A I.295; M I.343; Pug 51. Tiro {Tiro} (prep. & adv.) (always °-) [Vedic tiras across, crossways, from *ter of tarati=to go , Lat. trans, Cymr. tra] across, beyond, over, outside, afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaṃ. -karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. "drawing across") Vin I.276; II.152; kucchigata having left the womb D II.13; -kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin IV.265 (°kuḍḍe uccāraṃ chaḍḍeti); D I.78= A III.280 (in phrase tirobhāvaṃ t. kuḍḍaṃ t. pākāraṃ t.-pabbataṃ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv I.51 (°kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa-Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism 176, 394; DhA I.104; PvA 23, 31; gāma a distant village Vin III.135; -chada "outside the veil," conspicuous J VI.60; -janapada a distant or foreign country D I.116; -pākāra beyond or over a fence (°pākāraṃ or °pākāre) Vin IV.266; see also °kuḍḍa; -bhāva (ṃ) beyond existence, out of existence, magic power of going Pāli Text Society 697 Pāli-English Dictionary to a far away place or concealment Vism 393 sq. (=a-pākaṭa-pāṭihāriya), see also under °kuḍḍa. -raṭṭha a foreign kingdom D I.161 (=pararaṭṭha DA I.286). Tirokkha {Tirokkha} 1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin III.185. - 2. (adv.) [=tiras+ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain, abuse] in tirokkha-vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard J V.78. Tila {Tila} (m. nt.) [Vedic tila m.] the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often combd with taṇḍula, e. g. A I.130=Pug 32; J I.67; III.53. - Vin I.212 (navātilā); A IV.108; Sn p. 126; J I.392; II.352; Vism 489 (ucchu°); DhA I.79; PvA 47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṃ karoti). -odana rice with sesame J III.425; -kakka sesame paste Vin I.205; -tela ses. oil VvA 54 (°ṃ pātukāma); DhA III.29; Bdhd 105; -piððāka tila seedcake, oilcake VvA 142; -piṭṭha sesamum-grinding, crushed s. seed Vin IV.341. -muṭṭhi a handful of ses. J II.278; -rāsi a heap of t. seeds VvA 54; -vāha a cartload of t. seeds A V.173=Sn p. 126; -sangulikā a ses. cake DhA II.75. Tilaka {Tilaka} [tila+ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed] 1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle M I.88; S I.170; VvA 253; DhA IV.172 (°ṃ vā kālakaṃ vā adisvā). - 2. a kind of tree Vv 67 (=bandhu-jīvaka-puppha-sadisa-pupphā ekā rukkha-jāti). Tilañchaka {Tilanchaka} at J. IV.364 acc. to Kern (Toev. II.91) to be read as nilañchaka. Tisata {Tisata} (num.) [ti+sata] three hundred J VI.427 (°mattā nāvā). See also under tayo. Tīra {Tira} (nt.) [Vedic tiras from *ter, tarati; orig. the opposite bank, the farther side (of a river or ocean), cp. tittha] a shore, bank Vin I.1; D I.222, 244; A II.29, 50; Dh 85; Sn 672; J I.212, 222, 279; II.111, 159; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Vism 512 (orima°); PvA 142, 152. - tīra-dassin finding the shore S III.164; A III.368. - a-tīra-dassanī (f.) not seeing the shore (nāvā a ship) J V.75. Tīraṇa {Tirana} [from tīreti 2] measurement, judgment, recognition, Nd2 413 (v. l. tir°); Nett 54 (+vipassanā), 82 (≈ðāṇa), 191; Vism 162. - tīraṇa is one of the 3 pariððās, viz. t°, pahāna°, ðātapariððā. See under pariððā. Tīriya {Tiriya} (adj.) [from tīra] dwelling on the banks of . . . Vin II.287. Tīreti {Tireti} [Caus. of tarati] 1. to bring through, to finish, to execute (business), to accomplish: karaṇīyaṃ Miln 7, PvA 203; kiccaṃ PvA 278. - 2. to measure, judge, recognize, always in formula tūleti tīreti vibhāveti (Nd2 tul° tir°, etc.) as interpretation of jānāti; pp. tīrita (Nd2 tirita) Ps II.200; Nd2 under ðāta & No. 413. Tīvarā {Tivara} (pl.) N. of a people in the time of Buddha Kakusandha S II.191. Tīhaṃ {Tiham} (adv.) [tri+aha] a period of three days, for 3 days; usually as cpd. dvīhatīhaṃ 2 or 3 days (see dvīha) J II.103, etc. Tu {Tu} (indecl.) [Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaṃ=Lat. tu; Gr. tu/, toi/=indeed, however (orig. ethical dat, of su/), toi/nun, toi/gar; Goth. pu, etc., cp. tuvaṃ] however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (=quid nunc). Frequent in late verse: ante Pāli Text Society 698 Pāli-English Dictionary tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913, 53; Bd's Man. 1152 &c. Usually combd with eva: tv eva however Sn p. 141; na tv eva not however, but not A V.173. Tunga {Tunga} (adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. tu/mbos hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill] high, prominent, long J I.89; III.433 (pabbata, expld however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. IV.30. -nāsika one with a prominent or long nose S II.284; cp. saṇha-tunga-sadisī nāsikā Th 2,258; -vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; N. of a plant J VI.537. Tuccha {Tuccha} (adj.) [Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] empty, vain, deserted; very often combd with ritta D I.55; III.53 (°kumbhi); M I.207; J I.209 (°hattha, empty-handed); VI.365; Sn 883; Pug 45, 46; Miln 5 (+palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; DhA II.43; PvA 202; Sdhp 431. Tucchaka {Tucchaka} =tuccha; always combd w. rittaka D I.240; S III.141; M I.329. Tujjati {Tujjati} Pass. of tudati. Tuṭṭha {Tuttha} [pp. of tussati to be satisfied] pleased, satisfied; often combd w. haṭṭha (q. v.) i. e. tuṭṭha - haṭṭha J I.19 or haṭṭha-tuṭṭha J II.240; cp. tuṭṭha-pahaṭṭha J II.240. - Sn 683; It 103; J I.62 (°mānasa), 87, 266 (°citta), 308 (id.); IV.138. - tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin IV.259. Tuṭṭhi {Tutthi} (f.) [from tussati] pleasure, joy, enjoyment S I.48; Dh 331 (nom. tuṭṭhī); J I.60, 207. Tuṇḍa {Tunda} (nt.) [Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati] the beak of birds, the mouth, snout S V.148 (of a monkey); J I.222; IV.210; DhA I.394. Tuṇḍaka {Tundaka} (nt.)=tuṇḍa J I.222; III.126. Tuṇḍika {Tundika} see ahi°. Tuṇḍiya {Tundiya} (adj.) [from tuṇḍi] having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax-collector J V.102 (=adhamma-bali-sādhaka 103). Tuṇhikkhaka {Tunhikkhaka} (adj.) [fr. tūṣṇīṃ, see next] silent J IV.25 (=kiñci avadanto). Tuṇhī {Tunhi} (indecl.) [Sk. tūṣṇīṃ acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati] silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i. e. he had nothing to say against it) D II.155; A V.194; Dh 227; Sn 720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); PvA 117. -bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form. adhivāsesi tuṇhībhāvena he agreed Vin I.17; Sn p. 104, etc. - S II.236, 273 (ariyo t.-bhāvo); M I.161 (id.); A IV.153 (id.).-Miln 15; PvA 17, 20, etc.; -bhūta silent Sn p. 140; Vv 20; DhA 172, etc. Tuṇhīyati {Tunhiyati} =taṇhāyati, misspelling at S II.13. Tuṇhīra {Tunhira} inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver J V.128, also as v. l. at J V.48. Pāli Text Society 699 Pāli-English Dictionary Tutta {Tutta} (nt.) [Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push] a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) D II.266 (°tomara); J IV.310; V.268; Cp. III.5, 2 (t.vegahata). Tudati {Tudati} [Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg. stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan=E. stunt] to strike with an instrument; to prick, peck, pierce; to incite, instigate J III.189 (=vijjhati). Pass. tujjati to be struck Th 1, 780; Vism 503 (cp. vitujjati); Sdhp 279. - pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak=pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance=striker) & thūpa (point). Tudampatī (dual) husband & wife [tu°=dial. for du°, Sk. dve; dampati from dama=domus, Sk. daṃpati=Gr. despo/ths; cp. also Kern, Toev. II.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva]. See under dampati. {Tudampati} Tunna1 {Tunna} [pp. of tudati] struck Th 2, 162 (vyādhimaraṇa° str. with sickness and death). Tunna2 {Tunna} [from tudati] any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin I.290 (+aggaḷa, means of fastening); J I.8 (id.). -kamma "needle-work," tailoring, patching, sewing J IV.40; VI.366; Vism 112. -kāra (& °ka) a (mending) tailor J IV.38 (v. l. °ka); VvA 251 (°ka); PvA 120); -vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a "needle-weaver," a tailor Vin II.159; J VI.364, 368 (°vesaṃ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); PvA 161 (id.); Pv II.914 (=tunnakāra PvA 120); Miln 331, 365. Tuma {Tuma} (pron.-adj.) [most likely apostrophe form of ātuma =attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. XXV.319. Less likely=Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expld by Com. to A III.124 as esa.] oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (=quisque) yaṃ tumo karissati tumo va tena paððāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin II.186=A III.124; Sn 890 (cp. ātumānaṃ V.888), 908; Pv III.24 (=attānaṃ PvA 181). Tumula {Tumula} [Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tunga & tūla] tumult, uproar, commotion J VI.247 (by Com. expld as "andhakāra," darkness); Dpvs XVII.100. Tumba {Tumba} (m. nt.) [possibly=Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula] 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka° DA I.202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin I.205 (loha°, kaṭṭha°, phala°); II.114 (°kaṭāha of gourd); J III.430 (udaka°); IV.114; DhA II.193 (udaka°). - 2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain J I.233 (mahā°), 467 (=4 nāḷi p. 468); Miln 102. Tumhādisa {Tumhadisa} (pron.-adj.) [tumhe+ādisa] like you, of your kind Sn 459; J VI.528; DA I.146. Tumhe {Tumhe} [pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaṃ]. Tura {Tura} (adj.) [Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa] swift, quick; only in composition with °ga, etc., "going swiftly," denoting the horse; viz. turaga VvA 279; turanga VvA 281; Miln 192 (gaja°, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turangama Dāvs V.56; turagamana PvA 57. 700 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Turati {Turati} [=tarati2] to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten J VI.229 (mā turittho, Prohib.). - pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc. Turita {Turita} [pp. of turati] hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Sn 1014; J I.69 (turitaturita); Vv 808 (=sambhamanto VvA 311); DA I.319; PvA 181. - aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow J I.87. - See also tuvaṭaṃ. Turiya {Turiya} (nt.) [Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya] sometimes tūriya (e. g. Vv 54); musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (paðcangika t. e. g. Vv 54; 391; VvA 181, 183, 210, 257), viz. ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira (VvA 37). Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) "surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music" Vin I.15; D II.21; A I.145; J I.58. - Vv 384; 412; 5024, 645; Pv III.81; DhA III.460; VvA 92; PvA 74. -sadda the sound of music, music Mhvs VII.30. Turī {Turi} ḷi hen). Tula {Tula} (adj.) [see tuleti] only in negative atula incomparable, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 304 (=anupama VvA 126); Pv II.89 (=appamāṇa PvA 110); III.32 (=asadisarūpa PvA 188); Miln 343. Tulanā {Tulana} (f.) [see tuleti] weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation M I.480; II.174; Nett 8, 41. Tulasi {Tulasi} [Derivation unknown] basil (common or sweet) J V.46 (°gahana a thicket of b.; v. l. tūlasi); VI.536 (tuḷasi=tuḷasigaccha). Tulā (f.) [see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. ta/las, ta/lanton (balance, weighing & weight=talentum), to/lma; Lat. tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer); Ger. geduld, etc.] 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin II.122; VvA 188 (+gopānasī); DhsA 107. - 2. a weighing pole or stick, scales, balance A I.88; J I.112; Dh 268; Miln 356 (t. nikkhepanāya). - 3. fig. measure ("weighing," cp. tulanā), standard, rate S II.236 (+pamāṇa). -kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaṃsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring) D I.5=A II.209≈; DA I.79; DhA I.239; -daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance J I.113; -puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) J V.424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka? ). {Tula} Tulita [pp. of tuleti] weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Th 2, 153 (yattakaṃ esā t. what she is worth=lakkhaṇaððūhi parichinna ThA 139); Nd2 under ðāta (as syn. of tirita); PvA 52 (in expln of mita, measured). {Tulita} Tuliya {Tuliya} [Sk.?] a flying fox J VI.537. Tuleti {Tuleti} [from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.] to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal M I.480; Th 1, 107; J VI.283; - ger. tulayitvā M I.480. - grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.). - pp. tulita. Tulya & Tuliya (also tulla J IV.102) (adj.) [orig. grd. of tuleti] to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched, equal, comparable Sn 377; J III.324; PvA 87 (=samaka). Mostly {Tulya} {Tuliya} Pāli Text Society 701 Pāli-English Dictionary in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Sn 83, 683; J IV.102 (atulla); Miln 249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.) - See also tula. Tuvaṃ & Tvaṃ {Tuvam} {Tvam} [Sk. tvaṃ & (Ved.) tuaṃ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. tu/, su/; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū] pron. of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:- 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv°, tu°, tuyh°: nom. tvaṃ (in prose & verse) Sn 179, 241, 1029, 1058; J I.279; II.159; Pv I.84. Also for nom. pl. at J I.391, 395; VI.576; tuvaṃ (in verse) Sn 1064, 1102, 1121; J III.278, 394; Pv I.33; II.32; also for acc. Sn 377; Pv II.81; tuyhaṃ (gen. & dat.) [Sk. tubhyaṃ] Sn 983, 1030; J I.279; PvA 3, 60, 73, etc. - (b) ta°, tay°, taṃ (acc.) M I.487; Sn 31, 241, 1043, 1049; J I.222; II.159; Pv I.101; II.16; tayā (instr.) Sn 335, 344; J I.222; Pv II.36 (=bhotiyā PvA 86): PvA 71; tayi (loc.) Sn 382; J I.207; tava (gen.) Sn 1102, 1110; J II.153; PvA 106. - 2. pl.: tumh° [Sk. yuṣm°]: tumhe (nom. & acc.) It 31; J I.221 (acc.); Pv I.112. Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person J II.102; IV.138; tumhaṃ (gen.) PvA 58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaṃ (gen. dat.) S II.65; It 32; J I.150; II.102; tumhesu (loc.) J I.292 (for sg.); tumhehi (instr.) J II.154; Pv I.512. - II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative "in your interest," therefore also as possessive gen. or as instrumental, or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te D II.127 (dat.); Sn 76, 120, 1099 (dat.), 1102 (dat.); J I.151; II.159 (instr.); Pv I.23 (dat.); II.32 (gen.), 46 (gen.). - 2. pl. vo S III.33 (instr.) Sn 135, 172 (dat.), 331 (dat.); J I. 222 (acc.); II.133; III.395 (gen.). Tuvaṭaṃ {Tuvatam} (adv.) [Sk. tvaritaṃ, cp. tūrta] quickly A V.342; J I.91; II.61; VI.519 (as tvātaṃ); Miln 198; Vism 305, 313. Tuvaṭṭeti {Tuvatteti} (for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with=loc. or abl.) Vin II.10, 124; IV.288. Tuvantuva {Tuvantuva} (nt.) [Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudampati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaṃ] quarrel, strife M I.110, 410. Tussati {Tussati} [Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy] to be satisfied, pleased or happy J III.280; IV.138; Miln 210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana, toseti. Tussana {Tussana} (nt.) [Sk. toṣaṇa] satisfying, pleasing, in °kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight J III.448. Tūṇira {Tunira} =tūṇī, Vism 251. Tūṇī {Tuni} (f.) [Sk. *tūṇa & tūṇ n: see under tulā; cp. Lat. tollo. On ṇ>l. cp. cikkaṇa & cikkhala, guṇa> guḷa, kiṇi>kili, etc.] a quiver (lit. "carrier") J II.403 (dhanuṃ tūṇiñ ca nikkhippa); V.47. Tūla {Tula} (nt.) [Sk. tūla, to *teu, Sk. tavīti, to swell or be bushy, cp. Gr. tu/lh swelling; Ags. pol peg] a tuft of grass, cotton Vin II.150 (3 kinds: rukkha°, latā°, poṭaki°); Sn 591=J IV.127 (vāto tūlaṃ va dhaṃsaye); DA I.87. -picu cotton-wool Vism 282, 285, 404; DhA III.202; KhA 173. puṇṇikā ("stuffed with tuft of cotton") a kind of shoe Vin I.186. Tūlikā {Tulika} (f.) [der. fr. tūla] a mattress (consisting of layers of grass or wool: tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatara-puṇṇa-tūlikā DA I.87) Vin I.192; II.150; D I.7; A I.181. Pāli Text Society 702 Pāli-English Dictionary Tūlinī {Tulini} (f.) [Sk. tūlinī] the silk-cotton tree M I.128. Te° {Te°} [Sk. trai°] secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compn: having a relation to a triad of, three-; in numerical cpds. also=three (see under tayo). -kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila, taṇḍula, mugga Vin I.210; III.66; -cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin I.253; Ud 42; Pug 69; Vism 60. -daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa), Ep. of a brahmin ascetic A III.276; J II.316 (=kuṇḍikaṃ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaṃ gahetvā caranto); -dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements=tiloka Nett 14, 63 (tedhātuke vimutti= sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kvu 605; -piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras & bhikkhus J IV.219; Miln 18 sq.; DhA I.7, 384; III.385; Dāvs V.22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (AvŚ I.334 & Index to Divy); -bhātika having 3 brothers DhA I.88, 97. -bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. °dhātuka & tiloka) DhA I.305; IV.72; DhsA 50, 214 (°kusala), 291; -māsa (nt.) 3 months, i. e. a season M I.438; Miln 15; DhA II.192; PvA 20; -vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa-gata) Vin I.18; -vijja (adj.) possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i. e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i. e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā=the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha & Arahants, as defined at A I.164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i. e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic: D I.238; A I.163; also as tevijjaka (n.) D I.88, 107, 119. - 2. buddhistic: Vin II.161; M I.482; S I.194; A I.167 =It 100; Sn 594=VvA 10; Pug 14; DhA I.138; Sdhp 420. tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism 5. Tekiccha {Tekiccha} (adj.) [der. fr. tikiccha] curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a° incurable, unpardonable VvA 322 (of a sick person); DhA I.25 (id.); Miln 322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin II.202=It 85; M I.393; & sa° pardonable Miln 192, 221, 344. Teja & Tejo {Teja} {Tejo} [Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce=a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp>light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light)=Ags. strael (arrow). - The nt. tejo is the usual form; instr. tejasā (Dh 387; Sn 1097) & tejena (J III.53), cp. tapa & tapo] "sharpness," heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power D II.259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejodhātu); S IV.215; M I.327; Sn 1097 (glory of the sun compd with that of the Buddha); Dh 387 (sabbaṃ ahorattiṃ Buddho tapati tejasā); J III.53 (sīla°); I.93 (puðða° the power of merit); Vbh 426 (id.); Ps I.103; Vism 350 (def.); VvA 116. -kasiṇa fire-contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) D III.268; Dhs 203; Vism 171; DhA II.49; III.214; Bdhd 106; dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viððāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) D III.27, 228, 247; M I.188, 422; A I.176; II.165; Dhs 588, 648, 964; Nett 74; Vism 363. Tejate {Tejate} [Vedic tejate from tij (*stij)=Lat. in-stīgo (to spur), Gr. sti/zw, stikto/s, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken, E. stick] to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc. - See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati, tittaka, teja, etc. Tejana {Tejana} (nt.) [see tejate] the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Th 1, 29; Dh 80, 145; DhA II.147. Pāli Text Society 703 Pāli-English Dictionary Tejavant {Tejavant} (adj.) [tejas+vant] 1. splendid, powerful, majestic DhA I.426. - 2. in flames, heated, burning with (-°) Miln 148. Tejin {Tejin} (adj.-n.) [see teja] having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Sn 1097 (=Nd2 286 tejena samannāgata). Tettiṃsa {Tettimsa} (num.) [tayo+tiṃsa] thirty-three J I.273; DhA I.267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiṃsa. Temana {Temana} (nt.) [from temeti] wetting, moistening Vism 338; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaṃ udake vā temanaṃ); DhA III.420. Temeti {Temeti} [cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim, tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (=tamas), timira] to make wet, to moisten Vin I.47 (temetabba); II.209 (temetvā); DhA I.220, 394 (id.); J I.88≈KhA 164; J II.325 (temento); PvA 46 (sutemitvā for temetvā). Terasa {Terasa} see under tayo. Terovassika {Terovassika} (adj.) [tiro+vassa+ika] lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed S IV.161 (thero vassiko in text)=185 (of wood) M I.58 (of bones). Tela (nt.) [from tila] sesamum-oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela=tilatelādika DA I.93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin I.205, 220, 245, etc.; A I.209, 278 (sappi vā t. vā); II.122≈(tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); J I.293; II.104; Pv IV.148 (tiṇena telaṃ pi na tvaṃ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants); Pug 55; Dhs 646, 740, 815; PvA 80 (kaḷebarānaṃ vasā telað ca: fat or oil in general). - tila °ṃ pātukāma desire to drink tila-wine VvA 54; pāka-tela oil concoction VvA 68=DhA III.311; J II.397 (sata°); III.372 (sahassa° worth a thousand); V.376 (sata° worth a hundred); Qdabbhaðjana° oil for rubbing the feet VvA 44; sāsapa° (mustard seed & oil) PvA 198; sappi° (butter & oil) Sn 295; PvA 278 (also+madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña). -koṭṭhāgāra oil store DhA I.220; -ghaṭa oil jar DA I.144; -cāṭī an oil tank DhA I.220; -dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 435; -nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism 99; DhA II.193 (+udakatumba); -pajjota an oil lamp Vin I.16= D I.85=A I.56=Sn p. 15; -padīpa an oil lamp Vin I.15; S III.126; V.319; VvA 198; -pāka an oil decoction, mixed with spirits, oil-wine Vin I.205; -pilotikā (pl.) rags soaked in oil DhA I.221; makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Miln 11; -miñjaka an oil-cake PvA 51; -vaṇijjā oil trade PvA 47; -homa an oblation of oil D I.9. {Tela} Telaka {Telaka} (nt.)=tela Vin I.204 ("a small quantity of oil"); II.107 (sittha-t. oil of beeswax). Teliya {Teliya} (adj.) oily J III.522. Tevijja {Tevijja} see Vijjā. Pāli Text Society 704 Pāli-English Dictionary Tomara {Tomara} (m. nt.) [Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati] a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant-driver D II.266 (tutta-t. a driving lance); M III.133 (t. hattha); Vism 235; DA I.147. Toya {Toya} (nt.) [Vedic toya from *tāÛ to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan=E. dew, Oir. tām= tabes; also Gr. th/kw, etc.] water (poetical for udaka); only in simile: puṇḍarīkaṃ (or padumaṃ) toyena na upalippati A II.39=Sn 547; Sn 71=213; Th 1, 700; Nd2 287 (t. vuccati udakaṃ); - Bdhd 67, 93. Toraṇa {Torana} (nt.) [Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. tu/rsis, tu/rris=Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. I.47 "regumque turris"=palaces] an arched gateway, portal; Vin II.154; D II.83; Vv 351 (=dvārakoṭṭhaka-pāsādassa nāmaṃ VvA 160); J III.428; Dāvs V.48. Tosana {Tosana} (adj.-n.) [see toseti] satisfying, pleasing; satisfaction Sn 971. Tosāpana {Tosapana} (adj.) [=tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti] pleasing, giving satisfaction J II.249. Toseti {Toseti} [Caus. of tussati] to please, satisfy, make happy Sn 1127 (=Nd2 288); J IV.274; Sdhp 304. - pp. tosita contented, satisfied Sn 1128. Cp. pari°. Tya [Sk. tya°, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. sh/meron to-day, sh_tes in this year] base of demonstr. pron.=ta°, this, that; loc. sg. tyamhi J VI.292; loc. pl. fem. tyāsu J V.368 (Com. tāsu). {Tya} Tyassu {Tyassu} =te assu D II.287, see su3. Tvaṃ {Tvam} see tuvaṃ. Tvātaṃ {Tvatam} see tuvaṭaṃ. Pāli Text Society 705 Pāli-English Dictionary Th Thakana {Thakana} (nt.) [see next] covering, lid; closing up DhA IV.85 (saṃvara+). Thaketi {Thaketi} [Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. ste/gw cover, te/gh roof; Lat. tego, tegula (E.=tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62] to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors & windows) Vin II.134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); IV.54; J IV.4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api-dhā=Gr. e)pi-qh°, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243: h)li/baton pe/trhn e(pe/qhke qu/rhsin the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) V.214; DhA IV.180 (ṭhakesi, v. l. ṭhapesi); VvA 222; PvA 216 (dvārā) Dāvs IV.33; V.25 (chiddaṃ mālāguḷena th.). Thañña {Thanna} (nt.) [see thana] mother's milk Vin II.255=289 (°ṃ pāyeti); A IV.276; J III.165; VI.3 (madhura°) Th 2, 496. Thaṇḍila {Thandila} (nt.) [Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground] bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv IV.75 (=kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa PvA 265). -sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila-śāyikā] S IV.118; Dh 141 (=DhA III.77: bhūmisayana); -seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground D I.167≈(v. l. BB. taṇḍila°) Miln 351; cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā. Thaddha {Thaddha} [pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. a)stemfh/s, stafulh/; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef=E. staff; Ohg. stab. See also khambha & chambheti] 1. lit. hard, rigid, firm J I.293 (opp. muduka); Vism 351 (°lakkhaṇa); PvA 139 (=ujjhangala). - 2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate, callous, selfish D I.118 (māna°); III.45 (+atimānin); A II.26=It 113 (kuha th. lapa); Sn 104 (see gotta°); J I.88 (māna°) II.136; Sdhp 90. (b) slow Miln 103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. II.90). - See thambha & thūṇa. -maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish DhA III.313; VvA 69; PvA 45; -hadaya hard-hearted J III.68. Thana {Thana} [Vedic stana; cp. Gr. sthnion=sth_qos (Hesychius)] 1. the breast of a woman D II.266; J V.205; VI.483; Sdhp 360. - 2. the udder of a cow M I.343=Pug 56; DhA II.67. -mukha the nipple J IV.37. -sita-dāraka [see sita] a child at the breast, a suckling Miln 364=408. Thanaka,{Thanaka} a little breast, the breast of a girl Th 2, 265 (=ThA 212). Thanita {Thanita} (nt.) [pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder=Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.] thundering, thunder J I.470; Th 1, 1108; Miln 377. Thanin {Thanin} (adj.) having breasts, -breasted; in timbaru° Sn 110; J VI.457. - pucimanda° J VI.269. Thaneti {Thaneti} [Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. ste/nw, stena/zw to moan, groan, stonos; Lat. tono; Ags. stunian; Ger. stöhnen] to roar, to thunder D II.262; S I.100, 154 (megho Pāli Text Society 706 Pāli-English Dictionary thanayaṃ), 154 (thaneti devo); It 66 (megho thanayitvā). - pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati. Thapati {Thapati} [Vedic sthapati, to sthā+pati] 1. a builder, master carpenter M I.396=S IV.223; M III.144, - 2. officer, overseer S V.348. Thabbha {Thabbha} is to be read for °tthambha is to be read for °tthambha in para° J IV.313. Thambha {Thambha} [see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. A I.100; M I.324; PvA 186, 187] 1. a pillar, a post Vin I.276; D I.50 (majjhimaṃ °ṃ nissāya); II.85 (id.); Sn 214; Vv 782 (veḷuriya°, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv III.31 (id.); DhA IV.203; VvA 188 (+tulā-gopānasī); PvA 186. - 2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. "verstockt"): thambho ti thaddha-bhāvo SnA 288, 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaṃ kakkhaliyaṃ phāruliyaṃ ujucittatā (an°?) amudutā Vbh 350. - Often combd w. māna (=arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaṃ th. sārambho māno, etc. A I.100, 299=Nd2 under rāga=Miln 289; cp. M I.15. - A III.430 (+māna); IV.350, 465 (+sāṭheyya); Sn 245 (+mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra's combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo); J I.202. - 3. a clump of grass M I.324; cp. thambhaka. Thamhhaka {Thamhhaka} (=thambha 3) a clump of grass VvA 276 (=gumba). Thambhati & Thambheti {Thambhati} {Thambheti} , see upa°, paṭi°. Thambhanā {Thambhana} (f.) [abstr. to thambha] firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs 636=718; Vbh 350. Thambhitatta (nt.) [abstr. to thambha]=thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vbh 350. Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is "fluctuation, unsteadiness, inflation" at Dhs 965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaṃ [?] thambhitattaṃ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vbh 168 (in def. of vicikicchā; v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha. {Thambhitatta} Thambhin {Thambhin} (adj.) obstinate Th 1, 952. Tharaṇa {Tharana} (nt.) [Sk. staraṇa to stṛ] strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa°, bhumma°, ratha°, hattha°, etc. the reading ass-attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (=ā- stṛ). See attharaṇa and cpds. Tharati {Tharati} [Sk. stṛṇoti] only in cpds. ā°, ava°, etc. Tharu {Tharu} [Sk. tsaru] the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword A III.152; J III.221 (=sword); Miln 178; DhA II.249 (°mūla); IV.66 (asi°). - tharusmiṃ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin II.10; Miln 66. -ggaha one who carries a sword-(handle) Miln 331 (dhanuggaha+; not in corresponding list of occupations at D I.51); -sippā training in swordsmanship Ud 31. Pāli Text Society 707 Pāli-English Dictionary Thala1 {Thala} (nt.) [Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. ste/llw, sto/los; Ags. steall (place); also P. thaṇḍila] dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) S IV.179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Sn 30 (SnA 42=ukkūla); Dh 98; It 66=S I.100 (megho thalaṃ ninnað ca pūreti); PvA 29 (=unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dh 34; J I.107, 222; Pv IV.121; PvA 260. As firm, even ground or safe place at D I.234; Sn 946. - Cp. J III.53; IV.142; Vism 185. -gocara living on land J II.159; -ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dh 34 or udakarūha Vv 356=water-plant); referring to plants A I.35; J I.51; Vv 356 (=yodhikādikā VvA 162); Miln 281; -ṭṭha standing on firm ground A II.241; -patha a road by land (opp. jala° by water) J I.121; III.188. Thala2 {Thala} (nt.) [prob. dialect. variant of tharu] the haft of a sword, the scabbard J III.221 (reading uncertain). Thava {Thava} [see thavati] praise, praising, eulogy Nett 161, 188, 192. Thavati {Thavati} [Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. steu_tai] to praise, extol; inf. thutuṃ Sn 217 (=thometuṃ SnA 272). - Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln 361. See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi. Thavikā {Thavika} (f.) [derivation uncertain] a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu's strainer Vin I.209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte+pariss°+th.); J I.55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); VI.67 (pattaṃ thavikāya osāretvā); VvA 40 (patta-thavikato parissāvanaṃ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces J I.54, 195, 506; VvA 33; Anvs 35. See also Vin II.152, 217; Vism. 91. Thāma & Thāmo {Thama} {Thamo} (nt. in instr. thāmasā M I.498; S II.278= Th 1, 1165; III.110, see below) [Vedic sthāman & sthāmas nt., sthā cp. Gr. sth/mwn, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation] "standing power," power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness, vigour, instr. thāmena (Miln 4; PvA 193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J VI.22). Often combd with bala J I.63; Sn 68; with bala+java PvA 4; with bala+ viriya Nd2 289, 651; with java J I.62; VvA 104; with viriya J I.67. - D III.113; S I.78; II.28; V.227; A I.50; II.187 sq.; IV.192. J I.8, 265 (°sampanna); II.158 (id.); Dhs 13, 22; Vism 233 (°mahatta); DhA IV.18; PvA 259. - Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much PvA 193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly M I.257. -gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong J I.83=VI.220. Thāmaka {Thamaka} (adj.) having strength Sn 1144 (dubbala° with failing strength); Nd1 12 (appa°+dubbala). Thāmavant {Thamavant} (adj.) [thāma+vant] strong, steadfast, powerful, persevering S V.197, 225; A II.250; IV.110, 234, 291; V.24; Nd2 131; Vv 51 (=thira balavā VvA 35). Thāra {Thara} see vi°, san°. Thāla {Thala} (nt.) [from thala orig. a flat dish] a plate, dish, vessel D I.74; J I.69; Miln 282. Kaṃsa° a gong Miln 62; Vism 283 (in simile). See also thālī. Pāli Text Society 708 Pāli-English Dictionary Thālaka {Thalaka} (nt.) [thāla+ka] a small bowl, beaker Pv II.18 (thālakassa pānīyaṃ), 119 (id.); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.). Thālikā {Thalika} (f.)=thālakaVin I.203, 240. See āḷhaka°. Thālī {Thali} (f.) (thāli° in cpds.) [Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla] an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in dhovana washing of the dish A I.161 (+sarāva-dhovana); -pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin III.15; D I.97 (=DA I.267); S II.242; V.384; A I.166; J I.186; Miln 249. Thāvara1 {Thavara} (adj.) [Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. stauro/s post, Lat. restauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge] "standing still," immovable (opp. to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: KhA 245) DhA IV.176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e. g. Sn 394 ("sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke"); It 32 (tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā). See tasa for ref. Thāvara2 {Thavara} (nt.) [from thavira=thera, old] old age PvA 149 (thāvari-jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā-jiṇṇa. Should we read thāvira-jiṇṇa?). Thāvariya {Thavariya} (nt.) [fr. thāvara] immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada° an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expld at DA I.250 as "janapadesu dhuvabhāvaṃ thāvarabhāvaṃ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ." D I.88; II.16, 146, 169; S I.100; Sn p. 106; It 15. Thāvareyya {Thavareyya} (nt.) [from thāvara2] the rank of a Thera. A I.38; II.23. This has nothing to do with seniority. It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera. Thāsotu°{Thasotu°} in thāsotujana savana at ThA 61 according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana°. Thika {Thika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva] dropping, forming drops: madhutthika J III.493; VI.529 (=madhuṃ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530) "dropping honey." Thiṇṇa {Thinna} pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi°, vi°. Thira {Thira} (adj.) [Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā) to stand out=to be stiff; cp. Gr. stereo/s; Lat. sterilis (sterile=hardened, cp. Sk. starī); Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat. strenuus] solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful J I.220; IV.106 (=daḷha); Miln 194 (thir-āthira-bhāva strength or weakness); VvA 212 (id.), 35 (=thāmavant); Sdhp 321. Thiratā {Thirata} (f.) [fr. thira] steadfastness, stability DhA IV.176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira°). Pāli Text Society 709 Pāli-English Dictionary Thī {Thi} (f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi] a woman J I.295, 300; V.296 (thī-pura), 397; VI.238. Thīna {Thina} (nt.) [Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; steiā (cp. also thira)=Gr. ste/as grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless)=P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth. etc. stains=E. stone; Gr. sti_fos (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf=E. stiff] stiffness, obduracy, stolidity, indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below). Def. as cittassa akammaððatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (=immobility) at Nd2 290=Dhs 1156, 1236=Nett 86; as citta-gelaññaṃ morbid state of mind ("psychosis") at DA I.211. - Sn 942 (niddaṃ tandiṃ sahe thīnaṃ pamādena na saṃvase), 1106; Vbh 352 (=Nd2 290 as expln of līnatta); Vism 262 (°sineha, where p. 361 reads patthinna°). -middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni (Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin II.200 (vigata°); D I.71, 246; III.49, 234, 269, 278; S I.99; III.106; V.277 sq.; A III.69 sq.; 421; Sn 437 (paðcamī senā Mārassa); It 27, 120; Ps. I.31, 45, 162; II.12, 169, 179, 228; Pug 68; Dhs 1154, 1486; Vism 469; Sdhp 459. Thīyati {Thiyati} see patiṭṭhīyati. Thīyanā {Thiyana} (f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations from thīna]=thīna, in exegesis at Nd2 290≈(see thīna); Vbh 352. Thuta {Thuta} [cp. pp. of thavati] praised DhsA 198; J IV.101 (sada°=sadā thuto niccapasattho); Miln 278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha). Thuti {Thuti} (f.) [cp. thavati] praise J IV.443 (thutiṃ karoti); VvA 158. Thunati {Thunati} [see thaneti] 1. to moan, groan, roar S V.148 (thunaṃ ppr.; v. l. thanaṃ); Vv 521 (of beings in Niraya, otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). - 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati) Sn 884. Thulla {Thulla} see thūla. Thusa {Thusa} (nt.) [Vedic tuṣa (m.)] husk of grain, chaff A I.242 (together w. other qualities of corn); J IV.8; Vism 346.- athusa D III.199. -aggi a fire of husks Nett 23; -odaka gruel (=sabbasambhārehi kataṃ sovīrakaṃ Pug A 232) D I.166= A I.295=Pug 55; -pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw-bird J I.242; -piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin II.151; -rāsi a heap of h. DhA I.309; homa an oblation of h. D I.9 (=DA I.93; v. l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma D I.9). Thūṇā {Thuna} (f.) [Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (=thūrā, on r: ṇ=l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr. stauro/s (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again); Gr. stu_los pillar, "style"; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran=E. steer, Ger. steuer] a pillar, prop, support A II.198; Vv 541 (=thambha VvA 245); DA I.124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta "lead to sacrifice" (yūpa-sankhātuṃ thūṇaṃ upa° DA I.294): D I.127≈S I.76≈DhA II.7; J III.45. kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum D I.6 etc. (see kumbha, where also kumbha -thūṇika Vin IV.285). - eka-thūṇaka with one support J IV.79. Pāli Text Society 710 Pāli-English Dictionary Thūṇira {Thunira} [der. fr. thūṇā] house-top, gable Th 1, 184 (=kanṇikā Com.). Thūpa {Thupa} [Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. stu/pos (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati] a stupa or tope, a bell-shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha=dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin IV.308; J III.156 (mattika°)=Pv I.84; in special as tope: D II.142, 161, 164 sq.; A I.77; M II.244; J V.39 (rajata°); VvA 156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaṃ kanaka°); Ud 8; Pv III.105. Four people are thūpārahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka, a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin D II.143= A II.245. - At Dpvs VI.65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaṃ. Thūpika {Thupika} (adj.) [from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound] having domed roofs ("house-tops") J VI.116 (of a Vimāna=dvādasayojanika maṇimayakaðcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaṃ vimānaṃ, expld as paðcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataṃ). Thūpikata {Thupikata} (adj.) [thūpa+kata] "made a heap," heaped of an alms-bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin IV.191. Thūla (a) & Thulla (b) {Thula} {Thulla} (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) [Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick); Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull=strong, bulky); Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā. To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla] compact, massive; coarse, gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined, rough D I.223; Sn 146 (aṇuka°), 633 (id.); Dh 31, 265, 409; J I.196 (b); Dhs 617; KhA 246; PvA 73, 74 (of a cloak); VvA 103; Sdhp 101, 346. - thullāni gajjati to speak rough words J I.226 (=pharusavacanāni vadati). -anga (adj.) heavy-limbed J I.420; -accaya a grave offence Vin I.133, 167, 216; II.110, 170 etc.; Vism 22. -kacchā thick scurf Vin I.202; -kumārī (Vin. V.129) & kumārikā a stout, fat girl J III.147; IV.220 (Com. paðcakāmaguṇika-rāgena thūlatāya thullak° ti vuccati); Vism 17. -phusitaka (deva) (the raingod, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DA I.45) S III.141; V.396; A I.243; II.140 (a); V.114 sq.; DhA III.243; -vajja a grave sin Vin II.87 (a); M II.250; -vattha a coarse garment J V.383; -sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent J I.420; IV.220 (opp. kisa thin); -sāṭaka coarse cloth DhA I.393 (a). Thūlatā {Thulata} (f.) [abstr. to thūla] coarseness, roughness, vileness J IV.220. Theta {Theta} (adj.) [Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7=sthātṛ] firm, reliable, trustworthy, true D I.4 (DA I.73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita-katho ti attho); M I.179; S IV.384; A II.209=Pug 57; Nd2 623. abl. thetato in truth S III.112. - attheta J IV.57 (=athira). Thena {Thena} [Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr. tu_ta/w to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning "conceal"] a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly D I.4; DA I.72. f. athenī A III.38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin II.256 (see k.). Thenaka {Thenaka} [=prec.] a thief J VI.115. Theneti {Theneti} [Denom. fr. thena] to steal, to conceal J IV.114; DhA I.80. Pāli Text Society 711 Pāli-English Dictionary Theyya {Theyya} (nt.) [Vedic steya] theft Vin I.96; A I.129; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati); 242, 967 (°ṃ na kareyya); Vv 158 (: theyyaṃ vuccati thenabhāvo VvA 72); Miln 264, 265; Vism 43 (°paribhoga); DA I.71; Sdhp 55, 61. -citta intending to steal Vin III.58; -saṃvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll. by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin I.86, 135, 168, 320; V.222; Miln 310; -sankhātaṃ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily D III.65 sq., 133; A III.209; IV.370 sq.; V.264. Thera {Thera} [Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then "old=venerable"; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc. from num. sem "one"=one year old, i. e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus=Gr. e)/tos, year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran, old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheÛā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, "strong= venerable"] t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha's community. - (a) (adj.) senior, Vin I.47, 290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th. bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187; II.16, 212. Therānutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished, thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at D I.78. - See also A II.23, 147, 168; V.201, 348; D III.123 sq., 218; Dh 260, 261. In Sangha-thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished. Vin II.212, 303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv IV.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi.; J V.456. At A II.22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom. It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera -high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Anguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior-that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Sangha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function. - Note. thera in thero vassiko at S IV.161 is to be read terovassiko. -gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, N. of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka-Nikāya. Theratara, very senior, oppd to navatara, novice D II.154. -vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine M I.164; Dpvs IV.6, 13. Theraka {Theraka} (adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni D II.354 (vv. ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). Therī & Therikā {Theri} {Therika} (f.) [see thera] 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā M Vastu III.283) Pv II.116 (=thāvarijiṇṇā PvA 149). - 2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Th 2, 1; Dpvs xviii. 11. -gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q. v.). Theva {Theva} (m.?) [see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. stoibh/ & Lat. stīria, both= drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70) fr. stip] a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase: cīvaraṃ . . . na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaṃ Vin I.50, 53=II.227, 230; J VI.530 (madhu-ttheva a drop of honey). Thevati {Thevati} [fr. theva; orig. "to be congealed or thick"] to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) J VI.529 (=virocati p. 530). 712 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Thoka {Thoka} (adj.) [for etymology see under thīna] little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. A IV.10; J VI.366; PvA 12 (kāla): nt. thokaṃ as adv.=a little J I.220; II.103, 159; V.198; PvA 13, 38, 43. - thokaṃ thokaṃ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dh 121, 239; Miln 9; SnA 18; PvA 168. Thokaka {Thokaka} (adj.)=thoka; fem. thokikā Dh 310. Thoma {Thoma} [Vedic stoma a hymn of praise] praise. Thomana {Thomana} (nt.) & Thomanā {Thomana} (f.) [see thavati] praising, praise, laudation J I.220 (=pasaṃsa); Pug 53; PvA 27. Thometi {Thometi} [denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati] to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) D I.240; Sn 679, 1046; Nd2 291; J VI.337; SnA 272 (=thutuṃ); VvA 102; PvA 196. - pp. thomita J I.9. Pāli Text Society 713 Pāli-English Dictionary D —D—{D} euphonic consonant inserted to avoid hiatus: (a) orig. only sandhi-cons. in forms ending in t & d (like tāvat, kocid, etc.) & thus restored in cpds. where the simplex has lost it; (b) then also transferred to & replacing other sandhi-cons. (like puna-d-eva for punar eva). (a) dvipa-d-uttama Sn 995; koci-d-eva PvA 153; kincid-eva ibid. 70; tāva-d-eva ib. 74; yāva-datthaṃ ib. 217; ahu-d-eva Miln 22 etc. - (b) puna-d-eva Pv II.113 (v. l. BB); DhA II.76; samma-deva Sn p. 16; VvA 148; PvA 66 etc.; cp. SnA 284. bahu-d-eva J I.170. —Da {Da} (adj.) [Suffix of dā, see dadāti] giving, bestowing, presenting, only -°, as anna°, bala°, vaṇṇa°, sukha°, Sn 297; vara° Sn 234; kāma° J VI.498; Pv II.138; ambu° giving water, i. e. a cloud Dāvs V.32; amatamagga° Sdhp 1; uḷāraphala° ib. 26; maṃsa° Pgdp 49, etc. Daṃsaka {Damsaka} : see vi°. Daṃseti {Damseti} (for dasseti): see upa°; pavi°, vi°. Daka {Daka} (nt.) [=udaka, aphæretic from combns like sītodaka which was taken for sīto+daka instead of sīt' odaka] Vin III.112; S III.85; A II.33=Nd2 420 B3 (: the latter has udaka, but Nd1 14 daka). -āsaya (adj.) (beings) living in water A II.33≈; -ja (adj.) sprung from water, aquatic J I.18 (thalajā d pupphā); -rakkhasa a water-sprite J I.127, 170; VI.469. Dakkha1 {Dakkha} (adj.) [Vedic dakṣa=Gr. a)ri-dei/ketos & decio/s; dakṣati to be able; to please, satisfy, cp. daśasyati to honour, Denom. fr. *dasa=Lat. decus honour, skill. All to *dek in Lat. decet to be fit, proper, etc. On var. theories of connections of root see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under decet. It may be that *deks is an intens. formation fr. *diś to point (see disati), then the original meaning would be "pointing," i. e. the hand used for pointing. For further etym. see dakkhiṇa] dexterous, skilled, handy, able, clever D I.45, 74, 78; III.190 (+analasa) M I.119; III.2; S I.65; Nd2 141 (+analasa & sampajāna); J III.247; DA I.217 (=cheka); Miln 344 (rūpadakkhā those who are of "fit" appearance). Dakkha2 {Dakkha} (nt.) [dakkha1+ya, see dakkheyya] dexterity, ability, skill J III.466. Dakkhati & Dakkhiti {Dakkhati} {Dakkhiti} see dassati. Dakkhiṇa {Dakkhina} (adj.) [Vedic dakṣiṇ ; adj. formation fr. adv. *deksi=*deksinos, cp. purāṇa fr. purā, viṣuṇa fr. viṣu, Lat. bīni (=bisni) fr. bis. From same root *deks are Lat. dexter (with compar.-antithetic suffix ter=Sk. tara, as in uttara) & Gr. decitero/s; cp. also Goth. taihswa (right hand), Ohg. zeso & zesawa. See dakkha for further connections] 1. right (opp. vāma left), with a tinge of the auspicious, lucky & prominent: Vin II.195 (hattha); PvA 112, 132 (id.); Ps I.125. hattha, pāda, etc. with ref. to a Tathāgata's body); J I.50 (°passa the right side); PvA 178 (id.), 112 (°bāhu); Sn p. 106 (bāha); PvA 179 (°jānumaṇḍalena with the right knee: in veneration). - 2. skilled, welltrained (=dakkha) J VI.512 (Com. susikkhita). - 3. (of that point of the compass which is characterized through "orientation" by facing the rising sun, & then lies on one's right:) southern, usually in combn with disā (direction): D III.180 (one of the 6 points, see disā), 188 sq. (id.); M I.487; II.72; S I.145, etc. -āvattaka (adj.) winding Pāli Text Society 714 Pāli-English Dictionary to the right D II.18 (of the hairs of a Mahāpurisa, the 14th of his characteristics or auspicious signs; cp. BSk. dakṣiṇāvarta a precious shell, i. e. a shell the spiral of which turns to the right AvŚ I.205; Divy 51, 67, 116); J V.380; -janapada the southern country the "Dekkan" (=dakkhiṇaṃ) D I.96, 153 (expld by Bdhgh as "Gangāya dakkhiṇato pākaṭa-janapado" DA I.265); -samudda the southern sea J I.202. Dakkhiṇā {Dakkhina} (f.) [Vedic dakṣiṇā to dakṣ as in daśasyati to honour, to consecrate, but taken as f. of dakkhiṇa & by grammarians expl. as gift by the "giving" (i. e. the right) hand with popular analogy to dā to give (dadāti)] a gift, a fee, a donation; a donation given to a "holy" person with ref. to unhappy beings in the Peta existence ("Manes"), intended to induce the alleviation of their sufferings; an intercessional, expiatory offering, "don attributif" (Feer) (see Stede, Peta Vatthu, etc. p. 51 sq.; Feer Index to AvŚ p. 480) D I.51=III.66 (d.-uddhaggikā), cp. A II.68 (uddhaggā d.); A III.43, 46, 178, 259; IV.64 sq., 394; M III.254 sq. (cuddasa pāṭipuggalikā d. given to 14 kinds of worthy recipients) Sn 482, 485; It 19; J I.228; Pv I.44 (=dāna PvA 18), I.59 (petānaṃ d °ṃ dajjā), IV.151; Miln 257; Vism 220; PvA 29, 50, 70, 110 (pūjito dakkhiṇāya). guru-d. teacher's fee VvA 229, 230; dakkhiṇaṃ ādisati (otherwise uddisati) to designate a gift to a particular person (with dat.) Vin I.229=D II.88. -āraha a worthy recipient of a dedicatory gift Pv II.86; -odaka water to wash in (orig. water of dedication, consecrated water) J I.118; IV.370; DhA I.112; PvA 23; -visuddhi. purity of a gift M III.256 sq.=A II.80 sq.=D III.231, cp. Kvu 556 sq. Dakkhiṇeyya {Dakkhineyya} (adj.-n.) [grd.-formation fr. dakkhiṇā as from a verb *dakṣiṇāti=pūjeti] one worthy of a dakkiṇā. The term is expl. at KhA 183, & also (with ref. to brahmanic usage) at Nd2 291; - S I.142, 168, 220; M I.37, 236 sq.; 446; A I.63, 150; II.44; III.134, 162, 248; IV.13 sq.; D III.5; It 19 (annað ca datvā bahuno dakkhiṇeyyesu dakkhiṇaṃ . . . saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); Sn 227, 448 sq., 504, 529; Nd2 291 (as one of the 3 constituents of a successful sacrifice, viz. yañña the gift, phala the fruit of the gift, d. the recipient of the gift). Cp. I.105 (where also adj. to be given, of dāna). Pv IV.133; VvA 120, 155 (Ep. of the Sangha= ujubhūta); PvA 25, 125, 128, 262. -aggi the (holy) fire of a good receiver of gifts; a metaphor taken from the brahmanic rite of sacrifice, as one of the 7 fires (=duties) to be kept up (or discarded) by a follower of the Buddha A IV.41, 45; D III.217; -khetta the fruitful soil of a worthy recipient of a gift PvA 92; puggala an individual deserving a donation J I.228; there are 7 kinds enumd at D III.253; 8 kinds at D III.255; -sampatti the blessing of finding a worthy object for a dakkhiṇā PvA 27, 137 sq. Dakkhiṇeyyatā {Dakkhineyyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] the fact of being a dakkhiṇeyya Miln 240 (a°). Dakkhita [Vedic dīkṣita pp. of dīkṣ, Intens to daśayati: see dakkha1] consecrated, dedicated J V.138. Cp. dikkhita. {Dakkhita} Dakkhin {Dakkhin} (adj.) [fr. dakkhati, see dassati] seeing, perceiving; f. °ī in atīra-dakkhiṇī nāvā a ship out of sight of land D I.222. Dakkheyya (nt.) [cp. dakkha2] cleverness, skill J II.237 (Com. kusalassa-ðāṇasampayuttaṃ viriyaṃ); III.468. {Dakkheyya} Daṭṭha {Dattha} [pp. of daśati, see ḍasati] bitten J I.7; Miln 302; PvA 144. Pāli Text Society 715 Pāli-English Dictionary Daṭṭhar {Datthar} [n. ag. to dassati] one who sees A II.25. Daṭṭhā {Dattha} (f.) [cp. dāṭhā] a large tooth, tusk, fang Miln 150 (°visa). Daḍḍha {Daddha} [Sk. dagdha, pp. of dahati, see ḍahati] burnt, always with aggi° consumed by fire Sn 62; Pv I.74; Miln 47; PvA 56 (indaggi°). -ṭṭhāna a place burnt by fire J I.212; also a place of cremation (sarīrassa d.) PvA 163 (=āḷāhana). Daḍḍhi {Daddhi} ° [not with Trenckner, Notes p. 65=Sk. dārḍhya, but with Kern, Toev. 113=Sk. dṛḍhī (from dṛḍha, see daḷha), as in compn dṛḍhī karoti & bhavati to make or become strong] making firm, strengthening, in kayādaḍḍhi-bahula strengthened by gymnastics, an athlete J III.310 (v. l. daḷhi°), IV.219 (v. l. distorted kādaḷiphahuna). Daṇḍa {Danda} [Vedic daṇḍa, dial.=*dal[d]ra; (on ṇ: l cp. guṇa: guḷa etc.) to *del as in Sk. dala, dalati. Cp. Lat. dolare to cut, split, work in wood; delere to destroy; Gr. Qai/dalon work of art; Mhg. zelge twig; zol a stick. Possibly also fr. *dan[d]ra (r=l freq., ṇ: l as tulā: tūṇa; veṇu: veḷu, etc. cp. aṇḍa, caṇḍa), then it would equal Gr. de/ndron tree, wood, & be connected with Sk. dāru] 1. stem of a tree, wood, wood worked into something, e. g. a handle, etc. J II.102; 405 (v. l. dabba); Vism 313; PvA 220 (nimbarukkhassa daṇḍena [v. l. dabbena] katasūla). tidaṇḍa a tripod. - 2. a stick, staff, rod, to lean on, & as support in walking; the walking-stick of a Wanderer Vin II.132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇḍena āhiṇḍituṃ), 196; S I.176; A I.138, 206; Sn 688 (suvaṇṇa°); J III.395; V.47 (loha°); Sdhp 399 (eka°, °dvaya, ti°). daṇḍaṃ olubbha leaning on the st. M I.108; A III.298; Th 2, 27. - 3. a stick as means of punishment. a blow, a thrashing: daṇḍehi aññamaññaṃ upakkamanti "they go for each other with sticks" M I.86=Nd2 199; °ṃ dadāti to give a thrashing J IV.382; V.442; daṇḍena pahāraṃ dadāti to hit with a stick S IV.62; brahma° a certain kind of punishment D II.154, cp. Vin II.290 & Kern, Manual p. 87; paðca satāni daṇḍo a fine of 500 pieces Vin I.247; paṇīta° receiving ample p. Pv IV.166; purisa-vadha° J II.417; rājadaṇḍaṃ karoti (c. loc.) to execute the royal beating PvA 216. See also Dh 129, 131, 310, 405 - 4. a stick as a weapon in general, only in cert. phrases & usually in combn w. sattha, sword. daṇḍaṃ ādiyati to take up the stick, to use violence: attadaṇḍa (atta=ā-dā) violent Sn 935; attadaṇḍesu nibbuta Dh 406=Sn 630; a.+kodhābhibhūta S IV.117: ādinna-daṇḍa ādinnasattha Vin I.349; opp. daṇḍaṃ nidahati to lay down the stick, to be peaceful: sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ Sn 35, 394, 629; nihita-d. nihita-sattha using neither stick nor sword, of the Dhamma D I.4, 63; M I.287; A I.211; II.208; IV.249; V.204. daṇḍaṃ nikkhipati id. A I.206. d.sattha parāmasana Nd2 576. daṇḍa-sattha-abbhukkirana & daṇḍa-sattha-abhinipātana Nd2 5764. Cp. paṭidaṇḍa retribution Dh 133. - 5. (fig.) a means of frightening, frightfulness, violence, teasing. In this meaning used as nt. as M I.372; tīṇi daṇḍāni pāpassa kammassa kiriyāya: kāyadaṇḍaṃ vacī°, mano°; in the same sense as m. at Nd2 293 (as expld to Sn 35). - 6. a fine, a penalty, penance in general: daṇḍena nikkiṇāti to redeem w. a penalty J VI.576 (dhanaṃ datvā Com.); daṇḍaṃ dhāreti to inflict a fine Miln 171, 193; daṇḍaṃ paṇeti id. Dh 310 (cp. DhA III.482); DhA II.71; aṭṭha-kahāpaṇo daṇḍo a fine of 8 k. VvA 76. - adaṇḍa without a stick, i. e. without force or violence, usually in phrase adaṇḍena asatthena (see above 4): Vin II.196 (ad. as. nāgo danto mahesinā; thus of a Cakkavattin who rules the world peacefully: paṭhaviṃ ad. as. dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasati D I.89=A IV.89, 105, or dhammenamanusāsati Sn 1002=S I.236. -ābhighata slaying w. cudgels PvA 58; -āraha (adj.) deserving punishment J V.442; VvA 23; -ādāna taking up a stick (weapon) (cp. above 4), combd with satth' ādāna M I.110, 113, 410; D III.92, 93, 289; A IV.400; Vism 326. -kaṭhina k. cloth stretched on a stick (for the purpose of measuring) Vin II.116; -kathālikā a large kettle with a handle Pāli Text Society 716 Pāli-English Dictionary Vin I.286; -kamma punishment by beating, penalty, penance, atonement J III.276, 527; V.89; Miln 8; °ṃ karoti to punish, to inflict a fine Vin I.75, 76, 84; II.262; -koṭi the tip of a branch or stick DhA I.60; -dīpikā a torch J VI.398; Vism 39; DhA I.220, 399; -ppatta liable to punishment Miln 46; -paduma N. of a plant (cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala=sahadevā, Halāyudha) J I.51; -parāyana supported by or leaning on a stick (of old people) M I.88; A I.138; Miln 282; -parissāvana a strainer with a handle Vin II.119; -pahāra a blow with a stick D I.144; -pāṇin carrying a staff, "staff in hand" M I.108; -bali (-ādi) fines & taxes, etc. DhA I.251; -bhaya fear of punishment A II.121 sq.=Nd2 470=Miln 196; -(m)antara among the sticks D I.166=A I.295=II.206=M I.77, 238, 307, 342= Pug 55; see note at Dial. I.228; -yuddha a club-fight D I.6; J III.541; -lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from sticks D I.9; -vākarā a net on a stick, as a snare, M I.153; -veḷupesikā a bamboo stick J IV.382; -sikkā a rope slung round the walking-staff Vin II.131; -hattha with a stick in his hand J I.59. Daṇḍaka {Dandaka} [Demin. of daṇḍa] 1. a (small) stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; a handle D I.7 (a walking stick carried for ornament: see DA I.89); J I.120 (sukkha° a dry twig); II.103; III.26; DhA III.171; Vism 353. - aḍḍha° a (birch) rod, used as a means of beating (tāḷeti) A I.47; II.122=M I.87=Nd2 604=Miln 197; ubhato° two handled (of a saw) M I.129=189; ratha° the flag-staff of a chariot Miln 27; veṇu° a jungle rope J III.204. - See also kudaṇḍaka a twig used for tying J III.204. - 2. the crossbar or bridge of a lute J II.252, 253. -dīpikā a torch J I.31; -madhu "honey in a branch," a beehive DhA I.59. Daṇḍaniya {Dandaniya} (adj.) [grd. formation from daṇḍa] liable to punishment Miln 186. Datta1 {Datta} [pp. of dadāti] given (-° by; often in Np. as Brahmadatta, Deva-datta=Theo-dor. etc.) Sn 217 (para°) =SnA 272 (v. l. dinna). Datta2 {Datta} (adj.-n.) [prob.=thaddha, with popular analogy to datta1, see also dandha & cp. dattu] stupid; a silly fellow M I.383; J VI.192 (Com.: dandha lāḷaka). Datti {Datti} (f.) [from dadāti+ti] gift, donation, offering D I.166; M I.78, 342; A I.295; II.206; Pug 55. Dattika (adj.) [der. fr. datta] given; J III.221 (kula°); IV.146 (id.); nt. a gift D I.103 (=dinnaka DA I.271). {Dattika} Dattiya {Dattiya} =dattika, given as a present J II.119 (kula°); V.281 (sakka°); VI.21 (id.): VvA 185 (mahārāja° by the King). Dattu {Dattu} (adj.?) [is it base of n. ag. dātar? see datta2] stupid, in d°-paññatta a doctrine of fools D I.55=M I.515; J IV.338. Dada {Dada} (-°) (adj.-suff.) [Sk.° dad or °dada, cp °da & dadāti base 3] giving, to be given S I.33 (paððā°); Kh VIII.10 (kāma°); Pv II.91 (id.=dāyaka PvA 113); II.124 (phala° =dāyin PvA 157); VvA 171 (puriṃ°). - duddada hard to give S I.19=IV.65=J II.86=VI.571. Dadāti {Dadati} [Redupl. formation dā as in Lat. do, perf. de- s dowry, Gr. dw/s; Ohg. dati; Lith. důti to give] to give, etc. I. Forms. The foll. bases form the Pāli verb- Pāli Text Society 717 Pāli-English Dictionary system: dā, dāy, dadā & di.-1. Bases dā & (reduced) da. - (a) dā°: fut. dassati J I.113, 279; III.83; A III.37; 1st sg. dassāmi J I.223; II.160; PvA 17, 35, etc. - dammi interpreted by Com. as fut. is in reality a contraction fr. dātuṃ īhāmi, used as a hortative or dubitative subjunctive (fr. dāhāmi, like kāhami I am willing to do fr. kātuṃ īhāmi) Sn p. 15 ("shall I give"); II.112; IV.10 (varaṃ te dammi); Pv I.103; II.324 (kin t'āhaṃ dammi what can I give thee=dassāmi PvA 88). pret. adā Sn 303; Pv II.28 (=adāsi PvA 81); Mhvs VII.14; 2nd sg. ado J IV.10 (=adāsi Com.): Miln 384; 1st. pl. adamha J II.71; Miln 10; 2nd pl. adattha J I.57 (mā ad.); Miln 10, & dattha J II.181; aor. adāsi J I.150, 279; PvA 73, etc.; pl. adaṃsu Pv I.116. - inf. dātuṃ J III.53; PvA 17, 48 (°kāma), etc. & dātave Sn 286. - grd. dātabba J III.52; PvA 7, 26, 88, etc. - (b) da°: pp. datta -ger. datvā J I.152, 290 (a°); PvA 70, 72, etc. & datvāna Pv I.113; also as °dā (for °dāya or °dāna) in prep. cpds., like an-upādā, ādā, etc. Der. fr. 1. are Caus. dāpeti, pp. dāpita; n. ag. dātar; nt. dāna. See also suffix dā,° datti, dattikā, etc.; and pp. atta (=ā-d[a]ta). - 2. Bases dāy & (reduced) day, contracted into de. (a) dāy°: only in der. dāya, dāyaka, dāyin and in prep. cpds. ā-dāye (ger. of ādāti). - (b) de°: pres. ind. deti Sn 130; J II.111, 154; PvA 8; 1st sg. demi J I.228, 307; 2nd desi J I.279; PvA 39. 1st pl. dema J I.263; III.126; PvA 27, 75 (shall we give); 2nd detha J III.127; 3rd denti Sn 244. - imper. dehi Vin I.17; J I.223; IV.101; PvA 43, 73; 3rd sgQ detu J I.263; II.104; 2nd pl. detha It 66 J III.126; PvA 29, 62, 76. - ppr. dento J I.265; PvA 3, 11 etc. - grd. deyya Mhvs VII.31. BtSk. deya. - Other der. fr. base 2 are dayati & dayā (q. v.). - 3. Base dadā: pres. ind. dadāti S I.18; Sn p. 87; 1st. sg. dadāmi J I.207; Sn 421; 3rd. pl. dadanti J III.220; Dh 249. - imper. dadāhi Pv II.14. - pot. dadeyya PvA 17; Miln 28 & dade Pv II.322; Vv 625; 1st. sg. dadeyyaṃ J I.254, 265; 2nd. sg. dadeyyāsi J III.276. Also contracted forms dajjā S I.18 (may he give); Dh 224; Pv I.41 (=dadeyya PvA 17); II.940; 1st sg. dajjaṃ Vin I.232 (dajjāhaṃ=dajjaṃ ahaṃ). Cp. I.109 (dajjāhaṃ); J IV.101 (=dammi Com.); Pv II.945; 2nd. pl. dajjeyyātha Vin I.232; 3rd y. dajjeyya & 3rd. pl. dajjuṃ in cpd. anupa°. - ppr. dadanto Sn p. 87. gen. etc. dadato It. 89; Dh 242; Pv II.942; & dadaṃ Sn 187, 487; Pv II.942; Vv 676. - ppr. med. dadamāna J I.228, II.154; PvA 129. - aor. adadaṃ Vv 3411 (=adāsiṃ VvA 151); proh. 2nd. pl. mā dadiṭṭha DhA I.396; J III.171. - ger. daditvā Pv II.89.II (v. l. BB datvā): contr. into dajjā (should be read dajja) Pv II.967 (=datvā PvA 139). - Der. dada for °da. - 4. (Passive) base di (& dī): pp. dinna pres. dīyati S I.18; Th 2, 475; PvA 26, & diyyati VvA 75; cp. ādiyati; pret. dīyittha DhA I.395; - ppr. dīyamāna PvA 8, 26, 49, 110, 133, etc. - Der. fr. 4 are Desid. dicchati, diti, etc. - II. Meanings I. (trs.) with acc. to give, to present with: dānaṃ deti (w. dat. & abs.) to be liberal (towards), to be munificent, to make a present S I.18; It 89; Pv I.41; II3; PvA 8, 27, etc. - (fig.) okāsaṃ to give opportunity, allow J I.265; ovādaṃ to give advice PvA 11; jīvitaṃ to spare one's life J II.154; paṭivacanaṃ to answer J I.279; sādhukāraṃ to applaud J I.223; paṭiññaṃ to promise PvA 76; - to offer, to allow: maggaṃ i. e. to make room Vin II.221; J II.4; maggaṃ dehi let me pass J IV.101; - to grant: varaṃ a wish J IV.10; Pv II.940; - to give or deal out: daṇḍaṃ a thrashing J IV.382; pahāraṃ a blow S IV.62. - 2. with ger. to give out, to hand over: dārūni āharitvā aggiṃ katvā d. to provide with fire J II.102; sāṭake āharitvā to present w. clothes J I.265; dve koṭṭhāse vibhajitvā d. to deal out J I.226; kuṭikāyo kāretvā adaṃsu had huts built & gave them PvA 42. - 3. (abs.) with inf. to permit, to allow: khādituṃ J I.223; nikkhamituṃ J II.154; pavisituṃ J I.263, etc. Daddabha {Daddabha} [onomatop.] a heavy, indistinct noise, a thud J III.76 (of the falling of a large fruit), v. l. duddabhayasadda to be regarded as a Sk. gloss=dundubhyaśabda. See also dabhakka. Daddabhāyati {Daddabhayati} [Denom. fr. prec.] to make a heavy noise, to thud J III.77. Pāli Text Society 718 Pāli-English Dictionary Daddara1 {Daddara} [onomat. from the noise, cp. next & cakora, with note on gala] partridge J III.541. Daddara2 {Daddara} [cp. Sk. dardara] a cert. (grinding, crashing) noise A IV.171; J II.8; III.461; N. of a mountain, expld as named after this noise J II.8; III.16, 461. Daddaḷhati {Daddalhati} [Sk. jājvalyati, Intens. of jval, see jalati] to blaze, to shine brilliantly; only in pp. med. daddaḷhamāna resplendent, blazing forth S I.127=J I.469; Vv 173; 341; Pv II.126; III.35; VvA 89 (ativiya vijjotamāna); PvA 157 (at. virocamāna), 189 (at. abhijalanto). - Spelling daddallamāna at J V.402; VI.118. Daddu {Daddu} (nt.) [Sk. dadru f. & dardru a kind of leprosy, dadruna leprous (but given by Halāyudha in the meaning of ringworm, p. 234 Aufrecht); fr. *der in Sk. dṛṇāti to tear, chap, split (see dara & dala); cp. Lat. derbiosus; Ohg. zittaroh; Ags. teter] a kind of cutaneous eruption Miln 298; Vism 345. -bandhana in d.-bandhanādi-bandhana at ThA 241 should be read daṇḍa°. Daddula1 {Daddula} a cert. kind of rice D I.166; M I.78, 343; A I.241, 295; II.206; Pug 55. Daddula2 (nt.) [Sk. dārdura?] in nahāru° (v. l. dala & dadalla) both at M I.188 (kukkuṭapattena pi. n-daddulena pi aggiṃ gavesanti) & A IV.47 (kukkuṭapattaṃ vā ndaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ paṭilīyati) unexplained; perhaps a muscle. {Daddula} Dadhi {Dadhi} (nt.) [Sk. dadhi, redpl. formation fr. dhayati to suck. Cp. also dhenu cow, dhīta, etc.] sour milk, curds, junket Vin I.244 (in enumn of 5-fold cow-produce, cp. gorasa); D I.201 (id.); M I.316; A II.95; J II.102; IV.140; Miln 41, 48, 63; Dhs 646, 740, 875; Vism 264, 362. -ghaṭa a milk bowl J II.102; -maṇḍaka whey S II.111; -māla "the milk sea," N. of an ocean J IV.140; vāraka a pot of milk-curds J III.52. Danta1 {Danta} [Sk. danta fr. acc. dantaṃ of dan, gen. datah= Lat. dentis. Cp. Av. dantan, Gr. o)do/nta, Lat. dent ot (=tooth) & tusc (=tusk); orig. ppr. to *ed in atti to eat="the biter." Cp. dāṭhā], a tooth, a tusk, fang, esp. an elephant's tusk; ivory Vin II.117 (nāga-d. a pin of ivory); Kh II. (as one of the taca-pañcaka, or 5 dermatic constituents of the body, viz. kesā, lomā nakhā d. taco, see detailed description at KhA 43 sq.); pankadanta rajassira "with sand between his teeth & dust on his head" (of a wayfarer) Sn 980; J IV.362, 371; M I.242; J I.61; II.153; Vism 251; VvA 104 (īsā° long tusks); PvA 90, 152 (fang); Sdhp 360. -ajina ivory M II.71 (gloss: dhanadhaññaṃ); -aṭṭhika "teeth-bone," ivory of teeth i. e. the tooth as such Vism 21. -āvaraṇa the lip (lit. protector of teeth) J IV.188; VI.590; DhA I.387. -ullahakaṃ (M III.167) see ullahaka; -kaṭṭha a tooth-pick Vin I.46=II.223; I.51, 61; II.138; A III.250; J I.232; II.25; VI.75; Miln 15; DhA II.184; VvA 63; -kāra an artisan in ivory, ivoryworker D I.78; J I.320; Miln 331; Vism 336; -kūta tooth of a maimed bullock (?) (thus taking kūṭa as kūṭa4, and equivalent to kūṭadanta), in phrase asanivicakkaṃ danta-kūṭaṃ D III.44=47, which has also puzzled the translators (cp. Dial. III.40: "munching them all up together with that wheel-less thunderbolt of a jawbone," with note: "the sentence is not clear"). -pāḷi row of teeth Vism 251; -poṇa tooth-cleaner, always combd with mukh'odaka water for rinsing the teeth Vin III.51; IV.90, 233; J IV.69; Miln 15; SnA 272. The C. on Pārāj. II.4, 17, (Vin III.51) gives 2 kinds of dantapoṇa, viz. chinna & acchinna. -mūla the root of a tooth; the gums J V.172; -vakkalika a kind of ascetics (peeling the bark of trees with their teeth?) DA Pāli Text Society 719 Pāli-English Dictionary I.271; -vaṇṇa ivory-coloured, ivory-white Vv 4510; -valaya an iv. bangle DhA I.226; -vikati a vessel of iv. D I.78; M II.18; J I.320; Vism 336. -vikhādana biting with teeth, i. e. chewing Dhs 646, 740, 875; -vidaṃsaka (either=vidassaka or to be read °ghaṃsaka) showing one's teeth (or chattering?) A I.261 (of hasita, laughter); -sampatti splendour of teeth DhA I.390. Danta2 {Danta} (adj.) [Sk. dānta] made of ivory, or iv.-coloured J VI.223 (yāna=dantamaya). kāsāva ivory-white & yellow Vin I.287; -valaya see danta1. Danta3 {Danta} [Sk. dānta, pp. dāmyati to make, or to be tame, cp. Gr. dmhto/s, Lat. domitus. See dameti] tamed, controlled, restrained Vin II.196; S I.28, 65, 141 (nāgo va danto carati anejo); A I.6 (cittaṃ dantaṃ); It 123 (danto damayataṃ seṭṭho); Sn 370, 463, 513, 624; Dh 35, 142 (=catumagga-niyamena d. DhA III.83), 321 sq.=Nd2 475. - sudanta well-tamed, restrained Sn 23; Dh 159, 323. -bhūmi a safe place (=Nibbāna), or the condition of one who is tamed S III.84; Nd2 475 (in continuation of Dh 323); DhA IV.6. Dantaka {Dantaka} a pin of tooth or ivory; makara° a pin of tooth or ivory; makara° the tooth of a sword-fish Vin II.113, 117; IV.47. See details under makara. Dandha {Dandha} (adj.) [Sk.? Fausböll refers it to Sk. tandra; Trenckner (Notes 65) to dṛḍha; see also Müller, P. Gr. 22, & Lüders Z.D.M.G. 58, 700. A problematic connection is that with thaddha & datta2 (q. v.)] slow; slothful, indocile; silly, stupid M I.453; S IV.190; Dh 116; J I.116, 143; II.447; V.158; VI.192 (+laḷāka); Th 1, 293; Miln 59, 102, 251; DhA I.94, 251; III.4. Vism 105, 257 (with ref. to the liver). -ābhiððā sluggish intuition D III.106; A V.63; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 24, 50, 123 sq., cp. A II.149 sq.; Vism 85. Dandhatā {Dandhata} (f.) stupidity DhA I.250; as dandhattaṃ at D III.106. Dandhanatā {Dandhanata} (f.), in a° absence of sluggishness Dhs 42, 43. Dandhāyanā {Dandhayana} (f.) clumsiness Miln 105. Dandhāyitatta (nt.) [der. fr. dandheti] stupidity (=dandhatā) D I.249 (opp. vitthāyitatta); S II.54; Miln 105; DA I.252. Dandheti {Dandhayitatta} [Denom. fr. dandha] to be slow, to tarry Th 1, 293 (opp. tāreti). - pp. dandhāyita see in der. °tta. {Dandheti} Dapeti {Dapeti} Caus. fr. dā4 to clean, see pariyo°; pp. dāta see ava°. Dappa {Dappa} [Sk. darpa, to dṛpyati] wantonness, arrogance J II.277; Miln 361, 414; Pgdp 50. Cp. ditta2. - In def. of root gabb at Dhtm 289. Dappita {Dappita} (adj.) arrogant, haughty J V.232, 301. Dabba1 {Dabba} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dravya, nt. to dravati (dru)] (a) fit for, able, worthy, good, S I.187=Th 1, 1218, cp. Pss. of the Brethren, 399, n. 4 (=Sk. bhavya, cp. Pāṇini V.3, 104 dravyaṃ ca bhavyaḥ). - (b) material, substance, property; something substantial, a worthy object Pgdp 14. Pāli Text Society 720 Pāli-English Dictionary -jātika of good material, fit for, able M I.114; A I.254 (cp. Sk. pātrabhūta); Vism 196. -saṃhāra collecting something substantial PvA 114 (should prob. be read sambhāra). -sambhāra the collection of something substantial or worth collecting,; a gift worth giving J IV.311; V.48; VI.427; DhA I.321; II.114. Dabba2 {Dabba} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dravya, of dru wood, see dāru] treelike, wooden; a tree, shrub, wood J I.108 (d.-tiṇagaccha a jungle of wood & grass); V.46 (d.-gahana a thicket of shrubs & trees); Vism 353 (°tiṇa). Dabbī {Dabbi} (f.) [Sk. darvī=*dāru-ī made of wood, see dāru] a (wooden) spoon, a ladle; (met.) the hood of a snake (dabbimattā, phaṇapuṭakā DhA IV.132). - Dh 64; gen. & instr, davyā J III.218; Miln 365. - In cpds. dabbi°. -kaṇṇa the tip of the ladle DhA I.371; -gāha holding a spoon, viz. for the purposes of offering M II.157 (of a priest); Pv II.953 (=kaṭacchu-gāhika PvA 135); mukha a kind of bird J VI.540 (=āṭa); -homa a spoonoblation D I.9. Dabbha {Dabbha} [Sk. darbha to dṛbhati, to plait, interlace, etc. cp. Lith. darbas plaiting, crating] a bunch of kuśa grass (Poa Cynosuroides) D I.141; M I.344; A II.207. -puppha "kuśa-flower," Ep. of a jackal J III.334. Dabhakkaṃ {Dabhakkam} (?) (indecl.)=daddabhaṃ; a certain noise (of a falling fruit) J III.77 (v. l. duddabha=daddabha). Dama {Dama} (adj.-n.) (& of a nt. damo the instr. damasā) [Ved. dama; Ags. tam=E. tame, Ohg. zam to *demā in dameti] taming, subduing; self-control, self-command, moderation D I.53 (dānena damena saṃyamena=It 15; expl. at DA I.160 as indriya-damena uposatha-kammena) III.147, 229; S I.4, 29, 168=Sn 463 (saccena danto damasā upeto); S IV.349; A I.151; II.152 sq.; M III.269 (+upasama); Sn 189, 542 (°ppatta), 655; Dh 9, 25, 261; Nett 77; Miln 24 (sudanto uttame dame). duddama hard to tame or control Dh 159; PvA 280; Sdhp 367. - arindama taming the enemy (q. v.). Damaka (adj.-n.) [=dama] 1. subduing, taming; converting; one who practises selfcontrol M I.446 (assa°); III.2 (id.) J I.349 (kula° bhikkhu), one who teaches a clan self-mastery 505 (go°, assa°, hatthi°); Th 2, 422 (=kāruððāya paresaṃ cittassa damaka ThA 268). - 2. one who practises self-mortification by living on the remnants of offered food (Childers) Abhp 467. {Damaka} Damatha {Damatha} [Sk. damatha] taming, subduing, mastery, restraint, control M I.235; D III.54 (+samatha); Dh 35 (cittassa d.); PvA 265; Dpvs VI.36. Damana {Damana} (adj.-nt.) taming, subduing, mastery PvA 251 (arīnaṃ d°-sīla=arindama). Damaya {Damaya} (adj.) [Sk. damya, see damma] to be tamed: duddamaya difficult to tame Th 1, 5 (better to be read damiya). Damita {Damita} [Sk. damāyita=danta3; cp. Gr. a-da/matos; Lat. domitus] subdued, tamed J V.36; PvA 265. Pāli Text Society 721 Pāli-English Dictionary Dametar {Dametar} [n.-ag. to dameti=Sk. damayitṛ, cp. Sk. damitṛ= Gr. (pan)dama/twr dmhth/r; Lat. domitor] one who tames or subdues, a trainer, in phrase adantānaṃ dametā "the tamer of the untamed" (of a Buddha) M II.102; Th 2, 135. Dameti {Dameti} [Sk. damayati, caus. to dāmyati of *dam to bring into the house, to domesticate; Gr. dama/w, dmhto/s; Lat. domare; Oir. dam (ox); Goth. tamjan=Ohg. zemman=Ags. temian=E. tame; to *demā of dama house, see dampati] to make tame, chastise, punish, master, conquer, convert Vin II.196 (daṇḍena); M II.102; Dh 80, 305 (attānaṃ); It 123 (ppr. [danto] damayataṃ seṭṭho [santo] samayataṃ isi); Miln 14, 386; PvA 54 (core d.=converted). Dampati {Dampati} [Sk. dampati master of the house; dual: husband & wife; cp. also patir dan, *dam, as in Gr. dw_, dw_ma & des- in despo/ths=dampati, short base of *dama house =Ved. dama, Gr. dQmos, Lat. domus to *demā (as also in dameti to domesticate) to build, cp. Gr. de/mw & de/mas; Goth. timrjan; Ohg. zimbar; E. timber] master of the house, householder, see tudampati & cp. gahapati. Damma {Damma} (adj.) [Sk. damya, grd. of dāmyati see dameti & cp. damaya (damiya)] to be tamed or restrained; esp. with ref. to a young bullock M I.225 (balagāvā dammagāvā the bulls & the young steers); It 80; also of other animals: assadamma-sārathi a horse-trainer A II.112; & fig. of unconverted men likened to refractory bullocks in phrase purisa-damma-sārathi (Ep. of the Buddha) "the trainer of the human steer" D I.62 (misprint °dhamma°)=II.93=III.5; M II.38; A II.112; Vv 1713 (nara-vara-d.-sārathi cp. VvA 86. Dayati1 {Dayati} =dayati (q. v.) to fly J IV.347 (+uppatati); VI.145 (dayassu=uyyassu Com.). Dayati2 {Dayati} =[Ved. dayate of day to divide, share, cp. Gr. dai/omai, dai/numi, dai/th, etc. to dā (see dadāti, base 2), & with p. Gr. dapa/nh, Lat. daps (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to have pity (c. loc.), to sympathize, to be kind J VI.445 (dayitabba), 495 (dayyāsi=dayaṃ kareyyāsi). Dayā {Daya} (f.) [Ved. dayā, to dayati2] sympathy, compassion, kindness M I.78; Sn 117; J I.23; VI.495. Usually as anuddayā; freq. in cpd. dayāpanna showing kindness D I.4 (=dayaṃ mettacittaṃ āpanno DA I.70); M I.288; A IV.249 sq.; Pug 57; VvA 23. Dara {Dara} [Sk. dara; see etym. connection under darī] fear, terror; sorrow, pain Vin II.156=A I.138 (vineyya hadaye daraṃ); S II.101, 103; IV.186 sq.; Th 2, 32 (=cittakato kilesa-patho ThA, 38); J IV.61; Vv 838 (=daratha VvA 327); Pv I.85 (=citta-daratha PvA 41). - sadara giving pain, fearful, painful M I.464; A II.11, 172; S I.101. Cp. ādara & purindada. Daratha {Daratha} [Sk. daratha, der. fr. dara] anxiety, care, distress A II.238; M III.287 sq. (kāyikā & cetasikā d.); Sn 15 (darathajā: the Arahant has nought in him born of care Cy explains by pariḷāha fever); J I.61 (sabbakilesa-d.) PvA 230 (id.); DhA II.215; Miln 320; PvA 23, 41; VvA 327. Darī {Dari} (f.) [Sk. darī to dṛṇāti to cleave, split, tear, rend, caus. darayati *der=Gr. de/rw to skin, de/rma, dora/ skin); Lith. dirù (id.) Goth. ga-taíran=Ags. teran (tear) =Ohg. zeran (Ger. zerren). To this the variant (r:l) *del in dalati, dala, etc. See also daddara, daddu, dara, avadīyati, ādiṇṇa, uddīyati, purindada (=puraṃ-dara)] a cleavage, cleft; a hole, cave, cavern J I.18 (v. 106), 462 (mūsikā° mouse-hole); II.418 (=maṇiguhā); SnA 500 (=padara). -cara a cave Pāli Text Society 722 Pāli-English Dictionary dweller (of a monkey) J V.70; -mukha entrance of a cave Vism 110. -saya a lair in a cleft Cp. III.71. Dala {Dala} (nt.) [Sk. dala, *del (var. of *der, see dara) in dalati (q. v.) orig. a piece chipped off=a chip, piece of wood, cp. daṇḍa, Mhg. zelge (branch); Oir delb (figure, form), deil (staff, rod)] a blade, leaf, petal (usually -°); akkhi-d. eyelid ThA 259; DA I.194; DhsA 378; uppala° DhsA 311; kamala° (lotus-petal) VvA 35, 38; muttā° (?) DA I.252; ratta-pavāḷa° J I.75. Dalati {Dalati} [Sk. dalati, del to split off, tear; Gr. daida/llw, Lat. dolare & delere. See dala & dara] to burst, split, break. - Caus. dāleti Sn 29 (dalayitvā=chinditvā SnA 40); Miln 398. - Pass. dīyati (Sk. dīryate) see uddīyati. Dalidda & Daḷidda {Dalidda} (adj.-n.) [Sk. daridra, to daridrāti, Intens. to drāti run (see dava), in meaning cp. addhika wayfarer=poor] vagrant, strolling, poor, needy, wretched; a vagabond, beggar - (l:) Vin II.159; S I.96 (opp. aḍḍha); A II.57, 203; III.351; IV.219; V.43; Pug 51; VvA 299 (ḷ:) M II.73; S V.100, 384, 404; Vv201 (=duggata VvA 101); DA I.298; PvA 227; Sdhp 89, 528. Daḷiddatā {Daliddata} (f.) [Sk. daridratā] poverty VvA 63. Daḷiddiya {Daliddiya} see dāḷiddiya. Daḷha {Dalha} (adj.) [Sk. dṛḍha to dṛhyati to fasten, hold fast; *dhergh, cp. Lat. fortis (strong). Gr. tarfu/s (thick), Lith. diQas (strap). For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fortis] firm, strong, solid; steady, fast; nt. adv. very much, hard, strongly - D I.245; S I.77; A II.33; Sn 321 (nāvā), 357, 701, 821 (°ṃ karoti to strengthen), 966 (id.); Dh 112; J II.3; IV.106; DhA IV.48; KhA 184; VvA 212 (=thira); PvA 94, 277. - daḷhaṃ (adv.) Dh 61, 313. -dhamma strong in anything, skilled in some art, proficient S II.266=A II.48 (of an archer); M I.82; J VI.77; Vv 631 acc. to Trenckner, Notes p. 60 (cp. also VvA 261)=dṛḍha-dhanva, from dhanu=having a strong bow; -nikkama of strong exertion Sn 68 (=Nd2 294); -parakkama of strong effort, energetic M II.95; A II.250; Dh 23; Th 2, 160; -pahāra a violent blow J III.83; -pākāra (etc.) strongly fortified S IV.194; -bhattin firmly devoted to somebody DhsA 350. Daḷhī° {Dalhi°} [f. of dṛḍha>daḷha in compn like dṛḍhī-bhūta, etc.; cp. daḍḍhi] in kāya-daḷhībahula strong in body, athletic Vin II.76, cp. Com. on p. 313; J III.310; IV.219. daḷhīkaraṇa steadiness, perseverance SnA 290 (+ādhāraṇatā), 398 (id). In cpds. also daḷhi° viz. -kamma making firm; strengthening Vin I.290; J V.254; Pug 18, 22; Vism 112. Dava1 {Dava} [Sk. dava, to dunoti (q. v.); cp. Gr. dais fire-brand] fire, heat J III.260. - See also dāva & dāya. -ḍāha (=Sk. davāgni) conflagration of a forest, a jungle-fire Vin II.138; M I.306; J I.641; Cp. III.93; Miln 189; Vism 36. Dava2 {Dava} [Sk. drava to dravati to run, flow, etc. *dreu besides *drā (see dalidda) & *dram (=Gr. dro/mos); cp. abhiddavati, also dabba=dravyaṃ] running, course, flight; quickness, sporting, exercise, play Vin II.13; M I.273; III.2; A I.114; II.40, 145; IV.167; Pug 21, 25. - davā (abl.) in sport, in fun Vin II.101; davāya (dat.) id. Nd2 540; Miln 367; Dhs 1347, cp. DhsA 402. davaṃ karoti to sport, to play J II.359, 363. -atthāya in joke, for fun Vin II.113; -kamyatā fondness for joking, Vin IV.11, 354; M I.565. Pāli Text Society 723 Pāli-English Dictionary Davya {Davya} [for *dravya]=dabba1, in sarīra° fitness of body, a beautiful body J II.137. Dasa1 {Dasa} [Sk. daśa=Av. dasa, Gr. de/ka, Lat. decem, Goth. taíhun, Oir. deich, Ags. tīen, Ohg. ="two hands"] the number ten; gen. dasannaṃ (Dh 137); instr. dasahi (Kh III.) & dasabhi (Vin I.38). In cpds. (-°) also as ḷasa (soḷasa 16) & rasa (terasa 13; pannar° 15; aṭṭhār° 18). Metaphorical meaning. (A) In the first place 10 is used for measurement (more recent & comprehensive than its base 5); it is the no. of a set or comprehensive unity, not in a vague (like 3 or 5), but in a definite sense. (B) There inheres in it the idea of a fixed measure, with which that of an authoritative, solemn & auspicious importance is coupled. This applies to the unit as well as its decimal combns (100, 1000). Ethically it denotes a circle, to fulfil all of which constitutes a high achievement or power. Application (A) (based on natural phenomena): dasa disā (10 points of the compass; see disā): Sn 719, 1122; PvA 71, etc.; d. lokadhātuyo Pv II.961 (=10X1000; PvA 138); d. māse (10 months as time of gestation) kucchiyā pariharitvā J I.52; PvA 43, 82. - (B) (fig.) 1. a set: (a) personal (cp. 10 people would have saved Sodom: Gen. 18, 32; the 10 virgins (2X5) Matt. 25, 1): divase divase dasa dasa putte vijāyitvā (giving birth to 10 sons day by day) Pv I.6. - (b) impersonal: 10 commandments (dasa sikkhāpadāni Vin I.83), cp. Exod. 34, 28; 10 attributes of perfection of a Tathāgata or an Arahant: Tathāgata-balāni; with ref. to the Buddha see Vin I.38 & cp. Vin. Texts I.141 sq.; dasah'angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati (in memorizing of No. 10) Kh III. dasahi asaddhammehi sam° kāko J III.127; - 10 heavenly attributes (ṭhānāni): āyu etc. D III.146; S V.275; PvA 9, opp. 10 afflictions as punishment (cp. 10 plagues Exod. 7-11): dasannaṃ aññataraṃ ṭhānaṃ nigacchati Dh 137 (=das. dukkha-kāraṇānaṃ, enumd v. 138, 139) "afflicted with one of the 10 plagues"; cp. DhA III.70. - 10 good gifts to the bhikkhu (see deyyadhamma) Nd2 523; PvA 7; 10 rules for the king: PvA 161; - dividing the Empire into 10 parts: PvA 111; etc. vassa-dasa a decade: das'ev'imā vassa-dasā J IV.396 (enumd under vassa); dasa-rājadhammā J II.367; das'akkosa-vatthūni DhA I.212.- See on similar sets A V.1-310; D III.266-271. 2. a larger unity, a crowd, a vast number (of time & space): (a) personal, often meaning "all" (cp. 10 sons of Haman were slain Esth. 9, 10; 10 lepers cleansed at one time Luke 17, 12): dasa bhātaro J I.307; dasa bhātikā PvA 111; dasa-kaððā-sahassa-parivārā PvA 210 etc. - (b) impersonal (cp. 10 X 10=many times, S.B.E. 43, 3): dasa-yojanika consisting of a good many miles DhA III.291. dasavassasahassāni dibbāni vatthāni paridahanto ("for ever and aye") PvA 76, etc. -kkhattuṃ [Sk. °kṛtvah] ten times DhA I.388; -pada (nt.) a draught-board (with 10 squares on each side); a pre-Buddhistic game, played with men and dice, on such a board D I.6; Vin II.10=III.180 (°e kīḷanti); DA I.85. -bala, [Sk. daśabala] endowed with 10 (supernormal) powers, Ep. of the Buddhas, esp. of Kassapa Buddha Vin I.38=J I.84; S II.27; Vism 193, 391; DhA I.14; VvA 148, 206, etc. -vidha tenfold DhA I.398. -sata ten times a hundred Vin I.38 (°parivāro); Sn 179 (yakkhā); DhsA 198 (°nayano). -sahassa ten times a thousand (freq.); °ī in dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu Vin I.12 (see lokadhātu). Dasa2 {Dasa} (-°) [Sk.-dṛśa; cp. dassa] seeing, to be seen, to be perceived or understood D I.18 (aññadatthu° sureseeing, all-perceiving=sabbaṃ passāmī ti attho DA I.111); Sn 653 (paṭiccasamuppāda°), 733 (sammad°); J I.506 (yugamatta°; v. l. dassa). - duddasa difficult to be seen or understood D I.12 (dhammā gambhīrā d.; see gambhīra); M I.167, 487; Sn 938; Dh 252; also as sududdasa Dh 36. Dasaka {Dasaka} (nt.) 1. a decad, decade, a decennial J IV.397; DhsA 316. khiḍḍā° the decad of play Vism 619; cakkhu° etc. sense-decads Vism. 553; Comp. 164, 250; kāya°, Vism. 588. Pāli Text Society 724 Pāli-English Dictionary Dasana {Dasana} [Sk. daśana to ḍasati] a tooth Dāvs V.3 (d.- dhātu, the tooth relic of the Buddha). Dasā (f.) & Dasa (nt.) {Dasa} [Sk. daśā] unwoven thread of a web of cloth, fringe, edge or border of a garment D I.7 (dīgha° long-fringed, of vatthāni); J V.187; DhA I.180; IV.106 (dasāni). sadasa (nt.) a kind of seat, a rug (lit. with a fringe) Vin IV.171 (=nisīdana); opp. adasaka (adj.) without a fringe or border Vin II.301=307 (nisīdana). -anta edge of the border of a garment J I.467; DhA I.180 sq., 391. Dasika1 {Dasika} (adj.) (-°) [Sk. dṛśika, cp. dassin] to be seen, to behold, being of appearance, only in dud° or frightful app., fierce, ugly SI .94 & id. p. (q. v. under okoṭimaka); J I.504 (kodha, anger); PvA 24, 90 (of Petas). - Note. The spelling is sometimes °dassika: A II.85; Pug 51; PvA 90. Dasika2 {Dasika} (adj.) [fr. dasā] belonging to a fringe, in dasika -sutta an unwoven or loose thread Vin III.241; DhA IV.206 (°mattam pi not even a thread, i. e. nothing at all, cp. Lat. nihīlum=ne-fīlum not a thread=nothing). See also dasaka under dasā. Dassa {Dassa} (-°) [Sk. -darśa; cp. dasa2] to see or to be seen, perceiving, perceived Sn 1134 (appa° of small sight, not seeing far, knowing little=paritta-dassa thoka-dassa Nd2 69). Cp. akkha° a judge Miln 114. -su° easily perceived (opp. duddasa) Dh 252. *Dassati1 {Dassati} [Sk. *darś in dadarśa pref. to dṛś; caus. darśayati. Cp. Gr. de/rkomai to see; Oir. derc eye; Ags. torht; Goth. ga-tarhjan to make conspicuous. The regular Pāli Pres. is dakkhiti (younger dakkhati), a new formation from the aor. addakkhi=Sk. adrākṣīt. The Sk. Fut. draksyati would correspond formally to dakkhati, but the older dakkhiti points toward derivation from addakkhi. This new Pres. takes the function of the Fut.; whereas the Caus. dasseti implies a hypothetical Pres. *dassati. On dakkhati, etc. see also Kuhn, Beitr. p. 116; Trenckner, Notes pp. 57, 61; Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 554] to see, to perceive. 1. (pres.) base dakkh [Sk. drakṣ]: pres. (a) dakkhati Nd2 428 (=passati), 1st dakkhāmi ibid. (=passāmi), 2nd dakkhasi S I.116; Pv II.113 (v. l. BB adakkhi); imper. dakkha Nd2 428 (=passa). - (b) dakkhiti Sn 909 (v. l. BB dakkhati), 3rd pl. dakkhinti Vin I.16≈Sn p. 15 (v. l. BB dakkhanti); D I.46. - aor. addakkhi (Sk. adrakṣīt) Vin II.195; S I.117; Sn 208 (=addasa SnA 257), 841, 1131; It 47; J III.189; & dakkhi It 47; 1st sg. addakkhiṃ Sn 938. Spelling also adakkhi (v. l. BB at Pv II.113) & adakkhiṃ (Nd2 423). - inf. dakkhituṃ Vin I.179. - Caus. p.p. dakkhāpita (shown, exhibited) Miln 119. - Der. dakkhin (q. v.). 2. (pret.) base dass (Sk. darś & draś): aor. (a) addasa (Sk. adarśat) Sn 358, 679, 1016; J I.222; IV.2; Pv II.323 (mā addasa=addakkhiṃ PvA 88); DhA I.26; PvA 73, & (older, cp. agamā) addasā Vin II.192, 195; D I.112; II.16; Sn 409 (v. l. BB addasa), 910 (id.); Miln 24, 1st sg. addasaṃ S I.101; Nd2 423 & addasaṃ Sn 837 (=adakkhiṃ Nd1 185), 1st pl. addasāma Sn 31, 178, 459, 3rd pl. (mā) addasuṃ Pv II.76 (=mā passiṃsu PvA 102). - (b) addasāsi, 1st sg. addasāsiṃ Sn 937, 1145; Vv 3552 (v. l. addasāmi), 3rd pl. addasāsuṃ Vin II.195; D II.16; M I.153. - (c) shortened forms of aor. are: adda Th 1, 986; addā J VI.125, 126. - inf. daṭṭhuṃ Sn 685 (daṭṭhukāma); J I.290; Pv IV.13 (=passituṃ PvA 219); PvA 48, 79; VvA 75. - ger. daṭṭhu (=Sk. dṛṣṭvā) Sn 424 (in phrase nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato)=1098; 681. Expl. at Nd2 292 with expl. of disvā=passitvā, etc. - grd. daṭṭhabba (to be regarded as) D II.154; PvA 8, 9, 10, etc., Vism 464; & dassanīya (see sep.). Also in Caus. (see below) & in daṭṭhar (q. v.). 3. (med.-pass.) base diss (Sk. dṛś): pres. pass. dissati (to be seen, to appear) Vin I.16; Sn 194, 441, 688 (dissare), 956; J I.138; Dh 304; Pv I.84; PvA 61 (dissasi you look, intrs.); ppr. dissamāna (visible) PvA 71, 6 (°rūpa), 162 (id.); VvA 78 (°kāya); Mhvs. VII.35, & der. dissamānatta (nt.) (visibility) PvA 103. - Pāli Text Society 725 Pāli-English Dictionary ger. disvā Sn 48, 409, 687 sq. It 76; PvA 67, 68, etc., & disvāna Vin I.15; II.195; Sn 299, 415, 1017; Pv II.87, etc., also a ger. form diṭṭhā, q. v. under adiṭṭhā. - pp. diṭṭha (q. v.). 4. Caus. (of base 2) dasseti (Sk. darśayati), aor. dassesi & (exceptional) dassayi, only in dassayi tumaṃ showed himself at Pv III.24 (=attānaṃ uddisayi PvA 181) & III.216 (=attānaṃ dassayi dassesi pākaṭo ahosi PvA 185). 3rd pl. dassesuṃ; ger. dassetvā; inf. dassetuṃ to point out, exhibit, explain, intimate Dh 83; J I.84, 200, 263, 266; II.128, 159; III.53, 82; PvA 4, 8, 16 (ovādaṃ d. give advice), 24, 45, 73 etc. - to point to (acc.) PvA 151 (sunakhaṃ), 257 (dārakaṃ). - to make manifest, to make appear, to show or prove oneself; also intr. to appear J II.154 (dubbalo viya hutvā attānaṃ dassesi: appeared weak); VI.116; Pv III.23 (=sammukhībhāvaṃ gacchanti PvA 181); PvA 13 (mitto viya attānaṃ dassetvā: acting like a friend), Miln 271. Esp. in phrase attānaṃ dasseti to come into appearance (of Petas): PvA 32, 47, 68, 79, etc. (cp. above dassayi). - pp. dassita. Dassati2 {Dassati} fut. of dadāti, q. v. Dassana {Dassana} (nt.) [Sk. darśana, see dassati1] - 1. Lit. seeing, looking; noticing; sight of, appearance, look. Often equivalent to an infinitive "to see," esp. as dat. dassanāya in order to see, for the purpose of seeing (cp. dassana-kāma=daṭṭhu-kāma): [Bhagavantaṃ] dassanāya M II.23, 46; A I.121; III.381; Sn 325. - (a) (nt.) "sight" D II.157 (visūka°, looking on at spectacles); A III.202 (+savana hearing); IV.25 sq. (bhikkhu°); Sn 207 (muni°, may be taken as 2, cp. SnA 256), 266 (=pekkhaṇa KhA 148); Dh 206 (ariyānaṃ d., cp. ariyānaṃ dassāvin), 210 (appiyānaṃ), 274; Vv 342; VvA 138 (sippa° exhibition of art, competition).- (b) adj. as (-°) "of appearance" (cp. °dasa) Sn 548 (cāru° lovely to behold); PvA 24 (bhayānaka° fearful to look at), 68 (bībhaccha°). - 2. Appld. (power of) perception, faculty of apperception, insight, view, theory; esp. (a) in combn ðāṇa-dassana either "knowing & seeing," or perhaps "the insight arising from knowledge," perfect knowledge, realization of the truth, wisdom (cp. ðāṇa): S I.52; II.30; V.28, 422; M I.195 sq., 241, 482 (Gotamo sabbaððū sabba-dassāvī aparisesaṃ ñ-d °ṃ paṭijānāti; id. II.31); D III.134; A I.220; II.220; IV.302 sq.; cp. ñ-d-paṭilābha A I.43; II.44 sq.; III 323; ð-dvisuddhi M I.147 sq. Also with further determination as adhideva-ñ-d° A IV.428; alam-ariya° S III.48; IV.300; V.126 sq.; M I.68, 71, 81, 207, 246, 440 sq., A I.9; III.64, 430; V.88; parisuddha A III.125; maggāmagga° A V.47; yathābhūta° A III.19, 200; IV.99, 336; V.2 sq., 311 sq.; vimutti° S I.139; V.67; A III.12, 81, 134; IV.99, 336; V.130; It 107, 108; Miln 338. See also vimutti. - (b) in other contexts: ariyasaccāna-dassana Sn 267; ujubhūta° S V.384, 404; dhamma° (the right doctrine) S V.204, 344, 404; A III.263; pāpa° (a sinful view) Pv IV.355; viparīta° A III.114; IV.226; V.284 sq. (and a°), 293 sq. sammā° (right view) S III.189; A III.138; IV.290; V.199; sabbalokena d. S IV.127; sahetu d. S V.126 sq.; suvisuddha d. S IV.191. - S III.28, 49; M II.46; III.157; Sn 989 (wisdom: Jinānaṃ eta d. corresponding with ðāṇa in preceding line); Dhs 584, 1002 (insight: cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 256). - (adj.) perceiving or having a view (cp. dasseti) S I.181 (visuddha°); Th 1, 422. - (c) as nt. from the Caus. dasseti: pointing out, showing; implication, definition, statement (in Com. style) PvA 72; often as °ākāra-dassana: PvA 26 (dātabba°), 27 (thomana°), 35 (kata°) & in dassanatthaṃ in order to point out, meaning by this, etc. PvA 9, 68. - 3. adassana not seeing S I.168=Sn 459; invisibility J IV.496 (°ṃ vajjati to become invisible); wrong theory or view A V.145 sq.; Sn 206; Pug 21. -anuttariya (nt.) the pre-eminence or importance of (right or perfect) insight; as one of the 3 anuttariyāni, viz. d°, paṭipadā°, vimutta° at D III.219, 250, 281; A III.284, 325; -kāma (adj.) desirous of seeing A I.150; IV.115; Miln 23; -bhūmi the level or plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; -sampanna endowed with right insight S II.43 sq., 58. Pāli Text Society 726 Pāli-English Dictionary Dassanīya {Dassaniya} (adj.) [Sk. darśanīya; grd. formation of dassana, also as dassaneyya] fair to behold, beautiful, good-looking (=dassituṃ yutta DA I.141), often in formula abhirūpa d. pāsādika paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgəta to express matchless physical beauty: D I.114; S II.279; PvA 46 etc. Also with abhirūpa & pāsādika alone of anything fair & beautiful: D I.47. - Vin IV.18; S I.95; J III.394; Pug 52, 66; DA I.281; PvA 44 (=subha), 51 (=rucira). Comparative dassanīyatara S I.237; Sdhp 325: DhA I.119. Dassaneyya {Dassaneyya} (adj.)=dassanīya J V.203 (bhusa°). Dassāvitā {Dassavita} (f.) [abstr. to dassāvin] seeing, sight (-°) Miln 140 (guṇavisesa°). Dassāvin {Dassavin} (adj.-n.) [Sk. *darśavant] full of insight, seeing, perceiving, taking notice of. In combn with °ðū (knowing) it plays the part of an additional emphasis to the 1st term=knowing & seeing i. e. having complete or highest knowledge of, gifted with "clear" sight or intuition (see jānāti passati & cp. ðāṇa-dassana). - (a) As adj. -°: seeing, being aware of, realizing; anicca° S III.1; ādīnava° S II.194; IV.332; M I.173; A V.181 sq.; pariyanta° A V.50 sq.; bhaya° S V.187: It 96; esp. in phrase anumattesu vajjesu bhaya° D I.63=It 118 (cp bhayadassin); lokavajjabhaya° S I.138; sabba° (+sabbaððū) M I.482 (samaṇo Gotamo s° s°); II.31; Miln 74 (Buddho s° s°); cp. M Vastu III.51 sarvadarśāvin; sāra°. Vin II.139. - (b) (n.) one who sees or takes notice of, in phrase ariyānaṃ dassāvī (+sappurisānaṃ dassāvī & kovido) M I.8; S III.4; opp. adassāvī one who disregards the Noble Ones S III.3, 113; M III.17; Dhs 1003 (cp. DhsA 350). Dassika {Dassika} (-°): see dasika1. Dassita1 {Dassita} [Sk. darśita, pp. of dasseti1] shown, exhibited, performed Vin IV.365; J I.330. Cp. san°. Dassita2 {Dassita} at J VI.579 accord. to Kern (Toev. p. 114)=Sk. daṃśita mailed, armed. Dassin {Dassin} (-°) (adj.) [Sk. °darśin] seeing, finding, realizing, perceiving. Only in cpds., like attha° Sn 385; ananta° S I.143; ādīnava° Sdhp 409; ekanga° Ud 69; jātikkhaya° Sn 209; It 40; ðāṇa° Sn 478 (=sacchikatasabbaññuta-ðāṇa SnA 411; cp. dassāvin); tīra° S III.164 sq.; A III.368, cp. tīra-dakkhin; dīgha° (=sabbadassāvin) PvA 196; bhaya° Dh 31 (°dassivā=dassī vā?), 317; It 40; DA I.181 (=bhaya dassāvin); viveka° Sn 474, 851. Dassimant {Dassimant} see attha°. Dassu {Dassu} [Sk. dasyu, cp. dāsa] enemy, foe; robber, in dassukhīla robber-plague D I.135, 136 (=corakhīla DA I.296). Dassetar {Dassetar} [Sk. darśayitṛ, n. agent to dasseti] one who shows or points out, a guide, instructor, teacher A I.62, 132=It 110. Dasseti {Dasseti} Caus. of dassati1 (q. v.). Dasso {Dasso} n. pl. of dāsī. Pāli Text Society 727 Pāli-English Dictionary Daha {Daha} [Sk. draha, through metathesis fr. hrada, hlād, see hilādate] a lake D I.45 (udaka°); J I.50; II.104; V.412; Miln 259; PvA 152; Dpvs I.44. Dahati1 {Dahati} (dahate) [Sk. dadhāti to put down, set up; *dhe=Gr. ti/qhmi, Lat. facio, Ohg. tuon, n= E. to do. See also dhātu] to put, place; take for (acc. or abl.), assume, claim, consider D I.92 (okkākaṃ pitāmahaṃ=ṭhapeti DA I.258); S III.113 (mittato daheyya); A IV.239 (cittaṃ d. fix the mind on); Sn 825 (bālaṃ dahanti mithu aññamaññaṃ=passanti dakkhanti, etc. Nd1 163). Pass dhīyati (q. v.); grd. dheyya (q. v.). - Note. dahati is more frequent in combn with prefixes & compositions like ā°, upa°, pari°, sad°, san°, samā°, etc. pp. hita. Dahati2 {Dahati} = ḍahati to burn; as dahate Pv II.98 (=dahati vināseti PvA 116). Dahana {Dahana} [Sk. dahana, to dahati, orig. "the burner"] fire Vism 338 (°kicca); ThA 256; Dāvs V.6; Sdhp 20. Dahara {Dahara} (adj.) [Sk. dahara & dahra for dabhra to dabhnoti to be or make short or deficient, to deceive] small, little, delicate, young; a young boy, youth, lad D I.80, 115; S I.131; II.279 (daharo ce pi paððavā); M I.82; II.19, 66; A V.300; Sn 216, 420 (yuvā+), 578 (d. ca mahantā ye bālā ye ca paṇḍitā sabbe maccuvasaṃ yanti); J I.88 (daharadahare dārake ca dārikāyo), 291 (°itthī a young wife); II.160, 353; III.393; Dh 382; Pv IV.150 (yuvā); DhA I.397 (sāmaṇera); DA I.197 (bhikkhū), 223 (=taruṇa), 284 (id.); PvA 148; VvA 76; ThA 239, 251. Opposed to mahallaka J IV.482; to vuḍḍha Vism 100. - f. daharā Vv 315 (young wife) (+yuvā VvA 129) & daharī J IV.35; V.521; Miln 48 (dārikā). Daharaka {Daharaka} =dahara, young Miln 310. - f. °ikā a young girl Th 2, 464, 483. Dāṭhā {Datha} (f.) [Sk. daṃṣṭrā to ḍasati (q. v.), cp. also daṭṭha] a large tooth, fang, tusk; as adj. (°) having tusks or fangs D II.18 (susukkha°); J I.505 (uddhaṭa-dāṭho viya sappo); IV.245 (nikkhanta°); DhA I.215; PvA 152 (kaṭhina°); Sdhp 286. -āvudha [Sk. daṃṣṭrāyudha] using a tusk as his weapon J V.172; -danta a canine tooth KhA 44; -balin one whose strength lies in his teeth (of a lion) Sn 72. Dāṭhikā {Dathika} (f.) [Sk. *dāḍhikā=Prk. for daṃṣṭrikā] beard, whiskers Vin II.134 (na d. ṭhapetabbā, of the bhikkhus); J I.305; V.42 (tamba°), 217 (mahā° having great whiskers); DA I.263 (parūḷha-massu° with beard & whiskers grown long). Dāṭhin {Dathin} (adj.) [cp. Sk. daṃṣṭrin] having tusks J II.245; IV.348; Th 1, p. 1; Sdhp 286. Dātar {Datar} [Sk. dāṭr, n. ag. of dadāti to give; cp. Gr. dw/twr & doth/r] a giver, a generous person Pgdp 50. - adātā one who does not give, a miser Pv II.82; otherwise as na dātā (hoti) A II.203; It 65. Dātta {Datta} (nt.) [Sk. dātra, to dā, Sk. dāti, dyati to cut, divide, deal out; cp. Gr. date/omai, dai/omai & see dāna, dāpeti, dāyati] sickle, scythe Miln 33. Dāna {Dana} (nt.) [Ved. dāna, dā as in dadāti to give & in dāti, dyāti to deal out, thus: distribution (scil. of gifts); cp. Gr. da/nos (present), Lat. damnum (E. damages); Gr. dw_ron, Lat. donum; Pāli Text Society 728 Pāli-English Dictionary also Ags. tīd (=E. tide, portion, i. e. of time), & tīma (=E. time). See further dadāti, dayati, dātta, dāpeti. Defn at Vism 60: dānaṃ vuccati avakhaṇḍanaṃ] (a) giving, dealing out, gift; almsgiving, liberality, munificence; esp. a charitable gift to a bhikkhu or to the community of bhikkhus, the Sangha (cp. deyyadhamma & yañña). As such it constitutes a meritorious act (puññaṃ) and heads the list of these, as enumerated in order, dānamaya puððaṃ, sīlamaya p., bhāvanāmaya p. viz. acts of merit consisting of munificence, good character & meditation (D III.218 e. g.; cp. cāga, puðða, sīla). Thus in formula dānādīni puððāni katvā J I.168; PvA 66, 105; cp. cpds. under °maya. - (b) Special merit & importance is attached to the mahādāna the great gift, i. e. the great offering (of gifts to the Sangha), in character the buddhistic equivalent of the brahmanic mahāyajða the chief sacrifice. On 16 Mahādānas see Wilson Hindu Caste 413; on 4 Beal. Chinese Texts 88. - A IV.246; J I.50, 74; V.383 (devasikaṃ chasatasahassa-pariccāgaṃ karonto mahādānaṃ pavattesi "he gave the great largesse, spending daily 600,000 pieces"); PvA 19, 22, 75, 127, etc. - (c) Constituents, qualities & characteristics of a dāna: 8 objects suitable for gifts form a standard set (also enumd as 10), viz. anna pāna vattha yāna mālā gandha-vilepana seyyāvasatha padīpeyya (bread, water, clothes, vehicle, garlands, scented ointment, conveniences for lying down & dwelling, lighting facility) A IV.239; cp. Pv II.49 & see °vatthu & deyyadhamma. Eight ways of giving alms at D III.258= A IV.236, five ways, called sappurisa-dāna (& asapp°) at A III.171 sq.; eight sapp° at A IV.243. Five manners of almsgiving metaphorically for sīlas 1-5 at A IV.246= DA I.306. Five characteristics of a beneficial gift at A III.172, viz. saddhāya dānaṃ deti, sakkaccaṃ d.d., kālena (cp. kāladāna A III.41), anuggahitacitto, attānað ca parað ca anupahacca d.d. - (d) Various passages showing practice & value of dāna: Vin I.236; D I.53 (+dama & saṃyama; cp. It 15; PvA 276); II.356 sq. (sakkaccaṃ & a°); A IV.392 sq. (id.); D III.147 sq., 190 sq., 232; S I.98 (dānaṃ dātabbaṃ yattha cittaṃ pasīdati); A I.91=It 98 (āmisa° and dhamma°, material & spiritual gifts); A I.161; III.41 (dāne ānisaṃsā); IV.60; 237 sq. (mahapphala), 392 sq. (°ssa vipāka); V.269 (petānaṃ upakappati); J I.8 (aggaḷa°); II.112 (dinna°), III.52 (id.); Sn 263, 713 (appaṃ dānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ) PvA 54 (āgantuka° gift for the newcomer); Sdhp 211213. - adāna withholding a gift, neglect of liberality, stinginess Pv II.945; Miln 279; PvA 25; cp. °sīla under cpds.: atidāna excessive almsgiving Pv II.945 (cp. PvA 129); Miln 277. -agga [Sk. dānāgara, cp. bhattagga, salākagga; see Trenckner, Notes p. 56] a house where alms or donations are given, a store-house of gifts, fig. a source or giver of gifts, a horn of plenty J VI.487; DhA I.152, 189; Miln 2; PvA 121, 124, 127, 141. A possible connection w. agga=āgra is suggested by combn dānāni mahādānāni aggaððāni A IV.246; -ādhikāra supervision or charge of alms-distributing. PvA 124 (cp. Pv II.927); -ānisaṃsa praise of generosity PvA 9; cp. A III.41; -upakaraṇa means or materials for a gift PvA 105; -upapatti (read uppatti at D III.258) an object suitable for gifts, of which 8 or 10 are mentioned (see above Q) A IV.239=D III.258; kathā talk or conversation about (the merit & demerit of) almsgiving, one of the anupubbikathā Vin I.15, 18; -dhamma the duty or meritorious act of bestowing gifts of mercy (cp. deyyadhamma) PvA 9; -pati "lord of alms," master in liberality, a liberal donor (def. by Bdhgh as: yaṃ dānaṃ deti tassa pati hutvā deti na dāso na sahāyo DA I.298) D I.137 (+saddho & dāyako, as one of the qualifications of a good king); A III.39; IV.79 sq. (+saddho); Sn 487; Pv I.114 (+amaccharin); J I.199; Miln 279 sq.; Sdhp 275, 303; -puñña the religious merit of almsgiving or liberality (see above a) PvA 73; -phala the fruit of munificence (as accruing to the donor) A III.39; IV.79; Pv II.83 (°ṃ hoti paramhi loke: is rewarded in the life to come, cp. It 19); PvA 8 (cp. Pv I.1); -maya consisting in giving alms or being liberal (see above a) D III.218 (puññakiriya-vatthu); Vbh 135 (kusala-cetanā), 325 (paðða); PvA 8 (puðða), 60 (id.), 9 (kusalakamma), 51, etc.; -vaṭṭa alms J VI.333; -vatthu that which constitutes a meritorious gift; almsgiving, beneficence, offering, donation D III.258= A IV.236; PvA 20 (=annapānādika dasavidha dātabbavatthu PvA 7); -veyyāvaṭika services rendered at the distribution of gifts Pāli Text Society 729 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA III.19; -saṃvibhāga liberal spending of alms D III.145, 169; A I.150, 226; III.53, 313; V.331; It 19; Vism 306; freq. with °rata fond of giving alms S V.351, 392; A IV.6 (vigatamalamaccherena cetasā), 266 (id.); -salā a hall, built for the distribution of alms & donations to the bhikkhus & wanderers J I.231, 262; IV.402 (six); V.383 (id.); -sīla liberal disposition PvA 89; usually as adāna-sīla (adj.) of miserly character, neglecting the duty of giving alms Sn 244; Pv II.83 (°ā na saddahaṇti dānaphalaṃ hoti paramhi loke); PvA 45 (=adāyaka), 59 (+maccharin), 68 (id.). Dānava {Danava} [Sk. dānava] a kind of Asuras or Titans, the offspring of Danu J III.527; V.89; Miln 153; Dpvs XVII.98. Dāni {Dani} (adv.) [shortened form for idāni, q. v.] now, Vin I.180; II.154; S I.200, 202; II.123; IV.202; J II.246; Miln 11, etc. Dāpana {Dapana} :see vo°. Dāpita {Dapita} [Sk. dāpayita pp. of dāpeti1] given, sent PvA 6; Mhvs VII.26. Dāpeti1 {Dapeti} [Sk. dāpayati, dap fr. dā (see dadāti & dayati) =deal out, spend, etc., cp. Gr. da/ptw, dapa/nh (expenditure), dei_pnon (meal); Lat. daps (id.), damnum (expense fr. *dapnom). See also dātta & dāna] to induce somebody to give, to order to be given, to deal out, send, grant, dedicate J VI.485; PvA 46; aor. dāpesi J IV.138; DhA I.226, 393 (sent); PvA 5 (id.), 31; fut. dāpessati J II.3; DhA 371. Cp. ava°. Dāpeti2 {Dapeti} [Sk. drāvayati & drapayati, Caus. to dru, see davati] to cause to run J II.404. Dāma {Dama} (nt.) [Sk. dāman to dyati to bind (Gr. di/dhmi), *dē, as in Gr. de/sma (rope), dia/dhma (diadem), u(po/dhma (sandal)] a bond, fetter, rope; chain, wreath, garland S IV.163 (read dāmena for damena), 282, (id.); A III.393 (dāmena baddho); Sn 28 (=vacchakānaṃ bandhanatthāya katā ganthitā nandhipasayuttā rajjubandhanavisesā); Vism 108. Usually -°, viz. anoja-puppha° J I.9; VI.227; olambaka° VvA 32; kusuma° J III.394; gandha° J I.178; VvA 173, 198; puppha° J I.397; VvA 198; mālā° J II.104; rajata° J I.50; III.184; IV.91; rattapuppha° J III.30; sumana° J IV.455. Dāya1 {Daya} [Sk. dāva, conflagration of a forest; wood=easily inflammable substance; to dunoti (to burn) caus. dāvayati, cp. Gr. dai/w (to burn) & P. dava1] wood; jungle, forest; a grove Vin I.10 (miga°), 15, 350; II.138; S II.152 (tiṇa°); IV.189 (bahukaṇṭaka d.=jungle); A V.337 (tiṇa°); J III.274; VI.278. See also dāva. -pāla a grove keeper Vin I.350; M I.205. Dāya2 {Daya} [Sk. dāya, to dadāti, etc.] a gift, donation; share, fee D I.87≈(in phrase rājadāya brahmadeyya, a king's grant, cp. rājadattiya); J IV.138; V.363; VI.346. Cp. dāyāda & brahmadeyya. Dāyaka [Sk. dāyaka, dā as in dadāti & dāna] (adj.) giving, bestowing, distributing, providing (usually -°); (n.) a donor, benefactor; a munificent person M I.236 sq.; A I.26, 161; II.64, 80; III.32, 336; IV.81; Sn p. 87; It 19 (ito cutā manussattā saggaṃ gacchanti dāyakā); J V.129 (kaṇḍa°); Pv I.11 sq.; 12; 42; 55; DA I.298; PvA 113 (=dada); Miln 258 (°ānaṃ dakkhiṇā); {Dayaka} Pāli Text Society 730 Pāli-English Dictionary Sdhp 276. - f. dāyikā Vin II.216 (bhikkhā°), 289 (khīrassa). - adāyaka a stingy person, one who neglects almsgiving (cp. adānasīla) Pv I.119; f. °ikā Pv I.93. Dāyajja {Dayajja} (nt.) [Sk. dāyādya; see dāyāda] inheritance Vin I.82; D III.189; A III.43; J I.91; Vism 43 sq.; dowry J III.8. - (adj.) one who inherits Vin III.66 (pituno of the father). upasampadā, lit. the Upasampadā by way of inh., a particular form of ordination conferred on Sumana & Sopāka, both novices seven yrs. old DhA IV.137. Dāyati {Dayati} [Sk. dāti & dyāti (dā) to cut, divide, etc.; cp. dayati, dātta, dāna] to cut, mow, reap, caus. dāyāpeti to cause to be cut or mowed DhA III.285. Dāyana {Dayana} (nt.) [see dayati] cutting; °agga the first of what has been cut (on fields) DhA I.98; °atthaṃ for the purpose of mowing DhA III.285. Dāyāda {Dayada} [Sk. dāyāda=dāya+ā-da receiving the (son's) portion, same formation on ground e idea as Lat. heres=*ghero+ē-do receiver of what is left: see Brugmann, Album Kern p. 29 sq.] heir M I.86=Nd2 199; S I.69, 90; IV.72; A III.72 sq.; J III.181; VI.151; Kh VIII.5. Often fig. with kamma° one who inherits his own deeds (see kamma 3 A b & cpds.): M I.390 sq.; A V.289; & as dhamma° (spiritual heir) opposed to āmisa° (material h.): M I.12; It 101; also as dhamma° D III.84; as brahma° M II.84; D III.83. - adāyāda not having an heir S I.69; J V.267. See dāyajja & dāyādaka. Dāyādaka {Dayadaka} [=dāyāda] heir M II.73; Th 1, 781, 1142; f. °ikā Th 2, 327 (=dāyajjarahā ThA 234). Dāyika {Dayika} (adj.)=dāyaka PvA 157; Sdhp 211, 229. —Dāyin {Dayin} (adj.) [Sk. dāyin, of dadāti] giving, granting, bestowing PvA 121 (icchit'icchita°), 157 (=[kāma] dada); Sdhp 214 (dānagga°). Dāra & Dārā {Dara} (f.) [Sk. dāra (m.) & dārā (f.), more freq. dārā (m.pl.); instr. sg. dārena J IV.7; Pv IV.177, etc.; instr, pl. dārehi Sn 108 (sehi d. asantuṭṭho not satisfied with his own wife), loc. pl. dāresu Sn 38 (puttesu dāresu apekkhā), orig. "wives, womenfolk," female members of the household=Gr. dou_los (slave; Hesychius: dou=los=h( oi)ki/a; cp. also origin of Germ. frauenzimmer & E. womanhood). Remnants of pl. use are seen in above passage. fr. Sn.] a young woman, esp. married woman, wife. As dārā f. at Nd2 295 (d. vuccati bhariyā) & It 36; f. also dārī maiden, young girl Pv I.115. Otherwise as dāra (coll-masc.): Dh 345; J I.120; II.248; IV.7; V.104, 288; VvA 299 (°paṭiggaha). - putta-dārā (pl.) wife & children Sn 108, 262; J I.262; cp. saputtadāra with w. & ch. Pv IV.347; putta ca dārā ca Sn 38, 123. Freq. in definition of sīla No. 3 (kāmesu micchācārin or abrahmacariyā, adultery) as sakena dārena santuṭṭha A III.348; V.138; Sn 108 (a°); Pv 177, etc. - paradāra the wife of another M I.404 sq.; Dh 246, 309; Sn 396 (parassa d.) PvA 261. Dāraka {Daraka} [Sk. dāraka, cp. dāra & Gr. dou=los (slave)] a (young) boy, child, youngster; a young man. f. dārikā girl (see next) Vin I.83; J I.88 (dārake ca dārikāyo boys & girls); II.127; VI.336; Pv I.127 (=bāla° PvA 65); DhA I.99 (yasa°=yasa-kulaputta); Miln 8, 9; PvA 176. - Freq. as Pāli Text Society 731 Pāli-English Dictionary gāmadārakā (pl.) the village-boys, streeturchins J II.78, 176; III.275. -tikicchā the art of infanthealing D I.12 (=komārabhacca-vejjakamma DA I.98). Dārikā {Darika} (f.) [Sk. dārikā, see dāraka] a young girl, daughter J III.172; VI.364; Miln 48, 151; PvA 16 (daughter), 55, 67, 68. Dāru {Daru} (nt.) [Sk. dāru, *dereÛo (oak) tree; cp. Av. dāuru (wood) Gr. do/ru (spear), drus (oak); Lat. larix (fr. *dārix)=larch; Oir. daur (oak); Goth. triu, Ags. treo= tree. Also Sk. dāruṇa, Lat. dūrus (hard) etc., Oir. dru strong. See also dabba2, dabbī & duma] wood, piece of wood; pl. woodwork, sticks A I.112; It 71; Dh 80; J II.102; III.54; VI.366; DhA I.393; PvA 76 (candana°), 141. -kuṭikā a hut, log-house Vin III.43; -kkhandha pile of wood PvA 62; -gaha a wood yard Vin III.42 sq.; -ghaṭika wooden pitcher ThA 286. -cīriya "woodbarked" Np, DhA II.35. -ja made of wood S I.77; Dh 345; -dāha the burning of wood S I.169; -dhītalikā a wooden doll Vin III.36, 126; -patta a wooden bowl Vin II.112, 143; pattika one who uses a wooden bowl for collecting alms D I.157; III.22; DA I.319; pādukā a wooden shoe, a clog Vin II.143; -bhaṇḍa wooden articles Vin II.143 (specified), 170, 211; -maṇḍalika a wooden disk DhA III.180; -maya wooden VvA 8, DhA I.192; -yanta a wooden machine Vism 595; -sanghāta (-yāna) "a vehicle constructed of wood," i. e. a boat J V.194; -samādahāna putting pieces of wood together S I.169. Dāruka {Daruka} (cp. dāru] a log S I.202=Th 1, 62=DhA III.460; adj. made of wood Th 2. 390 (°cillaka, a wooden post, see ThA 257). Dāruṇa (adj.) [Ved. dāruṇa, to dāru ("strong as a tree"), cp. Gr. droo/n=i)sxuro/n Hesych; Lat. dūrus; Oir. dron (firm), Mir. dūr (hard) Ags. trum] strong, firm, severe; harsh, cruel, pitiless S I.101; II.226; Sn 244; Dh 139; J III.34; Pv IV.36 (=ghora PvA 251); Miln 117 (vāta); PvA 24, 52 (=ghora), 159 (sapatha a terrible oath= ghora), 181 (=kurūrin), 221 (°kāraṇa); Sdhp 5, 78, 286. {Daruna} Dālana {Dalana} [f. dalati] see vi°. Dālikā & Dālima {Dalika} {Dalima} [Sk. dālika the colocynth & dāḍima the pomegranate tree] in °laṭṭhi a kind of creeper; equivalent to takkāri (?) Th 2, 297 (dālikā)=ThA 226 (dālikā & dālima). Dāḷiddiya & Daḷiddiya {Daliddiya} (nt.) [Sk. *dāridrya] poverty D III.65, 66; A III.351 sq.; J I.228; Dāvs II.60; Sdhp 78. Dāleti {Daleti} see dalati. Dāva {Dava} [Sk. dāva, see dava1 & daya1] in °aggi a jungle-fire J I.213; III.140; Vism 470; DhA I.281. Dāvika {Davika} (adj.) in piṇḍa°, a cert. rank in the army (v. l. piṇḍa-dāyika) D I.51=Miln 331 (DA I.156: sāhasikamahāyodhā, etc., with popular expl. of the terms piṇḍa & davayati). Dāsa {Dasa} [Ved. dāsa; orig. adj. meaning "non-Aryan," i. e. slave (cp. Gr. ba/rbaros, Ger. sklave=slave); Av. dāha= a Scythian tribe. Also connected w. dasyu (see dassukhīla)] a slave, Pāli Text Society 732 Pāli-English Dictionary often combd w. f. dāsī. Def. by Bdhgh as "antojāto" (DA I.300), or as "antojātadhanakkītakaramarānīta-sāmaṃ dāsabyaṃ upagatānaṃ aññataro" (ibid. 168). - In phrase dāsā ca kammakarā "slaves & labourers" Vin I.243, 272; II.154; as dāso kammakaro "a slave-servant" D I.60 (cp. d.- kammakara). - Vin I.72, 76 (dāso na pabbājetabbo: the slave cannot become a bhikkhu); D I.72; M II.68 (fig. taṇhā°); J I.200, 223; III.343 (bought for 700 kahāpaṇas), 347; Pug 56; PvA 112. -kammakara (porisa) a slave-servant, an unpaid labourer, a serf Vin I.240; A I.206; D III.189; DhA IV.1; -gaṇa a troop of slaves Pv IV.141; -purisa a servant J I.385; -porisa a servant, slave Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 11, where 4 kinds of d. are mentioned); -lakkhaṇa fortunetelling from (the condition of) slaves D I.9. Dāsaka {Dasaka} =dāsa in °putta a slave, of the sons of the slaves, mentioned as one of the sipp'āyatanas at D I.51≈ (expl. by Bdhgh as balavasinehā-gharadāsa-yodhā DA I.157). sadāsaka with slaves, followed by slaves Vv 324. - f. dāsikā a female slave (=dāsī) M I.126; J VI.554. Dāsabyatā {Dasabyata} (f.)=dāsavya Sdhp 498. Dāsavya & Dāsabya {Dasavya} {Dasabya} (nt.) [cp. Sk. dāsya] the condition of a slave, slavery, serfdom D I.73; M I.275 (b); J I.226; DA I.168 (b), 213; DhA III.35; PvA 112, 152. Dāsitta {Dasitta} (nt.) [Sk. dāsītva] the status of a (female) slave Miln 158. Dāsima {Dasima} a species of tree J VI.536. Dāsiyā {Dasiya} =dāsikā, a female slave J VI.554. Dāsī {Dasi} (f.) [Sk. dāsī, cp. dāsa. Nom. pl. dasso for dāsiyo J IV.53; in cpds. dāsi°] a female servant, a handmaiden, a slave-girl Vin I.217, 269, 291; II.10 (kula°), 78= III.161; M I.125; II.62 (ðāti°); Pv II.321 (ghara°); PvA 46, 61, 65. - Cp. kumbha°. -gaṇa a troop of slave-girls J II.127; dāsā (pl.) maid& man-servants DhA I.187; freq. to cpd. d-d-paṭiggahaṇa slave-trading D I.5≈(cp. DA I.78); -puttå the son of a slave, an abusive term (gharadāsiyā va putto Dh I.257; cp. Sk. dāsīsuta) D I.93 (°vāda); -bhoga the possessions of a slave Vin III.136. Dāha {Daha} see ḍāha. Di° {Di°} secondary base of numeral "2," contracted fr. dvi: see under dvi B I.4. Dikkhita {Dikkhita} [Sk. dīkṣita "having commenced the preparatory rites for sacrifice"] initiated, consecrated, cira° initiated long since S I.226=J V.138, 139 (where dakkhita, q. v.; Com. cirapabbājita). Digucchā {Diguccha} (f.) [=jigucchā; Sk. jugupsā] disgust DhsA 210 (asuci°). Dighacchā {Dighaccha} (f.) [=jighacchā] hunger A II.117. Dighañña {Dighanna} (adj.) [for jighaðða=Sk. jaghanya fr. janghā] inferior, low, last, hindmost (i. e. westward) J V.24 (where the Com. seems to imply a reading jighacchaṃ with meaning of 1st Pāli Text Society 733 Pāli-English Dictionary sg. pot. intens. of ghas, but d. is evidently the right reading), 402, 403 (°rattiṃ at the end of the night). Dicchati {Dicchati} [Sk. ditsati, Desid. fr. dadāti, base 4, q. v.] to wish to give, to be desirous of giving S I.18, 20 (dicchare 3rd pl.); J IV.64. Dija {Dija} see under dvi B I.4. Diṭṭha1 {Dittha} [Sk. dṛṣṭa, pp. of *dassati] 1. seen; a° not seen D I.222 (a°+avedita asacchikata); M I.3 sq. (diṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhato saðjānāti); Sn 147 (diṭṭhā vā ye vā addiṭṭhā), 995 (na me diṭṭho ito pubbe na ssuto . . . Satthā); J II.154; III.278; Pv I.23 (sāmaṃ d.=seen by yourself); 33 (id.). - nt. diṭṭhaṃ a vision J III.416. - Since sight is the principal sense of perception as well as of apperception (cp. cakkhu), that which is seen is the chief representation of any senseimpression, & diṭṭha combd with suta (heard) and muta (sensed by means of smell, taste & touch), to which viððāta (apperceived by the mind) is often joined, gives a complete analysis of that which comprises all means of cognition & recognition. Thus diṭṭha+suta stands collectively for the whole series Sn 778, 812, 897, 1079; Pv IV.13; diṭṭha suta muta (see Nd2 298 for detail & cp. diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ðāṇena) Sn 790, 901, 914, 1082, 1086, 1122 (na tuyhaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ amutaṃ kiñcanaṃ atthi=you are omniscient); d. suta muta viððāta in the same sense as Sn 1122 in "yaṃ sadevakassa lokassa d. s. m. v. sabbaṃ taṃ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ" of the cognitive powers of the Tathāgata D III.134=Nd2 276= It 121; D III.232; Sn 1086, 1122. - 2. known, understood M I.486; Sn 761; diṭṭha pañha a problem or question solved J VI.532. See also conclusion of No. 1. - 3. (adj.) visible, determined by sight, in conn. with dhamma meaning the visible order of things, the world of sensation, this world (opp. samparāyika dhamma the state after death, the beyond). Usually in cpds. (-°): of this world, in this world. - diṭṭhadhamma Vin II.188; D III.222 sq.; A I.249; II.61; Nd2 297 (=ðātadhamma); DA I.278; Sdhp 470. - °abhinibbuta attained to Nibbāna in this birth A I.142; Sn 1087 (see Nibbāna); °nibbāna earthly N. D I.36; DA I.121; °sukhavihāra (& °in) happy condition (or faring well) in this world Vin II.188; M I.40, 331, 459; S II.239; Dhs 577, 1283; DhsA 296; °vedanīya to be perceived in this condition A I.249, 251; PvA 145. - Freq. in loc. diṭṭhe dhamme (in this world) It 17 (attha, opp. samparāyika attha), or diṭṭhe va dhamme (already or even in the present existence) D I.156, 167, 177, 196; III.108; M I.341 sq., 485; II.94, 103; A II.155, 167; III.429; Sn 141, 343, 1053; It 22, 23, etc. - In the same sense diṭṭhadhammika (adj.) belonging or referring to this world or the present existence, always contrasted with samparāyika belonging to a future state: Vin I.179; III.21; D III.130; A I.47, 98; Nd2 26; It 16; VvA 149; PvA 131, etc. -ānugati imitation of what one sees, emulation, competition S II.203; M I.16; A I.126; III.108, 251, 422; Pug 33; DhA IV.39; -āvikamma making visible or clear, open statement, confession Vin V.183, 187 sq.; -kāla the time of seeing (anybody), opportunity VvA 120; -ppatta one who has obtained (Nibbāna) in this world Nett 190; -padā (pl.) visible signs or characteristics A IV.103; -mangalika (adj.) of puccha, a question concerning visible omina. J IV.390; as °ikā (f.) Np at J IV.376 sq.= SnA 185 sq. -saṃsandana Nd2 447=DhsA 55. Diṭṭha2 {Dittha} [Sk. dviṣṭa, pp. of dveṣṭi dviṣ to hate] (n.) an enemy J I.280; cp. Sk. dviṣat. - (adj.) poisoned, in diṭṭhagatena sallena with a p. arrow S II.230; misreading for diddh-agadena, q. v. The Cy. has diddhagatena with v. l. dibba-gadena. Diṭṭhaka {Ditthaka} (adj.) [=diṭṭha1] seen, visible, apparent DhA II.53, 90. Pāli Text Society 734 Pāli-English Dictionary Diṭṭhā {Dittha} (indecl.) [Sk. dṛṣṭyā, instr. of diṭṭhi] exclamation of joy, hurrah! D iii.73; J I.362. Diṭṭhi {Ditthi} (f.) [Sk. dṛṣṭi; cp. dassana] view, belief, dogma, theory, speculation, esp. false theory, groundless or unfounded opinion. - (a) The latter is rejected by the Buddha as pāpa° (A IV.172) and pāpikā d. (opp. bhaddikā: A V.212 sq.; It 26): Vin I.98, 323; Dh 164; Pv IV.354; whereas the right, the true, the best doctrine is as sammā d. the first condition to be complied with by anyone entering the Path. As such the sammā d. is opposed to micchQ d. wrong views or heresy (see b). Equivalent with micchā d. is kudiṭṭhi (late) Dāvs II.58. - (b) Characterized more especially as: (a) sammā diṭṭhi right doctrine, right philosophy Vin I.10; S II.17; V.11, 14, 30 sq., 458 sq., M I.315; II.12, 29, 87; III.72; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq. See magga. - ujukā d. S V.143, 165; ujugatā d. M I.46 sq. - (b) micchā d. wrong theory, false doctrine S I.145; II.153 (caused by avijjā); M III.71; Dh 167, 316; Nd2 271IIIb; Vbh 361, 389. - The foll. theories are to be considered as varieties of micchā d., viz. (in limited enumn) akiriyavāda S III.208; IV.349; aððaṃ aññena S III.211; antaggāhikā A I.154; II.240; III.130; antānantikā D I.22 sq. S III.214, 258 sq.; assāda° A III.447; ahetukavādā S III.210; ucchedavādā D I.34; S II.20; III.99; 110 sq.; bhava° S III.93; M I.65; A I.83; sakkāya° A III.438; V.144; Sn 231 (cp. KhA 188); Nd2 271IIIb (20 fold, as diṭṭhilepa); sassatavādā D I.13; S II.20; III.98, 213 sq., 258 sq. - (c) Various theories & doctrines are mentioned & discussed at: Vin I.115; S I.133; II.61 sq., 75 sq., 222; III.215 sq., 258 sq.; IV.286; V.448 (=D I.31); D III.13 sq., 45, 246, 267; M I.40; A I.32; II.252 sq.; III.132, 289, 349; Th 2, 184; Ps I.135 sq.; Pug 22; Dhs 392, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 257 sq., 293, 325); Vbh 145, 245, 341, 393 sq.; Sdhp 13, 333. - (d) Miscellaneous: 4 diṭṭhiyo at Vbh 376; also at Vism 511 (sakkāya°, uccheda°, sassata°, akiriya°); 5 Vbh 378; 6 at M I.8; Vbh 382; 7 at Vbh 383; 20 see under sakkāya°; 62 under diṭṭhigata. - In series diṭṭhi khanti ruci laddhi characterizing "diṭṭhadhamma" at Nd2 299 & passim. Diṭṭhiyā sutiyā ðāṇena in def. of a theory of cognition at Nd2 300 as complementing taṇhā: see taṇhā B 3. Coupled with vācā & citta in formula (taṃ) vācaṃ appahāya cittaṃ appahāya diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā . . . (nikkhitto evaṃ niraye) at S IV.319= D III.13, 15; combd with (& opposed to) sīla (as pāpaka & bhaddaka) at It 26, 27. - diṭṭhiṃ āsevati to hold a view M I.323; °ṃ bhindati to give up a view J I.273; Dāvs II.58. -ānugati a sign of speculation Vin II.108; S II.203; Pug 33. -ānusaya inclination to speculation D III.254, 282; S V.60; A IV.9; -āsava the intoxicant of speculation, the 3rd of four āsavā, viz. kāma°, bhava°, d.°, avijjā° Vin III.5; Nd2 134; Dhs 1099, 1448; Vbh 373; cp. °ogha; -upadānā taking up or adhering to false doctrines, the 2nd of the four upādānāni or attachments, viz. kāma°, d.°, sīlabbata°, attavāda° D III.230; Dhs 1215, 1536; -ogha the flood of false doctrine, in set of four ogha's as under °āsava D III.230, 276; Nd2 178; -kantāra the wilderness of groundless speculation Dhs 381, 1003, 1099, etc.; see °gata; -gaṇṭhi the web or tangle of sophisticism VvA 297; cp. °sanghāṭa; -gata (nt.) "resorting to views," theory, groundless opinion, false doctrine, often followed by series of characterizing epithets: d.-gahana, °kantāra, °visūka, °vipphandita, °saññojana, e. g. M I.8; Nd2 271IIIb. Of these sophistical speculations 2 are mentioned at It 43, Ps I.129; 6 at Ps I.130; 62 (the usual number, expressing "great and small" sets, cp. dvi A II.) at D I.12-39 (in detail); S IV.286; Ps I.130; Nd2 271IIIb; Nett 96, 112, 160. - Vin I.49; D I.162, 224, 226; S I.135, 142; II.230; III.109, 258 sq. (anekavihitāni); IV.286 (id.); M I.8, 176, 256 sq. (pāpaka), 326 (id.), 426 sq.; A IV.68; V.72 sq., 194 (pāpaka); Sn 649, 834, 913; Pug 15; Dhs 277, 339, 392, 505; Vism 454. - adj. °gatika adhering to (false) doctrine Dpvs VI.25; -gahana the thicket of speculation Dhs 381, 1003; see °gata; -jāla the net of sophistry D I.46; DA I.129; -ṭṭhāna a tenet of speculative philosophy D I.16; M I.136; A V.198; Ps I.138 (eight); Miln 332; DA I.107; nijjhānakkhanti forbearance with wrong views S II.115; IV.139; A I.189 sq.; II.191; Nd2 151; nipāta a glance VvA 279; -nissaya the foundation of speculation M I.137; D II.137 sq.; -pakkha the side or party of sophists Nett 53, 88, 160; -paṭilābha the attainment of speculation M III.46; -paṭivedha=prec. D III.253; -patta one who has formed (a right or wrong) view D III.105, 254; M Pāli Text Society 735 Pāli-English Dictionary I.439; A I.74; 118, IV.10; V.23; -parāmasa perversion by false doctrine Dhs 1498; -maṇḍala the circle of speculative dogmatics DhsA 109; -vipatti failure in theory, the 3rd of the four vipattiyo viz. sīla°, ācāra°, d.°, ājīva°; opp. °sampadā Vin V.98; D III.213; A I.95, 268; Pug 21; Dhs 1362; Vbh 361; -vipallāsa contortion of views A II.52; -visaṃyoga disconnection with false doctrine D III.230, 276; -visuddhi beauty of right theory A I.95; M I.147 sq.; D III.214, 288; visūka (nt.) the discord or disunion (lit. the going into parties) of theories, the (?) puppetshow of opinion M I.8, 486; Sn 55 (=dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni), K S II.44; Vv 8426; Pv IV.137; Nd2 301 (=vīsati-vattukā sakkāyadiṭṭhi); cp. Nd2 25 (attānudiṭṭhi); Dhs 381 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101), 1003, 1099. See also °gata; -vyasana failing or misfortune in theory (+sīla°, in character) D III.235; Nd2 304; -saṃyojana the fetter or bond of empty speculation (cp. °anusaya) D III.254; A IV.7 sq.; -sanghāta the weft or tangle of wrong views (cp. °gaṇṭhi) Nd1 343; Nd2 503; samudaya the origin of wrong views A IV.68; -sampadā success in theory, blessing of right views, attainment of truth D III.213; 235 (opp. °vipatti), S V.30 sq.; A I.95, 269; III.438; IV.238; Pug 25; Dhs 1364; VvA 297; -sampanna endowed with right views S II.43, 58, 80; V.11; A III.438 sq.; IV.394; Vbh 366; Dialogues iii.206, n. 10; -sārin (adj.) following wrong views Sn 911. Diṭṭhika {Ditthika} (adj.) (-°) seeing, one who regards; one who has a view M III.24 (āgamana° one who views the arrival, i. e. of guests); S II.168 sq. (sammā° & micchā° hoḷding right & wrong theories); D III.96 (vītimissa°). See aðða°, micchā°, sammā°. Diṭṭhitā {Ditthita} (f.) [fr. diṭṭhi] the fact of having a (straightforward) view (uju°) Miln 257. Diṭṭhin {Ditthin} (adj.-n.) one who has a view, or theory, a follower of such & such a doctrine Ud 67 (evaṃ°+evaṃ vādin). Diṇṇa {Dinna} [Sk. dīrṇa, pp. of dṛ, dṛṇāti, see darī] broken, split, undone, torn, as neg. adiṇṇa unbroken D I.115 (so read for ādina-khattiya-kula; v. l. BB. abhinna°); S V.74 (so read for ādīna-mānaso, v. l. BB. adinā & SS ādina°). Cp. also ādiṇṇa. Ditta1 {Ditta} [Sk. dīpta, dīp; cp. dīpa] blazing. Dāvs V.32. Usually in cpd. āditta. Ditta2 {Ditta} [Sk. dṛpta; cp. dappa] proud, arrogant, insolent; wanton Th 1, 198; J II.432; III.256=485; V.17, 232; VI.90, 114. Diddha {Diddha} [Sk. digdha to dih, see deha] smeared J V.425 sq.; esp. smeared with poison, poisoned J IV.435 (sara, a poisoned arrow); perhaps to be read at It 68 for duṭṭha (scil. sara) and at S II.230 for diṭṭha. Cp. san°. Dina {Dina} (nt.) [Sk. dina; Lat. nun-dinae (*noven-dinom); Oir. denus; Goth. sin-teins; cp. divasa] day Sdhp 239. -duddinaṃ darkness Dāvs V.50 (d. sudinaṃ ahosi, cp. I.49, 51); also as f. duddinī Vin I.3. Dindibha {Dindibha} [cp. Sk. ṭiṭṭibha?] a kind of bird J VI.538. Dindima {Dindima} (nt.) [Sk. ḍiṇḍima, cp. dundubhi] a musical instrument, a small drum J VI.580; Bu I.32. See also deṇḍima. Pāli Text Society 736 Pāli-English Dictionary Dinna {Dinna} [Sk. dinna, pp. of dadāti] given, granted, presented etc., in all meanings of dadāti q. v.; esp. of giving alms Pv IV.326 (=mahādāna PvA 253) & in phrase adinn'ādāna taking what is not given, i. e. stealing, adj. adinnādāyin stealing, refraining from which constitutes the 2nd sīla (see under sīla). - dinna: D I.55≈(n'atthi dinnaṃ the heretic view of the uselessness of almsgiving); J I.291; II.128; Sn 191, 227, 240; Dh 356; PvA 68 (given in marriage). Used as finite tense freq., e. g. J I.151, 152; VI.366. - adinna: M I.39, 404; Sn 119 (theyyā adinnaṃ ādiyati), 156, 395, 400, 633; PvA 33 etc. -ādāyin taking (only) what is given D I.4; DA I.72; -dāna almsgiving J III.52; DhA I.396; -dāyin giving alms, liberal, munificent D III.191. Dinnaka {Dinnaka} an adopted son, in enumn of four kinds of sons (atraja, khettaja, antevāsika, d.) Nd2 448; J I.135 (=posāvanatthāya dinna). Dippati [Sk. dīpyate, see under dīpa1 & cp. jotati] to shine, to shine forth, to be illustrious Vin II.285. Cp. pa°. Dibba {Dippati} (adj.) [Ved. divya=P. divya in verse (q. v.), Gr. di_os (*divios), Lat. dīus (*divios)=divine. Cp. deva] of the next world, divine, heavenly, celestial, superb, magnificent, fit for exalted beings higher than man (devas, heroes, manes etc.), superhuman, opp. mānusaka human. Freq. qualifying the foll. "summa bona": cakkhu the deva-eye, i. e. the faculty of clairvoyance, attr. in a marked degree to the Buddha & other perfect beings (see cakkhumant) D I.82, 162; II.20 (yena sudaṃ samantā yojanaṃ passati divā c'eva rattið ca); III.219; S I.196; II.55 sq.; M II.21; It 52; Th 2, 70; Ps I.114; II.175; Vism 434; Sdhp 482; PvA 5 (of Moggallāna); Tikp 278; Dukp 54. sota the d. ear, matching the d. eye D I.79, 154; J V.456; also as sotadhātu A I.255; M II.19; D III.38, 281; Vism 430. rūpa D I.153. Āyu, vaṇṇa etc. (see dasa ṭhānāni) A I.115; III.33; IV.242; PvA 9, 89. kāmā Sn 361; Dh 187; It 94; also as kāmaguṇā A V.273. Of food, drink, dress & other commodities: A I.182; J I.50, 202; III.189; PvA 23, 50, 70, 76 etc. Def. as devaloke sambhūta DA I.120; divibhavattā dibba KhA 227; divibhāvaṃ devattabhāvapariyāpanna PvA 14. - See further e. g. S I.105; D III.146; Sn 176, 641; Dh 236, 417; Pug 60; Vism 407 (defn), 423. -osadha magical drugs Miln 283; -kāmā (pl.) heavenly joys (see above) J I.138 (opp. mānusakā); -cakkhuka endowed with the superhuman eye S II.156; A I.23, 25; paṇṇākāra (dasavidha°) the (tenfold) heavenly gift (viz. āyu, vaṇṇa etc.: see ṭhāna) DhA III.292; -bhāva divine condition or state PvA 110; -yoga union with the gods S I.60; -vihāra supreme condition of heart Miln 225; -sampatti heavenly bliss J IV.3; DhA III.292; PvA 16, 30. {Dibba} Dibbati {Dibbati} [Sk. dīvyati, pp. dyūta see jūta] to sport, to amuse oneself VvA 18 (in expl. of devī); to play at dice M II.106 (akkhehi). Dirasaññu {Dirasannu} (adj.) [Sk. dara-saṃjña? See Kern, Toev. p. 118] one who has little commonsense J VI.206, 207, 213, 214. Com. expls wrongly on p. 209 with "one who possesses two tongues" (of Agni), but has equivalent nippañña on p. 217 (text 214: appapañña+). Diva {Diva} [Sk. diva (nt.), weak base diÛ (div) of strong form diē (see deva) to *deieÛo to shine; cp. Sk. dyo heaven, divā adv. by day; Lat. biduum (bi-divom) two days] (a) heaven J IV.134 (°ṃ agā); V.123 (°ṃ patta); PvA 74 (°ṃ gata). - (b) day Sn 507 (rattindivaṃ night & day); VvA 247 (rattindiva one night & one day, i. e. 24 hrs.); DhA II.8 (divā-divassa so early in the day). Also in divaṃ-kara, daymaker,=sun, VvA 307; usually as divākara (q. v.). Cp. devasika; see also ajja. -santatta heated for a whole day J IV.118 (cp. divasa°) Pāli Text Society 737 Pāli-English Dictionary Divasa {Divasa} (m; nt. only in expression satta divasāni 7 days or a week J IV.139; Miln 15) [Sk. divasa; see diva] a day A I.206 (°ṃ atināmeti); J III.52 (uposatha°); PvA 31 (yāva sattadivasā a week long), 74 (sattamo divaso). Usually in oblique cases adverbially, viz. acc. divasaṃ (during) one day, for one day, one day long A III.304= IV.317; J I.279; II.2; DhA III.173 (taṃ d. that day); eka° one day J I.58; III.26; PvA 33, 67. - gen. divasassa (day) by day S II.95 (rattiyā ca d. ca); J V.162; DA I.133. - instr. divasā day by day J IV.310; divasena (eka°) on the same day J I.59; sudivasena on a lucky day J IV.210. - loc. divase on a day: eka° J III.391; jāta° on his birthday J III.391; IV.138; dutiya° the next day PvA 12, 13, 17, 31, 80 etc.; puna° id. J I.278; PvA 19, 38; sattame d. on the 7th day Sn 983; Miln 15; PvA 6; ussava° on the festive d. VvA 109; apara° on another day PvA 81. Also repeated divase divase day after day, every day J I.87; PvA 3. - abl. divasato from the day (-°) J I.50; DA I.140. -kara the "day-maker," i. e. the sun (cp. divākara) VvA 169, 271; -bhāga the day-part (opp. ratti° the night-part), day-time Miln 18 (°ena); PvA 152 (°ṃ), 206 (°e=divā); -santatta heated the livelong day S I.169; M I.453; A IV.70, cp. Vin I.225; Miln 325; cp. diva° Divā {Diva} (adv.) [Ved. divā, cp. diva] by day S I.183; M I.125; Dh 387; DA I.251; PvA 43, 142, 206 (=divasa-bhāge). Often combd & contrasted with rattiṃ (or ratto) by night; e. g. divārattiṃ by day & by night S I.47; divā c'eva rattið ca D II.20; rattim pi divā pi J II.133; divā ca ratto ca S I.33; Sn 223; Dh 296; Vv 314; VvA 128. - divātaraṃ (compar. adv.) later on in the day M I.125; J III.48, 498. - atidivā too late S I.200; A III.117. -kara (=divaṃ kara) the day-maker, the sun ThA 70 (=Ap. V.16); PvA 155; -divassa (adv.) early in the day, at sunrise, at an early hour Vin II.190; S I.89, 91, 97; A V.185; M II.100, 112; J II.1; VI.31; DhA II.8; VvA 239, 242; -vihāra the day-rest, i. e. rest during the heat of the day Vin I.28, S I.129, 132, 146, 193=Th 1, 1241; Sn 679; -saððā consciousness by day, daily c. D III.223=A II.45; -seyyā=°vihāra D I.112. Divi°{Divi°} an abstraction fr. divya constructed for etym. expln of dibba as divi-bhava (°bhāva) of divine existence or character, a divine being, in "divi-bhavāni divyāni ettha atthī ti divyā" SnA 219; "divi-bhavattā dibbā ti" KhA 227; "divibhāvaṃ devattabhāvapariyāpanno ti dibbo" PvA 14. Divilla {Divilla} a musical instrument Dpvs XVI.14. Divya {Divya} [Sk. divya; the verse-form for the prose-form dibba (q. v.)] (adj.) divine Sn 153 (cp. SnA 219 under divi°), 524 (+mānusaka); J VI.172. - (nt.) the divinity, a divine being (=devatā) J VI.150; SnA 219. Disa {Disa} [Sk. dviṣant & dviṣa (-°); dveṣṭi & dviśati to hate; cp. Gr. deino/s (corynthic dveini/a, hom. de/dvimen) fearful; Lat. dīrus=E. dire] an enemy Dh 42, 162; J III.357; IV.217; V.453; Th I.874-6; cp. Pss. Breth., 323, n. I. Disatā1 {Disata} (f.) [Sk. diśatā, see disā] direction, quarter, region, part of the world J IV.359; Pv II.921 (kiṃ disataṃ gato "where in the world has he gone?"); Vv II.32 (sādisatā the circle of the 6 directions, cp. VvA 102). Disatā2 {Disata} (f.) [Sk. *dviṣatā, see disa] state of being an enemy, a host of enemies J IV.295 (=disasamūha, v. l. as gloss: verasamoha). Pāli Text Society 738 Pāli-English Dictionary Disati {Disati} [Ved. diśati, *deik to show, point towards; cp. Gr. dei/knumi (di/kh=diśā), Lat. dico (indico, index=pointer, judex), Goth. gateihan=Ger. zeigen, Ags. taecan=E. token] to point, show; to grant, bestow etc. Usually in combn with pref. ā, or in Caus. deseti (q. v.). As simplex only at S I.217 (varaṃ disā to be read for disaṃ; cp. Sk. adiśat). See also upa°. Disā {Disa} (f.) [Ved. diś & diśā, to diśati "pointing out," point; cp. Gr. di/kh=diśā] point of the compass, region, quarter, direction, bearings. The 4 principal points usualy enumd are puratthimā (E) pacchimā (W) dakkhiṇā (S) uttarā (N), in changing order. Thus at S I.101, 145; II.103; III.84; IV.185, 296; Nd2 302; Pv II.126 (caturo d.); PvA 52 (catūsu disāsu nirayo catūhi dvārehi yutto), and passim. - To these are often added the two locations "above & below" as uparimā & heṭṭhimā disā (also as uddhaṃ adho S III.124 e. g.; also called paṭidisā D III.176), making in all 6 directions: D III.188 sq. As a rule, however, the circle is completed by the 4 anudisā (intermediate points; sometimes as vidisā: S I.224; III.239; D III.176 etc.), making a round of 10 (dasa disā) to denote completeness, wide range & all pervading comprehensiveness of states, activities or other happening: Sn 719, 1122 (disā catasso vidisā catasso uddhaṃ adho: dasa disā imāyo); Th 2, 487; Ps II.131; Nd2 239 (see also cātuddisa in this sense); Pv I.111; II.110; Vism 408. sabbā (all) is often substituted for 10: S I.75; D II.15; Pv I.21; VvA 184; PvA 71. - anudisā (sg.) is often used collectively for the 4 points in the sense of "in between," so that the circle always implies the 10 points. Thus at S I.122; III.124. In other combinations as 6 abbreviated for 10; four disā plus uddhaṃ & anudisaṃ at D I.222=A III.368; four d.+uddhaṃ adho & anudisaṃ at S I.122; III.124; A IV.167. In phrase "mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati" (etc. up to 4th) the allcomprehending range of universal goodwill is further denoted by uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ etc., e. g. D I.250; Vbh 272; see mettā. - As a set of 4 or 8 disā is also used allegorically ("set, circle") for var. combinations, viz. the 8 states of jhāna at M III.222; the 4 satipaṭṭhānā etc. at Nett 121; the 4 āhārā etc. at Nett 117. See also in other applications Vin I.50 (in meaning of "foreign country"); II.217; S I.33 (abhayā), 234 (puthu°); III.106; V.216; D III.197 sq.; It 103; Th 1, 874; Vv 416 (disāsu vissutā). disaṃ kurute to run away J V.340. diso disaṃ (often spelt disodisaṃ) in all directions (lit. from region to region) D III.200; J III.491; Th 1, 615; Bu II.50; Pv III.16; Miln 398. But at Dh 42 to disa (enemy), cp. DhA I.324=coro coraṃ. See also J.P.T.S. 1884, 82 on abl. diso=diśatah. Cp. vidisā. kāka a compass-crow, i. e. a crow kept on board ship in order to search for land (cp. Fick, Soc. Gl. p. 173; E. Hardy, Buddha p. 18) J III.126, 267; -kusala one who knows the directions Vin II.217; -cakkhuka "seeing" (i. e. wise) in all directions J III.344; -ḍāha "sky-glow," unusual redness of the horizon as if on fire, polar light (?) or zodiacal light (?) D I.10; J I.374: VI.476; Miln 178; DA I.95; cp. BSk. diśodāha AvŚ II.198; -pati (disampati) a king S I.86; J VI.45; pāmokkha world-famed J I.166; -bhāga [Sk. digbhāga] direction, quarter Vin II.217; -mūḷha [Sk. diṅmūḍha] one who has lost his bearings Dpvs IX.15; -vāsika living in a foreign country DhA III.176. -vāsin=°vāsika DhA IV.27. Dissati {Dissati} Pass. of *dassati, q. v. Dīgha {Digha} (adj.-n.) [Ved. dīrgha, cp. Caus. drāghayati to lengthen, *dlāgh as in Gr. dolixo/s (shaft), e)ndelexh/s (lasting etc.; cp. E. entelechy); Lat. indulges; Goth. tulgus (enduring)] 1. (adj.) long D I.17; M I.429; S I.104 (°ṃ addhānaṃ); Sn 146, 633 (opp. rassa); Dh 60, 409; Pv I.1011 (°ṃ antaraṃ all the time); II.955 (id.); Th 1, 646 (°m-antare); Dhs 617; KhA 245; PvA 27, 28, 33, 46. See def. at Vism 272. - dīghato lengthways J VI.185; dīghaso in length Vin IV.279; atidīgha too long Vin IV.7, 8. - 2. (m.) a snake (cp. M Vastu II.45 dīrghaka) J I.324; II.145; IV.330. - 3. N. of the Dīgha Nikāya ("the long collection") Vism 96. -angulin having long fingers (the 4th of Pāli Text Society 739 Pāli-English Dictionary the marks of a Mahāpurisa) D II.17; III.143, 150; -antara corridor J VI.349. -āyu long-lived (opp. app'āyu) D I.18; J V.71. Also as °ka D III.150; DA I.135; Sdhp 511; -āvu=°āyu in the meaning of āyasmant (q. v.) J V.120; -jāti (f.) a being of the snake kind, a snake DhA III.322; also as °ka at J II.145; III.250; IV.333; V.449; DA I.252; -dasa having long fringes D I.7; -dassin [Sk. dīrghadarśin] far-seeing (=sabba-dassāvin) PvA 196; -nāsika having a long nose Vism 283. bhāṇaka a repeater or expounder of the Dīgha Nikāya J I.59; Vism 36, 266, 286; DA I.15, 131; rattaṃ (adv.) [Sk. *dīrgharātraṃ, see Indexes to AvŚ; Divy & Lal. V.; otherwise dīrgha-kālaṃ] a long time D I.17, 206; A V.194; Sn 649; It 8; J I.12, 72; Pv I.44; II.1311 (°rattāya=°rattaṃ PvA 165); Pug 15; DhA IV.24; -loma long-haired Vin III.129; also as °ka at J I.484, f. °ikā S II.228; sotthiya (nt.) long welfare or prosperity DhA II.227. Dīghatta {Dighatta} (nt.) [Sk. dīrghatvaṃ] length A I.54. Dīna {Dina} (adj.) [Sk. dīna] poor, miserable, wretched; base, mean, low D II.202 (?) (°māna; v. l. ninnamāna); J V.448; VI.375; Pv II.82 (=adānajjhāsaya PvA 107); IV.81; Miln 406; PvA 120 (=kapaṇa), 260 (id.), 153; Sdhp 188, 324. Dīnatta {Dinatta} (nt.) [Sk. *dīnatvaṃ] wretchedness, miserable state Sdhp 78. Dīpa1 {Dipa} [Ved. dīpa to Ved. dī, dīpyate; Idg. *deiā to shine (see dibba, deva); cp. Gr. di/alos, dh_los; see also jotati] a lamp J II.104 (°ṃ jāleti to light a l.); DhA II.49 (id.), 94 (id.) -acci the flame of a lamp ThA 154; -āloka light of a l. J I.266; VI.391; DhA I.359; VvA 51; - (°ṃ)kara making light, shining, illuminating Nd2 399 (=pabhaṃ kara Sn 1136; but cp. Dh 236 under dīpa2); Vism 203. -tittira a decoy partridge (cp. dīpaka°) J III.64; -rukkha lit. lamp-tree, the stand of a lamp, candlestick DhA IV.120; -sikhā the flame (lit. crest) of a l. Vism 171; DhA II.49. Dīpa2 {Dipa} (m. & nt.) [Ved. dvīpa=dvi+ap (*sp.) of āpa water, lit. "double-watered," between (two) waters] an island, continent (mahā°, always as 4); terra firma, solid foundation, restingplace, shelter, refuge (in this sense freq. combd w. tāṇa lena & saraṇa & expl. in Com. by patiṭṭhā) - (a) lit. island: S V.219; J III.187; VvA 19; Mhvs VII.7, 41. - continent: cattāro mahādīpā S V.343; Vv 2010 (=VvA 104); VvA 19; PvA 74 etc. Opp. the 2000 paritta-dīpā the smaller islands KhA 133. - (b) fig. shelter, salvation etc. (see also tāṇa): S III.42 (atta°+attasaraṇa etc., not with S Index to dīpa1); V.154, 162 (id.) IV.315 (maṃ°, not to dīpa1), 372; A I.55 sq. (+tāṇa etc.); Sn 501 (atta° selfreliant, self-supported, not with Fausböll to dīpa1), 1092, 1094, 1145 (=Satthā); Nd2 303; Dh 236 (°ṃ karohi=patiṭṭhā PvA 87); Pv III.19 (id. PvA 174); J V.501=VI.375 (dīpað ca parāyaṇaṃ); Miln 84, 257 (dhamma-dīpa, Arahantship). -ālaya resting place J VI.432; -gabbhaka same J VI.459, 460. Dīpa3 {Dipa} [cp. Sk. dvīpa tiger's skin] a car covered with a panther's skin J I.259; V.259=VI.48. Dīpaka1 {Dipaka} (=dīpa1) (a) f. dīpikā a lamp, in daṇḍa° a torch DhA I.220, 399, - (b) (°-) an image of, having the appearance of, sham etc.; in -kakkara a decoy partridge J II.161; -tittira same J III.358; -pakkhin a decoy bird J V.376; -miga a d. antelope J V.376. Dīpaka2 {Dipaka} (=dīpa2) a (little) island J I.278, 279; II.160. Dīpaka3 {Dipaka} in vaṇidīpaka PvA 120 for vanibbaka (q. v.). Pāli Text Society Dīpana 740 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) illustrating, explaining; f. °ī explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramattha -dīpanī of Dhammapāla on Th 2; Pv & Vv. - Cp. jotikā & uddīpanā. {Dipana} Dīpika {Dipika} [fr. dīpin] a panther J III.480. Dīpita {Dipita} [pp. of dīpeti] explained Vism 33. Dīpitar {Dipitar} [n. ag. fr. dīpeti] one who illumines Vism 211. Dīpin {Dipin} [Sk. dvīpin] a panther, leopard, tiger Vin I.186 dīpicamma a leopard skin=Sk. dvīpicarman); A III.101; J I.342; II.44, 110; IV.475; V.408; VI.538. dīpi-rājā king of the panthers Vism 270. - f. dīpinī Miln 363, 368; DhA I.48. Dīpeti {Dipeti} [Sk. dīpayati, Caus. to dīp, see dīpa1 & cp. dippati] to make light, to kindle, to emit light, to be bright; to illustrate, explain A V.73 sq.; Dh 363; Miln 40; PvA 94, 95, 102, 104 etc.; Sdhp 49, 349. Cp. ā°. Du°1 {Du°} (& before vowels dur°) (indecl.) [Sk. duḥ & duṣ=Gr. du/s-, Oir. du-, Ohg. zur-, zer-; antithetic prefix, generally opposed to su°=Gr. eu)- etc. Ultimately identical with du2 in sense of asunder, apart, away from= opposite or wrong] 1. syllable of exclamation (=duḥ) "bad, woe" (beginning the word du (j) -jīvitaṃ) DhA II.6, 10=PvA 280, cp. J III.47; Bdhgh's expln of the syllable see at Vism 494. - 2. prefix, implying perverseness, difficulty, badness (cp. dukkha). Original form *duḥ is preserved at dur- before vowels, but assimilated to a foll. consonant according to the rules of Assimilation, i. e. the cons. is doubled, with changes of v to bb & usual lengthening dū before r (but also du°). For purposes of convenience all cpds. with du° are referred to the simplex, e. g. dukkaṭa is to be looked up under kata, duggati under gati etc. See: A. dur°. akkhāta, accaya, atikkama, atta, adhiroha, anta, annaya, abhisambhava; āgata, ājāna, āyuta, āsada; itthi; ukkhepa, ubbaha. - B. du°: (k)kata, kara; (g)ga, gata, gati, gandha, gahīta; (c)caja, carita, cola; (j)jaha, jāna, jivha, jīvita; (t)tappaya, tara; (d)dama, dasika; (n)naya, nikkhaya, nikkhitta, niggaha, nijjhāpaya, nibbedha, nīta; (p)paðða, paṭiānaya, paṭinissaggin, paṭipadā, paṭivijjha, paṭivedha, pabhajja, pamuðca, pameyya, parihāra, payāta, pasu, peyya, posa; (p)phassa; (bb=b): bala, balika, budha; (bb=v): dubbaca=) vaca, vacana, vaṇṇa, vijāna, vidū, vinivijjha, visodha, vuṭṭhika; (b) bhaga, bhara, bhāsita, bhikkha; (m)mati, mana, manku, mukha, mejjha, medha; (y)yiṭṭha, yuja, yutta; (du+r)=du-ratta, ropaya (dū+r): dū-rakkha; (l)labha; (s)saddhapaya, sassa, saha, sīla; hara. Du°2 {Du°} in cpds. meaning two°; see dvi B II. Du3 {Du} (-°) (adj.-suff.) [Sk. druha, druh, see duhana & duhitika] hurting, injuring, acting perfidiously, betraying, only in mitta° deceiving one's friends S I.225; Sn 244 expl. as mittadūbhaka SnA 287, v. l. B mittadussaka; cp. mitta-dubbhika & mitta-dubbhin. Duka {Duka} (nt.) [see dvi B II] a dyad DhsA 36, 343, 347, 406; Vism 11 sq. & in titles of books "in pairs, on pairs," e. g. Dukapaṭṭhāna {Dukapatthana} ;or chapters, e. g. J II.1 (°nipāta). Pāli Text Society 741 Pāli-English Dictionary Dukūla {Dukula} [Sk. dukūla] a certain (jute?) plant; (nt.) [cp. Sk. dukūlaṃ woven silk] very fine cloth, made of the fibre of the d. plant S III.145; A IV.393; J II.21; IV.219; V.400; VI.72; Vism 257, 262; VvA 165; DA I.140; Dāvs V. 27. Dukkha {Dukkha} (adj.-n.) [Sk. duḥkha fr. duḥ-ka, an adj. formation fr. prefix duḥ (see du). According to others an analogy formation after sukha, q. v.; Bdhgh (at Vism 494) expls dukkha as du+kha, where du=du1 and kha=ākāsa. See also def. at Vism 461.] A. (adj.) unpleasant, painful, causing misery (opp. sukha pleasant) Vin I.34; Dh 117. Lit. of vedanā (sensation) M I.59 (°ṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāna, see also below III.1 e); A II.116=M. I.10 (sarīrikāhi vedanāhi dukkhāhi). - Fig. (fraught with pain, entailing sorrow or trouble) of kāmā D I.36 (=paṭipīḷan-aṭṭhena DA I.121); Dh 186 (=bahudukkha DhA III.240); of jāti M I.185 (cp. ariyasacca, below B I.); in combn dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiððā D III.106; Dhs 176; Nett 7, 112 sq., cp. A II.149 sq. ekanta° very painful, giving much pain S II.173; III.69. dukkhaṃ (adv.) with difficulty, hardly J I.215. B. (nt.; but pl. also dukkhā, e. g. S I.23; Sn 728; Dh 202, 203, 221. Spelling dukha (after sukha) at Dh 83, 203). There is no word in English covering the same ground as Dukkha does in Pali. Our modern words are too specialised, too limited, and usually too strong. Sukha & dukkha are ease and dis-ease (but we use disease in another sense); or wealth and ilth from well & ill (but we have now lost ilth); or wellbeing and ill-ness (but illness means something else in English). We are forced, therefore, in translation to use half synonyms, no one of which is exact. Dukkha is equally mental & physical. Pain is too predominantly physical, sorrow too exclusively mental, but in some connections they have to be used in default of any more exact rendering. Discomfort, suffering, ill, and trouble can occasionally be used in certain connections. Misery, distress, agony, affliction and woe are never right. They are all much too strong & are only mental (see Mrs. Rh. D. Bud. Psy. 83-86, quoting Ledi Sadaw). I. Main Points in the Use of the Word.-The recognition of the fact of Dukkha stands out as essential in early Buddhism. In the very first discourse the four socalled Truths or Facts (see saccāni) deal chiefly with dukkha. The first of the four gives certain universally recognised cases of it, & then sums them up in short. The five groups (of physical & mental qualities which make an individual) are accompanied by ill so far as those groups are fraught with āsavas and grasping. (Paðc'upādānakkhandhā pi dukkhā; cp. S III.47). The second Sacca gives the cause of this dukkha (see Taṇhā). The third enjoins the removal of this taṇhā. And the fourth shows the way, or method, of doing so (see Magga). These ariyasaccāni are found in two places in the older books Vin I.10=S V.421 (with addition of soka-parideva . . . etc. [see below] in some MSS). Comments on this passage, or part of it, occur S III.158, 159; with expln of each term (+soka) D I.189; III.136, 277; M I.185; A I.107; Sn p. 140; Nd2 under sankhārā; It 17 (with dukkhassa atikkama for nirodha), 104, 105; Ps I.37; II.204, 147; Pug 15, 68; Vbh 328; Nett 72, 73. It is referred to as dukkha, samudaya, nirodha, magga at Vin I.16, 18, 19; D III.227; Nd2 304IIb; as āsavānaṃ khaya-ðāṇa at D I.83; Vin III.5; as sacca No. 1+paṭiccasamuppāda at A I.176 sq. (+soka°); in a slightly diff. version of No. 1 (leaving out appiyehi & piyehi, having soka° instead) at D II.305; and in the formula catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ananubodhā etc. at D II.90=Vin I.230. II. Characterisation in Detail.-1. A further specification of the 3rd of the Noble Truths is given in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q.v.), which analyses the links & stages of the causal chain in their interdependence as building up (anabolic=samudaya) &, after their recognition as causes, breaking down (katabolic=nirodha) the dukkha-synthesis, & thus constitutes the Metabolism of kamma; discussed e. g. at Vin 1; D II.32 sq. =S II.2 sq.; S II.17, 20, 65= Nd2 680I.c; S III.14; M I.266 sq.; II.38; A I.177; mentioned e. g. at A I.147; M I.192 sq., 460; It 89 (=dukkhassa antakiriyā). - 2. Dukkha as one of the 3 qualifications of the sankhārā (q. v.), viz. anicca, d., anattā, evanescence, ill, nonsoul: S I.188; II.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); III.112 (id.) III.67, 180, 222; IV.28, 48, 129 sq.; 131 sq. - rūpe Pāli Text Society 742 Pāli-English Dictionary anicc'ānupassī (etc. with dukkh'& anatt') S III.41. anicca-saððā, dukkha° etc. D III.243; A III.334, cp. IV.52 sq. - sabbe sankhārā aniccā etc. Nd2 under sankhārā. - 3. Specification of Dukkha. The Niddesa gives a characteristic description of all that comes under the term dukkha. It employs one stereotyped explanation (therefore old & founded on scholastic authority) (Nd2 304I.), & one expln (304III.) peculiar to itself & only applied to Sn 36. The latter defines & illustrates dukkha exclusively as suffering & torment incurred by a person as punishment, inflicted on him either by the king or (after death) by the guardians of purgatory (niraya-pālā; see detail under niraya, & cp. below III. 2 b). - The first expln (304I.) is similar in kind to the definition of d. as long afterwards given in the Sānkhya system (see Sānkhyakārikā-bhāṣya of Gauḍapāda to stanza 1) & classifies the various kinds of dukkha in the foll. groups: (a) all suffering caused by the fact of being born, & being through one's kamma tied to the consequent states of transmigration; to this is loosely attached the 3 fold division of d. as dukkha°, sankhāra°, vipariṇāma° (see below III. 1 c); - (b) illnesses & all bodily states of suffering (cp. ādhyātmikaṃ dukkhaṃ of Sānkhya k.); - (c) pain & (bodily) discomfort through outward circumstances, as extreme climates, want of food, gnat-bites etc. (cp. ādhibhautikaṃ & ādhidaivikaṃ d. of Sk.); - (d) (Mental) distress & painful states caused by the death of one's beloved or other misfortunes to friends or personal belongings (cp. domanassa). - This list is concluded by a scholastic characterisation of these var. states as conditioned by kamma, implicitly due to the afflicted person not having found his "refuge," i. e. salvation from these states in the 8 fold Path (see above B I.). III. General Application, & various views regarding dukkha. - 1. As simple sensation (: pain) & related to other terms: (a) principally a vedanā, sensation, in particular belonging to the body (kāyika), or physical pain (opp. cetasika dukkha mental ill: see domanassa). Thus defined as kāyikaṃ d. at D II.306 (cp. the distinction between śarīraṃ & mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ in Sānkhya philosophy) M I.302; S V.209 (in def. of dukkhindriya); A II.143 (sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā); Nett 12 (duvidhaṃ d.: kāyikaṃ=dukkhaṃ; cetasikaṃ= domanassaṃ); Vism 165 (twofold), 496 (dukkhā aððaṃ na bādhakaṃ), 499 (seven divisions), 503 (kāyika); SnA 119 (sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā Sn 67=kāyikaṃ sātāsātaṃ). Bdhgh. usually paraphrases d. with vaṭṭadukkha, e. g. at SnA 44, 212, 377, 505. - (b) Thus to be understood as physical pain in combn dukkha+ domanassa "pain & grief," where d. can also be taken as the gen. term & dom° as specification, e. g. in cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti A I.157, 216; IV.406; S II.69; rāgajan d °ṃ dom °ṃ paṭisaṃvedeti A II.149; kāmûpasaṃhitaṃ d °ṃ dom °ṃ A III.207; d °ṃ dom °ṃ paṭisaṃvediyati S IV.343. Also as cpd. dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthangamāya A III.326, & freq. in formula soka-parideva-d°domanass-upāyāsā (grief & sorrow, afflictions of pain & misery, i. e. all kinds of misery) D I.36 (arising fr. kāmā); M II.64; A V.216 sq.; It 89 etc. (see above B I. 4). Cp. also the combn dukkhī dummano "miserable and dejected" S II.282. - (c) dukkha as "feeling of pain" forms one of the three dukkhatā or painful states, viz. d.-dukkhatā (painful sensation caused by bodily pain), sankhāra° id. having its origin in the sankhārā, vipariṇāma°, being caused by change S IV.259; V.56; D III.216; Nett 12. (d) Closely related in meaning is ahita "that which is not good or profitable," usually opposed to sukha & hita. It is freq. in the ster. expression "hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya" for a long time it is a source of discomfort & pain A I.194 sq.; M I.332 D III.157; Pug 33. Also in phrases anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya D III.246 & akusalaṃ . . . ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati A I.58. - (e) Under vedanā as sensation are grouped the 3: sukhaṃ (or sukhā ved.) pleasure (pleasant sensation), dukkhaṃ pain (painful sens.), adukkham-asukhaṃ indifference (indifferent sens.), the last of which is the ideal state of the emotional habitus to be gained by the Arahant (cp. upekhā & nibbidā). Their rQle is clearly indicated in the 4th jhāna: sukhassa pahānā dukkhassa pahānā pubbe va somanassadomanassānaṃ atthangamā adukkham-asukhaṃ upekhā parisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati (see jhāna). - As contents of vedanā: sukhaṃ vediyati dukkhaṃ Pāli Text Society 743 Pāli-English Dictionary v. adukkham-asukhaṃ v. tasmā vedanā ti S III.86, 87; cp. S II.82 (vedayati). tisso vedanā: sukha, d°, adukkham-asukhā° D III.275; S II.53; IV.114 sq., 207, 223 sq., cp. M I.396; A I.173; IV.442; It 46, 47. yaṃ kiðc'āyaṃ purisa-puggalo paṭisaṃvedeti sukhaṃ vā d °ṃ vā a °ṃ vā sabban taṃ pubbe katahetū ti=one's whole life-experience is caused by one's former kamma A I.173=M II.217. - The combn (as complementary pair) of sukha+dukkha is very freq. for expressing the varying fortunes of life & personal experience as pleasure & pain, e. g. n'ālam aððamaððassa sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā sukhadukkhāya vā D I.56=S III.211. Thus under the 8 "fortunes of the world" (loka dhammā) with lābha (& a°), yasa (a°), pasaṃsā (nindā), sukha (dukkha) at D III.260; Nd2 55. Regarded as a thing to be avoided in life: puriso jīvitukāmo . . . sukhakāmo dukkha-paṭikkūlo S IV.172, 188. - In similar contexts: D I.81≈; III.51, 109, 187; S II.22, 39; IV.123 sq.; A II.158 etc. (cp. sukha). 2. As complex state (suffering) & its valuation in the light of the Doctrine: (a) any worldly sensation, pleasure & experience may be a source of discomfort (see above, I.; cp. esp. kāma & bhava) Ps I.11 sq. (specified as jāti etc.); dukkhaṃ=mahabbhayaṃ S I.37; bhārādānaṃ dukkhaṃ loke bhāra-nikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ (pain is the great weight) S III.26; kāmānaṃ adhivacanaṃ A III.310; IV.289; cp. A III.410 sq. (with kāmā, vedanā, saððā, āsavā, kamma, dukkhaṃ). - (b) ekanta° (extreme pain) refers to the suffering of sinful beings in Niraya, & it is open to conjecture whether this is not the first & orig. meaning of dukkha; e. g. M I.74; A II.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati ekanta-d°ṃ seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); see ekanta. In the same sense: . . . upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ cirarattaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanti S I.30; niraya-dukkha Sn 531; pecca d°ṃ nigacchati Sn 278, 742; anubhonti d°ṃ kaṭuka-pphalāni Pv I.1110 (=āpāyikaṃ d°ṃ PvA 60); PvA 67; mahādukkhaṃ anubhavati PvA 43, 68, 107 etc. atidukkhaṃ PvA 65; dukkhato pete mocetvā PvA 8. - (c) to suffer pain, to experience unpleasantness etc. is expressed in foll. terms: dukkhaṃ anubhavati (only w. ref. to Niraya, see b); anveti Dh 1 (=kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vipāka-dukkhaṃ anugacchati DhA I.24), upeti Sn 728; carati S I.210; nigacchati M I.337; Sn 278, 742; paṭisaṃvedeti M I.313 (see above); passati S I.132 (jāto dukkhāni passati: whoever is born experiences woe); vaḍḍheti S II.109; viharati A I.202; II.95; III.3; S IV.78 (passaddhiyā asati d°ṃ v. dukkhino cittaṃ na samādhiyati); vedayati, vediyati, vedeti etc. see above III. 1 e; sayati A I.137. - (d) More specific reference to the cause of suffering & its removal by means of enlightenment: (a) Origin (see also above I. & II. 1): dukkhe loko patiṭṭhito S I.40; yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti sabbaṃ sankhāra-paccayā Sn 731; ye dukkhaṃ vaḍḍhenti te na parimuccanti jātiyā etc. S II.109; d°ṃ ettha bhiyyo Sn 61, 584; yo paṭhavī-dhātuṃ abhinandati dukkhaṃ so abhin° Si I.174; taṇhā d °ssa samudayo etc. Nett 23 sq.; as result of sakkāyadiṭṭhi S IV.147, of chanda S I.22 of upadhi S II.109, cp. upadhīnidānā pabhavanti dukkhā Sn 728; d°ṃ eva hi sambhoti d°ṃ tiṭṭhati veti ca S I.135. - (b) Salvation from Suffering (see above I.): kathaṃ dukkhā pamuccati Sn 170; dukkhā pamuccati S I.14; III.41, 150; IV.205; V.451; na hi putto pati vā pi piyo d °ā pamocaye yathā saddhamma-savanaṃ dukkhā moceti pāṇinaṃ S I,210; na appatvā lokantaṃ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ A II.49. Kammakkhayā . . . sabbaṃ d°ṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ bhavissati M II.217, cp. I.93. kāme pahāya . . . d°ṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitaṃ S I.12=31; rūpaṃ (etc.) abhijānaṃ bhabbo d -°kkhayāya S III.27; IV.89; d°ṃ pariððāya sakhettavatthuṃ Tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsaṃ Sn 473. pajahati d°ṃ Sn 789, 1056. dukkhassa samudayo ca atthangamo ca S II.72; III.228 sq.; IV.86, 327. - dukkhass'antakaro hoti M I.48; A III.400 sq.; It 18; antakarā bhavāmase Sn 32; antaṃ karissanti Satthu sāsana-kārino A II.26; d °parikkhīṇaṃ S II.133; akiñcanaṃ nānupatanti dukkhā S I.23; sankhārānaṃ nirodhena n'atthi d°assa sambhavo Sn 731. - muniṃ d°assa pārayuṃ S I.195=Nd2 136v; antagū 'si pāragū d°assa Sn 539. - sang'ātiko maccujaho nirūpadhi pahāya d°ṃ apunabbhavāya S IV.158; ucchinnaṃ mūlaṃ d°assa, n'atthi dāni punabbhavo Vin I.231= D II.91. -ādhivāha bringing or entailing pain S IV.70; -anubhavana suffering pain or undergoing punishment (in Niraya) J IV.3; antagū one who has conquered suffering Sn 401; -ābhikiṇṇa beset with pain, full of distress It Pāli Text Society 744 Pāli-English Dictionary 89; -āsahanatā non-endurance of ills Vism 325. -indriya the faculty of experiencing pain, painful sensation S V.209, 211; Dhs 556, 560; Vbh 15, 54, 71; -udraya causing or yielding pain, resulting in ill, yielding distress M I.415 sq.; A I.97; IV.43 (+dukkhavipāka); V.117 (dukh°), 243; J IV.398; of kamma: Ps I.80; II.79; Pv I.1110 (so read for dukkhandriya, which is also found at PvA 60); DhA II.40 (°uddaya); -ûpadhāna causing pain Dh 291; -ûpasama the allayment of pain or alleviation of suffering, only in phrase (aṭṭhangiko maggo) d-ûpasama-gāmino S III.86; It 106; Sn 724=Dh 191; - (m)esin wishing ill, malevolent J IV.26; -otiṇṇa fallen into misery S III.93; M I.460; II.10; -kāraṇa labour or trials to be undergone as punishment DhA III.70 (see Dh 138, 139 & cp. dasa1 B 1 b); -khandha the aggregate of suffering, all that is called pain or affliction (see above B II. 1) S II.134; III.93; M I.192 sq.; 200 sq.; etc.; - khaya the destruction of pain, the extinction of ill M I.93; II.217 (kammakkhayā d-kkhayo); S III.27; Sn 732. Freq. in phrase (nīyāti or hoti) sammā-d-kkhayāya "leads to the complete extinction of ill," with ref. to the Buddha's teaching or the higher wisdom, e. g. of brahmacariyā S II.24; of paððā D III.268; A III.152 sq.; of ariyā diṭṭhi D III.264=A III.132; of sikkhā A II.243; of dhamma M I.72; -dhamma the principle of pain, a painful object, any kind of suffering (cp. °khandha) D III.88; S IV.188 (°ānaṃ samudayað ca atthagamað ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti); It 38 (nirodha °anaṃ); -nidāna a source of pain M II.223; Dhs 1059, 1136; -nirodha the destruction of pain, the extinction of suffering (see above B II. 1) M I.191; II.10; A III.410, 416; etc.; -paṭikkūla averse to pain, avoiding unpleasantness, in combn sukhakāmo d-p. S IV.172 (spelt °kulo), 188; M I.341; -patta being in pain J VI.336; -pareta afflicted by pain or misery S III.93; It 89=A I.147; -bhummi the soil of distress Dhs 985; -vāca hurtful speech Pv I.32 (should probably be read duṭṭha°); vipāka (adj.) having pain as its fruit, creating misery S II.128; D III.57, 229; A II.172 (kamma); Ps II.79 (id.); -vepakka =°vipāka Sn 537 (kamma); -saððā the consciousness of pain Nett 27; samudaya the rise or origin of pain or suffering (opp. °nirodha; see above B II. 1) S IV.37; M I.191; II.10; III.267; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṃ vuccati d-s.); -samphassa contact with pain M I.507; Dhs 648; f. abstr. °tā Pug 33; -seyya an uncomfortable couch DhA IV.8. Dukkhatā (f.) [cp. Sk. duḥkhatā, abstr. to dukkha] state of pain, painfulness, discomfort, pain (see dukkha B III. 1 c) D III.216; S IV.259; V.56; Nett 12 (expl.). {Dukkhata} Dukkhati {Dukkhati} [fr. dukkha] to be painful Vism 264. Dukkhatta {Dukkhatta} (nt.) [Sk. *duhkhatvaṃ]=dukkhatā D III.106 (+dandhatta). Dukkhāpana {Dukkhapana} (nt.) [abstr. to dukkhāpeti] bringing sorrow, causing pain Miln 275 sq., 351. Dukkhāpita {Dukkhapita} [pp. of dukkhāpeti] pained, afflicted Miln 79, 180. Dukkhāpeti {Dukkhapeti} [caus. to dukkha] to cause pain, to afflict J IV.452; Miln 276 sq.; PvA 215. pp. dukkhāpita. Dukkhita {Dukkhita} (adj.) [Sk. duḥkhita; pp. of *dukkhāpeti] afflicted, dejected, unhappy, grieved, disappointed; miserable, suffering, ailing (opp. sukhita) D I.72 (puriso ābādhiko d. bāḷha-gilāno); II.24; S I.149; III.11=IV.180 (sukhitesu sukhito dukkhitesu dukkhito); V.211; M I.88; II.66; Vin IV.291; Sn 984, 986; J IV.452; Miln 275; DhA II.28; VvA 67. Pāli Text Society 745 Pāli-English Dictionary Dukkhin {Dukkhin} (adj.-n.) [Sk. duḥkhin] 1. afflicted, grieved, miserable S I.103 sq., 129 sq., II.282 (+dummano); IV.78; A III.57. - 2. a loser in the game J II.160. Dukkhīyati {Dukkhiyati} [Sk. duḥkhīyati & duḥkhāyati Denom. fr. dukkha; cp. vediyati & vedayati] to feel pain, to be distressed DhA II.28 (=vihaññati). Dugga [du+ga] a difficult road Dh 327; Pv II.78. dugge sankamanāni passages over difficult roads, usually combd with papā (water-shed) S I.100; Vv 5222; Pv II.925. {Dugga} Duṭṭha {Duttha} (adj.-n.) [Sk. duṣṭha, pp. of dussati, q. v.] spoilt, corrupt; bad, malignant, wicked Vin III.118; S II.259, 262; IV.339; A I.124 (°āruka), 127 (id.), 157 sq.; It 68 (saro d., perhaps should be read as diddho); J I.187, 254 (°brāhmaṇa); IV.391 (°caṇḍāla); PvA 4 (°corā: rogues of thieves); Sdhp 86, 367, 434. - aduṭṭha not evil, good Sn 623; It 86; DhA IV.164. Cp. pa°. gahaṇika suffering from indigestion Vin I.206; -citta evil-minded Vin II.192; M III.65. Duṭṭhu {Dutthu} (adv.) [Sk. duṣṭhu, cp. suṣṭhu] badly, wrong DhsA 384; SnA 396; VvA 337. Duṭṭhulla {Dutthulla} (adj.) wicked, lewd Vin IV.128; S I.187 (°bhāṇin "whose speech is never lewd," cp. Th 1, 1217 padulla - gāhin, expld as duṭṭhullagāhin Psalms of Brethren 399 n. 3); M I.435; III.159; Vism 313. - (nt.) wicked - ness Vin III.21; kāya° unchastity M III.151; Th 1, 114; Vism 151. -āduṭṭhulla that which is wicked & that which is not Vin V.130; -āpatti a grave transgression of the Rules of the Order, viz. the 4 Pārājika & the 13 Sanghādisesa Vin IV.31 (opp. a° Vin IV.32). Dutiya {Dutiya} (num. ord.) [Sk. dvitīya, with reduction of dvi to du, as in compn mentioned under dvi B II. For the meaning "companion" cp. num. ord. for two in Lat. secundus < sequor, i. e. he who follows, & Gr. deu/teros > deu/omai he who stays behind, also Sk. davīyas farther] (a) (num.) the second, the following J II.102, 110; dutiyaṃ for the second time (cp. tatiyaṃ in series 1, 2, 3) Vin II.188; D II.155. - (b) (adj. n.) one who follows or is associated with, an associate of; accompanying or accompanied by (-°); a companion, friend, partner Vin IV.225; S I.25 (saddhā dutiyā purisassa hoti=his 2nd self); IV.78 (id.) I.131; It 9; J V.400; Th 2, 230 (a husband); Sn 49 (=Nd2 305, where two kinds of associates or companions are distinguished, viz. taṇhā° & puggalo°). taṇhā-dutiyā either "connected with thirst" or "having thirst as one's companion" (see taṇhā) S IV.37; It 109=A II.10; bilanga° kaṇājaka (rice with sour gruel) Vin II.77; S I.90, 91. - adutiya alone, unaccompanied PvA 161. Dutiyaka {Dutiyaka} (adj.-n.) [Dimin. of dutiya] (a) the second, following, next J I.504 (°cittavāre); °ṃ a 2nd time M I.83. - (b) a companion; only in f. dutiyikā a wife or female compn Vin IV.230, 270 (a bhikkhunī as compn of another one); Freq. as purāṇa-dutiyikā one's former wife Vin I.96; III.16; S I.200; M II.63; J I.210; V.152; DhA I.77. Cp. M Vastu II.134 dvitīyā in the same sense. Dutiyyatā {Dutiyyata} (f.) companionship, friendship, help J III.169. Duddabha {Duddabha} see daddabha. Duddha {Duddha} (Sk. dugdha, pp. of duh, see dohati] milked, drawn Sn 18 (duddha-khīra=gāvo duhitvā gahitakhīra SnA 27); M II.186. - (nt.) milk Dāvs V.26. Pāli Text Society 746 Pāli-English Dictionary Dudrabhi {Dudrabhi} [another form of dundubhi, cp. duddabha & dundubhya] a kettle-drum, in Amata° the drum of Nibbāna Vin I.8=M I.171 (dundubhi at the latter passage); PvA 189 (v. l. for dundubhi). Dundubhi {Dundubhi} (m. & f.) [Sk. dundubhi, onomat.; cp. other forms under daddabha, dudrabhi] a kettle-drum, the noise of a drum, a heavy thud, thunder (usually as deva° in the latter meaning) Pv III.34; J VI.465; PvA 40, 189 (v. l. dudrabhi). - Amata° the drum of Nibbāna M I.171=Vin I.8 (: dudrabhi); deva° thunder D II.156; A IV.311. to burn, see der, dava, dāva & dāya. Dupaṭṭo {Dupatto} see dvi B II. Dubbaṇṇa {Dubbanna} see under vaṇṇa. Dubbuṭṭhika {Dubbutthika} see under vuṭṭhi. Dubbha & Dūbha {Dubbha} {Dubha} (adj.) [Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] deceiving, hurting, trying to injure Vin II.203 (=It 86 where dubbhe); Pv II.93 (mitta°). adubbha one who does not do harm, harmless Pv II.98 (°pāṇin=ahiṃsakahattha). As nt. harmlessness, frankness, friendliness, good-will Vin I.347 (adrūbhāya, but cp. vv. ll. p. 395: adubbhaya & adrabbhāvāya); S I.225 (adubbhāya trustily); J I.180 (id. as adūbhāya); spelt wrongly adrūbhaka (for adubbhaka, with v. l. adrabhaka in expl. of adubbha-pāṇin) at J VI.311. Note: dabhāya (dat.) is also used in Sk. in sense of an adv. or infinitive, which confirms the etymology of the word. Cp. dobha. Dubbhaka {Dubbhaka} (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] perfidious, insidious, treacherous Th 1, 214 (citta°). Cp. dubbhaya & dūbhaka. Dubbhati & Dūbhati {Dubbhati} {Dubhati} [Sk. dabhnoti cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 204: dabh (dambh), pp. dabdha; idg. *dhebh, cp. Gr. a)te/mbw to deceive. Cp. also Sk druh (so Kern, Toev. p. 11, s. v. padubbhati). See also dahara & dūbha, dūbhaka, dūbhi] to injure, hurt, deceive; to be hostile to, plot or sin against (either w. dat. J V.245; VI.491, or w. loc. J I.267; III.212) S I.85 (ppr. adubbhanto), 225; It 86 (dubbhe=dusseyya Com.)=Vin II.203 (where dubbho); Th 1, 1129; J II.125; IV.261; V.487, 503. - ppr. also dūbhato J IV.261; ger. dubbhitvā J IV.79; grd. dubbheyya (v. l. dūbheyya) to be punished J V.71. Cp. pa°. Dubbhana {Dubbhana} (nt.) [Sk. *dambhana] hurtfulness, treachery, injury against somebody (c. loc.) PvA 114 (=anattha). Dubbhaya {Dubbhaya} =dubbhaka, S I.107. Dubbhika {Dubbhika} =dubbhaka, Pv III.113 (=mittadubbhika, mittānaṃ bādhaka PvA 175). Dubbhikkha {Dubbhikkha} see bhikkhā. Dubbhin {Dubbhin} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dambhin] seeking to injure, deceitful; a deceiver, hypocrite J IV.41; Pv II.98 (mitta°); DhA II.23 (mitta-dūbhin). - f. dubbhinī VvA 68 (so read for dubbinī). Pāli Text Society 747 Pāli-English Dictionary Dubha {Dubha} (num.-adj.) [See dubhaya & cp. dvi B II.] both; only in abl. dubhato from both sides Th 1, 1134; Ps I.69; II.35, 181; Vv 4621; VvA 281 (for Vv 6419 duvaddhato). Dubhaya {Dubhaya} (num. adj.) [a contaminated form of du(ve) & ubhaya; see dvi B II.] both (see ubhaya) Sn 517, 526, 1007, 1125; J III.442; VI.110. Duma {Duma} [Sk. druma=Gr. drumo/s, see dāru] tree A III.43; J I.87, 272; II.75, 270; VI.249, 528; Vv 8414; Miln 278, 347; VvA 161. -agga 1. the top of a tree J II.155. - 2. a splendid tree Vv 354. 3. a tooth-pick J V.156; -inda "king of trees," the Bodhi tree Dpvs I.7; -uttama a magnificent tree Vv 393; -phala fruit of a tree M II.74; Vism 231 (in comparison). Duyhati {Duyhati} Pass to dohati (q. v.). Dussa1 {Dussa} (nt.) [Sk. dūrśa & dūṣya] woven material, cloth, turban cloth; (upper) garment, clothes Vin I.290; II.128, 174; IV.159. D I.103; S V.71; M I.215; II.92; A V.347; Sn 679; Pv I.103 (=uttarīyaṃ sāṭakaṃ PvA 49); II.314; Pug 55; PvA 73, 75. - cīvara°, q. v.; chava° a miserable garment D I.166; A I.295; II.206; M I.78, 308. -karaṇḍaka a clothes-chest S V.71=M I.215; A IV.230; -koṭṭhagāra a store-room for cloth or clothes DhA I.220, 393; -gahaṇa (-mangala) (the ceremony of) putting on a garment DhA II.87; -cālanī a cloth sieve Vin I.202; -paṭṭa turban cloth Vin II.266 (=setavattha-paṭṭa Bdhgh.); S II.102; -phala having clothes as fruit (of magic trees, cp. kapparukkha) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); -maya consisting in clothes Vv 467 (cp. VvA 199); -yuga a suit of garments Vin I.278; M I.215=S V.71; Miln 31 (cp. M Vastu I.61); DhA IV.11; ratana "a pearl of a garment," a fine garment Miln 262. -vaṭṭi fringed cotton cloth Vin II.266. veṇi plaited cotton cloth Vin II.266. Dussa2 {Dussa} at J III.54 is usually taken as=amussa (cp. amuka). C. expls as "near," & adds "asammussa." Or is it Sk. dūṣya easily spoilt? See on this passage Andersen Pali Reader II.124. Dussaka {Dussaka} =dūsaka (q. v.). Dussati {Dussati} [Sk. duṣyati, Denom. fr. pref. duḥ (du°); pp. duṣṭha, caus. dūṣayati] to be or become bad or cor. rupted, to get damaged; to offend against, to do wrong Vin II.113; S I.13=164; Dh 125=PvA 116; Dh 137; It 84 (dosancyye na d.) cp. A III.110 (dussanīye d.); J VI.9; Miln 101, 386. - pp. duṭṭha (q. v.). - Caus. dūseti (q. v.). See also dosa1 & dosaniya; & pa°. Dussanā (f.) & Dussana(nt.) {Dussana} [Sk. dūṣana, cp. dussati] defilement, guilt A II.225; Pug 18, 22; Dhs 418, 1060; DA I.195 (rajjana-d. muyhana). Dussanīya {Dussaniya} (adj.) [cp. Sk. dveṣanīya, because of doṣa= dveṣa taken to dus] able to give offence, hateful, evil (always combd with rajanīya, cp. rāga dosa moha) A III.110 (dusanīye dussati, where It 84 has dosaneyye); J VI.9; Miln 386. Dussassa {Dussassa} see sassa. Dussika {Dussika} a cloth merchant J VI.276; Miln 262, 331 sq. Dussitatta {Dussitatta} (nt.) [Sk. *dūṣitatva]=dussanā, Pug 18, 22. Pāli Text Society 748 Pāli-English Dictionary Duha {Duha} (adj.-°.) [Sk. duh & duha; see dohati] milking; yielding, granting, bestowing: kāma° giving pleasures J IV.20; V.33. Duhati {Duhati} (to milk) see dohati. Duhana {Duhana} (adj.-n.) [Sk. *druhana, to druh, druhyati to hurt, cp. Oir. droch; Ohg. triogan to deceive, traum= dream; also Sk. dhvarati. For further connections see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fraus] one who injures, hurts or deceives; insidious, infesting; a robber, only in pantha° a dacoit D I.135; DA I.296. - (nt.) waylaying, robbery (pantha°) J II.281 (text dūhana), 388 (text: panthadūbhana, vv. ll. duhana & dūhana); DhsA 220. - Cp. maggadūsin. Duhitika {Duhitika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. druha, fr. druhyati] infested with robbers, beset with dangers S IV.195 (magga). - Note. This interpretation may have to be abandoned in favour of duhitika being another spelling of dvīhitika= hard to get through (q. v.), to be compared are the vv. ll. of the latter at S IV.323 (S.S. dūhitika & dūhītika). Dūta1 {Duta} [Ved. dūta, prob. to dūra (q. v.) as "one who is sent (far) away," also perhaps Gr. dou=los slave. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dudum] a messenger, envoy Vin I.16; II.32, 277; D I.150; S IV.194; Sn 411 (rāja°), 417. - deva° Yama's envoy, Death's messenger A I.138, 142; M II.75 sq.; J I.138. - °ṃ pāheti to send a messenger Miln 18, PvA 133. Dūta2 {Duta} (nt.) [Sk. dyūta, see jūta] play, gaming, gambling J IV.248. Dūteyya {Duteyya} (nt.) [Sk. dūtya, but varying in meaning] errand, commission, messages A IV.196; J III.134; DA I.78.- °ṃ gacchati to go on an errand Vin II.202; °ṃ harati to obtain a commission Vin III.87; IV.23. -kamma doing a messenger's duty Vin I.359; -pahiṇagamana sending & going on messages D I.5=M III.34; A II.209; M I.180. Dūbha {Dubha} (adj.) deceiving, see dubbha. Dūbhaka1 {Dubhaka} (adj.) [Sk. dambhaka] deceiving, treacherous, harmful SnA 287 (mitta°); f. °ikā J II.297. Dūbhaka2 {Dubhaka} [Sk. dambha, cp. dambholi] a diamond J I.363=III.207. Dūbhana {Dubhana} (nt.) deceiving, pillaging, robbing etc. at J II.388 is to be read as (pantha-) duhana. Dūbhin {Dubhin} (adj.) - dubbhin J II.180 (vv. ll. dūbha & dubbhi), 327; IV.257; DhA II.23. Dūbhī {Dubhi} (f.) [cp. Sk. dambha, see dubbhati] perfidy, treachery, J I.412; IV.57 (v. l. dubhī); VI.59 (=aparādha). Dūra {Dura} (far), *dāu; cp. Ohg. zawen, Goth. taujan=E. do. Another form is *deÛā, far in respect to time, as in Gr. dh/n, dhro/n, Lat. dū-dum (cp. dū-rare=en-dure). See also dutiya & dūta] far, distant, remote, opp. āsanna (J II.154) or santika (Dhs 677; Vism 402). - PvA 117. Often in cpds. (see Pāli Text Society 749 Pāli-English Dictionary below), also as dūri°, e. g. dūri-bhāva distance Vism 71, 377; DhsA 76. - Cases mostly used adverbially, viz. acc. dūraṃ far J II.154; DhA I.192. - abl. dūrato from afar, aloof Vin I.15; II.195; S I.212; Sn 511; Dh 219; J V.78 (dūra-dūrato); Miln 23; PvA 107. dūrato karoti to keep aloof from PvA 17.-loc. dūre at a distance, also as prep. away from, far from (c. abl.), e. g. Sn 468; J II.155, 449 (=ārā); III.189. - Sn 772; Dh 304; J VI.364; Dhs 677. - dūre-pātin one who shoots far [cp. Sk. dūra-pātin] A I.284; II.170, 202. J IV.494. See also akkhaṇavedhin. - atidūre too far Vin II.215. -kantana at Th 1, 1123: the correct reading seems to be the v. l. durākantana, see ākantana; -gata gone far away Pv II.134 (=paralokagata PvA 164); DhA III.377 (durā°). (ṃ)gama far-going, going here & there Dh 37 (cp. DhA I.304); Pv II.910; -ghuṭṭha farrenowned Pv II.82; -vihāra (-vuttin) living far away Sn 220. Dūrakkha {Durakkha} [du1+rakkha] see rakkha & cp. du1. Dūratta {Duratta} (adj.) [du1+ratta] reddish M I.36 (°vaṇṇa). Dūsaka (adj.-n.) [Sk. dūṣaka] corrupting, disgracing, one who defiles or defames; a robber, rebel A V.71 (bhikkhunī°); J II.270; IV.495; Sn 89 (kula° one who spoils the reputation of the clan); DhA II.23 (kuṭi° an incendiary); Miln 20 (pantha°). As dussaka at J V.113 (kamma°); Sn A 287 (mitta°, v. l. B. for dūbhaka). - panthadūsaka a highwayman Miln 290. - f. dūsikā J III.179 (also as dūsiyā=dosakārikā); a° harmless Sn 312 (see a°). {Dusaka} Dūsana {Dusana} (nt.) [see dūseti] spoiling, defiling J II.270; Sdhp 453. Dūsita {Dusita} [Sk. dūṣita, pp. of dūseti] depraved, sinful, evil PvA 226 (°citta). Dūsin {Dusin} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dūṣ , in magga° (cp. pantha-dusaka) a highway robber Sn 84 sq Dūseti {Duseti} [Sk. dūṣayati, caus. of dussati (q. v.). Also as dusseti PvA 82] to spoil, ruin; to injure, hurt; to defile, pollute, defame Vin I.79, 85, 86; IV.212 (maṃ so dūsetukāmo, said by a bhikkhunī), 316 (dūsetuṃ); A IV.169 sq.; J I.454; II.270; DhA II.22 (kuṭiṃ, damage, destroy). aor. dūsayi J II.110 (fared ill). - pp. dūsita. Cp. pa°, pari°. Dūhana1 {Duhana} (nt.) [see duhana] infesting, polluting, defaming; robbing, only in pantha° (with v. l. duhana) waylaying J II.281, 388; Tikp 280. Dūhana2 {Duhana} (nt.) [Sk. dohana, see dohati] milking (-°), in kumbha° filling the pails with milk, i. e. giving much milk (gāvo; cp. Sk. droṇadughā a cow which yields much milk) Sn 309. Dūhitika {Duhitika} see duhitika. Dejjha {Dejjha} (=dvejjha, see dvi B I.5] divided, in a° undividedness J III.7 (com. abhejja), 274=IV.258 (dhanuṃ a °ṃ karoti to get the bow ready, v. l. BB. sarejjhaṃ C. expld jiyāya ca sarena ca saddhiṃ ekam eva katvā). Deḍḍubha {Deddubha} [Sk. duṇḍubha] a water-snake; salamander J III.16; VI.194; Sdhp 292. See next. Pāli Text Society 750 Pāli-English Dictionary Deḍḍubhaka {Deddubhaka} 1. a sort of snake (see prec.) J I.361. - 2. a kind of girdle (in the form of a snake's head) Vin II.136 (expld by udaka-sappi-sira-sadisa). Deṇḍima {Dendima} (m. nt.) [Sk. diṇḍima, cp. dindima] a kind of kettle-drum D I.79 (v. l. dindima); Nd2 219 (°ka, v. l. dind°); J I.355; (=paṭaha-bheri); V.322=VI.217; VI.465=580. Depiccha {Depiccha} (adj.) [=dvepiccha, see dvi B I. 5] having two tail-feathers J V.339. Deyya {Deyya} (adj.) [Sk. deya, grd. of dā, see dadāti I. 2, b] (a) to be given (see below). - (b) deserving a gift, worthy of receiving alms J III.12 (a°); Miln 87 (rāja°) -nt. a gift, offering Vin I.298 (saddhā°). -dhamma a gift, lit. that which has the quality of being given; esp. a gift of mercy, meritorious gift S I.175; A I.150, 166; II.264 (saddhā°); Pv I.11; II.318; PvA 5, 7 sq., 26, 92 (°bīja), 103, 129; cp. AvŚ I.308. The deyyadhamma (set of gifts, that which it is or should be a rule to give) to mendicants, consists of 14 items, which are (as enumd at Nd2 523 under the old Brahman's term yaðða "sacrifice") (1) cīvara, (2) piṇḍapāta, (3) senāsana, (4) gilānapaccaya-bhesajja-parikkhāra, (5) anna, (6) pāna, (7) vattha, (8) yāna, (9) mālQ, (10) gandhā, (11) vilepana, (12) seyya, (13) āvasatha, (14) padīpeyya. A similar enumn in diff. order is found at Nd1 373. Deva {Deva} [Ved. deva, Idg. *deiā to shine (see dibba & diva), orig. adj. *deiÛos belonging to the sky, cp. Av. vas; Ohg. &slashedZ;īo; Ags. Tīg, gen. Tīwes (=Tuesday); Oir. dia (god). The popular etymology refers it to the root div in the sense of playing, sporting or amusing oneself: dibbanti ti devā, paðcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti attano vā siriyā jotantī ti attho KhA 123] a god, a divine being; usually in pl. devā the gods. As title attributed to any superhuman being or beings regarded to be in certain respects above the human level. Thus primarily (see 1a) used of the first of the next-world devas, Sakka, then also of subordinate deities, demons & spirits (devaððatarā some kind of deity; snake-demons: nāgas, tree-gods: rukkhadevatā etc.). Also title of the king (3). Always implying splendour (cp. above etym.) & mobility, beauty, goodness & light, & as such opposed to the dark powers of mischief & destruction (asurā: Titans; petā: miserable ghosts; nerayikā sattā: beings in Niraya). A double position (dark & light) is occupied by Yama, the god of the Dead (see Yama & below 1 c). Always implying also a kinship and continuity of life with humanity and other beings; all devas have been man and may again become men (cp. D I.17 sq.; S III.85), hence "gods" is not a coincident term. All devas are themselves in saṃsāra, needing salvation. Many are found worshipping saints (Th I.627-9; Th II.365). - The collective appellations differ; there are var. groups of divine beings, which in their totality (cp. tāvatiṃsa) include some or most of the well-known Vedic deities. Thus some collect. designations are devā sa-indakā (the gods, including Indra or with their ruler at their head: D II.208; S III.90, A V.325), sa-pajāpatikā (S III.90), sa-mārakā (see deva-manussaloka), sa-brahmakā (S III.90). See below 1 b. Lists of popular gods are to be found, e. g. at D II.253; III.194. - A current distinction dating from the latest books in the canon is that into 3 classes, viz. sammuti-devā (conventional gods, gods in the public opinion, i. e. kings & princes J I.132; DA I.174), visuddhi° (beings divine by purity, i. e. of great religious merit or attainment like Arahants & Buddhas), & upapatti° (being born divine, i. e. in a heavenly state as one of the gatis, like bhumma-devā etc.). This division in detail at Nd2 307; Vbh 422; KhA 123; VvA 18. Under the 3rd category (upapatti°) seven groups are enumerated in the foll. order: Cātummahārājikā devā, Tāvatiṃsā d. (with Sakka as chief), Yāmā d., Tusitā d., Nimmānaratī d., Paranimmita-vasavattī d., Bṛahmakāyikā d. Thus at D I.216 sq.; A I.210, 332 sq.; Nd2 307; cp. S I.133 & J I.48. See also devatā. 1. good etc. - (a) sg. a Pāli Text Society 751 Pāli-English Dictionary god, a deity or divine being, M I.71 (d. vā Māro vā Brahmā vā); S IV.180=A IV.461 (devo vā bhavissāmi devaððataro vā ti: I shall become a god or some one or other of the (subordinate gods, angels); Sn 1024 (ko nu devo vā Brahmā vā Indo vāpi Sujampati); Dh 105 (+gandhabba, Māra, Brahmā); A II.91, 92 (puggalo devo hoti devaparivāro etc.); PvA 16 (yakkho vā devo vā). - (b) pl. devā gods. These inhabit the 26 devalokas one of which is under the rule of Sakka, as is implied by his appellation S. devānaṃ indo (his opponent is Vepacitti Asur-indo S I.222) S I.216 sq.; IV.101, 269; A I.144; Sn 346; PvA 22 etc. - Var. kinds are e. g. appamāṇ'-ābhā (opp. paritt' ābhā) M III.147; ābhassarā D I.17; Dh 200; khiḍḍāpadosikā D I.19; gandhabba-kāyikā S III.250 sq.; cattāro mahārājikā S V.409, 423; Jat I.48; Pv IV.111; PvA 17, 272; naradevā tidasā S I.5; bhummā PvA 5; manāpa-kāyikā A IV.265 sq.; mano-padosikā D I.20; valāhaka-kāyikā S III.254. - Var. attributes of the Devas are e. g. āyuppamāṇā A I.267; II.126 sq.; IV.252 sq.; dīghāyukā S III.86; A II.33; rūpino manomayā M I.410, etc. etc. - See further in general: D I.54 (satta devā); II.14, 157, 208; S V.475=A I.37; Sn 258 (+manussā), 310 (id.); 404, 679; Dh 30, 56, 94, 230, 366; Ps I.83 sq.; II.149; Vbh 86, 395, 412 sq.; Nett 23; Sdhp 240. - (c) deva=Yama see devadūta (expld at J I.139: devo ti maccu). - atideva a pre-eminent god, god above gods (Ep. of the Buddha) Nd2 307; DhsA 2 etc.; see under cpds. - 2. the sky, but only in its rainy aspect, i. e. rain-cloud, rainy sky, rain-god (cp. Jupiter Pluvius; K.S. I.40, n. 2 on Pajjunna, a Catumahārājika), usually in phrase deve vassante (when it rains etc.), or devo vassati (it rains) D I.74 (: devo ti megho DA I.218); S I.65, 154 (cp. It 66 megha); Sn 18, 30; J V.201; DhA II.58, 82; PvA 139. devo ekam ekam phusāyati the cloud rains drop by drop, i. e. lightly S I.104 sq., 154, 184; IV.289. - thulla-phusitake deve vassante when the sky was shedding big drops of rain S III.141; V.396; A I.243; II.140; V.114; Vism 259. - vigata-valāhake deve when the rain-clouds have passed S I.65; M II.34, 42. - 3. king, usually in voc. deva, king! Vin I.272; III.43; A II.57; J I.150, 307; PvA 4, 74 etc. devī (f.) 1. goddess, of Petīs, Yakkhiṇīs etc.; see etym. expl. at VvA 18. - Pv II.112; Vv 13 etc. - 2. queen Vin I.82 (Rahulamātā), 272; D II.14; A II.57, 202 (Mallikā) J I.50 (Māyā); III.188; PvA 19, 75. -accharā a divine Apsarā, a heavenly joy-maiden Vism 531; PvA 46, 279; -aññatara, in phrase devo vā d. vā, a god or one of the retinue of a god S IV.180= A IV.461; PvA 16; -ātideva god of gods, i. e. divine beyond all divinities, a super-deva, of Buddha Nd2 307 & on Sn 1134; J IV.158=DhA I.147; Vv 6427; VvA 18; Miln 241, 258, 368, 384 & passim; cp. M Vastu I.106, 257, 283, 291; -attabhāva a divine condition, state of a god PvA 14; -ānubhāva divine majesty or power D II.12; M III.120; J I.59; -āsana a seat in heaven It 76; -āsurasangāma the fight between the Gods & the Titans D II.285; S I.222; IV.201; V.447; M I.253; A IV:432 (at all passages in identical phrase); -iddhi divine power Vv 313; VvA 7; -isi a divine Seer Sn 1116; Nd2 310; -ûpapatti rebirth among the gods PvA 6; -orohaṇa descent of the gods DhA III.443; kaððā a celestial maiden, a nymph S I.200; J I.61; VvA 37, 78; -kāya a particular group of gods S I.200; It 77; Th 2, 31; -kuñjara "elephant of the gods," of Indra J V.158; -kumāra son of a god (cp. °putta) J III.391; -gaṇa a troop of gods J I.203; DhA III.441; -gaha a temple, chapel Vin III.43; -cārikā a visit to the gods, journeying in the devaloka VvA 3, 7, 165 etc.; -ṭṭhāna heavenly seat J III.55; a temple, sacred place Miln 91, 330; -dattika given or granted by a god, extraordinary PvA 145; -dattiya=°dattika J III.37; DhA I.278; -dāruka a species of pine J V.420; dundubhi the celestial drum, i. e. thunder D I.10; Miln 178; DA I.95; -dūta the god's (i. e. Yama's see above 1°) messenger A I.138, 142; M II.75; III.179; J I.138; DhA I.85 (tayo d.); Mhbv. 122 (°suttanta); -deva "the god of gods," Ep. of the Buddha (cp. devātideva) Th 1, 533, 1278 (of Kappāyana); DhsA 1; PvA 140; -dhamma that which is divine or a god A III.277 (°ika); DhA III.74; -dhītā a female deva or angel (cp. devaputta), lit. daughter of a god J II.57; VvA 137, 153 (with ref. to Vimānapetīs); -nagara the city of the Devas, heaven J I.168, 202; DhA I.280; nikāya a class, community or group of gods, celestial state or condition D II.261 (sixty enumd); S IV.180; M I.102 sq.; A I.63 sq.; II.185; III.249 sq.; IV.55; V.18; -pañha questioning a god, using an oracle D I.11 (=DA I.97: devadāsiyā sarīre devataṃ otāretvā paðha-pucchanaṃ); -parivāra a Pāli Text Society 752 Pāli-English Dictionary retinue of gods A II.91; -parisā the assembly of gods A II.185; Tikp 241. -putta "son of a god," a demi-god, a ministering god (cp. f. deva-dhītā), usually of Yakkhas, but also appld to the 4 archangels having charge of the higher world of the Yāmā devā (viz. Suyāma devaputta); the Tusitā d. (Santusita d.); the Nimmānaratī d. (Sunimmita d.); & the Paranimmitavasavattī d. (Vasavattī d.) D I.217 sq.; cp. J I.48. - D II.12, 14; S I.46 sq.; 216 sq.; IV.280; A I.278; It 76; J I.59 (jarā-jajjara); IV.100 (Dhamma d.); VI.239 (Java d.); PvA 6, 9, 55, 92, 113 (Yakkho ti devaputto); Miln 23; -pura the city of the gods, heaven S IV.202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana-mahānagara VvA 285); J IV.143; -bhava celestial existence PvA 167; -bhoga the wealth of the gods PvA 97; manussā (pl.) gods & men D I.46, 62≈, 99 (°mānuse); M II.38, 55; Sn 14 (sa°), 236 (°pūjita), 521; It 80 (°seṭṭhā); Kh VIII.10; KhA 196; PvA 17, 31, 117; -°loka the world of gods and men. It comprises (1) the world of gods proper (Devas, i. e. Sakka, Māra & Brahmā; corresp. to sammuti-devā, see above); (2) samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (cp. visuddhi-devā); (3) gods & men under the human aspect (gati, cp. upapatti-devā): Sn 1047, 1063; expl. at Nd2 309 & (with diff. interpretations) DA I.174 sq.; -yāna leading to the (world of) the gods, i. e. the road to heaven Sn 139, also in °yāniya (magga) D I.215; -rājā king of the devas, viz. Sakka Nd1 177; J III.392 (=devinda); DhA III.441; PvA 62; -rūpa divine appearance or form PvA 92; -loka the particular sphere of any devas, the seat of the devas, heaven; there exist 26 such spheres or heavens (see loka); when 2 are mentioned it refers to Sakka's & Brahma's heavens. A seat in a devaloka is in saṃsāra attained by extraordinary merit: Dh 177; J I.202, 203; IV.273; ThA 74; KhA 228; PvA 5, 9, 21, 66, 81, 89; Vism 415, etc.; -vimāna the palace of a deva J I.58; VvA 173; -sankhalikā a magic chain J II.128; V.92, 94; -sadda heavenly sound or talk among the devas It 75 (three such sounds). Devaka {Devaka} (adj.) (-°) [deva+ka] belonging or peculiar to the devas; only in sa°-loka the world including the gods in general D I.62; Nd2 309; Sn 86 377, 443, 760 etc.; Miln 234. See also devamanussa-loka. Devata {Devata} (adj.) (-°) having such & such a god as one's special divinity, worshipping, a worshipper of, devotee of Miln 234 (Brahma°+Brahma (garuka). - f. devatā in pati° "worshipping the husband," i. e. a devoted wife J III.406; VvA 128. Devatā {Devata} (f.) [deva+tā, qualitative-abstr. suffix, like Lat. juventa, senecta, Goth. hauhipa, Ohg. fullida cp. Sk. pūrṇatā, bandhutā etc.] "condition or state of a deva," divinity; divine being, deity, fairy. The term comprises all beings which are otherwise styled devas, & a list of them given at Nd2 308 & based on the principle that any being who is worshipped (or to whom an offering is made or a gift given: de-vatā=yesaṃ deti, as is expressed in the conclusion "ye yesaṃ dakkhiṇeyyā te tesaṃ devatā") is a devatā, comprises 5 groups of 5 kinds each, viz. (1) ascetics; (2) domestic animals (elephants, horses, cows, cocks, crows); (3) physical forces & elements (fire, stone etc.); (4) lower gods (: bhumma devā) (nāgā, suvaṇṇā, yakkhā, asurā, gandhabbā); (5) higher gods (: inhabitants of the devaloka proper) Mahārājā, Canda, Suriya, Inda, Brahmā), to which are added the 2 aspects of the sky-god as devadevatā & disā-devatā). - Another definition at VvA 21 simply states: devatā ti devaputto pi Brahmā pi devadhītā pi vuccati. - Among the var. deities the foll. are frequently mentioned: rukkha° tree-gods or dryads M I.306; J I.221; PvA 5; vatthu° earth gods (the four kings) Pv 41; PvA 17; vana° wood-nymphs M I.306; samudda° water-sprites J II.112 etc. etc. - D I.180 (mahiddhikā, pl.), 192; II.8, 87, 139, 158; S I. sq.; IV.302; M I.245; II.37; A I.64, 210, 211; II.70 (sapubba°); III.77 (bali-paṭiggāhikā), 287 (saddhāya samannāgatā); 309; IV.302 sq., 390 (vippaṭisāriniyo); V.331; Sn 45, 316, 458, 995, 1043; Dh 99; J I.59, 72, 223, 256; IV.17, 474; Vv 163; Pv II.110; KhA 113, 117; Pāli Text Society 753 Pāli-English Dictionary PvA 44. -ānubhāva divine power or majesty J I.168; -ānussati "remembrance of the gods," one of the 6 ānussatiṭṭhānāni, or subjects to be kept in mind D III.250, 280, cp. A I.211; Vism 197. uposatha a day of devotion to the gods A I.211; -paribhoga fit to be enjoyed by gods J II.104; bali an offering to the gods A II.68; -bhāva at PvA 110 read as devattabhāva (opp. petattabhāva). Devati {Devati} [div] to lament, etc.; see pari°. Cp. also parideva etc. Devatta {Devatta} (nt.) [deva+tta] the state of being a deva, divinity ThA 70; PvA 110 (°bhāva as Yakkha, opp. petatta bhāva; so read for devatā-bhāva). Devattana {Devattana} (nt.) [=last] state or condition of a deva Th 1, 1127; cp. petattana in the foll. verse. Devara {Devara} [Sk. devṛ & devara Gr. da_h/r (*daivh/r), Lat. levir, Ohg. zeihhur, Ags. tācor] husband's brother, brotherin-law J VI.152; Vv 326 (sa°), popularly expld at VvA 135 as "dutiyo varo ti vā devaro, bhattu kaniṭṭha bhātā." Devasika {Devasika} (adj.) [Der. fr. divasa] daily J V.383; DA I.296 (°bhatta=bhattavetena); DhA I.187 sq., -nt. °ṃ as adv. daily, every day J I.82, J I.149, 186; VvA 67, 75; DhA I.28; II.41. Desa {Desa} [Ved. deśa, cp. disā] point, part, place, region, spot, country, Vin I.46; II.211; M I.437; J I.308; DhsA 307 (°bhūta); PvA 78 (°antara prob. to be read dos°), 153; KhA 132, 227. - desaṃ karoti to go abroad J V.340 (p. 342 has disaṃ). - kañcid-eva desaṃ pucchati to ask a little point D I.51; M I.229; A V.39, sometimes as kiñcid-eva d. p. S III.101; M III.15; v. l. at D I.51. - desāgata pañha a question propounded, lit. come into the region of some one or having become a point of discussion Miln 262. Desaka {Desaka} (adj.) [Sk. deśaka] pointing out, teaching, advising Sdhp 217, 519 - (nt.) advice, instruction, lesson M I.438. Desanā {Desana} (f.) [Sk. deśanā] 1. discourse, instruction, lesson S V.83, 108; J III.84; Pug 28; Nett 38; Vism 523 sq. (regarding Paṭiccasamuppāda); PvA 1, 2, 9, 11; Sdhp 213. 2. Freq. in dhamma° moral instruction, exposition of the Dhamma, preaching, sermon Vin I.16; A I.53; II.182; IV.337 sq.; It 33; J I.106 etc. (a° gāminī āpatti), a Pārājika or Sanghādisesa offence Vin II.3, 87; V.187. Cp. Vin. Texts II.33. - 3. (legal) acknowledgment Miln 344. - Cp. ā°. -avasāne (loc.) at the end of an instruction discourse or sermon DhA III.175; PvA 54; -pariyosāne=proc. PvA 9, 31 etc. -vilāsa beauty of instruction Vism 524; Tikapaṭṭhāna 21. Desika {Desika} (adj.) [Sk. deśika]=desaka, su° one who points out well, a good teacher Miln 195. Desita {Desita} [pp. of deseti] expounded, shown, taught etc., given, assigned, conferred Vin III.152 (marked out); V.137; D II.154 (dhamma); Dh 285 (nibbāna); PvA 4 (magga: indicated), 54 (given). Desetar {Desetar} [n. ag. to deseti] one who instructs or points out; a guide, instructor, teacher M I.221, 249; A I.266; III.441; V.349. Pāli Text Society 754 Pāli-English Dictionary Deseti {Deseti} [Sk. deśayati, Caus. of disati, q. v.] to point out, indicate, show; set forth, preach, teach; confess. Very freq. in phrase dhammaṃ d. to deliver a moral discourse, to preach the Dhamma Vin I.15; II.87, 188; V.125, 136; D I.241, A II.185, V.194; It 111; J I.168; III.394; Pug 57; PvA 6. - aor. adesesi (S I.196=Th 1 1254) & desesi (PvA 2, 12, 78 etc.) - pp. desita (q. v.). Dessa & Dessiya {Dessa} {Dessiya} (adj.) [Sk. dveṣya, to dvis, see disa] disagreeable, odious, detestable J I.46; II.285; IV.406; VI.570, ThA 268, Miln 281. Dessati {Dessati} [Sk. dviṣati & dveṣṭi; see etym. under disa] to hate, dislike, detest SnA 168 (=na piheti, opp. kāmeti). Dessatā {Dessata} (f.) [Sk. dvesyatā] repulsiveness Miln 281. Dessin {Dessin} (adj.) [Sk. dveṣin] hating, detesting Sn 92 (dhamma°); better desin, cp. viddesin. Deha {Deha} [Sk. deha to *dheigh to form, knead, heap up (cp. kāya=heap), see diddha. So also in uddehaka. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 75 s. v. sarīradeha. Cp. Gr. tei_xos (wall)=Sk. dehī; Lat. fingo & figura; Goth. deigan (knead)=Ohg. teig=E. dough] body A II.18; PvA 10, 122. Usually in foll. phrases: hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ S I.60; Pv II.956; pahāya m. d. S I.27, 30; jahati d. M II.73; °ṃ nikkhipati Pv II.615; (muni or khīṇāsavo) antima-deha-dhārin (°dhāro) S I.14, 53; II.278; Sn 471; Th II.7, 10; It 32, 40, 50, 53. °nikkhepana laying down the body Vism 236. Dehaka {Dehaka} (nt.)=deha; pl. limbs Th 2, 392; cp. ThA 258. Dehin {Dehin} (adj.-n.) that which has a body, a creature Pgdp 12, 16. Doṇa {Dona} [Sk. droṇa (nt.) conn. with *dereÛo tree, wood, wooden, see dabbi & dāru & cp. Sk. druṇī pail] a wooden pail, vat, trough; usually as measure of capacity (4 Āḷhaka generally) Pv IV.333 (mitāni sukhadukkhāni donehi piṭakehi). taṇḍula° a doṇa of rice DhA III.264; IV.15. At J II.367 doṇa is used elliptically for doṇamāpaka (see below). -pāka of which a d. full is cooked, a doṇa measure of food S I.81; DhA II.8. -māpaka (mahāmatta) (a higher official) supervising the measuring of the doṇa-revenue (of rice) J II.367, 378, 381; DhA IV.88; -mita a d. measure full D I.54; M I.518. Doṇika {Donika} (adj.) [fr. doṇa] measuring a doṇa in capacity Vin I.240 (catu° piṭaka). Doṇikā {Donika} (f.)=donī1, viz. a hollow wooden vessel, tub, vat Vin I.286 (rajana° for dyeing); II.120 (mattikā to hold clay) 220 (udaka°), 221 (vacca° used for purposes of defæcation). See also passāva°. Donī1 {Doni} (f.) [Sk. droṇī, see doṇa] 1. a (wooden) trough, a vat, tub S II.259; A I.253; V.323; J I.450; Miln 56. - tela° an oil vat A III.58 (āyasā made of iron & used as a sarcophagus). - 2. a trough-shaped canoe (cp. Marāthi ḍon "a long flat-bottomed boat made of unḍi wood," & Kanarese ḍoni "a canoe hallowed from a log"] J IV.163 (=gambhīrā mahānāvā p. 164); PvA 189. - 3. a hollow, dug in the ground Miln 397. - 4. the body of a lute, the sounding-board (?)] I.450; Miln 53; VvA 281. Pāli Text Society 755 Pāli-English Dictionary Doṇī2 {Doni} (f.) [Sk. droṇi?] an oil-giving plant (?) (or is it= donī1 meaning a cake made in a tub, but wrongly interpreted by Dhammapāla?) only in -nimmiñjana oil-cake Pv I.1010; as °nimmijjani at Vv 3338; expld by telamiðjaka at PvA 51 & by tilapiððāka at VvA 147. Dobbhagga {Dobbhagga} (nt.) [Sk. daurbhāgya fr. duḥ+bhāga] ill luck, misfortune Vin IV.277; DhA 281 (text: °dobhagga). Dobha {Dobha} [see dubbha] fraud, cheating D II.243 (v. l. dobbha= dubbha). Domanassa {Domanassa} (nt.) [Sk. daurmanasya, duḥ+manas] distress, dejectedness, melancholy, grief. As mental pain (cetasikaṃ asātaṃ cet. dukkhaṃ S V.209=Nd2 312; cp. D II.306; Nett 12) opp. to dukkha physical pain: see dukkha B III. 1 a). A synonym of domanassaṃ is appaccaya (q. v.). For defn of the term see Vism 461, 504. The freq. combn dukkha-domanassa refers to an unpleasant state of mind & body (see dukkha B III. 1 b; e. g. S IV.198; V.141; M II.64; A I.157; It 89 etc.), the contrary of somanassaṃ with which dom° is combd to denote "happiness & unhappiness," joy & dejection, e. g. D III.270; M II.16; A I.163; Sn 67 (see somanassa). - Vin I.34; D II.278, 306; S IV.104, 188; V.349, 451; M I.48, 65, 313, 340; II.51; III.218; A I.39 (abhijjhā° covetousness & dejection, see abhijjhā); II.5, 149 sq.; III.99, 207; V.216 sq.; Sn 592, 1106; Pug 20, 59; Nett 12, 29 (citta-sampīḷanaṃ d.) 53, Dhs 413, 421, 1389; Vbh 15, 54, 71, 138 sq.; Dh I.121. indriya the faculty or disposition to feel grief D III.239 (+som°); S V.209 sq.; -upavicāra discrimination of that which gives distress of mind D III.245; -patta dejected, disappointed J II.155. Dolā {Dola} (f.) [Sk. dolā, *del as in Ags. tealtian=E. tilt, adj. tealt unstable=Sk. dulā iṣṭakā an unstable woman] a swing J IV.283; VI.341; Vism 280 (in simile). Dolāyati {Dolayati} [Denom. of dolā] to swing, to move to & fro J II.385. Dovacassa (nt.) [contamination of Sk. *daurvacasya evil speech & *daurvratya disobedience, defiance] unruliness, indocility, bad conduct, fractiousness S II.204 sq. (°karaṇā dhammā); M I.95 (id. specified); A II.147; III.178; Nett 40, 127. {Dovacassa} Dovacassatā {Dovacassata} (f.) [2nd abstr. of dovacassa] unruliness, contumacy, stubbornness, obstinacy A I.83, III.310, 448; V.146 sq.; D III.212, 274; Pug 20; Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 344); Vbh 359, 369, 371. Dovacassiya {Dovacassiya} (nt.)=dovacassa Pug 20; Dhs 1325. Dovārika {Dovarika} [cp. Sk. dauvārika, see dvāra] gatekeeper, janitor Vin I.269; D II.83; III.64 sq., 100; S IV.194; M I.380 sq.; A IV.107, 110; V.194; J II.132; IV.382 (two by name, viz. Upajotiya & Bhaṇḍa-kucchi), 447; VI.367; Miln 234, 332; Vism 281; Sdhp 356. Dovila {Dovila} (adj.) [Sk.?] being in the state of fructification, budding J VI.529 (cp. p. 530); Miln 334. Dosa1 {Dosa} [Sk. doṣa to an Idg. *deu(s) to want, to be inferior etc. (cp. dussati), as in Gr. de/omai, deu/omai] corruption, blemish, fault, bad condition, defect; depravity, corrupted Pāli Text Society 756 Pāli-English Dictionary state; usually -°, as khetta° blight of the field Miln 360; tiṇa° spoilt by weeds Dh 356; PvA 7; visa° ill effect of poison Th 1, 758, 768; sneha° blemish of sensual affection Sn 66. Four kasiṇadosā at Vism 123; eighteen making a Vihāra unsuitable at Vism 118 sq. - J II.417; III.104; Miln 330 (sabba-d.-virahita faultless); DA I.37, 141. - pl. dosā the (three) morbid affections, or disorder of the (3) humours Miln 43; adj. with disturbed humours Miln 172, cp. DA I.133. Dosa2 {Dosa} [Sk. dveṣa, but very often not distinct in meaning from dosa1. On dveṣa see under disa] anger, ill-will, evil intention, wickedness, corruption, malice, hatred. In most freq. combn of either rāga (lust) d. & moha (delusion), or lobha (greed) d. moha (see rāga & lobha), to denote the 3 main blemishes of character. For defn see Vism 295 & 470. Interpreted at Nd2 313 as "cittassa āghāto paṭighāto paṭigho . . . kopo . . . kodho . . . vyāpatti." - The distinction between dosa & paṭigha is made at DA I.116 as: dosa=dubbalakodha; paṭigha=balavakodha. - In combn lobha d. moha e. g. S I.98; M I.47, 489; A I.134, 201; II.191; III.338; It 45 (tīṇi akusalamūlāni). With rāga & moha: Dh 20; It 2=6; with rāga & avijjā; It 57; rāga & māna Sn 270, 631 etc. - See for ref.: Vin I.183; D III.146, 159, 182, 214, 270; S I.13, 15, 70; V.34 sq.; M I.15, 96 sq., 250 sq., 305; A I.187; II.172, 203; III.181; Sn 506; It 2 (dosena duṭṭhāse sattā gacchanti duggatiṃ); Ps I.80 sq., 102; Pug 16, 18; Dhs 418, 982, 1060; Vbh 86, 167, 208, 362; Nett 13, 90; Sdhp 33, 43. - Variously characterised as: 8 purisa-dosā Vbh 387; khila, nīgha, mala S V.57; agati (4 agati-gamanāni: chanda, d. moha, bhaya) D III.228, cp. 133, 182; ajjhattaṃ A III.357 sq.; its relation to kamma A I.134; III.338; V.262; to ariyamagga S V.5, 8. - sadosa corrupted, depraved, wicked D I.80; A I.112; adosa absence of illwill, adj. kind, friendly, sympathetic A I.135, 195, 203; II.192; Vbh 169, 210; Dhs 33 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 21, 99); VvA 14 (+alobha amoha). -aggi the fire of anger or ill-will D III.217; S IV.19 sq.; It 92 (+rāgaggi moh°); J I.61; -antara (adj.) bearing anger, intending evil in one's heart Vin II.249; D III.237; M I.123; A I.59; III.196 sq.; V.81 (opp. metta-citta); perhaps at PvA 78 (for des°); -kkhaya the fading away, dying out of anger or malice S III.160, 191; IV.250; V.8; Vbh 73, 89; -gata=dosa (+paṭigha) S IV.71; -garu full of anger S I.24; -dosa (: dosa1) spoilt by anger Dh 357; -saññita connected with ill-will It 78; sama like anger Dh 202; -hetuka caused by evil intention or depravity A V.261 (pāṇātipāta). Dosaniya, Dosanīya & Dosaneyya {Dosaniya} {Dosaneyya} (adj.) [grd.-formation either to dosa1 or dosa2, but more likely=Sk. *dūṣanīya=dūṣya (see dussa2 & dussati) influenced by dveṣaṇīya] corruptible; polluting, defiling; hateful, sinful S IV.307; A II.120; It 84 (where A III.110 has dussanīya in same context). Dosā {Dosa} (f.) [Sk. doṣā & doṣas, cp. Gr. du/w, du/omai to set (of the sun)] evening, dusk. Only in acc. as adv. dosaṃ (=doṣāṃ) at night J VI.386. Dosin {Dosin} (adj.) [to dosa2] angry J V.452, 454. Dosinā {Dosina} (f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, cp. P. juṇhā) a clear night, moonlight; only in phrase ramaṇīyā vata bho dosinā ratti. "lovely is the moonlight night" D I.47≈J I.509; J V.262; Miln 5, 19 etc. Expld in popular fashion by Bdhgh. as "dosāpagatā" ratti DA I.141. -puṇṇamāsī a clear, full moon night Th 1, 306, 1119; -mukha the face of a clear night J VI.223. Doha1 {Doha} [Sk. doha & dogha] milking, milk J V.63, 433. Doha2 {Doha} (adj.) [Sk. droha] injuring (-°) DA I.296. Pāli Text Society 757 Pāli-English Dictionary Dohaka {Dohaka} [Sk. doha] a milk-pail J V.105. Dohati {Dohati} [Sk. dogdhi, to which prob. duhitṛ daughter: see under dhītā & cp. dhenu] to milk. - pres. 1 pl. dohāma & duhāma J V.105; pret. 1 pl. duhāmase ibid.; pot. duhe JVI.211; ger. duhitvā SnA 27; pp. duddha (q. v.) - Pass. duyhati S I.174 (so read for duhanti); J V.307; ppr. duyhamāna Miln 41. - See also dūhana, doha1, dohin. Dohaḷa {Dohala} [Sk. dohada & daurhṛda, of du+hṛ ttinger GelehrteNachrichten 1898, 1 derives it as dvi+hṛd] (a) the longing of a pregnant woman J III.28, 333; DhA I.350; II.139. - (b) intense longing, strong desire, craving in general J II.159, 433; V.40, 41; VI.263, 308; DhA II.86 (dhammika d.). Dohaḷāyati {Dohalayati} [Denom. fr. dohaḷa] to have cravings (of a woman in pregnancy) J VI.263. Dohaḷinī {Dohalini} (adj.-f.) a woman in pregnancy having cravings; a pregnant woman in general J II.395, 435; III.27; IV.334; V.330 (=gabbhinī); VI.270, 326, 484; DhA III.95. Dohin {Dohin} (adj. n.) one who milks, milking M I.220 sq.=A V.347 sq. (anavasesa° milking out fully). Drūbha {Drubha} incorrect spelling for dubbha incorrect spelling for dubbha (q. v.) in adrūbhāya Vin I.347. Dva° {Dva°} in numeral composition, meaning two etc., see under dvi B III. Dvaya {Dvaya} (adj.-n.) [Ved. dvaya; cp. dvi B I. 6] (adj.) (a) twoQ fold Sn 886 (saccaṃ musā ti dvayadhammaṃ); Dh 384; Pv IV.129 (dvayaṃ vipākaṃ=duvidhaṃ PvA 228). - advaya single A V.46. - (b) false, deceitful Vin III.21. - nt. a duality, a pair, couple S II.17 (°ṃ nissito loko); J III.395 (gātha°); PvA 19 (māsa°); DhA II.93 (pada° two lines, "couplet"). -kārin "doing both," i. e. both good & evil deeds (su° & duccaritaṃ) S III.241, cp. 247 sq.; D III.96. Dvā {Dva} (cp. dva°) see dvi B III. Dvāra {Dvara} (nt.) [Ved. dvār (f.) & dvāra (nt.), base *dhvār, cp. Av. dvarəm; Gr. qu/ra_, qurw/n; Lat. fores (gate), forum; Goth. daúr, Ohg. turi=Ger. tür, Ags. dor=E. door.] 1. lit. an outer door, a gate, entrance Vin I.15; S I.58, 138, 211; J I.346; II.63; VI.330; Vbh 71 sq.; PvA 4, 67 (village gate), 79; Sdhp 54, 356. - That d. cannot be used for an inner door see Vin II.215; on knocking at a d. see DA I.252; cp. DhA I.145 (dvāraṃ ākoṭeti); to open a door: āvarati; to shut: pidahati; to lock: thaketi. dvāraṃ alabhamāna unable to get out Vin II.220. - mahā° the main or city gate J I.63; culla° J II.114; catu° (adj.) having 4 doors (of niraya) Pv I.1013; cha° with 6d. (nagaraṃ, w. ref. to the 6 doors of the senses, see below) S IV.194; pure° the front d. J II.153; pacchima° the back d. J VI.364; uttara° the E. gate (PvA 74); nagara° the city gate (J I.263; deva° DhA I.280); gāma° the village g. (Vin III.52; J II.110); ghara° (J IV.142; PvA 38) & geha° (PvA 61) the house door; antepura° the door of the inner chamber M II.100; kula° the doors of the clanpeople Sn 288. - metaph. of the door leading to Nibbāna: amata° S I.137; A V.346. - 2. (fig.) the doors=in- & outlets of the mind, viz. the sense organs; in phrase indriyesu gutta-dvāra (adj.) guarding the doors with respect to the senses or faculties (of the mind): see gutta (e. g. S Pāli Text Society 758 Pāli-English Dictionary II.218; IV.103 & cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 175). - S IV.117, 194 (with simile of the 6 gates of a city); VvA 72 (kāya-vacī°). The nine gates of the body at Vism 346. Thus also in f. abstr. guttadvāratā the condition of well protected doors (see gutta). -kavāṭa a door post J I.63; II.334; VI.444; PvA 280, -koṭṭhaka [cp. Sk. dvārakoṣṭhaka Sp. AvŚ I.24, 31] gateway; also room over the gate Ud 52, 65; J I.290; III.2; IV.63, 229; VvA 6, 160; DhA I.50; II.27, 46; IV.204; Vism 22; Miln 10. bahidvārakoṭṭhake or °ā outside the gate M I.382; II.92; A III.31; IV.206; -gāma a village outside the city gates, i. e. a suburb (cp. bahidvāragāma J I.361) J III.126 (°gāmaka), 188; IV.225; DhA II.25 (°ka); -toraṇa a gateway J III.431. -pānantara at J VI.349 should be read °vātapānantara; pidahana shutting the door Vism 78. -bāhā a door post S I.146; Pv I.51; DhA III.273; -bhatta food scattered before the door Sn 286; -vātapāna a door-window Vin II.211; J VI.349; -sālā a hall with doors M I.382; II.61. Dvārika {Dvarika} (-°) (adj.) referring or belonging to the door of-; in cha °ā taṇhā, craving or fever, arising through the 6 doors (of the senses) DhA IV.221, & kāya° -saṃvara control over the "bodily" door, i. e. over action (opp. speech) PvA 10 (so read for kāyað cārika°). Dvi {Dvi} [Sk. dvi, dva etc. - Bases: I. dvi=Sk. dvi in dvipad =Lat. bipēs (fr. dÛipēs), Ags. twiféte; dvidant=bidens. Reduced to di (see B I.4) as in Gr. di\pous (=dipad), Lat. diennium & pref. dis(cp. Goth. twis asunder, Ogh. zwisk between). - II. du (=dvi in reduced grade, cp. Lat. du-plex, dubius etc.). - III. dvā (& dva)=Sk. dvāu, dvā, f. nt. dve (declined as dual, but the P. (plural) zwei. Also in cpd. num. dva-daśa twelve=Gr. d(*v)w/Qeka=Lat. duodecim. ] number two. A. Meanings-I. Two as unit: 1. with objective foundation: (a) denoting a combn (pair, couple) or a repetition (twice). In this conn. frequent both objective & impersonal in mentioning natural pairs as well as psychologically contrasted notions. E. g. dvipad (biped), nāgassa dve dantā (elephants'tusks), cakkhūni (eyes); dvija (bird), duvija (tooth), dijivha (snake). See also dutiya & dvaya. - dve: kāmā, khiḍḍā, gatiyo (Sn 1001), dānāni (It 98), piyā, phalāni (Sn 896; It 39), mittā, sinehā etc. See Nd2 under dve, cp. A I.47- 100; D III.212-214. - (b) denoting a separation (in two, twofold etc.): see dvidhā & cpds. - 2. with symbolic, sentimental meaning: (a) only two (i. e. next to one or "next to nothing"), cp. the two mites of the widow (Mark XII. 42), two sons of Rachel (Gen. 30): dumāsika not more than 2 months (Vin II.107); dvemāsiko gabbho (Pv I.67); dvevācika; duvangula (see below). - (b) a fewmore than one, some, a couple (often intermediate between 1 & 3, denoting more than once, or a comparatively long, rather long, but not like 3 a very long time): māsadvayaṃ a couple of months; dvisahassa dīpā 2000 islands (=a large number); diyaḍḍhasata 150=very long etc.; dvīhatīha (2 or 3= a couple of days) q. v.; dvirattatiratta (id. of nights); dvīsu tīsu manussesu to some people (PvA 47); dvatikkhattuṃ soveral times; cp. dvikkhattuṃ (more than once), dutiyaṃ (for the 2nd time). II. Two as unit in connection with its own & other decimals means a complex plus a pair, which amounts to the same as a large & a small unit, or so to speak "a year & a day." E. g. 12 (sometimes, but rarely= 10+2, see sep.); - 32: rests usually on 4 X 8, but as No. of the Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni it denotes 30+2= the great circle plus the decisive (invisible) pair; - 62: views of heresy: see diṭṭhi; also as a year of eternity= 60 kappas+2; - 92: as measure of eternity=90+2 kappas=a year & a day. III. Number twelve. 1. Based on natural phenomena it denotes the solar year (dvādasamāsako saṃvaccharo VvA 247). - 2. Connected with the solar cult it is used with human arrangements to raise them to the level of heavenly ones and to impart to them a superior significance. Thus: (a) as denoting a set (cp. 12 months Q companions of the Sun) it is the No. of a respectful, holy, venerable group (cp. 12 sons of Jacob Gen. 35, 22; cakes as shewbread Lev. 25, 5; stones erected Josh. 4, 8; apostles Math. 10, 2; patriarchs Acts 7, 8; companions of Odysseus Hom. Od. 9, 195; Knights of Arthur etc.): of Pāli Text Society 759 Pāli-English Dictionary theras, accompd by 12 bhikkhus PvA 67, 141. 179 etc.; dvādasa koṭisatāni Sn 677; five groups of 12 musicians VvA 96 (cp. 5 X 12 cromlechs in the outer circle of Stonehenge). - (b) as measure of distance in space & time it implies vast extent, great importance, a climax, divine symmetry etc. 12 yojanas wide extends the radiance VvA 16; 12 y. as respectful distance PvA 137 (cp. 2000 cubits in same sense at Josh. 3, 4); 12 y. in extent (height, breadth & length) are the heavenly palaces of the Vimāna-petas or Yakkhas Vv 551; J VI.116; VvA 6, 217, 244, 291, 298 etc. In the same connection we freq. find the No. 16: solasa-yojanikaṃ kanaka-vimānaṃ Vv 671; VvA 188, 289 etc. - Of years: J III.80; VvA 157 (dvādasa-vassikā; in this sense also 16 instead of 12: soḷasa-vassuddesika VvA 259 etc. See soḷasa). B. Bases & Forms-I. dvi; main base for numeral & nominal composition & derivation, in: 1. numeral dve (& duve) two: nom. acc. dve (Sn p. 107; It 98; J I.150; IV.137 etc.) & (in verse) duve (Sn 896, 1001); gen. dat. dvinnaṃ (It 39, 40, 98; J II.154); instr. dvīhi (J I.87: v. l. dīhi; 151; II.153); loc. dvīsu (J I.203; PvA 47) & duvesu (Vv 412). 2. as numeral base: -sahassa 2000 (see A I. 2b) J I.57; VvA 261; PvA 74; also in dvittā and adv. dvikkhattuṃ twice & dvidhā in two parts. - (b) as nominal base: - (r)āvaṭṭa [Sk. dviḥ cp. Lat. bis] turning twice S I.32; -ja "twice born," i. e. a bird J I.152 (gaṇā); -jātin one who is born twice, i. e. a brāhmaṇa Th, 2, 430 (ThA 269=brahmajātin); -tālamatta of the size of 2 palms DhA II.62; -pad [Sk. dvipad, Lat. bipes, Gr. di/pous etc.] a biped, man S I.6; -pala twofold Vism 339; -pādaka=dvipad Vin II.110; -bandhu having two friends J VI.281; -rattatiratta two or three nights Vin IV.16; also in dvīha two days (q. v.). 3. as diæretic form duvi°: -ja (cp. dija) "growing again" i. e. a tooth J V.156. 4. as contracted form di°: -(y)aḍḍha one and a half (lit. the second half, cp. Ger. anderthalb) Dh 235; J I.72 (diyaḍḍha-yojana-satika 150 y. long or high etc.), 202; IV.293 (°yāma); DhA I.395; DA I.17; Miln 243, 272; DhsA 12; -guṇa twofold, double Vin I.289; Sn 714; J V.309; Miln 84; DhA II.6; VvA 63, 120; -ja (cp. dvija, duvija) (a) "twice-born," a bird S I.224; Sn 1134 (d. vuccati pakkhī Nd2 296); J I.152, 203; II.205; IV.347; V.157; Pv II.124; Vv 358 (cp. VvA 178); Miln 295. - (b) a brahmin ThA, 70, 73; -jivha "twotongued," i. e. a snake (cp. du°) J III.347; -pad (-pada or -pa) a biped (cp. dvi°) A I.22; V.21; Sn 83 (dipa-duttama), 995 (id.) 998; Dh 273; -pādaka=°pad Th 1, 453=Sn 205. 5. as sec. cpd. form (with guṇa) dve° (and de°): -caturanga twice fourfold - eightfold Th 1, 520 (°gāmin); -patha a "double" path, a border path, the boundary between two villages Vv 5317 (-sīmantika-patha VvA 241); -piccha having two tail-feathers J V.341 (cp. de°); -pitika having two feathers J V.424; -bhāva doubling kacc. 21; -māsika two months old Pv I.67; -vācika pronouncing (only) two words, viz. Buddha & Dhamma (cp. tevācika, saying the whole saraṇa-formula), Vin I.4; J I.81; -sattaratta twice seven nights, a fortnight [cp. Sk. dvisapta] J VI.230. - See also der. fr. numer. adv. dvidhā, viz. dvejjha (& dejjha), dvedhā°, dveḷhaka. 6. as noun-derivation dvaya a dyad (q. v.). II. du; reduced base in numeral and nominal compn & dern: -(v)addhato from both sides (a distorted form of dubhato q. v.) Vv 6419 (=dubhato VvA 281); -(v)angika consisting of two parts Dhs 163; -(v)angula & dvangula two finger-breadths or depths, two inches long, implying a minimum measure (see above A I.2a) Vin II.107; IV.262; usually in cpds. - kappa the 2 inch rule, i. e. a rule extending the allotted time for the morning meal to 2 inches of shadow after mid day Vin II.294 306; -pannā wisdom of 2 finger-breadths, i. e. that of a woman S I.129=Th 2, 60 (dvanguli°, at ThA 66 as °saððā); -buddhika=°paððā VvA 96; -jivha twotongued (cp. di°); a snake J IV.330; V.82, 425; -paṭṭa "double cloth" (Hind. dupaṭṭā; Kanarese dupaṭa, duppaṭa; Tamil tuppaṭṭā a cloak consisting of two cloths joined together, see Kern, Toev. I.179); J I.119; IV.114, 379 (ratta°); DhA I.249 (suratta°); III.419 (°cīvarā); -matta (about) 2 in measure Miln 82; -māsika 2 months old or growing for 2 months (of hair) Vin II.107; -vagga consisting of two Vin I.58; -vassa 2 years old Vin I.59; -vidha twofold, instr. duvidhena M III.45 sq.; etc. Derivations from du° see sep. under duka (dyad), dutiya (the second), & the contamination forms dubha (to) & dubhaya (for ubha & ubhaya). III. dvā (& reduced dva), base in numeral compn only: dvatikkhattuṃ two or three times J I.506; DA I.133, 264; DhA IV.38; dvādasa Pāli Text Society 760 Pāli-English Dictionary twelve (on meaning of this & foll. numerals see above A II. & III.) J III.80; VI.116; DhA I.88; III.210; VvA 156, 247 etc.; °yojanika J I.125; IV.499; dvāvīsati (22) VvA 139; dvattiṃsa (32) Kh II. (°ākāra the 32 constituents of the body); DhA II.88; VvA 39 etc.; dvācattālīsa (42) Nd2 15; Vism 82; dvāsaṭṭhi (Nd2 271III. & dvaṭṭhi (62) D I.54; S III.211; DA I.162); dvānavuti (92) PvA 19, 21. Note. A singular case of dva as adv.=twice is in dvāhaṃ Sn 1116. Dvikkhattuṃ {Dvikkhattum} (adv.) [Sk. *dvikṛtvaḥ] twice Nd2 on Sn 1116 (=dva); Nd2 296 (jāyati dijo). See dvi B I. 2a. Dvittā {Dvitta} (pl.) [Sk. dvitrā; see dvi B I. 2a] two or three S I.117 (perhaps we should read tad vittaṃ: Windisch, Māra & Buddha 108). Dvidhā {Dvidha} (num. adv.) [Sk. dvidhā, see dvi B I. 2a] in two parts, in two M I.114; J I.253 (karoti), 254 (chindati), 298 (id.); III.181; IV.101 (jāta disagreeing); VI.368 (bhindati). See also dvedhā & dveḷhaka. -gata gone to pieces J V.197; -patha a twofold way, a crossing; only fig. doubt SIII.108; M I.142, 144; Ud 90. See also dvedhāpatha. Dvīha {Dviha} (adv.) [Sk. dvis-ahnah; see dvi B I.2b] two days; dvīhena in 2 days S II.192; dvīhamata 2 days dead M I.88; III.91. -tīha 2 or 3 days (°ṃ adv.) (on meaning cp. dvi A I.2b) D I.190 (°assa accayena after a few days); J II.316; DhA III.21 (°accayena id., gloss: katipāh'- accayena); DA I.190 (°ṃ) 215; VvA 45. Dvīhika {Dvihika} (adj.) every other day M I.78. Dvīhitika {Dvihitika} (adj.) [du-īhitika, of du1+īhati] to be gained or procured with difficulty (i. e. a livelihood which is hardly procurable), only in phrase "dubbhikkhā d. setaṭṭhikā salākavuttā," of a famine Vin III.6, 15, 87; IV.23; S IV.323. On the term & its expln by Bdhgh. (at Vin III.268: dujjīvikā īhī tī . . . dukkhena īhitaṃ ettha pavattatī ti) see Kern, Toev. I.122. - Note. Bdhgh's expln is highly speculative, & leaves the problem still unsolved. The case of du1 appearing as du- (and not as dur-) before a vowel is most peculiar; there may be a connection with druh (see duhana), which is even suggested by vv. ll. at S IV.223 as dūhitika= duhitika (q. v.). Dve & Dve° {Dve} {Dve°} see dvi B 1 & 5. Dvejjha {Dvejjha} (adj.) [Sk. dvaidhya; cp. dvi B I. 5] divided, twofold, only in neg. advejjha undivided, certain, doubtless; simple, sincere, uncontradictory A III.403; J IV.77; Nd2 30 (+adveḷhaka); Miln 141. - Cp. dejjha. Dvejjhatā {Dvejjhata} (f.) [fr. prec.] in a° undividedness J IV.76. Dvedhā {Dvedha} (adv.) [Sk. dvedhā, cp. dvidhā] in two J V.203, 206 (°sira); DhA II.50 (bhijji: broke in two, broke asunder). Dvedhāpatha {Dvedhapatha} [cp. dvidhā & dvi B I.5] (a) a double, i. e. a branching road; a crossroad DhA II.192; Miln 17. - (b) doubt Dh 282; Dhs 1004, 1161 Vism 313. Pāli Text Society 761 Pāli-English Dictionary Dveḷhaka {Dvelhaka} (nt.) [Sk. *dvaidhaka fr. adv. dvidhā, cp. dvi B I. 5] doubt Vin III.309; Dhs 1004, 1161; DA I.68; DhsA 259; °citta uncertain PvA 13; °jāta in doubt Vin III.309; D III.117 sq.; 210. - adveḷhaka (adj.) sure, certain, without doubt Nd2 30 (+advejjha). Pāli Text Society 762 Pāli-English Dictionary Dh Dhaṃsati {Dhamsati} [Ved. dhvaṃsati to fall to dust, sink down, perish; Idg. dheÛes to fly like dust, cp. Sk. dhūsara "dusky"; Ags. dust; Ger. dust & dunst; E. dusk & dust; prob. also Lat. furo] to fall from, to be deprived of (c. abl.), to be gone D III.184 (with abl. asmā lokā dh.) A II.67; V.76, 77; It 11; Th 1, 225, 610; J III.260, 318, 441, 457; IV.611; V.218, 375. - Caus. dhaṃseti [Sk. dhvaṃsayati, but more likely=Sk. dharṣayati (to infest, molest= Lat. infestare. On similar sound-change P. dhaṃs°> Sk. dharṣ cp. P. daṃseti>Sk. darśayati). Caus. of dhṛṣṇoti to be daring, to assault cp. Gr. qa/rsos audacious, bold, Lat. festus, Goth. gadars=E. dare; Ohg. gitar] to deprive of, to destroy, assault, importune D I.211; S III.123; Sn 591; J III.353; Miln 227; Sdhp 357, 434. Cp. pa°, pari°. Dhaṃsana {Dhamsana} (n.-adj.) [Sk. dharṣana] destroying, bringing to ruin, only in kula° as v. l. to kula-gandhana (q. v.) at It 64, and in dhaṃsanatā at DhA III.353 in expln of dhaṃsin (q. v.). Dhaṃsin {Dhamsin} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dharṣin to dhṛṣṇoti, see dhaṃseti] obtrusive, bold, offensive M I.236; A II.182; Dh 244 (=DhA III.353 paresaṃ guṇaṃ dhaṃsanatāya dh.). Dhanka {Dhanka} [Sk. dhvānkṣa, cp. also dhunkṣā] a crow S I.207; II.258; Sn 271=Nd2 420; J II.208; V.107, 270; VI.452; Pv III.52 (=kāka PvA 198); VvA 334. Dhaja {Dhaja} ko)] a flag, banner; mark, emblem, sign, symbol Vin I.306 (titthiya°: outward signs of); II.22 (gihi°); S I.42; II.280; A II. 51; III.84 sq. (panna°); M I.139 (id.); A III.149 (dhamma); J I.52 (+patākā); VvA 173 (id.); J I.65 (arahad °;)Th I.961; J V.49=Miln 221; J V.509; VI.499; Nd1 170; Vv 361, 6428 (subhāsita°=dhamma° VvA 284); Dhs 1116, 1233; Vism 469 (+paṭ ka, in comparison); PvA 282; VvA 31, 73; Miln 21; Sdhp 428, 594. Cp. also panna. -agga the top of a standard S I.219; A III.89 sq.; Pug 67, 68; Vism 414 (°paritta). -ālu adorned with flags Th 1, 164=J II.334 (: dhajasampanna Com.); -āhaṭa won under or by the colours, taken as booty, captured Vin III.139, 140; Vism 63. -baddha captured (=°āhaṭa) Vin I.74 (cora). Dhajinī {Dhajini} (f.) [Sk. dhvajinī, f. to adj. dhvajin] "bearing a standard," i. e. an army, legion Sn 442 (=senā SnA 392). Dhañña1 {Dhanna} (nt.) [Ved. dhānya, der. fr. dhana] grain, corn. The usual enumn comprises 7 sorts of grain, which is however not strictly confined to grain-fruit proper ("corn") but includes, like other enumns, pulse & seeds. These 7 are sāli & vīhi (rice-sorts), yava (barley), godhuma (wheat), kangu (millet), varaka (beans), kudrūsaka (?) Vin IV.264; Nd2 314; DA I.78. Nd2 314 distinguishes two oategories of dhañña: the natural (pubbaṇṇa) & the prepared (aparaṇṇa) kinds. To the first belong the 7 sorts, to the second belongs sūpeyya (curry). See also bīja-bīja. - Six sorts are mentioned at M I.57, viz. sāli, vīhi, mugga, māsa, tila, taṇḍula. - D I.5 (āmaka°, q. v.); A II.209 (id.); M I.180; A II.32 (+dhana); Th 1, 531; Pug 58; DhA I.173; VvA 99; PvA 29 (dhanaṃ vā dh °ṃ vā), 198 (sāsapa-tela-missitaṃ), 278 (sappi - madhu - tela dhaððādīhi vohăraṃ katvā). - dhaññaṃ ākirati to besprinkle a person with grain (for good luck) Pv III.54 (=mangalaṃ karoti PvA 198, see also mangala). -āgāra a store house for grain Pāli Text Society 763 Pāli-English Dictionary Vin I.240; -piṭaka a basket full of grain DhA III.370; -rāsi a heap of g. A IV.163, 170; samavāpaka grain for sowing, not more & not less than necessary to produce grain M I.451. Dhañña2 {Dhanna} (adj.) [Sk. dhānya, adj. to dhana or dhānya. Semantically cp. āḷhiya] "rich in corn," rich (see dhana); happy, fortunate, lucky. Often in combn dhanadhañña. - DhA I.171; III.464 (dhaððādika one who is rich in grains etc., i. e. lucky); DhsA 116. - dhaññapuññalakkhaṇa a sign of future good fortune & merit PvA 161; as adj. endowed with the mark of . . . J VI.3. See also dhāniya. Dhata {Dhata} [Sk. dhṛta, pp. of dharati; cp. dhara & dhāreti] 1. firm, prepared, ready, resolved A III.114; Dāvs V.52. - 2. kept in mind, understood, known by heart Vin II.95; A I.36. Dhana {Dhana} (nt.) [Ved. dhana; usually taken to dhā (see dadhāti) as "stake, prize at game, booty," cp. pradhāna & Gr. qe/ma; but more likely in orig. meaning "grain, posses sion of corn, crops etc.," cp. Lith. dūna bread, Sk. dhānā pl. grains & dhaðða=dhana-like, i. e. corn, grain] wealth, usually wealth of money, riches, treasures. 1. Lit. D I.73 (sa°); M II.180.; A III.222; IV.4 sq.; Nd2 135 (+yasa, issariya etc.) Th 2, 464 (+issariya); J I.225 (paṭhavigataṃ karoti: hide in the ground), 262, 289; II.112; IV.2; Sn 60, 185, 302; Pv II.610; DhA I.238. Often in combn aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga to indicate immense wealth (see aḍḍha) PvA 3, 214 etc. (see also below °dhañña). - 2. fig. Used in the expression sattavidha-ariya-dhana "the 7 fold noble treasure" of the good qualities or virtues, viz. saddhā, cāga etc. (see enumd under cāga) D III.163, 164, 251; VvA 113; ThA 240. -agga the best treasure (i. e. the ariya-dhana) D III.164; atthika wishing for or desiring wealth Sn 987; -āsā craving for wealth; -kkīta bought for money DhA II.3, -thaddha proud of wealth, snobbish Sn 104; -dhañña, usually Dvandva-cpd. "money & money's worth," but as adj. (always in phrase pahūta°) it may be taken as Tatpuruṣa "rich in treasures," otherwise "possessing money & money's worth" cp. pahūtadhanadhaððavā J I.3. As n. Pv I.1111; III.104; PvA 60; Miln 2, 280; as adj. freq. "pahūtadhana-dhañña" Vv 6313=Pv II.611: PvA 97. Thus in ster. formula of aḍḍha mahaddhana etc. D III.163 sq.; S I.71; A II.86; -parājaya loss of money, as adj. appl. to kali: the dice marking loss in game Sn 659; -lobha "greed of gold" J IV.1; -lola=lobha J II.212; -viriya wealth & power Sn 422; -hetu for the sake of wealth Sn 122. Dhanatta {Dhanatta} (nt.) [Sk. *dhanatvaṃ] being bent on having money J V.449. Dhanavant {Dhanavant} (adj.) [Sk. dhanavant] wealthy Nd2 462; J I.3. Dhanāyati {Dhanayati} [Denom. to dhana] to desire (like money), to wish for, strive after M I.260 (perhaps better to be read vanāyati, see formula under allīyati, and note M I.552). Dhanika {Dhanika} [Sk. dhanika] a creditor, Th 2, 443, ThA, 271; PvA 276. Cp. dhaniya. Dhanita {Dhanita} [Sk. dhvanita, pp. of dhvan, cp. Ags. dyn noise= E. din; Ags. dynnan to sound loud] sounded; as nt. sonant (said of a letter) Miln 344. Dhaniya {Dhaniya} =dhanika Vin I.76. Pāli Text Society 764 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhanu {Dhanu} (nt.) [Sk. dhanus, to Ohg. tanna fir-tree, also oak, orig tree in general, cp. dāru] a bow M I.429; J I.50, 150; II.88; IV.327; PvA 285. -kalāpa bow & quiver Vin II.192; M I.86; II.99; A III.94; PvA 154; -kāra a bow maker Miln 331; -kārika N. of a tree J V.420; -kārin=prec. J V.422 (=°pāṭali); -ggaha an archer D I.51; A II.48; IV.107; J I.58, 356; II.87, 88; III.220 (dhanuggaha) J III.322; V.129 (where 4 kinds are enumd); Vism 150 (in simile); DA I.156; -takkāri (f.) a plant J VI.535; -pāṭali N. of a tree J V.422; -lakkhaṇa prophesying from marks on a bow D I.9. Dhanuka {Dhanuka} (nt.) [Sk. dhanuṣka] a (small) bow Vin II.10; III.180; D I.7; A III.75; V.203; J VI.41; Miln 229; DA I.86. Dhanta {Dhanta} [Sk. dhvānta in meaning of either dhvanita fr. dhvan to sound, or dhamita fr. dhmā to blow, see dhameti] blown, sounded A I.253; J I.283, 284. Dhama {Dhama} (-°) (adj.) [Sk. dhama, to dhamati] blowing, n. a blower, player (on a horn: sankha°) D I.251; S IV.322. Dhamaka {Dhamaka} (-°) (adj.) one who blows Miln 31; see vaṃsa°, sankh°, singa°. Dhamati {Dhamati} [Ved. dhamati, dhmā, pp. dh amita & dhmāta, cp. Ohg. dampf "steam"] to blow, to sound (a drum); to kindle (by blowing), melt, smelt, singe A I.254; IV.169; J I.283, 284; VI.441; Nd1 478; Miln 262.- ppr. dhamāna S I.106; Miln 67. - Caus. dhameti to blow (an instrument) J II.110; Miln 31, and dhamāpeti to cause to blow or kindle DhA I.442. - pp. dhanta & dhanita (the latter to dhvan, by which dhamati is influenced to a large extent in meaning. Cp. uddhana). Dhamadhamāyati {Dhamadhamayati} [cp. Sk. dadhmāti, Intens. to dhamati] to blow frequently, strongly or incessantly Miln 117. Dhamani {Dhamani} (f.) [Sk. dhamani, to dhamati, orig. a tube for blowing, a tubular vessel, pipe] a vein Th 1, 408. Usually in cpd.: -santhata strewn with veins, with veins showing, i. e. emaciated (: nimmaṃsa-lohitatāya sirājālehi vitthatagatta PvA 68) Vin III.110; J IV.371; V.69; Dh 395=Th 1, 243=Pv II.113; Pv IV.101; DhA I.299, 367; IV.157; ThA 80. So also in Jain Pk. "kisa dhamaṇisaṃtata": Weber, Bhagavatī p. 289; cp. Lal. Vist. 226. - Also as °santhatagatta (adj.) having veins showing all over the body for lack of flesh Vin I.55; III.146; M II.121; J I.346, II.283; ThA 80. Dhamma1 {Dhamma} (m. & rarely nt.) [Ved. dharma & dharman, the latter a formation like karman (see kamma for expln of subj. & obj. meanings); dhṛ (see dhāreti) to hold, support: that which forms a foundation and upholds= constitution. Cp. Gr. qro/nos, Lat. firmus & fretus; Lith. derme (treaty), cp. also Sk. dhariman form, constitution, perhaps=Lat. forma, E. form] constitution etc. A. Definitions by Commentators: Bdhgh gives a fourfold meaning of the word dhamma (at DA I.99= DhA I.22), viz. (1) guṇe (saddo), applied to good conduct; (2) desanāyaṃ, to preaching & moral instruction; (3) pariyattiyaṃ, to the 9 fold collection of the Buddh. Scriptures (see navanga); (4) nissatte (-nijjīvate), to cosmic (non-animistic) law. - No. 1 is referred to freq. in expls of the term, e. g. dhammiko ti ðāyena samena pavattatī ti DA I.249; dhamman ti kāraṇaṃ ðāyaṃ PvA 211; as paṭipatti-dhamma at VvA 84; No. 3 e. g. also at PvA 2. Another and more adequate fourfold definition by Bdhgh is given in DhsA 38, viz. (1) Pāli Text Society 765 Pāli-English Dictionary pariyatti, or doctrine as formulated, (2) hetu, or condition, causal antecedent, (3) guṇa, or moral quality or action, (4) nissatta-nijīvatā, or "the phenomenal" as opposed to "the substantial," "the noumenal," "animistic entity." Here (2) is illustrated by hetumhi ðāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā: "analytic knowledge in dhamma's means insight into condition, causal antecedent" Vibh 293, and see Niyama (dhamma°). Since, in the former fourfold definition (2) and (3) really constitute but one main implication considered under the two aspects of Doctrine as taught and Doctrine as formulated, we may interpret Dhamma by the fourfold connotation:-doctrine, right, or righteousness, condition, phenomenon. - For other exegetic definitions see the Coms & the Niddesa, e. g. Nd1 94; for modern expls & analyses see e. g. Rhys Davids, Buddh. India pp. 292-4; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism (1912) pp. 32 sq., 107 sq., 235 sq.; Dhs. trsl. XXXIII. sq.; and most recently the exhaustive monograph by M. & W. Geiger, Pāli Dhamma. Abhandlungen der Bayer. Akademie XXXI. 1; München 1920; which reached the editors too late to be made use of for the Dictionary. B. Applications and Meaning.-1. Psychologically; "mentality" as the constitutive element of cognition & of its substratum, the world of phenomena. It is that which is presented as "object" to the imagination & as such has an effect of its own:-a presentation (Vorstellung), or idea, idea, or purely mental phenomenon as distinguished from a psycho-physical phenomenon, or sensation (re-action of sense-organ to sensestimulus). The mind deals with ideas as the eye deals with forms: it is the abstraction formed by mano, or mind proper, from the objects of sense presented by the sense-organ when reacting to external objects. Thus cakkhu "faculty of sight" corresponds to rūpa "relation of form" & mano "faculty of thought" (citta & ceto its organ or instrument or localisation) corresponds to dhamma "mentalized" object or "idea" (Mrs. Rh. D. "mental object in general," also "state of mind") - (a) subjective: mental attitude, thought, idea, philosophy, truth, & its recognition (anubodhi) by the Buddha, i. e. the Dhamma or worldwisdom=philosophy of the Buddha as contained & expounded in the Dialogues of the 5 Nikāyas (see below C.) - Note. The idea of dhamma as the interpreted Order of the World is carried further in the poetical quasi-personification of the Dh. with the phrase "dhammaja dh-nimmita dh-dāyāda" (born of the Norm, created by the Norm, heir of the Norm; see under cpds. and Dhammatā; also s. v. Niyama). That which the Buddha preached, the Dhamma kat) e)coxh/n, was the order of law of the universe, immanent, eternal, uncreated, not as interpreted by him only, much less invented or decreed by him, but intelligible to a mind of his range, and by him made so to mankind as bodhi: revelation, awakening. The Buddha (like every great philosopher & other Buddhas preceding Gotama: ye pi te ahesuṃ atītaṃ addhānaṃ Arahanto Sammāsambuddhā te pi dhammaṃ yeva sakkatvā S I.140) is a discoverer of this order of the Dhamma, this universal logic, philosophy or righteousness ("Norm"), in which the rational & the ethical elements are fused into one. Thus by recognition of the truth the knower becomes the incorporation of the knowable (or the sense of the universe=Dhamma) & therefore a perfect man, one who is "truly enlightened" (sammāsambuddha): so Bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passati cakkhu-bhūto ðāṇa-bhūto dhamma° brahma° & in this possession of the truth he is not like Brahmā, but Brahmā himself & the lord of the world as the "master of the Truth": vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā Amatassa dātā dhammassāmī S IV.94; & similarly "yo kho Dhammaṃ passati so mam passati; yo mam passati so Dhammaṃ passati" =he who sees the Buddha sees the Truth S III.120. Cp. with this also the dhamma-cakka idea (see cpds.). On equation Dhamma=Brahman see esp. Geiger, Dhamma pp. 76-80, where is also discussed the formula Bhagavato putto etc. (with dhammaja for the brahmanic brahmaja). - In later (Abhidhamma) literature the (dogmatic) personification of Dhamma occurs. See e. g. Tikp A 366. As 6th sense-object "dhamma" is the counterpart of "mano": manasā dhammaṃ viððāya "apperceiving presentations with the mind" S IV.185 etc. (see formula under rūpa); mano-viððeyyā dhammā S IV.73; cp. S III.46; IV.3 sq.; V.74; D III.226, Pāli Text Society 766 Pāli-English Dictionary 245, 269. Ranged in the same category under the anupassanā-formula (q. v.) "dhammesu dhamm-ānupassin" realising the mentality of mental objects or ideas, e. g. D II.95, 100, 299; A I.39, 296; II.256; III.450; IV.301. Also as one of the 6 taṇhās "desire for ideas" D III.244, 280. - As spirituality opposed to materiality in contrast of dh. & āmisa: It 98 (°dāna: a mat. & a spir. gift). - (b) objective: substratum (of cognition), piece, constituent (=khandha), constitution; phenomenon, thing, "world," cosmic order (as the expression of cosmic sense, as under a & 2). Thus applied to the khandhas: vedanādayo tayo kh. DhA I.35 (see Khandha B 3); to rūpa vedanā saððā sankhārā viððāna S III.39;=sankhārā D III.58, 77, 141. Freq. in formula sabbe dhammā aniccā (+dukkhā anattā: see nicca) "the whole of the visible world, all phenomena are evanescent etc." S III.132 sq. & passim. diṭṭhe [va] dhamme in the phenomenal world (opp. samparāyika dh. the world beyond): see under diṭṭha (S IV.175, 205 etc.). - ye dhammā hetuppabhavā tesaṃ hetuṃ Tathāgato āha "of all phenomena sprung from a cause the Buddha the cause hath told" Vin I.40 (cp. Isā Upanishad 14). - lokadhammā things of this world (viz. gain, fame, happiness etc., see under lābha) D III.260; Nd2 55. - uttari-manussadh°ā transcendental, supernormal phenomena D I.211, cp. D III.4; abbhuta-dh°ā wonderful signs, portents Miln 8 (tayo acchariyā a. dh. pāturahesuṃ); PvA 2: hassa-khiḍḍhā-rati-dh.samāpanna endowed with the qualities or things of mirth, play & enjoyment D I.19; III.31; gāma° things or doings of the village D I.4 (cp. DA I.72). 2. Ratio-ethically-(a) objective: "rationality," anything that is as it should be according to its reason & logicality (as expressed under No. 1 a), i. e. right property, sound condition, norm, propriety, constitution as conforming to No. 1 in universal application i. e. Natural or Cosmic Law: yattha nāmað ca rūpaṃ ca asesam uparujjhati, taṃ te dhammaṃ idhāððāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ (recognising this law) S I.35 cittacetasikā dh° ā a term for the four mental khandhas, and gradually superseding them Dhs 1022 (cf. Compendium of Philosophy, 1); dasadhamma-vidū Vin I.38 (see dasa); with attha, nirutti and paṭibhāna: one of the 4 Paṭisambhidās (branches of analytic knowledge A II.160; Pṭs I.84, 88 etc.; Vibh. 293 f., Points of Controversy, p. 380. In this sense freq. -° as adj.: being constituted, having the inherent quality (as based on Natural Law or the rational constitution of the Universe), destined to be . . ., of the (natural) property of . . ., like (cp. Gr. -eidh/s or E. -able, as in change-able=liable to change, also E. -hood, -ly & P. gata, -ṭhita), e. g. khaya-dhamma liable to decay (+vaya°, virāga°, nirodha°), with ref. to the Sankhāras S IV.216 sq.; in the Paṭiccasamuppāda S II.60; akkhaya imperishable Pv IV.152 (dānaṃ a-dh. atthu). cavana° destined to shift to another state of existence D I.18; III.31; It 76; VvA 54. jāti-jarā-maraṇa° under the law of birth, age, & death D III.57; A I.147; III.54; PvA 41 (sabbe sattā . . .); bhedana° fragile (of kāya) D I.76; S I.71; PvA 41 (bhijjana° of sankhārā). vipariṇāma° changeable A I.258; IV.157; PvA 60 (+anicca). a° unchanging D III.31 sq. samudaya° & nirodha°, in formula yaṃ kiñci s-dh°ṃ sabban tan n-dh°ṃ "anything that is destined to come into existence must also cease to exist" D I.110, 180; S IV.47 & passim. Cp. further: anāvatti° avinipāta° D I.156; III.107, 132; A I.232; II.89, 238; IV.12; anuppāda° D III.270. - (b) subjective: "morality," right behaviour, righteousness, practice, duty; maxim (cp. ṭhāna), constitution of character as conforming to No. 1 in social application, i. e. Moral Law. - Often in pl.: tenets, convictions, moral habits; & as adj. that which is proper, that which forms the right idea; good, righteous, true; opp. adhamma false, unjust etc.; evil practice - (a) Righteousness etc.: S I.86 (eko dh. one principle of conduct; II.280 (dh. isinaṃ dhajo: righteousness is the banner of the Wise); kusala dh. D I.224; dhamme ṭhita righteous Vv 168; ðāti° duty against relatives PvA 30; deyya°= dāna PvA 9, 70; sad° faith (q. v.) - opp. adhamma unrighteousness, sin A II.19; V.73 sq.; D III.70 (°rāga+ visama-lobha & micchā-dhamma); Pv III.96 (°ṃ anuvattisaṃ I practised wrong conduct).- In the same sense: dh. asuddho Vin I.5=S I.137 (pāturahosi Magadhesu pubbe dh. a.); pāpa° (adj.) of evil conduct Vin I.3; aṭṭhita° unrighteous D III.133; lobha° greedy quality D I.224, 230; methuna dh. fornication D III.133. - Pāli Text Society 767 Pāli-English Dictionary (b) (pl.) Tenets, practices etc. - (aa) good: kusalā dh. D II.223, 228; III.49, 56, 82, 102 etc.; S II.206; sappurisa° A V.245, 279; PvA 114; samaṇa° Wanderer's practice or observances DhA II.55. brāhmaṇakaraṇā D I.244; yesaṃ dh°ānaṃ Gotamo vaṇṇavādin D I.206; cp. sīlaṃ samādhi paððā ca vimutti ca anuttarā: anubuddhā ime dhammā Gotamena yasassinā D II.123. dhammānaṃ sukusalo perfect in all (these) qualities D I.180; samāhite citte dhammā pātubhavanti "with composed mind appear true views" S IV.78; dhammesu patiṭṭhito S I.185; ananussutesu dh°esu cakkhuṃ udapādi "he visualized undiscovered ideas" S II.9. - (bb) evil: āvaraṇīyā S IV.104; pāpakā Vin I.8; D I.70; A I.202; akusalā D III.56, 57, 73, 91 etc.; lobha°, dosa°, moha° S I.70=It 45=Nd2 420; S I.43; M III.40; dukkhavipākā vodanīyā saṃkilesikā ponobbhavikā D I.195; III.57. - (cc) various: gambhīrā duddasā etc. Vin I.4; D I.12; S I.136; - Cp. S II.15, 26; Nd2 320; It 22, 24; Ps I.5, 22, 28; Vbh 105, 228, 293 sq. etc. etc. - (g) (adj.) good, pious, virtuous etc.: adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ "the sinners go to niraya, the good to heaven" Th 1, 304=DA I.99=DhsA 38= DhA I.22. kalyāṇa° virtuous A I.74, 108; II.81, 91, 224 sq.; PvA 13. Opp. pāpa° Vin III.90; cp. above a. - (d) (phrases). Very freq. used as adv. is the instr. dhammena with justice, justly, rightly, fitly, properly Vin I.3; D I.122; S IV.331; Vv 3419 (=kāraṇena ðāyena vā VvA); Pv II.930 (=yutten'eva kāraṇena PvA 125, as just punishment); IV.169 (=anurūpakāraṇena PvA 286). Esp. in phrase of the cakkavattin, who rules the world according to justice: adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena anusāsati (or ajjhāvasati) D I.89; II.16; S I.236=Sn 1002; cp. Sn 554 (dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi, of the Buddha). Opp. adhammena unjustly, unfitly, against the rule Vin IV.37; S I.57; IV.331; DA I.236. - dhamme (loc.) honourably J II.159. - dhammaṃ carati to live righteously Pv II.334; see also below C 3 & dh.cariyā. C. The Dhamma, i. e. moral philosophy, wisdom, truth as propounded by Gotama Buddha in his discourses & conversations, collected by the compilers of the 5 Nikāyas (dhamma-vinayaṃ sangāyantehi dhammasangāhakehi ekato katvā VvA 3; cp. mayaṃ dh.°ṃ ca vinayað ca sangāyāma Vin II.285), resting on the deeper meaning of dhamma as expld under B 1 a, & being in short the "doctrinal" portions of the Buddhist Tipiṭaka in contradiction to the Vinaya, the portion expounding the rules of the Order (see piṭaka). Dhamma as doctrine is also opposed to Abhidhamma "what follows on the Dhamma." - (1) Dhamma and Vinaya, "wisdom & discipline," as now found in the 2 great Piṭakas of the B. Scriptures, the Vinaya and SuttantaPiṭaka (but the expression "Piṭako" is later. See Piṭaka). Thus bhikkhū suttantikā vinaya-dharā dhamma kathikā, i. e. "the bhikkhus who know the Suttantas, remember the Vinaya & preach the Word of the Buddha" Vin II.75 (≈I.169), cp. IV.67. Dhamma & Vinaya combd: yo 'haṃ evaṃ svākkhāte Dh-vinaye pabbajito S I.119; bhikkhu na evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kattā hoti: na tvaṃ imaṃ Dh-v°ṃ ājānāsi, ahaṃ imaṃ Dh-v°ṃ ājānāmi etc. S III.12; imaṃ Dh-v°ṃ na sakkomi vitthārena ācikkhituṃ S I.9; samaṇā . . . imasmiṃ Dh-v°e gādhanti S III.59. - Thus in var. cpds. (see below), as Dh-dhara (+V-dh.) one who knows both by heart; Dh-vādin (+V-v.) one who can recite both, etc. - See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin II.285 (dh. ca v. ca pariyatta), 304; III.19, 90; D I.8, 176, 229; II.124 (ayaṃ Dh. ayaṃ V. idaṃ Satthu-sāsanaṃ); III.9, 12, 28, 118 sq.; S I.9, 119, 157; II.21, 50, (dh-vinaye assāsa); A III.297 (id.); S II.120; III.91; IV.43 sq., 260; A I.34, 121, 185, 266; II.2, 26, 117, 168; III.8, 168 sq.; IV.36, 200 sq.; V.144, 163, 192; It 112; Sn p. 102; Ud 50. - 2. Dhamma, Buddha, Sangha. On the principle expld in Note on B 1 a rests the separation of the personality of the teacher from that which he taught (the "Doctrine," the "Word," the Wisdom or Truth, cp. Dhammakāyo Tathāgatassa adhivacanaṃ D III.84). A person becoming a follower of the B. would conform to his teaching (Dh.) & to the community ("Church"; Sangha) by whom his teaching was handed down. The formula of Initiation or membership is therefore threefold, viz. Buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ upemi (gacchāmi), Dh °ṃ . . ., Sanghaṃ . . . i. e. I put myself into the shelter of the B., the Dh. & the S. (see further ref. under Sangha) S I.34 (Buddhe pasannā Dhamme ca Sanghe tibbagāravā: ete sagge pakāsenti yattha te upapajjare, i. e. those who adore the B. & Pāli Text Society 768 Pāli-English Dictionary his Church will shine in Heaven); D II.152 sq., 202 sq., 352; S IV.270 sq. (°saraṇagamana); DhA I.206; PvA 1 (vande taṃ uttamaṃ Dh °ṃ, B °ṃ, S °ṃ). Cp. Satthari, Dhamme, Sanghe kankhati, as 3 of the ceto-khilā A III.248≈. -3. Character of the Dhamma in var. attributes, general phraseology. - The praise of the Dh. is expressed in many phrases, of which only a few of the more frequent can be mentioned here. Among the most famous is that of "dhammaṃ deseti ādi-kalyāṇaṃ majjhe-k°, pariyosāna-k°, etc. "beautiful in the beginning, beautiful in the middle & beautiful in the end," e. g. D I.62; S I.105; IV.315; A II.147, 208; III.113 sq., 135, 262; D III.96, 267; Nd2 316; It 79; VvA 87. It is welcome as a friend, beautifully told, & its blessings are immediate: sv'akkhāta, sandiṭṭhika, akālika, ehipassika etc. D II.93; III.5, 39, 45, 102; S I.9, 117; II.199; IV.271; A III.285 etc. It is mahā-dh. S IV.128; ariya° S I.30; A V.241, 274; Sn 783; sammā° S I.129. It is likened to a splendid palace on a mountain-top Vin I.5=It 33, or to a quiet lake with sīla as its banks S I.169=183; and it is above age & decay: satan ca dhammo na jaram upeti S I.71. Whoever worships the Dh. finds in this worship the highest gratification: diyo loke sako putto piyo loke sako pati, tato piyatarā . . . dhammassa magganā S I.210; ye keci ariyadhamme khantiyā upetā . . . devakāyaṃ paripūressanti S I.30. Dh °ṃ garukaroti D III.84. Opp. Dhamme agārava A III.247, 340; IV.84: the slanderers of the Dh. receive the worst punishment after death S I.30 (upenti Roruvaṃ ghoraṃ). - Var. phrases: to find the truth (i. e. to realize intuitively the Dh.)=dh°ṃ anubodhati D II.113; S I.137, or vindati D I.110, 148. To expound the Dh., teach the truth, talk about problems of ethics & philosophy: dh°ṃ deseti Vin IV.134; S I.210 etc.; katheti PvA 41; bhāsati Vin I.101; bhaṇati Vin I.169; pakāseti S II.28; IV.121. To hear the Dh., to listen to such an exposition: dh°ṃ suṇāti S I.114, 137, 196, 210; A I.36; III.163; DhA III.81, 113. To attain full knowledge of it: dh °ṃ pariyāpuṇāti A II.103, 185; III.86, cp. 177 & °pariyatti. To remember the Dh.: dhāreti A III.176 (for details of the 5 stages of the Dh.accomplishment); to ponder over the Dh., to study it: dh °ṃ viciṇāti S I.34=55, 214; A IV.3 sq. To enter a relation of discipleship with the Dh.: dh °ṃ saraṇaṃ gacchati (see above 2) Pv IV.348; dhammaṃ saraṇatthaṃ upehi Vv 532 (cp. VvA 232). - See further Ps I.34, 78, 131; II.159 sq.; Pug 58, 66; Vbh 293 sq., 329; Nett 11, 15, 31, 83, 112; & cp. cpds. - 4. Dhamma and anudhamma. Childers interprets anudhamma with "lesser or inferior dhamma," but the general purport of the Nikāya passages seems to be something like "in conformity with, in logical sequence to the dhamma" i. e. lawfulness, righteousness, reasonableness, truth (see KS II.202; Geiger, Pāli Dhamma pp. 115-118). It occurs (always with Dh.) in the foll. contexts: dhammassa c'ānudh °ṃ vyākaroti "to explain according to the truth of the Dhamma" D I.161; III.115; Ud 50; dhammassa hoti anudhammacārin "walking in perfect conformity to the Dh." A II.8; dh.-anudh °ṃ ācaranti id. D III.154; dh.-anudh° paṭipanna "one who has reached the complete righteousness of the Dh." D II.224; III.119; S III.40 sq.; It 81; A III.176 (where it forms the highest stage of the Dhammaknowledge, viz. (1) dh °ṃ suṇāti; (2) pariyāpuṇāti; (3) dhāreti; (4) atthaṃ upaparikkhati; (5) dh-anudh °ṃ paṭipajjati). Further in series bahussuta, dhammadhara, dh-anudh°-paṭipanna D II.104; S V.261; A II.8; Ud 63; also in dhamma-kathika, dh-anudh°-paṭi panna, diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna-patta S II.18=114= III.163; & in atthaṃ aððāya, dhammaṃ aððāya, dhanudh°-paṭipanna A I.36; II.97. -akkhāna discussing or preaching of the Dhamma Nd1 91; -atthadesanā interpretation of the Dh. Miln 21; -ādhikaraṇa a point in the Dh. S IV.63=V.346; -ādhipa Lord of righteousness (+anudhamma-cārin) A I.150; cp. °ssāmi; nt. abstr. °ādhipateyya the dominating influence of the Dh. A I.147 sq.; D III.220; Miln 94; Vism 14. -ānudhamma see above C 4; -anuvattin acting in conformity with the moral law Dh 86, cp. DhA II.161; -ānusārin of righteous living D III.105, 254 (+saddhā°); M I.226, 479; A I.74; IV.215; IV.23; S V.200; Pug 15; Nett 112, 189; -anvaya main drift of the faith, general conclusions of the Dh., D II.83= III.100; M II.120; -abhisamaya understanding of the Truth, conversion to the Dhamma [cp. dharmābhisamaya Divy 200] S II.134 (+dh.-cakkhu-paṭilābha): Pug 41; Miln 20; DhA I.27; IV.64; PvA 31 etc.; -āmata the nectar of righteousness or the Dh. Pāli Text Society 769 Pāli-English Dictionary Miln 22 (°meghena lokaṃ abhitappayanto), 346; -ādāsa the mirror of the Dhamma D II.93 (name of an aphorism) S V.357 (id.); Th 1, 395; ThA 179; -āyatana the field of objects of ideation S II.72; Dhs 58, 66, 147, 397, 572, 594; Vbh 70, 72 sq.; -ārammaṇa: dh. as an object of ideation Dhs 146, 157, 365; cp. Dhs. trsl. 2; -ārāma "one who has the Dh. as his pleasureground," one who rejoices in the Dh. A III.431; It 82 (+dh-rata); Sn 327; Dh 364, cp. DhA IV.95; ālapana using the proper address, a fit mode of addressing a person as followed by the right custom. See Dial. I.193-196; J V.418; -āsana "the Dh-seat," i. e. flat piece of stone or a mat on which a priest sat while preaching J I.53; DhA II.31; -ûposatha the fast day prescribed by the Dh. A I.208; -okkā the torch of Righteousness J I.34; -oja the essence or sap of the Dh. S V.162; DhA IV.169; -osadha the medicine of the Dh. Miln 110, 335. -kathā ethical discussion, fit utterance, conversation about the Dh., advice D III.151; J I.217; VvA 6; PvA 50, 66; -kathika (adj.) one who converses about ethical problems, one who recites or preaches the Dh., one who speaks fitly or properly. Often in combn. with Vinaya-dhara "one who masters (knows by heart) the Vinaya," & bahussuta "one who has a wide knowledge of tradition": Vin IV.10, 13, 141; A III.78; DhA II.30; also with suttantika "one who is versed in the Suttantas": Vin I.169; II.75; IV.67. The ability to preach the Dh. is the first condition of one who wishes to become perfected in righteousness (see dhamm-ānudhamma, above C 4): S II.18, 114=III.163; M III.40. A I.25 sq.; II.138; Pug 42; J I.217; IV.2 (°thera). Cp. also AvŚ II.81; -kathikatta (nt.) speaking about the Dh.; preaching M III.40; A I.38 (+vinayadhara-katta); -kamma a legally valid act, or procedure in accordance with the Rules of the Order Vin IV.37, 136, 232; A I.74 (+vinaya°); a° an illegal act Vin IV.232; A I.74; -karaka a proper or regulation (standard) water-pot, i. e. a pot with a filter for straining water as it was used by ascetics Vin II.118, 177, 301; J I.395; VI.331; DhA III.290, 452; VvA 220 (not °karaṇena); PvA 185; Miln 68; -kāma a lover of the Dh. D III.267; A V.24, 27, 90, 201; Sn 92. -kāya having a body according to the Norm (the dhammatā of bodies). See Bdhgh as translated in Dial. III. ad loc.; having a normal body (sic Bdhgh, esp. of the B. D III.84; -ketu the standard of the Dh., or Dh. as standard A I.109=III.149; -khan- dha the (4) main portions or articles of the Dh. (sīla, samādhi, paððā, vimutti) D III.229; cp. Sp. AvŚ II.155; -gaṇa a body of followers of the Dh. PvA 194; -gaṇḍikā (better gaṇṭhikā, q v.) a block of justice, i. e. of execution J I.150, 151; II.124; VI.176; V.303; -garu worshipping the Dh. S IV.123; DhA I.17 (°ka); -gariya a kind of acrobatic tumbler, lit. excellent t. (+brahma°) Miln 191; -gu one who knows the Dh. (analogous to vedagu) J V.222; VI.261; -gutta protecting the Dh. or protected by the Dh. (see gutta) S I.222; J V.222 (+dhpāla); -ghosaka (-kamma) praise of the Dh. DhA III.81; -cakka the perfection or supreme harmony of righteousness (see details under cakka), always in phrase dhcakkaṃ pavatteti (of the Buddha) "to proclaim or inaugurate the perfect state or ideal of universal righteousness" Vin I.8=M I.171; Vin I.11; S I.191; III.86; Sn 556, 693; Miln 20, 343; DhA I.4; VvA 165; PvA 2, 67 etc.; besides this also in simile at S I.33 of the car of righteousness; -cakkhu "the eye of wisdom," perception of the law of change. Freq. in the standing formula at the end of a conversation with the Buddha which leads to the "opening of the eyes" or conversion of the interlocutor, viz. "virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhcakkhuṃ udapādi" D I.86, 110; II.288; S IV.47; A IV.186; Vin I.11, 16, 40 etc. Expl. at DA I.237: dhammesu vā cakkhuṃ dhammamayaṃ vā cakkhuṃ. Cp. S II.134 (°paṭ ;+dhammābhisamaya); Dial. I.184; II.176; -cariyā walking in righteousness, righteous living, observance of the Dh., piety (=dānādi-puññapaṭipatti VvA 282) S I.101 (+samacariyā kusalakiriyā); A II.5; III.448; V.87, 302; Sn 263 (=kāyasucaritādi° Sn A 309), 274 (+brahma°). a° evil way of living A I.55 (+visamacariyā); -cārin virtuous, dutiful M I.289; II.188; Dh 168; Miln 19 (+samacārin); -cetiya a memorial in honour of the Dh. M II.124; -chanda virtuous desire (opp. kāma°) DhsA 370; Vbh 208; -ja born of the Dh. (see above, Note on B 1 a), in formula "Bhagavato putto oraso dh-jo, dh-nimmito, dh.dāyādo" (the spiritual child of the Buddha) D III.84=S II.221; It 101; -jāla "net of the Dh.," name of a discourse (cp. °ādāsa & pariyāya) D I.46; -jīvin living righteously It 108; Pāli Text Society 770 Pāli-English Dictionary Dh 24 (=dhammenā samena DhA I.239); -ððū one who knows the Dh. J VI.261; -ṭṭha standing in the Law, just, righteous S I.33 (+sīlasampanna); Sn 749; J III.334; IV.211; ThA 244, -ṭṭhita=°ṭṭha D I.190; -ṭṭhiti° having a footing in the Dh. S II.60, 124, cp. °ṭṭhitatā: establishing of causes and effects S II.25; -takka right reasoning Sn 1107 (=sammāsankappa Nd2 318); -dāna gift of; dāyāda heir of the Dh.; spiritual heir (cp. above note on B 1 a) D III.84; S II.221; M I.12; III.29; It 101; -dīpa the firm ground or footing of the Dh. (usually combd with atta-dīpa: having oneself as one's refuge, self-dependent) D II.100; III.58, 77; S V.154; -desanā moral instruction, exposition of the Dh. Vin I.16; D I.110 etc. (see desanā); -dessin a hater of the Dh. Sn 92; -dhaja the banner of the Dh. A I.109= III.149; Nd2 503; Miln 21; -dhara (adj.) one who knows the Dh. (by heart); see above C 4. Combd w. Vinayadhara Vin I.127, 337; II.8; A I.117, & bahussuta (ibid). Sn 58 (cp. SnA 110). - See also A III.361 sq., IV.310; Nd2 319; -dhātu the mental object considered as irreducible element Dhs 58, 67, 147 etc.; Vbh 87, 89 (see above B 1); an ultimate principle of the Dh., the cosmic law D II.8; M I.396; S II.143 sq.; Nett 64 sq.; Vism 486 sq. dhāraṇa knowledge of the Dh. M II.175; -nāṭaka a class of dancing girls having a certain duty J V.279; -nimmita see °ja; -niyāma belonging to the order of the Norm D I.190; DA on D II.12: dhammatā; (°ka); -niyāmatā, certainty, or orderliness of causes and effects S II.25; Points of Controversy, 387; -netti= niyāma Miln 328; DA I.31; cp. Sk. dharmanetrī M Vastu II.357; III.234, 238; -pajjota the lamp of the Dh. Miln 21; -pada (nt.) a line or stanza of the Dhamma, a sentence containing an ethical aphorism; a portion or piece of the Dh. In the latter meaning given as 4 main subjects, viz. anabhijjhā, avyāpāda, sammā-sati, sammā-samādhi D III.229; A II.29 sq. (in detail); Nett 170. - S I.22 (dānā ca kho dh-padaṃ va seyyo). 202 (dh-padesu chando); A II.185; Sn 88 (dh-pade sudesite=nibbāna-dhammassa padattā SnA 164); J III.472 (=nibbāna); DhA III.190 (ekaṃ dh-padaṃ). As Np. title of a canonical book, included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; -pamāṇa measuring by the (teaching of) Dh. Pug 53; DhA III.114 (°ikāni jātisatāni); -pariyatti attainment of or accomplishment in the Dh., the collection of the Dh. in general A III.86 (w. ref. to the 9 angas, see navanga); -pariyāya a short discourse, or a verse, or a poem, with a moral or a text; usually an exposition of a single point of doctrine D I.46; II.93; III.116; M I.445; Vin I.40 (a single verse); A I.65; IV.63 (a poem Sn 190-218, where also it is called a dh°pariyāyo); A V.288, 291. Such a dh°pariyāya had very often a special name. Thus Brahmajāla, the Wondrous Net D I.46; Dhammādāso dh°p°, the Mirror of the Law D II.93=S V.357; Sokasallaharaṇa, Sorrow's dart extractor A III.62; Ādittap° dh°p°, the Red-hot lancet S IV.168; Lomahaṃsana° M I.83; Dhammatā-dhamma° Miln 193, etc. -pāla guardian of the Law or the Dh. J V.222, freq. also as Np.; -pīti (-rasa) the sweetness of drinking in the Dh. (pivaṃ) Sn 257; Dh 79 (=dhammapāyako dhammaṃ pivanto ti attho DhsA II.126); -bhaṇḍāgārika treasurer of the Dh., an Ep. of Ānanda Th 1, 1048; J I.382, 501; II.25; DhA III.250; PvA 2. -bhūta having become the Dh.; righteousness incorporated, said of the Buddhas D III.84. Usually in phrase (Bhagavā) cakkhu-bhūta . . . dh-bhūta brahmabhūta A V.226 sq. (cp. cakkhu); Th 1, 491; see also above, note B 1 a; -bheri the drum of the Dh. Miln 21; -magga the path of righteousness Sn 696; Miln 21; -maya made (built) of the Dh. (pāsāda) S I.137; -yanta the (sugar-) mill of the Dh. (fig.) Miln 166. -yāna the vehicle of the Law (the eightfold Noble Path) S V.5; -rakkhita rightly guarded Sn 288; -rata fond of the Law Sn 327; Dh 364; DhA IV.95; cp. dh.-[gatā]rati Th I.742; Dhp. 354; -rasa taste of Dhp. 354; -rājā king of righteousness, Ep. of the Buddha S I.33=55; D I.88 (of a cakkavatti); A I.109; III.149; Sn 554; J I.262; interpreted by Bdhgh at DA I.249 as "dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jāto ti"=a king who gained the throne legitimately; -laddha one who has acquired the Dh., holy, pious S II.21; J III.472; justly acquired (bhogā) Sn p. 87; -vara the best of truths or the most excellent Doctrine Sn 233, 234; vādin speaking properly, speaking the truth or according to the Doctrine Vin II.285; III.175 (+Vinaya-vādin); D III.135 (id.); D I.4, 95 (of Gotama; DA I.76: nava-lokuttara-dhamma sannissitaṃ katvā vadati); S IV.252; A I.75; II.209; -vicaya investigation of doctrine, religious Pāli Text Society 771 Pāli-English Dictionary research Dhs 16, 20, 90, 309, 333, 555; Vbh 106; Vism 132; -vitakka righteous thought A I.254; vidū one who understands the Dh., an expert in the Dh. J V.222; VI.261; -vinicchaya righteous decision, discrimination of the truth Sn 327; Dh 144; DhA III.86; -vihārin living according to the Dh. A III.86 sq.; -saṃvibhāga sharing out or distribution of the Dh., i. e. spiritual gifts It 98 (opp. āmisa° material gifts); -sangāhaka a compiler of the sacred scriptures, a diaskeuasth/s VvA 3, 169; -saððā righteous thought, faith, piety PvA 3; -sabhā a hall for the discussion of the Dh., a chapel, meetinghouse J VI.333; DhA I.31; II.51; IV.91; PvA 38, 196; -samaya a meeting where the Dh. is preached S I.26; -samādāna acquisition of the Dh., which is fourfold as discussed at M I.305; D III.229; -saraṇa relying on or putting one's faith in the Dh. (see above C 3) D III.58, 77; S V.154; -savana hearing the preaching of the Dh., "going to church" Vin I.101; M II.175; A II.248, 381; IV.361; Sn 265; DhA III.190; -sākaccha conversation about the Dh. Sn 266; -ssāmi Lord of the Truth, Ep. of the Buddha (see above B 1 a note) S IV.94; -sāra the essence of the Dh. S V.402; -sārathi in purisa-dh.-s° at D I.62 misprint for purisa-damma-s°; sārin a follower of the Dh. S I.170; -sudhammatā excellency of the Dh. S II.199; Th 1, 24, 220, 270, 286; -senāpati "captain of the Dhamma," Ep. of Sāriputta Th 1, 1083; J I.408; Miln 343; DhA III.305; VvA 64, 65, 158; -soṇḍatā thirst after justice J V.482; -sota the ear of the Dh. S II.43. Dhamma2 {Dhamma} (adj.) [Sk. *dhārma, cp. dhammika] only in f. -ī in combn with kathā: relating to the Dhamma, viz. conversation on questions of Ethics, speaking about the Dh., preaching, religious discourse, sermon. Either as dhammī kathā Vin II.161; IV.56 & in instr.-abl. dhammiyā kathāya (sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti saṃpahaṃseti: ster. formula) S I.114, 155, 210, IV.122, PvA 30 etc.; or as cpd. dhammī-kathā D II.1; M I.161; Sn 325; & dhammi-kathā S I.155; PvA 38. Dhamma3 {Dhamma} (adj.) [Sk. dhanvan] having a bow: see daḷha°; also as dhammin in daḷha° S I.185 (see dhammin). Dhammatā (f.) [Sk. dharmitā] conformity to the Dhammaniyāma (see niyāma), fitness, propriety; a general rule, higher law, cosmic law, general practice, regular phenomenon, usual habit; often used in the sense of a finite verb: it is a rule, it is proper, one should expect S I.140 (Buddhānaṃ dh. the law of the B.'s i. e. as one is wont to expect of the B.s), 215 (su°); IV.216 sq. (khaya° etc.); D II.12; A II.36 (kusala°); V.46; Th 1, 712; J I.245; II.128; Nett 21, 50, cp. Miln 179; PvA 19; VvA 7. See also AvŚ Index. {Dhammata} Dhammatta {Dhammatta} [Sk. *dharmatvaṃ] liability to be judged Vin II.55 (& a°). Dhammani {Dhammani} only found in S I.103, where the Comy. takes it as a locative, and gives, as the equivalent, "in a forest on dry land" (araññe thale). Cp. Kindred Sayings I.129, n. 2. Dhammika {Dhammika} (adj.) [=Sk. dharmya, cp. dhammiya] lawful, according to the Dh. or the rule; proper, fit, right; permitted, legitimate, justified; righteous, honourable, of good character, just, esp. an attr. of a righteous King (rājā cakkavattī dhammiko dhammarājā) D I.86; II.16; A I.109=III.149; J I.262, 263; def. by Bdhgh as "dhammaṃ caratī ti dh." (DA I.237) & "dhammena caratī ti dh., ðāyena samena pavattalī ti" (ib. 249). - Vin IV.284; D I.103; S II.280 (dhammikā kathā); III.240 (āhāra); IV.203 (dhammikā devā, adh° asurā); A I.75; III.277; Sn 404; DhA II.86 (dohaḷa); IV.185 (°lābha); PvA 25 (=suddha, manohara). Also as saha-dh° (esp. in conn. w. pañha, a justified, reasonable, proper question: D I.94; S IV.299 in detail) Vin IV.141; D I.161; III.115; A I.174. - a° unjust, illegal etc. Vin IV.285; S IV.203; A III.243. Pāli Text Society 772 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhammin1 {Dhammin} (adj.) [Sk. dharmin] only -°: having the nature or quality of, liable to, consisting in, practising, acting like, etc. (as °dhamma B 2 a), viz. uppāda-vaya° D II.157; maraṇa° (=maraṇadhamma) A I.147; pāpa° Pv I.117 of evil nature. Dhammin2 {Dhammin} (-°) only in daḷha-dh°, which is customarily taken as a dern from dhanu, bow=having a strong bow (see dhamma3); although some passages admit interpretation as "of strong character or good practice," e. g. S I.185. Dhammiya {Dhammiya} (adj.) [Sk. dharmya; cp. dhammika] in accordance with the Dhamma PvA 242 (also a°); Vism 306 (°lābha). Dhammilla {Dhammilla} [Sk. dhammilla] the braided hair of women Dāvs IV.9. Dhammī {Dhammi} in °kathā see dhamma2. *Dhayati {Dhayati} to suck: see dhātī. Caus. dhāpayati, pp. dhāta (q. v.). Dhara {Dhara} (usually -°, except at Miln 420) (adj.) [Sk. dhara, to dhr see dharati] bearing, wearing, keeping; holding in mind, knowing by heart. Freq. in phrase dhammadhara (knowing the Dhamma, q. v.), vinaya°, mātikā° e. g. D II.125. dhamma° also Sn 58; Th 1, 187; Nd2 319; vinaya° Miln 344; jaṭājina° Sn 1010. See also dhāra. Dharaṇa {Dharana} (adj.) bearing, holding, comprising VvA 104 (suvaṇṇassa pañcadasa° nikkha holding, i. e. worth or equal to 15 parts of gold). - f. -ī bearing, i. e. pregnant with Sn 26 (of cows: godharaṇiyo paveniyo=gabbhiniyo SnA 39). As n. the Earth J V.311; VI.526; Miln 34; dharaṇī-ruha N. of a tree J VI.482, 497; Miln 376. Dharati {Dharati} [Sk. dharati, dhṛ as in Gr. qro/nos; Lat. firmus & fretus. See also daḷha, dhata, dhamma, dhiti, dhuva] to hold, bear, carry, wear; to hold up, support; to bear in mind, know by heart; to hold out, endure, last, continue, live Sn 385 (take to heart, remember); DhA II.68; ppr. dharamāṇa living, lasting J I.75 (dh°e yeva suriye while the sun was still up); II.6; Miln 240, 291 (Bhagavato dh°-kāle); - grd. dhareyya, in dh°divasa the day when a young girl is to be carried (into the house of her husband) ThA, 25; cp. dhāreyya Th 2, 472=vivāha ThA 285. - pp. dhata (q. v.) - Caus. dhāreti (q. v.). Dhava1 {Dhava} [Sk. dhava=madhuratvaca, Halāyudha] the shrub Grislea Tomentosa A I.202, 204; J IV.209; VI.528. Dhava2 {Dhava} [Sk. dhava, a newly formed word after vidhava, widow, q. v.] a husband ThA 121 (dh. vuccati sāmiko tad abhāvā vidhavā matapatikā ti attho). Dhavala {Dhavala} (adj.) [Sk. dhavala, to dhavati, see dhāvati & dhovati] white, dazzling white VvA 252; Dāvs II.123; V.26. Dhavalatā {Dhavalata} (f.) whiteness VvA 197. Pāli Text Society Dhāta 773 Pāli-English Dictionary [Sk. *dhāyita of dhayati to suck, nourish, pp. dhīta] fed, satiated; satisfied, appeased Vin I.222; J I.185; II.247, 446; V.73; VI.555; Pv I.118 (so read for dāta)=PvA 59 (: suhita titta); Miln 238, 249. - f. abstr. dhātatā satiation, fulness, satisfaction, in ati° J II.293. {Dhata} Dhātar {Dhatar} [n. ag. fr. dhṛ] upholder J V.225. Dhātī {Dhati} (f.) [Sk. dhātrī=Gr. tiqh/nh wet nurse, to dhayati suck, suckle; Idg. *dhēi as in Gr. qh_sqai to milk, qh_lus feeding, qhlh/ female breast; cp. Lat. felare, femina ("giving suck"), filius ("suckling"); Oir. dīnu lamb; Goth. daddjan; Ohg. tila breast. See also dadhi, dhītā, dhenu] wet nurse, fostermother D II.19; M I.395; II.97; J I.57; III.391; PvA 16, 176. In cpds. dhāti°, viz. -cela swaddling cloth, baby's napkin S I.205= J III.309. Dhātu {Dhatu} (f.) [Sk. dhātu to dadhāti, Idg. *dhē, cp. Gr. ti/qhmi, a)na/-qhma, Sk. dhāman, dhāṭr (=Lat. conditor); Goth. gadēds; Ohg. tāt, tuom (in meaning -°=dhātu, cp. E. serf-dom "condition of . . .") tuon=E. to do; & with k-suffix Lat. facio, Gr. (e)/)qhk(a), Sk. dhāka; see also dhamma] element. Closely related to dhamma in meaning B 1b, only implying a closer relation to physical substance. As to its gen. connotation cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 198. - 1. a primary element, of which the usual set comprises the four paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind), otherwise termed cattāro mahābhūtā(ni): D I.215; II.294; III.228; S I.15; II.169 sq., 224; IV.175, 195; A II.165; III.243; Vbh 14, 72; Nett 73. See discussed at Cpd. 254 sq. - A defn of dhātu is to be found at Vism 485. - Singly or in other combns paṭhavī° S II.174; tejo° S I.144; D III.227; the four plus ākāsa S III.227, plus viððāna S II.248; III.231; see below 2 b. - 2. (a) natural condition, property, disposition; factor, item, principle, form. In this meaning in var. combns & applications, esp. closely related to khandha. Thus mentioned with khandha & āyatana (sensory element & element of sense-perception) as bodily or physical element, factor (see khandha B 1 d & cp. Nd2 under dhātu) Th 2, 472. As such (physical substratum) it constitutes one of the lokā or forms of being (khandha° dhātu° āyatana° Nd2 550). Freq. also in combn kāma-dhātu, rūpa° arūpa° "the elements or properties of k. etc." as preceding & conditioning bhava in the respective category (Nd2 s. v.). See under d. - As "set of conditions or state of being (-°)" in the foll.: loka° a world, of which 10 are usually mentioned (equalling 10,000: PvA 138) S I.26; V.424; Pv II.961; Vbh 336; PvA 138; KS II.101, n. 1; - nibbāna° the state of N. S V.8; A II.120; IV.202; J I.55; It 38 (dve: see under Nibbāna); Miln 312. Also in the foll. connections: amata° It 62; bhū° the verbal root bhū DA I.229; ṭhapitāya dhātuyā "while the bodily element, i. e. vitality lasts" Miln 125; vaṇṇa° form, beauty S I.131; Pv I.31. In these cases it is so far weakened in meaning, that it simply corresponds to E. abstr. suffix -hood or -ity (cp. °hood=origin. "form": see ketu), so perhaps in Nibbāna°=Nibbāna-dom. Cp. dhātuka. - (b) elements in sense-consciousness: referring to the 6 ajjhattikāni & 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni S II.140 sq. Of these sep. sota° D I.79; III.38; Vbh 334; dibbasota° S II.121, 212; V.265, 304; A I.255; III.17, 280; V.199; cakkhu° Vbh 71 sq.; mano° Vbh 175, 182, 301; mano-viððāṇa° Vbh 87, 89, 175, 182 sq. - (c) various: aneka° A I.22; III.325; V.33; akusala° Vbh 363; avijjā° S II.132; ābhā° S II.150; ārambha° S V.66, 104 sq.; A I.4; II.338; ṭhiti° S II.175; III.231; A III.338; dhamma° S II.56; nekkhamma° S II.151; A III.447; nissāraṇiyā dhātuyo (5) D III.239; A III.245, 290. See further S I.134, 196; II.153, 248 (aniccā); III.231 (nirodha); IV.67; A I.176; II.164; IV.385; Dhs 58, 67, 121; Nett 57, 64 sq.; ThA 20, 49, 285, - (d) Different sets and enumerations: as 3 under kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa A I.223; III.447; Ps I.137; Vbh 86, 363, 404 sq.; under rūpa°, arūpa°, nirodha° It 45. - as 6 (pathavī etc.+ākāsa° & viððāṇa°): D III.247; A I.175 sq.; M III.31, 62, 240; Ps I.136; Vbh 82 sq. - as 7 (ābhā subha etc.): S II.150. - 18: Ps I.101, 137; II.230, Dhs 1333; Vbh 87 sq., 401 sq.; Vism 484 sq. - 3. a humour or affection of the body DA I.253 (dhātusamatā). - 4. the remains of the body Pāli Text Society 774 Pāli-English Dictionary after cremation PvA 76; a relic VvA 165 (sarīra°, bodily relic); Dāvs V.3 (dasana° the toothrelic). - abl. dhātuso according to one's nature S II.154 sq. (sattā sattehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti etc.); It 70 (id.); S III.65. -kathā N. of 3rd book of the Abhidhamma Vism 96. kucchi womb Miln 176; -kusala skilled in the elements M III.62; °kusalatā proficiency in the (18) elements D III.212; Dhs 1333; -ghara "house for a relic," a dagoba SnA 194. -cetiya a shrine over a relic DhA III.29; -nānatta diversity of specific experience D III.289; S II.143; IV.113 sq., 284; -vibhāga distribution of relics VvA 297; PvA 212. Dhātuka {Dhatuka} (adj.) (only -°) having the nature, by nature, affected with, -like (cp. °dhamma B 2a); often simply= first part of cpd. (cp. E. friend-like=friendly=friend) J I.438 (kiliṭṭha° miserable), II.31 (sama°), 63 (badhira° deaf), 102 (paṇḍuroga° having jaundice), 114 (dhuttika°); IV.137 (vāmanaka° deformed), 391 (muddhā°); V.197 (āvāṭa°); DhA I.89 (anattamana°). Dhātura {Dhatura} (adj. -°) [=*dhātuya] in cha° consisting of six elements (purisa) M III.239 (where āpodhātu omitted by mistake). See dhātu 2 c. Dhāna {Dhana} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dhāna, to dadhāti; cp. dhātu] (adj.) holding, containing (-°) M I.11 (ahi kaṇṭaka°; cp. ādhāna & kaṇṭaka). - (n.) nt. a receptacle Dh 58 (sankāra° dust-heap=ṭhāna DhA I.445). f. dhānī a seat (=ṭhāna), in rāja° "the king's seat," a royal town. Often in comb with gāma & nigama (see gāma 3 a): Vin III.89; J VI.397; Pv II.1318. Dhāniya (adj.) [Sk. dhānya, cp. dhaðða2] wealthy, rich, abundant in (-°) J III.367 (pahūtadhana°; v. l. BB °dhāritaṃ); (nt.) riches, wealth J V.99, 100. {Dhaniya} Dhāra {Dhara} (adj.) (-°) [Sk. dhāra to dhāreti; cp. dhara] bearing, holding, having D I.74 (udakarahado sītavāri°); M I.281 (ubhato°) Sn 336 (ukkā°); It 101 (antimadeha°), 108 (ukkā°). See also dhārin. Dhāraka {Dharaka} (adj.-n.) 1. bearing, one who holds or possesses DhA III.93 (sampattiṃ). - 2. one who knows or remembers A II.97 (°jātika); IV.296 sq., 328 (id.). Dhāraṇa {Dharana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. dhāraṇa, to dhāreti] 1. wearing, in mālā° (etc.) D I.5=A II.210=Pug 58; KhA 37; cīvara° A II.104=Pug 45. - 2. maintaining, sustaining, keeping up Miln 320 (āyu° bhojana). - 3. bearing in mind, remembrance Vin IV.305; M II.175 (dhamma°). Dhāraṇaka [der. fr. dhāraṇa] 1. a debtor (see dhāreti 4) J II.203; IV.45. - 2. a mnemonician Miln 79. {Dharanaka} Dhāraṇatā {Dharanata} (f.) 1. wearing, being dressed with (=dhāraṇa 1) Miln 257. - 2. mindfulness (=dhāraṇa 3) Nd2 628= Dhs 14. Dhāraṇā (f.) [to dhāraṇa] 1. memory Miln 79. - 2. the earth ("the upholder," cp. dharaṇī) J VI.180. {Dharana} Pāli Text Society 775 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhārā1 {Dhara} (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 1] torrent, stream, flow, shower D I.74 (sammā° an even or seasonable shower; DA I.218=vuṭṭhi); II.15 (udakassa, streams); J I.31; Ps I.125 (udaka°); Pv II.970 (sammā°); VvA 4 (hingulika°); PvA 139; DhA IV.15 (assu°); Sdhp 595 (vassa°). Dhārā2 {Dhara} (f.) [Sk. dhārā, from dhāvati 2.] the edge of a weapon J I.455; VI.449; DhA 317; DA I.37. - (adj.) (-°) having a (sharp) edge J I.414 (khura°) Miln 105 (sukhuma°); ekato°-ubhato° single- & double-edged J I.73 (asi); IV.12 (sattha). Dhārin {Dharin} (adj. -°) [Sk. dhārin, see dhāreti & cp. °dhara, °dhāra] holding, wearing, keeping; often in phrase antimadeha° "wearing the last body" (of an Arahant) S I.14; Sn 471; It 32, 40. J I.47 (virūpa-vesa°); Dāvs V.15. - f. °inī Pv I.108 (kāsikuttama°). Dhāretar {Dharetar} [n. ag. to dhāreti 3] one who causes others to remember, an instructor, teacher (cp. dhāraṇaka) A IV.196 (sotā sāvetā uggahetā dh.). Dhāreti {Dhareti} [Caus. of dharati, q. v. for etym.] to hold, viz. 1. to carry, bear, wear, possess; to put on, to bring, give D I.166≈(chavadussāni etc.); Vin I.16=D I.110≈ (telapajjotaṃ); D II.19 (chattaṃ to hold a sunshade over a person); PvA 47 (id.); dehaṃ dh. to "wear," i. e. to have a body It 50, 53 (antimaṃ d.); J IV.3 (padumaṃ); VI.136; Pv I.31 (vaṇṇaṃ dh.=vahasi PvA 14); tassa kahāpaṇaṃ daṇḍaṃ dh. "to inflict a fine of a k. on him" Miln 171. - 2. to hold back, restrain Vin IV.261 (kathaṃ dhāretha how do you suppress or conceal pregnancy?); Dh 222 (kodhaṃ). - 3. to bear in mind, know by heart, understand: dhammaṃ to know the Dhamma A III.176; tipiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ to know the 3 Piṭakas Miln 18. - D II.2; Pug 41 (suṇāti, bhaṇati, dh.=remember). Cp. upadhāreti. - With double acc.: to receive as, to take=believe, to take for, consider as, call: upāsakaṃ maṃ dhāretu Bhagavā "call me your disciple" Vin I.16 & passim; atthajālan ti pi naṃ dhārehi (call it . . .) D I.46; yathā paðhaṃ Bhagavā vyākaroti tathā naṃ dhareyyāsi (believe it) D I.222; yathā no (atthaṃ) Gotamo vyākarissati tathā naṃ dhāressāma D I.236; evaṃ maṃ dhārehi adhimuttacittaṃ (consider as) Sn 1149 (=upalakkhehi Nd2 323). - 4. to admit, allow, allow for, take up, support (a cause); to give, to owe D I.125 (may allow), 126; A II.69 (na kassa kiñci dh. pays no tribute); Miln 47 (atthaṃ). Dhāreyya {Dhareyya} (nt.) [orig. grd. of dhāreti] the ceremony of being carried away, i. e. the marriage ceremony, marriage (cp. dhareyya under dharati) Th 2, 472 (text has vāreyya, but ThA, 285 explains dhāreyya=vivāha). Dhāva {Dhava} [Sk. dhāva] running, racing M I.446. Dhāvati {Dhavati} [Sk. dhāvati & dhāvate: 1. to flow, run etc.; cp. Gr. qe/w (both meanings); Ags. déaw=E. dew; Ohg. tou=Ger. tau; cp. also dhārā & dhunāti. - 2. to clean (by running water) etc.=P. dhovati, q. v.] 1. to run, run away, run quickly Sn 939 (cp. Nd1 419); Dh 344; J I.308; VI.332; Nd1 405=Nd2 304III.; Pv IV.161 =palāyati PvA 2841; DhA I.389 (opp. gacchati); PvA 4; Sdhp 378. - 2. to clean etc.: see dhovati; cp. dhavala & dhārā2. Dhāvana {Dhavana} (nt.) [Sk. dhāvana] running, galloping J II.431; Miln 351. Dhāvin {Dhavin} : see pa°. Pāli Text Society 776 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhi1 & Dhī {Dhi} {Dhi} (indecl.) [Sk. dhik] an excln of reproach & disgust: fie! shame! woe! (with acc. or gen.) S V.217 (read dhī taṃ for dhītaṃ); Dh 389 (dhī=garahāmi DhA IV.148); J I.507; DhA I.179 (haṃ dhī), 216 (v. l. BB but text has haṃdi). An inorganic r replaces the sandhi-cons. in dhī-r-atthu jīvitaṃ Sn 440; cp. Th I.1150; dhi-r-atthu jātiyā J I.59. Dhi2 {Dhi} (f.) [Sk. dhīḥ to didheti, cp. Av. dī to see, Goth. (filu-) deisei cunning. See also dhīra] wisdom, only in Com. expl. of paððā: "dhi vuccati paððā" (exegesis of dhīra) at Nd1 44=J II.140=III.38. Dhikkita {Dhikkita} (adj.) [Sk. dhikkṛta, of dhi1+kata] reproached, reviled; used also medially: blaming, censuring, condemning J I.155 (=garahitā Com.); also in Com. expl. of dhīra (=dhikkita-pāpa detesting evil) at Nd1 44=J II.140=III.38 (cp. dhi2). Dhiti {Dhiti} (f.) [Sk. dhṛti to dhṛ, see dharati] energy, courage, steadfastness, firm character, resolution. S I.122, 215 =Sn 188 (cp. SnA 237); J I.266, 280; III.239; VI.373; Vbh 211; Dhs 13 (+thāma), 22, 289, 571; Miln 23, 329; Sdhp 574. Equivalent to "wisdom" (cp. juti & jutimant & Sk. dhīti) in expl. of dhīra as "dhitisampanna" Nd1 44≈(see dhi2); PvA 131. Dhitimant {Dhitimant} (adj.) [Sk. dhṛtimant; cp. also dhīmant] courageous, firm, resolute A I.25; Sn 462, 542; Th I,6; J II.140; VI.286 (wise, cp. dhiti). Dhītar & Dhītā {Dhitar} {Dhita} (f.) [Sk. dhītā, orig. pp. of dhayati to suck (cp. Lat. filia): see dhāta & dhātī, inflūenced in inflection by Sk. duhitṛ, although etymologically different] daughter Th 2, 336 (in faith); J I.152, 253; VI.366; Pv I.115; DhA III.171, 176; PvA 16, 21, 61, 105. deva° a female deva (see deva) VvA 137 etc.; nattu° a granddaughter PvA 17; mātula° a niece PvA 55; rāja° a princess J I.207; PvA 74. In compn dhītu. -kkama one who is desirous of a daughter J VI.307 (=dhītu atthāya vicarati Com.; v. l. dhītu-kāma); -dhītā granddaughter PvA 16. Dhītalikā {Dhitalika} (f.) [Dimin. of dhītā; cp. dhītikā & potthalikā] a doll Vin III.36, 126 (dāru°); DhsA 321; PvA 16. Dhītikā {Dhitika} (f.) [cp. dhītalikā] a doll Th 2, 374 (=dhītalikā ThA 252). Dhīna {Dhina} see adhīna. Dhīyati {Dhiyati} [Sk. dhīyate, Pass. to dahati1] to be contained ThA 13 (so read for dhiyati); PvA 71. Dhīra {Dhira} (adj.) [combining in meaning 1. Sk. dhīra "firm" fr. dhārayati (see dharati & dhiti); 2. Vedic. dhīra "wise" fr. dīdheti (see dhi2). The fluctuation of connotation is also scen in the expls of Coms which always give the foll. three conventional etymologies, viz. dhikkitapāpa, dhiti-sampanna, dhiyā (=paððāya) samannāgata Nd144≈(see dhi2)] constant, firm, selfrelying, of character; wise, possessing the knowledge of the Dhamma, often=paṇḍita & Ep. of an Arahant D II.128; S I.24 (lokapariyāyaṃ aððāya nibbutā dh.), 122, 221; Sn 45, 235 (nibbanti dhīrā), 913 (vippamutto diṭṭhigatehi dh.), 1052; It 68 (°upasevanā, opp. bāla), 122 (dh. sabbaganthapamocano); Dh 23, 28, 177 (opp. bāla); Th 1, 4; 2, 7 (dhammā=tejussadehi Pāli Text Society 777 Pāli-English Dictionary ariyamag- gadhammehi ThA 13); J III.396; V.116; Pv II.16; II.945; Nd1 44, 55, 482; Nd2 324 (=jutimant); Miln 342; KhA 194, 224, 230; DhA III.189 (=paṇḍita). Dhuta & Dhūta {Dhuta} [cp. Sk. dhuta & dhūta, pp. of dhunāti] 1. shaken, moved Dāvs V.49 (vāta°). - 2. lit. "shaken off," but always expld in the commentaries as "one who shakes off" either cvil dispositions (kilese), or obstacles to spiritual progress (vāra, nīvaraṇa). The word is rare. In one constantly repeated passage (Vin I.45=305=II.2=III.21=IV.213) it is an adj. opposed to kosajja lazy, remiss; and means either scrupulous or punctilious. At D I.5 it is used of a pain. At Sn 385 we are told of a dhutadhamma, meaning a scrupulous way of life, first for a bhikkhu, then for a layman. This poem omits all higher doctrine and confines itself to scrupulousness as regards minor, elementary matters. Cp. Vism 61 for a defn of dhuta. -anga a set of practices leading to the state of or appropriate to a dhuta, that is to a scrupulous person First occurs in a title suffixed to a passage in the Parivāra deprecating such practices. The passage occurs twice (Vin V.131, 193), but the title, probably later than the text, is added only to the 2nd of the two. The passage gives a list of 13 such practices, each of them an ascetic practice not enjoined in the Vinaya. The 13 are also discussed at Vism 59 sq. The Milinda devotes a whole book (chap. VI.) to the glorification of these 13 dhutangas, but there is no evidence that they were ever widely adopted. Some are deprecated at M I.282, & examples of one or other of them are given at Vin III.15; Bu I.59; J III.342; IV.8; Miln 133, 348, 351; Vism 59 (°kathā), 65 (°cora), 72 (id.), 80 (defn); SnA 494; DhA I.68; II.32 (dhūtanga); IV.30. Nd1 188 says that 8 of them are desirable. -dhara mindful of punctiliousness Miln 342 (āraððaka dh. jhāyin). -vata the vow to perform the dhutangas DhA VI.165. -vāda one who inculcates punctiliousness S II.156; A I.23; Miln 380; Vism 80; ThA 69; DhA II.30. -vādin= °vāda J I.130. Dhutatta {Dhutatta} (nt.) [Sk. *dhūtatvaṃ] the state of being punctilious Vin I.305 (of going naked). Dhutta {Dhutta} [Sk. dhūrta, from dhūrvati & dhvarati to injure, deceive, cp. Lat. fraus; Idg. *dhreu, an enlarged form of which is *dreugh in Sk. druhyati, drugdha=Ohg. triogan, troum etc.: see duhana] of abandoned life, wild, fast, cunning, crafty, fraudulent; wicked, bad. (m.) a rogue, cheat, evil-minded person, scoundrel, rascal. There are three sorts of a wild life, viz. akkha° in gambling, itthi° with women, surā° in drink (Sn 106; J IV.255). - Vin II.277 (robber, highwayman); A III.38 (a°); IV.288 (itthi°); J I.49 (surā°), 290, 291; II.416; III.287; IV.223, 494 (surā°); ThA 250 (itthi°), 260 (°purisa), 266 (°kilesa); PvA 3, 5 (itthi°, surā°), 151. - f. dhutti (dhuttī) J II.114 (°brāhmaṇī). Dhuttaka {Dhuttaka} =dhutta S I.131; Th 2, 366 (=itthi-dhutta ThA 250); DhA III.207; Dpvs IX.19. - f. dhuttikā always in combn w. chinnikā (meretrix, q. v.) Vin III.128; J II.114; Miln 122. Dhunana {Dhunana} (nt.) [Sk. dhūnana] shaking, in °ka (adj.) consisting in shaking off, doing away with, giving up (kilesa°) SnA 373. Dhunāti {Dhunati} [Sk. dhunoti (dhūnoti), dhunāti & dhuvati, Caus. dhūnayati. Idg. *dhū to be in turbulent motion; cp. Gr. qu/w, qu/nw (to be impetuous), qu/ella (storm), qu/mos "thyme"; Lat. fūmus (smoke=fume), suffio; Lith. duja (dust); Goth. dauns (smoke & smell); Ohg. toum. Connected also w. dhāvate; see further dhūpa, dhūma, dhūsara, dhona & a secondary root Idg. *dheÛes in dhaṃsati] to shake, toss; to shake off, remove, destroy S I.156 (maccuno senaṃ); Pāli Text Society 778 Pāli-English Dictionary Th 1, 256=Miln 245; dhunāti pāpake dhamme dumapattaṃ va māluto Th I.2; J I.11 (v. 48); III.44 (hatthe dhuniṃsu, wrung their hands); Vv 649 (=VvA 278 misprint dhumanti); aor. adhosi [=Sk. adhauṣīt] Sn 787 (micchādiṭṭhiṃ= pajahi SnA 523). pp. dhuta & dhūta (q. v.). Cp. nis°, o°. Dhuma {Dhuma} in °kaṭacchuka=druma° having a wooden spoon (see duma), cp. Mar. dhumārā? (Ed. in note) DhA II.59. [Doubtful reading.] Dhura {Dhura} (m. & nt.) [Sk. dhur f. & dhura m.] 1. a yoke, a pole, the shaft of a carriage J I.192 (purima-sakaṭa°), 196; Cp. II.8, 4. - 2. (fig.) a burden, load, charge, office, responsibility Sn 256 (vahanto porisaṃ dh °ṃ "carrying a human yoke"=purisānucchavikā bhārā SnA 299), 694 (asama° one who has to bear a heavy burden=asamaviriya SnA 489); DhA II.97 (sama°); dve dhurāni two burdens (viz. gantha° & vipassanā, study & contemplation) DhA I.7; IV.37; asamadhura J I.193; VI.330. Three dhurā are enumd at J IV.242 as saddhā°, sīla°, and paððā°.Sdhp 355 (saddhā°), 392 (+viriya), 413 (paððā°) dh °ṃ nikkhipati to take off the yoke, to put down a burden, to give up a charge or renounce a responsibility (see °nikkhepa): nikkhittadhura A I.71; II.148; III.65, 108, 179 sq.; a° S V.197, 225; Nd2 131; SnA 236 (=dhuravant). - 3. the forepart of anything, head, top, front; fig. chief, leader, leading part. nāvāya dh. the forecastle of a ship J III.127=IV.142; dh-vāta head wind J I.100; ekaṃ dh °ṃ nīharati to set aside a foremost part DA I.135. - 4. the far end, either as top or beginning J III.216 (yāva dh-sopānā); IV.265 (dh-sopānaṃ katvā making the staircase end); V.458 (maggadhure ṭhatvā standing on the far end or other side of the road, i. e. opposite; gloss BB maggantare); VvA 44 (dh-gehassa dvāre at the door of the top house of the village, i. e. the first or last house). -gāma a neighbouring village (lit. the first v. that one meets) J I.8, 237; IV.243; DhA III.414; -dhorayha a yoked ox S I.173=Sn 79 (viriyam me dh-dh °ṃ); SnA 150. nikkhepa the putting down of the yoke, the giving up of one's office J III.243; Vism 413. bhatta a meal where a monk is invited as leader of other monks who likewise take part in it J I.449. v. l. (for dhuva°); III.97 (v. l. dhuva°); Vism 66. -yotta yoke-tie, i. e. the tie fastening the yoke to the neck of the ox J I.192; VI.253; -vahana bearing a burden (cp. dhorayha) DhA III.472; -vihāra a neighbouring monastery (cp. °gāma) J I.23; IV.243; DhA I.126 (Np.); III.224 (id.); sampaggāha "a solid grip of the burden" (Mrs. Rh.D.) Dhs 13, 22 etc. (opp. nikkhepa); -ssaha enduring one's yoke Th 1, 659. Cp. dhuratā. Dhuratā {Dhurata} (f.) [abstr. fr. dhura] in cpd. anikkhitta-dh. "a state of unflinching endurance" Nd2 394, 405=Dhs 13 etc.=Vbh 350, 370 (+dhura-sampaggāha); opp. nikkhitta-dh. weakness of character, lack of endurance (=pamāda) ibid. Dhuravant (adj.) [cp. Sk. dhuradhara] one who has or bears his yoke, patient, enduring S I.214=Sn 187 (: cetasikaviriya-vasena anikkhittadhura SnA 236). {Dhuravant} Dhuva {Dhuva} (adj.) [Sk. dhruva, cp. Lith. drúta firm; Goth. triggws=Ohg. triuwi (Ger. treue, trost); Ags. tréowe= E. true, of Idg. *dheru, enlarged form of *dher, see dharati] stable, constant, permanent; fixed, regular, certain, sure D I.18; S I.142; IV.370; A II.33; J I.19; V.121 (°sassataṃ maraṇaṃ); III.325; Bu II.82;Miln 114 (na tā nadiyo dh-salilā). 334 (°phala); Vism 77; DA I.112 (maraṇaṃ apassanto dh.), 150 (=thāvara); DhA III.170 (adhuvaṃ jīvitaṃ dhuvaṃ maraṇaṃ); ThA 241; Sdhp 331. - nt. permanence, stability M I.326; Dh 147. Also Ep. of Nibbāna (see °gāmin). - nt. as adv. dhuvaṃ continuously, constantly, always J II.24=Miln 172; PvA 207; certainly J I.18, V.103. - adhuva (addhuva) changing, unstable, impermanent D I.19 (anicca a. appāyuka); M I.326; S IV.302; J I.393; III.19 (addhuva-sīla); VvA 77. -gāmin leading to 779 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary permanence, i. e. Nibbāna S IV.370 (magga); -colā (f.) constantly dressed, of a woman Vin III.129; -ṭṭhāniya lasting (of shoes) Vin I.190; -dhamma one who has reached a stable condition DhA III.289; -paññatta (a) permanently appointed (seat) Vin IV.274; -bhatta a constant supply of food Vin I.25, 243; II.15 (°ika); J I.449 (where the v. l. dhura° seems to be preferable instead of dhuva°, see dhurabhatta); cp. niccabhatta; -yāgu constant (distribution of) ricegruel Vin I.292 sq.; -lohitā (f.) a woman whose blood is stagnant Vin III.129; -ssava always discharging, constantly flowing J I.6, V.35. Dhūta & Dhūtanga {Dhuta} {Dhutanga} see dhuta. Dhūpa {Dhupa} [Sk. dhūpa of Idg. *dhūp, enlarged fr. *dhū in dhunāti (q. v.)] incense J I.51, 64, uppha°). dh°ṃ dadāti to incense (a room) J I.399. Sometimes misspelt dhūma, e. g. VvA 173 (gandhapuppha°). Dhūpana {Dhupana} (nt.) [Sk. dhūpana] incensing, fumigation; perfume, incense, spice J III.144; IV.236; Pv III.53 (sāsapa°). Dhūpāyati & Dhūpayati {Dhupayati} [Sk. dhūpayati; caus. fr. dhūpa] to fumigate, make fragrant, perfume Vin I.180; S I.40 (dhūpāyita)=Th 1, 448; A II.214 sq.; J I.73; Miln 333 (sīlagandhena lokaṃ dh.); DhA I.370 (aor. dhūpāyi); III.38 (ppr. dhūpayamāna). - pp. dhūpita. Dhūpita {Dhupita} [pp. of dhūpāyati] fumigated, flavoured Vv 435 (tela° flavoured with oil). Cp. pa°. Dhūma {Dhuma} [Vedic dhūma=Lat. fumus; Gr. qumo/s (mood, mind), qumia/w (fumigate); Ohg. toum etc. Idg. *dhu, cp. Gr. qu/w (burn incense), qu/os (incense). See also dhunāti] smoke, fumes Vin I.204 (aroma of drugs); M I.220 (dh °ṃ kattā); A V.352 (id.); A II.53; IV.72 sq.; V.347 sq.; J III.401, 422 (tumhākaṃ dh-kāle at the time when you will end in smoke, i. e. at your cremation); DhA I.370 (eka° one mass of smoke); VvA 173 (for dhūpa, in gandhapuppha°); PvA 230 (micchā-vitakka° in expl. of vidhūma). -andha blind with smoke J I.216; -kālika (cp. above dh.-kāle) lasting till a person's cremation Vin II.172, 288; -ketu fire (lit. whose sign is smoke) J IV.26; V.63; -jāla a mass of smoke J V.497; -netta a smoke-tube, i. e. a surgical instrument for sniffing up the smoke of medical drugs Vin I.204; II.120; J IV.363; ThA 14; -sikhā fire (Ep. of Agni; lit. smoke-crested) Vv 352 (sikha)=VvA 161; Vism 416; also as sikhin J VI.206. Dhūmāyati & Dhūmayati [Sk. dhūmayati, Denom. fr. dhūma] to smoke, to smoulder, choke; to be obscured, to cloud over M I.142 (v. l. dhūpāyati); Pv I.64 (pariḍayhati+dh. hadayaṃ); DhA I.425 (akkhīni me dh.= I see almost nothing). pp. dhūmāyita. {Dhumayati} Dhūmāyanā {Dhumayana} (f.) smoking, smouldering M I.143; Nett 24 (as v. l. to dhūpāyanā). Dhūmāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. to dhūmāyati] becoming like smoke, clouding over, obscuration S III.124 (+timirāyitattaṃ). Dhūsara {Dhumayitatta} (adj.) [Sk. dhūsara, Ags. dust=E. dust & dusk, Ger. dust; see dhvaṃsati & dhunoti & cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under furo] dust-coloured VvA 335. {Dhusara} Pāli Text Society 780 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhenu {Dhenu} (f.) [Sk. dhenu, to dhayati to give suck, see dhātī & dhītar] a milch cow, a female animal in general J I.152 (miga° hind); Vv 806; DhA I.170; 396; PvA 112. In simile at Vism 313. Dhenupa {Dhenupa} [dhenu+pa from pibati] a suckling calf M I.79; Sn 26. Dheyya {Dheyya} (-°) [Sk. dheya, orig. grd. of dhā, see dahati1] 1. in the realm of, under the sway or power of: anañña° J IV.110; kamma° A IV.285; maccu° (q. v.) S I.22; Sn 358, 1104; Th 2, 10 (=maccu ettha dhīyati ThA 13); māra° A IV.228. - 2. putting on, assigning, in nāma° Dhs 1307. Dhota {Dhota} [Sk. dhāuta, pp. of dhavati2, see dhovati] washed, bleached, clean J I.62 (°sankha a bleached shell); II.275; PvA 73 (°vattha), 116 (°hattha with clean hands), 274 (id.); Vism 224 (id.). Dhona {Dhona} (adj.-n.) [either=dhota, Sk. dhauta, see dhovati or=dhuta, see dhuta & dhunana. Quite a diff. suggestion as regards etym. is given by Kern, Toev. 117, who considers it as a possible dern fr. (a)dho, after analogy of poṇa. Very doubtful] 1. purified M I.386; Sn 351, 786, 813, 834 (=dhutakilesa SnA 542); J III.160 (°sākha=patthaṭasākha Com.; v. l. BB vena°); Nd1 77=176 (: dhonā vuccati paððā etc., dhuta & dhota used indiscriminately in exegesis following). - 2. (pl.) the four requisites of a bhikkhu DhA III.344 (: dhonā vuccati cattāro paccayā, in Com. on atidhonacārin Dh 240; gloss K. dhovanā, cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 100). Dhopati [a variant of dhovati, taken as Caus. formation] to wash, cleanse D I.93 (dhopetha, imper.; v. l. B. dhovatḥa), 124 (dhopeyya; v. l. B. dhoveyya). {Dhopati} Dhopana {Dhopana} (nt.) [a variant of dhovana, q. v.] 1. ceremonial washing of the bones of the dead D I. 6; aṭṭhi-dhovana Bdhgh at DA I.84; A V.216 (see Commentary at 364). - 2. Surgical washing of a wound J II.117. - 3. In vaṃsadhopana, apparently a feat by acrobats J IV.390. It is possible that the passage at D I. 6 really belongs here. See the note at Dial. I.9. Dhorayha {Dhorayha} [for *dhor-vayha=Sk. *dhaurvahya, abstr. fr. dhurvaha; may also directly correspond to the latter] "carrying a yoke," a beast of burden S I.28; D III.113 (purisa°); A I.162. -vata (nt.) the practice of carrying a burden, the state of a beast of burden, drudgery S I.28; -sīla accustomed to the yoke, enduring; patient Dh 208 (=dhuravahana-sīlatāya dh. DhA III.272); -sīlin= °sīla J II.97 (=dhura-vahanaka-ācārena sampanna Com.). Dhoreyya {Dhoreyya} (-°) [Sk. dhaureya, der. fr. dhura] "to be yoked," accustomed to the yoke, carrying a burden, in kamma° Miln 288. Dhova {Dhova} (adj.-n.) [Sk. dhāva, see dhovati] washing, cleansing Bu II.15. Dhovati {Dhovati} [Sk. dhāvati, see dhāvati] to rinse, wash, cleanse, purify Vin II.208, 210, 214; Sn p. 104 (bhājanāni); J I.8; V.297. - dhovi J VI.366; DhA III.207. ger. dhovitvā J I.266; IV.2; VvA 33 (pattaṃ), 77 (id.); PvA 75, 144. inf. dhovituṃ Vin II.120; IV.261 pp. dhota (q. v.) & dhovita J I.266. - See also dhopati (*dhopeti). Pāli Text Society 781 Pāli-English Dictionary Dhovana {Dhovana} (nt.) [Sk. dhāvana; see also dhopana] washing Vin IV.262; S IV.316 (bhaṇḍa°); A I.132, 161, 277; It 111 (pādānaṃ); J II.129; VI.365 (hattha°); Miln 11; Vism 343; PvA 241 (hattha-pāda°); DhA II.19 (pāda°); fig. (ariyaṃ) A V.216. Pāli Text Society 782 Pāli-English Dictionary N Na1 {Na} [Sk. na (in cana) & nā (in nānā, vi-nā) Idg. pron. base *no, cp. Gr. nh/, nai/; Lat. nē, nae surely, also encl. in ego-ne & in question utruṁne, nam; fuller form *eno, as in Sk. anā (adv.) anena, anayā (instr. pron. 3rd); Gr. e)/nh "that day"; Lat. enim] expletive-emphatic particle, often used in comparative-indefinite sense: just so, like this, as if, as (see cana & canaṃ) J V.339 (Com. cttha na-kāro upamāne). Also as naṃ (cp. cana> canaṃ) Vin II.81, 186 (kathaṃ naṃ=kathaṃ nu); J II.416; V.302; VI.213 (Com. p. 216: ettha eko na-karo pucchanattho hoti); Th 1, 1204; Miln 177. Perhaps at Sn 148 (kattha-ci naṃ, v. l. BB na; but Com. KhA 247= etaṃ). To this na belongs na3; see also nu & nanu. Na2 {Na} ; Lat. ne in n'unquam etc., Goth. ni; Sk. na ca=Lat. neque=Goth. nih. Also Sk. nā= Idg. *nē, cp. Lat. Goth. nē] negātive & adversative particle "not" (Nd2 326: paṭikkhepa; KhA 170: paṭisedhe) 1. often apostr. n': n'atthi, n'etaṃ etc.; or contracted: nāhaṃ, nāpi etc., or with cuphonic consonant y: nayidaṃ (It 29, J IV.3), nayidha (It 36, 37), nayimaṃ (It 15) etc. As double negation implying emphatic affirmation: na kiñci na all, everything J I.295. - 2. In disjunctive clauses: na . . . na neither-nor, so-or not so. In question: karoti na karoti ("or not") J II.133. Cp. mā in same use. - Often with added pi (api) in second part: nanāpi neither-nor ("not-but also not") S II.65; M I.246; Pv I.119. - 3. In syntactic context mostly emphasized by var. negative & adversative particles, viz. nāpi (see under 2); n'eva indeed not, not for all that J III.55; or not KhA 219; n'eva-na neither-nor D I.33, 35; M I.486; A V.193; J I.207, 279; Vin II.185; DhA I.328; II.65; DA I.186, 188; n'eva-na pana id. D I.24; na kho not indeed J II.134; na ca but not (=this rather than that) J I.153; na tāva=na kho Vv 3713; na nu (in quest.= noQne) is it not? PvA 74, 136; na no surely not Sn 224; na hi [cp. Gr. ou/xi/ not at all; nai/xi certainly] certainly not Dh 5, 184; Sn 666; Kh VII.6; na hi jātu id. Sn 152. - See also nu, nū, no. 4, na is also used in the function of the negative prefix a- (an-) in cases where the wordnegation was isolated out of a sentence negation or where a negated verb was substantified, e. g. (a) nacira (=acira) short, napparūpa abundant, napuṃsaka neuter, neka (=aneka) several; (b) natthi, natthika etc. (q. v.). Na3 {Na} [identical with na1] base of demonstr. pron. 3rd pers. (=ta°), only in foll. cases: acc. sg. naṃ (mostly enclitic), fuller form enaṃ him, her, that one etc. Sn 139, 201, 385, 418, 980, 1076; It 32; Dh 42, 230; J I.152, 172, 222; III.281; KhA 220; DhA I.181; III.173; PvA 3, 68, 73. - acc. pl. ne them It 110 (v. l. te); Qn 223 (=te manusse KhA 169); J II.417; III.204; V.458; DhA I.8, 13, 61, 101, 390; VvA 299. - gen. dat. pl. nesaṃ D I.175, 191; It 63; J I.153; DhA IV.41; VvA 37, 136.; PvA 54, 201, 207. See also cna; cp. nava2. Nakula {Nakula} [Ved. nakula, cp. nakra crocodile] a mungoose, Viverra Ichneumon A V.289 sq.; J II.53; VI.538; Miln 118, 394. Nakkhatta {Nakkhatta} (nt.) [Ved. nakṣatra collect. formation from naktiḥ & naktā=Gr. nu/c, Lat. nox, Goth. nahts, E. night=the nightly sky, the heavenly bodies of the night, as opposed to the Sun: ādicco tapataṃ mukhaṃ Vin I.246] the stars or constellations, a conjunction of the moon with diff. constellations, a lunar mansion or the constellations of the lunar zodiac, figuring also as Names of months & determinant factors of horoscopic and other astrological observation; further a celebration of the beginning of a new month, hence any kind of festival or festivity. - The recognised number of such lunar mansions is 27, the names of which as Pāli Text Society 783 Pāli-English Dictionary given in Sk. sources are the same in Pāli, with the exception of 2 variations (Assayuja for Aśvinī, Satabhisaja for Śatatāraka). Enumd at Abhp. 58-60 as follows: Assayuja [Sk. Aśvinī] Bharaṇī, Kattikā, Rohiṇī, Magasiraṃ [Sk. Mṛgaśīrṣa] Addā [Sk. Ārdrā], Punabbasu, Phussa [Sk. Puṣya], Asilesā, Maghā, Pubba-phaggunī [Sk. Pūrva-phalgunī). Uttara°, Hattha, Cittā [Sk. Chaitra], Sāti [Svātī], Visākhā, Anurādhā, Jeṭṭhā, Mūlaṃ, Pubb-āsāḷha [°āṣāḍha], Uttar°, Savaṇa, Dhaniṭṭhā, Satabhisaja [Śatatāraka], Pubba-bhaddapadā, Uttara°, Revatī. - It is to be pointed out that the Niddesa speaks of 28 N. instead of 27 (Nd1 382: aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni), a discrepancy which may be accounted by the fact that one N. (the Orion) bore 2 names, viz. Mṛgaśīrṣa & Agrahayanī (see Plunkett, Ancient Calendars etc. p. 227 sq.). - Some of these Ns. are more familiar & important than others, & are mentioned more frequently, e. g. Āsāḷha (Āsālhi°) J I.50 & Uttarāsāḷha J I.63, 82; Kattikā & Rohiṇī SnA 456. - nakkhattaṃ ādisati to augur from the stars, to set the horoscope Nd1 382; oloketi to read the stars, to scan the constellations J I.108, 253; ghoseti to proclaim (shout out) the new month (cp. Lat. calandae fr. cālāre to call out, scil. mensem), and thereby announce the festivity to be celebrated J I.250; n. ghuṭṭhaṃ J I.50, 433; sanghuṭṭhaṃ PvA 73; ghositaṃ VvA 31; kīḷati to celebrate a (nakkhatta-) festival J I.50, 250; VvA 63; DhA I.393 (cp. °kīḷā below). n. ositaṃ the festival at an end J I.433. nakkhatta (sg.) a constellation Sn 927; collect. the stars Vv 811 (cando nparivārito). nakkhattāni (pl.) the stars: nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ chando (the moon is the most prominent of the lights of night) Th 2.143; Vin I.246=Sn 569 (but cp. expl. at SnA 456: candayogavasena "ajja kattikā, ajja Rohiṇī" ti paððāṇato ālokakāraṇato sommabhāvato ca nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando ti vutto); D I.10 (nakkhattānaṃ pathagamanaṃ & uppatha-gamanaṃ a right or wrong course, i. e. a straight ascension or deviation of the stars or planets); II.259; III.85, 90; A IV.86; Th 2, 143 (nakkhattāni namassantā bālā). -kīḷana=kīḷā DhA III.461; -kīḷā the celebration of a festival, making merry, taking a holiday J I.50; ThA 137; VvA 109; -ggāha the seizure of a star (by a demon: see gāha), the disappearance of a planet (transit?) D I.10 (expl. at DA I.95 as nakkhattasa angārakādi-gahasamāyoga); -patha "the course of the stars," i. e. the nocturnal sky Dh 208; -pada a constellation Vin II.217; -pāṭhaka an astrologer, soothsayer, augur Nd1 382; -pīḷana the failing or obscuration of a star (as a sign of death in horoscopy) DhA I.166; - mālā a garland of stars VvA 167; -yoga a conjunction of the planets, a constellation in its meaning for the horoscope J I.82 253; DhA I.174 (+tithi-karaṇa); °ṃ oloketi to set the horoscope DhA I.166, °ṃ uggaṇhāti id. Pv III.54. -rājā the king of the nakkhattas (i. e. the moon) J III.348. Nakha {Nakha} [Ved. nakha, cp. Sk. anghri foot; Gr. o)/nuc (claw, nail), Lat. unguis=Oir. inga; Ohg. nagal=E. nail] a nail of finger or toe, a claw Vin II.133; Sn 610 (na angulīhi nakhehi vā); J V.489 (paðcanakhā sattā five-nailed or -toed beings); Kh II.=Miln 26, cp. taca (pañcatacakaṃ); KhA 43; VvA 7 (dasa-nakhasamodhāna putting the 10 fingers together); PvA 152, 192; Sdhp 104. Nakhaka {Nakhaka} (adj.) belonging to, consisting of or resembling a claw, in hatthi° like elephants'claws, Ep. of a castle (pāsāda) Vin II.169 (Bdhgh on p. 323: hatthikumbhe patiṭṭhitaṃ, evaṃ evaṃkatassa kir'etaṃ nāmaṃ) (?). Nakhin {Nakhin} (adj.) having nails J VI.290 (tamba° with coppercoloured nails). Naga {Naga} [Sk. naga tree & mountain, referred by Fausböll & Uhlenbeck to na+gacchati, i. e. immovable (=sthāvara), more probably however with Lidén (see Walde under nāvis) to Ohg. nahho, Ags. naca "boat=tree"; semantically mountain=trees, i. e. forest] mountain S I.195= Nd2 136A (nagassa passe āsīna, of the Buddha); Sn 180 (=devapabbata royal mountain SnA 216; or Pāli Text Society 784 Pāli-English Dictionary should it mean "forest"?); Th 1, 41 (°vivara), 525; Pv II.961 (°muddhani on top of the Mount, i. e. Mt. Sineru PvA 138; the Buddha was thought to reside there); Miln 327 (id.); Vv 166 (°antare in between the (5) mountains, see VvA 82). Nagara {Nagara} (nt.) [Ved. nagara, Non-aryan? Connection with agāra is very problematic] a stronghold, citadel, fortress; a (fortified) town, city. As seat of the government & as important centre of trade contrasted with gāma & nigama (village & market-place or township) Vin III.47 (°bandhana), 184; cp. gāma 3 b. deva° deva-city JI. 3, 168, 202; DhA I.280 etc.; cp. yakkha° J II.127. - Vin I.277, 342, 344; II.155, 184; D II.7; S II.105 sq.; IV.194 (kāyassa adhivacanaṃ); V.160; A I.168, 178; IV.106 sq. (paccantima); V.194 (id.) Dh 150 (aṭṭhīnaṃ); Sn 414, 1013 (Bhoga°); J I.3, 50 (Kapilavatthu°); II.5; III.188; VI.368 etc.; Pug 56; DhA IV.2; PvA 3, 39, 73; Dpvs XIV.51 (+pura). Cp. nāgara. -ûpakārikā a town fortified with a wall covered with cement at its base D I.105, cp. DA I.274; -ûpama like a citadel (of citta) Dh 40, cp. DhA I.317 & Nagaropama sūtra Divy 340; -kathā town-gossip D I.7; -guttika superintendent of the city police J III.30, 436; IV.279; Miln 345 (dhammanagare n-g.), DhA IV.55. Cp. Kern, Toev. p. 167; -vara the noble town (of Rājagaha) Vv 166, cp. VvA 82; -vīthi a city street J II.416; -sobhinī the city belle, a town courtesan J II.367 (°anā); III.435 (Sulasā), 475 (°anī); DhA I.174; II.201; PvA 4 (Sulasā); Miln 350. Nagaraka {Nagaraka} (nt.) a small city D I.146=169, quoted J I.391. Nagga {Nagga} (adj.) [Ved. nagna=Lat. nudus (fr. *nogÛedhos) Goth. naqaps=Ohg. naccot, Ags. nacod=naked; Oir. nocht; perhaps Gr. gumno/s] naked, nude Vin II.121; J I.307; Pv I.61 (=niccola PvA 32); II.15; 81; PvA 68, 106. -cariyā going naked Dh 141; DhA III.78; cp. Sk nagnacaryā Divy 339; -bhogga one whose goods are nakedness, an ascetic J IV.160; V.75; VI.225. Naggatta {Naggatta} (nt.) [Sk. nagnatva]=naggiya nakedness PvA 106. Naggiya {Naggiya} (nt.) [Sk. *nagnyaṃ] naked state, nudity Vin I.292, 305; S IV.300; Sn 249. Naggiyā {Naggiya} (adj. f.) [Sk. nagnikā]=naggā, naked Pv II.312. Nangala {Nangala} (nt.) [Ved. lāngala; nangala by dissimilation through subsequent nasal, cp. Milinda>Menandros. Etym. unknown, prob. dialectical (already in RV IV. 574), because unconnected with other Aryan words for plough. Cp. Balūčī nangār] a plough S I.115; III.155; A III.64; Sn 77 (yuga° yoke & plough); Sn p. 13; J I.57; Th 2, 441 (=sīra ThA 270); SnA 146; VvA 63, 65; PvA 133 (dun° hard to plough); DhA I.223 (aya°); III.67 (id.). -īsā the beam of a plough S I.104 (of an elephant's trunk); -kaṭṭhakaraṇa ploughing S V.146=J II.59; -phāla [mod. Ind. phār] ploughshare (to be understood as Dvandva) DhA I.395. Nangalin {Nangalin} (adj.-n.) having or using a plough, ploughman, in mukha° "using the mouth as plough" Th 1, 101 (maulvergnügt, Neumann) (Mrs. Rh. D. harsh of speech). Nanguṭṭha {Nanguttha} (nt.) [dial. for *nangūlya>*nanguḷhya?]= nangula A II.245; J I.194 (of a bull); II.19 (of an elephant); III.16 (sūci°), 480 (panther); IV.256 (of a deer); DhA I.275 (of a fish); II.64. Pāli Text Society 785 Pāli-English Dictionary Nangula {Nangula} (nt.) [Sk. lāng&uhacekmacr;la to langa & lagati (q. v.). cp. Gr. lagga/zw, Lat. langueo] a tail Th 1, 113=601 (go°). Nacira {Nacira} (adj.) [Sk. nacira=na+cira] not of long duration, short Sn 694; gen nacirass'eva after a short time, shortly Sn p. 16; J IV.2, 392; Miln 250. Nacca (nt.) [Ved. nṛtya=Anglo-Ind. nautch, etym. uncertain, cp. naccati & naṭati] (pantomimic) dancing; usually combd with singing (gīta, q. v.) & instrumental music (vādita). - nacca: A I.261; D III.183; J I.61, 207; DA I.77; PvA 231. - nacca-gīta: J I.61; Pv IV.72; DhA III.129; VvA 131, 135. - nacca-gīta-vādita (+visūkadassana): Vin I.83; D I.5, 6; KhA 36; cp. Vv 8110 (naccagīte suvādite). {Nacca} Naccaka {Naccaka} [Sk. *nṛtyaka, distinguished from but ultimately identical with naṭaka, q. v.] a dancer, (pantomimic) actor Miln 191, 331, 359 (naṭa°). - f. naccakī Vin II.12. Naccati {Naccati} [Ved. nṛtyati nṛt, cp. nacca & naṭati] to dance, play Vin II.10; J I.292; Vv 501 (=naṭati VvA 210); 6421. - pp. naccento D I.135; fut. naccissati Vin II.12; aor. nacci J III.127; inf. naccituṃ J I.207. - Caus. naccāpeti to make play Vism 305 (so read for nacch°). Naccana {Naccana} (nt.) [Ved. *nṛtyana, cp. naṭana] dance, dancing VvA 282, 315. Najjuha {Najjuha} [Sk. dātyūha] a kind of cock or hen J VI.528, 538. Naṭa {Nata} [Sk. naṭa dial. ṭ, cp. Prk. naḍa, of nṛt, see naccati] a dancer, player, mimic, actor Vin IV.285; S IV.306 sq.; DhA IV.60 (°dhītā), 65 (°karaka), 224 (°kīḷā); Miln 359 (°naccaka); Sdhp 380. - Cp. naṭaka & nāṭaka. Naṭaka {Nataka} [Sk. naṭaka]=naṭa Vin IV.285; Miln 331; PvA 3. - f. naṭikā DA I.239. Naṭati {Natati} [Sk. naṭati, of nṛt, with dial. ṭ, cp. naccati] to dance, play VvA 210 (=naccati). Naṭṭha {Nattha} [Sk. naṣṭha, pp. of nassati (naśyati), q. v.] perished, destroyed; lost A II.249; J I.74; 267. Naṭṭhana {Natthana} (nt.) [Der. fr. naṭṭha] destruction Miln 180, 237. Naṭṭhāyika {Natthayika} [cp. Sk. naṣṭhārtha, i. e. naṣṭha+artha] bankrupt Miln 131, 201. Nata {Nata} [Sk. nata, pp. of namati, q. v.] bent (on) S I.186 (a°); Sn 1143; Nd2 327. Nati {Nati} (f.) [Sk. nati of nam] bending, bent, inclination S II.67; IV.59; M I.115. Natta {Natta} (nt.) [Sk. nakta, see nakkhatta] night, acc. nattaṃ by night, in nattam-ahaṃ by day & by night Sn 1070 (v. l. BB and Nd2 rattamahaṃ). Pāli Text Society 786 Pāli-English Dictionary Nattar {Nattar} [Sk. naptṛ, analogy-formation after mātṛ etc. from Ved. napāt; cp. Lat. nepos; Ags. nefa=E. nephew; Ohg. nevo] grandson J I.60 (nattu, gen.), 88; Ud 91, 92; PvA 17 (nattu-dhītā great-grand-daughter), 25 (nattā nom.). Natthika {Natthika} (adj.-n.) [Sk. nāstika] one who professes the motto of "natthi," a sceptic, nihilist S I.96; usually in cpds. -diṭṭhi scepticism, nihilistic view, heresy Sn 243 (=micchāditthi Com.); VvA 342; PvA 244; -vāda one who professes a nihilistic doctrine S III.73; M I.403; A II.31; PvA 215 (+micchādiṭṭhika). Natthitā {Natthita} (f.) [Sk. nāstitā, fr. n'atthi] nihilism S II.17; J V.110. Natthibhāva {Natthibhava} [n'atthi-bhāva] non-existence DhA III.324. Natthu {Natthu} [cp. Sk. nas f. & nasta, see etym. under nāsā] 1. the nose J V.166 (=nāsā Com.). - 2.=°kamma, medical treatment through the nose Vin III.83 (deti). -kamma nose-treatment, consisting in the application of hot oil (DA I.98: telaṃ yojetvā n-karaṇaṃ) D I.12; Vin I.204; M I.511; DhA I.12; -karaṇī a pockethandkerchief Vin I.204. Nadati {Nadati} [Ved. nadati, nad of unknown etym.] to roar, cry, make a noise (nadaṃ nadati freq.) Sn 552 (sīha), 684 (id.), 1015; J I.50, 150; II.110; aor. nadi J III.55 & anādisuṃ J IV.349. Caus. nadāpeti to make roar J II.244. See also nadī & nāda, & cp. onadati. Nadana {Nadana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. nadanu] roaring J I.19 (sīhanāda° the sound of a lion's roar). Nadita {Nadita} (nt.) [cp. Sk. nādita, pp. of caus. nadayati] roar, noise J II.110. Nadī (f.) [Ved. nadī, from nadati="the roaring," cp. also nandati] a river; often characterised as mahā° in opp. to kun° rivulet; pl. nadiyo also collect. "the waters." - D I.244 (Aciravatī nadī); S II.32, 118, 135; V.390; A I.33, 136, 243 (mahā°); II.55, 140 (mahā°); III.52; IV.101 (m°), 137; Sn 425, 433, 568, 720; Dh 251; J I.296; II.102; III.51; III.91 (Kebukā); V.269 (Vetaraṇī°); VI.518 (Ketumatī); Pv IV.354; Vism 468 (sīghasotā); PvA 256 (m°); Sdhp 21, 194, 574. - gen. sg. nadiyā J I.278; It 113; instr. nadiyā J I.278; PvA 46; pl. nom. nadiyo Miln 114 (na tā n. dhuva-salilā), najjo PvA 29 (mahā°); & najjāyo J VI.278; gen nadīnaṃ Vin I.246=Sn 569 (n. sāgaro mukhaṃ). - kunnadī a small river S I.109; II.32, 118; V.47, 63; A II.140; IV.100; V.114 sq. On n. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1906, 100. -kuñja a river glen DA I.209; -kūla the bank of a river Cp. III.71; -tīra=°kūla J I.278; -dugga a difficult ford in a river S II.198; -vidugga=°dugga A I.35; III.128. {Nadi} Naddha {Naddha} [Sk. naddha pp. of nah, see nayhati] tied, bound, fastened, put on J I.175 (rathavarattaṃ); Bu I.31 (camma°, of a drum); Mhvs VII.16 (°paðcāyudha); Miln 117 (yuga°); DhsA 131. Cp. onaddha, vi°, san°. Nanandar {Nanandar} (f.) [Sk. nanāndṛ & nanāndā, to nanā "mother"] husband's sister J V.269 (=sāmikassa bhaginī p. 275). Nanikāma {Nanikama} (adj.) [na+nikāma=anikāma] disagreeable, unpleasant Dh 309 (°seyyā an uncomfortable bed). Pāli Text Society 787 Pāli-English Dictionary Nanu {Nanu} (indecl.) [Ved. nanu] 1. part. of affirmation (cp. na1): surely, certainly Pv II.67 (so to be read for nanda? v. l. BB nuna); Manor. Pūr. on A V.194 (Andersen P. R. 91). - 2. part. of interrogation (=Lat. nonne) "is it not" (cp. na2): J I.151; III.393; DhA I.33. Nantaka {Nantaka} (nt.) [a contamination of namataka (Kern, Toev. p. 169), maybe Sk. naktaka "cover for nakedness" (Trenckner, Notes 811), unless it be non-Aryan] a shred, rag, worn-out cloth, usually expld by jiṇṇapilotika (J III.22) or khaṇḍabhūtā pilotikā (PvA 185) or pilotika only (VvA 311). - S V.342; A III.187; IV.376 (°vāsin as v. l.; text has nantikavāsin); Vv 807 (anantaka); Pv III.214; J III.22 (°vāsin clad in rags). Nanda {Nanda} at Pv II.67 used either as interj. (=nanu, q. v.) or as voc. in the sense of "dear"; the first expln to be preferred & n. probably to be read as nanu (v. l. nuna) or handa (in which case nanu would be gloss). Nandaka {Nandaka} (adj.) [Sk. nandikā] giving pleasure, pleasing, full of joy; f. nandikā J IV.396 (+khiḍḍā), either as adj. or f. abstr. pleasure, rejoicing (=abhindandanā Com.). Nandati {Nandati} [Ved. nandati, nand=nad (cp. vind>vid etc.) orig. to utter sounds of joy] to be glad, to rejoice, find delight in, be proud of (c. instr.) S I.110; A IV.94 sq.; Sn 33; Dh 18. - Caus. nandeti to please, to do a favour J IV.107 (nandaya=tosehi Com.); PvA 139 (=toseti). - ppr. nandayanto J VI.588. - Cp. ānandati. Nandanā {Nandana} (f.) [Sk. nandanā] rejoicing, delight, pleasure S I.6=Sn 33. Nandi1 & (freq.) Nandī {Nandi} {Nandi} (f.) [Sk. nandi, but cp. BSk. nandī Divy 37] 1. joy, enjoyment, pleasure, delight in (c. loc.) S I.16, 39, 54; II.101 sq. (āhāre); III.14 (=upādāna); IV.36 sq.; A II.10 (kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°), III.246; IV.423 sq. (dhamma°); Sn 1055 (+nivesana); Nd2 330 (=taṇhā); Pug 57; Dhs 1059≈(in def. of taṇhā); Vbh 145, 356, 361; DhsA 363; ThA 65, 167. - For nandī at Miln 289 read tandī. - 2. a musical instrument: joy-drum [Sk. nandī] Vin III.108 (=vijayabheri). Cp. ā°. -(y)āvatta "turning auspiciously" (i. e. turning to the right: see dakkhiṇāvatta), auspicious, good Nett 2, 4, 7, 113 (always attr. of naya); -ûpasecana (rāgasalla) sprinkled over with joy, having joy as its sauce Nett 116, 117; cp. maṃsûpasecana (odana) J III.144=VI.24; kkhaya the destruction of (finding) delight S III.51; -(ṃ)jaha giving up or abandoning joy Sn 1101 (+okañjaha & kappañjaha); Nd2 331; -bhava existence of joy, being full of joy, in °parikkhīṇa one in whom joy is extinct (i. e. an Arahant), expld however by Com. as one who has rid himself of the craving for rebirth (tīsu bhavesu parikkhīnataṇha DhA IV.192=SnA 469) S I.2, 53; Sn 175, 637=Dh 413; -mukhī (adj.-f.) "joyfaced," showing a merry face, Ep. of the night (esp. the eve of the uposatha) Vin I.288 (ratti); II.236 (id.); -rāga pleasure & lust, passionate delight S II.227; III.51; IV.142, 174, 180; M I.145; Dhs 1059≈, 1136; esp. as attr. of taṇhā in phrase n-r-sahagata-taṇhā (cp. M Vastu III.332: nandīrāgasahagatā trṣṇā) Vin I.10; S III.158; V.425 sq.; Ps II.137; Nett 72; -saṃyojana the fetter of finding delight in anything Sn 1109, 1115; Nd2 332; -samudaya the rise or origin of delight M III.267. Nandi2 {Nandi} = nandhi. Nandin (adj.) [Sk. nandin] finding or giving delight, delighting in, pleasurable, gladdening S II.53 (vedanā); A II.59, 61; It 112. {Nandin} Pāli Text Society 788 Pāli-English Dictionary Nandha {Nandha} see yuga°. Nandhati {Nandhati} [for nayhati, der. fr. naddha after analogy of baddha>bandhati] meaning not so much "to bind" as "to cover": see apiḷandhati, upanandhati, onandhati, pariyonandhati. Nandhi {Nandhi} (f.) (usually spelt nandi) [Sk. naddhrī to naddha, pp. of nah to bind] a strap, thong J I.175 (rathassa cammañ ca nandiñ ca); Sn 622=Dh 398 (+varatta); SnA 400; DhA I.44, IV.160. Napuṃsaka {Napumsaka} (adj.) [Ved. napuṃsaka=na+puṃs "notmale"] of no sex; lit. Vism 548, 553; ThA 260; Vbh 417; in gram. of the neuter gender Kacc. 50; PvA 266 (is reading correct?) Nabha (nt.) & Nabhas {Nabha} {Nabhas} (in oblique cases) [Sk. nabhas; Gr. ne/fos & nefe/lh, Lat. nebula, Oir. nēl, Ags. nifol (darkness), Ohg. nebul. See also abbha] mist, vapour, clouds, sky A I.242; II.50 (nabhā), III.240, Sn 687 (nabhasi-gama, of the moon); Vv 323, 352 (=ākāsa VvA 161), 534 (id. 236), 6327 (id. 268); PvA 65; Mhvs VII.9 (nabhasā instr.). Nabbho {Nabbho} =nābhiyo, nom. pl. of nābhi (q. v.). Namataka {Namataka} (nt.) [word & etym. doubtful; cp. nantaka & Bdhgh. Vin II.317: matakan (sic) ti satthakavedhanakaṃ (=veṭhanakaṃ) pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ] a piece of cloth Vin II.115 (satthaka), 123, 267 (°ṃ dhāreti). Namati [Ved. namati, Idg. *nem to bend; also to share out, cp. Gr. ne/mw, Goth. niman=Ger. nehmen. See cognates in Walde loc. cit. under nemus] to bend, bend down (trs. & instr.) direct, apply S I.137 (cittaṃ); Sn 806; J I.61 (aor. nami, cittaṃ). - Caus. nameti (not nāmeti, Fsb. to Sn 1143 nāmenti, which is to be corrected to n'āpenti) to bend, to wield Dh 80=145 (namayati). As nāmeti at J VI.349. pp. namita (q. v.). {Namati} Namana {Namana} (nt.) [a philosophical term constructed by Bdhgh. from nāma, cp. ruppanarūpa] naming, giving a name KhA 78; DhsA 52 (see nāma2); Vism 528. Namanā {Namana} (f.) [abstr. to namati, cp. Sk. namana nt.] bent, application, industry Vbh 352. Namassati {Namassati} [Ved. namasyati, Denom. fr. namo] to pay honour to, to venerate, honour, do homage to (often with pañjalika & añjaliṃ katvā) Sn 236, 485, 598, 1058, 1063; Nd2 334; J III.83; Pv II.1220; KhA 196; pot. namasseyya It 110; Dh 392, 1st pl. namassemu Sn 995; ppr. namassaṃ Sn 334, 934; namassanto SnA 565, & (usually) namassamāna Sn 192, 1142; Nd1 400; J II.73; VvA 7. - aor. namassiṃsu Sn 287. - ger. namassitvā J I.1. - grd. (as adj.) namassaniya (venerable), Miln 278. Namassana {Namassana} (nt.) (?) veneration J I.1. Namassiyā & Namassā {Namassiya} {Namassa} (f.) [Sk. namasyā] worship, veneration Miln 140. Namita {Namita} [pp. nameti] bent on, disposed to (-°), able or capable of J III.392 (pabbajjāyanamita-citta); Miln 308 (phalabhāra°). Pāli Text Society 789 Pāli-English Dictionary Namo (nt.) & Nama (nt.){Namo} {Nama} [Ved. namas, cp. Av. nəmo prayer; Gr. ne/mos, Lat. nemus (see namati)] nomage, veneration, esp. used as an exclamation of adoration at the beginning of a book (namo tassa Bhagavato Arahato Sammāsambuddhassa) Sn 540, 544; PvA 1, 67. Namuci {Namuci} (Np.) a name of Māra. Naya {Naya} (adj.-n.) [from nayati, to lead, see neti] "leading"; usually m: way (fig.), method, plan, manner; inference; sense, meaning (in grammar); behaviour, conduct A II.193=Nd2 151 (°hetu through inference); Nett 2 (method), 4 (id.), 7, 113; Miln 316 (nayena=nayahetu); KhA 74; VvA 112 (sense, context, sentence); PvA 1 (ways or conduct), 117 (meaning), 126 (id.), 136, 280. - nayaṃ neti to draw a conclusion, apply an inference, judge, behave S II.58=Vbh 329; J IV.241 (anayaṃ nayati dummedho: draws a wrong conclusion); PvA 227 (+anumināti). - With °ādi° N. has the function of continuing or completing the context= "and similarly," e. g. °ādinaya-pavatta dealing with this & the following VvA 2; . . . ti ādinā nayena thus & similarly, & so forth J I.81; PvA 30. - Instr. nayena (-°) as adv. in the way of, as, according(ly): āgata° according to what has been shown or said in . . . J I.59; VvA 3; PvA 280; purima° as before J I.59; IV.140; vutta° as said (above) (cp. vutta-niyāmena) PvA 13, 29, 36, 71, 92 etc. - sunaya a sound judgment J IV.241; dunnaya a wrong principle, method or judgment, or as adj.: wrongly inferred, hard to be understood, unintelligible A III.178=Nett 21; J IV.241. Nayati {Nayati} see neti. Nayana {Nayana} (nt.) [Sk. nayana, to nayati=the leader cp. also netra=P. netta] the eye Th 2, 381; Vv 353; Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq.; Miln 365; ThA 255; VvA 161 (=cakkhu); PvA 40 (nettāni nayanāni), 152; Sdhp 448, 621. Nayhati {Nayhati} [Ved. nahyati, Idg. *nedh as in Lat. nodus & Ved. nahu] to tie, bind; only in comp. with prep. as upanayhati (cp. upāhanā sandal), pilandhati etc. - pp. naddha (q. v.). See also nandhi, nāha; onayhati, unnahanā, piḷayhati. Nayhana {Nayhana} (nt.) [Sk. nahana] tying, binding; bond, fetter DhA IV.161. Nara {Nara} [Ved. nara, cp. nṛtu; Idg. *ner to be strong or valiant =Gr. a)nh/r, a)g-h/nwr (valiant), drw/y (*nrw/y); Lat. neriosus (muscuḷar), Nero (Sabinian, cp. Oscan ner= Lat. vir); Oir. nert] man (in poetry esp. a brave, strong, heroic man), pl. either "men" or "people" (the latter e. g. at Sn 776, 1082; Pv I.1112). - A I.130; II.5; III.53; Sn 39, 96, 116, 329, 591, 676, 865 etc.; Dh 47, 48, 262, 309, 341; J III.295; Nd1 12=Nd2 335 (definition); VvA 42 (popular etymology: narati netī ti naro puriso, i. e. a "leading" man); PvA 116=Dh 125. -ādhama vilest of men Sn 246; -āsabha "man bull," i. e. lord of men Sn 684, 996; -inda "man lord," i. e. king Sn 836; J I.151; -uttama best of men (Ep. of the Buddha) S I.23; D III.147; Sn 1021; -deva god-man or man-god (pl.) gods, also Ep. of the B. "king of men" S I.5; Pv IV.350; -nārī (pl.) men & women, appl. to male & female angelic servants (of the Yakkhas) Vv 324, 337, 538; Pv II.112; -vīra a hero (?), a skilled man (?) Th 1, 736 (naravīrakata "by human skill & wit" Mrs. Rh. D.). -sīha lion of men J I.89. Naraka {Naraka} [Sk. naraka; etym. doubtful, problematic whether to Gr. ne/rteros (=inferus), Ags. nord=north as region of the underworld] 1. a pit D I.234; Th 1, 869; J IV.268 (°āvāṭa PvA Pāli Text Society 790 Pāli-English Dictionary 225). - 2. a name for Niraya, i. e. purgatory; a place of torment for the deceased (see niraya & cp. list of narakas at Divy 67) S I.209; Sn 706; PvA 52; Sdhp 492 (saṃsāraghora°), 612. -angāra the ashes of purgatory Sdhp 32. Narada {Narada} (nt.) [Sk. nalada, Gr. na/rdos, of Semitic origin, cp. Hebr. nīrd] nard, ointment J VI.537. Nala & Naḷa {Nala} [Ved. naḍa & Sk. naḷa, with dial. ḍ (ḷ) for *narda, cp. Gr. na/rdhc] a species of reed; reed in general Vin IV.35; A II.73; Dh 337; Nd2 680II; J I.223; IV.141, 396 (n. va chinno); Pv I.116 (id.); DhA III.156; IV.43. See also nāḷa, nāḷī & nāḷikā. -āgāra a house built of reeds S I.156; IV.185 (+tiṇāgāra); A I.101 (+tiṇāgāra); Nd2 40d (id.), Miln 245; cp. AvŚ Index II.228 (naḍāgāra); -aggi a fire of reeds J VI.100 (°vaṇṇaṃ pabbataṃ); -kalāpī a bundle of r. S II.114; -kāra a worker in reeds, basket-maker; D I.51 (+pesakāra & kumbhakāra); J V.291; ThA 28; PvA 175 (+vilīvakāra); DhA I.177; -daṇḍaka a shaft of r. J I.170; -maya made of r. Vin II.115; -vana a thicket of reeds J IV.140; Miln 342; -sannibha reedcoloured J VI.537 (Com.: naḷa-puppha-vaṇṇa rukkhasunakha); -setu a bridge of reeds Sn 4. Naḷapin {Nalapin} a water-animal J VI.537. Nalāṭa {Nalata} (nt.) [Ved. lalāṭa=rarāṭa; on n>l cp. nangala] the forehead S I.118; J III.393; IV.417 (nalāṭena maccuṃ ādāya: by his forelock); Vism 185; DhA I.253. -anta the side of the forehead J VI.331; -maṇḍala the round of the f. D I.106; Sn p. 108. Nalāṭikā {Nalatika} (f.) [Sk. lalāṭikā] "belonging to the forehead," a frown Vin II.10 (nalāṭikaṃ deti to give a frown). Nalinī {Nalini} (f.) [Sk. nalinī] a pond J IV.90; Vism 84, 17. Nava1 {Nava} (num.) [Ved. navan, Idg. *neÛ in, E. nine. Connection with nava2 likely because in counting by tetrads (octo=8 is a dual!) a new series begins with No. 9] number nine. gen.-dat. navannaṃ (Sn p. 87); instr.-abl. navahi (VvA 76), loc. navasu. Meaning and Application: The primitive-Aryan importance of the "mystic" nine is not found in Buddhism and can only be traced in Pali in folkloristic undercurrents (as fairy tales) & stereotype traditions in which 9 appears as a number implying a higher trinity=32. 1. navabhūmaka pāsāda (a palace 9 stories high more freq. satta°, 7) J I.58; nava-hiraññakoṭīhi (w. 9 koṭis of gold) VvA 188; nava yojana DhA II.65. - 2. navangabuddhasāsana "the 9 fold teaching of Buddha," i. e. the 9 divisions of the Buddh. Scriptures according to their form or style, viz. suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ gāthā udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ jātakaṃ abbhutadhammaṃ vedallaṃ M I.133; A II.103, 178; III.86 sq., 177 sq.; Pug 43; Miln 344; Dpvs IV.15; PvA 2. Cp. chaḷanga.-nava sattāvāsā "9 abodes of beings" Kh IV. (in exemplifying No. 9), viz. (see D III.263=KhA 86, 87 cp. also A IV.39 sq.) (1) manussā, devā, vinipātikā; (2) Brahmakāyikā devā; (3) Ābhassarā; (4) Subhakiṇhā; (5) Asaððasattā; (6) Ākāsanaðcāyatana-upagā; (7) Viððāṇanañcāyatana°; (8) Ākiðcaððāyatana°; (9) Nevasaññāsaññāyatana°. - nava sotā (Sn 197) or nava dvārā (VvA 76; v. l. mukhā) 9 openings of the body, viz. (SnA 248) 2 eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth, anus & urethra (cp. S.B.E. 39, 180; 40, 259 sq.). - nava vitakkā 9 thoughts Nd2 269 (q. v.). - 3. a trace of the week of 9 days is to be found in the expression "navuti-vassasatasahass-āyukā" giving the age of a divinity as 9 million years (=a divine week) VvA 345. - Cp. navuti. Pāli Text Society 791 Pāli-English Dictionary Nava2 {Nava} (adj.) [Ved. nava, Idg. *neÛ (cp. nava1)=Lat. novus, Gr. ne/os (*ne/vos), Lith. navas; Goth. niujis etc.=E. new; also Sk. navya=Gr. nei_os, Lat. Novius. May be related to na3] 1. new, fresh; unsoiled, clean; of late, lately acquired or practised (opp. pubba & purāṇa). Often syn. with taruṇa. Sn 28, 235 (opp. purāṇaṃ), 944 (id.), 913 (opp. pubba); Pv I.92 (of clothes=costly); J IV.201 (opp. purāṇa); Miln 132 (salila fresh water). - 2. young, unexperienced, newly initiated; a novice Vin I.47 (navā bhikkhū the younger bhs., opp. therā); S I.9 (+acira-pabbajita); II.218; Sn p. 93 (Gotamo navo pabbajjāya "a novice in the Wanderer's life"); DhA I.92 (bhikkhu). -kamma building new, making repairs, "doing up," mending Vin II.119, 159; III.81; J I.92; IV.378; Nd2 385; -kammika an expert in making repairs or in building, a builder (cp. vaḍḍhaki) Vin II.15; IV.211; -ghata fresh ghee J II.433 (v. l. °sappi). Navaka {Navaka} (adj.-n.) [Sk. navaka] young; a young man, a newly ordained bhikkhu (opp. thera), novice (cp. Divy 404) J I.33 (sangha°); PvA 76 (id.). - Freq. in compar. navakatara a younger one, or the youngest (opp. theratara) D II.154; J I.218; Miln 24. Navanīta {Navanita} (nt.) & nonīta [cp. Ved. navanīta] fresh butter Vin I.244 (cp. gorasa); D I.201; M III.141; Pv III.55 (nonīta); Pug 69, 70; Miln 41, Dhs 646, 740; DhA I.417; PvA 199. Navama {Navama} mad; cp. Lat. nonus; Gr. e)/natos, Goth. niunda with diff. superl. suffixes] the ninth Sn 109; f. °ī VvA 72. Naviya {Naviya} (adj.) [Sk. navya, either grd. of navate to praise; or=nava, q. v.] praiseworthy Miln 389. Navuti {Navuti} (num.) [Ved. navati] number ninety VvA 345 & in compn eka° 91 D II.2 (i. e. 92 minus 1; in expr. ekanavuto kappo, v. l. ekanavuti kappe); dvā° 92 (see dvi A II. & B III.); PvA 19, 21; aṭṭhā° 98; Sn 311 (diseases sprung fr. orig. 3). Navutiya {Navutiya} (adj.) worth ninety J V.485. Cp. nāvutika. Nassati {Nassati} (v. intr.) [Ved. naś; naśyati & naśati, cp. Gr. ne/kus, nekro/s (corpse), ne/ktar ("overcoming death" =nec+tr, cp. tarati); Lat. neco, noceo, noxius] to perish, to be lost or destroyed, to disappear, come to an end Sn 666 (na hi nassati kassaci kammaṃ); It 90; J I.81, 116, 150; pret. nassaṃ (prohib.) Sn 1120, pl. anassāma M I.177; aor. nassi A III.54 (mā nassi prohib.); J IV.137 (cakkhūni °iṃsu: the eyes failed); fut. nassisati J I.5; cond. nassissa J II.112. Caus. nāseti (q. v.). See also pa°. Nassana {Nassana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. naśana] disappearance, loss, destruction A III.54 (°dhamma adj. doomed to perish). Nahāta {Nahata} [Sk. snāta, see nahāyati] one who has bathed Vin II.221; J I.266; DhA IV.232 (°kilesatā washed off moral stain). Nahātaka {Nahataka} [Ved. snātaka, cp. nahāta & nahāyati] "one who has bathed," a brahmin who has finished the studies M I.280; A IV.144; Dh 422 (expl. at DhA IV.232 with ref. to perfection in the Buddha's teaching: catusaccabuddhatāya buddha); cp. Sn 521 (one who has washed away all sin), 646. 792 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Nahāna {Nahana} (nt.) [Sk. snāna] bathing, a bath Vin I.47, 51= II.224; I.196 (dhuva° constant bathing), 197; S I.183; V.390 (fig.); J I.265; PvA 50; Vism 27. -kāla bathing time PvA 46; koṭṭhaka bath-room DhA III.88; -garuka fond of bathing Vin I.196; -cuṇṇa bath powder (cp. nahāniya°) DhA I.398; -tittha a shallow place for bathing DhA I.3; III.79. Nahāniya {Nahaniya} (adj.) belonging to a bath, bath-; in °cuṇṇa bath-powder PvA 46. Nahāpaka {Nahapaka} [Sk. snāpaka, fr. Caus, nahāpeti; cp. nahāpita] a barber, bath attendant D I.74; A III.25; DA I.157 (=ye nahāpenti); PvA 127 (=kappaka). Nahāpana {Nahapana} (nt.) bathing, washing (trs.) D I.7, 12; A I.62, 132; II.70; IV.54; It 111 (ucchādana+); VvA 305 (udakadāna+). Nahāpita {Nahapita} [Sk. only snāpaka (see nahāpaka); new formation fr. Caus. nahāpeti as n. ag. with a- theme instead of ar-, cp. sallakatta for sallakattar] a barber, who has also the business of preparing & giving baths (cp. Ger. "bader") a bath-attendant (see kappaka). Barbers ranked as a low class socially, and rebirth in a barber's family was considered unfortunate. Vin I.249 (°pubba who had formerly been a barber); D I.225; J I.137; II.5; III.451; IV.138 (eight kahāpaṇas as a barber's fee); DA I.157 (=kappaka); VvA 207 (°sālā a barber's shop). Nahāpeti {Nahapeti} [Sk. snāpayati, Caus. of nahāyati] to wash, to give a bath, bathe J I.166; PvA 49; VvA 68, 305. Nahāmin {Nahamin} (adj.-n.) [=nahāpaka; Kern, Toev. asks: should it be nahāpin?] a barber, a lowclass individual Pv III.114 (=kappaka-jātika PvA 176). Nahāyati {Nahayati} (rarely nhāyati) [Ved. snāti & snāyati, snā=Gr. nh/xw (to swim), naro/s, *nhreu/s (Nereid), nh_sos (island); Lat. nare (to swim); cp. also Sk. snauti, Gr. na/w, ne/w; Goth. sniwan] to bathe (trs. & intr.), to wash, to perform an ablution (esp. at the end of religious studentship or after the lapse of a lustrative period) Vin II.280; J I.265; VI.336; PvA 93. ppr. nahāyanto (PvA 83) & nahāyamāna (Vin II.105); inf. nahāyituṃ (Vin I.47; PvA 144); ger. nahāyitvā (J I.50; VI.367; PvA 42) & nahātvā (J I.265; III.277; DhA III.88; PvA 23, 62) (after mourning), 82; grd. nahāyitabba (Vin II.220, 280). Nahāru & Nhāru [Sk. snāyu, Idg. *snē to sew, cp. Gr. ne/w, nh/qw, nh_ma (thread); Ohg. nājan; also Gr. neu_ron (=Lat. nervus); Ags. sinu (=sinew); Ohg. senawa; Goth. d] sinew, tendon, muscle. In the anatomy of the body n. occupies the place between maṃsa (flesh, soft flesh) & aṭṭhi (bone), as is seen from ster. sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhi-miñja (e. g. at Vin I.25; J III.84). See also defn in detail at SnA 246 sq. & KhA 47. Vin I.25 (nh°); M I.429 (used for bow strings); A I.50; III.324; IV.47 sq. (°daddula), 129; Kh 111.; Sn 194 (aṭṭhi°) Nd2 97 (nh°); DhA III.118; ThA 257 (nh°); PvA 68 (aṭṭhi-camma°), 80 (cammamaṃsa°); Sdhp 46, 103. Nahuta {Naharu} {Nharu} (nt.) [Sk. nayuta (m. pl.) of unknown etym. Is it the same as navuti? The corresponding v>y>h is frequent, as to meaning cp. nava 3] a vast number, a myriad Sn 677; J I.25, 83; Pv IV.17; DhA I.88; PvA 22, 265. {Nahuta} Pāli Text Society 793 Pāli-English Dictionary Nāga {Naga} [Ved. nāga; etym. of 1. perhaps fr. *snagh=Ags. snaca (snake) & snaegl (snail); of 2 uncertain, perhaps a Non-Aryan word distorted by popular analogy to nāga1] 1. a serpent or Nāga demon, playing a prominent part in Buddh. fairy-tales, gifted with miraculous powers & great strength. They often act as fairies & are classed with other divinities (see devatā), with whom they are sometimes friendly, sometimes at enmity (as with the Garuḷas) D I.54; S III.240 sq.; V.47, 63; Bu. I.30 (dīghāyukā mahiddhikā); Miln 23. Often with supaṇṇā (Garuḷas); J I.64; DhA II.4; PvA 272. Descriptions e. g. at DhA III.231, 242 sq.; see also cpds. - 2. an elephant, esp. a strong, stately animal (thus in combn hatthi-nāga characterising "a Nāga elephant") & freq. as symbol of strength & endurance ("heroic"). Thus Ep. of the Buddha & of Arahants. Popular etymologies of n. are based on the excellency of this animal (āguṃ na karoti=he is faultless, etc.): see Nd1 201=Nd2 337; Th 1, 693; PvA 57. - (a) the animal D I.49; S I.16; II.217, 222; III.85; V.351; A II.116; III.156 sq.; Sn 543; Vv 55 (=hatthināga VvA 37); Pv I.113. mahā° A IV.107, 110. (b) fig.= hero or saint: S II.277; III.83; M I.151, 386; Dh 320; Sn 29, 53, 166, 421, 518. Of the Buddha: Sn 522, 845, 1058, 1101; Miln 346 (Buddha°). - 3. The Nāga-tree (now called "ironwood tree," the P. meaning "fairy tree"), noted for its hard wood & great masses of red flowers (=Sk. nāgakesara, mesua ferrea Lin.): see cpds. °rukkha, °puppha, °latā. -āpalokita "elephant-look" (turning the whole body), a mark of the Buddhas M I.337; cp. BSk. nāgāvalokita Divy 208; -danta an ivory peg or pin, also used as a hook on a wall Vin II.117 (°ka Vin II.114, 152); J VI.382; -nāṭaka snakes as actors DhA IV.130; -nāsūru (f.) (woman) having thighs like an elephant's trunk J V.297; -puppha iron-wood flower Miln 283; -bala the strength of an elephant J I.265; II.158; -bhavana the world of snakes Nd1 448; J III.275; DhA IV.14; māṇavaka a young serpent J III.276; f. °ikā ib. 275; DhA III.232; -rājā king of the Nāgas, i. e. serpents J II.111; III.275; Sn 379 (Erāvaṇa, see detail SnA 368); DhA I.359; III.231, 242 sq. (Ahicchatta); IV.129 sq. (Paṇṇaka); -rukkha the iron-wood tree J I.35 (cp. M Vastu II.249); latā=rukkha J I.80 (the Buddha's toothpick made of its wood), 232; DhA II.211 (°dantakaṭṭha toothpick); -vatta habits of serpents Nd1 92, also adj. °ika ibid. 89; -vana elephant-grove Dh 324; DhA IV.15; -vanika cl. hunter M I.175; III.132; -hata one who strikes the el. (viz. the Buddha) Vin II.195. Nāgara {Nagara} [Sk. nāgara, see nagara] a citizen J I.150; IV.404; V.385; Dāvs II.85; VvA 31; PvA 19; DhA I.41. Nāgarika {Nagarika} (adj.) [Sk. nāgarika] citizen-like, urbane, polite DA I.282. Nāṭaka {Nataka} [Sk. nāṭaka; see naccati] 1. (m.) a dancer, actor, player J I.206; V.373; DhA III.88; IV.59, 130; nāṭakitthi a dancing-girl, nautch-girl DhA III.166; VvA 131. - 2. (nt.) a play, pantomime J I.59; V.279, also used coll.=dancing-woman J I.59 (?) II.395. Nātha [Ved. nātha, nāth, to which Goth. nipan (to support), Ohg. gināda (grace)] protector, refuge, help A V.23, 89; Dh 160 (attā hi attano n.), 380; Sn 1131 (Nd2 has nāga); DhA IV.117; PvA 1. lokanātha Saviour of the world (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 995; PvA 42. - anātha helpless, unprotected, poor J I.6 (nāthānāthā rich & poor); PvA 3 (°sālā poor house) 65. Cp. nādhati. {Natha} Nāda {Nada} [Sk. nāda, see nadati] loud sound, roaring, roar J I.19 (sīha°), 50 (koðca°), 150 (mahā°). Cp. pa°. Nādi {Nadi} (f.)=nāda, loud sound, thundering (fig.) Vv 6410. Pāli Text Society 794 Pāli-English Dictionary Nādhati {Nadhati} [Sk. nādhate=nāthate (see nātha), only in nadhamāna, cp. RV X.65, 5: nādhas] to have need of, to be in want of (c. gen.) J V.90 (Com. expls by upatappati milāyati; thinking perhaps of nalo va chinno). Nānatta {Nanatta} (nt. m.) [Sk. nānatva; abstr. fr. nānā] diversity, variety, manifoldness, multiformity, distraction; all sorts of (opp. ekatta, cp. M I.364: "the multiformity of sensuous impressions," M.A.). Enumn of diversity as nānattā, viz. dhātu° phassa° vedanā° saððā° sankappa° chanda° pariḷāha° pariyesanā° lābha° D III.289; S II.140 sq., cp. IV.113 sq., 284 sq.; Ps I.87. - A IV.385; Ps I.63 sq., 88 sq.; S II.115 (vedanā°); Ps I.91 (samāpatti° & vihāra°); J II.265. In composition, substituted sometimes for nāna. Cp. Dialogues I.14, n. 2. -kathā desultory talk, gossip D I.8; (=niratthakakathā DA I.90); S V.420; -kāya (adj.) having a variety of bodies or bodily states (combd with or opp. to ekatta°, nānatta-saññin, & ekatta-saññin), appl. to manussā, devā, vinipātikā (cp. nava sattāvāsā) A IV.39 sq.=Nd2 5702; D III.253, 263, 282; -saððā consciousness of diversity (Rh. D.: "idea of multiformity," Dial. II.119; Mrs. Rh. D. "consciousness of the manifold") M I.3; S IV.113 sq.; D III.224, 262 sq., 282; A I.41, 267; II.184; III.306; Ps II.172; Dhs 265 (cp. trsl. p. 72); Vbh 342, 369; -saññin having a varying consciousness (cp. °kāya), D I.31 (cp. DA I.119) 183; III.263. Nānattatā {Nanattata} (f.) [2nd abstr. to nānā]=nānatta, diversity (of states of mind). Seven sorts at Vbh 425: ārammaṇa° manasikāra° chanda° paṇidha° adhimokkha° abhinīhāra° paððā°. Nānā {Nana} (adv.) [Ved. nānā, a redupl. nā (emphatic particle, see na1) "so and so," i. e. various, of all kinds] variously, differently. 1. (abs.) A I.138 (on different sides, viz. right < left); Sn 878 (=na ekaṃ SnA 554;=vividhaṃ aññoññaṃ puthu na ekaṃ Nd1 285), 884 sq. - 2. more frequently in cpds., as first part of adj. or n. where it may be trsld as "different, divers, all kinds of" etc. Before a double cons. the final ā is shortened: nānagga (for nānā+agga), nānappakāra etc. see below. -agga (-rasa) all the choicest delicacies J I.266 (°bhojana, of food); VI.366; PvA 155 (°dibbabhojana); -ādhimuttikatā diversity of dispositions DA I.44; Nett 98; āvudhā (pl.) various weapons J I.150; -karaṇa difference, diversity Vin I.339 (sangha°); M II.128; cp. Divy 222; -gotta of all kinds of descent Pv II.916; -citta of varying mind J I.295 (itthiyo); -jana all kinds of folk Sn 1102; Nd1 308 (puthu°); -titthiya of var. sects D III.16 sq.; pakkāra various, manifold J I.52 (sakuṇā), 127, 278 (phalāni); DAI. 148 (āvudhā); PvA 50, 123, 135; -ratta multi-coloured Sn 287; J VI.230; -rasā (pl.) all kinds of dainties Pv II.911; -vāda difference of opinion D I.236; -vidha divers, various, motley PvA 53, 96, 113, and passim; saṃvāsaka living in a different part, or living apart Vin I.134 sq. (opp. samāna°), 321; II.162. Nābhi & Nābhī {Nabhi} (f.) [Vedic nābhi, nābhī; Av. nabā; Gr. o)mfalo/s (navel); Lat. umbo & umbilicus; Oir. imbliu (navel); Ags. nafu; Ohg. naba (nave), Ger. nabel=E. nave & navel] 1. the navel A III.240; J I.238; DA I.254 (where it is said that the Vessā (Vaiśyas) have sprung from the navel of Brahmā). - 2. the nave of a wheel Vv 644 (pl. nabhyo & nabbho SS=nābhiyo VvA 276); J I.64; IV.277; Miln 115. Nāma {Nama} (nt.) [Vedic nāman, cp. Gr. o)/noma (a)n-w/numos without name); Lat. nomen; ; Ags. noma, Ohg. namo] name. - 1. Literal. nom. nāmaṃ S I.39; Sn 808; J II.131; Miln 27; acc. nāmaṃ PvA 145 (likhi: he wrote her name). - nāmaṃ karoti to give a name Sn 344; Nd2 466 (n'etaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ on "Bhagavā"); J I.203, 262 (w. double acc.). nāmaṃ gaṇhāti to call by name, to enumerate J IV.402; PvA 18 (v. l. BB nāmato g.). Definitions at Vin IV.6 (two kinds Q hīna° & ukkatṭha°) and at Vism 528 (=namanalakkhaṇa). - 2. Pāli Text Society 795 Pāli-English Dictionary Specified. nāma as metaphysical term is opposed to rūpa, & comprises the 4 immaterial factors of an individual (arūpino khandhā, viz. vedanā saððā sankhāra viððāṇa; see khandha II. Ba). These as the noëtic principle combd with the material principle make up the individual as it is distinguished by "name & body" from other individuals. Thus nāmarūpa= individuality, individual being. These two are inseparable (aððamaððûpanissitā ete dhammā, ekato va uppajjanti Miln 49). S I.35 (yattha n. ca rūpað ca asesaṃ uparujjhati taṃ te dhammaṃ idh'aððāya acchiduṃ bhavabandhanaṃ); Sn 1036, 1100; Nd1 435=Nd2 339 (nāma=cattāro arūpino khandhā); DhA IV.100 (on Dh 367): vedanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ rūpakkhandhassa cā ti paðcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena pavattaṃ nāmarūpaṃ; DhsA 52: nāmarūpa-duke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena nāmaṭṭhena namanaṭṭhena ca nāmaṃ ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Cp. D I.223; II.32, 34, 56, 62; S I.12 (taṇhā nrūpe), 23 (n-rūpasmiṃ asajjamāna); II.3, 4, 66 (nrūpassa avakkanti), 101 sq. (id.); M I.53; A I.83, 176; III.400; IV.385 (°ārammaṇa); V.51, 56; Sn 355, 537, 756, 909; Dh 367; It 35; Ps I.193; II.72, 112 sq.; Vbh 294; Nett 15 sq., 28, 69; Miln 46. Nāma+rūpa form an elementary pair D III.212; Kh IV. Also in the Paṭicca-samuppāda (q. v.), where it is said to be caused (conditioned) by viððāṇa & to cause saḷāyatana (the 6 senses), D II.34; Vin I.1 sq.; S II.6 sq.; Sn 872 (nāmað ca rūpaðca paṭicca phassā; see in detail expld at Nd1 276). Synonymous with nāmarūpa is nāmakāya: Sn 1074; Nd2 338; Ps I.183; Nett 27, 41, 69, 77. In this connection to be mentioned are var. definitions of nāma as the principle or distinguishing mark ("label") of the individual, given by Coms, e. g. Nd1 109, 127; KhA 78; with which cp. Bdhgh's speculation concerning the connotation of nāma mentioned by Mrs. Rh. D. at Dhs. trsl. p. 341. - 3. Use of Cases. Instr. nāmena by name PvA 1 (Petavatthū ti n.); Mhvs VII.32 (Sirīsavatthu n.). - acc. nāma (the older form, cp. Sk. nāma) by name S I.33, 235 (Anoma°); Sn 153, 177; J I.59 (ko nām'esa "who by name is this one"=what is his name), 149 (nāmena Nigrodhamigarājā n.), 203 (kiṃsaddo nāma esa); II.4; III.187; VI.364 (kā nāma tvaṃ). See also evaṃnāma, kinnāma; & cp. the foll. - 4. nāma (acc.) as adv. is used as emphatic particle=just, indeed, for sure, certainly J I.222; II.133, 160, 326; III.90; PvA 6, 13, 63 etc. Therefore freq. in exclamation & exhortation ("please," certainly) J VI.367; DhA III.171; PvA 29 (n. detha do give); in combn with interr. pron.=now, then J I.221 (kiṃ n.), 266 (kathaṃ n.); III.55 (kiṃ); Kh IV. (ekaṃ n. kiṃ); with neg.=not at all, certainly not J I.222; II.352; III.126 etc. Often further emphasised or emphasising other part.; e. g. pi (=api) nāma really, just so Vin I.16 (seyyathā p. n.); Sn p. 15 (id.); VvA 22 (read nāma kāro); PvA 76; app' (=api) eva n. thus indeed, forsooth Vin I.16; It 89=M I.460; J I.168; Pv II.26 (=api nāma PvA 80); eva nāma in truth PvA 2; nāma tāva certainly DhA I.392, etc. -kamma giving a name, naming, denomination Dhs 1306; Bdhd 83; -karaṇa name-giving, "christening" DhA II.87; -gahaṇa receiving a name, "being christened" J I.262 (°divasa) -gotta ancestry, lineage S I.43 (°ṃ na jīrati); Sn 648, Nd2 385 (mātāpettikaṃ n.); -dheyya assigning a name, name-giving J III.305; IV.449; V.496; Dhs 1306. -pada see pada. -matta a mere name Miln 25. Nāmaka {Namaka} (adj.) [fr. nāma] 1. (-°) by name S II.282 (Thera°); PvA 67, 96 (kaṇha°). - 2. consisting of a mere name, i. e. mere talk, nonsense, ridiculous D I.240. Nāmeti {Nameti} at Sn 1143 (Fsb.) is to be read as nāpenti. Otherwise see under namati. Nāyaka {Nayaka} [BSk. nāyaka (cp. anāyaka without guide AvŚ I.210); fr. neti; cp. naya] a leader, guide, lord, mostly as Ep. of the Buddha (loka° "Lord of the World") Sn 991 (loka°); Mhvs VII.1 (id.); Sdhp 491 (tilokassa); bala-nāyakā gang leaders J I.103. Pāli Text Society 796 Pāli-English Dictionary Nārāca {Naraca} [Sk. nārāca; perhaps for *nāḍāca & conn. with nālīka, a kind of arrow, to nāḷa] an iron weapon, an arrow or javelin M I.429; J III.322; Miln 105, 244, 418. -valaya an iron ring or collar (?) Mhvs VII.20 (Com. "vaṭṭita-assanārāca-pasa"=a noose formed by bending the ends of the n. into a circle). Nārī {Nari} (f.) [Sk. nārī to nara man, orig. "the one belonging to the man"] woman, wife, female Sn 301, 836; Dh 284; J I.60; III.395; IV.396 (°gaṇa); Vv 61, 4416; Pv I.91 (=itthi PvA 44). pl. nariyo (Sn 299, 304, 703), & nāriyo (Sn 703 v. l. BB; Pv II.952). Combd with nara as naranārī, male & female (angels), e. g. Vv 538; Pv II.112 (see nara). Nāla & Nāḷa {Nala} (nt.) [Sk. nāla, see nala] a hollow stalk, esp. that of the water lily A IV.169; J I.392 (°pana v. l. °vana); VvA 43. See also nāḷikā & nālī. Nālaṃ {Nalam} (adv.) [=na alaṃ] not enough, insufficient It 37; J I.190; DA I.167. Nāḷikā {Nalika} (f.) [Sk. nāḍikā & nālikā] a stalk, shaft; a tube, pipe or cylinder for holding anything; a small measure of capacity Vin II.116 (sūci°, cp. sūcighara, needle-case); D I.7 (=bhesajja° DA I.89); A I.210; J I.123 (taṇḍula° a nāḷi full of rice); VI.366 (aḍḍha-n-matta); Nd2 229. Cp. pa°. -odana a nāḷi measure of boiled rice S I.82; DhA IV.17; -gabbha an (inner) room of tubular shape Vin II.152. Nāḷikera {Nalikera} [Sk. nārikera, nārikela, nalikera, nālikela: dialect, of uncertain etym.] the coconut tree Vv 4413; J IV.159; V.384; DA I.83; VvA 162. Nāḷikerika {Nalikerika} (adj.) belonging to the coconut tree J V.417. Nāḷī (f.) & (in cpds.) Nāḷi {Nali} [Sk. nāḍī, see nala] a hollow stalk, tube, pipe; also a measure of capacity Vin I.249; A III.49; J I.98 (suvaṇṇa°), 124 (taṇḍula°), 419; III.220 (kaṇḍa° a quiver); IV.67; DhA II.193 (tela°), 257. Cp. pa°. -paṭṭa a covering for the head, a cap J VI.370, 444 (text °vaṭṭa); -matta as much as a tube holds A II.199; PvA 283; DhA II.70; J I.419 (of aja-laṇḍikā). Nāvā {Nava} (f.) [Ved. nāuḥ & nāvā, Gr. nau_s, Lat. navis] a boat, ship Vin III.49 (q. v. for definition & description); S I.106 (eka-rukkhikā); III.155=V.51=A IV.127 (sāmuddikā "a liner"); A II.200; III.368; Sn 321, 770, 771; Dh 369 (metaphor of the human body); J I.239; II.112; III.126; 188; IV.2, 21, 138; V.75 (with "500" passengers), 433; VI.160 (=nāvyā canal? or read nālaṃ?); Vv 61 (=pota VvA 42, with pop. etym. "satte netī ti nāvā ti vuccati"); Pv III.35 (=doṇi PvA 189); Miln 261 (100 cubits long); Dāvs IV.42; PvA 47, 53; Sdhp 321. In simile Vism 690. -tittha a ferry J III.230; -sañcaraṇa (a place for) the traffic of boats, a port Miln 359. Nāvāyika {Navayika} [Sk. nāvāja=Gr. nauhgo/s, cp. Lat. navigo] a mariner, sailor, skipper Miln 365. Nāvika {Navika} [Sk. nāvika] 1. a sailor, mariner J II.103; IV.142; Miln 359; Dāvs IV.43 (captain). - 2. a ferryman J II.111; III.230 (Avariya-pitā.). Nāvutika {Navutika} (adj.) [fr. navuti] 90 years old J III.395 (°ā itthi); SnA 172. Pāli Text Society 797 Pāli-English Dictionary Nāsa {Nasa} [Sk. nāśa, see nassati] destruction, ruin, death J I.5, 256; Sdhp 58, 319. Usually vi°, also adj. vināsaka. Cp. panassati. Nāsana {Nasana} (nt.) [Sk. nāśana] destruction, abandoning, expulsion, in °antika (adj.) a bhikkhu who is under the penalty of expulsion Vin I.255. Nāsā {Nasa} (f.) [Vedic nāsā (du.); Lat. nāris, Ohg. nasa, Ags. nasu] 1. the nose, Sn 198, 608. - 2. the trunk (of an elephant) J V.297 (nāga°-uru); Sdhp 153. -puṭa "nose-cup"; the outside of the nose, the nostril J VI.74; Vism 195 (nāsa°), 264 (nāsa°, but KhA 67 nāsā°), 283 (nāsa°). -vāta wind, i. e. breath from the nostrils J III.276. Nāsika {Nasika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nāsikya] belonging to the nose, nasal, in °sota the nostril or nose (orig. "sense of smell") D I.106; Sn p. 108. Nāsitaka {Nasitaka} (adj.) [see nāsa & nāseti] one who is ejected Vin IV.140 (of a bhikkhu). Nāseti {Naseti} [Sk. nāśayati, Caus. of nassati, q. v.] 1. to destroy, spoil, ruin; to kill J I.59; II.105, 150; III.279, 418. - 2. to atone for a fault (with abl.) Vin I.85, 86, 173 etc. - Cp. vi°. Nāha {Naha} (nt.) [cp. nayhati, naddha] armour J I.358 (sabba°sannaddha). Cp. onāha. Ni° {Ni°} [Sk. ni- & nih-, insep. prefixes: (a) ni down=Av. ni, cp. Gr. neio/s lowland, nei/atos the lowest, hindmost; Lat. nīdus (*ni-zdos: place to sit down=nest); Ags. nēol, nider=E. nether; Goth. nidar=Ohg. nidar; also Sk. nīca, nīpa etc. - (b) niḥ out, prob. fr. *seni & to Lat. sine without]. Nearly all (ultimately prob. all) words under this heading are cpds. with the pref. ni. - A. Forms. 1. Pāli ni° combines the two prefixes ni & nis (nir). They are outwardly to be distinguished inasmuch as ni is usually followed by a single consonant (except in forms where double cons. is usually restored in composition, like ni-kkhipati=ni+kṣip; nissita= ni+sri. Sometimes the double cons. is merely graphic or due to analogy, esp. in words where ni- is contrasted with ud- ("up"), as nikkujja>ukkujja, niggilati> uggilati, ninnamati>unnamati). On the other hand a compn with nis is subject to the rules of assimilation, viz. either doubling of cons. (nibbhoga=nir-bhoga) where vv is represented by bb (nibbiṇṇa fr. nir-vindati), or lengthening of ni to nī (nīyādeti as well as niyy°; nīharati=nir+har), or single cons. in the special cases of r & v (niroga besides nīroga for nirroga, cp. duratta >dūrakkha; niveṭheti=nibbeṭheti, nivāreti=*nivvāreti=nīvāreti). Before a vowel the sandhi-cons. r is restored: nir-aya, nir-upadhi etc. - 2. Both ni & nis are base-prefixes only, & of stable, welldefined character, i. e. never enter combns with other prefixes as first (modifying) components in verb-function (like saṃ, vi etc.), although nis occurs in such combn in nouncpds. negating the whole term: nir-upadhi, nis-saṃsaya etc. - 3. ni is freq. emphasised by saṃ as saṃni° (tud, dhā, pat, sad); nis most freq. by abhi as abhinis° (nam, pad, vatt, har). B. Meanings. 1. ni (with secondary derivations like nīca "low") is a verb-pref. only, i. e. it characterises action with respect to its direction, which is that of (a) a downward motion (opp. abhi & ud); (b) often implying the aim (=down into, on to, cp. Lat. sub in subire, or pref. ad°); or (c) the reverting of an upward motion=back (identical with b); e. g. (a) ni-dhā (put down), °kkhip (throw d.), °guh (hide d.), °ci (heap up), °pad (fall d.), °sad (sit d.); (b) ni-ratta (at-tached to), °mant (speak to); °yuj (ap-point), °ved (ad-dress), °sev (be devoted to) etc.; (c) ni-vatt (turn back). - 2. nis (a) as verb-pref. it denotes the directional "out" with further development to "away from, opposite, without," pointing out the finishing, completion or Pāli Text Society 798 Pāli-English Dictionary vanishing of an action & through the latter idea often assuming the meaning of the reverse, disappearance or contrary of an action="un" (Lat. dis-), e. g. nikkhamati (to go out from) opp. pavisati (to enter into), °ccharati (nis to car to go forth), °ddhamati (throw out), °pajjati (result from), °bbattati (vatt spring out from), nīharati (take out), nirodhati (break up, destroy). - (b) as nounpref. it denotes "being without" or "not having"= E. -less, e. g. niccola without clothes, °ttaṇha (without thirst), °ppurisa (without a man), °pphala (without fruit); niccala motion-less, °kkaruṇa (heartless), °ddosa (fault°), °maṃsa (flesh°), °saṃsaya (doubt°) nirattha (useless), °bbhaya (fear°). - Bdhgh evidently takes ni- in meaning of nis only, when defining: ni-saddo abhāvaṃ dīpeti Vism 495. Nikacca {Nikacca} see nikati. Nikaṭṭha {Nikattha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nikṛṣṭa, ni+kasati] brought down, debased, low. As one kind of puggala (n-kāya+ncitta) A II.137. loc. nikaṭṭhe (adv.) near J III.438= ThA 105 (v. 33) (=santike J III.438). Nikaṇṇika {Nikannika} (adj.) under (4) ears, secret, cp. catukkaṇṇa J III.124; nt. adv. secretly Vin IV.270, 271. Nikata {Nikata} (adj.) [Sk. nikṛta, ni+karoti "done down"] deceived, cheated M I.511 (+vañcita paladdha); S IV.307 (+vañcita paluddha). Nikati {Nikati} (f.) [Sk. nikṛti, see prec.] fraud, deceit, cheating D I.5 (=DA I.80 paṭirūpakena vañcanaṃ); III.176; Sn 242 (=nirāsaṃ-karaṇaṃ SnA 286); J I.223; Pv III.95 (+vañcana); Pug 19, 23, 58; VvA 114; PvA 211 (paṭirūpadassanena paresaṃ vikāro). - instr. nikatiyā (metri causa) J I.223, nikatyā J II.183, nikacca S I.24. Cp. nekatika. Nikanta {Nikanta} (adj.) [Sk. nikṛtta & nikṛntita (cp. Divy 537, 539), ni+kantati2] cut, (ab-)razed M I.364 (of a fleshless bone). Nikantati {Nikantati} [Sk. ni-kṛṇtati, see kantati2] to cut down, to cut up, cut off PvA 210 (piṭṭhimaṃsāni the flesh of the back, v. l. SS for ukkant°); Pgdp 29. Nikanti {Nikanti} (f.) [Sk. nikānti, ni+kamati] desire, craving, longing for, wish Th 1, 20; Ps II.72, 101; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vism 239, 580; DhsA 369; DhA IV.63; DA I.110; Dāvs III.40. Nikara {Nikara} [Sk. nikara, ni+karoti] a multitude Dāvs V.25 (jātipuppha°). Nikaraṇā {Nikarana} (f. or is it °aṃ?)=nikati (fraud) Pug 19, 23 (as syn. of māyā). Nikaroti {Nikaroti} [Sk. nikaroti, ni+karoti] to bring down, humiliate, to deceive, cheat Sn 138 (nikubbetha Pot.=vañceyya KhA 247). pp. nikata (q. v.). Nikasa {Nikasa} [Sk. nikasa, ni+kasati] a whetstone Dāvs III.87 (°opala). Nikasāva {Nikasava} (adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṣāya nis+kasāva see kasāya 2d] free from impurity Vin I.3; opp. anikkasāva (q. v.) Dh 9≈. Pāli Text Society 799 Pāli-English Dictionary Nikāma {Nikama} [Vedic nikāma, ni+kāma] desire, pleasure, longing: only in cpds.; see nanikāma. -kāra read by Kern (Toev. 174) at Th 1, 1271 for na kāmakāra but unjustified (see SnA on Sn 351); -lābhin gaining pleasure S II.278; M I.354; III.110; A II.23, 36; Pug 11, 12; Vbh 332. Nikāmanā {Nikamana} (f.)=nikanti, Dhs 1059. Nikāmeti {Nikameti} [Sk. ni-kāmayati, ni+kāmeti] to crave, desire, strive after, ppr nikāmayaṃ S I.122, & nikāmayamāna Vin II.108. Cp. nikanta & nikanti. Nikāya {Nikaya} [Sk. nikāya, ni+kāya] collection ("body") assemblage, class, group; 1. generally (always -°): eka° one class of beings DhsA 66; tiracchāna° the animal kingdom S III.152; deva° the assembly of the gods, the gods D II.261 (60); M I.102; S IV. 180; A III.249; IV.461; PvA 136; satta° the world of beings, the animate creation, a class of living beings S II.2, 42, 44; M I.49 (tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi s.-nikāye of all beings in each class); Vbh 137; PvA 134. 2. especially the coll. of Buddhist Suttas, as the 5 sections of the Suttanta Piṭaka, viz. Dīgha°, Majjhima°, Saṃyutta°, Anguttara° (referred to as D.M.S.A. in Dictionaryquotations), Khuddaka°; enumd PvA 2; Anvs p. 35; DhA II.95 (dhammāsanaṃ āruyha paðcahi nikāyehi atthað ca kāraṇað ca ākaḍḍhitvā). The five Nikāyas are enumd also at Vism 711; one is referred to at SnA 195 (pariyāpuṇāti master by heart). See further details under piṭaka. Cp. nekāyika. Nikāra {Nikara} [Sk. nikāra in diff. meaning, ni+kāra] service, humility J III.120 (nikāra-pakāra, prob. to be read nipaccākāra, q. v.). Nikāsa {Nikasa} (n.-adj.) [ni+kaś] appearance; adj. of appearance, like J V.87 (-°), corresp. to °avakāsa. Nikāsin {Nikasin} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nikāśin; fr. ni+kāsati] "shining," resembling, like J III.320 (agginikāsinā suriyena). Nikiṇṇa {Nikinna} (adj.) [Sk. *nikīrṇa, pp. ni+kirati, cp. kiraṇa] "strewn down into," hidden away, sheltered J III.529. Nikiḷita {Nikilita} (adj.) [Sk. *nikrīḍita, pp. of nikrīḍayati, ni+ kīḷati] engrossed in play J VI.313. Nikīḷitāvin (adj.) [fr. ni-kīḷati] playful, playing or dallying with (c. loc.), finding enjoyment in S I.9 (a° kāmesu); IV.110 (id.). {Nikilitavin} Nikujja {Nikujja} see nikkujja, q. v. also for nikujjita which is more correctly spelt k than kk (cp. Trenckner, Preface to Majjhima Nikāya {Nikaya} & see ni° A 1). Nikujjati {Nikujjati} [ni+kujjati, see kujja & cp. nikkujja] to be bent down on, i. e. to attach importance to, to lay weight on D I.53 (as vv. ll. to be preferred to text reading nikkujj°, cp. nikujja); DA I.160 (nikk°). Pāli Text Society 800 Pāli-English Dictionary Nikuñja {Nikunja} [Sk. nikuðja, ni+kuðja] a hollow down, a glen, thicket Dāvs IV.32. Nikūjati {Nikujati} [ni+kūjati "to sing on"] 1. to chirp, warble, hum Th 1, 1270 (nikūjaṃ); ThA 211 (nikūji). - 2. to twang, jingle, rustle J III.323. - pp. nikūjita. - Cp. abhi°. Nikūjita {Nikujita} [see nikūjati] sung forth, warbled out Th 2, 261. Nikūṭa [ni+kūṭa to kūṭa2] a corner, top, climax J I.278 (arahatta°, where usually arahattena kūṭaṃ etc.); DA I.307 (id.). {Nikuta} Niketa {Niketa} [Sk. niketa settlement, ni+cināti] 1. house, abode Dh 91 (=ālaya DhA II.170). - 2. (fig.) company, association. (In this sense it seems to be interpreted as belonging to ketu "sign, characteristic, mark," and niketa-sārin would have to be taken as "following the banner or flag of . . .," i. e. belonging or attached to, i. e. a follower of, one who is devoted to.) a° not living in company, having no house Sn 207; Miln 244 (+nirālaya). -vāsin (a°) not living in a house, not associating with anybody Miln 201; -sayana=°vāsin Miln 361; -sārin (a°) "wandering homeless" or "not living in company," i. e. not associating with, not a follower of . . . S III.9 sq.=Nd1 198; Sn 844=S III.9; SnA 255=S III.10; Sn 970 (=Nd1 494 q. v.). Niketavant {Niketavant} (adj.) [to niketa] parting company with Miln 288 (kamma°). Niketin {Niketin} (adj.) having an abode, being housed, living in Sn 422 (kosalesu); J III.432 (dumasākhā-niketinī f.). Nikkankha {Nikkankha} (adj.) [Sk. niḥśanka, nis+kankha, adj. of kankhā, cp. kankhin] not afraid, fearless, not doubting, confident, sure J I.58. Cp. nissaṃsaya. Nikkankhā {Nikkankha} (f.) [Sk. niḥśankā, nis+kankhā] fearlessness, state of confidence, trust (cp. nibbicikicchā) S V.221. Nikkaḍḍhati {Nikkaddhati} [Sk. niṣkarṣati, nis+kasati, cp. kaḍḍhati] to throw out Vin IV.274 (Caus. nikkaḍḍhāpeti ibid.); J I.116; II.440; SnA 192. pp. nikkaḍḍhita. Nikkaḍḍhanā {Nikkaddhana} (f.) throwing out, ejection J III.22 (a°); V.234. (=niddhamanā). Nikkaḍḍhita {Nikkaddhita} (adj.) [Sk. *niṣkarṣita see nikkaḍḍhati] thrown out J II.103 (gehā); PvA 179 (read ḍḍh for ḍḍ). Nikkaṇṭaka {Nikkantaka} (adj.) [Sk. niṣkaṇṭaka, nis+kaṇṭaka] free from thorns or enemies Miln 250; cp. akaṇṭaka. Nikkaddama {Nikkaddama} (adj.) [nis+kaddama] unstained, not dirty, free from impunity DA I.226. Nikkama {Nikkama} (n.-adj.) [Sk. niṣkrama; nis+kama] exertion, strength, endurance. The orig. meaning of "going forth" is quite obliterated by the fig. meaning (cp. nikkhamati & nekkhamma) A I.4; III.214; Vv 187 (=viriya VvA 96); Dhs 13, 22, 219, 571; Vism 132; Miln 244 Pāli Text Society 801 Pāli-English Dictionary (+ārambha). - (adj.) strong in (-°), enduring, exerting oneself S I.194 (tibba°); V.66, 104 sq.; Sn 68 (daḷha°, cp. Nd2 under padhānavā), 542 (sacca°). Nikkamati {Nikkamati} [Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati, see also nikkhamati & nekkhamma] to go out, to go forth; in fig. meaning: to leave behind lust, evil & the world, to get rid of "kāma" (craving), to show right exertion & strength Miln 245 (+arabhati)+S I.156 (kkh). Nikkaya {Nikkaya} [cp. Sk. niṣkraya, nis+kaya cp. nikkiṇāti] "buying off," redemption J VI.577. Nikkaruṇa {Nikkaruna} (adj.) [nis+karuṇa, adj. of karuṇā] without compassion, heartless Sn 244 (=sattānaṃ anatthakāma); Sdhp 508. Nikkarunatā {Nikkarunata} (f.)=following Vism 314. Nikkaruṇā {Nikkaruna} (f.) [Sk. niṣkaruṇatā; nis+karuṇā] heartlessness PvA 55. Nikkasāva {Nikkasava} see nikasāva. Nikkāma {Nikkama} (adj.) [Sk. niṣkāma, nis+kāma] without craving or lust, desireless Sn 1131 (=akāmakāmin Nd2 340; pahīnakāma SnA 605 with v. l.: nikkāma). Cp. next. Nikkāmin {Nikkamin} (adj.) [nis+kāmin]=nikkāma Sn 228 (=katanikkhamana KhA 184). Nikkāraṇā {Nikkarana} (abl.=adv.) [Sk. niṣkāraṇā, nis+kāraṇaṃ] without reason, without cause or purpose Sn 75 (=akāraṇā ahetu Nd2 341). Nikkāsa {Nikkasa} is Bdhgh's reading for ikkāsa (q. v.) Vin II.151, with C. on p. 321. Nikkiṇati {Nikkinati} [Sk. niṣkriṇāti, nis+kiṇāti] to buy back, to redeem J VI.576, 585; Miln 284. Nikkiṇṇa {Nikkinna} (adj.) [Sk. niṣkīrṇa, nis+kiṇṇa, see kiraṇa] spread out, spread before, ready (for eating) J VI.182 (=ṭhapita Com.). Nikkilesa {Nikkilesa} [nis+kilesa] freedom fr. moral blemish Nd1 340=Nd2 under pucchā Nd2 185; as adj. pure, unstained DhA IV.192=SnA 469 (=anāvila). Nikkujja {Nikkujja} (adj.) [ni+kubja, better spelling is nikujja see nikkujjati] bent down, i. e. head forward, lying on one's face; upset, thrown over A I.130; S V.48; Pv IV.77 (k); Pug 31. Opp. ukkujja. Nikkujjati {Nikkujjati} [for nikujjati (q. v.) through analogy with opp. ukkujjati. Etym. perhaps to kujja humpback, Sk. kubja, but better with Kern, Toev. 1. p. 175= Sk. nyubjati, influenced by kubja with regard to k.] to turn upside down, to upset Vin II.113; A IV.344 (pattaṃ). - pp. nikkujjita. Pāli Text Society Nikkujjita 802 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [pp. of nikkujjati; often (rightly) spelt nikujjita, q. v.] lying face downward, overturned, upset, fallen over, stumbled Vin I.16; D I.85, 110; 147, M I.24 (k.); A I.173; III.238; Th 2, 28, 30 (k.); J III.277; SnA 155 (=adhomukha-ṭhapita); DA I.228. {Nikkujjita} Nikkuha {Nikkuha} (adj.) [nis+kuha] without deceit, not false A II.26=It 113; Sn 56; Nd2 342. Nikkodha {Nikkodha} (adj.) [nis+kodha] without anger, free from anger J IV.22. Nikkha {Nikkha} (m. & nt.) [Vedic niṣka; cp. Oir. nasc (ring), Ohg. nusca (bracelet)] 1. a golden ornament for neck or breast, a ring J II.444; VI.577. - 2. (already Vedic) a golden coin or a weight of gold (cp. a "pound sterling"), equal to 15 suvaṇṇas (VvA 104=suvaṇṇassa pañcadasadharaṇaṃ nikkhan ti vadanti) S II.234 (suvaṇṇa° & singi°); J I.84 (id.); A IV.120 (suvaṇṇa°); Vv 208= 438 (v. l. SS nekkha) J VI.180; Miln 284. suvaṇṇanikkha-sataṃ (100 gold pieces) J I.376; IV.97; V.58; °sahassaṃ (1000) J V.67; DhA I.393. - See also nekkha. Nikkhanta {Nikkhanta} (adj.) [pp. of nis+kamati, see nikkhamati] gone out, departed from (c. abl.), gone away; also med. going out, giving up, fig. leaving behind, resigning, renouncing (fusing in meaning with kanta1 of kāmyati =desireless) S I.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ); Sn 991 (Kapilavatthumhā n. lokanāyako); J I.149; II.153; IV.364 (°bhikkhā, in sense of nikkhāmita°, v. l. nikkhitta°, perhaps preferable, expld p. 366 nibaddha°= designed for, given to); SnA 605 (fig.; as v. l. for nikkāma); DhA II.39; PvA 61 (bahi); Nd2 under nissita; Nd2 107 (free, unobstructed). Nikkhama {Nikkhama} (adj.) [cp. Sk. niṣkrama] going out from PvA 80 (nāsikāya n.-mala). dun° at Th 1, 72 is to be read dunnikkhaya, as indicated by vv. ll. See the latter. Nikkhamati {Nikkhamati} [Sk. niṣkramati, nis+kamati] to go forth from, to come out of (c. abl.), to get out, issue forth, depart, fig. to leave the household life behind (agārā n.), to retire from the world (cp. abhinikkhamati etc.), or to give up evil desire. - (a) lit. (often with bahi outside, out; opp. pavisati to enter into: A V.195). D II.14 (mātu kucchismā); J I.52 (mātukucchito). Imper. nikkhama Pv. I.103; ppr. nikkhamanto J I.52; II.153; III.26 (mukhato); PvA 90; aor. nikkhami J II.154; III.188; fut. °issati J II.154; ger. nikkhamma J I.51, 61 (fig.) & nikkhamitvā J I.16, 138 (fig.), 265; III.26; IV.449 (n. pabbajissāmi); PvA 14, 19 (fig.) 67 (gāmato), 74 (id.); inf. nikkhamituṃ J I.61 (fig.); II.104; Pv I.102 (bahi n.); grd. nikkhamitabba Vin I.47. - (b) fig. (see also nikkamati, & cp. nekkhamma & BSk. niṣkramati in same meaning, e. g. Divy 68 etc.) S I.156 (ārabbhati+)=Miln 245 (where nikkamati); J I.51 (agārā), 61 (mahābhinikkhamanaṃ "the great renunciation"), PvA 19 (id.). - pp. nikkhanta; caus. nikkhameti (q. v.). Nikkhamana {Nikkhamana} [BSk. niṣkramaṇa, to nikkhamati] going out, departing J II.153; VvA 71 (opp. pavesana); fig. renunciation KhA 184 (kata° as adj.=nikkāmin). See also abhi°. Nikkhameti & Nikkhāmeti {Nikkhameti} [Caus. of nikkhamati] to make go out or away, to bring out or forth S II.128; J I.264, II.112. - pp. nikkhāmita J III.99 (+nicchuddha, thrown out, in expln of nibbāpita; v. l. BB. nikaḍhāpita). Pāli Text Society 803 Pāli-English Dictionary Nikkhaya {Nikkhaya} (adj.) [Sk. *niḥkṣaya, nis+khaya] liable to destruction, able to be destroyed, in dun° hard to destroy J IV.449 (=dun-nikkaḍḍhiya Com.); also to be read (v. l.) at Th 1, 72 for dunnikkhama. Cp. nikhīṇa. Nikkhitta {Nikkhitta} (adj.) [Sk. nikṣipta, see nikkhipati] laid down, lying; put down into, set in, arranged; in cpds. (°-) having laid down=freed of, rid of D II.14 (maṇi-ratanaṃ vatthe n. set into); It 13 (sagge: put into heaven); J I.53, 266; Pv III.68; Miln 343 (agga° put down as the highest, i. e. of the highest praise; cp. BSk. agranikṣipta Lal. V. 167); PvA 148 (dhana n.=collected, v. l. SS. nikkita). nikkhitta-daṇḍa (adj.) not using a weapon (cp. daṇḍa) S I.141 etc.; nikkhitta-dhura unyoked, freed of the yoke A I.71; III.108; cp. DhsA 145; - su° well set, well arranged A II.147 sq. (°assa pada-vyañjanassa attho sunnayo hoti); opp. dun° A I.59; Nett 21. Nikkhittaka (adj.-n.) [fr. nikkhitta] one to whose charge something has been committed Dpvs IV.5 (agga° thera: original depositary of the Faith). {Nikkhittaka} Nikkhipati {Nikkhipati} [Sk. nikṣipati, ni+khipati] 1. to lay down (carefully), to put down, to lay (an egg) Vin II.114; It 13, 14 (Pot. nikkhipeyya); Pug 34; J I.49 (aṇḍakaṃ). - 2. to lay aside, to put away Vin I.46 (patta-cīvaraṃ); A I.206 (daṇḍaṃ to discard the weapon; see daṇḍa); Mhvs 14, 10 (dhanu-saraṃ). - 3. to eliminate, get rid of, give up Pv II.615 (dehaṃ to get rid of the body); DhsA 344 (vitthāra-desanaṃ). - 4. to give in charge, to deposit, entrust, save Pug 26; VvA 33 (sahassathavikaṃ). - aor. nikkhipi D II.16Q (Bhagavato sarīraṃ) J II.104, 111, 416; fut. °issati D II.157 (samussayaṃ); ger. °itvā M III.156 (cittaṃ); J II.416; VI.366; grd. °itabba Vin I.46. - pp. nikkhitta (q. v.). - Caus. nikkhipāpeti to cause to be laid down, to order to be put down etc. PvA 215 (gosīsaṭṭhiṃ). Cp. abhi°. Nikkhepa {Nikkhepa} [Sk. nikṣepa, see nikkhipati] putting down, laying down; casting off, discarding, elimination; giving up, renunciation; abstract or summary treatment DhsA 6, 344 (see under mātikā); in grammar: pada° the setting of the verse; i. e. rules of composition (Miln 381). Vin I.16 (pādukānaṃ=the putting down of the slippers, i.e. the slippers as they were, put down); J III.243 (dhura° giving up one's office or charge), I.236 (sarīra °ṃ kāresi had the body laid out); Dpvs XVII.109 (id.). Vism 618 (=cuti); DhA II.98 (sarīra°); DA I.50 (sutta°); DhsA 344; Miln 91. Nikkhepana (nt.)=nikkhepa S III.26 (bhāra° getting rid of the load, opp. bhārādānaṃ); Miln 356 (=comparison); Vism 236 (deha°). {Nikkhepana} Nikhanati & Nikhaṇati {Nikhanati} [Sk. nikhanati, ni+khanati] to dig into, to bury, to erect, to cover up Vin II.116; III.78 (akkhiṃ=cover the eye, as a sign); J V.434=DhA IV.197 (id.); D II.127 (ṇ); J I.264; SnA 519 (ṇ, to bury). - pp. nikhāta. Nikhāta {Nikhata} [pp. of nikhaṇati] 1. dug, dug out (of a hole), buried (of a body) SnA 519. - 2. dug in, erected (of a post) Sn 28; DhA II.181 (nagara-dvāre n. indakhīla). See also a°. Nikhādana {Nikhadana} (nt.) [Sk. *nikhādana, ni+khādati, cp. khādana] "eating down," a sharp instrument, a spade or (acc. to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 83) a chisel Vin III.149; IV.211; J II.405 (so read for khādana); IV.344; V.45. Pāli Text Society 804 Pāli-English Dictionary Nikhila {Nikhila} (adj.) [Sk. nikhila cp. khila] all, entire, whole Dāvs V.40 (°loka v. l. sakala°). Nikhīṇa {Nikhina} (adj.) [nis+khīṇa] having or being lost J VI.499 (°patta without wings, deprived of its wings). Niga {Niga} in gavaya-gokaṇṇa-nig-ādīnaṃ DhsA 331 is misprint for miga. Nigacchati {Nigacchati} [Sk. nigacchati, ni+gacchati] to go down to, to "undergo," incur, enter, come to; to suffer esp. with dukkhaṃ & similar expressions of affliction or punishment S IV.70 (dukkhaṃ); M I.337 sq. (id.); A I.251 (bandhanaṃ); Dh 69 (dukkhaṃ=vindati, paṭilabhati DhA II.50), 137; Nd2 1994 (maraṇaṃ+maraṇamattam pi dukkhaṃ) Pv IV.77 (pret. nigacchiṭṭha=pāpuṇi PvA 266). Nigaṇṭha {Nigantha} [BSk. nirgrantha (Divy 143, 262 etc.) "freed from all ties," nis+gaṇṭhi. This is the customary (correct?) etym. Prk. niggantha, cp. Weber, Bhagavatī p. 165] a member of the Jain order (see M I.370-375, 380 & cp. jaṭila) Vin I.233 (Nātaputta, the head of that Order, cp. D I.57; also Sīho senāpati n-sāvako); S I.78, 82 (°bhikkhā); A I.205 sq. (°uposatha), cp. 220; II.196 (°sāvaka); III.276, 383; V.150 (dasahi asaddhammehi samannāgata); Sn 381; Ud 65 (jaṭilā, n., acelā, ekasātā, paribbājakā); J II.262 (object to eating flesh); DA I.162; DhA I.440; III.489; VvA 29 (n. nāma samaṇajāti). - f. nigaṇṭhī D I.54 (nigaṇṭhi-gabbha). Nigati {Nigati} (f.) [ni+gati, q. v.] destiny, condition, behaviour J VI.238. See also niyati & cp. niggatika. Nigama {Nigama} [Sk. nigama, fr. nigacchati=a meeting-place or market, cp. E. moot-hall=market hall] a small town, market town (opp. janapada); often combd with gāma (see gāma 2) Vin I.110 (°sīma), 188 (°kathā), 197 (Setakaṇṇika°); D I.7 (°kathā), 101 (°sāmanta), 193, 237; M I.429, 488; Pv II.1318; J VI.330; PvA 111 (Asitañjana°, v. l. BB nagara). Cp. negama. Nigamana {Nigamana} (nt.) [Sk. nigamana] quotation, explanation, illustration Vism 427 (°vacana quotation); PvA 255 (perhaps we should read niyamana); conclusion, e. g. Paṭṭh.A 366; VbhA 523. Nigaḷa {Nigala} [Sk. nigaḍa, ni+gaḷa, cp. gala3] an (iron) chain for the feet J I.394; II.153; VI.64 (here as "bracelet"). Nigāḷhika {Nigalhika} (better v. l. nigāḷhita) [Sk. nigāḍhita; ni+ gāḍhita, see gāḷha2] sunk down into, immersed in Th 1, 568 (gūthakūpe). Nigūḷha {Nigulha} [Sk. nigūḍha, but BSk. nirgūḍha (Divy 256); ni+gūḷha] hidden (down), concealed; (n.) a secret J I.461; Dāvs III.39. Nigūhati {Niguhati} [Sk. nigūhati, ni+gūhati] to cover up, conceal, hide J I.286; III.392; IV.203; Pv.III.43 (≈parigūhāmi, v. l. SS guyhāmi). pp. nigūḷha (q. v.). Nigūhana {Niguhana} (nt.) [Sk. nigūhana, see nigūhati] covering, concealing, hiding VvA 71. Pāli Text Society 805 Pāli-English Dictionary Niggacchati {Niggacchati} [Sk. nirgacchati, nis+gacchati] to go out or away, disappear; to proceed from, only in pp. niggata (q. v.); at J VI.504 as ni°. Niggaṇṭhi {Nigganthi} (adj.) [Sk. nirgranthi, nis+gaṇṭhi, cp. also nigaṇṭha] free from knots (said of a sword) Miln 105. See also nighaṇḍu. Niggaṇhāti {Nigganhati} [Sk. nigṛhṇāti, ni+gaṇhāti] 1. to hold back, restrain Dh 326; J IV.97; Miln 184; Vism 133. - Opp. paggaṇhāti. - 2. to rebuke, censure (c. instr.) A III.187; J III.222; Miln 9 (musāvādena); DhA I.29. - ger. niggayha, pp. niggahīta (q. v.). Cp. abhi°. Niggata {Niggata} (adj.) [Sk. nirgata, see niggacchati] 1. going out, proceeding from (abl.): dahato niggatā nadī (a river issuing from a lake) PvA 152. - 2. (=nigata? or= nis+gata "of ill fate") destined, fateful; miserable, unfortunate PvA 223 (°kamma=punishment in expln of niyassa kamma, v. l. SS. nigaha for niggata; see also niya & niyata); Sdhp 165 (of niraya=miserable), cp. niggatika & niggamana. Niggatika [Sk. *nirgatika, nis+gati-ka] having a bad "gati" or fate, ill-fated, bad, unfortunate, miserable J III.538 (v. l. BB as gloss, nikkāruṇika); IV.48 (v. l. BB nikatika). {Niggatika} Niggama {Niggama} (n.) in logic, deduction, conclusion. Pts. of Controversy p. 1. Niggamana {Niggamana} [Sk. *nirgamana, of niggacchati] 1. going away DA I.94. - 2. result, fate, consequence, outcome Sdhp 172, 173 (dun°). - 3. (log.) conclusion Kvu 4. Niggayha—vādin {Niggayhavadin} (adj.) [see niggaṇhāti] one who speaks rebukingly, censuring, reproving, resenting Dh 76 (see expln in detail at DhA II.107 & cp. M III.118). Niggayhati {Niggayhati} [Sk. nigṛhyate, ni+gayhati, Pass. of niggaṇhāti] to be seized by (?), to be blamed for DhA I.295 (cittaṃ dukkhena n., in expln of dunniggaha). Niggaha {Niggaha} [Sk. nigraha, ni+gaha2; see niggaṇhāti] 1. restraint, control, rebuke, censure, blame Vin II.196; A I.98, 174; V.70; J V.116 (opp. paggaha); VI.371 (id.); Miln 28, 45, 224. - dun° hard to control (citta) Dh 35 (cp. expl. at DhA I.295). - 2. (log.) refutation Kvu 3. Niggahaṇa (adj.) [Sk. *nirgahaṇa, cp. nirgṛha homeless; nis+gahaṇa] without acquisitions, i. e. poor J II.367 (v. l. BB. as gloss nirāhāra). {Niggahana} Niggahaṇatā {Niggahanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. ni+gṛh, cp. next] restraint Vism 134 (cittassa). Opp. pagg°. Niggahīta {Niggahita} (adj.) [Sk. nigṛhīta, but cp. Divy 401: nigṛhīta; ni+gahita] restrained, checked, rebuked, reproved S III.12; A I.175 (aniggahīto dhammo); J VI.493. Niggāhaka {Niggahaka} (adj.-n.) [ni+gāhaka, see niggaṇhāti] one who rebukes, oppresses, oppressor Sn 118 (=bādhaka SnA 178, with v. l. ghātaka); J IV.362 (=balisādhaka Com.). Pāli Text Society 806 Pāli-English Dictionary Niggilati {Niggilati} (niggalati) [Sk. nigirati, ni+gilati] to swallow down (opp. uggilati to spit out, throw up) J IV.392 (sic as v. l.; text niggalati). Nigguṇa {Nigguna} (adj.) [Sk. nirguṇa, nis+guṇa] devoid of good qualities, bad Miln 180. Nigguṇḍi {Niggundi} (f.) [Sk. nirguṇḍī, of obscure etym.] a shrub (Vitex Negundo) Miln 223 (°phala); Vism 257 (°puppha). Niggumba {Niggumba} (adj.) [Sk. *nirgulma, nis+gumba] free from bushes, clear J I.187; Miln 3. Nigghātana {Nigghatana} (nt.) [Sk. nirghātana, nis+ghātana, but cp. nighāta] destruction, killing, rooting out Sn 1085 (taṇhā°; SnA 576=vināsana); Nd2 343 (v. l. nighātana). Nigghosa {Nigghosa} [Sk. nirghoṣa, nis+ghosa] 1. "shouting out," sound; fame, renown; speech, utterance, proclamation; word of reproach, blame S I.190; A IV.88 (appa° noiseless, lit. of little or no noise); Sn 719, 818 (=nindāvacana SnA 537), 1061; J I.64; VI.83; Vv 55; Nd1 150; Nd2 344; Dhs 621; VvA 140 (madhura°); 334 (in quotation appa-sadda, appa°); Sdhp 245. - 2. (adj.) noiseless, quiet, still Sn 959 (=appasadda appanigghosa Nd1 467). Nigrodha {Nigrodha} [Sk. nyagrodha; Non-Aryan?] the banyan or Indian fig-tree, Ficus Indica, usually as cpd. °rukkha Vin IV.35; D II.4; Sn 272; J III.188 (r.) DhA II.14 (r.); PvA 5 (r.) 112, 244; Sdhp 270; -pakka the fruit of the fig-tree Vism 409. -parimaṇḍala the round or circumference of the banyan D II.18; III.144, 162. Nigha1 {Nigha} (nīgha) (adj.-n.) is invented by Com. & scholiasts to explain the combn anigha (anīgha sporadic, e. g. S V.57). But this should be divided an-īgha instead of a-nīgha. - (m.) rage, trembling, confusion, only in formula rāgo n. doso n. moho n. explaining the adj. anīgha. Thus at S IV.292=Nd2 45; S V.57. - (adj.) anigha not trembling, undisturbed, calm [see etym. under īgha=Sk. ṛgh of ṛghāyati to tremble, rage, rave] S I.54; IV.291; J V.343. Otherwise always combd with nirāsa: S I.12=23, 141; Sn 1048, 1060, 1078. Expld correctly at SnA 590 by rāgādi-īgha-virahita. Spelling anīgha J III.443 (Com. niddukkha); Pv IV.134 (+nirāsa; expld by niddukkha PvA 230). anīgha also at It 97 (+chinnasaṃsaya); Ud 76; Dh 295 (v. l. aniggha; expld by niddukkha DhA III.454). Nigha2 {Nigha} (nt.) [prob. ni+gha=Sk. °gha of hanati (see also P. °gha), to kill; unless abstracted from anigha as in prec. nigha1] killing, destruction Th 2, 491 (=maraṇasampāpana ThA 288). Nighaṃsa {Nighamsa} [Sk. nigharṣa] rubbing, chafing DhsA 263, 308. Nighaṃsati {Nighamsati} [Sk. nigharṣati, ni+ghaṃsati1] 1. to rub, rub against, graze, chafe Vin II.133; Vism 120; DhA I.396. - 2. to polish up, clean J II.418; III.75. Nighaṃsana {Nighamsana} (nt.) [Sk. nigharṣana]=nighaṃsa Miln 215. Nighaṇḍu {Nighandu} [Sk. nighaṇṭu, dial. for nirgrantha from grathnāti (see gaṇṭhi & ghaṭṭana), orig. disentanglement, unravelling, i. e. explanation; cp. niggaṇṭhi, which is a variant of the same word. - BSk. nighaṇṭa (Divy 619; AvŚ II.19), Prk. nighaṇṭu] an explained word or a word Pāli Text Society 807 Pāli-English Dictionary expln, vocabulary, gloss, usually in ster. formula marking the accomplishments of a learned Brahmin "sanighaṇḍu-keṭubhānaṃ . . . padako" (see detail under keṭubha) D I.88; A I.163, 166; III.223; Sn p. 105; Miln 10. Bdhgh's expln is quoted by Trenckner, Notes p. 65. Nighāta {Nighata} [Sk. nighāta, ni+ghāta] striking down, suppressing, destroying, killing M I.430; Nett 189. Cp. nighāti. Nighāti {Nighati} [ni+ghāti] "slaying or being slain," defeat, loss (opp. ugghāti) Sn 828. Cp. nighāta. Nicaya {Nicaya} [Sk. nicaya, ni+caya, cp. nicita] heaping up, accumulation; wealth, provisions S I.93, 97; Vin V.172 (°sannidhi). See also necayika. Nicita {Nicita} (adj.) [Sk. nicita, ni+cita, of nicināti] heaped up, full, thick, massed, dense Th 2, 480 (of hair); PvA 221 (ussanna uparûpari nicita, of Niraya). Nicula {Nicula} [Sk. nicula] a plant (Barringtonia acutangula) VvA 134. Nicca {Nicca} (adj.) [Vedic nitya, adj.-formation fr. ni, meaning "downward"=onward, on and on; according to Grassmann (Wtb. z. Rig Veda) originally "inwardly, homely"] constant, continuous, permanent D III.31; S I.142; II.109, 198; IV.24 sq., 45, 63; A II.33, 52; V.210; Ps II.80; Vbh 335, 426. In chain of synonyms: nicca dhuva sassata avipariṇāmadhamma D I.21; S III.144, 147; see below anicca, - nt. adv. niccaṃ perpetually, constantly, always (syn. sadā) M I.326; III.271; Sn 69, 220, 336; Dh 23, 109, 206, 293; J I.290; III.26, 190; Nd2 345 (=dhuvakālaṃ); PvA 32, 55, 134. - Far more freq. as anicca (adj.; aniccaṃ nt. n.) unstable, impermanent, inconstant; (nt.) evanescence, inconstancy, impermanence. - The emphatic assertion of impermanence (continuous change of condition) is a prominent axiom of the Dhamma, & the realization of the evanescent character of all things mental or material is one of the primary conditions of attaining right knowledge (: anicca-saññaṃ manasikaroti to ponder over the idea of impermanence S II.47; III.155; V.132; Ps II.48 sq., 100; PvA 62 etc. - kāye anicc'ānupassin realizing the impermanence of the body (together with vayānupassin & nirodha°) S IV.211; V.324, 345; Ps II.37, 45 sq., 241 sq. See anupassanā). In this import anicca occurs in many combinations of similar terms, all characterising change, its consequences & its meaning, esp. in the famous triad "aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā" (see dukkha II.2), e. g. S III.41, 67, 180; IV.28 (sabbaṃ), 85 sq., 106 sq.; 133 sq. Thus anicca addhuva appāyuka cavanadhamma D I.21. anicca+dukkha S II.53 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); IV.28, 31, V.345; A IV.52 (anicce dukkhasaððā); M I.500 (+roga etc.); Nd2 214 (id. cp. roga). anicca dukkha vipariṇāmadhamma (of kāmā) D I.36. aniccasaððī anattasaððī A IV.353; etc. - Opposed to this ever-fluctuating impermanence is Nibbāna (q. v.), which is therefore marked with the attributes of constancy & stableness (cp. dhuva, sassata amata, vipariṇāma). - See further for ref. S II.244 sq. (saḷāyatanaṃ a.), 248 (dhātuyo); III.102 (rūpa etc.); IV.131, 151; A II.33, 52; V.187 sq., 343 sq.; Sn 805; Ps I.191; II.28 sq., 80, 106; Vbh 12 (rūpa etc.), 70 (dvādasāyatanāni), 319 (viððāṇā), 324 (khandhā), 373; PvA 60 (=ittara). -kālaṃ (adv.) constantly Nd2 345; -dāna a perpetual gift D I.144 (cp. DA I.302); -bhatta a continuous foodsupply (for the bhikkhus) J I.178; VvA 92; PvA 54; -bhattika one who enjoys a continuous supply of food (as charity) Vin II.78; III.237 (=dhuvabhattika); IV.271; -saððā (& adj. saððin) the consciousness or idea of permanence (adj. having etc.) A II.52; III.79, 334; IV.13, 145 sq.; Nett 27; -sīla the uninterrupted observance of good conduct VvA 72; PvA 256. Pāli Text Society Niccatā 808 Pāli-English Dictionary (f.) [abstr. to nicca] continuity, permanence, only as a° changeableness, impermanence S I.61, 204; III.43; IV.142 sq., 216, 325. {Niccata} Niccatta {Niccatta} (nt.)=niccatā Vism 509. Niccamma {Niccamma} [Sk. niścarman, nis+camma] without skin, excoriated, in °ṃ karoti to flog skinless, to beat the skin off J III.281. niccamma-gāvī "a skinless cow," used in a well-known simile at S II.99, referred to at Vism 341 & 463. Niccala {Niccala} (adj.) [Sk. niścala, nis+cala] motionless J IV.2; PvA 95. Niccittaka {Niccittaka} (adj.) [Sk. niścitta, nis+citta (ka)] thoughtless J II.298. Niccola {Niccola} (adj.) [nis-cola] without dress, naked PvA 32 (=nagga). Nicchanda {Nicchanda} (adj.) [nis+chanda] without desire or excitement J I.7. Nicchaya [Sk. niścaya, nis+caya of cināti] discrimination, conviction, certainty; resolution, determination J I.441 (°mitta a firm friend); DhsA 133 (adhimokkha=its paccupaṭṭhāna); SnA 60 (daḷha° adj. of firm resolution). See vi°. {Nicchaya} Niccharaṇa {Niccharana} (nt.) [fr. niccharati] emanation, sending out, expansion, efflux Vism 303. Niccharati {Niccharati} [Sk. niścarati, nis+carati] to go out or forth from, to rise, sound forth, come out It 75 (devasadda); Vv 382; J I.53, 176; DhA I.389; VvA 12, 37 (saddā). - Caus. nicchāreti to make come out from, to let go forth, get rid of, emit, utter, give out D I.53 (anattamanavācam a° not utter a word of discontent); J III.127; V.416 (madhurassaraṃ); Pug 33; Miln 259 (garahaṃ); Dāvs I.28 (vācaṃ). Nicchāta {Nicchata} [Sk. *niḥpsāta, nis+chāta] having no hunger, being without cravings, stilled, satisfied. Ep. of an Arahant always in combn with nibbuta or parinibbuta: S III.26 (tanhaṃ abbuyha); IV.204 (vedanānaṃ khayā); M I.341; 412, A IV.410; V.65 (sītibhūta); Sn 707 (aniccha), 735, 758; It 48 (esanānaṃ khayā); Th 2, 132 (abbūḷhasalla). - Expld at Ps II.243 by nekkhammena kāmacchandato n.; arahattamaggena sabbakilesehi n. muccati. Nicchādeti {Nicchadeti} see nicchodeti. Nicchāreti {Nicchareti} Caus. of niccharati, q. v. Nicchita {Nicchita} (adj.) [Sk. niścita, nis+cita, see nicchināti] determined, convinced Mhvs 7, 19. Nicchināti {Nicchinati} [Sk. niścinoti, nis+cināti] to discriminate, consider, investigate, ascertain; pot. niccheyya Sn 785 (expld by nicchinitvā vinicchinitvā etc. Nd1 76); Dh 256 (gloss K vinicchaye). - pp. nicchita. Pāli Text Society 809 Pāli-English Dictionary Nicchuddha {Nicchuddha} (adj.) [Sk. niḥkṣubdha, nis+chuddha, see nicchubhati] thrown out J III.99 (=nibbāpita, nikkhāmita); Miln 130. Nicchubhati {Nicchubhati} [Sk. *niḥkṣubhati, nis+khubhati or chubhati, cp. chuddha & khobha, also nicchodeti & upacchubhati and see Trenckner, Miln pp. 423, 424] to throw out J III.512 (=nīharati Com.; v. l. nicchurāti); Miln 187. - pp. nicchuddha q. v. Nicchubhana {Nicchubhana} (nt.) [see nicchubhati] throwing out, ejection, being an outcaste Miln 357. Nicchodeti (& v. l. Nicchādeti) {Nicchodeti} {Nicchadeti} [shows a confusion of two roots, which are both of Prk. origin, viz. chaḍḍ & choṭ, the former=P. chaḍḍeti, the latter=Sk. kṣodayati or BSk. chorayati, Apabhraṃśa chollai; with which cp. P. chuddha] to shake or throw about, only in phrase odhunāti nidhunāti nicchodeti at S III.155=M I.229= 374=A III.365, where S has correct reading (v. l. °choṭeti); M has °chādeti (v. l. °chodeti); A has °chedeti (v. l. °choreti, °chāreti; gloss nippoṭeti). The C. on A III.365 has: nicchedetī ti bāhāya vā rukkhe vā paharati. nicchedeti (chid) is pardonable because of Prk. chollai "to cut." Cp. also nicchubhati with v. l. BB nicchurāti. For sound change P. ch < Sk. kṣ cp. P. chamā < kṣamā, chārikā < kṣāra, churikā < kṣurikā etc. Nija {Nija} (adj.) [Sk. nija, wth dial. j. for nitya=P. nicca] own Dāvs II.68. Cp. niya. Nijana {Nijana} (nt.) [fr. nij] washing, cleansing Vism 342 (v. l. nijj°). Nijigiṃsati {Nijigimsati} [Sk. nijigīṣati, ni+jigiṃsati] to desire ardently, to covet DA I.92 (=maggeti pariyesati). Nijigiṃsanatā {Nijigimsanata} (f.) [fr. last] covetousness Vism 23 sq. (defined), 29 (id.= magganā), referring to Vbh 353, where T has jigiṃsanatā, with v. l. nijigīsanatā. Nijigiṃsitar {Nijigimsitar} (n. adj.) [n. ag. fr. prec.] one who desires ardently, covetous, rapacious D I.8 (lābhaṃ) A III.111 (id.). Nijjaṭa {Nijjata} (adj.) [Sk. *nirjaṭa, nis+jaṭa, adj. to jaṭā] disentangled J I.187; Miln 3. Nijjara {Nijjara} (adj.) [Sk. nirjara in diff. meaning, P. nis functioning as emphatic pref.; nis+jara] causing to decay, destroying, annihilating; f. °ā decay, destruction, death S IV.339; A I.221; II.198; V.215 sq. (dasa-n-vatthūni); Ps I.5 (id.). Nijjareti {Nijjareti} [Sk. nir-jarayati; nis+jarati1] to destroy, annihilate, cause to cease or exist M I.93; Th 2, 431 (nijjaressāmi=jīrāpessāmi vināsessāmi ThA 269). Nijjāleti {Nijjaleti} [nis+jāleti] to make an end to a blaze, to extinguish, to put out J VI.495 (aggiṃ). Nijjiṇṇa {Nijjinna} (adj.) [Sk. nirjīrṇa, nis+jiṇṇa] destroyed, overcome, exhausted, finished, dead D I.96; M II.217= A I.221 (vedanākkhayā sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ n. bhavissati); M I.93; A V.215 sq.; Nett 51. Pāli Text Society 810 Pāli-English Dictionary Nijjita {Nijjita} (adj.) [Sk. nirjita, nis+jita] unvanquished Miln 192 (°kammasūrā), 332 (°vijitasangāma); Sdhp 360. Nijjīvata {Nijjivata} (adj.) [Sk. nirjīvita, nis+jīva1] lifeless, soulless DhsA 38; Miln 413. Nijjhatta {Nijjhatta} (adj.) [pp. of nijjhāpeti, *Sk. nidhyapta or nidhyāpita] satisfied, pacified, appeased J VI.414 (=khamāpita Com.); Vv 6319 (=nijjhāpita VvA 265); Miln 209. See also paṭi° Nijjhatti {Nijjhatti} (f.) [abstr. to nijjhatta, cp. BSk. nidhyapti, formation like P. ñatti>Sk. jñapti] conviction, understanding, realization; favourable disposition, satisfaction M I.320; A IV.223; Ps II.171, 176; Miln 210. Nijjhāna1 (nt.) [*Sk. nidhyāna, ni+jhāna1] understanding, insight, perception, comprehension; favour, indulgence (=nijjhāpana), pleasure, delight J VI.207. Often as °ṃ khamati: to be pleased with, to find pleasure in: S III.225, 228; M I.133, 480; Vv 8417. Thus also diṭṭhinijjhāna-kkhanti delighting in speculation A I.189 sq.; II.191. Cp. upa°. {Nijjhana} Nijjhāna2 {Nijjhana} (nt.) [nis+jhāna2] conflagration, in anto°= nijjhāyana PvA 18 (cittasantāpa+in expln of soka). Nijjhāpana (nt.) [Sk. *nidhyāpana, ni+jhāpana, Caus. to jhāpeti] favourable disposition, kindness, indulgence J IV.495 (°ṃ karoti=khamāpeti Com.; text reads nijjhapana). {Nijjhapana} Nijjhāpaya {Nijjhapaya} (adj.) [Sk. *ni-dhyāpya, to nijjhāpeti] to be discriminated or understood, in dun° hard to . . . Miln 141 (pañha). Nijjhāpeti {Nijjhapeti} [Sk. nidhāyayati, ni+jhāpeti, Caus. to jhāyati1; cp. Sk. nididhyāsate] to make favourably disposed, to win somebody's affection, or favour, to gain over Vin II.96; M I.321; J IV.108; 414, 495; VI.516; Miln 264; VvA 265 (nijjhāpita=nijjhatta). Nijjhāma {Nijjhama} (adj. n.) [Sk. niḥkṣāma, cp. niḥkṣīṇa, nis+ jhāma of jhāyati2=Sk. kṣāyati] burning away, wasting away, consuming or consumed A I.295; Nett 77, 95 paṭipadā. -taṇha (adj.) of consuming thirst, very thirsty J I.44; -taṇhika=°taṇha denoting a class of Petas (q. v.) Miln 294, 303, 357. Nijjhāyati1 {Nijjhayati} [Sk. nidhyāyati, ni+jhāyati1] to meditate, reflect, think S III.140 sq. (+passati, cp. jānāti), 157; M I.334 (jhāyati n. apajjhāyati); III.14 (id.). Cp. upa°. Nijjhāyati2 {Nijjhayati} [ni+jhāyati2] to be consumed (by sorrow), to fret Nd1 433. Nijjhāyana (nt.) [Sk. *niḥkṣāyana, nis+jhāyana of jhāyati2] burning away, consumption; fig. remorse, mortification in anto° J I.168 (cp. nijjhāna2). {Nijjhayana} Niṭṭha {Nittha} (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭha, ni+°tha; cp. niṭṭhā1] dependent on, resting on, intent upon S III.13 (accanta°); Nd1 263 (rūpa°). 811 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Niṭṭhā1 {Nittha} (f.) [Sk. niṣṭhā; ni+ṭhā, abstr. of adj.-suff. °ṭha] basis, foundation, familiarity with Sn 864 (expl. SnA 551 by samiddhi, but see Nd1 263). Niṭṭhā2 (f.) [Vedic niṣṭhā (niḥṣṭhā), nis+ṭhā from °ṭha] end, conclusion; perfection, height, summit; object, aim Vin I.255; S II.186; A I.279 (object); Ps I.161. niṭṭhaṃ gacchati to come to an end; fig. to reach perfection, be completed in the faith M I.176; J I.201; Miln 310; freq. in pp. niṭṭhaṃ gata (niṭṭhangata) one who has attained perfection (=pabbajitānaṃ arahattaṃ patta) DhA IV.70; S III.99 (a°); A II.175; III.450; V.119 sq.; Dh 351; Ps I.81, 161. {Nittha} Niṭṭhāti {Nitthati} [Sk. niṣṭiṣṭhati, nis+tiṭṭhati, the older *sthāti restored in compn] to be at an end, to be finished J I.220; IV.391; DhA I.393. - pp. niṭṭhita, Caus. niṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Niṭṭhāna {Nitthana} (nt.) [abstr. of niṭṭhāti] being finished, carrying out, execution, performance D I.141; ThA 19 (=avasāya). Cp. san°. Niṭṭhāpita & Niṭṭhapita {Nitthapita} [pp. of niṭṭhāpeti] accomplished, performed, carried out J I.86, 172 (°ṭha°), 201. Niṭṭhāpeti {Nitthapeti} [Caus. to niṭṭhāti] to carry out, perform; prepare, make ready, accomplish J I.86, 290; VI.366; DhA III.172. - pp. niṭṭhāpita Cp. pari°. Niṭṭhita {Nitthita} (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhita (niḥṣṭhita), nis+ṭhita, cp. niṭṭhāti] brought or come to an end, finished, accomplished; (made) ready, prepared (i. e. the preparations being finished) Vin I.35; D I.109 (bhattaṃ: the meal is ready); II.127 (id.); J I.255 (id.); J II.48; III.537 (finished); VvA 188; PvA 81; & often at conclusion of books & chapters. aniṭṭhita not completed DhA III.172. - su° well finished, nicely got up, accomplished Sn 48, 240. Cp. pari°. Niṭṭhubhati & Nuṭṭhubhati (Vin I.271; J I.459; also niṭṭhuhaṭi) [Sk. niṣṭhubhati, but in meaning=Sk. niṣṭhīvati, nis+*thīv, stubh taking the function of ṣṭhīv, since stubh itself is represented by thavati & thometi] to spit out, to expectorate Vin I.271 (nuṭṭhuhitvā); III.132 (id.); J II.105, 117 (nuṭṭh°); VI.367; DhA II.36 (niṭṭhuhitvā). pp. nuṭṭhubhita Sdhp 121. - Cp. oṭṭhubhati. {Nitthubhati} {Nutthubhati} Niṭṭhubhana {Nitthubhana} (nt.) [Sk. niṣṭhīvana, see niṭṭhubhati & cp. Prk. niṭṭhuhana] spitting out, spittle J I.47; PvA 80 (=kheḷa, v. l. SS niṭṭhuvana, BB niṭhūna). Niṭṭhurin {Nitthurin} (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭhura or niṣṭhūra, ni+thūra= thūla; cp. Prk. niṭṭhura] rough, hard, cruel, merciless Sn 952 (a°; this reading is mentioned as v. l. by Bdhgh at SnA 569, & the reading anuddharī given; vv. ll. SS anuṭṭhurī, BB anuṭṭharī, expld as anissukī. Nd1 440 however has aniṭṭhurī with expln of nitthuriya as under issā at Vbh 357). Niṭṭhuriya {Nitthuriya} (nt.) [cp. Sk. niṣṭhuratva] hardness, harshness, roughness Nd1 440; Nd2 484 (in exegesis of makkha)= Vbh 357. Niḍḍāyati {Niddayati} [Sk. nirdāti, nis+dāyati, cp. Sk. nirdātar weeder] to cut out, to weed D I.231 (niddāyit°); It 56 (as v. l. niddāta for niṇhāta, q. v.); J I.215. Caus. niḍḍāpeti to cause to weed, to have weeds dug up Vin II.180. Pāli Text Society 812 Pāli-English Dictionary Niḍḍha {Niddha} (nt.) [Vedic nīḍa resting-place ni+sad "sitting down"] nest, place, seat Dh 148 (v. l. niḷa). Niṇhāta {Ninhata} (adj.) [Sk. *niḥsnāta, nis+nahāta] cleansed, purified It 56 (°pāpaka=sinless; with several vv. ll. amongst which niddāta of niḍḍāyati=cleansed of weeds) =Nd1 58 (ninhāta°)=Nd2 514 (ninhāta, v.l. SS ninnahāta). Nitamba {Nitamba} [Sk. nitamba; etym. unknown] the ridge of a mountain or a glen, gully DA I.209. Nitammati {Nitammati} [Sk. nitāmyati, ni+tam as in tama] to become dark, to be exhausted, faint; to be in misery or anxiety J IV.284 (Com.: atikilamati). Nitāḷeti {Nitaleti} [Sk. nitāḍayati, ni+tāḷeti] to knock down, to strike J IV.347. Nittaṇha {Nittanha} (adj.) [BSk. niṣṭṛṣṇa (Divy 210 etc.), nis+taṇhā] free from thirst or desire, desireless PvA 230 (=nirāsa). f. abstr. nitthaṇhatā Nett 38. Nittaddana (better: nitthaddhana) (nt.) [Sk. *niṣṭambhana, abstr. fr. ni+thaddha=making rigid] paralysing D I.11 (jīvhā°=mantena jivhāya thaddhakaraṇa DA I.96; v. l. (gloss) nibandhana). {Nittaddana} Nittāreti {Nittareti} see nittharati. Nittiṇa {Nittina} (adj.) [Sk. niṣṭṛṇa, nis+tiṇa] free from grass J III.23. Nittiṇṇa {Nittinna} (pp.) [Sk. nistīrṇa, nis+tiṇṇa] got out of, having crossed or overcome D II.275 (ogha; v. l. BB nitiṇṇa); Nd1 159 (as v. l.; text has nitiṇṇa); Nd2 278 (t.). Cp. nittharati. Nittudana {Nittudana} (nt.) [nis+tudana, abstr. fr. tudati; cp. Sk. nistodā] pricking, piercing A I.65 (text: nittuddana); III.403 sq. Nitteja {Nitteja} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nistejas only in meaning 1; nis+ teja] 1. without energy Vism 596. 2. "put out," abashed, put to shame, in °ṃ karoti to make blush or put to shame J II.94 (lajjāpeti+). Nitthanati & Nitthunati {Nitthanati} {Nitthunati} [Sk. nisstanati "moan out," nis +thaneti & thunati1] to moan, groan: (a) °thanati: J I.463; II.362; IV.446; V.296; DA I.291. - (b) °thunati Vin II.222; J V.295, 389; Vism 311; VvA 224. Cp. nitthuna. Nitthanana {Nitthanana} (nt.) [nis+thanana, abstr. to thaneti] groaning, moaning DA I.291 (v. l. BB. °ṭhuna). As nitthunana Vism 504. Nittharaṇa1 {Nittharana} (nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, nis+taraṇa, cp. nittharati] getting across, ferrying over, traversing, overcoming S I.193 (oghassa); A II.200 (id.); It 111 (id.); M I.134; J I.48 (loka°); Dāvs II.29 (id.); Vism 32; Sdhp 334 (bhava°), 619 (tiloka°). Pāli Text Society Nittharaṇa2 813 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [Sk. nistaraṇa, ni+tharaṇa] "strewing or being strewn down," putting down, carrying, bearing S IV.177 (bhārassa, of a load, cp. nikkhepa); VvA 131 (so read for niddharaṇa, in kuṭumba-bhārassa nsamatthā=able to carry the burden of a household). {Nittharana} Nittharati {Nittharati} [Sk. nistarati, nis+tarati1] to cross over, get out of, leave behind, get over D I.73 (kantāraṃ). pp. nittiṇṇa q. v. Caus. nitthāreti to bring through, help over Nd2 630 (nittāreti). Nitthāra {Nitthara} [Sk. nistāra; nis+tāra of tarati1] passing over, rescue, payment, acquittance, in °ṃ vattati to be acquitted, to get off scot-free M I.442 (v. l. netth°, which is the usual form). See netthāra. Nitthuna {Nitthuna} [Sk. *nis-stanana & nistava to thunati] (a) (of thunati1) moan, groan DA I.291 (as v. l. BB for nitthanana) - (b) (of thunati2) blame, censure, curse PvA 76 (°ṃ karoti to revile or curse). Nitthunati {Nitthunati} etc., see nitthanati etc. Nidassana {Nidassana} (nt.) [Sk. nidarśana, ni+dassana] "pointing at" evidence, example, comparison, apposition, attribute, characteristic; sign, term D I.223 (a° with no attribute); III.217 (id.); S IV.370 (id.); A IV.305 sq. (nīla°, pīta° etc.); Sn 137; Vbh 13, 64, 70 sq. (sa°, a°); VvA 12, 13; PvA 26, 121 (pucchanākāra°) 226 (paccakkhabhūtaṃ n. "sign, token"). Nidassati {Nidassati} v. l. BB at Sn 785 for nirassati (q. v.) Nd1 76 has nid° in text, nir° as v. l. SS; SnA 522 reads nirassati. Nidassita {Nidassita} (pp.) [see nidasseti] pointed out, defined as, termed Pv I.512; PvA 30. Nidasseti {Nidasseti} [Sk. nidarśayati, ni+dasseti] to point out ("down"), explain, show, define VvA 12, 13 (°etabbavacana the word to be compared or defined, correl. to nidassana-vacana). - pp. nidassita (q. v.). Nidahati {Nidahati} [Sk. nidadhāti, ni+dahati1] to lay down or aside, deposit; accumulate, hoard, bury (a treasure) Vin I.46 (cīvaraṃ); Miln 271; ger. nidahitvā PvA 97 (dhanadhaððaṃ) & nidhāya Dh 142, 405; Sn 35 (daṇḍaṃ), 394, 629; Nd2 348; pres. also nidheti KhA 217, 219; fut. nidhessati PvA 132. Pass. nidhīyati KhA 217. Caus. nidhāpeti PvA 130 (bhoge). See also nidāhaka, nidhāna & nidhi; also upanidhāya. Nidāgha {Nidagha} [Sk. nidāgha, fr. nidahati, ni+dahati2, see ḍahati] heat, summer-heat, summer, drought J I.221 (-samaya dry season); II.80; Vism 259 (°samaya, where KhA 58 reads saradasamaya); PvA 174 (-kāla summer). fig. J IV.285; V.404; Dāvs II.60. Nidāna {Nidana} (nt.) [Sk. nidāna, ni+*dāna of dā, dyati to bind, cp. Gr. de/sma, dh_ma (fetter) & see dāma] (a) (n.) tying down to; ground (lit. or fig.), foundation, occasion; source, origin, cause; reason, reference, subject ("sujet") M I.261; A I.134 sq.; 263 sq., 338; II.196; IV.128 sq.; Dhs 1059 (dukkha°, source of pain), 1136; Nett 3, 32; Miln 272 (of disease: pathology, ætiology), 344 (°paṭhanakusala, of lawyers); PvA 132, 253. - (b) (adj.-°) founded on, caused by, originating Pāli Text Society 814 Pāli-English Dictionary in, relating to S V.213 sq. (a° & sa°); A I.82 (id.); Sn 271 (ito°), 866 (kuto°), 1050 (upadhi°=hetuka, paccayā, kāraṇā Nd2 346); 872 (icchā°) etc.; VvA 117 (vimānāni Rājagaha° playing at or referring to R.). - (c) nidānaṃ (acc. as adv.) by means of, in consequence of, through, usually with tato° through this, yato° through which D I.52, 73; M I.112; Pv IV.161 (through whom=yaṃ nimittaṃ PvA 242); PvA 281; ito° by this Nd2 2912. Nidāhaka {Nidahaka} (adj.) [fr. nidahati] one who puts away, one who has the office of keeper or warder (of robes: cīvara°) Vin I.284. Nidda {Nidda} (nt.) [nis+dara, see darī] a cave Nd1 23 (Ep. of kāya). Niddanta {Niddanta} [so read for niddanna, v. l. niddhā=niddā; cp. supinanta]=niddā J VI.294. Niddaya {Niddaya} (adj.) [Sk. nirdaya, nis+dayā (adj.)] merciless, pitiless, cruel Sdhp 143, 159. Niddara {Niddara} (adj.) [nis+dara] free from fear, pain or anguish Dh 205=Sn 257 (expld at DhA III.269 by rāgadarathānaṃ abhāvena n.; at SnA 299 by kilesapariḷāhābhāvena n.). Niddasa {Niddasa} see niddesa. Niddā {Nidda} (f.) [Vedic nidrā, ni+drā in Sk. drāti, drāyate, Idg. *dorē; cp. Gr. (hom.) e)/draqon, Lat. dormio] sleep A II.48, 50; III.251; Sn 926 (opp. jāgariyā), 942 (see expln at Nd1 423); J I.61, 192; II.128. - niddaṃ okkamati to fall asleep Vin I.15 (niddā?); J III.538; IV.1; DhA I.9; VvA 65; PvA 47; °ṃ upagacchati id. PvA 43, 105, 128. -ārāma fond of sleep, slothful, sluggish It 72 (+kammarāma, bhassarata); -ārāmatā fondness of sleep, laziness, sluggishness A III.116, 293 sq., 309 sq.; IV.25 (+kamm°, bhass°); V.164; -sīlin of drowsy habits, slothful, sleepy Sn 96. Niddāna {Niddana} (nt.) [Sk. *nirdāna, nis+dāna of dayati2, Sk. dāti, cp. dātta] cutting off, mowing, destroying Sn 78 (=chedana lunana uppāṭana SnA 148)=S I.172; K.S. I.319, cp. niḍḍāyati. Niddāyati {Niddayati} [Denom. fr. niddā] to sleep D I.231; J I.192, 266; II.103; V.68, 382; DhA III.175; SnA 169. Niddāyitar {Niddayitar} [n. ag. fr. niddāyati] a sleepy person Dh 325. Niddiṭṭha {Niddittha} (pp.) [see niddisati] expressed, explained, designated Miln 3; DhsA 57; Vism 528; VvA 13. Niddisati & Niddissati {Niddisati} {Niddissati}[Sk. nir-diśati, nis+disati, cp. Lat. distinguo] to distinguish, point out, explain, designate, define, express, to mean It 122=Nd2 276f; Miln 123, 345; DhsA 57; DhA II.59; PvA 87, 217 (°itvā); aor. niddisi DhsA 57; SnA 61. - grd. niddisitabba DhsA 56; Nett 96. Pass. niddissīyati PvA 163. - pp. niddiṭṭha (q. v.). Niddukkha {Niddukkha} (adj.) [nis+dukkha] without fault or evil J III.443 (in expln of anīgha); PvA 230 (id.); (in expln of mārisa) K.S. (S.A.) 1, 2, n. 1. Pāli Text Society Niddesa 815 Pāli-English Dictionary [Sk. nirdeśa, fr. niddisati, cp. desa, desaka etc.] 1. description, attribute, distinction PvA 7 (ukkaṭṭha°); °vatthu object of distinction or praise D III.253= A IV.15 (where reading is niddasa, which also as v. l. at D III.253 & Ps I.5). - 2. descriptive exposition, analytic explanation by way of question & answer, interpretation, exegesis Vin V.114 (sa°); Nett 4, 8 38 sq.; Vism 26; DhsA 54; VvA 78; PvA 71, 147. - 3. N. of an old commentary (ascribed to Sāriputta) on parts of the Sutta Nipāta (Aṭṭhaka-vagga, interpreted in the Mahā-Niddesa; Pārāyanavagga and, as a sort of appendix, the Khaggavisāṇa-sutta, interpreted in the Culla-Niddesa); as one of the canonical texts included in the Khuddaka Nikāya; editions in P.T.S. Quoted often in the Visuddhimagga, e. g. p. 140, 208 sq. etc. {Niddesa} Niddosa1 {Niddosa} (adj.) [Sk. nirdośa, nis+dosa1] faultless, pure, undefiled Sn 476; DhsA 2; PvA 189 (=viraja); DhA I.41. Niddosa2 (adj.) [Sk. nirdveṣa, nis+dosa2] free from hatred J IV.10 (su°; Com. "adussanavasena," foll. upon sunikkodha). {Niddosa} Niddhana {Niddhana} (adj.) [nis+dhana] without property, poor J V.447. Niddhanta {Niddhanta} (adj.) [pp. of niddhamati, nis+dhanta, q. v.] blown off, removed, cleaned, purified A I.254 (jātarūpa "loitered," cp. niddhota); Sn 56 (°kasāva-moha; Com. vijahati); Dh 236 (°mala, malānaṃ nīhaṭatāya DhA III.336); Nd2 347 (=vanta & pahīna); J VI.218 (of hair; Com. expls siniddharutā, v. l. BB siniddha-anta, thus meant for Sk. snigdhānta). Niddhamati {Niddhamati} [in form=Sk. nirdhmāti, nis+dhamati, but in meaning the verb, as well as its derivations, are influenced by both meanings of niddhāvati (dhāvati1 & 2): see niddhāpeti, niddhamana, & niddhovati] to blow away, blow off; to clean, cleanse, purify; to throw out, eject, remove Sn 281=Miln 414 (kāraṇḍavaṃ); Sn 282 (°itvā pāpicche), 962 (malaṃ=pajahati (Nd1 478); Dh 239 (id.); Miln 43. - pp. niddhanta). Niddhamana {Niddhamana} (nt.) [of niddhamati or=*nirdhāvana= °dhovana to dhāvati2] drainage, drain, canal Vin II.120 (udaka°; dhovituṃ immediately preceding); J I.175, 409, 425; III.415; IV.28; V.21 (udaka°); DhA II.37. Niddhamanā {Niddhamana} (f.) [either to niddhamati or to niddhāpeti] throwing out, ejection, expulsion J V.233 (=nikkaḍḍhanā Com.). Niddharaṇa {Niddharana} (nt.) not with Hardy (Index VvA)=Sk. nirdhāraṇa (estimation), but to be read as nittharaṇa (see nittharaṇa2). Niddhāpita {Niddhapita} (adj.) [pp. of niddhāpeti, q. v.] thrown out J III.99 (v. l. for nibbāpita). Niddhāpeti {Niddhapeti} [Sk. nirdhāvayati, nis+dhāveti (dhāpeti), Caus. of dhāvati1; may also stand for niddhamāpeti, Caus. fr. niddhamati, cp. contamination niddhāmase at J IV.48, unless misread for niddhāpaye, as v. l. BB bears out] to throw out, chase away, expel J IV.41 (niddhāpayiṃsu), 48 (? for niddhāmase). pp. niddhāpita. Niddhāmase {Niddhamase} at J IV.48 should probably be read niddhāpaye (as v. l. BB), q. v. Pāli Text Society 816 Pāli-English Dictionary Niddhunāti {Niddhunati} [Sk. nirdhunoti, nis+dhunāti] to shake off S III.155; A III.365 (odhunāti+; spelt nidhunāti); M I.229; Th 1, 416; PvA 256 (=odhunāti). Niddhuniya {Niddhuniya} (?) (nt.) [=Sk. nihnuvana fr. nihnute with diff. derivation] hypocrisy Pug 18 (=makkha); cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 83. Niddhūpana {Niddhupana} (adj.) [nir+dhūpana] unscented J VI.21 (udaka). Niddhota {Niddhota} (adj.) [nis+dhota; pp. of niddhovati] washed, cleansed, purified Dāvs V.63 (°rūpiya; cp. niddhanta). Niddhovati {Niddhovati} [Sk. nirdhāvati, nis+dhovati, cp. niddhamati] to wash off, clean, purify A I.253 (jātarūpaṃ, immediately followed by niddhanta). pp. niddhota. Nidhāna {Nidhana} (nt.) [Vedic nidhāna, see nidahati] laying down, depositing, keeping; receptacle; accumulation, (hidden) treasure J IV.280 (nidhi°); PvA 7 (udaka-dāna-nīharaṇan°), 97 (n-gata dhana=hoarded, accumulated), 132 (°ṃ nidhessāmi gather a treasure); DhsA 405 (°kkhama). Nidhānavant {Nidhanavant} (adj.) forming or having a receptacle, worth treasuring or saving D I.4 (=hadaye nidhātabba-yuttavāca DA I.76). Nidhāpeti, Nidhāya & Nidhīyati {Nidhapeti} {Nidhaya} {Nidhiyati} see nidahati. Nidhi {Nidhi} [Vedic nidhi, ni+dhā, see nidahati] 1. "setting down," receptacle; (hidden) treasure Sn 285 (brahma n.); Dh 76; Kh VIII.2 (see KhA 217 sq.: nidhīyatī ti nidhi, def. of n.), 9 (acorāharaṇo nidhi cp. "treasures in heaven, where thieves do not steal" Matt. 6, 20); Sdhp 528, 588. - 2. "putting on," a cloak J VI.79 (expld as vākacīra-nivāsanaṃ=a bark dress). Cp. sannidhi. -kumbhī a treasure-pot, a treasure hidden in a pot =a hidden treasure DhA II.107; IV.208; -nidhāna laying up treasures, burying a treasure J IV.280; -mukha an excellent treasure A V.346. Nidhura {Nidhura} see nīdhura. Nidheti {Nidheti} see nidahati. Nindati {Nindati} [Sk. nindati, nid as in Gr. o)/neidos (blame), Lith. naids (hatred), Goth. naitjan (to rail or blaspheme), Ohg. neizzan (to plague); cp. Goth. neip=Ohg. nīd (envy)] to blame, find fault with, censure A II.3; V.171, 174; Sn 658; J VI.63; Dh 227; inf. nindituṃ Dh 230; grd. nindanīya SnA 477. pp. nindita (q. v.); cp. also nindiya. Nindana {Nindana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. nindati] blaming, reviling, finding fault DhA III.328. Nindā {Ninda} (f.) [cp. Sk. nindā, to nindati] blame, reproach, fault-finding, fault, disgrace S III.73; A II.188; IV.157 sq.; M I.362; Sn 213 (+pasaṃsā blame & praise); Dh 81 (id.); Sn 826, 895, 928; Dh 143, 309; Nd1 165, 306, 384; DhA II.148. - In compn nindi° see anindi°. Pāli Text Society 817 Pāli-English Dictionary Nindita {Nindita} (adj.) [pp. of nindati] blamed, reproved, reviled; faulty, blameworthy Dh 228; Pv II.334 (a° blameless= agarahita pasaṃsa PvA 89); Sdhp 254, 361. - anindita J IV.106 (°angin). Nindiya {Nindiya} (adj.) [Sk. nindya, orig. grd. of nindati] blameable, faulty, blameworthy Sn 658 (=nindanīya SnA 477); Nett 132. pi nindiyā at PvA 23 is to be read as pīṇitindriyā. Ninna {Ninna} (adj.-n.) [Vedic nimna, der. fr. ni down, prob. combd with °na of nam to bend, thus meaning "bent down," cp. unna & panna] 1. (adj.) bent down (cp. ninnata), low-lying, deep, low, sunken J II.3 (magga); PvA 29 (bhūmibhāga), 132 (ṭhāṇa); esp. freq. as -°: bent on, inclining to, leading to, aiming at, flowing into etc. Often combd with similar expressions in chain taccarita tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra tadādhimutta (with variation nibbāna°, viveka° etc. for tad°): Nd2 under tad; J II.15; Ps II.197; - Vin II.237=A IV.198 (samuddo anupubba° etc.); A IV.224 (viveka°); V.175 (id.); M I.493 (Nibbāna°). Similarly: samudda° Gangā M I.493; nekkhamma° J I.45 (V.258); samādhi° Miln 38. - 2. (acc. as adv.) downward: ninnaṃ pavattati to flow downward M I.117; Pv I.57; ninnagata running down Miln 259 (udaka); ninnaga Dāvs IV.28. - 3. (nt.) low land, low ground, plain (opp. thala elevation, plateau): usually with ref. to a raincloud flooding the low country Sn 30 (mahamegho °ṃ pūrayaṃto); SnA 42 (=pallala); It 66 (megho °ṃ pūreti); Pv II.945 (megho °ṃ paripūrayanto). -unnata low lying & elevated Miln 349 (desabhāga). Ninnata {Ninnata} (adj.) [ni+nata] bent down, bent upon, in ninnatattā (fem. abstr.) aim, purpose (?) DhsA 39 (is the reading correct?). Miln, Dāvs) Ninnāda & Nināda {Ninnada} {Ninada} Miln, Dāvs [Sk. nināda, ni+nāda] sounding forth, sound, tune, melody A II.117 (°sadda); J VI.43; VvA 161; Miln 148; Dāvs V.31. Ninnādin {Ninnadin} (adj.) [fr. ninnāda] sounding (loud), resonant (of a beautiful voice) D II.211 (cp. aṭṭhanga brahmassara & bindu). Ninnāmin {Ninnamin} (adj.) [fr. ni+nam] bending downwards, descending A IV.237. Ninnāmeti [Caus. of ni+namati] to bend down, put out (the tongue) D I.106 (jivhaṃ=nīharati DA I.276); J I.163, 164; cp. Divy 7, 71 (nirṇāmayati). {Ninnameti} Ninnīta {Ninnita} (adj.) [pp. of ninneti] lead down, lead away; drained, purified, free from (°-) A I.254 (ninnīta-kasāva of gold: free fr. dross). Ninnetar {Ninnetar} [n. ag. to ni-nayati=Sk. *ninayitṛ, cp. netar] one who leads down to, one who disposes of (c. gen.), bringer of, giver, usually in phrase atthassa n. (bringer of good: "Heilbringer") of the Buddha S IV.94; M I.111; A V.226 sq., 256 sq.; Ps II.194. Ninneti {Ninneti} [Sk. ninayati, ni+nayati] to lead down, lead away; drain, (udakaṃ), desiccate Vin II.180. - pp. ninnīta, q. v. Ninhāta {Ninhata} see niṇhāta. Nipa {Nipa} at J V.6 read as nīpa. Pāli Text Society Nipaka 818 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [cp. BSk. nipaka chief, fr. Sk. nipa, chief, master] intelligent, clever, prudent, wise S I.13, 52, 187; M I.339; A I.165 (+jhāyin); III.24, 138; Sn 45≈Dh 328≈DhA I.62; Sn 283, 962, 1038; Nd2 349 (=jātimā) =Nd1 478; Bu I.49; Vbh 426; Miln 34, 342, 411; Vism 3 (defn). {Nipaka} Nipakka {Nipakka} at Vin I.200 read nippakka. Nipacc {Nipacc} -ākāra [nipacca, ger. of nipatati+ākāra] obedience, humbleness, service S I.178; V.233; A V.66; J I.232; IV.133; VvA 22, 320; PvA 12. Nipacca -vādin (adj.) [nipacca, ger. of nipāteti+vādin] speaking hurtfully Sn 217 (=dāyakaṃ nipātetvā appiyavacanāni vattā SnA 272). {Nipacca} Nipajjati {Nipajjati} [Sk. nipadyate, ni+pajjati] to lie down (to sleep) D I.246; A IV.332; J I.150; DhA I.40; PvA 280; aor. nipajji J I.279; II.154; III.83; VvA 75, 76; PvA 74, 75, 93; ger. nipajja J I.7 (V.44: °ṭṭhānacankama). - Caus. nipajjāpeti to lay down, deposit J I.50, 253, 267; III.26, 188; DhA I.50; VvA 76 (°etvā rakkhāpetha). Cp. abhi°. Nipatati {Nipatati} [Sk. nipatati, ni+patati] 1. (intrs.) to fall down, fly down, descend, go out Vin II.192 (Bhagavato pādesu sirasā n. bending his head at the feet of Bh.); PvA 60 (id.); J I.278; V.467 (nippatissāmi=nikkhamissāmi Com.) Pv II.89 (v. l. BB parivisayitvā)=nikkhamitvā PvA 109 (cp. nippatati). - 2. (trs.) to bring together, to convene, in nipatāmase (pres. subj.) "shall we convene? " J IV.361. See also nipadāmase. - Cp. abhi°, san°. Nipadāmase {Nipadamase} at J III.120 is an old misreading & is to be corrected into nipatāmase (=let us gather, bring together=dedicate), unless it be read as nipphadāmase (=do, set forth, prepare, give), in spite of Com. expln p. 121: nikārapakārā (=nipaccakārā?) upasaggā (upasajja?) dāmase (dā) ti attho; endorsed by Müller, P.G. p. 97 & Kern, Toev. p. 175. It cannot be ni+pa+ dāmase, since ni is never used as secondary (modifying) verb-component (see ni° A 2), & Bdhgh's expln is popular etym. Cp. nipatāmase at J IV.361 (see nipatati). Nipanna {Nipanna} (adj.) [pp. of nipajjati] lying down J I.151, 279; II.103; III.276 (°kāle while he was asleep), IV.167; PvA 43, 75, 265 (spelt nippanna, opp. nikujja). Nipannaka {Nipannaka} (adj.)=nipanna Ps II.209; J I.151. Nipalāvita {Nipalavita} (pp.) (Com. reading for vipalāvita text) [Sk. viplāvita, see plavati] made to swim, immersed, thrown into water J I.326. Nipāka {Nipaka} (adj.) [Sk. nipāka, ni+pāka (pacati)] full grown, fully developed, in full strength J VI.327 (of a tree). Nipāta {Nipata} [Sk. nipāta, ni+pāta, of nipatati] 1. falling down Dh 121 (udabindu°); VvA 279 (diṭṭhi°, a glance); PvA 45 (asa°). - 2. descending M I.453. - 3. a particle, the gram. term for adverbs, conjunctions & interjections J V.243 (assu); PvA 11 (mā), 26 (vo), 40 (taṃ), 50 (ca). - 4. a section of a book (see next). Cp. vi°, san°. Nipātaka {Nipataka} (adj.) [to nipāta] divided into sections or chapters Dpvs IV.16. 819 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Nipātana {Nipatana} (nt.) [to nipatati] 1. falling upon DhA I.295. - 2. going to bed VvA 71 (pacchā° opp. pubbuṭṭhāna). Cp. nipātin. Nipātin (adj.) [to nipatati] 1. falling or flying down, chancing upon Dh 35, 36 (yatthakāma° cittaṃ=yattha yattha icchati tattha tatth'eva nipatati DhA I.295). - 2. going to bed D I.60 (pacchā° going to bed late). - Cp. abhi°. {Nipatin} Nipāteti {Nipateti} [ni+Caus. of patati] to let fall, throw down into (c. loc.); bring to fall, injure; fig. cast upon, charge with D I.91; M I.453 (ayokaṭāhe); J III.359; SnA 272; PvA 152 (bhūmiyaṃ). pp. nipātita corrupt, evil, wicked Vin II.182 (caṇḍa+; text nippātita, v. l. nipphātita). Nipuṇa {Nipuna} (adj.) [Sk. nipuṇa, dial. for nipṛṇa, to pṛṇoti, pṛ] clever, skilful, accomplished; fine, subtle, abstruse D I.26≈(n. gambhīra dhamma), 162 (paṇḍita+); M I.487 (dhamma); S I.33; IV.369; A III.78; Sn 1126 (=gambhīra duddasa etc. Nd2 350); Vbh 426; Miln 233, 276; DA I.117; VvA 73 (ariyasaccesu kusala+), 232; PvA 1, 16. Cp. abhinipuṇa. Nippakāra {Nippakara} (adj.) [nis+pakāra 2] of no flavour, tasteless, useless J I.340. Nippakka {Nippakka} (adj.) [nis+pakka] boiled, infused Vin I.200. Nippajjati & Nipphajjati [Sk. niṣpadyate, nis+pajjati] to be produced, be accomplished, spring forth, ripen, result, happen DhA II.4 (pph); PvA 19 (=upakappati), 71 (phalaṃ ijjhati n.), 120 (id.). pp. nipphanna. See also nipphādeti & nipphatti etc.; cp. also abhi°. {Nippajjati} {Nipphajjati} Nippañña {Nippanna} (adj.) [nis+pañña] unwise, foolish PvA 40, 41 (=dummati). Nippatati & Nipphatati {Nippatati} {Nipphatati} [nis+patati] to fall out; rush out, come forth, go out from (c. abl.) Vin II.151 (nipphaṭati, v. l. nippaṭati); J V.467 (=nikkhamati Com.; or is it nipatati?). - ger. nippacca (cp. BSk. nirpatya AvŚ I.209). Nippatta {Nippatta} (adj.) [nis+patta] 1. without wings, plucked (of a bird) Vin IV.259. - 2. without leaves J III.496 (=patita-patta); SnA 117 (°puppha). - Note nippatta at Dhs 1035 is to be read as nibbatta. Nippatti {Nippatti} see nipphatti. Nippadā {Nippada} (?) at S I.225 read nipphādā (q. v.). Nippadesa {Nippadesa} [Sk. *niṣpradesa, nis+padesa] only in instr. & abl.=separately DhsA 2, 30, 37, 297. Nippanna {Nippanna} see nipanna & nipphanna. Pāli Text Society 820 Pāli-English Dictionary Nippapañca {Nippapanca} (adj.) [nis+papaðca] free from diffuseness S IV.370; Dh 254 (Tathāgata); °ārāma not fond of delay M I.65 (Neumann trsl. I.119: "dem keine Sonderheit behagt"); A III.431; IV.229 sq.; Miln 262. Nippabha {Nippabha} (adj.) [nis+prabhā] without splendour J II.415; Miln 102. Nippariyāya [nis+pariyāya] 1. without distinction or difference, absence of explanation or demonstration DhsA 317 (°ena not figuratively), 403 (°desanā); VvA 320. - 2. unchangeable, not to be turned Miln 113, 123, 212. {Nippariyaya} Nippalāpa {Nippalapa} (adj.) [nis+palāpa] free from prattle or talk, not talking A II.183 (apalāpa+; v. l. °palāsa). Nippalibodha {Nippalibodha} (adj.) [nis+palibodha] without hindrances, unobstructed Miln 11. Nippādeti {Nippadeti} see nipphādeti. Nippāpa {Nippapa} (adj.) [nis+pāpa] free from sin Sn 257=Dh 205. Nippitika {Nippitika} (adj.) [Sk. *niṣpaitṛka=fatherless or *niṣprītika?] a bastard J I.133 (v. l. nippītika q. v.). Nippipāsa {Nippipasa} (adj.) [nis+pipāsā] without thirst or desire Sn 56; Nd2 351. Nippītika {Nippitika} (adj.) [nis+pīti+ka] 1. free from (feelings of) enjoyment (characteristic of 3rd jhāna, q. v.) D I.75; A I.81. - 2. being unloved, a foster child etc. (?) see nippitika. Nippīḷana {Nippilana} (nt.) [nis+pīḷana] squeezing, pressing; a blow J III.160. Cp. abhinippīḷanā. Nippīḷeti {Nippileti} [nis+pīḷeti] to squeeze, press, clench, urge J I.63, 223. Pass. nippīḷiyati, only in ppr. nippīḷiyamāna being urged Vin II.303; VvA 138; PvA 31, 192. Cp. abhi°. Nippurisa {Nippurisa} (adj.) [nis+purisa] 1. without men PvA 177. - 2. without men, executed by females (female devas) only (of turiyā=a female orchestra) Vin I.15; D II.21; J V.506. Cp. M Vastu III.165 (niṣpuruṣena nāṭakena) & AvŚ I.321 (niṣpuruṣena tūryeṇa; see also note in Index p. 229), whereas Divy 3 (see Index) has niṣparuṣa (soft), with v. l. niṣpuruṣa. Nippesika {Nippesika} [cp. Sk. niṣpeṣa clashing against, bounce, shock, niṣ+piṣ] one who performs jugglery, a juggler D I.8 (=nippeso sīlaṃ etesan ti DA.I.91); A III.111. Nippesikatā {Nippesikata} (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] jugglery, trickery (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 176) Vbh 353 (expld at Vism 29); Miln 383. Nippothana {Nippothana} (nt.) [nis+pothana of puth to crush] crushing, beating, destroying SnA 390. 821 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Nipphajjati {Nipphajjati} see nippajjati. Nipphajjana {Nipphajjana} (nt.) (or °nā f. ?) [n. abstr. fr. nipp(h)ajjati] resulting, procedure, achievement, plot J IV.83. Nipphatti {Nipphatti} (f.) [cp. Sk. niṣpatti] result, accomplishment, effect, end, completion, perfection J I.56, 335 (of dreams), 343, 456; IV.137 (sippe); VI.36; VvA 138 (sippa°); DhA II.6 (import, meaning, of a vision); DhsA 354; PvA 122, 282 (sippe); Nett 54. Cp. abhi°. Nipphattika {Nipphattika} (adj.) [fr. nipphatti] having a result J III.166 (evaṃ° of such consequence). Nipphanna {Nipphanna} (adj.) [pp. of nippajjati] accomplished, perfected, trained S I.215 (°sobhin, spelt nippanna); J IV.39 (°sippa master of the art, M.A.); DhA III.285 (sasse); DhsA 316; in phil. determined, conditioned Kvu XI.7; XXIII.5; Vism 450; Pts. of Controversy, 395. Cp. abhi°, pari°. See also Cpd. 156, 157. Nipphala {Nipphala} (adj.) [nis+phala] without fruit, barren in a° not without fruit, i. e. amply rewarded (dāyaka, the giver of good gifts) Pv I.42; 55, PvA 194; Sdhp 504. Nipphalita {Nipphalita} (adj.) [Sk. niṣphārita, pp. of nipphaleti, nis+ phaleti] broken out, split open J I.493 (lasī=nikkhantā Com.; v. l. nipphaḷita). Nipphāṇitatta {Nipphanitatta} (nt.) [nis+phāṇita+tva] state of being free from sugar or molasses J III.409. Nipphādaka {Nipphadaka} (adj.) [fr. nipphādeti] producing, accomplishing DhsA 47; PvA 147 (sukha -°ṃ puññaṃ). Nipphādana {Nipphadana} (nt.) [Sk. niṣpādana, to nipphādeti] accomplishment Miln 356; DA I.195. Nipphādar {Nipphadar} [n. ag.=Sk. niṣpādayitṛ cp. nipphāditar] one who produces or gains S I.225 (atthassa; read nipphādā, nom. for nippadā). Nipphādita {Nipphadita} [pp. of nipphādeti] (having) produced, producing (perhaps=nipphāditar) VvA 113. Nipphāditar {Nipphaditar} [n. ag. to nipphādeti, cp. nipphādar] one who produces or accomplishes PvA 8 (read "so nipphāditā" for sā nipphādikā). Cp. nipphādita and nipphādaka. Nipphādeti {Nipphadeti} [Caus. of nippajjati] to bring forth, produce; accomplish, perform J I.185 (lābhasakkāraṃ); V.81; Miln 299; VvA 32, 72 (grd. nipphādetabba, n. of ablative case); Sdhp 319, 426. - pp. nipphādita. Cp. abhinipphādeti. Nipphoṭana {Nipphotana} (nt.) [nis+pothanā] beating S IV.300 (v. l. ṭh.). Cp. nippothana. Pāli Text Society 822 Pāli-English Dictionary Nipphoṭeti {Nipphoteti} [nis+potheti] to beat down, smother, crush S I.101, 102. Nibaddha {Nibaddha} (adj.) [ni+baddha] bound down to, i. e. (1) fixed, stable, sure J IV.134 (bhattavetana); Miln 398 (a°, unstable, °sayana). At DA I.243 two kinds of cārikā (wanderings, pilgrimages) are distinguished, viz. nibaddha° definite, regular and anibaddha° indefinite, irregular pilgrimage. - (2) asked, pressed, urged J III.277. - (3) nibaddhaṃ (nt. as adv.) constantly, always, continually J I.100, 150; III.325; V.95, 459; VI.161; PvA 267 (°vasanaka); DhA II.41, 52 sq. Nibandha {Nibandha} [Sk. nibandha, ni+bandha] binding, bond; attachment, continuance, continuity S II.17; VvA 259, 260 (perseverance). acc. nibandhaṃ (often misspelt for nibaddhaṃ) continually VvA 75. Cp. vi°. Nibandhati {Nibandhati} [ni+bandhati] 1. to bind Miln 79. - 2. to mix, apply, prepare Vin II.151 (anibandhanīya unable to be applied, not binding); J I.201 (yāgubhattaṃ). - 3. to press, urge, importune J III.277. Nibandhana {Nibandhana} (nt.) [ni+bandhana] tying, fastening; binding, bond; (adj.) tied to, fettered Sn 654 (kamma°); Miln 78, 80. Nibodhati {Nibodhati} [ni+bodhati] to attend to, to look out for, to take J III.151 (=gaṇhati). - Caus. nibodheti to waken, at Th 1, 22 is probably to be read as vibodheti. Nibbatta {Nibbatta} (pp.) [Sk. nirvṛtta, nis+vaṭṭa, pp. of nibbattati] existing, having existed, being reborn Vin I.215 (n. bījaṃ phalaṃ fruit with seed); J I.168; II.111; PvA 10 (niraye), 35 (petayoniyaṃ), 100 (pubbe n.-ṭhānato paṭṭhāya); Miln 268 (kamma°, hetu° & utu°).-Cp. abhi°. Nibbattaka (adj.) [cp. nibbatta] producing, yielding PvA 26 (phala °ṃ kusalakammaṃ), 126 (=sukha°=sukhāvaha). {Nibbattaka} Nibbattati {Nibbattati} [nis+vattati] to come out from (cp. E. turn out), arise, become, be produced, result, come into being, be reborn, ex-ist (=nir-vatt) Dh 338; Pv I.11 (nibbattate); ThA 259 (=jāyati); DhA III.173; PvA 8 (=uppajjati) 71 (id.); ger. nibbattitvā J II.158 (kapiyoniyaṃ); PvA 68, 78; aor. nibbatti J I.221; PvA 14 (Avīcimhi), 67 (petesu), 73 (amaccakule). - pp. nibbatta (q. v.). Caus. nibbatteti (q. v.). Cp. abhi°. Nibbattana {Nibbattana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbattati] growing, coming forth; (re)birth, existence, life J II.105; PvA 5 (devaloke n-araha deserving rebirth in the world of gods) 9, 67 etc. Nibbattanaka {Nibbattanaka} (adj.) [fr. nibbattana] 1. arising, coming out, growing ThA 259 (akkhidalesu n. pīḷikā). - 2. one destined to be reborn, a candidate of rebirth J III.304 (sagge). Nibbattāpana {Nibbattapana} (nt.) [fr. nibbattāpeti, see nibbatteti] reproduction Miln 97. Nibbatti {Nibbatti} (f.) [Sk. nirvṛtti, nis+vatti] constitution, product; rebirth J I.47; Nett 28, 79; Vism 199, 649; VvA 10. Cp. abhi°. Pāli Text Society Nibbattita 823 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [pp. of nibbatteti] done, produced, brought forth PvA 150 (a°kusalakamma=akata). {Nibbattita} Nibbattin {Nibbattin} (adj.) [fr. nibbatti] arising, having rebirth, in neg. anibbattin not to be born again J VI.573. Nibbatteti {Nibbatteti} [nis+vatteti, Caus. of nibbattati] to produce, bring forth; practise, perform; to bring to light, find something lost (at Miln 218) Nd2=jāneti (s. v.); J I.66, 140; III.396 (jhānābhiññaṃ); PvA 76 (jhānāni), 30; Miln 200; Sdhp 470. - pp. nibbattita (q. v.); 2nd Caus. nibbattāpeti to cause rebirth DhA III.484; see also nibbattāpana. - Cp. abhi°. Nibbanka {Nibbanka} (adj.) [nis+vanka] not crooked, straight DhA I.288. Nibbajjeti {Nibbajjeti} [nis+vajjeti] to throw away, to do without, to avoid Th 1, 1105. Nibbana (adj.) 1. [Sk. nirvana] without forest, woodless J II.358. - 2. [an abstr. fr. nibbāna, see nibbāna I.; cp. vana2. Freq. nibbāna as v. l. instead of nibbana] without cravings Sn 1131 (nikkāmo nibbano); Dh 283 (nibbanā pl.) Vv 5014 (better reading nibbāna, in phrase "vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ," as found at A III.346= Th 1, 691, although the latter has nibbanaṃ in text), expld by "nittaṇhabhāvaṃ nibbānam eva upagataṃ" VvA 213. {Nibbana} Nibbanatha {Nibbanatha} (adj.) [nis+vanatha] free from lust or cravings SI.180, 186 (so 'haṃ vane nibbanatho visallo); Th 1, 526; Dh 344; Dāvs I.18. Nibbasana {Nibbasana} (adj.) [nis+vasana] no longer worn, cast off (of cloth) S II.202, 221. Nibbahati {Nibbahati} [nis+bahati] to stretch out J III.185 (asiṃ); to pull out J V.269 (jivhaṃ=jivhaṃ balisena n. 275). See also nibbāheti & nibbāhāpeti. Nibbāti {Nibbati} [see nibbuta etym.; influenced in meaning by Sk. nirvāti, nis+vāti to blow, i. e. to make cool, see vāyati & nibbāpeti] (instr.) to cool off (lit. & fig.), to get cold, to become passionless Sn 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yathāyaṃ padīpo=vijjhāyanti; yathāyaṃ padīpo nibbuto evaṃ nibbanti KhA 194, 195), 915 (kathaṃ disvā nibbāti bhikkhu=rāgaṃ etc. nibbāpeti Nd1 344); J IV.391 (pāyāsaṃ). See also parinibbāti (e. g. Vbh 426). Nibbāna {Nibbana} (nt.). - I. Etymology. Although nir+vā "to blow". (cp. BSk. nirvāṇa) is already in use in the Vedic period (see nibbāpeti), we do not find its distinctive application till later and more commonly in popular use, where vā is fused with vṛ in this sense, viz. in application to the extinguishing of fire, which is the prevailing Buddhist conception of the term. Only in the older texts do we find references to a simile of the wind and the flame; but by far the most common metaphor and that which governs the whole idea of nibbāna finds expression in the putting out of fire by other means of extinction than by blowing, which latter process rather tends to incite the fire than to extinguish it. The going out of the fire may be due to covering it up, or to depriving it of further fuel, by not feeding it, or by withdrawing the cause of its production. Thus to the Pali etymologist the main reference is to the root vṛ (to cover), and not to vā (to blow). This is still more clearly evident in the case of nibbuta (q. v. for further discussion). In verbal compn. nis+vā (see vāyati) refers only to the (non-) emittance of an Pāli Text Society 824 Pāli-English Dictionary odour, which could never be used for a meaning of "being exhausted"; moreover, one has to bear in mind that native commentators themselves never thought of explaining nibbāna by anything like blowing (vāta), but always by nis+vana (see nibbana). For Bdhgh's defn of nibbāna see e. g. Vism 293. - The meanings of n. are: 1. the going out of a lamp or fire (popular meaning). - 2. health, the sense of bodily well-being (probably, at first, the passing away of feverishness, restlessness). - 3. The dying out in the heart of the threefold fire of rāga, dosa & moha: lust, ill-will & stupidity (Buddhistic meaning). - 4. the sense of spiritual well-being, of security, emancipation, victory and peace, salvation, bliss. II. Import and Range of the Term. A. Nibbāna is purely and solely an ethical state, to be reached in this birth by ethical practices, contemplation and insight. It is therefore not transcendental. The first and most important way to reach N. is by means of the eightfold Path, and all expressions which deal with the realisation of emancipation from lust, hatred and illusion apply to practical habits and not to speculative thought. N. is realised in one's heart; to measure it with a speculative measure is to apply a wrong standard. - A very apt and comprehensive discussion of nibbāna is found in F. Heiler, "Die buddhistische Versenkung" (München2 1922), pp. 36-42, where also the main literature on the subject is given. - N. is the untranslatable expression of the Unspeakable, of that for which in the Buddha's own saying there is no word, which cannot be grasped in terms of reasoning and cool logic, the Nameless, Undefinable (cp. the simile of extinction of the flame which may be said to pass from a visible state into a state which cannot be defined. Thus the Saint (Arahant) passes into that same state, for which there is "no measure" (i. e. no dimension): "atthangatassa na pamāṇam atthi . . . yena naṃ vajju: taṃ tassa n'atthi" Sn 1076. The simile in v. 1074: "accī yathā vāta-vegena khitto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ: evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto atthaṃ paleti, na upeti sankhaṃ"). Yet, it is a reality, and its characteristic features may be described, may be grasped in terms of earthly language, in terms of space (as this is the only means at our disposal to describe abstract notions of time and mentality); e. g. accutaṃ ṭhānaṃ, pāraṃ, amataṃ padaṃ, amata (& nibbāna-) dhātu. - It is the speculative, scholastic view and the dogmatising trend of later times, beginning with the Abhidhamma period, which has more and more developed the simple, spontaneous idea into an exaggerated form either to the positive (i. e. seeing in N. a definite state or sphere of existence) or the negative side (i. e. seeing in it a condition of utter annihilation). Yet its sentimental value to the (exuberant optimism of the) early Buddhists (Rh. Davids, Early Buddhism, p. 73) is one of peace and rest, perfect passionlessness, and thus supreme happiness. As Heiler in the words of R. Otto (Das Heilige etc. 1917; quoted l. c. p. 41) describes it, "only by its concept Nirvāna is something negative, by its sentiment, however, a positive item in most pronounced form." - We may also quote Rh. Davids'words: "One might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful passages in Pāli poetry and prose, lavished on this condition of mind, the state of the man made perfect according to the B. faith. Many are the pet names, the poetic epithets, bestowed upon it, each of them-for they are not synonyms-emphasising one or other phase of this many-sided conception-the harbour of refuge, the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss, emancipation, liberation, safety, the supreme, the transcendental, the uncreated, the tranquil, the home of ease, the calm, the end of suffering, the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia, the immaterial, the imperishable, the abiding, the further shore, the unending, the bliss of effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the B. texts is Arahantship, „the state of him who is worthy‟; and the one exclusively used in Europe is Nirvana, the „dying out,‟ that is, the dying out in the heart of the fell fire of the three cardinal sins-sensuality, ill-will, and stupidity (Saṃyutta IV.251, 261)," (Early Buddhism pp. 72, 73.) And Heiler says (p. 42 l. c.): "Nirvāna is, although it might sound a paradox, in spite of all conceptional negativity nothing but „eternal salvation,‟ after which the Pāli Text Society 825 Pāli-English Dictionary heart of the religious yearns on the whole earth." The current simile is that of fire, the consuming fire of passion (rāg-aggi), of craving for rebirth, which has to be extinguished, if a man is to attain a condition of indifference towards everything worldly, and which in the end, in its own good time, may lead to freedom from rebirth altogether, to certain and final extinction (parinibbāna). - Fire may be put out by water, or may go out of itself from lack of fuel. The ethical state called Nibbāna can only rise from within. It is therefore in the older texts compared to the fire going out, rather than to the fire being put out. The latter point of view, though the word nibbāna is not used, occurs in one or two passages in later books. See J I.212; Miln 346, 410; SnA 28; Sdhp 584. For the older view see M I.487 (aggi anāhāro nibbuto, a fire gone out through lack of fuel); Sn 1094 (akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ Nibbānaṃ iti); S I.236 (attadaṇḍesu nibbuto sādānesu anādāno); S II.85 (aggikkhandho purimassa upādānassa pariyādānā aððassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya, as a fire would go out, bereft of food, because the former supply being finished no additional supply is forthcoming); sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati, the king of the gods does not escape rebirth so long as he has within him any grasping S IV.102; pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto A I.162; pāragato jhāyī anup° nibbuto, a philosopher, freed, without any cause, source, of rebirth A IV.290 (etc., see nibbuta). dāvaggi-nibbānaṃ the going out of the jungle fire J I.212; aggi nibbāyeyya, should the fire go out M I.487; aggikkhandho nibbuto hoti the great fire has died out Miln 304; nibbuto ginī my fire is out Sn 19. The result of quenching the fire (going out) is coolness (sīta); and one who has attained the state of coolness is sītibhūta. sītibhūto 'smi nibbuto Vin I.8; Pv I.87; sītibhūto nirūpadhi, cooled, with no more fuel (to produce heat) Vin II.156; A I.138; nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto (cp. nicchāta) A II.208; V.65. anupādānā dīpacci viya nibbutā gone out like the flame of a lamp without supply of fuel ThA 154 (Ap. 153). - nibbanti dhīrā yath'āyaṃ padīpo the Wise go out like the flame of this lamp Sn 235. This refers to the pulling out of the wick or to lack of oil, not to a blowing out; cp. vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca telapadīpo jāleyya S II.86; Th 2, 116 (padīpass'eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho ahu cetaso). The pulling out of the wick is expressed by vaṭṭiṃ okassayāmi (=dīpavaṭṭiṃ ākaḍḍhemi ThA 117) cp. on this passage Pischel, Leben & Lehre des Buddha 71; Mrs. Rh. Davids, Buddhism 176; Neumann, Lieder 298). pajjotass'eva nibbānaṃ like the going out of a lamp S I.159≈. B. Since rebirth is the result of wrong desire (kāma, kilesa, āsava, rāga etc.), the dying out of that desire leads to freedom & salvation from rebirth and its cause or substratum. Here references should be given to: (1) the fuel in ethical sense (cp. A 1: aggi); (2) the aims to be accomplished (for instance, coolness=peace); (3) the seat of its realisation (the heart); (4) the means of achievement (the Path); (5) the obstacles to be removed. - 1. Fuel=cause of rebirth & suffering: āsāva (intoxications). khīṇāsavā jutimanto to loke parinibbutā the wise who are rid of all intoxications are in this world the thoroughly free S V.29; sāvakā āsavānaṃ khayā viharanti A IV.83; kodhaṃ pahatvāna parinibbiṃsu anāsavā (are completely cooled) A IV.98; āsavakhīṇo danto parinibbuto Sn 370; saggaṃ sugatino yanti parinibbanti anāsavā those of happy fate go to heaven, but those not intoxicated die out Dh 126; nibbānaṃ adhimuttānaṃ atthangacchanti āsavā Dh 226; āsavānaṃ khayā bhikkhu nicchāto parinibbuto It 49; vimutti-kusuma-saðchanno parinibbissati anāsavo Th 1, 100. kāmā (cravings) nikkāmo nibbano Nāgo Sn 1131. - kilesa-(nibbāna) vice (only in certain commentaries). kilesa-nibbānass'āpi anupādā parinibbānass'āpi santike DhA I.286; upādānaṃ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesa-nibbānena nibbutā DhA IV.194. - nibbidā (disenchantment). Nibbānaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya etc. saṃvattati S II.223; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe nibbānaṃ attano Sn 940. - rāga virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ S I.136≈; desento virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayan S I.192; yo rāgakkhayo (dosa° . . . moha° . . .): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ S IV.251, & same of Amata S V.8; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Sn 1086; kusalo ca jahati pāpakaṃ rāgadosamoha-kkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85; ye 'dha pajahanti Pāli Text Society 826 Pāli-English Dictionary kāmarāgaṃ bhavarāgānusayað ca pahāya parinibbānagatā Vv 5324. - vana sabbasaṃyojan'atītaṃ vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ A III.346; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti nibbānaṃ KhA 151; taṇhā-sankhāta-vānābhāvato nibbānaṃ SnA 253. 2. Aims: khema (tranquillity). ātāpī bhikkhu nibbānāya bhabbo anuttarassa yogakkhemassa adhigamāya It 27; ajaraṃ amaraṃ khemaṃ pariyessāmi nibbutiṃ J I.3; acala (immovable, not to be disturbed). patto acalaṭṭhānaṃ Vv 514; accuta (stable) patthayaṃ accutaṃ padaṃ S III.143; chandarāga-vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Sn 1086. nekkhamma (renunciation, dispassionateness). vanā nibbānaṃ āgataṃ kāmehi nekkhammarataṃ A III.346. - pāragū (victor). pāragū sabbadhammānaṃ anupādāya nibbuto A I.162 (cp. A IV.290 with tiṇṇo pāragato). - santipada (calm, composure). santī ti nibbutiṃ ðatvā Sn 933; santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya nibbānaṃ sugatena desitaṃ Dh 285; s.=acala VvA 219. - samatha (allayment, quietude). sabbasankhārasamatho nibbānaṃ S I.136≈. - sotthi (welfare). saccena suvatthi hotu nibbānaṃ Sn 235. 3. The Heart: (a) attā (heart, self). abhinibbut-atto Sn 456; thiṭatto frequent, e. g. parinibbuto ṭh° Sn 359; danto parinib° ṭh° Sn 370. - (b) citta (heart). apariḍayhamāna-citto SnA 347 (for abhinibbutatto Sn 343). - (c) hadaya (heart) nibbānaṃ hadayasmiṃ opiya S I.199; mātuhadayaṃ nibbāyate J I.61; nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ (quench the fever of my heart) Miln 318. - (d) mano (mind). mano nibbāyi tāvade J I.27; disvā mano me pasīdi Vv 5014. 4. The Path: dhīra. lokapariyāyaṃ añðāya nibbutā dhīrā tiṇṇā etc. S I.24; nibbanti dhīrā . . . Sn 235 sabbābhibhū dhīro sabbagantha-ppamocano It 122 - Recognition of anicca (transitoriness, see nicca). aniccasaððī . . . bhikkhu pāpuṇāti diṭṭh'eva dhamme nibbānaṃ A IV.353. - paððā. nibbānaṃ ev'ajjhagamuṃ sapaððā S I.22; n'abhirato paððā S I.38. - paṇḍita & nipaka. anupubbena n°ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A I.162; nipakā asesaṃ parinibbanti It 93. - vijjā. bhikkhu paṇihitena cittena avijjaṃ bhecchati vijjaṃ uppādessati n°ṃ sacchikarissati the bhikkhu with devout heart will destroy ignorance, gain right cognition & realise Nibbāna A I.8; idh'aððāya parinibbāti anāsavo A III.41; sabb'āsave pariððāya parinibbanti anāsavā Vbh 426. 5. The Obstacles: gantha (fetter). nibbānaṃ adhigantabbaṃ sabba-g°-pamocanaṃ S I.210; It 104; similarly It 122 (see above). gabbhaseyyā (rebirth). na te punam upenti gabbhaseyyaṃ, parinibbānagatā hi sītibhūtā Vv 5324 - nīvaraṇa (obstacles). paðca n°. anibbāna-saṃvattanikā S V.97. - punabbhava (rebirth). nibbāpehi mahārāgaṃ mā ḍayhittho punappunaṃ S I.188; vibhavað ca bhavað ca vippahāya vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavo sa bhikkhu Sn 514; bhavanirodha nibbānaṃ S II.117. - sankhārā (elements of life). sabbasankhāra-samatho nibbānaṃ S I.136; N.=sabbasankhārā khayissanti A III.443. - saṃyojanāni (fetters). sabbas-ātītaṃ vanā Nibbānaṃ āgataṃ A III.346; s. pahāya n°ṃ sacchikarissati A III.423; saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā antarā-parinibbāyī hoti S V.69. III. Nibbāna: its ethical importance and general characterisation. 1. Assurance of N. (nibbānass'eva santike, near N., sure of N.): S I.33 (yassa etādisaṃ yānaṃ . . . sa etena yānena n. e. s.: with the chariot of the Dhamma sure of reaching N.); IV.75; A II.39 (abhabbo parihānāya n. e. s. impossible to fail in the assurance of final release, of one "catuhi dhammehi samannāgato, viz. sīla, indriyaguttadvāratā, bhojanamattaððutā. jāgariyā"); III.331 (id. with appamādagaru: ever active & keen); II.40=It 40 (id. with appamāda-rato); Sn 822. - 2. Steps and Means to N.: nibbāna-sacchikiriyā, attainment of N., is mangalaṃ uttamaṃ & to be achieved by means of tapo, brahmacariyā and ariyasaccāna-dassanaṃ Sn 267. - brahmacariya (a saintly life) is n.-parāyanā (leading to N.) S III.189, cp. V.218; also called n.-ogadhā (with similar states of mind, as nibbidā, virāgo, vimutti) ibid.; A II.26=It 28, cp. It 29 (nibbān'-ogadha-gāminaṃ b°ṃ). The stages of sanctification are also discussed under the formula "nibbidā virāgo vimutti . . . vimuttasmiṃ vimuttaṃ iti ðāṇaṃ hoti: khīṇā jāti etc." (i. e. no more possibility of birth) S II.124=IV.86. dhamma: Buddha's teaching as the way to N.: "dhammavaraṃ adesayi n.-gāmiṃ paramaṃ hitāya" Sn 233; ahaṃ sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ desemi sattānaṃ visuddhiyā . . . n°assa sacchikiriyāya A V.194, cp. 141; pubbe dh.-ṭhiti-ðāṇaṃ pacchā nibbāne ðāṇan ti S II.124. - Pāli Text Society 827 Pāli-English Dictionary magga: Those practices of a moral & good life embraced in the 8 fold Noble Path (ariyamagga). Sace atthi akammena koci kvaci na jīyati nibbānassa hi so maggo S I.217; ekāyano ayaṃ maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā . . . N°assa sacchikiriyāya D II.290; S V.167, 185; bhāvayitvā sucimaggaṃ n° -ogadha-gāminaṃ . . . Vbh 426; ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye, pariyosānamhi nibbānaṃ . . . DA I.176. - N.-gamanaṃ maggaṃ: tattha me nirato mano "my heart rejoices in the path to Nibbāna" S I.186; N.-gāminī paṭipadā A IV.83 (the path to salvation). Cp. §§ 4 & 7. - 3. The Search for N. or the goal of earnest endeavour. ārogya-paramā lābhā nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ, aṭṭhangiko ca maggānaṃ khemaṃ amatagāminaṃ "N. is a higher bliss than acquisition of perfect health, the eightfold Path (alone) of all leads to perfect peace, to ambrosia" M I.508, cp. Dh 204 ("the fullest gain is for health etc.; N. is the highest happiness" DhA III.267). Similarly: khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā, n°ṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā D II.49=Dh 184; n°ṃ paramaṃ sukhaṃ: Dh 204=Sn 257=J III.195; id.: Dh 203; jhānaṃ upasampajja . . . okkamanāya n.°assa A IV.111 sq.; cp. 230 sq.; kaṭuviyakato bhikkhu . . . ārakā hoti N°ā A I.281; n°ṃ ajjhagamuṃ sapaððā S I.22; devalokað ca te yanti . . . anupubbena n°ṃ adhigacchanti paṇḍitā A I.162; n°ṃ abhikankhati S I.198; abhipassati A I.147; tiṇṇakathankatho visallo n.-ābhirato Sn 86; bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ . . . paṇītādhimutto hoti ṇ-ābhirato ca A III.435; n.-ābhirato . . . sabbadukkhā pamuccati S I.38; n.-ogadhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ vussati n.-parāyaṇaṃ n.-pariyosānaṃ S III.189=V.218; n°ṃ gavesanto carāmi (Bodhisat, J I.61). All means of conduct & all ideals of reason & intellect lead to one end only: Nibbāna. This is frequently expressed by var. similes in the phrase n.-ninna, °poṇa, °pabbhāra, e. g. S V.75=134=137=190; V.244; A V.75, 134, 190, 244= 291; Vv 8442. Saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ n.- pattiyā sussūsā labhate paððaṃ appamatto S I.214= Sn 186, cp. S I.48; Gotamo n.-paṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya bhikkhū sandasseti S I.214=192=210; Ud 80; n°ṃ pariyesati A II.247; n.-pariyosānā sabbe dhammā A V.107; n.-poṇaṃ me mānasaṃ bhavissati, saṃyojanā pahāṇaṃ gacchanti A III.443; odhunitvā malaṃ sabbaṃ patvā n.-sampadaṃ muccati sabba-dukkhehi: sā hoti sabbasampadā A IV.239; nibbijjha sabbaso kāme sikkhe n°ṃ attano Sn 940, cp. 1061. - 4. Some Epithets of Nibbāna: akutobhayaṃ A II.24=It 122; accutaṃ padaṃ (careyya āditta-sīso va patthayaṃ a. p.) S III.143; Sn 1086; pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ yattha gantvā na socare Vv 514; amataṃ A II.247; M III.224 (Bhagavā atthassa ninnetā a °assa dātā); Miln 319; Vv 6427 (apāpuranto a °assa dvāraṃ); VvA 85 (a-rasa); Vv 5020 (amatogadha magga=nibb°-gāminī paṭipadā); amosadhammaṃ Sn 758; khemaṃ appaṭibhayaṃ S IV.175; S I.189=Sn 454; Th 2, 350 (°ṭṭhāne vimuttā te patta te acalaṃ sukhaṃ); M I.508 (+amatagāminaṃ); A II.247 (yogakkhemaṃ anuttaraṃ); same at A III.294; It 27; Dh 23. - taṇhakkhaya Vv 735; ṭhānaṃ dud- dasaṃ S I.136 (=sabba-sankhāra-samatho); dhuvaṃ (q. v.); niccaṃ Kvu 121; nekkhammaṃ A I.147 (°ṃ daṭṭhu khemato . . . nibbānaṃ abhipassanto); Vv 8442. sabba-gantha-pamocanaṃ (deliverance from all ties) S I.210; II.278 (sabbadukkha°); It 222=A II.24; yathābhūtaṃ vacanaṃ S IV.195; yathāsukhaṃ (the Auspicious) A IV.415 sq.; (chanda-) rāga vinodanaṃ Sn 1086; rāgakkhayo (dosa°, moha°) S V.8; rāgavinayo (dosa°, moha°) ibid., santi (calm, peace) Vv 5021=Sn 204 (chandarāga-viratto bhikkhu paððāṇavā ajjhagā amataṃ santiṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ); VvA 219 (=acala); santimaggaṃ eva brūhaya n°ṃ Sugatena desitaṃ Dh 285=Nett 36; sandiṭṭhikaṃ akālikaṃ etc.; A I.158; samo bhūmibhāgo ramaṇīyo S III.109; sassataṃ Kvu 34; suvatthi Sn 235. - 5. N. is realisable in this world, i. e. in this life if it is mature (diṭṭhe va dhamme): S II.18=115=III.163=IV.141 (diṭṭha-dhnpatta); M II.228; A IV.353=358, cp. 454. - 6. Definitions with regard to the destruction of the causes or substrata of life (cp. above I.): taṇhāya vippahānena n°ṃ iti vuccati S I.39=Sn 1109; as sabba-sankhārasamatho (calming down of all vital elements) Vin I.5; S I.136; A II.118=III.164; IV.423; V.8, 110, 320, 354; akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ etaṃ dīpaṃ anāparaṃ n°ṃ iti nam brūmi jarāmaccu-parikkhayaṃ Sn 1094; bhavanirodho n°ṃ ti S II.117; A V.9; rāga-kkhayo (dosa°, moha°) S IV.251=261; virāgo nirodho n°ṃ in typical & very freq. exposition at Nd2=S Pāli Text Society 828 Pāli-English Dictionary I.136≈. See also vana & cp. the foll.: taṇhā-sankhāta-vānābhāvato n°ṃ SnA 253; nikkhantaṃ vānato ti n°ṃ KhA 151; kilesa-n° ass'āpi anupādā parinibbānass'āpi santike yeva DhA I.286 (on Dh 32). - 7. N. as perfect wisdom and what is conducive to such a state (saṃvattati). The foll. phrase is one of the oldest stereotype phrases in the Canon & very freq.; it is used of all the highest means & attainments of conduct & meditation & may be said to mark the goal of perfect understanding & a perfect philosophy of life. It is given in 2 variations, viz. in a simple form as "upasamāya abhiððāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati," with ref. to majjhimā paṭipadā at Vin I.10=S IV.331=V.421; of satta bojjhangā at S V.80; and in a fuller form as "ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya upasamāya etc. as above" at D I.189 (negative); II.251 (of brahmacariyaṃ), 285; III.130 (sukhallikānuyogā, neg.) 136 (avyākataṃ, neg.); S II.223 (brahmacariya); V.82 (satta bojjhangā), 179 (satipaṭṭhānā), 255 (iddhipādā), 361 (ariyamagga), 438 A III.83, 326 sq.; etc. - Cp. n-saṃvattanika S V.97 (upekhāsambojjhanga); Nd2 281 (neg. of tamo). - 8. N. as the opposite of rāga (passion, lust). Freq. is the combn of virāga nirodha nibbāna, almost used as three synonyms, thus at S II.18; Vin III.20=111; A II.118=III.164=IV.423=V.8=Nd2 under Nibbāna; A II.34=It 88 (dhammānaṃ aggaṃ akkhāyati, madanimmadano pipāsa-vinayo ālaya-samugghāto vaṭṭûpacchedo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodha nibbānaṃ), cp. Vin III.20≈. Similarly S I.192 (Sugataṃ payirupāsati desentaṃ virajaṃ dhammaṃ nibbānaṃ akutobhayaṃ). - 9. Various Characterisations & Similes (cp. above II. A 4 & 5). sukkābhijātiko samāno akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ n°ṃ abhijayati D III.251; A III.384 sq.; aniccā sabbe sankhārā dukkhā 'nattā ca sankhātā: nibbānað c'eva paððatti anattā iti nicchayā Vin V.86. On anicca & anattā in rel. to N. see also S IV.133 sq.; A IV.353; dukkhato & sukhato n°ṃ samanupassati A III.442. On comparison with a lamp see e. g. S I.159=D II.157= Th 1, 906 (pajjotass'eva nibbānaṃ vimokkho cetaso ahū), A IV.3 (pajjotass'eva n. vimokkho hoti cetaso); Sn 235 (. . . te khīṇabījā avirūḷhichandā nibbanti dhīrā yathāyaṃ padīpo). -abhirata fond of N. (cp. III. 3) S I.38; A III.435; Sn 86 (visalla+); -ogadha merging into N. (of brahmacariya) S III.189; V.218; A II.26=It 28; Vbh 426, cp. amatogadha A V.107; -gamana (magga; cp. III. 2) leading to N. D II.223; S I.186, 217; A IV.83; (dhamma:) S V.11; Sn 233; -dhātu the sphere or realm of N. always in phrase anupādisesāsaya n.-dhātuyā parinibbāyate Vin II.239; D III.135; It 38, 121; Ps I.101; cp. rāgavinayo n.-dhātuyā adhivacanaṃ S V.8. See parinibbāyin; -ninna (+°poṇa, °pabbhāra; cp. III. 3) converging into N. A III.443; Vv 8442 & passim; -paṭisaññuta (dhammikathā; cp. III. 2) relating or referring to N. S I.114=192=210; Ud 80; -patta having attained N. (diṭṭha-dhamma°, see above III. 5) S II.18=114= III.163; -patti attainment of N. S I.48, 214=Sn 186; -pada=Nibbāna (see pada 3) Sn 204. -pariyosāna ending in N. having its final goal in N. S III.189; V.218; A V.107; -saṃvattanika conducive to N.; contributing toward the attainment of N. S V.97; Nd2 281 (a°); cp. above III. 7; -sacchikiriyā realisation of N. (identical with ðāṇa and constituting the highest ideal; cp. above III. 2) Sn 267. Cp. also D II.290; S V.167; A III.423; V.141; -saððā perception of N. A III.443; -sampatti successful attainment of N. Kh VIII.13; -sampadā the blessing of the attainment of N. A IV.239. Nibbāpana {Nibbapana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. nibbāpeti] means of extinguishing, extinction, quenching S I.188 (cittaṃ pariḍayhati: nibbāpanaṃ brūhi=allayment of the glow); A IV.320 (celassa n°āya chandaṃ karoti: try to put out the burning cloth); Miln 302 (jhāyamāno n°ṃ alabhamāno), 318 (pariḷāha°). Nibbāpita {Nibbapita} (=nicchuddha). (adj.) [pp. of nibbāpeti] extinguished, put out, quenched J III.99 Pāli Text Society 829 Pāli-English Dictionary Nibbāpeti {Nibbapeti} [Sk. ni(r)vārayati, Caus. of ni(r)varati, influenced in meaning by nirvāpayati. Caus. of nirvāti= make cool by blowing (e. g. RV X.1613). See nibbuta on etym.] 1. to extinguish, put out, quench S I.188 (mahārāgaṃ); It 93 (rāg-aggiṃ; & nibbāpetvā aggiṃ nipakā parinibbanti); cp. aggiṃ nijjāleti J VI.495; Pv I.85 (vārinā viya osiðcaṃ sabbaṃ daraṃ nibbāpaye); Miln 304 (aggikhandhaṃ mahāmegho abhippavassitvā n.), 318 (nibbāpehi me hadaya-pariḷāhaṃ), 410 (megho uṇhaṃ n.); DhA II.241 (fire); Sdhp 552 (bhavadukkh' aggiṃ). 2. to cleanse, purify (cittaṃ, one's heart) Vism 305. - pp. nibbāpita. See also nibbāpana. Nibbāyati {Nibbayati} [Sk. ni-(or nir-)vriyate, Pass. of ni(r)varati, influenced by nirvāyati intrs. to cease to blow; see on etym. & Pāli derivation nibbuta] 1. to be cooled or refreshed, to be covered up=to be extinguished, go out (of fire), to cease to exist, always used with ref. to fire or heat or (fig.) burning sensations (see nibbāna II. A end): aggikkhandho purimassa ca upādānassa puriyādānā aððassa ca anupāhārā anāhāro nibbāyeyya S II.85 (opp. jāleyya); do. of telaṃ & vaṭṭiṃ paṭicca telappadīpo n. S II.86=III.126=IV.213=V.319; sace te purato so aggi nibbāyeyya jāneyyāsi tvaṃ: ayaṃ . . . aggi nibbuto M I.487; A IV.70 (papaṭikā n.); aggi udake tiṇukkā viya n. J I.212; mātuhadayaṃ n. J I.61; aggi upādāna-sankhayā n. Miln 304. - aor. nibbāyi [Sk. niravāri] J I.27 (mano n.: was refreshed) 212 (aggi udake n.: was extinguished); VI.349 (cooled down). - 2. to go out (of light) Vism 430 (dīpā nibbāyiṃsu the lights went out); ThA 154 (dīpacci n. nirāsanā: went out). See also parinibbāyati & cp. nibbuta, nibbāpeti, nibbāpana. Nibbāyin {Nibbayin} see pari°. Nibbāhana {Nibbahana} (adj.-n.) [fr. nibbāheti] leading out, removing, saving; (nt.) removal, clearance, refuge, way out Miln 119, 198, 295, 309, 326 (°magga). [Miln. the only references!] Nibbāhati {Nibbahati} [nis+vahati] to lead out, carry out, save from, remove Miln 188. - 2nd Caus. nibbāhāpeti to have brought out, to unload (a waggon) Vin II.159 (hiraððaṃ); III.43. See also nibbāhana & nibbuyhati. Nibbikappa {Nibbikappa} [nis+vikappa] distinction, distinguishing Vism 193. Nibbikāra {Nibbikara} (adj.) [nis+vikāra] steady, unchanged, steadfast; persevering J I.66; PvA 178, 253 (+nicca); SnA 189, 497; Vism 311. Nibbicikicchā {Nibbicikiccha} (f.) [nis+vicikicchā] surety, reliance, trust S II.84; V.221 (=nikkankhā); VvA 85 (=ekaṃsikā). Nibbijjhati {Nibbijjhati} [nis+vijjhati, vyadh] to pierce, transfix, wound S V.88 (+padāleti); Sdhp 153 (patodehi). ger. nibbijjha Sn 940 (=paṭivijjhitvā Nd1 420). - pp. nibbiddha. Cp. abhi°. Nibbiṭṭha {Nibbittha} (pp.) [nis+viṭṭha, of nibbisati] gained, earned Vin IV.265; Sn 25; SnA 38. Nibbiṇṇa {Nibbinna} (adj.) [Sk. nirviṇṇa, pp. of nibbindati] tired of, disgusted with (c. instr. or loc.), wearied of, dissatisfied with, "fed up" J I.347; VI.62; Th 2, 478 (=viratta ThA 286); DhA I.85 (°hadaya); VvA 207 (°rūpa); PvA 159 (tattha-vāsena n-mānaso tired of living there), 272 (°rūpa), 283 (°rūpa, tired of: purohite). Pāli Text Society 830 Pāli-English Dictionary Nibbidā {Nibbida} (f.) [Sk. nirvid, f. (also BSk. e. g. Lal. V. 300) & nirveda; to nibbindati] weariness, disgust with worldly life, tedium, aversion, indifference, disenchantment. N. is of the preliminary & conditional states for the attainment of Nibbāna (see nibbāna II B 1) & occurs frequently together with virāga, vimutti & nibbāna in the formula: etaṃ ekanta-nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāya . . . sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati "this leads to being thoroughly tired (of the world), to dispassionateness, to destruction (of egoism), to perfect wisdom, to Nibbāna," e. g. at D I.189; S V.82, 179, 255, 361; A III.83; IV.143; V.216. - In other connections: Vin I.15 (nibbidāya cittaṃ saṇṭhāsi); D III.130 sq.; S II.30; III.40; 179, 189; IV.86, 141 (read nibbidāya for nibbindāya?); A I.51, 64; III.19, 200, 325 sq.; IV.99, 336; V.2 sq., 311 sq.; J I.97; IV.471, 473; Sn 340; Ps I.195; II.43 sq.; Vbh 330; Nett 27, 29; Vism 650. Cp. abhi°. Nibbiddha {Nibbiddha} [pp. of nibbijjhati] 1. in phrase °pingala (with) disgustingly red (eyes) (perhaps=nibbiṇṇa?) J V.42 (of a giant). - 2. with ref. to a road: broken up, i. e. much frequented, busy street J VI.276 (of vīthi, bazaar, in contrast with a-nibbiddha-raccha carriage-road, which is not a thoroughfare. The reading patatthiyo at J VI.276, for which nibbiddha-vīthiyo is the C. expln is to be corrected into pathaddhiyo). Nibbindati {Nibbindati} [nis+vindati, vid2] to get wearied of (c. loc.); to have enough of, be satiated, turn away from, to be disgusted with. In two roots A. vind: prs. nibbindati etc. usually in combn with virajjati & vimuccati (cp. nibbāna III. 2). Vin I.35; S II.94; IV.86, 140; A V.3; Dh 277 sq.; It 33; J I.267; Miln 235, 244; Sdhp 612. ppr. nibbindaṃ S IV.86; PvA 36 (nibbinda-mānasa); ger. nibbindiya J V.121 (°kārin). - B. vid: Pot. nibbide (v. l. BB nibbije) J V.368 (=nibbindeyya Com.); ger. nibbijjitvā J I.82, & nibbijja Sn 448=S I.124 (nibbijjāpema=nibbijja pakkameyya SnA 393). - pp. nibbiṇṇa. See also nibbidā. Nibbiriya {Nibbiriya} (adj.) [nis+viriya] lacking in strength, indolent, slothful, weak J IV.131; PvA 175 (=alasa, kusīta]. Nibbivara {Nibbivara} (adj.) [nis+vivara] without holes or fissures, without omissions J V.429; VvA 275 (=atīva sangata). Nibbisa {Nibbisa} [to nibbisati] earnings, wages Th 1, 606=1003= Miln 45 (cp. Manu VI.45); SnA 38. Nibbisanka {Nibbisanka} (adj.) [nis+visanka, Sk. viśankā] fearless, not hesitating, undaunted SnA 61. Nibbisati {Nibbisati} [nis+visati] to enter into; to earn, gain, find, enjoy, only in pp. anibbisaṃ not finding Th 2, 159 (=avindanto ThA 142); J I.76=Dh 153. - pp. nibbiṭṭha. See also nibbisa. Nibbisaya {Nibbisaya} (adj.) [nis+visaya] having no residence, banished, driven from (-°) J II.401. Nibbisevana {Nibbisevana} (adj.) [nis+visevana] not self-indulgent, selfdenying, meek, tame, gentle J II.210 (dametvā nibbisevanaṃ katvā), 351; V.34, 381, 456; VI.255; DhA I.288 (cittaṃ ujuṃ akuṭilaṃ n. karoti), 295; VvA 284 (°bhava =jitindriya). Nibbisesa {Nibbisesa} (adj.) [nis+visesa] showing no difference, without distinction, equal, similar J II.32; VI.355; Miln 249. Pāli Text Society 831 Pāli-English Dictionary Nibbujjhati {Nibbujjhati} [ni+yujjhati, yudh. Pāli form difficult to explain: niy°=niyy°=nivv°=nibb°] to wrestle, to fight with fists Vin III.180. - pp. nibbuddha. Nibbuta {Nibbuta} (adj.) [Nibbuta represents Sk. nirvṛta (e. g. AvŚ I.48) as well as nivṛta, both pp. of vṛ, which in itself combines two meanings, as exhibited in cognate languages and in Sk. itself: (a) Idg. Ûer to cover, cover up (Lat. aperio=*apa-verio to cover up, Sk. varutram upper garment, "cover") and (b) *Ûel to resolve, roll, move (Lat. volvo=revolve; Gr. e(/lic, e)lu/w; Sk. vāṇa reed=Lat. ulva; Sk. ūrmi wave; P. valli creeper, valita wrinkled). *Ûer is represented in P. by e. g. vivarati to open, nivāreti to cover, obstruct, nīvaraṇa, nivāraṇa obstruction; *Ûel by āvuta, khandh-āvāra, parivāra, vyāvaṭa (busy with=moving about), samparivāreti. Thus we gain the two meanings combd and used promiscuously in the one word because of their semantic affinity: (a) *nivṛta covered up, extinguished, quenched, and (b) *nirvṛta without movement, with motion finished (cp. niṭṭhita), ceasing, exhaustion, both represented by P. nibbuta. - In derivations we have besides the rootform vṛ (=P. bbu°) that with guṇa vṝ (cp. Sk. vārayati, vrāyati) or vrā=P.* bbā° (with which also cp. paṭivāṇa=*prativāraṇa). The former is in nibbuti (ceasing, extinction, with meaning partly influenced by nibbuṭṭhi=Sk. nirvṛṣṭi pouring of water), the latter in instr. nibbāti and nibbāyati (to cease or to go out) and trs. nibbāpeti (Caus.: to make cease, to stop or cool) and further in nibbāna (nt. instr. abstr.) (the dying out)] (lit.) extinguished (of fire), cooled, quenched (fig.) desireless (often with nicchāta & sītibhūta), appeased, pleased, happy. - (a) (lit.) aggi anāhāro n. M I.487; Sn 19 (ginī n.=magga-salila-sekena n. SnA 28); J IV.391 (anibbute pāyāse); Miln 304 (aggikkhandha), 346 (mahāmeghena n°ṃ pathaviṃ); ThA 154 (anupādānā dīp'accī); KhA 194 (padīpo n.). - (b) (fig.) combd with sītibhūta (& nicchāta): Vin I.8; M I.341; A II.208 =D III.233=Pug 56, 61; A IV.410; V.65; Sn 593, 707; Pv I.87. - In phrase anupādāya nibbuta: S II.279; A I.162; IV.290=Dh 414=Sn 638. - In other connections: attadaṇḍesu n. sādānesu anādāno S I.236= Dh 406=Sn 630; aððāya nibbutā dhīrā S I.24; tadangan. S III.43; ejānugo anejassa nibbutassa anibbuto It 91; vītataṇho n. Sn 1041; tiṇṇa-sokapariddavo n. Dh 196; rāg'aggimhi n. & n. mātā, pitā, nārī J I.60; n. veyyākaraṇena Miln 347; upādānānaṃ abhāvena . . . kilesanibbānena n. DhA IV.194. - See also abhinibbuta and parinibbuta. Nibbuti {Nibbuti} (f.) [Sk. nirvṛti, abstr. to nibbuta] allayment, refreshment, cooling, peace, happiness J I.3 (khemaṃ pariyessāmi n°ṃ); Sn 228 (nikkāmino n°ṃ bhuðjamānā), 917, 933 (santī ti n°ṃ ðatvā); Nd1 399; Pv I.74 (n°ṃ n'ādhigacchāmi=quenching of hunger & thirst); KhA 185 (=paṭippassaddha-kilesa-daratha). Nibbuddha {Nibbuddha} [Sk. niyuddha, pp. of nibbujjhati] wrestling, fist-fight D I.6 (=mallayuddhaṃ DA I.85); DhsA 403. Nibbuyhati {Nibbuyhati} [Sk. niruhyate, nis+vuyhati, Pass. of vahati, cp. nibbāhati] to be led out to (c. acc.): susānaṃ Th 2, 468 (=upanīyati ThA 284); to be led out of=to be saved S I.1, cp. RV I.117, 14; VI.62, 6. Nibbusitattā {Nibbusitatta} (nibbusitattan?) [Sk. *nir-vasit-ātman or *nirvasitatvaṃ (nt. abstr.), to nis-vasati, cp. nirvāsana =nibbisaya] a dislocated or disconcerted mind, unrest, uneasiness D I.17. Nibbecikicchā {Nibbecikiccha} =nibbicikicchā certainty, doubtlessness Nd2 185 (opp. savicikicchā). Pāli Text Society 832 Pāli-English Dictionary Nibbejaniya {Nibbejaniya} at S I.124 should probably be read as nibbeṭhaniya (rejecting, evading). Nibbeṭhana {Nibbethana} (nt.) [Sk. nirveṣṭana, nis+veṭhana] unwinding, fig. explanation Miln 28. Nibbeṭhita {Nibbethita} [pp. of nibbeṭheti] explained, unravelled, made clear Miln 123 (su°). Nibbeṭheti {Nibbetheti} [Sk. nirveṣṭate, nis+veṭheti, to twist round] 1. to unravel, untwist, unwind; to explain, make clear D I.54 (nibbeṭhiyamāna, v. l. BB nibbedh°); Pv IV.329 (°ento=niveṭhīyamāna PvA 253 v. l. BB nibbedh°); Miln 3; Sdhp 153. - 2. to deny, reject Vin II.79; D I.3 (=apanetabba Com.); S III.12 (v. l. BB °dh°). - 3. to give an evasive answer Vin III.162. - See also nibbejaniya. - pp. nibbeṭhita, q. v. Nibbedha [nis+vedha, to vyadh] penetration, insight; adj.: penetrating, piercing, scrutinising, sharp. Freq. in phrase nibbedha-bhāgiya (sharing the quality of penetration), with ref. to samādhi, saððā etc. [cp. BSk. nirvedha° Divy 50; but also nirbheda° AvŚ II.181, of kusalamūlāni; expld as lobhakkhandhassa (etc.) nibbijjhanāni at Nett 274] D III.251, 277; A III.427; Vbh 330; Nett 21, 48, 143 sq., 153 sq.; Vism 15, 88; DhsA 162. - Also in nibbedha-gāminī (paððā) It 35; & dunnibbedha (hard to penetrate, difficult to solve Miln 155, 233 (paðha); spelt dunniveṭha at Miln 90). {Nibbedha} Nibbedhaka {Nibbedhaka} (adj.) [nis+vedhaka, to vyadh] piercing, sharp, penetrating, discriminating; only in f. nibbedhikā (cp. āvedhikā), appld to paððā (wisdom) D III.237, 268; S V.197, 199; M I.356; A I.45; II.167; III.152; 410 sq., 416; V.15; Ps II.201; Nd2 235, 3a (+tikkhapaððā), 415, 689; J II.9, 297; IV.267. Nibbematika {Nibbematika} (adj.) [nis+vimati+ka] not disagreeing, of one accord, unanimous Vin II.65; DhA I.34. Nibbhacceti {Nibbhacceti} [Sk. nirbhartsayati, nis+bhaccheti] to threaten, revile, scorn J III.338. Nibbhaya {Nibbhaya} (adj.) [nis+bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, unafraid J I.274; III.80; V.287; Vism 512. Nibbhujati {Nibbhujati} [Sk. ni- or nirbhujati, nis+bhujati] to twist round, bend, wind, contort oneself Miln 253. Cp. vi°. Nibbhoga {Nibbhoga} (adj.) [Sk. nirbhoga, nis+bhoga1] deprived of enjoyment; deserted, being of no avail, useless J VI.556; Pv I.12. Cp. vi°. Nibbhoga {Nibbhoga} [ni+bhoga2] bending, contortion J II.264 (oṭṭha°). Nibyaggha {Nibyaggha} see nivyaggha. Nibha {Nibha} (adj.) [Sk. nibha, to bhāti] shining; like, equal to, resembling (-°) J V.372; Vv 401; Pv IV.312; VvA 122 (vaṇṇa°=vaṇṇa); Nd2 608. Pāli Text Society 833 Pāli-English Dictionary Nibhatā {Nibhata} (f.) [abstr. to nibha] likeness, appearance VvA 27. Nibhā {Nibha} (f.) [to nibha] shine, lustre, splendour VvA 179 (nibhāti dippatī ti nibhā). Nibhāti {Nibhati} [ni+bhāti] to shine VvA 179 (=dippati). Nimajjhima {Nimajjhima} (adj.) the middle one J V.371. Nimantaka {Nimantaka} (adj.-n.) one who invites Miln 205. Nimantana {Nimantana} (nt.) [to nimanteti] invitation Vin I.58= II.175; D I.166; M I.77; A I.295; J I.116 (ṇ), 412; Pug 55. Nimantanika {Nimantanika} (adj.) inviting; (nt.) N. of a Suttanta M I.331; quoted at Vism 393. Nimantita {Nimantita} [pp. of nimanteti] invited Sn p. 104; PvA 22 (bhattena to the meal), 86 (=āmantita), 141. Nimanteti {Nimanteti} [Sk. nimantrayati, ni+manteti] to send a message, to call, summon, invite, coax (to=c. instr.) Sn 981 (nimantayi aor., āsanena asked him to sit down); J VI.365; Nd2 342; DhA III.171 (°ayiṃsu); DA I.169; VvA 47 (pānīyena invite to a drink); PvA 75, 95. - pp. nimantita, q. v. - Cp. abhi°. Nimitta {Nimitta} (nt.) [cp. Sk. nimitta, to mā, although etym. uncertain] 1. sign, omen, portent, prognostication D I.9 (study of omens=n. satthaṃ DA I.92, q. v. for detailed expln); J I.11 (caturo nimitte nāddasaṃ); Miln 79, 178. Esp. as pubba° signs preceding an event, portents, warnings, foreshadowings S V.154, 278, 442; It 76 (cp. Divy 193, of the waning of a god); J I.48, 50 (32 signs before birth, some at DA I.61), 59; Miln 298; Vism 577. - 2. outward appearance, mark, characteristic, attribute, phenomenon (opp. essence) D III.249; A I.256; III.319, 375 sq.; IV.33, 418 sq.; J I.420; Ps I.60, 91 sq., 164, 170; II.39, 64; Vbh 193 sq. - Mental reflex, image (with ref. to jhāna) Vism 123, cp. DhsA 167. - Specified e. g. as foll.: oḷārika S V.259; pasādaniya S V.156; paccavekkhana° D III.278; Vbh 334; bahiddhā-sankhārā° Ps I.66 sq.; bāla° (opp. paṇḍita°) M III.163; A I.102; mukha° (=face) D I.80; S III.103; V.121; A V.92, 97 sq., 103; rūpa°, sadda° etc. S III.10; M I.296; Ps I.92, 112; samatha° D III.213; samādhi° etc. A I.256 sq.; subha° (& asubha°) S V.64, 103 sq.; A I.3 sq., 87, 200; V.134; Vism 178 sq. nimittaṃ gaṇhāti to make something the object of a thought, to catch up a theme for reflection Vin I.183, cp. S V.150 sq. (°ṃ uggaṇhāti); M I.119 (=five sorts of mental images); Nd2 659; DhsA 53 (=ākāra). See below ngāhin & animitta.- nimittaṃ parivajjeti to discard the phenomenal S I.188; Sn 341. - 3. mark, aim: in nimittaṃ karoti to pick out the aim, to mark out J V.436; Nd2 235, 1d; Miln 418. - 4. sexual organ (cp. lakkhaṇa) Vin III.129 (n. & a°, as term of abuse); see also kāṭa & koṭacikā. - 5. ground, reason, condition, in nimittena (instr.) and nimittaṃ (acc.) as adv.=by means of, on account of DhA III.175 (instr.) PvA 8, 97 (jāti-nimittaṃ), 106 (kiṃ n°ṃ=kissa hetu), 242 (yaṃ n°ṃ=yato nidānaṃ). gahita-nimittena "by means of being caught" Vism 144=DhsA 116 (read trsln 154 accordingly!). adj. nimitta (-°) caused by, referring to PvA 64 (maraṇa-nimittaṃ rodanaṃ). - animitta free from marks or attributes, not contaminated by outward signs or appearance, undefiled, ụnaffected, unconditioned (opp. sa°) S I.188; IV.225 (phassa), 268, 360 (samādhi); M I.296 (cetovimutti); A I.82; III.292; IV.78; Vin III.129; Th 1, 92; D III.219, 249; Dh 834 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary 92; Sn 342; Ps I.60, 91; II.36, 59 sq. (vimokha), 65 sq., 99; Dhs 530 (read a° for appa°); Vism 236; DhsA 223 (absence of the 3 lakkhaṇas); Miln 333, 413; DhA II.172; ThA 50. See also Cpd. 199, 2115. sanimitta S V.213 sq.; A I.82. -ānusārin following outward signs (=°gāhin) A III.292; Nett 25; -kamma prognostication, prophecy Vin V.172; Vbh 353; -karaṇa=gāhin S IV.297; -gāhin "taking signs," enticed or led away by outward signs, entranced with the general appearance, sensuously attracted D I.70 (cp. Dialogues I.80); III.225; S IV.104, 168; A II.16; III.99; V.348; Pug 20, 24, 58; Dhs 1345; Miln 367, 403. Cp. Vism 151, 209. Nimināti {Niminati} [Sk. niminoti in diff. meaning, the P. meaning being influenced by mā; ni+mināti, mi to fix, measure cp. Sk. nimaya barter, change] to turn round, change; to barter, exchange for (c. instr.): pres. imper. niminā J V.343 (=parivattehi Com.); pres. 1st pl. nimimhase J II.369, pot. nimineyya J III.63; fut. nimissati J V.271, 453 (devatāhi nirayaṃ); aor. nimmini J III.63; ger. niminitvā Milo 279. Nimisa {Nimisa} [cp. Vedic nimiṣ f. & nimiṣa nt.] winking, shutting the eyes; animisa not winking Dāvs V.26. See also nimesa. Nimisatā {Nimisata} (f.) [abstr. to nimisati] winking J VI.336 (a°). Nimisati {Nimisati} [Sk. nimiṣati, ni+misati] to wink D II.20 (animisanto, not winking; v. l. BB animm°; J III.96 (ummisati+). Cp. nimisatā. Nimīlati & Nimmīlati [ni+mīlati] to shut, close (the eyes) J I.279; DhA II.6 (akkhīni nimmīlituṃ nāsakkhi). Caus. nim(m)īl-eti id. M I.120; DhA II.28 (paralokaṃ; opp. ummīleti); J I.279; Vism 292 (akkhīni ni°). {Nimilati} {Nimmilati} Nimugga {Nimugga} (adj.) [cp. Sk, nimagna, pp. of nimujjati] plunged, immersed in, sunk down or fallen into (-°) (c. loc.) Vin III.106 (gūthakūpe sasīsakaṃ n.); D I.75; J I.4; III.393 (gūthakalale), 415; Nd1 26; Pug 71; Miln 262; Sdhp 573. Nimugga {Nimugga} (adj.) [Sk. *nimajj-yā] diving, immersion, in cpd. ummujja-nimujja(ṃ karoti) D I.78. See ummujjā. Nimujjati {Nimujjati} [Sk. nimajjati, ni+mujjati] to sink down, plunge into (with loc.), dive in, be immersed A IV.11; Pug 74; J I.66, 70; III.163, 393 (kāmakalale); IV.139; aor. nimujji J II.293; PvA 47 (udake). - Caus. nimujjeti (so read for nimujjati J V.268) & nimujjāpeti to cause to sink or dive, to drown J-III.133; IV.142 (nāvaṃ). - pp. nimugga q. v. Nimujjana {Nimujjana} (nt.) [Sk. nimajjana] diving, ducking; bathing PvA 47. Nimesa {Nimesa} [=nimisa, cp. Vedic nimesa] winking Miln 194. Nimokkha {Nimokkha} =vimokkha S I.2 (v. l. SS vi°, preferable). Nimba {Nimba} [Sk. nimba, non-Aryan] the Nimb tree (Azadirachta Indica), bearing a bitter leaf, & noted for its hard wood Vin I.152 (°kosa), 284 (id.), 201 (°kasāva); A I.32; V.212; Vv 3336 (°muṭṭhi, a handful of N. leaves); J II.105, 106; DhA I.52 (°kosa); DhsA 320 (°paṇṇa, the leaf of Pāli Text Society 835 Pāli-English Dictionary the N. as example of tittaka, bitter taste); VvA 142 (°palāsa); PvA 220 (°rukkhassa daṇḍena katasūla). Nimmaṃsa {Nimmamsa} (adj.) [nis+maṃsa] fleshless M I.58, 364; PvA 68. Nimmakkha {Nimmakkha} (adj.) [nis+makkha, cp. Sk. nirmatsara] without egotism, not false, not slandering Sn 56 (cp. Nd2 356 makkha=niṭṭhuriya; see also SnA 108; paraguṇa-vināsanalakkhaṇo makkho). Nimmakkhika {Nimmakkhika} (adj.) [Sk. nirmakṣika] free from flies J I.262; DhA I.59. Nimmajjana {Nimmajjana} (Nimmiñjjana?) [*mṛd-yana? perhaps nonAryan] a kind of (oil-)cake Vv 3338 (nimmajjani=tilapiððāka VvA 147); Pv I.1010 (°miðjana, v. l. BB °majjani); PvA 47 (doṇi°). Nimmathana {Nimmathana} (nt.) [nis+mathana] crushing J III.252; Vism 234 (sattu°); DhA III.404; VvA 284. Nimmatheti {Nimmatheti} [nis+matheti] to crush out, suppress, destroy J I.340. Cp. abhimatthati. Nimmadana {Nimmadana} (nt.) [to nimmādeti] touching, touch, crushing, subduing A II.34 (madanimmadana, crushing out pride; may, however, be taken as nis+mada of mad= "de-priding," lit. disintoxication); Bu I.81; Vism 293. Nimmadaya {Nimmadaya} (adj.) [Sk. nirmṛdya, grd. of nimmadeti] suppressible D II.243. Nimmaddana {Nimmaddana} (nt.) [nis+mṛd] touching, crushing Miln 270 (na vāto hattha-gahaṇaṃ vā nimmaddanaṃ vā upeti: the wind cannot be grasped). Nimmanussa {Nimmanussa} (nt.) [nis+manussa+ya] void of men, absence of men J III.148. Nimmala {Nimmala} (adj.) [nis+mala] free from impurity, stainless, clean, pure A IV.340; Dh 243; Nd2 586; Vism 58; Sdhp 250. Nimmāta {Nimmata} -pitika (adj.) [nis+māta-pitika] one who has neither mother nor father, an orphan DhA II.72. Nimmātar {Nimmatar} [Sk. nirmātṛ, n. ag. of nimmināti] maker, builder, creator D I.18, 56 (in formula: brahmā . . . kattā nimmātā . . .). Nimmādeti [either=Sk. nirmṛdayati (mṛd) or *nirmādayati to nirmada. free from pride=nirmāna] to crush, subdue, humiliate; insult D I.92 (v. l. °maddeti;=DA I.257 nimmadati nimmāne karoti), 93, 96. {Nimmadeti} Nimmāna1 {Nimmana} (nt.) [Sk. nirmāṇa, see nimmināti] measuring; production, creation, work; issara-n-hetu caused by God M II.122; A I.173; Vbh 367. N.-ratī devā a class of devas, e. g. at D I.218; It 94; Vism 225; DA I.114; ThA 169; VvA 149. Cp. (para-) nimmita. Pāli Text Society 836 Pāli-English Dictionary Nimmāna2 {Nimmana} (adj.) [Sk. nirmāna, nis+māna] free from pride, humble DA I.257. Nimmāniyati {Nimmaniyati} [Pass. to nimmāna, of nis+māna] to be abased, to be mocked Vin II.183. Nimmita {Nimmita} (adj.-pp.) [pp. of nimmināti] measured out, planned, laid out; created (by supernatural power, iddhi); measured, stately D I.18, 56 (iddhiyā pi DA I.167), 219 (Su° devaputta. Np.), ibid. (Paranimmitavasavattī devā a class of devas, lit. "created by others," but also possessed of great power: VvA 79, 80); also one of the 5, or the 3 spheres (kāmûpapattiyo) in the kāmaloka, viz. paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā, nimmānarati° (or nimmita°), paranimmita°. It 94; Dhs 1280 (cp. kāma); D III.218; J I.59, 146 (kāyo n'eva deva° na brahma°), 232, Nd2 202A, also under pucchā; P II.119 (su°, well constructed, i. e. symmetrical); Vism 228 (Mārena nimmitaṃ Buddharūpaṃ); VvA 36 (=mitaṃ gacchati vāraṇo), 79; ThA 69, 70; Miln 1, 242. See also abhinimmita. Nimmināti {Nimminati} [cp. Sk. nirmimīti & nirmāti, nis+mināti, mā; cp. nimināti] to measure out, fashion, build, construct, form; make by miracle, create, compose; produce, lay out, plan, aor. nimmini J I.232; PvA 245; DhA IV.67; ger nimminitvā J I.32; VvA 80, & nimmāya Vv 163. - pp. nimmita See also nimmātar and nimmāna. Cp. abhi°. Nimmīleti {Nimmileti} see nimīlati. Nimmūla {Nimmula} (adj.) [nis+mūla] without root, rootless J VI.177. Nimmoka {Nimmoka} [Sk. nirmoka fr. nis+moceti] the slough or castoff skin of a snake PvA 63. Niya {Niya} (adj.) [Sk. nija, q. v.] one's own Sn 149 (°putta= orasaputta KhA 248); niyassakamma at A I.99 & Pv IV.113 (v. l. Minayeff tiyassa) is to be read as nissayakamma (q. v.). Niyaka {Niyaka} (adj.) [=niya] one's own Th 2, 469; ThA 284; DhsA 169, 337; DA I.183; Vbh 2; Vism 349. Niyata {Niyata} (adj.) [pp. of ni+yam] restrained, bound to, constrained to, sure (as to the future), fixed (in its consequences), certain, assured, necessary D II.92 (sambodhiparāyanā), 155; III.107; Sn 70 (=ariyamaggena niyāmappatta SnA 124, cp. Nd2 357); Dh 142 (=catumagganiyamena n. DhA III.83); J I.44 (bodhiyā); Pug 13, 16, 63; Kvu 609 sq.; Dhs 1028 sq. (micchatta° etc.; cp. Dhs. trsl. 266, 267), 1414, 1595; Vbh 17, 24, 63, 319, 324; Miln 193; Tikp 168 (°micchādiṭṭhi); DhA III.170; PvA 211. Discussed in Pts. of Contr. (see Index). - aniyata see separately. Niyati {Niyati} (f.) [cp. Sk. niyati, ni+yam] necessity, fate, destiny D I.53; DA I.161; VvA 341; PvA 254. Niyama {Niyama} [cp. Sk. niyama, ni+yam; often confused with niyāma] 1. restraint, constraint, training, self-control Miln 116 (yama+); PvA 98 (yama+). - 2. definiteness, certainty, limitation DhA III.83 (catumagga°, v. l. niyāma); SnA 124 (niyāma); DhsA 154; PvA 166 (ayaṃ n. saṃsāren'atthi: law, necessity). - aniyama indefiniteness, choice, generality DhsA 57; VvA 16 (yaṃ kiðci=aniyame, i. e. in a general sense), 17 (same of ye keci); PvA 175 (vā saddo Pāli Text Society 837 Pāli-English Dictionary aniyamattho=indefinite). - niyamena (instr.) adv. by necessity, necessarily PvA 287; niyamato (abl.) id. DhsA 145, 304 (so read). - 3. natural law, cosmic order; in Commentarial literature this was fivefold: utu-, bīja-, kamma-, ćitta-, dhammaDA on D II.11; Dial. II.8; DhsA 272; trs. 360. Niyamana {Niyamana} (nt.) [Sk. niyamana, to niyameti] fixing, settling, definition, explanation in detail Miln 352 (lakkha-n° aiming at the target); VvA 22 (visesattha°); 231, PvA 255 (so read for nigamana?). Niyameti [cp. Sk. niyamayati, ni+yamati] to tie down, to fix; explain in detail, exemplify PvA 265; Vism 666. - pp. niyamita see a°. {Niyameti} Niyāteti {Niyateti} see niyyādeti. Niyāma {Niyama} [Sk. niyama & niyāma] way, way to an end or aim, esp. to salvation, right way (sammatta°); method, manner, practice S I.196; III.225 (sammatta°); A I.122; Sn 371 (°dassin=sammatta-niyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvin SnA 365); Nd1 314 (°avakkanti); Nd2 358 (=cattāro maggā); Ps II.236 sq. (sammatta° okkamati); Pug 13, 15; Vbh 342. - niyāmena (instr.) adv. in this way, by way of, according to J I.278; IV.139, 414 (suta° as he had heard); DhA I.79; II.9, 21; VvA 4; PvA 260; Kvu trs. 383. - aniyāmena (see also aniyāmena) without order, aimlessly, at random J V.337. Niyāmaka1 {Niyamaka} (adj.) [either to niyama or niyāma] sure of or in, founded in, or leading to, completed in D I.190 (dhamma-n. paṭipadā, cp. niyamatā). Niyāmaka2 {Niyamaka} (see niyyāmaka) ship's captain Vism 137 (simile). Niyāmatā {Niyamata} (f.) [abstr. to niyāma, influenced in meaning by niyama] state of being settled, certainty, reliance, surety, being fixed in (-°) S II.25 (dhamma°+dhammaṭṭhitatā); A I.286 (id.), J I.113 (saddhammassa n. assurance of . . .); Kvu 586 (accanta° final assurance). Niyāmeti {Niyameti} [Denom. fr. niyāma or niyama] to restrain, control, govern, guide Miln 378 (nāvaṃ). Niyujjati {Niyujjati} [Pass. of niyuñjati] to be fit for, to be adapted to, to succeed, result, ensue PvA 49 (=upakappati). (adj.) [pp. of niyuñjati] tied to, appointed to (with loc.), commissioned, ordered DhsA 47; PvA 20 (janapade), 124 (dānādhikāre), 127 (dāne). Niyoga {Niyoga} [ni+yoga] command, order; necessity. abl. niyogā "strictly speaking" Dhs 1417. Niyojeti {Niyojeti} [Caus. of niyuñjati] to urge, incite to (with loc.) Vin II.303; A IV.32; Pv II.14; Miln 229. (Pass. of nayati). Niyyatta {Niyyatta} (nt.) [cp. Sk. niryaṇa] escape J I.215. Niyyāta {Niyyata} (pp.)=niyyādita M I.360. Pāli Text Society 838 Pāli-English Dictionary Niyyātana {Niyyatana} (nt.) [fr. niyyāti] returning, return to (-°) J V.497 (saka-raṭṭha°); Vism 556; DA I.234. Niyyātar {Niyyatar} [n. ag. to niyyāma] a guide, leader M I.523 sq. Niyyāti {Niyyati} [Sk. niryāti, nis+yāti] to go out, get out (esp. of saṃsāra); S V.6 (niyyanti dhīrā lokamhā); SnA 212; aor. niyyāsi D I.49, 108; J I.263; Sn 417; 3rd pl. niyyiṃsu A V.195; fut. niyyassati A V.194. - See also niyyāna & niyyānika. Niyyādita {Niyyadita} [pp. of niyyādeti] assigned, presented, given, dedicated PvA 196 (dhana nī°). As niyyātita at Vism 115. Niyyādeti {Niyyadeti} (niyyāteti, nīyādeti) [cp. Sk. ni- or nir-yātayati, Caus. of ni(r)yatati] to give (back), give into charge, give over, assign, dedicate, to present, denote S I.131 (niyyātayāmi); IV.181 (sāmikānaṃ gāvo), 194; J I.30, 66, 496; II.106, 133; Vv 468 niyyādesi=sampaṭicchāpesi, adāsi VvA 199); Pv III.211 (niyātayiṃsu=adaṃsu PvA 184); Vism 115 (t); DhA I.70; II.87; VvA 33, 67; PvA 20 (vihāraṃ nīyādetvā), 25 (=uddissati dadāti), 42, 81, 276 (at all PvA passages as nī°). pp. niyyādita. Cp. similarly paṭiyādeti & paṭiyādita. Niyyāna {Niyyana} (nt.) [nis+yāna, cp. niyyāti] 1. going out, departure D I.9 (=niggamana DA I.94). 2. way out, release, deliverance Sn 170, 172 ("magga-saccaṃ bhāvento lokamhā niyyāti" SnA 212); Ps I.163, 176; Nett 119. Cp. niyyānika. - aniyyāna DhA II.209. Niyyānika {Niyyanika} (adj.) [to niyyāna] leading out (of saṃsāra), leading to salvation, salutary, sanctifying, saving, profitable D I.235, 237; S I.220; V.82, 166, 255, 379 sq.; J I.48 (a°), 106; Dhs 277, 339, 505 (cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. 82, 335); Vbh 12, 19, 56, 319, 324; Nett 29, 31, 63, 83; DhA IV.87. Also found in spelling nīyānika e. g. A III.132 (ariyā diṭṭhi n. nīyāti takkarassa sammādukkhakhayāya); DA I.89 (anīyānikattā tiracchanabhūtā kathā). Niyyāma & Niyyāmaka {Niyyama} {Niyyamaka} [Sk. niyāmaka & niryāma(ka). Cp. also P. niyāmaka] a pilot, helmsman, master mariner, guide J I.107 (thala°); IV.137, 138; Miln 194, 378 sq.; Dāvs IV.42. Niyyāsa {Niyyasa} [cp. Sk. niryāsa, Halāyudha 5, 75] any exudation (of plants or trees), as gum, resin, juice, etc. Vism 74 (°rukkha, one of the 8 kinds of trees), 360 (paggharitan.-rukkha). Cp. nivāyāsa. Niyyūha {Niyyuha} [Sk. niryūha (& nirvyūha?), perhaps to vah] a pinnacle, turret, gate M I.253; DA I.284 (pāsāda+). Nirankaroti & Nirākaroti {Nirankaroti} {Nirakaroti} [Sk. nirākaroti, nis+ā kṛ] to think little of, despise, neglect, disregard, repudiate; throw away, ruin, destroy Th 1, 478; It 83 (nirākare); J III.280=V.498; IV.302; Pv III.96 (=chaḍḍeti pajahati PvA 211); VvA 109. - pp. (a)nirākata It 39. Niraggala {Niraggala} (niraggaḷa) (adj.) [nis+aggala] unobstructed, free, rich in result S I.76=It 21; A II.43; IV.151; M I.139; Sn 303; Nd2 284 Ca; Vv 6431 (=VvA 285). Pāli Text Society 839 Pāli-English Dictionary Niraggika {Niraggika} (adj.) [nis+aggi+ka] without fire Miln 324 (°okāsa). Nirajjati {Nirajjati} [Pass. of nirajati, nis+ajati, Vedic nirajati to drive out cattle] to be thrown out, to be expelled, to lose (with abl.) J VI.502, 503 (raṭṭhā); v. l. BB nirajhati; Com. ni(g)gacchati; Th 2, 93 (aor. nirajji 'haṃ=na jānim ahaṃ ThA, 90. Kern (wrongly) proposes reading virajjhi). Nirata (adj.) [pp. of niramati] fond of, attached to (-°) S I.133; DA I.250; PvA 5 (duccarita°), 89, 161 (hitakaraṇa°). {Nirata} Niratta1 (adj.-nt.) [Sk. *nirātman, nis+attan] soulless; view of soullessness or unsubstantiality; thus interpreted (in preference to niratta2) by Com. on Sn 787, 858, 919. See foll. {Niratta} Niratta2 {Niratta} (adj.) [Sk. nirasta, pp. of nirasyati, see nirassati] rejected, thrown off, given up Sn 1098; Nd2 359. - Note. At Sn 787, 858, 919 the interpretation of Nd1 82= 248=352 and also Bdhgh assume a cpd. of nis+attan (=nirātman): see niratta1. Nirattha (adj.) [nis+attha] useless, groundless, unproficient, vain (opp. sāttha profitable) Sn 582 (nt. as adv.), 585 (niratthā paridevanā); Dh 41; J III.26; PvA 18 (°bhāva uselessness), 83 (=duḥ). {Nirattha} Niratthaka {Niratthaka} (adj.)=nirattha; VvA 324; PvA 18, 40, 63, 102 etc. - f. °ikā ThA 258; Miln 20; Sdhp 68. Nirantara {Nirantara} (adj.) [nis+antara] having no interval, continuous, uninterrupted PvA 135. Usually in nt. as adv. nirantaraṃ always, incessantly, constantly; immediately, at once DhsA 168; PvA 52, 80, 107, 110 (=satataṃ), 120; DhA I.13. Niraparādha {Niraparadha} (adj.) [nis+aparādha] without offence, guiltless, innocent J I.264. Nirapekkha {Nirapekkha} (adj.) [nis+apa+īkṣ] not heeding, unsuspecting, disregarding, indifferent, reckless VvA 27, 47 (jīvitaṃ); PvA 62; DA I.177; Miln 343 (jīvitaṃ). Nirabbuda1 {Nirabbuda} (m. nt.) [cp. BSk. nirarbuda & abbuda 3] a vast number; also N. of a hell S I.149=A II.3=V.171 (expld at 173 as "seyyathā pi vīsati abbudā nirayā evam eko nirabbudo nirayo"); J III.360 (Com.: vīsati abbudāni ekaṃ nirabbudaṃ). Nirabbuda2 {Nirabbuda} (adj.) [nis+abbuda2] free from boils or tumours, healthy (also fig.) Vin III.18 (of the Sangha). Niraya {Niraya} [BSk. niraya, nis+aya of i=to go asunder, to go to destruction, to die, cp. in meaning Vedic nirṛti. The popular etym. given by Dhammapāla at PvA 53 is "n'atthi ettha ayo sukhan ti"=there is no good; that given by Bdhgh at Vism 427 "n'atthi ettha assādasaððito ayo" (no refreshment)] purgatory, hell, a place of punishment & torture, where sin is atoned (i. e. kamma ripens=paccati, is literally boiled) by terrible ordeals (kāraṇāni) similar to & partly identical with those of Hades & Tartarus. There are a great number of hells, of which the most fearful is the Avīcimahāniraya (see Avīci). Names of other purgatories occur Pāli Text Society 840 Pāli-English Dictionary frequently in the Jātaka collection, e. g. Kākola VI.247; Khuradhāra V.269 sq.; Dhūma-roruva V.271; Patāpana V.266, 271, 453; Paduma IV.245; Roruva III.299; V.266; VI.237; Sanghāta V.266; Saðjīva ibid.; Sataporisa V.269; Sattisūla V.143. As the principal one n. is often mentioned with the other apāyas (states of suffering), viz. tiracchānayoni (animal world) & pittivisaya (the manes), e. g. at Nd1 489; Nd2 517, 550; Pv IV.11; ThA 282; PvA 27 sq. (see apāya). - There is a great variety of qualifying adjectives connected with niraya, all of which abound in notions of fearful pain, awful misery & continuous suffering, e. g. kaṭuka, ghora, dāruṇa, bhayānaka, mahābhitāpa, sattussada etc. - Descriptions of N. in glowing terms of frightfulness are freq. found from the earliest books down to the late Peta-Vatthu, Pañcagati-dīpana & Saddhammopāyana. Of these the foll. may be quoted as characteristic: S Q.152 (10 nirayas); M III.183; A I.141; Sn p. 126=A V.173; Nd1 404 sq.=Nd2 304III.c; J IV.4 (Mittavindaka); Vv 52 (Revatī); Pv I.10; III.10; IV.1; 7; DhA I.148. - See on the whole subject, esp. L. Scherman, Materialen zur indischen Visionsliteratur, Leipzig 1792; & W. Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914, pp. 33-39. - References: Vin I.227 (apāya duggati vinipāta niraya); D I.82, 107 (id.); Vin II.198 (yo kho sanghaṃ bhindati kappaṃ nirayamhi paccati), 204; II.203=It 86; D I.228 (+tiracchānayoni), 54 (read nirayasate for niriyasate); III.111; S IV.126; V.356, 450; M I.73, 285, 308, 334; II.86, 149, 186; III.166, 203, 209; A IV.405; V.76, 182, 184; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirā), 333, 660 sq., 677 sq.; Dh 126, 140, 306, 311, 315; Th 1, 304 (adhammo nirayaṃ neti dhammo pāpeti suggatiṃ)=DhsA 38=DA I.99 =DhA I.22; Th 2, 456; It 12; J IV.463; Pug 60; Ps I.83 (Avīci°); Vbh 86, 337; Vism 102; Miln 148; DhA I.22; III.71; Sdhp 7, 285. - See also nerayika. -gāmin (adj.) leading to purgatory (magga) Sn 277; -dukkha the pain of H. Sn 531; -pāla a guardian of P., a devil A I.138, 141; M III.179; Nd1 404; VvA 226. Names of guardians (after their complexion) e. g. Kāḷa (black) & Upakāḷa (blackish) J VI.248. -bhaya the fear of P. J I.168; Vism 392; -saṃvattanika conducive to P. Nd1 489. Niravasesa {Niravasesa} (adj.) [nis+avasesa] without remainder, complete, inclusive Nett 14, 15, cp. Miln 91, 182. Nirasana {Nirasana} (adj.) [nis+asana2] without food or subsistence, poor J IV.128. Nirassati {Nirassati} [cp. Sk. nirasyati, nis+assati, as to throw] to throw off, despise, neglect Sn 785, 954; Nd1 76 (so read for nidassati, v. l. SS nir°), 444; SnA 522. - pp. niratta2. Nirassāda {Nirassada} (adj.) [nis+assāda] without taste, insipid, dull Vism 135. Cp. nirāsāda. Nirākaroti {Nirakaroti} see nirankaroti. Nirākula {Nirakula} (adj.) [nis+ākula] unconfused, clear, calm, undisturbed J I.17 (v. 94). Nirātanka {Niratanka} (adj.) [nis+ātanka] healthy Miln 251 (of paddy). Nirādīnava {Niradinava} (adj.) [nis+ādīnava] not beset with dangers, not in danger, unimperilled Vin III.19. Nirāma {Nirama} (adj.) [nis+āma, cp. nirāmaya] healthy, undepraved, without sin, virtuous Sn 251, 252 (°gandha= nikkilesayoga SnA 293), 717 (id.=nikkilesa SnA 499). 841 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Nirāmaya {Niramaya} (adj.) [nis+āmaya] not ill, healthy, good, without fault PvA 164. Nirāmisa {Niramisa} (adj.) [nis+āmisa] having no meat or prey; free from sensual desires, disinterested, not material S I.35, 60; IV.219, 235; V.68, 332; A III.412; D III.278; Vbh 195; Vism 71; Sdhp 475, 477. Nirārambha {Nirarambha} (adj.) [nis+ārambha] without objects (for the purpose of sacrificing), i. e. without the killing of animals (of yañña) S I.76; A II.42 sq. Nirālamba {Niralamba} (adj.) [nis+ālamba] unsupported Miln 295 (ākāsa). Nirālaya {Niralaya} (adj.) [nis+ālaya] houseless, homeless Miln 244 (=aniketa). At DhA IV.31 as expln of appossukka. - f. abstr. nirālayatā homelessness Miln 162, 276, 420. Nirāsa {Nirasa} (adj.) [nis+āsā] not hungry, not longing for anything, desireless S I.12, 23, 141; A I.107 sq.; Sn 1048 (anigha+), 1078 (id.); Nd2 360; Pug 27; Pv IV.133 (=nittaṇha PvA 230). See also amama. Nirāsaṃsa (adj.) [nis+āsaṃsa, śaṃs] without wishes, expectations or desires, desireless Sn 1090 (Nd2 reading for nirāsaya); Nd2 361 (cp. DhA IV.185 nirāsāsa= *nirāsaṃsa, v. l. for nirāsaya). Nirāsanka {Nirasamsa} {Nirasanka} (adj.) [nis+āsankā] without apprehension, unsuspicious, not doubting J I.264; Vism 180. Nirāsankatā {Nirasankata} (f.) [abstr. fr. nirāsanka] the not hesitating J VI.337. Nirāsattin {Nirasattin} (adj.) [adj. to pp. āsatta1 with nis] not hanging on to, not clinging or attached to (c. loc.) Sn 851 (=nittaṇha SnA 549); Nd1 221. Nirāsaya {Nirasaya} (adj.) [nis+āsaya, fr. śri] without (outward) support, not relying on (outward) things, without (sinful) inclinations Sn 56 (: Nd2 360 b reads nirāsasa), 369, 634, 1090 (Nd2 361 reads nirāsaṃsa); Dh 410; DhA IV.185 (v. l. BB nirāsāsa; expld by nittaṇha). Nirāsava {Nirasava} (adj.) [nis+āsava] without intoxication, undefiled, sinless ThA 148. Nirāsāda {Nirasada} (adj.) [nis+assāda] tasteless, yielding no enjoyment Th 1, 710. Cp. nirassāda. Nirāhāra {Nirahara} (adj.) [nis+āhāra] without food, not eating, fasting J IV.225; Sdhp 389. Niriñjana {Nirinjana} (adj.) [nis+iðjanā, fr. iðjati] not moving, stable, unshaken Vism 377 (=acala, āneðja). Nirindhana {Nirindhana} (adj.) [nis+indhana] without fuel (of fire), ThA 148 (aggi); DhA I.44 (jātaveda). (adj.) [nis+īha] inactive, motionless, without impulse ThA 148 (°ka); Miln 413 (+nijjīvata); Vism 484, 594 sq. Pāli Text Society Nirujjhati 842 Pāli-English Dictionary [Pass. of nirundhati (nirodhati) ni+rundhati] to be broken up, to be dissolved, to be destroyed, to cease, die Vin I.1; D I.180 sq., 215; II.157; S III.93 (aparisesaṃ); IV.36 sq., 60, 98, 184 sq.; 294, 402; V.213 sq.; A III.165 sq. (aparisesaṃ); V.139 sq.; J I.180; Pug 64; Sdhp 606. - pp. niruddha. Cp. nirodha. {Nirujjhati} Niruttara {Niruttara} (adj.) [nis+uttara] making no reply PvA 117. Nirutti {Nirutti} (f.) [Sk. nirukti, nis+vac] one of the Vedāngas (see chaḷanga), expln of words, grammatical analysis, etymological interpretation; pronunciation, dialect, way of speaking, expression Vin II.139 (pabbajitā . . . sakāya niruttiyā Buddhavacanaṃ dūsenti); D I.202 (loka°, expression); M III.237 (janapada°); S III.71 (tayo n-pathā); A II.160 (°paṭisambhidā); III.201; Dh 352 (°padakovida=niruttiyað ca sesapadesu cā ti catūsu pi paṭisambhidāsu cheko ti attho DhA IV.70; i. e. skilled in the dialect or the original language of the holy Scriptures); Ps I.88 sq.; II.150 (°paṭisambhidā); Nd2 563; Dhs 1307; Nett 4, 8, 33, 105; Miln 22; Vism 441; SnA 358; PvA 97. Nirudaka {Nirudaka} (adj.) [nis+udaka] without water, waterless M I.543; Nd2 630. Niruddha {Niruddha} (pp.) [pp. of nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati] expelled, destroyed; vanished, ceased S III.112; Dhs 1038. Nirundhati {Nirundhati} see nirujjhati, niruddha, nirodha & nirodheti. Cp. parirundhati. Nirupakāra {Nirupakara} (adj.) [nis+upakāra] useless J II.103. Nirupaghāta {Nirupaghata} (adj.) [nis+upaghāta] not hurt, not injured or set back Miln 130. Nirupatāpa {Nirupatapa} (adj.) [nis+upatāpa] not harassed (burnt) or afflicted (by pain or harm) Th 2, 512. Nirupaddava {Nirupaddava} (adj.) [nis+upaddava] without affliction or mishap, harmless, secure, happy J IV.139; PvA 262 (sotthi). Nirupadhi {Nirupadhi} (adj.) (in verse always nirūpadhi) [nis+upadhi, cp. upadhīka] free from passions or attachment, desireless, controlled Vin II.156; S I.194 (vippamutta+); IV.158; A I.80, 138 (sītibhūta+); Dh 418 (id.); Th 1, 1250; 2, 320 (vippamutta+; expld by niddukkha ThA 233); It 46, 50, 58, 62; Sn 33, 34, 642 (sītibhūta+); Pv IV.134; DhA IV.225 (=nirupakkilesa); PvA 230. Nirupama {Nirupama} (adj.) [nis+upama] without comparison, incomparable SnA 455 (=atitula). Nirumbhati {Nirumbhati} [Sk. ? Trenckner, Notes p. 59 ni+rudh (?)] to suppress, hush, silence J I.62 (text nirumhitvā, v. l. SS nirumbhitvā, cp. san-nirumhitvā VvA 217). Niruḷha {Nirulha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nirūḍha, pp. of niruhati] grown, risen; usual, customary, common VvA 108. Pāli Text Society 843 Pāli-English Dictionary Nirussāsa {Nirussasa} (adj.) [cp. Sk. nirucchvāsa, nis+ussāsa] breathless J III.416; IV.121, cp. VI.197; VI.82. Nirussukka {Nirussukka} (adj.) [nis+ussukka], careless, unconcerned, indifferent to (c. loc.) ThA 282. Niroga {Niroga} see nīroga. Niroja {Niroja} (adj.) [nis+oja] tasteless, insipid J II.304; III.94; VI.561. Nirodha [BSk. nirodha, to nirundhati, cp. nirujjhati & niruddha] oppression, suppression; destruction, cessation, annihilation (of senses, consciousness, feeling & being in general: sankhārā). Bdhgh's expln of the word is: "ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti Vism 495. - N. in many cases is synonymous with nibbāna & parinibbāna; it may be said to be even a stronger expression as far as the active destruction of the causes of life is concerned. Therefore frequently combd with nibbāna in formula "sabbasankhārasamatho . . . virāgo nirodho nibbānaṃ," e. g. S I.136; It 88. Nd2 s. nibbāna (see nibbāna III.6). Also in combn with nibbidā, e. g. S III.48, 223; III.163 sq.; V.438. - The opposite of nirodha is samudaya, cp. formula "yaṃ kiñci samudaya-dhammaṃ sabban taṃ nirodha-dhammaṃ" e. g. Nd2 under sankhārā & passim. (a) Vin I.1, 10; D II.33, 41, 57 sq., 112; III.130 sq., 136 sq., 226 sq.; J I.133; II.9 sq., 223; III.59 sq., 163; V.438; M I.140, 263, 410; A I.299; IV.456 (=āsavānaṃ parikkhaya); Th 2, 6 (=kilesanirodha ThA 13), 158; It 46=Sn 755 (nirodhe ye vimuccanti te janā maccuhāyino); It 62=Sn 754; Sn 731, 1037; Ps I.192; II.44 sq., 221; Pug 68; Vbh 99 sq., 229; Nett 14, 16 sq.; Vism 372; VvA 63; PvA 220 (jīvitassa). - (b) (as-°): anupubba° D III.266; A IV.409, 456; abhisaððā° D I.180; asesavirāga° S II.4, 12; IV.86; V.421 sq.; A I.177; II.158, 161; upādāna° S III.14; kāma° A III.410 sq.; jāti° S IV.86; taṇhā° D III.216; dukkha° D III.136; S III.32, 60; IV.4 sq., 14, 384; A I.177; nandi° S III.14; IV.36; bhava° (=nibbāna) S II.117; III.14; A V.9; Ps I.159; sakkāya° D III.240; S V.410; A II.165 sq.; III.246, 325 sq.; V.238 sq.; saððāvedayita° D III.262, 266; S IV.217, 293 sq.; V. 213 sq.; A I.41; III.192; IV.306; V.209. -dhamma subject to destruction, able to be destroyed, destructible (usually in formula of samudaya-dhamma, see above) Vin I.11; D I.110; S IV.47, 107, 214; M III.280; A V.143 sq.; -dhammatā liability to destruction S IV.217; dhātu the element or condition of annihilation, one of the 3 dhātus, viz. rūpa, arūpa° n°. D III.215; It 45; Nett 97; -saððā perception or consciousness of annihilation D III.251 sq., 283; A III.334; -samāpatti attainment of annihilation Ps I.97, 100; Miln 300; Vism 702. {Nirodha} Nirodhika {Nirodhika} (adj.) [fr. nirodha] obstructing, destroying It 82 (paððā°), cp. M I.115. Nirodheti {Nirodheti} [Denom. fr. nirodha] to oppress, destroy Vism 288 (in expln of passambheti). Nilaya {Nilaya} [fr. ni+lī] a dwelling, habitation, lair, nest J III.454. Nilicchita {Nilicchita} see nillacchita. Nilīna {Nilina} (adj.) [pp. of nilāyati] sitting on (c. loc.), perched; hidden, concealed, lying in wait J I.135, 293; III.26; VvA 230. Pāli Text Society 844 Pāli-English Dictionary Nilīyati {Niliyati} [ni+līyati] to sit down (esp. for the purpose of hiding), to settle, alight; to keep oneself hidden, to lurk, hide J I.222, 292; Miln 257; PvA 178. aor. nilīyi J I.158; III.26; DhA II.56; PvA 274. - pp. nilīna. Caus. II. nilīyāpeti to conceal, hide (trs.) J I.292. Nilīyana {Niliyana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. nilīyati, cp. Sk. nilayana] hiding J V.103 (°ṭṭhāna hiding-place). Nilenaka {Nilenaka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. nilayana, fr. ni+lī] settling place, hiding-place, refuge J V.102 (so read for nillenaka; expld by nilīyanaṭṭhāna p. 103). Nillacchita {Nillacchita} (adj.) [Sk. *nirlāðchita, nis+lacchita of nillaccheti] castrated Th 2, 440; written as nilicchita at J VI.238 (v. l. BB as gloss niluðcita). expld by "vacchakakāla . . . nibbījako kato, uddhaṭabījo" (p. 239). Nillaccheti {Nillaccheti} [nis+laccheti of lāðch, cp. lakkhaṇa] to deprive of the marks or characteristics (of virility), to castrate Th 2, 437 (=purisa-bhāvassa lacchana-bhūtāni bījakāni nillacchesi nīhari ThA 270). See also nillaðchaka & nillacchita. Nillajja {Nillajja} (adj.) [nis+lajjā] shameless Sdhp 382. Nillāñchaka & Nilāñchaka {Nillanchaka} {Nilanchaka} (adj.-n.) [cp. Sk. nirlāðchana, of nirlāðchayati=nis+laccheti] one who marks cattle, i. e. one who castrates or deprives of virility J IV.364 (spelt tilaðchaka in text, but right in v. l.), expld as "tisūlādi-ankakaraṇena laðchakā ca lakkhaṇakārakā ti attho" (p. 366). cp. nillacchita. Nillapa {Nillapa} (adj.) [nis+lapa] without deceit, free from slander A II.26=It 113. Nillāḷeti & Nilloḷeti {Nillaleti} {Nilloleti} [nis+lul, cp. Sk. laḍayati & loḍayati] to move (the tongue) up & down S I.118; M I.109; DA I.42 (pp. nillāḷita-jivhā); DhA IV.197 (jivhaṃ nilloleti; v. l. nillāleti & lilāḷeti)=J V.434 (v. l. nillelati for °lo°). Nillekha {Nillekha} (adj.) [nis+lekha] without scratches, without edges (?) Vin II.123 (of jantāghara). Nillokana {Nillokana} (adj.-n.) [nis+lokana] watching out; watchful, careful J V.43, 86 (°sīla). Nilloketi {Nilloketi} [nis+loketi] to watch out, keep guard, watch, observe Vin II.208. Nillopa {Nillopa} [cp. Sk. nirlopa, nis+lup] plundering, plunder D I.52; A I.154; Nd1 144 (°ṃ harati); Nd2 1997; Tikp 167, 280; DA I.159. Nillobha {Nillobha} (adj.) [nis+lobha] free from greed J IV.10. Nilloluppa & Nillolupa {Nilloluppa} {Nillolupa} (adj.) [nis+loluppā] free from greed or desires Sn 56 (=Nd2 362 nittaṇha); J V.358. Pāli Text Society 845 Pāli-English Dictionary Nivatta {Nivatta} (pp.) [pp. of nivattati] returned, turning away from, giving up, being deprived of, being without (°-) Vin II.109 (°bīja); J I.203; VvA 72. Nivattati {Nivattati} [Vedic nivartati, ni+vattati] to turn back, to return (opp. gacchati), to turn away from, to flee, vanish, disappear Vin I.46; D I.118; J I.223; II.153; IV.142; Sn p. 80; Pv II.934; IV.107; SnA 374; PvA 74, 161. aor. nivatti J II.3; PvA 141. pp. nivatta (q. v.). - Caus. I. nivatteti to lead back, to turn from, to make go back, to convert J I.203; VvA 110; PvA 204 (pāpato from sin). Cp. upa°, paṭi°, vi°. - Caus. II. nivattāpeti to send back, to return PvA 154. Nivattana {Nivattana} (nt.) [fr. nivattati] 1. returning, turning, fig. turning away from, giving up, "conversion" PvA 120 (pāpato). - 2. a bend, curve (of a river), nook J I.324; II.117, 158; IV.256; V.162. Nivattanīya {Nivattaniya} (adj.) [grd. formation fr. nivattana] only neg. a° not liable to return, not returning DhA I.63. Nivatti {Nivatti} (f.) [fr. ni+vṛt] returning, return PvA 189 (gati° going & coming). Nivattha {Nivattha} (pp.) [pp. of ni+vasati1] clothed in or with (-° or acc.), dressed, covered S I.115; J I.59 (su°), 307 (sāṭakaṃ); PvA 47, 49 (dibbavattha°), 50. Nivapati {Nivapati} [ni+vapati] to heap up, sow, throw (food) M I.151 sq. (nivāpaṃ). - pp. nivutta (q. v.). Nivaraṇa {Nivarana} see vi°. Nivarati {Nivarati} [ni+varati] only in Caus. nivāreti (q. v.), pp. nivuta. Nivasati {Nivasati} [ni+vasati2] to live, dwell, inhabit, stay Vin II.11. - pp. nivuttha, cp. also nivāsana2 & nivāsin. Nivaha {Nivaha} [fr. ni+vah] multitude, quantity, heap Dāvs IV.53; V.14, 24, 62. Nivāta1 {Nivata} (adj.) [Sk. nivāta, ni+vāta "wind-down"] with the wind gone down, i. e. without wind, sheltered from the wind, protected, safe, secure Vin I.57, 72; M I.76= A I.137 (kūṭāgāra); A I.101 (id.); It 92 (rahada); Th 1, 1 (kuṭikā); 2, 376 (pāsāda). - (nt.) a calm (opp. pavāta) Vin II.79. Nivāta2 {Nivata} [identical with nivāta1, sheltered from the wind =low] lowliness, humbleness, obedience, gentleness M I.125; Sn 265 (=nīcavattana KhA 144); J VI.252; Pv IV.712. Cp. M Vastu II.423. Freq. in cpd. nivātavutti (id.) A III.43; Sn 326 (=nīcavutti SnA 333); J III.262; Miln 90, 207; VvA 347. Nivātaka {Nivataka} [fr. nivāta1] a sheltered place, a place of escape, opportunity (for hiding) J I.289=V.435; cp. Miln 205 (where reading is nimantaka, with v. l. nivātaka, see note on p. 426). See Com. on this stanza at J V.437. Pāli Text Society 846 Pāli-English Dictionary Nivāpa {Nivapa} [cp. Sk. nivāpa, ni+vap, cp. nivapati] food thrown (for feeding), fodder, bait; gift, portion, ration M I.151 sq. (Nivāpa-sutta); J I.150; III.271; DhA I.233 (share); III.303; VvA 63 (diguṇaṃ °ṃ pacitvā cooking a double portion). Cp. nevāpika. -tiṇa grass to eat J I.150; puṭṭha fed on grains Dh 325 (=kuṇḍakādinā sūkara-bhattena puṭṭho DhA IV.16=Nett 129=Th 1, 17; -bhojana a meal on food given, a feeding M I.156). Nivāyāsa {Nivayasa} (?) oozing of trees; Bdhgh's expln of ikkāsa at Vin II.321. See niyyāsa. Nivāraṇa {Nivarana} (nt. & adj.) [fr. nivāreti] warding off, keeping back, preventing; refusal Sn 1034, 1035, 1106 (=Nd2 363 āvāraṇa rakkhaṇa gopana); DhsA 259; PvA 102, 278; Sdhp 396. Nivāraya {Nivaraya} (adj.) [grd. of nivāreti] in dun° hard to check or keep back Miln 21 (+durāvaraṇa). Nivārita {Nivarita} (adj.) [pp. of nivāreti] unobstructed, open PvA 202 (=anāvaṭa). Nivāretar {Nivaretar} [n. agent to nivāreti] one who holds back or refuses (entrance) (opp. pavesetar) D II.83=S IV.194= A V.194 (dovāriko aððātānaṃ nivāretā ðātānam pavesetā). Nivāreti {Nivareti} [Caus. of nivarati] to keep back, to hold back from (c. abl.), to restrain; to refuse, obstruct, forbid, warn Vin I.46; II.220; S I.7 (cittaṃ nivāreyya), 14 (yato mano nivāraye); IV.195 (cittaṃ); Dh 77, 116 (pāpā cittaṃ nivāraye); J I.263; Pv III.74; VvA 69; PvA 79, 102; DhA I.41. Nivāsa {Nivasa} [fr. nivasati2] stopping, dwelling, resting-place, abode; living, sheltering J I.115 (°ṃ kappeti to put up); II.110; PvA 76, 78. Usually in phrase pubbe-nivāsaṃ anussarati "to remember one's former abode or place of existence (in a former life)," characterising the faculty of remembering one's former birth D I.13, 15, 16, 81; S I.167, 175, 196; II.122, 213; V.265, 305; A I.25, 164; II.183; III.323, 418 sq.; IV.141 sq.; V.211, 339. Also in pubbenivāsaṃ vedi It 100; Sn 647=Dh 423; p-n-paṭisaṃyuttā dhammikathā D II.1; p-n-anussatiðāṇa D III.110, 220, 275; A IV.177. Cp. nevāsika. Nivāsana1 {Nivasana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. nivāseti] dressed, clothed; dressing, clothing, undergarment (opp. pārupana) Vin I.46; II.228; J I.182 (manāpa°), 421; III.82; PvA 50, 74, 76, 173 (pilotikakkhaṇḍa° dressed in rags). Nivāsana2 {Nivasana} (nt.) [fr. nivasati2] dwelling, abode PvA 44 (°ṭṭhāna place of abode), 76 (id.). Nivāsika {Nivasika} (adj.) [fr. nivāsa] staying, living, dwelling J II.435 (=nibaddha-vasanaka C.). Nivāsin {Nivasin} (adj.-n.) [to nivasati] dwelling, staying; (n.) an inhabitant Dāvs V.45. Nivāseti {Nivaseti} [Caus. of nivasati1] to dress oneself, to put on (the undergarment), to get clothed or dressed. Freq. in ster. phrase "pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā patta- cīvaram ādāya . . .," describing the setting out on his round of the bhikkhu; e. g. D I.109, 178, 205, 226. - Vin I.46; II.137, 194; D II.127; J I.265; Pug 56; Pv I.103; PvA 49, 61, 75, 127 (nivāsessati+pārupissati), Pāli Text Society 847 Pāli-English Dictionary 147 (=pārupāmi). - Caus. II. nivāsāpeti to cause or order to be dressed (with 2 acc.) J I.50; IV.142; DhA I.223. Nivicikicchā {Nivicikiccha} see nibbicikicchā; see nibbicikicchā; M I.260. Nivijjha {Nivijjha} see vi°. Niviṭṭha {Nivittha} (adj.) [pp. of nivisati] settled, established (in); confirmed, sure; fixed on, bent on, devoted to (loc.) Sn 57 (=satta allīna etc. Nd2 364), 756, 774, 781 (ruciyā), 824 (saccesu), 892; Nd1 38, 65, 162; It 35, 77; J I.89, 259 (adhammasmiṃ); Miln 361; VvA 97 (°gāma, built, situated); DA I.90 (su° & dun° of a street=well & badly built or situate). Cp. abhi°. Nivisati {Nivisati} [ni+visati] to enter, stop, settle down on (loc.), to resort to, establish oneself Vin I.207; J I.309= IV.217 (yasmiṃ mano nivisati). - pp. niviṭṭha ger. nivissa (q. v.). Caus. niveseti. Nivissa—vādin {Nivissavadin} (adj.-n.) [nivissa (ger. of nivisati)+vādin] "speaking in the manner of being settled or sure," a dogmatist Sn 910, 913, expld at Nd1 326 as "sassato loko idam eva saccaṃ, mogham aððan ti"; at SnA 560 as "jānāmi passāmi tath'eva etan ti." Nivuta {Nivuta} (adj.) [pp. of nivarati (nivāreti) cp. nivārita] surrounded, hemmed in, obstructed, enveloped D I.246; S II.24; IV.127; Sn 348 (tamo°), 1032, 1082; It 8; Nd2 365 (=ophuṭa, paṭicchanna, paṭikujjita); Miln 161; SnA 596 (=pariyonaddha). Nivutta1 {Nivutta} (pp.) [pp. of ni+vac] called, termed, designated PvA 73 (dasavassa-satāni, vassasahassaṃ n. hoti). Nivutta2 {Nivutta} (pp.) [Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati1 to shear] shorn, shaved, trimmed Sn 456 (°kesa=apagatakesa, ohāritakesamassu SnA 403). Nivutta3 {Nivutta} (pp.) [Sk. *nyupta, pp. of vapati2 to sow] sown, thrown (of food), offered, given M I.152; J III.272. Nivuttha {Nivuttha} (pp. of nivasati) inhabited; dwelling, living; see san°. Niveṭha {Nivetha} in pañhe dunniveṭha at Miln 90 see nibbedha. Niveṭhana {Nivethana} see vi°. Niveṭheti {Nivetheti} see nibbeṭheti. Nivedaka {Nivedaka} (adj.) [to nivedeti] relating, admonishing J VI.21. Nivedeti {Nivedeti} [ni+vedeti, Caus. of vid.] to communicate, make known, tell, report, announce J I.60, 307; PvA 53, 66 (attānaṃ reveal oneself); Dāvs V 42. Pāli Text Society 848 Pāli-English Dictionary Nivesa {Nivesa} [Vedic niveśa, fr. ni+viś] 1. entering, stopping, settling down; house, abode Vv 82 (=nivesanāni kacchantarāni VvA 50).-2.=nivesana 2, in diṭṭhi° Sn 785 (=idaṃ-sacchābhinivesasankhātāQi diṭṭhi-nivesanāni SnA 522). Nivesana {Nivesana} (nt.) [Vedic niveśana, fr. nivesati, cp. niviṭṭha] 1. entering, entrance, settling; settlement, abode, house, home D I.205, 226; II.127; J I.294; II.160 (°ṭṭhāna); PvA 22, 81, 112. - 2. (fig.) (also nivesanā f.: Nd2 366) settling on, attachment, clinging to (in diṭṭhi° clinging to a view=dogmatism cp. nivissa-vādin) Sn 1055 (nandi+; =taṇhā Nd2 366); Dh 40 (diṭṭhi°); Nd1 76, 110. See also nivesa. Nivesita {Nivesita} (adj.) [pp. of nivesati] settled, arranged, designed, built VvA 82 (=sumāpita). Niveseti {Niveseti} [Caus. of nivesati] to cause to enter, to establish; to found, build, fix, settle; (fig.) to establish in, exhort to (c. loc.), plead for, entreat, admonish D I.206; S V.189; Dh 158, 282 (attānaṃ); It 78 (brahmacariye); Th 2, 391 (manaṃ); J V.99; Pv III.77 (saṃyame nivesayi); DA I.273 (gāmaṃ); PvA 206. Nivyaggha {Nivyaggha} (adj.) [nis+vyaggha] free from tigers J II.358 (v. l. nibbyaggha). Nissaga & Nissagga {Nissaga} {Nissagga} [ni or nis+sṛj] giving forth, bestowing; natural state, nature S I.54 (°ss°). Cp. nisaṭṭha. Nisankhiti (f.) [Sk. ni-saṃskṛti, ni+saṃ+kṛ] deposit (of merit or demerit), accumulation, effect (of kamma) Sn 953 (=Nd1 442 abhisankhārā). {Nisankhiti} Nisajjā {Nisajja} (f.) [Sk. *niṣadyā of ni sad] sitting down, opportunity for sitting, seat Pv IV.12 (seyyā+); J I.217; PvA 24 (°ādipaṭikkhepa-ṭṭhāna), 219 (pallankābhujanādi-lakkhaṇā nisajjā). Cp. nesajjika. Nisajjeti {Nisajjeti} [sic MSS. for niss°; Sk. niḥsarjayati, nis+sajjeti, Caus. of sṛj] to spend, bestow, give, give up PvA 105 (dānûpakaraṇā nisajjesi read better as °karaṇǡni sajjesi). See also nissajjati. Nisaṭṭha {Nisattha} (pp.) [nis+saṭṭha of sṛj] given up, spent, lost Th 2, 484 (v. l. °ss°); ThA 286 (=pariccatta). Cp. nisajjeti & nisagga. Nisada & Nisadā {Nisada} (f.) [Sk. dṛṣad f.; for n: d cp. P. nijjuha= Sk. dātyūha etc.] a grindstone, esp. the understone of a millstone Vin I.201; (°pota id.); Miln 149; Vism 252 (°pota, where KhA at id. p. reads °putta). Cp. ā°. Nisanti {Nisanti} (f.) [Sk. *niśānti, ni+śam] careful attention or observation A II.97; III.201; IV.15 (dhamma°), 36 (id.), 296; V.166 (dhamma°); Dpvs I.53 (°kāra). Cp. nisamma & nisāmeti. Nisabha {Nisabha} [Sk. nṛ+ṛṣabha, cp. usabha. On relation of usabha: vasabha: nisabha see SnA 40] "bull among men," i. e. prince, leader; "princeps," best of men; Ep. of the Buddha S I.28, 48, 91; M I.386; J V.70; VI.526; Vv 167 (isi°), cp. VvA 83 for expln; Vv 637 (isi°=ājānīya VvA 262). Pāli Text Society 849 Pāli-English Dictionary Nisamma {Nisamma} (adv.) [orig. ger. of nisāmeti, Sk. niśamya, śam] carefully, considerately, observing Sn 54; Nd2 367= 481 b (=sutvā). Esp. in phrase n.-kārin acting considerately Dh 24 (=DhA I.238); J III.106; VI.375; Miln 3; cp. n. kiriyāya Miln 59. Cp. nisanti. Nisā {Nisa} (f.) [Sk. niś & niśā, prob. with niśītha (midnight) to ni+śi=lying down] night Vv 352 (loc. nise); VvA 161 (loc. nisati, v. l. nisi=rattiyaṃ); Miln 388 (loc. nisāya); Dāvs II.6; V.2 (nisāyaṃ). See also nisītha. Nisātaka {Nisataka} in koka° in koka° J VI.538, a certain wild animal; the meaning is not clear, etymologically it is to be derived fr. Sk. niśātayati to strike, to fell. See Kern, Toev. 1. p. 152, s. v. koka. The v. l. is °nisādaka, evidently influenced by nisāda. Nisāda {Nisada} [cp. Sk. niṣāda, a Non-Aryan or barbarian] a robber J IV.364. Cp. nesāda. Nisādana {Nisadana} [=ni+śātana] grinding DhA I.308. Nisādika {Nisadika} (adj.) [cp. Sk. niṣādin, ni+sad] fit for lying down, suitable for resting Vin I.239 (go°). Nisādin {Nisadin} (adj.) [fr. ni+sad] lying down D III.44, 47. Nisāna {Nisana} [ni+śā to sharpen, to whet, cp. nisita] a hone on which to sharpen a knife Miln 282. Nisāmaka {Nisamaka} (adj.) [cp. Sk. niśāmana] observant, listening to, attending to, careful of A V.166, 168 (dhammānaṃ). Nisāmeti [ni+sāmeti] to attend to, listen to, observe, be careful of, mind J IV.29 (anisāmetvā by not being careful); V.486; DhA I.239 (+upadhāneti); PvA 1 (imper. nisāmayatha). Cp. nisanti, nisamma. {Nisameti} Nisāra {Nisara} (adj.-n.) [ni+sāra] full of sap, excellent, strong (of a tree) Vv 631 (=niratisaya sārassa nisiṭṭhasārassa rukkhassa VvA 261). Nisiñcati {Nisincati} [ni+siñcati] to besprinkle Mhvs VII.8. Nisita {Nisita} (adj.) [Sk. niśita, ni+pp. of śā to whet] sharp M I.281 (āvudhajāta pīta°?); J IV.118 (su°); VvA 233; PvA 155, 192, 213. Nisinna {Nisinna} (adj.) [Sk. niṣanna, pp. of nisīdati] sitting down, seated J I.50, 255; III.126; KhA 250; PvA 11, 16, 39 & passim. - Often combd & contrasted with tiṭṭhaṃ (standing), caraṃ (walking) & sayaṃ (sayāna; lying down), e. g. at Sn 151, 193; It 82. Nisinnaka {Nisinnaka} (adj.)=nisinna; M I.333; J I.163; DhA III.175. 850 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Nisītha {Nisitha} [Sk. niśītha, see nisā] midnight, night Th 1, 3 (aggi yathā pajjalito nisīthe; v. l. BB nisive), 524 (v. l. nisive); J IV.432; V.330, 331 (v. l. BB nisive), 506 (=rattibhāga Com.). Nisīdati {Nisidati} [Sk. niṣīdati, ni+sīdati] to sit down, to be seated, to sit, to dwell Nd2 433; J III.392; VI.367; Pv II.93 (nisīdeyya Pot.); PvA 74. aor. nisīdi Vin I.1; J II.153; PvA 5, 23, 44; 3rd pl. nisīdiṃsu (J I.307) & nisīdisuṃ (Mhvs VII.40); ger. nisīditvā (J II.160; PvA 5, 74), nisajja D II.127) and nisīditvāna (Sn 1031); grd. nisīditabba Vin I.47. pp. nisinna (q. v.). - Caus. II. nisīdāpeti [cp. Sk. niṣādayati] to cause to sit down, to make one be seated, to invite to a seat J III.392; VI.367; PvA 17, 35 (there āsane); Miln 20. Cp. abhi°, san°. Nisīdana {Nisidana} (nt.) [Sk. niṣadana, fr. nisīdati] sitting down, occasion or opportunity to sit, a mat to sit on Vin I.295; II.123 (°ena vippavasati); S V.259 (°ṃ gaṇhāti). °paccattharaṇa a mat for sitting on Vin I.47, 295; II.209, 218. Nisumbhati {Nisumbhati} [ni+sumbh (subhnāti)] to knock down Th 2, 302 (=pāteti ThA 227). Nisūdana {Nisudana} (nt.) [ni+sūd] destroying, slaughtering Miln 242. Nisedha {Nisedha} (adj.-n.) [fr. ni+sedh] holding back, restraining; prevention, prohibition Dh 389; DhA IV.148; hirī° restrained by shame S I.168=Sn 462; Dh 143. Nisedhaka {Nisedhaka} (adj.) [fr. nisedha] prohibiting, restraining; one who prohibits, an obstructer J II.220. Nisedhanatā {Nisedhanata} (f.) [abstr. to nisedheti] refusing, refusal, prohibition Miln 180 (a°). Nisedheti {Nisedheti} [Caus. of ni+sedh] to keep off, restrain, prohibit, prevent S I.121 (nisedha, imper.); J III.83, 442; ThA 250; VvA 105 (nirayûpapattiṃ). - Cp. nisedha. Nisevati {Nisevati} [ni+sev] to resort to, practise, pursue, follow, indulge in J II.106; Sn 821 (=Nd1 157); Pv II.319 (=karoti PvA 87); Miln 359. - pp. nisevita. Nisevana {Nisevana} (nt. also -ā f.) [Sk. niṣevana, cp. nisevati] practising, enjoying; pursuit Pug 20, 24; Sdhp 406. Nisevita {Nisevita} (adj.) [pp. of nisevati] frequented, practised, enjoyed, indulged in M I.178; Sdhp 373. Nissaṃsaya {Nissamsaya} (adj.) [nis+saṃsaya] having no doubt, free from doubt Miln 237. - acc. as adv. without doubt, undoubtedly Pv IV.81; DhA I.106; PvA 95. Nissakka {Nissakka} [fr. nis+sakkati=sakk] "going out from," ttg. a name of the ablative case J V.498; VvA 152, 154, 180, 311; PvA 147, 221. Pāli Text Society 851 Pāli-English Dictionary Nissakkana {Nissakkana} (nt.) [Sk. *niḥsarpana, nis+sakk, confused with sṛp, see Trenckner, Notes p. 60 & cp. apassakkati, o°, pari°] going out, creeping out; only in biḷāra° at D II.83 (v. l. BB as gloss nikkhamana)+S IV.194= A V.195. Nissaggiya {Nissaggiya} (adj.) [Sk. *niḥsārgya grd. of nis+sajjeti, not= Sk. naisargika] to be given up, what ought to be rejected or abandoned Vin I.196, 254; III.195 sq. Nissanga {Nissanga} (adj.) [nis+sanga] unattached, unobstructed, disinterested, unselfish Sdhp 371, 398, 411 etc.; Tikp 10; f. abstr. °tā disinterestedness J I.46. Nissajjati {Nissajjati} [nis+sajjati, sṛj. See also nisajjeti] to let loose, give up, hand over, give, pour out Vin II.188; ger. nissajja [Sk. niḥsṛjya] Sn 839 (v. l. nisajja); Nd1 189 (id.); SnA 545. pp. nisaṭṭha & nissaṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. nissaggiya & paṭi°. Nissaṭa {Nissata} (adj.) [pp. of nis+sarati, sṛ] flown or come out from, appeared; let loose, free, escaped from S III.31; IV.11 sq.; A I.260; IV.430 (a°); V.151 sq.; J III.530; VI.269; Nd2 under nissita; Ps II.10 sq.; Miln 95, 225 (bhava°). See also nissaraṇa. Cp. abhi°. Nissaṭṭha {Nissattha} (adj.) [pp. of nissajjati] dismissed, given up, left, granted, handed over, given Vin III.197 (°cīvara); M I.295; II.203; VvA 341. See also nisaṭṭha & paṭi°. Nissatta {Nissatta} (adj.) [Sk. *niḥsattva, nis+satta] powerless, unsubstantial; f. abstr. °tā absence of essence, unsubstantiality (see dhamma A) DhsA 38, 139, 263; cp. Dhs. trsl. pp. XXXIII. & 26. Nissadda {Nissadda} (adj.) [nis+sadda] noiseless, soundless, silent J I.17 (V.94); DhA III.173. Nissantāpa {Nissantapa} (adj.) [nis+santāpa] without grief or selfmortification PvA 62. Nissanda {Nissanda} [Sk. nisyanda & niṣyanda, ni+syand (syad), see sandati] flowing or trickling down; discharge, dropping, issue; result, outcome, esp. effect of Kamma A III.32; J I.31, 205, 426 (sarīra°); DhA I.395; II.36, 86; VvA 14 (puðða-kammassa n-phala); PvA 47 (puññakammassa), 58 (id.); Miln 20. 117; Pgdp 102. Nissama {Nissama} [ni+sama] exertion, endeavour J V.243. Nissaya [Sk. niśraya, of ni+śri, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśraya] that on which anything depends, support, help, protection; endowment, resource, requisite, supply; foundation, reliance on (acc. or -°) Vin I.58 (the four resources of bhikkhu, viz. piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ, paṃsukūla - cīvaraṃ, rukkhamūla - senāsanaṃ, pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ); II.274, 278; D III.137, 141; A I.117; III.271; IV.353; V.73; Sn 753, 877; Nd1 108 (two n.: taṇhā° & diṭṭhi°), 190, cp. Nd2 s. v.; Nd2 397A (the requisites of a bhikkhu in diff. enumeration); Ps II.49 sq., 58 sq., 73 sq.; II.220; Nett 7, 65; Vism 12, 535. nissayaṃ karoti to rely on, to be founded on to take one's stand in Sn 800. - Cp. nissāya & nissita. -kamma giving assistance or help, an (ecclesiastical) act of help or protection Vin I.49, 143, 325; II.226; A I.99; Pv IV.11 (so to be read at the 2 latter passages for niyassa°). -sampanna finding one's strength in A IV.353. {Nissaya} Nissayatā {Nissayata} (f.) [abstr. to nissaya] dependence, requirement, resource Sn 856; Nd1 245. Pāli Text Society 852 Pāli-English Dictionary Nissayati {Nissayati} [Sk. niśrayati, but in meaning=āśrayati, ni+ śri] to lean on, a foundation on, rely on, trust, pursue, Sn 798 (sīlabbataṃ; SnA 530=abhinivisati); VvA 83 (katapuññaṃ). Pass. nissīyati VvA 83. pp. nissita; ger. nissāya (q. v.). Nissaraṇa {Nissarana} (nt.) [Sk. niḥsaraṇa, to nis+sarati, cp. BSk. nissaraṇa giving up (?) AvŚ II.193] going out, departure; issue, outcome, result; giving up, leaving behind, being freed, escape (fr. saṃsāra), salvation Vin I.104; D III.240, 248 sq.; S I.128, 142; II.5; III.170 (catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ); IV.7 sq. (id.); V.121 sq.; A I.258, 260; II.10 (kāmānaṃ etc.); III.245 sq.; IV.76 (uttariṃ); V.188; M I.87 (kāmānaṃ), 326 (uttariṃ); III.25; It 37, 61; Ps II.180, 244; Vbh 247; Vism 116; ThA 233; DhsA 164; Sdhp 579. Cp. nissaṭa & nissaraṇīya. -dassin wise in knowing results, prescient, able to find a way to salvation S IV.205; -pañña (adj.)=°dassin D I.245 (a°); III.46; S II.194; IV.332; A V.178 (a°), 181 sq.; Miln 401. Nissaraṇīya (adj.) [grd. of nissarati, with relation to nissaraṇa] connected with deliverance, leading to salvation, able to be freed. The 3 n. dhātuyo (elements of deliverance) are nekkhamma (escape from cravings), āruppa (from existence with form), nirodha (from all existence), in detail at It 61 (kāmānaṃ n. nekkhammaṃ, rūpānaṃ n. āruppaṃ, yaṃ kiñci bhūtaṃ sankhataṃ n. nirodho). The 5 n-dh. are escape fr. kāma, vyāpāda, vihesā, rūpa, sakkāya: A III.245; cp. A I.99; III.290. Note. The spelling is often nissāraṇīya, thus at Vin IV.225; D III.239 (the five n-dhātuyo), 247, 275. {Nissaraniya} Nissarati {Nissarati} [nis+sarati] to depart, escape from, be freed from (c. abl.) A I.260 (yasmā atthi loke nissaraṇaṃ tasmā sattā lokamhā nissaranti). - pp. nissaṭa, grd. nissaraṇīya (q. v.); cp. also nissaraṇa & paṭi°. Nissāya {Nissaya} (prep. c, acc.) [ger. of nissayati, Sk. *niśrāya, BSk niśritya, ni+śri] leaning on (in all fig. meanings) Nd2 368 (=upanissāya, ārammaṇaṃ ālambanaṃ karitvā). - 1. near, near by, on, at J I.167 (pāsānapiṭṭhaṃ), 221 (padumasaraṃ); PvA 24 (bāhā), 134 (taṃ=with him). - 2. by means of, through, by one's support, by way of J I.140 (rājānaṃ: under the patronage of the k.); IV.137 (id.); II.154 (tumhe); Miln 40 (kāyaṃ), 253 (id.); PvA 27 (ye=yesaṃ hetu), 154 (nadī° alongside of). - 3. because of, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of J I.203 (amhe), 255 (dhanaṃ), 263 (maṃ); PvA 17 (kiṃ), 67 (namaṃ), 130 (taṃ). - Cp. nissaya, nissita. Nissāra {Nissara} (adj.) [nis+sāra] sapless, worthless, unsubstantial J I.393; Sdhp 51, 608, 612. Nissārajja {Nissarajja} (adj.) [Sk. niḥ+śārada+ya] without diffidence, not diffident, confident J I.274 (+nibbhaya). Nissāraṇa {Nissarana} (nt.) [fr. nissarati] going or driving out, expulsion Miln 344 (osāraṇa-n.paṭisāraṇa), 357. Nissita {Nissita} (adj.) [Sk. niśrita, pp. of nissayati, corresp. in meaning to Sk. āśrita] hanging on, dependent on, inhabiting; attached to, supported by, living by means of, relying on, being founded or rooted in, bent on. As -° often in sense of a prep.=by means of, on account of, through, esp. with pron. kiṃ° (=why, through what) Sn 458; taṃ° (therefore, on acct. of this) S IV.102. - For combn with var. synonyms see Nd2 s. v. & cp. Nd1 75, 106. - S II.17 (dvayaṃ; cp. III.134); IV.59, 365; V.2 sq., 63 sq.; A III.128; Dh 339 (rāga°); Sn 752, 798, 910; J I.145; Nd1 283; Pv Pāli Text Society 853 Pāli-English Dictionary I.86 (sokaṃ hadaya° lying in); II.66 (paṭhavi° supported by); Vbh 229; Nett 39 (°citta); Miln 314 (inhabiting); PvA 86 (māna°). - anissita unsupported, not attached, free, emancipated Sn 66, 363, 753, 849, 1069 (unaided); J I.158; Miln 320, 351. - Cp. apassita. Nissitaka {Nissitaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. prec.] adherent, supporter (orig. one who is supported by), pupil J I.142, 186; DhA I.54. Nissitatta (nt.) [fr. nissita] dependence on, i. e. interference by, being too near, nearness Vism 118 (pantha°). Cp. san°. Nissirīka {Nissitatta} (adj.) [nis+sirī] having lost his (or its) splendour or prosperity J VI.225 (ājīvika), 456 (rājabhavana). {Nissirika} Nissīma {Nissima} (adj.) [cp. Sk. niḥsīman with diff. meanings ("boundless"), nis+sīma] outside the boundary Vin I.255 (°ṭṭha), 298 (°ṃ gantuṃ); II.167 (°e ṭhito). Nissuta {Nissuta} (adj.) [fr. nis+sru, see savati] flown out or away, vanished, disappeared M I.280. Nisseṇi {Nisseni} (f.) [fr. nis+śri, orig. that which leans against, or leads to something, cp. Sk. śreṇī a row] a ladder, a flight of stairs D I.194, 198; J I.53; II.315; III.505; Miln 263; Vism 244, 340 (in simile); DhA I.259. Nissesa {Nissesa} (adj.) [nis+sesa] whole, entire; nt. acc. as adv. nissesaṃ entirely, completely Nd2 533. Nissoka {Nissoka} (adj.) [nis+soka] free from sorrow, without grief, not mourning PvA 62; KhA 153. Nihata {Nihata} (adj.) [pp. of nihanti, ni+han] "slain"; put down, settled; destroyed; dejected, humiliated; humble Vin II.307 (settled); J V.435 (°bhoga one whose fortunes are destroyed). māna "with slain pride," humiliated, humble S IV.203; Th 2, 413 (=apanīta-māna ThA 267); J II.300; VI.367. Niharati {Niharati} see nīharati. Nihita {Nihita} (adj.) [Sk. nihita, pp. of ni+dhā, see dahati] put down, put into, applied, settled; laid down, given up, renounced. As °- often in the sense of a prep.= without, e. g. °daṇḍa °sattha without stick & sword (see daṇḍa . . .) D I.70 (°paccāmitta); Pv IV.326 (su° well applied); PvA 252 (bhasma-nihita thrown into the ashes); Sdhp 311. Nihīna {Nihina} (adj.) [Sk. nihīna, pp. of nihīyati or nihāyati] lost; degraded, low, vile, base; inferior, little, insignificant S I.12; Sn 890; Nd1 105, 194; PvA 198 (jāti° low-born); Sdhp 86. Opp. to seyya J VI.356 sq. -attha one who has lost his fortune, poor Pv IV.15; -kamma of low action Sn 661=It 43; Dh 306; J II.417; -citta low-minded PvA 107 (=dīna); -jātika of inferior birth or caste PvA 175; -pañña of inferior wisdom Sn 890 (=paritta-pañña Nd1 299); -sevin of vile pursuit A I.126. Pāli Text Society 854 Pāli-English Dictionary Nihīnatā {Nihinata} (f.) [abstr. to nihīna] lowness, inferiority; vileness, baseness D I.98, 99. Nihīyati {Nihiyati} [ni+hīyati, Pass. of hā, see jahāti] to be left, to come to ruin, to be destroyed A I.126=J III.324 (=vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti). pp. nihīna (q. v.). Nihuhunka {Nihuhunka} (adj.) [fr. nī°=nis+huhunka] one who does not confide in the sound huṃ Vin I.3 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1901, 42). Nīka {Nika} [Sk. nyanku? Doubtful reading] a kind of deer (or pig) J V.406 (vv.ll. nika, ninga). Nīgha {Nigha} (in anīgha) see nigha1. Nīca {Nica} (adj.) [Vedic nīca, adj.-formation fr. adv. ni°, cp. Sk. nyañc downward] low, inferior, humble (opp. ucca high, fr. adv. ud°) Vin I.46, 47; II.194; D I.109, 179, 194; A V.82; SnA 424 (nīcaṃ karoti to degrade); & passim. -kula of low clan J I.106; Sn 411; -(°ā) kulīna belonging to low caste Sn 462; -cittatā being humble-hearted Dhs 1340; DhsA 395; -pīṭhaka a low stool DhA IV.177; -mano humble Sn 252 (=nīcacitto SnA 293); -seyyā a low bed A I.212 (opp. uccāsayana). Nīceyya {Niceyya} (adj.) [compar. of nīca (for °īya?), in function of °eyya as "of the kind of," sort of, rather] lower, inferior, rather low M I.329; Sn 855, 918; Nd1 244, 351. Nīta {Nita} (pp.) [pp. of neti] led, guided; ascertained, inferred A I.60 (°attha); J I.262; II.215 (kāma°); Nett 21 (°attha, natural meaning, i. e. the primarily inferred sense, opp. neyyattha); Sdhp 366 (dun°). Cp. vi°. Nīti {Niti} (f.) [Sk. nīti, fr. nīta] guidance, practice, conduct, esp. right conduct, propriety; statesmanship, polity PvA 114 (°mangala commonsense), 129 (°sattha science of statecraft, or of prudent behaviour), 130 (°cintaka a lawgiver), 131 (°naya polity & law), 132 (°kusala versed in the wisdom of life); Miln 3 (here meaning the Nyāyaphilosophy, cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 58). Nīdha {Nidha} =nu idha, see nu. Nīdhura {Nidhura} (?) [Sk. ? Cp. keyura] bracelet, bangle J VI.64, (=valaya; v. l. BB nivara). Also given as nīyura (cp. Prk. neura & P. nūpura). Nīpa {Nipa} (adj.) [Vedic nīpa, contr. fr. ni+āpa "low water"] lit. lying low, deep, N. of the tree Nauclea cadamba, a species of Asoka tree J I.13 (v. 61)=Bu II.51; J V.6 (so read for nipa). Nībhata {Nibhata} [cp. Sk. nirbhṛta, pp. of nis+bhṛ] bought out J III.471. Nīyati {Niyati} [Sk. nīyati, Pass. of neti] to be led or guided, to go, to be moved S I.39 (cittena nīyati loko); Dh 175; Pv I.111 (=vahīyati PvA 56); J I.264 (ppr. nīyamāna); PvA 4 (id.); DhA III.177; Sdhp 292, 302. Also found in spelling niyyati at Sn 851; Nd1 223 (=yāyati, vuyhati), 395. - In the sense of a Med. in imper. nīyāmase (let us take) Pv II.91 (=nayissāma PvA 113). Nīyāti {Niyati} see niyyāti. Pāli Text Society 855 Pāli-English Dictionary Nīyādita & Nīyādeti {Niyadita} {Niyadeti} see niyy°. Nīyānika {Niyanika} see niyy°. Nīraja {Niraja} (adj.) [Sk. nīraja, nis+raja] free from passion Sdhp 370. Nīrava {Nirava} (adj.) [Sk. nīrava, nis+rava] soundless, noiseless, silent DA I.153 (tuṇhī+). Nīrasa {Nirasa} (adj.) [Sk. nīrasa, nis+rasa] sapless, dried up, withered, tasteless, insipid J III.111. Nīruja {Niruja} (adj.) [Sk. nīruja, nis+rujā]=nīroga Sdhp 496. Nīroga {Niroga} (adj.) [Sk. nīroga, nis+roga] free from disease, healthy, well, unhurt J I.421; III.26; IV.31; PvA 198 (ni°). Cp. nīruja. Nīla {Nila} (adj.) [Vedic nīla, perhaps conn. with Lat. nites to shine, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] dark-blue, blue-black, blue-green. Nīla serves as a general term to designate the "colouredblack," as opposed to the "colouredwhite" (pīta yellow), which pairs (nīla-pīta) are both set off against the "pure" colour-sensations of red (lohitaka) & white (odāta), besides the distinct black or dark (see kaṇha). Therefore n. has a fluctuating connotation (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. p. 49 & Dhs. trsl. p. 62), its only standard combn being that with pīta, e. g. in the enumn of the ten kasiṇa practices (see kasiṇa): nīla pīta lohita odāta; in the description of the 5 colours of the Buddha's eye: nīla pītaka lohitaka kaṇha odāta (Nd2 235, Ia under cakkhumā); which goes even so far as to be used simply in the sense of "black & white," e. g. VvA 320. Applied to hair (lomāni) D II.144; M II.136. See further enumn at VvA 111 & under kaṇha. - A III.239; IV.263 sq., 305, 349; V.61; Vism 110, 156, 173; ThA 42 (mahā° great blue lotus); Dhs 617; Pv II.25; PvA 32, 46, 158; Sdhp 246, 270, 360. -abbha a black cloud Pv IV.39. -abhijāti a dark (unfortunate) birth (cp. kaṇh°) A III.383; -uppala blue lotus J III.394; Vv 454 (=kuvalaya); DhA I.384; -kasiṇa the "blue" kasiṇa (q. v.) D III.248; Dhs 203; (Vam 172 etc.; -gīva "blue neck," a peacock Sn 221 =maṇi-daṇḍa-sadisāya gīvāya n. ti SnA 277); -pupphī N. of plant ("blueblossom") J VI.53; -bījaka a waterplant ("blue-seed") Bdhgh at Vin III.276; -maṇi a sapphire ("blue-stone") J II.112; IV.140; DhA III.254; -vaṇṇa blue colour, coloured blue or green J IV.140 (of the ocean); Dhs 246. Nīlaka {Nilaka} (adj.) for nīla M II.201; see vi°. Nīliya {Niliya} [fr. nīlī] an (indigo) hair dye J III.138 (Com. nīliyaka). Nīlī {Nili} (f.) [Sk. nīlī] the indigo plant, indigo colour A III.230, 233. Nīḷa {Nila} [Vedic nīḍa] a nest (J V.92): see niḍḍha: cp. °pacchi bird cage J II.361; roga° It 37; vadharoga° Th I.1093. Nīvaraṇa {Nivarana} (nt. occasionally m.) [Sk. *nivāraṇa, nis+ varaṇa of vṛ (vṛṇoti), see nibbuta & cp. nivāraṇa] an obstacle, hindrance, only as tt. applied to obstacles in an ethical sense & usually enumd or referred to in a set of 5 (as paðca nīvaraṇāni and p. āvaraṇāni), viz. kāmacchanda, (abhijjhā-)vyāpāda, thīna-middha, uddhaccakukkucca, vicikicchā i. e. Pāli Text Society 856 Pāli-English Dictionary sensuality, ill-will, torpor of mind or body, worry, wavering (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 310): D I.73 (°e, acc. pl.), 246; II.83, 300; III.49 sq., 101, 234, 278; S II.23; III.149; V.60, 84 sq., 93 sq., 145, 160, 226, 327, 439; M I.60, 144, 276; III.4, 295; A I.3, 161; III.16, 63, 230 sq.; 386; IV.457; V.16, 195, 322; Sn 17; Nd1 13; Nd2 379; Ps I.31, 129, 163; Pug 68; Dhs 1059, 1136, 1495; Vbh 199, 244, 378; Nett 11, 13, 94; Vism 146, 189; DA I.213; Sdhp 459, 493 and passim. - Other enumns are occasionally found e. g. 10 at S V.110; 8 at M I.360 sq.; 6 at Dhs 1152. Nīvaraṇiya (adj.) [fr. nīvaraṇa] belonging to an obstacle, forming a hindrance, obstructing Dhs 584, 1164, 1488; Vbh 12, 30, 66, 130 etc. {Nivaraniya} Nīvāra {Nivara} [Sk. nīvāra, unexplained] raw rice, paddy D I.166; A I.241, 295; II.206; Pug 55; J III.144 (°yāgu). Nīhaṭa [pp. of nīharati=Sk. nirhṛta] thrown out, removed; in f. abstr. °tā ejection, removal [cp. Sk. nirhṛti] DhA III.336 (malānaṃ n. the extirpation of impurity or removal of stain). {Nihata} Nīharaṇa {Niharana} (nt.) [fr. nīharati] taking out, carrying away, removing DA I.296; PvA 7. Nīharati {Niharati} [nis+hṛ] to take out, to throw out, drive out J I.150, 157; III.52; VI.336; Nd2 1997 (ni°); VvA 222, 256; PvA 73, 254; Miln 8, 219. aor. nīhari D I.92; J I.293; II.154; PvA 41, 178 (gehato taṃ n.). grd. nīharitabba DhA I.397 (opp. pavesetabba). - pp. nīhaṭa. - Caus. nīharāpeti to have thrown out, to order to be ejected VvA 141. Nīhāra {Nihara} [cp. Sk. nirhāra] way, manner Vin I.13; J I.127; DhA IV.7. At Vin I.13 also in nīhāra-bhatta (=nīhāraka). Nīhāraka {Niharaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. nīhāra, cp. nīharaṇa] one who carries away Vin I.13 (nīhārabhatta); S V.12, 320, 325 (piṇḍapāta). Nu {Nu} (indecl.) [Ved. nu, Idg. *nu, orig. adv. of time=now; cp. Lat. num (to nunc, now), see nūna] affirm.-indef. part. "then, now." - 1. most freq. combd with interr. pron. and followed by kho, as kin nu kho J II.159; kacci J I.279; kaccin nu (for kaccid nu) J II.133; kathan nu (kho) Vin I.83; kattha PvA 22; etc. - 2. as interr. part. (=Lat. ne, num) in enclitic position Vin I.17; J III.52; Sn 866, 871, 1071; etc. As such also combd with na=nanu (Lat. nonne), which begins the sentence: Vin II.303. (nanu tvaṃ vuḍḍho vīsativasso 'sī ti?); Pv I.84; PvA 39, 136 etc. - Often combd with other emphatic or dubitative particles, like api nu Vin II.303; D I.97; nu idha, contr. to nīdha Vv 836 or with sandhi as nu-v-idha D I.108 (v. l. nu khv idha). Cp. na1, nūna, no. Nuṭṭhubhati {Nutthubhati} see niṭṭhubhati. (aor. nuṭṭhubhi, e. g. J II.105). Nuda {Nuda} (-°) (adj.) [Sk. °nud & °nuda, to nudati] expelling, casting out, dispelling; in tamo° dispelling darkness Sn 1133; Vv 352 (=viddhaṃsana VvA 161). Nudaka & Nūdaka {Nudaka} (-°)=nuda J V.401 (āsa-nūdaka). Pāli Text Society 857 Pāli-English Dictionary Nudati {Nudati} [Vedic nudati; Idg. *(s)neu to push, cp. Sk. navate, Gr. neu/w & nu/ssw, Lat. nuo; Ags. neosian, Low Ger. nucken] to push, impel; expel, drive away, reject Dh 28; J IV.443; DhA I.259. aor. nudi Nd2 281. Cp. apa°, pa°, vi°. - pp. nunna (nuṇṇa). Nunna {Nunna} (nuṇṇa) [pp. of nudati] thrust, pushed, driven away, removed Nd2 220 (ṇṇ)=khitta, cp. panuṇṇa A II.41. Nūtana {Nutana} (adj.) [Vedic nūtana, adj.-formation fr. adv. nū, cp. nūna. In formation cp. Sk. śvastana (of to-morrow), Lat. crastinus etc.] "of now," i. e. recent, fresh, new Dāvs IV.47. Nūna {Nuna} (& nūnaṃ DhsA 164) (indecl.) [Ved. nūnaṃ=Gr. nu/n, Lat. nunc (cp. num); Goth. nu, Ger. nun, cp. E. now. See also nu] affirmative-dubitative particle with Pot. or Ind., viz. 1. (dubit.-interrog.) is it then, now, shall I etc. (=Lat. subjunctive, hortative & dubitative) D I.155 (=Lat. num, cp. nu). Esp. freq. with rel. pron. yaṃ=yaṃ nūna what if, shall I, let me (Lat. age) Sn p. 80 (yaṃ nūn'āhaṃ puccheyyaṃ let me ask, I will ask); J I.150, 255; III.393; PvA 5 (y. n. āhaṃ imassa avassayo bhaveyyaṃ=let me help him). - 2. (affirm.) surely, certainly, indeed Sn 1058 (api nūna pajaheyyuṃ); A V.194; J I.60; V.90; Pv II.924 (nuna); Miln 20; DhsA 164; PvA 95 (nuna as v. l.; text reads nanda). Nūpura {Nupura} [Sk. nūpura; Non-Aryan. Cp. Prk. ṇeura & nīdhura (nīyura)] an ornament for the feet, an anklet Th 2, 268; DA I.50. Ne & Nesan {Ne} {Nesan} see na3. Neka {Neka} (adj.) [Sk. naika=na eka, cp. aneka] not one, several, many Sn 308; Vv 536 (°citta variegated=nānāvidhacitta VvA 236), 641 (id.=anekacitta VvA 275); Tikp 366. Nekatika {Nekatika} (adj.) [fr. nikati] deceitful, fraudulent; a cheat D III.183; Th 1, 940; Miln 290; PvA 209; J IV.184. Nekada {Nekada} =anekadā (frequently). Nekāyika {Nekayika} (adj.) [fr. nikāya] versed in the 4 (or 5) Nikāyas Miln 22; cp. Cunningham, Stupa of Bharhut 142, 52. Nekkha {Nekkha} [Vedic niṣka; cp. nikkha] a golden ornament, a certain coin of gold S I.65; A I.181; II.8, 29; Dh 230 (=DhA III.329 jambonada nikkha); Vism 48; v. l. at Vv 208, 438. Nekkhamma {Nekkhamma} (nt.) [formally a derivation fr. nikkhamma (ger. of nikkhamati)=Sk. *naiṣkramya, as shown also by its semantic affinity to nikkhanta, in which the metaphorical sense has entirely superseded the literal one. On the other hand, it may be a bastard derivation fr. nikkāma=Sk. *naiṣkāmya, although the adj. nikkāma does not show the prevailing meaning & the wide range of nikkhanta, moreover formally we should expect nekkamma. In any case the connection with kāma is pre-eminently felt in the connotation of n., as shown by var. passages where a play of word exists between n. & kāma (cp. kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ It 61, cp. Vin I.104; A III.245; also M I.115). The use of the similar term abhinikkhamana further warrants its derivation fr. nikkhamati] giving up the Pāli Text Society 858 Pāli-English Dictionary world & leading a holy life, renunciation of, or emancipation from worldliness, freedom from lust, craving & desires, dispassionateness, self-abnegation, Nibbāna Vin I.18 (°e ānisaṃsa); D I.110 (id.), III.239, 275, 283; M III.129; A I.147 (=khema, i. e. nibbāna); III.245; IV.186 (ānisaṃsa), 439 sq.; Sn 424 (°ṃ daṭṭhu khemato); Dh 181; Ps I.107 sq.; II.169 sq.; Nd2 370; Vism 116, 325; J I.19; 137; Vv 8442 (=nibbāna VvA 348); Nett 53, 87, 106 sq.; Miln 285 (°ṃ abhinikkhanta); DhA III.227; ThA 266. -ādhimutta bent on self-abnegation (enumd with 5 other ideals of Arahantship: paviveka, avyāpajjha, upādānakkhaya, taṇhakkhaya, asammoha) Vin I.183; A III.376; -ābhirata fond of renunciation A IV.224; V.175; Ps II.173; -dhātu the sphere or element of dispassionateness S II.152; Vbh 86; Nett 97; Vism 487. -ninna merging into or bent on a holy life S III.233; -vitakka a thought of self-abnegation S II.152; A I.275; II.252; It 82; sankappa=prec. S II.152; A III.146; Vbh 104, 235; -sita based or bent on a holy life (opp. geha° q. v.) S IV.232; -sukha the joy or happiness of Arahantship M III.110; A I.80; Dh 267, 272; DhA III.400. Negama {Negama} (adj.-n.) [fr. nigama] the inhabitant of a (small) town; citizen; also collect.=jana, people Vin I.268, 273; D I.136, 139; J IV.121; VI.493; Dāvs III.3; DA I.297. Often combd with °jānapadā (pl.) "townsmen & countryfolk" S I.89; D III.148, 172; J 149. Necayika {Necayika} (adj.) [fr. nicaya] rich, wealthy D I.136, 142 (read nevāsika cp. naivasika M Vastu III.38); A V.149 (v. l. BB nerayika, Com. nevāsiko ti nivāsakaro). Netar {Netar} [Vedic netṛ, n. ag. of neti] a leader, guide, forerunner Sn 86, 213; Nd1 446. Neti {Neti} (nayeti) [Vedic nayati, nī] to lead, guide, conduct; to take, carry (away); fig. to draw a conclusion, to understand, to take as Dh 80, 145, 240, 257; J I.228; IV.241 (nayaṃ n. to draw a proper conclusion); VvA 42 (narati=nayati); imper. naya Pv II.113, & nehi J II.160; PvA 147; poetic imper. nayāhi see in paṭi°; pot. naye Dh 256 (to lead a cause=vinicchineyya DhA III.381). fut. nessāmi J II.159; Pv II.45; aor. nayi J IV.137. ger. netvā PvA 5, 6, etc. inf. netuṃ PvA 123, 145 (°kāma), & netave J I.79=Dh 180. grd. neyya (see sep.), pp. nīta. Pass. nīyati (q. v.). Cp. naya, nīti, netta etc.; also ā°, upa°, paṭi°, vi°. Netta1 {Netta} [Sk. netra, fr. neti] a guide J III.111; Nett. 130. Netta2 {Netta} (nt.) [Sk. netra] guidance, anything that guides, a conductor, fig. the eye. S I.26 (sārathī nettāni gahetvā =the reins); Vin I.204 (dhūma° for smoke); J IV.363 (id.); D I.12 (°tappana, set t. & cp. DA I.98); Sn 550 (pasanna°), 1120; Nd2 371 (=cakkhu), 669; J VI.290 (tamba° with red eyes); Pv I.83 (eyes=nayanāni Com.); Dhs 597; Vbh 71 sq. Netti {Netti} (f.) [Vedic netrī, f. to netṛ] a guide, conductor; support (=nettika2) It 37 (āhāra°pabhava), 38 (bhava°), 94 (netticchinna bhikkhu=Arahant). Cp. nettika2 & dhamma°, bhava°. Nettiṃsa {Nettimsa} [cp. Sk. nistriṃśa, Halāyudha 2, 317; very doubtful, whether nis+triṃśa (thirty), prob. a dial. distortion] a sword J II.77 (°vara-dhārin; C. nettiṃsā vuccanti khaggā); IV.118 (C. gives it as adj.=nikkaruṇa, merciless; & says "khaggassa nāmaṃ"); VI.188 (°varadhārin). Pāli Text Society 859 Pāli-English Dictionary Nettika {Nettika} (adj.-n.) [netta+ika] 1. having as guide or forerunner, in Bhagavaṃ°'dhamma M I.310; A I.199; IV.158, 351; V.355. - 2. a conduit for irrigation; one who makes conduits for watering Dh 80 (=udakaṃ nenti nettikā), 145; fig. that which supplies with food or water, in bhava° ("the roots of existence, clinging to existence") D I.46 (ucchinna° with the roots of existence cut); sanettika clinging to existence, a bad man A II.54. Cp. netti. Netthar {Netthar} [see nittharati; does any connection exist with Vedic neṣṭṛ?] only in phrase netthāraṃ vattati to behave in such a way as to get rid of blame or fault Vin II.5; III.183; M I.442. - Bdhgh on Vin II.5 (p. 309) explains: nittharantānaṃ etan ti netthāraṃ yena sakkā nissāraṇā nittharituṃ taṃ aṭṭhārasa-vidhaṃ sammāvattuṃ vattantī ti attho. Nepakka {Nepakka} (nt.) [fr. nipaka] prudence, discrimination, carefulness; usually as sati° S V.197 sq.; M I.356; A III.11; IV.15; Nd2 629 B; Vbh 244, 249; Vism 3 (=paððā); DhA IV.29. Nepuñña {Nepunna} (nt.) [fr. nipuṇa] experience, skill, cleverness Pug 25, 35; Dhs 16, 292; DhsA 147. Nema {Nema} [cp. nemi] edge, point; root S V.445; A IV.404; gambhīra° (adj.) with deeply rooted point, firmly established S V.444; A IV.106. Nemantaṇika {Nemantanika} (adj.) [fr. nimantana] one who lives by invitations M I.31. Nemi {Nemi} (f.) [Vedic nemi, perhaps to namati] the circumference of a wheel, circumference, rim, edge (cp. nema) A I.112; Vv 645; Miln 238, 285; Vism 198 (fig. jarāmaraṇa°, the rim of old age & death, which belongs to the wheel of Saṃsāra of the chariot of existence, bhavaratha); DhA II.124 (°vaṭṭi); VvA 277. Nemitta {Nemitta} [Sk. naimitta, fr. nimitti] a fortune-teller, astrologer D II.16, 19; A III.243. Nemittaka & Nemittika {Nemittaka} {Nemittika} [Sk. naimittika, fr. nimitta] an astrologer, fortuneteller, soothsayer D I.8 (i)=DA I.91; A III.111; J IV.124; Miln 19 (i), 229; Vism 210 (i); DhA II.241 (a). Nemittikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. nemittika]=nimitta-kammaṃ, i. e. prognostication; inquisitiveness, insinuation Vbh 352=Vism 23; expld at Vism 28. {Nemittikata} Nemiya {Nemiya} (adj.) [=nemika] (-°) having a circumference etc. J VI.252. Neyya {Neyya} (adj.) [grd. of neti; Sk. neya] to be led, carried etc.; fig. to be instructed; to be inferred, guessed or understood Sn 55, 803, 846, 1113; Nd1 114, 206; Nd2 372; Pug 41; Nett 9 sq., 125; -attha the meaning which is to be inferred (opp. nītattha) A I.60; Nett 21. Nerayika (adj.) [fr. niraya, cp. BSk. nairayika Divy 165] belonging to niraya or purgatory, hellish; one doomed to suffering in purgatory (n. satta=inhabitant of n.) Vin II.205 (āpāyiko n. kappaṭṭho); IV.7; D III.6, 9, 12; A I.265; II.231 (vedanaṃ vediyati . . . seyyathā pi sattā nerayikā); III.402 sq.; Sn 664; Nd1 97 (gati); Vv 521, J IV.3 (sattā); Pug 51; Vbh 412 sq.; Vism 415 (°sattā), 424; Miln 148 (sattā); PvA 27 (id.), 52 (°bhāva), 255; VvA 23; Sdhp 193, 198. {Nerayika} Pāli Text Society 860 Pāli-English Dictionary Nerutta {Nerutta} (adj.-n.) [fr. nirutti] based on etymology; an etymologist or philologist ThA 153; Nett 8, 9, 32, 33. Neḷa & Nela {Nela} (adj.) [na+eḷa=Sk. anenas, of enas fault, sin. The other negated form, also in meaning "pure, clean," is aneḷa (& aneḷaka), q. v. On ḷ: n. cp. lāngala; nangala; tulā: tūṇa etc.] 1. without fault or sin, blameless, faultless; not hurting, humane, gentle, merciful, innocuous D I.4 (Bdhgh explains: elaṃ vuccati doso; n'assā (i. e. vācāya) elan ti nelā; niddosā ti attho. "Nelango setapacchādo" ti ettha vuttanelaṃ viya; DA I.75); A II.209; V.205; J V.156; Vv 5018, 636 (=niddosa VvA 262); Pug 29, 57; Dhs 1343 (vācā)=niddosa DhsA 397. - 2. (somewhat doubtful) "clean," with ref. to big cats (mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati), whereas young ones are called "elephants, cubs" (something like "pigs") (taruṇā bhinka-cchāpamaṇḍalaṃ) J V.418. -anga of faultless limbs or parts, of a chariot (ratha) =running perfectly S IV.291=Ud 76 (nelagga text, nelanga v. l.)=DA I.75=DhsA 397. -patī (f.)=neḷavatī (of vācā) humane, gentle J VI.558 (na elapatī elapāta-rahitā madhurā Com.). Neva {Neva} (indecl.) [na+eva] see na2. - nevasaððā-nāsañña (being) neither perception nor nonperception, only in cpd. °āyatana & in nevasaððī-nāsaððin: see saððā. Nevāpika {Nevapika} (adj.-n.) [fr. nivāpa] a deer-feeder M I.150 sq. Nevāsika {Nevasika} (adj.) [fr. nivāsa, cp. BSk. naivāsika AvS I.286, 287] one who inhabits, an inmate; living in a place, local J I.236 sq.; DhA II.53 sq. Cp. necayika. Nesajjika (adj.) [fr. nisajjā] being & remaining in a sitting position (as an ascetic practice) A III.220; Th 1, 904, 1120; Nd2 587; J IV.8; Pug 69; Vism 79; Miln 20, 342. The n-°anga is one of the dhūtanga-precepts, enjoining the sitting posture also for sleeping, see Vin V.193, Vism 61, & dhūtanga. {Nesajjika} Nesāda {Nesada} [fr. nisāda; cp. Sk. niṣāda & naiṣāda=one who lies in wait] a hunter; also a low caste Vin IV.7 (+veṇa & rathakāra); S I.93 (°kula); A I.107; II.85; J II.36; III.330; IV.397, 413; V.110, 337; VI.71; Pug 51 (°kula); Miln 311; DhA III.24; PvA 176. No1 {No} (indecl.) affirm. & emphatic part.=nu (cp. na1): indeed, then, now Sn 457, 875, 1077; J V.343 (api no= api nu), 435 (=nipātamattaṃ p. 437). No2 {No} (indecl.) [Sk. no=na+u, a stronger na; cp. na2) negative & adversative particle=neither, nor, but not, surely not, indeed not. - (a) in neg. sentences: Sn 852, 855, 1040; It 103 (but not); Pv II.313 (but not). as answer: no hi etaṃ "indeed not, no indeed" Vin I.17; D I.3; no hi idaṃ D I.105. - no ca kho "but surely not" D I.34, 36; A V.195. - Often emphasized by na, as no na not at all J I.64; na no Sn 224 (="avadhāraṇe" KhA 170); disjunctively na hi . . . no neither-nor Sn 813; na no . . . na neither-nor (notnor) Sn 455. - (b) in disjunctive questions: "or not," as evaṃ hoti vā . . . no vā (is it so-or not) D I.61, 227; kacci . . . no (is it so-or not; Lat. ne-annon) D I.107; nu kho . . . no udāhu (is it that-or not; or rather) D I.152. - (c) noce (no ce=Sk. no ced) if not (opp. sace) Sn 348, 691, 840; J I.222; VI.365; VvA 69. Also in sense of "I hope not" J V.378. No3 {No} [Sk. naḥ] enclitic form, gen. dat. acc. pl. of pron. 1st (we)=amhākaṃ, see vayaṃ; cp. na3. Pāli Text Society 861 Nodeti {Nodeti} [fr. nud] see vi°. Nonīta {Nonita} see navanīta. Nhāru {Nharu} see nahāru. Found e. g. at Vin I.25. Pāli-English Dictionary Pāli Text Society 862 Pāli-English Dictionary P Pa° {Pa°} , Oir. ro-] directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger. ver- in its function of Goth. fra & Ger. vor). Thus the sphere of pa- may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i. e. down; °neti bring forth (to); °gaṇhāti hold out; °tharati spread forth; °dhāvati run out; °bajati go forth; °sāreti stretch out; etc. - 2. (intensive) in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsld by "up," or "out," or "about"): pakopeti up-set; °chindati cut up; °bhañjati break up; °cinati heap up; °kiṇṇaka scattered about; °nāda shouting out; °bhāti shine forth; °bhavati grow up, prevail; °dūseti spoil entirely; °jahati give up entirely; °tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dīpeti); °jalati blaze up; °jānāti know well. - In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; °thaddha quite stiff; °dakkhiṇa right in pre-eminence; °bala very strong. - 3. "onward": paṭṭhāya from . . . onward; pavattati move on; fig. "further, later": paputta a later (secondary) son, i. e. grandson. - 4. "in front of," "before": padvāra, before the door. - 5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use, like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp Ger. besingen, anrufen).-The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam-ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaṃsiya (a+pa°). °Pa {°Pa} (adj.) [Cp. Ved. °pa, adj. base of pā to drink, as °ga fr. gam or °ṭha fr. sthā] drinking; only in foll. cpds.: dhenu° drinking of the cow, suckling calf M I.79; Sn 26 (=dhenuṃ pivanto SnA 39); - pāda° a tree (lit. drinking with its feet, cp. expln at PvA 251 "pādasadisehi mūl' āvayavehi udakassa pivanato pādapo ti") Pv IV.39; - majja° drinking intoxicants Sn 400; Pv IV.177 (a°). Paṃsu {Pamsu} [cp. Ved. pāṃsu] dust, dirt, soil S V.459; A I.253; Pv II.37. - paṃsvāgārakā playmates S III.190; saha- paṃsukīḷitā id. (lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) A II.186; J I.364; PvA 30. Cp. BSk. sahapāṃśukrīḍita MVastu III.450. -kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts II.156) Vin I.58; M I.78; S II.202; A I.240, 295; II.206; IV.230; It 102=A II.26; Dh 395; Pug 69; PvA 141, 144. A quāsi definition of p.-k. is to be found at Vism 60. -kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap M I.30; S II.187; A III.187, 219, 371 sq.; Vin III.15; IV.360; Ud 42; Pug 55; DhA IV.157; °attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags M I.214; III.41; A I.38; III.108. -guṇṭhita (vv. ll. °kuṇḍita, °kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt S I.197; J VI.559; Pv II.35. - pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) J III.147; IV.380; DhA II.26. muṭṭhi a handful of soil J VI. 405. -vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud) SnA 137. Paṃsuka {Pamsuka} (adj.) [Epic Sk. pāṃśuka; Ved. pāṃsura] dusty; (m.) a dusty robe KhA 171 (v. l. paṃsukūla). Pakaṭṭhaka {Pakatthaka} [pa+kaṭṭha+ka; kaṭṭha pp. of kṛṣ, cp. Sk. prakarṣaka of same root in same meaning, but cp. also kaṭṭha2] (adj.) troublesome, annoying; (m.) a troubler, worrier S I.174 (v. l. pagaṇḍaka; C. rasagiddha; trsl. "pertinacious"). Pakaṭṭhita {Pakatthita} see pakk°. Pāli Text Society 863 Pāli-English Dictionary Pakata {Pakata} [pp. of pa+kṛ] done, made; as -° by nature (cp. pakati) Sn 286; J IV.38; Pv I.68; II.316; III.105 (pāpaṃ= samācaritaṃ PvA 214); Miln 218; DhA II.11 (pāpaṃ); PvA 31, 35, 103 (ṭ), 124. - icchāpakata covetous by nature A III.119, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Vism 24 (here however taken by Bdhgh as "icchāya apakata" or "upadduta"); issāpakata envious by nature S II.260; PvA 46, cp. macchariyā pakata afflicted with selfishness PvA 124. On pakata at It 89 see apakata. pakatatta (pakata+ attan) natural, of a natural self, of good behaviour, incorrupt, "integer" Vin II.6, 33, 204; J I.236 (bhikkhu, +sīlavā, etc.). At Vin II.32 the pakatatta bhikkhu as the regular, ordained monk is contrasted with the pārivāsika bh. or probationer. Pakati {Pakati} (f.) [cp. Ved. prakṛti] 1. original or natural form, natural state or condition (lit. make-up); as °-: primary, original, real Vin. I.189; II.113; J I.146 (°vesena in her usual dress); KhA 173 (°kammakara, °jeṭṭhaputta); VvA 12 (°pabhassara), 109 (°bhaddatā). - instr. pakatiyā by nature, ordinarily, as usual Ps II.208; VvA 78; PvA 215, 263. - 2. occasion, happening, opportunity, (common) occurrence D I.168 (trsl. "common saying"); Pv II.89 (=°pavutti PvA 110). - Der. pakatika & pākatika. -upanissaya sufficing condition in nature: see Cpd. 194 n. 3. gamana natural or usual walk DhA I 389. -citta ordinary or normal consciousness Kvu 615 (cp. Kvu trsl. 359 n. 5, and BSk. prakṛti-nirvāṇatva Bodhicary. at Poussin 256). -yānaka ordinary vehicle DhA I.391. -sīla natural or proper virtue DA I.290. Pakatika {Pakatika} (adj.) [fr. pakati] being by nature, of a certain nature J II.30; Miln 220; DA I.198; PvA 242 (=rūpa); DhsA 404. Pakattheti {Pakattheti} [pa+kattheti] talk out against, denounce J V.7 (mā °katthāsi; C. akkosi garahi nindi; gloss paccakkhāsi). Should it be 'pakaḍḍhāsi? Pakappanā {Pakappana} (f.) [fr. pakappeti] fixing one's attention on, planning, designing, scheme, arrangement Sn 945 (cp. Nd1 72 186, where two pakappanā's, viz. taṇhā° & diṭṭhi°; at Nd1 429 it is synonymous with taṇhā; Bdhgh has reading pakampana for °kapp° and expld by kampakaraṇa SnA 568). Pakappita {Pakappita} [pp. of pakappeti] arranged, planned, attended to, designed, made Sn 648 (=kata SnA 471). 784, 786 (diṭṭhi "prejudiced view" Fausböll; cp. Nd1 72 and pakappanā), 802, 838 (=kappita abhisankhata saṇṭhapita Nd1 186), 902, 910. Pakappeṭi {Pakappeti} [pra+Caus. of kḷp, cp. Ved. prakalpayitar] to arrange, fix, settle, prepare, determine, plan S II.65 (ceteti p. anuseti); Sn 886 (pakappayitvā=takkayitvā vitakkayitvā saṃkappayitvā Nd1 295). - pp. pakappita (q. v.). Pakampati [pa+kampati. Cp. BSk. prakampati Jtm 220; Mvyutp. 151=kampati.] to shake, quake, tremble J I.47 (v. 269); PvA 199. - Caus. pakampeti S I.107. {Pakampati} Pakampana {Pakampana} see pakappanā. Pakampita {Pakampita} [pp. of pa+kamp] shaken, trembling S I.133= Th 2, 200. Pakaraṇa {Pakarana} (nt.) [fr. pa+kṛ] 1. performance, undertaking paragraph (of the law) D I.98 ("offence"? see Dial. I.120); S III.91; Miln 189. - 2. occasion Vin I.44; II.75; III.20. - 3. exposition, Pāli Text Society 864 Pāli-English Dictionary arrangement, literary work, composition, book; usually in titles only, viz. Abhidhamma° J I.312; Dpvs V.37; Kathāvatthu° Paṭṭhāna° Miln 12; Netti° one of the Canonical books (see netti). Pakaroti [pa+kṛ, Ved. prakaroti] to effect, perform, prepare, make, do S I.24 (pakubbati); Sn 254 (id.), 781, 790 (ppr. med. pakubbamāna; cp. Nd1 65); It 21 (puññaṃ); SnA 169 (pakurute, corresponding with sevati). - pp. pakata (q. v.). {Pakaroti} Pakāra {Pakara} [pa+kṛ, cp. last; but Sk. prakāra "similarity"] 1. make-up, getting up, fixing, arrangement, preparation, mode, way, manner J II.222; DA I.132; PvA 26, 109, 123, 135, 178, 199; Sdhp 94, 466. - 2. ingredient, flavour, way of making (a food) tasty Sn 241 (kathappakāro tava āmagandho); Miln 63. - 3. (-°) of a kind, by way of, in nānā° (adj.) various, manifold J I.52 (sakuṇā), 278 (phalāni); PvA 50; vutta° as said, the said Vism 42, 44; PvA 136. Pakāraka {Pakaraka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. pakāra] of that kind S II.81; J VI.259. Pakāreti {Pakareti} [Denom. fr. pakāra] to direct one's thought towards (dat.) J VI.307. Pakāsati {Pakasati} [pa+kāś] to shine forth, to be visible, to become known Sn 445, 1032 (=bhāsati tapati virocati Nd2 373). - Caus. pakāseti to show up, illustrate, explain, make known, give information about Vin II.189; S I.105; It 111 (brahmacariyaṃ); Dh 304; Sn 578, 1021; Pug 57; J VI.281 (atthaṃ to explain the meaning or matter); DhA II.11 (id.); PvA 1, 12 (ānisaṃsaṃ) 29 (atthaṃ upamāhi), 32 (attānaṃ), 40 (adhippāyaṃ), 42 (saccāni) 72 etc. - grd. pakāsaniya to be made known or announced in °kamma explanation, information, annunciation Vin II.189 (cp. Vin. Texts III.239). - pp. pakāsita (q. v.). Pakāsana (nt.) [pa+kāś, cp. pakāsati] explaining, making known; information, evidence, explanation, publicity Ps I.104 (dhamma°); Miln 95; SnA 445; PvA 2, 50, 103 (expln of āvi). {Pakasana} Pakāsita {Pakasita} [pp. of pakāseti] explained, manifested, made known S I.161, 171 sq.; II.107 (su°); PvA 53, 63. Pakiṇāti {Pakinati} [pa+kiṇāti] to deal in Vin II.267 (grd. °kiṇitabba). Pakiṇṇaka {Pakinnaka} (adj.) [pa+kiṇṇa (pp. of kirati)+ka] scattered about; fig. miscellaneous, particular, opp. to sādhāraṇa KhA 74; cp. Cpd. 13, 952; Vism 175 (°kathā); 317 sq. (id.). - As Np. name of the xivth book of the Jātakas. Pakitteti {Pakitteti} [pa+kitteti] to proclaim J I.17 (v. 85). Pakirati {Pakirati} [pa+kirati] 1. to let down (the hair), scatter, let fall D II.139=148 (ger. pakiriya); J V.203 (so read for parikati); VI.207 (aor °kiriṃsu). - ger. pakira (=pakiritvā) J VI.100 (read pakira-cārī, cp. C. on p. 102), 198 (read p. -parī). - Caus. pakireti 1. to throw down, upset Vin IV.308 (thūpaṃ); S I.100; It 90 (v. l. kīrati). - 2. to scatter S I.100=It 66; Pug 23. - pp. pakiṇṇa (see °ka). Pāli Text Society 865 Pāli-English Dictionary Pakiledeti {Pakiledeti} [Caus of pa+kliś, cp. kelideti] to make wet, moisten (with hot water) J VI.109 (=temetvā khipati C.). Pakujjhati {Pakujjhati} [pa+krudh] to be angry S I.221, 223 (°eyyaṃ). Pakuṭa {Pakuta} (?) [v. l. pakuṭṭa] an inner verandah Vin II.153; cp. Vin. Texts III.175. - Kern. Toev. s. v. expld it as miswriting for pakuṭṭha (=Sk. prakoṣṭha an inner court in a building, Prk. paoṭṭha, cp. P. koṭṭha1 & koṭṭhaka1). Spelling pakulla at Nd2 485 B (for magga, v. l. makula). Pakuppati {Pakuppati} [pa+kup] to be angry J IV.241. Pakubb° {Pakubb°} see pakaroti. Pakūjin {Pakujin} (adj.) [pa+kūj] to sing out to (each other) (aññamaññaṃ) J VI.538. Pakopa {Pakopa} [pa+kopa] agitation, effervescence, anger, fury Dhs 1060; Vism 235, 236. Pakopana {Pakopana} (adj.) [pa+kopana, of kup] shaking, upsetting, making turbulent It 84 (moho citta-pakopano). Pakka {Pakka} (adj.) [Ved. pakva, a pp. formation of pac to cook, Idg. *peqÛo=Lat. coquo "cook," Av. pac-, Obulg. peka, Lith. kepû, Gr. pe/ssw, a)rtoko/pos baker, pe/pwn ripe; also pp. of pacati pakta=Gr. pepto/s, Lat. coctus] 1. ripe (opp. āma raw, as Vedic,; and apakka) and also "cooked, boiled, baked" S I.97 (opp. āmaka); IV.324 (°bhikkhā); Sn 576; J V.286. - nt. pakkaṃ that which is ripe, i. e. a fruit, ripe fruit Pug 44, 45; often in connection with amba° i. e. a (ripe) mango fruit J II.104, 394; Pv IV.123; DhA III.207; PvA 187. - apakka unripe PugA 225; Sdhp 102. - 2. ripe for destruction, overripe, decaying, in phrase °gatta (adj.) having a decaying body, with putrid body [BSk. pakvagātra Divy 82], combd with arugatta at M I.506; S IV.198; Miln 357 (cp. Miln trsl. II.262), 395. - 3. heated, glowing Dpvs I.62. -āsaya receptacle for digested food, i. e. the abdomen (opp. āmāsaya) Vism 260, 358; KhA 59. -odana (adj.) having cooked one's rice Sn 18 (=siddhabhatta SnA 27), cp. J III.425. -jjhāna "guessing at ripeness," i. e. foretelling the number of years a man has yet to live; in list of forbidden crafts at D I.9, expld at DA I.94 as "paripāka-gata-cintā." -pakka ripe fruit KhA 59. -pūva baked cake J III.10. vaṇṇin of ripe appearance Pug 44, 45, cp. PugA 225. -sadisa ripe-like, appearing ripe PugA 225. Pakkaṭhati {Pakkathati} [pa+kaṭhati of kvath] to cook, boil up; only in Caus. II. pakkaṭṭhāpeti (with unexpld ṭṭh for ṭh) to cause to be boiled up J I.472 (v. l. pakkuṭṭh°, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 84). - pp. pakkaṭhita (q. v.). Pakkaṭhita & Pakkuthita {Pakkathita} {Pakkuthita} [also spelt with ṭṭh instead of ṭh or th, perhaps through popular etym. pakka+ṭṭhita for pa+kaṭhita. To kvath, P. kuthati & kaṭhati, appearing in pp. as kaṭhita, kuthita, kaṭṭhita and kuṭṭhita, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 42] cooked up, boiled, boiling hot, hot Thūpavaṃsa 4833; J V.268 (pakaṭṭh° vv. ll. pakkudh° & jakankaṭhi); VI.112 (°kaṭṭh°), 114 (id.; v. l. BB °kuṭhita); DhA I.126 (kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakkanta), 179 (kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh°); II.5 (kaṭṭh°, vv. ll. pakuṭṭh° & pakkuth°); III.310 (1st passage kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh°, Pāli Text Society 866 Pāli-English Dictionary pakkuṭṭh°, pakkuthita;=pakkuṭṭhita at id. p. VvA 67; in 2nd passage kaṭṭh°, v. l. pakuṭṭh° & pakkuthita, left out at id. p. VvA 68); ThA 292 (pakkuthita). Pakkaṭṭhī {Pakkatthi} (f.) [fr. pa+kvat, evidently as abstr. to pakkaṭṭhita; reading uncertain] a boiling (-hot) mixture (of oil?) M I.87, expld by C. as katita- (=kaṭh°) gomaya, boiling cowdung, v. l. chakaṇakā see p. 537. The id. p. at Nd2 199 reads chakaṇaṭī, evidently a bona fide reading. The interpretation as "cow-dung" is more likely than "boiling oil." Pakkanta {Pakkanta} [pp. of pakkamati] gone, gone away, departed S I.153; Sn p. 124; J I.202 (spelt kkh); PvA 78. Pakkandati {Pakkandati} [Ved. prakrandati, pra+krand] to cry out, shout out, wail Sn 310 (3rd pret. pakkanduṃ) J VI.55 (id.), 188 (id.), 301 (id.). Pakkama {Pakkama} [fr. pa+kram] going to, undertaking, beginning D I.168 (tapo°; trsl. "all kinds of penance"). Pakkamati {Pakkamati} [Ved. prakramati, pra+kram] 1. to step forward, set out, go on, go away, go forth M I.105; Pug 58; DA I.94; PvA 13. - pret. 3 sg. pakkāmi S I.92, 120; Sn pp. 93, 124; PvA 5 (uṭṭhāy'āsanā), 19 (id.); 3rd pl. pakkamuṃ Sn 1010, and pakkamiṃsu S I.199. - pp. pakkanta (q. v.). - 2. to go beyond (in archery), to overshoot the mark, miss the aim Miln 250. Pakkava {Pakkava} [etym. ?] a kind of medicinal plant Vin I.201 (cp. paggava). Pakkula {Pakkula} see pākula. Pakkosati {Pakkosati} [pa+kosati, kruś] to call, summon J I.50; II.69, 252 (=avheti); V.297; VI.420; DhA I.50; PvA 81 (v. l. °āpeti). - Caus. II. pakkosāpeti to call, send for, order to come J I.207; PvA 141, 153; DhA I.185. Pakkha1 {Pakkha} [Ved. pakṣa in meanings 1 and 3; to Lat. pectus, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] 1. side of the body, flank, wing, feathers (cp. pakkhin), in cpds. °biḷāla a flying fox (sort of bat) Bdhgh on ulūka-camma at Vin I.186 (MV. V.2, 4; cp. Vin. Texts II.16 where read ulūka° for lūka?); J VI.538; and °hata one who is struck on (one) side, i. e. paralysed on one side, a cripple (cp. Sk. pakṣāghāta) Vin II.90; M III.169; A III.385; Pug 51 (=hatapakkho pīṭhasappi PugA 227); Miln 245, 276 (cp. Miln trsl. II.62, 117) - also as wing of a house at DhsA 107; and wing of a bird at S II.231; SnA 465 (in expln of pakkhin). - 2. side, party, faction; adj (-°) associated with, a partisan, adherent Vin II.299; Sn 347 (aððāṇa°), 967 (kaṇhassa p.=Māra° etc., see Nd1 489; Nett 53 (taṇhā° & diṭṭhi°) 88 (id.), 160 (id.); DA I.281; DhA I.54; PvA 114 (paṭiloma°). pakkhasankanta gone over to a (schismatic) faction Vin I.60; IV.230, 313. - pakkhaṃ dāpeti to give a side, to adhere to (loc.) J I.343. - 3. one half of the (lunar) month, a fortnight. The light or moon-lit fortnight is called sukka-pakkha (or juṇha°), the dark or moonless one kāḷa° (or kaṇha°) M I.20 (cātuddasī paðcadasī aṭṭhamī ca pakkhassa 14th, 15th & 8th day of the fortnight) ≈ Sn 402; A I.142 (aṭṭhamī pakkhassa), 144=Vv 156 (cātuddasī etc.; cp. VvA 71): A V.123 sq. (kāḷa°, juṇha°); Th 2, 423 (=aḍḍhamāsa-mattaṃ ThA 269); Pv II.955 (bahumāse ca pakkhe ca=kaṇhasukka-bheda p. PvA 135); Vism 101 (dasāhaṃ vā pakkhaṃ vā); VvA 314 (sukka°); PvA 55 Pāli Text Society 867 Pāli-English Dictionary (kāḷa°). - 4. alternative, statement, loc. pakkhe (-°) with regard or reference to KhA 80 (tassa paðhassa vyākaraṇapakkhe); SnA 168 (id.). Pakkha2 {Pakkha} (adj.) [cp. Ved. prakhya clear, & Sk. (-°) prakhya like, of pra+khyā] visible, clear; -° resembling, like Miln 75 (mātu° and pitu°). Pakkha3 {Pakkha} [cp. Sk. phakka (?)] a cripple. Cp III.6, 10; J VI.12 (=pīṭha-sappī C.). Note BSk. phakka is enumd at Mvyut. 271120 with jātyaṇḍa, kuṇḍa & pangu, reminding of the combn kāṇo vā kuṇi vā khaðjo vā pakkhahato vā Vin II.90=S I.94=A II.85; III.385.=Pug 51. Pakkhaka {Pakkhaka}(& °ika) (nt.?) [fr. pakkha1] a dress made of wings or feathers, in cpd. ulūka° of owl's wings (see ulūka°) Vin III.34 (°ṃ nivāsetvā); A II.206 ≈ (°ika). Pakkhatta {Pakkhatta} (nt.) [fr. pakkha1] being a partner of, siding in with Vism 129, 130. Pakkhanta {Pakkhanta} at DA I.38 read as pakkanta. Pakkhandaka {Pakkhandaka} (adj.)=pakkhandin SnA 164. - f. pakkhandikā [Ved. (?) praskandikā, BR. without refs.] diarrhœa, dysentery D II.127 (lohita°); J III.143; V.441 (lohita°); Miln 134. Pakkhandati {Pakkhandati} [pa+khandati, of skand] to spring forward, to jump on to M I.86; J I.461; Vv 8412 (ger. pakkhandiyāna=pakkhanditvā anupavisitvā VvA 338); to be after someone in pursuit DhA I.198; usually fig. to rejoice in, find pleasure or satisfaction in (loc.), to take to, in phrases cittaṃ pakkhandati pasīdati santiṭṭhati M I.186; S III.133; cp. Miln 326 (nibbāne); A II.165; III.245 (avyāpāde); IV.442 (adukkha-m-asukhe); It 43 (dhamme); and na me tattha mānasaṃ p. Miln 135. - pp. pakkhanna (q. v.). Pakkhandana (nt.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. leaping, springing J II.32; Ps 1. 194 (pariccāga- & pakkh°- nissagga). - 2. attack, assault, chasing DhA I.198. {Pakkhandana} Pakkhandin {Pakkhandin} (adj. n.) [fr. pakkhandati] 1. (adj.) bold, braggart, lit. jumping on or forth Dh 244; Sn 89 (=pakkhandaka SnA 164). - 2. a military scout, lit. an onrusher, a bravo D I.51 (cp. Dial. I.68); DA I.157; J II.32, 281. Pakkhanna {Pakkhanna} [pp. of pakkhandati; often wrongly spelt pakkhanta] jumped on, fallen on to or into, chanced upon, acquired M I.39; Th 1, 342 (diṭṭhigahanā°); J V.471; Miln 144 (saṃsaya°), 156, 390 (kupatha°). Pakkhara [cp. Sk. prakṣara & prakhara "ein Panzer für Pferde" BR.] bordering, trimming J VI.223 (of a carriage). {Pakkhara} Pakkhalati1 {Pakkhalati} [pa+kṣal] to wash, cleanse J V.71 (ger. pakkhalya=dhovitvā C. p. 74). Caus. pakkhāleti (q. v.). Pakkhalati2 {Pakkhalati} [pa+khalati, of skhal] to stumble, trip, stagger J III.433; VI.332; DA I.37; DhsA 334. Pāli Text Society 868 Pāli-English Dictionary Pakkhāyati {Pakkhayati} [pa+khyā, Ved. prakhyāyate; cp. khāyati & pakkha2] to appear, shine forth, to be clearly visible D II.99 (cp. Th 1, 1034, where pakkhanti for pakkhāyanti metri causā); M II.32; S IV.144; V.153, 162; A III.69 sq. Pakkhāleti {Pakkhaleti} [Caus. of pa+ksal, cp. khaleti] to wash, cleanse Vin I.9 (pāde); D II.85 (id.); M I.205; S I.107; J VI.24 (pāde); VvA 261. Pakkhika {Pakkhika} (adj.) [for pakkhiya=Ved. pakṣya of pakkha1 3] 1. belonging or referring to the (2) lunar fortnights, fortnightly, for a fortnight or in the (specified) fortnight of the month (cp. Vin. Texts III.220). As one special provision of food mentioned in enumn of five bhojanāni, viz. niccabhatta, salākabhatta, pakkhika, uposathika, pāṭipadika, Vin I.58=II.175; IV.75; J II.210; Vism 66. - 2. (cp. pakkha 2 & pakkhin 2) contributing to, leading to, associated with, siding with (-°) Vism 130, in phrase vighāta° anibbāna-saṃvattanika associated with destruction, etc. M I.115; DhsA 382. Also in mūga° leading to deafness J I.45 (V.254). - DhA I.82 (paramattha-sacca°). Pakkhitta {Pakkhitta} [pp. of pakkhipati] put down into, thrown into (loc.) Sn p. 15 (pāyāso udake p.); PvA 58 (ātave p. naḷo is perhaps better read ātāpe paditto), 153 (pokkharaṇiyaṃ p.). Pakkhin {Pakkhin} (adj. n.) [fr. pakkha1=pakkhānaṃ atthitāya pakkhī ti vuccati SnA 465; Ved. pakṣin bird] 1. winged, the winged one, a bird D I.71 (+sakuṇa=pakkhayutto sakuṇo DA I.208)=A II.209=V.206=Pug 58, S II.231; Sn 606 (=sakuṇo SnA 465); Pv III.53 (°gaṇā =sakuṇagaṇā PvA 198). - 2. (cp. pakkha 2) participating in, contributing to S V.97 (vighāta° for the usual °pakkhika). Pakkhipati [pa+kṣip, in sense of putting down carefully cp. nikkhipati & BSk. prakṣipati to start a ship Divy 334] 1. to put down into (with loc. of receptacle), place into, enclose in (often used for ceremony of putting a corpse into a shell or mount) D II.162 (teladoṇiyā Bhagavato sarīraṃ p.); S II.85; J II.210 (mukhe); Miln 247 (Amat'osadhaṃ); PvA 41 (atthikāni thūpe p.); DhA I.71 (the corpse into the fire). - 2. to throw into, hurl into, in Nirayapassage at M III.183=A I.141= Nd2 304III; cp. nikkhipati. - 3. (fig.) to include in, insert, arrange, interpolate Miln 13 (Abhidhammapiṭakaṃ kusalā dhammā, akusalā dh., avyākatā dh. ti tīsu padesu p.). - Caus. II. pakkhipāpeti J I.467; DA I.136. - pp. pakkhitta (q. v.). {Pakkhipati} Pakkhima {Pakkhima} [=pakkhin] a bird Th 1, 139 (read °me for °maṃ); J V.339. Pakkhiya {Pakkhiya} (adj. n.) [fr. pakkha1 2; cp. pakkhikā] siding with, associating with; m. part, side; only in phrase (satta-tiṃsa-) bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā the 37 parts of enlightenment It 75 (satta only); J I.275; Vism 678 sq.; SnA 164; VvA 95; see Cpd. 179 and note 1. - pakkhiya at Th 2, 425 is not clear (expld at ThA 269 by vaccha, v. l. sacca). Pakkhepa {Pakkhepa} (m.) & °na (nt.) [fr. pa+kṣip] throwing, hurling; being thrown into (loc.) PvA 221 (lohakumbhi° in passage of ordeals in Niraya); DhA I.357 (nadiyaṃ visa-pakkhepana). Pakhuma {Pakhuma} [Ved. pakṣman, diaeretic form for the contracted form pamha, the latter prepondering in poetry, while pakhuma is mostly found in prose. Similar doublets are sukhuma & saṇha; as regards etym. cp. Av. pasnem eyelid, Gr. pe/ktw to comb, po/kos fleece, Pāli Text Society 869 Pāli-English Dictionary Lat. pecto to comb, pecten comb, Ohg. fahs hair] an eyelash, unsally as adj.: having eyelashes (-°) D II.18 (go°); S I.132 (°antarikāyaṃ between the lashes); J V.216 (visāla° for alārapamha T.); ThA 255 (dīgha° for āyatapamha Th 2, 383); VvA 162, 279. Pagaṇḍaka {Pagandaka} see pakaṭṭhaka. Pagabbha {Pagabbha} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pragalbha] bold, daring, forward, reckless M I.236; S I.201 (sup°); A III.433; Sn 89, 852 (ap°=na pagabbha KhA 242, cp. also Nd1 228); Dh 244 (=kāyapāgabbhiyādīhi samannāgata DhA III.354); J II.32, 281, 359; V.448; Miln 389; Dāvs III.26. apagabbha at Vin. III.3 is used in quite a diff. sense, viz. "one who has no more connection with a womb" (a+pa+*garbha) Pagabbhatā (f.) [abstr. fr. pagabbha, cp. Sk. pragalbhatā] resoluteness, boldness, decision J VI.273. See also pāgabbhiya. {Pagabbhata} Pagabbhin {Pagabbhin} (adj.) [=pagabbha] bold J VI.238. Pagama {Pagama} [fr. pra+gam] going forth from (-°) DhsA 329. Pagāḷha {Pagalha} [pp. of pagāhati] sunk into, immersed in (loc.) Sn 441, 772 (=ogāḷha ajjhogāḷha nimugga Nd1 26). Pagāhati [pa+gāhati] to dive into, sink into Sn 819 (≈ ajjhogāha SnA 537; =ogāhati ajjhogāhati pavisati Nd1 152). - pp. pagāḷha. {Pagahati} Pagiddha {Pagiddha} (adj.) [pa+giddha] greedy after, clinging to, finding delight in (loc.) J V.269 (=gadhita mucchita C. on p. 274). Paguṇa {Paguna} (adj.) [pa+guṇa cp. Sk. praguṇa straight, der. "kind"] learned, full of knowledge, clever, wellacquainted, familiar D III.170; Vv 532 (=nipuṇa VvA 232); J II.243; IV.130; V.399; Vism 95 (Majjhimo me paguṇo: I am well versed in the M.), 242 (dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā); DA I.95; SnA 195; KhA 73. - paguṇaṃ karoti, to make oneself familiar with, to learn by heart, to master thoroughly J II.166; III.537 (tayo vede); Miln 12 (Abhidhamma-piṭakaṃ). -bhāva familiarity with, acquaintance, efficient state, cleverness in, experience. knowledge (cp. pāguðða) J III.537; Dhs 48, 49. Paguṇatā (f.) & Paguṇatta (nt.) {Pagunata} {Pagunatta} (doubtful) abstr. to paguṇa in expln of pāguððatā at Dhs 48 & 49 (trsl. fitness, competence). Pagumba {Pagumba} [pa+gumba] a thicket, bush, clump of trees Sn 233. Pageva {Pageva} (adv.) [page=Sk. prage+eva, but BSk. prāgeva] (how) much more or much less, a fortiori, lit. "right at the earliest" J I.354; V.242; Miln 91; Vism 93, 259, 322; VvA 258, PvA 115, 116, 117. - Compar. pagevataraṃ M III.145; atippage too early J III.48; atippago id. M I.84; S II.32; A V.48. Pāli Text Society 870 Pāli-English Dictionary Paggaṇhāti {Pagganhati} [pa+gaṇhāti] 1. to stretch forth, hold out or up, take up D I.123 (sujaṃ the sacrificial ladle), 125 (añjaliṃ stretch out the hollow hands as a token of respectful greeting); S I.141; II.280; J I.89 (paveṇiṃ); PvA 74 (turiyāni). ger. paggayha taking up, raising up, stretching forth Sn 350 (=uttāretvā SnA 349); Dh 268 (tulaṃ); Pv II.917 (bāhuṃ); IV.74 (uccaṃ p.); VvA 7 (añjaliṃ). Often in phrase bāhā paggayha kandati to wail or lament with outstretched arms (a special pose of mourning) J V.267; VI.188; PvA 92 (=pasāreti). - 2. to take up, take care of, favour, support, befriend (opp. niggaṇhāti) J I.511; II.21; V.116, 369; Miln 185, 186; PvA 114 (sappurisa-dhammaṃ). - 3. to put to, exert, strain, apply vigorously (cittaṃ one's mind) S V.9; Ps II.20 (paggaṇhanto viriyena carati). - pp. paggahita (q. v.). - Caus. paggaheti to exert Miln 390 (mānasaṃ). - Caus. II. paggaṇhāpeti to cause to hold up or out, to cause to uphold or support Miln 21 (dhamma-dhajaṃ); J V.248; PvA 74 (turiyāni). Paggalita {Paggalita} [pp. of pa+gal] dripping PvA 56 (v. l. for T. vigalita). Paggava {Paggava} [etym?] a medicinal plant with bitter fruit J II.105 (v. l. pakkava). Paggaha & Paggāha {Paggaha} [fr. paggaṇhāti] 1. exertion, energy; (a) paggaha: D III.213 (v. l. paggāha, also °nimitta); Ps II.8 (°cariyā), 20 (°ṭṭha); DA I.63 (viriy-indriyassa Qlakkhaṇa); (b) paggāha: A I.83, 256 (°nimitta); Dhs 277 (trsl. "grasp"), 336, 1359 (°nimitta); DhsA 406. - 2. (paggaha) favour, kindness, patronage [same meaning in Ep. Sk.] Vin III.145=A III.66; J V.116 (opp. niggaha); VI.371 (id.). Paggahaṇa {Paggahana} (nt.) [fr. pa+gṛh, cp. paggaṇhāti] stretching forth, lifting, holding out; of the hands as sign of respectful salutation (cp. añjaliṃ paggaṇhāti) J III.82. - Abstr. °tā=paggaha 1. Vism 134. Paggahita {Paggahita} [pp. of paggaṇhāti, cp. BSk. pragṛhīta lofty Divy 7, 102] holding up, or (being) held up Vin II.131 (chatta° holding up a parasol,) 207 (id.); J VI.235; SnA 175 (=Sn p. 21). Paggāha {Paggaha} see paggaha. Paggāhika {Paggahika} (adj.) [paggāha+ika] belonging to, receiving (or trading?) in cpd. °sālā a shop Vin II.291 (cp. Vin. Texts III.383: "would he set up as a hawker in cloth, or would he open a shop"). Paggharaṇa {Paggharana} (adj.-n.) [fr. paggharati] trickling, oozing, dripping J I.146; VI.187 (a°); f. °ī D I.74 (=bindubinduṃ udakaṃ paggharati DA I.218); the „mark‟ of liquid DhsA 332. Paggharaṇaka {Paggharanaka} (adj.) [fr. paggharati] flowing, trickling, oozing out J VI.187 (app°velā), 531; DhA I.126 (lohitaṃ); Vism 262. Paggharati {Paggharati} [pa+gharati, which stands for kṣarati, also appearing as jharati, cp. Sk. nirjhara, Prk. pajjharati Mālatī-M. p. 51. BSk. pragharati Divy 57, 409; AvŚ I.282] to flow forth or out, to ooze, trickle, drip S I.150; Sn p. 125 (pubbañ ca lohitañ ca. p.); J VI.328; Pv I.67 (gabbho pagghari=vissandi PvA 34); II.911 (=vissandati PvA 119); II.926 (akkhīni p.=vissandanti PvA 123, sic lege!); Miln 180; VvA 76 (navahi dvārehi puḷuvakā pagghariṃsu). - pp. paggharita (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 871 Pāli-English Dictionary Paggharita {Paggharita} [pp. of paggharati] flowing, trickling S II.179; Th 2, 466; PvA 198 (khīra). Paghaṇa {Paghana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. praghaṇa] a covered terrace before a house Vin II.153 ("paghanaṃ nāma yaṃ nikkhamantā ca pavisantā ca pādehi hananti. tassa vihāra-dvāre ubhato kuṭṭaṃ niharitvā katapadesass'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ" Bdhgh, quoted Vin. Texts III.175). Panka {Panka} [cp. Epic Sk. panka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements, Ohg, fenna "fen," bog; also Ital. fango mud, Ohg. fūht wet. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under palus. BSk. panka, e. g. Jtm 215 panka-nimagna] mud, mire; defilement, impurity S I.35, 60; III.118; A III.311; IV.289; Sn 970 (°danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); III.236 (id.); IV.362 (id.); Sn 535, 845, 945, 1145 (Nd2 374: kāma-panko kāma-kaddamo etc.); Dh 141, 327; Nd1 203; Pv III.33; IV.32; Miln 346; Dhs 1059, 1136. Panga {Panga} [?] only in cpd. pangacīra (nt.) at D I.6 "blowing through toy pipes made of leaves" (Dial. I.10, where is cpd. Sinhalese pat-kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 205). Bdhgh explns as "p. vuccati paṇṇa-nāḷikā; taṃ dhamantā kīḷanti" DA I.86. Pangu {Pangu} (adj.) [Sk. pangu; etym.?] lame, crippled, see pakkha3 and next. Pangula {Pangula} (adj.) [fr. pangu] lame J VI.12; Vism 280. Pacati {Pacati} [Ved. pacati, Idg. *peqÛ , Av. pac-; Obulg. peka to fry, roast, Lith, kepū bake, Gr. pe/ssw cook, pe/pwn ripe] to cook, boil, roast Vin IV.264; fig. torment in purgatory (trs. and intrs.): Niraye pacitvā after roasting in N. S II.225, PvA 10, 14. - ppr. pacanto tormenting, gen. pacato (+Caus. pācayato) D I.52 (expld at DA I.159, where read pacato for paccato, by pare daṇḍena pīḷentassa). - pp. pakka (q. v.). - Caus. pacāpeti & pāceti (q. v.). - Pass. paccati to be roasted or tormented (q. v.). Pacana {Pacana} III.425 (°thālikā); V.385 (°bhājana); ThA 29 (bhatta°); DA I.270; PvA 135. Pacarati {Pacarati} [pa+carati] to go after, walk in; fig. practise, perform, observe Vv 329 (v. l. pavarati, cp. VvA 136). Pacala {Pacala} [fr. pa+cal] shaking, trembling, wavering DhsA 378. Pacalati {Pacalati} [pa+calati] to dangle VvA 36 (v. l. BB paj°). Pacalāyati {Pacalayati} [quasi-denom. or caus. fr. pacala, pa+cal, cp. daṇḍāyati and pacāleti] to make (the eyelid) waver, to wink, to be sleepy, nod, begin to doze A III.343= IV.344; IV.85 (quot. at DhsA 236); J I.384 (°āyituṃ ārabbhi); Vism 300. Pacalāyikā {Pacalayika} (f.) [abstr. fr. pacalāyati] nodding, wavering (of the eyelids), blinking, being sleepy Dhs 1157 (=akkhidalādīnaṃ pacalabhāvaṃ karoti DhsA 378). Pacalita {Pacalita} [pp. of pacalati] shaken, wavering, unstable Th 1, 260. Pāli Text Society 872 Pāli-English Dictionary Pacāpeti {Pacapeti} [Caus. of pacati] to cause to be cooked, to cook Vin IV.264; J I.126 (āhāraṃ); II.15 (bhattaṃ), 122. Pacāreti {Pacareti} [pa+cāreti, Caus. of car] to go about in (acc.), to frequent, to visit A I.182, 183 (pacārayāmi, gloss saðcarissāmi). Pacālaka {Pacalaka} (adj.) [fr. pacāleti] swinging, shaking; nt. acc. as adv. in kāya- (& bāhu°) ppacālakaṃ after the manner or in the style of swaying the body (or swinging the arms) Vin II.213. Pacāleti {Pacaleti} [pa+Caus. of cal] to swing, sway, move about Th 1, 200 (mā pacālesi "sway and nod" Trsln). Pacinati {Pacinati} [or °cināti) [pa+cināti, cp, ācināti] 1. to pick, pluck, gather, take up, collect, accumulate S III.89; IV.74 (dukkhaṃ=ācināti p. 73); Dh 47, 48 (pupphāni= ocinati DhA I.366); J III.22; fut. pacinissati DhA I.361. - 2. to pick out (mentally), to discern, distinguish, realise, know Sn 837 (ppr. pacinaṃ=pacinanto vicinanto tulayanto tīrayanto Nd1 185;=pavicinati SnA 545); fut. pacessati Dh 44, 45 (sic F.; MSS. vijessati, & vicessati the latter perhaps preferable to pac°; expld at DhA I.334 by vicinissati upaparikkhissati paṭivijjhissati sacchikarissati). - Pass. pacīyati to be heaped up, to increase, accumulate S IV.74 (opp. khīyati). Pacuṭa {Pacuta} is doubtful reading at DA I.164 (with vv. ll. pamuṭa, pamuca, papuṭa) for D I.54, T. paṭuva (vv. ll. pamuṭa, samudda) and is expld by gaṇṭhika, i. e. block or knot. The whole passage is corrupt; see discussed under pavuṭā. Pacura {Pacura} (adj.) [cp. late Sk. pracura] general, various, any; abundant, many J V.40 (=bahu salabha C.); Miln 408 (°jana) Dāvs IV.11, 50; VvA 213 (°jano for yādisakīdiso Vv 5011). See also pasura. Pacessati {Pacessati} see pacinati. Pacca° {Pacca°} is contracted form of paṭi before a°, like paccakampittha pret. fr. paṭikampati. Paccakkosati {Paccakkosati} [paṭi+ā+kruś] to curse in return S I.162; A II.215. Paccakkosana {Paccakkosana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+kruś] cursing in return DhA IV.148 (a°). Paccakkha {Paccakkha} (adj.) [paṭi+akkha3, cp. Ved. pratyakṣa] "before the eye," perceptible to the senses, evident, clear, present DhsA 254; PvA 125; Sdhp 416. Often in obl. cases, viz. instr. °ena personally J I.377; abl. °ato from personal experience J V.45, 195, 281; appaccakkhāya without seeing or direct perception, in expln of paccaya at Vism 532; also in phrase paccakkhato ðatvā having seen or found out for himself, knowing personally J I.262; III.168. kamma making clear, i. e. demonstration, realisation, only neg. a° not realising etc. S III.262; Dhs 390 (trsl. "inability to demonstrate"; cp. DhsA 254). Paccakkhāta {Paccakkhata} [pp. of paccakkhāti] rejected, given up, abandoned, repudiated Vin II.244, 245 (sikkhā); III.25 (id.); J IV.108; DhA I.12. Cp. Vin. Texts I.275. Pāli Text Society Paccakkhāti 873 Pāli-English Dictionary [paṭi+akkhāti=ā+khyā] lit. to speak against, i. e. to reject, refuse, disavow, abandon, give up, usually in connection with Buddhaṃ, dhammaṃ, sikkhaṃ or similar terms of a religious-moral nature Vin III.25; S II.231, 271; A IV.372. - ger. paccakkhāya, in foll. conns ācariyaṃ J IV.200; sikkhaṃ Vin III.23, 34 (a°); S II.231; IV.190; Pug 66, 67; sabbaṃ S IV.15; ariyasaccaṃ S V.428. paccakkhāsi at J V.8 is gloss for pakatthāsi. - pp. paccakkhāta (q. v.). - Intens. paccācikkhati (q. v.). {Paccakkhati} Paccakkhāna {Paccakkhana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+khyā] rejection, refusal J VI.422. Paccagū {Paccagu} (adj.-n.) [a difficult word, composed of pacca+ gū, the latter a by-form of °ga, as in paṭṭhagū, vedagū pāragū. pacca may be praṭya, an adv. formn of prep. praṭi, and paṭṭha its doublet. It is not certain whether we should read paṭṭhagū here as well (see paṭṭhagū). The form may also be expld as a substantivised pl. 3rd pret. of praṭi+gacchati=paccaguṃ] "one who goes toward," a pupil S I.104 (Mārassa); vv. ll. baddhabhū, paṭṭhagū. Windisch, Māra & Buddha trsls "unter M's Herrschaft," and refers paṭṭhagu to Sk., pātyagāḥ. Bdhgh (see Kindred Sayings, 1, p. 319) reads baddhagū and explns by bandhavara sissa antevāsika. Paccaggaḷa {Paccaggala} (adj.) [pratyak+gaḷa] in phrase paccaggaḷe aṭṭhāsi "stuck in his throat" M I.333. Paccaggha (adj.) [paṭi+aggha, cp. Sk. pratyagra of diff. derivation] recent, new, beautiful, quite costly Vin I.4; J I.80; II.435; Pv II.316 (=abhinava mahaggha vā PvA 87); III.105 (=abhinava PvA 214); Dāvs V.25; PvA 44. {Paccaggha} Paccanga {Paccanga} (nt.) [paṭi+anga] lit. "by-limb," small limb, only in compd angapaccangāni limbs great and small, all limbs: see anga. Paccañjana {Paccanjana} (nt.) [paṭi+añjana] anointing, ointment, unction D I.12=M I.511; DA I.98 (=bhavanīya-sītalabhessajj'aðjanaṃ). Paccati {Paccati} [Pass. of pacati, cp. BSk. pacyate Divy 422] to be boiled, fig. to be formented or vexed, to suffer. Nearly always applied to the torture of boiling in Niraya, where it is meant literally. - S I.92; V.344 (kālena paccanti read for kāle na p.); A I.141 (phenuddehakaṃ p. niraye); Sn 670, 671; Dh 69, 119, 120 (pāpaṃ suffer for sin, cp. DhA III.14); J V.268; Pv IV.129 (=dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti PvA 228); IV.339 (niraye paccare janā=paccanti PvA 255); DhA III.64 (expln for tappati). Paccatta (adj.) [paṭi+attan] separate, individual; usually acc. °ṃ adv. separately, individually, singly, by himself, in his own heart D I.24 (yeva nibbuti viditā); DA on D II.77=attano attano abbhantare; M I.251, 337 (°vedaniya N. of a purgatory), 422; S II.199; III.54 sq., IV.23, 41 sq., 168, 539; Sn 611, 906; Dh 165; Pv III.106 (°vedanā separate sufferings, =visuṃ visuṃ attanā anubhūyamānā mahādukkhavedanā PvA 214); Dhs 1044 (ajjhatta+; trsld "self referable"); Miln 96 (°purisa-kāra); DhsA 169; VvA 9, 13; PvA 232. -vacana expression of separate relation, i. e. case of reference, or of the direct object, reflexive case, N. of the acc. case SnA 303; VvA 281; PvA 30, 35; KhA 213, 236; in lieu of karaṇa KhA 213, of sāmin SnA 594. {Paccatta} Paccatthata {Paccatthata} [pp. of gaṭi+ā+stṛ] spread out D II.211. Pāli Text Society 874 Pāli-English Dictionary Paccattharaṇa {Paccattharana} (nt.) [pati+ā+stṛ, cp. BSk. pratyāstaraṇa Divy 19] something spread against, i. e. under or over, a cover, spread, rug, cushion or carpet to sit on, bedding of a couch (nisīdana°) Vin I.47, 295, 296; II.208, 218; D I.7 (kadali-miga-pavara°, cp. DA I.87); A I.137 (id.); III.50 (id.); J I.126; IV.353 (uṇṇāmaya); PvA 141, 137. Paccatthika (adj. n.) [paṭi+attha+ka, lit. opposite to useful, cp. Sk. pratyanīka & pratyarthin] an opponent, adversary, enemy Vin II.94 sq. (atta° personal enemy); A V.71 (id.; T. attha°); D I.50, 70, 137; It 83; PvA 62. Cp. paccāmitta. {Paccatthika} Paccana {Paccana} (nt.) [fr. paccati, cp. pacana] being boiled, boiling. torture, torment J V.270; SnA 476 (°okāsa). Paccanīka & Paccanīya {Paccanika} {Paccaniya} (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. pratyanīka & see paccatthika] 1. contrary, adverse, opposed; (1) m. enemy, adversary, opponent M I.378; S I.179; IV.127= Sn 761; Ps II.67 sq.; SnA 288. Cp. vi.° - 2. (in method) reverse, negative, opp. to anuloma. Tikp 71 passim; cp. paṭiloma. -gāthā response, responding verse (cp. paṭigāthā) SnA 39. Paccanubhāsati {Paccanubhasati} [paṭi+anubhāsati, cp. BSk. pratyavabhāṣate to call to Divy 9] to speak out or mention correspondingly, to enumerate KhA 78, 79 sq. Paccanubhoti {Paccanubhoti} [paṭi+anu+bhū, BSk. pratyanubhavati Divy 54, 262 etc.] to experience, undergo, realise M I.295; S V.218, 264 sq., 286 sq. 353; A III.425 sq.; It 38; PvA 26, 44, 107 (dukkhaṃ). - fut. paccanubhossati D II.213; S I.133, 227; Pv III.56. - Pass. paccanubhavīyati PvA 146 (for upalabbhati). - pp. paccanubhūta M II.32; S II.178; It 15. Paccanusiṭṭha {Paccanusittha} [paṭi+anusiṭṭha] advised, admonished D II.209=225. Paccanta (adj. n.) [paṭi+anta, cp. Sk. pratyanta] adj. adjoining, bordering on, neighbouring, adjacent Dh 315; J I.11 (V.47, °desa), 377 (°vāsika); PvA 201 (°nagara); DhA III.488 (id.); Sdhp 11 (°visaya). - (m.) the border, outskirts, neighbourhood Vin I.73; J I.126 (vihāra°); II.37; Miln 314 (°e kupite in a border disturbance); DhA I.101 (id.); PvA 20 (id.). °ṃ vūpasāmeti to appease the border PvA 20. - P. in sense of "heathen" at Vism 121. {Paccanta} Paccantima {Paccantima} (adj.) [fr. paccanta, cp. BSk. pratyantima frontier Divy 21, 426] bordering, adjoining, next to Vin. II.166; Sdhp 5. Paccabhiññāṇa {Paccabhinnana} (nt.) [paṭi+abhi+ðāṇa] recognition DhsA 110. Paccaya {Paccaya} [fr. paṭi+i, cp. Ved. pratyaya & P. pacceti, paṭicca] lit. resting on, falling back on, foundation; cause, motive etc. See on term as t.t. of philosophy Tikapaṭṭhāna I, foreword; J.P.T.S. 1916, 21 f.; Cpd. 42 sq. & esp. 259 sq. - 1. (lit.) support, requisite, means, stay. Usually with ref. to the 4 necessaries of the bhikkhu's daily life, viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, (gilānapaccaya-) bhesajja, i. e. clothing, food as alms, a dwelling-place, medicine: see under cīvara. Sn 339 (paccaya=gilāna-paccaya SnA 342); Miln 336; Mhvs 3, 15. - 2. (appld) reason, cause, ground, motive, means, condition M I.259 (yaṃ yad eva paccayaṃ paṭicca by whatever cause or by whichever means); S II.65; Nett 78 sq.; DA I.125; PvA 104. The fourfold cause (catubbidho paccayo) of rūpa (material form) consists of kamma, citta, utu, āhāra: Vism 600. 875 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Var. paccayas discussed at VbhA 166 sq. (twofold, with ref. to paṭisandhi), 183 (eightfold), 202, 205 sq. 254 (4). sappaccaya founded, having a reason or cause S V.213 sq.; A I.82; Nd2 mūla; Dhs 1084, 1437. - yathā paccayaṃ karoti do as he likes Nd2 p. 280=S III. 33. Often coupled with hetu, e. g. at S IV.68 sq.; A. I.66; IV.151 sq.; D III.284; Nd2 under mūla; Ps II.116 sq., paccaya came to be distinguished from hetu as the genus of which hetu was the typical, chief species. I. e. paccaya became synonymous with our "relation," understood in a causal sense, hetu meaning condition, causal antecedent, and 23 other relations being added as special modes of causality. Later still these 24 were held reducible to 4 Tikp 1 f. (and foreword); Cpd. 197. Cp. Paṭṭhāna. - Abl. paccayā as adv. by means of, through, by reason of, caused by D I.45 (vedanā °taṇhā etc., see paṭicca-samuppāda); M I.261 (jātippaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ); Pv I.52 (kamma°); IV.150 (tap°); PvA 147 (kamma°). - 3. ground for, belief, confidence, trust, reliance J I.118, 169; apara° without relying on anyone else S III.83, 135; A IV.186, 210; PvA 226. -ākāra the mode of causes, i. e. the Paṭiccasamuppāda DhsA 2, 3; VbhA 130 sq. (cp. Vism 522 sq.). Paccayatā {Paccayata} (f.) [abstr. fr. paccaya] the fact of having a cause, causation, causal relation, in phrase idappaccayatā (adv.) from an ascertained cause, by way of cause Vin I.5; D I.185; S I.136; II.25. Paccayika {Paccayika} (adj.) [fr. paccaya] trustworthy D I.4; S I.150; A II.209; J VI.384 (paccāyika); Pug 57; DA I.73; SnA 475. Paccaladdhaṃsu {Paccaladdhamsu} see paṭilabhati. Paccavidhuṃ & Paccavyādhiṃ {Paccavidhum} {Paccavyadhim} see paṭivijjhati. Paccavekkhati [paṭi+avekkhati] to look upon, consider, review, realise, contemplate, see M I.415; S III.103; 151 sq., IV.111, 236 sq.; J V.302; Vbh 193, 194 (cp. A III.323); Miln 16; PvA 62, 277; VvA 6, 48. {Paccavekkhati} Paccavekkhana {Paccavekkhana} (nt.) & °nā (f.) [paṭi+avekkhana, cp. late Sk. pratyaveksana & °nā] looking at, consideration, regard, attention, reflection, contemplation, reviewing (cp. Cpd. 58) M I.415; D III.278; A III.27; Pug 21 (a°); Dhs 390 (a°=dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ pati na apekkhati DhsA 254, trsl. "inability to consider"); Miln 388; Nett 85; VbhA 140; Vism 43 (twofold); Sdhp 413. Paccavekkhā {Paccavekkha} (f.) [cp. late Sk. pratyavekṣā] imagination Mbhv 27. Paccasāri {Paccasari} see paṭisarati. Paccassosi {Paccassosi} see patissuṇāṭi. Paccākata {Paccakata} [pp. of paṭi+a+kṛ] rejected, disappointed Vin IV.237, 238. Paccākoṭita {Paccakotita} [pp. of paṭi+ākoṭeti] flattened or smoothed out, pressed, ironed (ākoṭita+of the robes) M I.385; S II.281; DhA I.37. Pāli Text Society 876 Pāli-English Dictionary Paccāgacchati {Paccagacchati} [paṭi+āgacchati] to fall back on, return again, to go back to (acc.), withdraw, slide back from (° to) Vin I.184; M I.265; III.114; Nd1 108, 312; Kvu 624 (spelt wrongly pacchā°); PvA 14, 109, 250. Cp. pacceti. Paccāgata {Paccagata} [pp. of paccāgacchati] gone back, withdrawn J V.120; Miln 125. Paccāgamana {Paccagamana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+ā+gam] return, going back, backsliding Miln 246. Paccācamati {Paccacamati} [paṭi+ā+camati; often spelt °vamati, but see Trenckner, Miln 425] to swallow up, resorb S V.48= A V.337; J I.311; Miln 150; Caus. °camāpeti Miln 150. Paccācikkhati {Paccacikkhati} [Intens. of paccakkhāti, paṭi+ā+cikkhati of khyā] to reject, repudiate, disallow D III.3; M I.245, 428; Vin IV.235. Paccājāta {Paccajata} [pp. of paccājāyati] reborn, come to a new existence D I.62; III.264; M I.93; Pug 51. Paccājāyati {Paccajayati} [paṭi+ā+jāyati] to be reborn in a new existence M III.169; S II.263; V.466, 474. - pp. paccājāta (q. v.). Paccāneti {Paccaneti} [paṭi+ā+neti] to lead back to (acc.) Pv II.116 (=punar āneti C.). Paccābhaṭṭha {Paccabhattha} [pp. of paccābhāsati] recited, explained J II.48. Paccābhāsati {Paccabhasati} [paṭi+ābhāsati] to retort, recite, explain, relate PvA 57 (sic lege for pacchā°). - pp. paccābhaṭṭha. Paccāmitta {Paccamitta} [paccā=Sk. pratyak, adv.;+mitta, cp. Ep. Sk. pratyamitra] lit. "back-friend," adversary, enemy D I.70; A IV.106; J I.488: DA I.182; PvA 155. Paccāropeti {Paccaropeti} [paṭi+āropeti] to show in return, retort, explain M I.96; A IV.193. Cp. paccabhāsati. Paccāsati {Paccasati} [fr. paṭi+āśā or=paccāsaṃsati or °siṃsati?] to ask, beg, pray Pv IV.56 (°anto for °āsaṃsanto? C. explnns by āsiṃsanto). Paccāsanne {Paccasanne} (adv.) [paṭi+āsanne] near by PvA 216=280 Paccāsā {Paccasa} f. [paṭi+āśā, cp. Sk. pratyāśā] expectation Vin IV.286. Paccāsāreti {Paccasareti} [paṭi+ā+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ] to make go (or turn) backward M I.124=A III.28 (=paṭinivatteti C.); Vism 308 (sāreti pi p. pi). Paccāsiṃsati {Paccasimsati} [paṭi+āsiṃsati] to expect, wait for, desire, hope for, ask D II.100; A III.124; J I.346, 483; III.176; V.214; DhA I.14; II.84; DA I.318; VvA 336, 346; PvA 22, 25, 63, 260. Pāli Text Society 877 Pāli-English Dictionary Paccāharati {Paccaharati} [paṭi+āharati] to bring back, take back Vin II.265; III.140; J IV.304. Paccukkaḍḍhati {Paccukkaddhati} [paṭi+ukkaḍḍhati] to draw out again Vin II.99. Paccukkaḍḍhana {Paccukkaddhana} (nt.) [fr. preceding] drawing out again Vin V.222. Paccuggacchati {Paccuggacchati} [paṭi+ud+gam] to go out, set out, go out to meet Vin II.210; M I.206; Sn 442 (=abhimukho upari gacchati SnA 392). Paccuggata {Paccuggata} [pp. of paccuggacchati] illustrious J VI.280. Paccuggamana {Paccuggamana} (nt.) [fr. preceding] going out to, meeting, receiving J IV.321; PvA 61, 141 (°ṃ karoti). Paccuṭṭhapanā {Paccutthapana} (f.) [paṭi+ud+Caus. of sthā] putting against, resistance, opposition Sn 245 (=paccanīkaṭ ṭhapanā SnA 228). Paccuṭṭhāti {Paccutthati} [paṭi+ud+sthā] to rise, reappear, to rise from one's seat as a token of respect; always combd with abhivadati D I.61 (Pot. °uṭṭheyya), 110 (Fut. °uṭṭhassati). Paccuṭṭhāna {Paccutthana} (nt.) [fr. preceding] rising from one's seat, reverence D I.125. Paccuttarati {Paccuttarati} [paṭi+uttarati, but cp. BSk. pratyavatarati to disembark Divy 229] to go out again, to withdraw S I.8; A III.190. Cp. paccupadissati. Paccudāvattati {Paccudavattati} [paṭi+ud+ā+vattati] to return again to (acc.) S I.224; II.104; A V.337. Paccudāvattana {Paccudavattana} (nt.) [fr. preceding] coming back, return DhsA 389. Paccudāharati {Paccudaharati} [paṭi+ud+ā+hṛ] recite in reply Th 2, 40. Paccudeti {Paccudeti} [paṭi+ud+i] go out towards J VI.559. Paccuddharati {Paccuddharati} [paṭi+uddharati] to wipe off or down (with a cloth, colakena) Vin II.122 (udakapuñchaniṃ; trsl. Vin. Texts II.152 "to wear out a robe"), 151 (gerukaṃ; trsl. Vin. Texts II.151 "to wipe down"). Paccuddhāra {Paccuddhara} [paṭi+uddhāra] taking up, casting (the lot) again Vin IV.121. Paccupaṭṭhahati {Paccupatthahati} [paṭi+upa+sthā] "to stand up before," to be present; only in pp. paccupaṭṭhita and in Caus. paccupaṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Paccupaṭṭhāna {Paccupatthana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+upa+sthā; cp. Cpd. 13 & Lakkhaṇa] 1. (re)appearance, happening, coming on, phenomenon J III.524; Nett 28; SnA 509; DhsA 332; ThA 288. 2. tending D III.191. 3. vv. ll. gilānupaṭṭhāna. 878 Pāli Text Society Paccupaṭṭhāpeti Pāli-English Dictionary [Caus. of paccupaṭṭhahati] 1. to bring before or about, to arrange, provide, instal, fix S IV.121; J III.45; IV.105; V.211. 2. to minister to, wait upon D III.189 sq. {Paccupatthapeti} Paccupaṭṭhita {Paccupatthita} [pp. of paccupaṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. pratyupasthita, Divy Index] (re)presented, offered, at one's disposal, imminent, ready, present D III.218 (°kāmā); It 95 (id.); Sn p. 105; It 111; Kvu 157, 280; Miln 123. Paccupadissati {Paccupadissati} [reading uncertain; either paṭi+upadissati, or fut. of paṭi+upadisati, cp. upadaṃseti. It is not to be derived fr. °upadadāti] to accept, receive; or: to show, point out J V.221 (v. l. paccuttarissati to go through, perhaps preferable; C. on p. 225 expls by sampaṭicchissati). Paccupalakkhaṇā {Paccupalakkhana} (f.) [paṭi+upalakkhaṇā] differentiation S III.261 (a°) Dhs 16=Pug 25; Dhs 292, 555, 1057. Paccupekkhaṇā {Paccupekkhana} (f.)=paccavekkhaṇā S III.262 (a°). Paccupeti {Paccupeti} [pati+upeti] to go up or near to, to approach, serve, beset J III.214. fut. °upessati J IV.362 (gloss upasevati). Paccuppanna {Paccuppanna} [pp. of paṭi+uppajjati, cp. Sk.pratyutpanna] what has arisen (just now), existing, present (as opposed to atīta past & anāgata future) M I.307, 310; III.188; 190, 196; S I.5; IV.97; A I.264; III.151, 400; D III.100, 220, 275; It 53; Nd1 340; Pv IV.62; Dhs 1040, 1043; VbhA 157 sq.; PvA 100. See also atīta. Paccuyyāti {Paccuyyati} [paṭi+ud+yā] to go out against, to go to meet somebody S I.82, 216. Paccūsa° {Paccusa°} [paṭi+Ved. uṣas f.; later Sk. pratyūṣa nt.] "the time towards dawn," morning, dawn; always. in compn with either °kāle (loc.) at morning DhA IV.61; DA I.168; or °velāyaṃ (loc.) id. VvA 105, 118, 165; PvA 61; or °samaye (loc.) id. S I.107; J I.81, 217; SnA 80; PvA 38. Paccūha {Paccuha} [cp. late Sk. pratyūha, prati+vah] an impediment, obstacle S I.201 (bahū hi saddā paccūhā, trsl. "Ay there is busy to-and-fro of words." C. expls by paṭiloma-saddā); J VI.571. Pacceka {Pacceka} (adj.) [paṭi+eka, cp. BSk. pratyeka Divy 335, 336] each one, single, by oneself, separate, various, several D I.49 (itthi); II.261 (°vasavattin, of the 10 issaras); S I.26 (°gāthā a stanza each), 146 (°brahma an independent Brahma); A II.41 (°sacca); V.29 (id.); Sn 824 (id.), 1009 (°gaṇino each one having followers= visuṃ visuṃ gaṇavanto SnA 583); J IV.114 (°bodhiðāṇa); Nd1 58 (°muni); DA I.148 (paccekā itthiyo); SnA 52 (°bodhisatta one destined to become a Paccekabuddha), 67 (id.), 73 (°sambodhi), 476 (niraya a separate or special purgatory); PvA 251 (id.), Sdhp 589 (°bodhi). - paccekaṃ (adv.) singly, individually, to each one VvA 282. See also pāṭekka. -buddha one enlightened by himself, i. e. one who has attained to the supreme and perfect insight, but dies without proclaiming the truth to the world. M III.68; S I.92 ("Silent Buddha" trsln); J III.470; IV.114; Ud 50 (P. Tagarasikhi); Nett 190; KhA 178, 199; SnA 47, 58, 63; DhA I.80, 171, 224, 230; IV.201; PvA 144, 263, 265 (=isi), 272, 283. Pāli Text Society 879 Pāli-English Dictionary Pacceti {Pacceti}[paṭi+i] to come on to, come back to, fig. fall back on, realise, find one's hold in D I.186 ("take for granted," cp. note Dial. I.252); M I.309 (kaṃ hetuṃ), 445 (id.); S I.182 ("believe in," C. icchati pattheti); Sn 662, 788, 800, 803, 840=908; Dh 125 (=paṭieti DhA III.34); Nd1 85, 108 (=paccāgacchati), 114; Pv II.320 (=avagacchati PvA 87); Nett 93; Miln 125, 313; PvA 116 (bālaṃ), 241 (agree to=paṭijānāti). - ger. paṭicca (q. v.). Cp. paccāgacchati - pp. paṭīta (q. v.). Paccoḍḍita {Paccoddita} [paṭi+oḍḍita] laid in return (of a snare) J II.183 (v. l. paccoṭṭita). Paccora {Paccora} (adj.) [paṭi+avara, cp. Sk. pratyavara] lower, rt. lower part, hindquarter, bottom (?) A IV.130; DhA I.189. Paccorohaṇī {Paccorohani} (f.) [fr. paccorohati] the ceremony of coming down again (?), approaching or descending to (acc.), esp. the holy fire A V.234 sq., 249 sq., V. 251. Cp. orohaṇa & Sk. pratyavarohaṇa "descent," N. of a cert. Gṛhya celebration (BR.). Paccorohati {Paccorohati} [paṭi+orohati] to come down again, descend D I.50; II.73; A V.65, 234. Paccosakkati {Paccosakkati} [paṭi+osakkati which is either ava+sakkati (of ṣvaṣk Geiger, P.Gr. § 282 or sṛp Trenckner Notes 60), or apa+sakkati] to withdraw, retreat, go away again D I.230; J I.383; Mhvs 25, 84. Paccosakkanā {Paccosakkana} (f.) [abstr. fr. paccosakkati] withdrawal, retreat, going back, shrinking from DhsA 151. Pacchaḍḍana {Pacchaddana} (nt.) [pa+chaḍḍana] vomiting, throwing out Sdhp 137. Pacchato {Pacchato} (adv.) [abl. formation fr. *paccha=Ved. paścā & paścāt, fr. Idg. *pos as in Lith. pàs near by, pastaras the last; cp. Av. pasca behind, Lat. post, after] behind, after Dh 348 (=anāgatesu khandhesu DhA IV.63; opp. pure); PvA 56, 74; DhA III.197 (°vatti). Often doubled pacchato pacchato, i. e. always or close behind, J II.123 (opp. purato purato). - Cp. pacchā & pacchima. Pacchada [fr. pa+chad, cp. Sk. pracchada] a cover, wrapper; girdle Th 2, 378 (=uracchada ThA253); DhsA 397 (v. l. for °cchāda). {Pacchada} Pacchanna {Pacchanna} [pa+channa, of chad] covered, wrapped, hidden Th 1, 299; J III.129. Pacchā {Paccha} (adv.) [Vedic paścā & paścāt see pacchato] behind, aft, after, afterwards, back; westward D I.205; Sn 645, 773, 949; Nd1 33 (=pacchā vuccati anāgataṃ, pure vuccati atītaṃ); Nd2 395; Dh 172, 314, 421; Pv I.111, 115 (opp. purato); II.99 (=aparabhāge PvA 116); PvA 4, 50, 88; VvA 71. -ānutappati [fr. ānutāpa] to feel remorse Pv II.712; J V.117. - ānutāpa [cp. Sk. paścattāpa] remorse, repentance Sdhp 288. -āsa (nt.) [āsa2] "eating afterwards, " i. e. aftermath S I.74 - gacchati at Kvu 624 see paccā°. -gataka going or coming behind J VI.30. -jāta (-paccaya), 11th of the 24 paccayas, q. v. causal relation of posteriority in time. -nipātin one who retires to rest later than another (opp. pubb'uṭṭhāyin getting up before others) D I.60; III.191; A III.37; IV.265, 267 sq.; DA I.168. - bāhaṃ "arm behind," i. e. with arms (tied) behind Pāli Text Society 880 Pāli-English Dictionary one's back D I.245; J I.264; DhA II.39. - bhatta "after-meal," i. e. after the midday meal, either as °ṃ (acc.-adv.) in the afternoon, after the main meal, usually combd with piṇḍapāta. paṭikkanta "returning from the alms-round after dinner" A III.320; PvA 11, 16, 38 and passim (cp. BSk. paścādbhakta-piṇḍapāta-pratikrānta, see Indexes to AvŚ. & Divy), or as °kicca the duties after the midday meal (opp. purebhatta°) DA I.47 (in detail); SnA 133, 134. -bhattika one who eats afterwards, i. e. afternoon, when it is improper to eat A III.220 (khalu°, q. v.). -bhāga hind or after part J II.91; PvA 114. -bhāsati see paccā°. -bhūma belonging to the western country S III.5. -bhūmaka id. S IV.312=A V.263. -mukha looking westward M III.5; D II.207; Th 1, 529; DhA III.155 (opp. pācīna eastern). - vāmanaka dwarfed in his hind part J IV.137. samaṇa [BSk. paścācchramaṇa & opp. purahśramaṇa AvŚ II.67, 150; Divy 154, 330, 494] a junior Wanderer or bhikkhu (Thera) who walks behind a senior (Thera) on his rounds. The one accompanying Gotama Buddha is Ānanda Vin I.46; III.10 (Ānanda); IV.78 (id.); Ud 90 (Nāgasamāla); J IV.123; Miln 15 (Nāgasena); PvA 38, 93 (Ānanda). Pacchāda {Pacchada} [pa+chāda] cover, covering, wrapper, in phrase nelango setappacchādo S IV.291=Ud 76=DA I.75= DhsA 397. Pacchānutappati {Pacchanutappati} see under pacchā. Pacchāyā {Pacchaya} (f.) [pa+chāyā] a place in the shade, shaded part Vin I.180; II.193; D I.152 (=chāyā DA I.310); II.205; A III.320. Pacchāḷiyaṃ {Pacchaliyam} at A III.76 is of uncertain reading & meaning; in phrase p. khipanti: either "throw into the lap" (?) or (better) read pacchiyaṃ, loc. of pacchi "into the basket" (of the girls & women). Pacchāsa {Pacchasa} [cp. pacchāli? perhaps fr. pacchā+aś] aftermath S I.74. Pacchi {Pacchi} (f.) [etym. doubtful] a basket J I.9, 243; II.68; III.21; VI.369 (paṇṇa°), 560 (phala°); DhA II.3; IV.205 (°pasibbaka). Pacchijjati {Pacchijjati} [pa+chijjati, Pass. of chid] to be cut short, to be interrupted J I.503 (lohitaṃ p.). Pacchijjana (nt.) [fr. last] stopping, interruption J III.214 (read assu-pacchijjanadivaso? passage corrupt.). {Pacchijjana} Pacchita {Pacchita} [pa+chita, Sk. pracchita, pp. of chā, only in combn with prefixes] cut off, skinned J VI.249. Pacchindati {Pacchindati} [pa+chindati] 1. to break up, cut short, put an end to Vin IV.272; J I.119 (kathaṃ °itvā), 148 (kathaṃ °ituṃ); IV.59; PvA 78 (dānavidhiṃ °i). - 2. to bring up (food), to vomit DhA I.183 (āhāraṃ). Pacchima {Pacchima} (adj.) [Sk. paścima, superl. formation fr. *paśca, cp. pacchato & pacchā] 1. hindmost, hind-, back-, last (opp. purima), latest D I.239; M I.23 (°yāma the last night watch); DA I.45 sq. (id. °kicca duties or performances in the 3rd watch, corresp. to purima° & Pāli Text Society 881 Pāli-English Dictionary majjhima°); Sn 352; J IV.137 (°pāda); VI.364 (°dvāra); PvA 5, 75. - 2. western (opp. purima or puratthima) D I.153 (disā); S I.145. - 3. lowest, meanest Vin II.108; M I.23; S II.203. Pacchimaka {Pacchimaka} (adj.) [fr. pacchima] 1. last, latest (opp. purimaka) Vin II.9; Nd2 284 D.=Th 1, 202; DhsA 262; J VI.151. - 2. lowest, meanest J I.285 (pacchimakā itthiyo). Pacchedana {Pacchedana} (nt.) [fr. pa+chid] breaking, cutting DA I.141. Pajagghati {Pajagghati} [pa+jagghati] to laugh out loud J VI.475. Pajappati {Pajappati} [pa+jappeti] to yearn for, crave, to be greedy after S I.5=J VI.25 (anāgataṃ=pattheti C.). Pajappā {Pajappa} (f.) [pa+jappā] desire, greed for, longing J VI.25 (anāgata°); Sn 592; Dhs 1059, 1136. Pajappita {Pajappita} [pp. of pajappeti] desired, longed for S I.181; J VI.359. Pajaha {Pajaha} (adj.) [pa+jaha, pres. base of jahati] only neg. a° not giving anything up, greedy A III.76. Pajahati {Pajahati} (°jahāti) [pa+jahati of hā] to give up, renounce, forsake, abandon, eliminate, let go, get rid of; freq. as synonym of jahati (see Nd2 under jahati with all forms). Its wide range of application with reference to all evils of Buddhist ethics is seen from exhaustive Index at S VI.57 (Index vol.). - Pres. pajahati S I.187; III.33=Nd2 680, Q 3 (yaṃ na tumhākaṃ taṃ pajahatha); It 32 (kiṃ appahīnaṃ kiṃ pajahāma); 117; A IV.109 sq. (akusalaṃ, sāvajjaṃ); Sn 789 (dukkhaṃ), 1056, 1058; Ps I.63; II.244. ppr. pajahaṃ S III.27; fut. pahāssaṃ (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1511) M II.100. - aor. pajahi & pahāsi Vin I.36; S I.12=23 (sankhaṃ); Sn 1057. - ger. pahāya S I.12 (kāme), 23 (vicikicchaṃ), 188 (nīvaraṇāni), Sn 17, 209, 520 & passim; Nd2 430; PvA 16, 122 (=hitvā), 211; pahatvāna Sn 639, and pajahitvā. fut. pajahissati S II.226. - grd. pahātabba M I.7; Sn 558; VvA 73, & pajahitabba - pp. pahīna (q. v.). - Pass. pahīyati (q. v.). Pajā {Paja} (f.) [Ved. prajā, pra+jan] progeny, offspring, generation, beings, men, world (of men), mankind (cp. use of Bibl. Gr. ge/nnhma in same meaning) D II.55; S V.346, 362 sq.; A II.75 sq.; IV.290; V.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 298, 545, 654, 684, 776, 936, 1104 (=sattā Nd2 377); Dh 28, 85, 254, 343 (=sattā DhA IV.49); Nd1 47, 292; Pv II.117; IV.334; Pug 57; Vism 223 (=pajāyana-vasena sattā); DhA I.174; PvA 150, 161. - Very freq. in formula sassamana-brāhmaṇī pajā "this world with its samaṇas and brāhmans" D I.250; S I.160, 168, 207; II.170; III.28, 59; IV.158; V.204, 352; A II.130; V.204; Sn p. 15; It 121 etc. Pajānanā {Pajanana} (f.) [fr. pajānāti] knowledge, understanding, discernment; used in exegetical literature as syn. of paððā Nd2 380=Dhs 16, 20, 555; Pug 25; Nett 28, 54. As nt. °a at Vism 436. Pajānāti {Pajanati} [pa+jānāti] to know, find out, come to know, understand, distinguish D I.45 (yathābhūtaṃ really, truly), 79 (ceto paricca), 162, 249; Sn 626, 726 sq., 987; It 12 (ceto paricca); Dh 402; Pv I.1112 (=jānāti PvA 60); J V.445; Pug 64. - ppr. pajānaṃ Sn 884, 1050, 1104 Pāli Text Society 882 Pāli-English Dictionary (see expln at Nd1 292=Nd2 378); It 98; Pv IV.164; and pajānanto Sn 1051. - ger. paððāya (q. v.) Caus. paððāpeti; pp. paððatta; Pass. paððāyati & pp. paððāta (q. v.). Cp. sampajāna. Pajāpati {Pajapati} (°ī) 1. (adj.) together with his wife Vin I.23, 342; IV.62; J I.345; PvA 20. (m.) [Ved. prajāpati, prajā+pati Lord of all created beings, Lord of Creation] Prajāpati (Np.), the supreme Lord of men, only mentioned in one formula together with Inda & Brahmā, viz. devā saindakā sabrahmakā sapajāpatikā in sense of foll. Also at VbhA 497 with Brahmā. - 2. prajāpati (f.) [of Ved. prajāvant, adj.-n. fr. prajā "having (or rich in) progeny," with p for v, as pointed out by Trenckner Notes 6216] "one who has offspring," a chief wife of a man of the higher class (like a king, in which case="chief queen") or a gahapati, in which case simply "wife"; cp. BSk. prajāpatī "lady" Divy 2, 98. - Vin I.23; III.25; IV.18, 258; S II.243; A I.137 (catasso °iyo); IV.210, 214; Vv 416 (=one of the 16,000 chief queens of Sakka VvA 183); DhA I.73; PvA 21, 31. sapajāpatika (adj.) together with his wife Vin I.23, 342; IV.62; J I.345; PvA 20. Pajāyati {Pajayati} [pa+jāyati] to be born or produced J V.386; VI.14. Pajāyana {Pajayana} (nt.) [fr. pa+jan] being born Vism 223. Pajja1 {Pajja} [cp. Sk. padya] a path, road Sn 514; DA I.262. Pajja2 {Pajja} (nt.) [cp. Sk. padya & pādya belonging to the feet, Lat. acupedius swift-footed; Gr. pezo/s foot-soldier, see also pattika1] foot-oil, foot-salve Vin I.205; D II.240; J III.120; IV.396; V.376 (=pādabbhaðjana C.). Pajjati {Pajjati} [pad, Vedic padyate only in meaning "to come to fall," later Sk. also "to go to"] to go, go to; usually not in simplex, but only in compn with prefixes; as āpajjati, uppajjati, nipajjati etc. - Alone only in one doubtful passage, viz. A IV.362 (vv. ll. paccati, pabbati, gacchati.). - pp. panna (q. v.). Pajjalati {Pajjalati} [pa+jalati of jval] to burn (forth), blaze up, go into flame Vin I.180; Sn 687 (sikhi pajjalanto); J I.215; ThA 62; PvA 38. - pp. pajjalita (q. v.). Pajjalita {Pajjalita} [pp. of pajjalati] in flames, burning, blazing S I.133; Sn p. 21 (aggi); Dh 146; PvA 43 (sāṭakā). Pajjunna {Pajjunna} [Ved. parjanya, for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under quercus & spargo] raincloud J I.332 (p. vuccati megho); IV.253. Otherwise only as Np. of the Rain God D II.260; S I.29; J I.331. Pajjota {Pajjota} [cp. Ved. pradyota, pra+dyut] light, lustre, splendour, a lamp S I.15, 47; A II.140; Sn 349; Pug 25; Sdhp 590. - telapajjota an oil lamp Vin I.16=D I.85= A I.56 ≈; Sn p. 15. dhammapajjota the lamp of the Dhamma Miln 21. paððā-pajjota the torch of knowledge Dhs 16, 20, 292, 555; VbhA 115. pajjotassa nibbānaṃ the extinguishing of the lamp D II.157; S I.159; A IV.3. Pajjhāyati {Pajjhayati} [pa+jhāyati2] to be in flames, to waste, decay, dry up; fig. to be consumed or overcome with grief, disappointment or remorse Vin III.19; IV.5; A II.214, 216; III.57; J III.534 Pāli Text Society 883 Pāli-English Dictionary (pajjhāti metri causa; C=anusocati)=Miln 5. - ppr. pajjhāyanto downcast, in formula tuṇhībhūto mankubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho p. M I.132, 258 and passim. Pañca {Panca} (adj.-num.) [Ved. pañca, Idg. *penqÛe; cp. Gr. pe/nte, Lat. quīnque, Goth. fimf, Lith. penki, Oir. coic] number 5. - Cases: gen. dat. pañcannaṃ, instr. abl. pañcahi, loc. pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca° (cp. Ved. paðcāra with 5 spokes I.16413; Gr. pempw/bolos, Lat. quinqu-ennis etc.). - 1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with ref, to lit. & fig. application. "Five" is the number of "comprehensive and yet simple" unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (see also below pañc'angulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *prəq, cp. Lat. com°, decem, centum etc.) - A. No. 5, appld (a) with ref. to time: catupaðcāhaṃ 4 or 5 days J II.114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat I.316); maraṇaṃ tuyhaṃ oraṃ māsehi paðcahi after 5 months Vv 6310, p. māse vasitvā DA I.319 (cp. qu. menses Hor. Sat. II.3289). - (b) of space: °yojanaṭṭhāna J III.504; °yojan-ubbedho gajavaro VvA 33; °bhūmako pāsādo J I.58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam). (c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV III.379; VI.114; VIII.92 etc.; gods X.553; priests II.3414; III.77; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171; ambassadors Genesis 472; quinque viri Hor. Sat. II.555; Epist. II.124): p. janā J V.230; p. amaccā J V.231; p. hatthino DhA I.164; paðca nāriyo agamiṃsu Vv 322; p. puttāni khādāmi Pv I.63. - Note. No. 5 in this appln is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e. g.); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq. the higher decimals 50 and 500. See also below §§ 3, 4. B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (f. °ī the 15th day of the month Vv 156=A I.144; Sn 402) VvA 67 (°kahāpaṇa-sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f. ī of the 15th or full-moon day Pv III.31; DhA I.198; III.92; IV.202; VvA 314; SnA 78) Sn 153 (pannaraso uposatho); Vv 642 (paṇṇarase va cando; expld as paṇṇarasiyaṃ VvA 276); DhA I.388 (of age, 15 or 16 years); DA I.17 (°bhedo Khuddaka-nikāyo); SnA 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu-satehi=1500, instead of the usual 500); PvA 154 (°yojana). The appln is much the same as 5 and 50 (see below), although more rare, e. g. as measure of space: °yojana DhA I.17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa-yojana); J I.315; PvA 154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood Gen. 7. 20). C. No. 25 in two forms: paðcavīsati (the usual) e. g. DhsA 185 sq.; Miln 289 (citta-dubbalī-karaṇā dhammā); paṇṇa-vīsati, e. g. J IV.352 (nāriyo); Th 2, 67, and paṇṇuvīsaṃ (only at J III.138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca-cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with °yojana, e. g. at J I.147, 348; DhA I.367.-Application: of 25: (1) time: years J III.138; DhA I.4; (2) space: miles high and wide DhA II.64 (ahipeto); VvA 236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā). 2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our "thousands," cp. the use of Lat. mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e. g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be expld as "a great hand," i. e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like "a lot" (originally "only one," cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc. - Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of "comm-union" are especially freq. in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd, etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king's retinue, etc. - A. No. 50 (paððāsa; the by-form paṇṇāsa only at DhA III.207), in foll. applns: (a) of time: does not occur, but see below under 55. - (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah's ark Gen. 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14; 7. 9) J I.359 (yojanāni); Pāli Text Society 884 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA III.207 (°hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism 417 (paripuṇṇa °yojana suriyamaṇḍala); DhA I.17 (°yojana). - (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV II.185; V.185; wives VIII.1936; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170, servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) J III.220 (corā); V.161 (pallankā), 421 (dijakaððāyo); Sn p. 87; SnA 57 (bhikkhū). - Note. 55 (paðcapaððāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years), e. g. at DhA I.125; II.57; PvA 99, 142; also in groups: DhA I.99 (janā). - B. No. 500 (paðcasata°, paðcasatā, paðcasatāni). - (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 8434; Pv II.15; PvA 152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv IV.328; J I.204 (°yojana-satikā); Vism 72 (°dhanu-satika, 500 bows in distance). - (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV X.9314; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15-6; men armed Vergil Aen. 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied, where it is only meant to denote a "goodly company, 500 or more") Arahants KhA 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e. g. D I.1; Vin II.199; J I.116, 227; DhA II.109, 153; III.262, 295; IV.184, 186; Sāvakas J I.95; Upāsakas J II.95; PvA 151; Paccekabuddhas DhA IV.201; PvA 76; Vighāsādā J II.95; DhA II.154; Sons PvA 75; Thieves DhA II.204; PvA 54; Relatives PvA 179; Women-servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv II.126; VvA 69, 78, 187; PvA 152; Oxen A IV.41; Monkeys J III.355; Horses Vin III.6. - Money etc. as present, reward or fine representing a "round-sum" (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. II.743) kahāpaṇas Sn 980, 982; PvA 273; blows with stick as fine Vin I.247. - Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e. g. J I.101; DhA II.79; PvA 100, 112; chariots VvA 78; ploughs Sn p. 13. Cp. S I.148 (vyagghī-nisā); Vin II.285 (ūna-paðcasatāni); J II.93 (accharā); V.75 (vāṇijā); DhA I.89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rājasatāni); IV.182 (jāti°) KhA 176 (paritta-dīpā). Also BSk. pað'opasthāyikā-śatāni Divy 529; pañca-mātrāṇi strī-śatāni Divy 533. - Note. When Gotama said that his "religion" would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e. g. at DhA I.62 (ariya-sāvaka-koṭiyo), 256 (°mattā-ariyasāvakā); IV.190 (p. koti-mattā ariya-sāvakā). 3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. °aggaṃ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett°, rās°, koṭṭh°, kumbhi°, bhojan° i. e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor, the granary, the pottery, the larder SnA 270. °angā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka, abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita (see anga; on another combn with anga see below). The phrase paðc'angasamannāgata & °vippahīna (S I.99; A V.16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni: see expld at Vism 146. °angikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira. °abhiððā 5 psychic powers (see Cpd. 209). °ānantarika-kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Miln 25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q. v.) or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs trsl. 267. °indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paððā (see indriya B. 15-19). °vidhaṃ (rāja-) kakudhabhaṇḍaṃ, insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā. °kalyāṇāni, beauty-marks: kesa°, maṃsa°, aṭṭhi°, chavi°, vaya°. °kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses (=taggocarāni paðc'āyatanāni gahitāni honti SnA 211). °gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi. °cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maṃsa° dibba° paððā° buddha° samanta°. °taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each: see Nd2 271v. °nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha° Majjhima° Saṃyutta°, Anguttara° Khuddaka°, e. g. Vin II.287. °nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā-vyāpāda, thīnamiddha, uddhacca-kukkucca, vicikicchā. °patiṭṭhitaṃ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead, waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase °ena vandati (sometimes °ṃ vandati, e. g. SnA 78, 267) J V.502; SnA 267, 271, 293, 328, 436; VvA 6; DhA I.197; IV.178, etc. °bandhana either 5 ways of binding Pāli Text Society 885 Pāli-English Dictionary or pinioning or 5 fold bondage J IV.3 (as "ure pañcangika-bandhanaṃ" cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā S IV.201); Nda 304III.B2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu-bandhanena vā rajju°, sankhalika°, latā°, parikkhepa°), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājðā paðcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ. - There is a diff. kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding, but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana-kāraṇaṃ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands, both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this "bandhana" is a corruption of "vaddhana" (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhanakāraṇa (instead of pañca-vidha-bandhana-k°). See passages under bandhana & cp. M III.182; A I.141; Kvu 597; SnA 479. °balāni 5 forces: saddhā° viriya° sati° samādhi° paððā° D II.120; M II.12; S III.96; A III.12 (see also bala). °bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṃsa Vin IV.176. °macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa° kula° lābha° vaṇṇa° dhamma°. °rajāni defilements: rūpa°, sadda° etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd1 505; SnA 574. °vaṇṇā 5 colours (see ref. for colours under pīta and others), viz. nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B's eye) Nd2 235Q; others with ref. to paduma-puṇḍarīka VvA 41; to paduma DhA III.443; to kusumāni DA I.140; DhA IV.203. °vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q. v.). °saṃyojanāni fetters (q. v.). °sangā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) DhA IV.109. °sīla the 5 moral precepts, as sub-division of the 10 (see dasasīla and Nd2 under sīla on p. 277). 4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Sn 660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca); Th 2, 503 (°kaṭuka=paðcakāmaguṇa-rasa ThA 291); DhA II.25 (°mahānidhi); SnA 39 (°pakāra-gomaṇḍala-puṇṇabhāva). Cp. further: guṇā Miln 249; paṇṇāni Vin I.201 (nimba°, kuṭaja°, paṭola°, sulasi°, kappāsika°); Paṇḍu-rāja-puttā J V.426; pabbagaṇṭhiyo Miln 103; pucchā DhsA 55; mahā-pariccāgā DhA III.441; mahā-vilokanāni DhA I.84; vatthūni Vin II.196 sq.; vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) DhA I.196; suddhāvāsā Dhs A 14. In general see Vin V.128-133 (var. sets of 5). -anga five (bad) qualities (see anga 3 and above 3), in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins D III.269; Nd2 284 C; cp. BSk. paðcānga-viprahīna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy 95, 264 & °samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities A V.15 (of senāsana, expld at Vism 122): see also above. -angika consisting of 5 parts, fivefold, in foll. combns: °jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra, pīti, sukha, cittass'ekaggatā) Dhs 83; °turiya orchestra S I.131; Th 1, 398; 2, 139; Vv 364; DhA I.274, 394; °bandhana bond J IV.3. -angula=°angulika J IV.153 (gandha°); SnA 39 (usabhaṃ nahāpetvā bhojetvā °ṃ datvā mālaṃ bandhitvā). -angulika (also °aka) the 5 fingermark, palm-mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand & 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood). See Vogel, the 5 finger-token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (esp. against the Evil Eye). Vin II.123 (cp. Vin. Texts II.116); J I.166, 192; II.104 (gandha °ṃ deti), 256 (gandhaā, appld to a cetiya); III.23, 160 (lohita°); Vv 3318 (gandha°ṃ adāsiṃ Kassapassa thūpasmiṃ); Mhvs 32, 4 (see trsl. p. 220); DhA III.374 (goṇānaṃ gandha-°āni datvā); SnA 137 (setamālāhi sabba-gandha-sugandhehi p°akehi ca alankatā paripuṇṇa-angapaccangā, of oxen). Cp. MVastu I.269 (stūpeṣu paðcangulāni; see note on p. 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature see at Vogel p. 6 sq. āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle-axe, shield, after Childers) Miln 339 (see Miln trsl. II.227), cp. p° sannaddha J III.436, 467; IV.283, 437; V.431; VI.75; sannaddhap° J IV.160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at diff. passages. -āhaṃ 5 days Vin IV.281; J II.114. -cūḷaka with 5 topknots J V.250 (of a boy). -nakha with 5 claws, N. of a fivetoed animal J V.489 (so read for paðca na khā, misunderstood by C.). -paṭṭhika at Vin II.117, 121, 152; is not clear (v. l. paṭika). Vin. Texts III.97 trsl. "cupboards" and connect it with Sk. paṭṭikā, as celapattikaṃ Vin II.128 undoubtedly is ("strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes," trsl. III.128). It also occurs at Vin IV.47. -patikā (f.) having had 5 husbands J V.424, Pāli Text Society 886 Pāli-English Dictionary 427. -mālin of a wild animal J VI.497 (=pancangika-turiya-saddo viya C., not clear). māsakamattaṃ a sum of 5 māsakas DhA II.29. -vaggiya (or °ika SnA 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū. Their names are Aððākondaðða, Bhaddiya, Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. M I.170; II.94; S III.66; PvA 21 (°e ādiṃ katvā); SnA 351; cp. chabbaggiya. -vidha fivefold J I.204 (°ā abhirakkhā); VI.341 (°paduma), °bandhana: see this. -sādhāraṇa-bhāva fivefold connection J IV.7. -seṭṭha (Bhagavā) "the most excellent in the five" Sn 355 (=paðcannaṃ paṭhamasissānaṃ paðcavaggiyānaṃ seṭṭho, paðcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma-khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho SnA 351). -hattha having 5 hands J V.431. Pañcaka {Pancaka} (adj.) [fr. pañca] fivefold, consisting of five J I.116 (°kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167-175 (°naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhs. trsln 52); SnA 318 (°nipāta of Anguttara). - nt. pañcakaṃ a pentad, five Vin I.255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe, see Vin. Texts II.155), cp. p. 287; pl. paðcakā sets of five Vism 242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka's (i. e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca° "skin-pentad," the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco; vakka° the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa° id. ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthalunga° id. ending with the brain, and 2 chakka's (sets of 6), viz. meda° & mutta°. See e. g. VbhA 249, 258. Pañcakkhattuṃ {Pancakkhattum} (adv.) five times. Pañcadhā {Pancadha} (adv.) in five ways, fivefold DhsA 351. Pañcama {Pancama} (adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. pañca, with °ma as in Lat. supremus, for the usual °to as in Gr. pe/mptos, Lat. quintus, also Sk. pañcathaḥ] num. ord. the fifth D I.88; Sn 84, 99, 101; VvA 102; PvA 52 (°e māse in the 5th month the Petī has to die); DhA III.195 (°e sattāhe in the 5th week). - f. paðcamā PvA 78 (ito °āya jātiyā) and paðcamī Sn 437 (senā); PvA 79 (jāti). Pañcamaka {Pancamaka} (adj.)=pañcama J I.55. Pañcaso {Pancaso} (adv.) by fives. Pañja {Panja} [is it to be puñja?] heap, pile A II.75 (meaning different?); Cp. I.1016. Pañjara {Panjara} (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pañjara, which probably belongs to Lat. pango, q. v. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a cage, J I.436; II.141; III.305 (sīha°); IV.213; V.232 (sīha), 365; VI.385 (sīha°), 391; Miln 23 (°antaragata gone into the c.); 27; DhA I.164 (nakha°), where meaning is "frame"; VbhA 238; +sīha° meaning window. Pañjali (adj.) [pa+aðjali. Cp. Ep. Sk. prāðjali] with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Sn 1031; in cpd. paðjalī-kata (cp. aðjalīkata; aðjali+pp. of kṛ) raising one's folded hands Sn 566, 573; Th 1, 460; J VI.501. Cp. BSk. prāðjalīkṛta MV astu II.257, 287, 301. {Panjali} Pañjalika {Panjalika} (adj.) [fr. pañjali] holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation S I.226; Sn 485, 598. Pāli Text Society 887 Pāli-English Dictionary Pañjasa {Panjasa} (adj.) [pa+añjasa] in the right order, straight A II.15. Pañña {Panna} (-°) (adj.) [the adj. form of paððā] of wisdom, endowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in foll. cpds.: anissaraṇa° D I.245; S II.194; IV.332; anoma° Sn 343; appa° S I.198; J II.166; III.223, 263; avakujja° A I.130; gambhīra° S I.190; javana° S I.63; Nd2 235; tikkha°; dup° D III.252, 282; S I.78, 191; II.159 sq.; M III.25; A II.187 sq.; Dh 111, 140; Pug 13; DhA II.255; nibbedhika° S I.63; A II.178; Nd2 235; puṭhu° ibid.; bhāvita° S IV.111; A V.42 sq.; bhūri° S III.143; IV.205; manda° VbhA 239; mahā° S I.63, 121; II.155; A I.23, 25; II.178 sq.; Nd2 235; SnA 347; sap° S I.13, 22, 212; IV.210; A IV.245; Pv I 88; 115; PvA 60 (=paṇḍita), 131 (+buddhimant); suvimutta° A V.29 sq.; hāsa° S I.63, 191; V.376; Nd2 235. By itself (i. e. not in cpd.) only at Dh 208 (=lokiyalokuttara-paððāya sampanna DhA III.172) and 375 (=paṇḍita DhA IV.111). Paññatā {Pannata} (f.) [secondary abstract formation fr. paððā, in meaning equal to paððāṇa] having sense, wisdom A III.421 (dup°=foolishness) V.159 (id.); mahā°, puthu°, vipula° A I.45. See also paññatta2. Paññatta1 {Pannatta} [pp. of paððāpeti, cp. BSk. prajðapta] pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed, or- dained S II.218; A I.98, 151; IV.16, 19; V.74 sq.; Pv IV.135; DhA I.274; VvA 9 (su° mañca-pītha), 92 (niccabhatta); PvA 78. Esp. freq. in ster. formula paððatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i. e. special) chair (seat) D I.109, 125, 148; S I.212; Dh 148; SnA 267; PvA 16, 23, 61. Paññatta2 {Pannatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. paððā] wisdom, sense etc. S V.412 (v. l. paððatā). See also paððatā. Paññatti {Pannatti} (f.) [fr. paððāpeti, cp. paððatta1] making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea, notion, concept. On term see Cpd. 3 sq., 198, 199; Kvu trsln 1; Dhs trsln 340. - M III.68; S III.71; IV.38 (māra°), 39 (satta°, dukkha°, loka°); A II.17; V.190; Ps II.171, 176; Pug 1; Dhs I.309; Nett 1 sq., 38, 188; KhA 102, 107; DA I.139; SnA 445, 470; PvA 200. The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e. g. at J II.65 (°vahāra); Miln 173 (loka°); KhA 28; adj. paṇṇattika (q. v.). Paññavant (adj.) [paððā+vant, with reduction of ā to a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] possessed of insight, wise, intelligent, sensible Vin I.60; D III.237, 252, 265, 282, 287; M I.292; III.23; S I.53, 79; II.159 sq., 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.); IV.243; V.100, 199, 392, 401; A II.76, 187, 230; III.2 sq., 127, 183; IV.85, 217, 271, 357; V.25, 124 sq.; Sn 174; Nd2 259; Dh 84; J I.116; Pug 13; DhA II.255; KhA 54; VbhA 239, 278; PvA 40. Cp. paððāṇavant. {Pannavant} Paññā {Panna} (f.) [cp. Vedic prajðā, pa+jðā] intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, "intellect as conversant with general truths" (Dial. II.68), reason, wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition. See on term Mrs. Rh. D. "Buddhism" (1914) pp. 94, 130, 201; also Cpd. 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhs. trsl. 17, 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd2 380=Dhs 16 (paððā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As tt. in Buddhist Psych. Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard "Code of religious practice" which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation. These 3 stages are: (1) sīla-kkhandha (or °sampadā), code of moral duties; (2) samādhi-kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of con centration & meditation; (3) paððā- Pāli Text Society 888 Pāli-English Dictionary kkhandha (or °sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (See also jhāna1.) They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1. (given in extenso at D I.62-85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. D II.81, 84, 91 (see khandha, citta & sīla). - D I.26=162 (°gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni), 174 (°vāda), 195 (°pāripūrin); II.122 (ariyā); III.101, 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq.; S I.13=165 (sīla, citta, paððā), 17, 34, 55; II.185 (sammā°), 277; V.222 (ariyā); M I.144 (id.); III.99 (id.), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā°); A I.61, 216; II.1 (ariyā); IV.105 (id.); III.106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); IV.11 (id.); V.123 sq.; It 35, 40 (°uttara), 51 (sīlaQsamādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā°); Sn 77, 329, 432, 881, 1036 and passim; Dh 38, 152, 372; Nd1 77; Nd2 380; Ps I.53, 64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; II.150 sq., 162, 185 sq.; Pug 25, 35, 54 (°sampadā); Dhs 16, 20, 555; Nett 8, 15, 17, 28, 54, 191; VbhA 140, 396; PvA 40 (paððāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp 343. On paððāya see sep. article. See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta+). -ādhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom A II.137. -indriya the faculty of reason (with sati° & samādhi°) D III.239, 278; Dhs 16, 20 etc.; Nett. 7, 15 sq; 191. obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Ps I.119; Dhs 16, 20 etc. -kkhandha the code of cognition (see above) Vin I.62; D III.229, 279; It 51; Nd1 21; Nett 70, 90, 128. It is always combd with sīla° & samādhi-kkhandha. -cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha: see under cakkhumant) D III.219; S V.467; It 52; Nd1 354; Nd2 235. -dada giving or bestowing wisdom S I.33; Sn 177. -dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures, see dhana) D III.163, 251; A III.53; VvA 113. -nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason S V.97; It 82. -paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom S V.411; A I.45; Ps II.189. -pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dh 28 (=dibba-cakkhuṃ sankhātaṃ °ṃ). -bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers D III.229, 253; M III.72; A IV.363; Sn 212; Dhs 16, 20 etc.; Nett 54, 191; VvA 7. -bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom S V.411; A I.45. -bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca-samuppāda by Bdhgh at Vism XVII, pp. 517 sq. (°niddesa). -ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs 16, 20 etc. -vimutta freed by reason D II.70; III.105, 254; M I.35, 477; A I.61; II.6; IV.452; Sn 847; Nd1 207; Kvu 58; Nett 199. -vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto-vimutti) D I.156, 167; III.78, 102, 108, 132, 281; It 75, 91; Sn 725, 727; Nett 7, 40, 81, 127; DA I.313; VbhA 464. -visuddhi purity of insight D III.288. -vuddhi increase of knowledge S V.97, 411; A I.15, 45; II.245. sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge (see above) A I.62; II.66; III.12 sq., 182 sq.; IV.284, 322. -sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dh 229 (°samāhita=lokuttarapaððāya c'eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata DhA III.329); Vv 3423 id.=ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata VvA 155). Often used with yathābhūtaṃ q. v. Cp. paððāya. Paññāṇa {Pannana} (nt.) [pa+ðāṇa, cp. Vedic prajðāno in both meanings & paððā] 1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence D I.124 (sīla+); S I.41; A IV.342; Sn 96, 1136; DA I.171, 290. - 2. mark, sign, token J V.195. Paññāṇavant {Pannanavant} (adj.) [paððāṇa+vant] reasonable, sensible, wise Sn 202, 1090; J V.222; VI.361; Nd2 382. Paññāta {Pannata} [pp. of pajānāti] known, renowned DA I.143; ap° unknown, defamed Vin IV.231; S IV.46; A III.134 (where also der. appaððātika). Paññāpaka {Pannapaka} (adj. n.) [fr. paððāpeti] one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin II.305 (āsana°). Pāli Text Society 889 Pāli-English Dictionary Paññāpana {Pannapana} (nt.) [fr. paððāpeti] disclosure, discovering M III.17; S III.59; declaration DhsA 11. Paññāpetar {Pannapetar} [n. ag. of paððāpeti] one who imparts knowledge, discloser of truths, discoverer D II.223. Paññāpeti {Pannapeti} [Caus. of pajānāti] 1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define D I.119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṃ), 180, 185, 237; It 98 (tevijjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ), Pug 37, 38; PvA 61 (āsanaṃ). - 2. to lay down, fold out, spread PvA 43 (sanghāṭiṃ). - pp. paññatta (q. v.). - Caus. II. paððāpāpeti J III.371. Paññāya {Pannaya} (indecl.) [ger. of pajānāti, in relation °ðāya: ðatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so expld by P. Commentators, whereas modern interpreters have taken it as instr. of paððā] understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaṃ (q. v.) S I.13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiṃ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); II.7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); III.6 (id.); V.324 (ajjhupekkhati); A I.125 (anuggahissati); III.44 (vaḍḍhati); IV.13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); V.39 (disvā) Sn 1035 (see Nd2 380II); It 93 (moh'aggiṃ, v. l. saððāya); PvA 60 (upaparikkhitvā, as expln of ðatvā), 140=viceyya. Paññāyati [Pass. of pajānāti] to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived, seen or taken for, to appear It 89; DhA I.14, 95 (fut. paððāyissatha you will be well known); II.75; PvA 83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati+); ppr. paððāyamāna DhA I.29; PvA 96 (=perceivable). - aor. paððāyi PvA 172 (paccakkhato). Pañha {Pannayati} [Ved. praśna, for details of etym. see pucchati] mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question D I.11 (deva°) M I.83; III.30; A I.103, 288; III.81, 191 sq., 419 sq.; V.50 sq.; Sn 512, 957, 1005, 1024, 1148 etc., Nd1 464; Miln 28, 340; DA I.97. pañhaṃ pucchati to ask a question Nd2 under pucchā (q. v.). -paṭibhāna an answer to a question M I.83; Miln 28. vīmaṃsaka one who tests a question Sn 827; Nd1 166; SnA 538. -vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaṃsa "direct," vibhajja "qualified," paṭipucchā "after further questioning," ṭhapanīya "not to be answered or left undecided," thus enumd at D III.229; A I.197 sq.; II.46; Miln 339. {Panha} Paṭa {Pata} [cp. Epic Sk. paṭa, etym. unknown, prob. dialectical] cloth; cloak, garment S II.219 (°pilotika); Th 1, 1092 (bhinna-paṭan-dhara "wearing the patchwork cloak" trsl.); J IV.494; KhA 45, 58 (°tantu); DA I.198; DhA II.45 (puppha°); III.295 °kañcuka, v. l. kaṭak°); Vism 16 (bhinnapaṭa-dhara in defn of bhikkhu); VbhA 327 (id.); DhsA 81 (paṭa-paṭa sadda); VvA 73, 201; PvA 185. Cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa. Paṭaggi {Pataggi} [paṭi+aggi] counter-fire Vin II.138; J I.212; kacc. 31. Paṭanga {Patanga} [cp. *Sk. phaḍingā, but influenced by Sk. pataga a winged animal, bird] a grasshopper Sn 602; J VI.234, 506; Miln 272, 407; DhA IV.58; PvA 67; Pgdp 59. Paṭaccarin {Pataccarin} (adj.) [paṭa+carin but cp. Sk. pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185] poor (lit. dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at J VI.227 (vv. ll paḷaccari & paṭiccari). Pāli Text Society 890 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭala {Patala} (nt.) [connected with paṭa, cp. Sk. paṭala in meaning "section" Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.] 1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin, film Vism 257 (maṃsa° of the liver, where KhA 54 reads maṃsa-piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa°); DhsA 307 (7 akkhi° membranes of the eye); KhA 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara° mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (id.); DhsA 330 (id.); SnA 248 (id.); PvA 186 (eka° upāhanā, singlelined, cp. paṭalika & palāsika & see Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 165); Vism 446 (kappāsa° film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66 (id.). - 2. roof, ceiling PvA 52 (ayo° of iron). - 3. a heap, mass (esp. of clouds) J I.73 (megha°); DhsA 239 (abbha°). - madhu° honey comb J I.262; DhA I.59; III.323. - 4. cataract of the eye Dāvs V.27. Paṭalika {Patalika} (adj.) [fr. paṭala] belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (eka° with single lining) J II.277 (v. l. for ekatalika); III.80, 81 (id.). - as n. f. paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers), usually combd with paṭikā Vin I.192; II.162; D I.7 (=ghana-puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DA I.87); A I.137, 181; III.50, IV.94, 231, 394. Paṭaha {Pataha} [cp. Epic Sk. paṭaha, dial.] a kettle-drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at DhsA 319, viz. mahā-bheri & p.-bheri; J I.355; Dpvs 16, 14; PvA 4. Paṭāka {Pataka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. paṭāka, connected with paṭa] a flag M I.379; Miln 87; Vism 469; ThA 70. Paṭāṇi at Vin IV.46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is expld by Bdhgh as "maðcapidhānaṃ (for °pīṭhānaṃ) pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti." At DA I.77 we find the foll. . "visūkaṃ paṭāni (sic.) -bhūtaṃ dassanan ti visūkadassanaṃ, " and at DhsA 393: "paṭānigahaṇaṃ gahetvā ekapaden'eva taṃ nissaddaṃ akāsiṃ." Paṭi {Patani} (indecl.) [Ved, prati, to Idg. *preti as in Lat. pretium (fr. *pretios)" price" (cp. precious), i. e. equivalent; Gr. pre/s (aeol.), proti/, pro/s against] directional prefix in welldefined meaning of "back (to), against, towards, in opposition to, opposite." As preposition (with acc. and usually postponed) towards, near by, at; usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Sn 291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati); Th 1, 628 (suriyass'uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.); J I.457 (paṭi suriyaṃ thatvā standing facing the sun); IV.93; VI.491; Pv II.941 (suriy'uggamanam p.); Miln 116 (dānam p.); PvA 154 (paṭi Gangaṃ against the G.). - Most freq. combns are: paṭi+ā (patiyā°), patisaṃ°; vi+paṭi°, sampaṭi°. The composition (assimilation-) form before vowels is pacc° (b. v.).-Meanings. I. (lit.) "back," in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opp. anu, see below III.), contrary: viz. (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti-. against): °kaṇṭaka, °kosati (re-ject), °kūla, °khipati (re-fuse, op-pose), °gha, °codeti (re-prove), thambhati, °disā, °deseti, °pakkha, °patha, °piṃsati, °pīḷita, °magga, °manteti, °yodha (at-tack), °vacana (re-ply), °vadati, °vedeti, °sattu (enemy), °suṇāti, °hata; - (b) warding off, protecting against (counter-, anti-): °kara (antidote), °sedhati (ward-off). - (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter-, rival): °puggala (one's equal), °purisa (rival), °bala (adequate), °bimba (counterpart), °bhāga (id.); °malla (rival wrestler), °sama, °sāsana, °sūra, °seṭṭha; - (d) close contact (against, be-): °kujjita (covered), °gādha, °channa ("be-deckt") °vijjhana. - (2) in return, in exchange (in revenge) °akkosati, °āneti, °katheti, °karoti, °kūṭa1, °kkamati, °khamāpeti, °gāti (sing in response), °gīta, °daṇḍa (retribution), °dadāti, °dāna, °nivāsana, °paṇṇa (in reply), °pasaṃsati, °piṇḍa, °pucchati (ask in return), °māreti (kill in revenge), °bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange), °bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) °rodana, °roseti, °vera (revenge), °sammodeti, °sātheyya. - (3) (temporal) again, a second time {Pati} Pāli Text Society 891 Pāli-English Dictionary (re-): °dasseti (re-appear), °nijjhatta, °nivattati, °pavesati, °pākatika (re-stored), °bujjhati, °vinicchinati, °saðjīvita (re-suscitated), °sandhi (re-incarnation), °sammajjati. - (4) away from, back to (esp. in compn paṭivi°): °kuṭati (shrink back), °ghāta (repulsion), °dhāvati, °neti, °paṇāmeti (send away), °bandhati (hold back), °bāhati (id.), °vijacchati, °vineti, °vinodeti (drive out), °virata, °saṃharati, °sallīna, °sutta, °sumbhita. - II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at-: °oloketi (look at), °gijjha (hankering after) °ggaha, °jānāti °pūjeti, °peseti (send out to), °baddha (bound to), °bhaya, °yatta, °rūpa, °laddha, °labhati (at-tain), °lābha °lobheti, °sāmeti, °sevati (go after), °ssata. (2) together (con-, com-), esp. combd with °saṃ°; °saṃyujati; °passaddha, °maṇḍita, °sankharoti, °santhāra. - (3) asunder, apart ("up"): °kopeti (shake up), °viṃsa (part), °vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary, by-, sham (developed out of meaning I. 1 c.): °nāsikā (a false nose), °sīsaka (sham top knot); esp. freq. in redupl. (iterative) cpds., like anga-paccanga (limb & by-limb, i. e. all kinds of limbs), vata-paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent (see ā5). - III. The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is freq. combd either (a) in neg. contrast or (b) in positive emphasis, e. g. (a) anuvātaṃ paṭivātaṃ with and against the wind; anuloma+paṭiloma with and against the grain; °sotaṃ w. & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (lit. up & down). - Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination; it is established in the combn with sthā (as patiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enumd under the respective form of paṭi°, with the exception of patiṭṭh° Paṭi—āneti {Patianeti} [paṭi+ā+nī] to lead or bring back, in duppaṭi-ānaya difficult to bring back J IV.43. Paṭi—orohati {Patiorohati} [paṭi+ava+ruh] to descend from DA I.251 (°itvā). Paṭikankhati {Patikankhati} [paṭi+kānkṣ] to wish for, long for S I.227. adj. °kankhin M I.21. See also pāṭikankhin. Paṭikacca {Patikacca} (indecl.) [so read for °gacca as given at all passages mentioned, see Trenckner Miln p. 421, & Geiger Pr. § 381. - ger. fr. paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sk. pratikāra in same meaning "caution, remedy"] 1. previously (lit. as cautioned) Vin IV.44; Miln 48 (v. l. °kacca) usually as paṭigacc'eva, e.g. Vin I.342; D II.118. - (2) providing for (the future), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin II.256; S I.57; V.162; A II.25; D II.144; Th 1, 547; J III.208; IV.166 (in expln of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); V.235. Paṭikaṇṭaka {Patikantaka} [paṭi+kantaka4] an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman J I.186; II.239; DhA III.456 (v. l. °kaṇḍaka). Paṭikata {Patikata} [pp. of paṭikaroti] "done against," i. e. provided or guarded against J IV.166. Paṭikatheti {Patikatheti} [paṭi+katheti] to answer, reply J VI.224; DA I.263. Paṭikampati {Patikampati} [paṭi+kampati] to shake; pret. paccakampittha J V.340. Paṭikamma {Patikamma} (nt.) [paṭi+kamma, cp. paṭikaroti] redress, atonement A I.21 (sa° & a° āpatti) Miln 29; DA I.96. Pāli Text Society 892 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭikara {Patikara} [fr. paṭi+kṛ] counteracting; requital, compensation Vin IV.218 (a°); D I.137 (ovāda° giving advice or providing for? v. l. pari°); III.154. Paṭikaroti {Patikaroti} [paṭi+karoti) 1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiṃ) Vin I.98, 164; II.259; IV.19; S II.128=205; A V.324; DhA I.54. - 2. to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious J IV.166. - 3. to imitate J II.406. - ger. paṭikacca (q. v.). - pp. paṭikata (q. v.). Paṭikassana {Patikassana} (nt.) [paṭi+kṛṣ] drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. "throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again" Vin II.7, 162; A I.99. Paṭikassati {Patikassati} [paṭi+kassati] to draw back, remove, throw back Vin I.320 (mūlāya); II.7 (id.). Paṭikā {Patika} (f.) [Sk. paṭikā dial. fr. paṭa cloth] a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set'attharako DA I.86) D I.7; A I.137, 181; III.50; IV.94, 231, 394; Dāvs V.36. See also paṭiya. Paṭikāra {Patikara} [paṭi+kṛ] counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp 201, 498; usually neg. app° adj. not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin IV.218 (=anosārita p. 219); PvA 274 (maraṇa) Cp. foll. Paṭikārika {Patikarika} (adj.) [fr. preceding] of the nature of an amendment; app° not making amends, not making good J V.418. Paṭikiṭṭha {Patikittha} inferior, low, vile A I.286=Dh I.144; in meaning "miserable" at DhA II.3 is perhaps better to be read with v. l. as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha? Paṭikibbisa {Patikibbisa} (nt.) [paṭi+kibbisa] wrong doing in return, retaliation J III.135. Paṭikirati {Patikirati} [paṭi+kirati] to strew about, paṭikirāma=vikirīyamān'angā viya vattāma PvA 271). to sprawl Pv IV.108 (uttānā Paṭikiliṭṭha {Patikilittha} (adj.) [paṭi+kiliṭṭha] very miserable PvA 268 (v. l.); and perhaps at DhA II.3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭikujjati {Patikujjati} [paṭi+kubj, see kujja & cp. patikuṭati] to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose D II.162; M I.30; A III.58. Caus. °eti J I.50, 69. - pp. paṭikujjita (q. v.). Paṭikujjana {Patikujjana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+kubj] covering, in °phalaka covering board, seat KhA 62 (vacca-kuṭiyā). Paṭikujjita {Patikujjita} [pp. of paṭikujjeti] covered over, enclosed A I.141; Th 1, 681; J I.50, 69; V.266; Pv I.1013 (=upari pidahita PvA 52); DhsA 349. Paṭikujjhati {Patikujjhati} [paṭi+krudh] to be angry in return S I.162= Th 1, 442. Pāli Text Society 893 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭikuṭati {Patikutati} [paṭi+kuṭ as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati] to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig. to shrink from, to refuse A IV.47 sq. (v. l. °kujjati); Miln 297 (pati°; cp. Miln trsln II.156); Vism 347 (v. l. BB; T. °kuṭṭati); DhA I.71; II.42. - Caus. patikoṭṭeti (q. v.). pp. paṭikuṭita (q. v.). See also paṭilīyati. Paṭikuṭita {Patikutita} [pp. of paṭikuṭati] bent back, turned over (?) Vin II.195 (reading uncertain, vv. ll. paṭikuṭṭiya & paṭikuṭiya). Paṭikuṭṭha {Patikuttha} [pp. of paṭi+kruś, see paṭikkosati & cp. BSk. pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500] scolded, scorned, defamed, blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin I.317; PvA 268 (v. l. paṭikiliṭṭha); as neg. app° blameless, faultless S III.71- 73; A IV.246; Kvu 141, 341. See also paṭikiṭṭha. Paṭikuṇika {Patikunika} (adj.) [for °kuṭita?] bent, crooked PvA 123 (v. l. kuṇita & kuṇḍita). Paṭikuṇṭhita {Patikunthita} [cp. kuṇṭhita]=pariguṇṭhita (q. v.); covered, surrounded J VI.89. Paṭikuttaka {Patikuttaka} [or uncertain etym.; paṭi+kuttaka?] a sort of bird J VI.538. Paṭikubbara {Patikubbara} [paṭi+kubbara] the part of the carriage-pole nearest to the horse(?) A IV.191. Paṭikulyatā (f.) [fr. paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patikkulyatā] reluctance, loathsomeness M I.30; A V.64. Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q. v.). {Patikulyata} Paṭikūṭa {Patikuta} (nt.) [paṭi+kūṭa1] cheating in return J II.183. Paṭikūlatā {Patikulata} (f.) [fr. paṭikkūla] disgustiveness Vism 343 sq. Paṭikeḷanā {Patikelana} see parikeḷanā; i. e. counter-playing Dh I.286. Paṭikoṭṭeti {Patikotteti} [paṭi+koṭṭeti as Caus. of kuṭati] to bend away, to make refrain from M I.115; S II.265 (cp. id. p. A IV.47 with trs. °kuṭati & v. l. °kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The T. prints pati°. Paṭikopeti {Patikopeti} [paṭi+kopeti] to shake, disturb, break (fig.) J V.173 (uposathaṃ). Paṭikkanta {Patikkanta} [pp. of paṭikkamati] gone back from (-°), returned (opp. abhi°) D I.70 (abhikkanta+); A II.104, 106 sq., 210; Pv IV.143 (cp. PvA 240); DA I.183 (=nivattana); VvA 6 (opp. abhi°) PvA 11 (piṇḍapāta°), 16 (id.). For opp. of paṭikkanta in conn. with piṇḍāya see paviṭṭha. Paṭikkantaka {Patikkantaka} [fr. last] one who has come or is coming back DhA I.307. Paṭikkama [fr. paṭi+kram] going back Pv IV.12 (abhikkama+"going forward and backward"; cp. PvA 219). {Patikkama} Pāli Text Society 894 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭikkamati {Patikkamati} [paṭi+kram] to step backwards, to return (opp. abhi°) Vin II.110, 208; M I.78; S I.200, 226; II.282; Sn 388 (ger. °kkamma=nivattitvā SnA 374); SnA 53. - Caus. paṭikkamāpeQ to cause to retreat J I.214 Miln 121. - pp. paṭikkanta (q. v.). Paṭikkamana {Patikkamana} (nt.) [fr. paṭikkamati] returning, retiring, going back Dh I.95; in °sālā meaning "a hall with seats of distinction" SnA 53. Paṭikkūla {Patikkula} (adj.) [paṭi+kūla] lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin I.58 (°kūla); D III.112, 113; M I.341 (dukkha°); S IV.172 (id.); J I.393; VvA 92 (K.); PvA 77; VbhA 250 sq. - app° without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 532 (K.); Vism 70 (k). - nt. °ṃ loathsomeness, impurity VvA 232. See also abstr. pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi°). -gāhitā as neg. a° "refraining from contradiction" (Dhs trsln) Pug 24 (k.); Dhs 1327 (k.). -manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body DhA II.87 (°kkula); VbhA 251. -saððā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food D III.289, 291; S V.132; A IV.49; adj. °saññin S I.227; V.119, 317; A III.169. Paṭikkosati {Patikkosati} [paṭi+kruś] to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin I.115; II.93; M III.29; D I.53 (=paṭibāhati DA I.160); S IV.118 (+apavadati); Sn 878; Dh 164; J IV.163; Miln 131, 256; DhA III.194 (opp. abhinandati). - pp. paṭikuṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭikkosana {Patikkosana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. paṭikkosati] protest Vin I.321; II.102 (a°). Paṭikkhati {Patikkhati} [paṭi+īks] to look forward to, to expect Sn 697 (paṭikkhaṃ sic ppr.=āgamayanā SnA 490). Paṭikkhitta {Patikkhitta} [pp. of paṭikkhipati] refused, rejected D I.142; M I.78, 93; A I.296; II.206; J II.436; Nett 161, 185 sq.; DhA II.71. Paṭikkhipati {Patikkhipati} [paṭi+khipati] to reject, refuse, object to, oppose J I.67; IV.105; Miln 195; DA I.290; DhA I.45; II.75; PvA 73, 114, 151, 214 (aor. °khipi=vāresi). -appaṭikkhippa (grd.) not to be rejected J II.370. - Contrasted to samādiyati Vism 62, 64 & passim. Paṭikkhepa {Patikkhepa} [fr. paṭi+kṣip] opposition, negation, contrary SnA 228 for "na"), 502; PvA 189 (°vacana the opp. expression). °to (abl.) in opposition or contrast to PvA 24. Paṭikhamāpita {Patikhamapita} [pp. of paṭi+khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] forgiven DhA II.78. Paṭigacca {Patigacca} see paṭikacca. Paṭigacchati {Patigacchati} to give up, leave behind J IV.482 (gehaṃ); cp. paccagū. Paṭigandhiya {Patigandhiya} only as neg. appaṭi° (q. v.). Paṭigāthā {Patigatha} (f.) [paṭi+gāthā] counter-stanza, response SnA 340. Cp. paccanīka-gāthā. Paṭigādha {Patigadha} [paṭi+gādha2] a firm stand or foothold A III.297 sq.; Pug 72=Kvu 389. Pāli Text Society 895 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭigāyati {Patigayati} (°gāti) [paṭi+gāyati] to sing in response, to reply by a song J IV.395 (imper. °gāhi). Paṭigijjha {Patigijjha} (adj.) [paṭi+gijjha, a doublet of giddha, see gijjha2] greedy; hankering after Sn 675 (SnA 482 reads °giddha and explns by mahāgijjha). Paṭigīta {Patigita} (nt.) [paṭi+gīta] a song in response, counter song J IV.393. Paṭigūhati {Patiguhati} (°gūhati )[paṭi+gūhati] to concert, keep back Cp. I.918. Paṭiggaṇhanaka {Patigganhanaka} (adj.-n.) [paṭiggaṇhana (=paṭiggahaṇa) +ka] receiving, receiver PvA 175. Paṭiggaṇhāti (paṭigaṇhāti )[paṭi+gaṇhāti] to receive, accept, take (up) D I.110 (vatthaṃ), 142; Vin I.200; II.109, 116 (a sewing-needle); S IV.326 (jātarūpa-rajataṃ); Sn 479, 689, 690; Dh 220; J I.56, 65; DA I.236; PvA 47. In special phrase accayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin II.192; D I.85; M I.438; J V.379. - pp. paṭiggahita (q. v.). - Caus. °ggaheti Vin II.213; M I.32. {Patigganhati} Paṭiggaha {Patiggaha} [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] 1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient J I.146; II.9; VI.474; Pv III.111. - 2. friendly reception J VI.526. - 3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin II.115, 213 (udaka°). - 4. a thimble Vin II.116. Paṭiggahaṇa {Patiggahana} (nt.) [fr. paṭigganhāti] acceptance, receiving, taking M III.34; S V.472; SnA 341. - accaya° acceptance of a sin, i. e. pardon, absolution J V.380. Paṭiggahita {Patiggahita} [pp. of paṭigganhāti] received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin I.206, 214; J VI.231. - As appaṭiggahitaka (nt.) "that which is not received" at Vin IV.90. Paṭiggahītar {Patiggahitar} [n. ag. of paṭiggaṇhāti] one who receives, recipient D I.89. Paṭiggāha {Patiggaha} see patiṭṭhāha. Paṭiggāhaka (adj.-n.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin II.213; D I.138; A I.161; II.80 sq.; III.42, 336; J I.56; PvA 7, 128, 175 (opp. dāyaka); VvA 195; Sdhp 268. {Patiggahaka} Paṭiggāhaṇa {Patiggahana} (nt.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] reception, taking in J VI.527. Paṭigha {Patigha} (m. & nt.) [paṭi+gha, adj. suffix of ghan=han, lit. striking against] 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance, anger D I.25, 34; III.254, 282; S I.13; IV.71, 195, 205, 208 sq.; V.315; A I.3, 87, 200; Sn 371, 536; Dhs 1060; Miln 44; DA I.22. - 2. (psychologically) sensory reaction D III.224, 253, 262; S I.165, 186; A I.41, 267; II.184; Dhs 265, 501, 513, 579; VbhA 19. See on term Dhs trsln 72, 204, 276 and passim. - appaṭigha see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaṃso at DhsA 308? (paṭigha-ṭṭhāna-nighaṃso, or paṭighaṭṭana-nighaṃso?) Pāli Text Society 896 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭighavant {Patighavant} (adj.) [fr. paṭigha] full of repugnance, showing anger S IV.208, 209. Paṭighāta {Patighata} [paṭi+ghāta, of same root as paṭigha] 1. (lit.) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off D III.130; M I.10; A I.98; IV.106 sq.; J I.344; Vism 31 (=paṭihanana); Miln 121; DhA II.8; PvA 33. - 2. (psych.) resentment Dhs 1060, cp. Dhs trsl. 282. Paṭighosa {Patighosa} [paṭi+ghosa] echo Vism 554. Paṭicamma {Paticamma} in °gataṃ sallaṃ at J VI.78 to be expld not with C. as from paṭi+camati (cam to wash, cp. ācamati), which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toev. II.29, s. v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna-camma, i. e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opp. side) which falls in with the C. expln "vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti." Paṭicaya & Paṭiccaya {Paticaya} {Paticcaya} [paṭi+caya] adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin II.74; III.158 (pati°); S III.169; A III.376 sq. (v. l. pati°); IV.355; V.336 sq.; Th 1, 642; Ud 35 (pati°); Miln 138. Paṭicarati {Paticarati} [paṭi+carati) 1. to wander about, to deal with Miln 94. - 2. to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaṃ p. "to be saved by another in another way," or to from one (thing) to another, i. e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked D I.94; Vin IV.35; M I.96, 250, 442; A IV.168 (v. l. paṭivadati); expld at DA I.264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti "to cover over," i. e. to conceal (a question). See on expression Dialogues I.116. Paṭicaleti {Paticaleti} [Caus. of paṭicalati] to nudge J V.434. Paṭicāra {Paticara} [fr. paṭi+car] intercourse, visit, dealing with Miln 94. Paṭicodana {Paticodana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭicodeti] rebuking, scolding (back) DhsA 393. Paṭicodeti {Paticodeti} [paṭi+codeti] to blame, reprove M I.72; Vin IV.217; Ud 45. Paṭicca {Paticca} [ger. of pacceti, paṭi+i; cp. BSk. pratītya] grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with acc.) M I.265 (etaṃ on these grounds); S III.93=It 89 (atthavasaṃ); J II.386 (=abhisandhāya); Sn 680, 784, 872, 1046; SnA 357; DhA I.4; PvA 64 (maraṇaṃ), 164, 181 (kammaṃ), 207 (anuddayaṃ). See also foll. -vinīta trained to look for causality M III.19. Paṭicca-samuppanna {Paticcasamuppanna} [p.+samuppana] evolved by reason of the law of causation D III.275; M I.500; S II.26; A V.187; Ps I.51 sq., 76 sq.; Vbh 340, 362. Cp. BSk. pratitya samutpanna MVastu III.61. Paṭicca-samuppāda {Paticcasamuppada} [p.+samuppāda, BSk. prātītyasamutpāda, e. g. Divy 300, 547] "arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)" happening by way of cause, working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation; causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes. - See on this Mrs. Rh. D. in Buddhism 90 f., Ency. Rel. & Ethics, s. v. & KS II., preface. Cpd. p. 260 sq. with diagram of the "Wheel of Life"; Pts. of Controversy, 390 f. - The Pāli Text Society 897 Pāli-English Dictionary general formula runs thus: Imasmiṃ sati, idaṃ hoti, imass'uppādā, idaṃ uppajjati; imasmiṃ asati, idaṃ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaṃ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes; from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases M II.32; S II.28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) "individual" or "being," in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a "Buddhist" to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma-paṭilomaṃ manas'ākāsi Vin I.1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all, primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces sankhārā: karma, dimly conscious elements, capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action, Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to viððāṇa thinking substance (consciousness, Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then follow in succession the foll. stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body, animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rh. D.), saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh. D.), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass'ûpayāsā) old age & death (+tribulation, grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk. form is pratītya-samutpāda, e. g. at Divy 300, 547. The Paṭicca-samuppāda is also called the Nidāna ("basis," or "ground," i. e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay'ākāra ("related-condition"), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya-ðāya ("the noble method or system"). The term paccay'ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhammaliterature. - The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (D II.30 sq.; cp. Dial. II.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viððāṇa. The same chain occurs again at S II.104 sq. - A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and sankhārā added to precede viððāṇa (as above). Thus at S II.5 sq. - A detailed exposition of the P.-s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism XVII. (pp. 517-586, under the title of Paððā-bhūmi-niddesa), and at VbhA 130-213 under the title of Paccayākāra-vibhanga. - Some passages selected for ref.: Vin I.1 sq.; M I.190, 257; S I.136; II.1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq.; AI.177; V.184; Sn. 653; Ud 1 sq.; Ps I.50 sq.; 144; Nett 22, 24, 32, 64 sq.; DA I.125, 126. -kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation M III.63; Nd1 171; f. abstr. °kusalatā D III.212. Paṭicchaka {Paticchaka} (adj.) [fr. paṭicchati) receiving J VI.287. Paṭicchati {Paticchati} [paṭi+icchati of iṣ2; cp. BSk. pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati] to accept, receive, take A III.243 (udakaṃ); Vin IV.18; Th 2, 421; J I.233; II.432; III.171; IV.137; V.197; DhA III.271. - pp. paṭicchita (q. v.). Caus. II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give J I.64, 143, 159, 383, 506; II.133; PvA 81. Paṭicchanna {Paticchanna} [pp. of paṭicchādeti] covered, concealed, hidden Vin II.40; A I.282; Sn 126, 194; Pv I.102 (kesehi=paṭicchādita PvA 48); II.102 (kesehi); DA I.276, 228; SnA 155; KhA 53; VbhA 94 (°dukkha); PvA 43, 103. -appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin II.38; J I.207. -kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions A II.239; Sn 127. 898 Pāli Text Society Paṭicchavi {Paticchavi} Pāli-English Dictionary in appaṭicchavi in appaṭicchavi at Pv II.113 read with v. l. as sampatitacchavi. Paṭicchāda {Paticchada} [fr. paṭi+chad] 1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv II.116 (=vattha PvA 76). - 2. deceiving, hiding; concealment, deception Sn 232. Paṭicchādaka {Paticchadaka} =prec. DhsA 51. Paṭicchādana {Paticchadana} (nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] covering, hiding, concealment M I.10; A III.352; Vbh 357=SnA 180. Paṭicchādaniya {Paticchadaniya} (nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin I.206, 217; Miln 291. Paṭicchādita {Paticchadita} [pp. of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna] covered, concealed, hidden J VI.23 (=paṭisanthata) PvA 48. Paṭicchādī {Paticchadi} (f.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] 1. covering, protection Vin II.122. - 2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin I.296; IV.171. Paṭicchādeti {Paticchadeti} [paṭi+chādeti, Caus. of chad] 1. to cover over, conceal, hide S I.70, 161; DA I.264; VvA 65 (dhanaṃ); KhA 191; PvA 76, 88, 142 (kesehi), 194 (=parigūhati). - 2. to clothe oneself Vin I.46. - 3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) M I.220. - 4. to conceal or evade (a question) DA I.264. - pp. paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna (q. v.). Paṭicchita {Paticchita} [pp. of paṭicchati] accepted, taken up Sn 803 (pl. °tāse, cp. Nd1 113 & SnA 531). Paṭijaggaka {Patijaggaka} (adj.) [fr. paṭijaggati] fostering, nursing, taking care of J V.111. Paṭijaggati {Patijaggati} [paṭi+jaggati, cp. BSk. pratijāgarti Divy 124, 306] lit. to watch over, i. e. to nourish, tend, feed, look after, take care of, nurse Dh 157; J I.235, 375; II.132, 200, 436; Vism 119; DhA I.8, 45, 99, 392; IV.154; PvA 10, 43. - pp. paṭijaggita (q. v.). - Caus. °jaggāpeti. Paṭijaggana {Patijaggana} (nt.) [fr. paṭijaggati] rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care J I.148; Miln 366; DhA I.27; II.96. Paṭijagganaka {Patijagganaka} (adj.) [fr. paṭijaggana] to be reared or brought up J VI.73 (putta). Paṭijaggāpeti {Patijaggapeti} [Caus. II. of paṭijaggati] to make look after or tend Vism 74. Paṭijaggita {Patijaggita} [pp. of paṭijaggati] reared, cared for, looked after, brought up J V.274, 331. Paṭijaggiya {Patijaggiya} (adj.) [grd. of paṭijaggati] to be nursed DhA I.319. Pāli Text Society 899 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭijānāti {Patijanati} [paṭi+jānāti] to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent D I.3, 192; S I.68, 172; II.170; III.28; V 204, 423; Sn 76, 135, 555, 601, 1148; J I.169; DhA I.21; PvA 223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (id.), 241; ger. paṭiððāya Vin II.83 (a°). - pp. paṭiððāta (q. v.). Patijīvan {Patijivan} (-°) in phrase jīva-paṭijīvaṃ at J II.15 is to be taken as a sort of redupl. cpd. of jīva, the imper. of jīvati "live," as greeting. We might translate "the greeting with „jīva‟ and reciprocating it." Paṭiñña {Patinna} (adj.) [=paṭiððā] acknowledged; making belief, quāsi-; in phrase samaṇa° a quāsi-Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa A I.126; II.239; cp. Sakyaputtiya° S II.272; sacca° J IV.384, 463; V.499. Paṭiññā {Patinna} (f.) [fr. paṭi+jðā; cp. later Sk. pratijðā] acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission D III.254; J I.153; Pv IV.112, 144; Miln 7; DhA II.93: PvA 76, 123; SnA 397, 539.-patiññaṃ moceti to keep one's promise DhA I.93. Paṭiññāta {Patinnata} [pp. of paṭijānāti] agreed, acknowledged, promised Vin II.83, 102; D I.88; A I.99; IV.144; PvA 55. Paṭita {Patita} (adj.) satisfied, happy DhA II.269 (°ācāra) etc. see pati°. Paṭitittha {Patitittha} (nt.) [paṭi+tittha] opposite bank (of a river) J V.443. Paṭitthambhati {Patitthambhati} [paṭi+thambhati] to stand firm (against) Miln 372. Paṭidaṇḍa {Patidanda} [paṭi+daṇḍa] retribution Dh 133, cp. DhA III.57, 58. Paṭidadāti {Patidadati} [paṭi+dadāti] to give back, to restore J I.177; IV.411 (°diyyare); PvA 276 (ger. °datvā). Paṭidasseti {Patidasseti} [paṭi+dasseti] to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv III.227. Paṭidāna {Patidana} (nt.) [paṭi+dāna] reward, restitution, gift PvA 80. Paṭidisā {Patidisa} (f.) [paṭi+disā] an opposite (counter-) point of the compass, opposite quarter D III.176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca). Paṭidissati {Patidissati} [paṭi+dissati; usually spelt pati°] to be seen, to appear J III.47=PvA 281; Sn 123; J IV.139; SnA 172. Paṭidukkhāpanatā {Patidukkhapanata} (f.) [paṭi+abstr. of dukkhāpeti, Caus. -Denom. fr. dukkha] the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Miln 180. Paṭideseti {Patideseti} [paṭi+deseti] to confess Vin II.102. See also pāṭidesaniya. 900 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭidhāvati {Patidhavati} [paṭi+dhāvati] to run back to (acc.) M I.265 ≈ S II.26 (pubbanṭaṃ; opp. aparantaṃ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp 167. Paṭinandati {Patinandati} [paṭi+nandati] to accept gladly, to greet in return S I.189. Paṭinandita {Patinandita} [pp. of paṭi+nand] rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Sn 452 (pati°); J VI.14, 412. Paṭināsikā {Patinasika} (f.) [paṭi+nāsikā] a false nose J I.455, 457. Paṭinijjhatta {Patinijjhatta} (adj.) [paṭi+nijjhatta] appeased again J VI.414. Paṭiniddesa {Patiniddesa} [paṭi+niddesa] coming back upon a subject Nett 5. Paṭinivattati {Patinivattati} [paṭi+nivattati] to turn back again Vin I.216; J I.225; Miln 120, 152 (of disease), 246; PvA 100, 126. - Caus. °nivatteti to make turn back PvA 141; C. on A III.28 (see paccāsāreti). Paṭinivāsana {Patinivasana} (nt.) [paṭi+nivāsana1] a dress given in return Vin I.46=II.223. Paṭinissagga {Patinissagga} [paṭi+nissagga of nissajjati, nis+sṛj, Cp. BSk. pratinisarga AvŚ II.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. II.194; MVastu II.549; pratinissagga MVastu III.314, 322] giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin III.173; M III. 31; S V. 421 sq.; A I.100, 299; IV.148, 350; Ps I.194 (two p., viz. pariccāga° and pakkhandana°); Pug 19, 21, 22. - ādāna° S V.24; A V.233, 253 sq.; upadhi° It 46, 62; sabbûpadhi° S I.136; III.133; V.226; A I.49; V.8, 110, 320 sq.; °ānupassanā Ps II.44 sq.; °ānupassin M III.83; S IV.211; V.329; A IV.88, 146 sq.; V.112, 359. Paṭinissaggin {Patinissaggin} (adj.) [fr. paṭinissagga] giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in cpd. duppaṭi° (sup°) hard (easy) to renounce D III.45; M I.96; A III.335; V.150. Paṭinissajjati {Patinissajjati} [paṭi+nissajjati, cp. BSk. pratinisṛjati AvŚ II.190] to give up, renounce, forsake Vin III.173 sq.; IV.294; S II.110; A V.191 sq. - ger. paṭinissajja S I.179; A IV.374 sq.; Sn 745, 946 (cp. Nd1 430). - pp. paṭinissaṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭinissaṭṭha {Patinissattha} [pp. of paṭinissajjati, BSk. pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and °nisṛṣṭa Divy 275] given up, forsaken (act. & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin III.95; IV.27, 137; M I.37; S II.283; A II.41; It 49; Nd1 430, 431 (vanta pahīna p.); PvA 256. Paṭinissarati {Patinissarati} [paṭi+nissarati] to depart, escape from, to be freed from Nett 113 (=niyyāti vimuccati C.). Paṭineti {Patineti} [paṭi+neti] to lead back to (acc.) Vv 5217; Th 2, 419; Pv II.1221 (imper. °nayāhi); PvA 145, 160. Pāli Text Society 901 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭipakkha {Patipakkha} (adj.-n.) [paṭi+pakkha] opposed, opposite; (m.) an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd1 397; J I.4, 224; Nett 3, 112, 124; Vism 4; DhA I.92; SnA 12, 21, 65, 168, 234, 257, 545; PvA 98; DhsA 164; Sdhp 211, 452. Paṭipakkhika {Patipakkhika} (adj.) [fr. paṭipakkha] opposed, inimical Sdhp 216. Paṭipajjati {Patipajjati} [paṭi+pad, cp. BSk. pratipadyate] to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan), to go by; fig. to take a line of action, to follow a method, to be intent on, to regulate one's life D I.70 (saṃvarāya). 175 (tathattāya); S II.98 (kantāramaggaṃ); IV.63 (dhammass'anudhammaṃ); V.346 (id.); IV.194 (maggaṃ); A I.36 (dhammānudhammaṃ); II.4; Sn 317, 323, 706, 815, 1129 (cp. Nd2 384); Dh 274 (maggaṃ); Pug 20 (saṃvarāya); PvA 43 (maggaṃ), 44 (ummaggaṃ), 196 (dhanaṃ); Sdhp 30. - 3rd sg. aor. paccāpādi J IV.314. - ger. pajjitabba to be followed PvA 126 (vidhi), 131 (id.), 281. - pp. paṭipanna (q. v.). - Caus. paṭipādeti (q. v.). Paṭipajjana {Patipajjana} (nt.) [fr. paṭipajjati] a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in °vidhi method, line of action PvA 131 (v. l. BB), 133. Paṭipaṇāmeti {Patipanameti} [paṭi+pa+Caus. of nam] to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away M I.327 (siriṃ); S IV.152 (ābādhaṃ); Miln 17 (sakaṭāni). Paṭipaṇṇa {Patipanna} (nt.) [paṭi+paṇṇa] a letter in return, a written reply J I.409. Paṭipatti {Patipatti} (f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] "way," method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example A I.69; V.126 (dhammānudhamma°), 136; Ps II.15; Nd1 143; Nd2 s. v.; Miln 131, 242; DhA II.30; DhA IV.34 (sammā° good or proper behaviour); PvA 16 (parahita°), 54, 67; DA I.270; Sdhp 28, 29, 37, 40, 213, 521. Paṭipatha {Patipatha} [paṭi+patha] a confronting road, opposite way Vin II.193 (°ṃ gacchati to go to meet); III.131; IV.268; Miln 9; Vism 92; DhA II.88. Paṭipadā {Patipada} (f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhs. trsln 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti "line of conduct" AvŚ II.140 with note) D I.54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); S II.81 (nirodhasāruppa-gāminī p.); IV.251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) V.304 (sabbattha-gāminī), 361 (udaya-gāminī sotāpatti°), 421; D III.288 (ðāṇadassana-visuddhi°); A I.113, 168 (puñña°) II.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā); Vbh 99, 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq. - In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a quāsi synonym of magga with which freq. combd (e.g. D I.156) Vin I.10; D I.157; III.219 (anuttariya); M II.11; III.251, 284; S I.24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti); A I.295 sq. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā); Sn 714 (cp. SnA 497), 921; Ps II.147 (majjhimā); Nett 95 sq.; Pug 15, 68; VvA 84 (°sankhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava-nirodha-gāminī p. D I.84; dukkha-nirodha-g°. D I.84, 189; III.136; S V.426 sq.; A I.177; Ps I.86, 119; Dhs 1057; lokanirodha-g° A II.23; It 121; with the epithets sammā° anuloma° apaccanīka° anvattha° dhammānudhamma° Nd1 32, 143, 365; Nd2 384 etc. (see detail under sammā°). - There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz. (a) dukkhā dandhābhiððā, sukhā & khippābhiððā dandh° & khipp°, i. e. painful practice resulting in Pāli Text Society 902 Pāli-English Dictionary knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way D III.106; A II.149 sq., 154; V.63; SnA 497; (b) akkhamā, khamā, damā & samā p. i. e. want of endurance, endurance, self-control, equanimity. Paṭipanna {Patipanna} [pp. of paṭipajjati] (having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i. e. practising), entering on, obtaining S II.69; IV.252; A I.120 (arahattāya); IV.292 sq. (id.), 372 sq.; It 81 (dhammānudhamma°); Sn 736; Dh 275 (maggaṃ); Vv 3423 (=maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path VvA 154)=Pv IV.349; Pug 63; Miln 17; DA I.26; PvA 78, 112 (maggaṃ), 130, 174 (sammā°), 242; (dhammiyaṃ paṭipadaṃ); DhA I.233 (magga° on the road, wandering). Paṭipannaka (adj. n.) [fr. paṭipanna] one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pug 13 (=maggaṭṭhaka, phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186); Miln 342, 344; Nett 50; DhsA 164. See also Miln trsl. II.231, 237. {Patipannaka} Paṭiparivatteti {Patiparivatteti} [paṭi+p.] to turn back or round once more M I.133. Paṭipaviṭṭha {Patipavittha} [pp. of paṭipavisati] gone inside again Sn 979. Paṭipavisati {Patipavisati} [paṭi+pavisati] to go in(to) again; Caus. °paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside) again Vin I.276. - pp. paṭipaviṭṭha (q. v.). Paṭipasaṃsati {Patipasamsati} [paṭi+pasaṃsati] to praise back or in return J II.439. Paṭipaharati {Patipaharati} [paṭi+paharati] to strike in return DhA I.51. Paṭipahiṇati {Patipahinati} [paṭi+pahinati] to send back (in return) DhA I.216. Paṭipākatika {Patipakatika} (adj.) [paṭi+pākatika] restored, set right again, safe and sound J III.167 (=pākatika at PvA 66); IV.407; VI.372; PvA 123, 284. Paṭipāṭi {Patipati} (f.) [paṭi+pāṭi] order, succession Vin I.248 (bhatta°); Vism 411 (khandha°); usually in abl. paṭipāṭiyā adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism 343 = J V.253 (ghara° from house to house); ThA 80 (magga°); DhA I.156; II.89; III.361; SnA 23, 506; PvA 54; VvA 76, 137. Paṭipāṭika {Patipatika} (adj.) [fr. last] being in conformity with the (right) order ThA 41. Paṭipādaka {Patipadaka} [fr. paṭi+pad] the supporter (of a bed) Vin I.48; II.208. Paṭipādeti {Patipadeti} [Caus. of paṭipajjati, cp. BSk. pratipādayati in same meaning AvŚ I.262, 315] to impart, bring into, give to, offer, present M I.339; J V.453, 497; Pv II.81 (vittaṃ). Paṭipiṃsati {Patipimsati} [paṭi+piṃsati] to beat against S II.98 (ure); J VI.87; Vism 504 (urāni). Paṭipiṇḍa {Patipinda} [paṭi+piṇḍa] alms in return J II.307; V.390 (piṇḍa° giving & taking of alms); Miln 370. 903 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭipīta {Patipita} in asuci° in asuci° at A III.226 is not clear (v. l. °pīḷita perhaps to be preferred). Paṭipīḷana {Patipilana} (nt.) [fr. paṭipīḷeti] oppression Miln 313, 352. Paṭipīḷita {Patipilita} (adj.) [paṭi+pp. of pīḍ] pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Miln 262, 354. Paṭipuggala [paṭi+puggala] a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival M I.171=Miln 235; S I.158; Sn 544; It 123 (natthi te paṭipuggala). - appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare S I.158; III.86; Th 2, 185; J I.40; Miln 239 (cp. Miln trsl. II.43). {Patipuggala} Paṭipuggalika {Patipuggalika} (adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one's equal, individual Dhs 1044. Perhaps read pāṭi° (q. v.). Paṭipucchati {Patipucchati} [paṭi+pucchati] to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire D I.60; M I.27; S III.2; Sn p. 92; J I.170; IV.194; PvA 32, 56, 81; A I.197; II.46; also neg. appaṭipucchā (abl. adv.) without inquiry Vin I.325. Paṭipucchā (f.) [paṭi+pucchā] a question in return, inquiry; only °- (as abl.) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in foll. cpds.: °karaṇīya Vin I.325; °vinīta A I.72; °vyākaraṇīya (paðha) D III.229. {Patipuccha} Paṭipurisa {Patipurisa} [paṭi+purisa] a rival, opponent Nd1 172. Paṭipūjana {Patipujana} (nt.) or °ā (f.) [fr. paṭi+pūj] worship, reverence, honour Miln 241. Paṭipūjeti {Patipujeti} [paṭi+pūjeti] to honour, worship, revere Sn 128; Pv I.13; Miln 241. Paṭipeseti {Patipeseti} [paṭi+peseti] to send out to PvA 20. Paṭippaṇāmeti {Patippanameti} [paṭi+paṇāmeti] to bend (back), stretch out DhsA 324. Paṭippassaddha {Patippassaddha} [pp. of paṭippassambhati] allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided S IV.217, 294; V.272; A I.254; II.41; J III.37, 148; IV.430; Ps II.2; Pug 27; KhA 185; PvA 23, 245, 274. Note. The BSk. form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265. Paṭippassaddhi (f.) [fr. paṭippassaddha] subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin I.331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Ps II.3, 71, 180; Nett 89; Dhs 40, 41, 320; SnA 9. Esp. frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e. g. Nd2 429. {Patippassaddhi} Paṭippassambhati {Patippassambhati} [paṭi+ppa+sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the BSk. is °praśrambhyati as well as °srambhyati, e. g. MVastu I.253, 254; Divy 68, 138, 494, 549, 568] to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated, to pass away, to be allayed S I.211; V.51; aor. °ssambhi DhA II.86 (dohaḷo); IV.133 (ābādho). - pp. paṭippassaddha (q. v.). - Caus. paṭippassambheti to Pāli Text Society 904 Pāli-English Dictionary quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin I.49 (kammaṃ), 144 (id.), 331 (id.); II.5 (id.), 226 (id.); M I.76; J III.28 (dohaḷaṃ). Paṭipassambhanā (f.) & Paṭipassambhitatta (nt.) {Patipassambhana} {Paṭipassambhitatta} are exegetical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs 40, 41, 320. Paṭippharati {Patippharati} [paṭi+pharati] to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, fig. splurt out, bring against, object M I.95 sq.; A IV.193 (codakaṃ); J I.123, 163; Nd1 196 (vādaṃ start a wordfight); Miln 372; DhA IV.4 (vacanaṃ). Paṭibaddha {Patibaddha} (adj.) [paṭi+baddha, pp. of bandh] bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on D I.76; Vin IV.302 (kāya°); A V.87 (para°); Dh 284; Miln 102 (āvajjana°); PvA 134 (°jīvika dependent on him for a living). - Freq. in cpd. °citta affected, enamoured, one's heart bound in love Vin III.128; IV.18; Sn 37 (see Nd2 385), 65; PvA 46, 145 (°tā f. abstr.), 151, 159 (rañño with the king). Paṭibandha {Patibandha} (adj.) [paṭi+bandha] bound to, connected with, referring to Ps I.172, 184. Paṭibandhati {Patibandhati} [paṭi+bandhati] to hold back, refuse J IV.134 (vetanaṃ na p.=aparihāpetvā dadāti). Paṭibandhu {Patibandhu} [paṭi+bandhu] a connection, a relation, relative Dhs 1059, 1136, 1230; DhsA 365. Paṭibala {Patibala} (adj.) [paṭi+bala] able, adequate, competent Vin I.56, 342; II.103, 300; III.158; A V.71; Miln 6. Paṭibāḷha {Patibalha} [pp. of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi+ vah2] (op)pressed, forced, urged Vbh 338=Miln 301. Paṭibāhaka {Patibahaka} [of paṭi+bādh] antidote Miln 335; repelling, preventing J VI.571. Paṭibāhati {Patibahati} [paṭi+*bāh of bahis adv. outside] to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin I.356; II.162, 166 sq., 274; IV.288; J I.64, 217; DhA II.2 (raððo āṇaṃ), 89 (sītaṃ); VvA 68; PvA 96 (maraṇaṃ), 252, 286 (grd. appaṭibāhanīya). Caus. °bāheti in same meaning J IV.194; DhA II.71; PvA 54. - pp. paṭibāḷha (q. v.). Paṭibāhana {Patibahana} exclusion, warding off, prevention Miln 81; Vism 244. Paṭibāhiya {Patibahiya} (adj.) [grd. of paṭibāhati] to be kept off or averted, neg. ap° J IV.152. Paṭibāhira {Patibahira} (adj.) [paṭi+bāhira] outside, excluded Vin II.168. Paṭibimba {Patibimba} (nt.) [paṭi+bimba] counterpart, image, reflection Vism 190; VvA 50; VbhA 164. Pāli Text Society 905 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭibujjhati {Patibujjhati} [paṭi+bujjhati] to wake up, to understand, know, A III.105 sq.; ThA 74; PvA 43, 128. - pp. paṭibuddha (q. v.). Paṭibuddha {Patibuddha} [pp. of paṭibujjhati] awakened, awake Sn 807. Paṭibodha {Patibodha} [fr. paṭi+budh, cp. paṭibujjhati] awaking, waking up Vv 5024. Paṭibhajati {Patibhajati} [paṭi+bhaj] to divide M III.91. Paṭibhaṇḍa {Patibhanda} [paṭi+bhaṇḍa, cp. BSk. pratipanya Divy 173, 271, 564] merchandise in exchange, barter J I.377; PvA 277. Paṭibhaṇḍati {Patibhandati} [paṭi+bhaṇḍati] to abuse in return S I.162 (bhaṇḍantaṃ p.); A II.215 (id.); Nd1 397 (id.). Paṭibhaya {Patibhaya} [paṭi+bhaya] fear, terror, fright S IV.195; PvA 90; Dāvs IV.35. Freq. in cpd. ap° & sap°, e. g. Vin IV.63; M I.134; III.61. Paṭibhāga {Patibhaga} [paṭi+bhāga] 1. counterpart, likeness, resemblance Nd2 s. v.; Vism 125 (°nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory-image); SnA 65, 76, 83, 114, 265; PvA 46, 178, 279. 2. rejoinder J VI.341 (pañha°). - 3. counterpart, opposite, contrary M I.304. - appaṭibhāga (adj.) unequalled, incomparable, matchless Miln 357 (+appaṭiseṭṭha); DhA I.423 (=anuttara). Paṭibhāti {Patibhati} [paṭi+bhā] to appear, to be evident, to come into one's mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin. Texts II.30) S I.155 (°tu taṃ dhammikathā); V.153 (T. reads patibbāti); Sn 450 (p. maṃ=mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399); Nd1 234=Nd2 386 (also fut. °bhāyissati); J V.410; VvA 78=159 (maṃ p. ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ "I should like to ask a question"). Paṭibhāna {Patibhana} (nt.) [paṭi+bhāna. Cp. late Sk. pratibhāna, fr. Pali] understanding, illumination, intelligence; readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vin. Texts III.13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 f.) D I.16, 21, 23; S I.187; A II.135, 177, 230; III.42; IV.163; V.96; Ps II.150, 157; J VI.150; Pug 42; Vbh 293 sq.; VbhA 338, 394, 467; Miln 21; DA I.106. - appaṭibhāna (adj.) bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin II.78=III.162; M I.258; A III.57; J V.238, 369; VI.362. Paṭibhānavant {Patibhanavant} (adj.) [fr. paṭibhāna] possessed of intelligence or ready wit A I.24; Sn 58, 853, 1147; Nd1 234= Nd2 386; SnA 111 (pariyatti° & paṭivedha°). Paṭibhāneyyaka {Patibhaneyyaka} (adj.) [ger. formation+ka fr. paṭibhāna] =paṭibhānavant Vin I.249 (cp. Vin. Texts II.140); A I.25. Paṭibhāsati {Patibhasati} [paṭi+bhās] to address in return or in reply S I.134; Sn 1024. Paṭimaṃsa {Patimamsa} (adj.) [for paṭimassa=Sk. *pratimṛśya, ger. of prati+mṛś, cp. in consonants haṃsa for harṣa etc.] as neg. app° not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin II.248 (acchidda+); A V.79. Pāli Text Society 906 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭimagga {Patimagga} [paṭi+magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha] the way against, a confronting road; °ṃ gacchati to go to meet somebody J IV.133; VI.127. Paṭimaṇḍita {Patimandita} [pp. of paṭi+maṇḍ] decorated, adorned with J I.8, 41, 509; PvA 3, 66, 211. Paṭimantaka {Patimantaka} [fr. paṭi+mant] one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i. e. (1) an interlocutor J IV.18 (=paṭivacana-dayaka C.); - (2) an amiable person (cp. Lat. affabilis=affable) M I.386. Paṭimanteti {Patimanteti} [paṭi+manteti] to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati° at Vin II.1; D I.93 (vacane), 94; Dh I.263; J VI.82, 294. Paṭimalla {Patimalla} [paṭi+malla] a rival wrestler S I.110; Nd1 172. Paṭimasati {Patimasati} [paṭi+masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaṃsa] to touch (at) D I.106; Sn p. 108 (anumasati+). - Caus. paṭimāseti (q. v.). Paṭimā {Patima} (f.) [fr. paṭi+mā] counterpart, image, figure J VI.125; Dāvs V.27; VvA 168 (=bimba); DhsA 334. -appaṭima (adj.) without a counterpart, matchless, incomparable Th 1, 614; Miln 239. Paṭimānita {Patimanita} [pp. of paṭimāneti] honoured, revered, served PvA 18. Paṭimāneti {Patimaneti} [paṭi+Caus. of man] to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin II.169; IV.112; D I.106; J IV.2, 203; V.314; Miln 8; PvA 12; DA I.280. - pp. paṭimānita (q. v.). Paṭimāreti {Patimareti} [paṭi+Caus. of mṛ] to kill in revenge J III.135. Paṭimāseti {Patimaseti} [Caus. of patimasati] to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imper. paṭimāse (for °māsaya) Dh 379 (opp. codaya; expld by °parivīmaṃse "watch" DhA IV.117). Paṭimukka {Patimukka} (adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 197] fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in S IV.91; M I.383; It 56; Th 2, 500 (? v. l. paripuṇṇa, cp. ThA 290); J I.384; VI.64; Miln 390; DhA I.394 (sīse); VvA 167 (so read for °mukkha), 296. Paṭimukha {Patimukha} (adj.) [paṭi+mukha] facing, opposite; nt. °ṃ adv. opposite SnA 399 (gacchati). Paṭimuñcati {Patimuncati} [paṭi+muc] 1. to fasten, to bind (in lit. as well as appld sense), to tie, put on Vin I.46; S I.24 (veraṃ °muñcati for °muccati!); J I.384; II.22, 88, 197; IV. 380 (ger. °mucca, v. l. °muñca), 395; V.25 (attain), 49; VI.525; DhA III.295. - Pass. paṭimuccati to be fastened, aor. °mucci J III.239; VI.176. - 2. to attain, obtain, find J IV.285=VI.148. Pāli Text Society Paṭimutta 907 Pāli-English Dictionary (& °ka)(adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭimukka] in sup° well purified, cleansed, pure J IV.18 (°kambu=paṭimutta-suvaṇṇ'ālankāra C.); V.400; Pv IV.133 (°ka-suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin PvA 230). {Patimutta} Paṭimokkha {Patimokkha} [fr. paṭi+muc] 1. a sort of remedy, purgative D I.12 osadhīnaṃ p. expld at DA I.98 as "khārādīni datvā tad-anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaṃ apanayanaṃ." Cp. Dial. 26. - 2. binding, obligatory J V.25 (sangaraṃ p. a binding promise). Cp. pāṭimokkha. Paṭiya {Patiya} (nt.) [=paṭikā] a white woollen counterpane J IV.352 (=uṇṇāmaya-paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva C.). Paṭiyatta {Patiyatta} [pp. of paṭi+yat] prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin IV.18 (alankata°); J IV.380 (C. for pakata), PvA 25 (C. for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alankata°), 135 (id.), 232 (id.), 279 (id.); KhA 118 (alankata°). Paṭiyāti {Patiyati} [paṭi+yā, cp. pacceti] to go back to, reach J VI.149 (C. for paṭimuñcati). Paṭiyādita {Patiyadita} [pp. of paṭiyādeti] given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Miln 9; DhA II.75. Paṭiyādeti {Patiyadeti} [for *paṭiyāteti=Sk. pratiyātayati, Caus. of paṭi+yat, like P. niyyādeti=Sk. niryātayati] to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate SnA 447. - pp. paṭiyādita (q. v.). - Caus.II. paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin I.249 (yāguṃ); Sn p. 110 (bhojaniyaṃ); P.vA 22, 141. Paṭi—y—ālokaṃ {Patiyalokam} gacchati "to go to the South" Vin IV.131, 161. Paṭiyodha {Patiyodha} [paṭi+yodha] counterfight J III.3. Paṭiyoloketi {Patiyoloketi} (T. paṭi-oloketi) [paṭi+oloketi] to look at, to keep an eye on, observe J II.406. Paṭirava {Patirava} [paṭi+rava] shouting out, roar Dāvs IV.52. Paṭirājā {Patiraja} [paṭi+rājā] hostile king, royal adversary J VI.472; DhA I.193. Paṭiruddha {Patiruddha} [pp. paṭi+rudh] obstructed, hindered, held back, caged J IV.4 (oruddhapaṭiruddha sic.). Paṭirūpa {Patirupa} (adj.) [paṭi+rūpa] fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming D I.91; Vin II.166 (seyyā); M I.123; S I.214; II.194 (ap°); Th 2, 341; Pv II.1215; J V.99; Pug 27; DhA III.142; PvA 26, 122 (=yutta), 124. -°desavāsa living in a suitable region D III.276=A II.32; Nett 29, 50. - Spelt pati° at Dh 158; Sn 89, 187, 667; SnA 390. Cp. pāṭirūpika. Paṭirūpaka {Patirupaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. paṭirūpa] like, resembling, disguised as, in the appearance of, having the form of S I.230; DhA I.29 (putta°); PvA 15 (samaṇa°). As pati° at SnA 302, 348, 390. - nt. an optical delusion DhA III.56. Pāli Text Society 908 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭirūpatā {Patirupata} (f.) [abstr. fr. paṭirūpa] likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence PvA 268 (=vaṇṇa). Paṭirodati [paṭi+rodati of rud] to cry in return, to reply by crying J III.80; pp. paṭirodita=paṭirodana. {Patirodati} Paṭirodana {Patirodana} (nt.) [paṭi+rodana] replying through crying J III.80. Paṭirodeti {Patirodeti} [paṭi+Caus. of rud] to scold back S I.162. Paṭirosati {Patirosati} [paṭi+rosati] to annoy in return, to tease back S I.162; A II.215; Nd1 397. Paṭiladdha {Patiladdha} [pp. of paṭilabhati] received, got, obtained PvA 15 (=laddha), 88. Paṭilabhati {Patilabhati} [paṭi+labhati] to obtain, receive, get It 77; J I.91; Nd2 427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati); Pug 57; VvA 115; PvA 6, 7, 16, 50, 60, 67 etc. - pret. 3rd pl. paccaladdhaṃsu S I.48 (so v. l. & C. T. °latthaṃsu), expld by paṭilabhiṃsu cp. K. S. 319. - aor. 1st sg. paṭilacchiṃ J V.71. - Caus. paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob J V.76 (paṭilābhayanti naṃ "rob me of him"). Paṭilābha {Patilabha} [fr. paṭi+labh] obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment D I.195; M I.50; A II.93, 143; Ps II.182, 189; Nd1 262; Dh 333; Pug 57; VvA 113; PvA 50, 73, 74. - attabhāva° obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence S II.256; III.144; A II.159, 188; III.122 sq. - See also paribhoga. Paṭilika {Patilika} v. l. BB together with paṭalika for talika at J III.80 (cp. A III 36?). Paṭilīna {Patilina} [pp. of paṭilīyati] having withdrawn, keeping away S I.48 (°nisabha "expert to eliminate"; reading pati°); with reading pati also; A II.41; IV.449; Sn 810, 852; Nd1 130, 224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno). Paṭilīyati {Patiliyati} [paṭi+līyati of lī] to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to A IV.47=Miln 297 (+paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Miln & id. p. at S II.265 print pati°); Vism 347 (+paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati). - pp. paṭilīna; Caus. paṭileṇeti (q. v.). Paṭileṇeti [Sec. dern fr. pp. paṭilīna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk. °lāpayati of lī] to withdraw, to make keep away, not to touch S II.265 (pati°, as at Miln 297 patilīyati). {Patileneti} Paṭilobheti {Patilobheti} [paṭi+Caus. of lubh] to fill with desire, to entice J V.96. Paṭiloma {Patiloma} (adj.) [paṭi+loma] "against the hair," in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually combd with anuloma i. e. forward & backward Vin I.1; A IV.448; etc (see paṭiccasamuppāda); J II.307. -°pakkha opposition PvA 114 (cp. paṭipakkha). Paṭivacana {Pativacana} (nt.) [paṭi+vacana] answer, reply, rejoinder J IV.18; Miln 120; PvA 83 (opp. vacana); ThA 285. Pāli Text Society 909 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭivaṭṭati {Pativattati} (& °vattati)[paṭi+vrt] (intrs.) to roll or move back, to turn away from A IV.47=Miln 297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); Caus. paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs. (but cp. Childers s. v. "to knock, strike") S II.265 (T. spells pati°, as also at Miln 297). - grd. paṭivattiya only in neg. ap° (q. v.). - pp. paṭivatta (q. v.). Paṭivatta {Pativatta} (nt.) [pp. of paṭivattati] moving backwards, only in cpd. vatta-paṭivattakaraṇa "moving forth or backwards, " performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other DhA I.157. Paṭivattar {Pativattar} [paṭi+vattar, n. ag. of vac] one who contradicts S I.222. Paṭivadati {Pativadati} [paṭi+vadati] to answer, reply A IV.168 (v. l. for paṭicarati); Sn 932; Dh 133; Nd1 397; PvA 39. Paṭivasati {Pativasati} [paṭi+vasati] to live, dwell (at) D I.129; Vin II.299; S I.177; J I.202; SnA 462; PvA 42, 67. Paṭivāṇa, Paṭiyāṇitā & Paṭivāṇī {Pativana} {Patiyanita} {Pativani} etc. occur only in neg. form app°, q. v. Paṭivātaṃ {Pativatam} (adv.) [paṭi+vātaṃ, acc. cp. Sk. prativāta & prativātaṃ] against the wind (opp. anuvātaṃ) Vin II.218; S I.13; Sn 622; Dh 54, 125; PvA 116; Sdhp 425. Paṭivāda {Pativada} [paṭi+vāda] retort, recrimination Miln 18 (vāda° talk and counter-talk). Paṭivāpeti {Pativapeti} [Caus. of paṭi+vap] to turn away from, to free from, cleanse M I.435=A IV.423; DhsA 407. Paṭivāmeti {Pativameti} [paṭi+Caus. vam] to throw out again DA I.39. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh°, or paṭibādhayamāno, and referring to Th 1, 744. Paṭiviṃsa [paṭi-aṃsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṃsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṃsa> paṭiviṃsa)] lit. "divided part," sub-part, share, bit, portion, part Vin I.28; III.60 (T. reads paṭivisa); J II.286; DhsA 135; DhA I.189; III.304; VvA 61 (°vīsa), 64 (v. l. °vīsa), 120 (id.). {Pativimsa} Paṭiviṃsaka {Pativimsaka} [prec.+ka] part share, portion DhA II.85. Paṭivigacchati {Pativigacchati} [paṭi+vi+gacchati] to go apart again, to go away or asunder A III.243; Miln 51. Paṭivijānāti {Pativijanati} [paṭi+vi+jānāti] to recognise Vin III.130; Nd2 378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati); Miln 299. Paṭivijjha {Pativijjha} (adj.) [grd. of paṭivijjhati] in cpd. dup° hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S V.454. Pāli Text Society 910 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭivijjhati {Pativijjhati} [paṭi+vijjhati of vyadh] to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin I.183; S II.56; V.119, 278, 387, 454; A IV.228, 469; Nd2 378; J I.67, 75; Ps I.180 sq.; Miln 344; DhA I.334. - aor. paṭivijjha Sn 90 (=aððāsi sacchākāsi SnA 166), and paccavyādhi Th 1, 26=1161 (°byādhi); also 3rd pl. paccavidhuṃ A IV.228. - pp. paṭividdha (q. v.). On phrase uttariṃ appaṭivijjhanto. See uttari. Paṭivijjhanaka {Pativijjhanaka} (adj.) [paṭi+vijjhana+ka,of vyadh] only in neg. ap° impenetrable DhA IV.194. Paṭividita {Patividita} [pp. of paṭi+vid] known, ascertained D I.2; Ps I.188. Paṭividdha [pp. of paṭivijjhati] being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing M I.438; S II.56 (sup°); Ps II.19, 20; J I.214; VvA 73 (°catusacca=saccānaṃ kovida). - appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt J VI.446. {Patividdha} Paṭivinaya {Pativinaya} [paṭi+vi+nī] repression, subdual, only in cpd. āghāta° D III.262, 289; A III.185 sq. See āghāta. Paṭivinicchinati {Pativinicchinati} [paṭi+vinicchinati] to try or judge a case again, to reconsider J II.187. Paṭivinīta {Pativinita} [pp. of paṭivineti] removed, dispelled, subdued S II.283; V.76, 315. Paṭivineti {Pativineti} [paṭi+vi+nī] to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue S I.228; M I.13; A III.185 sq.; J VI.551; PvA 104 (pipāsaṃ). Cp. BSk. prativineti MVastu II.121. - pp. paṭivinīta (q. v.). Paṭivinodana {Pativinodana} (nt.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] removal, driving out, explusion A II.48, 50; Miln 320. Paṭivinodaya (adj.-n.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal; dup° hard to dispel A III.184 sq. Paṭivinodeti {Pativinodaya} [paṭi+vi+Caus. of nud, Cp. BSk. prativinudati Divy 34, 371 etc.] to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of D I.138; M I.48; Pv III.58; Pug 64; VvA 305; PvA 60. {Pativinodeti} Paṭivibhajati {Pativibhajati} [paṭi+vibhajati] to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts M I.58 (cp. III.91; paṭibhaj° & v. l. vibhaj°). Paṭivibhatta {Pativibhatta} (adj.) [paṭi+vibhatta] (equally) divided M I.372; A IV.211; VvA 50. On neg. ap° in cpd. °bhogin see appaṭivibhatta. Paṭivirata (adj.) [pp. of paṭiviramati, cp. BSk. prativiramati Divy II, 302, 585] abstaining from, shrinking from (with abl.) D I.5; M III.23; S V.468; It 63; Pug 39, 58; DA I.70; PvA 28, 260. - app° not abstaining from Vin II.296; S V.468; It 64. {Pativirata} Paṭivirati {Pativirati} (f.) [fr. paṭivirata] abstinence from Dhs 299; M III.74; PvA 206. Pāli Text Society 911 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭiviramati {Pativiramati} [paṭi+viramati] to absṭain from M I.152. Paṭivirujjhati {Pativirujjhati} [paṭi+vi+rudh] to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṃ) J IV.104. - pp. paṭiviruddha (q. v.). Paṭiviruddha {Pativiruddha} [pp. of paṭivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445] obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent J VI.12; DA I.51 (°ā satta=pare); Miln 203, 403. Paṭivirūhati {Pativiruhati} [paṭi+virūhati] to grow again Vism 419. Paṭivirodha {Pativirodha} [paṭi+virodha] hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs 418, 1060; Pug 18; Miln 203. Paṭivisiṭṭha {Pativisittha} [paṭi+visiṭṭha] peculiar M I.372. Paṭivisesa {Pativisesa} [paṭi+visesa] sub-discrimination J II.9. Paṭivissaka {Pativissaka} (adj.) [fr. paṭi+*veśman or *veśya] dwelling near, neighbouring M I.126; J I.114, 483; III.163; IV.49; V.434; DhA I.47 (°itthi), 155, 235 (°dārakā). Paṭivutta {Pativutta} (paṭi+vutta, pp. of vac] said against, replied Vin III.131, 274. Paṭivekkhiya {Pativekkhiya} see ap°. Paṭivedeti {Pativedeti} [paṭi+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to make known, declare, announce Vin I.180; S I.101, 234; Sn 415 (aor. °vedayi); DA I.227; PvA 6 (pītisomanassaṃ). Paṭivedha {Pativedha} [fr. paṭi+vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & BSk. prativedha MVastu I.86] lit. piercing, i. e. penetration, comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge A I.22, 44; D III.253; Ps I.105; II.50, 57, 105, 112, 148, 182; Vbh 330; Miln 18; SnA 110, 111; Sdhp 65. - appaṭivedha nonintelligence, ignorance Vin I.230; S II.92; III.261; V.431; A II.1; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; Pug 21. duppaṭivedha (adj.) hard to pierce or penetrate; flg. difficult to master Miln 250. maggaphala° realisation of the fruit of the Path DhA I.110. Paṭivera {Pativera} [paṭi+vera] revenge DhA I.50. Paṭivellati {Pativellati} [paṭi+vellati] to embrace, cling to J V.449. Paṭivyāharati {Pativyaharati} [paṭi+vyāharati] to desist from, aor. paccavyāhāsi D II.232. Paṭivyūhati {Pativyuhati} (pati°) [paṭi+vyūhati] to heap up against (?) SnA 554. Paṭisaṃyamati {Patisamyamati} [paṭi+saṃyamati] to restrain, to exercise self-control J IV.396. Pāli Text Society Paṭisaṃyujati 912 Pāli-English Dictionary [paṭi+saṃ+yuj] to connect with, fig. to start, begin (vādaṃ a discussion or argument) S I.221 (bālena paṭisaṃyuje=paṭipphareyya C.; "engage himself to bandy with a fool" K.S. 284); Sn 843 (vādaṃ p.= paṭipphareyya kalahaṃ kareyya Nd1 196). pp. paṭisaṃyutta (q. v.). {Patisamyujati} Paṭisaṃyutta {Patisamyutta} [pp. of paṭisaṃyujati] connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin IV.6; S I.210 (nibbāna °dhammikathā); Th 1, 598; It 73; VvA 6, 87; PvA 12. Paṭisaṃvidita {Patisamvidita} [pp. of paṭi+saṃ+vid; same (prati) at MVastu III.256] apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase "pubbe appaṭisaṃvidita pañho" S II.54. Paṭisaṃvedin {Patisamvedin} (adj.) [fr. paṭisaṃvedeti; BSk. pratisaṃvedin Divy 567] experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering M I.56; S I.196; II.122; IV.41; V.310 sq.; A I.164 (sukhadukkha°); IV.303 (id.); V.35 (id.); It 99; Ps I.95, 114 (evaṃsukhadukkha°), 184, 186 sq.; Pug 57, 58. Paṭisaṃvedeti {Patisamvedeti} [paṭi+saṃ+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to feel, experience, undergo, perceive D I.43, 45; A I.157 (domanassaṃ); IV.406 (id.); Pug 59; PvA 192 (mahādukkhaṃ). There is also a by-form, viz. paṭisaṃvediyati S II.18, 75, 256 (attabhāva-paṭilābhaṃ); It 38 (sukkha-dukkhaṃ; v. l. °vedeti). Paṭisaṃharaṇa {Patisamharana} (nt.) [fr. paṭisaṃharati] removing Nett 27, 41. Paṭisaṃharati {Patisamharati} [paṭi+saṃ+hṛ, cp. BSk. pratisaṃharati MVastu I.82] to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin II.185 (sakavaṇṇaṃ); D I.96; S V.156; PvA 92 (devarūpaṃ). Paṭisakkati {Patisakkati} [paṭi+sakkati] to run back Vin II.195; A IV.190. Paṭisankhayanto {Patisankhayanto} is ppr. of paṭi+saṃ+kṣi, to be pacified Th 1, 371. Paṭisankharoti {Patisankharoti} [paṭi+saṃ+kṛ] to restore, repair, mend Vin II.160; A II.249; J III.159 (nagaraṃ). Caus. II. paṭisankhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again M III.7; J VI.390 (gehāni). Paṭisankhā {Patisankha} (f.) [paṭi+sankhā of khyā] reflection, judgment, consideration Vin I.213; S IV.104 (°yoniso); Ps I.33, 45, 57, 60, 64; Pug 25, 57; Dhs 1349. appaṭisankhā (see also °sankhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Ps I.33, 45; Dhs 1346=Pug 21. - Note. In combn paṭisankhā yoniso "carefully, with proper care or intention" p. is to be taken as ger. of paṭisankhāti (q. v.). This connection is frequent, e. g. S IV.104; A II.40; Nd1 496; Nd2 540. Paṭisankhāti {Patisankhati} [paṭi+saṃ+khyā] to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paṭisankhā (as adv.) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin I.213; M I.273; III.2; J I.304; Nd2 540; Pug 25; cp. paṭisankhā (+yoniso); also ger. paṭisankhāya Sddp 394. Opp. appaṭisankhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app° rashly & without a thought M I.94; S II.110, 219. - Cp. paṭisañcikkhati. 913 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭisankhāna {Patisankhana} (nt.) [fr. paṭisankhāti] carefulness, mindfulness, consideration J I.502; VvA 327; DhsA 402 (°paððā); Sdhp 397. -°bala power of computation A I.52, 94; II.142; D III.213, 244; Ps II.169, 176; Dhs 1354 (cp. Dhs trsln 354); Nett 15, 16, 38. Paṭisankhārika {Patisankharika} & °ya (adj.) [fr. paṭisankharoti] serving for repair Vin III.43 (dārūni); PvA 141 (id.; °ya). Paṭisañcikkhati {Patisancikkhati} [paṭi+saṃ+cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭisankhāti & BSk. pratisañcikṣati MVastu II.314] to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin I.5; D I.63; M I.267, 499; III.33; S I.137; A I.205; Pug 25; Vism 283. Paṭisañjīvita {Patisanjivita} [pp. of paṭi+saṃ+jīv] revived, resurrected M I.333. Paṭisatena {Patisatena} (adv.) [paṭi+instr. of sataṃ] by the hundred, i. e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin I.269. Paṭisattu {Patisattu} [paṭi+sattu] an enemy (in retaliation) J II.406; Nd1 172, 173; Miln 293. Paṭisanthata {Patisanthata} [pp. of paṭisantharati] kindly received (covered, concealed? C.) J VI.23 (=paṭicchāditaṃ guttaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ vā C.). Paṭisantharati {Patisantharati} [paṭi+saṃ+tharati of stṛ] to receive kindly, to welcome, Miln 409; DhsA 397Q ger. °santhāya J VI.351. - pp. paṭisanthata (q. v.). Paṭisanthāra {Patisanthara} [fr. paṭi+saṃ+stṛ] lit. spreading before, i. e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill, favour, friendship D III.213, 244; A I.93; III.303 sq.; IV.28, 120; V.166, 168 (°aka adj. one who welcomes); J II.57; Dh 376 (expld as āmisa° and dhamma° at DhA IV.111, see also DhsA 397 sq. & Dhs trsl. 350); Dhs 1344; Vbh 360; Miln 409. paṭisanthāraṃ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly PvA 12, 44, 141, 187. Paṭisandahati {Patisandahati} [paṭi+sandahati] to undergo reunion (see next) Miln 32. Paṭisandhi {Patisandhi} [fr. paṭi+saṃ+dhā] reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Ps I.11 sq., 52, 59 sq.; II.72 sq.; Nett 79, 80; Miln 140; DhA II.85; VvA 53; PvA 8, 79, 136, 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at VbhA 155-160. - appaṭisandhika see sep. Paṭisama (adj.) [paṭi+sama] equal, forming, a counterpart Miln 205 (rāja°); neg. appaṭisama not having one's equal, incomparable J I.94; Miln 331. {Patisama} Paṭisambhidā {Patisambhida} (f.) [paṭi+saṃ+bhid; the BSk. pratisaṃvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid, favoured by use & meaning of latter root in P. paṭisaṃvidita. In BSk. we find pratisaṃvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha° dharma° nirukti° pratibhāna° (?). MVastu III.321] lit. "resolving continuous breaking up," i. e. analysis, analytic insight, discriminating knowledge. See full discussion & expln of term at Kvu trsln 377-382. Always referred to as "the four branches of logical analysis" (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha° analysis of meanings "in extension"; dhamma° of reasons, 914 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary conditions, or causal relations; nirutti° of [meanings "in intension" as given in] definitions paṭibhāna° or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu trsln). In detail at A II.160; III.113. 120; Ps I.88, 119; II.150, 157, 185, 193; Vbh 293305; VbhA 386 sq. (cp. Vism 440 sq.), 391 sq. - See further A I.22; IV.31; Nd2 386 under paṭibhānavant; Ps I.84. 132, 134; II.32, 56, 116, 189; Miln 22 (attha-dh°nirutti-paṭibhānapāramippatta), 359; VvA 2; DhA IV.70 (catūsu p-° āsu cheka). p°-patta one who has attained mastership in analysis A I.24; III.120; Ps II.202. - Often included in the attainment of Arahantship, in formula "saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpunāti," viz. Miln 18; DhA II.58, 78, 93. Paṭisammajjati {Patisammajjati} [paṭi+sammajjati] to sweep over again Miln 15. Paṭisammodeti [paṭi+saṃ+Caus. of mud] to greet friendly in return J VI.224 (=sammodanīya-kathāya paṭikatheti C.). {Patisammodeti} Paṭisaraṇa {Patisarana} (nt.) [paṭi+saraṇa1] refuge in (-°), shelter, help, protection M I.295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses); III.9; S IV.221; V.218; A I.199 (Bhagavaṃ°); II.148 (sa° able to be restored); III.186 (kamma°); IV.158, 351; V.355; J I.213; VI.398. - appaṭisaraṇa (adj.) without shelter, unprotected Vin II.153 (so read for appaṭiss°). - Note. In meaning "restoration" the derivation is prob. fr paṭi+sṛ to move (Sk. saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). Cp. paṭisāraṇiya. Paṭisarati1 {Patisarati} [paṭi+sṛ] to run back, stay back, lag behind Sn 8 sq. (opp. atisarati; aor. paccasāri expld by ohiyyi SnA 21). Paṭisarati2 {Patisarati} [paṭi+smṛ] to think back upon, to mention DA I.267. Paṭisallāna {Patisallana} (& °āṇa, e. g. S V.320) (nt.) [for *paṭisallayana, fr. paṭi+saṃ+ lī, cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also BSk. pratisaṃlayana Divy 156, 194, 494] retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion D III.252; M I.526; S I.77; III.15; IV.80, 144; V.12, 398, 414; A II.51, 176; III.86 sq., 116 sq., 195; IV.15, 36, 88; V.166, 168; Sn 69 (cp. Nd2 s. v.); J II.77 (pati°); Vbh 244, 252; Miln 138, 412. -ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also °rata) A III.261 sq.; It 39; Nd2 433. -sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism 90. Paṭisalliyati (°līyati) [fr. paṭi+saṃ+ lī, cp. paṭilīyati] to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin III.39 (inf. °salliyituṃ); D II.237; S V.12 (id.), 320, 325; Miln 139. pp. paṭisallīna (q. v.). {Patisalliyati} Paṭisallīna {Patisallina} [pp. of paṭisalliyati; cp. BSk. pratisaṃlīna Divy 196, 291.] secluded, retired, gone into solitude, abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin I.101 (rahogata+); D I.134, 151; S I.71, 146 sq. (divāvihāragata+), 225; II.74 (rahogata+); IV.80, 90, 144; V.415; A II.20; SnA 346 (pati°); J I.349; Miln 10, 138 sq.; VvA 3; DA I.309 (pati°). Paṭisāṭheyya {Patisatheyya} (nt.) [paṭi+sāṭheyya] a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) J II.183. Paṭisāmita {Patisamita} [pp. of paṭisāmeti] arranged, got ready Vism 91. Pāli Text Society 915 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭisāmeti {Patisameti} [paṭi+Caus. of śam, samati to make ready; cp. BSk. pratiśāmayati Divy passim] to set in order, arrange, get ready Vin II.113, 211, 216; M I.456; J III.72; Miln 15 (pattacīvaraṃ); VvA 118 (v. l. °yāpeti), 157 (v. l. °nameti). Paṭisāyati {Patisayati} [paṭi+sāyati] to taste, eat, partake of food Vin II.177. Paṭisāra {Patisara} [paṭi+smṛ] see vi°. Paṭisārana {Patisarana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+sāreti] act of protection, expiation, atonement Miln 344 (in law); appld. Paṭisāraṇiya {Patisaraniya} (adj. nt.) [a grd. formation fr. paṭi+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ to move] only as t.t. in combn with kamma (official act, chapter), i. e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vin. Texts II.364) Vin I.49 (one of the 5 Sangha-kammas, viz. tajjaniya°, nissaya°, pabbājaniya°, p.°, ukkhepaniya°), 143 (id.), 326; II.15-20, 295; A I.99; IV.346; DhA II.75. Paṭisārin {Patisarin} (adj.) [fr. paṭi+sṛ, cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note] falling back upon, going back to, trusting in, leaning on (-°) D I.99 (gotta°); S I.153 (id.); II.284 (id.). Paṭisāsana {Patisasana} (nt.) [paṭi+sāsana] counter-message, reply DhA I.392. Paṭisibbita {Patisibbita} [pp. of paṭi+sibbati] sewn, embroidered VvA 167 (pati°). Paṭisīsaka {Patisisaka} [paṭi+sīsaka] a false top-knot, "chignon" (?) J II.197 (°ṃ paṭimuðcitvā); V.49 (id.); Miln 90 (muṇḍaka°). Paṭisutta {Patisutta} [pp. of paṭi+svap] sunk into sleep Th 1, 203. Paṭisumbhita {Patisumbhita} [pp. of paṭi+śumbh] fallen down Pv III.18 (=patita PvA 174). Paṭisūra {Patisura} [paṭi+sūra] a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Sn 831 (=paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd1 172); Nd1 173 (id.). Paṭiseṭṭha {Patisettha} (adj.) [paṭi+seṭṭha] having a superior; neg. app° incomparable, unsurpassed Miln 357 (appaṭibhāga+). Paṭisedha {Patisedha} [fr. paṭi+sidh1, sedhati drive off] warding off, prohibition Miln 314 ("resubjugation"); SnA 402 (with ref. to part "na"); KhA 170 (id.); PvA 11 (°nipāta="mā"); VvA 224. Paṭisedhaka {Patisedhaka} (adj. n.) [fr. paṭisedha] warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to S I.221; Miln 344. Paṭisedhati {Patisedhati} & (Caus.) °sedheti [paṭi+sedhati] to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse S IV.341; PvA 11. Pāli Text Society 916 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭisedhana {Patisedhana} (nt.) [cp. paṭisedha] warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping S I.221, 223; PvA 11, 25; Sdhp 397. Paṭisedhitar {Patisedhitar} [n. ag. fr. paṭisedhati] one who prohibits or refuses J II.123.=V.91. Paṭisena {Patisena} [paṭi+sena, of either sī or śri, cp. usseneti] repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compn with kṛ as °senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Sn 932, cp. Nd1 397; -°senikattar (n. ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Sn 832, cp. Nd1 173. Paṭiseneti {Patiseneti} [paṭi+seneti, see usseneti] to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) A II.215 (paṭisseneti); Sn 390 (°seniyati). Paṭisevati {Patisevati} [paṭi+sevati, cp. BSk. pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning] to follow, pursue, indulge in (acc.), practise Vin II.296 (methunaṃ dhammaṃ); M I.10; A II.54 (methunaṃ); J I.437; VI.73, 505; Dh 67; Nd1 496; Pug 62; Miln 224; DhA II.40; PvA 130; Sdhp 396. - Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati° at Dh 67, 68; J III.275, 278. Paṭisevana {Patisevana} (nt.) [fr. paṭisevati] going after, indulging in, practice M I.10. Paṭisevitar {Patisevitar} [n. ag. of paṭisevati] one who practises, pursues or indulges in (acc.) A III.143 sq. (bhesajjaṃ). Paṭisotaṃ {Patisotam} (adv.) [paṭi+sotaṃ, acc. of sota] against the stream (opp. anusotaṃ) It 114; J I.70; PvA 154. - paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work S I.136; A II.6 (opp. anu°), 214 sq. Paṭissata {Patissata} [paṭi+sata, pp. of smṛ] recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Sn 283=Miln 411; Dh 144 (t); Vv 2110; and with spelling pati° at S III.143; IV.74, 322, 351; A III.24; It 10, 21, 81; Sn 283, 413. Paṭissati {Patissati} (f.) [paṭi+sati of smṛ] mindfulness, remembrance, memory M I.36 sq.; Dhs 23; Pug 25. app° lapse of memory Dhs 1349. Paṭissatika {Patissatika} (adj.) [fr. paṭissati] mindful, thoughtful Th 1, 42. Paṭissava {Patissava} [fr. paṭi+śru] assent, promise, obedience J VI.220; VvA 351 (cp. paṭissaya VvA 347). Paṭissavatā {Patissavata} (f.) [abstr. fr. paṭissava] obedience; neg. appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs 1325=Pug 20. Paṭissā & Patissā {Patissa} (f.) [paṭi+śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin; in BSk. we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in cpd. sapratīśa respectful Divy; also MVastu I.516; II.258; besides as sapratisa MVastu III.345] deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa (q. v.) obedient, deferential It 10 (sappatissa); Vv 917 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary 8441 (cp. VvA 347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to S I.139; II.224 sq.; A II.20; III.7, 247, 439; J II.352 (°vāsa anarchy; reading t); PvA 89. Paṭissāvin {Patissavin} (adj.) [fr. paṭi+śru] assenting, ready, obedient, willing D I.60; S III.113 (kinkāra-paṭi°). Paṭissuṇāti {Patissunati} [paṭi+śru] to assent, promise, agree aor. paccassosi Vin I.73; D I.236; S I.147, 155; Sn p. 50, and paṭisuṇi SnA 314; ger. °suṇitvā freq. in formula "sādhū ti patissuṇitvā" asserting his agreement, saying yes S I.119; PvA 13, 54, 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā S I.155. - f. abstr. paṭissutavatā SnA 314. Paṭisseneti {Patisseneti} see paṭiseneti. Paṭihaṃsati {Patihamsati} [for ghaṃsati?] to beat, knock against PvA 271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv IV.108; v. l. paṭipisati). Paṭihankhati {Patihankhati} [fut. of paṭihanti] only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi navað ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi "I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new" S IV.104=A II.40= III.388=IV.167=Nd1 496=Nd2 5402; Vism 32, 33. Paṭihata {Patihata} [pp. of paṭihanti] stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv III.79; PvA 20 (°citta), 207 (id.).- app° unobstructed DhA II.8; VvA 14. Paṭihanana {Patihanana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+han] repulsion, warding off Vism 31. Paṭihananaka {Patihananaka} (adj.) [fr. paṭi+han] one who offers resistance DhA I.217. Paṭihanati {Patihanati} [paṭi+han] to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy M I.273; Miln 367; ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism 343. - ger. paṭihacca S V.69, 237, 285; fut. paṭihankhati; pp. paṭihata (q. v.). - Pass. paṭihaññati It 103; J I.7; DhsA 72. Paṭiharati {Patiharati} [paṭi+hṛ] to strike in return Vin II.265; D I.142; S IV.299. - Caus. paṭihāreti to repel, avoid J VI.266, 295. - Cp. pāṭihāriya etc. Paṭu {Patu} (adj.) [cp. Epic. Sk. paṭu] sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism 337 (°saððākicca), 338. Cp. paddha1 & pāṭava. Paṭuppādana {Patuppadana} (nt.) [paṭa (?) +upp°] subtraction (opp. sankalana) DA I.95. The word is not clear (cp. Dial. I.22). Paṭuva {Patuva} at D I.54 is read as pacuṭa by Bdhgh. & trsln (see Dial. I.72). See under pavuṭā. Paṭola {Patola} [dial.?] a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin I.201 (°paṇṇa). Paṭṭa {Patta} [cp. late Sk. paṭṭa, doubtful etym.] 1. slab, tablet, plate, in cpds. ayo° iron plate A IV.130, 131; J IV.7 (suvaṇṇa°); PvA 43 (ayomaya°); loha° brass plate PvA 44; silā° stone slab J Pāli Text Society 918 Pāli-English Dictionary I.59 etc. When written on, it is placed into a casket (maðjūsā) J II.36; IV.335. - 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 3341 (āyoga°)=VvA 142. - 3. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban (cloth) Vin II.266 (dussa°=setavattha-paṭṭa &Bacute;dhgh, see Vin. Texts III.341); S II.102 (id.) J I.62 (sumana° cloth with a jasmine pattern); VI.191 (°sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi°); KhA 51 (°bandhana); DA I.87 (āmilāka); DhA I.395 (°vattha); II.42 (rajata°). -dupaṭṭa "double" cloth, see under dvi B II. Paṭṭaka {Pattaka} (adj. n.) [fr. paṭṭa] made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin II.136 (paṭṭikā); A I.254 (=paṭṭikā C.); J V.359 (aya° an iron girdle), VbhA 230 (paṭṭikā). Pattana {Pattana} (nt.) [*Sk. paṭṭana] a place, city, port J I.121; IV.16, 137, V.75; PvA 53. - °ka a sort of village J VI.456. Paṭṭikā {Pattika} see paṭṭaka. Paṭṭoli {Pattoli} in yāna° at Vism 328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna-kaḷopi (on account of combn with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with v. l. BB), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The trsln would be "provision bag for a carriage." See further discussed under mutoḷi. Paṭṭha (adj.) [fr. pa+sthā, see patthahati] "standing out," setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever?) Vin III.210 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ); IV.60 (cīvarakammaṃ kātuṃ), 254 (dhammiṃ kathaṃ kātuṃ) 285, 290; Nd2 p. 46 (for Sn prose part puṭṭha; v. l. seṭṭha); Nd2 no. 388 (in expln of paṭṭhagū Sn 1095; here it clearly means "being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of"). See also paddha1 and paddhagu. {Pattha} Paṭṭhapita {Patthapita} [pp. of paṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. prasthapita Divy 514] established, or given PvA 119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta). Paṭṭhahati {Patthahati} [pa+sthā=P. tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning, see patiṭṭhahati] to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna PvA 128 (varamāna+; v. l. paṭṭhap°); aor. paṭṭhayi Pv II.934 (dānaṃ; v. l. paṭṭhapayi, expld by paṭṭhapesi PvA 126). ger. paṭṭhāya see sep. - Caus. II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give S II.25; Pv II.924 (fut. °ayissati dānaṃ, v. l. paṭṭhayissati; expld by pavattessati PvA 123); J I.117; PvA 54 (bhattaṃ), 126 (dānaṃ). - pp. paṭṭhapita (q. v.). Paṭṭhāna {Patthana} (nt.) [fr. pa+sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati] setting forth, putting forward; only in cpd. sati° setting up of mindfulness (q. v. and see discussion of term at Dial II.324). Besides in later lit. meaning "origin," starting point, cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa. See Ledi, J.P.T.S. 1915-16, p. 26; Mrs. Rh. D., Tika p. 1, vi. - At Sdhp 321 it has the Sk. meaning of "setting out" (?). Paṭṭhāya {Patthaya} (indecl.) [ger. fr. paṭṭhahati] putting down, starting out from, used as prep. (with abl.) from . . . onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of, e. g. ajjato p. from to-day VvA 246; ito p. from here, henceforth J I.60, 63, 150; cp. J I.52 (mūlato); VI.336 (sīsato); PvA 11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with acc.) from-up to Vism 374. Pāli Text Society 919 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṭṭhika {Patthika} in pañca° see under pañca. to read, Sk. paṭhati] to read (of a text) VvA 72; PvA 58, 59, 70 etc.; see also pāṭha. Paṭhana {Pathana} (nt.) [fr. paṭhati] reading (textual) Miln 344. Paṭhama {Pathama} (adj.) [Ved. prathama, cp. Av. fratəma; also Ved. prataraṃ further, Gr. pro/teros superl. formation fr. prep. *pro, Sk. pra etc. see pa°] num. ord. "the first," in foll. meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Sn 93, 436, 1031; J II.110; KhA I.192; DhA III.5, 196 (°vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima); PvA 5, 13, 56. nt. acc. paṭhamaṃ at first, for the first time Vin I.16; D II.14; Dh 158; J I.222; II.103, 153; often as first part of cpd. °-, meaning either "first" or "recently, newly, just" Vin I.1 (°ābhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship); D III.253 (°ābhinibbatta), Sn 420 (°uppattika "in his first youth"); J III.394 (°uggata newly sprung up). - A second compar. formation is paṭhamatara, only as adv. °ṃ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin I.30; J VI.510; DhA I.138; VvA 230; PvA 93. Paṭhavatta {Pathavatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭhavī] earthliness M I.329. Paṭhavant {Pathavant} (adj.-n.) [fr. paṭhavī] a wayfarer S I.37. Paṭhavī {Pathavi} (f.) [Ved. pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 124, 17n. To ad., pṛthu: see puthu, prath to expand, thus lit. the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Bdhgh at Vism 364: patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Cpd. 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived fr. pattharati] the earth. Acc. to Nd2 389 syn. with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumn of the 4 elements (see dhātu 1), viz. p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion: Cpd. 155). At D III.87 sq.≈ Vism 418 rasa° is opposed to bhūmi-pappaQaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground. See D II.14, 16; M I.327 sq.; S I.113 (p. udrīyati), 119 (id.), 186; II.133, 169 sq.; V.45, 78, 246, 456 sq.; A II.50; IV.89, 374, V.263 sq.; Sn 307, 1097; It 21; Dh 41, 44, 178 (pathavyā); Pv II.66; Miln 418; PvA 57, 75, 174. -mahā° M I.127; S II.179, 263; III.150; J I.25, 74; III.42; Miln 187; aya° iron soil (of Avīci) DhA I.148. In compn both paṭhavī° & pathavi°. -ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth DhA II.154. -kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DA I.130. -kampana=kampa J I.47. -kasiṇa the earth artifice (see Dhs trsl 43) D III.286. -dhātu the earth element (see above) D I.215; II.294; III.228, 247; M I.185; 421; S II.170; Dhs 588, 648, 962 (cp. Dhs. trsln 241); Nett 73, 74; VbhA 55; -maṇḍala the circle of the E. D I.134; S I.101; A IV.90. -rasa taste of earth S I.134; SnA 5. -lekha writing on (or in) carth A I.283; Pug 32. -saððā earth consciousness M. II.105; A IV.312; V.7 sq., 318 sq. 353 sq. -sama like the earth M I.127, 423; Dh 95. Paḍayhati {Padayhati} v. l. at PvA 60 for T. pariḍayhati. Paṇa {Pana} [in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect. as "house"; see BR s. v. paṇa. Usual meaning "wager"] a shop J IV.488 [v. l. pana]. Paṇaka {Panaka} see paṇṇaka. -paṇaka (comb) see phaṇaka. Paṇati {Panati} [cp. Sk. paṇati] to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet J V.24 (=voharati attānaṃ vikkiṇati C.). - See also paṇitaka & paṇiya. 920 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paṇamati {Panamati} [pa+Qam] to bend, to be bent or inclined Ps I.165, 167; - pp. paṇata ibid. Caus. panāmeti (q. v.). Paṇaya {Panaya} [classical Sk. praṇaya, fr pra+nī] affection J VI.102. Paṇava {Panava} [cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava] a small drum or cymbal D I.79; S II.128; IV.344; A II.117, 241; J III.59 (of an executioner; PvA 4 in id. p. has paṭaha); Th 1, 467; Bu I.32; Vv 8110; Dhs 621 (°sadda); DhA I.18. Paṇāma {Panama} [fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti 1) VvA 321 (°ṃ karoti=añjaliṃ karoti). - As paṇāmana nt. at J IV.307. Paṇāmita {Panamita} [pp. of paṇāmeti] 1. (=paṇāmeti 1) raised, bent or stretched out Sn 352 (aðjalī sup°). - 2. (=paṇāmeti 3) dismissed, given leave Vin I.54; M I.457 (bhikkhusangho); Miln 209 (id.), 187. Paṇāmeti {Panameti} [Caus. of paṇamati] 1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliṃ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin II.188; D I.118; Sn p. 79. - 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaṃ p. to shut the door Vin I.87; II.114, 207; pattaṃ Vin II.216. - 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave, dismiss Vin I.54; II.303; S I.7; Th 1, 511, 557; J V.314; Miln 187 (parisaṃ); Pass. paṇāmīyati (ibid.) - pp. paṇāmita (q. v.). Paṇitaka {Panitaka} (adj. nt.) [fr. paṇita - pp. of paṇati] staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play J VI.192 (so read for paṇīta°). Paṇidahati {Panidahati} [pa+ni+dhā] to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for S V.156 (atthāya cittaṃ paṇidahiṃ). ger. paṇidhāya S I.42=Sn 660 (vācaṃ manañ ca pāpakaṃ); S I.170 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ); A III.249 (deva-nikāyaṃ p.); IV.461 sq. (id.); Vbh 244 (ujuṃ kāyaṃ p.)=DA I.210. Also lit. (as prep with acc.) "in the direction of, towards" M I.74 (angārākāsuṃ). - pp. paṇihita (q. v.). Paṇidhāna {Panidhana} (nt.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & BSk. praṇidhāna] aspiration, longing, prayer VvA 270; Sdhp 344. Paṇidhi {Panidhi} (f.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. BSk. praṇidhi Divy 102, 134, in same meaning. The usual Sk. meaning is "spy"] aspiration, request, prayer, resolve D III.29, 276; S II.99, 154; III.256 (ceto°); IV.303; A II.32; IV.239 sq. (ceto°); V.212 sq.; Sn 801; Vv 4712; Nd1 109; Dhs 1059, 1126; SnA 132 (=paṇidhāna); DhA II.172; DhsA 222 (rāga-dosa-moha°). -kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow D I.12, cp. DA I.97 (which Kern, however, Toev. s. v., interprets as "application of an enema," comparing Sk. pranidheya to be injected as a clyster). Paṇipatati {Panipatati} [pa+ni+pat] to fall down before Th 1, 375. Paṇipāta {Panipata} [fr. pa+ni+pat] prostration, adoration Dāvs V.53. Paṇipātika {Panipatika} devotional SnA 157. (adj.) [fr. paṇipāta] consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, Pāli Text Society 921 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṇiya {Paniya} (adj.) [ger. formation fr. paṇ, see paṇati & cp. BSk. paṇya in tara-paṇya fare AvŚ I.148] to be sold or bought, vendible, nt. article of trade, ware A II.199; Vv 847 (=bhaṇḍa VvA 337); J IV.363 (=bhaṇḍa C. 366). Paṇihita {Panihita} [pp. of paṇidahati] applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled S IV.309 (dup°); A I.8; V.87; Dh 43; (sammā °ṃ cittaṃ); Sn 154 (su° mano= suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo SnA 200); Ps II.41 (vimokkha); Miln 204, 333; 413. -appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean "free from all longings," see Vin III.93=IV.25; S IV.295, 309, 360; Ps II.43 sq., 100; Miln 337. Paṇāma {Panama} [fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bowing, bow, obeisance Th 2, 407 (°ṃ karoti). Paṇīta {Panita} (adj.) [pp. of pa+neti in same application BSk.; cp. Divy 385] 1. (lit.) brought out or to, applied, executed; used with ref. to punishment (see paṇeti daṇḍaṃ) Pv IV.166 (°daṇḍa receiving punishment= ṭhapita-sarīra-daṇḍa PvA 242). - 2. (appld) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent; with ref. to food (very often used in this sense) "heaped up, plentiful, abundant." Synonymous with uttama (DA I.109, 171), uḷāra (PvA 25, 228), atuḷa (PvA 110); opp. hīna (D III.215; A III.349; V.140; Vism 11), lūkha (S II.153; VvA 64). D I.12 (dhammā gambhīrā . . . paṇītā . . .), 109 (khādaniya); II.127 (id.) III.215 (with hīna & majjhima-dhātu); S I.136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); II.153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); III.47; IV.360; V.66 (dhammā), 226 (etaṃ padaṃ), 266 (sattā); A I.284; II.171, 190; IV.10, 332, 423; V.8, 36 and passim; Sn 240, 389; It 44; Pv I.53; IV.127; Pug 28 (°ādhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs 269, 1027, 1411; PvA 12, 35 (āhāra), 42 (id.); DhA II.154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often combd with abhikkantatara, e. g. D I.62, 74, 216; S I.80; A I.119, 171; V.37, 140, 203 sq. Paṇītaka {Panitaka} [perhaps=Sk. paṇita, or paṇ (see paṇa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa+nīta+ka, viz. that which has been produced] a gambler's stake J VI.192. See paṇitaka. Paṇudati & Paṇunna {Panudati} {Panunna} see panudati etc. Paṇeti {Paneti} [pa+nī] to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaṃ paṇeti to give a punishment D II.339=Miln 110; M II.88; Dh 310; J II.207; III.441; IV.192; Miln 29; DhA III.482. - pp. paṇīta (q. v.). Paṇḍa {Panda} see bhaṇḍati. Paṇḍaka {Pandaka} [cp late (dial.) Sk. paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pello] a eunuch, weakling Vin I.86, 135, 168, 320; IV.20, 269; A III.128; V.71; Sdhp 79. - With ref. to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin II.271 (itthi°). Paṇḍara {Pandara} (adj) [Ved. pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q. v. for etym.] white, pale, yellowish J II.365; V. 340; Nd1 3; Dhs 6= Vbh 88 (Dhs trsl. "that which is clear"? in def. of citta & mano) Dhs 17, 293, 597; Miln 226; DhA IV.8; VvA 40; PvA 56 (=seta); Sdhp 430. Paṇḍicca {Pandicca} (nt.) [fr. paṇḍita] erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom J I.383; Ps II.185; Pug 25; Dhs 16 (=paṇḍitassa bhāvo DhsA 147), 292, 555. As pandicciya J VI.4. Pāli Text Society 922 Pāli-English Dictionary Paṇḍita {Pandita} (adj.) [cp. Ved. paṇḍita] wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin II.190 (+buddhimanto); D I.12 (°vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise), 120 (opp. duppañña); III.192; M I.342; III.61, 163, 178; S IV.375 (+viyatta medhāvin); V.151 (+vyatta kusala); A I.59, 68, 84, 101 sq., 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaṃ adhigacchanti); II.3 sq., 118, 178, 228; III.48=It 16; Sn 115, 254, 335, 523, 721, 820, 1007, 1125 (Ep. of Jatukaṇṇī); It 86; Dh 22, 28, 63 (°mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238, 289; J III.52 (sasa°); Nd1 124; Pv IV.332 (opp. bāla; =sappaðða PvA 254); Dhs 1302; Miln 3, 22; DA I.117; DhA IV.111; VvA 257; PvA 39, 41, 60 (=pañña), 93, 99. Paṇḍitaka {Panditaka} (adj.) [paṇḍita+ka] a pedant D I.107. Paṇḍu {Pandu} (adj.) [cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale-red); Gr. pelitno/s, pello/s, po/lios (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale-yellow), pilkas (grey); Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale] pale-red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Th 2, 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up-paṇḍ'-uppaṇḍuka-jātā: "thin, pale and colourless" see ThA 80). Otherwise only in cpds., e. g. -kambala a light red blanket, orange-coloured cloth S I.64 (=ratta-kambala C.); A I.181; Sn 689 (=ratta SnA 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka's throne (p.-k.-silā) is made of it J I.330; II.93; II.53, (°silāsana); V.92 (id.); Pv II.960 (°silā=p.-k-nāmaka sīlāsana PvA 138); VvA 110 (id.); KhA 122 (°varāsana); DhA I.17 (°silāsana). -palāsa a withered leaf Vin I.96=III.47; IV.217; Dh 233, VbhA 244; KhA 62; on °palāsika (DA I.270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. -mattikā yellow loam, clay soil KhA. 59. -roga jaundice Vin I.206 (°ābādha) 276 (id.); J I.431; II.102; DhA I.25. -rogin suffering from jaundice J II.285; III.401. -vīṇā yellow flute (of Paðcasikha): see beluva. -sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds SnA 125 (cp. Manor.-pūr. on A II.33). -sutta orange-coloured string D I.76. Paṇḍuka {Panduka} (-roga) perhaps to be read with v. l. at M II.121 for bandhuka°. Paṇṇa {Panna} (nt.) [Ved. parṇa, cp. Ags. fearn, E. fern] 1. a leaf (esp. betel leaf) Vin I.201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba° Azadirachta Indica, kuṭaja° Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola° Tricho- Qanthes dioeca, sulasi° or tulasi° basil, kappāsika° cotton, see Vin. Texts II.46) A I.183 (tiṇa+) Sn 811 (p. vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd1 135); J I.167; II.105 (nimba)°; KhA 46 (khitta-p.-kosa-saṇṭhāna); PvA 115 (=patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 3343 (=tālapattehi kata-maṇḍala-vījanī VvA 147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable SnA 283; sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf J I.98. - 2. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest (see below paṇṇākāra) J I.409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa); II.104; IV.151 (ucchangato p. °ṃ nīharati); DhA I.180; PvA 20 (likhā° written message). paṇṇaṃ āropeti to send a letter J I.227; pahiṇati id. J IV.145; V.458; peseti id. J I.178; IV.169. paṇṇaṃ likhati to write a letter J II. 174; VI.369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa° a promissory note J I.230; IV.256. - p. as ticket or label at DhsA 110. - 3. a feather, wing see su°. -ākāra "state or condition of writing" (see ākāra 1), i. e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift J I.377; II.166; III.10; IV.316, 368; VI. 68, 390; SnA 78; DhA .184 326, 392, 339: II.80; III.292 (dasavidha dibba°, viz. āyu etc.: see ṭhāna); IV.11. -kuṭi a hut of leaves D III.94; S I.226; J II.44; Pv III.220; DA I.318. -chatta a fan of leaves J II.277. -chattaka a leaf-awning S I.90, 92. dhāra a holder made of leaves J V.205. -pacchi leaf-basket, a b. for greens J VI.369. -puṭa a palm-leaf basket PvA 168. -saððā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) J I.153. -santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adj. spread with leaves A I.136; J VI.24. -sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage J I.6, 7, 138; II.101 sq.; VI.30, 318 (nala-bhittikaṃ °ṃ katvā); VI.24. -susa (& sosa) drying the leaves (said of the wind) KhA 15. Pāli Text Society Paṇṇaka 923 Pāli-English Dictionary [paṇṇa+ka] 1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens J VI.24 (kāra° vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv III.33 (panko paṇṇako ca, expld as "kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā" PvA 189, but evidently misunderstood for "withered leaves"); PvA 256 (tiṇakaṭṭha-paṇṇaka-sala, is reading correct?). - 2. N. of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern (see Kern, Toev. II.16 q. v.). Often combd with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e. g. at J II.324; V.37. - The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also combd with sevāla, e. g. Vin III.177 (in combn saṇkha -sevāla°, where Bdhgh explains "sankho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka-pappaṭaka-nīlabījak'ādi sabbo 'ti paṇako ti sankhaṃ gacchati"); S V.122; A III.187, 232, 235; J IV.71 (sevāla°); Miln 35 (sankha-sevāla-p. which the Manor-pūṛ explns by udaka-pappaṭaka, and also as "nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiṃ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaṃ" see Trenckner, Miln 421 and cp. Miln. trsln I.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa°), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka-bhakkho); KhA 61 (sevāla°; cp. Schubring's kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.). - 3. (see paṇṇa 2) a written leaf, a ticket DhsA 110. {Pannaka} Paṇṇatti {Pannatti} see paññatti. Paṇṇattika {Pannattika} (adj.) [fr. paṇṇatti] having a manifestation or name, in a°-bhāva state without designation, state of non-manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref. to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) DhA I.89; II.163. Paṇṇarasa & Paṇṇavīsati {Pannarasa} {Pannavisati} see pañca see pañca 1. B, & C. Paṇṇāsa {Pannasa} see pañca 2. A. Paṇṇi {Panni} (f.) [=paṇṇa] a leaf Vin I.202 (taka°). Paṇṇika {Pannika} [paṇṇa+ika] one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer J I.411; II.180; III.21 (°dhītā); Miln 331. Paṇṇikā {Pannika} (f.) [to paṇṇaka; cp. Sk. parṇikā; meaning uncertain, cp. Kern, Toev. p. 17 s. v.] greens, green leaves, vegetable Vin II.267 (na harītaka °ṃ pakinitabbaṃ, trsl. at Vin. Texts III.343 by "carry on the business of florist and seedsman," thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vin. Texts III.112); J I.445 (paṇṇikāya saððaṃ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya "with the goad," of saṇ(ṇ)ikā=Sk. sṛṇi elephant-driver's hook). Paṇhi {Panhi} (m. & f.) [Ved. pārṣṇi, Av. paṣṇā, Lat. perna, Gr. pte/rna, Goth. fairzna, Ohg. fersana=Ger. ferse] the heel Vin II.280 (°samphassa); J II.240; V.145; Sdhp 147, 153. See next. Paṇhikā {Panhika} (f.) [fr. paṇhi] the heel J I.491; KhA 49 (°aṭṭhi); Vism 253 (id.); PvA 185. Paṇhin {Panhin} (adj.) [fr. paṇhi] having heels D II.17 (āyata° having projecting heels, the 3rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa). Patati {Patati} [Ved. patati, Idg. *pet "to fly" as well as "to fall." Cp. Av. pataiti fly, hurry; Gr. pe/tomai fly, w)kupe/ths quick, pi/ptw fall; Lat. praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.] to fall, jump, fall down on (loc., acc. & instr.), to alight J I.278 (dīpake); Sn 248 (nirayaṃ); Pāli Text Society 924 Pāli-English Dictionary Pv IV.108 (1st pl. patāmase); Miln 187; PvA 45, ppr. patanto J I.263 (asaniyā); III.188 (nāvāya); fut. patissati J III.277; aor. pati Sn 1027 (sirasā); J III.55; Pv I.78; ger. patitvā J I.291; III.26; PvA 16; DhA III.196 (vv. ll. papāta & papatā the latter aor. of papatati, q. v.); ger. patitvā J I.291; III.26; PvA 16. - pp. patita (q. v.). - Caus. pāteti (q. v.). Pass. (Caus.) patīyati is brought to fall also intrs. rush away J IV.415 (=palāyati C.); Miln 187. Patatthi {Patatthi} at J VI.276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q. v.). Patana {Patana} (nt. adj.) [fr. patati] falling, falling out, ruin, destruction J I.293 (akkhīni); II.154; III.188 (geha°); VI.85 (usu° range of his arrow). Patanaka {Patanaka} (adj.) [fr. patana] on the point of falling, going to fall, falling J VI.358. Patanu {Patanu} (adj.) [pa+tanu] very thin J VI.578 (°kesa); Dhs 362 (°bhāva)=DhsA 238; Kvu 299 (id.). Patara {Patara} [Vedic pradara, pa+dṛ, with t. for d.; see Trenckner, Notes 6216; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39, 4] a split, a slit J IV.32. Patarati {Patarati} [pa+tarati] 1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over D I.248; J III.91 (aor. patari). - 2. to overflow, boil over (of water) Miln 260. - Caus. patāreti (q. v.). Patākā {Pataka} (f.) [cp. later Sk. patākā] a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) J I.52; VvA 31, 173. Patāpa {Patapa} [fr. pa+tap] splendour, majesty Vv 408 (=tejas, ānubhāvo VvA 180). Patāpavant {Patapavant} (adj.) [fr. patāpa] splendid, majestic Sn 550 (=jutimantatāya p. SnA 453); Th 1, 820. Patāpeti {Patapeti} [pa+tāpeti, Caus. of tap] scorch, burn fiercely Vv 795 (=ativiya dīpeti VvA 307). Sdhp 573. Patāyati {Patayati} [in form=pa+tāyati, diff. in meaning; not sufficiently expld, see Kern, Toev. p. 29 s. v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati: see under pharati, phalaka and phāteti] to be spread out, intrs. to spread (?) A IV.97 (kodho p., as if fr. pat); J III.283 (C. nikkhamati, as if fr. tṛ, Kern. trsls "to be for sale"). Patāreti {Patareti} [Caus. of patarati] to make go forth, to bring over or through M I.225; A III.432 (v. l. M. pakaroti). - aor. patārayi in meaning "strive" at J III.210 (=patarati vāyamati C. but Rhys Davids. "to get away from"); as "assert" at J V.117. Pati1 {Pati} [Ved. pati, Av. paitis lord, husband; Gr. po/sis husband, Lat. potis, potens, possum, hos-pes; Goth. brūp-faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lith. pāts husband] lord, master, owner, leader. - 1. in general D III.93 (khettānaṃ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly -°; see under gavam°, gaha°, dāna°, yūtha°, senā°. - 2. husband S I.210; Sn 314; J III.138; PvA 161. See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika. -kula her husband's clan ThA 283; VvA 206; devatā a devoted wife J III.406; VvA 128. Pāli Text Society 925 Pāli-English Dictionary Pati2 {Pati} (indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.) a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep. (with acc.) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi°, except in the case of patiṭṭh°. The more frequent cases are the foll.: patikāra, °kuṭati, °caya, °dissati, °nandati, °manteti, °māneti, °ruddha, °rūpa, °līna, °sallāna, etc. °sibbati, °sevati, °ssata, °ssaya, °ssava. Patika {Patika} (adj.) [only f. patikā and only as -°] having a husband in mata° "with husband dead," a widow Th 2, 221 (=vidhuva ThA 179); J V.103 (ap° without husband, v. l. for appatīta, C. explns by assāmika). pavuttha° (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin II.268; III.83; Miln 205 (pavuttha°). See also pañcapatika & sapatika. Patika {Patika} at Vism 28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish). Patiṭṭhahati & Patiṭṭhāti {Patitthahati} {Patitthati} [paṭi+sthā] to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (loc.), to be established (intrs.), to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay; aor. patiṭṭhahi DhA III.175 (sotāpattiphale), PvA 42 (id.), 66 (id.); VvA 69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Miln 16. - fut. °ṭ ṭhahissati J V.458 (°hessati); DhA III.171. - ger. patiṭṭhāya Sn 506; J II.2 (rajje); III.52; V.458 (rajje); Miln 33; PvA 142. - pp. patiṭṭhita (q. v.). - Caus. patiṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). Patiṭṭhā {Patittha} (f.) [fr. pati+sthā. Cp. Ved. pratiṣṭhā support, foundation] support, resting place, stay, ground, help, also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation S I.1 (ap°); II.65; III.53; Sn 173; Dh 332; J I.149; IV.20; Miln 302; DhsA 261; VvA 138; PvA 53, 60 (=dīpa), 87 (=dīpa), 141 (su°), 174 (su°=dīpa). Patiṭṭhāna {Patitthana} (nt.) [fr. paṭi+sthā cp. late Sk. pratiṣṭhāna] fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation) Sn 1011: PvA 123. Patiṭṭhāpita {Patitthapita} [pp. of patiṭṭhāpeti] put down, set down, established PvA 139. Patiṭṭhāpitar {Patitthapitar} [n. ag. of patiṭṭhāpeti] one who establishes A V.66. Patiṭṭhāpeti {Patitthapeti} [Caus. of patiṭṭhahati, cp. BSk. praṭiṣṭhāpayati Jtm 224] to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal D I.206; S I.90; J I.152; 168, 349 (sotāpatti-phale); PvA 22 (id.), 38 (id.) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (id.), 76 (ceṭiyaṃ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe). - aor. patiṭṭhāpesi J I.138. - pp. patiṭṭhāpita (q. v.). Patiṭṭhāha {Patitthaha} [fr. patiṭṭhahati] having one's footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs 381=Nd2 271III DhsA 253. The v. l. at Nd2 is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs. Patiṭṭhita {Patitthita} [pp. of patiṭṭhahati] established in (loc.), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported, founded in D III.101 (supatiṭṭhita-citta); M I.478; S I.40, 45, 185 (dhammesu); It 77; Sn 409, 453; J I.51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje); Pv I.44; II.969 (dussīlesu); Miln 282; VvA 110 (°gabbhā), 259 (°saddha); PvA 34 (jāta+) - nt. °ṃ arrangement, settling, in pañca° the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting, see under pañca. Patiṭṭhīyati {Patitthiyati} [only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality=Sk. pratisthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with Pāli Text Society 926 Pāli-English Dictionary patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati] to be obdurate, to offer resistance A I.124; II.203; III.181 sq.; J IV.22 (aor. °ṭṭhīya); Pug 36; KhA 226. Patita {Patita} [pp. of patati] fallen Dh 68, 320; J I.167; Miln 187; PvA 31 (read pātita), 56. Patitaka {Patitaka} (adj.) [fr. last] thrown or fallen into (loc.), dropped Vism 62. Patitiṭṭhati {Patititthati} [paṭi+titthati] to stand up again Th 1, 173. Patittha {Patittha} [pa+tittha] a bank of a river or lake, su° (adj.) with beautiful banks S I.90; Pv II.120 (=sundaratittha PvA 77). Patibbatā {Patibbata} (f.) [pati+vatā] a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) J II.121; VI.533; VvA 56, 110. Patissata {Patissata} see paṭi°. Patīta {Patita} [pp. of pacceti] pleased, delighted Dh 68; Sn 379, 679; Vv 8410 (=pahaṭṭha VvA 337). - neg. appatīta displeased M I.27; J V.103 (v. l. appatika, C explns by assāmika, i. e. without husband). Patīyati {Patiyati} see patati. Pateyya {Pateyya} in phrase alam-pateyya in phrase alam-pateyya at D III.71 (kumārikā alampateyyā), 75 (id.) means "surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage" (?) Patoda {Patoda} [fr. pa+tud cp. Ved. pratoda] a goad, driving stick, prick, spur M I.124; III.97; S IV.176; A II.114; III.28; IV.91; V.324; Th 1, 210; J I.57, 192; Dhs 16, 20, 292; Pug 25; SnA 147; ThA 174; Sdhp 367. -laṭṭhi a driver's stick, goad-stick [cp. BSk. pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7, 76, 463, 465] D I.105, 126; J VI.249; Miln 27; DhA I.302; II.38; IV.216; VvA 64. As °yaṭṭhi at Dpvs XI.30. Patodaka {Patodaka} (adj. n.) [fr. pa+tud] lit. pushing, spurring; only in phrase anguli° nudging with one's fingers Vin III.84 =IV.110 (here to be taken as "tickling"); D I.91 (cp. Dial. I.113); A IV.343. Patta1 {Patta} (nt.) [Ved. patra, to *pet as in patati (q. v. & see also paṇṇa); cp. Gr. ptero/n wing, pte/ruc id.; Lat. penna feather=Ger. fittig.; acci-piter; Ohg. fedara=E. feather etc.] 1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin IV.259; D I.71. kukkuṭa° a hen's quill (for sewing) Vin II.215. - 2. a leaf M I.429; Sn 44=64 (sañchinna°, see Nd2 625); 625 (pokkhara° lotus l.); Dh 401 (id.); Nd1 135 (paduma°); Pv II.95 (=paṇṇa PvA 15); VvA 147 (tāla°); ThA 71; PvA 283 (nigrodha°). asi-pattavana "sword-leaf-forest" (a forest in Niraya) Sn 673; PvA 221. - 3. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Miln 53; VvA 281. -āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm-leaves Vin II.10; III.180; D I.6 (cp. DA I.86); M I.266; A V.203; Miln 229. -gandha odour of leaves Dhs 625. -nāḷī rib of a feather DhA I.394. -phala leaf-fruit, a leaf and fruit, vegetables Sn 239 (=yaṃ kiñci harita-pannaṃ SnA 283); PvA 86. -yāna having wings as vehicle, "winggoer," i. e. a bird Sn 606 (=pattehi yantī ti pattayānā SnA 465); J II.443. -rasa taste of leaves Dhs 629; juice of leaves Vin I.246 (+puppharasa & ucchurasa). -salākā leaf-ticket DhA IV.65. Pāli Text Society 927 Pāli-English Dictionary Patta2 {Patta} tlom=Lat. poculum be l. See pāna & pibati] a bowl, esp. the alms-bowl of a bhikkhu Vin I.46, 50, 51, 61, 224 (patte pūresuṃ); II.111, 126, 224, 269; S I.112; A IV.344; Sn 413, 443; J I.52, 55 (pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; III.535 (puṇṇa °ṃ deti to give a full bowl, i. e. plenty); V.389 (pl. pattāni); Vism 108 (āṇigaṇṭhik'āhato ayopatto); DhA IV.220 (°ṃ pūreti); PvA 35, 61, 76, 88, 141. - Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin III.243, viz. ayo° of iron & mattikā° of clay, dāru° a wooden bowl Vin II.112, 143. uda° a bowl of water or a water-bowl M I.100; S V.121; A III.230 sq. cp. odapattakinī. - pattassa mukhavaṭṭi J V.38. - fut. pātī (q. v.). -ādhāraka bowl support, bowl-hold Vin II.113. -kaṇḍolikā a wicker-work stand for a bowl Vin II.114 (cp. Vin. Texts III.86). -gata gone into the bowl, alms given Th 1, 155; Pv IV.73. -gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin II.177 (+sāṭiya° etc.); A III.275. -cīvara bowl and robe (see note in Dial II.162) Vin I.46; II.78, 194; S I.76; J III.379; Pv II.1316; DA I.45, 186; PvA 61. -tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin II.114; J III.364; VvA 40, 63; KhA 45. -dhovana "bowl-washing," (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin II.214. -pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Sn 713; It 89=S III.93≈; onīta° removing the hand from the bowl: see onīta. -piṇḍika "eating from one vessel only" A III.220. -maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin II.112. -māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin II.114 (cp. Vin. Texts III.86). -mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin II.269. -vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl S IV.168. -saññin paying attention to one's bowl Vin II.214. Patta3 {Patta} [pp. of pāpuṇāti] obtained, attained, got, reached (pass. & med.) Sn 55, 138, 478, 517, 542, 992; Dh 134 (nibbānaṃ) 423; J I.255 (vināsaṃ); IV.139 (samuddaṃ); PvA 4 (anayavyasanaṃ), 5 (sīsacchedaṃ), 71 (manussabhāvaṃ). Very frequent as -° and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling °ppatta is restored (Sk. prāpta), e. g. ummādappatta out of mind PvA 6; jara° old J III.394; dukkha° afflicted with pain J VI.336; domanassa° dejected J II.155; patti° attained one's (possible) share It 32; bala° (become) strong D II.157; vaya° (become) old, come of age J II.421 (+soḷasa-vassa-kāle); PvA 68; somanassa° pleased J III.74; haritu° covered with green M I.343; J I.50, 399. Also as °-, but less frequent, meaning often equal to prep. "with," "after," etc., as pattābhiseka after consecration DhA IV.84; SnA 484; pattuṇṇa with wool SnA 263; °dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin I.16; the same at DhA IV.200 in meaning of patti°, i. e. "merit attained"; °mānasa (?) It 76 (v. l. satta°); °sambodhi It 97 (v. l. satta°). - Opp. appatta not obtained (see also patti 2), i. e. without Dh 272 (cp. DhA III.58); Pug 51 (°pānabhojana, so read for appanna°). - Cp. sam Patta4 {Patta} at Dpvs XI.18 for pattin or pattika, foot-man, infantry. Patta-kkhandha {Pattakkhandha} [perhaps patta1+khandha, thus "leafshouldered," i. e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus "with shoulders falling." We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna (=pa+ nam bent down, put down), which expln would suit the sense better than any other] downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin II.77=III.162 (trsld "with fallen hearts," expld as patita, see Vin. Texts III.13); S I.124; M I.132, 258; III.298; A III.57; J V.17; Miln 5. Pattaka {Pattaka} (nt.) [fr. patta2] a (little) bowl Th 2, 28. Pattatta {Pattatta} (nt.) (-°) [abstr. fr. patta3] the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism 524. Pāli Text Society 928 Pāli-English Dictionary Pattabba {Pattabba} (adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti] to be gained or attained; nt. that which can be attained or won SnA 443. See also pattiya2. Pattali {Pattali} (°lī) (f.) [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā] plantain Th 2, 260 (=kadali ThA 211). Patti1 {Patti} [Ved. patti, *pad (of pada)+ti] on foot, one who is on foot, a foot-soldier Vin IV.105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā, horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry); J IV.494 (hatthī, assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism 19. Cp. pattika1. -kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry S I.72 (cp. BSk. same, at Jtm 215 with hasty-aśva-ratha°). -kārika (for °kārika, of prec.) a foot soldier, lit. one of a body of infantry J IV.134; V.100; VI.15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.). Patti2 {Patti} (f.) [Classical Sk. prāpti fr. pa+āp, cp. patta3] 1. (-°) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of S I.189=Th 1, 1230 (nibbāna°); Sn 68 (paramattha°), 186 (nibbāna°); PvA 5 (vyasana), 112 (id.); Sdhp 379. - 2. attainment, acquisition S II.29 (aggassa); Sn 425 (yogakkhemassa); Nd2 390 (=lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaṃ sacchikiriyā); esp. in phrase apattassa patti "attt of the unattained" D III.255= A IV.332; S I.217; II.29; A II.148; III.179; Kvu 581. - 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage S I.169 (brahma° "best vantage ground"). - 4. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a "dakkhiṇǡ"), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit J II.423, 425 (=dakkhiṇā); IV.21; DhA I.270 (opp. to mūla price); II.4; IV.200 sq. (opp. to mūla). See also cpds. °dāna & °dhamma. - 5. that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state, place, as gram. t. t. loc. pattiyaṃ or pattiyā (-°) in lieu of SnA 310, 317. - See sam°. -dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit VvA 188, 190; PvA 9 (°vasena dānadhamma-pariccāgo), 49 (=dakkhiṇā) 88 (id.); Sdhp 229. -dhamma the practice of transferred merit, see Kvu trsln 1611, 170, & cp. pattadhamma. -patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i. e. Nibbāna) Sn 536 (=pattabbaṃ patto pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ patto ti vuttaṃ hoti SnA 433), 537, 540. Patti3 {Patti} (f.) [for patta1?] leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin I.201 (taka, taka-patti, taka-paṇṇi). Pattika1 {Pattika} [fr. patti1 cp. pajja2] on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, D I.50, 89, 106, 108; II.73; A II.117 (hatth'-āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.); J VI.145; Vism 396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti); Sn 418; a form pattikārika is found, e. g. at J IV. 134; V.100; VI.15, 463; Ap. 316. Pattika2 {Pattika} [fr. patti2] having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor DhA I.270, 271. Pattika3 {Pattika} (adj.-n.) [fr. patta2] in dāru° (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl D I.157 (cp. DA I.319). Pattikā {Pattika} (f.) [fr. patta1 or patti3] a leaf, in tāla° palm-leaf S II.217, 222. Pattin {Pattin} (adj. n.) [fr. patta3, Sk. *prāptin] attaining, one who obtains or gains Sn 513 (kiṃ°=kiṃ patta, adhigata SnA 425). Pāli Text Society 929 Pāli-English Dictionary Pattiya1 {Pattiya} (adj. n.) [for *pratyaya=paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Notes 73, 9] believing, trusting, relying J V.414 (para°); (m.) belief, trust J V.231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (id.), 414 (id.). Pattiya2 {Pattiya} (adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba] to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv II.931 (para° profitable to others, see expln at PvA 125). Pattiyāyati {Pattiyayati} [denom. fr. pattiya1] to believe, trust, rely on J I.426; V.403; DA I.73. Pattiyāyana {Pattiyayana} (nt.) [fr. pattiyāyati] belief J V.402. Pattīyati {Pattiyati} [denom. fr. patti2] to gain, to profit from (acc.) Miln 240 (attānaṃ na p. does not profit from himself). Pattha1 {Pattha} [fr. pa+sthā. Cp. Epic Sk. prastha plateau] a lonely place, in cpd. vana° D I.71; Pug 59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, expld by Bdhgh as "gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāra-ṭṭhānaṃ yattha na kasanti na vapanti" DA I.210; Ud 43 (patthað ca sayan'āsanaṃ, ed.; but better with id. p. Dh 185 as pantañ, which is expld at DhA III.238 by "vivittaṃ," i, e. separately). Cp. with this Sk. vana-prastha a forest situated on elevated land. Pattha2 {Pattha} [cp. late Sk. prastha] a Prastha (certain measure of capacity)=1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha {Prastha} DhA II.154; SnA 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ). Patthaṭa {Patthata} [pp. of pattharati] stretched, spread out J I.336; Vism 364; DA I.311. Patthaṇḍila {Patthandila} [pa+thandila] hermitage M II.155. Patthaddha {Patthaddha} [pa+thaddha] (quite) stiff Vin II.192; Th 1, 1074. Patthanā {Patthana} (f.) [of ap+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā f.] aiming at, wish, desire, request, aspiration, prayer S II.99, 154; A I.224; III.47; V.212; Nd1 316, 337 (p. vuccati taṇhā); Nd2 112; Nett 18, 27; Dhs 1059; Miln 3; SnA 47, 50; DhA II.36; PvA 47. patthanaṃ karoti to make a wish J I.68; DhA I.48; °ṃ ṭhapeti id. DhA I.47; II.83; IV.200. Patthara {Patthara} [cp. late Sk. prastara. The ord. meaning of Sk. pr. is "stramentum"] 1. stone, rock S I.32. - 2. stoneware Miln 2. Pattharati {Pattharati} [pa+tharati] to spread, spread out, extend J I.62; IV.212; VI.279; DhA I.26; III.61 (so read at J VI.549 in cpd °pāda with spreading feet, v. l. patthaṭa°). - pp. patthaṭa (q. v.). - Caus. patthāreti with pp. patthārita probably also to be read at Th 1, 842 for padhārita. Pattharika {Pattharika} [fr. patthara] a merchant Vin II.135 (kaṃsa°). Pāli Text Society 930 Pāli-English Dictionary Patthita {Patthita} [pp. of pattheti] wished for, desired, requested, sought after Sn 836; Miln 227, 361; DhA IV.201; PvA 47 (°ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for); Sdhp 79 (a°). Patthīna {Patthina} [pa+thīna] stiff D II.335; DhsA 307. Also as patthinna at Vin I.286 (=atirajitattā thaddha Bdhgh, on p. 391); Vism 361 (=thīna p. 262); VbhA 67 (°sneha). Pattheti {Pattheti} [pa+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati] to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for S IV.125; V.145; Sn 114, 899; Th 2, 341; Nd1 312, 316; PugA 208 (āsaṃsati+); PvA 148; Sdhp 66, 319; ppr. patthento PvA 107; patthayanto J I.66 (paramābhisaṃbodhiṃ); patthayaṃ Sn 70 (=icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd2 392); patthayamāna M I.4; Sn 902; J I.259; DhA III.193; PvA 226 (=āsiṃsamāna); & patthayāno Sn 900; It 67, 115. - grd. patthetabba PvA 96, patthayitabba PvA 95, and patthiya which only occurs in neg. form apatthiya what ought not to be wished J IV.61; Pv II.67 (=apatthayitabbaṃ PvA 95); DhA I.29; also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Sn 914 (cp. Nd2 337). - pp. patthita (q. v.). Patvā {Patva} see pāpuṇāti. Patha {Patha} [of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path° and panth°, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q. v.)] 1. path, road, way D I.63; Sn 176 (loc. pathe), 385, 540, 868; Nd2 485 B (+pantha, in expln of magga); J I.308 (loc. pathe); II.39; VI.525 (abl. pathā); Th 1, 64; Pug 22, 57; Mhvs 21, 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (loc. pathi, see Geiger, Gr. § 89); Sdhp 241. - 2. Very frequent as -°, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in °tā or °ttaṃ (cp. similar use of anta: see anta1 5; and pada: see pada 3), e. g. anila° (air) J IV.119; anupariyāya° A IV.107; ādicca° (path of the sun, sky) DhA III.177; ummagga° S I.193; kamma° DhA I.36; gaṇana° (range of) calculation Miln 20; cakkhu° J IV.403 (=cakkhūnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ C.); catummahā° A III.28, 42, 394; dve° Vv 5317; nakkhatta° Dh 208; yaðða° (=yaðða) Nd2 524; yogga° A III.122; rajā° S II.219; rāga° (sensuality) S IV.70; vacana° (way of saying, speech) Vv 6317 (=vacana VvA 262), etc. See also cakkhu°, ñeyya°, dveḷhā°, manussa°, yaðða°, vāda°, sagga°, hattha°; der. pātheyya. - See also byappatha. -apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way J II.287; ThA 255; VvA 337. -addhan "the journey or stretch of the path": see under addhan. -addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll J VI.276. Unclear in meaning, expld by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road?) -gamana "going on their course," of the stars D I.10 (see Dial. I.20 "their usual course"). Pathabya {Pathabya} [fr. pathavi=paṭhavi] belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) A IV.90 (reading uncertain). Pathavi {Pathavi} see paṭhavi. Pathāvin {Pathavin} [fr. patha] a traveller Vin IV.108; J VI.65; DA I.298. Pada (nt.) [Ved. pad, pād (m.) foot, and also pāda; pada (nt.) step. Cp. Gr. pw/s tus =Ohg fuoz=E. foot; further Arm. het track, Gr. peda/ after, pe/don field, pezo/s on foot, etc.; Lith. péda track; Ags. fetvan=E. fetch. - The decl. in Pāli is vocalic (a), viz. pada; a trace of the consonant (root) decl. is instr. sg. padā (Th 1, 457; Sn 768), of cons. (s) decl. instr. padasā with the foot, on foot (D I.107; J III.371; DhA I.391). - Gender is nt., but {Pada} Pāli Text Society 931 Pāli-English Dictionary nom. pl. is frequently found as padā, e. g. at Dh 273; Nett 192 (mūla°)] 1. foot Dh 273=SnA 366 (? saccānaṃ caturo padā); DA I.85; usually -°, like hatthipadaṃ elephant's foot M I.176, 184; S I.86; V.43, 231; and with numerals dvi° & di°, catup°, aṭṭha° (q. v.). In aṭṭha° also meaning "square of a chessboard." - 2. step, footstep, track Dh 179 (of a Buddha, cp. DhA III.194 & 197) J I.170 (footmark) II.154; in redupl.-iterative formation padāpadaṃ step by step Sn 446 (v. l. padānupadaṃ), and pade padaṃ Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451). - 3. (Often synonymous with °patha i. e. way, kind, & sometimes untranslatable) (a) lit. way, path, position, place Vin II.217 (nakkhatta° constellation); J I.315 (assama° =assama); V.75 (id.), 321 (id.); VI.76 (id.); VI.180 (v. l. patha; C. mahāmagga); mantapada=manta D I.104 (cp. DA I.273). See also janapada, saggapada. - (b) in appld meaning (modal): case, lot, principle, part, constituent, characteristic, ingredient, item, thing, element M I.176 (cattāri padāni 4 characteristics); S I.7 (pade pade "now in this thing, now in that" C. ārammaṇe ārammaṇe), 212 (amataṃ p.=nibbāna); II.280 (id.); A II.51 (id.), It 39 (p. asankhataṃ=nibbāna); Sn 88 (dhammapade sudesite; expld as nibbānadhamma SnA 164; dhammapada=Dhamma), ibid. (anavajja-padāni sevamāna=principles), 700 (moneyyaṃ uttamaṃ padaṃ, thing; but SnA 491 expls as uttamapaṭipadaṃ), 765; Dh 21, 93, 114 (amataṃ), 254, 368 (santaṃ=nibbānass'etaṃ nāmaṃ, santakoṭṭhāsaṃ DhA IV.108); Pv IV.348 (amataṃ); Nett 2= 192 (nava padāni kusalāni); SnA 397 (nāmādi p.); Sdhp 47 (accutaṃ santaṃ p.), 615 (paramaṃ). See further dhamma°, nibbāna°, santi°, sikkhā°. - 4. a word, verse (or a quarter of a verse), stanza, line, sentence S II.36 (ekena padena sabbo attho vutto); S IV.379=A V.320 (agga°); A II.182 (+vyaðjana & desanā); 189 (attha° text, motto); III.356 (id.); Sn 252 (=dhamma-desanā SnA 293), 374; Dh 273; J I.72 (atireka-padasatena); Nett 4 (akkharaṃ padaṃ vyañjanaṃ, cp. nāmādīhi padehi at SnA 397, which is to be understood as nāma, pada & vyaðjana, i. e. word, sentence & letter, cp. Mvyutp. 104, 74-76); Miln 148 (āhacca°); KhA 169; SnA 409 (ubhaya°), 444; VvA 3, 13; PvA 10, 26, 117 (word, term). abl. padaso (adv.) sentence by stce or word by word Vin IV.14 (dhammaṃ vāceti=anupadaṃ C.; cp. KhA 190 p. °dhamma). At MA I.2 pada (sentence or division of a sentence) is contrasted with akkhara (word), when it is said that the Majjhima Nikāya consists of 80,523 padas and 740,053 akkharas. - Neg. apada (1) without feet, footless A IV.434 (Māra; v. l. apara); It 87 (sattā,+ dvipada etc.). - (2) trackless, leaving no footprint, fig. having no desires (i. e. signs of worldliness) Dh 179 (rāga, etc., as padāni DhA III.197, but cp. also p. 194.) -attha meaning of a word KhA 81, 84; SnA 91. -ānupadaṃ (adv.) on the track DhA II.38. -ānupadika following one's footsteps J II.78; DhA II.94 (therānaṃ); nt. adv. °ṃ close behind DhA I.290. -ānupubbatā (or °ta) succession of words Nd1 140 (in expln of "iti"; cp. SnA 28); Nd2 137 (id.; reading °ka). -uddhāra synopsis of a verse SnA 237 (atthuddhāra+). -kusala clever at following a trail J III.501, 505. cārikā a female (foot-) servant J IV.35. -cetiya "step-shrine," a holy footprint, a miraculous footprint left on the ground by a holy man DhA III.194. -ccheda separation of words, parsing SnA 150. -jāta (nt.) pedal character S I.86. -ṭṭhāna [cp. Sk. padasthāna footprint] "proximate cause" (Cpd. 13, 23) Nett 1 sq., 27 sq., 40 sq., 104; Vism 84. -dvaya twofold part (of a phrase), i. e. antecedent and subsequent DhsA 164. -parama one whose highest attainment is the word (of the text, and not the sense of it) A II.135; J VI.131; Pug 41 ("vyañjanapadam eva paramaṃ assā ti" PugA 223. -pāripūrī (f.) expletive particle Nd2 137; SnA 28. -pūraṇa filling out a verse; as tt. g. expletive particle SnA 590 (a), 139 (kho), 137 (kho pana), 378 (tato), 536 (pi), 230 (su), 416 (ha), 377 (hi); KhA 219 (tam), 188 (su); VvA 10 (maya). -bhājana dividing of words, i. e. treating each word (of a phrase) separately DhsA 234. -bhājaniya division of a phrase DhsA 54. -bhāṇa reciting or preaching (the words of the Scriptures) DhA II.95; III.345; IV.18. -vaṇṇanā expln of a pada or single verse SnA 65, 237; KhA 125, 132, 228. -valañja a footprint, track J VI.560; DhA II.38; III.194. -viggaha separation of words, resolution of a compound into its components VvA 326. -vibhāga separation of words, parsing SnA 269; PvA 34. -saṃsagga contact of words Nd1 139; Nd2 137; SnA 28. -sadda sound of footsteps Sn p. 80; J IV.409. - Pāli Text Society 932 Pāli-English Dictionary sandhi euphonic combination of words Nd1 445; Nd2 137; KhA 155, 224; SnA 28, 40, 157 etc.; PvA 52. -silā a stone for stepping on, flag Vin II.121=154. Padaka1 {Padaka} (adj.) [fr. pada4] one who knows the padas (words or lines), versed in the padapāṭha of the Veda (Ep. of an educated Brahmin) D I.88=Sn p. 105 (where AvŚ II.19 in id. p. has padaśo=P. padaso word by word, but Divy 620 reads padako; ajjheti vedeti cā ti padako); M I.386; A I.163, 166; Sn 595; Miln 10, 236. Padaka2 {Padaka} (nt.)=pada 3, viz. basis, principle or pada 4, viz. stanza, line J V.116 (=kāraṇapadāni C.). Padaka3 {Padaka} (nt.) [fr. pada1] in cpd. aṭṭha° an "eight-foot," i. e. a small inset square (cp. aṭṭha-pada chess-board), a patch (?) Vin I.297. See also padika. Padakkhiṇa {Padakkhina} (adj.) [pa+dakkhiṇa] 1. "to the right," in phrase padakkhiṇaṃ karoti (with acc. of object) to hold (a person, etc.) to one's right side, i. e. to go round so as to keep the right side turned to a person, a mode of reverential salutation Vin I.17; S I.138; A I.294; II.21, 182; III.198; Sn 1010; J I.50, 60; III.392. - 2. "(prominent) with the right," i. e. skilful, clever, quick in learning J IV.469 (=susikkhita C.). - 3. lucky, auspicious, turning out well or favourable J V.353 (=sukha-nipphattin vuddhi-yutta C.). -ggāhin "right-handed," i. e. cleverly taking up (what is taught), good at grasping or understanding A III.79, 180, V.24 sq., 90, 338; DhA II.105. - Opp. appadakkhiṇaggāhin "left-handed," unskilled, untrained (cp. Ger. "linkisch") S II.204 sq.; J III.483. -ggāhitā skilfulness, quick grasp, cleverness KhA 148. Padatta {Padatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pada] being or constituting a lot, part or element SnA 164. Padara {Padara} (nt.) [pa+dara of dṛ, cp. dabba, darati, dāru] 1. a cleft, split, fissure, crevice M I.469; S II.32; Sn 720 (=darī SnA 500); combd with kandara at Miln 36, 296, 411; PvA 29. - 2. a board, plank J II.10 91 (°sakaṭa) 112; III.181; V.47 sq.; VI.432 (°cchanna); SnA 330 (dabba° oar), 355; DhA II.55; III.296. - 3. Wrong spelling for badara at J IV.363 (beluvā p°āni ca) & VI.529. sañcita filled with clefts (?) Vin IV.46. -samācāra refractiousness, disobedience (?) M I.469. Padahati {Padahati} [pa+dhā] 1. to strive, exert D III.221 (cittaṃ paggaṇhāti p.); PvA 31 (yoniso p.). - 2. to confront, take up, fight against, stand J VI.508 (usīraṃ muñjapubbajaṃ urasā padahessāmi "I shall stand against the grasses with my chest"; C. expls by dvedhā katvā purato gamissāmi, i. e. break and go forward). - Note. padahasi at J IV.383 read pade hasi (see Windisch, Māra & B. p. 124 & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 51. Windisch takes padahasi as pa+dah to burn, & translates "du willst das Feuer brennen," i. e. you attempt something impossible, because the fire will burn you). - pp. pahita (q. v.). Padahana {Padahana} see padhāna. Padātar {Padatar} [n. ag. of padāti] extravagant, a squanderer Pdgp. 65, 68. Padāti {Padati} (padadāti, padeti) [pa+dā] 1. to give, bestow Pv I.116 (ger. padatvā, perhaps better to read ca datvā, as v. l. BB); J III.279 (fut. padassati); V.394 (id.). - 2. to acquire, take, get J I.190 (inf. padātave, C. gahetuṃ). - Pass padīyati (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 933 Pāli-English Dictionary Padāna {Padana} (nt.) [fr. pa+dā] giving, bestowing; but appears to have also the meaning of "attainment, characteristic, attribute" A I.102 (bāla° & paṇḍita°); J I.97 (sotāpattimagg'ādi°); PvA 71 (anubala°); ThA 35 (anupattidhammatā°). - At Th 1, 47 Kern (Toev. II.138) proposes to read tuyhaṃ padāne for T. tuyh'āpadāne, and translates padāna by "footstep, footprint." See also sampadāna. Padāraṇa {Padarana} (nt.) [pa+dṛ] splitting, tearing Th 1, 752. Padālana {Padalana} (nt.) [fr. padāleti] cleaving, bursting open, breaking Nett 61, 112 (mohajāla°); ThA 34 (mohakkhandha°). Padālita {Padalita} [pp. of padāleti] broken, pierced, destroyed S I.130; III.83; A V.88 (appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ); Sn 546 (āsavā te p.; quoted at VvA 9); ThA 34 (as A. V.88 with moha°). Padālitatta {Padalitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. padālita] the fact of having (med.) or being (pass.) pierced or broken, abl. padālitattā on account of having broken Miln 287. Padāletar {Padaletar} [n. ag. to padāleti] one who pierces or destroys, a destroyer, breaker, in phrase mahato kāyassa padāletā the destroyer of a great body (or bulk) A I.284 sq. (in sequence dūre-pātin, akkhaṇavedhin, m. k. p.); II.170 sq., 202; cp. padāleti1. Padāleti {Padaleti} [Caus. of pa+dal] 1. to cleave, break, pierce, destroy, in combn °khandhaṃ padāleti to destroy the great mass of . . ., e. g. tamo° It 8 (padālayuṃ); Th 2, 28 (ger. padāliya=moha° padālitvā ThA 34); lobha° S V.88; avijjā° A I.285. - 2. to break, break down, tear down, burst open J I.73 (pabbata-kūṭāni); IV.173 (matthakaṃ p°etvā uṭṭhita-singā); V.68 (silāya matthakaṃ); Miln 332 (diṭṭhi-jālaṃ); DA I.37 (Sineruṃ). See also sam° - pp. padālita (q. v.). Padika {Padika} (adj.) [fr. pada 1; cp. padaka3] consisting of feet or parts, -fold; dvādasa° twelve fold J I.75 (paccayākāra). Paditta [pp. of pa+dīp, cp. Sk. pradīpta] kindled, set on fire, blazing S III.93 ≈ (chav'ālataṃ ubhato padittaṃ); J VI.108; Sdhp 208 (°angārakāsuṃ). {Paditta} Padippati {Padippati} [pa+dippati] to flame forth, to blaze Cp III 93 (davaḍāho p.). - pp. paditta (q. v.). - Caus. padīpeti (q. v.). Padissa {Padissa} (adj.) [grd. of padissati] being seen, to be seen, appearing D II.205 (upasantappa°). Padissati {Padissati} [pa+dissati, Pass. of dṛś] to be seen Sn 108 (doubtful; v. l. padussati; expld at SnA 172 by paṭidissati, v. l. padussati, cp. p. 192); Cp I.102 J VI.89; Sdhp 427. Padīpa {Padipa} [cp. Epic Sk. pradīpa] 1. a light Dh 146; Vv 462 (jalati blazes); Tikp 14; Miln 40; VvA 51 (padīpaṃ ujjāletvā lighting a lamp, making a light); PvA 38; Sdhp 250. - 2. a lamp Sn 235 (nibbanti dhīrā yath' āyaṃ p.); DhA II.163 (anupādāno viya p.). °ṃ karoti to make a light, Pāli Text Society 934 Pāli-English Dictionary to light up Vin I.118; °ṃ ujjāleti see under 1. Usually as tela-padīpa an oil lamp Vin I.15; S II.86 (telañ ca vaṭṭið ca telapadīpo jhāyati)=IV.213; V.319; A I.137; VvA 198. -appadīpa where there is no light, obscure Vin IV.268. -kāla lighting time Vv 96. Padīpita {Padipita} [pp. of padīpeti] lit, burning, shining Miln 40. Padīpiya & Padīpeyya {Padipiya} {Padipeyya} (nt.) [padīpa+(i) ya] that which is connected with lighting, material for lighting a lamp, lamps & accessories; one of the gifts forming the stock of requisites of a Buddhist mendicant (see Nd2 523: yañña as deyyadhamma). The form in °eyya is the older and more usual one, thus at A II.85, 203; IV.239; It 65; Pug 51; VvA 51. - The form in °iya at Vv 225, 266, 376; J VI.315; VvA 295. Padīpeti [Caus. of padippati] to light a light or a lamp Vin I.118 (padīpeyya, padīpetabba); Miln 40; ThA 72 (Ap. v. 46); Sdhp 63, 332, 428. - pp. padīpita (q. v.). {Padipeti} Padīyati {Padiyati} [Pass. of padāti] to be given out or presented; Pv II.916; Sdhp 502, 523. Paduṭṭha {Paduttha} [pp. of padussati] made bad, spoilt, corrupt, wicked, bad (opp. pasanna, e. g. at A I.8; It 12, 13) D III.32 (°citta); M III.49; A II.30; Sn 662; Dh 1; J II.401; DhA I.23 (opp. pasanna); PvA 34, 43 (°manasa). -appaduṭṭha good, not corrupt D I.20; III.32; M III.50; S I.13; Pv IV.710. Padubbhati {Padubbhati} [pa+dubbhati] to do wrong, offend, plot against J I.262 (ger. °dubbhitvā). Paduma {Paduma} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. padma, not in RV.] the lotus Nelumbium speciosum. It is usually mentioned in two varieties, viz. ratta° and seta°, i. e. red and white lotus, so at J V.37; SnA 125; as ratta° at VvA 191; PvA 157. The latter seems to be the more prominent variety; but paduma also includes the 3 other colours (blue, yellow, pink?), since it frequently has the designation of pañcavaṇṇa-paduma (the 5 colours however are nowhere specified), e. g. at J I.222; V.337; VI.341; VvA 41. It is further classified as satapatta and sahassapatta-p., viz. lotus with 100 & with 1,000 leaves: VvA 191. Compared with other species at J V.37, where 7 kinds are enumd as uppala (blue, red & white), paduma (red & white), kumuda (white) and kallahāra. See further kamala and kuvalaya. - (1) the lotus or lotus flower M III.93; S I.138, 204; A I.145; II.86 sq.; III.26, 239; Sn 71, 213; J I.51 (daṇḍa° N. of a plant, cp. Sk. daṇḍotphala), 76 (khandha°, latā°, daṇḍaka°, olambaka°); IV.3; VI.564; Dh 458; Nd1 135; Vv 354 (=puṇḍarīka VvA 161); 4412 (nānā-paduma-sañchanna); Pv II.120 (id.); II.122 (id.); Pug 63; Vism 256 (ratta°); DA I.219; KhA 53; SnA 97; Sdhp 359. - (2) N. of a purgatory (°niraya) S I.151-152; Sn 677; p. 126; SnA 475 sq. -acchara (heavenly) lotus-maiden SnA 469. -uttara N. of Buddha SnA 341, 455 etc. kaṇṇikā a peak in the shape of a lotus VvA 181. -kalāpa a bunch of lotuses VvA 191. -gabbha the calyx of a l. ThA 68 (°vaṇṇa). -patta a l. leaf Nd1 135 (=pokkhara); DhA IV.166 (=pokkharapatta). -puñja a l. cluster J III.55. -puppha a lotus flower Nd2 393; SnA 78. -rāga "lotus hued," a ruby VvA 276. -vyūha one of the 3 kinds of fighting, viz. p.°; cakka°, sakaṭa° J II.406= IV.343 (cp. Sk. p.-vyūha-samādhi a kind of concentration, & see J trsln II.275). -sara a lotus pond J I.221; V.337; SnA 141. Padumaka {Padumaka} [fr. paduma] 1. the Paduma purgatory S I.152. - 2. a lotus J II.325. Pāli Text Society 935 Pāli-English Dictionary Padumin {Padumin} (adj.-n.) [cp. Sk. padmin, spotted elephant] having a lotus, belonging to a lotus, lotus-like; N. of (the spotted) elephant Sn 53 (expld at SnA 103 as "padumasadisagattatāya vā Padumakule uppannatāya vā padumī," cp. Nd2 p. 164). - f. paduminī [cp. Sk. padminī lotus plant] 1. a lotus pond oQ pool of lotuses D I.75; II.38; M III.93; S I.138; A III.26. - 2. the lotus plant Nelumbium speciosum J I.128 (°paṇṇa); IV.419 (°patta); SnA 369; KhA 67 (°patta); PvA 189. Padulla {Padulla} [?] in cpd. padulla-gāhin is perhaps misreading; trsl. "clutching at blown straws (of vain opinion)," expld by C. as duṭṭhullagāhin; at id. p. S I.187 we find duṭṭhullabhāṇin "whose speech is never lewd" (see Psalms of Brethren 399, n. 3). Padussati {Padussati} [pa+dussati] to do wrong, offend against (with loc.), make bad, corrupt DA I.211 (see padosa); Sn 108 (v. l. for padissati); aor. padussi J II.125, 401. - pp. paduṭṭha; Caus. padūseti (q. v.). Padūsita {Padusita} [pp. of padūseti] made bad, corrupted, spoilt It 13 (v. l. padussita). Padūseti & Padoseti {Paduseti} {Padoseti} [Caus. of padussati, but the latter probably Denom. fr. padosa2] to defile, pollute, spoil, make bad or corrupt [cp. BSk. pradūṣyati cittaṃ Divy 197, 286] D I.20; M I.129; It 86; DA I.211 (see padosa1); ThA 72 (Ap. V. 40; to be read for paduse, Pot.=padoseyya); J V.273 (manaṃ p., for upahacca). -padusseti read also at A IV.97 for padasseti (dummanku 'yam padusseti dhūm'aggimhi va pāvako). - As padoseti at PvA 212 (cittāni padosetvā) and in stock phrase manaṃ padosaye (Pot.) in sense of "to set upon anger" (cp. padosa2) S I.149 ("sets his heart at enmity")=A II.3; V.171, 174=Sn 659 (=manaṃ padoseyya SnA 477)= Nett 132; S IV.70; SnA 11 (mano padoseyya). - pp. padūsita (q. v.). Padesa {Padesa} [fr. pa+diś, cp. late Sk. pradeśa] indication, location, range, district; region, spot, place S II.227, 254; V.201; A II.167 (cattāro mahā°); Dh 127 (jagati°), 303; J II.3, 158 (Himavanta°); III.25 (id.), 191 (jāti-gottakula°); SnA 355; PvA 29, 33 (hadaya°), 36 (so read for padase), 43, 47; Sdhp 252. -kārin effecting a limited extent S V.201. -ðāṇa knowledge within a certain range, limited knowledge S V.457. -bodhisatta a limited Bodhisatta Kvu 283 (cp. Kvu trsln 1393, 1662). -rajja principality over a district, local government It 15; ThA 26 (Ap. v. 10). rājā a local or sub-king Vism 301 (cakkavatti+). -lakkhaṇa regional or limited characteristics Kvu 283. -vassin raining or shedding rain only locally or over a (limited) district It 64-66. Padesika {Padesika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. padesa] belonging to a place of indication, indicating, regional, reaching the index of, only with numerals in reference to age (usually soḷasavassa° at the time of 16 years) J I.259 (id.) 262 (id.) II.277 (id.). - See also uddesika in same application. Padosa1 {Padosa} [pa+dosa1, Sk. pradoṣa] defect, fault, blemish, badness, corruption, sin D I.71 (=padussati paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetī ti padoso DA I.211); M III.3; S IV.322 (vyāpāda°); A I.8 (ceto°); III.92 (vyāpāda); It 12; J V.99; Pug 59, 68; Dhs 1060. - Note. At ThA 72 we find reading "apace paduse (padose?) pi ca" as uncertain conjecture for v. l. BB "amacce manase pi ca." Padosa2 {Padosa} [pa+dosa2, Sk. pradveṣa, see remarks to dosa2] anger, hatred, ill-will; always as mano° "anger in mind" M I.377; Sn 328 (=khāṇu-kaṇṭak'ādimhi p. SnA 334), 702; J IV.29; Miln 130; Vism 304; SnA 477. Pāli Text Society 936 Pāli-English Dictionary Padosika {Padosika} (adj.) [fr. padosa1] sinful, spoiling or spoilt, full of fault or corruption, only in 2 phrases, viz. khiḍḍā° "debauched by pleasure" D I.19; and mano° "debauched in mind" D I.20, 21. Padosin {Padosin} (adj.) [fr. padosa1] abusing, damaging, spoiling, injuring S I.13 (appaduttha°); Pv IV.710. Padoseti {Padoseti} see padūseti. Paddha1 {Paddha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. prādhva (?) in diff. meaning "being on a journey," but rather prahva] 1. expert in (loc.) J VI.476 (v. l. patha=paṭṭha; C. cheko paṭibalo). - 2. subject to, serving, attending J IV.35 (p. carāmi, so read for baḍḍha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.; C. padacārikā). Paddha2 {Paddha} (adj.) [cp. Sk. prārdha] half (?) J III.95 (probably =paddha1, but C. explns as aḍḍha upaḍḍha). Paddhagu {Paddhagu} (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. prādhvaga] 1. going, walking J III.95 (T. na p'addhaguṃ, but C. reads paddhaguṃ). - 2. humble, ready to serve, servant, attendant, slave S I.104 (so read for paccagu); Sn 1095 (T. for paṭṭhagu, q. v. - Nd2 reads paṭṭhagu but SnA 597 paddhagu and explns by paddhacara paricārika); J VI.380 (hadayassa); Th 1, 632. Paddhacara {Paddhacara} (adj.-n.) [paddha1+cara, cp. Sk. prādhva and prahva humble] ready to serve, subject to, ministering; a servant S I.144 (T. baddhacara, v. l. paṭṭha°; trsl. "pupil"); J IV.35 (read paddhacarā 'smi tuyhaṃ for T. baddha carāmi t., as pointed out by Kern, Toev. s. v. baddha. The Cy. misunderstood the wrong text reading and expld as "tuyhaṃ baddha carāmi," but adds "veyyāvaccakārikā padacārikā"); V.327 (as baddhaðcara; C. veyyāvaccakara); VI.268 (°ā female servant=C. pāda-paricārikā); Nd1 464 (+paricārika); SnA 597 (+paricāraka, for paddhagū). Padma {Padma} see paduma. Padmaka {Padmaka} (m. & nt.) [Sk. padmaka] N. of a tree, Costus speciosus or arabicus J V.405, 420; VI.497 (reading uncertain), 537. Padvāra {Padvara} (nt.) [pa+dvāra] a place before a door or gate J V.433; VI.327. -gāma suburb Dāvs V. 3. Padhaṃsa {Padhamsa} see appadhaṃsa. Padhaṃsati [pa+dhaṃsati] to fall from (abl.), to be deprived of Vin II.205 (yogakkhemā p.; so read for paddh°). - Caus. padhaṃseti to destroy, assault, violate, offend J IV.494. (=jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpeti); PvA 117. - grd. padhaṃsiya in cpds. su° & dup° easily (or with difficulty) overwhelmed or assaulted Vin II.256= S II.264. Also neg. appadhaṃsiya (& °ka) (q. v.). - pp. padhaṃsita (q. v.). {Padhamsati} Padhansita {Padhansita} [pp. of padhaṃseti] offended, assaulted J II.422. See also app°. Pāli Text Society Padhāna 937 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [fr. pa+dhā, cp. padahati] exertion, energetic effort, striving, concentration of mind D III.30, 77, 104, 108, 214, 238; M II.174, 218; S I.47; II.268; IV.360; V.244 sq.; A III.65-67 (5 samayā and 5 asamayā for padhāna), 249; IV.355; V.17 sq.; Sn 424, 428; It 30; Dh 141; J I.90; Nd2 394 (=viriya); Vbh 218 (citta-samādhi p° etc.); Nett 16; DA I.104; DhA I.85 (mahā-padhānaṃ padahitvā); ThA 174; PvA 134. Padhāna is fourfold, viz. saṃvara°, pahāna°, bhāvana°, anurakkhaṇā° or exertion consisting in the restraint of one's senses, the abandonment of sinful thoughts, practice of meditation & guarding one's character. These 4 are mentioned at D III.225; A II.16; Ps I.84; II.14 sq., 56, 86, 166, 174; Ud 34; Nd1 45, 340; Sdhp 594. - Very frequently termed sammappadhāna [cp. BSk. samyak-pradhāna MVastu III.120; but also samyakprahāṇa, e. g. Divy 208] or "right exertion," thus at Vin I.22; S I.105; III.96 (the four); A II.15 (id.); III.12; IV.125; Nd1 14; Ps I.21, 85, 90, 161; SnA 124; PvA 98. - As padahana at Ps I.17, 21, 181. {Padhana} Padhānavant {Padhanavant} (adj.) [fr. padhāna] gifted with energy, full of strength (of meditation etc.), rightly concentrated S I.188, 197; Sn 70 (cp. Nd2 394), 531. Padhānika {Padhanika} (adj.) [fr. padhāna] making efforts, exerting oneself in meditation, practising "padhāna" DA I.251. Padhāniya {Padhaniya} (adj.) [fr. padhāna] belonging to or connected with exertion, worthy of being pursued in cpd. °anga (nt.) a quality to be striven after, of which there are 5, expressed in the attributes of one who attains them as saddho, appābādho, asaṭho, āraddha-viriyo, paððavā D III.237=M II.95, 128=A III.65; referred to at Miln trsln I.188. Besides these there is the set called pārisuddhi-padhāniy'angāni and consisting either of 4 qualities (sīla°, citta°, diṭṭhi°, vimutti°) A II.194, or of 9 (the four+kankhā-vitaraṇa°, maggāmagga-ðāṇa° paṭipadāðāṇa-dassana°, ðāṇa-dassana° paððā°) D III.288; Ps I.28. Padhārita {Padharita} ("born in mind") read patthārita at Th 1, 842 (see pattharati). - padhārehi (v. l. F.) at Sn 1149 read dhārehi. - padhārita in meaning of "considered, understood" in cpd. su° at S III.6; V.278. Padhāvati {Padhavati} [pa+dhāvati] to run out or forth Pv III.17 (ger. °itvā=upadhāvitvā PvA 173). Padhāvin {Padhavin} (adj.) [fr. padhāvati] rushing or running out or forth M II.98. Padhūpāti {Padhupati} (=padhūpāyati) [pa+dhūpāyati] to blow forth smoke or flames Vin I.25 (aor. padhūpāsi); IV.109 (id.); Vism 400 (id.), (so read for padhūmāsi T., v. l. SS padhūpāyi & padhūmāyi). - pp. padhūpita (q. v.). Padhūpita {Padhupita} [pa+dhūpita, latter only in meaning "incensed," cp. dhūpa etc.] fumigated, reeking, smoked out S I.133 (trsld "racked [wrapt] in flames"; C. santāpita); VvA 237 (so read with v. l. SS. for T. pavūsita; meaning: scented, filled with scent). Padhota {Padhota} (adj.) [pa+dhota] cleansed, in cpd. sup° well cleansed D II.324. Pana {Pana} (indecl.) [doublet of Sk. puna(ḥ) wiṭh diff. meaning (see puna), cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34] adversative & interrogative particle, sometimes (originally, cp. puna "again, further") merely Pāli Text Society 938 Pāli-English Dictionary connecting & continuing the story. - (1) (adversative) but, on the contrary J I.222; II.159; VvA 79 (correl. with tāva). ca pana "but" J I.152; atha ca pana "and yet" D I.139; J I.279; na kho pana "certainly not" J I.151; vā pana "or else" Vin I.83; Dh 42; Sn 376, 829. - (2) (in questions) then, now J II.4 (kiṃ p.), 159 (kahaṃ p.); VvA 21 (kena p.); PvA 27 (katamaṃ p.). - (3) (conclusive or copulative) and, and now, further, moreover D I.139 (siyā kho p. be it now that . . .); Sn 23, 393, 396, 670; J I.278; PvA 3. Panaccati {Panaccati} [pa+naccati] to dance (forth), to dance ThA 257 (ppr. panaccanta). - pp. panaccita (q. v.). Panaccita {Panaccita} [pp. of panaccati] dancing, made to dance Th 2, 390. Panasa {Panasa} [cp. late Sk. panasa, Lat. penus stores, Lith. p&etilde;nas fodder, perhaps Goth. fenea] the Jack or bread-fruit tree (Artocarpus integrifolia) and its fruit J I.450; II.160; V.205, 465; Vv 4413; KhA 49, 50, 58 (°phala, where Vism 258 reads panasa-taca); SnA 475; VvA 147. Panassati {Panassati} [pa+nassati, cp. also BSk praṇāśa Divy 626] to be lost, to disappear, to go to ruin, to cease to be M I.177; S II.272 (read panassissati with BB); J V.401; VI.239; Th 1, 143. Panāda {Panada} [pa+nāda] shouting out, shrieks of joy J VI.282. Panādeti {Panadeti} [Caus. of pa+nad] to shout out, to utter a sound Th 1, 310. Panāḷikā {Panalika} (f.) [fr. panāḷī] a pipe, tube, channel, water course DA I.244. Panāḷī {Panali} (f.) [pa+nāḷī] a tube, pipe A IV.171 (udapāna°). Panigghosa {Panigghosa} in cpd. appanigghosa is wrongly registered as such in A Index (for A IV.88); it is to be separated appa + nigghosa (see nigghosa). Panudati {Panudati} [pa+nudati] to dispel, repel, remove, push away S I, 167 sq., 173; Dh 383; Sn 81, 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyyaQpajaheyya etc. Nd1 385); J VI.491 (1. pl. panudāmase). - ger. panuditvā SnA 591, & panujja Sn 359, 535, 1055 (expld at Nd2 395 as imper. pres.=pajaha, cp. SnA 591=panudehi); J III.14; V.198 (=pātetvā C.). - Fut. panudahissati Th 1, 27, 233. - Pass. panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase "api panujjamānena pi" even if repulsed M I.108, cp. A IV.32 & Nett 164 (v. l. to be substituted for T. pamajjamānena). - pp. panunna & panudita (q. v.). Panudita {Panudita} [pp. of panudati] dispelled, driven out Sn 483 (panūdita metri causa, v. l. panudita). See also panunna. Panunna, (Paṇunna & Panuṇṇa) {Panunna} [pp. of panudati] (med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled, driven away, sent A II.29; V.31; Sn 469 (°kodha); J VI.247, 285; Kvu 597 (ito p., trsld "ending here"). -paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5th of the 10 noble states, ariyavāsā: see Vin. Texts I.141) D III.269, 270; A II.41; V.29 sq. Pāli Text Society Panūdana 939 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [fr. panudati] removal, dispelling, rejection Sn 252 (sabbadukkhāpanūdana SnA 293 should be read as sabba-dukkha-apanūdana, as at Vin II.148=J I.94), 1106 (=pahānaṃ etc. Nd2 396). {Panudana} Panta {Panta} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. prānta edge, margin, border, pra+anta; also BSk. prānta in meaning of Pali, e. g. MVastu III.200; Divy 312 (prānta-śayan-āsana-sevin)] distant, remote, solitary, secluded; only in phrase pantaṃ senāsanaṃ (sayanāsanaṃ) or pantāni senāsanāni "solitary bed & chair" M I.17, 30; A I.60; II.137; III.103; V.10, 202; Sn 72 (cp. Nd2 93), 338, 960 (°amhi sayanāsane), 969 (sayanamhi pante); Dh 185 (=vivitta DhA III.238); Ud 43 (so read for patthað); J III.524 (°amhi sayanāsane); Vism 73 (panta-senāsane rata); SnA 263 (v. l. pattha). sena (adj.) one who has his resting place faQ away from men, Ep. of the Buddha M I.386. Panti {Panti} (f.) [Ved. pankti set or row of five, group in general] a row, range, line Vism 392 (tisso sopāna-pantiyo); DhA III.219 (uddhana°); ThA 72 (satta pantiyo); VvA 198 (amba°). Pantha {Pantha} [base panthan°, Ved. panthāḥ, with bases path° panth° and pathi. Same as patha (q. v.). For etym. cp. Gr. po/ntos sea(-path), pa/tos path, Av. pantā°, also Goth. finpan=E. find, of Idg *pent to come or go (by)] a road, roadway, path S I.18 (gen. pl. panthānaṃ= kantāramagga C; "jungle road" trsl.); Sn 121 (loc. panthasmiṃ); Nd2 485 B (+patha in expln of magga), Miln 157 (see panthaṃ) -gū a traveller (lit. going by road) S I.212 (v. l. addhagū, as at id. p. Th 2, 55); J III.95 (v. l.). -ghāta highway robbery J I.253; IV.184. -duhana waylaying, robbery; m. a robber D I.135 (see DA I.296); J II.281, 388; D III.68, and Tikp 280 (°dūhana). dūbhin a highwayman J II.327. -dūsaka a robber Miln 20. -devatā a way spirit, a spirit presiding over a road, road-goddess J VI.527. -makkaṭaka a (road) spider Miln 364, 407. sakuṇa a "road-bird," i. e. a bird offered (as a sacrifice) to the goddess presiding over the roads, propitiation; it is here to be understood as a human sacrifice J VI.527 (vv. ll. pattha° & bandha°). Panthāna {Panthana} (for saṇṭhāna) at SnA 20: see saṇṭhāna 3. Panthika {Panthika} [fr. pantha, formation panthika: panthan= addhika: addhan] a traveller Miln 20. Panna {Panna} [pp. of pajjati but not satisfactorily expld as such, for pajjati & panna never occur by themselves, but only in cpds. like āpajjati, āpanna, upp°, upa°, sam°, etc. Besides, the word is only given in lexic. literature as pp. of pajjati, although a tendency prevails to regard it as pp. of patati. The meaning points more to the latter, but in form it cannot belong to pat. A more satisfactory expln (in meaning and form) is to regard panna as pp. of pa+nam, with der. fr. short base. Thus panna would stand for panata (paṇata), as unna for unnata, ninna for ninnata, the double nn to be accounted for on analogy. The meaning would thus be "bent down, laid down," as panna-ga= going bent, panna-dhaja=flag bent or laid down, etc. Perhaps patta of patta-kkhandha should belong here as panna°] fallen, gone, gone down; also: creeping, only in foll. cpds.: -ga a snake Th 1, 429 (°inda chief of snake-demons); J V.166; Miln 23. -gandha with gone down (i. e. deteriorated) smell, ill-smelling, or having lost its smell J V.198 (=thokaṃ duggandha C.). -dhaja one whose flag gone or is lost, i. e. whose fight is over (Ep. of the Buddha), cp. BSk. prapātito māna-dhvajaḥ Lal. V. 448 (with derivation from pat instead of pad, cp. papātana) M I.139 sq., 386; A III.84 sq.; in eulogy on the Buddha (see exegesis to mahesi Nd1 343; Nd2 503) reference is made to mānadhaja (°papātanaṃ) which is Pāli Text Society 940 Pāli-English Dictionary opposed to dhamma-dhaja (-ussapana); thus we should explain as "one who has put down the flag of pride." -bhāra one who has put down his burden, one whose load has gone, who is delivered or saved M I.139; A III.84; S I.233; Dh 402 (=ohitakhandha-bhāra DhA IV.168); Sn 626, 914 (cp Nd1 334); Th 1, 1021. -bhūmi state of one who has fallen DA I.103 (opp. to jina-bhūmi, one of the 8 purisa-bhūmiyo. - cp. D I.54 & Dial. I.722). -loma one whose hairs have fallen or are put down (flat, i. e. do not stand erect in consequence of excitement), subdued, pacified (opp. haṭṭha loma) Vin II.184 (cp. Vin II.5 & Bdhgh on p. 309 lomaṃ pāteti, Bdhgh pādeti; also Vin. Texts II.339); III.266; M I.450; J I.377. Another form is palloma (q. v. & cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 206). See also remarks on parada-vutta. Pannaka {Pannaka} (adj.) [fr. panna] silent (?) DA I.163. Pannarasa (adj. num.) [see pañcadasa & paṇṇarasa under pañca] fifteen (and fifteenth), usually referring to the 15th day of the lunar month, i. e. the full-moon day Sn 153 (pannaraso uposatho); pannarase on the 15th day S I.191=Th 1, 1234; M III.20; Sn 502, 1016; f. loc. pannarasāya id. S I.233. See also paṇṇarasa. {Pannarasa} Pannarasama {Pannarasama} (num. ord.) [fr. pannarasa] the 15th SnA 366 (gāthā). Pannarasika {Pannarasika} (adj.) [fr. pannarasa] belonging to the 15th day (of the lunar month) Vin IV.315. Papa {Papa} (nt.) [see pibati, pānīya etc. of pā] water J I.109 (āpaṃ papaṃ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etym. construction. See also papā. Papaccati {Papaccati} [Pass. of pa+pacati] to be cooked, to become ripe PvA 55 (°itvā). Papañca {Papanca} [in its P. meaning uncertain whether identical with Sk. prapañca (pra+pañc to spread out; meaning "expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness"; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etym. & meaning of Lat. im-ped-iment-um, connected with pada, thus perhaps originally "pa-pad-ya," i. e. what is in front of (i. e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle)] 1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay, hindrance, delay DhA I.18; II.91 (kathā°). °ṃ karoti to delay, to tarry J IV.145; °ṃ akatvā without delay J I.260; VI.392. ati° too great a delay J I.64; II.92. - 2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress M I.65; S I.100; IV.52, 71; A II.161 sq.; III.393 sq.; Sn 530 (=taṇhā-diṭṭhi-mānabheda-p. SnA 431; and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis); Ud 77 (as f. papaðcā); Th 1, 519, 902, 989 (cp. Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann trsls "Sonderheit," see Lieder p. 210, 211 & Mittlere Sammlung I.119 in trsl. of M I.65 nippapañca); Dh 195, 254 (°ābhiratā pajā, nippapaðcā Tathāgatā; =taṇhādisu p° esu abhiratā DhA III.378); J I.9; Pv IV.134 (=taṇh'-ādi-p. PvA 230); Nett 37, 38; SnA 495 (gihi). - nippapañca (q. v.) without obsession. - 3. diffuseness, copiousness SnA 40. -sankhā sign or characteristic of obsession Sn 874 (cp. SnA 553; =taṇhā° diṭṭhi° and māna° Nd1 280), 916 (=avijjādayo kilesā mūlaṃ SnA 562). -saððā (°sankhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion D II.277 (cp. Dial II.312); M I.109, 112, 271, 383; S IV.71. Papañcita {Papancita} [pp. of papañceti] obsessed, illusioned SnA 495 (a° gihipapañ-cena). - nt. obsession, vain imagination, illusion S IV.203≈Vbh 390. Pāli Text Society 941 Pāli-English Dictionary Papañceti {Papanceti} [Denom. fr. papañca] 1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed M I.112; DhA I.198 (tesaṃ suvaṇṇa-lobhena papaðcentānaṃ). - 2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on SnA 136. - pp. papañcita. Papaṭā {Papata} (papatā) (f.) [fr. papāta? Cp. papaṭikā] a broken-off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity, precipice, pit (?) S II.227 (papatā ti kho lābha-sakkāra-silokass'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. S III.109: sobbho papāto kodh'ûpāyāsass'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ); So 665 (=sobbha SnA 479; gloss papada). See also pappaṭaka. Papaṭikā {Papatika} (f.) [cp. Sk. prapāṭikā (lexic. & gram.) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk. parpaṭa N. of a plant] 1. a splinter, piece, fragment, chip Vin II.193 (read tato pap.°); A IV.70 sq. (of ayophāla); J V.333 (same as Vin passage); Miln 179. 2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts M I.78, 192 sq., 488; A I.152; III.19 sq., 44, 200, 360; IV.99, 336; V.4 sq., 314 sq.; J III.491. Cp. pheggu. Papatati {Papatati} [pa+patati] to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (acc.) Vin II.284; M I.79, 80; S I.48 (visame magge), 187 (=Th 1, 1220 patanti); 100, II.114; V.47; Dh 336; J V.31; Pv I.1012 (nirayaṃ papatiss'ahaṃ, cp. PvA 52; v. l. SS niray'ûpapatiss' āhaṃ). - aor. papatā Vin III.17, cp. II.126; J VI.566. See also patati. Papatana {Papatana} (nt.) [fr. pa+pat] falling down Sn 576=J IV.127 (abl. papatanā papatanato C.). Papada (or Papadā?) {Papada} [pa+pada] tip of the foot. toes; but in diff. meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat) "falling down, abyss, pit" at Sn 665 (gloss for papaṭa; expld at SnA 479 by "mahāniraya"). Papā {Papa} (f.) [Ved. prapā, pa+pā] a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water, a well, cistern D III.185; S I.33=Kvu 345 (=pānīyadāna-sālā SA); S I.100 (read papañ ca vivane); J I.109; DhA III.349=J I.302 (=pānīya-cāṭī C.); Vv 5222 (+udapāna); Pv II.78 (n. pl. papāyo=pānīya-sālā PvA 102); II.925 (+udapāna). Papāta {Papata} [cp. Epic. Sk. prapāta, of pra+pat] 1. falling down, a fall Vin II.284 (chinna- papātaṃ papatanti); S V.47. - 2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock M I.11; S III.109 (sobbho p. kodh'upāyāsass'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ; cp. papaṭā); A III.389 (sobbho p.); J III.5; 530; V.70; VI.306, 309; Vism 116; PvA 174; Sdhp 208, 282, 353. - adj. falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin II.237=A IV.198, 200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.). -taṭa a rocky or steep declivity DhA I.73. Papātin {Papatin} (adj.) [fr. papatati] falling or flying forward, flying up J III.484 (uccā° flying away). Papitāmaha {Papitamaha} [pa+pitāmaha] a paternal great-grandfather Dāvs III.29. Papīyana {Papiyana} (nt.) [fr. pā, ger. pa-pīya] drinkable, to be drunk, drinking J I.109 (udakaṃ papīyana-bhāvena papā ti). Papīliṭa {Papilita} [pa+pīḷita] worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) J II.223. Pāli Text Society 942 Pāli-English Dictionary Paputta {Paputta} [pa+putta, cp. Sk. praputra (BR.: "doubtful") Inscr.] a grandson J VI.477. Papupphaka {Papupphaka} (adj.) [pa+pupphaka] "with flowers in front," flower-tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dh 46 (but expld at DhA I.337 as "p.° sankhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni," i. e. existence in the 3 stages of being). Pappaṭaka {Pappataka} [etym. uncertain] 1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rh. D. in Dial. III.83 "outgrowth") D III.87 (bhūmi °ṃ paribhuñjati); Vism 418 (≈), Nett 227 (Com.) (°ojaṃ khādāpento). -2. a water plant: see paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā2 & Sk. parpaṭa N. of medicinal plant. Pappoṭheti {Pappotheti} [pa+poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti] to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin I.48; II.208, 217; M I.333 (papph°); J II.153 (pakkhe); III.175 (papoṭh°= sañcuṇṇeti C.); Miln 368 (papph°); DA I.7; Vism 283 (pph). Pappoti {Pappoti} [the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sk. prāpnoti] to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain D III.159, 165; Sn 185, 187, 584; Dh 27; DhA I.395. - Pot. 1st pl. pappomu J V.57 (=pāpuṇeyyāma C.). - ger. pappuyya S I.48; Sn 482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (=pāpuṇitvā Nd1 170). For further ref. see pāpuṇāti. Papphāsa {Papphasa} (nt.) [fr. sound-root* phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or phurati>pharati. From same root Gr. fusa/w to blow and Lat. pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula] the lungs D II.293; M I.185, 421; III.90; Sn 195=J I.146; Kh III. (cp. KhA 56); Miln 26. Pabandha {Pabandha} (adj.) (°-) [pa+bandha] continuous Vism 32. Pabala {Pabala} (adj.) [cp. Sk. prabala] very strong, mighty Sdhp 75. Pabāḷha1 {Pabalha} [pp. of pabāhati] pulled out, drawn forth D I.77 (T. reads pavāḷha). See pavāḷha. Pabāḷha2 {Pabalha} (adj.) [pa+bāḷha] strong, sharp (of pain) D II.128; J V.422, Miln 174. Pabāhati {Pabahati} [pa+bṛh to pull, see abbahati] to pull out, draw forth D I.77 (T. reads pavāhati, v. l. pabbāḷhati, evidently fr. pabāḷha); cp. Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa IV.3, 3, 16. - pp. pabāḷha1 (q. v.). Pabujjhati {Pabujjhati} [pa+bujjhati] to wake up (intrs.), awake S I.4, 209; Dh 296 sq.; It 41 (suttā p.); J I.61; II.103; IV.431 (opp. niddāyati); DA I.140. - pp. pabuddha (q. v.). Pabuddha {Pabuddha} [pp. of pabujjhati] awakened S I.143 (sutta° from sleep awakened), J I.50; VvA 65. Pabodhati [pa+bodhati] to awake, also trs. awaken, stir up, give rise to (or: to recognise, realise?); only in one phrase (perhaps corrupt), viz. yo nindaṃ appabodhati S {Pabodhati} Pāli Text Society 943 Pāli-English Dictionary Q7=Dh 143 (=nindaṃ apaharanto bujjhati DhA III.86; trsl. KS 13 "forestalleth blame"). - Caus. pabodheti (1) to enlighten, instruct, give a sign J I.142; III.511. - (2) to set going, arouse J I.298; V.390. - (3) to render oneself conspicuous J V.8. Pabodhana {Pabodhana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. pabodhati] 1. (nt.) awakening waking, arising DhA I.232 (°codana-kamma). - 2. (adj.) arousing (or realising?) Vv 6422 (=kata-pīti-pabodhano VvA 282); awaking Th 1, 893 (samma-tāḷa°). Pabba {Pabba} (nt.) [Ved. parvan] 1. a knot (of a stalk), joint, section Vin IV.35; M I.80; J I.245 (veḷu°); Vism 358 (id.; but nāḷika p. 260); VbhA 63 (id.); Th 1, 243. - angula° finger joint Vin IV.262, M I.187; DA I.285. - pabba-pabbaṃ knot for knot DhsA 11. - 2. the elbow S IV.171. - 3. section, division, part Vism 240 (14 sections of contemplation of the body or kāyagatāsati); VbhA 275, 286. -gaṇṭhi a knot Miln 103. -valli a species of Dūrvā J V.69; -vāta intermittent ague Vin I.205. Pabbaja {Pabbaja} [Sk. balbaja, cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 39. 6] a species of reed. bulrush Vin I.190 (T. reads babbaja); S I.77; II.92; III.137 (v. l. babbaja), 155 (°lāyaka); Th 1, 27; J II.140, 141; V.202; VI.508. For further refs. see babbaja. Pabbajati {Pabbajati} [cp. Sk. pravrajati, pra+vraj] to go forth, to leave home and wander about as a mendicant, to give up the world, to take up the ascetic life (as bhikkhu, samaṇa, tapassin, isi etc.). S I.140, 141; Sn 157, 1003; imper. pabbaja DhA I.133. Pot. pabbajeyya J I.56; Pug 57. - Fut. pabbajissati Sn 564; DhA I.133; IV.55. Aor. pabbaji M III.33; S I.196=Th 1, 1255; Sn 405; Vv 826; PvA 76; ger. pabbajitvā J I.303; PvA 21 and °vāna Sn 407. - (agārasmā) anagāriyaṃ pabbajati to go forth into the homeless state Vin III.12; M III.33; S I.196; A V.204; Pv II.1316. sāsane p. to become an ascetic in (Buddhas) religion, to embrace the religion (& practice) of the Buddha J I.56; PvA 12. pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to go into the holy life (of an ascetic friar, wanderer etc.): see pabbajjā. - Caus. pabbājeti (q. v.). - pp. pabbajita. Pabbajana {Pabbajana} (nt.) [fr. pabbajati] going into an ascetic life J III.393 (a°). Pabbajita {Pabbajita} [pp. of pabbajati, cp. BSk. pravrājita Divy 236] one who has gone out from home, one who has given up worldly life & undertaken the life of a bhikkhu recluse or ascetic, (one) ordained (as a Buddhist friar), gone forth (into the holy life or pabbajjā) Vin III.40 (vuḍḍha-pabbajito bhikkhu); IV.159; D I.131 (agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p.), 157; III.31 sq., 147 sq.; M I.200, 267, 345, 459; II.66, 181; III.261; S I.119 (dhammavinaye p.); IV.260, 330; V.118 sq., 421; A I.69, 107, 147, 168; II.78, 143; III.33, 78 (vuḍḍha°), 244, 403 (acira°); IV.21 (cira°); V.82, 348 sq.; Sn 43 (see Nd2 397), 274, 385, 423; Dh 74, 174, 388; J I.56; Pv II.81 (=samaṇa PvA 106); II.111 (bhikkhu=kāmādimalānaṃ pabbajitattā paramatthato pabbajito PvA 146); II.1317 (=pabbajjaṃ upagata PvA 167); Miln 11; DA I.270; DhA I.133; PvA 5, 55. Pabbajjā (f.) [fr. pa+vraj, cp. pabbajati, Epic & BSk. pravrajyā] leaving the world, adopting the ascetic life; state of being a Buddhist friar, taking the (yellow) robe, ordination. (1) ordination or admission into the Buddha's Order in particular: Vin III.13; S I.161 etc. sāmanera° ordination of a Novice, described in full at Vin I.82. - pabbajjaṃ yācati to beg admission Vin IV.129; labhati to gain admission to the Order Vin I.12, 17, 32; D I.176; S IV.181. - (2) ascetic or homeless life in general D III.147 sq.; M III.33 (abbhokāso p.); S V.350 (id.; read pabbajjā); A V.204 (id.); S II.128 (read °jjā for °jā); IV.260; A I.151, 168; IV.274 sq.; Sn 405, 406, {Pabbajja} Pāli Text Society 944 Pāli-English Dictionary 567; It 75 (pabbajjāya ceteti); Miln 19 (dhamma-cariya-samacariy'atthā p.); DhA I.6; SnA 49, 327, 423; ThA 251. - pabbajjaṃ upagata gone into the homeless state PvA 167 (for pabbajita); agārasmā anagāriyaṃ p. the going forth from home into the homeless state Vin II.253; M II.56; pabbajjaṃ pabbajati to undertake or go into the ascetic life, in foll. varieties: isi° of a Saint or Sage J I.298, 303; DhA IV.55; PvA 162 (of the Buddha); tāpasa° of a Hermit J III.119; DA I.270 (described in detail); DhA IV.29; PvA 21; samaṇa° of a Wanderer PvA 76. - Note. The ceremony of admission to the priesthood is called pabbajjā (or pabbajana), if viewed as the act of the candidate of orders, and pabbājana (q. v.), if viewed as the act of the priest conferring orders; the latter term however does not occur in this meaning in the Canon. Pabbata {Pabbata} [Vedic parvata, fr. parvan, orig. knotty, rugged, massive] (1) a mountain (range), hill, rock S I.101, 102, 127, 137; II.32, 185, 190; A I.243; II.140; IV.102 (dhūpāyati); Sn 413, 417, 543, 958, 1014; Nd1 466; Dh 8, 127 (°ānaṃ vivaro)=PvA 104; Dh 188 (n. pl. °āni), 304; DA I.209; Miln 346 (dhamma°); PvA 221 (angāra°) Sdhp 352, 545, 574. - The 7 mountains round Veḷuvana are enumd at J V.38. - Names of some (real or fictitious) mountains, as found in the Jātaka literature: Cakkavāḷa J VI.282; Caṇḍoraṇa J IV.90; Canda J IV.283; V.38, 162; Daṇḍakahirañña J II.33; Daddara J II.8; III.16; Nemindhara J VI.125; Neru J III.247; V.425; Paṇḍava Sn 417; SnA 382 sq.; Mahāneru J IV.462; Mahindhara Vv 3210 (cp. VvA 136); Meru J I.25; IV.498; Yugandhara PvA 137; Rajata J I.50; Vipula J VI.518; Sineru S II.139; J I.48 & passim; Suvaṇṇa J I.50; VI.514 (°giritāla). - (2) [cp. Sk. pārvata mountainous] a mountaineer Miln 191. -utu the time (aspect) of the mountain (in prognostications as to horoscope) DhA I.165 (megha-utu, p.utu, aruṇa-utu). -kaccha a mountain meadow (opp. nadī-kaccḥa) SnA 33. -kandara a m. cave S II.32; V.396, 457 sq.; A V.114 sq.; -kūṭa m. peak Vin II.193; J I.73. -gahaṇa m. thicket or jungle PvA 5. -ṭṭha standing on a m. Dh 28. -pāda the foot of a m. J III.51; DhA IV.187; PvA 10. muddhā mountain top Vin I.5. -raṭṭha m.-kingdom SnA 26. -rājā "king of the mountain," Ep. of Himavā S I.116; II.137 sq., 276; III.149; V.47, 63, 148; A I.152; III.240; IV.102; PvA 143. sankhepa top of a m. D I.84 (=p. -matthaka DA I.226). -sānu m.-glen Vv 3210 (cp. VvA 136). sikhara mountain-crest J V.421. Pabbataka {Pabbataka} [fr. pabbata] a mountain J I.303. Pabbateyya {Pabbateyya} (adj.) [fr. pabbata] belonging to mountains, mountain-born (of a river) A III.64 (nadī p°ā sīghasotā hārahārinī); IV.137 (id.); Vism 231 (id.), 285 (nadī). Pabbaniya {Pabbaniya} (adj.) [fr. pabba] forming a division or section, consisting of, belonging to KhA 114 (khaya°) (?). Pabbājana {Pabbajana} (nt.) [fr. pa+Caus. of vraj, see pabbajati & pabbājeti] keeping out or away, removing, banishment, exiling D I.135; III.93; Miln 357; Dh I.296 (=nīharaṇa); DhA IV.145. Pabbājaniya {Pabbajaniya} (adj.) [fr. pabbājana] belonging to banishment, deserving to be exiled Miln 186; also in cpd. °kamma excommunication, one of the 5 ecclesiastical acts enumd at Vin I.49, 143. See also A I.79; DhA II.109. Pabbājita {Pabbajita} [pp. of pabbājeti] taken into the order, made a bhikkhu M II.62. Pabbājeti {Pabbajeti} [Caus. of pabbajati] 1. to make go out or away, drive out, banish, exile D I.92 (raṭṭhasmā out of the kingdom;=nīharati DA I.258); M II.122; Dh 388 (attano malaṃ Pāli Text Society 945 Pāli-English Dictionary pabbājayaṃ, tasmā pabbajito ti vuccati); DhA IV.145 (explns as "attano rāgādimalaṃ pabbājento vinodento") J I.262 (raṭṭhā); III.168 (id.); VI.350, 351; DhA II.41; PvA 54 (core). - 2. to make go forth (into the homeless state), to make somebody take up the life of an ascetic or a bhikkhu, to take into the (Buddha's) order, to ordain Vin I.82 (description of ordination of a novice), 97; III.12; IV.129; DhA I.19, 133. - pp. pabbājita (q. v.). Pabbedha {Pabbedha} [pa+vedha of vyadh, cp. BSk. pravedha in same phrase at Divy 56, viz. ṣoḍaśa-pravedho] piercing through (measuring) an arrow shot Th 1, 164 - J II.334 (soḷasa°=soḷasa-kaṇḍa-pāta-vitthāro C.). - Note. pabbedha owes its bb to analogy with ubbedha. It also corresponds to the latter in meaning: whereas ubbedha refers to the height, pabbedha is applied to the breadth or width. Pabbhamati {Pabbhamati} [pa+bhamati] to roam forth or about J V.106 (=bhamati C.). Pabbhāra {Pabbhara} [cp. BSk. prāg-bhāra Divy 80 etc.] 1. (m.) a decline, incline, slope J I.348; adj. (usually -°) bending, inclining, sloping; fig. tending or leading to (cp. E. "bearing on") M I.493 (samudda°); S I.110 (id.); V.38, 216, 219; A IV.198 (anupubba°), 224 (viveka°); Miln 38 (samādhi°). Very frequent in combn with similar expressions, e. g. ninna, poṇa (cp. PvA ninnapoṇa-pabbhāraṃ cittaṃ): see further ref. under ninna; with adhimutta & garuka at Vism 117 (Nibbāna°). - apabbhara (sic.) not slanting or sloping J V.405 (=samatittha C.). - 2. (m. & nt.) a cave in a mountain Miln 151; J V.440; DhA II.59 (nt.), 98. -ṭṭhāna a slope J I.348; DhsA 261. -dasaka the decade (period) of decline (in life), which in the enum° of the 10 decades (vassadasā) at J IV.397 is given as the seventh. Pabrūṭi {Pabruti} [pa+brūti] to speak out, proclaim, declare (publicly) Sn 131, 649, 870, 952 and passim (cp. Nd1 211, 273; Nd2 398, 465). Pabha {Pabha} is adj. form (-°) of pabhā (q. v.). Pabhaṃsana {Pabhamsana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. pa+bhraṃś, cp. nāva-prabhraṃśana Npl. A.V.] causing to fall or disappear, depriving, taking away, theft, in maṇi° jewel-theft J VI.383. (Rh. D. "polishing"?) Kern in Toev. s. v. takes pabhaṃsana as a der. fr. pa+bhrās to shine, i. e. making bright, polishing (as Rh. D.). Pabhagga {Pabhagga} [pp. of pabhañjati, cp. Sk prabhagna] broken up, destroyed, defeated Vin III.108. Pabhankara {Pabhankara} [pabhaṃ, acc. of pabhā,+kara] one who makes light, one who lights up, light-bringer (often as Ep. of the Buddha) S I.51 (quoted at VvA 116), 210; A II.51 sq.; It 80; J III.128; Sn 991, 1136 (=ālokakara obhāsakara etc. Nd2 399); Vv 214 (=ðāṇ'obhāsa-kara VvA 106); 3425 (=lokassa ðāṇ'āloka-kara VvA 115). Pabhanga {Pabhanga} [fr. pa+bhañj] destruction, breaking up, brittleness Ps II.238 (calato pabhangato addhuvato); but id. p. at Nd2 214II and Miln 418 read "calato pabhanguto addhuvato." Pāli Text Society 946 Pāli-English Dictionary Pabhangu & Pabhanguṇa {Pabhangu} {Pabhanguna} & °gura(adj.) [fr. pa+bhanj, cp. BSk. prabhanguṇatā destruction, perishableness MVastu III.338] brittle, easily destroyed, perishable, frail. (a) pabhangu: S III.32; V.92; A I.254, 257 sq.; III.16; DhsA 380; Sdhp 51, 553. - (b) °guṇa: It 37; J I.393 (ittarā addhuvā pabhanguno calitā; reading may be pabhanguṇā); Dh 139 (as n.;=pabhangubhāva, pūtibhāva, DhA III.71), 148 (=pūtikāya ibid. 111). - (c) °gura Dh 148 (v. l.); ThA 95; Sdhp 562, 605. - See also pabhanga. Pabhañjati {Pabhanjati} [pa+bhañj] to break up, destroy J IV.494. - pp. pabhagga (q. v.). Pabhava {Pabhava} (m. & nt.) [fr. pa+bhu, cp. Ved. prabhava] production, origin, source, cause M I.67; S I.181; II.12; It 37 (āhāra-netti°); Sn 728, 1050; Nd2 under mūla (with syn. of sambhava & samuṭṭhāna etc.); J III.402= VI.518. Pabhavati {Pabhavati} see pahoti. Pabhassati {Pabhassati} [pa+bhraṃś; cp. Sk. prabhraśyate] to fall down or off, drop, disappear Vin II.135 (pret. pabhassittha); IV.159 (id.). - Cp. pabhaṃsana. Pabhassara {Pabhassara} (adj.) [fr. bhās] shining, very bright, resplendent S I.145; V.92, 283; A I.10, 254, 257 sq., III.16; Sn 48 (=parisuddha pariyodāta Nd2 402); J V.202, 170; Vv 171 (rucira+); Pv III.31 (rucira+); Vism 223; 377; DhA I.28; VvA 12 (pakati° bright by nature). Pabhā {Pabha} (f.) [fr. pa+bhā, cp. Epic Sk. prabhā] light, radiance, shine A II.139; V.22; It 19, 20; PvA 56 (sarīra°), 137 (id.), 71, 176; Sdhp 250. - canda-ppabhā moonshine It 20; DhsA 14. - adj. pabha (-°), radiating, lucid, in cpd. sayam° self-lucid or self-radiant D I.17 (=attano attano va tesaṃ pabhā ti DA I.110); A V.60; Sn 404. Pabhāṇin at Kern, Toev. s. v. is wrongly given with quot. J V.421 (in meaning "speaking") where it should be read manāpa-bhāṇin, and not manā-p°. {Pabhanin} Pabhāta {Pabhata} [pp. of pabhāti] become clear or light, shining, dawning Sn 178 (sup°); esp. in phrase pabhātāya rattiyā when night had become light, i.e. given way to dawn, at daybreak J I.81, 500. - (nt.) daybreak, morning S I.211; SnA 519 (pabhāte); atipabhāte in broad daylight J I.436. Pabhāti {Pabhati} [pa+bhā] to shine forth, to become light, gleam, glitter J V.199 (said of a river; =pavattati C.). - pp. pabhāta. Pabhāva {Pabhava} [fr. pa+bhū] might, power, strength, majesty, dignity J V.36; VI.449. Pabhāvita {Pabhavita} [pp. of pabhāveti] increased, furthered, promoted Th 1, 767 (bhava-netti°); expld by samuṭṭhita C. Pabhāveti {Pabhaveti} [Caus. of pabhavati] to increase, augment, foster Pv II.964=DhA III.220 (dakkhiṇeyyaṃ). - pp. pabhāvita. Pāli Text Society 947 Pāli-English Dictionary Pabhāsa {Pabhasa} [fr. pa+bhās] shining, splendour, beauty S I.67; sap° with beauty S V.263; Miln 223; ap° without beauty Miln 299. Pabhāsati {Pabhasati} [pa+bhaṣ] to tell, declare, talk Th 1, 582. Pabhāseti {Pabhaseti} [Caus. of pa+bhās] to illumine, pervade with light, enlighten Dh 172 (=obhāseti DhA III.169), 382 (=obhāseti ekālokaṃ karoti DhA IV.137); J I.87; Pv I.109 (so read for ca bh°); II.112; Ps I.174; Miln 336; PvA 10 (=obhāseti). Pabhindati [pa+bhindati] to split asunder (trs.), break, destroy Sn 973 (=bhindati sambhindati Nd1 503); ger. pabhijja S I.193=Th 1, 1242. - Pass. pabhijjati to be broken, to burst (open), to split asunder (intrs.), to open S I.150 (aor. pabhijjiṃsu); Sn p. 125 (id.); Vv 413 (break forth=pabhedaṃ gacchanti VvA 183; gloss pavajjare for pabhijjare); SnA 475 (=bhijjati). Also "to open, to be developed" (like a flower) Miln 93 (buddhi p.). - pp. pabhinna. {Pabhindati} Pabhinna {Pabhinna} [pp. of pabhindati] 1. to burst open, broken (like a flower or fruit), flowing with juice; usually appld to an elephant in rut, mad, furious M I.236 (hatthi°); Dh 326 (hatthi°=mattahatthi DhA IV.24)= Th 1, 77; J IV.494; VI.488; Pv I.112 (read chinnapabhinnagatta); Miln 261, 312 (hatthināgaṃ tidhāpabhinnaṃ); DA I.37 (°madaṃ caṇḍa-hatthiṃ). - 2. developed, growing Miln 90 (°buddhi). Pabhuti {Pabhuti} (adj.) (-°) [Vedic prabhṛti] beginning, in meaning of: since, after, subsequently; tato p. from that time, henceforth VvA 158. Pabhutika {Pabhutika} (adj.) [fr. pabhuti] dating from, derived or coming from (abl.) D I.94 (kuto p.). Pabhu {Pabhu} [fr. pa+bhū] iord, master, ruler, owner DA I.250. Pabheda {Pabheda} [fr. pa+bhid, cp. pabhindati] breaking or splitting up, breaking, opening VvA 183; akkhara° breaking up of letters, word-analysis, phonology D I.88 (=sikkhā ca nirutti ca DA I.247=SnA 447). - adj. (-°) breaking up into, i. e. consisting of, comprising, of various kinds J I.84; PvA 8 (paṭisandhi-ādi°), 130 (saviððāṇak'āviððāṇaka°). Pabhedana {Pabhedana} (nt.) [cp. pabheda] breaking up, destruction Sn 1105 (avijjāya°=bhedanaṃ pahānaṃ etc. Nd2 403). Pabhoti {Pabhoti} etc. see pahoti. Pamajjati1 {Pamajjati} [pa+mad] 1. to become intoxicated S I.73. - 2. to be careless, slothful, negligent; to neglect, waste one's time S IV.125, 133; Sn 676, 925, 933; cp. Nd1 376 & Nd2 70; Dh 168, 172, 259; J III.264 (with acc.); IV.396 (with gen.); Pv I.1112 (dāne na p.); IV.13 (jāgaratha mā p.); Sdhp 16, 620. - aor. 2 pl. pamādattha M I.46; A III.87; IV.139. Other noteworthy forms are aor. or precative (mā) pamādo S IV.263; Th 1, 119; Dh 371 (see Geiger P.Gr. § 161 b), and cond. or aor. pamādassaṃ M III.179; A I.139 (see Geiger l. c. 170 & Trenckner Notes 752). appamajjanto (ppr.) diligent, eager, zealous PvA 7. - pp. pamatta (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 948 Pāli-English Dictionary Pamajjati2 {Pamajjati} [pa+mṛj] 1. to wipe off, rub off, sweep, scour Vin I.47; II.209 (bhūmi° itabbā); M I.383. - 2. to rub along, stroke, grope, feel along (with one's hands) Vin II.209 (cīvara-rajjuṃ °itvā; cp. Vin. Texts III.279). - Note. pamajjamāna in phrase gale pi p° ānena at Nett 164 is after the example of similar passages M I.108 and A IV.32 and as indicated by v. l. preferably to be read as "api panujjamānena pi" (see panudati). Pamajjanā {Pamajjana} (f.) & °itatta (nt.) are abstr. formations fr. pa+mad, in the sense of pamāda carelessness etc., & occur as philological synonyms in exegesis of pamāda at Vbh 350=Nd1 423; Nd2 405. Also at DhA I.228 (°bhāva=pamāda). Pamaññā {Pamanna} (f.) [abstr. fr. pamāṇa, for *pamānyā, grd. form. of pa+mā for the usual pameyya] only neg. ap° immeasurableness Vbh 272 sq. (catasso appamaððāyo, viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekhā). See appamaððā. Pamaṭṭa {Pamatta} in cpd. luñcita-pamaṭṭā kapotī viya (simile for a woman who has lost all her hair) at PvA 47 is doubtful, it should probably be read as luñcita-pakkhikā k. viya i. e. like a pigeon whose feathers have been pulled out (v. l. °patthaka). Pamatta {Pamatta} [pp. of pamajjati] slothful, indolent, indifferent, careless, negligent D III.190; S I.61=204; A I.11, 139; IV.319; V.146; Sn 57, 70, 329 sq., 399, 1121; Dh 19, 21, 29, 292, 309 (=sativossaggena samannāgata DhA III.482), 371; Nd2 404; PvA 276 (quot. °ṃ ativattati). appamatta diligent, careful, eager, mindful S I.4, 140, 157; A V.148; Th 1, 1245; Pv IV.138; PvA 66 (dānaṃ detha etc.), 219, 278. See also appamatta2. -cārin acting carelessly Dh 334 (=sati-vossaggalakkhaṇena pamādena p.-c. DhA IV.43). -bandhu friend of the careless (Ep. of Māra) S I.123, 128; Sn 430; Nd2 507. Pamattaka {Pamattaka} (adj.)=pamatta, only in neg. form ap° careful, mindful PvA 201. Pamathita {Pamathita} [pp. of pa+mathati to crush] crushed, only in cpd. sam° (q. v.). Pamadā {Pamada} (f.) [Classical Sk. pramadā, fr. pra+mad, cp. pamāda] a young (wanton) woman, a woman Sn 156, 157 (gloss for pamāda cp. SnA 203); J III.442 (marapamadānaṃ issaro; v. l. samuddā), 530 (v. l. pamuda, pamoda). Pamaddati [pa+mṛd] to crush down, destroy, overcome, defeat; pp. pamaddita J VI.189 (mālutena p. corresponding with vāta-pahaṭa). {Pamaddati} Pamaddana (adj. nt.) [fr. pamaddati] crushing, defeating, overcoming D I.89 (°parasena°); Sn p. 106 (id.=maddituṃ samattho SnA 450); Sn 561 (Mārasena°); DA I.250. Pamaddin {Pamaddana} (adj.) [fr. pa+mṛd] crushing, able to crush, powerful, mighty J IV.26 (=maddana-samattha C.). {Pamaddin} Pamāṇa {Pamana} (nt.) [of pa+mā, Vedic pramāṇa] 1. measure, size, amount S II.235; A I.88; III.52, 356 sq.; V.140 sq.; Miln 285 (cp. trsl. II.133, n. 2); SnA 137; VvA 16; PvA 55 (ghaṭa°), 70 (ekahattha°), 99 (tālakkhandha°), 268 (sīla°). - 2. measure of time, compass, length, duration PvA 136 (jīvitaṃ paricchinna °ṃ); esp. in cpd. āyu° age S I.151; A I.213; II.126 sq. and passim Pāli Text Society 949 Pāli-English Dictionary (cp. āyu). - 3. age (often by Com. taken as "worldly characteristic," see below rūpa° and cp. Nd2 406 on Sn 1076); DhA I.38. - 4. limit PvA 123, 130 (dhanassa). - 5. (appld meaning) standard, definition, description, dimension S IV.158≈Sn 1076 (perhaps ("age"). pamāṇaṃ karoti set an example DhA III.300 (maṃ p. katvā). - adj. (-°) of characteristic, of the character of, measuring or measured by, taking the standard of, only in cpd. rūpa° measuring by (appearance or) form, or held in the sphere of form (defined or Pug A 229 as "rūpappamāṇ'ādisu sampattiyuttaṃ rūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ karotī ti") A II.71=Pug 53; Nd2 406. appamāṇa without a measure, unlimited, immeasurable, incomparable D I.31; II.12 (+uḷāra); M III.145 (ceto-vimutti); A I.183, 192; II.73; III.52; V.299 sq., 344 sq.; Sn 507; PvA 110 (=atula). See also appamāṇa. -kata taken as standard, set as example, being the measure, in phrase p.kataṃ kammaṃ D I.251; S IV.322. Pamāṇavant {Pamanavant} (adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] having a measure, finite; or: to be described, able to be defined Vin II.110; A II.73. Pamāṇika {Pamanika} (adj. n.) [fr. pamāṇa] 1. forming or taking a measure or standard, measuring by (-°) DhA III.113 (rūpa° etc., see A II.71); (n.) one who measures, a critic, judge A III.349 sq.; V.140; Sdhp 441 (as pamāṇaka). - 2. according to measure, by measure Vin III.149; IV.279. Pamāda {Pamada} [cp. Vedic pramāda, pa+mad] carelessness, negligence, indolence, remissness D I.6 (jūta°, see DA I.85); III.42 sq., 236; M I.151; S I.18, 20, 25, 146, 216; II.43, 193; IV.78, 263; V.170, 397; A I.212 (surāmerayamajja°)=S II.69; A I.16 sq.; II.40; III.6, 421, 449; IV.195, 294, 350; V.310, 361; Sn 156, 157 (gloss pamadā, cp. SnA 203), 334, 942, 1033; Dh 21, 30 sq., 167 (=satiossagga-lakkhaṇa p. DhA III.163), 241, 371; Th 1, 1245=S I.193; It 86; Nd1 423=Nd2 405; Ps II.8 sq., 169 sq., 197; Pug 11, 12; Nett 13, 41; Miln 289 (māna atimāna mada+); SnA 339 (=sativippavāsa); DhA I.228; PvA 16 (pamādena out of carelessness); Sdhp 600. - appamāda earnestness, vigilance, zeal D III.236; S I.158; II.29; Dh 21. -pāṭha careless reading (in the text) Nett Ṭ. (see introd. xi. n. 1); KhA 207; PvA 25. Pamādavatā {Pamadavata} (f.) [abstr. fr. pamāda+vant, adj.] remissness A I.139. Pamādin {Pamadin} (adj.) [fr. pamāda] infatuating, exciting, in phrase citta° Th 2, 357 (trsln "leading to ferment of the mind"; vv. ll. °pamaddin & °pamāthin, thus "crushing the heart," cp. ThA 243). Pamāya1 {Pamaya} [ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mā] having measured, measuring Sn 894 (sayaṃ p.=paminitvā Nd1 303); J III.114. Pamāya2 {Pamaya} [ger. of pamināti i. e. pa+mṛ, Sk. pramārya of pramṛṇāti] crushing, destroying Sn 209 (bījaṃ;= hiṃsitva vadhitvā SnA 257). See on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 45. Pamāyin {Pamayin} (adj.) [fr. pa+mā] measuring, estimating, defining S I.148 (appameyyaṃ p. "who to th'illimitable limit lays" trsl.; corresponds with paminanto). Pamāreti {Pamareti} [pa+māreti, Caus. of mṛ, marati to die] to strike dead, maltreat, hurt DhA III.172. Pāli Text Society Pamināti 950 Pāli-English Dictionary [pa+mināti to mā with pres. formation fr. mi, after Sk. minoti; see also anumināti] to measure, estimate, define A III.349, 351; V.140, 143; Sdhp 537. - ppr. paminanto S I.148; inf. paminituṃ VvA 154; ger. paminitvā Nd1 303, and pamāya (q. v.); grd. paminitabba VvA 278; aor. 3rd sg. pāmesi J V.299, 3rd pl. pamiṃsu A II.71; Th 1, 469 (pāmiṃsu). {Paminati} Pamilāta {Pamilata} [pp. of pa+mlā] faded, withered, languished Miln 303. Pamukha1 {Pamukha} (adj.) [pa+mukha, cp. late Sk. pramukha] lit. "in front of the face," fore-part, first, foremost, chief, prominent S I.234, 235; Sn 791 (v. l. BB and Nd1 92 for pamuñca); J V.5, 169. loc. pamukhe as adv. or prep. "before" S I.227 (asurindassa p.; v. l. sammukhe); Vism 120. As -° having as chief, headed by, with NN at the head D II.97; S I.79 (Pasenadi° rājāno); PvA 74 (setacchatta° rājakakudhabhaṇḍa); freq. in phrase Buddha° bhikkhusangha, e. g. Vin I.213; Sn p. 111; PvA 19, 20. Cp. pāmokkha. Pamukha2 {Pamukha} (nt.) [identical with pamukha1, lit. "in front of the face," i. e. frontside, front] 1. eyebrow (?) only in phrase alāra° with thick eyebrows or lashes J VI.503 (but expld by C. as "visāl'akkhigaṇḍa); PvA 189 (for aḷāra-pamha Pv III.35). Perhaps we should read pakhuma instead. Pamuccati {Pamuccati} Pass. of pamuñcati (q. v.). Pamucchita {Pamucchita} [pa+mucchita] 1. swooning, in a faint, fainting (with hunger) Pv III.18 (=khuppipāsādidukkhena saðjāta-mucchā PvA 174); IV.108. - 2. infatuated S I.187 (v. l.; T. samucchita)=Th 1, 1219; J III.441. Pamuñca {Pamunca} [fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free or loose, in cpd. °kara deliverer S I.193=Th 1, 1242 (bandhana°). - adj. dup° difficult to be freed S I.77;Sn 773; Dh 346; J II.140. Pamuñcati {Pamuncati} [pa+muñcati of muc] 1. to let loose, give out, emit Sn 973 (vācaṃ;=sampamuñcati Nd1 504); J I.216 (aggiṃ). - 2. to shake off, give up, shed Dh 377 (pupphāni). Perhaps also in phrase saddhaṃ p. to renounce one's faith, although the interpretation is doubtful (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 46 sq. & cp. Dial. II.33) Vin I.7=D II.39=S I.138 (C. vissajjati, as quoted KS p. 174). - 3. to deliver, free Sn 1063 (kathan kathāhi=mocehi uddhara etc. Nd2 407a), 1146 (pamuñcassu=okappehi etc. Nd2 407b). - Pass. pamuccati to be delivered or freed S I.24, 173; Sn 80, 170 sq. (dukkhā); Dh 189 (sabbadukkhā), 276 (fut. pamokkhati), 291 (dukkhā), 361. - pp. pamutta (q. v.). - Caus. pamoceti to remove, liberate, deliver, set free S I.143, 154, 210; Th 2, 157 (dukkhā); Cp. II.75; III.103 sq. Caus. II. pamuðcāpeti to cause to get loose DA I.138. Pamuṭṭha {Pamuttha} [pp. of pamussati] being or having forgotten Vin I.213; Ps I.173 (a°); J III.511 (T. spells pamm°); IV.307 (id.); Miln 77. Cp. parimuṭṭha. Pamutta {Pamutta} [pp. of pamuðcati] 1. let loose, hurled J VI.360 (papātasmiṃ). - 2. liberated, set free S I.154; Sn 465, 524 sq. Pamutti {Pamutti} (f.) [fr. pa+muc] setting free, release S I.209; Th 2, 248; J IV.478; Nett 131 (=S I.209; but read pamutty atthi); PvA 103 (dukkhato). Pāli Text Society 951 Pāli-English Dictionary Pamudita {Pamudita} (&°modita)[pp. of pamodati] greatly delighted, very pleased M I.37; S I.64; A III.21 sq.; Sn 512; J III.55; DA I.217, ThA 71; PvA 77, 132. - Spelt pamodita at Sn 681, J I.75; V.45 (āmodita+). Pamuyhati {Pamuyhati} [pa+muyhati of muh] to become bewildered or infatuated J VI.73. - pp. pamūḷha (q. v.). Pamussati {Pamussati} [pa+mṛṣ, Sk. mṛṣyati=P. *mussati] to forget J III.132, 264 (pamajjati+); IV.147, 251. - pamuṭṭha (q. v.). Pamūḷha {Pamulha} [pp. of pamuyhati] bewildered, infatuated Sn 774; Nd1 36 (=sammūḷha), 193 (+sammūḷha). Pameyya {Pameyya} (-°) (adj.) [grd. of pamināti, like Epic Sk. prameya] to be measured, measurable, only in foll. cpd. appameyya not to be measured, illimitable, unfathomable S I.148; V.400; M III.71, 127; A I.266; Vv 3419 (=paminituṃ asakkhuṇeyya VvA 154); 377 (expld as before at VvA 169); duppameyya hard to be gauged or measured A I.266; Pug 35; opp. suppameyya ibid. Pamokkha [fr. pa+muc, see pamuñcati] 1. discharging, launching, letting loose, gushing out; in phrases itivāda° pouring out gossip M I.133; S V.73; A II.26; DA I.21; and caravāda° id. S III.12; V.419. - 2. release, deliverance S I.2; PvA 103 (pamutti+); abl. pamokkhā for the release of, i. e. instead of (gen.) J V.30 (pituno p.=pamokkha-hetu C.). {Pamokkha} Pamocana {Pamocana} (adj. n.) [fr. pa+muc] loosening, setting free; deliverance, emancipation S I.172=Sn 78; A II.24, 37, 49 sq.; Sn 166 (maccupāsā, abl.=from), 1064 (pamocanāya dat.=pamocetuṃ Nd2); It 104 (Nibbānaṃ sabbagantha °ṃ). At Dh 274 we should read pamohanaṃ for pamocanaṃ. Pamoceti {Pamoceti} Caus. of pamuñcati (q. v.). Pamoda {Pamoda} [fr. pa+mud, cp. Vedic pramoda] joy, delight Sdhp 528, 563. See also pāmojja. Pamodati {Pamodati} [pa+mud] to rejoice, enjoy, to be delighted, to be glad or satisfied S I.182; A III.34 (so read for ca modati); Dh 16, 22; Pv I.113, 115; VvA 278 (=āmodati). - Caus. pamodeti id. Sdhp 248. - pp. pamudita (& pamodita) (q. v.). Cp. abhippamodati. Pamodanā {Pamodana} (f.) [fr. pa+mud] delight, joy, satisfaction Dhs 9, 86, 285 (āmodanā+). Pamoha {Pamoha} [pa+muh, cp. Epic Sk. pramoha] bewilderment, infatuation, fascination Sn 841 (v. l. Nd1 sammoha); Nd1 193 (+sammoha andhakāra); J VI.358; J VI.358; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061. Pamohana {Pamohana} [fr. pa+muh] deceiving, deception, delusion Dh 274 (T. reads pamocana; DhA III.403 expls by vañcana). Pāli Text Society 952 Pāli-English Dictionary Pampaka {Pampaka} [etym? Cp. Sk. pampā N. of a river (or lake), but cp. ref. in BR. under pampā varaṇ-ādi] a loris (Abhp. 618) i. e. an ape; but probably meant for a kind of bird (cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.) J VI.538 (C. reads pampuka & expls by pampaṭaka). Pamha {Pamha} (nt.) [the syncope form of pakhuma=Sk. pakṣman used in poetry and always expld in C. by pakhuma] eye-lash, usually in cpd. aḷāra° having thick eyelashes, e. g. at J V.215; Vv 357; 6411; Pv III.35; asāyata° at Th 2, 383. Pamhayati {Pamhayati} [pa+smi, Sk. prasmayate] to laugh; Caus. pamhāpeti to make somebody laugh J V.297 (=parihaseti C.), where it is syn. with the preceding umhāpeti. Paya {Paya} (nt.) [Ved. payas, nt, of pī] milk, juice J I.204; VI.572. Payacchati {Payacchati} [pa+yacchati of yam] to offer, present, give Dpvs XI.28; Pgdp 63, 72, 77 sq. pp. payata (q. v.). Payata {Payata} [pp. of payacchati] restrained, composed, purified, pure D I.103 (=abhiharitvā dinna); A III.313; Th 1, 348, 359 (°atta); It 101 (°pāṇin)=Miln 215; Sn 240 (=sakkāra-karaṇena p. alankata SnA 284); Vism 224 (°pāṇin=parisuddha-hattha); Sdhp 100. Payatana {Payatana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. prayatna, of yat] striving after, effort, endeavour KhA 108. Payatta {Payatta} [pp. of pa+yat] making effort, taking care, being on one's guard, careful Miln 373. Payāta {Payata} [pp. of payāti] gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv IV.56 (=gantuṃ āraddha PvA 260); J III.188, 190. Strange is "evaṃ nānappayātamhi" at Th 1, 945 (Mrs. Rh. D. "thus when so much is fallen away"; Neumann "in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not"). - duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 849 (=duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata VvA 337). Payāti {Payati} [pa+yā] to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aor pāyāsi J I.146, 223, 255; 3rd pl. pāyiṃsu J I.253 and pāyesuṃ J IV.220. - pp. payāta, (q. v.). See also pāyāti. Payirudāharati {Payirudaharati} [pari+ud+āharati with metathesis payir° for pariy°] to speak out, to proclaim aor payirudāhāsi D II.222 (vaṇṇe); J I.454 (vyañjanaṃ). Payirupāsati {Payirupasati} [pari+upa+ās, with metathesis as in payirudāharati] 1. "to sit close round," i. e. to attend on (acc.), to honour, pay homage, worship D I.47; II.257; M II.117, S I.146; A I.124, 126, 142; IV.337; Dh 64, 65; Th 1, 1236; J VI.222 (imper. °upāsaya); Pv II.961; Pug 26, 33; SnA 401; VbhA 457 (here defd by Bdhgh as "punappunaṃ upasankamati"). - ppr. °upāsanto S V.67=It 107; PvA 44; and upāsamāna DhA II.32. - aor. °upāsiṃ A IV.213 (Bhagavantaṃ); PvA 50. - ger. °upāsiya D II.287. - 2. to visit Vin I.214 (ger. °upāsitvā); IV.98. - pp. payirupāsiṭa (q. v.). Payirupāsana {Payirupasana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. payirupāsati] attending to, worshipping: worship, homage M II.176; S V.67= It 107; DA I.142; PvA 138. Payirupāsika {Payirupasika} [fr. payirupāsati] a worshipper ThA 200. 953 Pāli Text Society Payirupāsita {Payirupasita} Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of payirupāsati] worshipped PvA 116 (=upaṭṭhita), 205 (=purakkhata). Payuñjati {Payunjati} [pa+yuj] to harness, yoke, employ, apply; Pass. payujjati to be applied to Sdhp 400 (ppr. °māna). - pp. payutta (q. v.). - Caus. payojeti (q. v.). Payuta {Payuta} [pp. of pa+yu, cp. Sk. pra+yuta united, fastened to, increased] (wrongly) applied, at random, careless: "misdirected" A I.199; Sn 711 (°ṃ vācaṃ=obhāsaparikathā - nimittaviññatti-payuttaṃ ghāsesana-vācaṃ SnA 497), 930 (=cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaṃ vā payojita SnA 565; Nd1 389 however reads payutta and expls as "cīvarapayutta" etc.). Payutta {Payutta} [pp. of payuñjati] 1. yoked Sn p. 13 (=yottehi yojita SnA 137). - 2. applied, intent on, devoted to, busy in (acc., loc., or -°) J V.121 (ajjhattaṃ); Pv III.710 (sāsane); SnA 497 (viññatti°). - 3. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su° well-behaved, acting well Miln 328; by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied, wasted (cp. payuta) A II.81 sq.; Sn 930 (see Nd1 389). - 4. planned, schemed, undertaken Vin II.194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.). Payuttaka {Payuttaka} (adj. n.) [payutta+ka] one who is applied oQ put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed J I.262 (°cora), 291 (°dhutta). Payoga {Payoga} [Vedic prayoga, fr. pa+yuj, see payuñjati] 1. means, instrument J VI.116 (=karaṇa); SnA 7; DhsA 215 (sa°). - 2. preparation, undertaking, occupation, exercise, business, action, practice Vin IV.278; Ps II.213 (sammā°); Miln 328 (sammā°); KhA 23, 29 sq.; PvA 8 (vapana°), 96 (manta°), 103, 146 (viññatti°; cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara-kkhipana°). payogaṃ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try PvA 184 (=parakkamati). -karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation DhA III.238 -vipatti failure of means, wrong application PvA 117, 136. sampatti success of means VvA 30, 32. -suddhi excellency of means, purity in application DhsA 165; VvA 60. -hīna deficient in exertion or application Miln 288. Payogatā {Payogata} (f.) [fr. payoga] application (to) Vism 134 (majjhatta°). Payojana {Payojana} (nt.) [fr. pa+yuj] 1. undertaking, business PvA 201. - 2. appointment J I.143. 3. prescript, injunction DhsA 403. - 4. purpose, application, use Sdhp 395. Payojita {Payojita} [pp. of payojeti] 1 connected with, directed to, applied SnA 565. - 2. instigated, directed Miln 3. Payojeti {Payojeti} [Caus. of payuñjati] 1. to undertake, engage in, begin D I.71 (kammante "set a business on foot"); A II.82 (kammantaṃ); Sn 404 (vaṇijjaṃ); J I.61; PvA 130 (kammaṃ). - 2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ PvA 46 (bhesajjaṃ cuṇṇena saddhiṃ). - 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire J I.173; II.417. - 4. to engage with, come to close quarters J. II.10. - 5. to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DA I.270. - pp. payojita (q. v.). Payyaka {Payyaka} [pa+ayyaka] (paternal) great-grandfather J I.2 (ayyaka°); PvA 107 (id.). Para {Para} (adv.-adj.) [fr. Idg. *per, *peri (cp. pari); Ved. para, parā, paraṃ; Lat. per through, Gr. pe/ra & pe/ran beyond; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under per & also pari, pubba, pura, purāṇa] 1. Pāli Text Society 954 Pāli-English Dictionary (adv. & prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with abl. or loc.), over PvA 168 (para Gangāya, v. l. °āyaṃ). See in same meaning & application paraṃ, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka. 2. (adj.) para follows the pron. declension; cases: sg. nom. paro Sn 879, acc. paraṃ Sn 132, 185, gen. dat. parassa Sn 634; Pv II.919, instr. parena PvA 116, loc. paramhi Sn 634, and pare Pv II.943; pl. nom. pare Dh 6, acc. pare Dh 257; PvA 15, gen. dat. paresaṃ D I.3; Th 1, 743; J I.256; Sn 818, instr. parehi Sn 240, 255; PvA 17. - Meanings: (a) beyond, i. e. "higher" in space (like Ved. para as opp. to avara lower), as well as "further" in time (i. e. future, to come, or also remote, past: see loc. pare under c.), freq. in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i. e. life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaṃ loko) Sn 185 (asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ na socati), 634 (asmiṃ loke paramhi ca); Dh 168 (paramhi loke); Pv II.83 (id.=paraloke PvA 107); but also in other combn, like santi-para (adj.) higher than calm Dh 202. Cp. paraloka, paraṃ and paro. - (b) another, other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Sn 396 (parassa dāraṃ nātikkameyya), 818 (paresaṃ, cp. Nd1 150); Dh 160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv II.919 (parassa dānaṃ); II.943 (pare, loc.= paramhi parassa PvA 130); DhA IV.182 (gen. pl.); PvA 15, 60 (paresaṃ dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraṃ purisaṃ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one's own, oneself), e. g. at M I.200 (paraṃ vambheti attānaṃ ukkaṃseti); Sn 132 (attānaṃ samukkaṃse paraṃ avajānāti); J I.256 (paresaṃ, opp. attanā); Nd2 26 (att-attha opp. par-attha, see cpds. °ajjhāsaya & °attha). - paro . . . paro "the one . . . the other" D I.224 (kiṃ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraṃ one another Sn 148 (paro paraṃ nikubbetha). - In a special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of "the others," i. e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare) D I.2 (=paṭiviruddhā sattā DA I.51); Vin I.349; Dh 6. - (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.: paraṃ acc. sg. m. see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca paraṃ would be better read puna c'aparaṃ (see apara). -parena (instr.) later on, afterwards J III.395 (=aparena samayena C.). -pare (loc.); cp. Gr. parai/ at; Lat. prae before; Goth. faúra=E, for, old dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier J II.279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i. e. to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin IV.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo and may mean "in future," or "the day before yesterday." It is of interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as "in the future" opp. to adya & śvas); J III.423 (the day before yesterday). At DhA I.253 (sve vā pare vā) and IV.170 in the sense of "on the day after tomorrow." -parā (only apparently abl., in reality either para+a° which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para+ā which is the directional prefix ā, emphasizing para. The latter expln is more in the spirit of the Pali language): see separately. -paro (old abl. as adv.=Sk. paras) beyond further: see sep. -parato (abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others A III.337 (attano parato ca); Nett 8 (ghosa), 50 (id.). - (2) from the point of view of "otherness," i. e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy M I.435 (in "anicca"-passage); A IV.423; Nd2 214II; Ps II.238; Kvu 400; Miln 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā "seen as not myself" Th 1, 1160; 2, 101; S I.188 (sankhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). - (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond J II.128; PvA 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ). - (4) further, afterwards, later on S I.34; J I.255; IV.139; SnA 119, 482. - Note. The compounds with para° are combinations either with para 1 (adv. prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form parā and in meaning "further on to" see separately under parā°. See also pāra, pārima etc. -ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att°) SnA 46. -attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv. parattha, q. v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha) S II.29; A III.63; Dh 166; Nd2 26. -ādhīna dependent on others D I.72 (=paresu adhīno parass'eva ruciyā pavattati DA I.212); J VI.99; ThA 15 (°vuttika); VvA 23 (°vutti, paresaṃ bhāraṃ vahanto). -ûpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin II.194. -ûpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 8440. -ûpaghātin killing others Dh 184 (=paraṃ upahananto p. DhA III.237). -ûpavāda reproaching others Sn 389. -kata see Pāli Text Society 955 Pāli-English Dictionary parankata. -kamma service of others, °kārin serving others Vv 3322. -kāra see below under parankāra. -kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Sn 128; Dh 73. -kkanta [para° or parā° *krānta?] walked (by another? or gone over?) J VI.559 (better to be read with v. l. on p. 560 as pada° i. e. walked by feet, footprint). -kkama (parā+kram] exertion, endeavour, effort, strife D I.53; III.113; S I.166 (daḷha°); II.28 (purisa°); V.66, 104 sq.; A I.4, 50 (purisa°); IV.190; Sn 293; Dh 313; Nd1 487; J I.256; II.153; Dhs 13, 12, 289, 571; Miln 244; DhA IV.139; Sdhp 253; adj. (-°) sacca° one who strives after the truth J IV.383. -kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake, show courage Sn 966 (ger. parakkamma); Dh 383 (id.); Pv III.213 (imper. parakkāma, v. l. parakkama); Pug 19, 23; PvA 184 (=payogaṃ karoti); Sdhp 439. kkaroti [either for parā+kṛ or more likely paras+kṛ, cp. paro] lit. "to put on the opposite side," i. e. to remove, do away with J IV.26 (corresponding to apaneti, C. explns as "parato kāreti," taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari=mā pariccaji C.). -gatta alien body, trsl. "limbs that are not thou" Th 1, 1150. -gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another A II.109=Pug 47 (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp. PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaṃ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.). -(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien S I.134 (nayidaṃ attakataṃ bimbaṃ nayidaṃ parakataṃ aghaṃ); with ref. to loka & dukkha and opposed to sayankata D III.137 sq.; S II.19 sq., 33 sq., 38 sq.; Ud 69 sq. (n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud 70 (opp. ahankara selfhood). -citta the mind or heart of others A V.160. -jana a stranger, enemy, demon, fig. devil (cp. Sk. itarajana) M I.153, 210. -tthaddha [parā+tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with loc.) J VI.181 (=upatthadda C.). -tthabbha is to be read for °tthambha at J IV.313, in meaning=°tthaddha (kismiṃ). -dattûpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another's gift Sn 217; Miln 294. -davutta see sep. under parada -dāra the wife of another, somebody else's wife M I.87; A II.71, 191; Sn 108, 242 (°sevanā); Dh 246, 309 (°upasevin, cp. DhA III.482); J VI.240; DhA III.481 (°kamma). -dārika (better to be read as pāra°) an adulterer S II.188, 259; J III.43. -dhammika "of someone else's norm," one who follows the teaching of another, i. e. of an heretic teacher Sn 96Q (Nd1 485: p° ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā, dhamme appa nnā, sanghe appasannā). -niṭṭhita made ready by others S I.236. -nimmita "created by another," in °vasavattin having power under control of another, N. of a class of Devas (see deva) D I.216 sq.; A I.210; It 94; Pug 51; DA I.114, 121; KhA 128; VvA 79. -neyya to be led by another, under another's rule Sn 907 Nd1 321 (=parapattiya parapaccaya). -(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp. attantapa) D III.232; M I.341, 411; II.159; Pug 56. -paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd1 321; usually neg. a° independent of another Vin I.12, 181 and passim. -pattiya=prec. Nd1 321. -pāṇa other living beings Sn 220. -puggala other people D III.108. -putta somebody else's son A IV.169; Sn 43. -pessa serving others, being a servant Sn 615 (=paresaṃ veyyāvacca SnA 466). -pessiyā a female servant or messenger, lit. to be sent by others J III.413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā C.). -ppavāda [cp. BSk. parapravādin "false teacher" Divy 202] disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (appld to Non-Buddhistic systems) S V.261; A II.238; Miln 170, 175. -bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond PvA 24. bhuta [Sk. parabhṛta] the Indian cuckoo (lit. brought up by another) J V.416 (so read for parābhūta). -bhojana food given by others Sn 366 (=parehi dinnaṃ saddhādeyyaṃ SnA 364). loka [cpd. either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraṃ (cp. paraṃmaraṇā after death), i. e. the future world or the world to come] the other world, the world beyond (opp. ayaṃ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, see on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq.) D I.27, 58, 187; II.319; S I.72, 138; Sn 579, 666, 1117; Nd1 60; Nd2 214 (v. l. for paloka in anicca-passage) 410 (=manussalokaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Ps I.121; Vv 845 (=narakaṃ hi sattānaṃ ekantānatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti VvA 335); PvA 5, 60 Pāli Text Society 956 Pāli-English Dictionary (=pettivisaya parattha), 64Q, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi); SnA 478 (=parattha); Sdhp 316, 326, 327. -vambhitā contempt of others M I.19 (a°). -vambhin contempting others M I.19, 527. -vasatta power (over others) Dāvs IV.19. -vāda (1) talk of others, public rumour S I.4; Sn 819 (cp. Nd1 151); SnA 475. (2) opposition Miln 94 sq. -vādin opponent Miln 348. visaya the other world, realm of the Dead, Hades Pv IV.87 (=pettivisaya PvA 268). -vediya to be known by others, i. e. heterodox D II.241; Sn 474 (=parehi ðāpetabba SnA 410). -sattā (pl.) other beings A I.255=III.17 (+parapuggalā). -suve on the day after tomorrow DhA IV.170 (v. l. SS for pare, see para 2 c.). -sena a hostile army D I.89=II.16= III.59=Sn p. 106 ≈ (cp. DA I.250=SnA 450). -hattha the hand of the enemy J I.179. -hiṃsā hurting others Pv III.73. -hita the good or welfare of others (opp. attahita) D III.233; PvA 16, 163. -hetu on account of others, through others Sn 122 (attahetu+); Pug 54. Paraṃ {Param} (param°) (adv.) [orig. nt. of para] further, away (from); as prep. (w. abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṃ from here, after this, further, e. g. KhA 131; SnA 160, 178, 412, 512, 549; PvA 83, 90; also in tato paraṃ J III.281. -parā (f.) [adv. converted into a noun paraṃ+abl. of para] lit. "after the other," i. e. succession, series Vin II.110; IV.77, 78 (parampara-bhojana "taking food in succession," successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp. C. at Vin IV.77, 78 and Vin Texts I.38); D I.239; M I.520; A II.191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd2 151); Bu I.79; J I.194; IV.35 (expld by C. as purisa°, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev. s. v. interperts as "defamation, ravishing"); Nett 79 (°parahetu); Miln 191, 276; DhsA 314; SnA 352; DhA I.49 (sīsa°). -maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combn with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i. e. after death S I.231; D I.245; PvA 27, 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. D I.188, 192; A V.193. -mukhā (adv.) in one's absence, lit. with face turned away (opp. sammukhā in presence, thus at J III.263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam° to āvi; PvA 13) D I.230 (parammukhin?); DhA II.109. Parajjhati {Parajjhati} see parājeti. Parattha {Parattha} (adv.) [Vedic parastāt beyond] elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world S I.20; Sn 661=It 42=Dh 306; Dh 177; J II.417; Pv I.1110 (=paraloke PvA 60); III.120 (=samparāye PvA 177); SnA 478 (=paraloke). Parada {Parada} (adj.) [for uparada (?)=uparata, pp. of upa+ ram] finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful) cpds. viz. °vutta [unexpld, perhaps v for y, as daya> dava through influence of d in parada°; thus=parata+ yutta?] "fond of being prepared," adapted, apt, active, alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma +Vin II.184 (Vin. Texts III.232 trsl. "secure," cp. Vin II.363); M I.450; II.121 (v. l. BB paradatta°), - and °samācāra living a good (active) life M I.469. Parama {Parama} (adj.) [Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. "farthest," cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base, Lat. prīmus] highest, most excellent, superior, best; paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd2 502 A= Nd1 84, 102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at DhA III.237; VvA 78. - D I.124 (ettaka°); M II.120 (°nipacca); S I.166; II.277; V.230; A V.64 (°diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna); Sn 138 (yasaṃ paramaṃ patto), 296 (°ā mittā), 788 (suddhaṃ °ṃ arogaṃ), 1071 (saððāvimokhe °Q vimutto); Dh 184 (nibbānaṃ °ṃ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243; Vv 161 (°alankata= paramaṃ ativiya visesato VvA 78) Pv II.910 (°iddhi); Pug 15, 16, 66; Pāli Text Society 957 Pāli-English Dictionary SnA 453 (°issara); PvA 12 (°nipacca). 15 (°duggandha), 46. - At the end of a cpd. (-°) "at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum, at least" Vin IV.263 (dvangula-pabba°); esp. freq. in phrase sattakkhattu° one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i. e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval S II.185 (sa°); V.205; A I.233; IV.381; V.120; It 18; Kvu 469. See pāramī & pāramitā. -attha [cp. class. Sk. paramārtha] the highest good, ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl. 180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81); Arahantship Sn 68 (=vuccati Amataṃ Nibbānaṃ etc. Nd2 409), 219 (°dassin); Nd2 26; Miln 19, 31; °dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, N. of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e. g. at PvA 71; °jotikā id., N. of the C. on Kh and Sn, mentioned e. g. at KhA 11. - As °-, in instr. and abl. used adverbially Qn meaning of "in the highest sense, absolutely, kat) e)coxh/n, primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense," like °pāramī Bu I.77 °visuddhi A V.64; °saññita Th 2, 210; °suñña Ps II.184; °suddhi SnA 528; abl. paramatthato Miln 28; VvA 24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaṃ); PvA 146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiðci hanati=not at all); instr. paramatthena Miln 71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi). -gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv 3512 (=anupādisesa-nibbāna VvA 164). Paramajja—dhamma {Paramajjadhamma}[cp. Vedic parama-jyā] the most influential or ruling doctrine M III.7. Paramatā {Paramata} (f.) [fr. parama, Vedic paramatā highest position] the highest quantity, measure on the outside, minimum or maximum D I.60 (ghāsa-cchādana-paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing; DA I.169 expls by uttamatāya); M I.10 (abyābajjha°); S I.82 (nāḷik'odana-paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); freq. in phrase sattakkhattuṃ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most S II.134 sq.; V.458; Kvu 469 (cp. Kvu trsl. 2683). Parasupahāra {Parasupahara} at S V.441 is to be corrected to pharasu°. Parā° {Para°} (prefix) [para+ā, not instr. of para: see para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraṃ°] prep. meaning "on to," "over" (with the idea of mastering), also "through, throughout." The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā+kṛ=parakkaroti, parā+ kram=parakkamati (see under cpds. of para). Parākaroti {Parakaroti} see parakkaroti see parakkaroti (paraṃ°? or parā?). Parājaya {Parajaya} [parā+ji, opp. of jaya] 1. defeat D I.10; J VI.209; VvA 139. - 2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play S I.149 (dhana°)=A V.171=Sn 659; J VI.234 (°gāha sustainment of a loss). Parājita {Parajita} [pp. of parājeti] defeated, having suffered a loss Vin IV.5; S I.224; A IV.432; Sn 440, 681; Dh 201 (=parena parājito DhA III.259, where Bdhgh takes it evidently as instr. of para=parā); J I.293; II.160 (sahassaṃ), 403. Parājeti {Parajeti} [parā+jeti of ji, cp. jayati] to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat PvA 151 (sahassaṃ p. by 1,000 coins). - aor. parāji in 3rd pl. °jiṃsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods & Titans, viz. at D II.285=M I.253 (°jiniṃsu)=S I.221= 224 (v. l. °jiniṃsu)=A IV.432 (°jiyiṃsu, with v. l. °jiniṃsu), where a Pass. is required ("were defeated, lost") in opp. to jiniṃsu, and the reading °jiyiṃsu as aor. pass. is to be preferred. - Pass. °jīyati Pāli Text Society 958 Pāli-English Dictionary to be defeated, to suffer defeat S I.221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active); J I.290; and parajjhati (1st pl. parajjhāma) J II.403; aor. parājiyi: see above parāji. - pp. parājita (q. v.). Parābhava {Parabhava} [fr. parā+bhu Vedic parābhava] defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace S II.241; A II.73; IV.26; Sn 91-115; J III.331; SnA 167. Parābhavati {Parabhavati} [parā+bhū] 1. to go to ruin Sn 91 (=parihāyati vinassati). - 2. to win through, to surpass Th 1, 1144 (cp. trsl. 3814). - pp. parābhūta (q. v.). See also parābhetvā. Parābhūta {Parabhuta} [pp. of parābhavati] ruined, fallen into disgrace M II.210 (avabhūta+). Note. parābhūta at J V.416 is to be read parabhuta (q. v.). Parābhetvā {Parabhetva} at J V.153 is not clear (C.: hadayaṃ bhinditvā olokento viya . . .); perhaps we have here a reading parābh° for parāg° (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka), which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly BSk. ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning "propitiating." Parāmaṭṭha {Paramattha} [pp. of parāmasati] touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted D I.17; for a different, commentarial interpretation see Parāmāsa (evaṃ° so acquired or taken up; cp. DA I.107: nirāsanka-cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha); S II.94; Nd2 152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No. 227); Dhs 584, 1177, 1500; Sdhp 332. -dup° wrongly grasped, misused S I.49. -apparāmaṭṭha [cp. BSk. aparāmṛṣta not affected Mvyutp. p. 84] untarnished, incorrupt D II.80 (cp. Dial II.85); III.245; S II.70; A III.36. Parāmasa {Paramasa} [parā+mṛś, but see parāmāsa] touching, seizing, taking hold of M I.130 (v. l. °māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541); S III.46 (v. l. °māsa). - neg. aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing D I.17 (°to), 202. - Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether. Parāmasati [para+masati of mṛś] to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (acc.) Vin II.47, 195, 209; D I.17; M I.257; S III.110; J IV.138; in combn with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd2 227. - ger. parāmassa D II.282; M I.130, 498 (but cp. p. 541); grd. parāmasitabba J I.188. - pp. parāmaṭṭha (q. v.). {Paramasati} Parāmasana (nt.) [fr. parāmasati] touching, seizing, taking up Nd2 576 (daṇḍasattha°); DhsA 239 (angapaccanga°); PvA 159 (kiriyā°). Parāmāsa {Paramasana} {Paramasa} [parā+mṛś, cp. Epic Sk. parāmarśa being affected by; as philos. term "reflection"] touching, contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhs. trsl. 316). In Asl. 49, Bdhgh analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means "they handle dhamma's as other" (than what they really are, e. g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc. and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs. "Reversion," in Dialogues III.28, 43, etc. "perverted" (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha) - S III.46, 110; A II.42 (sacca°); III.377 (sīlabbata°), 438 (id.); V.150 (sandiṭṭhi°); D III.48; Th 1, 342; It 48 (itisacca°, cp. idaṃsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha); Pug 22; Dhs 381, 1003, 1175 (diṭṭhi° contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (id.). It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa; sQe kāyagantha 959 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary (under gantha), and cp. Nd2 227 (gāha p. abhinivesa) and Nd2 under taṇhā III. 1 C.-See also parāmasa. Parāmāsin {Paramasin} (adj.) [fr. parāmāsa] grasping, seizing, perverting D III.48; M I.43, 96 (sandiṭṭhi°). Parāyana, (Parāyaṇa) (nt.) {Parayana} [fr. parā+i, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa e. g. Divy 57, 327] 1. (n.) final end, i. e. support, rest, relief S I.38; A I.155, 156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.); J V.501=VI.375 (dīpað ca p.). - 2. (adj. -°) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one's end or goal in; also: finding one's support in (as daṇḍa° leaning on a stick M I.88; A I.138), in foll. phrases prevalent: Amata° S V.217 sq.; tama° Pug 51; Nibbāna° S IV.373; V.218; brahmacariya° S I.234; Maccu° S V.217; sambodhi° D I.156; II.155; Pug 16. Cp. also Sn 1114 (tap°=tad°, see Nd2 411); Miln 148 (ekantasoka°); DhA I.28 (rodana, i. e. constantly weeping). - (b) destined to, having one's next birth in., e. g. Avīci° J III.454; IV.159; duggati° PvA 32; devaloka° J I.218; brahmaloka° J III.396; Miln 234; sagga° J VI.329; PvA 42, 160; sugati° PvA 89 similarly nīlamaðca° Pv II.25. See also pārāyana. Parāyika {Parayika} see sam°. Parāyin {Parayin} (adj.) [fr. parāyana] having one's refuge or resort (in), being supported, only neg. aparāyinī (f.) without support J III.386. Pari° {Pari°} (indecl.) [Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. pṛ2, piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp. Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. pe/ri, Lat. per (also in adj. per, Oir er- (intensifying prefix), Goth. faír, Ohg. fir, far=Ger. ver-] prefix, signifying (lit.) around, round about; (fig.) all round, i. e. completely, altogether. The use as prep. (with acc.=against, w. abl.=from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but see below 1a). As adv. "all round" it is only found at J VI.198 (parī metri causa; combd with samantato). - The composition form before vowels is pariy°, which in combn with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil. payir°. Frequent combns with other preps. are pari +ā (pariyā°) and pari+ava (pariyo°); sampari°. Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati> pariyesati, ajjhogāhati>pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp. abhirādheti>paritoseti, abhitāpa>paritāpa, abhipīḷita>pari°, abhipūreti>pari°, abhirakkhati>pari°), cp. also its relation to ā in var. combns. - Meanings. 1. (lit.) (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. abl.:) °kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, °cheda cutting off, restriction, °puñchati wipe off. - (b) all round, round (expld by samantato, e. g. at Vism 271 in pallanka): °anta surrounded, °esati search round, °kiṇṇa covered all round (i. e. completely, cp. expln as "samantato ākiṇṇa"), °carati move round, °jana surrounding people, °dhāvati run about, °dhovati wash all round, °paleti watch all round, fig. guard carefully, °bhamati roam about, °maṇḍala circular (round), °sā assembly (lit. sitting round, of sad). - 2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely, very much, kat) ecoxh/n: °ādāna consummation, °āpanna gone completely into, °odāta very pure, °osāna complete end, °gūhati to hide well, °toseti satisfy very much, °pūreti fulfil, °bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, °yañña supreme sacrifice, °suddha extremely clean. - (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati° and adhi°): °tāpeti torment excessively, °pakka over-ripe. - A derivation (adv.) from pari is parito (q. v.). On its relation to Sk. pariṣ see parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari° is pali° (q. v.). - Note. The expln of P. Commentators as regards pari is "pariggahaṭṭho" Ps I.176; "paricca" SnA 88; "parito" VvA 316; PvA 33. Pāli Text Society 960 Pāli-English Dictionary Parikaḍḍhati {Parikaddhati} [pari+k°, cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati MVastu II.255] to draw over or towards oneself, to win over, seduce D II.283 (purisaṃ); Miln 143 (janapadaṃ). Cp. parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati. Parikaḍḍhana {Parikaddhana} (nt.) [fr. prec.] drawing, dragging along J II.78; Miln 154. Parikati {Parikati} [*parikṛti of kṛ (?)] arrangement, preparation, getting up J V.203. Parikatta {Parikatta} [pp. of pari+kantati2; corresponds to Sk, kṛtta, which is usually represented in P. by kanta2] cut round, cut off Miln 188. Parikathā {Parikatha} (f.) [pari+kathā, cp. BSk. parikathā Divy 225, 235] 1. "round-about tale," exposition, story, esp religious tale D II.204; Vism 41 (=pariyāya-kathā) - 2. talk about, remark, hint Vin I.254 (cp. Vin. Texts II.154); Vbh 353=Vism 23 (with obhāsa & nimitta); SnA 497. - 3. continuous or excessive talk Vism 29. Parikanta1 {Parikanta} [pari+kanta2 of kantati2] cut open Vin III.89 (kucchi p.). See also parikatta & cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. (misreading for °katta?). - Note. Reading parikantaṃ upāhanaṃ at J VI.51 is with v. l. to be changed to pariyantaṃ. Parikanta2 {Parikanta} at Vin II.80 (bhāsita°) is probably to be read as pārikata [pp. of parikaroti]. Bdhgh explns as parik- kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it fr. parikkamati. Vin. Texts III.18 trsl. "as well in speech as in act" and identify it with parikanta1, hardly justified. Cp. also Kern. Toev. s. v. The passage is evidently faulty. Parikantati1 {Parikantati} [pari+kantati1] to wind round, twist J III.185 (pāso pādaṃ p.; but taken by C. as parikantati2, expld as "cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati"). Parikantati2 {Parikantati} [pari+kantati2] to cut (round), cut through, pierce M I.244 (vātā kucchiṃ p.); J III.185 (see parikantati1). Parikappa [fr. pari+kalp] 1. preparation, intention, stratagem Th 1, 940. - 2. assumption, supposition, surmise A I.197; V.271; DhsA 308. {Parikappa} Parikappita {Parikappita} [pp. of parikappati] inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp. 362, 602. Parikamma {Parikamma} (nt.) [pari+kamma] "doing round," i. e. doing up, viz 1. arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin II.106 (°ṃ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka° plastering with red chalk) 151 (id.). parikammaṃ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism 395 and passim (with ref. to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin II.175 (bhūmi), as -° "with," viz. geruka° plastered with red chalk Vin I.48; II.209; lākhā° J III.183; IV.256; su° beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Miln 62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana); VvA 188. In special sense used with ref. to jhāna, as kasiṇa° processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation J I.141; IV.306; V.162, 193; DhsA 168; cp. Cpd. 54; DhA I.105. - 2. service, attention, attending Vin I.47; II.106, 220; S I.76; Th 2, 376 (=veyyāvacca ThA 253); Pug 56; DhA I.96, 333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. Pāli Text Society 961 Pāli-English Dictionary to a person, cp. J V.89; DhA I.250. sarīra° attending the body DA I.45, 186; SnA 52. -kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person, attendant; one who makes preparations Th 2, 411 (f. -ikā=paricārikā ThA 267); J I.232. Parikara {Parikara} [fr. pari+kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with fig. meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also expld by parivara cp. parikaroti=parivāreti] "doing round," i. e. girdle, loincloth J IV.149; DhA I.352. - In cpd. ovāda° it is v. l. SS at D I.137 for paṭikara (q. v.). Parikaroti {Parikaroti} [pari+kṛ] to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. IV 405 (=parivāreti C.); V. 353 (id.), 381; VI.592. Cp. parikara & parikkhāra. Parikassati [pari+kṛṣ, cp BSk. parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475, and parikaḍḍhati] 1. to drag about S I.44, cp. DhsA 68. - 2. sweep away, carry away DhA II.275 (mah'ogho viya parikassamāno, v. l. °kaḍḍhamāno). - Pass. parikissati (q. v.). {Parikassati} Parikiṇṇa {Parikinna} [pp. of parikirati] scattered or strewn about, surrounded J IV.400; VI.89, 559; Pv I.61 (makkhikā°= samantato ākiṇṇa PvA 32); Miln 168, 285; DA I.45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). Cp. sampari°. Parikittita {Parikittita} [pp. of parikutteti] declared, announced, made public Sdhp 601. Parikitteti {Parikitteti} [pari+kitteti] to declare, praise, make public Miln 131, 141, 230, 383. - pp. parikittita (q. v.). Parikirati {Parikirati} [pari+kirati] to strew or scatter about, to surround S I.185=Th 1, 1210; aor. parikiri J VI.592 (v. l. for parikari, see parikaroti). - pp. parikiṇṇa (q. v.). Parikiraṇa {Parikirana} [fr. pari+kirati] strewing about, trsld "consecrating sites" D I.12 (vatthukamma+vatthu°; v. l. paṭi°; expld at DA I.98 as "idað c'idað ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma-karaṇaṃ"). The BSk. form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16. See under parikkhā. Parikilanta {Parikilanta} [pp. of parikilamati] tired out, exhausted Miln 303. Parikilamati {Parikilamati} [pari+kilamati] to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted J V.417, 421. - pp. parikilanta (q. v.). Parikilissati {Parikilissati} [pari+kilissati] to get stained or soiled; fig. get into trouble or misery (?) see parikissati. - pp. parikiliṭṭha see parikkiliṭṭha. Parikilesa {Parikilesa} [pari+kilesa] misery, calamity, punishment ThA 241 (for °klesa, q. v.). Parikissati {Parikissati} [most likely Pass. of parikassati; maybe Pass. of kisa (=Sk. kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rh. D. at K.S. 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati] to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble S I.39 (trsl. "plagues itself"); A II.177; IV.186; Sn Pāli Text Society 962 Pāli-English Dictionary 820 (v. l. Nd1 °kilissati; expld at Nd1 154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with vv. ll. kilissati pakirissati). Parikujati {Parikujati} at Sdhp 145, meaning? Cp. palikujjati. Parikupita {Parikupita} [pp. of pari+kup] greatly excited, very much agitated A II.75; Miln 253. Parikeḷanā {Parikelana} (f.) [pari+keḷanā] adornment, adorning oneself, being fond of ornaments Nd2 5852 (v. l. parilepanā); DA I.286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vbh id. p. 351 parikeḷanā with v. l. parikelāsanā. Parikopeti {Parikopeti} [Caus. of pari+kup] to excite violently Miln 253. Parikkamana {Parikkamana} (nt.) [pari+kram] walking about M I.43, 44; adj. sa° having (opportunity for) walking about, i. e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma A V.262 (opp. a°). Parikkita {Parikkita} at J V.74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari+ukṣ): see okkhita "sprinkled, strewn," unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa. Parikkiliṭṭha {Parikkilittha} [pp. of parikilissati] soiled, stained Vin II.296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.); id. p, at A II.56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin II.295. Parikkha {Parikkha} (-°) see parikkhā. Parikkhaka {Parikkhaka} (adj.) [fr. parikkhati] investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd PvA 131 (lokiya° experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita). Parikkhaṇa {Parikkhana} (nt.) [fr. parikkhati; cp. Class. Sk. parīkṣaṇa] putting to the test, trying Sdhp 403 (sarīra°, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? Cp. parirakkhati). Parikkhata1 {Parikkhata} [pp. of pari+kṣan] wounded, hurt, grazed J III.431; PvA 272 (a°). Parikkhata2 {Parikkhata} [pp. of *parikkharoti; cp. Sk. pariṣkṛta] made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned D II.217; M III.71; Miln 328. Parikkhatatā {Parikkhatata} (f.) [abstr. fr. parikkhata2] "making up," pretence, posing, sham Pug 19 (23)=Vbh 351 (358). Parikkhati {Parikkhati} [pari+īkṣ] to look round, to inspect, investigate, examine A I.162 (vaṇṇaṃ parikkhare 3rd pl.). See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā. Parikkhattiya {Parikkhattiya} read pāri° (=parikkhatatā) q. v. *Parikkharoti {Parikkharoti} [pariṣ+kṛ] lit. to do all round, i. e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); pp. parikkhata2 (q. v.); see also parikkhāra. Pāli Text Society Parikkhaya 963 Pāli-English Dictionary [fr. pari+kṣi2, cp. Epic Sk. parikṣaya] exhaustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end D I.156; M I.453; III.37 sq.; S I.2, 90, 152; V.461; A I.100, 299; II.68; III.46 (bhogā °ṃ gacchanti); IV.148, 350; Th 1, 929; Sn 374, 749, 1094 (=pahānaṃ etc. Nd2 412); Dh 139; J I.290; Pv II.615; Pug 16, 17, 63; Miln 102; DhA IV.140 (°ṃ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear= atthaṃ gacchati of Dh 384); ThA 285; PvA 3 (dhanasannicayo °ṃ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq. combd with pariyādāna (q. v.). {Parikkhaya} Parikkhavant {Parikkhavant} (adj.) [fr. parikkhati] circumspect, elever, experienced J III.114. Parikkhā {Parikkha} (f.) [fr. pari+īkṣ, cp. BSk. parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu°, ratna° etc. with which cp. P. vatthu-parikirana] examination, investigation, circumspection, prudence J III.115; Nett 3, 4, 126 (cp. Index p. 276); Sdhp. 532 (attha°). Parikkhāra {Parikkhara} [fr. *parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariṣkāra] "all that belongs to anything," make-up, adornment (so Nd2 585 bāhirā p. of the body). - (a) requisite, accessory, equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin I.50, 296 (°colaka cloth required for water-strainers & bags, cp. Vin. Texts II.229); II.150 (senāsana°-dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); IV.249 sq., 284; D I.128, 137 (yaððassa p.=parivāra DA I.297); M I.104 (jīvita°); III.11; S II.29; A IV.62 (citt'ālankāraṃ citta-parikkhār' atthaṃ dānaṃ), 236 (id.); J III.470 (sabba°-sampannaṃ dānaṃ with all that belongs to it); V.232; Sn 307; Nd2 585; Nett 1 sq.; 4, 108; DA I.294, 299; DhA I.38, 240 (geha°), 352 (v. l. for parikara); PvA 81 (sabba°). -saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i. e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā (see below) D II.217; M III.71. (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the "set of necessaries" of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enumd in stock phrase "cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-p." i. e. robe, alms-bowl, seat & bed, medicine as help in illness. Thus freq. found in Canon, e. g. at Vin III.132; D III.268; S IV.288, 291; Nd2 523 (as 1st part of "yañña"); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts III.343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites: see below) at Vin II.267. Later we find another set of mendicants' requisites designated as "aṭṭha parikkhārā," the 8 requirements. They are enumd in verse at J I.65= DA I.206, viz. ticīvaraṃ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya-) bandhanaṃ, parissāvana, i. e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water-strainer. They are expld in detail DA I.206 sq. Cp. also J IV.342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra-dhara); V.254 (kāyabandhana-parissāvanasūci-vāsi-satthakāni; the last-named article being "scissors" instead of a razor); DhA II.61 (°dhara thera). - (c) In other combns: satta nagara° A IV.106 sq. (cp. nagarûpakārikā D I.105); satta samādhi° D II.216; M III.71; A IV.40; soḷasa° (adj.) of yañña: having sixteen accessories D I.134 (cp. Dial. I.174, 177), bahu° having a full equipment, i. e. being well-off Vin III.138; J I.126. - Note. A set of 12 requisites (1-8 as under b and 4 additional) see detailed at DA I.207. Parikkhārika (-°) (adj.) [fr. parikkhāra] one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumn of p. at DA I.204-207. {Parikkharika} Parikkhiṇṇa {Parikkhinna} at DA I.45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q. v.). Parikkhitta [pp. of parikkhipati] thrown round, overspread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by (-°) M III.46; A IV.106 (su°); S I.331 (read valligahana°); Pv {Parikkhitta} Pāli Text Society 964 Pāli-English Dictionary IV.336 (v. l. for pariyanta as in I.1013); Vism 71 (of gāma); ThA 70; DhA I.42 (pākāra°); PvA 52 (=pariyanta I.1013), 283 (sāṇī-pākāra°); Sdhp 596. Parikkhipati {Parikkhipati} [pari+kṣip] to throw round, encircle, surround Vin II.154; J I.52 (sāṇiṃ), 63, 150, 166; II.104; III.371; DhA I.73. - pp. parikkhitta (q. v.). - Caus. II. parikkhipāpeti J I.148 (sāṇiṃ); II.88 (sāṇi-pākāraṃ). Parikkhīṇa {Parikkhina} [pp. of parikkhīyati] exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin IV.258; M III.80; S I.92; II.24; V.145, 461; D III.97, 133 (°bhava-saṃyojana); It 79 (id.); A IV.418, 434 (āsavā); Sn 175, 639, 640; Dh 93; Pug 11, 14; Miln 23 (°āyuka); PvA 112 (°tiṇodak'- āhāra). Parikkhīṇatta {Parikkhinatta} (nt.) [abstr. of parikkhīṇa] the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DA I.128 (jīvitassa); PvA 63 (kammassa), 148 (id.). Parikkhīyati {Parikkhiyati} [pari+khīyati of kṣi2] to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Th 2, 347 (=parQkhayaṃ gacchati ThA 242). - pp. parikkhīṇa (q. v.). Parikkhepa {Parikkhepa} [fr. pari+kṣip] 1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin IV.304; J I.338; IV.266; SnA 29 (°dāru etc.). - 2. circumference J I.89; V.37; Vism 205; KhA 133; SnA 194. - 3. "closing in on," i. e. fight, quarrel It 11, 12. Pariklesa [pari+klesa] hardship, misery, calamity S I.132 =Th 2, 191; Th 2, 345 (=parikilesa ThA 241). {Pariklesa} Parikhā {Parikha} (f.) [fr. pari+khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikhā] a ditch, trench, moat Vin II.154; D I.105 (ukkiṇṇa-parikha adj. with trenches dug deep, combd with okkhittapaligha; expld by khātaparikha ṭhapita-paligha at DA I.274); M I.139 (sankiṇṇa° adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, combd with ukkhittapaligha)=A III.84 sq.= Nd2 284 C (spelt kkh); A IV.106 (nagara°); J I.240, 490; IV.106 (ukkiṇṇ'antaraparikha); VI.276, 432; Cp II.13 (spelt kkh); Miln 1 (gambhīra°); SnA 519 (°taṭa); PvA 201 (°piṭṭhe), 261 (id.), 278 (id., v. l. °parikkhāṭa-tīre). Parigaṇhana {Pariganhana} (nt.) [fr. parigaṇhāti] comprehension J II.7 (°paððā comprehensive wisdom). Parigaṇhāti & Pariggheti (Caus.) [pari+gṛh] 1. to embrace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up M I.80, 137; J III.189; DA I.45. - 2. to catch, grasp DhA I.68. - 3. to go all round DhA I.91 (sakala-jambudīpaṃ). - Caus. °ggaheti (aor. °esi, ger. °etvā, inf. °etuṃ) 1. to embrace, comprehend, fig. master Vin II.213; J II.28; III.332; SnA 549 (mantāya); DhA III.242; PvA 68 (hattesu), 93; VvA 75. - 2. to explore, examine, find out, search J I.162; II.3; III.85, 268 (°ggahetuṃ), 533; V.93, 101; DhA II.56. - Caus. II. parigaṇhāpeti J I.290. - 3. to comprise, summarise KhA 166, 167. - pp. pariggahita (q. v.). {Pariganhati} { Pariggheti} Parigalati {Parigalati} [pari+galati, see gaḷati] to sink down, slip or glide off J IV.229, 250; V.68. Parigilati {Parigilati} [pari+gilati] to swallow J I.346. Pāli Text Society 965 Pāli-English Dictionary Parigūhati {Pariguhati} [pari+gūhati] to hide, conceal A I.149; IV.10, 31; Pv III.43 (=paṭicchādeti PvA 194). Parigūhanā {Pariguhana} (f.) [fr. patigūhati] hiding, concealment, deception Pug 19, 23. Pariggaha {Pariggaha} [fr. pari+gṛh] 1. wrapping round, enclosing Th 1, 419 (? cp. Brethren 217 n. 6). - 2. taking up, seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of "grasping" Sn 779 (=taṇhā and diṭṭhi° Nd1 57); Ps I.172; II.182 (nekkhamma° etc.); Nd1 11 (itthi° acquiring a wife); J VI.259; Miln 244 (āhara° abstinence in food), 313 (id.). - 3. belongings, property, possessions D II.58; III.289=A IV.400; M I.137 (quoted at Nd1 122); S I.93; Sn 805; J IV.371; VI.259; PvA 76 (°bhūta belonging to, the property of); VvA 213, 321. sa° with all (its) belongings S I.32. - 4. a wife ThA 271; PvA 161 (kata° wedded), 282; ThA 271. sapariggaha>apariggaha married>unmarried (in general, with ref. to the man as well as the woman) D I.247; J IV.190; VI.348, 364. - 5. grace, favour DA I.241 (āmisa° material grace). Pariggahita {Pariggahita} [pp. of parigaṇhāti] taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin III.51 (manussānaṃ p. by men); IV.31, 278; DhA I.13 (amanussa° by ghosts); PvA 87, 133; Sdhp 64. - f. abstr, °tā being possessed (Vism 121 (amanussa°). Pariggāhaka {Pariggahaka} (adj.) [fr. pariggaha] including, occupying Nett 79 (=upathambhaka C. as quoted in Index p. 276). Parigha {Parigha} [Vedic parigha, of which the usual P. representative is paligha (q. v.)] a crossbar ThA 211 (°daṇḍa). Parighaṃsati {Parighamsati} [pari+ghaṃsati1] to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaṃsanto Vin I.46; II.208. Paricakkhitar {Paricakkhitar} [n. ag. fr. pari+cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu] one who looks round or enquires, neg. a° J V.77. Paricaya {Paricaya} [fr. pari+ci] familiarity, acquaintance J VI.337; Vism 153; PvA 74. - adj. (-°) acquainted with, versed in (loc.) J II.249 (jāta°), VvA 24 (kata°); PvA 4 (id.), 129 (id.). Paricaraṇa {Paricarana} (nt.) [fr. pari+car] 1. going about, mode of life DhA I.382 (gihīnaṃ °ṭṭhānaṃ, v. l. for vicaraṇa°). - 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping DhA I.199 (aggi-p°ṭṭhāna fire-place). - 3. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaṃ) PvA 16. See also paricāraṇā. Paricaraṇaka {Paricaranaka} [fr. paricaraṇa] servant, attendant DA I.269. Paricarati {Paricarati} [pari+carati] to move about, in var. senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after A III.94 (upaṭṭhahati+) J V.421; PvA 175. - 2. to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) D I.101; S I.166; Dh 107; J I.494; Sn p. 79 (=payirupāsati SnA 401). - 3. to roam about, to feast one's senses, to amuse oneself, play, sport PvA 77 (indriyāni=kīḷāmi Pv II.121). - We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e. g. at DhA II.232; cp. paricāreti for °hāreti PvA 175; paricaraṇā for °haraṇā PvA 219. - pp. pariciṇṇa; Caus. paricāreti (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 966 Pāli-English Dictionary Paricariyā {Paricariya} (f.) [fr. paricarati] going about, service, ministration, worship S I.182; A I.132; DhA II.232 (aggi°). Occurs also as pāricariyā (q. v.), e. g. at J V.154. See also paricārikā. Paricāra {Paricara} fr. [paricāreti] serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Th 1, 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhagū). Paricāraka {Paricaraka} Paricāraṇā {Paricarana} (adj.-n.) [fr. paricāreti] attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp. BSk. paricāraka attendant AvŚ I.170; II.167] D I.101; II.200; Th 1, 475; Sn p. 218 (Nd2 reads °cārika); J I.84; IV.362; Pv IV.87 (not °vāraka); DA I.137, 269. See also paricārika. (f.) [fr. paricāreti] care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv II.12 (gloss for °cārika); PvA 219. Paricārika {Paricarika} (adj.-n.)=paricāraka (servant, attendant) A V.263 (aggi° fire-worshipper); Pv II.620 (amacca° minister & attendant); ThA 267; SnA 597. - f. °carikā (1) a maid-servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal) attendant M I.253; cp. S I.125; J I.204 (pāda°), 291; II.395; IV.35 (veyyāvacca-kārikā p.), 79; V.420; Pv II.126 (=veyyāvacca-kārinī PvA 157); PvA 46. - (2) care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv IV.12 (=indriyānaṃ pariharaṇā PvA 219; gloss °cāraṇā). Paricārita {Paricarita} [pp. of paricāreti] served by; delighted by, indulging in M I.504. Paricārin {Paricarin} (adj. n.) [fr. paricāreti] serving, attending, f. a maid-servant J II.395. Paricāreti {Paricāreti} [Caus. of paricarati] 1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 114 sq., 421] S I.124 (pāde); DhA III.196 (id.); J I.81 (°cāritabba-ṭṭhāna place of worship); IV.274; V.9. - Pass. paricāriyati, ppr. °iyamāna M I.46, 504; J I.58. In this sense it may also be taken as "being delighted or entertained by." - 2. to amuse oneself, gratify one's senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 1, and freq. phrase paðcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samangibhūtā p. e. g. MVastu I.32] Vin II.290; III.72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.); D I.36 (id.), 104 (id.); M I.504 (id.); Th 1, 96 (saggesu); Pv I.116 (=yathā sukkhaṃ cārenti indriyāni PvA 58); IV.129 (read °cārayanti for °vārayanti, cp. PvA 228 indriyāni p.). - pp. paricārita q. v. See also parivāreti. Pariciṇṇa {Paricinna} [pari+ciṇṇa, pp. of carati] 1. surrounded, attended J V.90. - 2. worshipped M I.497; S IV.57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Th 1, 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā). - 3. practised, performed Miln 360. Paricita1 {Paricita} [pp. of pari+ci, cinoti, P. cināti] gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented M III.97; S I.116; II.264; IV.200; A II.67 sq., 185; III.45, 152; IV.282, 300; V.23; Th 1, 647; Ps I.172 (expld); PvA 67; Sdhp 409. Paricita2 {Paricita} [pp. of pari+ci, ciketi, P. cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita1] known, scrutinized, accustomed, acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin II.95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi° etc. read aggiparijita); ThA 52; Miln 140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs IV.19. -aparicita unfamiliar DhA I.71. Pāli Text Society 967 Pāli-English Dictionary Paricumbati {Paricumbati} [pari+cumbati] to kiss (all round, i. e. from all sides), to cover with kisses M II.120; S I.178, 193; A IV.438; DhA I.330. Paricca {Paricca} (indecl.) [ger. of pari+i, cp. Sk. (Gr.) parītya & P. pariyeti] lit. "going round," i. e. having encircled, grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving; freq. in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one's mind, e. g. at D I.79; M I.445; III.12; S II.121, 233; It 12; Vbh 329; Vism 409 (=paricchinditvā). See pariyeti. Pariccajati {Pariccajati} [pari+cajati of tyaj] to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject S I.44; It 94; J II.335; VI.259 (=chaḍḍeti) Miln 207; DhA IV.204; PvA 121, 132, 221 (read jīvitaṃ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. BSk. jīvitaṃ parityakṣyāmi AvŚ I.210); Sdhp 539. - pp. pariccatta (q. v.). Pariccajana {Pariccajana} (nt.) & °nā (f.) [fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, rejection, leaving It 11, 12. - 2. giving out, bestowing, giving a donation PvA 124. Pariccajanaka {Pariccajanaka} [fr. prec.] one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor PvA 7. Pariccatta {Pariccatta} [pp. of pariccajati; cp. BSk. parityakta in meaning "given to the poor" AvŚ I.3] given up, abandoned, thrown out, left behind J I.69, 174, 477; Miln 280; PvA 178, 219 (=virādhita); Sdhp 374. Pariccāga {Pariccaga} [fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation A I.92 (āmisa° & dhamma° material & spiritual); Ps II.98; J I.12 (jīvita°); DhA III.441 (paðca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices, i. e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife, of children, of kingdom, of life and limb). - 2. expense DhA II.231 (sahassa° expenditure of a thousand coins). - 3. giving (to the poor), liberality DhsA 157; SnA 295 (mahā°, corresponding to mahādāna); PvA 7 sq.; 27, 120 sq., 124. Paricchada {Paricchada} [fr. pari+chad] a cover, covering J I.341, 466. Paricchanna {Paricchanna} [pari+channa, pp. of chad] enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin IV.17. Paricchāta {Paricchata} [pari+chāta] very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp 102 (°odara-ttaca). Paricchādanā {Paricchadana} (f.) [fr. pari+chad] covering, hiding, concealing Pug 19=23=Vbh 358. Paricchindati [pari+chindati] 1. to mark out VvA 291 (vasana-ṭṭhānaṃ). - 2. to determine, to fix accurately, to decide J I.170 (padaṃ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaṃ); III.371; IV.77; Miln 272; Vism 184, 409; SnA 434 (paððāya p.). - 3. to limit, restrict, define Miln 131; DA I.132. - pp. paricchinna (q. v.). {Paricchindati} Paricchindana {Paricchindana} (nt.) [fr. paricchindati] "cutting up," definition, analysis VvA 114. Paricchindanaka {Paricchindanaka} (adj.) [fr. pari+chind] marking out, defining, analysing, DhsA 157 (ðāṇa). Pāli Text Society 968 Pāli-English Dictionary Paricchinna {Paricchinna} [pp. of paricchindati] 1. restricted, limited, small DhA I.58; PvA 136 (°ppamāṇa). - 2. divided, measured Vism 184; PvA 185 (=mita). Pariccheda {Pariccheda} [fr. pari+chid; late Sk: (philos.) in same meaning] 1. exact determination, circumscription, range, definition, connotation, measure J III.371; Vism 184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life-principle); SnA 160, 229, 231, 376, 408, 503; KhA 182 (gaṇana°); VvA 194 (id.); DhsA 3; DhA II.73 (avadhi°); PvA 254 (kāla°), 255 (āyuno p.); VbhA 417 (citta°, for cittaṇa Vbh 330). - 2. limit, boundary Miln 131, 405; J III.504 (°nadī-tīra). - 3. limitation, restriction DhA II.88, 98; PvA 20 (°ṃ karoti to restrict). - 4. division (of time), in ratti° & divā°, night- & day-division Vism 416. - 5. (town)-planning, designing VbhA 331. Paricchedaka {Paricchedaka} (adj.) [fr. pariccheda] determining, fixing VbhA 346 (uṭṭhāna-velā °ā saððā). Parijana {Parijana} [pari+jana] "the people round," i. e. attendants, servants, retinue, suite Vin I.15; J I.72, 90; DhA III.188; VvA 63; PvA 58, 62. -saparijana with one's servants Cp II.82 (T. saparijjana metri causā). Parijapati {Parijapati} [pari+japati, cp. BSk. parijapta enchanted Divy 397] to mutter (spells), to practise divination J III.530; Miln 200 (vijjaṃ). Parijapana {Parijapana} (nt.) [fr. parijapati] mumbling, uttering spells Miln 356 (mantaṃ). Parijānanā {Parijanana} (f.) [pari+jānanā=jānana] cognition, recognition, knowledge Nett 20 (as paraphrase of pariððā). Parijānāti [pari+jānāti] to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out M I.293; S I.11, 24; II.45, 99, III.26, 40, 159; IV.50; V.52, 422; A III.400 sq.; Sn 202, 254, 943; Nd1 426; J IV.174; Th 1, 226; Miln 69; DhA IV.233 °jānitvā). - ppr. parijānaṃ S III.27; IV.89; It 3 sq. - pp. pariððāta (q. v.). ger. pariððāya see under pariððā1. {Parijanati} Parijiṇṇa {Parijinna} [pp. of pari+jar, i. e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading °jīna of ji, i. e. wasted, see parijīyati] worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced J I.111 (seṭṭhi-kulaṃ p.); V.99, 100 (bhoga°); VI.364; Dh 148; DhA II.272 (°kula). Parijita {Parijita} [pp. of pari+ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijīta, Sk. form of P. parijīna, pp. of pari+ jīyati, but hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts III.75] overpowered, injured, damaged Vin II.109 (so read for paricita). Parijīyati [pari+jīyati] to become worn out, to decay, fade, S I.186; J IV.111. Spelt °jiyyati at Th 1, 1215. - pp. parijīna (see parijiṇṇa). {Parijiyati} Parijegucchā {Parijeguccha} (f.) [pari+jegucchā] intense dislike of, disgust with (-°) D I.25, cp. DA I.115. Pāli Text Society 969 Pāli-English Dictionary Parijjanā {Parijjana} is doubtful reading at A III.38 (v. l. parivajjanā) =IV.266 (T. reads parijjana, cp. parijana; vv. ll. parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?. Pariñña (-°) [the adj. form of pariððā, cp. abhiðða] knowing, recognising, understanding It 44 (bhūta° so, or should we read bhūtapariððāya?); also in cpd. pariððacārin (to be expd as shortened gr. pariððā?) Sn 537 (=paððāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge, i. e. rightly determining); also (abstr.) pariññatthaṃ at It 29 (abhiññatthaṃ+), cp. S IV.253. {Parinna} Pariññā1 {Parinna} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. parijðāna; the form parijðā given by BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr. pari+jðā] accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension, full understanding M I.66, 84; S III.26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā° moha° ayaṃ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; IV.16, 51, 138, 206, 253 sq.; V.21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292; A I.277 (kāmānaṃ rūpānaṃ vedanānaṃ), 299; V.64; Pug 37; Nett 19, 20, 31; KhA 87; SnA 251. - In exegetical literature three pariððās are distinguished, viz. ðāta°, tīraṇa° pahāna°, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts. See e. g. the detailed interpretation at Nd1 52 sq.; Nd2 413; J VI.259 (where ðāṇa° for ðāta°); DhA II.172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at SnA 517. - adj. pariñña. - The form pariððāya is an apparent instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijānāti (like abhiððāya>abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā. It is freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaṃ p.); its meaning is "knowing well in right knowledge": S V.182; Sn 455, 737, 778 (=parijānitvā Nd1 51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā DhA IV.232); It 62; J VI.259. Pariññā2 {Parinna} (indecl.) [ger. of parijānāti for *parijðāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiððā] having full knowledge or understanding of Sn 779 (=parijānitvā Nd1 56 & SnA 518); It 4 (perhaps to be read pariððāya for pariððā so). Pariññāta {Parinnata} [pp. of parijānāti] well understood, thoroughly known Th 2, 106; M I.1 sq.; S II.99; V.182; PvA 1, 287. With ref. to food (°bhojana & °āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariððās (q. v.); Dh 92 (°bhojano adj. one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. DhA II.172); Miln 352 (°āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita: consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow M I.293. Pariññātatta {Parinnatatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariððāta] the fact of having full or exact knowledge S V.182. Pariññātāvin {Parinnatavin} (adj.) [fr. pariððāta] one who has correct knowledge S III.159 sq., 191 (puggala). Pariññeyya {Parinneyya} (adj.) [grd. of parijānāti] knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) M I.4; S III.26; IV.29; DhA IV.233 (cp. Nd2 under abhiññeyya). Pariḍahati {Paridahati} [pari+ḍadati] to burn: Pass. pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched M I.422; S I.188=Th 1, 1224; A I.137; III.95, 98; Sn 63; Ps I.128 (ḷ); Pv I.64 (=parito jhāyati PvA 33); Miln 303; PvA 60. Cp. pariḷāha. Pāli Text Society 970 Pāli-English Dictionary Pariṇata {Parinata} [pp. of pariṇamati] 1. bent down, crooked VvA 222 (°dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean "long"?). - 2. changed S III.40. - 3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe J III.174, 286, 431, VvA 288; DhA I.47 (gabbha). Pariṇamati {Parinamati} [pari+namati] 1. to change (trs. & intrs.), lit. to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (acc.) S III.3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi°, cp. p. 40); Miln 136 (bhojanaṃ visamaṃ p. food changes, i. e. turns bad), 277 (id.); VvA 13; PvA 144 (for parivattati Pv II.105), 194 (id. III.44). - 2. to change into a diff. state, to ripen, mature (often said of the fœtus) Miln 93, 358. - pp. pariṇata (q. v.). - Caus. pariṇāmeti (q. v.). Pariṇāma {Parinama} [fr. pari+nam, cp. class Sk. pariṇāma in all meanings] "bending round," i. e. 1. change, alteration, in utu° (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with ref. to illnesses caused by such (°ja ābādhā)=illness arising from the change of season A II.87; III.131; V.110; Nd2 3041; Miln 112, 135 sq., 304; Vism 31. - 2. alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā-pariṇāmaṃ gacchati M I.188; S I.168; A III.30; cp. MVastu I.211. - 3. ripening Miln 93. 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense: dispensation, destiny J V.171; Pv IV.325; PvA 252, 254. - Cp. vi°. Pariṇāmana {Parinamana} (nt.) [fr. parinamati] diverting to somebody's use Vin IV.157. Pariṇāmita {Parinamita} [pp. of pariṇāmeti] 1. bent down J VI.269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, C. expls as "entangled"). - 2. issued, apportioned, destined J V.171; PvA 254. Pariṇāmitar {Parinamitar} [n. ag. of pariṇāmeti] one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny J VI.189. Pariṇāmin {Parinamin} (adj.) [fr. pariṇāma] ending in, resulting in (-°) M I.11, 526; III.88. Pariṇāmeti {Parinameti} [Caus. of parinamati] to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain, appropriate D I.92; Vin III.259 (puttassa rajjaṃ p. for his son); IV.156; PvA 281. - ppr. °ṇāmayamāna J V.424. See also āvajjeti. - pp. pariṇāmita (q. v.). Pariṇāyaka {Parinayaka} [fr. pari+ni, cp. pariṇeti] a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Bdhgh on D II.177; the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211, 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i. e. a wonderful Adviser D I.89; II.17, 177; M I.220; II.175; A III.151; Sn p. 106 (cp. SnA 450=DA I.250); J I.155; IV.93; Miln 38, 314. - f. pariṇāyikā. Ep. of wisdom, synonymous with paððā, i. e. insight, cleverness Dhs 1057; Pug 25; Vism 3; DhsA 148. Pariṇāha {Parinaha} [fr. pari+nah] compass, circumference, breadth, extent, girth S II.206 (of the moon)=A V.19; J III.192, 277, 370; V.299; Pug 53; Miln 282, 311; SnA 382 (āroha+). Pariṇeti {Parineti} [pari+neti] to lead round or about S II.128. Paritajjita {Paritajjita} [pari+tajjita] scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp 147. Paritatta {Paritatta} [pp. of paritappati] tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Miln 313. Pāli Text Society Paritappati 971 Pāli-English Dictionary [Pass. of pari+tap] to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Th 2, 313 (=santappati ThA 233); Miln 313. - pp. paritatta (q. v.). {Paritappati} Paritasita {Paritasita} (nt.) [pari+tasita1 or tasita2] worry, excitement D I.40 (v. l. °tassita, cp. Dial I.53). Paritassati {Paritassati} (°tasati) [pari+tasati1, in form clearly=Sk. paritṛṣyati, but freq. confused with tasati2, cp. tasa. Sn 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2] to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried D II.68; M I.36, 67, 151; S II.82, 194; III.43, 55; IV.23, 65, 168; A II.27; III.133 sq.; Sn 621 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati SnA 467, thus combining tasati1 & tasati2), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd1 373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya, thus taken as tasati2); Miln 253, 400; Dh 397 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati DhA IV.159); Sdhp 476. - ppr. aparitassaṃ D II.68; M I.67; S II.82; III.55; It 94. - pp. paritasita (q. v.). Paritassanā {Paritassana} (f.) [fr. paritassati, q. v. for meaning] trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing D I.17 (=ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DA I.111); M I.136; III.227; S III.15 sq., 133; Miln 253, 400. - neg. a° S III.15; M I.136. Paritassin {Paritassin} (adj.) [fr. paritassati] trembling, excited, worrying, only neg. a° A IV.108, 111, 230 sq. Paritāpa {Paritapa} =foll. Miln 313 (ātāpa+). Paritāpana {Paritapana} (nt.) [pari+tāpana, of tap] tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification M I.78, 341-344; A I.151, 296; II.205 sq. (atta° self-mortification, opp. para°); Pug 55, 56, 61; PvA 18 (atta°), 30 (id.). Often combd with ātāpana (q. v.). Paritāpeti [pari+tapeti] to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment M I.341 (ātāpeti+), 506; S IV.337; A III.54, 380; J V.420 (mā paritāpi). {Paritapeti} Parituleti {Parituleti} [pari+tuleti] to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism 522. - VbhA 130. Parito {Parito} (adv.) [fr. pari, cp. Sk. paritaḥ] round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin II.194; SnA 393; VvA 316; PvA 33. Paritoseti {Paritoseti} [pari+toseti] to please, appease, satisfy, make happy J I.262; III.386; V.216; PvA 213 (v. l. SS+ āsiðcati). Paritta1 {Paritta} (adj.) [BSk. parītta, pari+pp. of dā in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388, whereas P. paritta means trifling. The BSk. form parītta (e. g. Divy 204, 498, 504; AvŚ I.329; II.137) may be a re-translation of P. paritta, which may correspond to Sk, prarikta, pp. of pra+ric, meaning "that which is exceeded," i. e. left (over or behind)] small, little, inferior, insignificant, limited, of no account, trifling Vin I.270; D I.45; M III.148 (°ābha of limited splendour, opp. appamāṇ'- ābha); S II.98; IV.160 (opp. adhimatta); A IV.241; V.63; It 71; Sn 61, 390 (°pañña of inferior wisdom, cp. Nd2 415), 1097 (id.); J I.221; Dhs 181, 584, 1018, 1034 (cp. Dhs trsl. 265, 269); DA I.119; KhA 133 (°dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 Pāli Text Society 972 Pāli-English Dictionary do.); PvA 198; Sdhp 251, 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd2 414; catukka Nd2 415 (opp. mahā); appaka PvA 48, 60; appama taka PvA 262; ittara PvA 60; oma SnA 347; oraka SnA 489; lāmaka SnA 347. Paritta2 {Paritta} (nt.) & Parittā (f.) [fr. pari+trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna] protection, safeguard; (protective) charm, palliative, amulet Vin II.110 (atta° f. personal protection) IV.305 (gutt'atthāya °ṃ pariyāpuṇāti); A II.73 (rakkhā+parittā); J I.200 (manto+parittaṃ+ vaḍḍhiṃ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi °ṃ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); IV.31 (osadhaṃ vā °ṃ vā); Miln 150 (f. & nt.). - Var. parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism 414 (Khandha°; Dhajagga°: S I.218 sq.; Āṭānāṭiya°: D III.195 sq.; Mora°: J II.33). Cf. Dialogues III.185. -vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet J I.396, 399. -suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm J I.396, 399. Parittaka {Parittaka} [paritta1+ka] small, insignificant, little Nd1 306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd2 414); Pv I.1011; II.967; Miln 121 (a°), 253; DA I.170 (for appa); PvA 51; Sdhp 42. - f. parittikā Th 1, 377. Parittāṇa (nt.) [pari+tāṇa. Cp. Epic Sk. paritrāṇa] protection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety D I.9 (sara° from an arrow, i. e. a shield); III.189; J VI.455; PvA 284; Sdhp 396. -kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin II.152, cp. Vin. Texts III.174. {Parittana} Parittāyaka {Parittayaka} (adj.) [fr. pari+tāyati] safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism 376 (angāra-vassaṃ p. thero). Parittāsin {Parittasin} (adj.) [pari+tāsin, fr. tāsa of tasati2] being in dread of (-°) S I.201. Paridaṇḍa {Paridanda} (adj.) [pari+daṇḍa] "with a stick around," i. e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. "saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi" a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women M I.286=III.46=Vin III.139=A V.264= VvA 73. Paridamana {Paridamana} (nt.) [pari+damana] controlling, taming Vism 375. Paridameti {Paridameti} [pari+dameti] to control, tame, keep under Vism 376. Paridahati {Paridahati} [pari+dahati, of dhā] to put round, put on, clothe Dh 9 (fut. °dahessati); J II.197; V.434 (ger. °dahitvā); VI.500; Pv II.118; PvA 76 (vatthāni), 77, 127 (°dahissati for paridhassati Pv II.936, which read for T. parivassati). ger also paridayha J V.400 (=nivāsetvā cp pārupitvā ca C.). - pp. paridahita (q. v.). - Caus. II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed PvA 49 (=acchādeti). Paridahita {Paridahita} [pp. of paridahati] put round, put on (of clothing) PvA 43. Paridīpaka {Paridipaka} (adj.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka1] illuminating, explaining, explanatory SnA 40 Paridīpana {Paridipana} (nt.) [pari+dīpana] illuminating, elucidating, explanation Miln 318; KhA 111; SnA 394 sq. Pāli Text Society 973 Pāli-English Dictionary Paridīpanā {Paridipana} (f.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana] explanation, illustration Miln 131. Paridīpita {Paridipita} [pp. of paridīpeti] 1. in flames, set ablaze Th 2, 200 (=punappunaṃ ādīpitatāya p. ThA 170), - 2. explained, made clear, illuminated Vism 58; KvuA 8; Sdhp 305. Paridīpeti {Paridipeti} [pari+dīpeti] to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Miln 131; Sdhp 491. pp. paridīpita (q. v.). Paridūseti {Pariduseti} [pari+dūseti] to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp 409. Parideva {Parideva} [pari+deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sk. (Mbhār. VII.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.] lamentation, wailing M I.200; S II.1; III.3 sq.; A I.144; II.195; Sn 328, 592, 811, 923, 969; J I.146; VI,188, 498; Nd1 128, 134, 370, 492; Ps I.11 sq., 38, 59, 65; Vbh 100, 137; Nett 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at D II.306=Nd2 416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṃ paridevitattaṃ; often combd with soka grief, e. g. at D I.36; Sn 862; It 89; PvA 39, 61. - Bdhgh at DA I.121 explns it as "sokaṃ nissitalālappana-lakkhaṇo p." Paridevati {Paridevati} [pari+devati, div] to wail, lament D II.158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha); Sn 582, 774=Nd1 38 (as °devayati), 166; J VI.188, 498; PvA 18 (socati+); ger. °devamāna S I.199, 208; J V.106; PvA 38, & °devayamāna Sn 583. - grd. °devaniya Nd1 492; SnA 573, & °devaneyya Sn 970 (=ādevaneyya Nd1 493). - pp. paridevita (q. v.). Paridevanā {Paridevana} (f.)=parideva, Sn 585; Nd2 416 (see under parideva) Pv I.43 (=vācāvippalāpa PvA 18); I.123; PvA 41. Paridevita {Paridevita} (nt.) [pp. of paridevati] lamentation, wailing Sn 590; Pv I.123 (=ruditaṃ PvA 63); Miln 148 (kanditap.°-lālappita-mukha). Paridevitatta {Paridevitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. paridevita] lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in expln of parideva at D II.306=Nd2 416. Pariddava {Pariddava} [according to Trenckner M I.532 (on M I.56, where SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not=Sk. paridrava, which is only a late re-translation of the P. word]=parideva M I.56 (soka°); A I.221; Th 2, 345 (soka°); Sn 1052, cp. Nd2 416 (see parideva). Paridhaṃsaka {Paridhamsaka} (adj.) [fr. paridhaṃsati] destructive, ruinous PvA 15 (°vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger). Paridhaṃsati {Paridhamsati} [pari+dhaṃsati] to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin It 90; Miln 249, 265. - Caus. paridhaṃseti in same meaning at Nd1 5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati. Paridhāvati {Paridhavati} [pari+dhāvati] to run about J I.127 (ādhāvati+), 134 (id.), 158 (id.); II.68 (id.)=ThA 54; V.106. 974 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paridhota {Paridhota} [pp. of paridhovati] washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified D I.124. Paridhovati {Paridhovati} [pari+dhovati] to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin I.302. - pp. paridhota. Pariniṭṭhāna {Parinitthana} (nt.) [pari+niṭṭhāna] 1. end PvA 287. - 2. accomplishment J V.400. Pariniṭṭhāpeti {Parinitthapeti} [pari+niṭṭhāpeti] to bring to an end, attain, accomplish DhsA 363. Pariniṭṭhita {Parinitthita} (adj.) [pari+niṭṭhita] accomplished M III.53; Th 2, 283; DhA II.78. Parininna {Parininna} (adj.) [pari+ninna] deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp 103. Parinipphanna {Parinipphanna} (adj.) [pari+nipphanna] predetermined Kvu 459 (v. l. °nibbāna), 626 (a°); cp. Kvu trsl. 2616, 3681. Parinibbāna {Parinibbana} (nt.) [pari+nibbāna] "complete Nibbāna" in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i. e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration, death (after the last life-span of an Arahant). This is the so-called "an-upādi-sesa Parinibbāna," or "extinction with no rebirth-substratum left." 2. release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well-being or peace of soul. This is the so-called "sa-upādisesa-P.," or "extinction (of passion) with some substratum left." - The two kinds are distinguished by Bdhgh at DhA II.163 as follows: "arahatta-pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa-vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa - upādi - sesena, carima - citta - nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā anupādi-sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibb ānehi parinibbutā, an-upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gatā." - 1. D II.72 sq. (the famous Mahā-parinibbāna-suttanta or "Book of the Great Decease"); M III.127, 128; A II.79 (°samaye); III.409 (°dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika, cp. DhA IV.42); Mhvs 7, 1 (°mañcamhi nipanna); VvA 158; PvA 244. - 2. D III.55; A V.64; Sn 514 (°gata+ vitiṇṇa-kankho); Vv 5324 (°gata+sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā-parinibbāna, i. e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit. without fuel), which corresponds to Bdhgh's term "kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesa p." (see above); thus at M I.148; S IV.48; V.29; A I.44; V.65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc).; A V.233=253=Dh 89 (+khīṇāsava). Parinibbānika {Parinibbanika} (adj.) [fr. parinibbāna] one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction D III.264; 265 (opasamika+). Parinibbāpana {Parinibbapana} (nt.) [pari+nibbāpana] refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Ps I.174 (atta-damatha, atta-samatha, atta-p.). Parinibbāpetar {Parinibbapetar} [n. ag. fr. parinibbāpeti] one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer M II.102 (dametar sametar p.). Parinibbāpeti {Parinibbapeti} [pari+nibbāpeti] to bring to complete coolness, or training (see next), emancipation or cessation of the life-impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna, to exercise selfcontrol, to extinguish fever of craving, or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the Pāli Text Society 975 Pāli-English Dictionary quāsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) D III.61=A III.46 (attānaṃ dameti, sameti, p.); M I.45 (fut. °bbapessati); A II.68 (attānaṃ d. s. p.). - pp. parinibbuta (see p. No. 3) & parinibbāpita (only in n. ag. °āpetar, q. v.). Parinibbāyati (& °nibbāti) [pari+nibb° cp. BSk. parinirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti) & ger. parinirvātavya ibid. 402] 1. to be completed, perfected, in any work or art, e. g. of a trained horse, M I.446. Cp. teleio/w. - 2. to die without being reborn, to reach complete extinction of existence Vin II.194 (Tathāgathā °āyanti); M III.128 (aor °nibbāyi); S V.152 (°nibbāyeyyaṃ), 261 (°nibbāyissāmi); A II.120 (anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā p.); IV.202 (id.), 313 (id.), Miln 175 (id.); J I.28 (id.), 55 (id.); VvA 158 (fut. °nibbāyissāmi); PvA 21, 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). - 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life D II.68 (cp. Dial. II.65 & Brethren 417); S IV.102 (diṭṭh' eva dhamme), ibid. (sa-upādāno devānaṃ indo na parinibbāyati), 168; A III.41=Vin II.148, 164 (parinibbāti anāsavo); A IV.98 (aor. °nibbiṃsu anāsavā) Th 1, 100 (fut. °nibbissati anāsavo), 364; It 93 (°nibbanti), cp. 95; Dh 126 (°nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!); Vbh 426 (sabbāsave pariððāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp 584 (°nibbanti mahoghen'eva aggino). - pp. parinibbuto (q. v.). Caus. parinibbāpeti (q. v.). {Parinibbayati} Parinibbāyana {Parinibbayana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. parinibbāyin] passing away, see parinibbāyin 2 b. Parinibbāyin {Parinibbayin} [fr. parinibbāyati] one who attains Parinibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use, when taken in both senses of sa- and an- upādisesa parinibbāna; e. g. at A II.155 sq., where the distinction is made between a sa-sankhāra p. and an a-sankhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of "Never-returners" (i. e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā-parinibbāyin, upahacca°, sasankhāra°, uddhaṃsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at D III.237; S V.201, 237; A I.233; IV.14, 71 sq., 146, 380; V.120; Pug 16, 17. - 2. In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i. e. saupādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combns, viz. (a) tattha° (always combd with opapātika, i. e. above the ordinary cause of birth) [cp. BSk. tatraparinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533]. It is also invariably combd with anāvattidhamma, e. g. at D I.156; III.108, 132; M II.56, 146; A I.232; 245, 290; II.5, 89, 238; IV.12, 399, 423; V.343; S V.346 (cp. 406), 357; Pug 16, 62, 83. See also Kvu trsl. 742. - (b) antara° [cp. BSk. antarāparinirvāyin MVastu I.33] one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Bdhgh's expln at PugA 198 as "āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.") S V.69=A IV.70; S V.201=204, 237, 285, 314, 378; A II.134; Ps I.161; Pug 16; Nett 190 (cp. A IV.380). Parinibbuta (adj.) [pari+nibbuta] completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application see parinibbāna and cp., Mrs. Rh.D. Buddhism p. 191; Cpd. p. 168), viz. - 1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere, completely extinct, finally released (fr. rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest [cp. BSk. parinirvṛta Divy 79]. It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgatha, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With ref. to Gotama Buddha: Vin II.284 (atikkhippaṃ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata° e Bhagavati); V.119, 120; D I.204 (acira-°e Bhagavati); S I.158 (Tathāgato p. II.191); V.172 (°e Tathāgate); Vv III.97 (°e Gotame=anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā parinibbuto VvA 169); PvA 140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: S I.121, 122 (Godhika); III.124 (Vakkali); IV.63 (Puṇṇa); Sn p. 59, 60 (a Thera); Miln 390 (Arahant); VvA 158; PvA 76; {Parinibbuta} Pāli Text Society 976 Pāli-English Dictionary DhA II.163; IV.42. - 2. emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin II.156=A I.138 "spiritually free" Vin. Texts III.182); D II.123 (cp. Dial. II.132); III.55; M I.235; II.102; S I.1 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ), 7=IV.179 (aheṭhayāno+); I.54 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaṃ); 187 (p. kankhati kālaṃ); Sn 359 (+ṭhitatta), 370 (id.), 467 (p. udaka-rahado va sīto); Th 1, 5 (cp. Brethren 113); J IV.303, 453; Ud 85 (rāga-dosa-moha-kkhayā p.); Miln 50 (°atta), Freq. in combn with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e. g. Vin II.156=A I.138; Vv 5324; or nicchāta (without hunger), e. g. S III.26; IV.204= It 46; Sn 735 sq.; It 48 (esanānaṃ khayā), 49 (āsavānaṃ khayā). - 3. (to be understood as pp. of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated M I.446 (of a horse). Parinimmita {Parinimmita} at Dhs 1280 read para°. Paripakka {Paripakka} (adj.) [pari+pakka] 1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed D I.54; S IV.105=DA I.50; A IV.357; Dh 260; J I.91, 231; VI.1 (ap°); Ud 36 (id.); Miln 194, 288; DhA III.338; KhA 56; ThA 273; PvA 274 (su°). - 2. overripe, rotten Miln 223. Paripakkata {Paripakkata} [pp. of pari+pakkirati] scattered Th 2, 391 (reading doubtful). Paripaccati {Paripaccati} [pari+paccati] to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Miln 112. Paripaccana {Paripaccana} (nt.) [pari+paccana] ripening, healing (of a wound) Miln 112. Paripañhati {Paripanhati} [denom. fr. pari+pañha] to question A V.16. Paripaṭati {Paripatati} [doublet of paripatati] to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Miln 91 (opp. sambhavati); combd with paridhaṃsati at Nd1 5; Miln 249, 265. Paripatati {Paripatati} [pari+patati, cp. nipatati] to fall down, to fall off from (abl.) Vin II.152 sq.; J V.417, 420; Pv IV.53 (bhūmiyaṃ) DA I.132; PvA 37, 47, 55, 62. - Caus. paripāteti (q. v.). - See also paripaṭati. Paripantha {Paripantha} [pari+pantha] 1. "way round," edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) M I.87; J III.65. - 2. obstacle, hindrance, danger. It refers esp. to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. D I.52; S I.43; A I.153; III.252; V.136; Ps I.162; J I.395; III.268; IV.17; VI.57 (n. pl. °ayo=kilesaparipanthā C.), 75; DhA I.14 (magga°), 16 (id.), 51, 69; migānaṃ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of) deer J I.143, 154.saparipantha full of danger DhA I.63. See also palipatha. Paripanthika {Paripanthika} (adj.) [fr. paripantha] forming or causing an obstacle A I.161. The usual form is pāri° (q. v.). Paripanna {Paripanna} see palipanna. Paripāka {Paripaka} [fr. pari+pac] 1. ripeness, maturity, development, perfection D I.9 (cp. DA I.94); Ud 36 (paðca dhammā paripākāya saṃvattanti); J I.142, 148; VI.236; Miln 288; Vism 116 (bodhi°), 199; DhA I.89 (°gatatta nt. state of perfection); ThA 79; PvA 276. - 2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase "indriyānaṃ p.," i. e. decay of the (mental) faculties, in Pāli Text Society 977 Pāli-English Dictionary formula defining jarā (old age) at D II.305; M I.49; S II.2, 42 sq.; A V.203; Nd2 252; Dhs 644; cp. BSk. indriyaparipāka AvŚ II.110. Paripācana {Paripacana} (nt.) [pari+pācana1] ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365. Paripācaniya (adj.) [fr. paripācana] bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud 36) S IV.105=DA I.50; ThA 273. {Paripacaniya} Paripāceti {Paripaceti} [pari+pāceti, Caus. of pacati] to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare J VI.373 (atthaṃ p. °ācayitvā=vaḍḍhetvā C.); Miln 232, 285, 288, 296. - pp. paripācita Vism 365. Paripātita {Paripatita} [pp. of paripāteti] attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty VvA 336. Paripāteti {Paripateti} (or °pāṭeti) [Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. paripāṭayati to destroy Divy 417] to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin IV.115; J II.208; III.380; Miln 279, 367; KhA 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9). - pp. paripātita (q. v.). Paripālita {Paripalita} [pp. of paripāleti] guarded Vism 74. Paripāleti {Paripaleti} [pari+pāleti] to watch, guard (carefully) PvA 130 (=rakkhati). - pp. paripālita (q. v.). - Pass. °pāliyati Nett 105 (=rakkhitaṃ). Paripīta {Paripita} (adj.) [pari+pīta] very dear, highly valued Sdhp 571. Paripīḷita (adj.) [pari+pīlita, pp. of pīḍ] oppressed, vexed, injured Miln 97 (aggisantāpa-pariḷāha°), 303 jighacchāya). {Paripilita} Paripuochaka {Paripuochaka} ] asking a question, enquiring Nd1 234=Nd2 386; Sdhp 90. - f. abstr. paripucchakatā questioning Vism 132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhanga). Paripucchati {Paripucchati} [pari+pucchati] to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin I.47=224; II.125; S I.98; A V.16; Sn 380, 696 (°iyāna ger.), 1025; Pug 41; Miln 257, 408; SnA 111. Paripucchā {Paripuccha} (f.) [pari+pucchā] question, interrogation Vin I.190 (uddesa+); II.219 (id.); A I.285; Nd1 234 =Nd2 386 (cp. SnA III). See also uddesa. Paripuñchati {Paripunchati} [pari+puðchati] to wipe off, stroke down Vin III.14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.). Paripuṇṇa (adj.) [pp. of paripūrati] 1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied M I.200 (°sankappa), III.276; S II.283; IV.104; V.315; Ps I.172 (=pariggah' aṭṭhena parivār'aṭṭhena, paripūr'aṭṭhena p., i. e. acquiring, keeping, fulfilling); Sn 889 (°mānin=samatta-mānin Nd1 298), 904; It 40 (°sekha); Pv IV.163; Vism 45 (°sankappa): PvA 13, 54 (°vassa whose years are completed, i. e. old enough for ordination), 68 (°gabbha ready to be {Paripunna} Pāli Text Society 978 Pāli-English Dictionary delivered), 77 (vārinā). - 2, complete, i. e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Sn 548 (°kāya= lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn'anga-paccangatāya ca paripuṇṇa-sarīro SnA 452); Miln 249. Paripuṇṇatā {Paripunnata} (f.) [abstr. fr. paripuṇṇa] fullness, completeness SnA 452. Paripūra {Paripura} (adj.) [pari+pṛ] full, complete, perfected, accomplished D I.75; I.133; III.94; S II.32; IV.247; V.269 (f. °ī); A II.77; V.10 sq.; Sn 205, 1017; Ps I.15, 18, 49, 172; II.122; Pug 35, 36. aparipūra not completed, imperfect, incomplete A II.77; IV.314 sq.; V.10 sq; It 107; Pug 35, 36. kāritā completion M I.64, 66 sq. -kārin completing, fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full M I.33 sq., 64; S V.201; A II.136; III.215; IV.380; V.131 sq.; Pug 37; Miln 243. Paripūraka {Paripuraka} (adj.( (-°) one who fills, filling Vism 300 (niraya°). Paripūraṇa {Paripurana} (nt.) [fr. paripūreti] fulfilment, completion Vism 3 (sīla°). See pāripūraṇa. Paripūrati {Paripurati} [pari+pūrati] to become full or perfect Dh 38; J IV.273 (devaloko p.); Miln 395 (sāmaððaṃ); fut. paripūrissati DhA I.309. - Pass. paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected DhA I.309. - pp. paripuṇṇa (q. v.). - Caus. paripūreti (q. v.). Paripūratta {Paripuratta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. paripūra] fullness, completeness, completion S V.200 sq. (+samatta). Paripūrita {Paripurita} [pp. of paripūreti] filled (to overflowing), full PvA 216. Paripūrī {Paripuri} (f.) [fr. paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q. v.] fulfilment, completion S I.139. Paripūreti {Paripureti} [Caus. of paripūrati] to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to D I.74 (parisandeti p. parippharati; DA I.217 explns as "vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti"); II.221; M III.92; S I.27 (devakāyaṃ)=30; II.29, 32; III.93 (sāmaððatthaṃ)=A II.95= It 90; Pv II.945 (ppr. °ayanto); Pug 31, 35; Miln 349 (lekhaṃ); PvA 29 (sāgaraṃ), 30 (ðātidhammo °pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp 371. - ppr. med. °pūramāna D I.103. - pp. paripūrita (q. v.). Paripothita {Paripothita} [pp. of paripotheti] beaten, whipped Miln 188 (laguḷehi). Parippharati {Parippharati} [pari+sphur] to pervade D I.74 (=samantato phusati DA I.217); M III.92 sq. See also paripūreti - pp. paripphuta & °pphuṭṭha (q. v.). Paripphuṭṭha {Paripphuttha} [pp. of parippharati] filled, pervaded D I.75; M III.94 (spelt here paripphuta). Cp. BSk. parisphuṭa MVastu II.349; III.274; Lal. Vist. 33, 385. Paripphosakaṃ {Paripphosakam} (adv.) [either with Kern. Toev, s. v. ger. of paripphoseti (i. e. paripphosa)+kaṃ or preferably with Trenckner, Notes 80 absolutive in °aka (i. e. nt. formation fr. adj. paripphosa, as phenuddeha+kaṃ etc.). Cp. also Geiger P.Gr. § 62. 1] sprinkled all round D I.74; M I.276; II.15; III.92; expld as "siðcitvā" at DA I.218. Paripphosita {Paripphosita} [pp. of paripphoseti] sprinkled all round J VI.51, 481 (candana sāra°). Pāli Text Society 979 Pāli-English Dictionary Paripphoseti {Paripphoseti} [pari+Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle over, Vin II.209 (udakena °pphositvā; so read for °ppositvā); A I.257; J VI.566; Pv III.102 (°itvā=āsiðcitvā PvA 231). - pp. paripphosita (q. v.). Pariplava {Pariplava} [fr. pari+plu] unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dh 38 (=upplavana DhA I.309). Pariplavati {Pariplavati} [pari+plu] to quiver, roam pariplavanto=upplavamāna C. - pp. paripluta (q. v.). about, swerve J III.484 (ppr. Paripluta {Paripluta} [pp. of pariplavati] immersed, drenched J VI.78 (=nimugga C.); Dāvs III.34. Pariphandati {Pariphandati} [pari+spand] to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Sn 776 (cp. Nd1 46 sq.), 1145; Dh 34 (=saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkoti DhA I.289); J IV.93; Miln 91, 249. - pp. pariphandita (q.v.). Pariphandita {Pariphandita} [pp. of pariphandati] wavered, trembled, quivered J III.24. Paribandha {Paribandha} at ThA 242 is C. reading for paripantha at Th 2, 352; also at Vism 147, 152. Paribādheti {Paribadheti} [pari+bādh] to oppress, attack PvA 193 (=hiṃsati). Paribāhati {Paribahati} [pari+bāhati or preferably bāheti: see bahati3] to keep out, keep away from, hinder J I.204 (ger. °bāhiya); PvA 214 (°bāhire). Paribāhira {Paribahira} (adj.) [pari+bāhira] external, alien to; an outsider Vin II.140; IV.283; S I.126; J I.482; III.213; Nd1 144; (parimussati p. hoti, in expln of mussati) Vism 54; PvA 131; ThA 204; DA I.30. Paribbajati {Paribbajati} [pari+vraj] to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Sn 74, 639; It 109; Dh 346, 415; J IV.452. Paribbaya {Paribbaya} [pari+vaya, i. e. *vyaya] 1. earned money, earnings, wages J I.156 (°ṃ datvā), 296 (id.), 433; IV.170; DhA IV.196. - 2, expense, expenditure J II.213, (nivāsa° expense for a lodging), 249, 368; III.287 (°ṃ karoti to invest); VI.383; VvA 75; PvA 3 (sahassaṃ sahassaṃ °ṃ karoti), 97 (nicca°); Dāvs V.66. Paribbasāna {Paribbasana} (adj.) [ppr. med. of pari+vas] abiding, staying by Sn 796 (=vasamāna SnA 529; sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd1 102), 878, 880, 895. Paribbāja {Paribbaja} =paribbājaka S I.49; Sn 134; Dh 313; DhA III.485. °vata the vow of a p. ThA 73. Paribbājaka [fr. pari+vraj] a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt II.114, 277, 468; Vin. Texts I.41) Vin I.342; IV.285 (bhikkhuð ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka-samāpanno); D I.157; III.1 sq., 35 sq., 53 sq., 130 sq.; M I.64, 84; S I.78; II.22, 119, 139; III.257 sq.; IV.230, 251, 391 sq.; A I.115, 157, 185, 215; II.29 sq., 176; IV.35 sq., 338, 378; V.48 {Paribbajaka} 980 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary sq.; Sn 537, 553; J I.85; Ud 14, 65; DA I.35; PvA 31. - f. paribbājikā Vin IV.285; M I.305; S III.238 sq.; Ud 13, 43 sq. Paribbājana {Paribbajana} (nt.) [fr. paribbajati] wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant SnA 434. Paribbājayitar {Paribbajayitar} [n. ag. of paribbajati] one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, fig. one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Sn 537 (T. °vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read °bājayitvā for °bājayitā, cp. SnA 434 nikkhamet[v]ā niddhamet[v]ā. Paribbūḷha {Paribbulha} (adj.) [pp. of paribrūhati] encompassed, provided with, surrounded A III.34; Sn 301 (=parikiṇṇa SnA 320); J IV.120; V.68, 322, 417; VI.452. Paribbhamati [pari+bhamati] 1. to walk or roam about PvA 6, 47 (ito c'ito), 63 (saṃsāre), 100, 166 (saṃsare). - 2. to reel about J III.288; IV.407. - Caus. °bbhameti to make reel round J VI.155. Paribyattatā {Paribbhamati} {Paribyattata} (f.) [pari+vyatta+tā] great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Miln 349. Paribrahaṇa {Paribrahana} (nt.) [to bṛh, see paribrūhati & cp. late Sk. paribarhaṇā] growth, increase, promotion Th 1, p. 2n. Cp. paribrūhana. Paribrūhati {Paribruhati} [pari+brūhati of bṛh2] to augment, increase, do with zest VvA 115. - Caus. °brūheti [cp. Sk. paribṛnhayati] to make strong, increase J V.361 (aparibrūhayi aor. med. with a° neg., i. e. was weakened, lost his strength; but expld by C. as "atibrūhesi mahāsaddaṃ nicchāresi," thus taking it to brū to speak, which is evidently a confusion). - pp. paribbūḷha & paribrūhita (q. v.). Paribrūhana {Paribruhana} (nt.) [fr. paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana] augmentation, increase Nett 79. Paribrūhita {Paribruhita} [pp. of paribrūheti] increased, furthered, strengthened ThA 245. Paribhaṭṭha1 {Paribhattha} [pp. of paribhassati of bhraś] fallen, dropped J I.482; Th 1, p. 12n. Paribhaṭṭha2 {Paribhattha} [pp. of paribhāsati] abused, censured, scolded J VI.187. Paribhaṇḍa {Paribhanda} [for paribandha, dialectical, see Kern, Toev. I.36, who compares Tamil panda "a surrounding wall" =P. bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp. notes in Vin. Texts II.154; III.85, 213] 1. a binding along the back Vin I.254, 297; II.116; J V.254 (v. l. °daṇḍa). 2. a girdle, belt J VI.125; DhA II.174. - 3. a plastered flooring Vin II.113, 172, 220; J III.384; IV.92; V.437, 440. - 4. slough of a serpent (?) J VI.339. - 5. (°-) adj. encircling, comprehensive, in °ðāṇa Vism 429. Paribhata {Paribhata} [pp. of pari+bhṛ] nurtured, nourished M II.56 (sukha°). Also in expln of pāribhaṭyatā (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 981 Pāli-English Dictionary Paribhava {Paribhava} [pari+bhū] contempt, disrespect Vin IV.241; A III.191; J V.436; VI.164; Vbh 353 sq.; PvA 257. Paribhavana {Paribhavana} (nt.)=paribhava DA I.255. Paribhavati {Paribhavati} [pari+bhū], also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise S I.69; A III.174 sq. (°bhoti); J III.16; V.442; Miln 23, 259; PvA 266. - grd. paribhotabba S I.69; Sn p. 93. (=paribhavitabba SnA 424). - Caus. paribhāveti; pp. paribhūta (q. v.). Paribhāvanā {Paribhavana} (f.) [fr. paribhāveti] permeation, penetration DhsA 163 (=vāsanā). Paribhāvita {Paribhavita} [pp. of paribhāveti] 1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set D II.81 (saddhā-p. cittaṃ, sīla° etc.; trsl. "set round with," cp. Dial. II.86), cp. S V.369; Sn 23 (cittaṃ p.; SnA 37 saṃvāsiya); Miln 361; PvA 139 (°aya bhāvanāya codito). - 2. compounded of, mixed with J I.380, cp. IV.407; PvA 191. - 3. fostered, treated, practised Miln 394 (bhesajjena kāyaṃ); PvA 257. - 4. sat on (said of eggs), being hatched M I.104; S III.153; A IV.125 sq., 176. Paribhāveti {Paribhaveti} [Caus. of paribhavati] to cause to be pervaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin I.279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.); J IV.407. - pp. paribhāvita (q. v.). Paribhāsa {Paribhasa} [fr. pari+bhāṣ] censure, abuse, blame J V.373; PvA 175. Paribhāsaka {Paribhasaka} (adj.) [fr. paribhāsa, cp. BSk. paribhāṣaka Divy 38] reviling, abusing, abusive S I.34; A IV.79; Pv I.116 (=akkosaka PvA 58); IV.84; VvA 69. See also akkosaka. Paribhāsati {Paribhasati} [pari+bhāṣ, cp. BSk. paribhāṣate Divy 38] to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame S I.221; IV.61; Vin IV.265; Sn 134, 663; J I.112, 384 (for °hāsiṃsu) 469; III.421; IV.285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī); V.294; VI.523; Pv II.108; Pug 37; Miln 186; PvA 43. - aor. °bhāsissaṃ Pv IV.85, pl. °bhāsimhase Pv III.111. grd. °bhāsaniya Miln 186. - Very frequently combd with akkosati (+p.), e. g. at Vin II.14, 296; Ud 44; Pv I.93; PvA 10. - pp. paribhaṭṭha2 (q. v.). - Caus. II. °bhāsāpeti id. Pv I.67. Paribhindati {Paribhindati} [pari+bhid] 1. to break up, split, create dissension, to set at variance J I.439; IV.196; V.229; VI.368; PvA 13. - 2. to break (see °bhinna). - pp. paribhinna. Paribhinna {Paribhinna} [pp. of paribhindati] 1. broken, broken up M I.190 (a°); VvA 184 (°vaṇṇa of broken up appearance, i. e. crumbly.). - 2. set at variance, disconcerted, split Vin III.161; J II.193; DhsA 308; PvA 13. - Cp. vi° Paribhuñjati {Paribhunjati} [pari+bhuj] 1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin II.109; M I.153 (nivāpaṃ p.), 207, S II.29; Sn 240, 241, 423; Pv I.12; I.94; IV.52 (=khādituṃ PvA 259); Nd2 427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuðjati); Miln 366, 395 (ālopaṃ °bhuñjisaṃ); Pv 3, 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp 394. - grd. °bhuñjiya J I.243 (dup°); & °bhuñjitabba PvA 71 (with nt. abstr. °tabbatta). - Pass. °bhuñjiyati, ppr. °iyamāna S I.90. - 2. [see bhuðjatī2] to purify, clean, cleanse M I.25; J VI.75. - pp. paribhutta (q. v.). Paribhuñjana {Paribhunjana} (nt.) [fr. paribhuñjati] eating PvA 35. Pāli Text Society 982 Pāli-English Dictionary Paribhutta {Paribhutta} [pp. of paribhuñjati, cp. BSk. paribhukta Divy 277] used, employed, made use of Vin II.109 (su°); J III.257 (a°); DA I.261 (sayaṃ °bhesajja); SnA 19. Paribhūta {Paribhuta} [pp. of paribhavati] treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin IV.6; S II.279; Miln 229, 288. Paribheda {Paribheda} [fr. pari+bhid, see paribhindati] 1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs 738, 874. - 2. bursting, breaking open PvA 55. Paribhedaka {Paribhedaka} (adj.) [fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati] breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate J II.173; III.168; V.245; VI.437. Paribhoga {Paribhoga} [fr. pari+bhuj] 1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding J I.243; II.432; Miln 156, 403; DhA II.66; SnA 342. - 2. enjoyment, use Vin IV.267; S I.90; Nd1 262; Vism 33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana); DhA I.60; PvA 25, 26, 220. - Four paribhogas are distinguished at J V.253 and at Vism 43, viz. theyya°, iṇa,° dāyajja°, sāmi°. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism 43. -cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, & consequently sacred KhA 222. -dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarīradhātu, remains of the body) Mhvs 15, 163. (cp. pāribhogika-dhātu); SnA 579. Paribhojaniya {Paribhojaniya} (or °īya) (nt.) [orig. grd. of paribhunjati 2] that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin II.76, 208, 216 (°ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vin. Texts III.8); III.119 (pāniyaṃ); J I.416; VI.75; DhA I.58. Parima {Parima} =parama (cp. Geiger P.Gr. 191) M III.112. Parimajjaka {Parimajjaka} (adj.) [fr. pari+marj] touching, reaching (up to) Miln 343 (candasuriya°, cp. MVastu II, candramasūrya-parimārjako maharddhiko etc.). Parimajjati {Parimajjati} [pari+majjati] 1. to wipe away, wipe off or out M I.78. - 2. to touch, stroke D I.78; M III.12; S II.121; Dh 394; J I.192, 305; II.395 (piṭṭhiṃ). - 3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse) A V.166, 168. - pp. parimaṭṭha (q. v.). Parimajjana {Parimajjana} (nt.) [fr. parimajjati] 1. wiping off or out Pug 33 (ukkhali°). - 2. rubbing, grooming (a horse) A V.166, 168 (ājānīya°). Parimaṭṭha {Parimattha} [pp. of parimajjati] rubbed, stroked, polished, in su° well polished S II.102. See also palimaṭṭha. Parimaṇḍala {Parimandala} (adj.) [pari+maṇḍala] 1. round, circular J I.441; II.406 (āvāṭa); VI.42; Pv IV.328 (guḷa°); Dhs 617 (expld at DhsA 317 as "egg-shaped," kukkuṭ-aṇḍasaṇṭhāna). - nt. as adv. in phrase °ṃ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin I.46; II.213; IV.185 (= nābhimaṇḍalaṃ jānu-maṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena C.; cp. timaṇḍala). - 2. rounded off, i. e. complete, correct, pleasant, in phrase °āni padavyaðjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin II.316; M I.216; A I.103; DA I.282; SnA 177, 370. 983 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Parimaddati {Parimaddati} [pari+mṛd] 1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage J IV.137 (sarīraṃ examine the body); Miln 241. - Of leather (i. e. treat) M. I.128. - 2. to go together with, to frequent DhA I.90 (samayaṃ p.). - pp. parimaddita (q. v.). Parimaddana {Parimaddana} (nt.) [fr. pari+mṛd] rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo) anicc'-ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṃsanadhammo D I.76 (cp. DA I.88, but trsld at Dial. I.87 as "subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration"); M I.500; S IV.83; J I.416. See further D I.7; A I.62; IV.54 (ucchādana-p.nahāpana-sambāhana); Miln 241 (ucchādana°); Sdhp 578. Parimaddita {Parimaddita} [pp. of parimaddati] crushed, rubbed, treated M I.129 (su° well- treated). Parimaddhita {Parimaddhita} [pp. of pari+maddheti, Caus. of mṛdh to neglect] brought to an end or standstill, destroyed J I.145 (°sankhāra). Parimasati {Parimasati} [pari+mṛś] to touch, stroke, grasp (usually combd with parimajjati), D I.78; II.17; M I.34, 80; III.12; S II.121; IV.173; A III.70. - pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati), q. v. Parimāṇa {Parimana} (nt.) [of pari+mā] measure, extent, limit, as adj. (-°) measuring, extending over, comprising J I.45; SnA 1 (pariyatti°); PvA 113 (yojana°), 102 (anekabhāra°). - neg. aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable, very great Vin II.62, 70; S V.430; A II.182; KhA 248; DA I.288 (°vaṇṇa); PvA 110, 129. Parimārita {Parimarita} [pp. of pari+māreti, Caus. of mṛ] mortified, only in phrase °indriya J I.361; III.515; IV.9, 306; V.152; Dāvs I.16. Parimita {Parimita} [pp. of parimināti] measured, restricted, limited, only in neg. a° measureless Pv II.811; Miln 287, 343. Parimitatta {Parimitatta} (nt.) [fr. parimita] the condition of being measured PvA 254. Parimināti {Pariminati} [pari+mā] to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. °metuṃ Miln 192; ThA 26; and °minituṃ Miln 316; grd. °meyya (q. v.). - pp. parimita (q. v.). Parimeyya {Parimeyya} (adj.) [grd. of parimināti] to be measured, neg. a° countless, immeasurable Miln 331, 388; PvA 212. Parimukha {Parimukha} (adj.) [pari+mukha] facing, in front; only as nt. adv. °ṃ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapeti "set up his memory in front" (i. e. of the object of thought), to set one's mindfulness alert Vin I.24; D II.291; M I.56, 421; S I.170; A III.92; It 80; Ps I.176 (expld); Pug 68; DA I.210. Also in phrase °ṃ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin II.134 "to cut off (?) the hair in front" (i. e. on the breast) Vin. Texts III.138, where is quoted Bdhgh's expln "ure lomasaṃharaṇaṃ." Pāli Text Society 984 Pāli-English Dictionary Parimuccati {Parimuccati} [Pass. of pari+muc] to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin II.87; M I.8; S I.88, 208; II.24, 109; III.40, 150, 179; Miln 213, 335 (jātiyā etc.) aor. °mucci M I.153. - pp. parimutta; Caus. parimoceti (q. v.). Parimuṭṭha {Parimuttha} [pari+muṭṭha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha] forgetful, bewildered Vin I.349=J III.488 (=muṭṭhassati C.); cp. Vin. Texts II.307. Parimutta {Parimutta} [pp. of parimuccati] released, set free, delivered S III.31. Parimutti {Parimutti} (f.) [fr. pari+muc] release J I.4 (V. 20); Miln 112, 227; PvA 109. Parimussati {Parimussati} [pari+mussati] to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd1 144. Parimoceti {Parimoceti} [Caus. of parimuccati] to set free, deliver, release D I.96; J I.28 (V. 203); Miln 334; DA I.263; DhA I.39. Parimohita {Parimohita} (adj.) [pp. of pari+Caus. of muh] very confused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp 206. Pariya {Pariya} [either short form of pariyāya, or ger. of pari+ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending -ya instead of -tya. - Bdhgh at Vism 409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as "pariyātī ti pariyaṃ, paricchindatī ti attho"] encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.). Only in phrase ceto-pariya-ðāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca) D II.82 sq. (v. l. °āya); III.100 (v. l. °āye); DA I.223 (corresp. with pubbe-nivāsa-ðāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya-paro-pariyaðāṇa in same meaning (see indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya) J I.78. - See also pariyatta1 pariyatti, pariyāya 3, and cpds. of ceto. Pariyañña {Pariyanna} [pari+yañña] supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice SnA 321, 322. Pariyatta1 {Pariyatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariya (pari+i) but confused with pariyatta2 & pariyatti fr. pari+āp] learning, understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (ðāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others A V.34, 38; Ps I.121 sq.; Vbh 340. Pariyatta2 (adj.) [cp. Sk. paryāpta. pp. of pari+āp, see pāpuṇāti] (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind, learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin II.285=KhA 92; D III.241 sq. (yathā sutaṃ yathā p°ṃ dhammaṃ). - (b) sufficient, enough PvA 33 (=alaṃ) Pariyatti {Pariyatta} (f.) [fr. pari+āp, cp. Epic Sk. paryāpti & P. pariyāpuṇāti] adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency, capability, competency; indriya-paro° efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others S V.205; Nett 101. Three accomplishments are distinguished at DA I.21 sq., viz. alagadd-ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍāgārika° (of a treasurer), apariyatti-kara bringing no advantage DhA I.71. - 2. accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism 95. {Pariyatti} Pāli Text Society 985 Pāli-English Dictionary Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature; -tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyattibhedo DA I.21. At SnA 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutanga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd1 234=Nd2 386. pariyattiṃ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) DhA II.30; cp. KhA 91 (tipiṭaka-sabba-p.-pabheda-dhara); J II.48 (°ṃ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside); Miln 115, 215, 345, 411 (āgama°). - abl. pariyattito through learning by heart SnA 195 (opp. to atthato according to the meaning). -dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions (see navanga Buddha-sāsana) KhA 191, 193; SnA 328; PvA 2; cp. °sāsana. -dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Miln 21. -dhura (=ganthadhura): see vāsadhura. paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures SnA 111. parimāṇa extent of study SnA 1, 608. -bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma A III.86. bahussuta versed in the Scriptures SnA 110. -sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. °dhamma) Nd1 143; DhA IV.39. Pariyanta {Pariyanta} [pari+anta, cp. Sk. paryanta] 1. limit, end, climax, border S I.80 (manāpa° "limit-point in enjoyment"; cp. C. nipphattikaṃ koṭikaṃ K.S. 320); J I.149 (hattha-pāda° hoofs), 221 (udaka°), 223 (sara°); II.200 (angana°); Pv II.1312; DhA III.172 (parisa°). - 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin II.59, 60 (āpatti°); Nd1 483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with ref. to one's character, viz. sīlasaṃvara° indriyasaṃvara°, bhojane mattaððutā°, jāgariyānuyoga°). - 3. (adj.-°) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin IV.31; M III.90; S II.122 (āyu°); A I.164 (id.); Sn 577 (bhedana°); Pv I.1013 (parikkhitta PvA 52). apariyanta (adj.) boundless, limitless PvA 58, 166. -kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd2 taṇhāIII (with sīmakata & odhikata; v. l. pariyanti°, cp. BSk. paryantīkṛta "finished" Divy 97, 236). -cārin living in selfrestriction Sn 964 (cp. Nd1 483). -dassāvin seeing the limit A V.50. rahita without limits DhA III.252. Pariyantavant {Pariyantavant} (adj.) [fr. pariyanta] having a limit, having a set or well-defined purpose; f. °vatī (vācā) discriminating speech D I.4=M III.49=Pug 58; expld as "paricchedaṃ dassetvā yatha 'ssa paricchedo paððāyati, evaṃ bhāsatī ti attho" DA I.76=PugA 238. Pariyantika {Pariyantika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. pariyanta] ending in, bounded or limited by S II.83=A II.198 (kāya-p. °ā & jīvita-p. °ā vedanā); Vism 69 (bhojana°, udaka°, āsana°); Sdhp 440 (kāla° sīla). Pariyaya {Pariyaya} [cp. Epic Sk. paryaya, pari+i; the usual P. form is pariyāya, but at the foll. passages the short a is required metri causa] revolution, lapse of time, period, term J III.460 (=kālapariyāya C.); V.367 (kāla°). Pariyā {Pariya} (f.) [fr. pari+yā] winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch J VI.528 (duma°; read °pariyāsu with v. l. instead of T. pariyāyesu; C. expls by sākhā). Pariyāgata {Pariyagata} [pari+ā+gata] having come to, reached, attained J VI.237 (phalaṃ; C=upagata), 238 (kusalaṃ; C.=pariyāyena attano vārena āgata). Pariyāgāra {Pariyagara} (adj.) [pari+āgāra] having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin III.119 (of gabbha). Pariyāti {Pariyati} [pari+yā] 1. to go round (acc.) J I.307. - 2. to come near J II.440. Pāli Text Society Pariyādāti 986 Pāli-English Dictionary [pari+ādāti] to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med-pass. ādiyati, pp. °ādinna, ger. ādāya (q. v.). {Pariyadati} Pariyādāna {Pariyadana} (nt.) [pari+ādāna, opp. upādāna] "taking up completely," i. e. using up, consummation, consumption, finishing, end M I.487 (kaṭṭha°, opp. to upādāna); S I.152; III.16 sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & °dinna); IV.33 (sabb'upādāna°) A II.139; J V.186. Cp. BSk. paryādāna Divy 4, 55, 100. - Esp. in foll. phrases: āsava° & jīvita° D I.46 (jīvita-pariyādānā abl., expld at Dh I.128 as "jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhikabhāvā ti attho"); S II.83=A II.198; S III.126; IV.213; A IV.13, 146; Pug 13; Miln 397; and combd with parikkhaya in °ṃ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated A V.173= Sn p. 126; Miln 102; PvA 147, cp. BSk. parikṣayaṃ paryādānaṃ gacchati Divy 567; AvŚ I.48; II.193. Pariyādāya {Pariyadaya} (indecl.) [ger. of pariyādati] 1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd2 533 (in expln of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i. e. for completeness, exhaustively). - 2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaṃ p. "taking hold of the mind" M I.91; It 19; DhA I.15. - 3. losing control over, giving out (cittaṃ) S III.16; IV.125. In absolute sense perhaps at S V.51=A IV.127 (with vv. ll. pariyenāya & pariyāya). Pariyādinna {Pariyadinna} [often spelt °diṇṇa, e. g. in vv. ll. at D II.8; M II.172; III.118. - pp. of pariyādiyati] 1. (Pass.) exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin I.25 (tejo); D II.8=M III.118; S II.133 sq. (dukkhaṃ; parikkhīṇaṃ+); V.461 sq. - neg. apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted M I.79 (muttakarīsaṃ °ādiṇṇaṃ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā); S II.178 sq. - 2. (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually °citta adj.) Vin II.185; M II.172; S II.228; Nd2 32; PvA 279. Pariyādinnatta {Pariyadinnatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyādinna] exhaustion, consummation DA I.128. Pariyādiyati {Pariyadiyati} [sometimes spelt °diyyati, e. g. Nd2 s. v.; pari+ādiyati, q. v. for etym. ref.] 1. to put an end to, exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control S III.155 (rāgaṃ); Nd2 under parisahati. - Pot. °ādiyeyyaṃ Vin I.25 (tejaṃ). - ger. °adiyitvā Vin I.25 (tejaṃ); IV.109 (id.); S I.84 (trsl. "confiscate"). - 2. to become exhausted, give out J V.186 (udakaṃ); Miln 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. to parivaḍḍhati). - pp. pariyādinna (q. v.). Pariyāpajjati {Pariyapajjati} [pari+āpajjati] to be finished A IV.339. - pp. pariyāpanna (q. v.). - Caus. pariyāpādeti (q. v.). Pariyāpadāna {Pariyapadana} (nt.) [pari+apadāna, the latter for ava°, and metrical lengthening of a] good advice, application, trick, artfulness, artifice J V.361, 369. (C. explnQ as parisuddha after v. l. pariyodāta which was prob. misread for pariyodāna), 370. Pariyāpanna {Pariyapanna} [pari+āpanna, cp. adhipanna] 1. "gone completely into," included in, belonging to, got into Vin I.46 (patta° that which has been put into the bowl); D I.45 (=ābaddha DA I.127); SnA 397 (milakkhabhāsa° etc.); KhA 136 (vinaya°), 191 (sangha°); DhA I.158 (idhaloka-paraloka°); PvA 14, 33, 59, 129 (devaloka°), 150. - 2. accomplished (i. e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā) S II.280 =A II.51. - 3. (°ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i. e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs 1268; Vbh 12, 15, 19 & passim; DhsA 50. Opp. apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Pāli Text Society 987 Pāli-English Dictionary Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Ps I.101; Dhs 583 (cp. Dhs trsln 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kvu 507. Pariyāpannatta {Pariyapannatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyāpanna] includedness SnA 174. Pariyāpādeti {Pariyapadeti} [Caus. of pariyāpajjati] to finish off, i. e. put to death completely S IV.308 sq.=A III.94. Pariyāpuṇana {Pariyapunana} (nt.) [abstr. formn fr. pariyāpuṇāti] mastery over, accomplishment in (gen.) Vism 442 (Buddhavacanassa). Pariyāpuṇāti {Pariyapunati} [pari+āp, cp. BSk. paryavāpnoti Divy 613] 1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin IV.305 (parittaṃ a charm); D I.117 (=jānāti DA I.117); A III.86 (dhammaṃ); fut. pariyāpuṇissati DhA I.382 (dhammaṃ); ger. pariyāpuṇitvā S I.176; II.120; SnA 195 (nikāyaṃ). - 2. (with inf.) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin II.109 (aor. °iṃsu), 121. - pp. pariyāputa and pariyatta (q. v.). Pariyāputa {Pariyaputa} [pp. of pariyāpuṇāti] 1. learned by heart, known Nd1 234=Nd2 386 (Buddhavacana). - 2. learned, accomplished DA I.21. - See also pariyatta2. Pariyāya {Pariyaya} [fr. pari+i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of "formula," in liturgy, cp. below 4] lit. "going round" analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course), desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause, reason, also case, matter), see DA I.36 and cp. Kindred Sayings I.320. - 1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase °ṃ karoti to arrange D I.179 (trsln takes it literally "departure," i. e. going out of one's way, détour; or change of habit, see Dial I.245); M I.252, 326; III.7, 62; S I.142 (trsl. "make occasion" [for coming]). - 2. order, succession, turn, course (=vāra) D I.166 ≈ (°bhatta i. e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals; expld as vāra-bhatta PugA 232); M I.78, 282, 481; S II.51 sq.; A II.206; J V.153 (=vāra); PvA 242 (aparā°). - 3. what goes on, way, habit, quality, property S I.146 (ceto° habits of mind, thoughts, but see also pariya); A V.160 (citta°, see ceto). - 4. discussion, instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on (-°), representation of (-°) (=desanā); thus āditta° (of Vin I.34) DhA I.88; esp. in cpd. dhamma° disquisition on the Dhamma D I.46; II.93; M I.83; III.67; S II.74; V.357; A III.62; IV.166, 381; Sn p. 218; also in foll.: vitakka° M I.122; deva° A III.402 sq.; peta° PvA 92; cp. Vism 41 (°kathā). - 5. in Abhidhamma terminology, specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma=nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism 473, 499; cp. DhsA 317 (figuratively). - 6. mode, manner, reason, cause, way (=kāraṇa) D I.185 (iminā °ena), 186 (id.); II.339 (ayaṃ p. yena °ena); DA I.106 (tena tena °ena in some way or other); DhsA 366 (iminā °ena for this reason); esp. in phrase aneka-pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin I.16, 45; D I.1 (cp. DA I.36), 174; M I.24; A I.56; Sn p. 15. - 7. winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at J VI.528 (see pariyā). - See also nippariyāya. Pariyāhata {Pariyahata} [pari+āhata] struck out, affected with (-°), only in phrase takka° "beaten out by argumentations" D I.16 (cp. DA I.106); M I.520. Pariyāhanana (nt.) [fr. pari+ā+han] striking, beating Vism 142 (āhanana° in exposition of vitakka)=DhsA 114 ("circumimpinging" Expos. 151). {Pariyahanana} 988 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Pariyiṭṭha {Pariyittha} [pp. of pariyesati] sought, desired, looked for S IV.62 (a°); Miln 134; Vism 344 (°āhāra). Pariyiṭṭhi =pariyeṭṭhi Sn 289 (SnA 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuṃ (see pariyesati). {Pariyitthi} Pariyukkhaṇṭhati {Pariyukkhanthati} [pari+ukkaṇṭhati] to have great longing, to be distressed J V.417, 421 (mā °kaṇṭhi). Pariyuṭṭhati {Pariyutthati} [pari+uṭṭhāti] to arise, pervade; intrs. to become prepossessed, to be pervaded DhsA 366 (cittaṃ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu). - pp. pariyuṭṭhita (q. v.). Pariyuṭṭhāna {Pariyutthana} (nt.) [pari+uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be "over-exertion." BSk. paryavasthāna points to another connection, see Divy 185] state of being possessed (or hindered) by (-°), prepossession, bias, outburst M I.18, Kvu XIV.6 (thīnamiddha°), 136; A I.66 (°ajjhosāna); V.198 (adhiṭṭhāna°samuṭṭhāna); Nd2 under taṇhāII (=Dhs 1059, where trsln is "pervading," based on expln at DhsA 366: uppajjamānā [scil. taṇhā] cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen); Pug 21 (avijjā°); Vbh 383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā [sic! pl. m.] are enumd in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saṃyojana, thus placing p. into the same category as these two); Dhs 390, 1061 (avijjā°), 1162 (id.); Nett 13, 14, 18, 37, 79 sq.; DhsA 238; ThA 80; Vism 5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). Cp. also adhiṭṭhāna. Pariyuṭṭhita {Pariyutthita} [pari+uṭṭhita, with v. l. at D II.104 parivuṭṭhita and BSk. rendering paryavasthita: see remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dial. II.111] possessed by (the C. expln as given K.S. 320 is "abhibhūta"), biassed, taken up by, full of (-°) M I.18; III.14; S IV.240 (maccheramala° ceto); A I.281; II.58; It 43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu I.91 (kāma-rāga°); ThA 78; Sdhp 581. -citta whose heart is possessed by (-°) D II.104 (Mārena); PvA 142 (maccheramala°), 195 (id.), 279 (kilesasamudācārena). -ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession, affected by bias, S III.3 sq. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin? ). Pariyudāharati {Pariyudaharati} [pari+udāharati] to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud DhsA 1 (aor. °āhāsi). Pariyeṭṭhi {Pariyetthi} [pari+eṭṭhi of esati, ā+iṣ] search for D I.222; A I.93 (āmisa° & dhamma°); III.416; Sn 289 (vijjācaraṇa°) J I.14; Nett 1, 5; DA I.271. Pariyeti {Pariyeti} [pari+i] to go about, to go round, encircle, encompass; ger. paricca (q. v.). The pp. is represented by pareta, see also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti. Pariyena {Pariyena} [fr. pari+i, cp. Sk. *paryayana] going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage S V.51 (pariyenāya, v. l. pariyādāya)=A IV.127 (reads pariyādāya v. l. pariyāya). Reading is doubtful. Pariyesati {Pariyesati} [pari+esati, cp. BSk. paryeṣate to investigate AvŚ I.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms °iṭṭhuṃ etc. See also anvesati] to Pāli Text Society 989 Pāli-English Dictionary seek for, look, search, desire D I.223 (°esamāna ppr.); Sn 482 (id.); S I.177, 181; IV.62; A II.23, 25, 247; Nd1 262; Nd2 427 (+paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati); J I.3, 138; Miln 109, 313; DhA III.263 (ppr. °esanto); PvA 31; Sdhp 506. - grd. °esitabba S II.130; inf. °esituṃ SnA 316; and °eṭṭhuṃ (conj. °iṭṭhuṃ?) Sn 289 (cp. SnA 316 which gives reading °eṭṭhuṃ as gloss); ger. °esitvā SnA 317, 414; - pp. pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. for similar formation & meaning ajjhesati with pp. ajjhesita & ajjhiṭṭha. - Cp. vi°. Pariyesanā {Pariyesana} (f.) & °na (nt.) [fr. pariyesati] search, quest, inquiry (a) (°nā) D II.58, 61, 280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); III.289; M I.161 (twofold, viz. ariyā & anariyā); A II.247 (id.); S I.143; II.144, 171; III.29; IV.8 sq. (assāda° & ādīnava°); A I.68 (kāma°), 93. - (b) (°na) Nd1 262 (°chanda,+paṭilābha° & paribhoga°); DhA III.256 (kāmaguṇe °ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at DhA I.75. Pariyesita {Pariyesita} [pp. of pariyesati] searched, sought for, desired It 121. See also pariyiṭṭha. Pariyoga {Pariyoga} [fr. pari+yuj] cauldron (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) Miln 118. Pariyogāya {Pariyogaya} at M I.480 is contracted form (ger.) of pariyogāhitvā (so expld by C.). Pariyogāḷha {Pariyogalha} [pp. of pariyogāhati, see also ogādha1] dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (loc.) Vin I.181; D I.110; M I.380; S II.58; IV.328; Vbh 329; Miln 283. -dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin I.16; A IV.186, 210; Ud 49. Pariyogāha [pari+ogāha] diving into, penetration; only in cpd. dup° hard to penetrate, unfathomable S IV.376; Miln 70. {Pariyogaha} Pariyogāhati {Pariyogahati} & °gāheti [pari+ogāhati] to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise A II.84; IV.13, 145 sq. (paððāya); J I.341; Pug 33 (a°), 48 sq. Cp. ajjhogāhati. Pariyogāhana {Pariyogahana} (nt.) & ā (f.) [pari+ogāhana] plunging into, penetration Ps I.106, 112; II.183; Dhs 390 (a°), 425 (a°); Pug 21 (a°); DhsA 260. Pariyottharati {Pariyottharati} [pari+ottharati] to spread all over (intrs.) Miln 197. Pariyodapana {Pariyodapana} (nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. pariyodapeti], cleansing, purification A I.207 (cittassa); Dh 183 (=vodāpana DhA III.237); Nett 44. In BSk. distorted to paryādapana MVastu III.12 (=Dh 183). Pariyodapita {Pariyodapita} [pp. of pariyodapeti] cleansed, purified Nett 44 (cittaṃ). Pariyodapeti {Pariyodapeti} [pari+odapeti, of Caus. of dā4 to clean] to cleanse, purify M I.25; Dh 88 (=vodapeti parisodheti) DhA II.162; Nett 44; ThA 237 (indriyāni). - pp. pariyodāta & pariyodapita (q. v.). Pariyodāta {Pariyodata} (adj.) [pari+odāta, cp. pariyodapeti] 1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly combd with parisuddha (+) D I.75, 76 (+); M I.26; S I.198; III.235 (+); V.301; A III.27 (+); IV.120 sq.; J V.369 (+; see pariyāpadāna); Pug 60; DA I.219; DhA IV.72 (+); VvA 138. - 2. very clever, Pāli Text Society 990 Pāli-English Dictionary accomplished, excellent [cp. BSk. paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100] J III.281 (°sippa); Vism 136 (id.). Pariyodāpaka {Pariyodapaka} (adj.) [fr. pariyodapeti] cleansing, purifying Vism 149 (ðāṇa). Pariyodha {Pariyodha} [pari+yodha] defence A I.154. Pariyonaddha {Pariyonaddha} [pp. of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & BSk. paryavanaddha "overgrown" Divy, 120, 125] covered over, enveloped D I.246; III.223 (a°); M I.25; S V.263; A II.211 (uddhasta+); IV.86; J I.30; Miln 161; SnA 596 (=nivuta); DhA III.199; PvA 172 (taca°). Pariyonandhati {Pariyonandhati} [pari+avanandhati] to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin II.137; S V.122; J III.398; DhA III.153. - pp. pariyonaddha (q. v.). Pariyonandhana {Pariyonandhana} (nt.) [fr. above] covering DA I.135; DhA III.198. Pariyonāha {Pariyonaha} [pari+onāha] enveloping, covering D I.246 (=nīvaraṇa); Dhs 1157 (cp. Dhs trsl. 311); Miln 300. Pariyosāna {Pariyosana} (nt.) [pari+osāna of ava+sā] 1. end, finish, conclusion J I.106 (sacca°=desanā°); PvA 9 (desanā° and passim), 136 (āyūha°), 162 (id.), 281 (=anta). Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle (see e. g. SnA 327), esp. in phrase ādi-kalyāṇa majjhe kalyāṇa °kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (expld as "ekagāthā pi hi samantabhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik° dutiyatatiya-padehi majjhe k° pacchimapadena pariyosānak°" etc. at SnA 444), e. g. D I.62; It 111 & passim. - 2. end, i. e. perfection, ideal, Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and its appln to Nibbāna DA I.175, 176) D I.203 (brahmacariya +); II.283 (cp. Dial. II.316); III.55 (brahmacariya+); S V.230; A III.363 (nibbāna°), 376 (brahmacariya°); Vism 5. Pariyosāpeti {Pariyosapeti} [Caus. of pari+ava+sā, Sk. syati, of which pp. pariyosita cp. osāpeti] 1. to make fulfil Vin III.155; DA I.241; ThA 159 (for khepeti Th 2, 168).- 2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism 244. Pariyosita {Pariyosita} 1. [pp. of pari+ava+sā] finished, concluded, satisfied, D II.224; M I.12 (paripuṇṇa+). - 2. [pp. of pari+ava+ śri, cp. ajjhosita] fixed on, bent on Miln 140 (°sankappa). Parirakkhaṇa {Parirakkhana} (nt.) [fr. pari+rakṣ] guarding, preserving, keeping Miln 356, 402; PvA 130. Parirakkhati {Parirakkhati} [pari+rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati] to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Sn 678 (pot. °rakkhe); Miln 410; Sdhp 413, 553 (sīlaṃ). Parirañjita {Pariranjita} [pari+rañjita] dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (instr.) Miln 75. Pariḷāha {Parilaha} [pari+ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍ and Q see Geiger, P.Gr. § 423] burning, fever; fig. fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain D III.238 (avigata°), 289 Pāli Text Society 991 Pāli-English Dictionary (°nānatta); M I.101 (kāme); S II.143 sq. (°nānatta), 151 (kāma°; vyāpāda°, vihiṃsā°); III.7 sq. (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata°); IV.387; V.156 (kāyasmiṃ), 451 (jāti°, jarā°); A I.68 (kāma°), 137 (rāgaja, mohaja etc.); II.197 (vighāta); III.3, 245 sq., 388 sq.; IV.461 sq.; Sn 715 (=rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. SnA 498); Dh 90 (cp. DhA II.166: duvidho p. kāyiko cetasiko ca); Nd2 374 (kāma°); J II.220; Miln 97, 165, 318; ThA 41, 292; VvA 44; PvA 230. Parillaka {Parillaka} [cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saṃh. 86, 44] N. of a bird (C. on Th 1, 49). Parivaccha {Parivaccha} (nt.) [formation from ger. of pari+vrt, corresp. to *parivṛtyaṃ (?)] being active, preparation, outfit J V.46; VI.21 (gamana°); DhA I.207 (gloss & v. l. gamana-parisajja), 395 (v. l. parisajja). Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati, pavecchati=Sk. prayacchati. Parivajjana {Parivajjana} (nt.) [fr. pari+vṛj] avoiding, avoidance M. I.7, 10; A III.387, 389; Miln 408; Vism 33. As f. °ā at Vism 132, and ibid. as abstr. parivajjanatā. Parivajjeti {Parivajjeti} [pari+vajjeti, Caus. of vṛj] to shun, avoid, keep away from (acc.) M I.10; S I.69, 102, 188, 224; Sn 57 (=vivajjeti Nd2 419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp. Nd1 6), 771; It 71; Dh 123 (pāpāni), 269; J IV.378 (fut. °essati); Pv IV.146 (nivesanaṃ); IV.17Q (loke adinnaṃ °ayassu); Miln 91 (grd. °ajjayitabba), 300, 408; PvA 150 (v. l. °ajjati), 221 (jīvitaṃ, for vijahati, better read with v. l. pariccajati). Parivaṭuma {Parivatuma} (?) (adj.) [doubtful spelling & expln; perhaps "parivaṭṭin?] forming a circle, circular D I.22 (trsld "a path could be traced round it" Dial. I.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman, and adds reference °kata "bounded" (syn. paricchinna) Miln 132. Parivaṭṭa [fr. pari+vṛt, cp. parivattana] round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu° fourfold circle M III.67; S III.59 (paðcupādāna-kkhandhe, cp. aṭṭhaparivaṭṭa-adhideva-ðāṇadassana A IV.304); and ðāti° circle of relatives D I.61 (=ðāti DA I.170; cp. expln ābandhan'atthena ðāti yeva ðāti - parivaṭṭo DA I.181=PugA 236); II.241; M III.33; Pug 57; ThA 68; VvA 87. - See further at DA I.143 (rāja°), 283 (id., but spelt °vatta); SnA 210. {Parivatta} Parivaḍḍhati {Parivaddhati} [pari+vṛdh] to increase, to be happy or prosperous Miln 297 (cittaṃ p.; opp. pariyādiyati). Parivaṇṇita {Parivannita} [pp. of parivaṇṇeti] extolled, praised Sdhp 557. Parivaṇṇeti {Parivanneti} [pari+vaṇṇeti] to describe, praise, extol J VI.213 (ppr. °vaṇṇayanto). - pp. °vaṇṇita. Parivatta {Parivatta} (adj.) [fr. pari+vṛt] changing round, twisting, turning; f. pl.°āyo J V.431. Parivattaka {Parivattaka} [fr. parivatta] circle (lit. turning round) J I.101; cp. parivattika in phrase paligha° (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 992 Pāli-English Dictionary Parivattati {Parivattati} [pari+vṛt] 1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intrs.), go about Vin II.220; J V.431 (singaṃ); Pv IV.53 (=pariyāti PvA 260); Miln 118; DA I.265. - 2. (intrs.) to change about, move, change, turn to Pv II.105 (=pariṇamati PvA 144); III.44 (id. 194); III.65; PvA 178. - Caus. parivatteti (q. v.). Cp. vipari°. Parivattana (nt.) [fr. parivattati] setting going, keeping up, propounding J I.200 (°manta adj. one who knows a charm); Nett 1 sq., 106. {Parivattana} Parivattita {Parivattita} [pp. of parivatteti] 1. turned round, twisted J IV.384. - 2. recited Vism 96. Parivatteti {Parivatteti} [Caus. of parivattati] 1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over J I.202; II.275 (sarīraṃ); V.217; DA I.244. - 2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism 96, in phrase mantaṃ p. to recite, practise a charm J I.200, 253; Pv II.613 (=sajjhāyati vāceti PvA 97); cp. mantaṃ pavatteti & pavattar; saraṃ p. to make a sound J I.405; adhippāyaṃ speak out, propound, discuss PvA 131. - 3. to change, exchange Vin II.174; J III.437. - pp. parivattita (q. v.). Parivadentikā {Parivadentika} (f.) [pari+vadento+ikā; vadento being ppr. Caus. of vad] making resound, resounding, in cpd. godhā° "string-resounding," i. e. a string instrument, lute J VI.580 (cp. Sk *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played). - Another parivadentikā we find at J VI.540 (C. reading for T. °vadantikā, with v. l. °devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti). Parivasati [pari+vas2] to stay, dwell, to live under probation Vin III.186 (grd. °vatthabba); IV.30, 127; D I.176; M I.391; S II.21; Sn 697 (=pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati SnA 490). - ppr. med. paribbasāna; pp. parivuṭṭha & parivuttha (q. v.). {Parivasati} Parivassati {Parivassati} at Pv II.936 is to be read as paridhassati (see paridahati). Parivahati {Parivahati} [pari+vahati] to carry about Th 2, 439 (dārake). Parivāta {Parivata} (-°) [pp. of pari+vā] blown round or through, i. e. filled with, stirred by Miln 19 (isi-vāta°). Parivādinī {Parivadini} (f.) [fr. pari+vad, late Sk. the same] a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138. - See parivadentikā. Parivāra {Parivara} [fr. pari+vṛ] 1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp J I.151; IV.38; VI.75; PvA 21, 30 (°cāga-cetana, read pariccāga-cetana?); usually as adj. -° surrounded by, in company of Vin I.38 (dasasata°); A II.91 (deva° & asura°); J I.92 (mahā-bhikkhusangha°); Pug 52 (pheggu sāra°; with expln PugA 229: rukkho sayaṃ-pheggu hoti, parivāra-rukkhā pan'assa sārā honti); Miln 285 (dvisahassa-paritta-dīpa-p° ā, cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism 37; DhA III.262 (paðcasatabhikkhu°); PvA 53 (accharā-sahassa°), 74 (dvisahassadīpa°); sa° with a retinue (of . . .) J I.49 (cattāro dīpe); PvA 20. - 2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning "respect," attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) A I.38 °sampadā) Ps I.172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra); DhA II.77; ThA 241 (dhana+, riches and fame); VbhA 466; PvA 137 (sampatti=yaso); VvA 122 (=yaso). - 3. ingredient, accessories (pl.), Pāli Text Society 993 Pāli-English Dictionary requisite J I.266 (pañca-sugandhika°); Miln 290 (sa° dāna); DA I.297 (=parikkhārā). - 4. as N. it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka ("The Accessory"), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books SnA 97 (sa-parivāraka Vinaya-piṭaka); VbhA 432. Parivāraka {Parivaraka} (adj.) [parivāra+ka] accompanying, forming a retinue J V.234. See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka. Parivāraṇa {Parivarana} (nt.) [fr. pari+vṛ] 1. covering, drapery (so trsl. at K.S. p. 45) S I.33. - 2. (adj.) (-°) surrounded by J V.195 (=parikkhitta C.). Parivārita {Parivarita} [pp. of parivāreti] surrounded, fig. honoured S I.166, 192=Th1,1235; J II.48; purakkhata+); DhA IV.49 (=purakkhata Dh 343); DhsA 1 (devānaṃ gaṇena); Dāvs I.16 (v. l. for parimārita). Parivāreti {Parivareti} [Caus. of pari+vṛ] to cover, encompass, surround J I.181 (nagaraṃ °ayiṃsu); II.102 (fut. °essati); III.371 (rukkhaṃ); IV.405 (for parikaroti); VI.179. - ger. parivāretvā used as prep. "round" J I.172 (pokkharaṇiṃ). - In meaning "to serve, attend upon," also "to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself," parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e. g. at D II.13; Pv IV.129 (v. l. °cāreti); PvA 228; in ppr. med. °vāriyamāna (with v. l. °cāriyamāna) at D II.21; A I.145; J I.58; VvA 92. - See also anuparivāreti. - pp. parivārita (q. v.). Parivāsa {Parivasa} [fr. pari+vas2, cp. Epic Sk. parivāsa only in meaning 1] 1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā° DhA III.118; DhsA 215. - 2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin III.186 (°ṃ vasati, cp. parivuttha); IV.30; S II.21 (°ṃ vasati). °ṃ deti to allow probation Vin I.49; II.7; IV.30, 127; °ṃ yācati to ask for probation Vin IV.30, 127. - samodhāna° inclusive probation Vin II.48 sq.; suddhanta° probation of complete purification Vin II.59 sq. - 3. period, time (lit. stay), interval, duration Ud 7 (eka-ratti°). -dāna the allowance of probation A I.99. Parivāsika {Parivasika} (adj.) [fr. pari+vas2, see parivasati] 1. "staying," i. e. usual, accustomed, common SnA 35 (°bhatta; or is it "fermented," and thus to be taken to No. 3?); a° unusual, new, uncommon J II.435 (where it is combd with abhinava, which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar expln of paccaggha at PvA 87), with v. l. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?). - 2. a probationer Vin II.162. In this meaning usually spelt pāri° (q. v.). - 3. in combn cira° (with ref. to food) it may be interpreted either as "staying long, being in use for a long time," i. e. stale; or it may be derived fr. vāsa3 (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rh. D. in Expositor 63, 64) "long-fermented" (better "seasoned"?) DhsA 48 (°vāsika & vāsiya); ThA 29. Parivāsita {Parivasita} (adj.) [pari+pp. of vāseti fr. vāsa3] perfumed (all round) J I.51 (v. l. °vārita); cp. samparivāsita (wellseasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at J II.435 for aparivāsika. Parivitakka {Parivitakka} [pari+vitakka, cp. BSk. parivitarka Divy 291] reflection, meditation, thought, consideration M II.170 (ākāra°), Vin II.74; S II.115 (id.); A II.193 (id.); Miln 13; DhA II.62; DhsA 74; VvA 3; PvA 282 (vutta-°e nipāta in expln of nūna). Usually in phrase cetasā ceto-parivitakka mental reflection, e. g. D I.117; II.218; S I.121, 178; III.96; V.294; A III.374; and cetasoparivitakka, e. g. D I.134; S I.71, 103, 139; II.273; III.96, 103; IV.105; V.167; A II.20. 994 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Parivitakkita {Parivitakkita} [pp. of parivitakketi] reflected, meditated, thought over M I.32; S I.193. - nt. °ṃ reflection, thinking over PvA 123 (°e with ref. to nūna, i. e. particle of reflection). Parivitakketi {Parivitakketi} [pari+vitakketi] to consider, reflect, meditate upon J III.277. - pp. °vitakkita (q. v.). Parivitthiṇṇa {Parivitthinna} [pari+vitthiṇṇa, Sk. vīstīrṇa, pp., of vi+ stṛ] spread out wide Miln 99. Parivisaka {Parivisaka} (adj.) [fr. parisati] providing, serving food Vism 108. Parivisati {Parivisati} [pari+viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise (inf.) in R. V. X.6110] to serve (with food=instr.), wait upon, present, offer Vin I.240 (bhatṭena); II.77 (kaṇājakena bilangadutiyena); D II.127; J I.87, 90; II.277; IV.116; Pv II.84 (=bhojeti PvA 107); II.88 (id. 109); Vism 108, 150 (sūdo bhattāraṃ p.); VvA 6; PvA 42, 78. Parivīmaṃsati {Parivimamsati} [pari+vīmaṃsati, Desid. of pari+man, cp. vīmaṃsā for mīmāṃsā] to think over, consider thoroughly, examine, search S II.80 sq.; It 42=Sn 975 (ppr. dhammaṃ °vīmaṃsamāna, cp. Nd1 508); DA I.134; DhA IV.117 (attānaṃ). Parivīmaṃsá {Parivimamsá} (f.) [pari+vīmaṃsā] complete inquiry, thorough search or examination M III.85; S III.331; V.68; SnA 173. Parivuṭṭha & °vuttha [pp. of parivasati] staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one's probation (cp. BSk. paryuṣita-parivāsa AvŚ I.259) Vin III.186 (tth); S II.21 (ṭṭh). {Parivuttha} Parivuta {Parivuta} [pp. of pari+vṛ] surrounded by (-° or instr.) S I.177; J I.152 (miga-gaṇa°), 203 (devagaṇena); II.127 (dāsi-gaṇa°); III.371 (mahā-jana°); VI.75; Vv 165 (=samantato p. VvA 81); PvA 3 (dhutta-jana°), 62 (parijana°), 140 (deva-gaṇa°). Pariveṭhita {Parivethita} [pp. of pari+veṣṭ] enveloped, covered Miln 22. Opp. nibbeṭṭhita (q. v.). Pariveṇa {Parivena} (nt.) [etym.?] 1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 8453 (expld at VvA 351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṃ pāsāda-kūtāgāra-rattiṭṭhān'ādisampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ dvārakoṭṭhaka-yuttaṃ āvāsaṃ); DhA I.260 (pāsāda°). - 2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vin. Texts III.109, 203) Vin I.49=II.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna-sālā); I.216 (vihārena vihāraṃ pariveṇena pariveṇaṃ upasankamitvā), 247 (id.); II.167 (vihāra+); III.69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaṃ); IV.52, 252 (°vāsika); J I.126; Miln 15 (°ṃ sammajjati), 19; Vism 90; DhA II.179 (°dvāra); IV.204; VbhA 13. Pariveṇi {Pariveni} (f.)=pariveṇa 2; Vin I.80 (anu pariveṇiyaṃ each in their own cell), 106 (id.). Parivesaka {Parivesaka} (adj.) [fr. pari+viṣ] waiting, serving up meals Vism 109. - f. °ikā ThA 17. 995 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Parivesanā {Parivesana} (f.) [fr. pari+vis] distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin I.229; S I.172; Sn p. 13 (=bhattavissagga SnA 140); Miln 247, 249; DhA IV.162; PvA 109 (°ṭṭhāna), 135 (id.). Parivyatta {Parivyatta} (adj.) [pari+vyatta] quite conspicuous or clear Vism 162. Parisaṃsibbita {Parisamsibbita} [pari+pp. of saṃsibbati] sewn together, entwined DhA III.198 (v. l. for saṃsibbita+). Parisakkati {Parisakkati} [pari+sakkati] to go about to (with inf. or dat.), to endeavour, undertake try Vin II.18=A IV.345 (alābhāya); J I.173 (vadhāya); II.394; Pv IV.52 (=payogaṃ karoti PvA 259). Parisankati {Parisankati} [pari+sankati] to suspect, fear, have apprehension J III.210, 541; DhA I.81. - pp. °sankita (q. v.). Cp. āsankati. Parisankā {Parisanka} (f.) [fr. pari+śank] suspicion, misgiving Vin IV.314; D III.218. Cp. āsankā. Parisankita {Parisankita} [pp. of parisankati] suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin II.243 (diṭṭha-suta°); A III.128; J IV.214; V.80; Miln 372; DhA I.223 (āsankita°). - Cp. āsankita & ussankita. Parisanku {Parisanku} in °patha in °patha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, N. of a path leading up to Gijjha-pabbata (see expln at J III.485) J III.484. Parisangāhāpeti {Parisangahapeti} [pari+Caus. of sangaṇhāti] to induce someone to mention or relate something J VI.328. Parisaṭha {Parisatha} (adj.) [pari+saṭha] very fraudulent or crafty Pug 23 (saṭha+). Parisaṇṭhāti {Parisanthati} [pari+saṇṭhāti] to return into the former state, to be restored; aor. °saṇṭhāsi J III.341. Parisaṇha {Parisanha} (adj,.) [pari+saṇha] very smooth or soft Miln 198. Parisandeti {Parisandeti} [pari+Caus. of syad] to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaṃ abhisandeti p. D I.75, 214; M III.92 sq. etc. expld as "samantato sandeti" at DA I.217. - pp. parisanna (q. v.). Parisanna [pp. of parisandati, cp. parisandeti] surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well-watered D I.75= M III.94. {Parisanna} Parisappati [pari+sṛp] to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dh 342, 343 (=saṃsappati bhāyati DhA IV.49). {Parisappati} Pāli Text Society Parisappanā 996 Pāli-English Dictionary (f.) [fr. parisappati] running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always combd with āsappanā and only found with ref. to the exegesis of "doubt" (vicikicchā or kankhā) Nd2 1; Dhs 425 (cp. Dhs trsl. 116 and DhsA 260); DA I.69. {Parisappana} Parisamantato {Parisamantato} (adv.) [pari+samantato] from all sides VvA 236. Parisambāhati {Parisambahati} [pari+sambāhati] to stroke, to rub from all sides M II.120; S I.178, 194; A V.65. Parisarati {Parisarati} [pari+smr, but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. pari here fr. Prk. paḍi=Sk. prati, thus for pratismarati] to remember, recollect J VI.199 (read parissaraṃ). Parisahati {Parisahati} [pari+sahati] to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of S IV.112; exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd1 12, 361 =Nd2 420. Parisā {Parisa} (f.) [cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V. also pariṣad as adj. surrounding, lit. "sitting round," fr. pari+sad. - In Pāli the cons. stem has passed into a vocalic ā-stem, with the only preservation of cons. loc. sg. parisati Vin IV.285; A II.180 (ī); J V.61; DA I.141 and parisatiṃ M I.68; A II.180 (v. l.); J V.332, besides the regular forms parisāyaṃ (loc. sg.) Vin II.296; A V.70; and parisāsu (loc. pl.) S II.27; It 64] surrounding people, group, collection, company, assembly, association, multitude. Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon, viz, eight assemblies (khattiya°, brāhmaṇa°, gahapati°, samaṇa°, Cātummahārājika°, Tāvatiṃsa°, Māra°, Brahma°, or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders, wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty-Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) D II.109; III.260; M I.72; A IV.307. - four assemblies (the first four of the above) at D III.236; Nd1 163; other four, representing the Buddha's Order (bhikkhu°, bhikkhunī°, upāsaka°, upāsikā°, or the ass. of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp. same enumn at Divy 299) S II.218; A V.10; cp. J I.40 (catu-parisa-majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.). - two assemblies (viz. Brahma°, Māra°) at D III.260; allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta-rattā & asāratta-rattā) M II.160=A I.70 sq. - For var. uses of the word see the foll. passages: Vin II.188, 296 (rājaparisā); III.12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); IV.153 (gen. parisāya); M I.153 (nevāpika°); II.160; III.47; S I.155 (brahma°), 162 sarājikā p.), 177; A I.25 (mahā°), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya°), 242 (tisso p.); II.19 (°āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva°); III.253 (khattiya°); IV.80, 114; It 64 (upāsakā °sāsu virocare); Sn 349, 825 sq.; J I.151, 264; VI.224 (omissaka°); Pv III.96; Miln 187, 249, 359 (38 rāja-parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue); PvA 2, 6, 12, 21, 78 and passim; Sdhp 277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin IV.71; adv. °ṃ ThA 69. - Note. The form of parisā as first part of a cpd. is parisa° (=*parisad, which laṭter is restored in cpd. parisaggata=*parisad-gata). - See also pārisagga. -antare within the assembly J III.61. -āvacara one who moves in the society, i. e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus A IV.314; V.10. -gata (ggata) having entered a company Sn 397 (=pūga-majjha-gata SnA 377); Pug 29. ððū knowing the assembly A III.148; IV.113 (+kālaððū puggalaððū), cp. D III.252. -dussana defilement of the Assembly A II.225 (opp. °sobhaṇā). -pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation DhA I.67; III.172. -majjhe in the midst of the assembly J I.267; II.352; PvA 11. sārajja being afraid of the a. Miln 196=Nd2 470 (so read for parisārajja). Parisiñcati {Parisincati} [pari+siñcati] to sprinkle all over, to bathe M I.161; S I.8 (gattāni); Sdhp 595. 997 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Parisibbita {Parisibbita} [pp. of pari+sibbati] sewn round, bordered Vin I.186; J V.377. Parisukkha {Parisukkha} (adj.) [pari+sukkha] dried up, very dry J I.215 (of fields); Miln 302 (of the heart); PvA 64 (°sarīra). Parisukkhita {Parisukkhita} [pp. of pari+ṡukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ] dried up, withered Miln 303 (°hadaya). Parisujjhati {Parisujjhati} [Pass. of pari+śudh] to become clear or clean, to be purified S I.214; Sn 183, 184. - pp. parisuddha (q. v.). Parisuddha {Parisuddha} (adj.) [pari+pp. of śudh] clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin II.237; M I.26; III.11; S II 199 (°dhammadesanā); III.235; V.301, 354; A III.125 (°ðāṇa-dassana); IV.120 sq.; J I.265; Vism 2 (accanta°); Pug 68 (samāhite citte parisuddha); Miln 106; DA I.177, 219; SnA 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa-bhāvena p.); PvA 44, 70. Very freq. combd with pariyodāta (q. v.). - aparisuddha unclean Vin II.236, M I.17. -ājīva (adj.) of pure livelihood D I.63 (see DA I.181); A III.124 (cp. pārisuddhi). Parisuddhatta {Parisuddhatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. parisuddha] purity, cleanliness, perfection M I.36; Miln 103 sq.; Vism 168. - As f. pari-suddhatā at Vism 30. Parisuddhi {Parisuddhi} (f.) [fr. pari+śudh] purity, purification S I.169. The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q. v.). Parisumbhati {Parisumbhati} [pari+sumbhati] to strike, hit, throw down J III.347 (=paharati C.); VI.370, 376 (id. C.). Parisumbhana {Parisumbhana} (nt.) [fr. pari+śumbh] throwing down J VI.508 (bhūmiyā p.). Parisussati {Parisussati} [pari+sussati] to dry quite up, waste quite away J II.5, 339, 437. - Caus. parisoseti (q. v.). Parisussana {Parisussana} (nt.) [fr. pari+śuṣ] drying up completely, withering J V.97. Parisedita [pp. of pari+Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly diff. use] heated, hatched, made ripe M I.104 (bījāni); S III.153; Vin III.3; AIV. 125 (aṇḍāni), 176. Parisesa {Parisedita} [pari+sesa] remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire M I.92, 110; A III.166=Pug 64; A IV.428 (°ðāṇadassana). {Parisesa} Parisoka {Parisoka} [pari+soka] great grief, severe mourning Ps I.38 (anto° in def. of soka). Parisodhana {Parisodhana} (nt.) [fr. parisodheti] cleansing, purification Miln 215. Parisodhita {Parisodhita} [pp. of parisodheti] cleaned, cleansed, purified Miln 415; Sdhp 414. Pāli Text Society 998 Pāli-English Dictionary Parisodheti {Parisodheti} [pari+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purify M III.3, 35 (aor. °sodhesi); Sn 407 (aor. °sodhayi); DhA II.162 (vodapeti+). - Freq. in phrase cittaṃ p. to cleanse one's heart (from=abl.) D III.49; S IV.104; A II.211; III.92; Nd1 484; Pug 68. - pp. parisodhita (q. v.). Parisosa {Parisosa} [fr. pari+śuṣ] becoming dried up, dryness, withering away S I.91. Parisosita {Parisosita} [pp. of parisoseti] dried up, withered away Sdhp 9. Parisoseti {Parisoseti} [Caus. of parisussati] to make dry up, to exhaust, make evaporate (water) Miln 389. - pp. parisosita (q. v.). Parissañjati {Parissanjati} (°ssajati?) [pari+svaj] to embrace, enfold, J I.466; VI.156 (°itvā, v. l. °ssajitvā & palisajjitvā). Parissanta {Parissanta} [pp. of parissamati] tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv II.936; VvA 305; Sdhp 9, 101. Parissama {Parissama} [fr. pari+śram] fatigue, toil, exhaustion, VvA 289, 305 (addhāna° from journeying); PvA 3, 43, 113, 127. Parissaya {Parissaya} (m. & nt.) [fr. pari+śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen III.395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader II.167, 168] danger, risk, trouble M I.10 (utu°); A III.388 (id.); Sn 42, 45, 770, 921, 960 sq.; Dh 328 (°ayāni= sīha-vyaggh'-ādayo pākaṭa-parissaye, rāga-bhayadosabhay'ādayo paṭicchanna-parissaye DhA IV.29); Nd1 12=Nd2 420 (where same division into pākaṭa° & paṭicchanna°); Nd1 360, 365; J I.418; II.405; V.315, 441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism 34 (utu°); SnA 88 (expld as paricca sayantī ti p.); DhA III.199 (°mocana); PvA 216, DhsA 330. Parissāvana {Parissavana} (nt.) [fr. pari+Caus. of sru] a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin I.209, II.119 and passim; J I.198; III.377; Nd1 226; DhA III.260 (udaka°); VvA 40, 63; Sdhp 593. Parissāvanaka {Parissavanaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. parissāvana] only neg. a°: 1. one who has no strainer Vin II.119; J I.198. - 2. not to be filtered, i. e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered J I.400 (so read for °ssavanaka). Or is it "not overflowing"? Parissāvita {Parissavita} [pp. of parissāveti] strained, filtered J I.198 (udaka). Parissāveti {Parissaveti} [Caus. of pari+sru] to strain or filter J I.198 (pānīyaṃ); DA I.206 (udakaṃ); III.207 (pānīyaṃ). - pp. parissāvita (q. v.). Parissuta {Parissuta} [pp. of pari+sru] overflowing J VI.328 (=atipuṇṇattā pagharamāna). Parihaṭa {Parihata} (°hata) [pp. of pariharati] surrounded by (-°) encircled; only in phrase sukhaparihaṭa (+sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin III.13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); J II.190 (pariharaka v. l. BB); VI.219 (=sukhe ṭhita). Pāli Text Society 999 Pāli-English Dictionary Parihaṭṭha {Parihattha} [pp. of pari+hṛṣ] gladdened, very pleased PvA 13. Pariharaka {Pariharaka} (adj. n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. surrounding or surrounded, having on one's hands J II.190 (sukha°, v. l. for °parihaṭa). - 2. an armlet, bracelet VvA 167 (v. l. °haraṇa; expld as hatthālankāra.) See also parihāraka. Pariharaṇa {Pariharana} (nt.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. protection, care Vism 500 (gabbha°); KhA 235; DA I.207 (kāya°); DhA II.179 (kāyassa). - 2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha° DhA III.261, 405. Cp. foll. Pariharaṇā {Pariharana} (f.) [=pariharaṇa] 1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure PvA 219 (with v. l. °caraṇā; for paricārikā Pv IV.12). - 2. keeping secret, guarding, hiding, deceiving Vbh 358=Pug 23. Pariharati {Pariharati} [pari+hṛ] 1. to take care of, to attend to (acc.), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin I.42; II.188; D II.100 (sanghaṃ); D II.14 (gabbhaṃ kucchinā); M I.124, 459; S III.1; A III.123; J I.52 (kucchiyā), 143, 170; Miln 392, 410 (attānaṃ) 418; SnA 78; DhA II.232 (aggiṃ, v. l. paricarati, which is the usual); PvA 63 (kucchiyā), 177. Cp. BSk. pariharati in same meaning e. g. AvŚ I.193, 205. - 2. to carry about D II.19 (ankena); M I.83; Sn 440 (muñjaṃ parihare, 1 sg. pres. med.; SnA 390 takes it as parihareyya); Miln 418 (āḷakaṃ p.). - 3. (intrs.) to move round, go round, circle, revolve M I.328; A I.277 (candima-suriyā p.; cp. A V.59)=Vism 205; J I.395; IV.378; VI.519; DA I.85; PvA 204. - 4. to conceal Vin III.52 (sunkaṃ). - 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Com. style) uttān'atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning SnA 178, 419, 437, 462. - pp. parihaṭa. Pass. parihīrati (q. v.). - See also anupariharati. Pariharitabbatta {Pariharitabbatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. grd. of pariharati] necessity of guarding Vism 98. Parihasati {Parihasati} [pari+has] to laugh at, mock, deride J I.457. - Caus. parihāseti to make laugh J V.297. Parihāna {Parihana} (nt.) [fr. pari+hā] diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay S II.206 sq.; A II.40 (abhabbo parihānāya), III.173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (°dhamma); V.103 (id.), 156 sq.; It 71 (°āya saṃvattati); Dh 32 (abhabbo p. °āyQ); Pug 12, 14. Parihāni {Parihani} (f.) [fr. pari+hā] loss, diminution (opp. vuddhi) S II.206; IV.76, 79; V.143, 173; A I.15; III.76 sq.; IV.288; V.19 sq., 96, 124 sq.; J II.233; DhA III.335; IV.185. Parihāniya {Parihaniya} (adj.) [parihāna+ya] connected with or causing decay or loss D II.75 sq. (°ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin); A IV.16 sq.; Vbh 381; VbhA 507 sq. - a° S V.85. Parihāpeti {Parihapeti} [Caus. of parihāyati] 1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste S II.29; J IV.214 (vegaṃ); Miln 244 (cittaṃ to lose heart, to despair); PvA 78. - 2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin I.72 (rājakiccaṃ); J II.438; IV.132 (vaṭṭaṃ); V.46; Miln 404 (mūḷakammaṃ). - Neg. ger. aparihāpetvā without omission DhsA 168; ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism 122. Pāli Text Society 1000 Pāli-English Dictionary Parihāyati {Parihayati} [pari+hā] to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin I.5; M III.46 sq. (opp. abhivaḍḍhati); S I.120, 137; III.125; IV.76 sq.; A III.252; Dh 364; Sn 767; J II.197; IV.108; Nd1 5 (paridhaṃsati+) Miln 249 (id.); Pug 12 (read °hāyeyya for °hāreyya); SnA 167 (+vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati+); PvA 5, 76 (v. l.), 125 (°hāyeyyuṃ). - pp. parihīna, Pass. parihiyyati, Caus. parihāpeti (q. v.). Parihāra {Parihara} [fr. pari+hṛ, cp. pariharati] 1. attention, care (esp. -°), in cpds. like gabbha° care of the fœtus DhA I.4; dāraka° care of the infant J II.20; kumāra° looking after the prince J I.148, II.48; DhA I.346; dup° hard to protect J I.437; Vism 95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?) - 2. honour, privilege, dignity Vin I.71; J IV.306 (gārava°). - 3. surrounding (lit.), circuit of land J IV.461. - 4. surrounding (fig.), attack; in cpd. visama° being attacked by adversities A II.87; Nd2 304Ic; Miln 112, 135. - 5. avoidance, keeping away from J I.186. -patha "circle road," i. e. (1) a roundabout way DhA II.192. (2) encircling game D I.6=Vin II.10 (expld as "bhūmiyaṃ nānāpathaṃ maṇḍalaṃ katvā tattha pariharitabbaṃ pariharantānaṃ kīḷanaṃ" DA I.85; trsld as "keeping going over diagrams" Dial. I.10, with remark "a kind of primitive hop-scotch"). Parihāraka {Pariharaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] surrounding, encircling; a guard A II.180. Parihārika {Pariharika} [fr. parihāra] keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining D I.71 (kāya° cīvara, kucchi° piṇḍapāta; expld as kāya-pariharaṇa-mattakena & kucchi° at DA I.207; correct reading accordingly); M I.180; III.34; Pug 58; Vism 65 (kāya°, of āvara). Parihārin {Pariharin} (adj.) [fr. parihāra] taking care of, (worth) keeping S IV.316 (udaka-maṇika). Parihāsa {Parihasa} [fr. pari+has, cp. parihasati] laughter, laughing at, mockery J I.116 (°keḷi), 377; DhA I.244. Parihāsiṃsu {Parihasimsu} at J I.384 is to be read Q °bhāsiṃsu. Parihiyyati {Parihiyyati} [Pass. of parihāyati, Sk. °hīyate] to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin (=dhaṃsati) J III.260. Parihīna {Parihina} [pp. of parihāyati] fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute S I.121; A III.123; Sn 827, 881 (°pañña); J I.112, 242; IV.200; Nd1 166, 289; Miln 249, 281 (a°); PvA 220 (=nihīna). Parihīnaka {Parihinaka} (adj.) [parihīna+ka] one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (abl. or instr.) D I.103. Parihīrati {Parihirati} [Pass. of pariharati, Sk. parihriyate in development °hriyate>*hiriyati>*hiyirati>°hīrati] to be carried about (or better "taken care of," according to Bdhgh's expln SnA 253; see also Brethren 226) Sn 205 =Th 1, 453. Parīta {Parita} see vi°. Parūpa {Parupa} ° as para+upa° (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) see under para. Pāli Text Society 1001 Pāli-English Dictionary Parūḷha {Parulha} (adj.) [pp. of pa+ruh, cp. BSk. prarūḍha (-śmaśru) Jtm 210] grown, grown long, mostly in phrase °kaccha-nakha-loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e. g. at S I.78; Ud 65; J IV.362, 371; VI.488; Miln 163 (so read for p.-kaccha-loma); Sdhp 104. - Kern, Toev. II.139 s. v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i. e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair. - Further in foll. phrases: mukhaṃ p. bearded face J IV.387; °kesa-nakha-loma J I.303; °kesa-massu with hair & beard grown long J IV.159; °kaccha with long grass J VI.100; °massu-dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DA I.263. Pare {Pare} (adv.) see para 2 c. Pareta {Pareta} [pp. of pareti, more likely para+i than pari+i, although BSk. correspondent is parīta, e. g. śokaparīta Jtm 3194] gone on to, affected with, overcome by (-°), syn. with abhibhūta (e. g. PvA 41, 80). Very frequent in combn with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e. g. khudā°, ghamma°, jighacchā°, dukkha°, dosa°, rāga°, soka°, sneha°, Vin I.5; D II.36; M I.13, 114, 364, 460; III.14, 92; S II.110; III.93; IV.28; A I.147=It 89; A III.25, 96; Sn 449, 736, 818 (=samohita samannāgata pihita Nd1 149) 1092, 1123; J III.157; Pv I.86; II.24; Miln 248; PvA 61, 93. Pareti {Pareti} [in form=parā+i but more likely pari+i, thus= pariyeti] to set out for, go on to, come to (acc.) S II.20; A V.2, 139 sq., 312; J V.401 (=pakkhandati C.). pp. pareta (q. v.). Paro {Paro} (adv.) [cp. Vedic paras; to para] beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only °-in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with acc. of numerals), e.g. paropaððāsa more than 50 D II.93; parosataṃ more than 100 J V.203, 497; parosahassaṃ over 1,000 D II.16; S I.192=Th 1, 1238; Sn p. 106 (=atireka-sahassaṃ SnA 450). See also parakkaroti. Parokkha (adj.) [paro+akkha=Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ+ akṣa)] beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible, Miln 291. - abl. parokkhā (adv.) behind one's back, in the absence of J III.89 (parammukhā C.; opp. sammukhā). {Parokkha} Parodati {Parodati} [pa+rud] to cry out (for) J I.166; PvA 16, 257. Paropariya {Paropariya} (°ðāṇa) see under indriya°. The form is paro +pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para+ apara (upara?)+ya, i. e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. Cp. parovara. Parovara {Parovara} (adj.-n.) [para+avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd2 p. 13] high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of "all kinds" (cp. uccāvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Sn 353 (v. l. BB varāvaraṃ, varovaraṃ; expld as "lokuttara-lokiyandar' āsundaraṃ dūre-santikaṃ vā" SnA 350), 475 (°ā dhammā; v. l. BB paroparā; expld as "parāvarā sundar'āsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā" SnA 410), 704 (kāme parovare; v. l. BB paropare; expld as sundare ca asundare ca paðca kāmaguṇe" SnA 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd2; see expln Nd2 422b; expld as "parāni ca orāni ca, par'attabhāvasak'attabhāv'ādīni parāni ca orāni ca" SnA 590), 1148 (paroparaṃ Nd2; see Nd2 422a; expld as Pāli Text Society 1002 Pāli-English Dictionary "hīna-ppaṇītaṃ" SnA 607). - Note. Already in RV. we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere: see e. g. RV. I.128, 3; I.164, 12. - On paropara see further Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. II.121 d. Pala {Pala} (-°) [classical Sk. pala] a certain weight (or measure), spelt also phala (see phala2), only in cpd. sata° a hundred (carat) in weight Th 1, 97 (of kaṃsa); J VI.510 (sataphala kaṃsa=phalasatena katā kaðcana-pātī C.). Also in combn catuppala - tippala - dvipala ekapala - sāṭikā Vism 339. Palaka {Palaka} [cp. late Sk. pala, flesh, meat] a species of plant J VI.564. Palagaṇḍa {Palaganda} [cp. Sk. palagaṇḍa Halāyudha II.436; BSk. palagaṇḍa AvŚ I.339; Aṣṭas. Pār. 231; Avad. Kalp. II.113] a mason, bricklayer, plasterer M I.119; S III.154 (the reading phala° is authentic, see Geiger, P.G. § 40); A IV.127. Palaṇḍuka {Palanduka} [cp. Epic Sk. palāṇḍu, pala (white)+aṇḍu (=aṇḍa? egg)] an onion Vin IV.259. Paladdha [pp. of pa+labh] taken over, "had," overcome, deceived M I.511 (nikata vaðcita p. where v. l. and id. p. S IV.307 however reads paluddha); J III.260 (dava°= abhibhūta C.). {Paladdha} Palapati {Palapati} [pa+lapati] to talk nonsense J II.322. Cp. vi°. Palambati {Palambati} [pa+lambati] to hang down ThA 210; Sdhp 110. - pp. palambita (q. v.). See also abhi°. Palambita {Palambita} [pp. of palambati] hanging down Th 2, 256, 259; ThA 211. Palambheti {Palambheti} [pa+lambheti] to deceive D I.50, cp. DA I.151. Palaḷita {Palalita} [pa+laḷita] led astray S IV.197 (v. l. °lāḷita). At A III.5 we read palāḷita, in phrase kāmesu p. ("sporting in pleasures"? Or should we read palolita?). Palavati {Palavati} [Vedic plavati, plu] to float, swim Vin IV.112; Dh 334; Th 1, 399; J III.190. Palasata {Palasata} [according to Trenckner, Notes p. 59, possibly fr. Sk. parasvant] a rhinoceros J VI.277 (v. l. phalasata; expld as "khagga-miga," with gloss "balasata"); as phalasata at J VI.454 (expld as phalasata-camma C.). See palāsata. Palahati {Palahati} [pa+lahati] to lick Pv III.52=PvA 198. Palāta {Palata} [contracted form of palāyita, pp. of palāyati, cp. Prk. palāa (=*palāta) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 567] run away J VI.369; Vism 326; VvA 100; DhA II.21. Palātatta {Palatatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. palāta] running away, escape J I.72. Pāli Text Society 1003 Pāli-English Dictionary Palāpa1 {Palapa} [Vedic palāva, cp. Lat. palea, Russ pelëva; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 396, where pralāva is to be corr. to palāva] chaff of corn, pollard A IV.169 (yava°); J. I.467, 468; IV.34; SnA 165 (in exegesis of palāpa2; v. l. BB palāsa), 312 (id.); J IV.34, 35 (perhaps better to read kulapalāso & palāsa-bhūta for palāpa). Palāpa2 {Palapa} [Vedic pralāpa, pa+lap; taken by P. Com. as identical with palāpa1, their example followed by Trenckner, Notes 63, cp. also Miln. trsl. II.363 "chaff as frivolous talk"] prattling, prattle, nonsense; adj. talking idly, chaffing, idle, void M III.80 (a°); S I.166 (not palapaṃ), 192=Th 1, 1237; A IV.169 (samaṇa° in allegory with yava° of palāpa1); Sn 89 (māyāvin asaṃyata palāpa=palāpa-sadisattā SnA 165), 282= Miln 414 (here also expld as palāpa1 by SnA 312); VbhA 104. In phrase tuccha palāpa empty and void at Miln 5, 10. Palāpin {Palapin} in apalāpin in apalāpin "not neglectful" see palāsin. Palāpeti1 {Palapeti} [Caus. of palāyati] to cause to run away, to put to flight, drive away J II.433; DhA I.164, 192; III.206. Palāpeti2 {Palapeti} [Caus. of pa+lap, cp. palāpa to which it may be referred as Denom.] to prattle, talk J I.73, 195. Palāyati {Palayati} [cp. Vedic palāyati, palāy] to run (away) Vin III.145 (ubbijjati uttasati p.); A II.33 (yena vā tena vā palayanti); Sn 120; J II.10; DhA I.193; PvA 253, 284 (=dhāvati). - ppr. palāyanto S I.209=Th 2, 248 =Pv II.717=Nett 131=DhA IV.21; aor. palāyi S I.219; J I.208; II.209, 219, 257; IV.420; DhA III.208; DA I.142; PvA 4, 274; ger. palāyitvā J I.174; PvA 154; inf. palāyituṃ J I.202; VI.420. - Contracted forms are: pres. paleti (see also the analogy-form pāleti under pāleti, to guard) D I.54 (spelt phaleti, expld DA I.165 by gacchati); Sn 1074, 1144 (=vajati gacchati Nd2 423); Dh 49; Nd1 172; J V.173, 241; Vv 8436 (=gacchati VvA 345); Pv I.111 (gacchati PvA 56); aor. palittha J V.255; fut. palehiti Th 1, 307; imper. palehi Sn 831 (=gaccha SnA 542) pp. palāta & palāyita; Caus. palāpeti1 (q. v.). Palāyana {Palayana} (nt.) [fr. palāy] running away DhA I.164. See also pālana. Palāyanaka {Palayanaka} (adj.) [fr. palāy] running away J II.210 (°ṃ karoti to put to flight). Palāyin {Palayin} (adj.) [fr. palāy] running away, taking to flight S I.221=223. - Usually neg. apalāyin S I.185, and in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin S I.99; Th 1, 864; J IV.296 and passim. See apalāyin & apalāsin. Palāla {Palala} (m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. & Epic Sk. palāla] straw J I.488; DhA I.69. -channaka a roof of thatch Th 1, 208. -piṇḍa a bundle of straw Vism 257=KhA 56. -pīṭhaka "straw foot-stool," a kind of punishment or torture M I.87= A II.122=Miln 197 (see Miln trsl. I.277 "Straw Seat," i. e. being so beaten with clubs, that the bones are broken, and the body becomes like a heap of straw); Nd1 154; Nd2 604; J V.273. -puñja a heap of straw D I.71; M III.3; A I.241; II.210; Pug 68; VbhA 367. -puñjaka same as puñja Miln 342. Palāḷita {Palalita} see palaḷita. Pāli Text Society 1004 Pāli-English Dictionary Palāsa1 {Palasa} (m. & nt.) [Vedic palāśa] 1. the tree Butea frondosa or Judas tree J III.23 (in Palāsa Jātaka). - 2. a leaf; collectively (nt.) foliage, pl. (nt.) leaves S II.178; J I.120 (nt.); III.210, 344; PvA 63 (°antare; so read for pās'antare), 113 (ghana°), 191 (sāli°). puppha° blossoms & leaves DhA I.75; sākhā° branches & leaves M I.111; J I.164; Miln 254; paṇḍu° a sear leaf Vin I.96; III.47; IV.217; bahala° (adj.) thick with leaves J I.57. -palāsāni (pl.) leaves J III.185 (=palāsapaṇṇāni C.); PvA 192 (=bhūsāni). Palāsa2 {Palasa} & (more commonly) Paḷāsa [according to Trenckner, Notes 83, from ras, but BSk. pradāśa points to pa+ dāśa=dāsa "enemy" this form evidently a Sanskritisation] unmercifulness, malice, spite. Its nearest synonym is yuga-ggāha (so Vbh 357; Pug 18, where yuddhaggāha is read; J III.259; VvA 71); it is often combd with macchera (Vv 155) and makkha (Miln 289). - M I.15, 36, 488; A I.79; J II.198; Vbh 357; Pug 18 (+paḷāsāyanā, etc.). -apaḷāsa mercifulness M I.44. Palāsata {Palasata} [so read for palasata & palasada; cp. Vedic parasvant given by BR. in meaning "a certain large animal, perhaps the wild ass"] a rhinoceros J V.206, 408; VI.277. Palāsika {Palasika} (adj.) [fr. palāsa1] 1. in cpd. paṇḍu° one who lives by eating withered leaves DA I.270, 271. -2. in cpd. eka° (upāhanā) (a shoe) with one lining (i. e. of leaves) Vin I.185 (=eka paṭala Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts II.13). Palāsin {Palasin} (paḷāsin) (adj.) [fr. palāsa2] spiteful, unmerciful, malicious M I.43 sq., 96; A III.111; combd with makkhin at Vin II.89 (cp. Vin Texts III.38); J III.259. apaḷāsin D III.47 (amakkhin+); M I.43; A III.111; Pug 22; see also separately. Pali°{Pali°} [a variant of pari°, to be referred to the Māgadhī dialect in which it is found most frequently, esp. in the older language, see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 257; Geiger, P.Gr. § 44] round, around (=pari) only as prefix in cpds. (q. v.). Often we find both pari° & pali° in the same word. Palikujjati {Palikujjati} [pali+kujjati] to bend oneself over, to go crooked M I.387. Palikuṇṭhita [a var. of paliguṇṭhita, q. v. & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 391] covered, enveloped, smeared with J II.92 (lohita°). {Palikunthita} Palikha {Palikha} [a variant of paligha on kh for gh see Geiger, P.Gr. § 392] a bar J VI.276 (with palighā as gloss). Palikhaṇati {Palikhanati} [pali+khaṇ, cp. parikhā] to dig up, root out S I.123; II.88 (so read for paliṃ° & phali°)=A I.204; ger. palikhaðða Sn 968 (=uddharitvā Nd1 490); palikhāya S I.123 (cp. KS 320); & palikhaṇitvā S II.88; SnA 573. - pp. palikhata (q. v.). Palikhata {Palikhata} [pp. of palikhaṇati] dug round or out S IV.83 (so read with v. l. for T. palikhita). Palikhati {Palikhati} [pa+likh] to scratch, in phrase oṭṭhaṃ p. to bite one's lip J V.434=DhA IV.197. Pāli Text Society 1005 Pāli-English Dictionary Palikhādati {Palikhadati} [pali+khādati] to bite all round, to gnaw or peck off M I.364 (kukkuro aṭṭhikankalaṃ p.). Paligijjhati {Paligijjhati} [pali+gijjhati] to be greedy Nd2 77 (abhigijjhati+). Paliguṇṭhita {Paligunthita} [pali+guṇṭhita, variant palikuṇṭhita, as kuṇṭhita & guṇḍhita are found] entangled, covered, enveloped Sn 131 (mohena; v. l. BB °kuṇṭhita); J II.150=DhA I.144 (v. l. °kuṇṭh°); IV.56; Miln II. Expld by pariyonaddha J II.150, by paṭicchādita J IV.56. Cp. pāliguṇṭhima. Paligedha {Paligedha} [pali+gedha but acc. to Geiger, P.Gr. § 10= parigṛddha] greed, conceit, selfishness A I.66; Nd2 taṇhā II (gedha+); Dhs 1059, 1136. Paligedhin {Paligedhin} (adj.) [fr. paligedha, but Geiger, P.Gr. § 10 takes it as *parigṛddhin, cp. giddhin] conceited, greedy, selfish A III.265. Paligha {Paligha} [pari+gha of (g)han, cp. P. & Sk. parigha] 1. a cross-bar Vin II.154; Th 2, 263 (vaṭṭa°=parighadaṇḍa ThA 211); J II.95; VI.276. - 2. an obstacle, hindrance D II.254=S I.27. (adj) (-°) in two phrases: okkhitta° with cross-bars erected or put up D I.105 (=ṭhapita° DA I.274), opp. ukkhitta° with cross-bars (i. e. obstacles) withdrawn or removed M I.139=A III.84=Nd2 284 C.; Sn 622 (=avijjā-palighassa ukkhittattā SnA 467); cp. parikhā. -parivattika turning round of the bar the "Bar Turn," a kind of punishment or torture (consisting in "a spike being driven from ear to ear he is pinned to the ground" Hardy, E.M. 32, cp. Miln trsl. I.277) M I.87=A I.47=II.122=Nd1 154=Nd2 604 B (reads palingha, v. l. paligha)=Miln 197. Palita {Palita} (adj.) [cp. Vedic palita; Gr. pelitno/s, pelio/s black-grey; Lith. pilkas grey; Ags. fealu=Ohg. falo, E. fallow, Ger. fahl; also Sk. pāṇḍu whitish; P. paṇḍu, pāṭala pink] grey, in cpd. °kesa with grey (i. e. white) hair M I.88 (f. °kesī); A I.138; J I.59, 79; abs. only at J VI.524. The spelling phalita also occurs (e. g. PvA 153). - Der. pālicca. Palitta {Palitta} [pp. of palippati] smeared Th 2, 467 (=upalitta ThA 284). Palipa {Palipa} fr. [pa+lip] sloppiness, mud, marsh M I.45; Th 1, 89; 2, 291 (=panka ThA 224); J III.241 (read palipo, cp. C.=mahākaddamo ibid.)=IV.480. Palipatha [for paripatha=°pantha (q. v.), the bases path° & panth° frequently interchanging. Trenckner (Notes 80) derives it fr. pa+lip] danger, obstacle (or is it "mud, mire"=palipa?) A IV.290; Sn 34=638 (= rāga° SnA 469)=Dh 414 (=rāga° DhA IV.194). {Palipatha} Palipadaka {Palipadaka} see pāli°. Palipanna {Palipanna} [for paripanna, pp. of paripajjati] fallen, got or sunk into (-° or loc.) Vin I.301 (muttakarīse); D II.24 (id.); M I.45 (palipa°)=Nd2 651 B; M I.88; J VI.8; Vism 49 (muttakarīse). Palippati {Palippati} [Med.-Pass. of pa+lip; often spelt palimpati] to be smeared; to stick, to adhere to Pv IV.15 (°amāna read for palimpamāna). - pp. palitta (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 1006 Pāli-English Dictionary Palibujjhati {Palibujjhati} see palibuddhati. Palibujjhana {Palibujjhana} (nt.) [fr. palibujjhati] obstruction DhA III.258. Palibuddha {Palibuddha} [pp. of palibujjhati] obstructed, hindered, stopped; being kept back or delayed, tarrying J II.417; Nd2 107 (paliveṭhita+); Miln 388 (ākāso a°) 404; DhA III.198. Often in phrase lagga laggita p. Nd2 88, 107, 332, 596, 597, 657. Palibuddhati {Palibuddhati} [the etym. offered by Andersen, Pāli Reader s. v. palibuddha, viz. dissimilation for pari+ruddhati (rudh) is most plausible, other explns like Trenckner's (Notes 66 for pari+bādh, med-pass. bajjhati=*bādhyate, seemingly confirmed by v. l. Nd2 74 & 77 °bajjhati for °bujjhati) and Kern's (Toev. s. v.=Ogh. firbiotan, Ger. verbieten) are semantically not satisfactory. Cp. avaruddhati & avaruddha] 1. to obstruct, refuse, keep back, hinder, withhold Vin II.166; IV.42, 131; J I.217 (cp. paṭibāhati ibid.); III.138 (aor. °buddhi.); IV.159; Miln 263. - 2. to delay Miln 404 (or should we read °bujjhati i. e. sticks, tarries, is prevented?). Pass. palibujjhati [this word occurs only in Commentary style & late works. In the Niddesa the nearest synonym is lag, as seen from the freq. combn palibuddha+lagga, palibodha+laggana: see Nd2 p. 188 under nissita] to be obstructed or hindered, to be kept by (instr. or loc.) to stick or adhere to, to trouble about, attend to Nd2 74, 77 (paligijjhati+), 88, 107, 597, 657; Miln 263. pp. palibuddha (q. v.). Palibodha {Palibodha} [see palibuddhati] obstruction, hindrance, obstacle, impediment, drawback J I.148; III.241 (a° non-obstruction), 381 (id.); Nett 80; also in var. phrases, viz. kāma° Nd2 374 (+kāmapariḷāha); kula° cīvara° Nd2 68, cp. Miln 388 (kule p.); ghar'āvāsa°, putta-dāro etc. Nd1 136; Nd2 172a B, 205, cp. J II.95 (ghara°); KhA 39 (enumd as set of dasa palibodhā which are also given and expld in detail at Vism 90 sq.); cp. DhsA 168, and in combn laggana bandhana p. Nd2 332, 620. Two palibodhas are referred to at Vin I.265, viz. āvāsa° and cīvara° (cp. Vin. Texts II.157) and sixteen at Miln 11. Cp. Cpd. 53. - The minor obstacles (to the practice of kammaṭṭhāna) are described as khuddaka° at Vism 122 & referred to at DhsA 168. - See also sam°. Palibhañjana {Palibhanjana} (nt.) [pari+bhañjana] breaking up Nd2 576 (sambhañjana+; v. l. pari°). See also sam°. The spelling phali° occurs at ThA 288. Palimaṭṭha {Palimattha} [pp. of pari+mṛj] polished J V.4. Cp. parimaṭṭha. See also sam°. Paliveṭhana {Palivethana} (adj. nt.) [fr. pari+veṣṭ] wrapping, surrounding, encircling, encumbrance J IV.436; Pug 34; Vism 353 (°camma); DhsA 366. Paliveṭhita {Palivethita} [pp. of paliveṭheti] wrapped round, entwined, encircled, fettered Nd2 107 (°veṭṭh°, combd with laggita & palibuddha); J IV.436; VI.89. Cp. sam°. Paliveṭheti {Palivetheti} [pari+veṣṭ] to wrap up, cover, entwine, encircle M I.134; J I.192; II.95; DhA I.269; DhsA 366. - Pass. paliveṭhīyati Miln 74. - pp. paliveṭhita (q. v.). See also sam°. Palisajjati {Palisajjati} [pari+sṛj] to loosen, make loose S II.89 (mūlāni). Pāli Text Society 1007 Pāli-English Dictionary Palissajati {Palissajati} [pari+svaj] to embrace D II.266; J V.158 (aor. palissaji=ālingi C). 204, 215; VI.325. Palissuta {Palissuta} [pp. of pari+sru] flowing over J VI.328. Palugga {Palugga} [pp. of palujjati, Sk. *prarugṇa] broken up, crushed, crumbled Bu II.24; Miln 217. Palujjati {Palujjati} [Pass. of palujati=pa+ruj] to break (intrs.) to fall down, crumble, to be dissolved Vin II.284; D II.181; M I.488; S II.218; III.137; IV.52=Nd2 550 (in exegesis of "loka"); Miln 8; Vism 416. - pp. palugga (q. v.). Cp. BSk. pralujyati MVastu II.370. Palujjana {Palujjana} (nt.) [fr. palujjati] breaking up, destruction SnA 506. Paluddha {Paluddha} [pp. of pa+lubh] seduced, enticed S IV.307 (where id. p. M I.511 reads paladdha); J I.158; VI.255, 262. See also palobheti & palobhita. Palumpati {Palumpati} [pa+lup] to rob, plunder, deprive of A I.48. Paleti {Paleti} see palāyati. Palepa {Palepa} [fr. pa+lip] smearing; plaster, mortar Th 2, 270; ThA 213. Palepana {Palepana} (nt.) [fr. pa+lip] smearing, anointing; adj. (-°) smeared or coated with M I.429 (gāḷha° thickly smeared). Paloka {Paloka} [fr. pa+*luj=ruj, thus standing for *paloga, cp. roga] breaking off or in two, dissolution, decay Vin II.284; M I.435=Miln 418 (in formula aniccato dukkhato rogato etc., with freq. v. l. paralokato; cp. A IV.423; Nd2 214; Ps II.238); S III.167 (id.) IV.53; V. 163. Palokin (adj.) [fr. paloka] destined for decay or destruction S IV.205=Sn 739 (acc. palokinaṃ=jarā-maraṇehi palujjana-dhamma SnA 506); Th 2, 101 (acc. pl. palokine, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 952). {Palokin} Palobha {Palobha} [fr. pa+lubh] desire, greed PvA 265. Palobhana {Palobhana} (nt.)=palobha J I.196, 210; II.183; Miln 286. Palobhita {Palobhita} [pp. of palobheti] desired PvA 154. Palobheti {Palobheti} [Caus. of pa+lubh] to desire, to be greedy Sn 703; J I.79, 157, 298; VI.215; SnA 492; DhA I.123, 125; PvA 55. - pp. palobhita (q. v.). Pallanka {Pallanka} [pary+anka, cp. Class Sk. palyanka & Māgadhī paliyanka] 1. sitting cross- legged, in instr. pallankena upon the hams S I.124, 144; and in phrase pallankaṃ ābhujati "to bend (the legs) in crosswise" D I.71; M I.56; A III.320; J I.17, 71; Ps I.176; Pug 68; Miln 289; DhA 1008 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary II.201. - This phrase is expld at Vism 271 and VbhA 368 as "samantato ūru-baddh'āsanaṃ bandhati." - 2. a divan, sofa, couch Vin II.163, 170 (cp. Vin. Texts III.209, which is to be corrected after Dial. I.12); D I.7; S I.95; J I.268; IV.396; V.161; Vv 311; Pv II.127; III.32; DhA I.19; PvA 189, 219. Pallati {Pallati} (pallate), is guarded or kept, contracted (poetical) form of pālayate (so Cy.) J V.242. Pallattha {Pallattha} [Sk. *paryasta, pari+pp. of as to throw, cp. Prk pallattha Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 285] the posture of sitting or squatting or lolling J I.163 (here in expln of tipallattha: pallatthaṃ vuccati sayanaṃ, ubhohi passehi ujukam eva ca go-nisinnaka-vasenā ti tīh'ākārehi pallatthaṃ etc.; see under ti°). Cp. ti°, vi°. Pallatthikā {Pallatthika} (f.) [fr. pallattha] same meaning as pallattha Vin II.213; III.162 (cp. Vin. Texts I.62; III.141); Vism 79 (dussa°). Pallatthita {Pallatthita} [doubtful, perhaps we should read paliyattha, see Kern, Toev. s. v.] perverse J V.79. Pallala {Pallala} (nt.) [cp. Class Sk. palvala=Lat. palus; Ohg. felawa Q Ger. felber willow; Lith. pélkè moor; BSk. also palvala, e. g. Divy 56] 1. marshy ground M I.117; S III.108 sq. - 2. a small pond or lake Vin I.230= D II.89; J II.129; V.346. Pallava {Pallava} (nt.) [cp. Class Sk. pallaka] a sprout J I.250; II.161. See also phallava. Pallavita {Pallavita} (adj.) [fr. pallava] having sprouts, burgeoning, budding Miln 151; VvA 288 (sa° full of sprouts). Pallāsa {Pallasa} see vi°. Palloma {Palloma} [a contraction of pannaloma, see J.P.T.S. 1889, 206] security, confidence D I.96; M I.17; cp. DA I.266 "loma-haṃsa-mattam pi 'ssa na bhavissati." Pavakkhati {Pavakkhati} [fut. of pa+vac] only in 1st sq. pavakkhāmi "I will declare or explain" Sn 701, 963=1050 (cp. Nd1 482 & Nd2 under brūmi). Pavacchati {Pavacchati} [Sk. prayacchati] see anu°, & cp. pavecchati. Pavajati {Pavajati} [pa+vraj] to wander forth, go about, perambulate; ppr. pavajamāna S I.42 (but may be pavajjamāna "being predicated" in play of word with act. pavadanto in same verse). Pavajjati {Pavajjati} [Pass. of pavadati] to sound forth to be played (of music) J I.64 (pavajjayiṃsu, 3rd pl. aor.); VvA 96 (pavajjamāna ppr. med.). Pavajjana {Pavajjana} (nt.) [fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati] sounding, playing of music VvA 210. 1009 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Pavaḍḍha {Pavaddha} [pp. of pavaḍḍhati] grown up, increased, big, strong J V.340 (°kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha°; expld as vaḍḍhita-kāya). Pavaḍḍhati {Pavaddhati} [pa+vṛdh] to grow up, to increase M I.7; S II.84, 92; Sn 306 (3rd sg. praet. °atha); Dh 282, 335, 349; Pug 64; PvA 8 (puññaṃ). - pp. pavaḍḍha & pavuddha. Pavati1 {Pavati} [pa+vā] to blow forth, to yield a scent Th 1, 528 (=gandhaṃ vissajjati C.). See pavāti. Pavati2 {Pavati} [of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk. pravate to jump] to hurry on, to rush VvA 42 (but better read with v. l. patati as syn. of gacchati). Pavatta {Pavatta} (adj.) [pp. of pavattati] 1. (adj.) happening, going on, procedure, resulting Th 2, 220 (assu ca pavattaṃ, taken by Mrs. Rh. D. as "tears shed"); ThA 179; PvA 35, 83 (gāthāyo), 120, esp. with ref. to natural products as "that which comes," i. e. normal, natural, raw; °phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. °phalika SnA 295 sq.; °bhojana (adj.) J I.6; III.365; Vism 422, and, °bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics, tāpasā) D I.101; M I.78, 343; A I.241; II.206; cp. DA I.269 sq. & SnA 295, 296. °maṃsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin I.217 (cp. Vin. Texts II.81). - 2. (nt.) "that which goes on," i. e. the circle or whirl of existence Miln 197, 326 (cp. Miln trsln II.200 "starting afresh in innumerable births," quot. fr. C.), opp. appavatta freedom from Saṃsāra, i. e. Nibbāna ibid. - 3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in S IV.115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata); DA I.92 (ādinaya°), 217 (°pīti-sukha being in a state of happiness). Pavattati {Pavattati} [pa+vattati, vṛt] (intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv I.57; PvA 8, 131; of water: to flow S II.31; J II.104; PvA 143, 154, 198. - 2. to exist, to be, continue in existence J I.64; PvA 130 (opp. ucchijjati). - 3. to result, to go on PvA 45 (phalaṃ), 60 (vippaṭisār'aggi). - pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti (q. v.). Pavattana {Pavattana} (adj. nt.) [fr. pavattati] 1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. °i M I.214; Pug 35 (spelt pavattinī in T. as well as Pug A 218). - 2. execution, performance, carrying out Miln 277 (āṇā,° cp. pavatti). Pavattayitar {Pavattayitar} [n. ag. to pavatteti] one who sets into motion or keeps up DA I.273 (see foll.). Pavattar {Pavattar} [n. ag. of either pa+vac or pa+vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti. The P. commentators take it as either] one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition), an expounder, teacher D I.104 (mantānaṃ p.=pavattayitar DA I.273); S IV.94; Dh 76 (nidhīnaṃ p.=ācikkhitar DhA II.107). Pavattāpanatta (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of pavatteti=pavattāpeti] making continue, keeping going, preservation, upkeep Vism 32 (T. °attha). Pavatti {Pavattapanatta} (f.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. manifestation, wielding, execution, giving, in āṇā° royal authority J III.504; IV.145; ThA 283. - 2. happening, incident, news J I.125, 150; II.416; Vism 91; PvA 6, 17, 29, 35, 92, 152, 242, etc.; DhA I.80 (v. l. pavutti). Cp. pavutti. {Pavatti} Pāli Text Society Pavattita 1010 Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of pavatteti] set going, inaugurated, established Vin I.11 (dhammacakka); M III.29, 77; S I.191; Sn 556, 557 (dhammacakka); PvA 67 (id.), 140 (sangīti); SnA 454. {Pavattita} Pavattin {Pavattin} (adj.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino A I.279; DA I.4=PvA 2; and in suppavattin (goodflowing, i. e. well-recited?) A IV.140 (of pātimokkha; trsld as "thoroughly mastered" J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, V.71 (id.). - 2. going on, procedure (in f. °inī) Vin II.271 sq., 277. Pavatteti {Pavatteti} [Caus. of pavattati] (trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin I.87 (assūni); S II.282 (id.) J I.147 (selagulaṃ pavaṭṭ°); esp. in phrase dhammacakkaṃ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin I.8, 11; M I.171; S III.86; Sn 693; Miln 20, 343; VvA 165; PvA 21, etc. - 2. to cause, produce, make arise J II.102 (mah'oghaṃ); Miln 219. - 3. to give forth, bestow, give (dānaṃ a gift) Vin IV.5 (spelt ṭṭ); PvA 19, 123, 139. - 4. to continue, keep on, practise, go on with DhA I.257; PvA 29 (attabhāvaṃ), 42 (kammante). - 5. to move about, behave, linger DhA I.14 (ṭṭ). - 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Miln 189 (āṇaṃ; cp. āṇāpavatti). - pp. pavattita (q. v.). Pavadati {Pavadati} [pa+vad] to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto S I.42 (trsl. "predicate"); Nd1 293. - aor. pāvādi ThA 71. - Cp. pāvadati. Pavana1 {Pavana} (nt.) [cp. Sk. pavana & pāvana, of pū] winnowing of grain Miln 201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain). Pavana2 (nt.) [cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, P.Gr. 24=upavana; perhaps=Lat. pronus "prone"] side of a mountain, declivity D II.254; M I.117; S I.26; II.95, 105; Th 1, 1092; J I.28; II.180; VI.513; Cp. I.15, 101; III.131; Miln 91, 198 sq., 364, 408; Vism 345. Cp. Pavananagara SnA 583 (v. l. BB for Tumbavanagara=Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. defends Müller's (after Subhūti) interpretation as "wood, woodland," and compares BSk. pavana MVastu II.272, 382. {Pavana} Pavana3 {Pavana} at Vin II.136 in cpd. pavan-anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Bdhgh on p. 319 (on C.V. V.29, 2) expls it by pās'anta. Pavapati {Pavapati} [pa+vap] to sow out Th 2, 112. Pavayha {Pavayha} (adv.) [ger. of pavahati] carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha M III.118=DhA II.108; M I.442, 444. Pavara {Pavara} (adj.) [pa+vara] most excellent, noble, distinguished S III.264; Sn 83, 646, 698 (muni°); Dh 422; Pug 69; Miln 246; PvA 2 (°dhamma-cakka), 67 (id.), 39 (°buddh'āsana); Sdhp 421. Pavasati {Pavasati} [pa+vas] to "live forth," i. e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Sn 899; J II.123 (=pavasaṃ gacchati); V.91. - pp. pavuttha (q. v.). Cp. vi°. Pāli Text Society 1011 Pāli-English Dictionary Pavassati {Pavassati} [pa+vṛṣ] to "rain forth," to begin to rain, shed rain S I.100; Sn 18 sq. (imper. pavassa), 353 (v. l.); J VI.500 ("cry"), 587 (aor. pāvassi). - pp. pavaṭṭha & pavuṭṭha: see abhi°. Pavassana {Pavassana} (nt.) [fr. pa+vṛṣ] beginning to rain, raining Miln 120. Pavāta {Pavata} (nt.) [pa+vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta] a draught of air, breeze Vin II.79 (opp. nivāta). Pavāti {Pavati} [pa+vā] to diffuse a scent Dh 54; Th 1, 528; J V.63 (disā bhāti p. ca). See also pavāyati. Pavāda {Pavada} [pa+vad, cp. Epic Sk. pravāda talk, saying] talk, disputation, discussion D I.26, 162; M I.63; Sn 538. Pavādaka {Pavadaka} (adj.) [fr. pavāda] 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation D I.178 (samaya° "debating hall"). - 2. fond of discussing Miln 4 (bhassa° "fond of wordy disputation"). Cp. pavādiya. Pavādiya {Pavadiya} (adj.) [fr. pavāda, cp. pavādaka] belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Sn 885 (n. pl. °āse, taken by Nd1 293 as pavadanti, by SnA 555 as vādino). Pavāyati {Pavayati} [pa+vā] to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse J I.18 (dibba-gandho p.); Vism 58 (dasa disā sīla-gandho p.). Cp. pavāti. Pavāraṇā {Pavarana} (f.) [pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravāraṇā Divy 91, 93; whereas Epic Sk. pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of "satisfaction"] 1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin I.155, 160 (where 2 kinds: cātuddasikā & pannarasikā), II.32. 167; D II.220; S I.190. pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) P. Vin II.32, 276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā° the great P. and °sangaha, an abridged P. (see DA I.241) J I.29, 82, 193 (mahā°); Vism 391 (id.); SnA 57 (id.); VvA 67 (id.); PvA 140 (id.); - 2. satisfaction Vism 71. Pavārita {Pavarita} [pp. of pavāreti] 1. satisfied M I.12 (+paripuṇṇa pariyosita); Miln 231; Vism 71. - 2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin I.175. - Freq. in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin I.213 (cp. Vin. Texts I.39); II.300; IV.82; PvA 23. Pavāreti {Pavareti} [Caus. of pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravārayati Divy 116, 283, etc.] 1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy S I.190; A IV.79; J III.352. - 2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i. e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin I.160 sq.; II.255; DhA I.87; J I.29, 215; IV.243 (vuttha-vassa p.); Vism 90; SnA 57. - pp. pavārita (q. v.) See also sam°. Pavāla & Pavāḷa {Pavala} (m. & nt.) [cp. Class Sk. prabāla, pravāḍa & pravāla] 1. coral J I.394 (°ratta-kambala); II.88; IV.142; Miln 267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.); SnA 117; VvA 112 (°ratana). - 2. a sprout, young branch, shoot J III.389, 395 (kāḷa-valli°); V.207; Nett 14 (°ankura); SnA 91 (id.). Pavāḷha {Pavalha} [apparently pp. of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality pp. of pa+bṛh1, corresp. to Sk. prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud+bṛh1), but cp. also ubbāḷha which is pp. Pāli Text Society 1012 Pāli-English Dictionary of ud+bādh. At D I.77 (where v. l. pabbāḷha=pabūḷha, unexpld by Bdhgh) it is synonymous with uddharati=ubbahati] 1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed S III.91 (bhikkhusangho p.). - 2. drawn forth, pulled out, taken out D I.77=Ps II.211=Vism 406 (muðjamhā isīkā p.); J VI.67 (muðjā v'isikā p.). Pavāsa {Pavasa} [fr. pa+vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning] sojourning abroad, being away from home J II.123; V.434; VI.150; Miln 314. - Cp. vi°. Pavāsita {Pavasita} 1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured J V.377 (=pesita C.). - 2. (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita T.) scented, permeated with scent [pp. of pavāseti] VvA 237 (v. l. padhūpita preferable). Pavāsin {Pavasin} (adj.) [fr. pavāsa] living abroad or from home, in cira° long absent Dh 219 (=cirappavuttha DhA III.293). Pavāhaka {Pavahaka} (adj.) [fr. pa+vah] carrying or driving away Th 1, 758. Pavāhati {Pavahati} [Caus. fr. pa+vah] 1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; freq. with ref. to water: to wash away, cleanse M I.39; S I.79, 183 (pāpakammaṃ nahānena); II.88; Th 1, 349; J I.24; III.176, 225, 289; IV.367; V.134; VI.197; 588; Miln 247; Dāvs II.59; PvA 256. - 2. to pull out, draw out D I.77 (better to be read as pabāhati). Pavāhitatta {Pavahitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pavāhita, pp. of pavāheti] the fact of being removed or cleansed J V.134. Pavāhana {Pavahana} (adj. & nt.) [fr. pa+vah] 1. carrying off, putting away, Th 1, 751. - 2. wiping off J III.290. Pavikatthita {Pavikatthita} [pp. of pa+vi+katthati] boasted J I.359. Pavicaya {Pavicaya} [fr. pa+vicinati] investigation Sn 1021; Th 1, 593; Pug 25; Nett 3, 87. Pavicarati {Pavicarati} [pa+vicarati] to investigate thoroughly M III.85; S V.68. Pavicinati {Pavicinati} [pa+vicinati] to investigate, to examine M III.85; S V.68, 262; Nett 21; SnA 545. grd. paviceyya J IV.164, & pavicetabba Nett 21. Pavijjhati {Pavijjhati} [pa+vyadh] to throw forth or down Vin II.193 (silaṃ cp. J I.173 & V.333); III.82, 178, 415; DA I.138, 154. - pp. paviddha (q. v.). Pavijjhana {Pavijjhana} (nt.) [fr. pavijjhati] hurling, throwing J V.67 (Devadattassa silā°, cp. Vin II.193); J I.173; V.333. Paviṭṭha {Pavittha} [pp. of pavisati] entered, gone into (acc.), visited S I.197; II.19; Dh 373; DA I.288; PvA 12, 13. Pāli Text Society 1013 Pāli-English Dictionary Pavitakka {Pavitakka} [pa+vitakka] scepticism, speculation, controversy Sn 834; Nd1 176. Pavidaṃseti {Pavidamseti} [pa+vi+Caus. of dṛś; daṃseti=dasseti] to make clear, to reveal J V.326 (aor. pavidaṃsayi). Paviddha {Paviddha} [pp. of pavijjhati] thrown down, fig. given up, abandoned Th 1, 350 (°gocara). Pavineti {Pavineti} [pa+vineti] to lead or drive away, expel Sn 507=J V.148. Pavibhajati {Pavibhajati} [pa+vi+bhaj. Cp. Class Sk. pravibhāga division, distribution] to distribute, to apportion S I.193 (°bhajjaṃ, ppr., with jj metri causa)=Th 1, 1242 (°bhajja ger.). Pavilīyati {Paviliyati} [pa+vi+lī] to be dissolved, to melt or fade away S IV.289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena). Paviloketi {Paviloketi} [pa+viloketi] to look forward or ahead J VI.559. Pavivitta {Pavivitta} [pp. of pa+vi+vic] separated, detached, secluded, singled M I.14, 77, 386; II.6; S II.29; Vism 73; PvA 127 DhA II.77. Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd2 225=Nd1 3421Q=Vism 25; J I.107; Miln 244, 358, 371 (with appa-sadda appanigghosa). Paviveka {Paviveka} [fr. pa+vi+vic] retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin I.104; II.258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi+; cp. pavivitta); D I.60; M I.14 sq.; S II.202; V.398; A I.240; Sn 257; Dh 205 (°rasa, cp. DhA III.268); Th 1, 597; J I.9; Ps II.244; Vism 41, 73 (°sukha-rasa); Sdhp 476; DA I.169. Pavivekatā {Pavivekata} (f.) [abstr. fr. paviveka]=paviveka Vism 81 (appicchatā etc. in enumn of the 5 dhuta-dhammas). Pavivekiya {Pavivekiya} (adj.) [fr. paviveka] springing from solitude Th 1, 669. Pavisati {Pavisati} [pa+viś] to go in, to enter (acc.) Sn 668, 673; DhA II.72 (opp. nikkhamati); PvA 4, 12, 47 (nagaraṃ). Pot. °vise Sn 387 imper. pavisa M I.383; S I.213; fut. pavisissati Vin I.87; J III.86; pavissati (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 652) J II.68; Cp. I.956, and pavekkhati S IV.199; J VI.76 (nāgo bhūmiyaṃ p.); Dāvs III.26; aor. pāvisi Vin II.79 (vihāraṃ); M I.381; J I.76 (3rd pl. pāvisuṃ), 213; J II.238; Vism 42 (gāmaṃ) PvA 22, 42, 161, 256; and pavisi J II.238; PvA 12, 35; ger. pavisitvā S I.107; J I.9 (araññaṃ); Vism 22; PvA 4, 12, 46, 79 & pavissa S I.200; Dh 127=PvA 104. - pp. paviṭṭha (q. v.).- Caus. paveseti (q. v.). Pavisana {Pavisana} (nt.) [fr. pa+viś] going in, entering, entrance J I.294; II.416; VI.383; DhA I.83. Cp. pavesana. Pavīṇa {Pavina} (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pravīṇa] clever, skilful Dāvs V.33; VvA 168 (v. l. kusala). Pāli Text Society 1014 Pāli-English Dictionary Pavīnati {Pavinati} [pa+vī to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp. Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. veṇ) & apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti] to look up to, respect, honour J III.387 (T. reading sure, but v. l. C. pavīrati). Pavīhi {Pavihi} [pa+vīhi] in pl. diff. kinds of rice J V.405 (=nānappakārā vīhayo). Pavuccati {Pavuccati} [Pass. of pavacati] to be called, said, or pronounced Sn 436, 513, 611 & passim; Dh 257; Pv IV.347; PvA 102. The form pavuccate also occurs, e. g. at Sn 519 sq. - pp. pavutta1 (q. v.). Pavuṭā {Pavuta} at M I.518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv. ll. at M I.518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the C. expln is pavuṭā=gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at D I.54 reads paṭuvā (q. v.), with vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DA I.164 expls pacuṭā =gaṇṭhikā (vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dial. I.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated; Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto. Pavuṭṭha {Pavuttha} (pavaṭṭha) [pp. of pavassati] see abhi°. Pavutta1 {Pavutta} [pp. of pa+vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, pp. of pa+vṛt, cp. pavutti] said, declared, pronounced D I.104 (mantapada p.; v.l. °vatta which is more likely; but DA I.273 expls by vutta & vācita); S I.52; Sn 383 (su°=sudesita SnA 373), 868 (=ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd1 271). Pavutta2 {Pavutta} [pp. of pa+vap] scattered forth, strewn, sown S I.227. Pavutti {Pavutti} [fr. pa+vṛt, cp. Class. Sk. pravṛtti] happening, proceeding, fate, event PvA 31 (v. l. pavatti), 46, 53, 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages). Pavuttha {Pavuttha} [pp. of pavasati] dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home D II.261 (°jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i. e. who no longer belongs to any caste); J V.434; DhA III.293. Freq. in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin II.268; III.83; Miln 205. Pavūsita {Pavusita} at VvA 237 is misreading either for pavāsita at VvA 237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as v. l. SS.), in meaning "blown" i. e. scented, filled with scent. Pavekkhati {Pavekkhati} is fut. pavisati. Pavecchati [most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Notes 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa+yam) by way of *payecchati>pavecchati (cp. sa-yathā>seyyathā). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 43 fr. pa+vṛṣ, nor with Müller P.Gr. 120 fr. pa+viṣ (who with this derivation follows the P. Commentators, e. g. J III.12 pavesati, deti; SnA 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger P.Gr. § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a Fut. stem (of viś?)] to give, bestow S I.18; Sn 463 sq., 490 sq.; Th 2, 272; J I.28; III.12 (v. l. pavacchati), 172; IV.363; VI.502, 587 (vuṭṭhi-dhāraṃ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; v.l. pavattento); Pv II.943 (=deti PvA {Pavecchati} Pāli Text Society 1015 Pāli-English Dictionary 130); II.970 (=pavatteti ibid. 139); II.107 (=deti ibid. 144); Miln 375. Another dern suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is=Sk. pra-vṛścati. Paveṇi {Paveni} (f.) [pa+veṇi; cp. late Sk. praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2] 1. a braid of hair, i. e. the hair twisted & unadorned A III.56 - 2. a mat, cover D I.7 ≈ (see ajina°). - 3. custom, usage, wont, tradition J I.89; II.353; V.285; VI.380 (kula-tanti, kula-paveṇi); Dpvs XVIII.1; Miln 134 (°upaccheda break of tradition), 190, 226 (+vaṃsa), 227; DhA I.284 (tanti+); PvA 131. - 4. succession, lineage, breed, race Sn 26 (cp. SnA 39); DhA I.174. -pālaka guardian of tradition Vism 99 (tanti-dhara, vaṃsanurakkhaka+); DhA III.386. Pavedana {Pavedana} (nt.) [fr. pa+vid] making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza "nisīd' ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā," until the announcement of the time (of death) Th 1, 563 (trsln "until the hour should be revealed")=J I.118=Vism 389=DhA I.248. Pavedita {Pavedita} [pp. of pavedeti] made known, declared, taught M I.67 (su° & du°); S I.231; Dh 79, 281; Sn 171, 330, 838; Nd1 186. Pavedeti [Caus. of pa+vid] to make known, to declare, communicate, relate S I.24; IV.348; Dh 151; Sn p. 103 (=bodheti ðāpeti SnA 444); PvA 33, 58, 68 (attānaṃ make oneself known), 120. - pp. pavedita (q. v.). {Pavedeti} Pavedhati {Pavedhati} [pa+vyath, cp. pavyatheti] to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Sn 928 (=tasati etc. Nd1 384); Vism 180 (reads pavedheti) ThA 203 (allavatthaṃ allakesaṃ pavedhanto, misreading for pavesento); DhA II.249. - Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamāna trembling M I.88; Pv III.55 (=pakampamāna PvA 199); J I.58; III.395. - pp. pavedhita & pavyadhita (q. v.). Pavellati {Pavellati} [pa+vell] to shake, move to & fro, undulate S IV.289 (paveliyamānena kāyena); J III.395. - pp. pavellita (q. v.). Pavellita {Pavellita} [pp. of pavellati] shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling J VI.456. Pavesa {Pavesa} (-°) [fr. pa+viś] entrance ThA 66 (Rājagaha°); DhA IV.150. Pavesana {Pavesana} (nt.) [fr. paveseti] 1. going in, entering, entrance J I.142; PvA 79 (v. l. for T. °vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana°). - 2. beginning VvA 71 (opp. nikkhamana). - 3. putting in, application J II.102 (daṇḍe p.). - 4. means of entry, as adj. able to enter J VI.383. Pavesetar {Pavesetar} [n. ag. of paveseti] one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in S IV.194; A V.195. Paveseti {Paveseti} [Caus. of pavisati] 1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in M I.79; J I.150 (miga-gaṇaṃ uyyānaṃ), 291; VI.179; Vism 39; PvA 38, 44, 61 (gehaṃ), 141 (id.); DhA I.397. - 2. to furnish, provide, introduce, procure, apply to (acc. or loc.) J III.52 (rajjukaṃ gīvāya); VI.383 (siriṃ); Miln 39 (gehe padīpaṃ), 360 (udakaṃ); DA I.218. Perhaps at ThA 203 for pavedheti. Caus. II. pavesāpeti J I.294 (mātugāmaṃ aggiṃ). Pāli Text Society 1016 Pāli-English Dictionary Pavyatheti {Pavyatheti} [Caus. of pa+vyath] to cause to tremble, to shake J V.409. Cp. pavedhati. pp. pavyadhita (q. v.). Pavyadhita [pp. of pa+vyath; the dh through analogy with pavedhita] afflicted, frightened, afraid J VI.61, 166. {Pavyadhita} Pasaṃsaka {Pasamsaka} [fr. pasaṃsati] flatterer M I.327; J II.439; Sdhp 565. Pasaṃsati {Pasamsati} [pa+saṃs] to speak out, praise, commend, agree D I.163; S I.102, 149, 161; J I.143; II.439; V.331; It 16; Sn 47, 163, 390, 658, 906; Dh 30; Pv II.942; DA I.149; PvA 25, 131 (=vaṇṇeti). - pp. pasattha & pasaṃsita (q. v.). Cp. paṭipasaṃsita. Pasaṃsana {Pasamsana} (nt.) [fr. pa+śaṃs] praising, commendation Pug 53; Sdhp 213; PvA 30. Pasaṃsā {Pasamsa} (f.) [fr. pa+śaṃs; cp. Vedic praśaṃsā] praise, applause D III.260; S I.202; Th 1, 609; Sn 213, 826, 895; Miln 377; SnA 155. In composition the form is pasaṃsa°, e. g. °āvahana bringing applause Sn 256; °kāma desirous of praise Sn 825, cp. Nd1 163; °lābha gain of praise Sn 828. As adj. pasaṃsa "laudable, praiseworthy" it is better taken as grd. of pasaṃsati (=pasaṃsiya); thus at Pv IV.713 (pāsaṃsa Minayeff); PvA 8, 89 (=anindita). Pasaṃsita {Pasamsita} [pp. of pasaṃsati, cp. pasattha] praised S I.232; Sn 829, 928; Dh 228, 230; Nd1 169; PvA 116 (=vaṇṇita) 130. Pasaṃsiya {Pasamsiya} (adj.) [grd. of pasaṃsati, cp. Vedic praśaṃsia] laudable, praiseworthy S I.149; III.83; A II.19; Sn 658; J I.202; Sdhp 563. Cp. pasaṃsā. Pasakkati {Pasakkati} [pa+sakkati] to go forth or out to; ger. pasakkiya S I.199=Th 1, 119; Th 1, 125. Pasakkhita {Pasakkhita} at J IV.365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (pp. of pasakkati); the C. expls as "lying down" (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of vv. ll. vamakkhita & malakita. Pasankanta {Pasankanta} [pp. of pa+sankamati, of kram] gone out to, gone forth PvA 22. Pasankamati {Pasankamati} [pa+saṃ+kram] to go out or forth to (acc.) Sdhp 277. - pp. pasankanta. Pasanga {Pasanga} [fr. pa+sanj. Class Sk. prasanga in both meanings] 1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to KhA 18; PvA 130. - 2. occasion, event; loc. pasange at the occasion of (-°), instead of KhA 213 (karaṇavacana°, where PvA 30 in id. p. reads karaṇ'atthe). Pasajati {Pasajati} [pa+sṛj] to let loose, produce; to be attached to Sn 390 (=allīyati SnA 375). Pasaṭa {Pasata} [pp. of pa+sṛ] let out, produced D III.167; SnA 109 (conj. for pasava in expln of pasuta). Pāli Text Society 1017 Pāli-English Dictionary Pasata1 {Pasata} (adj.) [Vedic pṛṣant, f. pṛṣatī] spotted, only in cpd. °miga spotted antelope J V.418 (v. l. pasada°). The more freq. P. form is pasada°, e. g. S II.279 (gloss pasata°); J V.24, 416; VI.537; SnA 82. Pasata2 {Pasata} (nt.) [etym.? Late Sk. pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain-drop=pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant= pasata1, but probably dialectical & Non-Aryan] a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) J I.101 (°mattaṃ udakaṃ); IV.201 (udaka°); V.382 (°mattaṃ pānīyaṃ). Often redupl. pasataṃ pasataṃ "by handfuls" M I.245, J V.164. At DA I.298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift. Passattha & Passaṭṭha {Passattha} [pp. of pasaṃsati] praised, extolled, commended S I.169; J III.234; Vv 4421; Miln 212, 361. As pasaṭṭha at Pv II.973 (so to be read for paseṭṭha); IV.152 (=vaṇṇita PvA 241); DhsA 124. See pasata1. Pasanna1 {Pasanna} (adj) [pp. of pasīdati] 1. clear, bright Sn 550 (°netta); KhA 64 & 65 (°tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism 262 reads vippasanna°); Vism 409 (id.). - 2. happy, gladdened, reconciled, pleased J I.151, 307; Vism 129 (muddha°). - 3. pleased in one's conscience, reconciled, believing, trusting in (loc.), pious, good, virtuous A III.35 (Satthari, dhamme sanghe); S I.34 (Buddhe); V.374; Vv 59; Sn 698; Dh 368 (Buddha-sāsane); J II.111; DhA I.60 (Satthari). Often combd with saddha (having faith) Vin II.190; PvA 20, 42 (a°), and in cpd. °citta devotion in one's heart Vin I.16; A VI.209; Sn 316, 403, 690; Pv II.16; SnA 490; PvA 129; or °mānasa Sn 402; VvA 39; PvA 67; cp. pasannena manasā S I.206; Dh 2. See also abhippasanna & vippasanna. Pasanna2 {Pasanna} [pp. of pa+syad] flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu-pasannaṃ shedding of tears S II.179. Pasannā {Pasanna} (f.) [late Sk. prasannā] a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) J I.360. Pasammati {Pasammati} [pa+Śam] to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Th 1, 702. Pasayha {Pasayha} is ger. of pasahati (q. v.). Pasaraṇa {Pasarana} (nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ] stretching, spreading, being stretched out PvA 219 (piṭṭhi°). See also pasāraṇa. Pasava {Pasava} [fr. pa+su] bringing forth, offspring S I.69. Pasavati {Pasavati} [pa+su] to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly fig. in combn with the foll. nouns: kibbisaṃ to commit sin Vin II.204; A V.75; pāpaṃ id. Pv IV.150; puññaṃ to produce merit S I.182, 213; A V.76; PvA 121; opp. apuññaṃ Vin II.26; S I.114; veraṃ to beget hatred S II.68; Dh 201. - Caus. pasaveti in same meaning J VI.106 (pāpaṃ) - pp. pasūta (q. v.). Pasavana {Pasavana} (nt.) [fr. pa+su] 1. giving birth PvA 35. - 2. producing, generating, effecting PvA 31 (puñña°). Pāli Text Society 1018 Pāli-English Dictionary Pasaha {Pasaha} [fr. pa+sah] overcoming, mastering, in dup° (adj.) hard to overcome J II.219; Miln 21. Pasahati {Pasahati} [pa+sah] to use force, subdue, oppress, overcome M II.99; Sn 443; Dh 7, 128; DhA III.46; J IV.126, 494; V.27. - ger. pasayha using force, forcibly, by force D II.74 (okkassa+); A IV.16 (id.); S I.143; Sn 72; J I.143; Pv II.92; II.910; (read appasayha for suppasayha); Miln 210 (okassa+; for okkassa?). Also in cpd. pasayha-kārin using force J IV.309; V.425. Pasākha {Pasakha} (m. & nt.) [pa+sākhā; Epic Sk. praśākhā branch] 1. a smaller branch J VI.324 (sākha°). - 2. branch-like wood, i. e. hard wood Th 1, 72. - 3. the body where it branches off from the trunk, i. e. abdomen & thighs; the lower part of the body Vin IV.316 (=adho-nābhi ubbha-jānu-maṇḍalaṃ C.). Cp. Suśruta II.31, 10. - 4. the extremities (being the 5th stage in the formation of the embryo) S I.206. Pasāda {Pasada} [fr. pa+sad, cp. Vedic prasāda] 1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours ("visibility") of the eye J I.319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa-sadisāni paððāyamāna paðcappasādāni ahesuṃ); SnA 453 (pasanna-netto i. e. pañca-vaṇṇa-ppasāda-sampattiyā). In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of "sentient organ, sense agency" sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at DhsA 306, 307. - 2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind, virtue, faith M I.64 (Satthari); S I.202; A I.98, 222 (Buddhe etc.); II.84; III.270 (puggala°); IV.346; SnA 155, PvA 5, 35. - 3. repose, composure, allayment, serenity Nett 28, 50; Vism 107, 135; ThA 258. - Note. pasāda at Th 2, 411 is to be read pāsaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi°. Pasādaka {Pasadaka} (adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. making bright Miln 35 (udaka° maṇi). - 2. worthy, good, pious PvA 129 (a°). Cp. pāsādika. Pasādana {Pasadana} (nt.) [fr. pa+sad] 1. happy state, reconciliation, purity PvA 132. - 2. granting graces, gratification DhA III.3 (brahmaṇo mama p. °ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces). - Cp. sam°. Pasādaniya {Pasadaniya} (adj.) [fr. pasāda] inspiring confidence, giving faith S V.156; Pug 49, 50; VbhA 282 (°suttanta); Sdhp 543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at M III.11 sq. Cp. sam°. Pasādiyā {Pasadiya} at J VI.530 is doubtful; it is expld in C. together with saṃsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara-sāli), yet the C. seems to take it as "bhūmiyaṃ patita"; v. l. pasāriya. Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as rice plant & compares Sk. *prasātikā. Pasādeti [Caus. of pa+sad, see pasīdati] to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one's heart (cittaṃ) towards (loc.) D I.110, 139; S I.149; A V.71; Pv II.942 (cittaṃ); Miln 210; PvA 50, 123 (khamāpento p.). - Cp. vi°. {Pasadeti} Pasādhana {Pasadhana} (nt.) [fr. pa+sādh; cp. Class. Sk. prasādhana in same meaning] ornament, decoration, parure J II.186 (raððo sīsa °kappaka King's headdress-maker i. e. barber); III.437; IV.3 (ura-cchada°); DhA I.227 (°peḷikā), 342 (°kappaka), 393; ThA 267; VvA 165, 187; PvA 155. Pāli Text Society 1019 Pāli-English Dictionary Pasādhita {Pasadhita} [pp. of pasādheti] adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up J I.489 (maṇḍita°); II.48 (id.); IV.219 (id.); V.510 (nahāta°). Pasādheti {Pasadheti} [Caus. of pa+sādh] to adorn, decorate, array Mhvs VII.38; DhA I.398. - pp. pasādhita (q. v.). Pasāraṇa {Pasarana} (nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ, cp. pasaraṇa] stretching out DA I.196 (opp. sammiñjana); DhA I.298 (hattha°). Pasārita {Pasarita} [pp. of pasāreti] 1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiðjita, e. g. at D I.222; Vin I.230; M III.35, 90; S I.137; Vism 19; VvA 6. - 2. put forth, laid out, offered for sale Miln I.336. Pasāreti {Pasareti} [Caus. of pa+sṛ] 1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up J VI.58 (pasāraya, imper.). - Pass. pasāriyati Vism 318; PvA 240 (are turned out of doors). - 2. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuṃ, bāhaṃ, bāhā) S I.137 (opp. sammiñjeti); DA I.196; PvA 112, 121; or hand (hatthaṃ) J V.41; VI.282; PvA 113; or feet (pāde, pādaṃ) Th 2, 44, 49, cp. ThA 52; DhsA 324 (=sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti). - 3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin II.291; DhA II.89. - pp. pasārita (q. v.), Cp. abhi° Pasāsati {Pasasati} [pa+śās] 1. to teach, instruct S I.38; J III.367, 443. - 2. to rule, reign, govern D II.257; Cp. III.141; PvA 287. Pasāsana {Pasasana} (nt.) [fr. pa+śās] teaching, instruction J III.367. Pasibbaka {Pasibbaka} (m. nt.) [fr. pa+siv, late Sk. prasevaka> P. pasebbaka>pasibbaka, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. 151] a sack, Vin III.17; J I.112, 351; II.88, 154; III.10, 116, 343 (camma° leather bag); IV.52, 361; V.46 (pūpa°), 483; VI.432 (spelling pasippaka); DA I.41; DhA IV.205. Pasibbita {Pasibbita} [pp. of pa+siv] sewn up, enveloped by (-°) Th 1, 1150 (maṃsa-nahāru°). Pasīdati {Pasidati} [pa+sad] 1. to become bright, to brighten up PvA 132 (mukha-vaṇṇo p.). - 2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (mano or cittaṃ p.); to find one's satisfaction in (loc.), to have faith D II.202; S I.98; II.199 (sutvā dhammaṃ p.); A III.248; Sn 356, 434, 563; Nd2 426 (=saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti); Vv 5014 (mano me pasīdi, aor.); Vism 129; Miln 9; DhA III.3 (=he is gracious, i. e. good); VvA 6 (better v. l. passitvā); PvA 141. - pp. pasanna (q. v.). See also pasādeti & vippasīdati. Pasīdana {Pasidana} (nt.) [fr. pasīdati] calming, happiness, purification Ps II.121 (SS passādana). Pasu {Pasu} [Vedic paśu, cp. Lat. pecu & pecunia, Gr. pe/kos fleece, Goth. vieh, E. fee] cattle M I.79; J V.105; Pv II.1312 (°yoni); Miln 100; PvA 166 (°bhāva); n. pl. pasavo S I.69; Sn 858; gen. pl. pasūnaṃ Sn 311; Pv II.25. - dupasu bad cattle Th 1, 446. Pasuka {Pasuka} =pasu Vin II.154 (ajaka+). Pāli Text Society 1020 Pāli-English Dictionary Pasuta {Pasuta} [pp. of pa+sā or si, Sk. prasita, on change of i to u see Geiger, P.Gr. § 193. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa+su] attached to (acc. or loc.), intent upon (-°), pursuing, doing D I.135 (kamma°); Sn 57 (see Nd2 427), 709, 774, 940, Dh 166, 181; Vism 135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka-kicca°); DhA III.160; PvA 151 (puñña-kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka°), 195, 228 (pāpa°). Pasura {Pasura} (adj.) [reading doubtful] many, abundant J VI.134 (=rāsi, heap C.). We should probably read pacura, as at J V.40 (=bahu C.). Pasūta {Pasuta} [pp. of pasavati] produced; having born, delivered PvA 80. Pasūti {Pasuti} (f.) [fr. pa+su] bringing forth, birth, in °ghara lying-in chamber Nd1 120; Vism 235; KhA 58 (where Vism 259 reads sūtighara). Paseṭṭha {Pasettha} at Pv II.973 is to be read pasaṭṭha (see pasattha). Pasodheti {Pasodheti} [pa+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purity D I.71 (cittaṃ). Passa1 {Passa} [cp. Sk. paśya, fr. passati] seeing, one who sees Th 1, 61 (see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48). Passa2 {Passa} (m. & nt.) [Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg, see under paṇhi] 1. side, flank M I.102; III.3; A V.18; Sn 422; J I.264; III.26. Pleonastic in piṭṭhi° (cp. E. backside) the back, loc. behind J I.292; PvA 55. - 2. (mountain-) slope, in Himavanta° J I.218; V.396 (loc. pasmani=passe C.). Passati {Passati} [Vedic paśyati & *spaśati (aor. aspaṣṭa, Caus. spāśayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. ske/ptomai, (E. "scepsis"); Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon=Ger. spāhen (E. spy). - The paradigm pass°, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh° & dass° (dṛś): see dassati1] 1. to see - Pres. passati Vin I.322; S I.69, 132, 198; II.29; Sn 313, 647, 953, 1063, 1142 (cp. Nd2 428); Pv I.23; Miln 218; PvA 11, 102; 1st pl. passāma Sn 76, 153, 164; Pv I.101 (as future); imper. sg. passa Sn 435, 580, 588, 756; J I.223; II.159; Pv II.116, 119; PvA 38; pl. passatha S II.25; Sn 176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. paśyadhvaṃ) Sn 998. - ppr. passaṃ (see Geiger, P.Gr. 972) M II.9; Sn 739, 837, 909; & passanto J III.52; PvA 5, 6; f. passantī S I.199. - grd. passitabba J IV.390 (a°). - fut. passissati Pv II.46; PvA 6. - aor. passi J II.103, 111; III.278, 341. - 2. to recognise, realise, know: only in combn with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaṃ passaṃ): see jānāti 11. - 3. to find Sn 1118 (=vindati paṭilabhati Nd2 428b); J III.55; Pv II.99. - Cp. vi°. Passaddha {Passaddha} [pp. of passambhati, cp. BSk. praśrabdha Divy 48] calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with ref. to the body (kāya), e. g. at Vin I.294; D III.241, 288; M I.37; III.86; S I 126; IV.125; A I.148; V.30; Vism 134; VbhA 283 (°kāyapuggala). - In lit. appln °ratha when the car had slowed down J III.239. See also paṭi°. Passaddhatā {Passaddhata} (f.) [abstr. fr. passaddha] calmness, repose Nd2 166. Pāli Text Society 1021 Pāli-English Dictionary Passaddhi {Passaddhi} (f.) [fr. pa+śrambh] calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity M III.86; S II.30; IV.78; V.66; A IV.455 sq.; Ps II.244; Dhs 40 (kāya°), 41 (citta°), cp. Dhs. trsl. 23; Vism 129; VbhA 314 (kāya°, citta°); DhsA 150 (=samassāsa-ppatta). Often combd with pāmujja & pīti, e. g. D I.72, 73, 196; Nett 29, 66. Six passaddhis at S IV.217 (with ref. to vācā, vitakka-vicārā, pīti, assāsa-passāsā, saððā-vedanā, rāga-dosa-moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhangas (constituents of enlightenment): see this & cp. M III.86; Vism 130, 134=VbhA 282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enumd). Passanā {Passana} see anu°, vi°. Passambhati {Passambhati} [pa+śrambh] to calm down, to be quiet Vin I.294 (fut °issati); D I.73; M III.86; S V.333; A III.21. - pp. passaddha; Caus. passambheti (q. v.). Passambhanā {Passambhana} (f.) [fr. passambhati] allayment, calmness, composure Dhs 40, 41, 320. Passambheti {Passambheti} [Caus. of passambhati] to calm down, quiet, allay M I.56, 425; S III.125; Vism 288 (=nirodheti). ppr. passambhayaṃ M I.56; III.82, 89. Passaya {Passaya} [fr. pa+śri, cp. Class. Sk. praśraya reverence] refuge Cp. III.104. - Note. °passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya J III.74, & kaṇṭakāpassayika D I.167 (kaṇṭh°); J IV.299 (kaṇṭaka°) is to be read as °apassaya (apa+śri). Passavati {Passavati} [pa+sru] to flow forth, to pour out Miln 180. Passasati {Passasati} [pa+śvas] to breathe in D II.291; M I.56; III.82; J III.296; V.43; Vism 271; DhA 1.215. See also assasati & remarks under ā1 3. Passāva {Passava} [fr. passavati] urine (lit. flowing out) Vin II.141; IV.266 (p. muttaṃ vuccati); D I.70 (uccāra+); M III.3, 90; J I.164 (uccāra-passāvaṃ vissajjeti), 338; V.164, 389; Vism 235 (uccāra°). -doṇikā a trough for urine Vin II.221; Vism 235. Passāsa {Passasa} [fr. pa+śvas] inhaled breath, inhalation S I.106, 159; Ps I.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combn assāsapassāsa (q. v.). At Vism 272 passāsa is expl1 as "ingoing wind" and assāsa as "outgoing wind." Passāsin {Passasin} (adj.) [fr. passāsa] breathing; in ghuru-ghuru° snoring S I.117. Passika {Passika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. imper. passa of passati, +ka] only in cpd. ehipassika (q. v.). Passupati {Passupati} [pa+svap] to sleep, rest, aor. passupi; fut. passupissati J V.70. 71. Paha1 {Paha} (nt.) [?] flight of steps from which to step down into the water, a ghat (=tittha Bdhgh) D I.223. The meaning is uncertain, it is trsld as "accessible" at Dial. I.283 (q. v. for further detail). Neumann (Majjhima trsln I.513) trsls "ganz und gar erloschen" (pabhā?). It is not at all improbable to take pahaṃ as ppr. of pajahati (as contracted fr. pajahaṃ like pahatvāna for pajahitvāna at Sn 639), thus meaning "giving up entirely." The same form in the latter meaning occurs at ThA 69 (Ap. v.3). 1022 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Paha2 {Paha} (adj.)=pahu, i. e. able to (with inf.) J V.198 (C. pahū samattho). Pahaṃsati1 {Pahamsati} [pa+haṃsati1=ghaṃsati1, of ghṛṣ to rub, grind] to strike, beat (a metal), rub, sharpen (a cutting instrument, as knife, hatchet, razor etc.) J I.278; II.102 (pharasuṃ); DhA I.253 (khuraṃ pahaṃsi sharpened the razor; corresponds to ghaṭṭeti in preceding context). - pp. pahaṭṭha1 & pahaṃsita1 (q. v.). Pahaṃsati2 {Pahamsati} [pa+haṃsati2=hassati, of hṛṣ to be glad, cp. ghaṃsati2] to be pleased, to rejoice; only in pp. pahaṭṭha2 & pahaṃsita2 (q. v.), and in Pass. pahaṃsīyati to be gladdened, to exult Miln 326 (+kuhīyati). See also sam°. Pahaṃsita1 {Pahamsita} [pp. of pahaṃsati] struck, beaten (of metal), refined J VI.218 (ukkā- mukha°), 574 (id.). Pahaṃsita2 {Pahamsita} [pp. of pahaṃsati2] gladdened, delighted, happy DhA I.230 (°mukha); VvA 279 (°mukha SS pahasita at Miln 297 is better to be taken as pp. of pahasati, because of combn haṭṭha pahaṭṭha hasita pahasita. Pahaṭa {Pahata} [pp. of paharati] assailed, struck, beaten (of musical instruments) J II.102, 182; VI.189; VvA 161 (so for pahata); PvA 253. Of a ball: driven, impelled Vism 143 (°citrageṇḍuka)=DhsA 116 (so read for pahaṭṭha-citta-bheṇḍuka and correct Expositor 153 accordingly). The reading pahaṭa at PvA 4 is to be corrected to paṭaha. Pahaṭṭha1 {Pahattha} [pp. of pahaṃsati1] struck, beaten (of metal) J VI.217 (suvaṇṇa). Pahaṭṭha2 {Pahattha} [pp. of pahaṃsati2] gladdened, happy, cheerful, delighted Vin III.14; J I.278 (twice; once as °mānasa, which is wrongly taken by C. as pahaṭṭha1), 443; II.240 (tuṭṭha°); Vism 346 (haṭṭha°); DhA I.230 (tuṭṭha°); VvA 337. In its original sense of "bristling" (with excitement or joy), with ref. to ear & hair of an elephant in phrase pahaṭṭha-kaṇṇa-vāla at Vin II.195= J V.335 (cp. Sk. prahṛṣṭa-roman, N. of an Asura at Kathāsaritsāgara 47, 30). Pahata {Pahata} [pp. of pa+han] killed, overcome M III.46; S II.54; J VI.512. Paharaṇa {Paharana} (nt.) [fr. paharati] striking, beating SnA 224; PvA 285. Paharaṇaka {Paharanaka} (adj.) [fr. paharaṇa] striking, hitting J I.418. Paharati {Paharati} [pa+hṛ] to strike, hit, beat J III.26, 347; VI.376; VvA 65; PvA 4; freq. in phrase accharaṃ p. to snap one's finger, e. g. J II.447; see accharā1. aor. pahāsi (cp. pariyudāhāsi) Vv 292 (=pahari VvA 123). - pp. pahaṭa (q. v.). Caus. paharāpeti. - 1. to cause to be assailed J IV.150. - 2. to put on or join on to J VI.32 (°hārāpesi). Pahasati {Pahasati} [pa+has] to laugh, giggle J V.452 (ūhasati+). See also pahassati & pahāsati. - pp. pahasita (q. v.). Pahasita {Pahasita} [pp. of pahasati or °hassati] laughing, smiling, joyful, pleased Miln 297; J I.411 (nicca° mukha); II.179. Pāli Text Society 1023 Pāli-English Dictionary Pahassati {Pahassati} [pa+has, perhaps pa+hṛṣ, Sk. harṣati, cp. pahaṃsati2] to laugh, be joyful or cheerful Sn 887 (=haṭṭha pahaṭṭha Nd1 296; cp. SnA 555 hāsajāta). The pp. pahasita (q. v.) is derived fr. pres. pahasati, which makes the equation pahassati=pahaṃsati2 all the more likely. Pahāna {Pahana} (nt.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, leaving, abandoning, rejection M I.60, III.4, 72; S I.13, 132 (dukkha°); II.170; III.53; IV.7 sq.; D III.225, 246; A I.82, 134; II.26, 232 (kaṇhassa kammassa °āya).; III.431; Sn 374, 1106 (=vūpasama paṭinissagga etc. Nd2 429); Dh 331; J I.79; Ps I.26; II.98, 156; Pug 16; Dhs 165, 174, 339; Nett 15 sq., 24, 192; Vism 194 (nīvaraṇasantāpa°); DhsA 166, 345; VvA 73. -°pariððā see pariððā; -°vinaya avoidance consisting in giving up (coupled with saṃvara-vinaya avoidance by protection, prophylaxis), based on the 5 qualities tadanga-pahāna, vikkhambhana°, samuccheda°, paṭippassaddhi°, nissaraṇa° DhsA 351; SnA 8. Pahāya {Pahaya} is ger. of pajahati (q. v.). Pahāyin {Pahayin} (adj.) [fr. pa+hā, see pajahati] giving up, abandoning Sn 1113, 1132, cp. Nd2 431; Sdhp 500. Pahāra {Pahara} [fr. pa+hṛ, Class. Sk. prahāra, see paharati] 1. a blow, stroke, hit D I.144 (daṇḍa°); M I.123, 126; Pv IV.167 (sālittaka°); M I.123; DhA III.48 (°dāna-sikkhāpada the precepts concerning those guilty of giving blows, cp. Vin IV.146); PvA 4 (ekappahārena with one stroke). 56 (muggara°), 66 (id.) 253. - ekappahārena at Vism 418 as adv. "all at once." pahāraṃ deti to give a blow Vin IV.146; S IV.62; A III.121; Vism 314 (pahārasatāni); PvA 191 (sīse). - 2. a wound J IV.89; V.459 (°mukha). Pahāraṇa {Paharana} see abhi°. Pahārin {Paharin} (adj.) [fr. paharati] striking, assaulting J II.211. Pahāsa {Pahasa} [fr. pa+has, cp. Class. Sk. prahāsa] laughing, mirth Dhs 9, 86, 285; VvA 132; Sdhp 223. Pahāsati {Pahasati} in pahāsanto saparisaṃ at ThA 69 should preferably be read as pahāsayanto parisaṃ, thus taken as Caus. of pa+has, i. e. making one smile, gladdening. Pahāsi {Pahasi} is 3rd sg. aor. of paharati; found at Vv 298 (musalena=pahari VvA 113); and also 3rd sg. aor of pajahati, e. g. at Sn 1057 (=pajahi Nd2 under jahati) Pahāseti {Pahaseti} [Caus. of pahasati] to make laugh, to gladden, to make joyful Vism 289 (cittaṃ pamodeti hāseti pahāseti). Pahiṇa {Pahina} (adj.-n.) [fr. pa+hi] sending; being sent; a messenger, in °gamaṇa going as messenger, doing messages D I.5; M I.345; J II.82; Miln 370; DA I.78. See also pahana. Pahiṇaka {Pahinaka} (nt.) [fr. pahiṇati?] a sweetmeat A III.76 (v. l. pahenaka). See also paheṇaka. The (late) Sk. form is prahelaka. Pāli Text Society 1024 Pāli-English Dictionary Pahiṇati {Pahinati} [pa+hi, Sk. hinoti] to send; Pres. pahiṇati. Vin III.140 sq.; IV.18; DhA II.243; aor. pahiṇi J I,60 (sāsanaṃ); V.458 (paṇṇāni); VvA 67; DhA I.72; II.56, 243; ger. pahiṇitva VvA 65. pp. pahita2 (q. v.). There is another aor.pāhesi (Sk. prāhaiṣīt) in analogy to which a new pres. pāheti has been formed, so that pāhesi is now felt to be a der. fr. pāheti & accordingly is grouped with the latter. All other forms with he° (pahetuṃ e. g.) are to be found under pāheti. Pahiṇana {Pahinana} (nt.) [fr. pahiṇati] sending, dispatch DhA II.243. Pahtta1 {Pahtta} [pp. of padahati] resolute, intent, energetic; only in cpd. pahitatta of resolute will (cp. BSk. prahitātman Divy 37) M I.114; S I.53 (expld by Bdhgh with wrong derivation fr. peseti as "pesit-atta" thus identifying pahita1 & pahita2, see K.S. 320); II.21, 239; III.73 sq.; IV.60, 145, V.187, A II.14, III.21, IV.302 sq.; V.84; Sn 425, 432 sq., 961; It 71; Nd1 477; Th 2, 161 (expld at ThA 143, with the same mistake as above, as pesita citta); Nd1 477 (id.; pesit-atta); Miln 358, 366, 406. Pahita2 {Pahita} [pp. of pahiṇati] sent J I.86 (sāsana); DhA II.242; III.191 (interchanging with pesita). Pahīna {Pahina} [pp. of pajahati] given up, abandoned, left, eliminated Vin III.97=IV.27; S II.24; III.33; IV.305; Sn 351 (°jāti-maraṇa), 370, 564, 1132 (°mala-moha); It 32; Nd2 s. v.; Ps I.63; II.244; Pug 12, 22. Pahīyati {Pahiyati} [Pass. of pajahati] to be abandoned, to pass away, vanish M I.7; S I.219 (fut. °issati); II.196 (ppr. °īyamāna); V.152; Sn 806; Nd1 124; VbhA 271. Spelt pahiyyati at S V.150. Pahū {Pahu} (adj.) [cp. Vedic prabhū, fr. pa+bhū] able Sn 98; J V.198; Nd2 615°. Pahūta (adj.) [pp. of pa+bhū, cp. Vedic prabhūta] sufficient, abundant, much, considerable Sn 428, 862 sq.; Pv I.52 (=anappaka, bahu, yāvadattha C.; Dhp at PvA 25 gives bahuka as inferior variant); I.117 (=apariyanta, uḷāra; v. l. bahū); II.75 (v. l. bahūta); PvA 145 (dhana; v. l. bahuta); SnA 294 (id.), 321 (id.). See also bahūta. -jivha large tongued D II.18; III.144, 173. -jivhatā the characteristic of a large tongue Sn p. 107. -dhañña having many riches J IV.309. -dhana id. Th 2, 406 (C. reading for T. bahuta-ratana). -pañña rich in wisdom Sn 359, 539, 996. -bhakkha eating much, said of the fire S I.69. -vitta=°dhañña D I.134; Sn 102; PvA 3. {Pahuta} Pahūtika {Pahutika} (adj.)=pahuta PvA 135 (v. l. BB bahuta; in expln of bahu). Paheṇaka {Pahenaka} (nt.) [cp. BSk. praheṇaka in sense of "sweetmeat" at Divy 13, 258; the *Sk. form is prahelaka] a present J VI.369 (so here, whereas the same word as pahiṇaka at A III.76 clearly means "sweetmeat"). Pahena {Pahena} (nt.) [paheṇa?] same as pahiṇa in °gamana going on errands J II.82. Pahoti {Pahoti} & (in verse) pabhavati [pa+bhu, cp. Vedic prabhavati in meaning "to be helpful"] 1. to proceed from (with gen.), rise, originate D II.217; M III.76; S II.184; as pabhavati at Sn 728=1050 (cp. Nd2 401); (perf. med.) pahottha it has arisen from (gen.), i. e. it was the fault of J Pāli Text Society 1025 Pāli-English Dictionary V.102. - 2. to be sufficient, adequate or able (with inf.) D I.240; M I.94; S I.102; Sn 36, 867; J V.305; DA I.192; III.254 (fut. pahossati); VvA 75; Dāvs IV.18. Neg. both with na° & a° viz. nappahoti J VI.204; DhA III.408; nappahosi J I.84; appahoti DhA IV.177; appabhonto PvA 73; in verse appabhavaṃ J III.373 (=appahonto C.). - pp. pahūta (q. v.). Pahona {Pahona} in °kāla in °kāla at J III.17 read as pahonaka°. Pahonaka (adj.) [fr. pahoti] sufficient, enough J I.346; II.122; III.17 (so read for pahona°); IV.277; Vism 404; DhA I.78, 219; VvA 264; PvA 81. {Pahonaka} Pāka {Paka} [Vedic pāka, see pacati] that which is cooked, cooking, quantity cooked J VI.161 (tīhi pākehi pacitvā); VvA 186. Esp. in foll. combn tela° "oil cooking," an oil decoction Vin II.105; thāli° a th. full of cooking J I.186; doṇa° a d. full S I.81; DhA II.8; sosāna° Dhātumaðjūsā 132 (under kaṭh). On pāka in appld meaning of "effect, result" see Cpd. 883. - As nt. in stanza "pākaṃ pākassa paccayo; apākaṃ avipākassa" at VbhA 175. - Cp. vi°. -tela an oil concoction or mixture, used for rubbing the body; usually given with its price worth 100 or 1,000 pieces, e. g. sata° J II.397; V.376; VvA 68= DhA III.311; sahassa° J III.372. -vaṭṭa subsistence, livelihood, maintenance Mhvs 35, 120; DhA II.29; VvA 220. -haṃsa a species of water bird J V.356; VI.539; SnA 277. Pākata {Pakata} (adj.) [=pakata; on ā for a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331. Cp. Sk. prakaṭa Halāyudha. The spelling is sometimes pākaṭa] 1. common, vulgar, uncontrolled, in phrase pākat-indriya of uncontrolled mind S I.61 (=saṃvarābhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭa-indriya K.S. 320), 204; III.93; V.269; A I.70, 266, 280; III.355, 391; Th 1, 109 (C. asaṃvuta, see Brethren 99); Pug 35. - At Miln 251 pākatā is to be read pāpakā. - 2. open, common, unconcealed J I.262 (pākaṭo jāto was found out); Sn A 343; PvA 103 (for āvi). - 3. commonly known, familiar Vism 279; PvA 17 (devā), 23, 78 (su°), 128; VvA 109 (+paððāta); °ṃ karoti to make manifest Vism 287; °bhāva being known DhsA 243; PvA 103. - 4. renowned, well-known DA I.143; PvA 107. Pākatika {Pakatika} (adj.) [fr. pakati, cp. BSk. prākṛtaka (loka) Bodhicaryāvatāra v. 3, ed. Poussin] natural, in its original or natural state J V.274; Miln 218 (maṇiratana); DhA I.20; VvA 288; PvA 66 (where id. p. J III.167 reads paṭipākatika), 206; pākatikaṃ karoti to restore to its former condition, to repair, rebuild J I.354, also fig. to restore a dismissed officer, to reinstate J V.134. Pākāra {Pakara} [cp. Epic Sk. prākāra, pa+ā+kṛ] an encircling wall, put up for obstruction and protection, a fence, rampart Vin II.121 (3 kinds: made of bricks, of stone, or of wood, viz. iṭṭhakā°, silā, dāru°); IV.266 (id.); M III.11; S IV.194 (°toraṇa); A IV.107; V.195; J I.63; II.50; VI.330 (mahā°), 341 (+parikhā & aṭṭāla); Pv I.1013 (ayo°); Miln 1; Vism 394 (=parikkhepapākāra); DhA III.441 (tiṇṇaṃ pākārānaṃ antare); PvA 24, 52; sāṇi° screen-fencing J II.88; PvA 283. -iṭṭhakā brick or tile of a wall J III.446 (T. iṭṭhikā). -parikkhitta surrounded by a wall DA I.42. -parikkhepa a fencing Vism 74. Pākāsiya {Pakasiya} (adj.) [fr. pa+ā+kāś, cp. pakāsati & Class. Sk. prākāśya] evident, manifest, open, clear J VI.230 (opp. guyha; C. pākāsika). Pākula {Pakula} (adj.) [pa+ākula] read at Ud 5 in combn akkulapakkula (=ākula-pākula) "in great confusion"; read also in gāthā 7 pākula for bakkula. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94 sq. Pāli Text Society 1026 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāgabbhiya {Pagabbhiya} (nt.) [fr. pagabbha] boldness, impudence, forwardness Sn 930; Nd1 228 sq. (3 kinds, viz. kāyika, vācasika, cetasika), 390 sq.; J II.32; V.449 (pagabbhiya); SnA 165; KhA 242; DhA III.354 (pa°); VvA 121. Pāguññatā {Pagunnata} (f.) [abstr. of pāguðða, which is der. fr. paguna] being familiar with, experience Dhs 48, 49; Vism 463 sq., 466. Pāgusa {Pagusa} [cp. Sk. vāgusa, a sort of large fish Halāyudha 3, 37] a certain kind of fish J IV.70 (as gloss, T. reads pāvusa, SS puṭusa, BB pātusa & pāvuma; C. explns as mahā-mukha-maccha). Pācaka {Pacaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. pac, cp. pāceti] one who cooks, a cook; f. °ikā J I.318. Pācana1 {Pacana} (nt.) [fr. pac, Caus. pāceti] bringing to boil, cooking J I.318 (yāgu°). Cp. pari°. Pācana2 {Pacana} (nt.) [for pājana, cp. pāceti2 & SnA 147] a goad, stick S I.172; Sn p. 13; V.77; J III.281; IV.310. -yaṭṭhi driving stick, goad stick S I.115. Pācariya {Pacariya} (-°) [pa+ācariya] only as 2nd part of a (redupl.) compound ācariya-pācariya in the nature of combQ mentioned under a1 3 b: "teacher upon teacher" (expld by CQ as "teacher of teachers") D I.90 (cp. DA I.254); II.237, etc. (see ācariya). Pācittiya {Pacittiya} (adj.) [most likely prāk+citta+ika, i. e. of the nature of directing one's mind upon, cp. pabbhāra= *prāg+bhāra. So expld also by S. Lévi J.As. X.20, p. 506. Geiger, P.Gr. § 27, n. 1 inclines to etym. prāyaś+cittaka] requiring expiation, expiatory Vin I.172, 176; II.242, 306 sq.; IV.1 sq., 258 sq.; A II.242 (dhamma); Vism 22. - It is also the name of one of the books of the Vinaya (ed. Oldenberg, vol. IV.). See on term Vin. Texts I.18, 32, 245. Pācīna {Pacina} (adj.) [Vedic prācīna, fr. adv. prāc bent forward] eastern i. e. facing the (rising) sun (opp. pacchā) J I.50 (°sīsaka, of Māyādevī's couch), 212 (°lokadhātu); Miln 6; DA I.311 (°mukha facing east); DhA III.155 (id.); VvA 190; PvA 74, 256. The opposite apācīna (e. g. S III.84) is only apparently a neg. pācīna, in reality a der. fr. apa (apa+ac), as pācīna is a der. fr. pra+ac. See apācīna. Pāceti1 {Paceti} [Caus. of pacati] to cause to boil, fig. to cause to torment D I.52 (ppr. pācayato, gen., also pācento). Cp. vi°. Pāceti2 {Paceti} [for pājeti, with c. for j (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 393); pra+aj: see aja] to drive, urge on Dh 135 (āyuṃ p. - gopālako viya . . . peseti DhA III.60). Pājana {Pajana} (nt.) [fr. pa+aj, cp. pācana2] a goad SnA 147. Pājāpeti {Pajapeti} [Caus. of pājeti] to cause to drive or go on J II.296 (sakaṭāni); III.51 (so read for pajāpeti; BB pāceti & pājeti). Pājeti {Pajeti} [Caus. of pa+aj, cp. aja] 1. to drive (cp. pāceti2) J II.122, 143, III.51 (BB for T. pājāpeti); V.443 (nāvaṃ); VI.32 (yoggaṃ); SnA 147; DhA IV.160 (goṇe). - 2. to throw (the dice) J VI.281. - Caus. II. pājāpeti (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 1027 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāṭankī {Patanki} (f.) "sedan chair" (?) in phrase sivikaṃ pāṭankiṃ at Vin I.192 (MV V.10, 3) is not clear. The vv. ll. (p. 380) are pāṭangin, pāṭangan pāṭakan. Perhaps pallankaṃ? Pāṭala {Patala} (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭala, to same root as palita & pāṇḍu: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under palleo & cp. paṇḍu] pale red, pink J IV.114. Pāṭalī {Patali} (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pāṭalī, to pāṭala] the trumpet flower, Bignonia Suaveolens D II.4 (Vipassī pāṭaliyā mūle abhisambuddho); Vv 359; J I.41 (°rukkha as the Bodhi tree); II.162 (pāṭali-bhaddaka sic. v. l. for phālibhaddaka); IV.440; V.189; VI.537; Miln 338; VvA 42, 164; ThA 211, 226. Pāṭava {Patava} (nt.) [cp. late Sk. pāṭava, fr. paṭu] skill KhA 156. Pāṭikankha {Patikankha} (adj.) [grd. of paṭikankhati, Sk. *pratikānkṣya] to be desired or expected M I.25; III.97; S I.88; II.152; A III.143=Sn p. 140 (=icchitabba SnA 504); Ud 36; DhA IV.2 (gati °ā) PvA 63 (id.). Pāṭikankhin (-°) (adj.-n.) [fr. paṭi+kānka, cp. patikankhin] hoping for, one who expects or desires D I.4; M III.33; A II.209; J III.409. {Patikankhin} Pāṭikā {Patika} (f.) [etym. unknown; with pāṭiya cp. Sk. pāṣya?] half-moon stone, the semicircular slab under the staircase Vin I.180 (cp. Vin. Texts II.3). As pāṭiya at J VI.278 (=piṭṭhi-pāsāṇa C.). Pāṭikulyā {Patikulya} (f.) [fr. paṭi(k)kūla]=pātikkūlyatā (perhaps to be read as such) J V.253 (nava, cp. Vism 341 sq.). Pāṭikkulyatā {Patikkulyata} Pāṭidesanīya {Patidesaniya} (f.) [abstr. fr. paṭikkūla] loathsomeness, objectionableness A III.32; IV.47 sq.; V.64. Cp. paṭikulyatā, paṭikūlatā & pāṭikulyā. (adj.) [grd. of paṭideseti with pāṭi for pāṭi in der.] belonging to confession, (a sin) which ought to be confessed Vin I.172; II.242; A II.243 (as °desanīyaka). Pāṭipada1 {Patipada} (adj.) [the adj. form of paṭipadā] following the (right) Path M I.354=It 80 (+sekha). Pāṭipada2 {Patipada} [fr. paṭi+pad, see patipajjati & cp. paṭipadā] lit, "entering, beginning"; the first day of the lunar fortnight Vin I.132; J IV.100; VvA 72 (°sattamī). Pāṭipadaka {Patipadaka} (adj.) [fr. pāṭipada2] belonging to the 1st day of the lunar fortnight; only with ref. to bhatta (food) & in combn with pakkhika & uposathika, i. e. food given on the halfmoon days, on the 7th day of the week & on the first day of the fortnight Vin I.58= II.175; IV.75; (f. °ikā), 78. Pāṭipuggalika (dakkhiṇā). {Patipuggalika} (adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one's equal M III.254 sq. Pāli Text Society 1028 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāṭibhoga {Patibhoga} [for paṭibhoga (?); difficult to explain, we should suspect a ger. formation *prati-bhogya for *bhujya i. e. "counter-enjoyable," i. e. one who has to be made use of in place of someone else; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] a sponsor A II.172; Ud 17; It 1 sq.; J II.93; Vism 555 sq.; DhA I.398; VbhA 165. Pātimokkha {Patimokkha} (pāti)° (nt.) [with Childers plausibly as paṭi+ mokkha, grd. of muc (Caus. mokṣ°) with lengthening of paṭi as in other grd. like pāṭidesaniya. Thus in reality the same as paṭimokkha 2 in sense of binding, obligatory, obligation, cp. J V.25. The spelling is freq. pāti° (BB pāṭi°). The Sk. prāṭimokṣa is a wrong adaptation fr. P. pātimokkha, it should really be pratimokṣya "that which should be made binding." An expln of the word after the style of a popular etym. is to be found at Vism 16] a name given to a collection of various precepts contained in the Vinaya (forming the foundation of the Suttavibhanga, Vin vols. III & IV., ed. Oldenberg), as they were recited on Uposatha days for the purpose of confession. See Geiger, P. Lit. c. 7, where literature is given; & cp. Vin. Texts I.27 sq.; Franke, Dighanikāya p. 66 sq.; pāṭimokkhaṃ uddisati to recite the P. Vin I.102, 112, 175; II.259; III.8; IV.143; Ud 51; opp. °ṃ ṭhapeti to suspend the (recital of the) P. Vin II.240 sq. - See Vin I.65, 68; II.95, 240 sq. 249; S V.187; Sn 340; Dh 185, 375; Nd1 365; Vism 7, 11, 16 sq., 36, 292; DhA III.237 (=jeṭṭhakasīla); IV.111 (id.); Sdhp 342, 355, 449. -uddesa recitation of the P. Vin I.102; D II.46; M II.8; SnA 199. uddesaka one who recites the P. Vin I.115, cp. Vin. Texts I.242. -ṭhapana suspension of the P. Vin II.241 sq.; A V.70. -saṃvara "restraint that is binding on a recluse" (Dial. I.79), moral control under the P. Vin IV.51; D I.62; II.279; III.77, 266, 285; A III.113, 135, 151; IV.140; V.71, 198; It 96, 118; Ud 36; Vism 16 (where expld in detail); VbhA 323; cp. saṃvuta-pāṭimokkha (adj.) Pv IV.132. Pāṭiyekka {Patiyekka} see pāṭekka. Pāṭirūpika {Patirupika} (adj.) [fr. paṭirūpa, cp. paṭirūpaka] assuming a disguise, deceitful, false Sn 246. Pāṭihāra {Patihara} [=pāṭihāra, with pāṭi after analogy of pāṭihāriya] striking, that which strikes (with ref. to marking the time) J I.121, 122 (v. l. SS pāṭihāriya) Pāṭihārika [=pāṭihāriya or der. fr. pātihāra in meaning of °hāriya] special, extraordinary; only in cpd. °pakkha an extra holiday A I.144; Vv 156 (cp. VvA 71, 109); ThA 38. {Patiharika} Pāṭihāriya {Patihariya} (adj.) [grd. formation fr. paṭi+hṛ (paṭihāra) with usual lengthening of paṭi to pāṭi, as in °desanīya, °mokkha etc. Cp. pāṭihīra; BSk. prātihārya] striking, surprising, extraordinary, special; nt. wonder, miracle. Usually in stock phrase iddhi°, ādesanā°, anusāsanī° as the 3 marvels which characterise a Buddha with regard to his teaching (i. e. superhuman power, mind reading, giving instruction) D I.212; III.3 sq.; S IV.290; A I.170; V.327; Ps II.227. - Further: Vin I.34 (aḍḍhuḍḍha° sahassāni); Vism 378, 390 (yamaka°); VvA 158 (id.); PvA 137 (id.). For yamaka-pāṭihāriya (or °hīra) see yamaka. - Two kinds of p. are given at Vism 393, viz. pākaṭa° and apākaṭa°. -sappāṭihāriya (with ref. to the Dhamma) wonderful, extraordinary, sublime, as opposed to appāṭi° plain, ordinary, stupid M II.9 (where Neumann, Majjhima Nikāya II.318 trsls sa° "intelligible" and a° "incomprehensible," referring to Chāndogyopaniṣat I.11, 1); D II.104; cp. also Windisch, Māra 71. -pakkha an extra holiday, an ancient festival, not now kept S I.208 (cp. Th 2, 31); Sn 402 (cp. expln at SnA 378, where var. opinions are given); J IV.320; VI.118. See also Kern's discussion of the term at Toev. II.30. Pāli Text Society Pāṭihīra 1029 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [contracted form of pāṭihāriya viā metathesis *pāṭihāriya>*pāṭihēra>paṭihīra] wonderful; nt. a wonderful thing, marvel, miracle Ps I.125 (yamaka°); II.158 (id.); Mhvs 5, 118; Miln 106; Dāvs I.50; DhA III.213. -appātihīrakathā stupid talk D I.193, 239; Kvu 561 (diff. Kern. Toev. II.30); opp. sa° ibid. Pāṭī {Patihira} (f.) [?] at VvA 321 in phrase sukka-pakkha-pāṭiyaṃ "in the moonlight half" is doubtful. Hardy in Index registers it as "part, half-," but pakkha already means "half" and is enough by itself. We should probably read paṭipāṭiyaṃ "successively." Note that the similar passage VvA 314 reads sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ. {Pati} Pāṭuka & Pāṭubha {Patukha} {Patubha} only neg. a° (q. v.). Pāṭukamyatā {Patukamyata} see pātu°. Pāṭekka & Pāṭiyekka {Patekka} {Patiyekka} (adj.) [paṭi+eka; the diaeretic form of pacceka: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 24] several, distinct, single Vin I.134; IV.15; J I.92 (T. pāṭiekka, SS pāṭiyekka); Vism 249 (pāṭiyekka, SS pāṭiekka), 353, 356, 443, 473; DhA IV.7 (pāṭiy° SS pāṭieka). - nt. °ṃ (adv.) singly, separately, individually Vism 409 (pāṭiy°); VvA 141. Pāṭeti [Caus. of paṭ] to remove; Pass. pāṭiyati Pv IV.147 (turned out of doors); v. l. pātayati (bring to fall). Prob, in sense of Med. at Miln 152 in phrase visaṃ pāṭiyamāno (doubtful, cp. Kern, Toev. II.139, & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 87). {Pateti} Pāṭha {Patha} [fr. paṭh] reading, text-reading; passage of a text, text. Very freq. in Commentaries with phrase "ti pi pāṭho," i. e. "so is another reading," e. g. KhA 78, 223; SnA 43 (°ṃ vikappeti), 178, 192, 477; PvA 25 (pamāda° careless text), 48, 58, 86 and passim. Pāṭhaka {Pathaka} (-°) [fr. pāṭha] reciter; one who knows, expert Nd1 382 (nakkhatta°); J I.455 (asi-lakkhaṇa°); II.21 (angavijjā°), 250 (id.); V.211 (lakkhaṇa° fortune-teller, wise man). Pāṭhīna {Pathina} [cp. Sk. pāṭhīna Manu 5, 16; Halāyudha 3, 36] the fish Silurus Boalis, a kind of shad J IV.70 (C: pāṭhīna-nāmakaṃ pāsāṇa-macchaṃ); V.405; VI.449. Pāṇa {Pana} [fr. pa+an, cp. Vedic prāṇa breath of life; P. apāna, etc.] living being, life, creature D III.48, 63, 133; S I.209, 224; V.43, 227, 441 (mahā-samudde); A I.161; II.73, 176, 192; Sn 117, 247, 394, 704; Dh 246; DA I.69, 161; KhA 26; ThA 253; PvA 9, 28, 35; VvA 72; DhA II.19. - pl. also pāṇāni, e. g. Sn 117; Dh 270. - Bdhgh's defn of pāṇa is "pāṇanatāya pāṇā; assāsapassās'āyattavuttitāyā ti attho" Vism 310. -ātipāta destruction of life, murder Vin I.83 (in "dasa sikkhāpadāni," see also sīla), 85, 193; D III.68, 70, 149, 182, 235; M I.361; III.23; Sn 242; It 63; J III.181; Pug 39 sq.; Nett 27; VbhA 383 (var. degrees of murder); DhA II.19; III.355; DA I.69; PvA 27. -ātipātin one who takes the life of a living being, destroying life D III.82; M III.22; S II.167; It 92; DhA II.19. -upeta possessed or endowed with life, alive [cp. BSk. prāṇopeta Divy 72, 462 etc.] S I.173; Sn 157; DA I.236. -ghāta slaying life, killing, murder DA I.69; -ghātin= ātipātin DhA II.19. -bhu a living being J IV.494. -bhūta=°bhu M III.5; A II.210; III.92; IV.249 sq.; J IV.498. vadha=ātipāta DA I.69. -sama equal to or as dear as life J II.343; Dpvs XI.26; DhA I.5. -hara taking away life, destructive M I.10=III.97; S IV.206; A II.116, 143, 153; III.163. Pāli Text Society 1030 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāṇaka {Panaka} (adj.-n.) (usually -°) [fr. pāṇa] a living being, endowed with (the breath of) life S IV.198 (chap°); DhA I.20 (v. l. BB mata°); sap° with life, containing living creatures J I.198 (udaka); ap° without living beings, lifeless Vin II.216; M I.13, 243; S I.169; Sn p. 15 (udaka); J I.67 (jhāna). Pāṇana {Panana} (nt.) [fr. pāṇa] breathing Vism 310 (see pāṇa); Dhātupāṭha 273 ("baḷa" pāṇane). Pāṇi {Pani} [Vedic pāṇi, cp. Av. pərənā hand, with n-suffix, where we find m-suffix in Gr. pala/mh, Lat. palma, Oir lām, Ohg. folma=Ags. folm] the hand Vin III.14 (pāṇinā paripuðchati); M I.78 (pāṇinā parimajjati); S I.178, 194; Sn 713; Dh 124; J I.126 (°ṃ paharati); PugA 249 (id.); PvA 56; Sdhp 147, 238. As adj. (-°) "handed," with a hand, e. g. alla° with clean hand Pv II.99; payata° with outstretched hand, open-handed, liberal S V.351; A III.287; IV.266 sq.; V.331. -tala the palm of the hand D II.17. -bhāga handshare, division by hands VvA 96. -matta of the size of a hand, a handful PvA 70, 116, 119. -ssara hand sound, hand music, a cert. kind of musical instrument D I.6; III.183; DA I.84 (cp. Dial I.8), 231; J V.390, 506; cp. BSk. pāṇisvara MVastu II.52. Also adjQ one who plays this instrument J VI.276; cp. BSk. pāṇisvarika MVastu III.113. Pāṇikā {Panika} (f.) [fr. pāṇi; Sk. *pāṇikā] a sort of spoon Vin II.151. Cp. puthu-pāṇikā (°pāṇiyā?) Vin II.106. Pāṇin {Panin} (adj.-n.) [fr. pāṇa] having life, a living being S I.210, 226, Sn 220 (acc. pl. pāṇine, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 952), 587 (id.), 201, 575; PvA 287; DhA II.19. Pāta {Pata} (-°) [fr. pat] 1. fall DA I.95 (ukkā°); PvA 45 (asani°). The reading "anatthato pātato rakkhito" at PvA 61 is faulty we should prefer to read apagato (apāyato?) rakkhito. - 2. throwing, a throw Sn 987 (muddha°); PvA 57 (akkhi°). See also piṇḍa. Pātana {Patana} (nt.) [fr. pāteti] bringing to fall, destroying, killing, only in gabbha° destroying the fœtus, abortion (q. v.) DhA I.47 and passim. Pātar {Patar} (adv.) [Vedic prātar, de , *prā, cp. Lat. prandium (fr. prām-ediom=pātarāsa); Gr. prwi/ early; Ohg. fruo=Ger. früh] early in the morning, in foll. forms: (1) pātar (before vowels), only in cpd. °āsa morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. prātar-aśana Divy 631] D III.94; Sn 387; J I.232; VvA 294, 308; SnA 374 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar-āso piṇḍa-pātass'etaṃ nāmaṃ). katapātarāsa (adj.) after breakfast J I.227; VI.349 (°bhetta); Vism 391. - (2) pāto (abs.) D III.94; DhA II.60; PvA 54, 126, 128; pāto va right early J I.226; VI.180. - (3) pātaṃ S I.183; II.242; Th 2, 407. - Note. Should piṇḍa-pāta belong here, as suggested by Bdhgh at SnA 374 (see above)? See detail under piṇḍa. Pātavyatā {Patavyata} (f.) [fr. pāt, see pāteti] downfall, bringing to fall, felling M I.305; A I.266; Vin IV.34 (°by°); VbhA 499. Pātāpeti {Patapeti} [Caus. II. of pāteti] to cause to fall, to cause an abortus Vin II.108; DA I.134. Pātāla {Patala} [cp. Epic Sk. pātāla an underground cave] proclivity, cliff, abyss S I.32, 127, 197; IV.206; Th 1, 1104 (see Brethren 418 for fuller expln); J III.530 (here expld as a cliff in the ocean). Pāli Text Society 1031 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāti {Pati} [Vedic pāti of pā, cp. Gr. pw_u herd, poimh/n shepherd, Lat. pāsco to tend sheep] to watch, keep watch, keep J III.95 (to keep the eyes open, C. ummisati; opp. nimisati); Vism 16 (=rakkhati in def. of pāṭimokkha). Pātika {Patika} =pātī, read at Vism 28 for patika. Pātita {Patita} [pp. of pāteti] brought to fall, felled, destroyed Sn 631; Dh 407; J III.176; PvA 31 (so read for patita). Pātin {Patin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. pāta] throwing, shooting, only in cpd. dūre° throwing far A I.284; II.170. See akkhaṇa-vedhin. Pātimokkha {Patimokkha} see pāṭi°. Pātī & Pāti {Pati} (f.) [the femin. of patta, which is Vedic pātra (nt.); to this the f. Ved. pātrī] a bowl, vessel, dish Vin I.157 (avakkāra°), 352 (id.); II.216 (id.); M I.25 (kaṃsa°), 207; S II.233; A IV.393 (suvaṇṇa°, rūpiya°, kaṃsa°); J I.347, 501; II.90; V.377 (suvaṇṇa°) VI.510 (kañcana°); VvA 65; PvA 274. Pātukamyatā {Patukamyata} is frequent v. l. for cāṭu-kamyatā, which is probably the correct reading (see this). The meaning (according to Vism 27=VbhA 483) is "putting oneself low," i. e. flattery, "fawning" (Vism trsl. 32). A still more explicit defn is found at VbhA 338. The diff. spellings are as follows: cāṭukamyatā Vism 17, 27; KhA 236; VbhA 338, 483; cāṭukammatā Miln 370; pāṭukamyatā Vbh 246; pātukamyatā Nd2 39. See standing phrase under mugga-sūpyatā. Pātur {Patur} (-°) (°pātu) (indecl.) [cp. Vedic prāduḥ in prādur+ bhu; on t for d see Geiger, P.Gr. § 394. As regards etym. Monier Williams suggests prā=pra+dur, door, thus "before the door, openly"; cp. dvāra] visible, open, manifest; only in compn with kṛ and bhū, and with the rule that pātu° appears before cons., whereas pātur° stands before vowels. (1) with kṛ (to make appear): pres. pātukaroti Sn 316; J IV.7; Pug 30; SnA 423; aor. pātvākāsi S II.254; DhA II.64; pp. pātukata Vv 8441. - (2) with bhū (to become manifest, to appear): pres. pātubhavati D I.220; D II.12, 15, 20, 226; M I.445; S IV 78; Pv II.941 (pot. °bhaveyyuṃ); aor. pāturahosi [cp. BSk. prādurabhūt Jtm. 211] Vin I.5; D I.215; II.20; S I.137; Pv II.86; Miln 10, 18; VvA 188; pl. pāturahaṃsu J I.11, & °ahiṃsu J I.54. - pp. pātubhūta S III.39; Dhs 1035; PvA 44. -kamma making visible, manifestation S II.254; DhA IV.198. -bhāva appearance, coming into manifestation M I.50; S II.3; IV.78; A I.266; II.130; Sn 560, 998; J I.63; Nd2 s. v.; Vism 437. Pāteti [Caus. of pat] 1. to make fall, drop, throw off S I.197 (sakuṇo rajaṃ); J I.93 (udakaṃ); Miln 305 (sāraṃ). - 2. to bring to fall J V.198; Miln 187. - 3. to kill, destroy, cut off (the head) J I.393; III.177; PvA 31, 115. - pp. pātita. Caus. II. pātāpeti (q. v.). - Cp. abhi°. Note. In meaning 3 it would be better to assume confusion with pāṭeti (for phāṭeti=Sk. sphāṭayati to split [sphuṭ=(s)phal], see phāleti & phāṭeti In the same sense we find the phrase kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti to split firewood M I.21 (MA ereti), besides phāleti. {Pateti} Pātheyya {Patheyya} (nt.) [grd. form. fr. patha] "what is necessary for the road," provisions for a journey, viaticum Vin I.244; S I.44; Dh 235, 237; J V.46, 241; DA I.288; DhA I.180; III.335; PvA 5, 154. Pāli Text Society 1032 Pāli-English Dictionary Pātheyyaka {Patheyyaka} (nt.)=patheyya PvA 126. Pāda {Pada} [Vedic pāda, see etym. under pada] 1. the foot, usually pl. pādā both feet, e. g. Vin I.9, 34, 188; It 111; Sn 309, 547, 768, 835, 1028; J II.114; IV.137; DhA III.196; PvA 4, 10, 40, 68; VvA 105. In sg. scarce, and then specified as eka° & dutiya°, e. g. at Nd2 304III; J VI.354. - 2. foot or base of a mountain Vism 399 (Sineru°); DhA I.108 (pabbata°). - 3. the fourth part ("foot") of a verse (cp. pada 4) SnA 239, 273, 343, 363; ThA 23. - 4. a coin Vin III.47; VvA 77 (worth here 1/4 of a kahāpaṇa and double the value of māsaka; see also kākaṇikā). -anguṭṭha a toe M I.337. anguṭṭhaka same J II.447; Vism 233. -anguli same PvA 125 (opp. to hatth' anguli finger). aṭṭhika bone of the foot M I.58, 89; III.92; KhA 49. -āpacca offspring fr. the foot (of Brahmā): see bandhu. -ûdara "(using) the belly as feet," i. e. a snake Sn 604. -odaka water for washing the feet Vin I.9. -kathalika (°iya) acc. to Bdhgh either a foot stool or a towel (adhota-pādaṭhapanakaṃ pāda-ghaṃsanaṃ vā, see Vin. Texts I.92; II.373) Vin I.9, 46; II.22; IV.310; Kvu 440; VvA 8; DhA I.321. -kudārikā holding the feet like an axe (?) Pv IV.147 (expld at PvA 240 by pādasankhātā kudārikā; does k. here represent kuṭhārikā? The reading & meaning is uncertain). -khīla a corn in the foot Vin I.188 (as °ālādha, cp. Vin Texts II.19). -ghaṃsanī a towel for rubbing the feet (dry) Vin II.130. -cāra moving about on feet J IV.104. -tala the sole of the foot Vin I.179; M III.90; D III.143, 148; PvA 74. -dhovana cleaning or washing one's feet DhA II.9. -pa "drinking with the foot," N. for tree Pv IV.39 (cp. PvA 251); Miln 117, 376; Vism 533; VvA 212; Sdhp 270. -paricārikā "serving on one's feet," i. e. a wife (cp. S I,125) J III.95; VI.268; DhA III.194. -pīṭha a foot-stool Vin I.9 (cp. Vin. Texts I.92); IV.310; DhA III.120=186; VvA 291. -puñchana(ka) wiping one's feet (with a towel) Vism 358 (°rajju-maṇḍalaka, in comparison=VbhA 62); VbhA 285 (°coḷaka); KhA 144; SnA 333; DhA I.415 (°ka). -puðchanī a towel for the feet Vin II.174. -bbhañjana ointment for the feet, foot-salve Vin I.205; J V.197, 376; PvA 44, 78; anointing the feet VvA 44 (°tėla), 295 (id.). -mūla the sole of the foot, the foot J IV.131. Cp. mūla. -mūlika "one who sits at one's feet," a foot-servant, lackey J I.122, 438; II.300 sq. (Gāmaṇicaṇḍa); III.417; V.128; VI.30. -lola loafing about, one who lingers after a thing, a greedy person Sn 63, 972; Nd1 374; Nd2 433; abstr. f. °lolatā SnA 36, & °loliya Nd2 433. -visāṇa "a horn on the foot," i. e. an impossibility J VI.340. -sambāhana massaging the feet DhA I.38. Pādaka {Padaka} (adj. n.) [fr. pāda] 1. having a foot or basis Vin II.110 (a°); Sn 205; ThA 78. - 2. fundamental; pādakaṃ karoti to take as a base or foundation Vism 667. - 3. (nt.) basis, foundation, base PvA 167. - pādaka-jjhāna meditation forming a basis (for further introspective development) Vism 390, 397, 412 sq., 428, 667. - Cp. āhacca°. Pādāsi {Padasi} is aor. of padāti. Pāduka {Paduka} [=pādaka] a little foot J VI.554. Pādukā {Paduka} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. pāduka & pādukā] a shoe, slipper, clog Vin I.190; II.142, 222; J III.327; IV.129, 379; V.298; VI.23; Miln 330; DA I.136; DhA III.451 (muñja°). - At Vin II.143 (according to Rh. D.) pādukā (dāru°) is a kind of stool or stand in a privy. Pāna {Pana} [Vedic pāna, fr. pā, pibati=Lat. bibo, pp. pīta, Idg. *po[i], cp. Gr. pi/nw to drink, po/tos drink; Obulg. piti to drink, pivo drink; Lith. penas milk; Lat. potus drink, poculum drinking vessel (=Sk. pātra, P. patta)] drink, including water as well as any other liquid. Often combd with anna° (food), e. g. Sn 485, 487; Pv I.52; and °bhojana (id.) e. g. Dh 249; J I.204. Two sets of 8 drinks are given in detail at Nd1 372. - Vin I.245, 249 (yāgu°); S V.375 (majja°); Sn 82, Pāli Text Society 1033 Pāli-English Dictionary 398, 924; J I.202 (dibba°); Pug 51; PvA 7, 8, 50. -āgāra a drinking booth, a tavern Vin II.267; III.151; J I.302 (=surā-geha C.); Vbh 247; VbhA 339. Pānaka {Panaka} (nt.) [fr. pāna] a drink J II.285; IV.30; Dāvs V.2; DhA III.207 (amba°); VvA 99, 291. Der. pānakatta (abstr. nt.) being provided with drink J V.243 (a°). Pānada {Panada} in cpd. pānad'ûpama at J II.223 is faulty. The meaning is "a badly made sandal," and the reading should probably be (with v. l. & C.) "dupāhan'ûpama," i. e. du(ḥ)+upāhanā. The C. expls as "dukkatupāhan'ûpama." Pānīya {Paniya} (adj. nt.) [Vedic pānīya, fr. pāna] 1. drinkable S II.111. - 2. drink, be erage, usually water for drinking Vin II.207; IV.263; J I.198, 450; III.491; V.106, 382; Pv I.107; II.119, 710; PvA 4, 5. A reduced form pāniya (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23) is also found, e. g. Vin II.153; D I.148; Pv II.102. -ghata a pot for drinking water Vin II.216; J VI.76, 85. -cāṭika drinking vessel DhA IV.129. -cāṭī id. J I.302. -ṭhālika drinking cup Vin II.214; IV.263. -bhājana id. Vin II.153. maṇḍapa water reservoir (BSk. id. e. g. AvŚ II.86) Vin II.153. -māḷaka (?) J VI.85 (Hardy: Flacourtia cataphracta). -sālā a hall where drinking water is given Vin II.153; PvA 102; cp. papā. Pānudi {Panudi} see panudati. Pāpa {Papa} (adj. nt.) [Vedic pāpa, cp. Lat. patior≈E. passion etc.; Gr. ph_ma suffering, evil; talai/pwros suffering evil] 1. (adj.) evil, bad, wicked, sinful A II.222 sq. (and compar. pāpatara); Sn 57; Dh 119 (opp. bhadra). Other compar-superl. forms are pāpiṭṭha S V.96; pāpiṭṭhatara Vin II.5; pāpiyyasika D III.254. See pāpiya. - 2. unfertile (of soil) S IV.315. - 3. (nt.) evil, wrong doing, sin Sn 23, 662; Dh 117 (opp. puñña) 183; Pv I.66; 112; IV.150; DhA II.11. - pp. pāpāni Sn 399, 452, 674; Dh 119, 265. -iccha having bad wishes or intentions Vin I.97; D III.246; S I.50; II.156; A III.119, 191, 219 sq.; IV.1, 22, 155; V.123 sq.; Sn 133, 280; It 85; Nd2 342; Vism 24 (def.); VbhA 476; -icchatā evil intention A IV.160, 165; DhA II.77. -kamma evil doing, wickedness, sin, crime D III.182; It 86; Sn 407; Dh 127; Vism 502; VbhA 440 sq.; PvA 11, 25, 32, 51, 84. -kammanta evil-doer, villain S I.Q7. -kammin id. M I.39 Dh 126. -kara id. Sn 674. -karin id. Dh 15, 17. dassana sinful view Pv IV.355. -dhamma wickedness, evil habit Dh 248, 307; Pug 37; DhA III.4; PvA 98; as adj. at PvA. 58. -dhammin one of evil character or habits Pv I.117. -parikkhaya decay or destruction of demerit (opp. puñña°) Pv II.615. -mitta an evil associate, a bad companion (opp. kalyāṇa°) M I.43, 470; D III.182. -mittatā bad company, association with wicked people A I.13 sq., 83; IV.160, 165; D III.212; Dhs 13, 27; Vbh 359, 369, 371. -sankappa evil thought Sn 280. -sīla bad morals Sn 246. -supina an evil dream (opp. bhaddaka) Vism 312; DhA III.4. Pāpaka {Papaka} (adj.) [fr. pāpa] bad, wicked, wretched, sinful Vin I.8; S I.149, 207; V.418 (p. akusala citta); Sn 127, 215, 664; Dh 66, 78, 211, 242; J I.128; Pv II.716 (=lāmaka C.); II.93; Pug 19; Dhs 30, 101; Miln 204 (opp. kalyāṇa); Vism 268 (=lāmaka), 312 (of dreams, opp. bhaddaka). - f. pāpikā Dh 164, 310; a° without sin, innocent, of a young maiden (daharā) Th 2, 370; Vv 314; 326 (so expld by VvA, but ThA explns as faultless, i. e. beautiful). Pāpaṇika {Papanika} (adj. n.) [pa+āpaṇa+ika] belonging to a shop, i. e. 1. a shopkeeper A I.115 sq. - 2. laid out in the shop (of cīvara) Vin I.255; Vism 62 (=āpaṇa-dvāre patitaka). See also Vin. Texts II.156. Pāli Text Society 1034 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāpika {Papika} =pāpaka D I.90 (cp. DA I.256); A IV.197. Pāpita {Papita} [pp. of pāpeti1, in meaning=pāpika] one who has done wrong, sinful, evil M II.43 (where D I.90 at id. p. has pāpika); DA I.256 (for pāpika, v. l. vāpita). Pāpimant {Papimant} (adj. n.) [fr. pāpa, cp. Vedic pāpman] sinful; a sinner, esp. used as Ep. of Māra, i. e. the Evil, the wicked one S I.103; A IV.434; Ud 64; Sn 430; Th 1, 1213; Miln 155 sq.; DhA IV.32. Pāpiyo {Papiyo} (adj.) [compar. of pāpa, cp. Sk. pāpīyas] worse, more evil or wicked S I.162, 202; Sn 275; Dh 42, 76; J I.158; IV.303; Miln 155; DhA II.108. Pāpuṇana {Papunana} (nt.) [fr. pāpuṇāti] attainment J IV.306. Pāpuṇāti {Papunati} [pa+āp; cp. Sk. prāpnoti] to reach, attain, arrive at, obtain, get to learn. - pres. pāpuṇāti Vin II.208; J IV.285; VI.149; Pug 70; DA 21; PvA 74, 98, 125, 195; and pappoti S I.25; Dh 27; Vism 501; DhA I.395; pot. pāpuṇe Sn 324; Dh 138; J V.57 (1st pl. pāpuṇeyyāma for T. pappomu); DhA IV.200. aor. apāpuṇi ThA 64, and pāpuṇi J II.229. pret. apattha J V.391 (proh. mā a.). fut. pāpuṇissati J I.260. ger. pāpuṇitvā S II.28; patvā Sn 347, 575, and pappuyya S I.7 (cp. Vin II.56; A I.138), 181, 212. inf. pappotuṃ SI. 129=Th 2, 60, and pāpuṇituṃ VbhA 223. grd. pattabba S I.129; II.28; SnA 433. - pp. patta; Caus. pāpeti2 (q. v.). Pāpuraṇa {Papurana} (nt.) [through *pāvuraṇa fr. pra+vṛ, cp. Sk. prāvaraṇa] cover, dress, cloak S I.175; Miln 279; DhA III.1. See also pārupana. Pāpurati {Papurati} [fr. pa+ā+vṛ, cp. Vedic pravṛṇoti] to cover, veil; shut, hide; only neg. a° and only in phrase apāpurati Amatassa dvāraṃ to open the door of Nibbāna Vin I.5; Vv 6427 (=vivarati VvA 284). Pāpeti1 {Papeti} [Denom. fr. pāpa] to make bad, bring into disgrace Vin IV.5. - pp. pāpita. Pāpeti2 {Papeti} [Caus. of pāpuṇāti] to make attain, to let go to, to cause to reach, to bring to J IV.494; V.205, 260; DA I.136. imper. pāpaya S I.217, and pāpayassu J IV.20. fut. pāpessati J I.260 and pāpayissati J V.8. Pābhata {Pabhata} [pa+ābhata] brought, conveyed DA I.262; SnA 356 (kathā°). Pābhati {Pabhati} (nt.) [pa+ā+pp. of bhṛ] "that which has been brought here," viz. 1. a present, bribe DA I.262. - 2. money, price J I.122; V.401, 452. -kathā° "a tale brought," occasion for something to tell, news, story J I.252, 364, 378; SnA 356. Pāmanga {Pamanga} (nt.) [etym.?] a band or chain Vin II.106; III.48; Mhvs 11, 28; Dpvs XII.1; DhA IV.216. See on this Vin. Texts III.69 & Mhvs trsl. 797. Pāmujja {Pamujja} (nt.) [grd. form. tr. pa+mud, see similar forms under pāmokkha] delight, joy, happiness; often combd with pīti. - D I.72, 196; S III.134; IV.78=351; V.156, 398; A III.21; V.1 sq., 311 sq., 339, 349; Sn 256; Nett 29; DA I.217; Sdhp 167. See also pāmojja. Pāli Text Society 1035 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāmokkha {Pamokkha} (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. pamukha, with lengthening of a as frequently in similar forms like pāṭidesanīya, pāṭimokkha, pāmojja] 1. chief, first, excellent, eminent, (m.) a leader. - A II.168 (sanga sa°); Pug 69, 70; Miln 75 (hatthi° state elephant). disā° worldfamed J I.166, 285; II.278; VI.347. - Freq. in series agga seṭṭha pāmokkha attama, in exegesis of mahā (at Nd2 502 A e. g., when A II.95 reads mokkha for p.). See mahā. Defd as "pamukhe sādhū ti" at VbhA 332. - 2. facing east Pv IV.353 (=pācīna-dis' ābhimukha). Pāmojja {Pamojja} =pāmujja [Cp. BSk. prāmodya Divy 13, 82, 239] D II.214; III.288; M I.37, 98; S I.203; II.30; V.157; Dh 376, 381; Ps I.177; Dhs 9, 86; Miln 84; Vism 2, 107, 177 (T. pa°); DhA IV.111 (°bahula). Pāya {Paya} [fr. pa+ā+yā] setting out, starting S II.218 (nava° newly setting out); instr. pāyena (adv.) for the most part, commonly, usually J V.490; DA I.275 (so read for pāṭhena). Pāyaka {Payaka} (-°) [fr. pā to drink] drinking J I.252 (vāruṇi°) Pāyāta {Payata} [pp of pāyāti] gone forth, set out, started J I.146. Pāyāti {Payati} [pra+ā+yā] to set out, start, go forth DhA II.42; aor. 3rd sg. pāyāsi D II.73; J I.64, 223; III.333; VvA 64; PvA 272; 3rd pl. pāyesuṃ J IV.220, and pāyiṃsu D II.96; J I.253; DhA III.257. - pp. pāyāta (q. v.). See also the quasi synonymous abhiyāti. Pāyāsa {Payasa} [cp. Class. Sk. pāyāsa] rice boiled in milk, milk-rice, rice porridge S I.166; Sn p. 15; J I.50, 68; IV.391; V.211; Vism 41; SnA 151; DhA I.171; II.88; VvA 32. Pāyin {Payin} (adj. n.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking J III.338. Pāyeti {Payeti} [Caus. fr. pā, see pibati] 1. to give to drink, to make drink D II.19; Sn 398 (Pot. pāyaye); Miln 43, 229; DhA I.87 (amataṃ); VvA 75 (yāguṃ); PvA 63; aor. apāyesi S I.143; ger. pāyetvā J I.202 (dibba-pānaṃ); II.115 (lohitaṃ); III.372 (phāṇīt'odakaṃ); IV.30 (pānakaṃ); VI.392 (suraṃ). - 2. to irrigate J I.215. - ppr. f. pāyamānā a woman giving suck, a nursing woman D I.166; M I.77; A I.295; II.206; III.227; Pug 55; DhA I.49. - Caus. II. pāyāpeti J V.422. Pāra {Para} (adj.-nt.) [fr. para] 1. as adv. (°-) beyond, over, across, used as prep. with abl., e. g. pāra-Gangāya beyond the G. S I.207, 214; SnA 228. See under cpds. - 2. as nt. the other side, the opposite shore S I.169, 183; Sn 1059; Nd1 20 (=amataṃ nibbānaṃ); Dh 385; DhA IV.141 aparā pāraṃ gacchati to go from this side to the other (used with ref. to this world & the world beyond) S IV.174; A V.4; Sn 1130; pāraṃ gavesino M II.64=Th 1, 771-3. Cases adverbially: acc. pāraṃ see sep.; abl. pārato from the other side Vin II.209. - 3. the guṇa form of para, another: see cpds.: -atthika (pār') wishing to cross beyond D I.244. -ga "going beyond," traversing, crossing, surmounting S IV.71 (jātimaraṇassa); Sn 32, 997. -gata one who has reached the opposite shore S I.34; II.277; IV.157; A IV.411; Sn 21, 210, 359; Dh 414; Vv 531 (cp. VvA 231); one who has gone over to another party Th 1, 209. -gavesin looking for the other shore Dh 355; DhA IV.80. -gāmin=gata S I.123; A V.232 sq., 253 sq.; DhA II.160. -gū (a) gone beyond, i. e. passed, transcended, crossed S I.195=Nd2 136A (dukkhassa), IV.210 (bhavassa); A II.9 (id.); III.223; It 33 (jarāya); Dh 348. (b) gone to the end of (gen. or. -°), reached perfection in, wellversed in, familiar with, an authority on Sn 992 (sabbadhammānaṃ), 1105 (cp. Nd2 435); D I.88 Pāli Text Society 1036 Pāli-English Dictionary (tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ); DhA III.361 (id.). -dārika an adulterer, lit. one of another's wife S II.259; J III.43 (so read for para°); DhA II.10. Pāraṃ {Param} (adv.-prep.) [acc. of pāra] beyond, to the other side D I.244; M I.135; Sn 1146 (Maccu-dheyya°, vv. ll. °dheyassa & °dheyya°), expld by Nd2 487 as amataṃ nibbānaṃ; VvA 42. -gata (cp. pāragata) gone to the other side, gone beyond, traversed, transcended M I.135; S II.277; Sn 803; Nd1 114; Nd2 435; Pug 72; Vism 234. -gamana crossing over, going beyond S V.24, 81; A V.4, 313; Sn 1130. Pāramitā {Paramita} (f.) [pāramī+tā]=pāramī Nett 87. Pāramī {Parami} (f.) [abstr. fr. parama, cp. BSk. mantrāṇāṃ pāramiṃ gata Divy 637] completeness, perfection, highest state Sn 1018, 1020; Pug 70; DhA I.5; VvA 2 (sāvakaðāṇa°); PvA 139; Sdhp 328. In later literature there is mentioned a group of 10 perfections (dasa pāramiyo) as the perfect exercise of the 10 principal virtues by a Bodhisatta, viz. dāna°, sīla°, nekkhamma°, paððā°, viriya°, khanti°, sacca°, adhiṭṭhāna°, mettā°, upekhā° J I.73; DhA I.84. ppatta (pārami°) having attained perfection M III.28; Nd2 435; Miln 21 22; cp. Miln trsl. I.34. Pārājika {Parajika} [etym. doubtful; suggested are parā+aj (Burnouf); para+ji; pārācika (S. Lévi, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 38, n. 3; also Childers s. v.)] one who has committed a grave transgression of the rules for bhikkhus; one who merits expulsion (see on term Vin. Texts I.3; Miln trsln I.268; II.78) Vin I.172; II.101, 242; A II.241; III.252; V.70; J VI.70, 112; Miln 255; Vism 22; KhA 97, DhA I.76 (as one of the divisions of the Suttavibhanga, see also Vin III.1 sq.). Pārāpata {Parapata} [Epic Sk. pārāvata] a dove, pigeon J I.242; V.215; VvA 167 (°akkhi); Pgdp 45. See the doublet pārevata. Pārāyana {Parayana} (nt.) [late Sk. pārāyaṇa, the metric form of parāyana] the highest (farthest) point, final aim, chief object, ideal; title of the last Vagga of the Sutta Nipāta A III.401; Sn 1130; Nd2 438; SnA 163, 370, 604. Pārikkhattiya {Parikkhattiya} =parikkhattatā, Pug 19=VbhA 358. Pāricariyā {Paricariya} (f.) same as paricariya serving, waiting on, service, ministration, honour (for=loc.) D III.189, 250, 281; M II.177; S IV.239; A II.70; III.284, 325, 328; J III.408; IV.490; V.154, 158 (kilesa°); PvA 7, 58, 128. Cp. BSk. pāricāryā MVastu II.225. Pāricchatta {Paricchatta} =pāricchattaka, Sn 64 (°ka Nd2 439; expld as koviḷāra); J V.393. Pāricchattaka {Paricchattaka} [Epic Sk. pārijāta, but P. fr. pari+chatta +ka, in pop. etym. "shading all round"] the coral tree Erythmia Indica, a tree in Indra's heaven Vin I.30; A IV.117 sq.; Vv 381 (expld as Māgadhism at VvA 174 for pārijāta, which is also the BSk. form); J I.40; II.20; KhA I.122; SnA 485; DhA I.273; III.211; DhsA 1; VvA 12, 110; PvA 137. Pārijāta {Parijata} =pāricchattaka, VvA 174. Pāli Text Society 1037 Pāli-English Dictionary Pārijuñña {Parijunna} (nt.) [abstr. fr. parijuṇṇa, pp. of pari+jur] 1. decay, loss M II.66; DhA I.238; VvA 101 (bhoga°). - 2. loss of property, poverty PvA 3. Pāripanthika {Paripanthika} [fr. paripantha] 1. highwayman, robber S II.188; J V.253. - 2. connected with danger, threatening, dangerous to (-°) Vism 152; PugA 181 (samādhi°, vipassanā°). Pāripūrī {Paripuri} (f.) [abstr. fr. pari+pūr, cp. BSk. pāripūri AvŚ II.107] fulfilment, completion, consummation S I.139; A V.114 sq.; Sn 1016; J VI.298; Nd2 137 (pada°); SnA 28 (id.); Pug 53; Dhs 1367; DhA I.36; PvA 132, 133; VbhA 468 (°mada conceit of perfection). Pārima {Parima} (adj.) [superl. form. fr. pāra] yonder, farther, only combd with °tīra the farther shore D I.244; M I.134, 135; S IV.174; Miln 269; DhA II.100. Cp. BSk. pārimaṃ tīraṃ AvŚ I.148. Pāribhaṭya {Paribhatya} (nt.) (& der.) [fr. pari+bhṛ] "petting (or spoiling) the children" (Miln trsl. II.287) but perhaps more likely "fondness of being petted" or "nurture" (as Vism trsl. 32) (being carried about like on the lap or the back of a nurse, as expln at Vism 28=VbhA 483). The readings are different, thus we find °bhaṭyatā at Vbh 240; VbhA 338, 483; °bhatyatā at Vism 17, 23, 27 (vv. ll. °bhaṭṭatā & °bbhaṭṭatā); °bhaṭṭakatā at Miln 370; °bhaṭṭatā at Vbh 352; KhA 236; Nd2 39. The more det. expln at VbhA 338 is "alankāra-karaṇ' ādīhi dāraka-kīḷāpanaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ." - See stock phrase under mugga-sūpyatā. Pāribhogika {Paribhogika} (adj.) [fr. paribhoga] belonging to use or enjoyment, with ref. to relics of personal use J IV.228 (one of the 3 cetiyas, viz. sarīrika, pāribhogika, uddesika); Miln 341 (id.). Pārivattaka (adj.)=pari°; changing, turning round (of cīvara) Vin IV.59, 60. (a probationer), Vin I.136; II.31 sqQ, where distinguished from a pakatatta bhikkhu, a regular, ordained bh. to whom a pārivāsika is inferior in rank. {Parivattaka} Pārisajja {Parisajja} [fr. parisā] belonging to an assembly, pl. the members of an assembly, esp. those who sit in council, councillors (cp. BSk. pāriṣadya councillor Divy 291) Vin I.348; D I.136; III.64, 65; M I.326; S I.145, 222; A I.142; Miln 234; DA I.297. Pārisuddhi {Parisuddhi} (f.) [fr. parisuddha] purity Vin I.102, 136 (cp. Vin. Texts I.242, 280); M III.4; A II.194 sq. (°padhāniy'angāni, the four, viz. sīlapārisuddhi, citta°, diṭṭhi°, vimutti°); Nd1 475; Ps I.42 (°sīla); Dhs 165; Miln 336 (ājīva°, and in 4th jhāna); Vism 30 (=parisuddhatā), 46 (°sīla), 278; DhA III.399 (catu° -sīla); IV.111 (ājīva°); Sdhp 342. Pārihāriya {Parihariya} (adj.) [fr. parihāra] connected with preservation or attention, fostering, keeping Vism 3 (°paððā), 98 (°kammaṭṭhāna); SnA 54 (id.). Pāruta {Paruta} [pp. of pārupati] covered, dressed S I.167, 175; Th 1, 153; J I.59, 347; SnA 401; PvA 48, 161. -duppāruta not properly dressed (without the upper robe) Vin I.44; II.212; S II.231, 271. See also abhipāruta. Note. The form apāruta is apparently only a neg. pāruta, in reality it is apa+ā+vṛta. Pāli Text Society Pārupati 1038 Pāli-English Dictionary [metathesis fr. pāpurati=Sk. prāvṛṇoti, pra+ vṛ; see also pāpurati etc.] to cover, dress, hide, veil D I.246; Vin IV.283; M III.94; S II.281; J II.24, 109; Pv II.112 (=nivāseti PvA 147); Mhvs 22, 67; Vism 18; DhA III.325; VvA 44, 127; PvA 73, 74, 77. - pp. pāruta (q. v.). {Parupati} Pārupana {Parupana} (nt.) [fr. pārupati] covering, clothing; dress J I.126, 378; III.82; Miln 279; DhA I.70, 164; PvA 74, 76. Pāreti {Pareti} [Denom. fr. pāra; cp. Lat. portare] to make go through, to bore through, pierce, break (?) J III.185 (reading uncertain). Pārevata {Parevata} [the Prk. form (cp. Māgadhi pārevaya) of the Sk. pārāpata, which appears also as such in P.] 1. a dove, pigeon A I.162 (dove-coloured); Vv 363 (°akkhi= pārāpat'akkhi VvA 167); J VI.456. - 2. a species of tree, Diospyros embryopteris J VI.529, 539. Pāroha {Paroha} [fr. pra+ruh, cp. Sk. *prāroha] 1. a small (side) branch, new twig (of a Nigrodha tree) J V.8, 38, 472; VI.199; SnA 304; PvA 113. - 2. a shoot, sprout (from the root of a tree, tillering) S I.69 (see C. expln at K.S. 320); J VI.15; DhA II.70; VbhA 475; 476. Pāla {Pala} (-°) [fr. pā, see pāleti] a guard, keeper, guardian, protector S I.185 (vihāra°); J V.222 (dhamma°); VvA 288 (ārāma°); Sdhp 285. See also go°, loka°. Pālaka {Palaka} (-°) [fr. pā] a guardian, herdsman M I.79; S III.154; A IV.127; J III.444. Pālana {Palana} (nt.) (& pālanā?) [fr. pāleti 2, to all likelihood for palāyana through *pālāna, with false analogy] moving, running, keeping going, living, in phrase vutti pālana yapana etc. at Vism 145; DhsA 149 167; also in defn of bhuðjati1 as "pālan'ajjhohāresu" by eating & drinking for purposes of living, at Dhtp 379. As pālanā at the Dhs passages of same context as above (see under yapana). Pālanā {Palana} (f.) [fr. pāleti cp. Ep. Sk. pālana nt.] guarding, keeping J I.158; Dhs 19, 82,295. Pāli & Pāḷi {Pali} (f.) [cp. Sk. pālī a causeway, bridge Halāyudha III.54] 1. a line, row Dāvs III.61; IV.3; Vism 242 (dvattiṃs'ākāra°), 251 (danta°); SnA 87. - 2. a line, norm, thus the canon of Buddhist writings; the text of the Pāli Canon, i. e. the original text (opp. to the Commentary; thus "pāliyaṃ" is opposed to "aṭṭhakathāyaṃ" at Vism 107, 450, etc). It is the literary language of the early Buddhists, closely related to Māgadhī. See Grierson, The Home of Lit. Pāli (Bhandarkar Commemoration vol. p. 117 sq.), and literature given by Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt., II.10; III.606, 635. The word is only found in Commentaries, not in the Piṭaka. See also Hardy, Introd. to Nett, p. xi. - J IV.447 (°nayena accord. to the Pāli Text); Vism 376 (°nay'anusārena id.), 394, 401, 565 (°anusārato accord. to the text of the Canon); 607, 630, 660 sq., 693, 712; KhA 41; SnA 333, 424, 519, 604; DhsA 157, 168; DhA IV.93; VvA 117, 203 (pālito+aṭṭhuppattito); PvA 83, 87, 92, 287; and freq. elsewhere. -vaṇṇanā is explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual criticism, as opposed to vinicchaya-kathā analysis, exegesis, interpretation of sense Vbh 291; Vism 240 (contrasted to bhāvanāniddesa). Pāliguṇṭhima {Paligunthima} (adj.) [doubtful, fr pali+guṇṭh, see paliguṇṭhita; hapax legomenon] covered round (of sandals) Vin I.186 (Vin. Texts II.15: laced boots); v. l. BB °gunṭhika. Pāli Text Society 1039 Pāli-English Dictionary Pālicca {Palicca} (nt.) [fr. palita] greyness of hair M I.49; S II.2, 42; A III.196; Dhs 644, 736, 869; VbhA 98. Pālibhaddaka [fr. palibhadda=pari+bhadda, very auspicious] the tree Butea frondosa J IV.205; Nd2 680AII; Vism 256 (°aṭṭhi); VbhA 239 (id.); KhA 46, 53; DhsA 14; DhA I.383. As phālibhaddaka (-vana) at J II.162 (v. l. pātali°). {Palibhaddaka} Pāleti {Paleti} [cp. (Epic) Sk. pālayati, fr. pā] 1. to protect, guard, watch, keep Sn 585; J I.55; IV.127; VI.589; Miln 4 (paṭhavī lokaṃ pāleti, perhaps in meaning "keeps, holds, encircles," similar to meaning 2); Sdhp 33. - 2. (lit. perhaps "to see through safely"; for palāyati by false analogy) to go on, to move, to keep going, in defn of carati as viharati, iriyati, vattati, pāleti, yapeti, yāpeti at Nd2 237; Vbh 252; DhsA 167. Cp. pālana. So also in phrase atthaṃ pāleti (so read for paleti?) "to come home" i. e. to disappear Sn 1074 (see expld Nd2 28). See other refs. under palāyati. - pp. pālita. See also abhi° & pari°. A contracted (poetical) form is found as pallate at J V.242, expld by C. as pālayati (pālayate), used as Med.-Pass. Pāvaka {Pavaka} (adj. n.) [fr. pu, Vedic pāvaka] 1. (adj.) pure, bright, clear, shining J V.419. - 2. (m.) the fire S I.69; A IV.97; Dh 71, 140; J IV.26; V.63 (=kaṇha-vattanin) VI.236 (=aggi C.); Pv I.85; Vism 170 (=aggi). Pāvacana {Pavacana} (nt.) [pa+vacana, with lengthening of first a (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 331)] a word, esp. the word of the Buddha D I,88; S II.259; Th 1, 587; 2, 457. Pāvadati {Pavadati} [=pavadati] to speak out, to tell, show J II.439; Pv IV.14Q; PvA 118. Pāvassi {Pavassi} see pavassati. Pāvāra {Pavara} [fr. pa+vṛ] 1. a cloak, mantle Vin I.281; J V.409 (expld as pavara-dibba-vattha!).- 2. the mango tree KhA 58 (°puppha; Vism 258 at id. p. has pāvāraka°). Pāvārika {Pavarika} [fr. pāvāra] a cloak-seller (?) Vin IV.250. Pāvāḷa {Pavala} [see pavāḷa] hair; only in cpd. °nipphoṭanā pulling out one's hair S IV.300. Pāvisa & Pāvekkhi {Pavisa} {Pavekkhi} see pavisati. Pāvuraṇa {Pavurana} (nt.) [fr. pa+ā+vṛ; see pāpuraṇa & pārupana] cloak, mantle M I.359; Vin IV.255, 289; ThA 22. Pāvusa {Pavusa} [pa+vṛṣ, cp. Vedic prāvṛṣa & pravarṣa] 1. rain, the rainy season (its first 2 months) Th 1, 597; J V.202, 206. - 2. a sort of fish J IV.70 (gloss pāgusa, q. v.). Pāvussaka {Pavussaka} (adj.) [fr. pāvusa] raining, shedding rain M. I.306; S V.51; A IV.127; J I.95, 96; Miln 114. Pāli Text Society 1040 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāsa1 {Pasa} [Vedic pāśa] a sling, snare, tie, fetter S I.105, 111; A II.182; IV.197; Vin IV.153 (? hattha°); Sn 166; It 36 (Māra°); J III.184; IV.414; PvA 206. On its frequent use in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 111. Pāsa2 {Pasa} [Class. Sk. prāsa fr. pra+as] a spear, a throw Sn 303; A IV.171 (kuṭhāri° throw of an axe). -asi° a class of deities Miln 191. Pāsa3 {Pasa} (a stone?) at PvA 63 (pās'antare) is probably a misreading and to be corrected to palāsa (palās'antare, similarly to rukkh'antare, kaṭṭh'- and mūl'antare), foliage. Pāsaṃsa {Pasamsa} (adj.) [grd. fr. pasaṃsati with pā for pa as in similar formations (see pāmokkha)] to be praised; praiseworthy M I.15, 404; II.227 (dasa °ṭṭhānāni); A V.129 (id.); J III.493; Pv IV.713; Nett 52. Pāsaka1 {Pasaka} [fr. pāsa1] a bow, for the dress Vin II.136; for the hair Th 2, 411 (if Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 45, 46, is right to be corr. fr. pasāda). Pāsaka2 {Pasaka} [fr. pāsa2] a throw, a die J VI.281. Pāsaka3 {Pasaka} lintel Vin II.120=148 (see Vin. Texts III.144). Pāsaṇḍa {Pasanda} [cp. late Sk. pāṣaṇḍa] heresy, sect S I.133, A II.466; Th 2, 183 Miln 359; ThA 164. -°ika heretic, sectarian Vin IV.74. Pāsati {Pasati} (?) only in "sammaṃ pāsanti" at SnA 321 as expln of sammāpāsa (q. v.). Pāsāṇa {Pasana} [Epic Sk. pāṣāṇa] a rock, stone A I.283; Sn 447; J I.109, 199; V.295; Vism 28, 182, 183; VbhA 64 (its size as cpd with pabbata); DhA III.151; DhsA 389; VvA 157; Sdhp 328. -guḷa a ball of (soft) stone, used for washing (pumice stone?) A II.200 (sāla-laṭṭhiṃ . . . taccheyya . . . likheyya . . . pāsāṇaguḷena dhopeyya . . . nadiṃ patāreyya), cp. M I.233; and Vism 28 "bhājane ṭhapitaṃ guḷapiṇḍaṃ viya pāsāṇaṃ." -cetiya a stone Caitya DhA III.253. -tala a natural plateau J I.207. -piṭṭhe at the back of a rock Vism 116. -pokkharaṇī a natural tank Vism 119. phalaka a slab of stone J IV.328. -macchaka a kind of fish (stone-fish) J IV.70; VI.450. -lekha writing on a stone Pug 32. -sakkharā a little stone, fragment of rock S II.137; A IV.237. -sevāla stone Vallisneria J V.462. -vassa rain of stones SnA 224. Pāsāṇaka {Pasanaka} =pāsāṇa Vin II.211. Pāsāda {Pasada} [pa+ā+sad, cp. Class. Sk. prāsāda] a lofty platform, a building on high foundations, a terrace, palace Vin I.58, 96, 107, 239; II.128, 146, 236 (cp. Vin. Texts I.174; III.178); D II.21; S I.137; A I.64; Sn 409; It 33; Pv II.125; J II.447; IV.153 (pillars); V.217; Vism 339 (°tala); DhsA 107; SnA 502; ThA 253, 286; VvA 197; PvA 23, 75, 279 (cp. upari°); Sdhp 299. -sattabhū- maka° a tower with 7 platforms J I.227, 346; IV.323, 378; V.426, 577. The Buddha's 3 castles at D II.21; A I.145; J VI.289. See also J.P.T.S. 1907, 112 (p. in similes). Pāli Text Society 1041 Pāli-English Dictionary Pāsādika {Pasadika} (adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. pleasing, pleasant, lovely, amiable Vin IV.18; D III.141; S I.95; II.279; A II.104 sq., 203; III.255 sq.; DhA I.119; ThA 266, 281; DA I.141, 281; VvA 6; PvA 46, 186, 187, 261. -samanta° lovely throughout A I.24; V.11. - 2. comfortable Vism 105. Pāsāvin {Pasavin} (adj.) [fr. pasavati] bringing forth S V.170; J I.394. Pāsuka {Pasuka} [for the usual phāsuka] a rib Vin II.266. (loop? Rh.D.). Pāsuḷa {Pasula} [for phāsuka] a rib Vin III.105. Pāssati {Passati} fat. of pibati (for pivissati). Pāhuna {Pahuna} (m. nt.) [fr. pa+ā+hu, see also āhuna & der.] 1. (m.) a guest A III.260; J VI.24, 516. - 2. (nt.) meal for a guest D I.97=M II.154; Vism 220; DA I.267. Pāhunaka {Pahunaka} (m.-nt.) [fr. pāhuna] 1. (m.) a guest J I.197; IV.274; Miln 107; DA I.267, 288; DhA II.17. - 2. (nt.) meal for a guest S I.114. Pāhuṇeyya {Pahuneyya} (adj.) [fr. pāhuna, see also āhuneyya] worthy of hospitality, deserving to be a guest D III.5; S I.220; II.70; A II.56; III.36, 134, 248, 387; IV.13 sq.; V.67, 198; It 88; Vism 220. Pāhuneyyaka {Pahuneyyaka} =pāhuṇeyya J III.440. Pāheti {Paheti} [secondary form. after aor. pāhesi fr. pahiṇati] to send J I.447; Miln 8; PvA 133. Pi {Pi} (indecl.) [the enclitic form of api (cp. api 2a); on similarities in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 143] emphatic particle, as prefix only in pidahati and pilandhati, where api° also is found (cp. api 1b). - 1. also, and also, even so D I.1; Vin IV.139 (cara pi re get away with you: see re); J I.151, 278. - 2. even, just so; with numbers or num. expressions "altogether, in all, just that many" J I.151; III.275; IV.142. - cattāro pi J III.51; ubho pi J I.223; sabbe pi Sn 52; J I.280. - 3. but, however, on the other hand, now (continuing a story) J I.208; IV.2. - 4. although, even if J II.110 (ciram pi kho . . . ca although for a long time . . . yet). - 5. perhaps, it is time that, probably Sn 43; J I.151; II.103. - 6. pi . . . pi in correlation (like api . . . api): (a) both . . . and; very often untranslatable Sn 681 (yadā pi . . . tadā pi when . . . then), 808 (diṭṭhā pi sutā pi); J I.222 (jale pi thale pi); (b) either . . . or J I.150; II.102. Piṃsa {Pimsa} [pp. of piṃsati2] crushed, ground, pounded DhA III.184 (v. l. piṭṭha, perhaps preferable). Piṃsati1 {Pimsati} [piś or piṃś, cp. Vedic piṃśati, with two bases viz. Idg. *peig, as in P. piðjara & pingala; Lat. pingo to paint, embroider; and *peik, as in Sk. piṃśati, peśaḥ; Av. paes- to embellish; Gr. poiki/los many-coloured; Goth. fēh, Ags. fāh id. See detail in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pingo] to adorn, form, embellish; orig. to prick, cut. Perhaps piṃsare (3. pl. med.) J V.202 belongs here, in meaning "tinkle, sound" (lit. prick), expld in C. by viravati. Other der. see under pingala. piðjara, pesakāra. Pāli Text Society 1042 Pāli-English Dictionary Piṃsati2 {Pimsati} [piṣ or piṃṣ, Vedic pinaṣṭi, cp. Lat. pinso to grind, pīla=pestle, pistillum=pistil; Lith. paisýti to pound barley; Gr. pti/ssw id.; Ohg. fesa=Nhg. fese] 1. to grind, crush, pound J I.452; II.363; IV.3 (matthakaṃ), 440 (akaluð candanað ca silāya p.); Miln 43; DhA III.184 (gandhe piṃsissati; BB pisissati). - 2. to knock against each other, make a sound J V.202: see piṃsati1. - pp. piṃsa & piṭṭha1. See also pisati and paṭi°. Pinka {Pinka} [for pinga yellow, brownish, tawny] a young shoot, sprout J III.389 (v. l. singa, which also points to pinga; expld by pavāla). Pinga {Pinga} see pinka. Pingala {Pingala} (adj.) [see piṃsati1, cp. Vedic pingala] 1. reddishyellow, brown, tawny S I.170; J VI.199 (=pingiya). - 2. red-eyed, as sign of ugliness J IV.245 (as Np.; combd with nikkhantadāṭha); V.42 (tamba-dāṭhika nibbiddha-pingala); Pv II.41 (=°locana PvA 90; +kaḷāra-danta). kipillaka the red ant DhA III.206. -cakkhutā redeyedness PvA 250. -makkhikā the gadfly J III.263 (=ḍaṃsa) Nd2 268=SnA 101 (id.); SnA 33 (where a distinction is made between kāṇamakkhikā and pingala°), 572 (=ḍaṃsa). Pingiya {Pingiya} (adj.) [fr. Vedic pinga] reddish-brown, yellow J VI.199. Pingulā {Pingula} (f.) [a var. of Sk. pingalā, a kind of owl] a species of bird J VI.538. Picu1 {Picu} [cp. Class. Sk. picu] cotton Vin I.271; usually in cpds, either as kappāsa° S V.284, 443, or tūla° S V.284, 351 (T. thula°), 443; J V.480 (T. tula°). -paṭala membrane or film of cotton Vism 445. -manda the Nimb or Neem tree Azadizachta Indica Pv IV.16 (cp. PvA 220); the usual P. form is pucimanda (q. v.). Picu2 {Picu} [etym. unknown, prob. Non-Aryan] a wild animal, said to be a kind of monkey J VI.537. Piccha {Piccha} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piccha & puccha tail, to Lat. pinna, E. fin. Ger. finne] tailfeather, esp. of the peacock Vin I.186 (mora°). - dve° (& de°) having two tail-feathers J V.339, 341 (perhaps to be taken as "wing" here, cp. Halāyudha 2, 84=pakṣa). Cp. piñcha & piñja. Picchita {Picchita} in su° J V.197 is not clear, C. expl5 by suphassita, i. e. pleasing, beautiful, desirable, thus dividing su-picch°. Picchila {Picchila} (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. picchila] slippery Vism 264; VbhA 247 (lasikā=p-kuṇapaṃ); DhA III.4 (°magga). Piñcha {Pincha} =piccha, i. e. tail-feather, tail Vin II.130 (mora°). Cp. piñja. Piñja {Pinja} (nt.) [=piccha] a (peacock's) tail-feather J I.38 (mora° kalāpa), 207 (=pekkhuṇa); III.226 (BB piccha & miccha); DA I.41 (mora°); DhA I.394 (id.); VvA 147 (mayūra°; BB piðcha, SS pakkha); PvA 142 (mora° kalāpa). Pāli Text Society 1043 Pāli-English Dictionary Piñjara {Pinjara} [cp. Class. Sk. piñjara; for etym. see piṃsati1] of a reddish colour, tawny J I.93; DA I.245; VvA 165, 288. -odaka fruit of the esculent water plant Trapa Bispinosa J VI.563 (v. l. ciñcarodaka), expld by singhāṭaka. Piñjita {Pinjita} (adj.) [fr. piṃsati1, cp. Sk. piñjana] tinged, dyed Miln 240. On expression see Kern, Toev. s. v. Piññāka {Pinnaka} (nt.) [to piṃsati2, cp. Class. Sk. piṇyāka] ground sesamum, flour of oil-seeds M I.78, 342; Vin IV.341. (p. nāma tilapiṭṭhaṃ vuccati); VvA 142 (tila° seed cake); PvA 48. bhakkha feeding on flour of oil-seeds D I.166; A I.241, 295; II.206; Nd1 417; Pug 55. Piṭaka {Pitaka} [cp. Epic Sk. piṭaka, etym. not clear. See also P. peḷā & peḷikā] 1. basket Vin I 225 (ghaṭa p. ucchanga), 240 (catudoṇika p.); Pv IV.333; Vism 28 (piṭake nikkhitta-loṇa-macchaphāla-sadisaṃ phaṇaṃ); dhañña° a grain-basket DhA III.370; vīhi° a rice basket DhA III.374. Usually in combn kuddāḷa-piṭaka "hoe and basket," wherever the act of digging is referred to, e. g. Vin III.47; D I.101; M I.127; S II.88; V.53; A I.204; II.199; J I.225, 336; DA I.269. - 2. (fig.) t.t. for the 3 main divisions of the Pāli Canon "the three baskets (basket as container of tradition Winternitz, Ind. Lit. II.8; cp. peḷā 2) of oral tradition," viz. Vinaya°, Suttanta°, Abhidhamma°; thus mentioned by name at PvA 2; referred to as "tayo piṭakā" at J I.118; Vism 96 (paðcanikāya-maṇḍale tīṇi piṭakāni parivatteti), 384 (tiṇṇaṃ Vedānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ Piṭakānaṃ uggahaṇaṃ); SnA 110, 403; DhA III.262; IV.38; cp. Divy 18, 253, 488. With ref. to the Vinaya mentioned at Vin V.3. - Piṭaka is a later collective appellation of the Scriptures; the first division of the Canon (based on oral tradition entirely) being into Sutta and Vinaya (i. e. the stock paragraphs learnt by heart, and the rules of the Order). Thus described at D II.124; cp. the expression bhikkhu suttantika vinayadhara Vin II.75 (earlier than tepiṭaka or piṭakadhara). Independently of this division we find the designation "Dhamma" applied to the doctrinal portions; and out of this developed the 3rd Piṭaka, the Abhidhammap. See also Dhamma C. 1. - The Canon as we have it comes very near in language and contents to the canon as established at the 3rd Council in the time of King Asoka. The latter was in Māgadhī. The knowledge of the 3 Piṭakas as an accomplishment of the bhikkhu is stated in the term tepīṭaka "one who is familiar with the 3 P." (thus at Miln 18; Dāvs V.22; KhA 41 with v. l. ti°; SnA 306 id.; DhA III.385). tipetakī (Vin V.3 Khemanāma t.), tipeṭaka (Miln 90), and tipiṭakadhara KhA 91. See also below °ttaya. In BSk. we find the term trepiṭaka in early inscriptions (1st century A.D., see e. g. Vogel, Epigraphical discoveries at Sārnāth, Epigraphia Indica VIII. p. 173, 196; Bloch, J. As. Soc. Bengal 1898, 274, 280); the term tripiṭaka in literary documents (e. g. Divy 54), as also tripiṭa (e. g. AvŚ I.334; Divy 261, 505). - On the Piṭakas in general & the origin of the P. Canon see Oldenberg, in ed. of Vin 1; and Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Litt. 1913, II.1 sq.; III.606, 635. - Cp. peṭaka. -ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas or holy Scriptures SnA 328. dhara one who knows (either one or two or all three) the Piṭaka by heart, as eka°, dvi°, ti° at Vism 62, 99. -sampadāya according to the P. tradition or on the ground of the authority of the P. M I.520 (itihītiha etc.); II.169 (id.); and in exegesis of itikirā (hearsay-tradition) at A I.189=II.191=Nd2 151. Piṭṭha1 {Pittha} (nt.) [pp. of piṃsati2. cp. Sk. piṣṭa] what is ground, grindings, crushed seeds, flour. Vin I.201, 203; IV.261, 341 (tila°=piððāka); J II.244 (māsa°). As piṭṭhi at J I.347. khādaniya "flour-eatables," i. e. pastry Vin I.248 (cp. Vin. Texts II.139). -dhītalikā a flour-doll, i. e. made of paste or a lump of flour PvA 16, 19 (cp. uddāna to the 1st vagga p. 67 piṭṭhi & reading piṇḍa° on p. 17). -piṇḍi a lump of flour Vism 500 (in comp.). -madda flour paste Vin Pāli Text Society 1044 Pāli-English Dictionary II.151 (expld in C. by piṭṭha-khali; cp. piṭṭhi-madda J III.226, which would correspond to piṣṭī). -surā (intoxicating) extract or spirits of flour VvA 73. Piṭṭha2 {Pittha} (nt.) [identical in form with piṭṭha3] a lintel (of a door) Vin I.47 (kavāṭa°); II.120 (°sanghāṭa, cp. Vin. Texts III.105), 148, 207. Piṭṭha3 {Pittha} (nt.) [cp. Vedic pṛṣṭha, expld by Grassmann as pra-stha, i. e. what stands out] back, hind part; also surface, top J I.167 (pāsāṇa° top of a rock). Usually in oblique cases as adv., viz. instr. piṭṭhena along, over, beside, by way of, on J II.111 (udaka°); IV.3 (samudda°), loc. piṭṭhe by the side of, near, at: parikhā° at a ditch PvA 201; on, on top of, on the back of (animals): ammaṇassa p. J VI.381 (cp. piṭṭhiyaṃ); tiṇa° J IV.444; panka° J I.223; samudda° J I.202. - assa° on horseback D I.103; similarly: vāraṇassa p. J I.358; sīha° J II.244; haṭṭhi° J II.244; III.392. See also following. Piṭṭhi & Piṭṭhī {Pitthi} (f.) [=piṭṭha3, of which it has taken over the main function as noun. On relation piṭṭha> piṭṭhi cp. Trenckner, Notes 55; Franke, Bezzenberger's Beiträge XX.287. Cp. also the Prk. forms piṭṭha, piṭṭhī & piṣṭī, all representing Sk. prṣṭḥa: Pischel, Prk. Gram. §53] 1. the back Vin II.200 (piṭṭhī); M I.354; J I.207; II.159, 279. piṭṭhiṃ (paccāmittassa) passatiQ to see the (enemy's) back, i. e. to see the last of somebody J I.296, 488; IV.208. piṭṭhi as opposed to ura (breast) at Vin II.105; Sn 609; as opposed to tala (palm) with ref. to hand & foot: hattha (or pada-) tala & °piṭṭhi: J IV.188; Vism 361. - abl. piṭṭhito as adv. (from) behind, at the back of Sn 412 (+anubandhati to follow closely); VvA 256; PvA 78 (geha°). piṭṭhito karoti to leave behind, to turn one's back on J I.71 (cp. pṛṣṭhato-mukha Divy 333). piṭṭhito piṭṭhito right on one's heels, very closely Vin I.47; D I.1, 226. - 2. top, upper side (in which meaning usually piṭṭha3), only in cpd. °pāsāṇa and loc. piṭṭhiyaṃ as adv. on top of J V.297 (ammaṇa°) piṭṭhi at VvA 101 is evidently faulty reading. -ācariya teacher's understudy, pupil-teacher, tutor J II.100; V.458, 473, 501. -kaṇṭaka spina dorsi, backbone M I.58, 80, 89; III.92; Vism 271; VbhA 243; KhA 49 sq.; Sdhp 102. -koṭṭhaka an upper room (bath room?) DhA II.19, 20. -gata following behind, foll. one's example Vism 47. -paṇṇasālā a leaf-hut at the back J VI.545. -parikamma treating one's back (by rubbing) Vin II.106. -passe (loc.) at the back of, behind J I.292; PvA 55, 83, 106. -pāda the back of the foot, lit. foot-back, i. e. the heel Vism 251; KhA 51, (°aṭṭhika); DA I.254. -pāsāṇa a flat stone or rock, plateau, ridge J I.278; II.352; VI.279; DhA II.58; VbhA 5, 266. -bāha the back of the arm, i. e. elbow (cp. °pāda) KhA 49, 50 (°aṭṭhi): -maṃsa the flesh of the back PvA 210; SnA 287. -maṃsika backbiting, one who talks behind a person's back Sn 244 (=°maṃsakhādaka C.); J II.186 (of an unfair judge); V.1; Pv III.97 (BB; T. °aka). As °maṃsiya at J V.10. -maṃ tā backbiting Nd2 39. -roga back-ache SnA 111. -vaṃsa back bone, a certain beam in a building DhA I.52. Piṭṭhika {Pitthika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in dīgha° with a long back or ridge Sn 604; mudu° having a flexible back Vin III.35. Piṭṭhikā {Pitthika} (f.)=piṭṭhi; loc. piṭṭhikāya at the back of, behind J I.456 (maṇḍala°). Piṭṭhimant {Pitthimant} (adj.) [fr. piṭṭhi] having a back, in f. piṭṭhimatī (senā) (an army) having troops on (horse- or, elephant-) back J VI.396. Pāli Text Society Piṭhara 1045 Pāli-English Dictionary (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. piṭhara] a pot, a pan Miln 107 (spelt pīthara). As piṭharaka [cp. BSk. piṭharikā Divy 496; so read for T. piparikā] at KhA 54 to be read for T. pivaraka according to App. SnA 869. {Pithara} Piṇḍa {Pinda} [cp. Vedic piṇḍa; probably connected with piṣ i. e. crush, grind, make into a lump; Grassmann compares pīḍ to press; on other attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. puls] 1. a lump, ball, thick (& round) mass S I.206 (aṭṭhīyaka°); Pv III.55 (nonīta°); VvA 62 (kummāsa°), 65; Sdhp 529 (ayo°). - 2. a lump of food, esp. of alms, alms given as food S I.76; Sn 217, 388, 391; J I.7 (nibbuta° cooled); Miln 243 (para °ṃ ajjhupagata living on food given by others). piṇḍāya (dat.) for alms, freq. in combn with carati, paṭikkamati, (gāmaṃ) pavisati, e. g. Vin II.195; III.15; M III.157; Sn 386; SnA 141, 175; PvA 12, 13, 16, 47, 81, 136 and passim. - 3. a conglomeration, accumulation, compressed form, heap, in akkhara° sequence of letters or syllables, context DhA IV.70. -attha condensed meaning, résumé J I.233, 275, 306; KhA 124, 192. Cp. sampiṇḍanattha. -ukkhepakaṃ in the manner of taking up lumps (of food), a forbidden way of eating Vin II.214=IV.195, cp. Vin. Texts I.64 (=piṇḍaṃ piṇḍaṃ ukkhipitvā C.). -gaṇanā counting in a lump, summing up DA I.95. -cāra alms-round, wandering for alms Sn 414. -cārika one who goes for alms, begging Vin II.215; III.34, 80; IV.79; J I.116; VvA 6. -dāyika (& °dāvika) one who deals out food (as occupation of a certain class of soldiers) D I.51 (°dāvika); A IV.107 (v. l. °dāyaka); Miln 331; cp. DA I.156. See also Geiger, P.Gr. 46, 1; Rh. D. Dial. I.68 (trsl. "camp-follower"); Franke, Dīgha trsl. 531 trsl. "Vorkämpfer" but recommends trsl. "Klossverteiler" as well). -dhītalikā a doll made of a lump of dough, or of pastry PvA 17; cp. piṭṭha°. -paṭipiṇḍa (kamma) giving lump after lump, alms for alms, i. e. reciprocatory begging J II.82 (piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappesuṃ), 307 (piṇḍapāta-paṭipiṇḍena jīvikaṃ kappenti); V.390 (mayaṃ piṇḍa-paṭipiṇḍa-kammaṃ na karoma). -pāta food received in the alms-bowl (of the bhikkhu), alms-gathering (on term see Vism 31 yo hi koci āhāro bhikkhuno piṇḍolyena patte patitattā piṇḍapāto ti vuccati, and cp. BSk. piṇḍapāta-praviṣṭha AvŚ I.359; piṇḍapāta-nirhāraka Divy 239) Vin I.46; II.32 (°ṃ nīharāpeti), 77, 198, 223; III.80, 99; IV.66 sq., 77; M III.297; S I.76, 92; A I.240; II.27, 143; III.109, 145 sq.; V.100; Sn 339; J I.7, 149, 212, 233; Pug 59; Vism 31, 60; VbhA 279 (°āpacāyana); SnA 374; PvA 11 sq., 16, 38, 240. -pātika one who eats only food received in the alms-bowl; °anga is one of the dhutanga ordinances (see dhutanga) Vin I.253; II.32 (°anga), 299 (+paṃsukūlika); III.15 (id.); M I.30; III.41; A III.391; Pug 59, 69; SnA 57 (°dhutanga). -piṇḍapātika bhikkhu a bh. on his alms-round Vism 246 (in simile); VbhA 229 (id.). Cp. BSk. piṇḍapātika AvŚ I.248. -pātikatta (abstr. to prec.) the state of eating alms-food, a characteristic of the Buddhist bhikkhu M III.41; S II.202, 208 sq.; A I.38; III.109. Piṇḍaka {Pindaka} [fr. piṇḍa] (alms)-food A IV.185 (SS piṇḍapāta); in phrase na piṇḍakena kilamati not go short of food Vin III.15, 87; IV.23, in ukka-piṇḍaka meaning a cluster of msects or vermin Vin I.211=239 (v. l. piṇḍuka). Piṇḍi (f.) [cp. piṇḍa & Sk. piṇḍī] a lump, round mass, ball, cluster D I.74=A III.25 (nahāniya° ball of fragrant soap; DA I.218: piṇḍa); M III.92; J I.76 (phala°); II.393; III.53 (amba°); Miln 107; Vism 500 (piṭṭha°); DhA III.207 (amba°). {Pindi} Piṇḍika {Pindika} (-°) in chatta°-vivara is a little doubtful, the phrase prob. means "a crevice in the covering (i. e. the round mass) of the canopy or sunshade" J VI.376. - Dutoit (J. trsln VI.457) translates "opening at the back of the sunshade," thus evidently reading "piṭṭhika." Pāli Text Society 1046 Pāli-English Dictionary Piṇḍita {Pindita} (adj.) [pp. of piṇḍeti, cp. BSk. piṇḍitamūlya lump-sum Divy 500] 1. made into a lump, massed together, conglomerated, thick Th 2, 395. - 2. "balllike," close, compact; of sound: J II.439; VI.519. Pindiyālopa {Pindiyalopa} [piṇḍi+ālopa] a morsel of food Vin I.58 (°bhojana), 96 (id.); A II.27; It 102. Piṇḍeti {Pindeti} [Denom. fr. pinḍa] to ball together, mix, put together Pv II.952 (=pisana-vasena yojeti PvA 135). - pp. piṇḍita. Piṇḍola {Pindola} [etym. unclear] one who seeks alms S III.93= It 89; cp. Np. °bhāradvāja SnA 346, 514, 570. Piṇḍolya {Pindolya} (nt.) [fr. piṇḍola] asking for alms, alms-round S III.93=It 89; Vism 31. Pitar {Pitar} [Vedic pitṛ, pitar-; cp. Gr. path/r; Lat. pater, Juppiter, Dies-piter=*zeu\s path/r; Goth. fadar=Ger. vater= E. father; Oir. athir etc. to onomat. syllable *pa-pa, cp. tāta & mātā] father. - Cases: sg. nom. pitā S I.182; Dh 43; J V.379; SnA 423; acc. pitaraṃ Dh 294; & pituṃ Cp. II.93; instr. pitarā J III.37, pitunā, petyā J V.214; dat. gen. pitu M III.176; J IV.137; VI.365, 589; & pituno Vin I.17 (cp. Prk. piuṇo); abl. pitarā J V.214; loc. pitari. - pl. nom. pitaro Sn 404; J IV.1; PvA 38, 54 (mātā°); acc. pitaro PvA 17, pitare, & pitū Th 2, 433; instr. pitarehi & pitūhi; dat. gen. pitunnaṃ J III.83; (mātā°); VI.389 (id.); Pv II.84; pitūnaṃ It 110; loc. pitusu Th 2, 499; J I.152 (mātā°); and pitūsu PvA 3 (mātā°). Further: abl. sg. pitito by the father's side D I.113 (+mātito); A III.151; J V.214. - A I.62, 132, 138 sq.; Sn 296, 579 (paralokato na pitā tāyate puttaṃ); Nd2 441 (=yo so janako); J I.412 (=tāta); V.20; VbhA 108 (where pretty popular etym. is given with "piyāyatī ti pitā"), 154 (in simile). - Of Brahmā: D I.18, cp. DA I.112; of Inda J V.153. There is sometimes a distinction made between the father as such and the grandfather (or ancestors in gen.) with culla° (cūḷa°), i. e. little and mahā° i. e. grand-father, e. g. at J I.115 (+ayyaka); PvA 107. The collective term for "parents" is mātāpitaro (pl. not dual), e. g. Sn 404; J I.152; III.83; IV.1; PvA 107. On similes of father and son op. J.P.T.S. 1907, 112. In cpds. there are the 3 bases pitā, piti° & pitu°. (a) pitā°: °putta father & son J I.253; pl. °puttā fathers & sons, or parents & children J IV.115; VI.84. °mahā grandfather Pv II.84; J II.263; DA I.281; PvA 41; °mahāyuga age of a grandfather (i. e. a generation of ancestors) D I.113 (see det. expln DA I.281=SnA 462); Sn p. 115; KhA 141; petti-pitā-mahā great-grandfathers, all kinds of ancestors J II.48 (=pitu-vitā mahā C.). - (b.) piti°: °kicca duty of a father J V.153; °ghāta parricide J IV.45 (BB pitu°); °pakkha father's side DhA I.4; °pitāmahā (pl.) fathers & grandfathers, ancestors J V.383; °vadha parricide DA I.135. -(c) pitu°: °ja originating from the father J VI.589 (+mātuja); °ghātaka parricide (+mātughātaka) Vin I.88, 136, 168, 320; °nāma fathers name SnA 423; °pitāmahā (pl.) ancestors (cp. piti°) A IV.61; J I.2; II.48. °rakkhita guarded by a father M III.46. °santaka father's possession J I.2. °hadaya father's heart J I.61. Pitika {Pitika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. pitā] one who has a father, having a father VvA 68 (sa° together with the f.); PvA 38 (mata° whose f. was dead): cp. dve° with 2 fathers J V.424. Pitucchā {Pituccha} (f.) [pitu+svasā, cp. Sk. pitṛ-ṣvasṛ] father's sister, aunt; decl. similarly to pitā & mātā DhA I.37; acc. sg. pitucchasaṃ [Sk. *svasaṃ instead of *svasāraṃ] J IV.184. -dhītā aunt's daughter, i. e. (girl) cousin DhA I.85. -putta aunt's son, i. e. (boy) cousin S II.282 (Tisso Bhagavato p.); III.106 (id.); J II.119, 324. Pāli Text Society Pitta 1047 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [cp. Vedic pitta] 1. the bile, gall; the bile also as seat of the bilious temperament, excitement or anger. Two kinds are distinguished at KhA 60= Vism 260, viz. baddha° & abaddha°, bile as organ & bile as fluid. See also in detail Vism 359; VbhA 65, 243. In enumerations of the parts or affections of the body pitta is as a rule combd with semha (cp. Vin II.137; Kh 111; Vism 260, 344; Miln 298). - Vin II.137; M III.90; S IV.230, 231 (+semha); A II.87; III.101, 131; Sn 198 (+semha), 434 (id., expld as the two kinds at SnA 388); Nd1 370; J I.146 (+semha); II.114 (pittan te kupitaṃ your bile is upset or out of order, i. e. you are in a bad mood); Miln 112 (vāta-pittasemha . . .), 304 (roga,+semha), 382 (+semha); DhsA 190 (as bluegreen); DhA III.15 (cittaṃ n'atthi pittaṃ n'atthi has no heart and no bile, i. e. does not feel & get excited; vv. ll. vitta & nimitta). - 2. [according to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 4 for *phitta=phīta, Sk. sphīta] swelling, a gathering Vin II.188 (Vin. Texts III.237 "a burst gall, i. e. bladder"); S II.242. The passage is not clear, in C. on Ud I.7 we read cittaṃ, see Morris loc. cit. May the meaning be "muzzle"? -kosaka gall-bladder KhA 61; Vism 263; VbhA 246. {Pitta} Pittika {Pittika} (adj.) [fr. pitta] one who has bile or a bilious humoui, bilious Miln 298 (+semhika). Pittivisaya {Pittivisaya} [Sporadic reading for the usual petti°] the realm of the departed spirits M I.73; J I.51; Nd1 489. Pittivisayika {Pittivisayika} (adj.) [fr. pittivisaya] belonging to the realm of the departed Nd1 97 (gati; v. l. petti°). Pithīyatī {Pithiyati} (pithiyyati) [Pass. of pidahati, cp. api-dahati, Sk. apidhīyate] to be covered, obscured or obstructed; to close, shut M II.104; III.184; Sn 1034, 1035; Nd2 442 (BB pidhiyyati; expld by pacchijjati); Th 1, 872; Dh 173; J I.279 (akkhīni pithīyiṃsu the eyes shut); II.158 (=paticchādiyati); VI.432. The spelling of the BB manuscripts is pidhīyati (cp. Trenckner, Notes 62). Pidalaka {Pidalaka} [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests diminutiveformation fr. Sk. bidala split bamboo] a small stick, skewer Vin II.116, cp. Bdhgh on p. 317: "daṇḍakathina-ppamāṇena kaṭasārakassa pariyante paṭisaṃharitvā duguṇa-karaṇa." See also Vin Texts III.94. Pidahati {Pidahati} [api+dhā, cp. apidahati & Prk. piṇidhattae= Sk. apinidhātave] to cover, to close, conceal, shut M I.117, 380 (dvāraṃ); J I.292; III.26; V.389; Miln 139 (vajjaṃ); DhA I.396; II.4, 85; IV.197 (ūruṃ); Sdhp 321; aor. pidahi J IV.308 (kaṇṇe); ger. pidahitvā Pv II.76 (dvāraṃ); Vism 182 (nāsaṃ); DA I.136, pidhatvā Th 2, 480, & pidhāya J I.150 (dvāraṃ), 243 (id.); ThA 286; DhA II.199 (dvārāni). - Pass. pithīyati; pp. pihita (q. v.). The opp. of p. is vivarati. Pidahana {Pidahana} (nt.) [fr. api+dhā, cp. apidahana] covering up, shutting, closing Vism 20; DhA IV.85 (=thakana). Pidhara {Pidhara} [fr. api+dhṛ] a stick (or rag?) for scraping (or wiping?) Vin II.141 (avalekhana°), 221 (id.). Meaning doubtful. Pidhāna {Pidhana} (nt.) [=pidahana] cover J VI.349. -°phalaka covering board Vism 261 (where KhA in same passage reads paṭikujjana-phalaka)=VbhA 244. Pāli Text Society 1048 Pāli-English Dictionary Pināsa {Pinasa} [cp. Sk. pīnasa] cold in the head, catarrh, in enumn of illnesses under dukkha, at Nd2 304Q ≈ (kāsa, sāsa, pināsa, etc.). Pipati {Pipati} [dial. form for pibati, pivati, usually restricted to Gāthā Dial., cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 132] to drink, only in imper. pres. pipa M I.316; S I.459, and ppr. pipaṃ J V.255, gen. pl. pipataṃ Sn 398. Pipāsā {Pipasa} (f.) [Desid. form. fr. pā, pibati>pipati, lit. desire to drink] 1. thirst Nd2 443 (=udaka-pipāsā); Miln 318; VbhA 196 (in comparison); PvA 23, 33, 67 sq.; Sdhp 288. Often combd with khudā (hunger) e. g. Sn 52, 436 (khup°); PvA 67; or jighacchā (id.), e. g. M I.10; S I.18; A II.143, 153; Miln 304. - 2. longing (for food), hunger J II.319. - 3. desire, craving, longing D III.238 (avigata°); S III.7, 108, 190; IV.387; A II.34 (pipāsavinaya; expld at Vism 293); IV.461 sq. Pipāsita {Pipasita} (adj.) [pp. of pipāsati, Desid. fr. pā, cp. pipāsā] thirsty S I.143; II.110 (surā°); J VI.399; Miln 318 (kilantatasita-p.); Vism 262; PvA 127; Sdhp 151. Pipāsin {Pipasin} (adj.) [fr. pipāsā] thirsty D II.265. Pipi {Pipi} (adj.) [fr. pā, see pivati] drinking (?) in su° good to drink (?) J VI.326 (v. l. BB sucimant). Or is it "flowing" (cp. Vedic pipiṣvat overflowing)? Pipīlikā (f.) & Pipillika {Pipilika} {Pipillika} [cp. Vedic pipīlikā, pipīlaka & pipīlika; BSk. pipīlaka AvŚ II.130 (kunta°). See also kipillikā] ant J III.276 (BB kipillikā); Sdhp 23; as pipillikā at J I.202. Pippala {Pippala} [for the usual P. pipphalī, Sk. pippalī] pepper Vin I.201, cp. Vin. Texts II.46. Pipphala {Pipphala} [cp. Epic Sk. pippala, on ph for p see pipphalī] the fruit of Ficus religiosa, the holy fig tree J VI.518 (Kern's reading, Toev. s. v. for T. maddhu-vipphala, C. reads madhuvipphala & explns by madhuraphala). Pipphalaka {Pipphalaka} (nt.?) [etym.? BR give Sk. *pippalaka in meaning "thread for sewing"] scissors (? so ed.) DA I.70. Pipphalī {Pipphali} (f.) [with aspirate ph for p, as in Sk. pippalī, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 62. See also pippala. Etym. loan words are Gr. pe/peri=Lat. piper=E. pepper, Ger. pfeffer] long pepper S V.79; J III.85; Vv 436; DhA I.258 (°guhā Npl.); IV.155. Piya1 {Piya} n to love, frijonds loving=E. friend; Ger. frei, freund; Ohg. Frīa=Sk. priyā, E. Friday, etc.] dear, in two applications (as stated Nd1 133=Nd2 444, viz. dve piyā: sattā vā piyā sankhārā vā piyā, with ref. to living beings, to sensations): 1. dear, beloved (as father, mother, husband, etc.) S I.210 (also compar. °tara); Dh 130, 157, 220; Vism 296, 314 sq.; often combd with manāpa (pleasing, also in 2), e. g. D II.19; III.167; J II.155; IV.132. - 2. pleasant, agreeable, liked Sn 452, 863: Dh 77, 211; often combd (contrasted) with appiya, e. g. Sn 363, 450 (see also below). nt. piyaṃ a pleasant thing, pleasantry, pleasure S I.189; Sn 450, 811; DhA III.275. -appiya unpleasant M I.86; Kh VIII.5. appiyatā unpleasantness J IV.32. See also pīti & pema. -āpāya separation from what is dear to one, absence of the beloved A III.57; Dh 211. -āppiya pleasant & unpleasant D II.277 (origin of Pāli Text Society 1049 Pāli-English Dictionary it); Dh 211. -kamya friendly disposition Vin IV.12. -ggāhin grasping after pleasure Dh 209, cp. DhA III.275. -cakkhu a loving eye D III.167. -dassana lovely to behold, goodlooking D III.167. bhāṇin speaking pleasantly, flattering J V.348. -manāpatā belovedness M I.66. -rūpa pleasant form, an enticing object of sight D I.152 (cp. DA I.311); S II.109 sq.; A II.54; It 95, 114; Sn 337, 1086 (cp. Nd2 445); Vbh 103; Nett 27. -vacana term of endearment or esteem, used with ref. to āyasmā Nd2 130; SnA 536, etc.; or mārisa SnA 536. -vācā pleasant speech S I.189; Sn 452. -vādin speaking pleasantly, affable D I.60 (manāpacārin+); A III.37; IV.265 sq. -vippayoga separation from the beloved object Sn 41 (cp. Nd2 444); PvA 161 (here with ref. to the husband); syn. with appiya-sampayoga, e. g. at Vism 504 sq. Piya2 {Piya} [sporadic for phiya, q. v.] oar; usually so in cpd. piyāritta (nt.) oar & rudder S I.103; A II.201; J IV.164. Piyaka {Piyaka} [cp. Class. Sk. priyaka] a plant going under various names, viz. Nauclea cadamba; Terminalia tomentosa; Vitex trifolia J V.420 (=setapuppha C.); VI.269. Piyangu {Piyangu} (f.) [cp. Vedio priyangu] 1. panic seed, Panicum Italicum Vv 537; J I.39; PvA 283. Mixed with water and made into a kind of gruel (piyangûdaka) it is used as an emetic J I.419. See also kangu. - 2. a medicinal plant, Priyangu J V.420. Piyatta {Piyatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. piya1] belovedness, pleasantness A V.164 sq.; Sdhp 66. Piyāyati {Piyayati} [Denom. fr. piya1] to hold dear, to like, to be fond of (acc.), to be devoted to S I.210; J I.156; II.246; VI.5; VbhA 108 (in etym. of pitā, q. v.); DhA IV.125; SnA 78; VvA 349; PvA 71. - pp. piyāyita. Note. A ppr. piyaṃ is found at SnA 169 for Sn 94 adj. piya, and is expld by pīyamāna tussamāna modamāna. Piyāyanā {Piyayana} (f.) [fr. piyāyati] love, fondness for (loc.) S I.210. Piyāyita {Piyayita} [pp. of piyāyati] held dear, fondled, loved, liked Sn 807; Nd1 126. Piyāla {Piyala} [cp. Class. Sk. priyāla] the Piyal tree, Buchanania latifolia J V.415. - (nt.) the fruit of this tree, used as food J IV.344; V.324. Pire {Pire} at Vin IV.139 is to be separated (cara pi re get away with you), both pi and re acting as part. of exclamation. The C. expln (p. 362) by "pire (voc.?)=para, amāmaka" is an artificial construction. Pilaka {Pilaka} [cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] a boil Sn p. 124 (piḷaka, v. l. pilaka); Vism 35 (pīḷaka); DhA I.319 (v. l. piḷaka).- See also piḷakā. Pilakkha {Pilakkha} [cp. Vedic plakṣa] the wave-leaved fig tree, Ficus infectoria Vin IV.35; DA I.81. As pilakkhu [cp. Prk. pilakkhu Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 105] at S V.96; J III.24, 398. Pilandha {Pilandha} (adj.) (-°) [fr. pilandhati] adorning or adorned Miln 336, 337. Cp. apiḷandha. 1050 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Pilandhati {Pilandhati} [see apilandhati, api+nah] to adorn, put on, bedeck Miln 337; J V.400. Caus. II. pilandhāpeti J I.386. Pilandhana & Piḷandhana (nt.) [=apilandhana] putting on ornaments, embellishment, ornament, trinkets A I.254, 257; III.16; Th 2, 74; Vv 6417 (ḷ); J I.386 (ḷ); V.205; VbhA 230 (°vikati; ḷ); VvA 157 (ḷ), 167 (ḷ); PvA (ḷ); Sdhp 243. {Pilandhana} Pilava & Plava {Pilava} {Plava} [fr. plu, cp. Vedic plava boat, Russ. plov ship] 1. swimming, flowing, floating J V.408 (suplav-atthaṃ in order to swim through well=plavana C.). - 2. a kind of duck [so Epic Sk.] Vv 35Q (cp. VvA 163); J V.420. Pilavati & Plavati {Pilavati} {Plavati} [cp. Vedic plavati; plu, as in Lat. pluo to rain, pluvius rain, Gr. ple/w swim, plu/nw wash; Ohg. flouwen etc. to rinse=E. flow] to move quickly (of water), to swim, float, sway to & fro Th 1, 104; Miln 377; VvA 163; DhsA 76. As plavati at J I.336 (verse); Dh 334 (v. l. SS; T. palavati). As palavati at Th 1, 399. - See also uppalavati (uppluta), opilāpeti, paripalavati. Pilavana & Palavana {Pilavana} {Palavana} (nt.) [fr. plu] swimming, plunging J V.409 (pl°). Pilāpanatā {Pilapanata} (f.) [fr. plu, see pilavati] superficiality Dhs 1349, cp. DhsA 405. Pilāla {Pilala} at J I.382 (°piṇḍa+mattikā-piṇḍa) is doubtful. Fausböll suggests mistake for palala straw, so also Ed. Müller, P.Gr. 6. Pilotikā {Pilotika} (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. plota (BR=prota), Suśr. I.15, 3; 16, 7 & passim] a small piece of cloth, a rag, a bandage Vin I.255, 296 (khoma° cp. Vin. Texts II.156); M I.141 (chinna-°odhammo laid bare or open); S II.28 (id.), 219 (paṭa°); J I.220; II.145; III.22 (jiṇṇa°), 511; VI.383; Miln 282; Vism 328; KhA 55; DhA I.221 (tela° rags dipped in oil); VvA 5; PvA 185; - As m. at J IV.365. The BSk. forms vary; we read chinna-pilotika at AvŚ I.198; MVastu III.63; pilotikā (or °ka) at MVastu III.50, 54. Besides we have ploti in karmaploti (pūrvikā k.) Divy 150 etc. AvŚ I.421. -khaṇḍa a piece of rag DhA IV.115; ThA 269; PvA 171. Pillaka {Pillaka} [cp. Sk. *pillaka] the young of an animal, sometimes used as term for a child J II.406 (sūkara°); DhA IV.134 (as an abusive term; vv. ll. SS kipillaka; gloss K pitucūḷaka, BB cūḷakaniṭṭha); Sdhp 164, 165. - As pillika at J I.487 (godha°, v. l. BB godha-kippillika). Piḷakā {Pilaka} (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. piḍakā] 1. a small boil, pustule, pimple Vin I.202; S I.150; J V.207, 303; Nd1 370; Miln 298; DA I.138. - 2. knob (of a sword) J VI.218. - Cp. pilaka. Piḷayhati {Pilayhati} [api+nayhati, cp. Sk. pinahyate] to fasten on, put on, cover, dress, adorn J V.393 (piḷayhatha 3rd sg. imper.=pilandhatu C.). Piḷhaka {Pilhaka} (v. l. miḷhakā) at S II.228 is to be read as mīḷhakā "cesspool" (q. v.). The C. quoted on p. 228 expls incorrectly by "kaṃsalak'ādi gūthapāṇakā," which would mean "a low insect breeding in excrements" (thus perhaps=paṭanga?). The trsl. (K.S. II.155) has "dungbeetle." Pāli Text Society 1051 Pāli-English Dictionary Pivati & Pibati {Pivati} {Pibati} [Vedic pāti & pibati, redupl. pres. to root Idg. *poi & pī, cp. Lat. bibo (for * pibo); Gr. pi_uw to drink, po/tos drink; Obulg. piti culum beaker (=pātra, P. patta). See also pāyeti to give drink, pāna, pānīya drink, pīta having drunk] to drink. - pres. pivati D I.166; III.184; J IV.380; V.106; PvA 55. - 1st pl. pivāma Pv I.11Q; 2nd pl. pivatha PvA 78 & pivātha Pv I.112; 3rd pl. med. piyyare J IV.380. - imper. piva PvA 39, & pivatu Vin IV.109. - ppr. pivaṃ Sn 257; Dh 205, & pivanto SnA 39. - fut. pivissati J VI.365; PvA 5, 59; pissāmi J III.432; pāssati J IV.527. - aor. pivi J I.198; apivi Mhvs 6, 21; pivāsiṃ Ud 42; apāyiṃha J I.362 (or °siṃha?); apaṃsu A I.205. - ger. pivitvā J I.419; III.491; VI.518; PvA 5, 23; pītvā Sn 257; Dh 205; J I.297; pītvāna J II.71; pitvā Pv I.118. - grd. pātabba Vin II.208; peyya; see kāka.°- inf. pātuṃ J II.210; Pv I.64. - pp. pīta (q. v.). - Of forms with p for v we mention the foll.: pipati M I.32; DhsA 403 (as v. l.); imper. pipa J I.459; ppr. pipaṃ M I.316, 317. - Caus. pāyeti & pāyāpeti (q. v.). Pivana {Pivana} (nt.) [fr. pivati] drinking PvA 251. Pivaraka {Pivaraka} see piṭharaka. Pisati {Pisati} [=piṃsati] to grind, crush, destroy; Pass. pisīyati to perish VvA 335 (+vināseti). - pp. pisita. Pisana {Pisana} (nt.) [fr. piṃsati?] grinding, powder see upa°. Pisāca {Pisaca} [cp. Sk. piśāca & Vedic piśāci; to same root as pisuna=Vedic piśuna, & Lat. piget, Ohg. fēhida enmity=Ags. faehp ("feud"), connected with root of Goth. fijan to hate; thus pisāca=fiend] 1. a demon, goblin, sprite D I.54 (T. pesācā, v. l. pisācā, expld at DA I.164 as "pisācā mahanta-mahantā sattā ti vadati"), 93; S I.209; A III.69; Ud 5; J I.235; IV.495 (yakkha p. peta); Miln 23; VvA 335; PvA 198; Sdhp 313. - f. pisācī J V.442. - 2. [like pisāca-loha referring to the Paiśāca district, hailing from that tribe, cp. the term malla in same meaning and origin] a sort of acrobat, as pl. pisācā "tumblers" Miln 191. -nagara town of goblins (cp. yakkha-nagara) Vism 531. -loha [connected with the tribe of the Paiśāca's: Mhbh VII.4819; cp. Paiśācī as one of the Prākrit dialects: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 3] a kind of copper VbhA 63 (eight varieties). Pisācaka {Pisacaka} = pisāca, only in cpd. paṃsu° mud-sprite J IV.380, 496; DA I.287; DhA II.26. Pisācin {Pisacin} (adj. n.) [fr. pisāca, lit. having a demon] only f. pisācinī a witch (=pisācī) Th 1, 1151. Pisācillikā {Pisacillika} (f.) [fr. pisāca] a tree-goblin Vin I.152; II.115, 134; SnA 357; cp. Vin. Texts I.318. Pista {Pista} [pp. of pisati] crushed, ground Vism 260 (=piṭṭha KhA id. p.); VbhA 243. Pisīyati {Pisiyati} Pass. of pisati (q. v.). Pisīla {Pisila} (nt.) [Sk. piśāla] a dial. expression for pātī or patta "bowl" M III 235 (passage quite misunderstood by Neumann in his trsln III.414). Pāli Text Society 1052 Pāli-English Dictionary Pisuṇa {Pisuna} (adj.) [Vedic piśuṇa, see etym. under pisāca] backbiting, calumnious, malicious M III.33, 49; J I.297; Pug 57; PvA 15, 16. Usually combd with vācā malicious speech, slander, pisuṇavācā and pisuṇāvācā D I.4, 138; III.70 sq., 171, 232, 269; M I.362; III.23; adj. pisuṇāvāca & M III.22, 48; S II.167; Pug 39. - Cp. pesuna. Pisodara {Pisodara} [pṛṣa, i. e. pṛṣant+udara, see pasata1] having a spotted belly KhA 107 (ed. compares pṛṣodarādi Pāṇini VI.3, 109). Pihaka {Pihaka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. plihaṇaka & plīhan (also Vedic plāśi?), Av. spərəQan; Gr. splh/n, spla/gxna entrails; Lat. lien spleen] the spleen M III.90; Sn 195; J V.49. In detail at Vism 257; VbhA 240. Pihana {Pihana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. piheti] envying Dhs 1059; SnA 459 (°sīla). Pihayati & Piheti {Pihayati} {Piheti} [cp. Vedic spṛhayati, spṛh] 1. to desire, long for (with acc.) Vin II.187; S II.242 (pihāyittha 2nd pl. aor.); J I.401; IV.198 (pattheti+); Th 2, 454; Vv 8445 (=piyāyati VvA 349). - 2. to envy (with gen. of person & object), covet M I.504; S I.202, 236; Th 1, 62; Sn 823, 947; It 36; Dh 94 (=pattheti DhA 177), 181 (id. III.227), 365 (ppr. pihayaṃ=labhaṃ patthento DhA IV.97); J I.197 (aor. mā pihayi); Miln 336. - pp. pihayita. Pihayita {Pihayita} [pp. of pihayati] desired, envied, always combd with patthita Miln 182, 351. Pihā {Piha} (f.) [fr. spṛh, cp. Sk. spṛhā] envy, desire M I.304; J I.197; Vism 392 (Bhagavantaṃ disvā Buddha-bhāvāya pihaṃ anuppādetvā thita-satto nāma n'atthi). - adj. apiha without desire S I.181. Pihāyanā {Pihayana} (f.)=pihanā Nett 18. Pihālu {Pihalu} (adj.) [cp. Sk. spṛhālu, fr. spṛh, but perhaps=Ved. piyāru malevolent. On y>h cp. P. paṭṭhayati for paṭṭhahati] covetous, only neg. a° S I.187=Th 1, 1218; Sn 852; Nd1 227. Pihita {Pihita} [pp. of pidahati] covered, closed, shut, obstructed (opp. vivaṭa) M I.118; III.61; S I.40; A II.104; Nd1 149; J I.266; Miln 102 (dvāra), 161; Vism 185; DA I.182 (°dvāra). Pīṭha {Pitha} (nt.) [cp. Fpic Sk. pīṭha] a seat, chair, stool, bench. - 4. kinds are given at Vin IV.40=168, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷirapādaka, āhaccapādaka (same categories as given under mañca). - Vin I.47, 180; II.114, 149, 225; A III.51 (mañca°, Dvandva); IV.133 (ayo°); Ps I.176; Vv 11 (see discussed in detail at VvA 8); VvA 295 (mañca°). - pāda° footstool J IV.378; VvA 291; bhadda° state-chair, throne J III.410. -sappin "one who crawls by means of a chair or bench," i. e. one who walks on a sort of crutch or support, a cripple (pīṭha here in sense of "hatthena gahana-yogga" VvA 8; exlpd by Bdhgh as "chinn'iriyāpatha" Vin. Texts I.225) J I.76, 418; V.426 (khujja+) VI.4, 10; Miln 205, 245, 276; Vism 596 (& jaccandha, in simile); DhA I.194; II.69; PugA 227; PvA 282. Pīṭhaka {Pithaka} [fr. pīṭha] a chair, stool VvA 8, 124. See also palāla°. Pāli Text Society 1053 Pāli-English Dictionary Pīṭhikā {Pithika} (f.) [fr. pīṭha] a bench, stool Vin II.149 ("cushioned chair" Bdhgh; see Vin. Texts III.165); J IV.349; DA I.41; VvA 8. Pīṇana {Pinana} (nt.) [fr. prī, cp. pīti] 1. gladdening, thrill, satisfaction Vism 143=DhsA 115. - 2. embellishment Vism 32 (=maṇḍana). Pīṇita {Pinita} [pp. of pīṇeti] pleased, gladdened, satisfied Vv 1613 (=tuṭṭha VvA 84); Miln 238, 249, 361; usually in phrase pīṇitindriya with satisfied senses, with joyful heart M II.121; PvA 46, 70. Pīṇeti {Pineti} [cp. Vedic prīṇāti, prī, see piya. The meaning in Pāli however has been partly confused with pī, pinvati (see pīna), as suggested by Bdhgh in DA I.157: "pīṇentī ti pīṇitaṃ thāma-bal'ûpetaṃ karonti"] to gladden, please, satisfy, cheer; to invigorate, make strong, often in phrase (attānaṃ) sukheti pīṇeti "makes happy and pleases" D I.51; III.130 sq.; S I.90; IV.331; PvA 283: cp. DhsA 403 (sarīraṃ p.). It also occurs in def. of pīti (pīṇayatī ti pīti) at Vism 143=DhsA 115. - pp. pīṇita. Pīta1 {Pita} [pp. of pivati] 1. having drunk or (pred.) being drunk (as liquid) S I.212 (madhu°); J I.198; PvA 25 (with asita, khāyita & sāyita as fourfold food). - 2. soaked or saturated with (-°), in kasāyarasa° J II.98 (or=pīta2?) and visapīta (of an arrow) J V.36; Vism 303, 381; which may however be read (on acct. of v. l. visappīta) as visappita "poison-applied" (see appita). Does M I.281 pīta-nisita belong here (=visapīta)? - 3. (nt.) drink M I.220 sq.=A V.347 sq.; A V.359; Th 1, 503; Pv II.710; Nett 29, 80. Pīta2 {Pita} (adj.) [Epic Sk. pīta, etym. unclear] yellow, goldencoloured Vin I.217 (virecana); D I.76 (nīla p. lohita odāta); III.268 (°kasiṇa); M I.281 (pīta-nisita, belonging here or under pīta1?), cp. 385 (below); A III.239; IV.263, 305, 349; V.61; J VI.185 (nīla p. lohita odāta maðjeṭṭhaka), 449 (°alankāra, °vasana °uttara, cp. 503); Dhs 203 (°kasiṇa), 246, 247 (nīla p. lohitaka, odāta); Vism 173 (°kasiṇa). - pīta is prominent (in the sense of golden) in the description of Vimānas or other heavenly abodes. A typical example is Vv 47 (Pītavimāna V.1 & 2), where everything is characterised as pīta, viz. vattha, dhaja, alankāra, candana, uppala, pāsāda, āsana, bhojana, chatta, ratha, assa, bījanī; the C. expln of pīta at this passage is "suvaṇṇa"; cp. Vv 361 (=parisuddha, hemamaya VvA 166); 784 (=suvaṇṇamaya C. 304). -antara a yellow dress or mantle Vv 36 (=pītavaṇṇā uttarīyā C. 166). -aruṇa yellowish red Th 2, 479. -āvalepana "goldendaubed" M I.385. Pītaka {Pitaka} (adj.) [fr. pīta] yellow Vin IV.159; Th 2, 260; J II.274; Pv III.13 (=suvaṇṇavaṇṇa PvA 170); Dhs 617 (nīla p. lohitaka odāta kāḷaka mañjeṭṭhaka); ThA 211. -pītakā (f.) saffron, turmeric M I.36. Pīti {Piti} (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. prīti & Vedic prīta pp. of prī, see pīneti & piya] emotion of joy, delight, zest, exuberance. On term see Dhs. trsl. 11 and Cpd. 243. Classed under sankhārakkhandha, not vedanā°. - D I.37, 75; III.241, 265, 288; M I.37; S II.30; IV.236; A III.26, 285 sq.; IV.411, 450; V.1 sq., 135, 311 sq., 333 sq.; Sn 257, 687, 695, 969, 1143 (=Bhagavantaṃ ārabbha p. pāmujjaṃ modanā pamodanā citti-odagyaṃ etc. Nd2 446); Nd1 3, 491; Pug 68; Dhs 9, 62, 86, 172, 584, 999; Nett 29; Vism 145 (& sukha in contrasted relation), 212, 287 (in detail); DA I.53 (characterised by ānanda); DhA I.32; Sdhp 247, 461. On relation to jhāna see the latter. In series pīti passaddhi samādhi upekkhā under sambojjhanga (with eleven means of Pāli Text Society 1054 Pāli-English Dictionary cultivation: see Vism 132 & VbhA 282). - Phrase pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati "to pervade or thrill the body with joy" (aor. phari), at J I.33; V.494; DhA II.118; IV.102; all passages refer to pīti as the fivefold pīti, paðcavaṇṇā pīti, or joy of the 5 grades (see Dhs. trsl. 11, 12, and Cpd. 56), viz. khuddikā (slight sense of interest), khaṇikā (momentary joy), okkantikā (oscillating interest, flood of joy), ubbegā (ecstasy, thrilling emotion), and pharaṇā pīti (interest amounting to rapture, suffusing joy). Thus given at DhsA 115 & Vism 143, referred to at DhsA 166. - pīti as nirāmisa (pure) and sāmisa (material) at M III.85; S IV.235. -gamanīya pleasant or enjoyable to walk M I.117. -pāmojja joy and gladness A III.181. 307 (°pāmujja); Dh 374; DhA IV.110; KhA 82. pharaṇatā state of being pervaded with joy, joyous rapture, ecstasy D III.277; Ps I.48; Vbh 334; Nett 89. -bhakkha feeding on joy (Ep. of the Ābhassara Devas) D I.17; III.28, 84, 90; A V.60; Dh 200; A I.110; DhA III.258; Sdhp 255. -mana joyful-hearted, exhilarated, glad of heart or mind M I.37; III.86; S I.181; A III.21; V.3; Sn 766; Nd1 3; J III.411; Vbh 227. -rasa taste or emotion of joy VvA 86. -sambojjhanga the joy-constituent of enlightenment M III.86; D III.106, 226, 252, 282. Eleven results of such a state are enumd at DhsA 75, viz. the 6 anussatis, upam'ānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddha-pug.-sevanatā, pasādanīyasuttanta-paccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatā (cp. Vism 132 & VbhA 282). -sahagata followed or accompanied by joy, bringing joy Dhs 1578 (dhammā, various things or states); Vism 86 (samādhi). -sukha zest and happiness, intrinsic joy (cp. Cpd. 56, 243) S I.203; D III.131, 222; Dhs 160; Vism 158; ThA 160. According to DhsA 166 "rapture and bliss," cp. Expositor 222. -somanassa joy and satisfaction J V.371; Sn 512; PvA 6, 27, 132. Pītika {Pitika} (-°) (adj.) [fr. pīti] belonging to joy; only as sappītika & nippītika bringing joy & devoid of joy, with & without exuberance (of sukha) A III.26; IV.300, 441. Pītin {Pitin} (adj.) [fr. pīta1) drinking, only at Dh 79 in cpd. dhamma° drinking in the Truth, expld as dhammapāyako, dhammaṃ pivanto at DhA II.126. Pīna {Pina} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. pīna of pī to swell up (with fat); to which also Vedic pīvan & pīvara fat, Gr. pimelh/ & pi\on fat, Lat. opīmus fat, Ger. feist & fett=E. fat] fat, swollen Th 2, 265 (of breasts). Pīḷaka {Pilaka} [fr. pīd?] a (sort of) boil Vism 35; see pilaka. Pīḷana {Pilana} (nt.) [fr. pīḍ, cp. pīḷā] oppression, injury, suffering (from dukkha) Vism 212=494; also in nakkhatta° harm to a constellation, i. e. occultation DhA I.166 sq. Pīḷā (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pīḍā fr. pīḍ] 1. pain, suffering J I.421; Miln 278; Vism 42. - 2. oppression, damage, injury SnA 353; DA I.259. {Pila} Pīlikoḷikā (f.) [reading not quite sure, cp. koḷikā] eyesecretion Th 2, 395 (=akkhigūthaka ThA 259, q. v. for fuller expln; see also J.P.T.S. 1884, 88). Pīḷita {Pilikolika} [pp. of pīḷeti] crushed, oppressed, molested, harassed Vin IV.261; Vism 415 (dubbhikkha°); DhA IV.70; ThA 271. Cp. abhi°, pa°. {Pilita} Pīḷeti {Pileti} [cp. Vedic pīḍayati, pīḍ, cp. Gr. pie/zw (*pisedQw?) to press, oppress (lit. sit upon?)] 1. to press, press down Vin II.225 (coḷakaṃ). - 2. to weigh down heavily J I.25 (ppr. Pāli Text Society 1055 Pāli-English Dictionary pīḷiyamāna), 138. - 3. to press, clench Miln 418 (muṭṭhiṃ pīḷayati); DhA IV.69 (anguliyā pīḷiyamānāya). - 4. to crush, keep under, subjugate Miln 277 (janaṃ). - 5. to molest VvA 348 (pīḷanto ppr. for pīḷento?). - pp. pīḷita. Puṃ {Pum} as a term for Purgatory (niraya): see Bdhgh's etym. of puggala Vism 310, as quoted under puggala. Puṃs {Pums} [Vedic puṃs (weak base) and pumāṃs (strong base), often opp. to strī (woman, female); cp. putra & potaka]. Of the simplex no forms are found in Pāli proper. The base puṃ occurs in pukusa (?), puggala (?), pungava, pullinga; puṃs in napuṃsaka (cp. Prk. napuṃsaveya Pischel, Gram. § 412). The role of puṃs as contrast to itthi has in Pāli been taken over by purisa, except in itthi-pumā at the old passage D III.85. The strong base is in P. puman (q. v.). See also posa1. Pukkusa [non-Aryan; cp. Epic Sk. pukkuśa, pukkaśa pulkasa. The "Paulkāsa" are mentioned as a mixed caste at Vājasaneya Saṃhitā 30, 17 (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 217)] N. of a (Non-Aryan) tribe, hence designation of a low social class, the members of which are said (in the Jātakas) to earn their living by means of refuseclearing. On the subject see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 206, 207. - Found in foll. enumerations: khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā caṇḍālapukkusā A I.162= III.214; J III.194 (expld by C. chava-chaḍḍaka-caṇḍālā ca puppha-chaḍḍakapukkusā ca); IV.303; Pv II.612; Miln 5. Further as pukkusakula as the last one of the despised clans (caṇḍālakula, nesāda°, veṇa°, rathakāra°, p.°) at M III.169; S I.94; A II.85; Vin IV.6; Pug 51. With nesāda at PvA 176. - Cp. M III.169. {Pukkusa} Puggala {Puggala} [cp. Class. Sk. pudgala, etym. connected with puṃs, although the fantastic expln of native Commentators refers it to puṃ "a hell" and gal; so at Vism 310: "pun ti vuccati nirayo, tasmiṃ galantī ti puggalā"] 1. an individual, as opposed to a group (sangha or parisā), person, man; in later philosophical (Abhidhamma) literature=character, soul (=attan). - D I.176; M III.58; S I.93 sq.; III.25; A I.8, 197; II.126 sq.; Sn 544, 685; Dh 344; Ps I.180 sq.; II.1 sq., 52; Pv II.325 (cp. PvA 88); II.97; PvA 40, 132. - pl. puggalā people VvA 86 (=sattā), 149. - parapuggala another man D I.213; S II.121; V.265; Vism 409. -purisa-puggala individual man, being, person S II.206; IV.307; A I.173=M II.217. Characterised as an individual in var. ways, e. g. as agga° Sdhp 92, 558; abhabba° J I.106; ariya° Vin V.117; asura-parivāra° A II.91; kodhagaru° A II.46; gūtha°, puppha° madhubhāṇī° A I.128; dakkhiṇeyya° VvA 5; diṭṭhisampanna° A I.26 sq.; III.439 sq.; IV.136; nibbiriya kusīta° J IV.131; pāsāṇalekh'ûpama° etc. A I.283; valāhak'ûpama A II.102 sq.; saddha, asaddha Ps I.121; II.33; sivāthik' upama A III.268; suppameyya etc. A I.266 sq. [a]sevitabba A IV.365; V.102, 247, 281; hīna majjhima paṇīta S II.154. - Groups of characters: (2) A I.76, 87; (3) gilān'ûpama etc. A I.121 sq.; avuṭṭhika-sama padesa-vassin, sabbatth'ābhivassin It 64 sq.; satthar, sāvaka, sekha It 78; sekha asekha n'eva-sekha-nāsekha D III.218; (4) D III.232, 233; S I.93; J IV.131; (5) Nett 191; (6) rāga-carita, dosa°, moha°, saddhā°, buddha°, vitakka° Vism 102; (7) ubhato-bhāga-vimutta, paððāvimutta etc. D III.105; (8) A III.212; S V.343 (19) Nett 190; (26) Nett 189, 190. - See also paṭipuggala. - 2. (in general) being, creature Miln 310 (including Petas & animals). -ðū knowing individuals D III.252, 283. paññatti descriptions of persons, classification of individuals D III.105 (cp. Dial. III.101); also N. of one of the canonical books of the Abhidhamma-piṭaka. -vemattatā difference between individuals S II.21; V.200; Sn p. 102 (=°nānatta SnA 436). Pāli Text Society 1056 Pāli-English Dictionary Puggalika {Puggalika} (adj.) [fr. puggala] belonging to a single person, individual, separate Vin I.250; II.270. The BSk. paudgalika at Divy 342 is used in a sense similar to the Vin passages. Divy Index gives, not quite correctly, "selfish." Punkha {Punkha} [cp. Epic Sk. punkha, etym. puṃ (base of puṃs)+ kha (of khan), thus "mandigging"?] the feathered part of an arrow J II.89. Cp. ponkha. Pungava {Pungava} [puṃ+gava (see go), cp. Class. Sk. pungava in both meanings] a bull, lit "malecow," A I.162; II.75 sq.; Sn 690; J III.81, 111; V.222, 242, 259, 433; SnA 323. As -° in meaning "best, chief" Vism 78 (muni°); ThA 69 (Ap V.5) (nara°). Pucimanda {Pucimanda} [fr. picumanda] the Nimba tree, Azadirachta Indica J III.34; IV.205; VI.269 (°thanī, of a woman= nimba-phala-saṇṭhāna-thana-yuggalā C.). Puccaṇḍatā {Puccandata} (f.) [pūti+aṇḍa+tā, viā *pūtyaṇḍatā] state of a rotten egg M I.357. Puccha {Puccha} (nt.) [cp. Vedic puccha (belonging with punar to Lat. puppis) & P. piccha] a tail DhsA 365 (dog's tail). See puñcikata. Pucchaka {Pucchaka} (adj.) [fr. pṛch] asking, questioning DhsA 2, 3 (pañha°). Pucchati {Pucchati} [pṛcch, cp. Vedic pṛcchati=Lat. posco, postulo, with which connected also Lat. n; Vedic praśna=P. paðha] 1. to ask, to question S I.207, 214; Vin II.207; Sn 995; Nd1 341 etc. - Pres. 1st sg. pucchāmi Sn 83, 241, 682, 1043, 1049; Nd2 447: Pv II.112. - 1st pl. pucchāma Sn 1052; Imper. puccha Sn 460; DA I.155; pucchatha D II.154; pucchassu Sn 189, 993; Pot. puccheyyāmi D I.51; puccheyya A I.199; PvA 6; ppr. pucchanto Sn 1126; aor. 1st sg. apucchissaṃ Sn 1116, pucchisaṃ Vv 3011, apucchiṃ VvA 127; 2nd sg. apucchasi Sn 1050; 3rd sg. apucchi Sn 1037, apucchasi Nd2 447; pucchi Sn 981, 1031; PvA 6, 39, 68; apucchatha Sn 1017; 1st. pl. apucchimha Sn 1052. 3rd pl. pucchiṃsu J I.221; pucchisuṃ Mhvs 10, 2. Fut. pucchissāmi J VI.364. Inf. pucchituṃ Vin I.93; Sn 510; puṭṭhuṃ Sn 1096, 1110; pucchitāye J V.137. Grd. pucchavho Sn 1030; Pass. pucchiyati DhA I.10. - Caus. II. pucchāpeti Mhvs 10, 75. - pp. puṭṭha & pucchita (q. v.). - 2. to invite to (instr.), to offer, to present to somebody (acc.), lit. to ask with Vin II.208, 210 (pāniyena); III.161 (odanena, sūpena etc.); D II.240. - See also anu°, abhi°, sam°. Pucchana {Pucchana} (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. pṛch] asking, enquiring, questioning Sn 504 (ā); PvA 121, 223. Pucchā {Puccha} (f.) [cp. Class. Sk. pṛcchā=Ohg. forsca question] a question Sn 1023; SnA 46, 200, 230. A system of questions ("questionnaire") is given in the Niddesa (and Commentaries), consisting of 12 groups of three questions each. In full at Nd1 339, 340=Nd2 under pucchā (p. 208). The first group comprises the three adiṭṭha-jotanā pucchā, diṭṭha-saṃsandanā p., vimaticchedanā p. These three with addition of anumati p. and kathetu-kamyatā p. also at DA I.68=DhsA 55. The complete list is referred to at SnA 159. -apuccha (adj.) that which is not a question, i. e. that which should not be asked Miln 316. -puccha-vissajjanā question and answer PvA 2. - At Nett 18 p. occurs as quāsi synonym of icchā and patthanā. Pāli Text Society 1057 Pāli-English Dictionary Pucchita {Pucchita} [pp. of pucchati] asked Sn 76, 126, 383, 988, 1005; Nd1 211; KhA 125 (°kathā); PvA 2, 13, 51. - Cp. puṭṭha. Pucchitar {Pucchitar} [n. ag. to pucchita] one who asks, a questioner M I.472; S III.6 sq.; Sn p. 140. Pujja {Pujja} (adj.) [grd. of pūj, cp. Sk. pūjya] to be honoured M III.38 sq., 77 sq.; A III.78 (v. l.); Nett 52, 56 (=pūjaniya C.). Compar. pujjatara M I.13; & see pūja. Puñcikatā {Puncikata} is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā is wrong reading at Dhs 1059 in taṇhā paraphrase (pattern 1 Nd2 taṇhā) for mucchaðcikatā. The readings of id. p. are puðcikatā Dhs 1136, 1230; Vbh 351, 361 (v. l. pucchaðji°); mucchaðci° at Nd1 8 (v. l. BB mucchañji°, SS suvañci°); Nd2 p. 152 (v. l. BB pucchiñci°, SS (vv. ll. puñcaṃ vikatā; pucaðcikaka; pucchakatā) and connects it with pucchaṃ cāleti (wagging of a dog's tail, hence "agitation"); Expositor II.470 gives "fluster." The C. on Vbh (VbhA 477) expls as "lābhan'ālābhanaka-ṭṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā," thus "agitation." Puñchati {Punchati} [cp. Sk. *proñchati, but BSk. poñcchate (v. l. puñchati & pocchate) Divy 491: upānahān mūlāc ca p.] to wipe off, clean Vin II.208 (upāhanā), 210; A IV.376 (rajoharaṇaṃ suciṃ p., asuciṃ p. etc.); J I.392 (akkhīni); Vism 63 (gabbha-malaṃ), 415=KhA 120= J I.47 (assūni hatthehi p.); KhA 136 (paṃsukaṃ). The reading puðjati occurs at J I.318 (akkhīni); V.182; VI.514, also as v. l. at A IV.376 (v. l. also muðcati: cp. puðcikatā). - Caus. II. puðchāpeti Vism 63. Cp. pari°. Puñchana {Punchana} (adj. nt.) [fr. proðch] wiping Vin I.297 (mukha°colaka); II.208 (upāhana°colaka), 210. Cp. puðchanī. Puñchanī {Punchani} (f.) [see puðchana] a cloth for wiping, a towel Vin II.122; Th 1, 560 (pāda° napkin for the feet). See Vin. Texts III.114. Puñja {Punja} (usually -°) [cp. Epic Sk. puñja] a heap, pile, mass, multitude Vin II.211; J I.146 (sabba-rogānaṃ). As -° in foll. cpds.: aṭṭhi° It 17 (+aṭṭhikandala); kaṭṭha° A III.408; IV.72; J II.327; gūtha° J II.211; tiṇa° A III.408; palāla° D I.71; M III.3; A I.241; II.210; maṃsa° D I.52; vālika° J VI.560; sankhāra° S I.135. -kata (& °kita) for puðjikata; cf. Sk. puðjīkṛta, with i for a in compn with kṛ & bhū heaped up, heaped together Vin II.208 (puðjakita); M I.58, 89 (id. but id. p. M III.92 puðjakajāta); A III.324 (puðjakata; v. l. puðjakita & puðjanika); J II.408 (puðjakata, v. l. pancalikata); VI.111 (id., v. l. puñca°). Puñjaka {Punjaka} =puðja M III.92 (°jātāni aṭṭhikāni, where M I.89 at id. p. reads puðjakitāni); Miln 342 (palāla°). Puñjati {Punjati} is a variant of puñchati is a variant of puñchati (q. v.). Puñña (nt.) [cp. (late) Vedic puṇya favourable, good; etym. not clear, it may be dialectical. The word is expld by Dhammapāla as "santānaṃ punāti visodheti," i. e. cleaning the continuation (of life) VvA 19, thus taken to pu. The expln is of course fanciful] merit, {Punna} Pāli Text Society 1058 Pāli-English Dictionary meritorious action, virtue. Always represented as foundation and condition of heavenly rebirth & a future blissful state, the enjoyment (& duration) of which depends on the amount of merit accumulated in a former existence. With ref. to this life there are esp. 3 qualities contributing to merit, viz., dāna, sīla & bhāvanā or liberality, good conduct & contemplation. These are the puñña-kiriya-vatthūni (see below). Another set of ten consists of these 3 and apaciti, veyyāvacca, patti-anuppadāna, abbhanumodanā, desanā, savana, diṭṭh'ujjuka-kamma. The opp. of puñña is either apuñña (D III.119; S I.114; II.82; A I.154; III.412; Sdhp 54, 75) or pāpa (Sn 520; Dh 39; Nett 96; PvA 5). The true Arahant is above both (Pv II.615). See on term also Kvu trsl. 201. - (a) Passages (selected): D III.58, 120; M I.404; II.191, 199; S I.72; II.82; IV.190; IV.190; V.53; A I.151, 155 sq.; III.412; Sn 427 sq., 547, 569, 790; Dh 18, 116 sq., 196, 220, 267, 331, 412; Nd1 90; Pv 1.2; I.512; Pug 55; Vism 541 (puððānaṃ paccayo duvidhā); DhA IV.34; PvA 6, 8 30, 69 sq.; Sdhp 4, 19 sq. - (b) Var. phrases & characterisations: Merit is represented as great (uḷāra DA I.110; PvA 5; anappaka Pv I.512) or little (paritta DA I.110; appa S II.229); as adj. (-°) mahā° S I.191, opp. appa° M II.5. puðða is defined at Nd1 90 as follows: "puññaṃ vuccati yaṃ kiðci tedhātukaṃ kusal'ābhisankhāraṃ; apuññaṃ vuccati sabbaṃ akusalaṃ. " It is defined as "dāna-sīl'-ādi-pabheda" & "sucaritaṃ kusala-kammaṃ" at VvA 19; considered as leading to future happiness: Vv 13; PvA 58; consisting mainly in dāna (dānamayaṃ p.) PvA 8, 51, 60, 66, 73, but also in vandana PvA 1. To do good= puññaṃ (puððāni) karoti D I.137; S IV.331; A V.177; Pv I.119; or pasavati S I.182, 213; A I.89; II.3 sq.; III.244; V.249, 282; PvA 121, cp. puññaṃ pasutaṃ Pv I.512; VvA 289. Other phrases: °ṃ ākankhati S I.18, 20; pavaḍḍhati S I.33; corehi duharaṃ S I.36; puððānaṃ vipāko A IV.89; āgamo S III.209 IV.349; opadhikaṃ S I.233; It 78; purāṇaṃ & navaṃ S I.92; sayaṃ katāni puððāni S I.37; puððassa dhārā S I.100; V.400. -atthika desirous of merit Sn 487 sq. -ānubhāva the majesty of merit PvA 58. -ābhisankhāra accumulation of merit D III.217; S II.82; Nd1 90, 206, 442; Vism 557 sq., 571; VbhA 142 sq., 166, 184. -ābhisanda (+kusalābhisanda) meritorious results A II.54 sq.; III.51, 337; IV.245. -assaya seat of merit DA I.67. -iddhi the magic power of m. PvA 117. -kata one who has done a deed of m. A II.32. -kamma good works, righteousness, merit S I.97, 143; DA I.10; VvA 32; PvA 54, 87; Sdhp 32. -kāma (adj.) desirous of doing good works S V.462. -kiriyā a good or meritorious action S I.87 (°kriyā), 101; PvA 54; usually as °kiriyavatthu item of m. action (of which 3 are usually enumd: see above) D III.218; A IV.241; It 51; Nett 50, 128. -kkhandha mass of merit (only as mahā°) S V.400; A III.337. -kkhaya decay (or waning of the effect) of merit D I.18 (cp. āyukkhaya & DA I.110). -kkhetta field of m., Ep. of the Sangha or any holy personalities, doing good (lit. planting seeds of merit) to whom is a source of future compensation to the benefactor. Usually with adj. anuttara unsurpassed field of m. (see also sangha) D III.5, 227; M I.446; III.80; S I.167, 220; V.343, 363, 382; A I.244; II.34 sq., 56, 113; III.158, 248, 279 sq., 387; IV.10 sq., 292; It 88; Sn 486; Vv 5031 (cp. VvA 216); Pv IV.133 (of a bhikkhu); Vism 220; VvA 286; PvA 1 (ariyasangha), 5 (Moggallāna), 6 (arahanto), 132, 140, 214 and passim. Cp. BSk. puṇyakṣetra Divy 63, 395 (+udāra). -paṭipadā the meritorious path, path of m. A I.168; Nett 96. -pasavana creation of m. PvA 31. -pekkha looking for merit (i. e. reward), intent upon m. S I.167; Sn 463 sq., 487 sq.; Dh 108 (cp. DhA II.234). -phala the fruit (or result) of m. action S I.217; Pug 51; DhA II.4; PvA 8, 50, 52. -bala the power of m. PvA 195. -bhāga taking part in meritorious action S I.154. -bhāgiya having share in m. M III.72 sq.; Nett 48. -maya=puñña J IV.232 (°iddhi); cp. BSk. puðyamaya AvŚ I.183. Puññavant {Punnavant} (adj.) [fr. puñña] possessing merit, meritorious, virtuous Ps II.213; Vism 382; DhA I.340; PvA 75. Puṭa {Puta} [etym. unknown, prob. dialectical, as shown by N. of Pāṭaliputta, where putta=puṭa since unfamiliar in origin] orig. meaning "tube," container, hollow, pocket. - 1. a container, Pāli Text Society 1059 Pāli-English Dictionary usually made of leaves (cp. J IV.436; V.441; VI.236), to carry fruit or other viands, a pocket, basket: ucchu° basket for sugar J IV.363; paṇṇa° leaf-basket PvA 168; phala° fruit basket J IV.436=VI.236; phānita(ssa)° basket of molasses, sugar-basket S I.175 (KS.: jar); J IV.366; DhA IV.232; mālā° basket for garlands or flowers DhA III.212 (baddha made, lit. bound). In puṭabaddha-kummāsa VvA 308 perhaps meaning "cup." - 2. a bag or sack, usually referring to food carried for a journey, thus "knapsack" (or directly "provisions," taking the container for what it contains DA I.288 puts puṭaṃsa= pātheyya), in bhatta° bag with provisions J II.82 (with bandhati), 203; III.200; DA I.270. Also at J IV.375 "bag" (tamba-kipillaka°). See below °aṃsa & °bhatta. - 3. a tube, hollow, in nāsā° (nāsa°) nostril J VI.74; Vism 195, 263, 362; KhA 65; hattha° the hollow of the hand Miln 87; vatthi° bladder(-bag) Vism 264; sippi-puṭa oyster shell J V.197, 206. puṭaṃ karoti to form a hollow VbhA 34. - 4. box, container, see °bheda & °bhedana, in pāṭali-puṭa seed box for the P. flower. -aṃsa "bag-shoulder" (for "shoulder-bag," cp. aṃsapuṭa (assapuṭa) & Ger. rucksack=knapsack. Rightly expld by Bdhgh at DA I.288), a bag carrying provisions on journeys, hence "provision," in phrase puṭaṃsena with provisions (v. l. at all places puṭosena) D I.117; M III.80; A II.183; cp. Dialogues I.150; see also mutoḷī. -pāka something cooked in a bag (like a meal-pudding) Vism 500. -baddha kind of moccasins Vin I.186, see Vin. Texts II.15. Spelt puṭa-bandha at Vism 251=VbhA 234. -bhatta "bag-food," viaticum, provisions for journey J II.423; KhA 46. -bheda the breaking of the container (i. e. seed boxes of the Sirīsa plant) VvA 344 (in vatthu where Sirīsa refers to Pāṭaliputta, cp. Vv 8452, 53). -bhedana breaking of the (seed-) boxes of the Pāṭali plant, referring primarily to the N. of Pāṭali-putta, where putta represents a secondary Pālisation of Sk. °putra which again represents P. (or Non-Aryan) puṭa (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 238 & 292). Through popular etym. a wrong conception of the expression arose, which took puṭa in the sense of "wares, provisions, merchandise" (perhaps influenced by puṭaṃsa) and, based on C. on Ud 88 (bhaṇḍakānaṃ mocara-ṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti) gave rise to the (wrong) trsln Dial. II.92 "a centre for interchange of all kinds of wares." See also Miln trsln I.2; Buddh. Suttas XVI. - Vin I.229=D II.87=Ud 88. After the example of Pāṭaliputta applied to the city of Sāgala at Miln 1 (nānāpuṭa-bhedanaṃ S° nagaraṃ). Here clearly meant for "merchandise." - Rh. D. in a note on puṭabhedana gives expln "a town at the confluence or bend of a river" (cp. Jaina Sūtras 2, 451). Puṭaka {Putaka} (nt.) [fr. puṭa] a bag, pocket, knapsack or basket J II.83 (°bhatta=provisions); DA I.263; DhA II.82 (v. l. piṭaka & kutaka); IV.132 (pockets of a serpent's hood). Cp. bhatta. Puṭṭha1 {Puttha} [pp. of puṣ (see poseti), Vedic puṣṭa] nourished, fed, strengthened, brought up Sn 831; J III.467. Puṭṭha2 {Puttha} [pp. of pucchati, Vedic pṛsṭa] asked S II.36; Sn 84, 122, 510 sq., 1036; DhA IV.132; PvA 10 (after acc.) 68, 72 with samāno A I.197. See also pucchita. Puṭṭha3 {Puttha} see phuṭṭha [=Sk. spṛṣṭa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 311]. Puṭṭhatta {Putthatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. puṭṭha1] the fact of being fed or brought up by J II.405 (vaḍḍhakinā °ā). Puṭṭhavant [fr. puṭṭha3, cp. same form in Prk. AMg. puṭṭhavaṃ=Sk. spṛṣṭavān: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 569] one who has touched or come in direct contact with ThA 284. {Putthavant} Pāli Text Society 1060 Pāli-English Dictionary Puṇḍarīka {Pundarika} (nt.) [Non-Aryan (?). Cp. Vedic puṇḍarīka] the white lotus D I.75=A III.26 (in sequence uppala, padụma, p.); D II.4 (Sikhī puṇḍarīkassa mūle abhisambuddho); M III.93; S I.138, 204=J III.309; A I.145 (uppala paduma p.); II.86 sq. (samaṇa° adj.); Sn 547; J V.45, 215 (°ttac'angī=ratta-paduma-patta-vaṇṇasarīrā); Vv 4412 (=seta-kamala VvA 191); Pv II.122; III.33 (pokkharaṇī bahu °ā); Pug 63; DA I.219, 284 (sankho elo uppalo puṇḍarīko ti cattāro nidhayo). N. of a hell S I.152; Sn p. 126 (here in sq. Uppalaka, Puṇḍ°, Paduma). Puṇḍarīkinī {Pundarikini} (f.) [adj. pundarīkin, of puṇḍarīka] a pool or pond of white lotuses D I.75≈(M III.93; S I.138). Puṇṇa {Punna} [pp. of pṛ, Vedic pṛṇāti, Pass. pūryate, *pelē to fill; cp. Sk. prāṇa & pūrṇa=Av. pərəna; Lith. pílnas; Lat. plēnus; Goth fulls=E. full=Ger voll] full, seldom by itself (only passage so far pannarase puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā D I.47=Sn p. 139). nor -° (only Sn 835 muttakarīsa°), usually in cpds., and there mostly restricted to phrases relating to the full moon. -ghaṭa a full pitcher (for feeding the bhikkhus, as offering on festive days, cp. J.P.T.S. 1884) DhA I.147; KhA 118 (v. l. suvaṇṇaghaṭa); DA I.140 (°paṭimaṇḍita ghara). -canda the full moon J I.149, 267; V.215. -patta a full bowl (as gift, °ṃ deti to give an ample gift) J III.535. baddha at Miln 191 should be read as °bhadda. -bala at DA I.110 read puñña-bala. -bhadda worshipper of Puṇṇabhadda, perhaps a Yakkha (father of the Yakkha Harikesa) Nd1 92 (Vāsuvadeva, Baladeva, P. and Maṇibhadda, cp. p. 89); Miln 191 (pisācā maṇibhaddā p.). -mā the full moon (night) D I.47 (komudiyā cātumāsiniyā puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyā, cp. DA I.140); Sn p. 139 (similar); M III.21; J V.215 (dve p-māyo); Vism 292 (puṇṇa-m-uposatha=puṇṇamāuposatha), 418 (Phagguṇa-puṇṇama-divase); VvA 66 (āsāḷhi p.); PvA 137 (id.); DA I.140; DhA III.461 (komudi). -māsa=°mā only in loc. puṇṇamāse Vv 811 (=puṇṇa-māsiyaṃ sukka-pakkhe pannarasiyaṃ VvA 314; the similar pass. at VvA 321 reads, prob. by mistake, sukka-pakkhapāṭiyaṃ: see pāṭī); J V.215 (=puṇṇa candāya rattiyā C.). -māsī (f.; fr. °māsa)= mā J I.86 (Phagguṇi p.); VvA 314; cp. BSk. pūrṇamāsī AvŚ I.182. Puṇṇatā {Punnata} (f.) [abstr. to puṇṇa] fulness DA I.140 (māsa° full-moon). Puṇṇatta {Punnatta} (nt.) [abstr. ro puṇṇa] fulness SnA 502. Putolī {Putoli} see muṭolī. Putta {Putta} [Vedic putra, Idg. *putlo=Lat. pullus (*putslos) young of u, cp. Gr. pau=s, pai/s child, Lat. puer, pubes, Av. pupra, Lith. putýtis (young animal or bird), Cymr. wyr grandchild; also Sk. pota(ka) young animal and base pu- in pumaṃs, puṃs "man"] 1. a son S I.210; Sn 35, 38, 60, 557, 858; Dh 62, 84, 228, 345; J IV.309; Vism 645 (simile of 3 sons); PvA 25, 63, 73 sq.; DA I.157 (dāsaka°). Four kinds of sons are distinguished in the old Cy. viz. atraja p., khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika, or born of oneself, born on one's land, given to one, i. e. adopted, one living with one as a pupil. Thus at Nd1 247; Nd2 448; J I.135. Good and bad sons in regard to lineage are represented at J VI.380. - Metaph. "sons of the Buddha" S I.192= Th 1, 1237 (sabbe Bhagavato puttā); It 101 (me tumhe puttā orasā mukhato jātā dhammajā), J III.211. - The parable of a woman eating her sons is given as a punishment in the Peta condition at Pv I.6 (& 7). - pl. puttāni Pv I.63. - aputta-bhāvaṃ karoti to disinherit formally J V.468. - 2. (in general) child, descendant, sometimes pleonastic like E. °man, °son in names: see putta-dāra; so esp. in later literature, like ludda° hunter's son=hunter J II.154; ayya°=ayya, i. e. gentleman, lord J V.94; PvA 66. See also rāja°. - Of a girl Th 2, 464. - mātucchā° & mātula° Pāli Text Society 1061 Pāli-English Dictionary cousin (from mother's side), pitucchā° id (fr. father's side). On putta in N. Pāṭali° see puṭa. - f. puttī see rāja°. -jīva N. of a tree: Putranjiva Roxburghii J VI.530. -dāra child & wife (i. e. wife & children, family) D III.66, 189, 192; S I.92; A II.67; Pv IV.348 (sa° together with his family); J III.467 (kiṃ °ena what shall I do with a family?); V.478. They are hindrances to the development of spiritual life: see Nd2 under āsiṃsanti & palibodha. -phala a son as fruit (of the womb) J V.330. -maṃsa the flesh of one's children (sons) a metaphor probably distorted fr. pūta° rotten flesh. The metaphor is often alluded to in the kasiṇa-kammaṭṭhāna, and usually coupled with the akkha-bbhañjana (& vaṇapaticchādana)-simile, e. g. Vism 32, 45; DhA I.375; SnA 58, 342. Besides at S II.98 (in full); Th 1, 445 (°ūpamā); 2, 221. -mata a woman whose sons (children) are dead M I.524. Puttaka {Puttaka} [fr. putta] 1. a little son S I.209, 210. - 2. a little child Th 2, 462 (of a girl). - 3. a young bird (=potaka) J II.154. Puttatta {Puttatta} (nt.) [fr. putta] sonship DhA I.89. Puttavant {Puttavant} (adj.) [fr. putta] having sons S IV.249. Trenckner, Notes 6216 gives a f. *puttapatī for puttavatī, but without ref. Puttimant {Puttimant} (adj.) [fr. *puttamant] having sons S I.6; Sn 33. Puttiya {Puttiya} (-°) in Sakya° is compound Sakyaputta+iya "belonging to the son of the Sakyas" (i. e. to the Sakya prince) PvA 43. - asakyaputtiya dhamma Vin II.297. Puthavī & Puthuvī {Puthavi} {Puthuvi} (f.) [doublets of paṭhavī] the earth; as puthavi at S I.186; J I.14 (v. l. puthuvi); IV.233, & in cpds. °nābhi the navel of the earth (of the bodhimaṇḍa, the Buddha's seat under the holy fig tree) J IV.232; °maṇḍala the round of the earth Sn 990. - As puthuvī at A II.21, and in cpd. puthuvi-agga SnA 353. Puthu {Puthu} (adj.) [both Vedic pṛthak & pṛthu, lit. spread out, far & wide, flat, of Idg. *plēt broad, Sk. prath to expand, pṛthaḥ palm of hand Av. frapah breadth, cp. Gr. platu/s broad, pla/tanos plane tree, Lith. platùs broad, Lat. planta sole of foot, Ohg. flado pancake, Ags. flet ground, E. flat] 1. (=pṛthak) separated, individual, adv. separated, individual, adv. separately, each (also given as puthag eva Kacc. 29) S I.75 (puthu attā individual self); Th 1, 86; J IV.346 (=visuṃ visuṃ C.); Miln 4. See further under cpds. - 2. (=pṛthu). The forms (pl.) are both puthu & puthū, both as adj. & n.; puthū more freq. found in metre. - numerous, various, several, more, many, most D I.185 (puthu saððaggā; opp. ekaṃ); S I.181 (puthū), 207 (id.); Sn 769 (puthū kāme=bahū Nd1 11); 1043, 1044 (puthū= bahukā Nd2 449b); Th 2, 344 (puthu=puthu sattā ThA 241); J VI.205 (puthū). nt. adv. puthu & puthuṃ greatly, much, in many ways Sn 580 (=aneka-ppakāraṃ SnA 460); Vv 624 (=mahantaṃ VvA 258). -gumba experienced in many crafts J VI.448 (=aneka-sippa-ññu C.). -jja (puthu 1, but see remarks on puthujjana) common, ordinary Sn 897, 911 (=puthujjanehi janita Nd1 308). -titthakara a common sectarian D I.116 (thus to puthu 1, but DA I.287= bahū t.) -ddisā (puthu 1) each separate quarter "all the diverse quarters" S I.234. -paðða (adj.) of wide wisdom (p. 2) A I.130; II.67 (v. l. hāsa°). -paððatā wide wisdom A I.45. -pāṇiya ordinary (p. 1) mode of shampooing with the hand Vin II.106 (Bdhgh on p. 316 explns pudhu-pāṇikan ti hattha parikammaṃ vuccati "manual performance," thus not identical with pāṇikā on p. 151). -bhūta (p. 2) widely spread S II.107; but cp. BSk pṛṭhag bhavati to be peculiar to Divy 58, 100. -mati wide understanding S I.236. -loma "flat fin," N of Pāli Text Society 1062 Pāli-English Dictionary a fish "the finny carp" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Vv 4411 (=dibba-maccha VvA 191); Th 2, 508 (=so-called fish ThA 292); J IV.466. -vacana "speaking in many (bad) ways," or "people of various speech" (so expld Nd1 397) Sn 932 (prob. better "speaking ordinary talk"=puthu 1). -sattā (pl.)=puthujjanā, common people, the masses S I.44; Pv III.73. Puthuka {Puthuka} [fr. puthu, cp. (late) Vedic pṛthuka "flat corn," also "young of an animal," with which cp. perhaps Gr. parqe/nos: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under virgo] rice in the ear DhA I.98 (°agga as first gift of the field). Puthujjana {Puthujjana} [*prthag-jana, thus puthu 1+jana, but from the point of Pali identical in form and meaning with puthu 2, as shown by use of puthu in similar cpds. and by C. explns. One may even say that puthu 1=pṛthak is not felt at all in the P. word. Trenckner (Notes 76) already hinted at this by saying "puthujjana, partly confounded with puthu"; a connection which also underlies its expln as "one-of-the-many-folk" at Kvu trsln 807 & 2913. It is felt to belong to puthu 2 in the same sense as Ger. "die breite Masse," or Gr. oi( polloi/. The expln at Nd1 308=328 is puthu-nānā-janā. A long and detailed etym.-speculation expln of the term is found at DA I.59, trsld at Dhs trsln 258. The BSk. form is pṛthagjana Divy 133 etc.] ), 151 (id.); III.46, 108, 162; IV.157, 196, 201 (assutavā), 206 sq.; V.362 (opp. to sotāpanna); A I.27, 147 (maraṇa-dhammin), 178, 267; II.129, 163; III.54; IV.68, 97, 157, 372; Sn 351, 455, 706, 816, 859; Dh 59, 272; Vv 826 (=anariya VvA 321,+anavabodha); Nd1 146, 248; Ps I.61 sq., 143, 156; II.27; Dhs 1003 (cp. DhsA 248 sq.); Vism 311 (=anariya); VbhA 133 (avijj'ābhikhūta, bhava-taṇh'ābhibhūta), 186 (ummat- taka, opposed to upabrūhita-ðāṇapurisa, exemplifying upādāna and kamma); DhA I.5 (opp. ariyasāvaka), 445; Sdhp 363. kalyāṇaka (cp. BSk. pṛthagjana-kalyāṇaka Divy 419, 429) an ordinary man striving after his spiritual good Nd1 477; Ps I.176; II.190, 193. -bhikkhu a bh. of the common sort DA I.269; VbhA 383. -sukha ordinary happiness M I.454. Puthujjanatā {Puthujjanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. puthujjana] common-place character S I.187=Th 1, 1217. Puthujjanika {Puthujjanika} (adj.) [fr. puthujjana] common, ordinary J I.360 (of iddhi). Puthutta (Puthatta) {Puthutta} {Puthatta}(nt.) [fr. puthu, cp. Sk. *pṛthutva; not with Kern, Toev. s. v.=Sk. pṛthaktva, speciality, peculiarity] being at variance, diversity S II.77 (opp. ekatta; v. l. SS puthatta). At A IV.97 we have to read puth'attānaṃ for puthuttānaṃ which has nothing to do with puthutta, but is puthu+attānaṃ as borne out by v. l. puthujj'attānaṃ, and by AA: puthu nānākāraṇehi attānaṃ hanti. Puthula {Puthula} (adj.) [fr. puthu] broad, large, flat J III.16 (°sīsa flat-headed); VI.171 (°antaraṃsa flat-chested); Miln 121 (of a river); VvA 301 (°gambhīra). - abl. puthulato (as adv.) across DhA I.396. Puthuso {Puthuso} (adv.) [abl. of puthu] broadly, i. e. diversely, at variance Sn 891, 892 (=puthudiṭṭhi-gata Nd1 301). Pudava {Pudava} (Poddava?) see gāma° (Vin II.105 with Bdhgh note on p. 315). Pāli Text Society 1063 Pāli-English Dictionary Puna {Puna} (indecl.) [cp. Vedic punar, punaḥ, to base *pŭ (related to *apo: see apa), as in puccha tail, Lat. puppis, poop, Gr. pu/matos the last; orig. meaning "behind"] again. There are several forms of this adv., but puna has to be considered as the orig. Pali form. The form puno is doubtful; if authentic, a Sanskritisation; only found at ThA 71 (Ap. v. 38; v. l. puna) & 72 (Ap. v. 41, v. l. puna). The sandhi r is preserved only in metre and in compn.. That it is out of fashion even in metre is shown by a form punā where ā is the regular metrical lengthening instead of ar (J III.437: na hi dāni punā atthi; v. l. puna). Besides this the r is apparent in the doubling of the first consonants of cpds. (punappunaṃ, punabbhava); it is quite lost in the enclitic form pana. - We find r in punar āgami Sn 339; punar āgato J I.403 (=puna āgato J I.403 (=puna āgato, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto C.); in cpds.: punar-abhiseka see J.P.T.S. 1885, 49; a-punar-āvattitā the fact of not turning back Miln 276 (cp. Prk. apuṇar-avatti Pischel, § 343). Otherwise r stands on the same level as other sandhi (euphonic) consonants (like m. & d., see below), as in puna-r-eva Dh 338; Pv II.87; II.116. We have m in puna-m-upāgamuṃ Sn 306; puna by itself is rarely found, it is usually combd with other emphatic part, like eva and api. The meaning is "again," but in enclitic function (puna still found Sn 677, 876, otherwise pana); it represents "however, but, now" (cp. same relation in Ger. abermals: aber), similar to the development in Prk. puṇo vi & puṇar avi "again": puna "now" (Pischel Gr. § 342). - puna by itself at SnA 597; PvA 3, 45; Mhvs 14, 12. doubled as punappunaṃ S I.174; Th 1, 531, 532; Sn 728, 1051; Dh 117, 118, 325, 337; J V.208; SnA 107; PvA 45, 47; punappuna at DhA II.75; as puna-d-eva at D I.60, 142; Pv II.113 (v. l.); Vism 163; DhA II.76; puna-m-eva Pv II.113; puna pi once more J I.279; PvA 67, 74; puna-p-pi J V.208. The phrase puna c'aparaṃ "and again something else" stands on the same level as the phrase aparo pi (apare pi), with which one may compare the parallel expressions puna-divase: aparadivase, all of which show the close relation between pi, puna, apara, but we never find para in these connections. Trenckner's (& following him Oldenberg in Vin. and Hardy in A etc.) way of writing puna ca paraṃ (e. g. Miln 201, 388, 418 etc.) is to be corrected to puna c'aparaṃ, cp. punāpara Sn 1004; Cp III.61. -āgamana coming again, return S I.22 (a°). -āvāsa rebirth S I.200. -divase on the following day J I.278; PvA 19, 38. -nivattati to turn back again S I.177. -bbhava renewed existence, new birth D II.15; S I.133; It 62; S IV.201 (āyati°); Sn 162, 273, 502, 514, 733; Nd2 s. v.; Nett 28, 79 sq.; PvA 63, 200; cp. ponobhavika; a° no more rebirth S I.174, 208; Nd2 64; °ābhinibbatti birth in a new existence M I.294; S II.65; A I.223; Vin III.3; PvA 35. -vacana repetition SnA 487. -vāre (loc.) another time J V.21. Punāti {Punati} [cp. Vedic pavate, punāti, pū to cleanse, as in Lat. purus clean, purgo, Ohg. fowen to sift also Gr. pu_r (cp. P. pāvaka)=Ohg. fūir=E. fire, Armen. hur, lit. "cleansing," see also puñña] 1. to clean, cleanse VvA 19 (+visodheti, in def. of puñña). - 2. to sift J VI.108 (angāraṃ p.=attano sīse angāre p. okirati C.; so read with v. l. for phunati T.); DA I.268 (bhusaṃ pumanto viya like sifting the chaff, winnowing). Cp. puneti. Puneti {Puneti} [Caus. fr. puna? or=punāti?] to experience (over & over) again: in this meaning at It 1 sq. & Nd1 202= Nd2 337 (kilese na p. na pacceti etc.); perhaps also at Th 1, 533 (sattayugaṃ), although Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it=punāti and Mrs. Rh. D. translates "lifts to lustrous purity." Punnāga {Punnaga} [dial.?] a species of tree J I.9 (°puppha); VI.530; KhA 50 (aggacchinna°-phala), 53 (id.). Puppha1 {Puppha} (nt.) [Vedic puṣpa according to Grassmann for *puṣka fr. puṣ (?) see poseti] a flower Vin II.123; S I.204=J III.308; Sn 2, 5; Dh 47 sq.; 377; Vism 430; SnA 78 (paduma°); VvA 73; Pāli Text Society 1064 Pāli-English Dictionary PvA 127; Sdhp 550. - pupphāni (pl.) VbhA 255 (of 32 colours, in simile), 292 sq. (for Cetiyaworship). - adj. °puppha in ghana° thick with flowers DA I.87. - Cp. pokkharatā. -ābhikiṇṇa decked with flowers Vv 6429; Pv II.112 -ādhāna "a ledge (on a Tope) where offerings of flowers are laid down" (Geiger, Mhvs p. 355; cp. Mhvs trsl. p. 2022) Mhvs 30, 51, 56, 60; 33, 22 Reading uncertain. -āveḷā flower-garland VvA 125. -āsava wine made from flowers, flowerliquor J IV.117; KhA 26. -gandha odour of flowers Dh 54; Dhs 625. -cumbaṭaka a fl. cushion. chaḍḍaka a remover of (dead) flowers, a rubbish-remover, a low occupation, including cleaning of privies & bins etc. Vin IV.6; Th 1, 620; J V.449 (=vacca-ṭṭhāna-sodhaka C.); Miln 331; Vism 194 (in simile). Cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 89 and Miln trsl. II.211. -cchatta a parasol with flowers DhA I.110. -dāna offering of flowers VbhA 336. -dāma a wreath or garland of fls. J I.397; VvA 198. -dhara bearing flowers Pv II.124 (so read for T. °dada). -pañjara a cage (ornamented) with flowers J V.365. -paṭa a cloth (embroidered) with flowers J IV.283; DhA II.45. -palāsa a fl. heap DhA I.75. -bhāṇin "speaking flowers," i. e. speaking the truth Pug 29. mālā garland of fls. SnA 78. -muṭṭhi a handful of fl. Vism 432 (in simile). -rasa (wine-) juice made of fls., flower-liquor Vin I.246; taste of fls. Dhs 629. -rāsi a heap of fls. Dh 53. Puppha2 {Puppha} (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. puṣpa "les fleurs" in strī° the menses Am. Kośa 3, 4, 30, 233 and Mārk. Pur. 51, 42. Similarly phala is used in the sense of "menstruation": see BR s. v. phala 12] blood: see pupphaka & pupphavatī. With ref. to the menses at J V.331. Pupphaka {Pupphaka} (nt.) [fr. puppha2] blood J III.541 (v. l. pubbaka; C.=lohita); Miln 216 (tiṇa°roga, a disease, Kern. "hay-fever"). Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls the J passage with "vuil, uitwerpsel." Pupphati {Pupphati} [puṣp] to flower J I.76 (aor. °iṃsu); PvA 185 (=phalati). - pp. pupphita. Pupphavatī {Pupphavati} (f.) [fr. puppha2, but cp. Vedic puṣpavat flowering] a menstruous woman Miln 126. Pupphita {Pupphita} [pp. of pupphati] flowering, in blossom S I.131= Th 2, 230 (su°); Vv 354; J I.18; Miln 347; ThA 69 (Ap. v. 12); DhA I.280; II.250 (su°). Pupphin {Pupphin} (adj.) [fr. puppha1 cp. Vedic puṣpin] bearing flowers; in nīlapupphī (f.) N. of a plant ("with blue flowers") J VI.53. Pubba1 {Pubba} [Vedic pūya>*pūva>*puvva>pubba (Geiger, P.Gr. § 461); cp. pūyati to smell rotten, Lat. pūs=E. pus, Gr. pu/qw to rot, pu/on matter; Vedic pūti smelling foul; Goth. fūls=E. foul] pus, matter, corruption M I.57; III.90; S I.150; II.157; A I.34; J II.18; Miln 382; PvA 80. - In detail discussed (as one of the 32 ākāras) at Vism 261, 360; KhA 62; VbhA 244. - Often in combn pubba-lohita matter & blood, e. g. Sn p. 125; Sn 671; J V.71; DhA I.319; as food of the Petas Pv I.69; I.91 (lohita-pubba); I.118; II.26. pubba-vaṭṭi a lump of matter DhA III.117. Pubba2 {Pubba} (adj.) [Vedic pūrva, to Idg. *per, see pari & cp. Goth. fram=from; Gr. pro/mos Lord, frouwa=Ger. frau. See also Lat. prandium, provincia] previous, former, before. The adj. never occurs in abs. forms by itself (for which see pubbaka), it is found either as -° or °- or in cases as adv. The phrase pubbam antam anissita Sn 849 is poetical for pubbantam. - 1. (-°) having been before J III.200; na diṭṭha° not seen before Nd1 445; mātabhūta° formerly (been) his mother PvA 79; vuttha° (gāma) formerly inhabited DhA I.15; as adv. bhūtapubbaṃ before any Pāli Text Society 1065 Pāli-English Dictionary beings (existed) Vin I.342; DhA I.102 and passim (see bhūta). - 2. (neg.) apubba (nt.) what has not been before, something new VvA 117, 287. acc. as adv. in phrase apubbaṃ acarimaṃ not earlier, not after, i. e. simultaneously M III.65; Pug 13 (=apure apacchā, ekappahāren'evāti attho PugA 186). - 3. (cases adverbially) instr. pubbena in °āpara gradual M III.79; acc. pubbaṃ see 1, 2, with abl. as prep.= before SnA 549 (=purā); loc. pubbe in earlier times (also referring to previous births, cp. pure), in the past, before S IV.307; Sn 831, 949 (with pacchā & majjhe, i. e. future & present); Pv I.31; II.22; SnA 290, 385, 453; PvA 4, 10, 39, 40, 100. With abl. as prep.= before S II.104. In compn with °nivāsa see sep. An old acc. f. *pūrvīṃ (cp. Prk. puvviṃ Pischel, Gr. § 103) we find in Cpd. anupubbikathā (q. v.). The compar. pubbatara ("quite early") occurs abs. at S IV. 117 as nom. pl. "ancestors" (cp. Gr. oi( pro/teroi), as loc. adv. at S I.22. -angin in f. °angī (cāru°) at J V.4 & VI.481 read sabbangin. -aṇṇa "first grain," a name given to the 7 kinds of grain, as distinguished from aparaṇṇa, the 7 sorts of vegetables, with which it is usually combined; Vin III.151; IV.267; Nd1 248 (where the 7 are enumd); Nd2 314; J II.185; Miln 106; DA I.78, 270; DhA IV.81 etc. (see aparaṇṇa). See also bīja-bīja. -aṇha the former part of the day, forenoon, morning (as contrasted with majjhaṇha & sāyaṇha) D I.109, 226; A I.294; III.344; S I.76 (°samayaṃ); SnA 139 (id.); DhA III.98; PvA 61, 216. The spelling pubbanha M I.528 (cp. Trenckner, Notes 80). -anta (1) the East J I.98 (°ato aparantaṃ aparantato pubbantaṃ gacchati from E. to W. from W. to E.); V.471. - (2) the Past (opp. aparanta the Future) D I.12 sq.; S II.26; Nd1 212; Dhs 1004. pubbam antaṃ for pubbantaṃ is poetical at Sn 849. -°ānudiṭṭhi theory concerning the past or the beginning of things D I.13 (cp. DA I.103); M II.233; S III.45; Dhs 1320. -aḷha(ka) (āḷhaka) at Th 2, 395 is doubtful. T. reads bubbuḷaka, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "bubble of film"; ThA 259 explns by "ṭhita-jalapubbaḷha-sadisa." -ācariya (1) an ancient teacher, a scholar of previous times A I.132; II.70; It 110; Vism 523=VbhA 130; KhA 11, 64, 65. - (2) a former teacher SnA 318. -āciṇṇa (-vasena) by way of former practice, from habit SnA 413. āpara (1) what precedes and what follows, what comes first and what last (with ref. to the successive order of syllables and words in the text of the Scriptures) A III.201 (°kusala); Dh 352; Nett 3 (°ānusandhi); cp. BSk. pūrvāpareṇa vyākhyānaṃ karoti "expld in due order" AvŚ II.20. - (2) °rattaṃ "as in the former, so in the foll. night," i. e. without ceasing, continuous Th 1, 413. cp. pub baratt-āparattaṃ DhA IV.129. -āpariya former & future, first & last Ud 61 (°vivesa); -ābhoga previous reflection ThA 30. -ārāma "Eastern Park," N. of a locality east of Sāvatthi A III.344; Sn p. 139 (cp. Sn A 502). -āsava former intoxication Sn 913, cp. Nd1 331. uṭṭhāna getting up before (someone else) either applied to a servant getting up before the master, or to a wife rising before her husband VvA 71, 136. -uṭṭnāyin "getting up earlier" (with complementary Ep. pacchā-nipātin "lying down later"), see above D I.60; III.191; A III.37; IV.265 sq.; DA I.168. - abstr. °uṭṭhāyitā J III.406 (°ādīhi paðcahi kalyāṇa dhammehi samannāgatā patidevatā)=V.88; KhA 173. -uttara (1) preceding and following Kacc. 44. 47. - (2) "eastnorthern," i. e. north-eastern J V.38 (°kaṇṇa N.E. corner); VI.519 (id.). -kamma a former deed, a deed done in a former existence Cp. III.113. -kārin "doing before," i. e. looking after, obliging, doing a favour A I.87; Pug 26 (=paṭhamaṃ eva kāraka PugA 204) PvA 114. -kicca preiiminary function Vin V.127 (cattāro pubbakiccā); cp. Cpd. 53. -koṭṭhaka "Eastern Barn," Npl. A III.345. -(n)gama (1) going before, preceding A III.108 (okkamane p.); M III.71 sq. - (2) "allowing to go before"; controlled or directed by, giving precedence Dh 2 (mano° dhammā=tena paṭhama-gāminā hutvā samannāgatā DhA I.35); Nd2 318; Pug 15 (paððā° ariyamagga=paññaṃ pure-cārikaṃ katṿā PugA 194); Sdhp 547 (paððā°). Cp. BSk. pūrvangama Divy 333 ("obedient" Index). -carita former life SnA 382, 385. -ja born earlier, i. e. preceding in age PvA 57 (=jeṭṭhaka). -ðāti former relative PvA 24. -deva a former god, a god of old, pl. the ancient gods (viz. the Asuras) S I.224. -devatā an ancient deity A II.70; It 110 (v. l. °deva). nimitta "previous sign," a foregoing sign, prognostic, portent. forecast It 76 (the 5 signs of decay of a god); J I.11 (the 32 signs at the conception of a Buddha, given in detail on p. 51), 48; Pāli Text Society 1066 Pāli-English Dictionary Miln 298 (of prophetic dreams, cp. Cpd. p. 48); VbhA 407 (in dreams); DhA II.85. -pada the former, or antecedent, part (of a phrase) DhsA 164. -parikamma a former action SnA 284 (opp. to pacchā-parikamma). -purisa ancestor D I.93, 94. -peta a deceased spirit, a ghost (=peta) D I.8 (°kathā, cp. DA I.90 & Dial. I.14). pubbe pete is poetical at Pv I.41 for pubbapete. Cp. BSk. pūrvapreta AvŚ I.149 (see Index p. 230); Divy 47, 97. -bhāga "former part," i. e. previous PvA 133 (°cetanā opp. apara-bhāga-cetanā. SS omit bhāga). -bhāsin speaking obligingly (cp. pubbakārin) D I.116 (trsl. "not backward in conversation"), DA I.287 (bhāsanto va paṭhamataraṃ bhāsati etc.). -yoga "former connection, " i. e. connection with a former body or deed, former action (and its result) J V.476; VI.480; Miln 2 (pubbayogo ti tesaṃ pubbakammaṃ). Kern, Toev. s. v. remarks that it is frequent in BSk. as pūrvayoga (yoga=yuga; syn. with pūrvakalpa), e. g. Saddh. Puṇḍ. ch. VII.; MVastu II.287; III.175; and refers to Ind. Studien 16, 298; J.R.A.S. 1875, 5. -rattāparattaṃ the past and future time, the whole time, always A III.70; DhA IV.129. -vāsana an impression remaining in the mind from former actions Sn 1009; ThA 31 (Ap. v. 8). -videha Eastern Videha KhA 123, 176; SnA 443. -sadisa an old (former) friend DhA I.57 Pubbaka {Pubbaka} (adj.) [fr. pubba2] 1. former, ancient, living in former times D I.104 (isayo), 238 (id.); Sn 284 (id.); S II.105; IV.307 (ācariya-pācariyā); Th 1, 947. - 2. (-°; cp. pubba2 1) having formerly been, previous J I.182 (suvaṇṇakāra° bhikkhu), cp. BSk. °pūrvaka in same use at AvŚ I.259, 296, 322. - 3. (-°) accompanied or preceded by ThA 74 (guṇ'ābhitthavana° udāna); PvA 122 (puññānumodana° maggācikkhana); cp. āśvāsana-pūrvaka Jtm 210. Pubbāpeti {Pubbapeti} [Denom. fr. pubba2] occurs only in one phrase (gattāni pubbāpayamāno) at M I.161 & A III.345≈402 in meaning "drying again"; at both A pass. the vv. ll. (glosses) are "sukkhāpayamāno" and "pubba-sadisāni kurumāno"; to the M. pass. cp. Trenckner's notes on p. 543, with the BB expln of the word (=pubbabhāvaṃ gamayamāno), also Neumann, Majjh. trsln I.260. The similar passage at S I.8, 10 has "gattāni sukkhāpayamāno" as T. reading and "pubbāpayamāno" as v. l. BB. Pubbe {Pubbe} (°-) [loc. of pubba2, see pubba2 3] in cpds.: "in a former existence": °kata (nt.) deeds done in a past life M II.217=A I.173 (°hetu); J V.228 (°vādin fatalist); Nett 29 (°punnata). °nivāsa [cp. BSk. pūrve-nivāsasaṃprayuktaṃ MVastu III.224, otherwise as pūrvanivāsa Divy 619] abode in a former life, one's former state of existence D II.1, 2; III.31 sq., 50 sq., 108 sq, 230, 281; M I.278; II.21; III.12; S I.167; A I.164 sq.; It 100; Sn 647; Dh 423; Pug 61; Vism 411 (remembered by 6 classes of individuals); ThA 74, 197. - pubbe-nivās'ānussati (-ðāṇa) (knowledge of) remembrance of one's former state of existence, one of the faculties of an Arahant (cp. A I.164 sq., and Cpd. 64) D III.110, 220; M I.35, 182, 248, 278, 496; Dhs 1367; Nett 28, 103; Vism 433; VbhA 373 sq., 401, 422; Tikp. 321. - See also under nivāsa and cp. Vism ch. XIII, pp. 410 sq. Pumati {Pumati} [onomat. *pu to blow, cp. Gr. fu=sa blowing, bubble, fusa/w blow, Lat. pustula=pustule, Sk. *pupphusa=P. papphasa lung, phutkaroti blow, etc., see Uhlenbeck Ai. Wtb. s. v. pupphusa] to blow, aor. pumi J I.171; ger. pumitvā J I.172. See J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 (?). Puman {Puman} (Pumā) [see puṃs] a male, a man, nom sg. pumo D n.273; Cp. II.62; instr. pumunā J VI.550. nom. pl. pumā D III.85 (itthi-pumā men & women; v. l. K. °purisā); J III.459; acc. sg. pumaṃ J V.154 (gata, cp. purisantara-gata). - On decl. cp. Müller, P.Gr. p. 79; Greiger, P.Gr. § 935. Pāli Text Society 1067 Pāli-English Dictionary *Pura {Pura} [on etym. see purā, purāṇa, pure] base of adv. & prep. denoting "before"; abl. purato (adv. & prep.) in front of (with gen.), before (only local) Vin I.179; II.32; D II.14 (mātu); S I.137; Pv I.111, 113 (opp. pacchā); II.86 (janādhipassa); DA I.152; PvA 5 (purisassa), 22, 39 (tassa). Often repeated (distributively) purato purato each time in front, or in front of each, or continuously in front Vin II.213; Vism 18; cp. pacchato pacchato. - Otherwise *pura occurs only in foll. der.: (1) adverbial: *puraḥ in purakkharoti, purekkhāra, purohita; purā, pure, puratthaṃ, puratthato. - (2) adjectival: purāṇa, puratthima, purima. Pura {Pura} (nt.) [Vedic pur. f., later Sk. puraṃ nt. & purī f.] 1. a town, fortress, city Vin I.8=M I.171 (Kāsinaṃ puraṃ); J I.196, 215; Sn 976, 991, 1012 (°uttama),1013; J VI.276 (=nagara C); Mhvs 14, 29. -avapure below the fortress M I.68. -devapura city of the Gods S IV.202; Vv 6430 (=Sudassana-mahā-nagara VvA 285). See also purindada. - 2. dwelling, house or (divided) part of a house (=antepura), a meaning restricted to the Jātakas, e. g. V.65 (=nivesana C.); VI.251, 492 (=antepura). Cp. thīpura lady's room, harem, also "lady" J V.296, and antepura. - 3. the body [cp. Sk. pura body as given by Halāyudha 2, 355, see Aufrecht p. 273] Th 1, 279 1150 (so read for pūra, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. & under sarīradeha). - Cp. porin. Purakkhata {Purakkhata} [pp. of purakkharoti] honoured, esteemed, preferred D I.50; M I.85; S I.192, 200; Sn 199, 421, 1015; Nd1 154; Dh 343 (=parivārita DhA IV.49); J II.48 (°parivārita); Pv III.71 (=payirupāsita PvA 205); DA I.152 (=purato nisinna); ThA 170. Cp. purekkhata. Purakkharoti {Purakkharoti} [fr. puraḥ, cp. Ved. puras-karoti, see pure] to put in front, to revere, follow, honour; only in foll. sporadic forms: ppr. purakkharāna holding before oneself, i. e. looking at S III.9 sq.; aor. 3rd pl. purakkharuṃ Miln 22; ger. purakkhatvā M I.28; Sn 969; Nd1 491; J V.45 (=purato katvā C.); PvA 21, 141. - purakkhata pp. (q. v.). See also purekkhāra. Puratthaṃ {Purattham} (adv.) [for Vedic purastāt, fr. puraḥ, see *pura] 1. before S I.141 (na pacchā na puratthaṃ=no after, no before). - 2. east D I.50 (°ābhimukha looking eastward.) Puratthato {Puratthato} (adv.) [fr. puratthaṃ, cp. BSk. purastataḥ MVastu II.198] in front, coram Sn 416 (sic, v. l. BB purakkhato); J VI.242. Puratthima {Puratthima} (adj.) [fr. *pura, cp. Prk. (AMg.) puratthima, acc. to Pischel, Gr. § 602 a der. fr. purastāt (=P. puratthaṃ) as *purastima, like *pratyastima (=paccatthima) fr. *pratyastaṃ] eastern D I.153; S I.144; J I.71 (°ābhimukha: Gotama facing E. under the Bo tree). Purā {Pura} (indecl.) [Vedic purā; to Idg. *per, cp. Goth. faúr= Ags. for=E. (be-) fore; also Lat. prae=Gr. parai/=Sk. pare] prep. c. abl. "before" (only temporal) Vin IV.17 (purāruṇā=purā aruṇā before dawn); Sn 849 (purā bhedā before dissolution (of the body), after which the Suttanta is named Purābhedasutta, cp. Nd1 210 sq.; expld by sarīra-bhedā pubbaṃ at SnA 549). Purāṇa {Purana} (adj.) [Venic purāṇa, fr. *per, cp. Sk. parut in former years, Gr. pe/rusi=Lith. pernai, Goth. fairneis, Ohg. firni=Ger. firn (last year's snow), forn formerly, ferro far] 1. ancient, past Sn 312, 944 (=Nd1 428 atītaṃ, opp. nava=paccuppannaṃ); Dh 156 (=pubbe katāni C.); with ref. to former births or previous existences: p. kammaṃ S II.64=Nd1 437=Nd2 680 Q. 2; puññaṃ S I.92. - 2. old (of age), worn out, used (opp. nava recent) D I.224 (bandhanaṃ, opp. Pāli Text Society 1068 Pāli-English Dictionary navaṃ); Vin II.123 (udakaṃ p.°ṃ stale water); S II.106 (magga); Sn 1 (tacaṃ); J II.114 (f. purāṇī, of an old bow string, applied jokingly to a former wife); IV.201 (°paṇṇa old leaf, opp. nava); V.202 (a° not old, of years); VI.45 (apurāṇaṃ adv. recently); VbhA 363 (udaka stale water). - 3. former, late, old in cpds. as °dutiyikā the former wife (of a bhikkhu) Vin I.18, 96; IV.263; S I.200; Ud 5; J I.210; °rājorodhā former lady of the harem Vin IV.261; °sālohita former bloodrelation Sn p. 91; Ud 7; DhA II.210. Cp. porāṇa. Purātana {Puratana} (adj.) [fr. purā, cp. sanātana in formation] belonging to the past, former, old Nett A 194. Purindada {Purindada} [distorted fr. Vedic puraṃ-dara, pura+dṛ to break, see darī, thus "breaker of fortresses," Ep. of Indra (& Agni). The P. Commentator (VvA 171) of course takes it popularly as "pure dānaṃ dadātī ti Purindado ti vuccati," thus pure+dā; see also Trenckner, Notes 596; Geiger, P.Gr. § 443] "townbreaker," a name of Sakka (Indra) D II.260; S I.230; Vv 374, 622; PvA 247. Purima {Purima} (adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. *pura, cp. Sk. purima] preceding, former, earlier, before (opp. pacchima) D I.179; Sn 773, 791, 1011; Nd1 91; J I.110; SnA 149 (°dhura); PvA 1, 26. In sequence p. majjhima pacchima; past, present, future (or first, second, last) D I.239 sq.; DA I.45 sq. and passim. - purimatara =purima J I.345 (°divase the day before). attabhāva a former existence VvA 78; PvA 83, 103, 119. -jāti a previous birth PvA 45, 62, 79, 90. Purimaka {Purimaka} (adj.) [fr. purima] previous, first Vin II.167 (opp. pacchimaka). f. °ika Vin I.153. Purisa {Purisa} [according to Geiger, Gr. § 303 the base is *pūrṣa, from which the Vedic form puruṣa, and the Prk.-P. form purisa. The further contraction *pussa *possa yielded posa (q. v.). From the Prk. form puliśa (Māgadhī) we get pulla] man (as representative of the male sex, contrasted to itthi woman, e. g. at A III.209; IV.197; J I.90; V.72; PvA 51). Definitions of the C. are "puriso nāma manussa-puriso na yakkho na peto etc." (i. e. man kat) e)coxh/n) Vin IV.269 (the same expln for purisa-puggala at Vin IV.214); "seṭṭh'aṭṭhena puri setī ti puriso ti satto vuccati" VvA 42 - 1. man D I.61 (p. kassaka "free man"); II.13; S I.225; A I.28, 126; II.115; III.156; Sn 102, 112, 316, 740, 806 and passim; Dh 117, 152, 248; Nd1 124; PvA 3, 4, 165, 187; VvA 13 (majjhima°, paṭhama°, as t.t. g.?). uttama° S II.278; III.61, 166; IV.380; It 97; mahā° S V.158; A II.35; III.223; IV.229 (see also under mahā); sappurisa (q. v.). Var. epithets of the Buddha e. g. at S. I.28 sq. - Kāpurisa a contemptible man; kimpurisa a wild man of the woods ("whatever man"), f. kimpurisī J V.215. -purisa as "a man, some one, somebody" as character or hero in var. similes, e. g. angārakāsuyaṃ khipanaka° Vism 489; asucimhi patita Vism 465; āgantuka° VbhA 23; dubbala Vism 533; papāte patanto VbhA 23 (cannot be a help to others; similarly with patita at VbhA 170=Vism 559); bhikkhusanghaṃ disvā Vism 333; maṇḍapa-lagga Vism 339 sq.; lakuṇṭaka-pāda & dīghapāda VbhA 26; cp. the foll.: of a man pleasing the king VbhA 442 sq.; a man wishing to perform a long journey in one day Vism 244; a man breathing when exhausted Vism 274. Frequently elsewhere. - 2. an attendant, servant, waiter Vin II.297; D I.60 (dāsa+), 72 (id.); J I.385 (dāsa°); VI.462. Cp. porisa, posa. -atthika one who seeks a servant Vin II.297. -anta= purisādhama Sn 664 (anta=Sk. antya; Sn A 479 explns by antimapurisa). antaragatā touched by a man (lit. gone in by . . .), a woman who has sexual intercourse, a woman in intercourse with a man D I.166 (cp. Dial. I.228); M I.77; A I.295; II.206; Vin IV.322; Pug 55 (=he does not accept food, lest their intercourse should be broken: rati antarāyo hoti Pāli Text Society 1069 Pāli-English Dictionary PugA 231); DA I.79 (=itthi, as opp. to kumārikā). Cp. pumaṃ gata, J V.154. -allu (& ālu) N. of certain monstrous beings, living in the wilderness J V.416 (=vaḷavā-mukhayakkhinī, a y. with the face of a mare), 418; VI.537 (°ālu=vaḷavā-m.-pekkhī C.). -ājaðða "a noble steed of a man," a thorough-bred or remarkable man S III.91; A V.325 sq., Sn 544; Dh 193; as -ājāneyya at DhA I.310; -ājāniya at A I.290; II.115; IV.397 sq.; V.324. -āda a bad man ("man-eater") a wild man, cannibal J V.25 (cp. puruṣāda Jtm 3141); °ādaka J V.30. -ādhama a wicked man Dh 78; J V.268. indriya male faculty, masculinity S V.204; A IV.57; Dhs 634, 715, 839, 972; Vism 447, 492. uttama "the highest of men," an excellent man A V.16, 325 sq.; Sn 544; Dh 78; DhA II.188. usabha (purisusabha) "a bull of a man," a very strong man Vin III.39. -kathā talk about men D I.8. -kāra manliness D I.53 (cp. DA I.161); Miln 96. -thāma manly strength D I.53; S II.28; A II.118; IV.190. -dammasārathi guide of men who have to be restrained, Ep. of the Buddha [cp. BSk. puruṣa-damyasārathi Divy 54 and passim] S II.69; A I.168, 207; II.56, 112, 147; Sn p. 103 (=vicitrehi vinayan'ûpāyehi purisadamme sāretī ti SnA 443); It 79; Pug 57; Vism 207; ThA 178. dosā (pl.) faults or defects in a man; eight are discussed in detail at A IV.190 sq.; Ps I.130; eighteen at J VI.542, 548. -dhorayha a human beast of burden S I.29. -parakkama manly energy D I.53; S II.28. -puggala a man, a human character D III.5, 227 (eight); S I.220 (8); II.69, 82, 206; IV.272 sq.= It 88 (8) (expld at Vism 219); A I.32, 130, 173, 189; II.34, 56; III.36, 349; IV.407 (8); V.139, 183 (8), 330 (8); Vin IV.212 sq. (=male); VbhA 497; -bhava state of being a man, manhood, virility J III.124; Dhs 634, 415, 839; PvA 63. -bhūmi man's stage, as "eight stages of a prophet's existence" (Dial. I.72) at D I.54, in detail at DA I.162, 163. -medha mansacrifice, human sacrifice S I.76; A II.42; IV.151; It 21; Sn 303. -yugāni (pl.) (4) pairs of men S IV.272 sq.; A I.208; II.34, 56; III.36; IV.407; V.330; D III.5, 227; It 88; in verse Vv 4421; expld Vism 219 (see under yuga). -lakkhaṇa (lucky) marks on a man D I.9. -linga (see also pullinga) a man's characteristic, membrum virile Vin III.35; Dhs 634, 715, 839; Tikp 50; Vism 184. -viriya manly vigour S II.28. -vyañjana the membrum virile (=°linga) Vin II.269. Purisaka {Purisaka} (n.-adj.) [fr. purisa] 1. a (little) man, only in °tiṇa doll effigy made of grass (straw), scarecrow Miln 352; Vism 462; DhsA 111. - 2. (adj.) having a man, f. °ikā in eka° (a woman) having intercourse with only one man J I.290. Purisatta {Purisatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa] manhood, virility Dhs 634, 715, 839. Purisattana {Purisattana} (nt.) [=purisatta, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7037] manhood Miln 171. Pure {Pure} (indecl.) [is the genuine representative (with Māgadhī e) of Vedic puraḥ, which also appears as *puro in purohita, as *pura in purakkharoti. It belongs to base Idg. *per (cp. pari), as in Cr. pa/ros before, earlier, pre/sbus "preceding in life," i. e. older; Ohg. first] before (both local & temporal), thus either "before, in front" or "before, formerly, earlier." In both meanings the opp. is pacchā-(a) local S I.176 (pure hoti to lead); J II.153 (opp. pacchima) - (b) temporal S I.200; Sn 289, 311, 541, 645, 773 (=atītaṃ Nd1 33; opp. pacchā); Dh 348 (opp. pacchato); J I.50 (with abl. pure puṇṇamāya). Often meaning "in a former life," e. g. Vv 348, 3413; Pv I.21 (=pubbe atītajātiyaṃ PvA 10); II.32 (cp. purima); II.42; II.74 (=atītabhāve PvA 101); II.913. - apurQ apacchā neither before nor after, i. e. simultaneously PugA 186 (see apubbaṃ)Q - puretaraṃ (adv.) first, ahead, before any one else DhA I.13, 40. - (c) modal, meaning "lest" DA I.4; cp. purā in same sense Jtm. 28. -cārika going before, guiding, leading, only in phrase °n katvā putting before everything else, taking as a guide or ideal J I.176 (mettā-bhāvanaṃ); III.45 (id.), 180 (khantiñ ca mettañ ca); VI.127 (Indaṃ); PugA 194 (paññaṃ). -java [cp. BSk. purojava attendant Divy 211, 214, 379; also Vedic puroyāva preceding] preceding, preceded Pāli Text Society 1070 Pāli-English Dictionary by, controlled by (=pubbangama) S I.33 (sammādiṭṭhi°); Sn 1107 (dhamma-takka°, cp. Nd2 318). -jāta happening before, as logical category (°paccaya) "antecedence"; Vism 537 (elevenfold)= Tikp. 17; freq. in Dukp. & Tikp. (as ārammaṇa° & vatthu°), cp. VbhA 403 (°ārammaṇa & °vatthuka). -dvāra front door J II.153. -bhatta the early meal, morning meal, breakfast [cp. BSk. purobhaktakā Divy 307] VvA 120; PvA 109; °ṃ in the morning VvA 51; PvA 78; °kicca duties after the morning meal DA I.45 sq.; SnA 131 sq. -bhava "being in front," i. e. superior DA I.75 (in exegesis of porī). -samaṇa one who wanders ahead of someone else Vin II.32 (opp. pacchā°). Purekkhata {Purekkhata} =purakkhata Sn 849, 859, (a°); Nd1 73, 214. Purekkharoti {Purekkharoti} [for purakkharoti, pure=Sk. puraḥ] to honour etc. Sn 794=803; ppr. purekkharāna Sn 844, 910. Purekkhāra [for purakkhāra, puraḥ+kṛ, see pure] deference, devotion, honour; usually -° (adj.) devoted to, honouring D I.115; Vin III.130; IV.2, 277; Nd1 73, 214; Dh 73 (=parivāra DhA II.77); Vv 3414 (attha°= hitesin VvA 152); VbhA 466 (°mada); VvA 72. {Purekkhara} Purekkhāratā {Purekkharata} (f.) [abstr. fr. purekkhāra] deference to (-°) DhA IV.181 (attha°). Purohita {Purohita} [purah+pp. of dhā, ch. Vedic purohita] 1. placed in front, i. e. foremost or at the top, in phrase devā Inda-purohitā the gods with Inda at their head J VI.127 (=Indaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā C.). - 2. the king's headpriest (brahmanic), or domestic chaplain, acting at the same time as a sort of Prime Minister D I.138; J I.210; V.127 (his wife as brāhmaṇī); Pug 56 (brāhmaṇa p.); Miln 241, 343 (dhamma-nagare p.); PvA 74. Pulaka {Pulaka} [cp. Sk. pulāka, Halāyudha 5, 43; not Sk. pulaka, as Kern, Toev. s. v. for which see also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. pilus] shrivelled grain Miln 232 (sukka-yava° of dried barley); DhA II.154 (SS; T. reads mūlakaṃ, which is expld by Bdhgh as "nitthusaṃ katvā ussedetvā gahitayava-taṇḍula vuccanti" ibid). Here belongs pulasa-patta of J III.478. (vv. ll. pulā°, mūlā°, mulā°; expld by C. as "saṇhāṇi pulasa-gaccha-paṇṇāni," thus taking pulasa as a kind of shrub, prob. because the word was not properly understood). Puḷava {Pulava} [etym.? dial; cp. Class. Sk. pulaka erection of the hairs of the body, also given by lexicographers (Hemachandra 1202) in meaning "vermin"] a worm, maggot M III.168; Sn 672; J III.177; VI.73; Miln 331, 357; Vism 179 (=kimi) DhA III.106, 411. See next. Puḷavaka {Pulavaka} (BB puḷuvaka)=puḷava DhA IV.46; VvA 76; PvA 14. One of the (asubha) kammaṭṭhānas is called p. "the contemplation (°saððā idea) of the worminfested corpse" S V.131; Dhs 264; Vism 110, 179 (puḷu°), 194 (id.; as asubha-lakkhaṇa); DhA IV.47. See also asubha. Pulasa {Pulasa} see pulaka. Pulina (& Puḷina ){Pulina} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pulina, also Halāyudha 3, 48] 1. a sandy bank or mound in the middle of a river J II.366 (vālika°); III.389 (id.); V.414; Miln 297 (ḷ); Dāvs IV.29; Vism 263 (nadī°); VvA 40 (paṇḍara°). - 2. a grain of sand Miln 180 (l). Pāli Text Society 1071 Pāli-English Dictionary Pulla {Pulla} [a contracted form of purisa (q. v.)] man, only in cpd. pullinga (=purisa-linga) membrum virile, penis J V.143 (where expld by C. as uṇha-chārikā pl. "hot embers"; the pass. is evidently misunderstood; v. l. BB phull°). Pussa° {Pussa°} at Nd1 90 in cpds. °tila, °tela, dantakaṭṭha, mattikā, etc. is probably to be read with v. l. phussa°; meaning not quite clear ("natural, raw"?). Pussaka {Pussaka} at A I.188 is to be read as phussaka (see phussa3) cuckoo. Pussaratha {Pussaratha} at J VI.39 read phussa° (q. v.). Pūga1 {Puga} (nt.) [etym.? cp. Vedic pūga in meaning of both pūga1 & pūga2] heap, quantity; either as n. with gen. or as adj.=many, a lot Sn 1073 (pūgaṃ vassānaṃ= bahūni vassāni Nd2 452); Pv IV.79 (pūgāni vassāni); VbhA 2 (khandhaṭṭha, piṇḍ°, pūg°). Pūga2 {Puga} (m.) [see preceding] corporation, guild Vin II.109, 212; IV.30, 78, 226, 252; M III.48; A III.300; Ud 71; Pug 29 (=seṇi PugA 210). -āyatana guild's property J VI.108 (=pūga-santaka dhana C.). -gāmaṇika superintendant of a guild, guildmaster A III.76. -majjhagata gone into a guild A I.128=Pug 29; SnA 377. Pūga3 {Puga} [Class. Sk. pūga] the betel-palm, betel nut tree J V.37 (°rukkha-ppamāṇaṃ ucchuvanaṃ). Pūja {Pūja} (adj.) [Epic Sk. pūjya, cp. pujja] to be honoured, honourable A III.78 (v. l.; T. pūjja); J III.83 (apūja= apūjanīya C.); pūjaṃ karoti to do homage Vism 312. - See also pūjiya. Pūjanā {Pujana} (f.) [fr. pūjeti] veneration, worship A II.203 sq.; Dh 106, 107; Pug 19; Dhs 1121; Miln 162. Pūjaneyya & Pūjanīya {Pujaneyya} {Pujaniya} [grd. of pūjeti] to be honoured, entitled to homage S I.175; SnA 277; -īya J III.83; Sdhp 230, 551. Pūjā (f.) [fr. pūj, see pūjeti] honour, worship, devotional attention A I.93 (āmisa°, dhamma°); V.347 sq.; Sn 906; Dh 73, 104; Pv I.55; I.512; Dpvs VII.12 (cetiya°); SnA 350; PvA 8; Sdhp 213, 230, 542, 551. -āraha worthy of veneration, deserving attention Dh 194; DhA III.251. -karaṇa doing service, paying homage PvA 30. -kāra=karaṇa DhA II.44. {Puja} Pūjita {Pujita} [pp. of pūjeti] honoured, revered, done a service S I.175, 178; II.119; Th 1, 186; Sn 316; Ud 73 (sakkata mānita p. apacita); Pv I.42 (=paṭimānita C.); II.810. Pūjiya {Pujiya} [=pūja, Sk. pūjya] worthy to be honoured Sn 527; J V.405; Sdhp 542. Pūjetar {Pujetar} [n. ag. fr. pūjeti] one who shows attention or care A V.347 sq., 350 sq. Pāli Text Society 1072 Pāli-English Dictionary Pūjeti {Pujeti} [pūj, occurring in Rigveda only in śācipūjana RV VIII.16, 12] to honour, respect, worship, revere Sn 316 (Pot. pūjayeyya), 485 (imper. pūjetha); Dh 106, 195; DA I.256; PvA 54 (aor. sakkariṃsu garukkariṃsu mānesuṃ pūjesuṃ); Sdhp 538. - pp. pūjita (q. v.). Pūti {Puti} (adj.) [cp. Sk. pūti, pūyati to fester; Gr. pu/qw, pu_on= pus; Lat. pūtidus putrid; Goth. fūls=Ger. faul, E. foul] putrid, stinking, rotten, fetid D II.353 (khaṇḍāni pūtīni); M I.73, 89=III.92 (aṭṭhikāni pūtīni); Vin III.236 (anto°); S III.54; Pv I.32; I.61 (=kuṇapagandha PvA 32); Vism 261 (=pūtika at KhA 61), 645 (°pajā itthi, in simile); PvA 67; Sdhp 258. - See also puccaṇḍatā. -kāya foul body, mass of corruption, Ep. of the human body M II.65; S I.131; III.120; Th 2, 466; ThA 283; SnA 40; DhA III.111. -kummāsa rotten junket Vism 343. -gandha bad smell, ill-smelling Pv I.31 (=kuṇapa° PvA 15); J V.72. -dadhi rancid curds Vism 362; VbhA 68; cp. pūti-takka Vism 108. -deha=°kāya S I.236. -maccha stinking fish M III.168 (+°kuṇapa & °kummāsa); in simile at It 68=J IV.435 =VI.236=KhA 127. -mukha having a putrid mouth SnA 458 (āsīvisa); PvA 12, 14. mutta strong-smelling urine, usually urine of cattle used as medicine by the bhikkhu Vin I.58=96 (°bhesajja); M I.316; It 103; VvA 5 (°harītaka). -mūla having fetid roots M I.80. -latā "stinking creeper," a sort of creeper or shrub (Coccolus cordifolius, otherwise gaḷoci) Sn 29=Miln 369; Vism 36, 183; KhA 47 (°saṇṭhāna); DhA III.110, 111 (taruṇā galoci-latā pūtilatā ti vuccati). -lohitaka with putrid blood Pv I.78 (=kuṇapa° PvA 37). -sandeha=°kāya Dh 148. Pūtika {Putika} (adj.)=pūti M I.449; S V.51; A I.261; J I.164; II.275; Miln 252; DhA I.321; III.111; VvA 76. -apūtika not rotten, fresh M I.449; A I.261; J V.198; Miln 252. Pūpa {Pupa} lāyudha, 2, 164; and BSk. pūpalikā Av.Ś II.116] a special kind of cake, baked or boiled in a bag J V.46 (°pasibbaka cakebag); DhA I.319 (jāla° net-cake; v. l. pūva). See also pūva. Pūra {Pura} (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pūra; fr. pṛ, see pūreti] full; full of (with gen.) D I.244 (nadī); M I.215; III.90, 96; A IV.230; Sn 195, 721; Ud 90 (nadī); J I.146; Pv IV.313 (=pānīyena puṇṇa PvA 251); Pug 45, 46; PvA 29. -dup° difficult to fill J V.425. - pūraṃ (-°) nt. as adv. in kucchi-pūraṃ to his belly's fill J III.268; Vism 108 (udara-pūra-mattaṃ). Pūraka {Puraka} (adj.) [=pāra+ka] filling (-°) Vism 106 (mukha°). Pūraṇa {Purana} (adj. n.) [fr. pūreti] 1. (adj.) filling Sn 312 (? better read purāṇa with SnA 324); PvA 70 (eka-thālaka°), 77 (id.). As Np. in Pūraṇa Kassapa, which however seems to be distorted from Purāṇa K. (D I.47; Sn p. 92, cp. KhA 126, 175; SnA 200, 237, 372). The expln (popular etym.) of the name at DA I.142 refers it to pūreti ("kulassa ekūnaṃ dāsa-sataṃ pūrayamāno jāto" i. e. making the hundred of servants full). - 2. (nt.) an expletive particle (pada° "versefiller"), so in C. style of "a" SnA 590; "kho" ib. 139; "kho pana" ib. 137; "taṃ" KhA 219; "tato" SnA 378; "pi" ib. 536; "su" ib. 230; "ha" ib. 416; "hi" ib. 377. See pada°. Pūratta {Puratta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pūra] getting or being full, fulness Vin II.239 (opp. unattaṃ). Pūraḷāsa {Puralasa} [cp. Vedic puroḍāśa] sacrificial cake (brahmanic), oblation Sn 459 (=carukañ ca pūvað ca SnA 405), 467, 479 (=havyasesa C.), 486. Pūrita {Purita} [pp. of pūreti] filled with (-°), full Pv II.120 (=paripuṇṇa PvA 77); PvA 134. Pāli Text Society 1073 Pāli-English Dictionary Pūreti {Pureti} [Caus. of pṛ, pṛṇāti to fill, intrs. pūryate, cp. Lat. pleo; Gr. pi/m-plhmi, plh/qw, polu/Q much, Goth. filu= Ger. viel; Ohg. folc=folk] 1. to fill (with=gen. or instr.) S I.173; Sn 30, 305; J I.50 (pāyāsassa), 347; II.112 (pret. pūrayittha); IV.272 (sagga-padaṃ pūrayiṃsu filled with deva world); DhA II.82 (sakaṭāni ratanehi); IV.200 (pattaṃ); PvA 100 (bhaṇḍassa), 145 (suvaṇṇassa). - 2. to fulfil DhA I.68. - 3. (Caus.) to make fill Vism I 37 (lakāraṃ). - pp. puṇṇa. See also pari°. Caus. II. pūrāpeti to cause to fill S II.259: J I.99. Pūva {Puva} [cp. Sk. pūpa; with v for p] a cake, baked in a pan (kapalla) A III.76; J I.345 (kapalla° pan-cake), 347; III.10 (pakka°); Vv 136; 296 (=kapalla-pūva VvA 123); Pv IV.313 (=khajjaka PvA 251); Vism 108 (jāla° net-cake, cp. jāla-pūpa), 359 (pūvaṃ vyāpetvā, in comp.); VbhA 65, 255 (simile of woman going to bake a cake); KhA 56; DA I.142; VvA 67, 73 (°surā, one of the 5 kinds of intoxication liquors, see surā); PvA 244. See also Vin. Texts I.39 (sweetmeats, sent as presents). Pūvika {Puvika} [fr. pūva] a cake-seller, confectioner Miln 331. Pe {Pe} is abbreviation of peyyāla is abbreviation of peyyāla (q. v.); cp. la. Pekkha1 {Pekkha} (adj.) (-°) [cp. Sk. prekṣā f. & prekṣaka adj.; fr. pa+īks] looking out for, i. e. intent upon, wishing; usually in puñña° desirous of merit S I.167; Dh 108 (=puññaṃ icchanto DhA II.234); Vv 3421 (=puññaphalaṃ ākankhanto VvA 154); PvA 134. Pekkha2 {Pekkha} (adj.) [grd. of pekkhati, Sk. prekṣya] to be looked for, to be expected, desirable J VI.213. Pekkhaka {Pekkhaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. pekkha1] seeing, looking at; wishing to see ThA 73 (Ap. V.59), f. °ikā S I.185 (vihāra°). Pekkhaṇa {Pekkhana} (nt.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] seeing, sight, look DA I.185, 193; KhA 148 (=dassana). Pekkhati {Pekkhati} [pa+īkṣ] to behold, regard, observe, look at D II.20; S IV.291; J VI.420. - ppr. pekkhamāna Vin I.180; Sn 36 sq. (=dakkhamāna Nd2 453), 1070, 1104; Pv II.37; Vism 19 (disāvidisaṃ). gen. pl. pekkhataṃ Sn 580 (cp. SnA 460). - Caus. pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one see or consider Vin II.73≈ A V.71. - Cp. anu°. Pekkhavant & Pekhavant {Pekkhavant} {Pekhavant}[fr. pekkhā] desirous of (loc.) J V.403. Pekkhā & Pekhā {Pekkha} {Pekha} (f.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] 1. consideration, view Vbh 325, 328. - 2. desire J V.403 (p. vuccati taṇhā). - 3. (or (pekkhaṃ?) show at a fair D I.6 (=naṭa-samajjā DA I.84); see Dial. I.7, n. 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186. Pekkhin {Pekkhin} (adj.) [fr. pekkhati] looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaṃ p. "looking only the distance of a plough" Miln 398. Pekhuṇa {Pekhuna} (pekkh°) (nt.) [not with Childers fr. *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Gr. § 89 fr. Sk. prenkhaṇa a swing, Vedic prenkha, fr. pra+īnkh, that which swings, through Pāli Text Society 1074 Pāli-English Dictionary *prenkhuṇa>prekhuṇa>pekhuṇa] 1. a wing Th 1, 211 (su° with beautiful feathers), 1136; J I.207. - 2. a peacock's tail-feathers J VI.218 (=morapiñja C.), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaṃ moraṃ). Pecca {Pecca} [ger. of pa+Q, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154] "after having gone past," i. e. after death, having departed S I.182; III.98; A II.174 sq.; III.34, 46, 78; Sn 185, 188, 248, 598, 661; It 111; Dh 15, 131 (=paraloke DhA HI.51); J I.169; V.489, Pv I.119; III.75 (v. l. pacca). The form peccaṃ under influence of Prk. (AMg.) peccā (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at J VI.360. Peṭaka {Petaka} (adj.) [fr. piṭaka] "what belongs to the Piṭaka," as title of a non-canonical book for the usual Peṭak'opadesa "instruction in the Piṭaka." dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. p. 18), mentioned at Vism 141 DhsA 165. Cp. tipeṭaka, see also piṭaka. Peṇāhikā {Penahika} (f.) [dial.; etym. uncertain] a species of bird (crane?) Miln 364, 402; shortened to peṇāhi at Miln 407 (in the uddāna). Cp. Miln trsl. II.343. Peṇṇakata {Pennakata} is v. l. for paṇṇakata Npl. at Vv 455 sq. (see VvA 197). Peta {Peta} [pp of pa+ī, lit. gone past, gone before] dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajða), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the "fathers," the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice). They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given S II.255; cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones. - 1. (souls of the departed, manes) D III.189 (petānaṃ kālakatānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ anupadassati); A III.43 (id.); I.155 sq.; V.132 (p. ðātisalohita); M I.33; S I.61=204; Sn 585, 590, 807 (petā-kālakatā=matā Nd1 126); J V.7 (=mata C.); Pv I.57; I.121; II.610. As pubba-peta ("deceasedbefore") at A II.68; III.45; IV.244; J II.360. - 2. (unhappy ghosts) S II.255 sq.; Vin IV.269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna-gata); A V.269 (dānaṃ petānaṃ upakappati); J IV.495 sq. (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta-piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13, 732); Vbh 412 sq.; Sdhp 96 sq. manussapeta a ghost in human form J III.72; V.68; VvA 23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states is reflected in Miln 294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā, nijjhāmataṇhikā, paradatt'ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism 501=VbhA 97 (as state of suffering, with narakā, tiracchā, asurā); VbhA 455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt'upajīvino). - 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv I.101; yakkha mahiddhika Pv IV.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika PvA 145; peta mahiddhika PvA 217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14]. - f. petī Vin IV.20; J I.240; Pv I.62; PvA 67 and passim. Vimānapetī PvA 47, 50, 53 and in Vimāna-vatthu passim. -upapattika born as a peta PvA 119. -katha (pubba°) tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox) D I.8, cp. DA I.90; A V.128. kicca duty towards the deceased (i. e. death-rites) J II.5; DhA I.328. -rājā king of the Petas (i. e. Yama) J V.453 (°visayaṃ na muñcati "does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking"); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakaðjaka-asura-visaya. -yoni the peta realm PvA 9, 35, 55, 68, 103 and passim. -loka the peta world Sdhp 96. -vatthu a peta or ghost-story; N. of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta-Piṭaka KhA 12; DA I.178 (Ankura°). Pāli Text Society 1075 Pāli-English Dictionary Petattana {Petattana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. peta] state or condition of a Peta Th 1, 1128. Pettanika {Pettanika} [fr. pitar] one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father A III.76=300. Pettāpiya {Pettapiya} [for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Notes 6216, 75] fatḥer's brother, paternal uncle A III.348; V.138 (gloss pitāmaho). Pettika {Pettika} (adj.) [fr. pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sk. paitṛka & P. petteyya] paternal Vin III.16; IV.223; D II.232; S V.146=Miln 368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye „your own home-grounds‟) D III.58; S V.146; J II.59; VI.193 (iṇa). Also in cpd. mātā-pettika maternal & paternal D I.34, 92; J I.146. Pettiviṣaya (& Pittiviṣaya) {Pettivisaya} {Pittivisaya} [Sk. *paitrya-viṣaya & *pitryaviṣaya, der. fr. pitar, but influenced by peta] the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) D III.234; It 93; J V.186; Pv II.22; II.79; Miln 310; DhA I.102; IV.226; Vism 427; VbhA 4, 455; PvA 25 sq., 29, 59 sq., 214, 268; Sdhp 9. Petteyya {Petteyya} (adj.) [fr. pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya] father-loving, showing filial piety towards one's father D III.72, 74; S V.467; A I.138; J III.456; V.35; Pv II.718. See also matteyya. Petteyyatā {Petteyyata} (f.) [abstr. fr. petteyya] reverence towards one's father D III.70 (a°), 145, 169; Dh 332 (=pitari sammāpaṭipatta DhA IV.34); Nd2 294. Cp. matteyyatā. Petyā {Petya} (adv.) [fr. pitar, for Sk. pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Notes 564] from the father's side J V.214 (=pitito). Pema {Pema} (nt.) [fr. prī, see pīṇeti & piya & cp. BSk. prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman cons. stem] love, affection D I.50; III.284 sq.; M I.101 sq.; S III.122; IV.72, 329; V.89, 379; A II.213; III.326 sq.; Sn 41; Dh 321; DA I.75. -(a)vigata-pema with(out) love or affection D III.238, 252; S III.7 sq., 107 sq., 170; IV.387; A II.174 sq.; IV.15, 36, 461 sq. Pemaka {Pemaka} (m. or nt.) [fr. pema]=pema J IV.371. Pemanīya (adj.) [fr. pema as grd. formation, cp. BSk., premaṇīya MVastu III.343] affectionate, kind, loving, amiable, agreeable D I.4 (cp. DA I.75); II.20 (°ssara); A II.209; Pug 57; J IV.470. {Pemaniya} Peyya1 {Peyya} [grd. of pibati] to be drunk, drinkable, only in compn or neg. apeyya undrinkable A III.188; J IV.205, 213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa° to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the best quality S II.29. manāpika° sweet to drink Miln 313. duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp 158. See also kākapeyya. Peyya2 {Peyya} = piya, only in cpds. vajja° [*priya-vadya] kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 sangaha-vatthus (grounds of popularity) A II.32, 248; IV.219, 364; D III.190, 192, 232; J V.330. Cp. BSk. priya-vādya MVastu I.3; and °vācā kind language D III.152; Vv 8436 (=piyavacana VvA 345). - It is doubtful whether vāca-peyya at Sn 303 (Ep. of sacrifice) is the Pāli Text Society 1076 Pāli-English Dictionary same as °vācā (as adj.), or whether it represents vāja-peyya [Vedic vāja sacrificial food] as Bdhgh expls it at SnA 322 (=vājam ettha pivanti; v. l. vāja°), thus peyya= peyya1. Peyyāla {Peyyala} (nt.?) [a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toev. s. v. after Trenckner, cp. BSk. piyāla and peyāla MVastu III.202, 219] repetition, succession, formula; way of saying, phrase (=pariyāya 5) Vism 46 (°mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (id. and bahu°-tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (°pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras); VvA 117 (pāḷi° vasena "because of the successive Pāli text"). - Very freq. in abridged form, where we would say "etc.," to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known). The literal meaning would be "here (follows) the formula (pariyāya)." We often find pa for pe, e. g. A V.242, 270, 338, 339, 355; sometimes pa+pe combd, e. g. S V.466. - As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la is found e. g. S V.448, 267 sq.; or as v. l. of pe: A V.242, 243, 354; or la+pe combd: S V.464, 466. - On syllable pe Trenckner, Notes 66, says: "The sign of abridgment. pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an imperative „insert, fill up the gap,‟ but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaṃ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with -eyy- for ayy-, like seyyā, Sk. śayyā." See also Vin. Texts I.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324. Perita {Perita} is Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya-merita (p for m) J IV.424=V.359. This however is bhaya-m-erita with the hiatus-m, and to supplant perita (=Sk. prerita) is unjustified. Pelaka {Pelaka} [etym.?] a hare J VI.538 (=sasa C.). Peḷa {Pela} [a Prk. form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 122 peḍhāla] a lump, only in yaka° the liver (-lump) Sn 195 (=yakana-piṇḍa SnA 247)=J I.146. Peḷā {Pela} [cp. Class. & B. Sk. peṭa, f. peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251, 365; and the BSk. var. phelā Divy 503; MVastu II.465] 1. a (large) basket J IV.458; VI.185; Cp. II.25; Miln 23, 282; Vism 304; KhA 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading, see p. 68 App.); ThA 29. - 2. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv IV.142; Mhvs 36, 20; DhsA 242 (peḷ-opamā, of the 4 treasure-boxes). - Cp. piṭaka. Peḷikā {Pelika} (f.) [cp. peḷā] a basket DhA I.227 (pasādhana°, v. l. pelakā). Pesa {Pesa} is spurious spelling for pessa is spurious spelling for pessa (q. v.). Pesaka [fr. pa+iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command] employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin II.177 (ārāmika° etc.); A III.275 (id.). {Pesaka} Pesakāra {Pesakara} [pesa+kāra, epsa=Vedic peśaḥ, fr. piś: see piṃsati1] weaver D I.52; Vin III.259; IV.7; J IV.475; DhA I.424 (°vīthi); III.170 sq.; VbhA 294 sq. (°dhītā the weaver's daughter; story of -) PvA 42 sq., 67. Pāli Text Society Pesana 1077 Pāli-English Dictionary (nt.) [fr. pa+iṣ, see peseti] sending out, message; service J IV.362 (pesanāni gacchanti); V.17 (pesane pesiyanto.) -kāraka a servant J VI.448; VvA 349. -kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant J III 414; DhA I.227. {Pesana} Pesanaka {Pesanaka} (adj.) [fr. pesana] "message sender," employing for service, in °corā robbers making (others) servants J I.253. (adj.) [fr. pesana] connected with mes- sages, going messages, only in phrase jangha° messenger on foot Vin III.185; J II.82; Miln 370 (°iya). Pesala {Pesala} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. peśala; Bdhgh's pop. etym. at SnA 475 is "piya-sīla"] lovable, pleasant, well-behaved, amiable S I.149; II.387; A IV.22; V.170; Sn 678; Sn p. 124; Miln 373; Sdhp 621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e. g. at S I.187; Vin I.170; II.241; J IV.70; VvA 206; PvA 13, 268. Pesāca {Pesaca} is reading at D I.54 for pisāca (so v. l.). Pesi & Pesī(f.) {Pesi} [cp. Epic Sk. peśī] 1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh J III.223=DhA IV.67 (pesi=maṃsapesi C.). Thus maṃsapesi, muscle Vin II.25 ≈ (maṃsapes' ûpamā kāmā); III.105; M I.143, 364; S II.256; IV.193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism 356; PvA 199. - 2. the fœtus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana) S I.206; J IV.496; Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. - 3. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu° J IV.205. Pesikā {Pesika} (f.) (-°) [cp. Sk. *peśikā] rind, shell (of fruit) only in cpds. amba° Vin II.109; vaṃsa° J I.352; veḷu° (a bit of bamboo) D II.324; J II.267, 279; III.276; IV.382. Pesita {Pesita} [pp. of peseti] 1. sent out or forth Sn 412 (rājadūta p.) Vv 217 (=uyyojita VvA 108); DhA III.191. pesit-atta is the C. expln at S I.53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit-atta (trsln "puts forth all his strength"); Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita as pp. of pahiṇati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati. - 2. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-āpesitaṃ order and prohibition Vin II.177. Pesuṇa {Pesuna} (nt.) [fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśuna]=pesuðða S I.240; Sn 362, 389, 862 sq., 941; J V.397; Pv I.33; PvA 16; Sdhp 55, 66, 81. -kāraka one who incites to slander J I.200, 26Q. Pesuṇika {Pesunika} (adj.) [fr. pesuṇa] slanderous, calumnious PvA 12, 13. Pesuṇiya & Pesuṇeyya {Pesuniya} {Pesuneyya} (nt.)=pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Sn 663, 928; Pv I.32. - 2. (pesuṇeyya) S I.228, 230; Sn 852; Nd1 232. Pesuñña {Pesunna} (nt.) [abstr. fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya] backbiting, calumny, slander M I.110; D III.69; A IV.401; Vin IV.12; Nd1 232, 260; PvA 12, 15. Peseti {Peseti} [pa+iṣ to send] to send forth or out, esp. on a message or to a special purpose, i. e. to employ as a servant or (intrs.) to do service (so in many derivations) 1. to send out J I.86, 178, 253; IV.169 (paṇṇaṃ); V.399; VI.448; Mhvs 14, 29 (rathaṃ); DhA III.190; PvA 4, 20, 53. - 2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka), in Pass. pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin II.177 (ppr. pesiyamāna); J V.17 (ppr. pesiyanto). - pp. pesita. See also pessa & derivations. Pāli Text Society 1078 Pāli-English Dictionary Pessa {Pessa} [grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preṣya, f. preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika] a messenger, a servant, often in combn dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e. g. D I.141; S I.76, 93 (slightly diff. in verse); A II.208 (spelt pesā); IV.45; DhA II.7. See also A III.37; IV.266, 270; J V.351; Pug 56; DA I.300. At Sn 615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n.= pessitā service (=veyyavacca SnA 466). So also in cpds. -kamma service J VI.374; -kāra a servant J VI.356. Pessitā {Pessita} (f.) [abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preṣyatā] being a servant, doing service J VI.208 (para° to someone else). Pessiya {Pessiya} & °ka [see pessa] servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, expld by pesana-kāraka, veyyāvaccakara VvA 349); J VI.448 (=pesana-kāraka C.), or pessika Sn 615, 651; J VI.552; f. either pessiyā (para°) Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but v. l. SS pessiyā, expld as pesaniyā paresaṃ veyyāvacca-kārī VvA 94); J III.413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesana-kārikā C. 414), or pessikā J VI.65. Pehi {Pehi} is imper. 2nd sg. of pa+i, "go on," said to a horse A IV.190 sq., cp. S I.123. Pokkhara {Pokkhara} (nt.) [cp. Vedic puṣkara, fr. pus, though a certain relation to puṣpa seems to exist, cp. Sk. puṣpapattra a kind of arrow (lit. lotus-leaf) Halāyudha 2, 314, and P. pokkharapatta] 1. a lotus plant, primarily the leaf of it, figuring in poetry and metaphor as not being able to be wetted by water Sn 392, 812 (vuccati paduma-pattaṃ Nd1 135); Dh 336; It 84. - 2. the skin of a drum (from its resemblance to the lotus-leaf) S II.267; Miln 261 (bheri°). As Np. of an angel (Gandhabba) "Drum" at Vv 189. - 3. a species of waterbird (crane): see cpd. °sataka. -ṭṭha standing in water (?) Vin I.215 (vanaṭṭha+), 238 (id.). -patta a lotus leaf Sn 625; Dh 401 (=paduma -patta DhA IV.166); Miln 250. -madhu the honey sap of Costus speciosus (a lotus) J V.39, 466. -vassa "lotus-leaf rain," a portentous shower of rain, serving as special kind of test shower in which certain objects are wetted, but those showing a disinclination towards moisture are left untouched, like a lotus-leaf J I.88; VI.586; KhA 164; DhA III.163. -sātaka a species of crane, Ardea Siberica J VI.539 (koṭṭha+); SnA 359. Cp. Np. Pokkharasāti Sn 594; Sn p. 115; SnA 372. Pokkharaṇī {Pokkharani} (f.) [fr. puṣkara lotus; Vedic puṣkariṇī, BSk. has puskiriṇī, e. g. AvŚ I.76; II.201 sq.] a lotuspond, an artificial pool or small lake for water-plants (see note in Dial. II.210) Vin I.140, 268; II.123; D II.178 sq.; S I.123, 204; II.106; V.460; A I.35, 145; III.187, 238; J II.126; V.374 (Khemī), 388 (Doṇa); Pv III.33; IV.121; SnA 354 (here in meaning of a dry pit or dugout); VvA 160; PvA 23, 77, 152. pokkharaððā gen. Pv II.129; instr. S I.233; loc. Vin II.123. pokkharaṇiyāyaṃ loc. A III.309. - pl. pokkharaṇiyo Vin I.268; VvA 191; PvA 77; metric pokkharañño Vv 4411; Pv II.119: II.78. Pokkharatā {Pokkharata} (f.) [is it fr. pokkhara lotus (cp. Sk. pauṣkara), thus "lotus-ness," or founded on Vedic puṣpa blossom? The BSk. puṣkalatā (AvŚ II.201) is certainly a misconstruction, if it is constructed fr. the Pali] splendidness, "flower-likeness," only in cpd. vaṇṇa-pokkharatā beauty of complexion D I.114; Vin I.268; S I.95; II.279; A I.38, 86; II.203; III.90; DA I.282; KhA 179; VvA 14; PvA 46. The BSk. passage at AvŚ II.202 reads "śobhāṃ varṇaṃ puṣkalatāṃ ca." Pāli Text Society Ponkha 1079 Pāli-English Dictionary [increment form of punkha] arrow, only in redupl. (iterative) cpd. ponkh'ānuponkhaṃ (adv.) arrow after arrow, shot after shot, i. e. constantly, continuously S V.453, 454; Nd2 631 (in def. of sadā); DA I.188; VvAh 351. The expln is problematic. {Ponkha} Poṭa {Pota} [fr. sphuṭ] a bubble J IV.457 (v. l. poṭha). See also phoṭa. (m. f.?) [etym. uncertain, prob. Non-Aryan] a kind of grass, in °tūla a kind of cotton, "grass-tuft," thistle-down (?) Vin II.150; IV.170 (id., 3 kinds of cotton, spelt potaki here). Poṭakila {Potakila} [etym. unknown, cp. poṭaki & (lexic.) Sk. poṭagala a kind of reed; the variant is poṭagala] a kind of grass, Saccharum spontaneum Th 1, 27=233; J VI.508 (=p.°-tiṇaṃ nāma C.). Poṭṭhabba {Potthabba} is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba is spurious reading for phoṭṭhabba (q. v.). Poṭha {Potha} [fr. puth, cp. poṭhana & poṭheti] is anguli° snapping of one's fingers (as sign of applause) J V.67. Cp. poṭhana & phoṭeti. Poṭhana & Pothana (nt.) {Pothana} [fr. poṭheti] 1. striking, beating J II.169 (tajjana°); V.72 (udaka°); VI.41 (kappāsa°dhanuka). At all J passages th. - 2. (th) snapping one's fingers J I.394 (anguli°, +celukkhepa); ThA 76 (anguli°, for accharā-sanghāta Th 2, 67). Cp. nippothana. Poṭhita & Pothita {Pothita} [pp. of poṭheti] beaten, struck Miln 240 (of cloth, see Kern, Toev. s. poṭheti); J III.423 (mañca; v. l. BB pappoṭ°) KhA 173 (°tulapicu cotton beaten seven times, i. e. very soft; v. l. pothita, see App. p. 877); DhA I.48 (su°); PvA 174. - Cp. paripothita. Poṭheti & Potheti {Potheti} [fr. puth=sphuṭ] 1. to beat, strike Sn 682 (bhujāni=appoṭheti SnA 485); J I.188, 483 (th) II.394; VI.548 (=ākoṭeti); DhA I.48; II.27 (th), 67 (th); VvA 68 (th); PvA 65 (th). - 2. to snap one's fingers as a token of annoyance D II.96; or of pleasure J III.285 (anguliyo poṭhesi). - pp. poṭhita. - Caus. II. poṭhāpeti (poth°) to cause to be beaten or flogged Miln 221; DhA I.399. - Cp. pappoṭheti. Poṇa1 {Pona} (nt.) [=poṇa2?] only in cpd. danta° a tooth pick Vin IV.90; J IV.69; Miln 15; SnA 272. As dantapoṇaka at Dāvs I.57. - kūṭa-poṇa at Vism 268 read °goṇa. Poṇa2 {Pona} (adj.) [fr. pa+ava+nam, cp. ninna & Vedic pravaṇa] 1. sloping down, prone, in anupubba° gradually sloping (of the ocean) Vin II.237=A IV.198 sq.=Ud 53. - 2. (-°) sloping towards, going to, converging or leading to Nibbāna; besides in var. phrases, in general as tanninna tappoṇa tappabbhāra, "leading to that end." As nibbāna° e. g. at M I.493; S V.38 sq.; A III.443; cp. Vv 8442 (nekkhamma°-nibbāna-ninna VvA 348); taṃ° Ps II.197; ṭhāne PvA 190; viveka° A IV.224, 233; V.175; samādhi° Miln 38; kiṃ° M I.302. Poṇika {Ponika} (adj.) [fr. poṇa2] that which is prone, going prone; DA I.23 where the passage is "tiracchāna-gata-pāṇāpoṇika-nikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti," quoted from S III.152, where it runs thus: "tiracchāna-gata pāṇā te pi bhikkhave tiracchānagatā pāṇā citten'eva cittatā." The passage is referred to with poṇika at KhA 12, where we read "tiracchāna-gatā pāṇā poṇikanikāyo cikkhallika-nikāyo ti." Thus we may take poṇikanikāya as "the kingdom of those which go prone" (i. e. the animals). Pāli Text Society 1080 Pāli-English Dictionary Pota1 {Pota} [cp. Epic Sk. pota, see putta for etym.] the young of an animal J II.406 (°sūkara); Cp. I.102 (udda°); SnA 125 (sīha°). Pota2 {Pota} [Epic Sk. pota; dial. form for plota (?), of plu] a boat Dāvs V.58; VvA 42. Pota3 {Pota} [etym.?] a millstone, grindstone, only as nisada° Vin I.201; Vism 252. Potaka {Potaka} (-°) [fr. pota1] 1. the young of an animal M I.104 (kukkuṭa°); J I.202 (supaṇṇa°), 218 (hatthi°); II.288 (assa° colt); III.174 (sakuṇa°); PvA 152 (gaja°). - f. potikā J I.207 (haṃsa°); IV.188 (mūsika°). - 2. a small branch, offshoot, twig; in twig; in amba° young mango sprout DhA III.206 sq.; araṇi° small firewood Miln 53. Pottha1 {Pottha} [?] poor, indigent, miserable J II.432 (=potthakapilotikāya nivatthatā pottho C.; v. l. poṭha). See also *ponti, with which ultimately identical. Pottha2 {Pottha} [later Sk. pusta, etym. uncertain; loan-word?] modelling, only in cpd. °kamma plastering (i. e. using a mixture of earth, lime, cowdung & water as mortar) J VI.459; carving DhsA 334; and °kara a modeller in clay J I.71. Cp. potthaka1. Potthaka1 {Potthaka} [cp. Class. Sk. pustaka] 1. a book J I.2 (aya° ledger); III.235, 292; IV.299, 487; VvA 117. - 2. any- thing made or modelled in clay (or wood etc.), in rūpa° a modelled figure J VI.342; ThA 257; DA I.198; Sdhp 363, 383. Cp. pottha2. Potthaka2 {Potthaka} (nt.) [etym.?] cloth made of makaci fibre Vin I.306 (cp. Vin. Texts II.247); A I.246 sq.; J IV.251 (=ghana-sāṭaka C.; v. l. saṇa°); Pug 33. Potthanikā {Potthanika} (f.) [fr. puth?] a dagger (=potthanī) Vin II.190=DA I.135 (so read here with v. l. for T. °iyā). Potthanī {Potthani} (f.) [fr. puth?] a butcher's knife J VI.86 (maṃsakoṭṭhana°), 111 (id.). Pothujjanika {Pothujjanika} (adj.) [fr. puthujjana] belonging to ordinary man, common, ordinary, in 2 combns viz. (1) phrase hīna gamma p. anariya Vin I.10; S IV.330; A V.216; (2) with ref. to iddhi Vin II.183; J I.360; Vism 97. - Cp. Vin. Texts III.230. The BSk. forms are either pārthagjanika Lal. Vist 540, or prāthug-janika MVastu III.331. Pothetvā {Pothetva} at J II.404 (ummukkāni p.) is doubtful. The vv. ll. are yodhetvā & sodhetvā (the latter a preferable reading). Poddava {Poddava} see gāma°. Ponobhavika (adj.) [fr. punabbhava, with preservation of the second o (puno>punaḥ) see puna] leading to rebirth M I.48, 299, 464, 532; S III.26; IV.186; D III.57; A II.11 sq., 172; III.84, 86; V.88; Nett 72; Vism 506; VbhA 110. {Ponobhavika} Pāli Text Society Ponti 1081 Pāli-English Dictionary (vv. ll. poṭhi, sonti) Th 2, 422, 423 is doubtful; the expln at ThA 269 is "pilotikākhaṇḍa," thus "rags (of an ascetic)," cp. J.P.T.S. 1884. See also pottha1, with which evidently identical, though misread. {Ponti} Porāṇa {Porana} (adj.) [=purāṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paurāṇa] old, ancient, former D I.71, 238; S II.267; Sn 313; Dh 227 (cp. DhA III.328); J II.15 (°kāle in the past); VbhA 1 (°aṭṭhakathā), 523 (id.); KhA 247 (°pāṭha); SnA 131 (id.); DhA I.17; PvA 1 (°aṭṭhakathā), 63. - Porāṇā (pl.) the ancients, ancient authorities or writers Vism passim esp. Note, 764; KhA 123, 158; SnA 291, 352, 604; VbhA 130, 254, 299, 397, 513. Porāṇaka {Poranaka} (adj.) [fr. porāṇa] 1. ancient, former, of old (cp. purāṇa 1) J III.16 (°paṇḍitā); PvA 93 (id.), 99 (id.); DhA I.346 (kula-santaka). - 2. old, worn, much used (cp. purāṇa 2) J IV.471 (magga). Porin {Porin} (adj.) [fr. pora=Epic Sk. paura citizen, see pura. Semantically cp. urbane>urbanus>urbs; polite= poli/ths>po/lis. For pop. etym. see DA I.73 & 282] belonging to a citizen, i. e. citizenlike, urbane, polite, usually in phrase porī vācā polite speech D I.4, 114; S I.189; II.280=A II.51; A III.114; Pug 57; Dhs 1344; DA I.75, 282; DhsA 397. Cp. BSk. paurī vācā MVastu III.322. Porisa1 {Porisa} (adj.-n.) [abstr. fr. purisa, for *pauruṣa or *puruṣya)] 1. (adj.) human, fit for a man Sn 256 (porisa dhura), cp. porisiya & poroseyya. - 2. (m.)=purisa, esp. in sense of purisa 2, i. e. servant, used collectively (abstract formn like Ger. dienerschaft, E. service= servants) "servants" esp. in phrase dāsa-kammakaraporisa Vin I.240; A I.145, 206; II.78; III.45, 76, 260; DhA IV.1; dāsa° a servant Sn 769 (three kinds mentioned at Nd1 11, viz. bhaṭakā kammakarā upajīvino); rāja° king's service, servant of the king D I.135; A IV.286, 322; sata° a hundred servants Vism 121. For purisa in uttama° (=mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (cp. DhA II.188). Cp. posa. Porisa2 {Porisa} (nt.) [abstr. fr. purisa, *pauruṣyaṃ, cp. porisiya and poroseyya] 1. business, doing of a man (or servant, cp. purisa 2), service, occupation; human doing, activity M I.85 (rāja°); Vv 6311 (=purisa-kicca VvA 263); Pv IV.324 (uṭṭhāna°=purisa-viriya, purisa-kāra PvA 252). - 2. height of a man M. I.74, 187, 365. Porisatā {Porisata} (f.) [abstr. fr. porisa], only in neg. a° inhuman or superhuman state, or: not served by any men (or servants) VvA 275. The reading is uncertain. Porisāda {Porisada} [fr. purisa+ad to eat] man-eater, cannibal J V.34 sq., 471 sq., 486, 488 sq., 499, 510. Porisādaka {Porisadaka} =porisāda J V.489. Cp. pursādaka J V.91. Porisiya {Porisiya} (adj.) [fr. purisa, cp. porisa & poroseyya] 1. of human nature, human J IV.213. 2. Of the height of man Vin II.138. Poroseyya {Poroseyya} =porisiya (cp. porisa1 1) fit for man, human M I.366. The word is somewhat doubtful, but in all likelihood it is a derivation fr. pura (cp. porin; Sk. *paura), thus to be understood as *paurasya>*porasya >*poraseyya>*poroseyya with assimilation. The meaning Pāli Text Society 1082 Pāli-English Dictionary is clearly "very fine, urbane, fashionable"; thus not derived from purisa, although C. expls by "puris'ānucchavikaṃ yānaṃ" (M. I.561). The passage runs "yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇikuṇḍalaṃ"; with vv. ll. voropeyya & oropeyya. Neumann accepts oropeyya as reading & translates (wrongly) "belüde": see Mittl. Slg. 21921; vol. II. pp. 45 & 666. The reading poroseyya seems to be established as lectio difficilior. On form see also Trenckner, Notes 75. Porohita {Porohita} = purohita; DhA I.174 (v. l. BB pur°). Porohacca {Porohacca} (nt.) [fr. purohita] the character or office of a family priest D II.243. As porohicca at Sn 618 (=purohita-kamma SnA 466). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75. Posa1 {Posa} [contraction of purisa fr. *pūrṣa>*pussa>*possa> posa. So Geiger, P.Gr. 303]=purisa, man (poetical form, only found in verse) Vin I.230; S I.13, 205= J III.309; A IV.266; Sn 110, 662; Dh 104, 125 (cp. DhA III.34); J V.306; VI.246, 361. - poso at J III.331 is gen. sg. of puṃs=Sk. puṃsaḥ. Posa2 {Posa} (adj.) [=*poṣya, grd. of poseti, puṣ] to be fed or nourished, only in dup° difficult to nourish S I.61. Posaka {Posaka} (adj.) [fr. posa2] nourishing, feeding A I.62, 132= It 110 (āpādaka+); f. °ikā a nurse, a female attendant Vin II.289 (āpādikā+). Posatā {Posata} (f.) [abstr. fr. posa2] only -°, in su° & dup° easy & difficult support Vin II.2. Posatha =uposatha [cp. BSk. poṣadha Divy 116, (posahiya=posathika) Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 141] J IV.329; VI.119. {Posatha} 121, and Prk. posaha Posathika {Posathika} =uposathika J IV.329. Cp. anuposathika & anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ. Posana {Posana} (nt.) [fr. puṣ] nourishing, feeding, support VvA 137. Posāpeti & Posāveti {Posapeti} {Posaveti} [Caus. II. fr. poseti] to have brought up, to give into the care of, to cause to be nourished Vin I.269 (pp. posāpita) ≈ DA I.133 (posāvita, v. l. posāp°). Posāvanika {Posavanika} & °ya (adj.-nt.) [fr. posāvana=posāpana of Caus. posāpeti] 1. (adj.) to be brought up, being reared, fed Vin I.272; J III.134, 432. -°iya DhA III.35; J III.35; J III.429 (&°iyaka). - 2. (nt.) fee for bringing somebody up, allowance, money for food, sustenance J II.289; DhA IV.40; VvA 158 (°mūla). -°iya J I.191. Posita {Posita} [pp. of poseti] nourished, fed Cp. III.32; VvA 173 (udaka°). Posituṃ {Positum} at Vin II.151 stands for phusituṃ "to sprinkle," cp. Vin. Texts III.169. See phusati2. Posin {Posin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. poseti] thriving (on), nourished by Vin I.6; D I.75; S I.138; Sn 65 (anaðða° cp. Nd2 36), 220 (dāra°); DA I.219. Pāli Text Society 1083 Pāli-English Dictionary Poseti {Poseti} [puṣ] to nourish, support, look after, bring up, take care of, feed, keep Vin I.269; S I.181; A I.117; J I.134; III.467; Nd2 36; Vism 305; VvA 138, 299. - pp. posita. - Caus. posāpeti. Pāli Text Society 1084 Pāli-English Dictionary Ph Phaggu {Phaggu} [in forṃ=Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different] a special period of fasting M I.39= DA I.139. See also pheggu. Phagguṇa & Phagguṇī {Phagguna} {Phagguni} (f.) [cp. Vedic phālguna & °ī] N. of a month (Feb. 15th- March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism 418; phagguṇi° J I.86. Phaṇa {Phana} [cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa] the hood of a snake Vin I.91 (°hatthaka, with hands like a snake's hood); J III.347 (patthaṭa°); DhA III.231 (°ṃ ukkhipitvā); IV.133. Freq. as phaṇaṃ katvā (only thus, in ger.) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood J II.274; VI.6; Vism 399; DhA II.257. Phaṇaka {Phanaka} [fr. phaṇa] an instrument shaped like a snake's hood, used to smooth the hair Vin II.107. Phaṇijjaka {Phanijjaka} [etym.?] a kind of plant, which is enumd at Vin IV.35=DA I.81 as one of the aggabīja, i. e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At J VI.536 the C. gives bhūtanaka as expln. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa. Phandati {Phandati} [spand, cp. Gr. sfada/cw to twitch, sfodro/s violent; Lat. pendeo "pend" i. e. hang down, cp. pendulum; Ags. finta tail, lit. mover, throbber] 1. to throb, palpitate D I.52=M I.404, cp. DA I.159; Nd1 46. - 2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir J II.234; VI.113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land). - Caus. II. phandāpeti to make throb D I.52=M I.404. - pp. phandita (q. v.). Cp. pari°, vi°, sam°. The nearest synonym is calati. Phandana {Phandana} [fr. phandati, cp. Sk. spandana] 1. (adj.) throbbing, trembling, wavering Dh 33 (phandanaṃ capalaṃ); J VI.528 (°māluvā trembling creeper); DhA I.50 (issa° throbbing with envy). - 2. (m.) N. of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) A I.202; J IV.208 sq.; Miln 173. - 3. (nt.) throb, trembling, agitation, quivering J VI.7 (°mattaṃ not even one throb; cp. phandita); Nd1 46 (taṇhā etc.). Phandanā {Phandana} (f.) [fr. phandati] throbbing, agitation, movement, motion SnA 245 (calanā+); DA I.111; Nett 88 C.; cp. iðjanā. Phandita {Phandita} (nt.) [pp. of phandati] throbbing, flashing; throb M II.24 (°mattā "by his throbbings only"); pl. phanditāni "vapourings," imaginings Vbh 390 (where VbhA 513 only says "phandanato phanditaṃ") cp. Brethren 344. Phanditatta {Phanditatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. phandita]=phandanā S V.315 (=iðjitatta). Pharaṇa {Pharana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. pharati] 1. (adj.) pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Miln 345. - 2. (nt.) pervasion, suffusion, thrill J I.82 (°samattha mettacitta); Nett 89 (pīti° etc., as m., cp. pharaṇatā); DhsA 166 (°pīti all-pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp. pīti pharaṇatā). Cp. anu°. Pāli Text Society 1085 Pāli-English Dictionary Pharaṇaka {Pharanaka} (adj.) [fr. pharaṇa] thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture VvA 16 (dvādasa yojanāni °pabho sarīra-vaṇṇo). Pharaṇatā {Pharanata} (f.) [abstr. fr. pharaṇa] suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only -° in set of 4-fold suffusion, viz. pīti° of rapture, sukha° of restful bliss, ceto° of [telepathic] consciousnss, āloka° of light, D III.277; Ps I.48; Vbh 334; Nett 89. Pharati {Pharati} [sphur & sphar, same root as in Gr. spai/rw to twitch; Lat. sperno "spurn" lit. kick away; Ags. speornan to kick; spurnan=spur] 1. (trs.) to pervade, permeate, fill, suffuse Pv I.1014 (=vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati PvA 52); J III.371 (sakala-sarīraṃ); V.64 (C. for pavāti); PvA 14 (okāsaṃ), 276 (obhāsaṃ). To excite or stimulate the nerves J V.293 (rasa-haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari: see under rasa). - Often in standard phrase mettā-sahagatena cetasā ekaṃ (dutiyaṃ etc.) disaṃ pharitvā viharati D II.186; S V.115 and passim, where pharitvā at Vism 308=VbhA 377 is expld by phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Cp. BSk. ekaṃ disāṃ spharitvopasampadya viharati MVastu III.213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraṃ pharati (aor. phari) to thrill the body with rapture, e. g. J I.33; V.494; DhA II.118; IV.102. - 2. [in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita] to spread, make expand J I.82 (mettacittaṃ phari). - 3. [prob. of quite a diff. origin and only taken to pharati by pop. analogy, perhaps to phal=sphaṭ to split; thus kaṭṭh'atthaṃ pharati=to be split up for fuel] to serve as, only with °atthaṃ in phrases āhāratthaṃ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Miln 152; kaṭṭhatthaṃ ph. to serve as fuel A II.95=S III.93=It 90=J I.482; khādaniyatthaṃ & bhojaniyatthaṃ ph. to serve as eatables Vin I.201 (so to be read in preference to °attaṃ). - pp. pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha; see further anu°, pari°. Pharasu {Pharasu} [cp. Vedic paraśu=Gr. pe/lekus; on p>ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. § 208; Geiger, Gr. § 40] hatchet, axe A III.162; J I.199, 399; II.409; V.500; DhA II.204; PvA 277. The spelling parasu occurs at S V.441 & J III.179. Pharita {Pharita} [pp. of pharati] 1. being pervaded or permeated (by) VvA 68 (mettāya). - 2. spread (out) J VI.284 (kittisaddo sakala-loke ph.). - Cp. phuṭṭha & phālita. Pharusa {Pharusa} (adj.) [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph.>p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario] 1. (lit.) rough Pv II.41. - 2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin II.290 (caṇḍa+); Pv II.34; III.57; J V.296; Kvu 619. In combn with vācā we find both pharusa-vācā and pharusā-vācā D I.4, 138; III.69 sq., 173, 232; M I.42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā-vācā see Trenckner, at M I.530). pharusa vacana rough speech PvA 15, 55, 83. - 3. cruel Pv IV.76 (kamma=daruṇa PvA 265). Phala1 {Phala} (nt.) [cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal] to burst, thus lit. "bursting," i. e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit.) fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca-phal'ûpapannā, not to phalu, as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism 120. -amba° mango-fruit PvA 273 sq.; dussa° (adj.) having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. VvA 199); patta° leaves & fruits, vegetables Sn 239; PvA 86 pavatta° wild fruit D I.101; puppha° flower & fruit J III.40. rukkha°-ûpama Th 1, 490 (in simile of kāmā, taken fr. M I.130) lit. "like the fruit of trees" is expld by ThA 288 as "anga-paccangānaṃ p(h)alibhañjan'aṭṭhena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as "fruit that brings the climber to a fall." - Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin I.201 scil. vilanga, pippala, marica, harītaka, vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Miln 333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha's fruit-shop, viz. Pāli Text Society 1086 Pāli-English Dictionary sotāpatti°, sakadāgāmi°, anāgāmi°, arahatta°, suððata° samāpatti (cp. Cpd. 70), animitta° samāpatti, appaṇihita° samāpatti. - 2. a testicle J III.124 (dantehi °ṃ chindati=purisabhāvaṃ nāseti to castrate); VI.237 (uddhita-pphalo, adj.,=uddhaṭa-bījo C.), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). - 3. (fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing. As t.t. with ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc. (see the Miln quot. under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e. g. Tikp 155, 158; VbhA 43 & passim. - In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna (see Nd2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna), and as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship. Frequently it is combd with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of "consequence," e. g. at D I.27, 58; III.160. Almost synonymous in the sense of "fruition, benefit, profit" is ānisaṃsā D III.132; phala at Pv I.125=ānisaṃsa PvA 64 - Vin I.293 (anāgāmi°); II.240 (id.); III.73 (arahatta°); D I.51, 57 sq. (sāmaðða°); III.147, 170 (sucaritassa); M I.477 (appamāda°); S I.173 (Amata°); Pv I.1110 (kaṭuka°); II.83 (dāna°); IV.188 (mahap° & agga°); Vism 345 (of food, being digested); PvA 8 (puðða° & dāna°), 22 (sotāpatti°), 24 (issāmacchariya°). -atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism 120. -āpaṇa fruit shop Miln 333. āphala [phala+aphala, see ā4; but cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 331] all sorts of fruit, lit. what is not (i. e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very freq. in Jātaka style, e. g. J I.416; II.160; III.127; IV.220; 307, 449, V.313; VI.520; DhA I.106. -āsava extract of fruit VvA 73. -uppatti ripening PvA 29. -esin yielding fruit J I.87=Th 1, 527, cp. phalesin MVastu III.93. -gaṇḍa see palagaṇḍa. -ṭṭha "stationed in fruition," i. e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Cpd. 50) Miln 342. -dāna gift of fruit VbhA 337. -dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676. -pacchi fruitbasket J VI.560. -pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism 580; VbhA 191. -puṭa fruit-basket J VI.236. bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin IV.38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka. -maya see sep. -ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82. -sata see palasata. Phala2 {Phala} is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at J VI.510. See pala & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 40. Phala3 {Phala} [etym.? Sk. *phala] the point of a spear or sword S II.265 (tiṇha°). Cp. phāla2. Phalaka {Phalaka} [fr. phal=*sphal or *sphaṭ (see phalati), lit. that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning "slab"); cp. Sk. sphaṭika rock-crystal; on Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. §206. Ved. phalaka board, phāla ploughshare; Gr. a)/spalon, spola/s, yali/s scissors; Lat. pellis & spolium; Ohg. spaltan=split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Oicel. spjald board] 1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank J I.451 (a writing board, school slate); V.155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); VI.281 (dice-board). pidhāna° covering board VbhA 244= Vism 261; sopāna° staircase, landing J I.330 (maṇi°); Vism 313; cp. MVastu I.249; °āsana a bench J I.199; °kāya a great mass of planks J II.91. °atthara-sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress) J I.304, 317; II.68. °seyya id. D I.167 ("plank-bed"). - 2. a shield J III.237, 271; Miln 355; DhA II.2. - 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic's dress (°cīra) D I.167, cp. Vin I.305. ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin II.136. - 4. a post M III.95 (aggaḷa° doorpost); ThA 70 (Ap. V.17). Phalagaṇḍa {Phalaganda} is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q. v.). Phalatā {Phalata} (f.) [abstr. fr. phala] the fact or condition of bearing fruit PvA 139 (appa°). Pāli Text Society 1087 Pāli-English Dictionary Phalati {Phalati} [pha] to split, break open=*sphal or *sphaṭ, cp. phāṭeti. On etym. see also Lüders, K.Z. XLII, 198 sq.] 1. to split, burst open (intrs.) A I.77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase "muddhā sattadhā phaleyya," as a formula of threat or warning "your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces," e. g. D I.95; S I.50; Sn 983; J I.54; IV.320 (me); V.92 (=bhijjetha C.); Miln 157 (satadhā for satta°); DhA I.41 (m. te phalatu s.); VvA 68; whereas a similar phrase in Sn 988 sq. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti=phalati). - Caus. phāleti (& phāṭeti). - pp. phalita & phulla. - 2. to become ripe, to ripen Vin II.108; J III.251; PvA 185. Phalamaya {Phalamaya} stands in all probability for phalika-maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha-maya & loha-maya (& aṭṭhi°, danta°, veḷu° etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin I.203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); II.115 (sattha-daṇḍa, scissors-handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The trsln "made of fruits" seems out of place (so Kern, Toev. s. v.), one should rather expect "made of crystal" by the side of made of wood, copper, bone, ivory, etc. Phalavant {Phalavant} (adj.) [fr. phala] bearing or having fruit J III.251. Phalasata {Phalasata} see palasata.-At J VI.510 it means "goldbronze" (as material of which a "sovaṇṇa-kaṃsa" is made). Phalika1 {Phalika} [fr. phala] a fruit vendor Miln 331. Phalika2 & Phalikā {Phalika} {Phalika} (f.) [also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sk. sphaṭika; on change ṭ>ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386. The Prk. forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya, see Pischel, Gr. § 206] crystal, quartz Vin II.112; J VI.119 (°kā=phaḷika-bhittiyo C.); Vv 351 (=phalika-maṇi-mayā bhittiyo VvA 160); 783 (°kā); Miln 267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ). Phalita1 {Phalita} (adj.) [sporadic spelling for palita] grey-haired PvA 153. Phalita2 {Phalita} [pp. of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3] broken, only in phrase hadayaṃ phalitaṃ his heart broke DhA I.173; hadayena phalitena with broken heart J I.65. Phalita3 {Phalita} [pp. of phal to bear fruit] fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin II.108; J I.18; Miln 107, 280. Phalin {Phalin} (adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit J V.242. Phalina {Phalina} (adj.) [fr. phala, phalin?] at J V.92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean "bearing fruit," since it is used as Ep. of a bird (°sakuṇī). The Cy. expln is sakuṇapotakānaṃ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina-sakuṇī." The v. l. SS is phalīna & palīna. Phalima {Phalima} (adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit, full of fruit J III.493. Pāli Text Society 1088 Pāli-English Dictionary Phalu {Phalu} [cp. Vedic paru] a knot or joint in a reed, only in cpd. °bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint D I.5; Vin IV.34, 35. Phaleti {Phaleti} at D I.54 is spurious reading for paleti (see palāyati), expld by gacchati DA I.165; meaning "runs," not with trsln "spreads out" [to sphar]. Phallava {Phallava} is spelling for pallava is spelling for pallava sprout, at J III.40. Phassa1 {Phassa} [cp. Ved. sparśa, of spṛś: see phusati] contact, touch (as sense or senseimpression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaṃ). It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression, and consists of a combination of the sense, the object, and perception, as expld at M I.111: tiṇṇaṃ (i. e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu-viññāṇa) sangati phasso; and gives rise to feeling: phassapaccayā vedanā. (See paṭicca-samuppāda & for expln Vism 567; VbhA 178 sq.). - Cp. D I.42 sq.; III.228, 272, 276; Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); Sn 737, 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. SnA 517); J V.441 (rājā dibba-phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i. e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho=phutto); VbhA 177 sq. (in detail), 193, 265; PvA 86 (dup° of bad touch, bad to the touch, i. e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Th 1, 783. See on phassa: Dhs. trsl. 5 & introd. (lv.) lxiii.; Cpd. 12, 14, 94. -āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) PvA 52. -āhāra "touch-food," acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz. phass°, mano-saðcetanā° (n. of representative cogitation) and viððāṇ° (of intellection) Dhs 71-73; one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or "food," with ref. to the 3 vedanās Vism 341. -kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu-samphasso, sota°, ghāna°, kāya°, mano° D III.243. sampanna endowed with (lovely) touch, soft, beautiful to feel J V.441 (cp. phassita). Phassa2 {Phassa} (adj.) [grd. fr. phusati, corresp. to Sk. spṛśya] to be felt, esp. as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful J IV.450 (gandhehi ph.). Phassati {Phassati} stands for phusati at Vism 527 in def. of phassa ("phassatī ti phasso"). Phassanā {Phassana} (f.) [abstr. fr. phassa] touch, contact with DhsA 167 (jhānassa lābho . . . patti . . . phassanā sacchikiriyā). Phassita {Phassita} (adj.) [pp. of phasseti=Sk. sparśayati to bring into contact] made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd. suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical J I.220 (cīvara), 394 (dantā); IV.188 (dant'āvaraṇaṃ); V.197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read °phassita for °phussita), 216 (°cheka-karaṇa); VvA 275 (as expln of atīva sangata Vv 642). - Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at J V.252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained) where vv. ll. give passita & phussita. Phasseti {Phasseti} [Caus. of phusati1] to touch, attain J V.251 (rājā dhammaṃ phassayaṃ=C. phassayanto; vv. ll. pa° & phu°); Miln 338 (amataṃ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.). Pass. phassīyati Vin II.148 (kavāṭā na ph.; v. l. phussiy°). - pp. phassita & phussita3. *Phāṭeti {Phateti} is conjectured reading for pāteti in phrase kaṭṭhaṃ pāteti M I.21, and in adhipāteti to split (see adhipāta & vipāta). The derivation of these expressions from pat is out of place, where close relation to phāleti (phalati) is evident, and a derivation from phaṭ=sphat, as in Sk. sphāṭayati to split, is the only right expln of meaning. In that case we Pāli Text Society 1089 Pāli-English Dictionary should put phal=sphaṭ, where l=ṭ, as in many Pali words, cp. phalika < sphaṭika (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386). The Prk. correspondent is phāḍei (Pischel, Gr. § 208). Phāṇita {Phanita} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. phāṇita] 1. juice of the sugar cane, raw sugar, molasses (ucchu-rasaṃ gahetvā kataphāṇitaṃ VvA 180) Vin II.177; D I.141; Vv 3525; 404; J I.33, 120, 227; Miln 107; DhA II.57. phāṇitassa puṭaṃ a basket of sugar S I.175; J IV.366; DhA IV.232. - 2. (by confusion or rightly?) salt J III.409 (in expln of aloṇika=phāṇita-virahita). -odaka sugar water J III.372, -puṭa sugar basket J IV.363. Phāti {Phati} (f.) [cp. Sk. sphāti, fr. sphāy, sphāyate to swell, increase (Idg. *spē(i), as in Lat. spatium, Ohg. spuot, Ags. spēd=E. speed; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. spatium), pp. sphīta=P. phīta] swelling, increase J II.426 (=vaḍḍhi); Vism 271 (vuddhi+). Usually combd with kṛ, as phāti-kamma increase, profit, advantage Vin II.174; VbhA 334 & phāti-karoti to make fat, to increase, to use to advantage M I.220=A V.347; A III.432. Phāruka {Pharuka} (adj.) at VvA 288 is not clear; meaning something like "bitter," combd with kasaṭa; v. l. pāru°. Probably=phārusaka. Phāruliya {Pharuliya} at Vbh 350 (in thambha-exegesis) is faulty spelling for phārusiya (nt.) harshness, unkindness, as evidence of id. passage at VbhA 469 shows (with expln "pharusassa puggalassa bhāvo phārusiyaṃ"). Phārusaka {Pharusaka} [fr. pharusa, cp. Sk. *pāruṣaka Mvyut 103, 143] 1. a certain flower, the (bitter) fruit of which is used for making a drink Vin I.246; Vv 3331=DhA III.316. - 2. N. of one of Indra's groves J VI.278, similarly Vism 424; VbhA 439. Phāla1 {Phala} (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic phāla] ploughshare S I.169; Sn p. 13 & V.77 (expld as "phāletī ti ph." SnA 147); J I.94; IV.118; V.104; Ud 69 (as m.); DhA I.395. Phāla2 {Phala} [to phala3] an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla A IV.70 for phāla. Kern comments on the word at Toev. II.139. See Vin I.225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; v. l. balo corr. to bālo; corresp. with guḷa); A IV.70 (divasa-santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule); J V.268; V.109 (phāle ciraratta-tāpite, v. l. pāle, hale, thāle; corresp. with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), id. V.113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti, v. l. vālehi). Phāla3 {Phala} in loṇa-maccha° a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism 28. Phālaka {Phalaka} (adj.) [fr. phāleti] splitting; one who splits Vism 413 (kaṭṭha°). Phālana {Phalana} (nt.) [fr. phāleti] splitting J I.432 (dāru°); Vism 500 (vijjhana°). Phālita {Phalita} [=Sk. sphārita, sphar] 1. made open, expanded, spread J III.320 (+vikasita). - 2. split [fr. phāleti phal], split open Vism 262=VbhA 245 (°haliddi-vaṇṇa). Pāli Text Society 1090 Pāli-English Dictionary Phāliphulla {Phaliphulla} [either Intensive of phulla, or Der. fr. pariphulla in form phaliphulla] in full blossom M I.218; J I.52. Phālibhaddaka {Phalibhaddaka} is spurious spelling for pāli° at J II.162 (v. l. pātali-bhaddaka). Cp. Prk. phālihadda (=pāribhadra Pischel, Gr. § 208). Phālima (adj.) [either fr. Caus. of phal1 (phāleti), or fr. sphar (cp. phārita, i. e. expanded), or fr. sphāy (swell, increase, cp. sphāra & sphārī bhavati to open, expand)] expanding, opening, blossoming in cpd. aggi-nikāsi-phālima paduma J III.320 (where Cy. explns by phālita vikasita). {Phalima} Phāleti {Phaleti} [Caus. of phalati, phal; a variant is phāṭeti fr. sphaṭ, which is identical with *(s)phal] to split, break, chop, in phrases 1. kaṭṭhaṃ phāleti to chop sticks (for firewood) Vin I.31; J II.144; Pv II.951, besides which the phrase kaṭṭhaṃ *phāṭeti. 2. sīsaṃ (muddhā) sattadhā phāleti (cp. adhipāteti & phalati) DhA I.17 (perhaps better with v. l. phal°), 134. - 3. (various:) A I.204=S II.88; J II.398; Nd2 483; Vism 379 (kucchiṃ; DhA IV.133 (hadayaṃ). - pp. phālita. Caus. II. phālāpeti to cause to split open J III.121; Miln 157 (v. l. phāḷāp°). Phāsu {Phasu} (adj.) [etym.? Trenckner, Notes 82 (on Miln 1417: corr. J.P.T.S. 1908, 136 which refers it to Miln 1315) suggests connection with Vedic prāśu enjoying, one who enjoys, i.e. a guest, but this etym. is doubtful; cp. phāsuka. A key to its etym. may be found in the fact that it never occurs by itself in form phāsu, but either in composition or as °ka] pleasant, comfortable; only neg. a° in phrase aphāsu-karoti to cause discomfort to (dat.) Vin IV.290; and in cpds. °kāma anxious for comfort, desirous of (others) welfare D III.164; °vihāra comfort, ease Vin II.127; D I.204; Dhs 1348=Miln 367 (cp. DhsA 404); Miln 14; Vism 33; VbhA 270; PvA 12. Phāsu {Phasu} at Miln 146 (cp. p. 425) "bhaggā phāsū" is un certain reading, it is not phāsuka; it may represent a pāsa snare, sling. The likeness with phāsukā bhaggā (lit.) of J I.493 is only accidental. Phāsuka {Phasuka} (adj.) [fr. phāsu. Cp. Prk. phāsuya; acc. to Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 208 Jain Sk. prāsuka is a distortion of P. phāsuka. Perhaps phāsu is abstracted from phāsuka] pleasant, convenient, comfortable J III.343; IV.30; DhA II.92; PvA 42. -aphāsuka unpleasant, uncomfortable, not well J II.275, 395; DhA I.28; II.21. - Note. It seems probable that phāsuka represents a Sk. *sparśuka (cp. Pischel § 62), which would be a der. fr. spṛś in same meaning as phassa2 ("lovely"). This would confirm the suggestion of phāsu being a secondary formation. Phāsukā {Phasuka} (f.) [cp. Sk *pārśukā & Ved. pārśva, see passa2] a rib, only in pl. phāsukā Vin I.74 (upaḍḍha° bhaðjitabbā), in phrase sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā J I.493 (lit.), which is fig. applied at Dh 154 (expld as "sabbā avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā" at DhA III.128), with which cp. bhaggā phāsū at Miln 146; both the latter phrases prob. of diff. origin. - (adj.) (-°) in phrase mahā°passa the flank (lit. the side of the great ribs) J I.164, 179; III.273; abs. mahā° with great ribs J V.42; uggata° with prominent ribs PvA 68 (for upphāsulika adj. Pv II.11). - in cpds. as phāsuka°, e. g. °aṭṭhīni the rib-bones (of which there are 24) Vism 254 (v. l. pāsuka°); VbhA 237; °dvaya pair of ribs Vism 252; VbhA 235. - See also pāsuka, pāsuḷa & the foll. Pāli Text Society 1091 Pāli-English Dictionary Phāsulikā {Phasulika} (f.) [fr. phāsuḷi] rib, only in cpd. upphāsulika (adj.) Pv II.11. Phāsuḷā {Phasula} [for phāsukā] rib S II.255 (phāsuḷ-antarikā). Phāsuḷī {Phasuli} [cp. phāsukā & phāsuḷā] a rib M I.80. Phiya {Phiya} [etym. unknown] oar Sn 321 (+aritta rudder, expld by dabbi-padara SnA 330); J IV.21 (°ārittaṃ). See also piya2 which is the more freq. spelling of phiya. Phīta {Phita} [pp. of sphāy, cp. Sk. sphīta & see phāti] opulent, prosperous, rich; in the older texts only in stock phrase iddha ph. bahujana (rich & prosperous & well-populated) D I.211 (of the town Nālandā); II.146 (of Kusāvatī); M I.377; (of Nālandā) II.71 (of country); S II.107 (fig. of brahmacariyaṃ; with bahujañña for °jana); A III.215 (of town). By itself & in other combn in the Jātakas, e. g. J IV.135 (=samiddha); VI.355 (v. l. pīta). With iddha & detailed description of all classes of the population (instead of bahujana) of a town Miln 330. Phuṭa1 {Phuta} [pp. of pharati] 1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, permeated, thrilled (cp. pari°) D I.73, 74 (pītisukhena; T. prints phuta; v. l. phuṭa; v. l. at DA I.217 p(h)uṭṭha); M I.276; J I.33 (sarīraṃ pītiyā ph.); DhA II.118 (pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro); SnA 107 (referring to the nerves of taste). - 2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with (instr.) Vin I.182 (lohitena); J V.266 (in nirayapassage T. reads bhūmi yojana-sataṃ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti, i. e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272 explns by "ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti." The id. p. at Nd1 405=Nd2 304III D reads bh. yojana-sataṃ pharitvā (intrs.: expanding, wide) tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading). - See also ophuṭa & cp. phuta3. Phuṭa2 {Phuta} [pp. of sphuṭ to expand, blossom] blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs IV.49 (°kumuda). Cp. phuṭita. Phuṭa3 {Phuta} at M I.377 (sabba-vāri°, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toev. s. v. into pūta. The meaning is "filled with, spread with," thus=phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The v. l. at M I.377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa & puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, M I.553. A similar meaning ("full of, occupied by, overflowing with") is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage A I.159 (Avīci maððe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaṃsa (J.P.T.S. 1886, V.39) & remarks of Morris's J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. - The same passage as M I.377 is found at D I.57, where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DA I.168), with vv. ll. puṭṭha & phuṭa. Phuṭita {Phutita} [for phoṭita, pp. of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ] 1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstr. nt. phutitattaṃ being tossed about Miln 116 (v. l. put °). - 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Th 2, 269 (so read for T. phuṭika, ThA 212 explns by bāhita & has v. l. niphuṭita). Phuṭṭha {Phuttha} [pp. of phusati1] touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) "thrilled, permeated" Vin I.200 (ābādhena); A II.174 (rogena); J I.82 (mettacittena, v. l. puṭṭha); V.441 (dibbaphassena); Vism 31 (°samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā); VvA 6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā & rogena). On phuṭṭha at D I.57 see phuṭa3. Cp. sam°. Pāli Text Society 1092 Pāli-English Dictionary Phunati {Phunati} [?] to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at J VI.108 (angārakāsuṃ ph.; v. l. punanti perhaps better; C. explns by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read dhunati. Phulaka {Phulaka} (=pulaka) a kind of gem VvA 111. Phulla1 {Phulla} [pp. of phalati, or root formation fr. phull, cp. phalita3] blossoming, in blossom J V.203. Also as Intensive phāliphulla "one mass of flowers" M I.218; J I.52. Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2. Phulla2 {Phulla} [pp. of phalati, cp. phalita2] broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa-phulla unbroken (q. v.), Pv IV.176 and passim. Phullita {Phullita} [pp. of phullati] in flower, blossoming J V.214 (for phīta=rich), 216 (su°-vana). Phusati1 {Phusati} [spṛś, fr. which sparśa=phassa; cp. also phassati] 1. (lit.) to touch Vism 463 (phusatī ti phasso); DA I.61 (aor. phusī=metri causa for phusi); Miln 157 (grd. aphusa not to be touched). - 2. (fig.) [see on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Cpd. 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e. g. from the foll. explns of Cys.: D I.74 parippharati=samantato phusati DA I.217; D II.186 ≈ pharitvā=phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā Vism 308] to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in foll. phrases: ceto-samādhiṃ ph. D I.13=III.30, 108 etc.; nirodhaṃ D I.184; samatha-samādhiṃ Vv 169 (reads āphusiṃ but should prob. be aphusiṃ as VvA 84, expld by adhigacchiṃ); phalaṃ aphussayi (aor. med.) Pv IV.188; cp. PvA 243; amataṃ padaṃ Pv IV.348; amataṃ Miln 338 (but T. reads khippaṃ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaṃ kammaṃ Miln 108 (of Devadatta). - pp. phuṭṭha. Cp. upa°. Phusati2 {Phusati} this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sk. roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the foll. 2 Idg. roots: 1. Idg. *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sk. sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Gr. sfarage/w; Ags. spearca=E. spark, E. spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). - 2. Idg. *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sk. pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Gr. perkno/s of dark (lit. spotted) colour; Lat. spargere=Ger. sprengen. To this root belong P. pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita. - Inf. phusituṃ, conjectured reading at Vin I.205 for T. phosituṃ (vv. ll. posituṃ & dhovituṃ), & Vin II.151 for T. posituṃ; Vin. Texts III.169 translate "bespatter." Phusana {Phusana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 1] touch Vism 463. Phusanā {Phusana} (f.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 2] attainment, gaining, reaching Vism 278 (=phuṭṭhaṭṭhāna); DhA I.230 (ðāṇa°); VvA 85 (samādhi°). Phusāyati {Phusayati} [Caus. of pruṣ, but formed fr. P. phusati2] to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle S I.104 sq., 154, 184 (devo ekaṃ ekaṃ ph. "drop by drop"). See also anuphusāyati (so read for °phusīyati). Pāli Text Society 1093 Pāli-English Dictionary Phusita1 {Phusita} (nt.) [either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sk. pṛṣata (see pasata2)] rain-drop M III.300; S II.135; DhA III.243. The Prk. equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Gr. § 208), cp. Ger. sprenkeln> E. sprinkle. Phusita2 {Phusita} [pp. of phusati2 2. i. e. pruṣ, cp. Sk. pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope] spotted, coloured, variegated (with flowers) Sn 233 (°agga=supupphit' agga-sākha KhA 192). Phussita3 & Phusita3 {Phussita} {Phusita} [=phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puṃsayati] touched, put on, in °aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings) M I.76 (reads phassit°; cp. v. l. on p. 535 phussit°); A I.101; Th 1, 385; J VI.510. Phusitaka {Phusitaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla° deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain S II.32 (reads phulla-phusitaka); III.141; A I.243; II.140; V.114; Vism 259. Phussa1 {Phussa} [fr. puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. puṣya] 1. see phussa3 2. - 2. N. of a month (Dec.-Jan.) J I.86. N. of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 (=phussa-tārakā VvA 236). - Frequent as Np., cp. Vism 422, and combns like °deva, °mitta. Phussa2 {Phussa} [ger. of phusati1] touching, feeling, realising; doubled at D I.45, 54. Phussa3 {Phussa} (adj.-n.) [grd. formation fr. phusati2 2; scarcely fr. Sk. puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather "speckled" in all senses. The Sk. puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of P. phussa°] 1. speckled, gaily-coloured, °kokila the spotted cuckoo [Kern, Toev. s. v. phussa however takes it as "male-cuckoo," Sk. puṃs-kokila] J V.419, 423; VvA 57. - As phussaka at A I.188 (so read for pussaka). - 2. in sense of "clear, excellent, exquisite" (or it is puṣya in sense of "substance, essence" of anything, as Geiger, P. Gr. § 40 1a?) in °ratha [cp. Sk, puṣpa°, but prob. to be read puṣya°?] a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord J II.39; III.238; IV.34; V.248; VI.39 sq.) v. l. pussa°); PvA 74. -rāga [cp. Sk. puṣpa-rāga] topaz Miln 118; VvA 111. - At Nd1 90 as v. l. to be preferred to pussa° in °tila, °tela, °dantakaṭṭha, etc. with ref. to their use by Brahmins. Pheggu {Pheggu} [cp. Vedic phalgu & P. phaggu in form] accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with ref. to trees (freq. in similes), in sequence mūla, sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at M I.192 sq., 488; D III.51; S IV.168; A I.152 (pheggu+ sāra, v. l. phaggu); II.110=Pug 52; A III.20; J III.431 (opp. sāra); Miln 267, 413 (tacchako phegguṃ apaharitvā sāraṃ ādiyati). Phegguka (-°) (adj.) [fr. pheggu] having worthless wood, weak, inferior M I.488 (apagata°, where °ka belongs to the whole cpd.); J III.318 (a°+sāramaya). {Phegguka} Pheggutā {Phegguta} (f.) [abstr. fr. pheggu] state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pug A 229. Pheṇa {Phena} [cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp°, connected with Lat. spūma, scum, Ags. fām=Ger. feim=E. foam] scum, foam, froth, only in cpds. viz.: -uddehakaṃ (adv.) (paccamāna, boiling) Pāli Text Society 1094 Pāli-English Dictionary with scum on top, throwing up foam M III.167; A I.141; Nd2 304III C; J III.46; Miln 357. -paṭala a film of scum Vism 359; VbhA 65. -piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam S III.140 sq.=Vism 479 (in simile of rūpa); Nd2 680 AII; Vism 40 (in comp); VbhA 32 sq. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism 171, 259, 345; VbhA 242. -mālā a wreath or garland of scum Miln 117. -mālin with a wreath of scum Miln 260. -missa mixed with froth Vism 263. -vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism 263. Pheṇaka {Phenaka} =pheṇa Vism 254; VbhA 237. Phoṭa {Phota} [fr. sphuṭ, cp. Sk. sphoṭa] swelling, boil, blister J IV.457; VI.8 (v. l. pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. Vism 258; VbhA 242. Phoṭana {Photana} "applause," in brahma-pphoṭana at DhA III.210 should be taken as ā+phoṭana (=apphoṭana). Phoṭeti {Photeti} [Caus. of sphuṭ, if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā+phoṭeti= Sk. āsphoṭayati] to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuṃ (v. l. appoṭh°) Miln 13, 18; Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (v. l. appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraṃ adāsi J VI.486. Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q. v.), to snap one's fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At DhA III.210 we read fut. apphoṭessāmi (i. e. ā+phoṭ). Phoṭṭhabba {Photthabba} (nt.) [grd. of phusati] tangible, touch, contact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca) touch ("kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā" D III.226, 250, 269; Nd2 p. 238 under rūpa). See also āyatana. - D III.102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c'eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with pl. like m.); VbhA 79 (°dhātu). Phosita {Phosita} [pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruṣita] sprinkled J VI.47 (candana°, v. l. pusita). Phoseti {Phoseti} [Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati=P. phusayati] to sprinkle (over) Vin II.205 (inf. phosituṃ). - pp. phosita. Cp. pari°. Pāli Text Society 1095 Pāli-English Dictionary B Ba {Ba} (indecl.) the sound (& letter) b, often substituted for or replaced by p (& ph): so is e. g. in Bdhgh's view pahuta the word bahuta, with p for b (KhA 207), cp. bakkula, badara, badālatā, baddhacara, bandhuka 2, bala, balīyati, bahuka, bahūta, billa, bella; also paribandha for paripantha; phāla2. Also substituted for v, cp. bajjayitvā v.l. vajjetvā DAI, 4, and see under Nibb-. Baka {Baka} [cp. Epic Sk. baka] 1. a crane, heron Cp. III.102; J I.205 (°suṇikā), 221, 476; II.234; III.252. - 2. N. of a dweller in the Brahma world M I.326; S I.142. Bakula {Bakula} [cp. Class. Sk. bakula, N. of the tree Mimusops elengi, and its (fragrant) flower] in milāta°-puppha is v. l. KhA 60 (see App. p. 870 Pj.) for °ākuli°, which latter is also read at Vism 260. Bakkula {Bakkula} [=vyākula? Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 94] a demon, uttering horrible cries, a form assumed by the Yakkha Ajakalāpaka, to terrify the Buddha Ud 5 (see also ākulī, where pākula is proposed for bakkula). Bajjha {Bajjha} see bandhati. Bajjhati {Bajjhati} Pass. of bandhati (q. v.). Battiṃsa {Battimsa} (num. card.) [for dvat-tiṃsa] thirty-two J III.207. Badara {Badara} (m. & nt.) [cp. Ved. badara & badarī] the fruit of the jujube tree (Zizyphus jujuba), not unlike a crabapple in appearance & taste, very astringent, used for medicine A I.130=Pug 32; A III.76; Vin IV.76; J III.21; DhsA 320 (cited among examples of acrid flavours); VvA 186. Spelling padara for b° at J IV.363; VI.529. -aṭṭhi kernel of the j. SnA 247. -paṇḍu light yellow (fresh) jujube-fruit A I.181 (so read for bhadara°). -missa mixture or addition of the juice of jujube-fruits Vin IV.76. -yūsa juice of the j. fruit VvA 185. Badarī {Badari} (f.) [cp. Sk. badarī] the jujube tree J II.260. Badālatā (f.) [etym. uncertain, may it be *padālatā, pa+ n. ag. of dal Caus., lit. "destroyer"?] a creeper (with thorns Kern, Toev. s. v.) D III.87=Vism 418; Bdhgh says (see Dial. III.84) "a beautiful creeper of sweet taste." Baddha1 {Badalata} {Baddha} [pp. of bandhati] 1. bound, in bondage M I.275; S I.133; IV.91; Sn 957 (interpreted as "baddhacara" by Nd1 464); Dh 324. - 2. snared, trapped J II.153; III.184; IV.251, 414. - 3. made firm, settled, fastened, bound (to a cert. place) KhA 60 (°pitta, opp. abaddha°). 4. contracted, acquired Vin III.96. - 5. bound to, addicted or attached to Sn 773 (bhavasāta°, cp. Nd1 30). - 6. put together, kneaded, made into cakes (of meal) J III.343; V.46; VI.524. - 7. bound together, linked, clustered DhA I.304 kaṇṇika° (of thoughts). - 9. set, made up (of the mind) DhA I.11 (mānasaṃ te b.). - Cp. ati°, anu°, a°, ni°, paṭi°, vini°, sam°. -añjalika keeping the Pāli Text Society 1096 Pāli-English Dictionary hands reverently extended Dāvs III.30. -rāva the cry of the bound (or trapped) J IV.279, 415 (v. l. bandhana°). -vera having contracted an enmity, hostile, bearing a grudge DhA I.324. Baddha2 {Baddha} (nt.) [fr. bandhati] a leather strap, a thong Vin I.287 (T. bandha perhaps right, cp. ābandhana 3); PvA 127. Baddhacara {Baddhacara} see paddhacara. Badhira {Badhira} (adj.) [cp. Vedic badhira, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fatuus, comparing Goth. baups and M. Irish bodar] deaf Vin I.91, 322; Th 1, 501= Miln 367; J I.76 (jāti°); V.387; VI.7; DhA I.312. See also mūga. -dhātuka deaf by nature J II.63; IV.146; DhA I.346. Bandha {Bandha} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bandha, fr. bandh] 1. bond, fetter It 56 (abandho Mārassa, not a victim of M.); Nd1 328 (taṇhā°, diṭṭhi°); ThA 241. - 2. one who binds or ties together, in assa° horsekeeper, groom J II.98; V.441, 449; DhA I.392. - 3. a sort of binding: maṇḍala° with a circular b. (parasol) Vin IV.338, salāka° with a notched b. ibid. - 4. a halter, tether Dpvs I.76. Cp. vinibandha. Bandhaka {Bandhaka} as v. l. of vaṭṭaka see aṃsa°. Bandhakī {Bandhaki} (f.) [fr. bandhaka, cp. Epic Sp. bandhukī a low woman=pāṃśukā & svairinī Halāy 2, 341] an unchaste woman (lit. binder) Vin IV.224 (pl. bandhakiniyo), 265 (id.); J V.425, 431 (va°). Bandhati {Bandhati} [Vedic badhnāti, later Sk. bandhati, Idg. *bhendh, cp. Lat. offendimentum i. e. band; Goth. bindan=Ohg, bintan, E. bind; Sk. bandhu relation; Gr. penqero/s father-in-law, pei_sma bond, etc.] to bind etc. - 1. Forms: Imper. bandha D II.350; pl. bandhantu J I.153. Pot. bandheyya S IV.198; Vin III.45; Fut. bandhayissati Mhvs 24. 6; Aor. abandhi J III.232, & bandhi J I.292; DhA I.182. Ger. bandhitvā Vin I.46; S IV.200; J I.253, 428, & bandhiya Th 2, 81. Inf. bandhituṃ Th 2, 299. Caus. bandheti (see above Fut.) & bandhāpeti (see below). - II. Meanings1. to bind S IV.200 (rajjuyā). fig. combine, unite DhA II.189 (gharāvāsena b. to give in marriage). - 2. to tie on, bind or put on to (loc.) DhA I.182 (dasante). fig. to apply to, put to, settle on DhA II.12 (mānasaṃ paradāre). - 3. to fix, prepare, get up, put together J IV.290 (ukkā); also in phrase cakk'āticakkaṃ mañc'ātimañcaṃ b. to put wheels upon wheels & couches upon couches J II.331. IV.81; DhA IV.61. fig. to start, undertake, begin, make, in phrases āghātaṃ b. to bear malice DhA II.21; and veraṃ b. to make enmity against (loc.) J II.353. - 4. to acquire, get J III.232 (atthaṃ b.= nibbatteti C.). - 5. to compose Miln 272 (suttaṃ); J II.33; V.39. - Caus. II. bandhāpeti to cause to be bound (or fettered) Vin IV.224, 316 (opp. mocāpeti); Nd2 304III. B (bandhanena); PvA 4, 113. - Pass. bajjhati Nd2 74 (for bujjhati, as in palābujjhati to be obstructed: see palibuddhati). I. Forms Ind. 3rd pl. bajjhare Th 1, 137; pret. 3rd pl. abajjhare J I.428. Imper. bajjhantu S IV.309; A V.284. Pot. bajjheyya S II.228. Aor. bajjhi J II.37; IV.414. Ger. bajjha J IV.441, 498, & bajjhitvā J II.153; IV.259; V.442. - II. Meanings.-1. to be bound, to be imprisoned Sn 508 (cp. SnA 418); J IV.278. - 2. to be caught (in a sling or trap) J III.330; IV.414. - 3. to incur a penalty (with loc., e. g. bahudaṇḍe) J IV.116. - 4. to be captivated by, struck or taken by, either with loc. J I.368 (bajjhitvā & bandhitvā in Pass. sense); V.465; or with instr. J I.428; IV.259. - pp. baddha (q. v.). - Cp. ati°, anu°, ā, o°, paṭi°, sam°. Pāli Text Society 1097 Pāli-English Dictionary Bandhana {Bandhana} (nt.) [fr. bandh, cp. Vedic bandhana] 1. binding, bond, fetter Vin I.21; D I.226, 245 (paðca kāmaguṇā); III.176; M II.44; S I.8, 24 (Māra°), 35, 40; IV.201 sq. (5 fold) to bind the king of the Devas or Asuras, 291; Sn 532, 948; Th 1, 414; 2, 356 (Māra°) Dh 345 sq.; J II.139, 140; III.59=PvA 4; V.285; Nd2 304III. B (var. bonds, andhu°, rajju° etc. cp. Nd1 433); DA I.121 (with ref. to kāmā). - 2. binding, tying, band, ligature; tie (also fig.) Vin I.204 (°suttaka thread for tying) II.135 (kāya° waistband); II.117 (°rajju for robes); S III.155 (vetta° ligatures of bamboo; cp. V.51); Sn 44 (gihi°, cp. Nd2 228: puttā ca dāsī ca); DhA I.4 (ghara° tie of the house); KhA 51 (paṭṭa°). - 3. holding together, composition, constitution Vin I.96 (sarīra°), cp. III.28. fig. composition (of literature) J II.224 (gāthā°). - 4. joining together, union, company DhA II.160 (gaṇa° joining in companies). - 5. handle Vin II.135. - 6. piecing together Vin I.254 (°mattena when it, i. e. the stuff, has only been pieced together, see Vin. Texts II.153 n.). - 7. strap (?) doubtful reading in aṃsa° (q. v.) Vv 3340, where we should prefer to read with v. l. °vaṭṭaka. - 8. doubtful in meaning in cpd. paṃca-vidha-bandhana "the fivefold fixing," as one of the torments in Niraya. It is a sort of crucifixion (see for detail pañca 3) Nd2 304III. C=Nd1 404; J I.174; PvA 221; VbhA 278. In this connection it may mean "set," cp. mūla°. - On use of bandhana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. Cp. vini°. -āgāra "fetter-house," prison D I.72; M I.75; Vin III.151; J III.326; DhA II.152; VvA 66; PvA 153. -āgārika prison-keeper, head-jailer A II.207. Bandhanīya {Bandhaniya} (adj.) [grd. of bandhati] 1. to be bound or fettered Miln 186. - 2. apt to bind, binding, constraining D II.337 (cp. Dial. II.361); Th 2, 356. Bandhava {Bandhava} [cp. Class. Sk. bāndhava] 1. kinsman, member of a clan or family, relative A III.44; Sn 60 (pl. bandhavāni in poetry; cp. Nd2 455); Dh 288 (pl. bandhavā); J II.316; V.81; DA I.243. - 2. (-°) one who is connected with or belongs to Sn 140 (manta°, wellacquainted with Mantras; cp. SnA 192; vedabandhū veda-paṭisaraṇā ti vuttaṃ hoti); J V.335 (bodhaneyya°); cp. bandhu 3. Bandhu {Bandhu} [Vedic bandhu, see bandhati & cp. bandhava] 1. a relation, relative, kinsman; pl. bandhū J IV.301; PvA 86 (=ðātī) & bandhavo Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 in id. p. reads bandhū). - Ādicca° kinsman of the Sun, an Ep. of the Buddha Vin II.296; A II.17; Sn 54, 915, 1128, cp. Nd2 152b; Vv 2413; 7810, cp. VvA 116. - Four kinds of relations enumd at Nd1 11. viz. ðāti°, gotta°, manta° (where Nd2 455 reads mitta°), sippa°. - 2. Ep. of Brahmā, as ancestor of the brahmins DA I.254: see below °pāda. - 3. (°-) connected with, related to, dealing with [cp. Vedic amṛtabandhu RV X.725] S I.123 (pamatta°); 128; Sn 241, 315, 430, 911; J IV.525; Miln 65 (kamma°); SnA 192 (veda°.). - f. bandhunī J VI.47 (said of the town of Mithilā (rāja°); expld by C. as "rājaðātakeh'eva puṇṇā"). -pāda the foot of Brahma, from which the Śūdras are said to have originated (cp. Sk. pādaja), in cpd. bandhupād'apacca "offering from the foot of our kinsman," applied as contemptuous epithet to the Samaṇas by a Brahmin D I.90; M I.334; S IV.117. Bandhuka {Bandhuka} (adj.) [fr. bandhu] 1. the plant Pentapetes phœnicea J IV.279 (°puppha, evidently only a contraction of bandhu-jīvaka, cp. C. bandhujīvaka- puppha; although Sk. bandhūka is given as syn. of bandhujīva at Halāyudha 2, 53). - 2. in bandhukaroga M II.121 prob. to be read paṇḍuka°, as v. l. BB; see paṇḍuroga. Bandhujīvaka {Bandhujivaka} [cp. Class. Sk. bandhujīva] the plant Pentapetes phœnicea M II.14 (°puppha); D II.111 (id.); J IV.279; Vism 174; DhsA 14; VvA 43, 161. Pāli Text Society 1098 Pāli-English Dictionary Bandhumant {Bandhumant} (adj.) [fr. bandhu, cp. Vedic bandhumant] having relatives, rich in kinsmen; only as Np. m bandhumā N. of father of the Buddha Vipassin D II.11=Vism 433; f. bandhumatī N. of mother of the Buddha Vipassin ibid.; also N. of a town D II.12 (capital of king Bandhumā); SnA 190=J IV.388 (where the latter has Vettavatī), and a river SnA 190= J IV.388 (: Vettavatī). Bandhuvant {Bandhuvant} (adj.) [bandhu+vant] having relatives, rich in relatives J VI.357. Babbaja {Babbaja} [cp. Vedic balbaja, doubtful whether it belongs to Lat. bulbus; for the initial b. very often p. is found: see pabbaja] a sort of coarse grass or reed, used to make slippers, etc. Vin I.190; D II.55; S II.92; III.137; IV.158; A II.211; Dh 345; DhA IV.55. -pādukā a slipper out of b. grass DhA III.451. -lāyaka cutter or reaper of grass S III.155; A III.365. Babbu {Babbu} (& °ka)Epic [Sk. babhruka a kind of ichneumon; Vedic babhru brown, cp. Lat. fiber=beaver, further connection "bear," see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fiber] a cat J I.480 (=biḷāra C.)=DhA II.152. Babbhara {Babbhara} [onomat., cp. Sk. balbalā-karoti to stammer or stutter, barbara=Gr. ba/rbaros stuttering, people of an unknown tongue, balbūtha Np. "stammerer"; also Lat. balbas, Ger. plappern, E. blab; babbhara is a redupl. formation fr. *bhara-bhara=barbara, cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 209; Geiger, P.Gr. § 20] imitation of a confused rumbling noise M I.128. - Cp. also P. mammana and sarasara. Barihin {Barihin} [cp. Sk. barhin] a peacock J IV.497. Barihisa {Barihisa} (nt.) [Vedic barhis] the sacrificial grass D I.141; M I.344; A II.207; Pug 56. Bala1 {Bala} (nt.) [Vedic bala, most likely to Lat. de-bilis "without strength" (cp. E. debility, P. dubbala), and Gr. be/ltistos (superl.)=Sk. baliṣṭha the strongest. The Dhātupāṭha (273) defines b. with pāṇane. At DhsA 124 bala is understood as "na kampati"] 1. strength, power, force D II.73; A I.244; Th 1, 188; Dh 109 (one of the 4 blessings, viz. āyu, vaṇṇa, sukha, bala; cp. DhA II.239); Pv I.512 (=kāya-bala PvA 30); I.76; VvA 4 (iddhi°); PvA 71 (id.), 82 (kamma°). - Of cases used as adv. balasā (instr.) is mentioned by Trenckner at Miln 430 (notes), cp. Prk. balasā (Pischel, Gr. § 364). yathā balaṃ according to one's power, i. e. as much as possible PvA 1, 54. The compn form of bala in conn. with kṛ is balī°, e. g. dubbalīkaraṇa making weak M III.4; Pug 59, 68; °karaṇin id. D III.183. - adj. bala strong J V.268, abala weak Sn 770, 1120, dubbala id. S I.222; J II.154; Nd1 12; PvA 55; compar. °tara M I.244, nt. n. abalaṃ weakness S I.222. - 2. an army, military force Mhvs 25, 57; SnA 357. See cpds. below. - Eight balāni or strong points are 1. of young children (ruṇṇa-balaṃ). - 2. of womanhood (kodha°). - 3. of robbers (āvudha°). - 4. of kings (issariya°), - 5. of fools (ujjhatti°). - 6. of wise men (nijjhatti°). - 7. of the deeply learned (paṭisankhāna°). - 8. of samaṇas & brāhmaṇas (khanti°) A IV.223 (where used as adj. -° strong in . . .); cp. Sn 212, 623. - Five balāni of women are: rūpabalaṃ, bhoga°, ðāti°, putta°, sīla° S IV.246-8. The five-fold force (balaṃ pañca-vidhaṃ) of a king J V.120, 121 consists of bāhābalaṃ strength of arms, bhoga° of wealth, amacca° of counsellors, abhijacca° of high birth, paððā° the force of wisdom; in the religious sense five balāni or powers are commonly enumd: saddhābalaṃ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, paððā° A III.12; D II.120; M II.12, III.296; S III.96, 153; IV.366, V.219, 249; Ps II.56, 86, 166, 174, 223; II.84, 133, 168 etc. They correspond to the 5 indriyāni and are developed with them. S V.219, 220; Nett 31; they are cultivated to destroy Pāli Text Society 1099 Pāli-English Dictionary the five uddhambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni S V.251. They are freq. referred to in instructions of the Buddha about the constituents of the "Dhamma," culminating in the eightfold Path, viz. cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, samappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, paðcindriyani, p. balāni, sattabojjhangāni, ariyo aṭṭhangiko maggo e. g. S III.96; Ps II.56; Nd1 13=360 =Nd2 420; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna; and passim. [Cp. BSk. catvāra ṛddhipādāḥ paðc'endriyāni p. balāni, sapta bodhyangāni etc. Divy 208.] Two balāni are specially mentioned A I.52 (paṭisankhānabalaṃ and bhāvanā°), also D III.213, followed here by the other "pair" satibalaṃ and samādhi°. There are four balāni of the ariyasāvaka, by which he overcomes the five fears (paðca bhayāni q. v.); the four are paððābalaṃ, viriya°, anavajja° sangāha° A IV.363 sq., as given at A II.141, also the foll. 3 groups of cattāri balāni:- (1) saddhābalaṃ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, cp. D III.229. - (2) sati° samādhi, anavajja°, sangāha°. (3) paṭisankhāna°, bhāvanā°, anavajja°, sangāha°. - For 4 balāni see also D III.229 note, and for paṭisankhānabala (power of computation) see Dhs. trsl. 1353. The ten balāni of the Tathāgata consist of his perfect comprehension in ten fields of knowledge A V.32 sq.; M I.69; Nd2 466; Miln 105, 285; VbhA 397. - In a similar setting 10 powers are given as consisting in the knowledge of the Paṭiccasamuppāda at S II.27, 28. - The balāni of the sāvaka are distinct from those of the Tathāgatha: Kvu 228 sq. - There are seven balāni D III.253, and seven khīṇāsava-balāni 283 i. e. saddhābalaṃ, viriya°, sati°, samādhi°, paððā°, hiri° and ottappa°. The same group is repeated in the Abhidhamma; Dhs 58, 95, 102; DhsA 126. The Ps. also enumerates seven khīṇāsavabalāni I.35; and sixty-eight balāni II.168 sq. -agga front of an army, troops in array D I.6; Vin IV.107, cp. DA I.85. -ānīka (adj.) with strong array Sn 623; Dh 399 (cp. DhA IV.164). -kāya a body of troops, an army cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 52 note; (also in BSk. e. g. Divy 63, 315) A I.109; IV.107, 110; S I.58; J I.437 (°ṃ saṃharati to draw up troops); II.76; III.319; V.124; VI.224, 451; DhA I.393; PugA 249. -koṭṭhaka fortress, camp J I.179; Mhvs 25, 29. -(k)kāra application of force, violence J I.476; II.421; III.447; instr. °ena by force PvA 68, 113. -gumba a serried troop J II.406. -cakka wheel of power, of sovereignty Dpvs VI.2. -ṭṭha a military official, palace guard, royal messenger Miln 234, 241, 264, 314; Mhvs 34, 17. -da strength-giving S I.32; Sn 297. -dāyin id. A II.64. -deva "God of strength" N. of the elder brother of Kaṇha J IV.82; Nd1 89, 92 (Vāsudeva+); Vism 233 (id). own-strong DhsA 118 (v. l. phala°). -vāhana troops, an army J II.319, IV.170, 433; VI.391, 458. -vīra a hero in strength Vv 531, cp. VvA 231. -sata for palāsata, q. v. (cp. J.P.T.S. 1908, 108 note). Bala2 {Bala} [cp. *Sk. bala: Halāyudha 5, 23; & P. balākā] a species of carrion crow J V.268; also in cpd. bal'ankapāda having crow's feet, i. e. spreading feet (perhaps for balāka°?) J VI.548 (C. explns by pattharita-pāda, read patthārita°). Balaka {Balaka} (adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in kisa° of meagre strength, weakly M I.226; and dub° weak M I.435. Cp. balika. Balatā {Balata} (f.) [abstr. fr. bala] strength, lit. strength-quality M I.325. Balati {Balati} [fr. bal, as in bala] to live KhA 124 (in def. of bālā as "balanti anantī ti bālā"). Balatta {Balatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bala, cp. balatā] strength, only in cpd. dubbalatta weakness J II.154. Balavatā {Balavata} (f.) [abstr. fr. balavant; cp. Epic Sk. balavattā] strength, force (also in military sense) J II.369 (ārakkhassa b.); Miln 101 (kusalassa & akusalassa kammassa b.). Pāli Text Society 1100 Pāli-English Dictionary Balavant {Balavant} (adj.) [fr. bala] strong, powerful, sturdy M I.244 (purisa) S I.222; J II.406; DhA II.208; VvA 35; PvA 94. Comparative balavatara Miln 131; f. °a(n)tarī Sdhp 452. In compn balava°, e. g. °gavā sturdy oxen M I.226; °vippaṭisāra deep remorse PvA 14, °balava very strong J II.406. -balavaṃ as nt. adv. "exceedingly," in cpd. balav'ābalavaṃ very (loud and) strong Vin II.1 (=suṭṭhu balavaṃ C.), and °paccūse very early in the morning Vism 93, and °paccūsasamaye id. J I.92; DhA I.26. Balasata {Balasata} see palasata. Balākā {Balaka} (f.) [cp. Vedic balākā, perhaps to Lat. fulica, Gr. falari/s a water fowl, Ohg. pelicha=Ger. belche] a crane Th 1, 307; J II.363; III.226; Miln 128 (°ānaṃ megha-saddena gabbhāvakkanti hoti); Vism 126 (in simile, megha-mukhe b. viya); DA I.91 (v. l. baka). Bali {Bali} [cp. Vedic bali; regarding etym. Grassmann connects it with bhṛ] 1. religious offering, oblation D II.74 (dhammika); A IV.17, 19; Sn 223; Mhvs 36, 88 (particularly to subordinate divinities, cp. Mhvs. trsln 263); DhA II.14 (v. l. °kamma). -pañca° the fivefold offering, i. e. ðāti°, atithi°, pubbapeta°, rāja°, devatā°, offering to kinsfolk, guests, the departed, the king, the gods; A II.68; III.45. - 2. tax, revenue (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 166 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 75) D I.135, 142; J I.199 (daṇḍa° fines & taxes), 339; DhA I.251 (daṇḍa°). - 3. Np. of an Asura D II.259. -kamma offering of food to bhūtas, devas & others J I.169, 260; II.149, 215; IV.246 (offering to tutelary genii of a city. In this passage the sacrifice of a human being is recommended); V.99, 473; SnA 138; Mhbv 28. -karaṇa oblation, offering of food PvA 81; VvA 8 (°pīṭha, reading doubtful, v. l. valli°). -kāraka offering oblations J I.384. -°nkatā one who offers (the five) oblations A II.68. -paṭiggāhaka receiving offerings, worthy of oblations J II.17 (yakkha; interpreted by Fick, Sociale Gliederung 79 as "tax-collector," hardly justified); f. °ikā A III.77 (devatā), 260 (id.), cp. BSk. balipratigrāhikā devatā Divy 1. -pīḷita crushed with taxes J V.98. -puṭṭha a crow (cp. Sk. balipuṣṭa "fed by oblations") Abhp 638. -vadda (cp. Sk. balivarda, after the Pali?) an ox, esp. an ox yoked to the plough or used in ploughing (on similes with b. see J.P.T.S. 1907, 349) S I.115, 170; IV.163 sq., 282 sq.; A II.108 sq.; Sn p. 13 (cp. SnA 137); Dh 152=Th 1, 1025; J I.57; V.104 (Sāliyo b. phālena pahaṭo); Vism 284 (in simile of their escape from the ploughman); DhA I.24 (dhuraṃ vahanto balivaddassa, v. l. balibaddassa); VvA 258 (vv. ll. °baddha & °bandha). The spelling balibadda occurs at Vin IV.312. -sādhaka tax collector, tax gatherer J IV.366; V.103 sq. -haraṇa taking oblations A V.79 (°vanasaṇḍa). Balika {Balika} (adj.) [fr. bala] strong; only in der. balikataraṃ (compar.) adv. in a stronger degree, more intensely, more Miln 84; & dubbalika weak ThA 211. Cp. balaka. Balin {Balin} (adj.) [fr. bala] strong Th 1, 12 (paððā°); Vv 647; Dh 280; J III.484; VI.147. Balisa & Baḷisa {Balisa} (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. baḍiśa] a fish-hook S II.226=IV.158 (āmisa-gataṃ b.); Nd2 374 (kāma°, v. l. palisa); J I.482 sq.; III.283; IV.195; V.273 sq., 389; VI.416; Miln 412; SnA 114 (in expln of gaḷa Sn 61); ThA 280, 292; VbhA 196 (in comparison); Sdhp 610. On use in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 115. -maṃsikā (f.) "flesh-hooking," a kind of torture M I.87; III.164; A I.47; II.122; Nd1 154; Nd2 604; Miln 197. -yaṭṭhi angling rod DhA III.397. Balī {Bali} ° =bala° in combn with bhū & kṛ, see bala. Pāli Text Society 1101 Pāli-English Dictionary Balīyati {Baliyati} [Denom. fr. bala, cp. BSk. balīyati MVastu I.275] to have strength, to grow strong, to gain power, to overpower Sn 770 (=sahati parisahati abhibhavati Nd1 12, cp. 361); J IV.84 (vv. ll. khalī° & paliyy°; C. expls by avattharati)=Pv II.61 (=balavanto honti vaḍḍhanti abhibhavanti PvA 94); J VI.224 (3rd pl. balīyare; C. abhibhavati, kuppati, of the border provinces); Nett 6 (vv. ll. bali°, pali°; C. abhibhavati). Balya1 {Balya} (nt.) [der. fr. bala] belonging to strength, only in cpd. dub° weakness M I.364; Pug 66; also spelt dubballa M I.13. - abl. dubbalyā as adv. groundlessly, without strong evidence Vin IV.241 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 129). Balya2 {Balya} [fr. bāla, cp. P. & Sk. bālya] foolishness, stupidity Dh 63 (v. l. bālya); J III.278 (C. bālya); DhA II.30. Baḷavā {Balava} (f.) [cp. Vedic vaḍavā] a mare, only in cpd. °mukha the mare's mouth, i. e. an entrance to Niraya (cp. Vedic vaḍavāgni & vaḍavāmukha) Th 1, 1104 (trsl. "abyss-discharged mouth," cp. Brethren, p. 418). Baḷīyakkha {Baliyakkha} [etym.?] a species of birds J VI.539. Bahati1 {Bahati} [bṛh1] to pull, see ab°, ub°, nib°, & cp. udabbahe, pavāḷha. Bahati2 {Bahati} [baṃh doublet of bṛh2] to strengthen, increase, see brūhana (upa°); otherwise only in pp. bāḷha (q. v.). The Dhtp (344, cp. Dhtm 506) explns "baha braha brūha: vuddhiyaṃ." Bahati3 {Bahati} [a Pali root, to be postulated as der. fr. bahi in sense of "to keep out"] only in Caus. formations: to keep outside, lit. to make stay outside or away. See bāhā 2; bāheti, paribāhati. Bahala {Bahala} (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. bahala & Ved. bahula] dense, thick Vin II.112; J I.467 (°palāpatumba a measure thickly filled with chaff); II.91; Miln 282; Vism 257 (°pūva, where KhA 56 omits bahala), 263 (opp. tanuka); KhA 62 (°kuthita-lākhā thickly boiled, where in id. p. Vism 261 has accha-lākhā, i. e. clear); DhA IV.68; VvA 162 (=aḷāra). -subahala very thick Miln 258 (rajojalla). Bahalatta {Bahalatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. above] thickness, swollen condition, swelling J I.147. Bahi {Bahi} (adv.) [cp. Vedic bahis & bahir; the s(ḥ) is restored in doubling of cons. in compn like bahig-gata Vv 5015, in bahiddhā and in lengthening of i as bahī J V.65] outside: 1. (adv.) J I.361 (°dvāre-gāma a village outside the city gates); Pv I.102; DhA III.118; PvA 24, 61. - 2. (prep.) with acc. (direction to) J I.298 (°gāmaṃ); with loc. (place where) °dvāra-koṭṭhake outside the gate M II.92; A III.31; °nagare outside the city J II.2; PvA 39. 47; °vihāre outside the monastery DhA I.315. -gata gone outside (i. e. into worldly affairs, or according to VvA 213 engaged with the bahiddh'ārammaṇāni) Vv 5015 (abahiggata-mānasa with his mind not gone outside himself). nikkhamana going outside of (abl.), leaving Vism 500 (mātukucchito bahinikkhamanaṃ mūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ). Pāli Text Society 1102 Pāli-English Dictionary Bahiddhā {Bahiddha} (adv.) [fr. bahi, cp. Vedic bahirdhā, formation in °dhā, like ekadhā, sattadhā etc. of numerals] outside (adv. & prep.) D I.16; II.110; S I.169; III.47, 103; IV.205; V.157; Vin III.113 (°rūpa opp. ajjhatta-rūpa : Sn 203; VbhA 260 (kāye); DhA I.211 (c. gen); III.378 (sāsanato b.); DhsA 189. -ajjhatta° inside & outside, personal-external see ajjhatta. - The bahiddh'ārammaṇāni (objects of thought concerning that which is external) are the outward sense-objects in the same meaning as bāhirāni āyatanāni are distinguished fr. ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (see āyatana 3 and ārammaṇa 3). They are discussed at Vism 430 sq.; cp. Dhs 1049. The phrase "ito bahiddhā" refers to those outside the teaching of the Buddha ("outside this our doctrine"), e. g. at D I.157; S I.133; A IV.25; Dhs 1005. Bahu {Bahu} (adj.) [Vedic bahu, doubtful whether to Gr. paxQs; fr. bṛh2 to strengthen, cp. upabrūhana, paribbūḷha] much, many, large, abundant; plenty; in compn also: very, greatly (°-) instr. sg. bahunā Dh 166; nom. pl. bahavo Vin III.90; Dh 307, & bahū Dh 53; J IV.366; V.40; VI.472; Bu 2, 47; Pv IV.14; Mhvs 35, 98; PvA 67; nt. pl. bahūni Sn 665, 885; gen. dat. bahunnaṃ S I.196; Sn 503, 957, & bahūnaṃ J V.446; Kvu 528 (where id. p. M I.447 reads bahunnaṃ); instr. bahūhi PvA 241; loc. bahūsu PvA 58. - nt. nom. bahu Dh 258; bahuṃ PvA 166, & bahud in compn bahud-eva (d may be euphonic) J I.170; Bu 20, 32. As nt. n. bahuṃ a large quantity A II.183 (opp. appaṃ); abl. bahumhā J V.387. As adv. bahu so much Pv II.1311. - Compar. bahutara greater, more, in greater number A I.36 (pl. bahutarā, opp. appakā); II.183; S V.457, 466; J II.293; VI.472; Pv II.117; Miln 84; PvA 38, 76. - In composition with words beginning with a vowel (in sandhi) bahu as a rule appears as bavh° (for bahv°, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 49, 1), but the hiatus form bahu is also found, as in bahu-itthiyo J I.398 (besides bahutthika); bahuamaccā J I.125; bahu-āyāsa (see below). Besides we have the contracted form bahû as in bahûpakāra, etc.). -ābādha (bavh°) great suffering or illness, adj. full of sickness, ailing much M II.94; A I.107; II.75, 85; Miln 65; Sdhp 89 (cp. 77). -āyāsa (bahu°) great trouble Th 2, 343. (i)tthika (bahutthika) having many women Vin II.256; S II.264. -ûdaka containing much water J III.430 (f. bahūdikā & bahodikā). -ûpakāra of great service, very helpful, very useful S IV.295; V.32; M III.253; It 9; Vin V.191; J I.121; Pv IV.156; PvA 114. -odaka (bavh°)=°ûdaka Th 1, 390. kata (a.) benevolent, doing service Vin IV.57, 212. (b) much moved or impressed by (instr.), paying much attention to Vin I.247. -karaṇīya having much to do, busy D II.76; Vin I.71; S II.215; A III.116; DA I.237. -kāra (a) favour Dāvs IV.39 (b) doing much, of great service, very helpful M I.43, 170; A I.123, 132; II.126; S V.67; Pv II.1219; J IV.422; Miln 264. -kāratta service, usefulness KhA 91. -kicca having many duties, very busy Vin I.71; D I.106; II.76; S II.215; A III.116; DA I.237. -khāra a kind of alkali (product of vegetable ash) J VI.454. -jaðða see bāhu°. jana a mass of people, a great multitude, a crowd, a great many people D I.4; It 78; J VI.358; Pug 30, 57; Pv II.77; PvA 30. At some passages interpreted by Bdhgh as "the unconverted, the masses," e. g. D I.47, expld at DA I.143 by "assutavā andha-bāla puthujjana"; Dh 320 (bahujjana), expld at DhA IV.3 by "lokiya-mahājana." -jāgara very watchful Dh 29 (=mahante sativepulle jāgariye ṭhita DhA I.262); Sn 972 (cp. Nd1 501). -jāta growing much, abundant J VI.536. -ṭhāna (-cintin) of far-reaching knowledge, whose thoughts embrace many subjects J III.306; IV.467; V.176. -dhana with many riches PvA 97. -patta having obtained much, loaded with gifts Vin IV.243. -pada many-footed, a certain order of creatures, such as centipedes, etc. Vin II.110; III.52; A II.34; It 87. -(p)phala rich in fruit Sn 1134, cp. Nd2 456. -(b)bīhi t.t.g., name of cpds. with adj. sense, indicating possession. -bhaṇḍa having an abundance of goods, wellto-do Vin III.138; KhA 241. -bhāṇika=°bhāṇin PvA 283. -bhāṇitā garrulousness PvA 283. bhāṇin garrulous A III.254, 257; Dh 227. -bhāva largeness, richness, abundance DhA II.175. bherava very terrible A II.55. -maccha rich in fish J III.430. -mata much esteemed, venerable Cp. VI.7; PvA 117. -manta very tricky DhA II.4 (v. l. māya). -māna respect, esteem, veneration J I.90; PvA 50, 155, 274. -māya full of deceit, full of tricks J V.357 (cp. °manta). -vacana (tt.g.) the 1103 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary plural number J IV.173; PvA 163. -vāraka the tree Cordia myxa Abhp 558. -vighāta fraught with great pain Th 2, 450. -vidha various, multiform Cp. XV.7; Pgdp 37. -sacca see bāhu°. (s)suta having great knowledge, very learned, welltaught D I.93, 137; III.252, 282; J I.199; IV.244; A I.24; II.22, 147, 170, 178; III.114; Sn 58 (see Nd2 457); It 60, 80; Th 1, 1026; Dh 208; Vin II.95; J I.93; Miln 19; ThA 274, 281; SnA 109, 110. -(s)sutaka of great knowledge (ironical) D I.107 (see Dial. I.132). Bahuka {Bahuka} (adj.) [fr. bahu] great, much, many, abundant J. III.368 (b. jano most people, the majority of p.); V.388; IV.536; Mhvs 36, 49; PvA 25 (gloss for pahūta Pv I.52); DhA II.175. - nt. bahukaṃ plenty, abundance A II.7=Pug 63; Vism 403 (opp. thokaṃ). Compar. bahukataraṃ more J II.88 (v. l. bahutaraṃ). Bahukkhattuṃ {Bahukkhattum} (adv.) [bahu+khattuṃ, like sattakkhattuṃ, ti° etc.] many times Miln 215. Bahutta {Bahutta} (nt.) [cp. Sk. bahutvaṃ] multiplicity, manifoldedness VbhA 320 (cetanā°). Bahudhā {Bahudha} (adv.) [fr. bahu, cp. Vedic bahudhā] in many ways or forms S V.264 (hoti he becomes many), 288; M I.34; Sn 966; Pv IV.152 (=bahūhi pakārehi PvA 241); Mhvs 31, 73; Dāvs V.68. Bahula {Bahula} (adj.) [usually -°, as °- only in cpd. °ājīva] much, abundant, nt. abundance (°-); full of, rich in, fig. given to, intent on, devoted to D II.73; S I.199, 202; A III.86 (pariyatti°), 432 (āloka°); IV.35; It 27, 30; J IV.5 (vināsa°), 22; PvA 80 (chārik'angāra°). -sayana° as much as "particular in one's choice of resting place" Miln 365 nt. bahulaṃ (-°) in the fullness of, full of S III.40 (nibbidā°). The compn form with karoti (& kamma) is bahulī° (q. v.). Cp. bāhulla. -ājīva living in abundance (opp. lūkh'ājīvin) D III.44, 47. Bahula {Bahula} (nt.) [=preceding] N. of a lucky die J VI.281. Bahulī° [rare in Ep. Sk.; when found, diff. in meaning] in compn with kar=bahula (adj.)+kar, lit. "to make much of," i. e. to practise, in foll. words: °kata (pp.) practised (frequently), usually combd with bhāvita S II.264; IV.200, 322; V.259; A I.6; Vism 267 (=punappunaṃ kata); °katatta (nt.) practice D II.214; °kamma continuous practice, an act often repeated M I.301; DhsA 406 (=punappuna-karaṇa); °karoti to take up seriously, to practise, devote oneself to (acc.) M I.454; A I.275; III.79; S IV.322; DhA III.356 (sevati+); VbhA 291; °kāra zealous exercise, practice M III.25 sq. (tab-bahulī° to this end). {Bahuli°} Bahuso {Bahuso} (adv.) [cp. Sk. bahuśaḥ] repeatedly PvA 107. Bahūta {Bahuta} (adj.) [for pahūta=Sk. prabhūta] abundant, much Th 2, 406 (°ratana, so read for bahuta°), 435 (for bahutadhana); J III.425 (bahūtam ajjaṃ "plenty of food"; ajja=Sk. ādya, with Kern, Toev. s. v. bahūta for T. bahūtamajjā, which introd. story takes as bahūtaṃ =balaṃ ajja, with ajjā metri causā. C. expls however as mataka-bhattaṃ); VI.173 (°tagarā mahī); Pv II.75 (v. l. for pahūta, cp. pahūtika). Pāli Text Society 1104 Pāli-English Dictionary Bahūtaso {Bahutaso} (adv.) [der. fr. bahūta, cp. Sk. prabhūtaśaḥ] in abundance J III.484 (where C. expln with bahūtaso is faulty and should perhaps be read pahūtaso); VI.538. Bākucī {Bakuci} (f.) [cp. *Sk. bākucī] the plant Vernonia anthelminthica Abhp 586. Bāṇa {Bana} [cp. Vedic bāṇa] an arrow Mbhv 19. Bādha {Badha} [fr. bādh] lit. pressing (together), oppression, hindrance, annoyance J VI.224. Cp. sam°. Bādhaka {Badhaka} (adj.) [fr. bādh] oppressing, harassing, injurious Vism 496 (dukkhā aððaṃ na °ṃ); VvA 214; PvA 175. Bādhakatta {Badhakatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bādhaka] the fact of being oppressive or injurious Vism 496. Bādhati {Badhati} [Vedic bādhate, bādh; Idg. *bheidh to force, cp. Goth. baidjan, Ohg. beitten. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fido. In Pali there seems to have taken place a confusion of roots bādh and bandh, see bādheti & other derivations] to press, weigh on; oppress, hinder, afflict, harm D II.19; J I.211; IV.124; Vism 400; DhA I.24. grd. bādhitabba ThA 65; Pass. bādhiyati to be afflicted, to become sore, to suffer SnA 481; ThA 282; ppr. bādhiyamāna PvA 33 (so read for °ayamāna), 69. - Caus. bādheti; pp. bādhita (q. v.). Cp. vi°. Bādhana {Badhana} (nt.) [fr. bādh] 1. snaring, catching (of animals etc.) S V.148; J I.211. - 2. hindrance DA I.132. - 3. affliction, injury, hurting Vism 495; PvA 116. Bādhita {Badhita} [pp. of bādhati] oppressed, pressed hard, harassed Dh 342 (but taken by C. as "trapped, snared," baddha DhA IV.49); ThA 65. Bādhin {Badhin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bādh] (lit. oppressing), snaring; as n. a trainer Vin II.26 (Ariṭṭha gaddha°-pubba); IV.218 (id.). Bādheti {Badheti} [Caus. of bādhati; the confusion with bandhati is even more pronounced in the Caus. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. we find bādhayati for bandhayati in Sk. as well] 1. to oppress, afflict, hurt, injure J VI.224; PvA 198 (bādheyya=heṭhayeyya). grd. bādhanīya PvA 175. Cp. paribādheti in same sense. - 2. to bind, catch, snare Th 1, 454; 2, 299; J II.51 (aor. bādhayiṃsu); IV.342; V.295, 445 (pot. bādhaye= bādheyya C. on p. 447; vv. ll. baddh°, bandh°). grd. bādhetabba S IV.298. Bārāṇaseyyaka {Baranaseyyaka} (adj.) [fr. Bārāṇasī] of Benares, coming fr. B. (a kind of muslin) D II.110; III.260. Bāla1 {Bala} (adj.) [cp. Sk. bāla (rarely Vedic, more freq. in Ep. & Class. Sk.); its orig. meaning is "young, unable to speak," cp. Lat. infans, hence "like a child, childish; infantile"] 1. ignorant (often with ref. to ignorance in a moral sense, of the common people, the puthujjana), foolish (as contrasted with paṇḍita cp. the Bālapaṇḍita-sutta M III.163 sq.; D II.305 sq.; Vism 499, and contrasts at Sn 578; Dh 63, 64; Pv IV.332; Dhs 1300), lacking in reason, devoid of the power to Pāli Text Society 1105 Pāli-English Dictionary think & act right. In the latter sense sometimes coupled with andha (spiritually blind), as andhabāla stupid & ignorant, mentally dull, e. g. at DhA I.143; II.89; PvA 254. - A fanciful etym. of b. at KhA 124 is "balanti ananti ti bālā." Other refs.: D I.59, 108; S I.23; A I.59, 68, 84; II.51, 180; Sn 199, 259, 318, 578, 879; It 68; Dh 28, 60 sq., 71 sq., 206 sq., 330; J I.124 (lola° greedyfoolish); V.366 (bālo āmaka-pakkaṃ va); Vv 835; Pv I.82; IV.129; Pug 33; Nd1 163, 286 sq., 290; SnA 509 (=aviddasu); PvA 193. Compar. bālatara J III.278, 279; VvA 326. - 2. young, new; newly risen (of the sun): °ātāpa the morning sun DA I.287; DhA I.164; Mhbv 25; °vasanta "early spring" (=Citramāsa), N. of the first one of the 4 summer months (gimha-māsā) KhA 192; suriya the newly risen sun J V.284; PvA 137, 211. - 3. a child; in wider application meaning a youth under 16 years of age (cp. Abhp 251) DA I.134. Cp. bālaka. -nakkhatta N. of a certain "feast of fools," i. e. carnival DhA I.256. -sangatacārin one who keeps company with a fool Dh 207. Bāla2 {Bala} [for vāla] the hair of the head PvA 285 (°koṭimatta not even one tip of the hair; gloss BB vālagga°). Bālaka {Balaka} [fr. bāla] 1. boy, child, youth S I.176; ThA 146 (Ap. V.44: spelt °akka); Sdhp 351. - f. bālikā young girl ThA 54 (Ap. V.1). - 2. fool DhsA 51 (°rata fond of fools). Bālakin {Balakin} (adj.) [fr. bālaka] having fools, consisting of fools; f. °inī M I.373 (parisā). Bālatā {Balata} (f.) [abstr. to bāla] foolishness J I.101, 223. Bālisika [fr. balisa] a fisherman S II.226; IV.158; J I.482; III.52 (cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 194); Miln 364, 412; DhA III.397. {Balisika} Bālya {Balya} (nt.) [fr. bāla] 1. childhood, youth S III.1. - 2. ignorance, folly Dh 63; J II.220 (=bālabhāva); III.278 (balya); PvA 40. Also used as adj. in compar. bālyatara more foolish, extremely foolish Vv 836 sq.=DhA I.30 (=bālatara, atisayena bāla VvA 326). - 3. weakness (?) J VI.295 (balya, but C. bālya=dubbala-bhāva). Bāḷha {Balha} (adj.) [Vedic bāḍha, orig. pp. of bahati2] strong; only as adv. °ṃ and °-, viz. - 1. bāḷhaṃ strongly, very much, excessively, too much, to satiety J II.293; VI.291 (i. e. too often, C. punappunaṃ); Miln 407; PvA 274. Comparative bāḷhataraṃ in a higher degree, even more, too much Vin II.270, 276; Miln 125. - 2. (°-) in bāḷha-gilāna very ill, grievously sick D I.72; A II.144; S V.303; DA I.212. Bāḷhika {Balhika} (adj.) [fr. bāḷha], only in su° having excess of good things, very prosperous J V.214 (C. expls by suṭṭhu aḍḍha). Bāvīsati {Bavisati} (num.) [bā=dvā,+vīsati] twenty-two Kvu 218; Miln 419; DhsA 2. Bāhati {Bahati} see bāheti. Bāhā {Baha} (f.) [a specific Pali doublet of bāhu, q. v. It is on the whole restricted to certain phrases, but occurs side by side of bāhu in others, like pacchā-bāhaṃ & °bāhuṃ, bāhaṃ & bāhuṃ pasāreti] 1. the arm A II.67=III.45 (°bala); Vin II.105; J III.62; V.215 (°mudu). pacchā- Pāli Text Society 1106 Pāli-English Dictionary bāhaṃ arm(s) behind (his back) D I.245 (gāḷhabandhanaṃ baddha). bāhaṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm D I.222=M I.252≈. bāhāyaṃ gahetvā taking (him or her) by the arm D I.221 sq.; M I.365 (nānā-bāhāsu g.); PvA 148. bāhā paggayha reaching or stretching out one's arms (as sign of supplication) D II.139; J V.267; PvA 92 and passim. - 2. not quite certain, whether "post" of a door or a "screen" (from bahati3), the former more likely. Only -° in ālambana° post to hold on to, a balustrade Vin II.120, 152; dvāra° doorpost D II.190; Pv I.51. Cp. bāhitikā. -aṭṭhi (bāh°) arm-bone KhA 50. -paramparāya arm in arm Vin III.126. Bāhika {Bahika} (adj.) [=bāhiya] foreign in °raṭṭha-vāsin living in a foreign country J III.432 (or is it N.? Cp. J VII. p. 94). Bāhitatta {Bahitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhita] keeping out, exclusion Nd2 464 (in expln of word brāhmaṇa). Bāhitikā {Bahitika} (f.) [fr. bāhita, pp. of bāheti1] a mantle, wrapper (lit. "that which keeps out," i. e. the cold or wind) M II.116, 117. Bāhiteyya {Bahiteyya} [unclear; grd. of bāheti1, but formed fr. pp.?] to be kept out (?) M I.328. The reading seems to be corrupt; meaning is very doubtful; Neumann trsls "musst (mir) weichen." Bāhiya {Bahiya} (adj.) [fr. bahi, cp. bāhira and Vedic bāhya] foreign J I.421; III.432. Bāhira {Bahira} (adj.) [fr. bahi, as Sk. bāhya fr. bahis, cp. also bāhiya] 1. external, outside (opp. abbhantara inside), outer, foreign D II.75; A IV.16; Dh 394 (fig. in meaning of 2); J I.125 (antara° inside & outside); 337 (out of office, out of favour, of ministers); VI.384 (bāhiraṃ karoti to turn out, turn inside out); Pv IV.11 (nagarassa b.); Miln 281 (°abbhantara dhana); VvA 68 (°kittibhāva fact of becoming known outside). -santara° (adj.) [=sa-antara] including the inward & outward parts D I.74; A III.25; Th 1, 172; J I.125. - 2. external to the individual, objective (opp. ajjhattika subjective) M III.274 (cha āyatanā); J IV.402 (°vatthuṃ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāti); Dhs 674 (cp. trsl. p. 207); Vbh 13; Miln 215; Vism 450. - 3. heretical, outsider in religious sense, non-Buddhist, freq. applied to the Brahmanic religion & their practice (samaya) Kvu 251 (+puthujjana-pakkhe ṭhita); DhA III.378 (=mana, i. e. Bhagavato sāsanato bahiddhā). - Cases as adv. bāhirato from outside, from a foreign country J I.121; bāhire outside (the Buddhist order) Dh 254. -assāda finding his enjoyment in outward things A I.280 (Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests "inclined towards heretic views"). -āsa one whose wishes are directed outwards, whose desires are turned to things external Th 1, 634. -kathā non-religious discourse, profane story Miln 24 (applied to the introductory chapter, thus "outside story" may be translated). -tittha doctrine of outsiders J III.473. -dāna gift of externals, gift of property as opposed to gift of the person J IV.401; VI.486; Dāvs III.33. pabbajjā the ascetic life outside the community of the Buddha; Brahmanic saintly life (thus equal to isi-pabbajjā. cp. bāhiraka°). J III.352; IV.305. -bhaṇḍa property, material things, objects J IV.401. -mantā ritualistic texts (or charms) of religions other than the Buddha's J III.27. -rakkhā protection of external means S I.73. -lomi with the fleece outside (of a rug) Vin II.108. -samaya doctrine of the outsiders, i. e. Brahmins DhA III.392. Bāhiraka {Bahiraka} (adj.) [=bāhira, but specialised in meaning bāhira 3] outsider, non-religious, non-Buddhist, heretic, profane S II.267; A I.73; III.107; Kvu 172 (isayo); VvA 67 (itthi). -kathā unreligious discussion, profane story KhA 118 (cp. bāhirakathā). -tapa=foll. J I.390. -pabbajjā Pāli Text Society 1107 Pāli-English Dictionary the ascetic life as led by disciples of other teachers than the Buddha, esp. Brahmanic (cp. bāhira° and BSk. bāhirako mārgaḥ, e. g. MVastu I.284; II.210; II.223) J III.364; DhA I.311. Bāhiratta {Bahiratta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bāhira] being outside (of the individual), externality Vism 450. Bāhirima {Bahirima} (adj.) [fr. bāhira, compar.-adversative formation] outer, external, outside Vin III.149 (b. māna external measure; opp. abbhantarima); J V.38 (opp. abbhantarima). Bāhu {Bahu} [cp. Vedic bāhu, prob. to bahati2; cp. Gr. ph_xus in same meaning, Ohg. buoc. It seems that bāhu is more frequent in later literature, whereas the by-form bāhā belongs to the older period] the arm J III.271 (bāhumā bāhuṃ pīḷentā shoulder to shoulder); Vism 192. -°ṃ pasāreti to stretch out the arm (cp. bāhaṃ) PvA 112; pacchā-bāhuṃ (cp. bāhaṃ) PvA 4 (gāḷhabandhanaṃ bandhāpetvā). -(p)pacālakaṃ (adv.) after the manner of one who swings his arms about Vin II.213 (see expln at Vin IV.188). Bāhujañña {Bahujanna} (adj.) [fr. bahu+jana, cp. sāmaðða fr. samaṇa] belonging to the mass of people, property of many people or of the masses D II.106, 219; S II.107= V.262; J I.29 (V.212). Note. The expression occurs only in stock phrase iddha phīta vitthārika bāhujaðða. Bāhulya {Bahulya} (nt.) [fr. bahula, the Sk. form for P. bāhulla] abundance Sdhp 77. Bāhulla {Bahulla} (nt.) [fr. bahula] 1. abundance, superfluity, great quantity M I.171; A IV.87 (°kathā) A IV.87; Ps I.197; J I.81. - 2. luxurious living, swaggering, puffed up frame of mind Vin I.9, 59, 209; II.197; III.251. - See also bāhulya & bāhullika. Bāhullika {Bahullika} (adj.) [fr. bāhulla] living in abundance, swaggering, luxurious, spendthrift Vin I.9 (+padhāna-vibbhanto, as also J I.68, with which Kern, Toev. s. v. compares MVastu II.241 & III.329); II.197; III.250; M I.14; III.6; A I.71; III.108, 179 sq.; J I.68; III.363. The reading is often bāhulika. Bāhusacca {Bahusacca} (nt.) [fr. bahu+sacca, which latter corresponds to a Sk. śrautya fr. śru, thus b. is the abstract to bahussuta. See on expln of word Kern, Toev. s. v.] great learning, profound knowledge M I.445; A I.38 (so read for bahu°); II.218; Vin III.10; Dh 271; Vv 639. Bāheti1 {Baheti} [Caus. of bahati3 or Denom. fr. bahi] to keep away, to keep outside, to ward off; only with ref. to pāpa (pāpaka) to keep away (from) sin S I.141 (bāhetvā pāpāni); Sn 519=Nd2 464a (bāhetvā pāpakāni); Dh 267; a popular etymology of brāhmaṇa (pāpaṃ bahenti) D III.94 (bāhitvā, better bāhetvā, expld by panuditvā DhA III.393; v. l. K vāh°). - pp. bāhita (q. v.). See also nib°, pari°. Bāheti2 {Baheti} [Caus. of bahati4, cp. Sk. vāhayati] to carry, see sam° (sambāhana, meaning rubbing, stroking). Whether atibāheti belongs here, is doubtful. Bidala {Bidala} (adj. n.) [cp. Sk. vidala in same meaning, fr. vi+dal] 1. a kind of pulse, split pea J IV.353 (=mugga), in °sūpa haricot soup J IV.352. - 2. a split bamboo cane, in °mañcaka a Pāli Text Society 1108 Pāli-English Dictionary bedstead made of laths of split bamboo, the use of which is given as one of the characteristic features of the ascetic life Vin II.149; J I.9; DhA I.135. Bindu {Bindu} [cp. Vedic bindu & vindu] 1. a drop, usually a drop of water Sn 392, 812 (uda°); J I.100; Vism 531 (madhu°); ThA 281; PvA 98 (udaka°). - 2. a spot (cp. SBE XVII.155) Vism 222 (°vicitvā gāvī a spotted cow). - 3. (as adj.) one of the eight qualities of perfect sound (brahmassara, with ref. to the voice of Brahmā and of Buddha, cp. aṭṭhanga), which are given at D II.211= 227 as (saro hoti) vissaṭṭho ca viððeyyo ca maðjū ca savanīyo ca bindu [vv. ll. bandu & bhindu] ca avisārī ca gambhīro ca ninnādī ca. We may translate by "full, close, compact" (Dial. II.245 "continuous"). See also below °ssara. -tthanī having breasts round as a bubble J V.215. bindu(ṃ) drop by drop DA I.218. -matī (f.) Np. of a courtesan of Pāṭaliputta in the time of Asoka Miln 121 sq. -matta measuring a drop, even a drop PvA 100, 104 (eka °ṃ). -sāra Np. of king of India, father of Asoka Dpvs V.101; VI.15; Mhvs V.18, 19. -ssara a full rounded voice Sn 350 (referred by SnA to a Mahāpurisa); adj. having a full voice (see above bindu 3) Pv III.34 (T. vindu°, BB bindu°; PvA explns by avissaṭṭha-ssara sampiṇḍita-ssara, i. e. "continuous"); J II.439 (=bindhunā avisaṭena piṇḍitena sarena samannāgata C.); V.204, 299 (=sampiṇḍitaghana-ssara); VI.518=581 (=piṇḍita-ssara C.). Bimba (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bimba] 1. shape, image (=paṭimā VvA 168) S I.134 (trsl. "puppet"); V.217 (vimba); J V.452. In phrase cittakataṃ bimbaṃ it refers to the human body ("the tricked-out puppet-shape" Brethren 303): M II.64 = Th 1, 769 = Dh 147=VvA 47, cp. DhA III.109 (=attabhāva). - 2. the red fruit of Momordica monadelpha, a species of Amaranth [cp. Sk. bimba & bimbī, a kind of gourd] J III.478; VI.457, 591; Vv 366 (kaðcana°-vaṇṇa of the colour of the golden Bimba Dhp. at VvA 168 takes it as bimba1=paṭimā; DhA I.387 (°phala, with ref. to red lips). bimboṭṭha (f. °ī) (having) red lips J III.477; VI.590 (nigrodhapatta-bimb'oṭṭhī) ThA 133 (Ap. V.57). The Sk. vimbī according to Halāyudha 2, 48 is equal to oṣṭhī, a plant (Bryonia grandis?). -oṭṭhi see above 2. -ohana [second part either= *ūhana vāhana "carrying," or contracted form of odahana fr. ava+dhā, i. e. *odhana *ohana "putting down," or still more likely for ūhana as seen in ūhanati2 2 fr. ud+hṛ raising, lifting up] a pillow Vin I.47 (bhisi°); II.76, 150, 208, 200, 218; III.90, 119 (bhisi°); IV.279; S II.268; A III.240; VbhA 365; Vism 79. See also bhisi1. -jāla [BR. bimbajā?] the Bimba tree, Momordica monadelpha (lit. net of b. fruits) J I.39; VI.497 (cp. p. 498 ratt'ankura-rukkhaṃ probably with v. l. to be read ratta-kuravaka°, see bimbi-jāla); Bu XVI.19. {Bimba} Bimbaka {Bimbaka} =bimba 2; VvA 168. Bimbi & Bimbī {Bimbi} [=Sk. bimbī, see bimba] gold, of golden colour DA I.280=SnA 448 (in Bdhgh's fanciful etym. of king Bimbisāra, viz. bimbī ti suvaṇṇaṃ, sārasuvaṇṇa-sadisavaṇṇatāya B.). -jāla the red amaranth tree, the Bodhi tree of the former Buddha Dhammadassin J I.39; V.155. At J VI.497, 498 the form is bimbajāla. The C. expln gives rattakuravaka as a synonym. Bila1 {Bila} (nt.) [Vedic bila, perhaps fr. bhid to break, cp. K.Z. 12, 123. Thus already expld by Dhtp 489: bila bhedane] a hole, den, cave A II.33=S III.85; Th 1, 189; Nd1 362; J I.480; II.53; VI.574 (=guhā C.); Miln 151; Sdhp 23. -kaṇṇa° orifice of the ear Vism 195; vammīka° ant's nest J IV.30; sota°=kaṇṇa° DhsA 310. -āsaya (adj.) living in holes, a cave-dweller, one of the four classes of animals (bil°, dak°, van°, rukkh°) S III.85=A II.33; Nd1 362; Bu II.97; J I.18. Pāli Text Society 1109 Pāli-English Dictionary Bila2 {Bila} (nt.) [identical with bila1] a part, bit J VI.153 (°sataṃ 100 pieces); abl. bilaso (adv.) bit by bit M I.58=III.91 (v. l. vilaso). At J V.90 in cpd. migābilaṃ (maṃsaṃ) it is doubtful whether we should read mig'ābilaṃ (thus, as we have done, taking ābila=āvila), or migā-bilaṃ with a lengthened metri causā, as the C. seems to take it (migehi khādita-maṃsato atirittaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ). -kata cut into pieces, made into bits J V.266 (read macchā bilakatā yathā for macchābhīlā katā y.). The C. here (p. 272) expls as koṭṭhāsa-kata; at J VI.111 however the same phrase is interpreted as puñja-kata, i. e. thrown into a heap (like fish caught by a fisherman in nets). Both passages are applied to fish and refer to tortures in Niraya. Bila3 {Bila} [cp. Sk. viḍa] a kind of salt Vin I.202; M II.178, 181. Bilanga {Bilanga} [etym. doubtful; one compares both Sk. viḍanga the plant Embelia ribes, and vilanga the plant Erycibe paniculata] sour gruel J VI.365 (=kañjiya); usually in stock phrase kaṇājaka bilanga-dutiya (seed-cake?) accompanied by sour gruel Vin II.77, 78; S I.90; A I.145; IV.392; J I.228; III.299; SnA 94; DhA III.10 (v. l. pilanka-°akaṃ); IV.77; VvA 222, 298 (bilanka°). thālika a certain torture, called "gruel-pot" (should there be any relation to bila-kata under bila2?) A I.47; II.122; Nd2 604 (v. l. khil°); Miln 197, 290, 358 (all passages in standard setting). Bilangika {Bilangika} (adj.) living on sour gruel; N. of a class of brāhmaṇas at Rājagaha S I.164. Billa {Billa} [cp. Ved. bilva] fruit of the Bilva tree, Aegle marmelos or Bengal quince, only in one stock phrase where its size is compared with sizes of smaller fruits, and where it is preceded by āmalaka S I.150=A IV.170 (vv. ll. villa, bila, beḷu, bilāla)=Sn p. 125 (vv. ll. pillā billā, billa; T. reading after SS billi). Cp. derivations bella & beluva. Biḷāra {Bilara} [etym. uncertain, prob. a loan-word; cp. late Sk. biḍāla & see also P. biḷāla. The Prk. forms are birāla & virāla, f. birālī] a cat D II.83; M I.128, 334; S II.270; A III.122 (viḷāra); V.202, 289; Th 1, 1138; J I.461 (as representing deceit), 480; V.406, 416, 418; Miln 118; DhA II.152; PugA 225. On biḷāra in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 116. -nissakkana (-matta) (large enough) for a cat to creep through A V.195. -bhastā (a bag of) catskin M I.128 (expld by Bdhgh as "biḷāra-camma-pasibbako"); Th 1, 1138. At both passages in similes. Biḷārikā {Bilarika} (f.) [cp. Sk. biḍālikā] a she-cat J III.265. Biḷāla1 {Bilala} [see biḷāra] a cat J I.110; II.244; VI.593. pakkha a flying fox J VI.538. Biḷāla2 {Bilala} [see bila3] a kind of salt Abhp 461. Biḷālī {Bilali} (f.) [f. of biḷāla=biḷāra, cp. Sk. biḍālī, also N. of a plant, see on Prk. chira-birālī=Sk. kṣīra-biḍālī Pischel Gr. § 241] a bulbous plant, a tuber J IV.46 (=°vallīkanda, cp. gloss latātanta on kalamba), 371 (=°kanda Com. p. 373); VI.578. Cp. takkaḷa. Biḷibiḷikā (f.) [onomat. cp. E. babble] tittle-tattle S I.200= Th 1, 119. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren 106 n.) trsl "finglefangle," noting the commentator's paraphrase "vilivilikriyā" (lit. sticky-sticky-action?). {Bilibilika} Pāli Text Society 1110 Pāli-English Dictionary Bīja {Bija} (nt.) [cp. Vedic bīja] 1. seed, germ, semen, spawn. Used very frequently in figurative sense: see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 116. - D I.135 (°bhatta seed-corn & food); III.44 (the five kinds: see below under °gāma); M I.457; S I.21, 134, 172, 227; III.54, 91; IV.315; A I.32 (ucchu°), 135, 223, 229, 239; III.404; IV.237; V.213 (ucchu°); Sn 77 (saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhi, cp. SnA 142 sq., where a detailed discussion on bīja is found), 209, 235 (khīṇa° adj. fig.); J I.242 (tiṇa°-ādīni grass and other seeds), 281; Pv I.11; Vism 555 (in simile); KhA 194 (on Sn 235, in another comparison); Sdhp 24, 270 sq., 318. nibbatta° (or nivatta°) (adj.) that which has dropped its seed (hence a lawful food) Vin I.215, cp. II.109; IV.35. - 2. element, in udaka° whose element is the water J VI.160. -gāma seed-group, seed-kingdom, seed-creation (opp. bhūta-gāma). There are 5 kinds of seeds usually enumd, e. g. at D I.5 (expld at DA I.77, trsln at Dial. I.6 and passim), viz. mūla°, khandha°, phalu°, agga°, bija°, or plants propagated by roots, cuttings, joints, buddings, shoots, seeds (Dial. III.40: tubers, shoots, berries, joints, seeds). The same set occurs at D III.44, 47; Vin IV.34; SnA 144. - Without ref. to the 5 kinds at M III.34; S V.46; Miln 33. -jāta species of seed S III.54. -bīja one of the 5 groups of edible or useful plants, falling under bījagāma. It is expld at Vin IV.35 & DA I.81 by the terms pubbaṇṇa (i. e. the seven dhaððāni or grains, sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsa) and aparaṇṇa (i. e. beans and other leguminous plants, and gourds such as mugga, māsa, tila, kulattha, alābu, kumbhaṇḍa). sakaṭa a cart (-load) of seeds SnA 137. Bījaka {Bijaka} [fr. bīja] scion, offspring Vin III.18. -nīla° a waterplant Vin III.276 (C. on Vin III.177). Bījati & Bījanī {Bijati} {Bijani} are by-forms of vījati & vījanī are by-forms of vījati & vījanī (q. v.). Bījin {Bijin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. bīja] having seed, only in cpd. eka° having one seed (for only one future life) left A I.233; S V.205; Nett 189, cp. A. IV.380; Kvu II.471, see also KvuA in J.P.T.S. 1889, 137. Bībhaccha (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bībhatsa, bībhatsate to feel disgust. Not a des. fr. bādhate: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fastidium] disgusting, awful, horrible, dreadful J II.276; IV.71 (°vaṇṇa), Sdhp 603. °dassana a disgusting sight, horrible to behold J I.171; PvA 32, 56, 68, 99 (: all with ref. to Petas). - The spelling bhībhaccha (after bhī) is sometimes found, e. g. at J I.61; IV.491; V.42. {Bibhaccha} Bīraṇa {Birana} [cp. Sk. vīraṇa & vīraṇī-mūla=uśīra Halāyudha 2, 467] a fragrant grass, Andropogon muricatum S III.137; (here represented as larger than the kusa & babbaja grasses, smaller than a tree). Bujjhaka (adj.) [fr. budh] intelligent, prudent, judicicus, in a° Dpvs IX.17, foolish, imprudent, unmindful of their own interest (trsln suggested by E. Hardy as preferable to Oldenberg's "unnoticed"). Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 69 suggests "not fighting," thus making abujjhaka= avujjh°=ayujjh° (of yudh). {Bujjhaka} Bujjhati {Bujjhati} [budh, y-formation, corresp. to Sk. budhyate for the usual bodhate. The sense is that of a Med., but is also used as Act. with acc. of object, e. g. saccāni bujjhi he recognised the truths Vism 209. - The Dhtp (414) and Dhtm (652) explain budh by "avagamane" (understanding, see ogamana), Dhtm (242) also by "bodhane" (awakening). Bdhgh's expln of the meaning is "kilesa-santāna-niddāya uṭṭhahati cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati Nibbānam eva vā sacchikaroti" DhsA 217, cp. trsln at Expos. 294 "to rise from the slumber of Pāli Text Society 1111 Pāli-English Dictionary the continuum of the lower nature, or a penetrating the Ariyan Truths, or a realizing Nibbāna"] to be awake, to be enlightened in (acc.), to perceive, to know, recognise, understand D II.249; S I.74, 198; Dh 136, 286; Th 1, 146; J III.331; IV.49, 425; Miln 165, 348 (pot. bujjheyya); Dpvs I.14 (with gen.) KhA 219 (so attho sukhaṃ b.). 3rd pl. bujjhare Th 2, 453; Bu II.183. imper. bujjhassu Bu II.183. - fut. bujjhissati Bu II.65; aor. abujjhi Bu II.211, and bujjhi J IV.425; Vism 209; pret. 3rd sg. abujjhatha Bu VII.22. - ppr. bujjhamāna Sn 395; Bu VII.22; DhA I.93. - pp. buddha (q. v.). - Caus. I. bodheti (q. v.). - Caus. II. bujjhāpeti to lead to knowledge or recognition J I.407. Two infinitives formed fr. bodh, but belonging to budh are bodhuṃ J V.341, and boddhuṃ Th 1, 167. Bujjhana {Bujjhana} (nt.) [fr. budh] awakening, attaining to knowledge, recognition Ps I.18; Miln 194; DA I.51. Bujjhanaka {Bujjhanaka} (adj.) [fr. bujjhana] endowed with knowledge, having the elements of bodhi, being enlightened DhsA 217. Bujjhitar {Bujjhitar} [n. ag. of bujjhati] one who becomes enlightened or recognises Nd1 457=Ps I.174=Vism 209 (bujjhitā saccāni, of the Buddha). Buḍḍha {Buddha} [for vuḍḍha, pp. of vṛdh, see vaḍḍhati] aged, old D II.162; J I.164 (°pabbajita one who has become an ascetic in his old age). Compar. buḍḍhatara DhA II.239 (v. l. K.B.S. vuḍḍhatara). Buddha1 {Buddha} (adj.) [med.-pass. pp. of bujjhati, cp. Epic Sk. buddha] (a) understood S I.35=60 (su-dub-buddha very difficult to understand). - (b) having attained enlightenment, wise A IV.449; PvA 16 (buddh'ādayo), 60 (=ariya). Usually appld to the Bhagavant (Gotama) M I.386 (one of the adj. describing Gotama to Nigaṇṭha Nāthaputta); Sn 993. The true brāhmaṇa is buddha, e. g. Sn 622, 643, 646. Buddha2 {Buddha} [=buddha1] A. one who has attained enlightenment; a man superior to all other beings, human & divine, by his knowledge of the truth, a Buddha. At A II.38 the Buddha declares himself to be neither a god (deva) nor a Gandharva, nor a Yakṣa nor a man. - The word Buddha is an appellative, not a proper name (na mātarā kataṃ etc., vimokkh'antikaṃ etaṃ bud- dhānaṃ Bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle . . . paððatti) Nd1 458 & Ps I.174. - There are 2 sorts of B's, viz. Pacceka-buddhas or Buddhas who attain to complete enlightenment, but do not preach the way of deliverance to the world, and Sammāsambuddhas, who are omniscient and endowed with the 10 powers (see bala), and whose mission is to proclaim the saving truth to all beings (cp. Miln 106). In this function the B's are Satthāro or teachers, Masters. In his rôle of a preeminent man a Buddha is styled Bhagavā or Lord: Buddho so Bhagavā M I.235; Pv II.960=DhA III.219. - Besides the 18 dhammā and the 10 balāni they are gifted with the 4 vesārajjāni (A II.9, cp. Miln 106). These teachers appear upon the earth from time to time; the approach of the birth of a B. (buddh'-uppāda) is hailed by the acclamation of the worlds, they live the houseless life and found an Order (Buddha-pamukha bhikkhu-sangha Sn p. 111; Sn 81, 386; Miln 212; DA I.242; PvA 19). The news that a B. has appeared upon earth is a cause of the greatest rejoicing: opportunity to see him is eagerly sought (Vin II.155; S I.210; DA I.248). The B. is always born in a brāhmaṇa or khattiya family. It is impossible here to give all the references for the Buddhas or Buddhahood in general; see e. g. Vin III.24 sq.; Dh 182 sq., 194, 195 (=sammā sambuddhā DhA III.252), 387; J I.51; III.128; Vism 442 (pubba-buddhā); PvA 20. - Pāli Text Society 1112 Pāli-English Dictionary The remembrance of former births a B. shares with other classes of privileged beings, only in a different (higher) degree. This faculty (in an ascending scale) is possessed by the foll. 6 classes: titthiyā, pakati-sāvakā, mahā-sāvaka, agga-sāvakā, pacceka-buddhā, buddhā (see Vism 411). - B. The word Buddha is specially applied to the Buddha of the present world-age, Gotama by family-name. He is said to be the 25th of the series of former Buddhas (pubbā buddhā) S I.109, 140; IV.52. - Seven Buddhas are mentioned in the earlier texts & frequently referred to (cp. the 7 Rishis of the Vedic period, see also under satta, No. 7). They are Vipassī, Sikhī, Vessabhū, Kakusandha, Konāgamana, Kassapa and Gotama (D II.5-7; S II.5-11; cp. Th 1, 491; J II.147). They are also mentioned in an old formula against snake-bites (Vin II.110). The (allegorical) names of the predecessors of these in former ages are Dīpankara, Kondaðða, Mangala, Sumana, Revata, Sobhita, Anomadassī, Paduma, Narada, Padumuttara, Sumedha, Sujāta, Piyadassī, Atthadassī, Dhammadassī, Siddhattha, Tissa, Phussa. - The typical career of a Buddha is illustrated in the life of Gotama and the legends connected with his birth, as they appear in later tradition. Before his last existence he practised the 10 perfections (pāramitā, q. v.) for many ages, & finally descended from the Tusita Heaven (see Buddhavaṃsa). He was born in a khattiya family and was distinguished by the 32 signs of a great man (Mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni see D II.17 sq. and similar passages; cp. Ud 48). His mother Māyā bore him painlessly and died seven days after his birth M III.118 sq. - The story of each of the 25 Buddhas is given in the Buddhavaṃsa, quoted in the introductory chapters of the Jātak'aṭṭhakathā. - Convinced that asceticism was not the way to enlightenment, he renounced austerities. He became enlightened when seated in meditation under an Assattha tree (Ficus religiosa, hence called Bodhi or Bo tree). At the supreme moment he was tempted by Māra, but vanquished the evil one. He was then ready to depart, but resolved to remain in the world and preach the truth (M I.169; Vin I.6; a rather diff. account A II.20). That day he knew and proclaimed himself to be the Buddha and his career as a teacher began (M I.171; Vin I.9; Sn 558). - Like all the other Sammā-sambuddhas he founded an Order, converting and gladdening men by his discourses. After a long life of teaching he attained Nibbāna (nibbānaṃ adhigacchi), and passed utterly away: S I.210; D II.156; Sn 83, 513, 1133 sq.; Miln 96. - The Epithets attributed to all the Buddhas are naturally assigned also to Gotama Buddha. Out of the almost endless series of these we only give a few. He is adored as the highest and holiest of men (S I.47; III.84; loke anuttaro, lokassa aggo; Miln 70). He is the supremely wise, the conqueror of the powers of darkness, the teacher of gods (devas and yakkhas) and men S I.50, 132, 206. 301; A I.142; II.33; III.65; Sn 157 sq. He is the ādicca-bandhu kinsman of the sun S I.186; and compared to a universal monarch (rājā cakkavattī) A I.76; III.150 and to the lion (sīha), the king of the animals A III.122. He is buddha-vīra Th 1, 47; the refuge of all beings M II.305; DA I.233; Miln 95; further appaṭipuggala S I.134; his teaching leads to enlightenment, to self-conquest, to security & deliverance M I.235; Sn 454, 993; DA I.230. He himself is not to be reborn (antima-sarīro with his last body) S I.210; he is vimutto, freed & has come to the end of sorrow A IV.258; S III.65; full of compassion for all beings S I.25, 51; M II.100; he is bhisakko the physician A IV.340; magga-ññu, magga-vidū, maggakovido S III.66. - Under Buddh'anussati (Vism 198 sq.) we find the famous formula Bhagavā Arahaṃ Sammāsambuddho vijjā-caraṇa-sampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisa-damma-sārathi Satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho Bhagavā (D I.49≈), analysed & exegetically discussed. Here (p. 209) "Buddha" is expld with the formula as found at Ps I.174; Nd1 457. More explicitly with var. epithets at the latter passage. This formula is one of the highest & most comprehensive characterisations of a Buddha, & occurs frequently in the Canon, e. g. M I.179; S II.69; V.343. A khattiya by birth he is called a brāhmaṇa because he carries on the sacred tradition, and because he excels in wisdom, self-control and virtue Miln 225. -ānubuddha enlightened after the Enlightened one Th 1, 679, 1246 (trsld "who next to our Great Waked one was awoke"). - Pāli Text Society 1113 Pāli-English Dictionary ānubhāva the majestic power of the B. PvA 38, 171. -ānussati mindfulness of the B., one of the 6 anussatis (B.°, dhamma°, sangha°, sīla°, cāga°, devatā°) D III.250, 280; Vism 132 (where followed by upasamānussati and 4 other qualities making up the pīti-sambojjh'anga; see anussati), 197 sq. (the 10, as mentioned under anussati). -ankura a nascent (lit. sprouting) Buddha, one who is destined to be a B. DhA I.83. -antara a Buddha-interval, the period between the appearance of one Buddha & the next Miln 3; DhA I.201 (the 4 last ones); IV.201; PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191. -ārammaṇa having its foundation or cause in the B., in °pīti joy, caused by contemplation of a B. J III.405; Vism 143 (here as ubbegā-pīti). -ûpaṭṭhāna B.-worship DhA I.101; PvA 93. -uppāda the coming into existence of a Buddha, time or age in which a B. was born (opp. buddh'antara), a Buddha-period J I.59; Mhbv 12; VbhA 50; ThA 28. -kara making a B., bringing about Buddhahood J I.20. -kāraka=°kara Mhbv 9. -kāla the time of a B. Vism 91 (Buddhakālo viya pavattati it is like the time of the B.) -kula Buddha-clan SnA 532 (B.-pitā, °mātā ibid.). -kolāhala the announcement of a Buddha, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121, cp. J I.48. -khetta field or region of (or for the existence of) a Buddha Vism 414 (divided into 3 spheres: jātikkhetta, āṇākkhetta, visayakkhetta, see khetta). -gata directed or referring to the B. S I.211 (sati); Dh 296. -guṇa quality of a B., virtue, character of a Buddha J I.27; II.147; Bu II.177; Mbhv 80; KhA 121 (cp. App.). -cakkhu the eye of a Buddha, i. e. an eye (or the faculty) of complete intuition Vin I.6; ThA 2; see discussed in detail at Nd1 359=Nd2 2354; cp. cakkhu. ðāṇa knowledge of a B., which is boundless (cp. Saddh. 73, J.P.T.S. 1887, 40) Bu I.64 (appameyya); X.5 (cuddasa). -dhamma Buddhahood Miln 276; pl. condition or attributes of a B. J I.20; referred to as 6 at Nd1 143= Nd2 466 (bhāgī channaṃ °ānan ti Bhagavā), as 18 at Miln 105, 285. Kern (Manual & Grundriss III.8, p. 63) gives (after Lal. Vist. 183, 343) the foll. 18 āveṇikadharmas ("extraordinary qualities") as such: (1) seeing all things past, (2) present, (3) future, (4) propriety of actions of the body, (5) of speech, (6) of thought, (7) firmness of intuition, (8) of memory, (9) of samādhi, (10) of energy, (11) of emancipation, (12) of wisdom, (13) freedom from fickleness, (14) noisiness, (15) confusedness, (16) hastiness, (17) heedlessness, (18) inconsiderateness. -pañha the name given to one question asked by Sāriputta, which the paribbājikā Kuṇḍalakesī was unable to answer DhA II.225. -pasanna finding one's happiness, or believing in the B. Vin IV.39. -putta son of the B. said of bhikkhus or arahants Miln 143, cp. S III.83: puttā Buddhassa orasā. -bala the force of a B. (iddibala & paððā°) Bu I.3. -bījankura a future B. Bu II.71. -bhāva condition of a B. enlightenment J I.14, 147 (abuddhabhāva un-buddhahood, of Devadatta); DA I.1. -bhūmi the ground of Buddhahood Bu II.175. -manta mystic verses of a B. DA I.248. -māmaka devotedly attached to the B. DhA I.206 (+Dhamma°, Sangha°). -rakkhita saved by the B. (Np.) SnA 534 (+Dhamma°). -rasmi (pl. °iyo) rays shining forth from the person of the Buddha; they are of 6 colours J I.501; SnA 132; Mhbv 6, 15, 38; VvA 207; DhsA 13. -rūpa form or figure of the B. Vism 228 (Mārena nimmita, cp. Divy 162, 166; Buddha-nirmāṇa the magic figure of the B.). -līḷha (& °līḷhā) deportment, ease, grace of a Buddha J I.54; Mhbv 39; DhA I.33; II.41. -vacana the word (teaching) of the Buddha Miln 17; KhA 13; SnA 274, 331. -visaya the sphere (of wonder), the range, scope or power of a Buddha (cp. buddha-khetta) DhA I.33; II.199; SnA 154, 228. -veneyya one able to be led to enlightenment, accessible to Buddha's teaching SnA 15, 331. -sāsana the teaching (instructions) of the B. Dh 368, 381. -sukumāla delicate, sensitive (to fatigue), as Buddhas are DhA I.5. Buddhaka {Buddhaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. buddha] in cpd. dvangula-buddhikā (f.) possessing insight as much as 2 finger-breadths VvA 96. - The °ka belongs to the whole cpd. Buddhatā {Buddhata} (f.) [abstr. fr. buddha] enlightenment, wisdom DhA IV.228; ThA 4 (Buddhasubuddhatā). - Cp. buddhatta. Pāli Text Society 1114 Pāli-English Dictionary Buddhati {Buddhati} to obstruct, withhold etc.: see pali°. Buddhatta {Buddhatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. buddha] state of (perfect) enlightenment, (attainment of) Buddhahood J III 363 (sabbadhammānaṃ b.); Vism 209 (buddhattā Buddho); Mhbv 12. Cp. buddhatā and abhisambuddhatta. Buddhi {Buddhi} (f.) [fr. budh; cp. Class. Sk. buddhi] wisdom, intelligence D III.165 (in sequence saddhā sīla suta b. cāga etc.); J III.369; V.257; Miln 349; Sdhp 263. The ref. Vism 439 should be read vuddhi for b°. -carita one whose behaviour or character is wisdom Vism 104 (=paððavā). -sampanna endowed with (highest) wisdom PvA 39. Buddhika {Buddhika} (adj.) [-°) [fr. buddhi] intelligent, in cpds a° unintelligent & sa° possessed of wisdom Miln 76. Buddhimant {Buddhimant} (adj.) [fr. buddhi] possessing insight, full of right knowledge Vin II.195; J V.257; Miln 21, 294; PvA 131 (paṇḍita, b., sappañña-jātika). Bunda {Bunda} [Vedic budhna] the root of a tree Abhp 549. Bundika {Bundika} in cpd. °ābaddha is of uncertain origin; the whole means a sort of seat or bedstead (fixed up or tied together with slats?) Vin II.149; IV.40, 357. Bubbuḷa & Bubbula {Bubbula} [cp. Epic Sk. budbuda] a bubble. On similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 117. Usually of a waterbubble udaka° S III.141; A IV.137; J V.216; Miln 117; Vism 109; DhA III.209; VbhA 33 (as unsubstantial to which vedanā are likened). In other connection at J I.68 (of cooking gruel). Bubbuḷaka {Bubbulaka} =bubbuḷa, viz. 1. a bubble DhA III.166; Miln 118. - 2. the iris of the eye Th 2, 395 (cp. Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1884, 89, but according to ThA 259 the reading pubbaḷhaka is to be preferred.) Bubhukkhita {Bubhukkhita} [pp. of bubhukkhati, Desid. of bhuñjati] wishing to eat, hungry J II.14; V.70; Miln 66; Dāvs III.32. Būḷha {Bulha} [for vūḷha, cp. Sk. vyūḍha for the usual vyūha, q. v.] array of troops J I.387. Būha {Buha} see vyūha. Beluva & Beḷuva {Beluva} [the guṇa-form of billa, in like meaning. It is the diæretic form of Sk. *bailva or *vailva, of which the contracted form is P. bella] 1. the Vilva tree, Aegle marmelos M I.108; II.6; J IV.363, 368; VI.525, 560. - 2. wood of the Vilva tree S I.22; D II.264; Mhbv 31. pakka ripe fruit of the Vilva J V.74. -paṇḍu(-vīṇā) a yellow flute made of Vilva wood, representing a kind of magic flute which according to SnA 393 first belonged to Māra, and was then given to Pañcasikha, one of the Heavenly Musicians, by Sakka. See Vism 392 (attributed to Paðcasikha); DhA I.433 (of Māra; v. l. veḷuvadaṇḍa-vīṇā); III.225 (of P.); SnA 393 (v. l. veluva°). -laṭṭhi a young sprout of the Vilva tree KhA 118. -salāṭuka the unripe fruit of Pāli Text Society 1115 Pāli-English Dictionary the Vilva, next in size to the smaller kola, surpassed in size by the ripe billa or billi S I.150=A IV.170=Sn p. 125. Bella {Bella} (m. & nt.) [=beluva, q. v.] the fruit of the Vilva tree (a kind of citron?) J III.77 (C. beluva); VI.578. Also in doubtful passage at J III.319 (v. l. mella, phella). Bojjha {Bojjha} (nt.) [orig. grd. of bujjhati or bodheti] a matter to be known or understood, subject of knowledge or understanding Nett 20. Bojjhanga {Bojjhanga} [bodhi+anga; cp. BSk. bodhyanga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 37, where the 7 are given at Divy 208] a factor or constituent of knowledge or wisdom. There are 7 bojjhangas usually referred to or understood from the context. There are enumd at several places, e. g. at D III.106, where they are mentioned in a list of qualities (dhammā) which contribute to the greatest happiness of gods and man, viz. the 4 satipaṭṭhānā, 4 sammapadhānā, 4 iddhipādā, 5 indriyāni, 5 balāni & the 7 bojjhangas and ariya aṭṭhangika magga, 37 in all. The same list we find at Divy 208. - The 7 b. (frequently also called sambojjhangā) are sati, dhamma-vicaya, viriya, pīti, passaddhi, samādhi, upekhā or mindfulness, investigation of the Law, energy, rapture, repose, concentration and equanimity (DhsA 217, cp. Expositor II.294). - D II.79, 83, 120, 303; III.101, 128, 284; M I.11, 61; II.12; III.85, 275; S I.54; V.82, 110; A I.14; IV.23; Nd1 14, 45, 171 (°kusala), 341; Kvu I.158; Dhs 358, 528, 1354; Vbh 199 sq., 227 sq.; Vism 160; Miln 340; DhA I.230; VbhA 120, 310; ThA 27, 50, 160. They are counted among the 37 constituents of Arahantship, viz. the 30 above-mentioned qualities (counting magga as one), with addition of sīlesu paripūrikāritā, indriyesu gutta-dvāratā, bhojane mattaððutā, jāgariy'ānuyoga, satisampajaññaṃ (see e. g. Nd1 14; Nd2 s. v. satipaṭṭhāna & sīla); cp. Th 1, 161, 162; Th 2, 21 (maggā nibbāna-pattiyā); DhsA 217 (bodhāya saṃvattantī ti bojjhangā etc.; also def. as "bodhissa ango ti pi bojjhango sen'angarath'ang'ādayo viya). They are also called the paribhoga-bhaṇḍāni or "insignia" of the Buddha Miln 330. -kosalla proficiency in the constituents of wisdom Vism 248. Bodha1 {Bodha} [fr. budh; the usual] form is sambodha=bodhi, viz. knowledge, wisdom, enlightenment, Buddhaship D III.54 (v. l. sam°); DhsA 217; in phrase bodhāya maggo J I.67; Miln 244, 289; and in bodha-pakkhiyadhammā (for which usually bodhi°) SnA 164 (where given as 37); complementary to santi (arousing, soothing) Th 1, 342. bodhangama leading to enlightenment (dhammā) Nett 31, 83 (v. l. bojjh°). Bodha2 {Bodha} see pali°. Bodhana {Bodhana} (nt.) [fr. bodheti] 1. knowing Miln 168 (cp. S V.83). - 2. (adj.) enlightening, teaching Bu 26, 22 (pacchima-jana°). Bodhanīya {Bodhaniya} (adj.) [grd. fr. bodheti] capable of being enlightened, worthy to be taught Bu 5, 31. See also bodhaneyya. Bodhaneyya {Bodhaneyya} (adj.) [fr. bodheti, see bodhanīya] capable of being enlightened, to be taught the truth Bu 2, 195 (jana); Miln 169 (yena yogena bodhaneyyā sattā bujjhanti tena y. bodheti); otherwise in combn bodhaneyya-bandhavo the (Buddha's) relations (or fellowmen) who are able to be enlightened J I.345=DhA I.367; J V.335. Pāli Text Society 1116 Pāli-English Dictionary Bodhi1 {Bodhi} (f.) [fr. budh, cp. Vedic bodhin-manas having an attentive mind; RV V.75, 5; VIII.82, 18] (supreme) knowledge, enlightenment, the knowledge possessed by a Buddha (see also sambodhi & sammā-sambodhi) M I.356; II.95=D III.237 (saddho hoti, saddahati Tathāgatassa bodhiṃ); D III.159 (anuttaraṃ pappoti bodhiṃ), 165 (id.); S I.103, 196; V.197 sq.; A II.66; VbhA 310 (def.). Bodhi consists of 7 elements called bojjhangā or sambojjhangā, and is attained by the accomplishment of the perfections called bodhi-pācanā dhammā (see under cpds. & cp. bodhi-pakkhiya-dhammā). The Buddha is said to have found the Path followed by former Buddhas, who "catusu satipaṭṭhānesu supatiṭṭhitacittā satta-bojjhange yathābhūtaṃ bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ sammā-sambodhiṃ abhisambujjhiṃsu" S V.160. The moment of supreme enlightenment is the moment when the Four Truths (ariya-saccāni) are grasped S V.423. Bodhi is used to express the lofty knowledge of an ascetic (Bodhi-paribbājaka Np. J V.229 sq.), and the stage of enlightenment of the Paccekabuddha (paccekabodhi J III.348; pacceka-bodhiðāṇa J IV.114; paccekasambodhi SnA 73), as distinguished from sammāsambodhi. -ṭṭhāna the state of Bodhi, state of enlightenment. Dpvs 2.61. -pakkhika=pakkhiya (& pakkhika, e. g. A III.70=300; Th 1, 900; cp. bodha°) belonging to enlightenment, usually referred to as the 37 bodhipakkhiyā dhammā qualities or items constituting or contributing to Bodhi, which are the same as enumd under bojjhanga (q. v.). They are enumd & discussed at Vism 678 sq. and mentioned at many other passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. Vbh 244, 249; Nett 31, 197, 240, 261; and in the Commentaries, e. g. J I.275; III.290; V.483; DhA I.230. When they are increased to 43 they include the above with the addition of aniccasaððā; dukkha°, anatta°, pahāna°, virāga°, nirodhasaððā, thus at Nett 112, 237. In the older texts we do not find any numbered lists of the b.-p.-dhammā. At A III.70 only indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaððutā and jāgariy'ānuyoga are mentioned in connection with bodhipakkhikā dhammā in general. At S V.227, 239 sq. (so read in Vbh preface XIV. for 327, 337!) the term is applied to the 5 indriyas: saddh' indriyaṃ, viriy°, sati°, samādhi°, paðð°. A more detailed discussion of the bodhi-pdhammā and their mention in the Piṭakas is found in Mrs. Rh. D.'s preface to the Vbh edition, pp. xiv.-xvi. Of BSk. passage may be mentioned Divy 350 (saptatriṃśad-bodhi-pakṣān dharmān amukhī - kṛtya pratyekāṃ bodhiṃ sākṣātkṛtavantah) & 616 (bodhipakṣāṃs tān dharmān Bhagavān saṃprakāśayati sma). -paripāka the maturing of enlightenment Vism 116. -pācana ripening of knowledge (of a Buddha); adj. leading to enlightenment Bu II. 121 sq.; Cp I.11 (cp. J I.22). It is a late term. The b. dhammā are the 10 perfections (pāramiyo), i. e. dāna°, sīla°, nekkhamma°, paððā°, viriya°, khanti°, sacca°, adhiṭṭhāna°, mettā°, upekhā°. -satta (1) a "bodhi-being," i. e. a being destined to attain fullest enlightenment or Buddhaship. A Bodhisatta passes through many existences & many stages of progress before the last birth in which he fulfils his great destiny. The "amhākaṃ Bodhisatto," or "our Bodhisatta" of the Buddhist Texts (e. g. Vism 419 (imasmiṃ kappe ayam eva Bhagavā Bodhisatta-bhūto); DA I.259) refers to Gotama, whose previous existences are related in the Jātaka collection. These tales illustrate the wisdom & goodness of the future Buddha, whether as an animal, a god, or a human being. In his last existence before attaining Buddhahood he is a man. Reference is made to a Bodhisatta or the B. at very many places throughout the Canon. See e. g. M I.17, 163, 240; S II.5; III.27; IV.233; V.263, 281, 317; A II.130; III.240; IV.302, 439; Vism 15, 116, 499; SnA 52 (pacceka°), 67, 72. - (2) N. of the author of a Pali grammar, used by Kaccāyana (not extant): see Windisch, Proceedings of XIVth Or. Congress, Vol. I.290. -sambhāra (pl.) conditions (lit. materials) necessary for the attainment of bodhi J I.1; VI.595; Mbvs 12. Bodhi2 {Bodhi} [=bodhi1] the tree of wisdom, the sacred Bo tree, the fig tree (Assattha, Ficus religiosa) under which Gotama Buddha arrived at perfect knowledge. The tree is near the spot where Buddhagāya is now, about 60 miles fr. Patna. It is regarded by pilgrims as the centre of the world (cp. pathavī-nābhi mahā-bodhimaṇḍo Mbvs 79). It is also spoken of as Mahābodhi Pāli Text Society 1117 Pāli-English Dictionary (e. g. J IV.228; Vism 403). - Vism 72, 299, 342; DhA I.105; ThA 62; VbhA 473. -angaṇa the courtyard in which the Bo tree stands DA I.191; Vism 188 (°vatta); VbhA 349. -tala "Bodhifoundation," i. e. the place or ground of the B. tree, otherwise bodhi-maṇḍa J I.105; Mhbv 9; DhA I.117. -pakka fruit of the Bo tree J IV.229. -pādapa the Bodhi tree Mbhv 1. -pūjā veneration of, or offerings to the Bo tree Mhbv 81. -maṇḍa (for °maṇḍala) the ground under the Bodhi tree, hence the spot (or "throne"), on which the Buddha was seated at the time of attaining highest enlightenment. The term is only found in very late canonical and postcanonical literature. Bu II.65, 183; Vism 203; J IV.228, 232; Mhbv 79; SnA 2, 30, 225, 258, 281, 340, 391, 441; DhA I.86; II.69; IV.72; ThA 2. Cp. BSk. bodhimaṇḍa Divy 392. -maha feast in honour of the Bo tree J IV.229. -mūla the root or foot of the Bo tree SnA 32, 391; cp. Bodhiyā mūle Nd1 172, 458=Ps I.174. -rukkha the Bodhi tree Vin I.1. Bodhetar {Bodhetar} [n. ag. fr. bodheti] awakener, enlightener Nd1 457; Ps I.174; Vism 209. Bodheti {Bodheti} [Caus. of bujjhati] 1. to awaken to the truth, to enlighten S I.170; Bu II.195. aor. bodhesi Vism 209, abodhayi Bu II.196 & bodhayi Bu V.31; XXV.6 inf. bodhuṃ: see bujjhati, & bodhetuṃ J IV.393. grd. bodhabba D II.246; A IV.136. - 2. to make aware (of), to make known J VI.412; SnA 444. Bondi [etym. doubtful, one proposed by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 207 derives it fr. bandh=bundh to bind, which is an erroneous comparison; on his hint "probably cognate with E. body" cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fidelia. The orig. meaning may have been, as Morris suggests, "trunk." It certainly is a dial. word] body Pv IV.332; J I.503; II.160; III.117; PvA 254. {Bondi} Bya {Bya} ° etc. (byā°, byu°) words not found under these initials are to be looked up under vya° etc. Byagā {Byaga} 3rd sg. aor. of vi+gam, to depart, to be lost, perish Th 1, 170. Byaggha {Byaggha} [cp. Sk. vyāghra] a tiger J II.110; Sdhp 388. f. byagghinī Miln 67. Byañjana (nt.) [cp. Sk. vyañjana] 1. sign, mark: see vyañjana. - 2. the letter, as compared with attha, the spirit or meaning; thus in phrase atthato byañjanato ca according to the meaning & the letter Miln 18, 345; Nett 23. As vyañjana is the more usual (& classical) form, other refs. will be found under vyañjana. {Byanjana} Byatta {Byatta} (adj.) [cp. P. vyatta; Sk. vyakta] experienced, learned Miln 21. Byattatā {Byattata} (f.) [fr. byatta] experience, learning Miln 349. See also pari°. Byanti {Byanti} ° in °bhavati, bhāva etc. see vyanti°. Byapagata {Byapagata} [=vy-apa-gata] departed, dispelled Miln 225. Byappatha {Byappatha} [so for byappattha; according to Kern, Toev. s. v. the word is a distortion fr. *vyāpṛta (for which usually P. vyāvaṭa) of vy+ā+pṛ3, pṛṇoti to be busy or active] busy, active. Thus Kern, but the trsln is not satisfactory. It occurs only at 2 passages; Vin IV.2, Pāli Text Society 1118 Pāli-English Dictionary where combd with vācā, girā, vacībheda, and meaning "mode of speech," and at Sn 961, where it has the same meaning & is referred by Nd1 472 to a mode of speech & expld by SnA 572 by vacana. Thus the derivation fr. pṛ with vyā° can hardly be claimed to be correct for Bdhgh's conception of the word; to him it sounded more likely like vy+ā+patha (cp. cpds. vacana-patha & vāda-patha), thus "way of speaking." Byamha {Byamha} [cp. vyamha] a celestial mansion, a Vimāna Vv 523. As vyamha at J IV.464. Byasana {Byasana} see vyasana. Byā {Bya} (indecl.) [distorted fr. iva=eva, with metathesis & diaeresis *veyya>*veyyā>*vyā>byā] intensive particle: "just so, certainly, indeed" only in phrase "evaṃ byā kho" Vin II.26; IV.134=DA I.27; M I.130 (evaṃ vyā kho ti evaṃ viya kho C.), 257. Byādhi {Byadhi} [cp. Sk. vyādhi; lit. "upset" fr. vy+ā+dhā] sickness, disease A I.146; Kvu II.457; Miln 351. Byādhita {Byadhita} [pp. fr. byādheti] afflicted with disease Th 1, 73; Miln 168. Byādheti {Byadheti} [Caus. fr. byādhi] to cause to waver, unsettle, agitate, trouble S I.120; Th 1, 46, 1211. Pass. byādhiyati Kvu II.457 (aor. byādhiyiṃsu). - pp. byādhita. Byāpajjha {Byapajjha} [fr. vy-ā-pad] 1. trouble, opp. a° relief M I.10. - 2. malevolence; neg. a° benevolence Vin I.3; M I.38; cp. avyāpajjha S IV.296, 371. Byāpanna {Byapanna} [fr. vyāpajjati] malevolent Sdhp 70; otherwise vy°, e. g. S II.168 (°citta). Byāpāda {Byapada} [fr. vy+ā+pad] ill-will, malevolence, one of the 5 "obstructions" (āvaraṇāni, see e. g. S V.94; Nd2 379); and of the 4 "bonds" (kāya-ganthā see e. g. Nd1 98). - M I.434; S I.99; It 119; Ps I.31; II.12; Nd1 149, 207, 386. -vitakka a malevolent or angry thought M I.11; S I.203; II.151; III.93; V.417; Nd1 501; Kvu 113. Byābādha {Byabadha} [vy+ā+bādh] evil, wrong, hurt; usually referred to as 3 fold: atta°, para°, ubhaya°, or against oneself, against others, & both - M I.416; S IV.159 (vyā°), 339. Byābādheti {Byabadheti} [Denom. fr. byābādha] to injure, hurt, oppress S V.393 (na kiðci byābādhemi tasaṃ vā thāvaraṃ vā). Byābhangī {Byabhangi} (f.) [vy+ā+bhaðj] 1. a pole for carrying burdens Th 1, 623. - 2. a flail S IV.201. Byāma {Byama} [cp. Vedic & P. vyāma cp. Śatap. Br. I.2, 5, 14 a fathom, measured by both hands being extended to their full length, only in phrase °ppabhā a halo extending for a fathom around the Buddha J I.12, 90; Bu I.45; Miln 75; VvA 213. Pāli Text Society Byāruddha 1119 Pāli-English Dictionary [pp. of vy+ā+rundh; reading by° in Nd1; vy° in Sn & SnA; v. l. BB] obstructed, opposed, hindered Sn 936 (aññam-aññehi b. in enmity with each other; =paṭiviruddha Nd1 408), 938 (412 id.; SnA 566=āhata-citta). {Byaruddha} Byāvaṭa {Byavata} [vy+ā+vṛ] covered, adorned with VvA 213 (rūpakāya byāvaṭa jana; v. l. byāgata). the meaning (wrongly given as "adorned") is to be deleted. The reading at VvA 213 is doubtful. It may be kāyavyāvaṭa, but dassana-vyāvaṭa is to be preferred (see under vyāvaṭa). Byāsatta [pp. of vy+ā+saðj, cp. āsatta1] attached to, clinging to, in cpd. °mānasa possessed with longing Dh 47 (=sampatte vā asampatte vā lagga-mānasa DhA I.361), 287 (cp. DhA III.433; lagganatāya sattamānasa). {Byasatta} Byūha {Byuha} [cp. Sk. & P. vyūha fr. vi+vah] 1. the array or arrangement of troops in particular positions, order of parade or battle DA I.85. Three formations of troops are mentioned at J II.404 & 406, viz. paduma-vyūha (lotus formation), cakka° (wheel formn), sakaṭa° (cart formn). - 2. a heap, collection, in byūhaṃ karoti to put into a (well-arranged) heap Miln 2 (kacavaraṃ). - 3. a (blind) alley, cul-de-sac Vin IV.271 (byūhan nāma yen'eva pavisanti ten'eva nikkhamanti). Byūhati {Byuhati} [Denom. fr. byūha] to stand in array (like a troop) VvA 104 (byūhanto, v. l. brahmanto). Brahant {Brahant} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bṛhant, of bṛh2 to increase, to be great or strong; paribṛdha solid (cp. brūha, paribrahaṇa & paribrūhana), Av. bərəZat high; Arm. barjr high; Oir. brī, Cymr. bre mountain; Goth. baurgs "borough," Ohg. etc. burg "burgh," i. e. fortress; Ger. berg mountain. - The fundamental notion is that of an increase above normal or the ordinary: vuddhi (of vṛdh) is used in explns of the term; thus Dhtp 344 (Dhtm 506) baha braha brūha=vuddhiyaṃ; VvA 278 brahā=vuddhā. Its use is almost entirely restricted to poetry] very great, vast, high, lofty, gigantic; nom. sg. brahā Sn 410, 550; Th 1, 31; J III.117 (=dīgha C.); IV.111 (su°); 647; Pv IV.310 (of a huge tree), acc. sg. brahantaṃ A III.346; VvA 182; nom. pl. also brahantā Vv 524 (=mahantā VvA 224; of the Yama-dūtā or Death's giant messengers). - f. brahatl J V.215 (=uḷārā C.); also given as N. of a plant Abhp 588. - Superl. brahaṭṭha (=Sk. barhiṣṭha; on inversion bar>bra cp. Sk. paribarhanā>P. paribrahaṇa) in °puppha a large or fully developed blossom J V.416. -arañña woodlands, vast forest A I.187. -vana the wild wood, immense forest A I.152; III.44; Vv 633; J V.215. -sukha (-vihāra-jjhāna-jhāyin) (a thinker enjoying his meditations in) immense happiness Miln 226 (in characterisation of the term "brāhmaṇa"). Brahma & Brahmā {Brahma} [fr. bṛh, see brahant. Perhaps less with regard to the greatness of the divine principle, than with ref. to the greatness or power of prayer or the ecstatic mind (i. e. holy enthusiasm). On etym. see Osthoff, "Bezzenberger's Beiträge" XXIV.142 sq. (=Mir. bricht charm, spell: Oicel. bragr poetry)] - I. Brahman (nt.) [cp. Vedic bráhman nt. prayer; nom. sg. bráhma] 1. the supreme good; as a buddhistic term used in a sense different from the brahmanic (save in controversy with Brahmans); a state like that of Brahmā (or Brahman) A II.184 (brahmappatta). In cpds. brahma°. - 2. Vedic text, mystic formula, prayer DA I.244 (brahmaṃ aṇatī ti brāhmaṇo). II. Brahmā [cp. Vedic brahmán, m., one who prays or chants hymns, nom. sg. Brahmā] 1. the god Brahmā chief of the gods, often represented as the creator of the Universe (vasavattī issaro kattā nimmātā) D I.18; III.30, also called Mahābrahmā Pāli Text Society 1120 Pāli-English Dictionary (D I.235 sq., 244 sq.; III.30; It 15; Vism 578; DhA II.60); and Sahampati (Vin I.5; D II.157; S I.136 sq.; Vism 201; KhA 171; SnA 56) and Sanaṃkumāra (D II.226; III.97). The duration of his life is given as being 1 kalpa (see Kvu 207, 208). - nom. Brahmā Vin I.5; D II.46; J VI.486; Miln 224; Vism 2 (brahmānaṃ atibrahmā, Ep. of Buddha Bhagavā); SnA 229 (B. mahānubhāvo); gen. abl. Brahmano D II.209; Vism 205; SnA 177; instr. Brahmanā D I.252; II.239; Dh 105, 230; Vism 48, 405; DhA II.60; acc. Brahmānaṃ D II.37; voc. Brahme S I.138. - 2. a brahma god, a happy & blameless celestial being, an inhabitant of the higher heavens (brahma-loka; in which to be reborn is a reward of great merit); nom. sg. brahmā S I.142 (Baka br.); M I.327 (id.); A IV.83; PvA 138 (°devatā for brahma°?); gen. abl. brahmuno S I.142, 155; instr. brahmunā D III.147, 150 & brahmanā PvA 98; voc. sg. brahme M I.328. pl. nom. brahmāno Miln 13, 18 (where J VI.486 has Mahā-brahmā in id. p.); DhsA 195; gen. brahmānaṃ Vism 2; Mhbv 151. -paccekabrahmā a br. by himself S I.149 (of the name of Tudu; cp. paccekabuddha). -sabrahmaka (adj.) including the brahma gods D I.62; A II.70; Vin I.11; DA I.174. III. brahma (adj.-n.) [cp. brahmā II. 2; Vedic brahma° & Sk. brāhma] 1. holy, pious, brahmanic; (m.) a holy person, a brahmin - (adj.) J II.14 (br. vaṇṇa=seṭṭha vaṇṇa C.); KhA 151 (brahma-cariyaṃ= brahmaṃ cariyaṃ). - (m.) acc. brahmaṃ Sn 285; voc. brahme (frequent) Sn 1065 (=brahmā ti seṭṭhavacanaṃ SnA 592); J II.346; IV.288; VI.524, 532; Pv I.129 (=brāhmaṇa PvA 66). - 2. divine, as incorporating the highest & best qualities, sublime, ideal, best, very great (see esp. in cpds.), A I.132 (brahmā ti mātāpitaro etc.), 182; IV.76. - 3. holy, sacred, divinely inspired (of the rites, charms, hymns etc.) D I.96 (brahme mante adhiyitvā); Pv II.613 (mantaṃ brahmacintitaṃ) =brāhmaṇānaṃ atthāya brahmaṇā cintitaṃ) PvA 97, 98). - Note. The compn form of all specified bases (I. II. III.) is brahma°, and with regard to meaning it is often not to be decided to which of the 3 categories the cpd. in question belongs. -attabhāva existence as a brahma god DhA III.210. ujjugatta having the most divinely straight limbs (one of the 32 marks of a Great Man) D II.18; III.144, 155. -uttama sublime DhsA 192. -uppatti birth in the brahma heaven S I.143. -ûposatha the highest religious observance with meditation on the Buddha & practice of the uposatha abstinence A I.207. -kappa like Brahmā Th 1, 909. -kāya divine body D III.84; J I.95. -kāyika belonging to the company of Brahmā, N of a high order of Devas in the retinue of Br. (cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie pp. 191, 193, 197) D I.220; II.69; A III.287, 314; IV.40, 76, 240, 401; Th 1, 1082; Vism 225, 559; KhA 86. -kutta a work of Brahmā D III.28, 30 (cp. similarly yaṃ mama, pitrā kṛtaṃ devakṛtaṃ na tu brahmakṛtaṃ tat Divy 22). See also under kutta. -giriya (pl.) name of a certain class of beings, possibly those seated on Brahmagiri (or is it a certain class of performers, actors or dancers?) Miln 191. -ghaṭa (=ghaṭa2) company or assembly of Brahmans J VI.99. -cakka the excellent wheel, i. e. the doctrine of the Buddha M I.69; A II.9, 24; III.417; V.33; It 123; Ps II.174; VbhA 399 (in detail); -cariya see separate article. -cārin leading a holy or pure life, chaste, pious Vin II.236; III.44; S I.5, 60; II.210; III.13; IV.93, A II.44; M III.117; Sn 695, 973; J V.107, 382; Vv 3411 (acc. pl. brahmacāraye for °cārino); Dh 142; Miln 75; DA I.72 (brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratī ti br. c.); DhA III.83; a° S IV.181; Pug 27, 36. -cintita divinely inspired PVI I.613=Vv 6316 (of manta); expln at PvA 97, as given above III.3, differs from that at VvA 265, where it runs: brahmehi Aṭṭhak'ādīhi cintitaṃ paððācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ, i. e. thought out by the divine (seer) Aṭṭhaka and the others (viz. composers of the Vedic hymns: v. s. brāhmaṇa1, seen with insight). -ja sprung from Brahmā (said of the Brāhmaṇas) D III.81, 83; M II.148. Cp. dhammaja. -jacca belonging to a brahman family Th 1, 689. -jāla divine, excellent net, N. of a Suttanta (D No. 1) Vism 30; VbhA 432, 516; KhA 12, 36, 97; SnA 362, 434. daṇḍa "the highest penalty," a kind of severe punishment (temporary deathsentence? ) Vin II.290; D II.154; DhA II.112; cp. Kern, Manual p. 87. -dāyāda kinsman or heir of Brahmā D III.81, 83. -deyya a most excellent gift, a royal gift, a gift given with full powers (said of land granted by the King) D I.87 (=seṭṭha-deyyaṃ DA I.246; cp. Dial. I.108 note: the first part of the cpd. (brahma) has always been interpreted by Brahmans as referring to themselves. But brahma as Pāli Text Society 1121 Pāli-English Dictionary the first part of a cpd. never has that meaning in Pali; and the word in our passage means literally "a full gift." - Cp. id. p. Divy 620, where it does not need to mean "gift to brahmans," as Index suggests); D I.114; J II.166=DhA III.125 (here a gift to a br., it is true, but not with that meaning); J VI.486 (sudinnaṃ+); Mhbv 123. We think that both Kern (who at Toev. s. v. unjustly remarks of Bdhgh's expln as "unjust") and Fick (who at "Sociale Gliederung" p. 126 trsls it as "gift to a Brahman") are wrong, at least their (and others') interpretation is doubtful. -devatā a deity of the Brahmaloka PvA 138 (so read for brahmā°). -nimantanika "addressing an invitation to a brahma-god," title of a Suttanta M I.326 sq., quoted at Vism 393. -nimmita created by Brahmā D III.81, 83. -patta arrived at the highest state, above the devas, a state like the Br. gods M I.386; A II.184. -patti attainment of the highest good S I.169, 181; IV.118. -patha the way to the Br. world or the way to the highest good S I.141; A III.346; Th 1, 689. Cp. Geiger, Dhamma 77. -parāyana devoted to Brahmā Miln 234. -parisā an assembly of the Brahma gods D III.260; M I.330; S I.155; A IV.307. -pārisajja belonging to the retinue of Br., N. of the gods of the lowest Rūpa-brahmaloka S I.145, 155; M I.330; Kvu 207; cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 191, 194. -purohita minister or priest to Mahābrahmā; °deva gods inhabiting the next heaven above the Br.-pārisajjā devā (cp. Kirfel loc. cit.) Kvu 207 (read °purohita for °parohita!). -pphoṭana [a-pphoṭana; ā+ph.] a Brahmaapplause, divine or greatest applause DhA III.210 (cp. Miln 13; J VI.486). -bandhu "brahma-kinsman," a brāhmaṇa in descent, or by name; but in reality an unworthy brahman, Th 2, 251; J VI.532; ThA 206; cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 140. -bhakkha ideal or divine food S I.141. -bhatta a worshipper of Br. J IV.377 sq. -bhavana Br.-world or abode of Br. Nd1 448. -bhūta divine being, most excellent being, said of the Buddha D III.84; M I.111; III.195, 224; S IV.94; A V.226; It 57; said of Arahants A II.206; S III.83. -yāna way of the highest good, path of goodness (cp. brahma-patha) S V.5; J VI.57 (C. ariyabhūmi: so read for arāya°). -yāniya leading to Brahmā D I.220. -loka the Br. world, the highest world, the world of the Celestials (which is like all other creation subject to change & destruction: see e. g. Vism 415=KhA 121), the abode of the Br. devas; Heaven. - It consists of 20 heavens, sixteen being worlds of form (rūpa-brahmaloka) and four, inhabited by devas who are incorporeal (arūpa°). The devas of the Br. l. are free from kāma or sensual desires. Rebirth in this heaven is the reward of great virtue accompanied with meditation (jhāna) A I.227 sq.; V.59 (as included in the sphere called sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātu). - The brahmās like other gods are not necessarily sotāpannā or on the way to full knowledge (sambodhi-parāyaṇā); their attainments depend on the degree of their faith in the Buddha, Dhamma, & Sangha, and their observance of the precepts. - See e. g. D III.112; S I.141, 155, 282; A III.332; IV.75, 103; Sn 508, 1117; J II.61; Ps I.84; Pv II.1317; Dhs 1282; Vbh 421; Vism 199, 314, 367, 372, 390, 401, 405, 408, 415 sq., 421, 557; Mhbv 54, 83, 103 sq., 160; VbA 68; PvA 76; VbhA 167, 433, 437, 510. See also Cpd. 57, 141 sq.; Kirfel, Kosmographie 26, 191, 197, 207, and cp. in BSk. literature Lal. Vist. 171. The Br.-l. is said to be the one place where there are no women: DhA I.270. -yāva Brahmalokā pi even unto Br.'s heaven, expression like "as far as the end of the world" M I.34; S V.265, 288. -°ûpaga attaining to the highest heaven D II.196; A V.342; Sn 139; J II.61; Kvu 114. -°ûpapatti rebirth in Heaven Sn 139. -°parāyana the Br.-loka as ultimate goal J II.61; III.396. -°sahavyatā the company of the Br. gods A IV.135 sq. -yāna the best vehicle S V.5 (+dhammayāna). -vaccasin with a body like that of Mahābrahmā, combd with -vaṇṇin of most excellent complexion, in ster. passage at D I.114, 115; M II.167, cp. DA I.282: °vaccasī ti Mahābrahmuṇo sarīra-sadisena sarīrena samannāgato; °vaṇṇī ti seṭṭhavaṇṇī. -vāda most excellent speech Vin I.3. -vimāna a palace of Brahmā in the highest heaven D III.28, 29; It 15; Vism 108. -vihāra sublime or divine state of mind, blissful meditation (exercises on a, altruistic concepts; b, equanimity; see on these meditations Dial I.298). There are 4 such "divine states," viz. mettā, karuṇā, muditā, upekkhā (see Vism 111; DhsA 192; and cp. Expositor 258; Dhs trsl. 65; BSk. same, e. g. Divy 224); D II.196; III.220 (one of the 3 vihāra's: 1122 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary dibba°, brahma°, ariya°); Th 1, 649; J I.139 (°vihāre bhāvetvā . . . brahmalok'ûpaga), II.61; Dhs 262; Vism 295 sq. (°niddesa), 319. -veṭhana the head-dress of a brahmin SnA 138 (one of the rare passages where brahma°=brahma III. 1). -sama like Brahmā Sn 508; SnA 318, 325; DhsA 195. -ssara "heavenly sound," a divine voice, a beautiful and deep voice (with 8 fine qualities: see enumd under bindu) D II.211=227; J I.96; V.336. Brahmaka {Brahmaka} (adj.) only in cpd. sa° with Brahmā (or the Br. world). q. v. Brahmacariya {Brahmacariya} (nt.) [brahma+cariya] a term (not in the strictly Buddhist sense) for observance of vows of holiness, particularly of chastity: good & moral living (brahmaṃ cariyaṃ brahmāṇaṃ vā cariyaṃ=brahmacariyaṃ KhA 151); esp. in Buddh. sense the moral life, holy life, religious life, as way to end suffering, Vin I.12, 19, renouncing the world, study of the Dhamma D I.84, 155; II.106; III.122 sq., 211; M I.77, 147, 193, 205, 426, 463, 492, 514; II.38; III.36, 116; S I.38, 43, 87, 105, 154, 209; II.24, 29, 120, 219, 278, 284 (°pariyosāna); III.83, 189; IV.51, 104, 110, 126, 136 sq., 163, 253, V.7 sq., 15 sq., 26 sq., 54 sq., 233, 262, 272, 352; A I.50, 168, 225; II.26, 44, 185; III.250, 346; IV.311; V.18, 71, 136; Sn 267, 274 (vas-uttama), 566, 655, 1128; Th 1, 1027, 1079; It 28, 48, 78, 111; Dh 155, 156, 312; J III.396; IV.52; Pv II.913; DhA IV.42 (vasuttamaṃ); VbhA 504. -brahmacariyaṃ vussati to live the religious life A I.115 (cp. °ṃ vusitaṃ in formula under Arahant II. A); °assa kevalin wholly given up to a good life A I.162; °ṃ santānetuṃ to continue the good life A III.90; DhA I.119; komāra° the religious training of a well-bred youth A III.224; Sn 289. -abrahmacariya unchastity, an immoral life, sinful living M I.514; D I.4; Sn 396; KhA 26. -antarāya raping DhA II.52. -ānuggaha a help to purity A I.167; IV.167; Dhs 1348. -ûpaddava a disaster to religious life, succumbing to worldly desires M III.116. -vāsa state of chastity, holy & pure life; adj. living a pure life A I.253; J III.393; Kvu 93; DhA I.225. Brahmacariyaka {Brahmacariyaka} (adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] only in phrase ādi° leading to the highest purity of life D I.189, 191; III.284; A IV.166. Brahmacariyavant {Brahmacariyavant} (adj.) [fr. brahmacariya] leading the religious life, pure, chaste S I.182; Dh 267. Brahmañña {Brahmanna} (adj.) [fr. brāhmaṇa] brahman, of the brahman rank; brahmanhood, of higher conduct, leading a pure life D I.115 (at which passage DA I.286 includes Sāriputta, Moggallāna & Mahākassapa in this rank); M II.167; A I.143. - abstr. der. brāhmaððā (nt.) higher or holy state, excellency of a virtuous life D I.166; Vin III.44; J IV.362 (=brāhmaṇa dhamma C.); brahmaðða (nt.) D II.248; brahmaððā (f.) D III.72, 74; A I.142; & brahmaððattha (nt.) S III.192; V.25 sq., 195; A I.260 (brāhmaððattha). Brahmaññata {Brahmannata} (& brāh°) [fr. brahma or brāhmaṇa] state of a brahman D III.145, 169; Dh 332, cp. DhA IV.33. - Neg. a° D III.70, 71. Brahmaññattha {Brahmannattha} see brahmañña. Brahmatta {Brahmatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. brahma] state of a Brahma god, existence in the Br. world Vbh 337; Vism 301; VbhA 437; DhA I.110. brahmattabhāva is to be read as brahm'attabhāva (see under brahma). Pāli Text Society 1123 Pāli-English Dictionary Brahmattara {Brahmattara} at J III.207 (of a castle) is probably to be read brahmuttara "even higher than Brahmā," i. e. unsurpassed, magnificent. C. explns by suvaṇṇa- pāsāda. Brahmavant {Brahmavant} (adj.) [fr. brahma] "having Brahmā," possessed or full of Brahmā; f. brahmavatī Np. Vism 434. see brahmað°. Brāhmaṇa1 {Brahmana} [fr. brahma; cp. Vedic brāhmaṇa, der. fr. brahmán] a member of the Brahman caste; a Br. teacher. In the Buddhist terminology also used for a man leading a pure, sinless & ascetic life, often even syn. with arahant. - On brāhmaṇas as a caste & their representation in the Jātaka collection see Fick, Sociale Gliederung; esp. ch. 8, pp. 117-162. Var. fanciful etymologies, consisting of a word-play, in P. definitions are e. g. "sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bāhitattā br." (like def. of bhikkhu) Nd1 86=Nd2 464a (cp. Sn 519); ye keci bhovādikā Nd1 249=Nd2 464b; brahā - sukhavihāra - jhāna - jhāyin Miln 226; pāpaṃ bāhesuṃ D III.94; bāhita-pāpattā br. DhA III.84; ariyā bāhita-pāpattā br. DA I.244. - pl. brāhmaṇāse Sn 1079 sq. - Var. refQ in the Canon to all meanings of the term: D I.90, 94, 104, 119 sq., 136 (mahāsālā), 150 (°dūta), 247; III.44 sq., 61, 83 sq., 94 sq. (origin of), 147, 170, 258 (°mahāsālā), 270; M I.271 (°karaṇā dhammā), 280; II.84, 148, 177; III.60, 270 (a bhikkhu addressed as br.); S I.47, 54, 94 sq., 99 (°kumāra), 117, 125, 160 sq.; II.77, 259; IV.157; V.194; A I.66, 110, 163 (tevijjā); 166; II.176; III.221 sq. (brāhmaṇa-vagga); It 57 sq., 60, 98, 101; J III.194; IV.9; VI.521 sq.; Vbh 393 sq. For br. with the meaning "arahant" see also: Vin I.3; II.156 (br. parinibbuta); Th 1, 140, 221 (brahma-bandhu pure āsiṃ, idāni kho 'mhi brāhmaṇo); Dh 383 sq.; Sn passim (e.g. v. 142 kammanā hoti brāhmaṇo; 284 sq.); J IV.302 sq.; Miln 225. Ten kinds of Br. are pronounced to be apetā brahmaððā degraded fr. brahmanship J IV.361 sq. Diff. schools of br. teachers are enumd at D I.237 sq. (Tevijja Sutta). -brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbakā isayo mantānaṃ kattāro "the ten inspired Seers of old times, who composed the Vedic hymns"; their names are Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi, Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu Vin I.245; D I.104; A III.224; IV.61; cp. VvA 265. - f. brāhmaṇī (n. or adj.) the wife of a brāhmaṇa D I.193; J V.127 (of a purohita or high priest); DhA I.33; IV.176; PvA 55, 61, 64. Freq. in combn brāhmaṇī pajā this generation of brāhmaṇas, e. g. D I.249; A I.260; II.23 (see pajā). -ibbhā Brahmins & Vaiśyas J VI.228 sq. -kumārikā a brahmin young girl J III.93. -kula a br. clan or family J II.85, 394, 411; III.147, 352; PvA 21, 61. -gahapatikā priests & laymen ("clerk & yeoman" Rh. D. in S.B.E. XI.258) D II.178; III.148, 153, 170 sq.; S I.59, 184; A I.110; Vin I.35; J I.83. -gāma a br. village Vin I.197; D I.87, 127; S I.111; J II.368; III.293; IV.276. -dhamma duty of a br.; see on contrast between Brahmaṇic & Buddhist view J IV.301 sq., cp. also SnA 312-325 (br.dhammika-suta) & Fick, l. c. 124. -putta son of a br. PvA 62. -bhojana giving food (alms) to brahmans Vin I.44. -māṇava a young brahmin J IV.391. -rūpa (in) form of a br. PvA 63. vaḍḍhakī a br. carpenter J IV.207. -vaṇṇin having the appearance of a brahmin Cp. X.10. vācanaka a br. disputation, some sort of elocution show J I.318; IV.391. -vāṭaka circle of brahmins DhA IV.177 (v. l. °vādaka). -vāṇija a br. merchant PvA 113. -sacca a brahmanic (i. e. standard, holy) truth A II.176 (where the Buddha sets forth 4 such br. -saccāni, diff. from the usual 4 ariyasaccāni). Brāhmaṇa2 {Brahmana} (nt.) [for brahmañña] state of a true brahman, "holiness supreme" Th 1, 631. Brūti {Bruti} [brū, Sk. bravīti, Med. brūte; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 1412. Expld by Dhtp 366 as "vacane," by Dhtm 593 as "vācāyaṃ, viyattiyaṃ"] to say, tell, call; show, explain D I.95; Sn 308 sq.; Dh 383 sq.; Cp. VI.8; Miln 314, 327. - Constructed with double acc. or with dat. of person & acc. of Pāli Text Society 1124 Pāli-English Dictionary thing said (cp. Miln 233). - Forms: Pres. 1st sg. brūmi It 33, 40; S 1033, 1042 sq. (expld as ācikkhāmi desemi paððāpemi etc. by Nd.); Pv I.23 (=kathemi PvA 11); Th 1, 214; 2nd sg. brūsi Sn 457, 1032, 1081; J II.48; Th 2, 58; 3rd sg. brūti Sn 122; imper. brūhi Th 1, 1266; Sn 1018, 1034, 1043; Miln 318. - pret. abravi Sn 981; Th 1, 1275; J VI.269; Pv II.964 (v. l. abruvi); PvA 264; abruvi J III.62, and bravi J V.204; 3rd sg. med. bravittha Vv 5310 (=kathesi VvA 240); 1st sg. also abraviṃ Cp. II.68; 3rd pl. abravuṃ J V.112. Brūmeti [possible Caus. fr. brūti, but as Geiger, P.Gr. 1412, rightly remarks "not critically sound"] to say D I.95 (expld as "brūmetū ti vadatu" DA I.265). {Brūmeti} Brūhana {Brūhana} (nt.) [fr. brūheti] expansion, increasing, spreading; cultivation, development (trs. & intrs.) Miln 313 (Kern, Toev. s. v. "amusement"); DhsA 332; VvA 20 (sukha°). Cp. upa°. Brūhetar {Brūhetar} [n. ag. of brūheti] increaser; one who practises, is devoted to; in phrase brūhetā suððāgārānaṃ frequenter of solitary places; given up to solitary meditation M I.33, 213. Brūheti {Bruheti} [cp. Sk. bṛṃhayati; fr. brh2 to increase; Dhtp 346 & Dhtm 505: vuddhiyaṃ. Cp. brahant] to cause to grow, increase; hence: to promote, develop, practise, to put or devote oneself to; to look after, to foster, make enjoy; practically syn. with sevati; S I.198 (saddhaṃ); Sn 324 (kammāni); Dh 285 (imper. brūhaya=vaḍḍhaya DhA III.429); Ud 72; J I.289; Miln 313 (saddena sotaṃ br.); PvA 168 (vaḍḍheti+, for ābhāveti). - Cp. anu°, pari°. Pāli Text Society 1125 Pāli-English Dictionary Bh Bha {Bha} (indecl.) the letter or sound (syllable) bh; figuring in Bdhgh's exegesis of the N. Bhagavā as representing bhava, whereas ga stands for gamana, va for vanta KhA 109. - Like ba° we often find bha° mixed up with pa°; - see e. g. bhaṇḍa bhaṇḍati; bh represents b. in bhasta=Sk. basta, bhisa=Sk. bisa, bhusa=Sk. buśa. -bha-kāra the sound (or ending) °bha, which at Vin IV.7 is given as implying contempt or abuse, among other low terms (hīnā akkosā). This refers also to the sound (ending) °ya (see ya-kāra). The expln for this probably is that °bha is abstracted from words ending thus, where the word itself meant something inferior or contemptible, and this shade of meaning was regarded as inhering in the ending, not in the root of the word, as e. g. in ibbha (menial). Bhakuṭi (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhrakuṭi from older bhṛkuti, bhrukuṭi or bhrūkuṭi] superciliousness Sn 485. J III.99; Vism 26 (°karaṇa); SnA 412. Der. bhākuṭika (q. v.). See also bhūkuṭi. {Bhakuti} Bhakkha {Bhakkha} (-°) (adj.) [fr. bhakṣ] 1. eating, feeding on D III.41 (sāka° etc.); S I.69 (pahūta° voracious, of fire), 238 (kodha°); Pv I.91 (lohita-pubba°); Pug 55 (tiṇa°); Sdhp 388 (tiṇa°). - 2. eatable, to be eaten; nt. °ṃ food, prey, in cpd. appa-bhakkha offering no food Vv 843 (appodaka+). - pl. also bhakkhā (eatables) J II.14; IV.241 (similar context; =bhojana C.); Pv II.941 (=āhārā PvA 129). It is to be pointed out that bhakkhā occurs in poetry, in stock phrase "dibbā bhakkhā pātubhavanti"; cp. Vedic bhakṣa (m) feeding, partaking of food, esp. drink (of Soma), thus something extraordinary. Bhakkhati {Bhakkhati} [bhakṣ fr. bhaj, cp. Sk. bhakṣati & bhakṣayati; Dhtp 17 & 537 explns by "adana"] to eat, to feed upon Pv II.25 (pubba-lohitaṃ); DhA II.57 (vātaṃ). - inf. bhakkhituṃ J II.14. - Caus. bhakkheti in same meaning J IV.349 (aor. bhakkhesuṃ); cp. BSk. bhakṣayati Divy 276. Bhaga {Bhaga} [Vedic bhaga, bhaj, see bhagavant etc.] luck, lot, fortune, only in cpd. dub° (adj.) unhappy, unpleasant, uncomfortable It 90; DA I.96 (°karaṇa). -bhaga (in verse "bhagehi ca vibhattavā" in exegesis of word "Bhagava") at DA I.34 read bhava, as read at id. p. Vism 210. Bhagandala {Bhagandala} (& ā) [cp. late Sk. bhagandara] an ulcer, fistula Vin I.216, 272; Nd1 370. Has expln at Dhtm 204 "bhaganda secane hoti" ("comes from sprinkling") anything to do with our word? Bhagalavant {Bhagalavant} [of uncertain origin] N. of a mountain SnA 197 (loc. Bhagalavati pabbate). Occurs also as an assembly-hall under the N. of Bhagalavatī at D III.201. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 196. Bhagavant {Bhagavant} (adj. n.) [cp. Vedic bhagavant, fr. bhaga] fortunate, illustrious, sublime, as Ep. and title "Lord." Thus applied to the Buddha (amhākaṃ Bh.) and his predecessors. Occurs with extreme frequency; of fanciful exegetic explns of the term & its meaning we mention e. g. those at Nd1 142=Nd2 466; Vism 210 sq.; DA I.33 sq. Usual trs. Blessed One, Exalted One. Pāli Text Society 1126 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhaginī {Bhagini} (f.) [Epic Sk. bhaginī] a sister J VI.32. The popular etym. of bh. as given at VbhA 108 is the same as that for bhātar, viz. "bhagatī ti bh." - Cpd. bhagini-māla a "sister garland" (?) N. of a tree J VI.270 (=upari-bhaddaka). Bhagga1 {Bhagga} [pp. of bhaðj, Sk. bhagna] broken, in phrases "sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā" J I.493, which is applied metaphorically at Dh 154 (phāsukā=pāpakā?), expld DhA III.128 (artificially) by "avasesa-kilesa-phāsukā bhaggā"; further "bhaggā pāpakā dhammā" Vism 211; bhaggā kilesā Miln 44; and bhagga-rāga, °dosa etc. (in def. of Bhagavā) at Nd1 142=Nd2 466 B, quoted at Vism 211. Bhagga2 {Bhagga} (nt.) [fr. bhaga; cp. Sk. & P. bhāgya] fortune, good luck, welfare, happiness Vism 210 (akāsi °ṃ ti garū ti Bhāgyavā etc.). Bhaggava {Bhaggava} [cp. Sk. *bhārgava, a der. fr. bhṛgu, & bhargaḥ, of same root as Lat. fulgur lightning; Gr. flo/c light; Ger. blitzen, blank; Ags. blanca white horse, all of the idea of "shining, bright, radiant." - How the meaning "potter" is connected with this meaning, is still a problem, perhaps we have to take the word merely as an Epithet at the one passage where it occurs, which happens to be in the Kumbhakāra-jātaka, v. 6, 7. i. e. the "Jātaka of the potter"] potter (?) J III.381, 382, in voc. bhaggava (m.) & bhaggavī (f.). The terms are not expld in C., evidently because somewhat obscure. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. the Sk. form in this meaning occurs at MBh. I.190, 47; Saddhp. 191 sq., MVastu III.347. Bhaggavant {Bhaggavant} (adj. n.) [fr. bhagga2, cp. Sk. & P. bhāgyavant] having good luck or auspices, fortunate; in def. of "Bhagavā" at Vism 210=DA I.34 ("bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto"); with ref. to the 4 qualities implied in the word "bhagavā," which passage is alluded to at VvA 231 by remark "bhāgyavantat'ādīhi catūhi kāraṇehi Bhagavā." Bhanga1 {Bhanga} (nt.) [cp. Sk. bhanga, which occurs already Atharva-veda XI. 6. 15 (see Zimmer. Altind. Leben 68), also Av. baṃha, Polish pienka hemp. On its possible etym. connection with Vedic śaṇa (Ath. Veda II. 4. 5) =P. saṇa & sāṇa hemp (=Gr. ka/nnabis, Ger. hanf, E. hemp) see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. cannabis] hemp; coarse hempen cloth Vin I.58 (where combd with sāṇa). Bhanga2 {Bhanga} (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhanga, fr. bhañj: see bhañjati] 1. (lit.) breaking, breaking off, in sākhā° a layer of broken-off branches J III.407. - 2. (fig.) breaking up, dissolution, disruption (see on form Cpd. 25, 66) Ps I.57 sq. (°ānupassanā insight into disruption), quoted & expld at Vism 640 sq.; VbhA 27 (°khaṇa); Sdhp 48, 78 (āsā°). Cp. vi°. Bhangana & Bhangaloka {Bhangana} {Bhangaloka} [to bhanga1?] are vv. ll. of Npl. at Nd1 155 for Gangaṇa & Angaṇeka respectively. With misspelling bh>g, cp. bheṇḍaka>geṇḍaka. Bhacca {Bhacca} (adj.) [grd. fr. bhṛ, cp. Sk. bhṛtya] to be carried, kept or sustained A III.46 (=a dependant) J IV.301 (C. bharitabba). As Kern. Toev. s. v. bhacca points out this gāthā "bhaccā mātā pitā bandhū, yena jāto sa yeva so" is a distortion of MBh I.74, 110, where it runs "bhastrā mātā, pituḥ putro, yena jāto sa eva saḥ" (or is it bhrastā?). Bhajati {Bhajati} [bhaj to divide, partake etc.: see Caus. bhājeti & cp. vi°] to associate with (acc.), keep companionship with, follow, resort to; to be attached to (acc.), to love. Freq. syn. of Pāli Text Society 1127 Pāli-English Dictionary sevati. The Dhtp & Dhtm mark the fig. meaning (bhaj2) by sevāyaṃ (Dhtp 61), sevāputhakkare (Dhtm 523) & saṃsevane (ib. 76), whilst the lit. (bhaj1) is expressed by vibhājane. - Sn 958 (bhajato rittaṃ āsanaṃ; gen. sq. ppr.=sevato etc. Nd1 466); Dh 76, 303; Pug 26, 33; J I.216=III.510 (disā bh.) VI.358; Sdhp 275. - Pot. bhaje Dh 76, 78, and bhajetha Dh 78 (=payirupāsetha), 208 in sense of imper.; hence 2nd sg. formed like Caus. as bhajehi J III.148 (C. bhajeyyāsi; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 1392). - - grd. bhajitabba Nd2 s. v. kāmaguṇā B (sevitabba, bh., bhāvetabba). Bhajanā {Bhajanā} (f.) [fer. bhaj] resorting to, familiarity with Pug 20=Dhs 1326, cp. sam° & Dhs trsl. 345. Bhajin {Bhajin} (adj.) [fr. bhajati] loving, attached to, worshipping Nd1 142 (in expln of "Bhagavā"). Bhajjati {Bhajjati} [Vedic bhṛjjati, cp. Gr. fru/gw to roast, fru/ganon dry wood; Lat. frīgo to make dry] to roast, toast Vin IV.264; Dhtp 79 & Dhtm 94, expld by "pāke." - Caus. bhajjāpeti to have, or get roasted Vin IV.264; DhA I.224 (v. l. K. paccāpeti). Bhañjaka {Bhanjaka} (adj.) [fr. bhañjati] breaking, spoiling, destroying (attha°-visaṃvāda; cp. bhañjanaka) J III.499. cp. Vedic bhañjati & bhanakti, roots with & without r, as Lat. frango=Goth. brikan=Ohg. brehhan, E. break, Sk. giri-bhraj breaking forth from the mountain; and Sk. bhanga, bhañji wave. - The Dhtp. 68 paraphrases by "omaddana," Dhtm 73 by "avamaddana"] 1. (trs. & intrs.) to break Vin I.74 (phāsukā bhaðjitabbā ribs to be broken); Dh 337 (mā bhaðji=mā bhaðjatu C.). Pv II.93 (sākhaṃ bhañjeyya =chindeyya PvA 114); PvA 277 (akkho bhañji the axle broke, intrs.). - 2. to fold or furl (the lip): oṭṭhaṃ bh. J II.264. - 3. (fig.) to break up, spoil, destroy, in atthaṃ bh. to destroy the good S IV.347 (cp. bhañjanaka). - pp. bhagga1 (q. v.). Bhañjana1 {Bhanjana} (nt.) [fr. bhañjati] breakage, breaking down, break, only in cpd. akkha° break of the axle Vism 32, 45; DhA I.375; PvA 277. Bhañjana2 {Bhanjana} (nt.) [for byañjana, in composition; maybe graphical mistake] anointing, smearing, oiling, in gatta° and pāda°-bbhañjana-tela oil for rubbing the body and the feet Vism 100; VvA 295. Bhañjanaka (nt.) [fr. bhañjana1] destroying, hurting, spoiling, in phrase attha° destroying the welfare (with ref. to the telling of lies) DhA III.356; VvA 72; cp. bhañjaka. {Bhanjanaka} Bhañjanin {Bhanjanin} (adj.) [fr. bhañj] breaking, destroying, in cakka° breaking the wheel, fig. breaking the state of harmony J V.112. Bhaññam {Bhannam} (J V.317) see bhā. Bhaṭa {Bhata} [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaṭa, fr, dial. bhaṭ to hire; originally the same as bhṛtya fr. bhṛta & bhṛti of bhṛ Dhtp 94, Dhtm 114. -bhaṭa=bhatyaṃ i. e. bhṛtyaṃ] servant, hireling, soldier Miln 240; VvA 305 (bhattavetana°). As to suggestion of bhaṭa occurring in phrase Pāli Text Society 1128 Pāli-English Dictionary yathā-bhaṭaṃ (Kern. Toev. s. v. yathābhaṭaṃ) see discussion under yathā bhataṃ. -patha service, employment, salary Vin IV.265; SnA 542. Bhaṭṭha1 {Bhattha} [pp. of bhraṃś, see bhassati] dropped, fallen down J I.482; IV.222, 382; V.444. Cp. pari°. Bhaṭṭha2 {Bhattha} [pp. of bhaṇ, for bhaṇita] spoken, said Vv 6319 (su°=subhāsita VvA 265). See also paccā° & pari°; cp. also next. Bhaṭṭha3 {Bhattha} (?) [perhaps for bhatta?] wages, tip, donation J IV.261 (by C. expld as kathita, thus same as bhattha2). v. l. bhatta. Cp. Sk. bhāṭa & BSk. bhāṭaka MVastu III.37. Bhaṇati {Bhanati} [bhaṇ; cp. Sk. bhaṇati; Ohg. ban=E. ban etc. "proclamation." See connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under fabula. - Expld by Dhtp 111 as "bhaṇana." by Dhtm 162 as "bhāsana"] to speak, tell, proclaim (the nearest synonym is katheti: see Nd2 s. v. katheti) Dh 264; Pug 33, 56; DhA II.95. - ppr. bhaṇanto Sn 397. Pot. bhaṇe Sn 1131 (=bhaṇeyya Nd2 469); Dh 224 (saccaṃ; =dīpeyya vohareyya DhA III.316). Also bhaṇeyya Sn 397. An old subjunctive form is bhaṇā- mase S I.209 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126). Prohib. mā bhāṇi. A Caus. form is bhāṇaye (Pot.) Sn 397. Bhaṇana {Bhanana} (nt.) [fr. bhaṇati] telling, speaking DhA IV.93 (°sīla, adj. wont to speak); Dhtp 111. Bhaṇe {Bhane} (indecl.) [orig. 1st sg. pres. Med. of bhaṇati] "I say," used as an interjection of emphasis, like "to be sure," "look here." It is a familiar term of address, often used by a king to his subjects Vin I.240 (amhākaṃ kira bhaṇe vijite Bhaddiya-nagare), 241 (gaccha bhaṇe jānāhi . . .) Miln 21 (atthi bhaṇe añño koci paṇḍito . . .). Bhaṇḍa {Bhanda} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṇḍa] 1. stock in trade; collectively goods, wares, property, possessions, also "object" S I.43 (itthi bhaṇḍānaṃ uttamaṃ woman is the highest property), Nd2 38; J III.353 (yācita° object asked,=yāca); ThA 288 (id.); Vism 22. -bhaṇḍaṃ kiṇāti to buy goods VbhA 165. -bhaṇḍaṃ vikkiṇati to sell goods J I.377 (+paṭibhaṇḍaṃ dāpeti to receive goods in return); vikkiṇiya-bh. goods for sale DhA I.390. -assāmika° ownerless goods, unclaimed property J VI.348; ābharaṇa° trinkets, jewelry J III.221; piya° best goods, treasure J III.279; bahu° having many goods, rich in possessions Vin III.138; KhA 241 (of a bhikkhu); vara° best property or belongings Vin IV.225. - 2. implement, article, instrument Vin II.142, 143 (where 3 kinds are distinguished: of wood, copper, & of earthenware), 170 (id.); Dāvs IV.50 (turiya°). - In assa(hatthi°)-bhaṇḍa Vin I.85 sq., the meaning "horse (elephant-) trader (or owner)" does not seem clear; should we read paṇḍaka? Cp. bhaṇḍa=paṇḍa under bhaṇḍati. āgāra store house, warehouse, only in der. -āgārika keeper of stores Vin I.284; II.176; surveyor of the (royal) warehouses, royal treasurer (a higher court office: cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 101 sq.) J III.293; IV.43; V.117; Miln 37; DA I.21; PvA 2, 20. -āhāraka (trader) taking up goods DhA IV.60. Bhaṇḍaka {Bhandaka} (adj. in sense of collect. nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍa] 1. article, implement; kīḷā° toys J VI.6. - 2. belongings, property Vin IV.225. - 3. trappings, in assa° horsetrappings J II.113. Pāli Text Society 1129 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhaṇḍati {Bhandati} [bhaṇḍ, cp. "paṇḍa bhaṇḍa paribhāse" Dhtp 568; Dhtm 798] to quarrel, abuse Vin I.76 (saddhiṃ); IV.277; Th 1, 933; SnA 357 (aññamaññaṃ). Bhaṇḍana {Bhandana} (nt.) [fr. bhaṇḍ, cp. BSk. bhāṇḍana Divy 164] quarrel, quarrelling, strife It 11; J III,149; Nd1 196; DhA I.55, 64. Bhaṇḍi {Bhandi} [?] a certain plant or flower J V.420. Reading uncertain. Bhaṇḍikā {Bhandika} (f.) [fr. bhaṇḍaka, in collect. sense] collection of goods, heap, bundle; bhaṇḍikaṃ karoti to make into a heap J III.221, 437; or bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhati to tie into a bundle DhA II.254; VvA 187. sahassa° a heap of 1,000 kahāpaṇas J II.424; III.60; IV.2. - Note. bhaṇḍika is v. l. at J III.41 for gaṇḍikā. Bhaṇḍu {Bhandu} (adj.) [etym. uncertain, dialectical or=paṇḍu?] bald-headed, close shaven Vin I.71 (°kamma shaving), 76 (kammāra°); J III.22; VI.538 (+tittira); Miln 11, 128. Bhata {Bhata} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhṛta] 1. supported, fed, reared, maintained A III.46 (bhatā bhaccā "maintained are my dependents"); J V.330 (kicchā bh.), given by Kern, Toev. s. v. in meaning "full" with wrong ref. J VI.14. Cp. bharita. Bhataka {Bhataka} [cp. Epic Sk. bhṛtaka] a hired servant, hireling, servant Th 1, 606, 685, 1003; J III.446; Miln 379; DhA I,119, 233 (°vīthi servant street). See also Fick. Sociale Gliederung 158, 195, 196. Bhati {Bhati} (f.) [cp. Vedic bhṛti, fr. bhṛ] wages, fee, pay J I.475; III.325, 446; DhA I.21, 70; Dhtp 94 (in expln of root bhaṭ, see bhaṭa). Bhatikā {Bhatika} (f.) [fr. bhati] fee J IV.184. Bhatta {Bhatta} (nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhakta, orig. pp. of bhajati] feeding, food, nourishment, meal Dh 185; Pug 28, 55; J II.15; V.170 (bhatta-manuñña-rūpaṃ for bhattaṃ-); Vism 66 (where 14 kinds enumd, i. e. sangha°, uddesa° etc.); Sdhp 118. -ucchiṭṭha° food thrown away PvA 173; uddesa° special food Vin I.58=96, cp. II.175; devasika° daily food (as fee or wages) DA I.296 (=bhatta-vetana); dhura° a meal to which a bhikkhu is invited as leader of others, i. e. a responsible meal J I.449; III.97 (v. l. dhuva°); dhuva° constant supply of food Vin I.25, 243. agga [cp. BSk. bhaktāgra Divy 335; MVastu II.478] a refectory Vin I.44; M I.28; J V.334. ammaṇa food trough J VI.381. -ābhihāra gift of food S I.82. -uddesaka (thera) (an elder) who supervises the distribution of food, a superintendent of meals Vism 388, DhA I.244. -kāraka one who prepares the meal or food, a cook, butler J I.150 sq.; V.296; VI.349; DA I.157. -kicca "meal-performance," meal (cp. BSk. bhaktakṛtya Divy 185) J I.87; Miln 9; Vism 278 (kata° after the meal, cp. kata II.1. a); PvA 76. -kilamatha fatigue after eating SnA 58 (cp. °sammada). gāma a village giving tribute or service DhA I.398. -dāna gift of a meal PvA 54. -puṭa a bag with food J II.82, 203; III.200; DA I.270. Cp. puṭabhatta. -puṭaka same KhA 44; VbhA 234; Vism 251. bhoga enjoyment of food S I.92. -randhaka a cook J IV.431. -vissagga serving a meal, mealfunction, participation at a meal Vin IV.263; Pv III.29 (so read for vissatta; expld at PvA 184 by bhattakicca & bhuñjana); Miln 9; SnA 19, 140. -vetana service for food, food as wages (cp. bhaktā-dāsa a slave working for food Manu VIII.415, see Fick. Sociale Gliederung p. 197), in 1130 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary general "hire, wages," also "professional fee" D III.191; Vin III.222 (rañño bh-v.-āhāro "in the King's pay"); J IV.132 sq., Miln 379; DhA I.25 (to a physician); VvA 305. -velā meal-time SnA 111. -sammada drowsiness after a meal S I.7; J VI.57; Vbh 352; Vism 278, 295. -sālā hall for meals, refectory Vism 72. Bhattar {Bhattar} [Vedic bhartṛ to bhṛ] a husband; nom. sg. bhattā Th 2, 413; J V.104, 260 (here in meaning "supporter"); VI.492; gen. bhattu J V.169, 170; acc. bhattāraṃ Th 2, 412. Bhattavant {Bhattavant} (adj.) [fr. *bhakta, pp. of bhajati] possessing reverence or worship(pers), worshipful, adored; in a (late) verse analysing fancifully the word "Bhagavant," at DA I.34=Vism 210 sq. Expld at Vism 212 by "bhaji-sevi-bahulaṃ karoti." Bhatti {Bhatti} (f.) [cp. Vedic & Class. Sk. bhakti, fr. bhaj: see bhajati] 1. devotion, attachment, fondness Pug 20= Dhs 1326 (cp. Dhs trsl. 345); Pug 65; J V.340 (=sineha C.); VI.349; VvA 353, 354. - 2. in bhatti-kata Th 2, 413 it means "service," thus "doing service" (or "rendered a servant"?). - 3. of uncertain meaning in bhatti-kamma, probably "making lines, decoration, ornamentation" Vin II.113 (°kamma-kata decorated), I.51. The reading is uncertain, may be bhati° (? Kern, Toev. s. v. trsls "patchwork"?). Cp. vi°. Bhattika {Bhattika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhatta] in dhuva° being in constant supply of food, being a regular attendant (servant) or adviser Vin II.15. Also at ThA 267 in meaning "being a servant, working for food" in expln of bhattikatā (=kata-sāmi-bhattikā), said of a toiling housewife. Bhattimant {Bhattimant} (adj.) [from bhatti] 1. devoted? 2. discerning, analytical, perspicacious? Th 1, 370; Com. has: yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā tattha bhattimā nāma. Bhadanta & Bhaddanta [a secondary adj. formation from address bhaddaṃ (=bhadraṃ) te "hail to thee," cp. "bhaddaṃ vo" under bhadda 1] venerable, reverend. mostly in voc. as address "Sir, holy father" etc., to men of the Order. voc. sg. bhadante S I.216 (v. l. bhaddante); voc. pl. bhadantā DhA III.414. - A contracted form of bhadante is bhante (q. v.). Note. In case of bhadanta being the corresp. of Sk. *bhavanta (for bhavān) we would suppose the change v>d and account for dd on grounds of pop. analogy after bhadda. See bhante. The pl. nom. from bhadantā is formed after bhadante, which was felt as a voc. of an a -stem with e for -a as in Prk. Māgadhī. {Bhadanta} Bhadantika {Bhadantika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhadanta] only in cpd. ehi°, lit. "one belonging to the (greeting) „come hail to thee,‟" i. e. one who accepts an invitation D III.40, M II.161; A I.295; II.206; Pug 55. See also under ehi. Bhadara {Bhadara} in °paṇḍu in °paṇḍu at A I.181 is to be read as badara°. Bhadda(a) & Bhadra(b) {Bhadda} {Bhadra} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhadra, on diff. forms see Geiger, P.Gr. § 532. Dhtp 143, 589 expls bhadd by "kalyāṇe"; whereas Dhtm 205 & 823 gives bhad (bhadd) with expln "kalyāṇa kammāni"] 1. auspicious, lucky, high, lofty, august, of good omen, reverend (in address to people of esteem), good, happy, fortunate D II.95(a); S I.117(b); Dh 143 sq.(b) (of a good, well-trained horse), 380(b) (id.); J VI.281(b) (24 bhadrā pāsakā or lucky throws of the dice); DhA I.33(a) (voc. bhadde=ayye). -bhadraṃ (nt.) something bringing luck, a Pāli Text Society 1131 Pāli-English Dictionary good state, welfare; a good deed (=kalyāṇaṃ) Dh 120 (=bhadra-kamma, viz. kāyasucarita etc. DhA III.14); PvA 116 (=iṭṭhaṃ). Also as form of address "hail to thee," bhaddaṃ vo J V.260. - 2. a kind of arrow (cp. Sk. bhalla) J II.275 (v. l. bhadra; so Kern, Toev. s. v.; but C. takes it as bhadda lucky, in neg. sense "unlucky, sinister," & expls by bībhaccha=awful). - 3. bull (cp. Sk. bhadra, Halāyudha 5, 21) Th 1, 16, 173, 659. -mukha one whose face brings blessings, a complimentary address, like "my noble &c friend!" [cp. BSk. bhadramukha; Divy frequent: see Index], M II.53; S I.74 (cp. K.S. I.100n) J II.261 (v. l. bhadda°); Vism 92 (v. l. SS bhadda°). muttaka [cp. Sk. bhadramusta] a kind of fragrant grass (Cyperus rotundus) DA I.81; Abhp 599. -yuga a noble pair DhA I.95 (Kolita & Upatissa), -vāhana the auspicious (royal) vehicle (or carriage) Miln 4. Bhaddaka(a) & Bhadraka(b) [fr. bhadda] 1. good, of good quality (opp. pāpaka) A IV.169(a). - 2. honoured, of high repute J III.269(a) (=sambhāvita C.). - 3. (m. nt.) a good thing, lucky or auspicious possession, a valuable. Appld to the 8 requisites (parikkhārā) of a Samaṇa at J V.254(b). - On upari-bhaddaka (N. of a trQe J VI.269; C.=bhagini-mālā) see upari. - At A IV.255 bhaddaka is given as one of the eight ingredients of the sun & moon; it may be gold (? cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 190), or simply a term for a very valuable quality. Bhanta {Bhaddaka} {Bhadraka} [pp. of bham] swerving, swaying, staggering, deviating; always used of an uncontrolled car (ratha or yāna) Dh 222 (ratha=ativegena dhāvanta DhA III.301); (yāna=adanta akārita aviṇīta Nd1 145); DhsA 260 (°yāna). Cp. vi°. {Bhanta} Bhantatta {Bhantatta} (nt.) [fr. bhanta] turmoil, confusion Dhs 429 (=vibhanti-bhāva DhsA 260, so read for vibhatti°); cp. Dhs trsl. 120. Bhante {Bhante} [would correspond either to Sk. *bhavantaḥ (with ending °e as Māgadhism for °aḥ)=bhavān, or to P. bhadanta. In both cases we have a contraction. The expln bhante=bhadante (bhadantaḥ) is advocated by Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 165, 366b, intimated also by Weber, Bhagavatī 156 n. 3 (unable to explain -e); the expln bhante=bhavantah (see bhavaṃ) by Geiger, P.Gr. 983; hinted at by Weber loc. cit. (bhavantaḥ=bhagavantaḥ)] voc. of polite address: Sir, venerable Sir, used like bhadante. Either abs. as voc.: Vin I.76; D II.154, 283; J II.111; III.46; Miln 19; or with another voc.: Miln 25; or with other oblique cases, as with nom. D I.179; DhA I.62. with gen. D I.179. Bhabba {Bhabba} (adj.) [grd of bhū, Sk. bhavya] 1. able, capable, fit for (-° or with dat. or inf.); abhabba unfit, incapable; Vin I.17; S III.27 (dukkha-kkhayāya); IV.89 (id.); Pug 12, 13; Vism 116 (bhikkhu), neg. It 106 (antakiriyāya), 117 (phuṭṭhuṃ sambodhiṃ); J I.106 (°puggala a person unfit for the higher truths & salvation). bhabbābhabba nt & unfit people Nd2 2353=Vism 205, expld at Vbh 341, 342 by "bhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ." - 2. possible (& abhabba impossible) M III.215 (kammaṃ bhabbaābhāsa apparently possible). - See also abhabba. Bhabbatā {Bhabbata} (f.) [abstr. fr. bhabba] possibility; neg. a° impossibility Sn 232; KhA 191; VvA 208. Bhamati {Bhamati} [bhram; on etym. see K.Z. IV.443; VI.152. Expld at Dhtp 219 by "anavaṭṭhāne," i. e. unsettledness] to spin (of a wheel), to whirl about, to roam Dh 371 (mā te kāmaguṇe Pāli Text Society 1132 Pāli-English Dictionary bhamassu cittaṃ); J I.414; III.206= IV.4 (cakkaṃ matthake); IV.6 (kumbha-kāra-cakkaṃ iva bh.); V.478. - pp. bhanta. - Caus. bhameti to make whirl Vism 142 (cakkaṃ). Bhamara {Bhamara} [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhramara; either to bhram (semantically quick, unsteady motion=confused noise), cp. Gr. fo/rmigc zither; or perhaps for *bramara to Ohg. bremo=Ger. bremse gadfly, bremen=brummen to hum; Gr. bro/mos thunder, Lat. fremo to growl, roar: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fremo] 1. a bee J V.205 (°vaṇṇa bee-coloured, i. e. of black colour, in expln of kaṇha); Th 2, 252. Usually in similes, e. g. at Dh 49 (cp. DhA I.374 sq.); Vism 142, 152; SnA 139. - 2. in bhamara-tanti "the string that sounds," one of the seven strings of the lute J II.253, cp. VvA 140. Bhamarikā {Bhamarika} (f.) [fr. bhamara] a humming top J V.478. Bhamu {Bhamu} (f.) [secondary formation after bhamuka] eyebrow J VI.476 (ṭhita°), 482 (nīla°). Bhamuka & Bhamukha {Bhamuka} {Bhamukha} (f.) [cp. Vedic bhrū; the Pali word is possibly a compn of bhrū+mukha with dissimilation of first u to a] eyebrow Th 11, 232=S I.132 pamukh-; J IV.18 (in expln of su-bbhū=su-bhamukhā in C., Fausböll puts "bhamuka"? Kern on this passage quotes BSk. bhrūmukha, see Toev. s. v.); VI.503 (aḷāra° for pamukha); DhA III.102; IV.90, 197=J V.434; SnA 285. Bhaya {Bhaya} (nt.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhaya, P. bhāyati] fear, fright, dread A II.15 (jāti-maraṇa°); D III.148, 182; Dh 39, 123, 212 sq., 283; Nd1 371, 409; Pug 56; Vism 512; KhA 108; SnA 155; DhA III.23. There are some lengthy enumns of objects causing fear (sometimes under term mahabbhaya, mahā-bhaya), e. g. one of 17 at Miln 196, one of 16 (four times four) at A II.121 sq., the same in essence, but in different order at Nd2 470, and at VbhA 502; one of 16 (with remark "ādi," and so on) at Vism 645. Shorter combns are to be found at Sn 964 (5, viz. ḍaṃsā, adhipātā, siriṃsapā, manussaphassā, catuppādā); Vbh 379 (5, viz. ājīvika°, asiloka°, parisasārajja°, maraṇa°, duggati°, expld at VbhA 505 sq.), 376 (4: jāti°, jarā°, vyādhi°, maraṇa°) 367 (3: jāti°, jarā°, maraṇ°); Nd1 402 (2: diṭṭha-dhammikaṃ & samparāyikaṃ bh.). -abhaya absence of fear, safety Vin I.75 (abhay-ûvara for abhaya-vara?); Dh 317; J I.150; DhA III.491. -ðāṇa insight into what is to be feared: see Cpd. 66. -dassāvin seeing or realising an object of fear, i. e. danger Vbh 244, 247 and passim. -dassin id. Dh 31, 317. -bherava fear & dismay M I.17 (=citt'uttrasassa ca bhayānak'ārammaṇassa adhivacanaṃ MA 113), N. of Suttanta No. 4 in Majjhima (pp. 16 sq.), quoted at Vism 202; SnA 206. Bhayānaka {Bhayanaka} (adj.) [fr. bhaya, cp. Epic Sk. bhayānaka] frightful, horrible J III.428; MA 113; PvA 24 (as °ika); Sdhp 7, 208. - nt. °ṃ something awful Nd2 470 (in def. of bhaya). Bhara—bhara {Bharabhara} a word imitating a confused sound M I.128; otherwise contracted to babbhara (q. v.). Bhara {Bhara} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhṛ] "bearing" in act. & pass. meaning, i. e. supporting or being supported; only in cpd. dubbhara hard to support A V.159, 161 (v. l. dubhara), and subhara easy to support Th 1, 926 (trsl. "of frugal ways"). Pāli Text Society 1133 Pāli-English Dictionary Bharaṇa {Bharana} (nt.) [fr. bhṛ, Epic Sk. bharaṇa] bearing, supporting, maintenance Dhtm 346 (in expln of bhṛ); Abhp 1053. Bharatā {Bharata} (f.) [abstr. fr. bhara] only in cpd. dub° difficulty to support, state of being hard to maintain, synonymous with kosajja at A IV.280, and kuhanā at A V.159, 161. - opp. subharatā A IV.280. Bharati {Bharati} [bhṛ, cp. Lat. fero, Gr. fe/rw, Av. baraiti, Oir. berim, Goth. bairan=to bear, Ger. gebāren. Dhtm expls simply by "bharena"] to bear, support, feed, maintain J V.260 (mama bharatha, ahaṃ bhattā bhavāmi vo; C. explns as "maṃ icchatha"). - pp. bhata. See also bhaṭa, bhara, bharita, and Der. fr. bhār°. A curious Passive form is anu-bhīramāna (ppr.) M III.123 (chatta: a parasol being spread out), on which see Geiger, P.Gr. § 52, 5; 175 n. 3, 191. Bharita {Bharita} (adj.) [lit. made to bear, i. e. heavy with etc. Cp. formations bhār°, fr. bharati] filled with (-°) J I.2 (suvaṇṇa-rajata° gabbha); IV.489 (udaka°); V.275 (kimi°); SnA 494 (vāta°); ThA 283 (kuṇapa°). Bhariyā {Bhariya} (f.) [fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāryā] a wife (lit. one who is supported) D III.190; It 36; J III.511; DhA I.329. Bharu {Bharu} [a dial. (inscription) word, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.] sea, in two names for a town and a kingdom viz. Bharukaccha Nd1 155; J II.188; IV.137, and Bharu-raṭṭha J II.169 sq., a kingdom which is said to have been swallowed up by the sea. - Also in N. of the King of that country Bharu-rājā J II.171 (v. l. Kuru°). - Der. Bhārukacchaka an inhabitant of Bharukaccha DhsA 305 (so read at Expos. II.401). Bhallaka {Bhallaka} [lit. from the Bhalla people] a kind of copper, enumd under the eight pisācalohāni, or copper coming from the Piśāca country VbhA 63 (is reading correct?). It is doubtful whether we should not read mallaka, cp. malla. Bhallāṭaka {Bhallataka} [cp. Epic Sk. bhallātaka] the marking nut plant Semicarpus anacardium J VI.578. Bhava {Bhava} [cp. Sk. bhava, as philosophical term late, but as N. of a deity Vedic; of bhū, see bhavati] "becoming," (form of) rebirth, (state of) existence, a "life." There are 3 states of existence conventionally enumd as kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa° or sensual existence, deva-corporeal, & formless existence (cp. rūpa) D II.57; III.216; S II.3; IV.258; A II.223; III.444; Nd1 48; Nd2 s. v. dhātu B.; Vism 210=DA I.34; Vism 529; VbhA 204. - Another view is represented by the division of bhava into kamma° and upapatti° (uppatti°), or the active functioning of a life in relation to the fruitional, or resultant way of the next life (cp. Cpd. 43) Vbh 137; Vism 571; VbhA 183; also in def. of bhava at Nd2 471 (kamma° and paṭisandhika punabbhava). - In the "causal chain" (Paṭicca-samuppāda, q. v.) bhava is represented as condition of birth (jāti), or resultant force for new birth. - See Sn 361, 514, 742, 839, 923, 1055, 1133; Dh 348; Nd1 274; Vbh 294, 358; Vism 556 sq.; DhA IV.221; Sdhp 33, 333, 335. - On itibhav'- ābhava see iti, and add ref. Vbh 375. - A remarkable use of bhava as nt. (obstr.) to bhū (in cpd.) is to be noted in the def. given by Bdhgh. of divya=divi bhavaṃ (for divi-bhū) KhA 227; SnA 199; and mānasaṃ=manasi bhavaṃ (for manasi-bhū) KhA 248, cp. Pāṇini IV.3, 53. Similarly āroga bhava health DhA I.328 for Pāli Text Society 1134 Pāli-English Dictionary °bhava. - Cp. anu°, vi°, sam°. -agga the best (state of) existence, the highest point of existence (among the gods) J III.84; Vbh 426; Miln 132; KhA 179, 249; SnA 17, 41, 507; often as highest "heaven" as opposed to Avīci, the lowest hell; thus at J IV.182; VI.354; Miln 336. -anga constituent of becoming, function of being, functional state of subconsciousness, i. e. subliminal consciousness or subconscious life-continuum, the vital continuum in the absence of any process [of mind, or attention] (thus Mrs. Rh. D. in Expos. 185 n.), subconscious individual life. See on term Cpd. 26 sq., 265-267; & cp. Dhs trsl. 134. - J VI.82; Miln 299 sq.; Vism 164, 676; DhsA 72, 140, 269; DhA I.23; VbhA 81, 156 sq., 406. -antaga "gone to the ends of existence," past existence, Ep. of the Bhagavan Buddha Vism 210. -antara an existence interval, i. e. transition fr. one life to another, a previous or subsequent life Vism 553 sq. ābhava this or that life, any form of existence some sort of existence Sn 1060, 1068; Nd1 48, 109, 284; Nd2 472, 664 A; Th 1, 784 (ThA mahantāmahanta bh.) ThA 71 (Ap. v. 30); VbhA 501. āsava the intoxicant of existence D III.216; Vbh 364, 373. -uppatti coming into (a new) ex. Four such bh.-uppattis lead to rebirth among the foll. gods: the paritt'-ābhā devā, the appamāṇ'ābhā d., the sankiliṭṭh'-ābhā d., the parisuddh'-ābhā d. M III.147. -esanā longing for rebirth D III.216, 270. -ogha the flood of rebirth (see ogha) Nd1 57, 159; Vism 480. -cakka the wheel or round of rebirth, equivalent to the Paṭicca-samuppāda Vism 529, 576 sq.; in the same context at VbhA 138, 194 sq. -carimakā the last rebirth Vism 291. -taṇhā craving for rebirth D III.212, 216, 274; S V.432; Sn 746; Vbh 101, 358, 365; Th 2, 458; ThA 282; VbhA III.133. -netti [cp. BSk. bhava-netrī M. Vastu II.307; °netrika III.337] leader to renewed ex., guide to ex. Vin I.231; It 38; Dhs 1059≈ (cp. DhsA 364=bhava-rajju). -saṃyojana the fetter of rebirth: see arahant II. C. -salla the sting or dart of rebirth Dh 351 (=sabbāni bhavagāmīni sallāni DhA IV.70). -sāta (pl. sātāni) the pleasures of ex., variously enumd in sets of from one to six at Nd1 30. -ssita at J V.371 read with v. l. as ghaṭa-ssita. Bhavati {Bhavati} [bhū to become, cp. Sk. bhūmi earth; Gr. fu/sis nature (physical), fu/omai to grow; Lat. fui I have been, futurus=future; Oir. buith to be; Ags. būan=Goth. bauan to live, Ger. ldan=to build; Lith. búti to be, būtas house Dhtp 1: bhū sattāyaṃ] to become, to be, exist, behave etc. (cp. Nd2 474= sambhavati jāyati nibbattati pātu-bhavati). - I. Forms. There are two bases used side by side, viz. bhav° and (contracted) ho°, the latter especially in the (later) Gāthā style and poetry in general, also as archaic in prose, whereas bhav° forms are older. On compounds with prepositions, as regards inflection, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 1312, 1513; and cp. anubhavati, abhibhavati, abhisaṃ°, pa° (also pahoti, pahūta), pari°, vi°, saṃ°. - 1. Pres. ind. bhavāmi Sn 511 & homi J III.260; 2nd bhavasi & hosī M III.140; Vv 8420; 3rd bhavati freq.; Sn 36 (where Nd2 474 with v. l. BB of Sn reads bhavanti; Divy p. 294 also reads bhavanti snehāḥ as conjecture of Cowell's for MSS. bhavati); Dh 249, 375; & hoti freq.; 1st pl. homa Pv I.118; 2nd hotha J I.307; 3rd bhavanti & honti freq. - imper. 2nd sg. bhava Sn 337, 340, 701; Dh 236; Th 2, 8; bhavāhi Sn 510; hohi Sn 31; M III.134; J I.32; PvA 89. 3rd sg. hotu Sn 224; J III.150; PvA 13; Miln 18. pl. 1st med. bhavāmase Th 1, 1128; Sn 32; 2nd pl. bhavatha J II.218, bhavātha Sn 692; Dh 144; hotha Dh 243; Dh II.141; J II.302; DhA I.57; 3rd pl. bhavantu Sn 145; hontu J II.4. Pot. 1st sg. bhaveyyaṃ J VI.364; 2nd bhaveyyāsi Ud 91; PvA 11; 3rd bhave Sn 716, bhaveyya J II.159; DhA I.329, & hupeyya Vin I.8 (for huveyya: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 396 & 1312); pl. 1st bhaveyyāma; 2nd bhavetha Sn 1073, 3rd bhaveyyuṃ Sn 906. - ppr. bhavaṃ Sn 92, & bhavanto Sn 968; f. hontī PvA 79. - fut. 1st sg. bhavissāmi PvA 49, hessāmi Th 2, 460 (ThA 283 reads bhavissāmi), & hessaṃ Th 1, 1100; J III.224; Pv I.105; 2nd bhavissasi PvA 16, hohisi Pv I.33; 3rd bhavissati Dh 228, 264; DhA II.82, hessati J III.279 & med. hessate Mhvs 25, 97, hehitī Bu II.10=A I.4; Vv 6332; & hossati (in pahossati fr. pahoti DhA III.254); 1st pl. bhavissāma Dh 200; 2nd hessatha S IV.179; 3rd bhavissanti freq. - Cond. 1st sg. abhavissaṃ J I.470; 2nd abhavissa J II.11; III.30; 3rd abhavissa It 37; Vin I.13; D II.57; M III.163; J I.267; II.112 Pāli Text Society 1135 Pāli-English Dictionary (na bhavissa=nābhavissa?); 3rd pl. abhavissaṃsu Vin I.13. 1st aor. (orig. pret. of *huvati, cp. hupeyya Pot.; see Geiger P.Gr. 1312, 1622): 1st sg. ahuvā S I.36, with by-form (see aor.) ahuvāsiṃ Vv 826; 2nd ahuvā ibid., 3rd ahuvā Vv 8124; J II.106; III.131; 1st pl. ahuvāma M I.93; II.214, & ahuvamha ibid.; 2nd ahuvattha S IV.112; M I.445; DhA I.57. - 2nd aor. (simple aor., with pret. endings): 1st sg. ahuṃ Pv II.32 (v. l. BB ahu) (=ahosiṃ PvA 83); 2nd ahu (sk. abhūḥ) Pv II.35; 3rd ahū (Sk. abhūt) Sn 139, 312, 504 and passim; Pv I.23, & ahu Pv I.93; I.113; & bhavi DhA I.329 (pātubhavi); 1st pl. ahumhā (Sk. abhūma) Pv I.116, & ahumha J I.362; DhA I.57. - 3rd aor. (s aor.) 1st sg. ahosiṃ Th 1, 620; J I.106; VvA 321: PvA 10 (=āsiṃ); 2nd ahosi J I.107; 3rd ahosi Sn 835; Vin I.23; 1st pl. ahesumha M I.265; 3rd ahesuṃ D II.5; Vv 744; J I.149; DhA I.327; & bhaviṃsu (Sk. abhāviṣuḥ) DhA IV.15. - Of medial forms we mention the 1st pl. pres. bhavāmahe Mhvs I.65, and the 3rd sg, pret. ahuvattha VvA 103. - Inf. bhavituṃ Sn 552, & hetuye Bu II.10. - ger. bhavitvā Sn 56, hutvā Sn 43, & hutvāna Sn 281. - grd. bhavitabba J I.440; VI.368; hotabba Vin I.46; bhabba (Sk. bhavya); see sep.; bhuyya see cpd. abhibhuyya. - Caus. bhāveti see sep. - pp. bhūta. Note. In compn with nouns or adjectives the final vowel of these is changed into ī, as in combn of the same with the root kṛ, e. g. bhasmībhavati to be reduced to ashes, cp. bhasmī-karaṇa s. v. bhasma, etc. - II. Meanings. In general the meaning "to become, to get" prevails, but many shades of it are possible according to context & combinations. It is impossible & unnecessary to enumerate all shades of meaning, only a few idiomatic uses may be pointed out. - 1. to happen, to occur, to befall J VI.368. - 2. The fut. bhavissati "is certainly," "must be" DhA III.171 (sātthikā desanā bh.); Miln 40 (mātā ti pi na bh.). - 3. Imper. hotu as adv. "very well" Miln 18 (hotu bhante very well, sir). - 4. aor. in meaning and as substitute of āsiṃ, pret. of as to be; etad ahosi this occurred to him DhA I.399 (assā etad ahosi "this thought struck her"). Bhavatta {Bhavatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bhū] the fact of being, state, condition KhA 227. Bhavana {Bhavana} (nt.) [fr. bhū] dwelling, sphere, world, realm S I.206, Sn 810 (see expln Nd1 132: nerayikānaṃ nirayo bh. etc. & SnA 534: niray'ādi-bhede bhavane); Nd1 448 (Inda° the realm of Indra); J III.275 (nāga° the world of the Nāgas). Bhavant {Bhavant} [cp. Sk. (& Vedic) bhavant, used as pron. of the 2nd; but constructed with 3rd person of the verb. Probably a contraction fr. bhagavant, see Whitney, Altind. Gr. 456] pron. of polite address "Sir, Lord," or "venerable, honourable," or simply "you." Cases as follows (after Geiger, P.Gr. § 983): sg. nom. bhavaṃ Sn 486; D I.249; M I.484. nt. bhavaṃ M III.172. acc. bhavantaṃ Sn 597; D II.231; instr. bhotā D I.93, 110; S IV.120. gen. bhoto Sn 565; M I.486; voc. bhavaṃ D I.93 & bho D I.93; M I.484; J II.26. See bho also sep. - pl. nom. bhavanto Sn p. 107 (only as v. l.; T. bhagavanto), & bhonto ibid.; M II.2; Miln 25; acc. bhavante M II.3; instr. bhavantehi M III.13; gen. bhavataṃ M II.3; voc. bhonto Th 1, 832; M II.2; - f. bhotī: sg. nom. bhotī Sn 988; J III.95; acc. bhotiṃ J VI.523; loc. bhotiyā ibid. voc. bhoti ibid.; D II.249. - On form bhante see this. Bhaveyya {Bhaveyya} [cp. Class. Sk. bhavya] a sort of tree, perhaps Averrhoa carambola J VI.529. Bhasati {Bhasati} [cp. Epic Sk. bhaṣate] to bark (of dogs) J IV.182 (aor. bhasi; so read for T. bhusi). - pp. bhasitaṃ (as n.) bark ibid. (mahā-bhasitaṃ bhasi, read for bhusita). See also bhusati. Bhasita {Bhasita} 1. see bhasati. - 2. pp. of bhas "crumbled to ashes" see bhasma. Pāli Text Society 1136 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhasta {Bhasta} [cp. Vedic basta] a he-goat J III.278. Bhastā (f.) & Bhasta (nt.) {Bhasta} [cp. Class. Sk. bhastrā (also one MBh. passage), orig. n. ag. fr. bhas (to bark?), lit. bellower, blower] 1. a bellows Th 1, 1134; J VI.12 (vāta-puṇṇa-bhastacamma, skin of bellows full of wind); SnA 171 (vāta-pūrita-bhastrā viya), 494 (vātabharita°); DhA I.442 (bhastaṃ dhamāpeti); Vism 287. - 2. a sack Th 1, 1151; 2, 466 (T. reads gatta, but ThA 283 reads bhasta & expls as "camma-pasibbaka"); J III.346 (sattu°=sattu pasibbaka flour sack); V.45; ThA 212 (udaka°). biḷāra-bhastā a bag of catskin M I.128 (=biḷāra-camma-pasibbaka Bdhgh); Th 1, 1138. Bhasma & Bhasman {Bhasma} {Bhasman}(nt.) [cp. Vedic bhasman (adj.); Sk. bhasman (n.), originally ppr. of bhas to chew & thus n-stem. It has passed into the a-decl. in Pali, except in the loc. bhasmani (S I.169). Etymologically & semantically bhasman is either "chewing" or "anything chewed (small)," thus meaning particle, dust, sand, etc.; and bhas is another form of psā (cp. Sk. psā morsel of food, psāta hungry=P. chāta). Idg. *bhsā & *bhsam, represented in Gr. yw/xw to grind, ya/mmos & yw_xos sand; Lat. sabulum sand. The Dhtp 326 & Dhtm 452 explain bhas by bhasmīkaraṇa "reduce to ashes," a pp. of it is bhasita; it also occurs in Sk. loc. bhasi] ashes S I.169=Nd2 576 (loc. bhasmani); Vv 8444; J III.426; Vism 469 (in comparison). antāhuti (bhasm'ant'āhuti) "whose sacrifice ends in ashes" D I.55 (so read for bhassant°, according to DA I.166, & cp. Franke, Dīgha Nikāya p. 60); M I.515; S III.207. -ācchanna covered by ashes Dh 71 (=chārikāya paṭichanna DhA II.68); J VI.236 (. . . va pāvaka). -puṭa a sack for ashes DA I.267 (as expln for assa-puṭa of D. I.98; fanciful; see assa1). -bhāva "ashy" state, state of being crumbled to dust VvA 348. Bhassa (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. bhāṣya, of bhāṣ] speech, conversation, way of talking, disputation Sn 328 (v. l. for hassa); It 71; Miln 90; Vism 127 (grouped into fit talk, as the 10 kathā-vatthus, and unfit talk or gossip, as the 32 tiracchāna-kathā). -kāraka one who makes talk, i. e. invites disputation, or one who gossips Vin I.1; Nd1 142; f. °kārikā Vin IV.230. pavādaka one who proposes disputation, one who is fond of debate & discussions M I.161, 227 (°ika); Miln 4. -pavedin one experienced in debating Miln 90. -samācāra (good) conduct in speech, proficiency in disputation D III.106. -samussaya grandiloquence, proud talk Sn 245 (cp. SnA 288=att'ukkaṃsanatā ti vuttaṃ hoti). {Bhassa} Bhassati {Bhassati} [bhranś, Sk. bhraśyate] to fall down, drop, to droop (Dhtp 455 & Dhtm 695: adho-patane & adhopāte) J IV.223; VI.530. ppr. bhassamāna Miln 82; pret. 3rd sg. bhassittha J II.274 (cp. pabhassittha Vin II.135), & abhassittha S I.122 (so read for abhassatha). - pp. bhaṭṭha1. Bhassara {Bhassara} (adj. n.) [fr. bhās] 1. (adj.) shining, resplendent J V.169 (C. pabhassara). - 2. N. of a bird J VI.538 (=sata-haṃsa C.). - Cp. ā°, pa°. Bhā {Bha} (f.) [cp. Vedic bhā & bhāḥ nt.] light, splendour; given as name of a jewel at an extremely doubtful passage J V.317, 318, where T. reads "vara taṃ bhañ ñam icchasi," & C. expls.: "bhā ti ratanass'etaṃ nāmaṃ." The v. l. for bhaññaṃ is bhuñjaṃ; the passage may be corrupt from "varatu bhavaṃ yam icchasi." Bhākuṭika {Bhakutika} (adj.) [fr. bhakuṭi] knitting the eyebrows, frowning, only in redupl. cpd. bhākuṭika-bhākuṭiko frowning continually, supercilious Vin II.11=III.181 (manda-mando+); Pāli Text Society 1137 Pāli-English Dictionary Nd2 342 (korajika-korajiko+); Vism 26 (id.). - f. bhākuṭikā a frown, frowning, superciliousness, def. at Vism 26 as "padhāna-parimathitabhāva-dassanena bhākuṭi [read bhakuṭi] -karaṇaṃ mukha-sankoco ti vuttaṃ hoti." It occurs in stock phrase bhākuṭikā bhākuṭiyaṃ kuhanā kuhāyanā in def. of kuhanā at Vbh 352=Vism 23, 25 (cp. Nd1 225), and at Nd2 342 D. See also VbhA 482 (bhākuṭikaraṇaṃ sīlam assā ti bhākuṭiko). The form bhākuṭiyaṃ (nt.) is originally the same as bhākuṭikā, only differentiated in C.-style. The def. at Vism 26 is "bhākuṭikassa bhāvo bhākuṭiyaṃ." The v. l. ibid. is bhākuṭitā. -bhākuṭikaṃ karoti to make a frowning face, to act superciliously Vism 105 (as a quality of one "dosa-carita"). Bhāga {Bhaga} [cp. Vedic bhāga, fr. bhaj, bhajati] 1. part, portion, fraction, share Vin I.285; Sn 427 (sahassa-bhāgo maraṇassa=sahassaṃ bhāgānaṃ assā ti SnA 387; a thousand times a share of death, i. e. very near death, almost quite dead), 702 (v. l. SnA 492 for Sn samāna-bhāva, evenness, proportionate-ness); Vv 146 (=kummāsa-koṭṭhāsa VvA 62); Pv I.115 (aḍḍhi° one half); Vin IV.264. - Cp. vi°. -bhāgaso (abl.-adv.) in parts, by parts, by portions, esp. in even portions, i. e. evenly, in proportion S I.193 (according to each one's share; cp. Th 1, 1242); M III.183; Vv 72; Miln 330, 415 (aneka° hundredfold or more). bhāgaso mita (of cities or dwellingplaces etc.) evenly planned, well laid out, i. e. in squares Sn 300, 305 (nivesanāni suvibhattāni bhāgaso); J V.266 (cp. C. on p. 272)=Nd2 304III. D; Pv I.1013 (=bhāgato mita PvA 52). bhāgabhatta apportioned food, ration DhA I.134. - Cp. dobbhagga "disproportionateness," i. e. bad luck. - 2. apportioned share (of money), fee, remuneration, always in term ācariya° (ācariyassa) the teacher's fee (usually consisting in 1,000 kahāpaṇas) J I.273; V.457; VI.178; Miln 10; DhA I.253. - 3. division of space, quarter, side, place, region: disā° quarter of the compass Vin II.217; para° outside part KhA 206 =PvA 24 (kuḍḍānaṃ parabhāgā=tiro-kuḍḍā); pacchābhāgaṃ (acc. adv.) at the back part, behind PvA 114. - fig. way, respect, in ubhatobhāga-vimutta "free in both ways" D II.71; M I.477 (see Dial II.70; i. e. free both by insight and by the intellectual discipline of the 8 stages of Deliverance, the aṭṭha vimokkhā). - 4. division of time, time, always -°, e. g. pubba° the past, apara° the future PvA 133; obl. cases adverbially: tena divasa-bhāgena (+ratti bhāgena) at that day (& that very night) Miln 18; apara-bhāge (loc.) in future J I.34; PvA 116. Bhāgavant {Bhagavant} (adj.) [fr. bhāga, equal to bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (gen.) Dh 19, 20 (sāmaððassa). Bhāgin {Bhagin} (adj.) [fr. bhāga. Cp. Vedic bhāgin] sharing in, partaking of (with gen.), endowed with; getting, receiving A II.80; III.42 (āyussa vaṇṇassa etc.); J I.87 (rasānaṃ); Miln 18 (sāmaððassa); Vism 150 (lābhassa); DhA II.90; VbhA 418 sq. (paððā as hāna-bhāginī, ṭhiti°, visesa° & nibbedha°). - Also in def. of term Bhagavā at Nd1 142=Nd2 466=Vism 210. - pl. bhāgino Pv III.112 (dukkhassa); PvA 18 (dānaphalassa), 175. - Cp. bhāgavant, bhāgimant, bhāgiya. Bhāgineyya {Bhagineyya} [fr. bhaginī, Cp. Epic Sk. bhāgineya] sister's son, nephew Sn 695; J I.207; II.237; DhA I.14; PvA 215. Bhāgimant {Bhagimant} (adj.) [a double adj. formation bhāgin+ mant] partaking in, sharing, possessing (with gen.) Th 2, 204 (dukkhassa); ThA 171 (=bhāgin). Pāli Text Society 1138 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhāgiya {Bhagiya} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhāga, cp. bhāgin] connected with, conducive to, procuring; in foll. philos. terms: kusala° A I.11; hāna°, visesa° D III.274 sq.; hāna°, ṭhiti°, visesa°, nibbedha° Vism 15 (in verse), 88=Ps I.35. - Cp. BSk. mokṣa bhāgīya, nirvedha° Divy 50; mokṣa° ibid. 363. Bhāgya {Bhagya} (nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhāgya; fr. bhaga, see also contracted form bhagga2] good luck, fortune J V.484. Bhāgyavant {Bhagyavant} (adj.) [same as bhaggavant, only differentiated as being the Sk. form and thus distinguished as sep. word by Commentators] having good luck, auspicious, fortunate, in def. of term "Bhagavā" at DA I.34=Vism 210; also at VvA 231, where the abstr. bhāgyavantatā is formed as expln of the term. bhāgyavatā (f.) at Vism 211. Bhājaka {Bhajaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhajeti] distributing, one who distributes or one charged with the office of distributing clothes, food etc. among the Bhikkhus Vin I.285 (cīvara°); A III.275 (cīvara°, phala°, khajjaka°). Bhājana1 {Bhajana} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhājana, fr. bhāj] a bowl, vessel, dish, usually earthenware, but also of other metal, e. g. gold (suvaṇṇa°) DA I.295; copper (tamba°) DhA I.395; bronze (kaṃsa°) Vism 142 (in simile). - Vin I.46; Sn 577 (pl. mattika-bhājanā); J II.272 (bhikkhā°); III.366 (id.), 471; V 293 (bhatta°); Miln 107; VvA 40, 292 (v. l. bhojana); PvA 104, 145, 251; Sdhp 571. -vikati a special bowl J V.292 (so read for T. bhojana°); Vism 376. Bhājana2 {Bhajana} (nt.) [fr. bhāj] division, dividing up, in pada° dividing of words, treating of words separately DhsA 343; similarly bhājaniyaṃ that which should be classed or divided DhsA 2, also in pada° division of a phrase DhsA 54. Bhājita [pp. of bhājeti] divided, distributed; nt. that which has been dealt out or allotted, in cpd. bhājit-ābhājita A III.275. Bhājeti {Bhajita} [Caus. of bhajati, but to be taken as root by itself; cp. Dhtm 777 bhāja=puthakkare] to divide, distribute, deal out Vin IV.223 (ppr. bhājiyamāna); J I.265; DhsA 4 (fut. bhājessati) grd. bhājetabba Vin I.285. - pp. bhājita. {Bhajeti} Bhāṇa {Bhana} [fr. bhaṇati] reciting or preaching, in pada° reciting the verses of the Scriptures DhA II.95 (v. l. paṭibhāna); III.345; IV.18. -vāra a section of the Scriptures, divided into such for purposes of recitation, "a recital" Vin I.14; II.247; DA 13; MA 2 (concerning the Bh. of Majjhima Nikāya); SnA 2 (of Sutta Nipāta), 608 (id.); DhsA 6 (of Dhammasangaṇī, cp. Expos. 8 n. 3), and frequently in other Commentaries & Expositionary Works. Bhāṇaka1 {Bhanaka} (adj.-n.) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking; (n.) a reciter, repeater, preacher (of sections of the Scriptures), like Anguttara° Vism 74 sq.; Dīgha° DA I.15, 131; J I.59; Vism 36, 266; Jātaka° etc. Miln 341 sq.; Majjhima° Vism 95 (Revatthera), 275, 286, 431; Saṃyutta° Vism 313 (CūḷaSivatthera). Unspecified at SnA 70 (Kalyāṇavihāravāsi-bhāṇaka-dahara-bhikkhu; reading doubtful). - f. bhāṇikā Vin IV.285 (Thullanandā bahussutā bhāṇikā); also in cpd. maðjubhāṇikā sweet-voiced, uttering sweet words J VI.422. 1139 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary Bhāṇaka2 {Bhanaka} [cp. Sk. bhāṇḍaka a small box: Kathāsarits. 24, 163; & see Müller, P.Gr. p. 48] a jar Vin II.170 (loha°); III.90. Bhāṇin {Bhanin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhaṇati] speaking, reciting Sn 850 (manta° a reciter of the Mantras, one who knows the M. and speaks accordingly, i. e. speaking wisely, expld by SnA 549 as "mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsitā"); Dh 363 (id.; expld as "mantā vuccati paððā, tāya pana bhaṇana-sīlo" DhA IV.93). -ativela° speaking for an excessively long time, talking in excess J IV.247, 248. Bhāṇeti {Bhaneti} Caus. of bhaṇati (q. v.) with 3rd praet. bhāṇi & pot. bhāṇaye. Bhātar par=Ohg. bruoder, E. brother] brother, nom. sg. bhātā Sn 296; J I.307; PvA 54, 64; gen. sg. bhātuno ThA 71 (Ap. V.36), & bhātussa Mhvs 8, 9; instr. bhātarā J I.308; acc. bhātaraṃ Sn 125; J I.307; loc. bhātari J III.56. - nom. pl. bhātaro J I.307, & bhātuno Th 2, 408; acc. bhāte Dpvs VI.21. - In cpds. both bhāti° (. bhātisadisa like a brother J V.263), and bhātu° (: bhātu-jāyā brother's wife, sisterin-law J V.288; Vism 95). Cp. bhātika & bhātuka. On pop. etym. see bhaginī. {Bhatar} Bhāti {Bhati} [bhā Dhtp 367, Dhtm 594: dittiyaṃ; Idg. *bhē, cp. Sk. bhāḥ nt. splendour, radiance, bhāsati to shine forth; Gr. fa/os light, fai/nw to show etc.; Ags. bonian to polish=Ger. bohnen; also Sk. bhāla shine, splendour, =Ags. bael funeral pile] to shine (forth), to appear D II.205; Vv 352; J II.313. - pp. bhāta: see vi°. Bhātika & Bhātiya [fr. bhātar, cp. Class. Sk. bhrātṛka] lit. brotherly, i. e. a brother, often°-: "brother" - (a) bhātika: J I.253 (jeṭṭhaka°); VI.32; DhA I.14 (°thera my Therabrother or br.-thera), 101, 245; PvA 75. - (b) bhātiya: Vism 292 (dve °therā two Th. brothers). Cp. bhātuka. Bhātuka {Bhatika} {Bhatiya} [=bhātika, fr. Sk. bhrātṛka] brother, usually -°, viz. pati° brother-in-law, husband's brother J VI.152; putta° son & brother DhA I.314; sa° with the brother ThA 71 (Ap. V.36). {Bhatuka} Bhānu {Bhanu} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhānu (m.) shine, light, ray; Epic Sk. also "sun"] light, bright red J III.62 (of the kaṇavera flower); VvA 175 (°raṃsi). Bhānumant {Bhanumant} (adj.) [fr. bhānu, ray of light Vedic bhānumant, Ep. of Agni; also Epic Sk. the sun] luminous, brilliant; mostly of the sun; nom. bhānumā S I.196= Th 1, 1252; Vv 6417, 787 (=ādicca VvA 304); J I.183. acc. bhānumaṃ Sn 1016. - The spelling is sometimes bhāṇumā. Bhāyati {Bhayati} [cp. Sk. bhayate, bhī, pres. redupl. bibheti; Idg. *bhei, cp. Av. bayente they frighten; Lith. bijotis to be afraid; Ohg. bibēn=Ger. beben. Nearest synonym is tras] to be afraid. Pres, Ind. 1st sg. bhāyāmi Th 1, 21; Sn p. 48; 2nd sg. bhāyasi Th 2, 248; 1st pl. bhāyāma J II.21; 3rd pl. bhāyanto Dh 129; Imper. 2nd pl. bhāyatha Ud 51; J III.4; Pot. 3rd sg. bhāye Sn 964 & bhāyeyya Miln 208; 3rd pl. bhāyeyyuṃ Miln 208. - Aor. 1st sg. bhāyiṃ DhA III.187; 2nd sg. bhāyi Th 1, 764; DhA III.187; & usually in Prohib. mā bhāyi do not be afraid S v.369; J I.222; DhA I.253. - grd. bhāyitabba Nd2 s.v. kāmaguṇā B; DhA III.23. - Caus. I. bhāyayate to frighten J III.99 (C.: utraseti); Caus. II. bhāyāpeti J III.99, 210. - pp. bhīta. Pāli Text Society 1140 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhāyitabbaka {Bhayitabbaka} (adj.) [grd. of bhāyati+ka] to be feared, dreadful, fearful, Sdhp 95. Bhāra {Bhara} [fr. bhṛ, Vedic bhāra; cp. bhara] 1. anything to carry, a load Vin III.278 (Bdhgh; dāru° a load of wood). bhāraṃ vahati to carry a load A I.84; VvA 23. -garu° a heavy load, as "adj." "carrying a heavy load" J V.439 (of a woman,=pregnant). -bhāratara (adj.- compar.) forming a heavier load Miln 155. - Cp. ati°, sam°. - 2. a load, cartload (as measure of quantity) VvA 12 (saṭṭhi-sakaṭa°-parimāṇa); PvA 102 (aneka°parimāṇa). - 3. (fig.) a difficult thing, a burden or duty, i. e. a charge, business, office, task, affair Vism. 375; J I.292; II.399; IV.427; VI.413; DhA I.6, 111. Several bhārā or great tasks are mentioned exemplifying the meaning of "gambhīra" & "duddasa" (saccāni) at VbhA 141, viz. mahā-samuddaṃ manthetvā ojāya nīharaṇaṃ; Sineru-pādato vālikāya uddharaṇaṃ; pabbataṃ pīḷetvā rasassa nīharaṇaṃ. - 4. (fig.) in metaphors for the burden of (the factors of renewed) existence (the khandhas and similar agents). Esp. in phrase panna-bhāra "one whose load (or burden) has been laid down," one who has attained Arahantship M I.139; A III.84; S I.233; Dh 402 (=ohita-khandha-bhāra DhA IV.168); Sn 626 (same expln at SnA 467), 914 (expld as patita-bhāra, oropita°, nikkhitta° Nd1 334, where 3 bhāras in this sense are distinguished, viz. khandha°, kilesa°, abhisankhāra°); Th 1, 1021. So at Vism 512 with ref. to the ariya-saccāni, viz. bhāro= dukkhasaccaṃ, bhār'ādānaṃ=samuda-saccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanaṃ=nirodha-s., bhāranikkhepan'upāya = magga-s. - On bhāra in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 118. -ādāna the taking up of a burden S III.25. -(m)oropana "laying down the load," i. e. delivery of a pregnant woman Bu II.115. -ṭṭha contained in a load, carried as a burden Vin III.47. -nikkhepana the laying down or taking off of a burden S III.25. -mocana delivery (of a pregnant woman) J I.19. -vāhin "burdenbearer," one who carries an office or has a responsibility A IV.24 (said of a bhikkhu). hāra load-carrier, burdenbearer S III.25 sq. Bhāraka {Bharaka} (-°) [fr. bhāra] a load, only in cpd. gadrabha° a donkey-load (of goods) J II.109; DhA I.123. Bhārataka {Bharataka} [fr. bhara] "the petty descendants of Bhārata" or: load-carrier, porter (?) Ś IV.117 (indignantly applied to apprentices and other low class young men who honour the Mahā-Kaccāna). Bhārika {Bharika} (adj.) [fr. bhāra] 1. loaded, heavy J V.84, 477; Miln 261. - 2. full of, loaded down with (-°) VvA 314 (sineha° hadaya). - 3. grievous, serious, sorrowful PvA 82 (hadaya). - 4. important Miln 240, 311. - See bhāriya. Bhārin {Bharin} (adj.) [fr. bhṛ, cp. bhāra] carrying, wearing, only in cpd. mālā° (māla°), wearing a garland (of flowers) J IV.60, 82; V.45; where it interchanges with °dhārin (e. g. Vv.323; v. l. at PvA 211; cp. BSk. °dhārin MVastu I.124). - f. °bhārinī J III.530; VvA 12; and °bhārī Th 1, 459 (as v. l.; T. °dhārī). See also under mālā. Bhāriya {Bhariya} (adj.) [fr. bhāra Vedic bhārya to be nourished or supported; bhāryā wife] 1. heavy, weighty, grave, serious; always fig. with ref. to a serious offence, either as bhāriyaṃ pāpaṃ a terrible sin PvA 195, or bh. kammaṃ a grave deed, a sin DhA I.298, 329; II.56; III.120; VvA 68; or bhāriyaṃ alone (as nt.), something grave, a sin DhA I.64. Similarly with ati° as atibhāriyaṃ kammaṃ a very grave deed DhA I.70, or atibhāriyaṃ id. DhA I.186. - 2. bhāriyā (=bhārikā, f. of bhāraka) carrying, fetching, bringing J VI.563 (phala°). Pāli Text Society 1141 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhārukacchaka {Bharukacchaka} see bharu°. Bhāva {Bhava} [fr. bhū, cp. Vedic bhāva] 1. being, becoming, condition, nature; very rarely by itself (only in later & C. literature, as e. g. J I.295 thīnaṃ bhāvo, perhaps best to be translated as "women's character," taking bhāva=attabhāva); usually -°, denoting state or condition of, and representing an abstr. der. from the first part of the cpd. e. g. gadrabha° „asininity‟ J II.109. Thus in connection with (a) adjectives: atthika° state of need PvA 120; ūna° depletion SnA 463; ekī° loneliness Vism 34; sithill° (for sithila° in conn. with kṛ & bhū) relaxation Vism 502. - (b) adverbs. upari° high condition M I.45; pātu° appearance Sn 560; vinā° difference Sn 588. (c) nouns & noun-derivations: atta° individual state, life, character Sn 388 (=citta SnA 374); asaraṇa° state of not remembering DhA III.121; samaṇa° condition of a recluse Sn 551. (d) forms of verbs: nibbatta° fact of being reborn DhA III.121; magg' ārūḷha° the condition of having started on one's way VvA 64; baddha° that he was bound; suhita° that they were well J IV.279. The translation can give either a full sentence with "that it was" etc. (VvA 64: "that he had started on his way"), or a phrase like "the fact or state of," or use as an English abstract noun ending in -ness (atthika-bhāva needfulness, eki° loneliness), -ion (ūna° depletion, pātu° manifestation). -hood (atta° selfhood), or -ship (samaṇa° recluseship). - Similarly in Com. style: sampayutta-bhāvo (m.) DhA III.94, for *sampayuttattaṃ (abstr.); bhākuṭikassa bhāvo=bhakuṭiyaṃ Vism 26; sovacassassa bhāvo= sovacassatā KhA 148; mittassa bh.=mettaṃ KhA 248. Here sometimes bhava for bhāva. - 2. (in pregnant, specifically Buddhistic sense) cultivation or production by thought, mental condition, esp. a set mental condition (see der. bhāvanā). Sometimes (restricted to Vin & J) in sense "thinking of someone," i. e. affection, love, sentiment. - (a) in combn khanti, diṭṭhi, ruci, bhāva at Vin II.205; III.93; IV.3, 4. - (b) in Jātaka passages: J V.237; VI.293 (bhāvaṃ karoti, with loc., to love). -abhāva (late, only in C. style) not being, absence, want PvA 25; abl. abhāvato through not being, in want of PvA 9, 17. sabhāva (sva+bhāva) see sep. Bhāvanā {Bhavana} (f.) [fr. bhāveti, or fr. bhāva in meaning of bhāva 2, cp. Class. Sk. bhāvanā] producing, dwelling on something, putting one's thoughts to, application, developing by means of thought or meditation, cultivation by mind, culture. - See on term Dhs trsl 261 (=2 240); Expos. I.217 (=DhsA 163); Cpd. 207 n. 2. - Cp. pari°, vi°, sam°. - Vin I.294 (indriya°); D III.219 (three: kāya°, citta°, paððā°), 221, 225, 285, 291; S I.48; Dh 73, 301; J I.196 (mettā°); III.45 (id.); Nd1 143 (saððā°); Nett 91 (samatha-vipassanaṃ); Vbh 12, 16 sq., 199, 325; Vism 130 (karaṇa, bhāvanā, rakkhaṇa; here bh.=bringing out, keeping in existence), 314 (karuṇā°), 317 (upekkhā°); Miln 25 (°ṃ anuyuñjati); Sdhp 15, 216, 233, 451. -ānuyoga application to meditation Vbh 244, 249. -ārāma joy of or pleasure in self culture A II.28. -bala power to increase the effect of meditation, power of self-culture A I.52; D III.213. -maya accomplished by culture practice; brought into existence by practice (of cultured thought), cp. Cpd. 207. D III.218, 219; Nett 8; with dānamaya & sīlamaya at It 19, 51; Vbh 135, 325. -vidhāna arrangement of process of culture DhsA 168=Vism 122. Bhāvanīya {Bhavaniya} (adj.) [grd. fr. bhāveti, but taken by Bdhgh as grd. formation fr. bhāvanā] "being as ought to be," to be cultivated, to be respected, in a self-composed state (cp. bhāvitatta) M I.33 (garu+; expld by Bdhgh as "addhā 'yam āyasmā jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī ti evaṃ sambhāvanīyo" MA 156); S V.164; A III.110; Miln 373; PvA 9. See also under manobhāvanīya. Pāli Text Society 1142 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhāvita {Bhavita} [pp. of bhāveti] developed, made to become by means of thought, cultured, well-balanced A V.299 (cittaṃ parittaṃ abhāvitaṃ; opp. cittaṃ appamāṇaṃ subhāvitaṃ); Sn 516, 558. Bhāvitatta1 {Bhavitatta} (adj.) [bhāvita+attan] one whose attan (ātman) is bhāvita, i. e. well trained or composed. Attan here=citta (as PvA 139), thus "self-composed, well-balanced" A IV.26; Sn 277, 322, 1049; Dh 106, 107; Nd2 142; Nd2 475 B (indriyāni bh.); J II.112 (°bhāvanāya when the training of thought is perfect); Vism 185 (°bhāvana, adj. one of well-trained character), 267, 400 (+bahulī-kata); DhA I.122 (a°); ThA 164 (indriya°). See foll. Bhāvitatta2 (nt.) [abstr. fr. bhāvita=*bhāvitattvaṃ] only neg. a° the fact of not developing or cultivating S III.153, 475; Pv II.966. {Bhavitatta} Bhāvin {Bhavin} (adj.) [fr. bhāva, Epic Sk. bhāvin "imminent"] "having a being," going to be, as -° in avassa° sure to come to pass, inevitable J I.19. - f. bhāvinī future VvA 314 (or is it bhāvanīya? cp. v. l. S bhāvaniyā). Bhāveti {Bhaveti} [Caus. of bhū, bhavati] to beget, produce, increase, cultivate, develop (by means of thought & meditation), The Buddhist equivalent for mind-work as creative in idea, M I.293; cp. B.Psy p. 132. - D II.79; M II.11 (cattāro sammappadhāne & iddhipāde); S I.188 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), Th 1, 83, 166 (ppr. bhāvayanto); Sn 341 (cittaṃ ekaggaṃ), 507 (ppr. bhāvayaṃ), 558 (grd. bhāvetabba), 1130 (ppr. bhāvento=āsevanto bahulī-karonto Nd2 476); Dh 87, 350, 370; J I.264 (mettaṃ), 415, II.22; Nd2 s. v. kāmaguṇā (p. 121) (where grd. in sequence "sevitabba, bhajitabba, bhāvetabba, bahulī-kātabba"); Pug 15, DhA III.171; Sdhp 48, 495. - Pass. ppr. bhāviyamāna A II.140; KhA 148. - pp. bhāvita. Bhāsa {Bhasa} [cp. Epic Sk. bhāsa] -sakuṇa a bird of prey, a vulture [Abhp. 645, 1049]; as one of the lucky omens enumd (under the so-called mangala-kathā) at KhA 118 (with v. l. SS. cāta° & vāca°, BB cāba°)=Nd1 87 (on Sn 790) (T. reads vāta°; v. l. SS vāpa°, BB chapa°). Bhāsaka {Bhasaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking DA I.52 (avaṇṇa° uttering words of blame). Bhāsati1 {Bhasati} [bhāṣ; Dhtp 317: vacane; Dhtm 467; vācāya] to speak, to say, to speak to, to call M I.227, Sn 158, 562, 722; Dh 1, 246, 258; also bhāsate Sn 452. -Pot. bhāseyya Vin II.189; Sn 451, 930; SnA 468 (for udīraye Dh 408); bhāse Dh 102; Sn 400; & bhāsaye A II.51= J V.509 (with gloss katheyya for joteyya=bhāseyya). - Aor. abhāsi Vin IV.54; PvA 6, 17, 23, 69; 1st sg. also abhāsissaṃ (Cond.) Pv I.68 (=abhāsiṃ PvA 34); imper. pres. bhāsa Sn 346; ppr. bhāsamāne A II.51= J V.509; Sn 426; Dh 19; J IV.281 (perhaps better with v. l. as hasamāna); V.63; & bhāsanto Sn 543. - grd. bhāsitabba A IV.115; Vism 127. - Med. ind. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsase Vv 342; imper. pres. 2nd sg. bhāsassu M II.199. - An apparent ger. form abhāsiya It 59, 60 (micchā vācaṃ abhāsiya) is problematic. It may be an old misspelling for ca bhāsiya, as a positive form is required by the sense. The vv. ll. however do not suggest anything else but abhāsiya; the editor of It suggests pa°. - Cp. anu, o°, samanu°. Bhāsati2 {Bhasati} [bhās Dhtm 467: dittiyaṃ] to shine, shine forth, fill with splendour Sn 719 (2nd sg. fut. bhāsihi=bhāsissasi pakāsessasi SnA 499). Usually with prep. prefix pa° (so read at Pv I.109 for ca bh.). Cp. o°, vi°. Pāli Text Society 1143 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhāsana {Bhasana} (nt.) [fr. bhāṣ] speaking, speech Dhtm 162; Sdhp 68. Bhāsā {Bhasa} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣā] speech, language, esp. vernacular, dialect J IV.279 (manussa° human speech), 392 (caṇḍāla°); KhA 101 (saka-saka°-anurūpa); SnA 397 (Milakkha°); DA I.176 (Kirātā-Yavanādi-Millakkhānaṃ bhāsā); MA I.1 (Sīhaḷa°); VbhA 388 (18 dialects, of which 5 are mentioned; besides the Māgadhabhāsā). Bhāsita {Bhasita} [pp. of bhāsati1] spoken, said, uttered A V.194; Miln 28; DhA IV.93. - (nt.) speech, word Dh 363; M I.432. Usually as su° & dub° (both adj. & nt.) well & badly spoken, or good & bad speech Vin I.172; M II.250; A I.102; II.51 (su°; read bhāsita for bāsita); VI.226; Sn 252, 451, 657; J IV.247, 281 (su°, well spoken or good words); Pv II.620 (su°); PvA 83 (dub°). Bhāsitar {Bhasitar} [n. ag. fr. bhāṣ] one who speaks, utters; a speaker S I.156; Pug 56; SnA 549. Bhāsin {Bhasin} (adj.) (-°) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāṣin] speaking A I.102 (dubbhāsita-bhāsin). Bhāsura {Bhasura} (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. bhāsura fr. bhas] bright, shining, resplendent ThA 139, 212; VvA 12. Bhiṃsa {Bhimsa} (adj.) [=Vedic bhīṣma, of which there are 4 P. forms, viz. the metathetic bhiṃsa, the shortened bhisma, the lengthened bhesma, and the contracted bhīsa (see bhīsana). Cp. also Sk.-P. bhīma; all of bhī] terrible; only in cpd. °rūpa (nt. & adj.) an awful sight; (of) terrific appearance, terrible, awful J III.242, 339; IV.271, 494. Bhiṃsana {Bhimsana} & °ka (adj.) [the form with °ka is the canonic form, whereas bhiṃsana is younger. See bhiṃsa on connections] horrible, dreadful, awe-inspiring, causing fear. (a) bhiṃsanaka (usually combd with lomahaṃsa) D II.106=A IV.311; D II.157; Vin III.8; PvA 22; ThA 242 (°sabhāva=bhīmarūpa); J V.43. - (b) bhiṃsana Pv IV.35 (+lomahaṃsa). Bhiṃsā {Bhimsa} (f.) [fr. bhiṃsa] terror, fright; mahā-bhiṃsa (adj.) inspiring great terror D II.259. Cp. bhismā. Bhiṃsikā {Bhimsika} (f.) [fr. bhiṃsa] frightful thing, terror, terrifying omen Mhvs 12, 12 (vividhā bhiṃsikā kari he brought divers terrors to pass). Bhikkhaka {Bhikkhaka} [fr. bhikkhu, Cp. Epic Sk. bhikṣuka & f. bhikṣukī] a beggar, mendicant S I.182 (bh. brāhmaṇa); J VI.59 (v. l. BB. °uka); VbhA 327. Bhikkhati {Bhikkhati} [cp. Vedic bhikṣate, old desid. to bhaj; def. Dhtp 13 "yācane"] to beg alms, to beg, to ask for S I.176, 182 (so read for T. bhikkhavo); Dh 266; VbhA 327. - ppr. med. bhikkhamāna Th 2, 123. Bhikkhā {Bhikkha} (f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhaikṣa of bhikṣ, adj. & nt.] begged food, alms, almsbegging; food Vin IV.94; Cp I.14; Vv 704 (ekāhā bh. food for one day); Miln 16; PvA 3, 75, 131 (kaṭacchu°); bhikkhāya carati to go out begging food [cp. Sk. bhaikṣaṃ carati] J III.82; V.75; PvA 51 & passim. -subhikkha (nt.) abundance of food D I.11. dubbhikkha (nt.) (& °ā f.) scantiness of alms, famine, scarcity of food, adj. famine-stricken (cp. Sk. durbhikṣaṃ) Vin Pāli Text Society 1144 Pāli-English Dictionary II.175; III.87 (adj.); IV.23 (adj.); S IV.323, 324 (dvīhitikaṃ); A I.160; III.41; J II.149, 367; V.193; VI.487; Cp I.33 (adj.); Vism 415 (°pīḷita), 512 (f. in simile); KhA 218; DhA I.169; II.153 (f.); III.437 (°bhaya). -āhāra food received by a mendicant J I.237 (=bhikkhu-āhāra?). -cariyā going about for alms, begging round Sn 700; PvA 146. -cāra=°cariyā Mhbv 28. -paññatti declaration of alms, announcement that food is to be given to the Sangha, a dedication of food Vin I.309. Bhikkhu {Bhikkhu} [cp. later Sk. bhikṣu, fr. bhikṣ] an almsman, a mendicant, a Buddhist monk or priest, a bhikkhu. - nom. sg. bhikkhu freq. passim; Vin III.40 (vuḍḍhapabbajita); A I.78 (thera bh., an elder bh.; and nava bh. a young bh.); III.299 (id.); IV.25 (id.); Sn 276, 360, 411 sq., 915 sq., 1041, 1104; Dh 31, 266 sq., 364 sq., 378; Vv 801; acc. bhikkhuṃ Vin III.174; Dh 362, & bhikkhunaṃ Sn 87, 88, 513; gen. dat. bhikkhuno A I.274; Sn 221, 810, 961; Dh 373; Pv I.1010; & bhikkhussa A I.230; Vin III.175; instr. bhikkhunā Sn 389. pl. nom. bhikkhū Vin II.150; III.175; D III.123; Vism 152 (in sim.); VbhA 305 (compared with amaccaputtā) & bhikkhavo Sn 384, 573; Dh 243, 283; acc. bhikkhu Sn p. 78; M I.84; Vv 2210; & bhikkhavo Sn 384, 573; gen. dat. bhikkhūnaṃ Vin III.285; D III.264; Sn 1015; Pv II.17; & bhikkhunaṃ S I.190; Th 1, 1231; instr. bhikkhūhi Vin III.175; loc. bhikkhūsu A IV.25, & bhikkhusu Th 1, 241, 1207; Dh 73; voc. bhikkhave (a Māgadhī form of nom. bhikkhavaḥ) Vin III.175; Sn p. 78; VvA 127; PvA 8, 39, 166; & bhikkhavo Sn 280, 385. There are several allegorical etymologies (definitions) of the word bhikkhu, which occur frequently in the commentaries. All are fanciful interpretations of the idea of what a bhikkhu is or should be, and these qualities were sought and found in the word itself. Thus we mention here the foll. (a) bhikkhu=bhinnakilesa ("one who has broken the stains" i. e. of bad character) VbhA 328; VvA 29, 114, 310; PvA 51. - (b) Another more explicit expln is "sattannaṃ dhammānaṃ bhinnattā bhikkhu" (because of the breaking or destroying of 7 things, viz. the 7 bad qualities, leading to rebirth, consisting of sakkāyadiṭṭhi, vicikicchā, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, rāga, dosa, moha, māna). This def. at Nd1 70=Nd2 477a. - (c) Whereas in a & b the first syllable bhi(-kkhu) is referred to bhid, in this def. it is referred to bhī (to fear), with the further reference of (bh-) ikkh(u) to īkṣ (to see), and bhikkhu defined as "saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhati ti bh." Vism 3, 16 (saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhaṇatāya vā bhinna-paṭa-dharaditāya vā). - A very comprehensive def. of the term is found at Vbh 245-246, where bhikkhu-ship is established on the ground of 18 qualities (beginning with samaððāya bhikkhu, paṭiððāya bh., bhikkhatī ti bh., bhikkhako ti bh., bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhupagato ti bh., bhinna-paṭa-dharo ti bh., bhindati pāpake dhamme ti bh., bhinnattā pāpakānaṃ dhammānan ti bh. etc. etc.). - This passage is expld in detail at VbhA 327, 328. - Two kinds of bhikkhus are distinguished at Ps I.176; Nd1 465=Nd2 477b, viz. kalyāṇa[-ka-]puthujjana (a layman of good character) and sekkha (one in training), for which latter the term paṭilīnacara (one who lives in elimination, i. e. in keeping away from the dangers of worldly life) is given at Nd1 130 (on Sn 810). -gatika a person who associates with the bhikkhus (in the Vihāra) Vin I.148. -bhāva state of being a monk, monkhood, bhikkhuship D I.176; Sn p. 102; -sangha the community of bhikkhus, the Order of friars D III.208; Sn 403, 1015; Sn p. 101, 102; Miln 209; PvA 19 sq. & passim. Bhikkhuka {Bhikkhuka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. bhikkhu] belonging to a Buddhist mendicant, a bhikkhu-, a monk's, or of monks, in sa° with monks, inhabited by bhikkhus Vin IV.307, 308; opp. a° without bhikkhus, ibid. Bhikkhunī (f.) [fr. bhikkhu, cp. BSk. bhiksuṇī, but classical Sk. bhikṣukī] an almswoman, a female mendicant, a Buddhist nun D III.123 sq., 148, 168 sq., 264; Vin IV.224 sq., 258 sq. (°sangha); S I.128; II.215 sq., IV.159 sq.; A I.88, 113, 279; II.132 (°parisā), 144; III.109; IV.75; Miln 28; VbhA 498 (dahara°, story of); VvA 77. {Bhikkhuni} Pāli Text Society 1145 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhinka {Bhinka} [cp. Vedic bhṛnga large bee] the young of an animal, esp. of an elephant, in its property of being dirty (cp. pigs) Vin II.201=S II.269 (bhinka-cchāpa); J V.418 (with ref. to young cats: "mahā-biḷārā nelamaṇḍalaṃ vuccati taruṇā bhinka-cchāpa-maṇḍalaṃ," T. °cchāca°, vv. ll. bhiñjaka-cchāca; taruṇa-bhiga -cchāpa; bhinga-cchāja). Bhinkāra1 {Bhinkara} (& °gāra) [cp. late Sk. bhṛngāra] a water jar, a (nearly always golden) vase, ceremonial vessel (in donations) Vin I.39 (sovaṇṇa-maya); D II.172; A IV.210=214 (T. °gāra, v. l. °kāra); Cp. I.35; J I.85, 93; II.371; III.10 (suvaṇṇa°); Dpvs XI.32; PvA 75; KhA 175 (suvaṇṇa°; v. l. BB °gāra), Sdhp 513 (soṇṇa°). Bhinkāra2 {Bhinkara} [?] cheers, cries of delight (?) Bu I.35 (+sādhu kāra). Bhinkāra3 {Bhinkara} [cp. Sk. bhṛnga bee, bhṛngaka & bhṛnga-rājā] a bird: Lanius caerulescens J V.416. Bhijjati {Bhijjati} [Pass. of bhindati, cp. Sk. bhidyate] to be broken, to be destroyed; to break (instr.); pres. bhijjati Dh 148, ppr. bhijjamāna: see phrase abhijjamāne udake under abhijj°, with which cp. phrase abhejjantyā pathavyā J VI.508, which is difficult to explain (not breaking? for abhijjantī after abhejja & abhedi, and *abhijjanto for abhijjamāna, intrs.?). imper. bhijjatu Th 1, 312. - praet. 2nd pl. bhijjittha J I.468; aor. abhedi Ud 93 (abhedi kāyo). fut. bhijjhissati DA I.266; grd. bhijjitabba J III.56; on grd. °bhijja see pabhindati; grd. bhejja in abhejja not to be broken (q. v.). Bhijjana {Bhijjana} (nt.) [fr. bhijjati] breaking up, splitting, perishing; destruction J I.392; V.284; VI.11; DhA I.257 (kaṇṇā bhijjan'ākāra-pattā); ThA 43 (bhijjana-sabhāva of perishable nature; expln of bhidura Th 2, 35); PvA 41 (°dhammā destructible, of sankhārā). - Der. abhijjanaka see sep. Bhitti {Bhitti} (f.) [fr. bhid, cp. *Sk. bhitta fragment, & Class. Sk. bhitti wall] a wall Vin I.48; D II.85; S II.103; IV.183; V.218; J I.491; Vism 354=VbhA 58 (in comparison); ThA 258; VvA 42, 160, 271, 302; PvA 24. -khīla a pin (peg) in the wall Vin II.114, 152. -pāda the support or lower part of a wall J IV.318. Bhittika {Bhittika} (adj.) [fr. bhitti] having a wall or walls J IV.318 (naḷa °ā paṇṇasālā); VI.10 (catu° with 4 walls). Bhidura {Bhidura} (adj.) [fr. bhid] fragile, perishable, transitory Th 2, 35 (=bhijjana-sabhāva ThA 43). Bindati {Bindati} [bhid, Sk. bhinatti; cp. Lat. findo to split, Goth. beitan=Ger. beissen. Def. at Dhtp 381, 405 by "vidāraṇe" i. e. splitting] to split, break, sever, destroy, ruin. In two bases: *bhid (with der. *bhed) & *bhind. - (a) *bhid: aor. 3rd sg. abhida (=Sk. abhidat) D II.107; J III.29 (see also under abhida); abbhidā J I.247; II.163, 164. - fut. bhecchati (Sk. bhetsyati) A I.8. - ger. bhetvā (Sk. bhittvā) Th 1, 753; Sn 62 (v. l. BB bhitvā). - grd. bhejja: only neg. abhejja (q. v.). See also der. bheda, bhedana. - pp. bhinna & Pass. bhijjati. - (b) *bhind: pres. bhindati Nd1 503; DhA I.125 (kathaṃ bh. to break a promise); Sdhp 47. - ppr. bhindanto Mhvs 5, 185. - Pot. bhinde Vism 36 (sīlasaṃvaran). - fut. bhindissati Vin II.198. - aor. bhindi J I.467 (mitta- Pāli Text Society 1146 Pāli-English Dictionary bhāvaṃ), & abhindi A IV.312 (atta-sambhavaṃ). - ger. bhinditvā J I.425, 490; PvA 12; also in phrase indriyāni bhinditvā breaking in one's senses, i. e. mastering, controlling them J II.274; IV.104, 114, 190. - Caus. I. bhedeti: see vi°. Caus. II. bhindāpeti to cause to be broken J I.290 (sīlaṃ); VI.345 (pokkharaṇiṃ) and bhedāpeti Vin III.42. - See also bhindana. Bhindana {Bhindana} (adj.) [fr. bhindati] breaking up, brittle, falling into ruin S I.131 (kāya). Bhindivāla {Bhindivala} [Non-Aryan; Epic Sk. bhindipāla spear, but cp Prk bhiṇḍi-māla & °vāla, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 248; see also Geiger, P.Gr. § 38] a sort of spear J VI.105, 248; Abhp 394. Bhinna {Bhinna} [pp. of bhindati] 1. broken, broken up (lit. & fig.) Sn 770 (nāvā); J I.98 (abhinna magga an unbroken path); III.167 (uda-kumbha); PvA 72 (°sarīra-cchavi). - 2. (fig.) split, fallen into dissension, not agreeing D III.117=210, 171. - Usually in cpds., & often to be translated by prep. "without," e.g. bhinnahirottappa without shame. - Cp. sam°. -ājīva without subsistence, one who has little means to live on, one who leads a poor mode of living Miln 229 sq. (opp. parisuddh'ājīva); Vism 306. -nāva ship-wreeked J IV.159. -paṭa a torn cloth, in cpd. °dhara "wearing a patchwork cloth," i. e. a bhikkhu (see also s. v. bhikkhu) Th 1, 1092. -plava shipwrecked J III.158. -manta disobeying (i. e. breaking) a counsel J VI.437. -sira with a broken head J IV.251. -sīmā (f.) one who has broken the bounds (of decency) Miln 122. -sīla one who has broken the norm of good conduct Vism 56. -hirottappa without shame, shameless J I.207. Bhinnatta {Bhinnatta} (nt.) [fr. bhinna] state of being broken or destroyed, destruction A IV.144. Bhiyyo (Bhīyo, Bhīyyo) {Bhiyyo} {Bhiyo} [Vedic bhūyas, compar. form fr. bhū, functioning as compar. to bhūri. On relation Sk. bhūyaḥ: P. bhiyyo cp. Sk. jugupsate: P. jigucchati] 1. (adj.) more Sn 61 (dukkham ettha bhiyyo), 584 (id.), 306 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha); Dh 313 (bh. rajan ākirate), 349 (bh. taṇhā pavaḍḍhati). - 2. (adv.) in a higher degree, more, repeatedly, further S I.108 (appaṃ vā bhīyo less or more); Sn 434 (bh. cittaṃ pasīdati); Dh 18 (bh. nandati=ativiya n. C.); Miln 40. - See also bhiyyoso, yebhuyyena. -kamyatā desire for more, greed Vin II.214. bhāva getting more, increase, multiplication D III.221; Vin III.45; S V.9, 198, 244; A I.98; V.70; VbhA 289. Bhiyyoso {Bhiyyoso} (adv.) [abl. formation fr. bhiyyo 1] still more, more and more, only in cpd. °mattāya [cp. BSk. bhūyasyā mātrāya MVastu II.345; Divy 263 & passim] exceedingly, abundantly A I.124=Pug 30 (expld at PugA 212 by "bhiyyoso-mattāya uddhumāyana-bhāvo daṭṭhabbo"); J I.61; PvA 50. Bhisa {Bhisa} (nt.) [cp. Vedic bisa, with bh for b: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 40 1a] the sprout (fr. the root) of a lotus, the lotus fibres, lotus plant S I.204; II.268; J I.100; IV.308. -puppha the lotus flower Sn 2 (=paduma-puppha SnA 16). -muḷāla fibres & stalk of the lotus J V.39; Vism 361. Bhisakka {Bhisakka} [cp. Vedic bhiṣaj physician, P. bhesajja medicine & see Geiger, P.Gr. § 631] a physician M I.429; A III.238; IV.340; It 101; Miln 169, 215, 229, 247 sq., 302; Vism 598 (in simile); DA I.67, 255. Bhisi1 {Bhisi} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bṛṣī & bṛsī, with bh for b, as in Prk. bhisī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209] a bolster, cushion, pad, roll Vin I.287 sq. (cīvara° a robe rolled up); II.150, 170; III.90; IV.279. Pāli Text Society 1147 Pāli-English Dictionary Five kinds are allowed in a Vihāra, viz. uṇṇa-bhisi, cola°, vāka°, tiṇu°, paṇṇa°, i. e. bolsters stuffed with wool, cotton-cloth, bark, grass, or talipot leaves, Vin II.150=VbhA 365 (tiṇa°). bimbohana bolster & pillow Vin I.47; II.208; DhA I.416; VbhA 365. Bhisi2 {Bhisi} [etym.?] a raft Sn 21. - Andersen, Pali Reader, Glossary s. v. identifies it with bhisi1 and asks: "Could it also mean a sort of cushion, made of twisted grass, used instead of a swimming girdle?" Bhisikā {Bhisika} (f.) [fr. bhisi1] a small bolster Vin II.148 (vātapāna° a roll to keep out draughts); KhA 50 (tāpasa°, v. l. Kk kapala-bhitti, see Appendix to Indexes on Sutta Nipāta & Pj.). Bhismā {Bhisma} (f.) [=bhiṃsā] terror, fright D II.261 (°kāya adj. terrific). Bhīta {Bhita} [pp. of bhāyati] frightened, terrified, afraid Dh 310; J I.168 (niraya-bhaya°); II.110 (maraṇa-bhaya°), 129; IV.141 (+tasita); PvA 154, 280 (+tasita). Cp. sam°. Bhībhaccha {Bhibhaccha} see bībhaccha. Bhīma {Bhima} (adj.) [fr. bhī, cp. Vedic bhīma] dreadful, horrible, cruel, awful J IV.26; Miln 275. - kāya of horrible body, terrific J V.165. -rūpa of terrifying appearance Th 2, 353. -sena having a terrifying army J IV.26; VI.201. Also Np. of one of the 5 sons of King Paṇḍu J V.426; Vism 233. Bhīmala (adj.) [fr. bhīma] terrifying, horrible, awful J V.43 (T. bhīmūla, but read bhīmala; C. expls by bhiṃsanaka-mahāsadda). {Bhimala} Bhīrati {Bhirati} Pass. to bharati, only in cpd. ppr. anubhīramāna M III.123 (chatta: being brought up,or carried behind). Neumann, M. trsl.2 III.248 translates "über ihm schwebt," & proposes reading (on p. 563) anu-hīramāna (fr. hṛ). This reading is to be preferred, & is also found at D II.15. Bhīru {Bhiru} (adj. n.) [fr. bhī; cp. Vedic bhīru] 1. fearful, i. e. having fear, timid, afraid, shy, cowardly Sdhp 207 (dukkha°); usually in neg. abhīru not afraid, without fear, combd with anutrāsin: see utrāsin. - 2. fearful, i. e. causing fear, awful, dreadful, terrible Pv II.41 (°dassana terrible to look at). - 3. (m.) fear, cowardice Sn 437 (=utrāsa SnA 390). -ttāṇa refuge for the fearful, adj. one who protects, those who are in fear A II.174; It 25; Sdhp 300. Bhīruka {Bhiruka} (adj.) [fr. bhīru] afraid, shy, cowardly, shunning (-°) Vism 7 (pāpa°), 645 (jīvitukāma bhīruka-purisa). Bhīsana {Bhisana} (adj.) =bhiṃsana (q. v.) Pv IV.35 (v. l. in PvA 251), expld by bhayajanana PvA 251, where C. reading also bhīsana. Bhukka {Bhukka} (adj.) [fr. onomat. root *bhukk, dialectical, cp. Prk. bhukkai to bark, bhukkiya barking, bhukkana dog (Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 209); the root bhukk (bukk) is given by Hemacandra 4, 98 in meaning "garjati" (see P. gajjati), cp. also Prk. bukkaṇa crow] barking, n. a barker, i. e. dog; only in redupl. intens. formation bho-bhu-kka (cp. E. bow-wow), lit. bhubhu-maker (: kka fr. kṛ?) J VI.354 (C.: bhun-karaṇa). See also bhussati. Pāli Text Society 1148 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhunkaraṇa {Bhunkarana} (adj.-nt.) [bhu+kṛ, see bhukka] making "bhu," i. e. bow-wow, barking J VI.355 (°sunakha); v. l. bhu-bhukka-sadda-karaṇa. Bhucca {Bhucca} (adj.) [ger. of bhū in composition, corresponding to *bhūtya>*bhutya, like pecca (*pretya) fr. pra+i. In function equal to bhūta] only in cpd. yathā-bhuccaṃ (nt. adv.) as it is, that which really is, really (=yathā bhūtaṃ) Th 2, 143. See under yathā. Bhuja1 {Bhuja} (m. & nt.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. bhuja m. & bhujā; bhuj, bhujate to bend, lit. "the bender"; the root is expld by koṭilya (koṭilla) at Dhtp 470 (Dhtm 521). See also bhuja3. Idg. *bheng, fr. which also Lat. fugio to flee=Gr. feu/gw, Lat. fuga flight=Sk. bhoga ring, Ohg. bouc; Goth. biugan to bend=Ger. beugen & biegen; Ohg. bogo=E. bow. Semantically cp. Lat. lacertus the arm, i. e. the bend, fr. *leq to bend, to which P. laguḷa a club (q. v. for etym.), with which cp. Lat. lacerta=lizard, similar in connotation to P. bhujaga snake] the arm Sn 48 (expld by Nd2 478 as hattha, hand); 682 (pl. bhujāni); J V.91, 309; VI.64; Bu I.36; Vv 6418. Bhuja2 {Bhuja} [fr. bhuñjati2] clean, pure, bright, beautiful J VI.88 (°dassana beautiful to look at; C. explns by kalyāṇa dassana). Bhuja3 {Bhuja} (adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend] bending, crooked, in bhuja-laṭṭhi betel-pepper tree J VI.456 (C.: bhujangalatā, perhaps identical with bhujaka?), also in cpd. bhuja-ga going crooked, i. e. snake Miln 420 (bhujaginda king of snakes, the cobra); Dāvs. 2, 17; also as bhujanga Dāvs 2, 56, & in der. bhujanga-latā "snakecreeper," i. e. name of the betel-pepper J VI.457; and bhujangama S I.69. - Cp. bhogin2. Bhujaka {Bhujaka} [fr. bhuj, as in bhuñjati2; or does it belong to bhuja3 and equal to bhujalaṭṭhi?] a fragrant tree, growing (according to Dhpāla) only in the Gandhamādana grove of the Devaloka Vv 355; VvA 162. Bhujissa {Bhujissa} [cp. BSk. bhujiṣya Divy 302, according to Mhvyut § 84 meaning "clean"; thus fr. bhuj (see bhuñjati2) to purify, sort out] 1. (n. m.) a freed slave, freeman; a servant as distinguished from a slave Vin I.93; J II.313; PvA 112. -bhujissaṃ karoti to grant freedom to a slave J V.313; VI.389, 546; DhA I.19; ThA 200. - f. bhujissā Vin II.271 (in same sequence as bhujissa at Vin I.93). - 2. (adj.) freeing fr. slavery, productive of freedom D II.80 (cp. Dial. II.80); III.245; S II.70; IV.272; A III.36, 132, 213; Vism 222 (with exegesis). Cp. bhoja & bhojaka. -bhāva state of being freed fr. slavery, freedom ThA 200. Bhuñjaka {Bhunjaka} (adj.) [fr. bhuñjati1] eating, one who eats or enjoys, in °sammuti definition of "eater," speaking of an eater, declaration or statement of eating VbhA 164. Bhuñjati1 {Bhunjati} [bhuj to Lat. fruor, frūx=E. fruit, frugal etc.; Goth. brūkjan=As. brūkan=Ger. brauchen. The Dhtp 379 (& Dhtm 613) explns bhuj by "pālan' ajjhohāresu," i. e. eating & drinking for the purpose of living] to eat (in general), to enjoy, make use of, take advantage of, use Sn 102, 240, 259, 619; Dh 324; Pug 55. Pot. bhuñjeyya Sn 400; Dh 308, 2nd pl. bhuñjetha Dh 70; Mhvs 25, 113. Imper. 2nd med. bhuñjassa S V.53; 3rd act. bhuñjatu S I.141; Sn 479; bhuðjassu Sn 421; ppr. bhuðjanto J III.277: bhuðjamāna Th 1, 12; Sn 240. Fut. 1st sg. bhokkhaṃ [Sk. bhoksyāmi] J IV.117. Aor. 1st sg. bhuðjiṃ Miln 47; 3rd sg. bhuñji J IV.370; 3rd pl. abhuñjiṃsu Th 1, 922; abhuñjisuṃ Mhvs 7, 25. Ger. bhutvā J III.53 (=bhuðjitvā C.); DhA I.182; Pāli Text Society 1149 Pāli-English Dictionary bhutvāna Sn 128. Grd. bhuðjitabba Mhvs 5, 127. Inf. bhottuð: see ava°. - pp. bhutta. - Caus. bhojeti (q. v.). Cp. bhoga, bhojana, bhojanīya, bhojja; also Desid. pp. bubbhukkhita; & ābhuðjati. Bhuñjati2 {Bhunjati} [bhuj to purify, cleanse, sift, not given in this meaning by the Dhātupāṭha. Cp. Av. buxti purification buj to clean, also Lat. fungor (to get through or rid of, cp. E. function), Goth. us-baugjan to sweep; P. paribhuñjati 2, paribhojaniya & vinibbhujati. See Kern, Toev. p. 104, s. v. bhujissa] to clean, purify, cleanse: see bhuja2 and bhujissa, also bhoja & bhojaka. Bhuñjana {Bhunjana} (nt.) [fr. bhuðjati1] taking food, act of eating, feasting J IV.371 (°kāraṇa); PvA 184. -kāla meal-time DhA I.346. Bhutta {Bhutta} [pp. of bhuñjati1; Sk. bhukta] 1. (Pass.) eaten, being eaten Sn p. 15; Dh 308; impers. eating Vin IV.82 (bhuttaṃ hoti). Also °geha eating house J V.290, and in phrase yathābhuttaṃ bhuñjatha "eat according to eating," i. e. as ought to be eaten, eating in moderation D II.173 (where Rh. D., Dial. II.203, trsls "ye shall eat as ye have eaten")=III.62, 63 (where Rh. D., Dial. III.64 trsls "enjoy your possessions as you have been wont to do"; see note ibid.). We should favour a translation in the first sense. -dubbhuttaṃ, indigestible. -2. (Med. cp. bhuttar) having eaten, one who has eaten Miln 370 (sace bhutto bhaveyy'āhaṃ); also in phrase bhuttapātar-āsa after having eaten breakfast J II.273; DhA IV.226. -āvasesa the remainder of a meal Vin II.216. Bhuttar {Bhuttar} [n. ag. fr. bhuj, cp. Sk. bhoktṛ already Vedic & Epic] one who eats or has eaten, or enjoys (cp. bhutta 2) J V.465 (ahaṃ bhuttā bhakkhaṃ ras'uttamaṃ). Bhuttavant {Bhuttavant} (adj.) [bhutta+vant] having eaten, one who has eaten J V.170 (=katabhatta-kicca); VvA 244. Bhuttāvin {Bhuttavin} (adj.) [bhutta+suffix °āvin, corresponding to Vedic °āyin] having eaten, one who has had a meal; nom. sg. bhuttāvī Vin IV.82; Miln 15 (+onīta-pattapāṇi); PvA 23 (+pavārita); SnA 58; instr. bhuttāvinā Vin IV.82; gen. dat. bhuttavissa D II.195. acc. bhuttāviṃ Vin I.213; Sn p. 111 (+onīta-pattapāṇiṃ); J V.170; nom. pl. bhuttāvī Vin IV.81, & bhuttāvino S IV.289. Bhumma (adj.-n.) [fr. bhūmi, Vedic bhūmya] 1. belonging to the earth, earthly, terrestrial; nt. soil, ground, floor Sn 222 (bhūtāni bhummāni earthly creatures, contrasted with creatures in the air, antalikkhe), 236 (id.); Sdhp 420 (sabba-bhummā khattiyā). pl. bhummā the earthly ones, i. e. the gods inhabiting the earth, esp. tree gods (Yakkhas) Vv 842 (=bhumma-deva VvA 334). - nt. ground: Pv II.102 (yāva bhummā down to the ground); v. l. BB bhūm(i). - 2. the locative case KhA 106, 111, 224; SnA 140, 210, 321, 433; PvA 33. -attharaṇa "earth-spread," a ground covering, mat, carpet Vin I.48; II.208; IV.279. -antara "earthoccasion," i. e. (1) sphere of the earth, plane of existence Miln 163; DhsA 296. - (2) in °pariccheda discussion concerning the earth, i. e. cosmogony DhsA 3. -antalikkha earthly and celestial, over earth & sky (of portents) Miln 178. The form would correspond to Sk. *bhaumāntarīkṣa. -jāla "terrestrial net (of insight) gift of clear sight extending over the globe (perhaps to find hidden treasures) SnA 353 (term of a vijjā, science or magic art). Cp. bhūrikamma & bhūrivijjā. -ṭṭha (a) put into the earth, being in the earth, found on or in the {Bhumma} Pāli Text Society 1150 Pāli-English Dictionary earth, earthly Vin III.47. (b) standing on the earth Dh 28. - (c) resting on the earth Miln 181. Also as °ka living on earth, earthly (of gods) J III.87. -deva a terrestrial deva or fairy A IV.118; Ps II.149; VbhA 12; DhA I.156; VvA 334; PvA 5, 43, 55, 215, 277. -devatā=°deva J IV.287 (=yakkha); KhA 120. Bhummi1 {Bhummi} (f.) [fr. bhumma] that which belongs to the ground, i. e. a plane (of existence), soil, stage (as t.t. in philosophy) DhsA 277 (°y-āpatti), 339 (id.), 985 (dukkha°), 1368, 1374 sq. (see Dhs trsl.2 231). Bhummi2 [old voc. of bhumma] a voc. of friendly address "my (dear) man" (lit. terrestrial) Vin II.304 (=piyavacanaṃ Bdhgh). {Bhummi} Bhuyya {Bhuyya} the regular P. representative of Sk. bhūyas (compar.); for which usually bhiyya (q. v.). Only in cpd. yebhuyyena (q. v.). Bhuvi {Bhuvi} see bhū. Bhusa1 {Bhusa} [cp. Vedic busa (nt.) & buśa (m.)] chaff, husks A I.241 (°āgāra chaff-house); Dh 252 (opuṇāti bhusaṃ to sift husks); Ud 78; Pv III.41; III.107; VvA 47 (tiṇa° litter). Bhusa2 {Bhusa} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhṛśa] strong, mighty, great Dh 339 (taṇhā=balavā DhA IV.48); J V.361 (daṇḍa= daḷha, balavā C.). - nt. bhusaṃ (adv.) much, exceedingly, greatly, vehemently. In cpds. bhusaṃ° & bhusa°. - S I.69; J III.441; IV.11; V.203 (bhusa-dassaneyya); VI.192; Vv 69; Pv 338; IV.77; Miln 346; SnA 107 ("verbum intensivum"); Sdhp 289. Bhusati & Bhussati {Bhusati} {Bhussati}[perhaps a legitimate form for Sk. bhaṣate (see P. bhasati), with u for a, so that the suggested correction of bhusati to bhasati (see under bhasati) is unfounded] to bark DA I.317 (bhusati; vv. ll. bhussati & bhūsati); DhA I.171, 172. See also bhasati & bhukka; - pp. bhusita. Bhusikā {Bhusika} (f.) [fr. bhusa1] chaff A I.242; Vin II.181. Bhusita {Bhusita} [pp. of bhusati] barking J IV.182 (°sadda, barking, noise). See also bhasita. Bhuseti {Bhuseti} [Denom. fr. bhusa2=*bhṛśayati; but not certain, may have to be read bhūseti, to endeavour, cp. Sk. bhūṣati] to make strong, to cause to grow (?) J V.218 (C. explns by "bhusaṃ karoti, vaḍḍheti" p. 224). Bhū1 {Bhu} Bhū2 {Bhu} [fr. bhū] (adj.) being, (n.) creature, living being in pāṇa-bhū a living being (a breathing being) J V.79 (=pāṇa-bhūta C.). (f.) [fr. bhū, otherwise bhūmi] the earth; loc. bhuvi according to Kaccāyana; otherwise bhuvi is aor. 3rd sg.; of bhū: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 516; Geiger, Pali Gr. § 865. Bhūkuṭi {Bhukuti} (f.) [a different spelling of bhakuṭi, q. v. - Cp. Sk. bhṛkuti & bhrukuṭi] frown, anger, superciliousness M I.125 (v. l. bhakuṭi & bhā°); J V.296. Pāli Text Society 1151 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhūja {Bhuja} [cp. late Sk. bhūrja, with which related Lat. fraxinus ash, Ags. beorc=E. birch, Ger. birke] the Bhūrja tree, i. e. a kind of willow J V.195, 405 (in both places=ābhujī), 420. Bhūta {Bhuta} [pp. of bhavati, Vedic etc. bhūta] grown, become; born, produced; nature as the result of becoming. - The (exegetical) definition by Bdhgh of the word bhūta is interesting. He (at MA I.31) distinguishes the foll. 7 meanings of the term: (1) animate Nature as principle, or the vital aggregates (the 5 Khandhas), with ref. M I.260; (2) ghosts (amanussā) Sn 222; (3) inanimate Nature as principle, or the Elements (the 4 dhātus) S III.101 (mahābhūtā); (4) all that exists, physical existence in general (vijjamānaṃ) Vin IV.25 (bhūtaṃ); (5) what we should call a simple predicative use, is exemplified by a typical dogmatic example, viz. "kālaghaso bhūto," where bhūta is given as meaning khīṇāsava (Arahant) J II.260; (6) all beings or specified existence, animal kingdom (sattā) D II.157; (7) the vegetable kingdom, plants, vegetation (rukkh'ādayo) Vin IV.34 (as bhūta-gāma). - Meanings: 1. bhūtā & bhūtāni (pl.) beings, living beings, animate Nature Sn 35 (expld at Nd2 479 as 2 kinds, viz. tasā & thāvarā, movable & immovable; S. II.47 (K.S. II.36) mind and body as come-to-be; Dh 131 (bhūtāni), 405; M I.2 sq. (paṭhavī, āpo etc., bhūtā, devā, Pajāpatī etc.), 4; MA I.32. The pl. nt. bhūtāni is used as pl. to meaning 2; viz. inanimate Nature, elements, usually enumd under term mahā-bhūtāni. 2. (nt.) nature, creation, world M I.2 (bhūte bhūtato saðjānāti recognises the beings from nature, i. e. from the fact of being nature); DhsA 312 (°pasāda-lakkhaṇa, see Expos. 409). See cpds. °gāma, °pubba (?). - 3. (nt. adj.) that which is, i. e. natural, genuine, true; nt. truth; neg. abhūta falsehood, lie Sn 397; PvA 34. See cpds. °bhāva, °vacana, °vāda. - 4. a supernatural being, ghost, demon, Yakkha; pl. bhūtā guardian genii (of a city) J IV.245. See cpds. °vijja, °vejja. - 5. (-°) pp. in predicative use (cp. on this meaning Bdhgh's meaning No. 5, above): (a) what has been or happened; viz. mātu-bhūtā having been his mother PvA 78; abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtaṃ what has never happened before happened (now) DA I.43 (in expln of abbhuta); - (b) having become such & such, being like, acting as, being, quāsi (as it were), consisting of, e. g. andha° blind, as it were J VI.139; aru° consisting of wounds DhA III.109; udapāna° being a well, a well so to speak PvA 78; opāna° acting as a spring A IV.185; hetu° as reason, being the reason PvA 58; cp. cakkhu° having become an eye of wisdom. Sometimes bhūta in this use hardly needs to be translated at all. -kāya body of truth DhA I.11. -gāma vegetation, as trees, plants, grass, etc. Under bhūtagāma Bdhgh understands the 5 bīja-jātāni (5 groups of plants springing from a germinative power: see bīja), viz. mūla-bījaṃ, khandha°, phala°, agga°, bīja°. Thus in C. on Vin IV.34 (the so-called bhūtagāma-sikkhāpada, quoted at DhA III.302 & SnA 3); cp. M III.34; J V.46; Miln 3, 244. -gāha possession by a demon Miln 168 (cp. Divy 235). -ṭṭhāna place of a ghost KhA 170. -pati (a) lord of beings J V.113 (of Inda); VI.362 (id.); Vv 641 (id.). (b) lord of ghosts, or Yakkhas J VI.269 (of Kuvera). -pubba (a) as adj. (-°) having formerly been so & so, as mātā bhūtapubbo satto, pitā etc., in untraced quotation at Vism 305; also at SnA 359 (Bhagavā kuṇāla-rājā bhūtapubbo). - (b) as adv. (bhūtapubbaṃ) meaning: before all happening, before creation, at a very remote stage of the world, in old times, formerly Vin II.201; D I.92; II.167, 285, 337; M I.253; III.176; S I.216, 222, 227; IV.201; V.447; A IV.136=Vism 237; A IV.432; J I.394; DhA I.56. -bhavya past and future D I.18. -bhāva truthful character, neg. a° PvA 14. -vacana statement of reality or of the truth SnA 336. -vādin truthful, speaking the truth M I.180; D III.175; Pug 58; a° untruthful Dh 306; J II.416. -vikāra a natural blemish, fault of growth, deformity SnA 189 (opp. nibbikāra). -vijjā knowledge of demons, exorcism D I.9; Dh I.93, cp. Dial. I.17). -vejja a healer of harm caused by demons, an exorcist Vin IV.84; J II.215; III.511; Miln 23. Pāli Text Society 1152 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhūtatta {Bhutatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. bhūta] the fact of having grown, become or being created (i. e. being creatures or part of creation) Vism 310 (in def. of bhūtā); MA I.32 (id.). Bhūtanaka [cp. *Sk. bhūtṛna] a fragrant grass; Andropogon schœnanthus J VI.36 (=phanijjaka); Vism 543 (so v. l. for T. bhūtinaka). {Bhutanaka} Bhūtika {Bhutika} (adj.) (-°) in cpd. cātummahā° belongs to the whole expression, viz. composed of the 4 great elements M I.515. Bhūnaha {Bhunaha} [difficult to expln; is it an old misspelling for bhūta+gha? The latter of han?] a destroyer of beings Sn 664 (voc. bhūnahu, expld by SnA 479 as "bhūti-hanaka vuddhi-nāsaka"; vv. ll. bhūnahaṭa, bhūnahoṭa, bhūhata, all showing the difficulty of the archaic word); J V.266 (pl. bhūnahuno, expld by C. 272 as "isīnaṃ ativattāro attano vaḍḍhiyā hatattā bh."). Cp. M I.502 ("puritanical" suggested by Lord Chalmers). Bhūma {Bhuma} (-°) [=bhūmi] 1. (lit.) ground, country, district S III.5 (pacchā° the western district). - 2. (fig.) ground, reason for, occasion; stage, step Sn 896 (avivāda° ground of harmony; according to SnA 557 Ep. of Nibbāna). Bhūmaka (& °ika) {Bhumaka} (adj.) (only -°) [from bhūma, or bhūmi] 1. having floors or stories (of buildings) as dve° pāsāda DhA I.414; paðca° pāsāda a palace with 5 stories J I.58, 89; satta° with 7 stories (pāsāda) DhA II.1, 260. The form °ika at DhA I.182 (dve° geha). - 2. belonging to a place or district, as jāti° from the land of (their) birth M I.147; pacchā° from the western country S IV.312 (brāhmaṇā). - 3. being on a certain plane or in a certain state, as paritta° & mahā° Vbh 340 te° in 3 planes SnA 4 (of the 5 Khandhas), 510 (°vaṭṭa); DhA I.36 (kusala), 305 (°vaṭṭa); IV.69 (tebhūmaka-vaṭṭa-sankhātaṃ Māra-bandhanaṃ), 72 (dhammā); catu° in 4 planes DhsA 296 (kusala); DhA I.35 (citta). The form °ika at DhA I.288 (with ref. to citta). Bhūmi {Bhumi} (f.) [cp. Vedic bhūmi, Av. būmiš soil, ground, to bhū, as in bhavati, cp. Gr. fu/sis etc. See bhavati] 1. (lit.) ground, soil, earth Vin II.175; Sn 418 (yāna° carriage road); Pv I.1014≈; SnA 353 (heṭṭhā-bhūmiyaṃ under the earth); DhA I.414 (id., opp. upari-bhūmiyaṃ). - 2. place, quarter, district, region M I.145 (jāti° district of one's birth); Sn 830 (vighāta°); Nd2 475 (danta°); DhA I.213 (āpāna°); PvA 80 (susāna°). -uyyāna° garden (-place or locality) Vv 6419; Pv II.129; J I.58. - 3. (fig.) ground, plane, stage, level; state of consciousness, Vin. I.17; Vbh 322 sq.; Vism 126, 442 (with ref. to the 4 Paṭisambhidā, as sekha-bhūmi & asekha-bhūmi), 517 (paððā°niddesa). Usually -°: indriya° Nett 192; dassana° plane of insight Nett 8, 14, 50; sukha° ground for happiness Dhs 984 (cp. DhsA 214). -bhūmi-ttaya the 3 stages, viz. kāmāvacara, rūpāvacara, lokuttara Vism 493. - pl. bhūmiyo Ps II.205=Vism 384 (appld to the 4 jhānas); purisa° (aṭṭha p. bh. eight stages of the individual; viz. manda-bhūmi, khiḍḍā°, vīmaṃsana°, ujugata°, sekha°, samaṇa°, jina°, panna°, or as trsld by Rh. D. in Dial. I.72, under "eight stages of a prophet's existence"; babyhood, playtime, trial time, erect time, learning time, ascetic time, prophet time & prostrate time. Cp. the 10 decades of man's life, as given by Bdhgh at Vism 619). Bdhgh, when defining the 2 meanings of bhūmi as "mahā-paṭhavī" and as "cittuppāda" (rise of thought) had in view the distinction between its literal & figurative meaning. But this def. (at DhsA 214) is vague & only popular. - An old loc. of bhūmi is bhumyā, e. g. J I.507; V.84. Another form of bhūmi at end of cpds. is bhūma (q. v.). -kampa shaking of the ground, earthquake Miln 178. -gata "gone into the soil," i. e. hiding, stored away J I.375. -ghana thick soil SnA 149, cp. paṭhavi-ghana ibid. 146. -tala ground (-surface) PvA 186. -padesa place or Pāli Text Society 1153 Pāli-English Dictionary region upon the earth J VI.95. -pappaṭaka outgrowths in the soil D III.87=Vism 418. -pothana beating the ground DhA I.171. -bhāga division of the earth, district J I.109; V.200; VvA 125; PvA 29, 154. -laddh'(uppanna) acquired on a certain stage of existence SnA 4. -saya lying or sleeping on the ground DhA II.61. Bhūri1 {Bhuri} (f.) [cp. late Sk. bhūr] the earth; given as name for the earth (paṭhavi) at Ps II.197; see also def. at DhsA 147. Besides these only in 2 doubtful cpds., both resting on demonology, viz. bhūrikamma D I.12, expld as "practices to be observed by one living in a bhūrighara or earth-house" (?) DA I.97, but cp. Vedic bhūri-karman "much effecting"; and bhūrivijjā D I.9, expld as "knowledge of charms to be pronounced by one living in an earth-house" (?) DA I.93. See Dial. I.18, 25. The meaning of the terms is obscure; there may have been (as Kern rightly suggests: see Toev. s. v.) quite a diff. popular practice behind them, which was unknown to the later Commentator. Kern suggests that bhūri-vijjā might be a secret science to find gold (digging for it: science of hidden treasures), and °kamma might be "making gold" (alchemistic science). Perhaps the term bhumma-jāla is to be connected with these two. Bhūri2 {Bhuri} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhūri] wide, extensive, much, abundant, DhsA 147 (in def. of the term bhūri1, i. e. earth); otherwise only in cpds.: °paðða (adj.) of extensive wisdom, very wise S IV.205; Sn 346, 792, 1097, 1143; Pv III.55; Ps II.197 ("paṭhavī-samāya vitthatāya vipulāya paððāya samannāgato ti bhūripaððo," with other definitions); Nd1 95 (same expln as under Ps II.197); Nd2 415 C. (id.). °paððāṇa (adj.) same as °pañña Sn 1136 ≈ (cp. Nd2 480). °medhasa (adj.) very intelligent S I.42, 174; III.143; A IV.449; Sn 1131, 1136; Th 1, 1266; Pv III.77. Bhūrī {Bhuri} (f.) [is it original? Cp. BSk. bhūri in same sense at Lal. V. 444, 541; MVastu III.332] knowledge, understanding, intelligence Dh 282, quoted at DhsA 76 (expld as termed so because it is as widespread as the earth; Dhs 16; DhA III.421; same expln at DhsA 148); J VI.415. Bhūsana {Bhusana} (nt.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration Vism 10 (yatino-sīla-bhūsana-bhūsitā contrasted to rājāno muttāmaṇi-vibhūsitā). Bhūsā {Bhusa} (f.) [fr. bhūṣ] ornament, decoration, only in cpd. bhūsa- (read bhūsā-)dassaneyya beautiful as an ornament Pv III.32. Bhūseti {Bhuseti} [Caus. of bhūṣ, to be busy; in meaning "to adorn" etc. Expld at Dhtp. 315, 623 by "alankāra"] to adorn, embellish, beautify. Only in pp. bhūsita adorned with (-°) Pv II.952, 127; III.35; J VI.53. Cp. vi°. Bheka {Bheka} [cp. Vedic bheka, onomat.] a frog Th 1, 310; J III.430; IV.247; VI.208. Bhecchati {Bhecchati} is fut. of bhindati (q. v.). Bhejja {Bhejja} (adj.) [grd. of bhindati] to be split, only in neg. form abhejja not to be split or sundered Sn 255; J I.263; III.318; Pug 30; Miln 160, 199. Bhejjanaka {Bhejjanaka} (adj.) [fr. bhejja] breakable; like bhejja only in neg. form abhejjanaka indestructible J I.393. Pāli Text Society 1154 Pāli-English Dictionary Bheṇḍi {Bhendi} [perhaps identical with & only wrong spelling for bheṇḍu=kaṇḍu2] a kind of missile used as a weapon, arrow Vin III.77 (where enumd with asi, satti & laguḷa in expln of upanikkhipana). Bheṇḍu {Bhendu} [with v. l. geṇḍu, of uncertain reading & meaning. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 107 gives giṇḍu & remarks that this cannot be derived fr. kaṇḍuka (although kaṇḍu may be considered as gloss of bheṇḍu at Th 1, 164: see kaṇḍu2), but belongs with Prk. geṇḍui play & P. geṇḍuka and the originally Sk. words genduka, ginduka, geṇḍu, geṇḍuka to a root gid, giḍ, Prk. giṇḍai to play. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 90 says: "I am inclined to read geṇḍu in all cases & to compare it with geḍuka & geṇḍuka a ball"] a ball, bead; also a ball-shaped ornament or turret, cupola Th 1, 164 (see kaṇḍu2) J I.386 (also °maya ball-shaped); III.184 (v. l. geṇḍu). Bheṇḍuka1 [in all probability misreading for geṇḍuka. The v. l. is found at all passages. Besides this occur the vv. ll. keṇḍuka (=kaṇḍuka?) & kuṇḍika] a ball for playing J IV.30, 256; V.196; VI.471; DhsA 116. See also geṇḍuka. {Bhenduka} Bheṇḍuka2 {Bhenduka} [fr. bheṇḍu, identical with bheṇḍuka1] a knob, cupola, round tower J I.2 (mahā-bh°-pamāṇa). Bhettar {Bhettar} [n. ag. fr. bhid] a breaker, divider A V.283. Bheda {Bheda} [fr. bhid, cp. Ved. & Class. Sk. bheda in same meanings] 1. breaking, rending, breach, disunion, dissension Vism 64 sq. (contrasted with ānisaṃsa), 572 sq. (with ref. to upādāna & bhava); VbhA 185 (id.); Sdhp 66, 457, 463. -mithu° breaking of alliance D II.76; J IV.184; Kvu 314. -vacī° breaking of [the rule as to] speech Miln 231. -sangha° disunion in the Sangha Vin II.203. -sīla° breach of morality J V.163. - abl. bhedā after the destruction or dissolution in phrase kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā, i. e. after the breaking up of the body & after death: see kāya I. e. & cp. D III.52, 146 sq., 258; Dh 140; Pug 51. - 2. (-°) sort, kind, as adj. consisting of, like J II.438; VI.3 (kaṭuk' ādi°); DhA III.14 (kāya-sucarit'-ādi°-bhadra-kammāni); SnA 290 (Avīci-ādi-° niraya). -kara causing division or dissension Vin II.7; III.173; V.93 (cp. Vin I.354 & Vin. Texts III.266 for the 18 errors in which the Sangha is brought into division by bhikkhus who are in the wrong); DhsA 29 (aṭṭhārasa bheda-kara-vatthūni the 18 causes of dissension). Bhedaka {Bhedaka} (adj. n.) [fr. bheda] breaking, dividing, causing disunion; (m.) divider Vin II.205; J VI.382. - nt. adv. bhedakaṃ, as in °nakha in such a way as to break a nail DA I.37. Bhedana {Bhedana} (nt.) [fr. bhid, as in Caus. bhedeti] 1. breaking (open), in puṭa° breaking of the seed-boxes (of the Pāṭali plant), idiomatic for "merchandise" Miln 1. See under puṭa. - 2. (fig.) breach, division, destruction A IV.247; Dh 138; Bu II.7; J I.467 (mittabhāva°). -dhamma subject to destruction, fragile, perishable A IV.386; J I.146, 392; ThA 254. -saṃvattanika leading to division or dissension Vin III.173. Bhedāpeti & Bhedeti {Bhedapeti} {Bhedeti} are Causatives of bhindati are Causatives of bhindati (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 1155 Pāli-English Dictionary Bheraṇḍaka {Bherandaka} [cp. *Sk. bheruṇḍa] a jackal J V.270; the nom. probably formed after the acc. in phrase bheraṇḍakaṃ nadati to cry after the fashion of, or like a jackal A I.187. Bherava {Bherava} (adj.) [fr. bhīru, cp. Epic Sk. bhairava] fearful, terrible, frightful Th 1, 189; Sn 959, 965, 984; Nd1 370, 467; J VI.520; Dpvs 17, 100; Pgdp 26, 31. -bahu° very terrible A III.52; stricken with terror J VI.587. - (n) terror, combd with bhaya fear & dismay M I.17; A IV.291; V.132; Th 1, 367, 1059. -pahīna-bhayabherava having left behind (i. e. free from) fear & terror S III.83. -rāva cry of terror Miln 254. Bheri {Bheri} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. bherī] a kettle-drum (of large size; DhsA 319 distinguishes 2 kinds: mahā° & paṭaha°) D I.79; A II.185; Vv 8110; J VI.465; DhA I.396; Sdhp 429. -issara° the drum of the ruler or lord J I.283; paṭaha° kettle-drum Dpvs 16, 14; DhsA 319; PvA 4; yāma° (-velāya) (at the time) when the drum sounds the watch J V.459. -bheriṃ vādeti to sound the drum J I.283. -bheriyo vādentā (pl.) beating (lit. making sound) the drums J II.110. bherið carāpeti to make the drum go round, i. e. to proclaim by beat of drum J V.41; VI.10. -caraṇa the carrying round of the drum (in proclamations), in cpds. °magga the proclamation road DhA II.43; & °vīthi id. DhA II.45. -tala the head of the drum Vism 489 (in comparison); VbhA 80 (id.). -paṇava drum & tabor (in battle) A II.117. -vāda drum-sound, fig. for a loud voice PvA 89 (bherivādena akkosati rails like drum). -vādaka a drummer J I.283. -saððā sign of the drum DhA I.396. -sadda sound of the drum J I.283. Bhesajja {Bhesajja} (nt.) [cp. Vedic bhaiṣajya=bheṣaja, fr. bhiṣaj; see also P. bhisakka] a remedy, medicament, medicine Vin I.278; D II.266; M I.30; SnA 154, 446; Sdhp 393. -bhesajjaṃ karoti to treat with a medicine DhA I.25; mūla-bhesajjāni the principal medicines Miln 43; paðca bhesajjāni the 5 remedies (allowed to bhikkhus) DhA I.5. -kapālaka medicine bowl VbhA 361. sikkhāpada the medicine precepts VbhA 69. Bhesma {Bhesma} (adj.) [cp. Vedic bhīṣma of which the regular P. form is bhiṃsa, of bhī; bhesma would correspond to a form *bhaiṣma] terrible, awful Vin II.203=It 86 ("bhesmā hi udadhī mahā," so read for Vin. bhasmā, with v. l. bhesmā, and for It tasmā, with v. l. BB bhesmā, misunderstood by ed. - Bdhgh Vin II.325 on Vin. passage expls by bhayānaka); J V.266; VI.133 (v. l. bhasma). Bho {Bho} (indecl.) [voc. of bhavant, cp. Sk. bhoḥ which is the shortened voc. bhagoḥ of Vedic bhagavant; cp. as to form P. āvuso>Sk. āyuṣmaḥ of āyuṣmant] a familiar term of address (in speaking to equals or inferiors): sir, friend, you, my dear; pl. sirs D I.88, 90, 93, 111; M I.484; Sn 427, 457, 487; with voc. of noun: bho purisa my dear man J I.423; bho brahmaṇā oh ye brahmans J II.369. Double bho bho DhA IV.158. -vādika=°vādin Nd1 249. -vādin a brahman, i. e. one who addresses others with the word "bho," implying some superiority of the speaker; name given to the brahman, as proud of his birth, in contrast to brāhmaṇa, the true brahman Sn 620; Dh 396; J VI.211, 214; DhA IV.158. Bhokkhaṃ {Bhokkham} is fut. of bhuñjati (q. v.). Bhokkhi {Bhokkhi} at VbhA 424, in phrase sucikāmo bh. brāhmaṇo is a kind of Desider, formation fr. bhuj° (bhuñj), appearing as *bhukṣ=bhokkh (cp. bhokkhaṃ), with ending °in; meaning "wishing to eat." It corresponds to Sk. bhoktu-kāma. Cp. also n. ag. bhoktṛ of *bhukṣ, enjoyer, Pāli Text Society 1156 Pāli-English Dictionary eater. P. bhokkhi might be Sk. bhoktrī, if it was not for the latter being f. The word is a curiosity. Bhoga1 {Bhoga} [fr. bhuðj: see bhuðjati] 1. enjoyment A IV.392 (kāmaguṇesu bh.). - 2. possession, wealth D III.77; Sn 301, 421; Dh 139, 355; Pug 30, 57; Sdhp 86, 228, 264. -appa° little or no possession Sn 114. -khandha a mass of wealth, great possessions D II.86 (one of the 5 profits accruing from virtue). -gāma "village of revenue," a tributary village, i. e. a village which has to pay tribute or contributions (in food etc.) to the owner of its ground. The latter is called gāmabhojaka or gāmapati "landlord" J II.135. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 71, 112. -cāgin giving riches, liberal A III.128.. -pārijuðða loss of property or possessions VvA 101. -mada pride or conceit of wealth VbhA 466. -vāsin, as f. vāsinī "living in property," i. e. to be enjoyed or made use of occasionally, one of the 10 kinds of wives: a kept woman Vin III.139, 140; cp. M I.286. Bhoga2 {Bhoga} [fr. bhuj to bend, cp. bhuja3 & Sk. bhoga id. Hālayudha 3, 20] the coil of a snake J III.58. See also nib°. Bhogatā {Bhogata} (-°) (f.) [abstr. fr. bhoga] condition of prosperity, having wealth or riches, in uḷāra° being very rich, M III.38. Bhogavant {Bhogavant} (adj.) [fr. bhoga] one who has possessions or supplies, wealthy J V.399; Mhvs 10, 20; Sdhp 511. Bhogika (-°) (adj.) [fr. bhoga] having wealth or power, in antara° an intermediate aristocrat Vin III.47. {Bhogika} Bhogin1 {Bhogin} (-°) (adj.-n.) [fr. bhoga] enjoying, owning, abounding in, partaking in or devoted to (e. g. to pleasure, kāma°) D II.80; III.124; S I.78; IV.331, 333; A III.289; V.177. - m. owner, wealthy man M I.366. Bhogin2 {Bhogin} (adj.) [fr. bhuj, see bhuja3] having coils, of a snake J III.57; VI.317. Bhogiya {Bhogiya} is diaeretic form of Sk. bhogya=P. bhogga2 with which identical in meaning 2, similar also to bhogika. Bhogga1 {Bhogga} (adj.) [fr. bhuj to bend, pp. corresp. to Sk. bhugna] bent, crooked M I.88; D II.22; A I.138; J III.395. Bhogga2 {Bhogga} (adj.) [grd. of bhuñj to enjoy, thus=Sk. bhogya] 1. to be enjoyed or possessed, n. property, possession, in cpd. rāja° (of an elephant) to be possessed by a king, serviceable to a king, royal D I.87; A I.244, 284; II.113, 170; J II.370; DhA I.313 (royal possessions in general); DA I.245. Cp. BSk. rājabhogya MVastu I.287. See in detail under rāja-bhogga. -naggabhogga one who possesses nothing but nakedness, i. e. an ascetic J IV.160; V.75; VI.225. - 2. (identical with bhogika & bhogiya & similar in meaning to bhojarājā) royal, of royal power, entitled to the throne, as a designation of "class" at Vin III.221 in sequence rājā rāja-bhoggā brāhmaṇā, etc., where it takes the place of the usual khattiya "royal noble." Pāli Text Society 1157 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhoja {Bhoja} [lit. grd. of bhuñjati2, to be sorted out, to be raised from slavery; thus also meaning "dependence," "training," from bhuj, to which belongs bhujissa] one who is getting trained, dependent, a freed slave, villager, subject. Only in cpds. like bhojisiyaṃ [bhoja+isi+ ya=issariya] mastery over dependence, i. e. independence S I.44, 45; bhojājānīya a well-trained horse, a thoroughbred J I.178, 179; bhojaputta son of a villager J V.165; bhojarājā head of a village (-district) a subordinate king Sn 553=Th 1, 823. - In the latter phrase however it may mean "wealthy" kings, or "titled" kings (khattiyā bh-r., who are next in power to and serve on a rājā cakkavatti). The phrase is best taken as one, viz. "the nobles, royal kings." It may be a term for "vice-kings" or substitute-kings, or those who are successors of the king. The expln at SnA 453 takes the three words as three diff. terms and places bhojā= bhogiyā as a designation of a class or rank (=bhogga). Neumann in his trsln of Sn has "Königstämme, kühn and stolz," free but according to the sense. The phrase may in bhoja contain a local designation of the Bhoja princes (N. of a tribe), which was then taken as a special name for "king" (cp. Kaiser>Cæsar, or Gr. basileu/s). With the wording "khattiyā bhoja-rājāno anuyuttā bhavanti te" cp. M III.173: "paṭirājāno te raððo cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti," and A V.22: "kuḍḍarājāno" in same phrase. - Mrs. Rh. D. at Brethren, p. 311, trsls "nobles and wealthy lords." Bhojan {Bhojan} is ppr. of bhojeti, feeding J VI.207. Bhojaka {Bhojaka} [fr. bhuj, bhojeti] 1. one who provides food, attendant at meals J V.413. - 2. (is this from bhuñjati2 & bhujissa?) one who draws the benefit of something, owner, holder, in gāma° landholder, village headman (see Dial. I.108 n. & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104 sq.) J I.199, 354, 483; II.135 (=gāmapati, gāmajeṭṭhaka); V.413; DhA I.69. Cp. bhojanaka. Bhojana {Bhojana} (nt.) [fr. bhuñjati] food, meal, nourishment in general J II.218; IV.103, 173; J I.178; IV.223; Sn 102, 128, 242, 366, 667; Dh 7, 70; Pug 21, 55; Miln 370; Vism 69, 106; Sdhp 52, 388, 407. Some similes with bhojana see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119. -tika° food allowed for a triad (of reasons) Vin II.196. dub° having little or bad food J II.368; DhA IV.8. paṇīta° choice & plentiful meals Vin IV.88. sabhojane kule in the family in which a bhikkhu has received food Vin IV.94. -bhojane mattaððu(tā) knowing proper measure in eating (& abstr.); eating within bounds, one of the 4 restricttions of moral life S II.218; A I.113 sq.; Nd1 483. - 5 bhojanāni or meals are given at Vin IV.75, viz. niccabhatta°, salākabhatta°, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ, pāṭipadikaṃ. As part of the regulations concerning food, hours of eating etc. in the Sangha there is a distinction ascribed to the Buddha between gaṇabhojanaṃ, parampara-bhojanaṃ, atirittabhojanaṃ, anatirittabhojanaṃ mentioned at Kvu II.552; see Vin IV.71, 77. All these ways of taking food are forbidden under ordinary circumstances, but allowed in the case of illness (gilāna-samaye), when robes are given to the Bhikkhus (cīvarasamaye) and several other occasions, as enumd at Vin IV.74. - The distinction is made as follows: gaṇabhojanaṃ said when 4 bhikkhus are invited to partake together of one of the five foods; or food prepared as a joint meal Vin IV.74; cp. II.196; V.128, 135; paramparabhojanaṃ said when a bhikkhu, invited to partake of one of the 5 foods, first takes one and then another Vin IV.78; atirittabhojanaṃ is food left over from that provided for a sick person, or too great a quantity offered on one occasion to bhikkhus (in this case permitted to be eaten) Vin IV.82; anatirittabhojanaṃ is food that is not left over & is accepted & eaten by a bhikkhu without inquiry Vin IV.84. -aggadāna gift of the best of food SnA 270. -atthika in need of food, hungry Pv II.929. -pariyantika restricting one's feeding Vism 69. -vikati at J V.292 is to be read as bhājana° (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 1158 Pāli-English Dictionary Bhojanaka {Bhojanaka} =bhojaka, in °gāma owner or headman of the village J II.134. Bhojaniya, Bojanīya & Bhojaneyya {Bhojaniya} {Bojaniya} {Bhojaneyya} [grd. of bhuj, Caus. bhojeti. Cp. bhuñjitabba] what may be eaten, eatable, food; fit or proper to eat. -bhojaniya: food Vin IV.92 (five foods: odana rice, kummāsa gruel, sattu meal, flour, maccha fish, maṃsa meat). Soft food, as distinguished from khādaniya hard food J I.90. See also khādaniya. bhojanīya: eatable S I.167, cp. pari°. bhojaneyya: fit to eat DA I.28; a° unfit to be eaten Sn 81; J V.15. Bhojin {Bhojin} (-°) (adj.) [fr. bhuj] feeding on, enjoying A III.43; M I.343; Sn 47; J II.150; Pug 55. Bhojeti {Bhojeti} [Caus. of bhuñjati] to cause to eat, to feed, entertain, treat, regale Vin I.243; IV.71; J VI.577; DhA I.101. Bhojja {Bhojja} (adj.) [grd. of bhuñjati] to be eaten, eatable; khajja° what can be chewed & eaten DA I.85. °yāgu "eatable rice-gruel," i. e. soft gruel, prepared in a certain way Vin I.223, 224. Bhojjha {Bhojjha} a good horse, a Sindh horse J I.180. Bhoti {Bhoti} f. of bhavant (q. v.) DhA III.194. Bhottabba & Bhottuṃ {Bhottabba} {Bhottum} are grd. & inf. of bhuñjati (q. v.); bhottabba to be eaten J V.252, 253; bhottuṃ to eat J II.14. Bhobhukka {Bhobhukka} [intens-redupl. of bhukk=bukk, to bark: see bhukka & cp. Sk. bukkati, bukkana] one making a barking sound, barker, i. e. dog J VI.345 (=bhunkaraṇa C.). Pāli Text Society 1159 Pāli-English Dictionary M —M— {M}euphonic consonant inserted between two vowels to avoid hiatus, as agga-m-agga the best of all Vin IV.232; anga-m-angāni limb by limb Vin III.119; Vv 382, etc. See also S III.254 (yena-m-idh'ekacco); Dh 34 (oka-mokata ubbhato); Sn 765 (aññatra-m-ariyehi); Nd1 269 (dvaye-m-eva); J I.29 (asīti-hattha-m-ubbedha, for hatth'ubbedha); III.387 (katattho-manubujjhati); V.72 (orena-m-āgama); VI.266 (pacchā-m-anutappati); SnA 309 (rāg'ādi-manekappakāraṃ). - On wrong syllable division through Sandhi-m-, and thus origin of specific Pali forms see māsati. Ma {Ma} (-kāra) the letter or sound m J III.273 (sandhi-vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); V.375 (ma-kāro sandhikaro); KhA 155, 224; SnA 181, 383, 404. Maṃsa {Mamsa} (nt.) [cp. Vedic māṃsa, fr. Idg. *memsro-, as in Gr. mhro/s thigh, Lat. membrum limb ("member"); Goth. mims flesh; Oir mīr bite, bit (of flesh)] flesh, meat S II.97 (putta°); Dh 152; J III.184; Pug 55; Vism 258, 357 (in compar.); DhA I.375 (putta°); II.51 (alla° living flesh); VbhA 58, 61 (pilotika-paliveṭhita). Described and defined in detail as one of the 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body at Vism 252, 354; KhA 46; VbhA 235. -ûpasecana sauce for meat J III.144=VI.24; DhA I.344. -kalyāṇa beauty of flesh, one of the 5 beauties of a girl (see kalyāṇa) J I.394; DhA I.387. -khādaka flesh-eater J VI.530. -cakkhu the bodily eye, one of the 5 kinds of the sense of sight (see cakkhu III) D III.219; Nd1 100, 354. -dhovanī odaka water for washing meat KhA 54. -piṇḍika a meat-ball, lump of flesh Vism 256. -puñja a heap of flesh Vism 361 (in comp.); VbhA 67. -pesi a piece of flesh or meat (see on simile J.P.T.S. 1907, 122) Vin II.25; III.105 (°ṃ vehāsaṃ gacchantiṃ addasaṃ); M I.143; A III.97; Miln 280; Vism 195, 252, 468; DhA I.164; VbhA 235; -lohita flesh & blood Dh 150. Maṃsi {Mamsi} (f.) [cp. Sk. māṃsī] a certain plant Nardostychus jatamansi J VI.535. Maṃsika {Mamsika} [fr. maṃsa; cp. *Sk. māṃsika] 1. a dealer in meat, meat-seller Miln 331. - 2. in piṭṭhi° the °ka belongs to the whole cpd., thus: one who is a backbiter, a slanderer Sn 244 (=piṭṭhi-maṃsa-khādaka SnA 287). Similarly piṭṭhi-maṃsikatā (q. v.) Nd2 391. Makaci {Makaci} [etym.?] a kind of cloth, material, fibre DhA III.68 (vākakhaṇḍa). -pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) J II.96; DhA II.155. Cp. makkhi-vāla. -vāka m. bark Vism 249 (+akkavāka); VbhA 232. Makara {Makara} [cp. Epic Sk. makara] a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 97) J II.442; III.188; Miln 131, 377; ThA 204. - f. makarinī Miln 67. -dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin II.113, cp. p. 315. - as a design in painting or carving Vin II.117. 121, 152; IV.47. In these latter passages it occurs combd with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q. v.). The meaning is not quite clear. Makaranda {Makaranda} [cp. Class. Sk. makaranda] the nectar of a flower J VI.530. Pāli Text Society 1160 Pāli-English Dictionary Makasa {Makasa} [fr. Vedic maśaka viā *masaka »makasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 472] mosquito Vin II.119; S I.52 (a° free from m.); A II.117; Sn 20; J I.246; Sdhp 50. See also cpd. ḍaṃsa°. -kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin II.119, 130. -vījanī mosquito fan Vin II.130. Makuṭa {Makuta} (f.) [cp. BSk. makuṭa Divy 411] a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa+, i. e. adornment). Makula {Makula} [cp. Sk. makula] 1. a bud (Hardy in Index to VvA gives "Mimusops elengi" after BR) Th 2, 260; Vv 4526; J I.273; II.33; IV.333; V.207 (makuḷa), 416; Vism 230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma°); VvA 177 (kaṇavīra°), 194 (makuḷa), 197 (id.); VbhA 228, 239 (where Vism 256 has makulita, & KhA 53 mukulita). - 2. a knob J I.31; II.90; Vism 253 (kandala°). - 3. v. l. at Nd2 485 B for pakulla (=pakuṭa). Makkaṭa {Makkata} [cp. Epic Sk. markaṭa] 1. a monkey J I.385; II.267; DhA II.22; VbhA 408 (°niddā, a m.'s sleep, said to be quickly changing); KhA 73 (in simile); SnA 522 (cp. Sn 791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka J II.268; Kālabāhu J III.98 sq.; on the monkey as a figure in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119, to which add VbhA 228 & 259 (tālavana°), cp. Vism 245. - 2. a spider: see °sutta. -chāpaka the young of a monkey M I.385; J I.218. -sutta spider's thread J V.47; Vism 136 (in simile); DhA I.304. Makkaṭaka {Makkataka} [cp. Sk. markaṭaka; der. fr. markaṭa=makkaṭa] a spider (see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 119) Dh 347 (cp. DhA IV.58); J II.147 (=uṇṇanābhi); IV.484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); V.47, 469; Miln 364, 407 (pantha° road spider, at both passages). -°sutta spider's thread Vism 285. Makkaṭiya {Makkatiya} (nt.) [fr. makkhaṭa+ya] monkey grimace J II.448 (mukha°). The same as mukha-makkaṭika at J II.70. Makkaṭī {Makkati} (f.) [of makkaṭa] a female monkey Vin III.33, 34; J I.385; DhA I.119. Makkha1 {Makkha} [fr. mṛkṣ, lit. smearing over. Cp. BSk. mrakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in cpd. māna-madamrakṣa-paridāha etc.] hypocrisy; usually combd with paḷāsa (see also palāsa) M I.15; A I.95, 100, 299; IV.148, 456; V.39, 156, 209, 310, 361; It 3; Sn 56, 437, 631, 1132 (cp. Nd2 484= makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaṃ niṭṭhuriya-kammaṃ, i. e. hardness, mercilessness); Dh 150, 407; J V.141; Vbh 357, 380, 389; Pug 18, 22; Miln 289, 380; DhA III.118; VI.181. -vinaya restraining fr. hypocrisy S II.282; A V.165 sq. Makkha2 {Makkha} [probably=makkha1, but BSk. differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622, trsl. Index "ill-feeling"? Böhtlingk-Roth have: mrakṣya "wohlgefühl"] anger, rage Vin I.25. Makkhaṇa {Makkhana} (nt.) [fr. mṛkṣ, cp. *Sk. mrakṣaṇa] smearing, oil J III.120; Miln 11 (tela°); Dhtp 538. Makkhāyanā (f.) & Makkhāyitatta (nt.) {Makkhayana} {Makkhayitatta} [abstr. fr. makkha] the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd2 484; Pug 18, 22. Makkhikā {Makkhika} (f.) [cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā] a fly M III.148; Nd1 484; J II.275 (nīla°); III.263 (pingala° gadfly), 402; SnA 33 (pingala°), 572 (id.); DhA IV.58; Sdhp 396, 529. Pāli Text Society 1161 Pāli-English Dictionary Makkhita {Makkhita} [pp. of makkheti] smeared with (-°), soiled; anointed M I.364 (lohita°); J I.158 (madhu°); III.226 (piṭṭhi-maddena); V.71 (ruhira°); VI.391. Makkhin {Makkhin} (adj.) [fr. makkha] concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often combd with palāsin (e. g. at Vin II.89; J III.259) D III.45, 246. a° (+apalāsin) D III.47; A III.111; Sn 116; Pug 22. Makkhi {Makkhi} -vāla [cp. makaci-pilotikā] a cloth of hair for straining J II.97. Makkheti {Makkheti} [Caus. of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa] to smear, paste, soil, anoint J III.225, 314; Pug 36; Miln 268; Vism 344; DhA II.65. - Pass makkhīyati Miln 74. - Caus. II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed J I.486; DhA I.400. - pp. makkhita. Maga {Maga} [another form of miga=Sk. mṛga, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 124] 1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope M I.173 (in simile); S I.199 (id.); A I.70; II.23; Th 1, 958, 989; Sn 275, 763, 880; J V.267. 2. a stupid person J VI.206, 371. Magga {Magga} [cp. Epic Sk. mārga, fr. mṛg to track, trace] 1. a road (usually high road), way, foot-path Vism 708 (maggaṃ agata-pubba-purisa, simile of); VbhA 256 (tiyojana°, simile of a man travelling); DhA I.229. - addhāna° high road Vin IV.62; M III.158; see under addhāna; antāra-magge on the road Miln 16; ujuka° a straight way S I.33; DhA I.18; ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way: see ummagga, to which add refs. J V.260; Th 2, 94; kummagga a wrong path: see kum°, to which add S IV.195; Th 1, 1174. passāva° & vacca° defecation & urination Vin III.127; visama° a bad road S I.48. - 2. the road of moral & good living, the path of righteousness, with ref. to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etym. of magga in this meaning is "nibbān'atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for N.), nibbānaṃ vā maggeti, kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo" (VbhA 114). - Usually designated (a) the "ariya aṭṭhangika magga" or the "Noble Eightfold Path" (see aṭṭhangika). It is mentioned at many places, & forms the cornerstone of the Buddha's teaching as to the means of escaping "dukkha" or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents, viz. sammā-diṭṭhi, sammā-sankappa, °vācā, °kammanta, °ājīva, °vāyāma, °sati, °samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at D II.216 & M III.71 enumd as requisites for sammā-samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as "maggam uttamaṃ" at Sn 1130, i. e. the Highest Path. See for ref. e. g. Vin III.93; IV.26; D II.353; III.102, 128, 284, 286; It 18; Nd1 292; Nd2 485; Vbh 104 sq. 235 sq., VbhA 114 sq. (its constituents in detail), 121, 216; Vism 509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed). - (b) as ariya magga: M III.72; Pug 17; DA I.176 sq., 225 sq., 233; VbhA 373 sq.; ThA 205. - (c) as pañcangika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs 89; Vbh 110 sq., 237 sq. - (d) other expressions of same import: dhamma° Miln 21; magga alone; S I.191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.)=M III.9=S III.66; Sn 429, 441, 724 sq., 1130; Dh 57, 273 sq., It 106; VbhA 53, 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either magga-phala-nirodha (e. g. Vism 217, cp. Nd2 under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e. g. Tikp. 155 sq., 158; VbhA 43, 316, 488). - magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ðāṇa, pariððā, paððā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of "ill," the possibility of its removal & the "way" to the removal. These stages are described as dukkhe ðāṇaṃ, samudaye ðāṇaṃ nirodhe ðāṇaṃ and magge ðāṇaṃ at D III.227, Ps I.118. At the latter passage the foll. Pāli Text Society 1162 Pāli-English Dictionary chapter (I.49) gives dukkha-nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with magga. - Note. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175, 186; Dhs trsl.2 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354n. On passages with aṭṭhangika magga & others where magga is used in similes see Mrs. Rh. D. in J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119, 120. - 3. Stage of righteousness, with ref. to the var. conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz. sotāpatti-magga, sakadāgāmi°, anāgāmi°, arahatta°, or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the neverreturner, that of Arahantship. - At DhA I.110 magga-phala "the fruit of the Path" (i. e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta° S I.78; A III.391; DA I.224. - (b) in particular as the 4 paths: Nd2 612 A; Vbh 322 sq., 328, 335; Vism 453, 672- 678; DhA IV.30; VbhA 301. - 4. In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga-paccaya-niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enumd; viz. paððā, vitakka, sammāvācā, s-kammanta, s-ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi, micchā-diṭṭhi, micchā-vācā, m-kammanta, m-ājīva. -angāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path VbhA 120. -āmagga which is the (right) road and which is not M I.147; Vism ch. xx (°ssa kovida)=Sn 627; S III.108 (id.); DhA IV.169 (id.); A V.47 (°ssa ðāṇadassana); Dh 403. -udaka water found on the road Vism 338 (simile). -kilanta wearied by the road J I.129. -kusala one who is clever as regards the road, one who knows the road well S III.108; Nd1 171; VbhA 332 (in simile); KhA 70, 126. kovida=°kusala Nd1 446. -kkhāyin (should be °akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way M III.5; Nd1 33. -jina Conqueror of the paths Sn 84 sq. -jīvin who lives in the right path Sn 88. -jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Sn 85. -ðāṇa knowledge of the Path VbhA 416. -ððū knows the Path Nd1 446. -ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. -ttaya the triad of the paths (i. e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) DhA IV.109. -dūsin highway robber Sn 84. -desaka one who points out the way, a guide Sn 84; J IV.257; as °desika at DhA II.246. -desin=°desaka Sn 87. -dhamma the rule of the Path, i. e. righteous living Sn 763. -dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd1 45. -paṭipanna-1. one on the road, i. e. wandering, tramping DhA I.233. - 2. one who has entered the Path Pv IV.349. -parissaya danger of the road VvA 200. bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i. e. righteousness) Nd1 323. -mūḷha one who has lost the way VvA 332. -vaṇṇa praise of the Path DhA I.115. -vidū one who knows the Path Nd1 446. -sacca the truth concerning the Path VbhA 114, 124. -sira N. of a month DA I.241. Maggana (nt.) & Magganā (f.) {Maggana} [fr. magg] tracking, search for, covetousness Vism 29 (syn. for nijigiṃsanatā & gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana). Maggika {Maggika} [fr. magga] wayfarer, tramp DhA I.233. Maggati & (spurious) Mageti {Maggati} {Mageti} [Denom. fr. magga, cp. Sk. margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg in meaning "anvesana," i. e. tracking, following up; see Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541] to track, hunt for, trace out, follow, seek M I.334 (ppr. magayamana); S II 270 (pp. maggayamāna); Th 2, 384 (cp. ThA 255=pattheti); J V.102 (where T. reads maggheyya, which is expld by C. as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern, Toev. s. v. defends it. The v. l. reads magg°. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in C. instead of passeyya. The form pp. magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root); DhsA 162 (=gavesati). - Caus. II. maggāpeti PvA 112. - Pass. maggīyati VbhA 114. Magghati {Magghati} see maggeti. Pāli Text Society 1163 Pāli-English Dictionary Maghavant {Maghavant} [cp. Epic Sk. maghavā, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. Maia] N. of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) S I.221 (voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dh 30. Cp. māgha. Maghā {Magha} (f.) [cp. *Sk. maghā] N. of a nakkhatta, in cpd. °deva SnA 352 (cp. M II.74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa XIV. I. 1). Mankati {Mankati} is given as root mank is given as root mank (aor. maki) at Dhtm 13, in meaning maṇḍana, i. e. adornment. It is meant to be an expln of mankato? Mankato {Mankato} (adv.) [for Sk. mat-kṛte, Cp. E. Müller, P.Gr. 12] on my account, for me Miln 384. Manku {Manku} (adj.) [cp. Vedic manku; see on meaning Hardy in preface to Anguttara v. p. vi] staggering, confused, troubled, discontented Vin II.118; S V.74; Dh 249; Nd1 150; DhA III.41, 359 (with loc.). - f. pl. mankū Vin I.93. -dummanku "staggering in a disagreeable manner," evil-minded A I.98; IV.97 (read line as "dummanku'yaṃ padusseti dhūm'aggamhi va pāvako" he, staggering badly, is spoilt like the fire on the crest of smoke); V.70; Vin II.196; III.21; IV.213; S II.218; Nett 50. -bhāva discontent, moral weakness J IV.49; Miln 227; DhA III.359. bhūta discontented, troubled, confused Vin II.19; D II.85; A I.186; Dh 263; J V.211; VI.362; DhA II.76; a° self-possessed A III.40; Miln 21, 339. Mankuna {Mankuna} (& °ṇa) [cp. late Sk. matkuṇa, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 63] an insect, bug or flea J I.10; III.423; Vism 109 (where kīla-mankula ought to be read as kīṭamankuna); DhA II.12. Mangala {Mangala} (adj.) [cp. Vedic mangala. Expld by Dhtp 24 with root mang, i. e. lucky; see also mañju] auspicious, prosperous, lucky, festive Nd1 87, 88; KhA 118 sq.; SnA 273, 595; Sdhp 551. nt. mangalaṃ good omen, auspices, festivity Sn 258; Vin II.129; PvA 17. A curious popular etymology is put forth by Bdhgh at KhA 123, viz. "maṃ galanti imehi sattā ti" mangalāni. mangalaṃ karoti lit. to make an auspicious ceremony, i. e. to besprinkle with grains etc. for luck (see on this PvA 198), to get married DhA I.182; mangalaṃ vadati to bless one J IV.299; DhA I.115. Three (auspicious) wedding-ceremonies at DhA I.115 viz. abhiseka° consecration, geha-ppavesana° entering the house, vivāha° wedding. - Certain other general signs of good luck or omina kat) e)coxh/n are given at J IV.72, 73 and KhA 118 sq. (see also mangalika). Several ceremonious festivities are mentioned at DhA II.87 with regard to the bringing up of a child, viz. nāma-karaṇa-mangala the ceremony of giving a name; āhāra-paribhoga° of taking solid food; kaṇṇa-vijjhana° of piercing the ears; dussa-gahaṇa° of taking up the robe: cūḷākaraṇa° of making the top-knot. - Cp. abhi°. -usabha an auspicious bull SnA 323. -chaṇa a merry time, fair J II.48; DhA I.392. -kicca auspicious function, festivity SnA 175, 323. -kiriyā festivity, wedding SnA 69; finding good omens J IV.72. -kolāhala the lucky, or most auspicious, foreboding, one of the 5 kolāhalas (q. v.) KhA 121. -pañha see mangalika. -divasa a lucky day J IV.210; DhA III.467. -vappa ploughing festival SnA 137. Cp. vappa-mangala. -sindhava state horse J I.59. -silāpaṭṭa auspicious slab (of stone) J I.59; VI.37; PvA 74. -supina lucky dream J VI.330. -hatthi state elephant Mhvs 35, 21; DhA I.389. Mangalika {Mangalika} (adj.) (-°) [fr. mangala] 1. one who is feasting in, one whose auspices are such & such; fond of; only in kotūhala° fond of excitement J I.372; Miln 94 (apagata°, without passion for excitement). - 2. superstitious, looking out for lucky signs Vin II.129 (gihī), 140 Pāli Text Society 1164 Pāli-English Dictionary (id.). At J IV.72, 73; three sets of people are exemplified, who believe in omina as either diṭṭhaṃ (seen) or sutaṃ (heard) or mutaṃ (sensed); they are called diṭṭha-mangalikā, suta° & muta° respectively. The same group is more explicitly dealt with in the Mangala-sutta KhA 118 sq. (cp. Nd1 89); diṭṭhamangalika pañha "a question concerning visible omina" J IV.73 (correct meaning given under diṭṭha1, vol. II.1561!), 390 (?). The Np. diṭṭha-mangalikā at J IV.376 sq. Mangalya {Mangalya} (nt.) [fr. mangala] auspiciousness, good luck, fortune Dhtp 24. Mangura {Mangura} (adj.) [etym.? or=mangula? See J.R.A.S. 1903, 186 the corresponding passage to M I.246 in Lal. V. 320 has madgura.] golden; in cpd. °cchavi of golden colour, f. cchavī D I.193, 242; M I.246, 429; II.33; Vism 184. Mangula (adj.) [cp. mangura] sallow; f. mangulī woman of sallow complexion S II.260=Vin III.107; Vin III.100. {Mangula} Macca {Macca} (adj.-n.) [orig. grd. of marati, mṛ corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya (q. v.)] mortal; (m.) man, a mortal S I.55; Sn 249, 577, 580, 766; J III.154; IV.248; V.393; Dh 53, 141, 182; Vv 6312; Kvu 351. - See also refs. under jāta. Maccu {Maccu} [in form=Vedic mṛtyu, fr. mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Ved.-Sk. meaning "death" only] the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama S I.156; Sn 357 (gen. maccuno), 581 (instr. maccunā), 587; Th 1, 411; Dh 21, 47, 128, 135, 150, 287; VbhA 100; SnA 397; DhA III.49; Sdhp 295, 304. -tara one who crosses or overcomes death Sn 1119 (=maraṇaṃ tareyya Nd2 486). -dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death S I.4; adj. belonging to death or subject to death (=Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd2 487b). - Sn 358, 1104 (with expln "m. vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisankhārā ca" Nd2 487a), 1146 (°pāramaccudheyyassa pāraṃ vuccati amataṃ nibbānaṃ Nd2 487); Th 2, 10 (=maccu ettha dhīyati ThA 13); Dh 86; DhA II.161. -parāyaṇa surmounting death Sn 578; pareta id. Sn 579. -pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Sn 166; J V.367. -bhaya the fear of death Mhvs 32, 68. -maraṇa dying in death M I.49 (cp. C. on p. 532: maccu-maraṇan ti maccu-sankhātaṃ maraṇaṃ tena samuccheda-maraṇ'ādīni nisedheti. - See also def. of maraṇa s.v.). -mukha the mouth of death Sn 776; Nd1 48. -rājā the king of death Sn 332, 1118 (=Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaṃ pi Nd2 488); Dh 46, 170; KhA 83. -vasa the power of death 3 I.52: Sn 587, 1100 (where maccu is expld by maraṇa & Māra). -hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death It 46=Sn 755; Th 1, 129. Maccha {Maccha} [cp. Vedic matsya] fish A III.301; Sn 605, 777, 936; J I.210, 211; V.266 (in simile); VI.113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land); Pug 55; Sdhp 610. -maccha is given at Nd2 91 as syn. of ambucārin. -pūti° rotten fish M III.168; & in simile at It 68=J IV.435=VI.236 =KhA 127. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1906, 201. bahu° rich in fish J III.430. loṇa° salt fish Vism 28. rohita° the species Cyprinus rohita J II.433; III.333; DhA II.132. On maccha in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz.Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) J I.207; II.352; V.462; Timanda & Timirapingala J V.462; Mitacintin J I.427; Bahucintin J I.427. -maṃsa the flesh of fishes Sn 249. -bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman A III.301; Vism 379. -bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes J V.75. -vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin II.137. -sakalika "a bit of Pāli Text Society 1165 Pāli-English Dictionary fish" (fish-bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism 250=KhA 43=VbhA 233. Macchara {Macchara} (adj.) [Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also "envious," cp. maccharin] niggardly, envious, selfish Pgdp II.49. -maccharaṃ (nt.) avarice, envy A IV.285; Sn 811, 862, 954 (vīta-macchara, adj.). Maccharāyati {Maccharayati} [Demon. fr. macchariya] to be selfish, greedy or envious J VI.334; DhA II.45, 89. Maccharāyanā (f.) & Maccharāyitatta (nt.) the condition of selfishness, both expressions in defn of macchariya at Dhs 1122; Pug 19, 23; DhsA 375. {Maccharayana} {Maccharayitatta} Maccharin {Maccharin} (adj.) [cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat+sṛ, i. e. "reflecting to me"] selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs trsl.2 p. 320); A II.82; III.139, 258, 265; D III.45, 246; Dh 263; Sn 136, 663; Nd1 36; J I.345; V.391; Vv 5226; Pug 20; DhsA 394; DhA II.89; Sdhp 89, 97. - a° unselfish D III.47; A IV.2; Sn 852, 860; It 102. Macchariya & Macchera {Macchariya} {Macchera} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mātsarya] avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the maịn cause of rebirth in the Petaloka. - 1. macchariya: A I.95, 299; III.272; Dh III.44 (issā°), 289; Sn 863 (°yutta), 928; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 357, 389, 391. - Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned: āvāsa°, kula°, lābha°, vaṇṇa°, dhamma° D III.234; Nd1 118, 227; A IV.456; Dhs 1122 (cp. Dhs tsrl.2 p. 276); Vism 683; DhsA 373, 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence A V.40, 209; Miln 289; PvA 87, 124. - 2. macchera A I.105 (°mala), 281; Dh 242; It 18; Nd1 260; Sdhp 313, 510. At A II.58 and elsewhere the state called vigata-malamacchera "with the stain of avarice vanished," is freq. mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship. - Note. The (etym.) expln of macchariya at VbhA 513 is rather interesting: "idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhaṃ eva hotu, mā aððassa acchariyaṃ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati" (from the Purāṇas? ). Macchika {Macchika} [fr. maccha] a fish-catcher, fisherman A III.301; J V.270; VI.111; Miln 331. Macchī {Macchi} (f.) [of maccha] a female fish J II.178. Macchera {Macchera} see macchariya. Majja {Majja} (nt.) [fr. mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya] 1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin I.205; D III.62, 63; Sn 398 (+pāna=majjapāna); VvA 73 (=surā ca merayað ca); Sdhp 267. - 2. drinking place J IV.223 (=pān'āgāra). -pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard A IV.261; Sn 400; Pv IV.176 (a°); ThA 38. -pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 158; VvA 73; Sdhp 87. -pāyaka=majjapa J II.192 (a°). -pāyin=°pāyaka Sdhp 88. -vikkaya sale of spirits J IV.115. Majjati1 {Majjati} [majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo] is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds. ummujjati & nimujjati. Pāli Text Society 1166 Pāli-English Dictionary Majjati2 {Majjati} [mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo (cp. Gr. a)me/rgw) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke, milk (cp. Gr. a)me/lgw, Mir. mlich=milk etc.) - Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning "saṃsuddhiyaṃ"] to wipe, polish, clean VvA 165. Cp. sam°. - pp. majjita & maṭṭha. Majjati3 {Majjati} [mad, Sk. mādyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.] to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated S I.73, 203; A IV.294; Sn 366 (Pot. majje=majjeyya SnA 364), 676 (id., T. reads na ca majje, SnA 482 reads na pamajje); J II.97; III.87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji Mhvs 17, 15. - pp. matta. Majjāra {Majjara} [cp. Epic Sk. mārjāra; dialectical] a cat Miln 23. - f. majjārī (majjāri°) Vin I.186 (°camma cat's skin); DhA I.48; Pgdp 49. Majjika {Majjika} [fr. majja] a dealer in strong drink. a tavernkeeper Miln 331. Majjita {Majjita} [pp. of majjati2] cleaned, polished VvA 340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 8417). See also maṭṭha. Majjha {Majjha} (adj.) [Vedic madhya, cp. Lat. medius, Gr. me/ssos, Goth. midjis=Ohg. mitti, E. middle] middle, viz. 1. of space: of moderate height D I.243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca). - 2. of time: of middle age Sn 216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old). - 3. often used adv. in loc. majjhe in the middle; i. e. (a) as prep. in between, among (-° or with gen.) Pv I.111, 114; J I.207 (sakuṇānaṃ); DhA I.182 (vasana-gāmassa); PvA 11 (parisā°). majjhe chetvā cutting in half J V.387. - (b) in special dogmatic sense "in the present state of existence," contrasted with past & future existences (the latter combd as "ubho antā" at Sn 1040). The expln of majjhe in this sense is at Nd1 434: "majjhaṃ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā" etc. (similarly at Nd2 490). - Sn 949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (id.); Dh 348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i. e. paccuppannesu khandhesu DhA IV.63). - 4. (nt.) majjhaṃ the middle DhA I.184 (tassa uramajjhaṃ ghaṃsentī). Majjhaka {Majjhaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. majjha] lying or being in the midst of . . ., in pācīna-yava° (dakkhiṇa°, pacchima°, uttara°) nigama, a market-place lying in the midst of the eastern corn-fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā J VI.330. Majjhatta {Majjhatta} (adj.-n.) [for majjha-ṭṭha, which we find in Prk. as majjhattha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 214; majjha+ sthā] 1. (adj.) "standing in the middle," umpire, neutral, impartial, indifferent J I.300; II.359 (parama°, +upekkhā-pārāmī); VI.8; Miln 403; Vism 230; Mhvs 21, 14. 2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity; almost synonymous with upekkhā: Vism 134, 296; VbhA 283 (°payogatā); DhA II.214 (°upekkhā); PvA 38 (so read for majjhattha). See also following. - Note. A similar term is found in BSk. as mṛdu-madhyā kṣānti "state of spiritual calm" Divy 271; see Yoga Sūtra II.34. Majjhattatā {Majjhattata} (f.) [abstr. from prec.] impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd2 166 (in expln of upekkhā, with syn. passaddhatā); Vbh 230; Vism 134; VbhA 285 (satta° & sankhāra°), 317 (def.); DhsA 133. Pāli Text Society 1167 Pāli-English Dictionary Majjhantika {Majjhantika} [majjha+anta+ika] midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin IV.273; S IV.240; J V.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha - majjhantikā); V.291 (read majjhantik' ātikamm'āgami); Vism 236; Miln 3; or as apposition with kāla & samaya S I.7 (kāla); Pv IV.32 (id.); Nd2 977 (samaya); DA I.251 (id.). Majjhāru {Majjharu} [etym. doubtful] a certain kind of plant Vin I.196 (v. l. majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sk. mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea. Majjhima {Majjhima} (adj.) [Vedic madhyama, with sound change °ama>°ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 191, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted] 1. middle, medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate. - Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like "small-medium-big," or "first-middle-last" (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna-m-paṇīta D III.215 (tisso dhātuyo); Dhs 1205- 1027 (dhammā); Vism 11 (sīlaṃ); h. m. ukkaṭṭha Vism 308; omaka m. ukkaṭṭha Vin IV.243; khuddaka m. mahā Vism 100; lāmaka m. paṇīta (i. e. lokuttara) DhsA 45 (dhammā); paritta-m-uḷāra Sdhp 260. - (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima° pacchima° J I.75; id. with vaye PvA 5. - 2. (nt.) majjhimaṃ the waist, in cpd. su-majjhimā (f.) a woman with beautiful waist Q V.4. Mañca {Manca} [cp. Epic Sk. mañca stand, scaffolding, platform] a couch, bed Vin IV.39, 40 (where 4 kinds are mentioned, which also apply to the defn of pīṭha, viz. masāraka, bundikābaddha, kuḷīra-pādaka, āhacca-pādaka; same defn at VbhA 365); Sn 401; J III.423; DhA I.89 (°ṃ bandhati to tie a bed or two together), 130; IV.16; VbhA 20; VvA 291; PvA 93. - heṭṭhā mañce underneath the bed J I.197 (as place where domestic pigs lie); II.419 (id.); II.275 (where a love-sick youth lies down in the park). -atimañca bed upon bed, i. e. beds placed on top of each other serving as grand stands at a fair or festival J III.456; VI.277; DhA IV.59. -parāyaṇa ending in bed, kept in bed Pv II.25 (nīla°, fig. for being buried); DhA I.183 (with v. l. maccu°, just as likely, but see maccuparāyaṇa). -pīṭha couch and chair Vin II.270 sq.; A III.51; VvA 9, 220, 295. -vāna stuffing of a couch DhA I.234. Mañcaka {Mancaka} [fr. mañca] bed, couch, bedstead Vin I.271; S I.121=III.123; J I.91; III.423; Th 2, 115; Miln 10; DhA II.53. Mañjari {Manjari} (f.) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. maðjarī] a branching flower-stalk, a sprout J V.400, 416. Mañjarikā {Manjarika} (f.)=mañjari, Vin III.180. Mañjarita {Manjarita} (adj.) [fr. mañjari] with (full-grown) pedicles, i. e. in open flower Miln 308 (°patta in full bloom). Mañjīra {Manjira} [cp. late Sk. maðjīra nt.] an anklet, foot-bangle Abhp 228. Mañju {Manju} (adj.) [cp. Class Sk. mañju, also mangala, cp. Gr. ma/gganon means of deceiving, Lat. mango a dealer making up his wares for sale. See further cognates at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mango] pleasant, charming, sweet, lovely (only with ref. to the voice) D II.211, 227 (one of the 8 characteristics of Brahmā's & the Buddha's voice: see bindu & aṭṭhanga); J II.150. - (nt.) a Pāli Text Society 1168 Pāli-English Dictionary sweet note J VI.591 (of the deer in the forest); VvA 219 (karavīka ruta°). -bhāṇaka sweetvoiced, speaking sweetly J II.150= DhA I.144; f. bhāṇikā J VI.418, 420. -bhāṇin id. J II.150. Mañjuka {Manjuka} (adj.) [mañju+ka] sweet voiced Vin I.249; J II.350; III.266; VI.412, 496. Mañjūsaka {Manjusaka} (-rukkha) [fr. maðjūsa] N. of a celestial tree, famed for its fragrancy Vv 386; SnA 52, 66, 95, 98; VvA 175. Mañjūsā {Manjusa} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maðjūṣā] a casket; used for keeping important documents in J II.36 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ maðjūsāya nikkhipāpesi); IV.335 (suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ sāra-maðjūsāyaṃ ṭhapetvā kālam akāsi). Mañjeṭṭha {Manjettha} (adj.) [cp. *Sk. mañjiṣṭhā Indian madder] light (bright) red, crimson, usually enumd in set of 5 principal colours with nīla, pīta, lohitaka, odāta; e. g. at Vin I.25; S II.101 (f. mañjeṭṭhā); Vv 221 (Hardy in T. reads maðjaṭṭha, as twice at VvA 111, with vv. ll. °jiṭṭha & °jeṭṭha, cp. Corrections & Addns on p. 372); Miln 61. Mañjeṭṭhaka {Manjetthaka} (adj.) [fr. mañjeṭṭha, after lohita+ka] crimson, bright red, fig. shining Vv 391 (cp. defn at VvA 177: like the tree Vitex negundo, sindhavāra, or the colour of the Kaṇavīra-bud; same defn at DhsA 317, with Sinduvāra for Sindha°); usually in sequence nīla, pīta, maðjeṭṭhaka, lohitaka, odāta as the 5 fundamental colours: M I.509 (has °eṭṭhika in T. but v. l. °eṭṭhaka); J VI.185; Dhs 617. - f. mañjeṭṭhikā a disease of sugar cane Vin II.256. Mañjeṭṭhī {Manjetthi} (f.) [=Sk. mañjiṣṭhā] Bengal madder DA I.85. Maññati {Mannati} [man, Vedic manyate & manute, Av. mainyeite; Idg. *men, cp. Gr. me/nos mood, anger=Sk. manah mind; me/mona to think of, wish to, Lat. memini to think of, mens>mind, meneo; Goth. munan to think, muns opinion; Oisl. man, Ags. mon; Ohg. minna love, Ags, myne intention. Dhtp 427: man=ðāṇe, 524= bodhane] 1. to think, to be of opinion, to imagine, to deem Sn 199 (sīsaṃ . . . subhato naṃ maððati bālo), 588 (yena yena hi maððanti, tato taṃ hoti aððathā); J II.258 (maððāmi ciraṃ carissati: I imagine he will have to wander a long time). - With (double) acc.: to take for, to consider as; na taṃ maððāmi mānusiṃ I deem you are not human Pv II.41; yassa dāni kālaṃ maññati for this now may he think it time (in a phrase of departure), let him do what he thinks fit, we wait the Buddha's pleasure, i. e. let it be time to go [so also BSk. manyate kālaṃ, e. g. Divy 50, 64 etc.] D I.189. - Esp. in phrase taṃ kiṃ maññasi (maññatha 2. pl.) what do you think of this? (the foll.), what is your opinion about this? D I.60; S III.104 & passim. - Pot. 1st sg. maññeyyaṃ I should think PvA 40; 3rd sg. maññeyya S III.103, and maññe Sn 206. The short form 1st sg. maññe is used like an adv. as affirmative particle & is inserted without influencing the grammatical or syntactical construction of the sentence; meaning: methinks, for certain, surely, indeed, I guess, presumably. E. g. D I.137 (patapati m. paccatthike yasasā); S I.181 (m. 'haṃ); IV.289 (paveliyamānena m. kāyena); J II.275; Miln 21; Vism 90, 92 (mato me m. putto); DhA I.107; II.51; PvA 40 (m. goṇo samuṭṭhahe), 65 (tasmā m. sumuttā). -na maññe surely not DhA II.84; PvA 75 (n. m. puððavā rājā). - 2. to know, to be convinced, to be sure Sn 840 (=jānāti Nd1 192), 1049, 1142; Nd2 491 (=jānāti); DhA I.29 (maððāmi tuvaṃ marissasi). - 3. to imagine, to be proud (of), to be conceited, to boast Sn 382 (ppr. maððamāna), 806, 813, 855 (maððate); J III.530 (aor. maññi 'haṃ, perhaps maññe 'haṃ? C. explns by maððāmi). - pp. mata. - Note. Another Present form is munāti (q. v.), of which the pp. is muta. Pāli Text Society 1169 Pāli-English Dictionary Maññanā {Mannana} (f.) [fr. man] conceit Nd1 124 (taṇhā°, diṭṭhi°, māna°, kilesa° etc.); Dhs 1116 1233; Nett 24; Vism 265 (for maðcanā?). Maññita {Mannita} (nt.) [pp. of maððati] illusion, imagination M I.486. Nine maððitāni (the same list is applied to the phanditāni, the papaðcitāni & sankhatāni) at Vbh 390: asmi, ayam aham asmi, bhavissaṃ, na bhavissaṃ, rūpī bhavissaṃ, arūpī bh., saððī bh., asaððī bh., nevasaððīnāsaððī-bh. Maññitatta {Mannitatta} (nt.) [fr. maññita] self-conceit, pride Dhs 1116; DhsA 372. Maṭaja {Mataja} (nt.) [doubtful] a certain weapon M I.281 (°ṃ nāma āvudhajātaṃ; Neumann trsls "Mordwaffe"). Maṭāhaka {Matahaka} (adj.) [doubtful spelling & meaning] short (?) Vin II.138 (ati°=atikhuddaka C.). Maṭṭa & Maṭṭha {Matta} {Mattha} [pp. of mṛj, see majjati2] wiped, polished, clean, pure. - (a) maṭṭa: D II.133 (yugaṃ maṭṭaṃ dhāraṇīyaṃ: "pair of robes of burnished cloth of gold and ready for wear" trsl.); Vism 258 (v. l. maṭṭha). Cp. sam.° - (b) maṭṭha: Vv 8417 (su°); Miln 248; DhA I.25 (°kuṇḍalī having burnished earrings); VvA 6 (°vattha). Cp. vi°. -sāṭaka a tunic of fine cloth J I.304; II.274; III.498; Vism 284 (ṭṭh). Maṇi {Mani} [cp. Vedic maṇi. The connection with Lat. monile (pendant), proposed by Fick & Grassmann, is doubted by Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. monile, where see other suggestions. For further characterisation of maṇi cp. Zimmer, Altindisches Leben pp. 53, 263] 1. a gem, jewel. At several places one may interpret as "crystal." - D I.7 (as ornament); Dh 161; J VI.265 (agghiya, precious). In simile at D I.76 (maṇi veḷuriyo). On maṇi in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. -udaka-pasādaka maṇi a precious stone (crystal?) having the property of making water clear Miln 35 (cp. below Vism 366 passage); cintā° a "thought-jewel," magic stone (crystal?) J III.504; VvA 32; cūḷā° a jewelled crest or diadem, the crown-jewel J V.441 sq.; jāti° a genuine precious stone J II.417; Vism 216 (in comparison); tārā° (-vitāna) (canopy) of jewelled stars Vism 76; nīla° a dark blue jewel J II.112; IV.140; DhA III.254. The passage "amaṇiṃ udakaṃ maṇiṃ katvā" at Vism 366 (+asuvaṇṇaṃ leḍḍuṃ suvaṇṇaṃ katvā) refers clearly to meaning "jewel" (that the water is without a jewel or crystal, but is made as clear as crystal; a conjuror's trick, cp. Miln 35). Whether meaning "waterpot" (as given at Abhp 1113 & found in der. maṇika) is referred to here, is not to be decided. - 2. a crystal used as burning-glass Miln 54. -kāra a jeweller Miln 331; DhA II.152. -kuṇḍala a jewelled earring, adj. wearing an (ear) ornament of jewels Vin II.156 (āmutta° adorned with . . .); Vv 208 (id.); 438 (id.); Pv II.951 (id.); Th I.187; Dh 345 (maṇi-kuṇḍalesu=manīsu ca kuṇḍalesu ca maṇicittesu vā kuṇḍalesu, i. e. with gem-studded earrings DhA IV.56). -kuṭṭima at VvA 188 is probably to be read as °kuṇḍala (v. l. °kundima). -khandha "jewelbulk," i. e. a tremendous jewel, large gem, functioning in tales almost like a magic jewel J III.187; V.37 (°vaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ water as clear as a large block of crystal), 183 (°pilandhana). -guhā a jewelled cave, cave of crystal J II.417 (where pigs live); SnA 66 (one of three, viz. suvaṇṇa-guhā, m.°, rajata°. At the entrance of it there grows the Maðjūsaka tree). -canda "the jewelled moon," i. e. with a crest like the (glittering) moon Vv 646 (=maṇi-maya-maṇḍalānuviddha-candamaṇḍala-sadisa maṇi VbA 277). -cchāyā reflection of a jewel J VI.345. -thūṇā, a jewelled pillar, adj. with jewelled pillars Vv 541, 671. -pabbata mountain of gems SnA 358. -pallanka a jewelled pallanquin DhA I.274. -bandha (place for) Pāli Text Society 1170 Pāli-English Dictionary binding the jewel(led) bracelet, the wrist Vism 255=VbhA 238=KhA 50 (°aṭṭhi). -bhadda N. of one of 20 classes of people mentioned Miln 191; trsld by Rh. D. Miln trsl. I.266 by "tumblers." The term occurs also at Nd1 89 & 92. Cp. Sk. Maṇibhadra, N. of a brother of Kuvera & prince of the Yakṣas. -maya made of, consisting of, or caused by jewels Pv II.64; VvA 280; DhA I.29. ratana a precious stone or mineral, which is a gem (jewel); i. e. maṇi as a kind of ratana, of which there are seven Vism 189 (in sim.); Miln 218. -rūpaka a jewelled image DhA I.370; lakkhaṇa fortune-telling from jewels D I.9; SnA 564. -vaṇṇa the colour or appearance of crystal; i. e. as clear as crystal (of water) J II.304 (pasanna+). -sappa a kind of poisonous snake (i. e. a mysterious, magic snake) DA I.197. Maṇika {Manika} [cp. Class. Sk. maṇika] a waterpot M II.39. Usually in cpd. udaka° Vin I.277; M I.354; S IV.316; A III.27; Miln 28; DhA I.79. Whether this is an original meaning of the word remains doubtful; the connection with maṇi jewel must have been prevalent at one time. Maṇīkā {Manika} (f.) [f. of maṇika, adj. fr. maṇi] N. of a charm, the Jewel-charm, by means of which one can read other people's minds D I.214 (m. iddhi-vijjā), cp. Dial. I.278, n. 3.). Maṇila {Manila} [cp. *Sk. maṇila dewlap?] a kind of tree Vism 313. Maṇḍa {Manda} [later Sk. maṇḍa, perhaps dial. from *mranda, cp. Sk. vi-mradati to soften. Attempts at etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. mollis. Cp. also mattikā] the top part, best part of milk or butter, etc. i. e. cream, scum; fig. essence of, the pick of, finest part of anything. parisā° the cream of a gathering, the pick of the congregation, excellent congregation A I.72 (or for °maṇḍala?); bodhi° essence of enlightenment, highest state of enlightenment; in later literature objectively "the best place of enlightenment, the Throne of Enlightenment or of the Buddha" (does it stand for °maṇḍala in this meaning?) J IV.233 (cp. puthavi-maṇḍa ibid. & puthavi-maṇḍala Sn 990); DhA I.86; II.69; IV.72. sappi° "cream of butter," the finest ghee (cp. AvŚ I.1513 sarpimaṇḍa) D I.201; A II.95; Pug 70; Miln 322. -maṇḍaṃ karoti to put into the best condition, to make pleasant SnA 81. -manda at DhsA 100 is to be read baddha (v. l. BB). Cp. Expos. 132n. -khetta best soil, fertile ground Miln 255. -peyya to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the finest quality, first-class S II.20 (°ṃ idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ). Maṇḍaka {Mandaka} [fr. maṇḍa] 1. the cream of the milk, whey, in dadhi° whey S II.111. - 2. the scum of stagnant water, i. e. anything that floats on the surface & dirties the water, waterweeds, moss etc. J II.304 (gloss sevāla). Maṇḍana {Mandana} (nt.) [fr. maṇḍ] ornament, adornment, finery D I.5, 7; J VI.64; Pug 21, 58; Vbh 351; VbhA 477; Dhtm 13. See under mada. -ānuyoga practice of ornamenting, fondness of finery Vin I.190. -jātika of an ornament (-loving) nature, fond of dressing D I.80=Vin II.255=M II.19, 32. Maṇḍapa {Mandapa} [cp. late Sk. maṇḍapa] a temporary shed or hall erected on special or festive occasions, an awning, tent Vin I.125; Vism 96, 300 (dhamma-savaṇa°), 339 sq. (in simile); DhA I.112; II.45; III.206 (°kāraka); PvA 74, 171, 194; VvA 173. Maṇḍala {Mandala} [cp. Vedic maṇḍala] 1. circle D I.134 (paṭhavi°, cp. puthavi° Sn 990); Vism 143 (°ṃ karoti to draw a circle, in simile), 174 (tipu° & rajata° lead- & silver circle, in kasiṇa practice); VvA 147 (of a fan=tālapattehi kata°-vījanī). - 2. the disk of the sun or moon; suriya° Pāli Text Society 1171 Pāli-English Dictionary VvA 224, 271 (divasa-kara°); canda° Vism 174; PvA 65. - 3. a round, flat surface, e. g. jānu° the disk of the knee, i. e. the knee PvA 179; naḷāta° the (whole of the) forehead D I.106; Sn p. 108. 4. an enclosed part of space in which something happens, a circus ring; e. g. M I.446 (circus, race-ring); assa° horse-circus, raceground, Vism 308; āpāna° drinking circle, i. e. hall; kīḷa° play-circle, i. e. games J VI.332, 333; DhA III.146; keḷi° dice board (?) J I.379; gā° Th I.1143, cp. trs. ib. n. 3; go° ox-round Sn 301; jūta° dicing table J I.293; yuddha° fightingring Vism 190; ranga° play-house VvA 139; vāta° tornado J I.73. - 5. anything comprised within certain limits or boundaries, a group J V.418 (chāpa° litter of young animals). - 6. border as part of a bhikkhu's dress, hem, gusset Vin I.287; II.177. -agga [cp. Sk. maṇḍal'āgra Halāyudha 2, 317 at Aufrecht p. 301] a circular sword or sabre Miln 339. -māla (sometimes māḷa) a circular hall with a peaked roof, a pavilion D I.2, 50 (ḷ); Miln 16 (ḷ); Sn p. 104; SnA 132 (Npl.); VvA 175. Maṇḍalika {Mandalika} (adj.-n.) [fr. maṇḍala, cp. maṇḍalaka-rājā "the king of a small country" Mvyut 94] a district officer, king's deputy Vin III.47 f. maṇḍalikā=maṇḍala 4, i. e. circus, ring, round, in assa° race court Vin III.6. Maṇḍalin {Mandalin} (adj.) [fr. maṇḍala] 1. circular Th 1, 863 (maṇḍali-pākāra). - 2. having a disk, orbed (of the sun) S I.51=VvA 116. Maṇḍita {Mandita} [pp. of maṇḍeti] adorned, embellished, dressed up Sdhp 244, 540. In cpd. °pasādhita beautifully adorned at J I.489; II.48; VI.219. - Cp. abhi°. Maṇḍūka {Manduka} [Vedic maṇḍūka] a frog Vv 512; J IV.247; V.307; VI.164; KhA 46; VvA 217, 218; Sdhp 292. f. mandūkī J I.341. - Mandūka is the name of an angel (devaputta) at Vism 208. chāpī a young (female) frog J VI.192. -bhakkha eating frogs, frog eater (i. e. a snake) J III.16. Maṇḍeti {Mandeti} [maṇḍ to adorn, related to Lat. mundus world, cp. in meaning Gr. ko/smos=ornament Dhtp 103 bhūsane, 566: bhūsāyaṃ] to adorn, embellish, beautify J III.138; DhA II.86. - pp. maṇḍita. Mata1 {Mata} [pp. of maññati] thought, understood, considered (as=-°), only late in use Vbh 2 (hīna° paṇīta°, doubtful reading); Sdhp 55; Mhvs 25, 55 (tassā matena according to her opinion); 25, 110 (pasu-samā matā, pl. considered like beasts). Cp. sam°. - Note. Does matasāyika at Th 1, 501 (=Miln 367) belong under this mata? Then mata would have to be taken as nt. meaning "thought, thinking," but the phrase is not without objection both semantically & syntactically. Mrs. Rh. D. (Brethren, p. 240) trsls "nesting-place of thought." Mata2 {Mata} [pp. of marati, mṛ] dead M I.88 (ekāha° dead one day); III.159 (matam eyya would go to die); Sn 200, 440; J V.480. Neg. amata see separate article. - Note. mata at PvA 110 is to be corrected into cuta. -kicca duty towards the dead, rites for the dead PvA 274. Mataka {Mataka} [fr. mata2] dead, one who is dead DhA II.274. -ākāra condition of one who is dead J I.164 (°ṃ dassati pretends to be dead). -bhatta a meal for the dead, food offered to the manes J IV.151; DhA I.326 (=petakicca p. 328); III.25. Mati {Mati} (f.) [Vedic mati, fr. man: cp. Av. maitiš, Lat. mens, mentem (cp. E. mental); Goth. gamunds, gaminpi, Ohg. gi-munt, E. mind] mind, opinion, thought; thinking of, hankering after, Pāli Text Society 1172 Pāli-English Dictionary love or wish for Vin III.138 (purisa° thought of a man); Mhvs 3, 42 (padīpa lamp of knowledge); 15, 214 (amala° pure-minded); PvA 151 (kāma+). -su° (adj.) wise, clever Mhvs 15, 214; opp. du° (adj.) foolish J III.83 (=duppañña C.); Pv I.82 (=nippañña PvA 40); Sdhp 292. Matikata {Matikata} (adj.) [cp. Sk. matī-kṛta, fr. matya, nt., harrow =Lat. mateola, Ohg. medela plough] in su° wellharrowed (field) A I.229, 239 (khetta). Matimant {Matimant} (adj.) [mati+mant] sensible, intelligent, wise, metri causā as matīmā (fr. matimanto, pl.) at Sn 881 (=matimā paṇḍitā Nd1 289). Matta1 {Matta} (-°) (adj.) [i. e. mattā used as adj.] "by measure," measured, as far as the measure goes, i. e. - (1) consisting of, measuring (with numerals or similar expressions): appamatto kali Sn 659; paðcamattā sata 500 DA I.35; saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā SnA 510; māsamattaṃ PvA 55; ekādasa° ib. 20; dvādasa° 42; satta° 47; tiṃsamattehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ 53. - (2) (negative) as much as, i. e. only, a mere, even as little as, the mere fact (of), not even (one), not any: aṇumattena pi puññena Sn 431; kaṭacchumattaṃ (not) even a spoonful Miln 8; ekapaṇṇa° PvA 115; citta °ṃ pi (not) even as much as one thought ib. 3; nāma° a mere name Miln 25; phandana °ṃ not even one throb J VI.7; phandita° the mere fact of . . . M II.24, bindu° only one drop PvA 100; rodita° M II.24. - (3) (positive) as much as, so much, some, enough (of); vibhava° riches enough J V.40; kā pi assāsa-mattā laddhā found some relief? PvA 104 (may be=mattā f.). - (4) like, just as what is called, one may say (often untranslateable): sita°-kāraṇā just because he smiled VvA 68; bhesajja-mattā pītā I have taken medicine D I.205 (=mattā f.?) okāsa -°ṃ (nt.) permission Sn p, 94; putta° like children A II.124; maraṇa° (almost) dead M I.86; attano nattumatte vandanto Dha IV.178. f. mattī (=mattin?) see mātu°. - (5) as adv. (usually in oblique cases): even at, as soon as, because of, often with other particles, like api, eva, pi, yeva: vuttamatte eva as soon as said DhA I.330; cintitamatte at the mere thought DhA I.326; naṃ jātamattaṃ yeva as soon as he was born PvA 195; anumodana-mattena because of being pleased PvA 121; upanītamattam eva as soon as it was bought PvA 192; nimujjana-matte yeva as soon as she ducked her head under PvA 47. -na mattena . . . eva not only . . . but even PvA 18 (n. m. nipphalā, attano dānaphalassa bhāgino eva honti). Matta2 {Matta} [pp. of madati] intoxicated (with), full of joy about (-°), proud of, conceited Sn 889 (mānena m.); J IV.4 (vedanā°, full of pain, perhaps better with v. l. °patta for °matta); VvA 158 (hatthi matto elephant in rut); DhA IV.24 (id.); PvA 47 (surā°), 86 (māna-mada°), 280 (bhogamada°). -kāsinī see matthak'āsinī. Mattaka {Mattaka} (adj.) [fr. matta1] 1. of the size of Sdhp 238 (pāṇi°). - 2. only as much as, mere D I.12 (appa°, ora°, sīla°); J IV.228 (mana°); DhA IV.178 (pitumattakaṃ gahetvā). Mattatta {Mattatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. matta] (the fact of) consisting of, or being only . . . PvA 199 (maṃsa-pesi°). Mattā {Matta} (f.) [Vedic mātrā, of mā] measure, quantity, right measure, moderation Sn 971 (mattaṃ so jaððā); Dh I.35 (mattā ti pamāṇaṃ vuccati). - Abl. mattaso in °kārin doing in moderation, doing moderately Pug 37 (=pamānena padesa-mattam eva karontī ti). - In cpds. shortened to matta°. -aṭṭhiya (mattaṭṭhiya=°atthika) desirous of moderation, moderate Th 1, 922. -ññu knowing the right measure, moderate, temperate (bhojane or bhojanamhi in eating) A II.40; Sn 338; Pug 25; Dh 8. Cp. jāgariyā. -ððutā moderation (in eating) D III.213; Nd1 483; Dh Pāli Text Society 1173 Pāli-English Dictionary 185; Pug 25; Vbh 249, 360; Dhs 1348; DhA II.238. -sukha (metri causā: mattā-sukha) measured happiness, i. e. small happiness Dh 290 (cp. DhA III.449). Matti {Matti} (-sambhava) [for *māti°=mātu°=*mātṛ, after pitti°=pitu°=*pitṛ] born (from a mother) Sn 620 (=mātari sambhūta SnA 466)=Dh 396 (=mātu santike udarasmiṃ sambhūta DhA IV.158). Mattika {Mattika} (adj.) (°-) [fr. mattikā] made of clay, clay-; only in cpds.: -kuṇḍala clay earring S I.79 (v. l. mattikā°). -bhājana clay or earthenware vessel Sn 577; Vism 231 (in comparison); DhA I.130. -vāka clay fibre DhsA 321 (v. l. °takka, perhaps gloss=takku spindle, see takka1). Mattikā {Mattika} (f.) [cp. Vedic mṛttikā, der. fr. Vedic mṛt (mṛd) soil, earth, clay; with P. maṇḍa, Sk, vimradati. Gr. bladaro/s soft, Osil. mylsna dust, Goth. mulda, Ags. molde (E. mould, mole=mouldwarp), to same root mṛd as in Sk. mṛdu=Lat. mollis soft, Gr. a)maldu/nw to weaken, Sk. mardati & mṛdnāti to crush, powder, Caus. mardayati; also in cognate °mḷd as appearing in Gr. me/ldw to melt=Ags meltan, Ohg. smëlzan] 1. clay J VI.372; Mhvs 29, 5 sq. tamba° red clay DhA IV.106; PvA 191. mattikā pl. kinds of clay (used in cosmetics, like Fuller's earth) J V.89 (nānā-cunṇāni+ mattikā; see also cuṇṇa). - 2. loam, mud M III.94 (alla° fresh loam or mud); Vism 123 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā); KhA 59 (paṇḍu); VvA 65; PvA 216 (aruṇa-vaṇṇā). -thāla bowl of clay DhA IV.67. -piṇḍa a lump of clay or loam DA I.289; same trope at PvA 175. Matteyya & Metteyya {Matteyya} {Metteyya} (adj.) [fr. mātā, *mātreyya> *matteyya] reverential towards one's mother, mother loving D III.74; Pv II.718 (=mātu hita PvA 104; v. l. mett°). Spelling at D III.72 is metteyya. It is difficult to decide about correct spelling, as metteyya is no doubt influenced by the foll. petteyya, with which it is always combined. Matteyyatā {Matteyyata} (& mett°) (f.) [abstr. fr. matteyya] filial love towards one's mother; always combd with petteyyatā D III.145 (v. l. mett°); Nd2 294 (mett°), Dh 332; DhA IV.33. Mattha {Mattha} [cp. Vedic masta(ka) skull, head, Vedic mastiṣka brains; perhaps to Lat. mentum chin, Cymr. mant jawbone; indirectly also to Lat. mons mountain] the head, etc. Only in cpd. mattha-lunga [cp. Sk. mastulunga] the brain Vin I.274; Sn 199; Kh III.; J I.493; KhA 60; Vism 260 (in detail) 264, 359; VbhA 63, 243, 249; DhA II.68; PvA 78, 80. - See also matthaka. Matthaka {Matthaka} [cp. mattha] the head, fig. top, summit J III.206 =IV.4; IV.173, 457; V.478; DA I.226 (pabbata°); Pv IV.163; DhA I.184. matthaka-matthakena (from end to end) J I,202; III.304. Loc. matthake as adv. (1) at the head DhA I.109; (2) at the distance of (-°) DhA I.367; (3) on top of (-°) J V.163 (vammīka°); Mhvs 23, 80 (sīsa°); Yugandhara° Miln 6; DhA II.3 (uddhana°). -āsin sitting on top (of the mountain) J VI.497 (=pabbata-matthake nisinna C.; gloss matta-kāsin i. e. wildly in love, expld by kāma-mada-matta). The reading is not clear. -tela oil for the head KhA 64 (=muddhani tela Vism 262). Mathati {Mathati} [Vedic math, manth to twirl, shake about, stir etc.; cp. Lat. mamphur part of the lathe=Ger. mandel ("mangle"), E. mandrel; Lith. mentùris churning stick, Gr. mo/qos tumult mo/qoura shaft of rudder. - The Dhtp (126) gives both roots (math & manth) and expls by "viḷolana," as does Dhtm (183) by "viḷoṭana"] to churn, to shake, disturb, upset. Only in Caus. matheti to agitate, crush, harass, upset (cittaṃ) S IV.210; Sn 50 (=tāseti hāpeti Nd2 492); Pāli Text Society 1174 Pāli-English Dictionary Pv IV.71 (kammānaṃ vipāko mathaye manaṃ; C 264: abhibhaveyya); Miln 385 (vāyu pādape mathayati; . . . kilesā mathayitabbā). - pp. mathita. See also abhimatthati (sic) & nimmatheti. Mathana {Mathana} (adj. nt.) [fr. math] shaking up, crushing, harassing, confusing Miln 21 (+maddana); DhA I.312; PvA 265. Mathita {Mathita} [pp. of matheti] 1. (churned) buttermilk Vin II.301 (amathita-kappa). - 2. upset, mentally unbalanced state, disturbance of mind through passion, conceit, etc. M I.486 (maññita+). Neumann trsls "Vermutung" i. e. speculation, guessing (v. l. matth°). Mada {Mada} [Vedic mada, mad (see majjati), Idg. *mad, as in Av. mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated orig. meaning "drip, be full of liquid or fat"; cp. Gr. mada/w dissolve, masto/s breast (mazo/s »Amazone), Lat. madeo to be wet, Ohg. mast fattening, Sk. meda s, Ohg. muos=gemüse, etc. Perhaps connected with *med in Lat. medeor to heal. For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. madeo. - The Dhtp (412) & Dhtm (642) explain mad by "ummāde" Dhtm 210 also by "muda, mada=santose"] 1. intoxication, sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc.) M I.355=A II.40= Nd1 496=Nd2 540=Pug 21=Dhs 1346, 1348. The commentator's explns bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna-mada & purisa-mada (at DhsA 403; Vism 293), or muṭṭhika-mall' ādayo viya madatthaṃ bala-mada-nimittaṃ porisa-mada-nimittað cā ti vuttaṃ (at Vism 31). Sn 218 (mada-pamāda on which passage SnA 273 comments on mada with jāti-mad'ādi-bhedā madā). - 2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Miln 289 (māna, m., pamāda); Vbh 345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti°, gotta°, ārogya°, yobbana°, jīvita-mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaṃ māno . . . uṇṇati . . . dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd2 505 & Dhs 1116); sometimes more def. characterised with phrase mada-matta elated with the pride or intoxication of . . . (-°). e. g. A I.147 (yobbana°, ārogya°, jīvita°); PvA 86 (māna°), 280 (bhoga°). - The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada's, viz. ārogyamada the pride of health, yobbana° of youth, jīvita° of life: D III.220; A I.146. -nimmadana "disintoxication from intoxication," freedom from pride or conceit A II.34; Bu I.81; Vism 293. Madana {Madana} (nt.) [fr. mad] lit. making drunk, intoxication Nd2 540 C. (in formula davāya madāya madanāya, instead of maṇḍanāya: see under mada 1); in cpd. °yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas J I.204. - Cp. nimmadana. Madanīya {Madaniya} (adj. nt.) [orig. grd. of madati] 1. intoxicating D II.185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.). - 2. intoxication VvA 73. Madirā {Madira} (f.) [of adj. Vedic madira intoxicating] intoxicating drink, spirit J V.425; DhsA 48. Madda {Madda} 1. [fr. mṛd, Sk. marda] crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin II.151; J III.226 (piṭṭhi°). - 2. [dialectical, cp. Sk. madra] N. of a country & its inhabitants, in °raṭṭha SnA 68 sq.; °rājakula KhA 73. -viṇā a sort of girdle Vin II.136. Maddati {Maddati} [cp. Vedic mṛd to crush: see etym. under mattikā] 1. to tread on, trample on (acc.), crush J III.245, 372 (ppr. maddamāna); DhA II.66. - 2. to defeat, destroy Sn 770 (=abhibhavati Nd1 12); Nd2 85 (madditvā=abhibhuyya); SnA 450; Mhvs 1, 41. - fig. to crush a Pāli Text Society 1175 Pāli-English Dictionary heresy: vādaṃ m. Mhvs 36, 41. - 3. to neglect (an advice), spurn J III.211 (ovādaṃ). - 4. to mix up, knead, jumble together DhA II.155. - 5. to thresh J I.215. - 6. to break down, upset J I.500 (vatiṃ, a fence). - 7. to draw together (a net) J I.208. - Caus. I. maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mhvs 29. 4 (aor. maddayi). - Caus. II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin II.180. - pp. maddita. See also pari°. Maddana {Maddana} (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. mṛd] 1. crushing, grinding, destroying J IV.26; Miln 21 (adj.,+mathana); Sdhp 449; Dhtp 156. - 2. threshing Miln 360. - See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana. Maddarī {Maddari} (f.) [?] a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka° A I.188. Maddava {Maddava} (adj. nt.) [fr. mṛdu, cp. Epic Sk. mārdava] 1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs 1340; Vbh 359; Miln 229 (cittaṃ mudukaṃ m. siniddhaṃ), 313 (mudu°), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu). - 2. (fr. madda) as Np. name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda. - 3. withered Dh 377 (=milāta DhA IV.112). - nt. maddavaṃ mildness, softness, gentleness Sn 250 (ajjava+), 292 (id.); J III.274 (as one of the 10 rāja-dhammā); V.347 (=mettacittaṃ); DhsA 151. See also sūkara°. Maddavatā {Maddavata} (f.) [abstr. fr. maddava] gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs 44, 1340; DhsA 151. Maddālaka {Maddalaka} [etym.?] a kind of bird J VI.538. Maddita {Maddita} [pp. of maddeti, see maddati] 1. kneaded, mixed, in su° Vism 124. - 2. crushed, defeated, in su° Miln 284. - Cp. pa°, pari°. Maddin {Maddin} (adj.) [fr. mṛd, cp. Sk. mardin=mardana] crushing, destroying Sdhp 218. Cp. pamaddin. Maddhita {Maddhita} [of mṛdh] see pari°. Madhu [cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. me/qu wine, Lith. medùs honey, midùs wine, Ohg. metu=Ger. met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice: see under madati] honey J I.157 sq.; IV.117; Dh 69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mhvs 5, 53; DhsA 330; DhA II.197 (alla° fresh honey). - pl. madhūni Mhvs 5, 31. - The Abhp (533) also gives "wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia" as meaning. - On madhu in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. -atthika (madh°) at J III.493 is with v. l. to be read madhu-tthika (q. v. below). The proposal of Kern's (Toev. s. v.) to read madh'aṭṭhika "with sweet kernels" cannot be accepted. The C. explns rightly by "madhura-phalesu pakkhitta-madhu viya, madhura-phalo hutvā." -atthika (madhu°) desirous of honey, seeking honey J IV.205; Mhvs 5, 50. -āpaṇa (madhv°) honey shop Mhvs 5, 52. -āsava (madhv°) honey extract, wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia VvA 73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors). -kara "honey-maker," bee J IV.265; Vism 136 (in simile); DhA I.374. gaṇḍa honey-comb Mhvs 22, 42; 34, 52. -tthika [madhu+thika, which latter stands for thīya, fr. styā to congeal, drip; see thika, thīna, thīya and theva] dripping with honey, full of honey J III.493 (so read for madh-atthika); VI.529 (=madhuṃ paggharanto C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. unnecessarily reads as °atthika which he takes=°aṭṭhika. -da giving honey, liberal Mhvs 5, 60 {Madhu} Pāli Text Society 1176 Pāli-English Dictionary (Asoka). -paṭala honey-comb J I.262; DhA I.59; III.323. -piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honeyfood, a meal with honey Vin I.4; M I.114. -pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey S I.212. -(b)bata "courting honey," a bee Dāvs III.65. -bindu a drop of honey Vism 531; VbhA 146 (°giddha, in comparison). -makkhitā smeared with honey J I.158. -madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey J VI.529. -mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha ("honeyurine," diabetes?) Vin IV.8. -laṭṭhikā liquorice (no ref.?); cp. Laṭṭhi-madhukavana J I.68. -lāja sweet corn J IV.214, 281. -vāṇija honey seller Mhvs 5, 49. -ssava flowing with honey Pv II.911. Madhuka {Madhuka} (adj. n.) [fr. madhu] connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin I.246; J V.324, 405; VI.529; Miln 165. - 2. the fruit of that tree J IV.434. - 3. (adj.) (-°) full of honey J VI.529 (madhu° containing honey). - 4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of (-°) J IV.117 (surā-meraya°). -aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism 353=KhA 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal'aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails). -puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin I.246 (°rasa liquorice juice); J I.430. Madhukā {Madhuka} (f.) [fr. madhuka] honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mhvs 5, 52. Madhura {Madhura} (adj.) [fr. madhu] 1. sweet Sn 50; J III.493; V.324; Pv II.67; PvA 119, 147. - 2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor-like, intoxicating J IV.117. - 3. (nt.) sweetness, sweet drink Dh 363; J I.271 (catu° the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison); Dhs 629; DhsA 320. - 4. (nt.) flattery, praise SnA 287 (opp. avaṇṇa). -rasa sweet (i. e. honey-) juice, sweet liquor DhA II.50; PvA 119. -ssara sweet-sounding VvA 57; PvA 151; Mhvs 5, 32. Madhuraka {Madhuraka} (adj.) [fr. madhura, cp. similarly madhuka> madhu] full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka-jātokāyo viya "like an intoxicated body," i. e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been "become languid or weak" ("erschlafft" Ger.). Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: "Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen, " hardly justifiable. - D II.99; M I.334; S III.106, A III.69. The description refers to a state of swooning, like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rh. D. (Dial. II.107) translates "my body became weak as a creeper," hardly correct. Taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301): "wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel." F. L. Woodward follows me in discarding trsln "creeper" and assuming one like "intoxicated" (so also UdA, 246): see his note on S III.106 trsln (K.S. III.90). Madhuratā {Madhurata} (f.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness J I.68. Madhuratta {Madhuratta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness Mhvs 2, 13. Manaṃ {Manam} (adv.) [cp. Class. Sk. manāk, "a little (of something)" prob. derived from Vedic manā f. a. gold weight =Gr. mna_] "by a certain weight," i. e. a little, somewhat, almost, wellnigh, nearly. Combd with vata in exclamation: M II.123 (m. v. bho anassāma); DhA III.147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man' amhi (with pp.). "I nearly was so & so," e. g. Vin I.109 (vuḷho); J I.405 (upakūḷito); III.435 (matā), 531 (mārāpito). Cp. BSk. manāsmi khāditā MVastu II.450. Manatā {Manata} (f.) [abstr. fr. mano] mentality DhsA 143 (in expln of attamanatā). Pāli Text Society 1177 Pāli-English Dictionary Manasa {Manasa} (adj.) [the -° form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either °mana or °mānasa] having a mind, with such & such a mind Sn 942 (nibbāna° "a nibbāna mind," one who is intent upon N., cp. expln at SnA 567); Pv I.66 (paduṭṭha-manasā f., maybe °mānasā; but PvA 34 explns "paduṭṭha-cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā). See also adhimanasa under adhimana. Manassa {Manassa} (nt.) [*manasyaṃ, abstr. der. fr. mana(s)] of a mind, only in cpds. do° & so° (q. v.). Manāti [cp. Sk. mṛṇāti, mṛ2] to crush, destroy; only in Commentator's fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at DhsA 218 (veraṃ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v.) and KhA 24 (veraṃ maṇātī ti v., veraṃ pajahati vinodeti etc.). {Manati} Manāpa {Manapa} (adj.) [cp. BSk. manāpa] pleasing, pleasant, charming Sn 22, 759; Dh 339 (°ssavana); VvA 71; PvA 3, 9. Often in combn piya manāpa, e. g. D II.19; III.167; J II.155; IV.132. Opp. a°, e. g. Pug 32. Manāpika {Manapika} =manāpa, Vbh 380; Miln 362. Manuja {Manuja} [manu+ja, i. e. sprung from Manu, cp. etym. of manussa s. v.] human being; man A IV.159; Sn 458, 661, 1043 sq.; Dh 306, 334. Nd2 496 (explns as "manussa" & "satta"). -ādhipa lord of men Mhvs 19, 32. -inda king of men, great king Sn 553; J VI.98. Manuñña (adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. manojña] pleasing, delightful, beautiful Vv 8417 (=manorama VvA 340); J I.207; II.331; Pv II.122; IV.121; Miln 175, 398; VvA 11, 36; PvA 251; adv. °ṃ pleasantly, delightfully J IV.252. - Opp. a° unpleasant J VI.207. {Manunna} Manute {Manute} [Med. form of maññati] to think, discern, understand DhsA 123. Manussa {Manussa} [fr. manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etym. with Goth. manna=man] a human being, man. The popular etym. connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e. g. KhA 123: "Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti „mana-ussannatāya manussa‟; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā, Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā." Similarly with the other view of connecting it with "mind" VvA 18: "manassa ussannatāya manussā" etc. Cp. also VvA 23, where manussa-nerayika, °peta, °tiracchāna are distinguished. - Sn 75, 307, 333 sq., 611 sq.; Dh 85, 188, 197 sq., 321; Nd1 97 (as gati), 340, 484 (°phassa of Sn 964); Vism 312; VbhA 455 (var. clans); DhA I.364. -amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost, a spirit; in cpds. "haunted," ilke °kantāra J I.395, °ṭṭhāna Vv 843 (cp. VvA 334 where expld); °sadda DhA I.315. See also separately amanussa. -attabhāva human existence PvA 71, 87, 122. -itthi a human woman PvA 48, 154. -inda lord of men S I.69; Mhvs 19, 33. -khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually appld to Yakkhas) VbhA 451. -deva (a) "god of men," i. e. king Pv II.811; (b) men & gods (?) VvA 321 (Hardy, in note takes it as "gods of men," i. e. brāhmaṇā). -dhamma condition of man, human state VvA 24. See also uttari-manussa dhamma. -bhūta as a human, in human form Pv I.112; II.112. -loka the world of men Sn 683. Manussatta {Manussatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr, manussa] human existence, state of men It 19; Vv 3416; SnA 48, 51; Sdhp 17 sq. Pāli Text Society 1178 Pāli-English Dictionary Manussika {Manussika} (adj.) [fr. manussa] see under a°. Manesikā {Manesika} (f.) [mano+esikā2] "mind-searching," i. e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind-reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus D I.7 (=m. nāma manasā cintita-jānana-kīḷā DA I.86); Vin II.10. Mano , Mana & Manas {Mano} {Mana} {Manas}(nt.) [Vedic manaḥ, see etym. under maññati] I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s-stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp. cetah>ceto) & partly follows the a-declension. The form mano is found throughout in cpds. as mano°, the other mana at the end of cpds. as °mana. From stem manas an adj. manasa is formed and the der. mānasa & manassa (-°). - nom. mano freq.; & manaṃ Dh 96, acc. mano Sn 270, 388; SnA 11, and freq.; also manaṃ Sn 659=A II.3; V.171=Nett 132; Sn 678; Cp I.85; Vism 466; gen. dat. manaso Sn 470, 967; Dh 390 (manaso piya); Pv II.111 (manaso piya=manasā piya PvA 71); instr. manasā Sn 330, 365, 834 (m. cintayanto), 1030; M III.179; Dh 1; Pv II.97 (m. pi cetaye); also manena DhA I.42; DhsA 72; abl. manato S IV.65; DhA I.23; Vism 466; loc. manasmiṃ S IV.65; manamhi Vism 466; also mane DhA I.23, & manasi (see this in compn manasi karoti, below). - II. Meaning: mind, thought D III.96, 102, 206, 226, 244, 269, 281; S I.16, 172; II.94; M III.55; A III.443; V.171; Sn 77, 424, 829, 873; Dh 116, 300; Sdhp 369. - 1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viðnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense-reaction ("perception"), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhist Psychology p. 19) - The rendering with "mind" covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated "thought." As "mind" it embodies the rational faculty of man, which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni: see āyatana 3). These are: (1) cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear) dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viððāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. 140, 163) which recognises the world as a "mundus sensibilis" (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light, or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā, the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1), Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the "empirical. world" (as Geiger, e. g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80-82, pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kvu 126 sq. i. e. the material world), as the world of "things," of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc. - Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic) representation of the world, i. e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti, used of manas, is also used of the 5th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E. expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror-stricken; deeply moved feeling »Lat. palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind "sensing," that manas "senses" (as a refined sense of touch) the "sensibility" (dhamma) Pāli Text Society 1179 Pāli-English Dictionary of the objects, or as Cpd. 183 expresses it "cognizable objects." See also kāya II.; and phassa. 2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man-)āyatana, (man-)indriya and (mano-)dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). Cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought. On mano-dhātu and m-āyatana see also the discourse by S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256-59, with Mrs. Rh. D.'s apt remarks on p. 259. - The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e. g. at M I.295 (commented on at DhsA 72) and S V.217 (mano nesaṃ gocara-visayaṃ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function-spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger, Dhamma 81; as in the Sānkhya: Garbe, Sānkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin I.36; "ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu." - 3. As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated, that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation "heart"), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta2 I., and on rel. to viððāṇa & citta see citta2 IV. 2b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body, cittaṃ iti pi mano iti pi S II.94. So in the triad "thought (i. e. intention) speech and action" manas interchanges with citta: see kāya III. - The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e. g. M III.178 (sucaritaṃ caritvā); Dh 391 (natthi dukkaṭaṃ), cp. Dh 96; santaṃ tassa manaṃ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta: kāyena vācāya uda cetasā S I.93, 102; A I.63. rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena S II.231; IV.112. - It is further combd with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages: "mano" is "cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ hadayaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ, man-āyatanaṃ . . . mano-viððāna-dhātu" (mind sensibility). Thus e. g. at Nd1 3 (for mano), 176 (id.); Nd2 494 (which however leaves out cittaṃ in exegesis of Sn 1142, 1413, but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Sn 1039); Dhs 6 (in defn of citta), 17 (of man'indriyaṃ), 65 (of man-āyatanaṃ), 68 (of mano-viññṇa-dhātu). - The close relation between the two appears further from their combn in the formula of the ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ (wonder of manifestation, i. e. the discovery of other peoples'thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṃ: "so & so is in your mind . . . so & so are your emotions"; D I.213= III.103=A I.170. - At S I.53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaṃ utrastaṃ idaṃ cittaṃ (heart), niccaṃ ubbiggaṃ idaṃ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from J I.36, where the passage runs: sīho cittaṃ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaṃ oloketva vyākāsi . . . At PvA 264 mano (of Pv IV.71) is expld by cittaṃ; pīti mano of Sn 766 (glad of heart) expld at SnA 512 by santuṭṭha-citto; nibbānamanaso of Sn 942 at SnA 567 by nibbāna-ninna-citto. In the phrase yathā-manena "from his heart," i. e. sincerely, voluntarily DhA I.42, mano clearly acts as citta. - 4. Phrases: manaṃ uppādeti to make up one's mind, to resolve DhA II.140 (cp. citt'uppāda); manaṃ karoti: (a) to fix one's mind upon, to give thought to, find pleasure or to delight in (loc.) J IV.223 (rūpe na manaṃ kare=itthirūpe nimittaṃ na gaṇheyyāsi C. Cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense); VI.45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one's mind DhA II.87; manaṃ gaṃhāti to "take the mind," take the fancy, to please, to win approval J IV.132; DhA II.48. - III. °mana: dhammuddhacca-viggahita° A II.157 (read °mano for °manā); sankiliṭṭha-manā narā Th 2, 344; atta° pleased; gedhita° greedy Pv II.82; dum° depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart D II.148; S I.103; Vin I.21; A II.59, 61, 198; Th 2, 484; J I.189; opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv II.948 (=somanassajāta PvA 132); pīti° glad or joyful of heart Sn 766 (expld by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭhamano, attamano etc. at Nd1 3; by santuṭṭha-citto at SnA 512). - IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider, recognise. - 1. (v.) pres. 1st pl. °karoma Vin I.103; imper. 2nd sg. °karohi, often in formula "suṇāhi sādhukaṃ Pāli Text Society 1180 Pāli-English Dictionary m.-k." "harken and pay attention" D I.124, 157, 249; cp. M. I.7; A I.227; pl. 2nd °karotha A I.171; D I.214 (+vitakketha); Pot. °kareyyātha D I.90 (taṃ atthaṃ sādhukaṃ k.); ppr. °karonto DhsA 207; ger. °katvā A II.116 (aṭṭhikatvā+. . . ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv III.25 (a°=anāvajjetvā PvA 181); VvA 87, 92; PvA 62; grd. °kātabba Vism 244, 278; DhsA 205; aor. manas-ākāsi M II.61; 2nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasākattha D I.214; A I.171. Pass. manasi-karīyati Vism 284. - 2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) D III.104, 108 sq., 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); M I.296; S II.3 (cetanā phasso m.); IV.297 (sabba-nimittānaṃ a° inattention to all outward signs of allurement); Nd1 501 (ayoniso); Vbh 320, 325, 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism 241 (paṭikūla°); VbhA 148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras), 251 (paṭikkūla°), 255 (n'ātisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso), 500; DhA II.87 (paṭikkula°); DhsA 133. sammā manasikāraṃ anvāya by careful pondering D I.13, 18≈. As adj. (thoughtful) at ThA 273. - The defn of m. at Vism 466 runs as follows: "kiriyā-kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima-manato visadisaṃ manaṃ karotī ti pi m. Svāyaṃ: ārammaṇa-paṭipādako vīthi-paṭipādako javana-p.° ti ti-ppakāro." - Cpds.: -kusalatā proficiency in attention D III.211; -kosalla id. VbhA 56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism 241 (tenfold), 243 (id., viz. anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisāṇikato etc.); PvA 63 (yoniso°); -vidhāna arrangement of attention VbhA 69, 71; -vidhi rule or form of attention Vism 278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā, sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti). - The composition form of manas is mano°, except before vowels, when man'takes its place (as man-āyatana VbhA 46 sq.). -angaṇa (man°) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58) D III.243, 280 and passim. -āvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. -indriya (man°) mind-faculty, category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) D I.70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṃ etc.) III.226, and passim. -kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī° (vocal action) A I.32, 104; Pug 41; Dhs 981 (where omitted in text). -java [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 6329; PvA 216 (assājāniya). -daṇḍa "mind-punishment" (?) corresponding to kāya° & vacī-daṇḍa, M I.372 sq. (Neumann, trsls "Streich in Gedanken"). duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dh 233; Nd1 386; Pug 60. -dosa blemish of mind A I.112. dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness VbhA 41; DhsA 425, cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (2p. 2); Cpd. 10. -dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129, 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs 457 sq.; Vbh 14, 71, 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488; VbhA 80, 81, 239 (physiological foundation), 405; DhsA 263, 425; KhA 53. -padosa anger in mind, ill-will D III.72; M I.377; Sn 702; J IV.29; Dhs 1060 (cp. DhsA 367: manaṃ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i. e. to set one's heart at anger). -padosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), N. of a class of gods D I.20; VbhA 498, 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (Toev. I.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. -pasāda tranquillity of the mind, devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) DhA I.28. -pubbangama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba2) Dh 1, 2; cp. DhA I.21, 35. -bhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed S III.1; M III.261; Vv 3413 (cp. VvA 152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka); Miln 129. Kern, Toev. I.163 trsls "to be kept in mind with honour." -mattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (adv.) "by mere mind," consisting of mind only, i. e. memorial, as a matter of mind J IV.228. -maya made of mind, consisting of mind, i. e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expld at Vism 405 as "adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m."; at DA I.120 as "jhāna-manena nibbatta"; at DhA I.23 as "manato nipphanna"; at VvA 10 as "bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta." - Dh 1, 2; J VI.265 (manomayaṃ sindhavaṃ abhiruyha); Sdhp 259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, 406. - Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge; human beings or gods may be endowed with this power D I.17 (+pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbanga-paccangī etc.), 77 (id.), 186 (id.); Vin II.185 (Koliya-putto kālaṃ kato aññataraṃ mano-mayaṃ kāyaṃ upapanno); M I.410 (devā rūpino m.); S IV.71; A I.24; III.122, 192; IV.235; V.60. -ratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), Pāli Text Society 1181 Pāli-English Dictionary wish Vism 506 (°vighāta+icchā-vighāta); °ṃ pūreti to fulfil one's wish Mhvs 8, 27 (puṇṇasabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī (f.) "the wish fulfiller" is the name of the Commentary on the Anguttara Nikāya. -rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Sn 50, 337, 1013; Dh 58; Pv II.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mhvs 18, 48; VvA 340. -viððāṇa representative cognition, rationality Vism 489; VbhA 150 (22 fold); DhsA 304, cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (2p. 157); -dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viððāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (=āyatanāni) Dhs 58; Vbh 14, 71, 87, 89, 144, 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (2p. 122) & introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 1232, 184. -viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues II.281n) D II.281; M III.55, 57; J IV.195. -vitakka a thought (of mind) S I.207=Sn 270 (mano is in C. on this passage expld as "kusala-citta" SnA 303). -saðcetan' āhāra "nutriment of representative cogitation" (Dhs. trsl. 31) S II.11, 13, 99; Dhs 72; Vism 341. -satta "with mind attached," N. of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment M I.376. samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya° & vacī°) M II.114; III.45, 49. -silā (cp. Sk. manaḥ-śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e. g. J V.416 (+haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485; DhA IV.113 (id. as cuṇṇa); ThA 70 (Ap. V.20); Mhvs 29, 12; SnA 59 (°piṇḍa in simile); DhA II.43 (°rasa); VvA 288 (°cuṇṇa-pịðjara-vaṇṇa, of ripe mango fruit); PvA 274 (°vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni); -tala a flat rock, platform (=silātala) SnA 93, 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion's roar: J II.219; VI.399; VvA 217; as a district of the Himavant: J VI.432; SnA 358. -hara charming, captivating, beautiful Mhvs 18, 49; N. of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Miln 118, 354. Manta {Manta} [cp. Vedic mantra, fr. mantray] orig. a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan [cp. def. of mant at Dhtp 578 by "gutta-bhāsane"], counsel; hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, esp. the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i. e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists. - 1. with ref. to the Vedas usually in the pl. mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations): D I.96; M II.166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti); Sn 249 (=devā SnA 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā, criticised by Bdhgh as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows: "vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa-mante nāsetvā adhamma-yutte kūṭa-mante ganthetvā" SnA 320), 1000 (with ref. to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018; Dh 241 (holy studies); J II.100; III.28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537. - Sometimes in sg.: mantaṃ parivattenti brahma-cintitaṃ Pv II.613 (=veda PvA 97)=Vv 6316 (=veda VvA 265); - n. pl. also mantāni, meaning "Vedas": Miln 10. - 2 (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine S I.57 (mantā dhīra "firm in doctrine" K.S. thus taking mantā as instr.; it may better be taken as mantar); Sn 1042 (where Nd2 497 expls as paððā etc.); Mhvs 5, 109 (Buddha° the "mantra" of the B.), 147 (id.). - 3. divine utterance, a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Miln 11 (see about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153). At PvA 117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas, while y. is referred to men. - J I.200 (+paritta); III.511 (°ṃ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell); DhA IV.227. There are several special charms mentioned at var. places of the Jātakas, e. g. one called Vedabbha, by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air J I.253 (nakkhatta-yoge laddhe taṃ mantaṃ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato sattaratana-vassaṃ vassati). Others are: paṭhavī-jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) J II.243; sabba-rāva-jānana° (of knowing all sounds, of animals) III.415; nidhiuddharana° (of finding secret treasures) III.116; catukaṇṇa° (four-cornered) VI.392, etc. - 4. advice, counsel, plan, design Vin IV.308 (°ṃ saṃharati to foil a plan); J VI.438. - 5. (adj.) (-°) Pāli Text Society 1182 Pāli-English Dictionary parivattana° a charm that can be said, an effective charm J I.200; bahu° knowing many charms, very tricky DhA II.4; bhinna° one who has neglected an advice J VI.437, 438. ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) J I.167; DhA III.361 (tinnaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū m.-a. brāhmaṇo). -ajjhena study of the Vedas SnA 314. pada=manta 1. D I.104 (=veda-sankhāta m. DA I.273. -pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Sn 997. manta in this sense is by the Cys. always expld by paððā, e. g., Nd2 497 (as mantā f.); DhA IV.93 (id.), SnA 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā). pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Sn 251 (=vedapāragū SnA 293), 690 (=vedānaṃ pāragata SnA 488), 976. -bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Sn 140 (=vedabandhū SnA 192); Nd1 11 (where Nd2 455 in same connection reads mitta° for manta°: see under bandhu). -bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Th II.281; fig. a clever speaker Sn 850 (but Nd1 219 reads manta°; see mantar) Dh 363 (cp. DhA IV.93; paððāya bhaṇana-sīla) Th 1, 2. -yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mhvs 25, 49 ("cunningly planned b." trsl. Geiger; "diplomatic stratagem," Turnour). Mantanaka {Mantanaka} (adj.) [fr. mantanā] plotting J V.437. Mantanā {Mantana} f. (& °ṇā) [fr. mant] counsel, consultation, deliberation, advice, command D I.104; A I.199; Vin V.164; J VI.437, 438; Miln 3 (ṇ); DA I.273. Mantar {Mantar} [n. ag. of mant, cp. Sk. *mantṛ a thinker] a sage, seer, wise man, usually appositionally nom. mantā "as a sage," "like a thinker," a form which looks like a fem. and is mostly expld as such by the Commentaries. Mantā has also erroneously been taken as instr. of manta, or as a so-called ger. of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been expld at "jānitvā." The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators, as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153, 979) it has come down at mantā "wisdom" to Childers. Kern, Toev. s. v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? - S I.57 (+dhīra; trsln "firm in doctrine"); Sn 159 ("in truth," opp. to musā; SnA 204 explns m.=paððā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, expld at SnA 562 by "mantāya"), 1040=1042 (=Nd2 497 mantā vuccati paððā etc.); Vv 636 (expld as jānitvā paððāya paricchinditvā VvA 262). - Besides this form we have a shortened manta (nom.) at Sn 455 (akiñcano+), which is expld at SnA 402 as mantā jānitvā. It is to be noted that for manta-bhāṇin at Sn 850 the Nd1 219 reads mantā and expls customarily by "mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṃ bhāsati." Mantita {Mantita} [pp. of manteti] 1. considered Th 1, 9; Miln 91. - 2. advised, given as counsel J VI.438; DA I.273. Mantin (adj.-n.) [fr. manta] 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel S I.236. - 2. (n.) counsellor, minister J VI.437 (paṇḍita m.). {Mantin} Manteti {Manteti} [cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta-bhāsana, i. e. "secret talk"] to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i. e. 1. to take counsel (with=instr. or saddhiṃ) D I.94, 104 (mantanaṃ manteyya to discuss) 122 (2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho J II.107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126); II.87, 239; Vin IV.308 (mantesuṃ aor.; perhaps "plotted"); Sn p. 107 (=talk privately to); Sn 379; J I.144; VI.525 (mantayitvāna ger.); DA I.263 (imper. mantayatha); PvA 74 (aor. mantayiṃsu). - 2. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion A I.199 (Pot. mantaye); Miln Pāli Text Society 1183 Pāli-English Dictionary 91 (grd. mantayitabba & inf. mantayituṃ). - 3. to announce, advise; pronounce, advise Sn 126; Pv IV.120 (=kathemi kittayāmi PvA 225); SnA 169. - pp. mantita. - Cp. ā°. Mantha {Mantha} [fr. math] a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (=satthu) Vin I.4, [cp. Vedic mantha "Rührtrank"= homeric kukew/n "Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt," Zimmer, Altind. Leben 268]. Manda {Manda} (adj.) [cp. late-Vedic & Epic manda] 1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant, foolish M I.520 (+momuha); Sn 666, 820 (=momūha Nd1 153), 1051 (=mohā avidvā etc. Nd2 498); Dh 325 (=amanasikārā manda-pañña DhA IV.17); J IV.221; Pug 65, 69; KhA 53, 54. - 2. slow, yielding little result, unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) J I.221. - 3. [in this meaning probably=Vedic mandra "pleasant, pleasing," although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as "bashful"] soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. °akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes J III.190; and °locana id. Th 2, 375 (kinnari-manda°=manda-puthu-vilocana ThA 253); Pv I.115 (miga-manda°=migī viya mand' akkhī PvA 57); Vv 6411 (miga-m°=migacchāpikānaṃ viya mudu siniddha-diṭṭhi-nipāta). - 4. In cpd. picu (or puci°) manda the Nimb tree, it means "tree" (?) see picu-manda & puci-manda. - 5. In composition with bhū it assumes the form mandī°, e. g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished J I.228; VbhA 157. -valāhakā a class of fairies or demi-gods D II.259 ("fragile spirits of the clouds" trsl.). Mandaka {Mandaka} [?] according to Kern, Toev. s. v.=*mandra (of sound: deep, bass)+ka; a sort of drum J VI.580. Mandatā {Mandata} (f.)=mandatta Sdhp 19. Mandatta {Mandatta} (nt.) [fr. manda] stupidity M I.520; Pug 69. Mandākinī {Mandakini} (f.) N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enumd at A IV.101; J V.415; Vism 416; SnA 407; DA I.164. (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Ganges.) Mandāmukhi (f.) [dialectical? reading a little doubtful] a coal-pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin I.32 (=aggi-bhājana C.); VvA 147 (mandamukhī, stands for angara-kapalla p. 142 in expln of hattha-patāpaka Vv 3332). {Mandamukhi} Mandārava {Mandarava} [cp. Sk. mandāra] the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees). The blossoms mentioned D II.137 fall from the next world. - D II.137; Vv 222 (cp. VvA 111); J I.13, 39; Miln 13, 18 (dibbāni m.-pupphāni abhippavassiṃsu). Mandālaka {Mandalaka} [etym.?] a water-plant (kind of lotus) J IV.539; VI.47, 279, 564. Mandiya {Mandiya} (nt.) [cp. Sk. māndya] 1. laziness, slackness S I.110. - 2. dullness of mind, stupidity J III.38 (=manda-bhāva). Mandira {Mandira} (nt.) [cp. late Sk. mandira] a house, edifice, palace Sn 996, 1012; J V.480; VI.269, 270; Dāvs II.67 (dhātu° shrine). Pāli Text Society 1184 Pāli-English Dictionary Mandī° {Mandi°} see manda see manda 5. Mama {Mama} gen. dat. of pers. pron. ahaṃ (q. v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our "self-") in phrase mama-y-idaṃ Sn 806 thought of "this is mine," cp. S I.14, i. e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity, expld at Nd1 124 by maððanā conceit, illusion. Also in var. phrases with kṛ in form mamaṃ°, viz. mamankāra etc. - As adj. "self-like, selfish" only neg. amama unselfish Sn 220 (=mamatta-virahita SnA 276); Pv IV.134 (=mamankāra-virahita PvA 230); J IV.372; VI.259. See also amama, cp. māmaka. Mamankāra {Mamankara} [mamaṃ (=mama)+kāra, cp. ahaṃ+kāra] selfish attachment, selfinterest, selfishness PvA 230. In canonic books only in combn with ahankāra & mān'ānusaya (belief in an ego and bias of conceit), e. g. at M III.18, 32; S III.80, 103, 136, 169; IV.41, 197, 202; A I.132 sq.; III.444. See also maminkāra. Mamankāraṇa {Mamankarana} (nt.) [fr. mamaṃ+kṛ] treating with tenderness, solicitude, fondness J V.331. Mamatta {Mamatta} (nt.) [fr. mama] selfishness, self-love, egoism; conceit, pride in (-°), attachment to (-°). Sn 806, 871, 951; Th 1, 717; Nd1 49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi°); Nd2 499 (id. but as masc.); SnA 276; DhsA 199; PvA 19. Mamāyati {Mamayati} [Denom. fr. mama, cp. Sk. mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh XII.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajðā Pāramitā 254] to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love M I.260; S III.190; Th 1, 1150; Sn 922 (mamāyetha); Nd1 125 (Bhagavantaṃ); J IV.359 (=piyāyati C.); Miln 73; VbhA 107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in pop. etym. of mātā); DhA I.11; SnA 534; Mhvs 20, 4. - pp. mamāyita. Mamāyanā {Mamayana} (f.)=mamatta (selfishness) J VI.259 (°taṇhārahita in expln of amama). Mamāyita {Mamayita} [pp. of mamāyati] cherished, beloved; as n. nt. attachment, fondness of, pride. - (adj. or pp.) S II.94 (etaṃ ajjhositaṃ, m., parāmaṭṭhaṃ); Sn 119; DhA I.11. - (nt.:) Sn 466, 777, 805, 950=Dh 367 (expld as: yassa "ahan" ti vā "maman" ti vā gāho n'atthi DhA IV.100); Sn 1056 (cp. Nd2 499). Maminkaroti {Maminkaroti} [mama(ṃ)+kṛ "to make one's own"] to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster J V.330. Maminkāra {Maminkara} [for maman°, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 19] self-love, self-interest, egoism M I.486; III.32 (at both places also ahinkāra for ahankāra). Mamma {Mamma} (nt.) [Vedic marman, fr. mṛd] soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etym. and expln of the word is given at Expos. 132n3 (on DhsA 100). - J II.228; III.209; DhsA 396. -ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i. e. backbiting. Cp. piṭṭhi-maṃsika) DhA IV.182. -chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech) DhA I.75; DhsA 100. Pāli Text Society 1185 Pāli-English Dictionary Mammana {Mammana} (adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara rustling to Lat. fremo to roar=Gr. bre/mw to thud, bronth/ thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk. murmura=P. mummura & muramurā, Lat. murmur] stammering, stuttering Vin II.90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, combd with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca). Maya (adj.) (-° only) [Vedic maya] made of, consisting of. - An interesting analysis (interesting for judging the views and sense of etymology of an ancient commentator) of maya is given by Dhammapāla at VvA 10, where he distinguishes 6 meanings of the word, viz. 1. asma-d-atthe, i. e. "myself" (as representing mayaṃ!). - 2. paññatti "regulation" (same as 1. according to example given, but constructed syntectically quite diff. by Dhp.). - 3. nibbatti "origin" (arising from, with example mano-maya "produced by mind"). - 4. manomaya "spiritually" (same as 3). - 5. vikār'atthe "alteration" (? more like product, consistency, substance), with example "sabbe-maṭṭikāmaya-kuṭikā." - 6. pada-pūraṇa matte to make up a foot of the verse (or add a syllable for the sake of completeness, with example "dānamaya, sīlamaya" (=dana; sīla). - 1. made of: aṭṭhi° of bone Vin II.115; ayo° of iron Sn 669; Pv I.104; J IV.492; udum- bara° of Ud. wood Mhvs 23, 87; dāru° of wood, VvA 8; loha° of copper Sn 670; veḷuriya° of jewels Vv 21. - 2. consisting in: dāna° giving alms PvA 8, 9; dussa° clothes Vv 467; dhamma° righteousness S I.137. - 3. (more as apposition, in the sense as given by Dhp. above under 6) something like, a likeness of, i. e. ingredient, substance, stuff; in āhāra° food-stuff, food J III.523; utu° something like a (change in) season Vism 395; sīla° character, having sīla as substance (or simply-consisting of) It 51 (dāna°, sīla°, bhāvanā°). {Maya} Mayaṃ {Mayam} [1st pl. of ahaṃ, for vayaṃ after mayā etc. See ahaṃ] we Vin II.270; Sn 31, 91, 167; Dh 6; KhA 210. Mayūkha {Mayukha} [Vedic mayūkha in diff. meaning, viz. a peg for fastening a weft etc., Zimmer Altind. Leben 254] a ray of light Abhp. 64; Dhp. A 426 (old citation, unverified). Mayūra {Mayura} [Vedic mayūra] a peacock D III.201; S II.279; Th 1, 1113; J II.144, 150 (°gīva)=DhA I.144; J IV.211 (°nacca); V.304; VI.172, 272, 483; Vv 111, 358 (=sikhaṇḍin VvA 163); VvA 27 (°gīva-vaṇṇa); Sdhp 92. - The form mayūra occurs nearly always in the Gāthās and is the older form of the two m. and mora. The latter contracted form is found in Prose only and is often used to explain the old form, e, g. at VvA 57. See also mora. Mara {Mara} (adj.) [fr. mṛ] dying; only neg. amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay & death Th II.512; Pv II.611. See also amara. Maraṇa {Marana} (nt.) [fr. mṛ] death, as ending this (visible) existence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in cpds. death. - The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā tamhā satta-nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ, maccu maraṇaṃ kālakiriyā, khandhānaṃ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo M I.49; Nd1 123, 124 (adds "jīvit'indriyass'upacchedo"). Cp. similar defns of birth and old age under jāti and jarā. - S I.121; D III.52, 111 sq., 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq.; Sn 32, 318, 426 sq., 575 sq., 742, 806; Nd2 254 (=maccu); Pug 60; Vbh 99 sq.; VbhA 100 (defn and exegesis in det., cp. Vism 502), 101 (var. kinds of, cp. Vism 229), 156 (lahuka), 157; DhA III.434; PvA 5, 18, 54, 64, 76, 96; Sdhp 292, 293. -kāla° timely death (opp. akāla°); khaṇika° sudden death Vism 229. -anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dh 148 (cp. DhA II.366: maraṇa-sankhāto antako). -ānussati mindfulness of death Vism 197, 230 sq. (under 8 aspects). -cetanā intention of death DhA I.20. Pāli Text Society 1186 Pāli-English Dictionary -dhamma subject to death PvA 41. -pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) DhA III.111, 170. -pāra "the other side of death," Np. at Nd1 154 (vv. ll. BB purāpuraṃ; SS parammukhaṃ). bhaya the fear of death J I.203; VI.398; Vbh 367. -bhojana food given before death, the last meal J I.197; II.420. -mañca death-bed Vism 47, 549; °ka J IV.132. -mukha the mouth of d. PvA 97 (or should we read °dukkha?). -sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death SnA 54; DhA III.171; PvA 61, 66. -samaya the time of death VbhA 157-159 (in var. conditions as regards paṭisandhi). Marati {Marati}[mṛ=Idg. *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Av. miryeite, Sk. marta=Gr. broto/s mortal, man; māra death; Goth. maurpr=Ags. mort=Ger. mord; Lith. miQti to die; Lat. morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush: see maṇāti, and mṛdnāti (mardati) same: see mattikā. - The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ by "pāṇa-cāge," i. e. giving up breathing] to die. - pres. marati Mhvs v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaṃ J VI.498; 2nd mareyyāsi J III.276. ppr. maramāna Mhvs 36, 76. - aor. amarā J III.389 (=mata C.; with gloss amari). -amari Mhvs 36, 96. - Fut. marissati J III.214. - ppr. (=fut.) marissaṃ J III.214 (for *mariṣyanta). - Inf. marituṃ D II.330 (amaritu-kāma not willing to die); Vism 297 (id.); VvA 207 (positive); and marituye Th 2, 426. - The form miyyati (mīyati) see separately. - Caus I. māreti to kill, murder Mhvs 37, 27; PvA 4. Pass. māriyati PvA 5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp 139 (read mār° for marīy°). - Caus. II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed J III.178; Mhvs 37, 28. Cp. pamāreti. Marica {Marica} (nt.) [cp. scientific Sk. marica] black pepper Vin I.201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Miln 63. -gaccha the M.-shrub J V.12. -cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper J I.455. Mariyādā {Mariyada} (f.) [cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Lat. mare sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare] 1. boundary, limit, shore, embankment Vin III.50; A III.227 (brāhmaṇānaṃ); D III.92=Vism 419; J V.325; VI.536 (tīra°); Mhvs 34, 70; 36, 59 (vāpi°); Miln 416. - 2. strictly defined relation, rule, control J II.215; Vism 15. - adj. keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules A III.227 (quoted SnA 318, 325). °bandha keeping in control Vin I.287. - Cp. vimariyādi. Marīci {Marici} (f.) [Vedic marīci; cp. Gr. marmai/rw to shimmer, glitter, mai_ra dog star, a)maru/ssw sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here] 1. a ray of light VvA 166. - 2. a mirage J VI.209; Vism 496; VbhA 34, 85; often combd with māyā (q. v.), e. g. Nd2 680 AII; J II.330. -kammaṭṭhāna the "mirage" station of exercise DhA III.165. dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial J VI.206; Dh 46; DhA I.337. Marīcikā {Maricika} (f.)=marīci 2; S III.141; Vism 479 (in comp.); Dh 170 (=māyā DhA III.166). Maru1 {Maru} [cp. Epic Sk. maru] a region destitute of water, a desert. Always combd with °kantāra: Nd1 155 (as Name); J I.107; VbhA 6; VvA 332; PvA 99, 112. Maru2 {Maru} [Vedic marut, always in pl. marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder-storm] 1. pl. marū the genii, spirits of the air Sn 681, 688; Miln 278 (nāga-yakkha-nara-marū; perhaps in meaning 2); Mhvs 5, 27. - 2. gods in general (°-) Mhvs 15, 211 (°gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (°narā gods and men). - Cp. māruta & māluta. Pāli Text Society 1187 Pāli-English Dictionary Marumba {Marumba} [etym.?] a sort of (sweet-scented) earth or sand Vin II.121, 142, 153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living-cell); IV.33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā, kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mhvs 29, 8; Dpvs 19, 2; Miln 197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.). Maruvā {Maruva} (f.) [cp. Sk. mūrvā, perhaps connected with Lat. malva] a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana) M I.429. At J II.115 we find reading marūdvā & marucavāka (C.), of uncertain meaning? Mala {Mala} (nt.) [Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning "dhāraṇa" supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka] anything impure, stain (lit. & fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122. - S I.38 (itthi malaṃ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); A I.105 (issā°); Sn 378, 469, 962, 1132 (=rāgo malaṃ etc. Nd2 500); Nd1 15, 478 sq.; Dh 239 sq.; Vbh 368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa-malāni); Pv II.334 (macchera°); PvA 45 (id.), 80 (id.), 17 (citta°); Sdhp 220. - Compar. malatara a greater stain A IV.195=Dh 243. - See also māla. -ābhibhū overcoming one's sordidness S I.18; J IV.64. -majjana "dirt wiper," a barber Vin IV.308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca); J III.452; IV.365. Malina {Malina} (adj.) [fr. mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala. - Cp. Lat. mulleus reddish, purple; Gr. me/las black, molu/nw to stain, me/ltos reddish; Lith. mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Ohg. māl stain] dirty, stained, impure, usually lit. - J I.467; Miln 324; DhA I.233; VvA 156; PvA 226; VbhA 498. Malinaka {Malinaka} (adj.) [malina+ka] dirty; with ref. to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca VbhA 63. Malya {Malya} (nt.) [for *mālya, fr. māla] flower, garland of flowers Vv 11 (-dhara); 21; J V.188 (puppha°), 420. - The reading at Pv III.33 (pahūta°, adj. having many rows of flowers) is mālya. Malla {Malla} [cp. Sk. malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura] a wrestler Vin II.105 (°muṭṭhika) J IV.81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika "fister"); Vism 31 (muṭṭhika+, i. e. boxing & wrestling as amusements: see mada 1). Perhaps as "porter" Bdhgh on CV V.29. 5 (see Vin II.319). At Miln 191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e. g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). Cp. Bhallaka. -gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Miln 331. -muṭṭhika boxer Vin II.105. -yuddha wrestling contest Miln 232; DhA II.154; DA I.85. -yuddhaka a professional wrestler J IV.81. Mallaka {Mallaka} [cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika] 1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin II.106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Bdhgh's expln of this passage (CV v. I.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear; mallakaṃ nāma makara-dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla-saṇṭhānena kata-mallakaṃ vuccati; akata° danta achinditvā kataṃ). It may bear some ref. to malla on p. 105 (see malla) & to mallika-makula (see below mallikā). - 2. a cup, drinking vessel A I.250 (udaka°). - 3. a bowl J III.21 (kaṃsa°=taṭṭaka). - 4. in kheḷa° a spittoon Vin I.48; II.175. - Note. W. Printz in "Bhāsa's Prākrit." p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa, Hindī maḷḷ(a) "cup," maliyā "a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut-shell) for holding the oil used in unction," mālā "cocoanut-shell," and adds: probably a Dravidian word. Pāli Text Society 1188 Pāli-English Dictionary Mallikā {Mallika} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214] Arabian jasmine Dh 54 (tagara°); J I.62; III.291; V.420; Miln 333, 338; DhsA 14; KhA 44. mallika-makula opening bud of the jasmine Visni 251=VbhA 234 (°saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth). - See also mālikā. Maḷorikā {Malorika} (f.) [prob. dialectical for māḷaka: cp. mallaka] a stand, (tripod) for a bowl, formed of sticks Vin II.124 (=daṇḍ'ādhāraka Bdhgh on p. 318). Masa {Masa} in line "āsadað ca masañ jaṭaṃ" at J VI.328 is to be combd with ca, and read as camasañ, i. e. a ladle for sacrificing (C.: aggi-dahanaṃ). Masati {Masati} [mṛś] to touch: only in cpd. āmasati. The root is expld at Dhtp 305 as "āmasana." Another root masu [mṛś?] is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning "macchera." Does this refer to Sk. mṛṣā (=P. micchā)? Cp. māsati, māsana etc. Masāṇa {Masana} (nt.) [etym.? prob. provincial & local] a coarse cloth of interwoven hemp and other materials D I.166; M I.308, 345; A I.241, 295; Pug 55. At all passages as a dress worn by certain ascetics. Masāraka {Masaraka} [fr. masāra?] a kind of couch (maðca) or longchair; enumd under the 4 kinds of maðcā at Vin IV.40. - See also Vin II.149; IV.357 (where expld as: maðcapāde vijjhitvā tattha aṭṭaniyo pavesetvā kato: made by boring a hole into the feet of the bed & putting through a notched end); VvA 8, 9. Masāragalla (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. masāra emerald+galva crystal & musāragalva] a precious stone, cat's eye; also called kabara-maṇi (e. g. VvA 304). It occurs in stereotyped enumn of gems at Vin II.238 (where it is said to be found in the Ocean)=Miln 267; and at Miln 118, where it always stands next to lohitanka. The same combn (with lohit.) is found at Vv 363; 783=813; 8415. {Masaragalla} Masi {Masi} [cp. Class. Sk. maṣi & masi] 1. the fine particles of ashes, in angara° charcoal-dust VvA 67=DhA III.309; (agginā) masiṃ karoti to reduce to powder (by fire), to burn to ashes, turn to dust S II.88=IV.197=A I.204= II.199. - 2. soot J I.483 (ukkhali° soot on a pot). Masūraka {Masuraka} [connected with masāraka] a bolster J IV.87; VI.185. Massu {Massu} [Vedic śmaśru] the beard D II.42; Pug 55; J IV.159. -parūḷha° with long-grown beard DA I.263; bahala° thick-bearded J V.42. -kamma beard-dressing J III.114; DhA I.253. karaṇa shaving DhA I.253; DA I.137. -kutti [m.+ *kḷpti] beard-trimming J III.314 (C.=°kiriyā). Massuka {Massuka} (adj.) [fr. massu] bearded; a° beardless (of a woman) J II.185. Maha {Maha} (m. & nt.) [fr. mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas] 1. worthiness, venerableness Miln 357. - 2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mhvs 33, 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, loc.); VvA 170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (id.). mahā° a great festival Mhvs 5, 94. bodhi° festival of the Bo tree J IV.229. vihāra° festival held on the building of a monastery J I.94; VvA 188. hatthi° a festival called the elephant f. J IV.95. Pāli Text Society 1189 Pāli-English Dictionary Mahati {Mahati} [mah; expld by Dhtp 331 as "pūjāyaṃ"] to honour, revere Vv 4711 (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 129; expld as "mahāmase pūjāmase" at VvA 203). Caus. mahāyati in same sense: ger. mahāyitvāna (poetical) J IV.236. - Pass. mahīyati Vv 621 (=pūjīyati VvA 258); 6422 (ppr. mahīyamāna= pūjiyamāna VvA 282). pp. mahita. Mahatta {Mahatta} (nt.) [fr. mahat° cp. Sk. mahattva] greatness J V.331 (=seṭṭhatta C.); Vism 132, 232 sq.; VbhA 278 (Satthu°, jāti°, sabrahmacārī°); DA I.35; VvA 191. Mahant {Mahant} (adj.) [Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix. - cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahīyān; Gr. me/gas (compar. mei/zwn), Lat. magnus, Goth. mikils=Ohg. mihhil=E. much] great, extensive, big; important, venerable. - nom. mahā Sn 1008; Mhvs 22, 27. Shortened to maha in cpd. pitāmaha (following a- decl.) (paternal) grandfather PvA 41; & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q. v.). - instr. mahatā Sn 1027. - pl. nom. mahantā Sn 578 (opp. daharā). - loc. mahati Miln 254. - f. mahī - 1. one of the 5 great rivers (Np.). - 2. the earth. See separately. - nt. mahantaṃ used as adv., meaning "very much, greatly" J V.170; DhA IV.232. Also in cpd. mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity DhsA 44. - Compar. mahantatara DhA II.63, and with dimin. suffix °ka J III.237. - The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is "agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama, pavara," see Nd2 502. Note on mahā & cpds. - A. In certain cpds. the combn with mahā (mah°) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā° for the simple term), that the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of "antique" word, in which the 2nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah'aṇṇava, which is more freq. than aṇṇava; mah'ābhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahānubhāva, mahiddhika, mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī [mah+esī, or īsī], mahesakkha [mah+esakkha]; mahallaka [mah+*ariyaka]; mahāmatta. Cp. E. great-coat, Gr. a)rx° in a)rx-iatro/s=Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection of cpd.-words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing mahā. Sometimes a mahā° lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e. g. Mah-ābhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa. - B. Mahā occurs in cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha° before g, d, p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā°: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the material according to these bases. mah°: -aggha very costly, precious Pug 34; Mhvs 27, 35; PvA 77, 87; Sdhp 18. -agghatā costliness, great value Pug 34, Sdhp 26. -aṇṇava the (great) ocean Mhvs 19, 17. -atthiya (for °atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable J III.368. -andhakāra deep darkness Vism 417. -assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable S I.81. maha°: -ggata "become great," enlarged, extensive, fig. lofty, very great M I.263; II.122; A II.63, 184; III.18; VvA 155; J V.113; Dhs 1020 (trsln: "having a wider scope") Vbh 16, 24, 62, 74, 126, 270, 326; Tikp. 45; Vism 410, 430 sq. (°ārammaṇa); VbhA 154 (id.), 159 (°citta); DhsA 44. See on term Cpd. 4, 12, 55, 1014; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227]. -gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous A IV.92; P III.111 (=bahubhojana PvA 175); Miln 288; Dh 325 (cp. DhA IV.16). -ddhana having great riches (often combd with mahābhoga) Dh 123; J IV.15, 22. -pphala much fruit; adj. bearing much fruit, rich in result A IV.60, 237 sq.; Sn 191, 486; Dh 312, 356 sq. -bbala (a) a strong force, a great army Mhvs 10, 68 (v. l., T. has mahā-bala); (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful J III.114; Mhvs 23, 92; 25, 9. -bbhaya great fear, terror S I.37; Sn 753, 1032, 1092, ep. Nd2 501. mahå°: -anas kitchen Mhvs 5, 27 (spurious stanza). -anasa kitchen J II.361; III.314; V.368; VI.349; DhA III.309; ThA 5. -anila a gale Mhvs 3, 42. -ānisaṃsa Pāli Text Society 1190 Pāli-English Dictionary deserving great praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahānuśaṃsa MVastu III.221]. -ānubhāva majesty, adj. wonderful, splendid J I.194; J VI.331; Pv III.31; PvA 117, 136, 145, 272. -aparādhika very guilty J I.114. -abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation DhA I.85. -abhisakka [abhi+śak] very powerful Th 1, 1111. -amacca chief minister Mhvs 19, 12. -araha costly Mhvs 3, 21; 5, 75; 27, 39; PvA 77, 141, 160. mahā°: -alasa great sloth DhA III.410. -avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, freq. -isi in poetry for mahesi at J V.321. -upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king) SnA 84. upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) VvA 5. -karuṇā great compassion DhA I.106, 367. -kāya a great body Miln 16. -gaṇa a great crowd or community DhA I.154. -gaṇḍa a large tumour VbhA 104. -gedha great greed Sn 819; Nd1 151. -cāga great liberality, adj. munificent Mhvs 27, 47. As °paricāga at SnA 295 (=mahādāna). -jana a great crowd, collectively for "the people," a multitude PvA 6, 19, 78; Mhvs 3, 13. -taṇha (adj.) very thirsty J II.441. -tala "great surface," the large flat roof on the top of a palace (=upari-pāsāda-tala) J VI.40. -dāna (see under dāna) the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed, usually lasting for a week or more Mhvs 27, 46; PvA 111, 112. -dhana (having) great wealth PvA 3, 78. -naraka (a) great Hell, see naraka. -nāga a great elephant Dh 312; DhA IV.4. -nāma N. of a plant Vin I.185; II.267. niddā deep sleep PvA 47. -nibbāna the great N. DhA IV.110. -niraya (a) great hell SnA 309, 480; PvA 52. See Niraya & cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 199, 200. -nīla sapphire VvA 111. -pañña very wise D III.158; A III.244; Dh 352; DhA IV.71. -patha high road D I.102; Sn 139; Dh 58; Vism 235; DhA I.445. -paduma a great lotus J V.39; also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp. Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205. -pitā grandfather PvA 107. -purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at D II.17, 19, passim. - D III.287; Sn 1040 sq.; Dh 352; Miln 10; SnA 184, 187 sq., 223, 258, 357, 384 sq.; °lakkhaṇāni: D I.88, 105, 116; Sn 549, 1000 sq.; Vism 234; VvA 315; DhA II.41. -bhūta usually in pl. °bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements (see bhūta), being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo, D I.76; Nd1 266; Vbh 13, 70 sq.; Vism 366 sq.; Tikp 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq.; VbhA 42, 169, 253. See Cpd. 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1. -bhoga great wealth, adj. wealthy PvA 3, 78. -maccha a great fish, seamonster J I.483. -mati very wise, clever Mhvs 14, 22; 19, 84 (f. °ī); 33, 100 (pl. °ī). matta [cp. Sk. mahāmātra] a king's chief minister, alias Prime Minister, "who was the highest Officer-of-State and real Head of the Executive" (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin III.47 (rājā . . . akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma). Note. An acc. sg. mahā-mattānaṃ we find at A I.154 (formed after the prec. rājānaṃ). - Vin I.74 (where two ranks are given: senā-nāyakā m.-mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m.-m. those of law); D I.7; III.88; III.64 (here with Ep. khattiya); A I.154, 252, 279; III.128; Vin IV.224; Vism 121; VbhA 312 (in simile of two m.), 340; PvA 169. Cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101. -muni great seer Sn 31. -megha a big cloud, thunder cloud M II.117; Sn 30; Vism 417. -yañña the great sacrifice D I.138 sq., 141 (cp. A II.207≈). -yasa great fame Vv 216; Mhys 5, 22. -ranga [cp. Sk. m.-rajana], safflower, used for dyeing Vin I.185 (sandals); II 267 (cloaks). -rājā great king, king, very freq.: see rājā. -rukkha a great tree Vism 413 (literally); Miln 254 (id.), otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 129). -lātā (-pasādhana) a lady's parure called "great creeper" DhA I.392; VvA 165 (-pilandhana); same SnA 520. vātapāna main window DhA IV.203. -vīṇā a great lute Vism 354; VbhA 58. -vīra (great) hero Sn 543, 562. -satta "the great being" or a Bodhisatta VvA 137 (v. l. SS. bodhisatta). [Cp. BSk. mahāsattva, e. g. Jtm 32]. -samudda the sea, the occean Mhvs 19, 18; Vism 403; SnA 30, 371; PvA 47. -sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see Pāli Text Society 1191 Pāli-English Dictionary sara), enumd e. g. at Vism 416. -sāra (of) great sap, i. e. great wealth, adj. very rich J I.463 (°kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla-kula). -sāla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) D I.136, 235; III.16, 20; J II.272 (°kula); IV.237 (id.), 325 (id.); V.227 (id.); Pug 56; VbhA 519; DhA III.193. -sāvaka [cp. BSk. mahāśrāvaka Divy 489] a great disciple Vism 98 (asīti °ā); DhA II.93. -senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) J V.115; VI.2. -hatthi a large elephant M I.184 (°pada elephant's foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (°opama) at Vism 243, 347, 348. mahi° [mah'i°]: -iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy A IV.229; Th 1, 898; It 91; J I.8; II.441. -icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness A IV.280; VbhA 472. -iddhika [mahā+iddhi+ka] of great power, always combd with mahānubhāva to denote great influence, high position & majesty Vin I.31; II.193; III.101; D I.78, 180 (devatā), 213; S I.145 sq.; II.155, 274 sq., 284 sq.; IV.323; V.265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; A V.129; J VI.483 (said of the Ocean); PvA 6, 136, 145. -inda (ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain-god Th 1, 1108. [Cp. BSk. māhendra in °bhavana "the abode of the Great Indra," and vaṛṣa "the rain of the Gr. I." (here as rain-god), both at AvŚ I.210]. -issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] great in the art of the bow, a great archer S I.185; DhA I.358. mahe° [mahā+i]: -esakkha [mahā+īsa+khyaṃ; fr. īś] possessing great power or authority A II.204; III.244; Nd2 5032; Vism 419; Sdhp 511. The BSk. form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology. The P. etym. rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi DhA IV.232. -esi [mahā+isi; Sk. maharṣi] a great Sage A II.26; Sn 208, 481, 646, 915, 1057, 1061; Th 1, 1132; 2, 149; Dh 422 (expld at DhA IV.232 as "mahantaṃ sīlakkhandh'ādīnaṃ esitattā m." cp. the similar expln at Nd2 503); Nd1 343; Vism 505; VbhA 110; PvA 1. -esiyā=mahesī J VI.483. -esī [in P. to be taken as mah+iś, as f. to īsa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of mahiṣa, buffalo] chief queen, king's first wife, king's consort; also the wife of a great personage J II.410; V.45; VI.425; Pug 56; Mhvs 2, 22 (pl. mahesiyo); VvA 184 (sixteen). Usually as agga-mahesī, e. g. J I.262; III.187, 393; V.88. -esitta state of chief consort, queenship J V.443; Pv II.1310; ThA 37; VvA 102. -eseyya=°esitta J V.91. -maho [mahā+u, or+o]: -ogha the great flood (see ogha) Sn 4, 945; Dh 47, 287; DhA III.433. -odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Sn 720, 1134; Miln 224; Mhvs 18, 8. -odara big belly J VI.358 (addressing a king's minister). -odika full of water, having much water; deep, full (of a river) Sn 319; J II.159; Miln 346. -oraga [m+uraga] a great snake J V.165. Mahantatā {Mahantata} (f.) [fr. mahant°] greatness DhA II.62. At M III.24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?), at M I.184 however mahantatta (nt.). Mahallaka {Mahallaka} (adj. n.) [a distorted mah-ariyaka> ayyaka> allaka; cp. ayyaka] old, venerable, of great age; an old man D I.90 (opp. taruṇa), 94, 114, 247; Sn 313, 603; Nd2 261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc.) J IV.482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 461 (=mahanto VvA 199); DhA I.7, 278; II.4, 55, 91; SnA 313. Compar. mahallakatara DhA II.18. - f. mahallikā an old woman Miln 16; Mhvs 21, 27; VvA 105; PvA 149 (=addhagata). - [The BSk. form is mahalla, e. g. Divy 329, 520.] Mahikā {Mahika} (f.) [cp. *Sk. mahikā] fog, frost, cold (=himaṃ DhsA 317) Vin II.295=Miln 273; Sn 669; Miln 299; VvA 134 (fog). - As mahiyā at A II.53. Mahita {Mahita} [pp. of mahati or mahīyati] honoured, revered M II.110; Miln 278; Sdhp 276. Mahanīya {Mahaniya} (adj.) [grd. of mahati] praiseworthy VvA 97. Pāli Text Society 1192 Pāli-English Dictionary Mahilā {Mahila} (f.) [*Sk. mahilā] woman, female Vin II.281 (°titthe at the women's bathing place); J I.188; Dpvs IX.4; ThA 271. Mahisa, Mahīsa & Mahiṁsa {Mahisa} {Mahimsa} [cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the P. etym. evidently to be connected with mahā+īś, because of mahīsa>mahiṃsa] a buffalo. mahisa: D I.6 (°yuddha b.-fight), 9; J III.26 (vana° wild b.); Mhvs 25, 36 (T. māhisaṃ). -mahīsa J VI.110. -mahiṃsa Vism 191, & in Np. mahiṃsaka-maṇḍala the Andhra country J I.356, cp. Mahiṃsaka-raṭṭha VbhA 4; as Mahisa-maṇḍala at Mhvs 12, 29. - Note. The P. pop. etym. is propounded by Bdhgh as "mahiyaṃ setī ti mahiso" (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) DhsA 62. Mahī {Mahi} (f.) [f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī] the earth (lit. Great One) Mhvs 5, 266; Sdhp 424, 472; loc. mahiyā Miln 128; mahiyaṃ DhsA 62. - Note. As mahī is only found in very late P. literature, it must have been re-introduced from Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī. -tala the ground (of the earth) Mhvs 5, 54. -dhara mountain Miln 343; Mhvs 14, 3; 28, 22 (v. l. mahin°). -pa king (of the earth) Mhvs 14, 22. -pati king Mhvs 5, 48; 33, 32. -pāla king Mhvs 4, 38; 5, 265. -ruha tree ("growing out of the earth") Mhvs 14, 18, 18, 19. Mā {Ma} (indecl.) [cp. Vedic mā, Gr. mh/] prohibition particle: not, do not, let us hope not, I wish that . . . not [cp. Lat. utinam & ne]. Constructed with various tenses, e. g. 1. with aor. (prohibitive tense): mā evaṃ akattha do not thus DhA I.7; mā abhaṇi speak not Pv I.33; mā cintayittha do not worry DhA I.12; mā parihāyi I hope he will not go short (or be deprived) of . . . M I.444; mā bhāyi fear not J II.159; mā mariṃsu I hope they will not die J III.55; mā (te) rucci may it not please (you), i. e. please do not Vin II.198; mā evaṃ ruccittha id. DhA I.13. - 2. with imper.: mā gaccha J I.152; mā detha J III.275. mā ghāta do not kill: see māghāta. - 3. with pot.: mā anuyuðjetha Dh 27; mā bhuðjetha let him not eat Mhvs 25, 113; mā vadetha J VI.364. - 4. with indic. pres.: mā paṭilabhati A V.194. - A peculiar use is found in phrase ānemi mā ānemi shall I bring it or not? J VI.334. - 5. mā=na (simple negation) in māsakkhimhā we could not Vin III.23. —Mā {Ma} [the short form of māsa, direct dern fr. mā: see mināti] see puṇṇa-mā. Māgadha {Magadha} [fr. Magadha] scent-seller, (lit. "from Magadha") Pv II.937 (=gandhin PvA 127). Māgadhaka {Magadhaka} (nt.) [māgadha+ka, lit. "from Magadha"] garlic Vin IV.259 (lasuṇaṃ nāma māgadhakaṃ vuccati). Māgavika {Magavika} [guṇa- form to *mṛga=P. miga; Sk. mārgavika] a deerstalker, huntsman A II.207; Pug 56; Miln 364, 412; PvA 207. Māghāta {Maghata} (nt.) [lit. mā ghāta "kill not"] the injunction not to kill, non-killing order (with ref. to the killing of animals J III.428 (°bheri, the drum announcing this order); IV.115; VI.346 (uposatha°). Pāli Text Society Māngalya {Mangalya} 1193 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [fr. mangala] auspicious, fortunate, bringing about fulfilment of wishes J VI.179. Māṇava {Manava} [cp. Sk. māṇava] a youth, young man, esp. a young Brahmin Sn 1022, 1027, 1028; J IV.391 (brāhmaṇa°); DA I.36=satto pi coro pi taruṇo pi; DhA I.89. pl. māṇavā men Th 2, 112. - The spelling mānava occurs at Sn 456, 589, & Pv I.87 (=men Th II.112; kumāra PvA 41). Māṇavaka {Manavaka} [fr. māṇava] a young man, youth a Brahmin Miln 101; in general: young, e. g. nāga° a young serpent J III.276; f. °ikā a Brahmin girl J I.290; Miln 101; nāga° a young female serpent J III.275; DhA III.232. Mātanga {Matanga} [cp. Epic Sk. mātanga, dial.] an elephant Dh 329, 330 (here as Ep. of nāga); J III.389; VI.47; Vv 439; Miln 368. - 2. a man of a low class [cp. BSk. mātangī Divy 397] SnA 185 sq. (as Np.). Mātar {Matar} (f.) [Vedic mātā, stem mātar°, Av. mātar-, Gr. mh/thr (Doric ma/thr) Lat. māter, Oir. māthir, Ohg. muoter, Ags. modor=mother; Cp. further Gr. mh/tra uterus, Lat. mātrix id., Sk. mātṛkā mother, grandmother, Ger. mieder corset. From Idg. *ma, onomat. part., cp. "mamma"] mother. - Cases: nom. sg. mātā Sn 296; Dh 43; J IV.463; V.83; VI.117; Nd2 504 (def. as janikā); gen. mātu Th 1, 473; Vin I.17; J I.52; mātuyā J I.53; Mhvs 10, 80; PvA 31; and mātāya J I.62; dat. mātu Mhvs 9, 19; acc. mātaraṃ Sn 60, 124; Dh 294; instr. mātarā Th 2, 212; loc. mātari Dh 284 - pl. does not occur. In combn with pitā father, mātā always precedes the former, thus mātā-pitaro (pl.) "mother & father" (see below). -mātito (abl.-adv.) from the mother's side (cp. pitito) D I.113; A III.151; PvA 29. - On mātā in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; cp. Vism 321 (simile of a mother's solicitude for her children). Similarly the pop. etym. of mātā is given, with "mamāyatī ti mātā" at VbhA 107. - The 4 bases of m. in compn are: mātā°, māti°, mātu°, & matti°. - 1. mātā°: -pitaro mother & father D III.66, 188 sq.; Sn 404; Miln 12. See also pitā. pitika having mother & father DhA II.2. -pitiṭṭhāna place of m. & f. DhA II.95. -pettika having m. & f., of m. & f. Nd2 385 (nāma-gotta). -petti-bhāra supporting one's m. & f. S I.228; J I.202; VI.498. -maha maternal grandfather J IV.146; DhA I.346. - 2. māti°: -devatā protector or guardian of one's mother J III.422 (gloss: mātu-devatā viya). -pakkha the mother's side DhA I.4 (+pitipakkha). -posaka supporting one's m. J III.422 (v. l. mātu°). - 3. mātu°: -upaṭṭhāna (spelt mātupaṭṭh°) reverence towards one's m. DhA IV.14. -kucchi m's womb D II.12; Vism 560 (°gata); VbhA 96; DhA I.127. -gāma "genex feminarum," womanfolk, women (collectively cp. Ger, frauen-zimmer) A II.126; Vin IV.175; M I.448, 462; III.126; S IV.239 sq.; J I.201; III.90, 530. (pl. °gāmā p. 531); Pug 68; SnA 355; PvA 271; VvA 77. -ghāta & (usually) °ka a matricide (+pitughātaka; see abhiṭhāna) Vin I.168, 320; Miln 310; Tikp 167 sq.; VbhA 425. -ghātikamma matricide Tikp. 281. -bhūta having been his mother PvA 78. -mattin (see matta1 4) whatever is a mother S IV.110 (°īsu mātucittaṃ upaṭṭhapeti foster the thought of mother towards whatever is a mother, where in sequence with bhaginī-mattin & dhītumattin). -hadaya a mother's heart PvA 63. - 4. matti°: see matti-sambhava. —Mātika {Matika} (adj.) [fr. mātā, Sk. mātṛka] -mother; in mata° one whose mother is dead, lit. a "dead-mother-ed," J II.131; III.213. Also neg. amātika without a mother J V.251. Mātikā {Matika} (f.) [*Sk. mātṛkā] 1. a water course Vism 554 (°ātikkamaka); Mhvs 35, 96; 37, 50; SnA 500 (=sobbha); DhA II.141 (its purpose: "ito c'ito ca udakaṃ haritvā attano sassa-kammaṃ sampādenti"); VvA 301. - 2. tabulation, register, tabulated summary, condensed contents, esp. Pāli Text Society 1194 Pāli-English Dictionary of philosophical parts of the Canonical books in the Abhidhamma; used in Vinaya in place of Abhidhamma Piṭaka; probably the original form of that (later) Piṭaka Vin I.119, 337; II.8 [cp. semantically in similar sense Lat. mātrix=E. matric, i. e. register. In BSḳ. mātrikā Divy 18, 333] A I.117 (Dhamma-dhara, Vinaya-dhara, Mātikā-dhara; here equivalent to Abhidhamma); Vism 312 (so paðcavasso hutvā dve mātikā paguṇaṃ katvā pavāretvā); SnA 15; KhA 37, 99, 117. nikkhepa putting down of a summary, tabulation Vism 536, 540. The summary itself is sometimes called nikkhepa, e. g. the 4th part of the Atthasālinī (DhsA pp. 343-409) is called nikkhepa-kaṇḍa or chapter of the summary; similarly m.-nikkhepa vāra at Tikp. 11. Mātiya {Matiya} (adj. n.) [the diæretic form of macca, used in verse, cp. Sk. martya & Vedic (poetical) martia] (a) mortal J VI.100 (C. macca; gloss māṇava). Mātu {Matu} ° see mātā. Mātuka {Matuka} (nt.) [cp. Sk. māṭṛka, fr. mātṛ=mātar] "genetrix," matrix, origin, cause Th 1, 612. Mātucchā {Matuccha} (f.) [Sk. mātṛ-ṣvasā] mother's sister, maternal aunt Vin II.254, 256; J IV.390; Miln 240. - putta aunt's son, male first cousin (from mother's sister's side) S II.281; Ud 24; DhA I.119. Cp. mātula-dhītā. Mātula {Matula} [cp. Epic Sk. mātula & semantically Lat. matruus, i. e. one who belongs to the mother] a mother's brother, an uncle J I.225; DhA I.15; PvA 58, 60. -dhītā (the complement of mātucchā-putta) uncle's daughter, female first cousin (from mother's brother's side) J II.119; DhA III.290; PvA 55. Mātulaka {Matulaka} =mātula DhA I.182. Mātulānī {Matulani} (f.) [Sk. mātulānī, semantically cp. Lat. mater tera] a mother's brother's wife, an aunt J I.387; IV.184; PvA 55, 58. Mātulunga {Matulunga} (nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. mātulunga; dialectical?] a citron J III.319 (=mella; v. l. bella). Mādisa {Madisa} (adj.) [Epic & Class. Sk. mādṛś & mādṛśa, maṃ+ dṛś] one like me Sn 482; Mhvs 5, 193; VvA 207; DhA I.284; PvA 76, 123. Māna1 {Mana} [late Vedic & Epic Sk. māna, fr. man, orig. meaning perhaps "high opinions" (i. e. No. 2); hence "pride" (No. 1). Def. of root see partly under māneti, partly under mināti] 1. pride, conceit, arrogance (cittassa uṇṇati Nd1 80; Vbh 350). Māna is one of the Saððojanas. It is one of the principal obstacles to Arahantship. A detailed analysis of māna in tenfold aspect is given at Nd1 80=Nd2 505; ending with defn "māno maððanā . . . ketukamyatā" etc. (cp. Vbh 350 & see under mada). On term see also Dhs § 1116; Dhs trsl. 298 (=2275) sq. - D III.234; S I.4; Sn 132, 370; 469, 537, 786, 889, 943, Dh 74, 150, 407; Nd1 298; Pug 18; Vbh 345 sq., 353 sq., 383 (7 fold), 389 (9 fold); VbhA 486 sq. ("seyyo 'ham asmī ti" etc.); Tikp 166, 278; DhA III.118, 252; Sdhp 500, 539. -asmi° pride of self, as real egoism D III.273. - 2. honour, respect J V.331 (+pūjā). Usually in cpd. bahumāna great respect Mhvs 20, 46; PvA 50. Also as māni° in compn with karoti: see mānikata. Cp. vi°, sam° -ātimāna pride & conceit, very great (self-) pride. or all Pāli Text Society 1195 Pāli-English Dictionary kinds of conceit (see 10 fold māna at Nd1 80= Nd2 505) D III.86; Sn 245, 830, 862; Nd1 170, 257. atthe at Th 1, 214 read mānatthe=mā anatthe. -ānusaya the predisposition or bad tendency of pride M I.486; D III.254, 282; Sn 342. Cp. mamankāra. -ābhisamaya full grasp (i. e. understanding) of pride (with sammā°) M I.122 (which Kern. Toev. s. v. interprets wrongly as "waanvoorstelling"); S IV.205 sq., 399; Sn 342 (=mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaṃ SnA 344). -jātika proud by nature J I.88. -thaddha stubborn in pride, stiff-necked J I.88, 224. da inspiring respect Mhvs 33, 82. -mada (-matta) (drunk with) the intoxicating draught of pride J II.259; PvA 86. -saññojana the fetter of pride or arrogance D III.254; Dhs 1116=1233. See under saññojana & cp. formulæ under mada 2. -satta cleaving to conceit Sn 473. -salla the sting or dart of pride Nd1 59 (one of the 7 sallāni, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc., expld in detail on p. 413. See other series with similar terms & māna at Nd2 p. 237 s. v. rāga). Māna2 {Mana} (nt.) [fr. mā: see mināti; Vedic māna has 2 meanings, viz. "measure," and "building" (cp. māpeti)] 1. measure Vin III.149 (abbhantarima inner, bāhirima outer); DA I.140. -°kūṭa cheating in measure, false measure Pug 58; PvA 278. - 2. a certain measure, a Māna (cp. mānikā & manaṃ) J I.468 (aḍḍha° half a M., according to C. equal to 8 nāḷis). Mānatta {Manatta} (nt.) [a doubtful word, prob. corrupted out of something else, maybe omānatta, if taken as der. fr. māna1. If however taken as belonging to māna2 as an abstr. der., it might be expld as "measuring, taking measures," which suits the context better. The BSk. form is still more puzzling, viz. mānāpya "something pleasant": Mvyut § 265] a sort of penance, attached to the commission of a sanghādisesa offence DhsA 399 (+parivāsa). °ṃ deti to inflict penance on somebody Vin II.7 (+parivāsaṃ deti); IV.225. mānatt'āraha deserving penance Vin II.55, 162 (parivāsika+). See on term Vin. Texts II.397. Mānana (nt.) & Mānanā {Manana} (f.) [fr. māna1] paying honour or respect; reverence, respect S I.66; J II.138; Pug 19, 22; Miln 377 (with sakkāra, vandana, pūjana & apaciti); Dhs 1121; DhsA 373. - Cp. vi°, sam°. Mānava {Manava} see Māṇava. Mānavant {Manavant} (adj.) [fr. māna1] possessed of pride, full of conceit; neg. a° not proud Th 1, 1222. Mānasa {Manasa} (nt.) [a secondary formation fr. manas=mano, already Vedic lit. "belonging to mind"] intention, purpose, mind (as active force), mental action. Almost equivalent to mano Dhs § 6. In later language mānasa is quite synonymous with hadaya. The word, used absolutely, is more a t. t. in philosophy than a living part of the language. It is more frequent as -° in adj. use, where its connection with mano is still more felt. Its absolute use probably originated from the latter use. - DhsA 140 (=mano); Vbh 144 sq. (in definition of viððāṇa as cittaṃ, mano, mānasaṃ, hadayaṃ etc.: see mano II.3); DhA II.12 (paradāre mānasaṃ na bandhissāmi "shall have no intention towards another's wife," i. e. shall not desire another's wife); Mhvs 4, 6 (sabbesaṃ hita-mānasā with the intention of common welfare); 32, 56 (raððo hāsesi mānasaṃ gladdened the heart of the king). - As adj. (-°): being of such & such a mind, having a . . . mind, with a . . . heart; like: ādīna° with his mind in danger S V.74 (+apatiṭṭhitacitta); uggata° lofty-minded VvA 217; pasanna° with settled (peaceful) mind Sn 402 and frequently; mūḷha° infatuated Mhvs 5, 239; rata° PvA 19; sañcodita° urged (in her heart) PvA 68; soka-santatta° with a heart burning with grief PvA 38. 1196 Pāli Text Society Mānasāna {Manasana} Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [fr. mānasa, secondary formation]= mānasa in adj. use Sn 63 (rakkhita°). Mānassin (adj. n.) [prob. fr. manassin (*manasvin) under influence of māna. Cp. similar formation mānavant] proud Vin II.183 (expld by Bdhgh in a popular way as "manassayino māna-nissitā"). The corresponding passage at J I.88 reads māna-jātikā mānatthaddhā. {Manassin} Mānikata {Manikata} [pp. of a verb māni-karoti, which stands for māna-karoti, and is substituted for mānita after analogy of purakkhata, of same meaning] lit. "held in high opinion," i. e. honoured, worshipped S II.119 (garukata m. pūjita). Mānikā {Manika} (f.) [cp. māna2 2] a weight, equal to 4 Doṇas SnA 476 (catudoṇaṃ mānikā). Cp. BSk. mānikā, e. g. Divy 293 sq. Mānita {Manita} [pp. of māneti] revered, honoured Ud 73 (sakkata m. pūjita apacita). - A rather singular by-form is mānikata (q. v.). Mānin {Manin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. mana1] proud (of) Sn 282 (samaṇa°), 889 (paripuṇṇa°); Dh 63 (paṇḍita° proud of his cleverness, cp. DhA II.30); J I.454 (atireka°); III.357 (paṇḍita°); Sdhp 389, 417. - f. māninī Mhvs 20, 4 (rūpa° proud of her beauty). Mānusa {Manusa} (adj. n.) [cp. Vedic mānuṣa; fr. same base (manus) as manussa] 1. (adj.) human Sn 301 (bhoga); It 94 (kāmā dibbā ca mānusā); Pv II.921 (m. deha); 956 (id.). -amānusa divine Vv 356; Pv II.1220; ghostly (=superhuman) Pv IV.36; f. amānusī Pv III.7.9 - 2. (n. m.) a human being, a man Mhvs 15, 64; f. mānusī a (human) woman J IV.231; Pv II.41. -amānusa a superhuman being Pv IV.157. - pl. mānusā men Sn 361, 644; Pv II.117. As nt. in collective sense=mankind Pv II.113 (v. l. mānussaṃ; C.=manussaloka). Mānusaka {Manusaka} = mānusa viz. 1. (adj.) human: A I.213 (sukhaṃ); Sn 524 (brahma-khettaṃ); Dh 417 (yogaṃ= m. kāyaṃ DhA IV.225); Vv 356; J I.138 (kāmā). - f. manusikā Vism 407. - 2. a human being, man Pv IV.157. Also nt. (collectively) pl. mānusakāni human beings, men DhA I.233. Māneti {Maneti} [Caus. of man, cp. Sk. mānayati, Lat. moneo to admonish. Ger. mahnen, Ags. manian. The Dhtp 593 gives root as mān in meaning "pūjā"] to honour, revere, think highly of PvA 54 (aor. mānesuṃ,+garukariṃsu+pūjesuṃ). - pp. mānita. Māpaka {Mapaka} (-°) (adj. n.) [fr. māpeti] one who measures, only in doṇa° (a minister) measuring the d. revenue (of rice) J II.367, 381; DhA IV.88; and in dhañña° measuring corn or grain J III.542 (°kamma, the process of . . .); Vism 278 (in comparison). Māpeti {Mapeti} [Caus. of mā, see mināti. The simplex mimīte has the meaning of "erect, build" already in Vedic Sk.] 1. to build, construct S II.106 (nagaraṃ); Mhvs 6, 35 (id.); Vv 8453; VvA 260. - 2. to create, bring about, make or cause to appear by supernatural power (in folkoristic literature, cp. nimmināti in same sense) J II.111 (sarīraṃ nāvaṃ katvā māpesi transformed into a ship); IV.274; Mhvs 28, 31 (maggaṃ caused a road to appear). - 3. to measure out (?), to Pāli Text Society 1197 Pāli-English Dictionary declare (?), in a doubtful passage J IV.302, where a misreading is probable, as indicated by v. l. BB (samāpassiṃsu for T. tena amāpayiṃsu). Perhaps we should read tena-māsayiṃsu. Māmaka {Mamaka} (adj.) [fr. mama] lit. "mine," one who shows affection (not only for himself), making one's own, i.e. devoted to, loving Sn 806 (=Buddha°, Dhamma°, Sangha° Nd1 125; =mamāyamāna SnA 534), 927 (same expln at Nd1 382); Miln 184 (ahiṃsayaṃ paraṃ loke piyo hohisi māmako ti), - Buddha° devoted to the B. J I.299; DhA I.206. f. °māmikā J III.182. - In voc. f. māmike at Th 2, 207 (cp. ThA 172) "mother," we may perhaps have an allusion to mā "mother" [cp. Sk. māma uncle, Lat. mamma mother, and mātā]. -amāmaka see sep.; this may also be taken as "not loving." Māyā {Maya} (f.) [cp. Vedic māyā. Suggestions as to etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. manticulor] 1. deceptive appearance, fraud, deceit, hypocrisy Sn 245, 328 (°kata deceit), 469, 537, 786, 941 (: māyā vuccati vaðcanikā cariyā Nd1 422); Vbh 357, 361, 389; Miln 289; Vism 106 (+sātheyya, māna, pāpicchatā etc.), 479 (māyā viya viððāṇaṃ); VbhA 34 (in detail), 85, 493 (def.). Is not used in Pali Abhidhamma in a philosophical sense. - 2. mystic formula, magic, trick M I.381 (āvaṭṭanī m.). khattiya° the mystic formula of a kh. J VI.375; Miln 190; DhA I.166. In the sense of "illusion" often combd with marīci, e. g. at J II.330; V.367; Nd2 680A II. - 3. jugglery, conjuring Miln 3. - On māyā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 122; on term in general Dhs trsl.2 255 ("ilḷusion"); Expos. 333, 468n. - As adj. in amāya (q. v.) & in bahu-māye rich in deceit SnA 351. - Note. In the word maṃ at KhA 123 (in pop. etym. of man-gala) the ed. of the text sees an acc. of mā which he takes to be a contracted form of māyā (=iddhi). -kāra a conjurer, magician S III.142; Vism 366 (in comparison); VbhA 196. Māyāvin {Mayavin} (adj.) [fr. māyā, cp. Vedic māyāvin] deceitful, hypocritical D III.45, 246; Sn 89, 116, 357; Pug 19, 23; PvA 13. See also amāyāvin. Māyu {Mayu} [*Sk. māyu] bile, gall Abhp 281. Māra {Mara} [fr. mṛ, later Vedic, māra killing, destroying, bringing death, pestilence, cp. Lat. mors death, morbus illness, Lith. māras death, pestilence] death; usually personified as Np. Death, the Evil one, the Tempter (the Buddhist Devil or Principle of Destruction). Sometimes the term māra is applied to the whole of the worldly existence, or the realm of rebirth, as opposed to Nibbāna. Thus the defn of m. at Nd2 506 gives "kammābhisankhāra-vasena paṭisandhiko khandha- māro, dhātu°, āyatana°. - Other general epithets of M (quasi twinembodiments) are given with Kaṇha, Adhipati, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu at Nd1 489=Nd2 507; the two last ones also at Nd1 455. The usual standing epithet is pāpimā "the evil one," e. g. S I.103 sq. (the famous Māra-Saṃyutta: see Windisch, Māra & Buddha); Nd1 439; DhA IV.71 (Māravatthu) & freq. - See e. g. Sn 32, 422, 429 sq., 1095, 1103; Dh 7, 40, 46, 57, 105, 175, 274; Nd1 475; Vism 79, 228, 376; KhA 105; SnA 37, 44 sq., 225, 350 sq., 386 sq.; Sdhp 318, 449, 609. Further refs. & details see under Proper Names. -ābhibhū overcoming M. or death Sn 545=571. -kāyika a class of gods Miln 285; KvuA 54. -dhītaro the daughters of M. SnA 544. dheyya being under the sway of M.; the realm or kingdom of Māra A IV.228; Sn 764; Dh 34 (=kilesa-vaṭṭa DhA I.289). -bandhana the fetter of death Dh 37, 276, 350 (=tebhūmakavaṭṭasankhātaṃ DhA IV.69). -senā the army of M. Sn 561, 563; SnA 528. Pāli Text Society 1198 Pāli-English Dictionary Māraka {Maraka} (-°) [fr. māreti] one who kills or destroys, as manussa° man-killer J II.182; hatthi° elephant-killer DhA I.80. - m. in phrase samāraka (where the -ka belongs to the whole cpd.) see under samāraka. Māraṇa {Marana} (nt.) [fr. Caus. māreti] killing, slaughter, death D II.128; Sdhp 295, 569. Māratta {Maratta} (nt.) [*Māra-tvaṃ] state of, or existence as a Māra god, Māraship Vbh 337. Mārāpita {Marapita} [pp. of mārāpeti] killed J II.417; III.531. Mārāpitatta {Marapitatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. mārāpita] being incited to kill DhA I.141. Mārāpeti {Marapeti} [Caus. II. of mṛ]: see marati. - pp. mārāpita. Mārita {Marita} [pp. of māreti] killed S I.66; Vin III.72; J II.417 (aððehi m.-bhāvaṃ jānātha). Mārisa {Marisa} (adj.) [perhaps identical with mādisa] only in voc. as respectful term of address, something like "Sir," pl. "Sirs." In sg. mārisa M I.327; A III.332; Sn 814, 1036, 1038, 1045 etc.; Nd1 140=Nd2 508 (here expld by same formula as āyasmā, viz. piya-vacanaṃ garu-vacanaṃ etc.); J V.140; Pv II.133; Mhvs 1, 27. - pl. mārisā Sn 682; J I.47, 49; Vism 415; PvA 75. Explained by Buddhaghosa to mean niddukkha K.S. I.2 n. Māruta {Maruta} [for the usual māluta] the wind S I.127; Mhbv 8. Māretar {Maretar} [n. ag. to māreti] one who kills, slayer, destroyer S III.189. Māreti {Mareti} [Caus. of mṛ] to kill: see under marati. - pp. mārita. Māla {Mala} (māḷa) [?] 1. mud [is it mis-spelling of mala?], in pakka-m°-kalala (boiling mud) J VI.400. Kern, Toev. s. v. believes to see the same word in phrase mālā-kacavara at J II.416 (but very doubtful). - 2. perhaps= froth, dirty surface, in pheṇa° Miln 117 (cp. mālin 2), where it may however be māla ("wreaths of foam"). - 3. in asi° the interpretation given under asi (as "dirt" see above p. 88) has been changed into "sword-garland," thus taking it as mālā. Mālaka & Māḷaka {Malaka} [fr. māla or māḷa] a circular (consecrated) enclosure, round, yard (cp. Geiger, Mhvs. trsl. 99: "m. is a space marked off and usually terraced, within which sacred functions were carried out. In the Mahāvihāra (Tiss'ārāma) at Anurādhapura there were 32 mālakas; Dpvs XIV.78; Mhvs 15, 192. The sacred Bodhi-tree e. g. was surrounded by a malaka"). - The word is peculiar to the late (Jātaka-) literature, & is not found in the older texts. - J I.449 (vikkama°); IV.306; V.49 (visāla°), 138 (id., spelling maḷaka); Mhvs 15, 36 (Mahāmucala°); 16, 15; 32, 58 (sanghassa kamma°, encl. for ceremonial acts of the S., cp. 15, 29); DhA IV.115 (°sīmā); Vism 342 (vitakka°). Mālatī {Malati} (f.) [fr. mālā] the great-flowered jasmine Abhp 576. Cp. mālikā. Pāli Text Society 1199 Pāli-English Dictionary Mālā {Mala} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mālā] garland, wreath, chaplet; collectively=flowers; fig. row, line Sn 401; Pug 56; Vism 265 (in simile); Pv II.316 (gandha, m., vilepana, as a "lady's" toilet outfit); II.49 (as one of the 8 or 10 standard gifts to a bhikkhu: see dāna, deyyadhamma & yaðða); PvA 4=J III.59 (ratta-kaṇavera° a wreath of red K. flowers on his head: apparel of a criminal to be executed. Cp. ratta-māla-dhara wearing a red garland J III.179, an ensign of the executioner); PvA 51, 62. -asi °-kamma the sword-garland torture (so correct under asi!) J III.178; Dāvs III.35; dīpa° festoons of lamps Mhvs 5, 181; 34, 77 (°samujjota); nakkhatta° the garland of stars VvA 167; puppha° a garland or wreath of flowers Mhvs 5, 181. - On mālā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. In compn māla° sometimes stands for mālā°. -kamma garland-work, garlands, festoons VvA 188. -kāra garland-maker, florist, gardener (cp. Fick, Sociale Gleiderung 38, 182) J V.292; Miln 331; DhA I.208, 334; VvA 170, 253 (°vīthi). -kita adorned with garlands, wreathed Vin I.208. -guṇa "garland-string," garlands, a cluster of garlands Dh 53 (=mālā-nikaṭi "makeup" garlands DhA I.419; i. e. a whole line of garlands made as "ekato-vaṇṭika-mālā" and "ubhatov.-m.," one & two stalked g., cp. Vin III.180). mālā guṇaparikkhittā one adorned with a string of gs., i. e. a marriageable woman or a courtesan M I.286=A V.264. -guḷa a cluster of gs., a bouquet Vin III.139; SnA 224; VvA 32, 111 (v. l. guṇa). -cumbaṭaka a cushion of garlands, a chaplet of flowers DhA I.72. -dāma a wreath of flowers J II.104. -dhara wearing a wreath J III.179 (ratta°, see also above). -dhārin wearing a garland or wreath (on the head) Pv III.11 (kusuma°; v. l. BB °bhārin); PvA 169 (v. l. °bhārin); f. dhārinī Vv 323 (uppala°, of a Petī. See also bhārin). -puṭa a basket for flowers DhA III.212. -bhārin wearing a wreath (chaplet) [the reading changes between °bhārin & °dhārin; the BSk. prefers °dhārin, e. g. MVastu I.124 & °dhāra at Divy 218] J IV.60, 82; V.45; PvA 211 (v. l. °dhārin); f. °bhārinī J III.530; VvA 12; & bhārī Th 1, 459 (as v. l.; T. reads °dhārī). Cp. °dhārin. -vaccha [vaccha here= vṛḳṣa] a small flowering tree or plant, an ornamental plant Vin II.12; III.179; Vism 172 (v. l. °gaccha); DhA II.109 (q. v. for expln: taruṇarukkha-puppha). Mālika1 {Malika} (nt.) [fr. mālā or mala?] name of a dice J VI.281. Mālika2 {Malika} [fr. mālā] a gardener, florist Abhp 507. Mālikā {Malika} (f.) [fr. mālā] double jasmine Dāvs 5, 49. Mālin {Malin} (adj.) [fr. mālā] 1. wearing a garland (or row) of flowers (etc.) Pv III.91 (=mālābhārin PvA 211); f. mālinī Vv 362 (nānā-ratana°); Mhvs 18, 30 (vividhadhaja° mahābodhi). - 2. (perhaps to māla) bearing a stain of, muddy, in pheṇa° with a surface (or is it garland? ) of scum Miln 260. - 3. what does it mean in pañca°, said at J VI.497 of a wild animal? (C. not clear with expln "pañcangika-turiya-saddo viya"). Māluka {Maluka} (m. or f.?) [of uncertain origin] a kind of vessel, only in camma° leather bag (?) J VI.431 (where v. l. reads camma-pasibbakāhi vālukādīhi), 432 (gloss c.- pasibbaka). Māluta {Maluta} [the proper Pali form for māruta, the a-stem form of maru2=Vedic marut or māruta] wind, air, breeze S IV.218; Th I.2; II.372; J I.167; IV.222; V.328; VI.189; Miln 319; Vism 172 (=vāyu); VvA 174, 178. -īrita (contracted to māluterita) moved by the wind, fanned by the breeze Th 1, 754; II.372; Vv 4412=816; Pv II.123. See similar expressions under īrita. Pāli Text Society 1200 Pāli-English Dictionary Māluvā {Maluva} (f.) [cp. BSk. mālu] a (long) creeper M I.306; S I.207; A I.202 sq.; Sn 272; Dh 162, 334; J III.389; V.205, 215, 389; V.205, 215, 389; VI.528 (phandana°); DhA III.152; IV.43. - On maluvā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123. Mālūra {Malura} [late Sk.] the tree Aegle marmelos Abhp 556. Mālya {Malya} see malya. Māḷa & Māla {Mala} [Non-Aryan, cp. Tamil māḍam house, hall] a sort of pavilion, a hall D I.2 (maṇḍala°, same at Sn p. 104, which passage SnA 447 explns as "savitānaṃ maṇḍapaṃ"); Vin I.140 (aṭṭa, māla, pāsāda; expld at Vin III.201. In the same sequence of Vbh 251 expld at VbhA 366 as "bhojana-sālā-sadiso maṇḍala-māḷo; Vinay'aṭṭha-kathāyaṃ pana eka-kūṭasangahito caturassa-pāsādo ti vuttaṃ"); Miln 46, 47. - Cp. mālaka.- [The BSk. form is either māla, e. g. MVastu II.274, or māḍa, e. g. Mvyut 226, 43.] Māḷaka {Malaka} [a Non-Aryan word, although the Dhtm 395 gives roots mal & mall in meaning "dhāraṇa" (see under mala). Cp. malorika] a stand, viz. for alms-bowl (patta°) Vin II.114, or for drinking vessel (pānīya°) J VI.85. Māsa1 {Masa} [cp. Vedic māsa, & mās; Gr. mh/n (Ionic mei/s); Av. māh (moon & month); Lat. t month. Fr. *mē to measure: see mināti] a month, as the 12th part of the year. The 12 months are (beginning with what chronologically corresponds to our middle of March): Citta (Citra), Vesākha, Jeṭṭha, Āsāḷha, Sāvaṇa, Poṭṭhapāda, Assayuja, Kattika, Māgasira, Phussa, Māgha, Phagguna. As to the names cp. nakkhatta. Usually in acc., used adverbially; nom. rare, e. g. aḍḍha-māso half-month VvA 66; Āsāḷhi-māsa VvA 307 (=gimhānaṃ pacchima māsa); pl. dve māsā PvA 34 (read māse); cattāro gimhāna-māsā KhA 192 (of which the 1st is Citra, otherwise called Paṭhama-gimha "1st summer" and Bāla-vasanta "premature spring"). - Instr. pl. catūhi māsehi Miln. 82; PvA I.1012. - acc. pl. as adv.: dasamāse 10 months J I.52; bahu-māse PvA 135; also nt. chammāsāni 6 months S III.155. Freq. acc. sg. collectively: a period of . . ., e. g. temāsaṃ 3 months DhsA 15; PvA 20; catu° DA I.83; PvA 96; satta° PvA 20; dasa° PvA 63; aḍḍha° a fortnight Vin IV.117. - On māsa (& f. māsī), as well as shortened form °ma see puṇṇa. -puṇṇatā fullness or completion of the month DA I.140; -mattaṃ (adv.) for the duration of a month PvA 19. Māsa2 {Masa} [Vedic māṣa, Phaseolus indica, closely related to another species: mudga Phaseolus mungo] a bean (Phaseolus indica or radiata); usually combd with mugga, e. g. Vin III.64; Miln 267, 341; DA I.83. Also used as a weight (or measure?) in dhañña-māsa, which is said to be equal to 7 lice: VbhA 343. - pl. māse Vv 806 (=māsa-sassāni VvA 310). -odaka bean-water KhA 237. -khetta a field of beans VvA 808; VvA 308. -bīja bean-seed DhA III.212. -vana plantation J V.37 (+mugga°). Māsa3 {Masa} [identical with māsa2] a small coin (=māsaka) J II.425 (satta māsā=s. māsakā C.). Māsaka {Masaka} [fr. māsa2+ka=māsa3] lit. a small bean, used as a standard of weight & value; hence a small coin of very low value. Of copper, wood & lac (DhsA 318; cp. KhA 37; jatu°, dāru°, loha°); the suvaṇṇa° (golden m.) at J IV.107 reminds of the "gold" in fairy tales. That its worth is next to nothing is seen from the descending progression of coins at DhA III.108=VvA Pāli Text Society 1201 Pāli-English Dictionary 77, which, beginning with kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha-pāda, places māsaka & kāhaṇikā next to mudhā "gratis." It only "counts" when it amounts to 5 māsakas. - Vin III.47, 67; IV.226 (pañca°); J I.112 (aḍḍha-māsakaṃ na agghati is worth nothing); IV.107; V.135 (first a rain of flowers, then of māsakas, then kahāpaṇas); DhA II.29 (pañca-m.-mattaṃ a sum of 5 m.); PvA 282 (m+aḍḍha° half-pennies & farthings, as children's pocket-money). Māsakkhimhā {Masakkhimha} at Vin III.23 is for mā asakkhimhā "we could not"; mā here stands for na. Māsati, Māsana, Māsin {Masati} {Masana} {Masin} [fr. mṛṣ, for massati etc.; see masati| touch, touching, etc. in sense of eating or taking in. So is probably to be read for āsati etc. in the foll. passages, where m precedes this ā in all cases. Otherwise we have to refer them to a root ās=as (to eat) and consider the m as partly euphonic. -dumapakkāni-māsita J II.446 (C. reads māsita & explns by asita, dhāta); visa-māsita Milo 302 (T. reads visamāsita) having taken in poison; visa-māsan-ûpatāpa (id.) Vism 166; tiṇa-māsin eating grass J VI.354 (=tiṇakhādaka C.). - A similar case where Sandhi-m- has led to a wrong partition of syllables and has thus been lost through syncope may be P. eḷaka1, as compd with Sk. methi (cp. Prk. meḍhi), pillar, post. Māsalu {Masalu} [reading uncertain] only instr. māsalunā Miln 292, Trenckner says (note p. 428): "m. is otherwise unknown, it must mean a period shorter than 5 months. Cp. Sk. māsala." Rh. D. (trsl. II.148) translates "got in a month," following the Sinhalese gloss. - The period seems to be only a little shorter than 5 months; there may be a connection with catu in the word. Māsācita {Masacita} [māsa1+ācita] filled by the (say 6 or more) month(s), i. e. heavy (alluding to the womb in advanced pregnancy), heaped full M I.332 (kucchi garu-garu viya māsācitaṃ maññe ti; Neumann trsls "wie ein Sack voll Bohnen," thus taking m.=māsa2, and ācita as "heap" which however is not justified). This passage has given rise to a gloss at Vbh 386, where māsācitaṃ maððe was added to kāyo garuko akammaððo, in meaning "heavy, languid." The other enumns of the 8 kusīta-vatthūni (A IV.332; D III.255) do not give m. m. It may be that the resemblance between akam- mañño and maññe has played a part in reminding the Commentator of this phrase. The fact that Bdhgh comments on this passage in the VbhA (p. 510) shows, that the reading of Vbh 386 is a very old one. Bdhgh takes māsa in the sense of māsa2 & expls māsācita as "wet bean" (tinta māso), thus omitting expln of ācita. The passage at VbhA 510 runs: "ettha pana māsācitaṃ nāma tintamāso, yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṃ garuko ti adhippāyo." Māsika {Masika} (adj.) [fr. māsa1] 1. of a month, i. e. a month old Miln 302. - 2. of a month, i. e. consisting of months, so many months (old) (-°), as aḍḍha° at intervals of half a month D I.166; M I.238, 343; Pug 55; dve° two months old Pv I.67. - 3. monthly, i. e. once a month Th 1, 283 (bhatta). - Cp. māsiya. Māsiya {Masiya} (adj.) [=māsika] consisting of months D II.327 (dvādasa° saṃvacchara the year of 12 months). Miga {Miga} [Vedic mṛga, to mṛj, cp. magga, meaning, when characterised by another attribute "wild animal" in general, animal of the forest; when uncharacterised usually antelope] 1. a wild animal, an animal in its natural state (see cpds.). - 2. a deer, antelope, gazelle. Various Pāli Text Society 1202 Pāli-English Dictionary kinds are mentioned at J V.416; two are given at Nd2 509, viz. eṇi (antelope) & sarabha (red deer): see under eṇi & sarabha. - Sn 39, 72; J I.154; III.270 (called Nandiya); PvA 62, 157. On miga in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 123, where more refs. are given. -ādhibhū king of beasts (i. e. the lion) Sn 684. -inda king of beasts (id.) Sdhp 593. -chāpaka young of a deer VvA 279. -dāya deer park J IV.430 (Maddakucchi); VvA 86 (Isipatana). -dhenu a hind J I.152; DhA III.148. bhūta (having become) like a wild animal, M I.450 (°bhūtena cetasā). -mandalocana the soft eye of the deer Vv 6411; Pv I.115. See under manda. -rājā king of the beasts (the lion) D III.23 sq. -luddaka deer-hunter J I.372; III.49, 184; DhA II.82; VbhA 266 (in simile). -vadha deerslaying J I.149. -vittaka, amateur of hunting J IV.267. -visāna a deer's horn Pug 56. -vīthi deerroad J I.372. Migavā {Migava} (f.) [=Sk. mṛgayā, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 461] hunt, hunting, deer-stalking PvA 154 (°padesa). Usually in devasikaṃ migavaṃ gacchati to go out for a day's hunting J IV.267; or as pp. ekadivasaṃ migavaṃ gata VvA 260; ekāhaṃ m. g. Mhvs 5, 154. Migī {Migi} (f.) [f. of miga, cp. Epic Sk. mṛgī] a doe Th 1, 109; J V.215; VI.549; DhA I.48. Micchatta {Micchatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. micchā] item of wrong, wrongness. There are 8 items of wrong, viz. the 8 wrong qualities as enumd under (an-) ariya-magga (see micchā), forming the contrary to the sammatta or righteousness of the Ariyan Path. These 8 at D II.353; III.254; A II.221; IV.237; Vbh 387; Vism 683. Besides these there is a set of 10, consisting of the above 8 plus micchā-ðāṇa and °vimutti wrong knowledge & wrong emancipation: D III.290; Vbh 391; Vism 683 (where °ðāṇa & °viratti for vimutti). - See further D III.217 (°niyata); Pug 22; Dhs 1028 (cp. Dhs. trsl. §1028); Vbh 145; Tikp. 32 (°niyata-citta), 325 (°tika), 354 (id.). Micchā {Miccha} (adv.) [Sk. mithyā, cp. Vedic mithaḥ interchanging, separate, opposite, contrary (opp. saṃyak together: see samma); mithū wrongly; see also mithu] wrongly, in a wrong way, wrong-, false Sn 438 (laddho yaso), 815 (paṭipajjati leads a wrong course of life, almost syn. with anariyaṃ. Illustrated by "pāṇaṃ hanati, adinnaṃ ādiyati, sandhiṃ chindati, nillopaṃ harati, ekāgārikaṃ karoti, paripanthe tiṭṭhati, paradāraṃ gacchati, musā bhaṇati" at Nd1 144); VbhA 513 (°ðāṇa, °vimutti). -micchā° often in same combns as sammā°, with which contrasted, e. g. with the 8 parts of (an-) ariya-magga, viz. °diṭṭhi (wrong) views (D III.52, 70 sq., 76, 111, 246, 269, 287, 290, Dh 167, 316 sq.; Pug 39; Vism 469 (def.) PvA 27, 42, 54, 67; cp. °ka one who holds wrong views D III.45, 48, 264; Vism 426); °sankappa aspiration (D III.254, 287, 290 sq., Dh 11); °vācā speech (ibid.); °kammanta conduct (ibid.); °ājīva living (D III.176 sq., 254, 290; A II.53, 240, 270, IV.82); °vāyāma effort (D III.254, 287, 290 sq.); °sati mindfulness (ibid.); °samādhi concentration (ibid.); see magga 2, and cp. the following: -gahaṇa wrong conception, mistake J III.304. -cāra wrong behaviour Pug 39 (& adj. cārin); VbhA 383 (var. degrees). -paṭipadā wrong path (of life) Pug 49 (& adj.: °paṭipanna, living wrongly). -paṇihita (citta) wrongly directed mind Dh 42=Ud 39 [cp. BSk. mithyāpraṇidhāna Divy 14]. -patha wrong road, wrong course Vbh 145 (lit. & fig.; in exegesis of diṭṭhi, cp. Nd2 taṇhā III.; Dhs 381; DhsA 253). Miñja (nt.) & Miñjā (f.) {Minja} [Vedic majjan (fr. majj?); on form see Geiger. P.Gr. § 91, & cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. §§ 74, 101] marrow, pith, kernel Vin I.25 (in sequence chavi, camma, maṃsa, nahāru, aṭṭhi, miðjā); Vism 235 (id.); Kh III. (aṭṭhi°, f. cp. KhA 52, nt.); J IV.402 (tāla° pith of the palm); Mhvs 28. 28 (panasa°, f., kernels of the seeds of the jak-fruit). -rāsi heap of marrow Vism 260 (=matthalunga). Pāli Text Society 1203 Pāli-English Dictionary Miñjaka {Minjaka} =miñja, only in tela° inner kernels of tila-seed, made into a cake PvA 51. See doṇī2. Mita {Mita} [Vedic mita, pp. of mā, mināti, to measure; also in meaning "moderate, measured," cp. in same sense Gr. me/trios] measured, in measure D I.54 (doṇa° a doṇa measure full); Sn 300 (bhāgaso m. measured in harmonious proportions, i. e. stately); Pv I.1013 (id.); J III.541. amita unlimited, without measure, boundless, in Ep. amit-ābha of boundless lustre Sdhp 255. Also N. of a Buddha. -āhāra measured, i. e. limited food Sn 707. -bhāṇin speaking measuredly, i. e. in moderation Dh 227; J IV.252. Mitta {Mitta} (m. nt.) [cp. Vedic mitra, m. & nt., friend; Av. mipro, friend] friend. Usually m., although nt. occurs in meaning "friend," in sg. (Nett 164) & pl. (Sn 185, 187); in meaning "friendship" at J VI.375 (=mittabhāva C.). The half-scientific, half-popular etym. of mitta, as given at VbhA 108, is "mettāyantī ti mittā, minantī ti vā m.; sabba-guyhesu anto pakkhipantī ti attho" (the latter: "they enclose in all that is hidden"). - Two kinds of friends are distinguished at Nd2 510 (in exegesis of Sn 37 & 75), viz. āgārika° (a house- or lay-friend) and anāgārika° (a homeless- or clericalfriend). The former is possessed of all ordinary qualities of kindness and love, the latter of special virtues of mind & heart. - A friend who acts as a sort of Mentor, or spiritual adviser, is called a kalyāṇa-mitta (see under kalyāṇa). - Mitta is often combd with similar terms, devoting relationship or friendship, e. g. with amaccā colleagues and ðāti-sālohita° blood-relations, in ster. phrase at Vin II.126; A I.222; Sn p. 104; PvA 28; cp. ðāti-mittā relatives & friends Pv I.59; suhada ("dear heart") D III.187 (four types, cp. m. paṭirūpaka); suhajja one who is dear to one's heart PvA 191; sahāya companion PvA 86. The neut. form occurs for kind things D III.188; S I.37. - Opp. sapatta enemy PvA 13; amitta a sham friend or enemy Sn 561 (=paccatthika SnA 455); D III.185. pāpa-mitta bad friend PvA 5. - For refs. see e. g. Sn 58, 255, 296, 338; Dh 78, 375. -ābhirādhin one who pleases his friends J IV.274 (=mittesu adubbhamāno C.) -ddu [cp. Sk. mitra-druha] one who injures or betrays his friends S I.225; Sn 244; J IV.260; also in foll. forms: °dubbha Pv II.93 (same passage at J IV.352; V.240; VI.310, 375); °dūbha J IV.352; VI.310; °dūbhin [cp. Sk. °drohin] J IV.257; V.97 (°kamma); VI.375; DhA II.23. -paṭirūpaka a false friend, one pretending to be a friend D III.185 (four types: aððad-atthu-hara, vacī-parama, anuppiyabhāṇin, apāya-sahāya, i. e. one who takes anything, one who is a great talker, one who flatters, one who is a spendthrift companion.) -bandhava a relation in friendship, one who is one's relative as a friend Nd2 455 (where Nd1 11 has mantabandhava). -bheda see mithu-bheda -vaṇṇa pretence of friendship, a sham friendship Pv IV.86 (=mitta-rūpa, m.-paṭirūpatā PvA 268). Mittatā {Mittata} (f.) -(°) [abstr. fr. mitta] state of being a friend, friendship, in kalyāṇa° being a good friend, friendship as a helper (see kalyāṇa) D III.274; Vism 107. Mitti {Mitti} (f.) [a by-form of metti] friendship J I.468 (=metti C.). Mithu {Mithu} (adv.) [cp. Vedic mithū & P. micchā; mith, cp. mithaḥ wrongly; Goth. misso one another, missa-leiks different; Ger. E. prefix mis- i. e. wrongly: Ger. missetat wrong doing=misdeed; Lat. mūto to change, mutuus reciprocal; Goth. maipms present=Ags. mapum; mith in Vedic Sk. is "to be opposed to each other," whereas in Vedic mithuna the notion of "pair" prevails. See also methuna] opposite, reciprocally, contrary Sn 825, 882 (taken by Nd1 163 & 290, on both passages identically, as n. pl. of adj. instead of adv., & expld by "dve janā dve kalaha-kāraka" etc.). -bheda [evidently in meaning of mitta-bheda Pāli Text Society 1204 Pāli-English Dictionary "break of friendship," although mithu means "adversary," thus perhaps "breaking, so as to cause opposition"] breaking of alliance, enmity D II.76; J IV.184 (here with v. l. mitta°); Kvu 314. Middha {Middha} (nt.) [orig. pp. perhaps to Vedic mid (?) to be fat=medh, as DhsA 378 gives "medhatī ti middhaṃ." - More likely however connected with Sk. methi (pillar=Lat. meta), cp. Prk. medhi. The meaning is more to the point too, viz. "stiff." Thus semantically identical with thīna. - BSk. also middha, e. g. Divy 555] torpor, stupidity, sluggishness D I.71 (thīna°); Sn 437; A V.18; Dhs 1157; Miln 299, 412 (appa° not slothful, i. e. diligent, alert); Vism 450 (°rūpa; +rogarūpa, jātirūpa, etc., in def. of rūpa); DA I.211 (expld as cetasika gelaðða: see on this passage Dhs trsl. §1155); Sdhp 459. - See thīna. Middhin {Middhin} (adj.) [fr. middha] torpid, drowsy, sluggish Dh 325 (=thīnamiddh'ābhibhūta DhA IV.16). Midha {Midha} [does it refer to mī2 as in mināti2, or to middha?] is given as root in meaning "hiṃsana," to hurt at Dhtm 536 (with var. v.v ll.), not sure. Minana {Minana} (nt.) [fr. mi to measure, fix, construct] measuring, surveying DA I.79; DhsA 123. Mināti1 {Minati} [roots (Vedic) mā & mi; pres. minūte & minoti; Idg. *me, cp. Sk. mātra measure, māna; Av. mā-, mitiḥ measure; Gr. ma/tion small measure, mh_tis counsel Lat.; metior, mensis, modus; Goth. mēla bushel; Ags. maed measure (cp. E. mete, meet= fitting); Lith. m&etilde;tas year. - The Dhtm 726 gives mi in meaning "pamāṇa"] to measure VbhA 108 (see etym. of mitta); Pot. mine J V.468 (=mineyya C.); fut. minissati Sdhp 585. ger. minitvā Vism 72; grd. minitabba J V.90. - Pass. mīyati: see anu°, - pp. mita. - Cp. anu°, abhi°, ni°, pa°, vi°. Caus. māpeti (q. v.). Mināti2 {Minati} [Vedic mināti, mī (or mi), to diminish; cp. Gr. minu/w diminish; Lat. minor=E. minor; Goth. mins (little), compar, minniza, superl. minnists=Ger. mindest. - The Dhtp 502 gives mi with "hiṃsā," the Dhtm 725 with "hiṃsana." It applies the same interpretation to a root midh (Dhtm 536), which is probably abstracted fr. Pass. mīyati] to diminish; also: to hurt, injure. Very rare, only in some prep. combns. - See also mīyati. Miyyati & Miyati {Miyyati} {Miyati} [corresponding to Vedic mriyate, fr. mr, viā *mīryate>miyyati. See marati] to die. - (a) miyyati: Sn 804; Nett 23. med. 3rd pl. miyyare Sn 575; pot. miyye J VI.498; ppr. miyyamāna M III.246; Vism 49; fut. miyyissati M III.246. - (b) mīyati (influenced in form by jīyati & mīyati of mināti2): M III.168 (jāyati jīyati mīyati); J III.189; Dh 21; pot. mīyetha D II.63. ppr. mīyamāna S I.96. - pp. mata. Milakkha {Milakkha} [cp. Ved. Sk. mleccha barbarian, root mlecch, onomat. after the strange sounds of a foreign tongue, cp. babbhara & mammana] a barbarian, foreigner, outcaste, hillman S V.466; J VI.207; DA I.176; SnA 236 (°mahātissa-thera Np.), 397 (°bhāsā foreign dialect). The word occurs also in form milakkhu (q. v.). Pāli Text Society 1205 Pāli-English Dictionary Milakkhu {Milakkhu} [the Prk. form (A-Māgadhī, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. 105, 233) for P. milakkha] a non-Aryan D III.264; Th 1, 965 (°rajana "of foreign dye" trsl.; Kern, Toev. s. v. translates "vermiljoen kleurig"). As milakkhuka at Vin III.28, where Bdhgh expls by "Andha-Damil'ādi." Milāca {Milaca} [by-form to milakkha, viā *milaccha>*milacca> milāca: Geiger, P.Gr. 622; Kern, Toev. s. v.] a wild man of the woods, non-Aryan, barbarian J IV.291 (not with C.=janapadā), cp. luddā m. ibid., and milāca-puttā J V.165 (where C. also expls by bhojaputta, i. e. son of a villager). Milāta {Milata} [pp. of milāyati] faded, withered, dried up J I.479; V.473; Vism 254 (°sappa-piṭṭhi, where KhA 49 in same passage reads "milāta-dham(m)ani-piṭṭhi"); DhA I.335; IV.8 (sarīra), 112; SnA 69 (°mālā, in simile); Mhvs 22, 46 (a°); Sdhp 161. Milātatā {Milatata} (f.) [abstr. fr. milāta] only neg. a° the (fact of) not being withered J V.156. Milāyati {Milayati} [Vedic mlā, to become soft; ldg. *melā & *mlei, as in Gr. blac, blakeu/w to languish; Lat. flaccus withered (=flaccid); Lith. blakà weak spot; also Gr. blhxro/s weak. - Dhtp 440: "milā=gatta-vimāne" (i. e. from the bent limbs); Dhtm 679 id.] to relax, languish, fade, wither S I.126; It 76; J I.329; V.90. - Caus. milāpeti [Sk. mlāpayati] to make dry, to cause to wither J I.340 (sassaṃ); fig. to assuage, suppress, stifle J III.414 (taṇhaṃ). - pp. milāta. Millikā {Millika} at PvA 144 in passage paṃsukūlaṃ dhovitv-ābhisiñcimillikañ ca katvā adāsi is to be read either as "abhisiðci cimillikað ca k." or "abhisiðcitvā mudukað ca k." Miḷhakā {Milhaka} at S II.228 is to be read mīḷhakā (q. v.). Misati {Misati} [miṣ, Vedic miṣati, root given as misa at Dhtm 479, with expln "mīlane"] to wink (one's eyes): see ni°. Missa {Missa} (adj.) [orig. pp. of miś, cp. Vedic miśra. Sk. miśrayati, mekṣayati; Gr. mi/gnumi & mi/sgw; Lat. misceo, mixtus; Ags. miscian=mix; Ohg. miskan. - Dhtp 631 "sammissa"] 1. mixed (with: -°); various Vin I.33 (kesa°, jatā° etc.=a mixture of, various); Th 1, 143; J III.95, 144 (udaka-paṇṇa° yāgu); Pv I.92 (missā kiṭakā). nt. missaṃ as adv. "in a mixed way" Vism 552=VbhA 161 (+dvidhā). - 2. accompanied by (-°), having company or a retinue, a title of honour in names, also as polite address [cp. Sk. miśra & āraya miśra] J V.153 (voc. f. misse), 154 (f. missā). - 3. missa° is changed to missī in compn with kṛ and bhū (like Sk.), thus in missī-bhāva (sexual) intercourse, lit. mixed state, union J II.330; IV.471; V.86; VbhA 107; and missī-bhūta mixed, coupled, united J V.86 (=hatthena hatthaṃ gahetvā kāya-missībhāvaṃ upagata C.). Cp. sam.° -kesī (f.) "mixed hair," Ep. of a heavenly maiden or Apsaras Vv 6014 (expld at VvA 280 as "ratta-mālādīhi missita-kesavaṭṭī"). The m. missa-kesa occurs as a term for ascetics (with muṇḍa) at Vism 389. Missaka {Missaka} (adj. n.) [fr. missa] 1. mixed, combined J II.8 (phalika° rajata-pabbata mountain of silver mixed with crystal); VbhA 16 (lokiya-lokuttara°); usually °-, like °āhāra mixed food DhA II.101; °uppāda mixed portents, a main chapter of the art of prognosticating (cp. BṛhatSaṃhitā ch. 86: miśrak'ādhyāya) Miln 178; °bhatta=°āhāra SnA 97; Mhbv 27. - 2. (m.) an attendant, follower; f. missikā DhA I.211 (Sāmāvati°). - 3. (nt.) N. of a pleasure grove in heaven Pāli Text Society 1206 Pāli-English Dictionary (lit. the grove of bodily union), one of the 3: Nandana, M., Phārusaka J VI.278; Vism 424. - 4. (pl. missakā) a group of devas, mentioned at D II.260 in list of popular gods (cp. missa 2 and missakesī). Missakatta {Missakatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. missaka] mixing, mixture, combination with (-°) Tikp 291. Missana {Missana} (nt.) [fr. misseti] mixing Dhtp 338. Missita {Missita} [pp. of misseti] mixed, intermingled Sn 243; J V.460; PvA 198 (dhaðða sāsapatela°); VvA 280 (see under missa-kesī). Misseti {Misseti} [Caus. of miś, Vedic miśrayati] 1. to mix Miln 126 (mayaṃ missayissāma); PvA 191 (palāse sālīhi saddhiṃ). - 2. to bring together in cohabitation, to couple J V.154 (C.: kilesana misseti). - pp. missita. Mihati {Mihati} is given as root mih is given as root mih in 2 meanings at Dhtp, viz. (1) īsa-hasana (No. 328), i. e. a kind of laugh, for smi, as in mihita. (2) secana (No. 342). Mihita {Mihita} (nt.) [pp. of smi; this is the inverted-diæretic (Pāli) form (smita>*hmita>*mhita>mihita) for the other (Sk.) form smita (q. v.). The Dhtp (328) puts root down as mih] a smile J III.419; V.452; VI.504. -mihita-pubba with smiles Th 1, 460 (spelt mhita°); J VI.221 (=sita C.). - Cp. vimhaya, vimhāpaka, vimhita. Mīyati {Miyati} see miyyati see miyyati (Pass. of marati). given at Dhtp 267 & 614 with "nimīlane"] to wink, only in cpd. nimīlati to close the eyes (opp. um°). Mīḷha {Milha} [pp. of mih, Vedic mehati to excrete water, i. e. urine, only with ref. to the liquid; Sk. mīḍha=Lat. mictus, pp. of mingo, to urinate. Cp. Av. maēZaiti to urinate, meZ urine; Gr. o)mixei_n & o)/mixma id.; Ags. mīgan to ur.; in Ohg. mist & Ags. miox the notion refers more to the solid excrement, as in Pāli. - A related root *meigh to shed water is found in megha, cloud (watershedder), q. v. for further cognates] excrement M I.454 =III.236 (°sukhaṃ vile pleasure); A III.241, 242; Th 1, 1152; J II.11; VI.112; Vv 5211 (with ref. to the gūthaniraya); Pv III.45 (=gūtha PvA 194); DhA II.53 (°ṃ khādituṃ). -kūpa pit of excr., cesspool Pgdp 22. Mīḷhakā {Milhaka} (f.) [fr. mīḷha; cp. BSk. mīḍha-ghaṭa] cesspool S II.228 (so read for T. piḷhakā; v. l. BB miḷhakā). See also piḷhakā. The trsl. (K.S. II.155) gives "dungbeetle." Mukula {Mukula} [cp. Sk. mukula] a bud; see makula (where also see mukulita). - Abhp 811, 1116. Mukka {Mukka} [pp. of muc, Sk. mukta, for the usual P. mutta; cp. Prk. mukka, Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 566] only in um° & paṭi° (q. v.), and as v. l. at M III.61. Mukkhaka {Mukkhaka} at J I.441 should be read as mokkhaka, meaning "first, principal, foremost"; cp. mokkha2. Mukha {Mukha} (nt.) [Vedic mukha, fr. Idg. *mu, onomat., cp. Lat. mu facere, Gr. muka/omai, Mhg. mūgen, Lat. mūgio to moo (of cows), to make the sound "moo"; Ohg. māwen to cry, Pāli Text Society 1207 Pāli-English Dictionary muckazzen to talk softly; also Gr. mu_qos word, "myth"; Ohg. mūla=Ger. maul; Ags. mule snout, etc. Vedic mūka silent, dumb=Lat. mutus=E. mute] 1. the mouth Sn 608, 1022 (with ref. to the long tongue, pahūta-jivha, of the Buddha or Mahāpurisa); J II.7; DA I.287 (uttāna° clear mouthed, i. e. easy to understand, cp. D I.116); PvA 11, 12 (pūti°), 264 (mukhena). - 2. the face J VI.218 (uṇṇaja m.); PvA 74, 75, 77; °ṃ karoti to make a face (i. e. grimace) Vism 343. -adho° face downward Vin II.78; opp. upari° (q. v.); assu° with tearful face Dh 67; PvA 39; see assu. dum° (adj.) sad or unfriendly looking J II.393; VI.343; scurrilous J V.78; bhadra° brightfaced PvA 149; ruda° crying Pv I.112. - 3. entrance, mouth (of a river) Mhvs 8, 12; āya° entrance (lit. opening), i. e. cause or means of income DA I.218; ukkā° the opening of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A I.257; Sn 686; J VI.217; 574. ubhato-mukha having 2 openings M I.57. sandhi° opening of the cleft PvA 4. Hence: - 4. cause, ways, means, reason, by way of J III.55 by way of a gift (dānamukhe); IV.266 (bahūhi mukhehi). -apāya° cause of ruin or loss A II.166; IV.283. - 5. front part, front, top, in īsā° of the carriage pole S I.224=J I.203. Hence: - 6. the top of anything, front, head, best part; adj. topmost, foremost Sn 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaððā), 569 (nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando; cp. Vin I.246); VbhA 332 (=uttamaṃ, mukhabhūtaṃ vā). - Der. adj. mokkha & pāmokkha (q. v.). Note. A poetical instr. sg. mukhasā is found at Pv I.23 & I.32, as if the nom. were mukho (s-stem). - The abl. mukhā is used as adv. "in front of, before," in cpd. sam° & param°, e. g. PvA 13. See each sep. -ādhāna (1) the bit of a bridle M I.446; (2) setting of the mouth, i. e. mouth-enclosure, rim of the m.; in m. siliṭṭhaṃ a well-connected, well-defined mouth-contour DhsA 15 (not with trsl. "opens lightly," but better with note "is well adjusted," see Expos. 19, where write °ādhāna for °ādāna). -āsiya (? cp. āsita1) to be eaten by the mouth DhsA 330 (mukhena asitabba). -ullokana looking into a person's face, i. e. cheerful, bright, perhaps also flattering DhA II.193 (as °olokana). -ullokika flattering (cp. above) Nd1 249 (puthu Satthārānaṃ m. puthujjana); PvA 219. -odaka water for rinsing the mouth Nd2 391=Miln 370; VvA 65; DhA II.19; IV.28. -ja born in (or from) the mouth, i. e. a tooth J VI.219. -tuṇḍa a beak VvA 227 [cp. BSk. mukhatuṇḍaka Divy 387]. -dugga one whose mouth is a difficult road, i. e. one who uses his mouth (speech) badly Sn 664 (v. l. °dukkha). -dūsi blemishes of the face, a rash on the face DA I.223 (m.-dosa ibid.). -dvāra mouth opening PvA 180. -dhovana-ṭṭhāna place for rinsing the mouth, "lavatory" DhA II.184. puñchana wiping one's mouth Vin I.297. -pūra filling the mouth, a mouthful, i. e. as much as to fill the mouth J VI.350. -pūraka mouth-filling Vism 106. -bheri a musical instrument, "mouth-drum," mouthorgan (?) Nd2 219 B; SnA 86. -makkaṭika a grimace (like that of a monkey) of the face J II.70, 448 (T. makkaṭiya). -vaṭṭi "opening-circumference," i. e. brim, edge, rim DhA II.5 (of the Lohakumbhi purgatory, cp. J III.43 lohakumbha-mukhavaṭṭi); DhA III.58 (of a gong). -vaṇṇa the features PvA 122, 124. -vikāra contortion of the mouth J II.448. vikūṇa (=vikāra) grimace SnA 30. -sankocana distortion or contraction of the mouth, as a sign of displeasure DhA II.270; cp. mukha-sankoca Vism 26. -saññata controlling one's mouth (i. e. speech) Dh 363, cp. DhA IV.93. Mukhara {Mukhara} (adj.) [cp. Sk. mukhara; fr. mukha] garrulous, noisy, scurrilous S I.203; V.269; A I.70; III.199, 355; Th 1, 955; Sn 275; J III.103; DhA II.70 (ati°); PvA 11. - opp. amukhara M I.470; Th 1, 926; Pug 35; Miln 414. Mukharatā {Mukharata} (f.) [fr. mukhara] talkativeness, garrulousness, noisiness DhA II.70. Mugga {Mugga} [Vedic mudga, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 240] a kind of kidney-bean, Phaseolus mungo, freq. combd with māsa2 (q. v.). On its size (larger than sāsapa, smaller than kalāya) see A V.170 & cp. kalāya. - D II.293; M I.57 (+māsa); S I.150; J I.274, 429; III.55; VI.355 (°māsā); Pāli Text Society 1208 Pāli-English Dictionary Miln 267, 341; SnA 283. -sūpa bean-soup Vism 27. -sūpyatā "bean-soupcharacter," or as Vism trsl. 32 has it "bean-currytalk"; fig. denoting a faulty character, i. e. a man who behaves like bean-soup. The metaphor is not quite transparent; it is expld by Bdhgh as meaning a man speaking half-truths, as in a soup of beans some are only half-boiled. The expln is forced, & is stereotype, as well as is the combn in which it occurs. Its origin remains to be elucidated. Anyhow it refers to an unevenness in character, a flaw of character. The passage (with var. spellings) is always the foll.: cāṭukamyatā (pātu° Nd2; °kammatā Miln; pāṭu° Vbh) muggasūpyatā (°sūpatā Nd2; °suppatā Miln & KhA 236; °sūpatā and suppatā Vbh & VbhA 338; supyatā Vism) pāribhaṭṭatā (°bhatyatā Vism.; °bhaṭṭakatā Miln; °bhaṭyatā & °bbhaṭṭatā Vbh). At Nd2 391 it is used to explain sāvajja-bhogin, at Vism 17 & Vbh 246 anācāra; at Vbh 352 lapanā; at Miln 370 it is used generally (cp. Miln trsl. II.287). The C. expln of the Vbh passage, as given at (VbhA 483 &) Vism 17 runs as follows: "mugga-sūpa-samānāya sacc'ālikena jīvita kappanatāy'etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathā hi muggasūpe paccante bahū muggā pākaṃ gacchanti, thokā na gacchanti, evam eva saccālikena jīvitakappake puggale bahuṃ alikaṃ hoti, appakaṃ saccaṃ." The text at VbhA 483 is slightly different, although the sense is the same. Similarly at Vism 27. Muggatiya {Muggatiya} (nt.?) [fr. mugga?] a plant, according to C. a species of bean J VI.536. Muggara {Muggara} [cp. Sk. mudgara] a club, hammer, mallet J I.113; II.196, 382; V.47; VI.358; Miln 351; Vism 231; DhA I.126; II.21; PvA 4, 55 (ayo°), 56 (°pahāra), 66, 192. The word is specifically peculiar to the so-called Jātaka style. Mucala {Mucala} occurs as simplex only in Np. Mahā-mucala-mālaka Mhvs 15, 36. It refers to the tree mucalinda, of which it may be a short form. On the other hand mucal-inda appears to the speaker of Pāli a cp. noun, viz. king of the mucala(s) (trees). Its (late?) Sk. correspondent is mucilinda, of which the P. form may be the regular representative (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 34). - 1. the tree Barringtonia acutangula (Nicula*, of which it may be a dialectical distortion: *Abhp 563 nicula>*mucula> *mucala) Vin I.3; J V.405 (°ketakā, Dvandva); VI.269 (id.). - 2. N. of a nāga (serpent) king Vin I.3. - 3. N. of a great lake J VI.534, 535. Mucchati {Mucchati} [murch, an enlargement of Vedic mūr to get stiff (as in mūra stupid, dull, cp. Gr. mwro/s; Sk. mūrakha foolish). Used in 2 senses, viz. (a) to become stiff & (b) (Caus.) to harden, increase in tone, make louder. From (a) a fig. meaning is derived in the sense of to become dulled or stupid, viz. infatuated, possessed. - See also Lüders in K.Z. XLII.194 a. How far we are justified to connect Dhtp 216 mū & 503 mu ("bandhane") with this root is a different question. These 2 roots seem to be without connections. - mūrch itself is at Dhtp 50 defined with "mohe"] 1. (spelt muccati) to become stiff, congeal, coagulate, curdle Dh 71; DhA II.67. - 2. to become infatuated D III.43 (majjati+). - 3. only in Caus. muccheti to make sound, to increase in tone J II.249 (vīṇaṃ); III.188 (id.). - pp. mucchita. Mucchanā {Mucchana} (f.) [fr. mucchati 2] swelling or rising in tone, increase of sound J II.249 (vīṇaṃ uttama-mucchanāya mucchetvā vādesi). Mucchañcikatā {Mucchancikata} (°añji°) is probably the correct reading for puðcikatā. - We find puðcikatā at Dhs 1136, 1230; Vbh 351, 361 (v. l. pucchaðji°); DhsA 365; mucchaðci° at Nd1 8 & Nd2 p. 152; pucchañji° at VbhA 477. The meaning is "agitation," as seen from expln of term at DhsA 365 ("wagging of a dog's tail," pucchaṃ cāleti), and VbhA 477 ("lābhan'ālābhanaka- Pāli Text Society 1209 Pāli-English Dictionary ṭhāne vedhanā kampanā nīcavuttatā"). - The etym. expln is difficult; we may take it as a (misunderstood) corruption of *mucch-angi-kata i. e. mucchā+anga+kṛ "being made stiff-oflimbs," or "swoon." Psychologically we may take "swoon" as the climax of agitation, almost like "hysterics." A similar case of a similar term of swooning being interpreted by Bdhgh as "wavering" (cal) is chambhitatta "paralysis," expld as "sakalasarīra calanaṃ" at DA I.50. - The expression mucchaðcikatā reminds us of the term kaṭukaðcukatā. Mucchā {Muccha} [fr. mūrch] 1. fainting, swoon PvA 174. - 2. infatuation A II.10 (kāma°). Sn 328; Dhs 1059. Mucchita {Mucchita} [pp. of mucchati] 1. fainted, swooning, in a faint J I.243; DhA II.112; PvA 62, 174, 258. - 2. distraught, infatuated S I.61, 204; A I.274; D III.46 (a°); It 92; J III.432; V.274 (C. for pagiddha & gadhita). - Cp. pa°. Mujjati [The P. form of the Sk. majj] to sink, dive, be submerged Dhtp 70 (mujja=mujjana). Only in cpds. um° & ni°. {Mujjati} Muñcati {Muncati} [Vedic muñcati; muc, to release, loosen; with orig. meaning "strip off, get rid of," hence also "glide" as in Lith. mūkti to escape, Ags. smūgan to creep, Ger. schmiegen to rub against. See further connections in Walde, Lat. Wtb., s. v. emungo. The Dhtp 376 expls by mocane, Dhtm 609 id.; 631: moce; 765: pamocane] I. Forms. The 2 bases muñc° & mucc° are differentiated in such a way, that muñc° is the active base, and mucc° the passive. There are however cases where the active forms (muñc°) are used for the passive ones (mucc°), which may be due simply to a misspelling, ñc & cc being very similar. - A. Active. pres. muñcati J I.375; IV.272; V.453; Vv 6418; pot. muñcetha Dh 389; imper. muñca Dh 348; ppr. muñcanto Sn 791; aor. muñci J V.289; Mhvs 19, 44; pl. muñciṃsu J IV.142; ger. muðciya Mhvs 25, 67; mutvā J I.375; & muðcitvā ibid.; PvA 43; inf. muðcituṃ D I.96. - Caus. II. muðcāpeti D I.148. - B. Passive. pres. muccati Sn 508; ppr. muccanto J I.118; imper, sg. muccassu Th 2, 2; pl. muccatha DhA II.92; pot. muñceyya Pv II.26; PvA 104; Dh 127; fut. muccissati J I.434 (where also muñcissati in same sense); DhA I.105; III.242; PvA 53, 105; also mokkhasi Vin I.21=S I.111; pl. mokkhanti Dh 37; aor. mucci(ṃsu) S III.132; IV.20; J II.66; inf. muccituṃ Th 1, 253; DhA I.297. - Caus. moceti & mocāpeti (q. v.). - pp. mutta. - II. Meanings. 1. to release, deliver (from=abl.), set free (opp. bandhati) Sn 508 (sujjhati, m., bajjhati); S III.132 (cittāni mucciṃsu their hearts were cleansed), Th 2, 2 (muccassu); Dh 127 (pāpakammā, quoted at PvA 104); Pv II.26; PvA 53 (niray'ûpapattito muccissati), 105; DhA I.297 (dukkhā muccitu-kāma desirous of being delivered from unpleasantness; v. l. muðc°); II.92 (dukkhā). - 2. to send off, let loose, drop, give J IV.272 (saraṃ an arrow); Vism 313 (dhenu vacchakassa khīra-dhāraṃ m.); Mhvs 25, 63 (phalakaṃ). - 3. to let out of the yoke, to unharness, set free D I.148 (satta usabhasatāni muðcāpeti); PvA 43 (yoggāni muðcitvā). - 4. to let go, emit, send forth (light) J V.289 (obhāsaṃ muñci); Mhvs 19, 44 (rasmiyo). - 5. to send forth (sound); to utter, emit (words etc.) J I.375 (vācaṃ); Vv 6418 (mālā m. ghosaṃ=vissajjenti VvA 281). - 6. (from 4 & 5 in general) to undertake, to bestow, send forth, let loose on Dh 389: "na brāhmaṇassa pahareyya nāssa muðcetha brāhmaṇo," where DhA IV.148 supplements veran na muñcetha (i. e. kopaṃ na kareyya). In this case veraṃ muñcati would be the same as the usual veraṃ bandhati, thus opposite notions being used complementarily. The interpretation "give up" (enmity) instead of "undertake" is possible from a mere grammatical point of view. L. v. Sohroeder (Worte der Wahrheil) trsls "noch stürzt der Priester auf den Feind"! - 7. to abandon, give up, leave behind Dh 348 (muñca, viz. taṇhaṃ DhA IV.63); J V.453 (peta-rāja-visayaṃ). - 8. An idiomatic (late) Pāli Text Society 1210 Pāli-English Dictionary use of the ger. muñciya (with acc.) is in the sense of an adv. (or prep.), meaning "except, besides," e. g. maṃ m. Mhvs 25, 67; imaṃ m. (besides this Mhvs 14, 17). - Cp. pa°, paṭi°, vi°. Note. At Dh 71 muccati stands for muccheti (=Sk. mūrchati) to become stiff, coagulate, curdle; cp. DhA II.67. Muñcana & Muccana {Muncana} {Muccana} (nt.) [abstr. fr. muc] 1. release, being freed, deliverance J IV.478 (mucc°); °ākāra (muðc°) means of deliverance (dukkhato from ill) DhA I.267; °kāla time of release (dukkhā from suffering) DhA II.11 (mucc°, v. l. muðc°). - 2. letting loose, emitting, giving, bestowing VbhA 249 (speaking, shouting out; Vism reading p. 265 is to be corrected fr. maðcana!); PvA 132 (v. l. dāna). Muñcanaka {Muncanaka} (adj.) [fr. muðcana] sending out or forth, emitting VvA 303 (pabhā°). Muñja {Munja} [Vedic muñja, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 72] 1. a sort of grass (reed) Saccharum munja Roxb. Sn 440. °kesa having a dark mane (like m. grass) D II.174. °pādukā slipper made of m. grass DhA III.451. °maya made of m. grass Sn 28. - The reed itself is called isīkā (q. v.). - 2. a sort of fish J IV.70 (+rohita, taken as Dvandva by C.); VI.278 (id.). Muṭa {Muta} see mutoḷī. Otherwise occurring in Np. Muṭa-siva at Mhvs 11, 4. Muṭṭha {Muttha} [pp. of mussati, mṛṣ] having forgotten, one who forgets; only in two cpds., viz. °sacca [der. fr. foll.: muṭṭha+sati+ya] forgetfulness, lit. forgotten-mindedness, usually combd with asampajaðða, D III.213; A V.149; Pug 21; Dhs 1349 (where read: yā asati ananussati . . . adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā); Vbh 360, 373; Vism 21; DhA IV.85; & °sati(n) (adj.) "forgetful in mindfulness," i. e. forgetful, careless, bewildered [cp. BSk. amuṣitasmṛti Lal. V. 562, to all appearance (wrongly) derived from P. musati to rob, mus, muṣṇāti] D III.252, 282; S I.61 (+asampajāna); Pug 21, 35 (neither passage expld in PugA!); J III.488; VbhA 275. As °satika at Miln 79. - Note. muṭṭhasati with var. (unsuccessful) etym. is discussed in detail also by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, pp. 92-94. Muṭṭhi {Mutthi} (f.) [Vedic muṣṭi, m. f. Does defn "muṭ=maddane" at Dhtm 125 refer to muṭṭhi?] the fist VvA 206. muṭṭhī katvā gaṇhāti to take by making a fist, i. e. clutch tightly, clenching one's fist J VI.331. -muṭṭhiṃ akāsi he made a fist (as sign) J VI.364. As -° often meaning "handful." -ācariya-muṭṭhi close-fistedness in teaching, keeping things back from the pupil D II.100; S V.153; J II.221, 250; VvA 138; SnA 180, 368. kuṇḍaka° handful of rice powder VvA 5; DhA I.425. taṇḍula° handful of rice PvA 131. tila° do. of tilaseeds J II.278. paṃsu° do. of soil J VI.405. ritta° an empty fist SnA 306=DhA IV.38 (°sadisa alluding to ignorance). -yuddha fistfight, boxing D I.6. -sammuðjanī "fistbroom" a short broom DhA II.184. Muṭṭhika {Mutthika} [fr. muṭṭhi] 1. a fist-fighter, wrestler, boxer Vin II.105 (malla°); J IV.81 (Np.); VI.277; Vism 31 (+malla). - 2. a sort of hammer J V.45. Muṇḍa {Munda} (adj.) [cp. BSk. muṇḍa] bald, shaven; a shaven, (bald-headed) ascetic, either a samaṇa, or a bhikkhu or (f.) bhikkhunī S I.175 (m. sanghāṭi-pāruta); Vin IV.265 (f.); Sn p. 80 (=muṇḍita-sīsa SnA 402). -kaṇṇa° with cropped or shorn ears (appld to a dog) Pv II.1210, cp. muṇḍaka. -pabbataka a bare mountain J I.303 (Hatthimatta); VvA 302 (v. l. for T. muṇḍikapabbata). -vaṭṭin "shaven hireling" (?), a king's servant, probably porter Vin II.137. The expln given by Bdhgh on p. 319 (on CV. V. 29. 5) is twofold, viz. malla-kammakar'ādayo viya Pāli Text Society 1211 Pāli-English Dictionary kacchaṃ banditvā nivāsenti; and muṇḍa-veṭṭhī (sic) ti yathā raððo kuhiðci gacchanto parikkhāra-bhaṇḍavahana-manussā ti adhippāyo. Maybe that reading veṭi is more correct. sira shaven head DhA II.125. Muṇḍaka {Mundaka} =muṇḍa; cp. BSk. muṇḍaka Divy 13. - Sn p. 80; Dh 264 (=sīsa-muṇḍana-matta DhA III.391, qualification of a shaveling); VvA 67 (°samaṇā, Dvandva). -aḍḍha° shaven over one half the head (sign of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. -kaṇṇa° "with blunt corners," N. of one of the 7 great lakes: see under kaṇṇa. -paṭisīsaka the chignon of a shaveling, in phrase: kāsāyaṃ nivāsetvā muṇḍaka-paṭisīsakaṃ sīse paṭimuðcitvā fastening the (imitation) top-knot of a shaveling to his head Miln 90; cp. J II.197 (paccekabuddha-vesaṃ gaṇhitvā paṭisīsakaṃ paṭimuðcitvā), similarly J V.49. Muṇḍatta {Mundatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. muṇḍa] the fact of being shaven or shorn PvA 106. Muṇḍana {Mundana} (nt.) [fr. muṇḍa] shaving, tonsure DhA III.391 Muṇḍika {Mundika} (-pabbata) bare (mountain), uncertain T. reading at VvA 302 for v. l. SS muṇḍa-pabbata (q. v.). Muṇḍita {Mundita} [pp. of muṇḍeti] shaven SnA 402 (°sīsa). Muṇḍiya {Mundiya} [abstr. fr. muṇḍa] baldness, shaven condition (of ascetics & bhikkhus) M I.515; Sn 249; Kvu I.95; Sdhp 374. Muṇḍeti {Mundeti} [Denom. - Caus. from muṇḍa] to shave Mhbv 103. - pp. muṇḍita. - The BSk. has only Caus. II. muṇḍāpayati, at Divy 261. Should Dhtp 106 "muṇḍ= khaṇḍha" be the defn of muṇḍati? - At J III.368 we find muṇḍati for muṇḍeti (kuṇṭha-satthena muṇḍanto viya), which should prob. be read muṇḍento. Muta {Muta} [for mata, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. § 18] thought, supposed, imagined (i. e. received by other vaguer sense impressions than by sight & hearing) M I.3; Sn 714 (=phusan'arahaṃ SnA 498), 812; J V.398 (=anumata C.); Vbh 14, 429 sq. - Often in set diṭṭha suta muta what is seen, heard & thought (? more likely "felt," cp. Nd2 298: diṭṭha=cakkhunā d., sutaṃ=sotena s., mutaṃ=ghānena ghāyitaṃ, jivhāya sāyitaṃ, kāyena phuṭṭaṃ, and viððātaṃ=manasā v.; so that from the interpretation it follows that d. s. m. v. refer to the action (perception) of the 6 senses, where muta covers the 3 of taste, smell & touch, and viððāta the function of the manas) S I.186 (K.S. I.237 note); IV.73; Th I.1216. Similarly the psychol. analysis of the senses at Dhs 961: rūp'āyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ; sadd-āyat. sutaṃ; gandh°, ras°, phoṭṭhabb° mutaṃ; sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viððātaṃ. See on this passage Dhs trsl. § 961 note. In the same sense DhsA 388 (see Expositor, II.439). - D III.232; Sn 790 (cp. Nd1 87 sq. in extenso) 793, 798, 812, 887, 901, 914, 1086, 1122. Thus quite a main tenet of the old (popular) psychology. -mangalika one who prophesies from, or derives lucky auspices from impressions (of sense; as compd with diṭṭha-mangalika visible-omen-hunter, and suta-m. sound-augur) J IV.73 (where C. clearly expls by "touch"); KhA 119 (the same expln more in detail). -visuddhika of great purity, i. e. orthodox, successful, in matters of touch Nd1 89, 90. -suddhi purity in matter of touch Nd1 104, 105. Pāli Text Society 1212 Pāli-English Dictionary Muti {Muti} (f.) [for mati, cp. muta] sense-perception, experience, understanding, intelligence Sn 864; Nd1 205 (on Sn 846=hearsay, what is thought); Vbh 325 (diṭṭhi, ruci, muti, where muti is expld at VbhA 412 as "mudatī ti muti"!) 328; Sdhp 221. Cp. sam°. Mutinga {Mutinga} [Sk. mṛdanga on d>t. cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] a small drum, tabour D I.79; Vin I.15; S II.266 sq. (a famous mythological drum, called Ānaka; same also at J II.344); J IV.395 (bheri+); KhA 49. Spelling mudinga at S II.266; J IV.395; Vism 250; VbhA 232; VvA 210 (v. l. SS mutinga), 340 (id.). -sadda sound of the drum J I.3 (one of the 10 sounds, hatthi°, assa° etc.). Mutimant {Mutimant} (adj.) [fr. muti] sensible, intelligent, wise Sn 539; as mutīmā at Sn 61, 321, 385; pl. 881; J IV.76 (as mutīmā & mutimā); Nd2 511=259. Cp. matimant. Mutoḷī {Mutoli} [?] a doubtful word occurring only in one stock phrase, viz. "ubhato-mukhā m. pūrā nānā-vihitassa dhaññassa" at M I.57 (vv. ll. putoḷi, mūṭolī)=III.90 (mūtoḷī)=D II.293 (T. mutoli, v. l. muṭoli; gloss K pūtolī). The Dial. II.330 trsl. "sample bag" (see note on this passage; with remark "spelling uncertain"). Neumann, Mittlere Sammlung I.101 trsls "Sack." - Kern, Toev. s. v. mutoḷī tries to connect it with BSk. moṭa (Hindi moṭh), bundle, which (with vv. ll. mūḍha, muṭa, mūṭa) occurs only in one stock phrase "bharaiḥ motaiḥ piṭakaiḥ" at Divy 5, 332, 501, 524. The more likely solution, however, is that mutoḷī is a distortion of puṭosā (puṭosa), which is found as v. l. to puṭaṃsa at all passages concerned (see puṭaṃsa). Thus the meaning is "bag, provision-bag." The BSk. moṭa (muṭa) remains to be elucidated. The same meaning "provision-bag" fits at Vism 328 in cpd. yāna°, where spelling is T. °paṭṭoli, v. l. BB °putoḷi, but which is clearly identical with our term. We should thus prefer to read yāna-puṭosi "carriagebag for provisions." Mutta1 {Mutta} [pp. of muñcati; Sk. mukta] 1. released, set free, freed; as -° free from Sn 687 (abbhā° free from the stain of a cloud); Dh 172 (id.), 382 (id.). - Dh 344; Pv IV.134; PvA 65 (su°). - 2. given up or out, emitted, sacrificed Vin III.97=IV.27 (catta, vanta, m.) A III.50 (catta+). Cp. vi°. - 3. unsystematised. Comp. 9, 137 (vīthi°). -ācāra of loose habits D I.166=III.40=Pug 55 (where expld at PugA 231, as follows: vissatth'ācāro. Uccārakamm'ādīsu lokiyakulaputt'ācārena virahito ṭhitako va uccāraṃ karoti passāvaṃ karoti khādati bhuðjati). paṭibhāna of loose intelligence, or immoderate promptitude (opp. yutta°), quick-tempered Pug 42 (cp. PugA 223); SnA 110, 111; -saddha given up to faith Sn 1146 (=saddhādhimutta Nd2 512). -sirā (pl.) with loose (i. e. confused) heads KhA 120=Vism 415. Mutta2 {Mutta} (nt.) [cp. Vedic mūtra; Idg. *meud to be wet, as in Gr. mu/zw to suck, muda/w to be wet; Mhg. smuz (=Ger. schmutz), E. smut & mud, Oir. muad cloud (=Sk. mudira cloud); Av. muprem impurity, Mir. mūn urine; Gr. miai/nw to make dirty] urine Vin IV.266 (passāvo muttaṃ vuccati); Pv I.91 (gūthað ca m.); PvA 43, 78. Enumd under the 32 constituents of the body (the dvattiṃs-ākāraṃ) at Kh III. (cp. KhA 68 in detail on mutta; do. Vism 264, 362; VbhA 68, 225, 248 sq.) =M III.90=D II.293 etc. -ācāra see mutta1. -karaṇa "urine-making," i. e. pudendum muliebre, cunnus Vin IV.260. -karīsa urine & fæces, i. e. excrements Vin I.301; S III.85; A II.33; Sn 835; Nd1 181; J VI.111; Vism 259, 305, 342, 418 (origin of). -gata what has become urine DhsA 247 (gūtha°+). -vatthi the bladder Vism 345. Muttaka {Muttaka} (adj.) [mutta1+ka] only in cpd. antarā° one who is released in the meantime Vin II.167. Pāli Text Society 1213 Pāli-English Dictionary Muttakā {Muttaka} (f.)=muttā; °maya made of pearls Mhvs 27, 33. Muttatā {Muttata} (f.) [abstr. fr. mutta1] state of being liberated, freedom J V.480. Muttā {Mutta} (f.) [cp. Sk. muktā] a pearl Vv 377 (°ācita); Pv II.75 (+veḷuriya); Mhvs 30, 66. Eight sorts of pearls are enumd at Mhvs. 11, 14, viz. haya-gaja-rath'āmalakā valay'anguli-veṭhakā kakudha-phala-pākatikā, i.e. horse-, elephant-, waggon-, myrobalan-, bracelet-, ring-, kakudha fruit-, and common pearls. -āhāra a string or necklace of pearls J I.383; VI.489; DhA I.85; SnA 78 (simile); Vism 312. -jāla a string (net) of pearls J IV.120; Mhvs 27, 31; VvA 198. dāma garland or wreath of p. Mhvs 30, 67 (so T. for v. l. °maya). -vali string of pearls VvA 169. -sikkā string of pearls VvA 244. Mutti {Mutti} (f.) [fr. muc, cp. Sk. mukti] release, freedom, emancipation Sn 344 (muty-apekho); Nd1 88, 89 (+vimutti & parimutti); PvA 35, 46; Sdhp 492. - Cp. vi°. Muttika {Muttika} [fr. muttā] a pearl vendor, dealer in pearls Miln 262. Mudati {Mudati} [for modati?] in exegetical expln of "muti" at VbhA 412: mudatī ti muti. See muti. Mudayantī {Mudayanti} (f.) [cp. Sk. modayantī] a certain plant, perhaps Ptychotis ajowan J VI.536. Mudā {Muda} (f.) [fr. mud, see modati] joy, pleasure D II.214 (v. l. pamudā); Sdhp 306, 308. Mudinga {Mudinga} see mutinga. Mudita {Mudita} [pp. of mud, modati] pleased, glad, satisfied, only in cpd. °mana (adj.) with gladdened heart, pleased in mind Sn 680 (+udagga); Vv 8315 (+pasanna-citta). Cp. pa°. Muditā {Mudita} (f.) [abstr. fr. mudu, for the usual mudutā, which in P. is only used in ord. sense, whilst muditā is in pregnant sense. Its semantic relation to mudita (pp. of mud) has led to an etym. relation in the same sense in the opinion of P. Commentators and the feeling of the Buddhist teachers. That is why Childers also derivers it from mud, as does Bdhgh. - BSk. after the Pali: muditā Divy 483] soft-heartedness, kindliness, sympathy. Often in triad mettā ("active love" SnA 128), karuṇā ("preventive love," ibid.), muditā ("disinterested love": modanti vata bho sattā modanti sādhu sutthū ti ādinā mayena hita-sukh'āvippayogakāmatā muditā SnA 128); e. g. at D I.251; S V.118; A I.196 etc. (see karuṇā). - Cp. also Sn 73; D III.50, 224, 248; Miln 332 (°saððā;+mettā°, karuṇā°); Vism 318 (where defined as "modanti tāya, taṃsamangino, sayaṃ vā modati etc."); DhsA 192. See on term Dhs trsl. §251 (where equalled to sugxairosu/nh); Cpd. 24 (called sympathetic & appreciative), 97 (called "congratulatory & benevolent attitude"); Expos. 200 (interpretation here refers to mudutā DhsA 151 "plasticity"). Mudu (adj.) [Vedic mṛdu, fr. mṛd: see maddati; cp. Lat. mollis (fr. *moldÛis); Gr. a)maldu/nw to weaken, Cymr. blydd soft] soft, mild, weak, tender D II.17=III.143 (+taluṇa); A II.151 (paðcindriyāni mudūni, soft, blunt, weak: opp. tikkha); S II.268 (°taluṇa-hatthapādā); Sn 447 (=muduka SnA 393); Th 1, 460 (=loving); Pv I.92; Vism 64; PvA 46, 230. Compar. mudutara S {Mudu} Pāli Text Society 1214 Pāli-English Dictionary V.201. -indriya (mud°) weak, slow minded, of dull senses Ps I.121=II.195; Vism 87. -citta a tender heart PvA 54. -cittatā kind (soft) heartedness DhA I.234. -piṭṭhika having a soft (i. e. pliable) back Vin III.35. -bhūta supple, malleable D I.76 (+kammaniya); Pug 68. -maddava soft & tender (said of food taken by young women to preserve their good looks) DhsA 403. -hadaya tender-hearted DhA II.5. Muduka {Muduka} (adj.) [fr. mudu]=mudu. - 1. flexible, pliable, soft S II.221 (sanghāṭi); Vism 66 (giving in easily, cpd. with ukkaṭṭha & majjhima); KhA 49 (°aṭṭhikāni soft bones); Mhvs 25, 102 (sayana); bhūmi Miln 34. - 2. soft, mild, gentle, kindly, tender-hearted J V.83 (m. hadaya), 155; Miln 229 (cittaṃ m.); SnA 84 (°jātika), 393; DhA I.249 (citta); PvA 243. - 3. soft, weak, pampered, spoilt S II.268 (of the Licchavi princes). - See also maddava, & cp. ati°. Mudutā {Muduta} (f.) [cp. Sk. mṛdutā; abstr. fr. mudu. See also muditā] softness, impressibility, plasticity A I.9; D III.153 (trsln "loveliness"); Dhs 44 (+maddavatā); 1340 (id.); Vism 463 sq.; DhsA 151 (=mudubhāva); cp. Dhs. trsl. §1340. Muddā {Mudda} (f.) [cp. (late?) Sk. mudrā] 1. a seal, stamp, impression; -rāja° the royal seal DhA I.21. Also with ref. to the State Seal at Miln 280, 281 in cpds. muddakāma (amacca) & muddapaṭilābha. - 2. the art of calculation mentioned as a noble craft (ukkaṭṭhaṃ sippaṃ) at Vin IV.7 (with gaṇanā & lekhā), as the first of the sippāni (with gaṇanā) at M I.85=Nd2 199. Further at Miln 3, 59, 78 sq., 178. Cp. BSk. mudrā in same sense (e. g. at Divy 3, 26, 58 in set lipyā, sankhyā, gaṇanā, m.). Bdhgh's expln of muddā D I.11 m.+gaṇanā (see DA I.95) as "hattha-muddā-gaṇanā" is doubtful; since at Miln 78 sq. muddā & gaṇanā are two quite diff. things. See also Franke, Dīgha trsl. p. 18, with note (he marks muddā "Finger-Rechnen" with?); and cp. Kern, Toev. I.166 s. v. muddā. The Dial. I.21 trsl. "counting on the fingers" (see Dial. I.21, 22 with literature & more refs.). -hattha° is signlanguage, gesture (lit. handarithmetic), a means of communicating (question & answer) by signs, as clearly evident fr. J VI.364 (hattha-muddāya naṃ pucchissāmi . . . muṭṭhiṃ akāsi, sā "ayaṃ me . . . pucchati" ti ðatvā hatthaṃ vikāsesi, so ðatvā . . .; he then asks by word of mouth). -hattha-muddaṃ karoti to make a sign, to beckon J III.528; cp. Vin V.163: na hatthavikāro kātabbo, na hattha-muddā dassetabbā. -ādhikaraṇa the office of the keeper of the Privy Seal, Chancellorship Miln 281. Muddika {Muddika} (adj. n.) [fr. muddā] one who practises muddā (i. e. knowledge of signs) D I.51 (in list of occupations, combd with gaṇaka & trsld Dial. I.68 by "accountant"; cp. Franke, Dīgha p. 53, "Finger-rechner"?) Vin IV.8 (m., gaṇaka, lekhaka); S IV.376 (gaṇaka, m., sankhāyaka). Muddikā1 {Muddika} (f.) [fr. muddā] a seal ring, signet-ring, fingerring J I.134; III.416; IV.439; DhA I.394; II.4 (a ring given by the king to the keeper of the city gates as a sign of authority, and withdrawn when the gates are closed at night); IV.222. anguli° finger-ring, signetring Vin II.106; J IV.498; V.467. - Similarly as at DhA II.4 (muddikaṃ āharāpeti) muddikā is fig. used in meaning of "authority," command; in phrase muddikaṃ deti to give the order, to command Miln 379 (with ref. to the captain of a ship). Muddikā2 {Muddika} (f.) [fr. mudu, cp. *Sk. mṛdvīkā] a vine or bunch of grapes, grape, grape wine Vin I.246 (°pāna); J IV.529; DhA II.155. Pāli Text Society 1215 Pāli-English Dictionary Muddha1 {Muddha} [pp. of muh, for the usual mūḷha, corresp. to Sk. mugdha. Not=mṛddha (of mṛdh to neglect) which in P. is maddhita: see pari°; nor=mṛdhra disdained] infatuated, bewildered, foolish J V.436. -dhātuka bewildered in one's nature, foolish(ly) J IV.391 (v. l. luddha°); DhA III.120 (v. l. danta° & mūḷa°). Muddha2 & Muddhā {Muddha} {Muddha} [Vedic mūrdhan, the P. word shows a mixture of a- and n- stem] the head; top, summit. - m. sg. muddhā Sn 983, 1026, & muddhaṃ Sn 989; acc muddhaṃ D I.95; Sn 987 sq., 1004, 1025; Dh 72 (=paððāy'etaṃ nāmaṃ DhA II.73); & muddhānaṃ M I.243; III.259=S IV.56; instr. muddhanā Mhvs 19, 30; loc. muddhani Sn 689, 987; M I.168; Vism 262; Mhvs 36, 66, in meaning "on the top of (a mountain)": Vin I.5 (here spelt pabbatamuddhini)=S I.137; J IV.265 (Yugandhara°); Pv II.961 (Naga°=Sineru° PvA 138); Vism 304 (vammika° on top of an ant-hill). - Freq. in phrase muddhā (me, or no, or te) sattadhā phaleyya, as an oath or exclamn of desecration or warning: "(your) head shall split into 7 pieces," intrs. spelt both phal° & phāl° at J V.92 (te s. phal°); Miln 157; DhA I.17 (me . . . phāl°), 41 (te phalatu s.), 42 (ācariyassa m. s. phalissati); IV.125 (no . . . phāleyya); VvA 68 (me s. phal°). - In compn muddha°. -(n)aṭṭhi (muddhan-aṭṭhi) bone of the head KhA 51. -ādhipāta head-splitting, battering of the head Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025; -ādhipātin head-splitting (adj.) Sn 1026. -āra head (top) spoke KhA 172. -āvasitta "head-anointed" a properly anointed or crowned king D III.60 sq., 69; Pug 56; Miln 234. -pāta=°ādhipāta. Muddhatā {Muddhata} (f.) [fr. muddha1] foolishness, stupidity, infatuation J V.433 (v. l. muṭhatā, muddatā). Mudhā {Mudha} (adv.) [Class. Sk. mudhā] for nothing, gratis VvA 77. Munana {Munana} (nt.) [fr. munāti, almost equal to mona] fathoming, recognising, knowing; a C. word to explain "muni," used by Dhpāla at VvA 114 (mahā-isibhūtaṃ . . . mahanten'eva ðāṇena munanato paricchindanato mahā muniṃ), & 231 (anavasesassa ñeyyassa munanato muni). Munāti {Munati} [=manyate, prob. corresponding to Sk. med. manute, with inversion *munati and analogy formation after jānāti as munāti, may be in allusion to Sk. mṛṇāti of mṛ to crush, or also mā mināti to measure out or fathom. The Dhtm 589 gives as root mun in meaning "ðāṇa." The word is more a Com. word than anything else, formed from muni & in order to explain it] to be a wise man or muni, to think, ponder, to know Dh 269 (yo munāti ubho loke munī tena pavuccati), which is expld at DhA III.396 as follows: "yo puggalo . . . tulaṃ āropetvā minanto viya ime ajjhattikā khandhā ime bāhirā ti ādinā nayena ime ubho pi atthe mināti munī tena pavuccati." Note. The word occurs also in Māgadhī (Prk.) as muṇaï which as Pischel (Prk. Gr. § 489) remarks, is usually taken to man, but against this speaks its meaning "to know" & Pāli munāti. He compares maṇaï with Vedic mūta in kāma-mūta (driven by kāma; mūta=pp. of mū=mīv) and Sk. muni. Cp. animo movere. Muni {Muni} [cp. Vedic muni, originally one who has made the vow of silence. Cp. Chh. Up. VIII.5, 2; Pss. of the Br. 132 note. Connected with mūka: see under mukha. This etym. preferred by Aufrecht: Halāyudha p. 311. Another, as favoured by Pischel (see under munāti) is "inspired, moved by the spirit." Pāli explns (popular etym.) are given by Dhammapāla at VvA 114 & 231: see munana] a holy man, a sage, wise man. I. The term which was specialised in Brahmanism has acquired a general meaning in Buddhism & is applied by the Buddha to Pāli Text Society 1216 Pāli-English Dictionary any man attaining perfection in self-restraint and insight. So the word is capable of manysided application and occurs frequently in the oldest poetic anthologies, e. g. Sn 207-221 (the famous Muni-sutta, mentioned Divy 20, 35; SnA 518; expld SnA 254-277), 414, 462, 523 sq., 708 sq., 811 sq., 838, 844 sq., 912 sq., 946, 1074 & passim (see Pj. Index p. 749); Dh 49, 225, 268 sq., 423. - Cp. general passages & explns at Pv II.113; II.133 (expld at PvA 163 by "attahitañ ca parahitað ca munāti jānātī ti muni"); Miln 90 (munibhāva "munihood," meditation, selfdenial, abrogation); DhA III.521 (munayo=moneyya-paṭipadāya maggaphalaṃ pattā asekhamunayo), 395 (here expld with ref. to orig. meaning tuṇhībhāva "state of silence" =mona). - II. The Com. & Abhidhamma literature have produced several schedules of muni-qualities, esp. based on the 3 fold division of character as revealed in action, speech & thought (kāya°, vacī°, mano°). Just as these 3 are in general exhibited in good or bad ways of living (°sucaritaṃ & °duccaritaṃ), they are applied to a deeper quality of saintship in kāya-moneyya, vacīmoneyya, mano-moneyya; or Muni-hood in action, speech & thought; and the muni himself is characterised as a kāya-muni, vacī° & mano°. Thus runs the long exegesis of muni at Nd2 514A=Nd1 57. Besides this the same chapter (514B) gives a division of 6 munis, viz. agāra-muni, anagāra° (the bhikkhus), sekha°, asekha° (the Arahants), pacceka° (the Paccekabuddhas), muni° (the Tathāgatas). - The parallel passage to Nd2 514A at A I.273 gives a muni as kāya-muni, vācā° & ceto° (under the 3 moneyyāni). Mummura {Mummura} [*Sk. murmura, lit. crackling, rustling; cp. Lat. murmur=E. murmur, Gr. n=Ger. murmeln; all to Idg. *mrem, to which SQ marmara: see P. mammara & cp. murumurā] crackling fire, hot ashes, burning chaff J II.134. Muyhati {Muyhati} [Vedic muhyati, muh; defn Dhtp 343: mucchāyaṃ; 460: vecitte; cp. moha & momuha] to get bewildered, to be infatuated, to become dull in one's senses, to be stupified. Just as rāga, dosa & moha form a set, so do the verbs rajjati, dussati, muyhati, e. g. Miln 386 (rajjasi rajjanīyesu, dussanīyesu dussasi, muyhase mohaniyesu). Otherwise rare as finite verb; only DhsA 254 (in defn of moha) & Sdhp 282, 605 (so read for mayhate). - pp. mūḷha & muddha1. Muyhana {Muyhana} (nt.) [fr. muyhati] bewilderment, stupefaction, infatuation DA I.195 (rajjanadussana-m.). Muraja {Muraja} [cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. muraja, Prk. murava: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 254] 1. a small drum, tambourine J V.390; Vv 353 (=bheri VvA 161); 8418 (=mudinga VvA 340); SnA 370. - 2. a kind of girdle Vin II.136. Murumurā {Murumura} (indecl.) [onomat. to sound root mṛ, see mammara & mummura] the grinding, crackling sound of the teeth when biting bones, "crack"; in phrase m. ti khādati to eat or bite up to bits J I.342; V.21 (of a Yakkhinī, eating a baby). Murumurāpeti {Murumurapeti} =murumurāyati J II.127; III.134; V.196 (°etvā khādati). Murumurāyati {Murumurayati} [Denom. fr. murumurā] to munch, chew, bite up with a cracking sound J IV.491. Pāli Text Society 1217 Pāli-English Dictionary Muḷāla & Muḷālī {Mulala} {Mulali} (f.) [cp. Vedic mulālin. Zimmer, Altind Leben 70 mentions Bisa, Śāluka & Mulālin as edible roots of lotus kinds. - Geiger, P.Gr. 12 & 43 puts muḷāla =Sk. mṛṇāla] the stalk of the lotus: muḷālī Vin I.215 (bhisa+); muḷāli J VI.530 (=muḷālaka C.); muḷālikā Vin I.215 (bhisa+); bhisa-muḷālaṃ (nt.) (collective cpd.) fibre & stalks Vin II.201=S II.269; IV.94; V.39; Vism 361; VbhA 66. -muḷāli-puppha a lotus Th 1, 1089. Musati {Musati} [in this connection=mṛṣ in an active sense, as quāsi Denom. fr. musā. Not to muṣ to steal, which is given at Dhtp 491 with "theyya"] to betray, beguile, bewilder, dazzle, in cakkhūni m. D II.183 (but trsln "destructive to the eyes"); musati 'va nayanaṃ Vv 353 (cp. VvA 161). Musala {Musala} (m. nt.) [cp. Vedic musala. The etym. is probably to be connected with mṛd (see maddati)] 1. a pestle (whilst udukkhala is "mortar," cp. J II.428 & see udukkhala) D I.166=Pug 55; DhA II.131 (+suppa). - 2. a club A II.241; VvA 121. - 3. a crowbar J I.199; PvA 258 (°daṇḍa). Musalaka {Musalaka} (nt.) [fr. musala] a little pestle, a toy for little girls DhsA 321. Musalika {Musalika} only in cpd. danta° (an ascetic) who uses his teeth as a pestle J IV.8 (an aggipakkaṃ khādati, eats food uncooked, only crushed by his teeth). Musā {Musa} (adv.) [Vedic mṛṣā, fr. mṛṣ, lit. "neglectfully"] falsely, wrongly; uṣually with verbs vadati, bhanati, bhāsati & brūti to speak falsely, to tell a lie. - A I.149 (opp. saccaṃ); Sn 122, 158, 397, 400, 757, 883, 967, 1131; Nd1 291; Pv I.33; VvA 72 (=abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ); SnA 19; PvA 16, 152. -vāda lying, a falsehood, a lie D I.4, 25; III.68 sq.; 92 sq., 106, 170, 195, 232, 269; M I.414; Sn 129, 242 (cp. D II.174); Dh 246; Pug 57; Nd1 268; Vv 158; Pv I.68; VbhA 383 (var. degrees); PvA 16; Sdhp 65; explicitly at Nd1 152, 394; Nd2 515. Cp. mosavajja. -vādin speaking falsely, lying D I.138; III.15, 82; Dh 176; Pug 29, 38. Mussati [=mṛṣ mṛṣyati; to which musā "wrongly," quite diff. in origin fr. micchā: mṛṣā>mithyā. Dhtm 437 defines by "sammose," i. e. forgetfulness] v. intrs.: to forget, to pass into oblivion, to become bewildered, to become careless D I.19 (sati m.); J V.369 (id.); Sn 815 (=nassati SnA 536;=parimussati, paribāhiro hoti Nd1 144). - pp. muṭṭha. Cpp. pa°, pari°. {Mussati} Muhutta {Muhutta} (m. & nt.) [Vedic muhūrta, fr. muhur suddenly] a moment, a very short period of time, an inkling, as we should say "a second." - Its duration may be seen from descending series of time-connotations at PvA 198 (under jātakamma, prophesy by astrologers at the birth of a child): rāsi, nakkhatta, tithi, m.; and from defn at Nd2 516 by "khaṇaṃ, layaṃ, vassaṃ, atthaṃ." - Usually in oblique cases: muhuttena in a short time, in a twinkling of an eye PvA 55; muhuttaṃ (acc.) a moment, even a second Sn 1138 (m. api); Dh 65 (id.), 106; PvA 43. Muhuttika {Muhuttika} (adj.) [fr. muhutta] only for a moment; °ā (f.) a temporary wife, in enumn of several kinds of wives at Vin III.139 & VvA 73. Syn. tan-khaṇikā. Mū {Mu} is given as root as Dhtp 216 in meaning "bandhana." Pāli Text Society 1218 Pāli-English Dictionary Mūga {Muga} (adj.) [Vedic mūka; see etym. under mukha] dumb Vin I.91 (andha, m., badhira); Sn 713; DhA II.102 (andha, m., badhira); SnA 51 (in simile); Sdhp 12. Freq. combd with eḷa, deaf (q. v.). Mūla {Mula} (nt.) [Vedic mūra & mūla. The root is given as mūl in 2 meanings, viz. lit. "rohane" Dhtm 859, and fig. "patiṭṭhāyaṃ" Dhtm 391] 1. (lit.) root A II.200= M I.233; DhA I.270; IV.200 (opp. patti); Vism 270 (rukkha°=rukkha-samīpaṃ); Pv II.96 (sa° with the root); PvA 43 (rukkhassa mūle at the foot of). - 2. foot, bottom Vin II.269 (patta°); PvA 73 (pāda°), 76 (id.). rukkha° foot of a tree: see under rukkha for special meaning. - 3. (appld) ground for, reason, cause, condition, defd as "hetu, nidāna, sambhava" etc. at Nd2 s. v.; Sn 14=369 (akusa n. pl.=ākāra or patiṭṭhā SnA 23); Pv II.333 (sa° with its cause); Dukp 272, 297, 312, 320; Miln 12 (& khandha-yamaka, with ref. to the Yamaka). Very freq. in this sense as referring to the three lobha, dosa, moha as conditioning akusala (& absence of them=kusala), e. g. at D III.214, 275; A I.201; 203; Vbh 106 sq., 169, 361; Yam I.1; Vism 454; cp. Nd2 517; VbhA 382. - 4. origin, source, foundation, root (fig.) Vin I.231=D II.91 (dukkhassa); Vin II.304; Sn 916, 968 (cp. Nd1 344, 490); Th 1, 1027 (brahmacariyassa); Dh 247, 337. Freq. in formula (may be taken to no. 1) [pahīna] ucchinna-mūla tālāvatthukata etc. with ref. to the origin of saṃsāra, e. g. at S II.62, 88; III.10, 27, 161, 193; IV.253, 292, 376. See Nd2 p. 205 s. v. pahīna, in extenso. - 5. beginning, base, in mūladivasa the initial day DA I.311; also in phrase mūlakāraṇato right from the beginning VvA 132 (cp. BSk. mūlaṃ kramataś ca id. Divy 491). - 6. "substance," foundation, i. e. worth, money, capital, price, remuneration Miln 334 (kamma°); DhA I.270 (?); PvA 273; Mhvs 27, 23. amūla unpaid Mhvs 30, 17 (kamma labour). -iṇa° borrowed capital D I.71. -kanda eatable tuber DhA III.130; IV.78 (mūlaka°). See also kanda. -kammaṭṭhāna fundamental k. or k. of causes SnA 54. -ghacca radically extirpated Dh 250, 263. -ṭṭha one who is the cause of something, an instigator Vin III.75. -dassāvin knowing the cause or reason Sn 1043, cp. Nd2 517. -phala (eatable) fruit, consisting of roots; roots as fruit Sn 239. -bandhana fundamental bond (?) or set of causes (?) Sn 524 sq., 530 sq., cp. SnA 429-431. -bīja having seeds in roots, i. e. propagated by roots, one of the classes of plants enumd under bījagāma (q. v.). -rasa taste of roots, or juice made fr. roots VbhA 69; see under rasa. Mūlaka {Mulaka} (adj. nt.) [fr. mūla] 1. (adj.) (a) (-°) being caused by, having its reason through or from, conditioned by, originating in Vbh 390 (taṇhā° dhammā); Tikp. 233 sq., 252 sq., 288 sq. & passim; VbhA 200 sq., 207 sq. (sankhāra°, avijjā° etc. with ref. to the constituents of the Paṭicca-samuppāda); PvA 19. - (b) having a certain worth, price, being paid so much, dear Mhvs 27, 23 (a °ṃ kammaṃ unpaid labour); DhA I.398 (nahāna-cuṇṇa °ṃ catu-paṇṇāsa-koṭi dhanaṃ, as price); II.154 (pattha-pattha-mūlakā bhikkhā); III.296 (kiṃ mūlakaṃ how dear?). 2. (nt.)=mūla, i. e. root, bulb, radish, only in cpd. mūlaka-kanda radish (-root) J IV.88, 491; DhA IV.78. - See also pulaka. Mūlika {Mulika} (adj. n.) [fr. mūla] 1. (m.) root-vendor Miln 331. - 2. (adj. -°) belonging to the feet (pāda°), a footman, lackey J I.122, 438; II.300 sq. (N. of the king of Janasandha, Gāmaṇi-caṇḍa); III.417; V.128; VI.30. - 3. in rukkha° one who lives at the foot of a tree: see under rukkha, where also °mūlikatta. Mūḷha {Mulha} [Vedic mūḍha, pp. of muh; cp. also muddha1= Vedic mugdha] 1. gone astray, erring, having lost one's way (magga°) D I.85 ≈ (°ssa maggaṃ ācikkhati); Pv IV.148 (id. with pāvadati); PvA 112 (magga°). - 2. confused, infatuated, blinded, erring, foolish D I.59; Pv IV.334 (sa°, better to be written sam°). -gabbhā (f.) a woman whose "fœtus in utero" has gone astray, Pāli Text Society 1219 Pāli-English Dictionary i. e. cannot be delivered properly, a woman difficult to be delivered J I.407=DhA IV.192; Miln 169; VbhA 96. -rūpa foolish Dh 268; DhA III.395. Mūsika {Musika} (m.) & mūsikā (f.) [Vedic mūṣikā, fr. mūṣ] a mouse D II.107=Pug 43 (f.); Vism 109 (m.), 252= KhA 46 (m.); Mhvs 5, 30 (m.); VbhA 235. -cchinna (auguries from the marks on cloth (gnawed by mice) D I.9 (mūsikā°; DA I.92 mūsika°=undurakhāyitaṃ; cp. Dial. I.17). -darī a mouse-hole J I.462 (mūsikā°, so read for musikā°). -patha "Mouseroad" N. of a road Nd1 155, 415 (here mūsikā°). -potikā the young of a mouse J IV.188 (mūsika°). -vijjā mouse craft D I.9 (cp. DA I.93). Mūsī {Musi} (f.) [Venic mūṣ & mūḥ mouse or rat; cp. Lat. mūs Gr. mu_s, Ohg. mūs=E. mouse. Not to muṣ to steal, but to same root as Lat. moveo, to move] a mouse S II.270 (mudu° a tender, little m.). Me {Me}is enclitic form of ahaṃ is enclitic form of ahaṃ in var. cases of the sg. See under ahaṃ. Mekhalā {Mekhala} (f.) [cp. Vedic mekhalā] a girdle J V.202, 294 (su°, adj.); VI.456; ThA 35; KhA 109; DhA I.39; PvA 46. Mekhalikā {Mekhalika} (f.) [fr. mekhalā] a girdle Vin II.185 (ahi°, consisting of a snake). Megha {Megha} [Vedic megha; not to mih, mehati (see mīḷha), but to Idg. *meigh-, fog, rain; cp. Sk. miḥ mist; Av. maēga cloud; Gr. o)mi/xlh fog, Lith. mighá fog, Dutch miggelen to drizzle, also Ags. mist=Oicel mistr "mist"] a cloud Pv II.945; Vism 126; esp. a thundercloud, storm, S I.100 (thaneti), 154; Th I.307 (as kāḷa); It 66; J I.332 (pajjunna vuccati megha); DhA I.19; SnA 27 (°thanita-sadda). In this capacity often called mahā-megha, e. g. Sn 30; DhA I.165; KhA 21; PvA 132. - On megha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 124, 125. -nātha having clouds as protectors (said with ref. to grass-eating animals) J IV.253. -maṇḍala cloud-circle, a circle of clouds SnA 27. vaṇṇa cloud-coloured J V.321 (C. for megha-sannibha); °pāsāṇa a sort of ornamental building stone Mhvs 30, 59 (v. l., T. meda°; trsl. fat-coloured stones). See meda°. Mecaka {Mecaka} (adj.) [cp. Vedic mecaka] black, dark blue DhsA 13. Mejjati {Mejjati} [cp. Vedic midyati, to mid, see meda Dhtp 160, 413 & Dhtm 641 give mid with meaning "snehane"] to be fat, to be full of fat; fig. to be in love with or attracted by, to feel affection (this meaning only as a "petitio principii" to explain mettā) DhsA 192 (v. l. mijjati; =siniyhati). Mejjha {Mejjha} (adj.-nt.) [*medhya; fr. medha] 1. (adj.) [to medha1] fit for sacrifice, pure; neg. a° impure Sdhp 363. 2. (nt.) [to medha2 & medhāvin] in dum° foolishness Pug 21=Dhs 390 (expld at DhsA 254 by "yaṃ . . . citta-santānaṃ mejjhaṃ bhaveyya suci-vodānaṃ taṃ duṭṭhaṃ mejjhaṃ iminā ti dummejjhaṃ"). Meṇḍa {Menda} ṇṭha & miṇṭha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 293. The Dhtm (156) gives a root meṇḍ (meḍ) in meaning of "koṭilla," i. e. crookedness. The Ved. (Sk.) word for ram is meṣa] 1. a ram D I.9; J IV.250, 353 (°visāṇa-dhanu, a bow consisting of a ram's horn). -°patha Pāli Text Society 1220 Pāli-English Dictionary Npl. "ram's road" Nd1 155=415. -°yuddha ram fight D I.6. - 2. a groom, elephant-driver in cpd. hatthi° elephants'keeper J III.431; V.287; VI.489. Meṇḍaka {Mendaka} (adj.) [fr. meṇḍa] 1. made of ram(s) horn, said of a (very strong) bow J II.88 (°dhanu); V.128 (°singadhanu). - 2. belonging to a ram, in meṇḍaka-pañha "question about the ram" Miln 90 alluding to the story of a ram in the Ummagga-jātaka (J VI.353-55), which is told in form of a question, so difficult & puzzling that nobody "from hell to heaven" (J VI.354) can answer it except the Bodhisatta. Cp. Trenckner's remark Miln 422. Metta {Metta} (adj. nt.) [cp. Vedic maitra "belonging to Mitra"; Epic Sk. maitra "friendly," fr. mitra] friendly, benevolent, kind as adj. at D III.191 (mettena kāya-kammena etc.), 245 (°ṃ vacī-kammaṃ); as nt. for mettā in cpds. of mettā (cp. mettaṃsa) and by itself at D I.227 (mettaṃ+cittaṃ), perhaps also at Sn 507. Mettā {Metta} (f.) [abstr. fr. mitra=mitta, cp. Vedic maitraṃ. According to Asl. 192 (cp. Expos. 258) derived fr. mid to love, to be fat: "mejjati mettā siniyhatī ti attho"] love, amity, sympathy, friendliness, active interest in others. There are var. defns & explns of mettā: the stereotype "metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettā cetovimutti" Vbh 86=272; occurring as "metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ anudā anudāyana anudāyitattaṃ hitesitā anukampā abyāpādo . . . kusalamūlaṃ" at Nd1 488 & Dhs 1056 (where T. mettaṃ for metti, but see Dhs trsl.2 253). By Bdhgh at SnA 128 expld in distinction fr. karuṇā (which is "ahita-dukkhāpanayakāmatā") as "hita-sukh-ûpanaya-kāmatā," i. e. desire of bringing welfare & good to one's fellow-men. Cp. defn of mettā at Vism 317. - Sn 73 (see Nd2 p. 232), 967; D III.247 sq., 279; Vism 111, 321 sq.; SnA 54; PvA 66 (khanti, m., anudaya); Sdhp 484, 487. - Phrases occurring frequently: mettā ceto-vimutti D I.251; S II.265; A IV.150; It 20; Vbh 86 and passim. mettāsahagatena cetasā with a heart full of love D I.250; II.186; III.49 sq., 78, 223 sq.; S V.115; A I.183; II.129; IV.390; V.299, 344; expld in detail at Vism 308. mettaṃ karoti (loc.) to be friendly or sympathize with Mhvs 12, 23. - In cpds. usually mettā°, but shortened to metta° in mettacittaṃ kindly thought, a heart full of love D I.167; III.237; Sn 507; Pv II.1317; J VI.71; and metta-jhāna love-meditation, as expln of m.-citta at SnA 417; PvA 167. -aṃsa (mettaṃsa) sympathetic, showing love towards It 22 (v. l. °āsa); J IV.71 (=metta-koṭṭhāsa mettacitta C.). kammaṭṭhāna the k. of sympathy DhA IV.108. -bhāvanā cultivation or development of friendliness (towards all living beings) J I.176; III.45; Miln 199; Vism 295. -vihārin abiding in kindliness Dh 368; DhA IV.108; Nett 25; Vism 324; PvA 230. Mettāyati {Mettayati} [Denom. fr. mettā] to feel friendly, to show love, to be benevolent A IV.151; DhsA 194; VbhA 75. With loc. to show friendship or be affectionate towards J I.365; III.96; Dāvs III.34. Mettāyanā (f.) & Mettāyitatta (nt.) {Mettayana} {Mettayitatta} [abstr. formations fr. mettā]: see defn of mettā. Metti & Mettī {Metti} (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. maitrī] love, friendship J III.79; V.208; VbhA 75. See also defn of mettā. Metteyyattā {Metteyyatta} (f.) is occasional spelling for matteyyatā (q. v.), in analogy to petteyyatā; e. g. Nd2 294. Pāli Text Society 1221 Pāli-English Dictionary Methuna {Methuna} (adj.-nt.) [fr. Vedic mithuna pair, der. fr. mithu. Cp. micchā] 1. (adj.) relating to sexual intercourse, sexual, usually with dhamma, sex intercourse, in phrase °ṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati to cohabit Vin I.96; D II.133; Sn 291, 704; Nd1 139; Vism 418; SnA 536. - (m.) an associate J VI.294 (na rājā hoti methuno). - 2. (nt.) sexual intercourse [Vedic maithuna] D I.4; III.9, 88 sq., 133; Sn 400, 609, 814, 835=DhA I.202; Nd1 139, 145; Pug 67; Vism 51. Methunaka {Methunaka} [fr. methuna] 1. one concerned with (illicit) sexual intercourse, a fornicator Nd1 139 (in a wider sense). - 2. an associate Vin III.66. - 3. (nt.) coitus J II.360 (=methuna-dhamma C.). Meda {Meda} [Vedic medas (nt.) fr. mid, see etym. under mada] fat S I.124; Sn 196; J III.484 (ajakaraṃ medaṃ=ajakara-medaṃ C.); Kh III. (expld at Vism 262 as "thīnasineha" thick or coagulated fluid or gelatine); Vism 361; VbhA 66, 225, 245, 249. -kathālika a cooking pot or saucepan for frying fat A IV.377 (in simile with kāya); DhA II.179 (similar); Vism 195 (in compar.). -gaṇṭhi (as medo-gaṇṭhi, Sk. influence!) an abscess of fat, fatty knot or tumour, mentioned as a disease at Miln 149. -vaṇṇa fatcoloured; in cpd. °pāsāna a stone of the (golden) colour of fat found in the Himālaya mountains Sn 447 (=medapiṇḍa-sadisa SnA 393); Mhvs 1, 39; 30, 57 sq., 96; 31, 121; see Geiger's note Mhvs (P.T.S. ed.) p. 355, who puts it beyond doubt, that meda° is the correct reading for the v. l. megha° at all places. Medaka {Medaka} [meda+ka] in go° a precious stone of light-red (or golden) colour (cp. medavaṇṇa-pāsāṇa) VvA 111. Medinī {Medini} (f.) [of adj. medin, fr. meda fat, but cp. Vedic medin an associate or companion fr. mid in meaning to be friendly] the earth (also later Sk.) Mhvs 5, 185; 15, 47; Vism 125. Medeti {Medeti} [Denom. fr. meda] to become fat M I.238. Medha {Medha} [Vedic medha, in aśva, go°, puruṣa° etc.] sacrifice only in assa° horse-sacrifice & purisa° human s. (q. v.). e.g. at A IV.151; Sn 303. - Cp. mejjha. Medhaga {Medhaga} (&°ka)[cp. Sk. methana abusive speech; Vedic methati fr. mith to scold] quarrel, strife Vin II.88 (°ka); Th 2, 344; Sn 893, 894 (=kalaha, bhaṇḍana, viggaha, vivāda Nd1 302, 303), 935 (T. °ka; Nd1 402 & 406 °ga. with v. l. SS °ka); Dh 6; J III.334 (°ka; C.=kalaha), 488 (°ga; C. °ka expln kalaha); DhA I.65. Medhasa {Medhasa} (adj.) [=Vedic medhas, as a-base] having wisdom or intelligence, wise, only in cpds. bhūri° of great wisdom Sn 1131; & su° [Ved. sumedhas] very wise Vv 222 (=sundarapaðða VvA 111); Pv III.77 (both combd as bhūri-su-medhasa, hardly correct; v. l. M. bhūrimedhasa PvA 205). Medhā {Medha} (f.) [Vedic medhā & medhas, perhaps to Gr. maq° in manqa/nw ("mathematics")] wisdom, intelligence, sagacity Nd1 s. v. (m. vuccati paððā); Pug 25; Dhs 16, DhsA 148; PvA 40 (=paððā). - adj. sumedha wise, clever, intelligent Sn 177; opp. dum° stupid Pv I.82. -khīṇamedha one whose intelligence has been impaired, stupefied J VI.295 (=khīṇa-pañña). Medhāvitā {Medhavita} (f.) [abstr. fr. medhāvin] cleverness, intelligence VvA 229. Pāli Text Society Medhāvin 1222 Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [medhā+in=*medhāyin>medhāvin; already Vedic, cp. medhasa] intelligent, wise, often combd with paṇḍita & bahussuta: D I.120; S IV.375; A IV.244; Vin IV.10, 13, 141; Sn 323 (acc. medhāvinaṃ +bahussutaṃ) 627, 1008 (Ep. of Mogharājā), 1125 (id.); Nd2 259 (s. v. jātimā, with var. other synonyms); Dh 36; J VI.294; Miln 21; DhA I.257; II.108; IV.169; VvA 131; PvA 41. {Medhavin} Medhi {Medhi} (f.) [Vedic methī pillar, post (to bind cattle to); BSk. medhi Divy 244; Prk. meḍhi Pischel Gr. § 221. See for etym. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. meta] pillar, part of a stūpa [not in the Canon?]. Medhin {Medhin} (adj.-n.)=medha in adj. use; only in cpd. dummedhin (=dum-medha) foolish, ignorant Dh 26 (bālā dummedhino janā;=nippaððā DhA I.257). Meraya {Meraya} (nt.) [Epic Sk. maireya, cp. Halāyudha 2, 175 (Aufrecht p. 314); prob. dial.] a sort of intoxicating liquor, spirits, rum, usually combd with surā. D I.146- 166; M I.238; Pug 55; Dh 247; J IV.117 (pupphāsav-ādi, i. e. made fr. flowers, cp. defn dhātakī-puṣpaguḍa-dhāny-āmlasanskṛtaṃ by Mādhava, Halāy. p. 314). Five kinds are given by Dhpāla at VvA 73, viz. pupphāsava, phal'āsava, madhv°, guḷ°, sambhārasaṃyutta. Merita {Merita} in bhayamerita in bhayamerita J IV.424=V.359 is to be read as bhaya-m-erita driven by fear; there is no need to change it with Kern, Toev. to perita. Mella {Mella} [dial. or uncertain reading?] citron (=mātulunga) J III.319 (gloss bella). Mokkha1 {Mokkha} [late Vedic & Epic Sk. mokṣa, fr. muc, see muñcati. Dhtp 539 mokkha=mocana; Dhtm 751= moca] 1. (lit.) release, freedom from, in bandhanā m. D I.73=M I.276. - 2. (fig.) release, deliverance, salvation Vbh 426 (jarā-maraṇa° from old age & death); DhA I.4 (°magga+sagga-magga, the way to heaven & salvation), 89, 90 (°dhamma=salvation) Mhvs 5, 61. - 3. (lit.) (act.) letting loose, emission, uttering (of speech) J I.375. - 4. it may (& prob. ought to) be taken as adj. (=*mokṣya, grd. of Caus. of muc) at Sn 773 (añña°, either=1, as "deliverance for others," or=4, as "to be delivered by others." Bdhgh at SnA 516 gives both explns: aññe mocetuṃ (na) sakkonti, kāraṇa-vacanaṃ vā etaṃ: aððena mocetabbā (na) honti). Mokkha2 {Mokkha} (adj.) [fr. mukha 6; Vṛddhi form=*maukhya] the headmost, first, foremost, in series aggo seṭṭho m. uttamo A II.95, where the customary tradition reads pāmokkha (see under mahā & cp. Nd2 502A). Mokkhaka {Mokkhaka} =mokkha2; thus we should read at J I.441 for mukkhaka. Mokkhacika {Mokkhacika} (m. or °ā f.) [see on attempt at etym. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1885, 49 who takes mokkha as fr. muc "tumbling" & cika="turning" fr. cak=cik. The word remains obscure, it must be a dialectical expression, distorted by popular analogy & taken perhaps from a designation of a place where these feats or toys had their origin. More probable than Morris'etym. is an analysis of the word (if it is Aryan) as mokkha= mokkha2, in meaning "head, top," so that it may mean "head over," top-first" & we have to separate *mokkhac-ika the °ika representing °iya "in the manner of, like" & -ac being the adv. of direction as contained in Sk. prāðc=pra-añc.] tumbling, turning somersaults, an acrobatic feat; in list of Pāli Text Society 1223 Pāli-English Dictionary forbidden amusements at D I.6 (cp. DA I.86; samparivattaka-kīḷanaṃ, i. e. playing with something that rolls along, continuously turning? The foll. sentence however seems to imply turning head over heels: "ākāse vā daṇḍaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariya (so read!) -bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ"; i. e. trapeze-performing. Cp. Dial. I.10 & Vin. Texts II.184). The list re-occurs at Vin II.10 (°āya: f.! kīḷanti); III.180; M I.266≈and A V.203 (with important v. l. mokkhaṭika, which would imply mokkha & ending tiya, and not °cika at all. The Cy. on this passage expls as: daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā heṭṭh-uppariya (sic. as DA I.86; correct to upariya?) -bhāvena parivattana-kīḷanaṃ). The word is found also at Vin I.275, where the boy of a Seṭṭhi in Bārāṇasī contracts injuries to his intestines by "mokkhacikāya kīḷanto," playing (with a) m. - According to its use with kīḷati & in instr. mokkhacikena (Nd2 219) may be either a sort of game or an instrument (toy), with which children play. Mokkhati {Mokkhati} see under muñcati. Mogha {Mogha} (adj.) [the Vedic mogha for the later Sk. moha, which is the P. noun moha; fr. muh. BSk. mohapuruṣa e. g. at AvŚ II.177; MVastu III.440] empty, vain, useless, stupid, foolish D I.187 (opp. to sacca), 199; Sn 354; Dh 260 (°jiṇṇa grown old in vain; C. expls as tuccha-jiṇṇa DhA III.388); DhA I.110 (patthanā a futile wish); PvA 194. - Opp. amogha S I.232; J VI.26; DhA II.34 (°ṃ tassa jīvitaṃ: not in vain). -purisa a stupid or dense fellow Vin IV.126, 144. Moca1 {Moca} [cp. *Sk. moca & mocā] the plantain or banana tree' Musa, sapientum Vin I.246 (°pāna drink made fr. M. s.; one of the 8 permitted drinks); J IV.181; V.405, 465. Moca2 {Moca} [root-noun of moc, Caus. of muc] delivery, setting free Dhtm 631, 751, where Dhtp in same context reads mocana. Mocana {Mocana} (nt.) [fr. moceti] 1. setting free, delivering DhA III.199 (parissayā°); Dhtp 376, 539; Dhtm 609. Cp. moca2. - 2. letting loose, discharging, in assu° shedding tears PvA 18. Cp. vi°. Mocaya {Mocaya} (adj.) [quāsi grd. formation fr. moceti] to be freed, able to escape, in dum° difficult to obtain freedom J VI.234. Mocāpana {Mocapana} (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. mocāpeti] causing one's freedom, deliverance J VI.134. Mocetar {Mocetar} [M. ag. fr. moceti] one who sets free, a deliverer Nd1 32. Moceti {Moceti} [Caus. of muñcati] 1. to deliver, set free, release, cause one's release or deliverance from (abl.). imper. praes. mocehi Pv II.16 (duggatiyā); PvA 12; aor. mocesi PvA 112 (dāsavyato); ger. mocetvā PvA 8, 77; inf. mocetuṃ PvA 45 (petalokato). - 2. to discharge, emit (semen in coitu) Vin III.36, 39 (as Caus II.), 110. - 3. to let loose, set into motion, stir: padaṃ m. to run J III.33. - 4. to discharge, fulfil: paṭiññaṃ one's promise DhA I.93. - 5. to unharness DhA I.67. - 6. to detach S I.44. - Caus. II. mocāpeti to cause to be freed, to give freedom, to let loose Vin IV.316 (opp. bandhāpeti). Moṭa {Mota} [BSk. moṭa, Prk. mrḍa: Pischel § 166, 238] see mutoḷī. Pāli Text Society 1224 Pāli-English Dictionary Motar {Motar} [n. ag. fr. munāti, more likely direct der. fr. muta, pp. of man, q. v.] one who feels (or senses) that which can be felt (or sensed), in phrase "mutaṃ na maññati motabbaṃ (so read) na maððati motāraṃ" he does not identify what is sensed with that which is not sensed, nor with what is to be sensed (motabba) nor with him who senses A II.25; where motar & motabba correspond to sotar & sotabba & daṭṭhar & daṭṭhabba. The word does not occur in the similar passage M I.3. Modaka {Modaka} [cp. Epic. Sk. modaka in meaning 1] 1. a sort of sweetmeat S I.148; A I.130; III.76; Pug 32; PvA 4. - 2. receptacle for a letter, an envelope, wrapper or such like J VI.385 (paṇṇaṃ 1. cp. Vedic moda joy Dhtp 146: tose] to rejoice, Qo enjoy oneself, to be happy A III.40; Sn 561; Pv I.54; II.121. - pp. mudita (q. v.). For mohayamāna at DhA I.275 the better reading is modayamāna rejoicing, a ppr. med. Modana {Modana} (nt.) [fr. mud] satisfaction, rejoicing Sdhp 229. Cp. sam°. Modanā {Modana} (f.) [fr. mud] blending (?); Cy. expln at DhsA 143 of term āmodanā. Modara {Modara} : In modara at J V.54 (of elephant's teeth) Kern, Toev. s. v. sees a miswriting for medura (full of, beset with), which however does not occur in Pali. The C. expln is "samantato obhāsento," i. e. shining. Mona (nt.) [fr. muni, equal to *maunya taken by Nd as root of moneyya] wisdom, character, self-possession Sn 540 (°patha=ðāṇa-patha SnA 435), 718, 723; Nd1 57; Nd2 514 A (=ðāṇa & paððā); Th 1, 168 (what is monissaṃ? fut. 1st sg. of ?). {Mona} Moneyya {Moneyya} (nt.) [fr. muni, cp. Vedic moneya] state of a muni, muni-hood; good character, moral perfection. This is always represented as 3 fold, viz. kāya°, vacī°, mano° (see under muni), e. g. at D III.220; A I.273; Nd1 57; Nd2 514 A (where also used as adj.: moneyyā dhammā properties of a perfect character). Cp. also Sn 484, 698, 700 sq. On moneyya-kolāhala (forebodings of the highest wisdom) see the latter. Momūha (adj.) [intens.-redupl. formation fr. moha & muh] dull, silly, stupid, infatuated, bewildered (cp. Cpd. 833) D I.27; A III.164 sq.; Sn 840, 841, 1120; Nd1 153 (=manda), 192; Nd2 521 (=avidvā etc.); Pug 65. {Momuha} Momūhatta {Momuhatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. momūha] silliness, foolishness, bewilderment of the mind M I.520; A III.119, 191, 219 (=mandatta); Pug 69. Mora {Mora} [the contracted, regular P. form of *Sk. mayūra, viā *ma-ūra>mora. See also Geiger, P.Gr. § 27 & Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 166. - Vedic only mayūrī f. pea-hen] a peacock J II.275 (°upasevin, see C. on this passage); VI.218, 497; PvA 142; DhA I.394. A peacock's tail (sometimes used as a fan) is denoted in var. terms in cpds., as mora-kalāpa DhA I.387; -piccha Vin I.186; -piñcha Vin II.130; -pīðja PvA 142, 176; VvA 147; -sikali (?) KhA 49; -hattha Vv 3344 (=mayūra-piñjehi kataṃ makasa-vījaniṃ); Pv III.117. Perhaps also as morakkha "a peacock's eye" at VbhA 63 (morakkhaka loha, a kind of copper, grouped with pisācaloha). It is more likely however that morakkha is distorted fr. *mauryaka, patronymic of mura, a local (tribal) Pāli Text Society 1225 Pāli-English Dictionary designation (cp. murala), then by pop. etym. connected with mora peacock. With this cp. Sk. moraka "a kind of steel" BR. Moragu {Moragu} [cp. (scientific) Sk. mayūraka] a tender grass (Achyranthes aspera) Vin I.196. Morinī {Morini} (f.) [fr. mora] a peahen Miln 67. Moli {Moli} (m. & f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mauli, fr. mūla] a chignon; crest, turban J I.64; V.431; Mhvs 11, 28; DA I.136 (v. l. moḷi). Also found (as molin, adj.?) in Np. Yama-moli: see under yakkha 5. galla (?) fat Vin I.85 (expld by thūla-sarīra; vv. ll. moḷi° & mukalla). -baddha one who has his hair tied into a top-knot 128, 243, 348. Mosa {Mosa} (°-) (adj.-nt.) [the guṇa (compn) form of musā] belonging to or untruth, false-; only in cpds. -dhamma of a deceitful nature, false, A V.84 (kāma); Sn 739, 757; & -vajja [fr. musāvāda] false-speaking, lie, untruth S I.169; Sn 819, 866, 943; Nd1 152, 265; Nd2 515; Vv 126. Mosalla {Mosalla} (adj.) [fr. musala] worthy of being slain (with clubs), punishable A II.241. Moha {Moha} [fr. muh, see muyhati; cp. Sk. moha & Vedic mogha] stupidity, dullness of mind & soul, delusion, bewilderment, infatuation D III.146, 175, 182, 214, 270; Vin IV.144, 145; Sn 56, 74, 160, 638, 847; Vbh 208, 341, 391, 402; Pug 16; Tikp 108, 122, 259. - Defd as "dukkhe aððāṇaṃ etc., moha pamoha, sammoha, avijj'ogha etc.," by Nd2 99 & Vbh 362; as "muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, muyhana-mattaṃ eva vā tan ti moho" and "cittassa andha-bhāvalakkhaṇo, aððāṇalakkhaṇo vā" at Vism 468. - Often coupled with rāga & dosa as one of the 3 cardinal affects of citta, making a man unable to grasp the higher truths and to enter the Path: see under rāga (& Nd2 p. 237, s. v. rāga where the wide range of application of this set is to be seen). Cp. the 3 fires: rāg-aggi, dos-aggi, moh-aggi It 92; D III.217 also rāga-kkhaya, dosa°, moha° VbhA 31 sq. - On combn with rāga, lobha & dosa see dosa2 and lobha. - On term see also Dhs trsl. §§ 33, 362, 441; Cpd 16, 18, 41, 113, 146. - See further D I.80 (samoha-cittaṃ); Nd1 15, 16 (with lobha & dosa); VvA 14; PvA 3. -amoha absence of bewilderment Vbh 210 (+alobha, adosa; as the 3 kusala-mūlāni: cp. mūla 3), 402 (id., as kusala-hetu). - Cp. pa°, sam°. antara (personal) quality of bewilderment (lit. having m. inside) Sn 478 (taken by C. as "cause of m.," i. e. °kāraṇa, °paccaya SnA 411; cp. antara= kāraṇa under antara I 2 b.). -ussada quality of dullness Nd1 72, 413. -kkhaya destruction of infatuation Vbh 73; VbhA 51. -carita one whose habit is infatuation Nett 90 (+rāgacarita & dosacarita). -tama the darkness of bewilderment MA 1. -dhamma anything that is bewildering or infatuating Sn 276. -pāruta covered or obstructed by delusion Pv IV.334. -magga being on the road of infatuation Sn 347. salla the sting of bewilderment Nd1 59. Mohatta {Mohatta} (nt.) [abstr. fr. moha] infatuation, bewilderment A II.120; III.376. Mohana {Mohana} (nt.) [fr. muh as Caus. formn] making dull or stupid, infatuation, enticement, allurement Sn 399, 772 (=mohanā vuccanti paðca kāmaguṇā Nd1 26). The Sk. meaning is also "sexual intercourse" (cp. Halāyudha p. 315), which may apply to the Sn passages SnA 517 (on Sn 772) expls "mohanaṃ vuccati kāmaguṇā, ettha hi deva-manussā muyhanti." 1226 Pāli Text Society Mohanaka {Mohanaka} Pāli-English Dictionary (adj.) [fr. mohana] leading astray, bewildering, leading into error Vin IV.144. Mohaneyya & Mohanīya {Mohaneyya} {Mohaniya} (adj.) [grd. formn fr. moha] leading to infatuation A II.120; III.110; J III.499. Moheti [Caus. fr. muh, see muyhati & cp. moha] to deceive, to befool, to take in, surprise, delude, aor. 2nd sg. amohayi Sn 352; 3rd sg. amohayi S IV.158= It 58 (maccu-rājan; vv. ll. asamohayi & asamohari); reading somewhat doubtful, cp. similar context Sn 1076 with "sabbesu dhammesu samūhatesu" (v. l. samoha°). - 3rd sg. (poet.) also amohayittha Sn 332 (mā vo pamatte viððāya maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge, cp. Sn ed. p. 58). - On mohayamāna DhA I.275 see modati. {Moheti} Pāli Text Society 1227 Pāli-English Dictionary Y —Y—{Y} combn consonant (sandhi), inserted (euphonically) between 2 vowels for the avoidance of hiatus. It has arisen purely phonetically from i as a sort of "gliding" or semivowel within a word, where the syllable division was in regular speech more openly felt than in the written language, e. g. pari-y-āpanna (Pāli) corresponds to Sk. pary-āpanna, similarly pari-y-osāna=Sk. paryosāna. Thus inserted after a before i or e: chay-imā disā D III.188; ta-yidaṃ Sn 1077; Pv I.33; tava-y-idaṃ Sn 352; na-y-idaṃ S II.278; mama-y-idaṃ Sn 806; na-y-idha Sn 790; mā-y-idha Vin I.54; yassay-etādisī pajā D II.267 (v. l. ss for T yassa-s-etādisī); satiyā-yetaṃ adhivacanaṃ M II.260; na-y-imassa Pv IV.12. - After i before a: pāvisi-y-assamaṃ J V.405; khaṇi-y-asmani J III.433; yā-y-aññaṃ J I.429 (where C. expls: ya-kāro paṭisandhi-karo). - Cp. yeva for eva. - Note. At J VI.106 ya-y-ime jane is to be taken as ye ime jane; the spelling ay for e being found elsewhere as well. Cp. the following ta-y-ime jane. Ya° {Ya°} [pron. rel. base; Vedic yaḥ=Gr. o(/s who; cp. Goth. jabai if, -ei rel. part. An amplification of the dem. pron. base *i-, *ei- (cp. ayaṃ). See on detail Brugmann, "Die indogerm. Pronomina" in Ber. d. sächs. Ges. LX. 41 sq.] I. Forms. (See inflection also at Geiger, P.Gr. § 110.) The decl. is similar to that of ta°; among the more rarely found forms we only mention the foll.: sg. nom. m. yo with by-form (in hiatus) yv-, as yv'āyaṃ=yo ayaṃ M I.258; yv'āssa=yo assa M I.137. Notice the lengthening of the subsequent vowel. - An unsettled ya is to be found at J V.424 (Fausböll remarks "for yassā"?; perhaps to be combd with preceding paðcapatikā; C. on p. 427 expls ya-kāro nipātamatto)- abl. yasmā in adv. use; yamhā Dh 392. - loc. yamhi Dh 261, 372, 393. - f. loc. yassaṃ A III.151 (see below). See further adv. use of cases (below II.5). At Pv II.16 yāhi is doubtful (perhaps imper.=yajahi, of yajati; C. leaves it unexpld). Special mention must be made of the nt. n. acc. sg., where both yaṃ and yad are found. The (Vedic) form yad (Ved. yat) has been felt more like ya+expletive (Sandhi-) d, and is principally found in adv. use and certain archaic phrases, whereas yaṃ represents the usual (Pali) form (like tad and taṃ). See more under II. - A Māgadhized form is ye (after se=taṃ), found at D II.278 (see Geiger § 1052 & 1102. Cp. Trenckner, Notes 75.). The expression ye-bhuyyena may belong under this category, if we explain it as yad+bhuyyena (bhuyyena equivalent to bhiyyoso). It would then correspond to seyyathā (=sad+yathā, cp. sayathā, sace, taṃyathā). See refs. under yebhuyyena. - The expression yevāpanaka is an adj. formn from the phrase ye-vā-pana (=yaṃ vā pana "whatever else there is"), i. e. belonging to something of the same kind, i. e. corresponding, reciprocal, as far as concerned, respective. (See s. v.) - In adv. use it often corresponds to E. as; see e. g. yad-icchakaṃ, yad-idaṃ (under II.2 b; II.4 b.). II. Meaning: "which," in correspondence to a following demonstr. pron. (ta°); whichever (generalizing); nt. what, whatever. In immediate combn with the demonstr. pron. it is qualifying and specifying the person, thing or subject in discussion or question (see below 4). 1. Regular use as correl. pron., when ya° (+noun) is followed by ta° (+noun). Sometimes (in poetry) the reverse is the case, e. g. at It 84 where ta° (m. sa) is elliptically omitted: atthaṃ na jānāti yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ "he does not know good, whom greed overcomes." - Otherwise regular, e. g.: yassa jātarūparajataṃ kappati paðca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti S IV.326. In a generalizing sense (cp. below II.3): yo vā so vā "der erste beste," some or other, whoever, any J IV.38; V.362; yaṃ vā taṃ vā karotu let her do whatever she likes VvA 208; yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion S I.160 na yo vā so vā yakkho not this or that yakkha i. e. not any (ordinary) kind of Pāli Text Society 1228 Pāli-English Dictionary Yakkha (but Inda) DA I.264. - The same use (ordinary correlative) applies to the nt. forms yaṃ & yad in correl. to taṃ and tad. (See sep. under II. 2.) 2. Use of nt. forms. - (a) nt. yaṃ (a) as pronoun: S III.44 (yaṃ dukkhaṃ . . . tad anattā); It 78 (yað c'aððaṃ whatever else); VbhA 54 (yaṃ labbhati yañ ca na labbhati taṃ sabbaṃ pucchitvā). See also under 3 a (yaṃ kiñci, yaṃ yaṃ). - (b) as adj. adv.: yaṃmukha facing what, turned where (?) J V.475 (but C. reads & expls sammukha!); yaṃ-vipāka having what or which kind of fruit D II.209. yaṃ vā . . . yaṃ vā whether . . . or S II.179; yaṃ no . . . na tv'eva neither . . . nor S II.179-180. - yaṃ with pot.: "so that," that (corresp. to Lat. ut consecutivum) S III.41 (yaṃ rūpe anatt'ānupassī vihareyya). J V.339 (n'esa dhammo yaṃ taṃ jahe that I should leave you). - In the function of other conjunctions e. g. as temporal= when, since, after: J IV.319 (yaṃ maṃ Suruci-m-ānayi that, or since, S. married me). As conditional or causal =if, even if, because: Vin I.276 (yaṃ te sakkā . . . arogaṃ kātuṃ, taṃ karohi if it is possible . . . do it; or may be taken in sense of "in whatever way you can do it, do"); J III.206=IV.4 (yaṃ me sirasmiṃ ūhacca cakkaṃ bhamati matthake=because; C.: yena pāpena). - (c) as adv. deictive "so," in combn with var. other (emphatic) particles as e. g. yaṃ nūna used in an exhortative sense "well, now"; or "rather, let me"; or "so now," always in phrase yaṃ nūn'āhaṃ "now then let me" (do this or that) very freq., either with foll. pot., e. g. "y. n. āhaṃ araññaṃ paviseyyaṃ" DhA II.91. "y. n. ā. katakammaṃ puccheyyaṃ" VvA 132; dasseyyaṃ VvA 138; pabbajjeyyaṃ M II.55; āneyyaṃ DhA I.46, vihareyyaṃ ibid. 56; etc. cp. J I.14, 150, 255; III.393; DhA I.91; PvA 5 (avassayo bhaveyyaṃ). - Similarly yañ hi "well then, now then" (with Pot.) S II.210, 221 (taṃ vadeyya). Cp. yagghe. yañ ca & yañ ce [Sk. yac ca, or cet, ca here=ce see ca. & cp. sace=sa+ce] (rather) than that: yað ca Th 2, 80; J I.210; yaðce (with Pot.) S I.176; It 43; Th 1, 666. sangāme me mataṃ seyyo yað ce jīve parājito (than that I live vanquished) Sn 440 (cp. the intricate expln at SnA 390); similarly J IV.495: me maraṇaṃ seyyo yað ce jīve tayā vinā. - (b) nt. yad: (a) as pron in regular relative use e. g. S III.44 (yad aniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ); It 59 (yad eva diṭṭhaṃ tad ev'āhaṃ vadāmi). (b) as adv., e. g. yad-agge (loc.) from what on, i. e. from which time, since what time D I.152 (=mūladivasato paṭṭhāya yaṃ divasaṃ aggaṃ patvā DA I.311); Vv 8433 (=yato paṭṭhāya VvA 344). Also as yad-aggena (instr.) Vin II.257 (y. Mahāpajāpati-gotamiyā aṭṭha garudhammā paṭiggahitā tad eva sā upasampannā); VbhA 387. - yad - atthaṃ for what, why Th 2, 163. yad-atthiya as much as necessary, as required, sufficient, proper Th 1, 12; 1274 ("which, for the goal desirous, he led" trsl.; refers to brahmacariyaṃ). The same verse occurs at Sn 354. The latter passage is mentioned in P.D. under atthiya with meaning "on account of what" (cp. kim-atthiyaṃ S III.189). The Sn passage is not expld in SnA. - yad-icchakaṃ whatever is pleasant, i. e. according to liking, as he pleases A III.28; Pug 11, 12; J I.141 (y. bhutta eaten heartily); Vism 154 (+yavadicchaka); VvA 341. Cp. yen'icchakaṃ below II. 5. yad-icchita see under yathā-icchita! - yadidaṃ: see below II. 4 b. 3. Generalizing (or distributive) use of ya: There are two modes of generalization, viz. (a) by repeating ya°: yassa yass'eva sālassa mūle tiṭṭhasi, so so muðcati pupphāni; "at the foot of whichever tree you stand, he (in all cases concerned) sheds flowers" Vv 393; yaṃ yaṃ hi manaso piyaṃ "whatever is pleasant to the senses" Pv II.118; yaṃ yaṃ passati taṃ taṃ pucchati "whomsoever he sees, him he asks" J III.155; yassaṃ yassaṃ disāyaṃ viharati, sakasmiṃ yeva vijite viharati" in whichever region he lives, he lives in his own realm" A III.151; yo yo yaṃ yaṃ icchati tassa tassa adāsi "whatever anybody wished he gave to him" PvA 113; yaṃ yaṃ padesaṃ bhajati tattha tatth'eva assa lābhasakkāro nibbattati "whichever region he visits, there (in each) will he have success" DhA II.82. - (b) by combination with ko-ci (cp. the identical Lat. qui-cun-que): yassa kassaci rāgo pahīno ayaṃ vuccati . . . "the lust of whosoever is abandoned he is called so & so" It 56. yāni kānici vatthūni . . . sabbāni tāni . . . It 19; ye keci ārabbha "with ref. to whosoever" PvA 17; yaṃ kiñci whatever Pv I.41. 4. Dependent & elliptic use of ya (with pron. demonstr.). This represents a sort of deictic (emphatic) use, with ref. to Pāli Text Society 1229 Pāli-English Dictionary what is coming next or what forms the necessary compliment to what is just being said. Thus it introduces a general truth or definition, as we would say "just this, namely, i. e.," or Ger. "so wie, und zwar." - (a) The usual combns are those of ya+sa (nt. taṃ) and of ya+ayaṃ (nt. idaṃ), but such with amu (nt. aduṃ) also occur: yaṃ aduṃ khettaṃ aggaṃ evam eva mayhaṃ bhikkhu-bhikkhuniyo "as there is one field which is the best, thus to me the bh. & bhikkhunīs" S IV.315. Cp. the foll.: ya+sa e. g. at M. I.366 (yo so puriso paṭhamaṃ rukkhaṃ ārūḷho sace so na khippam eva oroheyya "just that man, who climbed up the tree first, if he does not come down very quickly"); J II.159 (yena tena upāyena with every possible means); Pv I.91 (yā tā [so read for yā ca!] "just she over there; who as such, i. e. such as she is"); cp. also the foll.: yā sā sīmā . . . taṃ sīmaṃ Vin I.109; ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā etc. . . . sātthaṃ brahmacariyaṃ abhivadanti tathā rūpā 'ssa dhammā honti . . . M III.11; yāni etāni yānāni (just) these DhA IV.6. -ya+ayaṃ e. g. at M I.258 (yv'āyaṃ vado vedeyyo tatra tatra . . . vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); It 35=93 (nibbāpenti moh'aggiṃ paððāya yā 'yaṃ nibbedha-gāminī: "as it is also penetrating, which as such, or in this quality, or as we know, is penetrating"); Vin IV.134 (ye 'me antarāyikā dhammā vuttā . . . te paṭisevato n'ālaṃ antarāyāya "just those which, or whichever"). Th 1, 124 (panko ti hi naṃ avedayuṃ yāyaṃ vandanapūjanā; here=yā ayaṃ); Dh 56 (appamatto ayaṃ gandho yāyaṃ tagara-candanī; here=yo ayaṃ); M II.220 (yaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ . . . taṃ). - (b) nt. yadidaṃ lit. "as that," which is this (i. e. the following), may be translated by "viz.," that is, "i. e." in other words, so to speak, just this, "I mean"; e. g. kāmānaṃ etaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yad idaṃ nekkhammaṃ "there is an escape from the lusts, viz. lustlessness"; or: "this is the abandoning of lusts, in other words lustlessness" It 61; dve dānāni āmisa° dhamm°, etad aggaṃ imesaṃ yad idaṃ dhamma° "this is the best of them, I mean dh-d." It 98=100; supaṭipanno sāvaka-sangho, y. i. cattāri purisa-yugāni etc. M I.37. Instead of yadidaṃ we also find yāvað c'idaṃ. See also examples given under yāvatā. 5. Cases used adverbially: Either locally or modally; with regards to the local adverbs it is to be remarked that their connotation is fluctuating, inasmuch as direction and place (where) are not always distinguished (cp. E. where both meanings=where & where-to), but must be guessed from the context. (a) instr. yena: (local) where (i. e. at which place) D I.71 (yena yena wherever), 220 (yattha yena yahiṃ=whence, where, whither; not with trsln Dial. I. 281: where, why, whence!), 238 (id.); yenatena where (he was) -there (he went) D I.88, 106, 112 & passim; cp. D II.85 (yena āvasath'āgāraṃ ten' upasankami); A II.33 (yena vā tena vā here & there or "hither & thither"). -(modal) Dh 326 (yen'icchakaṃ II. 2 b.); Pv I.112 (kiṃ akattha pāpaṃ yena pivātha lohitaṃ: so that).-loc. yahiṃ where (or whither) Vv 8429 (yahiṃ yahiṃ gacchati tahiṃ tahiṃ modati); & yasmiṃ: yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā on every occasion S I.160. - abl. yasmā (only modal) because A I.260; It 37 (corresp. to tasmā). On yasmā-t-iha see Geiger, P.Gr. 735. Yakana {Yakana} (nt.) [fr. gen. yaknaḥ or sec. stem yakan- of Vedic yakṛt; cp. Av. yākars; Gr. Qpar, Lat. jecur. In formation cp. P. chakana fr. Ved. śakṛt.] the liver Kh III.; M I.57, 421; D II.293; A V.109; Miln 26; Vism 257, 356; VbhA 60, 240. The old n-stem is to be seen in cpd. yaka-peḷa (q. v.). Yaka—peḷa {Yakapela} [see peḷa] the lump of the liver Sn 195 (=yakana-piṇḍa SnA 247)=J I.146. Dines Andersen suggests: "Could y.-p. possibly be an old error for sakapeḷa, cp. Sk. śaka-piṇḍa & śakṛt-piṇḍa?" Cp. paṭala (ref. Vism 257). Ya—kāra {Yakara} [ya+kāra] 1. the letter (or sound) y: J I.430 (padasandhikara); III.433 (vyañjana - sandhi - vasena gahita). - 2. the letter (or syllable) ya: J V.427 (nipāta-matta). It is referred to at Vin IV.7 as an ending implying ridiculing or insult, together with the ending °bha. The Cy. Pāli Text Society 1230 Pāli-English Dictionary means words like dāsiya, gumbiya, bālya etc. where -ya either denotes descendency or property, or stands for -ka as diminutive (i. e. (disparaging) ending. The same applies to °bha. Here at Vin IV.7 this way of calling a person by means of adding -ya- or -bha to his name (cp. E. -y in kid> kiddy etc.) is grouped with a series of other terms of insult (hīnā akkosā). Yakkha {Yakkha} [Vedic yakṣa, quick ray of light, but also "ghost"; fr. yaks to move quickly; perhaps: swift creatures, changing their abode quickly and at will. - The customary (popular) etym. of Pali Commentators is y. as quāsi grd. of yaj, to sacrifice, thus: a being to whom a sacrifice (of expiation or propitiation) is given. See e. g. VvA 224: yajanti tattha baliṃ upaharantī ti yakkhā; or VvA 333: pūjanīya-bhavato yakkho ti vuccati. - The term yakṣa as attendants of Kubera occurs already in the Upanishads.] 1. name of certain non-human beings, as spirits, ogres, dryads, ghosts, spooks. Their usual epithet and category of being is amanussa, i. e. not a human being (but not a sublime god either); a being half deified and of great power as regards influencing people (partly helping, partly hurting). They range in appearance immediately above the Petas; many "successful" or happy Petas are in fact Yakkhas (see also below). They correspond to our "genii" or fairies of the fairy-tales and show all their qualities. In many respects they correspond to the Vedic Piśācas, though different in many others, and of diff. origin. Historically they are remnants of an ancient demonology and of considerable folkloristic interest, as in them old animistic beliefs are incorporated and as they represent creatures of the wilds and forests, some of them based on ethnological features. See on term e. g. Dial. III.188; on their history and identity Stede, Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu chap. v.; pp. 39-44. - They are sometimes called devatā: S I.205; or devaputtā: PvA 113, 139. A female Yakkha is called yakkhinī (q. v.). 2. Their usual capacity is one of kindness to men (cp. Ger. Rūbezahl). They are also interested in the spiritual welfare of those humans with whom they come into contact, and are something like "tutelary genii" or even "angels" (i. e. messengers from another world) who will save prospective sinners from doing evil (cp. Pv IV.1). They also act as guides in the "inferno": Pv IV.11, cp. IV.3. A somewhat dangerous "Mentor" is represented at D I.95, where the y. Vajirapāṇī threatens to slay Ambaṭṭha with an iron hammer, if he does not answer the Bhagavā. He is represented as hovering in the air; Bdhgh. (DA I.264) says on this: na yo vā so vā yakkho, Sakko devarājā ti veditabbo: it is to be understood not as this or that y., but as Sakka the king of devas. - Whole cities stand under the protection of, or are inhabited by yakkhas; D II.147 (ākiṇṇa-yakkha full of y.; thus Āḷakamandā may here mean all kinds of supra-mundane beings), cp. Lankā (Ceylon) as inhabited by y.: Mhvs 7, 33. - Often, however, they are cruel and dangerous. The female yakkhas seem on the whole more fearful and evilnatured than the male (see under yakkhinī). They eat flesh and blood: J IV.549; devour even men: D II.346; J II.15-17, or corpses: J I.265; mentioned under the 5 ādīnavā (dangers) at A III.256. A yakkha wants to kill Sāriputta: Ud 4. 3. Var. classes of y. are enumd at D II.256, 257; in a progressive order they rank between manussa and gandhabba at A II.38; they are mentioned with devas, rakkhasas, dānavas, gandhabbas, kinnaras and mah'oragas at J V.420. According to VvA 333 Sakka, the 4 great kings (lokapālā), the followers of Vessavaṇa (alias Yama, the yakkhas proper) and men (see below 7) go by the name of yakkha. - Sakka, the king of the devas, is often named yakkha: J IV.4; DA I.264. Some are spirits of trees (rukkhadevatā): J III.309 345; Pv I.9; II.9; PvA 5; are also called bhumma-devā (earthly deities) PvA 45, 55. Their cult seems to originate primarily from the woods (thus in trees: Pv II.9; IV.3), and secondarily from the legends of sea-faring merchants (cp. the story of the flyingDutchman). To the latter origin point the original descriptions of a Vimāna or fairy-palace, which is due to a sort of mirage. These are usually found in or at the sea, or in the neighbourhood of silent lakes, where the sense of hauntedness has given rise to the fear of demons or supernatural Pāli Text Society 1231 Pāli-English Dictionary witchcraft. Cp. the entrances to a Vimāna by means of a dried-up river bed (Pv I.9; II.12) and the many descriptions of the Vimānas in the Lake-districts of the Himavant in Vv. (See Stede, Peta Vatthu trsln p. 104 sq.) 4. Their names too give us a clue as to their origin and function. These are taken from (a) their bodily appearance, which possesses many of the attributes of Petas, e. g. Khara "Rough-skin" or "Shaggy" Sn p. 48 (=khara-samphassaṃ cammaṃ SnA 302), also as Khara-loma "Rough-hair" Vism 208; Khara-dāṭhika "Rough-tooth" J I.31. Citta "Speckled" Mhvs 9, 22; 10, 4; also as Citta-rājā J II.372; Mhvs 10, 84. Silesa-loma "Sticky-hair" J I.273. Sūci-loma "Needlehair" Sn p. 47, 48; S I.207; Vism 208; SnA 302. -(b) places of inhabitance, attributes of their realm, animals and plants, e. g. Ajakalāpaka "Goat-bundle" Ud 1. Āḷavaka "Forest-dweller" J IV.180; VI.329; Mhvs 30, 84: Vism 208. Uppala "Lotus" DhA IV.209. Kakudha "K.-tree" (Terminalia arjuna) S I.54. Kumbhīra "Crocodile" J VI.272. Gumbiya either "One of a troop" (soldier of Yama) or "Thicket-er" (fr. gumba thicket) J III.200, 201. Disāmukha "Skyfacer" DhA IV.209. Yamamoli "Yamachignon" DhA IV.208. Vajira "Thunderbolt" DhA IV.209; alias Vajira-pāṇī D I.95, or Vajira-bāhu DhA IV.209. Sātāgira "Pleasant-mount" D II.256; Sn 153; J IV.314; VI.440. Serīsaka "Acacia-dweller" VvA 341 (the messenger of Vessavaṇa). - (c) qualities of character, e. g. Adhamma "Unrighteous" Miln 202 (formerly Devadatta). Katattha "Well-wisher" DhA IV.209. Dhamma "Righteous" Miln 202 (=Bodhisatta). Puṇṇaka "Full(-moon?)" J VI.255 sq. (a leader of soldiers, nephew of Vessavaṇa). Māra the "Tempter" Sn 449; S I.122; M I.338. Sakata "Waggon-load" (of riches) DhA IV.209 - (d) embodiments of former persons, e. g. Janavasabha "Lord of men" D II.205. Dīgha M I.210. Naradeva J VI.383, 387. Paṇḍaka "Eunuch" Mhvs 12, 21. Sīvaka S I.241=Vin II.156. Serī "Self-willed" S I.57. - Cp. the similar names of yakkhinīs. 5. They stand in a close relationship to and under the authority of Vessavaṇa (Kuvera), one of the 4 lokapālas. They are often the direct servants (messengers) of Yama himself, the Lord of the Underworld (and the Peta-realm especially). Cp. D II.257; III.194 sq.; J IV.492 (yakkhinī fetches water for Vessavaṇa); VI.255 sq. (Puṇṇaka, the nephew of V.); VvA 341 (Serīsaka, his messenger). In relation to Yama: dve yakkhā Yamassa dūtā Vv 522; cp. Np. Yamamolī DhA IV.208. - In harmony with tradition they share the rôle of their master Kuvera as lord of riches (cp. Pv II.922) and are the keepers (and liberal spenders) of underground riches, hidden treasures etc., with which they delight men: see e. g. the frame story to Pv II.11 (PvA 145), and to IV.12 (PvA 274). They enjoy every kind of splendour & enjoyment, hence their attribute kāmakāmin Pv I.33. Hence they possess supernatural powers, can transfer themselves to any place with their palaces and work miracles; a frequent attribute of theirs is mah'iddhika (Pv II.910; J VI.118). Their appearance is splendid, as a result of former merit: cp. Pv I.2; I.9; II.11; IV.317. At the same time they are possessed of odd qualities (as result of former demerit); they are shy, and afraid of palmyra leaf & iron: J IV.492; their eyes are red & do not wink: J V. 34; VI.336, 337. - Their abode is their self-created palace (Vimāna), which is anywhere in the air, or in trees etc. (see under vimāna). Sometimes we find a communion of yakkhas grouped in a town, e. g. Āḷakamandā D II.147; Sirīsa-vatthu (in Ceylon) Mhvs 7, 32. 6. Their essential human character is evident also from their attitude towards the "Dhamma." In this respect many of them are "fallen angels" and take up the word of the Buddha, thus being converted and able to rise to a higher sphere of existence in saṃsāra. Cp. D III.194, 195; J II.17; VvA 333; Pv II.810 (where "yakkha" is expld by Dhpāla as "pet-attabhāvato cuto (so read for mato!) yakkho ataṃ jāto dev-attabhāvaṃ patto" PvA 110); SnA 301 (both Sūciloma & Khara converted). - See in general also the foll. passages: Sn 153, 179, 273, 449; S I.206-15; A I.160; Vism 366 (in simile); Miln 23. 7. Exceptionally the term "yakkha" is used as a philosophical term denoting the "individual soul" [cp. similar Vedic meaning "das lebendige Ding" (B.R.) at several AV. passages]; hence probably the old phrase: ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhi (purification of heart) Sn 478, quoted VvA 333 (ettāvat'aggaṃ no vadanti h'eke yakkhassa sudhiṃ idha paṇḍitāse). Sn Pāli Text Society 1232 Pāli-English Dictionary 875 (cp. Nd1 282: yakkha=satta, nara, puggala, manussa). -ānubhāva the potency of a yakkha J I.240. -āviṭṭha possessed by a y. J VI.586. -iddhi (yakkh°) magic power of a y. PvA 117, 241. gaṇa the multitude of ys. J VI.287. -gaha=following DhA III.362. -gāha "yakkha-grip," being seized by a y. S I.208; PvA 144. -ṭṭhāna the dwelling-place of a y. -dāsī "a female temple slave," or perhaps "possessed by a demon" (?) J VI.501 (v. l. BB devatā-paviṭṭhā cp. p. 586: yakkh'āviṭṭhā.) -nagara city of ys. J II.127 (=Sirīsavatthu); cp. pisāca-nagara. -pura id. Mhvs 7.32. -bhavana the realm or abode of the y. Nd1 448. -bhūta a yakkha-being, a ghost Pv III.52 (=pisāca-bhūta vā yakkha-bh. vā PvA 198); IV.135. -mahiddhi=°iddhi; Pv IV.154. -yoni the y.world, realm of the y. SnA 301. -samāgama meeting of the y. PvA 55 (where also devaputtā join). -sūkara a y. in the form of a pig VbhA 494. -senā army of ys. D III.194; SnA 209. -senāpati chief-commander of the yakkha-army J IV.478; SnA 197. Yakkhatta {Yakkhatta} (nt.) [fr. yakkha] condition of a higher demon or yakkha D II.57; A II.39; PvA 117. Yakkhinī {Yakkhini} (f.) [fr. yakkha, perhaps corresponding directly to Vedic yakṣiṇī, f. of yakṣin; adj. persecuting, taking vengeance, appld to Varuṇa at RV. VII.884] a female yakkha, a vampire. Their character is usually fierce & full of spite & vengeance, addicted to man- & beastmurder (cp. yakkha 2). They are very much like Petīs in habits. With their names cp. those of the yakkhas, as enumd under yakkha 4. - Vin III.37; IV.20 (where sexual intercourse with y. is forbidden to the bhikkhus); S I.209 (Piyankara-mātā); J I.240 (as a goat), 395 sq.; II.127; III.511; V.21 (eating a baby), 209 (eaten by a y.); VI.336 (desirous of eating a child); Vism 121 (singing), 382 (four: Piyankara-mātā, Uttaramātā, Phussa-mittā, Dhammaguttā), 665 (in simile); Mhvs 7, 11 (Kuvaṇṇā, i. e. bad-coloured); 10, 53 (Cetiyā); 12, 21 (Hāritā "Charming" or fr. harita "green" (?)); DhA I.47; II.35, 36 (a y. in the form of a cow, eating 4 people in successive births). Note. A by-form of yakkhinī is yakkhī. -bhāva the state of being a yakkhinī J I.240; II.128 (yakkhini°). Yakkhī {Yakkhi} (f.) [direct formation fr. yakkha, like petī fr. peta; form older than yakkhinī (?)]=yakkhinī S I.11; Vin III.121; IV.20; J IV.492; Mhvs 7, 26. Yagghe {Yagghe} (indecl.) [similar in formation & meaning to tagghe (q. v.). It is yaṃ (yad)+gha, the latter in a Māgadhised form ghe, whereas taggha (=tad+gha) only occurs as such] hortative part, used in addressing a (superior) person in the voc., followed by Pot. of jānāti, either 2nd jāneyyāsi, or 3rd sg. jāneyya; to be trsld somewhat like "look here, don't you know," surely, you ought to know; now then; similarly to part. yaṃ nu, yaṃ nūna & yaṃ hi. The part. is found in the language of the Nikāyas only, thus indicating part of the oldest & original dialect. E. g.: y. bhante jāneyyāsi Vin I.237; yagghe deva jāneyyāsi yo te puriso dāso . . . so . . . pabbajito do you know, Oh king D I.60 (trsl.: "if it please your majesty, do you know . . ."; DA I.169 expls as "codan'at<11>the nipāto"); y. ayye jāneyyāsi M II.62; mahārāja j. M II.71; id. S I.101; y. bhavan jāneyya S I.180. - The passage M II.157 is somewhat doubtful where we find y. with the ind. and in var. forms (see v. l.) of yagghi & taggha: "jānanti pana bhonto yagghe . . .," with reply "na jānāma yagghe . . ." Perhaps the reading taggha would be preferable. Yajati {Yajati} [yaj, cp. Vedic yajati, yajus, Yajur-veda. To Av. yaZaitē to sacrifice, Gr. a(/zomai to revere, worship. On etym. cp. also Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. aestimo. - The Dhtp (62) defines root by "deva-pūjā, sangati-karaṇa, dānesu," i. e. "said of deva-worship, of assembling, and of Pāli Text Society 1233 Pāli-English Dictionary gifts." Similarly Dhtm 79] to sacrifice, to make an offering (yaññaṃ); to give alms or gifts - In the P. literature it refers (with yañña, sacrifice) either (when critical) to the Brahmanic rites of sacrificing to the gods according to the rules initiated in the Vedas & Vedic literature; or (when dogmatical) to the giving of alms to the bhikkhu. In the latter sense it implies liberal donation of all the necessities of a bhikkhu (see enumd under yañña). The latter use is by far the more frequent. - The construction is with the acc. of the deity honoured and the instr. of the gift. - Pres. yajati D I.139; A I.168; II.43, 44; Sn 505, 509; DA I.160. - ppr. yajanto D I.52; M I.404; Miln 21; gen. pl. yajataṃ Sn 569 (=Vin I.246, where reading is jayataṃ). - ppr. med. yajamāna D I.138 (mahayaððaṃ); Sn 506; S I.233; J VI.502, 505. - imper. 3rd sg. yajatu DA I.297; med. yajataṃ D I.138 (=detu bhavaṃ DA I.300). 2nd sg. yajāhi J III.519; PvA 280, and perhaps at Pv II.16 (for T. yāhi). 2nd med. yajassu Sn 302, 506; J V.488 (yaððaṃ), 490 (id.) - Pot. 1st sg. yajeyyaṃ D I.134; 3rd pl. yajeyyuṃ J VI.211, 215; 3rd sg. med. yajetha Dh 106 (māse māse sahassena yo y.=dānaṃ dadeyya DhA II.231), 108; It 98; A II.43; Sn 463. - Fut. 2nd sg. yajissasi J III.515; 1st sg. yajissāmi J VI.527 (pantha-sakuṇaṃ tuyhaṃ maṃsena); 3rd pl. yajissanti J IV.184; 1st pl. yajissāma J VI.132. - aor. 1st sg. yajiṃ Th 1, 341; 3rd sg. ayajī It 102; yaji Miln 219, 221. - inf. yajituṃ Miln 220; yiṭṭhuṃ D I.138 (yiṭṭhu-kāma wishing to sacrifice), and yaṭṭhuṃ in °kāma D II.244; Sn 461. - ger. yajitvā D I.143; A II.44; Sn 509; J VI.137 (puttehi), 202; Pv II.956 (datvā+, i. e. spending liberally; cp. PvA 136); yajitvāna Sn 303, 979. - grd. yajitabba J VI.133 (sabbacatukkena). - pp. yajita & yiṭṭha. - Caus. I. yājeti; Caus. II. yajāpeti (q. v.). Yajana {Yajana} (nt.) [late formation fr. yaj, yajati, for the earlier yañña] the act of sacrificing J III.518; VI.133; Cp. I. 72; Vism 224; PvA 135. Yajanaka {Yajanaka} (adj.) [fr. yajana] one who sacrifices J VI.133. Yajāpeti {Yajapeti} [Caus. II. of yajati] to cause a sacrifice to be held A I.168 (yajati+). Yajita {Yajita} [pp. of yajati] sacrificed Miln 219; J IV.19. Yajubbeda {Yajubbeda} [fr. Vedic yajus the sacrificial formula,+veda] the Yajurveda, the 2nd of the Vedas, dealing with sacrifice Miln 178; DA I.247; SnA 447. As yajuveda at Dpvs V.62, where the 3 Vedas are enumd as iruveda, yaju° and sāma°. Yañña {Yanna} [Vedic yajña, fr. yaj: see yajati. The metric reading in the Veda is sometimes yajana, which we are inclined to look upon as not being the source of the P. yajana] 1. a brahmanic sacrifice. - 2. almsgiving, charity, a gift to the Sangha or a bhikkhu. The brahmanic ritual of Vedic times has been given a changed and deeper meaning. Buddhism has discarded the outward and cruel form and has widened its sphere by changing its participant, its object as well as the means and ways of "offering," so that the yañña now consists entirely in a worthy application of a worthy gift to a worthy applicant. Thus the direct and as it were selfunderstood definition of yañña is at Nd2 523 given with "yañño vuccati deyyadhammo," and as this the 14 constituents of the latter are enumd; consisting of the 4 paccayas, and of anna, pāna, vattha, yāna, mālā, gandhā, vilepana, seyya, avasatha, padīpeyya. Cp. Nd1 373. - The term parikkhāra, which refers to the requisites of the bhikkhu as well (see DA I.204-207), is also used in the meaning of "accessory instrument" concerning the brahmanic sacrifice: see D I.129 sq., 137 sq. They are there given as 16 parikkhāras, as follows: (4) cattāro anumatipakkhā viz. the 4 groups khattiyas, ministers, brahmans and householders, as colleagues by consent; (8) aṭṭhangāni of a king-sacrificer; (4) cattār'angāni of a purohita. - The term Pāli Text Society 1234 Pāli-English Dictionary mahāyaðða refers to the brahmanic ritual (so at M II.204; DhsA 145, cp. Expositor 193); its equivalent in Buddhist literature is mahādāna, for which yaðða is also used at Pv II.950 (cp. PvA 134). - The Jātakas are full of passages referring to the ineffectiveness and cruelty of the Brahmanic sacrifice, e. g. J III.518 sq.; VI.211 sq., & cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung, p. 146 sq. One special kind of sacrifice is the sabba-catukkayañña or the sacrifice of tetrads, where four of each kind of gifts, as elephants, horses, bulls, and even men were offered: J I.335; III.44, 45; PvA 280. The number 4 here has the meaning of evenness, completeness, or harmony, as we find it freq., in the notion of the square with ref. to Vimānas & lotus ponds (in J., Vv & Pv etc.); often also implying awfulness & magic, as attached e. g. to cross-roads. Cp. the Ep. of niraya (Purgatory) "catu-dvāra" (esp. at Pv I.10). See cpds. of catur. - It may also refer to the 4 quarters of the sky, as belonging to the 4 Guardians of the World (lokapālā) who were specially worth offering to, as their influence was demonic (cp. Pv I.4). The prevailing meaning of yañña in the Suttapiṭaka is that of "gift, oblation to the bhikkhu, almsgiving. " Cp. Sn 295, 461, 484, 1043. At Vv 3426 the epithets "su-dinna, su-huta, su-yiṭṭha" are attributed to dāna. - The 3 constituents which occur under dāna & deyyadhamma as the gift, the giver and the recipient of the gift (i. e. the Sangha: cp. opening stanza Pv I1) are similarly enumd under yañña (or yaññapatha) as "ye yaññaṃ (viz. cīvaraṃ etc.) esanti" those who wish for a gift, "ye yaññaṃ abhisankharonti" those who get it ready, and "ye yaññaṃ denti" those who give it, at Nd2 70 (under appamatta). Similarly we find the threefold division of "yaðða" (=cīvara etc.), "yaððayājaka" (=khattiyā, brāhmaṇā etc., including all 8 classes of men: see Nd2 p. 129 s. v. khattiya, quoted under janab), and "dakkhiṇeyya" (the recipient of the gift, viz. samaṇabrāhmaṇā, kapaṇ'addhikā vanibbakā, yācakā) at Nd2 449b (under puthū). - Cp. the foll. (mixed) passages: D I.97, 128-144 (brahmanic criticised); II.353, 354 (profitable and unprofitable, criticised); M I.82 (brahm.); S I.76, 160; II.42 sq., 63, 207; III.337; IV.41; A I.166; II.43 (nirārambhaṃ yaññaṃ upasankamanti arahanto, cp. DhsA 145); Sn 308 (brahm.), 568 (aggihutta-mukhā yaððā: the sacrifices to Agni are the best; brahm.); Th 1, 341; J I.83, 343; III.517 (°ṃ yajati; brahm.); IV.66; V.491, 492; VI.200 (yañña-kāraka-brāhmaṇa), 211 sq.; DA I.267; DhA II.6. -āgāra a hall for sacrifices Pug 56 (=yaðða-sālā PugA 233). -āvāṭa the sacrificial pit D I.142, 148; J I.335; III.45, 517; VI.215 (where reading yaððavāṭa, cp. yaððavāṭaka at Cp. I.72). It has been suggested by Kern, Toev, s. v., and it seems more to the sense, to read yaññavāṭa for yanð'āvāṭa, i. e. enclosed place for sacrifice. Thus at all passages for °āvāṭa. -kāla a suitable (or the proper) time for sacrifice D I.137; Sn 458, 482; DA I.297. -upanīta one who has been brought to the sacrifice S I.168 (trsl. K.S. 211 not quite to the point: "the oblation is brought." Reading is uncertain; v. l. °opanīta which may be read as opavīta "wearing the sacrificial cord": see foll.). -opavīta (?) [see upavīta] in phrase yaðð'opavīta-kaṇṭhā "having the (sacrificial, i. e.) alms-cord wound round their necks" SnA 92 (v. l. BB yaññ-opacitakammā). Cp. yaðða-suttaka. -patha [cp. patha2] (way of) sacrificing, sacrifice Sn 1045; Nd2 524 (yañño y'eva vuccati yañña-patho); J VI.212, 215. -vaṇṇa praise of sacrifice J VI.200. -vidhāna the arrangement or celebration of a sacrifice J VI.202. -sampadā success of the sacrifice D I.128 sq. (in its threefold mode), 134, 143, 144; Sn 505, 509. -sāmin lord or giver of a sacrifice D I.143. -suttaka "sacrificial string," i. e. alms-cord (the sign of a mendicant) DhA II.59. Cp. above: °opavīta. Yaññatā {Yannata} (f.) [abstr. fr. yañña] "sacrificiality," the function or ceremony of a sacrifice J VI.202 (=yañña-vidhāna C.). Yaṭṭhi {Yatthi} (f.) [cp. Vedic yaṣṭi. Another Pali form is laṭṭhi] 1. a staff, stick, pole M III.133 (tomara° goad); S I.115 (pācana° driving stick, goad); Miln 2; DhA III.140 (kattara° a mendicant's staff); PvA 241; VbhA 241 (yantacakka°); Mhvs 11, 10 (veḷu° a bamboo pole). - 2. a Pāli Text Society 1235 Pāli-English Dictionary stem, stalk (of a plant), cane in ucchu° sugarstick, sugar-cane DhA III.315 (=ucchu-khaṇḍika at Vv 3326); IV.199. - 3. a measure of length (=7 ratanas) VbhA 343. -koṭi the end of the stick or staff DhA I.Q5. -madhukā ("cane-sweetness") liquorice Mhvs 32, 46. -luddaka "stick-hunter" at J IV.392 means a hunter with a lasso. Yata {Yata} [pp. of yam] held, checked, controlled, restrained, careful S II.15, 50; Sn 78, 220, 1079 (=yatta, paṭiyatta, gutta etc. Nd2 525); J VI.294 (C. appamatta; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading yatta for yata Vism 201 (?). Esp. in two phrases: yat-atta (yata+attan) selfcontrolled, one whose heart is kept down D I.57 (cp. Dial. I.75); Sn 216, 490, 723; DA I.168. -yata-cārin living in self-restraint, living or behaving carefully Sn 971 (=yatta paṭiyatta gutta etc. Nd1 498); Miln 300 (+samāhita-citta, where Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes to read yatta-cārin for yata°). A similar passage at Th 1, 981 reads yathā-cārin (q. v. for further expln). - Cp. saṃyata & see also yatta. Yatati1 {Yatati} [yat, given by Dhtp 121 in meaning "yatana," by Dhtm 175 as "paṭiyatana"] to exert oneself, strive, endeavour, to be cautious or careful; ppr. yataṃ It 120 (care, tiṭṭhe, acche etc.; Seidenstūcker trsls "gezügelt," thus taking it in meaning of yata). - pp. yatta. Yatati2 {Yatati} [unidentified, perhaps as expln of yati?] is given in meaning of "lead out" (?) at Dhtp 580 ("niyyātane") and Dhtm 813 (id.). Yatana {Yatana} (nt.) [fr. yat, cp. Epic Sk. yatna] endeavour, undertaking J V.346 (C. expls samosaraṇa-ṭṭhāna?); Dhtp 121 (in expln of yatati1). Yati {Yati} [fr. yat, cp. Vedic yati leader, guide] a Buddhist monk Mhvs 5, 37 (racchāgataṃ yatiṃ); 25, 4; 30, 26 (mattikā-dāyakaṃ yatiṃ); 32, 32 (khīṇāsavassa yatino); Dāvs IV.33 (yatī); Vism 79 (vikampeti Mārassa hadayaṃ yatī); PvA 287 (instr. muni-vara-yatinā). Yato {Yato} (adv.) [the abl. case of ya°, used as conjunction, Cp. Vedic yataḥ wherefrom, by which, out of which] 1. (local) from where D I.240 (uggacchanti candima -suriyā; opp. yattha where). - 2. (temporal) whence, since, when, from which time VvA 344 (yato paṭṭhāya). - 3. (modal) from which, out of what cause, because, in as far as D I.36 sq. (yato . . . ettāvatā because . . . therefore); Sn p. 113 (id.) Dh 374, 390 (doubled=from whichever source). - Freq. in two combns: yatvādhi-karaṇaṃ (yato+adhikaraṇaṃ) because (lit. by reason of which; cp. kimādhikaraṇaṃ, see adhik.) D I.70; D I.113; M I.269; Dhs 1346; cp. similarly BSk. yato adhikaraṇaṃ MVastu III.52; and yato-nidānaṃ on account of which, from which (or what) reason, because M I.109; Sn 273, 869; Pv IV.161 (cp. PvA 242). - Note. yaticchita at PvA 265 is to be read yadicchita. Yatta [pp. of yatati1] strenuous, making an effort, watchful Nd2 525 (+paṭiyatta, in exegesis of yata); J IV.222 (+paṭiyatta); VI.294 (Kern's reading for yata; vv. ll. saṃyata & sata, thus warranting yata); Miln 373 (°payatta), 378 (id.=in keen effort). - Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. would like to equal yatta=Sk. yatna effort. {Yatta} Yattaka {Yattaka} (adj.) [fr. yāvant, a late formation; cp. Trenckner, Notes, 80] however much, whatever, as many (in correlation with ta° or tattaka) J V.74 (=yāvant); Vism 184 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti . . . tattakaṃ . . .), 293 (yattakā=yāvatā); DA I.118 (yattaka . . . tattaka as long as); DhA II.50 (°ṃ kālaṃ as long), 128; VbhA 73 (yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ . . . tattakaṃ), 391 Pāli Text Society 1236 Pāli-English Dictionary (yattakāni kusala-cittāni . . . tesaṃ sabbesaṃ); VvA 175 (yattakāni . . . tāni as many . . . so many, i. e. whatever), 285 (yattakā āhuneyyā nāma . . . tesu sabbesu . . .). - instr. yattakena as adv. "because, on account of" DhA III.383, 393. Yattha {Yattha} (adv.) [the regular P. form of Ved. yatra. See also P. yatra] rel. adv. of place "where," at which spot; occasionally "at which time," when; with verbs of motion="whereto." - D I.240 (whither); Sn 79, 170 (here closely resembling yatra in meaning="so that"), 191, 313, 445, 995, 1037; Dh 87, 127 (yattha ṭhita, cp. PvA 104) 150, 171, 193, PvA 27. -yattha vā tattha vā wherever (or whenever) DhA IV.162; similarly yattha yattha wherever (he likes) A II.64. yattha kāmaṃ (cp. yathākāmaṃ in same meaning) where to one's liking, i. e. wherever Dh 35 (=yattha katthaci or yattha yattha icchati DhA I.295, 299), 326. Similarly we find yatthicchakaṃ, almost identical (originally variant?) with yadicchakaṃ and yāvadicchakaṃ at Vism 154. Yatra {Yatra} (adv.) [the (older?) reconstituted Sk. form of P. yattha, cp. Vedic yatra in which, where. The P. form is younger than the Vedic, as the P. meaning is doubtful for the V. period. It is merely a differentiation of forms to mark a special meaning in the sense of a causal conjunction, whereas yattha is adv. (of place or time) only] in which, where, since; only in phrase yatra hi nāma (in emphatic exclamations) with Fut.; "as indeed, inasmuch as, that" S II.255 (ðāṇabhūtā vata sāvakā y. h. n. savako ðassati etc.); J I.59 (dhir-atthu vata bho jātiyā y. h. n. jātassa jarā paððāyissati "woe to birth that old age is to be noticed in that which is born!"); Miln 13 (acchariyaṃ vata bho . . . y. h. n. me upajjhāyo ceto-parivitakkaṃ jānissati). Yathā {Yatha} (adv.) [fr. ya°; Vedic yathā; cp. kathā, tathā] as, like, in relation to, after (the manner of). - As prep. (with acc.): according (to some condition, norm or rule): yathā kāmaṃ (already Vedic) according to his desire, after his liking PvA 113, 136; y. kālaṃ in time, timely PvA 78; matiṃ to his own mind or intention Pv IV.167; ruciṃ to his satisfaction, amply, satisfactorily PvA 88, 126, 242; vibhavaṃ acc. to their wealth, i. e. plentifully PvA 53; sukhaṃ as they liked or pleased PvA 133. Sometimes with loc.: yathā padese "according to place," in the right place J III.391. Or instr.: y. sattiyā as much as you can DhA I.92; y. manena from his heart, sincerely, voluntarily DhA I.42. - Also with ger. yathā haritvā according to his taking (or reward: see under cpd. °bhata) It 14 (y. h. nikkhipeyya, which Seidenstücker, not doing justice to context translates "so wie man etwas nimmt und dann wegwirft"). With foll. adj. expressing something like "as it were" and often untranslateable (see cpds.) - As conjunction: "as if," or "so that": yathā mata like dead Dh 21; yathā na "in order that not": Vism 31 (y. sarīre ābādhaṃ na uppādeti, evaṃ tassa vinodan'atthaṃ); DhA I.311 (y. assa patitaṭthānaṃ na passāmi, tathā naṃ chaḍḍessāmi: so that I shall not see . . ., thus shall I throw him). - As adv. just, as, so, even; in combn with other particles: yathā kathaṃ pana how so then, how is it then that S II.283 (cp. yathā tathaṃ under cpds.); yathā kiṃ viya somewhat like this Miln 91; yathā pana like as DhA I.158; yatha-r-iva (for yathā-iva) just as D I.90; yathā pi . . . evaṃ just as . . . so Dh 51-52. -yatha-yidaṃ (for yathā-idaṃ) positive: "as just this," "so that," "e. g.," "like," "i. e."; after negation "but" It 8, 9 (na aññaṃ . . . yathayidaṃ); Sn 1092 (tvað ca me dīpam akkhāhi, yathayidaṃ n'āparaṃ siyā "so that there be no further ill"; cp. SnA 597). See also the enlarged forms seyyathā & seyyathīdaṃ. - In correlation with tathā: the same . . . as, like . . . as, as . . . so; Pv I.123 (yath'āgato tathā-gato as he has come so has he gone). Often elliptically in direct juxtaposition: yathā tathā in whatever way, in such & such a manner; so and so, according to the occasion; also "correctly, truly, in reality" Sn 504 (tvaṃ h'ettha jānāsi y. t. idaṃ); PvA 199 (y. t. vyākāsi). See yathā- tathaṃ under cpds. About phrase yathā taṃ see Pāli Text Society 1237 Pāli-English Dictionary yathātaṃ. - For further refs. on the use of yathā see Indexes to Saṃyutta (S VI.81 s. v. yathābhūtaṃ); Anguttara (A. VI.91 ibid.); Sutta-Nipāta (Index p. 751); & Dhammapada. ānudhammaṃ according to the rules (leading to enlightenment) Sn 963, cp. Nd1 481. ānurūpa suitable, proper Mhvs 28, 42. -ānusiṭṭhaṃ in accordance with what has been taught DhA I.158. -ābhirantaṃ (adv. nt. of ppr.) to (their) heart's content, as much (or as long) as one likes Vin III.145; Sn 53; DhA I.385; VvA 181. -āraddha [=ālabdha] as much as was to be had, sufficient Vin III.160. -ārahaṃ (nt. adv.) as is fit or proper, seeming, fitful, appropriately, duly (cp. Cpd. 1111, 1182) S I.226; Sn 403; Pv II.923; PvA 78, 132 (yathā codanaṃ v. l. SS), 287; VvA 139. So to be read at all Pv & PvA passages for T. yathā rahaṃ. Very freq. in Mhvs. e. g. 3, 27; 5, 148; 7, 70; 14, 54; 20, 8; 22, 58. -ālankata dressed as he was, in full (state-) dress DhA III.79. āvajjaṃ "as if to be blamed," i. e. (imitating) whatever is faulty, mimicry of deformities (as a forbidden pastime) D I.7 (=kāṇakuṇi-khaðj'ādīnaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vajjaṃ taṃ taṃ payojetvā dassana-kīḷā DA I.86); Vin II.10. -icchitaṃ according to one's wish, as he liked, after his heart's content J I.27 (v. 188)=Bu II.179; is preferably to be read as yad-icchitaṃ at all PvA passages, e. g. PvA 3 (°ṃ dento), 110 (°ṭhāna whichever place I like), 265 (where T. has yat°). The ed. of Mhvs however reads yath° throughout; e. g. 7, 22; 22, 50. -odhi as far as the limit, final, utmost M I.37; J III.302. -odhika to (its or their) full extent, altogether, only in phrase yathodhikāni kāmāni Sn 60 (cp. Nd2 526); J III.381 (C. not quite to the point with expln "attano odhivasena ṭhitāni," giving variant yatodhikāni, with expln "yato uparato odhi etesan ti yatodhikāni uparata-koṭṭhāsāni"); IV.487 (with better C. expln: "yena yena odhinā thitāni tena tena ṭhitān' eva jahissāmi, na kiðce avasissāmī ti attho"); V.392 (C.: "yathāṭhita-koṭṭhasāni"). kamma<11>(ṃ) according to one's karma or action J I.57, 109; IV.1. Freq. in phrase yathākamm-ûpage satte (pajānāti) "(he recognises) the beings passing away (or undergoing future retribution) acc. to their deeds" D I.82; M I.482; II.21; III.178; S II.122; A IV.141, 178, 422; V.35; Sn 587; It 99; and yathā-kamm-ûpaga-ðāṇa "the knowledge of specific retribution" Vism 433 sq.; Tikp 321; VbhA 373 sq. (°catuttha). -kāmaṃ according to wish, at random (see above); ° karaṇiya to be done or dealt with ad lib., i. e. a victim, prey S II.226; IV.91, 159; It 56. -kārin as he does It 122 (corresp. to tathāvādin). -kālaṃ according to time, in one time Mhvs 5, 180. kkamaṃ acc. to order, in one order or succession Mhvs 4, 54; Sdhp 269. -cārin virtuous (for the usual yatacārin as indicated by C. expln yata kāyādīhi sanyati: see Brethren, p. 342!) Th 1, 981 (trsl. "Whoso according to his powers is virtuous"). -ṭhita so-being, such & such, as they are, as they were J V.392; VvA 256. -tathaṃ according to truth, true & real (corresponding to yathā tathā adv.: see above) It 122 (here as nom. sg.: as he is in one respect, so in the other, i. e. perfect); Sn 1127 (=yathā ācikkhitabbaṃ tathā ācikkhi Nd2 527); Th 1, 708 (diṭṭhe dhamme yathātathe: is reading correct? perhaps better as yathātathā, cp. trsln Brethren 292: "the truths are seen e'en as they really are"); Dpvs III.2 (so read for yathā-kathaṃ; v. l. has °tathaṃ); V.64 (pañhaṃ byākarohi yathātathaṃ). -dhamma (used as adj. & adv. °ṃ) "one according to the law," i. e. as the rule prescribes; nt. according to the rule put down. See Vin. Texts I.203; Geiger, Dhamma, p. 19, 67. - Vin I.135 (yo uddiseyya, yathā-dhammo kāretabbo), 168 (yo pavāreyya, y.-dhammo kāretabbo), 191 (yo māreyya y.-dh. k.); II.67 (ubho pi yathādhammaṃ kārāpetabbā), 132 (yo ajjhohareyya, y.-dhammo kāretabbo); IV.126 (yo jānaṃ (i. e. knowing) yathādhammaṃ nihat'ādhikaraṇaṃ punakammāya ukkoṭeyya, pācittiyan ti i. e. a dispute settled in proper form; with expln: y.-dhammaṃ nāma dhammena vinayena satthu sāsanena kataṃ), 144 (na tassa . . . mutti atthi yað ca tattha āpattiṃ āpanno tað ca yathādhammo kāretabbo, uttari c'assa moho āropetabbo). Cp. the foll. passages; as adj.: Vin I.205; II.132, 142, 263; M III.10; Miln 195; as adv.: with paṭikaroti (to atone, make amends) Vin I.173, 315; II.126; IV.19; D I.85; III.55; M III.247; S II.128, 205; A I.103, 238; II.146; IV.377; cp. yathādhammaṃ paṭigaṇhāti S I.239; A I.59, 103. At S III.171 yathādhammaṃ is used in the sense of "according to the truth, or reality," where yathā-bhūtaṃ takes its place; similarly at Pāli Text Society 1238 Pāli-English Dictionary Th 1, 188. -dhota as if it were washed (so to speak), clean, unsoiled DhA I.196; cp. MVastu I.301 yathā-dhauta. -pasādhanaṃ according to a clear state of mind, to one's gratification Dh 249 (=attano pasād'ānurūpaṃ DhA III.359). -puggalaṃ according to the individual, individually Pv III.51 (read yathāpu°). -pūrita as full as could be, quite full J I.101. -phāsuka comfortable, pleasant DhA I.8. -balaṃ according to one's power or means DhA I.107 (v. l. °satti); Sdhp 97; Mhvs 5, 180. -buḍḍha see °vuḍḍha. -bhataṃ is an unexpld a(/pac legome/non, difficult of analysis because occurring in only one ster. phrase, viz. yathā bhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye (& sagge) at M I.71; S IV.325 (where T. has yathāhataṃ, v. l. bhataṃ); A I.8, 105, 292, 297; II.71, 83; It 12, 14, 26. We have analyzed it as y. bhataṃ in Corr. to pt. 3; vol. II.100 ("according to his upbringing"), but we should rather deviate from this expln because the P. usage in this case would prefer the nom. instead of the (adv.) acc. nt. It remains doubtful whether we should separate yathā or yath'ābhataṃ. Suggestions of a trsln are the foll. (1) "as soon as brought or taken" (see Dict. s. v. ābhata); (2) "as one has brought" (merit or demerit); thus taking ābhataṃ as irregular ger. of ā+bhar, trsln suggested by the reading āharitvā (yathāharitvā) in the complementary stanzas at It 12 & 14; (3) "according to merit or reward," after Kern's suggestion, Toev. s. v. to read yathā bhaṭaṃ, the difficulty being that bhaṭa is nowhere found as v. l. of bhata in this phrase; nor that bhaṭa occurs in the meaning of "reward." - There is a strong likelihood of (ā)bhata resembling āhata (āhaṭa?) in meaning "as brought," on account of, cp. It context and reading at S IV.325; still the phrase remains not sufficiently cleared up. Seidenstūcker's trsln has been referred to above (under haritvā) as unbefitting. - The suspicion of yathābhataṃ being a veiled (corrupted) yathābhūtaṃ has presented itself to us before (see vol. I. under ābhata). The meaning may suggest something like the latter, in as far as "in truth," "surely" is not far off the point. Anyhow we shall have to settle on a meaning like "according to merit," without being able to elucidate the phrase in all its details. - There is another yathābhataṃ in passage . . . ussavo hoti, yathābhataṃ lasuṇaṃ parikkhayaṃ agamāsi "the garlic diminished as soon as it was brought" Vin IV.258. Here ābhata stands in rel. to harāpeti (to have it fetched & brought) and is clearly pp. of ābharati. -bhucca as is the case, i. e. as one might expect, evident, real, in conformity with the truth D I.12; II.222; Miln 183, 351; Th 2, 159 (=yathābhūtaṃ ThA 142); PvA 30, 31 (°guṇā). -bhutta see bhutta. -bhūta(ṃ) in reality, in truth, really, definitely, absolutely; as ought to be, truthfully, in its real essence. Very freq. in var. combnns which see collected & classified as regards Saṃyutta & AnguttaraNikāyas in Index vols to these texts. E. g. S IV.195 (vacanaṃ, Ep. of Nibbāna); V.440 (abhisamaya); Sn 194, 202, 653; Dh 203; PvA 215 (guṇa). yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti he knows as an absolute truth or in reality D I.83, 162; S IV.188; V.304 & passim; ditto yathābhūtaṃ jānāti passati Ps II.62. Similarly with noun: yathābhūta-ðāṇa absolute knowledge S V.144; Ps II.63=Vism 605 (+sammādassana); Vism 438, 629, 695; VbhA 459 (=maggaðāṇa); also as °ðāṇadassana in same meaning: A III.19, 200; IV.99, 336; V.2 sq., 311 sq.; Ps I.33, 43 sq.; II.11 sq.; Nett 29. -mano according to (his) mind Sn 829; Nd1 170 (expld as nom.=yathācitto, yathāsankappo, yathāviððāṇo). -ruciṃ according to pleasure or liking Mhvs 4, 43 (ruci T.; ruciṃ v. l.; thus generally in Mhvs.); 5, 230 (°ruci); 22, 58 (°ruci). -vādin as speaking, as he speaks (followed by tathā-kārin so doing) D II.224, 229; Sn 357; It 122. -vidhi(ṃ) duly, fitly Mhvs 10, 79. -vihita as appointed or arranged Mhvs 10, 93. -vuḍḍhaṃ according to seniority Vin II.221; Mhbv 90 (T. reads °buḍḍhaṃ). -vutta(ṃ) as is said, i. e. as mentioned, aforesaid, of this kind Mhvs 34, 57; PvA 45, 116 (°o puggalo). -saka(ṃ) each his own, according to his (or her) own, respective(ly) Vism 525; SnA 8, 9; VvA 7; Mhvs 5, 230 (here simply "their own"). -sata saintly (?), mindful Th 1, 981 (cp. yathā cārin & Brethren p. 342). -satti(ṃ) according to one's power S IV.348 (+yathābalaṃ); DhA I.107 (v. l. for °balaṃ); Sdhp 97. -satthaṃ according to the precepts, as law ordains M III.10 (perhaps an error for yathāsaddha? ). -saddhaṃ acc. to faith, as is one's faith Dh 249. -santhatika accepting whatever seat is offered D I.167; A III.220; Pug 69; Th 1, 855 - Pāli Text Society 1239 Pāli-English Dictionary °anga one of the 13 dhutangas Miln 342, 359; Vism 61, 78. -sukhaṃ according to ease, at ease, at will Th 1, 77; Dh 326. Yathātaṃ {Yathatam} (adv.) [yathā+taṃ] as it is, as, as if Vin III.5; S I.124; M I.253. The spelling in our books is yathā taṃ (in two words). Yathāva {Yathava} (adj.) [der. fr. yathā, as yathā+vant, after analogy of yāvant, but following the a-decl., cp. Epic Sk. yathāvat] having the character of being in accordance with (the truth or the occasion), real, true, just It 44 (santaṃ paṇītaṃ yathāvaṃ, nt.); Th 1, 188, 422 (°ālokadassana seeing the real light); Miln 171 (°lakkhaṇa true characteristics); Vism 588 (as yāthāvasarasa), 639 (id.). - abl. yathāvato (also found as yāthāvato, probably more correctly, being felt as a der. fr. yathā) according to fitness, fitfully, duly, truly, sufficiently PvA 60 (so read for yathā vato), 128 (all MSS. yāthāvato!); ThA 256 (yā°; the expln given by Morris, J.P.T.S. 1889, 208 is not correct). Yathāvaka {Yathavaka} (adj.) [fr. yathāva] being according to reality or sufficiency, essential, true, real, sufficient Th 1, 347; VbhA 409 (°vatthu, referring to the "māna"-division of the Khuddaka-vatthu Vbh 353 sq., cp. Nd2 505≈) Should we read yāthāvaka°? Yad, Yad—idaṃ {Yad} {Yadidam} etc., see ya° 4b. Yadā {Yada} (adv.) [Vedic yadā; old instr. of ya°] when Sn 200 (y. ca so mato seti), 681, 696 (here as yada, expld as yadā), 923; Dh 28, 69, 277 sq., 325, 384, 390; It 77 (y devo devakāyā cavati); PvA 54, 67. Cp. kadā & tadā. Yadi {Yadi} (indecl.) [adv. formation, orig. loc., fr. ya°; cp. Vedic yadi] 1. as conjunction: if; constructed either with pres. indic., as: Sn 189; "yadi bodhiṃ pattuṃ icchasi" J I.24 (v. 167); "yadi dāyako dānaṃ deti . . . etaṃ bījaṃ hoti" PvA 8; or pot.; or with a participle, as: "yadi evaṃ sante" that being so, if this is so D I.61; "gahito yadi sīho te" if the lion is caught by you Mhvs 6, 27. - With other particles, e. g. yādi āsanamattaṃ pi even if only a seat VvA 39; yadi . . . atha kasmā if . . . how then Miln 4. yadi evaṃ . . . (tu) even if . . . yet (but) PvA 63 (y. e. pitā na rodati, mātu nāma hadayaṃ mudukaṃ). - yadi va "or" (cp. Vedic yadi vā "or be it that") Dh 195 (=yadi vā athavā DhA III.252). So yadi vā at J I.18 (v. 97: latā vā yadi vā rukkhā etc. Sn 119 (gāme vā yadi vāraññe). - 2. as a strong particle of exhortation: yadi evaṃ if so, in that case, let it be that, alright, now then PvA 54 (y. e. yaṃ mayhaṃ desitaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno dehi), 217 (y. e. yāvadatthaṃ gaṇhāhi: take as much as you like). Yanta {Yanta} (nt.) [Vedic yantra, a kind of n. ag. formation fr. yam to hold by means of a string or bridle, etc. Idg. *em & *iem, as in Lat. emo to take & red-imio.] a means for holding, contrivance, artifice, instrument, machine, mechanism; fig. instrumentality (as perhaps in, kamma° at Th passages). - Referring to the machinery (outfit) of a ship (as oars, helm, etc.) J IV.163 (sabbayant'ûpapanna=piy'-ārittā etc. C.); Miln 379. To mechanism in general (mechanical force) J V.333 (°vegena=with the swiftness of machinery). To a sugar-mill Miln 166; usually as ucchu-yanta J I.25, 339 (°yante gaṇṭhikā), cp. ucchūnaṃ yanta DhA IV.199. tela-yanta (-cakka) (the wheel of) an oil mill J I.25. -dāru-yanta a wooden machine (i. e. a mechanical man with hands & feet moved by pulling of strings) DA I.197; Vism 595 (quoted as simile). -kamma-yanta the machinery of Kamma Th 1, 419 (i. e. its instrumentality, not, as trsln "car"; cp. Brethren 217: "it breaks in pieces K's living car," evidently influenced by C. Pāli Text Society 1240 Pāli-English Dictionary expln "attabhāva-yanta"), 574 (similarly: see discussed under yantita). Note. yantāni at Nd2 529 (on Sn 48 sanghaṭṭa-yantām) is expld as "dhuvarāni." The spelling & meaning of the latter is not clear. It must refer to bracelets. - Cp. SnA 96 valayāni. -ākaḍḍhana pulling the machine Vism 258=VbhA 241. -cakkha-yaṭṭhi the stick of the wheel of a (sugar-) mill VbhA 60. -nāḷi a mechanical tube DhA III.215. -pāsāṇa an aerolite (?) J III.258 (read °pāsāṇo). -phalakāni the boards of a machine Vism 258. -yutta combined by machinery J VI.432. -sutta the string of a machine (or mill). Vism 258 (as °ka)=VbhA 241. -hatthi a mechanical (automatic) elephant DhA I.192 (of King Caṇḍa-pajjota; cp. the horse of Troy). Yantaka {Yantaka} (nt.) [fr. yanta] a bolt Vin II.148 (vihārā aguttā honti . . . anujānāmi yantakaṃ sūcikan ti), cp. Vin. Texts III.162; DA I.200 (kuðcikā+); DhA I.220 (yantakaṃ deti to put the bolt to, to lock up). Yanti {Yanti} is 3rd pl. pres. of yā: see yāti. - Note. At D II.269 we should combine yanti with preceding visamā & sambādhā, thus forming denom. verbs: visamāyanti "become uneven" and sambādhāyanti "become oppressed or tight." The trsln Dial II.305 gives just the opposite by reading incorrectly. Yantita {Yantita} [pp. of yanteti] made to go, set into motion, impelled Th 1, 574: evāyaṃ vattati kāyo kamma-yantena yantito "impelled by the machinery of Karma"; trsln Brethren 261 not quite to the point "carried about on Karma's car." Kern, Toev. s, v. quite out of place with "fettered, held, restrained," in analogy to his trsln of yanta id. loc. with "fetter." He may have been misled by Dhtm defn of yant as "sankocana" (see yanteti). Yanteti {Yanteti} [denom. fr. yanta. Dhtm 809 gives a root yant in meaning of "sankocane," i. e. contraction] to set into motion, to make go, impel, hurl J I.418 (sakkharaṃ anguliyā yantetvā); pp. yantita. Yannūna {Yannuna} see ya° see ya° 2°. Yapana {Yapana} see yāpana. Yapeti {Yapeti} see yāpeti. Yabhati {Yabhati} [one passage in Atharva Veda; cp. Gr. oi)/fw "futuo," Lat. ibex (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] to cohabit, futuere, only given as root yabh with defn "methune" at Dhtp 215 & Dhtm 308. Yama1 {Yama} [fr. yam] restraint PvA 98 (+niyama). Yama2 {Yama} [Vedic Yama] the ruler of the kingdom of the dead. See details in Dicty. of Names. In cpds. often in general sense of "death" or "manes," or "petā"; e. g. -dūta Death's messenger Sdhp 287; cp. Yamassa dūtā Vv 522 (see VvA 224), or deva-dūta A I.138 (see under dūta), alias niraya-pāla A I.138 and passim. -purisa (a)=°dūta Dh 235 (cp. DhA III.335); VvA 223; (b) °purisā Yama-people, i. e. Petas Pv IV.3Q (cp. PvA 251). -loka the yama-world or world of the Petas Dh 44, 45; PvA 107 & freq. -visaya=°loka Pv II.82 & passim. -sādana Y's kingdom, or the realm of the dead J VI.267, 304; VI.457, 505. Pāli Text Society Yama3 1241 Pāli-English Dictionary (m. nt.) [Vedic yama=yama2; fr. yam in meaning "to combine," cp. Av. y&schwamacr;ma twin, Mir. emuin id.] (nt.) a pair, (m.) a twin Abhp 628. See der. yamaka. {Yama} Yamaka {Yamaka} [fr. yama3] 1. (adj.) double, twin; only in foll. combns: °pāṭihāriya (& °hīra) the miracle of the double appearances, a miracle performed by the Buddha in Sāvatthī to refute the heretical teachers (cp. Vin III.332, Samanta-pāsādika; and in detail DA I.57). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as e. g. streaming forth of fire & water. (Cp. Mhvs trsln 120). The miracle was repeatedly performed by the Buddha & is often referred to, e. g. at Ps I.125 (°hīra); J I.77, 88, 193; Miln 106 (°hīraṃ), 349 (°hāriyaṃ); Mhvs 17, 44, 50; 30, 82; 31, 99; Dāvs I.50 (°hīraṃ); DhA III.213 (id.); SnA 36; Vism 390; PvA 137. -sālā the pair of Sal willows in between of which the Buddha passed away VvA 165; PvA 212. - 2. (adj. or m.) a twin, twin child Mhvs 6, 9 (yamake duve puttaṃ ca dhītaraṃ janesi), 37 (soḷasakkhattuṃ yamake duve duve putte janayi); DhA I.353 (same, with vijāyi). - 3. (nt.) a pair, couple, N. of one of the Abhidhamma canonical books, also called Yamaka-ppakaraṇa; Tikp 8. - The Yamakasutta refers to the conversion of the bhikkhu Yamaka and is given at S III.109 sq.; mentioned at Vism 479 & VbhA 32. The phrase yamakato sammasana at Vism 626 may mean "in pairs" (like kalāpato "in a bundle" ibid.), or may refer to the Yamaka-sutta with its discussion of anicca, dukkha, anatta. Yamataṃ {Yamatam} at S I.14 (sa vītivatto yamataṃ sumedho) we should read (with Mrs. Rh. D.'s emendation K.S. p. 320) as yaṃ mataṃ (Cy.: maññanaṃ; trsl. "he rich in wisdom hath escaped beyond conceits and deemings of the errant mind"). Yamati {Yamati} [yam, given in meaning "uparame" i. e. cessation, quieting at Dhtp 226 & Dhtm 322, at the latter with additional "nāse." On etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. redimio and emo: cp. yanta] to restrain, suppress, to become tranquil; only in stanza Dh 6=Th I.275=J III.488 as 1st pl. med. yamāmase in imper. sense: "pare ca na vijānanti mayaṃ ettha yamāmase," which is expld both at DhA I.65, Th 1 A, & J III.489 in connection with yama,2 viz. "yamāmase: uparamāma nassāma satataṃ samitaṃ maccu-santikaṃ gacchāmā ti na jānanti," i. e. let us go continually into the presence of death. A little further at DhA I.66 the expln of it is "bha ṇḍ'ādīnaṃ vuddhiyā vāyamāmā ti na vijānanti." The meaning is "to control oneself," cp. saṃyamāmase S I.209. Leop. v. Schroeder however trsls. "Und mancher Mann bedenket nicht: wir alle müssen sterben hier" (Worte der Wahrheit, p. 2.). - yameyyātha at S I.217 is wrongly separated from the preceding vā, which ought to be read as vāyameyyātha (so K.S. I.281). Yamala {Yamala} [fr. yama3] a pair Abhp 628. - yamalī occurs in BSk. only as a kind of dress, at Divy 276; AvŚ I.265. Yava {Yava} [Vedic yava, corn; see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 239. Cp. Gr. zea/ spelt; Lith. javaī corn; Oir. eorna barley] corn (in general), barley (in particular) Vin IV.264; S IV.220; A IV.169. karaṇa the preparation of corn A IV.169. -kalāpī (or °inī) a sheaf of barley S IV.201. kāraṇḍava chaff of corn (or barley) A IV.169. -kummāsa barley-gruel VvA 62. -khetta cornfield Vin IV.47, 266; VvA 294. -dūsin spoiling the corn A IV.169. -majjhaka lying in the midst of a corn-field, in pācīna° of the c.-f. on the E. side (+dakkhiṇa° S.; pacchima° W.; uttara° N.); names of 4 market-places near Mithilā J VI.330. -sūka the awn or beard of corn (barley) A I.8; S V.10, 48. Pāli Text Society 1242 Pāli-English Dictionary Yavaka {Yavaka} (nt.) [yava+collect. ending °ka] in cpd. sāli° (whatever there is of) rice & corn (i. e. rice- and cornfields C.) J IV.172. Cp. yāvaka. Yavasa {Yavasa} (nt.) [fr. yava; Vedic yavasa] grass, hay, fodder J I.338. Yasavant {Yasavant} (adj.) [cp. Vedic yaśasvat] famous, having renown A II.64 (dīghāyu+). Yasassin {Yasassin} (adj.) [Vedic yaśasvin] glorious, famous, renowned, having all endowments or comforts of life (as expld at Nd2 530: yasappatta, sakkata, lābhī etc.) D I.48 (ðāta+); A II.34; Sn 179, 298, 343, 1117; Pv I.41; III.117; III.35; III.108; Vv 159 (=kittimant parivāravant VvA 73); DA I.143; PvA 10; Sdhp 420. - f. yasassinī shining, resplendent J V.64. Yasassimant {Yasassimant} (adj.) [double adj. ending; yasas+vin+ mant] splendid, glorious, full of splendour J V.63 (pāvako yasassimā=teja-sampattiyā yassassinīhi accīhi yutto C.). Yaso & Yasa (nt.) [Vedic yaśaḥ (nt.). The word follows the a° declension, but preserves & favours the instr. yasasā after the s° decl. (like mano, ceto etc,), e. g. at J I.134. - In the nom. & acc. sg. both forms yaso & yasa(ṃ) occur; in cpds. the form yasa° is the usual; yaso as masc. is found at Sn 438] glory, fame, repute, success, high position. On term as used with ref. to the brahmin see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 128, 129 - The prevailing idea of Dhammapāla is that yaso consists of a great retinue, & company of servants, followers etc. This idea is already to be found at D I.118=126 where y. is founded on parisā (cp. DA I.143 on D I.48; DA I.298: yasasā ti āṇā-ṭhapana-samatthatāya). See e. g. VvA 122 (yaso=parivāra); PvA 137 (yasasā= mahati parivāra-sampattiyā); cp. J I.134 (rājā mahantena yasena uppanaṃ gacchati). - D I.137 (as quality of a king); III.260, 286; J IV.275 sq. (dibba y. as one of the 10 qualities of greatness, viz. divine duration of life, complexion, happiness, fame, power, and the 5 senseobjects rūpa, sadda, gandha, rasa, phoṭṭhabba. The same 10 are found at Pv II.958, 59); A I.15; II.32, 66, 188; III.31, 47 sq.; IV.95, 195 sq.; Dh 24, 303 (+bhoga); Th 1, 554; Nd1 147; Pv III.35 (=dev'iddhi PvA 189); Vv 291; J I.134; VI.468; Miln 291 (bhoga+); Vism 393; Sdhp 306, 518. yasaṃ deti to give credit J I.180. mahā-yaso great fame J I.46 (v. 266), cp. yas-agga the highest (of) fame J I.51, where coupled with lābh-agga the greatest gain. The latter combn is stereotype in the Niddesa (see e. g. Nd2 55), where the 4 worldly ideals are given in sequence lābha, yaso, pasaṃsā, sukha. - With kitti we find yaso at Sn 817 (see defn & exegesis at Nd1 147). - Opp. ayasa D III.260, 286; A II.188; IV.157 sq. -dāyika giving (or a giver of) repute J VI.285. -mada pride of fame VbhA 467. -mahatta greatness of fame Vism 233. -lābha the gain of fame J III.516 (+dhanalābha). {Yaso} {Yasa} Yahiṃ {Yahim} (adv.) [after kuhiṃ] where, wherever Mhvs 15, 209 (corresp. to yattha in v. 210). Yāga {Yaga} [fr. yaj, *Sk. yāga, cp. yaðða & yaja] 1. a (brahmanic) sacrifice, known otherwise as mahāyāga (or pl. °yāgā), and consisting of the 4: assamedha, purisamedha, sammāpāsa, vājapeyya. Thus mentioned at S I.76 & Sn 303. - 2. In Buddhistic sense: gift, alms- giving, charity; expense or expenditure of giving (almost syn. with cāga) A I.91 (here given in line with dāna & cāga, with distinction of āmisa° & dhamma°, i. e. the material sacrifice, as under 1, and the spiritual sacrifice or help); with the same contrast of ā° & dh.° at D III.155; It 98, 102; J V.57, 65; DhA I.27. - J IV.66 (sahassena yāgaṃ yajanto); Miln 21 (dhamma°); VvA 155; PvA 135 (mahā°saððita yaðða), 136 (mahā°). - suyiṭṭha yāga sampadā "well-given is the perfection of charity" Pāli Text Society 1243 Pāli-English Dictionary ThA 40 (Ap. v. 7)=230 (id.). -piṇḍa the sacrificial oblation consisting in a ball of meat or flour (cp. piṇḍa-pitṛ-yajða) J VI.522 (with v. l. yāgu°). Yāgin {Yagin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. yāga] sacrificing, giving, spending S I.19=J IV.66 (sahassa° giving the worth of a thousand pieces). Yāgu {Yagu} (f.) [cp. Vedic yavāgū; on form see Geiger, P.Gr. § 274] rice-gruel, rice-milk (to drink). See Vin. Texts II.89. - Vin I.46=II.223 (sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanametabbā; yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā . . .), 51 (id.), 61 (id.), 84, 210 (Bhagavato udaravāt-ābādho tekaṭulāya yāguyā dhuva-yāguṃ dātuṃ; i. e. a constant supply of rice-gruel), 339 (na mayaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ yāgupāne nisīdissāma); IV.311; A III.250 (ānisaṃsā: 5 good qualities: it is good for hunger, for thirst, allays wind, cleans the bladder, helps to digest any undigested food); J I.186; II.128 (for drink); PvA 12, 23, 274. - Often combd (and eaten) with cakes (khajjaka) & other soft food (bhojja), e. g. yāgukhajjaka J I.270; III.20; DhA IV.20; Mhvs 14, 55 (°khajja-bhojja); 36, 100 (+khajja-bhojja). -pāna a drink of rice-milk Vin I.84. -piṇḍa see yāga°. -bhājaka one who distributes the rice-gruel Vin II.176 (paðcah'angehi samannāgataṃ; together with cīvarabhājaka, phala-bhājaka & khajja-bhājaka); IV.38 (yāgu°, phala°, khajja°), 155 (id.); A III.275. Yāca {Yaca} (nt.) [fr. yāc] anything asked for, donation, alms, begging J III.353; V.233, 234. -yoga (y.+*yogga; perhaps yāja° the original. The variant yājayoga is old & well established: cp. Vism 224) accessible to begging, one ready to comply with another's request, devoted to liberality, open-handed. Freq. in ster. phrase mutta-cāga payata-pāṇī vossaggarata yāca-yoga dānasaṃvibhāga-rata to denote great love of liberality, e. g. at A I.226; II.66; III.313. See also A III.53, 313=Vism 223, 224 (where expld as follows: yaṃ yaṃ pare yācanti tassa tassa dānato yācanayogo ti attho; yājayogo ti pi pāṭho; yājana-sankhātena yājena yutto ti attho); A IV.6, 266 sq., 271, 284; V.331, 336; Sn p. 87 (cp. expln SnA 414: "yācituṃ yutto, yo hi yācake disvā bhakuṭiṃ katvā pharusavacan'ādīni bhanati, so na yācayogo hoti" etc.); Sn 487, 488, 489, 509; J III.307 (expld in C. as "yaṃ yaṃ āgantukā yācanti tassa tassa yutto anucchaviko bhavitvā, sabbaṃ tehi yācita-yācitaṃ dadamāno ti attho"); IV.274 ("yācitabba-yuttaka" C.); VI.98 (=yācana-yuttaka or yañña-yuttaka; "ubhayath'āpi dāyakass'ev'etaṃ nāma" C.); Miln 215, 225. - The form yājayoga at Sn 1046 (expld at Nd2 531 as "yāje yutta"); and mentioned at Vism 224 (see above). - On diff. meaning of yācayoga see Kern, Toev. s. v. with unidentified ref. Cp. also Mvyut. 140, 4. Yācaka {Yacaka} (adj. n.) [fr. yāca, cp. Epic & later Sk. yācaka] requesting, one who begs, a recipient of alms, a beggar J III.353; Pv II.938; PvA 78, 102 (=yācanaka); Sdhp 324, 331. Freq. in combn with similar terms of wayfaring people in phrase samaṇa-brāhmaṇa-kapaṇ' iddhikavaṇibbaka-yācakā e. g. at D I.137; It 64. See single terms. - yācaka at Sn 618 (as Fick, Soc.Gliederung 144 quotes yācaka) is to be read yājaka. Yācati {Yacati} [Vedic yācati; yāc, with which cp. Lat. jocus (dial. juca "prayer"); Ohg. jehan to confess, etc.: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. jocus. - Dhtp (38) only expls yāca= yācane] to beg, ask for, entreat Vin IV.129 (pabbajjaṃ); Sn 566, 980, 983; J III.49, 353; V.233, 404. - aor. 3rd pl. yāciṃsu PvA 13, 20, 42; ayācisuṃ Mhvs 33, 76 (v. l. ayācayuṃ). - inf. yācituṃ PvA 29, 120. - ger. yāciya Sn 295; yācitvā M I.365; yācitvāna Mhvs 17, 58. - pp. yācita. Pāli Text Society 1244 Pāli-English Dictionary Yācana {Yacana} (dt.) [fr. yāc] begging, asking, entreaty J III.353; SnA 161 (inghā ti yācan'atthe nipāto) 551 (id.); PvA 113 (=sādhuka). -jīvāna living by begging J III.353. Yācanaka {Yacanaka} [cp. BSk. yācanaka Divy 470, 585]=yācaka A III.136 (ati°); Pv II.76; 916; 946; J III.49; DA I.298. Yācanā {Yacana} (f.)=yācana; J III.354=Miln 230; J V.233, 404. Yācita {Yacita} [pp. of yācati] begged, entreated, asked (for) A III.33; Dh 224; J III.307; PvA 39. - Cp. yācitaka. Yācitaka {Yacitaka} (adj.) [yācita+diminutive (disparaging) ending °ka] asked, begged, borrowed M I.365 (°ṃ bhogaṃ); J IV.358=VI.127 (°ṃ yānaṃ and °ṃ dhanaṃ, alluding to M I.365-366), with expln J IV.358: "yaṃ parena dinnattā labbhati taṃ yācita-sadisam eva hoti." - (nt.) anything borrowed, borrowed goods: yācitak'ûpamā kāmā (in app'assādā kāmā passage) "the pleasures of the senses are like borrowed goods" Vin II.25=M I.130= A III.97=Th 2, 490=Nd2 71 (correct yācitan'); expld in detail at M I.365. - See also DhA I.403 (ye y. gahetvā na paṭidenti); ThA 288 (kāmā=yācitaka-bhaṇḍasadisā tāvakālik'aṭṭhena). Yāja {Yaja} [fr. yaj; cp. yāja & yājeti] sacrificing, giving alms, liberality (felt as synonymous with cāga, thus influenced by tyaj, cp. Sk. tyājana): see yācayoga; - Nd2 531 (yāye yutta); Vism 224. Yājaka {Yajaka} (adj.) [fr. yaj in its Caus. form yājeti] sacrificing, one who sacrifices, a priest Sn 312, 313 (=yanna-yājino janā SnA 324), 618 (of a purohita; v. l. BB yācaka). Yājana {Yajana} (nt)=yāja; Vism 224: see yācayoga. Yājin {Yajin} (adj.) [fr. yāja] sacrificing SnA 324 (yaðða°). Yājetar {Yajetar} [n. ag. to yājeti] one who superintends a sacrifice or causes it to be performed D I.143. Yājeti {Yajeti} [Caus. I. of yajati] to cause to sacrifice, to make a priest give an offering (to the gods or otherwise) J VI.211, 215; ppr. yājento M I.404; Pot. 2nd sg. yājeyya J III.515; 3rd pl. yājeyyuṃ J VI.215 (aññaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ); also yājayeyyuṃ J VI.211. - ger. yājetvā D I.143. Yāta {Yata} [pp. of yāti] going, gone, proceeded; habit, custom; only in cpd. yāt'ānuyāyin going on according to what (or as it) has gone, i. e. following old habits J VI.309, 310; expld by C. as "pubba-kārinā yātassa puggalassa anuyāyī, paṭhamaṃ karonto yāti nāma pacchā karonto anuyāyati." The usual Sk. phrase is gat-ānugatika. Cp. yātrā, yānikata. Yāti {Yati} [Vedic yāti, or yā, which represents Idg *iā, an amplified *ē as in eti (q. v.). Cp. Lat. janua door & the Np. Janus (=January); Lith. jñti to ride, Mir. āth ford. - The Dhtp 368 expls yā more in appld meaning as "papuṇane," cp. Dhtm 596: pāpuṇe] to go, go on, to proceed, to go away; - pres. 1st yāmi Pv II.8Q (=gacchāmi PvA 107), Mhvs 10, 3; 2nd yāsi J I.291; Mhvs 10, 2 (kuhiṃ yāsi?); 3rd yāti Sn 720 (tuṇhī y. mahodadhi); Dh 29, 179, 294, 295; J VI.311; Mhvs 5, 47; DhA I.18; 1st pl. yāma Mhvs 6, 12 (kiṃ na y., v. l. kiṃ nu y.); 2nd yātha=imper.; 3rd yanti Sn Pāli Text Society 1245 Pāli-English Dictionary 179, 578, 714; Dh 126, 175, 225 (see also note s. v. yanti); Pv II.916 (=gacchanti PvA 120). imper. 2nd sg. yāhi Pv II.16 (read yajāhi?); Mhvs 13, 15; 3rd sg. yātu Mhvs 29, 17; 2nd pl. yātha Mhvs 14, 29; DhA I.93. - ppr. yanto Mhvs 36, 60 (pacchā y. walking behind) gen. yantassa Mhvs 22, 57 (assavegena y.). - inf. yātave Sn 834. - Another formation fr. yā is yāyati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 138), in an intensive meaning of "to drive, to move on quickly or by special means," e. g. in phrase yānena yāyati to drive in a carriage Vin I.191 (Pot. yāyeyya); II.276; Sn 654 (ppr.: rathass' āṇī va yāyato) 418 (ger.: yānabhūmiṃ yāyitvā yānā oruyha); J VI.125. As "march" at J VI.449. In special meaning "to drive," i. e. "to be driven or affected by" in expln of the ending of ppr. med kāma- yamāne Sn 767 (or kāma-yāna) at Nd1 4, viz. "taṇhāya yāyati niyyati vuyhati saṃhariyati." Cp. yāna as ending. - pp. yāta. Caus. yapeti & yāpeti (q. v.). - See also anupari°, ā°, upa°, uy°, pa° (aor. pāyāsi) paccuy°, pari°; and anuyāyati. Yātrā {Yatra} (f.) [fr. yā, Class. Sk. yātrā, a n. ag. formation like nettī, meaning something like "vehicle," that which keeps going] 1. travel, going on, proceeding, good habit (like yāta; cp. yātrā=anuvṛtti Halāyudha 5, 33) S I.33; S I.16=63 (trsln K.S., perhaps wrongly, "egress": it is more a question of going on through life!). Perhaps to be classed under foll. meaning as well. 2. going on, livelihood, support of life, maintenance in stock phrase occurring at many places of the Canon, viz. "purāṇaṃ vedanaṃ paṭihankhāmi, navað ca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmi, yātrā ca me bhavissati etc." where DhsA 404 explains yātrā by yāpanā, as may be inferred also from context. Thus at M I.10 (where Neumann translates: "ein Fortkommen haben," i. e. progress), 355; S IV.104; A II.40; III.388; Nd1 496; Nd2 540 (correct devanaṃ into vedanaṃ!); Pug 25; Dhs 1348; Miln 367: all passages identical. The whole passage is expld in detail at Vism 31 sq. where yātrā is given with "cira-kāla-gamana-sankhātā yātrā," Bdhgh. thus taking it as "keeping going," or "continued subsistence" (longevity trsḷn). - In one other passage yātrā is conjectured for sātrā, viz. at SnA 322 in reading y. -yāga for sātrā yāga, where meaning y. might be taken as "customary." The ed. compares Sk. yātsattra, a certain ceremony. Yāthāva {Yathava} (adj.) [see yathāva. It is a combn of a guṇader. fr. yathā and an adj.-der. of °vant] sufficient (lit. "just as much"; i. e. such as it is), sufficiently founded, logical, consistent, exact, definite, true Nd2 275 (where tatha is expld by taccha, bhūta, yāthāva, aviparīta); DhsA 248 (where micchā-diṭṭhi is expld as incorrect or illogical view. - yāthāvato (abl.) exactly, truly, consistently DA I.65; ThA 256; VvA 232. See also yathāvato. - The nearest synonyms of yāthāva are aviparīta (i. e. definite) and yathābhūtaṃ. See also yathāva and yathāvaka. -nāma having the name of exactitude PvA 231 (+aviparīta-nāma). -māna pride of sufficiency or consistency VbhA 487 sq. (and a°). -lakkhaṇa possessing the characteristic of definiteness or logic Miln 171; Nett 27 (where avijjā is called "sabba dhammayāthāva-asampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā"). -vacana exact, logical or true speech Miln 214 (taccha-vacana, yāthāvav. , aviparīta-v.). -sarasa logical and with its essential (sa+rasa) properties Vism 588, 639. Yādicchakaṃ {Yadicchakam} at VvA 341 read as yadicchakaṃ (see ya°). Yādisa {Yadisa} (adj.) [Vedic yādṛś & yādṛsa, yad+dṛśa] which like, what like, whichever, how much; in neg. sentence: any, whatever little. - Pv. II.119 (=yāva mahanto PvA 77). - Often combd with kīdisa in meaning "any one, this or that, whoever," e. g. Vv 5014 (=yo vā so vā pacura-jano ti attho VvA 213). As adj.: yādisi (sic!=Sk. yādṛśī) -kīdisā jīvikā (no livelihood, whatever little) J VI.584 (v.728; Trenckner, Miln p. 423 gives v. 732!), expld by C as "yā vā sā vā, lāmakā ti attho"; yādisaṃ kīdisaṃ dānaṃ a gift of whatever kind Miln 278. So also with tādisa: yādisā vā tādisā vā (viz. kāmā) of whichever kind A III.5. Pāli Text Society 1246 Pāli-English Dictionary Yādisaka {Yadisaka} =yādisa; in correlation (generalising sense) yādisaka-tādisaka whatsoever . . . such, any whatsoever A IV.308; S V.96. Yāna {Yana} (nt.) [fr. yā, as in yāti. Cp. Vedic yāna and Lat. Janus] 1. going, proceeding J VI.415 (+ayāna, opposed to ṭhāna). - 2. means of motion, carriage, vehicle. Different kinds of carriages are enumd at Nd1 145 (on Sn 816) with hatthi° (elephant-), go° (cow-), aja° (goat-), meṇḍaka° (ram-), oṭṭha° (camel-?), khara° (donkey-). Cp. Miln 276. - yāna is one of the requisites (carriage or other means of locomotion) of the bhikkhu & as such included in the deyya-dhamma or 14 gifts (see yañña & deyya-dh.). Thus mentioned with anna pāna vattha etc. at S I.94; A II.85; Pug 51. - Cp. the defn & application of the term yāna as given below under yāna-sannidhi. - See e. g. the foll. passages: Vin I.191 (bhikkhū yānena yāyanti . . . na bhikkhave yānena yāyitabbaṃ; yo yāyeyya etc.: here a "carriage" is expressly forbidden to the bhikkhu!), 231 (Ambapālī bhadrāni-bhadrāni yānāni yojāpetvā bhadraṃ yānaṃ abhirūhitvā . . .), 242 (same phrase with Meṇḍaka gahapati); D I.7, 89, 106; M I.366 (yānaṃ poroseyyaṃ pavara-maṇi-kuṇḍalaṃ, where vv. ll. on p. 561 read voropeyya and oropeyya, which Neumann (unwarrantedly) adopts in his trsln: Mittl. Sammlung2 1921, II.666; the C. accepts reading poroseyya with expln "puris-anucchavikaṃ yānaṃ"); Dh 323 (=hatthiyānādīni DhA IV.6); J III.525 sq.; V.59; VI.223 (=ratha); Kvu 599 (Erāvaṇo hatthināgo sahassa-yuttaṃ dibbaṃ yānaṃ; trsld as "the wondrous elephant E., the thousand-wise yoked celestial mount." trsl. p. 347 (lit. vehicle) Pv III.228 (=ratha or vayha etc. PvA 186); PvA 113. - iddhi-yāna carriage of magic power Miln 276; deva° godly carriage Miln 276; applied to the 8 fold Aryan Path at Sn 139 (=devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samatthatā . . . aṭṭha-samāpatti-yānaṃ SnA 184). Similarly of the Path: magg'aṭṭhangika-yāna (-yāyinī) Th 2, 389 (=aṭṭhangika-magga-sankhāta ariya-yāna ThA 257); and brahma-yāna dhamma-yāna "the very best & excellent carriage" as Ep. of magga S V.5, cp. J IV.100. Cp. the later terms mahā and hīna-yāna. See also yānikata. ugghata shaking or jolting of the carriage Vin II.276; DhA III.283. -gata having ascended the carriage D I.126. -puṭosā (°puṭoḷī) provision bag on a carriage (provision for the journey?) Vism 328 (so read for paṭṭoli). -bhūmi carriage-ground, i. e. the road as far as accessible to a carriage D I.89; Sn 418. -sannidhi storing up of carriages or means of locomotion D I.6 (with expln at DA I.82 as follows: yānaṃ nāma vayhaṃ ratho sakaṭaṃ sandamānikā patankī ti. Na pan'etaṃ pabbajitassa yānaṃ, upāhanā yānaṃ pana); Sn 924 (=anna-pāna-vattha-yānasannidhi Nd1 372). -sukha pleasures of riding and driving Kvu 209; cp. Kvu trsl. 127. Yānaka {Yanaka} (nt.) [fr. yāna] a (small) cart, carriage, waggon, vehicle J III.49 (°ṃ pūretvā, or a hunter's cart); IV.45; DhA I.325 (sukha°), 391 (pakati°, an ordinary waggon). -°ṃ pājeti to drive a cart J II.112, 143; III.51. -upatthambha(na) waggon-prop KhA 44 (°ni v. l., see Appendix to Index Pj.); VbhA 234 (°nika; illustrating the shape of the teeth). Yānika & Yāniya {Yanika} {Yaniya} (adj.) (-°) [fr. yāna] 1. (lit.) leading to, conducive to, as °yāniya in deva° magga D I.215, & Brahma° magga the way leading to the Brahma-world D I.220. - 2. (in appld meaning, cp. yānikata) °yānika one who has become used to, whose habit it is . . ., in vipassanā° & samatha° at Vism 588. Yānikata {Yanikata} [yāna+kata, with i for a in compn with kṛ, perhaps also in analogy with bahulī-kata] made a habit of, indulged in, acquired, mastered (cp. expln Ps I.172: "yattha yattha ākankhati tattha tattha vasippatto hoti balappatto etc."). The expression is to be compared with yatānuyāgin & yātrā, similarly to which it is used only in one stock phrase. It comes very near yātrā in meaning "that which keeps one going," i. e. an acquired & 1247 Pāli Text Society Pāli-English Dictionary thoroughly mastered habit, an "altera natura." It is not quite to the point when Dial II.110 (following Childers?) translate as "to use as a vehicle." - Occurring with identical phraseology, viz. bahulīkata yāni-kata vatthu-kata anuṭṭhita paricita susamāraddha in application to the 4 iddhipādā at D II.103; A IV.309; S V.260; Miln 140; to mettā at M III.97; S I.116; II.264; IV.200; V.259; A V.342; J II.61; Miln 198. Expld at Ps I.172, cp. II.122, 130. Yānin {Yanin} (adj.) [fr. yāna] one who drives in a carriage J III.525=IV.223 (where read yānī va for yān iva). At the latter passage the C. somewhat obscurely expls as "sappi-tela-yānena gacchanto viya"; at III.526 the expln is simply "yānena gacchanto viya." Yāpana & Yapana (nt.) [fr. yāpeti. Cp. Epic & Class. Sk. yāpana] keeping going, sustenance, feeding, nourishment, existence, living. Esp. in one standing combn respecting the feeding and keeping of the body "kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāya etc." (for the maintenance of the body) in yātrā passage: see yātrā 2; in which it is expld at Vism 32 by "pavattiyā avicched'atthaṃ, cira-kāla-ṭṭhit'atthaṃ" i. e. for the preservation of life.- Further at J I.66 (alam me ettakaṃ yāpanāya); V.387 (thokaṃ mama yāpana-mattaṃ eva); DhA IV.210 (yāpanamattaṃ dhanaṃ); PvA 28. - Used more freq. together with shortened form yapana; in standard phrase vutti pālana, yapana yāpana cāra (cp. yapeti) at Vism 145; DhsA 149, 167. Or similarly as f. with spelling yapanā & yāpanā: yapanā yāpanā iriyanā vattanā pālanā at Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. At DhsA 404 yāpanā is used as syn. of yātrā. {Yapana} Yāpanīya {Yapaniya} (adj.) [grd. formation fr. yāpeti] fit or sufficient for supporting one's life Vin I.59, 212, 253. - Cp. BSk. yāpanīyatara a more healthy state Divy 110. Yāpeti & Yapeti {Yapeti} [Caus. of yāti] 1. (lit.) - (a) in caus.- intensive as well as intrs. sense; in the latter also with short ă as yapeti and then combd with yāpeti, in stock phrase defining carati "to go," "to be" (or viharati) with synonyms iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti at Nd2 237; Vbh 252; DhsA 167. Besides singly (yapeti) at DhsA 149. - (b) to cause to go, to make someone go (to), to bring to, lead to (acc.) J VI.458 (sasenāvāhanaṃ yāpesi); SnA 184 (devalokaṃ yāpetuṃ samattha fit to bring one to the d-world). - (c) to get on, move, to be active DhA I.10 (sarīre yāpente); IV.17 (iriyāpathena). - 2. (fig.) to keep going (both trs. & intrs.), to keep up, esp. to keep oneself going or alive, to live by (instr.) [cp. BSk. yāpayati Divy 93, 150, 196, 292, 293, 471, 488, AvŚ I.209] D I.166 (ekissā dattiyā on only one alms); Pug 56; J II.204; III.67; IV.125; VI.532 (uðchena); Pv I.57 (ito dinnena yāpenti petā); I.117; III.28 (tava dinnena yāpessanti kurūrino); PvA 27, 29 (=attabhāvaṃ yāpeti=upajīvati). Yāpya {Yapya} (adj.) [shortened grd.-formation for yāpanīya. *Sk. yāpya in slightly diff. meaning] 1. (lit.) fit for movement or locomotion: in °yāna sedan-chair, palanquin Abhp. 373. - 2. (fig.) concerning the preservation of life, vital, in °rogin one who suffers from a vital disease, lit. a disease concerning the upkeep of the body Vism 33 (trsln Path of Purity 39: "patient of longsuffering," from a different point of view, viz. of time only, like Bdhgh.). Yāma {Yama} [fr. yam in both meanings of yamati & yama3] 1. restraint, only as cpd. cātu-yāma 4-fold restraint D I.57; III.48; S I.66; M I.377; Vism 416. Cp. Dial. I.751. - 2. a watch of the night. There are 3 watches, given as paṭhama, majjhima & pacchima (first, middle & last) Nd1 377 sq.; or purima, m. & pacchima Nd2 631 (under sadā). - A I.114; IV.168; Dh 157 (one of the 3; interpreted as the 3 vayas at DhA III.138); J I.243 (tīsu yāmesu ekasmiṃ yāme); Mhvs 21, 33; PvA 217, 280. - 3. (usually pl. Yāmā devā) one who belongs to Yama or the ruler of the Pāli Text Society 1248 Pāli-English Dictionary Underworld; a subject of Yama; the realm of Yama; - pl. inhabitants of Yamaloka A I.210 (yāmā devā); SnA 244 (°bhavana the abode of the Y.); KhA 166 (Yāmato yāva Akaniṭṭhaṃ from the Underworld to the Highest Heaven); Vism 225 (Yāmā); VbhA 519 (Yāmā); VvA 246 (id.); ThA 169 (Y. devā). -kālika of a restricted time, for a (relatively) short period (lit.) only for one watch of the night, but longer than yāva-kālika temporary. It is one of the three regulationterms for specified food, viz. y.-k., sattāhakālika & yāvajīvika, or short period, of a week's duration, and life-long food Vin IV.83, 86, 176, 311; to which is added yāva-kālika, temporary at Vin I.251 (where mutual relations of the 4 are discussed). -gaṇḍika(ṃ) koṭṭeti to beat the block of restraint (?), i. e. exercise self-control (?) (or does it belong to yāma 3?) KhA 233. Yāyati {Yayati} see yāti. Yāyin (adj.) (-°) [fr. yā, see yāti] going, going on to; in yāna-yāyinī (f.) Th 2, 389 (maggaṭṭhangika° having ascended the carriage of the 8-fold Path; expld by "ariya-yāyena nibbāna-puraṃ yāyinī upagatā" ThA 257). {Yayin} Yāva {Yava} (adv.) [Vedic yāvat as nt. of yāvant used as adv. in meanings 1 & 2. The final t is lost in Pāli, but restored as d in certain combinations: see below 2. - Cp. tāva & kīva]. 1 (as prep.) up to (a point), as far as, how far, so far that (cp. tāva I), both temporal and local, used either with absolute form of noun or adj. (base), or nom., or abl. or acc. - (a) absolute: y. sahassa up to 1000. PvA 21; y. sattama up to the seventh D I.238. - (b) nom.: y. deva-bhava-sampatti up to the attainment of a deva existence PvA 167; y. satta divasā up to 7 days, as long as 7 days PvA 31. (c) with abl.: y. brahmalokā up to the highest heaven A III.17; y. mekhalā down to her girdle PvA 46; yāva āyu-pariyosānā up to the end of life PvA 200; y. ajjadivasā till the present day Mhvs 32, 23; y. kapp'āvasānā up to the end of the world Vism 688 (where SnA 5 in same passage reads acc. °āvasānaṃ); y. kāla-ppavedanā J I.118+DhA I.248; y. mukhasmā up to the brim Miln 238; yāva bhumm'āvalambare hang down to the ground Pv II.102. - (d) with acc. y. Bodhimaṇḍaṃ as far as the Bodhimaṇḍa Mhvs 30, 88; y. tatiyakaṃ for the 3rd time (i. e. the last time; ascending scale!) D I.95; y. tatiyaṃ id. Vin IV.236 samanubhāsitabba); Sn 1116; J IV.126. - Freq. in phrase yāva jīvaṃ (see under cpds.). Sattamāsaṃ cha paðca cattāro ti vatvā yāva temāsaṃ yāciṃsu "after having said 7, 6, 5, 4, months they begged down to 3 months" PvA 20. - With startingpoint, local: pādatalato . . . yāvakesaggaṃ from the sole of the foot to the tip of the hair ("from tip to toe") DhA I.70; (in modal sense:) paṭhavī-kasiṇato paṭṭhāya yāva odāta-kasiṇaṃ "from the one to the other" Vism 374. Similarly in correlation yāva-tāva (see tāva 1.) as far-so far, until-so long: y. rājā āgacchati tāva ubho ramissāma J IV.190; heṭṭhā pi yāva Avīci upari yāva Akaniṭṭha-bhavanaṃ, tāva addasa Vism 392; yāva naṃ ānemi tāva idh'eva tiṭṭha DhA III.194. - 2. (as adv.) how, how much, to which or what extent, as great or as much (as) (cp. tāva II.2), usually in combn yāva mahā (mahantaṃ), e. g. yāva mahantaṃ how big PvA 77 (=yādisaṃ of Pv II.119); VvA 325=DhA I.29 (yāva mahantaṃ). Also in other combns, like yāva dukkhā nirayā how (or as) many painful purgatories Sn 678; yāva dukkhā tiracchānayoni M III.169; yāva pāpo ayaṃ Devadatto alakkhiko . . . "how very wicked is this D." Vin II.196 Further in combn with attha(ṃ), and eva, in which cases the final d is restored, or may be regarded as euphonic. Thus yāvad-atthaṃ as far as need be, as much as you like (with imper.) Pv IV.57 (khādassu y.); UbhA 504 (=yattakaṃ icchati tattakaṃ); J V.338; PvA 217 (gaṇhāhi). Cp. Vin III.37 (yāvadatthaṃ katvā "pleasing herself"). - As adj. sufficient, plenty M I.12 (paripuṇṇa . . . suhita y.); PvA 24 (=pahūta). yāvad-eva [cp. the similar tāva-d.-eva] "as much as it is (in extent)" i. e. with limitation as far as is necessary, up to (i. e. not further or more than), ever so much, as much as you like, at least; (then:) as far as, in short, altogether, Pāli Text Society 1249 Pāli-English Dictionary indeed. - The same idea as our defn is conveyed by Bdhgh's at SnA 503 (on Sn p. 140) "paricched' āvadhāraṇa-vacanaṃ," and at DhA II.73 "avadhiparicchedana": giving a limitation, or saying up to the limit. S II.276; Sn p. 140; Dh 72; and in stock phrase "n'eva davāya . . . yāvad eva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā . . ." ("in short"); see passages under yātrā. The expln of yāvad eva in this phrase as given at DhsA 403 runs: "āhār'āharaṇe payojanassa pariccheda-niyamadassanaṃ," of which the trsln Expos. II.512 is "so as to suffice signifies the limit of the result of taking food." Ṉeumann's trsln at M I.10 is "but only." - Note. In the stock phrase of the Buddha's refusal to die until his teaching has been fully proclaimed (Mahāparinibbānasutta) "among gods and men" D II.106 (=114, 219; III.122; A IV.311) "yāvadeva-manussehi suppakāsitaṃ" (trsln Dial. II.113: "until, in a word, it shall have been well proclaimed among men") we are inclined to consider the reading yāva deva° as original and better than yāvad-eva, although Rhys Davids (Dial. II.236) is in favour of the latter being the original. Cf. K.S. II.75 n. The phrase seems to require yāva only as continuation of the preceding yāva's; moreover the spirit of the message is for the whole of the worlds Cp. BSk. yāvad-deva manusyebhaḥ Divy 201. It is not a restriction or special definition of meaning at this passage. But may it not be taken as a summing up= "in short"? It is left doubtful. If it is=yāva, then we should expect yāva na, as in the preceding sentence, if it is yāvad eva the meaning "not more than made known by men" seems out of place; in this case the meaning "at least" is preferable. A similar case of insertion of a euphonic consonant m (or is it the astem nt in °ṃ instead of °t as in yāvat?) we find in the phrase yāvam pi at J V.508 (with Pot. tiṭṭheyya; see below 3; C. expln by yattakaṃ kālaṃ). - The form yāvade (for yāvad eva) also occurs (like tāvade for tāvad eva) at M II.207. - For yad-idaṃ we find yāvað c'idaṃ at A III.34; M III.169. - The latter form (yāvaṃ, as above J V.508) is better to be grouped directly under yāvant, where more & similar cases are given. - 3. (as conj.) so long as, whilst, until (cp. tāva II.3, 4; III.); either with Fut. or Pot. or Prohibitive. E.g. 'S I.202 (ahu pure dhammapadesu chando y. virāgena samāgamimha; trsln "until I met with that Pure thing and Holy"); J VI.266 (y. āmantaye); PvA 4 (tāva ayyo āgametu yāva ayaṃ puriso . . . pānīyaṃ pivissati or: "you shall wait please, until he shall drink"). Neg. yāva . . . na not until, unless, as long as not D II.106 (na paribbāyissāmi . . . yāva . . . na bhavissati); S I.47 (y. na gādhaṃ labhati); Dh 69 (yattakaṃ kālaṃ na . . . DhA II.50). -kālika (cp. tāva II.1) "as far as the time or occasion goes," occasional, temporary, at Vin I.251 in foll. context (cp. yāmakālika): "kappati . . . yāvakālikena, yāmakālikaṃ na kappati, kappati yāvakālikena sattāha kālikaṃ na k. etc. with foll. yāvajīvikaṃ & the same with kappati yāma-kālikena, sattāha-kālikenana k.; kappati satt°, yāvajīv, na k." The reply of the Buddha is: yāvakālikena yāmakālikaṃ tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati vikāle na kappati (same with sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ); followed by yāmakālikena . . . sattāhakālikaṃ & yāvajīvikaṃ; sattāhakālikena . . . jāvajīvikaṃ." -jivaṃ (adv.) for the length of one's life, life-long, all one's life, for life (-time) Vin I.80; II.197; III.23; It 78; Dh 64, 284; Vism 94; DhA I.45; PvA 76, 110 (=satataṃ). Cp. BSk. yāvajīva-sukhya AvŚ II.37. tajjanī (-vinīta) led only as long as kept under a threat A I.285 (one of the 3 parisā's; so read with v.l. for T. yāvatajjhā°). -tatiyaka "as much as 3 times," name of the last 4 Sanghādisesa offences, because before the punishment is inflicted warning must have been given 3 times: see passage of Vin III.186 under yāva t-ihaṃ. -tihaṃ (read as yāvat-ihaṃ, the latter=aha2 day) as many days as . . .; in foll. passage: uddiṭṭhā . . . terasa sanghādisesā dhammā, nava pathamāpattikā cattāro yāvatatiyakā, yesaṃ bhikkhu aññataraṃ vā aððataraṃ vā āpajjitvā yāvatihaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti tāvatihaṃ tena bhikkhunā akāmā parivatthabbaṃ (for as many days as he knowingly conceals his sin, for so many days . . .), parivuttha-parivāsena bhikkhunā uttariṃ chārattaṃ bhikkhumānattāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Vin III.186. Yāvaka {Yavaka} [=yavaka] a dish prepared of barley J VI.373 (=yavataṇḍula-bhatta C.). Pāli Text Society 1250 Pāli-English Dictionary Yāvataka {Yavataka} (adj.) [fr. yāva, as tāvataka fr. tāva] as much as, as many as, as far as, whatever; usually in correl. with tāvataka e.g. Vin I.83 (yāvataka . . . t.); D II.18 (y. kāyo t. vyāmo); Nd2 2353 (y °ṃ ñeyyaṃ t °ṃ ðāṇaṃ); or similarly M I.397 (y. kathā-sallāpo . . . sabbaṃ taṃ . . .); PvA 103 (yāvatakā=yāvanto). - f. yāvatikā: yāvatikā gati tāvatikaṃ gantvā A I.112; y. nāgassa bhūmi as far as there was ground for the elephant D I.50; similarly: y. yānassa bh. as far as the carriage-road D I.89, 106, 108; y. ðāṇassa bh. Nett 25. Yāvatā {Yavata} (indecl.) [abl. of yāvant in adv. use cp. tāvatā) as far as, like as, in comparison with, regarding, because Dh 258 (na tena paṇḍito hoti y. bahu bhāsati=yattakena kāraṇena DhA III.383), 259, 266 (similarly, C.= yattakena); Sn 759 (yāvat'atthī ti vuccati; expld at SnA 509 as "yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā „atthī‟ ti vuccanti, vacana-vyattayo veditabbo"); yāvatā ariyaṃ paramaṃ sīlaṃ, nāhaṃ tattha attano sama-samaṃ samanupassāmi kuto bhiyyo "compared with this sīla I do not see anyone quite equal to myself, much less greater." D I.74 yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatanaṃ yavatā vanippatho idaṃ agga-nagaraṃ bhavissati Pātaliputtaṃ puṭabhedanaṃ Vin I.229=Ud 88=D II.87 (concerning a most splendid site, and a condition for trade, this Pāṭ. will be the greatest town; trsln Dial. as far as Aryan people resort, as far as merchants travel . . .). yāvatā satt'āvāsā yāvatā bhavaggaṃ ete aggā ete saṭṭhā [read seṭṭhā] lokasmiṃ yad idam arahanto "as far as the abodes of beings, as far as heaven, these are the highest, these are the best, I mean the Arahants." S III.84. yāvatā dhammā sankhatā vā asankhatā vā virāgo . . . aggam akkhāyati, yad-idaṃ mada-nimmadano . . . A II.34=It 88; "of all the things definite or indefinite: passionlessness deserves the highest praise, I mean the disintoxication of pride etc." The expln at Vism 293 takes yāvatā (grammatically incorrectly) as n. pl.= yattakā. -yāvatā jagato gati as far as (like as) the course of the world It 120. Yāvant {Yavant} (pron. rel.) [cp. Sk. yāvant; same formation as demonstr. pron. tāvant, of which the P. uses the adv. nt. tāva (t) form more frequently than the adj. tāvant. The only case so far ascertained where tāvant occurs as adj. is J V.72 (see below)] 1. yāvant as adj.: as many (as) Dh 337 (hāvant'ettha samāgatā as many as are assembled here); J V.72 (yāvanto uda-bindūni . . . tāvanto gaṇḍū jāyetha; C. on p. 74 expls by yattakāni; yāvatā pl. as many as Pv II.116; yāvanto Pv II.716 (=yāvatakā PvA 103); J V.370 (detha vatthāni . . . yavanto eva icchati as many as he wants). - 2. yāvat (nt.) used adverbially. The examples and meanings given here are really to be combined with those given under yāva2 (yāvad°). It is hardly possible to dis- tinguish clearly between the 2 categories; the t may well have been reduced to d or been replaced by another sandhi consonant. However, the specific Pāli use of yāva (like tāva) justifies a separate treatment of yāva in that form only. - yāvat occurs only in combn with ca (where we may assume either a peculiar nt. form yāvaṃ: see yāva 2; or an assimilation of t to ð before c. - The form yāva mahantaṃ may originally have been a yāvaṃ m.) as yāvað ca "and that," "i. e.," how much, however much, so great S I.149 (passa yāvað ca te idaṃ aparaddhaṃ: see how great a mistake you have made in this); It 91, 92 (passa yāvað ca ārakā & santike: see how far and near). yāvað c'idaṃ stands for yad-idaṃ (see ya° 4) in peculiar use of restriction at M. III.169; S II.178; A III.34. - 3. The nt. form yāvat further occurs in foll. cpds.: °āyukaṃ (better as yāvat° than yāvatā°) as long as life lasts, for a lifetime Mhvs 3, 41; VvA 196 (as adj. °āyukā dibba-sampatti); PvA 66, 73, 133; °icchakaṃ as much as is desired, according to one's wishes Pug 12, 25; Vism 154 (here spelt yāvad-icchakaṃ); °ihaṃ see under yāva (cpds.) - instr. yavatā: see sep. Yāvetadohi {Yavetadohi} at M II.47 is an obscure expression. The reading is established; otherwise one might think of a corrupted yāv(a) etad ahosī(pi) or yāva-d-ev'-ahosi "was it really so?" or: Pāli Text Society 1251 Pāli-English Dictionary "did you really have that thought?" Neumann, Mittl. Sammlung2 1921; II.381, trsls "gar so sehr drängt es dich" (are you in such a hurry?), and proposes reading (on p. 686, note) yāv' etado hi pi, leaving us wondering what etado might be. - Could it be a distorted yāyetar (n. ag. of yāyeti, Caus. yā)? Yiṭṭha {Yittha} [pp. of yajati with a petrified sandhi y.; Vedic iṣṭa] med.: having sacrificed D I.138 (mahā-yaññaṃ y. rājā). - pass.: sacrificed, (nt.) sacrifice D I.55 (dinna, y. huta); expld at DA I.165 by "mahāyāga" Vbh 328, (id.); J I.83 (y.+huta); IV.19 (=yajita C.); V.49; VI.527. - duyyiṭṭha not properly sacrificed, a sacrifice not according to rites J VI.522. In specific Buddhistic sense "given, offered as alms, spent as liberal gift" Vin I.36; J I.168=A II.44; M I.82. Dh 108 (yaṃ kiñci yiṭṭhaṃ va hutaṃ va; DhA II.234=yebhuyyena mangalakiriya-divasesu dinna-dānaṃ). suyiṭṭha well given or spent A II.44; ThA 40; Vv 3426 (in both senses; VvA 155 expls "mahāyāga-vasena yiṭṭhaṃ"). Yidha {Yidha} in mā yidha in mā yidha at Vin I.54 is to be read mā-y-idha, the y being an euphonic consonant (see y.). Yuga {Yuga} (nt.) [fr. yuj; Vedic yuga (to which also yoga)= Gr. zugo/n; Lat. jugum=Goth. juk; Ohg. juh; E. yoke; Lith. jungas] 1. the yoke of a plough (usually) or a carriage DhA I.24 (yugaṃ gīvaṃ bādhati presses on the neck); PvA 127 (ratha°); Sdhp 468 (of a carriage). Also at Sn 834 in phrase dhonena yugaṃ samāgamā which Bdhgh. (SnA 542) expls as "dhuta-kilesena buddhena saddhiṃ yugaggāhaṃ samāpanno," i. e. having attained mastery together with the pure Buddha. Neumann, Sn trsln not exactly: "weil abgeschüttelt ist das Joch" (but dhona means "pure"). See also below °nangala. - 2. (what is yoked or fits under one yoke) a pair, couple; appld to objects, as -°: dussa° a pair of robes S V.71.; DhA IV.11; PvA 53; sāṭaka° id. J I.8, 9; PvA 46; vattha° id. J IV.172. - tapassi° a pair of ascetics Vv 2210; dūta° a pair of messengers S IV.194; sāvaka° of disciples D II.4; S I.155; II.191; V.164; in general: purisa° (cattāri p.-yugāni) (4) pairs of men S IV.272 sq.=It 88; in verse at Vv 4421 and 533; expld at Vism 219 as follows: yugaḷa-vasena paṭhamamagga-ṭṭho phala-ṭṭho ti idam ekaṃ yugaḷan ti evaṃ cattāri purisayugaḷāni honti. Practically the same as "aṭṭha purisa-puggalā." Referring to "pairs of sins" (so the C.) in a somewhat doubtful passage at J I.374: sa mangala-dosa-vītivatto yugayog'ādhigato na jātum eti; where C. expls yugā as kilesā mentioned in pairs (like kodho ca upanāho, or makkho ca paḷāso), and yoga as the 4 yojanas or yogas (oghas?), viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā°. - Also used like an adj. num. in meaning "two," e. g. yugaṃ vā nāvaṃ two boats Dpvs I.76. - 3. (connected by descent) generation, an age D I.113 (yāva sattamā pitāmahā-yugā "back through seven generations." Cp. DA I.281: āyuppamāṇa); KhA 141 (id.); J I.345 (purisa°). There are also 5 ages (or stages) in the [life of the] sāsana (see Brethren, p. 339): vimutti, samādhi, sīla, suta, dāna. -anta (-vāta) (storm at) the end of an age (of men or the world), whirlwind J I.26. -ādhāna putting the yoke on, harnessing M I.446. -ggāha "holding the yoke," i. e. control, dominance, domineering, imperiousness; used as syn. for palāsa at Vbh 357=Pug 19 (so read for yuddha°), expld by sama-dhura-ggahaṇaṃ "taking the leadership altogether" at VbhA 492. See further Nd1 177; VvA 71 (yugaggāha-lakkhaṇo paḷāso); SnA 542; DhA III.57 (°kathā=sārambhakathā). -°ṃ ganhāti to take the lead, to play the usurper or lord J III.259 (C. for T. palāsin); DhA III.346. -ggāhin trying to outdo somebody else, domineering, imperious VvA 140. -cchidda the hole of a yoke Th 2, 500 (in famous simile of blind turtle). nangala yoke and plough (so taken by Bdhgh. at SnA 135) Sn 77= S I.172 ("plough fitted with yoke" Mrs. Rh.D.). -nandha (with v. l. °naddha, e. g. at Ps II.92 sq.; KhA 27 in T.) putting a yoke on, yoking together; as adj. congruous, harmonious; as nt. congruity, association, common Pāli Text Society 1252 Pāli-English Dictionary cause Ps II.98=Vism 682; Ps II.92 sq. (°vagga & °kathā); KhA 27 (nt.); Vism 149 (°dhammā things fitting under one yoke, integral parts, constituents). -mattaṃ (adv.) "only the distance of a plough," i. e. only a little (viz. the most necessary) distance ahead, with expressions of sight: pekkhati Sn 410 ("no more than a fathom's length" Rh.D. in Early Buddhism 32); pekkhin Miln 398; °dassāvin Vism 19 (okkhitta-cakkhu+) pekkhamāna SnA 116 (as expln of okkhittacakkhu). -sāṭaka (=s.-yuga) a pair of robes, two robes Dpvs VI.82. Yugala & Yugaḷa {Yugala} (nt.) [Class. Sk. yugala; in relation to yuga the same as Lat. jugulum ("yoke-bone") to jugum. Cp. also Gr. zeu/glh yoking strap] a pair, couple J I.12 (yugaḷa-yugaḷabhūtā in pairs), 500 (bāhu°); VI.270 (thana° the 2 breasts); Vism 219; VbhA 51 (yugaḷato jointly, in pairs); the six "pairs of adaptabilities" or "words," Yog. 18-23, Mystic 30 sq.; cp. Dhs 40 sq. Also used as adj. (like yuga) in phrase yugalaṃ karoti to couple, join, unite Dpvs I.77; VvA 233. Yugalaka {Yugalaka} (nt.) [fr. yugala] a pair Tikp 66; VbhA 73. Yuja {Yuja} (adj.) (-°) [either a direct root-derivation fr. yuj, corresponding to Sk. yuj (or yuk, cp. Lat. con-jux "conjugal," Gr. o(mo/-zuc companion, su/-zuc=conjux; Goth. ga-juka companion); or a simplified form of the grd. *yujya>*yujja>yuja] yoked or to be yoked, applicable, to be studied, only in cpd. duyyuja hard to be mastered, difficult J V.368 (atthe yuñjati duyyuje he engages in a difficult matter; C. reads duyyuñja). Yujjha {Yujjha} (adj.) [grd. of yujjhati] to be fought; neg. a° not to be fought, invincible M II.24 (so read for ayojjha). Yujjhati [cp. Vedic yudhyate, yudh, given in meaning "sampahāra" at Dhtp 415. Etymologically to Idg. *ieudh to shake, fr. which in var. meanings Lat. jubeo to command, juba horse's mane; Gr. u(smi/nh battle, Lith. jundù, jùdra whirlwind; cp. also Av. yaošti agility] to fight, make war. Rare in older literature; our refs. only from the Mahāvaṃsa; e. g. 22, 82 (fut. yujjhissāma, with instr.: Damiḷehi); 25, 23 (aor. ayujjhi); 25, 58 (ppr. yujjhamāna); 33, 41 (aor. yujjhi). To which add DhA II.154 (mallayuddhaṃ yujjhanto); III.259 (Ajātasattunā saddhiṃ yujjhanto). - pp. yuddha. - Caus. yodheti (q. v.). {Yujjhati} Yujjhana {Yujjhana} (nt.) [fr. yujjhati] fighting, making war J III.6, 82. Yujjhāpana {Yujjhapana} (nt.) [fr. yujjhati Caus.] making somebody fight, inciting to war Miln 178. Yuñjati {Yunjati} [Vedic yunakti, yuñjati & yuñkte, yuj; cp. Gr. zeu/gnumi, Lat, jungo to unite, put together (pp. junctus=Sk. yukta, cp. E. junct-ion); Lith. jùngin. The Idg. root *ieug is an enlarged form of *ieÛe "to unite," as in Sk. yanti, yuvati, pp. yuta; f. yuti, to which also Lat. jūs=P. yūsa. The Dhtp gives several (lit. & fig.) meanings of yuj, viz. "yoge" (No. 378), "samādhimhi" (399), "saṃgamane" (550)] (lit.) to yoke; (fig.) to join with (instr. or loc.), to engage in (loc.), to exert oneself, to endeavour. All our passages show the applied meaning, while the lit. meaning is only found in the Caus. yojeti. - Often expld by and coupled with the syn. ghaṭati & vāyamati, e.g. at J IV.131; V.369; DhA IV.137. - Forms: pres. yuñjati Dh 382; J V.369; 2nd pl. yuðjatha Th 2, 346 (kāmesu;=niyojetha ThA 241); ppr. yuðjanto J IV.131 (kammaṭṭhāne); imper. yuðja S I.52 (sāsane); ThA 12; med. imper. yuðjassu Th 2, 5. - Pass. Pāli Text Society 1253 Pāli-English Dictionary yujjati (in grammar or logic) is constructed or applied, fits (in), is meant KhA 168; SnA 148, 403, 456. - Caus. I. yojeti & II. yojāpeti (q.v.). - pp. yutta. Yuta {Yuta} [pp. of yu, yauti to fasten but Dhtp 338: "missane"] fastened to (loc.), attracted by, bent on, engaged in D. I.57 (sabba-vārī°); Sn 842 (pesuṇeyye; Nd1 233 reads yutta in exegesis, do. at p. 234, with further expln āyutta, payutta etc.), 853 (atimāne); Dāvs V.18 (dhiti°). - Note. yuta is doubtful in phrase tejasā-yuta in Niraya passage at A I.142=M III.183=Nd1 405=Nd2 304III=J V.266. The more likely reading is either tejas'āyuta (so BSk. M.Vastu 9), or tejasā yutta (so Nd2 & PvA 52), i. e. endowed with, furnished with, full of heat. - We find a similar confusion between uyyuta & uyyutta. Yutta {Yutta} [pp. of yuñjati; Vedic yukta, cp. Lat. junctus, Gr. zeukto/s, Lith. jùnktas] 1. (lit.) yoked, harnessed (to= loc.) Pv I.114 (catubbhi yutta ratha); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yattā); DhA I.24 (dhure yuttā balivaddā). - 2. coupled; connected with; (appld) devoted to, applied to, given to, engaged in (-°, instr. or loc.) Sn 820 (methune), 863 (macchiriya°), 1144 (tena, cp. Nd2 532); It 93 (Buddha-sāsane); J VI.206 (yoga°). - 3. furnished; fixed, prepared, in order, ready Sn 442 (Māra; =uyyutta SnA 392); PvA 53. - 4. able, fit (to or for=inf.), suitable, sufficient Sn 826 (cp. Nd1 164); J V.219; DA I.141 (dassituṃ yutta=dassanīya); VvA 191 (=alaṃ); PvA 74. - 5. proper, right PvA 159. - 6. due to (-°, with a grd., apparently superfluous) J III.208 (āsankitabba°); cp. yuttaka. - 7. (nt.) conjunction, i. e. of the moon with one or other constellation Vin II.217. - ayutta not fit, not right, improper PvA 6 (perhaps delete), 64. suyutta well fit, right proper, opp. duyutta unbefitting, in phrase suyuttaṃ duyuttaṃ ācikkhati J I.296 (here perhaps for dur-utta?). du° also lit. "badly fixed, not in proper condition, in a bad state" at J IV.245 (of a gate). -kāra acting properly PvA 66. -kārin acting rightly Miln 49. -paṭibhāṇa knowledge of fitness Pug 42 (cp. PugA 223). -payutta intent on etc. PvA 150. -rūpa one who is able or fit (to=inf.) J I.64. -vāha justified VvA 15. Yuttaka {Yuttaka} (adj.) (-°) [fr. yutta] proper, fit (for); nt. what is proper, fitness: dhammayuttakaṃ katheti to speak righteous speech J IV.356. - Usually combd with a grd., seemingly pleonastically (like yutta), e. g. kātabba° what had to be done PvA 81; DhA I.13 (as kattabba°); āpucchitabba° fit to be asked DhA I.6. Yutti [cp. Vedic yukti connection, fr. yuj] "fitting," i. e. 1. application, use Miln 3 (opamma°). -2. fitness, vāda°, KVA 37; in instr. yuttiyā in accordance with Mhvs 10, 66 (vacana°); Sdhp 340 (sutti°); and abl. yuttito Sdhp 505. - 3. (logical) fitness, right construction, correctness of meaning; one of the 16 categories (hārā), appld to the exposition of texts, enumd in the 1st section of the Netti; e. g. at Nett 1-3, 103; KhA 18; SnA 551, 552. Thus abl. yuttito by way of correctness or fitness (contrasted to suttato) VbhA 173=Vism 562; and yuttivasena by means of correctness (of meaning) SnA 103 (contrasted to anussava). - 4. trick, device, practice J VI.215. -kata combined with; (nt.) union, alloy VvA 13. {Yutti} Yuddha {Yuddha} (nt.) [orig. pp. of yujjhati; cp. Vedic yuddha (pp.) and yudh (f.) the fight] war, battle, fight D I.6 (daṇḍa° fighting with sticks or weapons); J III.541 (id.); Sn 442 (dat. yuddhāya); J VI.222; Miln 245 (kilesa°, as pp.: one who fights sin); Mhvs 10, 45 (°atthaṃ for the sake of fighting); 10, 69 (yuddhāya in order to fight); 25, 52 (yuddhāy'āgata); 32, 12 (yuddhaṃ yujjhati); 32, 13 (maccu° fight with death); 33, 42; DhA II.154 (malla° fist-fight). - The form yudhāya at Sn 831 is to be taken as (archaic) dat. of Vedic yudh (f.), used in sense of an inf. & equal to yuddhāya. Nd1 172 expls as "yuddh'atthāya." -kāla time for the battle Mhvs 10, 63. - Pāli Text Society 1254 Pāli-English Dictionary ṭṭha engaged in war S I.100 (so read for °ttha). -maṇḍala fightingring, arena J IV.81; Vism 190; VbhA 356 (in comparison). Yuddhaka {Yuddhaka} [fr. yuddha, for the usual yodha (ka)] a fighter, in malla° fist-fighter, pugilist J IV.81. Yudhikā {Yudhika} (f.) [doubtful] N. of a tree J V.422 (for T. yodhi, which appears as yodhikā in C. reading). The legitimate reading is yūthikā (q. v.), as is also given in vv.ll. Yuvan {Yuvan} [Vedic yuvan; cp. Av. yavan=Lat. juvenis, Lith. jáunas young; Lat. juvencus "calf"; juventus youth; Goth. junda, Ohg. jugund & jung, E. young. - The n.-stem is the usual, but later Pāli shows also decl. after a-stem, e. g. gen. yuvassa Mhvs 18, 28] a youth. - nom. sg. yuvā D I.80=yobbanena samannāgata DA I.223; Sn 420; Dh 280 (=paṭhama-yobbane ṭhita DhA III.409); Pv III.71 (=taruṇa PvA 205). - Cp. yava, yuvin & yobbana. Yuvin {Yuvin} (adj.-n.) [=yuvan with diff -adj. ending] young J IV.106, 222. Yūtha {Yutha} (nt.) [Vedic yūtha] a flock, herd of animals Sn 53 (of elephants); J I.170 (monkeys), 280 (id.); SnA 322 (go°, of oxen). -pa the leader of a herd Th 2, 437 (elephants). -pati same J III.174 (elephant); DhA I.81 (id.). Yūthikā {Yuthika} (f.) [cp. later Sk. yūthikā] a kind of jasmine, Jasminum auriculatum J VI.537; Miln 338. So is also to be read at J V.420 (for yodhi) & 422 (yodhikā & yudhikā). See also yodhikā. Yūpa {Yupa} [Vedic yūpa] 1. a sacrificial post D I.141; A IV.41; J IV.302; VI.211; Miln 21 (dhamma°); SnA 321, 322; DA I.294. - 2. a pāsāda, or palace Th 1, 163=J II.334. -ussāpana the erection of the sacr. post DhsA 145 (cp. Miln 21). Yūsa {Yusa} [Vedic yūṣan, later Sk. yūṣa; fr. base Idg. *iūs, cp. Lat. jūs soup, Gr. zu/mh yeast, ferment, zwmo/s soup; Obul st cheese; an enlargement of base *ieu to mix, as in Sk. yu to mix: see yuta, to which further *ieÛe, as in yuñjati] 1. juice Vin I.206 (akaṭa° natural juice); Mhvs 28, 26; VvA 185 (badara° of the jujube); Vism 195 (seda° sweaty fluid). - 2. soup, broth. Four kinds of broths are enumd at M I.245, viz. mugga° bean soup, kulattha° of vetch (also at Vism 256), kaḷāya° (chick-) pea soup, hareṇuka° pea soup; Miln 63 (raððo sūdo yūsaṃ vā rasaṃ vā kareyya). Yebhuyya {Yebhuyya} (adj.) [ye=yad in Māgadhī form; thus yad bhūya=yad bhiyya "what is more or most(ly)"] abundant, numerous, most. Not found as adj. by itself, except in phrase yebhuyya-vasena mostly, as a rule ThA 51 and PvA 136, which is identical with the usual instr. yebhuyyena occurring as adv. "as according to most," i. e. (1) almost all, altogether, practically (as in our phrase "practically dead"), mostly D I.105 (addasā dvattiṃsa lakkhanāṇi y. ṭhapetvā dve: all except two)=109; Vin III.29 sq.; J I.246 (gāmako y. andha-bāla-manussehi yeva ussanno the village was peopled by mostly foolish folk); V.335 (y. asīti-mahātherā, altogether). - (2) as it happens (or happened), usually, occasionally, as a rule, ordinarily D I.17 (saṃvaṭṭamāne loke y. [as a rule] sattā Ābhassarasaṃvaṭṭanikā honti; expld by half allegorical, half popular etym. at DA I.110 as follows: "ye upari Brahma-lokesu vā Āruppesu vā Pāli Text Society 1255 Pāli-English Dictionary nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṃ"); D II.139: yebhuyyena dasasu loka-dhātusu devatā sannipatitā (as a rule); Sn p. 107 (=bahukāni SnA 451); Miln 6 (y. Himavantam eva gacchanti: usually); DA I.280 (ordinarily); VvA 234 (occasionally), 246 (pihita-dvāram eva hoti: usually); PvA 2 (Sattari tattha tattha viharante y. tāya tāya atth'uppattiyā), 46 (tassā kesa-sobhaṃ disvā taruṇa-janā y. tattha paṭibaddha-cittā adesuṃ invariably). - na yebhuyyena not as a rule, usually not (at all): nāpi y. ruditena kāci attha-siddhi PvA 63. Yebhuyyasikā {Yebhuyyasika} (f.) [formation fr. yebhuyya like tassapāpiyya-sikā. Originally adj., with kiriyā to be understood] lit. "according to the majority," i. e. a vote of majority of the Chapter; name of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathas, or means of settling a dispute. - Vin. II.84 (anujānāmi bh. adhikaraṇaṃ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṃ), 93 (vivād'ādhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi sammati: sammukhā-vinayena ca yebhuyyasịkāya ca). As one of the 7 methods of settling a dispute mentioned at Vin IV.207=351 (the seven are: sammukhā-vinaya, sati-vinaya, amūḷha°, paṭiððā, yebhuyyasikā, tassa-pāpiyyasikā, tīṇ'avatthāraka). Expld in detail at M II.247: if the bhikkhus cannot settle a dispute in their abode, they have to go to a place where there are more bh., in order to come to a vote by majority. Cp. D III.254 (the seven enumd); A I.99; IV.144. Yeva {Yeva} (indecl.) [=eva with accrudescent y from Sandhi. On form and relation between eva & yeva cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 66, 1. See also eva 2. - The same form in Prākrit: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 336] emphatic particle, meaning "even, just, also"; occurring most frequently (for eva) after palatal sounds, as ṃ: Sn 580 (pekkhataṃ yeva), 822 (vivekaṃ); DhA II.20 (saddhiṃ); PvA 3 (tasmiṃ), 4 (imasmiṃ), 13 (tumhākaṃ); - further after o: PvA 39 (apanīto yeva); - after ā: Sn 1004 (manasā yeva); - after i: S II.206 (vuddhi yeva); PvA 11 (ahosi); - after e: J I.82 (vihāre yeva; pubbaṇhe y.); VbhA 135 (na kevalaṃ ete yeva, aññe pi "not only these, but also others"). Cp. Mhvs 22, 56; VvA 222; PvA 47. Yevāpana & Yevāpanaka (adj.) [not connected with yeva, but an adj. formation from phrase ye vā pana; ye here standing (as Māgadhism) for yaṃ: cp. yebhuyya] corresponding, reciprocal, respective, in corresponding proportion, as far as concerned; lit. "whatever else." The expression is peculiar to exegetical (logical) literature on the Abhidhamma. See e. g. DhsA 152 (yevāpanā, pl. and °kā); Vism 468, 271 sq.; VbhA 63, 70 sq.; cp. Dhs. trsl.1 p. 5 and introd. p. 56. - Note. The expression occurring as phrase shows ye as nom. pl., e. g. Dhs 1, 58, 151-161 & passim: ye vā pana tasmiṃ samaye aððe pi dhammā; but cp. in § 1: yaṃ yaṃ vā pan'ārabbha, in same sense. {Yevapana} {Yevapanaka} Yoga {Yoga} [Vedic yoga, see etym. under yuga & yuðjati. Usually m.; pl. nt. yogāni occurs at D II.274 in meaning "bonds"] lit. "yoking, or being yoked," i. e. connection, bond, means; fig. application, endeavour, device. - 1. yoke, yoking (rare?) J VI.206 (meant here the yoke of the churning-sticks; cp. J VI.209). - 2. con- nection with (-°), application to; (natural) relation (i. e. body, living connection), association; also conjunction (of stars). mānusaka yoga the relation to the world of men (the human body), opp. dibba yoga: S I.35=60; Sn 641; Dh 417; expld at DhA IV.225 as "kāya." - association with: D III.176; application: Vism 520 (+uppāda). yogato (abl.) from being connected with, by association with PvA 40 (bālya°), 98 (sammappadhāna°). pubba° connection with a former body, one's former action or life-history J V.476; VI.480; Miln 2. See pubbe1. - aḍḍhayoga a "half-connected" building, i. e. a half-roofed monastery Vin I.239; Vism 34. - nakkhatta° a conjunction of planets, peculiar constellation (in astrology) J I.82, 253 (dhana-vassāpanaka suitable for a shower of wealth); III.98; DhA I.174; DhsA 232 (in Pāli Text Society 1256 Pāli-English Dictionary simile). - 3. (fig.) bond, tie; attachment (to the world and its lusts), or what yokes to rebirth (Cpd. 1712). There are 4 yogas, which are identical with the 4 oghas viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā°, or the bonds of craving, existence, false views, and ignorance; enumd in detail at A II.10; D III.230, 276; J I.374; cp. Ps I.129 (catūhi yogehi yutto lokasannivāso catu-yogayojito); VbhA 35. Mentioned or referred to at S V.59; Dhs 1059 (ogha+, in defn of taṇhā), cp, Dhs trsln 308; Nett 31 (with ogha), 114 (id.); as sabba- (or sabbe) yogā at Th 2, 4; 76; S I.213; DhA III.233; severally at It 95 (bhava-yoga-yutta āgāmī hoti, +kāma°); ogha+yoga: Pug 21 (avijjā°); Vism 211, 684; cp. also D II.274 (pāpima-yogāni the ties of the Evil one); It 80 (yogā pamocenti bahujanaṃ). - 4. application, endeavour, undertaking, effort DhA III.233, 234 (=samma-ppadhāna). yogaṃ karoti to make an effort, to strive after (dat.) S II.131; A II.93 (āsavānaṃ khayāya y. karaṇīya); Miln 35. yogaṃ āpajjati to show (earnest) endeavour, to be active S III.11 sq.; Vbh 356 (attanā). - dhamma° one who is devoted to the Dhamma A III.355; yutta° (bent on, i. e.) earnest in endeavour J I.65; yāca° given to making offerings: see yāca. - 5. pondering (over), concentration, devotion M I.472; Dh 209 (=yoniso manasikāra DhA III.275), 282 (same expln at DhA III.421); Miln 3; Vbh 324 (yoga-vihitesu kamm'& sipp'-āyatanesu; VbhA 410 expls: y. vuccati paððā; - perhaps better to above 4?). - 6. (magic) power, influence, device, scheme J VI.212 (yoga-yogena practice of spells etc. =tāya tāya yuttiyā C.); PvA 117 (combd with manta, ascribed to devas). - 7. means, instrument, remedy J I.380 (vamana° an emetic); VI.74 (ekaṃ yogaṃ datvā; but we better read bhesajjaṃ tassa datvā for vatvā, and ekaṃ yogaṃ vatvā for datvā; taking yoga in meaning of "charm, incantation"); Miln 109 (yena yogena sattānaṃ guṇa-vaḍḍhi . . . tena hitaṃ upadahati). -ātiga one who has conquered the yoke, i. e. bond of the body or rebirth It 61 (muni), 81 (id.). -ātigāmin= °ātiga; A II.12 (same as sabba-yoga-visaṃyutta). -āvacara "one at home in endeavour," or in spiritual (esp. jhāna-) exercises; one who practises "yoga"; an earnest student. The term is peculiar to the Abhidhamma literature. - J I.303, 394, 400; III.241 (saṃsārasāgaraṃ taranto y.); Ps II.26; KvuA 32; Miln 33 sq., 43, 366, 378 sq.; Vism 245 (as hunter) 246 (as begging bhikkhu), 375 (iddhistudy), 587, 637, 666, 708; DhA II.12 (padhānaṃ padahanto y.); III.241 (°bhikkhu); DhsA 187 (ādhikammika), 246 (°kulayutta); VbhA 115, 220, 228 (as bhikkhu on alms-round), 229 (as hunter), 258, 331; KhA 74; SnA 20, 374. -kkhema [already Vedic yoga-kṣema exertion & rest, acquisition & possession] rest from work or exertion, or fig. in scholastic interpretation "peace from bondage," i. e. perfect peace or "uttermost safety" (K.S. II.132); a freq. epithet of nibbāna [same in BSk.: yogakṣema, e. g. Divy 98, 123, 303, 498] M I.117 (°kāma), 349, 357, (anuttara); S I.173 (°adhivāhana); II.195 (anuttara), 226; III.112 (°kāma, neg.); IV.125; V.130 sq.; A I.50 (anuttara); II.40, 52 (a°), 87, 247; III.21, 294 sq., 353; D III.123, 125, 164 (°kāma); Vin II.205=It 11 (°ato dhaṃsati, whereas Vin °ā padhaṃsati); It 9, 27 (abhabbo °ssa adhigamāya); Th 2, 6; Sn 79 (°adhivāhana), 425; Dh 23 (anuttara, cp. DhA I.231); Ps I.39; II.81; Vbh 247 (kulāni y-kh-kāmāni, which VbhA 341 expls: catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ icchanti); ThA 13. kkhemin finding one's rest, peace, or salvation; emancipated, free, an Arahant S III.13 (accanta°); IV.85; A II.12; IV.310 (patta°); V.326 (accanta°); DhA III.233, 234 (=sabba-yogavisaṃyutta); neg. a° not finding one's salvation A II.52 (in verse)=Ps II.80; It 50. -ññu knowing the (right) means Miln 169 sq. -bahula strong in exertion A III.432. -yutta (Mārassa) one who is tied in the bonds (of Māra) A II.52 (so read for °gutta; the verse also at Ps II.80, 81, and It 50). -vibhāga dividing (division) of the relation (in grammar: to yoga 2) SnA 266. Yoganīya {Yoganiya} (adj.) [fr. yoga; grd. formation] of the nature of trying, acting as a bond, fetter-ish Dhs 584; DhsA 49 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 301). The spelling is also yoganiya, cp. oghaniya. Yogin {Yogin} (adj.-n.) [fr. yoga, cp. Class. Sk. yogin] 1. (-°) applying oneself (to), working (by means of), using Vism 70 (hattha° & patta° using the hand or the bowl; but trsln p. 80: "hand- Pāli Text Society 1257 Pāli-English Dictionary ascetic" & "bowl-ascetic"). - 2. one who devotes himself to spiritual things, an earnest student, one who shows effort (in contemplation), a philosopher, wise man. The word does not occur in the four Nikāyas. In the older verses it is nearly synonymous with muni. The oldest ref. is Th 1, 947 (pubbake yogī "Saints of other days" Mrs. Rh. D.). Freq. in Miln, e. g. pp. 2, 356 (yogi-jana); at pp. 366, 393, 404, 417, 418 in old verses. Combd with yogāvacara Miln 366, 404. - Further passages are Nett 3, 10, 61; Vism 2, 14, 66, 71 (in verse), 150, 320, 373, 509, 620, 651, 696; DhsA 195, 327. Yogga1 {Yogga} (nt.) [Vedic yogya; a grd. formation fr. yoga in meaning of yoga 1] "what may be yoked," i. e. 1. a coach, carriage, waggon (usually large & covered, drawn by bullocks) J VI.31 sq. (paṭicchanna), 368 (mahā°); DhA II.151 (mahā° & paṭicchanna). - 2. a draughtbullock, ox Vv 848; Pv II.936 (=ratha-yuga-vāhana PvA 127); J VI.221. yoggāni muðcati to unharness the oxen PvA 43, 100. Yogga2 {Yogga} (nt. & adj.) [same as last, in meaning of yoga 7] 1. (nt.) a contrivance J IV.269 (yoggaṃ karoti, may be in meaning "training, practice" here: see yoggā); VvA 8 (gahaṇa°). - 2. (adj.) fit for (=yutta), adapted to, suitable; either -° or with inf.: VvA 291; PvA 25 (here spelt yogya), 135 (bhojana°), 152 (kamma-vipāk' ānubhavana°), 154 (gamana° passable, v. l. yogya), 228 (anubhavana°). Yoggā {Yogga} (f.) [Vedic and Epic Sk. yogyā; same as yogga2, fr. yoga] training, practice J II.165 (yoggaṃ karoti to practise); IV.269 (id.); DhA I.52 (lakkha-yoggaṃ karoti to practise shooting). - adj. (-°) katayogga wellpractised, trained S I.62, 98 (neg.). Only at these passages, missing at the other daḷha-dhamma-passages, e. g. at S II.266; M I.82; A II.48. -ācariya a groom, trainer S IV.176=M I.124; M III.97, 222; Th 1, 1140; J I.505. Yojana {Yojana} (nt.) [Vedic yojana] 1. the yoke of a carriage J VI.38, 42 (=ratha-yuga). - 2. a measure of length: as much as can be travelled with one yoke (of oxen), a distance of about 7 miles, which is given by Bdhgh. as equal to 4 gāvutas (DhA II.13). It occurs in descending scale of yojana-tigāvuta-usabha at DhA I.108. - Dh 60; J V.37 (yojana-yojana-vitthatā each a mile square); SnA 194. More favoured combns of yojana with numbers are the foll.: 1/2 (aḍḍha°): DA I.35; DhsA 142. - 3: DhA II.41. - 4: PvA 113. - 5: VvA 33. - 15: DhA I.17; J I.315; PvA 154. - 18: J I.81, 348. - 20: DhA IV.112 (20 X 110, of a wilderness). - 25: VvA 236. - 45: J I.147, 348; DhA I.367. - 50: Vism 417. - 100: D I.117; It 91; Pv I.1014. - 500: J I.204. - 1,000: J I.203. - Cp. yojanika. Yojanā {Yojana} (f.) [*Sk. yojanā, fr. yojeti] (grammatical) construction; exegesis, interpretation; meaning KhA 156, 218, 243; SnA 20, 90, 122 sq., 131 sq., 148, 166, 177, 248, 255, 313; PvA 45, 50, 69, 73, 139 (attha°), and passim in Commentaries. Yojanika {Yojanika} (adj.) [fr. yojana] a yojana in extent J I.92 (vihāra); Dpvs 17, 108 (ārāma); DhA I.274 (maṇipallanka). Yojita {Yojita} [pp. of yojeti] yoked, tied, bound Ps I.129 (catuyoga° fettered by the four bonds); SnA 137 (yottehi y.). Yojitaka {Yojitaka} (adj.) [fr. yojita] connected with, mixed; neg. a° not mixed (with poison), unadulterated J I.269. Pāli Text Society 1258 Pāli-English Dictionary Yojeti {Yojeti} [Caus. of yuðjati] 1. to yoke, harness, tie, bind Pv II.936 (vāhana, the draughtbullock); Mhvs 35, 40 (yojayi aor.; v. l. for yojāpayi); PvA 74 (sindhave). - 2. to furnish (with), combine, unite, mix, apply J I.252 (suraṃ), 269 (id.); Mhvs 22, 4 (ambaṃ visena y. to poison a mango); 36, 71 (visaṃ phalesu poison the fruit). - 3. to prepare, provide, set in order, arrange, fix, fit up Mhvs 30, 39 (pāde upānāhi fitted the feet with slippers); dvāraṃ to put a door right, to fix it properly J I.201; IV. 245 (cp. yojāpeti). - 4. to engage, incite, urge, commission, put up to, admonish Mhvs 17, 38 (manusse); 37, 9 (vihāraṃ nāsetuṃ y. incited to destroy the v.); PvA 69. - 5. to construct, understand, interpret, take a meaning SnA 148 (yojetabba); PvA 98 (id.), 278 (id.). - Caus. II. yojāpeti to cause some one to yoke etc.: D II.95 (yānāni, to harness); J I.150 (dvāraṃ, to set right); Mhvs 35, 40 (rathe, to harness). - Pass. yojīyati to become yoked or harnessed J I.57 (nangalasahassaṃ y.). - pp. yojita. Yojjha {Yojjha} in a° in a° M II.24 read yujjha (of yudh). Yotta {Yotta} (nt.) [Vedic yoktra, cp. Lat. junctor, Gr. zeukth_res yoke-straps; Epic Sk. yoktṛ one who yokes] the tie of the yoke of a plough or cart S I.172=Sn 77; S IV.163, 282; J I.464; II.247 (camma°); IV.82; V.45 (cammay.-varatta), 47; Vism 269; DhA I.205; SnA 137. As dhura-yotta at J I.192; VI.253. Yottaka {Yottaka} (nt.) [yatta+ka] a tie, band, halter, rope J VI.252; Miln 53; Vism 254, 255; DhA III.208. Yodha {Yodha} [cp. Vedic yodha; fr. yudh] a warrior, soldier, fighter, champion Vin I.73 (yodhā yuddh'ābhinandino . . . pabbajjaṃ yāciṃsu); J I.180; Miln 293. -ājīva one who lives by battle or war, a soldier S IV.308=A III.94; A I.284; II.170, 202; III.89 sq. (five kinds); Sn 617, 652; Pug 65, 69. -hatthin a war elephant DhA I.168. Yodhi {Yodhi} =yodhikā J V.420. Yodhikā {Yodhika} (f.) [a var. reading of yūthikā (q. v.)] a special kind of jasmine Vv 354; J IV.440 (yoth°), 442; V.422; VvA 162 (as thalaja and a tree). Yodhin {Yodhin} [=yodha] a warrior; camma° a warrior in cuirass, a certain army grade D I.51; A IV.107. Yodheti {Yodheti} [Caus. of yujjhati] to attack, to fight against (acc.) Dh 40 (yodhetha=pahareyya DhA I.317); J V.183. Yoni {Yoni} (f.) [Vedic yoni] 1. the womb. - 2. origin, way of birth, place of birth, realm of existence; nature, matrix. There are four yonis or ways of being born or generation, viz. aṇḍaja oviparous creation, jalābuja viviparous, saṃsedaja moisture-sprung, opapātika spontaneous: M I.73; D III.230; Miln 146; Vism 552, 557 sq.; cp. VbhA 203 sq. - Freq. in foll. combns: tiracchāna° the class of animals, the brute creation A I.37, 60; V.269; It 92; Pv IV.111; Vism 103, 427; PvA 27, 166; nāga° birth among the Nāgas S III.240 sq. (in ref. to which the 4 kinds of birth, as mentioned above, are also applied); Vism 102 (niraya-nāga-yoni); pasu°=tiracchāna° Pv II.1312; pisāca° world of the Pisācas S I.209; peta° the realm of the Petas PvA 68 (cp. peta). -kamma° K. as origin A III.186. - yoni upaparikkhitabba (=kiṃjātikā etc.) S Pāli Text Society 1259 Pāli-English Dictionary III.42. -ayoni unclean origin Th 1, 219. - 3. thoroughness, knowledge, insight Nett 40. -ayoni superficiality in thought S I.203 ("muddled ways" Mrs. Rh. D.). -yoniso (abl.) "down to its origin or foundation," i. e. thoroughly, orderly, wisely, properly, judiciously S I.203 ("in ordered governance" K.S. I.259); D I.118 (wisely); It 30 (āraddha āsavānaṃ khayāya); Pug 25; Vism 30, 132, 599; PpA 31. Opp. ayoniso disorderly improperly Pug 21; DhA I.327; PvA 113, 278. - Esp. frequent in phrase yoniso manasikāra "fixing one's attention with a purpose or thoroughly," proper attention, "having thorough method in one's thought" (K.S. I.259) Ps I.85 sq.; It 9; J I.116; Miln 32; Nett 8, 40, 50, 127; Vism 132; PvA 63. See also manasikāra. - Opp. ayoniso manasikāra disorderly or distracted attention D III.273; VbhA 148; ThA 79. In BSk. the same phrase: yoniśo manasikāraḥ Divy 488; AvŚ I.122; II.112 (Speyer: "the right & true insight, as the object of consideration really is"). See further on term Dial. III.218 ("systematized attention"); K.S. I.131; II.6 ("radical grasp"). -ja born from the womb Sn 620; Dh 396. -pamukha principal sort of birth D I.54; M I.517. Yobbana {Yobbana} (nf.) [cp. late Vedic & Epic Sk. yauvana, fr. yuvan] youth D I.115; A I.68; III.5, 66, 103; Dh 155, 156; Sn 98, 110, 218; Pv I.76; DhA III.409; PvA 3. -mada pride of youth D III.220; A I.146; III.72; VbhA 466. Pāli Text Society 1260 Pāli-English Dictionary R —R— {R}the letter (or sound) r, used as euphonic consonant to avoid hiatus. The sandhi -r- originates from the final r of nouns in °ir & °ur of the Vedic period. In Pali it is felt as euphonic consonant only, like other sandhi consonants (y for instance) which in the older language were part of the noun itself. Thus r even where it is legitimate in a word may interchange with other sandhi-consonants in the same word, as we find punam-eva and punad-eva besides the original puna-r-eva (=Vedic punar eva). At J I.403 we read "punar āgata," where the C. expls "puna āgata, ra-kāro sandhivasena vutto." Similarly: Sn 81 (vutti-r-esā), 214 (thambho-r.-iva), 625=Dh 401 (āragge-r-iva), 679 (ati-r-iva), 687 (sarada-r-iva), 1134 (haṃsa-r-iva); Vv 6422 (Vajir'āvudho-r-iva); Pv II.87 (puna-r-eva) II.116 (id.); PvA 77 (su-rabhigandha). In the latter cause the r has no historical origin, as little as in the phrase dhir atthu (for *dhig-atthu) Sn 440; J I.59. Raṃsi & Rasmi {Ramsi} {Rasmi} [Vedic raśmi. The form raṃsi is the proper Pali form, originating fr. raśmi through metathesis like amhi for asmi, tamhā for tasmā etc. Cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 502. The form rasmi is a Sanskritism and later] a rein, a ray. - 1. In meaning "rein" only as rasmi, viz. at M I.124; Dh 222; J I.57; IV.149. - 2. In meaning "ray" both raṃsi and rasmi: (a) raṃsi (in poetry) Sn 1016 (vīta°? perhaps pīta°? See note in P.T.S. ed.); Vv 535 (pl. raṃsī=rasmiyo VvA 236); 6327 (sahassa° having a thousand rays;=suriya VvA 268); Sdhp 124. Also in cpd. raṃsi-jāla a blaze of rays J I.89; PvA 154; VvA 12 (°sammujjala), 14 (id.), 166 (id.). - (b) rasmi (in prose, late) DhA I.27 (°ṃ vissajjesi); DhsA 13 (nīla-rasmiyo); VvA 125 (candima-suriya°). Also in cpd. buddha-rasmi the ray of enlightenment, the halo around a Buddha, consisting of 6 colours (chabbaṇṇa) J I.444, 501 (°rasmiyo vissajjento); SnA 132; VvA 207, 234, 323; Mhbv 6, 15, 38. Raṃsika {Ramsika} (adj.) [raṃsi+ka] having rays, radiant, in sahassa° having 1000 rays Vv 645 (=suriya-maṇḍala viya VvA 277). Raṃsimant {Ramsimant} (adj.) [fr. raṃsi] having rays, radiant; n. sg. raṃsimā the sun Vv 812 (=suriya VvA 314). Rakkha {Rakkha} (adj.) (-°) [fr. base rakkh] guarding or to be guarded; - (a) act.: dhamma° guardian of righteousness or truth Miln 344. - (b) pass.: in cpd. dū°, v. l. du° hard to guard DhA I.295. °kathā, s. l. rukkha-°, warding talk ThA 1, in Brethren, 185, cp. note 416. Rakkhaka {Rakkhaka} (adj. n.) [fr. rakkha] 1. guarding, protecting, watching, taking care PvA 7; f. °ikā (dāsī) DhA IV.103 (a servant watching the house). - 2. observing, keeping J I.205 (sīla°). - 3. a cultivator J II.110. - 4. a sentry J I.332. Rakkhati {Rakkhati} [Vedic raksati, rakṣ to Idg. *ark (cp. Lat. arceo etc.) in enlarged form *aleq=Gr. a)le/cw to protect (Alexander!); a)lkh/ strength; Ags. ealgian to protect, Goth. alhs=Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also base *areq in P. aggala. The Dhtp 18 expls rakkh by "pālana"] 1. to protect, shelter, save, preserve Sn 220; J IV.255 (maṃ rakkheyyātha); VI.589 (=pāleti); Pv II.943 (dhanaṃ); Miln 166 (rukkhaṃ), 280 (attānaṃ rakkheyya save himself); PvA 7. - grd. rakkhiya to be protected Mhvs 33, 45. Neg. arakkhiya & arakkheyya (in meaning 3) see separately. - Pass. ppr. rakkhiyamāna J I.140. - 2. to observe, guard, take care of, control (with Pāli Text Society 1261 Pāli-English Dictionary ref. to cittaṃ the heart, and sīlaṃ good character or morals) It 67 (sīlaṃ); DhA I.295 (cittaṃ rakkha, equivalent with cittaṃ dama), 397 (ācāraṃ); J IV.255 (vācaṃ); VvA 59 (sīlāni rakkhi); PvA 66 (sīlaṃ rakkhatha, uposathaṃ karotha). - 3. to keep (a) secret, to put away, to guard against (i. e. to keep away from) Sn 702 (mano-padosaṃ rakkheyya); Miln 170 (vacīduccaritaṃ rakkheyya). - pp. rakkhita. See also parīpāleti & parirakkhati. Rakkhana {Rakkhana} (nt.) [fr. rakkh] 1. keeping, protection, guarding Nett 41; Mhvs 35, 72 (rahassa°-atthāya so that he should keep the secret); PvA 7. - 2. observance, keeping VvA 71 (uposatha-sīla°); PvA 102 (sīla°), 210 (uposatha°). Rakkhanaka (adj.) [fr. rakkhana] observing, keeping; one who observes J I.228 (pañca-sīla°; so read for rakkhānaka). {Rakkhanaka} Rakkhasa {Rakkhasa} [cp. Vedic rakṣa, either fr. rakṣ to injure, or more likely fr. rakṣ to protect or ward off (see details at Macdonell, Vedic Mythology pp. 162-164)] a kind of harmful (nocturnal) demon, usually making the water its haunt and devouring men Th 1, 931; Sn 310 (Asura°); J I.127 (daka°=udaka°), 170 (id.); VI.469 (id.); DhA I.367 (°pariggahita-pokkharaṇī); III.74 (udaka°); Sdhp 189, 313, 366. - f. rakkhasī J III.147 (r. pajā); Mhvs 12, 45 (rudda°, coming out of the ocean). Rakkhā {Rakkha} (f.) [verb-noun fr. rakkh] shelter, protection, care A II.73 (+parittā); Mhvs 25, 3; J I.140 (bahūhi rakkhāhi rakkhiyamāna); PvA 198 (°ṃ saṃvidahati). Often in combQ rakkhā+āvaraṇa (+gutti) shelter & defence, e. g. at Vin II.194; D I.61 (dhammikaṃ r.-v.- guttiṃ saṃvidaheyyāma); M II.101; J IV.292. - Cp. gorakkhā. - Note. rakkhā at J III.144 is an old misreading for rukkhā. Rakkhita {Rakkhita} [pp. of rakkhati] guarded, protected, saved S IV.112 (rakkhitena kāyena, rakkhitāya vācāya etc.); A I.7 (cittaṃ r.); Sn 288 (dhamma°), 315 (gottā°); VvA 72 (mātu°, pitu° etc.); PvA 61, 130. - Note. rakkhitaṃ karoti at Mhvs 28, 43 Childers trsls "take under protection," but Geiger reads rakkhike and trsls "appoint as watchers." -atta one who guards his character S I.154; J I.412; SnA 324. -indriya guarding one's senses Sn 697. -mānasāna guarding one's mind Sn 63 (=gopitamānasāno-rakkhita-citto Nd2 535). Ranga1 {Ranga} [fr. raj1, rajati, to be coloured or to have colour] colour, paint Miln 11 (°palibodha). -kāra dyer Miln 331. -jāta colour M I.385; VbhA 331. -ratta dyed crimson Vin I.185=306. Ranga2 {Ranga} [fr. raj2, irajyati, to straighten, order, direct etc.: see uju. The Dhtp (27) only gives one raj in meaning "gamana"] a stage, theatre, dancing place, playhouse Vv 331; J II.252. rangaṃ karQtQ to play theatre DhA IV.62. -rangamajjha the stage, the theatre, usually in loc. °majjhe, on the stage, S IV.306; J IV.495; DhA III.79; same with °maṇḍale J II.253. later Sk.] to arrange, prepare, compose. The root is defined at Dhtp 546 by "paṭiyattane" (with v. l. car), and given at No. 542 as v. l. of pac in meaning "vitthāre." - pp. racita. Racanā {Racana} (f.) [fr. rac] 1. arrangement (of flowers in a garland) VvA 354. - 2. composition (of a book) Sdhp 619. Pāli Text Society 1262 Pāli-English Dictionary Racita {Racita} [pp. of racati] 1. arranged J V.157 (su° in C. for samocita; v. l. sucarita). - 2. strung (of flowers) Mhvs 34, 54. - Cp. vi°. Racchā {Raccha} (f.) [Sk. rathyā. This the contracted form. The diaeretic forms are rathiyā & rathikā (q.v.)] a carriage road Vin II.194; III.151; IV.271 (=rathiyā); V.205 (raccha-gata); J I.425; V.335; VI.276 (in its relation to vīthi); Dāvs V.48; PvA 24 (koṇa°). Rajaka {Rajaka} [fr. rajati] a dyer (& "washerman" in the same function), more correctly "bleacher." See remarks of Kern's at Toev. II.45 on distinction of washerman & dyer. - D I.51 (in list of occupations); Vin III.45; S II.101=III.152 (in simile; combd with cittakāra, here perhaps "painter"?); S III.131; J V.186; VbhA 331 (in simile). Rajakkha {Rajakkha} (-°) (adj.) [rajo+ending ka, in combn *rajas-ka =rajakkha, like *puraskata=purakkhata. The °ka belongs to the whole cpd.] only in combn with appa° and mahā° i. e. having little (or no) and much defilement (or blemish of character) M I.169; S I.137 (here further combd with °jātika; cp. BSk. alpa-rajaskajātīya MVastu III.322); Vin I.5 (id.); Ps I.121; II.33, 195; Nd1 358; Nd2 235 No. 3 p2; Vbh 341; Miln 263; Vism 205; VbhA 458. Rajakkhatā {Rajakkhata} (f.) [abstr. fr. rajakkha] is Kern's (problematic) proposed reading (Toev. s. v.) for rājakhāda at Sn 831 (rājakhādāya phuṭṭho), which is however unjustified, as the original reading is well-attested and expld in the Niddesa as such. The term as proposed would not occur by itself either (like rajakkha, only -°). Rajata {Rajata} (nt.) [Vedic rajata; see etym. under rajati] silver D I.5 (expld at DA I.78 as a general name for all coins except gold: kahāpaṇas etc.); S I.92; Sn 962 (in simile; expld at Nd1 478 as jātarūpa), J V.50; 416 (hema° gold & silver); Vv 351 (°hema-jāla); DhA II.42 (°paṭṭa silver tablet or salver); IV.105 (°gabbha silver money box or cabinet for silver, alongside of kahāpaṇagabbha and suvaṇṇa°); VbhA 64 (expld as "kahāpaṇa"); PvA 95 (for rūpiya). Rajati {Rajati} [raj & rañj to shine, to be coloured or light (-red); to Idg. *areg to be bright, as in Lat. argus, Gr. a)rgh/s & a)rgo/s light; Sk. arjuna (see ajjuna); to which also rajati silver=Lat. argentum, Gr. a)/rguros; Gallic Argento-ratum (N. of Strassburg); Oir argat.] usually intrs. rajjati (q.v.). As rajitabba (grd.) in meaning "to be bleached" (dhovitabba+) only in meaning "bleach" (as compared with dhovati clean, & vijaṭeti to disentangle, smoothe) Vin III.235 (ppr. fr. pl. dhovantiyo rajantiyo etc.); J I.8 (rajitabba, grd.; dhovitabba+). - Somehow it is difficult to distinguish between the meanings "bleach" and "dye" (cp. rajaka), in some combns with dhovati it clearly means "dye," as at Vin I.50 (forms: rajati, rajitabba, rajiyetha 3 sg. Pot. Med.); Vism 65 (forms: rajitvā, rajitabba, rajituṃ). - Another grd. rajanīya in diff. meaning (see sep.). Caus. rajeti to paint, colour Th 1, 1155 (inf. rajetave: (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 204, 1. a). Caus. also rañjeti (see under rañjati). Med. Pass. rajjati (q. v.). - Caus. II. rajāpeti to cause to be bleached Vin III.206 (dhovāpeyya rajāpeyya ākoṭāpeyya), 235 (dhovapeti r. vijaṭāpeti); J II.197 (ovaṭṭikaṃ sibbāpetvā rajāpetvā). Rajana {Rajana} (nt.) [fr. raj] colouring, dye D I.110 (suddhaṃ vatthaṃ . . . sammadeva rajanaṃ paṭigaṇheyya); Vin I.50=53 II.227; Vin I.286 (6 dyes allowed to the bhikkhus: mūla°, khandha°, taca°, patta°, puppha°, phala°, or made of the root, the trunk, bark, leaf, flower, fruit of trees) Th 1, 965; S II.101 (here either as f. or adj.); J I.220 (washing?). -kamma (the job of) dyeing J Pāli Text Society 1263 Pāli-English Dictionary I.118; Vism 65. -pacana boiling the dye Vism 389 (cp. rajana-pakka Vin. Texts II.49). -bhājana dye-vessel Vin I.286. -sālā colouringworkshop, dyeing-hall Vism 65. Rajani {Rajani} (f.) [fr. raj, cp. rajanīya 2] the night Dāvs I.39; Abhp 69; PvA 205. Rajanīya {Rajaniya} (adj.) [grd. of rajati] of the nature of rajas, i. e. leading to lust, apt to rouse excitement, enticing, lustful. - 1. As Ep. of rūpa (vedanā saððā etc.) S III.79; also at D I.152 sq. (dibbāni rupāni passāmi piya-rūpāni kām'ûpasaṃhitāni rajanīyāni; & the same with saddāni). In another formula (relating to the 5 kāmaguṇā): rūpā (saddā etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kām'ûpasaṃhitā rajanīyā D I.245; M I.85. The expln of this passage at DA I.311 is: r.=rāgajanaka. - The expression rajanīyā dhammā "things (or thoughts) causing excitement" is contrasted with vimocaniyā dh. "that which leads to emancipation" at A II.196. The same takes the places of lobhanīyā dhammā in combn with dosanīyā & mohanīyā dh. at S IV.307; A II.120; III.169. Another pair is mentioned at Nett 18, viz. r. dhammā and pariyuṭṭhāniyā dh. - 2. In diff. connections it means simply "delightful, lovely" and is e. g. an Ep. of the night. So at Pv III.71, where the passage runs "yuvā rajanīye kāmaguṇehi sobhasi": youthful thou shinest with the qualities of enjoyment in the enjoyable (night), which at PvA 205 is expld in a twofold manner viz. first as "ramaṇīyehi rāguppatti-hetu-bhūtehi" (viz. kāmagunehi), referring to a v. l. rajanīyehi, and then as "rajanī ti vā rattīsu, ye ti nipātamattaṃ" and "virocasi rattiyaṃ." Thus rajanī is here taken directly as "night" (cp. Abhp 69). - At Pv IV.62 the passage runs "pamattā rajaniyesu kām'assād'ābhinandhino" i. e. not heeding the enjoyment of the taste of craving at nights; here as m. & not f. - The meaning "lovely" is appld to sounds at Th 1, 1233 (sarena rajanīyena); VvA 37 (r. nigghosa). Rajo, Rajas & Raja {Rajo} {Rajas} {Raja} (nt.) [raj, see rajati & rañjati. Vedic rajaḥ meaning: (a) space, as region of mist & cloud, similar to antarīksa, (b) a kind of (shiny) metal (cp. rajata); see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 55]. A Forms. Both rajo & rajaṃ occur as noun & acc. sg., e. g. rajo at D II.19; Sn 207, 334; Dhs 617; rajaṃ at Sn 275; It 83; once (in verse) rajo occurs as m, viz. Sn 662. The other cases are formed from the a-stem only, e. g. rajassa Sn 406; pl. rajāni Sn 517, 974. In compn we find both forms, viz. (1) rajas either in visarga form rajah, as (a) rajo-, (b) raja- and (c) rajā- (stressed), or in s-form (d) rajas-; (2) raja-, appearing apostrophied as (e) raj-. B Meanings. (1) (lit.) dust, dirt; usually wet, staining dust D II.19 (tiṇa+); Sn 662=PvA 116 (sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṃ khitto); It 83; Dhs 617 (dhūmo+). adj. rāja°: in sa° & a° vāta Vin II.209; Vism 31. The meaning "pollen" [Sk. raja, m.] may be seen in "raja-missakaṃ rasaṃ" at DhA I.375. - 2. (fig.) stain, dirt, defilement, impurity. Thus taken conventionally by the P. commentators as the 3-fold blemish of man's character: rāga, dosa, moha, e. g. Nd1 505; SnA 255; DhA III.485; or as kilesa-raja at SnA 479. - Sn 207 (niketā jāyate rajo), 334, 665 (rajaṃ ākirasi, metaph.), 974 (paðca rajāni loke, viz. the excitement caused by the 5 bāhirāni āyatanāni Nd1 505. Also in stanza rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccati (with dosa & moha the same) Nd1 505=Nd2 590 (slightly diff.)=J I.117=Vism 388, cp. Divy 491 with interesting variation. - adj. raja° in two phrases apagata° VvA 236 & vigata° Nd1 505 ≈ free from defilement. - On raja in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 126. Cp. vi°. - C. Compounds. (a) rajo-: °jalla dust and (wet) dirt, muddy dirt D II.18; Vin III.70; J IV.322; V.241; Miln 133, 195, 258, 410; SnA 248, 291. -jallika living in dirty mud, designation of a class of ascetics M I.281; J I.390. -dhātu "dust-element" (doubtful trsln) D I.54, which DA I.163 explns as "raja-okiṇṇa-ṭṭhānāni," i. e. dusty places. Dial. trsl. "places where dust accumulates," Franke, Dīgha p. 57 as "Staubiges" but rightly sees a deeper, speculative meaning in the expression (Sānkhya doctrine of rajas?). -mala dust & dirt J I.24. -vajalla [this expression is difficult to explain. It may simply be a Pāli Text Society 1264 Pāli-English Dictionary condensed phrase rajo 'va jalla, or a redupl. cpd. rajo+avajalla, which was spelt raj-ovajalla for ava° because of rajo, or represents a contamination of raj-avajalla and raj-ojalla, or it is a metric diaeresis of rajo-jalla] dust and dirt Dh 141 (=kaddama-limpan' ākārena sarīre sannicita-rajo DhA III.77). -haraṇa dirt-taking, cleaning; wet rag, floor-cloth, duster Vin II.291; A IV.376; J I.117; DhA I.245. - (b) raja-: -reṇu dirt and dust J IV.362; -vaḍḍhana indulgence in or increase of defilement Th 2, 343 ("fleshly lusts" trsl.); ThA 240 (=rāga-raj'ādi-saṃvaḍḍhana). (c) rajā-: °patha dusty place, dustiness, dust-hole D I.62, 250; S II.219; DA I.180 (here taken metaphorically: rāga-raj' ādīnaṃ uṭṭhāna-ṭṭhānaṃ). - (d) rajas-: °sira with dusty head Sn 980; J IV.184, 362, 371. See pankadanta. - (e) raj-: -°agga a heap of dust, dirt J V.187 (=rajakkhandha C.); fig.=kilesa Pug 65, 68 (here perhaps nt. of a distorted rajakkha? So Kern, Toev. s. v.). °upavāhana taking away the dust (or dirt) Sn 391, 392. Rajja {Rajja} (nt.) [Sk. rājya, fr. rāj] kingship, royalty, kingdom, empire; reign, throne; (fig.) sovereignty A III.300 (°ṃ kāreti); Sn 114, 553 (°ṃ kāreti to reign); J I.57; 64 (ekarattena tīṇi rajjāni atikkamma; 3 kingdoms); III.170 (°ṃ amaccānaṃ niyyādetvā), 199 (dukkhaseyyaṃ api rajjaṃ pi kāraye); IV.96, 105, 393 (nava rajja new kingship, newly (or lately) crowned king); VI.4 (rajjato me sussitvā maraṇam eva seyyo: death by withering is better than kingship); VvA 314 (=J I.64 as above); PvA 73 sq.; Mhvs 10, 52 (rājā rajjaṃ akārayi). -cakkavatti° rule of a universal king DhA III.191; deva° reign amongst gods KhA 227; padesa° local sovereignty It 15; Kh VIII.12 (cp. KhA 227). -siri-dāyikā (devatā) (goddess) giving success to the empire DhA II.17. -sīma border of the empire Vism 121. Rajjati {Rajjati} [cp. Sk. rajyati, raj or rañj, Med. of rajati] to be excited, attached to (loc.), to find pleasure in S IV.74 (na so rajjati rūpesu; =viratta-citta); Sn 160, 813 (contrasted with virajjati); Ps I.58, 77 sq., 130, 178; Nd1 138; Miln 386 (rajjasi rajanīyesu etc.: in combn with dosa & moha or derivations, representing rāga or lobha, cp. lobhanīya); VbhA 11. - ppr. rajjamāna PvA 3; Pot. rajjeyya Miln 280 (kampeyya+); grd. rajjitabba Miln 386 (rajanīyesu r.; with dussanīyesu and muyhanīyesu; followed by kampitabba); fut. rajjissati DhsA 194; aor. araðji Vin I.36=J I.83 (na yiṭṭhe na hute arañjiṃ). - pp. ratta. Rajjana {Rajjana} (nt.) [fr. rajjati] defilement DA I.195. Cp. muyhana. Rajju {Rajju} (f.) [Vedic rajju, cp. Lat. restis rope, Lith. r&etilde;Zgis wicker, basket] a cord, line, rope S II.128; Vin II.120, 148 (āviðchana°); Nd2 304; J I.464, 483 (fisherman's line); V.173; Mhvs 10, 61; DhA IV.54; VbhA 163; KhA 57; VvA 207; Sdhp 148, 153. -kāra rope-maker Miln 331. gāhaka "rope-holder," (king's) land-surveyor J II.367=DhA IV.88 (see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 97). Rajjuka {Rajjuka} [rajju+ka] 1. a rope, line J I.164 (bandhana°); ThA 257. - 2.=rajjugāhaka, king's land surveyor J II.367. Rañjati {Ranjati} [rañj=raj; see rajati & rajjati - Dhtp 66 & 398 defines raðja=rāge] 1. to colour, dye J I.220. - 2. (=rajjati) to find delight in, to be excited Sn 424 (ettha me r. mano; v. l. BB rajjati). Caus. raðjeti to delight or make glad D III.93 (in etym. of rājā (q. v.). - pp rañjita. - Caus. II. raðjāpeti to cause to be coloured or dyed DhA IV.106 (v. l. raj°). Rañjana {Ranjana} (nt.) [fr. rañjati] delighting, finding pleasure, excitement DhsA 363 (rañjan'aṭṭhena rāgo; v. l. rajano°; perhaps better to be read rajjana°). Pāli Text Society 1265 Pāli-English Dictionary Rañjita {Ranjita} [pp. of rañjeti] coloured, soiled, in raja° affected with stain, defiled J I.117. - See also anu° & pari°. Dhtp 86: "paribhāsane"] to yell, cry; shout (at), scold, revile: not found in the texts. Raṭṭha {Rattha} (nt.) [Vedic rāṣṭra] reign, kingdom, empire; country, realm Sn 46 (expld at Nd2 536 as "raṭṭhañ ca janapadañ ca koṭṭhāgārað ca . . . nagarað ca"), 287, 444, 619; J IV 389 (°ṃ araṭṭhaṃ karoti); PvA 19 (°ṃ kāreti to reign, govern). Pabbata° mountain-kingdom SnA 26; Magadha° the kingdom of Magadha PvA 67. -piṇḍa the countQy's alms-food (°ṃ bhuñjati) Dh 308 (saddhāya dinnaṃ); A I.10; S II.221; M III.127; Th 2, 110; It 43, 90. -vāsin inhabitant of the realm, subject DhA III.481 Raṭṭhaka {Ratthaka} (adj.) [Sk. rāṣṭraka] belonging to the kingdom, royal, sovereign J IV.91 (senāvāhana). - Cp. raṭṭhika. Raṭṭhavant {Ratthavant} (adj.) [raṭṭha+vant] possessing a kingdom or kingship Pv II.611 (°nto khattiyā). Raṭṭhika {Ratthika} [fr. raṭṭha, cp. Sk. rāṣṭrika] 1. one belonging to a kingdom, subject in general, inhabitant J II.241 (brāhmaṇa gahapati-r.-do ārik'ādayo). - 2. an official of the kingdom [op Sk. rāṣṭriya a pretender; also king's brother in-law] A III.76=300 (r. pettanika senāya senāpatika). Raṇa {Rana} [Vedic raṇa, both "enjoyment," and "battle." The Dhtp (115) only knows of ran as a sound-base saddatthā (=Sk. ran2 to tinkle)] Q fight, battle; only in Th 2, 360 (raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ): see discussed below; also late at Mhvs 35, 69 (Subharājaṃ raṇe hantvā). - 2. intoxication, desire, sin, fault. This meaning is the Buddhist development of Vedic raṇa= enjoyment. Various influences have played a part in determining the meaning & its expln in the scholastic terms of the dogmatists and exegetics. It is often expld as pāpa or rāga. The Ṭīkā on DhsA 50 (see Expos. 67) gives the foll. explns (late & speculative): (a)=reṇu, dust or mist of lust etc.; (b) fight, war (against the Paths); (c) pain, anguish & distress. - The trsln (Expos. 67) takes raṇa as "cause of grief," or "harm," hence araṇa "harmless" and saraṇa "harmful" (the latter trsld as "concomitant with war" by Dhs. trsl. of Dhs 1294; and asaraṇa as opp. "not concomitant"; doubtful). At S I.148 (rūpe raṇaṃ disvā) it is almost syn. with raja. Bdhgh. expls this passage (see K.S. 320) as "rūpamhi jāti-jarā-bhanga-sankhātaṃ dosaṃ," trsln (K.S. 186): "discerning canker in visible objects material." The term is not sufficiently cleared yet. At Th 2, 358 we read "(kāmā) appassādā raṇakarā sukkapakkha-visosanā," and v. 360 reads "raṇaṃ karitvā kāmānaṃ." ThA 244 expls v 358 by "rāg'ādi sambandhanato"; v. 360 by "kāmānaṃ raṇaṃ te ca mayā kātabbaṃ ariyamaggaṃ sampahāraṃ katvā." The first is evidently "grief," the second "fight," but the trsln (Sisters 145) gives "stirring strife" for v. 358, and "fight with worldly lusts" for v. 360; whereas Kern, Toev. s. v. raṇakara gives "causing sinful desire" as trsl. The word araṇa (see araṇa2) was regarded as neg. of raṇa in both meanings (1 & 2); thus either "freedom fr. passion" or "not fighting." The trsln of DhsA 50 (Expos. 67) takes it in a slightly diff. sense as "harmless" (i. e. having no grievous causes) At M III.235 araṇa is a quāsi summing up of "adukkha an-upaghāta anupāyāsa etc.," and saraṇa of their positives. Here a meaning like "harmfulness" & "harmlessness" seems to be fitting. Other passages of araṇa see under araṇa. -jaha (raṇañjaha) giving up desires or sin, leaving causes of harmfulness behind. The expression is old and stereotype. It has caused trouble among interpreters: Trenckner would like to read raṇañjaya "victorious in battle" (Notes 83). It is also BSk., e. g. Lal. Vist. 50; AvŚ II.131 (see Speyer's note 3 on this page. He Pāli Text Society 1266 Pāli-English Dictionary justifies trsln "pacifier, peace-maker"). At foll. passages: S I.52 (trsln "quitting corruption"); It 108 (Seidenstücker trsls: "dem Kampfgewühl entronnen"); Miln 21; Nett 54; Sdhp 493, 569. Rata {Rata} [pp. of ramati] delighting in (loc. or -°), intent on, devoted to S IV.117 (dhamme jhāne), 389 sq. (bhava° etc.); Sn 54 (sangaṇika°) 212, 250, 327, 330 (dhamme), 461 (yaññe), 737 (upasame); Mhvs. 1, 44 (mahākāruṇiko Satthā sabba-loka-hite rato); 32, 84 (rato puññe); PvA 3, 12, 19 (°mānasa). Ratana1 {Ratana} (nt.) [cp. Vedic ratna, gift; the BSk. form is ratna (Divy 26) as well as ratana (AvŚ II.199)] 1. (lit.) a gem, jewel VvA 321 (not=ratana2, as Hardy in Index); PvA 53 (nānāvidhāni). The 7 ratanas are enumd under veḷuriya (Miln 267). They are (the precious minerals) suvaṇṇa, rajata, muttā, maṇi, veḷuriya, vajira, pavāḷa. (So at Abhp 490.) These 7 are said to be used in the outfit of a ship to give it more splendour: J II.112. The 7 (unspecified) are mentioned at Th 2, 487 (satta ratanāni vasseyya vuṭṭhimā "all seven kinds of gems"); and at DhA I.274, where it is said of a ratana-maṇḍapa that in it there were raised flags "sattaratana-mayā." On ratana in similes see J.P.T.S. 1909, 127. - 2. (fig.) treasure, gem of (-°) Sn 836 (etādisaṃ r.=dibb'itthiratana SnA 544); Miln 262 (dussa° a very fine garment). - Usually as a set of 7 valuables, belonging to the throne (the empire) of a (world-) king. Thus at D II.16 sq.; of Mahā-Sudassana D II.172 sq. They are enumd singly as follows: the wheel (cakka) D II.172 sq., the elephant (hatthi, called Uposatha) D II.174, 187, 197; the horse (assa, Valāhaka) ibid.; the gem (maṇi) D II.175, 187; the woman (itthi) ibid.; the treasurer (gahapati) D II.176, 188; the adviser (pariṇāyaka) ibid. The same 7 are enumd at D I.89; Sn p. 106; DA I.250; also at J IV.232, where their origins (homes) are given as: cakka° out of Cakkadaha; hatthi from the Uposatha-race; assa° from the clan of Valāhassarāja, maṇi° from Vepulla, and the last 3 without specification. See also remarks on gahapati. Kern, Toev. s. v. ratana suspects the latter to be originally "major domus" (cp. his attributes as "wealthy" at MVastu I.108). As to the exact meaning of pariṇāyaka he is doubtful, which mythical tradition has obscured. - The 7 (moral) ratanas at S II.217 & III.83 are probably the same as are given in detail at Miln 336, viz. the 5: sīla°, samādhi°, paððā°, vimutti°, vimutti-ðāṇadassana (also given under the collective name sīlakkhandha or dhamma-kkhandha), to which are added the 2: paṭisambhidā° & bojjhanga°. These 7 are probably meant at PvA 66, where it is said that Sakka "endowed their house with the 7 jewels" (sattar.-bharitaṃ katvā). - Very frequent is a Triad of Gems (ratana-ttaya), consisting of Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha, or the Doctrine, the Church and the Buddha [cp. BSk. ratna-traya Divy 481], e. g. Mhvs 5, 81; VbhA 284; VvA 123; PvA 1, 49, 141. -ākara a pearl-mine, a mine of precious metals Th 1, 1049; J II.414; VI.459; Dpvs I.18. -kūṭa a jewelled top DhA I.159. -paliveṭhana a wrapper for a gem or jewel Pug 34. -vara the best of gems Sn 683 (=vararatanabhūta SnA 486). -sutta the Suttanta of the (3) Treasures (viz. Dhamma, Sangha, Buddha), representing Sutta Nipāta II.1 (P.T.S. ed. pp. 39-42), mentioned as a parittā at Vism 414 (with 4 others) and at Miln 150 (with 5 others), cp. KhA 63; SnA 201. Ratana2 {Ratana} [most likely=Sk. aratni: see ratani] a linear measure (which Abhp p. 23 gives as equal to 12 angula, or 7 ratanas=1 yaṭṭhi: see Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 335. The same is given by Bdhgh. at VbhA 343: dve vidatthiyo ratanaṃ; satta r. yaṭṭhi) J V.36 (vīsaṃr-sataṃ); VI.401 (°mattaṃ); VvA 321 (so given by Hardy in Index as "measure of length," but to be taken as ratana1, as indicated clearly by context & C.); Miln 282 (satta-patiṭṭhito aṭṭha-ratan'ubbedho nava-ratan' āyāma-pariṇāho pāsādiko dassanīyo Uposatho nāgarājā: alluding to ratana1 2!). Pāli Text Society 1267 Pāli-English Dictionary Ratanaka {Ratanaka} (-°) (adj.) [ratana+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of a gem, or a king's treasure; in phrase aniggata-ratanake "When the treasure has not gone out" Vin IV.160, where the chief queen is meant with "treasure." Ratani {Ratani} [Sk. aratni "elbow" with apocope and diaeresis; given at Halāyudha 2, 381 as "a cubit, or measure from the elbow to the tip of the little finger." The form ratni also occurs in Sk. The etym. is fr. Idg. *ole (to bend), cp. Av. arəpna elbow; Sk. arāla bent; of which enlarged bases *olen in Lat. ulna, ond *oleq in Lat. lacertus, Sk. lakutaḥ=P. laguḷa. See cognates in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus] a cubit Miln 85 (aṭṭha rataniyo). Ratanika {Ratanika} (adj.) [fr. ratana] a ratana in length J I.7 (aḍḍha°); Miln 312 (aṭṭha°). Rati {Rati} (f.) [Classic Sk. rati, fr. ram] love, attachment, pleasure, liking for (loc.), fondness of S I.133 (°ṃ paccanubhavati), 207; III.256; Sn 41 (=anukkhaṇṭhit' adhivacanaṃ Nd2 537), 59 (id.), 270, 642, 956 (=nekkhamma-rati paviveka°, upasama° Nd1 457); J III.277 (kilesa°); DhA IV.225; PvA 77. -arati dislike, aversion S I.7, 54, 128, 180, 197; V.64; Sn 270 (+rati), 642 (id.); Dh 418 (rati+); Th 2, 339; DhsA 193; PvA 64; Sdhp 476. -ratiṃ karoti to delight in, to make love Vism 195 (purisā itthīsu). Ratin {Ratin} (adj.) (-°) [fr. rati] fond of, devoted to, keen on, fostering; f. ratinī J IV.320 (ahiṃsā°). Ratta1 {Ratta} [pp. of raðjati, cp. Sk. rakta] 1. dyed, coloured M I.36 (dūratta-vaṇṇa difficult to dye or badly dyed; MA 167 reads duratta and expls as durañjita-vaṇṇa; opp. suratta ibid.); Sn 287 (nānā-rattehi vatthehi); Vism 415 (°vattha-nivattha, as sign of mourning); DhA IV.226 (°vattha). - 2. red. This is used of a high red colour, more like crimson. Sometimes it comes near a meaning like "shiny, shining, glittering" (as in ratta-suvaṇṇa the glittering gold), cp. etym. & meaning of rajati and rajana. It may also be taken as "bleached" in ratta-kambala. In ratta-phalika (crystal) it approaches the meaning of "white," as also in expln of puṇḍarīka at J V.216 with ratta-paduma "white lotus." - It is most commonly found in foll. combns at foll. passages: Miln 191 (°lohita-candana); Vism 172 (°kambala), 174 (°koraṇḍaka), 191 (°paṭākā); J I.394 (pavāla-ratta-kambala); III.30 (°puppha-dāma); V.37 (°sālivana), 216 (°paduma); 372 (°suvaṇṇa); DhA I.393 (id.), 248 (°kambala); IV.189 (°candanarukkha red-sandal tree); SnA 125 (where paduma is given as "ratta-set'ādivasena"); VvA 4 (°dupaṭṭa), 65 (°suvaṇṇa), 177 (°phalika); PvA 4 (°virala-mālā; garland of red flowers for the convict to be executed, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 104), 157 (°paduma), 191 (°sāli); Mhvs 30, 36 (°kambala); 36, 82 (rattāni akkhīni bloodshot eyes). With the latter cp. cpd. rattakkha "with red eyes" (fr. crying) at PvA 39 (v. l. BB.), and Np. rattakkhin "Red-eye" (Ep. of a Yakkha). - 3. (fig.) excited, infatuated, impassioned S IV.339; Sn 795 (virāga°); It 92 (maccā rattā); Miln 220. Also in combn ratta duṭṭha mūḷha: see Nd2 s. v. chanda; cp. bhava-rāga-ratta. Ratta2 {Ratta} (nt.) & (poet.) rattā (f.) [Epic Sk. rātra; Vedic rātra only in cpd. aho-rātraṃ. Semantically an abstr. formation in collect. meaning "the space of a night's time," hence "interval of time" in general. Otherwise rātri: see under ratti] (rarely) night; (usually) time in general. Occurs only -°, with expressions giving a definite time. Independently (besides cpds. mentioned below) only at one (doubtful) passage, viz. Sn 1071, where BB MSS. read rattamahā for rattaṃ aho, which corresponds to the Vedic phrase aho-rātraṃ (=P. ahorattaṃ). The P.T.S. ed. reads nattaṃ; SnA 593 reads nattaṃ, but expls as rattin-divaṃ, whereas Nd2 538 reads rattaṃ & expls: "rattaṃ vuccati ratti, ahā (sic lege!) ti divaso, rattið ca divað ca." - Pāli Text Society 1268 Pāli-English Dictionary Otherwise only in foll. adv. expressions (meaning either "time" or "night"): instr. eka-rattena in one night J I.64; satta° after one week (lit. a seven-night) Sn 570. - acc. sg. cira-rattaṃ a long time Sn 665; dīgha° id. [cp. BSk. dīrgha-rātraṃ freq.] Sn 22; M I.445; aḍḍha° at "halfnight," i. e. midnight A III.407; pubba-ratt'āpararattaṃ one night after the other (lit. the last one and the next) DhA IV.129. - acc. pl. cira rattāni a long time J V.268. - loc. in var. forms, viz. vassa-ratte in the rainy season J V.38 (Kern, Toev. s. v. gives wrongly III.37, 143; aḍḍha-ratte at midnight PvA 152; aḍḍha- rattāyaṃ at midnight Vv 8116 (=aḍḍharattiyaṃ VvA 315); divā ca ratto ca day & night Vv 315 (=rattiyaṃ VvA 130); cira-rattāya a long time J V.267; Pv I.94. -andhakāra the dark of night, nightly darkness Vin IV.268 (oggate suriye); M I.448. -ûparata abstaining from food at night D I.5 (cp. DA I.77). -ññu of long standing, recognised D I.48 (in phrase: r. cirapabbajito addhagato etc.; expld at DA I.143 as "pabbajjato paṭṭhāya atikkantā bahū rattiyo jānātī ti r."); A II.27 (here the pl. rattaððā, as if fr. sg. ratta-ðða); Sn p. 92 (therā r. cirapabbajitā; the expln at SnA 423 is rather fanciful with the choice of either=ratana-ññu, i. e. knowing the gem of Nibbāna, or=bahu-ratti-vidū, i. e. knowing many nights); ThA 141. A f. abstr. °ððutā "recognition" is found at M I.445 (spelt rataððūtā, but v. l. °utā). -samaye (loc., adv.) at the time of (night) J I.63 (aḍḍha-ratta° at midnight), 264 (id.); IV.74 (vassa° in the rainy season); PvA 216 (aḍḍha°). Ratti {Ratti} (f.) [Vedic rātrī & later Sk. rātri. - Idg *lādh as in Gr. lh/qw=Lat. lateo to hide; Sk rāhu dark demon; also Gr. *lhtw/ (=Lat. Latona) Goddess of night; Mhg. luoder insidiousness; cp. further Gr. lanqa/nw to be hidden, lh/qh oblivion (E. lethargy). - The by-form of ratti is ratta2] night D I.47 (dosinā). gen. sg. ratyā (for *rattiyā) Th 1, 517; Sn 710 (vivasane=rattisamatikkame SnA 496); J VI.491. abl. sg. rattiyā in phrases abhikkantāya r. at the waning of night D II.220; Vin I.26; S I.16; M I.143; & pabhātāya r. when night grew light, i. e. dawn J I.81, 500. instr. pl. rattīsu Vin I.288 (hemantikāsu r.). A loc. ratyā (for *rātryām) and a nom. pl. ratyo (for *rātryaḥ) is given by Geiger, P.Gr. § 583. - Very often combd with and opp. to diva in foll. combns: rattin-diva [cp. BSk. rātrindiva=Gr. nuxqh/meron, AvŚ I.274, 278; II.176; Divy 124] a day & a night (something like our "24 hours"), in phrase dasa rattindivā a decade of n. & d. (i. e. a 10-day week) A V.85 sq.; adverbially satta-rattin-divaṃ a week DhA I.108. As adv. in acc. sg.: rattin-divaṃ night and day A III.57; Sn 507, 1142; It 93; J I.30; or rattiñ ca divañ ca Nd2 538, or rattiṃ opposed to adv. divā by night-by day M I.143; PvA 43. - Other cases as adv.: acc. eka rattiṃ one night J I.62; Pv II.97; PvA 42; taṃ rattiṃ that night Mhvs 4, 38; imaṃ r. this night M I.143; yañ car. . . . yañ car. . . . etasmiṃ antare in between yon night and yon night It 121; rattiṃ at night Miln 42; rattiṃ rattiṃ night after night Mhvs 30, 16. - gen. rattiyā ca divasassa ca by n. & by day S II.95. - loc. rattiyañ by night VvA 130, 315 (aḍḍha° at midnight); PvA 22; and ratto in phrase divā ca ratto ca Sn 223; Th 2, 312; Dh 296; Vv 315; 8432; S I.33. khaya the wane of night J I.19. -cāra (sabba°) allnight wandering S I.201 (trsl. "festival"). cheda interruption of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin II.34 (three such: sahavāsa, vippavāsa, anārocanā). -dhūmāyanā smouldering at night Vism 107 (v. l. dhūp°), combd with divā-pajjalanā, cp. M I.143: ayaṃ vammīko rattiṃ dhūmāyati divā pajjalati. -pariyanta limitation of the probationary period (t. t.) Vin II.59. -bhāga night-time J III.43 (°bhāge); Miln 18 (°bhāgena). -bhojana eating at night M I.473; DA I.77. -samaya night-time, only in loc. aḍḍha-ratti-samaye at midnight VvA 255; PvA 155. Ratha1 [Vedic ratha, Av. rapa, Lat. rota wheel, rotundus ("rotund" & round), .] a two-wheeled carriage, chariot (for riding, driving or fighting S I.33 (ethically); A IV.191 (horse & cart; diff. parts of a ratha); M I.396; Sn 300, 654; Vism 593 (in its compn of akkha, cakka, paðjara, īsā etc.); J III.239 (passaddha° carriage slowing up); Th 2, 229 (caturassaṃ rathaṃ, i. e. a Vimāna); Mhvs 35, 42 (goṇā rathe yuttā); {Ratha} Pāli Text Society 1269 Pāli-English Dictionary VvA 78 (500), 104, 267 (=Vimāna), PvA 74. -assatarī° a chariot drawn by a she-mule Vv 208=438; Pv I.111; J VI.355. - Phussa-ratha state carriage J III.238; VI.30 sq. See under ph. - On ratha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127. -atthara (rathatthara) a rug for a chariot D I.7; Vin I.192; II.163. -anīka array of chariots Vin IV.108. -īsā carriage pole A IV.191. -ûpatthara chariot or carriage cover D I.103; DA I.273. -esabha (ratha+ ṛṣabha, Sk. rathārṣabha) lord of charioteers. Ratha here in meaning of "charioteer"; Childers sees rathin in this cpd.; Trenckner, Notes 59, suggests distortion from rathe śubha. Dhpāla at PvA 163 clearly under- stands it as ratha=charioteer explaining "rathesu usabha-sadiso mahā-ratho ti attho"; as does Bdhgh. at SnA 321 (on Sn 303): "mahā-rathesu khattiyesu akampiy'aṭṭhena usabha-sadiso." - Sn 303-308, 552; Pv II.131; Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 11; 29, 12. -kāra carriagebuilder, chariot-maker, considered as a class of very low social standing, rebirth in which is a punishment (cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 56, 207, 209 sq.) S I.93; Vin IV.9 (as term of abuse, enumd with other low grades: caṇḍāla veṇa nesāda r. pukkusa), 12 (°jāti); M II.152, 183 f.; as kārin at Pv III.113 (expld as cammakārin PvA 175). As Npl. name of one of the 7 Great Lakes in the Himālaya (Rathakāradaha), e. g. at Vism 416; SnA 407. -cakka wheel of a chariot or carriage Vism 238 (in simile, concerning its circumference); PvA 65. -pañjara the body (lit. "cage" or "frame") of a carriage Vv 831 (=rath'ûpattha VvA 326); J II.172; IV.60; DhA I.28. -yuga a chariot yoke J VI.42. -reṇu "chariot-dust," a very minute quantity (as a measure), a mite. Childers compares Sk. trasareṇu a mote of dust, atom. It is said to consist of 36 tajjāri's, and 36 ratha-reṇu's are equal to one likkhā: VbhA 343. -vinīta "led by a chariot," a chariot-drive (Neumann, "Eilpost"), name of the 24th Suttanta of Majjhima (M I.145 sq.), quoted at Vism 93, 671 and SnA 446. -sālā chariot shed DhA III.121. Ratha2 {Ratha} [fr. ram, cp. Sk. ratha] pleasure, joy, delight: see mano°. Rathaka1 {Rathaka} (nt.) [fr. ratha, cp. Sk. rathaka m.] a little carriage, a toy cart D I.6 (cp. DA I.86: khuddakarathaṃ); Vin II.10; III.180; M I.226; Miln 229. Rathaka2 {Rathaka} (adj.) [ratha+ka] having a chariot, neg. a° without a chariot J VI.515. Rathika {Rathika} [fr. ratha] fighter fr. a chariot, charioteer M I.397 (saððāto kusalo rathassa anga-paccangānaṃ); D I.51 (in list of var. occupations, cp. DA I.156); J VI.15 (+patti-kārika), 463 (id.). Rathikā & Rathiyā {Rathika} {Rathiya} (f.) [Vedic rathya belonging to the chariot, later Sk. rathyā road. See also racchā] a carriage-road. - (a) rathikā: Vin II.268; Vism 60; PvA 4, 67. - (b) rathiyā: D I.83; Vin I.237, 344; M II.108; III.163; S I.201; II.128; IV.344. In compn rathiya°, e. g. rathiya-coḷa "street-rag" Vism 62 (expld as rathikāya chaḍḍita-coḷaka). Rada {Rada} at ThA 257 in cpd. "sannivesa-visiṭṭha-rada-visesayutta" is not quite clear ("splitting"?). Radati {Radati} [rad: see etym. at Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rado ("rase"). Given in meaning "vilekhana" at Dhtp 159 & Dhtm 220. Besides this it is given at Dhtm 224 in meaning "bhakkhana"] to scratch Dhtp 159; cp. rada & radana tooth Abhp 261. Randha1 {Randha} [for Sk. raddha, pp. of randhati 2] cooked J V.505; VI.24; Miln 107. Pāli Text Society 1270 Pāli-English Dictionary Randha2 {Randha} [Sk. randhra, fr. randhati 1; the P. form viā *randdha: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 581] opening, cleft, open spot; flaw, defect, weak spot A IV.25; Sn 255, 826 randhamesin looking for somebody's weak spot; cp. Nd1 165 ("virandham° aparandham° khalitam° gaḷitam° vivaramesī ti"); J II.53; III.192; SnA 393 (+vivara); DhA III.376, 377 (°gavesita). Randhaka {Randhaka} (-°) (adj.) [fr. randhati 2] one who cooks, cooking, a cook J IV.431 (bhatta°). Randhati {Randhati} [radh or randh, differentiated in Pāli to 2 meanings & 2 verbs according to Dhtm: "hiṃsāyaṃ" (148), and "pāke" (827). In the former sense given as raṇḍ, in the latter randh. The root is freq. in the Vedas, in meaning 1. It belongs perhaps to Ags. rendan to rend: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s, v. lumbus] to be or make subject to, (intrs.) to be in one's power; (trs.) to harass, oppress, vex, hurt (mostly Caus. randheti=Sk. randhayati). Only in Imper. randhehi J I.332, and in Prohib. mā randhayi J V.121, and pl. mā randhayuṃ Dh 248 (=mā randhantu mā mathantu DhA III.357). See also randha2. - 2. to cook (cp. Sk. randhi & randhana) Miln 107 (bhojanaṃ randheyya). - pp. randha1. Rapati {Rapati} [rap] to chatter, whisper Dhtp 187 ("vacane"); Dhtm 266 ("akkose"). See also lapati. Rabhasa {Rabhasa} [rabh=labh, which see for etym. Cp. also Lat rabies. - Dhtp 205 expls rabh (correctly) by ārambha & Dhtm 301 by rābhassa] wild, terrible, violent D I.91, expld by "bahubhāṇin" at DA I.256. There are several vv. ll. at this passage. Rama {Rama} (-°) (adj.) [fr. ram] delighting, enjoyable; only in cpd. dū° (=duḥ) difficult to enjoy, not fit for pleasures; as nt. absence of enjoyment Dh 87=S V.24; and mano° gladdening the mind (q. v.). Ramaṇa {Ramana} (adj.) [fr. ramati; cp. Sk. ramaṇa] pleasing, charming, delightful DhA II.202 (°ṭṭhāna). Ramaṇaka {Ramanaka} (adj.)=ramaṇa J III.207. Ramaṇīya {Ramaniya} (&°nīya) (adj.) [grd. of ramati] delightful, pleasing, charming, pleasant, beautiful D I.47 (°ṇīyā dosinā ratti, cp. DA I.141); Sn 1013; Mhvs 15, 69 (ṇ); PvA 42, 51 (expln for rucira). As ramaṇeyya at S I.233. Cp. rāmaṇeyya(ka). Ramati {Ramati} [ram; defd by Dhtp 2Q4 & Dhtm 318 by "kīḷāyaṃ"] 1. to enjoy oneself, to delight in; to sport, find amusement in (loc.) S I.179; Vin 197 (ariyo na r. pāpe); Sn 985 (jhāne); Dh 79 (ariya-ppavedite dhamme sadā r. paṇḍito); subj. 1st pl. ramāmase Th 2, 370 (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 126); med. 1st sg. rame J V.363; imper. rama Pv II.1220 (r. deva mayā saha; better with v. l. as ramma); - fut. ramissati PvA 153. - ger. ramma Pv II.1220 (v. l. for rama). grd. ramma & ramanīya (q. v.). - pp. rata. - Caus. I. rameti to give pleasure to, to please, to fondle Th 1, 13; J V.204; VI.3 (pp. ramayamāna); Miln 313. - pp. ramita (q. v.). - Caus. II. ramāpeti to enjoy oneself J VI.114. Pāli Text Society 1271 Pāli-English Dictionary Ramita {Ramita} [pp. of rameti] having enjoyed, enjoying, taking delight in, amusing oneself with (loc. or saha) Sn 709 (vanante r. siyā); Dh 305 (id.=abhirata DhA III.472); Pv II.1221 ('mhi tayā saha). Rambati {Rambati} (& lambati) [lamb] to hang down. Both forms are given with meaning "avasaṃsane" at Dhtp 198 and Dhtm 283. Rambhā {Rambha} (f.) [Sk. rambhā] a plantain or banana tree Abhp 589. Ramma {Ramma} (adj.) [grd. of ramati] enjoyable, charming, beautiful Sn 305; ThA 71 (v. 30); Mhvs 1, 73; 14, 47; Sdhp 248, 512. Rammaka {Rammaka} (adj.) [Sk ramyaka] N. of the month Chaitra J V.63. Raya {Raya} [fr. ri, riṇāti to let loose or flow, which is taken as ray at Dhtp 234, defd as "gamana," and at Dhtm 336 as "gati." The root ri itself is given at Dhtm 351 in meaning "santati," i. e. continuation. - On etym. cp. Vedic retaḥ; Lat. rivus river=Gall, Rēnos "Rhine." See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. rivus] speed, lit. current Abhp 40. See rava1. Rava1 {Rava} [for raya, with v. for y as freq. in Pāli, Dhtm 352: ru "gate"] speed, exceeding swiftness, galloping, in combn with dava running at Vin II.101; IV.4; M I.446 (better reading here dav'atthe rav'atthe for dhāve ravatthe, cp. vv. ll. on p. 567 & Neumann, Mittl. Sammlg. II.672 n. 49). Note. At the Vin passages it refers to speaking & making blunders by overhurrying oneself in speaking. - The Dhtm (No. 871) gives rava as a synonym of rasa (with assāda & sneha). It is not clear what the connection is between those two meanings. Rava2 {Rava} [fr. ru, cp. Vedic rava] loud sound, roar, shout, cry; any noise uttered by animals J II.110; III.277; DhA I.232 (sabba-rava-ññu knowing all sounds of animals); Miln 357 (kāruðða°). See also rāva & ruta. Ravaka {Ravaka} =rava, in go° a cow's bellowing M I.225. Ravaṇa {Ravana} (adj.-nt.) [fr. ravati] roaring, howling, singing, only in cpd. °ghaṭa a certain kind of pitcher, where meaning of ravaṇa is uncertain. Only at identical passages (in illustration) Vism 264=362=KhA 68 (reading peḷā-ghaṭa, but see App. p. 870 ravaṇa°)= VbhA 68 (where v. l. yavana°, with?). Ravati {Ravati} [ru: Idg. *re & *reu, cp. Lat. ravus "raw, hoarse," raucus, rūmor "rumour"; Gr. w)ruo/mai to shout, w)rudo/n roaring, etc.; Dhtp 240: ru "sadde"] to shout, cry, make a (loud) noise Miln 254. - aor. ravi J I.162 (baddha-rāvaṃ ravi); II.110; III.102; PvA 100; arāvi Mhvs 10, 69 (mahā-rāvaṃ); and aravi Mhvs 32, 79. - pp. ravita & ruta. - Cp. abhi°, vi°. Ravi {Ravi} [cp. Sk. ravi] the sun J II.375 (taruṇa°-vaṇṇaratha). -inda "king of the sun," N. of the lotus Dāvs III.37. -haṃsa "sun-swan," N. of a bird J VI.539. Ravita {Ravita} [pp. of ravati] shouted, cried, uttered Miln 178 (sakuṇa-ruta°). Pāli Text Society 1272 Pāli-English Dictionary Rasa1 {Rasa} [Vedic rasa; with Lat. ros "dew," Lith. rasā id., and Av Ranhā N. of a river, to Idg. *eres to flow, as in Sk. arṣati, Gr. a)/yorros (to r(e/w); also Sk. ṛṣabha: see usabha1. - Dhtp 325 defines as "assādane" 629 as "assāda-snehanesu"; Dhtm 451 as "assāde." - The decl. is usually as regular a-stem, but a secondary instr. fr. an s-stem is to be found in rasasā by taste A II.63; J III.328] that which is connected with the sense of taste. The defn given at Vism 447 is as follows: "jivhā-paṭihanana-lakkhaṇo raso, jivhā-viððāṇassa visaya-bhāvo raso, tass'eva gocara-paccupaṭṭhāno, mūla-raso khandha-raso ti ādinā nayena anekavidho," i. e. rasa is physiologically & psychologically peculiar to the tongue (sense-object & sense-perception), and also consists as a manifold object in extractions from roots, trunk etc. (see next). - The conventional encyclopædic defn of rasa at Nd1 240; Nd2 540, Dhs 629 gives taste according to: (a) the 6-fold objective source as mūla-rasa, khandha°, taca°, patta°, puppha°, phala°, or taste (i. e. juice, liquid) of root, trunk, bark, leaf, flower & fruit; and - (b) the 12-fold subjective (physiological) sense-perception as ambila, madhura, tittika, kaṭuka loṇika, khārika, lambila (Miln 56: ambila), kasāva; sādu, asādu, sīta, uṇha, or sour, sweet, bitter, pungent, salt, alkaline, sour, astringent; pleasant, unpleasant, cold & hot. Miln 56 has the foll.: ambila, lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura. - 1. juice [as applied in the Veda to the Soma juice], e.g. in the foll. combns: ucchu° of sugar cane, extract of sugar, cane syrup Vin I.246; VvA 180; patta° & puppha° of leaf & flower Vin I.246; madhura° of honey PvA 119. - 2. taste as (objective) quality, the sense-object of taste (cp. above defns). In the list of the āyatanas, or senses with their complementary sense-objects (sentient and sensed) rasa occupies the 4th place, following upon gandha. It is stated that one tastes (or "senses") taste with the tongue (no reference to palate): jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā (or viððeyya). See also āyatana 3 and rūpa. - M III.55 (jivhā-viññeyya r.), 267; D III.244, 250; Sn 387; Dhs 609; PvA 50 (vaṇṇagandha-rasasampanna bhojana: see below 5). - 3. sense of taste, as quality & personal accomplishment. Thus in the list of senses marking superiority (the 10 ādhipateyyas or ṭhāṇas), similar to rasa as special distinction of the Mahāpurisa (see cpd. ras-agga) S IV.275 =Pv II.958; A IV.242. - 4. object or act of enjoyment, sensual stimulus, material enjoyment, pleasure (usually in pl.) Sn 65 (rasesu gedha, see materialistic exegesis at Nd2 540), 854 (rase na anugijjhati; perhaps better rasesu, as SnA); A III.237 (puriso agga°-parititto: perhaps to No. 2). - 5. flavour and its substance (or substratum), e. g. soup VvA 243 (kakkaṭaka° crabsoup), cp. S V.149, where 8 soup flavours are given (ambila, tittaka, kaṭuka, madhura, khārika, akhārika, loṇika, aloṇika); Pv II.115 (aneka-rasa-vyañjana "with exceptionally flavoured sauce"); J V.459, 465. gorasa "flavour of cow, i. e. produce of cow: see under go. Also metaphorically: "flavour, relish, pleasure": Sn 257 (pariveka°, dhamma-pīṭi°, cp. SnA 299 "assād' aṭṭhena" i. e. tastiness); PvA 287 (vimutti° relish of salvation). So also as attha°, dhamma°, vimutti° Ps II.89. - 6. (in grammar & style) essential property, elegance, brightness; in dramatic art "sentiment" (flavour) (see Childers s. v. naṭya-rasa) Miln 340 (with opamma and lakkhaṇa: perhaps to No. 7); PvA 122 (°rasa as ending in Np. Angīrasa, expld as jutiyā adhivacanaṃ, " i. e. brightness, excellency). - 7. at t. t. in philosophy "essential property" (Expos. 84), combd with lakkhaṇa etc. (cp. Cpd. 13, 213), either kicca° function or sampatti° property DhsA 63, 249; Vism 8, 448; Miln 148. - 8. fine substance, semi-solid semiliquid substance, extract, delicacy, fineness, dust. Thus in paṭhavī° "essence of earth," humus S I.134 (trsln "taste of earth," rather abstract); or rasapaṭhavī earth as dust or in great fineness, "primitive earth" (before taking solid shape) D III.86 sq. (trsl. "savoury earth," not quite clear), opp. to bhūmipappaṭaka; Vism 418; pabbatarasa mountain extract, rock-substance J III.55; suvaṇṇa° gold dust J I.93. - 9. (adj. -°) tasting Vv 1611 (Amatarasā f.=nibbānarasāvinī VvA 85). -agga finest quality (of taste), only in further compn with °aggita (ras-agga-s-aggita) most delicate sense trsln Dial.) D III.167, and °aggin (ras-agga-s-aggin, cp. MVastu II.306: rasa-ras'āgrin) of the best quality (of taste, cp. above 2), said of the Mahāpurisa D II.18= III.144 (cp. trsln Dial. II.15 "his taste is supremely acute"). The Pāli Text Society 1273 Pāli-English Dictionary phrase & its wording are still a little doubtful. Childers gives etym. of rasaggas-aggin as rasaggas-aggin, ggas representing gras to swallow (not otherwise found in Pāli!), and expls the BSk. ras'āgrin as a distortion of the P. form. -añjana a sort of ointment (among 5 kinds), "vitriol" (Rh. D.) Vin I.203. -āda enjoying the objects of taste M III.168. -āyatana the sphere of taste D III.243, 290; Dhs 629, 653, 1195 (insert after gandha°, see Dhs. trsl. 319). -ārammaṇa object of taste Dhs 12, 147, 157. -āsā craving for tastes Dhs 1059. -garuka bent on enjoyment SnA 107. -taṇhā thirst for taste, lust of sensual enjoyment D III.244, 280; J V.293; Dhs 1059; DhA IV.196. -saððā perception of tastes D III.244 (where also °saðcetanā). -haraṇī (f.) [ph. °haraṇiyo, in compn haraṇi°] taste-conductor, taste-receiver; the salivary canals of the mouth or the nerves of sensation; these are in later literature given as numbering 7000, e. g. at J V.293 (khobhetvā phari); DhA I.134 (anuphari); KhA 51 (only as 7!); SnA 107 (paṭhama-kabaḷe mukhe pakkhitta-matte satta rasa-haraṇi-sahassāni amaten' eva phutāni ahesuṃ). Older passages are: Vin II.137; D III.167 (referring to the Mahāpurisa: "sampajjasā r-haranī susaṇṭhitā," trsln: erect taste-bearers planted well [in throat]). Rasa2 {Rasa} (-°) is a dial. form of °dasa ten, and occurs in Classic Pāli only in the numerals for 13 (terasa), 15 (paṇṇa-rasa, pannarasa), 17 (sattarasa) & 18 (aṭṭhārasa, late). The Prk. has gone further: see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 245. Rasaka {Rasaka} [fr. rasa, cp. Classic Sk. rasaka] a cook J V.460, 461, 507. Rasati {Rasati} [ras] to shout, howl J II.407 (vv. ll. rayati, vasati; C. expls as "nadati")=IV.346 (v. l. sarati). Rasatta {Rasatta} (nt.) [fr. rasa] taste, sweetness SnA 299. Rasavatī {Rasavati} (f.) [rasa+vant] "possessing flavours" i. e. a kitchen Vin I.140. Rasāvin {Rasavin} (adj. [fr. rasa] tasting VvA 85 (nibbāna°). Rasīyati {Rasiyati} [Pass.-Demon.-formation fr. rasa] to find taste or satisfaction in (gen.), to delight in, to be pleased A IV.387 (bhāsitassa), 388 (C.: tussati, see p. 470). Rasmi {Rasmi} see raṃsi. Rassa {Rassa} (adj.) [cp. Sk. hrasva: Geiger, P.Gr. § 492. The Prk. forms are rahassa & hassa: Pischel § 354] short (opp. dīgha) D I.193 (dīghā vā r. vā majjhimā ti vā), 223 (in contrast with d.); Sn 633; Dh 409; J I.356; Dhs 617; Vism 272 (def.); DhA IV.184. - Cp. ati°. -ādesa reduction of the determination (here of vowel in ending) J III.489. -sarīra (adj.) dwarfish, stunted J I.356. Rassatta {Rassatta} (nt.) [fr. rassa] shortness, reduction (of vowel) DhsA 149. Rahati [rah, defd at Dhtp 339 & 632 by "cāga," giving up, also at Dhtm 490 by "cāgasmiṃ," 876 by cāga and gata] to leave, desert: see pp. rahita & der. rahas, rahassa. {Rahati} Rahada {Rahada} [Vedic hrada, with diæresis & metathesis *harada >rahada; the other metathetic form of the same hrada is *draha>daha] a (deep) pond, a lake D I.50 (°ṃ iva vippasannaṃ Pāli Text Society 1274 Pāli-English Dictionary udānaṃ); S I.169=183 (dhammo rahado sīla-tittho); Sn 721=Miln 414 (rahado pūro va paṇḍito); It 92 (rahado va nivāto), 114 (r. sa-ummi sāvaṭṭo sagaho); DhA II.152. - As udaka° at D I.74, 84; A III.25 (ubbhid-odako); Pug 47. - On r. in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 127. Rahas & Raho {Rahas} {Raho} (nt.) [Vedic rahas. The Pāli word is restricted to the forms raho and rahā° (=*rahaḥ); a loc. rahasi is mentioned by Childers, but not found in the Canon. - To rahati] lonely place, solitude, loneliness; secrecy, privacy. - 1. raho: occurring only as adv. "secretly, lonely, in secret," either absolutely, e. g. S I.46; Sn 388; Pv II.716 (opp. āvi openly); IV.140 (raho nisinna); Vism 201 (na raho karoti pāpāni: arahaṃ tena vuccati); or in cpds. e. g. °gata being in private, being alone D I.134 (+paṭisallīna); Sn p. 60. See also under paṭisallīna; °gama "secret convention, secret intercourse," fig. a secret adviser J VI.369 (after Kern, not found!); °vāda secret talk M III.230. See also anu°. - 2. rahā°, only in cpd. rahā-bhāva secrecy, in defn of arahant at DA I.146=Vism 201 (rahābhāvena ten'esa arahan ti). See also der. rāhaseyyaka. Note. Hardy's reading yathā rahaṃ at Pv II.923 & PvA 78 is not correct, it should be yath'ārahaṃ (cp. similarly pūj-āraha). In the same sense we would preferably read agg'āsan'ādi-arahānaṃ "of those who merit the first seat etc." at J I.217, although all MSS. have aggāsanādi-rahānaṃ, thus postulating a form raha=araha. Rahassa {Rahassa} (adj. nt.) [Sk. rahasya] secret, private; nt. secrecy, secret Mhvs 35, 64 (vatvā rahassaṃ); instr. rahassena (as adv.) secretly Mhvs 36, 80; acc. rahassaṃ id. Pv IV. 165. -kathā secret speech, whispered words J I.411; II.6. Rahassaka {Rahassaka} (adj.) [fr. rahassa] secret Miln 91 (guyhaṃ na kātabbaṃ na rahassakaṃ). Rahāyati {Rahayati} [Denom. fr. rahas; not corresponding to Sk. rahayati, C. of rahati to cause to leave] to be lonely, to wish to be alone M II.119. Rahita {Rahita} [pp. of rah] 1. lonely, forsaken Th 2, 373 (gantum icchasi rahitaṃ bhiṃsanakaṃ mahāvanaṃ). - 2. deprived of, without (-°) J III.369 (buddhiyā rahitā sattā); DA I.36 (avaṇṇa°); PvA 63 (bhoga°), 67 (ācāra°), 77 (gandha°). Note. samantarahita is to be divided as samantarahita. Rāga {Raga} [cp. Sk. rāga, fr. raj: see rajati] 1. colour, hue; colouring, dye Vin II.107 (anga° "rougeing" the body: bhikkhū angarāgaṃ karonti); ThA 78; SnA 315 (nānāvidha°). - 2 (as t. t. in philosophy & ethics) excitement, passion; seldom by itself, mostly in combn with dosa, & moha, as the three fundamental blemishes of character: passion or lust (uncontrolled excitement), ill-will (anger) and infatuation (bewilderment): see dosa2 & moha; cp. sarāga. These three again appear in manifold combns with similar terms, all giving var. shades of the "craving for existence" or "lust of life" (taṇhā etc.), or all that which is an obstacle to nibbāna. Therefore the giving up of rāga is one of the steps towards attaining the desired goal of emancipation (vimutti). - Some of the combns are e. g. the 3 (r. d. m.)+kilesa; +kodha; very often fourfold r. d. m. with māna, these again with diṭṭhi: see in full Nd2 s. v. rāga (p. 237), cp. below ussada. - Of the many passages illustrating the contrast rāga>nibbāna the foll. may be mentioned: chandarāga vinodanaṃ nibbānapadaṃ accutaṃ Sn 1086; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati amataṃ S V.8; yo rāgakkhayo (etc.): idaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ S IV.251; ye 'dha pajahanti kāmarāgaṃ bhavararāganu-sayað ca pahāya . . . parinibbāna-gatā Vv 5324; kusalo jahati pāpakaṃ . . . rāga dosa-mohakkhayā parinibbuto Ud 85. - Personified, Rāga (v. l. Ragā), Taṇhā & Arati are called the "daughters of Māra" (Māradhītā): Sn 835; DhA III.199; Nd1 181. - Pāli Text Society 1275 Pāli-English Dictionary For further detail of meaning & application see e. g. - (1) with dosa & moha: D I.79, 156; III.107, 108, 132; S I.184; IV.139, 195, 250, 305; V.84, 357 sq.; M II.138 (rasa° the excitement of taste); A I.52, 156 sq., 230 sq.; II.256; III.169, 451 sq.; IV.144; It 56, 57; Vism 421; VbhA 268, 269 (sa° & vīta°). - (2) in other connection: D III.70, 74, 146, 175, 217, 234 (arūpa°), 249 (cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati); S II.231=271 (cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti); III.10; IV.72, 329; V.74 (na rāgaṃ jāneti etc.); A II.149 (tibba-rāga-jātiko rāgajaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti); III.233, 371 (kāmesu vīta°); IV.423 (dhamma°); Sn 2, 74, 139, 270=S I.207 (+dosa); Sn 361, 493, 764, 974, 1046; Dh 349 (tibba°= bahala-rāga DhA IV.68); Ps I.80 sq.; II.37 (rūpa°), 95 (id.); Vbh 145 sq. (=taṇhā), 368 (=kiðcana), 390; Tikp 155, 167; DA I.116. - Opp. virāga. -aggi the fire of passion D III.217; S IV.19; It 92 (r. dahati macce ratte kāmesu mucchite; +dosaggi & mohaggi); J I.61 (°imhi nibbute nibbutaṃ nāma hoti). -ānusaya latent bias of passion (for=dat.) S IV.205 (the 3 anusayas: rāga°, paṭigha°, avijjā°); It 80 (yo subhāya dhātuyā rāgo so padūyati). -ussada conceit of lust, one of the 7 ussadas (r. d. m., māna, diṭṭhi, kilesa, kamma) Nd1 72. -kkhaya the decay (waning) of p. S III.51, 160: IV.142, 250, 261; V.8, 16, 25; VbhA 51 sq. -carita one whose habit is passion, of passionate behaviour Miln 92; Vism 105 sq. (in det.), 114 (+dosa°, moha°), 193; KhA 54 (colour of the blood of his heart, cp. Vism 409) -ṭṭhānīya founded on passion A I.264; AA 32. -patha way of lust, lustfulness, passion, sensuality S IV.70; Sn 370, 476 (with expln "rāgo pi hi duggatīnaṃ pathattā rāgapatho ti vuccati" SnA 410). -rati passionate or lustful delight DhA III.112; -ratta affected with passion S I.136; Sn 795 (as °rāgin, cp. Nd1 100=kāma-guṇesu ratta). Rāgin {Ragin} (-°) [fr. rāga] one who shows passion for, possessed of lust, affected with passion Sn 795 (cp. Nd1 100); S I.136; Vism 193, 194 (with var. characterisations). Rājaka {Rajaka} (adj.) (-°) [rāja+ka, the ending belonging to the whole cpd.] characteristic of the king, king-; in cpds. arājaka without a king J VI.39 (raṭṭhe); sarājaka including the king Tikp 26; f. sarājikā Vin I.209 (parisā). Also in phrase anikkhanta-rājake (loc. abs.) when the king has not gone out Vin IV.160. Rājañña {Rajanna} [fr. rājā, cp, Vedic rājanya] "royalty"; a high courtier, a khattiya (=rājabhogga, cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 100) D I.103 (Pasenadi rājā . . . uggehi vā rājaniyehi vā kaðcid eva mantanaṃ manteyya); DA I.273 (=anabhisittā kumārā, i. e. uncrowned princes); Miln 234; VvA 297 (Pāyāsi r.). Rājatā {Rajata} (f.) [abstr. fr. rājā] state of being a king, kingship, sovereignty J I.119 (anuttaradhamma° being a most righteous king). Rājati {Rajati} [rāj, cp. rajati & rañjati] to shine VvA 134 (=vijjotati). Cp. vi°. Rāja & Rājan {Raja} {Rajan} cp. Vedic rājā, n-stem. To root *reg, as in Lat. rego (to lead, di-rect, cp. in meaning Gr. h(gemw/n): see etym. under uju. Cp. Oir. rī king, Gallic Catu-rīx battle king, Goth reiks=Ohg. rīhhi=rich or Ger. reich. Besides we have *reig in Ags. r&amacremacr;cean= reach; Ger. reichen. - The Dhtp only knows of one root rāj in meaning "ditti" i. e. splendour] king, a ruling potentate. The defn at Vin III.222 is "yo koci rajjaṃ kāreti." The fanciful etym. at D III.93= Vism 419 is "dhammena pare raðjetī ti rājā" i. e. he gladdens others with his righteousness. - At the latter passage the origin of kingly government is given as the third stage in the constitution of a people, the 2 preceding being mahā-sammata (general consent) and khattiya (the land-aristocrats). - Cases. We find 3 systems of cases for the original Sk. forms, viz. the contracted, the diæretic and (in the pl.) a new formation with -ū-. Thus gen. & Pāli Text Society 1276 Pāli-English Dictionary dat. sg. raððo [Sk. rājðaḥ] Vin III.107; IV.157; J II.378; III.5; Vv 744; and rājino Sn 299, 415; Th 2, 463; J IV.495; Mhvs 2, 14; instr. sg. raððā Vin III.43; J V.444; DhA I.164; PvA 22; VbhA 106; and rājinā [Sk. rajða] Mhvs 6, 2; acc. sg. rājānaṃ Vin IV.157; loc. raððe PvA 76; voc. rāja Sn 422, 423. pl. nom. rājāno A I.68; gen. dat. raððaṃ [Sk. rājðaṃ] D II.87; Mhvs 18, 32; and rājūnaṃ Vin I.228; Ud 11; J II.104; III.487; SnA 484; PvA 101, 133; instr. raððāhi A I.279 rājūhi Ud 41; M II.120; J I.179; III.45; Mhvs 5, 80; 8, 21; and rājubhi D II.258. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 921. - 1. rājā is a term of sovereignship. The term rājā as used in Buddhist India does not admit of a uniform interpretation and translation. It is primarily an appellative (or title) of a khattiya, and often the two are used promiscuously. Besides, it has a far wider sphere of meaning than we convey by any trsln like "king" or even "sovereign," or "prince." We find it used as a designation of "king" in the sense of an elected or successory (crowned) monarch, but also in the meaning of a distinguished nobleman, or a local chieftain, or a prince with var. attributes characterizing his position according to special functions. From this we get the foll. scheme: (a) [based on mythological views: the king as representing the deity, cp. deva= king. Note that rājā never takes the place of deva in the meaning king, but that mahārāja is used in voc. equivalent to deva] a world-king, over-lord, a so-called cakkavatti rājā. This is an office (as "Universal King") peculiar to the Mahāpurisa or the (mythol.) "Great Man," who may become either the Saviour of men in the religious sense, a Sammā-sambuddha, or a just Ruler of the earth in the worldly sense, a King of Righteousness. These are the 2 gatis of such a being, as described at var. places of the Canon (e. g. Sn p. 106; Sn 1002, 1003; D III.142; A I.76). His power is absolute, and is described in the standard phrase "c. dhammiko dhamma-rājā cāturanto vijitāvī janapadatthāvariya-ppatto satta-ratana-samannāgato," e. g. D III.59. Dhammapāla gives the dignity of a C. as the first "human sovereign powers" (PvA 117). - The four iddhi's of a C. are given (quite crudely) at M III.176: he is beautiful, lives longer than others, is of a healthier constitution than others, he is beloved by the brahmins and householders. Other qualities: how his remains should be treated=D II.141; deserves a thūpa D II.142 sq.; his four qualities D II.145 (the 4 assemblies of khattiyas, brāhmaṇas, gahapatis & samaṇas are pleased with him). See under cakkavatti & ratana. - In a similar sense the term dhamma-rājā is used as Ep. of the Buddha Sn 554 (rāj'āham asmi dh-.r. anuttaro); J I.262; and a reflection of the higher sphere is seen in the title of politeness (only used in voc.) mahārāja, e. g. Sn 416 (addressed to Bimbisāra) PvA 22 (id.); J VI.515. - (b) [in a larger constitutional state] the crowned (muddhāvasitta) monarch (i. e. khattiya) as the head of the principality or kingdom. The defn of this (general) rājā at Nd2 542 is significant of the idea of a king prevalent in early Buddhist times. It is: "khattiyo muddh'ābhisitto vijita-sangāmo nihata-paccāmitto laddh'adhippāyo paripuṇṇa-koṭthāgāro," i. e. "a crowned noble, victorious in battle, slaying his foes, fulfilling his desires, having his storehouses full." This king is "the top of men" (mukhaṃ manussānaṃ) Vin I.246=Sn 568. Cp. D I.7; Sn 46 (raṭṭhaṃ vijitam pahāya); J V.448 and passim. See also below 3. 4 & 6. - In similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 128; & cp. Vism 152 (r. va saddh'antagato), 336 (wishing to become an artisan). Here belongs the title of the king of the devas (Sakka) "deva-rājā," e. g. DhA III.269, 441; PvA 62. - (c) [in an oligarchic sense] member of a kula of khattiyas, e. g. the kumāras of the Sakiyans and Koliyans are all called rājāno of the rājakulānaṃ in J. V.413 sq., or at least the heads of those kulas. Cp. B. Ind. p. 19. - (d) [in a smaller, autocratic state] a chieftain, prince, ruler; usually (collectively) as a group: rājāno, thus indicating their lesser importance, e. g. A V.22 (kuḍḍa-rājāno raððo cakkavattissa anuyuttā bhavanti: so read for anuyantā); Sn 553 (bhoja° similar to rāja-bhoggā or bhogiyā as given at SnA 453); A II.74 sq. (dhammikā & a°); J IV.495. Similarly at Vin I.228 we find the division into the 3 ranks: mahesakkhā rājāno, majjhimā r., nīcā r. Here also belongs the designation of the 4 lokapālā (or Guardians of the World) at cattāro mahā-rājāno, the mahā° being added for sake of politeness (cp. Note A on mahā), e. g. A IV.242. See also paṭirājā & cp. below 4 c. - (e) A wider Pāli Text Society 1277 Pāli-English Dictionary range of meaning is attached to several sub-divisions (with rājā or without): officials and men who occasionally take the place of the king (royal functionaries), but are by public opinion considered almost equal to the king. Here belongs the defn of what is termed "rājāno" (pl. like d) at Vin III.47, viz. rājā, padesa-rājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā, akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti (i. e. those who have juridical power). See also below 4 b, and °putta, °bhogga [& other cpds.]. - 2. It would fill a separate book, if we were to give a full monograph of kingship in and after the Buddha's time; we therefore content ourselves with a few principal remarks. The office of king was hereditary: kula-santakaṃ rajjaṃ J I.395; II.116; IV.124; but we sometimes read of a king being elected with great pomp: J I.470; PvA 74. He had the political and military power in his hand, also the jurisdiction, although in this he is often represented by the mahāmatta, the active head of the state. His 10 duties are mentioned at several places (see below under °dhammā). Others are mentioned e. g. at D I.135, where it is said he gives food and seed-corn to the farmer, capital to the trader, wages to the people in government service. His qualifications are 8 fold (see D I.137): well-born ("gentleman," khattiya), handsome, wealthy, powerful (with his army), a believer, learned, clever, intelligent. - His wealth is proverbial and is characterized in a stock phrase, which is also used of other ranks, like seṭṭhi's & brāhmaṇa's, viz. "aḍḍha mahaddhana mahābhoga pahūtajātarūpa-rajata pahūta-vitt'ûpakaraṇa pahūtadhana-dhañña paripuṇṇa-kosa-koṭṭhāgāra," e. g. D I.134. For a late description of a king's quality and distinction see Miln 226, 227. - His disciplinary authority is emphasized; he spares no tortures in punishing adversaries or malefactors, esp. the cora (see below 4 c). A summary example of these punishments inflicted on criminals is the long passage illustrating dukkha (bodily pain) at Nd2 304III; cp. M III.163 (here also on a cora). - 3. The king (rājā or khattiya) in the popular opinion, as reflected in language, heads several lists, which have often been taken as enumerating "castes," but which are simply inclusive statements of var. prominent ranks as playing a rôle in the social life of the state, and which were formulated according to diff. occasions. Thus some show a more political, some a more religious aspect. E. g. khattiya amacca brāhmaṇa gahapati D I.136; rājā brāhmaṇa gahapatika A I.68, where another formula has khattiya br. g. A I.66; J I.217; and the foll. with an intermediate "rank" (something like "royalty," "the royal household") between the king and the brahmins: rājā rājaputtā brāhmaṇā gahapatikā negama-jānapadā A II.74 sq.; rājāno rāja-mahāmattā khattiyā br., gah., titthiyā D III.44 (trsln Dialogues too weak "rājas & their officials"); rājā rājabhogga br., gah. Vin III.221. - 4. Var. aspects illustrating the position of the king in relation to other prominent groups of the court or populace: (a) rājā & khattiya. All kings were khattiyas. The kh. is a noble kat)e)coxh/n (cp. Gr. h(gemw/n) as seen fr. defn jāti-khattiya at SnA 453 and var. contexts. Already in the Rig Veda the kṣatriya is a person belonging to a royal family (RV X.109, 3), and rājanya is an Ep. of kṣatriya (see Zimmer, Altindisches Leben 213). -rājā khattiyo muddhāvassito "a crowned king" D I.69; III.61 sq.; Vin IV.160; A I.106 sq.; II.207 (contrasted with brāhmaṇa mahāsāla); III.299 (if lazy, he is not liked by the people); M III.172 sq. (how he becomes a cakkavatti through the appearance of the cakka-ratana). - Without muddhāvasitta: rājāno khattiyā Dh 294=Nett 165. Cp. khattiyā bhoja-rājāno the khattiyas, the (noble or lesser?) kings (as followers of the cakkavatti) Sn 553 (see bhoja). At J VI.515. rājāno corresponds directly to khattiyā on p. 517 (saṭṭhisahassa°); cp. expression khattiya-kula J I.217 as equivalent to rāja-kula. (b) rājā & mahāmatta. The latter occupies the position of "Premier," but is a rank equal to the king, hence often called rājā himself: Vin III.47 where styled "akkhadassa mahāmatta." Otherwise he is always termed rājamahāmatta "royal minister," or "H.R.H. the Premier," e. g. Vin I.172; A I.279; Vin I.228 (also as Magadha-mahāmatta), and called himself a khattiya D III.44. - (c) rājā & cora. A prominent figure in the affairs of State is the "robber-chief" (mahā-cora). The contrast-pair rajāno (so always pl.) & cora is very frequent, and in this connection we have to think of rājāno as either Pāli Text Society 1278 Pāli-English Dictionary smaller kings, knights or royals (royalists), i. e. officers of the kings or "the king's Guards." Thus at J III.34 the C. expln as rāja-purisā. It is here used as a term of warning or frightening "get up, robber, so that the kings (alias „policeman‟) won't catch you": uṭṭhehi cora mā taṃ gahesuṃ rāj āno. Other passages are e. g.: D I.7 (rāja-kathā & corakathā)=Vin I.188; M III.163 (rājāno coraṃ āgucāriṃ gahetvā); A I.68, 154; It 89 (rāj'ābhinīta+cor°); & in sequence rājāno corā dhuttā (as being dangerous to the bhikkhus) at Vin I.150, 161. - 5. On the question of kingship in Ancient India see Zimmer, Altind. Leben pp. 162-175, 212 sq.; Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index II.210 sq.; Fick, Soc. Gl. 63-90; Foy, Die Königl. Gewalt nach den altind. Rechtsbüchern (Leipzig 1895); Rh. Davids, Buddhist India pp. 1-16; Hopkins, E. W., The social and military position of the ruling caste in A. I. in J.A.O.S. 13, 179 sq.; Banerjea, Public Administration in A. I. 1916, pp. 63-93. - 6. Kings mentioned by name [a very limited & casual list only, for detailed refs. see Dict'y of Names]: Ajātasattu; Udena (DhA I.185); Okkāka; Dīghī (of Kosala; Vin I.342); Parantapa (of Kosambī; DhA I.164;) Pasenadi (of Kosala; D I.87, 103; Vin IV.112, 157); Bimbisāra (of Magadha; Vin IV.116 sq.; Sn 419); Bhaddiya; etc. - 7. (fig.) king as sign of distinction ("princeps"), as the lion is called rājā migānaṃ Sn 72; Vism 650; the Himavant is pabbata-rājā A I.152; III.44; and Gotama's horse Kaṇthaka is called assa-rājā J I.62=VvA 314. - Note. The compn form of r